initial commit of ebook 13055HEADmain

6 files changed, 69907 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/old/13055-8.txt b/old/13055-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..82442be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13055-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22473 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of Voyages
+and Travels, Volume IX., by Robert Kerr
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: A General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, Volume IX.
+
+Author: Robert Kerr
+
+Release Date: July 30, 2004 [EBook #13055]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOL. IX. ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS,
+
+ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:
+
+FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF NAVIGATION,
+DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE, BY SEA AND LAND, FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE
+PRESENT TIME.
+
+BY
+
+ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. & F.A.S. EDIN.
+
+ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.
+
+VOL. IX.
+
+MDCCCXXIV. CONTENTS
+
+OF
+
+VOL. IX.
+
+PART II. BOOK III. CONTINUED.
+
+CHAP. X. (_Continued_.)
+
+Early Voyages of the English to India, after the Establishment of the
+East India Company
+
+SECT. XV. (_Continued_)--Eighth Voyage of the English East-India
+Company, in 1611, by Captain John Saris
+
+§5. Further Observations respecting the Moluccas, and the Completion of
+the Voyage to Japan
+
+§6. Arrival at Brando, and some Account of the Habits, Manners, and
+Customs of the Japanese
+
+§7. Journey of Captain Saris to the Court of the Emperor, with his
+Observations there and by the Way
+
+§8. Occurrences at Firando during the Absence of Captain Saris
+
+§9. Continuation of these Occurrences
+
+§10. Conclusion of these
+
+§11. Occurrences at Firando, after the return of Captain Saris
+
+§12. Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence to England
+
+§I3. Intelligence concerning Yedso or Jesso, received from a Japanese at
+Jedo, who had been twice there
+
+§14. Note of Commodities vendible in Japan
+
+§15. Supplementary Notices of Occurrences in Japan, after the departure
+of Captain Saris
+
+SECT. XVI. Ninth Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1612, by Captain
+Edward Marlow
+
+SECT. XVII. Tenth Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1612, written by
+Mr Thomas Best, Chief Commander
+
+§1. Observations during the Voyage from England to Surat
+
+§2. Transactions with the Subjects of the Mogul, Fights with the
+Portuguese, Settlement of a Factory and Departure for Acheen
+
+§3. Occurrences at Acheen in Sumatra
+
+§4. Trade at Tecoo and Passaman, with the Voyage to Bantam, and thence
+to England
+
+SECT. XVIII. Observations made during the foregoing Voyage, by Mr
+Copland, Chaplain, Mr Robert Boner, Master, and Mr Nicholas Whittington,
+Merchant
+
+§1. Notes extracted from the Journal of Mr Copland, Chaplain of the
+Voyage
+
+§2. Notes extracted from the Journal of Mr Robert Boner, who was Master
+of the Dragon
+
+§3. Extract from a Treatise by Mr Nicholas Whittington, who was left as
+Factor in the Mogul Country by Captain Best, containing some of his
+Travels and Adventures
+
+SECT. XIX. Eleventh Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1612, in the
+Salomon
+
+SECT. XX. Twelfth Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1613, by Captain
+Christopher Newport
+
+§1. Observations at St Augustine, Mohelia, and divers Parts of Arabia
+
+§2. Proceedings on the Coast of Persia, and Treachery of the Baloches
+
+§3. Arrival at Diul-ginde, and landing of the Ambassador: Seeking Trade
+there, are crossed by the slanderous Portuguese: Go to Sumatra and
+Bantam; and thence to England
+
+CHAP XI. Continuation of the Early Voyages of the English East India
+Company to India
+
+Introduction
+
+SECT. I. Voyage of Captain Nicholas Downton to India, in 1614
+
+§1. Incidents at Saldanha, Socotora, and Swally; with an Account of the
+Disagreements between the Moguls and Portuguese, and between the Nabob
+and the English
+
+§2. Account of the Forces of the Portuguese, their hostile Attempts and
+Fight with the English, in which they are disgracefully repulsed
+
+§3. Supplies received by the Portuguese, who vainly endeavour to use
+Fire-boats. They seek Peace, which is refused, and depart. Interview
+between the Nabob and Captain Downton, and Departure of the English
+
+SECT. II. Relations by Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, in Supplement to
+preceding Voyage
+
+§1. Continuation of the Voyage from Surat to Bantam, by Captain Thomas
+Elkington
+
+§2. Brief Observations by Mr Edward Dodsworth, who returned to England
+in the Hope
+
+SECT. III. Journey of Richard Steel and John Crowther, from Agimere, in
+India, to Ispahan, in Persia, in the Years 1615, and 1616
+
+SECT. IV. Voyage of Captain Walter Peyton to India, in 1615
+
+§1. Occurrences during the Voyage from England to Surat
+
+§2. Occurrences at Calicut and Sumatra. Miscarriage of the English
+Ships, Abuses of the Dutch, and Factories in India
+
+§3. Brief Notice of the Ports, Cities, and Towns, inhabited by, and
+traded with, by the Portuguese, between the Cape of Good Hope and Japan,
+in the Year 1616
+
+SECT. V. Notes, concerning the Proceedings of the Factory at Cranganore,
+from the Journal of Roger Hawes
+
+SECT. VI. Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Ambassador from James I. to Shah
+Jehanguire, Mogul Emperor of Hindoostan
+
+Introduction
+
+§1. Journey from Surat to the Court of the Mogul, and Entertainment
+there, with some Account of the Customs of the Country
+
+§2. Occurrences in June, July, and August, 1616, from which the
+Character and Dispositions of the Mogul and his Subjects may be observed
+
+§3. Of the Celebration of the King's Birth-day, with other Occurrences,
+in September, 1616
+
+§4. Broils about Abdala Khan, and Khan-Khannan: Ambitious Projects of
+Sultan Churrum to subvert his eldest Brother: Sea-fight with a
+Portuguese Carrack; and various other Occurrences
+
+§5. Continuation of Occurrences at Court, till leaving Agimere, in
+November, 1616
+
+§6. Sir Thomas Roe follows the Progress of the Court, and describes the
+King's Leskar, &c.
+
+§7. A New-year's Gift--Suspicion entertained of the
+English--Dissatisfaction of the Persian Ambassador--English Ships of War
+in the Indian Seas
+
+§8 Asaph Khan and Noormahal protect the English from Hope of
+Gain.--Arrival of Mr Steel.--Danger to the Public from private
+Trade--Stirs about a Fort
+
+SECT. VII. Relation of a Voyage to India in 1616, with Observations
+respecting the Dominions of the Great Mogul, by Mr Edward Terry
+
+§1. Occurrences during the Voyage from England to Surat
+
+§2. Description of the Mogul Empire
+
+§3. Of the People of Hindoostan, and their Manners and Customs
+
+§4. Of the Sects, Opinions, Rites Priests, &c. of the Hindoos; with
+other Observations
+
+SECT. VIII. Journey of Thomas Coryat by Land, from Jerusalem to the
+Court of the Great Mogul
+
+§1. Letter from Agimere to Mr L. Whitaker, in 1615
+
+§2. Do. from Agra to his Mother, in 1616
+
+§3. Some Observations concerning India, by Coryat
+
+SECT. IX. Account of the Wrongs done to the English at Banda by the
+Dutch, in 1617 and 1618
+
+SECT. X. Fifth Voyage of the Joint-stock by the English East India
+Company, in 1617, under the Command of Captain Martin Pring
+
+§1. Occurrences on the Voyage out, and at Surat, Bantam, and Jacatra
+
+§2. Dutch Injustice, and Sea-fight between them and Sir Thomas Dale
+
+§3. Departure for Coromandel, with Occurrences there, and Death of Sir
+Thomas Dale.--Capture of English Ships by the Dutch; and Occurrences at
+Tecoo
+
+§4. News of Peace between the English and Dutch
+
+§5. Voyage of Captain Pring from Bantam to Patania and Japan
+
+§6. Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence to England
+
+SECT. XI. Voyage of the Ann-royal, from Surat to Mokha, in 1618
+
+SECT. XII. Journal of a Voyage to Surat and Jasques in 1620
+
+§1. Voyage from England to Surat
+
+§2. Voyage from Surat towards Jasques
+
+§3. Account of a Sea-fight with the Portuguese
+
+§4. Second Sea-fight with the Portuguese
+
+§5. Sequel of the Voyage
+
+SECT. XIII. Relation of the War of Ormus, and the Capture of that Place
+by the English and Persians, in 1622
+
+SECT. XIV. Account of the Massacre of Amboina, in 1623
+
+SECT. XV. Observations during a Residence in the Island of Chusan, in
+1701, by Dr James Cunningham; with some early Notices respecting China
+
+§1. Voyage to Chusan, and short Notices of that Island
+
+§2. Ancient and modern State of the Country, and coming of the English
+to reside there
+
+§3. Manner of cultivating Tea in Chusan
+
+§4. Of the famous Medicinal Root called H-tchu-u
+
+§5. Removal of Dr Cunningham to Pulo-Condore, with an Account of the
+Rise, Progress, and Ruin of that Factory
+
+§6. Some Account of the Factory at Pulo-Laut, with the Overthrow of that
+Factory, and of the English Trade in Borneo
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+[Illustration: CHART OF
+NORTH EASTERN
+AFRICA]
+
+Published 1st July 1813
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PART II. BOOK III.
+
+(CONTINUED.)
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.--_Continued_.
+
+EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH TO INDIA, AFTER THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE
+EAST INDIA COMPANY.
+
+
+SECTION XV.--_Continued_.
+
+_Eighth Voyage of the English East India Company, in 1611, by Captain
+John Saris_.
+
+§5. _Farther Observations respecting the Moluccas, and the Completion of
+the Voyage to Japan_.
+
+The 10th of April, 1613, the Spanish commandant sent me a message,
+requesting me to stop till the next morning, when he would visit me
+along with the sergeant-major of Ternate, who had arrived with a letter
+from Don Jeronimo de Sylva, allowing them to trade with me for different
+things of which they were in want, and to satisfy me in what I had
+requested; wherefore I resolved to stop a while longer, to see if we
+could do any good. Expecting Don Fernando next day, according to
+promise, and hearing nine guns from their fort, we supposed he was
+coming: But it proved to be for the arrival of the prince of Tidore from
+the wars, who was returned with the heads of 100 Ternatans. His force in
+the expedition in which he had been engaged, consisted of sixty men
+armed with matchlocks, two brass _bases_ and three or four _fowlers_. He
+had over-thrown _Key Chilly Sadang_, the son of the king of Ternate,
+whom the Dutch had brought over from Ternate to prevent the natives of
+Machian from supplying us with cloves. While on his return to Ternate
+after our departure, he was drawn into an ambush by the son of the king
+of Tidore, who lay in wait for the purpose, and slew him, together with
+160 men who were along with him, not one of the whole being spared. The
+prince of Ternate brought home the head of Key Chilly Sadang to his
+wife, who was sister to the slain prince. Key Chilly Sadang in a great
+measure owed this discomfiture to a barrel of powder he had bought from
+us at Machian, as it exploded at the commencement of the rencounter, and
+threw his whole party into confusion. Along with the prince of Ternate,
+one of his younger brothers and the king of Gilolo were both slain.
+Towards evening, the sergeant-major of Ternate, who was also secretary
+of the government, came aboard, and made many compliments, requesting me
+to come to Ternate, where they would do for me every thing in their
+power. I consented to do this the more readily, as Ternate was in my
+way.
+
+I received a message on the 12th from the prince of Tidore, apologising
+for not having yet visited me, and saying that he had a quantity of
+cloves which I might have, for which I thanked him, and requested they
+might be sent soon. They promised to send the cloves before next
+morning; wherefore, to guard against treachery, I kept double watch,
+with match in cock, and every thing in readiness: For this prince of
+Tidore was a most resolute and valiant soldier, and had performed many
+desperate exploits against the Dutch, having shortly before surprised
+one of their ships of war when at anchor not far from where we then lay.
+Before day, a galley, which the Spaniards told us they expected, came
+over from _Batta China_, and were very near us in the dark before we
+were aware. On hailing, they answered us that they were Spaniards and
+our friends, and then made towards the shore in all haste. She was but
+small, having only fourteen oars of a side. We this day found our
+latitude to be 0° 50' N.
+
+We weighed on the 13th with the wind at N. and a current setting to the
+S. In passing the fort we saluted with five guns, which they returned.
+Several Spaniards came off with complimentary messages, and among these
+a messenger from the prince, saying we should have had plenty of cloves
+if we had waited twenty-four hours longer. But we rather suspected that
+some treachery was intended, by means of their gallies, frigates, and
+curracurras, which we thus avoided by our sudden departure. On rounding
+the western point of Tidore, we saw four Dutch ships at anchor before
+their fort of Marieca; one of which, on our appearance, fired a gun,
+which we supposed was to call their people aboard to follow us. We
+steered directly for the Spanish fort on Ternate, and shortened sail on
+coming near, and fired a gun without shot, which was immediately
+answered. They sent us off a soldier of good fashion, but to as little
+purpose as those of Tidore had done. Having little wind, our ship sagged
+in, but we found no anchorage. Having a gale of wind at south in the
+evening, we stood out to sea, but lost as much ground by the current as
+we had gained by the wind. The 14th, with the wind at S.S.W. we steered
+N.N.W. being at noon directly under the equinoctial. We had sight of a
+galley this day, on which we put about to speak with her; but finding
+she went away from us, we shaped our course for Japan.
+
+Before leaving the Moluccas, it may be proper to acquaint the reader
+with some circumstances respecting the trade and state of these islands.
+Through the whole of the Moluccas, a _bahar_ of cloves consists of 200
+_cattees_, the _cattee_ being three pounds five ounces _haberdepoiz_, so
+that the bahar is 662 pounds eight ounces English averdupois weight. For
+this bahar of cloves, the Dutch give fifty dollars, pursuant to what
+they term their perpetual contract; but, for the more readily obtaining
+some loading, I agreed to pay them sixty dollars. This increase of price
+made the natives very desirous of furnishing me, so that I certainly had
+procured a full lading in a month, had not the Dutch overawed the
+natives, imprisoning them, and threatening to put them to death, keeping
+strict guard on all the coasts. Most of these islands produce abundance
+of cloves; and those that are inhabited of any note, yield the following
+quantities, one year with another. Ternate 1000 bahars, Machian 1090,
+Tidore 900, Bachian 300, Moteer 600, Mean 50, Batta China 35; in all
+3975 bahars, or 2,633,437 1/2 English pounds, being 1175 _tons_, twelve
+_cwts._ three _qrs._ and nine and a half _libs._ Every third year is far
+more fruitful than the two former, and is therefore termed the great
+monsoon.
+
+It is lamentable to see the destruction which has been brought upon
+these islands by civil wars, which, as I learnt while there, began and
+continued in the following manner: At the discovery of these islands by
+the Portuguese, they found fierce war subsisting between the kings of
+Ternate and Tidore, to which two all the other islands were either
+subjected, or were confederated, with one or other of them. The
+Portuguese, the better to establish themselves, took no part with
+either, but politically kept friends with both, and fortified themselves
+in the two principal islands of Ternate and Tidore, engrossing the whole
+trade of cloves into their own hands. In this way they domineered till
+the year 1605, when the Dutch dispossessed them by force, and took
+possession for themselves. Yet so weakly did they provide for defending
+the acquisition, that the Spaniards drove them out next year from both
+islands, by a force sent from the Philippine islands, took the king of
+Ternate prisoner, and sent him to the Philippines, and kept both Ternate
+and Tidore for some time in their hands. Since then the Dutch have
+recovered some footing in these, islands, and, at the time of my being
+there, were in possession of the following forts.
+
+On the island of Ternate they have a fort named: _Malayou_, having three
+bulwarks or bastions, _Tolouco_ having two bastions and a round tower,
+and _Tacome_ with four bastions. On Tidore they have a fort called
+_Marieka_, with four bastions. On Machian, _Tufasoa_, the chief town of
+the island, having four large bastions with sixteen pieces of cannon,
+and inhabited by about 1000 natives: At _Nofakia_, another town on that
+island, they have two forts or redoubts, and a third on the top of a
+high hill with five or six guns, which commands the road on the other
+side. Likewise at _Tabalola_, another town in Machian, they have two
+forts with eight cannons, this place being very strongly situated by
+nature. The natives of all these places are under their command. Those
+of _Nofakia_ are not esteemed good soldiers, and are said always to side
+with the strongest; but those of Tabalola, who formerly resided at
+_Cayoa_, are accounted the best soldiers in the Moluccas, being deadly
+enemies to the Portuguese and Spaniards, and as weary now of the Dutch
+dominion. In these fortified stations in Machian, when I was there, the
+Dutch had 120 European soldiers; of whom eighty were at _Tafasoa_,
+thirty at _Nofakia_, and ten at _Tabalola_. The isle of Machian is the
+richest in cloves of all the Molucca islands; and, according to report,
+yields 1800 bahars in the great monsoon. The Dutch have one large fort
+in the island of Bachian, and four redoubts in the isle of Moteer. The
+civil wars have so wasted the population of these islands, that vast
+quantities of cloves perish yearly for want of hands to gather them;
+neither is there any likelihood of peace till one party or the other be
+utterly extirpated.
+
+Leaving them to their wars, I now return to our traffic, and shall shew
+how we traded with the natives, which was mostly by exchanging or
+bartering the cotton cloths of Cambaya and Coromandel for cloves. The
+sorts in request and the prices we obtained being as follows:
+_Candakeens_ of Baroach six _cattees_ of cloves; candakeens of _Papang_,
+which are flat, three cattees; _Selas_, or small _bastas_, seven and
+eight cattees; _Patta chere Malayo_ sixteen cattees; five _cassas_
+twelve cattees; coarse of that kind eight cattees; red _Batellias_, or
+_Tancoulas_, forty-four and forty-eight cattees; _Sarassas chere Malayo_
+forty-eight and fifty cattees; _Sarampouri_ thirty cattees; _Chelles,
+Tapsiels_, and _Matafons_, twenty and twenty-four cattees; white
+_Cassas_, or _Tancoulos_, forty and forty-four cattees; the finest
+_Donjerijus_ twelve, and coarser eight and ten cattees; _Pouti Castella_
+ten cattees; the finest _Ballachios_ thirty cattees; _Pata chere Malayo_
+of two fathoms eight and ten cattees; great _Potas_, or long four
+fathoms, sixteen cattees; white _Parcallas_ twelve cattees; _Salalos
+Ytam_ twelve and fourteen cattees; _Turias_ and _Tape Turias_ one and
+two cattees; _Patola_ of two fathoms, fifty and sixty cattees; those of
+four fathoms and of one fathom at proportional prices; for twenty-eight
+pounds of rice, a dollar; _Sago_, which is a _root_ of which the natives
+make their bread, is sold in bunches, and was worth a quarter of a
+dollar the bunch; velvets, sattins, taffetics, and other silk goods of
+China were much in request. This may suffice for the trade of the
+Moluccas.
+
+Proceeding on our voyage, it was calm all day on the 16th of April, but
+we, had a good breeze at night from the west, when we steered N.N.W. In
+the morning of the 17th, we steered north, with the wind at E. by S. but
+it afterwards became very variable, shifting to all points of the
+compass, and towards night we had sight of land to the northwards. On
+the 18th we had calms, with much rain, and contrary winds at intervals,
+for which reason I resolved to go for the island of _Saiom_, which was
+to the westward, and to remain there and refresh the crew, till the
+change of the monsoon might permit me to proceed on my intended voyage.
+But almost immediately the wind came round to the west, and we stood N.
+and N. by E. On the 19th, with little wind at W. we continued our course
+N. by E. the weather being extremely hot, with much rain. It was quite
+calm in the morning of the 20th, but we had a constant current setting
+us to the eastwards, which indeed had been the case ever since we left
+Ternate. In the afternoon, the wind came round to the northward, a brisk
+gale, and we stood west to stem the current, bearing for a large island
+called _Doy_, where we proposed to rest and refresh.
+
+In the morning of the 21st, we were fairly before that island, near its
+northern extremity, which was a low point stretching southwards. We
+stood in E. by S. with the wind at N. by E. and at noon sent our skiff
+in search of a convenient place for anchoring; but the current set so
+strong to the eastwards, that we were unable to stem it, and could
+merely see at a distance a very large bay, having a great shoal off its
+northern point half a league out to sea, while we had sixty fathoms
+water off the shore upon a bottom of sand. As night approached, we stood
+off till morning; and next day, about sun-set, we came to anchor in the
+large bay, having on standing in fifty-six, thirty-five, twenty-six, and
+twenty-four fathoms water.
+
+I sent some people ashore in the skiff on the 23d, to look out for a
+convenient watering-place, and for a proper situation in which to set up
+a tent to defend our men from the rain when on shore. They accordingly
+found a fit place right over against the ship, and saw many tracks of
+deer and wild swine, but no appearance of any inhabitants. The country
+was full of trees, and, in particular, there were abundance of
+_cokers_,[1] _penang, serie_, and _palmitos_, among which were plenty of
+poultry, pheasants, and wood-cocks. I went ashore along with our
+merchants, and had a tent set up. Our carpenter made several very
+ingenious pitfalls for catching the wild-hogs. We took some fish among
+the rocks with much labour, and got one pheasant and two wood-Pigeons,
+which last were as large in the body as ordinary hens. Some of our
+company staid all night ashore to look for the wild-hogs coming into the
+traps, and some very large ones were seen on the 24th, but none were
+caught. This morning, about half past seven, the moon, being at the
+full, was eclipsed in a more extraordinary manner than any of us had
+ever seen, being three hours and a half obscured before she recovered
+her entire light, _which was very fearful_.
+
+[Footnote 1: Cocoa-nut trees.--E.]
+
+The 25th, our people searching about the woods, brought great store of
+_cokers_ to the ship, together with some fowls, and the heads of the
+palmito trees, which we boiled with our beef, and found them to eat like
+cabbages. The 28th, the company were busily employed in taking in wood
+and water. The skiff was sent out to sound the shoal, and found ten and
+twelve fathoms at the northern point of the bar, near the shoal. All
+this time we had prodigious rain both day and night. The 29th and 30th
+were employed in bringing wood aboard, which we found as good as our
+English billets. The skiff was sent on the 1st of May to sound the
+western point of the bay, where the water was found very deep. On
+landing at that part of the coast our people found the ruins of several
+huts, among which were some brass pans, which shewed the place had been
+lately inhabited, but, as we supposed, the inhabitants had been hunted
+from their houses by the wars.
+
+We set sail on the 12th May, 1613, from this island of _Doy_, being the
+north-eastmost island of _Batta-China_, or Gilolo, in the Moluccas, in
+latitude 2° 35' N.[2] The variation here was 5° 20' easterly. By noon of
+this day we were fourteen leagues N. by E. from the place where we had
+been at anchor for twenty days.[3] The 1st June, passed the tropic of
+Cancer. The 2d, being in lat 25° 44' N. we laid our account with seeing
+the islands of _Dos Reys Magos._[4] Accordingly, about four p.m. we had
+sight of a very low island, and soon afterwards of the high land over
+the low, there being many little islands, to the number of ten or
+eleven, connected by broken grounds and ledges, so that we could not
+discern any passage to the westward. At night we stood off and took in
+our top-sails, and lay close by in our courses till morning. The islands
+stretch from S.W. to N.E. The 3d, we stood in for the land, which
+appeared to us a most pleasant and fertile soil, as much so as any we
+had seen from leaving England, well peopled, and having great store of
+cattle. We proposed to have come to anchor about its north-east point,
+and on sounding, had sixty fathoms. We saw two boats coming off to us,
+and used every means to get speech of them, wishing for a pilot, and
+desiring to know the name of the island, but the wind was so strong that
+we could not get in, wherefore we stood away N.W. and had sight of
+another island bearing N.N.W. for which we steered, and thence descried
+another, N.E. half E. about seven or eight leagues off. Coming under the
+western island, we observed certain rocks about two miles offshore, one
+of which was above water, and the other, to the north, under water, a
+great way without the other, and the sea breaking on it.
+
+[Footnote 2: The latitude in the text, which we have reason to believe
+accurate, as Captain Saris was so long at this place, indicates the
+northern end of the island of _Morty_, east and a little northerly of
+the northern peninsula or leg of Gilolo.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 3: We have omitted in the text the naked journal of daily
+winds, courses, and distances, as tending to no useful information
+whatever.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 4: The indicated latitude, considering the direction of the
+voyage between Morty and Japan, nearly coincides with the small islands
+of Kumi and Matchi, west from the south end of the great Liqueo.--E.]
+
+On the 7th, we supposed ourselves about twenty-eight or thirty leagues
+from _Tonan_.[5] In the morning of the 8th, we had sight of a high round
+island, bearing E. six leagues off, with various other islands, in six
+or seven directions westwards, five or six leagues off.[6] In the
+morning of the 8th we had sight of land bearing N.N.E. and of six great
+islands in a row N.E. from the island we descried the preceding evening;
+and at the northern end of all were many small rocks and hummocks. In a
+bay to the eastwards of these, we saw a high land bearing E. and E. by
+S. and E.S.E. which is the island called _Xima_ in the charts, but named
+_Maihma_ by the natives, while the former island is called _Segue_, or
+_Amaxay_.[7] The 10th, four great fishing-boats came aboard, about five
+tons burden each, having one large sail, like that of a skiff. They had
+each four oars of a side, resting on pins fastened to the gunwales, the
+heads of the pins being let into the middle of the oars, so that they
+hung in just equipoise, saving much labour to the rowers. These people
+make much more speed in rowing than our men, and perform their work
+standing, by which they take up less room. They told us we were just
+before the entrance to _Nangasaki_, which bore N.N.E.; the straits of
+_Arima_ being N.E. by N. and that the high hill we saw yesterday was
+upon the island called _Uszideke_,[8] making the straits of _Arima_, at
+the north end of which is good anchorage, and at the south end is the
+entrance to _Cahinoch_.[9] We agreed with two of the masters of these
+fishing-boats for thirty dollars each, and rice for their food, to pilot
+us to _Firando_, on which agreement their people came aboard our ship,
+and voluntarily performed its duty as readily as any of our own
+mariners. We steered N. by W. the pilots reckoning that we were thirty
+leagues from Firando. One of the boats which came to us at this time
+belonged to the Portuguese who dwelt at Nangasaki, being Christian
+converts, and thought our ship had been the Portuguese ship from Makao;
+but, on finding we were not, made all haste back again to advise them,
+refusing every entreaty to remain with us.
+
+[Footnote 5: The island of Tanao-sima is probably here meant, being the
+most southerly of the Japanese islands. It may be proper to remark, that
+the termination _sima_, in the names of islands belonging to Japan,
+obviously means _island_, like the prefix _pula_ in the names of islands
+in the Malay Archipelago.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 6: There is a considerable cluster of small islands south from
+Tanaosima, between the latitudes of 29° 30' and 30° N.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 7: Xima, or sima, only means island. Perhaps Mashama may be
+that named Kaba-sima in modern maps, and Amaxay may possibly be Amacusa,
+these islands being in the way towards Nangasaki.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 8: This seems the same island called before Amaxay, or
+Amacusa.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 9: Cochinotzu is the name of a town on the south-west
+peninsula of the island of Kiusiu; but Cochinoch in the text seems the
+sound leading to Nangasaki, and the straits of Arima appear to be the
+passage between the north side of Amacusa and Kiusiu.--E.]
+
+§6. _Arrival at Firando, and some Account of the Habits, Manners, and
+Customs of the Japanese_.
+
+We came to anchor about half a league short of Firando, about three
+p.m. of the 11th June, 1613, the tide being then so much spent that we
+could not get nearer. I was soon afterwards visited by _Foyne Sama_, the
+old king of Firando, accompanied by his nephew, _Tone Sama_, who
+governed the island under the old king.[10] They were attended by forty
+boats or gallies, some having ten, and others fifteen oars of a side. On
+coming near our ship, the king ordered all the boats to fall astern,
+except the two which carried him and his nephew, who only came on deck,
+both dressed in silk gowns, under which were linen shirts and breeches.
+Each of them wore two _cattans_, or Japanese swords, one of which was
+half a yard long in the blade, and the other only a quarter of a yard.
+They wore neither turbans nor hats, the fore part of their heads being
+shaven to the crowns, and the rest of their hair very long, and gathered
+into a knot behind. The king seemed about seventy-two years of age, and
+his nephew, or grandchild, twenty-two, who governed under him, and each
+was attended by an officer, who commanded over their slaves as they
+directed.
+
+[Footnote 10: As the Portuguese, who first visited Japan, chose to
+designate the sovereign of that country by the title of emperor, they
+denominated all its provinces kingdoms, and their governors kings.--E.]
+
+Their manner of salutation was thus: On coming into the presence of him
+they mean to salute, they put off their shoes, so that they are
+barefooted, for they wear no stockings. Then putting their right hand
+within the left, they hold them down to their knees, bending their
+bodies, then wag or swing their joined hands a little to and fro, making
+some small steps to one side from the person they salute, and say _augh!
+augh!_ I immediately led them into my cabin, where I had prepared a
+banquet for them, and entertained them with a good concert of music, to
+their great delight. I then delivered the letters from our king to the
+king of Firando, which he received very joyfully, saying he would not
+open it till _Ange_ came, who would interpret it. _Ange_, in their
+language, signifies a pilot, and by this name was meant one _William
+Adams_, an Englishman. He had come this way in a Dutch ship from the
+South Seas, about twelve years ago; and, in consequence of a mutiny
+among the people, the ship was seized by the emperor, and Adams had
+remained in the country ever since. After staying about an hour and a
+half, the king took his leave, bidding us welcome to the country, and
+promising me kind entertainment.
+
+He was no sooner ashore than all his nobility came to see the ship,
+attended by a vast number of soldiers, every person of any note bringing
+a present; some of venison, some of wild-fowl, and some of wild-boar,
+the largest and fattest we had ever seen, while others brought us fish,
+fruits, and various things. They greatly admired the ship, and seemed
+never to be satisfied with looking at her; and as we were much pestered
+by the number of these visitors, I sent to the king, requesting he would
+order them to remove, to prevent any inconveniences that might arise.
+The king immediately sent a principal officer of his guard, with orders
+to remain aboard, to see that no injury was done to us, and ordered a
+proclamation to that effect to be made in the town. The same night,
+Hendrik Brewer, who was chief of the Dutch factory at Firando, came to
+visit me, or rather to see what had passed between the king and us. I
+wrote this day to Mr Adams, who was then at _Jedo_,[11] nearly 300
+leagues from Firando, to inform him of our arrival. King _Foyne_ sent my
+letter next day by his admiral, to _Osackay_ (_Osaka_,) the nearest port
+of importance on the principal island, whence it would go by post to
+Jedo, and he sent notice to the emperor by the same conveyance, of our
+arrival and purposes.
+
+[Footnote 11: Called _Edoo_, in Purchas.]
+
+In the morning of the 12th, we had fish brought to us in abundance, and
+as cheap as we could desire. We this day weighed to make sail for the
+road; and, on this occasion, the king sent at the least threescore large
+boats, or gallies, well manned, to tow us into the harbour. On seeing
+this multitude of boats, I was in some doubts of their intentions, and
+sent my skiff to warn them not to come near the ship. But the king was
+in the headmost boat, and observing my suspicions, waved his
+handkerchief for all the boats to wait, and came aboard himself, telling
+me that he had ordered all these boats to assist in bringing me round a
+point which was somewhat dangerous, on account of the strength of the
+tide, and could not be stemmed by even a good breeze of wind, and if the
+ship fell into the eddy, we should be driven upon the rocks. Having got
+this explanation, we sent our hawsers to the Japanese boats, on which
+they fell stiffly to work, and towed us into the harbour. In the mean
+time, the king breakfasted with me, and when I proposed rewarding his
+people for towing me in, after we were at anchor, he would not allow
+them to accept of any thing.
+
+We now anchored in five fathoms, on soft ooze, so near the shore that we
+could have talked with the people in their houses. We saluted the town
+with nine guns, but had no return, as there are no cannon at this place,
+neither any fortifications, except barricades for small arms. Several
+nobles came off to bid me welcome, two of whom were men of high rank,
+named _Nobusane_ and _Simmadone_. I entertained them well, and, at
+their departing, they used extraordinary state, one remaining on board till
+the other was landed, their children and chief followers using the like
+ceremony. There came continually such numbers of people on board, both
+men and women, that we were not able to go about the decks. The ship
+likewise was quite surrounded by boats full of people, greatly admiring
+her head and stern. I permitted several women of the better sort to come
+into my cabin, where the picture of Venus and Cupid was hung, rather
+wantonly executed. Some of these ladies, thinking it to be Our Lady and
+her blessed Son, fell down to worship with appearance of much devotion,
+whispering our men, so that their companions might not hear, that they
+were Christians, having been converted by the Portuguese jesuits.
+
+The king came aboard again, bringing four principal women along with
+him, who were attired in silken gowns, overlapped in front, and girt
+round them. Their legs were bare, except that they had half buskins
+bound about their insteps with silk ribbon. Their hair was very black
+and long, tied up in a knot on the crown, in a very comely manner, no
+part of their heads being shaven, like the men. They had comely faces,
+hands, and feet, with clear white complexions, but wanting colour, which
+they supplied by art. Their stature was low, but they were very fat, and
+their behaviour was very courteous, and not ignorant of the respect due
+according to their fashions. The king requested that no person might
+remain in the cabin except myself and my linguist, who was a native of
+Japan, brought along with me from Bantam. He was well skilled in the
+Malay language, in which he explained to me what was said by the king,
+in Japanese. The women were at first somewhat bashful, but the king
+desired them to be frolicsome. They sung several songs, and played on
+certain instruments, one of which resembled our lute, being bellied like
+it, but longer in the neck, and fretted like ours, but had only four gut
+strings. They fingered with their left hands, as is done with us, and
+very nimbly; but they struck the strings with a piece of ivory held in
+the right hand, as we are in use to play with a quill on the citern.
+They seemed to delight much in their music, beating time with their
+hands, and both playing and singing by book, prickt on lines and spaces
+much like our own. I feasted them, and gave them several English
+commodities, and after two hours stay, they returned on shore. At this
+interview I requested the king to let us have a house in the town, which
+he readily granted, taking two of my merchants ashore with him, to whom
+he pointed out three or four houses, desiring them to make their choice,
+paying the owners as we could agree.
+
+On the 13th I went ashore, attended by the merchants and principal
+officers, and delivered our presents to the king, to the value of about
+£140, which he received with great satisfaction, feasting me and my
+whole company with several kinds of _powdered_ wild-fowl and fruits.
+He called for a standing cup, which was one of the presents, and ordering
+it to be filled with their country wine, which is distilled from rice,
+and as strong as brandy, he told me he would drink it all off to the
+health of the king of England, which he did, though it held about a pint
+and a half, in which he was followed by myself and all his nobles. As
+only myself and the Cape merchant sat in the same room with the king,
+all the rest of my company being in another room, he commanded his
+secretary to go and see that they all pledged the health. The king and
+his nobles sat at meat cross-legged, on mats, after the fashion of the
+Turks, the mats being richly edged with cloths of gold, velvet, sattin,
+or damask. The 14th and 15th were spent in giving presents; and on the
+16th I agreed with _Audassee_, captain of the Chinese quarter, for
+his house, paying ninety-five dollars for the monsoon of six months; he to
+put it into repair, and to furnish all the rooms conveniently with mats,
+according to the fashion of the country, and we to keep it in repair,
+with leave to alter as we thought fit.
+
+This day our ship was so pestered with numbers of people coming on
+board, that I had to send to the king for a guardian to clear them out,
+many things being stolen, though I more suspected my own people than the
+natives. There came this day a Dutchman in one of the country boats, who
+had been at the island of _Mashma_, where he sold good store of pepper,
+broad-cloth, and elephants teeth, though he would not acknowledge to us
+that he had sold any thing, or brought any thing back with him in the
+boat; but the Japanese boatmen told us he had sold a great quantity of
+goods at a mart in that place, and had brought his returns in bars of
+silver, which he kept very secret.
+
+The 21st the old king came aboard again, bringing with him several women
+to make a frolic. These women were actors of comedies, who go about from
+island to island, and from town, to town, to act plays, which are mostly
+about love and war, and have several shifts of apparel for the better
+grace of their interludes. These women were the slaves of a man who
+fixes a price that every man must pay who has to do with them. He must
+not take a higher price than that affixed, on pain of death, if
+complained against. At the first, he is allowed to fix upon each woman
+what price he pleases, which price he can never afterwards raise, but
+may lower it as he likes; neither doth the party bargain with the women
+for their favours, but with the master. Even the highest of the Japanese
+nobility, when travelling, hold it no disgrace to send for these panders
+to their inn, and bargain with them for their girls, either to fill out
+their drink for them at table, as is the custom with all men of rank, or
+for other uses. When any of these panders die, although in their life
+they were received into the best company, they are now held unworthy to
+rest among the worst. A straw rope is put round their neck, and they are
+dragged through the streets into the fields, and cast on a dung-hill to
+be devoured by dogs and fowls.
+
+The 23d, there arrived two Chinese junks at Nangasaki, laden with sugar.
+By them it was understood that the emperor of China had lately put, to
+death about 5000 persons for trading out of the country contrary to his
+edict. Yet the hope of profit had induced these men to hazard their
+lives and properties, having bribed the _Pungavas_, or officers of
+the sea-ports, who had succeeded those recently put to death for the same
+offence.
+
+The 29th, a _soma_, or junk, belonging to the Dutch, arrived at
+Nangasaki from Siam, laden with Brazil wood and skins of all kinds. On
+their arrival, they were said to be Englishmen, as, before our coming,
+the Dutch used generally to pass by the name of English, our nation
+being long known by report in Japan, but much scandalised by the
+Portuguese jesuits, who represent us as pirates and rovers on the sea.
+In consequence of this report, the Japanese have a song, which they call
+_English Crofonio_, shewing how the English take the Spanish and
+Portuguese ships, which, while singing, they act likewise with catans,
+and so scare their children, as the French used to do theirs with the
+name of Lord Talbot.
+
+The 1st July two of our company happened to quarrel, and had nearly gone
+out to the field to fight, which had greatly endangered us all, as it is
+the law here, that whoever draws a weapon in anger, although no harm be
+done, is presently cut in pieces; and if they do even but small hurt,
+not only they are so executed themselves, but all their relations are
+put to death. The 2d, I went ashore to keep house at Firando, my
+household consisting of twenty-six persons. At our first coming, we
+found that the Dutch sold broad-cloths of £15 or 16 a-cloth, for forty
+dollars, or £8 sterling the _mat_, which is a measure of two yards
+and a quarter. Being desirous to keep up the price of our cloth, and hearing
+that the Dutch had a great quantity, I had a conference with Brower, the
+chief of their factory, proposing that we should mutually fix prices
+upon such cloths as we both had, and neither of us, in any respect, sell
+below the prices agreed upon; for performance of which, I offered to
+enter into mutual bonds. In the morning, he seemed to approve of this
+proposal, but ere night he sent me word that he disliked it, alleging
+that he had no authority from his masters to make any such agreement.
+Next morning he shipped away a great store of cloth to different
+islands, rating them at low prices, as at twenty, eighteen, and sixteen
+dollars the _mat_, that he might the more speedily sell off his own, and
+glut the market before ours came forwards.
+
+Pepper, ungarbled, which cost 1 3/4 dollars at Bantam the sack, was
+worth at our coming ten _tayes_ the _pecul_, which is 100
+_cattea_ of Japan, or 130 pounds English. A _taye_ is worth
+five shillings sterling. A rial of eight, or Spanish dollar, is worth
+there in ordinary payment only seven _mas_, or three shillings and
+sixpence sterling, one mas being equal to a single rial. The _pecul_
+of tin was worth thirty _tayes_; the _pecul_ of elephants teeth
+eighty _tayes_: Cast iron six tayes the pecul: Gunpowder twenty-three
+tayes the pecul: Socotrine aloes the cattee, six _tayes_: Fowling-pieces
+twenty tayes each: Calicos and such little commodities, of Guzerat or
+Coromandel, were at various prices, according to their qualities.
+
+On the 7th of July the king of the Gotto islands, which are not far from
+Firando to the S.W. came upon a visit to king _Foyne_, saying he had
+heard of an excellent English ship being arrived in his dominions, which
+he greatly desired to go aboard of. King Foyne requested of me that this
+might be allowed, the king of Gotto being an especial friend of his;
+wherefore he was banqueted on board, and several cannon were fired at
+his departure, which he was much pleased with, and told me he would be
+glad to see some of our nation at his islands, where they should meet a
+hearty welcome. Three Japanese, two men and a woman, were put to death
+for the following cause: The woman, in the absence of her husband, had
+made separate assignations with both the men. He who was appointed
+latest, not knowing of the other, and weary of waiting, came too soon,
+and enraged at finding her engaged with another man, drew his _cattan_
+and wounded both very severely, almost cutting the man's back in two.
+Yet the wounded man, getting hold of his _cattan_, wounded the
+aggressor. This fray alarming the street, word was sent to king Foyne
+and to know his pleasure, who accordingly gave orders to cut off all
+their heads. After their execution, all who thought proper, as many did,
+came to try the temper of their weapons upon the dead bodies, which they
+soon hewed in small pieces, which were left to be devoured by the
+ravens.
+
+The 10th three others were executed in the same way with the former,
+being beheaded and afterwards cut in pieces, for stealing a woman long
+since from Firando and selling her at Nangasaki. When any are to be
+executed, they are led out of town in the following manner: First there
+go two men, one having a mattock and the other a shovel, to dig the
+grave, if that be allowed to the criminal. Then a third person carrying
+a small table or board, on which is written the crime of the party,
+which is afterwards affixed to a post on the grave in which he is
+buried. Next comes the party to be executed, having his hands bound
+behind him by a silken cord, and having a small paper banner, much like
+one of our wind-vanes, on which the offence is written. The criminal is
+followed by the executioner, having his _cattan_ or Japanese sword by
+his side, and holding in his hand the cord with which the hands of the
+criminal are bound. On each hand of the executioner walks a soldier
+armed with a pike, the head of which rests on the criminal's shoulder,
+to intimidate him from attempting to escape. In this manner I saw one
+man led out to execution, who went forwards with a most wonderful
+resolution, and apparently without fear of death, such as I had never
+seen the like in Europe. He was condemned for stealing a sack of rice
+from a neighbour, whose house was burning.
+
+The 11th there arrived three Chinese junks at Nangasaki, laden with
+silks. The 19th the old king begged a piece of _poldavy_ from me; and
+though a king, and famed as the bravest soldier in Japan for his conduct
+in the wars of Corea, he had it made into coats, which he wore next his
+skin, some part of it being made into handkerchiefs. The 20th, a _soma_
+or junk arrived at Nangasaki from Cochinchina, laden with silk and
+benzoin, which last was exceedingly clear and good. The 29th Mr Adams
+arrived at Firando, having been seventeen days in coming from Sorongo,
+while we had waited no less than forty-eight days for his coming.[12]
+After receiving him in a friendly manner, I conferred with him in the
+presence of our merchants, as to our hopes of trade in this country. He
+said the trade was variable, but doubted not we might do as well as the
+Dutch, and gave great commendations of the country, to which he seemed
+to be much attached.
+
+[Footnote 12: The first messenger, for not making haste with the letters
+to Adams, was banished by the angry king.--_Purch._]
+
+On the morning of the 30th, an officer of the young king was cut to
+pieces in the street, as it was thought for being too intimate with the
+young king's mother; and one of the officer's slaves was slain along
+with him, for endeavouring to defend his master. This day there came two
+Spaniards to Firando, who were acquainted with Mr Adams, to request a
+passage in our ship for Bantam. They had belonged to the crew of a
+Spanish ship, sent from New Spain about a year before to make
+discoveries to the north of Japan, and coming to Jedo to wait the
+monsoon which serves for going to the northward, which begins in the end
+of May, the crew mutinied against their captain, and every one went
+away whither he listed, leaving the ship entirely unmanned. On receiving
+this account of the Spaniards, I thought it best not to let them enter
+my ship.
+
+On the 3d of August, king _Foyne_ sent to know what was the size of the
+present from our king to the emperor, as also the number of people I
+meant to take along with me to the court, that he might provide
+accordingly for my going up in good order, in regard to barks, horses,
+and palanquins. This day likewise I caused the presents to be assorted,
+for the emperor and those of chief consideration about him, of which
+presents respectively the values were as follow:--
+
+   For _Ogoshosama_, the emperor, ---------------------£87  7  6
+       _Shongosama_, the emperor's son, ----------------43 15  0
+       _Codskedona_, the emperor's secretary, ----------15 17  6
+        _Saddadona_, secretary to the emperor's son,----14  3  4
+        _Iccocora Juga_, judge of _Meaco_, ---------4 10  6
+        _Fongodona_, admiral of _Orungo_,-----------3 10  0
+        _Goto Shozavero_, the mint-master, -------------11  0  0
+                                                             ________
+                                                   Total,  £180  3 10
+
+
+§7. _Journey of Captain Saris to the Court of the Emperor, with his
+Observations there and by the Way_.
+
+The 7th August, 1613, being furnished by king _Foyne_ with a proper
+galley, and having taken leave of him, I went aboard ship to put all
+things in order for my departure.[13] This galley rowed twenty-five-oars
+of a side, and was manned by sixty Japanese; and I fitted her out
+handsomely in our fashion, with waste cloths, ensigns, and all other
+necessaries. Leaving instructions with the master of the Clove and the
+cape merchant, for the proper regulation of the ship and the house on
+shore during my absence, and taking with me ten Englishmen and nine
+other attendants, as the before-mentioned sixty were only to take charge
+of the galley, I departed from Firando on my voyage and journey for the
+court of the Japanese emperor. We rowed through among various islands,
+all or most of which were well inhabited, and had several handsome towns
+upon them, one of which, called _Facata_, has a very strong castle built
+of freestone, but without any cannon or garrison. The ditch of this
+castle is five fathoms deep and ten broad, all round about the walls,
+and is passed by means of a drawbridge, and the whole is kept in good
+repair. The tide and wind were here so strong against us that we could
+not proceed, for which reason I landed and dined at this town, which was
+very well built, and seemed to be as large as London is within the
+walls. All its streets are so even, that one may see from one end to the
+other. This place is exceedingly populous, and the people very civil and
+courteous; only that at our first landing, and indeed at all places to
+which we came in the whole country, the children and low idle people
+used to gather about and follow us a long way, calling _coré, coré,
+cocoré, Waré_ that is to say, _You Coreans with false hearts_; all the
+while whooping and hallooing, and making such a noise that we could not
+hear ourselves speak; and sometimes throwing stones at us, though seldom
+in any of the towns, yet the clamour and shouting was every where the
+same, as nobody reproved them for it. The best advice I can give to
+those who may come after me, is to pass on without attending to these
+idle rabblements, by which their ears only will be disturbed by the
+noise. All along this coast, and indeed the whole way to Osaka, we found
+various women who lived continually with their families in boats upon
+the water, as is done in Holland. These women catch fish by diving even
+in the depth of eight fathoms, that are missed by the nets and lines;
+and by the habit of frequent diving their eyes become excessively red
+and bloodshot, by which mark these divers may be readily distinguished
+from all other women.
+
+[Footnote 13: The old king sent 200 tayes, worth five shillings each, to
+Captain Saris, for his expences in the journey.--_Purch._]
+
+In two days we rowed from Firando to Facata. When eight or ten leagues
+short of the straits of _Xemina-seque_,[14] we came to a great town,
+where there lay in a dock a junk of 800 or 1000 tons burden, _all
+sheathed with iron_,[15] and having a guard appointed to keep her from
+being set on fire or otherwise destroyed. She was built in a very homely
+fashion, much like the descriptions we have of Noah's ark; and the
+natives told us she served to transport troops to any of the islands in
+case of rebellion or war.
+
+[Footnote 14: The editor of Astley's Collection has altered the
+orthography of this name to _Shemina seki_. In modern maps, we find a
+town named _Sunono sequi_, on one side of these straits, which divide
+the island of Kiusiu from the south-west end of the great island of
+Niphon.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 15: It is not a little singular, that metallic sheathing
+should have been observed by English mariners in Japan so long ago as
+1613, and yet never attempted in the British or any other European navy
+till more than 150 years afterwards, and then brought forwards as a new
+invention.--E.]
+
+We met with nothing extraordinary after passing through the straits of
+Xemina-seque till we came to Osaka, where we arrived on the 27th of
+August. Our galley could not get nearer the town than six miles;
+wherefore we were met by a smaller vessel, in which came the _goodman or
+host_ of the house where we were to lodge in Osaka, and who brought with
+him a banquet of wine and _salt fruits_ to entertain me. A rope being
+made fast to the mast-head of our boat, she was drawn forwards by men,
+as our west country barges are at London. We found Osaka a very large
+town, as large as London within the walls, having many very high and
+handsome timber bridges which serve to cross the river _Jodo_, which is
+as wide as the Thames at London. Some of the houses here were handsome,
+but not many. It is one of the chiefest sea-ports in all Japan, and has
+a castle of great size and strength, with very deep ditches all round,
+crossed by drawbridges, and its gates plated with iron. This castle is
+all of freestone, strengthened by bulwarks and battlements, having
+loop-holes for small arms and arrows, and various passages for throwing
+down stones upon the assailants. The walls are at least six or seven
+yards thick, all built of freestone throughout, having no packing with
+trumpery within, as I was told, but all solid. The stones are large and
+of excellent quality, and are so exactly cut to fit the places where
+they are laid, that no mortar is used, only a little earth being
+occasionally thrown in to fill up any void spaces.
+
+In the castle of Osaka, when I was there, dwelt the son of _Tiquasama_,
+who was the true heir of Japan; but being an infant at the death of his
+father, he was left under the guardianship of four chiefs or great men,
+of whom Ogoshosama, the present emperor, was the principal. The other
+three guardians were each desirous of acquiring the sovereignty, and
+being opposed by Ogoshosama, levied armies against him; but Ogoshosama
+defeated them in battle, in which two of them were slain, and the other
+saved himself by flight. After this great victory, Ogoshosama attempted
+what he is said not to have thought of before. Seizing the true heir of
+the throne, he married the young prince to his own daughter, and
+confined them in the castle of Osaka, under the charge of such persons
+only as had been brought up from their childhood under the roof of the
+usurper, so that by their means he has regular intelligence of every
+thing they do.
+
+Right opposite to Osaka, on the other side of the river Jodo, there is
+another town called _Sakay_, not so large as Osaka, but of considerable
+extent, and having great trade to all the neighbouring country. Having
+left samples and lists of prices of all our commodities with our host at
+Osaka, we departed from that place on the night of the 29th of August in
+a bark, and arrived at _Fusima_ next night, where we found a garrison of
+3000 men, maintained there by the emperor, to keep Miaco and Osaka under
+subjection. This garrison is shifted every third year, and the relief
+took place while we were there, so that we saw the old bands march away
+and the new enter, which they did in a most soldier-like manner. They
+marched five abreast, and to every ten files or fifty men there was a
+captain, who kept his men in excellent order. Their shot marched first,
+being _calivers_, for they have no muskets and will not use any, then
+followed pikes, next swords or _cattans_ and targets, these were
+followed by bows and arrows, and then a band armed with weapons called
+_waggadashes_, resembling Welsh hooks: These were succeeded by calivers,
+and so on as before; but without any ensigns or colours; neither had
+they any drums or other warlike instruments of music. The first file of
+the band armed with cattans had silver scabbards, and the last file
+which marched next the captain had their scabbards of gold. The
+companies or bands were of various numbers, some 500, some 300, and some
+only of 150 men. In the middle of every band there were three horses
+very richly caparisoned, their saddles being covered by costly furs, or
+velvet, or stammel broad-cloths. Every horse was attended by three
+slaves, who led them in silken halters, and their eyes were hoodwinked
+by means of leathern covers.
+
+After each troop or band, the captain followed on horseback, his bed and
+all his necessaries being laid upon his own horse equally poised on both
+sides, and over all was spread a covering of red felt of China, on the
+top of which sat the captain crosslegged, like a huckster between two
+paniers. Such as were old or weak in the back had a staff artificially
+fixed on the pannel, on which he could lean back and rest himself as if
+sitting in a choir. We met the captain-general of this new garrison two
+days after meeting his first band, having in the mean time met several
+of these bands in the course of our journey, some a league, and others
+two leagues from each other. The general travelled in great state, much
+beyond the other bands, yet the second band had their arms much more
+richly decorated than the first, and the third than the second, and so
+every successive band more sumptuous than another. The captain-general
+hunted and hawked all the way, having his own hounds and hawks along
+with him, the hawks being hooded and lured as ours in England. The
+horses that accompanied him for his own riding were six in number, and
+were all richly caparisoned. These horses were not tall, but of the size
+of our middling nags, short and well knit, small-headed, and very
+mettlesome, and in my opinion far excelling the Spanish jennet in spirit
+and action. His palanquin was carried before him, being lined with
+crimson velvet, and having six bearers, two and two to carry at a time.
+
+Such excellent order was taken for the passing and providing of these
+soldiers, that no person either inhabiting or travelling in the road by
+which they passed and lodged, was in any way injured by them, but all of
+them were as cheerfully entertained as any other guests, because they
+paid for what they had as regularly as any other travellers. Every town
+and village on the way being well provided with cooks-shops and
+victualling houses, where they could get every thing they had a mind
+for, and diet themselves at any sum they pleased, between the value of
+an English penny and two shillings. The most generally used article of
+food in Japan is rice of different qualities, as with our wheats and
+other kinds of grain, the whitest being reckoned the best, and is used
+instead of bread, to which they add fresh or salted fish, some pickled
+herbs, beans, radishes, and other roots, salted or pickled; wild-fowl,
+such as duck, mallard, teal, geese, pheasants, partridges, quails, and
+various others, powdered or put up in pickle. They have great abundance
+of poultry, as likewise of red and fallow deer, with wild boars, hares,
+goats, and kine. They have plenty of cheese, but have no butter, and use
+no milk, because they consider it to be of the nature of blood.
+
+They have great abundance of swine. Their wheat is all of the red kind,
+and is as good as ours in England, and they plough both with oxen and
+horses, as we do. During our residence in Japan, we bought the best hens
+and pheasants at three-pence each, large fat pigs for twelve-pence, a
+fat hog for five shillings, a good ox, like our Welsh runts, at sixteen
+shillings, a goat for three shillings, and rice for a halfpenny the
+pound. The ordinary drink of the common people is water, which they
+drink warm with their meat, holding it to be a sovereign remedy against
+worms in the _maw_. They have no other drink but what is distilled from
+rice, as strong as our brandy, like Canary wine in colour, and not dear:
+Yet, after drawing off the best and strongest, they still wring out a
+smaller drink, which serves the poorer people who cannot reach the
+stronger.
+
+The 30th of August we were furnished with nineteen horses at the charge
+of the emperor, to carry up my attendants and the presents going in our
+king's name to _Surunga_. I had a palanquin appointed for my use, and a
+led horse, well caparisoned, to ride when I pleased, six men being
+appointed to carry my palanquin on plain ground, but where the road grew
+hilly, ten were allowed. The officer appointed by king _Foyne_ to
+accompany me, took up these men and horses by warrants, from time to
+time, and from place to place, just as post-horses are taken up in
+England, and also procured us lodgings at night; and, according to the
+custom of the country, I had a slave to run before me, carrying a pike.
+We thus travelled every day fifteen or sixteen leagues, which we
+estimated at three miles the league, and arrived on the 6th of September
+at _Surunga_,[16] where the emperor resided. The road for the most part
+is wonderfully even, and where it meets with mountains, a passage is cut
+through. This is the main road of the whole country, and, is mostly
+covered with sand and gravel. It is regularly measured off into leagues,
+and at every league there is a small hillock of earth on each side of
+the road, upon each of which is set a fair pine-tree, trimmed round like
+an arbour. These are placed at the end of every league, that the
+hackney-men and horse-hirers may not exact more than their due, which is
+about three-pence for each league.
+
+[Footnote 16: Suruga, Surunga, or Sununnaga, is a town in the province
+of that name, at the head of the gulf of Totomina, about 50 miles S.W.
+from Jedo.--E.]
+
+The road is much frequented, and very full of people. Every where, at
+short distances, we came to farms and country-houses, with numerous
+villages, and frequent large towns. We had often likewise to ferry over
+rivers, and we saw many _Futtakeasse_ or _Fotoquis_, being the
+temples of the Japanese, which are situated in groves, and in the
+pleasantest places of the country, having the priests that attend
+upon the idols dwelling around the temples, as our friars in old time
+used to do here in England. On approaching any of the towns, we saw
+sundry crosses, having the dead bodies of persons who had been crucified
+affixed to them, such being the ordinary mode of punishment for most
+malefactors. On coming near Surunga, where the emperor keeps his court,
+we saw a scaffold, on which lay the heads of several malefactors that had
+been recently executed, with the dead bodies of some stretched on crosses,
+while those of others had been all hewn in pieces by the natives, trying
+the tempers of their _cattans_, as formerly mentioned when at Firando.
+This was a most unpleasant sight for us, who had necessarily to pass
+them on our way to Surunga.
+
+The city of Surunga is fully as large as London, with all its
+suburbs.[17] We found all the handicraft tradesmen dwelling in the
+outward parts and skirts of the town, while those of the better sort
+resided in the heart of the city, not choosing to be annoyed by the
+continual knocking, hammering, and other noise made by the artisans in
+their several callings. As soon as we were settled in the lodgings
+appointed for us in the city of Surunga, I sent Mr Adams to the imperial
+residence, to inform the secretary of our arrival, and to request as
+speedy dispatch as possible. He sent me back for answer, that I was
+welcome, and that after resting myself for a day for two, I should be
+admitted to an audience of the emperor. The 7th of September we were
+occupied in arranging the presents, and providing little tables of
+sweet-smelling wood on which to carry them, according to the custom of
+the country.
+
+[Footnote 17: It is hardly necessary to remark, that this applies to
+London in the year 1613, then vastly smaller than now, when Westminster
+was a separate city, at some miles distance from London; the Strand,
+Piccadilly, and Oxford Street, country roads; Whitehall a country
+palace; and the whole _west end_ of the town, fields, farms, or country
+villas.--E.]
+
+On the 8th of September I was carried in my palanquin to the castle of
+Surunga, in which the emperor resides, and was attended by my merchants
+and others, the presents being carried before me. In entering the
+castle, we had to pass three draw-bridges, at each of which there was a
+guard of soldiers. The approach to the presence was by means of a fair
+and wide flight of stone stairs, where I was met and received by two
+grave and comely personages; one of whom was _Codske dona_, the
+emperor's secretary, and the other named _Fongo dona_, the admiral. By
+these officers I was led into a handsome room, the floor of which was
+covered by mats, on which we sat down cross-legged. Shortly after, they
+led me into the presence-chamber, in which stood the chair of state, to
+which they wished me to do reverence. This chair was about five feet
+high, covered with cloth of gold, and very richly adorned on its back
+and sides, but had no canopy. We then returned to the former room, and
+in about a quarter of an hour word was brought that the emperor was in
+the presence-chamber. They then led me to the door of the room where the
+emperor was, making signs for me to go in, but dared not even to look up
+themselves. The presents sent from our king to the emperor, and those
+which I offered as from myself according to the custom of the country,
+had all been placed in a very orderly manner upon mats in the
+presence-chamber, before the emperor came there.
+
+Going into the chamber, of presence, I made my compliments to the
+emperor according to our English fashion, and delivered our king's
+letter to the emperor, who took it in his hand and raised it towards his
+forehead, and commanded his interpreter, who sat at a good distance
+behind, to desire Mr Adams to tell me that I was welcome from a long and
+wearisome journey, that I might therefore rest me for a day or two, and
+then his answer should be ready for our king. He then asked me if I did
+not intend to visit his son at _Jedo_.[18] Answering, that I proposed
+to do so, the emperor said, that orders should be given to provide me with
+men and horses for the journey, and that the letters for our king should
+be ready against my return. Then, taking leave respectfully of the
+emperor, and coming to the door of the presence-chamber, I found the
+secretary and admiral waiting to conduct me down the stairs where they
+formerly met me, when I went into my palanquin and returned with my
+attendants to our lodgings.
+
+[Footnote 18: Always called _Edoo_ in Purchas, but we have thought it
+better to use the form of the name now universally adopted in
+geography; but which name, from the orthography used by Captain Saris,
+is probably pronounced in Japan, _Idu_, or _Eedoo_.--E.]
+
+On the 9th I sent the present intended for the secretary to be delivered
+to him, for which he heartily thanked me, but would in no wise receive
+it, saying, the emperor had so commanded, and that it was as much as his
+life was worth to accept of any gift. He took, however, five pounds of
+Socotorine aloes, to use for his health's sake. I this day delivered to
+him the articles of privilege for trade, being _fourteen_ in number,
+which we wished to have granted. These he desired to have abbreviated
+into as few words as possible, as in all things the Japanese are fond of
+brevity. Next day, being the 10th September, the articles so abridged
+were sent to the secretary by Mr Adams; and on being shown by the
+secretary to the emperor, they were all approved except one, by which,
+as the Chinese had refused to trade with the English, we required
+permission, in case of taking any Chinese vessels by force, that we
+might freely bring them into the ports of Japan, and there make sale of
+the goods. At the first, the emperor said we might take them, since they
+refused to trade with us; but, after conference with the Chinese
+resident, he altered his mind, and would not allow of that article. All
+the rest were granted and confirmed under his great seal, which is not
+impressed in wax as with us in England, but is stamped in print with red
+ink. These articles of privilege were as follow:--
+
+_Privileges granted by OGOSHOSAMA, Emperor of Japan, to the Governor and
+Company of the London East India Company_.[19]
+
+[Footnote 19: This copy Captain Saris brought home and gave
+me--_Purch._]
+
+1. We give free licence to the subjects of the king of Great Britain,
+viz. To Sir Thomas Smith, governor, and the Company of the East Indian
+Merchants Adventurers, for ever, safely to come into any of the ports of
+our empire of Japan, with their ships and merchandize, without any
+hinderance to them or their goods; and to abide, buy, sell, and barter,
+according to their own manner, with all nations; to remain here as long
+as they think good, and to depart at their pleasure.
+
+2. We grant to them freedom from custom for all such goods as they have
+brought now, or may hereafter bring into our empire, or may export from
+thence to any foreign part. And we authorise all ships that may
+hereafter arrive from England, to proceed immediately to sell their
+commodities, without any farther coming or sending to our court.
+
+3. If any of their ships shall happen to be in danger of shipwreck, we
+command our subjects not only to assist them, but that such parts of the
+ship or goods as may be saved, shall be returned to the captain, or the
+cape merchant, or their assigns. That they may build one house, or more,
+for themselves, in any part of our empire that they think fittest for
+their purpose; and, at their departure, may sell the same at their
+pleasure.
+
+4. If any English merchant, or others, shall die in our dominions, the
+goods of the deceased shall remain at the disposal of the cape merchant;
+and all offences committed by them shall be punished by the said cape
+merchant at his discretion, our laws to take no hold of their persons or
+goods.
+
+5. We command all our subjects trading with them for any of their
+commodities, to pay them for the same without delay, or to return their
+wares.
+
+6. For such commodities as they have now brought, or may bring
+hereafter, that are fitting for our proper use and service, we command
+that no arrest be made thereof, but that a fair price be agreed with the
+cape merchant, according as they may sell to others, and that prompt
+payment be made on the delivery of the goods.
+
+7. If, in the discovery of other countries for trade, and the return of
+their ships, they shall need men or victuals, we command that our
+subjects shall furnish them, for their money, according as their needs
+may require.
+
+8. Without other passport, they shall and may set out upon the discovery
+of _Yeadso_, or _Jesso_, or any other part in or about our empire.
+
+   From our castle in Surunga, this first day of the ninth
+   month, in the eighteenth year of our _dary_, or reign.
+   Sealed with our broad seal, &c.
+   (_Underwritten_)
+
+
+MINNA MOTTONO.
+
+_Yei. Ye. Yeas_.[20]
+
+[Footnote 20: Kempper writes this other name of _Ongosio Sama_, as he
+calls him, _Ijejas_; which, according to the English orthography, is
+_Iyeyas_.--Astl. I. 489. b.]
+
+On the 11th of September, the present intended for the mint-master was
+delivered to him, which he received very thankfully, and sent me in
+return two Japanese gowns of taffeta, quilted with silk cotton. The 12th
+Mr Adams was sent to the mint-master, who is the emperor's merchant,
+having charge of the mint and all the ready money, being in great
+estimation with the emperor, as he had made a vow, whenever the emperor
+dies, to cut out his own bowels and die with him. The purpose of Mr
+Adams waiting upon him at this time, was to carry a list of the prices
+of our English commodities. About noon of this same day, being furnished
+with horses and men by the emperor, as formerly specified, we set out
+for Jedo. The country between Surunga and Jedo we found well peopled,
+with many _Fotoquis_, or idol temples. Among others which we passed, was
+one having an image of great reputation, called _Dabis_, made of copper,
+hollow within, but of substantial thickness. We estimated its height to
+be twenty-one or twenty-two feet, being in the form of a man kneeling on
+the ground, and sitting on his heels; the whole of wonderful size, and
+well proportioned, and being dressed in a gown cast along with the
+figure. Some of our men went into the inside of this idol, and hooped
+and hallooed, which made an exceeding great noise. It is highly
+reverenced by all native travellers who pass that way. We found many
+characters and marks made upon it by its visitors, which some of my
+followers imitated, making their marks in like manner. This temple and
+idol stand in the main road of pilgrimage to _Tencheday_, which is much
+frequented for devotion, as both night and day people of all ranks and
+conditions are continually going or returning from that place.
+
+Mr Adams told me that he had been at the _Fotoqui_, or temple dedicated
+to Tencheday, to which image they make this devout pilgrimage. According
+to his report, one of the fairest virgins of the country is brought
+monthly into that _Fotoqui_, and there sits alone in a room neatly
+fitted up, in a sober manner; and, at certain times, this _Tencheday_,
+who is thought to be the devil, appears unto her, and having carnally
+known her, leaves with her at his departure certain scales, like unto
+the scales of fishes. Whatever questions she is desired by the _bonzes_,
+or priests of the _Fotoqui_, to ask, _Tencheday_ resolves. Every
+month a fresh virgin is provided for the temple, but Mr Adams did not know
+what became of the former.[21]
+
+[Footnote 21: The editor of Astley's Collection, vol. I. p. 487, note b.
+very gravely informs his readers what they certainly are aware of, that
+the gallant must have been one of the _bonzes_, or priests.--E.]
+
+We arrived at _Jedo_ on the 14th September. This city is much larger
+than _Surunga_, and much better and more sumptuously built, and made a
+very glorious appearance to us on our approach; all the ridge-tiles and
+corner-tiles of the roofs being richly gilded and varnished, as also the
+door-posts of the houses. They have no glass in their windows, but have
+large windows of board, opening in leaves, and well adorned with
+paintings, as in Holland. In the chief street of the town there is a
+great _cawsay_ all through from end to end, underneath which flows a
+river, or large stream of water; and at every fifty paces there is a
+well-head, or pit, substantially built of free-stone, having buckets
+with which the inhabitants draw water, both for their ordinary uses and
+in case of fire. This street is as broad as any of our best streets in
+England.
+
+On the 15th I gave notice of my arrival to _Sadda-dona_, the secretary
+of the young king, or son of the emperor, requesting him to inform the
+king. I had access to the king on the 17th, and delivered to him the
+presents sent by our king, as also some from myself, as is the custom of
+the country. The king holds his court in the castle of Jedo, which is
+much stronger and more sumptuous than that of Surunga; and the king was
+besides better guarded and attended than his father the emperor.
+_Saddadona_, his secretary, is father to _Codskedona_ the emperor's
+secretary, his years and experience fitting him to have the government
+and direction of the king or prince successor, who appeared to us to be
+about forty-two years of age.
+
+My entertainment and access to the king here at Jedo was much like that
+formerly mentioned with the emperor his father at Surunga. He accepted
+very kindly the letters and presents from our king, bidding me welcome,
+and desiring me to rest and refresh myself, and that his letters and
+presents in return should be made ready with all speed. On the 19th I
+delivered the presents to _Saddadona_. This day, thirty-two men being
+committed prisoners to a certain house, for not paying their debts, and
+being in the stocks within the same, it took fire in the night by some
+casualty, and they were all burnt to death. Towards evening, the king
+of Jedo sent me two suits of varnished armour, as a present to our king;
+and sent likewise for myself a _tatch_ and a _waggadash_, the
+former being a long sword which is only worn in Japan by soldiers of the
+highest rank, and the latter being a singular weapon resembling a Welsh
+hook. I was informed that the distance from Jedo to the norther-most
+part of Japan, was estimated at twenty-two days journey on horseback.
+
+I left Jedo on the 21st September by boat, and came to _Oringgaw_,[22]
+a town upon the sea-side, where is an excellent harbour, in which ships
+may ride with as much safety as in the river Thames, and the passage
+from which by sea to Jedo is very safe and good; so that it would be
+much better for our ships to sail to this port than to Firando, as
+Oringgaw is on the main island of Japan or _Niphon_, and is only
+fourteen or fifteen leagues from Jedo, the capital and greatest city of
+the empire. Its only inconvenience is, that it is not so well supplied
+with flesh and other victuals as Firando, but is in all other respects
+much preferable. From thence we proceeded on the 29th to Surunga, where
+we remained in waiting for the letters and presents from the emperor. On
+the 8th of October I received the emperor's letter, of which a
+translation is subjoined, and I then also received the privileges of
+trade, formerly quoted, the original of which I left with Mr Cocks.[23]
+
+[Footnote 22: No such place as Oringgaw is to be found in modern maps of
+Japan. Jedo is situated at the head of a deep gulf of the same name, in
+the south-east corner of Japan. About the distance indicated in the
+text, there is a town and bay named _Odavara_, on the western side of
+the gulf, and in the direct way back to Surunga, which may possibly be
+the _Oringgaw_ of the text.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 23: The characters have by some been thought to be those of
+China, but I compared them with Chinese books, and they seemed to me
+quite different, yet not _letters_ to compound words by spelling, as
+ours, but _words_ expressed in their several characters, such as are
+used by the _Chinais_ and as the brevity manifesteth. I take them to be
+characters peculiar to Japan.--_Purch._
+
+In a marginal reference in the plate given by Purchas, the lines are
+said to read downwards, beginning at the right hand. It may possibly be
+so: But they appear _letters_, or literal characters, to _compound words
+by spelling_, and to be read like those used in Europe, from left to
+right horizontally. In a future portion of our work, the subject of the
+Japanese language and writing will be farther elucidated; when, we
+believe, it will appear that they have two modes of writing, one by
+_verbal_ or _ideal_ characters like the Chinese, and the other by
+_literal_ signs like all the rest of the world.--E.]
+
+_Letter from the Emperor of Japan to the King of Great Britain_.
+
+Your majesty's kind letter, sent me by your servant Captain Saris, who
+is the first of your subjects that I have known to arrive in any part of
+my dominions, I heartily embrace, being not a little glad to understand
+of your great wisdom and power, as having three plentiful and mighty
+kingdoms under your powerful command. I acknowledge your majesty's great
+bounty, in sending me so undeserved a present of many rare things, such
+as my land affordeth not, neither have I ever before seen: Which I
+receive, not as from a stranger, but as from your majesty, whom I esteem
+as myself, desiring the continuance of friendship with your highness:
+And that it may consist with your good pleasure to send your subjects to
+any part or port of my dominions, where they shall be most heartily
+welcome, applauding much their worthiness in the admirable knowledge of
+navigation, as having with much facility discovered a country so remote,
+not being amazed by the distance of so mighty a gulf, nor the greatness
+of such infinite clouds and storms, from prosecuting the honourable
+enterprises of discovery and merchandising, in which they shall find me
+to encourage them as they desire. By your said subject, I return to your
+majesty a small token of my love, desiring you to accept the same as
+from one who much rejoices in your friendship. And, whereas your
+majesty's subjects have desired certain privileges for trade and the
+settlement of a factory in my dominions, I have not only granted what
+they desired, but have confirmed the same to them under my broad seal,
+for the better establishment thereof. Given from my castle of _Surunga_,
+this fourth day of the ninth month, in the eighteenth year of our reign,
+according to our computation; resting your majesty's friend, the highest
+commander in the kingdom of Japan.
+
+Subscribed
+
+Minna Muttono_[24]. _Yei. Ye. Yeas_.
+
+[Footnote 24: In the copy of the privileges, Purchas gives this name
+_Mottono_ while the editor of Astley's Collection has altered it to
+_Monttono_. In the privileges formerly inserted, the date is made in the
+_nineteenth_ month, perhaps an error of the press in the Pilgrims, which
+we have therefore corrected to _ninth_.--E.]
+
+At my return to Surunga, I found a Spanish ambassador from the
+Philippine islands, who had only been once introduced to the emperor,
+and delivered his presents, being certain Chinese damasks, and five jars
+of European sweet wine, and could not obtain any farther access to the
+emperor. The purpose of his embassy was, to require that such Portuguese
+and Spaniards as were then in Japan, not authorised by the king of
+Spain, might be delivered up to him, that he might carry them to the
+Philippines. This the emperor refused, saying his country was free, and
+none should be forced out of it: But, if the ambassador could persuade
+any to go with him, they should not be detained. The cause of the
+ambassador making this request was on account of the great want of men
+to defend the Molucca islands against the Dutch, who were then making
+great preparations for the entire conquest of these islands. After the
+ambassador had waited for an answer till the time limited by his
+commission was expired, and receiving none, he went away much
+dissatisfied: And when at the sea side, an answer was returned, as
+mentioned above, together with a slender present of five Japanese gowns,
+and two _cattans_ or swords.
+
+About a month before I came to Surunga, being displeased with the
+Christians, the emperor issued a proclamation commanding that they
+should all remove immediately, and carry their churches to Nangasaki, a
+maritime town about eight leagues from Firando, and that no Christian
+church should be permitted, neither any mass be sung, within ten leagues
+of his court, on pain of death. Some time after, twenty-seven natives,
+men of good fashion, being assembled in an hospital or Christian
+Leper-house, where they had mass performed, and this coming to the
+knowledge of the emperor, they were all commanded to be shut up in a
+house for a night, and to be led to execution next day. That same
+evening, another man was committed to the same house for debt, who at
+his coming was a heathen and quite ignorant of Christ or his holy
+religion; but, next morning, when the officer called at the door for the
+Christians to come forth for execution, and those who renounced it to
+remain behind, this man had been so instructed during the night by the
+others, that he came resolutely forth along with the rest, and was
+crucified with them.
+
+We departed from Surunga on the 9th of October, and during our journey
+towards _Miaco_ we had for the most part much rain, by which the rivers
+were greatly swelled, and we were forced to stop by the way, so that it
+was the 16th of October before we got there. _Miaco_ is the largest city
+in Japan, depending mostly upon trade, and having the chief _Fotoqui_
+or temple of the whole empire, which is all built of freestone, and is
+as long as the western end of St Paul's in London from the choir; being
+also as high, arched in the roof and borne upon pillars as that is. Many
+_bonzes_ are here in attendance for their maintenance, as priests are
+among the papists. They have here an altar, on which the votaries offer
+rice and small money, called _cundrijus_, twenty of which are equal to
+an English shilling, which offerings are applied to the use of the
+bonzes. Near this altar is an idol, called _Mannada_, much resembling
+that of _Dabis_ formerly mentioned, and like it made of copper, but much
+higher, as it reaches up to the arched roof. This _Fotoqui_ was begun to
+be built by _Taicosama_, and has since been finished by his son, having
+been ended only while we were there. According to report, there were
+buried within its enclosure the ears and noses of 3000 Coreans, who were
+massacred at one time; and upon their grave a mount is raised, having a
+pyramid on its summit, the mount being grown over with grass, and very
+neatly kept. The horse that Taicosama last rode upon is kept near this
+_Fotoqui_, having never been ridden since, and his hoofs have grown
+extraordinarily long by age.
+
+This _Fotoqui_ stands on the top of a high hill, and on either side, as
+you ascend the hill, there are fifty pillars of freestone, at ten paces
+each from the other, having a lantern on the top of each, which are all
+lighted up with oil every night. There are many other Fotoquis in this
+city. In Miaco the Portuguese jesuits have a very stately college, in
+which there are several native Japanese jesuits, who preach, and have
+the New Testament printed in the Japanese language. Many of the native
+children are bred up in this college, where they are instructed in the
+Christian religion, according to the doctrines of the Romish church; and
+there are not less than five or six thousand natives professing
+Christianity in this city. The tradesmen and artificers of all kinds in
+this city are all distributed by themselves, every trade and occupation
+having its own particular streets, and not mingled together as with us.
+We remained some time in Miaco, waiting for the emperor's present, which
+was at length delivered, being ten _beobs_, or large pictures, for being
+hung up in a chamber.
+
+The 20th of October we departed from Miaco, and came that night to
+_Fushimi_.[25] We arrived about noon of the next day at Osaka, where the
+common people behaved very rudely to us, some calling after us _Tosin!
+Tosin!_ that is, Chinese, while others called us _Coré! Coré!_ or
+Coreans, and flung stones at us; even the greatest people of the city
+animating and setting on the rabble to abuse us. We here found the
+galley waiting for us which had brought us from Firando, having waited
+for us all the time of our absence at the expence of king _Foyne_. We
+embarked in this galley on the 24th of October, and arrived at Firando
+on the 6th November, where we were kindly welcomed by old _Foyne_.
+During the time of my absence, our people had sold very little goods, as
+according to the customs of Japan no stranger can offer goods for sale
+without the express permission of the emperor. Besides, as our chiefest
+commodity intended for this country was broad cloth, which had latterly
+been sold there at the rate of forty Spanish dollars the _matte_, which
+is two yards and a quarter as formerly mentioned, and as the natives saw
+that we were not much in the habit of wearing it ourselves, they were
+more backward in buying it than they used to be. They said to us, "You
+commend your cloth to us, while you yourselves wear little of it; your
+better sort of people wearing silken garments, while the meanest are
+clothed in fustians, &c." Wherefore, that good counsel, though late, may
+come to some good purpose, I wish that our nation would be more inclined
+to use this our native manufacture of our own country, by which we may
+better encourage and allure others to its use and expenditure.
+
+[Footnote 25: Fusimo, a town about ten miles from Miaco, on a river that
+runs into the head of the bay of Osaka.--E.]
+
+
+§8. _Occurrences at Firando, during the Absence of Captain Saris_.[26]
+
+The 7th August, 1613, all things being in readiness, our general Captain
+Saris departed from Firando in company with Mr Adams, for the court of
+the emperor of Japan, taking along with him Mr Tempest Peacock, Mr
+Richard Wickham, Edward Saris, Walter Carwarden, Diego Fernandos, John
+Williams a tailor, John Head a cook, Edward Bartan the surgeon's mate,
+John Japan _Jurebasso_,[27] Richard Dale coxswain, and Anthony Ferry a
+sailor; having a cavalier or gentleman belonging to king Foyne as their
+protector, with two of his servants, and two native servants belonging
+to Mr Adams. They embarked in a barge or galley belonging to the king,
+which rowed twenty oars of a side, and we fired thirteen pieces of
+ordnance at their departure. The old king sent 100 _tayes_ of Japanese
+money to our general before his departure, for his expenditure on the
+way, which I placed to account, by our general's order, as money lent.
+
+[Footnote 26: This subdivision is taken from observations written by
+Richard Cockes, Cape merchant, or chief factor at Firando. These
+observations are a separate article in the Pilgrims of Purchas, vol.
+I. pp. 395--405, and in Astley's Collection, vol. I. pp. 509--517; but
+are inserted in this place as calculated to render this first account of
+the English trade in Japan a complete and unbroken narrative.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 27: John Japan seems a fabricated name; perhaps a Japanese
+Christian named John, and the addition of _Jurebasso_ may signify that
+he acted as interpreter.--E.]
+
+Next day, I went to wait upon the two kings, as from our general, to
+thank them for having so well provided for his journey, which they took
+in good part. I suspect the old king had notice that some of our men had
+behaved ill last night; as he desired me to remind the master to look
+well to the people on board, and that I should look carefully to the
+behaviour of those on shore, that all things might go on as well in the
+absence of the general as when he was present, otherwise the shame would
+be ours, but the dishonour his. On the 9th, a Japanese boy named Juan,
+who spoke good Spanish, came and offered to serve me for nine or ten
+years, and even to go with me to England if I pleased, asking no wages
+but what I was pleased to give. I took him into my service, and that the
+rather, because I found Miguel, the _jurebasso_ left with me by Mr
+Adams, was somewhat stubborn, and loved to run about at his pleasure,
+leaving me often without any person who could speak a word of the
+Japanese language. This Juan is a Christian, most of his kindred
+dwelling at Nangasaki, only one living here at Firando, who came along
+with him and passed his word for his honesty and fidelity. Juan had
+served a Spaniard at Manilla for three years, where he had acquired the
+Spanish language. I engaged him, and bought for him two Japanese
+garments, which cost me fourteen _mas_.
+
+The 13th I shewed our commodities to some merchants of _Maioco_, [Miaco]
+but they bought nothing, and seemed chiefly to desire to have gunpowder.
+This day _Semidono_ went to visit our ship, accompanied by several
+stranger gentlemen, and came afterwards to see our English house, where
+I gave them the best entertainment in my power. The 19th at night began
+the great feast of the pagans, when they banquet and make merry all
+night by candle-light at the graves of their deceased kindred, whom
+they invite to partake.[28] It lasts three nights and the intermediate
+days; when, by command of the king, every house must new gravel the
+street before its door, and hang out candles all night. I was not slack
+in obeying this order, and I was informed that a poor man was put to
+death and his house shut up, for neglecting to comply with the order. On
+this occasion, the China captain furnished me with two very decent paper
+lanthorns. Being informed that the kings intended to ride about the
+streets, and to make me a visit, I provided a banquet for them, and
+waited till after midnight, but they came not. The 20th, 21st, and 22d,
+I sent presents to both the kings, being informed that such was the
+custom of the country, sending them wine and confections; as likewise to
+_Nobesane_ the young king's brother; to _Semidono_, the old king's
+governor, and to _Unagense_, which were all very thankfully accepted.
+Some _cavalliers_, or Japanese gentlemen, came to visit me during the
+festival, to whom I gave the best entertainment I could procure.
+
+[Footnote 28: This pagan feast is a kind of Candlemas or
+Allsouls.--_Purchas_.]
+
+The 23d we made an end of landing our gunpowder, being in all
+ninety-nine barrels, of which I advised our general by letter,
+requesting him to reserve a sufficiency for the ship, in case he sold it
+to the emperor. We landed several other things, which the master thought
+had best be sent ashore, as our men began to filch and steal, that they
+might go to taverns and brothels. This day Mr Melsham the purser and I
+dined with Semidono, who used us kindly. The master and Mr Eaton were
+likewise invited, but did not go. The great festival ended this day,
+when three troops of dancers went about the town, with flags or banners,
+their music being drums and _pans_,[29] to the sound of which they
+danced at the doors of all the great men, as also at their pagodas and
+at the sepulchres.
+
+[Footnote 29: Probably _gongs_, which very much resemble a brass
+frying-pan.--E.]
+
+The 24th at night, all the streets were hung with candles, as the young
+king and his brother, with _Semidono, Nabesone_, and many others, went
+in masquerade to dance at the house of the old king. The young king and
+his brother were on horseback, having canopies carried over them, all
+the rest being a-foot, and they were accompanied by drums and _kettles_,
+as the before-mentioned dancers, _Nabesone_ playing on a fife. I was
+informed they meant to visit our house on their return, wherefore I
+provided a banquet and sat up for them till after midnight; but they
+returned in disorder, I think owing to some discontent, and none of them
+entered our house. Captain _Brower_ likewise passed our door, but would
+not look at us, and we made as little account of him. The 27th we landed
+three pieces of ordnance, having three landed formerly, all whole
+_culverins_ of iron. The old king came down to the shore while our men
+were about this job, and seeing only twenty men, offered seventy or a
+100 Japanese to help them; but our people landed them all very quickly
+in his sight, at which he expressed much astonishment, saying that an
+hundred of his men could not have done it so soon. He was so much
+pleased with the activity of our men on this occasion, that he sent for
+a barrel of wine and some fish, which he gave among them as a reward for
+their labouring so lustily.
+
+The 28th, I received two letters from our general, dated the 19th and
+20th of the month, as also two others from Mr Peacock and Mr Wickham,
+which were brought me by the governor of _Shimonoseke_.[30] This
+governor did not land at Firando, but delivered these letters on board
+our ship to the master, proceeding directly for Nangasaki, and promising
+to return hither shortly. I also carried a letter for the old king
+_Foyne_, which was brought by the same governor, being accompanied on
+the occasion by Mr Melsham and _Hernando_. Foyne at this visit made a
+present of a _cattan_ or Japanese sword to Mr Melsham, and another with
+a Spanish dagger to Hernando, giving likewise both to them and me
+several bunches of garlic. He also gave us leave to dry our gunpowder on
+the top of the fortress, offering some of his own people to help ours,
+if we had need of them. This day I brought on shore to our house
+twenty-two bars of lead, together with 125 culverin shot, round and
+langridge. When we were about to sit down to supper, the old king came
+to visit us, and being very merry he sat down to supper with us, and
+took such fare as we had in good part.
+
+[Footnote 30: Simonosequi is a town on the north side of the straits
+between the island of Kiusiua and the north-western end of Niphon.--E.]
+
+The 1st September, the old king and all his nobles made a masquerade,
+and went next night to visit the young king his grandson, accompanied by
+music, as formerly mentioned, all the streets being hung with lanterns.
+As I was told he meant to visit our house on his return, I made ready
+for him and waited till after midnight; but he passed by with all his
+company without coming in. I reckoned he had more than 3000 persons in
+his train, for which, as I think, he passed by, not wishing to trouble
+us with so great a multitude. On the 2d _Semidono_ and others who were
+appointed by the king, measured all the houses in the street, ours among
+the rest; which I understood was for the purpose of a general taxation,
+to be levied by appointment of the emperor, for the construction of
+fortresses. I entertained them to their satisfaction. The 4th we had
+news that the queen of Spain was dead, and that the king was a suitor
+for the princess Elizabeth of England. The 6th, a nobleman came to visit
+our English house, and brought me a present of two great bottles of wine
+and a basket of pears. I entertained him as well as I could, and he went
+away contented.
+
+We had much rain in the morning of the 7th September, accompanied by
+wind, which increased in force all day, varying between the east and
+south. In the night between the 7th and 8th, the wind rose to a
+_tuffoon_ or storm of such extreme violence as I had never witnessed,
+neither had the like been experienced in this country during the memory
+of man. It overturned above an hundred houses in Firando, and unroofed
+many others, among which was the house of old king Foyne. An extensive
+wall surrounding the house of the young king was blown down, and the
+boughs and branches of trees were broken off and tossed about with
+wonderful violence. The sea raged with such fury, that it undermined a
+great wharf or quay at the Dutch factory, broke down the stone wall,
+carried away the landing stairs, sunk and broke to pieces two barks
+belonging to the Dutch, and forty or fifty other barks, then in the
+roads, were broken and sunk. At our house, the newly built wall of our
+kitchen was broken down by the sea, which likewise flowed into and threw
+down our oven. The tiles likewise were blown off from the roofs of our
+house and kitchen, both of which were partly unroofed. Our house rocked
+as if shaken by an earthquake, and we spent the night in extreme fear,
+either of being buried under the ruins of our factory, or of perishing
+along with it by fire; for all night long, the barbarous unruly common
+people ran up and down the streets with lighted firebrands, while the
+wind carried large pieces of burning wood quite over the tops of the
+houses, as it whirled up the burning timbers of the several houses
+previously thrown down, hurling fire through the air in great flakes,
+very fearful to behold, and threatening an entire conflagration of the
+town; and I verily believe, if it had not been for the extreme quantity
+of rain, contrary to the usual nature of tuffoons, that the whole town
+had been consumed. This terrible wind and prodigious rain were
+accompanied the whole night by incessant flashes of lightning and
+tremendous peals of thunder. Our ship rode out the gale in the roads,
+having out five cables and anchors, of which one old cable gave way,
+but, thanks be to God, no other injury was sustained, except that our
+long boat and skiff both broke adrift, but were both afterwards
+recovered. We afterwards learnt that this tuffoon did more damage at
+Nangasaki than here at Firando; for it destroyed above twenty Chinese
+junks, together with the Spanish ship which brought the ambassador from
+Manilla.
+
+On the 12th, two merchants from Miaco came to our English house, to whom
+I shewed all our commodities. They laid aside two pieces of broad cloth,
+one black and the other _stammel_, the best they could find, for which
+they offered seven _tayes_ the yard. They also offered for out _Priaman_
+gold eleven tayes of silver for one of gold. But they went away without
+concluding any bargain. This day, one of our men named Francis Williams,
+being drunk ashore, struck one of the servants of king Foyne with a
+cudgel, although the man had given him no offence, and had not even
+spoken to him. The Japanese came to our house making great complaints,
+and was very angry, not without cause, and told me he would complain to
+his king of the bad usage he had received. He had three or four others
+along with him, who had seen him abused, and who said the aggressor was
+just gone off to the ship. I gave them fair words, desiring them to go
+on board and find out the man who had committed the offence, and they
+should be sure of having him punished, and for that purpose I sent
+Miguel, our _jurebasso_, on board along with them. He did so, and
+pointed out Williams as the culprit, who stoutly denied the accusation
+with many oaths, but the affair was too notorious, and the master
+ordered him to be seized to the capstan in presence of the complainants,
+upon which even they entreated for his pardon, knowing that he was
+drunk. But the fellow was so unruly, that he took up an iron crow to
+strike the Japanese in the master's presence, and even abused the master
+in the grossest terms.[31]
+
+[Footnote 31: Of many misdemeanours, I permit some to pass the press,
+that the cause of so many deaths in the Indies might be seen, rather to
+be imputed to their own misconduct, than the intemperature of the
+climate, and for a caveat to others, who may send or be sent into
+_ethnicke_ regions: Yet do I conceal the most and worst.--_Purch._]
+
+Learning, on the 13th, that old king Foyne was sick, I sent our
+jurebasso Miguel to visit him, carrying as a present a great bottle of
+our general's sweet wine, and two boxes of conserves, comfits, and
+sugar-bread. Miguel was likewise directed to offer my best service, and
+to say that I was sorry for his sickness, and would have waited on him
+myself, but that I supposed company was not agreeable to a sick man.
+Foyne accepted my present in very good part, returning many thanks, and
+desiring me to ask for any thing we were in need of, either for the use
+of the ship or our factory, which he would take care we should be
+provided with.
+
+The master came to the factory on the 14th early in the morning, telling
+me that most of the ship's company had lain ashore all night without
+leave, although the ship was aground, and there had been a heavy wind
+all night. He wished therefore, that I would allow our jurebasso,
+Miguel, to accompany him in seeking them out. He went accordingly
+accompanied by Miguel and Mr Melsham our purser, and found several of
+the men drinking and domineering, among whom he bestowed a few blows,
+ordering them aboard. Two of the men, named Lambert and Colphax, though
+ordered aboard, remained ashore all day, notwithstanding the great need
+of hands in the ship, where it had been necessary to hire several
+Japanese to assist. Lambert and Colphax being drunk, went out into the
+fields and fought, on which occasion Lambert was hurt in the arm, and
+remained drunk ashore all night; as did Boles and Christopher Evans, who
+had done so for two or three nights before, and had a violent quarrel
+about a girl.
+
+On the 17th, being informed that _Bastian_, the keeper of the brothel
+frequented by our men, had threatened to kill me and such as came along
+with me, if I came any more to his house to seek for our men, I went and
+complained to the young king, the old one being sick. At my request, he
+issued a proclamation, that no Japanese should admit our people into
+their houses after day-light, under severe penalties; and that it should
+be lawful for me, or any other in my company, to enter any of the native
+houses in search of our men, not only without molestation or hinderance,
+but that the native inhabitants should aid and assist me; and if the
+doors were not opened at my desire, I was authorised to break them open.
+A soldier was sent to inform _Bastian_ to be careful not to molest or
+disturb me, as he might expect to be the first that should pay for it.
+This gave much offence to our people, insomuch that some of them swore
+they would have drink in the fields if they were not suffered to have it
+in the town, for drink they would.
+
+The 26th, _Novasco-dono_ came to visit me at the factory, bringing me a
+present of two bottles of wine, seven loaves of fresh bread, and a dish
+of flying-fish. While he was with me, the old king came past our door,
+where he stopt, saying he had met two men in the street whom he thought
+strangers, and not belonging to us; he therefore desired that Swinton
+and our jurebasso might go with one of his attendants to see who they
+were. They turned out to be John Lambert and Jacob Charke, who were
+drinking water at a door in the street through which the king had gone.
+I was glad the king looked so narrowly after them, as it caused our men
+to be more careful of their proceedings.
+
+Mr William Pauling, our master's mate, who had been long ill of a
+consumption, died at the English house upon the 27th of September, of
+which circumstance I apprised the king, requesting permission to bury
+him among the Christians, which was granted. We accordingly put the body
+in a winding-sheet, and coffined it up, waiting to carry it to the grave
+next morning. Our master, and several others of the ship's company, came
+ashore in the morning to attend the funeral, when we were given to
+understand that the body must be transported by water as far as the
+Dutch house, because the _bonzes_, or priests, would not suffer us to
+pass with the corpse through the street before their pagoda, or idol
+temple. Accordingly the master sent for the skiff, in which the coffin
+was transported by water to the place appointed, while we went there by
+land, and carried it thence to the burial-place; the purser walking
+before, and all the rest following after the coffin, which was covered
+by a Holland sheet, above which was a silk quilt. We were attended by a
+vast number of the natives, both young and old, curious to see our
+manner of burial. After the corpse was interred, we all returned to the
+factory, where we had a collation, and then our people returned to the
+ship. I had almost forgotten to remark, that we had much ado to get any
+native to dig the grave in which a Christian was to be buried, neither
+would they permit the body to be conveyed by water in any of their
+boats.
+
+At this time the king commanded that all the streets in Firando should
+be cleaned, and that gutters should be made on each side to convey the
+water from them, all the streets to be new gravelled, and the
+water-channels to be covered with flat stones. This work was all done in
+one day, every one performing so much of it as was in front of his own
+house, and it was admirable to see the diligence every person used on
+this occasion. Our house was not the last in having this task performed,
+as our landlord, the Chinese captain, set a sufficient number of men to
+do the work.
+
+The 30th, some other merchants of Miaco came to look at our commodities,
+who offered twelve tayes the fathom for our best _stammel_, or red
+cloth; but they went away without making any bargain. At this time we
+had very heavy winds, both by day and night, so that we were in fear of
+another tuffoon, on which account all the fishers hauled their boats
+ashore, and every one endeavoured to secure the roofings of their
+houses. A week before this, a _bose_, bonze or conjurer, had predicted
+to the king that this tempest was to come. About this time our surgeon,
+being in his cups, came into a house where a _bose_ was conjuring for a
+woman who wanted to know if her husband or friends would return from
+sea. So when the _bose_ was done, the surgeon gave him three-pence to
+conjure again, and to tell him when our general would return to Firando.
+In the end, the _bose_ told him that the general would return within
+eighteen days, pretending that he heard a voice answer from behind a
+wall, both when he conjured for the woman, and now when he conjured for
+the surgeon.
+
+On the 2d of October, the master sent me word that some of the men had
+run away with the skiff. These were John Bowles, John Saris, John
+Tottie, Christopher Evans, Clement Locke, Jasper Malconty, and James the
+Dutchman. While in the way to the king to get boats to send after them,
+our Dutch _jurebasso_ came running after me, and told me our people were
+on the other side making merry at a tippling-house. On this information
+I returned to the English house to get a boat for the master to go and
+look them out, but they proved to be three others, William Marinell,
+Simeon Colphax, and John Dench, who had hired a boat and gone to another
+island, not being allowed to walk by night in Firando. By this mistake
+our deserters had the more time to get away. This night, about eleven,
+the old king's house, on the other side of the water, took fire, and
+was burnt to the ground in about an hour. I never saw a more vehement
+fire for the time it lasted, and it is thought his loss is very great.
+The old king is said to have set it on fire himself, by going about in
+the night with lighted canes, some sparks from which had fallen among
+the mats and set them on fire.
+
+I went next day to visit the old king, giving him to understand, by
+means of his governor, that I was extremely sorry for the misfortune
+that had befallen him, and would have come in person to give all the
+assistance in my power, but was doubtful if my presence would have been
+acceptable, being a stranger; and begged leave to assure him, that he
+should find me ready at all times, even with the hazard of my life, to
+do him every service in my power. He gave me many thanks for my good
+will, saying, that the loss he had sustained was as nothing in his
+estimation. On my return to our house, I was met by the young king going
+to visit his grandfather. Before noon, we had word that our runaways
+were upon a desert island about two leagues from Firando, of which I
+gave notice to both kings, requesting their aid and council how we might
+best bring them back. They answered, that they would fetch them back
+dead or alive, yet would be loth to kill them, lest we might want hands
+to navigate the ship back to England. I returned many thanks for the
+care they had of us, yet sent them word we still had a sufficiency of
+honest men to carry our ship to England, even although we should lose
+these knaves. In fine, the king fitted out two boats full of soldiers to
+go after them, with positive orders to bring them back dead or alive,
+which I made known to our master, who wished much to go along with them,
+and did so accordingly.
+
+
+9. _Continuation of Occurrences at Firando, during the Absence of the
+General_.
+
+On the 4th of October, a report was current in Firando that the _Devil_
+had revealed to the _bose_, [bonzes] or conjurers, that the town was to
+be burned to ashes that night, on which criers went about the streets
+the whole night, making so much noise that I could hardly get any rest,
+giving warning to all the inhabitants to extinguish their fires. But the
+devil turned out a liar, for no such thing happened. The 5th, old king
+_Foyne-same_ came to our house, and was entertained to the best of our
+ability, when he told me our runaway seamen could not escape being
+taken, as he had sent two other armed boats after them, besides the two
+formerly mentioned. While I was talking with him, there came a gentleman
+from the emperor's court with a letter, and told me that our general
+would be back to Firando in eight or ten days, as he had received his
+dispatches from the emperor before this gentleman left the court. At
+this time king Foyne told me that _Bon-diu_, the king or governor of
+Nangasaki, who is brother to the empress, was to be at Firando next day,
+and that it would be proper for our ship to fire off three or four
+pieces of cannon as he passed. He told me likewise, that the king or
+governor of a town called _Seam_, was then in Firando.
+
+The master of our ship, Mr James Foster, returned from Nangasaki on the
+7th, bringing our skiff with him, but all the deserters had got
+sanctuary in that town, so that he had not been able to see or speak
+with any of them. I was informed that Miguel, our jurebasso, whom I had
+sent along with the master as linguist, had dealt fraudulently both with
+the master and me, for several Japanese told me that he had spoken to
+our people and advised them to absent themselves. Knowing this, and
+being doubtful of ever recovering our people unless _Bondiu_ were
+extraordinarily dealt with, I resolved to give that personage a present
+to secure him in our interest. In the afternoon, as he was passing on
+foot along the street in which was our house, along with the young king
+who gave him the post of honour, attended by about five hundred
+followers, I went out into the street and saluted them. Bon-diu stopped
+at our door and thanked me for the salute given him in passing our ship.
+I requested he would excuse me if I had hitherto neglected any part of
+my duty towards him, which was owing to my small acquaintance with the
+country and its customs, but that I meant to wait upon him either at his
+lodgings or aboard his junk, before he left Firando. He answered, that I
+should be heartily welcome, and remained so long in conversation, that
+it was quite dark before he got to his lodgings. At this time I carried
+the present to him, which he accepted in good part, offering to do our
+nation all the good in his power at court, whither he was now bound, or
+to serve us all he could any where else. Of his own accord, he began now
+to speak about the deserters, asking me if they should all be pardoned
+for his sake, if he brought them back to us? I answered, that the power
+of pardon belonged to our general, not to me, and that I had no doubt
+they might easily get free, except one or two of the chiefs in this and
+other disorders, who richly deserved punishment. He then said that he
+wished them all pardoned, without any exception: to which I answered,
+that I was sure our general would most willingly do any thing desired by
+his highness, or the two kings of Firando. In conclusion, he said, if I
+would give it under my hand on the faith of a Christian, that all should
+be pardoned for this time, and that I would procure the general to
+confirm this at his return, he would then send to Nangasaki for the
+deserters, and deliver them into my custody, otherwise he would not
+meddle in the matter, lest he might occasion any of their deaths. I
+answered, I was contented with any thing his highness was pleased to
+command, and so gave him the desired writing under my hand, conditioning
+that they were all to be sent back. I then returned to our house after
+which the Dutch waited upon him with their present, but we were before
+hand with them.
+
+On the 8th _Semidono_ passed our house, and told me that king _Bon-diu_
+had a brother along with him, to whom it would be proper that we should
+give a present, but not so large as that given to Bon-diu. On this,
+advising with the other gentlemen, I laid out a present for him, and on
+going to deliver it, I found the Dutch before me with theirs, Captain
+Brower going with it himself. He accepted it very kindly, promising his
+interest and assistance to our nation, both at court and any where else.
+He came soon afterwards to our house, accompanied by many gentlemen,
+when they looked over all our commodities, yet went away without making
+any purchases. On this occasion he gave me a small _cattan_, and I gave
+him two glass bottles, two gally-pots, and about half a _cattee_ of
+picked cloves, which he said he wanted for medicinal purposes. I
+likewise gave him and his followers a collation, with which they all
+seemed contented.
+
+Soon afterwards, _Bon-diu_ sent a gentleman to me, desiring to have my
+written promise for pardon to our deserters, to which I consented, after
+consulting with the other gentlemen. If I had not done this, we
+certainly had never got them back, and the Spaniards would have sent
+them to Manilla or the Moluccas. Immediately after this, I got notice
+that _Bon-diu_ and his brother meant to visit our ship, wherefore I sent
+some banqueting stuff aboard, and went myself to meet them, when they
+were entertained as we best could. Bon-diu gave two _cattans_, and we
+saluted them with seven guns at their departure. The brother returned
+soon after, and requested to have one of the little monkeys for his
+brother's children; so I bought one for five dollars from our
+master-gunner, and sent it to _Bon-diu_. He being ready to go on shore,
+desired to have me along with him in his boat, which I complied with,
+and he was saluted with three guns at his departure, which, as I learnt
+afterwards, was much esteemed by both brothers. When ashore, he insisted
+to accompany me to our factory, much against my inclination, as I was
+again forced to give him a collation in Mr Adamses chamber, after which
+he and his companions went away seemingly satisfied. Late at night, old
+king Foyne sent a man to me to enquire the particulars of the presents I
+had given to both brothers, all of which he set down in writing, but I
+could never know the reason of this. I forgot to mention that Bon-diu,
+just before going aboard our ship, went to bathe in a new warm-bath at
+the Dutch factory. The 9th Bon-diu sent one of his men to give me thanks
+for the kind entertainment he had on board, and sent me by the messenger
+two barrels of Miaco wine. Soon after, his brother sent me a similar
+message and present. They were both very earnest to have a
+perspective-glass, wherefore I sent them an old one belonging to Mr
+Eaton; but it was soon after returned with thanks, as not suiting them.
+
+On the 10th, two sons of another governor of Nangasaki who dwells in the
+town, came to see our house, both of them being Christians. After
+shewing them our commodities, I gave them a collation, accompanied with
+music, Mr Hownsell and the carpenter happening both by chance to be at
+the factory. While we were at table, old king Foyne came in upon us
+quite unexpectedly, and sat down to partake. I then desired our
+jurebasso to request the speedy sending back of our runaways, which they
+all promised, provided they should be pardoned, as I had formerly
+promised, and which promise I now renewed. Old Foyne desired that I
+would send him next day a piece of English beef; and another of pork,
+sodden with onions. I accordingly sent our jurebasso next day with the
+beef and pork, together with a bottle of wine, and six loaves of white
+bread, all of which he very kindly accepted. He had at table with him
+his grandson the young king, _Nabison_, his brother, and _Semidono_, his
+kinsman.
+
+On the 12th I went to visit both kings, and found the old one asleep,
+but spoke with his governor, after which I went to the young king, who
+received me.[32] He gave me thanks for the kind entertainment I had
+given the strangers, which he said his grandfather and he took in as
+good part as if done to themselves. Towards night, Foyne sent to say
+that he understood the strangers, who were now departed, had taken away
+various commodities from me, paying only as they thought good
+themselves, and not the prices I required. I answered, that they had
+certainly done so, but I knew not whether it were the custom of the
+country, being given to understand that they were in use to do so at
+Nangasaki both with the Chinese and Portuguese, and that in reality what
+they had taken from me was not worth the speaking of. I was answered,
+that although this was done at Nangasaki with the Chinese, who were
+forbidden to trade at Japan, they had not authority to do so with those
+strangers who had the privilege of trade, more especially here at
+Firando, where these people had no authority. I sent back my humble
+thanks to the king for the care he used to see justice done both to
+strangers and natives, saying, I would wait upon his highness myself to
+inform him of the whole truth. Captain Brower sent me word that they had
+taken various commodities from him, paying him just as they pleased; he
+also sent an empty bottle, desiring to have it filled with Spanish wine,
+as he had invited certain strangers, and had none of his own.
+
+[Footnote 32: It was now a great festival among the pagans, which began
+on this day, said to be like the Lent of the papists.--_Purch._]
+
+I heard three or four guns or chambers discharged on the 13th, which I
+supposed had been done at the Dutch house, in honour of the king; but I
+afterwards learnt that they were shot by a Chinese junk which was
+passing for Nangasaki. Shortly after, the old king sent for me to come
+to dinner at the Dutch house, and to bring Mr Eaton with me, and a
+bottle of wine.[33] Mr Eaton had taken medicine, and could not go out,
+but I went. We had an excellent dinner, the dishes being dressed partly
+in the Japanese fashion, and partly according to the Dutch way, but no
+great drinking. The old king sat at one table, accompanied by his eldest
+son and two brothers of the young king, as the young king had sent to
+say he was not well. At the other table there sat, first, _Nabesone_,
+the old king's brother, then myself, next me _Semidono_, then the old
+king's governor, and below him _Zanzebar's_ father-in-law, and various
+other Japanese gentlemen on the other side of the table. Captain Brower
+did not sit down, but carved at table, all his own people attending and
+serving on their knees. Captain Brower even gave drink to every one of
+his guests with his own hands, and upon his knees, which seemed very
+strange to me. When they had dined, Foyne and all his nobles went away,
+and Captain Brower accompanied me to our house. I asked him why he
+served these people on his knees, when he told me it was the custom of
+the country, even the king serving his guests on his knees when he made
+a feast, to do them the more honour. Before night the old king came to
+the English house, and visited all its apartments. I gave him a
+collation, and after staying an hour, and taking one thing and another,
+he went his way.
+
+[Footnote 33: These things are mentioned to shew how poor Cockes was
+imposed upon among them; as, taking advantage of his weak side, they
+seem all to have wished to get from him all they could, without any
+design of serving him in return.--Astl. I. 518. b.]
+
+On the 16th, learning that two Christians were arrived from Nangasaki, I
+went to visit them, and to enquire about our runaways. One was George
+Peterson, a Dutchman, born in Flushing; the other was Daman Maryn, a
+native of Venice. They told me that our runaways had been conveyed away
+in a small bark for _Macoro_,[34] and that they two had deserted in hope
+of procuring a passage in our ship to return to their own countries;
+they said they were well known to Mr Adams, and were desirous to have
+gone immediately on board, being both seafaring men. The Dutchman had
+served three or four and twenty years with the Spaniards, and came
+master's mate in one of their ships from _Agua-pulca_ [Acapulco.] for
+Manilla in the Philippine islands. They had plenty of money, and would
+have sent it to our ship or to our factory; but I told them that I durst
+not presume to entertain them in the absence of our general, yet would
+do them all the service in my power at his return. I accordingly sent
+Miguel to inform the king that these two strangers were come to seek a
+passage in our ship, not being Spaniards nor subjects of Spain. The king
+sent me back for answer, that they were welcome, if they were such as
+they reported themselves; but, if Spaniards or Portuguese, he could not
+allow them to remain in Firando, as the Spanish ambassador had procured
+an order from the emperor that all Spaniards should retire to Manilla.
+
+[Footnote 34: Called in the sequel Macow, or Macao, the Portuguese
+settlement on the coast of China, at the mouth of the _Bocca-tigris_, or
+river of Canton.--E]
+
+The two strangers came to me early on the 17th, requesting me to
+accompany them to wait upon the king, to give them the better
+countenance, which I agreed to. On the way, they told me that our
+fugitives had given out at Nangasaki that more of our people would
+follow them, as none of any account would stay to navigate the ship
+home, because their officers used them more like dogs than men. They
+alleged also, that twenty resolute Spaniards might easily get possession
+of our ship in one or two small boats. The old king received us very
+kindly, and asked the strangers many questions about the wars in the
+Molucca islands between the Spaniards and Dutch. They said the Spaniards
+were resolved to prosecute this war with much vigour, having prepared a
+strong force for that purpose. They also told the king that all our
+fugitives had, as they believed, been secretly conveyed away from
+Nangasaki seven days before, in a _soma_ that went from thence for
+_Macow_.[35] The king would not believe them, saying it was impossible
+such a man as Bon-diu, having given his word to restore them, should be
+found false to his promise. In the end, he agreed to allow these men to
+remain, and to go along with our ship, if our general pleased to take
+them. So the poor men returned much contented to their lodgings,
+assuring me they would prove faithful to us, and that we need not wish
+any worse punishment to our fugitives than the bad treatment they would
+receive from the Spaniards.
+
+[Footnote 35: Macow, or Macao, a town of the Portuguese near the
+continent of China. Miguel, the jurebasso, servant to Mr Adams, was
+suspected of double-dealing in this affair of the fugitives: the
+circumstances I omit.--_Purch._]
+
+The 18th we had a total eclipse of the moon, which began about eleven
+p.m. The 19th, about the same hour, a fire began in Firando, near the
+young king's house, by which forty houses were burnt down; and, had not
+the wind fallen calm, most of the town had been destroyed. Had not our
+Englishmen bestirred themselves lustily, many more houses had gone to
+wreck, for the fire took hold three or four times on the opposite side
+of the street to our house, which they as often extinguished, for which
+they were very much commended by the king and other principal people.
+Old Foyne came to our door on horseback, and advised us to put all our
+things into the _godown_, and daub up the door with wet clay, which
+would place them in safety. Captain Brower likewise, and some of his
+people, came very kindly to our house, offering to assist us either by
+land or water, if needful. It could not be known how this fire began,
+but there were reports among the Japanese that there would soon be a
+still greater fire, which had been predicted by the devil and his
+conjurers. I pray God it may not be done purposely by some villainous
+people, on purpose to rob and steal what they can lay hold of during the
+trouble and confusion.
+
+The 20th I went to visit Captain Brower at the Dutch house, to return
+thanks for his friendly assistance the night before. Towards night,
+Hernando the Spaniard and Edward Markes returned from Nangasaki, where
+they could not procure sight of any of our fugitives, though they were
+still at that place. A Portuguese or Spaniard at Nangasaki, in high
+authority about sea affairs, told Markes we should never have our men
+back; but that if all the rest of our people would come, leaving the
+ship empty, they would be well received, and would be still more welcome
+if they brought the ship with them. The Japanese, who had been sent by
+king Foyne along with our people to look for our runaways, would not
+allow Markes to stir out of doors for a night and half a day after their
+arrival at Nangasaki, he going abroad himself, and Hernando lodging at a
+different place, whence I suspect there was some fraudulent
+understanding between the Japanese and Hernando, and have now lost hope
+of ever getting our men back. I blamed the jesuits, and the old king
+agreed with me, and told me he would take care that no more of our
+people should be carried to Nangasaki, except they stole the ship's
+boats, as the others had done, of which I gave notice to Mr James
+Foster, our master. Foyne at this time issued an edict, strictly
+forbidding any of the Japanese from carrying away any of our people,
+without previously making it known to him and me.
+
+The 23d I was informed of a great pagan festival to be celebrated this
+day, both kings and all the nobles being to meet at a summer-house
+erected before the great pagoda, to see a horse-race. I think there must
+have been above 3000 people assembled together on this occasion. All the
+nobles went on horseback, each being accompanied by a retinue of slaves,
+some armed with pikes, some with fire-arms, and others with bows and
+arrows. The pikemen drew up on one side of the street, and the shot and
+archers on the other, the middle being left open for the race. Right
+before the summer-house, where the king and nobles were seated, was a
+large round target of straw, hung against the wall, at which the
+archers running at full career on horseback discharged their arrows.
+The street was so crowded, that neither the present we sent, nor we
+ourselves, could get admission, so we passed along the street and
+returned by another way to our house. Late at night, the brother of
+Zanzibar's wife came to our house, bringing me a present of a haunch of
+venison and a basket of oranges, being accompanied by Zanzibar himself.
+About ten at night, the Chinese captain, our landlord, came to inform us
+that the king had ordered a tub of water to be kept ready on the top of
+every house, as the devil had given out that the town was to be burnt
+down that night: Yet the devil proved a liar: We got however a large tub
+on the top of our house, which held twenty buckets of water; and all
+night long people ran about the streets calling out for every one to
+look well to their fires, so that it was strange and fearful to hear
+them.
+
+This report of burning the town was still current on the 24th, and every
+one was making preparations to prevent it. I made ready fifteen buckets,
+which cost six _condrines_ each, which I filled with water and hung up
+in our yard, setting a large tub beside them full of water, besides that
+on the house top. I gave orders likewise to get two ladders ready for
+carrying water to the roof, and provided nine wine casks filled with
+tempered clay, ready for daubing up the doors of the _gadonge_, [godown
+or fire-proof warehouse,] if need should require in consequence of a
+conflagration, from which dire necessity may God defend us. All night
+long, three or four men ran continually backwards and forwards in the
+streets, calling out for every one to have a care of fire, and making so
+horrible a noise, that it was both strange and fearful to hear them.
+
+On the 25th, the Chinese captain, our landlord, was taken sick, and sent
+for a piece of pork, which I sent him, and immediately afterwards I went
+to visit him, carrying a small bottle of Spanish wine. While I was
+there, Semidono and our guardian's father-in-law came likewise to visit
+him. The king sent me word, by Miguel, our jurebasso, that he had a bad
+opinion of Hernando Ximenes our Spaniard, and that he meant to have run
+away when lately at Nangasaki. But I knew this to be false, as he had
+then free liberty to go where he pleased, and did not run away. I had
+another complaint made against him, that he was a notorious gambler, and
+had enticed several to play, from whom he won their money, which I
+believe rather than the other accusation. I find by experience, that the
+Japanese are not friendly to the Spaniards and Portuguese, and love them
+at Nangasaki the worse, because they love them so well.[36] In the night
+between the 24th and 25th, some evil-disposed persons endeavoured to
+have set the town of Firando on fire in three several places, but it was
+soon extinguished, and no harm done; but the incendiaries were not
+discovered, though doubtless owing to the conjurers and other base
+people, who expected an opportunity of making spoil when the town was on
+fire.
+
+[Footnote 36: This is quite obscure, and may perhaps allude to the
+efforts of the Jesuits at Nangasaki, to convert the Japanese to a new
+idol worship, under the name of Christianity.--E.]
+
+The 26th of October, Mr Melsham being very sick, _Zanzibar_ came to
+visit him, and urged him to use the physic of the country, bringing with
+him a _bonze_, or doctor, to administer the cure. Mr Melsham was very
+desirous to use it, but wished our surgeon to see it in the first place.
+So the bonze gave him two pills yesterday, two in the night, and two
+this morning, together with certain seeds; but, for what I can see,
+these things did him no good. God restore his health! At this time, all
+our waste-cloths, pennants, brass sheaves, and other matters, were sent
+aboard, and our ship was put into order to receive our general, whose
+return was soon expected. Last night another house was set on fire by
+some villains, but was soon extinguished with very little harm; yet our
+nightly criers of fire continue to make such horrible noises, that it is
+impossible for any one to get rest. The Chinese captain still continued
+sick, and sent to beg some spiced cakes and two wax-candles, which I
+sent him, as I had done before. Mr Melsham now grew weary of his
+Japanese doctor and his prescriptions, and returned to our surgeon Mr
+Warner, to the great displeasure of Zanzibar and the bonze.
+
+§10. _Conclusion of Observations by Mr Cockes_.
+
+Our Chinese landlord came to our house on the 30th October, to inform me
+of a general collection of provisions of all kinds, then making at every
+house in Firando, to be sent to the two kings, in honour of a great
+feast they were to give next day, together with a comedy or play. By his
+advice, and after consulting with the other gentlemen of the factory, I
+directed two bottles of Spanish wine, two roasted hens, a roasted pig, a
+small quantity of rusk, and three boxes of confections and preserves to
+be sent, as a contribution towards their feast. Before night the young
+king sent one of his men to me, requesting me to furnish him with some
+English apparel, for the better setting out their comedy, and
+particularly to let him have a pair of red cloth breeches. I answered,
+that I had nonesuch, and knew not any of our people who had; but any
+clothes I had that could gratify his highness were much at his service.
+At night the old king sent to invite me to be a spectator of their
+comedy on the morrow, and to bring Mr Foster, our master, along with me.
+
+Next day, being the 31st, I sent our present, formerly mentioned, to the
+kings by our jurebasso before dinner, desiring their highnesses to
+excuse the master and myself, and that we would wait upon them some
+other time, when they had not so much company. This however did not
+satisfy them, and they insisted on our company, and that of Mr Eaton; so
+we went and had a place appointed for us, where we sat at our ease and
+saw every thing. The old king himself brought us a collation in sight of
+all the people; Semidono afterwards did the like in the name of both
+kings, and a third was brought us in the sequel by several of their
+principal nobles or attendants. But that which we most noted was their
+play or comedy, in which the two kings, with their greatest nobles and
+princes, were the actors. The subject was a representation of the
+valiant deeds of their ancestors, from the commencement of their kingdom
+or commonwealth to the present time, which was mixed with much mirth to
+please the common people. The audience was very numerous, as every house
+in the town of Firando, and every village, place, or hamlet in their
+dominions brought a present, and all their subjects were spectators. The
+kings themselves took especial care that every one, both high and low,
+should eat and drink before they departed. Their acting, music, singing,
+and poetry, were very harsh to our ears, yet the natives kept time to
+it, both with hands and feet. Their musical instruments were small drums
+or tabors, wide at both ends and small in the middle, resembling an
+hour-glass, on one end of which they beat with one hand, while with the
+other they strained the cords which surround it, making it to sound soft
+or loud at their pleasure, and tuning their voices to its sound, while
+others played on a fife or flute; but all was harsh and unpleasant to
+our ears. I never saw a play of which I took such notice, as it was
+wonderfully well represented, yet quite different from ours in
+Christendom, which are only dumb-shews, while this was as truth itself,
+and acted by the kings themselves, to preserve a continual remembrance
+of their affairs.
+
+On this occasion, the king did not invite the Dutch, which made our
+being present seem the greater compliment. When I returned to our house,
+I found three or four of the Dutchmen there, one of whom was in a
+Japanese habit, and came from a place called _Cushma_,[37] which is
+within sight of Corea. I understood they had sold pepper there and other
+goods, and suspect they have some secret trade thence with Corea, or are
+likely soon to have, and I trust if they do well that we shall not miss,
+as Mr Adams was the man who put them upon this trade, and I have no
+doubt he will be as diligent for the good of his own countrymen as he
+has been for strangers. Hernando Ximenes was with Captain Brower when
+the two men came from Cushma, and asked them whence they came, at which
+Brower was very angry, telling him he should have no account of that
+matter.
+
+[Footnote 37: Key-sima, an island considerably to the N.E. of Firando,
+and nearly midway between Niphon and Corea, from which it may be about
+forty miles distant.--E.]
+
+Towards night, I was informed that two Spaniards were arrived from
+Nangasaki, and were lodged with _Zanzibar_. They sent for our jurebasso
+to come to them, but I did not allow him, on which they and Zanzibar
+came to our house. One of them was _Andres Bulgaryn_, a Genoese, who had
+passed Firando only a few days before, and the other _Benito de Palais_,
+pilot-major of the Spanish ship lately cast away on the coast of Japan,
+the same person who came here formerly from Nangasaki to visit Captain
+Adams. They said they had come to visit their friends, me in the first
+place; and used many words of compliment, after which they entered into
+conversation respecting our fugitives. They pretended that it was not
+the fathers, as they called the jesuits, who kept our people from being
+seen and spoken with, but the natives of Nangasaki, who they said were
+very bad people. In fine, I shrewdly suspected these fellows of having
+come a-purpose to inveigle more of our people to desert, as the others
+did, wherefore I advised our master to have a watchful eye both to the
+ship and boats, and to take special notice who kept company with our
+men, as it was best to doubt the worst, for the best will save itself.
+
+On the night of the 1st November, two houses were set a-fire on the
+other side of the water, which were soon extinguished, but the villains
+could not be found out. This day I sent word to Mr Foster on board, to
+look well to the ship and the boats, and to the behaviour of our people,
+as I strongly suspected the two Spaniards of being spies, come to entice
+away our men. I sent him word likewise, that I understood the Spaniards
+meant to invite him that day to dinner, but wished him to beware they
+did not give him a _higo_.[38] He answered, that he had the same opinion
+of them I had, and should therefore be mainly on his guard. He came soon
+after on shore, and the Spaniards came to our house, where by much
+entreaty they prevailed on Mr Foster and Mr William Eaton to go with
+them to dinner at Zanzibar's house, along with Hernando and the other
+two Spaniards. But these two Spaniards came to me, and desired me to
+tell Mr Foster and those who went with him, to take heed they did not
+eat or drink of any thing they did not see tasted by others, as they
+were not to be trusted, which I communicated to Mr Foster and Mr Eaton.
+Ximenes told me that Mr Adams had goods in his hands belonging to the
+pilot-major, who had come in the hope of finding Mr Adams here, and
+meant to wait his return. He said they had likewise brought letters from
+the bishop and other fathers to the other two Spaniards, advising them
+to return to Nangasaki, but which I think they will not do. I this day
+sent our jurebasso to both kings and the other nobles, to give them
+thanks for the kind entertainment we had received the day before.
+
+[Footnote 38: From the sequel, this unexplained term seems to imply
+treachery.--E.]
+
+The 2d, some villains set fire to a house in the fish street, which was
+soon put out, and the incendiaries escaped. It is generally thought
+these fires were raised by some base renegados who lurk about the town,
+and who came from Miaco: Yet, though much suspected, no proof has
+hitherto been brought against them. There has, however, been orders
+given to construct gates and barriers in different parts of all the
+streets, with watches at each, and no person to be allowed to go about
+in the night, unless he be found to have very urgent business. Another
+villain got this night into the house of a poor widow, meaning to have
+robbed her; but on her making an outcry, he fled into the wood opposite
+our house, where the Pagoda stands.[39] The wood was soon after beset
+all around by above 500 men, but the robber could not be found. At
+night, when we were going to bed, there was a sudden alarm given that
+there were thieves on the top of our house, endeavouring to set it on
+fire. Our ladders being ready, I and others went up immediately, but
+found nobody, yet all the houses of our neighbours were peopled on the
+top like ours on similar alarms. This was judged to be a false alarm,
+risen on purpose to see whether any one would be found in readiness. At
+this very time there was a house set on fire, a good way from our house,
+but the fire was soon quenched. The night before, three houses were set
+a-fire in different parts of the town, but the fires were all
+extinguished at the beginning, so that no hurt was done. At this time,
+an order was issued to give notice of all the inhabitants dwelling in
+every house, whether strangers or others; and that all who were liable
+to suspicion should be banished from the dominions of the two kings of
+Firando. Bars or gates were erected to shut up the passages at the ends
+of all the streets, and watches were appointed in different places, with
+orders not to go about crying and making a noise, as had been done
+hitherto without either form or fashion. Yet, notwithstanding these
+precautions, a villain set fire about ten o'clock this night to a house
+near the Pagoda, opposite our house. He was noticed by the watch, who
+pursued him in all haste, but he escaped into the wood above the Pagoda.
+The wood was immediately beset by more than 500 armed men, and old king
+Foyne came in person with many of his nobles to assist in the pursuit;
+yet the incendiary escaped, and I verily believe he ran about among the
+rest, crying _stop thief_ as, well as the best.
+
+[Footnote 39: This word signifies either the idol, or the idol temple,
+or both.--_Purch._]
+
+On the night of the 4th, fire was set to several houses, both in the
+town and country round. An order was now given, to have secret watches
+in various parts of the town every night, and that no person should go
+out during the night except upon important occasions, and then to have a
+light carried before them, that it might be seen who they were. If this
+rule be duly enforced, our house-burners will be put to their wits end.
+I proposed these measures to the king and others above a week before,
+and now they are put in execution.
+
+On the 5th I received a letter from Domingo Francisco, the Spanish
+ambassador, dated five days before from _Ximenaseque_, [Simonoseki,] and
+another from George the Portuguese. The ambassador went over land from
+that place to Nangasaki, and sent the letter by his servant, to whom I
+shewed the commodities he enquired after, referring him for others till
+the return of our general, but gave him an answer, of which I kept a
+copy. The man chose two pieces of fine _Semian chowters_ and eight
+pieces of white _bastas_, paying seven _tayes_ each for the _chowters,_
+and two _tayes_ each for the _bastas_. A Spanish friar or Jesuit came in
+the boat along with the ambassador's servant, and asked to see our ship,
+which the master allowed him at my request, and used him kindly; for the
+old saw has it, That it is sometimes good to hold a candle to the devil.
+This day Mr Eaton, Hernando, and I dined with Unagense, and were kindly
+entertained.
+
+About ten o'clock of the 6th November, 1613, our general and all his
+attendants arrived at Firando from the emperor's court, accompanied by
+Mr Adams. Immediately after his arrival, he sent me, with John Japan,
+our jurebasso, to visit both the kings, and to thank them for their
+kindness, for having so well accommodated him with a barge or galley,
+and for the care they had taken of the ship and every thing else during
+his absence. They took this message in good part, saying they would be
+glad to see our general at their houses. At this time certain merchants
+of Miaco came from Nangasaki to our house to look at our commodities,
+and among the rest took liking to ten pieces of _cassedy nill_, for
+which they agreed to give three _tayes_ each. As had been done by other
+merchants, I sent the goods to their lodging, expecting to receive the
+money as usual; but they only sent me a paper, consigning me to receive
+payment from _Semidono_, who was newly gone from Firando on a voyage,
+and was met by our general. I sent back word to the merchants that I
+must either have payment or the goods returned, to which they answered,
+I should have neither one nor the other; and as the person with whom
+they lodged refused to pass his word for payment, I was forced to apply
+to both the kings for justice; but I first sent word aboard our ship, if
+the boat of Miaco weighed anchor to go away, that they should send the
+skiff to make her stay, which they did, and made her come to anchor
+again. In the mean time I went to the kings. The younger king said that
+_Semidono_ was able enough to pay me; but when I asked him if Semidono
+refused to pay, whether he would, he answered no. While we were talking
+about the matter, the old king came in, and told me he would take order
+that I should be satisfied; so in the end the person with whom the
+merchants lodged passed his word for payment of the thirty _tayes_; yet
+the orders of old _Foyne Same_ had come too late, if our skiff had not
+stopt the Miaco merchants. This day Captain Brower and all the
+merchants of the Dutch factory came to visit our general, and
+_Nobisone_ sent him a young porker as a present, with a message saying
+he would come to visit him in a day or two.
+
+§11. _Occurrences at Firando after the Return of Captain Saris_.[40]
+
+The 7th of November, 1613, I sent in the first place some presents to
+the two kings of Firando, and afterwards went to visit them. On the 8th,
+Andrew Palmer, the ship's steward, and William Marnell, gunner's mate,
+having been ashore all night and quarrelled in their cups, went out this
+morning into the fields and fought. Both are so grievously wounded, that
+it is thought Palmer will hardly escape with his life, and that Marnell
+will be lame of his hands for life. The 9th I went aboard ship early,
+and called the master and all the officers into my cabin, making known
+to them how much I was grieved at the misconduct of some of them,
+particularly of Palmer and Marnell, who had gone ashore without leave,
+and had so sore wounded each other, that one was in danger of his life,
+and the other of being lamed for ever; and besides, that the survivor
+ran a risk of being hanged if the other died, which would necessarily
+occasion me much vexation. I also said, I was informed that Francis
+Williams and Simon Colphax were in the boat going ashore to have fought,
+and that John Dench and John Winston had appointed to do the like. John
+Dench confessed it was true, and that he had seen Palmer and Marnell
+fighting, and had parted them, otherwise one or both had died on the
+field. I told them these matters were exceedingly distressing to me, and
+I trusted would now be remedied, otherwise the ship would be unmanned,
+to the overthrow of our voyage, and the vast injury of the honourable
+company which had entrusted us. After much contestation, they all
+engaged to amend what was amiss, and not to offend any more, which I
+pray God may be the case. I told them also, that old king Foyne had
+complained to me, threatening, if any more of them went ashore to fight
+and shed blood, contrary to the laws of Japan, he would order them to be
+cut in pieces, as he was determined strangers should have no more
+licence to infringe the laws than his own subjects.
+
+[Footnote 40: We here resume the narrative of Captain Saris. Purch.
+Pilgr. I. 378. The observations of Mr Cockes, contained in the three
+preceding sub-sections, break off abruptly in the Pilgrims, as
+above.--E.]
+
+
+At my return ashore, old _Foyne Same_ came to visit me at the English
+house, and told me that the piece of _Poldavy_, and the sash I gave him,
+were consumed when his house was burnt down. This was in effect begging
+to have two others, which I promised to give him. I likewise got him to
+send some of his people aboard, along with John Japan, our jurebasso, to
+intimate to our men that if any of them went ashore to fight, he had
+given strict orders to have them cut in pieces. This I did in hopes of
+restraining them in future from any more drunken combats. Towards night,
+Juan Comas, a Spaniard, came from Nangasaki, bringing two letters from
+Domingo Francisco, one for me, and the other for Mr Cockes, together
+with three baskets of sugar as a present to me, and a pot of conserves,
+with many no less sugared words of compliment in his letters, saying how
+sorry he was that our seven fugitives had gone away during his absence,
+excusing himself and the Jesuits, who he pretended had no hand in the
+matter, and pretending they had never spoken against us, calling us
+heretics. He said our men had gone from Nangasaki, three of them in a
+Chinese or Japanese _soma_ for Manilla, and four in a Portuguese vessel.
+Yet I esteem all these as vain words to excuse themselves, and throw the
+blame on others; for the Spaniards and Portuguese mutually hate each
+other and the Japanese, as these last do them.
+
+The 11th I visited _Nobesane_, who used me kindly, and would have had me
+dine with him next day, but I excused myself on account of the press of
+business in which I was engaged, and the short time I had to stay. I met
+old king Foyne at his house, who requested to have two pieces of English
+salt beef, and two of pork, sodden by our cook, with turnips, radishes,
+and onions, which I sent him. The 12th, the governors of the two kings
+came to visit me at our factory, whence they went aboard the Clove,
+accompanied by Mr Cockes, to signify to our crew that they should beware
+of coming ashore to fight and shed blood; as, by the law of Japan, those
+who went out to fight and drew weapons for that purpose, were adjudged
+to death, and all who saw them were obliged to kill both offenders, on
+pain of ruining themselves and all their kindred if they neglected
+putting the combatants to death.
+
+The 14th I sent Mr Cockes and our jurebasso to wait upon the kings, to
+entreat they would provide me twelve Japanese seamen who were fit for
+labour, to assist me in navigating the ship to England, to whom I was
+willing to give such wages as their highnesses might deem reasonable.
+The kings were then occupied in other affairs, so that my messengers
+spoke with their secretaries, who said they needed not to trouble the
+kings on that business, as they would provide me twelve fit persons; but
+that there were several vagrant people about the town who would be
+willing enough to go, yet were very unfit for my purpose, as they would
+only consume victuals, and of whom the Dutch made use without making any
+request on the matter, and it was not known what had become of these men
+or of the ship; but, as the matter was now referred to them, they would
+look out for such as were fit for our purpose.
+
+The 18th, Foyne sent me word he would visit me, and meant to bring the
+dancing girls of the country along with him, which he did soon after,
+accompanied by three courtezans, and two or three men, who all danced
+and made music after their fashion, though harsh to our ears. The 19th,
+the Chinese captain, and George Duras, a Portuguese, came to visit me,
+requesting me to send to _Semidono_ to procure pardon for two poor
+fellows who were like to lose their lives for bidding a poor knave flee
+who had stolen a bit of lead not worth three halfpence; and though the
+malefactor was taken and executed, these men were in danger of the same
+punishment, had I not sent Mr Cockes to _Semidono_ with my ring, to
+desire their pardon for my sake, which he engaged to procure, and did in
+effect.
+
+The 20th, _Samedon_, king of _Crats_,[41] sent me word he meant to go on
+board our ship, so I went there to meet him, and he came along with both
+the kings of Firando, when we saluted them with five pieces of ordnance;
+and we afterwards fired three with bullets at a mark, at the request of
+Samedon, who gave me two Japanese pikes, having _cattans_ or _sables_ on
+their ends. At their departure we again saluted them with seven guns,
+one being shotted and fired at the mark. The 22d I sent a present to the
+king of _Crats_, which was delivered to him at the house of _Tomesanes_
+the young king, where he was at breakfast. Samedon accepted it very
+kindly, sending me word by Mr Cockes that he was doubly obliged to me
+for his kind entertainment aboard, and for now sending him so handsome a
+present of such things as his country did not produce, all without any
+desert on his part, and the only recompence in his power was, if ever
+any of the English nation came into his dominions, he would give them a
+hearty welcome, and do them all the service in his power.
+
+[Footnote 41: This personage must have been governor of one of the
+provinces, islands, or towns of Japan; but no place in that eastern
+empire bears a name in modern geography which in the smallest degree
+resembles Crats.--E]
+
+
+The 25th, the purser and Mr Hownsell came ashore, and told me that
+Andrew Palmer, the steward, had died the night before, Thomas Warner,
+our surgeon, affirming that he owed his death to his own obstinacy, his
+wound being curable if he would have been ruled. I desired that he might
+be buried on an island as secretly as possible, as we were about to get
+some Japanese into our ship, who might be unwilling to embark if they
+heard of any one having died. On the 28th a Japanese was put to death,
+who some said was a thief, and others an incendiary. He was led by the
+executioner to the place of punishment, a person going before him
+carrying a board, on which the crime for which he was to be punished was
+written, and the same was exhibited on a paper flag carried over his
+head. Two pikemen followed the culprit, having the points of their pikes
+close to his back, ready to slay him instantly if he offered to resist.
+
+The ship being ready to depart, several of the natives complained that
+the ship's company owed them money, and desired to be paid. To prevent
+greater inconvenience, I listened to these people, and wrote to the
+master to make enquiry aboard as to who were in debt, that I might
+satisfy their creditors, making deductions accordingly from their wages.
+
+On the 26th I assembled my mercantile council to consult about leaving a
+factory here in Firando, upon these considerations. 1. The encouragement
+we had privately received at the Moluccas. 2. That the Dutch had already
+a factory here. 3. The large privileges now obtained from the emperor of
+Japan. 4. The certain advice of English factories established at Siam
+and Patane. 5. The commodities remaining on hand appointed for these
+parts, and the expected profit which farther experience might produce.
+It was therefore resolved to leave a factory here, consisting of eight
+Englishmen, three Japanese _jurebassos_ or interpreters, and two
+servants. They were directed, against the coming of the next ships, to
+explore and discover the coasts of Corea, _Tushmay_, other parts of
+Japan, and of the adjoining countries, and to see what good might be
+done in any of them.
+
+The 5th of December, 1613, Mr Richard Cockes, captain and _Cape_
+merchant of the English factory now settled at Firando in Japan, took
+his leave of me aboard the Clove, together with his company, being eight
+English and five others, as before mentioned. After their departure, we
+mustered the company remaining aboard, finding forty-six English, five
+_swarts_ or blacks, fifteen Japanese, and three passengers, in all
+sixty-nine persons. We had lost since our arrival in Japan ten
+Englishmen; two by sickness, one slain in a duel, and seven who deserted
+to the Portuguese and Spaniards, while I was absent at the court of the
+emperor. The English whom we left in the factory were Mr Richard Cockes,
+William Adams, now entertained in the service of the company at a
+hundred pounds a year, Tempest Peacock, Richard Wickham, William Eaton,
+Walter Carwarden, Edward Saris, and William Nelson.
+
+§12. _Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence Home to England_.
+
+That same day, being the 5th December, we set sail with a stiff
+northerly gale, steering S. by W. 1/2 a point westerly. By exact
+observation on shore, we found the island of Firando to be in lat. 33°
+30' N. and the variation 2° 50' easterly.[42] We resolved to keep our
+course for Bantam along the coast of China, for which purpose we brought
+our starboard tacks aboard, and stood S.W. edging over for China, the
+wind at N.N.E. a stiff gale and fair weather. The 7th it blew very hard
+at N.W. and we steered S.S.W. encountering a great current which shoots
+out between the _island_ of Corea[43] and the main land of China,
+occasioning a very heavy sea. The 8th, being in lat. 29° 40' N. we
+steered W.S.W, on purpose to make Cape _Sumbor_ on the coast of China.
+The sea was very rough, and the wind so strong that it blew our main
+course out of the bolt ropes. The 9th, in lat. 28° 23', we sounded and
+had forty-nine to forty-five fathoms on an oozy bottom. The weather was
+clear, yet we could not see land. The 11th we had ground in forty-nine,
+forty-three, thirty-eight, thirty-seven, and thirty fathoms, the water
+being very green, and as yet no land to be seen.
+
+[Footnote 42: The town of Firando is in lat. 33° 6' N. and even the most
+northern part of the island of that name only reaches to 33° 17'. The
+town is in long. 128° 42' E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 43: Corea was long thought to be an island after the period of
+this voyage. Astl. I. 492. c.--It is now known to be an extensive
+peninsula, to the east of China, having the Yellow sea interposed.--E.]
+
+The 12th, in thirty-five fathoms, and reckoning ourselves near the coast
+of China, we had sight of at least 300 sail of junks, of twenty and
+thirty tons each and upwards, two of which passed us close to windwards,
+and though we used all fair means to prevail upon them to come aboard we
+could not succeed, and seeing they were only fishing vessels we let them
+pass. Continuing our course we soon espied land, being two islands
+called the _Fishers islands_.[44] At noon our latitude was 25° 59' N.
+and we had ground at twenty to twenty-six fathoms. About seven p.m.
+while steering along the land, we came close by a rock, which by good
+providence we had sight of by moonlight, as it lay right in our course.
+When not above twice our ship's length from this rock, we had thirty
+fathoms water, on which we hauled off for one watch, to give the land a
+wide birth, and resumed our course S.W. after midnight. The wind was
+very strong at N.E. and continually followed as the land trended. The
+13th, in lat. 24° 35' N. and variation 1° 30' easterly, having the wind
+strong at N.E. with fair weather, we steered S.W. keeping about five
+leagues off the islands along the coast of China. The 15th we came among
+many fisher boats, but had so much wind that we could not speak any of
+them, but they made signs to us, as we thought to keep to the westwards.
+At noon our lat. was 21° 40' N. and having the wind at N.N.E. a stiff
+gale, we steered W.N.W. northerly, to make the land, and about two hours
+afterwards had sight of it, although by our dead reckoning we ought
+still to have been fifty-six leagues from it. It is to be noted, that
+the islands along the coast of China are considerably more to the
+southward than as laid down in the charts. About three p.m. we were
+within about two leagues of an island called _Sancha_[45].
+
+[Footnote 44: By the latitude indicated in the text, Captain Saris
+appears to have fallen in with the coast of Fo-kien, and to have passed
+through between that province and the island of Formosa, without
+discovering the existence of that island.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 45: Probably the island of Tchang-to-huen, to the S.W. of the
+bay of Canton, the situation of which agrees with the latitude in the
+text, and the sound of the two first syllables of which name has some
+affinity with that given by Saris, evidently from Spanish or Portuguese
+charts. At this part, of his voyage, Saris entirely misses to notice the
+large island of Hai-nan.--E.]
+
+The 18th, in lat. 15° 43' N. we had sight of an island called
+Pulo-cotan, being high land, and is about twenty leagues, according to
+report, from the shoal called _Plaxel_. In the morning of the 19th the
+coast of Cambodia was on our starboard side, about two leagues off,
+along which we steered S.E. by E. easterly, our latitude at noon being
+13° 31' N. estimating the ship to be then athwart _Varella_. We have
+hitherto found the wind always _trade_ along shore, having gone _large_
+all the way from Firando, the wind always following us as the land
+trended. The 20th at noon we were in latitude 10° 53', and three
+glasses, or an hour and half after, we had sight of a small island,
+which we concluded to be that at the end of the shoal called
+_Pulo-citi_. We found the book of _Jan Huyghens van Linschoten_ very
+true, for by it we have directed our course ever since we left Firando.
+The 22d we had sight of _Pulo Condor_ about five leagues off, our
+latitude at noon being 8° 20' N.
+
+About four a.m. on the 25th we made the island of _Pulo Timon_, and two
+hours afterwards saw _Pulo Tinga_. The 28th at three p.m. we had oosy
+ground at twenty fathoms, having divers long islands on our starboard
+and sundry small islands on our larboard, forming the straits of
+China-bata, which we found to be truly laid down in a chart made by a
+Hollander called _Jan Janson Mole_, which he gave to Mr Hippon, who gave
+it to the company. _Pulo Bata_, one of these islands, is low land, and
+is full of trees or bushes at the S.W. end.
+
+A little before noon on the 29th, we perceived the colour of the water
+a-head of the ship to change very much, by which observation we escaped
+an imminent danger. This shoal seemed of a triangular shape, the S.W.
+end being the sharpest, and is not far from the entrance into the
+straits of _China-bata_. At noon our latitude was 4° 6' N. At eight p.m.
+we came to anchor in seven fathoms, the weather threatening to be foul
+in the night, the place very full of shoals, and our experience little
+or nothing. Before our anchor took hold, we had six 1/4, five 1/2, six,
+and then seven fathoms, soft sandy ground.
+
+In the morning of the 30th we spoke the Darling, then bound for
+Coromandel, her company consisting of twenty-one English and nine
+blacks. By her we first learnt of the death of Sir Henry Middleton, the
+loss of the Trades-increase, and other incidents that had occurred
+during our voyage to Japan. In the night of the 30th God mercifully
+delivered us from imminent danger, as we passed under full sail close by
+a sunken ledge of rocks, the top of which was only just above water
+within a stone's throw of our ship; and had not the noise of the
+breakers awakened us, we had not cleared our ship. We instantly let go
+our anchor, being in a rapid current or tide-way, in seventeen fathoms
+upon oozy ground. When morning broke on the 31st we had sight of the
+high land of Sumatra, having an island a-stern, the ledge of rocks we
+had passed on our starboard, and three small islands forming a triangle
+on our larboard bow. We were about eight leagues off the high land of
+Java, but could not then get into the straits of Sunda, as the wind was
+quite fallen.
+
+The 1st January, 1614, being quite calm, was mostly spent at anchor. The
+2d, having a little wind, we set sail, and about eight o'clock fell in
+with the Expedition, homewards bound for England, laden with pepper, by
+which ship we wrote to our friends in England. The 3d we came to anchor
+in the road of Bantam, end to our great grief found no lading ready for
+us, for which neglect I justly blamed those I had left to provide the
+same, while they excused themselves by alleging they did not expect us
+so soon back. I questioned _Kewee_, the principal Chinese merchant, who
+came to visit me on board, as to the price of pepper. He answered, that
+it was already known ashore I was homewards bound, and must necessarily
+load pepper; and, as my merchants had not provided any before hand, I
+might be assured it would rise. He said the price was then at twelve
+dollars for ten sacks, but he could not undertake to deliver any
+quantity at that price. I offered him twelve dollars and a half the ten
+sacks, but he held up so high, that we had no hope of dealing for the
+present. Of the ten persons left by us in the factory when we departed
+for Japan, we found only five alive at our return, while we only lost
+one man between Firando and Bantam.
+
+I went ashore on the 4th to visit the governor of Bantam, to whom I
+presented two handsome _cattans_, or Japanese swords, and other articles
+of value; and this day I bargained with _Kewee_ for 4000 sacks of pepper
+at thirteen dollars the ten sacks, bating in the weight 3 per cent and
+directed the merchants to expedite the milling thereof as much as
+possible. I employed the 5th in reducing the several English factories
+at Bantam under one government, settling them all in one house; also in
+regulating the expences of diet, that all might be frugally managed, to
+prevent extravagance in rack-houses abroad, or in hanger-on blacks at
+home, which had lately been the case. I directed also that there should
+be fewer warehouses kept in the town, and that these might be better
+regulated, and the goods stowed in a more orderly manner. Hitherto the
+multiplication of factories, having one for each voyage, had occasioned
+great expence, and had raised the price of pepper, as each outbid the
+other, for the particular account of their own several voyages, with
+great loss to the public.
+
+The 6th was employed in re-weighing the pepper received the day before,
+most of the sacks being found hard weight, and many to want a part of
+what was allowed by the king's beam; wherefore I sent for the weigher,
+whom I used kindly, entreating him to take a little more care to amend
+this fault, which he promised to do, and for his better encouragement I
+made him a present to the value of five dollars. The 16th being Sunday,
+I staid aboard, and about 2 p.m. we observed the whole town to be on
+fire. I immediately sent our skiff ashore to assist the merchants in
+guarding our goods. The wind was so violent, that in a very short space
+of time the whole town was burnt down, except the English and Dutch
+factories, which it pleased God of his mercy to preserve.
+
+Being ashore on the 20th, I procured two Chinese merchants, named
+_Lackmoy_ and _Lanching_, to translate the letter which the king of
+Firando in Japan had given me to deliver to our king, James I. It was
+written in the Chinese character and language, which they translated
+into the Malay, and which in English was as follows:
+
+_To the King of Great Britain, &c._ "Most mighty king, I cannot
+sufficiently express how acceptable your majesty's most loving letter,
+and bountiful present of many valuable things, sent me by your servant
+Captain John Saris, has been to me; neither the great happiness I feel
+in the friendship of your majesty, for which I render you many thanks,
+desiring the continuance of your majesty's love and correspondence. I am
+heartily glad at the safe arrival of your subjects at my small island,
+after so long a voyage. They shall not lack my help and furtherance to
+the utmost, for effecting their so worthy and laudable purposes, of
+discovery and commerce, referring for the entertainment they have
+received to the report of your servant, by whom I send to your majesty
+an unworthy token of my gratitude; wishing your majesty long life. Given
+from my residence of Firando, the sixth day of the tenth month. _Your
+majesty's loving friend, commander of this island of Firando in Japan,
+
+FOYNE SAM-MASAM."_
+
+My interpreters could not well pronounce his name, Lanching saying it
+was _Foyne Foshin Sam_, while Lackmoy said it was written as above. This
+comes to pass by reason of the Chinese characters, which, in proper
+names, borrow the characters of other words, of the same or nearest
+sound, and thereby occasion frequent mistakes.
+
+The 22d, such houses as had escaped in the former fire of the 16th, were
+now burnt down; yet the English and Dutch houses escaped, for which we
+were thankful to God. On the 26th, a Dutch ship of 1000 tons arrived
+from Holland, called the Flushing. At the island of Mayo, the company
+mutinied against the captain, whom they would have murdered in his
+cabin, had it not pleased God that a Scotsman revealed the plot when the
+mutineers were already armed to carry it into effect, so that they were
+taken between decks with their weapons in their hands. In this ship
+there were several English and Scots soldiers. She did not remain at
+Bantam, but sailed towards evening for Jacatra.
+
+The 27th, our lading being fully procured, and several of our company
+fallen sick, I went ashore to hasten our merchants to get us ready for
+sailing. The 1st February, the Darling was forced back to Bantam; and
+order was taken by mutual consultation for the proper care of her goods,
+and for her immediate departure for _Succadanea_ in the island of
+Borneo, and thence to Patane and Siam.
+
+The 13th of February we got out from the straits of Sunda, in which the
+tide of flood sets twelve hours to the eastwards, and the ebb twelve
+hours to the westwards. On the 16th of May we anchored in the bay of
+Saldanha, where we found the Concord of London, being the first ship set
+out by the united company. We now found the natives of this place very
+treacherous, making us to understand by signs; that two of their people
+had been forcibly carried off. They had sore wounded one of the people
+belonging to the Concord; and while we were up in the land, they
+assaulted the people who were left in charge of our skiff, carried away
+our grapnel, and had spoiled the boat-keepers if they had not pushed off
+into deep water. The 19th a Dutch ship arrived bound for Bantam, the
+master being Cornelius van Harte.
+
+We remained here twenty-three days, where we thoroughly refreshed the
+ship's company, and took away with us alive fourteen oxen and seventy
+sheep, besides good store of fish and beef, which we _powdered_ there,
+finding it to take salt well, contrary to former reports. For ten days
+after leaving Saldanha, we had the wind N.W. and W.N.W. but after that
+we had a fine wind at S.W. so that we could hold our course N.W. On the
+27th September, thanks be to God, we arrived at Plymouth; where, for the
+space of five or six weeks, we endured more tempestuous weather, and
+were in greater danger of our lives, than during the whole voyage
+besides.
+
+§13. _Intelligence concerning Yedzo, or Jesso, received from a Japanese
+at Jedo, who had been twice there_.[46]
+
+Yedzo, or Jesso, is an island to the N.W. of Japan, from which it is ten
+leagues distant. The natives are of white complexions, and
+well-conditioned, but have their bodies covered all over with hair like
+monkies. Their weapons are bows and poisoned arrows. The inhabitants of
+the south extremity of this country understand the use of weights and
+measures; but those who inhabit the inland country, at the distance of
+thirty days journey, are ignorant of these things. They have much silver
+and gold-dust, in which they make payment to the Japanese for rice and
+other commodities; rice and cotton-cloth being of ready sale among them,
+as likewise iron and lead, which are carried there from Japan. Food and
+cloathing are the most vendible commodities among the natives of that
+country, and sell to such advantage, that rice often yields a profit of
+four for one.
+
+[Footnote 46: This article is appended to the Voyage of Saris, in the
+Pilgrims, vol. I. p. 384.--E.]
+
+The town where the Japanese have their chief residence and mart in
+Yetizo is called _Matchma_,[47] in which there are 500 households or
+families of Japanese. They have likewise a fort here, called
+_Matchma-donna_. This town is the principal mart of Yedzo, to which the
+natives resort to buy and sell, especially in September, when they make
+provision against winter. In March they bring down salmon and dried fish
+of sundry kinds, with other wares, for which the Japanese barter in
+preference even to silver. The Japanese have no other settled residence
+or place of trade except this at Matchma [48]. Farther northward in
+Yedzo there are people of a low stature like dwarfs.[49] The other
+natives of Yedzo are of good stature like the Japanese, and have no
+other cloathing but what is brought them from Japan. There is a violent
+current in the straits between Yedzo and Japan, which comes from the sea
+of Corea, and sets E.N.E. The winds there are for the most part like
+those usual in Japan; the northerly winds beginning in September, and
+ending in March, when the southerly winds begin to blow.
+
+[Footnote 47: In modern maps, the southern peninsula of Yesso, or Yedso,
+is named _Matsaki_, apparently the same name with that in the text.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 48: In our more modern maps, there are four other towns or
+residences on the western coast of the peninsula of Matsaki, named
+Jemasina, Sirekosawa, Famomoli, and Aria.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 49: The island of Kubito-sima, off the western coast of Yedzo,
+is called likewise in our maps, the Isle of Pigmies.--E.]
+
+§14. _Note of Commodities vendible in Japan_.[50]
+
+Broad-cloths of all sorts, as black, yellow, and red, which cost in
+Holland eight or nine gilders the Flemish ell, two ells and three
+quarters, are worth in Japan, three, four, to five hundred.[51] Cloth of
+a high wool is not in request, but such as is low shorn is most
+vendible. Fine _bayes_ of the before-mentioned colours are saleable, if
+well cottoned, but not such as those of Portugal. Sayes, _rashes_,
+single and double bouratts, silk grograms, Turkey grograms; camblets,
+_Divo Gekepert, Weersetynen, Caniaut, Gewart twijne_;[52] velvets, musk,
+sold weight for weight of silver; India cloths of all sorts are in
+request; satins, taffetas, damasks, Holland linen from fifteen to twenty
+stivers the Flemish ell, but not higher priced; diaper, damasks, and so
+much the better if wrought with figures or branches; thread of all
+colours; carpets, for tables; gilded leather, painted with figures and
+flowers, but the smallest are in best demand; painted pictures, the
+Japanese delighting in lascivious representations, and stories of wars
+by sea or land, the larger the better worth, sell for one, two, or three
+hundred. Quick-silver, the hundred cattees sell from three to four
+hundred.
+
+[Footnote 50: This forms a part of the Appendix to the Voyage of Saris,
+Purch. Pilg. I. 394; where it is joined to the end of observations by
+the same author on the trade of Bantam, formerly inserted in this
+Collection under their proper date.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 51: This account is very vaguely expressed; but in the title
+in the Pilgrims, the sales are stated to be in _masses_ and
+_canderines_, each canderine being the tenth part of a masse. The
+information contained in this short subdivision is hardly intelligible,
+yet is left, as it may possibly be of some use towards reviving the
+trade of Japan, now that the Dutch are entirely deprived of their
+eastern possessions.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 52: These articles, in italics, are unknown.]
+
+The hundred cattees of vermilion are worth from three to six hundred.
+Paint for women's faces, the hundred cattees are worth twenty-eight.
+Cooper in plates, 125 Flemish pounds are worth from 90 to 100. Lead in
+small bars, the 100 cattees from 60 to 88. Lead in sheets is in greater
+request, the thinner the better, and 100 pounds Flemish sell for 80.
+Fine tin, in logs or bars, 120 pounds Flemish bring 350. Iron, twenty
+five Dutch ounces worth four. Steel, the 100 cattees, worth from one to
+two hundred. Tapestry. Civet, the cattee worth from 150 to 200. China
+root, the 100 cattees or pekul worth 40. China sewing gold, the paper
+worth three masse three. Powdered Chinese sugar, the 100 cattees or
+pekul worth forty to fifty. Sugar-candy, the pekul or 100 cattees, from
+fifty to sixty. Velvets, of all colours, eight ells the piece, from 120
+to 130. Wrought velvets, from 180 to 200. Taffetas of all colours, and
+good silk, worth, the piece, from twenty-four to thirty or forty. Satin,
+seven or eight ells long, the piece worth from 80 to 100. Figured satin,
+from 120 to 150. _Gazen_, of seven pikes or ells, from forty to fifty.
+Raw silk, the cattee of twelve pounds Flemish, from thirty to forty.
+Untwisted silk, the weight of twenty-eight pounds Flemish, from thirty
+to forty. Twisted silk, from twenty-eight to forty.
+
+Drinking-glasses of all sorts, bottles, canns, cups, trenchers, plates,
+beer-glasses, salt-sellers, wine-glasses, beakers, gilt looking-glasses
+of large size, _Muscovy glass_, salt, writing-papers, table-books,
+paper-books, _lead to neal_ pots. Spanish soap is in much request, and
+sells for one masse the small cake. Amber beads, worth 140 to 160. Silk
+stockings, of all colours. Spanish leather, neats leather, and other
+kinds of leather used for gloves, worth six, eight, or nine. Blue
+_candiques_ of China, from fifteen to twenty. Black _candiques_, from
+ten to fifteen. Wax for candles, 100 pounds Flemish worth from 200 to
+250. Honey, the pekul, worth sixty. _Samell_ of Cochin-China, the pekul,
+worth 180. Nutmegs, the pekul, twenty-five. Camphor of Borneo, or
+_barous, the pound hollans_, from 250 to 400. Sanders of _Solier_, the
+pekul, worth 100. Good and heavy Callomback wood, the pound, worth one,
+two, three, to five. Sapan, or red wood, the pekul, from twenty to
+twenty-six. Good and large elephants teeth, from 400, to 500, 600, 700,
+and even 800. Rhinoceros horns, the Javan cattee, worth thirty. Gilded
+harts-horns, the piece, worth 300, 400, 500. Roch allum in request, in
+so much that what cost only three gilders has sold for 100 gilders; but
+not in demand by every one.
+
+The Chinese in Japan will commonly truck for silver, giving gold of
+twenty-three carats, at the rate of from fifteen to twenty times its
+weight in silver, according as silver is plenty or scarce.
+
+The following commodities are to be bought in Japan, and at the rates
+here quoted. Very good hemp, 100 cattees, being 120 pounds of Holland,
+are worth from sixty-five to seventy. _Eye-colours_ for dying blue,
+almost as good as indigo, made up in round cakes, and packed 100 cakes
+in a fardel, worth fifty to sixty. Dye-stuff for white, turning to red
+colour, made up in fardels of fifty _gautins malios_, worth five to
+eight. Very good white rice, cased, worth, the _fares_, eight
+three-fifths. Rice of a worse sort, the bale, worth seven three-tenths.
+At Jedo, Osaka, and Miaco, there is the best dying of all sorts of
+colours, as red, black, and green; and for gliding gold and silver, is
+better than the Chinese varnish. Brimstone is in great abundance, and
+the pekul may be bought for seven. Saltpetre is dearer in one place than
+another, being worth one and a half. Cotton-wool, the pekul, may be
+bought for ten.
+
+§15. _Supplementary Notices of Occurrences in Japan, after the Departure
+of Captain Saris_.[53]
+
+"This subdivision consists entirely of letters from Japan, and conveys
+some curious information respecting the transactions of the English in
+Japan, whence they have been long excluded. They are now perhaps of some
+interest, beyond the mere gratification of curiosity, as, by the entire
+expulsion of the Dutch from India, there seems a possibility of the
+British merchants in India being able to restore trade to that distant
+country. In the _Third_ PART of our Collection, various other relations
+of Japan will be inserted."--E.
+
+[Footnote 53: These are appended in the Pilgrims, vol. I. pp. 406--413,
+to the observations of Mr. Richard Cocks, already given in conjunction
+with the voyage of Captain Saris.--E.]
+
+No. I. _Letter from Mr Richard Cocks, dated Firando, 10th December,
+1614_.[54]
+
+To this day, I have been unable to complete my old books of accounts,
+owing to the dispatching of our people, some to one place and some to
+another, and owing to the rebuilding of our house, and afterwards buying
+a junk, and repairing her. She is now ready to set sail for Siam, having
+been at anchor these ten days, waiting for a fair wind to proceed on her
+voyage, at _Couchi_, a league from Firando, where your ship rode at your
+departure from hence. She is called the Sea-Adventure, of about 200 tons
+burden, in which Mr Adams goes as master, with Mr Wickham and Mr Edward
+Sayers as merchants, in consequence of the death of Mr Peacock, slain in
+Cochin-China, and the probability that Mr Carwarden has been cast away
+in his return from thence, as we have no news of him or of the junk in
+which he sailed, as I have at large informed the worshipful company.
+
+[Footnote 54: This letter appears to have been written to Captain
+Saris.--E.]
+
+Since your departure from Japan, the emperor has banished all jesuits,
+priests, nuns, and friars, from the country, shipping them off for
+_Anacau_ [Macao] in China, or Manilla in the Philippine islands, and has
+caused all their churches and monasteries to be pulled down or burnt.
+_Foyne Same_, the old king of Firando, is dead, and _Ushiandono_, his
+governor, with two other servants, cut open their bellies to bear him
+company, their bodies being burned, and their ashes entombed along with
+his. Wars are likely to ensue between _Ogusho Same_, the old emperor,
+and _Fidaia Same_, the young prince, son of _Tico Same_, who has
+strongly fortified himself in the castle of _Osaka_, having collected an
+army of 80,000 or 100,000 men, consisting of malcontents, runaways, and
+banished people, who have repaired from all parts to his standard, and
+he is said to have collected sufficient provisions for three years. The
+old emperor has marched against him in person, with an army of 300,000
+men, and is at the castle of _Fusima_. The advanced parties of the two
+armies have already had several skirmishes, and many have been slain on
+both sides. The entire city of Osaka has been burned to the ground,
+excepting only the castle, so that Mr Eaton had to retire with his goods
+to _Sakey_,[55] yet not without danger, as a part of that town has
+likewise been burnt. So great a tempest or tuffoon has lately occurred
+at _Edoo_ [Jedo,] as had never been before experienced at that place.
+The sea overflowed the whole city, obliging the people to take refuge on
+the hills: and the prodigious inundation has defaced or thrown down all
+the houses of the nobles, which you know were very beautiful and
+magnificent.
+
+[Footnote 55: It has been formerly explained that _Sakey_ was a town on
+the river Jodo, directly opposite to Osakey or Osaka, the river only
+being interposed.--E.]
+
+Let this suffice for Japanese news; and I now proceed to inform you of
+our success in selling our goods. The emperor took all our ordnance,
+with most of our lead, and ten barrels of gunpowder, with two or three
+pieces of broad-cloth. Most of our other broad-cloths are sold, namely,
+black, hair-colour, and cinnamon-colour, at fifteen, fourteen, thirteen,
+and twelve tayes the _tattamy_; but they will not even look at
+Venice-reds and flame-colours, neither are _stammels_ in such request as
+formerly, but they enquire much for whites and yellows. As the Dutch
+sold most of their broad-cloths at low prices, we were forced to do so
+likewise. In regard to our Cambaya goods, they will not look at our _red
+Zelas_, blue _byrams_, or _dutties_, being the principal part of what is
+now left us; and only some white bastas sell at fourteen or fifteen
+masses each. _Cassedys nill, alleias_, broad _pintados_, with spotted,
+striped, and checquered stuffs, are most in request, and sell at good
+profit. We have also sold nearly half of our Bantam pepper for
+sixty-five _masse_ the _pekull_, and all the rest had been gone before
+now, had it not been for the war. I am in great hope of procuring trade
+into China, through the means of Andrea, the China captain, and his two
+brothers, who have undertaken the matter, and have no doubt of being
+able to bring it to bear, for three ships to come yearly to a place near
+_Lanquin_,[56] to which we may go from hence in three or four days with
+a fair wind. Of this I have written at large to the worshipful company,
+and also to the lord-treasurer.
+
+[Footnote 56: As Nangasaki is uniformly named _Langasaque_ in this first
+English voyage to Japan, I am apt to suspect the _Lanquin_ of the text
+may have been Nan-kin.--E.]
+
+Some little sickness with which I have been afflicted is now gone, for
+which I thank God. Mr Easton, Mr Nealson, Mr Wickham, and Mr Sayer, have
+all been very sick, but are all now well recovered, except Mr Eaton, who
+still labours under flux and tertian ague. May God restore his health,
+for I cannot too much praise his diligence and pains in the affairs of
+the worshipful company. Jacob Speck, who was thought to have been cast
+away in a voyage from hence to the Moluccas, is now returned to Firando
+in the command of a great ship called the Zelandia, together with a
+small pinnace called the Jacatra. The cause of his being so long missing
+was, that in going from hence by the eastward of the Philippines, the
+way we came, he was unable to fetch the Moluccas, owing to currents and
+contrary winds, and was driven to the west of the island of Celebes, and
+so passed round it through the straits of Desalon, and back to the
+Moluccas. The Chinese complain much against the Hollanders for robbing
+and pilfering their junks, of which they are said to have taken and
+rifled seven. The emperor of Japan has taken some displeasure against
+the Hollanders, having refused a present they lately sent him, and would
+not even speak to those who brought it. He did the same in regard to a
+present sent by the Portuguese, which came in a great ship from Macao to
+Nangasaki. You thought, when here, that if any other ship came from
+England we might continue to sell our goods without sending another
+present to the emperor; but I now find that every ship which comes to
+Japan must send a present to the emperor, as an established custom. I
+find likewise that we cannot send away any junk from hence without
+procuring the yearly licence from the emperor, as otherwise no Japanese
+mariner dare to leave the country, under pain of death. Our own ships
+from England may, however, come in and go out again when they please,
+and no one to gainsay them.
+
+We have not as yet been able by any means to procure trade from _Tushma_
+into Corea; neither indeed have the inhabitants of Tushma any farther
+privilege than to frequent one small town or fortress, and must not on
+pain of death go beyond the walls of that place. Yet the king of Tushma
+is not subject to the emperor of Japan.[57] We have only been able to
+sell some pepper at Tushma, and no great quantity of that. The weight
+there is much heavier than in Japan, but the price is proportionally
+higher.
+
+[Footnote 57: No place or island of any name resembling _Tushma_ is to
+be found in our best maps. The name in the text probably refers to
+_Tausima_, called an some maps _Jasus_, an island about forty miles
+long, about midway between Kiusiu and Corea.--E.]
+
+I have been given to understand that there are no great cities in the
+interior of Corea, between which inland country and the sea there are
+immense bogs or morasses, so that no one can travel on horseback, and
+hardly even a-foot; and as a remedy against this, they have great
+waggons or carts upon broad flat wheels, which are moved by means of
+sails like ships. Thus, by observing the monsoons or periodical winds,
+they transport their goods backwards and forwards, by means of these
+sailing waggons. In that country they make damasks, sattins, taffaties,
+and other silk stuffs, as well as in China.
+
+It is said that _Fico Same_, otherwise called _Quabicondono_, the former
+emperor of Japan, pretended to have conveyed a great army in these
+sailing waggons, to make a sudden assault upon the emperor of China in
+his great city of Pekin, where he ordinarily resides; but was prevented
+by a nobleman of Corea, who poisoned himself to poison the emperor and
+many of the nobles of Japan. On which occasion, as is said, the Japanese
+lost, about twenty-two years ago, all that they had conquered in Corea.
+
+James Turner, the youth who used to play the fiddle, left a girl here
+with child; and though I gave her two tayes in silver to bring up the
+child; she killed it as soon as it was born, which is a common thing in
+this country. The whistle and chain belonging to Mr Foster, the master
+of the Clove, are found, and are under the charge of Mr Adams, who will
+be accountable for them. I meant to have sent you a Japanese almanack by
+a former letter to the same effect as this, dated the 25th _ultimo_, and
+sent by the Sea Adventure by way of Siam, but forgot to do so; and which
+I now send along with this letter. I pray you that this letter may
+suffice for your brother, Mr George Saris, and the rest of my loving
+friends: And, with hearty commendations in general, I leave you all to
+the holy protection of the Almighty; resting always your ever loving
+friend at command, RICHARD COCKS.
+
+
+_No. 2. Letter from Mr Richard Cocks, dated Firando, 10th December,
+1614, to the Worshipful Thomas Wilson, Esq. at his House in the
+Britain-burse[58] in the Strand._
+
+[Footnote 58: Perhaps that now called Exeter Change.--E.]
+
+My last to you was of the 1st December, 1613, from this island of
+Firando in Japan, and sent by Captain John Saris in the ship Clove. In
+that letter, I advised you how unkindly the Hollanders dealt with us at
+the Moluccas; since which time there has not occurred any matter of
+moment to communicate, except what I have detailed in another letter to
+my good Lord Treasurer. It is given out here by the Hollanders, that our
+East India Company and that of Holland are likely to join into one; and
+if this prove true, it is thought it will be an easy matter to drive the
+Spaniards and Portuguese out of these eastern parts of the world, or
+else to cut them off from all trade. You would hardly believe how much
+the Hollanders have already daunted the Portuguese and Spaniards in
+these parts, especially in the Moluccas, where they daily encroach on
+the Spaniards, who are unable to withstand them, and are even in fear
+that they may shortly deprive them of the Philippine islands. The
+Portuguese also are in great fear of being driven by them out of the
+trade they now carry on from Ormus to Goa, and with Malacca and Macao in
+China.
+
+There is one thing of which I cannot yet conceive the issue, and that is
+the robbing and plundering the Chinese junks, which is daily done by the
+Hollanders in these parts, the goods whereof must amount to great value,
+and suffice to fit out and maintain a great fleet, which is worthy of
+consideration. Should the emperor of Japan fall out with the Hollanders,
+and debar them from the trade of his dominions, which is not unlikely,
+the Hollanders will then make prize of the Japanese junks as well as of
+those of China; for their strength at sea in these parts is sufficient
+to do what they please, if only they had a place to retire to for
+revictualling and refitting their ships; for they are of late grown so
+stout, that they mock at those who were formerly their masters and
+teachers. It is very certain that they have got possession of several
+fortresses at the Moluccas and other parts; yet, to my certain
+knowledge, the natives in these parts are more inclined towards the
+Spaniards, although at the first they were glad of the arrival of the
+Hollanders, having been disgusted by the intolerable pride of the
+Spaniards. But now they have time to reflect, that the Spaniards brought
+them abundance of money, and were liberal though proud; while the poor
+Hollanders, who serve there both by sea and land, have such bare pay,
+that it can hardly supply clothes and food; and their commanders
+allege, that all the benefits derived from conquest or reprisals, belong
+to the states and the _Winthebbers_, as they call them. It is hard to
+judge how all these things may end.
+
+Were it not for the misbehaviour of the Hollanders, I am of opinion that
+we should procure trade with China, as we only demand leave for three
+ships to come and go there, and merely to establish factors there to
+transact our business, without bringing any Jesuits or _padres_, whom
+the Chinese cannot abide to hear of, because they came formerly in such
+great numbers to inhabit the land, and were always begging and craving,
+to the great displeasure of the pagans. I am however in good hope of
+success, as our English nation has acquired a good fame and character
+since our arrival, which I am given to understand has come to the ears
+of the emperor of China, who has heard how we have been received by the
+emperor of Japan, having large privileges allowed us, and also that we
+have at all times held the Castilians in defiance both by sea and land.
+I have been informed of these things by the Chinese who come hither, and
+that the emperor and other great men of China delight to hear accounts
+of our nation. I had almost forgotten to mention, that some China
+merchants lately asked me, if we were allowed to trade with China,
+whether the king of England would prevent the Hollanders from robbing
+and spoiling their junks? Which question was rather doubtful to me, yet
+I answered that his majesty would take measures to prevent the
+Hollanders from injuring them.
+
+We have lately had news that a tuffon or tempest has done vast injury at
+Jedo, a city of Japan as large as London, where the Japanese nobility
+have very beautiful houses, now mostly destroyed or greatly injured. The
+whole city was inundated, and the inhabitants forced to take shelter in
+the hills; a thing never before heard of. The palace of the king, which
+is a stately building in a new fortress, has had all its gilded tiles
+carried away by a whirlwind, so that none of them could be found. The
+pagans attribute this calamity to some charms or conjurations of the
+Jesuits, who were lately banished: but the Japanese converts to popery
+ascribe it to the vengeance of God, as a punishment for having banished
+these holy men.
+
+We have lately had a great disaster in Cochin-China, to which place we
+sent a quantity of goods and money, to the value of £730, as it cost in
+England, under the care of Mr Tempest Peacock and Mr Walter Carwarden,
+who went as merchants in a Japanese junk, carrying our king's letters
+and a handsome present for the king of Cochin-China. They arrived at the
+port called _Quinham_,[59] delivered his majesty's letters and present,
+and were entertained with kind words and fair promises. The Hollanders,
+seeing that we adventured to that country, would needs do the same, and
+were at first kindly entertained; but in the end, Mr Peacock and the
+chief Dutch merchant going ashore one day in the same boat, to receive
+payment from the king for broad-cloth and other commodities they had
+sold him, they were treacherously assailed on the water, their boat
+overset, and both were killed in the water with harpoons, as if they had
+been fishes, together with their interpreters and other attendants, who
+were Japanese. Mr Carwarden being aboard our junk escaped sharing in
+this massacre, and came away, but neither he nor the junk have ever been
+since heard of, so that we fear he has been cast away.
+
+[Footnote 59: _Turon_ is the port of Cochin-China in the present time,
+and _Quinham_ is unknown in modern geography; perhaps the old name of
+some island or village at the port or bay of Turon.--E.]
+
+It is commonly reported here, both among the Chinese and Japanese, that
+this was done by order of the king of Cochin-China in revenge against
+the Hollanders, who had burnt one of his towns, and had slaughtered his
+people most unmercifully. The origin of this quarrel was occasioned by a
+large quantity of false dollars, sent to _Quinham_ by the Hollanders
+some years ago, and put off in payment for silks and other Chinese
+goods, to the great injury of the merchants of that country. When the
+falsehood of the money was discovered, they laid hands upon the Dutch
+factors, and are said to have put some of them to death. Upon this the
+Dutch ships came upon the coast, and landed a body of men, who burnt a
+town, putting man, woman, and child to the sword. This, as reported, was
+the occasion of our present mischance, and of the slaughter of Mr
+Peacock, because he was in company with the Hollanders. Along with this
+letter, I send you a Japanese almanack, by which you will see the manner
+of their printing, with their figures and characters. And so I leave you
+to the holy protection of the Almighty, resting always, &c.
+
+RICHARD COCKS.
+
+
+
+No. 3. _Letter from Edmond Sayer, dated Firando, 5th December, 1615. But
+having no Address_.
+
+I received a letter from you by the hands of Captain Copendall of the
+Horiander, who arrived here on the 29th of August this year, by which I
+learnt your safe arrival at the Cape of Good Hope, homewards bound, and
+of the loss of some of your company; and I make no doubt that, long ere
+now, you are safe arrived in England, by the blessing of God. I sent you
+a letter, dated in November, 1614, by the Dutch ship called the Old
+Zealand, in which I informed you of the death of Mr Peacock and Walter
+Carwarden, both betrayed in Cochin-China, to our great grief, besides
+the loss of goods to the company.
+
+The last year, Mr Wickham, Mr Adams, and I, when bound for Siam in a
+junk we had bought, and meeting with great storms, our vessel sprung a
+leak, and we were fain to bear up for the _Leukes_[60] islands, where we
+had to remain so long, before we could stop our leaks, that we lost the
+monsoon, and had to return here. We have fitted her out again this year,
+and are now ready to sail again for Siam. My greatest hope in these
+parts is, that we shall be able to establish trade with China, of which
+we seem to have a fair prospect through the efforts of the China captain
+and his brothers; and I make no doubt that we shall have a factory there
+ere long.
+
+[Footnote 60: The Liqueo islands are here obviously meant, a group to
+the south of the south-western extremity of Japan, in 28° N. and long.
+129° 30' W. from Greenwich; such being the latitude and longitude of the
+centre of the great Liqueo, the principal island of the group.--E.]
+
+This last summer we have had great troubles, in consequence of war
+between the emperor and _Fidaia Same_, and we do not certainly know
+whether the latter be slain or fled; but the emperor gained the victory,
+with a vast loss of men on both sides.[61] Having no other news to
+write, I commit you to the protection of the Almighty, and am, &c.
+EDMOND SAYER.
+
+[Footnote 61: In the text of the Pilgrims, this loss is estimated at
+400,000, and in a marginal note at 40,000, both in words at length; for
+which reason the number is omitted in the text.--E.]
+
+No. 4. _Letter, with no address, from Edmond Sayer, dated Firando, 4th
+December, 1616._
+
+Worshipful Sir,--My duty always remembered. Having a favourable
+opportunity, I could not omit to trouble you with a few lines. I am but
+newly arrived here in Firando from a difficult and tedious voyage to
+Siam, to which country we went in a junk belonging to the right
+honourable company, in which Mr Adams was master, and myself factor.
+Having bought there more goods than our own junk could carry, we
+freighted another junk for Japan, in which Mr Benjamin Fry, the chief in
+the factory at Siam, thought it proper for me to embark, for the safety
+of the goods. The year being far spent, we were from the 1st June to the
+17th September in our voyage between Siam and _Shachmar_, during which
+we experienced many storms and much foul weather, and lost twenty of our
+men by sickness and want of fresh water. The great cause of our tedious
+and unfortunate voyage was in our not having a good pilot. The one we
+had was a Chinese, who knew nothing of navigation; for, when out of
+sight of land, he knew not where he was, nor what course to steer.
+Besides he fell sick, and was unable to creep out of his cabin, so that
+I was obliged to do my best to navigate our junk; which, with what small
+skill I possessed, and by the aid of God, I brought safe to _Shachmar_,
+where we arrived on the 17th of September, having then only five men
+able to stand on their legs. In consequence, I arrived so late at
+Firando that I could not go this year to Siam. But Mr William Eaton has
+gone there in the company's junk, having two English pilots, named.
+Robert and John Surges.--I am, &c. EDMOND SAYER.
+
+
+_No. 5. Letter from Richard Cocks to Captain John Saris, dated Firando,
+15th February, 1617.[62]_
+
+[Footnote 62: Perhaps the date of this letter, according to modern
+computation, ought to have been 1618, as in those days the year did not
+begin till Lady-day, the 25th March.--E.]
+
+My last letter to you was dated 5th January, 1616, and sent by way of
+Bantam in the ship Thomas, which went from hence that year along with
+another small ship called the Advice. In that letter I wrote you at
+large of all things that had then occurred, and mentioned having
+received two of your letters from London; one dated 4th November, 1614,
+and the other 15th August, 1615. The Advice has since returned to
+Japan, and arrived at Firando on the 2d of August last, and by her I had
+a letter from the honourable company, dated 30th January, 1616.
+
+You will perhaps have heard that Captain Barkeley, while on his
+death-bed, narrowly escaped losing 6000 dollars, paid out for custom on
+pepper; for, if he had died before it was found out, perhaps some other
+man might have taken credit for paying that sum. It is a common saying,
+that it is easy for those who live at Bantam to grow rich, as _no man
+dies _without an heir_. We have been again this year before the emperor
+of Japan, but could not procure our privileges to be enlarged, having
+still only leave to carry on trade at Firando and Nangasaki, and our
+ships to come only to Firando.
+
+Mr Edmond Sayer went last year to Cochin-China with a cargo amounting to
+about 1800 tayes, in goods and money; and when ready to cone away, was
+defrauded of 650 tayes, by a Chinese and others, of whom he had bought
+silk for the worshipful company. He had weighed out the money, waiting
+to receive the silk, and the money lay in the room where he sat; but
+some of the thievish people made a hole through the cane-wall of the
+room, and stole away the money unperceived. I am sorry for this
+mischance; but Mr Sayer is in hopes to recover it this year, as he left
+a person to follow out the suit, and goes back himself in a Chinese
+junk, with 2000 tayes in silver to purchase silk. He is to be
+accompanied by one Robert Hawley, as his assistant and successor, in
+case be should die, and Mr William Adams goes pilot, in place of the
+Chinese. God send them a prosperous voyage, and that they may recover
+the lost money. Our own junk, the Sea Adventure, made another voyage
+last year to Siam, Mr William Eaton being merchant; and has gone back
+again this year. God send them a prosperous voyage.
+
+Last year, the Hollanders sent a fleet of ships from the Moluccas to
+Manilla, to fight the Spanish fleet: But the Spaniards kept safe in port
+for five or six months, so that the Hollanders concluded they durst not
+come out at all, and therefore separated to look out for Chinese junks,
+of which some say they took and plundered twenty-five, while others say
+thirty-five. It is certain that they took great riches, and all under
+the assumed name of Englishmen. At length the Spanish fleet put to sea,
+and set upon five or six of the Dutch ships, the admiral of which was
+burnt and sank, together with two other ships, the rest escaping. The
+Spaniards then separated their fleet, to seek out the remaining Dutch
+ships. The Spanish vice-admiral fell in with two Dutch ships one morning
+and fought them both all day; but was at length constrained to run his
+ship ashore and set her on fire, that she might not be taken by the
+Hollanders. These two Dutch ships, and one that was in the former fight,
+came afterwards to Firando, together with two other large Dutch ships
+from Bantam, as big as the Clove, intending to have intercepted the
+Macao ship, which they narrowly missed. Thus five great Holland ships
+came this year to Firando, the smallest of them being as large as the
+Clove. One of these, called the Red Lion, which was she that rode beside
+us at the Moluccas, was cast away in a storm at Firando, together with a
+Chinese junk they brought in as a prize. All the goods were recovered,
+but were all wet. The emperor allows them to make good prize of all they
+take.
+
+The Black Lion, one of their ships, of 900 tons burden, was sent away
+for Bantam, fully laden with raw silk and other rich Chinese
+commodities. Another, called the Flushing, of 700 or 800 tons, is gone
+for the Moluccas, fully laden with provisions and money. The Sun, a ship
+of 600 or 700 tons, with a galliass of above 400 tons, are left to scour
+the coast of China, to make what booty they can, and to return next
+monsoon. The galliass has sailed already, but the Sun waits for the
+Macao ship departing from Nangasaki, that she may endeavour to take her.
+The Macao ship had actually sailed, but seeing the galliass, she
+returned to Nangasaki, and will, as I think, hardly venture to sail this
+year. As I said before, the Dutch have always robbed the Chinese under
+the name of Englishmen, which has greatly injured our endeavours to
+procure trade in that country; so that we have been obliged to send
+people to give notice to the Chinese governors, that they were
+Hollanders who have taken and plundered their junks, and not Englishmen.
+In fine, I have advised the worshipful company at large of every thing
+of moment, which I doubt not will be communicated to you. I send you
+here inclosed a copy of my last year's letter; and so, committing you to
+God, I rest your loving friend at command,
+
+RICHARD COCKS.
+
+
+No. 6. _Extract of a Letter from Richard Cocks, without Date or
+Address_.
+
+There came two friars in that ship as ambassadors from the viceroy of
+New Spain, with a present for the emperor; but he would neither receive
+the present, nor speak with them that brought it, even sending Mr Adams
+to order them to quit his dominions, as he had formerly banished all men
+of their cloth, and continued still in the same mind. It is said that
+_Fidaia Same_ had promised to receive the jesuits again into Japan, if
+he had got the victory and been settled in the empire. Had this taken
+effect, we and the Hollanders had doubtless been turned out of Japan, so
+that it is better as it is.
+
+Last year, when we fitted out our junk, we employed a Spaniard, called
+Damian Marina, the same person who thought to have gone with you in
+company with George Peterson. This Damian was a good helmsman, and was
+therefore employed by us, and another Spaniard, named Juan de Lievana,
+went with them as passenger. The junk however lost her voyage, and they
+returned to Nangasaki, where the carrak of Macao soon afterwards
+arrived. Understanding that these two Spaniards had gone in our vessel,
+the Portuguese arrested them and put them in irons in their ship,
+condemning them to death as traitors to their king and country, for
+serving their English enemies. I took their defence in hand, and
+procured an order from the emperor to set them at liberty, to the great
+displeasure of the Spaniards and Portuguese; and these two men are going
+passengers to Bantam in the Hosiander.
+
+We have had great troubles in Japan, in consequence of the wars, by
+transporting our goods from place to place, to save them. Mr Adams is
+gone again in the junk for Siam, accompanied only by Mr Edmond Sayer. Mr
+Nealson is very sick; but Mr Wickham and Mr Eaton are both well. I long
+to hear from you, and I pray you to deliver the inclosed to my brother.
+Yours, most assured at command,
+
+RICHARD COCKS.
+
+
+No. 7. _Letter from Richard Cocks, without Address, dated Firando, 10th
+March, 1620_.[63]
+
+[Footnote 63: In the Pilgrims, the date of this letter is made 1610,
+evidently by error of the press; and, as observed of No. 5, the real
+date, according to modern computation, ought to be 1621. The
+introductory paragraph is a note by Purchas, distinguished by inverted
+commas, retained as a curious specimen of his mode of writing.--E.]
+
+"Hollanders abuses of the English in those parts, are here published
+for knowledge of these eastern affairs and occurrents, as it is meet in
+a history. But neither were these national, but personal crimes, and
+done in time and place of pretended hostility; and now, I hope,
+satisfaction is or shall be made. Neighbourhood of region, religion, and
+customs, are easily violated by drink, covetousness, and pride, the
+three furies that raised these combustions. This history hath related
+the worth of many worthy Hollanders: If it yields a close-stool for
+Westarwood, as excrements rather than true Dutch, or a grain-tub or
+swill-tub for some brave brewers and bores, that embrued with nobler
+blood than themselves, prefer their brutish passions to God's glory,
+religion, and public peace let it be no imputation to the nation, which
+I love and honour, but to such baser spirits as have [like scorbutical
+humours in these long voyages, and their longer peace and want of wonted
+employments,] been bred as diseases to their, and infections to our
+bodies. My intent is to present others with their acts, and myself with
+prayers, that all may be amended."--_Purchas_.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+It is now almost three years since I wrote your worship any letter. The
+purpose of this is to inform you of the unlooked for and unruly
+proceedings of the Hollanders against our English nation, in all these
+parts of the world, not sparing us even in this empire of Japan,
+contrary to the large privileges granted to us by the emperor, that the
+Japanese should not meddle with or molest us. But these Hollanders,
+having this year seven ships great and small in this port of Firando,
+have, with sound of trumpet, proclaimed open war against our English
+nation, both by sea and land, threatening to take our ships and goods,
+and to kill our persons, as their mortal enemies. This was done by one
+Adam Westarwood, their admiral or lord-commander, as they call him, and
+was openly proclaimed aboard all their ships. They have even come to
+brave us before our own doors, picking quarrels with us, and forcibly
+entering our house, thinking to have cut all our throats, yet only
+wounded two persons; and, had it not been for the assistance of the
+Japanese our neighbours, who took our parts, they had assuredly slain us
+all, as there were an hundred Hollanders to one Englishman. Not
+contented with this, they took our boat when going about our business,
+in which was one Englishman, whom they carried prisoner to their house,
+threatening to put him to death; and indeed he was in imminent danger,
+among a crowd of drunken fellows, who threatened to stab him with their
+knives. This young man was Richard King, son to Captain King of
+Plymouth. Besides this, as two of our barks were passing their ships,
+within the town and harbour of Firando, they pointed a cannon at them,
+which missed fire, yet shot at them with muskets, which missed the
+Englishmen and killed a Japanese. For all this there is no justice
+executed against them by the king of Firando, though he has received the
+commands of the emperor to that effect.
+
+Yon will also please to understand, that two of these ships which they
+have brought to Firando are English ships, taken by them from Englishmen
+in the Indies. They also took two other ships from us, which were riding
+at anchor in the road of Patania, where we have a factory, and had not
+the least suspicion of any such event. In this unwarrantable affair,
+they killed Captain John Jordaine,[64] our chief president for the right
+worshipful company in the Indies. Several others were then slain, and
+the Hollanders carried the ships and goods away; but six of the
+mariners, which were in these captured English ships, escaped from them
+here at Firando, and came to our house. The Hollanders sent to me,
+demanding to have these men given up to them. But I answered, that I
+must first see their commission, that I might know by what authority
+they presumed to take our ships and goods, and to slay our men, the
+faithful subjects of his majesty. Upon this, they went to the _Tono_, or
+king of Firando, desiring to have their _English slaves_,[65] as they
+were pleased to call our men, delivered up to them. But they were told,
+that they must first demand of the emperor, and whatever he ordained
+should be obeyed; but that, in the meantime, he did not consider the
+English to be their slaves. This was the grand occasion on which they
+grounded their quarrel against us, and meant to have killed us all. But
+I trust in God and his majesty, by the solicitations of our right
+honourable and right worshipful employers, that his majesty will not
+suffer his true and loyal subjects to lose their lives, ships, and goods
+by this thievish and unthankful rabble, who are assembled in these parts
+of the world, and who make a daily practice to rob and steal from all,
+whether friends or foes: And I trust that you will become a solicitor in
+this so just cause, against so inveterate an enemy.
+
+[Footnote 64: This Captain Jordaine is said to have been treacherously
+slain in the time of a treaty--_Purch._]
+
+[Footnote 65: And who was the happy instrument of their own delivery,
+from what they accounted slavery, but the English nation?--_Purch._]
+
+This Adam Westarwood, their lord-commander, set my life to sale;
+offering fifty dollars to any one that would kill me, and thirty dollars
+for every other Englishman that they could slay: But hitherto God hath
+preserved me and the rest in this place; for though they have wounded
+two or three of our men, none have died. This villainous proceeding[66]
+of their lord-commander was secretly told me by some of their own
+people, who advised me and the rest of us to take heed to our safety.
+They also informed me of the noble parentage of this their
+lord-commander Westarwood, telling me that his father is a close-stool
+maker at Amsterdam, or thereabouts; and that the best of their captains
+are the sons of shoemakers, carpenters, or brewers. God bless their
+honourable and worshipful generation! I would say, God bless me from
+them. To make an end of this matter, I went up this year to the
+emperor's court at Meaco, to complain of the abuses offered to us in his
+dominions, contrary to the privileges his majesty had granted us. I had
+very good words, and fair promises made me that we should have justice,
+and that the _tono_ or king of Firando should be ordered to see it
+performed: But as yet nothing has been done, though I have many times
+made earnest suit on the subject.
+
+[Footnote 66: Unchristian, uncivil, inhumane, immane, devilish
+impiety.--_Purch._]
+
+While I was at the court, and in the emperor's palace at Meaco, there
+were several Spaniards and Portuguese there to pay their obeisance to
+the emperor, as is their custom every year on the arrival of their
+ships. There was also a Hollander at the court, who had lived almost
+twenty years in Japan, and speaks the Japanese language very fluently.
+In my hearing, and that of others, this fellow began highly to extol
+their king of Holland, pretending that he was the greatest king in
+Christendom, and held all the others under his command. He little
+thought that we understood what he said; but I was not slack in telling
+him, that he need not be so loud, for they had no king in Holland, being
+only governed by a count, or rather that they governed him. Nay, if they
+had any king at all in whom they could boast, it certainly was the king
+of England, who had hitherto been their protector, and without whose aid
+they had never been able to brag of their States. This retort made the
+Spaniards and Portuguese laugh heartily at the poor Hollander, and made
+him shut his mouth.
+
+And now for the news of this country. The emperor is great enemy to the
+name of Christians, especially to the Japanese who have embraced the
+faith; so that all such as are found are put to death. While at Meaco, I
+saw fifty-five martyred at one time, because they would not forsake the
+faith, and among them were some children of five or six years old, who
+were burnt in the arms of their mothers, calling on Jesus to receive
+their souls. Also, in the town of Nangasaki, sixteen others were
+martyred for the same cause, of whom five were burnt, and the rest
+beheaded and cut in pieces, and their remains put into sacks and cast
+into the sea in thirty fathoms deep: Yet the priests got them up again,
+and kept their remains secretly as relics. There are many others in
+prison, both here and in other places, who look hourly to be ordered for
+execution, as very few of them revert to paganism. Last year, about
+Christmas, the emperor deposed one of the greatest princes in all Japan,
+called _Frushma-tay_, lord of sixty or seventy _mangocas_, and banished
+him to a corner in the north of Japan, where he has a very small portion
+in comparison with what was taken from him, and he had the choice of
+this or of cutting open his own belly. It was thought that this would
+have occasioned great troubles in Japan, for all the subjects of
+_Frushma-tay_ were up in arms, and meant to hold out to the utmost
+extremity, having fortified the city of _Frushma_, and laid in
+provisions for a long time. But the _tay_ and his son, being then at the
+emperor's court, were commanded to write to their vassals, ordering them
+to lay down their arms and submit to the emperor, or otherwise to cut
+open their own bellies. Life being sweet, they all submitted, and those
+were pardoned who had taken up arms for their _tay_. The emperor has
+given their dominions, which were two kingdoms, to two of his own
+kinsmen; and this year the emperor has ordered the castle belonging to
+Frushma to be pulled down, being a very beautiful and gallant fortress,
+in which I saw him this year, and far larger than the city of Rochester.
+All the stones are ordered to be conveyed to Osaka, where the ruined
+castle, formerly built by _Fico-Same_, and pulled down by _Ogosha-Same_,
+is ordered to be rebuilt three times larger than before; for which
+purpose all the _tonos_ or kings have each their several tasks appointed
+them; to be executed at their several charges, not without much
+grumbling: For they had got leave, after so many years attendance at
+court, to return to their own residences, and were now sent for again
+all of a sadden to court, which angreth them not a little: "But go they
+must, will they nill they, on pain of belly-cutting."
+
+At this time there runs a secret rumour, that _Fidaia Same_ is alive,
+and in the house of the _Dairo_[67] at Meaco; but I think it has been
+reported several times before this that he was living in other places,
+but proved untrue. There are some rich merchants here that belong to
+Meaco, who are much alarmed by this report, lest, if true, the emperor
+may burn Meaco; and who are therefore in haste to get home. Were Fidaia
+actually alive it might tend to overthrow the emperor's power, for,
+though a great politician, he is not a martial man: But be this as it
+may, things can hardly be worse for us. I advised you in my last of the
+destruction of all the Christian churches in Japan; yet there were some
+remnants left at Nangasaki till this year, and in particular the
+monastery of Misericiordia was untouched, as were all the church-yards
+and burying-places; but now, by order of the emperor, all is destroyed,
+all the graves and sepulchres of the Christians opened, and the bones of
+the dead taken out by their parents and kindred, to be buried elsewhere
+in the fields. Streets have been built on the scites of these churches,
+monasteries, and burying-grounds, except in some places, where pagodas
+have been erected by command of the emperor, who has sent heathen
+priests to occupy them, thinking utterly to root out Christianity from
+Japan. There were certain places near Nangasaki where several jesuit
+fathers and other Christians were martyred, in the reign of _Ogosha
+Same_, and where their parents and friends had planted evergreen-trees,
+and erected altars near each tree, where many hundreds went daily to say
+their prayers; but now, by command of the emperor, all these trees are
+cut down, the altars destroyed, and the ground all levelled, it being
+his firm resolution utterly to root out the remembrance of all matters
+connected with Christianity.
+
+[Footnote 67: The Dairo was formerly the sovereign of Japan, uniting the
+supreme civil and spiritual power, committing the military affairs to a
+kind of generalissimo, who usurped supreme authority, and reduced the
+Dairo to be a kind of sovereign pontiff or chief-priest.--E.]
+
+In the months of November and December, 1618, there were two comets seen
+all over Japan. The first, rising in the east, was like a great fiery
+beam, rent to the southwards, and vanished away in about the space of a
+month. The other rose also in the east, like a great blazing star, and
+went northwards, vanishing quite away within a month near the
+constellation of Ursa-Major or Charles-waine. The wizards of Japan have
+prognosticated great events to arise from these comets, but hitherto
+nothing material has occurred, excepting the deposition of
+_Frushma-tay_, already related.
+
+I am almost ashamed to write you the news which the Spaniards and
+Portuguese report, though some of them have shewn me letters affirming
+it to be true, of a bloody cross having been seen in the air in England;
+and that an English preacher, speaking irreverently of it from the
+pulpit, was struck dumb: On which miracle, as they term it the king of
+England sent to the pope, to have some cardinals and learned men brought
+to England, as intending that all the people of England should become
+Roman catholics. I pray you pardon me for writing of such nonsense,
+which I do that you may laugh; yet I assure you there are many Spaniards
+and Portuguese here who firmly believe it. I know not what more to write
+you at this time: But I hope to come to England in the next shipping
+that comes here; and I trust in God that I may find your worship in good
+health.
+
+RICHARD COCKS.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION XVI.
+
+_Ninth Voyage of the East India Company, in 1612, by Captain Edmund
+Marlow_.[68]
+
+We sailed from the Downs on the 10th February, 1612, in the good ship
+James, and crossed the equator on the 11th April.[69] The 27th of that
+month, at noon, we were in latitude, by observation, 19° 40' S. and in
+longitude, from the Lizard, 11° 24' W. We this day saw an island
+fourteen leagues from us in the S.E. which I formerly saw when I sailed
+with Sir Edward Michelburne. It is round like Corvo, and rises rugged,
+having a small peaked hill at its east end. Its lat. is 23° 30' S. and
+long. 10° 30' W. from the Lizard; and there is another island or two in
+sight, seven or eight leagues E.N.E. from this.[70]
+
+[Footnote 68: Purch. Pilg. I. 440.--The relation of this voyage in the
+Pilgrims is said to have been written by Mr John _Davy_, the master of
+the ship: Probably the same John _Davis_, or _Davies_, formerly
+mentioned as having frequently sailed as master to India in these early
+voyages, and from whose pen Purchas published a _Rutter_, or brief book
+of instructions for sailing to India. On the present occasion, this
+voyage has been considerably abbreviated, especially in the nautical
+remarks, which are now in a great degree obsolete and useless, and have
+been already sufficiently enlarged upon in the former voyages to
+India.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 69: From some indistinct notices, in the commencement of this
+voyage, the Dragon and Hosiander appear to have belonged to the _tenth_
+voyage of the East India Company, and the Solomon to the _eleventh_
+voyage; and that these three ships sailed from England at the same time
+with the James, which belonged to the _ninth_ voyage.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 70: This seemeth the island of Martin Vaz.--_Purch._ The
+island of Trinidad, or Martin Vaz, is only in lat. 20° 15' S. and long.
+29° 32' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+We saw the island of St Lawrence on the 29th June, and anchored in five
+fathoms water in the bay of St Augustine on the 28th at night. Next day
+we weighed, and brought the ship to anchor in the river, one anchor
+being in thirty-five and the other in ten fathoms. A ship may ride here
+in shallower water at either side, the deep channel being narrow. In
+this anchorage no sea can distress a ship, being protected by the land
+and shoals, so that it may well be called a harbour, from its safety. We
+remained here twenty days, and sailed for Bantam on the 18th of July.
+
+In the morning of the 24th September we saw the islands of Nintam, in
+lat. 1° 30' S.[71] The sound between the two great islands is eighteen
+leagues from Priaman, and eleven leagues from the shoals before _Ticoo_,
+which must be carefully avoided during the night, by laying two or three
+or four leagues off till day-light. When you see three hummocks that
+resemble three islands, take care always to have a person stationed on
+the outer end of the boltsprit to give warning of any spots in your way,
+as there are coral beds, which may be easily seen and avoided. The
+course from this sound for Ticoo or Priaman is E.N.E. to these shoals.
+In passing this sound, keep your lead always going, and come no nearer
+the large southern island than the depth of sixteen fathoms, as there
+are shoals towards the east side, and a breach or ledge also off the
+northern island, on the larboard going in for Priaman. When nearing the
+shoals of Ticoo, set the three hummocks on the main, which look like
+islands, as all the land near them is very low; and when you have these
+hummocks N.E. by E. then are you near the shoals, and when the hummocks
+are N.N.E. you are past the shoals. But great care is necessary
+everywhere, as it is all bad ground hereabout, till past the high land
+of _Manancabo_, which is in lat 4° 30' S. or thereby.
+
+[Footnote 71: Pulo Mintao is probably here meant, which is to the south
+of the line, but touches it at its northern extremity. The sound in the
+text, is probably that between Pulo Botoa and Pulo Mintao.--E.]
+
+We came to anchor in the road of Priaman on the 26th September, where
+we found the Thomas, and remained fourteen days to refresh our sick men,
+when the Hector and our ship sailed for Bantam, where we arrived in
+company with the Janus and Hector on the 23d October. The 4th November
+we weighed from the road of Bantam, intending to proceed by the straits
+of Sunda for Coromandel; but the winds and currents were so strong
+against us, that we were forced back into the straits of Sunda to refit
+our ship, which was much weather-beaten. The 11th December, we anchored
+again at Pulo Panian, and went to work to trim our ship and take in
+ballast. Being ballasted, watered, and refitted, we sailed again on the
+10th January, 1613, for the straits of Malacca. But, being too late in
+the monsoon, and both wind and current against us, we got no farther
+than seventy leagues from Bantam by the first of March, with much toil
+to the men. Wherefore we concluded to take in wood and water, and to
+return for Bantam by the outside of Sumatra.
+
+Having again sailed for Coromandel, we were at noon of the 5th June,
+1613, in lat. 12° N. and long. 23° W. from the salt hills, having been
+carried by the currents 4° 30', or ninety leagues out of our reckoning.
+Whoever sails from Bantam, either up or down, will find such uncertain
+reckoning that he may well miss his destined port, unless he looks well
+to the variation of the needle, which will help materially in ten or
+fifteen leagues, and indeed there is no other way of dealing with these
+currents. We now got sight of the land, which is so very low that the
+pagodas or pagan churches are first descried. With the aid of the lead,
+you may sail boldly on this coast of Coromandel in fifteen fathoms by
+night, and ten by day; but a steady man must always be kept at the lead
+on such occasions, as the sea shoals suddenly; for after thirteen
+fathoms, it will suddenly fall off to shoal water, being like a well or
+steep bank, and the ground ooze. The course along the coast is N. by E.
+to Pullicate, and so to Masulipatam.
+
+The 6th June we anchored at noon in the road of Pullicate, in eight
+fathoms on sand. There is a middle ground, having only five fathoms, and
+within that another, having six, seven, and eight. The marks for the
+road where we anchored, are the round hill by the other hill, W. by N.
+and the Dutch fort S.W. by W. The latitude is 13° 30' N. and the
+variation 18° 10'. Departing from Pullicate roads on the night of the
+7th, we were on the 8th in lat. 14° 40' at noon, having sailed
+twenty-three leagues since last night, our depth of water being
+twenty-three to twenty-fire fathoms, and our course N. by E. but the
+lead is our sure guide on this coast, under God. The 9th at noon we were
+in lat. 15° 30', having the land in sight, but not the high land of
+_Petapoli_ [Putapilly]. During the last twenty-four hours, we sailed
+seventeen leagues north, in fifteen and sixteen fathoms. The high land
+now in sight is known by a pagoda or pagan temple, and is five leagues
+from the high land of Putapilly, in the road of which place we anchored
+on the 10th in five fathoms on sand, this new high land bearing from us
+N.N.W. the platform of palm trees upon the island E.N.E. by E. and the
+bar N.W. by N. The whole sea coast is low land. The latitude here is 15°
+52'. Having established a factory, in which we left Mr George Chansey
+and our purser as merchants, with other seven men to assist in taking
+care of our goods, we sailed from Putapilly on the forenoon of the 19th.
+
+We anchored in the road of Masulipatam on the 21st, where we found a
+ship belonging to Holland. We remained here for six months, until the
+6th January, 1614, and then set sail for Putapilly, where we arrived on
+the 19th of that month, and remained there, taking in the merchants and
+their goods till the 7th February, when we sailed for Bantam. We arrived
+there on the 20th April, and on the 10th June set sail for Patane. By
+noon of that day, being in lat. 5° 44' S. we had sight of the islands
+nine leagues from Bantam, our course, after getting clear of the road,
+being N.N.E. in five, six, seven, eight, twelve, fourteen, and so to
+twenty-four fathoms. At six in the morning of the 11th, we were close
+beside the two islands that are north from Bantam near Sumatra, in lat.
+5° S. and in twenty fathoms; this being the surest course both going to
+and from Bantam, but it is necessary to keep a good look-out for the
+sand-banks which are even with the water. The 12th, being involved in a
+strong adverse current, we were forced to anchor in a quarter less four
+fathoms, in sight of a reef, twelve leagues short of Lucapara, and
+forty-eight from Bantam.
+
+The 14th, we came in with the island of Banda and the main of Sumatra,
+and went through between them in five 1/2 fathoms. In this passage it is
+proper to keep nearer the Sumatra shore, though the water is deeper on
+the Banda side of the strait; as that side is rocky, while the side
+towards Sumatra is oozy. The 16th we came to Palimbangan point; and the
+17th at noon, being in lat, 1° 10' S. we anchored in nine fathoms, on
+account of it falling calm with a strong current, the isle of Pulo Tino
+being to seawards. The 30th, we anchored in the road of Patane in three
+1/2 fathoms. On the 1st August we sailed to Sangora to trim our ship,
+being a good place for that purpose under shelter of two islands hard by
+the main, and fourteen or fifteen leagues from Patane. We anchored in
+Sangora road, under the eastermost of the two islands, on the 4th; and
+having put our ship into good trim, we came away on the 9th September,
+and returned to Patane next day. We remained there a month taking in
+the goods of the Globe, to carry them to Bantam, for which place we
+sailed on the 9th October, and arrived at Bantam on the 9th November. We
+continued there till the 27th January, 1615, to load our ship, and to
+get all things in readiness for our voyage home to England.
+
+The 29th we set sail from Bantam, homewards bound; and when some hundred
+leagues from thence, our captain, Mr Edmund Marlow, died. He was an
+excellent man, and well skilled in the mathematics and the art of
+navigation. The first place at which we anchored was Saldanha bay, where
+we arrived on the 29th April, 1615, and next day our consort the Globe
+came in. Having well refreshed and refitted our ships, we set sail from
+thence on the 17th May, and arrived at St Helena on the 3d June. Sailing
+from thence along with our consort, on the 7th of that month, we arrived
+in England on the 3d of August, giving praise to God for our safety.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION XVII.
+
+
+_Tenth Voyage of the English East India Company, in 1612, written by Mr
+Thomas Best, chief Commander_.[72]
+
+From the full tide of this voyage, in the Pilgrims, we learn that there
+were two ships employed in this _tenth_ voyage, named the Dragon and the
+Hosiander, in which were about 380 persons; and these were accompanied
+by two other ships, the James and the Solomon, which belonged to other
+voyages, each voyage being then a separate adventure, and conducted by a
+separate subscription stock, as formerly explained in the introduction
+to the present chapter. We learn from other parts of the Pilgrims, that
+the James belonged to the _ninth_ voyage, related immediately before
+this, and the Solomon to the _eleventh_, to be afterwards narrated.--E.
+
+[Footnote 72: Purch. Pilgr. I.456.]
+
+§1. _Observations during the Voyage from England to Surat_.
+
+We sailed from Gravesend on the 1st of February, 1612. At noon on the
+22d March we made the latitude 15° 20' N. and at two p.m. were abreast
+of Mayo, one of the Cape Verd islands, being S.W. by S. about twelve
+leagues from Bonavista. To the N. and N.N.W. of Mayo the ground is all
+foul, and due N. of the high hummocks a great ledge of rocks runs out
+from the land for five or six miles, a mile without which ledge there
+are twenty fathoms water. On the west side of the island, you may borrow
+in twelve or fifteen fathoms, till you come into the road, where we
+anchored in twenty-four fathoms.
+
+On the morning of the 28th March, we came close by an island in lat. 23°
+30', and long. from the meridian of Mayo, 1° 50' E. We did not land upon
+this island, but came within two or three miles of it, and in my opinion
+there is hardly any anchorage to be found. It may probably produce some
+refreshment, as it certainly has wood, which we saw, and it may have
+water, as we observed a fair plain spot and very green on its southern
+part; but we could find no ground within two or three miles of its
+coast. E.N.E. some seven or eight leagues from this, there is another
+island; and E. by S. or E.S.E. from the first island, about four or five
+leagues, there are two or three white rocks.[73]
+
+[Footnote 73: In the text it is not said if the latitude be N. or S. yet
+S. is probably meant. No island is however to be found in the indicated
+situation. In the _eleventh_ voyage, an island is said to have been
+discovered in lat. 19° 34'S. certainly known to have been Trinidad,
+Santa Maria d'Agosto, or Martin Vaz, of which hereafter.--E.]
+
+We remained twenty-one days in Saldanha road, and bought for the
+three[74] ships thirty-nine beeves and 115 sheep, which we paid for with
+a little brass cut out of two or three old kettles. We got the sheep for
+small pieces of thin brass, worth about a penny or three halfpence each;
+and the beeves in the same manner for about the value of twelve-pence
+a-piece. This is an excellent place of refreshment, as besides abounding
+in beef and mutton, there is plenty of good fish, all kinds of fowls,
+and great store of fat deer, though we could not kill any of these. It
+has likewise excellent streams of fresh water, and a most healthful
+climate. We landed eighty or ninety sick, who were lodged in tents, and
+they all recovered their health in eighteen days, save one who died.
+From the 7th to the 28th June, when we set sail from Saldanha bay, we
+had continual fine weather, the sun being very warm, and the air
+pleasant and wholesome.
+
+[Footnote 74: One of the ships appears to have been separated from the
+fleet, but it does not appear which.--E.]
+
+We sailed from Saldanha road on the 28th June, and were 100 leagues to
+the east of _Cabo das Aguilhas_ before we found any current, but it was
+then strong. The 31st July at noon, we found the latitude 17° 8' S. our
+longitude being 20° 47' E. and at four p.m. we saw the island of _Juan
+de Nova_, distant four leagues E.S.E.[75] Its size, and I think we saw
+it all, is about three or four miles long, all very low and rising from
+the sea like rocks. Off the west end we saw breakers, yet could not get
+ground with a line of 150 fathoms, sounding from our boat. The latitude
+of this island, observed with great accuracy, is 17°,[76] and it seems
+well laid down in our charts, both in regard to latitude and longitude.
+It is a most sure sign of being near this island, when many sea fowl are
+seen, and we accordingly saw there ranch fowl, some white, having their
+wings tipped only with black, and others all black.
+
+[Footnote 75: St Juan de Nova is in lat. 17° 50' S. and long. 45° 30'E.
+from Greenwich--E.]
+
+[Footnote 76: In lat. 17° S. and long. 60° E. is an island or bank
+called Nazareth, Corados, or Garajos, a long way however from St Juan de
+Nova.--E.]
+
+The 3d August, in lat 13° 35' by observation, and longitude 22° 30' from
+the Cape, we saw _Mal-Ilha_, one of the Comoros, about twelve leagues
+off, having on the east part of it a very fair sugar-loaf hill.[77] At
+the same time with this island, we had sight of that named Comoro,
+bearing N.N.W. by W. being high land. At six a.m. of the 4th we were
+close in with _Mal-Ilha_, and standing in for some place in which to
+anchor, while some eight or nine miles from the shore, we saw the ground
+under the ship in not less than eight or ten fathoms. The Hosiander, two
+miles nearer the land, had four or five fathoms, and her boat was in
+three fathoms. We then sent both our boats to sound, which kept shoaling
+on a bank in eight, ten, and twelve fathoms, and off it only half a
+cable's length had no ground with 100 fathoms. At the north end of
+Mal-Ilha there is a fair big high island, about five or six miles in
+circuit.[78] A bank or ledge of rocks extends all along the west side of
+Mal-Ilha, continuing to the small high island; and from this little
+island to Mal-Ilha may be some eight or nine miles, all full of rocks,
+two of them of good height. Being at the north end of this ledge, and
+the little island bearing S.E. you may steer in with the land, keeping
+the island fair aboard; and within the rocks or broken ground and
+Mal-Ilha there is a bay with good anchorage. To the eastwards, on coming
+in from the ledge of rocks, there is a great shoal, the outermost end of
+which is N.E. or N.E. by E. from the small island five or six miles, and
+no ground between that we could find with forty or fifty fathoms line.
+In fine, all the north side of Mal-Ilha is very dangerous, but the
+above-mentioned channel is quite safe. I would have come to anchor here,
+as there is a town about a mile east from the before-mentioned bay, the
+people being very good, and having abundance of refreshments, as beeves,
+goats, hens, lemons, cocoa-nuts in great plenty, and excellent water,
+but could not get in, owing to the wind being directly south.
+
+[Footnote 77: Mohilla, the Mal-ilha of the text, is in lat. 16° 44° S.
+and long. 44° E. from Greenwich. Its difference of long. from the Cape
+of Good Hope is 23° 45' E. Thus, in every instance hitherto, the
+observations of lat. and long. by Captain Best, at least as printed by
+Purchas, are grossly erroneous.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 78: This description seems rather to refer to the island of
+Mayotto, about thirty leagues E. of S. from Mohilla; the small island to
+the north, or N. by W. being called Saddle Isle.--E.]
+
+Two of my men had belonged to a Dutch fleet, that year when they
+assaulted Mosambique, on which occasion they put in here, and recovered
+the healths of 400 or 500 men in five weeks. Yet it is well named
+Mal-Ilha, or the bad island, for it is the most dangerous of any place I
+ever saw. It is next to Comoro, from which it is distant some twelve or
+fourteen leagues S.S.E.
+
+At dawn on the 1st September we got sight of land to the eastwards, four
+or five leagues distant, my reckoning being then eighty or ninety
+leagues short, owing, I suppose, to some current setting east from the
+coast of Melinda; neither from the latitude of Socotoro to Damaun could
+we see the sun, to know our variation. The 3d at seven a.m. we spoke two
+country boats, which informed us that the town, church, and castle in
+sight was Damaun. From these boats I got two men, who engaged to carry
+the Dragon to the bar of Surat, promising not to bring us into less than
+seven fathoms. On the 5th a Surat boat came on board with _Jaddow_ the
+broker, who had served Captain William Hawkins three years, and Sir
+Henry Middleton all the time he was here. There were likewise in this
+boat the brother of the customer of Surat, and three or four others. All
+these remained with us till the 7th, when we came to anchor at the bar
+of Surat, in eight 1/4 fathoms at high water, and six 1/2 at neap tides.
+At spring tides, however, I have found the tide to rise in the offing
+three fathoms, and even three 1/2. The latitude of our anchorage was 21°
+10' N. and the variation 16° 20' or 16° 27'.[79] On the 11th, _Thomas
+Kerridge_ came aboard, with a certificate or licence under the seals of
+the justice and governor of Surat, for our quiet and peaceable trade and
+intercourse, and with kind entreaties to come ashore, where we should be
+heartily welcomed by the people. They also brought off a letter or
+narrative, written by Sir, Henry Middleton, which had been left in
+charge of the _Moccadam_ of Swally. On the same day, I again sent Mr
+Kerridge ashore, accompanied by Hugh Gettins.
+
+[Footnote 79: Sorat bar is in lat. 21° 2' N. and long. 72° 50' E. from
+Greenwich--E.]
+
+§2. _Transactions with the Subjects of the Mogul, Fights with the
+Portuguese, Settlement of a Factory, and Departure for Acheen_.
+
+On the 13th September, 1612, sixteen sail of Portuguese frigates, or
+barks, put into the river of Surat. The 22d, we determined in council to
+send a dispatch to the king at Agra, signifying our arrival, and to
+require his explicit answer, whether he would permit us to trade and
+settle a factory; and if refused, that we would quit his country. The
+30th, I got notice that Mr Canning, our purser, and William Chambers,
+had been arrested ashore; wherefore I caused a ship of Guzerat to anchor
+close beside me, determining to detain her till I should see how matters
+went ashore. We also stopped a bark laden with rice from Bassare,
+belonging to the Portuguese, out of which we took twelve or fourteen
+quintals of rice, for which we paid at the rate of thirteen-pence the
+quintal. When I had taken possession of the Guzerat ship, I wrote to the
+chiefs of Surat, requiring them to send me all my men, together with the
+value of the goods I had landed; on which I should deliver up their ship
+and people, allowing them till the 5th of October to give me an answer;
+at which time, if I had not a satisfactory answer, I declared my
+determination to dispose of the ship and her goods at my pleasure. There
+were some 400 or 450 men aboard that ship, ten of the chiefest among
+whom I brought into my ship, to serve as hostages.
+
+On the 6th October, _Medi Joffer_ came aboard my ship, accompanied by
+four chiefs and many others, bringing me a great present, and came to
+establish trade with us, and to solicit the release of the Guzerat ship.
+On the 10th I left the bar of Surat, and came to Swally roads, where I
+anchored in eight fathoms at high water. This road-stead is ten or
+twelve miles north from the bar of Surat. The 17th, the governor of
+_Aamadavar_ [Ahmedabad] came to the water side. I landed on the 19th,
+having four principal persons sent aboard my ship, as pledges for my
+safety. On the 21st I concluded upon articles of agreement with the
+governor and merchants, of which the tenor follows:
+
+"Articles agreed upon, and sealed, by the governor of Ahmedabad, the
+governor of Surat, and four principal merchants; and to be confirmed by
+the firmaun and seal of the Great Mogul, within forty days from the date
+and sealing hereof, or else to be void; for the settlement of trade and
+factories in the cities of Surat, Cambaya, Ahmedabad, Goga, or in any
+other part or parts of the dominions of the Great Mogul in this country.
+Witnessed by their hands and seals, the 21st of October, 1612."
+
+1. All that concerns Sir Henry Middleton is to be remitted, acquitted,
+and cleared to us; so that they shall never make seizure, stoppage, or
+stay of our goods, wares, or commodities, as satisfaction for the same.
+
+2. They shall procure at their own proper cost, from the King or Great
+Mogul, his grant and confirmation of all the articles of this agreement,
+under the great seal of his government, and shall deliver the same to
+us, for our security and certainty of perpetual amity, commerce, and
+dealing, within forty days from the date and sealing hereof.
+
+3. It shall be lawful for the king of England to keep his ambassador
+continually at the court of the Great Mogul, during all the time of this
+peace and trade, there to accommodate and conclude upon all such great
+and weighty matters as may in any respect tend to disturb or break the
+said peace.
+
+4. At all times, on the arrival of any of our ships in the road of
+Swally, proclamation shall be made in the city of Surat, during three
+successive days, that all the people of the country shall be free to
+come down to the shore, and there to have free trade, dealing, and
+commerce with us.
+
+5. That all English commodities shall pay custom, according to the
+value or price they bear, at the time of entry at the custom-house,
+after the rate of three 1/2 per cent. ad valorem.
+
+6. All petty and pedlar ware to be free from duty, that does not exceed
+the value of ten dollars.
+
+7. The English are to have ten _manu_ carried from the water side to
+Surat for a _manuda_,[80] and at the same rate back; and are to be
+furnished with carts on application to the _moccadam_ of Swally for
+sending to Surat, and at that place by a broker with carts downwards to
+the sea side at Swally.
+
+[Footnote 80: This unexplained rate of carriage was probably ten
+_manuda_ for one _mahinoodic_.--E.]
+
+8. If any of our people die in the country, neither the king, the
+governor, nor any inferior officer should pretend any title or claim to
+any thing that had belonged to the deceased, neither should demand any
+fees, taxes, or customs, upon the same.
+
+9. In case all the men left in these parts should die before the return
+of any of our ships, then some officer appointed for the purpose shall
+make a true inventory and schedule of all monies, goods, jewels,
+provisions, apparel, or other things, belonging to our nation, and shall
+safely preserve and keep the same, to be delivered over to the general,
+captain, or merchants of the first English ships that arrive afterwards,
+from whom a regular receipt and discharge shall be given for the same.
+
+10. That they shall guarantee all our men and goods on land, redeeming
+all of both or either that may happen to be taken on the land by the
+Portuguese; delivering both to us again free of all charges, or in lieu
+thereof the full value of our said goods and men, and that without
+delay.
+
+11. Insomuch as there are rebels and disobedient subjects in all
+kingdoms, so there may be some pirates and sea-rovers of our nation, who
+may happen to come into these parts to rob or steal. In that case, the
+trade and factory belonging to the English shall not be held responsible
+or liable to make restitution for goods so taken; but we shall aid the
+subjects of the Great Mogul, to the best of our power who may happen to
+be thus aggrieved, by application to our king for justice against the
+aggressors, and for procuring restitution.
+
+12. That all victuals and provisions, required during the stay of our
+ships in the roads of Surat and Swally, shall be free of custom,
+provided they do not exceed the value of 1000 dollars.
+
+13. That in all questions of wrongs and injuries offered to us and to
+our nation, we shall receive speedy justice from the judges and others
+in authority, according to the nature of our complaints and the wrongs
+done to us, and shall not be put off by delays, or vexed by exorbitant
+charges or loss of time.
+
+On the 24th October, I landed the present intended for the Great Mogul,
+which I brought to the tent of the governor of Ahmedabad, who took a
+memorandum of all the particulars, as also a copy of our king's letter
+to their sovereign. After which, as before agreed upon with the
+governor, I sent them back aboard ship: For I had told him, unless his
+king would confirm the articles agreed upon, and likewise write our king
+a letter, that I would neither deliver the present nor our king's
+letter; for, if these things were refused, then was their king an enemy
+not a friend, and I had neither present nor letter for the enemy of our
+king. At this time, however, I delivered our present to the governor,
+and another to his son.
+
+The 14th November, a great fleet of frigates or barks, consisting of
+some 240 sail, came in sight. I thought they had come to attack us, but
+they were a _caffila_ of merchantmen bound for Cambaya; as there comes
+every year a similar fleet from Goa, Chaul, and other places to the
+southwards, for Cambaya, whence they bring the greatest part of the
+loading which is carried by the caracks and galleons to Portugal.
+
+The 27th I received notice from Mr Canning and Edward Christian, who
+were both ashore, that four galleons were fitted out from Goa, and were
+coming to attack us, having been in full readiness, and at anchor on the
+bar of Goa on the 14th November. The Portuguese fleet came in sight of
+us on the 28th; and on the 29th drew near us with the tide of flood. At
+two in the afternoon I got under weigh, and by four was about two
+cables length from their vice-admiral, fearing to go nearer lest I might
+have got my ship aground. I then opened a fire upon him, both with great
+guns and small arms, and in an hour had peppered him well with some
+fifty-six great shot. From him we received one small ball, either from a
+minnion or saker, into our mizen-mast, and with another he sunk our
+long-boat, which we recovered, but lost many things out of it.
+
+The 30th at day-light, I set sail and steered among the midst of the
+Portuguese fleet, bestirring ourselves manfully, and drove three of
+their four ships aground on the bar of Surat; after which I anchored
+about nine a.m. This morning the Hosiander did good service, coming
+through also among the enemy's ships, and anchored beside me. At the
+tide of flood, the three ships that were aground floated. We then
+weighed and made sail towards them, they remaining at anchor. On getting
+up to them, we spent upon three of them 150 great shot, and the morning
+after some fifty more. At night, we gave the admiral a salute from our
+four stern guns as a farewell; in return for which he fired one of his
+bow guns, a whole or demi-culverine, the shot from which came even with
+the top of our forecastle, went through our _Davie_, killed William
+Burrel, and carried off the arm of another of our men. The Hosiander[81]
+spent the whole of this day in firing against one of the ships that was
+aground, and received many shots from the enemy, one of which killed
+Richard Barker the boatswain.
+
+[Footnote 81: Nathaniel Salmon of Leigh was master of the
+Hosiander.--_Purch._]
+
+Night coming on, we anchored some six miles from the Portuguese ships;
+and at nine p.m. they sent a frigate down towards us, which came driving
+right _athwart halse_ of the Hosiander, and being discovered by their
+good watch, was speedily saluted by shot. The first shot made them hoist
+sail, the second went through their sails, and, they immediately made
+off.[82] Their intention certainly was to have set our ships on fire, if
+they had found us off our guard.[83]
+
+[Footnote 82: This frigate was sunk by the shot, as I was assured by Mr
+Salmon the actor, and eighty of her men were taken up drowned.--_Purch._]
+
+[Footnote 83: On this occasion the Portuguese had four great galleons
+and some twenty-six frigates, or armed barks. In these fights they lost
+all their _quondam_ credit, and 160 men, or as others say 500; and the
+English settled trade at Surat in spite of all their efforts.--_Purch._]
+
+We remained at anchor all the first December, the Portuguese not coming
+to us nor we to them; though they might easily have come to us without
+danger from the sands, but not so we to them. This day I called a
+council, and it was concluded to go down to the south, that we might
+have a broader channel, hoping that the galleons would follow us. We
+accordingly went down some six or seven leagues on the 2d, but they did
+not follow us; wherefore on the 3d we stood up again, and anchored
+fairly in sight of them. We weighed again on the morning of the 4th, and
+stood away before them, they following: But in the afternoon they gave
+us over, and hauled in with the land, and at night we directed our
+course for Diu. At night of the 5th, we anchored in fourteen fathoms
+near the shore, four or five leagues eastwards of Diu.
+
+The 9th we came to _Madafaldebar_[84] which is ten or eleven leagues E.
+by N. from Diu, the coast between being very fair, and having no unseen
+dangers. The depth near Diu is fifteen or sixteen fathoms, halfway to
+_Madafaldebar_ twelve fathoms, then ten and nine, but not less; and in
+nine fathoms we anchored in a fine sandy bay, on the west side of which
+is a river coming from a considerable distance inland. This place is
+some five or six miles west from the isles of _Mortie_[85] The 15th we
+set sail to explore the bay of _Mohar_,[86] having been reported by some
+of the people who had belonged to the Ascension to be a good place for
+wintering in, or waiting the return of the monsoon for sailing to the
+southwards. We accordingly anchored that night in the bay, which is nine
+or ten leagues E.N.E. from Madafaldebar, finding the coast and
+navigation perfectly good, with ten fathoms all the way, and no danger
+but what is seen. I sent my boat ashore, and got twenty excellent sheep
+for three shillings each, the best we had seen in the whole voyage. We
+found the ruins of a great town at this place, but very few inhabitants.
+
+[Footnote 84: From the indications in the text, this must be _Jaffrabat_
+on the coast of Guzerat, about thirty-one miles E. by N. from Diu. The
+name used in the text must be taken from the native language, while that
+of modern geography is the Persian, Mogul, or Arabic name of the
+place.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 85: Called _Searbett_ in Arrowsmith's excellent map of
+Hindostan, eight miles E.N.E. from Jaffrabat.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 86: Called on the margin of the Pilgrims, _Moha, Mona_, or
+_Mea_; and which from the context appears to be a bay immediately west
+from _Wagnagur_.--E.]
+
+There happened to be an army encamped in the neighbourhood of this
+place, and on the 17th, the general sent four men to me, requesting a
+conference. I landed on the 21st, and had much conversation with the
+general, who greatly desired to have two pieces of ordnance from us,
+making many fair promises of favour to our nation, and even presented me
+with a horse and furniture and two Agra girdles or sashes; but I refused
+him, having none to spare, and needing all we had for our defence. I
+presented him in return with two vests of stammel cloth, two firelocks,
+two bottles of brandy, and a knife.
+
+The 22d, we saw the four galleons coming towards us, and at nine p.m.
+they anchored within shot of where we lay. At sun-rise next morning we
+weighed and bore down upon them, and continued to fight them till
+between ten and eleven a.m. when they all four weighed and stood away
+before the wind. We followed them two or three hours, but they sailed
+much better large than we, so that we again came to anchor, and they
+likewise anchored about two leagues from us. In this days fight, I
+expended 133 great shot, and about 700 small. At sunrise of the 24th we
+again weighed and bore down upon the galleons, and began to fight them
+at eight a.m. continuing till noon, having this day expended 250 great
+shot, and 1000 small. By this time both sides were weary, and we all
+stood to sea, steering S. by E. The galleons followed us till two or
+three p.m. when they put about and come to anchor. I now took account of
+our warlike ammunition, and found more than half our shot expended, the
+store of the Hosiander being in a similar situation. We had now
+discharged against the enemy 625 great shot, and 3000 small.
+
+Being about four or five leagues from the land, we met with a sand, on
+which there was only two or two 1/2 fathoms, laying S.S.E. or thereabout
+from _Mosa_. I went over it in nine fathoms, at which time the two high
+hills over _Gogo_ were nearly N. from us. Upon this sand the Ascension
+was cast away. Between the main and this sand, the channel is nine and
+ten fathoms, and the shoaling is rather fast. We continued steering S.
+with the tide of ebb, and anchored in eight fathoms, finding the tide to
+set E.N.E. and W.S.W. by the compass. At midnight of the 24th we
+weighed, standing S.S.E. and at two p.m. of the 25th we anchored in
+seventeen fathoms at high water, full in sight of Damaun, which bore
+E.S.E. In the afternoon of the 26th we anchored off the bar of Surat.
+The 27th we went to Swally road, when Thomas Kerridge and Edward
+Christian came aboard.
+
+On the 6th of January, 1613, the _Firmaun_ from the Great Mogul, in
+confirmation of peace and settlement of a factory for trade, came to
+Swally as a private letter; wherefore I refused to receive it, lest it
+might be a counterfeit, requiring that the chief men of Surat should
+come down and deliver it to me, with the proper ceremonials.
+Accordingly, on the 11th, the sabandar, his father-in-law Medigoffar,
+and several others, came to Swally, and delivered the Firmaun to me in
+form, making great professions of respect for our nation in the name of
+their king. The 14th we landed all our cloth, with 310 elephants teeth,
+and all our quicksilver. This day likewise the Portuguese galleons came
+within three or four miles of us. The 16th, I landed Anthony Starkey,
+with orders to travel over land for England, carrying letters to give
+notice of our good success.[87]
+
+[Footnote 87: Mr Starkey and his Indian companion or guide were poisoned
+on the way by two friars.--Purch.]
+
+The 17th, having received all my goods from Surat, I set sail at night,
+leaving these coasts. The 18th we passed the four galleons, which all
+weighed and followed us for two or three hours; but we finally separated
+without exchanging shots. The 19th, when abreast of Basseen, we stopt
+three Malabar barks, which had nothing in them, and from one of which we
+took a boat. The 20th at night we were abreast of Chaul, both town and
+castle being full in sight. In the afternoon of the 21st we were abreast
+of Dabul, where we boarded three junks belonging to Calicut, laden with
+cocoanuts. The 22d in the morning, the Hosiander sent her boat aboard
+two junks, and at noon we were at the rocks, which are ten or eleven
+leagues N. of Goa, and six or eight miles from the main. Two or three of
+these rocks are higher than the hull of a large ship. At six p.m. we
+were abreast of Goa, which is easily known by the island at the month of
+the river, on which island there is a castle. All the way from Damann to
+Goa, the coast trends nearly N. and S. with a slight inclination to N.W.
+and S.E. the whole being very fair and without danger, having fair
+shoaling and sixteen or seventeen fathoms some three or four leagues off
+shore, with good-anchorage every where.
+
+The 24th we saw a fleet of sixty or eighty frigates or barks bound to
+the southwards, being in lat. 13° 00' 30". The high land by the sea now
+left us, and the shore became very low, yet with fair shoaling of
+sixteen and seventeen fathoms some three or four leagues off. In the
+afternoon we went into a bay, where all the before-mentioned frigates
+were at anchor, together with three or four gallies. We brought out a
+ship with us, whence all the Portuguese fled in their boats, and as two
+frigates lay close aboard of her, they had carried away every thing
+valuable. Next day we examined our prize, and found nothing in her
+except rice and coarse sugar, with which we amply supplied both ships;
+and having taken out her masts, and what firing she could afford, we
+scuttled and sunk her, taking out likewise all her people, being twenty
+or twenty-five Moors. The 26th we met a boat belonging to the Maldives
+laden with cocoa-nuts and bound for Cananor, into which I put all the
+people of the prize, except eight, whom I kept to assist in labour, one
+of them being a pilot for this coast.
+
+The 27th we were a little past Calicut, abreast of Paniany, our lat. at
+noon being 10° 30' N. In the morning of the 28th, we saw Cochin, which
+is known by the towers and castle, being in lat 9° 40' N. or thereby.
+All the way from Goa to Cochin we never had above twenty fathoms,
+though, sometimes four or five leagues from the land; and when only
+three, four, or six miles off, the depths were from ten to twelve
+fathoms. From lat 11° 30' N. to Cochin, the land was all very low by the
+water side; but up the country it was very high all along. Four or five
+leagues to the north of Cochin, there is a high land within the country,
+somewhat like a table mountain, yet rounded on the top, having long high
+mountains to the north of this hill. All this day, the 28th, we sailed
+within six or eight miles of the land, in nine, ten, and twelve fathoms.
+
+We anchored on the 30th in fifteen fathoms, about twenty-six leagues to
+the north of Cape Comorin right over against a little village, whence
+presently came off six or eight canoes with water and all kinds of
+provisions; the name of this place is _Beringar_, which our mariners
+usually call Bring-John, being in the kingdom of Travancor. The 1st
+February, the king sent me a message, offering to load my ship with
+pepper and cinnamon, if I would remain and trade with him. The 5th we
+were abreast of Cape Comorin, where we had a fresh gale of wind at E. by
+N. which split our fore-top-sail and main bonnet, yet a canoe with eight
+men came off to us three or four leagues from the land. We were here
+troubled with calms and great heat, and many of our men fell sick, of
+which number I was one. On the 8th we were forced back to the roads of
+_Beringar_. This place has good refreshments for ships, and the people
+are very harmless, and not friends to the Portuguese. From this place to
+Cape Comorin, all the inhabitants of the sea coast are Christians, and
+have a Portuguese priest or friar residing among them. It is to be
+remarked, that the whole coast, even from Damaun to Cape Comorin, is
+free from danger, and there is fair shoaling all the way from Cochin to
+that cape, having sixteen, eighteen, and twenty fathoms close to the
+land, and no ground five or six leagues off, after you come within
+twenty-five or thirty leagues of the Cape. The variation at Damaun was
+16° 30'; halfway to the Cape about 15°, and 14° at the cape, the
+latitude of which is 7° 30' N. [_exactly_ 7° 57'].
+
+In the afternoon we were fair off the Cape, and found much wind at
+E.S.E. giving small hope of being able to go eastwards till the end of
+the monsoon, which our Indians reported would be about the end of April.
+So I bore up, and came to anchor, four or five leagues within the Cape,
+in twenty fathoms close by two rocks. About two miles right off these
+two rocks is a sunken rock, which is very dangerous, especially if
+sailing in twenty fathoms, but by keeping in twenty-four fathoms all
+danger is avoided. We remained here nine days, when we again made sail.
+In the morning of the 28th we had sight of Ceylon, some eight or nine
+leagues E.S.E. being in lat. 7° N. At 4 p.m. we were close in with that
+island, in thirteen, fifteen, and sixteen fathoms. The 1st of March, at
+6 p.m. we were abreast of Columbo, the lat. of which is about 6° 30' N.
+[7° 2']; having twenty-four and twenty-five fathoms three leagues off.
+The 12th we stood in with the land, and anchored in twenty-four fathoms,
+the wind being S.E. and S. I sent my boat ashore four leagues to the
+north of _Punta de Galle_, and after some time a woman came to talk with
+one of our Indians who was in the boat. She said we could have no
+provisions: but by our desire she went to tell the men. Afterwards two
+men came to us, who flatly refused to let us have any thing, alleging
+that our nation had captured one of their boats; but it was the
+Hollanders not the English. The 14th, in the morning, the southern point
+of Ceylon, called _Tanadare_ [Dondra], bore E.S.E. of us, some five
+leagues off. This point is in lat. 5° 30' [5° 54' N.], and is about ten
+or twelve leagues E.S.E. from Punta de Galle. The 17th we were near one
+of the sands mentioned by Linschoten, being two leagues from the land.
+We had twenty-five fathoms water, and on the land, right opposite this
+sand, is a high rock like a great tower. The land here trends E.N.E.[88]
+
+[Footnote 88: Owing probably to careless abbreviation by Purchas, this
+solitary notice is all that is given of the voyage between Dondra-head
+in Ceylon and Acheen, in the north-west end of Sumatra, to which the
+observation in the text seems to refer.--E.]
+
+§3. _Occurrences at Acheen, in Sumatra_.
+
+At noon of the 12th April, 1613, we came to anchor in the road of
+Acheen, in twelve fathoms, but ships may ride in ten or even eight
+fathoms; the best place in which to ride being to the eastward of the
+castle, and off the river mouth. I landed the merchants on the 13th; but
+the king did not come to town till the 15th, when he sent me his _chop_
+or licence to land, which was brought by an eunuch, accompanied by the
+_Xabander_ and six or eight more, to whom I gave 120 _mam_. I landed
+along with them, and two hours afterwards the king sent me a present of
+some provisions, I having sent him on my landing a present of _two
+pieces_;[89] the custom being to make the king some small present on
+landing, in return for which he sends several dishes of meat.
+
+[Footnote 89: These _pieces_, so often mentioned in the early voyages,
+were probably fowling-pieces, or European fire-arms.--E.]
+
+On the 17th, the king sent an elephant, with a golden bason, for our
+king's letter, which I accompanied to court, attended by forty of our
+men, who were all admitted into the king's presence. After many
+compliments, the king returned me our king's letter, that I might read
+it to him; and accordingly the substance of it was explained in the
+native language, with the contents of which he was well pleased. After
+some time, the king told me that he would shew me some of his
+diversions, and accordingly caused his elephants to fight before us.
+When six of them had fought for some time, he caused four buffaloes to
+be brought, which made a very excellent and fierce fight; such being
+their fierceness that sixty or eighty men could hardly part them,
+fastening ropes to their hind-legs to draw them asunder. After these,
+some ten or twelve rams were produced, which fought very bravely. When
+it was so dark that we could hardly see, these sports were discontinued,
+and the king presented me with a banquet of at least 500 dishes, and
+such abundance of hot drinks as might have sufficed to make an army
+drunk. Between nine and ten at night, he gave me leave to depart,
+sending two elephants to carry me home; but as they had no coverings I
+did not ride either of them.
+
+On the 18th, I went again to court by appointment of the king, when we
+began to treat concerning the articles formerly granted by his
+grandfather to Mr James Lancaster; but when we came to that in which all
+goods were to be brought in and carried out free from customs, we broke
+off without concluding any thing. The 19th the ambassador of Siam came
+to visit me, and told me, that about thirty months before, three
+Englishmen had waited upon his king, who gave them kind entertainment,
+being rejoiced at receiving letters from the king of England. He also
+said that his king would be much pleased if our ships came to his ports,
+telling me what great quantities of Portugal cloth, for so he called our
+English cloth, would sell in his country. According to his opinion, the
+colours most saleable in his country are, _stammel_ and other reds,
+yellows, and other light, gay, and pleasing colours, such as those
+already in most request at Surat. He also told me, that his king had
+made a conquest of the whole kingdom of Pegu, as that he is now the most
+powerful sovereign in the east, except the emperor of China, having
+twenty-six tributary kings under his government and authority, and is
+able to equip for war 6000 elephants. Their coin is all of silver, gold
+being less esteemed, and of less proportional value than with us. That
+country produces great abundance of pepper and raw silk; and he said the
+Hollanders have factories at Patane, an excellent port, where they are
+called English. Siam likewise, according to him, is a good port, and
+nearer the court than Patane: Those who go to the city in which the king
+resides land always at the port of Siam, whence the royal residence is
+twenty days journey by land. I requested from the ambassador to give me
+a letter to his sovereign, and letters also to the governors of the
+maritime towns in Siam, in favour of the English nation, when we should
+come upon these coasts, which he promised me. And, lastly, in token of
+friendship we exchanged coins; I giving him some of our English coin,
+and receiving from him the coins of Siam. I had often, after this first
+interview, friendly intercourse with this ambassador.
+
+I went to court on the 20th, butt had no opportunity to speak with the
+king; whereupon I sent to the king's deputy, or chief minister, and
+complained of having been dishonoured, and of having been abused by the
+_shahbander_. He promised me speedy redress, and that he should inform
+the king without delay, which indeed he did that same day. On the day
+following, the king sent two officers of his court to me, to intimate
+that I might repair freely to his court at all times, passing the gate
+without hindrance or waiting for his _criss_. He also removed the
+shahbander of whom I had complained, and appointed a gentleman, who had
+formerly been his vice-ambassador to Holland, to attend upon me at all
+times to court, or any where else, at my pleasure. The 24th I went to
+court, and had access to the king, who satisfied me in all things, and
+promised to ratify and renew all the articles formerly agreed upon
+between his predecessor and Mr James Lancaster. After many compliments,
+he gave me leave; and presently after my return, he sent me an elephant
+to attend upon me, and to carry me at all times to any place I pleased.
+This is a sign of the highest honour and esteem, as no person may have
+an elephant, or ride upon one, but those whom the king is pleased to
+honour with that privilege.
+
+The 2d of May, the king invited me to his fountain to swim, and I was
+there accordingly along with him, the place being some five or six miles
+from the city; and he even sent me two elephants, one to ride upon, and
+the other to carry my provision. Having washed and bathed in the water,
+the king made me partake of a very splendid banquet, in which there was
+too much arrak, the whole being eaten and drank us we sat in the water;
+and at this entertainment all his nobles and officers were present. Our
+banquet continued from one till towards five in the evening, when the
+king allowed me to depart. Half an hour afterwards, all the strangers
+were permitted to go away, and presently afterwards he came away
+himself.
+
+On the 14th, some Portuguese came to Acheen on an embassy from the
+governor of Malacca to the king; and as the wind was scant, they landed
+three leagues to the east of Acheen road. I immediately sent the
+Hosiander, of which I appointed Edward Christian captain, to go in
+search of the bark from Malacca, which was brought to me on the 17th:
+But the king sent me two messengers, desiring me to release her and her
+people and cargo; which I refused, till I had examined the bark and her
+contents; saying, however, that in honour and respect for his majesty, I
+should then do whatever he was pleased to desire. Afterwards, I was
+informed by Mr Christian, that there were only four or five bales of
+goods in the bark, and that nothing she contained had been meddled with.
+Being satisfied of this I went ashore, and found my merchants were at
+the court. They returned presently, saying, that the king was greatly
+displeased at the capture of the Portuguese bark in his port, protesting
+by his god that he would make us all prisoners, if she were not
+released. Having notice that I was ashore, the king presently sent for
+me; and, as I was on my way to the court, I met with a gentleman from
+the king, who desired me in his name to release the bark; but I told him
+I must first see and speak to the king. I was then brought into the
+king's presence, and, after much discourse with him, I gave him the
+bark and all her contents; with which he was so much pleased, that he
+gave me the title of _Arancaia Puto_, signifying the _honourable white
+man_, requiring all his nobles to call me by that name. In farther proof
+of his satisfaction with my conduct on this occasion, he sold me all his
+benzoin at my own price, being twenty _tailes_ the bahar, though then
+selling commonly at thirty-four and thirty-five tailes. He at the same
+time expressed his esteem and affection for me in the strongest terms,
+desiring me to ask from him whatever I thought proper. I only requested
+his letters of recommendation and favour for Priaman, which he most
+readily promised; and, at my taking leave, he both made me eat some
+mangoes, of which he was then eating, and gave me some home with me.
+
+On the 27th, _Malim Cairy_ came to Acheen, by whom I received letters
+from our merchants at Surat, as also a copy of the _firmaun_, sent them
+from Agra, bearing date the 25th January, in the seventh year of the
+then reigning Great Mogul, by which everything was confirmed that had
+been agreed upon between the governor of Ahmedabad and me. The 17th of
+June, a Dutch merchant came to Acheen from Masulipatam, who had been
+eight months on his way, from whom we learnt the death of Mr Anthony
+Hippon at Patane, and of Mr Brown, master of the Globe, who died at
+Masulipatam, where our people had met with evil usage. The 24th I
+received of the king his present for the king of England, consisting of
+a _criss_ or dagger, a _hasega_, four pieces of fine Calicut lawn, and
+eight camphire dishes.[90]
+
+[Footnote 90: In the translation of the letter accompanying these
+presents, to be noticed hereafter, they are thus described:--"A criss
+wrought with gold, the hilt being of beaten gold, with a ring of stones;
+an Assagaya of Swasse, half gold half copper; eight porcelain dishes
+small and great, _of camfire one piece of souring stuff_; three pieces
+of callico lawns."--The passage in Italics is inexplicable, either in
+the words of the letter, or in the description in the text.--E.]
+
+The 3d of July, the fleet of armed vessels belonging to Acheen arrived,
+being only twenty days from the coast of Johor, at which place they had
+captured the factory of the Hollanders, making prize of all their goods,
+and had brought away some twenty or twenty-four Dutchmen as prisoners.
+The 7th, I received the king's letter for Priaman, together with a
+_chop_ or licence for my departure; and on the 12th, taking my leave of
+Acheen, I embarked. In the morning of the 13th I set sail. It is to be
+noted, that, from the 12th April to the middle of June, we had much rain
+here at Acheen, seldom two fair days following, and accompanied, by much
+wind in sudden gusts. From the 15th June to the 12th July, we had
+violent gales of wind, always at S.W. or W.S.W. or W.
+
+§4. _Trade at Tecoo and Passaman, with the Voyage to Bantam, and thence
+Home to England_.
+
+Leaving Acheen, as said before, on the 13th July, 1613, we came in sight
+of _Priaman_ on the 3d of August, it being then nine or ten leagues off,
+N.E. by E. and clearly known by two great high hills, making a great
+_swamp_ or saddle between them. We saw also the high land of _Tecoo_,
+which is not more than half the height of that of Priaman, and rises
+somewhat flat. At the same time likewise we saw the high land of
+_Passaman_, some seven or eight leagues north of Tecoo, mid-way between
+Tecoo and Priaman, which mountain is very high, and resembles Aetna in
+Sicily.[91] In the afternoon of the 7th we came to Tecoo, and anchored
+to the eastward of the three islands in seven fathoms, the southmost
+isle bearing W.S.W. the middle isle W.N.W. and the northern isle N. 1/2
+E. our anchorage being a mile from them.
+
+[Footnote 91: Perhaps this observed similarity with Aetna is meant to
+indicate that this hill also is a volcano.--E.]
+
+I sent ashore my merchants on the 19th, and landed myself in the
+afternoon. Next day, by advice of our council, the Hosiander was sent to
+Priaman, with the letter of the king of Acheen. She sailed from Tecoo on
+the 12th, and came back on the 18th, when she was dispatched to Bantam.
+The 25th there came a junk from Bantam, the owners of which were
+Chinese. They confirmed to me the reported death of Sir Henry Middleton,
+with the loss of most of the men belonging to the Trades-increase, in
+consequence of her main-mast breaking, while heaving her down for
+careening her bottom. She was now returned from Pulo-Pannian to Bantam,
+and they said that three hundred Chinese had died while employed at work
+upon her.
+
+The 28th a boat I had sent to Passaman returned, having been well
+entertained at that place, and brought with them the _Scrivano_ to deal
+with me, with whom accordingly I concluded a bargain. The 29th, the
+governor of Tecoo sent for me to come ashore, when I went to wait upon
+him. He was in council, with all the chiefs of the district, and, after
+a long discussion, we agreed on the following price of pepper. In the
+first place, we were to pay eighteen dollars the bahar; then there was
+8d. the bahar for lastage or weighing, 30d. for _canikens_, and 35 d.
+for _seilars_: Besides all which they bargained for presents to sixteen
+chiefs or great men. On the 30th, Henry Long came from Passaman, and
+informed me that Mr Oliver had fallen sick, and that several others of
+our men had died there; upon which I sent my pinnace to bring back Mr
+Oliver and all others who survived, and to discontinue our factory at
+that place.
+
+The 21st October, the Hosiander returned from Bantam, bringing me
+letters from the English merchants at that place; saying that they had
+17,000 bags of pepper ready, all of which I might have, or any part of
+it I thought proper, if I chose to come for it, at thirteen dollars the
+_timbane_. On this, and several other considerations, I held a
+mercantile council, in which it was agreed that the Hosiander should be
+left at _Tecoo_ for the sale of our Surat goods, all of which were
+accordingly put on board her for that purpose, and I departed in the
+Dragon for Bantam from the road of Tecoo on the 30th October. I remained
+in this road of Tecoo eleven weeks, in which time I bought 115 or 120
+tons of pepper, and buried twenty-five of our men. All of these either
+died, or contracted their mortal illnesses at Passaman, not at Tecoo;
+and surely, if we had not attempted to trade at Passaman, all, or at
+least most of these, might have now been living. Wherefore, I earnestly
+advise all of our nation to avoid sending any of their ships or men to
+Passaman, for the air there is so contagious, and the water so
+unwholesome, that it is impossible for our people to live at that place.
+
+I set sail from Tecoo on the 30th October, and arrived in the road of
+Bantam on the 11th November, where I anchored in a quarter less four
+fathoms, [3-3/4 fathoms.] Next day I convened our English merchants on
+board my ship, and agreed on the price of pepper at thirteen dollars the
+_bahar_, which is 600 pounds of our weight. Having concluded my business
+at this place, I set sail for Saldanha bay; where I bought for a small
+quantity of copper, worth perhaps between three and four pounds, 494
+sheep, 4 beeves, and 9 calves. We sailed again from that place on the
+4th March, 1614; and on the day of our departure, the natives brought us
+more live-stock than we knew how to dispose of; but we brought away
+alive, eighty sheep, two beeves, and one calf.
+
+The 24th of March we saw St Helena, eight or nine leagues to the W.N.W.
+its latitude, by my estimation, being 16° S. and its long, from the Cape
+of Good Hope, 22° W. At three p.m. we anchored in the road of that
+island, right over-against the Chappel. While at St Helena, finding the
+road from the Chappel [church valley], to where the lemon-trees grow, a
+most wicked way, insomuch that it was a complete day's work to go and
+come, I sent my boats to the westward, in hopes of finding a nearer and
+easier way to bring down hogs and goats. In this search, my people found
+a fair valley; some three or four miles to the S.W. which leads directly
+to the lemon-trees, and is the largest and finest valley in the island,
+after that at the Chappel, and is either the next, or the next save one,
+from the valley of the Chappel. At this valley, which is some three or
+four miles from that of the Chappel, and is from it the fourth valley or
+swamp one way, and from the point to the westward the second, so that it
+cannot be missed, it is much better and easier for getting provisions or
+water, and the water is better and clearer. The road or anchorage is all
+of one even ground and depth, so that it is much better riding here than
+at any other part of the island; and from this place, a person may go up
+to the lemon-trees and back again in three hours. We here got some
+thirty hogs and pigs, and twelve or fourteen hundred lemons; but if we
+had laid ourselves out for the purpose, I dare say we might have got 200
+hogs, besides many goats.
+
+Continuing our voyage home, we got sight of the Lizard point on the 4th
+June, 1614, our estimated longitude from the Cape of Good Hope being
+then 27° 20', besides two degrees carried by the currents; so that the
+difference of longitude, between the Cape and the Lizard, is 29° 20', or
+very nearly. Though we had then only left the Cape of Good Hope three
+months before, and were only two months and nine days from St Helena,
+more than half our company was now laid up by the scurvy, of which two
+had died. Yet we had plenty of victuals, as beef, bread, wine, rice,
+oil, vinegar, and sugar, as much as every one chose. All our men have
+taken their sickness since we fell in with Flores and Corvo; since which
+we have had very cold weather, especially in two great storms, one from
+the N. and N.N.E. and the other at N.W. so that it seemeth the sudden
+coming out of long heat into the cold is a great cause of scurvy. All
+the way from the Cape of Good Hope to the Azores, I had not one man
+sick.
+
+The 15th of June, 1614, we came into the river Thames, by the blessing
+of God, it being that day six months on which we departed from Bantam in
+Java.
+
+
+SECTION XVIII.
+
+_Observations made during the foregoing Voyage, by Mr Copland, Chaplain,
+Mr Robert Boner, Master, and Mr Nicholas Whittington, Merchant_.[92]
+
+[Footnote 92: Purch. Pilgr. I. 466. On this occasion, only such notices
+as illustrate the preceding voyage are extracted.--E.]
+
+§1. _Notes extracted from the Journal of Mr Copland, Chaplain of the
+Voyage_.
+
+The bay of Saldhana, and all about the Cape of Good Hope, is healthful,
+and so fruitful that it might well be accounted a terrestrial paradise.
+It agrees well with our English constitutions; for, though we had ninety
+or an hundred sick when we got there, they were all as well in twenty
+days as when we left England, except one. It was then June, and we had
+snow on the hills, though the weather below was warmish. The country is
+mixed, consisting of mountains, plains, meadows, streams, and woods
+which seem as if artificially planted on purpose, they are so orderly;
+and it has abundance of free-stone for building. It has also plenty of
+fish and wild-fowl, as geese, ducks, and partridges, with antelopes,
+deer, and other animals. The people were very loving, though at first
+afraid of us, because the Dutch, who resort hither to make train-oil,
+had used them unkindly, having stolen and killed their cattle; but
+afterwards, and especially on our return, they were more frank and kind.
+They are of middle size, well limbed, nimble and active; and are fond of
+dancing, which they do in just measure, but entirely naked. Their dress
+consists of a cloak of sheep or seals-skin to their middle, the hair
+side inwards, with a cap of the same, and a small skin like that of a
+rat hanging before their privities. Some had a sole, or kind of sandal,
+tied to their feet. Their necks were adorned with greasy tripes, which
+they would sometimes pull off and eat raw; and when we threw away the
+guts of beasts and sheep we bought from them, they would eat them half
+raw and all bloody, in a most beastly and disgusting manner. They had
+bracelets about their arms of copper or ivory, and were decorated with
+many ostrich feathers and shells. The women were habited like the men,
+and were at first very shy; but when here on our return voyage, they
+became quite familiar, even lifting their rat-skins: But they are very
+loathsome objects, their breasts hanging down to their waists. The hair
+both of the men and women is short and frizzled. With these people
+copper serves as gold, and iron for silver. Their dwellings are small
+tents, removable, at pleasure; and their language is full of a strange
+_clicking_ sound, made by doubling their tongues in their throats. There
+is a high hill, called the _Table Mountain_, which covers all the
+adjoining territory for an hundred miles. The natives, who are quite
+black, behaved to us very peaceably, but seemed to have no religion, yet
+their skins were slashed or cut, like the priests of Baal; and one
+seemed to act as chief, as he settled the prices for the whole. Some of
+our people went a considerable way into the country, and discovered many
+bays and rivers.
+
+When at Surat, the Guzerats took some of our sea-coal to send to their
+sovereign, the Great Mogul, as a curiosity. At this place there came
+against us a Portuguese squadron of four galleons, attended by
+twenty-five or twenty-six armed barks or frigates, commanded by an
+admiral named Nuno de Accunna, and having all red colours displayed, in
+token of defiance. When advised by the sabander to keep between us and
+the shore, he proudly answered, That he scorned to spend a week's
+provisions on his men in hindering us from trade, as he was able to
+force us to yield to his superior force in an hour. After three fights,
+they sent one of their frigates against us, manned with six or seven
+score of their best men, intending to set us on fire, but they were all
+sunk.
+
+_Medhaphrabad_,[93] formerly a fine walled city, has been entirely
+ruined in the wars of the Moguls. It has still a strong castle, held by
+a refractory chief of the Rajapoots, and was besieged by the nabob,
+having fifty or sixty thousand men in his camp. The nabob dwelt in a
+magnificent tent, covered above with cloth of gold, and spread below
+with Turkey carpets, having declared he would not desist from the siege
+till he had won the castle. He sent a horse, and two vests wrought with
+silk and gold, to our general Captain Best, with four vests for four
+others. On the 23d and 24th of December, we fought again with the
+Portuguese, in view of the whole army of the Moguls, and forced them to
+cut their cables and flee from us, being better sailing vessels than
+ours.
+
+[Footnote 93: Called Madafaldebar in the preceding section, and there
+supposed to be the place now named Jaffrabat, on the coast of
+Guzerat.--E.]
+
+I rode from Swally to Surat in a coach drawn by oxen, which are
+ordinarily used in this country for draught, though they have plenty of
+excellent and handsome horses. On the way I was quite delighted to see
+at the same time the goodliest spring and harvest combined I had ever
+seen any where, often in two adjoining fields, one as green as a fine
+meadow, and the other waving yellow like gold, and ready to cut down;
+their grain being wheat and rice, of which they make excellent bread.
+All along the road there were many goodly villages, full of trees which
+yield a liquor called _toddy_, or palm-wine, which is sweet and
+pleasant, like new wine, being strengthening and fattening. They have
+grapes also, yet only make wine from the dried raisins. In Surat there
+are many fair houses built of stone and brick, having flat roofs, and
+goodly gardens, abounding in pomegranates, pomecitrons, lemons, melons,
+and figs, which are to be had at all times of the year, the gardens
+being continually refreshed with curious springs and fountains of fresh
+water. The people are tali, neat, and well-clothed in long robes of
+white callico or silk, and are very grave and judicious in their
+behaviour. The sabander assured us that we had slain 350 of the
+Portuguese; but we heard afterwards, that above 500 were killed or
+maimed. Our general sent letters for England by land, but the messenger
+and his Indian attendant were poisoned by two friars. A second letter
+was entrusted to a mariner, which reached its destination.
+
+We anchored in the road of Acheen on the 12th April, 1613, where we were
+kindly received by the king. On the 2d of May, all the strangers then at
+Acheen were invited to a banquet at a place six miles from the town, and
+on this occasion two elephants were sent for our general. To this place
+all the dishes were brought by water by boys, who swam with one hand,
+while each carried a dish in--the other; and the drink was brought in
+the same manner. When the guests had satisfied themselves with tasting
+any of the dishes, which indeed they must of all, the remainder was
+thrown into the river. In this feast there were at least 500 dishes
+served, all well dressed. It continued from one o'clock till five; but
+our general, who was wearied with sitting so long in the water beside
+the king, was dismissed an hour before the other guests. The captain or
+chief merchant of the Dutch factory, either by taking too much strong
+drink, or from sitting too long in the cold water, caught an illness of
+which he died soon after.
+
+The 2d June we were entertained by a fight of four elephants with a wild
+tyger, which was tied to a stake; yet did he fasten on the legs and
+trunks of the elephants, making them to roar and bleed extremely. This
+day, as we were told, one eye of a nobleman was plucked out by command
+of the king, for having looked at one of the king's women, while bathing
+in the river. Another gentleman, wearing a sash, had his head cut round,
+because it was too large. Some he is said to throw into boiling oil,
+some to be sawn in pieces, others to have their legs cut off, or spitted
+alive, or empaled on stakes. The 25th of June, the king of Acheen sent
+our general a letter for the king of England, most beautifully written
+and painted, of which the following is a translation of the
+preamble.[94]
+
+[Footnote 94: Being merely complimentary, it has not been deemed
+necessary to give any more of this letter than the hyperbolical titles
+assumed by the petty Mallay rajah.--E.]
+
+_PEDUCKA SIRIE, Sultan, King of kings renowned in war, sole king of
+Sumatra, more famous than his ancestors, feared in his dominions, and
+honoured in all the neighbouring countries. In whom is the true image of
+a king, reigning by the true rules of government, formed as it were of
+the most pure metal, and adorned by the must splendid colours. Whose
+seat is most high and complete; whence floweth, as a river of fine
+crystal, the pure and undefiled stream of bounty and justice. Whose
+presence is like the most pure gold: King of Priaman, and of the
+mountain of gold: Lord of nine sorts of precious stones: King of two
+Umbrellas of beaten gold; who sitteth upon golden carpets; the furniture
+of whose horses, and his _own armour, are of pure gold; the teeth of his
+elephants being likewise of gold, and every thing belonging to them. His
+lances half gold half silver; his small shot of the same; a saddle also
+for an elephant of the same; a tent of silver; and all his seals half
+gold half silver. His bathing-vessels of pure gold; his sepulchre also
+entire gold, those of his predecessors being only half gold half silver.
+All the services of his table of pure gold; &c.
+
+This great king sendeth this letter of salutation to James, king of
+Great Britain, &c._
+
+This king of Acheen is a gallant-looking warrior, of middle size, and
+full of spirit. His country is populous, and he is powerful both by sea
+and land. He has many elephants, of which we saw 150 or 180 at one time.
+His gallies are well armed with brass ordnance, such as demi-cannons,
+culverins, sackers, minions, &c. His buildings are stately and spacious,
+though not strong; and his court or palace at Acheen is very pleasant,
+having a goodly branch of the main river surrounding and pervading it,
+which he cut and brought in from the distance of six miles in twenty
+days, while we were there. At taking leave, he desired our general to
+offer his compliments to the king of England, and to entreat that two
+white women might be sent him: "For," said he, "if I have a son by one
+of them, I will make him king of Priaman, Passaman, and the whole pepper
+coast; so that you shall not need to come any more to me, but may apply
+to your own English king for that commodity."
+
+§2. _Notes concerning the Voyage, extracted from the Journal of Mr
+Robert Boner, who was Master of the Dragon_.
+
+The regular trade-wind is seldom met with till two or three degrees
+south of the equator. Tornados are sure to be encountered in two or
+three degrees north of the line, and sometimes even four degrees. It is
+necessary to use the utmost diligence in getting well to the south, as
+in that consists the difference between a good and bad voyage, and the
+health of the men depend greatly on that circumstance. In passing the
+line, it is proper so to direct the course from the island of Mayo as to
+cross between the longitudes of _seven_ and _nine_ degrees _west_ of the
+Lizard, if possible. At all events be careful not to come within _six_
+degrees, for fear of the calms on the coast of Guinea, and not beyond
+_ten_ degrees west from the Lizard if possible, to avoid the W.N.W.
+stream which sets along the coast of Brazil to the West Indies; and in
+crossing the line, in 7°, 8°, or 9° west of the Lizard, you shall not
+fear the flats of Brazil: For the general wind in these longitudes is at
+E.S.E. or S.E. so that you may commonly make a S.S.W. course, so as to
+keep the ship full that she may go speedily through; for there is much
+loss of time in hauling the ship too close by the wind, and it is far
+better therefore to give her a fathom of the sheet.
+
+In making for the bay of Saldanha [_Table bay,_] keep between the
+latitudes of 33° 50' and 34° 20' of S. lat. so as to be sure of coming
+not much wide of the bay. If, on seeing the land, it appear high, you
+are then to the S.W. of the bay: if low sand-hills, you are then to the
+northward of the bay. In falling in with, the high land to the
+southward, which is between the Cape of Good Hope and the bay, the land
+trends N.N.W. and S.S.E. seven leagues from the Cape, and then trends
+away N.E. and S.W. towards the point of the Sugar-loaf, some four
+leagues. From this point of the _Sugar-loaf_ lieth _Penguin_ island; but
+keep fair by the point, as two miles from Penguin island there are two
+shoals. From the point to the island there are some seven or eight miles
+N. and S. and so, borrowing on that point, in eight or nine fathoms,
+steer a course S.E. and E.S.E. till you bring the _Table_ S.S.W. and the
+_Sugar-loaf_ S.W. by W. when you may anchor in 6 or 6 1/2 fathoms as you
+please; and then will the point of land by the _Sugar-loaf_ bear W.N.W.
+some two leagues off, and _Penguin_ island N.N.W. some three leagues
+distant. The latitude of the point going into the bay of Saldanha
+[_Table bay,_] is 34° 5' S.[95] On coming in there is nothing to fear,
+though the air be thick, as the land is bold within a cable's length of
+the shore.
+
+[Footnote 95: Only 33° 54'--E.]
+
+In my opinion, the current near Cape _Aguillas_ sets to the southward
+not above fifty or sixty leagues from the land: Wherefore, in going to
+the eastwards, it is right to have sixty leagues from land, so that you
+may miss that current. For 90 or 100 leagues beyond Cape _Aguillas_, the
+land trends E. by N. and not E.N.E. as in the charts.
+
+In my opinion the gulf of Cambaya is the worst place in all India for
+worms; wherefore ships going to Surat ought to use every precaution
+against injury from them. At Acheen our general was denominated
+_Arancaya Pattee_ by the king, who showed him extraordinary favour,
+sending for him to be present at all sports and pastimes; and all our
+men were very kindly used by the people at this place, more so than any
+strangers who had ever been there before.
+
+
+§3. _Extracts from a Treatise, written by Mr Nicholas Whittington, who
+was left as Factor in the Mogul Country by Captain Best, containing some
+of his Travels and Adventures_.
+
+The sheep at the Cape of Good Hope are covered with hair instead of
+wool. The beeves are large, but mostly lean. The natives of that
+southern extremity of Africa are negroes, having woolly heads, flat
+noses, and straight well-made bodies. The men have only one testicle,
+the other being cut out when very young.[96] Their apparel consists of a
+skin hung from their shoulders, reaching to their waist, and two small
+rat-skins, one before and the other behind, and all the rest of their
+body naked, except a kind of skin or leather-cap on their heads, and
+soles tied to their feet, considerably longer and broader than the foot.
+Their arms are very scanty, consisting of bows and arrows of very little
+force, and lances or darts very artificially made, in the use of which
+they are very expert, and even with them kill many fish. They are in use
+to wear the guts of sheep and oxen hanging from their necks, smelling
+most abominably, which they eat when hungry, and would scramble for our
+garbage like so many dogs, devouring it quite raw and foul.
+
+[Footnote 96: Captain Saris told me that some have two; but these are of
+the baser sort and slaves, as he was told by one of these marked by this
+note of gentility.--_Purch._]
+
+At Surat, although Sir Henry Middleton had taken their ships in the Red
+Sea, they promised to deal fairly with us, considering that otherwise
+they might burn their ships and give over all trade by sea, as _Mill
+Jaffed_, one of the chief merchants of Surat, acknowledged to us. While
+at Surat, every one of us that remained any time ashore was afflicted
+with the flux, of which Mr Aldworth was ill for forty days. The custom
+here is, that all strangers make presents on visiting any persons of
+condition, and they give other presents in return.
+
+Finding it impossible to have any trade at Surat, as the Portuguese
+craft infested the mouth of the river, our general removed with the
+ships to Swally roads, whence we might go and come by land without
+danger, between that place and Surat. Mr Canning had been made prisoner
+by the Portuguese, but the viceroy ordered him to be set ashore at
+Surat, saying, "Let him go and help his countrymen to fight, for we
+shall take their ships and all of them together." He was accordingly
+liberated, and came to us at Swally. The purser had likewise been nearly
+taken; but he escaped and got on board. The 3d October, _Seikh Shuffe_,
+governor of _Amadavar_, [Ahmedabad], the chief city of Guzerat, came to
+Surat and thence to Swally, where he entered into articles of agreement
+for trade and friendship.
+
+The 29th of October, four Portuguese galleons and a whole fleet of
+frigates, or armed grabs, hove in sight. Our general went immediately to
+meet them in the Dragon, and fired not one shot till he came between
+their admiral and vice-admiral, when he gave each of them a broadside
+and a volley of small arms, which made them come no nearer for that day.
+The other two galleons were not as yet come up, and our consort the
+Hosiander could not get clear of her anchors, so that she did not fire a
+shot that day. In the evening both sides came to anchor in the sight of
+each other. Next morning the fight was renewed, and this day the
+Hosiander bravely redeemed her yesterday's inactivity. The Dragon drove
+three of them aground, and the Hosiander so _danced the hay_ about them,
+that they durst never show a man above hatches. They got afloat in the
+afternoon with the tide of flood, and renewed the fight till evening,
+and then anchored till next day. Next day, as the Dragon drew much
+water, and the bay was shallow, we removed to the other side of the bay
+at _Mendafrobay_, [Jaffrabat], where _Sardar Khan_, a great nobleman of
+the Moguls, was then besieging a castle of the _Rajaputs_, who, before
+the Mogul conquest, were the nobles of that country, and were now
+subsisting by robbery. He presented our general with a horse and
+furniture, which he afterwards gave to the governor of Gogo, a poor town
+to the west of Surat.
+
+After ten days stay, the Portuguese having refreshed, came hither to
+attack us. Sardar Khan advised our general to flee; but in four hours we
+drove them out of sight, in presence of thousands of the country people.
+After the razing of this castle, Sardar Khan reported this gallant
+action to the Great Mogul, who much admired it, as he thought none were
+like the Portuguese at sea. We returned to Swally on the 27th December,
+having only lost three men in action, and one had his arm shot off:
+while the Portuguese acknowledged to have lost 160, though report said
+their loss exceeded 300 men.
+
+The 13th January, 1613, I was appointed factor for the worshipful
+company, and bound under a penalty of four hundred pounds. Our ships
+departed on the 18th, the galleons not offering to disturb them: and at
+this time Anthony Starkey was ordered for England. Mr Canning was
+seventy days in going from Surat to Agra, during which journey he
+encountered many troubles, having been attacked by the way, and shot in
+the belly with an arrow, while another Englishman in his company was
+shot through the arm, and many of his peons were killed and wounded. Two
+of his English attendants quitted him, and returned to Surat, leaving
+only two musicians to attend upon him. He arrived at Agra on the 9th
+April, when he presented our king's letter to the Great Mogul, together
+with a present of little value; and being asked if this present came
+from our king, he answered that it only came from the merchants. The
+Mogul honoured him with a cup of wine from his own hand, and then
+referred him, on the business of his embassy, to Morak Khan. One of his
+musicians died, and was buried in the church-yard belonging to the
+Portuguese, who took up the body, and buried it in the highway; but on
+this being complained of to the king, they were commanded to bury him
+again, on penalty of being all banished the country, and of having all
+the bodies of their own dead thrown out from the church-yard. After
+this, Mr Canning wrote that he was in fear of being poisoned by the
+jesuits, and requested to have some one sent up to his assistance, which
+was accordingly agreed to by us at Surat. But Mr Canning; died on the
+29th of May, and Mr Kerridge went up on the 22d of June.
+
+At this time I was to have been sent by the way of Mokha to England; but
+the master of the ship said it was impossible, except I were
+circumcised, to go so near Mecca. The 13th October, 1613, the ship
+returned, and our messenger made prisoner at the bar of Surat by the
+Portuguese armed frigates, [grabs] worth an hundred thousand pounds, and
+seven hundred persons going to Goa.[97] This is likely to be of great
+injury here, for no Portuguese is now permitted to pass either in or out
+without a surety; and the Surat merchants are so impoverished, that our
+goods are left on our hands, so that we had to send them to Ahmedabad.
+John Alkin, who deserted from Sir Henry Middleton to the Portuguese,
+came to us at this time, and told us that several of their towns were
+besieged by the Decaners, and other neighbouring Moors, so that they
+had to send away many hundred Banians and others, that dwelt among them,
+owing to want of provisions; and indeed three barks came now with these
+people to Surat, and others of them went to Cambaya. Their weak
+behaviour in the sea-fight with us was the cause of all this.
+
+[Footnote 97: Probably owing to careless abridgement by Purchas, this
+passage is quite unintelligible. The meaning seems to be, That the ship
+in which was the English messenger, having a cargo worth 100,000_l_.
+sterling, and 700 persons aboard, bound on the pilgrimage to Mecca, was
+taken and carried into Goa.--E.]
+
+About this time also, Robert Claxon of the Dragon, who had deserted to
+the Portuguese for fear of punishment, came to us accompanied by a
+German who had been a slave among the Turks. One Robert Johnson, who was
+with the Portuguese, and meant to have come to us, was persuaded by
+another Englishman, while passing through the Decan, to turn mussulman,
+and remain in that country, where he got an allowance of seven shillings
+and sixpence a-day from the king, and his diet from the king's table.
+But he died eight days after being circumcised. Robert Trully, the
+musician, fell out with Mr Kerridge at Agra, and went to the king of
+Decan, carrying a German with him as interpreter. They both offered to
+turn Mahometans, and Trully, getting a new name at his circumcision,
+received a great allowance from the king, in whose service he continues;
+but the German, who had been, formerly circumcised in Persia, and now
+thought to have deceived the king, was not entertained; whereupon he
+returned to Agra, where he serves a Frenchman, and now goes to mass.
+Robert Claxon, above mentioned, had also turned Mahometan in the Decan,
+with a good allowance at court; but, not being contented, he came to
+Surat, where he was pitied by us for his seeming penitence; but being
+entrusted with upwards of forty pounds, under pretence of making
+purchases, he gave us the slip and returned to the Decan. Thus there are
+at present four English renegadoes in the Decan, besides many
+Portuguese. The 27th October, 1613, we received letters sent by Mr
+Gurney of Masulipatam, written by Captain Marlow of the ship Janus,
+informing us of his arrival and trade at that place.
+
+From Surat I went to _Periano_? three _coss_; thence to Cossumba, a
+small village, ten _coss_; and thence to Broach, ten _coss_. This is a
+very pretty city on a high hill, encompassed by a strong wall, and
+having a river running by as large as the Thames, in which were several
+ships of two hundred tons and upwards. Here are the best calicoes in the
+kingdom of Guzerat, and great store of cotton. From thence I went to
+_Saninga_ [Sarang], ten coss; to _Carrou_? ten c. and then fourteen c.
+to _Boldia_ [Brodrah], a smaller city than Broach, but well built,
+having a strong wall, and garrisoned by 3000 horse under _Mussuff Khan_.
+I went thence ten c. to a river named, the _Wussach_, [the Mahy?] where
+Mussuff was about to engage with the rajaputs who lay on the opposite
+side of the river, the chief of whom was of the race of the former kings
+of Surat. Thence other fourteen coss to _Niriand_,[Nariad] a large town
+where they make indigo; and thence, ten c. more to _Amadabar_, or
+Ahmedabad, the chief city of Guzerat, nearly as large as London,
+surrounded by a strong wall, and seated in a plain by the side of the
+river Mehindry. There are here many merchants, Mahometans, Pagans, and
+Christians; with great abundance of merchandize, which chiefly are
+indigo, cloth of gold, silver tissue, velvets, but nothing comparable to
+ours, taffeties, _gumbucks_, coloured _baffaties_, drugs, &c. _Abdalla
+Khan_ is governor of this place, who has the rank and pay of a commander
+of 5000 horse. From, thence, on my way to Cambay, I went seven c. to
+_Barengeo_, [Baregia] where every Tuesday a _cafilla_ or caravan of
+merchants and travellers meet to go to Cambay, keeping together in a
+large company to protect themselves from robbers. From thence sixteen c.
+we came to Soquatera, a fine town with a strong garrison; whence we
+departed about midnight, and got to Cambay about eight next morning, the
+distance being ten _coss_.
+
+In November, we rode to _Sarkess_, three coss from Ahmedabad, where are
+the sepulchres of the Guzerat kings, the church and handsome tombs being
+kept in fine order, and many persons resort to see them from all parts
+of the kingdom. At the distance of a coss, there is a pleasant house
+with a large garden, a mile round, on the banks of the river, which
+_Chon-Chin-Naw_,[98] the greatest of the Mogul nobles, built in memory
+of the great victory he gained at this place over the last king of
+Guzerat, in which he took the king prisoner, and subjugated the kingdom.
+No person inhabits this house, and its orchard is kept by a few poor
+men. We lodged here one night, and sent for six fishermen, who in half
+an hour caught more fish for us than all our company could eat.
+
+[Footnote 98: This name seems strangely corrupted, more resembling the
+name of a Chinese leader than of a Mogul Khan or Amir. Perhaps it ought
+to have been Khan-Khanna.--E.]
+
+The 28th November, we received intelligence at Ahmedabad, that three
+English ships had arrived at _Larry Bunder_, the port town of
+_Guta-Negar-Tutla_, [Tatta] the chief city of _Sindy_. I was sent
+thither, and came on the 13th December to _Cassumparo_, where I overtook
+a cafilla or caravan travelling to _Rahdunpoor_, six days journey on my
+way. We went thence to _Callitalouny_, a fair castle; thence seven c. to
+_Callwalla_, a pretty village, given by the emperor Akbar to a company
+of women and their posterity for ever, to bring up their children in
+dancing and music. They exhibited their talents to our caravan, and
+every man made them some present, and then they openly asked if any of
+us wanted bedfellows. On the 16th we went eight _coss_ to _Cartya_,
+where is a well-garrisoned fortress. We remained here till the 18th,
+waiting for another caravan for fear of thieves, and then went to
+_Deccanaura_,[99] on which day our camel was stolen and one of our men
+was slain. The 19th we travelled ten c. to _Bollodo_, a fort held by
+_Newlock Abram Cabrate_ for the Mogul, and who that day brought in 169
+heads of the Coolies, a plundering tribe. The 20th in thirteen c. we
+came to a fort named _Sariandgo_, and the 21st in ten c. we arrived at
+_Rhadunpoor_, a large town with a fort. We remained here till the 23d,
+to provide water and other necessaries for our journey through the
+desert.
+
+[Footnote 99: It singularly happens, in the excellent map of Hindoostan
+by Arrowsmith, that none of the stages between Ahmedabad and Rahdunpoor
+are laid down, unless possibly _Decabarah_ of the map may be _Decanauru_
+of the text; while Mr Arrowsmith actually inserts on his map the route
+of Whittington across the sandy desert of Cutch, between Rahdunpoor and
+the eastern branch of the Indus, or _Nulla Sunkra_, and thence through
+the Delta to Tatta.--E.]
+
+The 23d, leaving Rhadunpoor, we travelled seven coss, and lay all night
+in the fields, having that day met a caravan coming from Tatta that had
+been plundered of every thing. On the 24th I sent off one of my peons
+with a letter to Larry Bunder, who promised to be there in ten days, but
+I think he was slain by the way; we went twelve c. that day. The 25th we
+travelled fourteen c. and lodged by a well, the water of which was so
+salt that our cattle would not drink it. The 26th ten c. to such
+another well, where our camels took water, not having had any for three
+days. The 27th after fourteen c. we lodged on the ground; and the 28th,
+in ten c. we came to a village called _Negar Parkar_. In this desert we
+saw great numbers, of wild asses, red deer, foxes, and other wild
+animals. We stopt all the 29th, and met another caravan, that had been
+robbed within two days journey of Tatta. _Parkar_ pays tribute yearly to
+the Mogul; but all the people from thence to _Inno_, half a day's
+journey from Tatta, acknowledge no king, but rob and spare at their
+pleasure. When any of the Moguls come among them, they set their own
+houses on fire, and flee into the mountains; and as their houses are
+only built of straw and mortar, they are soon rebuilt. They exact
+customs at their pleasure, and even guard passengers through the desert,
+not willing they should be robbed by any but themselves. The 30th we
+left Parkar, and after travelling six coss, we lay at a tank or pond of
+fresh water. The 31st we travelled eight c. and lay in the fields beside
+a brackish well. The 1st January, 1614, we went ten c. to _Burdiano_,
+and though many were sick of this water, we had to provide ourselves
+with a supply for four days. The 2d we travelled all night eighteen c.
+The 3d, from afternoon till midnight, we went ten c. The 4th twelve c.
+This day I fell sick and vomited, owing to the bad water. The 5th, after
+seven c. we came to three wells, two of them salt and one sweetish. The
+6th, having travelled ten c. we came to _Nuraquimire_, a pretty town,
+where our company from Rhadunpoor left us. We who remained were two
+merchants and myself with five of their servants, four of mine, ten
+camels, and five camel-drivers.
+
+This town of _Nuraquimire_ is within three days journey of Tatta, and to
+us, after coming out of the desert, seemed quite a paradise. We agreed
+with a kinsman of the Rajah, or governor, for twenty _laries_, or
+shillings, to conduct us on the remainder of our journey. We accordingly
+departed on the 8th, and travelled ten c. to _Gaundajaw_, where we had
+been robbed but for our guard. The 9th we were twice set upon, and
+obliged to give each time five _laries_ to get free. We came to
+_Sarruna_, a great town of the _rajputs_ with a castle, fourteen _coss_
+from Tatta. We visited the governor, _Ragee Bouma_, eldest son to sultan
+_Bulbul_, who was lately captured by the Moguls and had his eyes pulled
+out, yet had escaped about two months ago, and was now living in the
+mountains inviting all his kindred to revenge. The _Ragee_ treated me
+kindly as a stranger, asking me many questions about my country. He
+even made me sup with him, and gave me much wine, in which he so
+heartily partook, that he stared again. A banian at this place told me
+that Sir Robert Sherly had been much abused by the Portuguese and the
+governor of _Larry Bunder_, having his house set on fire, and his men
+much hurt in the night; and that on his arrival at Tatta, thirteen days
+journey from thence, he had been unkindly used by the governor of that
+city. He likewise told me of the great trade carried on at Tatta, and
+that ships of 300 tons might be brought up to Larry Bunder; and advised
+me to prevail upon _Ragee Bouma_ to escort us to Tatta.
+
+According to this bad advice, we hired the _Ragee_ for forty _laries_ to
+escort us with fifty horsemen to the gates of Tatta. We departed from
+_Sarruna_ on the 11th January, and having travelled five coss we lay all
+night by the side of a river. Departing at two next morning, the Ragee
+led us in a direction quite different from our right road, and came
+about daybreak into a thicket, where he made us all be disarmed and
+bound, and immediately strangled the two merchants and their five men by
+means of their camel ropes. After stripping them of all their clothes,
+he caused their bodies to be flung into a hole dug on purpose. He then
+took my horse and eighty rupees from me, and sent me and my men up the
+mountains to his brothers, at the distance of twenty coss, where we
+arrived on the 14th, and where I remained twenty days a close prisoner.
+On the 7th February, an order came to send me to _Parkar_, the governor
+of which place was of their kindred, and that I should be sent from
+thence to Rhadunpoor; but I was plundered on the way of my clothes and
+every thing else about me, my horse only being left me, which was not
+worth taking away.
+
+Arriving at Parkar on the 28th February, and finding the inhabitants
+charitable, we were reduced to the necessity of begging victuals; and
+actually procured four mahmoodies by that means, equal to as many
+shillings. But having the good fortune to meet a banian of Ahmedabad,
+whom I had formerly known, he relieved me and my men. We were five days
+in travelling from Parkar to Rhadunpoor, where I arrived on the 19th
+March, and went thence to Ahmedabad on the 2d April, after an absence of
+111 days. Thence to Brodia and Barengeo, thence sixteen c. to Soquatera,
+and ten c. to Cambay. We here crossed the large river, which is seven
+coss in breadth,[100] and where many hundreds are swallowed up yearly.
+On the other side of the river we came to _Saurau_,[101] where is a town
+and castle of the _razbootches_ or rajputs. The 16th of April I
+travelled twenty-five coss to Broach. The 17th I passed the river
+[Narbuddah], and went ten c. to _Cossumba_; and on the 18th thirteen c.
+to Surat.
+
+[Footnote 100: The great river in the text is assuredly the upper part
+of the gulf of Cambay, where the tide sets in with prodigious rapidity,
+entering almost at once with a vast wave or bore, as described on a
+former occasion in the Portuguese voyages.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 101: Probably Sarrode, on the south side of the entry of the
+river Mahy.--E.]
+
+According to general report, there is no city of greater trade in all
+the Indies than Tatta in Sinde; its chief port being Larry Bunder, three
+days journey nearer the mouth of the river. There is a good road without
+the river's mouth, said to be free from worms; which, about Surat
+especially, and in other parts of India, are in such abundance, that
+after three or four months riding, were it not for the sheathing, ships
+would be rendered incapable of going to sea. The ports and roads of
+Sinde are said to be free. From Tatta they go in two months by water to
+Lahore, and return down the river in one. The commodities there are
+_baffatys_, stuffs, _lawns_ [muslins], coarse indigo, not so good as
+that of Biana. Goods, may be carried from Agra on camels in twenty days
+to _Bucker_ on the river Indus, and thence in fifteen or sixteen days
+aboard the ships at the mouth of the Indus. One may travel as soon from
+Agra to Sinde as to Surat, but there is more thieving on the Sinde road,
+in spite of every effort of the Mogul government to prevent it.
+
+The inhabitants of Sinde consist mostly of Rajputs, Banians, and
+Baloches, the governors of the cities and large towns being Moguls. The
+country people are rude; going naked from the waist upwards, and wear
+turbans quite different from the fashion of the Moguls. Their arms are
+swords, bucklers, and lances; their bucklers being large and shaped like
+bee-hives, in which they are in use to give their camels drink, and
+their horses provender. Their horses are good, strong, and swift, and
+though unshod, they ride them furiously, backing them at a year old. The
+Rajputs eat no beef or buffalo flesh, even worshipping them; and the
+Moguls say that the Rajputs know how to die as well as any in the world.
+The Banians kill nothing, and are said to be divided into more than
+thirty different casts, that differ somewhat among them in matters of
+religion, and may not eat with each other. All burn their dead; and when
+the husband dies, the widow shaves her head, and wears her jewels no
+more, continuing this state of mourning as long as she lives.
+
+When a Rajput dies, his wife accompanies his body to the funeral pile in
+her best array, attended by all her friends and kindred, and by music.
+When the funeral pile is set on fire, she walks round it two or three
+times, bewailing the death of her husband, and then rejoicing that she
+is now to live with him again: After which, embracing her friends, she
+sits down on the top of the pile among dry wood, taking her husband's
+head on her lap, and orders fire to be put to the pile; which done, her
+friends throw oil upon her and sweet perfumes, while she endures the
+fire with wonderful fortitude, loose not bound. I have seen many
+instances of this. The first I ever saw was at Surat, the widow being a
+virgin of ten years old, and her affianced husband being a soldier slain
+in the wars at a distance, whence his clothes and turban were sent to
+her, and she insisted on burning herself along with these. The governor
+refused to give her permission, which she took grievously to heart, and
+insisted on being burnt; but they durst not, till her kindred procured
+leave by giving the governor a present, to her great joy. The kindred of
+the husband never force this, but the widow esteems it a disgrace to her
+family not to comply with this custom, which they may refrain from if
+they choose: But then they must shave their heads, and break all their
+ornaments, and are never afterwards allowed to eat, drink, sleep, or
+keep company with any one all the rest of their lives. If, after
+agreeing to burn, a woman should leap out of the fire, her own parents
+would bind her and throw her in again by force; but this weakness is
+seldom seen.
+
+The Banian marriages are made at the age of three years or even under;
+and two pregnant women sometimes enter into mutual promises, if one of
+their children should prove male and the other female, to unite them in
+marriage. But these marriages are always in the same cast and religion,
+and in the same trade and occupation; as the son of a barber with the
+daughter of a barber, and so on. When the affianced couple reach three
+years of age, the parents make a great feast, and set the young couple
+on horseback dressed in their best clothes, a man sitting behind each to
+hold them on. They are then led about the city in procession, according
+to their state and condition, accompanied by bramins or priests and many
+others, who conduct them to the pagoda or temple; and after going
+through certain ceremonies there, they are led home, and feasts are
+given for several days, as they are able. When ten years of age, the
+marriage is consummated. The reason they assign for these early
+marriages is, that they may not be left wifeless, in case their parents
+should die. Their bramins are esteemed exceedingly holy, and have the
+charge of their pagodas or idol temples, having alms and tithes for
+their maintenance; yet they marry, and follow occupations, being good
+workmen and ready to learn any pattern. They eat but once a day, washing
+their whole bodies before and after meat, and use ablutions after the
+natural evacuations.
+
+The _Baloches_ are Mahometans, who deal much in camels, and are mostly
+robbers by land or on the rivers, murdering all they rob; yet are there
+very honest men among them in Guzerat and about Agra. While I was in
+Sinde, they took a boat with seven Italians and a Portuguese friar, all
+the rest being slain in fight. This was ripped up by them in search of
+gold.[102]
+
+[Footnote 102: This is obscurely expressed, leaving it uncertain _what_
+was ripped up in search of gold: The boat, the bodies of the slain, or
+the prisoners.--E.]
+
+John Mildnall, or Mildenhall, an Englishman, had been employed with
+three other young Englishmen, whom he poisoned in Persia, to make
+himself master of the goods. He was himself also poisoned, yet, by means
+of preservatives, he lived many months afterwards, though exceedingly
+swelled, and so came to Agra with the value of 20,000 dollars. On this
+occasion I went from Surat for Agra, on the 14th May, 1614. I arrived
+first at _Bramport_, [Bushanpoor] where Sultan _Parvis_ lives, situated
+in a plain on the river _Taptee_ or of Surat, which is there of great
+breadth, and at this place there is a large castle. Thence I went to
+Agra in twenty-six days, having travelled the whole way from Surat to
+Agra, which is 700 coss or 1010 English miles, in thirty-seven days of
+winter, during which time it rained almost continually. From Surat to
+Burhanpoor is a pleasant champain country, well watered with rivers,
+brooks, and springs. Between Burhanpoor and Agra the country is very
+mountainous, not passable with a coach, and scarcely to be travelled on
+camels. The nearest way is by _Mando_, passing many towns and cities on
+every day's journey, with many high hills and strong castles, the whole
+country being well inhabited, very peaceable, and clear of thieves.
+
+Agra is a very large town, its wall being two coss in circuit, the
+fairest and highest I ever saw, and well replenished with ordnance; the
+rest of the city being ruinous, except the houses of the nobles, which
+are pleasantly situated on the river. The ancient royal seat was
+_Fatipoor_, twelve coss from Agra, but is now fallen into decay. Between
+these two is the sepulchre of the king's father, to which nothing I ever
+saw is comparable: yet the church or mosque of _Fatipoor_ comes near it,
+both being built according to the rules of architecture. In Agra the
+Jesuits have a house and a handsome church, built by the Great Mogul,
+who allows their chief seven rupees a-day, and all the rest three, with
+licence to convert as many as they can: But alas! these converts were
+only for the sake of money; for when, by order of the Portuguese, the
+new converts were deprived of their pay, they brought back their beads
+again, saying they had been long without pay, and would be Christians no
+longer. In consequence of the Portuguese refusing to deliver back the
+goods taken at Surat, the king ordered the church doors to be locked up
+and they have so continued ever since; so the _padres_ make a church of
+one of their chambers, where they celebrate mass twice a day, and preach
+every Sunday, first in Persian to the Armenians and Moors, and
+afterwards in Portuguese for themselves, the Italians, and Greeks.
+
+By them I was informed of the particulars of Mildenhall's goods, who had
+given them all to a French protestant, though himself a papist, that he
+might marry a bastard daughter he had left in Persia, and bring up
+another. The Frenchman refusing to make restitution, was thrown into
+prison and after four months all was delivered up.
+
+Between Agumere and Agra, at every ten _coss_, being an ordinary day's
+journey, there is a _Serai_ or lodging house for men and horses, with
+hostesses to dress your victuals if you please, paying a matter of
+three-pence for dressing provisions both for man and horse. And between
+these two places, which are 120 coss distant, there is a pillar erected
+at every _coss_, and a fair house every ten coss, built by Akbar, on
+occasion of making a pilgrimage on foot from Agra to Agimere, saying his
+prayers at the end of every coss. These houses serve for accommodating
+the king and his women, no one else being allowed to use them. The king
+resides at Agimere on occasion of wars with _Rabna_, a rajput chief, who
+has now done homage, so that there is peace between them. I made an
+excursion to the Ganges, which is two days journey from Agra. The
+Banians carry the water of the Ganges to the distance of many hundred
+miles, affirming that it never corrupts, though kept for any length of
+time. A large river, called the _Geminie_ [Jumna], passes by Agra.
+
+On the 24th of May, 1616, while on our voyage home to England, we went
+into Suldunha bay, where were several English ships outwards bound,
+namely, the Charles, Unicorn, Janus, Globe, and Swan, the general being
+Mr Benjamin Joseph. We arrived safe at Dover on the 15th September,
+1616.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+John Mildenhall, mentioned in the foregoing article, left England on the
+12th February, 1600, and went by Constantinople, Scanderoon, Aleppo,
+Bir, Caracmit, Bitelis, Cashbin, Ispahan, Yezd, Kerman, and Sigistan, to
+Candhar; and thence to Lahore, where he arrived in 1603. He appears to
+have carried letters from Queen Elizabeth to the Great Mogul, by whom he
+was well received, and procured from him letters of privilege for trade
+in the Mogul dominions. He thence returned into Persia, whence he wrote
+to one Mr Richard Staper from Cashbin, on the 3d October, 1606, giving
+some account of his travels, and of his negociations at the court of the
+Mogul. This letter, and a short recital of the first two years of his
+peregrinations, are published in the Pilgrims, vol. I. pp. 114--116, but
+have not been deemed of sufficient importance for insertion in this
+collection.--E.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION XIX.
+
+_Eleventh Voyage of the East India Company, in 1612, in the
+Salomon_.[103]
+
+
+We sailed from Gravesend on the 1st February, 1611, according to the
+computation of the church of England, or 1612 as reckoned by others. We
+were four ships in company, which were counted as three separate
+voyages, because directed to several parts of India: The James, which
+was reckoned the _ninth_ voyage, the Dragon and Hosiander the _tenth_,
+and our ship, the Salomon, as the _eleventh_.
+
+[Footnote 103: Purch. Pilgr. I. 486. This unimportant voyage is only
+preserved, for the sake of continuing the regular series of voyages
+which contributed to the establishment of the East India Company. We
+learn from Purchas that it was written by Ralph Wilson, one of the mates
+in the Salomon, who never mentions the name of his captain. This voyage,
+as given by Purchas, contains very little information, and is therefore
+here abridged, though not extending to two folio pages in the
+Pilgrims.--E.]
+
+I would advise such as go from Saldanha bay with the wind at E. or S.E.
+to get to a considerable distance from the land before standing
+southwards, as otherwise the high lands at the Cape will take the wind
+from them; and if becalmed, one may be much troubled, as there is
+commonly in these parts a heavy sea coming from the west. Likewise, the
+current sets in for the shore, if the wind has been at N.N.W. or W. or
+S.S.W. And also the shore is so bold that no anchorage can be had.
+
+The 18th October, we espied the land, being near _Celeber_ in the island
+of Sumatra, in about 3° of south latitude. The 2d November, coming
+between Java and a ragged island to the westwards of the point of
+_Palimbangan_, we met a great tide running out so fast that we could
+hardly stem it with the aid of a stiff gale. When afterwards the gale
+slacked, we came to anchor, and I found the tide to run three 1/2
+leagues in one watch. I noticed that this tide set outwards during the
+day, and inwards through the night. This day at noon the point of
+Palimbangan bore N.E. by E. three leagues off, and from thence to the
+road of Bantam is five leagues, S.S.E. 1/3 E. The latitude of Bantam is
+6° 10' S. and the long. 145° 2' E. This however is rather too much
+easterly, as I think the true longitude of Bantam is 144° E. from
+Flores.[104]
+
+[Footnote 104: The long. of Bantam is 106° E. from Greenwich. That in
+the text appears to have been estimated from the island of Flores, which
+is 31° 20' W. from Greenwich, so that the longitude of Bantam ought to
+have been stated as 137° 20' E. from Flores, making an error of excess
+in the text of seven or eight degrees.--E.]
+
+The 7th March, at five p.m. while in lat. 20° 34' S. we descried land
+nine leagues off, N.E. 1/2 N. The S.E. part of this island is somewhat
+high, but falleth down with a low point. The W. part is not very high,
+but flat and smooth towards the end, and falls right down. The south and
+west parts of this island is all surrounded with shoals and broken
+ground, and we did not see the other sides; yet it seemed as if it had
+good refreshments. The longitude of this island is 104° from Flores, but
+by my computation 107°.[105] In these long voyages, we do not rely
+altogether on our reckoning, but use our best diligence for discovering
+the true longitudes, which are of infinite importance to direct our
+course aright.
+
+[Footnote 105: No island is to be found in the latitude and longitude
+indicated in the text.--E.]
+
+
+
+SECTION XX.
+
+_The Twelfth Voyage of the East India Company, in 1613, by Captain
+Christopher Newport_.[106]
+
+
+The full title of this voyage, as given in the Pilgrims, is as
+follows:--"A Journal of all principal Matters passed in the Twelfth
+Voyage to the East India, observed by me _Walter Payton_, in the good
+ship the _Expedition_.--Whereof Mr _Christopher Newport_ was captain,
+being set out _Anno_ 1612. Written by the said _Walter Payton_." The
+date of the year of this voyage, according to our present mode of
+computation, was 1613, as formerly explained at large, the year being
+then computed to commence on the 25th March, instead of the 1st
+January.--E.
+
+[Footnote 106: Purch. Pilgr. I. 488.]
+
+§1. _Observations at St Augustine, Mohelia, and divers Parts of Arabia_.
+
+The 7th January, 1613, we sailed from Gravesend for India, in the good
+ship Expedition of London, about the burden of 260 tons, and carrying
+fifty-six persons; besides the Persian ambassador and his suite, of whom
+there were fifteen persons, whom we were ordered to transport to the
+kingdom of Persia, at the cost of the worshipful company. The names of
+the ambassador and his people were these. Sir Robert Sherley the
+ambassador, and his lady, named Teresha, a Circassian; Sir Thomas
+Powell, and his lady, called Tomasin, a Persian; a Persian woman, named
+Leylye; Mr Morgan Powell; Captain John Ward; Mr Francis Bubb, secretary;
+Mr John Barbar, apothecary; John Herriot, a musician; John Georgson,
+goldsmith, a Dutchman; Gabriel, an old Armenian; and three Persians,
+named Nazerbeg, Scanderbeg, and Molhter.
+
+In the morning of the 26th April; we fell in with a part of the land of
+Ethiopia, [Southern Africa,] close adjoining to which is a small island,
+called _Conie island_, [Dassen island] all low land, and bordered by
+many dangerous rocks to seawards. It is in the lat. of 33° 30' S. The
+wind falling short, we were constrained to anchor between that island
+and the main, where we had very good ground in nineteen or twenty
+fathoms. We sent our boat to the island, where we found Penguins, geese,
+and other fowls, and seals in great abundance; of all which we took as
+many as we pleased for our refreshment. By a carved board, we observed
+that the Hollanders had been there, who make great store of train-oil
+from the seals. They had left behind them the implements of their work,
+together with a great copper cauldron standing on a furnace, the
+cauldron being full of oil; all which we left as we found them.
+
+Having spent two days here at anchor, and the wind coming favourable, we
+weighed and proceeded for the Cape of Good Hope, and arrived, by God's
+grace, at Saldanha on the 30th of April, where we found six ships at
+anchor. Two of these, the Hector and James, were English, and the other
+four Hollanders, all homeward bound. We here watered, and refreshed
+ourselves well with reasonable abundance of the country sheep and
+beeves, which were bought from the natives, and plenty of fresh fish,
+which we caught with our seyne. The 10th May the Pepper-corn arrived
+here, likewise homewards bound; and as she was but ill provided with
+necessaries, we supplied her from our scanty store as well as we could
+spare.
+
+Being all ready to depart with the first fair wind, which, happened on
+the 15th May, we then sailed altogether from the bay, taking leave
+according to the custom of the sea, and we directed our course for St
+Augustine. In our way we had sight of _Capo do Arecife_,[107] part of
+the main land of Africa, in lat. 33° 25' S. on the 24th May, the compass
+there varying 6° 9'. The 15th June we got sight of the island of St
+Lawrence or Madagascar, and on the 17th came to anchor close beside port
+St Augustine, meaning to search the soundings and entrance into the bay
+before we went in, as there was no one in the ship well acquainted with
+it. Having done this, we went in next day, and came to anchor in ten
+fathoms, yet our ship rode in forty fathoms. We had here wood and
+water, and great abundance of fresh fish, which we caught in such
+quantities with the seyne as might have served for six ships companies,
+instead of our own. But we could get no cattle from the natives, who
+seemed to be afraid of us; for, though they came once to us, and
+promised to bring us cattle next day, they seemed to have said so as a
+cover for driving away their cattle, in which they were employed in the
+interim, and they came no more near us. Some days after, we marched into
+the woods with forty musketeers, to endeavour to discover some of the
+natives, that we might buy cattle; but we only found empty houses, made
+of canes, whence we could see the people had only gone away very
+recently, as their fires were still burning, and the scales of fish they
+had been broiling were lying about. We also saw the foot-marks of many
+cattle, which had been there not long before, and had to return empty
+handed.
+
+[Footnote 107: The latitude in the text indicates Burtrenhook, near the
+mouth of the Groot river, this being probably the Dutch name, while that
+in the text is the Portuguese.--E.]
+
+The entry into the port of St Augustine resembles that of Dartmouth
+haven; and on going in, you must bring the wood, called
+Westminster-hall, to which it has some resemblance, to bear N.E. by E.
+and then steer due E. borrowing a little towards the south side of the
+bay, where your soundings will be thirteen, nine, eight, and seven
+fathoms, all good ground, till you be shut within the shoal. After this
+you have deep water till you come into the road, and then have seven,
+eight, and ten fathoms. But if you go too far behind the hill on the
+larboard hand, which resembles an old barn, you shall then have thirty
+and forty fathoms. St Augustine is in lat 23° 30' S. the var. being 15°
+40'.[108]
+
+[Footnote 108: Long. 44° 20' E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+We sailed from St Augustine on the 23d June, directing our course for
+the island of Mohelia, and on the 3d July we had sight of an island
+called Juan, nine or ten leagues E. by S. from Mohelia. We came also
+this day to anchor at Mohelia, between it and some broken land off its
+southern side. We had here great abundance of refreshments, and very
+cheap; for we bought five bullocks in exchange for one Levant sword, and
+had goats, hens, pine-apples, cocoa-nuts, plantains, oranges, lemons,
+and limes, for trifles worth little. Such bullocks as we had for money
+cost a dollar each, or ten pieces of 4-1/2d.; at which rate we
+purchased forty-one beeves. The natives of this island are chiefly Moors
+[negroes], but there are Arabians, Turks, and others also among them;
+and they are much engaged in wars with the people of _Juan_, [Hinznan or
+Johanna,] and Comoro islands in their neighbourhood. They told us that
+the king of the island died the day we arrived, being succeeded by his
+son, _Phanehomale_, who was only of tender years, and was to reign under
+the protection of the queen his mother. His brother-in-law, as chief
+man, accompanied by several other people of condition, came down to bid
+us welcome, and used us very kindly. Both he and many others of the
+islanders spoke tolerably good Portuguese, so that I had much
+conversation with them, and was informed of every thing I wished to
+know.
+
+In this island they build barks, in which they trade along the coast of
+Melinda and Arabia, disposing of slaves and fruit, by which means they
+supply themselves with dollars, and with such articles as they need. I
+suspect also that they have some dealings with the Portuguese, but they
+would not let us know this, lest we might suspect them of treachery.
+They told me that we were welcome, and that the whole island was at our
+command to do us service; but, if we had been Portuguese, they would
+have put us all to the sword. In my opinion, however, it would be
+dangerous to repose too much confidence in them. The king's
+brother-in-law shewed me a letter of recommendation of the place,
+written in Dutch, and left there by a Hollander; and he requested of us
+to leave a letter to the same purport, certifying their honest and
+friendly dealings, that they might be able to show to others of our
+nation. To this we consented, and I gave them a writing, sealed by our
+captain, expressing the good entertainment we had received, and the
+prices of provisions; yet recommending to our countrymen, not to trust
+them any farther than might seem consistent with their own safety. They
+speak a kind of Moorish language, somewhat difficult to learn; so that I
+could only pick up the few words following, which may serve to ask for
+provisions and fruits, by such as do not understand Portuguese, or in
+speaking to any of the natives who have not that language.
+
+   _Gumbey_,   a bullock.
+   _Buze_,     a goat.
+   _Coquo_,    a hen.
+   _Sinzano_,  a needle.
+   _Seiavoye_, cocoa-nuts.
+   _Demon_,    lemons.
+   _Mage_,     water.
+   _Surra_,    a kind of drink.
+   _Soutan_,   the king.
+   _Quename_,  a pine-apple.
+   _Cartassa_, paper.
+   _Tudah_,    oranges.
+   _Arembo_,   bracelets.
+   _Figo_,     plantains.
+
+This island of Mohelia is in lat 12° 10' S.[109] and has good anchorage
+in its road in forty fathoms. Having watered and refreshed ourselves
+sufficiently, we sailed from thence on the 10th of July, directing our
+course for the island of Socotora. The 19th we passed to the north of
+the equator; and on the 25th we had sight of land, which we supposed to
+have been Cape Guardafui, at the entrance into the Red Sea; and so,
+taking a departure for Socotora, we were unable to find it. We were
+therefore obliged to consider how we might shelter ourselves against the
+fury of the winter in these parts, and also to procure refreshments;
+wherefore we determined to sail for the islands of _Curia Muria_, which
+are in about the latitude of 18° N.[110] over against the desert of
+_Arabia Felix_. In our way; the weather was continually so foggy, that
+we were unable at any time to see half an English mile before us, such
+being usual in these seas in the months of July, August, and September.
+In all this time both the sun and stars were so continually obscured,
+that we were never able to get an observation, by which to regulate or
+correct our dead reckoning; but, God being our guide, we at length
+groped out the land by means of the lead. We could now clearly perceive
+the colour of the water to be changed to white, with many yellow grassy
+weeds floating on the surface; and heaving the lead continually as we
+advanced, we at length struck ground in forty-three fathoms. Proceeding
+nearer the land, our sounding lessened to twenty-two fathoms, when we
+anchored on good ground; and though we distinctly heard the rut of the
+shore at no great distance, we could not perceive the land till next
+day, when the weather was somewhat clearer. We then sent our skiff in
+shore, to see if any place could be discovered of more security for our
+ship to ride in; but, on account of the great sea that came rolling into
+the bay, the surge was so violent that they could not come near the
+shore, and had to return as they went; only that they had been able to
+descry some fair stone-houses by the sea-side, which proved to be
+_Doffar_, in Arabia Felix.
+
+[Footnote 109: Lat. 13° 35' S. Long. 45° 30' E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 110: These islands are at the mouth of a bay of the same name
+on the oceanic coast of that portion of Arabia named Mahra, in long, 55°
+30' E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+When God sent us a little clear weather, we could perceive a high cape
+on the western side of the bay, which we discovered from our skiff the
+second time it was sent, and could plainly see that it formed a very
+good road for all kinds of winds, except between the E. and S. by E.
+points. We were thankful to God for this discovery, and warped our ship
+to that road, with much toil to our men, as it was six or seven leagues
+from the place where we had anchored. On the 3d of August, having
+brought our ship to anchor in that road, we went ashore in the boat to a
+little village by the sea-side, called _Resoit_, inhabited mostly by
+Arabian fishermen, who entertained us kindly, and gave us all the
+information we desired respecting the country. The governor also of
+_Doffar_ came down to us, whose name was _Mir Mahommed Madoffar_, who
+bade us kindly welcome, and presented us with three bullocks, and some
+sheep, goats, hens, sugar-canes, plantains, cocoa-nuts, and the like. In
+return we made him a present of a fine damasked fowling-piece, double
+lockt, which he greatly admired. He appeared to desire our friendship as
+much as we did his; and he gave us licence to land at all times when we
+were inclined. He also gave orders to have a market established for us
+at the village of Resoit, that we might be supplied with every kind of
+provision that the country affords. Their cattle were both dear and
+lean, and fresh water so scarce, bad, and difficult to be had, that we
+were forced to hire the natives to bring it down to us in skins from a
+distance, paying them at the rate of twenty-four shillings for the fill
+of five pipes.
+
+Before leaving this place, Mir Mahommed desired us to leave a writing of
+commendation in his favour, specifying the kind and good entertainment
+we had received. This was accordingly granted, and I wrote it upon
+parchment, beginning it in large letters, the purport being similar to
+that granted at Mohelia, and this also was signed by the captain. The
+governor also sent us three notes signed by himself, for the purpose of
+being given by us to other ships, if they should happen to come upon
+this part of the coast, as we had been constrained to do, by which he
+might know our ships from those of other nations, and give them good
+entertainment accordingly. Cape _Resoit_ is in lat. 16° 38' N. and has
+good anchorage in 5-1/2 or 6 fathoms.
+
+The 28th August, we set sail from thence, directing our course for the
+coast of Persia, coasting along the oceanic shore of Arabia; it being
+our chiefest object to set the lord ambassador on shore, as, by reason
+of the news we had received at the Cape of Good Hope, our expectations
+of trade at Surat, Dabul, and all other parts thereabouts, were
+frustrated. The 2d September, we sailed close beside an island on the
+coast of Arabia, called _Macyra_, in lat. 20° 30' N. And on the 4th of
+that month we passed the eastermost point of Arabia, called Cape
+_Rassalgat_, in lat. 22° 34' N.[111]
+
+[Footnote 111: This Cape is in lat. 23° N. and long. 58° 45'E. from
+Greenwich.--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Note_.--In explanation of the disappointment of trade at Surat, &c.
+there is the following marginal note in the Pilgrims, vol. I. p.
+490.--"These news at the Cape were, Captain Hawkins coming away in
+disgust, as denied leave to trade; the English being often wronged by
+the Mogul, in frequent breach of promise, as already shewn; for which
+they forced a trade in the Red Sea on the Mogul subjects. Which
+afterwards procured the privileges granted to Captain Best, as already
+related, lest the Moguls should have the sea shut up to them, and all
+their trade stopt. They were the more induced to grant these privileges
+to the English, on seeing them able to withstand the Portuguese, whose
+marine force had held the Guzerat people under maritime subjection, and
+made them afraid to trade with the English."--_Purch._
+
+§2. Proceedings on the Coast of Persia, and Treachery of the Baloches_.
+
+Having crossed the gulf from Cape Rasalgat, on the 10th September we got
+sight of the coast of Persia, in the lat. of 25° 10' N. When some seven
+leagues from the land, we sent our skiff ashore to make enquiry
+concerning the country, and to seek out some convenient place in which
+to land his lordship, having Sir Thomas Powell, with two of the
+ambassador's Persian attendants, and _Albertus_, our own linguist, that
+we might be able to converse with the natives. They came to a little
+village called _Tesseque_,[112] where they spoke with some camel-drivers
+and other country-people; from whom they learnt that the country was
+called _Getche Macquerona_ [Mekran], and the inhabitants _Baloches_, all
+living under the government of a king, named _Melik Mirza_, whose chief
+residence was some five or six days journey from thence, at a port named
+_Guadal_. They were farther informed, that all the country of _Mekran_
+paid tribute yearly to the king of Persia. When informed of our purpose
+to land the ambassador, they told us that, by means of _Melik Mirza_,
+his lordship might have a safe conveyance in nine days to _Kermshir_, in
+the province of _Kerman_; and from thence might travel in eleven days
+more to _Ispahan_ in Persia.
+
+[Footnote 112: Tize is laid down upon this part of the Persian coast, in
+lat 25° 25' N. and long. 60° 80' E. from Greenwich: Perhaps the Tesseque
+of the text.--E.]
+
+We then sailed along the coast, and on the 11th of the month we sent our
+boat ashore with Sir Thomas Powell, accompanied as before, to make
+farther enquiries, and to endeavour to hire a pilot to direct our course
+for Guadal, as we were unacquainted with the coast. They came to a place
+called _Pesseque_, about a day's journey from Tesseque, where they had
+similar accounts with the former, all commending the port of Guadal as
+the best place at which the ambassador could land. Wherefore, being
+unable to procure a pilot, we resolved, with God's blessing, to sail to
+that place with all the speed we could. On the 13th, while on our way,
+we espied coming towards us from the eastwards, two great boats, called
+_teradas_, which were sailing along shore for Ormus. Whereupon, that we
+might procure a pilot from them, we manned our skiff sufficiently to
+bring them by force to our ship, if entreaties were unavailing, yet
+without meaning to offer them the smallest injury, or even to send them
+away dissatisfied.
+
+When our skiff came up with them, instead of answering the hails of our
+men, they waved our skiff to leeward with a drawn sword; on which,
+thinking to fear them, and make them lower their sail, our men fired a
+random shot towards them, which they answered by firing another directly
+at our skiff, followed by half a hundred arrows, to which our men
+answered by plying all their muskets. But our skiff was unable to hold
+way with them, as they were under sail, and had therefore to return to
+the ship, with one man very dangerously wounded by an arrow in the
+breast, who afterwards recovered. As we in the ship saw the skiff
+returning without them, we hoisted out our long-boat, and sent her after
+the two _teradas_, we following with the ship as near the shore as we
+could with safety; for it was now of much importance that we should
+speak with them, on purpose to avoid their spreading scandalous reports
+of us in the country, which might have frustrated our chief hopes of
+landing the ambassador at _Guadal_, being the place we most depended
+upon, and being destitute of any other place for the purpose, should
+this fail, considering the unwelcome intelligence we had got concerning
+Guzerat at the Cape.
+
+Our long boat, having fetched up with the _teradas_, drove them into a
+bay whence they could not escape; on which the native mariners sailed so
+far into the bay, that one of the teradas was cast away on the beach,
+and the other had nearly shared the same fate, but was saved by our men
+just without the surf. Most of the _balloches_ leapt overboard, and
+several of them narrowly escaped drowning; while nine of them were
+brought by our men to our ship along with the _terada_, part of whom
+they had taken out of the water. There were originally twenty-six
+balloches in the two teradas, but all the rest escaped ashore by
+swimming through the surf. When these men came aboard our ship, they
+were found to belong to Guadal; and when told that we were sorry for the
+loss of their other bark, as we meant them no harm, but only wished to
+speak with them, that we might learn the navigation to their port, they
+were glad to learn we had no evil intentions, thinking we had been as
+merciless as themselves, and acknowledged their loss proceeded from
+their own folly.
+
+We then informed them that we were bound for Guadal, on purpose to land
+a Persian ambassador there, and that we earnestly entreated the master
+of the terada, whose name was _Noradin_, to pilot us to that place, for
+which we would satisfy him to his contentment. Knowing that he could not
+chuse, he consented to go with us, on condition we would permit the
+terada and his men to proceed to Muscat, whither they were originally
+bound; but we did not think this quite safe, lest they might communicate
+news of our arrival among the Portuguese, and thought it better to take
+the bark along with us to Guadal, to manifest our own good intentions.
+Noradin accordingly consented, between fear and good will, and was much
+made of by us to reassure his confidence. On the passage to Guadal, we
+had much conference with him and his men, both respecting the state of
+the country, the character of their king, and the means of the
+ambassador travelling from thence into Persia. Their answers and reports
+all confirmed what we had been already told on the coast, and gave us
+hopes of success. The terada was about fifteen tons burden, and her
+loading mostly consisted in the provisions of the country, as rice,
+wheat, dates, and the like. They had a Portuguese pass, which they
+shewed us, thinking at first we had been of that nation. I translated
+this, to show in what subjection the Portuguese keep all the natives of
+these countries, as without such a pass they are not suffered to
+navigate these seas, under penalty of losing their lives, ships, and
+goods.
+
+_Antonio Pereira de la Cerda, Captain of the Castle of Muscat, &c._
+
+"Know all to whom these presents are shewn, that I have hereby given
+secure licence to this _terada_, of the burden of fifty _candies_,
+whereof is master Noradin, a Mahomedan _baloche_, dwelling in Guadal, of
+the age of fifty years, who carries for his defence four swords, three
+bucklers, five bows, with their arrows, three calivers, two lances, and
+twelve oars. And that in manner following: She may pass and sail from
+this castle of Muscat, to Soar, Dobar, Mustmacoraon, Sinde, Cache,
+Naguna, Diu, Chaul, and Cor. In going she carries goods of _Conga_, as
+raisins, dates, and such like; but not without dispatch from the
+custom-house of this castle, written on the back hereof. In this voyage
+she shall not carry any prohibited goods, viz. steel, iron, lead,
+tobacco, ginger, cinnamon of Ceylon, or other goods prohibited by his
+majesty's regulations. And conforming thereto, the said _terada_ shall
+make her voyage without let or hindrance of any generals, captains, or
+any of the fleets or ships whatever of his majesty she may happen to
+meet with. This licence shall be in force for one whole year, in going
+and returning; and if expired, shall continue in force till the
+completion of her voyage.
+
+   _Given at the Castle of Muscat, this_ 16_th November_, 1611.
+   _Written by Antonio de Peitas, notary of the said factory,
+   &c._
+
+   _Sealed and signed by_
+   ANTONIO PEREIRA."
+
+   The certificate on the back was thus:
+   "_Registered in the book of Certificates, folio xxxii, et sequ._
+   Signed,  ANT. PEITAS."
+
+The 17th September, we sailed past some high rugged cliffs, close to
+which, as Noradin told us, was a good watering place, at a village named
+_Ivane_, fifteen leagues west from Guadal. That same evening we arrived
+at Guadal, and anchored for the night off the mouth of the port, whence
+about thirty boats came out next morning to fish, some of which came to
+speak with the _balloches_ we had aboard. What conversation passed among
+them we did not understand, being in the _balloche_ language. Betimes on
+the 18th, we cleared our pilot and his boat, and he departed well
+contented. Soon after, the ambassador sent Nazerbeg, one of his Persian
+attendants, on shore in our skiff, with a message to the governor
+concerning his landing and passing through that country into Persia.
+While on the way, our skiff was met by the governor's boat, coming off
+to our ship, and Nazerbeg was taken into that boat, which carried him to
+the shore, whence he was accompanied by many of the natives to the
+governor's tent. He here delivered his message in Persian, which these
+people understand as well as their own language, and was kindly
+entertained. The answer from the governor was to this effect: That,
+although this country of Mekran did not belong to the king of Persia, it
+yet owed love and duty thereto, having been long tributary to the king
+and his predecessors, and still was. He farther said, that the king of
+Mekran was the king of Persia's slave, with many other hollow
+compliments, and that the ambassador should be made as welcome as in
+Persian all this only tending to allure his lordship ashore by treachery
+to his ruin, as appeared by the event.
+
+With this answer Nazerbeg returned, being accompanied on board by about
+a dozen of the most ancient men of the balloches, to confirm the same.
+On coming aboard, these men saluted the ambassador most submissively, in
+the name of the governor of Guadal, and on their own behalf some even
+offering to kiss his feet; and told his lordship that he was most
+fortunate in coming to their city at this time, as only the day before
+the viceroy had come down with a troop of men, to visit a saint, and
+therefore his lordship would be conducted with infinite safety through
+the country, and protected from the danger of rebels and thieves, who
+infested the country between Mekran and Persia, and might either go
+through Kerman or Segistan to Ispahan. They added, that the viceroy
+would supply his lordship with camels and horses, and every other
+requisite for the journey, and would gladly give him every other
+accommodation in his power. They said, moreover, that they were much
+rejoiced at having such an opportunity of shewing their unfeigned love
+and duty towards the king of Persia, and that the ambassador should be
+dispatched on his journey from Guadal in two days, if he were so
+inclined. They told us, that our ship should be supplied with water, and
+every other necessary of which we were in want; and they gave us three
+bags of bruised dates, of about 300 pounds weight, with two boats,
+saying the fishing-boats were ordered to give us two fish a-piece daily,
+on account of their government, which they did accordingly.
+
+By these shews of good-will, all men concurring in the same fair story,
+both now and formerly, we were thoroughly satisfied, and had no distrust
+that they meant not as well as they said. The lord ambassador,
+especially, was much rejoiced at the prospect of being thus enabled to
+reach Persia in twenty days, as they said; and we not less so, in
+bringing our long-desired hopes to a bearing. But God, from whom no
+secrets of the heart can be hidden, knew their treacherous intentions
+towards us; and had not his mercy exceeded his justice, we had been
+utterly destroyed, and it had never been known what became of us, our
+ship, or our goods.
+
+Being quite satisfied with these fair promises, the ambassador got every
+thing in readiness, and in the morning of the 19th September, sent his
+money and all his baggage on shore with the _balloches_ boats, which
+came aboard for the purpose. They also brought a message from the
+viceroy and governor, saying they had provided tents for his lordship
+and all his followers, close to their own, where they would be happy to
+receive him as soon as he pleased to land. Into this tent accordingly
+all the ambassador's goods were carried, and some of his followers were
+appointed by his orders to remain there in charge of them, till he
+should himself land, intending to have gone ashore the same day, about
+four in the afternoon, of which he sent word to the viceroy. In the mean
+time our boat went ashore with empty casks to bring off fresh water, and
+in her went the Persian followers of the ambassador, and three or four
+more of his people, to see the careful landing of his goods, and to
+accompany them to the tents.
+
+While the ambassador's baggage was landing, some of the natives asked,
+if these were all the things the ambassador had to send ashore? To which
+it was answered, that these were all, except jewels and such like
+things, which were to come along with himself. Some other natives
+standing by, observed among themselves, That it was no matter, as these
+were enough for the soldiers. This was overheard and understood by
+Nazerbeg, who concealed it for the time, though it raised some suspicion
+in his mind, as he said afterwards: Yet so strongly was he prepossessed
+by the agreement of all that had passed before, that he could not bring
+himself to believe their intentions were bad. He listened, however, more
+attentively to all that was said afterwards among them, but could hear
+nothing that savoured of double-dealing.
+
+A little while afterwards, Nazerbeg met with one _Haji Comul_,[113] whom
+God made an instrument to disclose the devilish project of the balloches
+to circumvent and destroy us, and who now revealed the particulars of
+their bloody designs. Nazerbeg was amazed, and even chid _Comul_ for not
+having told this before the goods were landed. As the time appointed for
+the landing of the ambassador was at hand, Nazerbeg was fearful he might
+have come ashore before he could get to our ship to forewarn him.
+Wherefore, hastening to the shore, where, as God would have it, our
+skiff was still filling water, he told our men there was treachery
+plotting against us on shore, and entreated them to row him to the ship
+with all possible speed. He was therefore brought off immediately, yet
+hardly a moment too soon, as the ambassador and all his suite, together
+with our captain and all the principal officers among us, willing to
+grace the ambassador as far as we could for the honour of our country,
+were already in the waste, and ready to go on shore. When Nazerbeg had
+communicated his news, we were as ready to change our purpose as we had
+been before to go ashore. The purport of what he had learnt from _Haji
+Comul_ was as follows:--
+
+The viceroy and governor had agreed together to entice as many of us as
+they possibly could ashore, on purpose to cut all our throats; which
+done, they meant to have set upon the ship, and having taken her, to
+seize every thing she contained. They had made minute enquiry into our
+numbers, and had got a particular enumeration of the state and condition
+of every person in the ship, all of whom they intended to put to death
+without mercy, except the surgeon, the musicians, the women, and the
+boys. Their reverence for the king of Persia, of which they had so
+boasted, was all a mere pretence to deceive; for they were all rebels,
+and it was death to talk of the king of Persia in Guadal. Though we now
+understood their intended plot, for which God be praised, and were
+sufficiently put upon our guard to prevent its execution by arming
+ourselves, knowing that we were able to defend ourselves from injury on
+board, although they had great numbers of boats, and above 1500 men
+armed with muskets, besides others; yet were we at a loss how we might
+recover his lordship's goods, and his three men who were ashore along
+with them. But God, who had thus miraculously delivered us from their
+cruel treachery, opened likewise our understandings, so that we
+recovered all according to our wish, in the following manner:--
+
+As the viceroy and his fellows expected the immediate landing of the
+ambassador and followers, together with the captain and others of us, we
+sent Nazerbeg again ashore, with instructions what to do. He was to
+inform the viceroy that the ambassador was not very well, and had
+therefore deferred his landing till next morning, which was Monday the
+20th September. He was also directed to request the viceroy and
+governor, to send two or three of their boats for him very early, to
+bring the women and others of his company ashore, as the ship's boats
+were too small; and to say, that the ambassador expected to be attended
+by some men of condition from the viceroy, to come in the boats, out of
+respect to the king of Persia, whose person he represented. This
+message, being well delivered, took the desired effect, and the viceroy
+readily promised to comply with every thing required. Having finished
+this part of his introductions, Nazerbeg was to repair to the tent where
+the baggage was lodged, and to fetch from one of the trunks, two bags of
+money containing £200 sterling, and some other things of value, if he
+could so contrive without being noticed, as it was wished to conceal the
+knowledge we had of the villainous intentions of these barbarians.
+Nazerbeg was also desired to use dispatch, and to desire the three
+servants of the ambassador to remain all night at the tents, with
+promise of being relieved next morning. All was done as directed, and
+not only was the money brought away, but a trunk also containing Lady
+Shirley's apparel. When the balloches enquired the reason of taking that
+trunk back to the ship, they were told it contained the lady's
+night-clothes, and that it was to be brought ashore again next day.
+
+[Footnote 113: In Purchas this person is named _Hoge_ Comul; but we
+suspect it ought to be _Haji_, intimating that he had made the
+pilgrimage of Mecca and Medina.--E.]
+
+The ambassador having thus recovered his money, wished much to get back
+one other large trunk, containing things of value, and the three men
+which were ashore with his baggage, even if all the rest were lost. For
+this purpose, we filled, over night, a large chest and a night-stool,
+with billets of wood, rubbish, stones, and other useless matters, to
+make them heavy, binding them up carefully with mats and ropes to give
+them an air of importance. Nazerbeg was instructed to take these on
+shore, to be left in place of the large trunk which he was to bring
+away, under pretence that it belonged to one of the merchants, and had
+been landed by mistake. The three men at the tent were to accompany him
+back to the ship, with their musical instruments, and the _balloches_
+were to be told they were wanted by the lord ambassador to accompany him
+with their music on his landing.
+
+Every thing being thus properly arranged, we saw next morning early, the
+three boats coming off for the purpose of bringing his lordship on
+shore, according to promise. We then manned our skiff, and sent her
+ashore to put our plan into execution, by which we hoped to entrap the
+_balloches_ in the snare they had laid for us. In the mean time, we
+received the people from the three boats into our ship, consisting of
+seven or eight persons of some condition, among whom was our friend
+_Haji Comul_; all the rest being slaves and fishermen. We kept them in
+discourse on various matters, to pass away time till our skiff could get
+back. During this conversation, one of them said that the viceroy
+earnestly desired we might bring our _slurbow_[114] ashore with us, as
+he wished much to see it, which we readily promised, to satisfy them. We
+soon after had the pleasure to see our skiff returning, having been
+completely successful, as it not only brought away the trunk and the
+three men, but also one of the chief men among the _balloches_, whom
+Nazerbeg enticed along with him. As soon as he came on board, he and the
+rest desired to see our gun-rooms, in which they had been told we had
+all our fire-works, of which they were in great dread, particularly of
+our _slurbow_ and fire-arrows; and this answered exactly to our wishes,
+as we meant to have enticed them below, that we might disarm them of
+their long knives or daggers. When all these principal persons were down
+below in the gun-room, all our people being armed and in readiness, and
+dispersed in different parts of the ship, some on deck, some between
+decks, and others in the gunroom, to arrest and disarm the traitors;
+and when the concerted signal was given, this was instantly
+accomplished, to their great astonishment, yet without resistance.
+
+[Footnote 114: From circumstances mentioned in the sequel, this seems to
+have been a species of cross-bow for discharging fire-arrows.--E.]
+
+We then laid open to them our knowledge of their murderous intentions,
+saying their lives were now in our hands, as they had themselves fallen
+into the pit they had dug for us; and, if we served them right, we
+should now cut them in pieces, as they meant to have done by us. Yet
+they stoutly denied the whole alleged plot. We detained six of the
+chiefest men among them, and two of their boats, sending all the rest
+a-shore, being all naked rascals, except one, by whom we sent a message
+to the viceroy and governor, That, unless he sent us back all the goods
+and baggage we had ashore, without abstracting even the smallest
+portion, we would carry off those we had now in our custody. When this
+message was delivered to the viceroy and governor, they sent back word
+by the same messenger, that, if we would release the _balloches_, all
+our goods should be sent to us, and at the same time making many hollow
+declarations that no evil had ever been intended against us. On
+receiving this message, and in sight of the messenger, all our prisoners
+were immediately put in irons; and two letters were wrote to the viceroy
+in Persian, one by us and the other by the prisoners, intimating in the
+most determined terms, that the prisoners would be all put to death, if
+the goods were not safely returned without delay, giving only two hours
+respite at the most, the sand-glass being set before them as the
+messenger left the ship, that he might be induced to make haste. By
+these sharp means, we constrained them to restore every thing in the
+most ample manner; and this being done, we released the men and boats,
+according to promise, and sent them away. One man named _Malim
+Simsadim_, whom we had learnt, from _Haji Comul_, was an experienced
+pilot for _Sinde_ and _Cambay_, we detained for that purpose, promising
+to reward him according to his merits.
+
+Thus, by God's assistance, to whom be endless praise for our
+deliverance, we happily extricated ourselves from this dangerous and
+intricate affair, which was entirely concluded by six p.m. of the 20th
+September. We set sail that same night with our new pilot and _Haji
+Comul_, which last remained along with us, as his life would have been
+in danger among that accursed crew, for revealing their diabolical plot.
+We now bent out course for Sinde, as willing to avoid all subsequent
+dangers which these blood-thirsty balloches might attempt to plot
+against us. In our way, we had much conversation with Comul, whom we
+much esteemed and respected for the excellent service he had done
+towards us. _Comul_ was a native of Dabul in India, his father being a
+Persian of the sect of Ali, in which _Comul_ was a churchman, or priest,
+having likewise some skill in medicine and surgery, in which capacity he
+had resided in the tent of the governor of Guadal, and owing to which
+circumstance he had overheard their infernal plot. He had obtained leave
+to come aboard our ship, under pretence of procuring certain ointments
+or balsams, which he alleged had been promised him by our surgeons. He
+said that, on hearing their murderous intentions, his heart yearned
+within him, to think we should be led like sheep to the slaughter by
+such bloody butchers, and that God willed him to reveal their plot to
+us. He farther told us, that to his knowledge, they had already betrayed
+three ships in the same manner; that they were all rebels against the
+King of Persia, refusing to pay the tribute which they and their
+ancestors had been accustomed to; and that the king of Persia had levied
+an army, which waited not for from Guadal, with the purpose to invade
+the country next winter.
+
+This country of _Macquerona_, or Mekran, is on the main land of Asia,
+bordering upon the kingdom of Persia. The port of _Guadal_ is nearly in
+the lat. of 25° N, the variation being 17° 15' [lat. 24° 40' N. long.
+61° 50' E.]. It has good anchorage in four or five fathoms. At night of
+the 21st September, the day after leaving Guadal, our _balloche_ pilot
+brought our ship in danger of running on a shoal, where we had to come
+suddenly to anchor till next morning. The 24th at night, while laying
+to, because not far from Cape Camelo, a Portuguese frigate, or bark,
+passed close beside us, which at first we suspected to have been an
+armed galley, for which cause we prepared for defence in case of need.
+
+3. _Arrival at Diul-ginde,[115] and landing of the Ambassador: Seeking
+Trade there, are crossed by the slanderous Portuguese: Go to Sumatra and
+Bantam; and thence Home to England_.
+
+[Footnote 115: This singular name ought perhaps to have been Diul-Sinde,
+or Diul on the Indus, or Sinde river, to distinguish it from Diu in
+Guzerat.--E.]
+
+The 26th September, 1613, we came to anchor right before the mouth of
+the river _Sinde_, or Indus, by the directions of a pilot we had from
+one of the boats we found fishing at that place. We rode in very good
+ground, in a foot less five fathoms, the mouth of the river being E. by
+N. being in the latitude of 24° 38' N.[116] That same day, the
+ambassador sent two of his people, to confer with the governor about his
+coming ashore, and procuring a passage through that country into Persia.
+The governor, whose name was _Arah Manewardus_, who was of _Diul_,[117]
+was most willing to receive the ambassador, and to shew him every
+kindness, both in regard to his entertainment there, and his passage
+through his province or jurisdiction. To this intent, he sent a
+principal person aboard, attended by five or six more, to welcome his
+lordship with many compliments, assuring him of kind entertainment.
+Presently after there came boats from _Diul_ for his accommodation, in
+which he and all his people and goods went ashore on the 29th September,
+all in as good health as when they embarked in our ship from England. At
+his departure we saluted him with eleven guns, and our captain entrusted
+him with a fine fowling-piece, having two locks, to present to the
+governor of Tatta, a great city, a day's journey from Diul,[118] both
+cities being in the dominions of the Great Mogul. We also now set ashore
+our treacherous _balloche_ pilot, _Sim-sadin_, though he better merited
+to have been thrown into the sea, as he endeavoured twice to have cast
+us away; once by his own means, as formerly alluded to, and afterwards
+by giving devilish council to the pilot we hod from the fisher boat at
+this place.
+
+[Footnote 116: The river Indus has many mouths, of which no less than
+_seventeen_ are laid down in Arrowsmith's excellent map of Hindoostan,
+extending between the latitudes of 24° 45' and 23° 15' both N. and
+between the longitudes of 67° 12' and 69° 12' both east. That mouth
+where the Expedition now came to anchor, was probably that called the
+_Pitty_ river, being the most north-western of the Delta, in lat 24° 45'
+N. and long. 67° 12' E. from Greenwich; being the nearest on her way
+from Guadal, and that which most directly communicates with Tatta, the
+capital of the Delta of the Indus.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 117: Such is the vague mode of expression in the Pilgrims; but
+it appears afterwards that he was governor of Diul, at which place Sir
+Robert Shirley and his suite were landed. It singularly happens, that
+Diul is omitted in all the maps we have been able to consult; but from
+the context, it appears to have been near the mouth of the Pitty river,
+mentioned in the preceding note. It is afterwards said to have been
+fifteen miles up the river, in which case it may possibly be a place
+otherwise called _Larry Bunder_, about twenty miles up the Pitty, which
+is the port of Tatta.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 118: Tatta is not less than seventy-five English miles from
+the mouth of the Pitty, and consequently sixty from Diul.--E.]
+
+When the lord ambassador left us, we requested he would send us word how
+he found the country disposed, and whether we might have trade there;
+and for this purpose, we gave his lordship a note in writing of what we
+chiefly desired, which was to the following purport: "That our coming to
+this port was purposely to land his lordship; yet, as we had brought
+with us certain commodities and money, we were willing to make sales of
+such and so much of those as might suit, if we could obtain licence and
+protection for quiet trade; and, with the governor's permission, would
+settle a factory at this place, to which, though now but slenderly
+provided, we would afterwards bring such kinds and quantities of goods
+us might be most suitable for sale. The commodities we now had, were
+elephants and morse teeth, fine fowling-pieces, lead and tin in bars,
+and some Spanish dollars. If we could not be permitted to trade, we
+requested leave to provide ourselves, with refreshments, and so to
+depart."
+
+The 30th September, the ambassador had an audience of the governor
+concerning all his business, to whom he shewed the _firmaun_ of the king
+of Persia, as also the pass of the king of Spain, thinking thereby to
+satisfy the jealousy of the Portuguese residents at that place, who
+reported, on pretended intelligence from Ornus, that Don Roberto Shirley
+was come from England with three ships to the Indies, on purpose to
+steal. They peremptorily refused to give credence to the Spanish pass,
+saying it was neither signed nor sealed by their king, in which they
+could not possibly be mistaken, knowing it so well, and therefore that
+it was assuredly forged. On this, the ambassador angrily said, that it
+was idle to shew them any king's hand-writing and seal, as they had no
+king, being merely a waste nation, forcibly reduced under subjection to
+the king of Spain, and mere slaves both to him and his natural subjects.
+Yet the Portuguese boldly stood to their former allegations, insisting
+that the ambassador had other two ships in the Indies. Then _Arah
+Manewardus_ sharply reproved them for their unseemly contradictions of
+the Persian ambassador, and ordered them out of the room.
+
+The ambassador then made a speech to the governor concerning our
+admittance to trade at his port, on which the governor expressed his
+readiness to do so, all inconveniences understood, and desired the
+ambassador to send for one or two of our merchants, that he might confer
+with them on the subject. Upon this the ambassador wrote to us on the 2d
+October, saying what he had done in our affairs, and sending us
+assurance for our safe going and returning. Being thereby in good hope
+of establishing trade at this place, if not a factory, and to make sale
+of the small quantity of goods we now had, Mr Joseph Salbank and I, by
+advice of the captain and others, made ourselves ready and went ashore
+that same morning in one of the country boats. Our ship lay about four
+or five miles from the mouth of the river, from whence we had fifteen
+miles to travel to _Diul_, where the ambassador was, so that it was late
+in the evening before we landed there.
+
+In our way we met a Portuguese frigate or bark, bound for Ormus, on
+purpose to prevent any of their ships coming till we were gone. This
+bark went close past our ship, taking a careful review of her, and so
+departed. As soon as we were landed, three or four Portuguese came up to
+us, asking if we had brought any goods ashore, and such like questions;
+but we made them no reply, pretending not to understand their language,
+that we might the better understand them for our own advantage, if
+occasion served. There then came another Portuguese, who spoke Dutch
+very fluently, telling me many things respecting the country and people,
+tending to their ill conduct and character, thinking to dissuade us from
+endeavouring to have any trade there. Soon after, the officers of the
+customs came, and conducted us to the castle, but we could not have an
+audience of the governor that night, as it was already late. The
+officers, who were mostly banians, and spoke good Portuguese, searched
+every part about us for money, not even leaving our shoes unsearched;
+and perceiving that we were surprised at this, they prayed us to be
+content therewith, as it was the custom of the country. To this I
+replied, that though the Portuguese might give them cause for so bad a
+fashion, yet English merchants did not hide their money in their shoes
+like smugglers. Then the governor's servants came to us, and lighted us
+from the castle to the house in which the ambassador lodged, where we
+were made heartily welcome, and were lodged all the time we staid in
+Diul, and at no expence to us. Seeing us landed, and hearing we came to
+treat with the governor for settling trade at that place, the Portuguese
+spread many slanderous and malignant lies against our king, country, and
+nation, reporting that we were thieves, and not merchants, and that we
+derived our chief subsistence by robbing other nations on the sea.
+
+In the morning of the 3d October, the governor sent word to the
+ambassador that he would see and converse with us in the afternoon. In
+the mean time, we had notice that the Portuguese were using every effort
+with him and others to prevent our being entertained, both by offering
+him gratifications if he would refuse us, and by threatening to leave
+the place if we were received, pretending that they would not remain
+where thieves were admitted. Yet the governor sent for us, commanding
+four great horses, richly caparisoned, to be sent to the ambassador's
+house, for his lordship, Sir Thomas Powell, Mr Salbank, and me, and sent
+also a number of his servants to conduct us to the castle; all the
+ambassador's servants went likewise along with him, each carrying a
+halbert. In this manner we rode through some part of the city, the
+people in all the streets flocking out to see us, having heard talk of
+Englishmen, but never having seen any before, as we were the first who
+had ever been in that part of the country.
+
+On coming to the castle, we were received in a very orderly manner, and
+led through several spacious rooms, where many soldiers were standing in
+ranks on each side, all cloathed from head to foot in white dresses. We
+were then conducted to a high turret, in which the governor and some
+others sat, who rose up at our entrance and saluted us, bidding us
+kindly welcome. We then all sat down round the room, on carpets spread
+on the floor, according to their fashion. The governor again bid us
+welcome, saying he was glad to see Englishmen in that country; but said,
+in regard to the trade we desired to have there, that the Portuguese
+would by no means consent to our having trade, and threatened to desert
+the place if we were received. Yet, if he could be assured of deriving
+greater benefit from our trade than he now had from that of the
+Portuguese, he should not care how soon they left him, as he thought
+well of our nation. In the mean time, however, as he farmed the customs
+of that port from the king, to whom he was bound to pay certain sums
+yearly for the same, whether they were actually received or not, he was
+under the necessity of being circumspect in conducting the business,
+lest he might incur the displeasure of the king, to his utter ruin. He
+then told us that the customs from the Portuguese trade, together with
+what arose from their letting out their ships to hire to the Guzerats
+and Banians, amounted to a _lack_ of rupees yearly, which is £10,000
+sterling.[119]
+
+[Footnote 119: A rupee is two shillings, or somewhat more, and a _lack_
+is 100,000.-_Purch._]
+
+He then desired to know the kinds and quantities of the commodities we
+had brought, and what amount we had in money? To all which we gave him
+distinct answers, as nearly as we could remember; adding, that though we
+now brought but small store, we would engage to furnish his port at our
+next coming, which would be in about twenty-two months, with such
+commodities as were now brought by the Portuguese, and with such
+quantities of each kind as might be requisite to satisfy the demands of
+that port. He appeared to approve of this, and concluded by saying, as
+our present stock of commodities were so small, the Portuguese would
+only laugh at him and us if we were now admitted to trade, wherefore he
+wished us to defer all trade till our next coming; but that he was ready
+to give us a writing under his hand and seal to assure us of good
+entertainment at our next coming, provided we came fully prepared as we
+said, and on condition we should leave him a written engagement not to
+molest any of the ships or goods of the king of the Moguls, or his
+subjects. We agreed to all this, and requested he would allow us to sell
+those goods we now had; but which he would by no means consent to, for
+fear of offending the Portuguese, as stated before.
+
+We then desired that we might have leave to provide our ship with water,
+and other necessary refreshments, for our money, after which we should
+depart as soon as possible. To this he said, that as soon as we sent him
+the writing he desired, he would send us the one he had promised, and
+would give orders to his officers to see our wants supplied; but desired
+that the Portuguese might know nothing of all this. Seeing no remedy, we
+then desired to know what kinds of commodities he wished us to bring,
+and also what were the commodities his country could afford in return.
+We were accordingly informed, that the commodities in request in Sinde
+were broad-cloths of various prices, and light gay colours, as stammels,
+reds, greens, sky-blues, indigo-blues, azures, &c. also elephants teeth,
+iron, steel, lead, tin, spices, and money. The commodities to be had
+there were, indigo of Lahore, indigo of _Cherques_, calicoes of all
+sorts, pintadoes, or painted chintzes of all sorts, all kinds of
+Guzerat and Cambay commodities, with many kinds of drugs. We then took
+our leave, and returned to the ambassador's house, whence I sent him a
+letter, according to his desire, signed by Mr Salbanke and me, on which
+he sent us another, in the Persian language, which is written backwards,
+much like the Hebrew, and which was interpreted to us by the ambassador,
+in English, as follows:
+
+"WHEREAS there has arrived at this port of Diul, an English ship called
+the Expedition, of which is captain, Christopher Newport, and merchants,
+Joseph Salbank and Walter Peyton, and has landed here Don Robert
+Shirley, ambassador of the king of Persia, who has desired us to grant
+them trade at this port under my government, which I willingly would
+have granted, but not having brought merchandize in sufficient quantity
+to begin trade, and the Portuguese, from whom I reap benefit, refusing
+their consent, threatening to go away if I receive the English nation,
+by which I should be left destitute of all trade, whence arises those
+sums I have yearly to pay to the king, and in default whereof I should
+incur his majesty's displeasure, to my utter ruin. Yet, from the love I
+bear to the king of Persia, by whose ambassador I am solicited, and from
+affection for the English, together with the faithful performance of the
+writing left with me under their hands and seals by the two merchants
+before named, I hereby promise the English nation, under my hand and
+seal, if they will come like themselves, so fitted that I may derive
+more advantage from them than from the Portuguese, that I will
+infallibly grant them trade here, with such reasonable privileges as we
+may agree upon."
+
+_Given at Diul, this 3d of October_, 1613.
+
+ARAH MANEWARUS.
+
+Having received this writing on the 4th October, together with orders
+from the governor to his officers for our being furnished with water and
+refreshments, we made haste to return to our ships. A little before we
+went away, the ambassador fell into discourse with us about procuring a
+_firmaun_ from the Great Mogul, for which purpose he wished Mr Salbank
+to accompany him to Agra, the principal residence of that sovereign,
+affirming that he would procure that grant of trade for us in a short
+time, for which he alleged there was now a favourable opportunity, both
+because he had other business to transact at the court of the Mogul, and
+in consequence of the willingness of _Manewardus_ to admit us to trade
+at his port. He alleged likewise that we might never have so favourable
+an opportunity, and assured us that he would therein shew himself a
+true-hearted Englishman, whatever the company of merchants might think
+of him; and that Mr Salbank should be an evidence of his earnest
+endeavours to serve the merchants in procuring this _firmaun_, not only
+for Diul, but for other parts of the Mogul dominions, and should also
+carry the grant with him over-land to England. All this seemed
+reasonable, and as Mr Salbank had been before in these parts, he was
+very willing to go, provided it met with the approbation of the captain
+and me, and the other gentlemen in the ship; for which purpose the
+ambassador wrote a letter to our captain, to urge his consent, which we
+carried with us.
+
+We left Diul that same day about four in the afternoon, and on going to
+the river side to take boat, many of the natives flocked about to look
+at us. We were likewise joined by about a dozen Portuguese, who began to
+talk with us in Dutch, as before, asking many frivolous questions. I now
+answered them in their own language, on purpose that the Banians, who
+were present, might understand what I said; telling them that they were
+a shameless and lying people to spread so many slanderous and false
+reports of our nation, while they knew their own to be much inferior to
+ours in many respects, and that their scandalous conduct proceeded
+merely from malignant policy to prevent us from participating with them
+in the trade of India. To this I added, that if they did not restrain
+themselves within due peaceful bounds, amending their behaviour both in
+words and actions, they should be all driven out of India, and a more
+honest and loyal nation substituted in their place. Then one of the
+principal men among them stepped forwards, and made answer, that they
+had already too many enemies, and had no need of more; but that they had
+substantial reasons for speaking of us as they had done, as not long
+since one of their ships had been taken near Surat, and, as they
+supposed, by an English ship. To which I answered, that this was more
+like to have been done by the Hollanders. They then became more civil,
+and finally wished that we might trade in all parts of India with them,
+and they with us, like friends and neighbours, and that our kings might
+enter into some agreement to that effect. They then kindly took leave of
+us, and we departed.
+
+We got back to our ship on the 6th, when it was agreed that Mr Salbank
+should accompany the ambassador to Agra, as proposed. For which purpose
+he got himself in readiness, meaning to have gone ashore next day. In
+the mean time, the captain, the purser, and his man, went on shore to
+buy fresh victuals and necessaries to take with us to sea; but, on
+coming to the city, they were presently ordered away by the governor,
+and an express order issued by proclamation, that none of the natives
+should hereafter bring any of the English ashore, on pain of death. We
+were much astonished at this sudden alteration of affairs, for which we
+could not divine any cause: but, on the 9th, finding we could get
+nothing done here, nor any farther intercourse, we set sail, directing
+our course for Sumatra. All the time we were here in Sinde, we had not
+the smallest intimation of trade having been settled at Surat, for if we
+had, we might have taken a different course.
+
+We came to anchor in the road of Priaman on the 20th November, going in
+between the two northermost little islands, and anchored close by the
+northermost of these, in five fathoms. We immediately began to bargain
+for pepper, the price of which we beat down from twenty-two dollars, as
+first asked, to seventeen dollars the bahar, at which price we got two
+bahars, which were brought to us on board: but the governor would not
+allow us, although we made him a present of a musket, to hire a house,
+or to buy pepper ashore, unless we would consent to bestow presents on
+some twenty of the officers and merchants of the place. On the 22d, we
+received a letter from Captain Christen, of the Hosiander, then at
+Tecoo, earnestly advising us to come there immediately, as we could not
+fail to get as much pepper as we wished at that place, and in a short
+time; and, as we were not acquainted with the place, Captain Chrisen
+sent Richard Hall, one of his master's mates, to pilot us through among
+the dangerous shoals that lay about the roads of Tecoo. Accordingly we
+went to that place, and anchored in four fathoms, Richard Hall returning
+on board the Hosiander, where he died that same night, being ill of the
+flux.
+
+Before our arrival, the natives had offered their pepper to Captain
+Christen at twelve and thirteen dollars the bahar, taking payment in
+Surat commodities; but they now demanded twenty-two dollars in ready
+money, refusing to barter with them any longer for goods. They also
+demanded at this place as many presents as had been required at Priaman;
+beside which, they insisted upon having seventy-two dollars for
+anchorage duty. Being now in a worse situation than before, and having
+no time to waste in delays, we determined to come to short terms with
+them; wherefore we told them roundly, that we would on no account submit
+to their unreasonable demands, even though we might not get a single
+_cattee_ of pepper. For this purpose I drew out a letter from our
+captain, which he signed and sealed, addressed to the head governor,
+stating that he had not used our nation so well as we had reason to
+expect, both in unreasonable demands of presents, which were not usually
+given upon compulsion, but rather from good-will, or in reward of good
+behaviour, and likewise by their improper delay in implementing their
+promises, so very unlike mercantile dealings; since our ships have at
+various times remained at their port for three, four, and even five
+months, depending on their promises of having full lading, which might
+as well have been accomplished in one month, in so far as respected the
+small quantity of pepper they had to dispose of. This letter was
+translated by the interpreter in the Hosiander, an Indian, named Johen,
+who perfectly understood their language.
+
+The governor, in consequence of this remonstrance, gave orders that we
+might purchase pepper from any one who was inclined to sell; but sent us
+a message, wishing that one of us might come on shore, that the pepper
+might be there weighed. But still doubting that they meant to teaze us
+with delay, we sent back word that we could not remain so long as it
+would require for weighing the pepper ashore, and therefore if they
+would bring it to us on board, we would pay them eighteen dollars a
+bahar for their pepper, together with two dollars as custom to the
+governor, making exactly twenty dollars. As they still put off time, we
+set sail, as if meaning to have gone away, on which the governor sent
+another messenger, who spoke Portuguese tolerably, entreating us to come
+again to anchor, and we should have as much pepper as we could take in.
+We did so accordingly, and they brought pepper off to us in proas as
+fast as we could conveniently weigh it, and continued to do so till we
+had got about 200 bahars. They then began to grow slack in their
+proceedings, on which, fearing to lose the monsoon by spending too much
+time at this place, we weighed and proceeded for Bantam.
+
+We left Tecoo on the 8th December, three of our men remaining in the
+Hosiander, which needed their assistance, and proceeded towards Bantam,
+mostly keeping in sight of Sumatra. At our entrance into the straits of
+Sunda, on the 16th of that month, we met the Dragon on her homeward
+voyage, by which ship we sent letters to England. Next day, the 17th, we
+anchored in Bantam roads, and went immediately ashore to provide our
+lodging, and by the 29th our whole cargo was completed.
+
+We set sail from Bantam on the 2d January, 1614, for England, not having
+hitherto lost a single man by sickness during our whole voyage, for
+which we were thankful to God. This same day, as we were going out by
+way of Pulo Panian, we met General Saris in the Clove, then returning
+from Japan; and we came to anchor, that we might have his letters for
+England, together with four chests. We likewise spared him two of our
+hands, of which he was in great need; one being a youth, named Mortimer
+Prittie, and the other a carpenter's mate, named Thomas Valens, as he
+had not a single carpenter alive in his ship.
+
+Having settled all these matters with the Clove, we resumed our voyage
+for England on the 4th January, and came to anchor in Saldanha bay on
+the 21st March, where we got a sufficient supply of beeves and sheep
+from the natives, with abundance of fish, caught in our own seine. We
+left that place on the 9th April, with prosperous winds, which continued
+favourable till we were three degrees north of the equator, which we
+crossed the 11th May. When in lat. 00° 22' N. many of our men began to
+fall sick, some of them of the scurvy, and with swelled legs. On the
+10th July, 1614, by the blessing of God, we came to anchor in the Downs.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+CONTINUATION OF THE EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH EAST INDIA COMPANY TO
+INDIA.
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+In the immediately preceding chapter, we have given a series of the
+first twelve voyages fitted out by the English East India Company, in
+the prosecution of their exclusive trade to India, as preserved by
+Samuel Purchas; and we now mean, chiefly from the same source, to
+continue the series for a few years longer. At the close of the last
+voyage of the foregoing chapter, Purchas informs us, that "The order of
+reckoning must be now altered, because the voyages of the company were
+for the future set forth by means of a _joint stock_, instead of by
+particular ships, each upon a separate subscription, having separate
+stocks and factories; the whole proceedings being, in the sequel, at the
+general risk of, and accountable to the entire society or company of
+adventurers." He farther adds, "That the whole of these joint-stock
+voyages had not come into his hands; but that such as he had been able
+to procure, and were meet for publication, he had inserted in his
+Collection."
+
+The learned historiographer of the East India Company[120] gives rather
+a different account of the former series of separate or unconnected
+voyages, than that which we have taken from Purchas, terming the last
+voyage in our former chapter only the _ninth_, while Purchas denominates
+it the _twelfth_.
+
+[Footnote 120: Ann. of the Hon. E.I. Co, I. 162.]
+
+This difference, which is not at all material, may have arisen from
+Purchas having considered some of the ships belonging to _single_
+adventurers or subscriptions, which made separate voyages or parts of
+voyages, as _separate_ adventures. We come now to a new era in the mode
+of conducting the English exclusive trade to India, of the motives for
+which the Annals give the following account.[121]
+
+[Footnote 121: Id. I. 165.]
+
+"The inconveniences which had been experienced from separate classes of
+adventurers, partners in the East India Company, fitting out equipments
+on their own particular portions of stock, induced the directors, or
+committees, to resolve, in 1612, that, in future, the trade should be
+carried on by a joint stock only; and, on the basis of this resolution,
+the sum of £429,000 was subscribed: and, though portions of this joint
+stock were applied to the equipment of four voyages, the general
+instructions to the commanders were given in the name, and by the
+authority, of the governor, deputy-governor, and committees of the
+company of merchants in London trading to the East Indies, who explained
+that the whole was a joint concern, and that the commanders were to be
+responsible to the company for their conduct, both in the sale and
+purchase of commodities in the East Indies, and for their general
+conduct, in extending the commerce, within the limits of the company.
+The transition, therefore, from trading on _separate adventures_, which
+has been described as an imitation of the Dutch, to trading on a _joint
+stock_, arose out of the good sense of the English nation, which, from
+experience, had discovered the evil consequences of internal opposition,
+and had determined to proceed on a system better calculated to promote
+the general interest of the East India Company.
+
+"Notwithstanding this resolution, the proportions of this aggregate sum
+were applied to what has been termed the _tenth, eleventh, twelfth_, and
+_thirteenth_ voyages, in the following manner: In 1613, the _tenth_
+voyage was undertaken, the stock of which was estimated at £18,810 in
+money, and £12,446 in goods, the fleet consisting of _eight_ vessels. In
+1614, the stock for the _eleventh_ voyage was £13,942 in money, and
+£23,000 in goods, the fleet being _eight ships_. In 1615, the stock for
+the _twelfth_ voyage was £26,660 in money, and £26,065 in goods, with
+_six ships_. In 1616, the stock for the _thirteenth_ voyage was £52,087
+in money, and £16,506 in goods, the fleet containing _seven ships_. The
+purchase, repair, and equipment of vessels during these four voyages
+amounted to £272,544, which, with the specified stock and cargoes,
+accounts for the disbursement of the £429,000, the sum subscribed on the
+joint stock in 1613.[122]
+
+[Footnote 122: The enumerated particulars amount to £462,060, and exceed
+the subscribed joint stock by £33,060.--E.]
+
+"The profits on this joint stock are stated to have amounted, on the
+first two voyages, to £120 per cent. on the original subscription; but
+they were subsequently much diminished, by the difficulties which the
+English trade to the East Indies began to experience, from the
+opposition of the Dutch in the Spice Islands; so that, at the conclusion
+of this first joint stock, in 1617, the average profits of the four
+voyages did not exceed £87:10s. per. cent on the original subscription,
+notwithstanding the cargo of one of the vessels (the New-year's Gift)
+cost only 40,000 rials of eight, and the sale produce, in England,
+amounted to £80,000 sterling."
+
+It is not the purpose of this Collection to enlarge on the history of
+the East India Company, any farther than by giving relations of its
+early voyages, so far as these have come down to us in the Pilgrims of
+Purchas, their only published record; and we now therefore proceed with
+such of these voyages as are contained in that curious collection, and
+seem to be worth including in this work.--E.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Voyage of Captain Nicholas Downton to India, in 1614._[122]
+
+The ships employed on this voyage, the _second_ set forth by the _joint_
+stock of the East India Company, were the New-year's Gift admiral, of
+650 tons, on board of which Captain Downton sailed as general or chief
+commander; the Hector of 500 tons, vice-admiral; the Merchant's Hope,
+of 300 tons; and the Salomon of 200 tons. We have thus only_ four_ ships
+enumerated by Purchas, as employed in the _second_ voyage of the new
+joint stock, instead at _eight_ mentioned in the _Annals_, as before
+stated in the introduction to the present chapter. In this voyage, Mr
+William Edwards was lieutenant, or next in command under Captain
+Downton, being likewise Cape merchant, and commander of the Hector. Mr
+Nicholas Easworth was Cape merchant, and commander of the Merchant's
+Hope. Mr Thomas Elkington, Cape merchant, and commander of the Salomon.
+Mr Peter Rogers minister; Martin Pring. Arthur Spaight, Matthew
+Molineux, and Hugh Bennet, masters of the four ships, assisted by sundry
+mates,--Purch.
+
+[Footnote 122: Purch. Pilg. I. 500.--Extracted from the journal of
+Captain Downton]
+
+
+§1. _Incidents at Saldanha, Socotora, and Swally; with an Account of
+Disagreements between the Moguls and Portuguese, and between the Nabob
+and the English._
+
+We sailed from England on the 1st March, 1614, and arrived in the road
+of Saldanha, or Table Bay, on Wednesday the 15th June, being saluted on
+our arrival by a great storm. While every person was busy in mooring the
+ship, John Barter, who had lost his reason in consequence of a long
+fever, was suddenly missing, and was supposed to have made away with
+himself. The 16th we erected our tents, and placed a guard for their
+defence. We landed half our casks on the 17th, to be overhauled and
+seasoned; and this day _Choree_, the Saldanian or Hottentot, presented
+me a young steer. The 18th we landed more of our beer casks, to be
+washed, repaired, and seasoned. This day, _Choree_ departed into the
+interior, carrying with him his copper armour, javelins, and all things
+belonging to him, promising to be back the third day after, but he never
+returned.
+
+The 29th I sent George Downton ashore, to take observations of the
+latitude and variation, in consideration of the great difference in the
+variations, as observed in this and my former voyage in the Pepper-corn.
+We made the latitude exactly 34° S. and the variation 1° 45' W. by an
+azimuth, whereas most of the former variations at this place were
+easterly. We this night took down our tents, and brought every thing on
+board, making our ships ready to depart next day, which we did
+accordingly.
+
+We came to anchor in the bay of St Augustine in Madagascar on the 6th
+August, when the inhabitants abandoned the place, so that we could have
+no intercourse with them, but we afterwards got some refreshments from
+them. We here cut down some straight timber for various uses. We set
+sail on the 12th August, and anchored in Delisa bay in Socotora on the
+9th September. Next day we went ashore to wait upon the king, who was
+ready with his attendants to receive me, and gave me an account of the
+existing war in India, where the Mogul and the kings of the Deccan had
+united to drive the Portuguese from the country, owing to their having
+captured a ship coming from Juddah in the Red Sea, in which were three
+millions of treasure. He also informed me of two great fights which
+Captain Best had with the Portuguese, and of other news in these parts.
+I here procured such refreshments as the place could furnish, and bought
+2722 pounds of aloes from the king.
+
+Leaving Delisa on the 14th September, we got sight of the Deccan coast
+near Dabul on the 2d October, where we found great hindrance to our
+navigation, till we learnt by experience to anchor during the ebb tide,
+and continue our course with the tide of flood. Continuing this
+procedure, we anchored in the evening of the 14th, two and a half miles
+short of the bar of Surat; when presently a fleet of fourteen frigates
+or barks came to anchor near us, which we discovered by their lights, as
+it was quite dark. But as they could easily see us, by the lights at our
+ports, that we were in readiness for them, they durst not come any
+nearer, so that we rode quietly all night. Early of the 15th, we weighed
+with the land-wind, and coming somewhat near the frigates, they also
+weighed and stood to the southwards. We held on our course past the bar,
+towards South Swally, where we soon after arrived, though much opposed
+by contrary winds.
+
+Soon after we were anchored, I sent Molineux in his pinnace, and Mr
+Spooner with Samuel Squire in my _gellywatte_,[123] to take the
+soundings within the sands. In a channel where we found only five feet
+at low water in our former voyage, Mr Molineux had now three fathoms;
+and Mr Spooner had now seven or eight feet, where our boats could not
+pass at all formerly. Seeing some people on the shore in the afternoon,
+whom I supposed might be some of our merchants from Surat, I sent my
+pinnace to them; but they were some of the people belonging to _Coge
+Nozan_, sent to discover what nation we were of. From them I got farther
+information respecting the wars with the Portuguese, being told that the
+Moguls were besieging Damaun and Diu, Mocrib or Mucrob Khan being the
+general of the Mogul forces against Damaun; and I also learnt to my
+sorrow, that Mucrob Khan was governor and viceroy, as it may be called,
+not only over Surat, but all the country round, as, from former
+experience, I considered him to be a great enemy of our nation, and a
+friend to the Portuguese. From these people likewise, I heard of the
+health of Mr Aldworth and the rest of our factory, and wrote to hasten
+his presence, sending my letters by the servants of Coge Nozan.
+
+[Footnote 123: From this singular term, what is now called the
+_jollyboat_ has probably derived its name.--E.]
+
+I sent my purser on shore in the pinnace, early of the 16th, to purchase
+such necessaries as I thought might easily have been got; but he
+returned about ten o'clock a.m. without buying any thing for our
+purpose, bringing with him Mr Aldword, the chief merchant of our factory
+at Surat, along with whom was one Richard Steel, who had come over-land
+to Surat from Aleppo.[124] Mr Aldworth endeavoured to persuade me that
+Mucrob Khan was our friend, and that we had now an excellent opportunity
+to obtain good trade and satisfactory privileges while the Moguls were
+engaged in war with the Portuguese; and as both the Nabob and all the
+natives were rejoiced at hearing of our arrival, they would assuredly
+give us a most favourable reception. Pleased with these hopeful
+circumstances, I yet still wished some other person here in command
+instead of Mucrob Khan, of whom I remained doubtful, and that we should
+have no free trade from him, but in his accustomed manner, which I
+believed to have been, of his own accord to cross us, and not as so
+constrained by direction of his king; and the event turned out
+accordingly, though we were wise behind the band, as will appear in the
+sequel. Even the name he bore ought to have opened our eyes as to his
+influence with the Great Mogul: as _Mocrub_ signifies as much as _his
+own bowels, Khan_ meaning _great lord_. Yet I was deluded to believe
+that his favour with the king was tottering, and that he might easily be
+brought into disgrace, by complaint of any thing done contrary to the
+will or humour of the king; so that we were too bold, and injured our
+business when we found him opposing us, as we thought unreasonably. On
+enquiring into the state of our business, and the health of our factory,
+Mr Aldworth informed me that Paul Canning and several others had died;
+that Thomas Kerridge had long since been agent in his room at the court
+of the Mogul, and that the factory at Surat now only contained himself
+and William Bidulph.
+
+[Footnote 124: Mr Richard Stell, or Steel, had gone to Aleppo, to
+recover a debt from a merchant of that city, who had fled to India; and,
+following him through Persia, Mr Steel had arrived at Surat. On his
+report, the factors at Surat made an experiment to open a trade with
+Persia, which will form the subject of a future section of this
+chapter.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 17th, I called a council to advise upon the best
+manner of conducting our affairs here, and to consider who might be the
+best person to send to Agraas resident. Then entering upon the six
+interrogatories, inserted in the second article of our commission, I
+required Mr Aldworth to give direct answers to every question.--1. In
+what favour was Paul Canning with the emperor and his council, and how
+did he conduct himself at court in the business entrusted to him? He
+answered, That on his first arrival at court, he was well respected by
+the emperor, till the Jesuits made known that he was a merchant, and not
+sent immediately from our king; after which he was neglected, as he
+himself complained: and, as for his carriage and behaviour there, so far
+as he knew, it was sufficiently good;--3. Then demanding, whether it
+were needful to maintain a resident at court? Mr Aldworth answered, That
+it was certainly necessary, as the emperor required that one of our
+nation should reside there; and therefore, that the person ought to be a
+man of good respect, for preventing and counteracting any injuries that
+might be offered by the Jesuits, our determined adversaries; as he might
+also be extremely useful in promoting and directing the purchase and
+sale of various commodities.--6. Being questioned as to the expences of
+a resident at court? he said, according to the estimate of Paul Canning,
+it might be about £300 per annum; but, some time afterwards, his
+estimate was found to extend to five, six, and seven hundred pounds a
+year.--Being afterwards questioned, Whether he thought it fit that Mr
+Edwards should proceed to court under the designation of a merchant,
+according to the strict letter of the company's commission? his opinion
+was, by the experience of the late Mr Canning, that such a resident
+would not be at all respected by the king.
+
+In the morning of the 24th, Coge Nozan came down to the water side, and
+rested in my tent till I landed. I repaired to him, accompanied by all
+our merchants, and attended by a strong guard, armed with halberts,
+muskets, and pikes, having a coach to carry me from the landing place to
+the tent. On alighting from my coach, Coge Nozan came immediately to
+meet me. Before entering on business, he was told that a present for the
+Nabob was to be delivered to him, which was brought in. This consisted
+of a case containing six knives, two pair of knives, six sword-blades,
+six Spanish pikes, one case of combs, one mirror, one picture of Mars
+and Venus, one ditto of the Judgment of Paris, two Muscovy hides, and
+one gilded case of bottles filled with strong rich cordials. I then made
+the following present to himself: Six knives in single sheaths, four
+sword-blades, two pikes, one comb-case, a mirror, a picture of Moses,
+and a case of bottles, in consideration of the promise made by the nabob
+to our people, that whatever Coge Nozan agreed to, he the nabob would
+perform.
+
+I then moved for the enlargement of our privileges, and lessening of our
+customs, especially at Baroach, and that we might have a daily bazar or
+market at the water side, where we might purchase beef for our people,
+according to the _firmaun_ already granted by the Mogul, and because
+other flesh did not answer for them. He answered, that the nabob would
+shew us every favour in his power, if we would assist him against the
+Portuguese; that the customs of Baroach were out of his power to
+regulate, as the king had already farmed these to another person at a
+stipulated rent; and that we should have a regular market, but that
+bullocks and cows could not be allowed, as the king had granted a
+firmaun to the Banians, in consideration of a very large sum of money,
+that these might not be slaughtered. In fine, I found he had no power to
+grant us any thing; yet, willing to leave me somewhat contented, he
+proposed that I should send some of our merchants along with him to the
+nabob, where our business might be farther discussed.
+
+I accordingly sent along with him, Mr Aldworth, Mr Ensworth, Mr
+Dodsworth, Mr Mitford, and some others. Two or three days afterwards,
+they had access to the nabob, to whom they explained our desires, as
+before expressed. He then desired to know whether we would go with our
+ships to fight for him against Damaun, in which case, he said, we might
+count upon his favour? To this it was answered, that we could not on any
+account do this, as our king and the king of Spain were in peace. He
+then asked if we would remove our ships to the bar of Surat, and fight
+there against the Portuguese ships, if they came to injure the subjects
+of the Mogul? This likewise was represented to be contrary to the peace
+between our kings. On which he said, since we would do nothing for his
+service, he would do nothing for us. Several of the merchants of Surat
+endeavoured to persuade our merchants, that I ought to give way to the
+reasonable request of the nabob, and might still do what I thought
+proper; as, notwithstanding of our ships riding at the bar, the
+Portuguese frigates could go in and out on each side of me, owing to
+their light draught of water. To this I answered, that the proposal was
+utterly unfit for me to listen to; as whatever I promised I must
+perform, though at the expence of my own life and of all under my
+command, and that I could not possibly lend myself to fight against the
+Portuguese on any account whatever, unless they first attacked me, as it
+was absolutely contrary to my commission from my own sovereign. I added,
+that, if the Portuguese provoked me by any aggression, I would not be
+withheld from fighting them for all the wealth of the nabob: But he made
+small account of this distinction, and, seeing that we refused to fulfil
+his wishes, he opposed us in all our proceedings as far as he could, so
+that we nearly lost all our former hopes of trading at this place. In
+this dilemma, I made enquiry respecting _Gengomar_ and _Castellata_, and
+also of _Gogo_:[125] but could get poor encouragement to change for
+better dealing, so that we remained long perplexed how to act, and
+returned to our business at the ships.
+
+[Footnote 125: Gogo is on the west shore of the gulf of Cambay. In an
+after passage of this voyage, what is here called Gengomar _and_
+Castellata, is called Gengomar _or_ Castelletto, which may possibly
+refer to Jumbosier, on a river of the same name, about sixty miles north
+from Surat. Castelletta must have been a name imposed by the
+Portuguese.--E.]
+
+The 27th, in the morning, when Nicholas Ufflet went ashore, he found all
+the people belonging to Swally had gone away from the water-side in the
+night, as also all those who used to stay beside the tents, in
+consequence of an order from the nabob; and was farther informed that
+our merchants were detained at Surat, having been stopped by force when
+attempting to cross the bridge, and had even been beaten by the guard
+set there by the nabob. The gunner's boy and his companion, formerly
+supposed to have run away, and who were in company at the time with our
+merchants, being on their return to the ships, were also well beaten,
+and detained with the rest. The 31st we began to take in fresh water, to
+be ready for departing, as our stay here seemed so very uncertain. This
+day, Thomas Smith, the master's boy, had most of the outer part of one
+of his thighs bitten off by a great fish, while swimming about the ship.
+The ravenous fish drew him under water, yet he came up again and swam
+to the ship, and got up to the bend, where he fainted. Being brought
+into the gun-room, the surgeon endeavoured to do what he could for his
+recovery; but he had lost so much blood that he never recovered out of
+the swoon, and shortly died.
+
+In the evening of the 2d November, Mr Aldworth and Mr Elkington came
+down from Surat, where they left Mr Ensworth very sick. They reported to
+me their proceedings with the nabob, as formerly stated; but said they
+were now reconciled, and that he had made fair promises of future
+respect, with a free trade through all the country under his government.
+I do not attribute his severe proceedings hitherto to any hatred or
+ill-will to our nation, but to his fears lest we might unite with the
+Portuguese against him, owing to my refusing to assist him against
+Damaun. These his doubts and fears were increased by a knavish device of
+the subtle and lying Jesuits; who, taking advantage of my refusal to
+fight against the Portuguese without cause, at Damaun or elsewhere,
+pretended with the nabob that they had a letter from the viceroy,
+saying, That he and his friends the English meant to join their forces
+and come against Surat. This devilish device gave much hindrance to our
+business, by occasioning continual doubt in the nabob's mind of our
+friendly intentions; and unfortunately likewise, Mr Aldworth had
+strengthened these doubts and fears, though ignorant of the lying
+inventions of the jesuits; for, thinking to mollify their rigour, he
+rashly advised them to beware, lest their ill usage might force us to
+join with the Portuguese against them. We likewise believed that the
+order of the nabob, forbidding the people to trade with us on board,
+proceeded entirely from his desire to thwart us: But we afterwards
+learnt, by letter from Thomas Kerridge, that Mucrob Khan, and all other
+governors of sea-ports, had express orders from the Mogul, not to allow
+any trade with us till they had first chosen and purchased, for the
+king's use, all kinds of strange and unusual things we might have to
+dispose of.
+
+On the 3d I called a council to deliberate concerning our business, and
+especially how far we might proceed in aid of the natives against the
+Portuguese, for which purpose we carefully examined our commission and
+instructions. We also arranged the appointments of the merchants for
+their several places of employment, both such as were to remain in the
+factory at Surat, and those who were to proceed on the voyage. This day
+likewise, sixty bales of indigo, and eleven packs of cotton-yarn, came
+aboard from Surat, being goods that belonged to the _twelfth_ voyage.
+It was my desire to have been ashore among our merchants, that I might
+assist in arranging our business at Surat; and this the rather because
+of the turbulent, head-strong, and haughty spirit of----,[126] who was
+ever striving to sway every thing his own way, thwarting others who
+aimed at the common good, and whose better discretion led them to more
+humility. But such was the uncertain state of our business, partly owing
+to the nabob and his people, and partly to the Portuguese, who I heard
+were arming against us; and besides, because I understood that the nabob
+proposed to demand restitution for the goods taken by Sir Henry
+Middleton in the Red Sea, at under rates, as they say, though I know
+they had goods for goods even to the value of a halfpenny. On all these
+accounts, therefore, I thought it best to keep nearest my principal
+charge, referring all things on shore to the merchants of my council, in
+most of whom I had great confidence.
+
+[Footnote 126: This name is left blank in the Pilgrims, probably because
+Purchas, a contemporary, did not wish to give offence.--E.]
+
+The 22d November, I finished my letters for Persia; being one for the
+company, to be forwarded over land, one for Sir Robert Shirley, and one
+of instructions for Richard Steel. The 23d, _Lacandus_, the Banian, came
+down to us, with news of discontent and hard speeches that had passed
+between the nabob and our merchants, but who were now again reconciled.
+This was occasioned by Mr Edwards refusing to let him see the presents,
+which he was at last obliged to consent to. All these merchants wrote me
+at this time separately, that the viceroy was certainly arming against
+us. At this time Mr Ensworth and Timothy Wood died within an hour of
+each other. John Orwicke, Robert Young, and Esay But, were now
+dispatched to provide such cloths and cotton-yarns as we had formerly
+agreed on. The 25th Mr Edwards wrote me of the coming of three great
+men, bringing seven firmauns from the Great Mogul; in whose presence the
+nabob bestowed upon him 850 _mahmudies_, ten fine _basties_, thirty
+_top-seels_, and thirty _allizaes_; at the same time he gave ten
+_top-seels_ to Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, a cloak to Mr Aldworth and
+another to Mr Elkington, Mr Dodsworth having had one before. He likewise
+promised free trade to all places under his command, and abundant
+refreshments for our people in the ships.
+
+The 27th, John Crowther came from Surat, to inform me he had been
+appointed by the chief merchants at Surat to accompany Mr Steel into
+Persia, and had therefore come to take leave of me, and to fetch away
+his things from the ship. This day also Mr Edwards wrote to me, by
+Edmund Espinol, to send him fifty elephants teeth, indifferently chosen
+as to size, as a banian merchant was in treaty for them all, if they
+could agree on terms. The 6th December, the nabob seemed ashamed that he
+had not shewn me the smallest respect since my arrival, and, being
+desirous to excuse himself, he this day entreated Mr Edwards to go on
+board along with the great banian who had bought our ivory, and
+Lacandas, the banian merchant of the junk belonging to the king of
+_Cushan_.[127] He chose this last, on account of his former familiarity
+with our people, and commissioned him to buy sword-blades, knives, and
+mirrors. By them he sent me a present, consisting of two _corge_ of
+coarse _bastas_, ten fine _bastas_, ten _top-seels_, ten _cuttonies_,
+and three quilts, together with a message, certifying that the nabob
+proposed to come down to visit me in a day or two at the most. At their
+going ashore, I gave them a salute of five guns.
+
+[Footnote 127: Kessem, on the coast of Arabia Felix, is probably here
+meant.--E.]
+
+They told me, that the nabob had certain intelligence from Goa, that the
+viceroy was fitting out all the force he could muster to come against
+us; and expressed a wish, on the part of the nabob, that I would convoy
+one or two of his ships for two or three days sail from the coast, which
+were bound for the Red Sea. To this I answered, that I could not do
+this; as, if once off the coast, the wind was entirely adverse for our
+return: But, if he would further our dispatch, so that we might be ready
+in any convenient time, I would do any thing reasonable that he could
+desire. The 9th, the nabob's son came to the shore, but would not
+venture on board, wherefore I went ashore to him. He had a horse ready
+for me on landing to fetch me, and desired me to sit down beside him,
+which I did. He then commanded some horsemen, who accompanied him, to
+amuse me, by shewing their warlike evolutions on the sands, chasing each
+other after the fashion of the Deccan, whence they were; and at his
+desire I caused eleven guns to be fired, to do him honour. Though he
+refused to drink any wine at this interview, he sent for it after his
+departure, as also for a fowling-piece he had seen in the hands of one
+of our people, both which I sent him, together with a bowl from which to
+drink the wine.
+
+§2. _Account of the Forces of the Portuguese, their hostile Attempts,
+and Fight with the English, in which they are disgracefully repulsed_.
+
+On the 16th of December, 1613, Mr Elkington wrote me, That the nabob had
+told him the Portuguese frigates had burnt Gogo, with many _gouges_ or
+villages in its vicinity, together with ten large ships, of which the
+_Rehemee_ was one, and an hundred and twenty small vessels. He said
+likewise, that the nabob was much displeased with me for not having
+fired upon the Portuguese vessels, as they passed our anchorage, which
+circumstance had renewed his suspicions of our friendly intelligence
+with the Portuguese; and, although Mr Elkington had said every thing he
+could to explain the reason of our conduct, as stated formerly, he could
+not satisfy the nabob of its propriety. The 23d two boats came off to us
+for lead; and on the same day we saw twenty-two Portuguese frigates,
+which came to anchor in the night between, us and the mouth of the
+river, where they continued most part of next day.
+
+The 24th, in the morning, we saw four boats coming down the river
+towards us; but, on seeing the Portuguese frigates, they immediately
+turned back, and were chased up the river by two of the frigates.
+Finding they could not get up with the boats, the Portuguese landed and
+set fire to two or three poor cottages, and carried off two or three
+cattle, and then returned to their squadron at the mouth of the river.
+In the afternoon, they all went up the river in company. In the morning
+early of the 25th, we saw five or six frigates under sail. An hour or
+two after, we saw a boat standing towards us, which was presently chased
+by two frigates, on which the men in the small boat ran her a-ground and
+forsook her; but as the frigates could not float near where the boat
+was, and the tide was ebbing fast, they departed without farther harm.
+The 26th in the morning, I sent the Hope a good way to the northward
+from the rest of our fleet, to see whether the Portuguese would assail
+her.
+
+Early in the morning of the 27th, the Portuguese frigates came and made
+a bravado before our ship, and then before the Salomon, which was next
+us; and from thence went directly against the Hope, which rode a great
+way from us, in which manoeuvre they had all their men close stowed
+below, and not one to be seen. The master of the Hope hailed them twice,
+but they would give no answer; on which they let fly at them from the
+bow-chases of the Hope, which only could be brought to bear, and by
+which they were forced with some loss to stand away. The master of the
+Hope was satisfied, if he had not shot at them, that they would have
+attempted to board, or to have set his ship on fire, as they had the
+advantage of both wind and tide, and were so directly a-head of his ship
+that he could hardly get any of his guns to bear upon them, while the
+rest of our ships could not have come up to his rescue. In the
+afternoon, I sent the Salomon to keep company with the Hope; and, going
+to the northwards of her, she made several shots at the frigates, but we
+did not perceive that any harm was done. I therefore ordered a gun to be
+fired, as a warning to desist, on which the Salomon stood in again and
+came to anchor.
+
+In the morning of the 28th, I went in the pinnace aboard the Hope and
+Salomon, to enquire the reason of their firing. And the Portuguese,
+seeing our boats pass to and fro, removed in the afternoon, and anchored
+a little way without us, obviously for the purpose of cutting off our
+intercourse. In the meantime, the boat which had been chased ashore on
+the 25th, came aboard the Gift, bringing some letters from Mr Elkington,
+which our master sent to me, as I was then in the Hope. Having answered
+Mr Elkington's letter, I sent back the _gelliwat_ to the Gift, with
+directions to go thence to Surat in the night. But, as the _gelliwat_
+[galivat] returned, she was chased by the frigates; which perceiving, I
+waved her to return, but she held on her way, not observing my signal.
+The frigates held her so close in chase, that they got within shot of
+her, and even fired one gun; and had not the Gift slipped one cable and
+veered another, and plied her ordnance at the Portuguese, they had
+surely taken or sunk the _gelliwat_. This forced the Portuguese to give
+over the chase, not without damage. Late at night, on the tide of ebb, I
+made the Hope and Salomon set sail and come near the other two ships,
+and then returned on board the Gift.
+
+Perceiving on the 29th, that my continuing off the bar of Surat was
+quite unavailing, as the Portuguese frigates could pass and repass to
+and from the river, by going across the sands, where there was not
+water to float my ships; and that no boats could come to us to fetch
+away our goods, for fear of the frigates, neither could we have any
+intercourse with our friends ashore, to know what passed; I therefore
+set sail for Swally roads, where I arrived next day, having very little
+wind.
+
+On the 14th January, 1614, we heard of many frigates being arrived,
+which rode at the bar of Surat all next day till night; and, leaving
+that place after dark, they came and rode within shot of us till next
+morning, when they weighed and stood back to the southwards. While they
+remained at anchor, supposing they might be the Mallabars, which the
+nabob had formerly promised to send me, I put forth a flag of truce, and
+sent Mr Spooner, one of our master's mates, towards them, directing him
+to keep a watchful eye to our signals, which we should make if we saw
+any reason of suspicion. Seeing our gallivat draw near, and no sign of
+friendship in answer to ours, I hoisted my flag and fired a shot to
+recall our boat, which immediately came back. At this time, our sentinel
+at the mast-head descried another fleet of frigates, which afterwards
+assembled at the bar of Surat, and went all into the river. By this I
+was satisfied they were all Portuguese, and was glad our men and boat
+had escaped their hands. Thinking these frigates were forerunners of a
+greater force, I ordered the decks to be cleared, all our guns thrown
+loose, and every thing to be in readiness for action, both for the great
+guns and small arms, and to fit up barricades for close quarters. In the
+night of the 17th, all the frigates came out of the river, and in the
+morning were all at the point of the bar.
+
+The 18th, Maugie, the banian captain formerly mentioned, accompanied by
+another great man, who was son to _Clych Khan_, came to the water side
+to speak with me, to whom I went ashore. Not long after, word was
+brought from on board, that they had descried a fleet of ships far off,
+which looked very big, but which we could not see from the shore, owing
+to its being very low. Taking leave of my visitors, I returned aboard,
+and made every thing be put in readiness, which was done immediately.
+Towards night, we made them out to be six galleons, with three smaller
+ships, besides the sixty frigates which were here before. Two gallies
+belonging to this armament were not yet come up. The tide being spent,
+they came to anchor till next day. The 19th, they plied up to the
+entrance of our new channel, where they came to anchor, and where they
+were joined by the two gallies. One of their great ships, being too
+forward, came too near the sands and grounded, but was soon got off
+again.
+
+On this occasion, Mucrob Khan, the nabob of Surat, sent the sabandar and
+several others of the principal men of Surat, with a great present of
+provisions to the Portuguese, and to endeavour to enter into terms of
+peace; but though great policy was used on both sides, they broke off
+without coming to any terms. This was done by the nabob to my great
+mortification, for he and all the country despaired of my being able to
+resist such disproportionate force, and he was therefore willing before
+hand to conciliate the viceroy by presents; considering, if I were once
+overthrown, his own turn would come next, either to endure a severe
+assault, or to make such a peace as the enemy chose to dictate. Peace
+was certainly most desirable for the viceroy, that he might restore
+trade with the Moguls. Yet, seeing the tractableness of the nabob, and
+his apparent earnestness for peace, the viceroy made light of it for the
+present, expecting to bring it to bear with great advantage after he had
+overthrown us, which he made no doubt easily to accomplish. When this
+was performed, he expected to receive great presents, and great
+submission from the Moguls to the dictates of the conqueror. But it
+pleased God, who beheld the injustice of his attempt, to turn the event
+contrary to the expectations both of the viceroy and the nabob. After
+failing in all his attempts against me, and finding he could not even
+gain a _boats thole_ from me in all the time he spent here, with loss
+and disgrace, the viceroy was fain to revive the former despised proffer
+of peace with the nabob: While the nabob on the other hand, confirmed by
+the experience of a month, and seeing that the viceroy, after all his
+boastful threatenings, and with so vast an armament, was unable to
+prevail against our four merchant ships, or even to remove our small
+force one foot from their place, gave for answer, that he would not make
+peace with the viceroy. Thus was the viceroy frustrated in both his
+hopes, of an easy victory over us, and an advantageous peace with the
+Moguls. After this digression, I now return to our proceedings.
+
+When we formerly heard of the force which the viceroy was fitting out
+against us; we had no conception it would be so formidable as it now
+appeared, and therefore deemed it expedient to consult how, by God's
+help, we might best resist. The odds and advantages on their side, made
+me calculate every thing that made against me. Being far out-numbered
+by his forces, which I esteemed the principal ships and means belonging
+to the Portuguese in India, and having all the people of greatest rank
+and valour, I considered it might be too hazardous for us to put out
+into deep water, as by their numbers they would be able to intercept and
+overcharge me, and to force me irrecoverably aground, on one side or
+other. Such were my apparent disadvantages in going out to sea; while I
+knew, on the other hand, that their numerous smaller vessels might much
+annoy us with fire-works, or put us otherwise into great hazard, in the
+place where we now rode at anchor, where I was hopeful their great ships
+could not or durst not come, owing to the shoal water. Though my numbers
+were considerably lessened by sickness and deaths, all my people, from
+the highest to the lowest, seemed quite courageous, yet ignorant both of
+our danger and how it was to be prevented; but their brave spirit gave
+me great hope. Yet my anxiety was not small, how I might best act in
+maintaining the honour of my country, and not neglect the valuable
+property entrusted to my care by my friends and employers; as not only
+was the present charge to be put in hazard, but all hopes also of future
+benefits, if I were now overthrown; as the enemy, if he now got the
+mastery, would be able to make peace with the Moguls on his own terms,
+to the expulsion of our nation for ever.
+
+Besides these considerations, I leave to such parents as are tender for
+the safety of their dutiful and obedient children, to imagine how great
+was my anxiety for the safety of the people under my command. So great
+was my cares all this time, that I had little time for conversation, or
+even almost to shew myself sensible of the approaching dangers. Whenever
+I could get free from others, I very earnestly craved the aid and
+direction of the almighty and ever merciful God, who had often delivered
+me before from manifold dangers, praying that he would so direct me that
+I might omit nothing having a tendency to the safety of my charge, and
+our defence against the enemy. I had strong confidence that the Almighty
+would grant my request, and yet was often led to doubt, through my
+manifold and grievous offences. I resolved at length what to do, by
+God's assistance, providing the masters of the ships would agree to
+second me. Being satisfied, if we should-receive a defeat while at
+anchor, our disgrace would be great, and our enemies could in that case
+be little injured by us; while by setting sail, the viceroy, in his
+greediness and pride, might do himself some wrong upon the sands, by
+which he might cripple his own force, and thereby open a way for our
+getting out through the rest. Yet this plan seemed only fit for ultimate
+necessity, considering that much of our goods were now on their way, and
+others were expected from day to day; and, if once out, unless it
+pleased God to make us the conquerors, so as to drive the viceroy clean
+away, I should on no account be able to return to my anchorage, where
+only I could get in my lading. Considering also that the viceroy would
+hold his honour in such high estimation, that he would rather die than
+give way; and besides, that my people would be tired and half spent with
+labour, before going to fight, by heaving at the capstan to get up our
+anchors, setting the sails, and so forth, which in this hot country
+makes them both weary and faint, to the great diminution of their
+courage; while the viceroy and his soldiers being troubled with no
+labour, which among them is done by slaves and inferior mariners, would
+come fresh into the battle. Likewise, even supposing the viceroy to lose
+many men in the fight, he could be again supplied from the nearest towns
+belonging to the Portuguese, by means of his frigates; whereas we could
+not have a single man replaced, whatever number we might have slain or
+disabled.
+
+Having none of our merchants aboard, as they were all employed in the
+country, or with Mr Elkington in our factory at Surat, I sent for all
+the masters, on the night of this Thursday the 19th January, desiring
+them and some of the mates to come to supper with me on board the Gift.
+I then made them a speech on our present situation, desiring every one
+to give his opinion freely, how we might best proceed in our present
+straits. I declared to them my confidence in God, notwithstanding all
+the force of these bragging Portuguese, that their injurious attempts
+would not prevail against us, who had been careful not to wrong them in
+the Indies. I represented also to them, the jealousy entertained of us
+by the nabob and other chief men of the country, because we had
+refrained from firing at the saucy bragging frigates.
+
+I found all the masters willing and tractable to my heart's desire. We
+had some few discourses about our provident mooring, as also about
+removing a little lower down. I then proposed my plan to them, desiring
+to have their free opinion. I represented that our ships were now in as
+good condition for battle as we could make them, yet our danger by
+night, if we continued where we were, was not small, however provident
+we might be. Wherefore, I thought it fit in the morning at low water, to
+send one ship to ride as far down as we could have water for all our
+ships at the lowest ebb, at which time none of the enemies ships could
+come to annoy her. This, as I thought, might induce the viceroy to make
+some attempt at high water, when our other three ships might bear down
+against the stream, the springs being now at the highest, when we should
+see what efforts the viceroy might make, and might attend to the same
+and act accordingly, in the hope that the viceroy might commit some
+error to the weakening of his own force and our advantage. And if such
+should happen, it would then be proper for us to put out to sea, in the
+darkness of the following night, when the viceroy would not be in
+condition to make sail to hinder us. Or, if we saw reason, we might make
+sail daily on the flood, working to and again, which would somewhat
+dismay the Portuguese, and encourage our own men. My proposal was
+unanimously agreed to, as the best way of proceeding; and finding Mr
+Molineux quite willing to fall down with the Hope at low water next
+morning, this was directed accordingly.
+
+In the morning of the 20th, at low water, the Hope went down to induce
+the enemy to make some attempt against her when the tide rose, and then
+we in the other ships stood after her. The viceroy, and all the worthy
+knights about him, thinking I was about to flee, hastened as soon as the
+flood would permit to stop the passage, and prevent our getting out. We
+all came to anchor short of the Hope, yet not so as to leave her
+destitute of our help, but rather doubting of sufficient depth for our
+ships at low water so far down. On coming to anchor, I went down into my
+cabin, meaning to have given our friends ashore notice of my purposes,
+that they might know it proceeded from no rashness, but in good
+discretion to wait upon advantages to the prejudice of our enemies. But
+presently I had notice, that three of the Portuguese ships and most of
+their frigates were coming stem on before the wind upon the Hope,
+followed by all the galleons.
+
+We endeavoured to weigh our anchor, but having no time for that, we cut
+our cables, and made sail for the rescue of the Hope. Before we could
+get sufficiently near, the enemies ships were close aboard of her, and
+had entered their men, boarding her with great appearance of resolution.
+But they had no quiet abode there, nor could they rest in their own
+ships, neither could they cast them loose from the Hope, so greatly were
+they annoyed by our great guns and small arms. At length, their
+principal officers being slain, the rest in great numbers leapt into the
+sea, whence many of them were taken up by their frigates. But, before
+quitting their ships, they set them on fire, thinking to have burnt the
+Hope along with them. But, praised be the Lord of Hosts, they were burnt
+without harm to the Hope; for, so soon as the fire had well kindled, the
+flaming ships were cast loose and drifted on the sands, where they
+continued burning till quenched by the flowing tide. So long as
+day-light lasted, we continued exchanging shots from all our ships with
+the galleons, they being on the outside of a spit of sand, and we on the
+inside. They did us little injury in our hulls, but much to our ropes
+and sails overhead. In this conflict, besides those who were wounded, we
+had five men slain. By a great mischance, the main-top-sail, top-mast,
+and shrouds got afire, communicated from the main-top, in consequence of
+the fire-works lodged there taking fire, the man being slain who had the
+charge there. All these were burnt quite away, together with a great
+part of the main-mast; and this misfortune prevented us from going out
+into deep water to try our fortune with the viceroy in close fight. We
+were likewise put to our shifts, not knowing by what means we might get
+the mast replaced.
+
+The 21st I got the anchor weighed, which we had been obliged to cut from
+the day before. On the 22d, I was informed that many great men,
+accompanied by a Portuguese friar, and escorted by five or six hundred
+horse, had come down to Swally, meaning to send the friar next day, with
+three or four principal Moors, to negociate a peace with the viceroy.
+But the nabob sent me word, that he sought for no such thing, and was
+resolved to conclude no peace, unless we were included. He also granted
+me what timber we might need, of which we availed ourselves, and
+promised to supply us with provisions. The Portuguese remaining quiet on
+the 25th, the _muccadam_ of Swally came to me, saying that the
+before-mentioned friar had sent to entice him to poison the well whence
+we had our water, which he would not consent to, and had therefore put
+some live tortoises into it, that these might shew by their deaths, if
+poison should be put therein by the Portuguese. At night, part of the
+120 bales of indigo we had purchased came to the water side, and was
+presently got aboard. This day _Isaac Beg_ sent me a present of fruit
+from his own garden; and this day likewise the rest of the timber for
+repairing the Hope's mast was brought down to us.
+
+The 27th, I sent all our boats to sound the _Swash_ at low water, being
+chiefly on purpose to keep the Portuguese in ignorance of my real
+intentions. They sent one galley and five frigates, thinking to have cut
+off our boats; but in this they failed, as in every thing else they
+attempted against us. The 28th, the nabob sent great store of provisions
+to the viceroy, as goats, bread, plantains, and the like, together with
+a banquet of sweetmeats. Coge Nozan sent me a present of five bullocks.
+Several of our men died about this time of fluxes and other diseases.
+The 31st, we received aboard from Cambay, fifty bales of indigo. In the
+afternoon, one _Coge Arson Ali_ came aboard, and presented me with
+several goats, a large supply of bread, roast-meat, plantains, sugar,
+and other such things. Along with him came an old acquaintance of mine,
+a Persian, who said there were news from Damaun, that the Portuguese had
+sent there 350 men to be buried; and we computed, that there could not
+be less than 100 more, killed and burnt in their ships, besides those
+who were drowned. They also told me, that not only were the Portuguese
+opposed here in India, but also by the Persians at Ormus, and that the
+Malays were in arms against them at Malacca. They likewise assured me,
+that the negociations between Mucrob Khan and the viceroy were entirely
+at an end, and that no peace would take place between them.
+
+I had long wished to see this man, who, till now, could never get leave
+of the nabob, without which no one dared use that freedom. This jealousy
+of the nabob proceeded, as he said, from a great charge enjoined by the
+king to procure for his use all curious things of value, and he is
+fearful lest any of these should pass through other hands, to his
+disgrace, which forces him to employ strange and severe means to prevent
+this happening. Day being nearly spent, I sent them ashore, making them
+a present, and giving money to all their people, having first shewn them
+how far some of our great guns could throw a ball. They then took their
+leave and departed.
+
+§3_Supplies received by the Portuguese, who vainly endeavour to use
+Fire-boats. They seek Peace, which is refused, and depart. Interview
+between the Nabob and Captain Downton, and Departure of the English_.
+
+On the 3d February, 1615, there arrived at the waterside twenty-four
+bales of indigo, seven packs of white, seven of black, and four of blue
+_bastas,_ six packs of cotton yarn, three of _candikens,_ and one pack
+of _crecany,_ all of which were brought immediately on board. This day
+also the supplies for the viceroy came in sight, being two ships of
+burden, two junks, and eight or ten of the country boats. The nabob sent
+me a message by _Lacandas,_ that these were not for the purpose of
+fighting, but were full of combustibles, meant to be set on fire, and
+allowed to drift with the tide upon our ships in the night. I was glad
+of this information, and took immediate measures to prevent the
+consequences of such an attempt, as well as to defend ourselves from the
+smaller vessels. The spring-tides were now near the highest, and were
+consequently fittest for their attacks, so that I expected them every
+tide; and to let them see I was ready for their reception, and how
+little I cared for them, I directed the setting and clearing our watch,
+mornings and evenings, to be announced by a volley of shot from every
+ship, pointing the best piece in my ship at the prow of the viceroy's
+ship, to try his temper, and to daunt the courage of his people. It
+pleased God this morning, when I had least leisure for mourning, to call
+my only son, George Downton, to his mercy, who was buried next morning
+ashore, and the volleys intended to insult the viceroy, served also to
+honour his obsequies.
+
+This morning also, while expecting an assault from the Portuguese, I was
+visited by one _Mousa Attale,_ a Malabar captain, together with his
+troop, from whom I got a description of the principal ports and harbours
+of his country, expressing my anxious desire to become acquainted with
+them, and to have league and intercourse between them and the English,
+with mutual trade and friendship. He seemed willing to encourage this
+proposal, and requested letters to that effect from me, which their
+ships might shew to my countrymen when they happened to meet, which I
+gave him, as also a letter for his king, requesting kind usage for my
+countrymen if any of their ships should come into his harbours. After
+some conference, he departed, and I presented him with a sword-blade,
+and three or four knives.[128] This day the master of the Hope
+represented that he had several men killed in the former engagement, and
+many hurt, bruised, and disabled from service, on which I sent him three
+men from my ship, four from the Hector, and four from the Salomon.
+
+[Footnote 128: These knives, so often mentioned as presents in India,
+were probably daggers.--E.]
+
+The 5th I had letters from Mr Aldworth, informing of his arrival at
+Baroach with his companions, and saying that he had been set upon by 200
+Rajput thieves, nine _coss_ from Baroach, the day before, the thieves
+being armed with pikes, matchlocks, and bows and arrows; but, after some
+skirmishing, they fled, three of them being slain, and more wounded. In
+this affair Humphrey Elkington was shot through the thigh with an arrow,
+one of the horsemen sent by Surder Khan to guard our people was killed,
+and Mr Aldworth's horse sore wounded. The nabob sent me word that the
+viceroy proposed to assault me this day, and therefore sent Coge Nozan
+to guard the land. Nozan came accordingly to the water side, and sent
+his son, _Mamud Iehad,_ to visit me on board, accompanied by a chief
+named _Kemagee,_ the son of _Leckdarsee, rajput_ chieftain of _Guigamar_
+or _Castelletto,_[129] who had for a long time maintained war with the
+Moguls and Portuguese. These chiefs entreated permission to see and
+partake in the fight, and as no assault was made that day, they remained
+all night on board. The _rajput_ chief went ashore next morning, but the
+other remained on board two or three days, and seeing the enemy would do
+nothing, he went likewise ashore.
+
+[Footnote 129: On a former occasion supposed to have been
+Jumbosier.--E.]
+
+On the forenoon of the 8th, we received more indigo aboard, and in the
+afternoon all the Portuguese frigates, with the two junks, and two
+gallies, came driving up with the flood, as if for some attempt against
+us, either by fire, which I most doubted, or otherwise. We therefore got
+under weigh and advanced to meet them, upon which they all made off as
+fast as they could, and we came again to anchor. This was merely a
+device, to make us believe their fire-boats were to come against us
+from the south, and that we might have no suspicion of their coming from
+the northwards; wherefore they again assembled all their junks,
+frigates, and galleys next night, a little without the sands, to call
+our attention from the northern quarter. But I was aware of that being
+the place of greatest danger; and though I commanded a careful outlook
+to be kept both ways, I especially enjoined to be watchful in the north
+quarter, as it fell out accordingly. A little within the night, between
+us and a great light to the westwards, upon the island of Gogo, we could
+discern them creeping up to the north upon the flood; and then, about
+ten o'clock at night, when very dark, and before the moon rose, upon the
+last quarter of the ebb tide, there came down towards us two fire-boats,
+towed by two frigates, which we happily descried before they came nigh,
+and plied them heartily both with great guns and small arms. By this we
+soon beat off the frigates, which set the fire-boats adrift, and made
+sail from us.
+
+One of the fire-boats drifted clear of the Gift, Hector, and Salomon,
+but got athwart the cable of the Hope, and presently blew up; but,
+blessed be God, the Hope received no harm, having cut her cable and got
+clear. The other fire-boat came up likewise on the quarter of the Hope,
+all in flames, but did no harm, as she drifted past with the ebb. She
+came up again with the tide of flood, and was like to have got foul of
+us; but our boats towed her ashore continually burning. The former one
+floated likewise back with the flood, but sank near us in the morning.
+This day I had a letter from Thomas Kerridge, specifying that Nicholas
+Whittington had gone distracted, and expressing some doubts of Richard
+Steel.
+
+The 10th, at night, about the same time as before, two other fire-boats
+came against us, towed by four or five frigates, bearing directly on the
+Hector. Immediately on perceiving them, the Gift and Hector let drive at
+them with great guns and small arms, so that the frigates threw them
+adrift, firing them sooner than they otherwise would. The burning boats
+floated toward the Hector, but having a stiff breeze, drifted past to
+leewards. Within half an hour after, we perceived many boats drifting
+towards the Hector, against which we again let drive, forcing the
+frigates to abandon them in such a hurry that they only set two of them
+on fire, there being four of them chained together. Fortunately we had
+a stiff gale, and by edging up to windward, they all floated clear to
+leeward. While passing, our gunner made a shot at one of the boats that
+was unfired, which struck her and set her on fire. The vehemence of the
+flames reached the fourth boat, and set her likewise on fire; so they
+all drifted ashore in flames, hard by our landing-place. My pinnace took
+three of the actors in a small canoe, in which they thought to have
+escaped. Two of these men were brought aboard my ship, the third being
+left in the Hector. Besides these, our _gelliwat_ picked up another,
+which she brought with her. Thus did God disappoint all the malicious
+practices of our enemy.
+
+Seeing himself foiled in all his injurious attempts, the viceroy set
+sail on the 11th, and fell down to the bar of Surat, where he anchored.
+Being suspicious that he meant to attempt taking Surat, I resolved, in
+that case, to have gone with my ships to set upon his fleet, which must
+have constrained him to desist from his enterprise against Surat, as I
+was desirous to assist in defending a place where we had so great a
+stock, and so many of our merchants. But the viceroy durst not trust me
+so far as to unman his ships, lest I should come against him. In the
+night he sent all his frigates into the river, and sent some person to
+propose peace, but received a flat denial. The 12th, the nabob sent
+_Lacandas_ to inform me that five or six frigates had gone to the
+northwards, having four or five fire-boats, which they meant to let
+drive upon us in the night, and therefore wished me to keep a good
+look-out. I acknowledged his kindness, and was glad of his care, though
+needing no such admonition, as I was equally suspicious of their
+practices when out of sight as when they rode near us. The nabob had
+this intelligence from the Jesuits, with whom he kept on fair terms, for
+his better security, if he should have been put to the worst. As the
+frigates, or other vessels in the offing, could not well discern the
+place where our ships rode during the darkness of the night, by reason
+of the shadow of the shore, they had lights made for them ashore for
+guiding them where to find us during their hellish incendiary plans.
+Having observed this light, night after night, always in the same place,
+and seeing it as before on the night of the 13th, I sent William Gurdin
+ashore with twenty men, armed with muskets and pikes, directing them to
+endeavour to surround this fire-blazer, supposing him to be some traitor
+inhabiting the neighbourhood. But, on coming near, the fire was
+presently put out, and was again seen at another place, quite contrary
+to the direction of their pursuit; and so going up and down for a long
+time, they gave it over, esteeming it some delusion of the devil. This
+night the viceroy set sail from the bar of Surat, leaving about twenty
+of his frigates in the river to keep in check the Malabar frigates which
+were there for the defence of the town.
+
+The 14th, the nabob sent a great man, who, in token of friendship, was
+called his brother, to visit me. This person gave as his opinion that
+the viceroy was gone with all his fleet to Goa, leaving some frigates to
+keep possession of the river, and others to return to Diu and Ormus. But
+my own opinion is, that the viceroy has only gone somewhere to refresh
+his people, and to reinforce his ships, against our putting to sea, when
+no sands will be in the way of his greatest ships coming against me. He
+also told me that the king had sent down forces for the purpose of
+conquering Damaun and all the sea coast. He said likewise, that they
+were more willing to give entertainment and trade to our nation than the
+Portuguese, which I thought very reasonable, as the Portuguese had
+always been injurious, and had done many vile things against them. Yet,
+unless we continue able to resist the Portuguese, they will soon unsay
+that speech for their own ease. When he had viewed our ship, with our
+ordnance and defensive preparations, we sent him and his train on shore
+in oar boats, in all courtesy.
+
+We now set seriously to work in clearing and loading the Hope for
+England, having hitherto taken in our goods confusedly and by hasty
+snatches, some into one ship, and some into others, not deeming it
+proper to hazard all in one bottom while exposed to so much danger from
+the Portuguese. I had resolved to send home the Hope, not that I
+esteemed her burden the fittest for the goods we had provided, but
+because of the many impediments and disabilities of that ship, as daily
+complained of by the master and carpenter; in particular, that her
+stern-post within the rudder was unsheathed, a strange and dangerous
+neglect and unaccountable oversight, on which account it was fitting she
+should soonest return; besides, we were in danger of losing our
+quicksilver which was in her, and lay on her keel and bilges.
+
+The 18th, the nabob sent to me Cage Arson Ali, the sabandar, and other
+merchants of Surat, requesting me to remain for fifteen days, which I
+would in no sort consent to. They then importuned me to stop for ten
+days, which likewise I refused, shewing them how prejudicial so long
+delay might be to my voyage. The cause of their request was, lest the
+viceroy might come with all his forces against Surat after my departure.
+Seeing them discontented at my denial, and loth to give displeasure to
+the nabob, which might be prejudicial to our affairs afterwards, and
+considering that it would require six days of the ten before we could
+get the Hope ready, I at last consented to their request, to their great
+satisfaction. At night on the 22d I had a letter from Surat, informing
+me that the nabob meant to visit me next day, and accordingly two
+elephants and six camels came down in the morning of the 23d, bringing
+his tents and other matters for his reception. The 24th, Mr Aldworth
+came down with the rest of the merchants to finish all business with me
+previous to our departure.
+
+In the morning of the 25th, the nabob came down with a great train, with
+six other elephants, and was two hours at the water side before I knew
+of his arrival. When told, I was sorry for the neglect, and sent Mr
+Aldworth, Mr Elkington, and Mr Dodsworth ashore to compliment him, and
+to keep him in discourse till I could go on shore, which I did soon
+after. I proposed to have gone to him as a son to his father, in my
+doublet and hose, without arms or any great train, according to custom,
+to shew the trust and confidence I reposed in him; but my friends
+persuaded me to the contrary, insisting that I should go well appointed,
+and attended by a sufficient guard, to which I consented, though I
+afterwards repented that I had not followed my own way. I went
+accordingly ashore with about 140 men, part pikes, and part firelocks,
+who gave me a volley of small arms as I entered the nabob's tent. The
+nabob received me with much kindness, seeming much pleased at my coming
+ashore to him. We sat for some time under a very fair tent, open on all
+sides, and surrounded by many people, both his attendants and mine.
+
+At length he brought me into a more private room, near adjoining, having
+only along with him Ali Khan, a great Persian captain, with Henie the
+Banian as his interpreter; while I was accompanied by Messrs. Aldworth,
+Elkington, and Dodsworth. We there conferred about the state of his
+country, and about our affairs. At last I invited him to go on board to
+view our ship, to which he readily consented. He then presented me with
+his own sword, with many complimentary speeches, saying it was the
+custom of his country to honour with arms such captains as had deserved
+well. This sword, as he said, was made in his own house, the hilt being
+of massy gold. In return, I presented to him my own arms, being sword
+and dagger, together with my girdle and hangers, by me much esteemed,
+and making a much finer shew than his, though of less value. We came
+forth together from the private tent, and I walked down to the shore to
+wait for his coming, whither he sent me a present of ten _cuttonee_
+quilts and twenty _topseels_.
+
+Soon after the nabob came to the shore, and we took boat together, going
+on board my ship. Having shewn our ordnance, and the manner of pointing
+the guns, and explained all our other preparations for defence, I
+presented him with a very handsome gilt cup and cover, some fair knives,
+a rundlet of Muscadine wine, and some other toys. Desiring to see some
+of our ordnance shot off, and how far they could carry their balls on
+the water, I caused three guns to be fired. He would then have taken
+leave, but I accompanied him ashore, and ordered him to be saluted at
+his departure with eleven guns. When we parted at the water side, the
+nabob gave me four baskets of grapes. He likewise gave among the gunners
+and trumpeters 200 mahmoodies, and 500 among the ship's company,
+together with 100 _books_ of white _bastas_, worth two mahmoodies each.
+Thus, after some compliments, we took leave of each other and parted.
+While rowing up along shore for my better getting on board, as the tide
+ran very swiftly, _Lacandas_ came running towards the boat, bearing a
+message from the nabob to ask if he should erect a tomb over the grave
+of my son. I returned my hearty thanks for the kind offer, desiring
+Lacandas to say that I had already begun to do so. The nabob then went
+away to Surat, and not long after his tent was taken down and went after
+him, with all the rest of his carriages.
+
+The 26th, the nabob's son and son-in-law, a very ingenious young man,
+came to visit me, upon whom I bestowed some knives and other things,
+such as I had left, which could not be much, as I had every now and then
+some great man or other to visit me, to all of whom I had to give
+something. The 27th, the three sons of Ali Khan came to visit me, the
+eldest of whom, named Guger Khan, presented me with two antilopes, a
+male and a female, of which I was very glad, having endeavoured before
+ineffectually to send some home to Sir Thomas Smith. After viewing all
+our ship, with our ordnance and warlike preparations for defence, I gave
+him four Spanish pikes, and some other things of my own, and saluted him
+with eleven guns at his departure.
+
+In the afternoon of the 3d March, upon the tide of ebb, and having a
+light gale from the north, sufficient to give steerage-way to our ships,
+we hastened to get up our anchors, meaning to set sail in the
+prosecution of our voyage, though our friends, the Malabars, who had
+desired to go with us, made no attempt to come out. At this time we saw
+another fleet of Portuguese frigates standing in from the westwards, and
+being willing to do my best to hinder them from going into the river of
+Surat, were it only to shew our good-will to the country people, we shot
+at the nearest of them, though without hope of doing them any hurt, as
+there was room for them to pass on either side of us, beyond reach of
+our shot. I was willing also to shew our friends on land, as also to
+those who I made no doubt would go down the coast to give notice to the
+galleons of our coming, that we shot at their frigates going into Surat,
+that they might also expect that we cared little for their greater
+strength.
+
+In our passage this night we had various flaws of inconstant winds,
+which obliged us to come to anchor for some time. As the wind became
+afterwards steady, though faint, we again made sail, continuing our
+course S. by E. along shore. At day-light nest morning we began to
+descry, between us and the shore, the Portuguese galleons and two
+gallies; all of which made sail on perceiving us, following with a light
+breeze, while we stood somewhat out of our course with all our sails,
+partly to gain time to prepare ourselves perfectly for battle, and
+partly to give rest to my people, who had taken much fatigue the night
+before, as also to draw the enemy farther from the coast, and from
+having the convenience of fresh supplies. Ere long, the tide of flood
+obliged us to anchor, not having sufficient wind to stem the current.
+The enemy, resting his hopes on the wind, kept longer under sail, to his
+great disadvantage. But as I did not consider this at the time as an
+error in them, I was is great doubt lest they might intend going against
+Surat with all their force, now that we were at sea, and there work
+their wills upon our friends and goods, which I could only prevent by
+following them. Yet the season was now so far advanced that I doubted,
+even with our best haste, we should hardly get off the coast before the
+foul weather set in; and this gave me hope that the viceroy would not
+expose himself to the danger of the approaching winter. While
+considering these things, the tide of flood was spent, and it was time
+for us to use the ebb, when, to my great satisfaction, I saw the viceroy
+and his whole fleet standing towards us, with a fresh breeze. We
+likewise made sail, and stood our course before him all that ebb, and so
+spent that night to the best advantage, partly at anchor, and partly
+under sail, according as wind and tide served.
+
+In the morning of the 5th, the enemy had gained very little way upon us.
+We spent this day, as before, in riding or sailing, as the tide
+answered. This night the viceroy gained much ground upon us, and by this
+time we had got a good way from the coast, and had advanced well to the
+southwards, so that I was now satisfied the Portuguese forces could not
+this year give any annoyance to Surat. I considered that my purposes in
+these parts, both by the authority of my king, and to fulfil the designs
+of my employers, were, in merchant ships, fitted indeed for defence, to
+seek honest commerce, without striving to injure any; wherefore I held
+it fit for me to proceed soberly and discreetly, neither basely to flee
+from the enemy, nor to tempt danger by proudly seeking it, if it might
+be honourably avoided. The viceroy was quite differently situated. He
+had been sent by his master with the principal ships of all India, and
+all the gallants and braggarts of these parts, not only to disturb and
+intercept the peaceable trade of the English with the subjects of the
+Mogul, but to take and burn them in the harbours of that great king. The
+viceroy was furnished with abundance of all things the country could
+afford, and only wanted an upright cause. He found what he was in search
+of,--four poor merchant ships, having few men, many being dead, and more
+sick; and these bragadocios, measuring our hearts by their own, thought
+we could never stand against what they esteemed so superior a force;
+and, seeing their intent, I baited my hook, which the fish presently ran
+after.
+
+The Hope, being heavily laden, was in tow of the Hector, and being
+sternmost, three of the Portuguese ships, and thirty or forty of their
+frigates, as I had expected, boarded her with the flower of all their
+chivalry. But, by the hand of God, and to their great amazement, they
+received such a blow that few of them escaped, and these by
+extraordinary chance, and three of their ships were burnt.[130] Thus it
+pleased God to baffle this their first assault. Ever after, though they
+beleaguered us round about for many days together, with all sorts of
+ships, our people still in action, and sadly worn out with continual
+labour, even shifting goods from ship to ship in that time, yet did they
+never gain from us even the value of a _louse_ in all that time, except
+our bullets, which we most willingly gave them roundly, their fire-boats
+always failing, and nothing prospering in all their efforts. For many
+days together I sent the viceroy a defiance once every twenty-four
+hours, which must needs lie heavy on the stomach of so courageous a
+gentleman. Craving pardon for this digression, I now proceed with my
+narrative.
+
+[Footnote 130: I strongly suspect this to be a mere recapitulation of
+what happened in Swally roads, as already related, as this second attack
+on the Hope by the Portuguese is entirely omitted by Elkington and
+Dodsworth.--E.]
+
+The 6th, in the morning, I sent for my master, letting him know that I
+proposed, when the viceroy should come up near us, to cast about and
+charge him suddenly, that we might strike unexpected terror in his
+people, who now bragged us, seeing us flee before them. To this end I
+went on board all the ships, giving them directions how to act, and gave
+orders to the Hector, by means of her pinnace and mine, to take in an
+hundred bales of goods from the Hope, to lighten her, and even staid to
+see it done. By this time it was mid-day, when my ship struck sail for
+my better getting on board; at which, the viceroy thinking it staid for
+him in contempt, as we imagined, be and his consorts bore up with the
+shore, and gave up all hope of mending their fortunes by following us
+any farther; which course I very well liked, as there is nothing under
+his foot to make amends for the loss of the worst man's finger in all
+our ships. Besides, I wished for no occasion of fighting unless for the
+honour of my king and country as I would rather save the life of one of
+my poorest sailors than kill a thousand enemies.
+
+Having now finished with the viceroy, I set myself to write letters for
+the dispatch of the Hope, yet still thinking to have stood in for the
+bar of Goa to endeavour to have left some compliments there for the
+viceroy at his return. This was my earnest desire, but we were so long
+delayed in dispatching the Hope, that by the time we had finished, we
+were far beyond Goa.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"The rest of this journal is wanting, as he is also wanting who should
+have finished it. But, alas! this is the imperfection of man's best
+perfections; death lying in ambush to entrap those whom by open force he
+could not devour. He dying in this voyage, and following his son, hath
+left this glorious act, _memoriae sacrum_, the memorable epitaph of his
+worth, savouring of a true heroic disposition, piety and valour being in
+him seasoned by gravity and modesty."--_Purch._
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Relations by Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, in Supplement to the former
+Voyage_.[131]
+
+"Since writing the voyage of Captain Downton, I have obtained the
+journal of Captain Elkington, in which the reader may proceed with this
+worthy captain to Bantam, and thence to his grave; this history
+succeeding the former, as its author did in command."--_Purch._
+
+[Footnote 131: Purch. Pilgr. I. 514.]
+
+In employing the journals of Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, to continue
+the account of the voyage set forth under the command of Captain
+Downton, only so much of both are here inserted as answers that purpose,
+to avoid prolix repetition of circumstances, already sufficiently
+related. The journal of Elkington breaks off abruptly, like that of
+Downton, and probably from the same cause; as we learn from Purchas, in
+the preceding notice, that Elkington died at Bantam. The journal of
+Dodsworth entirely relates to the voyage of the Hope to England, after
+parting company with the other two ships, except that it mentions
+several incidents of the transactions previous to the departure of that
+ship, most of which are here omitted, as already sufficiently
+explained.--E.
+
+§1. _Continuation of the Voyage from Surat to Bantam, by Captain Thomas
+Elkington_.
+
+On the 4th March, 1615, we descried the Portuguese fleet, which
+immediately gave us chace, which it continued all that day and the next.
+On the 6th, the general came aboard us, wishing us to make ready, as he
+proposed to turn suddenly round and give an onset upon the enemy: But,
+about noon that day, the Portuguese bore up and stood for the coast, and
+in three hours after we lost sight of them. At night of the 10th, the
+Hope departed from us. The 15th we saw three water-spouts at no great
+distance; one of them, which was very large, continued for the space of
+half an hour. The 19th we doubled Cape Comorin.
+
+The 10th May, the wind and current both against as, the general went to
+a green island, to the north or the salt hill, where we came to anchor
+in twenty fathoms on good sand. We here sought fresh water, but found
+none. There were plenty of bogs and pigs on this island, where likewise
+we gathered abundance of cocoa-nuts. All about this island is good
+anchorage, within a stone's throw of the shore, in twelve fathoms. The
+pinnace brought water from another island, about four leagues off but it
+was brackish.[132] The 2d June we came to anchor in Bantam road.
+
+[Footnote 132: So vaguely is this journal expressed, or rather so
+miserably abbreviated by Purchas, that there are no indications by which
+to guess even where this island lay, except that it was on the way
+between Cape Comorin and Bantam.--E.]
+
+The 3d July we weighed mace, and received silk towards furnishing the
+Salomon for Masulipatam, to which place we agreed to send the following
+merchants: George Chancie, Ralph Preston, Humphry Elkington, Timothy
+Mallory, George Savage, and Robert Savage. The 8th we loaded porcelain
+into the Salomon. This day we had news by a junk from the Moluccas, that
+the Thomasine was there; and that there were twelve sail of Hollanders
+at Ternate, who endeavoured to prevent all others from trading. The 11th
+our old house very narrowly escaped burning, in conscience of a fire
+very near. The 20th, Mr Jordan had letters from. Mr Ball at Macasser,
+complaining of violent ill usage from the Hollanders, who had driven him
+from thence, and stating that they proposed coming with all their force
+to take possession of Bantam, and to place the king of _Motron_ in the
+government. The 21st Mr Bennet set sail in the Salomon. The 25th, the
+Advice and Attendance arrived from England, after a voyage of eight
+months. They met the Globe and James at the Cape, to which ships they
+spared eighteen men. These ships departed for England on the 17th July,
+and the Advice and her consort on the 18th, meeting a ship near the
+Cape, which we suppose might be either the Samaritan or the Hope, bound
+for England.
+
+The 5th of August I went aboard to visit the general, Captain Nicholas
+Downton, who was then very ill, and we got word of his death next
+day.[133] Mr Evans the preacher, and Mr Hambdon, followed him, on the
+8th, as we supposed by taking laudanum, as they were both well a little
+before. On the 11th the Advice was sent to Japan, having a complement of
+twenty-two Englishmen, together with five blacks, and Fernando the
+Spaniard. The Concord returned on the 14th from Succadanea in Borneo and
+Macasser. That night we had a prodigious tempest of rain, with thunder
+and lightning, and the mosque of Bantam was split in two by a
+thunderbolt, on which occasion the chief priest was nearly slain, which
+the king and people took for a bad omen, and therefore determined to
+make peace with Jacatra. The 16th the boat belonging to the Thomasine
+came to Bantam, with twenty-two English and five blacks, bringing
+intelligence of that ship having been lost on certain flats the night
+before, twenty-two leagues from Macasser, owing to the carelessness of
+Wilson the master, while all the people were asleep, he only being at
+the helm. They saved all the money, which they brought along with them;
+and as Mr Bailey told us that his wrecked crew had compelled him to pay
+them their wages, we caused them to restore the money.
+
+[Footnote 133: By order in the box, Mr Elkington succeeded in the
+command.--_Purch._]
+
+On the 19th, the Hollanders clapped three blacks into the bilboes, whom
+Mr Bailey had brought with him from Celoar, pretending they were caught,
+climbing over the rails of their house, and also, as they were brought
+from a place under their protection, they refused to give us them back.
+We are in various ways most vilely abused by these Hollanders, neither
+do I see any means to right ourselves, unless we go to war with them;
+for we believe this matter to have been done on purpose, and these
+blacks enticed by them to it, as if taken by force. I was much offended
+with Mr Bailey for his conduct in taking away these blacks, as the
+means of making us hated as man-stealers, in, places where we used to be
+well received, which the Hollanders will take care to blaze abroad to
+our disgrace.
+
+In the night of the 13th September, the watch discovered a fire in the
+thatch over the house in which Mr Jordan lodged, which was soon
+extinguished; but we could plainly perceive it had been done apurpose,
+as we found the cane by which it had been kindled sticking in the
+thatch, for which we suspected a Spaniard named Francisco, who had
+appostatized and turned Javan. The 2d October, Sophonee Cossock, a
+merchant, came in a small pinnace from Puloway, accompanied by an
+_Orancay_, to confer on trade with that place. The 22d, I went ashore,
+accompanied by Mr Pring and Mr Bailey, to confer with the Dutch general,
+concerning certain idle complaints made by them against our mariners. I
+found him and the president of their factory very impatient, calling us
+insolent English, threatening that our pride would have a fall, with
+many other disgraceful and opprobrious words.[134] Such was the
+entertainment we received from that boorish general, named Garrat
+Reynes, in his own house. He had formerly shewn the like or worse to Mr
+Ball, on going aboard his ship at Banda: And four of our men, who took
+passage with him from thence to _Cambello_, were brought all the way in
+the bilboes, for no cause.
+
+[Footnote 134: Quis tulerit Gracchos de seditione querentes? It was
+Dutch policy to cry _rogue_ first.--_Purch._]
+
+I went ashore on the 3d November, when Captain Jordan called together
+the merchants, and sent for the _orancay_ of Banda, whose letter he got
+translated; the purport of which was, that, in regard to the ancient
+friendship between them and the English, especially with Captain
+Keeling, and provoked by the cruelty and injustice of the Hollanders,
+their earnest desire was to trade only with the English for the spices
+of Puloway, Puleron, and Nera, on condition that the English would
+supply them with provisions, ordnance, and ammunition, and help them to
+recover the castle of Nera, desiring that some person might be sent to
+Banda, to confer with the orancays. To this we answered, That we could
+not give them assistance to recover the castle of Nera, without orders
+from England, and that at present we had no ordnance to spare; but would
+willingly supply them with provisions, and every thing else in our
+power, till we had farther orders from England, and would trade with
+them for spices, for which purpose we proposed to send a ship, and a
+person to confer with the _orancays_, and particularly to know how we
+might have security, and whether they would grant us permission to build
+a fort for that purpose.
+
+The 23d five Hollanders anchored in the outer road, four of which came
+last from the Mauritius, having been nineteen months on the voyage from
+Holland. At that island they found that General Butt had been cast away
+with three ships, two being totally lost, the men and goods of the third
+being saved. A fourth, which was in company, went home under jury-masts,
+along with a pinnace that came there by chance. One of these ships that
+was at the Mauritius came away before the rest, and they found her
+driving up and down off the mouth of the straits, having lost 160 men,
+and having only eight remaining. The 25th, by letters from Priaman, we
+had notice of the death of Mr Ozewicke and Samuel Negus.
+
+§2. _Brief Observations by Mr Edward Dodsworth, who returned to England
+in the Hope_.
+
+The 16th October, 1614, while in the bay of Surat, Mr Aldworth and Mr
+Steel came on board, and next day Mr Aldworth was examined, according to
+the company's commission and instructions,[135] concerning the behaviour
+of Paul Canning to the king, and the king's conduct towards him. To
+which he answered, That his behaviour was right, and the king's
+entertainment of him satisfactory, till the Jesuits insinuated he was
+only a merchant, and not sent immediately by the king of England. After
+this he was neglected, and died since.[136] Also, that he thought it fit
+that some one of our nation of good respect should remain at court, to
+procure redress of any wrongs that might be offered; to which function
+Mr Edwards was chosen to go to Agra, as the person most answerable to
+the company's instructions, on which occasion some question was made,
+whether it would be proper he should proceed in the character of a
+merchant, according to the strict letter of the instructions, which Mr
+Aldworth conceived would procure him disrespect with the king; and,
+after some contest, some way was given to Mr Edwards in this affair,
+lest they should disagree in their proceedings, especially as it had
+been reported by some already, that he was a messenger from the king of
+Britain.
+
+[Footnote 135: This commission had six questions, of which I only
+insert what is fit for the public eye.--_Purch._]
+
+[Footnote 136: It has been said on a former occasion, that he died of
+poison, given, as was thought, by the jesuits.--_Purch._]
+
+After much opposition to our desire of trade, there came a _firmaun_
+from the king on the 24th November, which, according to custom, the
+nabob met in state two miles from the city, attended by 600 horse. Next
+day we were kindly entertained, and the nabob gave Mr Edwards 850
+mahmoudies, thirty pieces of _topseels_, ten of fine calicoes, and other
+things. The money being to bear the charges of carrying up the present
+to the king, who was not willing we should incur any expence on that
+account, and the stuffs as a gratification to those who carried them up.
+To the merchants also he gave fifteen pieces of _topseels_, five to
+each, with his _chop_ or licence for our departure, and promises of kind
+usage, all this being done in presence of those who brought the
+_firmaun_. The 30th, Mr Edwards and we set out for _Amadavar_
+[Ahmedabad.]
+
+The 2d of December we reached Broach, whence the governor sent a guard
+of horse with us to _Demylode_, and there we had a new escort of horse
+and foot to _Charmondo_;[137] whence we departed on the 7th with
+twenty-five soldiers, all notorious thieves, as we afterwards found.
+With these we went ten coss, when we pitched our tents in a plain,
+barricading ourselves as usual with our carts. While at supper, we had
+nearly been assaulted by fifty horse, who passed close by us, but they
+found us well provided for our defence, and it appeared that the charge
+we carried was well known in all the country through which we travelled.
+The 8th we came to _Brodera_, [Brodrah] and made a present to the
+governor, who received it very kindly, and particularly requested to see
+our mastiff dog. Brodrah stands in a plain, which seemed fertile, and is
+well watered, a thing rather uncommon in those parts. We departed thence
+with an escort of 100 horse and foot, voluntarily offered from respect
+for the king's present, yet were they a considerable charge to us. We
+came next to Arras,[138] a town mostly inhabited by banians, and where
+their superstition of not killing any thing occasioned us to have very
+bad fare. On the 13th we came to Ahmedabad, whence we gave a commission
+to Richard Steel and John Crowther to proceed on their journey to
+Persia; and hence Mr Edwards departed from us for Agra.
+
+[Footnote 137: On this part of the indicated route, between Broach and
+Brodrab, no stations are to be found in our best maps resembling these
+two names, unless Simlode may have been corrupted into Demylode by
+typographical error.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 138: No such name is now to be found in the road between
+Brodrah and Ahmedabad, neither is it of much importance in any view, as
+the route is so vaguely indicated in the text.--E.]
+
+All this time, the merchants at Ahmedabad, being in hopes of peace with
+the Portuguese, held up the price of their indigos, on which we resolved
+to proceed for _Sarques_ [Sarkess,] to make trial with the country
+people who are the makers of that commodity. We did so on the 7th, and
+found plenty of employment, packing in four days no less than 400 bales:
+after which Mr Edwards returned to Ahmedabad, where he found the
+merchants greatly more tractable. _Sarkess_ is a town of no great size,
+three coss from Ahmedabad, its territory being considered the best soil
+in all these parts for the production of indigo. All of the dealers in
+this commodity are apt to put tricks upon us, by mingling or otherwise.
+At Sarkess there are two of the most ancient monuments that are to be
+found in all that country; one being the tomb of a saint or prophet who
+was buried there, to which many pilgrims resort from great distances;
+and the other is the sepulchres of their ancient kings. To the north of
+the town, is the place where _Khan-Khana_ first put the Guzerates to
+flight, who were the original inhabitants of the country, all the rest
+of the kingdom being shortly after reduced under the subjection of
+Akbar, father to the present Great Mogul. This field of victory is
+strongly walled round with brick, about a mile and half in circuit, all
+planted within with fruit-trees, and delightfully watered; having a
+costly house called by a name signifying _Victory_; in which Khan-Khana
+resided for some time, but he now resides at Burhanpoor.
+
+The 24th of December we had leave from the governor of Ahmedabad to
+depart; but hearing that several persons had been robbed and murdered
+that night close by the city, order was given for us to wait till a
+sufficient guard could be provided for us. The 26th we departed, having
+with us forty carts, loaded with indigo and other goods, and came on the
+27th to _Mundeves_,[139] where the gates were shut upon us by order of
+_Sarder Khan_. This put us in much doubt, and we procured a person to
+speak with the governor, who told him of letters he had received from
+Mucrob Khan, nabob of Surat, informing of the gallant action of our
+general at Swally and the safety of Surat from the Portuguese, through
+the bravery of the English. It was therefore agreed that we should not
+depart without a sufficient guard, which was to be ready for us next
+day. We did not however depart till the 29th; and, at Brodrah, the men
+belonging to Sarder Khan procured more soldiers to assist them, as there
+were several companies of rajputs lying in the way to intercept us, and
+many robberies and murders were committed daily in that part of the
+country.
+
+[Footnote 139: This name also is so corrupted as not to have any
+resemblance in the modern geography of Hindoostan.--E.]
+
+On the 2d of February, while passing through a narrow lane inclosed on
+both sides with hedges, we were assaulted by above 300 rajputs, where we
+could not hurt them, as they did our caffila or caravan by their arrows
+and shot. We therefore made all the haste we could to gain the plain,
+while they in the mean time cut off two of our carriages. Having got to
+the open ground we made a stand; but the rajputs betook themselves again
+to their hedges, to look after their prey, lest one thief should rob
+another. Many of our party were hurt on this occasion, among which was
+Humphrey Elkington. Next day we got to Baroach, and on the 5th to Surat,
+where we returned thanks to Macrob Khan for the care he had taken of our
+safety.
+
+Hearing of an assault to be made next day on our ships by the
+Portuguese, we got his leave to go down to Swally and went aboard, but
+the Portuguese deceived our expectation. On occasion of the last attempt
+of the Portuguese to set our ships on fire, by means of four fire-boats
+chained together, four of them were taken in smaller boats, which
+captives confessed that this was the last attempt of the viceroy for
+this year, as he was now under the necessity of returning to Goa, for
+want of water and provisions. One of these captives, taken in Swally
+roads, and carried aboard the New-year's Gilt, emitted the following
+declaration:--
+
+
+_Examination of Domingo Francisco, on the 20th of February_, 1615.
+
+"He saith, that he was born in Lisbon, being the son of a mariner, and
+served under Nunna d'Acunha in the seafight against Captain Best, in
+one of the four galleons. He afterwards went to Macao on the coast of
+China, and returned thence to Goa; where, after remaining ten months, he
+was ordered on board a galleon called the St Antonio, in this expedition
+for the road of Swally, where he was made prisoner on the 8th of this
+month. The purpose of the viceroy, _Don Jeronimo de Savedo_, in this
+expedition, as the examinant says, was to destroy the English at Surat.
+The viceroy's ship was called the All-saints, of 800 tons, with 300 men,
+and twenty-eight cannon. Michael de Souza was captain on the St Bennet
+of 700 tons, 150 men, and twenty guns. John Cayatho of the St Lawrence,
+of 600 tons, 160 men, and 18 guns. Francisco Henriques of the St
+Christopher, of 600 tons, 155 men, and 18 guns. Francisco de Mirande of
+the St Jeronymo, of 500 tons, 180 men, and 16 guns. Gaspar de Meall of
+the St Antonio, of 400 tons, 140 men, and 14 guns. These were the
+galleons: The ships were, the St Peter of 200 tons Captain Francisco
+Cavaco, 150 men and eight guns; the St Paul of 200 tons, Captain Don
+Juan de Mascarenha, 150 men and eight guns; a pinnace of 120 tons,
+Captain Andrea de Quellio, eighty men and four guns. Lewis de Bruto was
+captain of one galley, and Diego de Suro of the other, each having fifty
+men. There were sixty barks or frigates, each having twenty soldiers,
+and rowing eighteen oars of a side. The reinforcement which joined
+afterwards, consisted of two ships of 200 tons each, two India junks,
+and eight small boats, which were employed to endeavour to set us on
+fire. In the viceroy's ship, the ordnance were all of brass, those in
+the other galleons being half brass and half iron:" Against all which
+the Almighty protected us, blessed be his name for ever.
+
+On the 11th March, 1615, we parted from the general, he and the other
+two ships being bound for Acheen and Bantam, and we in the Hope for
+England. On the 12th we passed by the north end of the Maldives, where
+we found many shoals and islands most falsely laid down in the charts,
+as if purposely to render the navigation of these seas more dangerous.
+We arrived on the 17th of June in Saldanha bay, where we found a fleet
+of four English ships bound for Surat, under the command of Captain
+Keeling; which fleet, after consultation held with us, and receiving
+intelligence of the state of affairs there, departed on its voyage. On
+the 20th I met with _Crosse_ and his company, left there for
+discovery,[140] and entreated some of them to acquaint _Coree_ with my
+arrival. These were set upon by the savages and wounded, wherefore I
+delivered four muskets to Crosse at his earnest request; after which he
+procured Coree to come down with his whole family, and we afterwards got
+some cattle. He told me that there was discord among the savages,
+through which the mountaineers had come down and robbed them. We
+departed on the 26th June, leaving our longboat with Crosse, together
+with powder, shot, and provisions.
+
+[Footnote 140: Of Crosse and his company of condemned persons, set on
+shore at the Cape of Good Hope, see afterwards in Peyton's
+voyage.--_Purch._]
+
+In the latitude of 29° N. we fell in with a Dutch ship from the
+Mauritius, having gone there to cut timber, which seemed a bastard
+ebony. Contrary to their expectation, they found there the lamentable
+wreck of four ships come from Bantam and the Moluccas, which had gone to
+pieces on the rocks. The goods and men of two of these were totally
+lost, most of the goods of the third were saved, with part of which this
+ship was laden. The fourth was driven out to sea in a storm, and
+returned under jury-masts. The master of this ship promised to keep us
+company, but finding us a hindrance, he left us after ten days, without
+so much as a farewell or offering to carry a letter, which I imputed to
+their inbred boorish disposition. Ill weather followed, and we were much
+weakened; yet, I thank God, we lost none till my arrival in Ireland off
+the river of Limerick on the 27th October, 1615; where also we had to
+endure a storm, till we hired a Scottish bark, detained by contrary
+winds, to pilot us into harbour. There also, a remainder of Captain M.
+his ungodly crew, who had lately obtained their pardon, put me in great
+fear; till Sir Henry Foliat secured us by a supply of men, and I sent
+off letters for London.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Journey of Richard Steel and John Crowther, from Ajmeer in India, to
+Ispahan in Persia, in the Years_ 1615 _and_ 1616.[141]
+
+Having been detained at Agimere[142] from February, Mr Edwards received
+a letter on the 17th March, 1615, from the Great Mogul, of which he
+delivered a copy, together with his other letters, to Richard Steel,
+promising to procure the king's firmaun for our safety and furtherance,
+and to send it after us to Agra, where he directed us to wait for its
+reception. We went that night two coss to _Mandill_.[143]We had four
+servants, two horses, and a camel. The 18th we went twelve coss to
+_Bander Sandree_, [Bunder-Sanory,] a small _aldea_.[144] The 19th, ten
+coss to _Mosobade_, [Morabad.] The 20th to _Pipelo_, [Peped,] thirteen
+coss. The 21st to a town called _Chadfoole_, [Gohd?] seven coss. The 22d
+to _Lalscotte_, thirteen coss. The 23d to _Mogolserai_, twelve coss. The
+24th to _Hindone_, fourteen coss. the 25th to _Bramobad_, twelve coss.
+The 26th to _Futtipoor_, twelve coss. This has been a fair city, which
+was built by Akbar, and contains a goodly palace belonging to the king.
+It is walled round in a handsome manner, and has many spacious gardens
+and sumptuous pleasure houses; but is now falling to ruin, and ranch
+ground within the walls is now sown with corn, the king having carried
+off much of the best stone to his new city of Agra. The 27th we went
+twelve coss to Agra. In the English house there, we found one Richard
+Barber, an apothecary, who came over with Sir Robert Shirley, and had
+been sent here by Mr Kerridge to take care of Nicholas Whithington.
+
+[Footnote 141: Purch. Pilgr. I. 519.--In the title of this article in
+the Pilgrims, Agimere, or Azmere, as it is there called, is said to have
+been the residence of the Great Mogul at the commencement of this
+journey, and Spahan, or Ispahan, the royal seat of the kings of
+Persia.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 142: This place, named Azmeer in the Pilgrims, is known in
+modern geography under the name of Ajmeer, or Agimere.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 143: A coss, or course, as it is uniformly denominated in the
+Pilgrims, is stated on the margin by Purchas, to be equal to a mile and
+a half, and in some places two English miles. As more precisely
+determined in modern geography, the Hindoostanee coss is equal to 1
+4/7th English miles, and the Rajput coss to 2 1/6th miles nearly. It
+would overload this article to attempt critically following all the
+stations in the present journal, in which the names of places are often
+so corrupt as to be unintelligible. Such corrections of the text as can
+be ventured upon are included within brackets.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 144: This is a Spanish or Portuguese term, signifying country
+village.--E.]
+
+Within two days journey of Agra, we passed by the country and city of
+Biana, where the finest indigo is made, the best being then worth
+thirty-six rupees the maund at Agra, but much cheaper in the country.
+Finding the promised firmaun came not, and the hot season of the year
+fast approaching, we departed on the 3d April in the prosecution of our
+journey, leaving directions with Richard Barber to send it after us. We
+came that night to a serai called Boutta, six coss. The 4th to the town
+of _Matra_, fourteen coss, where we lay in a fair _serai_,[145] and
+there we received the firmaun. The 5th we went twelve coss to a serai
+called _Chatta_, [Chautra.] The 6th to a serai built by Azam Khan, nine
+coss. The 7th to a serai built by Sheic Ferreede, called _Puhlwall_,
+eleven coss. The 8th to a serai built by the same person, ten coss. The
+9th to _Dillee_, [Delhi,] nine coss. This being a great and ancient
+city, formerly the seat of the kings, where many of them are interred.
+At this time, many of the great men have their gardens and pleasure
+houses here, and are here buried, so that it is beautified with many
+fine buildings. The inhabitants, who are mostly Banians or Hindoos, are
+poor and beggarly, through the long absence of the court.
+
+[Footnote 145: These are fair buildings for the accommodation of
+travellers, many of which were erected by great men._Purch._]
+
+The 10th we went ten coss from Delhi to _Bunira_. The 11th to
+_Cullvower_, twelve coss. The 12th to _Pampette_, [Paniput,] twelve
+coss. This is a small handsome city, where they manufacture various
+sorts of girdles and sashes, and great quantities of cotton-cloth, and
+have abundance of handicrafts. The 13th to _Carnanl_, twelve coss. The
+14th to _Tanisera_, [Tahnessir,] fourteen coss. The 15th to _Shavade_,
+[Shahabad,] ten coss. The 16th to _Mogol-Sera_, or _Gaugur_, fifteen
+coss. The 17th to _Sinan_,[146] fourteen coss, which is an ancient city,
+where they manufacture great store of cottons. The 18th to _Duratia_,
+fifteen coss. The 19th to _Pullower_, [Bullolepoor,] eleven coss. We
+this day passed in a boat over a great river called Sietmege[147] which
+is very broad, but full of shoals, and runs westward to join the Sinde,
+or Indus. The 20th we came to a small town called _Nicodar_, eleven
+coss. The 21st to _Sultanpoor_, an old town having a river which comes
+from the north, over which is a bridge of six arches. At this place
+great store of cotton goods are made. Four coss beyond this place we
+passed another small river. The 22d to _Chiurmul_,[148] eleven coss. We
+were this day boated across a river as broad as the Thames at Gravesend,
+called _Vian_, which runs westwards to join the Sinde. On its banks
+Allom Khan, ambassador from the Great Mogul to the king of Persia, had
+pitched his camp, which looked like a little city. The 23d we went to
+_Khan Khanum Serai_, seventeen coss, and the 24th we reached Lahore,
+seven coss.
+
+[Footnote 146: This is probably Sirhind, which is directly in the route,
+but so disguised in the text as to defy emendation.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 147: This is clearly the Sutuluge, or Setlege, called likewise
+the Beyah-Kussoor, and Chato dehr, being the easternmost of the Punjab
+or five rivers, which form the Indus. It was called Hesudrus by the
+ancients.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 148: From the river mentioned in the text as passed, on this
+day's journey, this may have been what is now called Gundwall, a little
+beyond the river Beyab, which is here 100 yards broad.--E.]
+
+All the country between Agra and Lahore is exceedingly well cultivated,
+being the best of India, and abounds in all things. It yields great
+store of powdered sugar, [raw sugar] the best being worth two 1/2 to two
+3/4 rupees the great _maund_ of forty pounds. The whole road is planted
+on both sides with trees, most of which bear a species of mulberry. In
+the night, this road is dangerously infested with thieves, but is quite
+secure in the day. Every five or six coss, there are serais, built by
+the king or some great man, which add greatly to the beauty of the road,
+are very convenient for the accommodation of travellers, and serve to
+perpetuate the memory of their founders. In these the traveller may have
+a chamber for his own use, a place in which to tie up his horse, and can
+be furnished with provender; but in many of them very little
+accommodation can be had, by reason of the banians, as when once any
+person has taken up his lodging, no other may dispossess him. At
+day-break the gates of these serais are opened, and then all the
+travellers prepare to depart; but no person is allowed to go away
+sooner, for fear of robbers. This made the journey very oppressive to
+us, as within two hours after the sun rose we were hardly able to endure
+the heat.
+
+Lahore is a great and goodly city, being one of the fairest and
+ancientest in India. It stands on the river Indus or Sinde;[149] and
+from this place came the most valuable of the Portuguese trade when they
+were at peace with the Moguls, as it formed the centre of all their
+traffic in Hindoostan. They here embarked their goods, which were
+carried down the river to Tatta, and were thence transported by sea to
+Ormus and Persia; and such native merchants as chose to go that way
+between India and Persia, paid them freight. They had also a great trade
+up this river, in pepper and other spices, with which they furnished
+that part of India. At this time, the merchants of India assemble at
+Lahore, where they invest a great part of their money in commodities,
+and, joining in caravans, they pass over the mountains of Candahar into
+Persia; by which way it is computed there now pass yearly twelve or
+fourteen thousand camel loads, whereas formerly there did not go in this
+way above three thousand, all the rest going by way of Ormus. These
+merchants are put to great expences between Lahore and Ispaban, besides
+being exposed to great cold in winter and fervent heat in summer, and to
+bad and dangerous roads, usually spending six or seven months in the
+journey, and they estimate the charges of each camel's load at 120 or
+130 rupees. In this way Persia is furnished with spiceries, which are
+brought all the way from Masulipatam by land. We remained in Lahore from
+the 24th of April to the 13th of May, refreshing both ourselves and our
+horses, and providing servants and necessaries for the journey. We also
+procured here recommendatory letters from an ambassador to the king of
+Persia.
+
+[Footnote 149: Lahore is upon the Ravey, the second of the five rivers
+forming the Indus, counting from the east, and was the Hydroates of the
+ancients. The Indus proper, or Nilab, is considerably farther west.--E.]
+
+We left Lahore on the 13th May, proposing to overtake a caravan which
+set out two months before, and went that day eleven c. to a small town
+named _Chacksunder_. The 14th to _Non-serai_, fifteen c. The 15th to
+_Mutteray_, eight c. The 16th to _Quemal khan_, nineteen c. The 17th to
+_Herpae_, sixteen c. The 18th to _Alicasaca_, twelve c. The 19th
+_Trumba_, twelve c. and this day we overtook a small caravan that left
+Lahore eight days before us. The 20th to _Sedousehall_, fourteen c. The
+21st to _Callixechebaut_, fifteen c. The 22d to _Multan_,[150] twelve c.
+This is a great and ancient city, having the river Indus at the distance
+of three coss. All caravans must remain here ten or twelve days, before
+leave can be procured from the governor to proceed, on purpose that the
+city may benefit by their stay. It yields white plain cotton cloth and
+diaper. We remained five days, and were then glad to get leave to
+depart, by means of a present.
+
+[Footnote 150: In the whole of this itinerary, from Lahore to Multan or
+Mooltan, down the Ravey river, not a single name in the text, except the
+two extremities, bears the smallest resemblance to any of those in
+modern geography.--E.]
+
+We passed the river on the 28th, and went twenty c. to a small village
+named _Pettoallee_. The 29th we passed another great river by a boat,
+and came that same night to a small river called _Lacca_, where we
+found the caravan we wished to overtake.[151] We presented the caravan
+_basha_ with a mirror and knife, when he directed us to pitch our tent
+near his own, that we might be more immediately under his protection.
+This caravan had been here ten days, and remained till the 2d of June,
+waiting for an escort of cavalry to convoy them to _Chatcza_,[152] a
+small fort in the mountains, having received information that a former
+caravan had been injured by the mountaineers. The 2d June we resumed our
+journey, and travelled twelve c. entering into the mountains, where we
+were much distressed for want of fresh water, what water we met with
+being brackish. The 3d and 4th we travelled all night, climbing high
+mountains, and following water-courses with various turnings and
+windings, insomuch that in travelling twelve coss our direct course did
+not exceed six c. The 5th we again followed the bed of a water-course or
+river, full of large pebbles, travelling eight c. The 6th we rested. The
+7th we went four c. still along the water-course, the 8th eight c. the
+9th twelve c. and the 10th three c. when we came to _Chatcza_, [Chatzan]
+a small fort with mud walls, inclosed with a ditch, where the Mogul
+keeps a garrison of eighty or 100 horse, to scour the road from thieves,
+yet these are as great thieves as any, where they find an opportunity.
+The captain of this castle exacted two _abacees_ for each camel in the
+caravan, though nothing was legally due, as he and his troops have their
+pay from the king. In the whole of our way, from the river Lacca to
+Chatzan, we found no sustenance for man or beast, except in some places
+a little grass, so that we had to make provision at Lacca, hiring a
+bullock to carry barley for our horses. The _Agwans_ or _Afgans_, as the
+people of the mountains are called, came down to us every day at our
+resting place, rather to look out what they might steal, than to buy as
+they pretended.
+
+[Footnote 151: The great river passed on the 29th must have been the
+Sinde, Indus, or Nilab, and from the circumstance of falling in next day
+with the _Lacca_ or Lucca, Pettoallee in the text may possibly be what
+is named _Joghiwallah_, on the east side of the Indus, almost opposite
+the mouth of the Lacca.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 152: Chatzan, a town or fortress in Sewee, or the country of
+the Balloges; to the west of a ridge of rocky mountains, described as
+consisting of hard black stone, which skirt the western side of the vale
+of the Indus, and on the north join the mountains of Wulli in Candahar.
+Chatzan is in lat. 31° 3' N. and long 69° 42' W. from Greenwich--E.]
+
+Having made provision for three days at Chatzan, we went thence on the
+12th June, and travelled fourteen c. The 13th ten c. The 14th ten c.
+This day the mountaineers brought down to us sheep, goats, meal, butter,
+and barley, in abundance, sufficient both for us and our cattle, all of
+which they sold at reasonable prices; and from this time forwards, they
+did the same every day, sometimes also bringing felts and striped
+carpets for sale. The 15th we went six c. the 16th four c. the 17th ten
+c. the 18th nine c. the 19th nine c. when we came to a small town of the
+Afgans called _Duckee_, [Dooky], where the Mogul keeps a garrison in a
+small square mud fort, the walls of which are of a good height. This
+fort is a mile from the town. We stopt here three days, as the caravan
+could not agree with the captain of the fort, who demanded a duty on
+every camel, and at last an _abacee_ and a half was paid for each camel.
+The 23d we went six c. the 24th we passed a place called _Secotah_, or
+the three castles, because of three villages standing near each other on
+the side of a hill, forming a triangle. We this day went eight c. The
+25th we rested, on account of bad weather. The 26th we went ten c. The
+27th fourteen c. This day we passed through the _durues_ or gates of the
+mountains, being narrow straits, with very high rocks on both sides,
+whence with stones a few men might stop the passage of a multitude, and
+where many caravans have been accordingly cut off. We this night, where
+we lodged, suffered much insolence from the Afgans; and next day, as we
+passed a small village called _Coasta_, they exacted from us two 1/2
+_abacees_ for each camel. The 28th we went five c. the 29th, passing a
+village called _Abdun_, eight c. the 30th six c. The 1st. July in seven
+c. we came to a place called _Pesinga_ [Pusheng or Kooshinge], where
+there is a small fort like that at _Dooky_ in which is a garrison for
+securing the way. At this place the captain exacted half an _abacee_ for
+each camel. The 3d we left the caravan and went forwards six c. The 4th
+we passed over a mighty mountain, and descended into the plains beyond,
+having travelled that day fourteen c. The 5th we went twenty c. and were
+much distressed to get grain for our cattle. The 6th, in like distress
+both for them and ourselves, we went twelve c. and on the 7th, after
+eight c. we got to the city of Candahar.
+
+These mountains of Candahar are inhabited by a fierce people, called
+_Agwans_ or _Potans_, [Afgans or Patans] who are very strong of body,
+somewhat fairer than the natives of Hindoostan, and are much addicted to
+robbery, insomuch, that they often cut off whole caravans. At present
+they have become more civil, partly from fear of the Mogul, and partly
+from experiencing the advantages of trade, by selling their grain,
+sheep, and goats, of which they have great store, and by purchasing
+coarse cotton goods and other necessaries. Still, however, if they find
+any one straggling or lagging behind, they are very apt to make them
+slaves, selling them into the mountains, and houghing them to prevent
+their running away, after which they are set to grind grain in
+handmills, or to other servile employments. The chief city, called
+likewise Candahar, is very ancient, and was in old times inhabited by
+Banians. At this place the governor of the whole country resides, who
+has a garrison of twelve or fifteen thousand horse, maintained there by
+the Great Mogul, in regard of the neighbourhood of the Persians towards
+the north. To the west, the city is environed by steep and craggy rocks,
+and to the south and east by a strong wall. In consequence of the
+frequent passage of caravans, it has been considerably increased of
+late, so that the suburbs are larger than the city. Within the last two
+years, in consequence of the Persian trade by way of Ormus being
+stopped, through war with the Portuguese, all the caravans between
+Persia and India must necessarily pass through this place; and here they
+hire camels to go into India, and at their return for Persia have to do
+the same. They cannot return without leave of the governor, who causes
+them to stop a month here, or at the least fifteen or twenty days; owing
+to which, it is inhabited by many lewd people, as all such places of
+resort commonly are.
+
+Victuals for man and beast are to be had in great abundance at Candahar,
+yet are very dear owing to the great concourse of trade, occasioned by
+the meeting at this place of many merchants of India, Persia, and
+Turkey, who often conclude their exchanges of commodities here. At this
+place the caravans going for India usually unite together, for greater
+strength and security in passing through the mountains of Candahar; and
+those that come here from India generally break into smaller companies,
+because in many parts of the route through Persia, a greater number
+would not find provisions, as all Persia, from hence to Ispahan, is
+extremely barren, so that sometimes not a green thing is to be seen in
+two or three days travel; and even water is scarce, and that which is to
+be got is often brackish, or stinking and abominable. We remained at
+this city for fourteen days, partly to procure company for our farther
+journey, and partly for refreshment after the fatigues and heats of our
+late journey, especially on account of John Crowther, who was so weak
+that he at one time doubted being able to proceed any farther.
+
+We joined ourselves to three Armenians and a dozen Persian merchants,
+along with whom we left the city of Candahar on the 23d July, and went
+ten c. to a village called _Seriabe_.[153] The 24th we came in twelve c.
+to _Deabage_, a small _dea_ or village. The 25th in eight c. to
+_Cashecunna,_ a small castle in which the Mogul has a garrison, being
+the utmost boundary of his dominions westwards, and confining with
+Persia. The 26th we travelled seventeen c. and lodged in the open fields
+by the side of a river. The 27th, after four c. we came to a castle
+called _Greece_, the first belonging to the king of Persia. Here we
+delivered to the governor the letter we had got from the Persian
+ambassador at Lahore, and presented him a mirror and three knives. He
+would take nothing for our camels, while the others had to pay five
+_abacees_ for each camel. He promised to give us a safe conduct under an
+escort of horse to the next governor, but we saw none; neither were we
+sorry for the omission, for he was little better than a rebel, and all
+his people were thieves.
+
+[Footnote 153: We here lose the almost infallible guide of Arrowsmith's
+excellent map of Hindoostan, and are reduced to much inferior helps in
+following the route through Persia.--E.]
+
+The 28th we departed at night, going two _parasangs_, and lodged at a
+_dea_ or village called _Malgee_. A _farcing_ or parasang is equal to
+two Indian cosses and a half.[154] The 29th we went ten p. and lodged in
+the open fields, where we could get nothing but water. The 30th we went
+five p. to a small castle named _Gazikhan_. The 31st other five p. to an
+old ruined fort, where we could get nothing but water, and that was
+stinking. The 1st August we proceeded other five p. to an old fort
+called _Dilaram_, where we paid an _abacee_ and a half for each camel.
+We staid here one day to rest our cattle, which was termed making
+_mochoane_; and on the 3d we went seven p. to an old castle called
+_Bacon_. The 4th four p. and lodged in the open fields, where we found
+nothing but water. The 5th four p. and the 6th five p. to _Farra_.[155]
+
+[Footnote 154: In a side-note, Purchas says a parasang consists of sixty
+furlongs. This is a most egregious error, as the parasang or farsang is
+exactly equal to 2.78 English miles, or twenty-two two-5ths
+furlongs.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 155: Farra, the capital of a district of the same name in the
+north of Segistan, is in lat 33° 40' N. long. 62° 40' E.--E.]
+
+_Farra_ is a small town, surrounded by a high wall of bricks dried in
+the sun, as are all the castles and most of the buildings in this
+country, and is of a square form, about a mile in circuit. It has a
+handsome bazar or market-place, vaulted over head to keep out the rain,
+and in which all kinds of necessaries and commodities are sold. It is
+situated in a fertile soil, having plenty of water, without which
+nothing can be raised in this country; and it is wonderful to see with
+what labour and ingenious industry they bring water to every spot of
+good ground, which is but seldom to be found here, often carrying it
+three or four miles in trenches under ground. At this town, all
+merchants going into Persia must remain for seven, eight, or ten days;
+and here the king's treasurer sees all their packs weighed, estimating
+the value of their commodities at so much the maund, as he thinks fit,
+and exacts a duty of three per cent. ad valorem on that estimate. On
+their way into Persia, merchants are used with much favour, lest they
+should make complaints to the king, who will have merchants kindly
+treated; but on their return into India, they are treated with extreme
+rigour, being searched to the very skin for money, as it is death to
+transport any gold or silver coin from Persia, except that of the
+reigning king. They likewise look narrowly for horses and slaves,
+neither of which are allowed to be taken out of the country.
+
+We remained here two days waiting for certain Armenians, with whom we
+travelled the rest of the journey, leaving our former companions. The
+9th of August we went only one parasang to a river. The 10th we
+travelled seven p. and lodged in the open fields. The 11th, four p. to a
+small village, where we had plenty of provisions. The 12th, four p.
+where we had to dig for water. The 13th, eight p. and the 14th five p.
+to a village named _Draw,_ [Durra,] where we remained a day, as it is
+the custom of those who travel with camels to rest once in four or five
+days. The 16th, we advanced three p. The 17th, four p. The 18th, five p.
+to _Zaide-basha,_ [Sarbishe,] where abundance of carpets are to be had.
+The 19th we came to a village named _Mude,_ [Moti,] where also are
+carpets. The 20th, five p. to _Birchen,_ [Berdjan,] where are
+manufactured great quantities of fine felts, and carpets of camels hair,
+which are sold at the rates of from two to five abacees the _maund._ At
+this place we rested a day. The 22d, we went to _Dea-zaide,_ [Descaden,]
+where all the inhabitants pretend to be very religious, and sell their
+carpets, of which they have great abundance, at a cheap rate. The 23d,
+three p. The 24th, five p. to _Choore,_ [Cors or Corra,] an old ruined
+town. The 25th, three p. The 26th, seven p. when we had brackish
+stinking water. The 27th we came to _Dehuge,_ [Teuke,] where is a
+considerable stream of hot water, which becomes cool and pleasant after
+standing some time in any vessel. The 28th we went seven p. to
+_Dea-curma._
+
+The 29th we went five p. to _Tobaz,_[156] where we had to pay half an
+abacee for each camel. At this plce all caravans take four or five days
+rest, the better to enable them to pass the adjoining salt desert, which
+extends four long days journey, and in which many miscarry. We found
+here a small caravan of an hundred camels, which set off the next day
+after our arrival. Here, and in the former village, there is great store
+of dates; and 3000 maunds of the finest silk in Persia are made here
+yearly, and is carried to _Yades_, [Yezd,] a fair city, where likewise
+they make much raw silk, and where it is manufactured into taffaties,
+satins, and damasks. The king does not allow the exportation of raw
+silk, especially into Turkey; but the Portuguese used to carry it to
+Portugal. _Yades_, [Yezd,] is about twelve days journey from Ispahan,
+and is twelve p. out of the way from the Indian route to the capital.
+
+[Footnote 156: Tabaskili, or Tobas Kileke, in Cohestan, is probably the
+place here meant, in which case the route appears to have passed from
+Farra by the south of the inland sea or lake of Darrah, but which is not
+noticed by our travellers. Our conjectural amendments of the names of
+places on the route are placed within brackets.--E.]
+
+The 30th of August we advanced nine p. into the desert, and lay on the
+ground, having to send our beasts three miles out of the way for water,
+which was very salt. The 31st, after travelling ten p. we came to water
+which was not at all brackish. The 1st September we went five p. and had
+to send two miles for water. The 2d we went nine p. to a small castle,
+where we procured a small quantity of provisions. The 3d, five p. and
+lay in the fields, having to send far for water. The 4th, ten p. to
+_Seagan_. The 5th, four p. The 6th, ten p. to a castle called _Irabad_,
+[Hirabad,] where we paid half an _abacee_ for each camel. The 7th, six
+p. The 8th, eight p. to _Ardecan_, where we rested till the 10th, when
+we went four p. to _Sellef_. The 11th, three p. to a small castle named
+_Agea Gaurume_. The 12th, nine p. to a spring in the fields. The 13th,
+three p. to _Beavas_. The 14th, four p. to _Goolabad_, whence Richard
+Steel rode on to Ispahan, without waiting for the caravan. The 15th we
+came to _Morea Shahabad_, five p. The 16th, to _Coopa_, five p. The
+17th, to _Dea Sabs_, five p. The 18th, four p. and lay in the fields.
+And on the 19th, after three p. we came to _Ispahan_.
+
+Richard Steel reached this city on the 15th, at noon, and found Sir
+Robert Shirley already provided with his dispatches from the king of
+Persia as ambassador to the king of Spain. Sir Robert, attended by his
+lady, a bare-footed friar as his chaplain, together with fifty-five
+Portuguese prisoners, and his own followers, were preparing in all haste
+to go to Ormus, and to embark thence for Lisbon. The purpose is, that
+seeing the Portuguese not able to stand, the Spaniards may be brought
+in.[157] Six friars remain as hostages for his safe return to Ispahan,
+as otherwise the king has vowed to cut them all in pieces, which he is
+likely enough to do, having put his own son to death, and committed a
+thousand other severities.
+
+[Footnote 157: The meaning of this passage is quite obscure in the
+Pilgrims, and the editor does not presume upon clearing the
+obscurity.--E.]
+
+On his arrival at Ispahan, Richard Steel delivered his letters to Sir
+Robert,[158] who durst hardly read them, except now and then, as by
+stealth, fearing lest the Portuguese should know of them. He afterwards
+said it was now too late to engage in the business of our nation, and
+seemed much dissatisfied with the company, and with the merchants and
+mariners who brought him out. But at length he said he was a
+true-hearted Englishman, and promised to effect our desires. On the
+19th, the friars being absent, he carried both of us to the master of
+the ceremonies, or _Maimondare,_ and took us along with him to the Grand
+Vizier, _Sarek Hogea_, who immediately called his scribes or
+secretaries, and made draughts of what we desired: namely, three
+_firmauns_, one of which John Crowther has to carry to Surat, one for
+Richard Steel to carry to England, and the third to be sent to the
+governor of _Jasques_, all sealed with the great seal of the king. The
+same day that these firmauns were procured, being the last of September,
+Sir Robert Shirley set out for Shiras in great pomp, and very honourably
+attended.
+
+[Footnote 158: Of the landing of Sir Robert Shirley, see Peyton's first
+voyage before; and of the rest of his journey see the second voyage of
+Peyton, in the sequel.--_Purch._]
+
+_Copy of the Firmaun granted by the King of Persia._
+
+"Firmaun or command given unto all our subjects, from the highest to the
+lowest, and directed to the _Souf-basha_, or constable of our country,
+kindly to receive and entertain the _English Franks_[159] or nation,
+when any of their ships may arrive at Jasques, or any other of the
+ports in our kingdom, to conduct them and their merchandize to what
+place or places they may desire, and to see them safely defended upon
+our coasts from any other Franks whomsoever. This I will and command you
+to do, as you shall answer in the contrary. Given at our royal city,
+this 12th of _Ramassan_, in the year of our _Tareag_, 1024. [October,
+1615.]"
+
+The chief commodities of Persia are raw silks, of which it yields,
+according to the king's books, 7700 _batmans_ yearly. Rhubarb grows in
+Chorassan, where also worm-seed grows.
+
+[Footnote 159: Frank is a name given in the East to all western
+Christians, ever since the expedition to the Holy Land, because the
+French were the chief nation on that occasion, and because the French
+council at Clermont was the cause of that event.--Purch.]
+
+Carpets of all sorts, some of silk and gold, silk and silver, half silk,
+half cotton, &c. The silver monies of Persia are the _abacee, mahamoody,
+shakee_, and _biftee_, the rest being of copper, like the _tangas_ and
+_pisos_ of India. The _abacee_ weighs two _meticals_, the _mahmoody_ is
+half an abacee, and the _shahee_ is half a _mahamoody_. In the dollar or
+rial of eight there are thirteen shahees.[160] In a shahee there are two
+_biftees_ and a half, or ten cashbegs, one _biftee_ being four
+_cashbegs_, or two _tangs_. The weights differ in different places; two
+_mahans_ of Tauris being only one of Ispahan, and so of the _batman_.
+The measure of length, for silks and other stuffs, is the same with the
+pike of Aleppo, which we judge to be twenty-seven English inches.
+
+[Footnote 160: Assuming the Spanish dollar at 4s. 6d. sterling, the
+shahee ought therefore to be worth about 4d. 1-6, the mahamoody,8d. 1-3,
+and the abecee, 1s. 4d. 2-3.--E.]
+
+John Crowther returned into India, and Richard Steel went to England by
+way of Turkey, by the following route. Leaving Ispahan on the 2d
+December, 1615, he went five p. to a serail. The 3d, eight p. to another
+serail. The 4th, six p. to a village. The 5th, seven p. to _Dreag_. The
+6th, seven p. to a serail. The 7th, eight p. to _Golpigan_,
+[Chulpaigan.] The 8th, seven p. to _Curouan_. The 9th, seven p. to
+_Showgot_. The 10th, six p. to _Saro_, [Sari.] The 11th, eight p. to
+_Dissabad_. The 12th, twelve p. to a fair town called _Tossarkhan_,
+where he rested some days, because the country was covered deep with
+snow. The 15th, six p. to _Kindaner_. The 16th, eight p. to _Sano_. The
+17th to _Shar nuovo_, where I was stopped by the _daiga_; but on shewing
+him letters from the vizier, he bade me depart in the name of God and of
+Ali. The 18th we passed a bridge where all travellers have to give an
+account of themselves, and to pay a tax of two _shakees_ for each camel.
+The 19th we came to _Kassam-Khan_, the last place under the Persian
+government, and made a present to the governor, that he might give me a
+guard to protect me from the Turkomans, which he not only did, but gave
+me a licence to procure provisions free at his villages without payment,
+which yet I did not avail myself of.
+
+The 21st of December I began to pass over a range of high mountains
+which separate the two empires of Persia and Turkey, which are very
+dangerous; and, on the 22d, at the end of eight p. I arrived at a
+village. The 23d, after travelling seven p. I lay under a rock. The 24th
+I came to _Mando_, eight p. a town belonging to the Turks. The 25th,
+eight p. to _Emomester_. The 26th, eight p. to _Boroh_, passed over a
+river in a boat, and came that night to Bagdat. I was here strictly
+examined and searched for letters, which I hid under my saddle; but
+observing one trying there also, I gave him a sign, on which he
+desisted, and followed me to my lodging for his expected reward. I fared
+better than an old Spaniard, only a fortnight before, who was imprisoned
+in chains in the castle, and his letters read by a Maltese renegado. I
+found here a Portuguese, who had arrived from Ormus only two days before
+me. The pacha made us wait here twenty days for a sabandar of his.
+
+The 16th of January, 1616, we passed the river Tigris, and lay on the
+skirt of the desert. The 17th we travelled five _agatzas_, being leagues
+or parasangs. The 18th we came to the Euphrates at _Tulquy_, where
+merchandize disembarked for Bagdat, after paying a duty of five per
+cent. passes to the Tigris, and thence to the Persian gulf. After a
+tedious journey, partly by the river Euphrates, and partly through the
+desert, and then by sea, we arrived at Marseilles, in France, on the
+15th April, and on the 10th May at Dover.
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Voyage of Captain Walter Peyton to India, in 1615._[161]
+
+This voyage seems to have been under the command of Captain Newport, who
+sailed as general in the Lion; but is called, in the Pilgrims, The
+_Second_ Voyage of Captain Peyton to the East Indies, because the former
+voyage of Newport was written by Peyton, who, though he occasionally
+mentions the general, never once names him. In this voyage Peyton sailed
+in the Expedition; the fleet consisting of three other ships, the
+Dragon, Lion, and Pepper-corn. The journal appears to have been
+abbreviated by Purchas, as he tells us it was _gathered out of his
+larger journal_. This voyage is chiefly remarkable as introductory to
+the embassy of Sir Thomas Roe to India, contained in the subsequent
+section, as Sir Thomas and his suite embarked in this fleet. Instead of
+giving the remarks of Sir Thomas Roe in his own journal, so far as they
+apply to the voyage between England and Surat, these have been added in
+the text of the present voyage, distinguishing those observations by
+T.R. the initials of his name, and placing them all in separate
+paragraphs.
+
+[Footnote 161: Purch. Pilgr. I. 528.]
+
+We learn by a subsequent article in the Pilgrims, I. 603, That Captain
+William Keeling was general, or chief commander of this fleet, and
+sailed in the Dragon, Robert Bonner master. The other two ships were the
+Pepper-corn, Captain Christopher Harris, and the Expedition, Captain
+William Peyton.--E.
+
+§1. _Occurrences during the Voyage from England to Surat_.
+
+We sailed from Gravesend on the 24th January, 1615, and on the 2d
+February Sir Thomas Roe, ambassador from his majesty to the Great Mogul,
+repaired on board the Lion, with fifteen attendants. At the same time,
+Mr Humphry Boughton embarked in the Pepper-corn, being recommended by
+the king to the company for a passage to India. We carried out in the
+fleet eleven Japanese, who were brought to England in the Clove, divided
+proportionally among the ships; likewise fourteen Guzerates, brought
+home in the Dragon, together with nineteen condemned persons from
+Newgate, to be left for the discovery of unknown places, the company
+having obtained their pardons from the king for this purpose. On the
+20th, some of the Dragon's men, among whom were the _Newgate birds_,
+attempted to run away with the pinnace, but were prevented: Yet next
+night one of these condemned men, and two of the crew of the
+Pepper-corn, carried away her pinnace. Two of my men conspired to carry
+away my boat that same night, but were discovered.
+
+The 23d February we set sail from the Downs, and on the 6th March we
+lost sight of the Lizard. The 26th we saw land, supposed to be the
+western part of Fuerteventura, but it proved to be part of Barbary. One
+of the points of land at the mouth of the river _Marhequena_, we found
+to be laid down wrong, a whole degree more northerly than it ought to
+be; as likewise cape Bajadore is misplaced a whole degree, which we
+found by experience, escaping great danger caused by that error in our
+charts. The 26th of April we got into the trade wind; and on the 10th
+May, being by estimation 620 leagues west of the Cape of Good Hope, we
+saw many _pintadoes, mangareludas_, and other fowls.
+
+The 5th June we came to anchor in Saldanha bay, having only buried three
+or four men since leaving England, out of our whole fleet, and had now
+about thirty sick, for whom we erected five tents ashore. _Corey_[162]
+came down and welcomed us after his manner, by whose means the savages
+were not so fearful or thievish as at other times. They brought us
+cattle in great abundance, which we bought for shreds of copper. Corey
+shewed his house and his wife and children to some of our people, his
+dwelling being at a town or _craal_ of about an hundred houses, five
+English miles from the landing place. Most of these savages can say _Sir
+Thomas Smith's English ships_, which they often repeat with much pride.
+Their wives and children came often down to see us, whom we gratified
+with bugles, or such trifles; and two or three of them expressed a
+desire to go with us to England, seeing that Corey had sped so well, and
+returned so rich, with his copper suit, which he preserves at his house
+with much care. Corey also proposed to return with us, accompanied by
+one of his sons, when our ships are homeward-bound. On the east side of
+the _Table_ mountain there is another village of ten small houses, built
+round like bee-hives, and covered with mats woven of bent grass.
+
+[Footnote 162: Corey, or Coree, was a savage, or Hottentot chief; who
+had been in England.--_Purch._]
+
+"The land at the Cape of Good Hope, near Saldanha bay, [Table bay] is
+fertile, but divided by high and inaccessible rocky mountains, covered
+with snow, the river Dulce falling into the bay on the east side. The
+natives are the most barbarous people in the world, eating carrion,
+wearing the guts of sheep about their necks, and rubbing their heads,
+the hair on which is curled like the negroes, with the dung of beasts
+and other dirt. They have no clothing, except skins wrapped about their
+shoulders, wearing the fleshy side next them in summer, and the hairy
+side in winter. Their houses are only made of mats, rounded at the top
+like an oven, and open on one side, which they turn as the wind
+changes, having no door to keep out the weather. They have left off
+their former custom of stealing, but are quite ignorant of God, and seem
+to have no religion. The air and water here are both excellent, and the
+country is very healthy. The country abounds in cattle, sheep,
+antilopes, baboons, pheasants, partridges, larks, wild-geese, ducks, and
+many other kinds of fowls. On the Penguin isle [Dassen or Robber's
+island,] there is a bird called penguin, which walks upright, having no
+feathers on its wings, which hang down like sleeves faced with white.
+These birds cannot fly, but walk about in flocks, being a kind of
+mixture, or intermediate link, between beast, bird, and fish, yet mostly
+bird. The commodities here are cattle and _ningin_ roots; and I believe
+there is a rock yielding quicksilver.[163]The Table mountain is 11,853
+feet high.[164] The bay is full of whales and seals, and is in lat. 33°
+45' S."--T.R.
+
+[Footnote 163: Ningin, or Ginseng, is mentioned afterwards. The
+quicksilver rock has not been found.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 164: This height is probably an exaggeration, or was measured
+up its slope or talus, not ascertained perpendicularly.--E.]
+
+On the 16th of June, after a consultation, we set ashore ten of our
+condemned persons to remain at the Cape. These were John Crosse, Henry
+Cocket, Clerke, Brand, Booth, Hunyard, Brigs, Pets, Metcalf, and
+Skilligall. These men agreed that Crosse should be their chief, and we
+gave them weapons for their defence against men and wild beasts,
+together with provisions and clothes. The natives at this place are
+especially desirous of brass, and care not much for copper, chiefly
+wishing to have pieces of a foot square. They care little for iron
+hoops. We caught seven or eight hundred fishes in the river, at one haul
+of our seyne. The country people brought us for sale a root called
+_Ningin_,[165] of which we bought a handful for a small piece of copper
+an inch and half long. Our men got some of this, but not so good, this
+not being the season when it is ripe; for, when in full perfection, it
+is as tender and sweet as anise-seeds.
+
+[Footnote 165: A medicinal root, much prized at Japan, somewhat like a
+_skerrit_.--_Purch._ Probably that named Ginseng, in high repute in
+China and Japan for its fancied restorative and provocative powers, like
+the mandrake of holy writ, but deservedly despised in the Materia Medica
+of Europe. Its whole virtues lay in some supposed resemblance to the
+human figure, founded on the childish doctrine of signatures; whence,
+at one time, every thing yellow was considered specific against
+jaundice, with many other and similar absurd notions.--E.]
+
+We sailed from Saldanha on the 20th June, and on the the 21st we had
+sight of land in 34° 28' S. being the land to the west of cape _de
+Arecife_, laid down 28' more northwardly than it ought in the charts of
+_Daniel_. On the 6th July we ought to have seen the coast of Madagascar,
+by most of our computations, and according to Daniel's charts, upon
+Mercator's projection, which proved false by seventy leagues in distance
+of longitude between the coast of Ethiopia at cape Bona Speranza and the
+isle of St Lawrence, as is evident from the charts projected _in plano_
+by _Tottens_. The 22d all the four ships anchored at _Mohelia_, where we
+had water from wells dug a little above high-water mark, eight or nine
+feet deep, close by the roots of trees. _Doman_ is the chief town of
+this island, where the sultan resides, to whom we gave a double-locked
+piece and a sword. For very little money we were plentifully supplied
+with provisions, as poultry, goats, bullocks, lemons, oranges, limes,
+tamarinds, cocoa-nuts, pines, sugar-canes, and other fruits. Among the
+inhabitants of this island there are Arabs, Turks, and Moors, many of
+whom speak tolerable Portuguese. From them I had a curious account of
+the current at this place, which they said ran alternately fifteen days
+westerly, fifteen days easterly, and fifteen days not at all; and which
+I partly observed to be true: For, at our first coming, the current set
+westerly, and on the 28th it set easterly, and so continued during our
+stay, which was six days, but we went away before trial could be
+perfectly made of this report.
+
+I learned here that the king of _Juanni_ [Joanna or Hinzuan] was
+sovereign of this island, but entrusted its government to the sultan,
+who resides here. The 29th, a vessel arrived at _Doman_ from
+_Gangamora_, in the island of Madagascar, and I was desired by the
+general to examine what were its commodities, which I found to consist
+of rice, and a kind of cloth manufactured of the barks of trees, which
+makes very cool garments. I enquired from the pilot, who spoke good
+Portuguese, respecting Captain Rowles and the other Englishmen who were
+betrayed on that island. He knew nothing of all this, but said that two
+or three years before, an English boy was at Gangamora along with the
+Portuguese, whom he now thought dead, but knew not how he came there.
+This town of _Doman_ contains about an hundred houses, strongly built of
+stone and lime, and its inhabitants are orderly and civil. They carry
+on trade with the coasts of Melinda, Magadoxa, Mombaza, Arabia, and
+Madagascar, carrying slaves taken in their wars, which they sell for
+nine or ten dollars each, and which are sold afterwards in Portugal for
+100 dollars a-head. At Mombaza and Magadoxa, they have considerable
+trade in elephants teeth and drugs; and it was therefore agreed to
+advise the honourable company of this, that they might consider of
+sending a pinnace yearly to make trial of this trade. In Mohelia, we
+bought two or three bullocks for a bar of iron of between twenty and
+twenty-five pounds weight. We bought in all 200 head of cattle, and
+forty goats, besides poultry, fruits, &c.
+
+"_Malalia_ [Mohelia] is one of the Commora islands, the other three
+being _Angazesia_, [Comoro] _Juanny_, [Joanna or Hinzuan] and Mayotta,
+stretching almost east and west from each other. _Angazesia_ [Comoro]
+bears N. by W. from Mohelia, and is the highest land I ever saw. It is
+inhabited by Moors trading with the main and the other three eastern
+islands, bartering their cattle and fruits for calicoes and other cloths
+for garments. It is governed by ten petty kings, and has abundance of
+cattle, goats, oranges, and lemons. The people are reckoned false and
+treacherous. _Hinzuan_ lies east from Mohelia and Mayotta. All these
+three islands are well stored with refreshments, but chiefly Mohelia,
+and next to it Hinzuan. Here lived an old woman who was sultaness of all
+these islands, and under her there were three deputies in Mohelia, who
+were all her sons. The sultan in whose quarter we anchored is so
+absolute, that none of his people dared to sell a single cocoa-nut
+without his leave. Four boats were sent to his town to desire this
+liberty, which was granted. Captain Newport went ashore with forty men,
+and found the governor sitting on a mat, under the side of a junk which
+was then building, and attended by fifty men. He was dressed in a mantle
+of blue and red calico, wrapped about him to his knees, his legs and
+feet bare, and his head covered by a close cap of checquer work. Being
+presented with a gun and sword, he returned four cows, and proclaimed
+liberty for the people to trade with us. He gave the English cocoa-nuts
+to eat, while he chewed betel and areka-nut, tempered with lime of burnt
+oister shells. It has a hot biting taste, voids rheum, cools the head,
+and is all their physic. It makes those giddy who are not accustomed to
+its use, producing red spittles, and in time colours the teeth black,
+which they esteem handsome, and they use this continually. From the
+governor they were conducted to the carpenter's house, who was a chief
+man in the town. His house was built of stone and lime, low and little,
+plaistered with white lime, roofed with rafters, which were covered with
+leaves of the cocoa-nut tree, the outsides wattled with canes.
+
+"Their houses are kept clean and neat, with good household stuff, having
+gardens inclosed with canes, in which they grow tobacco and plantains.
+For dinner, a board was set upon tressels, on which was spread a fine
+new mat, and stone benches stood around, on which the guests sat. First,
+water was brought to each in a cocoa-shell, and poured into a wooden
+platter, and the rinds of cocoa-nuts were used instead of towels. There
+was then set before the company boiled rice, roasted plantains, quarters
+of hens, and pieces of goat's flesh broiled. After grace said, they fell
+to their meat, using bread made of cocoa-nut kernels, beaten up with
+honey, and fried. The drink was palamito wine, and the milk of the
+cocoa-nuts. Those who went to see the sultan, named _Amir Adell_, found
+all things much in the same manner, only that his behaviour was more
+light, and he made haste to get drunk with some wine carried to him by
+the English. The people of these islands are strict Mahomedans, and very
+jealous of letting their women or mosques be seen. For, on some of the
+English coming near a village, they shut them up, and threatened to kill
+them if they came nearer. Many of them speak and write Arabic, and some
+few of them Portuguese, as they trade with Mosambique in junks of forty
+tons burden, built, caulked, and rigged all out of the cocoa-nut tree.
+Here we bought oxen and cows, fat but small, Arabian sheep, hens,
+oranges, lemons, and limes in abundance, paying for them in calicoes,
+hollands, sword-blades, dollars, glasses, and other trifles."--T.R.
+
+We sailed from Mohelia on the 2d August, and on the 17th got sight of
+cape Guardafui, where the natives seemed afraid of us. The 20th we
+anchored in the road of _Galencia_ in Socotora, where the fierceness of
+the wind raised the sea into a continual surf all round about us, and by
+the spray, blown about us like continual rain, our masts, yards, and
+tackle were made white all over by the salt, like so much hoar-frost;
+The 23d we anchored at _Tamara_, the town where the king resides, and on
+the 24th at _Delisha_. They here demanded thirty dollars for the quintal
+of aloes, which made us buy the less. The _Faiking_ told us that Captain
+Downton had bought 100 quintals, and it was still so liquid, either
+from newness, or because of the heat, that it was ready to run out of
+the skins. The quintal of this place, as tried by our beam, weighed 103
+1/2 pounds English. Aloes is made from the leaves of a plant resembling
+our sempervivum, or house-leek, the roots and stalk being cut away, the
+rest strongly pressed, and the juice boiled up to a certain height,
+after which it is put into earthen pots, closely stopped for eight
+months, and is then put into skins for sale. The north part of Socotora
+is in 12° 30', and the body in 120° 25'.[166] It is fourteen leagues
+from this island to _Abdul Curia_, and as much more from thence to cape
+Guardafui. Such as mean to sail for Socotora, should touch at that cape,
+and sail from thence next morning a little before day-break, to lose no
+part of the day-light, the nights here being dark and obscure, with fogs
+and boisterous winds, during the months of August and September. On
+getting into _Abdul Curia_, they may anchor on the west side in seven or
+eight fathoms, under the low land; or, if they cannot get to anchor,
+should keep close hauled in the night to the southward, lest the wind
+and northerly current put them too much to leeward before day.
+Notwithstanding the monsoon, the winds do not blow steadily, being
+sometimes S. by W. and S.S.W. but seldom to the east of south.
+
+[Footnote 166: These two numbers unquestionably relate to the longitude
+and latitude respectively, though strangely expressed. The true lat. is
+13° 20'N. and long. 53° E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+"Socotora is an island not far from the mouth of the Red Sea, being the
+_Dioscuria_ or _Disoscordia_ of the ancients, in lat. 13° 20' N. It was
+governed when we were there by a sultan, named Amir Ben-said, son of the
+king of Fartaque, in Arabia Felix, which lies between the latitudes of
+15° and 18° N. on the coast of Arabia. This king was in peace with the
+Turks, on condition of assisting them with 5000 men when required, and
+then these troops to be paid and maintained by the Turks, to whom he
+paid no other acknowledgement. Near to the sea about Dofar, there is
+another petty Arab sovereign, whom he of Fartaque dare not meddle with,
+because he is under the protection of the Grand Signior.
+
+"The sultan of Socotora came down to meet us at the shore, accompanied
+by 300 men, and had a tent set up for his accommodation. He was on
+horseback, as were two of his principal attendants, and a third on a
+camel, the people running before and behind him shouting. He had two
+companies of guards, one composed of his own subjects, and the other
+consisting of twelve hired Guzerates, some armed with Turkish bows, some
+with pistols, and some with muskets, but all having good swords. He had
+also a few kettle-drums, and one trumpet. He received the general in a
+courteous manner, and was so absolute, that no person could sell any
+thing except himself. His people sat about him very respectfully; his
+clothes were of Surat cloths, made in the Arabian fashion, with a
+cassock of red and white wrought velvet, and a robe of which the ground
+was cloth of gold. He wore a handsome turban, but his legs and feet were
+bare.
+
+"Every night these people all stand or kneel towards the setting sun,
+the _zerife_ throwing water on their heads, being all Mahomedans. The
+king's town, named Tamara, is built of stone and lime, all whited over,
+the houses built with battlements and pinnacles, and all flat-roofed. At
+a distance it looks well, but within is very poor. Mr Boughton had leave
+to see the king's house, and found it such as might serve an ordinary
+gentleman in England. The lower rooms were used as warehouses and
+wardrobe, a few changes of robes hanging about the walls, and along with
+them were some twenty-five books of their law, religion, history, and
+saints lives. No person could be permitted to go up stairs to see his
+three wives, or the other women; but the ordinary sort might be seen in
+the town, their ears all full of silver rings. In the mosque the priest
+was seen at service. Mr Boughton had for his dinner three hens, with
+rice, his drink being water, and a black liquor called _cahu_, [coffee]
+drank as hot as could be endured.
+
+"On a hill, a mile from Tamara, there is a square castle, but we could
+not get leave to see it. The inhabitants are of four sorts. The first
+are Arabs, who have come in by means of conquest, who dare not speak in
+presence of the sultan without leave, and kissing his hand. The second
+sort are slaves, who kiss his foot when they come into his presence, do
+all his work, and make his aloes. The third sort are the old inhabitants
+of the country, called Bedouins, though I think these are not the oldest
+of all, whom I suppose to have been those commonly called Jacobite
+Christians: For, on Mr Boughton going into a church of theirs, which the
+Arabs had forced them to abandon, he found some images and a crucifix,
+which he took away. The Mahomedans would not say much about these
+people, lest other Christians might relieve or support them. These
+Bedouins, having had wars with the Arabs, live apart from them in the
+mountains. The fourth kind of people, or original natives, are very
+savage, poor lean, naked, and wear their hair long. They eat nothing but
+roots, ride about on buffaloes, conversing only among themselves, being
+afraid of all others, having no houses, and live more like wild beasts
+than men, and these we conjecture to have been the original natives of
+the place.
+
+"The island is very mountainous and barren, having some beeves, goats,
+and sheep, a few dates and oranges, a little rice, and nothing else for
+the food of man. All its commodities consist of aloes, the inspisated
+juice of a plant having a leaf like our house-leek. The only manufacture
+is a very poor kind of cloth, used only by slaves. The king had some
+dragon's blood, and some Lahore indigo, as also a few civet cats and
+civet. The dead are all buried in tombs, and the monuments of their
+saints are held in much veneration. The chief of these was one _Sidy
+Hachun_,[167] buried at Tamara, who was slain about an hundred years
+before we were there, and who, as they pretend, still appears to them,
+and warns them of approaching dangers. They hold him in wonderful
+veneration, and impute high winds to his influence."--T.R.
+
+[Footnote 167: Sidy, or Seid, signifies a descendant or relative of
+Mahomet, and Hachem, a prophet.--E.]
+
+The 31st of August we sailed from Socotora. The 10th September we had
+quails, herons, and other land-birds blown from the land, and unable to
+return. The 14th we had sight of Diu, and the 16th of Damaun, both
+inhabited by the Portuguese, and strongly fortified. On the 18th we
+passed the bar of Surat, and came to anchor in the road of Swally. Next
+day we sent a messenger on shore, and our boat returned the same night,
+bringing off Mr William Bidulph, who told us of all the affairs of the
+country, and that _Zulphecar Khan_[168] was now governor of Surat. At
+this place we bought sheep for half a dollar each, and got twenty hens
+for a dollar. On the 22d Mr Barker and other merchants were sent to
+Surat to provide furniture for a house to accommodate the lord
+ambassador, Sir Thomas Roe. They were searched most narrowly, even their
+pockets, and the most secret parts of their dress, according to the base
+manner of this country, in which a man has to pay custom for a single
+dollar in his purse, or a good knife in his pocket; and if one has any
+thing rare, it is sure to be taken away by the governor, under pretence
+of purchase.
+
+[Footnote 168: In the Pilgrims this person is named Zuipher-Car-Chan,
+but we believe the orthography in the text is more correct.--E.]
+
+The lord ambassador landed on the 25th, accompanied by our general, all
+the captains and merchants, and eighty men under arms, part pikes, and
+part muskets. Forty-eight guns were fired off from the ships, which were
+all dressed out with colours and streamers, flags and pendants. On
+landing, he was received in a splendid tent by the chief men of Surat,
+who welcomed him to India. There was much to do about their barbarous
+search, which they would have executed on all his attendants, which he
+strenuously resisted, and at length he and three or four of his
+principal followers were exempted, while the rest were only slightly
+handled for fashion-sake. A great deal passed on this occasion between
+the governor and the ambassador, about these rude and barbarous
+exactions, Sir Thomas justly contending for the honour and immunity of
+an ambassador from an independent king; while they insisted to make no
+difference between him and others of similar rank in those parts, and of
+our own likewise, who had formerly assumed the name of ambassadors.
+Their barbarous usage not only perplexed him there, and detained him
+long till an order came from court, but gave him much plague all the
+time he remained in the country, as will appear afterwards from his own
+journal. They could not easily be persuaded to allow of any difference
+between him and Mr Edwards, who had been considered by them in the same
+light with Sir Thomas.
+
+Mr Barwick's man, who had been inveigled to run away by a deserter from
+Captain Best who had turned Mahomedan, was brought back from Surat on
+the 1st of October. Others afterwards ran away to Damaun, and wrote to
+their comrades to induce them to do the same. The 2d, two Hollanders
+came on board, who had travelled by land from Petapulli, on the
+Coromandel coast. On the 10th, the governor's brother came on board,
+making many fair speeches, and had a present given him. The governor
+impudently urged us to give him presents, though he had already received
+three, but found fault with them, and even named what he would have
+given him, being beggar and chooser both at once. We had this day news
+of Mr Aldworth's death; and on the 5th November we received intelligence
+of the lord ambassador having fallen sick at Burhanpoor, and that Mr
+Boughton was dead.
+
+The most current coin at Surat is rials of eight, or Spanish dollars, of
+which the old with the plain cross passes for five mahmoodies each. The
+new dollars, having flower-de-luces at the ends of the cross, if not
+light, are worth four 3/4 mahmoodies. The _mahmoody_ is a coarse silver
+coin, containing thirty _pice_, and twelve _drams_ make a _pice_. The
+English shilling, if full weight, will yield thirty 1/2 pice. Larines
+are worth much the same with mahmoodies.[169] There are sundry kinds of
+rupees, some of which are worth half a dollar, and others less, by which
+one may be easily deceived. The trade at Surat is conducted by brokers,
+who are very subtle, and deceive both buyer and seller, if not carefully
+looked after. In weights, each city of India differs from another. The
+commodities are infinite, indigos being the chief, those of Lahore the
+best, and those from Sarkess inferior. Great quantities of cloths made
+of cotton, as white and coloured calicoes, containing fourteen yards the
+book or piece, from 100 to 200 mahmoodies each. Pintadoes, chintzes,
+chadors, sashes, girdles, cannakens, trekannies, serrabafs, aleias,
+patollas, sellas, quilts, carpets, green ginger, suckets or confections,
+lignum aloes, opium, sal amoniac, and abundance of other drugs. Vendible
+commodities are knives, mirrors, pictures, and such like toys; English
+cloth, China wares, silk, and porcelain, and all kinds of spices. The
+Guzerates load their great ships, of nine, twelve, or fifteen hundred
+tons, at Gogo, and steal out unknown to the Portuguese.
+
+[Footnote 169: From this explanation, the _mahmoody_ and larine may be
+assumed as worth one shilling; the _pice_ as equal to a farthing and a
+half, and the dram at about 1-10th of a farthing.--E.]
+
+The chief places for trade on the river Sinde, or Indus, are Tatta,
+_Diul-sinde_, Mooltan, and Lahore. The Expedition, on her former voyage,
+had landed the Persian ambassador, Sir Robert Shirley, at _Diul-sinde_;
+and of him I have thought it right to give the following particulars, as
+an appendix to my former voyage, having learnt them from some of his
+followers at Agra. Being weary of _Diul-sinde_, through the evil conduct
+of the governor, and the attempts of the Portuguese to molest him, who
+even used their endeavours to cut him off, for which purpose twelve of
+them had gone there from Ormus, he asked leave to proceed to Tatta; but,
+being refused permission, he went without leave, and having by the way
+to pass a river where none durst ferry him over, because prohibited by
+the governor on pain of death, he constructed a raft of timber and
+boards, on which he and Nazerbeg embarked. They were no sooner shoved
+off than twenty or thirty horse came from the governor in great haste to
+detain them. And as Nazerbeg was unable to guide the raft against the
+tide, some men swam to the raft and brought them back, on which occasion
+they narrowly escaped being drowned. Some of his followers being
+indignant at this rude dealing, one Mr John Ward shot off his pistol in
+their faces, and was instantly slain by another shot, and all the rest
+were carried back prisoners to _Diul-sinde_, being pillaged by the
+soldiers on their way. After some time in prison, they were permitted to
+proceed to Tatta, where they were kindly entertained by the governor of
+that place, who was a Persian. Before leaving Diul-sinde, Sir Thomas
+Powell and Mr Francis Bub died. Sir Robert Shirley remained at Tatta
+till a fit opportunity offered of proceeding to Agra, where he went at
+last, finding the way long and tedious, and much infested by thieves. He
+went there however in safety, going in company with a great man who had
+a strong escort, and for whom he had to wait two months.
+
+In this time Lady Powell was delivered of a son, but both she and her
+child died soon after, together with Mr Michael Powell, brother to Sir
+Thomas, losing their lives in this tedious waiting in boats for the
+great man. On his arrival at Agra, Sir Robert was favourably entertained
+by the Great Mogul, who sent for the Banian governor of Diul-sinde to
+answer at court to the complaint, and promised Sir Robert to have his
+own revenge if he would stay; but he hasted away to Persia, after
+receiving many presents from the Mogul, who gave him an escort, and all
+necessaries for his journey, in which he had not a single English
+attendant, as John Heriot died at Agra, and Mr Richard Barber, his
+apothecary, returned to Surat. Of all his company, three only remained
+with him, his lady and her female attendant, two Persians, the old
+Arminian, and the Circassian. His Dutch jeweller came to Surat along
+with Mr Edwards.
+
+§2. _Occurrences at Calicut and Sumatra, Miscarriage of the English
+Ships, Abuses of the Dutch, and Factories in India_.
+
+We took a Portuguese prize on the 29th of February, 1616. The 3d March,
+while at anchor in the road of Calicut, the deputy of the Zamorin came
+aboard, attended by many boats, signifying the joy of his master at our
+arrival, and his earnest desire to confer with our nation, and entreated
+therefore that we would tarry a few days, that he might send to the
+Zamorin, who was then at Cranganore besieging a castle belonging to the
+Portuguese. We had here abundance of provisions brought to us on board,
+and at reasonable rates. That same evening, there came a messenger from
+the Zamorin, entreating us to anchor for two or three days off
+Cranganore, which we accordingly did on the 5th, anchoring two leagues
+off shore. About noon the Zamorin sent to request the general would come
+ashore, to visit him, but this was not deemed right without a pledge,
+and Mr George Barkley went ashore to wait upon him; but the Zamorin
+refused to reveal his intentions to any one except our general, and
+seemed much displeased at his not coming ashore.
+
+The general accordingly landed on the 8th, and had an audience of the
+Zamorin, who wished the English to establish a factory in his dominions,
+for which purpose he offered a good house rent-free, freedom from custom
+or other exactions, for all goods brought there or carried thence, and
+made many protestations of affection for our nation. This was for the
+present declined, because most of our goods had been left at Surat, and
+because we were now bound for Bantam. To this the Zamorin answered, that
+it was no matter whether any goods were left for the present, as he only
+desired we might leave two or three Englishmen there, who should want
+for nothing, as he only wanted to be assured of our return next year
+with a supply of men and goods. He assured us we might be sure of
+loading one ship yearly with pepper, and might make sale of our
+commodities to a considerable extent. Upon this it was agreed to leave a
+factory at this place, with such goods as we could spare, which went
+accordingly on shore on the 9th; George Woolman being appointed chief of
+this new factory at Cranganore, Peter Needham and Roger Hares
+under-factors, together with Richard Stamford, and a boy named Edward
+Peake, who was appointed to learn the language. The name of the king is
+_Pendre Quone[170] Zamorin_, to whom was given, as a present, a minion
+or small cannon, and a barrel of powder; on which he promised, if he won
+the fort of Cranganore, to give it up to the English.
+
+[Footnote 170: Named _Underecon Cheete_ in a subsequent article.--E.]
+
+The 10th we received the Zamorin's letter of agreement for our
+privileges, with many fair protestations of love. We sailed the same
+day, passing before Cochin, which we could see distinctly. Next day we
+had a view of the town and castle of Coulan, where was a ship riding at
+anchor under the guns of the castle, which we boarded and brought forth
+without any hurt from the guns, all the crew having fled ashore. This
+was a Portuguese ship of four or five hundred tons, lately arrived from
+Bengal and Pegu, laden with rice, grain, Bengal cloths, butter, sugar,
+gum lack, hard wax, drugs, and other things. The 12th we espied another
+ship, to which we gave chase, and came up with about midnight, when she
+surrendered at the first shot.[171] I sent for her chief men on board my
+ship, the others being three or four miles a-stern, and set some of my
+people on board the prize, with strict charges to hurt no person. There
+were in this ship eighteen or twenty Portuguese, and about eighty
+others, men, women, and children. Her chief loading was rice, butter,
+sugar, lack, drugs, and Bengal cloths. We offered these people our first
+prize, with victuals to carry them ashore, which they refused, as
+fearing to be ill-used by the Malabars, having lately escaped with
+difficulty from a fleet of theirs of fourteen sail. Next day we landed
+them where they desired, and allowed them to go away unsearched for
+money or jewels. We had now three English ships[172] and three prizes.
+
+[Footnote 171: These prizes were taken from the Portuguese in part
+satisfaction for their unjust vexations and hostilities at Surat and
+other places.--_Purch._]
+
+[Footnote 172: No notice is taken of the fourth ship, the Lion, probably
+left at Surat; indeed, the whole of this relation is exceedingly vague
+and unsatisfactory, the name even of the general never being once
+mentioned.--E.]
+
+The 14th we arrived at _Brinion_, in lat. 8° 30', where we took out of
+the first prize what we thought useful, and then set her adrift. At
+_Brinion_ there is a small town in a round bay, which may be known by a
+long white beach to the north, and to the south is all high land, having
+a red cliff two leagues to the south, close to the sea. From thence to
+cape Comorin is sixteen leagues, the course being S.E. by S. along a
+bold free coast. The inhabitants of Brinion[173] are no way subject to
+the Portuguese. The 1st of April the island of Ceylon bore E. by S.
+seven leagues off. On the 10th the Peak of Adam bore north. I this day
+took my leave of the general, the Dragon and Pepper-corn being bound for
+Acheen, while I, in the Expedition, went for Priaman, Tecoo, and Bantam.
+
+[Footnote 173: In 8° 22' N. at the distance indicated from cape Comorin,
+is a place called Billingham, which may possibly be the Brinion of the
+text.--E.]
+
+It is good to remain in Brinion till the end of March, when the easterly
+monsoon ends, and not to pass cape Comorin sooner, on account of calms,
+and because the southerly current sets towards the Maldives. All who
+come from the west for Priaman and Tecoo, ought to continue so as to
+have sufficient day-light for passing between _Nimptan_[174] and the
+other adjacent islands, the best channel being to the north of that
+island. On the 30th of April I met the Advice going for Tecoo; but, at
+my request, she returned for Bantam, whence she was sent to Japan. I
+arrived at Bantam on the 1st of May, where I found the Hosiander newly
+arrived from Japan, and the Attendance from _Jambo_, most of their men
+being sick or dead. I here learnt the death of Captain Downton, and of
+the arrival of Captain Samuel Castleton with the Clove and Defence,
+which, with the Thomas and Concord, were gone to the Moluccas, the
+Thomas being appointed to proceed from thence to Japan.
+
+[Footnote 174: Pulo Mintaon, off the S.W. coast of Sumatra, nearly under
+the line, is probably here meant.--E.]
+
+The 19th of May I sailed from Bantam, and the 10th June I put into
+Tecoo. The 3d July I hove my ship down on the careen to sheath her. It
+is of great use to double sheath such ships as go to Surat, as though
+the outer sheathing may be eaten like a honey-comb by the worms, the
+inner is not at all injured. It were also of great use to have the
+rudder sheathed with thin copper,[175] to prevent the worms from eating
+off its edges, which is very detrimental in steering, and cannot be
+easily remedied, being so deep in the water. The natives of Sumatra
+inhabiting Priaman are barbarous, deceitful, and continually craving
+presents or bribes; and sometimes I have been in imminent hazard of
+being murdered, a hundred of them drawing their crisses upon us at once,
+because we refused to let them have our goods on trust, or at prices of
+their own making. The 20th, Thomas Bonnar, master of the Expedition,
+died, and was succeeded by John Row, who was the third master in this
+voyage.
+
+[Footnote 175: We had formerly occasion to notice a ship sheathed with
+iron at Japan, and this is the first indication or proposal for using
+copper in that way. Iron sheathing has never been adopted into British
+practice, while copper sheathing is now universal. Captain Peyton does
+not appear to have been aware that copper sheathing is incompatible
+with iron fastenings, which indeed was only learnt long after, by woeful
+experience, and the loss of many ships and men. In consequence of a
+strong predisposing chemical afinity, exerted by the contiguity of the
+copper and iron in the sea water, the muriatic acid corrodes the iron
+bolts and other fastenings, all of which are now made of copper in ships
+that are to be copper sheathed.--E.]
+
+The 26th, the Dragon and Pepper-corn arrived from Acheen, where they had
+purchased pepper, carried there from Tecoo in large junks and praws,
+which navigate between these places, but never out of sight of land. The
+king of Acheen commands the people of Tecoo to bring their pepper to his
+port, and allows none to purchase it there, but those who barter their
+Surat goods at such rates as he pleases to impose. Often likewise, he
+sends to Priaman and Tecoo the Surat commodities procured by him in that
+manner, obliging the merchants there to buy at rates by him imposed, and
+no person is allowed to buy or sell till his goods are sold. This makes
+our trade with them the better.[176] _Jambo_ is on the east side of
+Sumatra, and yields a similar large-grained pepper with what is procured
+at Priaman, but is not under the dominion of the king of Acheen, as are
+Baruse, Passaman, Tecoo, Priaman, Cottatinga, and other places on the
+western side of that island. _Baruse_ is to the north of Passaman, and
+yields considerable quantities of benzoin; _Cottatinga_ yields gold, and
+the other places pepper. Our general brought the king of Acheen's letter
+to these places, where the chief men received it with great submission,
+each of them kissing it and laying it on his head, promising to obey its
+injunctions, yet all failed in performance. It were proper, in these
+letters from the king, to procure all the particulars of the trade to be
+inserted. I set sail from Tecoo for Bantam on the 4th September.
+
+[Footnote 176: It is so expressed in the Pilgrims; yet it would seem
+that such arbitrary proceeding in the sovereign, assuming the character
+of merchant, would be destructive of all trade.--E.]
+
+The best gold, and the largest quantity, is to be had at the high hill
+of Passaman, where likewise is the best, cheapest, and most abundant
+produce of pepper. But the air is there so pestiferous, that there is no
+going thither for our nation without great mortality among the men.
+Fortunately this is not necessary in procuring pepper, as the Surat
+commodities at Tecoo are sufficiently attractive. I have even observed
+many of the natives to labour under infectious diseases, the limbs of
+some being ready to drop off with rottenness, while others had huge
+wens or swellings under their throats, as large as a two-penny loaf;
+which they impute to the bad water.[177] Though a barbarous people, they
+are yet acquainted with the means of curing their diseases. The people
+of Tecoo are base, thievish, subtle, seeking gain by every kind of
+fraud, or even by force when they dare; using false weights, false
+reckonings, and even attempting to poison our meats and drinks while
+dressing, and crissing our men when opportunity serves: But it is to be
+hoped they may be inforced to keep better order, by the influence and
+authority of the king of Acheen. At Acheen our Portuguese prizes were
+disposed of, and shared according to the custom of the sea, a sixth part
+being divided among the captors, and the rest carried to the account of
+our employers. There were only five left in the factory. Many of our men
+were sick, owing to their immoderate indulgence in drinking arrack.
+
+[Footnote 177: The _goitre_ was long ignorantly imputed in Europe to
+drinking snow water; but is now well known only to affect the
+inhabitants of peculiar districts, as Derbyshire in England, and the
+Valais in Switzerland, and this district in Sumatra, where certain
+mineral impregnations render the water unwholesome.--E.]
+
+When at Bantam, in October 1616, there were four English ships, and five
+Hollanders at Jacatra, which raised the price of pepper; and that the
+more, because the Dutch boasted of having brought this year in ready
+money 1,600,000 dollars, which is probably a great exaggeration to brave
+our nation. Their last fleet of six ships took two or three ships of the
+Portuguese, of which they made great boasts. They endeavour to depress
+our nation by every manner of abuse throughout the Indies, acting
+towards us in a most unfriendly and unchristian manner. Even in Bantam,
+where they acknowledge our equal right, they threaten to pull our people
+out of our factory by the ears, sometimes picking quarrels with them in
+the streets, and even imprisoning them; and when they themselves have
+caused an uproar, complaining to the king of Bantam of our unquietness,
+and bribing him to take their parts. He receives their money, and tells
+us of their dealings, taking advantage of this disagreement to fleece
+both sides. Even at Pulo-way, an island freely surrendered to the king
+of England, they abused our people, leading them through the streets
+with halters round their necks, carrying an hour-glass before them, and
+proclaiming that they were to be hanged when the sand was run out. And
+though they did not actually proceed to that extremity, they kept them
+three or four days in irons, and afterwards sent them aboard the Concord
+and Thomasine, under a forced composition never to return. Likewise, at
+the return of the Hosiander from Japan, which brought thirty tons of
+wood for them, free of freight and charges, they reported she would have
+returned empty, but for their timber; which also they might have said of
+my ship, which brought for them, from Surat to Bantam, thirty-one
+_churles_ of indigo and a chest of pistoles, freight-free.
+
+Captain Castleton went to the Moluccas with four ships, the Clove,
+Defence, Thomas, and Concord, that he might be better able to defend
+himself against the Hollanders; yet, being threatened by eleven of their
+ships, they returned without doing much business, having only a few
+cloves in the Clove. The captain died there of the flux; and the bad
+success of that expedition, together with other faults, was laid to his
+charge. The Trades-increase was twice set on fire by the Javans, and the
+fire quenched by our people; but on a third attempt, she was fired in so
+many places at once, that it was impossible to save her. The Darling was
+laid up at Patane, in June 1615, by order of Mr Larkine and the factory,
+as incapable of repair. Herrold, her master, was reported of having a
+design to carry her off to the Portuguese; and, being prevented, he went
+himself. The Thomasine was cast away, in September 1615, upon a shoal in
+the night, seventeen leagues W. from Macasser, while returning from the
+Moluccas. On this occasion her goods were lost, which were not of much
+value, but they saved the money, being 2000 dollars, and all their
+provisions, remaining fourteen days on a desolate island, where they
+fitted up their boat, which brought themselves and their money to
+Bantam. All their goods and other things were left behind, and seized by
+the king of Macasser, who refused to make restitution. At Jacatra the
+Hector sunk in three fathoms water while careening, her keel being
+exceedingly worm-eaten. The Concord is there also laid up, so rotten
+and leaky that they had to take out her provisions, and let her sink
+close to the shore. The Hosiander, on the 15th October 1616, was
+appointed to sail for the Coromandel coast.
+
+The factories which are at present established for our company in the
+East Indies, so far as I could hear, are these: Bantam, Jacatra,
+Ahmedabad, Agra, Agimere, Burhanpoor, Calicut, Masulipatam, Patepulli,
+Patane, Siam, Banjermassen, Succodania, Macasser, Acheen, Jambo, Tecoo,
+Banda, and Firando in Japan. At Bantam, Mr George Barclay was chief,
+with John Jordan, George Ball, Ralph Copendale, and several other
+factors and assistants. The principal purpose of the factory at Acheen,
+is to solicit for our better proceedings at Priaman and Tecoo. The place
+is unwholesome, more especially for such as indulge in the use of hot
+fiery drinks, as _arack_ and _aracape_, which bring many to untimely
+graves; and throw discredit on the voyage. It is not to be imagined at
+home, how unruly are the common men abroad, never being satisfied unless
+when their brains are reeling with liquor. Even the king of Acheen is
+said to have a strange habit of getting drunk when the English resort to
+him, as if thereby to do them honour, and it seems dishonourable to them
+not to conform with him, in sitting in the water, drinking hard, and
+many other strange customs. He is very tyrannical and cruel to his
+subjects, daily cutting off the hands, arms, and legs of many, on very
+small and frivolous causes; or causing them to be thrown to the
+elephants, he himself commanding a sagacious elephant to toss the
+culprits so high and so often, as either to bruise or kill them,
+according to his caprice at the time. No one that arrives at his port
+may land without his _chop_ or licence. On one occasion, a Dutch general
+came on shore without his licence, by desire of the principal factor,
+who presumed on his favour with the king. When the general came to the
+palace-gate, where another chop is necessary, the king found this
+irregularity to have proceeded from the presumption of the resident,
+whom he sent for and laid before the elephant, who tossed him three
+times, but so gently as not to bruise him much, giving him thus a
+warning how he should neglect the king's commands another time. The
+Dutch general stood by the while, fearing to come in for his share of
+this strange discipline; but the king forgave him, as ignorant of the
+law. The poor factor, being called into the king's presence, humbly
+acknowledged his punishment to have been merited, yet fled with the rest
+of the factory at the departure of the ships; on which the king placed
+us in their house.
+
+We sailed from Bantam, homeward bound, on the 1st November 1616. The 5th
+January 1617, I was unable to weigh our anchor, owing to the violence
+of the wind, to follow the Dragon to Penguin island. Ships that go round
+the Cape of Good Hope from India, at this season of the year, ought not
+to anchor short of Saldanha road, [Table Bay,] but ought to bear to
+leeward for Penguin island, and anchor there with two anchors at once,
+till the wind serve. In December, January, and February, the S.S.E. wind
+blows there with great violence from new to full moon. Yet I hold it
+dangerous to neglect this place, trusting to refreshments at St Helena,
+a certainty for an uncertainty; as the obscurity of the sun and moon,
+owing to thick mists at this season, may disappoint the most experienced
+navigators, and occasion the loss of ship, cargo, and men. While at the
+Cape, Corey came down with three sheep, and promised more, but went away
+in great haste to his wife and family, who dwelt now farther from the
+bay than formerly. It appears that the Hollanders had frightened the
+natives, by landing and going up the country with above an hundred men
+at once. Owing to this, our chief refreshment here was fresh fish.
+
+The 9th April 1617, we passed through great quantities of sea-weeds,
+called _seragasso_, which float in long ridges or rows along with the
+wind, and at considerable distances from each other. This plant has a
+leaf like samphire, but not so thick, and carries a very small yellow
+berry. It reaches from 22° 20' to 32° both of N. latitude. We anchored
+in the Downs on the 29th of May 1617.
+
+
+3. _Brief Notice of the Ports, Cities, and Towns, inhabited by, and
+traded with, by the Portuguese between the Cape of Good Hope and Japan,
+in_ 1616.
+
+The river of _Quame_, or _Cuamo_, on the eastern coast of Africa, where
+they are said to trade yearly for gold, elephants teeth, ambergris, and
+slaves. _Mozambique_, an island on the same coast, where they trade for
+gold, ambergris, and slaves, in barter for iron, lead, tin, and Cambay
+commodities, _Magadoxo_, which has abundance of elephants teeth, some
+ambergris, and various kinds of drugs. From these ports they trade
+yearly to Cambay, the Red Sea, and other places, observing the monsoons,
+which blow W. in April, May, June, July, August, and part of September,
+and the E. monsoon prevails an the other months. A few days between the
+cessation of one monsoon and the commencement of the other, the winds
+are variable, attended by calms, but become regular in a few days. To
+the east of Sumatra, however, the two monsoons continue only five months
+each way, the two intermediate months having variable winds.
+
+_Ormus_ in the gulf of Persia, whence the Portuguese trade to Persia,
+Diul-sinde, Arabia, &c. They fetch much pearl from Bassora;[178] and
+they load a ship or two with Persian commodities for Diul-sinde, where
+they arrive between the end of August and middle of September, taking
+likewise with them great store of dollars. Ormus is their best place in
+the Indies except Goa. At _Muskat_ they have a fort and some small
+trade, keeping the natives in such awe by land and sea, that they dare
+not trade without their licence, and this practice they follow in all
+parts of India where they are strong. _Diul-sinde_ on the Indus in the
+dominions of the Great Mogul. _Diu_, where they have a strong castle.
+Damaun, where they have a castle, and are said to have an hundred
+villages under their authority. _Basseen_, or _Serra de Bazein_, a
+little south from _Damaun_, and bordering on the Deccan; between which
+and _Chaul_ they have three ports, _Gazein, Banda_, and _Maia_. _Chaul_
+is a great city with a castle. At _Dabul_ they have a factory, but no
+fort.
+
+[Footnote 178: This is a mistake for the isle of Bahrein.--E.]
+
+_Goa_ is their metropolitan city in India, which stands in a small
+island, being the seat of their viceroy, and the anchoring place of
+their caracks. _Onore_ has a small fort. _Barcellore_, a town and
+castle, yields pepper, ginger, and many kinds of drugs. _Mangalore_, a
+town and castle. _Cananore_, a city and castle, yielding similar
+commodities with Barcellore. From _Calicut_ they have been expelled by
+the Zamorin, who endeavours to do the same at _Crangator_, [Cranganore,]
+where they have a fort. _Cochin_ is a strong city and castle, pleasantly
+situated on the sea in a wholesome air, with a fine river for the
+reception of ships. _Coulan_, a town with a small castle; near which is
+a village named St Lawrence, chiefly inhabited by friars and jesuits.
+_Quiloan_, a small city with a castle. _Tuckatra_, a town and castle,
+the inhabitants being mostly Christians.
+
+_Manaar_ is on the island of Ceylon, between Cape Comorin and
+Point-de-Gale, where they have a town inhabited by Portuguese. In this
+island also they have _Columbo_, and many other small places, having
+conquered most of the island, which yields cinnamon and various drugs.
+_Negopatnam_ is a city of great trade, on the coast of Coromandel, where
+they have only a factory. St Thomas, or _Meliapoor_, is a walled town
+inhabited by the Portuguese. In Bengal, up the river Ganges, they have a
+town, besides some factories and many small habitations. They have a
+factory in Pegu, another in Aracan, and one in the river of Martaban.
+Also at _Junkceylon_ they have a great factory, whence they fetch
+considerable quantities of tin to the Malabar coast.
+
+_Malacca_ is a strong city and castle belonging to the Portuguese, and
+the centre of a great trade in those parts of India. From this place the
+king of Acheen has long sought to root them out, and has burnt and
+plundered some of their ships this year, 1619. At _Macao_, an island on
+the coast of China, they have a city with a castle, where they are said
+to carry on much trade with the Chinese. They have a factory in Japan,
+but neither town nor fort; and trade thence with the coast of China. The
+Dutch are said to make much spoil of the vessels employed on this trade,
+Portuguese, Chinese, and others, accounting all fish that fall into
+their net.
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Notes, concerning the Proceedings of the Factory at Cranganore, from
+the Journal of Roger Hawes.[179]_
+
+[Footnote 179: Parch. Pilgr. I. 608.--Hawes sailed in the fleet under
+Keeling, in 1615, which carried out Sir Thomas Roe, already related in
+Sect. IV. of this chapter; and the present short article almost
+exclusively relates to the new factory at Cranganore on the Malabar
+coast, in which Hawes was left as one of the factors. This is a very
+imperfect and inconclusive article, yet gives some idea of the manners
+and customs of the Malabars.--E.]
+
+On the 4th of March 1615, we chased a Portuguese frigate, which ran into
+a creek and escaped. While on our way towards Cape Comorin, a Tony came
+aboard of us, with messengers from the Zamorin to our general, Captain
+William Keeling. Next day, the governor sent a present, and entreated
+the general to proceed to Cranganore, which we did next day, taking with
+us the messengers sent from the Zamorin, who requested the general to
+come on shore to speak with him. But, while he was doing so, some
+frigates came and anchored near the shore, by which he was constrained
+to go on board the Expedition, Captain Walter Peyton. On this occasion
+some shots were exchanged, but little harm was done. The general went
+ashore on the 8th, accompanied by Mr Barclay, the cape merchant, and
+several others. They were well used, and agreed to settle a factory in
+the dominions of the Zamorin, the following being the articles agreed
+upon:--
+
+_"UNDERECON CHEETE, Great Zamorin, &c. to JAMES, King of Britain, &c._
+Whereas your servant and subject, William Keeling, arrived in my kingdom
+at the port of Cranganore, in March 1615, with three ships, and at my
+earnest solicitation came ashore to see me; there was concluded by me
+for my part, and by him for the English nation, as followeth.
+
+"As I have ever been at enmity with the Portuguese, and propose always
+so to continue, I do hereby faithfully promise to be and to continue in
+friendship with the English, both for myself and my successors: And, if
+I succeed in taking the fort of Cranganore, I engage to give it to the
+English, to possess as their own, together with the island belonging to
+it, which is in length along the sea-coast nine miles, and three in
+breadth; and I propose to build therein a house for my own people, to
+the number of one hundred persons.
+
+"I shall hereafter endeavour, with the aid of the English, to conquer
+the town and fort of Cochin, which formerly belonged, to my crown and
+kingdom, and shall then deliver it to the English as their own. Provided
+that the charges of its capture be equally borne by both parties, one
+half by me, and the other half by the English nation; and in that case,
+the benefit of the plunder thereof, of whatsoever kind, shall belong
+half to me, and half to the English. And thereafter, I shall claim no
+right, title, or interest in the said town, precincts, or appurtenances
+whatsoever."
+
+"I also covenant for myself, my heirs and successors, that the whole
+trade of the English, in whatsoever commodities, brought in or carried
+out, shall be entirely free from all custom, imposition, tax, toll, or
+any other duty, of any quality or description."
+
+"To these covenants, which the shortness of time did not permit to
+extend in more ample form, I, the Zamorin, have sworn to perform, by the
+great God whom I serve, and not only for myself but for my successors;
+and in witness thereof have laid my hand upon this writing.[180] And the
+said William Keeling promises to acquaint the king his master with the
+premises, and to endeavour to procure his majesty's consent thereto."
+
+[Footnote 180: This probably alludes to a custom mentioned in one of our
+earlier volumes, of imprinting the form of the hand, smeared with ink,
+on the paper, instead of signature or seal.--E.]
+
+This being agreed upon, a stock was made out for a factory, such as the
+shortness of time would permit, and three factors were appointed. These
+were, George Woolman, chief, Peter Needham, second, who was one of the
+general's servants, and I, Roger Hawes, third; together with a youth,
+named Edward Peake, as our attendant, who was to learn the language.
+John Stamford, a gunner, was likewise left to assist the Zamorin in his
+wars. On the 10th the ships departed, leaving us and our goods in a
+_shrambe_ at the water side, together with a present for the Zamorin. We
+continued there till the 13th, at which time the last of our goods were
+carried to the Zamorin's castle; whose integrity we much suspected,
+after having thus got possession of our goods. On the 20th, he insisted
+to see Mr Woolman's trunk, supposing we had plenty of money. Needham had
+told him we had 500 rials; but finding little more than fifty, he
+demanded the loan of that sum, which we could not refuse. He offered us
+a pawn not worth half; which we refused to accept, hoping he would now
+allow us to proceed to Calicut, but he put us off with delays. He
+likewise urged us to give his brother a present.
+
+On the 28th, the Zamorin came into the apartment where we were, and gave
+Mr Woolman two gold rings, and one to each of the rest; and next day he
+invited us to come to his tumbling sports. That same night, Stamford
+went out with his sword in his hand, telling the boy that he would
+return presently. The next news we had of him was, that he was in the
+hands of the Cochin nayres. He had lost His way while drunk, and meeting
+with some of them, they asked where he wished to go; he said to the
+Zamorin, to whom they undertook to conduct him, and he knew not that he
+was a prisoner, till he got to Cochin. This incident put us in great
+fear, but the Zamorin gave us good words, saying he was better pleased
+to find him a knave now, than after he had put trust in him.
+
+We had leave in April to depart with our goods to Calicut, where we
+arrived on the 22d of that month, and were well received; but had to
+remain in the custom-house, till we could get a more convenient house,
+which was made ready for us on the 6th of May, with promise of a better
+after the rains. We were very desirous, according to our orders from
+the general, to have sent a messenger with his and our letters to
+Surat, to acquaint our countrymen that we were here; but the governor
+would not consent till we had sold all our goods. On the 18th of June,
+one was sent. On the 26th, part of our goods were sold to the merchants
+of Calicut, by the governor's procurement, with fair promises of part
+payment shortly. But it is not the custom of the best or the worst in
+this country to keep their words, being certain only in dissembling. Mr
+Woolman was desirous of going to Nassapore to make sales, but the
+governor put him off with divers shifts from time to time. The 3d July,
+our messenger for Surat returned, reporting that he had been set upon
+when well forwards on his way, and had his money and letters taken from
+him, after being well beaten. Among his letters was one from Captain
+Keeling to the next general, the loss of which gave us much concern; yet
+we strongly suspected that our messenger had been robbed by his own
+consent, and had lost nothing but his honesty. A broker of Nassapore
+told Mr Needham, that our dispatches had been sold to the Portuguese,
+and when the governor heard of this, he hung down his head, as guilty.
+We here sold some goods to merchants of Nassapore.
+
+Mr Woolman died on the 17th of August. We could not procure payment of
+our promised money, and were told by our broker, that some one of our
+debtors would procure a respite from the governor, by means of a bribe,
+on which the rest would refuse till they all paid. On the 24th, the
+Zamorin's sister sent us word, that she would both cause our debtors to
+pay us, and to lend us any money we needed; but we found her as false as
+the rest The queen mother also made us fair promises, and several others
+made offers to get letters conveyed for us to Surat; but all their words
+were equally false. Thus wronged, Mr Needham farther wronged himself by
+his indiscretion, threatening, in presence of a nayre who attended us,
+and who revealed his threats, that he would go to the king of Cochin,
+making shew of violent revenge to put the governor in fear. He behaved
+outrageously likewise to a _scrivano_,[181] who is the same as a justice
+with us, taking him by the throat, and making as if he would have cut
+him down with his sword, for detaining some of our money which he had
+received. Our broker also told Mr Needham, that it was not becoming to
+go up and down the streets with a sword and buckler; and indeed his
+whole conduct and behaviour more resembled those we call
+_roaring-boys_,[182] than what became the character of a merchant. For
+my admonitions, he requited me with ill language, disgracing himself and
+injuring the affairs of the company.
+
+[Footnote 181: This term is obviously Portuguese, and cannot be the
+proper appellation for a judge on the Malabar coast.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 182: This character is now only to be met with in some of our
+old plays such as Captain Bobadil in Every Man in his Humour.--E.]
+
+A Dutch ship, which had been trading in the Red Sea, arrived here on the
+23d of September, with the intention of settling a factory, and they
+were referred by the governor to the Zamorin, promising to carry a
+letter for us, but went without it; so that our delays continued. Mr
+Needham went himself to the Zamorin on the 4th November, and returned on
+the 25th, having got a present of a gold chain, a jewel, and a gold
+armlet, with orders also from the king to further our purposes; but the
+performance was as slow as before. The 20th December, a Malabar captain
+brought in a prize he had taken from the Portuguese, and would have
+traded with us; but we could not get in any of our money, due long
+before. We also heard that day of four English ships being at Surat. The
+governor and people continued their wonted perfidiousness; the former
+being more careful in taking, and the latter in giving bribes, than in
+paying our debts. We used a strange contrivance of policy to get in some
+of these; for, when we went to their houses, demanding payment, and
+could get none, we threatened not to leave their house till they paid
+us. We had heard it reported, that, according to their customs, they
+could neither eat nor wash while we were in their houses; and by this
+device we sometimes got fifty _fanos_ from one, and an hundred from
+another. They would on no account permit us to sleep in their houses,
+except one person, with whom we remained three days and nights, with
+three or four nayres. They were paid for watching him, but we got
+nothing. The nayre, who had been appointed by the king to gather in our
+debts, came to demand a gratuity from us, though he had not recovered
+any of our money. He would go to the debtor's houses, taking three or
+four _fanos_, and then depart without any of our money.
+
+On the 9th of January, 1616, Mr Needham went to demand payment of a
+debt, and being refused permission to pass by a nayre who struck him, as
+he says, he gave the nayre a dangerous wound in the head with his sword,
+of which it is thought he cannot recover, and others of the natives were
+hurt in the fray. Word was presently brought to us to shut up our doors,
+lest the nayres should assemble to do us some mischief, as feuds or
+kindred-quarrels and murders are common among them, having no other law
+or means of vengeance. Our nayre with his kindred, to the number of
+thirty or more, with pikes, swords, and bucklers, guarded Mr Needham
+home, on which occasion we had to give a gratuity. Our house had to be
+guarded for three or four days and nights, none of us daring to go out
+into the streets for money or other business for a week, though before
+we used to go about in safety. After that, our broker advised us never
+to go out, unless attended by a nayre, as they had sworn to put one of
+us to death, in revenge for him who was slain.
+
+The 20th, the Portuguese armado of thirty-four sail, passed by from the
+south, of which fourteen were ships, and the rest frigates or grabs.
+They put into the harbour, in which three Malabar frigates lay at
+anchor, and a hot fight ensued, in which the Portuguese were forced to
+retreat with disgrace, having only cut the hawser of one of the
+frigates, which drove on shore and was stove in pieces. This belonged to
+the governor, who was well served, for he remained like a coward in the
+country, keeping four or five great guns that were in the town locked
+up, except one, and for it they had only powder and shot for two
+discharges. Before the fight ended, some 4000 nayres were come in from
+the country, and several were slain on both sides. Nine or ten
+Portuguese were driven ashore, and two or three of the chiefs of these
+were immediately hung up by the heels, and being taken down after two
+days, were thrown to be devoured by wild beasts.
+
+On the 28th of January, we were told by a Pattemar, that the governor
+was only our friend outwardly, wishing rather to have the Portuguese in
+our room, as we did no good in the country, bringing only goods to sell,
+whereas the Portuguese did good by making purchases. The 8th of February
+we had letters from Surat; and on the 4th of March, the Zamorin wrote to
+us, that if our ships came, he wished them to come to Paniany, and that
+we need not be anxious for our money, as he would pay us, even if he
+were forced to sell his rings.
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Ambassador from King James I, to Shah
+Jehanguiro, Mogul Emperor of Hindoostan_.[183]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+There are two editions of this journal in our older Collections of
+Voyages and Travels, but both exceeding defective and imperfect. The
+_first_ of these is in the Pilgrims of Purchas, which is said to have
+been "_Collected out_ of the Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Knight, Lord
+Ambassador from his Majesty of Great Britain, to the Great Mogul." It is
+evidently to be considered as an _abridgement_ made by Purchas, which,
+indeed, he fully acknowledges in a postscript, in the following
+terms:--"Some readers may perhaps wish they had the whole journal, and
+not thus contracted into _extracts_ of those things out of it which I
+conceived more fit for the public. And for the whole, myself would have
+wished it; but neither with the honourable Company, nor elsewhere, could
+I learn of it, the worthy knight himself being now employed in like
+honourable embassage from his majesty to the _Great Turk_." Besides that
+it is a mere abridgement, often most confusedly, and almost
+unintelligibly tacked together, this article in The Pilgrims breaks off
+abruptly in a most interesting part of the narrative, which we have now
+no means to supply. The full title of this article in The Pilgrims is as
+follows:--"Observations collected out of the Journal of Sir Thomas Roe,
+Knight, Lord Ambassador from his Majesty the King of Great Britain, to
+the Great Mogul. Consisting of Occurrences worthy of Memory, in the way,
+and at the Court of the Mogul; together with an Account of his Customs,
+Cities, Countries, Subjects, and other Circumstances relating to India."
+
+[Footnote 183: Purch. Pilgr. I. 535. Churchill's Collect. I. 617.]
+
+The _other_ edition of this journal is in the collection published by
+the Churchills, of which we quote from the third edition of 1744,
+reprinted by Lintot and Osburn, booksellers in London. Of this edition
+the editor of that collection gives the following account:--"Sir Thomas
+Roe has before appeared in print, in part at least, in the collection of
+Purchas, since translated into French, and published in the first volume
+of the collection by Thevenot. He now comes again abroad with
+considerable additions, not foisted in, but taken from his own original
+manuscript, of which it would appear that Purchas only had an imperfect
+copy. These additions, it is true, are not great in bulk, but they are
+valuable for the subject; and several matters, which in the other
+collection are brought in abruptly, are here continued in a more
+methodical manner."
+
+After an attentive comparison of these two former editions, it obviously
+appears that the edition by Purchas, in 1625, is in general more
+circumstantial and more satisfactory than that of Churchill, in 1744,
+notwithstanding its superior pretensions, as above stated. Yet, on
+several occasions, the edition in Churchill gives a more intelligible
+account of particulars, and has enabled us, on these occasions, to
+restore what Purchas, by careless abbreviation, had left an obscure and
+almost unintelligible jumble of words. The present edition, therefore,
+is formed upon a careful collation of these two former, supplying from
+each what was defective in the other. On the present occasion, the
+nautical and other observations made by Sir Thomas Roe during the voyage
+from England to Surat, are omitted, having been already inserted into
+the account of that voyage by Captain Peyton.
+
+It were much to be desired that this first account of the political
+intercourse between Britain and Hindoostan could have been given at full
+length, more especially as that extensive, rich, populous, and fertile
+country is now almost entirely reduced under the dominion of the British
+crown; and as Sir Thomas Roe, even in the garbled state in which we are
+forced to present his observations, clearly shews the inherent vices of
+the Mogul government, through which it so rapidly fell into anarchy, and
+was torn in pieces by its own cumbrous and ill-managed strength. Perhaps
+the archives of the East India Company are still able to supply this
+deficiency in the history of its original establishment; and it were
+surely worthy of the more than princely grandeur of that great
+commercial company, to patronise the publication of a collection of the
+voyages, travels, negotiations, and events which have conduced to raise
+it to a degree of splendour unexampled in the history of the world. The
+importance of this first embassy from Great Britain to the Great Mogul,
+and the vast consequences, both commercial and political, which have
+since arisen from that early intercourse, have induced us to give the
+following additional information respecting the mission of Sir Thomas
+Roe, from the Annals of the East India Company, vol. I. p. 174, _et
+sequ._, which will in some measure supply the defects in this journal,
+as published by Purchas and Churchill.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"The information which the Court [of Committees or Directors of the
+East India Company] had received, in the preceding season, [1613-14]
+induced them to apply to the king to grant his royal authority that an
+ambassador should proceed in his name to the Great Mogul. King James, in
+compliance with the wishes of the Company, on the 14th January, 1614-15,
+granted his commission to the celebrated Sir Thomas Roe, "to be
+ambassador to the Great Mogul, or king of India," the company agreeing
+to defray the expence, in consideration, that, under their exclusive
+privileges, they were to acquire such benefits as might result from this
+mission.
+
+"Sir Thomas Roe sailed from England in March 1615, on board the Lion,
+Captain Newport, and arrived at Surat, whence he proceeded to the
+Mogul's court at Agimere, which he reached in December, 1615; and on the
+10th January, 1616, was presented to the Mogul as ambassador from the
+king of England, when he delivered the king's letter and presents. Of
+these, an English coach was the chief article, and with it the Mogul was
+pleased to express his satisfaction, and to give the ambassador a
+gracious reception. From the company's agents having already been too
+profuse in their presents to the ministers and favourites, Sir Thomas
+found that the articles which he carried out as presents were not so
+highly estimated as he expected; he therefore informed the court that
+nothing less than valuable jewels would be deemed worthy of acceptance;
+and at the same time he advised that 'four or five cases of red wine'
+should be sent as presents to the king and prince, as, in his own words,
+'never were men more enamoured of that drinke as these two, and which
+they would more highly esteem than all the jewels in Chepeside.'
+
+"In describing his own situation, he stated that the natives could not
+comprehend what was meant in Europe by the rank or quality of an
+ambassador, and that in future it would be preferable to employ an agent
+only, who could bear these affronts without dishonour, which an
+ambassador, from, his rank, could not encounter. He complains also,
+that, from want of an interpreter, he had experienced much difficulty in
+explaining to the Mogul, and to his ministers, the object of his
+mission; in particular, the grievances which the English had suffered
+from the governor of Ahmedabad, because the native brokers, whom he was
+obliged to employ, were afraid to interpret literally, lest they should
+either incur the king's displeasure, or be disgraced by his ministers.
+In his application for redress from the governor of Ahmedabad, he
+discovered that this officer was supported by sultan Churrum, the
+Mogul's eldest-son,[184] and Asaph Khan, the favourite. By perseverance
+and firmness, however, the ambassador at length obtained the relief he
+solicited.
+
+[Footnote 184: Sultan Chesuro appears to have been the eldest son of
+Jehanguire, but held in confinement for having endeavoured to supplant
+his father in the succession, and Churrum seems only to have been the
+third son.--E.]
+
+"On the 24th January, 1616, Sir Thomas had a second audience of the
+Mogul, at which he complained of the injuries the English had sustained
+from the arbitrary conduct of the governor of Surat, and so effectual
+were his remonstrances, that this officer was dismissed. The ambassador
+then proposed to renew the articles of the _phirmaund_, or treaty
+between the Mogul and the English nation, and solicited to have the
+treaty ratified by the signatures[185] of the Mogul and Sultan Churrum,
+which being procured, the treaty was concluded.[186]
+
+[Footnote 185: This expression is rather ambiguous, as the ratifications
+of such papers in India were by the seals of the princes, and not what
+we understand by the term used in the text--E.]
+
+[Footnote 186: It has not been thought necessary to insert the substance
+of this treaty as contained in the Annals, as it is given in the
+Journal.--E.] "The dispatches of Sir Thomas, of this year, concluded
+with recommending to the company, as a commercial speculation, to send
+out annually a large assortment of all kinds of toys, which would find a
+ready sale at the great festival of _Noroose_, [the new year] in the
+month of March.
+
+"In 1616 we discover a jealousy in the factory at Surat, of Sir Thomas
+Roe, notwithstanding his efforts and success in obtaining phirmaunds
+from the Mogul favourable to the factories at Surat and Ahmedabad, and
+in general for the encouragement of English trade in the Mogul
+dominions; for the factors represented to the court that a merchant or
+agent would be better qualified for a commercial negociator than a
+king's ambassador; and, in support of this opinion, referred to the
+practice of the king of Spain, who on no occasion would send an
+ambassador, but always a commercial agent; and stated that Sir Thomas
+Roe, besides, considered himself to be vested with the exercise of a
+controlling power over the commercial speculations of the Surat factory,
+and held himself to be better qualified to judge of the English
+interests by combining the political relations which he wished to
+introduce between the Mogul and the king of England, than by forwarding
+any projects for trade which the factory might devise as applicable to
+the Mogul dominions.
+
+"In this year he reported that he had returned thanks to Sultan Churrum
+for the protection which he had afforded to the English in relieving
+them from the extortions of Zulfeccar Khan, the late governor of Surat,
+and had remonstrated against the partiality which had been shown to the
+Portuguese; representing to the Mogul that the king of Portugal had
+assumed the title of king of India, and that the Portuguese trade could
+never be so beneficial as that of England, as the English annually
+exported from India calicoes and indigo to the amount of 50,000 rials.
+To strengthen this remonstrance, Sir Thomas offered to pay to the sultan
+12,000 rupees yearly, on condition that the English should be exempted
+from the payment of customs at the port of Surat; and then gave it as
+his opinion, that the plan of the agency at Surat, of keeping permanent
+factories at Surat, and other parts of the Mogul dominions, ought to be
+abandoned, as it would be preferable to make the purchases of goods
+inland, by the natives, [particularly the indigo from Agra, and the
+Bengal goods] who could obtain them at reasonable rates. But if the
+court were of opinion that English factors ought to be stationed at
+Agra, he recommended sending the goods in carts rather than on camels.
+He concludes this part of his report by advising that agents should
+reside at Cambay and Baroach, because the best cloths in India could be
+procured at these towns.
+
+"Though Sir Thomas Roe appears to have procured a phirmaund through the
+means of Noor-Mahal, the favourite sultana or empress, for the general
+good treatment of the English at Surat, and had desired that an
+assortment of English goods, perfumes, &c. should be forwarded to him as
+presents to her and to her brother, Asaph Khan, he yet describes, in
+1618, the governor of Surat as reluctant to shew that favour to the
+English which the phirmaund had enjoined. It therefore became a question
+with him, as the governor of Surat would not allow the English to
+strengthen or fortify their factory for the protection of their goods
+and servants, whether it might not be expedient to remove to some other
+station, where the means of self-defence might be more practicable. At
+one time he thought of Goga, and subsequently of Scindy; but, after a
+review of the whole, decided that it would be more expedient to remain
+at Surat, though, from the character of the natives, and the instability
+of the Mogul government, all grants of privileges must be considered as
+temporary, and any agreement or capitulation which might be procured,
+ought not to be depended on as permanent. He concludes, that, though a
+general phirmaund for trade in the Mogul dominions had been obtained,
+and of course a foundation laid for the English intercourse with the
+rich provinces of Bengal, yet the attempt to enter on that trade would
+be unwise, from being in the exclusive possession of the Portuguese.
+
+"Sir Thomas Roe returned from the embassy to Surat in the spring of
+1618-19, when it appears that the opposition in opinion between him and
+the factors at that place had subsided, as the efforts of both were
+united to establish a distinct system for the trade of the English at
+Surat. It has been already stated that Sir Thomas Roe had procured a
+phirmaund to the English from the Mogul, for the establishment of a
+general trade in his extensive dominions, but that the relaxed situation
+of the government, which always, under the administration of the Moguls,
+preceded an expected succession to the throne, had rendered the governor
+of Surat, at this juncture, less obsequious to the orders of his
+sovereign than the absolute nature of the constitution would otherwise
+have prescribed. Under these circumstances, and to improve upon the
+general treaty already mentioned, Sir Thomas Roe made proposals to
+Sultan Churrum to enter into an alliance for resisting the pretensions
+of the Portuguese. After long discussions with that prince, this treaty
+was concluded, and the following are its leading articles.
+
+"That the governor of Surat should lend ships to the English, to be
+employed in the defence of that port. The English, however, to be only
+allowed to land ten armed men at one time; but the resident merchants to
+be allowed to wear arms. That the English should be allowed to build a
+house in the city, but distant from the castle.[187] That the governor
+of Surat should receive the ambassador and his suite with marks of
+honour. That the English should enjoy the free exercise of their
+religion, and be governed by their own laws. That in any dispute between
+the English and the natives; reference was to be made to the governor
+and his officers, who should decide speedily and justly; but disputes
+among themselves were to be decided by their own factory. That liberty
+of trade was to be allowed the English, in its fullest extent, on
+payment of the usual duties on landing the goods, from which pearls,
+jewels, &c. were to be exempted. That freedom of speech was to be
+allowed to the English linguists and brokers, in all matters regarding
+the trade of their employers. And, lastly, That all presents intended
+for the court were to be opened and examined at the customhouse of
+Surat, and then sealed and given back to the English, and to pass
+duty-free; but, in case these presents were not made, then these
+articles were to become liable to pay duty.
+
+[Footnote 187: Though not so expressed in the Annals, this appears to
+have been a _fortified_ house; as, on an occasion, when Surat was taken
+and plundered by an armed force belonging to Sevagee, the first
+sovereign of the Mahrattas, the English were able to defend their
+factory from injury.--E.]
+
+"During his residence in India, Sir Thomas Roe had likewise used his
+best endeavours to promote the trade of the English with the ports of
+Persia, in which considerable opposition was experienced from the
+Portuguese, who tried every expedient to engross the Persian trade to
+themselves, and to exclude the English from any participation. In this
+opposition Sir Robert Shirley had been implicated, who had gone to
+Europe in 1615, on a mission from the king of Persia, to form a contract
+with the king of Spain, then sovereign of Portugal, not only to sell to
+his subjects the whole of the Persian silk, but to grant them licence to
+fortify the sea-ports of Persia for the protection of their shipping and
+factories. Mr Connock, the English agent in Persia, under these
+circumstances, recommended the necessity of applying to king James, and
+submitting to his consideration the danger of allowing the Portuguese to
+enjoy the exclusive possession of that trade, which would render them
+the most powerful European nation in the East Indies. In the mean time,
+he represented to the king of Persia the necessity of seizing the island
+of Ormus from the Portuguese, under the protection of which the Persian
+dominions could be supplied by the English with all kinds of Indian
+commodities.
+
+"In this critical situation of the company's agents at Ispahan, an
+ambassador arrived from the king of Spain, in June 1617, authorised to
+adjust and settle the contract which Sir Robert Shirley had projected.
+The English agent, in consequence, urged the factory at Surat to
+dispatch the whole of the company's ships to Jasques for the defence of
+that port, as the Portuguese fleet had rendezvoused at Muscat, and had
+determined to blockade the passage into the Persian gulf against the
+English trade. These events induced Sir Thomas Roe to grant a
+commission, and to give instructions to the company's agent at Ispahan,
+authorising him to treat with the king of Persia, in the name of the
+king of England.
+
+"In 1618, Captain Shillings, of the company's ship Ann, went to Mokha,
+and obtained a phirmaund from the governor, by which the English were
+allowed free trade, and protection to their persons and property, on
+condition of paying three per cent. on merchandize, and three per cent.
+on the prices of all goods exported by them from Mokha. On receiving
+information of this event, Sir Thomas Roe addressed a letter to the
+governor of Mokha, requesting that these privileges might be confirmed
+by the Grand Signior, and promising, on the part of the English, that
+all kinds of European goods should be regularly brought to Mokha, and
+that the English should defend that port against all enemies, and
+particularly against the Portuguese.
+
+"This appears to have been the last transaction of Sir Thomas Roe in the
+East Indies. In his voyage home he touched at Saldanha bay [Table bay]
+in May, 1619, where he met, and held a conference with the Dutch admiral
+Hoffman, who commanded the outward-bound fleet from Holland of that
+season. From this officer he learned that the respective governments in
+Europe, alarmed at the commercial jealousies and animosities between
+their subjects in the East Indies, had appointed commissioners to take
+that subject into consideration. It was therefore, with a becoming sense
+of duty, agreed between them that each should address a letter to the
+chiefs of their respective factories in India, recommending to them to
+abstain from any opposition or violence against each other, till each
+had received specific instructions from their superiors, or should be
+informed of the result of the conferences between the commissioners of
+the two nations in Europe."
+
+§1. _Journey from Surat to the Court of the Mogul, and Entertainment
+there, with some Account of the Customs of the Country_.
+
+I landed at Surat on the 26th September, 1615, and was received in an
+open tent by the chief officers of the town, well attended. On this
+occasion I was accompanied by the general, and principal merchants,
+Captain Harris being sent to make me a court of guard with an hundred
+shot, and the ships, all dressed out to the best advantage, saluted me
+with their ordnance as I passed. There was much controversy about
+searching my servants, but at length they passed free to the city, where
+we had a house provided for us. We continued there to the 30th October,
+suffering much vexation from the governor, who forcibly caused search
+many of our chests and trunks, taking away what he thought fit.
+
+The 30th October I departed from Surat, and that day travelled only four
+coss to _Sumaria_.[188] The 1st November I went eleven miles to a
+village. The 2d, to _Biarat_, twenty-one miles, where there is a castle,
+this town being on the borders of the kingdom of Guzerat, subject to the
+Mogul, and belonging to _Abraham Khan_. The 3d I entered the kingdom of
+_Pardaff shah_,[189] a pagan lord of the hills, who is subject to
+nobody; and at the end of fifteen miles we lodged in the fields, beside
+a city of note, called _Mugher_. The 4th we travelled nine miles by a
+rocky way, and lay in the fields, beside a village called Narampore. The
+5th, fifteen miles, and lay in the fields. The 6th, twenty miles, to a
+city called _Nundabar_, in the kingdom of _Brampore_, [Burhanpoor] which
+is subject to the Mogul. At this place we first procured bread, after
+leaving Surat, as the Banians, who inhabit all the country through which
+we had travelled, make only cakes instead of bread. The country
+peculiarly abounds in cattle, as the Banians never kill any, neither do
+they sell any for being slaughtered. One day I met at least 10,000
+bullocks loaded with grain, in one drove, and most other days I saw
+smaller parcels.
+
+[Footnote 188: In this journal the names of places are exceedingly
+corrupted, and often unintelligible. Such as admitted of being
+corrected, from the excellent map of Hindoostan, by Arrowsmith, have
+their proper names placed within brackets.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 189: In the miserable map of Hindoostan, accompanying this
+journal in the Pilgrims, this prince is called Partap-sha.--E.]
+
+The 7th we went eighteen miles to _Ningull_. The 8th, fifteen to
+_Sinchelly_, [Sindkera.] The 9th, other fifteen to _Tolmere_, [Talnere.]
+And the 10th, eighteen to _Chapre_, [Choprah] where we pitched our tents
+without the town, and the king's officers guarded us all night with
+thirty horse and twenty shot, for fear of out being attacked by robbers
+from the mountains, as I refused to remove into the town. The 11th we
+travelled eighteen miles, eighteen on the 12th, and fifteen on the 13th,
+which brought us to _Brampore_, [Burhanpoor] which I guessed to be 223
+miles east from Surat.[190] The country is miserable and barren, the
+towns and villages only built of mud. At _Bartharpore_,[191] a village
+two miles short of Burhanpoor, I saw some of the Mogul ordnance, most of
+which is too short, and too open in the bore. On coming to Burhanpoor,
+the _cutwall_ met me, well attended, having sixteen stand of colours
+carried before him, and conducted me to a _serai_ appointed for my
+lodging. He took leave of me at the gate, which had a handsome stone
+front; but, when in, I had four chambers allotted for me, no bigger than
+ovens, with vaulted roofs and bare brick walls, so that I chose to lodge
+in my tent. I sent word to the cutwall, threatening to leave the town,
+as I scorned such mean usage, but he desired me to be content till
+morning, as this was the best lodging in the city, which I afterwards
+found to be the case, as it consists entirely of mud cottages, excepting
+the houses inhabited by _Sultan Parvis_, the Mogul's second son, that of
+_Khan Khanan_, and a few others. Sultan Parvis here represents the king
+his father, living in great state and magnificence, but Khan Khanan, who
+is the greatest subject of the empire, is at the head of a large army,
+in which are 40,000 horse, and governs every thing, the prince only
+having the name and pomp allowed him.
+
+[Footnote 190: The particulars of the journey in the text amount to 214
+miles.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 191: Perhaps Babaderpore, but it is twelve or fifteen miles
+short of Burhanpoor.--E.]
+
+On the 18th, both to satisfy the prince who desired it, and whom I was
+not willing to displease, and to see the fashions of the court, and
+because it was proposed to establish a factory here, where sword-blades
+were in great request for the army, and sold well, I went to visit the
+prince, to whom, I carried a present. I was conducted by the cutwall,
+and in the outer court of the palace I found about an hundred horsemen
+under arms, who formed a line on each side, being all gentlemen waiting
+to salute the prince on his coming forth. In the inner court the prince
+sat in a high gallery encircling the court, having a canopy over head,
+and a carpet spread before him, appearing in much, yet barbarous state.
+Going towards him through a lane of people, an officer came and told me
+that I must touch the ground with my head, and with my hat off. I
+answered, that I came to do the prince honour by visiting him, and was
+not to be subjected to the custom of slaves. So I walked on till I came
+to a place railed in, just under where he sat, where there was an ascent
+of three steps; and having there made him a reverence, to which he
+answered by bending his body, I went within the rails, where stood all
+the great men then in the town, holding their hands before them like
+slaves. This place, as mentioned before, was covered over head by a rich
+canopy, and all the floor was spread with carpets. It resembled a large
+stage, and the prince sat on high, like a mock king in a theatre.
+
+On entering, as I had no place assigned me, I went right forwards, and
+stood before him at the bottom of the three steps, on which stood his
+secretary, readily to convey to him any thing that is said or given. I
+told him that I was ambassador from the king of England to his father;
+and, while passing his residence, I could not but in honour visit his
+highness. He answered that I was welcome, and asked me many questions
+about the king my master, to which I gave fit answers. While standing in
+that manner at the foot of the steps, I asked leave to come up and stand
+beside him; but he said, even if the king of Persia, or Grand Turk, were
+there, such a thing could not be allowed. To this I replied, that I must
+be excused for believing he would, in such a case, come down and meet
+them at his gate; and that I required no higher privilege than was
+allowed to the ambassadors of these sovereigns, with whom I considered
+myself entirely equal. He declared I should have that privilege in all
+things. I then demanded to have a chair, to which it was answered, that
+no person was ever allowed to sit in that place, but I was desired to
+lean against a pillar covered over with silver, which supported the
+canopy. I then requested his favour for an English factory to be
+established at Burhanpoor, which readily granted, and gave immediate
+orders to the _Buksh_ to draw up a _firmaun_, license, for their coming
+and residence. I also requested an order for carriages for conveying the
+presents for the king his father, which he gave in charge to the cutwall
+to see provided. I then made him a present, which he took in good part.
+After some other conference, he said, though I might not come up to
+where he then sat, he would go to another place, where I might come to
+him with less ceremony. But one part of the present I made him happened
+to be a case of cordials, of which he tasted so freely by the way, that,
+after waiting some time, I heard he had made himself drunk, and one of
+his officers came to me with an excuse, desiring me to go home then, and
+come some other time to see him. But that very night I was taken ill of
+a fever.
+
+The 27th of November, though, still sick, I was carried, from Burhanpoor
+three coss to _Raypora_; the 28th, fifteen c. to _Burgome_, [Burgaw];
+the 30th, seven c. December the 1st, ten c. to _Bicangome_; the 2d,
+seven c. the 3d, five c. the 4th, eleven c. to _Ekbarpoor_, which stands
+on a good river, [the Nerbudda] which runs into the sea near _Buroach_.
+The 5th, I passed the river _Nerbuddah_. The 6th, I travelled eight c.
+and lay in a wood, not far from the king's famous castle of _Mandoa_,
+[Mundu] which stands on a steep hill, of great extent, the walls being
+fourteen c. in circuit, this castle being of wonderous extent and great
+beauty. The 7th, I proceeded ten c. the 8th, eight c. the 9th, ten c.
+the 10th, twelve c. the 11th, sixteen c. the 12th, fourteen c. the 13th,
+six c. the 14th we halted to take rest. The 15th, six c. the 16th, six
+c. the 17th, twelve c. the 18th, five c. when we arrived at _Cytor_,
+where I was met by Mr Edwards accompanied by Thomas Coryat, who had
+travelled to India on foot.
+
+_Cytor_, [Chitore] is an ancient town in ruins, situated on a hill, but
+shews the remains of wonderful magnificence. There are still standing
+above an hundred temples, all of carved stone, with many fair towers and
+domes, supported by many enriched pillars, and innumerable houses, but
+not a single inhabitant. The hill, or rock rather, is precipitous on all
+sides, having but one ascent cut out of the rock in a regular slope; in
+which ascent there are four several gates before reaching the gate of
+the city, which last is extremely magnificent. The top of the hill,
+about eight coss in circuit, is inclosed all round with walls, and at
+the S.W. end, is a goodly old castle. I lodged close by a poor village
+at the foot of the hill.
+
+This city stands in the country of the _Rama_,[192] a prince newly
+subdued by the Mogul, or rather brought to submit to pay tribute and
+acknowledge subjection; and _Cytor_ was reduced by _Akbar Shah_, the
+father of _Shah Jehan-Guire_, the present king of the Moguls. This
+Hindoo raja is lineally descended from _Porus_, the valiant Indian
+sovereign who was conquered by Alexander the Great; so that I suppose
+this city to have been one of the ancient seats of Porus, though Delly,
+much farther north, is reported to have been the chiefest, a famous
+place, though now only in ruins. Near that stands a pillar erected by
+Alexander the Conqueror, with a Greek inscription. The present Mogul and
+his ancestors, descendants of Tamerlane, have reduced all the ancient
+cities to ruin, dispeopling them and forbidding their restoration; I
+know not wherefore, unless that they would have no monuments of
+greatness remain, beyond their own commencement, as if they and the
+world were co-equals in antiquity.
+
+[Footnote 192: This is probably an error of the press in the Pilgrims
+for the _Ranna_.--E.]
+
+The 19th I proceeded twelve c. on my journey; the 20th ten c. the 21st
+ten c. the 22d nine c. the 23d ten c. and arrived at _Ajimere_. The
+first six days journeys from Burhanpoor towards Ajimere were west, or
+northwest, to get round the hills; but after that northwards, so that
+these two places bear nearly N. by W. and S. by E. from each other: the
+whole distance being 209 cosses,[193] which I judge to be 418 English
+miles; the cosses here being longer than near the sea.[194] On my
+arrival at Ajimere I was so ill as to keep my bed; but on the 10th
+January, 1616, at four in the afternoon, I went to the _Durbar_, which
+is the place where the Mogul sits in public daily to entertain
+strangers, to receive petitions and presents, to issue commands, and to
+see and be seen. Before proceeding to give an account of my reception,
+it may be proper to digress a little, that I may give some account of
+the customs of the court.
+
+[Footnote 193: The particulars in the text only amount to 200 cosses;
+but the extent of one day's journey is omitted, which may explain the
+difference.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 194: The coss at Surat is repeatedly explained, in Purchas and
+Churchill, to be 1-1/2 English mile, while that of Hindoostan Proper is
+rated at two miles.--E.]
+
+No men, except eunuchs, are permitted to come within the private
+lodgings or retiring rooms of the royal palace, within which his women
+keep guard with warlike weapons, and there likewise they execute justice
+upon each other for offences. Every morning, the Mogul comes to a
+window, called the _jarneo_,[195] which looks into the plain or open
+space before the palace-gate, where he shews himself to the common
+people. At noon he returns to the same place, where he sits some hours,
+amusing himself with seeing fights of elephants and other wild beasts,
+the men of rank then at court attending below within a railed space. He
+then retires to sleep within the female apartments. In the afternoon he
+comes to the before-mentioned Durbar. At eight in the evening, after
+supper, he comes down to a fair court, called the _guzalcan_, in the
+midst of which is a throne of freestone, on which he sits, yet
+sometimes below in a chair of state, at which time only men of high
+quality are admitted into the presence, and even of these only a few
+have that privilege, unless by special leave. He here discourses very
+affably on all subjects with those around him. No business is transacted
+with him, concerning affairs of state and government, or respecting war
+and peace, but at one or other of these two last-mentioned places,
+where, after being publicly propounded and resolved upon, it is
+registered by attendant secretaries, and any one, who has the curiosity,
+may see the register for two shillings; insomuch that the common people
+know as much of the affairs of state as the ministers and counsellors of
+the king, and every day the king's acts and resolutions are circulated
+as news, and are freely canvassed and censured by every rascal. This
+course of proceeding is unchangeable, except when prevented by the
+sickness of the king, or in consequence of his getting drunk, which must
+always be known. Thus, though all his subjects are slaves, he lives in a
+state of reciprocal bondage, being so tied to the observance of these
+hours and customs, that if he were unseen one day, and no sufficient
+excuse given, the people would mutiny; and no excuse will sanction his
+absence for two days, unless the gates are opened, and he be seen by
+some for the satisfaction of the rest. Every Tuesday, he sits in
+judgement at the _jarneo_,[196] where he attends to the complaints of
+his meanest subjects, listening patiently to both parties; and where
+likewise he sometimes sees, with too much delight in blood, execution
+performed on offenders by his elephants. _Illi meruere, sed quid tu ut
+adesses_?
+
+[Footnote 195: in subsequent passages, this is called the Jarruco.--E.]
+
+Before going to the durbar, I had required to be allowed the customs of
+my own country, which were freely granted. At the durbar, I was led
+directly before the king, at the entrance of an outer rail, where two
+noble slaves came to conduct me nearer. On entering the outer rail, I
+made a profound reverence, at my entry within an interior rail I made a
+second reverence, and a third when I came directly under where the king
+sat. The place in which the durbar is held is a great court, to which
+all sorts of people resort. The king sits in a small raised gallery;
+ambassadors, great men belonging to the court, and strangers of quality,
+are within the innermost rail directly under him, that space being
+raised from the ground, covered overhead with canopies of silk and
+velvet, and laid underfoot with good carpets. The meaner men,
+representing what we would call gentry, are within the outer rail; the
+common people being on the outside of all, in a base court, so that all
+may see the king. The whole of this disposition hath much resemblance to
+theatrical representation. The king sitting as in a gallery, the great
+men raised as actors on a stage, and the vulgar below in a pit gazing at
+the show. The king, on my presentation, interrupted the dull formality
+of my interpreter, bidding me welcome to the brother of the king my
+master. I then delivered a translation of the king's letter, and then my
+commission, on both of which he looked curiously; and afterwards on my
+presents, which were well received. He asked some questions; and, with a
+seeming regard for my health, offered to send me his own physicians,
+advising me to keep the house till I recovered strength, and that I
+should freely send to him in the meantime for any thing I needed, with
+assurance that I should have whatever I desired. He dismissed me with
+more signs of grace and favour, if I were not flattered by the
+Christians, than ever were shewn to any ambassador from the Turks or
+Persians or any other nation.
+
+[Footnote 196: This place, formerly described as a window looking to the
+esplanade in front of the palace, called _jarneo_ in Purchas, is called
+_jarruco_ in Churchill.--E.]
+
+On the 14th I sent to offer a visit to Sultan _Churrum_,[197] the third
+son of the Great Mogul, but first in favour. Hearing that he was an
+enemy to all Christians, I therefore feared some affront; yet he sent me
+word that I should be received with all due respect, and should have as
+much content as I had already from his father. This prince is lord of
+Surat, our chief residence in the empire, and his favour, therefore, was
+important for our affairs. I went accordingly to visit him on the 22d at
+nine in the morning, at which time he sits in public, in the same manner
+as his father, to dispatch his business, and to be seen of his
+followers. His character was represented to me as naturally proud, so
+that I was in some fear for my reception; but, on hearing of my arrival,
+instead of coming out to his public durbar, he sent one of his principal
+officers to conduct me into a good inner room, never before done to any
+one. The officer here entertained me with discourse concerning my
+mission for half an hour, till the prince was ready; who now came forth
+and used me better than his promise. I delivered him a present, but not
+in the name of his majesty, as it was too mean for that purpose; but
+excused the omission, by saying, That my sovereign could not know of his
+being lord of Surat, which had been so lately conferred upon him; but I
+had no doubt the king of England would afterwards send him one more
+suited to his high rank, the one now presented being only sent by the
+English merchants, who humbly commended themselves to his favour and
+protection. He received all in very good part. After stating some
+grievances and injuries suffered by the English at Surat, from his
+governors, and of which I had forborne to complain to the king from
+respect to him, he promised me speedy and effectual justice, and to
+confirm our security in any way I might propose. He professed to be
+entirely ignorant of any past transactions there, as stated by me,
+except as informed by Asaph Khan; and especially denied having given any
+order for our dismissal, which the governor had falsely alleged, and for
+which he should dearly pay. He then dismissed me, full of hopes to have
+our decayed state and reputation rectified, making me a promise of an
+effectual firmaun for our trade and secure residence at Surat.
+
+[Footnote 197: In the Pilgrims, this prince is uniformly named Corone;
+but the name in the text has been adopted from the authority of Dow's
+History of Hindoostan. He succeeded to his father in 1627, when he
+assumed the name of Shah Jehan; and was, in 1659, dethroned and
+imprisoned, by his third son, the celebrated Aurungzebe, who assumed the
+name of Alumguire.--E.]
+
+The 24th, I went again to the royal durbar to visit the king; who, on
+seeing me far off, beckoned with his hand, that I should not wait the
+ceremony of asking leave, but come up to him directly, and assigned me a
+place near himself, above all other men, which I afterwards thought fit
+to maintain. On this occasion I gave a small present; as it is the
+custom for all who have any business to give something, and those who
+cannot get near enough to speak, send in or hold up their gift, which he
+always accepts, be it only a rupee, and demands to know their business.
+He held the same course with me; for having looked curiously at my
+present, and asked many questions respecting it, he demanded to know
+what I wanted of him. I answered that I wanted justice. For, on the
+assurance of his firmaun, which had been sent to England, the king my
+master had not only given leave to his subjects to make a long and
+dangerous voyage to his dominions with their goods, but had deputed me,
+as his ambassador and representative, to congratulate and compliment his
+majesty on the amity so happily commenced between two so mighty nations,
+and to confirm the same. Yet I found that the English, who were settled
+at Ahmedabad, were injured and oppressed by the governor in their
+persons and goods, being fined, subjected to arbitrary exactions, and
+kept as prisoners; while at every town new customs were demanded for
+their goods on their passage to the port, contrary to all justice, and
+in direct contravention of the formerly conceded articles of trade, as
+contained in his majesty's firmaun. To this he answered, that he was
+sorry to hear of such things, which should be immediately rectified; and
+he gave orders for two firmauns to be immediately extended according to
+my desire. By one of these, the governor of Ahmedabad was commanded to
+restore the money he had exacted from Mr Kerridge, and to use the
+English in future with all favour. By the other, all customs required on
+any pretence by the way were abolished, and all such as had been taken
+was ordered to be restored. Finally, he desired me, if these gave not
+speedy and effectual remedy, that I should renew my complaint against
+the disobeyer, who should be sent for to answer for his conduct; and so
+dismissed me.
+
+The 1st of March, I rode out to see a pleasure-house belonging to the
+king, two miles from Agimere, which had been given him by Asaph Khan. It
+was situated between two vast rocks, by which it was so sheltered that
+scarcely could the sun be any where seen. The foundations and some rooms
+were hewn out of the solid rock, the rest being built of freestone.
+Close adjoining was a handsome small garden, with fine fountains, with
+two great _tanks_ or ponds of water, one being thirty steps higher than
+the other. The way to this retreat is so narrow that only two persons
+could go abreast, and is almost inaccessible, being very steep and
+stony. It is a place of much melancholy, yet of great security and
+delight, abounding in peacocks, turtle-doves, wild fowl, and monkies,
+which inhabit the rocks impending on every side around.
+
+The 2d of March began the feast of _Norsose_ in the evening. This is the
+festival of the new year, the ceremonies of which begin on the first new
+moon after, which this year fell together. It is kept in imitation of
+the Persian feast of that cause, signifying in that language _nine
+days_, as anciently it continued only for that number; but these are now
+doubled. On this occasion, a throne is erected about four feet high in
+the _durbar court_; from the back of which, to the place where the king
+comes out from the inner apartments, a space of fifty-six paces long by
+forty-three broad is railed in, and covered over by _semianes_, or
+canopies, of cloth of gold, velvet, and rich silk, all joined over
+head, and held up by canes covered with similar stuffs. At the upper or
+west end, were set out the pictures of the king of England, the queen,
+the Princess Elizabeth, the Countesses of Somerset and Salisbury, and of
+a citizen's wife of London. Below, there was a picture of Sir Thomas
+Smith, governor of the East India Company. The whole floor was laid with
+rich Persian carpets of large size, and into this place come all the
+great men to wait upon the king, except a few, who were within a smaller
+railed space, right before the throne, appointed to receive his
+commands. Within this square there were set out many small houses, one
+of which was of silver, and other curiosities of value. On the left
+side, Sultan Churrum had a pavilion, the supporters of which were
+covered with silver, as were also some others of those near the king's
+throne. This was of wood and of a square form, inlaid with mother of
+pearl, resting on four pillars covered with cloth of gold; and overhead
+was a fringed drapery like a vallence of network, all of real pearls,
+whence hung down pomegranates, apples, and pears, and other fruits, all
+of gold, but hollow. Within that pavilion, the king sat on cushions,
+very rich in pearls and other jewels. All round the court before the
+throne, the principal men had tents or pavilions, mostly lined with
+velvet, damask, and taffety, and some few with cloth of gold, in which
+they were stationed, making shew of their wealth. Anciently, the kings
+used to go to every tent, taking away whatever pleased him best: But now
+the custom is changed, as the king remains on his throne, and receives
+there such new-year's-gifts as are brought to him. He makes his
+appearance every day, and retires at the usual hours of the durbar; and
+in the interval all sorts of great gifts are made to him, which are very
+great and almost incredible, though not equal to report. At the close of
+this feast, in recompence for these gifts, the king advances some of his
+courtiers, making additions to their charges of horse, according to his
+pleasure.
+
+On the 12th[198] I went to visit the king, and was brought immediately
+before him to deliver my present, which gave him much satisfaction. He
+then appointed me to come within the rail, that I might stand beside
+him; but not being allowed to step up on the raised platform on which
+the throne was placed, I could see little, as the railing was high, and
+covered with carpets. But I had permission to view the inner room at
+leisure, which, I must confess, was very rich; but consisted of so many
+articles, all unsuitable to each other, that it seemed patched work,
+rather than magnificent, as if it aimed to shew all; as if a lady, among
+her plate on a magnificent cupboard, should exhibit her embroidered
+slippers. This evening, the son of the Raima, the new tributary formerly
+mentioned, was brought before the king, with much ceremony, being sent
+by his father with a present. After kneeling three times, and knocking
+his forehead on the ground, he was brought within the inner rail, when
+the king embraced his head. His gift was an Indian tray or voider full
+of silver, upon which was a carved silver dish full of gold. He was then
+conducted to pay his respects to the prince. This evening, some
+elephants were shewn, and some music girls sang and danced.--_Sic
+transit gloria mundi_.
+
+[Footnote 198: It may be proper to observe, that Churchill's edition
+gives the commencement of this festival on the 11th, and says Sir Thomas
+went to the durbar next day.--E.]
+
+The 13th at night, I went again to wait upon the king at the _Guzalcan_,
+at which is the best opportunity for transacting business, and took with
+me my Italian interpreter, determined to walk no longer in darkness, but
+to prove the king, as I had hitherto been delayed and refused on all
+hands. I was sent for in, along with my old broker, but my Italian was
+kept out, because Asaph Khan mistrusted I might say more than he was
+willing should come to the king's ears. On coming to the king, he
+appointed me a place to stand just before him, and sent to ask me many
+questions respecting the king of England, and about the present I had
+made him the day before. To some of these I made answers; but I at
+length said, that my interpreter was kept out, and as I could not speak
+Portuguese, I wanted the means of satisfying his majesty. On this,
+though much against the wish or Asaph Khan, my Italian interpreter was
+called in. I then made him tell the king that I requested leave to speak
+to him, to which he answered, willingly. On this, the son-in-law of
+Asaph Khan pulled away my interpreter by force, and that faction so
+hemmed in the king, by gathering round him, that I could scarcely see
+his majesty, nor could my Italian approach. Upon this, I ordered the
+Italian to speak aloud, that I craved audience of the king; who
+immediately called me before him, and the others made way. Asaph Khan
+stood on one side of my interpreter, and I on the other: I to inform him
+what to say, and the other to awe him by winks and signs.
+
+I desired him to say, that I had now been two months at court, one of
+which I had spent in sickness and the other in compliments, and had
+effected nothing of all on which I had been sent by the king my master;
+which was to conclude a firm and lasting treaty of peace and amity
+between the two sovereigns, and to establish a fair and secure trade and
+residence for my countrymen in his majesty's dominions. He answered that
+this was already granted. I replied, it was so; but that it still
+depended upon so slender a thread, and such weak conditions, as to be
+very uncertain in its continuance. That an affair of so high importance
+required an agreement dear and explicit in all points, and a more formal
+and authentic confirmation than it now had, by ordinary firmauns, which
+were merely temporary commands, and respected accordingly. He asked me
+what presents we would bring him? To which I answered, the league was
+yet new and weak; that many curiosities were to be found in our country,
+of rare value, which the king of England would send; and that our
+merchants would search for such things in all parts of the world, if
+they were made sure of a quiet trade and secure protection on honourable
+conditions, having been hitherto subjected to manifold wrongs. He asked
+me what kind of curiosities I meant, and whether these were jewels or
+precious stones? To this I answered, that we did not deem such things
+fit to be sent back from Europe to India, of which he was the principal
+sovereign, as they were common here in India, and of much higher price
+with us in Europe: But that we would endeavour to find such things for
+his majesty as were rare and uncommon in his dominions; such as
+excellent specimens of painting, carving, enamelling, figures in brass,
+copper, and stone, rich embroideries, stuffs of gold and silver, and the
+like.
+
+The king said that these things were all very well, but that he wished
+to have an English horse. I answered, that this was utterly impossible
+by sea, and that the Turks would not allow of any being sent by land. In
+reply, he said he thought it not impossible by sea; and, when I
+represented the dangers from storms, he said if six were sent in one
+ship, one of them surely might live, and though it came lean, it might
+be here made fat. I then told him, I feared it could not be done by so
+long a voyage; yet, for his majesty's satisfaction, I should give due
+notice of his desire.
+
+He then asked to know what were my demands? I answered, That his majesty
+would be pleased to sanction by his royal signature, certain reasonable
+conditions which I should propound, in confirmation of a league of
+peace and amity, and for the security of our nation in their residence
+and trade in his dominions; as they had hitherto been often wronged, and
+could not continue on their present terms, of which I forbore to make
+any specific complaint, because I hoped to procure amendment from his
+majesty. At these words, Asaph Khan offered to pull away my interpreter,
+but I held him fast, while Asaph Khan continued to make signs to him not
+to interpret my words. On this the king became suddenly very angry,
+pressing to know who had wronged us, and seemed in such fury, that I was
+unwilling to follow it out, and spoke in broken Spanish to my
+interpreter, desiring him to say, That I would not trouble his majesty
+with what was past, but would seek justice of the prince his son, whose
+favour I doubted not to obtain. Not attending to what my interpreter
+said, but hearing the name of his son, the king mistakingly conceived I
+accused him; and hastily saying _mio filio! mio filio_! he called for
+the prince, who came in great fear, humbling himself. Asaph Khan
+trembled, and all those present were amazed.
+
+He chid the prince roundly, and he excused himself. But as I perceived
+the king's error, I made both the king and prince understand the
+mistake, by means of a Persian prince who offered himself as
+interpreter, as my Italian understood Turkish better than Persian. By
+this means I appeased the king, saying that I in no respect accused the
+prince, but wished to inform his majesty that I should appeal to the
+prince's justice, in regard to the past wrongs our nation had suffered
+in those places which were under his government. The king then commanded
+the prince, that he should give as effective justice. In his
+justification, the prince said that he had already offered me a firmaun,
+which I had refused. The king asked me the reason of this. To which I
+answered, that I humbly thanked the prince, but he knew that it
+contained a condition I could not accept; and besides, that I wished to
+propound our own demands, in which I would insert all the desires of the
+king my master at once, that I might not daily trouble his majesty and
+the prince with complaints. And, when the conditions on both sides were
+mutually agreed upon, I would reciprocally bind my sovereign, to mutual
+offices of friendship, and to such reasonable conditions for the benefit
+of his majesty's subjects as he might propose: All of which being drawn
+up in tripartite, I hoped his majesty would graciously sign one, his son
+the prince another, and I would confirm the third in the name of my
+sovereign, in virtue of my commission.
+
+The king pressed to know what was the condition in the prince's firmaun
+which I had refused, which I stated. So we fell into earnest dispute
+before the king, with some heat. Mukrob Khan interposed, saying he was
+advocate for the Portuguese, and spoke slightingly of us, alleging that
+the king ought to grant no articles to us that were unfavourable for
+them. I answered, that I did not propose any against them, but only in
+our own just defence, and that I had not conceived he was so great a
+friend to the Portuguese. On this the jesuit and all the Portuguese
+faction struck in, so that I explained myself fully concerning them; and
+as I offered a conditional peace, so I valued the friendship of the
+Portuguese at a very low rate, and their enmity at a still lower. After
+some time, having explained my demands, the king said my proposals were
+just and my resolution noble, and bade me clearly propound the
+conditions I desired. Asaph Khan, who had stood silent during all this
+debate, and who now wished to end it, as we were warm, now interposed,
+saying, If we talked all night, it could only come to this at last, that
+I should draw my demands in writing and present them; which, if found
+reasonable, would be granted by the king. The king said he certainly
+would do so; and at my request the prince engaged to do so likewise. The
+king then rose to go away, but on my request he turned round, and I
+desired my interpreter to say, That I came the day before to see his
+majesty and his greatness, and the ceremonies of the feast, on which
+occasion I was placed behind him, in an honourable place certainly, but
+where I could not see around; and therefore humbly requested his majesty
+would be pleased to let me stand on the platform beside his throne. In
+answer to this, he commanded Asaph Khan to let me choose my own place in
+future.
+
+In the morning of the 14th, I sent a messenger to Asaph Khan, lest he or
+the prince might have misunderstood me, by reason of the king's mistake,
+and had supposed I had complained against either of them, which I did
+not, neither did I so intend; yet I was willing to let them see that I
+did not entirely depend upon Asaph Khan, by whom I had hitherto done my
+business with the king; but, if he should continue his manner of only
+delivering to the king what he himself pleased, and not what I said, I
+would find another way. My message was intended to clear up any such
+doubts, if they remained, and to entreat he would move the prince to
+favour my demands respecting our residence and trade at Surat. His
+answer was, that neither the prince nor he had any reason to suspect I
+intended to complain against them, the error being sufficiently obvious;
+and that, for his part, he had ever been disposed to favour the English,
+and would so continue.
+
+The 15th I went again in the evening to see the ceremonies of the
+_Norose_; and according to the Mogul's order, I chose my place of
+standing on his right hand, and on the raised platform, the prince and
+the son of the Ranna standing on the other side. I here had a full view
+of every thing that was to be seen; viz. the presents, and the
+exhibition of the elephants, horses, and dancing girls.
+
+The 23d, the Mogul condemned one of his own nation on suspicion of
+felony; but as he was one of the handsomest men in India, and the proof
+was not very clear against him, instead of condemning him to death, he
+sent him in irons to me as a slave, to be disposed of as I pleased. This
+was looked upon as a great favour, and I accordingly returned thanks;
+yet added, that we had no slaves in England, not thinking it lawful to
+make the image of God like unto a beast, but that I should employ him as
+a servant, and should restore him to liberty if he behaved well. The
+king was well pleased with this message.
+
+I went to the _Guzalcan_ on the 26th, and it delivered in the articles
+which I had drawn up, which were referred to Asaph Khan for his
+consideration and report. Some time after, Asaph Khan sent a message,
+desiring me to remove from the place I occupied near the king, because I
+stood alone, which was not the custom. I refused at the first; but, as
+he still insisted I should rank myself among the nobles, I removed to
+the other side, where the prince and young Ranna were. This still more
+displeased Asaph Khan, who persuaded the prince to complain of me to the
+king, which he did. On hearing their complaint and my answer, that I had
+changed my place by order of Asaph Khan, the Mogul said I had done well,
+and they were wrong to pretend to displace me. So I kept my place in
+quiet. The following is the substance of the articles delivered to the
+Great Mogul, which were delayed and opposed: But the conclusion
+respecting them will be seen hereafter.
+
+_Proposed Articles of Treaty, between the Great Mogul and the King of
+Great Britain_.
+
+1. There shall be perpetual peace and amity between the king of Great
+Britain and his majesty the emperor of India.--2. The subjects of
+England shall have free trade in all the ports of India.--3. The
+governors of all sea ports shall make public proclamation of this
+agreement three several times, upon the arrival of any English
+ships.--4. The English merchants and their servants, shall not be liable
+to search, or to any ill usage.--5. No presents sent to the Mogul shall
+be opened.--6. The goods belonging to the English shall not be stopped
+more than twenty-four-hours at the custom-houses; where they shall only
+be sealed, and sent to the house or factory of the merchants, to be
+there opened and rated within six days afterwards.--7. No governor shall
+take any goods by force, nor unless upon payment at the owner's price;
+neither shall any be taken away under pretence of being for the king's
+service.--8. The English merchants shall not be hindered from selling
+their goods to whom they please, nor from sending them to other
+factories; neither shall they pay any more in this case than has been
+already paid at the port of entry.--9. Whatever goods the English may
+purchase in any part of the dominions of the Mogul, shall be allowed to
+be transmitted to the ports, without any hindrance or molestation, and
+shall pay no other duty than may be agreed upon at the port of
+shipping.--10. No goods already entered at a port shall be again opened,
+the English shewing a certificate of their numbers, qualities, and
+conditions, from the governor or other proper officers of the place
+where they were purchased.--11. No confiscation shall be made of the
+goods or money belonging to any of the English who may die in
+India.--12. No duties shall be demanded for provisions, purchased during
+the stay of English ships at any of the ports.--13. The servants of the
+English merchants, whether English or natives, shall not be punished or
+beaten for doing their duty.--14. The Mogul shall cause any governor or
+officer to be punished for the breach of any of these articles.--15. The
+English ships shall permit all others to pass and repass freely, to and
+from the ports in the dominions of the Mogul, except those of their
+enemies with whom they are at war: And the English, while ashore, shall
+conduct themselves quietly and peaceably, as merchants.--16. The English
+shall yearly furnish the Mogul with all such European rarities, and
+other things, as he may desire, and at reasonable rates.--17. The
+English shall pay duty on their commodities, reasonably rated, at three
+and a half per cent. and two per cent. on rials of eight or money, and
+shall not be liable to any other duty or exaction whatsoever.--18. The
+English shall be ready to assist the Great Mogul against all his
+enemies. And, lastly, The Portuguese shall be admitted to come into this
+peace within six months; or, if they refuse, the English shall be at
+liberty to exercise all hostilities against them.
+
+On the 31st of March, the Great Mogul dined at the house of Asaph Khan,
+all the way from the palace, which was an English mile, being laid under
+foot with silks and velvet sewed together, but rolled up as the king
+passed. It was reported that this feast, and the present made on the
+occasion, cost six lacks of rupees, which amount to £60,000
+sterling.[199]
+
+[Footnote 199: According to Thevenot, a _lack_ contains 100,000 rupees,
+and a rupee is a French crown and five sols. At which rate, the _six
+lacks_ must amount at least to £150,000 sterling.--_Churchill_.
+
+The editor of Churchill's Collection must here have been mistaken the
+French crowns alluded to by Thevenot. The rupees in India are various,
+and consequently differ in their value; but two shillings may be assumed
+as a fair average, in which case the computation in the text is quite
+correct.--E.]
+
+I received intelligence on the 26th April, that the prince had made one
+of his servants ask the king at the durbar wherefore he gave so great
+countenance to the English as to banish the Portuguese from Surat, who
+brought much more profit to the king in rubies, pearls, and other jewels,
+while the English came there only in search of profit, by the sale of
+cloths, swords, knives, and other articles of small value? The king
+acknowledged that this was true, yet could not be mended. By this the
+affections of the prince were made sufficiently manifest, and I had fair
+warning to be on my guard, that I might study to preserve ourselves in
+the good graces of the king, in which only we could be safe. I resolved,
+however, to take no notice of this, except by endeavouring to give the
+prince a better opinion of our nation.
+
+On the 22d of May I went to the king at the durbar, to solicit his
+authority to get back a youth named Jones, who had run away from me to
+an Italian, who protected him to the disgrace of our nation, by using
+the king's name. The king gave me an order for his delivery; but the
+prince, who waited every opportunity to injure us, for the sake of his
+favourite, _Zulphecar Khan_, moved the king in private to send for the
+youth first, to the Guzalcan, which was done. I had newly broken off
+from conferring with the prince, on account of his partiality to
+Zulphecar Khan, and had sent him word that I would no longer refrain
+from stating our grievances to the king in person, which was the cause
+of his enmity towards me. When Jones was brought before the king, being
+instigated by the protection and countenance of the prince, he railed
+against me to my face, with the most virulent malice, beseeching the
+king to save his life; on which the king resolved not to deliver him up
+to me, but to send him as a prisoner to Surat. But the prince, to brave
+me, begged to have him for a servant, as the fellow had renounced his
+country, on which the king did so, in spite of every thing I could
+allege. On this the prince gave him 150 rupees, with the pay of two
+horsemen, and commanded me not to meddle with him.
+
+On the night of the 23d, Jones came and threw himself at my feet, asking
+pardon for his lies and mad behaviour. I told him I would not now keep
+him prisoner, as he was the prince's servant; but I would not give him
+any answer till he had made public reparation for his misbehaviour, as
+far as he could. Accordingly, on the next day, he contrived to get to
+the _Guzalcan_, and there asked pardon of the king for the lies he had
+spoken against me, denying every word he had then spoken, alleging he
+had done so to protect himself against me, whom he had offended, and
+prayed the king to send for me, that he might ask my pardon in public.
+The king was well pleased, but the prince fell into a rage. I went to
+the Guzalcan on the 25th, when the king protested he never believed what
+Jones had said against me, and that he considered him a villain, yet
+could not but protect him, as he had cast himself on his mercy. Jones
+was sent for, and asked my pardon on his knees, declaring on oath to the
+king that he had in every thing belied me, and that he now made this
+declaration in a voluntary manner, as he durst not return to his
+country. The king chid him a little, saying to me that neither he nor
+any good man could believe such a slanderer. The prince grew angry, and
+endeavoured to make Jones stand to what he had said formerly against me;
+and as Jones refused, the prince basely desired him to restore the 150
+rupees he had received for bearing witness against me. Jones promised to
+return the money, for which purpose an under-treasurer was sent along
+with him to the house in which he lodged, as I would not suffer him to
+come to mine.
+
+I was forced to seem content, having no way to seek redress, as I had no
+presents to give, and the king never listens to any request unless well
+backed, and will even demand it in plain terms, of which the prince
+takes advantage, urging that the Portuguese bring rich jewels, rubies,
+and pearls, and treating our English commodities with great scorn. On
+the 29th of May the Portuguese were admitted to the king with a present,
+and to sell a ballass ruby, which was said to weigh thirteen _toles_,
+two and a half of these being equal to an ounce.[200] For this they
+asked five lacks of rupees, but the king only offered one lack. Asaph
+Khan also was an advocate for the Portuguese, who made him a present of
+jewels. They had many rich rubies, ballasses, emeralds, pearls, and
+other jewels, for sale, with which they so much gratified the king and
+his great men, that we were for a time eclipsed. The prince and the
+jesuit fell out about presenting them, which the prince desired, but it
+had been promised before to Asaph Khan. I had formerly judged concerning
+the credit of the Portuguese at court by report, but I now experienced
+the difference between them and us; for they were sought after by all,
+while they only bought our commodities as it were by way of giving us
+charity. Besides, the Portuguese had an advantage over us in consequence
+of their establishments in the neighbourhood, by which they could hinder
+trade into the Red Sea, being always more at hand to do harm than we,
+who are only entertained out of a little fear, while our trade and
+commodities are little cared for.
+
+[Footnote 200: This must be an enormous exaggeration, or error, as in
+this case the ruby would have weighed 5 1-5th ounces.--E.]
+
+§2. _Occurrences in June, July, and August 1616, from which the
+Character and Dispositions of the Mogul and his Subjects may be
+observed_.
+
+The 12th of June a resolution was taken that Sultan Churrum should go to
+the wars in the Deccan, and a day was fixed for his setting out on his
+journey, for which all the Bramins were consulted. On this occasion it
+is reported that Sultan _Parvis_, who is to be recalled, wrote to his
+father the Mogul, that if his elder brother were sent to assume the
+command, he would readily obey; but, if dishonoured by sending this his
+younger brother, he, in the first place, would fall upon him, and would
+afterwards finish the Deccan war. All the captains, such as Khan-Khanan,
+Mahomed Khan, Khan Jeban, and others, refuse to serve under the command
+of Sultan Churrum, who is reputed a tyrant, of whom all men are in
+greater awe than of the king, more especially now that he is to have the
+command of the army. Yet the king cannot be persuaded to change his
+resolution, so that the departure of the prince, with his favourite
+Zulphecar Khan is determined to take place at the distance of twenty-two
+days; wherefore I must make haste to finish my business, as after his
+departure with his minion, Zulphecar Khan, I shall have no chance to
+recover a single penny, nor to get any justice against him.
+
+The 18th, the king commanded one of his brother's sons, who had been
+made a Christian out of policy, to bring him into hatred of the people,
+to touch a lion on the head which was brought in before the king. But he
+refused it, being afraid, on which the king desired his youngest son to
+touch the lion, which he did, without receiving any harm. On this the
+king commanded his nephew to be taken to prison, whence he is never
+likely again to be released.
+
+On the 24th a son was born to Sultan Churrum, and being now preparing to
+set out for the Deccan wars, all men's eyes are upon him, either for
+flattery, gain, or envy, none for love. He has received twenty lacks of
+rupees, equal to £200,000 sterling, towards his expences, and begins to
+act with more than his usual liberality. Notwithstanding this shew of
+his father's affection, a khan at court endeavoured to persuade the king
+that this expedition would be productive of danger, as prince Parvis,
+whose honour would be thereby wounded, would certainly not submit
+without revenge. To this the king answered, "Let them fight, and he who
+proves the better captain, shall pursue the war."
+
+The 25th I had an audience of the king, being sent for by Asaph Khan,
+and was received by his majesty with much courtesy. This Asaph Khan was
+much in the prince's favour, wherefore I was unwilling to disoblige him,
+though he had given me several provocations. At this time Mukrob Khan,
+another of the great men, made me offers of service, being of a contrary
+faction to Asaph Khan, but I thought it best to endeavour to make
+friends of them both. Among other subjects of discourse, Mukrob told me
+that the English brought too much cloth and broad-sword blades for sale
+to India, and hardly any thing else, wherefore he advised they should
+forbear for two or three years, and rather bring the curiosities of
+China and Japan, which would be more acceptable, and to bring from
+England the best cloth of gold, and the richest silks wrought with gold
+and silver, and above all things, large quantities of Arras hangings.
+
+The 30th I visited Abdalla Hassan, having need of his friendship; and,
+what is rare in this country, he refused to accept of any present.
+Abdalla is captain over all the soldiers maintained at court, and
+treasurer of all the armies. He entertained me with great civility, and
+few compliments, and made me sit beside him to see the soldiers shoot at
+marks with their bows and firelocks. Most of them hit the mark with a
+single bullet, being about the size of a hand, affixed to a butt. We had
+some discourse together about the manner of using weapons in Europe,
+after which I took my leave and departed.
+
+Most of July passed in soliciting the prince to sign the articles I had
+presented to the king, as mentioned before. On the 13th I sent him three
+bottles of Alicant, and a letter concerning the difference between us
+and the Portuguese about trade, offering to take all the customs to
+farm, both inwards and outwards, for the use of the company. The prince,
+according to his usual barbarous custom of transacting all business in
+public, caused my letter to be twice read over to him by his secretary,
+often interrupting him with discourse, and sent word that he would read
+it again at night and consider its contents, and that I should have his
+answer through _Mirza Sorocalla_.
+
+That night I went to the durbar to visit the king, who, as soon as I
+came in, sent Asaph Khan to say that he heard I had an excellent painter
+in my house, and that he wished to see some of his work. I replied,
+there was only a young man, a merchant, who drew some figures for his
+amusement, in a very ordinary manner, with a pen, but which were far
+from having any claim as paintings. The king said I need not fear his
+taking any man from me by force, as he would neither do me any injury
+himself, nor suffer any to be done me by others, and desired he might
+see the young man and his work. I answered, I had no fears of injury
+from his majesty, and, for his satisfaction, should bring the young man
+to the Guzalcan with such drawings as he might have, which were probably
+figures of elephants, deer, or the like. On this the king bowed his
+head, saying, if I desired to have an elephant, or any other thing in
+his country, I had only to let him know freely what I wished, and he
+would give it me, for he was my friend. I made a low reverence, humbly
+thanking his majesty, and said that elephants were of no use to me,
+neither was it the custom of any person of our nation, especially of my
+rank, to ask any thing: Yet, if his majesty were pleased to give me even
+the value of a rupee, I should thankfully accept it as a mark of his
+favour. He answered, that he knew not what I might wish for, but there
+were many things in his country rare in mine, and desired I might not be
+dainty, but speak to him freely, and he would give me such things as
+were most acceptable. He then desired me to be merry, for he was the
+friend of our nation and of me, and should take care we had no injury
+done to us. He then desired me to attend that night at the Guzalcan, and
+to bring with me the young man who painted pictures. Then Asaph Khan
+wished me to send for him to come to his house, where also he invited me
+to go till the time when the king came out again, assuring me I should
+be welcome, which I agreed to. I had never before been so graciously
+treated by the king as now, which all the great men took notice of, and
+accordingly altered their deportment towards me. It so happened that the
+jesuit acted as my interpreter on this occasion, by the king's
+appointment.
+
+I went from the durbar to the house of Asaph Khan, according to
+invitation, and continued there till the king came out again, when I was
+conducted back, accompanied by Mr Hughes, the supposed painter, with
+whom the king had some discourse. After this, I shewed the king a
+curious picture I had of a friend of mine, which pleased him much, and
+he shewed it to all his company. The king sent for his chief painter,
+who pretended he could make as good, which I denied, on which a wager of
+a horse was made between Asaph Khan and me in the king's presence, and
+to please him, but Asaph afterwards retracted. After this, the Mogul
+fell to drinking some Alicant wine which I had presented him, giving
+some of it to those about him, and then sent for a full bottle, and
+drinking a cup, sent it to me, saying it soured so fast it would be
+spoiled before he could drink it, and I had none. This done, he turned
+him to sleep, when all the candles were put out, and I had to grope my
+way out in the dark.
+
+This day, a gentlewoman attendant upon _Noor-mahal_ was taken in the
+king's house in some improper act with an eunuch, when another animal of
+the same kind, who loved her, slew her paramour. The poor woman was set
+up to the arm-pits in the ground, with the earth hard rammed around her,
+being condemned to remain there three days and two nights in that
+situation, without sustenance, her head and arms exposed to the violence
+of the sun. If she survived, she was then to be pardoned. The eunuch was
+condemned to the elephants. This damsel was found to be worth, in
+pearls, jewels, and money, sixteen lack of rupees.[201]
+
+[Footnote 201: In Purchas this sum is rated in words at sixteen hundred
+thousand, while in Churchill it is only in figures 160,000.--E.]
+
+On the 22d, I had letters from Burbanpoor in answer to those I had
+written to Mohabet Khan, who granted my desire of a firmaun in favour of
+our nation, granting them a house near the governor's, strictly
+commanding that no person should molest them by sea or land, neither to
+exact from them any customs, or to give them trouble on any pretence,
+with entire liberty to buy, sell, and transport any commodities at their
+pleasure, without let or hindrance. I received this in a letter from
+himself, full of civility and kindness, far exceeding any I had hitherto
+met with in India, protesting the highest respect, and his earnest wish
+to give me every content in whatever I might desire. I caused this
+firmaun to be immediately sent to Surat, so that Broach is now provided
+as a good retreat from the prince's injuries, and the customs given up,
+by which £1500 a-year will be saved, besides all manner of searches and
+extortions. No person doubts the performance of this firmaun, as Mohabet
+Khan careth not for the prince, and feareth no man, neither needeth he
+any person's favour, being much beloved of the king, and reckoned the
+second man in the empire. He has all his life been liberal of his purse,
+and honourable in his word, so that he has the good report of all men.
+In regard to the customs on trade, as the king takes none, and the
+governors convert them to their own profit, he professes to scorn
+abusing the liberties of the king's ports.
+
+On the 6th of August I was sent for to the durbar, where I had much talk
+with the king, who asked me many questions to satisfy his curiosity, and
+desired me to come to the Guzalcan at night, when I should see my
+picture so exactly copied, that I should not know the copy from the
+original. He asked me what reward I would give the painter who had made
+the copy so like, to which I answered, I would give fifty rupees, a
+painter's reward. To which the king replied, that his painter was a
+gentleman, and my proffered reward was too small. I said, that I gave
+the picture willingly, esteeming it rare, and had no inclination to make
+comparisons or wagers; and that, if his majesty's servant had performed
+well, and would not accept my gift, his majesty was most fit to reward
+him. So, after many merry jests, and brags of the arts in his dominions,
+his majesty asked me how often I drank in the day, and how much, and
+what we drank in England. Mentioning beer, he asked what beer was, how
+it was made, and whether I could make it here in India. To all of which
+serious state questions I answered to his satisfaction.
+
+He sent for me again at night, being impatient to triumph in the skilful
+execution of his painter, and shewed me six pictures, all pasted on one
+board, one being my own, and the other five done by his artist, and all
+so like, that by candle-light I was at some loss to determine which was
+which, being greatly beyond my expectation. At length, by closer
+inspection, I pointed out my own, and explained the differences between
+it and the copies, which were not apparent to an inexperienced eye. The
+king was much pleased that I had not seen the difference at first sight,
+for which he was full of mirth, and exulted over me. I gave him way, and
+satisfied him much by praising his painter, saying, that I saw his
+majesty needed no pictures from our country. He then asked me what
+reward I would give his painter? To which I answered, I would double my
+former offer, and if he came to my house, would give him an hundred
+rupees to buy a nag. The king took this kindly, but said his painter
+would not accept money, but some other gifts which I had before
+promised. I said this was referable to my own discretion. To which he
+answered, that this was true, yet he wished I would name it. To this I
+said, I would give him a good sword, a pistol, and a picture. "Then,"
+said the king, "you confess he is a good workman, send for him to your
+house, and shew him such rarities as you have, and let him choose one,
+in return for which you shall have any one of these pictures you please,
+that you may shew in England we are not so unskilful as you supposed."
+He then pressed me to make a choice, which I did, and which the king
+wrapped in paper, and placed in a little book of mine, expressing much
+exultation at the supposed victory of his painter. I then shewed him a
+picture I had of his majesty, far inferior to the work I now saw, saying
+I had judged from it, supposing it among the best. When told where I got
+it, he asked why I bought any such thing? "Have not I the best, and have
+not I told you that I would give you any thing you desired?" I thanked
+his majesty, but said I held it impertinent for me to trouble him in
+trifles, especially as a beggar. To this he replied, that it was no
+shame to ask from him, and desired me to speak freely at all times, and
+pressed me to ask for something. To this I answered, that I would not
+make choice of any gift, as whatever he was pleased to give, I would
+joyfully accept as a mark of honour. He then said, if you desire my
+picture, I will either give you one for yourself or for your king. To
+this I answered, that if his majesty thought proper to send one to my
+king, I would gladly carry it, and knew that my sovereign would esteem
+it much, and take it as a mark of friendship; but, as his majesty had
+emboldened me by his gracious condescension, I would humbly ask one for
+myself, which I would keep and leave to my posterity, as a memorial of
+his majesty's favour. He answered, as my king did not desire one, but I
+did, I should have one, and so gave immediate order for its making. He
+then turned himself to sleep, and we had to go out as before, in the
+dark.
+
+The 9th of August a band of an hundred robbers were brought in chains
+before the Great Mogul, together with their accusation. Without any
+ceremony of trial, he ordered them to be carried away for execution,
+their chief being ordered to be torn in pieces by dogs, and all the rest
+to be put to death in the ordinary manner. The prisoners were divided
+into portions, sent for execution to several quarters of the city, and
+executed in the streets. Close by my house, the chief was torn in pieces
+by twelve dogs, and thirteen of his fellows, having their hands and
+feet tied together, had their necks cut by a sword, yet not quite
+through, and their naked and bloody bodies were left to corrupt in the
+street, to the annoyance of the whole neighbourhood.
+
+On the 10th, 11th, and 12th, I was occupied at court in giving notice to
+the king and prince that a Dutch ship lay before Surat, and refused to
+give notice of its object till the arrival of a fleet to which it
+belonged, which was expected with the first fair wind. I took advantage
+of this circumstance to make them apprehensive of the designs of the
+Hollanders, and the dangers that might arise from them, all of which was
+well taken. And, being consulted on the subject, I advised not to come
+to a rupture with them, and yet to exclude them from trade.
+
+The last of these days I went to visit _Gemaldin Ussen_,[202] the
+viceroy of _Patan_,[203] and lord of four cities in Bengal, a man of
+seventy years of age, who had often been employed as an ambassador by
+the Mogul, had more understanding and courtesy than all his countrymen,
+was universally esteemed for his hospitality and regard to strangers,
+and was considered as entirely free from secret ambition. He had often
+invited me to his house, to which I went this day, and was received with
+extraordinary kindness and friendship. He even offered me a lack of
+rupees, and such other demonstrations of courtesy, as bespoke their own
+refusal. He offered me likewise his credit and favour with the king, and
+his best advice in every emergence; indeed, omitting nothing that could
+evince his desire to serve me. All this seemed cordially to proceed from
+the heart, especially from a person of his years and experience; and, in
+the course of our conversation, he spoke so plainly of many of the chief
+men about the court, which, from my own experience, I knew for truth,
+that I was satisfied he was a true-hearted and well-disposed old man. He
+gave me much information respecting the customs of this empire, their
+want of laws, their servitude, the increase of the empire, and many
+other things, having served in grace and favour under three successive
+kings. He shewed me a book containing the annals of all memorable
+actions in his time, which he daily committed to record, and offered me
+a copy if I would procure it to be translated. This also treated
+concerning the king's revenue, and the manner in which it was raised,
+besides confiscations, gifts, and deductions upon the great men. He
+shewed me that the government of every province paid yearly a certain
+rent to the king. Thus, for his government of Patna, he gave yearly to
+the king eleven lacks of rupees;[204] all other profits of the
+government being his own, he having entire power and authority to take
+what he thought fit. His government was estimated at 5000 horse, the pay
+of each being 200 rupees yearly, of which he only kept 1500 on foot,
+being allowed the surplus as dead pay. Besides which, he had a daily
+pension of 1000 rupees, and enjoyed some smaller governments. Yet he
+assured me that several of the great lords had double the emoluments he
+enjoyed, and that there were above twenty equal to himself.
+
+[Footnote 202: This name does not appear rightly reported, yet we have
+no means of correcting its orthography, neither is it of much
+importance. Perhaps it may have been Jemal-ul-dien Ussan Khan.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 203: This is probably a mistake for Patna in Bengal, and he
+may have been Nabob, or Nawab, perhaps Soubah of Bengal.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 204: Eleven lack, or 1,100,000 rupees, on the computation
+formerly assigned, are equal to £110,000. In the Pilgrims, at this
+place, the rupee is said to equal 2s. 2d, which would add £9166:12:4 to
+that sum.--E.]
+
+In the course of our conversation, this lord praised the good prophet
+Jesus, and his laws, and was full of much pleasant and profitable
+discourse. Some days after this visit, when I thought his kindness had
+been at an end, he borrowed the king's banqueting-house and
+pleasure-garden, called _Havar Gemall_, a mile from town, on purpose to
+treat me, and earnestly inviting me, I promised to come. He went there
+himself at midnight, carrying his tents and all requisite furniture and
+provisions, and fitted up a place very handsomely, by the side of the
+tank, for the entertainment. I went there in the morning, and on my
+arrival he came to meet me with extraordinary civility, carrying me into
+the pavilion he had prepared, where he had some company, among whom were
+two of his sons, of whom he had thirty in all. He had likewise an
+hundred servants attending. To amuse me, he carried me to see the king's
+little closets and retiring rooms, which were painted in the antique
+manner, having pictures of some of the French kings, and other Christian
+princes, on several of the pannels. He said he was only a poor servant
+of the king, yet wished I might have some content, and had therefore
+invited me to a slight banquet, that we might eat bread and salt
+together, to seal a friendship which he entreated me to accept. There
+were many great men, he alleged, who were better able to shew me
+kindness, but were proud and false-hearted, and he wished me therefore
+to trust none of them. For, if I had any business to transact concerning
+the Portuguese or any other, they who acted as my interpreters would
+never deliver the truth, but only what pleased themselves, or would give
+satisfaction in the relation. That, therefore, I should never be rightly
+understood, nor be able to effect my business without being abused and
+cheated, nor ever clearly know the situation in which I stood, until I
+had an Englishman who could speak Persian, who was able rightly to
+deliver what I wished to have said, without using any other person. And,
+if I could find any such, the king would readily grant me leave to
+employ him, having conceived a good opinion of me; insomuch, that the
+preceding night, at the Guzalcan, when the jewels of _Sheik Ferid_,
+governor of Lahore, who was lately deceased, were presented to him, he
+remembered me of his own accord, and seeing a picture of himself which
+pleased him, he delivered it to Asaph Khan, commanding him to send it to
+me, that I might wear it for his sake, with many words of favour
+concerning me, which would make all the great men respect me.
+
+While thus conversing, dinner was served. So sitting down on a carpet, a
+cloth was spread, divers kinds of banqueting dishes were set before us.
+The like was done a little on one side for the gentlemen of his company,
+with whom he went to eat, as they hold it a kind of uncleanness to
+mingle with us. Upon this, I told him that he had promised we should eat
+bread and salt together, and without his company I felt little appetite,
+whereupon he arose from the rest, and sat down beside me, and we fell
+heartily to our repast. It consisted of various kinds of dishes,
+together with raisins, almonds, pistachio nuts, and various fruits.
+After dinner, he played at chess, and I walked about, and after some
+time spent in discourse, I offered to take my leave. But he said he had
+invited me to eat with him, and hitherto we had only had a collation,
+wherefore he entreated I might not depart till we had supped together,
+to which I readily consented.
+
+About an hour after, the ambassador of one of the kings of the Deccan
+came to visit him, whom he presented to me, using him with civility, but
+much inferior to the respect he had shewn me. He afterwards asked me,
+if the king my master would scorn the offer of service from so poor a
+man as he was, and if he would vouchsafe to accept a present from a
+stranger, as he proposed to send a gentleman to England with me to kiss
+the hands of my sovereign, and to see our country. I answered him as
+became me, with all civility; so he sent for one presently, whom he
+questioned if he would venture upon such a journey, and as this person
+seemed willing, he presented him to me, saying he would provide some of
+the curiosities of the country for the king my master, and send them by
+this gentleman along with me. By the manner all this seemed to be in
+earnest.
+
+While we thus spent our time in friendly converse, supper was brought
+in; and, as in the morning, two cloths were spread, one before me and my
+chaplain, with one merchant, on which were set various dishes of roast,
+fried, and boiled meats, with rice and sallads. On this occasion my
+honourable entertainer desired me to excuse his company, as it was their
+custom to eat among themselves, and his countrymen might take it ill if
+he did not eat with them; so he and his guests, and I with my
+companions, solaced ourselves with good cheer. The meats were not amiss,
+but the attendance and order were excellent, as the servants were very
+diligent and respectful. After the manner of this country of giving
+presents to invited guests, he made me a present of five cases of
+sugar-candy flavoured with musk, and a loaf of the finest sugar, as
+white as snow, weighing fifty pounds, and requested my acceptance of an
+hundred such against my departure. He then addressed me in these
+terms:--"You refuse these from me, thinking I am poor, but being made in
+my government, it costs me nothing, as it comes to me _gratis_." To this
+I answered, that he had already much too far obliged me, yet would I not
+refuse his kindness when ready to go away. On which he replied, that he
+might not be then provided, and therefore desired I would accept now,
+that he might not lose both his offer and his labour. Thus, calling
+himself my father, and me his son, we took leave of each other, with
+many compliments.
+
+I went to visit the king on the 16th, who, as soon as I came in, called
+to his women, and reached out his own picture set in gold, and hanging
+to a chain of gold wire, with a pendant of foul pearl, which he
+delivered to Asaph Khan, whom I warned not to demand any reverence from
+me on the occasion which I would not willingly perform; as it is the
+custom here, when he bestows any gift, that the receiver kneels down and
+touches the ground with his head; and which ceremony had been exacted
+from the ambassador of Persia. Then Asaph Khan came to me with the
+picture, which I offered to take in my hand, but he made a sign to me,
+to take off my hat and put it about my neck, leading me right before the
+king. Not understanding his purpose, and doubting he might require my
+conformance with the custom of the country, called _sizeda_, I resolved
+rather to forego the present than comply. He made a sign to me to return
+thanks to the king, which I did after the fashion of our country; on
+which some of the officers called for me to make _sizeda_, but the king
+immediately said, No, no, in Persian. So, with many gracious words, I
+returned to my place. You may judge of the king's liberality by this
+mighty gift, which was not in all worth thirty pounds, yet was five
+times the value of such as he usually gives of that kind, and which are
+yet held as a special favour, as all the great men wear the king's
+picture, which yet none may do but those to whom it is given. This
+ordinarily consists of only a small gold medal, not bigger than a
+sixpence, impressed with the king's image, having a short gold chain of
+six inches to fasten it on their turbans; and to which, at their own
+charges, some add precious stones or pearl pendents.
+
+_Gemaldin Ussen_, who had invited me to the _Havaer Gemal_, as before
+mentioned, being newly appointed governor of _Sinde_, came to dine at my
+house on the 19th, accompanied by two of his sons and two other
+gentlemen, and attended by about an hundred servants. He partook of some
+part of the banquet, which had been prepared at my house by a Mahomedan
+cook, but declined eating of any of the dishes which were cooked after
+our English fashion, though he seemed to have a good inclination, being
+influenced by a superstitious notion; yet he desired that four or five
+dishes, of his own choice, might be sent to his own house, being all
+baked meats, dressed in a way he had not before seen, saying he would
+afterwards eat of them in private, which was accordingly done. At this
+entertainment, he offered us a free trade and secure residence at the
+chief town, of Sinde, his new government, and having filled himself with
+my banquet, he took his leave, after receiving a small present from me,
+according to the fashion of the country. This day, Mr Hall, my chaplain,
+died suddenly, to my great grief. He was a man of mild and gentle
+manners, and a most sincere Christian, of unspotted life and
+conversation.
+
+On the 20th and the night before, there fell a vast storm of rain,
+called in this country the _elephant_, owing to which such prodigious
+streams of water flowed into the great tank, the head of which is of
+stone and apparently of great strength, that it gave way in one place,
+causing a sudden alarm that the whole fabric would give way and drown
+all that part of the town in which I dwelt. Insomuch that the prince and
+all his women forsook their house, and my nearest neighbour carried off
+his goods and his wife to the skirts of the hills on his elephants and
+camels. All persons had their horses ready at their doors, that they
+might save their lives by flight in case of necessity. We were in the
+utmost consternation, and sat up till midnight, having no alternative,
+as we thought, but to flee ourselves and abandon all our goods, for it
+was reported that the water would rise three feet higher than the top of
+our house, and carry all away, being only a slight mud building. The
+foot of the tank was level with our dwelling, and the water was of great
+extent and very deep, so that the surface of the water stood
+considerably higher than the top of my house, which stood in a hollow,
+in the very course of the water, and where every ordinary heavy rain
+occasioned such a current at my door as to be for some hours impassable
+by man or horse. But the king caused a sluice to be cut during the
+night, to conduct the water by another course, so that we were freed
+from the extreme danger; yet the excessive rain had washed down a
+considerable part of the walls of my house, and so weakened it by
+breaches in different parts, that I now feared its falling down, as much
+as I had dreaded its being swept away by the flood. It was every where
+so bemired with dirt and water, that I could hardly find a place in
+which to sit or lie dry, and was forced to be at material charges in
+having it repaired. Thus were we every way afflicted, by fires, smoke,
+floods, storms, heats, dust, and flies, and had no season of temperate
+air and quietness.
+
+On the 27th, I received advice from Surat, that the Dutch had obtained
+permission to land their goods, and to secure them in a warehouse at
+that place, carrying on trade till the pleasure of the prince were
+known, and under condition that they should depart at the first warning.
+
+The king went to _Havar Gemal_ on the 29th, whence he employed himself
+in hunting. At that place, a resolution was taken, to remove the court
+to Mundu, a castle near Burhanpoor, where there is no town. At this
+time, Sultan Parvis came from the Deccan wars in disgrace, and arrived
+with his train near Agimere; and the king commanded him to retire to
+Bengal, refusing to admit him into his presence. Having thus dispatched
+him, without the inconvenience dreaded from a meeting between the
+brothers, he now proposed to settle Sultan Churrum in the Deccan wars,
+although all the chief men of the court were averse from this measure;
+on which account, the king feared to send him down, as was formerly
+proposed, and had therefore delayed this measure until Prince Parvis was
+withdrawn, and now meant to establish Churrum by means of his own
+presence at Mundu, in the neighbourhood of the Deccan. If this
+resolution is executed, it will put us to much trouble and expence, as
+we must build a new house both for ourselves and goods, because that
+castle stands on a hill, and has no buildings near it.
+
+The king returned from hunting on the night of the 30th, and about
+eleven o'clock sent me a very large and fat wild boar, desiring to have
+the tusks back, and accompanied by a message, saying it was killed by
+his own hand, and therefore desiring me to be merry, and to eat it with
+good cheer. On this occasion, I desired Jaddow, who brought this message
+from the king, to tell Asaph Khan, that I proposed to visit him next
+day, when I hoped to receive from him a firmaun of the privileges
+granted by the king. Asaph Khan sent me back word, that they would not
+be then ready, but it should be sealed some days after, and that he did
+not wish to see me till he had given me satisfaction.
+
+§3. _Of the Celebration of the King's Birth Day, with other Occurrences
+in September 1616_.
+
+The 2d of September was the birth-day of the Great Mogul, which was
+solemnized with extraordinary festivities. He was then weighed against a
+variety of articles, as jewels, gold, silver, stuffs of gold and silver,
+silk, batter, rice, fruits, and many other things, of each a little, all
+of which is given to the Bramins. On this occasion, the king ordered
+Asaph Khan to send for me; who did so, and appointed me to come to the
+place where the king held his durbar. But the messenger mistook, so that
+I went not in time, and missed the sight. Being there before the king
+came out, he sent for me as soon as he noticed me, and enquired why I
+had not come to see the ceremony of weighing, for which he had given
+order. I explained the reason, as it actually was, on which he chid
+Asaph Khan publicly for the omission. He was at this time so richly
+ornamented with jewels, that I must confess I never saw at any one time
+such unspeakable wealth. He now amused himself in seeing his greatest
+elephants brought in before him. Some of these were lord-elephants,
+having their chains, bells, and furniture all of gold and silver, being
+attended by many gilt flags and streamers, and each having eight or ten
+inferior elephants to wait upon him, clothed in gold, silk, and silver.
+In this way there passed about twelve troops, all very splendidly
+furnished. The first lord-elephant had all the plates on his head and
+breast set with rubies and emeralds, being a beast of most wonderful
+stature and beauty. They all bowed down before the king, making their
+reverences very orderly, and formed as fine a shew of beasts as I had
+ever seen. The keepers of each chief elephant made a present to the
+king. After this was over, the king made me some gracious speeches, and
+went into the interior apartments.
+
+About ten o'clock at night, after I was in bed, the king sent me a
+message, saying he had heard I had a picture which I had not shewn him,
+and desired I would come then to him, bringing the picture with me; and
+if I would not part with it, that he might see it, and have copies taken
+for his wives. I rose and carried the picture with me, and when I came
+to the presence, I found him sitting cross-legged on a little throne,
+his robes all covered over with diamonds, pearls, and rubies. Before him
+stood a golden table, on which were above fifty pieces of gold plate,
+all set with precious stones, some of them being large and of great
+value. His nobles were all around him in their best attire, whom he
+commanded to drink cheerfully of several kinds of wine, which stood
+there in large flaggons.
+
+On my approach he asked for the picture, on which I shewed him two. He
+seemed astonished at one of these, and asked whose it was; to which I
+replied, that it was the portrait of a friend who was dead. He asked if
+I would give it him. I replied, that I valued it more than any thing I
+had, as being the portrait of one I had loved dearly; but if his majesty
+would pardon my attachment to that picture, and accept the other, which
+was French and of excellent work, I would most willingly give it. He
+thanked me, saying it was that only picture which he desired, and which
+he loved as much as I did; and, if I would give it him, he would value
+it more than the richest jewel in his house. I answered that I was not
+so much in love with any thing, but that I would part with it to satisfy
+his majesty, being extremely glad to have any opportunity to serve him,
+and was ready even to present him with my heart, if I could thereby
+demonstrate my affection. He bowed to me, saying he had never before
+seen so much art and beauty, and conjured me to tell him truly if ever
+such a woman had lived. I answered, that there certainly did once live a
+lady whom this portrait resembled in every thing but perfection. He then
+said, that he accepted my readiness to give him what I so valued as a
+great kindness; but would only shew it to his ladies, and cause his own
+painter make five copies, and if I knew my own I should have it back. I
+answered, that I had freely given it, and would be glad of his majesty
+accepting it: But he said he would not keep it, and loved me better for
+putting so much value on the image of my departed friend. He knew, he
+added, that it would be doing me an injury to take it from me, and would
+only have five copies taken, which his wives should wear, and would then
+return me the original with his own hand. In this art of limning or
+painting in water colours, his artists are wonderfully expert. But he
+liked not the other picture, which was painted in oil.
+
+He then told me that this was his birth-day, and all men made merry, and
+asked me therefore if I would drink with them. I said I would willingly
+do whatever he was pleased to command, as I sincerely wished him many
+prosperous days, and that the ceremony of this day might be repeated for
+an hundred years. He asked me what wine I would have, whether that of
+the grape or made wine, and whether strong or weak. I said whatever he
+was pleased to order, hoping he would neither command me to have it too
+strong or in too large quantity. So he called for a gold cupful of
+mingled wine, half of the grape and half artificial, which he sent me by
+one of his nobles, with this message, that I should drink it off twice,
+thrice, four times, or five times, for his sake, and accept the cup and
+appurtenances as a present. On drinking a portion of it, I found it
+stronger than any I had ever tasted, insomuch that it made me sneeze, at
+which he laughed, and called for raisins, almonds, and sliced lemons,
+which he sent me on a gold plate, and desired me to eat and drink what I
+liked, and no more. I then made a reverence for my present, after my own
+manner, though Asaph Khan wanted me to kneel and knock my head upon the
+ground, but the king accepted it in my own way. The cup was of gold, set
+all over with small rubies and turquoises; the cover being likewise
+gold, and set with great rubies, emeralds, and turquoises; and there was
+likewise a suitable dish or salver on which to set the cup. I know not
+the value, because many of the stones are small, and the greater, which
+also are numerous, are not all clean; but there are above two thousand
+stones in all, and the gold weighs about twenty ounces. On giving me
+this splendid present, he sent me word that he esteemed me more than
+ever he had done a Frank, and asked if I were merry in eating the wild
+boar he had sent me, how I had it dressed, what I drank with it, and
+many such compliments; which public shew of his grace and favour did me
+much service in the eyes of all his nobles, who strove to shew me
+respect.
+
+After this, he threw among those that stood below, two chargers of
+rupees, and among us who were round the throne two chargers of hollow
+almonds made of gold and silver mingled; but I would not scramble as did
+his great men, for I saw his son did not take any up. He then
+distributed sashes and girdles of gold tissue to all the musicians and
+servants, and many others. So drinking heartily himself, and commanding
+others to drink, he and his nobles became as jovial as could be, and of
+a thousand humours. But the prince, Asaph Khan, two old men, the former
+king of Candahar, and I, refrained from drinking. When the king was not
+able any longer to hold up his head, he lay down to sleep, and we all
+departed. While going out, I moved Asaph Khan for the dispatch of our
+privileges, assuring him his majesty could give me no present so
+acceptable. I said farther, that I had no doubt it lay in his power to
+dispatch me; but if he did not think proper to do so, or if any other
+hinderance was in my way, I should on the morrow again apply to the
+king. He desired me not to do so, for the king loved me and had given
+orders for dispatching my business, which had been hindered by the
+preparations for this feast; but he would now send it to me with all
+speed, and do me all manner of service.
+
+Seven months had now been vainly spent in soliciting the signing and
+sealing of the articles of amity and commerce, formerly detailed, and I
+had nothing but promises and delays, from day to day, and from week to
+week. Therefore on the 3d September, the English fleet being hourly
+expected to arrive at Surat, I delivered to him a memorial, containing
+the articles I desired to have an order for, that they might be observed
+in the unloading of the ships. These were, 1. That the presents coming
+for the king and prince, should not be opened at the port, but sent up
+to court under the seals of the customhouse officers. 2. That
+curiosities sent for presents to other persons, and for the merchants to
+sell, should also be sent to the court sealed, for the prince to make
+the first choice. 3. That the gross merchandize should be landed,
+reasonably rated, and not detained at the customhouse, but that the
+merchants, on paying the customs, should have full liberty to sell or
+dispose of it as they pleased; and that the ships should be fully
+supplied with provisions, without paying any custom for the same.
+
+On the 4th, Asaph Khan sent me back my articles, after so long
+attendance and so many false promises, some of them altered, and others
+struck out, together with a letter, saying there was no need of any
+articles, as an order from the prince to trade at Surat was quite
+sufficient, he being lord there, and that no grant of trade at Bengal or
+Sinde could ever be allowed. Notwithstanding all this vexation, I durst
+not change my mode of proceeding, or wholly quit the prince and Asaph
+Khan. I therefore drew up other articles, leaving out what seemed
+displeasing in the former, and desired Asaph Khan to put them into form
+and procure them to be sealed, or else to allow me to apply to the king,
+that if he denied me I might leave the country. The substance of these
+new articles was as follows:--1. That all the subjects of the Great
+Mogul should receive the English in a friendly manner, suffering them to
+land their goods peaceably, and to procure provisions for their money
+without paying customs for them.--2. To have liberty, after paying
+customs for their goods, to sell them to any one they pleased, and none
+to force them to sell at an under rate.--3. To have liberty to pass with
+their goods to any part of the empire, without any farther exactions
+than those payable at the port.--4. To have the presents for the Mogul
+and prince sealed without being opened, and sent to the ambassador.--5.
+To have the goods of those that might die freed from confiscation, and
+delivered to the surviving English factors.--And finally, That no injury
+should be offered to any of the English.
+
+On the 8th, Asaph Khan sent me word in plain terms, that absolutely he
+would procure nothing for me sealed, that in any respect concerned the
+government belonging to the prince, and that I must rest satisfied with
+a firmaun or order, signed by the prince, which was quite sufficient,
+and I needed not to apply any more to him. This clearly revealed the
+purpose he had so long intended, that we should be entirely dependent on
+the prince; and I now had just cause to look out for new friends, Asaph
+Khan having forsaken me. He that first took him for our solicitor
+engaged us in all this misery, for he was the known protector of our
+enemies, and a slave to their numerous bribes. I therefore determined to
+try the prince, and to seem entirely dependent upon him. So I went to
+the prince on the 10th, and desired he would grant his firmaun for the
+four articles formerly sent to his secretary, which he threw down to his
+secretary, so that I hoped to be at rest. I received it on the 11th, but
+on reading it over, I found two of the four clauses much altered, and
+one entirely left out; so I returned it, declaring roundly I could not
+accept it, neither would I suffer any goods to be sent ashore. Never was
+any man so distressed with such pride, covetousness, and falsehood.
+
+At night, I rode to visit the prince's secretary, _Mirza Socrolla_, with
+whom I expostulated the business, declaring my resolution to depart. But
+I now found the firmaun quite different than I had been informed, and
+containing all the clauses I had required, though in some phrases rather
+ambiguous in my judgment, which the secretary interpreted favourably,
+declaring it was the prince's intent to satisfy me entirely, and that
+every thing was quite sufficient for our purpose. After urging the
+obscurity of some points, and as he had declared the meaning of the
+prince to me, I requested he would explain them in the same sense to the
+governor of Surat, which he agreed to; and especially gave order that
+the customer should pay for fifty pieces of cloth, which he had bought
+many months before, and wished now to return upon the factors, to their
+extreme loss. At the close of our conference, he expressed the prince's
+desire that we would rely entirely on him, and not cross him in matters
+belonging to his government, by applying to the king, declaring that we
+should so find him a better friend than we expected. Being thus
+satisfied, I was in some hope of success, especially as this man is no
+taker of bribes, and is reputed honest, and pledged his credit that we
+should sustain no loss or injury, every thing being referred to him by
+the prince. So I accepted the firmaun, which, on having it translated, I
+found very effectual and satisfactory.
+
+The 16th, I went to visit the prince, intending to seem entirely
+dependent upon him, till I heard what entertainment our ships were
+likely to meet with. But I found him in much perplexity, fearing the
+coming of Sultan Parvis to court, he being only at the distance of eight
+coss, anxiously desiring leave to kiss his father's hands. The king had
+even granted his desire, but by the influence of Nourmahal, the
+favourite queen, he had revoked the permission, and Sultan Parvis was
+ordered away directly to Bengal.[205] The resolution of the king to
+remove the court from Agimere still continued, but no one knew certainly
+where he intended to go.
+
+[Footnote 205: At this place there is an expression in the Pilgrims,
+coupled with this sentence, which is quite inexplicable. "Yea, although
+the king had fallen down, and taken his mother by the feet, to obtain
+her leave to see her son." We are not sufficiently conversant in the
+secret history of the Zenana of Shah Jehan-guire to explain this; yet
+strongly suspect that this sentence ought to have run thus: Although the
+prince's mother fell at the king's feet to obtain leave to see her
+son.--E.]
+
+§4. _Broils about Abdala Khan and Khan-Khannan: Ambitious projects of
+Sultan Churrum to subvert his eldest Brother: Sea Fight with a
+Portuguese Carrack; and various other Occurrences_.
+
+Several days now passed in soliciting the king and great men, and paying
+my court to them, without any remarkable occurrence; till on the 9th
+October, I had letters from Surat, giving me an account that four
+English ships had arrived there. On the 10th, Abdala Khan, the great
+governor of Ahmedabad, being sent for to court in disgrace, to answer
+for many insolent and contemptuous neglects of the king's commands,
+thought to stand upon his defence and to refuse compliance. But Sultan
+Churrum, whose ambitious views sought to turn every thing to his
+advantage, being desirous to oblige so great a man, who was reckoned one
+of the chiefest captains in the empire, prevailed upon him to submit, on
+his word to protect him. Abdala came therefore, in pretended humility,
+habited as a pilgrim, attended by forty servants on foot, until he
+arrived within a day's journey of the court, having 2000 horse attending
+him at some distance behind. He was this day brought to the _Jarruco_,
+the place where the king sits in public to see sports and hear
+complaints, and advanced towards the king, between two noblemen, having
+chains on his legs, and holding his turban over his eyes, that he might
+see no one till he had the happiness to behold the king. After making
+his humble reverence, and answering a few questions, the king forgave
+him, caused his irons to be taken off, and clothed him in a new vest of
+cloth of gold, with a turban and sash, as is the custom.
+
+The prince, Churrum, now intended to establish his honour and power on
+the Deccan wars, which his elder brother Sultan Parvis had been recalled
+from in disgrace, and which the great commander, Khan-Khannan, had not
+conducted prosperously, being strongly suspected of a secret
+understanding with the princes of the Deccan, from whom he was believed
+to receive pensions. Churrum, therefore, induced his father to recall
+Khan-Khannan, who refused to obey; and wrote to the king, not to send
+Churrum to the war, but one of his youngest sons, then only about
+fifteen. This gave Churrum much uneasiness, as he was exceedingly intent
+upon having the conduct of this war, for which reason he promised to
+give the subordinate command of the army to Abdala Khan, under himself,
+if he could contrive to get Khan-Khannan displaced. Fearing troubles
+from the ambition and factious practices of his son Churrum, the
+discontent of the two elder sons, Cuserou and Parvis, and the power of
+Khan-Khannan, the king was anxious to accommodate matters in the Deccan
+by accepting a peace, and continuing Khan-Khannan in his government; to
+which end he wrote him a letter of favour, and proposed to send him a
+vestment, as a sign of reconciliation, according to custom. Before
+dispatching these, he acquainted a kinswoman of Khan-Khannan, who lived
+in the seraglio, with his purpose. Whether she was false to her
+relation, through the secret influence of Sultan Churrum, or was grieved
+to see the head of her family so unworthily dealt with, who merited so
+highly, does not certainly appear: But she plainly told the king, that
+she did not believe Khan-Khannan would wear any thing the king sent, as
+he knew his majesty hated him, and had once or twice already sent him
+poison, which he had put into his bosom instead of his mouth, and proved
+by trials. For this reason, she was confident Khan-Khannan would not
+dare to put on any thing sent from his majesty. The king offered to
+wear the dress himself in her presence for an hour, which she might
+certify in a letter to her relative. To this she answered, that
+Khan-Khannan would trust neither of them with his life; but, if allowed
+to continue quietly in his command, would do his majesty good service.
+Upon this, the king altered his plans, and resolved to invest Sultan
+Churrum in the supreme command of the Deccan wars, and to follow after
+him with another army, to ensure his reception.
+
+Khan-Khannan, having due notice of the storm preparing against him,
+practised with the Deccan sovereigns, who were at his devotion, to offer
+favourable terms of peace for a season, as he saw no other way of
+averting the cloud that hung over both him and them, unless by
+temporizing till the king and the prince were established farther off.
+For this purpose, there came two ambassadors at this time to court, from
+the princes of the Deccan, bringing horses richly caparisoned as
+presents. The king refused to listen to them, or to accept their gifts,
+and turned them over to his son, saying that peace or war rested
+entirely with him. The prince was so puffed up by this favour, though
+informed that the proposed conditions of peace were highly honourable,
+that he declared proudly he would listen to no terms, till he was in the
+field at the head of the army, being resolved that Khan-Khannan should
+not deprive him of the honour of finishing that war.
+
+The ambitious views of this young prince are quite obvious, and form the
+common talk of the country, yet the king suffers him to proceed,
+although he by no means intends him as his successor. Sultan Cuserou,
+the eldest son, is highly beloved and honoured of all men, and almost
+adored, for his excellent parts and noble dispositions, with which the
+king is well acquainted, and even loves him dearly. But he conceives
+that the liberty of this son would diminish his own glory, and does not
+see that the ambition of Churrum greatly more tarnishes his own fame
+than would the virtuous character and noble actions of the other. Thus
+the king fosters division and emulation among his sons, putting so much
+power into the hands of the younger, which he believes he can undo at
+his pleasure, that the wisest here foresee much fatal division in this
+mighty empire when the present king shall pay the debt of nature,
+expecting that it will then be rent in pieces by civil wars.
+
+The history of this country, for the variety of its incidents, and the
+many crooked practices of the present king during the reign of his
+father, Akbar Shah, and these latter troubles, were well worthy of being
+committed to writing. But, as the country is so remote, many would
+despise such information, and as the people are esteemed barbarous, few
+persons would give it credit. I content myself, therefore, with
+privately contemplating the singular history of this nation, although I
+could narrate so many singular and amusing state intrigues, subtle
+evasions, policies, answers, and adages, as could not be easily equalled
+in the history of one age or country. One incident, however, that
+occurred lately, I cannot omit relating, as it evinces the wisdom and
+patience of the emperor, the incorruptible fidelity of a servant, the
+detestable falsehood of a brother, and the impudent boldness of a
+faction, ready to dare every infamous action, when permitted by the
+supreme ruler to exercise an authority beyond the limits of their
+condition, and contrary to the dictates of reason and true policy.
+
+The favourite Prince Sultan Churrum, together with the favourite Queen
+_Nourmahal_, aunt to his wife, Asaph Khan father-in-law to Churrum, and
+brother of _Nourmahal_, and _Etiman Dowlet_, father of _Asaph Khan_ and
+_Nourmahal_, being the faction that now governed the emperor, and who
+believed their bad influence in danger of being overthrown if the prince
+_Cuserou_ were allowed to live, determined to use every effort for his
+destruction, and to endeavour to get him into their power, that they
+might end his days by poison, for they knew that he was universally
+beloved among the nobles, and that his remaining in life and restoration
+to liberty must some day overthrow and punish their ambitious projects.
+To attain their infamous purposes, Nourmahal was instructed to practise
+upon the king's weakness, by false tears and bewitching blandishments,
+to insinuate that Sultan Cuserou was not in sufficiently safe custody,
+and that he still meditated aspiring projects, contrary to the authority
+and safety of the emperor, who listened to all her insinuations, yet
+refused to understand her, as she did not plainly speak out her meaning.
+
+As this plan failed, the prince, with Etiman Dowlet and Asaph Khan, took
+the opportunity of the emperor being drunk, to persuade him, as if for
+the greater safety and honour of Sultan Cuserou, that it were fitter he
+should be in the company of his brother Churrum, who would be more
+regardful of his safety and happiness than could be expected from an
+idolatrous rajput, to whose custody he had been committed by the
+emperor. They therefore humbly implored his majesty that Prince Cuserou
+might be confided to the care of his dear brother Churrum. This was
+granted by the intoxicated monarch, who immediately fell asleep.
+
+They now deemed their project successful, as having the royal authority;
+and, considering their own greatness, they believed no one would dare to
+dispute the warrant, or to refuse delivering the prince into their
+hands. Accordingly, Asaph Khan went that same night with a guard to the
+house of _Anna-Rah_, a rajput Rajah, or prince, to demand from, him, in
+the king's name and authority, the person of Sultan Cuserou, who had
+been confided to his custody by the king. Anna-Rah declared that he was
+the most humble slave of Prince Churrum, whose name Asaph Khan used upon
+this occasion; but having received charge of Prince Cuserou directly
+from the hands of the emperor, he would deliver him up to no other
+person. He therefore entreated that Prince Churrum would have patience
+till next morning, when he would discharge his duty to the king, whose
+pleasure, once known, he would implicitly obey. This answer overturned
+the whole contrivance. In the morning Anna-Rah went to the king, to whom
+he communicated the demand made upon him in the name of Prince Churrum,
+saying. That his majesty had given his son Cuserou to his charge,
+together with the command of 4000 horse, with all of whom he was ready
+to die at the imperial gate, rather than resign the prince into the
+hands of his enemies: But, if his majesty required, he was ready at all
+times to obey his commands. To this the king replied, "You have done
+honestly and faithfully, and have answered discretely. Continue your
+purpose, and take no notice of any orders. I will not seem to know any
+thing of this, neither do you speak of it any farther. Preserve your
+fidelity, and let us see how far they will prosecute this affair."
+
+Next day, finding the king silent on the subject, the prince and his
+faction took no notice of any thing, hoping the king might forget what
+had passed in his cups over night. I have communicated this incident,
+that you may beware of scattering your goods in this country, or of
+engaging your servants and stock too deeply; for the time will come when
+the whole of this empire will be in commotion, and it is not a few years
+war that will put a period to the inveterate enmity accumulated on all
+hands against a day of vengeance. Should Sultan Cuserou prevail in
+procuring his rightful inheritance, this empire will become a sanctuary
+for Christians, whom he loves and honours, being a patron of learning,
+and an encourager of true valour and just government, abhorring all
+covetousness, and despising the base custom of accepting bribes and
+presents, in use among his ancestors and the nobility of this empire.
+Should Sultan Churrum ascend the throne, it will be a great loss to us,
+as he is a rigid adherent to the superstition of Mahomet, a hater of all
+Christians, proud, subtle, false, and barbarously tyrannical.[206]
+
+[Footnote 206: From this paragraph it appears that the journal of Sir
+Thomas Roe was addressed to the Governor and Committees, or Directors of
+the East India Company.--E.]
+
+The king returned from hunting on the night of the 13th October, and
+sent me a wild pig. An ambassador is daily expected here from Shah
+Abbas, king of Persia. This day I received advice of the arrival of four
+of our ships in safety at Swally roads, and at the same time received
+letters from England. The fleet, originally consisting of six ships,
+left England on the 9th March, 1616, losing company of the Rose about
+the North Cape, in foul weather. The other five arrived safely in
+Saldanha bay on the 12th June, where the Lion was waiting for a wind,
+homewards bound, her officers and people all in good health. After
+staying some time at the Cape without news of the missing ship, they
+dispatched the Swan for Bantam, and sailed on the 29th June with the
+other four ships for Surat. On this passage, on the 6th August, when in
+lat. 12° 50' S. near the Comora islands, they got sight of a carrack of
+1500 tons burden, and 600 men, being the admiral of a fleet for Goa. The
+Globe fetched her to windward, and after the usual salutations of the
+sea, the carrack commanded her to leeward, and seconded this order with
+five shots through her hull, to which the Globe replied with eighteen,
+and then luffed off. The admiral of the English got now up with all his
+ships, and demanded satisfaction for the injury, which was replied to
+with scorn. On this an engagement ensued, in which the commander,
+Benjamin Joseph, was soon slain, but his successor continued the battle.
+Towards evening the carrack ran herself ashore on the rocks of
+_Angazesia_. Our fleet came to anchor in the offing to wait the event,
+and sent a boat to offer fair terms of battle. But about midnight the
+carrack was set on fire, and continued to burn all next morning. The
+English sent their boats to give assistance, but could not approach, and
+they had reason to believe that not one man was saved.[207] The new
+viceroy of Goa was in this ship, by whose obstinacy the death of all the
+rest was occasioned. Our fleet came to anchor off Swally on the 24th
+September, 1616.
+
+[Footnote 207: It was afterwards known that some few escaped with life
+and poverty. A more particular account of this fight will be found in
+the subsequent journal of Alexander Child.--_Purch._]
+
+The 14th October I waited on the emperor, to whom I imparted his
+majesty's salutations, which were courteously received, but he
+immediately began to enquire what presents had been sent to him. I
+mentioned our late fight and victory, at which he seemed to rejoice, and
+applauded the valour of our nation; but he immediately shifted the
+discourse, asking what our king had sent him. I answered, that he had
+sent many tokens of his love and affection; but knowing that his majesty
+was lord of the best portion of Asia, and the richest monarch of the
+East, my sovereign was satisfied the sending of rich gifts to his
+majesty were to cast pearls into the sea, their common mother and
+storehouse; but that my master, together with the warmest assurance of
+his love, had sent him many curiosities, which I hoped would give him
+entire satisfaction. He urged me to mention particulars, some of which I
+named. He asked me for French _muffe_ or velvet, to which I answered,
+that all my letters were not arrived. He then enquired if there were any
+dogs. To which I answered, that some had been slain in the battle at
+sea, but that two were preserved for him, at which he seemed much
+rejoiced. He then said, if I could procure him one of our great horses,
+such as I had described, being a _roan_ or Dutch horse, he would value
+it more than an additional kingdom. I answered, that I should use my
+best endeavours to satisfy his majesty, but much feared it could not be
+effected, owing to the length of the voyage. He said he would willingly
+give a lack of rupees for such a horse. I then desired he would be
+pleased to give an order for the transmission of the presents without
+being searched, and for the good usage of our people. He answered, that
+the port belonged to his son, but sent for him, and publicly gave orders
+for what I required; that the presents should not be searched, nor pay
+any custom, but should be sent up safe to me with all expedition, that I
+might distribute them at my discretion. He likewise commanded the prince
+to give orders for the good usage of our people, and that I should be
+satisfied in all my demands. This order did not extend to the grant of a
+fort, as Asaph Khan had absolutely refused to deliver in that clause.
+This charge was very round and hearty on the part of the king, and a
+great grace to me. The prince called Asaph Khan forwards in my presence,
+and promised, before his father and the whole court, to give me all
+reasonable satisfaction. All this was on the strength of the new
+presents.
+
+That same day I sent for the Portuguese jesuit who resided at court, and
+gave him an account of the engagement between our ships and the carrack,
+offering to make peace between our nation and the Portuguese upon equal
+terms. He promised to acquaint the viceroy of Goa with my offer, and so
+departed. The 15th I received accounts from Masulipatan that Captain
+Keeling had taken a Portuguese ship and two barks; one on the coast of
+Cochin, laden with tin, and the other freighted from Bengal, both of
+which were carried to Bantam. I was also informed that Sir Robert
+Shirley had been dismissed with disgrace from Goa, and was on his way
+overland to Masulipatan, to procure a passage; but am apt to believe
+this intelligence is untrue.
+
+The 16th, being with the prince's secretary about the dispatch of our
+affairs, he proposed to me, by his master's orders, to procure him two
+gunners from our fleet to serve him in the Deccan war, offering good pay
+and good usage. This I undertook to perform, knowing that indifferent
+artists might serve there. While at the prince's palace, Abdala Khan
+came to visit him, so magnificently attended, that I have not before
+seen the like. He was preceded by about twenty drums, and other martial
+music, on horseback, who made abundant noise. After them followed fifty
+persons bearing white flags, and two hundred well-mounted soldiers, all
+richly clothed in cloth of gold, velvet, and rich silks, who all entered
+the gate with him in regular array. Next his person were forty
+targeteers, in the richest liveries. After making his humble reverence,
+he presented a black Arabian horse, splendidly caparisoned, all his
+furniture being studded with flowers of enamelled gold, and set with
+small precious stones. According to custom, the prince returned a
+turban, a vest, and a girdle.
+
+Still persisting in his purpose of personally finishing the war in the
+Deccan, he would give no answer to the ambassadors from that country,
+but detained them till he should come to the frontiers. Being now about
+to depart, he and his party thought themselves not secure if Sultan
+Cuserou remained under the safeguard of Anna-Rah, lest, during the
+absence of Churrum, the king might be reconciled to Cuserou, by whose
+liberty all the hopes and power of their faction would be overthrown, in
+which case their ambition and the injuries they had done could hardly
+escape punishment. In this view they continued to urge the king to
+deliver Sultan Cuserou into the custody of Asaph Khan, as deputy on that
+occasion to Churrum, under pretence that this measure would intimidate
+Khan-Khannan and the Deccan princes, when they shall learn that Sultan
+Churrum is so favoured that the king has delivered his eldest son into
+his keeping, giving him as it were present possession of the kingdom,
+and the certain prospect of succession. Accordingly, on the 17th of
+October, Sultan Cuserou was delivered up as they desired, the soldiers
+of Anna-rah were discharged, and those of Asaph Khan placed over him,
+assisted by 200 horse belonging to the prince. The sister of Sultan
+Cuserou, and several other women in the seraglio, have put themselves in
+mourning, refuse to take their food, and openly exclaim against the
+dotage and cruelty of the king; declaring, if Cuserou should die, that
+an hundred of his kindred would devote themselves to the flames, in
+memory of the king's cruely to the worthiest of his sons.
+
+The king endeavoured to sooth them by fair words, protesting that he had
+no evil intentions towards his son, whom he promised speedily to deliver
+from captivity, and even sent his favourite Nourmahal to endeavour to
+appease the enraged and disconsolate ladies; but they refused to admit
+her visit, loading her with curses and threatnings. The common people
+universally condemn the king's conduct, saying, that he has not only
+delivered his son's life, but his own into the keeping of an ambitious
+prince and treacherous faction, and that Cuserou cannot perish without
+extreme scandal to his father, unless he amply revenge his death, for
+which cause the party will dispatch the king first, and his eldest son
+afterwards, that through their deaths the ambitious and unnatural
+Churrum may mount the throne. Every hour new rumours are spread of the
+deliverance of Cuserou, which are speedily contradicted; for he still
+remains in the tyger's den, refuses food, and requires that his father
+may take away his life, and not leave him to be a sport and prey to his
+inveterate enemies. The whole court is filled with rumours and secret
+whispers; the nobles are sad, and the people full of turmoil and noise,
+without any head, having no one to direct their rage to any specific
+object. The issue seems involved in dangers, especially for us, as, in
+regard to themselves, it matters not who wins. Although the elder prince
+have more right, and is of a more honourable character, he is still a
+Mahomedan, and can hardly be a better prince than his father, whose
+dispositions are good, yet so facile that he allows all to govern at
+their will, which is even worse than if he were a tyrant, for we had
+better suffer injuries from one prince than from a host of ministers and
+subordinate agents.
+
+The 19th of October _Mahomet Reza Beg_, the Persian ambassador, made his
+entry into the city with a great cavalcade, partly sent out by the king
+to meet him. There were at least an hundred elephants, with many
+musicians; but no man of quality went out on this occasion beyond the
+ordinary official receivers of strangers. His own train consisted of
+about fifty horse in splendid dresses of cloth of gold, their bows,
+quivers, and targets being richly adorned. Together with these he had
+about forty musqueteers, and about 200 ordinary _peons_ and attendants
+on his passage. He was conducted to a room within the outer court of the
+palace, to rest himself till the evening, at which time I sent my
+secretary to the durbar, to give me an account of the ceremonial. On
+coming into the presence, and reaching the first rail, he made three
+_tessalims_ and one _sizeda,_ which is prostrating himself and knocking
+his head three times against the ground. On entering within the rail he
+did the same, and then presented the letter of his master, _Shabas_,
+[Shah Abbas.] This the king took with a slight inclination of the body,
+saying only, _How doth my brother_? without using any title of majesty.
+After some few words, the ambassador was placed in the seventh rank,
+close to the rail beside the door, and below many of the king's
+servants, which, in my opinion, was a very mean place for the ambassador
+of Persia; but he richly merited this degradation for doing that mean
+reverence to the dishonour of his master which all his predecessors had
+refused, and by which he gave much offence to many of his nation. It is
+reported that he had orders from Shah Abbas to give content in all
+things, and hence it is conjectured that he is sent to obtain some aid
+in money against the Turks, in which kind the court of Persia often
+finds liberal succour from the Mogul government. Others pretend that his
+object is to mediate a peace for the princes of the Deccan, whose
+protection Shah Abbas is said to have much at heart, being jealous of
+the extension of this empire.
+
+According to custom, the king gave him a handsome turban, a vest of
+cloth of gold, and a girdle, for which he again made three _tessalims_
+and a _sizeda_, or ground courtesy. The present he brought consisted of
+three times nine Persian and Arabian horses, this being among them a
+ceremonious number; nine very large and handsome mules; seven camels
+laden with velvet; two suits of European _Arras_, or tapestry, which I
+suppose was Venetian; two chests of Persian hangings; one rich cabinet;
+four muskets; five clocks; a camel's load of cloth of gold; eight silk
+carpets; two balasss rubies; twenty-one camel loads of wine made of
+grapes; fourteen camel loads of distilled sweet waters; seven of
+rose-water; seven daggers and five swords adorned with precious stones;
+seven Venetian mirrors, all so fair and rich that I was ashamed of the
+relation.
+
+These presents were not now delivered, but only a list of them in
+writing. His own equipage was rich, having nine led horses, their
+trappings all studded with gold and silver. His turban was encircled by
+a chain of pearls, rubies, and turquoises, having three pipes of gold,
+in which were three plumes of feathers. Having thus caused accurate
+observation to be made of his reception, and compared it with my own, I
+find it in nothing more gracious than my own, and in many things
+inferior, except only in being met without the town, which, owing to my
+sickness, was not demanded; neither did the king receive the letter of
+Shah Abbas with so much respect as that of the king, my master, whom he
+called the king of England, his brother, naming the Persian barely his
+brother, without addition. This observation was made by the jesuit, who
+understood the language.
+
+§5. _Continuation of Occurrences at Court, till leaving Agimere, in
+November_, 1616.
+
+The 20th of October I received the prince's letter to send to Sarat,
+with orders for the governor of that city to sit along with the judge
+of the custom-house, to take care that no wrong was done to the English.
+The clause about sending up the presents sealed and unsearched to me,
+was so obscure and unintelligible, that it was susceptible of various
+constructions, which I believed was done designedly, that they might
+come into the hands of the prince, so as to become his own. I sent it
+back therefore to his secretary to be altered; and getting it returned
+still more intricate than at first, I went to the prince on the 21st,
+and desired to have that clause of his letter explained, at which he
+stuck a little, and I perceived he was as hollow as I had imagined. He
+plainly asked, How then he should have his presents, or see such
+curiosities as came up? and proposed to accompany me to where they were.
+I answered, that I could not do this till I had delivered my master's
+message and presents to the king, after which I should wait upon his
+highness with his presents, and that every rarity that came to me should
+be sent after him. He pressed me to pass my word for the performance of
+this, which I did, and then I had the letter for Surat made out to my
+content.
+
+At this interview the prince observed a white feather in my hat, and
+asked if I would give it to him. I answered, that I could not presume to
+offer any thing I had worn; but if he were pleased to command it, that
+or any thing else in my power was at his service. He then asked if I had
+any more; to which I answered, that I had three or four others of
+different colours. He desired to have them all, as he was to shew his
+horses and servants to the king within two days, and wanted some, being
+rare in these parts. I therefore promised to bring all I had next day,
+when his highness might take what pleased him.
+
+This day Abdalla Khan waited on the prince with a gallant equipage,
+himself and servants being anticly apparelled, yet soldier-like,
+according to their fashion. On this occasion he made a present to the
+prince of a handsome white horse, full of spirit and high mettled, the
+saddle and furniture all ornamented with enamelled gold. The prince
+returned him a plain sword with a leathern belt. Many other swords were
+brought before him, the hilts and scabbards being of silver, set with
+small stones, together with targets covered with gold velvets, some
+painted and embossed with gold and silver, all of which he distributed
+among his servants. Against this muster many saddles and other
+horse-furniture were provided, richly ornamented with gold and precious
+stones, intended for spare horses. His boots were embroidered, and every
+thing was of the highest magnificence, so that the expence is
+wonderful, and the wealth seen daily is inestimable. There is a report
+going, that, on the past night, six of the servants of Sultan Churrum
+went to murder Sultan Cuserou, but were refused the key by the porter
+who has charge of him. It is farther said that the queen mother is gone
+to the king to lay before him an account of this matter. But the truth
+of these things is hard to be found, and it is dangerous to ask
+questions.
+
+In the evening I went to the durbar to wait upon the king, where I met
+the Persian ambassador with the first muster of his presents. He seemed
+a jester or juggler, rather than a person of any gravity, continually
+skipping up and down, and acting all his words like a mimic player, so
+that the _Atachikanne_ was converted as it were into a stage. He
+delivered all his presents with his own hand, which the king received
+with smiles and a chearful countenance, and many gracious words. His
+tongue was a great advantage to the Persian in delivering his own
+business, which he did with so much flattery and obsequiousness, that he
+pleased as much that way as by his gifts, constantly calling his majesty
+king and commander of the world, forgetting that his own master had a
+share of it; and on every little occasion of favourable acceptance, he
+made his _tessalims_. When all was delivered for that day, he prostrated
+himself on the ground, making _sizeda_, and knocking his head on the
+floor as if he would have entered it.
+
+The gifts this day were a handsome quiver for a bow and arrow, richly
+embroidered; all sorts of European fruits, artificially made, and laid
+on dishes; many folding purses, and other knacks, of leather, curiously
+wrought in coloured silks; shoes stitched and embroidered: great mirrors
+in richly inlaid frames; one square piece of velvet, highly embroidered
+with gold in panes, between which were Italian pictures wrought in the
+stuff, which he said were the king and queen of Venice, being, as I
+suppose, the hanging called Venetian tapestry, of which six were given,
+but only one shown. There were besides, many other curiosities of small
+value; after which came the three times nine horses and mules, the
+latter being very handsome, but the horses had lost their beauty and
+condition, as, except one or two, they were very unfit for being sent or
+accepted between princes. This done, the Persian returned, with many
+antic tricks, to his place, which was far inferior to mine, as I stood
+alone, and above all the subjects, though Asaph Khan at first wanted to
+put me from it, but I maintained it as my right, having been appointed
+me by the king. This was only the first act of the play presented by
+the Persian ambassador, which will not be finished in ten days.
+
+The 22d I went to the prince's secretary for the promised Surat letter;
+but his highness had changed his mind, and, loth to let the presents
+pass without ransacking them, refused to seal the letter. The secretary
+pretended they could not be allowed to pass without search, lest the
+merchants, under that pretence, might defraud the customs. I was
+offended, and going away; but the secretary prevailed on me to go with
+him to the prince, to whom I delivered some feathers, being two
+_plurides_ and two birds of paradise, which he graciously accepted; and
+having made known my determination not to have the presents opened, or
+to be sent up by any others than my own servants, he at last yielded,
+and commanded his secretary to make out the dispatch in my own way.
+
+At night I went to the durbar to observe the Persian ambassador, whom I
+found standing in his place, but often removed and set lower, as the
+great men came in. The king once spoke to him, on which he played off
+his monkey tricks, but gave no present; only the king gave command that
+he should be feasted by the nobles. Most of the time was spent in seeing
+saddles and furniture, against the removal of the court, some of which
+the king presented to his followers, as the court was daily expected to
+move; the king's tents having been pitched four days. I sent that night
+to the secretary for my firmaun, but was put off with excuses.
+
+The 24th the king removed to Havar Gemal, and called for the Persian
+ambassador, who at night eat and drank before the king along with the
+nobles, as I had done on the birth-day. On this occasion the king gave
+him 20,000 rupees for his expences, for which he made innumerable
+_tessalims_ and _sizedas_, which greatly pleased the king, being base
+yet profitable idolatry. As the prince was in attendance on the king, I
+could not get my business dispatched.
+
+The king returned to the city in the evening of the 25th, having been
+far gone in wine the night before. Some person, either by chance or from
+malice, spoke of the last merry night, when many of the nobles had drank
+wine, which none may do without leave. Having forgot his own order, the
+king demanded to know who gave? It was answered that it had been given
+by the _buxy_, as no one dared to say it was the king, seeing he doubted
+it. The custom is that the king drinks alone, though sometimes he will
+give command that the nobles shall drink also, which to refuse is
+likewise an offence, so every one who takes the cup of wine from the
+officer has his name written down, and makes _tessalim_, though perhaps
+the king's eyes are misty. The king called for the _buxy_, and asked if
+he gave the order, which he falsely denied; though he actually gave it
+as ordered, calling by name such as were to drink with the ambassador.
+The king then called for the list, and fined the delinquents, some 1000,
+some 2000, and others 3000 rupees. Some that were near his person, he
+caused to be whipped in his presence, receiving 130 stripes with a most
+terrible instrument of torture, having at the ends of four cords irons
+like spur-rowels, so that every stroke made four wounds. When they lay
+for dead, he commanded the standers-by to spurn them with their feet,
+and the door-keepers to break their staves upon them. Thus cruelly
+mangled and bruised, they were carried away, one of them dying on the
+spot. Some would have excused themselves, by blaming the ambassador; but
+the king said he had only ordered a cup or two to be given to him.
+Though drunkenness be a common and frequent vice in the king, it is yet
+strictly forbidden; and no one can enter the _guzelkhan_ where the king
+sits, till the porters have smelt his breath, and if he have only tasted
+wine he is refused admittance; and if this reason of his absence be
+known, he shall scarcely escape the whip. When the king has taken
+offence at any one, even a father dares not speak for his son. Thus the
+king made all the company pay for the Persian ambassador's reward.
+
+The 26th, I went to _Sorocolla_, the prince's secretary, to get the
+promised firmaun; when he sent me a copy as fraudulent and ambiguous as
+the former, which I refused to accept. I drew up the clause I so much
+disliked myself, which I sent back, and was promised to have it sealed
+next day.
+
+The day of the king's removal being at hand, I sent on the 28th to Asaph
+Khan, to have a warrant for carriages, as our merchants had sought all
+over the town for carriages to convey their goods to Agra, and could not
+procure any. As I was enrolled by the king, I received an order for
+twenty camels, four carts, and two coaches, to be paid for at the
+king's price; of which I appointed for the use of the factors as many as
+they needed.
+
+At this time the following incident took place, being either a wonderful
+instance of baseness in this great monarch, or a trial of my
+disposition. The king had condemned several thieves to death, among whom
+were some boys, and there was no way to save their lives, except by
+selling them as slaves. On this occasion, the king commanded Asaph Khan
+to offer two of them to me for money, which he directed to be done by
+the _cutwall_, or marshal. He came accordingly and made the offer to my
+interpreter, who answered without my knowledge, that the Christians kept
+no slaves, and, as I had already set free those the king had given me,
+it was in vain to propose the matter to me. I afterwards suspected this
+were done to try me whether I would give a little money to save the
+lives of two children, or, if it even were in earnest, I thought there
+was no great loss in doing a good deed. So, to try the scope of this
+affair, I directed my interpreter to inform Asaph Khan, that being made
+acquainted with the offer, and the answer my interpreter had given, I
+had reprehended him for presuming in any case to answer for me; and
+that, if any money were to be given to save the lives of the children,
+either to those whom they had robbed, or to redeem them from the law, I
+was ready to give it, both out of respect for the king's command, and
+for charity; but I would not buy them as slaves, only meaning to pay
+their ransom, and set them free; and, if he would let me know the king's
+pleasure, that I might give them their lives and liberties without
+offence, I was very willing to do it.
+
+Asaph Khan agreed to accept the money, making many commendations of my
+extraordinary goodness, and said I might dispose of the boys as I
+thought fit, desiring me to send the money to the _cutwall_, yet made no
+offer of informing the king, which was one chief purpose of my
+liberality. I had no inclination to be cheated, yet resolved to pay the
+money in such a way that the king should learn I had more mercy than he,
+and that a Christian valued the life of a Mahomedan beyond money. I sent
+therefore a factor and my interpreter to the _cutwall_, to acquaint him
+with my communication to Asaph Khan, and that, if he informed the king
+of my offer to redeem the prisoners for charity, and his majesty
+consented to give them their pardon and liberty, I was ready to send
+the money; but that I would not buy them as slaves, even for an hour.
+Thus I put them to the test as to their base offer. This sum did not
+exceed ten pounds, a poor affair for which to impose upon a stranger, or
+to be gained by so great a king. The _cutwall_ answered that he would
+enquire the king's pleasure, and let me know the result. Some would have
+me believe, that this was, a signal favour of the king, chusing out any
+great man to do this good and honourable work of redeeming prisoners, as
+the money is given in satisfaction to the person robbed, and that those
+who are thus appointed to ransom them, make _sizeda_ to the king, as for
+a mighty benefit. But I see no honour in a king thus to impose upon a
+stranger, to whom he gives neither maintenance nor liberality. I went to
+the durbar, to see if the king would himself speak to me, that I might
+declare my own offer. The _cutwall_ made many motions, and brought in
+his executioner, who received some commands, but I understood them not.
+
+I this day sent my secretary with a message to the Persian ambassador,
+to say I would visit him, if he gave his word to return my visit. He
+sent me for answer, with much respect, that it was not the custom of the
+country for ambassadors to visit each, other without leave of the king,
+which he would ask; and which given, he would thankfully accept my
+visit, and repay it with all manner of pleasure.
+
+On the 1st November, Sultan Churrum took his leave and went to his
+tents. On this occasion the king sat in his durbar at noon, when the
+prince passed his establishment in review before his father, consisting
+of about 600 elephants richly caparisoned, and about 10,000 horse, all
+splendidly arrayed, many of his followers being clad in cloth of gold,
+and their turbans adorned with herons plumes. The prince himself was in
+a dress of cloth of silver, all over embroidered, and splendidly
+decorated with pearls and diamonds, shining like the firmament in a
+clear night. The king embraced and kissed him with much affection,
+presenting him with a rich sword, the hilt and scabbard all of gold set
+with precious stones, valued at 100,000 rupees, a dagger valued at
+40,000, together with an elephant, and a horse, the furniture of both
+magnificently adorned with gold and jewels. At his departure, he gave
+him a coach, made in imitation of that sent by the king my master to the
+emperor, and commanded the English coachman to drive the prince to the
+tents. Churrum went accordingly into the coach, sitting in the middle
+thereof, all the sides being open; and was attended by all his chief
+nobles a-foot, all the way to the camp, which was about four miles.
+Being followed by a vast concourse of people, he scattered all the way
+among them handfuls of quarter rupees. At one time he reached his hand
+to the coachman, and put about 100 rupees into his hat.
+
+On the 2d, the king removed, with his women and all the court, to the
+tents, about three miles from town. I went that morning to attend upon
+him at the _Jarruco_ window of the palace, and went up to the scaffold
+under the window, being desirous to see this exhibition. Two eunuchs
+stood upon tressels, having long poles headed with feathers, with which
+they fanned him. On this occasion, he dispensed many favours, and
+received many presents. What he gave was let down by a silk cord, rolled
+on a turning instrument; and what he received was drawn up in the same
+manner, by a venerable, fat, and deformed old matron, all hung round
+with _gymbals_ like an image. Two of his principal wives were at a
+window on one side, whose curiosity led them to break holes in a lattice
+of roods that hung before the window, to gaze on me. At first I only saw
+their fingers; and afterwards, applying their faces to the holes, I
+could at times see an eye, and at length could discern their entire
+countenances. They were indifferently fair, having their black hair
+smoothed up from their foreheads; and they were so adorned with pearls
+and diamonds, that I might have seen them without the help of any other
+light. On my looking at them, they retired very merry, and, as I
+supposed, laughing at me.
+
+After some time, the king departed from the window, and we all went to
+the durbar, to wait his coming out of the inner apartments. He came not
+long after, and remained in the durbar for about half an hour, till his
+ladies had mounted their elephants, which were in all about fifty, all
+richly caparisoned, especially three, which had turrets or _howders_ of
+gold, with grates of gold wire for the ladies to see through, and rich
+canopies over head of cloth of silver. The king then descended the
+stairs, amid such acclamations of _health to the king_, as would have
+drowned the noise of cannon. At the foot of the stairs, where I
+contrived to be near him, a person brought to him a large carp, and
+another presented a dish of some white stuff like starch, into which the
+king dipped his finger, with which he touched the fish, and then rubbed
+it on his forehead. This ceremony was said to presage good fortune. Then
+came another officer, who buckled on his sword and buckler, all set with
+large diamonds and rubies. Another hung on his quiver with thirty
+arrows, and his bow-case, being that which had been presented by the
+Persian ambassador. On his head, the king wore a rich turban, with a
+plume of heron's crests, not many but long: On one side hung a rich
+unset ruby as large as a walnut; on the other side a diamond of equal
+size; and in the middle an emerald much larger, shaped like a heart. His
+sash was wreathed about with a chain of great pearls, rubies, and
+diamonds, drilled. A triple chain of excellent pearls, the largest I had
+ever seen, hung round his neck. He had armlets above his elbows, richly
+set with diamonds; and three rows of diamonds round each wrist. His
+hands were bare, having a rich ring on almost every finger; and a pair
+of English gloves were stuck into his girdle. His coat, without sleeves,
+was of cloth of gold, over a fine robe as thin as lawn. On his feet he
+wore buskins embroidered with pearls, the toes being sharp and turned
+up.
+
+Thus richly accoutred, he went into the coach, which waited for him
+under the care of his new English servant, who was dressed as gaudily as
+any player, and more so, and had trained four horses for the draught,
+which were trapped and harnessed all in velvet and gold. This was the
+first coach he had ever been in, made in imitation of that sent from
+England, and so like it that I only knew the difference by the cover,
+which was of gold velvet of Persia. Having seated himself at one end,
+two eunuchs attended at each side, carrying small golden maces set all
+over with rubies, to which horse-tails were fastened, for driving away
+flies. Before him went drums, bad trumpets, and loud music; with many
+canopies, parasols, and other strange ensigns of majesty, all of cloth
+of gold, and adorned with rubies. Nine spare horses were led before him,
+some having their furniture garnished with rubies, some with pearls, and
+others with diamonds, while some had only plain gold studs. Next behind
+the coach came three palanquins, the carriages and feet of one being
+plated with gold, set with pearls, and a fringe of great pearls in
+strings a foot long, the border being set all round with rubies and
+emeralds. Beside this, a man on foot carried a stool of gold, set with
+precious stones. The other two palanquins were covered and lined with
+cloth of gold.
+
+Next followed the English coach, newly covered and richly trimmed, which
+he had given to his favourite queen, Nourmahal, who sat in the inside.
+After this came a coach, made after the fashion of the country, which I
+thought seemed out of countenance, in which were his younger sons. This
+was followed by about twenty spare royal elephants, all for the king's
+own use, all so splendidly adorned with precious stones and rich
+furniture, that they outshone the sun. Each elephant had several flags
+and streamers of cloth of silver, gilded sattin, or rich silk. His
+noblemen accompanied him on foot, which I did likewise to the gate, and
+then left him. His women, who accompanied him on elephants, as before
+mentioned, seemed like so many parroquitos in cages, and followed about
+half a mile in the rear of his coach. On coming to the door of the house
+in which his eldest son was kept prisoner, he caused the coach to stop,
+and sent for prince Cuserou; who immediately came and made reverence,
+having a sword and buckler in his hands, and his beard grown to his
+middle, in sign of disfavour. The king now commanded his son to mount
+one of the spare elephants in the royal train, so that he rode next his
+father, to the great joy and applause of the multitude, who were now
+filled with new hopes; and on this occasion, the king gave him 1000
+rupees to throw among the people; his gaoler, Asaph Khan, and all the
+ministers, being still attendant on foot.
+
+To avoid the press and other inconveniences, I took horse and crossed
+out of the _leskar_, getting before the king, and then waited for him
+till he came near his tents, to which he passed all the way from the
+town between a guard of turreted elephants, having each on the four
+corners of their howdars a banner of yellow taffety, and a _sling_[208]
+mounted in front, carrying a bullet as big as a tennis-ball. There were
+about three hundred elephants armed in this manner, each having a
+gunner; besides about six hundred other elephants of honour, that
+preceded or followed the king, all covered with velvet or cloth of gold,
+and all carrying two or three gilded banners. Many men afoot ran before
+the king, carrying skins of water with which to sprinkle the road to
+prevent dust from annoying him; and no one was allowed to approach the
+coach on horseback by two furlongs.
+
+[Footnote 208: The sling in the text appears to have been a _slung_
+musquetoon, or small cannon, mounted in that manner to avoid
+recoil.--E.]
+
+Having gone before a-horseback, as before mentioned, I hastened to the
+tents, to await the king's arrival. The royal encampment was walled
+round, half a mile in circuit, in form of a fortress, with high screens
+or curtains of coarse stuff; somewhat like Arras hangings, red on the
+outside, the inside being divided into panes or compartments, with a
+variety of figures. This inclosure had a handsome gateway, and the
+circuit was formed into various coins and bulwarks, as it were; the
+posts which supported the curtains being all surmounted with brass tops.
+The throng was very great, and I wished to have gone into the enclosure,
+but no one was allowed, even the greatest of the land having to sit down
+at the gate. At length I was admitted, but the Persian ambassador and
+all the nobles were refused. At this gate, and for the first time, I was
+saluted by the Persian ambassador as I passed, by a silent _salam_.
+
+In the midst of this enclosure, there stood a throne of mother-of-pearl,
+borne aloft on two pillars, under cover of a high tent or pavilion, the
+pole of which was headed by a golden knob, the roof being of cloth of
+gold, and the ground covered by carpets. When the king came near,
+several noblemen were admitted, together with the Persian ambassador;
+all of us making a kind of lane, the ambassador being on one side, and I
+on the other. As the king came in, he cast his eye on me, whereupon I
+made him a reverence, to which he answered by bowing and laying his hand
+on his breast. Turning to the other side, he nodded to the Persian. I
+followed close at his heels till he ascended the throne, every one
+calling out, _joy, health, and good fortune_. The king then called for
+water, with which he washed his hands, and then retired into an interior
+tent, to join his women, who had entered by another gate to their own
+quarters; there being about thirty divisions with tents within the royal
+inclosure. His son I saw not. All the noblemen now retired to their
+quarters, which were all very handsome, some having their tents green,
+others white, and others again of mixed colours, all handsome in form
+and arrangement, and all as orderly inclosed as their houses in the
+city, so that the whole composed the most curious and magnificent sight
+I had ever beheld. The whole vale seemed like a magnificent city, no
+mean tents or baggage being allowed to mix among these splendid
+pavilions. I was utterly unprovided with carriages or tent, and ashamed
+of my situation, for indeed five years of my allowances would not have
+enabled me to take the field any thing like the others; every one having
+a double set of pavilions, one of which goes before to the next station,
+where it is set up a day before the king removes. On this account, I was
+obliged to return to my poor house in the town.
+
+On the 5th November I rode about five miles, to the tents of the prince,
+Sultan Churrum. I made him my compliments of leave taking, wishing him
+all prosperity and success; but he ordered me to return and take my
+leave two days afterwards, as I had moved him on some business,
+respecting debts due to the English, which he promised to examine and
+dispatch. He sat in state, in the same greatness and magnificence I have
+mentioned of his father; his throne being plated all over with silver,
+inlaid with gold flowers, having a square canopy over head, borne up by
+four pillars covered with silver; his arms, such as his sword, buckler,
+bows, arrows, and lance, being on a table before his throne. I observed
+him curiously, now that he was in absolute authority, and took especial
+notice of his actions and behaviour. He had just received two letters,
+which he read standing, before he ascended his throne. I never saw any
+one having so settled a countenance, or maintain a so constant gravity
+of deportment, never once smiling, or shewing by his looks any respect
+or distinction of persons, but evincing an extreme pride and thorough
+contempt for all around him. Yet I could perceive that he was every now
+and then assailed by some inward trouble, and a kind of distraction and
+brokenness in his thoughts, as he often answered suitors in a disjointed
+manner, as if surprised, or not hearing what they had said. If I can
+judge, he has left his heart among his father's women, with whom he is
+allowed to converse. The day before, Noormahal went to visit him in the
+English coach; and, on taking leave of him, she presented him with a
+robe, all embroidered with diamonds, rubies, and pearls; and, if I do
+not mistake, she carried away with her all his attentions from other
+business.
+
+The 6th I had a letter from Mr Brown at Ahmedabad, giving an account of
+a fray begun by the Portuguese. Five of them assailed an English boy at
+Cambay, whose arms they took from him. On notice of this, John Brown and
+James Bickeford went to rescue the boy, and were set upon by seven
+Portuguese, one of whom fired a pistol and wounded Brown in the hand.
+They defended themselves bravely and honourably like Englishmen, killed
+one, wounded some others, and chaced the rest up and down the town like
+cowards, to the great shame of such villains, and the reputation of our
+nation. To revenge this, the Portuguese came ashore in considerable
+numbers from their frigates, no more English being in the town except
+the three already mentioned. The governor, being informed of this
+affair, sent the cutwall with a guard to our house, and ordered the
+water port to be shut, expelling the Portuguese from the town, and
+commanding them, on pain of chastisement, not to meddle with the
+English, whom he dismissed in safety from Cambay, and they are now
+returned to Ahmedabad.
+
+The 9th, the prince being to remove, sent one of his guards for me in
+haste. I was not prepared for going, but the messenger pressed me,
+urging that his master waited for me, and he had orders not to return
+without me. He added, that the whole court talked of the prince's favour
+for me, and it was reported he had asked leave from the king for me to
+accompany him to the war, and had promised to use me so well that I
+should be forced to acknowledge his favour to our nation. I accordingly
+took horse after dinner; but on my arrival, I found the prince already
+under march. I met a Dutchman, the prince's jeweller, who confirmed
+every thing the soldier had said, and added so much more in the same
+strain, that I disbelieved the whole. I sent word to the prince of my
+arrival, when he returned for answer, That I should go on before to the
+tents, and wait his arrival, when he would speak with me. It was night
+when he came. He sat a short while, only giving me a look, and arose to
+retire among his women. As he passed, he sent a servant to desire me to
+wait a little, till he came out to hold his guzalcan, when he should
+take leave of me.
+
+He came out in half an hour, but I could not get any one to remind him
+of me, and he was fallen to play, and either forgot me, or proposed to
+play me a state trick. I then told the waiters, that I had been sent for
+by the prince, and only waited his orders, for which I had too long
+waited, as it was late, and I must return to my house; and therefore, if
+the prince had any business for me, I desired it might be sent after me,
+as I scorned to be so used. Before I could mount, messengers came
+running after me, and called me back to wait upon the prince. Going in,
+I found him earnestly engaged at cards, but he excused himself of
+forgetfulness, blaming the officers formally for not reminding him, and
+shewed more than ordinary attention, calling me to see his cards, and
+asking me many questions. I expected he would have spoken of my going
+along with him; but, finding no such discourse, I told him I had come
+only in obedience to his commands, and to take my leave, and craved his
+pardon for being in haste, as I had to return to Agimere, having no
+convenience for staying all night in camp. He answered, that he had sent
+to speak with me before his departure, and that I should be presently
+dispatched. He then sent in an eunuch into the interior apartments, and
+several of his officers came to me smiling, who said that the prince
+meant to give me a magnificent present, and if I feared to ride late, I
+should have a guard of ten horsemen to see me safe home, making as much
+of the matter as if I had been to get his best chain of pearls. By and
+by came a cloak of cloth of gold, which the prince had once or twice
+worn, which he caused to be put on me, and for which I made my reverence
+very unwillingly; yet I urged some business, and having an answer, took
+my leave. It is here reputed the highest favour, to give one a garment
+that has been worn by a prince, or that has merely been laid on their
+shoulders. The cloak now given me might have answered well for an actor
+who had to represent the character of his ancestor, Tamerlane, on the
+stage, but was to me of no importance. On my way out, I was followed by
+his porters and waiters, begging in a most shameless manner, so that I
+half paid the value of the cloak before I could get out from among them.
+
+On the 10th November, almost every body had removed from the town of
+Agimere, so that I was left nearly alone, and could neither get carts
+nor camels for my removal, notwithstanding my warrant. The Persian
+ambassador was in a similar predicament, but complained, and was soon
+redressed. I therefore sent to court, and on the 11th I received two
+warrants, for being supplied with carts and camels at the king's price:
+but it was not easy to procure either, as the great men had soldiers in
+every direction, to take up all for their use; and indeed it was
+wonderful, how two leskars or camps, belonging to the king and prince,
+could both remove at once.
+
+The 16th, an order was given by the king to set fire to the whole leskar
+at Agimere, that the people might be compelled to follow, which was duly
+executed. I was left almost destitute; and the Persian ambassador, who
+had fought, chid, brawled, and complained, without any remedy, was in
+the same state with me. We sent messages of condolence to each other;
+and, by his example, I resolved to buy, as many were disposed to sell,
+who would not hire at the king's price, and I calculated that by
+purchasing I should almost save hire, though carts were dear, as the
+hire of three months would have exhausted the price of purchase.
+Necessity enforced me to remove, as the town was burnt and utterly
+desolate, and I was in great danger from thieves, as the soldiers came
+from camp and robbed during the night. So desolate was the town, that I
+could not even procure bread. Yet I sent again to court, to make one
+trial more, before I purchased.
+
+The 17th I received accounts from Goa, which were said to be true, that
+Don Emanuel de Meneses, with about 300 of those who were saved ashore
+out of the Admiral, had arrived at Goa in a very poor condition, having
+been robbed and plundered by the inhabitants of Angazesia, who had also
+slain many. On the 24th October, not one of the Lisbon fleet had reached
+Goa, to their great wonder and disappointment. The Mosambique galleon
+was fought with by the Hollanders that lately went from Surat, and had
+cruised off Goa to meet the expected ships. This galleon was very rich
+in gold and other commodities, but she escaped.
+
+I received an order for camels and carriages, but was continually
+delayed and disappointed; and being afraid to remain, I bought two
+carts, and was continually promised camels, yet none appeared. Mr
+Bidulph remained in the prince's leskar to receive money. The leskar of
+the king was still only twelve cosses from Agimere. The 18th, the
+Portuguese Jesuit took leave of me, being under the necessity of
+purchasing a carriage, although he had an order for one out of the
+king's store; but every one was distressed, owing to the scarcity.
+Having nothing material to say, respecting my own affairs, during my
+solitude at Agimere, I shall here digress, to mention the state of
+Sultan Cuserou, of whose new delivery into the hands of his enemies, the
+hearts and mouths of all men were now full.
+
+Though the king had so far condescended to satisfy his proud son Churrum
+at his departure, as again to place Cuserou in confinement, yet it seems
+that he did not mean to wink at any injurious behaviour to his eldest
+son: And, partly to render his situation the more secure, in the custody
+of Asaph Khan, and partly to satisfy the murmurs of the people, who
+feared some treachery against him, he took occasion to declare his mind
+respecting him in the public durbar. Asaph Khan had been to visit his
+new prisoner, and in his behaviour towards him, did not treat him with
+the respect due to a prince, but rudely pressed into his presence
+against his will, and in a disrespectful manner. Some are of opinion he
+did this purposely to pick a quarrel, knowing the bravery of the prince,
+who would not suffer an indignity, meaning to tempt him to draw his
+sword, or to use some violence, which the guard might suddenly revenge;
+or that he might have opportunity to represent to the king, that the
+prince had attempted to kill his keeper, on purpose to escape. But the
+prince acted with patient prudence, and only procured a friend to
+acquaint the king with the rude behaviour of Asaph Khan. Accordingly,
+one day at the durbar, the king called Asaph Khan before him, and asked
+when he had seen his charge? To which he answered, he had seen him two
+days before. The king then asked, What he had then done to him? He said
+he had only visited him. But the king pressed to know what reverence and
+fashion he had carried towards the prince. Asaph Khan then saw that the
+king knew what had passed. He therefore said, That he had gone to wait
+upon the prince, in all reverence and affection, to offer his service,
+but that the prince refused him admittance into the apartment;
+wherefore, as he was entrusted with his safety, he thought it both
+necessary for him to see the prince, and discourteous in him to deny,
+and had therefore pressed in. On this, the king quickly asked, "And when
+you were in, what did you say and do?" Asaph Khan stood confounded, and
+confessed that he did not make any reverence. Whereupon, the king told
+him roundly, "That he would make his proud heart know the prince as his
+eldest and beloved heir, and his prince and lord; and, if he ever heard
+again of the smallest disrespect or want of duty in his behaviour
+towards the prince, he would command his son to trample him under his
+feet." He added, that he loved his son Prince Churrum, yet did not
+entrust his eldest son Cuserou among them for his ruin and destruction.
+
+The 20th I received a new warrant for carriages, which procured me eight
+camels, but such poor ones as were quite unable to suffice for our
+baggage, and I was therefore under the necessity of purchasing the rest.
+The 22d I removed to my tents. The 23d and 24th I waited for the
+merchants; and on the latter of these days I had a letter from Ispahan,
+saying that my letters had been dispatched for Aleppo, and that we were
+expected in Persia, but on condition that we seconded the wishes of Shah
+Abbas, by diverting the sale of his silks from Turkey. My letters added,
+that the general of the Turks lay with a mighty army at _Argerone_,
+[Arzerom,] six days march short of Tauris, as if uncertain whether to
+attack that city, or to enter Gurgestan and Gilan, the provinces in
+which silk is produced, so as to win that by conquest which was refused
+in the way of trade. To guard against both attempts, Shah Abbas was
+encamped at _Salmas_, whence he could march either way as might be
+required. But, it was farther said, if the armies did not come to battle
+in two months, the approach of winter, and the wants attendant on such
+numerous bodies of men, would constrain both to quit the field. It is
+thought the Persians will not adventure a battle, though 180,000 strong,
+as, being light, and unencumbered with cannon or baggage, they are
+fitted for rapid marches, and can harass the Turkish army with perpetual
+skirmishes and assaults on all sides, hovering round about, and wasting
+them, without hazard to themselves.
+
+§6. _Sir Thomas Roe follows the Progress of the Court, and describes the
+King's Leskar, and some Places through which he passed; with instances
+of the King's Superstition and Drunkenness, and some curious Incidents
+respecting a Present_.
+
+The 25th of November I removed four cosses from Agimere, but waited
+during the remainder of that month, for the arrival of a caravan, going
+from Agra to Surat, by which I might transmit my papers in safety. The
+caravan departed from Agimere at midnight of the 30th November: and on
+the 1st December I went six cosses to Ramsor, where the king had left
+the naked bodies of an hundred men, put to death for robbery. The 2d I
+travelled seven c. I rested the 3d, because of rain. The 4th I went five
+c. and this day I overtook a camel, laden with 300 heads, sent from
+Candahar to the king, the people to whom these heads had belonged having
+been in rebellion. Travelling five c. on the 5th, and four c. on the
+6th, I that day overtook the king at a walled town called _Todah_, in
+the best and most populous country I had seen in India since I landed.
+The district was quite level, having a fertile soil, abounding in corn,
+cotton, and cattle, and the villages were so numerous and near together,
+as hardly to exceed a coss from each other in any direction. This town
+was the best built of any I had seen in India, many of the houses being
+two stories high, and most of them good enough for decent shop-keepers,
+all covered with tiles. It had been the residence of a Rajput rajah,
+before the conquests of Akbar Shah, and stood at the foot of a great and
+strong rock, about which were many excellent works of hewn stone, well
+cut, with many tanks, arched over with well-turned vaults, and large and
+deep descents to them. Near it was a beautiful grove, two miles long and
+a quarter of a mile broad, all planted with mangoes, tamarinds, and
+other fruit-trees, divided by shady walks, and interspersed with little
+temples, and idol altars, with many fountains, wells, and summer-houses
+of carved stone curiously arched, so that I must confess a poor banished
+Englishman might have been content to dwell here. But this observation
+may serve universally for the whole of this country, that ruin and
+devastation operates every where; for, since the property of all has
+become vested in the king, no person takes care of any thing, so that in
+every place the spoil and devastations of war appear, and no where is
+any thing repaired.
+
+On the 7th the king only removed from one side of Todah to the other.
+The 8th I was at the guzalcan, but found the king so nearly drunk, that
+he became entirely so in half an hour, so that I could not have any
+business with him. The 9th I took a view of the royal _leskar_, or camp,
+which is one of the greatest wonders I had ever seen, and chiefly as I
+saw it finished and set up in less than four hours, all except the tents
+of some of the great men, who have double suits. It could not well be
+less in circuit than twenty English miles, the extent in some directions
+being three cosses, including the out-skirts. In the middle, where the
+streets are orderly and the tents joined, there are all sorts of shops,
+so regularly disposed, that all persons know where to go for any thing
+they want. Every man of quality, and every trade, is regularly appointed
+how far they are to be from the king's tents, in what direction, and
+what ground they shall occupy, which continues ever the same without
+alteration. All this may equal almost any town in Europe for size. But
+no person must approach on any side within a musket shot of the
+_atoskanha_, or royal quarter, which is so strictly observed that no one
+is ever admitted but by name. The evening durbar is omitted, the time
+being spent by the king in hunting or hawking rather, on tanks, by means
+of boats, in which he takes great delight, his barges being moved along
+with the leskar on carts. On these occasions he sits by the sides of the
+tanks, to view the sport, these tanks being often a mile or two over.
+The king is seen every morning at the _Jaruco_, formerly mentioned; but
+business or speaking to him at this time is prohibited; all business
+being conducted at night in the _guzalcan_, and there the opportunity is
+often missed, his majesty being so frequently overcome by drowsiness,
+proceeding from drunkenness.
+
+There was now a whisper about the court of a new affinity between Sultan
+Cuserou and Asaph Khan, and great hope was entertained of the prince
+recovering his liberty. I will find an opportunity to discourse of this
+hereafter, because the particulars are worthy of being preserved, as the
+wisdom and goodness of the king were manifest above the malice of
+others: And, in this affair, Noormahal made good the observation, that
+women have always great influence in court factions, and she shewed that
+they are not incapable of managing business. This history will discover
+a noble prince, an excellent wife, a faithful counsellor, a crafty
+step-mother, an ambitious son, a cunning favourite; all reconciled by a
+patient king, whose heart was not understood by any of them all. But
+this will require a separate place,[209] as not fit to be mingled with
+matters of ordinary business. At this time the English complained of
+being ill used at Surat; but their drunkenness, and riotous behaviour
+proceeding from that cause, were so notorious, that it was rather
+wonderful they were not all put to death.
+
+[Footnote 209: This story does not however appear, the journal of Sir
+Thomas Roe being left imperfect, both in the Pilgrims and in the
+Collection of Churchill.--E.]
+
+The 16th of December I visited the king, who was just returned from his
+sports, having all his game laid out before him, both fish and fowl. He
+desired me to take my choice, and then distributed all the rest among
+his nobles. I found him sitting on his throne, having a beggar at his
+feet, a poor silly old man, all in rags and ashes, attended on by a
+young one. The country abounds in these professed poor and holy men, who
+are held in great reverence, and who, in voluntary sufferings and
+mortified chastisements of their bodies, exceed all the boasted
+performances of heretics and idolaters in all ages and countries. With
+this miserable wretch, who was cloathed in rags, crowned with feathers,
+and covered, with filth, his majesty conversed for about an hour, with
+such kindness, as shewed a humility not common among kings. All this
+time the beggar sat before the king, which is not even permitted to his
+son. The beggar gave the king as a present, a cake made by himself of
+coarse grain, burnt on the coals, and all foul with ashes; which yet the
+king accepted, broke off a piece and eat it, which a dainty person would
+hardly have done. He then wrapt up the rest in a clout, and put it into
+the poor man's bosom, and sending for 100 rupees, he poured them into
+the beggar's lap, gathering up with his own hands any that fell past,
+and giving them to him. When his collation or banquet was brought in,
+whatsoever he took to eat, he gave half of to the beggar. Rising, after
+many humiliations and charities, and the old wretch not being nimble, he
+took him up in his arms, though a dainty person would have scrupled to
+touch him, and embraced him three times, laying his hand on his heart
+and calling him father, and so left him, all of us greatly admiring such
+virtue in a heathen prince. This I mention with emulation and sorrow;
+wishing, as we have the true vine, that we should not produce bastard
+grapes, or that this zeal in an unbeliever were guided by the true light
+of the gospel.
+
+The 23d, being about three cosses short of a city called _Rantepoor_,
+[Rantampoor,] where it was supposed the king would rest, and consult
+what way to take in his farther progress, he suddenly turned off towards
+_Mundu_, but without declaring his purpose. I am of opinion, he took
+this way for fear of the plague at Agra, rather than from any purpose of
+being near the army; for we only marched every other day no more than
+four cosses, and with such a train of baggage as was almost impossible
+to be kept in any degree of order.
+
+The 26th we passed through woods and over mountains, torn with bushes
+and tired by the incommodiousness of an almost impassable way, in which
+many camels perished, and many persons, wearied of these difficulties,
+went away to Agra, and all complained. In this laborious day's march, I
+lost my tents and carts, but by midnight I again fell in with them. The
+king now rested two days, as the leskar could not again recover its
+order in less time; many of the king's women, and thousands of camels,
+carts, and coaches, being left in the woody mountains, where they could
+neither procure food nor water. The king himself got through upon a
+small elephant, which beast can climb up rocks, and get through such
+difficult passes, that no horse or other animal I have seen can follow.
+The 29th we encamped beside the river _Chambet_, [Chumbull.]
+
+The first of January, 1617, I complained to Asaph Khan of the injuries
+offered to the English at Surat, though I was at the same time much
+perplexed by various relations, giving me a bad account of the
+disorderly and outrageous behaviour of my countrymen. Asaph Khan advised
+me not to carry my complaint to the king, which would incense the
+prince; but desired me to ask leave of his majesty to go to visit Sultan
+Churrum, with a letter from him recommending the dispatch of my
+business, and good usage to our nation; so that, carrying a present to
+the prince, I should please both, and succeed in my business. This was
+the same plan I had already formed, and therefore pleased me the better;
+more especially as the king now certainly designed to go forwards to
+Mundu, which is only eight days journey from Burhanpoor, where the
+prince was; and I thought I might as well ride over to him, as remain
+idle in the fields. At noon this day I visited the Persian ambassador,
+being the first time we had leisure for this ceremony, and was received
+by him with much respectful civility. After compliments on both sides
+were over, I proposed to him the settlement of trade in his master's
+dominions, which he engaged to promote as much as lay in his power. He
+gave me a banquet of bad fruit, but being a good fellow, it went off
+well, and he outdid in courtesy every thing I had met with in India. He
+railed loudly against the court, and the king's officers and council,
+using most unusual liberty. He offered to be my interpreter, desiring
+that I might pitch my tents beside his, and he would impart whatever I
+thought proper to the king. When about to part, after long discourse, he
+pressed me to accept a horse with handsome furniture, which was brought
+to the door, but I refused. He then sent for nine pieces of Persian
+silks, and nine bottles of wine, that I might not depart without some
+testimony of his love, but these also I refused to accept, with many
+protestations of affectionate regard. I observed him looking earnestly
+at my sword, which I offered to give him; but, following my example, he
+refused.
+
+At night I visited the king, who spent his time sadly with an old man,
+after reading long letters, and few spoke with him. At his rising, he
+presented to this person, who was a cripple from age, 5000 rupees, and
+took his leave of him with many embraces. I here again met the Persian
+ambassador, who, after some compliments, repenting that he had refused
+my sword, and having a liking to it, now asked it from me, saying, that
+such liberty among friends was reckoned good manners in his country. We
+continued to remove four or five c. every other day, and came on the 7th
+to the goodly river _Shind_. The 18th, the king passed through between
+two mountains, the road having been cut through the woods, but with so
+much trouble and difficulty, and so much encumbrance to the baggage,
+that it was left behind, without provisions for man and beast. This day
+likewise I lost my tents and baggage, but found them again at midnight,
+having been obliged till then to take up my lodging under a tree. This
+part of the country is much infested by thieves, and is hardly under
+obedience to government, except so far as it is kept under by force. It
+belongs to a rajah, who has no desire to see the king. The exactor
+complained, and some few of the people that fled being taken, were
+chained by the neck and brought before the king, all the rest having
+fled into the mountains. At night the king caused the town near which he
+was encamped to be set on fire, appointing a new governor, with orders
+to re-build and new-people the town, and to reduce the district under
+more regular government and better civilization. He left a party of
+horse with the new governor, to enable him to perform this service.
+
+On the 20th, the people who had fled to the mountains, being enraged at
+the burning of their town, set upon a number of stragglers who had been
+left behind, killing many of them, and plundering the rest. The 22d,
+having no accounts of the presents I expected from Surat, I went at
+night to visit the king, to observe how he might receive me. I found him
+seated in an unusual manner, so that I knew not what place to occupy,
+and not willing to mix among the great men, as was offered me, and
+doubting whether I might go into the apartment where the king was, which
+was cut down in the bank of a river, I went to the brink and stood
+alone. There were none near the king, except _Etiman Dowlet_ his
+father-in-law, Asaph Khan, and three or four others. The king observed
+me, and having allowed me to stay a while, he called me in with a
+gracious smile, and pointed with his hand for me to stand beside him, a
+favour so unusual, that it pleased and honoured me, and of which I soon
+experienced the good effects, in the behaviour of the great men of the
+court. He led me to talk with him, and when I called for an interpreter,
+he refused it, pressing me to use such Persian words as I had learnt.
+Our discourse, in consequence, had not much sense or coherence, yet he
+was pleased with it, and shewed his approbation in a very courteous
+manner.
+
+On the 24th of January, news came to court, that the Deccaners were not
+to be frightened out of their dominions, as had been pretended by Asaph
+Khan and Noormahal, on purpose to persuade the king into this
+expedition. For they had sent off all their baggage and other
+impediments into the interior of their country, and lay upon the
+frontiers with 50,000 horse, resolved to fight in defence of their
+dominions; while Sultan Churrum had hitherto advanced no farther than
+Mundu, afraid both of the enemy and Khan Khana. The king's councellors
+now changed their advice, declaring that they expected the Deccaners
+would have been so alarmed by his majesty's passage over the last hills,
+as to have submitted at the terror of his approach; and as they now
+found the contrary, they advised the king to convert his journey into a
+hunting excursion, and to turn his course towards Agra, as the Deccaners
+were not worthy of exposing his sacred person. He answered, that this
+consideration came now too late, as his honour was engaged by having
+advanced so far, and he was resolved to prosecute their former advice
+and his own purpose, whatever might be the hazard. He now daily
+dispatched fresh troops to reinforce the army of his son Churrum, partly
+from his own followers, and the rest commanded from different
+governments. These reinforcements were said to be 30,000 horse, but the
+actual musters were not so numerous. Water was sometimes very scarce in
+camp, and provisions grew daily scarcer and dearer, the part of the
+country in which we now were not being well reduced to good government.
+Not feeling these distresses, the king took no care to have them
+alleviated; and as his khans, or great men, had their provisions brought
+after them, they neglected to inform the king. The whole burden fell
+upon strangers, the soldiers, and the poor followers of the camp, who
+were worst able to endure the hardships. Every alternate day, as
+formerly, the king removed his camp, three, four, or five cosses; yet on
+the 29th of January, we were still sixty cosses short of Mundu.
+
+On the 3d of February, having left the road of the leskar for my own
+ease, and for the benefit of the shade, and while resting me under a
+tree, Sultan Cuserou came upon me suddenly, seeking the same
+conveniences. This is the king's eldest son, formerly mentioned as in
+confinement by the practices of his brother Churrum and his faction, and
+taken out of their hands by the king at his leaving Agimere. He was now
+riding on an elephant, with no great guard or attendance. His people
+called out to me to give place to the prince, which I did, yet I staid
+to look at him, and he called on me to approach; and, after asking some
+familiar and civil questions, I departed. His person is comely, his
+countenance chearful, and his beard hung down as low as his middle. This
+I noticed, by his questions, that he seemed quite ignorant of all that
+passed at court, insomuch that he had never heard of any English, or of
+me their ambassador. The 4th and 5th we continued our march without
+halting, and on the 6th at night, we came to a little tower, newly
+repaired, where the king pitched his tent in a pleasant place, on the
+banks of the river _Sepra_, one coss short of the city of _Ugen_,
+[Oojain,] the chief city of Malwa. This place, called _Callenda_, was
+anciently a seat of the Gentoo kings of Mundu, one of whom was there
+drowned while drunk. He had once before fallen into the river, and was
+taken out by the hair of his head, by a person who dived for him. When
+he came to himself, it was told him how he had been saved from drowning,
+in hopes of having the slave rewarded. He called his deliverer before
+him, and asking how he dared to be so bold as to touch his sovereign's
+head, caused his hands to be cut off. Not long afterwards, while sitting
+drunk beside his wife, and no other person near, he had the same
+misfortune to tumble into the water, at which time she might easily have
+saved him, but did not. Being afterwards asked why she had not, she said
+she knew not but she likewise might have had her hands cut off for her
+reward.
+
+The 10th we removed one coss beyond Oojain; and on the 11th, the king
+rode to that city, to speak with a dervise, or holy man, who dwelt upon
+a hill, and was reported to be 300 years old, but I did not think this
+miracle worth my examination. At noon this day, I received news by a
+foot-post, that the prince, notwithstanding all the firmauns and
+commands of his father, had intercepted the presents and goods on their
+way up, to satisfy his own base and greedy inclinations; and no
+entreaty, gifts, or persuasions, that Mr Terry could offer, who had the
+charge of them, could prevail on him to part with them, and he compelled
+them by force to follow him towards Burhanpoor. Yet he forbore to break
+open the packages, but pressed the English to consent, which they
+refused by my orders, and he thought to win them to his purpose by
+vexatious usage. For it is the custom in this country, for the great men
+to see all merchant goods before even the king, that they may chuse
+first; but I resolved, if possible, to break that bad custom, in our
+behalf.
+
+That he might satisfy his own cupidity, the prince sent up a courier to
+the king, before I could get intelligence, giving notice of having
+detained the goods, but without mentioning that they were presents, and
+requested his authority to have them opened, that he might purchase what
+he fancied. This faithless proceeding of the prince, contrary to his
+promise and his own written orders, satisfied me that I was justifiable
+in the eyes of all, if I carried my complaint directly to the king,
+having used every possible means to procure favour from the prince, and
+having already suffered beyond the patience of a free-born man; so that
+I must now be blameless by using rougher means, having already
+fruitlessly proved all smoother expedients. I therefore resolved to
+appeal for justice, by complaint to the king in person, yet as calmly
+and warily as possible. I feared to go to Asaph Khan on this occasion,
+lest he might oppose my purpose, yet thought my neglect of him might be
+displeasing; wherefore, if I sent to acquaint him that I proposed to
+visit the king at the guzalcan, I dreaded he might suspect my purpose,
+if he had learnt the injury I meant to complain of. For all which
+reasons, I considered how best to avoid being counteracted.
+
+The visit of the king to the dervise, just mentioned, gave me a good
+opportunity, and my new linguist, who was a Greek I had sent for from
+Agimere, being ready, I rode out to meet the king, who was returning
+from the holy man on his elephant. On his majesty's approach, I
+alighted, and made a sign that I wished to speak to the king, who
+immediately turned his monster towards me, and prevented me, by saying,
+"My son has taken your goods and my presents; be not therefore sad, for
+he shall not touch nor open a lock or a seal; for at night I shall send
+him an order to set them free." He made other gracious speeches,
+intimating that he knew I had come brim-full of complaints, and that he
+had spoken first to ease me. At this time, seeing that the king was on
+the road, I could do no more; but at night, without farther seeking to
+Asaph Khan, I went to the guzalcan, determined to proceed with my
+complaints, to get back my goods, and to seek redress for the charges,
+troubles, and abuses at Surat, and all our other grievances.
+
+As soon as I came in, the king called my interpreter before him, and, by
+means of his own, intimated that he had already dispatched his orders so
+effectually, that not even to the value of a hair should be abstracted
+from our goods. In reply, I stated that the injuries, charges, and
+abuses we suffered from the prince's officers, were so numerous and
+intolerable as could not be endured, and that I craved effectual
+redress. To this it was answered, that I must apply to his son for all
+past matters; but I could obtain nothing except fair words, through the
+intermediation of Asaph Khan, so that I was forced to seem satisfied,
+and to seek opportunities as might be for redress, when this false
+friend and pretended advocate was out of the way. The good king fell at
+length to dispute about the laws of Moses, Jesus, and Mahomet; and,
+being in drink, turned lovingly to me, saying, "As I am a king, you
+shall be all welcome, Christians and Jews as well as Mahometans, for I
+meddle not with their faiths; they all come in love, and I will protect
+them from wrong while they are under my dominion, and no one shall be
+allowed to molest or oppress them." This he frequently repeated, but
+being extremely drunk, he fell a-weeping, and into various passions, and
+so kept us till midnight.
+
+Any one may easily conceive how much I was now disconcerted by the
+unjustifiable conduct of the factors, who had detained the presents for
+four months at Surat, and now sent them to fall into the hands of the
+prince, who was then within two days march of Burhanpoor, by which my
+trouble was infinitely increased. But having now began, and suspecting
+that the prince was already sufficiently exasperated upon matters of
+small importance, I thought I might as well lose his favour upon great
+as small matters, so I resolved to try what I could do with the king;
+and, while I waited the result, I sent back the messenger to Mr Terry,
+who was with the presents, desiring him to remain firm, waiting for the
+king's ultimate orders, which I should send him soon.
+
+During this interval, the king had caused the chests to be privately
+brought to him, and had opened them, which came to my knowledge, on
+which I determined to express my dissatisfaction at this usage, and
+having obtained an audience, I made my complaint. He received me with
+much mean flattery, more unworthy even of his high rank than the action
+he had done, which I suppose he did to appease me, as seeing by my
+countenance that I was highly dissatisfied. He began by telling me that
+he had found some things that pleased him much, particularly two
+embroidered cushions, or sweet-bags, a folding glass cabinet, and the
+mastiff dogs, and desired me not to be discontented, for whatever I was
+not disposed to give him, he would return. I answered, that most of
+these things were intended for his majesty, but that it was a great
+indignity to the king my master thus to seize upon what was meant to be
+presented, and not permitted to come through my hands, to whom they were
+sent in the first place. I added, that besides what were destined for
+his majesty, some of these things were intended for Noormahal, some for
+the prince, and the rest to remain in my hands, to serve as occasion
+might require, to bespeak his majesty's favour to protect us from
+injuries daily offered to us by strangers, and some for my friends, or
+my own use, while the rest belonged to the English merchants, with which
+I had no concern. He desired me not to be grieved that he had thus got
+his own choice, as he had not patience to forbear from seeing them, in
+which he did me no wrong, as he believed I wished him to be served
+first, and that he would make satisfaction to the king my master, to
+whom he would justify me. As for the prince and Noormahal, they were all
+one with himself. As to bringing any presents hereafter to procure his
+favour, I might be easy on that score, as it was merely a needless
+ceremony, for I should be always welcome to come to him empty-handed,
+and he would hear me, as it was not my fault, and he would see me
+righted at all times. That he would return me some things to enable me
+to go to his son, and he would pay the merchants for such things as
+belonged to them. He concluded by desiring me not to be angry with the
+freedom he had taken, as he meant well. As I made no reply, he pressed
+to know if I were pleased, to which I answered, that his majesty's
+satisfaction must always please me.
+
+He then began to enumerate all the things he had taken, beginning with
+the mastiffs, embroidered sweet bags, the case of combs and razors, and
+so forth; saying, with a smile, "You would not have me to restore these
+things, and I am delighted with them?" To which I answered in the
+negative. He then mentioned two glass-cases, as mean and ordinary,
+asking me for whom they were intended. I answered, that one was intended
+for his majesty, and the other for Noormahal. "Why then," said he, "you
+will not ask me for that I have, but will be satisfied with one?" To
+this I was under the necessity of yielding. He next asked for whom
+certain hats were intended, which his women liked? I answered, that
+three were for his majesty, and one for myself. He then said, I surely
+would not take back those meant for him, and that he would return mine
+if I needed it; and would not bestow it upon him. To this likewise I had
+to agree. He then asked, whose were the pictures? I answered, that they
+were sent me to use as occasion offered, and to dispose of as my
+business might require. So he called for these, and caused them to be
+opened, examining me about the women, and other little questions, asking
+my judgment and opinions concerning them. The third was a picture of
+Venus leading a satyr by the nose. Commanding my interpreter not to tell
+me what he said on this subject, he shewed it about among his nobles,
+asking them to expound its moral or interpretation, pointing out the
+satyr's horns and black skin, and many other particulars. Every one
+answered according to his fancy; but, liking none of their expositions,
+he reserved his own opinion to himself, and commanding that all these
+notions should be concealed from me, he ordered the interpreter to ask
+me what it meant. I answered, that it was an invention of the painter,
+to shew his art, and that it represented some poetical fable, which was
+all I could say, having never seen it before. He then called upon Mr
+Terry to give his opinion, who could not; on which the king asked him,
+why he brought up with him an invention in which he was ignorant? On
+this I interposed, saying Mr Terry was a preacher, and did not meddle
+with such matters, neither had he any charge of them, having only come
+along with them.
+
+I have related this anecdote of the picture for the instruction of the
+gentlemen of the East India Company, and for him who may succeed me, to
+be very careful that what they send into this country may not be
+susceptible of an evil interpretation; for the king and people are
+pregnant with, and full of, scrupulosity and jealousy. For, though the
+king concealed his opinion, yet I had ground, from what he did say, to
+believe he thought the picture was meant in derision of the Asiatics,
+whom he conceived to be represented by the satyr, as being of their
+complexion; and that Venus leading him by the nose denoted the great
+influence exercised by the women of that country over the men. He was
+satisfied that I had never seen the picture, and therefore pressed me no
+farther about its explanation; yet he shewed no discontent, but rolled
+up the pictures, saying he would accept even the satyr as a present from
+me. As for the saddle, and some other trifles, he said he would have
+them sent to his son, for whom they were fit, as a present from me, to
+whom he would write so effectually, pursuant to his promise, that I
+should stand in no need of a solicitor near him in any of my affairs. He
+added many compliments, excuses, professions, and protestations, such as
+might proceed either from a very noble or very base mind.
+
+He then enquired what was meant by the figures of the beasts, and
+whether they had been sent for me to give him? I had understood that
+they were very mean and ill-shaped images, from which the varnish had
+come off, and were ill-formed lumps of wood. I was really ashamed of
+them, and told him this was no fault of mine, those who had seized them
+being guilty of the affront, in conveying them to his majesty, for whom
+they were not intended, having only been sent to shew the forms of
+certain animals in our country. He quickly replied, "Did you think in
+England that a horse or a bull were strange to me?" I answered, that I
+thought not upon such mean matters, the sender being an ordinary man,
+who had sent these things out of good-will to me, and that I could not
+know what might have been his thoughts. The king then said he would keep
+them all; but that he desired I would procure for him a horse of the
+largest size, a male and female mastiff, some tall Irish greyhounds, and
+such other hunting-dogs as we had in England, adding, on the word of a
+king, if I would procure him these, he would fully recompense me, and
+grant every thing I desired. I answered, that I would engage to have
+them sent by the next ships, but could not answer for their lives in so
+long a voyage, but should direct their skins and bones to be preserved
+if they died, to convince his majesty I had obeyed his commands. Upon
+this he bowed to me repeatedly, laid his hand on his heart, and shewed
+me so much kindness, favour, and familiarity, that all present declared
+they had never seen him use the like to any man before.
+
+This was all my recompence, except that he often desired me to be merry,
+as he would royally requite the wrongs he had done me, and send me home
+to my country with grace and rewards befitting a gentleman. Thus, seeing
+nothing returned of all that was seized but words, I requested his
+majesty would order the velvets and silks to be delivered back, as these
+were merchant goods sent up among mine by the command of his majesty, by
+which they had escaped the rapacity of the prince's officers. He then
+desired Mr Bidulph to be called for, that he might agree with and pay
+him for their value. I then delivered in a memorial, which I had ready
+written, containing my demands for privileges and justice, as otherwise
+I should return home a mere useless person, and under disgrace with my
+sovereign. I pressed likewise to have justice in regard to a debt due by
+Zulphecar Khan, lately deceased. He replied, that he would take such
+order with his son, in regard to our affairs at Surat, that I should
+have no cause to complain, and would give such orders for other places
+as should in every respect shew his regard for me; and, that I might
+return to my master with honour, he would send by me a rich and worthy
+present, together with his letters certifying my good behaviour, and
+giving me much praise. He likewise commanded me to name what I thought
+would be most acceptable. To this I answered, that I could not crave, as
+that was not our custom, neither was it consistent with the honour of my
+sovereign; but I had no doubt that whatever he was pleased to send would
+be acceptable from so potent a monarch, who was already so much loved by
+my master. He then said, that I thought he only asked in jest to please
+me, as he saw I was still discontented; but he assured me he was my
+friend, and would prove so in the end, and swore by his head that he
+spoke sincerely in regard to the presents, and that therefore I must not
+refuse to name some for his satisfaction.
+
+This earnestness forced me to say, that, if his majesty pleased, I
+thought some large Persian carpets might be fittest, as my master did
+not look for gifts of cost and value. To this he answered, that he would
+provide them of all sorts and sizes, and should add to them what else he
+thought fit, that my master might know how great was his respect. Having
+venison of various kinds before him, he gave me half a stag, which he
+said he had himself killed, and that I should see the rest bestowed on
+his ladies. This was presently cut up into four pound pieces, and was
+sent into the interior apartments by his young son and two women in
+their bare hands, just as if he had been doling out such small fragments
+to the poor by way of charity. I had now as abundant grace and fair
+words as might have flattered me into conceit, but our injuries were not
+to be compensated by words, though I was glad of these as a colour for
+dissembling my discontent. In conclusion, he repeated his expressions of
+desire to satisfy me, saying, he hoped I went away contented. To which I
+answered, that his majesty's favour was sufficient to make me any
+amends. He then said that he had only one farther question to ask: "How
+comes it, now that I have seen your presents for two years, that your
+master, before you came, sent by a mean man, a merchant, five times as
+many and more curious toys, and having sent you his ambassador, with a
+commission and his letters mentioning presents, that you should have
+brought so little, so mean, and so much inferior to the other? I
+acknowledge you as an ambassador, and have found you a gentleman in your
+behaviour, but am amazed you are so slightly provided."
+
+I was about to reply, when he cut me short, saying, "I know that all
+this is not your king's fault nor yours, but I shall shew you that I
+esteem you more than those who employed you. At your return, I shall
+send you home with honour and reward, according to your quality and
+merit, not regarding what you have brought me, and shall send a present
+to your lord and master, befitting a king to send. Only this will I
+require from you, and do not expect it from the merchants, that you will
+take with you patterns of the following articles: a quiver and bow-case,
+a coat of mail, a cushion to rest my head upon in our fashion, and a
+pair of boots, which you shall cause to be embroidered for me in England
+in the richest manner, as I know they can do these things in your
+country better than any I have seen. These things I shall expect from
+you, and if you send them, I promise you, on the word of a king, that
+you shall be no loser." This I most chearfully undertook, and he
+commanded Asaph Khan to send me the patterns. He then asked if I had
+any grape wine, which I said I had. He desired to have some of it to
+taste next night, and if he liked it, he would be obliged to me to let
+him have it, otherwise I might make merry with it myself. Thus the whole
+of this night being spent in discourse only with me, he rose up, and I
+departed.
+
+On the 3d of March we arrived at Mundu, into which the king was expected
+to make his entry; but the day for that was not yet fixed, as he waited
+till the astrologers had determined upon an auspicious hour for the
+ceremony, so that we had all to remain without, waiting for the good
+hour. The 6th I entered Mundu, and my servants, whom I had sent before
+to seek out for quarters, had taken possession of a fair court, well
+walled round, in which was a goodly temple and a tomb. Some of the
+king's servants had already taken up their quarters there, but I got
+possession and kept it, being the best within the whole circuit of
+Mundu, though two miles from the king's house; yet it was so nearly
+sufficient, that a very small charge was sufficient to make it
+defensible against the rains, and save me 1000 rupees. The air was
+wholesome, and the prospect pleasant, as it was on the very edge of the
+hill.
+
+I went at night of the 11th to meet the king, but was told, that, on the
+news of a lion[210] having killed some horses, the king had gone out to
+hunt for that animal. I thus had leisure to look out for water; for such
+was the unaccountable want of foresight, that we were brought, with a
+multitude of people and beasts, to a hill on which was no water, so that
+the men and cattle were ready to perish. What little was to be found in
+certain wells and tanks had been taken possession of by the great men,
+and kept by force, so that I could not procure any. The poor forsook the
+city; many more were commanded away by proclamation, and all horses or
+other cattle were ordered to be removed. Thus, those who were in hopes
+of rest, were enforced to seek out new dwelling places, and had to go
+away some two, three, and even four cosses, to the extreme trouble and
+inconvenience of all, and occasioning provisions to rise greatly in
+price. For my own part, I was greatly troubled how to determine. My
+house was very good, and, though far from markets, it was still less
+inconvenient to submit to that trouble than to remain in the fields
+without house or shelter, where I must have gone to encamp, but then I
+was in want of water. Riding about with this view, I came to a great
+tank or pool, which was guarded for a khan, to whom the king had granted
+its use. I sent to acquaint him of my needs, and asked leave to draw
+water at his tank, when he was pleased to allow me to have four loads
+daily. This satisfied me in some sort; and, by selling off some of the
+goods that had been sent me from Surat, and putting away some of my
+cattle, I had hope of being able to live; for which purpose I sent two
+of my carriages, with their servants and cattle, to remain out of town,
+and thus relieved myself from this public calamity. There was not a
+misery or inconvenience that I was not subjected to, in thus following
+the court of the Mogul, owing to the want of good management in the
+government, and the intemperature of the climate.
+
+[Footnote 210: It is almost certain that the lions of these early
+voyages and travels, at least in India, were tigers.--E.]
+
+§7. _A New-Year's Gift.--Suspicions entertained of the English.--Trade
+of Dabul.--Dissatisfaction of the Persian Ambassador.--English Ships of
+War in the Indian Seas_.
+
+On the 12th March, 1617, I carried, as a new-year's gift to the king, a
+pair of very handsome knives belonging to myself, and six glasses
+belonging to the Company, making an apology for the smallness of the
+present, which was well received, and the king used me very graciously,
+saying, that whatever came from my hands he looked on as a sufficient
+present, and as a proof of my love, and that it was now his part to give
+me. He gave orders to an officer to send for Mr Bidulph, to pay him his
+demands to his satisfaction, and all others who were indebted to us were
+ordered by name to pay what they owed to the Company. The king said
+likewise, that he would write to the prince in our favour. But I found
+him unwilling to part with any of our things, of which the best sweet
+bag then lay before him. I replied, that I was very unwilling to go
+empty-handed. The king then commanded that I should come up and stand
+beside him on the steps of the throne, where stood on one side the
+Persian ambassador, and the old king of Candahar on the other, with whom
+I ranked. As soon as I had taken my place, the king asked me for a
+knife, which I sent him next day. The king then called the Persian to
+stand before him, to whom he gave a jewel and a young elephant, for
+which he kneeled and saluted the ground with his head.
+
+On this occasion the same throne and furniture were used as last year,
+the upper end of the hall being adorned with the pictures of the king my
+master, the queen, the princess Elizabeth, Sir Thomas Smith, and some
+others, with two pieces of beautiful Persian tapestry hung below them.
+The throne was of gold, bespangled all over with rubies, emeralds, and
+turquoises. On one side, on a little stage or scaffold, was a company of
+women-singers. I this day sent a dispatch to Surat, giving my advice
+respecting the trade of Persia, and of what had passed on that subject
+with the ambassador, and sent some remembrance to the governor, Ibrahim
+Khan. I had a letter from him in return, stating that the English nation
+had been wronged without his knowledge; but as his authority was now
+augmented by Prince Churrum, we might rest confident in his protection,
+as while he lived and held authority at that place, we should never more
+be liable to abuses, but should be allowed to reside and trade in
+perfect freedom and security.
+
+The 13th I sent as a present to Asaph Khan a richly embroidered pair of
+gloves, and a fair wrought night-cap of my own. He received the cap, but
+returned the gloves, as useless in this country, and requested to have
+some Alicant wine, which I sent him next night. Aganor, whose diligence
+now gave me great hope of success in my desires, sent his Banian
+secretary to inform me that he had orders for the dispatch, of the
+merchant goods, and that his man should attend Mr Bidulph to finish that
+business; that the patterns should be sent me, and that the Mogul meant
+to give me a robe, and money to bear my charges in going to wait upon
+the prince. I returned for answer, that I had no need of a garment or of
+money, but begged his majesty would graciously consider the injuries of
+which I had complained, and of which I had already given an account in
+writing, and that he would please to give me a letter to the prince,
+with some of our own presents which were intended for him, or else state
+my excuse in writing, that his majesty had intercepted and appropriated
+the whole. This was all I wished, as instead of gifts from the king, I
+only required justice.
+
+The 21st I discovered that the Mogul suspected that I meant to steal out
+of the country. These doubts had been insinuated by the prince, either
+as a cover for his own guilt, or out of fear, or perhaps as a cunning
+pretence to cover his own designs. He had informed the king that the
+English meant next year to surprise Surat, and retain possession of that
+place. Indeed, their own folly gave some colour to the idea; as lately,
+upon one of the usual brawls at that place, our people had landed 200
+musqueteers, with whom they marched towards Surat; and, during their
+march, some of the jovial tars gave out to all they met that they meant
+to take the place. This was a most absurd bravado, for a handful of men
+to march twelve miles against a walled town that was able to oppose them
+with 1000 horse, and as many foot armed with match-locks, and having
+besides to pass a river which could be defended by a handful of men
+against an army. It gave, however, just occasion both of scorn and
+offence; and the prince, perhaps to serve some ends of his own, took
+occasion from it to strengthen the fortifications of the town and
+castle, and to send down ordnance for their defence; perhaps a good
+precaution to have an open door to flee to in case his brother should
+live, and have the means of checking his ambitious views. But this
+information concurring with my discontents here, and some free language
+on that occasion, and my pressing demands to be allowed to go to
+Burhanpoor, together with flying reports that we had taken Goa, and were
+preparing a great fleet in England, raised suspicions in the mind of the
+king, though he concealed them as well as he could from me. By my
+explanations, however, I satisfied the king thoroughly, though I was by
+no means so, having been fed only with words, and knew well that our
+residence was only permitted out of fear. The complaints I was enforced
+to make at this court against the misconduct of its officers towards us,
+greatly offended all the great men, as being in some sort their own
+case; for they all live by farming the several governments, in which
+they all practise every kind of tyranny against the natives under their
+jurisdiction, oppressing them with continual exactions, and are
+exceedingly averse from any way being opened by which the king may be
+informed of their infamous proceedings. They grind the people under
+their government, to extract money from them, often hanging men up by
+the heels to make them confess that they are rich, or to ransom
+themselves from faults merely imputed with a view to fleece them. Thus
+my complaints against exaction and injustice made me hated of all about
+the court, as an informer.
+
+The 25th I received a letter from Captain Pepwell, then in Dabul roads,
+stating,--That, according to advice, he had stopped the junk bound for
+Mokha; but having well weighed the caution I had given him respecting
+the correspondence between that prince and Masulipatam, where the
+Solomon then was, he had freed her without spoil. By this courtesy he
+had procured such good entertainment as is seldom had in the Indies,
+being allowed free trade, with a promise of taking 300 pieces of
+broad-cloth yearly, and had sold a good quantity of lead for ready
+money, besides some ordnance. This part of his procedure I do not like
+much, as tending to arm the Indians, and the Portuguese, their friends,
+against the Moguls. If these courtesies proceeded not from the junk
+being still under his command, they give good prospect of an yearly sale
+at that port. However, the freeing of this junk gives me good assurance
+that Captain Pepwell will do nothing prejudicial to the Company, and
+will deliver himself honestly from the jealousies entertained of him at
+Dabul. He signifies his intention of proceeding to Calicut, and if that
+factory be not likely to succeed, he proposes transferring it to Dabul.
+
+The 27th, by a foot-post from Masulipatam, I received advice that the
+Solomon had put to sea, and that the Hosiander was arrived from Bantam,
+with the bad news of the loss of the Hector and Concord, while careening
+in the roads of Jacatra, in the island of Java; but with the good news
+that the Dragon, Clove, and Defence were laden homewards from Bantam. I
+took the opportunity of this post to convey a letter to the governor of
+Dabul respecting the overture made by him of trade to that port; and,
+though I had no great opinion of the place, I would neither have it
+entirely neglected, nor would I encourage the next fleet to proceed
+there, unless on better assurance than a forced friendship, and offers
+made when their junk was in our power. I signified the causes of our
+having stopped their goods formerly for refusing trade to Sir Henry
+Middleton; but finding him now better disposed, and willing to establish
+a league of trade and amity, and to take a good quantity of our cloth, I
+required to know if he were hearty in these motions; and willing to act
+as a man of honour; as a pledge of which, I requested him to procure for
+us a firmaun from his sovereign, with such privileges as were fit for
+merchants, with a royal engagement under his seal to fulfil all the
+friendly offers made to us by this officer; desiring this firmaun might
+be transmitted to me with all expedition, to my present residence at
+the Mogul court. By this, I said, I should be satisfied that they meant
+to treat us with good faith, and on its reception, I would undertake, on
+the behalf of the king of England, that a firm and lasting peace should
+be established with his master, whose subjects should have free passage
+on the seas without molestation from our ships; and should send yearly a
+ship to trade at his port, or, if desired, should establish a resident
+factory there. I have no doubt, either through fear or favour, that some
+good sales may be made there yearly, but I doubt of being able to
+procure any valuable investments.
+
+In this I proceed cautiously, as all men ought on such occasions, not
+with too eager apparent desire, nor swallowing hungrily any offered
+conditions, without due assurances. Strict care in the first settling is
+of the utmost importance, as you can never mend your first
+establishment, and may often impair it. Every man succeeds best at
+first, when new and a stranger; for, by the natural levity of these
+barbarians, they are fond of changes, and grow weary of things in their
+usual train. I have committed this dispatch to the care of Mr Bangham,
+whom I have directed to make diligent enquiry into the commodities,
+advantages, and inconveniences attendant on our projected trade, and to
+make himself acquainted with the humours and affections of the Deccaners
+towards us.
+
+On the 30th of April the Persian ambassador sent to excuse himself for
+going away without paying his respects to me, alleging illness, but his
+messenger said he was not so sick as he pretended; but, finding no
+success in his negociations with the king, he had taken his leave, and
+made a present of thirty-five horses at his departure. In return, the
+king gave him 3000 rupees, which he took in great scorn. Upon which, to
+justify himself, the king caused two lists to be drawn up, in one of
+which all the presents made by the ambassador were enumerated, with
+their values, meanly rated, much lower than their real worth; and, in
+the other, all the gifts the king had presented to him since his
+arrival,--as slaves, melons, pine-apples, plantains, hawks, plumes of
+feathers, the elephant, and not even forgetting the drink he had
+received, all charged at extremely high prices, much above their value.
+These two lists were laid before the ambassador, with their amounts
+summed up, offering him the rest of the money to make up the balance.
+Owing to this bad usage, the Persian feigned himself sick of a fever, as
+an excuse for not waiting upon Asaph Khan and Etemon Dowlet, for which
+reason he could not come through the town to visit me, without
+discovering the counterfeit, but desired his messenger to acquaint me
+with the truth, which Aganor as freely delivered, and with no small
+bitterness against the king, and to which I seemed unwilling to listen.
+The ambassador also desired him to assure me that he was ready to serve
+my nation in his country, to the utmost of his power. I presented him
+with some Alicant wine, and a few knives, to be taken to his master, and
+so we parted. The 12th May I received news of a great blow given by the
+Turkish army to the Persians, the former having taken and utterly
+destroyed Tauris; and that Shah Abbas was unable to keep the field.
+
+On the night of the 25th, a lion and a wolf[211] broke into my quarters,
+and gave us great alarm, carrying off some sheep and goats that were in
+my court-yard, and leaping with them over a high wall. I sent to ask
+leave to kill them, as in that country no person may meddle with lions
+except the king. Receiving permission, and the animals returning next
+night, I ran out into the court upon the alarm, and the beast missing
+his prey, seized upon a little dog before me, and escaped; but my
+servants killed the wolf, which I sent to the king.
+
+[Footnote 211: More likely to have been a tyger and hyena.--E.]
+
+The 14th of June, a cabinet belonging to the jesuits was sent up from
+Cambay, containing medicines and other necessaries, and a letter, which
+were betrayed by the bringer, and delivered to the king. He opened the
+cabinet, and sent for the _padre_ to read the letter, and to see every
+thing contained in the boxes; but, finding nothing to his liking, he
+returned all. I mention this circumstance as a caution to all who deal
+in this country, to be careful of what they write or send, as it is the
+humour of this prince to seize and see every thing, lest any curiosity
+or toy should escape his greed.
+
+The 18th, I had letters from Ahmedabad, advising that indigo had greatly
+fallen in price, in consequence of the non-arrival of the flotilla from
+Goa. The unicorn's horn had been returned, as without virtue, concerning
+which I sent new advice.[212] Many complaints were made concerning Surat
+and others, which I do not insert. I received two letters from
+Burhanpoor, stating the doubtfulness of recovering the debt due to Mr
+Ralph Fitch. Spragge had returned from the leskar or camp of the Deccan
+army, where Melick Amber, with much show of honour, had given instant
+orders for searching the whole camp; but the Persian had fled to
+Visiapour, so that the business was referred by letter to a Dutchman who
+resided there. The general of the Deccan army desired Spragge to be the
+means of sending English cloth and swords to his camp, which is within
+six days march of Burhanpoor; and, in my opinion, this might be a good
+employment for some idle men, and an excellent opportunity to get vent
+for our dead commodities.
+
+[Footnote 212: This of the unicorn's horn, or rather the horn of a
+rhinoceros, may allude to some supposed inherent virtue of detecting
+poison, anciently attributed to cups made of that material.--E.]
+
+The 30th of July I received news from Surat of two Dutch ships being
+cast away on the coast near Damaun. They were from the southwards, laden
+with spices and China silks, and bound for the Red Sea; but losing the
+season, with much bad weather, they had tried to take shelter in
+Socatora, or some other port on the coast of Arabia, but failing after
+beating about many weeks, they bore away for Surat, hoping to be able to
+ride out the adverse monsoon in safety, as they had done in other years.
+But the years differ, and being forced to come to anchor, they had to
+cut away their masts by the violence of the gale; the smaller vessel of
+sixty tons was beaten to pieces, and the cables of the other breaking,
+she was driven ashore in oosy ground, within musket shot of the land.
+The ship kept upright; but having lost their long-boat, and the skiff
+being unable to live, four men got ashore on a raft. The spring-tides
+heaved her up so near the shore, that much of her goods and all her
+people were saved.
+
+_Maree Rustam_, who had been king of Candahar, came to visit me on the
+21st of August, and brought a present of wine and fruit, staying about
+half an hour, and concluded his visit by begging a bottle of wine. This
+day Sultan Cusero had his first prospect of long-hoped liberty, being
+allowed to leave his prison, and to take the air and his pleasure in a
+banqueting house near mine. Sultan Churrum had contracted a marriage at
+Burhanpoor, without waiting for the king's consent, for which he had
+fallen under displeasure; and some secret practices of his against the
+life of his brother had been discovered, on which he was ordered to
+court in order to clear himself. By the advice of their father, Etimon
+Dowlet, Noormahal and Asaph Khan now made proposals of friendship and
+alliance with Cusero. This news has diffused universal joy among the
+people, who now begin to hope that their good prince may recover his
+full liberty. The 22d the king feasted Asaph Khan. The 25th Asaph Khan
+feasted Noormahal. It is reported the Prince Cusero is to make a firm
+alliance, as above stated, and is to take a wife of his father's choice.
+This will produce his entire liberty, and the ruin of our proud
+oppressor, Churrum.
+
+The 1st of September was the solemnity of the king's birth-day, when he
+is publicly weighed, to which I went. I was conducted into a beautiful
+garden, in the middle of which was a great square pond or tank, set all
+round with trees and flowers, and in the middle was a pavilion or
+pleasure-house, under which hung the scales in which the king was to be
+weighed. The scales were of beaten gold, set with many small stones, as
+rubies and turquoises. They hung by chains of gold, large and massy, yet
+strengthened by silken ropes for more security. The beam and tressels
+from which it hung were covered with thin plates of gold. In this place
+all the nobles of the court attended, sitting round on rich carpets; and
+waiting the king's arrival. He appeared at length, cloathed, or laden
+rather, with diamonds, rubies, pearls, and other precious vanities,
+making a great and glorious shew. His sword, target, and throne were
+corresponding in riches and splendour. His head, neck, breast, and arms,
+above the elbows, and at the wrist, were all decorated with chains of
+precious stones, and every one of his fingers had two or three rich
+rings. His legs were as it were fettered with chains of diamonds, rubies
+as large as walnuts, and some larger, and such pearls as amazed me. He
+got into one of the scales, crouching or sitting on his legs like a
+woman; and there were put into the other scale, to counterpoise his
+weight, many bags said to contain silver, which were changed six times,
+and I understood his weight was 9000 rupees, which are almost equal to a
+thousand pounds sterling. After this, he was weighed against gold,
+jewels, and precious stones, as I was told, for I saw none, as these
+were all in bags, and might only have been pebbles. Then against cloth
+of gold, silk stuffs, cotton goods, spices, and all sort of commodities;
+but I had to believe all as reported, as these were all in packages.
+Lastly, against meal, butter, and corn, all of which is said to be
+distributed to the Banians, with all the rest of the stuff, but I saw
+all carefully carried away, and nothing distributed. The silver only is
+reserved for the poor, and serves for the ensuing year, as it is the
+king's custom at night frequently to call for some of these before him,
+to whom, with great familiarity and humility, he distributes some of
+this money with his own hands.
+
+While the king was sitting in the scale, he looked upon me and smiled,
+but spoke not, as my interpreter could not be admitted. After he was
+weighed, he ascended the throne, and had basins of nuts, almonds, and
+spices of all sorts, artificially made of thin silver, which he threw
+about, and for which his great men scrambled prostrate on their bellies.
+I thought it not decent for me to do so, which seeing, he reached one
+basin almost full, and poured the contents into my cloak. The nobles
+were so bold as to put in their hands to help themselves, and so thick,
+that they had soon left me none, if I had not pocketed up a remainder.
+Till I had myself been present, I was told that he scattered gold on
+this occasion, but found it to be only silver, and so thin, that all I
+had at first, being thousands of small pieces, had not weighed sixty
+rupees, of which I saved to the amount of twenty rupees, yet a good
+dishful, which I keep to shew the ostentation of this display of
+liberality; for, by my proportion, I think all he cast away could not
+exceed the value of an hundred pounds. At night he drinks with his
+nobles from rich plate, to which I was invited; but, being told that I
+must not refuse to drink, and their liquors being excessively hot and
+strong, I durst not stay to endanger my health, being already somewhat
+indisposed with a slight dysentery.
+
+On the 9th September the king rode out to take the air on the banks of
+the river _Darbadath_, [Nerbuddah] a distance of five cosses. As he was
+to pass my house, I mounted my horse to meet him; and, as it is the
+custom for all men whose gates he passes, to make him some present,
+which is taken as a good sign, and is called _mombareck_, or good news;
+and as I had nothing to give, neither could go with nothing, nor stay
+without offence, I ventured to take with me a fair book, well bound,
+filleted, and gilt, being the last edition of Mercator's Maps of the
+World, which I presented, saying, That I had nothing worthy the
+acceptance of so great a king, but begged to offer him the world, in
+which he had so great and rich a share. He accepted it in good part,
+laying his hand repeatedly on his breast, saying, that every thing which
+came from me was welcome. He asked about the arrival of our ships, which
+I said we daily expected. He then said, he had some fat wild-hogs lately
+sent him from Goa, and if I would eat any he would send me some at his
+return, I made him due reverence, answering, that any thing from his
+majesty was to me a feast.
+
+He rode on upon his elephant, and when I offered to accompany him to the
+gate, the way being stony, he desired me to return, bidding God keep me.
+He asked which was my house, and being told, praised it, as indeed it
+was one of the best in the place, though only an old temple and a large
+tomb, enclosed by a wall. Repeating his farewell, he said the way was
+bad, and desired me to go home, with much shew of courtesy and kindness,
+on which I took my leave.
+
+On the 16th I went to repay the visit of Maree Rustam, prince of
+Candahar, who sent word at my arrival that he dared not receive any
+visit unless he asked leave of the king, or acquainted Etimon Dowlet or
+Asaph Khan, which he would do at the next durbar. I made answer, that he
+needed not, as I never meant any more to trouble myself about so uncivil
+a person. That I knew well this was a mere shift out of ill manners, as
+the king would be no more angry for his receiving me at his house than
+for coming to mine, and that I cared not for seeing him, and had only
+come in pure civility to return his visit. His man desired me to wait
+till he had reported what I said to his master, but I would not. At
+night I waited upon the king at court, who spoke to me about the book of
+maps; but I forbore to speak to him about our debts. But on the 25th,
+though very weak, I went again to court to make trial of the king about
+our debts. _Muckshud_, one of our debtors, having pled in excuse for not
+paying that he had missed receiving his _prigany_, and knew not how to
+pay unless he sold his house. I delivered the merchants petition to the
+king, which he caused to be read aloud by Asaph Khan; all the names of
+the debtors, with the sums they owed, and their respective sureties,
+being distinctly enumerated. The king then sent for Arad Khan, the chief
+officer of his household, and the cutwall, and gave them some orders
+which I did not understand. Then reading over the names, and finding
+some of them dead, and some strangers, he made enquiry as to their
+abilities and qualities, and what goods they had received. Concerning
+Rulph,[213] Asaph Khan undertook to speak to the prince on the subject,
+and to get that affair concluded when he came.
+
+[Footnote 213: In the edition by Churchill, this person is named Sulph,
+but no elucidation is given.--E.]
+
+My interpreter was now called in, and the king, turning to me, said that
+our merchants had trusted people according to their own fancies, and to
+whom they pleased, not coming to him with an inventory of their goods,
+and therefore, if their debtors were insufficient, it was their own
+faults, and they had no reason to expect payment of their money from
+him. This I supposed to allude to his servant _Hergonen_, lately dead,
+whose goods had been seized to the king's use. He added, however, as
+this was the first time, he would now assist me, and cause our money to
+be paid: but, if the English should hereafter deliver their goods to his
+servants without money, they must stand to the hazard themselves. But if
+when they brought their commodities to court, they would bring the
+inventory of the whole to him, he would first serve himself, and then
+distribute the rest among such as were willing to buy them; and then, if
+any failed in payments, he would pay the money himself.
+
+This indeed is the custom of the Persian merchants, who bring all to the
+king, as I have often seen. He first takes his own choice, and delivers
+the rest among his nobles, his scribes writing down the names of all to
+whom they are delivered, and the sums, another officer settling the
+prices. After which a copy is given to the merchant, who goes to their
+houses for his money; and if they do not pay, there is a particular
+officer who has orders to enforce payment. It was then told to my
+interpreter that Arad Khan was to call the debtors before him, and cause
+them to pay. This did not satisfy our merchants, but it seemed to me a
+just and gracious answer, and better than private persons usually get
+from great princes.
+
+Hearing that I had been sick and was in want of wine, the king ordered
+me to have five bottles, and when these were done that I should send for
+five more, and so from time to time as I needed. He sent me also the
+fattest wild-hog I ever saw, which had been sent from Goa by Mucrob
+Khan. This was sent to me at midnight by a _huddy_, with this message,
+that it had eaten nothing but sugar and butter since it came to the
+king. I accepted this as a sign of great favour, which, in this court, I
+know to be a great one. He then sent for the book of maps, saying, that
+he had shewed it to his _mulahs_, and not one of them could read a word
+of it, wherefore I might have it again. To this I answered, that his
+majesty in this would use his pleasure; and so it was returned.
+
+The 26th, a rajah of the Rajpoots being in rebellion in the hills, not
+above twenty cosses from the leskar, the king sent out two Omrahs with a
+party of horse to fetch him in a prisoner. But he stood on his defence,
+slew one of the omrahs and twelve _maansipdares_, [munsubdars] and about
+500 men, sending an insulting message to the king to send his son
+against him, as he was no prey to be subdued by ordinary forces.
+
+The 2d September, Sultan Churrum made his entry into Mundu, accompanied
+by all the great men, in wonderous triumph. Contrary to all our
+expectations, the king received him as if he had been an only son. All
+the great men and the queen-mother[214] went to meet him at the distance
+of five cosses from the town. I had sent to Asaph Khan to excuse me not
+meeting him, for I was not able to stir from sickness, and besides, had
+no presents to give. I also sent some of my servants with my just excuse
+to the prince, to which he, in his pride, only answered by a nod.
+
+[Footnote 214: Both in the Pilgrims and in Churchill's Collection this
+personage is termed the king's mother; but it is more probable she was
+the mother of Sultan Churrum.--E.]
+
+The 5th of September I received advice of our ships being arrived at
+Surat, the admiral amissing, but all the rest well, and that they had
+taken two English rovers or pirates, which were found in chase of the
+queen-mother's ship returning from the Red Sea, which they fortunately
+rescued and brought safe in. Had this ship been taken, we had all been
+in trouble. With these letters, I received the Company's letter, the
+invoice of the goods, and instructions for Persia, with various other
+notes of advice. They advised me also, that, owing to the admiral's
+absence, they knew not what course to take with the pirates they had
+taken. I immediately sent orders to Surat concerning all business, as
+will appear in my letters.
+
+The 6th, I rode to visit the prince at his usual hour of giving
+audience, intending to bid him welcome, and to acquaint him with our
+business, meaning to shew him all proper respect; and, that I might not
+come empty-handed, I bought a fine gold chain, made in China, which I
+proposed to have presented to him. On sending in to acquaint him that I
+was in waiting, he returned a message, desiring me to come next morning
+at sun-rise, when he sat to be worshipped, or to wait till he rode to
+court, which I must have done at his door. I took this in high dudgeon,
+having never been denied access by the king his father; but such is this
+prince's pride, that he might even teach Lucifer. This made me answer
+roundly, that I was not the prince's slave, but the free ambassador of a
+great king; and that I would never more visit or attend upon him who had
+denied me justice; but I should see him at night with the king, to whom
+only I should now address myself, and so I departed. I went at night to
+the king, who received me graciously. I made my reverence to the prince,
+who stood beside his father, but he would not even once stir his head.
+Then I acquainted the king, that, according to his order, I had brought
+an abstract to him of our merchandize, and waited his commands. After
+his usual manner, he asked many questions as to what were brought, and
+seemed mightily satisfied with what was in the inventory, especially
+with the tapestry, promising me all the favour and privileges I could
+desire. He enquired for dogs, but I could say nothing on that subject.
+He then asked for jewels, but I told him these were dearer in England
+than in India, at which he rested satisfied. I durst not name the pearls
+for many reasons, but chiefly as I knew our people in that case would be
+way-laid by the prince, and it would have cost me infinite trouble to
+get them back. I thought they might easily be brought on shore, and so
+to court, by stealth, and I thought they would be the more valued the
+less they were expected: but my main reason of concealment was, that I
+expected to make friends by their means; therefore; when Asaph Khan
+pressed me on that head, I desired him to make the answer already
+mentioned of their dearness, saying that I would speak to him farther
+when alone. He readily understood me, and made my excuse accordingly.
+
+Seeing the king to be well pleased, I thought it a good time to move
+him again about our debts; and having my petition ready, I opened it and
+held it up, as offering it to the king. He happened not to notice this,
+and it being discovered by some others what was its contents, who knew
+the king would be enraged that his order was neglected, one of them
+stept up to me, and gently drew down my hand, requesting me not to
+present that petition. I answered, that Arad Khan had absolutely refused
+me justice, and I had no other resource. Arad heard this, being by, and
+went in much fear to Asaph Khan, desiring him to hinder me from making
+my complaint. I answered, that our ships were arrived, and we could
+neither brook nor endure such delays and loss of time. Thereupon they
+consulted together, and calling the cutwall, gave directions for him to
+put the king's orders, into execution. The cutwall, accordingly, beset
+the tents of our debtors that very night, and catched some of them; so
+that we shall now have justice. I had many thanks from all the omrahs
+for the protection given to the queen's ship, and the civility shown by
+our people to the passengers. This they said they had properly
+represented to the king, who took it kindly, and they all declared they
+were obliged in honour to love our nation, and would do us every service
+in their power; yet they all wondered we could not govern our own
+people, and that any should presume to take ships out of the kingdom,
+and to rob upon the seas without leave of our king.
+
+When the king arose, Asaph Khan carried me with hint to his
+retiring-place, where we first translated the inventory of our goods
+into Persian, to shew the king an hour after. In this inventory I
+inserted the money with some addition, that the king might see we
+brought profit into his dominions by our trade. I next inserted the
+cloths of different kinds, with the fine wares; and, lastly, the gross
+commodities, concluding by praying his majesty to give orders for what
+he wished to purchase, and then to give us liberty of selling the rest.
+When this was finished, Asaph Khan asked why I wished to speak with him
+in private, desiring me to speak my mind with freedom, bowing, and
+protesting such friendship as I never could have expected. I told him,
+that my reason for asking this private conference was to have his
+advice. It was certainly true that I had some things which were not
+enumerated, but had been so badly used last year that I durst not trust
+any one; but, to shew my confidence in him, I was willing to open
+myself to him, on his oath of secrecy, which he readily gave. I then
+told him that I had a rich pearl, and some other strings of fair pearls,
+and knew not whether it were fit to tell the king, lest the prince might
+be displeased. I informed him likewise, how I had gone in the morning to
+visit the prince, and of his discourtesy, and my consequent
+determination; yet I knew his favour was necessary for us, and I had
+hopes to recover it by means of this pearl, which I had purposely
+concealed for him. This was my purpose, and the reason of my
+concealment; and as he was father-in-law to the prince, and the king's
+favourite, I was desirous to please both, and therefore begged his
+advice.
+
+After embracing me, he said I had done discreetly, and should acquaint
+neither; for, if I did, I should never get out of trouble. If the king
+were to know of it, he would indeed use me courteously, but would make a
+great stir to get it into his hands, and then, according to custom, I
+might sue in vain to recover my own. The prince, I knew, was ravenously
+greedy and tyrannical, and wearied all with his scandalous exactions. He
+desired me to steal all ashore, trusting none, and explained to me many
+means of conveyance, bidding me observe the usage of the Portuguese on
+the like occasions; adding, that he wished to purchase the pearl, and if
+I would grant his desire, would deposite its value in my hands, whatever
+I chose to ask, and, in recompence for this confidence I had reposed in
+him, he would hereafter be my solicitor in all things, and assured me I
+could do nothing without him. I answered, that I was most willing to let
+him have the pearl, and hoped he would never betray my confidence.
+Having received his oath, and a ceremony of mutual covenant, by crossing
+thumbs according to the custom of the country, we embraced. I promised
+to be guided entirely by him, and he engaged to do every thing I
+required for the safe conveyance of the other things, engaging to give
+me firmauns so that no person should touch any thing, but all should
+come safely to me, to dispose of at my pleasure.
+
+He engaged likewise to reconcile me to the prince, and would take me
+with him the next time he went to visit him, and would make the prince
+use me with all manner of grace and favour; adding, that I should have a
+particular judge assigned me to take care of our business, and to give
+us every satisfaction we could desire. He also advised me to make a
+present to his sister, Queen Noormahal, and she would prevail upon the
+king to give me money. To this I replied, that I wished only for the
+good usage of my countrymen. He then carried me to the king, to whom I
+presented the inventory translated into Persian, and was graciously
+received. He asked me if the arras were a present, to which I answered
+in the affirmative, as the prince was by, lest it might be seized. In
+conclusion, the king said he would take a considerable quantity of our
+cloths and other commodities, desiring me to cause them to be brought up
+speedily, and directed Asaph Khan to make out an order for their free
+passage in the prince's name. I was well pleased with the success of
+this day; for though I knew that there was no faith to be placed in
+these barbarians, yet I was sure Asaph Khan would deal truly in this, as
+he was to help himself, and durst not betray me, lest he should miss the
+pearl, neither could I suspect him afterwards, as he could not betray my
+secret without discovering his own falsehood to the prince.
+
+§8. _Asaph Khan protects the English for hope of Gain, as also
+Noormahal.--Arrival of Mr Steel.--Danger to the Public from private
+Trade.--Stirs about a fort_.
+
+On the 12th October, according to his promise, Asaph Khan carried me
+along with him to visit the prince, and introduced me into his private
+apartment, when I presented ham with a small Chinese gold chain in a
+china cup. He used me indifferently, but Asaph Khan persuaded him to
+alter his course towards us, representing that he gained yearly by us a
+lack of rupees, and that as our trade increased every year, it would in
+time bring him greater profit; but that if we were harshly used, we
+would be enforced to quit both Surat and the country, from which great
+inconveniences might arise. We were in some measure his subjects, and
+if, from desire of procuring rarities, he used us ill, we would
+necessarily strive to the utmost to conceal all we brought from his
+knowledge; but if he gave us that liberty and encouragement which was
+fitting, we would then use our endeavours to bring every thing to him.
+He represented, that my only study was to give content to his highness,
+and to procure his favour and protection, and therefore that he ought to
+receive me honourably when I came to visit him, and according to my
+quality, which would give satisfaction to my nation, and encourage me to
+serve him. Finally, be moved his highness to give me a firmaun for our
+present use, which he easily obtained, with a promise of all manner of
+satisfaction. The prince accordingly gave immediate orders to his
+secretary to draw it up in every point to our content, and to write a
+letter to the governor recommending it to his attention; adding, that I
+should at all times have any other letters I desired.
+
+It is thus easy to be seen what base and unworthy men I have to deal
+with. For the sordid hope only of buying some toys, Asaph Khan has
+become so reconciled to me as to betray his son-in-law, and is
+obsequious even to flattery. The ground of all his friendship is his
+desire to purchase the gold taken in the prize, and some other knacks;
+for which purpose he desires to send down one of his servants, which I
+could not deny without losing him, after having so long laboured to gain
+his favour; neither was this any disadvantage to us, as his payment is
+secure, and will save us much trouble and charge in selling elsewhere,
+especially the wine and other luggage that is apt to spoil in carriage.
+For this purpose he obtained an order from the prince under false
+pretences, and wrote himself in our favour to the governor of Surat,
+doing us all manner of kindness. There is a necessity for his
+friendship, as his word is a law in this empire, and therefore I did not
+choose to seem to notice his unworthiness. I hope by this procedure to
+win him to our advantage, or at least to make our present good use of
+him. On this occasion I moved him to procure us a firmaun for trade with
+Bengal, which he has promised, though he would never before hearken to
+that request. He likewise now prosecutes our debtors as if they were his
+own; and in passing the residence of the cutwall on his elephant, he
+called upon him to command dispatch, which was a most unusual favour.
+Upon this _Groo_ was immediately imprisoned, and _Muckshud_ had only two
+days allowed him to pay us. Thus I doubt not that in ten days we shall
+recover to the amount of 44,000 rupees, though our debtors are the most
+shifting false knaves in all India.
+
+On the 21st, a servant came to me from Asaph Khan, bearing a message
+from Noormahal, intimating that she had moved the prince for another
+firmaun, which she had obtained, and by which all our goods were taken
+under her protection; and that she was ready to send down her servant
+with authority to take order for our good establishment, and to see that
+we were no way wronged. He said farther, that Asaph Khan had done this,
+for fear of the prince's violence, and to guard against his custom of
+delays; and that now when the queen his sister had desired to be our
+protectress, he was sure the prince would not meddle; and farther
+assured me, upon his honour, that I should receive every thing consigned
+to me, for which the queen had written the most positive orders, and had
+directed her servant to assist our factors, that we might never more
+have any cause of complaint at Surat. He desired, therefore, that I
+might write a few lines to the captains and factors, directing them to
+use the queen's servant kindly, and allow him to buy for her some toys,
+such as I could spare. This I durst not deny, though I clearly saw the
+greediness which was covered under this request; and I gave him a note,
+as desired, making a condition that I should see a copy of the firmaun,
+which was already sealed, and could not be seen without leave.
+
+By all this you may see how easy it were to sell commodities here, by a
+little good management. Last year we were not looked at; but now, that I
+have translated the inventory of fine wares for the king, yet concealing
+the pearls, every one is ready to run down to Surat, to make purchases.
+Noormahal and Asaph Khan now study how to do me good offices; and many
+of the great men are soliciting me for letters, that they may send down
+their servants, so that if you had trebled the present consignment, it
+might all have been bought up aboard ship, and have saved you the
+customs, expence of carriage, and much spoil. I have therefore directed
+the factory to sell to the servants of Noormahal and Asaph Khan,
+whatsoever can be spared, so as to leave me a decent proportion for my
+uses at court. By this, much trouble and charges will be saved, the
+prince prevented from plunder and exactions, and our friends confirmed;
+and yet I hope to have enough remaining to please the king and his son.
+At the delivery of their presents, Asaph Khan has undertaken to procure
+the phirmaunds for our trade at Bengal or any other port, and even to
+procure us a general privilege for free trade and residence in every
+part of the king's dominions.
+
+On the 24th of October the king departed to a considerable distance from
+Mundu,[215] and went from place to place among the mountains, leaving us
+quite at a loss what way we should take, as no one knew his purpose. On
+the 25th I had a warrant for ten camels at the king's rates of hire; and
+on the 29th I removed to follow the king, being forced to quit Mundu,
+which was now entirely deserted. The 31st I arrived at the king's tents,
+but found he had gone with few company on a hunting party for ten days,
+no person being allowed to follow without leave. The leskar or camp was
+scattered about in many parts, suffering great inconveniences from bad
+water, scarcity and consequent dearness of provisions, sickness, and all
+sorts of calamities incident to so great a multitude; yet nothing can
+prevent the king from following his pleasures. I here learnt that it was
+quite uncertain whether the king proposed going to Agra or Guzerat; and,
+though the latter was reported, the former was held to be more probable,
+as his counsellors wished to be at rest. Yet, because the king was
+expected to linger here about a month, I was advised and thought it best
+to send for the goods and presents, and endeavour to conclude my
+business, rather as defer it upon uncertainties. By this means, I hoped
+to obtain some rest, which I much needed, as I was very weak, and not
+likely to recover by daily travel, and the use of cold raw muddy water.
+
+[Footnote 215: In the edition of Churchill, the king is said to have
+removed twenty-four cosses from Mundu, while in the Pilgrims it is
+called only four cosses.--E.]
+
+Richard Steel and Jackson arrived on the 2d November, 1617, with the
+pearls and other small matters, which they had brought privately on
+shore according to my order, which I received and gave them acquittance
+for. I had a conference with Mr Steel about his projects of water-works,
+intended to advance the sale of lead, which I did not approve of,
+because I knew the character of this people, and that this affair must
+be begun at our expence, while after trial we should not enjoy the
+profit, but the natives be taught.[216] Besides, it did not promise any
+advantages for the sale of our commodity, as the lead would be trebled
+in price by land-carriage, and could not be delivered at Agra so cheap
+as other lead could be purchased there. Yet I was willing that he should
+make a trial, by carrying his workmen to Ahmedabad, and meeting me
+there; where, by the aid of Mukrob Khan, who only among these people is
+a friend to new inventions, I would make offer to the king of their
+inventions, and try what conditions might be procured; but, in my
+opinion, it is all money and labour thrown away. The company must shut
+their ears against these projectors, who have their own emoluments much
+more in view than the profits of their masters. Many things look fair in
+discourse, and in theory satisfy curious imaginations, which in practice
+are found difficult and fanciful. It is no easy matter to alter the
+established customs of this kingdom; where some drink only of rain
+water, some only that of a holy river, and others only of such as is
+brought at their own cost.
+
+[Footnote 216: This project is no where explained, but might possibly be
+intended for conveying water, by means of machinery and leaden pipes,
+for the supply of some palace or city in India.--E.]
+
+As for his second project, of inducing the caravans and merchants of
+Lahore and Agra, who are in use to travel by Candahar into Persia, to
+come by the river Indus and to go by sea in our ships to Jasques or the
+Persian gulf it is a mere dream. Some men may approve of it in
+conversation, but it will never be adopted in practice. The river Indus
+is but indifferently navigable downwards, and its mouth is already
+occupied by the Portuguese; while its navigation upwards, against the
+stream, is very difficult. Finally, we must warrant their goods, which
+cannot be done by a fleet; neither did even the Portuguese transport any
+of these goods, excepting only those of Scindy and Tatta, which traded
+by means of their own junks, having _cartas_ or passes from the
+Portuguese, for which the natives paid a small matter, to secure them
+from being captured by the Portuguese cruizers; and the emoluments of
+these passes came into the pockets of the chiefs of Diu, Damaun, and
+Ormus. Even if all other difficulties were removed, yet will the caravan
+of Lahore be never induced to take this passage, as it mostly consists
+of returning Persians and Armenians, who know the journey from Jasques
+to be almost as bad as that through Candahar; and the small trade from
+the environs of Scindy is not worth mentioning. Yet, for his better
+satisfaction, I am content that he may learn his errors by his own
+experience, so that it be not done at the charges of the company: But I
+suppose he will let it fall to the ground, not knowing at which end to
+begin.
+
+As to the third project, for uniting the trade of the Red Sea with this
+of Surat, I recommended to him to use his endeavours; for it is already
+begun. The peril of this trade in the Guzerat ships is very obvious,
+owing to pirates in these seas; wherefore I have no doubt that many
+merchants may be induced to load their goods in our ships on freight; by
+which means we should make ourselves many useful friends among these
+people, supply our own wants, save the export of bullion, and for this
+year employ one of the ships belonging to the old account, that should
+return in September, receiving the remains of this joint stock, which
+will be sufficient to re-load a great ship, and would otherwise be
+transported at great loss. This I explained and urged, shewing which
+way it might be accomplished, and recommended by him to the commander,
+the Cape merchants and your factors, as will appear by my letters. This
+measure, if followed, must evidently be to your profit, even if nothing
+were procured towards it by freight from the Guzerat merchants; as,
+having so many empty vessels for so small a stock, and two pirate ships
+fallen into your hands, they had better even go empty as not go. There
+are many good chances in the Red Sea and in the way, and though they did
+nothing else than bring back the goods you have at Mokha and other ports
+in that sea, this would repay the charges of the voyage and be ready in
+time.
+
+I find Mr Steel high in his conceits, insomuch that he seems to have
+forgotten the respect due to me. He and Mr Kerridge are at variance,
+which I use every endeavour to assuage. As for his wife, I have told
+Steel that she cannot remain in this country without much inconvenience
+to us, and injury to his masters, as she could not be allowed her
+expences of travelling and living at the charges of the Company; that he
+must live frugally and like a merchant, as others do, and must therefore
+send home his wife. If he did so, he was welcome to remain in the
+Company's service; but otherwise, I should have to take measures with
+them both, much against my inclination. Having thus persuaded him, I
+likewise endeavoured to deal in the same manner about Captain Towerson's
+wife. You know not the danger, the trouble, and the inconvenience, of
+granting these liberties. For this purpose, I persuaded Abraham, his
+father-in-law, to hold fast; stating the gripings of this court, and the
+small hope of any relief by this alliance, from which he expected great
+matters, and endeavoured to persuade him to return quietly. To further
+this, I wrote to your chief factor, that such things as he had brought
+and were vendible, should be bought for your use by bill of exchange,
+and at such profit to him as might answer both parties; but I utterly
+prohibited the taking of his trash, to remain a dead stock on your
+hands, on any conditions. Such inconveniences do you bring upon your
+hands by these unreasonable liberties.
+
+By the strict commands in your letter respecting private trade, as well
+respecting your own servants as others, I find you do not mean him to
+have that liberty he expects; for he is furnished to the value of above
+£1000, first cost here, and Steel to at least £200. This, as he proposes
+sending home his wife, and his merit is so good towards you, I shall
+send home; as I presume you will admit of this to get rid of such
+cattle. I will not buy these goods however, but order them to be marked
+and consigned to you, by which you will have the measure in your own
+hands. By these liberties, you discourage all your old servants. Some
+may do all things for fair words, and some will do nothing for good
+actions. I could instance some, gone home two years since, who only
+employed themselves in managing their own stock, and did no other
+business, who now live at home in pleasure; and others that raised their
+fortunes on your monies, trading therewith from port to port, and are
+now returned rich and unquestioned. Last year a mariner had twenty-six
+_churles_ of indigo, others many fardles; another had to the value of
+7000 mahmudies in bastas, chosen at Baroach and purchased with your
+monies, and he would not probably chuse the worst for himself; a fourth
+did the same to the value of above £150. I do not mention these things
+out of spite or ill will, but to induce you to equality of proceeding
+with your servants, that an impartial restraint be imposed upon all, and
+that by such instances your profits may not be all swallowed up.
+
+For effecting these purposes, the sending the woman home, and the
+prosecution of trade to the Red Sea, I have sent back Richard Steel to
+Surat with the necessary orders. As it is now declared that the king
+intends going to Guzerat, I have altered my purpose about the goods and
+presents; and have appointed Richard Steel, after having dispatched
+other matters, to meet me there with the goods and presents, and his
+engineers. I have also sent my advice and directions to Captain Pring,
+to make out an inventory of all the monies and goods in the two pirate
+ships, and to land the whole, making it over to your stock; to give a
+passage home to some of the chiefs, and to take the rest into your
+service, referring to you at home to deal with the owners. My own fixed
+opinion is, that their capture is legal and justifiable, and all their
+goods forfeited. If you are pleased to restore any thing, be it at your
+pleasure; but the more rigour you show to these, the better example you
+will give to such scandalous piracies; for, if this course be pursued,
+you may bid adieu to all trade at Surat and in the Red Sea, and let the
+Turkey Company stand clear of the revenge of the Grand Signior.
+
+I went to Asaph Khan on the 6th November, and shewed him the pearls
+according to promise. As I had been previously informed, he told me the
+sorts were not fit for that country; yet he was so pleased that I had
+kept my word with him, that I believe I may say to you in the words of
+Pharaoh, "The land is before you, dwell where you will, you and your
+servants." We talked not about the price, but he vowed the utmost
+secrecy, and that for my sake he would give more for them than their
+value, not returning any, and would pay ready money. Of this he
+professed to be in no want, and even offered to lend me whatever I
+needed. I have promised to visit his sister, whom he has made our
+protectress; and indeed, every contentment that good words can give, I
+have received, besides good deeds. When the presents arrive, I shall
+take care not to be too liberal to your loss; a little shall serve in
+that way. Indeed Asaph Khan himself has given me this advice, saying
+that such things are as well taken in this country sold as given, which
+I find by the experience of others to be true.
+
+Finishing these conferences in his bed-chamber, Asaph Khan rose to go to
+dinner, having invited me and my people; but he and his friends dined
+without, appointing us our mess apart, for they scruple to eat with us.
+I had good cheer, and was well attended, the residue being given to my
+servants. After dinner, I moved about the debt due by Groo, and told him
+of the delays. He desired me to say no more, as he had undertaken that
+business; that Groo, at his orders, was finishing accounts with a
+jeweller, and he had given orders, as the money was paid, that it should
+remain in the hands of the cutwall for us. This I found afterwards to be
+true, and the cutwall has promised to finish in three days, desiring me
+to send no more to Asaph Khan on that business.
+
+I must not omit to mention here, an anecdote of baseness or favour, call
+it which you please. When the prisons are full of condemned men, the
+king commands some to be executed, and sends others to his omrahs, to be
+redeemed at a price. This he esteems a courtesy, as giving the means of
+exercising charity: But he takes the money, and so sells the virtue.
+About a month before our remove, he sent to me to buy three Abyssinians,
+whom they suppose to be all Christians, at the price of forty rupees
+each. I answered, that I could not purchase men as slaves, as was done
+by others, by which they had profit for their money; but that I was
+willing to give twenty rupees each for them in charity, to save their
+lives and restore them to liberty. The king was well pleased with my
+answer, and ordered them to be sent me. They expected the money, which I
+was in no haste to give, and even hoped it had been forgotten. But the
+king's words are all written down[217], and are as irrevocable decrees.
+Seeing that I sent not for the malefactors, his officers delivered them
+into the hands of my _procurator_, in my absence this day, taking his
+note for the sixty rupees, which I paid at my return, and set free the
+prisoners.
+
+[Footnote 217: Dixit, et edictum est; fatur, et est factum.--_Purch_.]
+
+Having notice of a new phirmaund sent down to Surat to disarm all the
+English, and some other restrictions upon their liberty, owing to a
+complaint sent up to the prince, that we intended to build a fort at
+Swally, and that our ships were laden with bricks and lime for that
+purpose, I visited Asaph Khan on the 10th November, to enquire into this
+matter. This jealousy arose from our people having landed a few bricks
+on shore, for building a furnace to refound the ship's bell; yet the
+alarm was so hot at court, that I was called to make answer, when I
+represented how absurd was this imaginary fear, how dishonourable for
+the king, and how unfit the place was for any such purpose to us, having
+neither water nor harbourage. The jealousy was however so very strongly
+imprinted in their minds, because I had formerly asked a river at Gogo
+for that purpose, that I could hardly satisfy the prince but that we
+intended some such sinister end. You may judge from this how difficult
+it were to get a port for yourselves, if you were so disposed.
+Notwithstanding all remonstrances, this furnace must be demolished, and
+a _huddey_ of horse sent down to see it done. The disarming of our men
+was what chiefly disobliged our people, though the weapons were only
+lodged in the custom-house, and those only belonging to the ship's
+company. I told Asaph Khan, that we could not endure this slavery, nor
+would I stay longer in the country, as the prince gave us one day a
+phirmaund for our good usage, with a grant of privileges, and
+countermand all the next by contradictory orders, in which proceedings
+there was neither honour nor good faith, and I could not answer for my
+continuing to reside among them. Asaph Khan said, he would speak to the
+king at night on the subject, in the presence of the prince, and
+afterwards give me an answer.
+
+I went again to wait upon Asaph Khan on the 18th, when he made many
+protestations of the Mogul's affection to my sovereign and nation, and
+to me, and assured me he had risked the prince's disfavour for our
+sakes, and had full assurance of a complete redress of all our
+grievances: and that he proposed getting the _prigany_ of Surat
+transferred to himself, which the prince would have to resign, as he had
+been made governor of Ahmedabad, Cambay, and that territory. To satisfy
+me that he did not dissemble, he desired me to come at night to court,
+bringing the king my master's letter and the translation, as the time
+was favourable for its delivery; desiring me at the same time to persist
+in my complaint, and to offer taking leave, when I should see what he
+would say for us. Accordingly, I went at night to wait upon the king,
+whom I found surrounded by a very full court. The king was sitting on
+the ground, and when I delivered the letter, it was laid before him, of
+which he took no great notice, being busy at the time. Asaph Khan
+whispered to his father, Etimon Dowlet, desiring him to read the letter
+and assist us, which he could better do than himself. Etimon Dowlet took
+up both letters, giving that in English into the king's hands, and read
+the translation to the king, who answered many of the complaints. On
+coming to that point, of procuring our quiet trade, by his authority
+with the Portuguese, he demanded if we wanted him to make peace with
+them? I answered, that his majesty knew long since I had offered to be
+governed entirely by him, and referred that matter to his wisdom, and
+waited therefore to know his pleasure. On this he said, that he would
+undertake to reconcile us, and to cause agreement to be made in his
+seas, which he would signify in his answer to my master's letter, in
+which he would farther satisfy his majesty in all his other friendly
+desires.
+
+Notwithstanding of this, I asked leave to go before to Ahmedabad, to
+meet the king's presents, and to prepare for my return home. Upon this,
+a question arose between the king and the prince, who complained that he
+derived no profit from us, and was very willing to be rid of us. Asaph
+Khan then took up the discourse, and plainly told the king, that we
+brought both profit and security to the port of Surat and to the
+kingdom, but were very rudely treated by the prince's servants, and that
+we could not continue our trade and residence, unless matters were
+amended; for which reason it would be more honourable for his majesty to
+licence and protect us, than to treat us discourteously. The prince
+angrily replied, That he had never wronged us, and had lately given us a
+phirmaund at the desire of Asaph Khan. It is true, replied Asaph Khan,
+that you granted him a phirmaund to his satisfaction; but in ten days
+you sent down another, virtually to contradict and annul the former; and
+as he stood as surety between both, and had undertaken our redress on
+the prince's word, the shame and dishonour of this double procedure fell
+upon him. He said he spoke for no ends, but for the king's honour and
+justice, as he owed me nothing, nor I him, and for the truth of his
+words he appealed to me, who complained that our goods were taken away
+from us by force, and that Rulph,[218] who began this two years ago,
+would never pay us, and his officers continued the same procedure every
+season. If the prince were weary of the English, he might turn us away;
+but then he must expect that we would seek for redress at our own hands
+upon the seas. He demanded whether the king or the prince gave me the
+means of living, or, as they did not, at whose expence I was maintained?
+saying, that I was an ambassador and a stranger, who lived in this
+country and followed the progress of the king at great charges; and if
+our goods continued to be taken from us by force, so that we could
+neither get back our goods, nor yet their value in money, it would be
+impossible for us to subsist.
+
+[Footnote 218: On a former occasion, where this person is mentioned, it
+has been said that his name, in the edition of this journal given by
+Churchill, is written Sulph. From the circumstances in the context at
+this place, it is possible that Sulpheckar Khan, or Zulfeccar Khan,
+governor of Surat under Sultan Churrum, may be here meant.--E.]
+
+This was delivered with some heat, and the king, catching at the word
+force, repeated it to his son, whom he sharply reprehended. The prince
+promised to see me paid for all that had been taken. He said likewise
+that he had taken nothing, having only caused the presents to be sealed;
+and, as his officers had received no customs on these, he desired to
+have them opened in his presence. This I absolutely refused to consent
+to, telling the king that I only did my duty to my master, in insisting
+to deliver the presents free from duty, and that, when I had so done, I
+should give the prince full satisfaction in all other things. At this
+time, Etimon Dowlet, who had been made our friend by his son Asaph Khan,
+whispered to the king, and read a clause or two from my master's letter,
+on which the king made the prince stand aside. Asaph Khan joined in this
+private conference, which they told me was for our good; and in
+conclusion, the prince was commanded to suffer all the goods to come
+quietly to me, and to give me such privileges for our trade as were fit,
+and as should be proposed by Asaph Khan.
+
+The prince would not yield the presents, unless Asaph Khan became his
+surety that he should have a share, which he did, and we were then all
+agreed on that point. The king paid me many compliments in words, and
+even gave me two pieces of _pawne_ out of the dish then before him,
+desiring me to partake of what he was eating. I then took my leave for
+Ahmedabad; and that same night I began my journey, leaving my tents, as
+I expected to reach that city the next day: But I had to ride two
+nights, with the intermediate day and half of the next, with excessively
+little accommodation or refreshment; and arrived at Ahmedabad on the
+15th at noon.
+
+The 8th January, 1618, there was some question about presents by the
+prince, whom I told that his were ready whenever he was ready to receive
+them. He asked me, why I had broken the seals? On which I said, that it
+would have been dishonourable and discourteous in me to have delivered
+the king's presents in bonds, and having waited his highness' licence
+during twenty days, but seeing no hope of its arrival, I had been under
+the necessity of breaking open the seals. Some heat was likely to have
+arisen on this subject, but a gentleman from the king, who was sent to
+observe what passed between us, told us both that the king commanded our
+presence before him immediately, at a garden where he then was, on the
+river side, a coss from the town. The prince went there immediately in
+his palanquin, and I followed in a coach, well attended upon by the
+servants of the king and prince. On my arrival, the women were going in,
+on which occasion no man dare enter except the prince, who accordingly
+made bitter complaints against me for having broke open the seals,
+taking out from the packages whatever I pleased, without his knowledge.
+Asaph Khan was called, who was my surety, and the prince laid the blame
+of all this upon him, but he strenuously denied all knowledge or
+participation; yet I had not accused him, but took it all upon myself,
+knowing he would deny it, as is the custom, to excuse himself, and I
+knew myself better able to bear it.
+
+I was then sent for to the water-side, where the king had been sitting
+in private, and went in, having the presents along with me, but the king
+was gone into the female apartments. Asaph Khan blamed me for breaking
+his word, saying, that the prince had shamed him. I answered, through
+Jaddow, that he well knew I had his consent, of which this man was a
+witness. He denied this to us both, and when I again said, that,
+although I would not lay the blame on him, that it was still true, as
+this man could witness; Jaddow refused to interpret my answer, saying,
+that he durst not tell Asaph Khan to his face that he lied. This is a
+quite usual thing among them; for if any command comes from the king
+which he afterwards forgets or denies, he that brought the message will
+deny it stoutly. I bore up as high as I could, on which some of the
+great men said that it was a great affront, of which no other man durst
+have been guilty, while others smiled. I answered, it was by no means so
+great as the prince had often done to me. We thus spent the day, during
+which the king never appeared, having privately stole away, leaving us
+all in anxious expectation.
+
+At night, word came that the king was gone, when I offered to have gone
+home, but was so well attended, that I was in some measure constrained
+to force my way. While on the road, new messengers came to seek me, and
+I had to return to court, without having either eaten or drank. The king
+was not however come back, and I could not get free from my attendants,
+who yet used me very respectfully. After waiting an hour, a sudden order
+was given to put out all the lights. The king now came in an open
+waggon, drawn by bullocks, having his favourite Noormahal along with
+him, himself acting as waggoner, and no man near. When he and his women
+were housed, the prince came in on horseback, and immediately called for
+me into the place where the king was. It was now midnight, and I found
+the king and prince only attended upon by two or three eunuchs. Putting
+on an angry countenance, the king, as he had been instructed by his son,
+told me I had broken my word, and he would trust me no more. I answered
+roundly, that I held it fit to give freely, not upon compulsion, and had
+committed no offence, according to my judgment; and if their customs
+were so very different from ours, I had erred only from ignorance, and
+ought therefore to be pardoned. After many disputes, the prince offered
+his friendship, with many fair promises, and we were all reconciled.
+
+I then opened the chests, gave the king his presents, and the prince
+his, and sent in those intended for Noormahal. We were about two hours
+engaged in viewing them. The king was well pleased with the tapestry,
+but said it was too coarse, and desired to have a suit of the same
+quality with the sweet bags. Three articles were detained besides the
+presents; and for these the prince said he would pay, as his father had
+taken them. He likewise desired me to come to see him in the morning,
+promising to be my protector and procurator, which I willingly accepted
+in all things except the goods.
+
+I waited upon the prince on the 10th, when I was well received, and had
+orders for a phirmaund about the murdered man[219]. He likewise made a
+public declaration of his reconcilement, desiring all his officers to
+take notice of it, and act accordingly. He likewise ordered his chief
+_Raia_ to be in future my procurator, and to draw out whatever
+phirmaunds I required. I presented to him Captain Towerson, and some
+others of the English, whom he received graciously; and, in confirmation
+of our renewed friendship, he presented me with a robe of cloth of
+silver, promising to be the protector of our nation in all things we
+could desire. I then told him about Mr Steel and his workmen, when he
+desired me to bring a small present at night to the king, to whom he
+should present them, which I did. He kept his word, and spoke in our
+favour to the king, who seemed disposed to entertain them. On this
+occasion I presented Captain Towerson to the king, who called him up,
+and after a few questions, rose. At the _Gitshel Choes_[220] I presented
+Mr Steel and his workmen. The king called for Mr Paynter, and gave him
+ten pounds, promising to take him and all the rest into his service. On
+this occasion the king sat all night in a hat which I had given him.
+
+[Footnote 219: This circumstance is perhaps explained in the sequel, as
+relating to the death of a person at Burhanpoor.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 220: This is probably meant for the same public audience
+called, in other parts of the journal, the Gazul Khan.--E.]
+
+The 13th, the Dutch came to court, bringing a great present of China
+ware, saunders-wood, parrots, and cloves, but were not allowed to
+approach the third degree, or raised platform. After some time, the
+prince asked me, who they were? I answered, that they were Hollanders
+who resided at Surat. He then enquired if they were our friends? I
+answered, that they were of a nation which was dependent upon the king
+of England, but not welcome in all parts, and that I did not know their
+business. He then said, since they were our friends, that I ought to
+call them up. So I was obliged to call upon them, that they might
+deliver their presents, on which occasion they were placed beside our
+merchants, yet without any farther speech or conference. Finally, every
+thing I asked was complied with, or at least promised, and I now wait
+for performance and money. I am satisfied, that, without this
+contestation, I had never succeeded in our just demands; for I told the
+prince's messenger, in the presence of all the English, that if he chose
+to use force against me or my goods, he certainly might, but it should
+cost blood, for I would set my _chop_ upon his master's ship, and send
+her to England.
+
+On the 18th I received notice from Surat of the imprisonment of Spragge
+and Howard at Burhanpoor, where their house and goods were seized, and
+their lives in question, on the following account:--The cutwall had been
+drinking at their house, and one of his men had died that night, on
+which they were accused of having poisoned him, and the cutwall, in
+excuse for having been at their house, pretended that he had gone to
+fetch away a man's wife who was detained by Thomas Spragge. What may be
+the truth of this affair I know not; but information has been sent to
+the king against them. I went therefore to the prince, who had promised
+to undertake all our causes, but could not get speech of him, though I
+had likewise to complain of force having been used against a caravan of
+ours on the way, notwithstanding a phirmaund from the rajah of the
+country, on both of which subjects I shall present a petition at night
+to the king. My trouble with this barbarous and unjust people is beyond
+all endurance. When at the prince's, I found the promised phirmaund
+drawn up indeed, but half of the agreed conditions were omitted, upon
+which I refused to accept it, and desired leave to depart, that I might
+treat with them in the sea.[221]
+
+[Footnote 221: This obscure expression seems to imply a threat of taking
+vengeance, or making reprisals at sea, for the oppressions of the Mogul
+government against the English trade.--E.]
+
+On the 21st, a command was issued to set free the English at Burhanpoor,
+and to restore their goods; on which occasion the king observed, that,
+if they had killed the Mahometan who came to drink at their house, he
+had only met with his just reward. Another order was issued, commanding
+Partap-shah to repay us all exactions whatsoever, and that he should
+hereafter take no duties upon our goods in their way to the sea-port,
+threatening, in case of failure, to deliver his son into my hands. On
+the 22d, I went in person to receive these phirmaunds, and carried the
+merchants along with me, together with some pearls the prince was eager
+to see, and which were pretended to belong to Mr Towerson. The prince
+had received some vague accounts of our having pearls to the value of
+twenty or thirty thousand pounds, which he hoped to have extracted from
+us. When his secretary saw our small pearls, he observed that his master
+had _maunds_ of such, and if we had no better, we might take these away.
+You may judge how basely covetous these people are of jewels. I told him
+that we had procured these from a gentlewoman to satisfy the prince, and
+as they could not be made better, it was uncivil to be angry with
+merchants who had done their best to shew their good will.
+
+I then spoke to him about the phirmaunds, when he bluntly told me I
+should have none; for as we had deceived the prince's hopes, he would
+disappoint us. I had asked leave to depart, and I might come to take
+leave whenever I pleased. To this I answered, that nothing could please
+me more, but that I should requite their injustice in another place, for
+I should now apply to the king, and depend no more on them, as I saw
+their conduct was made up of covetousness and unworthiness. So I arose
+to depart, but he recalled me, desiring that I might come next day to
+the king and prince together, when I should have complete satisfaction.
+
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"And now, reader, we are at a stand: some more idle, or more busy
+spirits, willing either to take their rest, or to exchange their labour;
+and some perhaps wishing they had the whole journal, and not thus
+contracted into extracts of those things out of it which I conceived
+more fit for the public. And, for the whole, myself could have wished
+it, but neither with the honourable Company, nor elsewhere, could I
+learn of it; the worthy knight himself being now employed in like
+honourable embassage from his majesty to the Great Turk. Yet, to supply
+the defect of the journal, I have given thee the chorography of the
+country, together with certain letters of his, written from India to
+honourable lords, and his friends in England; out of all which may be
+hewed and framed a delightful commentary of the Mogul and his subjects.
+Take them therefore, reader, and use them as a prospective glass, by
+which thou mayst take easy and near view of these remote regions,
+people, rites, and religions."--_Purchas_.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+In the Pilgrims, in supplement to the journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Purchas
+has inserted a formal complimentary letter from king James to the Great
+Mogul, or emperor of Hindoostan, together with another from the Mogul to
+king James, containing nothing besides hyperbolical expressions of
+regard; both of which are here omitted, as entirely devoid of interest,
+amusement, or information. Purchas has also added several letters said
+to have been found among the papers of Sir Thomas Roe, with some others
+which he says were transcribed from _Sir Thomas Roe's own book_. As
+these letters merely repeat circumstances and opinions already more
+fully and more methodically expressed in the preceding journal, they
+could only have served unnecessarily to swell our pages, without any
+adequate advantage, and are therefore omitted.
+
+Purchas also informs us that Sir Thomas Roe, before he left the court of
+the Great Mogul on his return for England, requested to be favoured with
+a recommendatory letter from the Mogul to king James. This request was
+granted with the utmost readiness, and a letter written accordingly; but
+the Mogul, or his ministers, shewed much scrupulousness about the
+placement of the seal to this letter, lest, if placed under the writing,
+it might disparage the dignity of the Mogul, or, if placed over the
+letter, king James might feel disobliged. On this account, the letter
+was delivered to Sir Thomas unsealed, and the seal was sent separately,
+that it might be afterwards affixed, according to the pleasure of the
+king of England.
+
+This seal was of silver, and Purchas has given an engraving, or _fac
+simile_ of it, consisting of an inner and larger circle, bearing the
+style or title of the reigning king, or _Padishah_ Jehanguire;
+surrounded circularly by eight smaller circles, containing the series of
+his direct ancestors, from Timor, or Tamerlane, downwards. These are all
+of course in the Persian language and characters; but Purchas gives
+likewise a copy or translation of the same in English letters. It seemed
+quite superfluous to insert here the Persian _fac simile_, being merely
+writing without ornament, armorial bearing, or cognizance. The following
+is the series, expressed in English characters; the last being the
+central circle, which contains the name and title of the reigning
+emperor:--
+
+   1. Ebn Amir Temur Saheb Quran.
+   2. Ebn Miran Shah.
+   3. Ebn Mirza Soltan Mohamed.
+   4. Ebn Soltan Abu Said.
+   5. Ebn Mirza Amar Shah.
+   6. Ebn Bahar Padishah.
+   7. Ebn Humaiun Padishah.
+   8. Ebn Akbar Padishah.
+   9. Abu Amozaphar Nurdin Jebanguire Padishah.
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+RELATION OF A VOYAGE TO INDIA IN 1616, WITH OBSERVATIONS RESPECTING THE
+DOMINIONS OF THE GREAT MOGUL, BY MR. EDWARD TERRY.[222]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+According to Purchas, Mr Edward Terry was master of arts, and a student
+of Christ Church in Oxford, and went out to India as chaplain to Sir
+Thomas Roe. In the first subdivision of this narrative, we have combined
+the observations of Captain Alexander Childe, who was commander of the
+ship James, during the same voyage, under Captain Benjamin Joseph, of
+the ship Charles, who was slain in a sea-fight with a Portuguese carack,
+off one of the Komoro islands. The notes extracted by Purchas from the
+journal of Captain Childe,[223] are so short and unsatisfactory, that we
+have been induced to suppress them, except so far as they serve to
+elucidate the narrative of Terry, in the first subdivision of this
+section.--E.
+
+[Footnote 222: Purch. Pilgr. II 1464.]
+
+[Footnote 223: Id. I. 606.]
+
+§1. _Occurrences during the Voyage from England to Surat_.
+
+Apologies often call truth into question, and having nothing but truth
+to offer in excuse for this narrative, I omit all unnecessary preface,
+desiring only that the reader may believe what I have faithfully
+related. Our fleet, consisting of six goodly ships, the Charles,
+Unicorn, James, Globe, Swan, and Rose, under the supreme command of
+Captain Benjamin Joseph, who sailed as general in the Charles, our
+admiral ship, fell down from Gravesend to Tilbury-hope on the 3d of
+February, 1616.
+
+After long and anxious expectation, it pleased God to send us a fair
+wind at N.E. on the 9th March, when we departed from that road, and set
+sail for the East Indies. The wind continued favourable till the 16th,
+at night, when we were in the bay of Biscay, at which time we were
+assailed by a most fearful storm, during which we lost sight both of the
+Globe and the Rose. The Globe rejoined us on the 26th following, but the
+Rose was no more heard of till six months afterwards, when she arrived
+at Bantam. The storm continued with violence from the 16th to the 21st.
+The 28th we got sight of the grand Canary, and of the Peak of Teneriffe,
+which is so extremely high that it may be seen in a clear day more than
+forty leagues out at sea, as the mariners report. The 31st, being
+Easter-day, we passed under the tropic of Cancer, and on the 7th of
+April had the sun in our zenith. The 16th, we met with these winds
+called _tornadoes_, which are so variable and uncertain, as sometimes to
+blow from all the thirty-two points of the compass within the space of a
+single hour. These winds are accompanied by much thunder and lightning,
+and excessive rains, of so noisome a nature, as immediately to cause
+people's clothes to stink on their backs; and wherever this rain-water
+stagnates, even for a short space of time, it brings forth many
+offensive animalcules. The tornadoes began with us when in about 12° of
+N. latitude, and continued till we were two degrees to the south of the
+equinoctial line, which we passed on the 28th of April. The 19th of May,
+being Whitsunday, we passed the tropic of Capricorn, so that we were
+complete seven weeks under the torrid zone.
+
+Almost every day, while between the tropics, we saw various kinds of
+fish, in greater abundance than elsewhere. As the whale, or mighty
+_Leviathan_, whom God hath created to take his pastime in the seas;
+Dolphins also, and Albicores, with Bonitoes, flying-fishes, and many
+others. Some whales were of an exceeding greatness, which, in calm
+weather, would often rise and shew themselves above the water, appearing
+like vast rocks; and, while rising, they would spout up a great quantity
+of water into the air, with much noise, which fell down again around
+them like heavy rain. The dolphin is called, from the swiftness of its
+motion, the arrow of the sea. This fish differs from many others, in
+having teeth on the top of its tongue. It is pleasing to the eye, the
+smell, and the taste, having a changeable colour, finned like a roach,
+covered with very small scales, giving out a delightful scent above all
+other fishes, and is in taste as good as any. These dolphins are very
+apt to follow our ships, not, so far as I think, from any love they bear
+for men, as some authors write, but to feed upon what may be thrown
+overboard. Whence it comes to pass that they often become food to us;
+for, when they swim close by the ships, they are struck by a broad
+instrument full of barbed points, called a harping-iron, to which a rope
+is fastened, by which to pull the instrument and the fish on board. This
+beautiful dolphin may be taken as an emblem of a race of men, who, under
+sweet countenances, carry sharp tongues. The bonitoes and albicores are
+much like our mackerels in colour, shape, and taste, but grow to a very
+large size. The flying-fishes live the most unhappy lives of all others,
+as they are persecuted in the water by the dolphins, bonitoes, and
+albicores, and when they endeavour to escape from their enemies in the
+water, by rising up in flight, they are assailed by ravenous fowls in
+the air, somewhat like our kites, which hover over the water in waiting
+for their appearance in the other element. These flying-fishes are like
+men who profess two trades and thrive in neither.
+
+Early in the morning of the 12th June, we espied our long-wished-for
+harbour, the bay of Saldanha, [Table-bay] about twelve leagues short
+from the Cape of Good Hope, into which we came happily to anchor that
+same forenoon. We here found one of the Company's ships, the Lion,
+commanded by Captain Newport, come from Surat, and homeward-bound for
+England. We made ourselves merry with each other on this happy meeting;
+and having a fair gale, the Lion sailed on the night of the 14th. We
+found here water in abundance, but little refreshments for our sick men,
+except fresh fish, as the natives brought us nothing. We remained in
+this harbour till the 28th, on which day we departed, the Swan steering
+her course for Bantam. The 29th we doubled the Cape of Good Hope, in the
+lat. of 35° S. Off this cape there continually sets a most violent
+current to the westwards, whence it happens, when it is met by a strong
+contrary wind, their impetuous opposition occasions so rough a sea that
+some ships have been swallowed up, and many more endangered among these
+mountainous waves. Few ships pass this way without encountering a storm.
+
+The 22d of July we got sight of the great island of Madagascar, commonly
+called of St Lawrence, being between that island and the main, but
+touched not there. Proceeding on our course, on the 1st of August we
+fell in with a part of the main land of Africa, called Boobam,[224] in
+lat. 16° 35' S. the variation being 13° 12'. The 5th we drew near the
+little islands of Mohelia, Gazidia, and St Juan de Castro, [Moelia,
+Hinzuan or Johanna, Mayotta or St Christopher, and Augasi,] generally
+known by the name of the Komoro islands, in about the lat. of 12° S.
+
+[Footnote 224: The head-land of Mosambique is probably here meant.--E.]
+
+Early in the morning of the 6th of August, our men in the tops looking
+out for land, espied a sail about three or four leagues off directly in
+our course. About noon, the Globe, which was our smallest ship, and
+sailed better than the rest of the fleet, came up with her on the
+broadside to windward, and hailed her according to the custom of the
+sea, asking whence she came? She answered, indirectly, that she came
+from the sea, and her people insulted ours most outrageously, calling
+them thieves, rogues, heretics, and devils; and, in conclusion of their
+rude compliments, spoke in the loud language of the cannon's roar,
+discharging seven pieces of large artillery at our Globe, six of the
+balls piercing her hull, and maiming some of her men, but killing none.
+Our Globe replied in the same voice, and afterwards fell astern and
+stood in for our general and the rest of our fleet, now four sail in
+all, shewing us the discourtesy of the Portuguese.
+
+About three in the afternoon, the Charles, our admiral, came up with the
+Portuguese ship, which was the admiral of the caracks that sailed this
+year from Lisbon, but had parted from all the rest of their fleet. When
+within pistol-shot, Captain Benjamin Joseph, our commander, proceeded
+deliberately to work, offering treaty before he attempted revenge. So we
+saluted her with our trumpets, to which she replied with her
+wind-instruments. Captain Joseph then called out, that their commander
+might come on board, to make satisfaction for the wrong they had done to
+our consort. They made answer, that they had no boat; on which our
+general said he would send them one, and immediately caused his barge to
+be manned and sent to the carack, which brought back one of their
+officers and two mean men, with this answer from their commander, that
+he had resolved never to leave his ship, to which he might be forced,
+but would not be commanded to leave her.
+
+On receiving this message, Captain Joseph used them civilly who had
+brought it, and commanded them to be shewn our ship, and how she was
+prepared to vindicate our honour. This made the poor Portuguese much
+afraid, and they desired Captain Joseph to write a few words to their
+commander, which, added to their persuasions, might perchance induce him
+to come to terms. Willing to preserve his honour, and to prevent the
+effusion of blood, Captain Joseph caused a few words to be written to
+the Portuguese commander, to the following effect:--"Whereas the
+commander of the carack has offered violence to our ship the Globe,
+while sailing peaceably beside him, he is desired to come aboard
+immediately, and give satisfaction for that wrong, or else at his
+peril," &c. He then sent back the Portuguese, accompanied by one of our
+master's mates, carrying the writing, together with this verbal message,
+"That if he refused to come, he would force him, or sink by his side."
+The words of dying men are said to be prophetic, so these his words came
+to pass, for he was slain not long after by a great shot from the
+carack.
+
+Notwithstanding this message, the Portuguese commander remained firmly
+to his resolute answer. Wherefore, on the return of our men, Captain
+Joseph himself fired the three first shots, which surely did them much
+mischief; as we conjectured, by the loud outcry we heard among them
+after these shots were fired. The shot now flew thick from both sides;
+and our captain, chearing his men to behave gallantly, ascended the
+half-deck, where he had not been above ten minutes when a great shot
+from the quarter of the carack deprived him of life in the twinkling of
+an eye. It hit him fair in the breast, beating his heart and other parts
+out of his body, which lay round him among his blood. After he was
+slain, our master continued the fight for about half an hour, when,
+considering that another person was to succeed in the supreme command,
+and the night approaching, he thought proper to desist, and having
+fallen astern, he hung out a flag as a signal of council, to call the
+captain of the vice-admiral on board, Captain Henry Pepwell, who was to
+succeed, together with the other masters, that they might consult about
+the prosecution of this enterprize. As the night was now come, it was
+resolved not to proceed any farther for the present. So the carack
+proceeded on her course, putting up a light on her poop, as if in
+defiance of us to follow, and about midnight came to anchor under the
+island of Moelia; and when we perceived this island, we too let fall our
+anchors.
+
+Early in the morning of the 7th, before day began to dawn, we prepared
+for a new assault, first recommending ourselves to God in prayer. When
+morning came, we found the carack so close to the shore, and the nearest
+of our other ships at least a league from us, that we held our hands for
+that day, waiting till the carack might weigh and stand out to sea, as
+fitter there to deal with her. In the afternoon, we chested our slain
+commander, and committed him to the deep, over against the isle of
+Moelia, omitting any ceremony of firing funeral-guns usual on such
+occasions, that the enemy might not know our loss.
+
+A little before night the carack put to sea, when we also weighed and
+made sail after her. The day now left us, and our proud enemy,
+unwilling, as it seems, to have the appearance of escaping by flight,
+put forth a light on his poop as before, as if for us to follow him,
+which we did to some purpose. The night being well spent, we again
+commended ourselves and our cause to God in prayer. Soon afterwards, the
+day began to dawn, and appeared as if covered by a red mantle, which
+proved a bloody one to many who now beheld the light for the last time.
+It was now resolved that our four ships were to take their turns in
+succession, to endeavour to force this proud Portuguese either to bend
+or break. Our ship, the Charles, played her part first;[225] and ere she
+had been half an hour engaged with her adversary, a shot from the carack
+hitting one of our iron guns on the half-deck, flew all in pieces,
+dangerously wounding our new general, and three other mariners who stood
+beside him. Captain Pepwell's left eye was beaten out, and he received
+two other wounds in his head, and a third in his leg, a ragged piece of
+the broken shot sticking fast in the bone, which seemed, by his
+complaining, to afflict him more than the rest. Thus was our new
+commander welcomed to his authority, and we all considered his wounds as
+mortal; but he lived till about fourteen months afterwards, when he died
+peaceably in his bed, on his way back to England.
+
+[Footnote 225: This account of the battle is chiefly taken from Terry,
+who is more particular in his narrative; but Childe says that Captain
+Pepwell, the new general, gave him leave to begin this day's action, as
+his ship sailed better, and that, after three or four broadsides, he
+gave place to the general. According to modern naval tactics, all four
+at once would have assailed the enemy, taking vantage stations on her
+quarters and bows.--E.]
+
+By the same shot, Mr Richard Hounsell, the master of our ship, had a
+great piece of the flesh of his arm carried off, which rendered him
+unserviceable for a time. The captain and master being thus disabled,
+deputed their authority to the chief master's mate, who behaved with
+great prudence and resolution. Thus we continued one after the other to
+fight all day, the vice-admiral and the Globe and James taking their
+turns in succession. Between three and four in the afternoon, the
+mainmast of the carack fell overboard, and presently afterwards the
+foremast and mizen followed, and she had received so many and large
+wounds in her thick sides, that her case was quite desperate, and she
+must soon either yield or perish. Her commander, Don Emanuel de Meneses,
+a brave and resolute person, stood in for the shore in this distressed
+condition, being not far from the island of Gazidia.[226] We pursued as
+far as we durst venture, without hazard of shipwreck, but gave over at
+five o'clock, when about a league from the shore, which is extremely
+steep, and no ground to be had within less than a cable's length of the
+rocks, the shore being moreover to leeward.
+
+[Footnote 226: According to Childe, it was the most northern of the
+islands, named Komoro, or Augasi, not far north from Moelia, where the
+fight began,--E.]
+
+We now sent off our barge with a flag of truce to speak the carack, and
+as he waved us with a similar flag, Mr Connock, our chief merchant, who
+was employed on this occasion, boldly went aboard the carack, and
+delivered a message to Don Emanuel, stating, that he brought an offer of
+life and peace if he would accept it; and as he deserved well for his
+undaunted valour, so he should be honourably and respectfully treated if
+he would put himself into our hands, and sent to Goa in safety. He,
+however, as an oak gathering strength from his wounds,[227] and
+contemning the misery he could not prevent, resolutely answered Mr
+Connock to the following purpose: "That no misfortune should make him
+alter his former resolution; for he was determined again to stand out to
+sea, if possible, and to encounter us again; and then, if forced by fire
+and sword, he might by bad chance be taken, but he would never yield;
+and, if taken alive, he hoped to find the respect due to a gentleman,
+till when we had our answer."
+
+[Footnote 227: Duris, ut ilex tonsa bipennibus-ducit opes animumque
+ferro.--_Terry._]
+
+Our messenger was thus dismissed, and shortly afterwards this sore
+distressed ship, being entirely unmanageable for want of masts and
+sails, was forced by the winds and waves upon the adjacent island of
+Gazidia or Komoro, where she stuck fast between two rocks. Those who
+remained alive in the carack got ashore by means of their boats; and
+when all were landed, willing, as it would seem, to consume what they
+could not keep, they set their carack on fire, that she might not become
+our prize.[228] After leaving their ill-fated carack, the poor
+Portuguese were most inhumanly used by the barbarous islanders, who
+spoiled them of every thing they had brought on shore for their succour,
+and slew some of them for opposing their cupidity. Doubtless they had
+been all massacred, had they not been relieved by two small Arab vessels
+who were there engaged in trade, and which, I suppose in hope of a great
+reward, took them in, and conveyed them in safety to their own city of
+Goa.
+
+[Footnote 228: Childe says, he could not say whether she was fired
+accidentally or on purpose.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 9th, Mr Alexander Childe, who commanded one of the
+English ships, sent his mate, Anthony Fugars, ashore in his long-boat,
+to see if any of the Portuguese were saved, to fetch such away, and to
+learn how she was set on fire. But the carack was still burning, and not
+a man belonging to her was to be seen. There were many negro islanders
+on the coast, over against the carack, who held up a flag of truce to
+invite the English on shore, but it was impossible to land in that
+place, or any where within three leagues to the east or west, as the
+rocks were all extremely high and rugged.
+
+In this long conflict, only five men were lost out of our four ships,
+three belonging to the admiral, and two out of the James. Besides whom,
+there were about twenty wounded in our fleet, all of whom afterwards
+recovered. But, of 700 who sailed in the carack, there came not above
+250 to Goa, as we were afterwards credibly informed. In this fearful
+engagement, our ship, the Charles, discharged 375 great shot against the
+adversary, as reported by our gunners, besides 100 musqueteers who plied
+their small arms all the time. Neither were the enemy idle, for our ship
+received at least 100 great shot from them, many of which dangerously
+took place in her hull. Our foremast was shot through the middle, our
+mainmast wounded, the main stay, and many of the main shrouds, cut
+asunder.
+
+After we had seen the carack set on fire, which was about midnight of
+the 8th, we stood off and on till morning, to see if we might find any
+thing in her ashes. Finding this ineffectual, we sought about for some
+place where we might find succour and refreshment for our sick and
+wounded on shore. The land was very high, and the sea every where too
+deep for anchoring, so that it was the 10th before we could find a good
+harbour, which was in the S.W. part of the island, where we anchored.
+The James came to anchor in twenty-two fathoms, with one of her anchors,
+while the other was only in fourteen. This harbour was over against a
+town called Mattoma.
+
+This island seemed very pleasant, full of goodly trees, covered all over
+with green pasture, and abounding in beeves, goats, poultry,
+sugar-canes, rice, plantains, lemons, oranges, and cocoa-nuts, with many
+other wholesome things; of all which we procured sufficient to relieve
+our whole company for a small quantity of white paper, a few glass
+beads, and penny knives. For instance, we bought as many oranges as
+would fill a hat for half a quarter of a sheet of white paper, and all
+other kinds of provision in the same proportion. The islanders brought
+much of their fruits to us in their little canoes, which are long and
+narrow boats, like troughs, hollowed out of single trees; but their
+cattle we bought on shore. I observed the people to be straight,
+well-limbed, and able-bodied men, of a very dark tawny colour. Most of
+the men, and all the women, were entirely naked, except merely enough to
+hide their parts of shame. Some few of the men wore long garments, after
+the fashion of the Arabs, whose language they spoke, and were likewise
+of the Mahometan religion, and so rigid, that they would not suffer us
+to come near their places of worship. They have good convenient
+dwellings, and fair sepulchres for their dead.
+
+They scorned to live under strict obedience to a king, whose residence
+was some miles up the country, as they required to have his leave, which
+was sent for, before they would sell us any provisions. When informed of
+our arrival, their king sent a message of welcome to our commander,
+together with a present of beeves, goats, and choice fruits; in return
+for which, he was well recompensed and contented, by a present of paper,
+and other English toys. We saw some Spanish money among them, of which
+they made so small account, that some of our men got rials of eight, in
+exchange for a little paper, or a few beads. What use they made of the
+paper, we could not guess. The cocoa-nut tree, of which this island has
+abundance, may have the pre-eminence of all trees, in my opinion, by its
+universal usefulness. Without the help of any other, one may build and
+furnish out a ship for sea, with every thing requisite. Of the body of
+this tree may be made timbers, planks, and masts; its gum may serve for
+paying the bottom; the rind of the same tree will make sails and
+cordage; and the large nut, being full of kernel and pleasant liquor,
+will serve those who navigate the ship both for meat and drink, as also
+for merchandize.
+
+Being well stored with these nuts, and other good provisions, after six
+days abode here, the breaches in our ships received in fight being all
+repaired, and our men well refreshed, we put again to sea on the 16th of
+August, with a prosperous wind. On the 24th, we passed under the line,
+without any heat to offend us, bending our course for Socotora, near the
+mouth of the Red Sea, an island whence comes our Socotorine aloes. But
+an adverse wind from the coast of Arabia prevented us from being able to
+fetch that island, which we passed on the 1st September.
+
+In the year before, our English fleet touched at this island, on which
+occasion the petty king came to the water-side, and hearing some of our
+wind-instruments, asked if they ever played David's Psalms, which he had
+heard of, being a Mahometan. He was answered by one who stood by, that
+they did. On which he observed, that it was an evil invention of him who
+first mingled music with religion; as God, before that, was worshipped
+in heart, but by this only in sound. I mean not by this story to condemn
+the use of music in churches; leaving it to him who bids us praise the
+Lord with stringed instruments and organs, to plead that cause.
+
+Missing our port of Socotora, we proceeded on our voyage; and, on the
+4th of September, we celebrated a solemn funeral in memory of our slain
+commander; when, after sermon, the great guns and small arms gave a loud
+peal to his honourable remembrance. At night on the 6th September, to
+our great admiration and fear, the water of the sea seemed as white as
+milk. Others of our nation since, passing in the same course, have
+observed the same phenomenon, of which I am yet to learn the cause, as
+it was far from any shore, and we could find no ground.
+
+On the 21st of September we discovered the main land of India; and on
+the 22d had sight of Diu and Damaun, cities inhabited by the Portuguese.
+The 25th we came safely to anchor in Swally roads, within the bay of
+Cambay, which is the harbour for our fleet while in this part of India,
+when we were visited by the merchants of the Surat factory, the
+principal of whom was Mr Thomas Kerridge.
+
+§2. _Description of the Mogul Empire_
+
+Although this account of Hindoostan, or the Mogul empire in India, be
+very incorrect, and in some places hardly intelligible, it is here
+retained, as a curious record of the knowledge possessed on that subject
+by the English about 200 years ago. We have two editions of this account
+in Purchas, one appended to his narrative of Sir Thomas Roe, and the
+other in this relation by Terry, which he acknowledges to be the most
+correct, and which therefore is alone retained. On the present occasion,
+instead of encumbering the bottoms of our pages with the display of
+numerous explanatory notes on this topographical list of places and
+provinces, a running commentary has been introduced into the text, so
+far as seemed necessary, yet distinguished sufficiently from the
+original notices by Terry. The observations, by way of commentary, are
+marked, as this paragraph.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The large empire of the Great Mogul is bounded on the east by the
+kingdom of Maug;[229] on the west by Persia; on the north by the
+mountains of Caucasus [Hindoo-Kho] and Tartary; and on the south by the
+ocean, the Deccan, and the bay of Bengal. The Deccan is divided among
+three Mahometan kings and some Indian rajahs. This extensive monarchy of
+the Mogul is called, in the Persian language, by the Mahometan
+inhabitants, Indostan or Hindoostan, meaning the land of the Hindoos,
+and is divided into _thirty-seven_ distinct and large provinces, which
+were anciently separate kingdoms. Their several names, with their
+principal cities, their rivers, situations, and borders, together with
+their length and breadth, I shall now enumerate, beginning at the
+north-west.
+
+[Footnote 229: Meckely, now a province of the Birman empire; perhaps
+called Maug in the text, from a barbarous tribe called the Muggs, or
+Maugs, who inhabit, or did inhabit, the mountains east of Bengal, and
+who are said to have laid waste and depopulated the Sunderbunds, or
+Delta of the Ganges.--E.] 1. _Candahar,_ the chief city of which is of
+the same name, lies N.W. from the heart or centre of the Mogul
+territory, bordering upon Persia, of which kingdom it was formerly a
+province.
+
+2. _Cabul,_ with its chief city of the same name, lies in the extremest
+north-west corner of this empire, bordering to the north on Tartary for
+a great way. The river Nilab takes its rise in this country, and runs to
+the southwards, till it discharges its waters into the Indus.--This is a
+material error. The Nilab is the main stream of the Indus, and rises far
+to the north in Little Thibet, a great way N.E. of Cabul. The river of
+Cabul is the Kameh, which runs S.E. and joins the Nilab, Sinde, or
+Indus, a few miles above Attock. Another river, in the south of Cabul,
+called the Cow, or Coumul, follows a similar direction, and falls into
+the western side of the Indus, about forty miles below the Kameh.--E.
+
+3. _Multan,_ Moultan or Mooltan, having its chief city of the same name,
+is south [south-east] from Cabul and Candahar, and on the west joins
+with Persia.--This is an error, as Hajykan, to be noticed next in
+order, is interposed.--E.
+
+4. _Hajacan,_ or Hajykan, the kingdom of the Baloches, who are a stout
+warlike people, has no renowned city. The famous river Indus, called
+_Skind_ [Sind or Sindeh] by the inhabitants, borders it on the east, and
+Lar, or Laristan, meets it on the west, a province belonging to Shah
+Abbas, the present king of Persia.--In modern geography, the country of
+the Ballogees, or Baloches, is placed considerably more to the
+north-west, bordering on the south-east of Candahar; and the Sewees are
+placed more immediately west of this province. The seats, however, of
+barbarous hordes, in a waste and almost desert country, are seldom
+stationary for any continuance; and the Ballogees and Sewees are
+probably congeneric tribes, much intermixed, and having no fixed
+boundaries. We have formerly seen the Baloches, or a tribe of that
+nation, inhabiting the oceanic coast of Persia about Guadel, and one of
+their tribes may have been in possession of Hajykan, which perhaps
+derived its name from their chief or khan having made the Haji, or
+pilgrimage of Mecca. The assertion that Hajykan joins with Lar, or
+Laristan, is grossly erroneous, as the eastern provinces of Persia which
+confine with Hindoostan, are Segistan in the north, bordering with
+Candahar, and Mekran in the south, bordering with the provinces of
+Hindoostan which are to the west of the Indus. Lar or Laristan is a
+Persian province within the gulf of Persia, at least 850 English miles
+from the most westerly part of Hindoostan.--E.
+
+5. _Buckor_, or Backar, its chief city being Buckor-Suckor. The river
+Indus pervades this province, which it greatly enriches.--In modern
+maps, the city of Backar is placed in a small island in the middle of
+the Indus, at the junction of the Dummoddy from the N.E. Suckar, whence
+probably our word sugar is derived, is given as a distinct place, on the
+western side of the Indus. Indeed, in the map of India given in the
+Pilgrims, Backar and Suckar are made distinct places, but their
+situations are reversed.--E.
+
+6. _Tatta_, with its chief city of the same name. This province is
+exceedingly fertile and pleasant, being divided into many islands by the
+Indus, the chief arm of which meets the sea at Synde, a place very
+famous for curious handicrafts.--The most western branch of the Indus,
+called the Pitty river, from a place of that name on its western shore
+near the mouth, is probably that here meant. That branch leads to
+Larry-bunder, the sea-port of Tatta; and the Synde of Terry is probably
+the Diul-sinde of other authors, a place situated somewhat in this
+neighbourhood, but which is not to be found in modern maps.--E.
+
+7. _Soret_, the chief city of which is called Janagur, is a small, but
+rich province, which lies west from Guzerat, having the ocean to the
+south.--Soret is not now recognized as a distinct province or district,
+but seems the modern Werrear, the western district of Guzerat,
+Rhadunpoor appearing to be its chief town. Janagur, in this district, is
+on the west side of the river Butlass, or Banass, which runs into the
+head of the gulf of Cutch.--E.
+
+8. _Jesselmere_, of which the chief city has the same name, joins with
+Soret Backar and Tatta, being to the south of Soret and Tatta, and
+having Backar on the west.
+
+9. _Attock_, the chief city being of the same name, lies on the east
+side of the Indus, which parts it from Hajykan.--This account is
+erroneous, as Attock-Benares is much farther up the river Indus than
+Hajykan, having the eastern extremity of Cabul on the opposite side of
+the Indus.--E.
+
+10. _Punjab_, which signifies the _five waters_, because it is seated
+among five rivers, all tributaries to the Indus, which, somewhat to the
+south of Lahore, form only one river. This is a great kingdom, and
+extremely rich and fertile. Lahore, the chief city, is well built, very
+large, populous, and rich, being the chief mart of trade in all India.
+
+11. _Chishmeere_, Kyshmir, Cachmir, or Cashmere, its chief city being
+Siranakar. The river Phat passes through this country, and, after
+creeping about many islands, falls into the Indus.--The rivers of
+Cashmere, here called the Phat, are the Chota-sing, or Jellum, in the N.
+and the Jellium, or Colhumah, in the S. which unite in the W. to form
+the Jhylum or Babut, the Phat or Bhat of Terry and Purchas, and the
+Hydaspes of the ancients, one of the _five rivers_ of the Indus. The
+present capital of Cashmere is likewise named Cashmere; but has in its
+close neighbourhood a town or fortress called Sheergur, the Siranakar of
+Terry.--E.
+
+12. _Banchish_, with its chief city named Bishur. It lies east southerly
+from Cashmere, from which it is divided by the river Indus.--No such
+province or city is to be found in the modern geography of Hindoostan,
+neither any names in the indicated direction that have any resemblance
+to these. In the map of the Mogul empire in the Pilgrims, appended to
+the journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Banchish and Bishar are placed on a river
+named the Kaul, being the _fourth_ of the Punjab or five rivers,
+counting from the west, and therefore probably the Ravey, or Hydraotes
+of the ancients. Near the head of that river, and to the east of
+Cashmere, is a town, called Kishtewar, which may possibly have been the
+Bishur of Terry: But there is a little-known district near the head of
+the Jumna, S.S.E. from Cashmere, named Besseer, that has considerable
+resemblance in sound to Bishur, and is in the indicated direction.--E.
+
+13. _Jeugapor_, with its chief city likewise so named, lies on the Kaul,
+one of the five rivers that water the Punjab.--The only place upon the
+Ravey, which answers to the Kaul, which has the smallest resemblance
+with Jengapor, or Jenupur, as it is likewise called by Purchas, is
+Shawpoor, N.E. from Agra. Yet Jaypoor, otherwise called Jyenagur, in
+Ajmeer, is more probably the district and city here meant, though not in
+the Punjab.--E.
+
+14. _Jenba_, its chief city so called, lies east of the Punjab.--This
+may possibly be Jambae, north of Lahore.--E.
+
+15. _Delli_, or Delhi, its chief city being of the same name, lies
+between Jenba and Agra, the river Jemni, which runs through Agra and
+falls into the Ganges, begins in this province. Delhi is a great and
+ancient city, the seat of the Mogul's ancestors, and where most of them
+are interred.--The Jumnah, or Jemni of Terry, rises far to the north of
+Delhi, in the high-peaked mountain of Cantal to the east of
+Cashmere.--E.
+
+16. _Bando_, its chief city so called, borders with Agra on the
+west.--No such name is to be found in modern maps.--E.
+
+17. _Malwa_ is a very fertile province, of which Rantipore is the chief
+city.--In the other edition of this list in the Pilgrims, Ugen, Nar, and
+Sering, or Oojain, Indore, and Serong, are said to have been the
+capitals of Malwa. The Rantipore of Terry may have been that now called
+Ramypoor.--E.
+
+18. _Chitor_, an ancient and great kingdom, its chief city being of the
+same name.--Chitore is in the south of Ajmeer. In the edition of this
+list given by Purchas at the end of the journal of Sir Thomas Roe, he
+gives the following account of Chitore: "Chitore stands upon a mighty
+hill, and is walled round in a circuit of ten English miles. There still
+remain at this place above an hundred temples, the palace of the
+ancient kings, and many brave pillars of carved stone. There is but one
+ascent to the place, cut out of the solid rock, and passing through four
+magnificent gateways. Within the walls are the ruins of 100,000 houses
+of stone, but it is now uninhabited. This was doubtless one of the
+residences of Porus, and was won from the Ranna, his descendant, by
+Akbar shah, the father of the reigning Mogul. The Ranna fled into the
+fastnesses of his mountains, and took up his residence at Odeypoor; but
+was at length induced, in 1614, to acknowledge the Mogul as his superior
+lord, by Sultan Churrum, third son of the present emperor Shah
+Jehanguire. This kingdom lies N.W. from Candeish, N.E. from Guzerat, and
+in the way between Agra and Surat; the Ranna keeping among the hills to
+the west of Ahmedabad.--"_Purch._
+
+19. _Guzerat_ is a goodly and mighty kingdom, and exceedingly rich,
+which incloses the bay of Cambay. The river Taptee waters the city of
+Surat, which trades to the Red Sea, to Acheen, and to divers other
+places.
+
+20. _Khamdesh_, the chief city of which is Brampore, [Boorhanpoor, or
+Burhampore,] which is large and populous. Adjoining to this province is
+a petty prince called Partap-shah, tributary to the Mogul; and this is
+the most southerly part of the Mogul dominions.
+
+21. _Berar_, the chief city of which is called Shahpoor. The
+southernmost part of this province likewise bounds the Mogul
+empire.--The Shahpoor of Terry may possibly be Saipoor in the north of
+Berar. In modern days, the chief cities of the great province or kingdom
+of Berar, now belonging to a Mahratta chief; are Nagpoor, Ruthunpoor,
+and Sonepoor.--E.
+
+22. _Narwar_, its chief city being Gohud, is watered by a fair river
+that falls into the Ganges.--This province of Narwar, now called Gohud,
+from its chief city, is to be carefully distinguished from Marwar to the
+westwards.--E.
+
+22. _Gualior_, with its chief city of the same name, in which the Mogul
+has a great treasury in bullion. In this city likewise there is an
+exceedingly strong castle, in which state prisoners are kept.--Gualior
+is, properly speaking, in the same province or district with Gohud.--E.
+
+24. _Agra_ is a principal and great province, its chief city being of
+the same name. From Agra to Lahore, the two chief cities of this empire,
+the distance is about 400 English miles, the country in all that
+distance being without a hill, and the road being planted the whole way
+with trees on both sides, forming a beautiful avenue.
+
+25. _Sanbal_, with its chief city of the same name. The river Jumna
+parts this province from that called Narwar.--This province and city are
+not to be traced in modern maps.--E.
+
+26. _Bakar_, the chief city of which is Bikaneer, lies on the west side
+of the Ganges.--Nothing resembling either name can now be found in the
+indicated situation in modern maps. Bicaneer is a district and town in
+the desert, far west of the Ganges.--E.
+
+27. _Nagracutt_, or Nakarkut, with its chief city of the same name, in
+which there is a temple most richly adorned, the ceiling and pavement
+being of plates of pure gold. In this place they have an idol called
+Matta, visited yearly by many thousands of the Indians, who, from
+devotion, cut out part of their tongues, which they sacrifice at his
+altar. In this province likewise, there is another famous place of
+pilgrimage, Jallamaka, where there are daily to be seen incessant
+eruptions of fire, out of cold springs and hard rocks, before which the
+idolaters fall down and worship.--In the edition of this list, appended
+by Purchas to the journal of Sir Thomas Roe, this district and city are
+said to be in the northeasternmost confines of the Mogul dominions, N.E.
+from the head of the bay of Bengal. This description is however entirely
+at variance with the accompanying map in the Pilgrims, in which
+Nagracutt and its capital are placed east from the Punjab; the capital
+being on the easternmost of the five rivers of the Setlege, and towards
+its head. In the edition of this list given by Churchill, as an appendix
+likewise to Sir Thomas Roe, Nagracutt is said to lie to the north,
+between the Punjab and Jamboe. In our best modern maps, no district or
+place, having the smallest resemblance in name, is to be found in any of
+these indicated situations. Terry gives no reference as to situation; so
+that we may conjecture that Nagracutt may refer to Nucker-gaut, the
+passage of the Ganges through the Sewalick mountains, between Serinagur
+and Hindoostan.--E.
+
+28. _Siba_, the chief city of which is Hardwair, or Hurdwar, where the
+famous river Ganges seems to begin, and issues out of a rock, which the
+superstitious Gentiles imagine resembles a cow's head, which animal they
+hold in the highest veneration; and to this place they resort daily in
+great numbers to wash themselves.
+
+29. _Kakares_, the principal cities being Dankalec and Purhola. This
+country is very mountainous, and is divided from Tartary by the
+mountains of Caucasus, being the farthest north of any part of the Mogul
+dominions.--In the map of Purchas, this province or kingdom is called
+Kares, and is placed directly to the north of where the Ganges breaks
+through the Sewalick mountains, above Hurdwar, at the _Cow's-mouth_. In
+that direction are the little-known districts of Serinagur,
+Badry-cazram, and others; but no names either of towns or districts that
+in the least resemble those given by Terry.--E.
+
+30. _Gor_, its chief city of the same name. This province is full of
+mountains, and in it begins the river Persilis, which discharges its
+waters into the Ganges.--In the other copy of this list in Purchas, so
+often already referred to, Gor is said to lie in the northern part of
+the Mogul dominions. From this, and the mountainous nature of the
+country, as stated by Terry, it may possibly be Gorcah, one of the
+little-known _twenty-four rajahs_, to the west of Napaul; and the
+Persilis of Terry may be the Sursutty or the Marshandy, both head
+streams of the Gunduck.--E.
+
+31. _Pitan_, and its chief city so named. The river Kanda waters this
+province, and falls into the Ganges on its confines.--This is probably
+one of the _twenty-four_ rajahs, called Peytahn, in the mountainous
+country to the north of Oude, which is watered by several of the head
+streams of the Gunduck and Booree or Rapty rivers.--E.
+
+32. _Kanduana_, the chief city of which is called Karhakatenka. The
+river Sersili parts it from Pitan; and this province, with Pitan and
+Gor, are the north-east boundaries of this great monarchy.--The
+indicated connection with Gor and Pitan, or Gorcah and Peytahn, would
+lead to suppose that Napaul is here meant. Karhakatenka may possibly be
+some name of Catmandoo, or may have some reference to Kyraut, a district
+in the east of Napaul, bordering on Bootan. The river Sersili of this
+district is evidently the Persilis mentioned in Gor, and may refer to
+the Sursutty.--E.
+
+33. _Patna_, the chief city of which has the same name. The river
+Ganges bounds this province on the west, and the Sersilis on the east.
+It is a very fertile province.--In the former edition of this list by
+Purchas, this province is said to be watered by four rivers, the Ganges,
+Jumna, Sersili, and Kanda, all of which rivers here unite. Patna is
+seated on the south side of the Ganges, which is joined a little way
+higher up by the Jumna. Opposite to Patna the Gunduck falls into the
+Ganges, probably the Kanda of Purchas, of which the Sursutty, formerly
+supposed to be the same with the Sersili, or Persilis, is one of the
+feeders. Patna is well known as a principal city of Bahar.--E.
+
+34. _Jesual_, the chief city of which is called Rajapore, lies east of
+Patna.--This may possibly refer to the district and city of Hajipoor in
+Bahar, to the N.E. of Patna.--E.
+
+35. _Mevat_, the chief city of which province is Narnol, is a very
+mountainous country.--In the map of the Pilgrims, Mevat and Narnol are
+placed to the east of Jesual, but the geography of this part of
+Hindoostan in that map is utterly unintelligible, and no conjecture can
+be hazarded respecting either Mevat or Narnol.--E.
+
+36. _Udessa_, the chief city of which is called Jokanat, is the most
+easterly territory in the kingdom of the Mogul.--In the other edition of
+this list given by Purchas, Udessa, or Udeza, is said to border on the
+kingdom of Maug, a savage people dwelling between this province and the
+kingdom of Pegu. Its eastern situation would lead to the province of
+Chittagong or Islambabad. The Maugs, or Mugs, are probably the barbarous
+mountaineers of Meckley to the north of Aracan; but no names in modern
+maps have any reference to Udessa, Udeza, or Jokanat, unless Jokanat be
+some strange corruption of Chittagong.--E.
+
+37. _Bengal_, a mighty and fertile kingdom, bounded by the gulf or bay
+of the same name, into which the river Ganges discharges itself by four
+great branches, into which it divides.--In the other edition of this
+list, by Purchas, so often referred to, Ragamahall and Dakaka, or
+Rajemal and Dacca, are mentioned as the chief cities of Bengal. It would
+require far too long a commentary, to explain some farther ignorant
+indications of the havens and provinces of Bengal, contained in that
+former list, and in the map of the Pilgrims; both being so faulty in
+positions, and so corrupted in the names, as to be useless and
+unintelligible. By the labours of Rennel, as since extended and improved
+by Arrowsmith, the geography of Bengal is now as completely elucidated
+as that of Britain.--E.
+
+Here I must take notice of a material error in our geographers, who, in
+their globes and maps, make Hindoostan and China neighbours, though many
+large countries are interposed between them. Their great distance may
+appear, from the long travels of the Indian merchants, who are usually
+more than two years in their journey and return, between Agra and the
+wall of China. The length of these before-named provinces, from N.W. to
+S.E. is at least 1000 cosses, every Indian coss being two English miles.
+From N. to S. the extent is about 1400 miles. The greatest breadth, from
+N.E. to S.W. is about 1500 miles. The northernmost part is in 43° of
+north latitude.[230]
+
+[Footnote 230: The northern mountains of Cashmere, are only in lat. 35°
+30' N. so that the 43° of the text is probably a mistake for 34°.--E.]
+
+To give an exact account of all these provinces, were more than I am
+able to undertake; yet, from what I have observed of a few, I may
+venture to conjecture concerning the rest, and I am convinced that the
+Great Mogul, considering the extent of his territories, his wealth, and
+the rich commodities of his dominions, is the greatest known monarch of
+the east, if not in the whole world. This widely extended sovereignty is
+so rich and fertile, and so abounding in all things for the use of man,
+that it is able to subsist and flourish of itself, without the help of
+any neighbour. To speak first of food, which nature requires most. This
+land abounds in singularly good wheat, rice, barley, and various other
+grains, from which to make bread, the staff of life. Their wheat grows
+like ours, but the grain is somewhat larger and whiter, of which the
+inhabitants make most pure and well-relished bread. The common people
+make their bread in cakes, which they bake or fire on portable iron
+hearths or plates, which they carry with them on their journeys, using
+them in their tents. This seems to be an ancient custom, as appears from
+the instance of Sarah in our bible, when she entertained the angels.
+
+To their bread, they have great abundance of other excellent provisions,
+as butter and cheese in great plenty, made from the milk of their
+numerous cows, sheep, and goats. They have likewise a large animal,
+called a buffalo, having a thick smooth skin without hair, the females
+of which give excellent milk. Their flesh resembles beef, but is not so
+sweet or wholesome. They have plenty of venison of several kinds, as red
+and fallow deer, elks, and antelopes. These are not any where kept in
+parks, the whole empire being as it were a forest, so that they are seen
+every where in travelling through the country; and they are free game
+for all men, except within a certain distance of where the king happens
+to reside. They have also plenty of hares, with a variety of land and
+water fowl, and abundance of fish, which it were too tedious to
+enumerate. Of fowls, they have geese, ducks, pigeons, partridges,
+quails, pheasants, and many other good sorts, all to be had at low
+rates. I have seen a good sheep bought for about the value of our
+shilling: four couple of hens for the same price; a hare for a penny;
+three partridges for the same money; and so in proportion for other
+things.
+
+The cattle of this country differ from ours, in having a great bunch of
+grisly flesh on the meeting of their shoulders. Their sheep have great
+bob-tails of considerable weight, and their flesh is as good as our
+English mutton, but their wool is very coarse. They have also abundance
+of salt, and sugar is so plentiful, that it sells, when well refined,
+for two-pence a pound, or less. Their fruits are numerous, excellent,
+abundant, and cheap; as musk-melons, water-melons, pomegranates,
+pomecitrons, lemons, oranges, dates, figs, grapes, plantains, which are
+long round yellow fruits, which taste like our Norwich pears; mangoes,
+in shape and colour like our apricots, but more luscious, and ananas or
+pine-apples, to crown all, which taste like a pleasing compound of
+strawberries, claret-wine, rose-water, and sugar. In the northern parts
+of the empire, they have plenty of apples and pears. They have every
+where abundance of excellent roots, as carrots, potatoes, and others;
+also garlic and onions, and choice herbs for sallads. In the southern
+parts, ginger grows almost every where.
+
+I must here mention a pleasant clear liquor called _taddy_, which issues
+from a spungy tree, growing straight and tall without boughs to the top,
+and there spreads out in branches resembling our English colewarts. They
+make their incisions, under which they hang small earthenware pots; and
+the liquor which flows out in the night is as pleasant to the taste as
+any white wine, if drank in the morning early, but it alters in the day
+by the sun's heat, becoming heady, ill-tasted and unwholesome. It is a
+most penetrating medicinal drink, if taken early and in moderation, as
+some have experienced to their great happiness, by relieving them from
+the tortures of the stone, that tyrant of maladies and opprobrium of
+the doctors.
+
+At Surat, and thence to Agra and beyond, it only rains during one season
+of the year, which begins when the sun comes to the northern tropic, and
+continues till he returns again to the line. These violent rains are
+ushered in, and take their leave, by most fearful tempests of thunder
+and lightning, more terrible than I can express, but which seldom do any
+harm. The reason of this may be the subtile nature of the air, breeding
+fewer _thunder-stones_, than where the air is grosser and more cloudy.
+In these three months, it rains every day more or less, and sometimes
+for a whole quarter of the moon without intermission. Which abundance of
+rain, together with the heat of the sun, so enriches the soil, which
+they never force by manure, that it becomes fruitful for all the rest of
+the year, as that of Egypt is by the inundations of the Nile. After this
+season of rain is over, the sky becomes so clear, that scarcely is a
+single cloud to be seen for the other nine months. The goodness of the
+soil is evident from this circumstance, that though the ground, after
+the nine months of dry weather, looks altogether like barren sands, it
+puts on an universal coat of green within seven days after the rains
+begin to fall. Farther to confirm this, among the many hundreds of acres
+I have seen in corn in India, I never saw any that did not grow up as
+thick as it could well stand. Their ground is tilled by ploughs drawn by
+oxen; the seed-time being in May or the beginning of June, and the
+harvest in November and December, the most temperate months in all the
+year. The ground is not inclosed, except near towns and villages, which
+stand very thick. They do not mow their grass for hay as we do; but cut
+it either green or withered, when wanted. They sow abundance of tobacco,
+but know not the way to cure it and make it strong, as is done in
+America.
+
+The country is beautified by many woods, in which are a great variety of
+goodly trees; but I never saw any there of the kinds we have in England.
+In general their trees are full of sap, which I ascribe to the fatness
+of the soil. Some have leaves as broad as bucklers; others are much
+divided into small portions, like the leaves of ferns. Such are those of
+the tamarind tree, which bears an acid fruit in a pod somewhat like our
+beans, and is most wholesome to cool and purify the blood. One of their
+trees is worthy of being particularly noticed: Out of its branches there
+grow certain sprigs or fibres, which hang downwards, and extend till
+they touch the ground, in which they strike roots, and become
+afterwards new trunks and firm supporters to the boughs and arms; whence
+these trees come in time to grow to a great height, and extend to an
+incredible breadth.[231] All trees in the southern parts of India are
+perpetually clothed in verdure Their flowers rather delight the eye than
+please the sense of smelling, having beautiful colours, but few of them,
+except roses and one or two other kinds, are any way fragrant.
+
+[Footnote 231: The Banian tree, a species of Indian fig.--E.]
+
+India is watered by many goodly rivers, the two chief of which are the
+Indus and the Ganges. There is this remarkable in the water of the
+Ganges, that a pint of it weighs less by an ounce than that of any other
+river in the empire; and therefore, wherever the Mogul happens to
+reside, it is brought to him for his drinking. Besides rivers, there are
+abundance of well-fed springs, on which they bestow great cost in many
+places, constructing many stone-buildings in the form of ponds, which
+they call _tanks_, some of which exceed a mile or two in circuit, made
+round or square or polygonal, girt all round with handsome stone-walls,
+within which are steps of well-dressed stone encompassing the water, for
+people to go down on every aide to procure supplies. These tanks are
+filled during the rainy season, and contain water for the supply of
+those who dwell far from springs or rivers, till the wet season again
+returns. Water, the most ancient beverage in the world, is the common
+drink of India, being more sweet and pleasant than ours, and agrees
+better with the constitution in this hot country than any other liquor.
+Some small quantity of wine is made among them, which they call arrack,
+but is not common, being distilled from sugar, and the spicy rind of a
+tree, which they call _jagra_. This is very wholesome, if used in
+moderation. Many of the people, who are strict in their religion, use no
+wine at all. They use a liquor which is more wholesome than pleasant,
+called _cohha_; being a black seed boiled in water, which does not much
+alter the taste of the water, but is an excellent helper of digestion,
+serving to quicken the spirits, and to purify the blood.[232] There is
+also another help for digestion and to comfort the stomach, used by
+those who refrain from wine. This is an herb called betel, or _paune_,
+its leaf resembling that of our ivy. They chew this leaf along with a
+hard nut, called _areka_, somewhat like a nutmeg, mixing a little pure
+white lime among the leaves; and when they have extracted the juice,
+they throw away the remains. This has many rare qualities: It preserves
+the teeth, comforts the brain, strengthens the stomach, and prevents a
+bad breath.
+
+[Footnote 232: The author here describes coffee, now so universally
+known in Europe.--E.]
+
+Their houses are generally very mean, except in the cities, where I have
+seen many fair buildings. Many of the houses in these are high, with
+flat roofs, where, in the cool of the mornings and evenings, they enjoy
+the fresh air. Their houses have no chimneys, as they use no fires,
+except for dressing their victuals. In their upper rooms, they have many
+windows and doors, for admitting light and air, but use no glass. The
+materials of their best houses are bricks and stone, well squared and
+built, as I have observed in Ahmedabad, which may serve as an instance
+for all. This is an extensive and rich city, compassed about with a
+strong stone-wall, and entered by twelve handsome gates. Both in their
+towns and villages, they have usually many fair trees among the houses,
+being a great defence against the violence of the sun. These trees are
+commonly so numerous and thick, that a city or town, when seen at a
+distance from some commanding eminence, seems a wood or thicket.
+
+The staple commodities of this empire are indigo and cotton. To produce
+cotton, they sow seeds, which grow up into bushes like our rose-trees.
+These produce first a yellow blossom, which falls off, and leaves a pod
+about the size of a man's thumb, in which the substance at first is
+moist and yellow. As this ripens, it swells larger, till at length it
+bursts the covering, the cotton being then as white as snow. It is then
+gathered. These shrubs continue to bear for three or four years, when
+they have to be rooted out, and new ones substituted. Of this vegetable
+wool, or cotton, they fabricate various kinds of pure white cloth, some
+of which I have seen as fine as our best lawns, if not finer. Some of
+the coarser sorts they dye in various colours, or stain with a variety
+of curious figures.
+
+The ships that go usually from Surat to Mokha, are of exceeding great
+burden, some of them, as I believe, exceeding 1400 or 1600 tons; but
+they are ill built, and though they have good ordnance, they are unable
+for any defence. In these ships there are yearly a vast number of
+passengers: As, for instance, in that year in which we left India, there
+came 1700 persons, most of whom went not for profit, but out of
+devotion, to visit the sepulchre of Mahomet at Medina near Mecca, about
+150 leagues from Mokha. Those who have been upon this pilgrimage are
+ever after called _hoggeis_, [_hajim_] or holy men. This ship, from
+Surat for the Red Sea, begins her voyage about the 20th of March and
+returns to Surat about the end of September following. The voyage is
+short, and might easily be made in two months; but during the long
+season of the rains, and a little before and after, the winds are mostly
+so violent that there is no putting to sea without extreme hazard. The
+cargo of this ship, on its return, is usually worth £200,000 sterling,
+mostly in gold and silver. Besides this, and the quantities of money
+which come yearly out of Europe, which I do not pretend to calculate,
+many streams of silver flow continually thither, and there abide. It is
+lawful for all to bring in silver, and to carry away commodities, but it
+is a capital crime to carry away any great sums.
+
+All the coin or bullion that comes to this country is presently melted
+down and refined, and coined with the stamp of the Mogul, being his name
+and title in Persian characters. This coin is purer silver than any
+other that I know, being of virgin silver without alloy, so that in the
+Spanish dollar, the purest money in Europe, there is some loss. Their
+money is called _rupees_, which are of divers values, the meanest being
+worth two shillings, and the best about two shillings and nine-pence.
+This is their general money of account. There is in Guzerat a coin of
+inferior value, called _mamoodies_, worth about twelve-pence each. Both
+these and the rupees are likewise coined in halves and quarters; so that
+three-pence is the smallest piece of current silver in the country. That
+which passes current for small change is brass money, which they call
+_pices_, of which three, or thereabout, are worth an English penny.
+These are made so massy, that the brass in them, when put to other uses,
+is well worth the quantity of silver at which they are rated. Their
+silver money is made both square and round; but so thick, that it never
+breaks or wears out.
+
+For farther commodities; India yields great store of silk, which they
+weave very ingeniously, sometimes mixed with gold or silver. They make
+velvets, sattins, and taffetas, but not so rich as those of Italy. This
+country also produces many drugs and gums, and particularly the gum-lac,
+from which hard sealing-wax is made. The earth also yields abundant
+minerals, as lead, iron, copper, and brass, and, as they say, silver;
+yet, though this be true, they need not work their silver mines, being
+already so abundantly supplied with that metal from other nations. They
+have spices from other countries, and especially from Sumatra, Java, and
+the Molucca islands. They have curious pleasure gardens, planted with
+fruit-trees and delightful flowers, to which nature lends daily such
+ample supply, that they seem never to fade. In these places they have
+pleasant fountains, in which to bathe, and other delights by various
+conveyances of water, whose silent murmurs sooth their senses to sleep,
+in the hot season of the day.
+
+Lest this remote country might seem an earthly paradise, without any
+inconveniences, I must notice that it contains many lions, tigers,
+wolves, and jackals, which are a kind of wild dogs, besides many other
+noxious and hurtful animals. In their rivers they have many crocodiles,
+and on the land many overgrown snakes and serpents, with other venomous
+and pernicious creatures. In the houses we often meet with scorpions,
+whose stinging is most painful and even deadly, unless the part be
+immediately anointed with an oil made of scorpions.[233] The abundance
+of flies in those parts is likewise an extreme annoyance; as, in the
+heat of the day, their numbers are so prodigious, that we cannot have
+peace or rest for them in any part. They cover our meat the moment it is
+set on the table, wherefore we are obliged to have men standing ready to
+drive them away with napkins, while we are eating. In the night,
+likewise, we are much disquieted with musquetos, like our gnats, but
+somewhat less; and, in the cities, there are such numbers of large
+hungry rats, that they often bite people as they sleep in their beds.
+
+[Footnote 233: This is a mere fancy, as any bland oil is equally
+efficacious.--E.]
+
+In this country the winds, which are called monsoons, blow constantly,
+or altering only a few points, for six months from the south, and other
+six months from the north. The months of April and May, and the
+beginning of June, till the rains come, are extremely hot; and the wind,
+which then sometimes blows gently over the parched ground, becomes so
+heated, as much oppresses all who are exposed to it: Yet God so
+mercifully provides for our relief, that most commonly he sends so
+strong a gale as greatly tempers the sultry air. Sometimes the wind
+blows very high during the hot and dry season, raising up vast
+quantities of dust and sand, like dark clouds pregnant with rain, and
+which often prodigiously annoy the people among whom they fall. But
+there is no country without its inconveniences; for the wise Disposer of
+all events hath attempered bitter things with sweet, to teach mankind
+that there is no true or perfect contentment to be found, but only in
+the kingdom of God.
+
+This country has many excellent horses, which the inhabitants know well
+how to manage. Besides those bred in the country, they have many of the
+Tartarian, Persian, and Arabian breeds, which last is considered as the
+best in the world. They are about as large as ours, and are valued among
+them at as dear a rate as we usually esteem ours, perhaps higher. They
+are kept very daintily, every good horse being allowed one man to dress
+and feed him. Their provender is a species of grain called _donna_,
+somewhat like our pease, which are boiled, and then given cold to the
+horses, mixed with coarse sugar; and twice or thrice a week they have
+butter given them to scour their bodies. There are likewise in this
+country a great number of camels, dromedaries, mules, asses, and some
+rhinoceroses. These are huge beasts, bigger than the fattest oxen to be
+seen in England, and their skins lie upon their bodies in plaits or
+wrinkles.
+
+They have many elephants, the Great Mogul having not fewer than 1400 for
+his own use, and all the nobles of the country have more or less, some
+having to the number of an hundred. Though the largest of all
+terrestrial animals, the elephants are wonderfully tractable, except
+that they are mad at times; but at all other times, a little boy is able
+to rule the largest of them. I have seen some thirteen feet high; but I
+have been often told that some are fifteen feet in height at the least.
+Their colour is universally black, their skins very thick and smooth,
+and without hair. They take much delight to bathe themselves in water,
+and they swim better than any beast I know. They lie down and rise again
+at pleasure, as other beasts do. Their pace is not swift, being only
+about three miles an hour; but they are the surest footed beasts in the
+world, as they never endanger their riders by stumbling. They are the
+most docile of all creatures, and of those we account merely possessed
+of instinct, they come nearest to reason. Lipsius, _Cent_. 1, _Epist_.
+50, in his observations, taken from others, writes more concerning them
+than I can confirm, or than any can credit, as I conceive; yet I can
+vouch for many things which seem to be acts of reason rather than of
+mere brute sense, which we call instinct. For instance, an elephant will
+do almost any thing which his keeper commands. If he would have him
+terrify a man, he will make towards him as if he meant to tread him in
+pieces, yet does him no hurt. If he would have him to abuse a man, he
+will take up dirt, or kennel water, in his trunk, and dash it in his
+face. Their trunks are long grisly snouts, hanging down betwixt their
+tusks, by some called their hand, which they use very dexterously on all
+occasions.
+
+An English merchant, of good credit, told me the following story of an
+elephant, as having happened to his own knowledge at Ajimeer, the place
+where the Mogul then resided:--This elephant used often to pass through
+the bazar, or market-place, where a woman who there sold herbs used to
+give him a handful as he passed her stall. This elephant afterwards went
+mad,[234] and, having broken his fetters, took his way furiously through
+the market-place, whence all the people fled as quickly as possible to
+get out of his way. Among these was his old friend the herb-woman, who,
+in her haste and terror, forgot to take away her little child. On coming
+to the place where this woman was in use to sit, the elephant stopped,
+and seeing the child among the herbs, he took it up gently in his trunk,
+and laid it carefully on a stall under the projecting roof of a house
+hard by, without doing it the smallest injury, and then continued his
+furious course. A travelling Jesuit, named Acosta, relates a similar
+story of an elephant at Goa, as from his own experience.--The king keeps
+certain elephants for the execution of malefactors. When one of these is
+brought forth to dispatch a criminal, if his keeper desires that the
+offender be destroyed speedily, this vast creature will instantly crush
+him to atoms under his foot; but if desired to torture him, will break
+his limbs successively, as men are broken on the wheel.
+
+[Footnote 234: This temporary madness of the male elephants is usual in
+the rutting season.--E.]
+
+The Mogul takes great delight in these stately animals, and often, when
+he sits in state, calls for some of the finest and largest to be
+brought, which are taught to bend before him, as in reverence, when they
+come into his presence. They often fight before him, beginning their
+combats like rams, by running furiously against each other, and butting
+with their foreheads. They afterwards use their tusks and teeth,
+fighting with the utmost fury, yet are they most careful to preserve
+their keepers, so that few of them receive any hurt in these
+rencounters. They are governed by a hooked instrument of steel, made
+like the iron end of a boat-hook, with which their keepers, who sit on
+their necks, put them back, or goad them on, at pleasure.
+
+The king has many of his elephants trained up for war; each of which
+carries an iron gun about six feet long, which is fastened to a strong
+square frame of wood on his back, made fast by strong girths or ropes
+round his body. This gun carries a bullet about the size of a small
+tennis-ball, and is let into the timber with a loop of iron. The four
+corners of the wooden frame have each a silken banner on a short pole,
+and a gunner sits within, to shoot as occasion serves, managing the gun
+like a harquebuss, or large wall-piece. When the king travels, he is
+attended by many elephants armed in this manner, as part of his guard.
+He keeps many of them likewise, merely for state, which go before him,
+and are adorned with bosses of brass, and some have their bosses made of
+silver, or even of gold; having likewise many bells jingling about them,
+in the sound of which the animal delights. They have handsome housings,
+of cloth, or velvet, or of cloth of silver, or cloth of gold; and, for
+the greater state, have large royal banners of silk carried before them,
+on which the king's ensign is depicted, being a lion in the sun. These
+state-elephants are each allowed three or four men at least to wait upon
+them. Other elephants are appointed for carrying his women, who sit in
+pretty convenient receptacles fastened on their backs, made of slight
+turned pillars, richly covered, each holding four persons, who sit
+within. These are represented by our painters as resembling castles.
+Others again are employed to carry his baggage. He has one very fine
+elephant that has submitted, like the rest, to wear feathers, but could
+never be brought to endure a man, or any other burden, on his back.
+
+Although the country be very fertile, and all kinds of provisions cheap,
+yet these animals, because of their vast bulk, are very chargeable in
+keeping; such as are well fed costing four or five shillings each,
+daily. They are kept out of doors, being fastened with a strong chain by
+one of their hind legs to a tree, or a strong post. Thus standing out in
+the sun, the flies are often extremely troublesome to them; on which
+occasions they tread the dry ground into dust with their feet, and throw
+it over their bodies with their trunks, to drive away the flies. The
+males are usually mad once a year after the females, at which time they
+are extremely mischievous, and will strike any one who comes in their
+way, except their own keeper; and such is their vast strength, that they
+will kill a horse or a camel with one blow of their trunks. This fury
+lasts only a few days; when they return to their usual docility. At
+these times they are kept apart from all company, and fettered with
+strong chains to prevent mischief. If by chance they get loose in their
+state of phrenzy, they run at everything they see in motion; and, in
+this case, the only possible means of stopping them is by lighting a
+kind of artificial fire-works called wild-fire, the sparkling and
+cracking of which make them stand still and tremble.
+
+The king allows four females to each of his great elephants, which are
+called their wives. The testes of the males are said to lie about his
+forehead, and the teats of the female are between her fore-legs. She
+goes twelve months with young. The elephant is thirty years old before
+he attains his full growth, and they live to seventy or eighty years of
+age. Although very numerous, elephants are yet so highly prized in
+India, that some of the best are valued at a thousand pounds or more.
+
+§3. _Of the People of Hindoostan, and their Manners and Customs_.
+
+The whole inhabitants of Hindoostan were anciently Gentiles, or
+notorious idolaters, generally denominated Hindoos, hot ever since the
+time of Tamerlane they have been mixed with Mahometans.[235] There are,
+besides, many Persians, Tartars, Abyssinians, and Arminians, and some
+few of almost every nation in Asia, if not in Europe, that reside here.
+Among these are some Jews, but not esteemed, for their very name is
+proverbial, as a term of reproach. In stature, the natives of Hindoostan
+are equal to ourselves, being in general very straight and well-made,
+for I never saw any deformed person in that country. They are of a dark
+tawny or olive colour, having their hair as black as a raven, but not
+curled. They love not to see either a man or a woman very fair, as they
+say that is the colour of lepers, which are common among them. Most of
+the Mahometans, except their molahs or priests, or such as are old and
+retired, keep their chins shaved, but allow the hair on their upper-lips
+to grow long. They usually shave all the hair from their heads, leaving
+only one lock on their crowns for Mahomet to pull them by up to heaven.
+Both among the Gentiles and Mahometans they have excellent barbers. The
+people often bathe and wash their bodies, and anoint themselves with
+perfumed oils.
+
+[Footnote 235: The Mahomedans made extensive conquests in India long
+before the era of Timor.--E.]
+
+The dresses of the men and women differ very little from each other, and
+are mostly made of white cotton cloth. In fashion, they sit close to
+the shape to the middle, and from thence hang loose to below the knee.
+Under this they wear long close breeches down to their ancles, crumpled
+about the small of their legs like boots. Their feet are put bare into
+their shoes, which are made like slippers, that they may be readily put
+off on entering their houses, the floors of which are covered with
+excellent carpets of the country manufacture, as good as any made in
+Turkey or Persia. Instead of these carpets, some have other
+floor-cloths, according to the quality of the owner. On these they sit
+when conversing or eating, like tailors on the shop-board. The men's
+heads are covered by turbans, being sashes, or long webs of thin cloth,
+white or coloured, wreathed many times about. They do not uncover their
+heads in making reverence, instead of which they bow their bodies,
+placing the right hand on the top of the head, after which they touch
+the earth with that hand, as if indicating that the party saluted may
+tread upon them if he please. Those who are equals take each other by
+the chin or beard, as Joab did Amasa; but salute in love, not in
+treachery.
+
+The Mahometan women, except such as are poor or dishonest, never appear
+abroad. Though not fair, they are all well favoured, have their heads
+covered with veils, and their hair hanging down behind, twisted with
+silk. Those of quality are decorated with many jewels hung around their
+necks, and about their wrists and arms; and they have several holes
+round their ears in which they hang pendents, besides that every woman
+has a hole in her nostrils, in which to wear a ring, which seems to have
+been an ancient ornament, being mentioned in the Old Testament. Their
+women are happy above all others I have ever heard of; in the ease with
+which they bear their children, being one day able to ride with their
+infants unborn, and to ride again the next with their child in their
+arms.
+
+The language of the common people of this country, called Hindoostanee,
+is smooth, and easily pronounced, and is written from left to right, as
+we do. The learned tongues are the Persian and Arabic, which are written
+backwards, from right to left, like the Hebrew. There is but little
+learning among them, which may be owing to the scarcity of books, which
+are all in manuscript, and therefore few and dear; but they are a people
+of good capacity, and were they to cultivate literature among them,
+would assuredly produce many excellent works. They have heard of
+Aristotle, whom they name _Aplis_, and have some of his writings
+translated into Arabic. The noble physician, Avicenna, was a native of
+Samarcandia, the country of Tamerlane, and in this science they possess
+good skill. The most prevalent diseases of this country are dysenteries,
+hot fevers, and calentures, in all which they prescribe abstinence as a
+principal remedy. The filthy disease produced by incontinence is
+likewise common among them. They delight much in music, having many
+instruments, both stringed and wind; but, to my ears, their music seemed
+all discordant. They write many pretty poems, and compose histories and
+annals of their own country. They profess great skill in astrology, and
+the king places great confidence in men of that profession, so that he
+will not undertake a journey, nor do any thing whatever of importance,
+unless after his wizard has indicated a prosperous hour for the
+undertaking.
+
+The idolaters begin their year on the 1st of March, and the Mahometans
+at the instant when the sun enters Aries, as calculated by their
+astrologers. From which time the king keeps a festival, called the
+_norose_, or nine days, for which time it continues, like that made by
+Ahasuerus in the third year of his reign. On this occasion, all his
+nobles assemble, bringing great gifts, which he repays with princely
+rewards. Being myself present on this occasion, I beheld most incredible
+riches, to my amazement, in gold, pearls, precious stones, and many
+brilliant vanities. I saw this festival celebrated at Mandoa, where the
+Mogul has a most spacious house or palace, larger than any I ever
+beheld, in which the many beautiful vaults and arches evince the
+exquisite skill of his artists in architecture. At Agra he has a palace,
+in which are two large towers, at least ten feet square, covered with
+plates of pure gold.
+
+The walls of his houses have no hangings, on account of the heat, but
+are either painted or beautified with a white lime, purer even than that
+we term Spanish. The floors are either paved with stone or are made of
+lime and sand, like our Paris plaster, and are spread with rich carpets.
+None lodge within the King's house but his women and eunuchs, and some
+little boys, whom he always keeps about him for a wicked use. He always
+eats in private among his women, being served with a great variety of
+exquisitely dressed meats, which being proved by his taster, are put
+into golden vessels, as they say, covered and sealed up, and brought in
+by the eunuchs. He has meats made ready at all hours, and calls for
+them at pleasure. These people do not feed freely, as we do, on full
+dishes of beef or mutton, but use much rice, boiled up along with pieces
+of flesh, or dressed in a variety of ways. They have not many roasted or
+baked meats, but stew most of their meat. Among their many dishes, I
+shall only notice one, called by them _deupario_. This is made of
+venison cut into slices, to which are put onions and sweet herbs, with
+some roots, and a little spice and butter, forming the most savoury dish
+I ever tasted; and I almost think it is the same dish that Jacob made
+ready for his father Isaac when he got his blessing.
+
+In this kingdom there are no inns or houses of entertainment for
+travellers and strangers. But, in the cities and large towns, there are
+handsome buildings for their reception, called _serais_, which are not
+inhabited, in which any passengers may have rooms freely, but must bring
+with them their bedding, cooks, and all other necessaries for dressing
+their victuals. These things are usually carried by travellers on
+camels, or in carts drawn by oxen; taking likewise tents along with
+them, to use when they do not find serais. The inferior people ride on
+oxen, horses, mules, camels, or dromedaries, the women riding in the
+same manner as the men; or else they use a kind of slight coaches on two
+wheels, covered at top, and close behind, but open before and at the
+sides, unless when they contain women, in which case they are close all
+round. These coaches will conveniently hold two persons, besides the
+driver, and are drawn by a pair of oxen, matched in colour, many of them
+being white, and not large. The oxen are guided by cords which go
+through the middle cartilage of the nose, and so between the horns into
+the hand of the driver. The oxen are dressed and harnessed like horses,
+and being naturally nimble, use makes them so expert, that they will go
+twenty miles a-day or more, at a good pace. The better sort ride on
+elephants, or are carried singly on men's shoulders, in a slight thing
+called a _palanquin_, like a couch, but covered by a canopy. This would
+appear to have been an ancient effeminacy used in Rome, as Juvenal
+describes a fat lawyer who filled one of them:
+
+_Causidici nova, cam venial lectica Mathonis; plena ipso--_
+
+They delight much in hawking, and in hunting hares, deer, and other wild
+animals. Their dogs of chase somewhat resemble our greyhounds, but are
+much less, and do not open when in pursuit of their game. They use
+leopards also in hunting, which attain the game they pursue by leaping.
+They have a very cunning device for catching wild-fowl, in the following
+manner:--A fellow goes into the water, having the skin of any kind of
+fowl he wishes to catch, so artificially stuffed, that it seems alive.
+Keeping his whole body under water except his face, which is covered by
+this counterfeit, he goes among the wild-fowl which swim in the water,
+and pulls them under by the legs. They shoot much for their amusement
+with bows, which are curiously made of buffaloe's horn, glewed together,
+their arrows being made of small canes, excellently headed and
+feathered, and are so expert in archery, that they will kill birds
+flying. Others take great delight in managing their horses. Though they
+have not a quarter of a mile to go, they will either ride on horseback
+or be carried, as men of any quality hold it dishonourable to go on foot
+any where.
+
+In their houses, they play much at that most ingenious game which we
+call chess, or else at draughts. They have likewise cards, but quite
+different from ours. Sometimes they are amused by cunning jugglers, or
+mountebanks, who allow themselves to be bitten by snakes which they
+carry about in baskets, immediately curing themselves by means of
+certain powders which they smell to. They are likewise often amused by
+the tricks of apes and monkeys. In the southern parts of Hindoostan,
+there are great numbers of large white apes, some of which are as tall
+as our largest greyhounds. Some of those birds which make their nests on
+trees are much afraid of the apes, and nature has instructed them in a
+subtle device to secure themselves, by building their nests on the most
+extreme twigs, and hanging them there like purse-nets, so that the apes
+cannot possibly come to them.
+
+Every city or great town in India has markets twice a-day, in the cool
+of the morning just after sun-rise, and again in the evening a little
+before it sets; and in these they sell almost every thing by weight. In
+the heat of the day, every one keeps within doors, where those of any
+rank lie on couches, or sit cross-legged on carpets, having servants
+about them, who beat the air with fans of stiffened leather, or the
+like, to cool them. While thus taking their ease, they often call their
+barbers, who tenderly grip and beat upon their arms and other parts of
+their bodies, instead of exercise, to stir the blood. This is a most
+gratifying thing, and is much used in this hot climate.
+
+The Mahometans and Hindoos are much to be commended for their
+truthfulness as servants; for a stranger may safely travel alone among
+them with a great charge of money or goods, all through the country,
+having them for his guard, and will never be neglected or injured by
+them. They follow their masters on foot, carrying swords and bucklers,
+or bows and arrows, for their defence; and so plentiful are provisions
+in this country, that one may hire them on very easy terms, as they do
+not desire more than five shillings each moon, paid the day after the
+change, to provide themselves in all necessaries; and for this small
+pittance give diligent and faithful service. Such is their filial piety,
+that they will often give the half of these pitiful wages to their
+parents, to relieve their necessities, preferring almost to famish
+themselves rather than see them want.
+
+Both among the Mahometans and Hindoos there are many men of most
+undaunted courage. The _Baloches_ are of great note on this account
+among the Mahometans, being the inhabitants of _Hjykan_, adjoining to
+the kingdom of Persia; as also the Patans, taking their denomination
+from a province in the kingdom of Bengal.[236] These tribes dare look
+their enemies in the face, and maintain the reputation of valour at the
+hazard of their lives. Among the many sects of the Hindoos, there is but
+one race of warriors, called _Rashbootes_, or Rajaputs, many of whom
+subsist by plunder, laying in wait in great troops to surprise poor
+passengers, and butchering all who have the misfortune to fall into
+their hands. These excepted, all the rest of the natives are in general
+pusillanimous, and had rather quarrel than fight, being so poor in
+spirit, in comparison with Europeans, that the Mogul often says,
+proverbially, That one Portuguese will beat three of them, and one
+Englishman three Portuguese.
+
+[Footnote 236: This is a strange mistake, confounding the city of Patna,
+in Bengal, in the east of Hindoostan, with the Patans, a race of
+mountaineers between Cabul and Candahar, far to the west of India,
+called likewise Afgans, and their country Afghanistan.--E.]
+
+In regard to arms for war, they have good ordnance, which, so far as I
+could learn, were very anciently used in this country.[237] I have
+already described the iron pieces carried on elephants. They have
+smaller guns for the use of their foot-soldiers, who are somewhat long
+in taking aim, but come as near the mark as any I ever saw. All their
+pieces are fired with match, and they make excellent gun-powder. They
+use also lances, swords, and targets, and bows and arrows. Their swords
+are made crooked like faulchions, and very sharp; but, for want of skill
+in tempering, will break rather than bend; wherefore our sword-blades,
+which will bend and become straight again, are often sold at high
+prices. I have seen horsemen in this country, thus accoutered, carrying
+as it were a whole armory at once; a good sword by their sides, under
+which a sheaf of arrows; on their back a gun fastened with belts, a
+buckler on their shoulders; a bow in a case hanging on their left side,
+and a good lance in their hand, two yards and a half long, with an
+excellent steel head. Yet, for all these weapons, dare he not resist a
+man of true courage, armed only with the worst of all these. The armies
+in these eastern wars often consist of incredible multitudes, and they
+talk of some which have exceeded that we read of in the Bible, which
+Zerah, king of Ethiopia, brought against Asia. Their martial music
+consists of kettle-drums and long wind-instruments. In their battles,
+both sides usually begin with most furious onsets; but, in a short time,
+for want of good discipline, they fall into disorder, and one side is
+routed with much slaughter.
+
+[Footnote 237: Vertoman says the Portuguese who deserted at the first
+discovery of India, and entered into the service of the native princes,
+taught them this art.--_Purch_.
+
+I have somewhere read, many years ago, but cannot recollect the
+authority, "That, when Alexander besieged a certain city in India, the
+Brachmans, by the power of magic, raised a cloud of smoke around the
+walls, whence broke frequent flashes of lightning, with thunder, and the
+thunderbolts slew many of his soldiers." This would infer the very
+ancient use of fire-arms of some kind in India.--E.]
+
+The Mahometans have fair places of worship, which they call _mesquits_,
+well built of stone. That side which looks to the westwards is a
+close-built wall, while that towards the east is erected on pillars, the
+length being from north to south. At the corners of their great mosques,
+in the cities, there are high turrets or pinnacles, called _minarets_,
+to the tops of which their molahs or priests resort at certain times of
+day, proclaiming their prophet in Arabic, in these words,--_Alla illa
+Alla, Mahomet resul Alla_; that is, There is no God but God, and Mahomet
+is the ambassador of God. This is used instead of bells, which they
+cannot endure in their temples, to put religious persons in mind of
+their duty. On one occasion, while Mr Coryat was residing in Agra, he
+got up into a turret over against the priest, and on hearing these
+words, he contradicted him, calling out, in a loud voice,--_La Alla illa
+Alla, Hazaret Esa Ebn-Alla_; there is no God but God, and Christ, the
+Son of God, is his prophet. He farther added, that Mahomet was an
+impostor, in any other country of Asia, in which Mahomet is zealously
+followed, this bold attempt had surely forfeited his life, with all the
+tortures which cruelty could invent, or tyranny inflict; but in this
+country every one is permitted to follow his own religion, and may even
+dispute against theirs with impunity.
+
+In regard to their burials, every Mahometan of quality provides a fair
+sepulchre for himself and his family, in his life-time, surrounding a
+considerable space of ground with a high wall, and generally in the
+neighbourhood of some tank, or else near springs of water, that they may
+make pleasant fountains. Within the enclosure, he erects a round or
+square tomb, either on pillars or of closed walls, with a door for
+entrance. The rest of the enclosure is planted with trees and flowers,
+as if they would make the elysian fields of the poets, in which their
+souls may repose in delight. They have many such goodly monuments built
+in memory of those they esteem as saints, of whom they have an ample
+calendar, in these there are lamps continually burning, and thither many
+resort in blind devotion, to contemplate the happiness enjoyed by these
+_peires_, as they call the holy men. Among many sumptuous piles
+dedicated to this use, the most splendid of them all is to be seen at
+_Secuadra_, a village three miles from Agra. This was begun by Akbar
+Shah, the father of the present king, and finished by his son, the
+reigning Mogul. Akbar lies here interred, and Jehanguire Shah means to
+be here buried when he dies.
+
+The molahs, or priests of the Mahometans, employ much of their time as
+scribes, doing business for other men, having liberty to marry as well
+as the laity, from whom they are no way distinguished by their dress.
+Some live retiredly, spending their time in meditation, or in delivering
+precepts of morality to the people. They are in roach esteem, as are
+another set called _Seids_, who derive their pedigree from Mahomet. The
+priests neither read nor preach in the mosques; yet there is a set form
+of prayers in Arabic, not understood by most of the people, but which
+they repeat as fluently as the molahs. They likewise repeat the name of
+God, and that of Mahomet, a certain number of times every day, telling
+over their beads, like the misled papists, who seem to regard the number
+of prayers more than their sincerity. Before going into their mosques
+they wash their feet, and, in entering, put off their shoes. On
+beginning their devotions, they stop their ears, and fix their eyes,
+that no extraneous circumstances may divert their thoughts, and then
+utter their prayers in a soft and still voice, using many words
+significantly expressive of the omnipotence, goodness, eternity, and
+other attributes of God. Likewise many words full of humility,
+confessing their unworthiness with many submissive gestures. While
+praying, they frequently prostrate themselves on their faces,
+acknowledging that they are burdens upon the earth, poisonous to the
+air, and the like, and therefore dare not look up to heaven, but comfort
+themselves in the mercy of God, through the intercession of their false
+prophet. Many among them, to the shame of us Christians, pray five tunes
+a-day, whatever may happen to be their interruptions of pleasure or
+profit. Their set times are at the hours of six, nine, twelve, three,
+and six, respectively.
+
+The manner in which they divide the day is quite different from us; as
+they divide the day and the night each into four equal parts, which they
+denominate _pores_, and these again are each subdivided into eight
+smaller parts, called _grees_. [Hence each _pore_ contains three of our
+hours, and each _gree_ is equal to 22-1/2 of our minutes.] These are
+measured, according to an ancient custom, by means of water, dropping
+from one small vessel into another, beside which there always stand
+servants appointed for the purpose, who strike with a hammer upon a
+concave plate of metal, like the inner portion of a plate, hung by a
+wire, thus denoting the _pores_ and _grees_ successively as they
+pass.[238] Like the mother and her seven sons, mentioned in the
+Maccabees, such is the temperance of many, both among the Mahometans and
+Gentiles, that they will rather die than eat or drink of any thing
+forbidden by their law. Such meats and drinks as their law allows, they
+use only in moderation, to satisfy nature, not to please their
+appetites, hating gluttony, and esteeming drunkenness a sin, as it
+really is, or a second madness; and indeed their language has only one
+word, mest, for a drunkard and a madman.
+
+[Footnote 238: This device for measuring time is the same with the
+_clepsydra_, or water-clocks, of the ancients.--_Purch._]
+
+They keep yearly a solemn feast, or Lent, which they call _Ram jan_,
+[Ramadan] about the month of August, which continues a whole moon;
+during which time, those who are strict in their religious observances,
+avoid the embraces of their women, and abstain from meat or drink so
+long as the sun is above the horizon, but eat after it sets, at their
+pleasure. Towards the close of this Lent, or ramadan, they consecrate
+one day of mourning, in memory of their departed friends; on which
+occasions, I have seen many of the meaner people making bitter
+lamentations. Besides this ordinary and stated time of sadness, many
+foolish women are in use, oft times in the year, so long as they
+survive, to water the graves of their husbands or children with the
+tears of affectionate regret. On the night succeeding the day of general
+mourning, they light up innumerable lamps, and other lights, which they
+set on the sides and tops of their houses, and all other most
+conspicuous places, taking no food till these are burnt out. When the
+ramadan is entirely ended, the most devout Mahometans assemble at some
+noted mosque, where some portion of the _Alcoran_ is publicly read; this
+being their holy book, like our Bible, which they never touch without
+some mark of reverence. They keep a festival in November, which they
+call _Buccaree_, signifying the _ram-feast_; on which occasion they kill
+and roast a ram, in memory, as they say, of the ram which redeemed
+Ishmael, when about to be sacrificed by his father Abraham. They have
+many other feasts or holidays consecrated to Mahomet, and their
+_pieres_, or pretended saints.
+
+They have the books of Moses, whom they name _Moosa curym Alla_, the
+righteous of God. Abraham they call _Ibrahim calim Alla_, the faithful
+of God. Thus Ishmael is called the true sacrifice of God; David is named
+_Dahoode_, the prophet of God; Solomon is _Seliman_, the wisdom of God,
+and so forth; all neatly expressed, as the former instances, in short
+Arabic epithets. In honour of these our scripture worthies, they
+frequently sing songs or ditties of praise; and, besides, all of them,
+except those of the ruder sort, when at any time they happen to mention
+our Saviour, always call him _Hazaret Eesa_, the Lord Jesus; and ever
+speak of him with respect and reverence, saying, that he was a good and
+just man, who lived without sin, and did greater miracles than were ever
+performed before or since. They even call him _Rhahew Alla_, which
+signifies the breath of God, but cannot conceive how he could be the
+Son of God, and therefore deny that. Yet the Mahometans look upon us as
+unclean, and will neither eat with us, nor of any thing that is cooked
+in our vessels.
+
+There are many men among the Mahometans called _Dervises_, who
+relinquish the world, and spend their days in solitude, expecting a
+recompence in a better life. The strict and severe penances these men
+voluntarily endure, far exceed all those so much boasted of by the
+Romanist monks. Some of these live alone on the tops of hills, remote
+from all society, spending their lives in contemplation, and will rather
+die of famine than move from their cells, being relieved from devotion
+by those who dwell nearest them. Some again impose long fasts upon
+themselves, till nature be almost exhausted. Many of those whom they
+call religious men, wear no garments beyond a mere clout to cover their
+shame, and beg for all their provisions, like the mendicant friars of
+Europe. These men usually dwell about the outskirts of the cities and
+towns, like the man mentioned by our blessed Saviour at the city of the
+_Gadarens_, who had devils, and wore no clothes, neither abode in any
+house, but dwelt among the tombs. They make little fires during the day,
+sleeping at night among the warm ashes, with which they besmear their
+bodies. These men never suffer a razor to come upon their heads, and
+some of them let their nails grow like to bird's claws, as it is written
+of Nebuchadnezzar, when driven out from among the society of men. There
+is also a sort of men among them called _mendee_, who often cut and
+slash their flesh with knives, like the priests of Baal. I have seen
+others, who, from supposed devotion, put such massy fetters of iron on
+their legs, that they are hardly able to move, yet walk in that manner
+many miles upon pilgrimages, barefooted, upon the parching ground, to
+visit the sepulchres of their deluding saints; thus, _tantum religio
+potuit suadere malorum_, taking more pains to go to hell than any
+Christian that I know does to attain heaven. These do not marry. Such
+Mahometans as choose to marry, are allowed four wives by the law of
+Mahomet, but they keep as many concubines as they can maintain. The
+priests content themselves with one wife.
+
+Notwithstanding their polygamy, such is the violent jealousy of these
+lustful Mahometans, that they will scarcely allow even the fathers and
+brothers of their beloved wives or concubines to converse with them,
+except in their own presence. Owing to this restraint, it has become
+odious for such women as have the reputation of virtue, to be seen at
+any time by strangers. If any of them dishonour their husbands beds, or,
+being unmarried, are found incontinent, even their own brothers will put
+them to death rather than they should escape punishment; and for such
+unnatural actions they shall be commended, rather than called in
+question. Yet is there full toleration for harlots, who are as little
+ashamed of receiving visits as the men are of frequenting their houses.
+The women of any fashion are waited upon by eunuchs instead of
+women-servants; and these eunuchs are deprived in their youth of every
+thing that can provoke jealousy. Their marriages are solemnised in great
+pomp. After the molah has joined their hands, with certain ceremonies
+and words of benediction, they begin their revels at the first watch of
+the night. Whether the man be poor or rich, he mounts on horseback,
+attended by his friends, having many _oressets_, or great lights,
+carried before him, and accompanied by drums, and wind-instruments of
+music, and various pageantry. The woman follows with her friends, in
+covered coaches. And having thus paraded through the principal places of
+the city or town, they return home and partake of a banquet, the men and
+women being in separate apartments. They are mostly married at the age
+of twelve or thirteen, the matches being made by their mothers.
+
+§4. _Of the Sects, Opinions, Rites, Priests, and other Circumstances of
+the Hindoo Religion; with other Observations_.
+
+The Hindoos[239] are distributed into eighty and four several sects, all
+of which differ materially in opinions. This has often filled me with
+wonder; but I know that they are all deluded by Satan, who is the father
+of division. Their illiterate priests are called _Bramins_, being the
+same with the _Brachmanni_ of the ancients; and, for aught I could
+learn, are so sottishly ignorant and unsteady, that they know not what
+they believe. They have little round-built temples, which they call
+_pagodas_, in which are images in most monstrous shapes, which they
+worship. Some of them dream, of Elysian fields, to which their souls
+pass over a Styx or Acheron, and there assume new bodies. Others hold
+that ere long, this world shall have an end, after which they shall live
+here again, upon a new earth. They talk of four books which were sent
+them about 6000 years ago by their prophet _Ram_, two of which were
+sealed up and might not be opened, the other two being read by the
+Bramins only. They say that there are seven orbs, above which is the
+seat of God; and they hold that God knoweth not of petty things, or, if
+he doth, regardeth them not. They circumscribe God in place or
+dimensions, alleging that he may be seen, but far off as in a mist, and
+not near or clearly. They believe in the existence of devils or evil
+spirits; but that they are so bound in chains, as to be incapable of
+doing hurt. They call man Adam, from the first man of that name; whose
+wife, as they say, when tempted with the forbidden fruit, swallowed it
+down; but, as her husband was about to do the same, it was stopped in
+his throat by the hand of God: Whence men have a protuberance in that
+part, which we call the _pomum adami_, which women have not.
+
+[Footnote 239: By Terry, the Hindoos are uniformly denominated the
+_Gentiles_, a word of vague and general meaning, merely signifying
+idolaters, or unbelievers, literally the nations, as contradistinguished
+from the Jews. By some authors, the natives of Hindoostan are called
+Gentoos, a word of uncertain origin. The term of Hindoo seems the more
+appropriate name; at least it has now become universal.--E.]
+
+As anciently among the Jews, the priesthood is hereditary with this
+people; every son of a Bramin being a priest, and marries with the
+daughter of a Bramin. So also among all the Hindoos, the men take their
+wives among the daughters of those who are of the same tribe, sect, and
+occupation, with their own fathers. Thus the son of a merchant marries a
+merchant's daughter, and every man's son that lives by his labour,
+marries the daughter of one of the same profession with himself, so that
+they never advance themselves to higher situations. The Hindoos take but
+one wife, of whom they are not so fearful as are the Mahometans of their
+numerous women, for they are suffered to go abroad. They are always
+married very young, at six or seven years of age, their parents making
+the contracts, and they come together when twelve years old. Their
+nuptials are celebrated with as much pomp and jollity as those of the
+Mahometans. The habits of the Hindoos differ little from those of the
+Mahometans, already described; but many of their women wear rings on
+their toes, and therefore go barefooted. They have likewise broad rings
+of brass, or of more valuable metal, according to their rank and wealth,
+which they wear about the small of their legs, being made to put off and
+on. These seem to resemble the tinkling ornaments about the feet,
+mentioned by the prophet Isaiah, or the ornaments of the legs, anciently
+in use among the Jewish women. They have also such on their arms. The
+laps of their ears are pierced when young, and the hole is daily
+stretched and widened, by things put in on purpose, so that it at length
+becomes large enough to hold a ring as broad as a little saucer, made
+hollow in its edges to contain the flesh. Both men and women wash their
+bodies every day before they eat, and they sit entirely naked at their
+food, excepting only the covering of modesty. This outward washing, as
+they think, tends to cleanse them from sin, not unlike the Pharisees in
+scripture, who would not eat with unwashed hands. Hence, they ascribe a
+certain divine influence to rivers, but above all to the Ganges, daily
+flocking thither in great companies, and throwing in pieces of gold and
+silver, according to their devotion or abilities, after which they wash
+themselves in the sacred stream. Both men and women paint their
+foreheads, or other parts of their faces, with red or yellow spots.
+
+In regard to their grosser opinions, they do not believe in the
+resurrection of the flesh, and therefore burn the bodies of their dead,
+near some river if they can, into which they strew the ashes. Their
+widows never marry again; but, after the loss of their husbands, cut
+their hair close off, and spend all their remaining life in neglect;
+whence it happens, that many young women are ambitious to die with
+honour, as they esteem it, throwing themselves for lore of their
+departed husbands into the flames, as they think, of martyrdom.
+Following their dead husband to the pile, and there embracing his
+corpse, they are there consumed in the same fire. This they do
+voluntarily, and without compulsion, their parents, relations, and
+friends joyfully accompanying them; and, when the pile of this hellish
+sacrifice begins to burn, all the assembled multitude shout and make a
+noise, that the screams of the tortured living victims may not be heard.
+This abominable custom is not very much unlike the custom of the
+Ammonites, who made their children pass through the fire to Moloch,
+during which they caused certain tabrets or drums to sound, whence the
+place was called _Tophet_, signifying a tabret. There is one sect among
+the Hindoos, called _Parsees_, who neither burn nor inter their dead.
+They surround certain pieces of ground with high walls, remote from
+houses or public roads, and there deposit their dead, wrapped in sheets,
+which thus have no other tombs but the maws of ravenous fowls.[240]
+
+[Footnote 240: These Parsees, called _Parcees_ in the Pilgrims, and
+Guebres by other writers, are a remnant of the ancient Persians, who are
+fire-worshippers, or followers of Zerdust, the Zoroaster of the
+Greeks.--E.]
+
+The Hindoos are, generally speaking, an industrious race; being either
+cultivators of the ground, or otherwise diligently employed in various
+occupations. Among them there are many curious artificers, who are the
+best imitators in the world, as they will make any thing new very
+exactly after a pattern. The Mahometans, on the contrary, are generally
+idle, being _all for to morrow_, a common saying among them, and live by
+the labours of the Hindoos. Some of these poor deluded idolaters will
+eat of nothing which has had life, feeding on grain, herbs, milk,
+butter, cheese, and sweet-meats, of which last they have various kinds,
+the best and most wholesome of which is green ginger remarkably well
+preserved. Some tribes eat fish, and of no other living thing. The
+Rajaput tribe eat swine's flesh, which is held in abomination by the
+Mahometans. Some will eat of one kind of flesh, and some of another; but
+all the Hindoos universally abstain from beef owing to the reverence
+they entertain for cows; and therefore give large sums yearly to the
+Mogul, besides his other exactions, as a ransom for the lives of these
+sacred animals. Whence, though they have other and good provisions in
+abundance, we meet with very little meat in that country.
+
+The most tender-hearted among the idolaters are called _Banians,_ who
+hold the _metempsychosis_ of Pythagoras as a prime article of their
+faith, believing that the souls of the best men and women, when freed
+from the prison of their human bodies, transmigrate into the bodies of
+cows, which they consider as the best of all creatures. They hold that
+the souls of the wicked go into the bodies of viler beasts; as the souls
+of gluttons into swine, those of the voluptuous and incontinent into
+apes and monkies; the souls of the cruel, furious, and revengeful, into
+lions, tigers, and wolves; the souls of the envious into serpents; and
+so forth, according to their qualities and dispositions; transmigrating
+successively from one to another of the same kind, _ad infinitum;_ and,
+by consequence, believing in the eternal duration of the world. Thus,
+according to them, there does not exist even a silly fly but is actuated
+by a soul formerly human, considering these to have formerly belonged to
+light women; and so incorrigible are their sottish opinions, that they
+cannot be persuaded out of them by any reasoning. Owing to these
+opinions, they will not put to death the most offensive animals, not
+even the most venemous snakes, saying, that it is their nature to do
+harm, and that man is gifted with reason to shun these noxious
+creatures, but not at liberty to destroy them.
+
+Many men devote their fortunes to works of charity, as in building
+_serais,_ or lodging-houses for travellers, digging wells, or
+constructing tanks near highways, that the travellers may have water;
+and where such cannot be had, they will hire poor men to sit by the
+way-sides, and offer water to the passengers. The day of rest among the
+Hindoos is Thursday, as Friday is among the Mahometans, Saturday with
+the Jews, and Sunday with the Christians.[241] They have many solemn
+festivals, and they make pilgrimages, among which the most famous are
+_Nagracut_ and _Syba,_ formerly mentioned; where, if Mr Coryat may be
+believed, who says he carefully observed the same, people cut off part
+of their tongues out of devotion. It were easy to enlarge on this
+subject, but I will not any farther describe their stupid idolatry. The
+sum of the whole is, that both the Hindoos and Mahometans ground all
+their opinions on tradition, not on reason, and are content to perish
+with their fore-fathers, out of preposterous zeal and fond perverseness,
+never rightly considering the grounds of their belief.
+
+[Footnote 241: Monday is the day of rest with the people of Pegu. In
+Java, each individual keeps that day holy on which he has begun some
+great work.--_Purch._]
+
+Both the Mahometans and Hindoos are under subjection to the Great Mogul,
+the term _Mogul_ signifying a circumcised man, so that Great Mogul means
+the Chief of the Circumcision. The present king is the ninth in lineal
+descent from that famous eastern conqueror, whom we name Tamerlane, and
+who in their histories is named Timor. Towards the close of his life, he
+had the misfortune to fall from his horse, which made him halt during
+the remainder of his days, whence he was called Timur-lang, or Timur the
+lame. The emperor styles himself The King of Justice, the Light of the
+Law of Mahomet, and the Conqueror of the World. He himself judges and
+determines on all matters of importance which occur near his residence,
+judging according to allegations and proofs, by his own sense of right.
+The trials are conducted quickly, and the sentences speedily executed,
+culprits being hanged, beheaded, impaled, torn by dogs, destroyed by
+elephants, bitten by serpents, or other devices, according to the nature
+of the crimes; the executions being generally in the public
+market-place. The governors of provinces and cities administer justice
+in a similar manner. I could never hear of any written law, the will of
+the king and his substitutes being the law. His vicegerents are not
+allowed to continue long in one place, lest they acquire popularity, and
+are therefore usually removed yearly. They receive the letters of the
+king with every possible indication of respect. They look to receive
+presents from all who have occasion to apply to them; and, if not often
+gratified with these, will ask for them, and will even send back such as
+they do not approve, demanding better to be substituted. The cadi has
+power to imprison debtors and sureties, who are bound by written deeds;
+and men in power, for payment of debts due to them, will often sell the
+persons, wives, and children of their debtors, which is warranted by the
+customs of the land.
+
+The king appears in public three times every day. His first appearance
+is at sun-rise, from a bow-window looking; towards the east, where great
+multitudes assemble to salute him, or give him the _salam,_ calling out
+_padishah salamet,_ which signifies Live, O King! At noon he again sits
+in public seeing his elephants fight, or some other pastimes. A little
+before sun-set, he shews himself a third time, at a window looking to
+the west, whence he retires amid the sound of drums and wind-instruments
+of music, the acclamations of the people adding to the noise. At any of
+these three appearances, all who have any suit to him hold up their
+petitions to be seen, and are heard in their own causes. Between seven
+and nine in the evening, he again sits in private, attended by his
+nobles.
+
+No subject of this empire holds any lands by inheritance, neither have
+they any titles but such as depend on the will of the king. Owing to
+this, many of the grandees live up fully to the extent of their means.
+Merchants also, and others, are very careful to conceal their wealth,
+lest they be made spunges. Some small means of living are allowed by the
+king to the sons of his great men, which they can never make better,
+unless they succeed to the favour enjoyed by their fathers. His pensions
+are reckoned by the numbers of horsemen allotted to each; and of these
+he pays a million in the whole extent of his empire, to the amount of
+twenty-five pounds being yearly allowed for each horseman, which are
+drawn from lands, specified in the particular grants or commissions.
+There are about twenty of his courtiers who have each the pay of 5000
+horse; others of 4000, 3000, 2000, and so downwards. He who has the pay
+of 5000, is bound to have 2000 always on foot ready for service, and so
+in like proportion for all others. This absolute dependence renders
+them dissolute parasites. When the Mogul gives advancement to any one,
+he adds a new name or title, as Pharaoh did to Joseph. These names or
+titles are very significant; as _Mahobet Khan_, the beloved lord; _Khan
+Jahaun,_ the lord of my heart; _Khan Allum,_ the lord of the world, &c.
+
+The principal officers of state are, the treasurer, the master of the
+eunuchs, who is steward and comptroller of the household, the secretary,
+the master of the elephants, the tent-master, and the keeper of the
+wardrobe. The subordinate titles of honour are Khan, Mirza, Omrah or
+Captain, Haddee, which last is a soldier or horseman. Gorgeous apparel
+is in a great measure prohibited, owing to the great heat of the sun;
+even the Great Mogul himself being usually clothed in a garment of pure
+white calico or fine muslin. Blue, being the colour of mourning, may not
+be worn in his presence, neither the name of death pronounced in his
+hearing. This circumstance is usually expressed by some circumlocution,
+as that such a person has sacrificed himself at the feet of his majesty.
+
+Owing to the great heat of this country, there is but little demand for
+English cloth, which is almost only employed for the housings of
+elephants and horses, and the linings of coaches. This sovereign
+assuredly exceeds all others in the splendour of his thrones, and the
+variety and richness of his jewels. In his palace at Agra, he has a
+throne upon a raised platform, to which he ascends by several steps, on
+the top of which are four figures of lions of massy silver, gilded and
+set with precious stones, and supporting a dome or canopy of pure gold.
+I may mention, that when I was at his court, he had a tame lion which
+went up and down at liberty, as harmless as a dog. The jewels with which
+he daily adorns his head, neck, and arms, and the hilts of his sword and
+dagger, are rich and valuable beyond all computation. On his birthday,
+which happens on the 1st of September, he being now sixty years of age,
+he is weighed, and an account thereof carefully noted down by his
+physicians, who thereby guess at his bodily condition.[242]
+
+[Footnote 242: See of these and other things, formerly stated, in the
+Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, and therefore here omitted. _Purch._]
+
+The following are parts of two letters from the Great Mogul to his
+majesty King James I. translated out of Persian, and sent through Sir
+Thomas Roe, one written a year before the other. What followed in both
+letters, was merely complimentary assurances of his love for the
+English. These letters were rolled up and covered with cloth of gold,
+the covering being sealed up at both ends, which is the fashion in that
+country. Copies were sent to the lord ambassador, from which these
+specimens were translated out of the Persian language.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"When your majesty shall open this letter, let your royal heart be fresh
+as a sweet garden. Let all people make lowly reverence at your gate, and
+may your throne be exalted among the kings of the prophet Jesus. May
+your majesty be the greatest of all monarchs; and may others draw
+counsel and wisdom from you, as from a fountain, that the law of the
+divine Jesus may revive and flourish under your protection. Your letters
+of love and friendship, and the tokens of your affection towards me, I
+have received by the hands of your ambassador, Sir Thomas Roe, who well
+deserves to be your trusted servant, and who delivered them to me in a
+happy hour. Upon them mine eyes were so fixed, that I could not easily
+remove them to any other object, and have accepted them with much joy,"
+&c.--The other began as follows:
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"How gracious is your majesty, whose greatness God preserve and prosper.
+As upon a rose in a garden of pleasure, so are mine eyes fixed upon your
+majesty. May God maintain your greatness, so that your monarchy may
+prosper and increase, that you may obtain all your desires, worthy the
+greatness of your renown. As your heart is noble and upright, so may God
+give you a prosperous reign, because you powerfully defend the majesty
+of Jesus, which may God render yet more flourishing, having been
+confirmed by miracles," &c.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+We travelled two years with the Great Mogul, who was in progress
+through his dominions, moving only during the temperate months, between
+October and April. On this occasion, I am confident that the _leskar_,
+or camp, contained not less than 300,000 persons, including men, women,
+and children, besides elephants, horses, and other beasts, that were fed
+upon grain; yet we never experienced any scarcity of provisions, not
+even in our nineteen days journey through a wilderness, between Mandoa
+and _Amadavar_, [Ahmedabad.] On this occasion, a road was cut for us
+through the forest. The tents of the leskar were of various colours,
+being regularly arranged, and represented a large and splendid city. The
+king's tents were red, and raised on poles to a great height, being
+placed in the middle of the camp, and covering a great extent of ground;
+the whole of the royal quarter being encircled by _canats_, or walls,
+made of red calico, held up by canes at every breadth, and standing
+upright about nine feet high, which was guarded all round by soldiers
+every night.
+
+The king removed ten or twelve miles every day, more or less according
+to the convenience of procuring water. His wives and women of all sorts,
+which are not less than a thousand, all lodged and provided for in his
+tents, were carried along with the leskar, some in palanquins, others
+upon elephants, or in cradles or panniers slung upon dromedaries, all
+closely covered up that they might not be seen, and attended upon by
+eunuchs. In the choice of his wives, the Great Mogul respects fancy more
+than honour, not seeking affinity with neighbouring princes, but to
+please his eye at home. _Noormahal_, the best beloved among his wives,
+whose name signifies the _Light of the Court_, was of mean origin, but
+has since advanced her friends to high rank and employments, and in a
+manner commands the commander of the empire, by engrossing his whole
+affections. The king and his great men continue to maintain their women,
+but little affect them after thirty years old.
+
+Notwithstanding the multitude of his women, the Great Mogul has only six
+children, five sons and a daughter. All his sons are styled sultans, or
+princes. The eldest is Sultan _Cursero_, the second, Sultan _Parrveis_,
+the third, Sultan _Caroon_, the fourth, Sultan _Shahar_, and the
+youngest, Sultan _Tauct_.[243] The name of this last signifies a
+_Throne_; and he was so named by the king, because he was informed of
+his birth at the time when he got quiet possession of the throne. The
+eldest-born son of one of his legitimate wives has right to inherit the
+throne, and has a title signifying the _Great Brother_. Although the
+others are not put to death as with the Turks, yet it is observed that
+they seldom long survive their fathers, being commonly employed on some
+dangerous expedition.
+
+[Footnote 243: These names seem to have been written by Terry from the
+ear. By others, they are respectively named Cusero, Parvis, Churrum,
+Shahar, and Taucht.--E.]
+
+Akbar Shah, the father of the reigning Mogul, had threatened to
+disinherit him, for some abuse to _Anar-Kalee_, his most beloved wife,
+whose name signifies pomegranate kernel; but on his death-bed he
+restored him to the succession. Akbar was wont, upon taking any
+displeasure at one of his grandees, to give them pills to purge their
+souls from their bodies, and is said to have come by his death in the
+following manner. Intending to give one of these pills to a nobleman who
+had incurred his displeasure, and meaning to take at the same time a
+cordial pill himself, while he was cajoling the destined victim with
+flattering speeches, he, by mistake, took the poisoned pill himself, and
+gave the cordial to the nobleman. This carried him off in a few days, by
+a mortal flux of blood.[244]
+
+[Footnote 244: Neque enim lex justior ulla est, quam necis artifices
+arte perire sua.--_Purch._]
+
+The character of Jehanguire, the reigning Mogul, seems strangely
+compounded of opposite extremes. He is at times excessively cruel, and
+at other times extremely mild. He is himself much given to excess in
+wine, yet severely punishes that fault in others. His subjects know not
+what it is to disobey his commands, forgetting the natural bonds of
+private life, even those between father and son, in the fulfilment of
+their public duty. He daily relieves numbers of the poor; and often, as
+a mark of his filial piety, is in use to carry the palanquin of his
+mother on his own shoulders. He speaks with much reverence of our
+Saviour, but is offended by his cross and poverty, deeming them
+incompatible with his divine Majesty, though told that his humility was
+on purpose to subdue the pride of the world.
+
+All religions are tolerated, and even their priests are held in good
+esteem. I used often to receive from the Mogul the appellation of
+_Father_, with many other gracious words, and had a place assigned me
+among his nobles. The jesuits are not only admitted into his presence,
+but encouraged by many gifts, and are permitted to convert the subjects,
+who do not on that event lose their favour at court. On one occasion,
+the Mogul put the sincerity of a convert to a severe trial. Having used
+many threatenings to induce him to abandon his new faith, and finding
+him undaunted, he tried by flatteries and high promises to draw him
+back; but these also being unavailing, he bade him continue a Christian,
+and dismissed him with a reward; saying, if he had been able to terrify
+or cajole him from his religion, he would have made him a terrible
+example for all waverers.
+
+When I was in this country, the chief jesuit residing at the court of
+the Mogul, was Francisco Corsi, a Florentine by birth, who acted
+likewise as agent for the Portuguese. I wish I could confirm the reports
+they have made of conversions; but the real truth is, that they have
+merely spilt the water of baptism on the faces of a few, working on the
+necessities of some poor men, who from want of means to live, with which
+the jesuits supplied them, have been persuaded to wear crucifixes, but
+who, for want of instruction, are only Christians in name. Of these few
+mendicants, or so called by Christians, I noticed that five of them
+would beg in the name of Maria, for one who asked in the name of Jesus.
+I also desired to have put my hands to the holy work, but found extreme
+difficulty in the way, owing both to the Mahometan laxity in regard to
+the use of women, and the debauched lives of some unchristian
+Christians.--May he who hath the key of David open their eyes, and in
+his good time send labourers into this vineyard. _Amen_.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+JOURNEY OF THOMAS CORYAT BY LAND, FROM JERUSALEM TO THE COURT OF THE
+GREAT MOGUL.[245]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+Without proposing to follow this singularly bold English traveller and
+whimsical writer, in all his _crudities_, as he has quaintly termed his
+own writings, it has seemed proper to give some abbreviated extracts of
+his observations, which may serve in some measure to illustrate those of
+Sir Tomas Roe and the Reverend Edward Terry.--E.
+
+[Footnote 245: Purch. Pilgr. I. 607. In regard to this short article,
+see introduction to the immediately preceding Section.--E.]
+
+§1. _Letter from Ajimeer, the Court of the Great Mogul, to Mr L.
+Whitaker, dated in the Year 1615_.
+
+My last letter to you was from _Zobah_, as it is called by the prophet
+Samuel, B. II. ch. viii. v. 3. now named Aleppo, the principal emporium
+of all Syria, or rather of the eastern world; which was, I think, about
+fifteen months ago. I returned from Jerusalem to Aleppo, where I
+remained three months afterwards, and then departed in a caravan bound
+for Persia. Passing the river Euphrates, the chiefest of the rivers
+which irrigated the terrestrial paradise, when about four days journey
+from Aleppo, I entered into Mesopotamia, or Chaldea. Hence, in two days
+journey, I reached _Ur_ of the Chaldees, where Abraham was born, a very
+delicate and pleasant city.[246] I remained here four days; and in other
+four days journey reached the Tigris, which I also passed, at a place
+where it was so shallow that it only reached to the calf of my leg, so
+that I waded over a-foot. I then entered into the greater Armenia; and
+thence into lower Media, and resided six days in its metropolis,
+formerly called _Ecbatana_, the summer residence of Cyrus the Great, now
+called Tauris. More woeful ruins of a city I never beheld, excepting
+those of Troy and of Cyzicum in Natolia.
+
+[Footnote 246: Probably Orfa in Diarbekir is here meant.--E.]
+
+From that place I went to _Cashbin_, called by Strabo, _Arsacia_, in
+higher Media, once the residence of the Tartar prince; four days journey
+from the Caspian Sea. From Cashbin, I went in twenty-three days to
+_Ispahan_ in Parthia, the residence of the king of Persia; but while I
+was there, he was in _Gurgistan_, [Georgia,] ransacking the poor
+Christians of that country with fire and sword. I remained two months at
+Ispahan, whence I travelled with a caravan to the eastern India, passing
+four months and several days in travelling from that city, through part
+of Persia proper, and a large extent of the noble and renowned India, to
+the goodly city of _Lahore_. This is one of the largest cities in the
+world, being, at the least, sixteen miles in circuit, and larger even
+than Constantinople. Twelve days before coming to Lahore, I passed over
+the famous river Indus, which is as broad again as our Thames at London,
+having its original from the mountain of Caucassus, so ennobled by
+ancient poets and historians, both Greek and Latin.
+
+When about midway between Ispahan and Lahore, just about the frontiers
+between Persia and India, I met Sir Robert Shirley and his lady,
+travelling from the court of the Mogul to that of Persia. They were
+gallantly furnished for their journey, and shewed me, to my great
+satisfaction, both my books, very neatly kept, and promised to shew
+them, especially my itinerary, to the king of Persia, and to interpret
+some of the principal contents to him in Turkish, that I may have the
+more gracious access to him at my return. Besides other rarities which
+they carried with them, they had two elephants and eight antelopes,
+being the first of either I had ever seen. But afterwards, when I came
+to the Mogul's, court, I saw many. They intended to present these
+animals to the king of Persia. Both Sir Robert and his lady used me with
+much respect; especially his lady, who presented me with forty shillings
+in Persian money; and they seemed joyful at meeting me, promising to
+bring me into good grace with the king of Persia, as I mean, with God's
+help, to return through Persia to Aleppo.
+
+From Lahore, I travelled in twenty days to another goodly city named
+Agra, through such a beautiful and level country as I had never seen
+before. In this way, from the town's end of Lahore to the skirts of
+Agra, we had a row of trees on both sides of the road, the most
+incomparable avenue I ever beheld. Some ten days journey from Lahore
+towards Agra, but about ten miles off the road on the left hand, there
+is a mountain, the inhabitants of which have a singular custom, all the
+brothers of one family having but one wife among them, so that one women
+sometimes has six or seven husbands. The same is related by Strabo
+concerning the inhabitants of Arabia Felix. Agra is a very great city,
+but in every respect much inferior to Lahore. Here the Mogul used always
+to keep his court, till within these two years.
+
+From Agra I went in ten days to the Mogul's court, at a town called
+Asmere, [Ajimeer,] where I found an English. Cape merchant with nine
+more of our countrymen, residing there in the way of trade for our East
+India Company. In. my journey from Jerusalem to the court of the Great
+Mogul, I spent fifteen months and some days, travelling all the way
+a-foot, having been so great a _propatetic_, or walker forwards on foot,
+as I doubt if you ever heard of the like; for the whole way, from
+Jerusalem to Ajimeer, contains 2700 English miles. My whole
+perambulation of the greater Asia is likely to extend almost to 6000
+miles, by the time I have returned back through Persia, by Babylon and
+Nineveh to Cairo in Egypt, and thence down the Nile to Alexandria, when
+I propose, with God's blessing, to embark for Christendom.
+
+The reigning Great Mogul is named Selim.[247] He is fifty-three years of
+age, his birth-day having been celebrated with wonderful magnificence
+since my arrival. He was that day weighed in a pair of golden scales,
+which by great chance I saw that same day, the opposite scale being
+filled with as much gold as counterpoised his weight, and this is
+afterwards distributed among the poor. This custom is observed every
+year. His complexion is of an olive colour, something between white and
+black; being of a seemly stature, but somewhat corpulent. His dominions
+are very extensive, being about 4000 English miles in circumference,
+nearly answerable to the compass of the Turkish territories; or, if the
+Mogul kingdom be any way inferior in size to that empire, it is more
+than equally endowed with a fertile soil beyond that of any other
+country, and in having its territory connected together in one goodly
+continent, within which no other prince possesses one single foot of
+land. The yearly revenue of the Mogul extends to forty millions of
+crowns, of six shillings each, while that of the Turk does not exceed
+fifteen millions, as I was credibly informed in Constantinople, nor that
+of the Sophy five millions, as I learnt at Ispahan. It is said that the
+present Great Mogul is not circumcised, in which he differs from all
+other Mahometan sovereigns.
+
+[Footnote 247: He was Sultan Selim before his accession to the throne,
+but was afterward known by the new name of Jehunguire.--E.]
+
+The Great Mogul speaks with much revrence of our Saviour, naming him
+_Hazaret Eesa_, that is to say, the Great Prophet Jesus.[248] He
+likewise uses all Christians, and especially the English, with more
+benevolence than does any other Mahometan prince. He keeps many wild
+beasts, such as lions, elephants, leopards, bears, antelopes, and
+unicorns, [rhinoceroses,] of which I saw two at his court, the strangest
+beasts in the world. They were brought out of Bengal, a kingdom in his
+dominions of most wonderful fertility, above four months journey from
+this place, the mid-land parts of which are watered by various channels
+and branches of the famous river Ganges. I have not yet seen that
+country, but mean to visit it, God willing, before my departure, the
+nearest part of it being only about twelve days journey from hence.
+
+[Footnote 248: The Persian word _Hasaret_, here erroneously rendered
+Great Prophet, seems to signify literally _face_ or _presence_, and is
+metaphorically used as a term of highest dignity, of which an instance
+occurs in the present section, used by Coryat himself in addressing the
+Great Mogul--E.]
+
+Twice every week elephants are made to fight before the Mogul, forming
+the bravest spectacle that can be imagined, many of them being thirteen
+feet and a half in height, and they jostle together as though they were
+two little mountains; and were they not separated in the midst of their
+fighting, by means of certain fire-works, they would exceedingly hurt
+and gore each other, by their murderous tusks. The Mogul is said to keep
+30,000 elephants, at a most enormous expence; and in feeding them,
+together with his lions and other beasts, he expends an incredible sum
+of money, being at the least 10,000 pounds sterling daily. I have myself
+rode upon an elephant since I came to this court, meaning in my next
+book to have my effigies represented in that form. This king keeps a
+thousand women for his own use, the chiefest of whom, called Normal,
+(Noormahal) is his queen.
+
+In my ten months journey between Aleppo and this court, I spent just
+three pounds sterling, yet fared reasonably every day; victuals being so
+cheap in some of the countries through which I travelled, that I often
+lived competently for one penny a-day. Of that three pounds, I was
+actually cozened out of ten shillings, by certain evil Christians of the
+Armenian nation; so that in reality I only expended fifty shillings in
+all that time. I have been in a city of this country called
+_Detee_,[249] where Alexander the Great joined battle with Porus king of
+India, and defeated him; and where, in memory of his victory, he caused
+erect a brazen pillar, which remains there to this day. At this time I
+have many irons in the fire, as I am learning the Persian, Turkish, and
+Arabic languages, having already acquired the Italian. I have been
+already three months at the court of the Great Mogul, and propose, God
+willing, to remain here five months longer, till I have got these three
+languages; after which I propose to visit the river Ganges, and then to
+return to the court of Persia.
+
+[Footnote 249: This is obviously a misprint for Delee, meaning Delhi;
+but it is more probable that Alexander never was beyond the Punjab.--E.]
+
+In the course of my journey, I was robbed of my money, but not of all,
+having some concealed in certain secret corners. This was done at the
+city of Diarbekir in Mesopotatamia, by a Turkish horse soldier, whom
+they call a _spahee_. Since my arrival here, there was sent to this king
+the richest present I ever heard of. It consisted of various things, the
+whole amounting to the value of ten of their lacks, a lack being £10,000
+sterling. Part of this present consisted of thirty-one elephants, two of
+which were more gorgeously adorned than any thing I ever saw, or shall
+see in the course of my life. They had each four massy chains all of
+beaten gold, around their bodies, with two chains of the same about
+their legs, furniture for their buttocks of the same rich material, and
+two golden lions on their heads.
+
+§2. _Letter from Agra, the Capital of the Great Mogul, to his Mother,
+dated 31st October, 1616_.
+
+Most dear and well-beloved Mother,
+
+This city is the metropolis of the whole dominions of the Great Mogul,
+and is at the distance of ten days journey from Ajimeer, whence I
+departed on the 12th September this year, after having abode there
+twelve months and sixty days. This my long stay in one place, was for
+two principal causes; one being to learn the languages of these
+countries through which I am to pass between this country and
+Christendom, namely, Persian, Turkish, and Arabic, which I have
+competently attained to by labour and industry, being as available to me
+as money, and the chiefest, or rather the only means to get me money if
+I should happen to be in want; and, secondly, that, by the help of the
+Persian, I might get myself access to the Mogul, and be able to express
+my mind unto him about what I proposed to lay before him. During all
+this time, I abode in the house of the English merchants, my dear
+countrymen, not expending any money at all for lodging, diet, washing,
+or any other thing.
+
+I attained to a reasonable skill in the Persian tongue, by earnest study
+in a few months, so that I made an oration to the king in that
+language, before many of his nobles; and afterwards discoursed with him
+very readily. The copy of this speech I have sent you, as a novelty,
+though the language may seem strange and uncouth to an Englishman; and I
+have sent you herewith a translation, which you may shew along with the
+Persian original to some of my learned friends of the clergy, and also
+of the laity, who may take some pleasure in reading so rare and unusual
+a tongue. The Persian is this that follows:
+
+_Hazaret Aallum-pennah, Salamet: fooker Darceish, ce jehaun-gesht
+hastam; ke mia emadam az wellageti door, yanne as muik Ingliz-stan, ke
+kessanion pesheen mushacar cardand,_ _ke wellageti mazcoor der akeri
+magrub bood, ke mader hamma jezzaereti dunia ast, &c._[250]--The English
+of it is this:
+
+"Lord protector of the world, all hail! I am a poor traveller and
+world-seer, who am come here from a far country called England, which
+ancient historians thought to have been situated in the farthest bounds
+of the west, and which is the queen of all the islands in the world. The
+causes of my coming hither are four. First, that I might behold the
+blessed countenance of your majesty, whose great fame has resounded over
+all Europe, and through all the Mahometan countries. When I heard of the
+fame of your majesty, I made all possible haste hither, and cheerfully
+endured the labour of travelling, that I might see your glorious court.
+Secondly, I was desirous of seeing your majesty's elephants, which kind
+of beasts I have not seen in any other country. Thirdly, that I might
+see your famous river the Ganges, the captain of all the rivers in the
+world. Fourthly, to entreat your majesty, that you would vouchsafe to
+grant me your most gracious phirmaund, that I may travel into the
+country of Tartaria to the city of Samarcand, to visit the blessed
+sepulchre of the _Lord of the Corners_,[251] whose fame, by reason of
+his wars and victories, is published over the whole world, so that
+perhaps he is not altogether so famous in his own country of Tartary as
+in England. I have a strong desire to see the sepulchre of the Lord of
+the Corners for this cause, that, when in Constantinople, I saw a
+notable old building in a pleasant garden near the said city, where the
+Christian emperor, Emanuel, made a sumptuous banquet to the Lord of the
+Corners, after he had taken Sultan Bajazet in a great battle near the
+city of Brusa, when the Lord of the Corners bound Sultan Bajazet in
+golden fetters, and put him into an iron cage. These causes have induced
+me to travel thus far from my native country, having come a-foot through
+Turkey and Persia into this country, my pilgrimage having extended so
+three thousand miles, with much labour and toil, such as no mortal man
+hath ever yet performed, to see the blessed countenance of your majesty,
+since the first day of your being inaugurated in your imperial throne."
+
+[Footnote 250: The whole discourse, of which the following paragraph in
+the text is the translation, is contained in the Pilgrims: But doubting
+its accuracy, as that book is most incorrectly printed throughout, the
+editor requested the favour of the late learned professor of oriental
+languages in the University of Edinburgh, Dr Alexander Murray, to revise
+and correct this first sentence, which he most readily did, adding the
+following literal translation: "Presence, [or face.] of the
+world--protector, salutation to thee: A poor dervish and world-wanderer
+I am; that I have come from a kingdom far, to-wit, from the kingdom of
+Ingliz-stan, which historians ancient, relation have made, that kingdom
+said, in the end of the west was, which the mother of every island of
+the world is," &c.]
+
+[Footnote 251: This is the title given to Tamerlane in this country, in
+the Persian language, meaning that he was lord over the four corners of
+the earth, that is, the highest and supreme monarch of the
+world.--_Purch._]
+
+When I had ended my speech, I conversed with him for a short space in
+Persian, when, among other things, he told me that he could do me no
+service in regard to my proposed journey to Samarcand, as there was no
+intimacy between him and the princes of the Tartars, so that his
+commendatory letters would avail me little. He also added, that the
+Tartars bore so deadly a hate against all Christians, that they would
+certainly kill any who might venture into their country, wherefore he
+earnestly dissuaded me from this proposed journey, as I valued my life
+and welfare. At last, he concluded his discourse by throwing down to me,
+from a window in which he stood, that looked into the street, an hundred
+pieces of silver, worth two shillings each or ten pounds in all, which
+were thrown into a sheet hanging by the four corners.
+
+I had conducted this affair so secretly, by the help of the Persian
+which I had learnt, that neither our English ambassador, nor any other
+of my countrymen, excepting one special and private friend, knew any
+thing at all about the matter till I had thoroughly accomplished my
+design. For I well knew, if the ambassador had got the smallest notice
+of my purpose, that he would have counteracted me, as indeed he
+signified to me after I had effected my purpose, alledging that this
+might redound to the discredit of our nation, for one of our country to
+present himself in that poor and beggarly manner before the king, to
+crave money from him by flattery. But I answered our ambassador so
+resolutely, that he was glad to let me alone. Indeed, I never had more
+need of money in all my life than at this time, having only to the value
+of twenty shillings remaining, owing to my having been stripped of
+almost all my money by a miscreant Turk, in a city called _Imaret_, in
+Mesopotamia.
+
+After my interview with the Mogul, I went to visit a certain noble and
+generous Christian of the Armenian nation, two days journey from court,
+to observe certain remarkable matters at that place; and, by means of my
+knowledge of the Persian language, he made me very welcome, entertaining
+me with much civility and kindness; and, at my departure, gave me very
+bountifully twenty pieces of the same coin as the king had done, worth
+forty shillings of our money. About ten days after this, I departed from
+Ajimeer, the court of the Great Mogul, to resume my pilgrimage, after my
+long rest of fourteen months, proposing to go back into Persia. On this
+occasion, our ambassador gave me a gold piece of this king's coin, worth
+twenty-four shillings, which I shall save till my arrival in England, if
+it be possible. I have thus received in benevolences, since I came into
+this country, twenty marks sterling,[252] bating two shillings and
+eight-pence, besides £1:13:4 sterling, in Persian money, from Lady
+Shirley, upon the confines of Persia. At this present, being in Agra,
+whence I write this letter, I have about twelve pounds, which, according
+to my manner of living on the way, at two-pence a-day, will very
+competently maintain me during three years travel, considering the
+cheapness of all eatables in Asia. Drink costs me nothing, as I hardly
+ever drink any thing beyond pure water during my pilgrimage.
+
+[Footnote 252: Twenty marks are £15:6:8 sterling.--E.]
+
+I mean to remain in Agra for six weeks longer, waiting an excellent
+opportunity of going to the famous river Ganges, about five days journey
+from hence, to see a memorable meeting of the idolatrous people of this
+country, called Banians, of whom to the number of 400,000 go thither, on
+purpose to bathe and shave themselves in the river, and to sacrifice a
+world of gold to that same river, partly in stamped coin, and partly in
+great massy lumps and wedges, thrown into the river as a sacrifice,
+besides many other strange ceremonies, worthy of being observed. So
+notable a spectacle is no where to be seen, neither in this the
+_greater_ Asia, nor in the _lesser_, now called Natolia. This shew is
+made once in every year, on which occasion people flock thither from
+almost a thousand miles off, worshipping the river as a god and
+saviour; a most abominable and impious superstition of these brutish
+heathens, aliens from Christ. As soon as I have seen this ceremony, I
+propose, by God's help, to repair to Lahore, twenty days journey from
+hence, and so into Persia, &c.
+
+   Your dutiful, loving, and obedient son,
+   Now a desolate pilgrim in the world,
+   THOMAS CORYAT.
+
+§3. _Some Observations concerning India, by Thomas Coryat_.[253]
+
+Whereas in this country the beggars beg from a Christian in the name of
+_Bibbee Maria_, and not of _Hazaret Eesa_, we may gather that the
+Jesuits have preached our _Lady Mary_ more than the _Lord Jesus_.
+
+[Footnote 253: Purchas informs us, that these were taken from certain
+notes written by Coryat, given him by Sir Thomas Roe; "whence, omitting
+such things as have been given before from the observations of Sir
+Thomas Roe himself, I have inserted a few."--_Purch._]
+
+A great rajah of the Hindoos, who was a notorious atheist, and a
+contemner of all diety, and who boasted that he knew of no God except
+the king, and neither believed nor feared any other, happened one day to
+sit dallying among his women, when one of them plucked a hair from his
+breast, which hair being fast-rooted, plucked off along with it a small
+bit of skin, so that a small spot of blood appeared. This small scar
+festered and gangrened incurably, so that in a few days his life was
+despaired of, and being surrounded by all his friends, and several of
+the courtiers, he broke out into these excellent words:--"Which of you
+would have thought that I, a warrior, should not have died by the stroke
+of a sword, a spear, or an arrow? But now am I enforced to confess the
+power of the great God I have so long despised, who needs no other lance
+to slay so blasphemous a wretch and contemner of his holy majesty, such
+as I have been, than a small hair."
+
+Akbar Shah, the former king, had learnt all manner of sorceries; and
+being once in a strange humour to shew a spectacle to his nobles, he
+brought forth his favourite Sultana before them, and cut off her head
+with a sword in their presence. Seeing them struck with horror and
+amazement at this action, by virtue of his exorcisms and sorceries, he
+caused her head to fix on again, and no sign remained of any wound.
+
+The same prince, who was very fortunate during his reign, shewed the
+utmost attention and respect to his mother, of which he one day gave the
+following striking instance:--Being on a journey between Lahore and
+Agra, on which occasion his mother accompanied him, being carried in a
+palanquin, and having to pass a river, he took one of the poles of the
+palanquin on his own shoulder, commanding his greatest nobles to do the
+same, and in this manner carried her across the river. He never denied
+her any request that ever she made, except one, and this was, that our
+Bible might be hung about the neck of an ass, and so beaten about the
+town of Agra. The reason of this strange request was, that the
+Portuguese had taken a ship of theirs, in which they found a copy of the
+_Koran_, or bible of the Mahometans, which they tied about the neck of a
+dog, and beat the dog about the streets of Ormus. But he denied her this
+request, saying, That if it were evil in the Portuguese to have so done
+with the Koran, it did not become a king to requite evil with evil, as
+the contempt of any religion was contempt of God, and he would not be
+revenged upon an innocent book. The moral of this is, that God would not
+permit the sacred book of his law and truth to be contemned among the
+infidels.
+
+One day in every year, for the amusement of the king's women, all the
+tradesmen's wives are admitted into the _Mahal_, having each somewhat to
+sell, after the manner of a fair, and at which the king acts as broker
+for his wives, no other man being present, and by means of his gains on
+this occasion, provides his own supper. By this means he attains to a
+sight of all the pretty women of the city; and at a fair of this kind he
+got his beloved _Noor Mahal_.
+
+After _Shaof Freed_ had won the battle of Lahore by a stratagem, all the
+captains of the rebel army, to the number of two thousand, who had been
+taken by the king, were hung up upon flesh-hooks, or set upon stakes,
+forming an avenue for the king's entrance into Lahore. On this occasion,
+his son _Curseroo_, [Cusero] who had been made prisoner, rode beside
+him, bare-footed, on an elephant, and the king asked him how he liked
+that spectacle? To this the prince answered, That he was sorry to see so
+much cruelty and injustice in his father, in thus executing those who
+had only done their duty, as they had lived on his bread and salt: but
+that his father had done justly if he had pardoned these brave men, and
+punished him, who was their master, and the author of this rebellion.
+
+Sultan Cusero has only one wife, owing to the following circumstance:
+During his confinement, the king proposed to make a hunting progress of
+four months, and consulted how he might keep his son in safe custody
+during his absence. He at length determined to build a tower in which to
+immure him, having neither door nor window, and only a few small holes
+to let in air, and these so high as to be beyond reach. Into this tower
+were to be put along with the prince all sorts of provisions and
+necessaries, with a few servants to attend him. While this was building,
+the wife of Cusero fell at the king's feet, and would not leave him till
+she obtained his consent to be shut up along with her husband. The king
+endeavoured to persuade her to enjoy her liberty, but she utterly
+refused any other comfort than to be the companion of her husband's
+miseries. Among these, this was the greatest, that if any of those who
+were to be shut up along with him, to the number of fifty in all, should
+happen to die during the king's absence, there were no means either to
+remove or bury the body, as no person was to be allowed to come near the
+tower.
+
+It is a frequent custom of the present Mogul, when he happens to be
+awake in the night time, he calls for certain poor old men, making them
+sit beside him, and passes his time in familiar discourse with them,
+giving them clothes and bountiful alms when he dismisses them. At one
+time, when residing at Ajimeer, he went a-foot on pilgrimage to the tomb
+of a saint or prophet called Haji Mundin, and there kindled a fire with
+his own hands, under an immense _Heidelbergian equipolent_ brass pot, in
+which victuals were cooked for five thousand poor persons. When the
+victuals were ready, he took out the first platter with his own hands,
+and served the mess to a poor person. Noor Mahal took out and served the
+second, and the rest was served by the other ladies of his
+court.--_Crack me this nut, all ye papal charity-vaunters_.
+
+One day an Armenian procured a nobleman to present him to the king, as
+one who desired to become an Mahometan; on which the king asked him, if
+he had been converted from hope of preferment; to which the Armenian
+answered, that be had no such motive. Some months afterwards, the new
+convert craved some courtesy from the king, which he denied, saying, "I
+have already done you the greatest of all favours, in allowing you to
+save your soul; but you must provide for your own body the best way you
+can." The king likes not those who change their religion, being himself
+of none but according to his own fancy, and freely allows therefore of
+all religions in his dominions. Of which I may give the following
+notable example:
+
+He had an Armenian in his service, named Scander, whom he one day asked
+if he thought any of the _padres_ had ever converted a single Mahometan
+to be a true Christian, for conscience sake, and not for money. Scander
+answered, with great confidence, that he had one as his servant, who was
+a sincere Christian, and would not be of any other for any worldly
+consideration. The king immediately caused this man to be sent for, and
+bidding Scander depart, he examined the convert as to his reasons for
+having become a Christian. In reply, he quoted certain feeble jesuitical
+reasons, declaring his determination to be of no other religion, though
+the king made him many fair speeches and large offers to return to
+Mahometism, offering him pensions, and the command of horse. He said he
+had now only four rupees a month, which was a poor recompense for
+becoming a Christian, but if he would recant, he would give him high
+dignities and large means. The fellow answered, that he had not become a
+Christian for such small wages, as he was able to earn as much in the
+service of a Mahometan; but was a Christian in his heart, and was
+determined so to continue. Finding this method ineffectual, the king
+turned his tune, and tried him with threats of severe punishment, unless
+he returned to the faith of Mahomet. But the proselyte manfully declared
+he would suffer any thing, being ready to endure whatever the king was
+pleased to order. Upon this declaration, when all the by-standers
+expected present and severe castigation, the king suddenly changed his
+manner towards him, highly commending his constancy and resolution,
+bidding him return to his master, and to serve him faithfully, and
+ordered him an allowance of one rupee a-day for his integrity.
+
+About two months afterwards, the king returned from hunting wild-hogs,
+an animal which is held in abhorrence by all Mahometans, and which kind
+of venison, therefore, the king was in use to distribute among the
+Christians and Rajaputs. On this occasion, the king sent for the
+converted catechumen above mentioned, and commanded him to take up a hog
+for his master, which no Mahometan will touch. He did so, but on going
+out of the court gate, he was so hooted at by the Mahometans, that he
+threw down his burden in a ditch, and went home; concealing what had
+passed from his master. Some four days afterwards, the Armenian being on
+duty in presence of the king, he asked him if the hog he had sent him
+was good meat. The Armenian replied, that he had not seen or heard of
+any. The king therefore immediately ordered the convert to be sent for,
+who confessed that he had not carried home the hog, as being mocked by
+the Mahometans for touching so great an abomination, he had for shame
+thrown it away. On this the king observed, "By your Christian law there
+is no difference of meats. Are you ashamed of your law, or do you
+outwardly forsake it to flatter the Mahometans? I now see that you are
+neither a good Christian nor a good Mahometan, but a knave dissembling
+with both. When I believed you sincere, I gave you a pension, which I
+now take from you for your dissimulation, and I farther condemn you to
+receive an hundred stripes." These were presently paid him, instead of
+his money; and the king desired all to take warning by this example,
+that, having given liberty of conscience to all religions, he would have
+all to adhere to what they professed.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+ACCOUNT OF THE WRONGS DONE TO THE ENGLISH AT BANDA BY THE DUTCH, IN 1617
+AND 1618.[254]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+This section contains a letter from Mr Thomas Spurway, merchant or
+factor, addressed from Bantam, "To the Honourable and Right Worshipful
+the East India Company of England, touching the wrongs done at Banda to
+the English by the Hollanders; the former unkind disgusts and brabling
+quarrels now breaking unexpectedly out into a furious and injurious
+war." Such is the account given of this section by Purchas, who farther
+informs his readers, "That the beginning of this letter was torn, and
+therefore imperfect in his edition; but, what is here defective, was to
+be afterwards supplied from the journals of Nathaniel Courthop, and
+other continuations of these insolences of the Dutch at Banda, by Mr
+Hayes, and others." These journals of Courthop and Hayes are so
+intolerably and confusedly written, and so interlarded with numerous
+letters _about_ the subject of these differences with the Dutch, that we
+have been reluctantly under the necessity of omitting them, being so
+monstrously inarticulate as to render it impossible to make them at all
+palatable to our readers, without using freedoms that were altogether
+inadmissible in a work like the present.
+
+[Footnote 254: Purch. Pilgr. I. 608.]
+
+From this letter, and other information of a similar nature, it appears
+that the attempts to form establishments for trade at Banda and the
+Molucca islands were found to be difficult or impracticable, owing to
+the opposition of the Dutch, who were much stronger in that part of
+India, and had not only conceived the plan of monopolizing the spice
+trade, but even avowed their determination to exclude the English and
+all other European nations from participating in any share of it. We do
+not pretend, in our Collection, to write the history of the English East
+India Company, but merely to give a series of the voyages which
+contributed to the establishment of that princely association of
+merchant adventurers. Yet it seems proper, occasionally at least, in the
+introductions to leading voyages, like the present, to give some short
+historical notices of the subject, for the materials of which we are
+chiefly, if not solely, indebted to the Annals of the Company, a work of
+meritorious and laborious research, already several times referred to.
+
+Under the difficulties which had long attended the exertions of the
+English to acquire a share in this peculiarly called _spice trade_, the
+agent and commercial council of the English company at Bantam, gave
+authority to the commanders of the Swan and Defence to endeavour to
+obtain from the native chiefs of the islands of Puloroon and Puloway, a
+surrender of these islands to the king of England, with the stipulation
+of paying annually as a quit-rent, a fruit-bearing branch of the nutmeg
+tree; yet stipulating that these islanders were to continue entirely
+under the guidance of their own laws and customs, providing only that
+they should engage to sell their spices exclusively to the agents of the
+English company, who were, in return, to supply them with provisions and
+Hindoostan manufactures at a fair price, in exchange for their peculiar
+productions, nutmegs and mace. They were likewise authorised, if they
+procured the consent of the natives, to establish fortified stations, or
+factories, at Puloroon, Puloway. Pulo-Lantore, and Rosinging, or
+Rosengin.[255] The views of the Bantam factory on this occasion seem to
+have been generally judicious, as to the measure they now authorised,
+but exceedingly ill judged in attempting to execute so very important a
+purpose with a force entirely inadequate to that with which it had to
+contend.
+
+[Footnote 255: An. of E.I. Co. I. 187.]
+
+The Dutch had expelled the Portuguese, at that time the subjects of
+their tyrannical oppressors, the Spaniards, from a great portion of the
+spice islands, in which warlike measure, and its consequences, they had
+always to support a considerable force, both naval and military, in
+these seas, and in various forts upon these islands; and besides, that
+they felt their preponderance from these circumstances, and used it very
+naturally for their own exclusive benefit, they alleged, and with no
+small appearance of equity, that the English had no right to enjoy the
+advantages of a trade, which they, the Dutch, had conquered from the
+Portuguese and Spaniards. This opposition of interests proceeded in the
+sequel to great extremities, in which the greatly superior power of the
+Hollanders in these seas, enabled them effectually to oppress the
+English, in what are peculiarly called the spice islands, and even to
+expel them from all participation in that trade, as will appear in some
+of the subsequent sections of this chapter.
+
+It would be not only premature in this place, but incompatible with the
+nature of our work, which is intended as a Collection of Voyages and
+Travels, to attempt giving a connected history of these dissensions
+between the Dutch and English in Eastern India, which will be found
+detailed in the Annals of the English Company. It is hardly possible,
+however, to refrain from one observation on the subject,--that the Dutch
+company, and the government of Holland, appear to have mainly proceeded,
+in their hostile opposition to the English East India trade, on their
+knowledge of the pusillanimous character of King James, which he vainly
+thought to veil under the pretensions of loving peace, but which the
+Dutch, as will be seen in the present section, clearly understood, and
+openly expressed, as _the childhood of St George_, the tutelary martial
+saint of England. _Beati pacifici_, his favourite adage, is an excellent
+Christian and moral sentiment, but is incompatible with the unavoidable
+exigencies of government, at least as they were then situated.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_May it please your Worships_,
+
+We arrived at Macassar on the 19th of November, 1616, from Bantam, with
+the Swan and Defence, under the command of Captain Nicholas Courthop,
+who sailed in the Swan, of which ship Mr Davis was master, the other
+being commanded by Mr Hinchley. We remained there for the purpose of
+taking in an hundred _quoines_[256] of rice. On the 4th December, we saw
+a large Dutch ship in the offing, which came to anchor about five
+leagues off, and on the 5th they sent their skiff ashore, which made
+directly for the English house, having eight men on board. As soon as we
+perceived this boat coming ashore, we ran to the sea side; but, before
+we got there, two of her men were landed, whom we acquainted with the
+danger they were in, as the king of Macassar, and all the other kings
+thereabouts, were become their mortal enemies, because of the many
+injuries done them by the Hollanders, who had forcibly carried away a
+principal sabander, and other persons belonging to Macassar, for which
+they were determined upon revenge; and, therefore, that they might all
+expect to be put to death, unless the king could be prevailed upon to
+spare them. The Dutchmen were so much alarmed at this intelligence, that
+they wished to have gone back to their boat, but the Macassers had
+already gathered about us, and laid hands upon them.
+
+[Footnote 256: The amount or quantity of these _quoines_ are no where
+stated, or even hinted at; but, from circumstances in the sequel, they
+appear to have been considerable.--E.]
+
+I, and other English, immediately went in all haste to the king,
+acquainting him with what had happened, lest, if the Dutch had intended
+any treachery, he might have suspected us as being accessary. The king
+gave us thanks, and desired us to take the two Dutchmen who had landed
+to our house, that we might learn from them their intentions in coming
+here. This we did, and they informed us that they belonged to a fleet
+lately fitted out from Holland, and had lost company of their consorts.
+One of these called himself John Staunch, and reported himself to be an
+under-factor. The other was an English sailor. Perceiving themselves to
+be in great danger, they earnestly entreated us to stand their friends
+and procure their liberty. We promised to do every thing we could for
+them. Soon after this, the kings of Macassar and Talow, together with
+about 2000 attendants, came to the sands near the sea side, where they
+held a council upon these men. The king of Talow was clear for putting
+them to death, but we used our interest so successfully for them, that
+they were commanded to be gone instantly in their boat; The king of
+Macassar observing, that these were too few for satisfying his revenge,
+and that he should wait for one more ample. So they departed and went to
+their ship.
+
+Next day another boat was observed coming towards the shore from the
+same ship; and, on the king being informed of this, he gave immediate
+orders for twenty proas and corracorras to be manned and launched. This
+was done immediately, and the whole made towards the Dutch boat, which
+was rowing for the land directly towards our house. On observing the
+native craft endeavouring to intercept them, the Dutch turned their
+boat, and rowed back to regain their ship; but the Macassars soon got
+up, boarded them on both sides, and slew every man of the Hollanders,
+being sixteen in number. There were at this time near 5000 people at the
+sea side, and we were commanded to keep the house.
+
+The name of this Dutch ship was the Endraught, and imagining that we
+were bound for Banda or the Moluccas, she remained at sea waiting for
+us. We set sail from Macassar road on the 8th December, 1616, and when
+the Dutchmen, saw us under sail, they also weighed and kept company with
+us. We would gladly have gone from them, but could not, owing to the bad
+sailing of the Defence. They sent their boat to us, requesting we would
+spare them two quoines of rice, four tons of water, and some poultry,
+all of which we gave them, only taking payment for the rice, being forty
+dollars, giving the water and poultry freely. We asked why they had
+attempted to land the second time; when they told us their first boat
+had not then returned to the ship, so that they believed the Dutch
+factory had still remained at Macassar. But I believe it proceeded from
+obstinacy, believing their first boat had been denied access at our
+instigation, and meaning to make a second trial, when they hoped to have
+flattered the king to allow them to return, and reinstate their factory.
+For both their boats passed within musket-shot of our ships on their way
+to the land, yet did not go aboard to enquire what were the situation of
+affairs on shore, which if they had done, we should have forewarned them
+of their danger. They kept company with us till we came near Amboina,
+for which place they stood in, while we continued our course. We have
+since learnt that they gave out we had been the cause of their men being
+slain at Macassar, which is most false: For I solemnly protest that we
+used our best endeavours to save them, and if it had not been for us,
+the eight men in their first boat had also been slain.
+
+The Swan and Defence arrived in the road of Puloroon on the 13th
+December. Next day the people of that island came on board, and
+conferred with us about surrendering the island to us. We represented
+that our nation had come often to their island, at great cost, and at
+their particular request, to settle a factory, and trade with them in a
+friendly manner, bringing them rice and other provisions, with cloth and
+sundry commodities, in exchange for their spices; that we had no desire
+to usurp over them, or to reduce them under bondage, as had been done
+formerly by the Hollanders and other nations; and that, if they would
+surrender their island of Puloroon to our sovereign the king of England,
+by a formal writing, and by the delivery of some earth, with a tree and
+fruits of the island, as true tokens of their fidelity, and thereafter a
+nut-tree yearly as an acknowledgment, we should settle a factory, and
+would furnish them with rice, cloth, and other commodities, both now and
+yearly afterwards. We also assured them, if we were once settled on the
+island, that sufficient supplies would come to them yearly, much better
+than now; and that we would use our utmost efforts, both by means of our
+men and ships, to defend them and ourselves from all enemies. We also
+demanded, whether they had come under any contract with the Hollanders,
+or had made them any surrender of their island. To this they unanimously
+replied, that they had made no such engagement, and never would, but
+held the Hollanders as their mortal enemies. This was earnestly declared
+to us, both by the men of Puloroon and by divers chiefs from Puloway,
+who had fled from that island on its forcible reduction by the
+Hollanders. And they all declared that the island of Puloway had been
+lawfully surrendered to Richard Hunt, for the king of England, before
+the Hollanders came into the road, the English colours having been
+hoisted in the castle, which the Hollanders shot down, using many
+disgraceful words of his majesty. They farther declared, that they
+defended their island for his majesty's use, as long as they possibly
+could; and, being constrained by force, they had fled to Puloroon,
+Lantor, and Serran.
+
+After this conference had continued the whole day, the writings of
+surrender were drawn up, and confirmed by all the chief men of Puloroon
+and Puloway, and so delivered by their own hands to us, Nathaniel
+Cowthorp, Thomas Spurway, and Sophonie Cozocke, for his majesty's use.
+They also that same instant delivered to us a nutmeg-tree, with its
+fruit growing thereon, having the earth about its root, together with
+oilier fruits, and a live goat, in symbolical surrender of the
+sovereignty of the island, desiring us to hoist the English colours, and
+to fire a salute of ordnance. Accordingly, the colours were set up, and
+we fired thirty pieces of ordnance, as a mark of taking possession; and
+at night all the chiefs went ashore, parting from us on the most
+friendly terms.
+
+On Christmas-day we descried two large Dutch ships edging towards
+Puloroon. On seeing our ships in the road, they bore away to leeward for
+Nero, and next day another of their ships hove in sight, which went to
+the same place. The 28th, a Dutch pinnace stood right over for Puloroon,
+and came bravadoing within gun-shot of our fort, having the Dutch
+colours flying at her poop; but presently tacked about, lowered her
+colours, and hoisted a bloody ensign instead, as if in defiance, and
+then stood over for Nero. By this bravado, we daily looked for their
+coming against us, according to their old injurious custom. We landed
+four pieces of ordnance on the 30th, besides two others formerly landed
+on the 25th, and set to work to construct fortifications for our
+defence. By the assistance of the Bandanese, we erected two forts, which
+were named the Swan and Defence, after our two ships, each mounted with
+three guns; the fort called the Swan being within caliver shot of the
+ships, and entirely commanding the road on the eastern side, where is
+the principal anchorage for the westerly monsoon.
+
+The 3d of January, 1617, the three Dutch ships came from Nero into the
+road of Puloroon, being the Horne, of 800 tons, the Star, of 500 tons,
+and the Yaugar, of 160 tons. The Home anchored close by our ship the
+Swan, the Star close beside the Defence, and the Yaugar a-head of all,
+to cut off our intercourse with the shore. Our commission directed us,
+on receiving the surrender of Puloroon, and forming a settlement there,
+to give due notice thereof in writing to the Hollanders, warning them
+not to come there to molest us under the pretence of ignorance, as they
+had been formerly accustomed to do. We had accordingly a letter written
+to that effect, but knew not how to have it sent, not daring to dispatch
+it either by Englishmen or natives, for tear of being detained. On
+coming into the road, however, we sent George Muschamp aboard their
+admiral, the Star, to deliver the before-mentioned letter to Mynheer
+Dedall, the Dutch commander; and with a message desiring them to depart
+from the road of Puloroon before six glasses were run, as the islanders
+would not allow them to remain in the roads, or to come near their
+island, and would even have already fired upon them, if we had not
+prevailed upon them to forbear.
+
+Soon afterwards, the Dutch commander, Dedall, came on board the Swan,
+attended by their chaplain, to enquire the reason of our message; when
+we told him that we suspected they came to injure us, as they had
+formerly done at Paloway, Cambella, and other places; and, as they had
+formerly turned the glass to Mr Ball, when in their power, threatening
+to hang him if he did not immediately cause the English to quit the
+land, we had now in like manner appointed a time for them to quit the
+roads. We also shewed him the instrument by which Puloroon was
+surrendered to us, and our consequent right to keep possession for the
+king of England, which we were determined upon doing to the utmost of
+our power, wishing them to be well advised in their proceedings, as they
+might expect to be shortly called to answer for their abusive words and
+injurious conduct to the English. We also demanded the restoration of
+Puloway, which had likewise been lawfully surrendered to the king of
+England. After this, we enquired if they had received any previous
+surrender at Puloroon, but they could not say they had any; and, when we
+shewed the formal surrender made to our king, which their chaplain
+perused, he acknowledged that it was a true surrender.
+
+All this while the glass was running in the great cabin before their
+eyes, putting them in mind to be gone. We also told them plainly, that
+we believed their only purpose in coming here was to betray us, and to
+drive us from the island by treachery or force, of which scandalous
+conduct our nation had already had divers experience from theirs;
+wherefore we neither could nor would trust them any more, and we must
+insist upon their departure; as, when the glass was six times run out,
+they must expect to be shot at from the shore; and, if they fired in
+return against the islanders, or shewed any discourtesy or wrong to
+them, we should consider it as hostility to us, and would defend them,
+being now the subjects of our king. They desired to remain till next
+day, which we would not agree to, doubting that more of their ships
+might come to join them. They then desired to stay till midnight; which
+we agreed to, on condition that we saw them preparing to weigh their
+anchors, in which case we said that notice should be sent ashore to the
+Bandanese, not to fire upon them.
+
+I also demanded to know from Dedall, what was their purpose in thus
+coming into the road of Puloroon, unless to molest us. He pretended that
+it was their usual custom in passing that island. But I told them that
+was not true, as the islanders had declared there never was any
+christian ship in their roads till we came. So he remained silent. They
+came to anchor in the roads this day about three in the afternoon, and
+departed about eleven at night. We have been since certainly informed,
+that their purpose was to have taken possession of our ships by
+treachery, or to have driven us out of the roads, and only gave up their
+intentions on seeing that we were fortified on shore. Had they then
+assailed us, we had little doubt of being able to have defended
+ourselves against them, as we had both forts in readiness, the cannon
+charged, and the gunners prepared to give fire, on the first signal from
+our ships.
+
+A Dutch ship and pinnace came from Nero on the 10th January; the pinnace
+edging near the small island or high sand, called _Nylacka_. This island
+is uninhabited, but full of trees and bushes, being daily resorted to by
+the men of Puloroon for fishing; and as belonging to Puloroon, belonged
+now to the English. On coming near the island, the people in the pinnace
+were observed continually sounding, wherefore we made four shots towards
+her from Fort Defence; but, not intending to strike her, shot wide. At
+every shot, the pinnace answered with a base, or some such piece, firing
+into the small island among the trees and bushes, where were some
+Englishmen and Bandanese of Puloroon, who were in no small danger from
+the shot. Seeing they braved us in this manner, the gunner was desired
+to do his best, and his next shot fell close over the stern of the
+pinnace or frigate, which made her presently go away. Their purpose of
+coming thus to sound about the small island, seemed to be to look out
+for a landing-place; meaning to come there with their forces, and there
+to fortify themselves, on purpose to compel us to quit the large island.
+
+On the 13th, Mr Davey complained that he was in want of water, and
+proposed to go over for that purpose to Wayre upon Lantore; but on the
+people of Puloroon being informed of this, they would by no means
+consent to his going out of the roads, and indeed neither would we,
+fearing the Hollanders might do us some injury in his absence. The
+people of Puloroon, said they would rather bring him water from Lantore,
+in their proas. I went on board Mr Davey to acquaint him with this; but
+he and his people would not consent, saying the Bandanese would bring
+them rain water, or such other as was unwholesome, and that they would
+only be six days absent, or eight at most.
+
+At this time, the principal people of Wayre, a free town on the island
+of Lantore, and of the separate island of Rosinging, came over to us, to
+enter into a parley respecting the surrender of both to the sovereignty
+of his majesty; and the formal deed of surrender being agreed upon and
+drawn up, they desired that some Englishmen might go over to receive the
+same in a public manner from all their hands, and to witness the
+ceremonial. As Mr Davey still persisted to go over with his ship, it was
+resolved upon, that Messrs Sophonie Cozocke, George Muschamp, Robert
+Fuller, and Thomas Hodges, should go over in the Swan to Wayre and
+Rosinging, to see that business accomplished, while the Swan was
+procuring water; after which, it was appointed that Mr Cozocke was to
+return in the Swan, while the other three were to remain upon the island
+of Rosinging for possession, till farther orders. All business being
+there concluded to our satisfaction, several persons in Wayre and
+Rosinging desired to load nutmegs and mace in the Swan, and to have a
+passage for Puloroon, there to sell us their spices for rice and cloths.
+All this was agreed to, and twelve of these persons came on board, with
+a great quantity of nutmegs and mace.
+
+The Swan then set sail for Geulegola, which is only a little way from
+Wayre, and there watered, after which she again set sail. When about
+eight leagues from the land, a Holland ship or two gave them chace. The
+people of the Swan now asked Mr Davey what he proposed to do. He
+answered, "They see my colours and I see theirs: I know them to be
+Dutch, and they know us to be English: I know of no injury I have done
+them, and I will continue my course for Puloroon." In short time, the
+Star, for such was the Dutch ship, got up within shot of the Swan, and
+without hailing, or giving the smallest intimation of her intention,
+let fly both with great guns and small arms in the most violent manner.
+The Swan received two or three great shot through and through before she
+replied, and even had some of her men slain. After this, as Mr Davey
+writes, the fight continued an hour and a half, during which five men
+were killed in the Swan, viz. Mr Sophonie Cozocke, merchant, who was
+driven to pieces by a cannon-ball, Robert Morton, quartermaster and
+drummer, Christopher Droope, Edward Murtkin, and a Bantianese passenger
+from Wayre. Three others were maimed, having lost arms or legs, with
+very little hopes of recovery; and eight others were wounded, most of
+them mortally. During the engagement, a Dutchman stood upon the poop of
+the Star with a drawn sword, calling out in the Dutch language, English
+villains and rogues, we will kill you all.
+
+The people of the Swan were much discouraged, on seeing so many of their
+companions dead and wounded, insomuch that none of them would stand by
+the sails to trim the ship to the best advantage so that the Hollander
+lay upon her quarter pouring in great and small shot, and at last look
+her by boarding, both with soldiers and others. They immediately broke
+open and pillaged the cabins, plundered the men basely of their clothes
+and every thing else worth taking, and throwing overboard whatever did
+not please their fancies. Even the Spaniards never used more stern
+cruelty in their professed wars, than did now the Dutch to us, with whom
+they were in peace and amity. The Star had on board 160 men, mostly
+soldiers taken from the castles of Nero and Puloway, while the Swan had
+not above thirty able to stand to quarters, the rest being sick or lame,
+and all much worn out in toilsome labour at Puloroon, in landing the
+ordnance and constructing the two forts. Ten also of their complement
+had been left in Puloroon to defend the two forts, two of whom, Herman
+Hammond and John Day, were gunners. The Swan being thus taken and sore
+battered in the action, was carried away under the guns of the castle at
+Nero. The Dutch gloried much in their victory, boasting of their exploit
+to the Bandanese, saying, That the king of England was not to be
+compared with their great king of Holland: _That Saint George was now
+turned a child_, and they cared not for the king of England; for one
+Holland ship was able to take ten English ships. They landed all our men
+at Nero, and kept them all strict prisoners, many of them in irons.
+
+The Swan left us at Puloroon on the 16th of January, and we expected her
+back in eight or ten days at farthest, but never heard of her till the
+25th of February, when Robert Fuller came over to us from Rosinging and
+Wayre; to acquaint us that be had heard of an English ship being under
+the guns of Nero castle. We immediately sent away Robert Hayes, the
+purser of the Defence, accompanied by some of the chief men of Puloroon,
+with directions to land on that side of Lantore which was in friendship
+with us, and to go as near as possible to the Dutch ships with a flag of
+truce, to enquire into the matter. After staying almost two hours, there
+came at last a boat to fetch him off, but made him wade to the middle
+before they would take him in. Being taken on board one of the Dutch
+ships, the president and assistants of Nero met him, when he demanded to
+know why they had made prize of the Swan, what was become of her men,
+and wherefore they detained our ship and goods. They answered, that
+_time should bring all to light_. Still urging for an answer, they used
+many opprobrious words against the English, threatening to come over to
+Puloroon with their forces, and to drive us from there and other places.
+To this Hayes replied, that they had already done much more than they
+could answer for, and was obliged to come away without seeing any one
+belonging to the Swan. He could however see our poor ship all rent and
+torn, in view of the natives, as an ill-got and dishonourable trophy of
+Dutch treachery and ingratitude. In a short time after, they sent over a
+messenger to us with a letter, which we answered, as we did others
+afterwards, their messengers frequently coming over with flags of truce,
+all of which letters, together with the surrenders, I brought over with
+me to Bantam, and delivered to Captain Ball.
+
+The Dutch continually threatened us, by their letters and messengers,
+that, as they had now taken tee Swan, they would soon come and take
+possession of the Defence, and drive us from the island of Puloroon. We
+always answered, that we expected them, and would defend ourselves to
+the last. They made many bravados, daily shooting off forty, fifty, or
+sixty pieces of ordnance at Nero and Puloway, thinking to frighten us.
+Also the people of Lantore brought us word that they were fitting out
+their ships, and shipping planks and earth, which we imagined was for
+land service. They had then seven ships, four gallies and frigates, and
+a great number of men, with all which force they threatened to come
+against us. We were told likewise, that they had endeavoured to prevail
+on their black slaves, by promise of freedom and great rewards, to come
+over secretly to Puloroon and set fire to the Defence. The Hollanders
+also, threatened that we should carry no spices from Puloroon or any
+other of the Banda islands. Thereupon, considering our engagements with
+the people of Puloroon, Wayre, and Rosinging, to all of whom we had
+trusted our goods, and that we had ready at Puloroon a good quantity of
+nutmegs and mace, and the threats of the Hollanders, we resolved to
+maintain the honour of our king and country, and to defend the interest
+of our employers, the honourable Company, to the utmost of our power.
+For this purpose, we determined to land all the guns, provisions, and
+stores, from the Defence, and to fortify the small island of Nylacka
+adjoining to Puloroon; which the Hollanders proposed to have fortified
+formerly; which, if they had done, would have commanded the road, and
+done us much injury, as the people of Puloroon would have been prevented
+from fishing, and English ships could not have come into the roads.
+
+Having therefore landed all the ordnance of the Defence, except four
+pieces of cannon, and being busied in erecting a fortification with the
+assistance of the Bandanese, Mr Hinshley also, the master of the
+Defence, being ashore, and every one hard at work landing the things,
+except a few left on board to keep the ship, a conspiracy was entered
+into by some of the men on the 20th March, 1617; and that same night
+they cut the cables and so drove out to sea. Perceiving this from the
+small island, we immediately sent a boat after them, advising them to
+return with the ship: But the mutineers would neither listen to them,
+nor suffer the boat to come near the ship, pointing their pieces at
+them, and even fired one musket-shot to keep off the boat; which was
+therefore compelled to return to the small island. There went away in
+the Defence nine of our men, including John Christmas, the boatswain's
+mate, and we could distinctly see them next day going into Nero roads
+under sail, and come to anchor under the guns of the castle. As we
+afterwards learnt, some of the runaways went immediately on shore to
+inform the Dutch of their exploit, contending among themselves which of
+them had piloted the ship. They even brought a can of wine ashore with
+them, and drank to the Hollanders on landing.
+
+The Dutch took immediate possession of the Defence, and brought all our
+rascally deserters into their castle, where they examined them as to our
+proceedings at Puloroon and Nylacka, in regard to our fortifications
+and means of defence. By this scandalous affair, we were in great danger
+of being all put to death by the Bandanese of Puloroon, as they
+suspected the desertion of our ships to have been a concerted matter
+between us and the Hollanders, on purpose to betray them. By this
+likewise, as our weakness was made known to the Hollanders, they might
+be encouraged to attack us. Indeed they made many violent threatenings
+of so doing, and we daily looked for their appearance; which, if they
+had so done, must have cost many lives, as we were greatly enraged
+against them for the capture of the Swan, and the severe usage of her
+people.
+
+On the 23d of March, we sent a letter to the Hollanders at Nero, by
+Robert Fuller, who landed upon Lantore; but, owing to some difference
+between the people of that island and the Dutch, he could not be allowed
+to pass, so that he had to return. The 25th there came a messenger to us
+from Lawrence Ryall, the principal commander of the Hollanders, newly
+come to Nero from the Moluccas, desiring Mr Courthop and I would come in
+a proa to hold a conference with two of his principal merchants,
+half-way between Puloroon and Puloway; but we refused this request,
+being afraid of treachery. By this messenger we had a letter from Mr
+Davies, then a prisoner at Nero, intimating his disapprobation of our
+proceedings in keeping possession of Puloroon, alleging that our
+commission did not warrant us in so doing, and recommending a parley
+between us and the Dutch general, to prevent the loss of any more lives.
+It appeared that he was instigated to give us this advice by the
+Hollanders, who had made him believe that they had authority in writing
+from our king, to make prize of any English ships they found to the east
+of Celebes, as we afterwards learnt to our great surprise, since, if
+they actually had such authority we must have obeyed.
+
+We wrote to Lawrence Ryall, by his messenger, that, if he would send
+over Henrick de Watterfoord and Peter de Yonge, two of his principal
+merchants, to remain as pledges in Nylacka, Mr Courthop and another
+should be sent to confer with him. We got back for answer, that the
+merchants we demanded as pledges could not be sent, as the one was gone
+to sea, and the other could not be spared, being their chief
+book-keeper; but offering us two other principal merchants, whom we
+agreed to accept. Accordingly, on the 6th April, the Dutch galley
+brought over these two, whom we lodged in a tent near the landing-place
+under a guard of twelve Englishmen to protect them from the Bandanese,
+as we did not think it right to bring them into our fort, that they
+might not have an opportunity of viewing our fortifications.
+
+Mr Courthop went immediately over to Nero in their galley, and had a
+long conference with the Dutch, in which they used many threats, and
+complained of many injuries they pretended to have suffered from the
+English, but of which I shall only briefly treat, as the letter from Mr
+Courthop, which I brought over from Banda and delivered to Captain Ball,
+will certify your worships at large on this matter. They complained,
+that Sir Henry Middleton had used the Dutch colours, when in the Red
+Sea, pretending to be Holland ships, to their injury and discredit. To
+this Mr Courthop replied, that it was false, as he had sailed with Sir
+Henry, and never knew him to wear Dutch colours; which, moreover, Sir
+Henry was too much a gentleman to have done. They pretended to have our
+king's letter, authorizing them to capture any English ship seen to the
+eastwards of the Celebes. Mr Courthop urged them to produce this letter,
+on seeing which he declared his readiness to obey the authority of his
+sovereign, and to evacuate Puloroon; but they had none such to produce.
+They alleged many other things, equally false, and used many arguments
+to induce us to quit Puleroon. All this time, neither Mr Davies nor any
+other of the English in their hands were permitted to come near Mr
+Courthop.
+
+Finding he could not prevail, Lawrence Ryall, the Dutch general, grew
+much discontented, throwing his hat on the ground and pulling his beard
+for sheer anger. At length Mr Courthop told him, that he could conclude
+nothing of his own authority, being joined with a council, but should
+relate every thing that had passed at Puloroon, which should be taken
+into consideration and an answer sent. I had advised him to say this, to
+get the easier away. Mr Courthop also urged them to restore our ship the
+Defence, with her men and goods; but they would not, unless we agreed to
+surrender Puloroon: offering, if we would deliver up Nylacka and our
+fort, in which we had twelve pieces of ordnance, that they would then
+restore both the Swan and Defence, with all our men and goods. Ryall
+then desired Mr Courthop to sign a note which he had drawn,
+acknowledging the proffers he had made, but this Mr Courthop refused.
+
+They had so wrought upon Mr Davies, that they expected he might be able
+to prevail upon Mr Courthop to come into their terms, and now therefore
+brought him to Mr Courthop, with whom he had much discourse, and
+particularly urged the truth of the letter they pretended to have from
+the king of England, as before mentioned. When Mr Courthop told him what
+he had offered, in case that letter were produced, Mr Davies distinctly
+saw he had been imposed upon, and broke out into a rage against them,
+for having told so many falsehoods;[257] adding, that they had promised
+him and his men good treatment, but that his men complained of being in
+great want of food and clothing, and of general hard usage. They had sat
+in judgment upon him and his men, condemning them to remain as prisoners
+till they had orders from Holland as to their ultimate destination. He
+even said, that he was willing to continue in durance, provided we could
+keep them out of Puloroon. The conference being ended, Mr Courthop came
+back to Nylacka in the galley, and the pledges were restored.
+
+[Footnote 257: Purchas, in a side note at this place, quaintly converts
+the name of the Dutch general into Lawrence _Ly-all_.--E.]
+
+The eastern monsoon being now come, we fitted out a proa to send with
+dispatches to Bantam, giving an account of what had passed; and it was
+agreed that Mr Hinchley and I were to go, accompanied by four Englishmen
+and fourteen natives of Puloroon, of whom five were chiefs, or
+_orancays_, one of them being son to the sabander, who is the principal
+man of the island. We set sail from Puloroon on the 17th April, 1617,
+and when in sight of Bottone on our way for Macassar, we descried a
+large ship and a pinnace, which gave us chase under a press of sail, so
+that we had no means of escape, except by standing in for Bottone. After
+being chased half a day, we got near the town of Bottone by night,
+thinking the ships could not have got so far up the river; but seeing
+the ship and pinnace almost within musket-shot of us next morning, we
+presently landed most of what we had in the proa, taking refuge in the
+woods. Having so done, we went immediately to the king, to whom we gave
+a present of such things as we had, to the value of about thirty
+dollars, desiring his protection, which he promised in the kindest
+manner, and faithfully performed. He sent his servants along with us,
+to put all our things into a house, giving us also two houses for our
+lodging, desiring us to remain within, that we might not be discovered
+by our enemies.
+
+Almost immediately afterwards, the Hollanders went to the king, giving
+him a present three times the value of ours, and enquired who we were
+that had landed. To which the king answered that he knew not who we
+were. On being asked by the king how long they meant to stay, the Dutch
+said they proposed remaining six days; of which the king sent us notice,
+advising us to keep close for that time, that we might proceed in
+greater security after they were gone. But at the end of these six days
+the Dutch said they would stay six days longer, pretending they had to
+repair one of their masts. Seeing their intention, and because our proa
+lay in view of the Dutch, we bought another proa, into which the king
+made all our things be carried by his slaves, causing them to navigate
+that proa past the Hollanders, and to carry her to the back of the
+island, whither he sent us over land under the protection of fifty men.
+We went immediately aboard, but remained under the island till near
+night, when we stood our course for Macassar, and saw no more of the
+Hollanders.
+
+We arrived at Macassar on the 7th May, where we found the Attendance
+intending for Banda, but was unable to beat up, owing to the change of
+the monsoon. Having shipped in the Attendance 180 _suckles_ of mace,
+purchased at Macassar, we sent the proa to Banjarmassen and Succadanea
+in Borneo, with advice that a supply of goods could not be sent there as
+expected, owing to the non-arrival of the Solomon, which had been long
+expected at Bantam. The 3d June we arrived at Bantam. As Captain George
+Barkley was dead, to whom Mr Ball succeeded as chief of the factory, I
+have delivered all the papers to him, and doubt not that your worships
+may receive them by the first conveyance. Those are, two surrenders, the
+letters from the Hollanders with our answers, and every thing relative
+to our proceedings in Banda.
+
+When I left Puloroon, it was agreed that another proa was to be
+dispatched for Bantam in twenty days after our departure, lest we might
+have been pursued and taken by the Hollanders. Accordingly a proa[258]
+was sent, in which was laden 170 suckles of mace, containing 3366
+cattees, each cattee being six English pounds and nearly two ounces,
+costing at the rate of one dollar the cattee;[259] which, had it gone
+safe, might have sold in England for £5000. In this proa there were
+eight Englishmen and thirty Bandanese, under the charge of Walter
+Stacie, who had been mate under Mr Hinchley in the Defence. His
+knowledge and care, however, did not answer expectation, for he ran the
+proa on the rocky shoals near the island of Bottone, where she bilged
+and lost all the mace, the men getting ashore. Stacie is much blamed by
+the rest, some of whom told him they saw land on the lee-bow, but he was
+peevish and headstrong, calling them all fools, and would not listen to
+them.
+
+[Footnote 258: In a marginal note, this is called a junk.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 259: From the statement in the text, the suckle appears to
+have been about 122 English pounds, and the quantity of mace
+accordingly, shipped on this occasion, about 185 cwt. or 9 1/4
+tons.--E.]
+
+May it please your worships to understand, that the Hollanders replied,
+when told that their vile abuses to us would lie heavy on them when
+known in Europe, "That they can make as good friends in the court of
+England as your worships; that this which they have done will oblige
+your worships and them to join, so that a gold chain will recompence
+all, and they have dollars enough in Holland to pay for a ship or two,
+providing they can hinder us from trading at Banda."
+
+In regard to the trade of the Banda islands, Puloroon is reported to be
+the worst island. It is about eight English miles in circuit, and the
+small adjoining island of Nylacka is about a mile round. There is a
+tolerable quantity of nutmegs and mace grown on Puloroon, and
+considerably more might be got there if the island were well cultivated.
+Rosengin is a fine island, producing the largest nutmegs and best mace
+of all the Banda islands; and, if we hold possession of Puloroon,
+abundance of nutmegs and mace could be had from Rosengin, Lantore, and
+other places; as the natives would come over to us with their spices,
+provided we supply them with rice, cloth, salt, pepper, molasses, and
+other necessaries, and some Macassar gold, which passes as current in
+Banda as Spanish rials of eight, and at the same rate, though only worth
+at Bantam two shillings and fourpence or two and sixpence, for the piece
+called mass. Our cargo was small, having only 100 _quoines_ of rice, and
+our cloth was much decayed, having lain two or three years at Macassar.
+If we had had three times as much, we could have sold it all at
+Puloroon for mace and nutmegs, being entreated for cloth and rice by
+people from Lantore, Rosengin and other places, but had it not, so that
+some returned home again with part of their spices. They came over to
+Puloroon in the night with proas and corracorras. The mace and nuts were
+very good, but must be injured by lying so long, owing to the
+molestations of the Hollanders, while we had no lime for preserving the
+nuts. The trade will turn out very profitable, if we may quietly possess
+the island of Puloroon; but we must buy rice at a lower rate than in
+Macassar, and I understand it can be had in Japan for about half the
+price.
+
+In regard to our right to the Banda islands, especially Puloway, Captain
+Castleton might have made that secure, as I have often been told; and at
+all events, we have a much better right than the Hollanders, who by
+force of arms have dispossessed us. Except Puloroon be supplied this
+year, and the possession maintained, the English name will be utterly
+disgraced, with little chance of our ever being received there again. If
+we are able to hold it until your worships have determined what to do in
+the matter, we shall soon be able to procure there as much mace and
+nutmegs as the Hollanders; and it may also serve as an entrance into the
+Moluccas for cloves. The Hollanders pretend an exclusive right to the
+Bandas and Moluccas, in consequence of having the son of the king of
+Ternate in their hands as a prisoner. But the Bandanese deny that the
+king of Ternate has any right of dominion in their islands, every one of
+their islands being free, and governed by sabanders and orancays of
+their own appointment.
+
+It is indispensible, that supplies of rice and other victuals, and
+cloth, should be sent for the English and Bandanese, and to bring away
+the nutmegs and mace we have there in godowns or warehouses. The
+Hollanders give out that they will take all your ships that go to those
+parts, so as to famish both the English and Bandanese; wherefore it
+requires earnest and speedy attention, that we may quietly enjoy our
+trade to these islands, which have been surrendered to us, and desire
+our trade. These are Puloway, Puloroon, Rosengin, and Wayre, which last
+is a town in Lantore. Puloway is reported to be a paradise, and the
+Hollanders allege that it is as much worth to them as Scotland is to
+his majesty. Even should your worships not be able to get Puloway
+restored, yet, if you enjoy the other three, we shall be able to procure
+enough of nutmegs and mace for the supply of England, and also for the
+trade of Surat and other places in India. Now is the time or never,
+considering the vile abuses and murders committed upon us by the
+Hollanders. At this time, the Charles and the Hope are bound home from
+Bantam, and I pray God to send them safe to London. I have sent your
+worships a brief abstract of our cargo for Banda, and of the sales made
+there. If I seem tedious, I humbly crave pardon; and, with my humble
+duty, beseeching the Almighty to prosper and give good success to all
+your designs, I humbly take leave,
+
+being your worships most humble servant in all duty,
+
+_Thomas Spurway_.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+FIFTH VOYAGE THE JOINT STOCK BY THE ENGLISH EAST INDIA COMPANY, IN 1617,
+UNDER THE COMMAND OF CAPTAIN MARTIN PRING.[260]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+The fleet appointed for this voyage consisted of five ships; the James
+Royal of 1000 tons, Rowland Coytmore master; the Ann Royal of 900 tons,
+Andrew Shilling master; the Gift of 800 tons, Nathaniel Salmon master;
+the Bull of 400 tons, Robert Adams master; and the Bee of 150 tons, John
+Hatch master; the whole under the supreme command of Martin Pring,
+general, who sailed in the James Royal.--_Purch._
+
+[Footnote 260: Purch. Pilgr. I. 63.]
+
+§1. _Occurrences on the Voyage out, and at Surat, Bantam, and Jacatra_.
+
+On Tuesday the 4th February, 1617, our fleet dropt down from Gravesend.
+Thursday the 6th, Mr deputy Maurice Abbot, with several of the
+commissioners, came aboard and mustered all our men, paying their
+harbour wages. These gentlemen left us next day, when all our men were
+entered upon whole pay. After much foul weather, we departed from the
+Downs on the 5th March. The 22d of June we Lad sight of Saldanha point,
+and anchored that same afternoon in the bay, whence we departed on the
+13th July. The moon was totally eclipsed at night of the 6th August; it
+began at eight o'clock and continued till past eleven, being totally
+eclipsed for an hour and half. On the 25th August at night, between
+seven and eight o'clock, being in latitude 4° 20' S. the water of the
+sea seemed almost as white as milk, and so continued till morning, when
+it began to alter. Next night we found the water similar, but not
+altogether so white. Before day on the 30th, the water was again white,
+and likewise the next night; but on all these occasions we could find no
+ground.
+
+On the night of the 8th September at twelve o'clock, our ship sprung a
+leak, which, when discovered, had raised the water in our hold six feet
+and a half. In four hours, with both pumps, the ship was freed, but we
+afterwards found that the water increased at the rate of a foot in the
+half hour. In the morning of the 9th, I summoned the chief commanders of
+the fleet on board, desiring them to send their carpenters to assist in
+searching for the leak, and some of each of their companies to aid our
+men in pumping. Some were set to rummage the hold in search of the leak,
+and others to stick our sprit-sail full of oakum, with which we made
+several trials under the ship's bilge, but could not find the leak. We
+at length found, by divers trials within board, that the leak was before
+the main-mast; and we, next morning, fitted the sprit-sail again,
+letting it down at the stern, and brought it forwards by degrees, and at
+length, by God's blessing, our leak was partly stopped, as the water
+only rose about six inches in a glass, which had before risen twelve
+inches. Bat within three glasses, the oakum being washed out, the leak
+increased as before. This night we got an additional pump from the Bull,
+to free the water from the fore part of our ship, where it stood
+eighteen inches deeper than in our well. The 11th, we again fitted our
+sprit-sail with oakum and let it down again, when it pleased God so to
+favour us, that in an hour after our ship was tighter than ever.
+
+On the morning of the 12th we espied a sail, which the Gift came up with
+in the afternoon, being a Portuguese ship belonging to Don Pedro de
+Almeyda, from Mozambique bound for Diu, laden principally with about
+fifty quintals of elephants teeth. In the morning of the 20th the Bee
+rejoined us from Swally roads, informing us that the rest of our fleet
+was safe in that anchorage. They had brought in with them a junk and two
+other ships, which they had chased on the 16th. The junk was a great
+ship of Surat, belonging to the mother of the Great Mogul, burden about
+1200 or 1400 tons, having in her above 1000 persons, and twenty-nine
+tons of silver, though some said a great deal more. The other two were
+English interlopers, called the Francis and the Lion: the former of 160
+tons, belonging to-----, and commanded by Captain Neuce; and the latter
+of 120 tons, fitted out by Philip Bernardy, an Italian merchant in
+London, commanded by Thomas Jones, who had formerly been boatswain of
+the Hector.
+
+This evening we anchored in the road of Swally, where we found the rest
+of our fleet, with the foresaid junk and the two English privateers. On
+oar arrival, we heard of two Dutch ships having been cast away at
+_Gowdever_;[261] the Rotterdam of 1000 tons, and a small pinnace. The
+9th October, I sent up twenty-one chests of coral to Surat, which were
+landed two days before from the Ann; and at night I sent up eight tons
+and four hundredweight of elephants teeth, taken out of our Portuguese
+prize. This afternoon twenty sail of frigates from Goa arrived at the
+bar of Surat, commanded by the Captain-major Don Pedro de Asadedo,
+[_Asovedo_?] From one of these, five of the country people came ashore
+among our men, two of whom were taken by our guard, and confessed they
+came from Goa a month before, having orders from the viceroy to range
+the coast, to discover the English, when they were to return; but if the
+English were not on the coast, they were to proceed for Cambay, to
+capture the caffila, or convoy of country vessels.
+
+[Footnote 261: This name is inexplicably corrupt.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 14th October, seventeen of the frigates departed
+for Cambay, passing fairly by us. This day likewise I sent fourteen tons
+of elephants teeth to Surat, under a guard of thirty-six men, who
+likewise conveyed our treasure to Ahmedabad; and, on the 17th, I sent
+other twelve tons four hundredweight of elephants teeth. This day the
+Portuguese frigates returned again, and passed in our sight to the
+southwards. Next day we sent off all the rest for our ivory; and on the
+22d we landed sixteen chests of coral, and two of sea-horse teeth, out
+of the Bull.
+
+The 14th November, a month's pay was distributed to all the ships
+companies, except the chief commanders and merchants, amounting to 3302
+Spanish dollars. After this, the Bee was sent off for Jasques; and we
+landed from the other ships cloth, tin, cases of wine and strong waters,
+and all the rest of the presents that were in the cabin.
+
+The 17th January, 1618, the Bee returned from Persia. This day seven
+Malabar junks were seen in the offing, two of which were brought in by
+the Francis, and two by the Bee. We departed from Swally roads on the
+12th March, and anchored that same evening near the bar of Surat. The
+17th, in the morning, the wind coming about northerly, the Ann departed
+for the Red Sea, and on the 18th I dispatched the Bull. At noon of this
+day, standing to the southward, we were in lat. 11° 25' N. the wind, as
+for four or five days before, being, at night, a slight breath from the
+land, and, by day, in the afternoon, a fresh breeze from the sea. In the
+forenoon of this day, we saw eight sail to the southward of us, and
+three between us and the land, besides two sallies and ten frigates. In
+the afternoon of the 28th, the Francis and the Bee being near the shore
+abreast of Calicut, the Zamorin sent off a boat desiring to speak with
+me, but I was too far shot to the southwards before the message reached
+me.
+
+The 2d April we got in the morning into the bay of _Brinjan_, where we
+anchored in fourteen fathoms, within half a league of the town, a high
+peaked hill, like a sugar-loaf; bearing N.E. by E. by the compass, which
+is the best mark to know this place by, when the weather is clear. This
+is a good place for refreshments, having hens, cocoa-nuts, and goats in
+abundance, and plenty offish, together with excellent water springing
+from the rock; but we had to pay seventy dollars, a cloth vest, a
+fowling-piece, a mirror, and a sword, for leave to provide ourselves
+with water, and all too little to satisfy the governor, who, after
+receiving our money and giving us leave, came down with seven or eight
+hundred men, demanding more money, and if we had not kept a strong guard
+at the spring, would have put us from it after our money was paid. The
+5th, the wind being fair off shore, we weighed anchor and departed, and
+in the evening were abreast of a headland eight leagues S.E. by E. from
+Brinjan, from which to Cape Comorin it is seven leagues E. two-thirds S.
+At six in the evening of the 7th, we had Cape Comorin N.N.E. one-third
+N. five leagues off, and had soundings in thirty fathoms. And on the
+19th June we were in Bantam roads, when Captain Ball and Mr Pickham came
+on board.
+
+On the 24th I visited the pangran, to accommodate matters for Captain
+Ball, who had arrested a Chinese junk for certain debts they owed our
+factory, making offer to restore the junk, if the pangran would give us
+justice, which he gave me his word to do. I went to him again on 6th
+July, accompanied by Mr Ball, Mr Rich, Mr Pickham, and several other
+merchants, when he was so inveterate against Mr Ball, that he refused to
+see him. On which I sent him word, that Mr Ball had brought the bills of
+our debt due by the Chinese, and was the only person among us who could
+explain the transactions between our factory and the Chinese, of which I
+was entirely ignorant. The messenger returned, saying that Mr Ball could
+not be received, on which we all left the court.
+
+The 1st September, having the wind off the land, we weighed in the
+morning, and stood for point Ayre, keeping in seven fathoms till within
+three miles of the point, where one cast we had a quarter less seven,
+and the next cast only three fathoms. Some supposed we here touched, but
+it was not perceived by me. Off this point there is a shoal almost even
+with the surface of the water, but having seven fathoms within two
+cables length of its edge. This afternoon, while standing towards three
+Dutch ships that rode right in the fair-way, and when within a mile of
+them, our ship grounded; but, God be praised, we got her off again
+without any hurt, and so into the bay, where we again fell in with a
+shoal, of which we came within two cables length, which lies one and a
+half league from the Flemish islands. We got safely into the road of
+Jacatra, [now Batavia road] in the afternoon of the 2d September, having
+been providentially delivered from three several dangers the day before,
+of which may we be ever thankful.
+
+The 19th, the Angel, a Dutch ship of 500 tons, came in from Amboina,
+laden with nutmegs and cloves, and departed again on the 25th. Early in
+the morning of the 26th, I went to visit the king, and found him in a
+good humour, and conferring with him upon some former business, we came
+to a conclusion before I left him, to the following purpose: That he was
+to give us a convenient piece of ground for building upon, for which we
+were to pay 1500 dollars, and were to be free from all customs on
+exports and imports on payment of 800 dollars yearly.
+
+§2. _Dutch Injustice, and Sea-fight between them and Sir Thomas Dale_.
+
+The 27th of September, Mr Bishop arrived from Jappara in the roads in a
+proa, in which was a _Cogee_, bringing a letter from the Matron to
+Captain Ball, wherefore I sent him away to Bantam that night. He left
+two English behind him at Jappara, one of whom had fled from the Dutch.
+He likewise brought letters from several of our people who were
+prisoners in the Moluccas, and one of these was directed to me, from Mr
+Richard Tatten, in which he complained much of the gross usage of the
+Dutch, who would hardly allow them a sufficiency of rice to subsist
+upon, and who constantly clapped them in irons, on every idle rumour of
+the coming of our ships.
+
+On the evening of the 30th October, Cornelius Marthen, who commanded the
+French ship taken by the Dutch, came into the roads, and came aboard my
+ship that same night. After some discourse, he told me we had six ships
+coming from England for these seas, commanded by Sir Thomas Dale, for
+some special business at the Moluccas, whither he was bound with the
+Stathouder, the Neptune, and this French prize, to wait the coming of
+good friends. The 27th, in the evening, we had four feet and a half
+water in our hold, which we freed in two hours with both our pumps, and
+kept under afterwards with one pump, till next morning about ten
+o'clock, when we let down a sail wadded with oakum, which fortunately
+stopped our leak. The 31st, I found an excellent place for putting our
+ship on the careen, on a small island within Taniam point, in the bay of
+Bantam, on which we made all preparations to remove to that place.
+
+The Rose arrived from Tecoo on the 15th of November, bringing news that
+the Hollanders had established a Factory there soon after ours was
+dissolved. The 19th, the Moon, Clove, Samson, and Peppercorn arrived
+from England, and anchored between Vium point and Pulo Paniang.
+Perceiving the Clove to be admiral, I went first on board her, taking
+such fresh victuals as we could spare. I here found Sir Thomas Dale
+admiral, and Mr Jordain president, and learnt that they had lost company
+of the Globe to the westward of the Cape, and, what was far worse, they
+had left the Sun, the flag ship, in great danger of being cast away on
+the isle of Engano, the whole fleet having much difficulty to double
+that island. They had afterwards waited two days for the Sun, but she
+had been bilged on the rocks, as we afterwards learnt, to our great
+regret. In the morning of the 22d, these ships sailed into Bantam roads,
+and on passing the island where our ship lay, we saluted them with
+fifteen guns we had planted on the shore, and struck my flag in
+compliment to Sir Thomas Dale, who was admiral of that fleet.
+
+Two boats arrived on the 28th from Engano, with sixty-eight men
+belonging to the Sun, bringing the lamentable news of the loss of that
+ship, with many of her company, on, that island. The 29th, the Globe
+arrived in the morning, and this day our leak broke out afresh, but was
+quickly stopped by removing the bonnet.[262] The 30th, our ship being
+entirely cleared from stem to stem, the carpenters went below to search
+for the leak; and as they passed forwards, removing the lining as they
+went, they found an auger hole left open in the middle of the keel, in
+the foremost room save one, which hole was four inches and three
+quarters about, and, had it sprung upon us while at sea and alone, would
+have tired out our whole company in twenty-four hours. In this the great
+mercy of God was manifest, that it never broke out upon us but when we
+had a fleet along with us for our aid.
+
+[Footnote 262: Perhaps this means by shifting the wadded sail.--E.]
+
+A fast being proclaimed to be held on board the fleet, and the exercise
+to be in the James on Sunday the 3d December, Mr Wren, the chaplain of
+the Sun, preached in the morning, and our own minister, Mr Copland, in
+the afternoon. This day the Bee sailed for Engano, in hopes to recover
+some money and goods belonging to the Swan, from the inhabitants of that
+island. The 4th, a Dutch ship, called the Black Lion, arrived from
+Patania, and rode to the westward of Pulo Paniang. As Mr Denton was well
+acquainted among the Dutch, he was sent aboard in the barge to enquire
+whence she came. On coming aboard, he met an old acquaintance, Hendrick
+Janson, who had been a long time chief factor for the Dutch in Patania.
+He, and another inferior factor, came aboard the Moon along with Mr
+Denton, where they were well entertained till Sir Thomas Dale came on
+board, and were soon after set ashore at Bantam. That same night we held
+a council, when it was determined to proceed before day with four ships,
+the Moon, Clove, Globe, and Samson, against the Black Lion, the better
+to prevent her escape. At break of day on the 6th, we were close around
+her, and after a short parley, they yielded their ship, on condition of
+being allowed to land with all their private property; and we brought
+her that same day near the island, among the rest of our fleet.
+
+The Bee returned on the 14th, having been forced back by contrary wind,
+and unable to get through the straits. On the 16th, twenty Portuguese
+came on board the James Royal, who had fled from the Dutch at Jacatra,
+and whom we received kindly. This evening we were ready to sail, having
+eleven ships, great and small, and being in hopes to drive the Dutch
+from Jacatra. Our fleet consisted of the following ships:--The Moon, in
+which Sir Thomas Dale sailed as admiral; the Gift, in which I sailed as
+vice-admiral; the Unicorn, Clove, Globe, Samson, Pepper-corn, Thomas,
+Bee, Rose, and Black Lion. We left behind us the James Royal, the
+Advice, and our prize, because the James was not ready, and the other
+two had most of her provisions and stores on board.
+
+We sailed in the morning of the 19th, and anchored that evening between
+Pulo Paniang and Pulo Tunda. In the evening of the 20th, we anchored
+with our whole fleet about a league to the northward of Hector island.
+This night we sent a barge to the Flemish islands, where they found no
+persons on the southern island: but there lay there a Dutch galley,
+which they set on fire, and so returned on board. That same evening we
+saw seven Dutch vessels in the bay of Jacatra. Early in the morning of
+the 21st, they all stood out towards us till near the islands, when they
+anchored all together, and we stood towards them in the afternoon,
+coming to anchor about a mile to windward of their fleet. In the
+evening, we held a consultation on board the Moon, when it was resolved
+to assault the Butch fleet in the following manner:--The Globe and
+Samson were appointed to assail the Sun, and the Thomas was to pass in
+between them, filled with combustible matter as a fire-ship, to set the
+Sun on fire. The Moon and Clove were to attempt the Golden Lion; the
+Gift and Bee were to assail the Angel; the Unicorn and Rose were to
+attack the Devil of Delft; and the Pepper-corn was ordered to surprise
+the burger-boat come from Jambee, which rode about three leagues from
+the rest, and whose boat, with thirteen men, had been intercepted by our
+barge, while making for the Dutch fleet, about seven this evening. This
+arrangement being written down, we departed, every man to his own
+particular charge.
+
+After we were gone, the admiral, Sir Thomas Dale, sent his boat to the
+Thomas for three _sackers_, which kept them at work till next morning at
+eight o'clock, so that the Hollanders were all away before these guns
+were got on board the Moon. We were then all in a Burly-burly to weigh
+and get out to sea, that we might have sea-room, and the advantage of
+the turn of the tide, which we at length attained, getting without the
+isles of Point Aire. In the mean time, the Dutch fleet passing between
+these isles and the main of Java, anchored that night on the coast of
+Java, and our fleet in the offing, without the islands. On the 23d, in
+the morning, the Dutch fleet stood off to the westwards, close under
+_Anti-Lackie_, in which course the Devil of Delft borrowed so near, that
+she got aground, and remained fast for a quarter of an hour. On seeing
+this, we made towards them, but she was got off before we could get any
+thing near, when she and all the rest of their fleet stood to the
+northwards. As our fleet had the weather-gage, we _paid room upon
+them_[263] till we came within shot, and then the Moon, commanded by our
+admiral, Sir Thomas Dale, began the fight with the headmost ship of the
+enemy, called the San. The battle continued for the space of three
+hours, during which time we spent upon them some 1200 cannon-shot, when
+we left them for the night, they standing so for to the northwards, that
+they got the _burger-boat_ again into their company, and then anchored
+about half a league from us to the westwards, where they remained all
+night.
+
+[Footnote 263: This antiquated expression evidently means bearing down
+upon them to leewards.--E.]
+
+Both fleets weighed anchor on the 24th, ours plying to the westwards to
+gain the wind, and the Hollanders ran in shore towards Point Aire. In
+the mean time, we descried three sail coming before the wind from the
+westwards, which at length we perceived to be the Little James, the
+Hound, and the Francis. By and bye we joined altogether, and chased the
+Dutch fleet through the bay of Jacatra, to its eastern point, where we
+all came to anchor for the night. During the night, the Dutch from
+Jacatra sent a junk filled with combustible matter, and on fire, which
+came so near our fleet that we were fain to weigh our anchors and get
+out of her way. The 25th, being Christmas-day, we again saw the Dutch
+fleet standing to the eastwards, and we sent our barge to follow them
+all night, to see what course they took, because we had left the James
+Royal in the bay of Bantam, with the Advice and our prize, which they
+might have surprised, if they got to Bantam before us, as there was no
+ship of force but the James, and she was unprepared, being busied in
+taking in her goods and stores, after being emptied to find her leak.
+
+The 27th of December, after midnight, the Black Lion, our Dutch prize,
+was set on fire by the carelessness of three wicked fellows, and burnt
+to the water's edge. The president went ashore on the morning of the
+30th, to wait upon the king of Jacatra, accompanied by Mr Henry Jackson,
+when an unfortunate shot carried away his leg, of which wound he
+died.[264]
+
+[Footnote 264: It appears in the sequel that it was Jackson who lost his
+leg and life though the text leaves it dubious whether he or the
+president.--E.]
+
+The 1st of January, 1619, the James Royal, the Advice, and the prize,
+joined us from Bantam. The 2d, Sir Thomas Dale went ashore to Jacatra to
+visit the king, and to learn what were his intentions respecting the
+Dutch fort. The king gave to both him and the president much
+satisfaction, in words at least, promising to grant the English any
+reasonable conditions, if they would assist him to surprise the Dutch
+castle. This morning, before day, the Francis departed for Puloroon,
+with provisions for the relief of Mr Nathaniel Courthop and his
+companions. The 6th we held a council of war aboard the Moon, when it
+was determined that we should land from our greater ships six pieces of
+large cannon, three culverines, and three demi-culverines, with a
+proportional store of powder and shot, to assist the king of Jacatra
+against the Dutch; that Sir Thomas Dale was to remain in that road with
+eight sail, to cover this business, while five ships, under my command,
+were to ply up for the straits of Sunda, to lie in wait for the Dutch
+ships.
+
+The 25th, we got into the road of Becee, and anchored in fifteen
+fathoms, about two miles from the shore; the S. point of Becee bearing
+S.W. 1/4 W. and the N. point _Sabaicas_, which shut in the western isle
+of Pirio Tigs, bearing N. by W. three leagues off. We watered our ships
+on the 27th and 28th, and cut wood. I and Mr Coytmore, with several
+other masters, went twice ashore to view the harbour, which we found to
+be an excellent place of refuge for a small fleet against a superior
+enemy. The 31st, by order of the president, we repaired with our fleet
+into Bantam roads.
+
+The 1st February, Captain John Jourdan the president came on board, who
+acquainted me with all that had taken place between them and the Dutch,
+in regard to the castle of Jacatra, during my absence, the Dutch having
+agreed to deliver up that fort to the English, on condition of being
+allowed to depart with bag and baggage, and a ship, _for two thousand
+rials of eight_, to carry them to the coast of Coromandel.[265] Sir
+Thomas Dale arrived in Bantam roads on the 4th, with the Moon, Clove,
+James, Pepper-corn, Hound, and Advice. As the pangran of Bantam had
+practised underhandedly with the Dutch to have the castle of Jacatra
+delivered into his hands, by which we had been unjustly deprived of that
+acquisition, we agreed, in a general consultation, that the president,
+and all the rest of the principal persons of our factory at Bantam,
+should repair on board, and get all our goods and provisions put aboard
+the ships. Accordingly, we were occupied from the 10th to 16th, both
+inclusive, in getting all the money and goods belonging to the
+honourable Company on board. During this time, the pangran sent several
+obscure persons to the president, as of their own accord, to enquire the
+reason of his departure, pretending that the pangran had given no just
+cause for leaving the country. Upon this the president drew up a
+memorial, enumerating the several grievances and wrongs which the
+English had suffered from him, meaning to have it translated into the
+Javan language, and then to be transmitted to the pangran.
+
+[Footnote 265: This agreement was crossed by the Pangran of Bantam, who
+gave us leave to beat the bush, and thought to have caught the birds
+himself, but was deceived in the end.--_Purch._]
+
+The 17th, advice was received from Mr Ufflet, at Jacatra, that the Dutch
+were daily occupied in repairing and strengthening their fortifications;
+and that, when the messengers of the pangran demanded the surrender of
+their fort, with part of their money, goods, and ordnance, they gave for
+answer, That all these things were the property of their masters, which
+therefore they could not give away. We this day received news of two
+Dutch ships in the road of Jacatra, and that same night Sir Thomas Dale
+set sail with eight ships in quest of them, while I remained with four
+to attend upon the president. The 26th, having certain intelligence that
+four Holland ships were at anchor in the mouth of the Straits of Sunda,
+I went out that same evening to look for them, with the James, Gift,
+Unicorn, and the Little James. Next morning we anchored near Pulo
+Paniang, to take in water, and to put our ships into order, by taking
+aboard some planks that were alongside.
+
+We weighed again in the morning of the 1st March, making sail towards
+the mouth of the Straits, where we observed the two Dutch ships at
+anchor near the island of Tamporan, about three leagues to the westwards
+of Viun, or Palambangan point. We immediately made all sail towards
+them, while they, as in a careless manner, plied to and fro, having
+their topsails half mast down. At length, as we drew nigh, the Dutch
+admiral and all the rest of his ships bore up with my ship, which was
+most to windward, and gave us two shots, one of which went through the
+ship's side under the half-deck, and the other through the steerage.
+They had no sooner begun than they were as quickly answered from my
+ship, and in such measure, that, in the space of two hours, they became
+as quiet as lambs; their admiral, who gave the onset with so much
+arrogance, being the first to run away, followed by all the rest. We
+chased them till night, and then finding them too swift of foot, we gave
+over the chase, standing over towards Pulo Tunda. We came to anchor
+again on the 2d of March in the road of Bantam, on which day we had
+intelligence that one of the two ships lately come to Jacatra had got
+aground near the castle, and had been set on fire by themselves on
+seeing Sir Thomas Dale. The other ship, which had taken in a valuable
+loading from the castle, was also cast away on some rocks, ten leagues
+east of Jacatra.
+
+On the 4th, we had a letter from John Powell, residing at Jacatra,
+stating that Sir Thomas Dale had sailed on the 1st, with the Moon,
+Hound, Rose, and Bee, in search of the stranded Dutch ship. The 14th we
+heard from Sir Thomas that he had got almost within shot of the four
+Dutch ships we met with, but had been taken by a dead calm for twelve
+hours, succeeded in the night by a tempest, which scattered them so far
+asunder by next morning, that they lost all hopes of the chase, and had
+therefore returned to Point Ayre, whence he proposed bringing the Moon
+immediately to Bantam, leaving the rest of his ships to take in
+provisions at Jacatra. In a consultation as to the best course to be
+taken with the fleet, it was resolved to go to the coast of Coromandel,
+which we were informed was a good country for recovering the health of
+our men, and abounding in rice, wheat, butter, and other, provisions,
+which could not be procured here for any money.
+
+
+§3. _Departure for Coromandel, with Occurrences there, and the Death of
+Sir Thomas Dale,--Capture of English Ships by the Dutch; and Occurrences
+at Tecoo_.
+
+On Monday the 19th of April, 1619, all our ships being together in
+Bantam roads, with three Chinese junks riding among us, it was resolved
+in council to execute the commission given us by the Honourable Company,
+by appropriating to them the goods in these junks, in payment of former
+debts due by the Chinese. Next day _Kewee_ came aboard to the president,
+accompanied by the three _nockhadas_, or captains of the junks, to know
+his intentions. He gave him the following answer:--If the young king of
+Bantam would displace the pangran, who had treated us with so much
+injustice, he would then return on shore and _bichar_[266] with him, and
+restore the junks. The 28th, being ready to sail, intending to go for
+Morrogh to take in water and unload the junks, we descried a sail coming
+from the westwards round Palinbangan point, which turned out to be a
+Portuguese frigate, captured at Jasques, manned by twenty Englishmen,
+and sent by Captain Bonnar with advice to the president at Bantam. We
+learnt from these men that Sir Thomas Roe, the lord ambassador to the
+Mogul, was gone for England in the Ann Royal, having left the country
+with great honour and reputation to himself, and much advantage of the
+Honourable Company. Bodman, who was the cause of setting the Black Lion
+on fire, was hanged on the 22d of May, and that same night we set sail.
+
+[Footnote 266: This unexplained term probably means to make peace.--E.]
+
+The 30th May, Sir Thomas Roe stood in with his fleet under the island,
+while we held on our course for Masulipatam, having the Unicorn, Gift,
+and Bee in our company. The 30th June we anchored in nine fathoms, about
+two leagues from the coast of Coromandel, where we rode four days,
+being hardly able to visit each other in all that time, owing to W.S.W.
+winds, and a continual current setting to E.N.E. The surf also broke so
+lofty on the beach, that we durst not attempt landing with any of our
+boats. We were at length able to communicate together, when Mr Roberts,
+the master of the Unicorn, gave us notice of a bay on this coast in the
+latitude of 17° N. about five leagues to the eastwards of Nassapore,
+[Narsipore] where there was good riding during the westerly monsoon.
+This was exactly what I wanted, having no hope to recover Masulipatam
+against wind and current. We accordingly set sail on the 4th, in the
+morning, and stood to the eastwards, the coast trending W.S.W. and
+E.N.E. And having run about nine leagues by estimation, with the wind
+and current, we found the land to turn away N. and N. by W.[267] giving
+me hopes of a good road. At this point of land there cometh put a great
+river,[268] by the stream of which there has been raised a reef or
+shoal, extending half a mile into the sea from the point, and
+occasioning a smoother road. Bringing that sand to bear S.S.W. there is
+good and safe anchorage in six and a half fathoms, two miles from the
+land. Two leagues north from this point, which, for distinction, I name
+Cape Comfort, there issues forth another branch of the same river, by
+which the headland is made an island, and off the mouth of this river
+there is likewise a long spit of sand, which is dry at low water.
+
+[Footnote 267: Obviously rounding Cape Godawery, in lat. 16° 83' N.]
+
+[Footnote 268: One of the two main branches forming the Delta of the
+Godawery.--E.]
+
+The 4th of July I sent the boat belonging to the Unicorn into the second
+branch of the river, which we called Mullet Sound, to see if they could
+discover any town where a guide might be procured, to conduct Robert
+Pickering and William Clarke to Masulipatam, by whom we proposed sending
+a letter to Mr Methwould. Our boat returned on the morning of the 6th,
+reporting that a guide had been procured at a little village three
+leagues up the river. They likewise brought aboard twenty hens, which
+they had bought for two shillings. The 8th, the barge returned from
+Captain Ball with seventy-one sheep and goats, and thirty-nine hens,
+having left Captain Ball and others at a town called _Narsapela_, six
+leagues up in the country. The 12th, Mr Methwould came from Masulipatam
+in one of the country boats, and brought with him twenty hogs, two large
+jars of arrack, six goats, and two baskets of bread. He also brought us
+news of a Dutch ship richly laden, then in the port of Masulipatam, and
+ready to depart for Holland.
+
+In the evening of the 26th, I went in the barge to seek out some bar or
+creek by which we might reach Coringa, the principal town in these parts
+near the sea side. That same night, I got over the bar of Coringa, which
+place I came to about two miles up the river, and was well received by
+the principal persons of the place, who were very ready to trade with
+us, and sent notice that same night of my arrival to the governor of
+Vingeron. Next morning, having rowed about three miles up the main
+river, and two miles up a little creek, we had sight of Vingeron, about
+twelve miles off.[269] I now landed, and walked towards Vingeron; but,
+before I reached it, the governor sent his horse for me, with all the
+music the place afforded; and among these instruments there were two
+great brass horns instead of trumpets. The governor received me very
+kindly, but more kindly my present, which consisted of two pieces of
+China velvet, and six pieces of China taffeta. Our compliments ended. I
+took leave of him, when he caused me to be conveyed in his own palanquin
+to a house near at hand, which he had appointed for my lodging.
+
+[Footnote 269: The town of Rajahmundry exactly answers to these
+circumstances, in reference to Coringa, and is in fact the head town of
+the province in which Coringa is situated.--E.]
+
+I returned on board the James on the 1st of August, when I learnt, to my
+sorrow, that the shallop belonging to the Unicorn had been cast away
+three days before, near Ponara, on which occasion Mr Harris was drowned,
+together with two of the coxwain's crew, and a black; Captain Spaulding,
+Mr Yard, and others, escaping with much difficulty. In the morning of
+the 2d, the governor of Vingeron came aboard to see our ship, expecting
+some great present; on which occasion I gave him a piece of China
+damask, and four pieces of taffeta, which gave him more delight than the
+sight of a thousand ships, and he departed when he found he got nothing
+more by begging. The 23d I caused all the men to come on board,
+intending to proceed for Masulipatam, and this evening we got on board
+150 goats, to serve us for fresh provisions at sea. The 24th there
+arrived a ballegat from Narsepore, bringing twenty-six candees of
+garavances, a candee of butter, and an hundred gallons of arrack.[270] I
+also, had letters from Masulipatam, announcing the melancholy news that
+Sir Thomas Dale had died at that place on the 9th of August.
+
+[Footnote 270: Though not so expressed, these seem to have been intended
+for the use of the English ships.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 6th September, having rode most part of the
+preceding night in nineteen fathoms, about three leagues S.S.E. from the
+bar of Narispore, and having the wind at N.W. we again set sail toward
+Masulipatam,[271] and anchored at night four leagues to the eastward of
+that place. Off the river of Narsipore we found the current to set by
+day to the S.S.E. and N.N.E. in the night, at the rate of half a league
+an hour. In the morning of the 7th we could see the English ships in the
+road of Masulipatam, in which road we came to anchor in the evening,
+finding here the Moon, Clove, Globe, and Advice, which last being found
+unserviceable, was here cast off, and her stores and provisions put on
+board the Moon and Clove. Next day, Mr Spaulding, Mr Ball, and Mr
+Methwould came aboard the James, giving me a report of all matters that
+had passed in my absence, as also a state of the Company's business. I
+accompanied them ashore in the afternoon, that we might the better
+consult together how to proceed in the important concerns committed to
+our charge. The first thing proposed was the union of both fleets, which
+was thought adviseable, and I was made choice of as admiral and chief
+commander of the whole ships and men thus united, according to the
+direction of the Honourable Company.
+
+[Footnote 271: The true name of this place is Mutchelipatnam; in Purchas
+it is called Messulapitan and Masulpatam.--E.]
+
+The 18th of October, a ship belonging to Masulipatam arrived from Mokha,
+by which we had news of the Lion being at Mokha, having a small frigate
+or bark in her company. The same day the Bee arrived from
+Narsipore-pete, with provisions for the fleet. The 19th, the Dragon's
+Claw came from Narsipore-pete[272] almost laden with rice and
+paddy.[273] On Thursday the 9th December, Mr Ball, Mr Methwould, and the
+other merchants who were to remain in the country, went ashore in the
+afternoon. In the morning of Friday the 10th, we left the road of
+Masulipatam, and anchored in the afternoon off the headland, to wait for
+the Pepper-corn, which came to us in the evening. By my estimation, the
+difference of longitude between the island of Engano and Masulipatam is
+19° 30' of a great circle; and, although this does not give the true
+longitude in these parts near the equator, as custom has so called it, I
+do, that I may not savour of innovation.
+
+[Footnote 272: This may designate the road of Narsipore; but petah
+usually signifies in India the suburb or town connected with a
+fortress.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 273: Paddy is rice in its natural state as it comes from the
+plant on which it grows; rice is paddy deprived by art of its coarse
+husk.--E.]
+
+Next morning, very early, we descried the land of Sumatra, the hill of
+Passaman bearing E.N.E 1/2 N. twelve leagues distant,[274] and the high
+land of Priaman E. 1/2 S. fourteen leagues off. We here met with two
+shoals, within a mile of each other, E. and W. The Gift came over the
+eastermost, and had not less than four and a half fathoms. I sent the
+Claw over the other, on which were four fathoms where she first crossed,
+but only two fathoms in returning, a little more to the northward. About
+nine this morning the wind came to the S.E. and so continued till three
+in the afternoon, by which time we had got to the southward of all the
+shoals; and so, with little wind, we spent the night between these
+shoals and the island of Battoo, [Batoa.] In this situation, a sagging
+current bore us to the northwards near the shoals, which, if it had set
+S.E. as formerly experienced, it ought to have carried us near to Tecoo.
+
+[Footnote 274: Purchas must here have omitted a part of the text,
+particularly the series of dates between Masulipatam and Passaman in
+Sumatra. As the text now stands, it would seem as if they had gone from
+Masulipatam to the coast of Sumatra, a run of about 1600 miles, in one
+night, an utter impossibility. But from the context, instead of the 11th
+December, 1619, the day after leaving Masulipatam, it would appear they
+reached the coast of Sumatra on the 23d January, 1620, giving forty-four
+days for the run across the bay of Bengal.--E.]
+
+The 24th, in the evening, we had sight of the isles of Tecoo, and came
+to anchor about eight o'clock, in forty-four fathoms, these isles
+bearing E. by N. seven leagues off. The 25th, with the first of the
+tide, we again weighed and steered for Tecoo; and, as we drew near, we
+espied three sail standing to the northwards, which came to anchor near
+the coast that night, while we anchored with our whole fleet about a
+league without them. Next morning they weighed anchor and joined us,
+when we found them to be the Palsgrave, Elizabeth, and Hope. From them
+we had the doleful news of the Dragon, Bear, Expedition, and Rose,
+having been taken by six Dutch ships, while at anchor, within the isles
+of Tecoo; as also that the Star had been taken by the Dutch in the
+straits of Sunda. They also said that the Hollanders had sent four great
+ships, doubly manned, in quest of the Samson and Hound, and that they
+were exceedingly doubtful as to the safety of these ships. Thus the
+English ships now taken by the Hollanders were almost equal in number to
+our three fleets now joined in one under my command.
+
+On Monday the 31st January, 1620, we held a consultation aboard the
+James Royal as to our future proceedings, when it was unanimously agreed
+to go to Acheen, in hopes to meet our ships from Surat, that we might
+keep our force together, according to the instructions of the Honourable
+Company. Our chief reasons for this proceeding were the want of rice and
+other provisions, which could not at this time be had at Bantam;
+secondly, the strong naval force of the Hollanders, as we did not think
+it prudent to risk the entire property now belonging to the Company in
+India upon such desperate terms, as the Dutch had four ships for every
+one of ours; and, lastly, which was an imperious necessity, that we
+might careen three of our ships, the James, the Gift, and the Unicorn,
+which could not be much longer deferred without imminent hazard. For all
+these reasons, we resolved to proceed for Japan, where, as we were given
+to understand, all things necessary for careening our ships, and
+abundance of provisions for our relief, were to be had.
+
+The 11th, Mr Mills arrived in the Bee from Priaman, with 300 sacks of
+very good rice, and eleven hogsheads of oil, giving us great
+encouragement to send there again. The 12th, the Claw was sent off for
+Pedang and Cuttatinga, to procure rice and other provisions; and, on the
+15th, the Bee was sent back to Priaman for more rice and oil. The 19th
+the Claw returned with thirty-four bags of rice, 16,000 cocoa-nuts, and
+ten goats; and the same night the Bee came back with 980 sacks of rice,
+procured with much difficulty by Mr Mills, merchant of the Elizabeth.
+
+The 3d March we departed from the road of Tecoo, intending first to
+touch at _Mintaon_, on purpose to dispatch the Bee for England, and
+thence to go for Acheen, in hopes of meeting the Charles and the Ruby
+from Surat. The 30th March we all anchored in the bay of Samanca, about
+a mile from shore, where we took in wood, water, and other necessaries.
+Next day we sent to recall the Bee from Balembeen. The 1st April we sent
+the shallop belonging to the Unicorn for Anniar, to enquire concerning
+the Dutch force, and how the pangran stood affected towards us.[275] At
+eleven this night, twenty-two of our men ran away with our barge. Next
+morning the shallop returned from Anniar, and brought news that there
+were fifteen sail of Dutch ships at Bantam and Jacatra, upon which we
+resolved to proceed to Bantam, to treat with the pangram, hoping that
+the Dutch _might not venture to attack us_. The Bee arrived in the
+afternoon from Ballambeen, [Palimbangan.] The 6th we set sail for
+Bantam, and on the 7th, between Crackastaw and Becee, we met a proa with
+some of our people coming from Anniar.
+
+[Footnote 275: The intended voyage to Acheen seems to hate been laid
+aside; perhaps the monsoon had become adverse, and forced them to the
+S.E. towards Bantam.--E.]
+
+
+§4. _News of Peace between the English and Dutch_.
+
+At four in the morning of Saturday the 8th April, 1620, we met the Bull,
+newly come from England, bringing the joyful news of peace having been
+concluded between us and the Dutch. She was accompanied by a small ship,
+called the Flying Hart, with letters of advice for us, or any other of
+the English ships, giving notice of the agreement and union that had
+taken place between the two Honourable East India Companies of England
+and Holland. We came to anchor with all our fleet in the afternoon, near
+the point of Palimbangan. In the morning of the 11th, we descried the
+Dutch fleet coming from Jacatra to meet us, and to congratulate with us
+on the joyful intelligence of peace. General Coen was there in person,
+and as soon as he came to anchor, the Holland fleet and ours began to
+salute each other with peals of ordnance, to communicate the
+intelligence to the natives, and to express our own joy of the happy
+news of peace.
+
+The 12th, we came altogether into Bantam roads, the Dutch fleet
+consisting of fifteen sail, besides two others of their nation which we
+found already in the roads, and ours of twelve sail. This day, Mr
+Janson, commander of the Dutch fleet, accompanied by their fiscal, and
+divers others, came to visit me, and invited Mr Brockendon, Mr Spalding,
+and myself on board the Dutch admiral's ship, where we conferred with
+General Coen concerning our future conjunct arrangements. After we had
+compared the articles and letters, the Dutch general agreed that we
+should jointly proceed in conformity with the instructions we had
+received from our Honourable Company; but he declined publishing the
+articles till the arrival of some ship from Holland, with the articles
+and instructions from their Company. On the 14th, in the morning, by
+mutual concert between us and the Hollanders, we sent Mr Beaumont and
+Philip Baduge on, shore, with one Dutch merchant, to communicate the
+news of our peace and agreement to the pangran, and to inform him, as we
+were now united, we only desired to have a reasonable composition with
+him, through which we might remain quietly in his country, enjoying a
+free trade on just and equitable conditions, as in other parts of India.
+But the pangran was so much dissatisfied with the news, that he would
+give no answer to their message, often times asking them why we had
+become friends with the Hollanders, so that they had to return without
+any answer. We sent the same message to him next day, but our messengers
+were not allowed to land.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"The differences and maritime warfare which took place between the Dutch
+and English East India Companies, of which some notice has been taken;
+and the peace and union which are announced, as having been communicated
+to their respective commanders at this time, would lead to historical
+discussions and deductions, which do not properly belong to the object
+of a Collection of Voyages and Travels; but which, if altogether passed
+over, would leave much of the foregoing circumstances, and some that
+have to be noticed in the sequel, abrupt, isolated, and almost
+unintelligible. It has therefore been deemed proper to give a brief
+account of these differences, and of the singular so called _union_,
+which took place in consequence, extracted from the Annals of the East
+India Company, vol. I. p. 201, _et seq._[276]
+
+[Footnote 276: This addition to §4. of the present voyage, is made by
+the Editor; but almost entirely derived from the historiographer of the
+East India Company.--E.]
+
+"When the differences and aggressions which had occurred in the spice
+islands were reported in Europe, the English and Dutch Companies
+presented memorials and remonstrances to their respective governments,
+each complaining against the servants of the other, as guilty of
+unwarrantable aggressions. In Holland, calculating on the pacific
+character of King James, it was expected that the opposition to the
+projects of the English for participating in the trade of the spice
+islands, although of at least a tendency towards warlike aggression,
+would not lead to national hostilities, but might be discussed by means
+of remonstrances and negociation.
+
+"After long conferences between English and Dutch commissioners, for
+settling the disputes between the two Companies, a treaty was concluded
+at London on the 17th July, 1619; by which, after specifying an amnesty
+for all past excesses, and a mutual restitution of ships and property,
+the trade of the two nations in the East was declared to be free;--That
+the pepper trade at Java should be equally divided;--That the English
+should have a free trade at Pullicat, on paying half the expences of the
+garrison;--That the English were to enjoy one third of the export and
+import trade, at the Molucca and Banda islands, commonly called the
+spice islands; commissioners to be appointed for regulating the trade,
+and the charges of the garrisons, under their inspection, to be defrayed
+in that proportion by the two Companies;--That each Company should
+furnish ten ships of war for the common defence; which ships were not to
+be employed to bring cargoes to Europe, but only in the carrying trade,
+between one port and another in the East Indies.--The whole proceedings
+arising out of this treaty, were to be under the regulation of a
+_Council of Defence_, composed of four members appointed by each
+Company, who were to reside in India; and this treaty was to subsist in
+force for twenty years.
+
+"It would lead far beyond any due bounds that could be afforded in this
+work, to follow out this compact, singularly weak on the part of King
+James, and assuredly either contrived by his boasted _king craft_, or
+devised by some wily Dutch politician, who was acquainted with his
+majesty's wonderful sagacity. This union and the council of defence,
+turned out a most fruitful source of advantage to the Dutch, who had
+completely duped the king and government of England, and totally
+expelled the English Company from any share whatever in the trade of the
+spice islands; after contriving to make them pay more than two thirds of
+the expence of fortifications and garrisons, instead of one third, all
+of which were effectually converted to their injury and exclusion. In
+the sequel of these voyages, several instances will be found, completely
+illustrative of these positions; and from the year 1625, or thereabout,
+the Dutch enjoyed the entire profits of the spice trade, including the
+whole island of Java, till within these very few years; when, as
+subjects of Buonaparte, they have been driven from every foreign
+possession, and entirely excluded from all participation in the trade of
+the East."--E.
+
+§5. _Voyage of Captain Pring from Bantam, to Patania and Japan, and
+return to Jacatra_.[277]
+
+The 26th of April, 1620, we sailed from Bantam roads, with the James
+Royal and Unicorn in company, intending, by the grace of God, to go for
+Japan, there to careen and trim our ships. Mr Brockendon departed at the
+same time for Jacatra with six ships; proposing, about a month after our
+departure, to send five good English ships after us to Japan, that we
+might have the fittest season of the year to go from thence to the
+Manillas. The 27th, we took leave of this fleet, and steered towards the
+north, borrowing within half a league of the eastern point of
+Pulo-Tunda; and came to anchor in the evening about a league off the
+N.E. point of that island, in twenty-three fathoms upon ooze, waiting
+till the western stream of the tide began to return to the eastwards
+which was about ten at night, when we proceeded on our course.
+
+[Footnote 277: Purchas gives two relations of this voyage, one brief,
+"lest the longer one might interrupt the more delicate muses of some
+readers with sea-sickness, the other for those that are more studious of
+nautical knowledge." On the present occasion, we have preferred the more
+extended narrative, and have therefore united both accounts as given by
+Purchas, being the remainder of §4. joined to the whole of §5. giving
+one instance of minute nautical remarks of our earlier navigators.--E.]
+
+The 28th at night, we anchored in 18 f. on ooze, Pulo Antekero bearing
+N.E. three leagues off. Pulo Antekero bears N.N.E. 1/2 E. from Pulo
+Tunda, about eight leagues distant. The depth of water between the two
+islands, runs-from 16 f. to 26, and so to 22, 20, 18, 16, 14, and 12 f.
+all ooze. Pulo Antekero is westernmost of the islands which extend in a
+row from the bay of Jacatra, [or Batavia,] to the westward. Continuing
+our course, we anchored, in the evening of the 29th, in 15 f, Pulo Kero
+bearing N. by E. 1/2 E. 2-1/2 leagues off. Pulo Kero bears N.N.E. nearly
+from Antekero, six leagues off. After passing halfway between these
+islands we had 20, 18, 16, 14, 12 f. on ooze. At noon on the 30th we
+had Pulo Kero six leagues off, S. 1/2 E. our depth continuing 13,12,11
+f. all ooze.
+
+At noon on the 1st May, Pulo Kero bore S. 1/2 W nine leagues, and the
+depth 12 f. being just able to see that island from our top-mast head.
+By observation of the sun, we were then in lat. 4° 45' S. From noon till
+five p.m. our course was N.N.E. four leagues. We then anchored in 11 f.
+on ooze, having Pulo Kero by estimation thirteen league S by W. This
+night at nine, being still at anchor in the same place, I made the ship,
+by observation of the Crozies, in lat. 4° 40' S. allowing 29° for the
+complement of declination. We set sail at four a.m. of the 2d, and by
+noon had run about six leagues N.N.E. the depths continuing as before,
+13, 12, 11 f. By noon of the 3d our course was S. by E. five leagues,
+the soundings as before, all the ground from Bantam roads hitherto being
+ooze. From Bantam for the first two days, we had land and sea breezes;
+afterwards, till the afternoon of the 2d, the wind was constant between
+E. and S.E. when the wind came northerly, and so continued till the 3d
+at noon. From Pulo Paniang to Pulo Antekero, the current set to the
+westwards, somewhat strong; but from thence we found the currents more
+gentle, and changing into every direction in the course of the
+twenty-four hours.
+
+Our course from noon of the 3d till noon of the 4th was N.N.E. eleven
+leagues, the depths from 12 to 10-1/2 f. From noon this day till seven
+at night, we made 5-1/2 leagues N. and then anchored in 9-1/2 f. We
+weighed in the morning of the 5th. having but little wind and that
+variable, till half an hour after six, when it sprung up fresh at S.W.
+From four to nine a.m. we made three leagues N.E. 1/2 E. and from nine
+till noon only half a league N.W. by N. This day at noon we were in lat.
+3° 30' S. when we descried a small island N.N.E. 1/2 E. four leagues
+off, which appeared at first like a great tree rising out of the see.
+From noon till six p.m. our course was five leagues N.W. We here saw two
+or three hummocks like islands, N. by W. seven leagues off. From thence
+till three a.m. of the 6th, we sailed W. six leagues. At six in the
+evening of the 5th we had 9 f. which increased as we stood westwards in
+the night, to 10, 11, and l2 f. and afterwards decreased to 8 f. where
+we came to anchor. The stream by night set S.E. and by day N.W. We
+weighed again at six a.m. of the 6th, and steered W.N.W. 1-1/2 league,
+when we had sight of many hummocks rising like so many islands, but
+which at length we perceived to be all one land. Coming now into 6-1/2
+f. we altered our course to the N.E. making our course N.N.E. till noon,
+about 2-1/2 leagues; at which time, by an observation of the sun, we
+were in lat. 3° 20' S. We were now in 8 f. and found the current to set
+N.W. by W. About noon of this day, a junk belonging to Johor came up
+with us, which had been at Cheribon in Java, and was returning to Johor.
+The afternoon, we steered in with the eastern part of the hummocky land
+of Banka, making our course N.N.E. 1/2 N. in which we came again to 8 f.
+afterwards increasing regularly to 24 f. and then decreasing again to a
+quarter less 7 f. when we came to anchor against the E. point of that
+land, which bore from us N.N.E. 1/3 N. four leagues off.
+
+We weighed in the morning of the 7th, and stood in nearer the point, in
+hopes of being able to pass through between that island and one which
+lay three leagues to the E. But in our way, we found the soundings,
+after increasing from 7 to 17 f. to decrease again to 6 and to one-half
+less 4 f. and about two miles off the point in the fair way we had only
+six feet water in the fair way, or mid-channel. To the eastwards, there
+appeared many islands, and by the report of the people in the junk, the
+sea is full of islands between the S.E. end of Banka and the island of
+Borneo. The S.E. end of Banka now bore N.N.E. 1/2 N. about two leagues
+off; and the land from this point to the entrance of the straits of
+Banka, lay W. by S. the straits being thirteen leagues from us. Where we
+lay at anchor, the before-mentioned point bearing N. by E. 1/2 E. 2-1/2
+leagues off, we had an observation of the sun, giving the latitude of
+the ship 3° 8' S. Having little hope of finding a passage between Banka
+and Borneo among these islands, by reason of the fearful shoalings we
+had already met with, we resolved on the 8th to go through the straits
+between the island of Banka and Sumatra, called the Straits of Banka;
+wherefore we set sail, retracing as nearly as we could the course by
+which we came into the present shoal water; in which course we found
+still more dangerous shoalings than in our in-coming. After we had got
+about eight leagues off, S.S.W. from the before-mentioned point of
+Banka, we steered S.W. by W. the current setting N.W. which made our
+course nearest W. by S. In this course we proceeded five leagues, and
+anchored in 8 f. on ooze, about nine at night.
+
+In the morning of the 9th, we descried Lucepara, N.N.W. seven leagues
+off, and steered towards it, till we had it N. two leagues. In this
+course we passed over a spit, where we had only 4-1/2 f. and 4-3/4. But
+on nearing Lucepara, we had 5-1/4 f. all ooze. We then steered N.W. by
+N. till Lucepara was N.E. of us, having 5 f. and the same ground. We
+then, went W.N.W. having always ooze, till we were within two leagues of
+the Sumatra shore in 6 f. The isle of Lucepara bore then E.S.E. 3-1/2
+leagues off; and a hill on Banka with a deep swamp, N. by W. being about
+a sail's breadth open of the point of Sumatra, which bore N. by W. 1/2
+W. from us, about three leagues off. We steered thence away with the
+said point N. by W. Having 6-1/2 and 7 f. soft ground, till we came
+within a league of the point, where edging too near we had but 5-1/2,
+and only 4-1/2 in the boat hard by us: But, if we had kept a little
+farther from the point, we might have gone in 7, 8, 9, and 10 f. all
+through the strait, borrowing carefully with the lead upon the Sumatra
+shore; whereas by keeping nearer to Banka than Sumatra, the soundings
+are very variable, sometimes deep, and sometimes shallow, and mostly
+foul ground. On the Sumatra shore, even if coming into shoal water, the
+ground is mostly soft ooze, and the soundings far more regular and
+certain.
+
+In the evening of the 12th May, having brought the N.W. point of Banka
+to bear N.E. we opened two smooth hills with a little hummock between
+them; one of these hills being the northermost land of Banka, and
+bearing N.E. nine leagues, from the N.W. point of that island. This
+night we steered N.N.E. to get through the channel between Lingan and
+the N. end of Banka, having 23, 22, 20, 18, and 16 f. all ooze, till we
+came near the entrance, and afterwards 15, 14, 13 f. in going through
+the passage. Lingan rises at first in three islands, the northermost
+being larger than both the other two, being near two leagues long and
+full of hummocks. Among these three islands there are certain fragments
+of isles intermixed, like so many hay-cocks, which is a good mark
+whereby to know these islands. From the smooth hill which is the north
+end of Banka, to the south-westermost isle of Lingan, it is N. by W. ten
+leagues. From the middle of the largest isle of Lingan, which is the
+north-eastermost, there is another smooth island nine leagues off,
+E.N.E. 1/2 N. From that there is another flat island, and off the north
+point of the round smooth island, there is a little fragment like a
+rock. In the fair way between this island and Lingan, there are 14 and
+13 f. the course being midway between, and to the N. to pass along by
+the E. side of Bintang. This day at noon, being the 12th May, our
+latitude was 1° S.[278] the greatest isle of the Lingan group being S.W.
+from us five leagues, whence we estimated its latitude to be 1° 10'
+nearly.
+
+[Footnote 278: This is an evident error, as the northern side of the
+largest island of the Lingan group is exactly on the equator, and
+Bintam, or Bintang, is in lat. 1° N.--E.]
+
+At noon of the 14th, having made way twenty-four leagues to the
+northward, by aid of the wind and a current setting to the north, we had
+sight of the high land of Bintang, rising with two hills and a deep
+swamp or hollow between, and, as we judged, twelve leagues from us. At
+this time, likewise, we had sight of three or four hummocks, S.W. by W.
+eight leagues off, which seemed separate islands. We had here 20 f. our
+soundings from Lingan being 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, and 20 f. From noon of
+the 14th till noon of the 15th, we made twenty-seven leagues N. 1/3 W.
+our soundings in these twenty-four hours being 21, 22, 23, and 24 f.
+From noon till three p.m. of the 15th we made 3 1/2 leagues, and then
+had sight of Pulo Laor, N.W. 1/2 N. about twelve leagues off, having
+then 27 f. the ground resembling fuller's earth. At night, Pulo Laor
+being N.W. by W. eight leagues off, we had 39 f. on ooze. From noon of
+the 15th till eight a.m. of the 16th, we made our course N.N.W. 1/2 W.
+fifteen leagues. At night of the 16th, Pulo Laor bore S.W. by S. five
+leagues; the body of the island of Hermano de Layo W.S.W. 1/2 W. seven
+leagues; and the S. end of Pulo Timon W. 1/2 N. ten leagues, its N.E.
+end being W.N.W. 1/2 W. ten leagues. We anchored this evening within
+four leagues of the N. point of Pulo Timon, in 24 f. _streamy_ ground,
+that point bearing W. by S. 1/2 S. In the evening I sent my boat round
+the point, where they observed a town, with a junk riding close by the
+shore, and several proas fishing. One of these came to enquire what
+nation our people were of, and told them there was good fresh water at
+the town, with plenty of buffaloes, goats, and poultry.
+
+In the morning of the 17th, we sent the Unicorn's longboat along with
+ours to the town, whence they came back in the evening with four butts
+of water each, not willing to fill more, as it was brackish. They found
+at the watering-place a junk belonging to Johor, fitted out for war,
+having twenty men armed with fire-arms, besides lances and javelins.
+They reported that they had taken a Chinese junk, which they had sold on
+the coast of Johor; the nokhada sending me word, that he would assist me
+against the Portuguese at the hazard of his life. In the bay next to the
+southwards of Pulo Timon, we found excellent fresh water, but could not
+conveniently take it in by means of our long-boat, which drew five feet
+water when loaded. Having thus spent the day to little purpose, we set
+sail at the beginning of the night, directing our course for Patane,
+and steering N. all night with little wind.
+
+At noon of the 18th, we were in the latitude of 3° 40' N. At four p.m.
+we had sight of Pulo Tingoran, N.N.W. fifteen leagues off. At night we
+passed by Tingoran, about six leagues to the eastwards, having 28, 30,
+and 32 f. on soft ground. At six a.m. of the 19th, Tigoran bore W.S.W.
+seven leagues from us, when we had thirty-six f. soft ground. At noon of
+this day we were in lat. 5° 30' N. Tingoran bearing S. 1/3 E. fourteen
+leagues off, by which we estimated the latitude of that island to be 4°
+50 N. We had likewise, at noon, the south isle of Pulo Rowdon, [Ridang,]
+N.W. by W. seven leagues off. The same night at eight, I observed the
+croziers, making the latitude of the ship 5° 48' N. At this time, the
+largest of the Ridang isles, which is the eastermost, bore from us due
+W. four leagues distant. From eight this night, till noon of the 20th,
+our course was nearly N.W. by W. nine leagues, our sounding being from
+28 to 17 f. The northermost of the Pulo Ridang isles was then S. 1/3 E.
+four leagues off, being a round hummock, much like Pomo in the gulf of
+Venice, but somewhat higher and more complete. These isles consist of
+good high land, having fair depth all along their eastern side to
+seawards, and I am told have a free and safe channel between them and
+the main land. There are thirteen or fourteen islands in this group,
+great and small.
+
+From noon of the 20th till eight in the morning of the 21st, our course
+was W.N.W. nine leagues. We saw two hills by the water-side, bearing W.
+and five leagues off, resembling two great tortoises. From Pulo Tingoran
+all the way to Patani, the land up the country is very high, while that
+just within the coast is low, with a sandy beach. This is the case for
+at least twenty leagues south of Patani, but how much farther I know
+not. In the afternoon of the 20th, while standing towards the two hills
+just mentioned as resembling tortoises, we came from 17 into 14 and 13
+f. with hard ground; and as we drew nearer these hills, the depth again
+increased to 19 f. on ooze, and then shoaled again to 18 and 17 f. on
+ooze.
+
+The 21st of May, being Sunday, from eight a.m. to seven p.m. our course
+was N.W. 3/4 W. thirteen leagues, keeping mostly within four leagues of
+the low sandy shore, the depth all the way being 15, 14, and 13 f. We
+then anchored in 13-3/4 f. streamy ground, the northermost point in
+sight, falling down from a reasonably high land at the far end of the
+low land, bore from us W.N.W. 1/2 N. near 3-1/2 leagues off. S.E. by S.
+from this point, six leagues off, there is a rock, as high above water
+as the hull of a small ship, which we passed about 1-1/2 league on its
+E. side, finding no alteration in the soundings. This point I named the
+Gurnet's Head. From this point, the land trends W.N.W. and W. by N. all
+the way to the entrance into Patani roads, being all low land from the
+Gurnet's Head to the point of the road, this point being the lowest of
+all. The distance from the Gurnet's Head to that low point is six
+leagues, all the way of fair depth till coming near the low point of the
+road, to which a good birth must be given, as there lies a shoal from it
+half-way over to the western shore, wherefore it must not be approached
+too near, till you find in the first place the shoaling of the western
+shore, which is the softest ground. From the low point, in going across
+the bay to the western shore there are only from 5 f. to 4 1/2 when in
+the road; and then the low point bears from the anchorage, E.N.E. 1/3 E.
+the highest mountains in the western side of the bay bearing S.S.W. 1/3
+W.
+
+We anchored in the road of Patani on Thursday the 25th of May, when we
+found the Sampson and a Dutch pinnace there at anchor. I went ashore the
+day before to the English factory, where I found Mr Adam Denton and Mr
+Richard Welding, lately come from Jambee in Sumatra in a proa, with
+several of the Sampson's people, who were all rejoiced to see our ships
+coming into the port. On getting to the English house, I told Mr Denton
+that my chief purpose for coming here was for arrack and fresh victuals,
+of which we were in great need, upon which he gave immediate orders to
+procure every thing we needed, so that in six days we were supplied with
+sixteen butts of arrack and arrack-apee; three butts of which last we
+had from the Dutch, for which courtesy we were chiefly obliged by their
+anxiety to have us away. We had also beeves, goats, and poultry, in
+abundance. We also bought here _dammar_ and oil, for the purpose of
+repairing our ships, as I understood these things were dear at Japan. I
+here found a small frigate or country bark, which had been bought by the
+English; and as she was of no great use there, it was agreed that she,
+with most of the English sailors, should attend upon us to Japan.
+
+We departed from Patani on the 31st May; and at seven a.m. of the 1st
+June, we saw a small rock, just above water, being very dangerous for
+ships bound from Patani for the point of Camboja. When this rock bore
+N.N.E. 1/2 E. at the distance of a league, the high land over Gurnet
+Head was S.S.W. 1/4 W. eighteen leagues off; and by computation, the low
+point of Patani road was then eighteen leagues off, W.S.W. 1/2 S. After
+getting out of Patani road into 7 f. the depth increased regularly to 9,
+10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, and 24 f. till we got sight of the rock; and
+two leagues from it we had 25 f. on ooze, as was the ground all the way
+over from Patani. This day at noon, we found the latitude of the ship to
+be 7° 20' N. the rock bearing W. about four leagues off.
+
+From that time till the 3d, at noon, our course was E. 1/2 N. forty-five
+leagues, when we had sight of Pulo Hube, bearing E.N.E. 1/2 N. eight
+leagues off, having 14 f. on ooze, as we constantly had for the last
+forty-eight hours, the sounding being from 27 to 36 f. and thence
+decreasing again to 14 f. Pulo Hube rises at first as one round hill,
+and on coming nearer some high land is seen rising in hummocks, but not
+above two-thirds so high as the round hill, being all one land with it.
+Then another and smaller island is seen to rise, nearly of the same
+height with the hummocks, and close to the larger island. At the east
+end of this lesser round island, there are two little isles very near,
+and a mile east of them there is a long rock like the hull of a galley.
+This night we anchored in 13 1/2 f. on ooze, about three leagues from
+the largest and highest isle. In the morning of the 4th we weighed, and
+stood E. by S. with little wind. At six p.m. we had the body of Pulo
+Hube W. by N. four leagues off. From thence we steered E. by S. and E.
+till six next morning, but were so opposed by the current, that we made
+our course to the northward of east. From six a.m. of the 5th till six
+p.m. we ran fifteen leagues in the before-mentioned course, when we saw
+a very small round isle about four leagues to the southward, having a
+long flat rock S. from it about a mile, a good height above water. From
+Pulo Hube till three leagues from this island, our soundings were 13,
+14, 15 f. and then 15, 14, 13 f. again, all ooze. When within two
+leagues of this small island, we had 13 f. on sand.
+
+Here we descried Pulo Condor, its N. end bearing E. by N. from this
+small island about seven leagues off. This day at noon, we made our
+latitude 8° 42' N. the highest land on Pulo Condor bearing from us E.
+six leagues off. From Patani till we were in sight of Pulo Condor, the
+wind was mostly S.S.W. This day at noon, we steered away N.E. then N.E.
+by N. and in the night N.N.E. so that we made our course on the whole,
+till next day at noon, N.E. by N. about twenty-four leagues, the depths
+being 13 and 14 f. on ooze. At noon of the 6th, we had sight of two
+hummocks on the coast of Camboja, bearing N. by E. nine leagues off,
+with low land to the westwards. From Pulo Condor till we had sight of
+this coast, the current set E. by N. At this time we had 12 f. on
+streamy ground. The 7th at noon, we were in lat. 10° 42' N. having run
+from the former noon twenty-five leagues N.E. 1/2 N. and found that the
+current had carried us ten leagues to the N. of our computation. Our
+depths were in these twenty-four hours, from 12, to 16, 20, and 24 f.
+and then back to 20, 18, 16, 14, on sandy ground.
+
+From the before-mentioned two hummocks, as we coasted along, about eight
+leagues from the land, sometimes more, and sometimes less, we saw high
+land all the way in the inland country, and a smooth land in most places
+by the sea side, about the height of the Lizard, with many plots upon it
+resembling white sand, as well as the sea side. The first of these white
+spots was on a point ten leagues W. of Cape Cessier, which we at first
+thought had been a town with fair white houses and white walls. This
+day, at noon, being the 7th, when in the lat. of 10° 48' N. that Cape
+bore from us about six leagues W.N.W. 1/2 W. At noon of the 8th, we were
+in lat. 11° 30' N. having gone twenty leagues N.E. 1/2 N. from noon of
+the 7th. From the 8th, till noon of the 9th, we steered along shore
+N.N.E. sixteen leagues, N. by E. six leagues, N. six leagues, and N. by
+W. nine leagues, making our course in all N. by E. 1/3 E. thirty-six
+leagues. We now had Cape Varella[279] W.S.W. eight leagues off, and were
+in the lat. of 13° 13' N. This cape is called Jentam by the Chinese,
+signifying a chimney in their language, because it has a sharp hummock
+on the top of the hill, much like a chimney on the top of a house. From
+noon of the 9th, till noon of the 10th, our course was N. two-thirds W.
+twenty-six leagues; our latitude on the 10th being 14° 30' N. when we
+were about ten leagues from the land.
+
+[Footnote 279: Cape Verelly is in lat. 12° 40' N. on the coast of Cochin
+China--E.]
+
+The 11th, at noon, we were in lat. 16° 10' N. having run, from the
+foregoing noon, thirty-three one-third leagues due N. Next noon, the
+12th, we had made other twenty-six leagues, N.N.E. 1/2 N. and were in
+latitude 17° 40' N. the current having set us six leagues to the N. of
+our computation. This evening, at six, we descried the island of Aynam,
+[Hainan] its high land bearing N.W. by N. twelve leagues, and we had run
+from noon seven leagues N.E. From hence, till noon of the 13th, our
+course was N.E. by E. twenty-two leagues, and we were then in lat. 18°
+30' N. We this morning chased a Portuguese frigate, but she was so light
+that we could not get near her. The 14th, at noon, we were in 19° 35' N.
+our course having been these twenty-four hours N.E. twenty-six leagues,
+the current having carried us four leagues to the N. of our reckoning;
+and yet this day at noon, in seventy-three f. on ooze, our boats found
+no current at all. We here saw many ripplings, like the overfalls of
+some rapid tide, yet found none. At six this evening, we again anchored
+our boat in sixty-eight f. on oozy sand, and found a slight current to
+the southwards. By the 15th, at noon, we had ran seventeen leagues N.E.
+by N. and our latitude was 28° 30' N. the current having carried us
+seven leagues to the north of our reckoning. We had here forty-five f.
+sandy ooze. The 16th, at noon, in 21° 20' N. we had sight of three
+islands, the eastermost N.N.W. the westermost N.W. and the nearest land
+nine leagues off. We had here twenty-two f. on oosy sand, the wind being
+E.S.E. and very fresh; but, from Cape Verelly till now, the wind had
+always blown from S.S.E. to S.W. Next morning, at eight, we had
+twenty-eight f. on ooze, having run, from noon of the 16th, eleven
+leagues S.W. Finding the wind to increase, we thought it better to come
+here to anchor than to run back again.
+
+In the morning of the 18th June, the weather being somewhat fair, we
+endeavoured to weigh our anchor; but when it was right apeak, the cable
+gave way, though a new one, never before wetted, by which we lost our
+anchor. Just at this time the Unicorn fired a gun, on which I sent
+immediately to know what was amiss, and was informed she had sprung a
+great leak, by which all her men were tired out with bailing. I then
+sent thirty men to her aid, to ease her crew, till it might please God
+they should find the leak. This day we had the wind at S.E. and stood E.
+making our course N.E. till six p.m. when we again saw the former high
+island ten leagues from us, bearing N.N.E. one-third E. This evening our
+men returned from the Unicorn with the joyful news that the great leak
+was firmly stopped. From six p.m. till midnight, we made fourteen
+leagues N.E. when we had twenty f. in ooze. From that time, till five
+next morning, we stood to the southwards, making a S.W. course three and
+a half leagues.
+
+From five in the morning of the 19th, we cast about towards the land,
+with the wind at S.E. making a course N.E. and at six o'clock were
+within eight leagues of the before-mentioned high island, bearing from
+as N. by E. At eight this morning, Mr Roberts, the master of the
+Unicorn, came on board the James, to inform me that another great leak
+had broke out in that ship, and that it was necessary to seek out for
+some smooth place to ride in at anchor, to enable them to search out the
+leak, and fit their foremast better into the step. Upon this
+intelligence, I resolved to bear up under the lee of the great island,
+which bore now from us N. by E. in hope to find there a smooth anchorage
+for the purposes of the Unicorn. There were many more islands in sight,
+both to the eastwards and westwards of us, but that being the nearest,
+and the likeliest for our purpose, and only three leagues from us, we
+steered for it. The night approaching, and the wind becoming dull, we
+plied off and on till morning of the 20th, when the wind had come round
+so much to the northwards, that we could not fetch our intended place of
+anchorage. I went aboard the Unicorn this day to enquire into their
+intentions and situation, when I found them all willing to stand on our
+original course, as the wind was fair, and they were hopeful of being
+able to overcome their leak. I therefore sent all my Lascars on board
+the Unicorn, in aid of her crew, after which we stood on our course all
+that day till midnight, with a fair wind and favourable weather.
+
+Towards midnight of the 20th June, the wind increased so much, that we
+had to lay our ship a-try all night under her main-course. In the
+morning of the 21st, we saw the Unicorn a league and a half astern of
+us, having a foresail and spritsail out, which I afterwards perceived
+was for the purpose of floating her about towards the shore. I
+immediately caused our fore-courses to be made ready to float our ship
+about after the Unicorn, though we had little hope of being able to
+assist her in any thing, as the sea was become very rough. While our men
+were throwing loose the forecourse, there came so violent a gust, that
+they were obliged to furl it again, otherwise it had been blown away.
+After the gust was over, we set our foresail, and, to make her wear
+better round, we brailed up our main-course, part of it being blown out
+of the bolt rope before the men could furl it. After that was up, we put
+our helm hard a-weather, thinking the ship would come round, but all in
+vain, for our ship would not wear beyond two or three points, and then
+came to again. The sea was now so much grown that we durst not let fall
+our spritsail, and the wind so violent that we could not loosen our
+fore-topsail; and by this time the Unicorn had gone out of sight.[280]
+Finding we could not wear ship, we steered away as near as we could lie
+S. by E. till noon, having by that time made a course S. by E. thirteen
+leagues from the southermost island we had seen over night, which I
+called the Morocco Saddle, or Saddle island, because of a high hill
+having a deep swamp or hollow between two peaked tops. This Saddle
+island is in lat. 21° 45' N.[281] There are four or five small islands
+close to its western side, and three on its eastern side. Besides which,
+there are many other islands in different directions, some N.W. others
+W.N.W. and W. by N. the southermost of all the islands in sight bearing
+from Saddle island to the W. about fifteen leagues off.
+
+[Footnote 280: It will be seen in the sequel that she was lost on the
+coast of China, probably run on shore to save the men's lives from the
+effects of the increasing leak.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 281: The indicated latitude leads to one of the numerous
+islands on the coast of China, at the month of the bay of Canton, about
+the longitude of 113° E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+This afternoon our ship became very leaky, having suddenly four and a
+half feet water in the hold, which kept both pumps going a long while
+before we could free her. Towards evening, it pleased God that we
+discovered three or four great leaks between wind and water; and after
+our carpenters had stopped them, we had great comfort, as we could then
+let the pumps stop half an hour, and afterwards free the ship in a
+quarter of an hour. From this day, the 21st, at noon, till noon of the
+22d, we made five leagues S.S.W. with a pair of courses, and nine
+leagues S.W. by W. a-hull, having twenty-seven and a half f. in ooze. In
+the afternoon of the 22d, the violence of the wind and waves began to
+abate, and our ship became tighter, which plainly shewed that most of
+our leaks were between wind and water, wherefore, on the first fair
+weather, I caused our carpenters to search the ship's sides, where they
+found and stopped many bad places, some a yard long, where the oakum was
+all rotten in the seams.
+
+The 24th, we had sight of a great island to the N. about seven leagues
+off; having a high hill on its southern end, being the island formerly
+mentioned as about fifteen leagues W. from Saddle island. From thence,
+till the evening of the 26th, our course was S. by W. twenty-four
+leagues, the depths increasing from nineteen to thirty-six f. on ooze.
+We had here a small round island S.W. by N. two leagues off, nearly in
+latitude 20° 20' N.[282] This island has four small islands on its S.W.
+side, but all of them considerably lower, for we saw this from the
+distance of at least ten leagues, rising in the shape of a Chinese hat.
+From hence, till noon of the 27th, our course was E. by N. two-thirds N.
+twelve leagues. This morning at two o'clock the wind veered round to
+S.S.E. and at noon was due S. From noon of the 27th, to noon of the
+28th, we stood E.N.E. eighteen leagues, and had then almost forty-one f.
+on ooze. Till noon of the 29th, we made other eighteen leagues E.N.E.
+when we were in 21° 10' N. To the 30th, at noon, other eighteen leagues
+E.N.E. To noon of 1st July, our course was E.N.E. 1/2 N. twenty-two
+leagues, our latitude being then 22° 10' N. Here, from the topmast-head
+we saw land N.N.W. 1/2 N. From noon this day, till seven p.m. we sailed
+N.E. by N. six leagues. At six this evening we saw three Chinese
+fishing-boats.
+
+[Footnote 282: There must be a material error here, as the latitude in
+the text would carry us back to the peninsula to the north of Hainan,
+more than two degrees of longitude backwards. Indeed, the text seems
+corrupted in many respects, even the bearings being extremely
+suspicious.--E.]
+
+This evening the wind came up at E.S.E. with which we stood to the
+southwards; and having sprung our main topmast only a little before, we
+could only bear a course and bonnet, and therefore made our way no
+better than S.W. From noon of the 2d, till eight p.m. our way was S.
+four leagues. Till noon of the 3d, we sailed N.N.W. 1/4 W. seven
+leagues. We here saw land twelve leagues off, from N. to N.E. rising in
+certain hummocks, which land I estimated to be nearly in 22° 45' N. On
+the 8th, I had an observation of the Scorpion's Heart, by which I made
+our latitude 22° 35' N. Next day, at noon, on observation of the sun
+gave the latitude 23° 6' N. At this time we had sight of the high land
+of Logosse, eleven leagues off, N.W. by N.[283] This morning we saw
+eight or more fishing boats, and came within hail of one, but could not
+persuade the people to come on board.
+
+[Footnote 283: The latitude of the text points to the coast of China in
+about the longitude of 117°E. but no such name as Logosse occurs in
+these parts.--E.]
+
+On the 10th we had sight of some small islands, one of which, rising in
+form of a sugar-loaf, bore from us W.N.N. about eight leagues off.[284]
+We this day hoisted out a small boat, built by our carpenters upon the
+forecastle, by which we made trial of the current, and found it to set
+E.N.E. At eight this evening, we anchored in 28 f. having made no way at
+all this afternoon but with the current, which went at the rate of about
+a mile an hour N.E. The 11th we weighed, and drove away with the current
+to the N.E. having no wind. This day at noon we had sight of the high
+land of Formosa above the clouds, the highest part bearing S.E. by E.
+about eighteen leagues off, the nearest island on the coast of China
+bearing seven leagues from us N.W. We here saw great numbers of fishing
+boats all round about us, which sent little boats to us with fish, for
+which we gave them double the value to encourage them to come back. At
+six this evening, the wind sprung up at N.N.E. by which, and some help
+of the current setting N.E. by E. we made our way nine leagues E. to the
+12th at noon. Our latitude was then 25° 20' N. The high land of Formosa
+being S.E. and the nearest port eight leagues off; the northern point
+ten leagues E. by N. and the depth 46 fathoms on ooze. The 13th the
+northern point of Formosa bore E.S.E. ten leagues off, being then in
+lat. 25° 40' N.
+
+[Footnote 284: These appear to have been the Poughoy, or Pescadores
+islands, off the western coast of Tai-ouan, or Formosa.--E.]
+
+The 22d of July at noon, we were in lat. 32° 40' N. the great sound of
+Langasaque, [Nangasaki,] being E. nine leagues off, and the S.E. of the
+Gotto isles W. by N. ten leagues off. The 23d, we arrived in a port of
+the island of Firando named Cochee, [Coetch,] which is about 4 1/2
+English miles to the southwards of Firando haven.[285] On the 25th,
+Captain Cox sent a great number of funnies, or _toe_ boats, to our
+assistance, by the help of which we got safe in the afternoon into the
+harbour of Firando, where we found the Swan and Expedition, sent hither,
+as I suppose, by the Dutch, for the disgrace of our nation in this
+remote part of the world. This day, before we got in, the Elizabeth
+brought in with her into Coetch, a frigate, containing silks and hides,
+and some sugar, her mariners being Japanese with some Portuguese, a part
+of whom were friars. Captain Adams, the admiral of the united fleet,
+arrived in the same place about three hours after me in the Moon, as
+likewise William Johnson in the Trow.
+
+[Footnote 285: Coetch, about 17 miles W. by N. from Firando, the former
+on the western, and the latter on the eastern side of the island.--E.]
+
+The 26th, a general council was held of all the English and Dutch, in
+the English house at Firando, when it was resolved to call in the ships
+that lay nearest the coast of _Sashma_, because we were certainly
+informed that the Portuguese frigates were just arrived from Macao at
+Nangasaki. The 30th, the king of _Crats_ came aboard the James,
+appearing much delighted to see such a ship, demanding of the jurabassa
+if this were one of the English frigates; whence we concluded the Dutch
+had reported we had only small ships like frigates. The 1st of August we
+held another council at the English factory, to make choice of two men,
+an Englishman and a Hollander, to carry a present to the emperor. As I
+could not be spared so long from the James, nor Captain Adams from his
+fleet, we made choice of Mr Charles Cleavengar, commander of the
+Palsgrave, and Mr Joseph Cockram, Cape merchant of the fleet, to go on
+the part of the English, and Jasques le Febre of the Harlaem, and
+Mathias de Brooke, were chosen on the part of the Dutch.
+
+On the 6th the Palsgrave arrived in Coetch roads. The Bull arrived there
+on the 7th, having cut away all her masts by the board, as they said to
+save the ship and goods. This day Captain Adams and I paid a visit to
+the king of Firando, carrying a small present, which was well received,
+and we were courteously entertained. On the 9th the king invited the
+English and Dutch to dine with him, shewing respect to our nation by
+placing us on his right hand, while the Dutch sat on his left, and the
+first dish of every course was offered to us.
+
+The 4th September we had a great tuffoon from the north, which forced
+the Moon on shore, and overset the Expedition, which instantly went
+down. The Trow had likewise been overset, had not her master veered out
+the cable, and allowed her to go on shore, stern foremost. The 5th I
+sent all my men aboard the Moon to help her off when we all strove a
+long time to no purpose; but she was again got off on the 13th, having
+fortunately received no damage by lying so long ashore. Having every
+thing taken out of the James Royal, except some bars of lead to help in
+trimming her over, she was hove down on the 19th almost halfway to the
+keel. The 21st we brought her down so low as to see part of her keel,
+and then began to sheath her with all expedition, and in four days the
+carpenters sheathed the whole of one side, from the keel up to her lower
+bends. The 27th I sent a cooper, two quarter-masters, and a butcher, to
+Nangasaki, to kill and salt such meat as was provided for us.
+
+On the 12th October, we got the James hove down on the other side to the
+keel, and on this side we found four very dangerous places, where the
+main plank was eaten quite through by the worms. Into each of these we
+graved a piece of plank, and in one of them we drove a trunnel where
+none had been before. We also nailed a piece of lead on the end of the
+bolt, which had been formerly driven through the keel to stop our great
+leak. Our ship was then righted, both sides being finished up to the
+lower bends. The Moon was likewise finished on the 21st on both sides.
+The 24th we had news that Nangasaki was greatly injured by a fire which
+began in the Portuguese street, and consumed four or five of the richest
+streets in the city.
+
+The 7th of December we departed from Firando, and anchored the same
+evening in the bay of Coetch. The 16th, Captain Cleavengar and Captain
+Le Febre returned to Firando from the court of the emperor, bringing the
+joyful news of having succeeded in their business. I took my leave of
+them on the 17th; and the wind being fair, with favourable weather, I
+set sail from the road of Coetch.
+
+§6. _Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence Home to England_.[286]
+
+The 18th December at noon, the islands of Mexuma bore from us N.W. four
+leagues off, our course from Pomo being S.S.W. twenty-five leagues. At
+noon on the 19th, our latitude was 31° 32'N. the isles of Mexuma bearing
+N.E. by N. nine leagues off. The 12th January, 1621, we stood in for the
+coast of Sumatra, and anchored at midnight in the river of Palembangan
+in twelve fathoms. We weighed again in the morning of the 13th,
+steering along the Sumatra shore through the straits of Banka; and past
+midnight of the 14th we got to anchor near Pulo Paniang. The 16th,
+seeing four ships in Bantam roads, we weighed and stood a little way
+within Pulo Paniang, when the Pepper-corn's boat came to us with the
+master, Mr Morton, who told me there were two Dutch ships in the road
+and one French ship, the pangran having consented to grant trade, and
+that it had been agreed to share the pepper in thirds among them. I also
+learnt from him, that most part of our loading was already prepared for
+us at Jacatra. I set sail, therefore, in the morning of the 17th, and
+arrived that evening near Antilaky; and in the evening of the 18th we
+arrived in the bay of Jacatra, [now Batavia bay,] where we found the
+Charles, the Gift, and the Clove, as also two Dutch ships, the Leyden
+and the Sun. The Globe and the Bee were at Hector island.
+
+[Footnote 286: In the former subdivision of this voyage a sufficient
+sample has been given of dry nautical detail of courses, bearings,
+winds, and soundings, and it does not seem necessary to insert the
+minute uninteresting detail of the return voyage to Bantam, which was
+along the coast of China, Cochinchina and Camboja, nearly retracing the
+former course.--E.]
+
+I here found the master of the Unicorn with several of his ship's
+company, having come over in a junk, after losing his ship on the coast
+of China.[287] The James here discharged her lading, and was ready to
+reload for England, there being here at this time, in the Charles,
+Clove, and Gift, about 600 tons of pepper and other goods, and the Bear
+daily expected from Jambee with 200 more, so that we had good hope of
+soon making up our loading with pepper, benzoin, cloves, and silk.
+Having taken in our whole loading of pepper, except fifty-five pekuls,
+and a few sapetas of silk and some cloves, I departed in the morning of
+the 26th February from the road of Jacatra, and set sail for England.
+
+[Footnote 287: Purchas, II. 1700, informs us, that the Unicorn being
+wrecked on the coast of China, the company saved themselves and part of
+their goods on shore. At first the rude Chinese would have assaulted and
+rifled them; but they stood on their defence, till a magistrate came and
+rescued them from the hands of the vulgar, after which they had kind
+usage and just dealing. They were allowed to purchase two vessels, with
+all necessary provisions, for their departure, and in these, part of the
+company went to Japan, and the other to Malacca.--_Purch._]
+
+In the afternoon of the 20th May, we arrived in the road of Saldanha,
+[Table-bay,] at the Cape of Good Hope. We here found the Ann Royal and
+the Fortune, two ships belonging to the honourable Company, and three
+Dutch ships, the Gowda, Black Bear, and the Herring, all bound for
+Bantam and Jacatra. We trimmed our ship on the 21st, and on the 22d we
+sent some water-casks on shore, and set up a tent for our sick men and
+coopers, landing twenty-five men as a guard for their protection. This
+night I sent out sixty men, along with sixty Dutchmen, in quest of
+cattle, but they returned without procuring any.
+
+We left Saldanha bay in the morning of the 6th June, with the wind at
+S.S.E. The 21st, at six in the morning, we got sight of St Helena, and
+about ten in the forenoon of the 22d, we anchored in Chappel Bay, half a
+mile from the shore, in twenty-six fathoms. The 25th, we changed to the
+valley leading to the lemon-trees, being the best in all the island for
+refreshments. Having remained seven days at this island, where we filled
+our water-casks, and got at least fifty goats and hogs, and above 4000
+lemons, we weighed anchor on the 29th, at nine a.m. The 16th of August
+we saw the high land of Pico, E.N.E. about 15 leagues off. The 15th
+September we got sight of the land's end of England; and on Tuesday the
+18th of that month we arrived in the Downs, having been absent on this
+voyage, four years, seven months, and fourteen days.
+
+
+SECTION XI.
+
+VOYAGE OF THE ANN ROYAL, FROM SURAT TO MOKHA, IN 1618.[288]
+
+
+The Ann Royal belonged to the fleet commanded by Martin Pring, of which
+an ample relation has been given in the foregoing section. The present
+section gives an account of a subordinate voyage, arising out of the
+former, and intended for settling a trade in the Red Sea. The Ann Royal
+was commanded by Captain Andrew Shilling, and this narrative is said by
+Purchas, to have been extracted from the journal of Edward Heynes, who
+appears to have been second merchant in the Ann.--E.
+
+[Footnote 288: Purch. Pilgr. I. 622.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Sir Thomas Roe, lord ambassador from his majesty to the Great Mogul,
+having given certain articles of instruction to Captain Andrew Shilling,
+commander of the Ann Royal, and Joseph Salbank, Edward Heynes, and
+Richard Barber, merchants in that ship, for establishing and conducting
+trade at Dabul or other places in the Red Sea, as they might see
+convenient, it was thought meet by Captain Martin Pring the general,
+Thomas Kerridge, and Thomas Rastell, on the 12th March, in a
+consultation on board the James Royal, that we should sail direct for
+the Red Sea, as the season was already too far gone for going to Dabul.
+
+Sailing therefore from the road of Swally, we got sight of Aden on the
+10th of April. The 13th, about seven in the morning, we passed the Bab,
+or straits of Bab-al-Mandub, so named from an island at the entrance, or
+mouth, of the Red Sea, and forming one side of the straits. About five
+in the evening we came in sight of Mokha; and as night was coming on, we
+cast anchor. Shortly after, a canoe came on board, sent by the governor
+to enquire who we were, and what were our intentions; and having given
+them an answer, they departed, having first begged a few biscuits. Next
+morning we weighed, and came again to anchor a league and half from the
+shore, when we saluted the town with nine guns. The water-bailey, or
+shahbander, brought off, as a present from the governor, a young
+bullock, two goats, with mangoes, limes, cucumbers, and water-melons. He
+welcomed us in the name of the governor, and desired us to send some
+persons on shore to inform the governor of the purpose of our arrival.
+About three in the afternoon, there came aboard a Jew born in Lisbon,
+together with an old renegado Venetian, who was in great favour with the
+governor, and in his name assured us of meeting with good usage to our
+content.
+
+The 15th, Ali Asgee, the chief scrivano, sent a present of goats and
+fruits, with a message of welcome, by two old men of good condition, who
+were sent by the governor to remain aboard in pledge for such of us as
+were to go on shore, with many protestations of good usage. Accordingly,
+Mr Salbank and I went ashore, accompanied by two linguists and an
+attendant, carrying as a present for the governor, six yards of stammel
+broad cloth, six yards of green, a fowling-piece and a looking-glass.
+Above a thousand people were on the shore expecting our arrival, and
+several officers were in waiting to conduct us to the governor. His
+house was large and handsome, built of brick and stone, having a fair
+gate of entrance with a porter's lodge, and several servants in waiting.
+From the gate, we went into a great court, whence a winding stair of
+thirty steps led to a square terrace, from which we were conducted into
+a large room, at one end of which was a great bow-window looking towards
+the sea. The governor sat in this window, and there were others on the
+sides of the room, which looked to the wharf or landing-place. The floor
+of this room was all covered with fine mats, and towards where the
+governor sat, with fine Turkey carpets and Persian felts. Where he sat,
+there lay a party-coloured sattin quilt, with several rich cushions of
+damask and others of velvet. He was dressed in a violet-coloured vest of
+sattin, under which were garments of fine India muslin or calico, having
+on his head a sattin cap, wreathed round by a white sash. He was
+attended by the chief scrivano, the principal officers of the customs,
+some Turks of importance, many Indian merchants, and about an hundred
+servants. He seemed about fifty years of age, and his name was Mahomet
+Aga.
+
+On our approach, and doing reverence, he bowed to us, and desired us to
+sit down, demanding who we were, and what was our business. We answered
+that we were Englishmen and merchants from London, who, by command of
+the ambassador of the king of England to the Great Mogul, with whom we
+had a league of peace and amity, had come to this place to treat for
+liberty of trade. That we were in friendship with the Grand Signior, and
+had free trade at Constantinople, Aleppo, and other places in the
+Turkish dominions, and hoped to enjoy the same here; for which purpose
+we were come to desire his and the pacha's phirmauns, giving us such
+privileges as we already had in other parts of the dominions of the
+Grand Signior, both for the present time and in future, as we meant to
+visit his port yearly with plenty of English and Indian commodities. We
+said likewise that we were commanded to say by the lord ambassador, that
+hearing there were sundry pirates, English, Dutch, French, Portuguese,
+Malabars and others, who infested the trade of this port, and
+principally that carried on by the Guzerats, who were our friends, we
+had his orders to free the seas of all such incumbrances, protecting all
+honest merchant ships and junks from injury. These, we said, were the
+true causes of our coming here.
+
+The governor then rose up and bid us welcome, applauding our declared
+purposes, but asked why we were so fearful as not to come on shore
+without pledges. We answered, that about six years before, some of our
+countrymen being here, were enticed on shore by fair promises of good
+usage, who were betrayed and imprisoned by the then governor, and
+several of them murdered. For these reasons, we were under the necessity
+of being careful of our safety. We said moreover, that he would shortly
+be certified we were exactly what we professed, by means of two junks of
+Guzerat, one of which had not come this year, but for the pass and
+promise of the ambassador that they were to be protected in the voyage
+home by our ship, against the enterprizes of any pirates who might be in
+these seas, as one had been last year by some of our ships, which came
+opportunely to their rescue, and conducted her safely to their port, and
+had sent the chief commanders to England, to be tried and punished for
+their wrongs against the friends of our sovereign.
+
+The governor acknowledged the friendly conduct of our nation in that
+affair, promising that we should live as safely on shore, and conduct
+our business with as much freedom and security, as in our own country,
+for which we should have his phirmauns, which he would procure to be
+confirmed by the pacha to our entire contentment. He said likewise that
+the former governor was a bad man, long since deposed, and now living at
+Constantinople in disgrace; and swore by his beard, and by Mahomet, that
+not a hair of our heads should be diminished, nor any wrong offered to
+us, as he should make proclamation of our liberties, that no one might
+pretend ignorance and do us harm or discourtesy. He desired us,
+therefore, to look out for a house for ourselves and our goods,
+commanding two of his chiauses to attend upon us, and recommended us to
+lodge with the Jew merchant till we could fit ourselves better, desiring
+him to assist us in all things.
+
+After giving many thanks for his kindness, and delivering the present as
+from our captain, we went, by the advice of the Jew, to visit the
+scrivano, who is likewise chief customer or shahbander; and as he was
+not at home, his servant received and entertained us with much civility.
+They conducted us into an handsome room, not much inferior in building
+and furniture to that of the governor, where we had left their master,
+who soon came home and welcomed us with much politeness, assuring us
+that all the governor had promised should be faithfully performed, as he
+himself should see all executed, and had also power to see us righted.
+We were informed that this man's power was as great in Mokha as that of
+the governor, who was directed by him in all matters of importance. This
+officer seemed a hearty old man. After making us drink coffee and
+sherbet, we took our leaves, and remained all night with the Jew.
+
+Next morning we spent an hour in viewing the town, and observing the
+countenances of the people towards us, whom we found gentle and
+courteous, especially the Banians and Guzerats, many of whom reside here
+as merchants, shopkeepers, and mechanics, having neatly-built shops and
+warehouses. Their market or bazar seemed well furnished with all manner
+of necessaries, among which were plenty of fruits, which are brought
+daily from the country. Most of the town is built of brick and stone,
+neatly plastered over with Paris plaster, some of the houses being two
+stories high, and all flat-roofed, with terraces on the top, on which in
+summer they construct lodges of canes and mats, in which they sleep and
+spend the first quarter of the day, having at that time a fresh breeze
+from the sea. All the rest of the day at that season is so hot that they
+can hardly endure even a shirt. Mokha lies quite level along the
+sea-shore, being about two miles from north to south, and contains many
+good-looking houses, with three principal mosques. The streets are kept
+clean, every person having to sweep and water before his door every
+morning and evening, so that they resemble sandy alleys for bowling,
+more than streets. No filth is allowed to be thrown into the streets,
+but must all be carried to an appointed place, where it is scoured out
+by the sea. In fine, I have never seen a sweeter, cleaner, or better
+ordered town any where.
+
+The wharf is situated between the governor's house and that of the
+scrivano, and is about twelve score square.[289] Near this, and
+adjoining the governor's house, there is a platform or fort, built of
+hewn stones, having battlements towards the sea, being about forty paces
+square, in which there are thirteen or fourteen pieces of ordnance of
+little value. Over against the landing-place two fair brass cannons are
+planted, above five feet long. At the other end, is the Alfandica, where
+there is a brass gun six feet long, carrying a large ball. Besides these
+defences, there is a stone house at the north end of the town, built
+like a sconce or redoubt, with a few pieces of ordnance; but they trust
+little in their ordnance, relying mostly on their soldiers, of whom they
+have always 200 in the town, and about 300 more in the country, within a
+day or two days march, who are all constantly in readiness for service.
+
+
+[Footnote 289: This is obscure, as it is not said whether it be 240
+feet, yards, or paces.--E.]
+
+The son of Cojah Nassan, the principal India merchant of the town, whom
+we waited upon at his house, promised us all kindness, and regaled us
+with tobacco and coffee, as is usual among these people. We went
+afterwards to wait upon the governor before we returned on board. He
+rose up at our entry to meet us, causing us to sit down by him, and
+repeated all the fair promises of free trade he had given the day
+before, declaring that he would deny us nothing that was reasonable. He
+then told us there was another governor shortly to succeed him, who was
+as his brother, and honester even than himself, who would faithfully
+perform every thing he had promised. At our request, the governor
+ordered the water-bailiff to furnish us at all times with boats, either
+for our conveyance, or to carry water to the ship. From the governor, we
+again went to visit the scrivano, who received us with much civility,
+promising to come aboard to visit our ship, and compliment our captain.
+After treating us with coffee, we took leave, and returned to the ship,
+when the pledges were dismissed, acknowledging the good treatment they
+had received, and were saluted on going ashore with five guns.
+
+On the 17th, the scrivano, with our two pledges, our Jew friend, and
+twenty other persons, came aboard, bringing a bullock, with bread,
+quinces, and other fruits, a great round cake or pasty, like puff-paste,
+in which were several fowls and chickens, well seasoned and baked, and
+most excellent eating. We also, with a large quince pye, and many crabs,
+together with sack and cordials, added our best welcome. The scrivano
+was so well pleased with his reception, that he insisted upon becoming
+the sworn brother of our captain, which was accordingly celebrated with
+a cup of sack; and, after much mirth, and having taken a view of our
+ship, he departed highly gratified.
+
+We were well supplied with water by several poor people of Mokha, who
+brought it off to the ship at a reasonable rate. Also, with the
+concurrence of the governor and scrivano, we made every junk that
+arrived anchor under our guns, and to ride in that situation till they
+discharged their cargo; which indeed the governor wished us to do,
+because some junks passed by that port to trade at others, to the injury
+of Mokha At six in the evening of the 21st of April, we had a violent
+storm of wind off the land, accompanied by much thunder and lightning,
+but no rain, which continued for half an hour, all the rest of the night
+being extremely hot. Although we rode above a league from the shore,
+this tempest brought great quantities of dust, and even sand on board.
+The 25th, we had a message from the scrivano, saying that the governor
+and he had received letters from the pacha at Sinan, commanding them to
+entertain us with all manner of kindness, and to give us free trade,
+with liberty to reside among them in all quietness and security.
+
+On the 27th the new governor arrived, when the ordnance of the town, and
+of our ship and the several junks in the road, all fired to welcome his
+arrival. He sent the former pledges on board to return thanks for our
+salute, accompanied by a present of plantains, limes, mangoes, melons,
+and bread, with one bullock, promising, in the name of the pacha, as
+free trade as our nation had in Constantinople. The pledges remained all
+night aboard, and went ashore with us next day, when we found the new
+and the old governors sitting together at the end of a large room, much
+in the same way as we had found the old one at our first arrival. The
+new governor was named Regib Aga, and was accompanied by several
+principal Turks, and by all the principal merchants from Surat, Diu,
+Dabul, Scindy, Calicut, and Cananore. On our approach, he and the other
+Turks only moved their bodies, but all the merchants rose up to salute
+us. He made us sit down beside him, and told us that the pacha had
+commanded him to give us satisfaction in all things; and that he knew
+besides, we were of a nation in friendship with the Grand Signior, and
+had free trade in Constantinople, Aleppo, and other parts of the Turkish
+empire, being a nation of a friendly and honest disposition, and we
+should therefore always find him disposed to give us free trade, and
+every other courtesy In reply, we told him we proposed, at our next
+coming to Mokha, if our reasonable requests of a free trade were
+granted, to settle a permanent factory at this place, and to come yearly
+to the port, with plenty of English and India goods, and should defend
+the trade against pirates. We even distantly hinted, that it was
+needless to deny us a free trade, being in a condition to force it if
+refused, and to hinder all others from coming hither, the fear of which
+had already caused some junks to pass by Mokha to Jidda, the port of
+Mecca, a town of great trade, 150 leagues farther up the Red Sea, and to
+other places.
+
+The new governor replied, that we should be made as welcome as in any
+place of our own country; and swore by God, and Mahomet, and by his own
+beard, that we should live as free from all injury as in our own land.
+We asked what security he would give us besides his word, when he said
+we should have his phirmaun under his _chop_, or seal, and would procure
+us the same from the pacha. With this we seemed satisfied, and gave him
+many thanks; and indeed they all seemed perfectly willing to give us
+every satisfaction, yet, in my opinion, not from good-will or justice,
+but from fear, as they knew we were able to intercept their whole trade.
+After some conversation about our ambassador, who now resided at
+Constantinople, and about the Portuguese and Spaniards, whom Rajib said
+were proud and faithless nations, we spoke of Sir Henry Middleton,
+asking the cause of their treacherous conduct to him and his people. He
+answered, that the then Vizier was a bloody, cruel, and ill-minded man,
+and made worse by the instigation of the Turks and Arabs of Mokha, who
+were enraged by the uncivil behaviour of our people, who made water at
+the gates of their mosques, forced their way into the houses after the
+citizens wives, and being daily drunk in the streets, would fight and
+quarrel with the people,[290] things hateful in their eyes. These were
+only in part the cause, for the covetousness of the governor, hoping to
+have got their ship and goods, was the main cause of that scandalous
+conduct, for which he was soon afterwards sent to Constantinople to
+answer for his crimes.
+
+[Footnote 290: Let English Christians read, blush, and amend--_Purch._]
+
+We dined that day with the scrivano, and hired a house of Hassan Aga,
+one of our pledges, at seventy dollars the monsoon, or yearly rent, it
+being all the same. The scrivano insisted to swear himself our friend on
+his Koran, yet denied the present governor to be the person who captured
+Sir Henry Middleton, which we afterwards found to be Turkish faith, or
+absolute falsehood. We now agreed to pay at the rate of three in the
+hundred, _ad valorem_, both inwards and outwards, though the scrivano
+swore that all others paid five; all money, with silver and gold in
+bullion, to pass free of duty. We remained this night with the scrivano
+to supper, and gave him a present.
+
+On the 29th of April we expected to have had our phirmaun publicly read
+before all the merchants, and proclaimed to the people; but most part of
+the day was spent in ceremony by the governor and other chiefs at the
+mosque, on account of the death of Sultan Achmet, the Grand signior,
+and the accession of his brother to the throne. They came riding past
+our house while we were sitting at a window which opened to the street,
+whence we made our obeisance to them, and they bowed in return. They
+were all in grand gala, having their horses richly caparisoned. At four
+in the afternoon we were sent for, but our linguist had got to a Jew
+house and was drunk with arrack, so we sent an apology, under pretence
+that Mr Salbank was indisposed, and promised attendance next day. On the
+31st, the governor sent for us, and made our welcome known to all the
+merchants, causing his scrivano draw up a phirmaun as full as we could
+have wished, which he signed with his chop or seal in the afternoon at
+the house of the principal scrivano, entirely according to what was
+before agreed upon, by which we were to pay three per cent. for all we
+landed, excepting money, and the same for all we took on board, except
+victuals. We got afterwards a similar phirmaun from Mahomet, the pacha
+of Sinan: and Rejib Aga gave us a particular safe conduct for Mr Salbank
+and the rest.[291]
+
+[Footnote 291: Copies, or translations rather, from the Arabic, are
+given in the Pilgrims of all these three phirmauns, which it was not
+thought necessary to insert.--E]
+
+It was now agreed among ourselves that Mr Salbank and I were to remain
+ashore to conduct the business of sales and purchases, while Mr Barber
+staid on board to prepare and send such goods as we required. The 5th of
+May we went to the scrivano to get leave to make arrack for the use of
+our sick men; because, since our linguist and several of our people had
+got drunk in the house of a Jew, we had complained, and procured an
+order prohibiting the Jews from selling them any, and the governor had
+even strictly enjoined the Jews and Turks not to sell any more arrack or
+wine in the town. At our request through the scrivano, the governor
+granted leave for a Jew, nominated for the purpose to brew arrack at our
+house, but forbid any to be made elsewhere.
+
+In the afternoon of the 8th, learning that the governor and principal
+men were sitting in form at the Alfandica, to receive the Surat captain
+who was then coming on shore, we went also to see the ceremonial of his
+reception. We found the governor at the upper end of a long room,
+sitting on a stone bench spread with carpets, having on the same bench
+with him various merchants and Turks of quality, to the number of about
+twenty. Opposite to him sat about as many in chairs, forming a lane down
+the room to a square platform raised three steps from the floor, railed
+in and matted, in which the scrivano and other officers of the customs
+sat on carpets. The governor bid us welcome, saying he had given orders
+to the chief broker to examine our goods and promote their sale. He then
+desired us to sit down, two merchants offering us their places, and
+called for coffee and tobacco to regale us.
+
+About half an hour after, the nokhada, or captain of the Surat ship,
+came ashore. His boat was curiously painted, having a tilt of red silk,
+with many streamers, and sails of fine white calico. He was rowed by
+twenty of his servants, all dressed in fine white calico, and he was
+accompanied by a wretched band of music, consisting of drums, waits, and
+bad trumpets, the noise from which was augmented by the discharge of
+guns from his own great junk and those belonging to the town. Attended
+by a few slaves, decked out in silks and coarse sattins, he entered the
+lone room where we were, when the governor rose and saluted him, and
+placed him next himself on the stone bench. Many compliments of welcome
+passed between the nokhada and the other merchants; but in the height of
+his pride he overlooked us, and we him accordingly. Yet we thought he
+might have shewn us more respect, considering that Captain Shilling had
+sent his long-boat and men to free his junk of 400 or 500 tons, when
+aground, and had entertained him with much civility aboard our ship.
+
+After some time spent in compliments, coffee was again brought in for
+all the company; after which six vests were produced, two of which were
+given to the Surat captain, and one each to his four principal
+merchants. When these were put on, and mutual _salams_ or reverences
+given, they again sat down, like so many painted images, dressed up in
+coats of coarse gold and silver velvet. We here observed one usual
+custom of this town, at the arrival of any junk, and the landing of her
+nokhada or captain, that free liberty is given to all the mariners and
+passengers to bring ashore as much goods as each man can carry on his
+back, without payment of any duty; accordingly, at this time, about 300
+persons belonging to this junk passed with their luggage to the
+captain's residence, unmolested.
+
+On the 9th, our landlord and the scrivano told us that three junks from
+Diu, and four Malabar vessels, were at Aden, whence they were afraid to
+proceed without our pass or licence. Accordingly we sent them a free
+pass, signed by our captain and three merchants. In this, after reciting
+that we had found good usage from the governor and merchants at Mokha,
+we engaged to give them all freedom to pass quietly, assuring them of
+kind usage, provided they were not enemies to our sovereign or his
+subjects. A more general pass was afterwards granted by us for the quiet
+and free departure of all junks and other vessels, with their cargoes,
+mariners, and passengers.
+
+On the 10th, the captain of the Dabul junk invited us to a banquet at
+his house, where we found the governor with about fifty principal
+persons, besides attendants, all of whom rose up to bid us welcome.
+Coffee, sherbet, and tobacco, were served round, with various fruits, as
+plums, apricots, and mangoes, and thinking these had been the feast, we
+were about to depart; but the governor and the Dabul captain desired us
+to remain, that we might _eat bread and salt with them_, which we did.
+The feast at last made its appearance, though late, being about sixty
+dishes of meats, baked, roasted, broiled, stewed, and boiled, but all
+mingled with rice and various kinds of sallads, in the fashion of India.
+
+Our cargo consisted mostly of bad wares, which had lain in India till
+they were nearly spoiled, and so hung long upon our hands; wherefore we
+importuned the governor to dispeed our sales, which he charged the
+broker to do with all expedition. We also had leave granted to come and
+go between the ship and the shore at our pleasure, without demanding
+leave, contrary to the usual custom of the port, the water bailiff being
+ordered to give us no molestation. On the 20th, it was noticed that the
+monsoon had changed. The 24th, the scrivano observed to us that our
+sailors, on coming ashore, were in the custom of selling _baftas_ and
+sword-blades in the bazar. He said the governor had promised liberty for
+the goods of these poor fellows to pass free of custom, and therefore
+they might freely bring them ashore for sale, but must sell them at our
+house, and not in the public bazar, which was a disgrace to us and our
+nation.
+
+On the 31st, our ship was in great danger of being burnt. Some one
+happened to be smoking on the spritsail yardarm, when the burning
+tobacco fell out unobserved into a fold of the sail, where it burnt
+through two or three breadths, and was long smelt before it could be
+found. After this, smoking was strictly prohibited, except in the
+cook-room or the captain's cabin. At this time, for the recovery of our
+sick men, the exploration of the coast, and procuring ballast instead
+of lead taken out of the ship for sale, it was concluded to send the
+ship over to Assab; on the African coast, on which occasion Mr Baffen,
+the master's mate, was sent before to sound and discover the passage.
+
+On the 10th of June we had a conference with the governor, and, among
+other discourse, he told us that he was governor of Aden when the
+Ascension was there, when he imprisoned the captain and Mr Joseph
+Salbank for two days, suspecting them to be freebooters, and not
+merchants, as he alleged. He said also that he was governor here at
+Mokha when Sir Henry Middleton was apprehended, but laid the whole blame
+of that transaction on the then pacha, whose servant he was, and who had
+given orders for that and much more, which he called God to witness was
+much contrary to his inclination, and declared that these things were
+past, and we had now nothing to fear. By this avowal, we had a clear
+evidence how far he and the scrivano were to be trusted. The governor
+sent for us again on the 13th, saying that he had acquainted the pacha
+with our purpose of sending to him for his phirmaun, and that he had
+promised a hearty welcome and full contentment, whether we went
+personally or sent a messenger; but the governor advised that one of us
+should go up to Sinan, for which purpose he would provide us with
+horses, camels, and attendants, and should write in our behalf to the
+pacha.
+
+The 19th a junk arrived from Jiddah, with many passengers from Mecca,
+bringing camblets, bad coral, amber beads, and much silver, to invest in
+spices and India cotton goods. She brought news of a ship, laden last
+year from Mokha for Grand Cairo, which had lost her monsoon, and was
+forced to wait till next year, at a place only a little way beyond
+Jiddah. By this ship, the governor had letters informing him that the
+Grand Signior had sent various state ornaments to the pacha of Sinan,
+whom he had confirmed in his government for seven years longer, and
+appointing himself to continue governor of Mokha for the like time, of
+which he seemed not a little proud.
+
+As I was constantly indisposed, it was thought fit that Mr Salbank
+should go up to Sinan to wait upon the pacha with a present, and to
+carry up some goods also with him for sale at that place. On this
+occasion, the scrivano offered him his own mule to ride upon, which he
+thankfully accepted. He was furnished with two camels, a cook, a
+horsekeeper, and three servants belonging to the governor, all of whose
+wages he agreed to pay at certain fixed rates, and was also accompanied
+by a linguist named Alberto. Taking leave of the governor, who gave him
+letters for the pacha, he departed from Mokha about six in the evening
+of the 23d June, the nights being the accustomed time of travelling.
+
+In the morning of the 23d, we had a letter from our captain; then at
+Assab, informing of his safe arrival there, and the good health of the
+people, and that he had procured ballast and provisions to his
+satisfaction. On the 26th, the governor sent me a horse by one of his
+servants, inviting me to accompany him to his banqueting house, about
+half a mile out of town, there to spend the day in mirth along with
+other merchants. About half an hour after, the chief scrivano came to
+accompany me, with whom I went, joining the governor by the way, and
+rode with him to the place. It was a fair house, in the middle of a
+grove of date trees, beside a large tank or pond, having several rooms
+handsomely fitted; up for sitting. After a little while, the governor
+and several others went into the tank to bathe, where they sported
+themselves for half an hour. Coffee was then handed round to the
+company, after which grapes, peaches, and both musk and water; melons,
+were brought in, together with blanched almonds and great quantities of
+raisins, as there were between fifty and sixty guests, besides,
+attendants; and always between whiles coffee, sherbet, and tobacco were
+handed round. Thus, and with indifferent music, we spent the forenoon.
+After prayers, the governor, went again into the tank, where he spent an
+hour sporting with his company. In the sequel, the time was spent in
+cards and chess, and in looking at various; jiggling tricks, till four
+in the evening. At this time above an hundred dishes were served up, all
+of good meat, but; cold, and ill dressed, each dish being sufficient to
+have satisfied four hungry men. He treated me with much kindness, and
+was earnest to have me go with him into the tank, but I excused myself;
+on account of my late indisposition. He then said, if at any time I was
+inclined to bathe, I might come to this place when I pleased, and he
+would give orders to the keeper to admit me and use me well.
+
+The 12th July, the Surat captain made a fine display of many artificial
+fire-works before the governor, it being then new moon. The governor
+sent for me to see them, and placed me in a chair beside himself,
+telling me he had letters that day from Sinan, informing him that the
+Pacha had granted a phirmaun for us before the arrival of Mr Salbank,
+but hearing of his coming, had delayed sending it, and had since granted
+another, according to his instructions, and had delivered it to Mr
+Salbank with his own hand.
+
+On the 13th there passed by the roads a junk of four or five hundred
+tons from Jiddah, bound for _Kitchine_, a day's sail within the entrance
+of the Red Sea, which I suppose is not far from Cape Guardafui, on the
+coast of Africa.[292] She is said to contain great sums in gold and
+silver, with much valuable merchandize. This ship comes yearly to Mokha
+at the beginning of the western monsoon, bringing myrrh, and boxes for
+_coho_ seeds, [coffee] and goes from hence to Jiddah or _Aliambo_, [Al
+Yambo] where she sells her coffee and the India goods procured at
+Kitchine; which last are brought thither by Portuguese barks from Diu
+and other places. Her outward lading consists of indigo, all manner of
+India cotton goods, gum-lac; and myrrh.[293] She is freighted by the
+Portuguese, and the governor of Mokha wished much we had met with her,
+which we had probably done, had not our ship been absent, which returned
+into the road of Mokha on the 21st. I went aboard, and was told that the
+king of Assab and his brother had been aboard, and were kindly
+entertained, in return for which he promised to supply them with
+abundance of beeves and goats; but that same evening, in consequence of
+a signal of fire, he and all his people fled into the mountains,
+pretending they were threatened by an attack from their enemies, and
+never even gave thanks for their entertainment.
+
+[Footnote 292: The only place resembling this name is Kissem, on the
+oceanic coast of Yemen, or Arabia Felix, nearly due N. from Cape
+Guardafui.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 293: This must refer to her homeward lading, called outward in
+the text in respect to India.--E.]
+
+Before day of the 27th July, Mr Salbank returned from Sinan in perfect
+health, and much satisfied with his phirmauns. He gave me an account of
+his whole journey, having been respectfully treated every where; always
+before entering any town, being met both by horse and foot to conduct
+him to the different governors, by whom he was kindly received. All his
+provisions were provided by their officers, but at his own expence; and
+the servant of the governor of Mokha caused him every where to be well
+used. He was met a mile from Sinan by forty or fifty Turks, well
+mounted, sent by the Pacha to escort him to a well-furnished house
+prepared for his reception. He was there kindly received and entertained
+by the xeriffe and the pacha's chief treasurer, who were both deputed to
+give him welcome in the name of the pacha. Two days afterwards, he had
+audience of the pacha, from whom he received courteous entertainment,
+receiving two phirmauns of the same tenor, one of which was much more
+ornamentally written than the other, and intended for being shown to the
+Grand Signior, if necessary.
+
+According to his report, the city of Sinan and its neighbourhood will
+give vent yearly for a good quantity of English cloth, as the weather
+there is cold for three quarters of the year; and even while he was
+there, though the height of summer, a person might well endure a furred
+gown. Besides, there is a court at that place to which belongs _forty_
+or _fifty_ thousand gallant Turks,[294] most of whom wore garments of
+high-priced Venetian cloth. Not far from thence there is a leskar, or
+camp, of 30,000 soldiers,[295] continually in the field against an Arab
+king in the adjoining mountains, not yet conquered; all of which
+soldiers are said to wear coats of quilted India chintzes, which are
+dear, and of little service to defend them from the cold of that region,
+which is there excessive. To this I may add the city or Teyes, near
+which there is a _leskar_ of thirty or forty thousand soldiers,
+commanded by a German renegado under the pacha of Sinan. That place,
+though only about five days journey from Mokha, is very cold, and much
+cloth is worn by the people about that place.
+
+[Footnote 294: This is probably a vast exaggeration, though in words at
+length in the Pilgrims; and we ought more likely to read _four_ or
+_five_ thousand Turks.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 295: A similar reduction to 3000 is probably needful for this
+army.--E.]
+
+On the 2d of August the governor sent a rich vest to our captain by the
+chief shabander, attended by drums and trumpets, his boat being decked
+out with flags and streamers. This was delivered with great ceremony,
+and reverently received. The Dabul nokhada, Melic Marvet, and Roswan,
+the nokhada of the Chaul ship, sent us letters of recommendation to
+their kings, on the 11th August, according to our desire, certifying the
+friendly usage they had experienced from us at Mokha, and our kind
+offer to protect them on the homeward voyage, from pirates, and
+entreating therefore for us freedom of trade and friendly usage in their
+dominions. The 14th, as we had formerly done to others, we gave our
+passes to two Malabar captains, Amet ben Mahomet of Cananore, under
+Sultan Ala Rajah, and Aba Beker of Calicut, under the Zamorin.
+
+This day there came a galley into the road from Cairo, having many Turks
+and Jews as passengers, bringing great store of dollars, chekins, coral,
+damask, sattin, camblet, opium, velvets, and taffetas. She had come down
+the whole length of the Red Sea in thirty days. I had a conference with
+the Jews, one of whom I had formerly known in Barbary. They reported
+that the brother of the former Grand Signior, on being made emperor, had
+imprisoned his two nephews, and put to death several of the grandees,
+and had otherwise given great offence to the great men at
+Constantinople, whereupon he was deposed and imprisoned, and his eldest
+nephew made emperor in his stead. They said likewise that an army of
+200,000 men was sent against the Persians, for the conquest of
+Gurgistan, adding various other particulars, some of which turned out
+true, and others false, like merchants news in general. Some Turks and
+Jews desired to have passage for themselves and goods in our ship to
+Surat; and it is likely, when they know us better, much profit may be
+made in this way, as their junks are usually pestered with rude people.
+
+Having sold and bartered our goods as well as we could have expected,
+considering our cargo, and dispatched all our business, we visited the
+governor, and desired to have his testimonials to the lord ambassador,
+which he gave us. We took leave of him on the 19th of August, and of the
+scrivano and other chief men of the town, from whom we received
+protestations of continued kindness on all future occasions. We went
+aboard that same day, proposing to sail the next day for India, taking
+the Surat junk under our convoy, according to our instructions.
+
+
+
+SECTION XII.
+
+JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE TO SURAT AND JASQUES, IN 1620.[296]
+
+
+"According to the title of this journal in the Pilgrims, the fleet which
+sailed on this voyage consisted of the London, of 800 tons, William
+Baffin master, on board of which was Captain Andrew Shilling, chief in
+command, or general; the Hart, of 500 tons, Richard Blithe master; the
+Roebuck, of 300 tons, Richard Swan master; and the Eagle, of 280 tons,
+Christopher Brown master. The account of the voyage in Purchas is said
+to consist of extracts from the journal written by Richard Swan, the
+master or captain of the Roebuck."--E.
+
+[Footnote 296: Purch. Pilgr. 1. 723.]
+
+§1. _Voyage from England to Surat._
+
+We sailed from Tilbury-hope on the 26th of February, 1620, and anchored
+in Saldanha road [Table Bay, at the Cape of Good Hope] on 24th of June,
+where we found the Lion homewards-bound, and nine Dutch ships bound for
+Bantam, commanded by a gentleman named Nicolas van Baccum, who Was said
+to have studied seven years at Oxford. Next morning the Lion and the
+Dutch fleet departed, each their several way; and in the evening arrived
+the Schidam belonging to Deft, outward-bound, which being suspected by
+both admirals, the master was sent for, and producing Us commission,
+gave satisfaction. On the 3d of July we made a solemn proclamation of
+the right and title of his majesty King James to Saldania, and on the
+7th King James's mount was erected.[297]
+
+[Footnote 297: It thus appears that the first fortified station at the
+Cape of Good Hope was erected by the English, to whom that colony now
+belongs. It would surely be a better appellation for this important
+colony, which may be called the key of India, to restore its old name-of
+_Saldania_, than to continue its present awkward denomination, The
+Colony of the Cape of Good Hope.--E.]
+
+We sailed from the Cape of Good Hope on the 25th of July, and 26th of
+October we put into Dabul roads, where we remained till the 2d of
+November to refresh our men, and to provide the two ships bound for
+Persia. The 6th November, the Hart and Eagle took leave of us and the
+9th we anchored in Swally roads, where we found the Wappen van Zeland,
+of 1000 tons, which at our arrival took in her colours, and saluted the
+London with three guns, and the Roebuck with two. I was sent on shore,
+and brought off Mr Thomas Kerridge, the president of the factory at
+Surat, with Mr James, and Mr Hopkinson. Next day, in a consultation, it
+was determined to dispatch us speedily after the Hart and Eagle, as we
+had intelligence that four Portuguese galleons were waiting at Ormus, or
+in Jasques roads, to intercept them.
+
+§2. _Voyage from Surat towards Jasques_.
+
+The 19th November, having dispatched our business at Swally with all
+expedition, we set sail towards Jasques. The 21st we chased a ship,
+which surrendered without resistance, being the Nostra Sennora de
+Merces, of 200 tons, bound from Muscat for Chaul, having on board
+forty-two Arabian horses, her principal loading, and for which trade she
+was built. The residue of her cargo consisted of dates and raisins. The
+name of her captain was Francisco de Mirando.
+
+The 5th December, when in latitude 24° 55' N. we met the Hart and Eagle
+coming from Jasques for Surat, because not of sufficient strength to
+encounter the Portuguese force which was waiting for them with the
+intention of ruining our Persian trade. Thus happily rejoined to our
+former consorts, we shaped our course for Jasques to accomplish our
+purpose. The 8th, at the earnest desire of the Portuguese and Moors
+taken in the prize, we set them on shore, except some Moor seamen whom
+we detained in our service, and the Portuguese pilot, who entreated to
+stay, as he feared some hard usage from his own people. On the 12th,
+certain volunteers who had engaged to set fire to our prize, and run her
+aboard the Portuguese admiral, were put on board of her, and she was
+fitted as a fire-ship. The 15th we had sight of the east point of
+Jasques roads, having upon it a tomb or old square flat-roofed house,
+which bore W.N.W. by compass, twelve miles off. From Diu head to this
+point, I make the longitude, by the ordinary plain chart, 9° 55' 36" W.
+but by Mercator's projection, 10° 51'. From where we were, we could see
+the Portuguese men of war sent from Lisbon to oppose our trade with
+Persia, consisting of two Portuguese galleons, one of which was larger
+than the London, and two Dutch ships, one as large as the Hart, while
+the other was less than the Eagle. Their general was Don Ruy Frere de
+Andrado; the vice-admiral, Joam Boralio; and the two Dutch ships were
+commanded by Antonio Musquet and Baltazar de Chaves.[298]
+
+[Footnote 298: According to a special account of this and the
+succeeding sea-fight, appended to the present relation in Purchas, the
+Portuguese fleet on the present occasion, besides the four galleons,
+consisted of two gallions and ten frigates or armed barks, none of which
+are here mentioned except the four galleons.--E.]
+
+§3. _Account of the first Fight with the Portuguese_.
+
+In the morning of the 16th December, our admiral and all the masters of
+our squadron went on board the prize, carrying two barrels of powder,
+some tar, and other combustible materials, to fit her up as a fire-ship,
+intending to lay her on board the Portuguese admiral athwart his hawse,
+that both might burn together. After she was fitted, we bore up for the
+Portuguese squadron, but it fell calm, and the current set us so near
+them, that they reached us with their shot. We kept under sail all
+night, and in the morning of the 17th, being to leeward of them in
+consequence of the land breeze, they weighed and made toward us, when we
+waited their approach, although they preserved the advantage of the
+weather-gage. The fight began about nine in the morning, and continued
+without intermission for nine hours. In the afternoon, a fine gentle
+sea-breeze sprung up from the westwards, which gave us the weather-gage;
+and the Portuguese admiral anchored, either of necessity to repair some
+defect about his rudder, or of policy to gain some expected advantage.
+His vice-admiral and the large Dutch ship anchored to the eastwards, and
+the lesser Dutch ship to leeward of them all, stopping his leaks. We
+were now in great hopes of putting our fire-ship to a good purpose; but
+being too soon fired and forsaken by those who had her in charge, she
+drove clear of them all, to their joy and our disgrace. Seeing them
+remain at anchor, and keeping to windward of them, we turned to and
+again close a-head of them as they rode at anchor, raking them as we
+passed, through and through, fore and aft, especially the admiral,
+receiving only in return their prow and bow-chases. By these, as I
+passed to the north, two unfortunate shots cut asunder the weather leech
+ropes of the Roebuck's foresail and fore-topsail, in the middle depth of
+both sails; owing to which we could not bring her into stays, and were
+forced, for repairing these sails, to bear down to leeward, between the
+enemy and the shore; in which course, the three great ships plied their
+whole broadsides against us, but with less hurt than I could have
+imagined, God be praised. Having compassed the three large ships, I
+luffed up to rejoin our squadron, which still held the advantage of the
+wind, and plied their great guns on the Portuguese like so many muskets.
+When I had got to windward of the smaller Dutch ship, which stood off as
+I did till he had our fire-ship directly between him and me, he turned
+tail, and steered right before the wind along shore to the eastwards,
+with all the sail he could carry. The other three now set sail to his
+rescue, and were now so tame, that as the Hart passed along their
+broadsides, she received only a few shots great and small from any of
+them, and from some none at all. The night now coming on, and our people
+being all wearied by the long continuance of the fight, we all desisted
+from any farther chase, and came to anchor in our usual road.
+
+In this fight, the London and Hart had very little harm in their hulls
+and tackling, and less, or rather none, in their men. The main-mast of
+the Eagle was hurt in five places, four of which were quite through, and
+one of her men lost his right arm. In the Roebuck, I had one man slain
+by a cannon ball striking his head. A piece of his skull and some
+splinters of the ball wounded one of my mates in the forehead, and
+destroyed his left eye; and two others of my men lost the use of their
+right hands. God be praised for our good fortune; for I never heard of
+so small loss in so long a fight as we now sustained. I cannot truly
+state the loss of the enemy: but, by the report of our merchants, their
+vice-admiral and another captain were slain, and thirty or forty men in
+the admiral's ship alone, the rest as yet unknown. As to their Moors,
+they do not count them among the num her of their men.
+
+In the morning of the 18th, the day after the action, we could see the
+Portuguese at anchor ten miles to the east of us, having the wind fair
+to have come down, but they did not. We then held a consultation,
+whether it were better for us to take the first of the sea breeze, which
+usually begins about noon, to stand towards them and try it out for the
+mastery, before they could receive supplies from Ormus, Muskat, or Goa,
+or else to make sail for Jasques roads, on purpose to land our goods and
+money, in case of the worst, these being the prize they sought to obtain
+and we to defend. Accordingly, the London got that night into Jasques
+road, but the rest could not get in before the 20th, by reason of
+contrary winds. On the 21st and 22d most of our goods were landed.
+
+
+§4. _Second Sea Fight with the Portuguese_.
+
+On the 22d, seeing the Portuguese galleons open the road of Jasques, and
+supposing they might intend to come in with the sea breeze, we set sail
+and stood off for them. At first, they made a shew of giving us battle,
+but soon afterwards made off upon a tack; and till the 28th, they were
+either to windward, or so favourably placed at anchor, that we could not
+attempt to attack them without manifest disadvantage. During this time,
+they were joined by two or three frigates, or barks, from Ormus,
+bringing them a supply of men and ammunition. We made one attempt on
+Christmas day, but were forced back by a sudden flaw of wind; on which
+occasion, some blacks aboard of us, said the Portuguese had brought a
+witch from Ormus, to supply them with favourable winds.
+
+On Innocents day, 28th December, perceiving the drift of our Portuguese
+_Fabius cunclator_, to protract and avoid fighting, that by delays and
+the advantage of his frigates, he might hinder us from prosecuting your
+business in Persia, we determined to attempt closing with him. About one
+o'clock there sprung up a favourable east wind for our purpose, on which
+we immediately weighed and put every thing in order for battle. The
+London and Hart came to anchor within a cable's length and half of their
+broadsides, and so endured the main brunt of this second fight; for, no
+sooner were they at anchor, but it fell calm and so continued all day,
+insomuch that the Roebuck and Eagle, which had steered nearer to the
+shore, with the intention of coming to anchor, one on the bow of their
+admiral, and the other on the bow of their vice-admiral, got astern, and
+could not with all our diligence be of any service for a full half hour
+after the action began. At length we got within point-blank shot of
+them, and then were forced either to anchor or drive farther off with
+the current, as there was not a breath of wind.
+
+We now brought our broadsides to bear, and our whole squadron plied
+their ordnance upon them so fast, that had the knowledge of our men
+equalled their resolution, not one of them had escaped from us. Not
+willing to endure such hot entertainment, they cut their cables about
+three o'clock, and drove from us with the tide to the westwards, till
+out of our reach. Then came their frigates, which the day before had
+made a bravado along shore with drums, trumpets, flags, and streamers,
+and, now employed in a fitter task, towed them away all mangled and
+torn. Their admiral, in the very hottest of the fight, was under the
+necesity of giving his ship a heel to stop his leaks, his main-top-mast
+and the head of his main-mast having fallen overboard. The great Dutch
+ship had both his top-masts and part of his boltsprit shot away, and the
+smaller lost all his shrouds and top-masts. Their vice-admiral escaped
+best this day, having commonly one or other of their own ships between
+him and us.
+
+We kept them company all night, in hope of being able next morning to
+give them their passports; but having taken a survey of our shot, which
+we found scanty, and considering the importance of the voyage we still
+had to perform, we thought it best to give over the chase and return to
+Jasques; leaving them glad of our absence, their two great ships towing
+the two smaller. We have had no account of their loss in this action.
+All your worships ships remain serviceable, God be praised, and only
+five men slain outright in these two long and severe engagements. Our
+worthy admiral and kind commander, Captain Andrew Shilling, received a
+great and grievous wound by a cannon ball through his left shoulder,
+which he bore with such wonderful courage and patience, that we were in
+great hopes of his much-wished-for recovery: But he had likewise two of
+his uppermost ribs broken on the left side, and died on the 6th January,
+1621, shewing himself a resolute commander in the action, and an assured
+Christian in his death. We intended to have carried his body to Surat,
+to have there performed his funeral rites according to his great merit,
+and oar surgeons undertook to preserve his body by means of embalming
+and cere-cloth, but it became so noisome that we were forced to bury him
+at Jasques, which was done on the 7th, with all the solemnity and
+respect in our power.
+
+In this engagement, the London expended 1382 great shot of several
+sorts, the Hart 1024, the Roebuck 815, and the Eagle 800, in all 4021.
+In consequence of the death of our worthy admiral, the white box, No. I.
+was opened; and according to your worships appointment, Captain Richard
+Blithe succeeded to the supreme command of the London, I was removed
+into the Hart, Christopher Brown into the Roebuck, and Thomas Taylor was
+made master of the Eagle.[299]
+
+[Footnote 299: This account does not agree with an accompanying official
+letter, dated 13th January, 1621, giving a similar account of the two
+engagements, often in the very identical words used by Swan, in which
+the name of Thomas Taylor is omitted, instead of whom William Baffin is
+the last in the list of signatures; and the Christian name of Swan is
+made Robert instead of Richard.--E.]
+
+
+§5. _Sequel of the Voyage_.
+
+The 14th January, 1621, having had forty-eight hours continual and
+excessive rain, which, or much wind, is usual at Jasques for three or
+four days at the full and change of the moon, and having finished our
+business at Jasques, we set sail on our return to Surat, where we
+arrived on the 1st February. Nothing material occurred on the passage,
+except that, on the 27th January, between Diu and the _sand-heads_, we
+surprised a small ship of war, called Nostra Senaora de Remedio, of 100
+tons, commanded by Francisco de Sylva, manned by thirty-five Portuguese
+and twenty-five Moors, sent out by the governor of Diu to protect their
+small merchant ships against the Malabar rovers. We dismissed the men
+and kept the ship for our use, calling her the Andrew, after our late
+excellent general. She had in her neither meat, money, nor commodities,
+and scarcely as many poor suits of clothes as there were backs.
+
+The 27th of February we began to take in our loading. The 5th of March,
+the, Eagle was sent down to keep guard over the junk belonging to the
+prince, and to hinder her from any farther loading, till they granted
+free passage for our carts with goods and provisions, which had been
+restrained for six or seven days by the vexatious procedure of the
+governor of Olpar, a town near Surat. By this means, no cotton wool was
+allowed to come down till our ships were fully laden. On the 16th of
+March, having notice that the Camla, from Agra, had been robbed by the
+Deccan army, we resolved to seek restitution upon the ships of the
+Deccan prince and his confederates in this transaction, as we intended
+wintering in the Red Sea. The 19th, the governor of Surat having given
+us satisfaction in regard to the carts, and a supply of powder and shot
+for our money, and promise under his hand for redress of other injuries,
+we dismissed the junk belonging to the prince from duress.
+
+From the 25th of March to the 6th of April, 1621, the winds have been
+S. and S.S.W. or W. and blowing so hard from noon till midnight, raising
+so great a surf on the shore, that no business could be done except on
+the last quarter of the ebb and first of the flood tide. We sailed on
+the 7th April. The 9th, the Eagle and a Dutch pinnace, called the
+Fortune, parted company, being consigned to Acheen and Bantam. The
+London, Hart, Roebuck, and Andrew, were intended for the Red Sea, if not
+too late.
+
+The 1st May, the Andrew and our boats surprised a Portuguese ship of 200
+tons called the St Antonio, which we named the May-flower. Her principal
+lading consisted of rice taken in at Barcelor, whence she had gone to
+Goa, and sailed from thence for Ormus and Muskat on the 8th of April. We
+learnt from this prize, that Ruy Frere de Andrada was busy in repairing
+his ships at Ormus, and that Don Emanuel de Azeredo had departed from
+Gor fifty days before for Ormus, to reinforce Andrada with two galleons,
+one of these being the same in which the viceroy was personally, when he
+engaged our fleet under Captain Downton. During a calm on the 7th, we
+captured a small frigate-built ship called the Jacinth, which we named
+the Primrose, which had come from Mozambique and was bound for Goa.
+Thence to the 13th, we had variable winds, with calms and much rain.
+Finding the May-flower delayed us much, and that our pilots were either
+ignorant or malicious, we resolved to trust to our own endeavours for
+finding an anchoring place, for our safe riding till the strength of the
+adverse monsoon was over, for which purpose we determined upon going to
+Macera.[300]
+
+[Footnote 300: From the latitude of this place, mentioned afterwards in
+the text, this seems to refer to Mazica, an island about sixty miles
+long and fifteen or twenty in breadth, a few miles from the oceanic
+coast of Arabia, in lat. 20° 48' N. and long. 57° 3O' E. from
+Greenwich.--E.]
+
+We descried land on the 2d June, and anchored in seventeen fathoms three
+miles offshore, in lat. 20° 20' N. variation 17° W. We found plenty of
+water in four or five pits, three quarters of a mile from the shore. I
+had forty tons from one well, which we rolled in hogsheads to the beach.
+The people were tractable, but we got little else besides water. A tuft
+of date trees by the watering place bore N.W. by W. from our anchorage,
+and the other end of the island N.E. 1/2 E. five leagues off. The 12th
+we sailed for the N.E. end of the island, and in the afternoon came to
+anchor in a fair bay, having seven fathoms on clean ground, a black oozy
+sand, the N.E. point bearing S. 1/2 a league off, the landing place
+W.S.W. two miles off, and the north part of the bay N. by W. four miles
+off. The latitude of this bay is 20° 30' N. and the variation 17°
+W.[301] In this bay you may ride safely in any depth between five and
+twelve fathoms. It is an excellently healthy place, cold and hungry,
+affording no refreshments except water, enough of which is to be had by
+digging pits; but it is ill to boat except at the usual landing place.
+This place afforded us no better supplies than the former, except that
+we got a few goats and lambs in exchange for canikens. Though good
+anchorage, this bay was much troubled by a tumbling rolling sea, yet we
+resolved to remain here with the Hart and Roebuck till the fury of the
+monsoon were past.
+
+[Footnote 301: The north end of Mazica is in lat. 21° 12", and its south
+end in 20° 15', both N.--E.]
+
+Having separated some time before from the London, our admiral, we sent
+on the 19th of June, one Abdelavie, an inhabitant of this island, as far
+as Zoar with letters in quest of the London. He returned on the 6th July
+with letters in answer, informing us that the London was at Zoar, seven
+leagues within Cape Rasalgat, having watered with difficulty at Teve,
+where their surgeon, Mr Simons, and the chaplain's servant, were
+surprised on shore by the Portuguese and Arabs. The Hart and Roebuck
+sailed from Macera, [Mazica,] on the 6th of August, and anchored in the
+evening of the 8th beside the admiral in the port of Zoar. This road
+differs from that in which we were in, being cairn, but the air was so
+hot as to take away our appetites.
+
+We sailed from Zoar on the 15th of August and returned to Swally roads.
+The 21st September, our whole fleet sailed from Swally, and on the 27th
+we took leave of the fleet bound for Jasques, consisting of the London,
+Jonas, Whale, Dolphin, Lion, Rose, Shilling, Richard, and Robert. The
+1st January, 1622, we were between Johanna and Mayotta, two of the
+Comoro islands. The 29th we anchored in Saldanha roads, [Table Bay,]
+having come thither from Surat in nine weeks and three days, blessed be
+God for our safe and speedy passage. We here watered, bathed in the
+river, caught fish, and buried our letters; purchasing three cows, one
+calf, and four sheep, all unsavoury meat.
+
+We sailed again on the 3d February, and anchored on the 19th at St
+Helena, where we found the Wappen and the Hollandia, two Dutch ships,
+the latter of which caught fire on the 22d, owing to her cloves, which
+had been taken in too green at Amboina. There was likewise a third small
+Dutch ship. They arrived eleven days before us, and it will take them at
+least ten days more to discharge and reload their damaged cloves. We
+sailed from St Helena on the 28th February, and anchored in the Downs on
+the 7th June, 1622.
+
+
+
+SECTION XIII.
+
+RELATION OF THE WAR OF ORMUS, AND THE TAKING OF THAT PLACE BY THE
+ENGLISH AND PERSIANS, IN 1622.[302]
+
+
+"In the Pilgrims of Purchas, vol. II. pp. 1785-1805, there is a long
+confused account of this business, contained in four several sections;
+to which many letters and certificates on the subject are subjoined.
+The _first_ is a brief historical memoir of the foundation of Ormus, from
+a chronicle in the Arabic, said to have been composed by _Pacha
+Turunxa_, perhaps Pacha Turun Shah, one of the kings of that petty
+sovereignty. The _second_ is a relation of the Ormus war, by Mr W.
+Pinder, who appears to have served under Andrew Shilling, during the
+preceding voyage, and sailed as master of the Andrew on this occasion.
+The _third_ is an account of the earlier part of this war of Ormus,
+written by T. Wilson, a surgeon serving in the expedition. The fourth is
+a more particular relation of the whole events of this expedition,
+extracted by Purchas from the journal of Mr Edward Monoxe, agent for the
+East Indian merchants trading in Persia. This last has been chosen, as
+best adapted to give a distinct view of the expedition, but some
+freedoms have been assumed with it, by assisting the narrative from the
+other documents in Purchas, already specified."--E.
+
+[Footnote 302: Purch. Pilgr. II. 179s.]
+
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+At a consultation held in Swally roads on the 14th November, 1621, a
+commission was given by Mr Thomas Rastell, president, and the rest of
+the council, of our factory at Surat, to Captains Richard Blithe and
+John Weddell, who were bound for Jasques, with five good ships and four
+pinnaces. The ships were the London, Jonas, Whale, Dolphin, and Lion,
+and the pinnaces the Shilling, Rose, Robert, and Richard. They were
+directed to sail with the earliest opportunity for Jasques, keeping
+together for their mutual defence against the enemy; and, as the
+Portuguese had disturbed the trade, and made sundry assaults on our
+ships, killing, maiming, and imprisoning our men, they were authorized
+to chase and capture any vessels belonging to the ports or subjects
+under the viceroy of Goa; as likewise, if they met any ships belonging
+to Dabul, Chaul, or other ports of the Deccan, or to the subjects of the
+Zamorin of Calicut, to arrest them, in replacement of goods robbed and
+spoiled by these powers, without embezzling any part of their cargoes,
+that restitution might be made, after due satisfaction rendered on their
+parts. A sixth part of the goods taken from the Portuguese were to be
+distributed as prize, the ship and the rest of the goods to remain to
+the company; and all the prisoners to be retained, that they might be
+exchanged for our countrymen, held by them in miserable bondage. They
+were directed to hasten their business and dispatch at Jasques, if
+possible within thirty days. And as our enemy under Ruy Frere de
+Andrada, was reinforced to six galleons, with other small vessels,
+waiting on the coast of Persia in all likelihood to attack our fleet,
+they were authorized, both defensively and offensively also, to use all
+opportunities or advantages against the Portuguese fleet, even in their
+own ports, if approved by a general council of war.
+
+We arrived in Costack roads on the 23d December, about twenty-seven
+leagues from Jasques, Ormus being in sight about ten leagues W.N.W. by a
+meridional compass. Our factors here informed us, that after our
+sea-fight in the former year, the Portuguese governor of Ormus had
+erected a fort on Kismis, an island within sight of Ormus, to which the
+Persians had laid siege for seven or eight months ineffectually, and had
+lost eight or nine thousand men in the siege; wherefore the Khan or
+prince of Shiras had, by his ministers, demanded the aid of our ships
+against the common enemy, the Portuguese, otherwise threatening to
+detain all the goods and money belonging to the company in Persia. In a
+consultation held on the 26th December on board the Jonas, in which were
+present, Captain Richard Blithe, John Weddell, Edward Monoxe, William
+Baffin, and many others, articles of agreement for giving our aid to the
+Persians against the Portuguese were drawn up, and being translated into
+the Persian language, were forwarded by the governor of the province of
+Mogustan to the Khan of Shiras, then on his way towards Mina, near the
+mouth of the Persian gulf.
+
+In this consultation, it was considered, as it was required of us by the
+Persians, that we should give them aid with our ships and people in this
+war, not only for the purpose of vanquishing the Portuguese navy, but
+for conquering the island and castle of Ormus; and as we were confident
+they would endeavour to force us into this service, by embargoing our
+goods, the governors having already refused to give us camels for their
+carriage from Mina to the ports: Wherefore, the foresaid proposition
+being maturely considered, together with the commission from the factors
+at Surat, warranting us to right ourselves for the great losses and
+hindrances suffered from the Portuguese, by interrupting our trade both
+in India and Persia, and their attack last year against the fleet under
+Captain Shilling; we therefore agreed to proffer the following articles
+to the Khan, for the public benefit and the securing a peaceable and
+profitable trade.
+
+_First_.--In case of conquering the island and castle of Ormus by the
+Persians with our aid, one half of the spoil and purchase of both to
+belong to the English, and the other half to the Persians.
+_Secondly_--The castle of Ormus shall be delivered up to the English,
+with all the ordnance, arms, and ammunition thereunto belonging; and the
+Persians to build another fortress there for themselves, at their own
+charges. _Thirdly_.--The customs of Ormus shall be equally divided
+between the English and the Persians, and the English shall be for ever
+free from customs. _Fourthly_.--All Christians made prisoners in this
+war shall be given up to the disposal of the English, and all Mahomedan
+prisoners to the Persians. _Fifthly_.--The Persians shall be at half the
+charges of the ships employed in this enterprize, in victuals, wages,
+wear-and-tear, and shall furnish all necessary powder and shot at their
+sole expence.
+
+These were the chief articles, besides which several others were agreed
+upon, to be proposed to the Khan. After his arrival at Mina, Mr Bell and
+Mr Monaxe were sent to wait upon him, on the 8th January, 1622, and were
+entertained at a sumptuous banquet. A great feast and triumph was also
+made, in consequence of intelligence that the Shah had conquered a
+great country in Arabia, with its capital Aweiza.[303] Next day, the
+Khan sent his vizier and two other principal officers to give an answer
+to our proposed articles. The _first_ was granted. For the _second_, it
+was substituted that the castle of Ormuz was to be occupied by both
+nations till the King's pleasure was known. The _third_ was granted,
+provided also, that the goods from India belonging to the king and the
+Khan were to pass free of duty. In regard to the _fourth_, reservation
+was made as to the two principal Portuguese captains, Ruy Frere, captain
+of Kismis Castle, and Simon de Mela, governor of Ormus, till the king's
+pleasure were known. Other articles were agreed upon; such as that no
+change was to be made in regard to religion, and the expence of military
+stores was to be divided. The Khan and Mr Bell signed these articles;
+and presently our goods were laden upon the Khan's own camels at free
+cost, which could not be procured before for any money.
+
+[Footnote 303: This assuredly alludes to Ahwas in Khosistan, to the N.W.
+of the lower Euphrates, opposite to Bussrah, which, though not in
+Arabia, is in its immediate neighbourhood, and principally inhabited by
+people of Arabian origin.--E.]
+
+The 10th of January we returned to Costack, and going on board,
+acquainted our commanders with the success of our mission. When the news
+of this agreement became known among the several ships companies, they
+consulted among themselves, and with one voice refused to take any share
+in the business. This broke out first in the London, in which ship fifty
+or sixty of her crew took part in refusing to have any thing to do with
+this warlike measure; but, after taking much pains to reconcile them to
+the propriety and necessity of joining with the Persians, Captain Blithe
+at last prevailed with them, and they promised to go with him wherever
+he chose to lead them. In a day or two, the flame of discontent and
+opposition spread among the other ships, alleging that it was no
+mercantile business, and that it might lead to a breach of the peace
+between our nation and Spain; but formal protests being taken against
+the crews, what with the fear of forfeiting their wages, and a promised
+gratification of a month's pay, they all at last yielded.
+
+We set sail for Ormus on the 19th of January, and anchored on the night
+of the 22d before the town, about two leagues from the castle, expecting
+that the enemy's armada would come out to fight us, consisting of five
+galleons, and some fifteen or twenty frigates, or armed barks; but they
+hauled in so near the castle, that we could not get nigh them. For which
+reason, and because our avowed enemy, Ruy Frere de Andrada, was in his
+newly-erected castle of Kismis, we sailed to that place, where we
+arrived the next day, and were just in time to save the lives of the
+Portuguese, who were no longer able to hold out against the Persians,
+and were willing rather to yield to us than them. After many meetings
+and treaties, they yielded up both themselves and their castle into our
+hands on the 1st February, it being concluded that the whole garrison
+was to depart with their private property to any place except Ormus,
+their commander only remaining in our hands as a pledge for the
+fulfilment of the capitulation. In this service two of our people were
+slain, one of whom was Mr Baffin.[304]
+
+[Footnote 304: Mr Baffin was a mathematician and mariner, to whom our
+northern and north-western voyages are much indebted.--_Purch_.
+
+Hence almost certainly the person to whom Baffin's bay, in the
+north-east of America, owes its name.--E.]
+
+There were about a thousand persons of all sorts in this castle, of whom
+the Portuguese and some Mahometans were sent away: But the Khan required
+certain Mahometans to be given up, who he pretended had revolted from
+him. They were accordingly delivered up, and, though he had formerly
+promised them mercy, he put them all to death. This castle had seventeen
+pieces of ordnance, one of which was a brass pedro, two iron
+demiculverins, four brass sackers, two iron minions, and six iron
+falcons.[305]
+
+[Footnote 305: On a former occasion, we have given an account of the
+various kinds of ordnance used about the 17th century. The _pedro_ was
+probably a gun of large calibre for throwing _stone_ bullets. In modern
+times, cannon are designated by the weights of their respective balls,
+in combination with their being long or short, land or sea, field or
+garrison, single or double fortified, iron or brass.--E.]
+
+Leaving some Englishmen to assist in keeping possession of this fortress
+along with the Persians, according to agreement, we set sail on the 4th
+February for Gambroon, on the mainland of Persia, within three leagues
+of Ormus, and directly opposite. Ruy Frere de Andrada, the late
+commander of Kismis, was sent off for Surat, in the Lion, accompanied by
+the Rose and Richard. The London, Jonas, Whale, and Dolphin, with the
+two prizes of 250 tons each, remained to transport the Persians in
+safety to Ormus. We were royally feasted at Gambroon by the Khan, who
+was much dissatisfied that Andrada and some of the Moors had not been
+delivered up to him, yet dissembled his discontent, in regard of his
+farther need for our ships in the enterprise against Ormus. After the
+feast, all the English gentlemen present were presented with vests, each
+according to his rank.
+
+On the 9th of February we set sail for Ormus, having about two hundred
+Persian boats of all sizes, besides two frigates or barks, and our
+ships, having in them about 2500 or 3000 Persian soldiers, of various
+sorts. We anchored that night about two leagues from the castle; and
+next forenoon all the Persians were landed on the island of Ormus, a
+little way from the town, to which they marched in a confused manner,
+penetrating as far as the Meidan, or market-place, without resistance.
+The market-place was barricadoed and defended for some time by the
+Portuguese with shot and pikes; but the Persians soon made way, with
+small loss, and drove the Portuguese before them into the castle, like
+so many sheep. One Persian only, who first entered, was slain by a pike,
+and he who slew him soon lost his head, his heels being too heavy to
+carry it away.
+
+On first entering the city, the Persian general, named Einam Culi Beg,
+placed captains with detachments of soldiers in various quarters,
+proclaiming that each officer was to be answerable for the safety of the
+quarter assigned to him, and threatening death to all who were found
+pillaging. Some infringing these orders were severely punished, some
+being hanged, others having their ears or noses cut off, and others
+bastinadoed even for trifles. Yet, in two or three days after, the shops
+and houses were forced open, and every man so wearied with carrying away
+plunder all day long, and sleeping so securely at night without any
+proper military precautions, that the Portuguese might easily have slain
+many, if they had ventured upon making a sally.
+
+On the night of our landing, I took possession of a very commodious
+house for a factory, which, for convenience and goodness of its rooms,
+exceeded, as I think, any factory belonging to the Honourable Company.
+But it proved too hot for me on the 13th, in the night, as one of the
+master's mates of the Whale, with others of his companions, after I was
+in bed, by carelessness of candles, while searching for plunder, set a
+room on fire in which were some goods given me in charge by the general.
+Fortunately the wind favoured us, so that the house was not consumed.
+Considering the strength of this city, and that every house was as it
+were a little castle, I was astonished the Portuguese should have
+abandoned it so soon. But it seems they were afraid of being intercepted
+by the Persians in their retreat to the castle, and dreaded that the
+Mahometan inhabitants might have betrayed them.
+
+The Persians began presently to throw up trenches, and daily approached
+nearer the castle, and, with our help, erected batteries for ordnance,
+and sconces or redoubts for securing their men, and protecting the
+trenches. With the cannon from our ships, we sore galled the Portuguese
+ships, forcing them to haul in as close as possible to the castle. On
+the 24th of February, four of our boats set fire to the San Pedro,
+formerly admiral of Andrada's fleet, which put all the rest in great
+danger, but the tide carried her out to sea, and her relics were towed
+on shore at Gambroon by the Arab and other country boats, some iron
+ordnance and shot being got out of her burnt carkass. The Khan was much
+rejoiced at this exploit.
+
+The Persians having succeeded in constructing a mine under one of the
+bastions, which was charged with upwards of forty barrels of powder, it
+was exploded on the 17th of March, by which a practicable breach was
+made in the salient angle of the bastion. The Persians made immediately
+a fierce assault, and Shah Culi Beg got possession of the bastion with
+200 of his bravest men, and maintained himself there for at least three
+hours; but the Portuguese made a brave defence, and with powder-pots,
+scalding lead, and other devices of fire, did much hurt to the
+assailants, burning, scalding, and slaying many of them, so that the
+Persians were at last driven out with considerable loss, most of them
+being wounded, scalded, or scorched. On the same day, the city was set
+on fire in several places, by the command of the Persian general, as was
+reported, because his Arab soldiers lurked among the houses, and could
+not be got forth to do any service in the siege.
+
+To the number of four or five thousand men, we were now cooped up in a
+barren island without shelter, producing nothing in itself except salt;
+and I know not by what mistaken policy the general had been induced to
+send away all the rice and other victuals, by which means we were
+reduced to depend upon the continent for a daily supply of provisions,
+and even water; so that, if a fleet of Portuguese frigates had come, as
+was expected, we must have been famished, as the country boats durst not
+have ventured to us from the main. The rain water in the open cisterns
+was daily wasted, and became brackish, no care being taken to fill the
+jars and private cisterns in almost every house, while it remained good.
+The Persians are quite ignorant in the art of war, for they entered the
+breach without fear, precaution, or means of establishing themselves;
+and they lost with shame what they might have defended with honour. I
+observed other defects in their management, even of the very sinews of
+war; and I am astonished that Shah Abbas, the wonder of our age, should
+have sent his army on this expedition so weakly provided with money,
+arms, ammunition, ships, and all other necessaries. I am even satisfied
+that all the money belonging to the khan was consumed in one month's pay
+to our ships, and I fear we shall have to wait for the rest till the
+plunder is converted into money. In regard to arms and ammunition, they
+have only small pieces, with bows and arrows, and swords, some of their
+chiefs having coats of mail. They were so scarce of powder, that after
+blowing their mine, they had hardly enough to supply the small arms for
+entering the breach, though furnished with twenty or twenty-five barrels
+from our ships. They had not a single scaling-ladder to assist their
+entry. Were we to forsake them, they would soon be completely at a
+stand, yet they have already broken conditions with us in several
+things, and I much fear, when all is done, we shall be paid with
+reversions, and what else they themselves please.
+
+Our ordnance so galled the Portuguese ships from the shore, that a
+galleon was sunk on the 19th of March, and two more on the 20th and 23d.
+The last come ship from Goa, which was their admiral, and one of the
+others, were, I think, sacrificed by the policy of the governor, that
+the garrison might have no means of escape, and might therefore defend
+themselves manfully to the last, in hopes of relief from Goa, though
+some thought they went down in consequence of injuries from sunken
+rocks, in hauling them so near the castle to get them out of the range
+of our battery.
+
+On the 27th, news was brought me that some of the Portuguese were come
+from the castle to treat of peace, upon which I repaired to the
+general's tent, where I could well perceive, by the countenances of our
+two English commanders, that I was by no means welcome: But, to requite
+them in their own coin, both they and I soon saw that none of us were
+acceptable to the Persians, for they long delayed bringing in the
+Portuguese messenger, in hopes we would have gone away, but at length,
+seeing we remained, he was brought in. The drift of his speech was to
+the following effect:--"His captain had sent him to kiss the hands of
+the general, and to ask the reason of making war upon the Portuguese,
+who were friends to the Persians, and thought it strange, considering
+their ancient league and friendship, that so great a war should be made
+only for one or two wells of water. Besides, that the governor and
+people of Ormus were not to blame for what had been done at Kismis by
+Ruy Frere de Andrada; yet were they willing, so far as might consist
+with the honour of their sovereign, to purchase peace, which they needed
+not to do either from fear or weakness, having above a thousand
+able-bodied men in the castle, with provisions and water for many
+months; besides which, they were in daily expectation of succours from
+Goa. He concluded by saying, that the Persians would find it a hard
+matter to win the castle, as they were resolved to defend themselves to
+the last man."
+
+The latter part of this speech, consisting of bravado, was by no means
+pleasing to the Persian general, who desired the messenger to declare
+the purpose of his coming. On which he said, the governor wished to know
+what the Persian general would have? To this the general answered, that
+he would have the castle; and with that answer the messenger was
+dismissed, without even the offer of a cup of wine, if I had not caused
+one to be given him. I suspect he brought a more substantial message,
+which was omitted on account of our presence, having been so instructed
+by Shah Culi Beg, in whose house he was at least for an hour before he
+was brought before the general. I fear therefore some sinister designs
+of the Persians, which a few days will discover.
+
+Our captains, by means of their interpreters, now moved their own
+affairs with the general, to which he gave no great heed, but desired
+that business might be deferred for some time; yet had he that very day
+earnestly entreated them to send him a quantity of powder from the
+ships, meaning that night to attempt blowing up the castle, for which
+the mines were all ready, and he wanted nothing but powder. They had
+accordingly sent him thirty-four barrels, for which forwardness I fear
+the Company at home will give them little thanks.
+
+The 28th March, understanding that two chief men of the Portuguese
+garrison were in Shah Culi Beg's house, where they had been four or five
+hours in conference with the Persian general, without sending to us,
+which increased our suspicions that the Persians meant to deal
+fraudulently with us; the two English commanders and I went together to
+the tent of the Persian general, and expressed our dislike of this
+underhand manner of proceeding. We stated, that we were partakers with
+them in this war, in which we had hazarded ourselves, our ships, and our
+goods, besides the hindrance we sustained by losing the monsoon, and
+that we ought to be equal participators in all treaties and proceedings,
+as well as in the war, and desired therefore to know what they had
+concluded, or meant to conclude, with the Portuguese. To this he
+answered, that nothing had been done, neither should any thing be
+concluded without acquainting us. This was a mere empty compliment,
+which all his actions belied. We must, however, be content to suffer all
+with patience: Yet, were it not for our merchants and woods in Persia,
+we could easily have remedied this affair, and have brought the
+Portuguese to such terms as we pleased. As matters stand, however, we
+are so tied down, we must be patient, and I fear things will turn out
+very ill, though they pretend all things shall be done to our
+contentment.
+
+About noon this day, seeing many Arabs in the Meidan armed with pikes
+and guns, whom I did not usually see so armed, I at length observed them
+ranged upon both sides of the market-place, and presently afterwards two
+Portuguese gentlemen passed, attended by six or eight pages and
+servants, one of whom carried an umbrella over their heads. They were
+accompanied by Shah Culi Beg, and other chief Persians, who conducted
+them to the house of Agariza of Dabul. Though uninvited, I went there
+also, and intruded into their company, where I found the Persian general
+and other chiefs, his assistants and counsellors. The general gave me a
+kind welcome, and made me sit down next himself, which I did not refuse,
+that the Portuguese might see we were in grace and favour. Having made
+my obeisance to the Persians, I then saluted the Portuguese officers,
+who returned the compliment, after which I had some general conversation
+with them, not pertaining to the great purpose in hand, of which I did
+not presume to speak, till the general gave me occasion, which was not
+until after a collation of _pilaw_, and other dishes, after the fashion
+of Persia.
+
+The collation being ended, the general asked them what was now their
+desire. They answered, that the captain of the castle had given them
+written instructions, but had desired them to make their proposals to
+the Khan himself, who now resided at Gombroon, if they might be
+permitted to wait upon him. To this the general answered, that he durst
+not allow them, unless the Khan were first made acquainted with their
+desire. I could plainly perceive that this proceeded only from affected
+delays on both sides, to give time for attaining their several purposes.
+The Portuguese then proceeded to complain, as formerly, against Ruy
+Frere, as if he durst have presumed to seize and fortify Kismis without
+orders from the king his master. They alleged also that the affair was
+in itself of no moment, being only a barren island with a well or two.
+To this the Persian general replied, it was of no matter what might be
+its value, but they had gone to war against the king of Persia and his
+subjects, for which their castle of Ormus must make satisfaction;
+wherefore, if they would surrender the castle without any more
+bloodshed, they should have good quarter and kind usage. The Portuguese
+said they had no commission to treat of any such matter, and so the
+conference ended, and they were dismissed.
+
+Notwithstanding of the Portuguese being refused leave to go to the Khan,
+they had licence that same night, and were sent over to treat with him
+at Gambroon. I could never know the certainty of the proposed treaty,
+but shall here insert what I heard reported on the subject. They
+proposed, in the first place, to the Khan, to raise the siege, and
+permit them to enjoy their city and castle of Ormus as formerly, in
+consideration of which, they offered to pay 200,000 tomans in hand, and
+the yearly rent they had formerly paid to the king of Ormus, from the
+revenue of the custom-house, which, as I have heard, was 140,000 rials
+of eight or Spanish dollars yearly. But some said, besides the 200,000
+tomans in hand, they offered as much yearly. [306] It was reported that
+the Khan demanded 500,000 tomans in hand, equal to £172,418:10:7
+sterling,[307] and an yearly rent of 200,000 tomans.
+
+[Footnote 306: A toman, by the data in the text immediately following,
+is about seven shillings; hence 200,000 tomans are equal to £70,000
+sterling.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 307: At the former computation, this sum is equal to £175,000;
+and the conversion in the text gives 6s. 11-3/4d, and a small fraction
+more for each toman, being very near 7s. which is more convenient.--E.]
+
+The 2d April, with the aid of the English, the Persians blew up two
+other mines, by which a fair and practicable breach was opened, through
+which the besiegers might have entered without much difficulty, yet was
+there no assault made. Having noticed this carefully, Captain Weddell
+went to the Persian general to learn his purposes; when, to excuse the
+backwardness of his people, he pretended that the breach was too
+difficult to be assaulted with any hope of success. Yet we knew the
+contrary, as an English youth, who was servant to the master of the
+Jonas, bolder than any of the Persians, had gone up the breach to the
+very top of the castle wall, and told us it was as easily ascendible as
+a pair of stairs, and broad enough for many men to go abreast. In
+representing this to the general, and asking what were his future plans
+of proceeding, he told us he would be ready with another mine in three
+days. This I believed to be true, for his mining is to procure gold, not
+to make breaches, unless breach of promise to us, which he can easily
+do; for of late they have not performed any of their engagements, yet
+will not this teach us to look to ourselves.
+
+The greatest hurt done by the Portuguese to the Persians in the assault
+on the castle, was by means of powder-pots, by which many of the
+assailants were scorched and severely burned. To guard against this, the
+Khan has now sent over many coats and jackets of leather, as not so
+liable to catch fire as their calico coats, quilted or stuffed with
+cotton wool. Yet, according to the English proverb, _The burnt child
+dreads the fire;_ notwithstanding their leathern coats, none of them are
+hardy enough to attempt this new breach, though much easier to enter
+than the former, any farther than to pillage certain bales of _bastas_
+and other stuffs which have fallen down from a barricade or breast-work,
+thrown up by the Portuguese for defending the top of the breach from the
+fire of the Persians.
+
+On the 5th of April the Persian general had news that 100,000 maunds of
+powder were arrived from Bahrein. On the 12th, a Portuguese came to the
+Persian general, having escaped from the castle, and gave accounts of
+the great wants and weaknesses of the garrison, insomuch, that six or
+eight died daily of the flux, chiefly owing to their having nothing to
+drink, but corrupted brackish water, of which even they have so little
+as to be put on short allowance, so that several have died of thirst.
+Their only food consists of rice and salt fish, both of which would
+require a good allowance of drink. Notwithstanding all this, the Persian
+general wastes his time in constructing new mines, of which he has no
+less than three in hand at this time, as if he proposed to blow up the
+wall all round about, before making any fresh assault. On the night of
+the 12th, one of our frigates or barks, which belonged to the London,
+being on guard alone, to prevent the escape of the Portuguese frigates,
+was clapped on board by two of these at once, but beat them both off. I
+know not what might be the loss of the Portuguese on this occasion, but
+two of our men were slain, and seven wounded; yet, had not our black
+rowers forsaken them, our people might easily have taken the assailants.
+
+The 14th, the Persians sprung another mine, by which a very assailable
+breach was made, yet no assault was attempted. On this occasion, the
+mine had to be sprung before it was quite ready, because the Portuguese
+had already come so near it with a counter mine, that the Persians were
+afraid of their mine being rendered useless before they could place
+their powder. Another deserter came from the castle on the 15th, who
+confirmed the report given by the former, and told us that the two
+frigates which had assailed ours had come from Muskat, with the son of
+the deceased Don Francisco de Sousa, late governor of the castle of
+Ormus, who had come on purpose to carry away his mother and other women
+from the castle.
+
+At this time, the Moors who had surrendered to us from the castle of
+Kismis, were delivered up to the Persian general, at his earnest
+request, and partly with their own consent, on promise of being pardoned
+for having served under the Portuguese against their own king and
+country, and of being provided for and employed in the siege of Ormus.
+He seemed to ratify this promise, both to them and us, by entertaining
+some of their chiefs in our presence, with much apparent courtesy, even
+giving fine new vests to five or six of the principal officers. Yet next
+morning he caused eighty of their heads to be cut off, and sent the five
+or six newly-vested chiefs to the Khan at Gambroon, to receive their
+final doom, which was soon settled, as they were sentenced to the same
+fate with their fellows. Mir Senadine, their chief captain, was executed
+by the hands of Shere Alli, governor of Mogustan, who had married his
+daughter, and yet put his father-in-law to death with as much
+willingness as if he had been his mortal enemy.
+
+The 17th of April, the Persians sprung another mine, closely adjoining
+their first. This did not produce the effect expected, as it burst out
+at the side, carrying part of the wall along with it, yet did little or
+no harm upwards, which was the point aimed at, on purpose to widen the
+former breach. Yet it encouraged the Persian general to try another
+assault, with at least 2000 soldiers. They ran up the breach with great
+resolution, into part of a bulwark or bastion, which they might easily
+have gained, had not their haste run their resolution out of breath;
+insomuch, that eight or ten Portuguese, assisted by a few blacks, armed
+only with rapiers, made them give ground and retire to the outer skirt
+of the bulwark, where there was not room for forty men to face the
+enemy. They here endeavoured, however, to entrench themselves; but,
+before they could establish a lodgement, the Portuguese plied two or
+three pieces of ordnance upon them from a flanking battery, which sent
+some scores of the Persians with news to their prophet _Mortus Alli_
+that more of his disciples would shortly be with them. This accordingly
+was the case, chiefly owing to their own ignorance and cowardice; for,
+had they not made a stand in that place, but rushed pell-mell along with
+the Portuguese into the castle, they might have carried it with less
+than half the loss they sustained that day to little purpose. Had I not
+been an eye-witness, I could hardly have believed the stupid ignorance
+of the Persian general on this occasion. He had two breaches, almost
+equally good, yet applied all his men to the assault of one only,
+instead of attempting both at one time. Besides, he had at least eighty
+or an hundred scaling-ladders, yet not one of them was brought near the
+castle walls. His soldiers hung clustering on the breach, like a swarm
+of bees, or a flock of sheep at a gap, none having the heart to enter,
+while the Portuguese gleaned away five or six at a shot, sometimes more,
+driving forwards their black soldiers to throw powder-pots among the
+Persians.
+
+The assault was renewed on the 18th, but with more harm to the Persians
+than the Portuguese. During the intervening night, two blacks made signs
+to the Persians on the top of the breach, that they wished to come over
+to them, and were drawn up with ropes. By these it was learned that the
+captain of the castle had been wounded in the head by a stone; that
+there were not above an hundred men in the garrison able to handle their
+arms: and that their water grew daily more scanty and worse in quality,
+by which the mortality continually increased. They reported also that
+great difference in opinion prevailed among the Portuguese, some wishing
+to endeavour to escape by sea, while others held it more honourable to
+sell their lives at a dear rate, by defending the castle to the last
+extremity, and proposed, when they could no longer hold out, to put all
+their women and treasure into a house and blow them up, that the
+Persians might neither enjoy their wealth nor abuse their wives; and,
+when this was done, to rush upon the Persians, and so end their days.
+
+In the evening of the 19th, the Persians made another effort to press
+forwards, and got possession of the entire bulwark, forcing the
+Portuguese to retire farther within the castle. In this conflict many of
+the Portuguese were wounded, and sore scalded with fire-pots, in the
+management of which the Persians had now become expert, though many of
+them had paid dearly for their instruction. In this conflict four
+Portuguese were slain, and their heads brought to the Persian general.
+In this art of cutting off heads, the Persians are particularly cunning,
+insomuch, that I do not think there is an executioner in all Germany
+that can excel them. No sooner does a Persian lay hold of an enemy, than
+off goes his head at one blow of his scymitar.[308] He then makes a hole
+in the ear or cheek with his dagger, by which he will sometimes bring
+three or four heads at once to his general. When it is proposed to send
+these heads taken in war to be seen by the king or the khan, they very
+adroitly flea off the skin of the head and face, which they stuff up
+with straw like a foot-ball, and so send them by whole sackfulls.[309]
+
+[Footnote 308: This, however, is to the praise of the Persians, as good
+swordsmen, on which account the Turks fear coming to hand blows with
+them.--_Purch_.]
+
+[Footnote 309: In Turkey they manage this barbarous trophy of success
+more conveniently, as the Grand Signior is satisfied with a display of
+the ears of his enemies preserved in salt.--E.]
+
+This night, one of the frigates that came from Muskat for Douna de
+Sousa, made her escape, no doubt very richly freighted. Her consort,
+which likewise attempted to get away, was chased in again. That which
+escaped, being hailed by the Arab boats that lay in wait to intercept
+the passage, got off by using the watch-word usual between the English
+and Arabs, _Ingres ingresses,_ which had not been once changed since the
+commencement of this enterprize, in which oversight both the Persians
+and English were highly blameable, as, by the continual use of this
+watch-word, it had come to the knowledge of the Portuguese, who thus
+used it to their great benefit.
+
+During the night of the 20th April, the other frigate made an effort to
+escape, but was intercepted and taken by the frigate and pinnace
+belonging to the London. This frigate was employed to carry away the
+Portuguese _almirante,_ named Luis de Brito, a kinsman to the viceroy of
+Goa, but the captain of the castle would not permit him to go away; and
+the men belonging to this frigate, being seven persons, fearing the
+capture of the castle and desirous to secure their own lives, stole away
+without leave.
+
+The 21st, the Persians made a display of making themselves masters of
+the castle by storm; but, while we expected to see them put this bold
+measure in execution, I discovered that they and the Portuguese were
+engaged in a parley. While I was preparing to wait on the Persian
+general, to enquire the cause of this sudden change of measures, I met a
+messenger from our English commanders, informing me that a boat had come
+off to our ships from the castle, bearing a flag of truce, and desiring
+my presence on board to see what was the purpose of this communication.
+On my getting on board the London, I found two Portuguese there, with
+the following letters from the captain of the castle, and the almirante:
+
+   "There hath been such ancient friendship between the
+   Portuguese and English nations, that, considering the present
+   war at this place, we ought to come to a mutual good
+   understanding. From what I see of the mines made by the
+   Persians, by which one of my bulwarks is already won, I am
+   of opinion these could not have been constructed without
+   your aid. Wherefore, I request you would be the means of
+   procuring peace for me with the Persians, if the same may
+   be done with your and their good pleasure, yet so that I may
+   not lose my credit, nor you fail to gain honour. Thus, not
+   else, our Lord keep you," &c.
+
+   _Simon de Mela Pereira_.
+
+   "This castle is so hard pressed, that the Persians demand
+   us to surrender by capitulation, but which we will not consent
+   to: For, when reduced to that necessity, we will call
+   upon your worships for that purpose, as it were not reasonable
+   for us to capitulate with the infidels when you are present.
+   We hold it more humane to deliver our innocent women,
+   and other unnecessary people, to the rigour of our own
+   weapons, than to the clemency of the Persians; and that you
+   might know this our purpose, I have written these lines to
+   accompany the letter from our captain. What else you may
+   wish to know, you may learn from the bearer of these letters,
+   to whom you may give the same credit as to myself. And so
+   God keep your worships," &c.
+
+   _Luis de Brito Dar_.
+
+   Dated 1st May, 1622.[310]
+
+Taking these letters into consideration, and commiserating their
+situation as Christians, it was resolved to give them a favourable
+answer, which was done accordingly in a letter to the Captain Simon de
+Mela, offering to become an intermedium for procuring them such
+conditions from the Persians as might save the lives of the Christians
+who still remained in the castle, which we had in our power to warrant,
+and were willing to shew them such farther courtesy as might tend to
+their relief, as far as we could see. We desired him therefore to put
+his demands in writing, and send them to us as soon as possible. A
+similar answer was written to the almirante, and with these the two
+messengers were sent back to the castle in one of our own boats. They
+soon returned with other letters from the captain and almirante, saying,
+"That they left themselves entirely in our hands, the necessity of their
+situation not allowing time for farther writing, lest the Persians might
+in the mean while break in and put them all to the sword."
+
+[Footnote 310: The 1st of May, _new style_, was the 21st April, _old
+style_; the difference being then ten days.--E.]
+
+Upon this we addressed ourselves to the Persian general, requesting him
+to grant a truce of two days to the distressed Portuguese, in which time
+we might treat with them for such conditions as might be at the same
+time beneficial for the Persians and ourselves. At length, a Persian
+officer and I were deputed to go into the castle to treat with the
+Portuguese, and they also desired our vice-admiral, Mr Woodcock, might
+accompany us. We all three went to the castle gate, but could not be
+allowed to enter; yet were met by Luis de Brito, the Portuguese
+almirante, and five or six other _cavalieros_, but did not see the
+captain, as the inferior officers and soldiers had mutinied against him,
+and detained him as a prisoner. Our whole conference, therefore, was
+with the almirante, who chiefly addressed himself to Captain Woodcock,
+our almirante, or vice-admiral.
+
+Mir Adul Hassan, and Pulot Beg, had been sent for to the ship, where
+some persons had embezzled a portion of treasure, as we now wished them
+to be present at the conference on the part of the Khan. They came
+accordingly to the English house, when one of them made a long speech,
+saying how kindly the Khan esteemed the services and assistance given by
+the English in this war, which he should never forget, nor allow to pass
+unrewarded. They next declared that the Khan intended to proceed, after
+the surrender of Ormus, to besiege both Muskat and Sware, and therefore
+that the Portuguese ought on no account to be allowed to go to either of
+these places. Lastly, they insinuated basely and dishonourably, that we
+should betray the Portuguese captain, and five or six more of his
+principal officers, into their hands, as this would tend greatly to the
+honour and satisfaction of the Khan, by enabling him to present them to
+Shah Abas. On hearing this vile and dishonourable proposal, I left the
+room, that my ears might not be contaminated by such abominable
+conditions; saying, at my departure, to these Persians, that I would not
+be guilty of consenting to so infamous a business for a whole houseful
+of gold.
+
+The Portuguese being reduced to such extremity as to be under the
+necessity of surrendering on any terms that might save their lives from
+the cruelty of the Persians, sent on the morning of the 23d, offering to
+put themselves into our hands, on condition that we furnished them with
+the means of being conveyed either to Muskat or India. We agreed to this
+proposal, on which Captain Blithe and I went as hostages into the
+castle, to see them safely set out; the Persian general promising that
+not one of his soldiers or men should enter the castle till all the
+Portuguese were gone out, and that only three of his people and three of
+ours should sit at the gate, to see that they did not carry away any
+thing of value. This the Persians watched so narrowly, that they most
+basely searched and abused the women. But the king of Ormus with his
+rich vizier, together with their women, treasure, and servants, were all
+conveyed over the breach in the wall, and not a single Englishman called
+or allowed to see what they carried out with them. Not only they, but
+all other Mahometans and Banyans, with their treasure and best things,
+were conveyed out of the castle in the same manner; whole bales of
+goods, with boxes and caskets full of treasure, to an unknown amount,
+were carried at the same time over the breaches. No sooner were the
+gates opened for letting out the Portuguese, but at least forty Persians
+got in and spread themselves about the castle, besides whom, some of the
+ruder sort among the English got in likewise, whose coming in I fear was
+the cause of the Persians doing the same, judging themselves as worthy
+of this liberty as our people.
+
+Before mid-day of the 24th, both the Persians and English began to
+pillage in a most shameful manner, so that I was both grieved and
+ashamed, yet could see no means of remedy. The Persians drove out the
+poor sick, wounded, and scorched Christians, who were not able to help
+themselves, so that my heart yearned with compassion to see their woeful
+plight. In the evening, the Khan of Shiras came over, as if in triumph,
+to view the castle and its great ordnance, of which there were near
+three hundred pieces,[311] part of which belonged to the galleons, and
+the rest to the castle. This evening, the commanders and I, wishing to
+retain possession of the church in which we had placed a quantity of
+plate and treasure, for its better security against being embezzled, our
+design was utterly denied by Pulot Beg, who told our commanders, in
+plain terms, that they might lie out of doors. Being justly incensed at
+this, we all three left the castle, the two captains going on board
+their ships, while I went to the city; but, as the tide was up, and I
+could not get a boat, I had to remain at the castle wall till near
+midnight. At this time there came about sixty Persians, by their own
+report, sent by the Khan to prevent the Arabs from conveying away any of
+the ordnance which lay by the shore, but I suspect their real object was
+to cut the throats of the poor Christians who lay at the shore, for want
+of boats to carry them on board; but fortunately they were protected by
+an English guard. Our chief business the whole of this day was to see
+the poor Portuguese sent safely out of the castle, most of them so
+weakened by divers maladies, but chiefly by famine, and many of them so
+noisome by their putrified wounds, and scorchings with gunpowder, that
+their pitiful cries and complaints might have moved pity in a heart of
+stone; yet such was the cruel disposition of the Persians, that they
+drove them out of the castle like so many dogs, stripping many of them
+even of their shirts.
+
+[Footnote 311: In a shorter relation of this siege, by Mr W. Pinder, the
+ordnance in the castle of Ormus are thus enumerated:--Fifty-three pieces
+mounted, of the following descriptions,--four brass cannons, six brass
+demi-cannons, sixteen brass cannons-pedro, nine brass culverins, two
+brass demi-culverins, three iron demi-culverins, ten brass basses, one
+iron minion, one iron culverin, one iron cannon-pedro. Besides
+ninety-two brass pieces not mounted, and seven brass bastels which they
+had landed from the ships that were sunk. In all, 152 pieces.--E.]
+
+On the evening of the 27th, we allowed the Portuguese to depart for Goa,
+to the number of 2500 persons, including men, women, and children, to
+whom we gave our two prizes, the Robert and Shilling, for their
+transport, with victuals and water necessary for the voyage, and a pass
+to free them from any molestation, in case they met with any of our
+ships at sea. Besides these, there were upwards of an hundred persons,
+so maimed or sick as to be incapable of being sent off at this time, for
+want of room in these two ships.
+
+The king of Ormus was very poor, and lived chiefly on a pension or
+allowance of 140,000 rees, allowed him by the king of Spain, with some
+small reserved petty customs. In rummaging among his papers, we found
+the copy of a letter from him to the king of Spain, complaining loudly
+of the injustice of the Portuguese, and charging them with the entire
+overthrow of the kingdom of Ormus.[312]
+
+[Footnote 312: Besides this letter, too long and uninteresting for
+insertion, there are several other letters and documents in the Pilgrims
+at this place, so much in the same predicament as to be here
+omitted.--E.]
+
+When we expected to have received 1200 tomans[313] from Pulot Beg, who
+was chief commissioner under the Khan of Shiras, as our pay for the time
+occupied in this enterprize, he contrived to make us a larger sum in
+their debt, under pretence of embezzling the plunder in the castle;
+while we, on the other hand, made counter demands of a much larger sum
+due to us from the Persians, in the same manner. At length, three months
+pay were allowed, and our other demands were shifted off, as he
+pretended to have no power to liquidate them without an order from the
+Khan. After business was ended, our misery began, occasioned by the
+insufferable heat of Ormus, and the disorders of our own people in
+drinking arrack, and other excesses no less injurious; through which
+such diseases arose among our people, that three-fourths of them were
+dangerously sick, and many died so suddenly, that the plague was feared
+to have got among them, although no symptoms of that dreadful malady as
+yet appeared. This extremity lasted for fourteen days, during which
+time, six or seven of our men died every day; but after this, it pleased
+God to stay the mortality, and the rest recovered. Ten pieces of
+ordnance belonging to the Portuguese, were taken into our ships, to
+replace that number of our own which had been broken or otherwise
+spoiled during the siege. Our fleet was detained till the 1st September,
+owing to the shifting of the monsoon, and waiting its return. Leaving
+Ormus on that day, we arrived in Swally roads on the 24th of that month,
+where the London, Jonas, and Lion, loaded for England, and sailed
+homewards bound on the 30th December. Before setting sail, news was
+brought of sinking three Portuguese carracks off the port of
+Masulipatam, by the English and Dutch in conjunction.
+
+[Footnote 313: This must be a gross error, as by the value of the toman
+formerly given, the sum in the text very little exceeds £400. Purchas
+mentions, in a side-note, that he had heard the English received £20,000
+for this service from the Persians.--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+In the Annals of the East India Company,[314] the English are said on
+this occasion to have received a proportion of the plunder acquired at
+Ormus, and a grant of the moiety of the customs at Gambroon, which
+place, in the sequel, became the principal station of their trade with
+Persia and other places in the Persian gulf. The treaty made in 1615 by
+Mr Connock was also renewed, and an additional phirmaund granted by the
+Sophi, allowing them to purchase whatever quantity of Persian silks they
+might think proper, in any part of his dominions, with the privilege of
+bringing their goods from Gambroon to Ispahan free of duties.
+
+[Footnote 314: Vol. I. p. 236. The historiographer makes, however, a
+small mistake, naming Ruy Frere de Andrada as chief commander of the
+Portuguese at Ormus, who only commanded in a subordinate fortress at
+Kismis.--E.]
+
+In consequence of the war of Ormus, a claim was set up in 1624 by the
+crown and the Duke of Buckingham, as lord high admiral of England, by
+which the Company was demanded to pay a proportion of the prize-money,
+which their ships were supposed to have obtained in the seas bordering
+on the countries within the limits of their exclusive charter. In order
+to substantiate these claims, Captains Weddell, Blithe, Clevenger,
+Beversham, and other officers of the Company's ships were examined, and
+particularly those who had been employed against Ormus. According to
+their statements, it appeared that the amount of this prize-money was
+calculated at £100,000 and 240,000 rials of eight, but without taking
+into view the charges and losses incurred by the Company on this
+occasion, and by their ships being called off from commercial
+engagements, to act as ships of war for the protection of their trade
+against the Portuguese, and in the assistance of the government of
+Persia, by which they had been compelled, either to engage in this war,
+or to relinquish a trade in which they had expended large sums, together
+with the loss of all their goods then in Persia. At last the Company was
+obliged to compound, by payment of £10,000 to the Duke of Buckingham in
+discharge of his claim, and received an order from the secretary of
+state, Sir Edward Conway, to pay a similar sum also to the crown.--E.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION XIV.
+
+
+ACCOUNT OF THE MASSACRE OF AMBOINA, IN 1623.[315]
+
+In the preceding sections of this chapter, the early commercial voyages
+of the English East India Company have been detailed; and it is now
+proposed to conclude this part of our arrangement, by a brief narrative
+of the unjustifiable conduct of the Dutch at Amboina, in cruelly
+torturing and executing several Englishmen and others on false pretences
+of a conspiracy, but the real purpose of which was to appropriate to
+themselves the entire trade of the spice islands, Amboina, Banda, and
+the Moluccas. They effectually succeeded in this nefarious attempt, and
+preserved that rich, but ill-got source of wealth, for almost two
+hundred years; till recently expelled from thence, and from every other
+commercial or colonial possession in Asia, Africa, and America. A just
+retribution for submitting to, or seconding rather, the revolutionary
+phrenzy of French democracy; for which they now deservedly suffer, under
+the iron sceptre of the modern Atilla.
+
+[Footnote 315: Purch. Pilgr. II. 1853. Harris, I. 877.]
+
+In giving a short narrative of this infamous transaction, besides the
+original account of Purchas, abridged from a more extended relation
+published at the time by the East India Company, advantage has been
+taken of the account given by Harris of the same event, which is fuller
+and better connected than that of Purchas, who most negligently garbled
+this story, under pretence of abbreviation. Harris appears evidently to
+have used the authorised narrative published by the Company, in drawing
+up his account of the event. There are other documents, relative to this
+tragical event, both in the Pilgrims of Purchas and the Collection by
+Harris, particularly the Dutch justificatory memorial, in which they
+endeavour to vindicate their conduct, and to shew that the English
+merited the lingering tortures and capital punishments to which they
+were condemned; to which is added a reply or refutation, published by
+order of the English Company. But the abridged narrative contained in
+this section seems quite sufficient on so disgusting a subject,
+especially so long after the events which it records.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+After the fruitless issue of two several treaties, for arranging the
+differences that had taken place in eastern India, between the English
+and Hollanders respecting the trade of the spice islands, the first at
+London in 1613, and the second at the Hague in 1616, a third negociation
+was entered into at London in 1619, by which a solemn compact was
+concluded upon for settling these disputes, and full and fair
+arrangement made for the future proceedings of the servants of both
+Companies in the Indies, as well in regard to their trade and commerce,
+as to other matters. Among other points, it was agreed, in consideration
+of the great losses the Dutch pretended to have sustained, both in men
+and expence, in conquering the trade of the isles, namely, the Moluccas,
+Banda, and Amboina, from the Spaniards and Portuguese, and in the
+erection of forts for securing the same, that the Hollanders were to
+enjoy two-third parts of that trade, and the English one-third; the
+expences of the forts and garrisons to be maintained by taxes and
+impositions, to be levied ratably on the merchandize. In consequence of
+this agreement, the English East India Company established certain
+factories, for managing their share of this trade, some at the Moluccas,
+some at Banda, and others at Amboina.
+
+The island of Amboina, near Ceram, is about forty leagues in circuit,
+and gives its name also to some other small adjacent isles. This island
+produces cloves, for the purpose of procuring which valuable spice, the
+English had five several factories, the head and rendezvous of all being
+at the town of Amboina, in which at the first, Mr George Muschamp was
+chief factor, who was succeeded by Mr Gabriel Towerson; having authority
+over the subordinate factories of Hitto and Larica on the same island,
+and at Loho and Cambello on a point of the neighbouring island of Ceram.
+On the island of Amboina and the point of Ceram, the Hollanders have
+four forts, the chief of all being at the town of Amboina, which is very
+strong, having four bastions or bulwarks, on each of which there are six
+great cannons, most of them brass. One side of this castle is washed by
+the sea, and the other is protected on the land side by a very deep
+ditch, four or five fathoms broad, always filled by the sea. The
+garrison of this castle consists of about 200 Dutch soldiers, and one
+company of free burghers; besides which there are three or four hundred
+_mardykers_, by which name the free natives are known, who reside in the
+town, and are always ready to serve in the castle at an hour's warning.
+There are likewise, for the most part, several good Dutch ships in the
+roads, both for the protection of this place by sea, and for the
+purposes of trade, as this is the central rendezvous of trade for the
+Banda islands, as well as for Amboina. At this place, the English
+factory was established in the town, under the protection of the castle,
+in a house of their own, where they lived as they thought in security,
+both in consideration of the ancient league of amity between the two
+nations, and in virtue of the firm compact of union, made by the late
+treaty of 1619, already mentioned.
+
+The English factory continued here for about two years, trading
+conjunctly with the Hollanders under the treaty. During this period
+there occurred several differences and debates between the servants of
+the two companies. The English complained that the Hollanders not only
+lavished much unnecessary charges, in buildings and other needless
+expences upon the forts and otherwise, but also paid the garrisons in
+victuals and Coromandel cloths, which they issued to the soldiers at
+three or four times the value which they cost, yet would not allow the
+English proportion of the charges to be advanced in like manner, but
+insisted always on their paying in ready money: Thus drawing from the
+English, who only were bound to contribute one-third part, more than
+two-thirds of the just and true charges. Upon this head there arose
+frequent disputes, and the complaints of the English were conveyed to
+Jacatra, now called Batavia, in Java, to the _council of defence_ of
+both nations, there residing. The members of that council not being able
+to agree upon these points of difference, the complaints were
+transmitted to Europe, to be settled between the two companies; or, in
+default of their agreement, by the king and the states general, pursuant
+to one of the articles of the before-mentioned treaty, providing against
+such contingencies. In the meantime, these, and other differences and
+discontents between the English and Dutch, daily continued and
+increased, till at length this knot, which all the tedious controversies
+at Amboina and Jacatra were unable to untie, was cut asunder by the
+sword, in the following manner.
+
+About the 11th February, 1622, _old style_, or 21st of that month, 1623,
+_new style_, a Japanese soldier belonging to the Dutch garrison of
+Amboina castle, walking one night upon the wall, fell into conversation
+with a centinel, in the course of which he asked several questions
+respecting the strength of the fortifications and the number of its
+garrison. It is to be observed, that most of the Japanese in Amboina
+were actually soldiers in the Dutch service, yet not in these trusty
+bands which always lodged within the castle, but only occasionally
+called in from the town to assist in its defence. This Japanese, in
+consequence of his conference with the centinel, was soon after
+apprehended on suspicion of treason, and put to the torture by the
+Dutch, to extort confession. While suffering under the torture, he was
+induced to confess, that he and some others of his countrymen had
+plotted to take possession of the castle. Several other Japanese were
+consequently apprehended, and examined by torture; as also a Portuguese,
+who was guardian or superintendent of the slaves belonging to the Dutch.
+While these examinations were going on, which continued during three or
+four days, some of the English, then resident at Amboina, were several
+times in the castle on business, saw the prisoners, and heard of the
+tortures they had undergone, and of the crime laid to their charge; yet
+during all this time, never once suspected that this affair had any
+connection with themselves, being unconscious of any evil intentions,
+and having held no conversation with the prisoners.
+
+At this time, one Abel Price, surgeon to the English factory at Amboina,
+was a prisoner in the castle, for having offered or attempted, in a fit
+of drunkenness, to set a Dutchman's house on fire. The Dutch shewed this
+man some of the Japanese whom they had tortured, telling him they had
+confessed that the English were in confederacy with them, in the plot
+for seizing the castle, and threatened him with similar or worse
+tortures, if he did not confess the same; and accordingly, on the 15th
+February, O.S. they gave him the torture, and soon made him confess
+whatever they were pleased to direct. That same morning, about nine
+o'clock, they sent for Captain Gabriel Towerson, and the other
+Englishmen belonging to the factory at Amboina, to come to speak with
+the governor of the castle; on which they all went, except one, who was
+left to take care of the house. On their arrival, the governor told
+Captain Towerson, that he and others of his nation were accused of a
+conspiracy to surprise the castle, and must therefore remain prisoners,
+until tried for the same. The Dutch, immediately after this, took into
+custody the person who had been left in charge of the English factory,
+sequestrated all the merchandize belonging to the English Company, under
+an inventory, and seized all the chests, boxes, books, writings, and
+other things in the English house.
+
+Captain Towerson was committed prisoner to his own chamber in the
+English house, under a guard of Dutch soldiers. Emanuel Thomson was
+imprisoned in the castle. All the rest, namely, John Beaumont, Edward
+Collins, William Webber, Ephraim Ramsay, Timothy Johnson, John Fardo,
+and Robert Brown, were distributed among the Dutch ships then in the
+harbour, and secured in irons. The same day, the governor sent to the
+two other factories in the same island, Hitto and Larica, to apprehend
+the rest of the English residents, who were all brought prisoners to
+Amboina on the 16th; Samuel Colson, John Clark, and George Sharrock,
+from the former, and Edward Collins,[2] William Webber,[2] and John
+Sadler, from the latter. On the same day, John Pocol, John Wetheral,
+Thomas Ladbrook, were apprehended at Cambello, and John Beaumont,[2]
+William Griggs, and Ephraim Ramsay,[316] at Loho; and were all brought
+in irons to Amboina on the 20th of February.
+
+[Footnote 316: These four persons are already named, as apprehended at
+Amboina.--E.]
+
+On the 15th of February, the governor and fiscal began to examine the
+prisoners. John Beaumont and Timothy Johnson were first brought to the
+castle, John Beaumont being left in a hall under a guard, while Johnson
+was conducted into another room. Beaumont soon after heard him cry out
+very pitifully, then become quiet for a while, and afterwards cried out
+aloud. Abel Price, the surgeon, who was first questioned and put to the
+torture, was brought in to confront and accuse him; but as Johnson
+refused to confess any thing laid to his charge, Price was soon taken
+away, and Johnson again put to the question, when Beaumont heard him
+repeatedly roar under the torture. At the end of an hour, Johnson was
+brought out into the hall, weeping and lamenting, all cut and cruelly
+burnt in many parts of his body, and so laid aside in a corner of the
+hall, having a soldier to watch him, with strict injunctions not to
+allow him to speak to any one.
+
+Emanuel Thomson was next brought in for examination, not in the same
+room where Johnson had been, but in one farther from the hall; yet
+Beaumont, who still remained in the hall, heard him often roar out most
+lamentably. After half an hour spent in torturing him, he was led to
+another place, but not through the hall where Beaumont was. Beaumont was
+then called in for examination, and asked many questions concerning the
+alleged conspiracy, all knowledge of which he denied with the most
+solemn oaths. He was then made fast on purpose to be tortured, having a
+cloth fastened about his neck, while two men stood ready with jars of
+water to pour on his head: But the governor ordered him to be set loose
+again, saying he would spare him for a day or two, being an old man.
+
+Next day, being the 16th, William Webber, Edward Collins, Ephraim
+Ramsay, and Robert Brown, were brought on shore for examination; and at
+the same time Samuel Colson, William Griggs, John Clark, George
+Sharrock, and John Sadler, from Hitto and Larica, were brought into the
+hall. Robert Brown, a tailor, was first called in, and being subjected
+to torture by water, confessed all in order, as interrogated by the
+fiscal. Edward Collins was next called in, and told that those who were
+formerly examined had accused him as accessory to the conspiracy for
+taking the castle. Denying all knowledge of or participation in any such
+plot, with great oaths, his hands and feet were made fast to the rack,
+and a cloth bound about his throat, ready to administer the water
+torture, upon which he entreated to be let down, saying that he would
+confess all. On being loosed, he again protested his entire innocence
+and ignorance of every thing laid to his charge; yet, as he knew they
+would make him confess any thing they pleased by means of torture,
+however false, he said they would do him a great favour by informing him
+what they wished he should say, which he would speak as they desired, to
+avoid the torture. The fiscal said he mocked them, ordered him to be
+fastened up again, and to receive the water torture. After suffering
+this for some time, he desired to be let down again to make his
+confession, devising as well as he could what he should say.
+Accordingly, he said that he, with Thomson, Johnson, Brown, and Fardo,
+had plotted about ten weeks before, to surprise the castle with the aid
+of the Japanese.
+
+While making this contrived confession, he was interrupted by the
+fiscal, who asked whether Captain Towerson were privy to this
+conspiracy. He protested that Towerson knew nothing of the matter. "You
+lie," said the fiscal, "did not he call you all before him, telling you
+that the daily abuses of the Dutch had instigated him to devise a plot,
+and that he wanted nothing but your consent and secrecy?" Then a Dutch
+merchant who was present, named Jan Igost, asked him, if they had not
+all been sworn to secrecy on the Bible? Collins declared with great
+oaths, that he knew nothing of any such matter. He was again ordered to
+be seized up again to the torture, on which he said that all was true
+they had said. Then the fiscal asked, if the English in the other
+factories were consenting to this plot? To which he answered, no. The
+fiscal then next asked, if the English president at Jacatra, or Mr
+Weldon the agent at Banda, were engaged in this plot, or privy to its
+contrivance? He again answered, no. The fiscal next enquired by what
+means the Japanese were to have executed their purpose? And, when
+Collins stood amazed, and devising some probable fictions to satisfy
+them, the fiscal helped him out, saying, "Were not two Japanese to have
+gone to each bulwark, and two to the door of the governor's chamber, to
+have killed him on coming out to enquire into the disturbance you were
+to have raised without?" Upon this, a person who stood by, desired the
+fiscal not to put words into the mouth of the witness, but to allow him
+to speak for himself. After this reproof, without waiting any answer to
+his former question, the fiscal asked what reward was to have been given
+the Japanese for their services? Collins answered 1000 dollars each. He
+was then asked, when this plot was to have been carried into execution?
+But, although he made no answer to this question, not knowing on the
+sudden what to say, he was dismissed, glad to get away from the torture,
+yet certainly believing they would put him to death for his confession.
+
+Samuel Colson was next brought in; and, for fear of the tortures that
+Collins had endured, whom he saw brought out in a pitiable condition,
+with his eyes almost starting out of their sockets, he chose rather to
+confess all they asked, and so was quickly dismissed, yet came out
+weeping and lamenting, and protesting his innocence. John Clark was then
+taken in, and tortured with fire and water for two hours, in the same
+manner as had been done with Johnson and Thomson.[317]
+
+[Footnote 317: The minute description of these tortures, in Purchas, and
+copied in Harris, are disgusting; insomuch, that Purchas exclaims at one
+place, _I have no heart to proceed_. They are here therefore
+omitted,--E.]
+
+Finding that all their cruelties could not force him to any consistent
+confession of himself, they helped him along to particular circumstances
+of their own contrivance, by leading questions. Thus wearied out and
+overpowered, by terror of the tortures being renewed, he answered,
+_yes_, to whatever they asked, by which means they trumped up a body of
+evidence to this effect:--"That Captain Towerson, on new-year's-day
+last, had sworn all the English at Amboina to be secret and aiding in a
+plot he had devised for surprising the castle, by the aid of the
+Japanese, putting the governor and all the Dutch to death."
+
+On the 17th, William Griggs and John Fardo, with some Japanese, were
+brought to examination. The Japanese were first cruelly tortured to
+accuse Griggs, which at last they did; and Griggs, to avoid torture,
+confessed whatever the fiscal was pleased to demand. The same was next
+done with Fardo and other Japanese. Fardo endured the torture for some
+time, but at length confessed all they pleased to ask. That same day,
+John Beaumont was brought a second time to the fiscal's chamber, when
+one Captain Newport, the son of a Dutchman, but born and educated in
+England, acted as interpreter. Griggs was also brought in to accuse
+Beaumont of being present at the consultation for surprising the castle.
+Beaumont denied all, with great earnestness, and many oaths; but, on
+enduring the torture, was constrained to confess every thing laid to his
+charge.
+
+George Sharrock was then brought in and examined. He fell on his knees,
+protesting his innocence, telling them he was at Hitto on
+new-year's-day, when the pretended consultation was held, and had not
+been at Amboina since the preceding November, as was well known to
+several Dutchmen who resided at Hitto along with him. Being ordered to
+the rack, he told them he had often heard John Clark say that the Dutch
+had done insufferable wrongs to the English, and was resolved to be
+revenged on them; for which purpose he had proposed to Captain Towerson
+to allow him to go to Macassar, to consult with the Spaniards about
+sending some gallies to plunder the small factories of Amboina and Ceram
+in the absence of the ships. Being asked what Captain Towerson had said
+to all this? he answered, that Towerson was very much offended with
+Clark for the proposal, and could never abide him since. The fiscal then
+called him a rogue and liar, saying, that he wandered idly from the
+matter, and must go to the torture. He craved favour again, and began
+another tale, saying, that John Clark had told him at Hitto of a plot to
+surprise the castle of Amboina, with the participation of Towerson. He
+was then asked, when this consultation was held? which he said was in
+November preceding. The fiscal said that could not be, for it was on
+new-year's-day. The prisoner urged, as before, that he had not been in
+Amboina since last November, till now that he was brought thither in
+custody. "Why, then," said the fiscal, "have you belied yourself?" To
+this he resolutely answered, that all he had confessed respecting a
+conspiracy was false, and merely feigned to avoid torment.
+
+Sharrock was then remanded to prison, but was brought up again next day,
+when a formal confession, in writing, of his last-mentioned conference
+with Clark, respecting the plot for surprising the castle of Amboina,
+was read over to him, after which, the fiscal asked, if it were all
+true. To this he answered, that every word of it was false, and that he
+had confessed it solely to avoid torture. The fiscal and the rest then
+said, in rage, that he was a false liar, for it was all true, and had
+been spoken from his own mouth, and therefore he must sign it, which he
+did accordingly. Having done this, he broke out into a great passion,
+charging them as guilty of the innocent blood of himself and the rest,
+which they should have to answer for at the judgment-seat of God. He
+even grappled with the fiscal, and would have hindered him from carrying
+in the confession to the governor, but was instantly laid hold of, and
+carried away to prison.
+
+William Webber was next examined; being told by the fiscal that Clarke
+accused him of having sworn to Towerson's plot on new-year's-day, with
+all the other circumstances already mentioned; Webber strenuously denied
+all this, declaring, that he was then at Larika, and could not possibly
+be present in Amboina on that day. But, being put to the torture, he was
+forced to confess having been present at the consultation, with all the
+other circumstances in regular order, as asked. He also told of having a
+letter from Clark, in which was a postscript excusing his brief writing
+at this time, as there was then a great business in hand. But a Dutch
+merchant, named Kinder, who was present, told the governor that Webber
+and he were together making merry at Larika, on new-year's-day, the time
+of this pretended consultation. The governor then went away, but the
+fiscal held on with him respecting the letter and postscript, promising
+to save his life if he would produce these.
+
+Captain Towerson was next brought in for examination, and was shewn what
+the others had confessed concerning him. He deeply professed his
+innocence, on which Colson was brought in to confront him, being assured
+he should be again tortured unless he made good his former confession
+against Towerson. On this he repeated what he had said before, and was
+then sent away. Griggs and Fardo were next brought in, and desired to
+justify to his face what they had before confessed. Captain Towerson
+seriously admonished them, as they should answer at the day of judgment,
+to speak nothing but the truth. They then fell upon their knees,
+beseeching him to forgive them for God's sake, and declared openly that
+all they had formerly said was utterly false, and spoken only to avoid
+the torture. The fiscal then commanded them to be led to the torture,
+which they were unable to endure, and again affirmed their former
+extorted confessions to be true. When Colson was required to subscribe
+this confession, he asked the fiscal, upon whose head he thought the sin
+would rest, whether on his who was constrained to confess falsely, or
+upon the constrainer? After a pause on this home-question, the fiscal
+went out to speak with the governor, and returned again shortly,
+commanding him to subscribe. Colson did so, yet with this remark,--"You
+force me to accuse myself and others of that which is as false as God is
+true; for I call God to witness that I and they are as innocent as the
+child unborn."
+
+Having thus examined all the servants of the English company in the
+several factories of the island of Amboina, they began on the 21st of
+February to examine John Wetheral, factor at Cambello, in Ceram. He
+acknowledged being at Amboina on new-year's-day, but declared he knew of
+no other consultation but about certain cloth belonging to the company,
+which lay spoiling in the factory, which they considered how best to get
+sold. The governor said he was not questioned about cloth, but treason;
+and protesting his innocence, he was dismissed for that day. Next day he
+was again brought in, and Captain Towerson was produced to confront and
+accuse him, as he had formerly emitted something in his confessions
+against him. But Towerson only desired him to speak the truth, and
+nothing but the truth, as God should put into his heart. Mr Towerson was
+then removed, and Mr Wetheral tortured by water, with threats of fire
+being applied if he did not confess. At length, they read over to him
+the confessions of the others, asking him leading questions from point
+to point, to all of which he answered affirmatively, to free himself
+from torture.
+
+John Powel, assistant to Mr Wetheral, was next called; but he proved
+that he had not been at Amboina since November; and being likewise
+spoken for by Jan Joost, his old acquaintance, was dismissed without
+torture. Thomas Ladbrook, servant to Wetheral and Powel at Cambello, was
+then brought in; but he, too, was speedily dismissed. Ephraim Ramsay,
+proving that he was not in Amboina on new-year's-day, and being likewise
+spoken for by Joost, was also dismissed, after hanging up some time
+ready for being tortured. Lastly, John Sadler, servant to William Griggs
+at Larika, was brought in for examination; and as he was not in Amboina
+on new-year's-day, he too was dismissed.
+
+On the 25th of February, all the prisoners, English, Portuguese, and
+Japanese, were brought into the great hall of the castle, and there
+solemnly condemned to die, except John Powel, Ephraim Ramsay, John
+Sadler, and Thomas Ladbrook. Next day, they were again brought into the
+hall, except Captain Towerson and Emanuel Thomson, to be prepared for
+death by the Dutch ministers. That same night, Colson and Collins were
+taken into the room where Emanuel Thomson lay, when they were told the
+governor was pleased to grant mercy to one of the three, and desired
+they might draw lots, when the free lot fell to Edward Collins, who was
+then carried to the chamber of the acquitted persons before-named. John
+Beaumont was soon after brought to the same place, and told that he owed
+his life to Peter Johnson, the Dutch merchant of Loho, and the
+secretary, who had begged his life. The condemned, who still remained in
+the hall, were afterwards joined by the Dutch ministers, and received
+the sacrament, protesting their innocence. Samuel Colson, on this
+occasion, said, in a loud voice, "O Lord, as I am innocent of this
+treason, do thou pardon all my other sins; and, if in the smallest
+degree guilty thereof may I never be a partaker in the joys of thy
+heavenly kingdom." To these words all the rest exclaimed, _Amen! for me,
+Amen! for me, good Lord!_
+
+After this, each, knowing whom he had accused, went one to another,
+craving forgiveness for their false accusations, as wrung from them by
+the pains or dread of torture. They all freely forgave their comrades;
+for none had been so falsely accused, but that he also had accused
+others with equal falseness. In particular, George Sharrock, who
+survived to relate the scene exhibited at this time, knelt down to John
+Clark, whom he had accused, as before related, earnestly begging
+forgiveness. Clark freely forgave him, saying, "How shall I look to be
+forgiven of God, if I do not forgive you? as I have myself falsely
+accused Captain Towerson and others!" After this, they spent the rest of
+this doleful night in prayer and psalm-singing, comforting each other
+the best they could. The Dutch who guarded them offered them wine, of
+which they desired them to drink heartily, to drive away sorrow, as is
+the custom of their country in like situations, but this the English
+refused.
+
+Next morning, the 27th February, William Webber was again called before
+the fiscal, and offered his life if he would produce the letter and
+postscript he confessed to have received from John Clark, which he could
+not do, as it never had existed: Yet, at last, they pardoned him, and
+sent him to the rest of those who were freed, and Sharrock with him,
+whom they also pardoned. That morning, Emanuel Thomson, learning that
+John Beaumont was pardoned, contrived to have him allowed to visit him,
+which was allowed with much difficulty. Beaumont found him in a most
+miserable condition, the wounds or sores occasioned by the torture bound
+up, but the blood and matter issuing through the bandages. Taking Mr
+Beaumont by the hand, he conjured him, when he came to England, to offer
+his duty to the Honourable Company, and others of his friends whom he
+named, and to assure them he died innocent, as was well known to
+Beaumont.
+
+It is needless to dwell upon the minute circumstances of the catastrophe
+of this bloody tragedy: Suffice it to say, that ten Englishmen, one
+Portuguese, and eleven Japanese, were publicly executed; of whom the
+following is a list:
+
+   _English._
+
+   Capt. Gabriel Towerson, agent for the English at Amboina.
+   Samuel Colson, factor at Hitto.
+   Emanuel Thomson, assistant at Amboina.
+   Timothy Johnson, assistant at the same place.
+   John Wetheral, assistant at Cambello.
+   John Clark, assistant at Hitto.
+
+   William Griggs, factor at Larika.
+   John Fardo, steward of the factory at Amboina.
+   Abel Price, surgeon to that factory.
+   Robert Brown, tailor.
+
+The only Portuguese was Augustine Perez, born in Bengal, who was
+superintendant of the slaves in the employment of the English at
+Amboina.
+
+   _Japanese_.
+   Hititso, Tsiosa, and Sinsa, natives of Firando.
+   Sidney Migial, Pedro Congie, Thomas Corea, from Nangasaki.
+   Quinandaya, a native of Coaets.
+   Tsabinda, a native of Tsoncketgo.
+   Zanchae, a native of Fisien.
+
+Besides these, there were two other Japanese tortured, who both
+confessed a participation in the pretended plot, but were not executed,
+or even condemned, for reasons which the surviving English did not
+learn. The executions were all by cutting off the heads of the condemned
+with a scymitar; and the Dutch prepared a black velvet pall for Captain
+Towerson's body to fall upon, which they afterwards had the effrontery
+to charge in account against the English East India Company.
+
+
+SECTION XV.
+
+OBSERVATIONS DURING A RESIDENCE IN TISLAND OF CHUSAN, IN 1701, BY DOCTOR
+JAMES CUNNINGHAM; WITH SOME EARLY NOTICES RESPECTING CHINA.[318]
+
+Among the early voyages of the English to the East Indies, none have
+been preserved that were made to China, nor have we been able to
+discover any satisfactory account of the commencement of the trade of
+our East India Company with that distant country, now said to be by far
+the most profitable branch of the exclusive commerce. In the _Annals of
+the Company_,[319] several references are made to the China trade, but
+more in the nature of notices or memoranda for the purpose of after
+investigation, than as conveying any actual information on the subject.
+In this singular paucity of materials, we are reduced to the following
+short "Observations and Remarks, by Doctor James Cunningham, made during
+his Residence as Physician to the English Factory at the Island of
+Chusan, on the Coast of China." Doctor Cunningham is stated by Harris to
+have been a fellow of the Royal Society, distinguished by his natural
+talents and acquired accomplishments, well versed in ancient and modern
+learning, and to have diligently used these advantages in making
+judicious remarks on the places where he resided in the service of the
+Company. Yet all that has been recorded by Harris of these remarks, give
+only a very imperfect account of Chusan and of China. This short article
+consists of extracts from two letters written by Cunningham from Chusan,
+and a brief supplement by Harris respecting two unfortunate factories at
+Pulo Condore and Pulo Laut.--E.
+
+[Footnote 318: Harris. I. 852.]
+
+[Footnote 319: Annals of the E.I. Co. vol. II. and III. _passim_.]
+
+§1. _Voyage to Chusan, and short Notices of that Island_.[320]
+
+In my last letter, from the island of Borneo, I gave you an account of
+our arrival at that island on the 17th July. We only remained there two
+days, as the season of the year was already far advanced, and made the
+best of our way from thence through the Straits of Banda,[321] with
+favourable winds and weather. We got upon the coast of China on the 13th
+August, when we had variable winds, which carried us abreast of
+_Emoy_[322] by the 19th following. The wind then set in fresh at N.E. so
+that we were in great fear of losing our passage, and were now obliged
+to beat up all the way against both wind and current; yet the weather
+remained so favourable that we were never obliged to hand our top-sails,
+otherwise we must have lost more way in a single day than we could have
+recovered in eight. On the 31st August we came to anchor under the
+_Crocodile islands_,[323] both for shelter from the bad weather, usual
+on this coast at new and full-moon, which has been fatal to many ships,
+and also to procure fresh water, now scarce with us, as we had not
+recruited our store since leaving the Cape of Good Hope. These are three
+small islands in lat. 26° N. about six leagues from the river of
+_Hokien_, [Fo-kien] on two of which we found very good water, with a
+convenient landing-place on the S.W. side of the innermost island. By
+the assistance of some Chinese fishers, we procured also some fresh
+provisions from the main land, not thinking it safe to venture there
+ourselves, lest we may have been brought into trouble by the governor of
+that part of the country. While here, on the 5th September, we had a
+sudden short shift of the monsoon from the S.W. blowing with great fury;
+which was also experienced by other vessels then coming on the coast of
+China. We again put to sea on the 18th September, turning to windward
+night and day on the outside of all the islands, which are very numerous
+all along this coast, but with which we were unacquainted after passing
+beyond _Emoy_. Besides, the hydrography of this coast is hitherto so
+very imperfect, that we could not trust in any degree to our draughts,
+owing to which our navigation was both difficult and dangerous.
+
+[Footnote 320: From a letter to a member of the Royal Society, dated in
+September, 1701.--Harris.]
+
+[Footnote 321: This must have been the straits of Macasser, as Banda is
+far out of the way between Borneo and China.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 322: Emoy or Amoy, was on the coast of China, opposite to the
+island of Formosa, and appears, from the Annals, to have been the first
+port frequented by the ships of the India Company for the Chinese
+trade.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 323: The islands of Pe-la-yang are, in the indicated latitude,
+off the estuary of the principal river of the province of Fo-kien.--E.]
+
+On the 1st October, we got into the latitude of 30° N. where we came to
+anchor near the land, and found our way by boat to _Chusan_,[324] about
+twelve leagues within the islands, whence we got a pilot, who brought
+our ship safely to that place on the 11th of the month. The Chinese
+government have granted us a settlement on that island, with the liberty
+of trade; but do not allow us to go up to Ning-po,[325] which is six or
+eight hours sail to the westwards, all the way among islands, of which
+this of Chusan is the largest, being eight or nine leagues from E. to W.
+and four or five from N. to S.
+
+[Footnote 324: Tcheou-chan, an island about twenty English miles in
+length from E. to W. in lat. 30° 23' N. long. 121° 43' E. off the
+estuary of Ning-po river, in the province of Che-kiang, is obviously the
+Chusan of the text--E.]
+
+[Footnote 325: The city of Ning-po stands at the head of a bay,
+stretching from the S. side of the estuary of the river of the same
+name, in lat. 30° 10' N. long. 121° E. It appears, from the Annals,
+that the English had been excluded from trading at Canton, by the
+influence of the Portuguese in Macao.--E.]
+
+About three leagues from the point of land named _Liampo_ by the
+Portuguese, and _Khi-tu_ by the Chinese, there is a very safe and
+convenient harbour at the west end of this island, where the ships ride
+within call of the factory, which stands close to the shore in a low
+flat valley, having near two hundred houses built around for the benefit
+of trade. The town of Chusan, of which the houses are very mean, is
+about three quarters of a mile farther from the shore, and is surrounded
+by a fine stone wall, flanked at irregular distances by twenty-two
+square bastions or towers; and has four great gates, on which a few old
+iron guns are planted, seldom or never used. The _chumpeen_, or governor
+of the island, resides here, and the town contains about three or four
+thousand beggarly inhabitants, mostly soldiers and fishers; for, as the
+trade of this island has only been granted of late, it has not hitherto
+attracted any considerable merchants.
+
+This island abounds in all sorts of provisions, as cows, buffaloes,
+deer, hogs, both wild and tame, geese, ducks, poultry, rice, wheat,
+calavanccs, cole-worts, turnips, carrots, potatoes, beets, spinach, and
+so forth. It has, however, no merchandise, except what comes from
+Ning-po, Stan-chew,[326] Nankin, and other inland towns and cities. Some
+of these I hope to see, when I have acquired a little of the Chinese
+language. Tea grows here in great plenty on the tops of the hills, but
+is not so much esteemed as that which grows on more mountainous islands.
+Although tolerably populous, this island is far from being what it was
+in the time of Father Martini, who describes it under the name of
+_Cheu-xan_. The superstitious pilgrimages mentioned by him, must refer
+to the island of Pou-to,[327] which is nine leagues from this place, and
+to another island three miles to the eastwards, to which the emperor
+proposes coming to worship at a pagoda greatly renowned for its
+sanctity, in the ensuing month of May, being his birth-day, and the
+fortieth year of his age. One of his bonzes is already come there, to
+get all things in order.
+
+[Footnote 326: Probably Hang-tcheon, a city about forty miles W. from
+Ning-po.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 327: Pou-teou, is directly E. from the eastern end of
+Tcheou-chan.--E.]
+
+§2. _Ancient and modern State of the Country, and of the coming of the
+English to reside there.[328]_
+
+In my former letter, I informed you that the emperor designed to have
+come to worship at Pou-to in May last, being the fortieth year of his
+age, but I ought to have said of his reign. After every thing was
+prepared for his reception, he was dissuaded from his purpose by some of
+his mandarins, who made him believe that the thunder at that place was
+very dangerous. This Pou-to is a small island, only about five leagues
+round, and at the east end of Chusan. It has been famous for the space
+of eleven hundred years, for the superstitious pilgrimages made to it,
+and is only inhabited by bonzes to the number of three thousand, all of
+the sect of _Heshang,_ or unmarried bonzes, who live a Pythagorean life.
+They have built four hundred pagodas, two of which are considerable for
+their size and splendour, and were lately covered with green and yellow
+tiles, brought from the emperor's palace at Nankin. They are adorned
+within by stately idols, finely carved and gilded, the chief of these
+being an idol named _Quonem._ To-these two pagodas there are two chief
+priests, who govern all the rest. They have many walks and avenues cut
+in different directions through the island, some of which are paved with
+flag-stones, and overshaded by trees planted on both sides. The
+dwellings of the bonzes are the best I have seen in these parts, all of
+which are maintained by charitable donations. All the Chinese junks
+which sail from Ning-po and Chusan touch at Pou-to, both outwards and
+homewards-bound, making offerings for the safety of their voyages. There
+is another island named _Kim-Tong,_[329] five leagues from hence, on the
+way towards Ning-po, where a great many mandarins are said to live in
+retirement, after having given up their employments. On that island
+there are said to be silver mines, but prohibited from being opened. The
+rest of the circumjacent islands are either desert, or very meanly
+inhabited, but all of them abound in deer.
+
+[Footnote 328: The sequel of these observations is said by Harris to
+have been taken from another letter to the same correspondent with the
+former, and dated in November, 1701; but, from circumstances in the
+text, it would appear to have been written in 1702.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 329: Probably that named Silver-island in modern maps.--E.]
+
+It is not long since this island of Chusan began to be inhabited. Yet in
+the days of Father Martini, about fifty years ago, it was very populous
+for three or four years; at which time, in the fury of the Tartar
+conquest, it was laid entirely desolate, not even sparing the mulberry
+trees, which were then numerous, as they made a great deal of raw silk
+here. It continued in this desolate condition till about eighteen years
+ago, when the walls of the present town were built by the governor of
+_Ting-hai_, as a strong-hold for a garrison, in order to expel some
+pirates who had taken shelter on the island. As the island began to grow
+populous, a _chumpeen_ was sent to govern it for three years, to whom
+the late chumpeen succeeded, who continued till last April, and procured
+licence to open this port to strangers. On the last chumpeen being
+promoted to the government of _Tien-ching-wei_[330] near Pekin, he was
+succeeded by the present governor, who is son to the old chumpeen of
+Emoy. They have no arts or manufactures in this island, except lacquered
+ware; the particulars of which I cannot as yet send you. They have begun
+to plant mulberry-trees, in order to breed up silk-worms for the
+production of raw silk; and they gather and cure some tea, but chiefly
+for their own use.
+
+[Footnote 330: Probably that called Tien-sing in modern maps, on the
+river Pay, between Pekin and the sea.--E.]
+
+§3. _Of the Manner of cultivating Tea in Chusan_.
+
+The three sorts of tea usually carried to England are all from the same
+plant, their difference being occasioned by the soils in which they
+grow, and the season of the year at which they are gathered. The
+_bohea_, or _vo-u-i_, so called from certain mountains in the province
+of _Token_,[331] where it is chiefly made, is the very bud, gathered in
+the beginning of March, and dried in the shade. The tea named _bing_ is
+the second growth, gathered in April, and _siriglo_ is the last growth,
+gathered in May and June; both of these being gently dried over the fire
+in _taches_ or pans. The tea shrub is an evergreen, being in flower from
+October to January, and the seed ripens in the September or October
+following, so that both flower and seed may be gathered at the same
+time; but for one fully ripened seed, an hundred are abortive. There are
+the two sorts of seeds mentioned by Father Le Compte, in his description
+of tea; and what be describes as a third sort, under the name of
+_slymie_ pease, consists merely of the young flower-buds, not yet open.
+The seed vessels of the tea tree are three-capsular, each capsule
+containing one nut or seed; and though often two or one of these only
+come to perfection, yet the vestiges of the rest may easily be
+discerned. It grows naturally in a dry gravelly soil on the sides of
+hills, without any cultivation, in several places of this island.
+
+[Footnote 331: Fo-kien is almost certainly here meant--E.]
+
+Le Compte is mistaken in saying that the Chinese are ignorant of the art
+of grafting; for I nave seen many of his paradoxical tallow-trees
+ingrafted here, besides trees of other sorts. When they ingraft, they do
+not slit the stock as we do, but slice off the outside of the stock, to
+which they apply the graft, which is cut sloping on one side, to
+correspond with the slice on the stock, bringing the bark of the slice
+up on the outside of the graft, after which the whole is covered up with
+mud and straw, exactly as we do. The commentator on Magalhen seems
+doubtful as to the length of the Chinese _che_ or cubit. At this island
+they have two sorts, one measuring thirteen inches and seven-tenths
+English, which, is commonly used by merchants; the other is only eleven
+inches, being used by carpenters, and also in geographical measures.
+Though Father Martini is censured by Magalhen for spelling a great many
+Chinese words with _ng_, which the Portuguese and others express with
+_in_, yet his way is more agreeable to our English pronunciation and
+orthography; only the g may be left out in Pekin, Nankin, and some
+others.
+
+Having made enquiry about what is mentioned by Father Martini of sowing
+their _fields_ at _Van-cheu_ with oyster-shells, to make new ones grow,
+I was told, that after they have taken out the oysters, they sprinkle
+the empty shells with urine, and throw them into the water, by which
+means there grow new oysters on the old shells.[332] Martini says he
+could never find a Latin name for the _Tula Mogorin_ of the Portuguese;
+but I am sure it is the same with the _Syringa arabica, flore pleno
+albo_, of Parkinson. Martini also says that the _kieu-yeu_, or
+tallow-tree, bears a white flower, like that of the cherry-tree: But all
+that I have seen here bear spikes of small yellow flowers, like the
+_julus_ of the _Salix_. The bean-broth, or mandarin-broth, so frequently
+mentioned in the Dutch embassy, and by other authors, is only an
+emulsion made of the seeds of _sesamum_ with hot water.
+
+[Footnote 332: This strange story may possibly be thus explained. At
+certain seasons, numerous minute oysters may be seen sticking to the
+shells of the old ones; and the Chinese may have thrown the emptied
+shells into the sea, in the highly probable expectation of these minute
+oysters continuing to live and grow. The circumstances in the text are
+absurd additions, either from ignorance or imposition.--E.]
+
+The chief employments of the people here are fishing and agriculture. In
+fishing, they use several sorts of nets and lines as we do; but, as
+there are great banks of mud in some places, the fishermen have
+contrived a small frame, three or four feet long, not much larger than a
+hen-trough, and a little elevated at each end, to enable them to go more
+easily on these mud banks. Resting with one knee on the middle of one of
+these frames, and leaning his arms on a cross stick raised breast high,
+he uses the other foot on the mud to push the frame and himself
+forwards.
+
+In their agricultural operations, all their fields on which any thing is
+to be cultivated, whether high or low, are formed into such plots or
+beds as may admit of retaining water over them when the cultivator
+thinks proper. The lands are tilled by ploughs drawn by one cow or
+buffalo; and when it is intended to sow rice, the soil is remarkably
+well prepared and cleared from all weeds, after which it is moistened
+into the state of a pulp, and smoothed by a frame drawn across, when the
+rice is sown very thick, and covered over with water, only to the height
+of two or three inches. When the seedling plants are six or eight inches
+long, they are all pulled up, and transplanted in straight lines into
+other fields, which are overflowed with water; and, when weeds grow up,
+they destroy them by covering them up in the interstices between the
+rows of rice, turning the mud over them with their hands. When they are
+to sow wheat, barley, pulse, or other grain, they grub up the surface of
+the ground superficially, earth, grass, and rook, and mixing this with
+some straw, burn all together. This earth, being sifted fine, they mix
+with the seed, which they sow in holes made in straight lines, so that
+it grows in tufts or rows like the rice. The field is divided into
+regular beds, well harrowed both before and after the seed is sown,
+which makes them resemble gardens. The rice grounds are meliorated
+merely by letting water into them; but for the other grains, where the
+soil requires it, they use dung, night-soil, ashes, and the like. For
+watering their fields, they use the machine mentioned by Martini in the
+preface to his Atlas, being entirely constructed of wood, and the same
+in principle with the chain-pump.
+
+In order to procure salt, as all the shores are of mud instead of sand,
+they pare off in summer the superficial part of this mud, which has been
+overflowed by the sea-water, and lay it up in heaps, to be used in the
+following manner: Having first dried it in the sun, and rubbed it into a
+fine powder, they dig a pit, the bottom of which is covered with straw,
+and from the bottom a hollow cane leads through the side of the pit to a
+jar standing below the level of the bottom. They then fill the pit
+almost full of the dried salt mud, and pour on sea-water till it stands
+two or three inches above the top of the mud. This sea-water drains
+through the mud, carrying the salt along with it from the mud as well as
+its own, and runs out into the jar much-saturated with salt; which is
+afterwards procured by boiling.
+
+§4. _Of the famous Medicinal Root, called Hu-tchu-u_.
+
+Having last year seen, in a newspaper, some account of a singular root,
+brought from China by Father Fontaney, I shall inform you that I have
+seen this root since my arrival at Chuaan. It is called _Hu-tchu-n_[333]
+by the Chinese, and they ascribe to it most wonderful virtues, such as
+prolonging life, and changing grey hair to black, by using its infusion
+by way of tea. It is held in such high estimation as to be sold at a
+great price, as I have been told, from ten tael up to a thousand, or
+even two thousand tael-for a single root; for the larger it is, so much
+the greater is its fancied value and efficacy: But the price is too high
+to allow me to try the experiment. You will find it mentioned in the
+_Medecina Sinica_ of Cleyer, No. 84; under the name of _He-xeu-ti_,
+according to the Portuguese orthography. It is also figured in the 27th
+table of the plants which Mr _Pettier_ had from me. The following is the
+story of its discovery, which I will not warrant for gospel.
+
+[Footnote 333: This is probably the ginseng, so famed for its fancied
+virtues.--E.]
+
+Once upon a time, a certain person went to gather simples among the
+mountains, and fell by some accident into a vale of which the sides were
+so steep that he was unable to get out again. In this situation, he had
+to look about for some means to support life, and discovered this root,
+of which he made trial, and found that it served him both as food and
+cloathing; for it preserved his body in such a temperature, that the
+injuries of the weather had no evil influence upon him during a
+residence of several hundred years. At length, by means of an
+earthquake, the mountains were rent, and he found a passage from the
+vale to his house, whence he had been so long absent. But so many
+alterations had taken place during his long absence, that nobody would
+believe his story; till, on consulting the annals of his family, they
+found that one of them had been lost at the time he mentioned, which
+confirmed the truth of his relation.--This is a fable, not even credited
+among the Chinese, invented merely to blazon forth the virtues of this
+wonderful root.
+
+§5. _Removal of Dr Cunningham to Pulo Condore, with an Account of the
+Rise, Progress, and Ruin of that Factory_.[334]
+
+The English factory at Chusan was broken up in the year 1702, so that Dr
+Cunningham had very little time allowed him for making his proposed
+observations respecting China. From this place he removed to another new
+settlement at _Pulo Condore,_ in a small cluster of four or five
+islands, about fifteen leagues south of the west channel of the river of
+Camboja, usually called the Japanese river.[335] I am unable to say what
+were the advantages proposed from this factory; but, from the memoirs I
+have seen on the subject, this place seems to have been very ill chosen,
+and much worse managed. The person who had at this time the management
+and direction of the affairs belonging to the East India Company in this
+distant part of the world, was one Mr Katchpole, who, according to the
+usual custom of the Europeans in eastern India at this period, took into
+the service a certain number of Macassers or native soldiers, by whose
+assistance he soon constructed a small fort for the protection of the
+factory. So far as I can learn, the most indispensable necessaries of
+life, water, wood, and fish, were all that these islands ever afforded.
+
+[Footnote 334: This and the subsequent subdivision of the section are
+related historically by Harris.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 335: Pulo Condore is in lat. 8° 45' N. long. 106° 5' E. and
+the object of a factory at this place was evidently to endeavour to
+secure a portion of the trade of China, from which the English at this
+time were excluded by the arts of the Portuguese at Macao, as we learn
+from the Annals; as also to combine some trade with Siam, Camboja,
+Tsiompa, Cochin-China, and Tonquin.--E.]
+
+The Macassers are a brave, industrious, and faithful people, to such as
+deal fairly with them; and on this account are highly esteemed in the
+Eastern Indies, more especially by the Dutch. They are, however,
+daring, cruel, and revengeful, if once provoked. Mr Katchpole had
+contracted with these men to serve for three years, at the end of which
+period, if they pleased, they were to receive their wages and to depart:
+But he, though they strictly performed their part of the agreement,
+broke faith with them, keeping them beyond their time against their
+will. In addition to this great breach in morality, he added as
+notorious an error in politics; for, after provoking these men so
+egregiously by refusing to fulfil his engagement, he still confided to
+them the guard of his own person and the custody of the factory. This
+gave them ample opportunity of revenging the ill usage they had met
+with, and with that ferocity which is so natural to untutored
+barbarians. They rose in mutiny one night, and murdered Mr Katchpole,
+and all who were at the time along with him in the factory. A few, who
+happened to lodge on the outside of the fort, hearing the cries of their
+friends within during the massacre, fled from their beds to the
+sea-shore; where, by a singular interposition of Providence, they found
+a bark completely ready for sea, in which they embarked half naked, and
+put immediately to sea, just in time to escape the rage of the
+Macassers, who came in search of them to the shore, precisely when they
+had weighed anchor and pushed off to sea.
+
+Dr Cunningham was one of the number who escaped on this occasion. Their
+navigation was attended with excessive difficulty, being exposed at the
+same time to incredible fatigue, and to the utmost extremity of hunger
+and thirst: But at length, after a tedious and difficult course of an
+hundred leagues, in the most wretched condition, they reached a small
+creek in the dominions of the king of Johor, where they were received
+with kindness.
+
+§6. _Some Account of the Factory at Pulo Laut, with the Overthrow of
+that Factory, and of the English Trade to Borneo_.
+
+A year or two after this ruin of the factory at Pulo Condore, the
+Company thought fit to order the establishment of a new factory on the
+coast of the great island of Borneo. On the south of that vast island,
+there is a small isle called Pulo Laut, having an excellent harbour. The
+country here is but thinly peopled, and yields nothing except rice; but,
+as it lies near the mouth of the great rivers which come from the pepper
+countries in the interior; it is extremely well situated for trade.
+Between this island and the great island of Borneo, there is a channel
+about two miles wide in most places, narrower in some and broader in
+others, and having from seven to five fathoms water the whole way
+through. On the coast of this channel there are several rising grounds
+fit for building on, and which were therefore extremely proper for the
+situation of a factory, which, it may be presumed, induced those who had
+the direction of the Company's affairs, to make choice of this place.
+
+One Captain Barry, who is said to have been a very ingenious gentleman,
+had the charge of establishing this new factory, in which he is reported
+to have acted with much skill and prudence. But he died before the works
+were completed; and the direction of the factory devolved upon Doctor
+Cunningham, who came to this place after the ruin of the factory at Pulo
+Condore. He is said to have given himself so entirely up to his studies,
+that he left the care of the Company's concerns too much to the people
+who were under him, who were unequal to the trust, and proved the ruin
+of the factory. Before the fort was half finished, these people began to
+insult the natives of the country; and, among other wanton acts of
+folly, they very imprudently chose to search one of the boats belonging
+to the king, which was carrying a female of rank down the river. This so
+provoked the Bornean sovereign that he determined upon the utter
+destruction of the English; for which purpose he collected his forces
+together, amounting to about three thousand resolute men, which he
+embarked in above an hundred proas, and sent them down to attack the
+factory and unfinished fort.
+
+There happened at this time to be two ships belonging to the Company in
+the river, besides two merchant vessels of inconsiderable force; and as
+Cunningham and his people had received advice of the preparations making
+against them, they left their factory, taking refuge aboard the ships,
+thinking themselves in greater security there than ashore. When all
+things were in readiness for the intended assault, the native armament
+came down the river in the night; and, while some landed and destroyed
+the factory and fortifications, others attacked the ships, which were
+fortunately prepared for their reception, the English having made fast
+nettings along both sides of their ships, about two fathoms high above
+the gunnels, to prevent the enemy from boarding, and were in readiness
+to use their blunderbusses and pikes, to prevent them from forcing their
+way to the decks.
+
+On seeing the approach of the proas towards the ships, the English plied
+their great guns, loaded with double, round, and partridge shot, and
+made great carnage among the Borneans, yet this did not deter them from
+pushing forwards and using their utmost endeavours to board. But, having
+got up to the gunnels, they were unable to get over the netting, and so
+were slaughtered with great ease by the English from the decks. Some of
+the assailants got in at the _head doors_ of one of the ships and killed
+a few of the English on the forecastle, but were soon overpowered and
+slain. Thus, after a long and sanguinary contest, the two large ships
+beat off the enemy with small loss; but the two little vessels were both
+burnt with most of their men, among whom was one Mynheer Hoogh Camber, a
+Dutch gentleman who had been ambassador of the king of Persia, and had
+fled from Batavia in one of these small vessels. Some say that the
+English killed above fifteen hundred of the assailants in two hours, for
+the heat of the assault continued during that space, besides many others
+wounded and maimed. But the English were under the necessity of
+abandoning the settlement at Pulo Laut.
+
+The Bornean king or rajah thought his revenge had gone far enough in
+driving the English from their factory: And, finding his revenue
+considerably diminished by the loss of trade with the English, he sent
+notice to such of them as traded to Johor, and other places in the
+neighbourhood of Borneo, that he would still admit them to trade in his
+dominions on the old footing, but would never allow them or any other
+nation to erect forts in his territories. Several English vessels have
+been there since to load pepper, and were civilly treated. The Dutch
+also sent a ship there from Batavia in the year 1712; but the natives
+refused to have any dealings with them.
+
+
+END OF THE NINTH VOLUME.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, Volume IX., by Robert Kerr
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOL. IX. ***
+
+***** This file should be named 13055-8.txt or 13055-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/0/5/13055/
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/old/13055-8.zip b/old/13055-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..331af41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13055-8.zip
diff --git a/old/13055-h.zip b/old/13055-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c925197
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13055-h.zip
diff --git a/old/13055-h/13055-h.htm b/old/13055-h/13055-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..911fff6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13055-h/13055-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,24961 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Voyages and Travels Volume 9</title>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content=
+"text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
+<style type="text/css">
+<!--
+body {background: #ffffcc; margin:10%; text-align:justify}
+h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {color:green; text-align:center}
+blockquote {font-size: .9em}
+p.poem {text-align:center}
+p.external {font-weight: bold}
+-->
+</style>
+</head>
+<body>
+<pre>
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of Voyages
+and Travels, Volume IX., by Robert Kerr
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+Title: A General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, Volume IX.
+
+Author: Robert Kerr
+
+Release Date: July 30, 2004 [EBook #13055]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOL. IX. ***
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+</pre>
+
+<h2>A</h2>
+
+<h2>GENERAL</h2>
+
+<h2>HISTORY AND COLLECTION</h2>
+
+<h2>OF</h2>
+
+<h1>VOYAGES AND TRAVELS,</h1>
+
+<h2>ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:</h2>
+
+<h2>FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS</h2>
+
+<h2>OF NAVIGATION, DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE,</h2>
+
+<h2>BY SEA AND LAND,</h2>
+
+<h2>FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE PRESENT TIME.</h2>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2>BY</h2>
+
+<h2>ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. &amp; F.A.S. EDIN.</h2>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2>ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.</h2>
+
+<h2>VOL. IX.</h2>
+
+<h3>WILLIAM BLACKWOOD, EDINBURGH:</h3>
+
+<h3>AND T. CADELL, LONDON.</h3>
+
+<h3>MDCCCXXIV.</h3>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<h2>CONTENTS OF VOLUME IX.</h2>
+
+<p><a href="#part2"><b>PART II.--(Continued.)</b></a></p>
+
+<p><a href="#book2-3"><b>BOOK III.--(Continued.)</b></a></p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter3-10"><b><i>CHAPTER
+X.--(Continued.)</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Early Voyages of the English to India, after the Establishment
+of the East India Company SECTION XV. (<i>Continued</i>)--Eighth
+Voyage of the English East-India Company, in 1611, by Captain
+John Saris</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 5. Further Observations respecting the Moluccas, and
+the Completion of the Voyage to Japan</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 6. Arrival at Brando, and some Account of the Habits,
+Manners, and Customs of the Japanese</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 7. Journey of Captain Saris to the Court of the
+Emperor, with his Observations there and by the Way</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 8. Occurrences at Firando during the Absence of
+Captain Saris</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 9. Continuation of these Occurrences</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 10. Conclusion of these</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 11. Occurrences at Firando, after the return of
+Captain Saris</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 12. Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence to
+England</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I3. Intelligence concerning Yedso or Jesso, received
+from a Japanese at Jedo, who had been twice there</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 14. Note of Commodities vendible in Japan</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 15. Supplementary Notices of Occurrences in Japan,
+after the departure of Captain Saris</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVI. Ninth Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1612,
+by Captain Edward Marlow</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVII. Tenth Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1612,
+written by Mr Thomas Best, Chief Commander</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. Observations during the Voyage from England to
+Surat</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. Transactions with the Subjects of the Mogul, Fights
+with the Portuguese, Settlement of a Factory and Departure for
+Acheen</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. Occurrences at Acheen in Sumatra</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 4. Trade at Tecoo and Passaman, with the Voyage to
+Bantam, and thence to England</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVIII. Observations made during the foregoing Voyage,
+by Mr Copland, Chaplain, Mr Robert Boner, Master, and Mr Nicholas
+Whittington, Merchant</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. Notes extracted from the Journal of Mr Copland,
+Chaplain of the Voyage</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. Notes extracted from the Journal of Mr Robert Boner, who
+was Master of the Dragon</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. Extract from a Treatise by Mr Nicholas Whittington,
+who was left as Factor in the Mogul Country by Captain Best,
+containing some of his Travels and Adventures</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIX. Eleventh Voyage of the East-India Company, in
+1612, in the Salomon</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XX. Twelfth Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1613,
+by Captain Christopher Newport</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. Observations at St Augustine, Mohelia, and divers
+Parts of Arabia</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. Proceedings on the Coast of Persia, and Treachery
+of the Baloches</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. Arrival at Diul-ginde, and landing of the
+Ambassador: Seeking Trade there, are crossed by the slanderous
+Portuguese: Go to Sumatra and Bantam; and thence to England</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter3-11"><b><i>CHAPTER XI.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Continuation of the Early Voyages of the English East India
+Company to India</p>
+
+<p>Introduction</p>
+
+<p>SECTION. I. Voyage of Captain Nicholas Downton to India, in
+1614</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. Incidents at Saldanha, Socotora, and Swally; with
+an Account of the Disagreements between the Moguls and
+Portuguese, and between the Nabob and the English</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. Account of the Forces of the Portuguese, their
+hostile Attempts and Fight with the English, in which they are
+disgracefully repulsed</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. Supplies received by the Portuguese, who vainly
+endeavour to use Fire-boats. They seek Peace, which is refused,
+and depart. Interview between the Nabob and Captain Downton, and
+Departure of the English</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Relations by Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, in
+Supplement to preceding Voyage</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. Continuation of the Voyage from Surat to Bantam, by
+Captain Thomas Elkington</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. Brief Observations by Mr Edward Dodsworth, who
+returned to England in the Hope</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Journey of Richard Steel and John Crowther, from
+Agimere, in India, to Ispahan, in Persia, in the Years 1615, and
+1616</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV. Voyage of Captain Walter Peyton to India, in
+1615</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. Occurrences during the Voyage from England to
+Surat</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. Occurrences at Calicut and Sumatra. Miscarriage of
+the English Ships, Abuses of the Dutch, and Factories in
+India</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. Brief Notice of the Ports, Cities, and Towns,
+inhabited by, and traded with, by the Portuguese, between the
+Cape of Good Hope and Japan, in the Year 1616</p>
+
+<p>SECTION V. Notes, concerning the Proceedings of the Factory at
+Cranganore, from the Journal of Roger Hawes</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VI. Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Ambassador from James
+I. to Shah Jehanguire, Mogul Emperor of Hindoostan</p>
+
+<p>Introduction</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. Journey from Surat to the Court of the Mogul, and
+Entertainment there, with some Account of the Customs of the
+Country</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. Occurrences in June, July, and August, 1616, from
+which the Character and Dispositions of the Mogul and his
+Subjects may be observed</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. Of the Celebration of the King's Birth-day, with
+other Occurrences, in September, 1616</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 4. Broils about Abdala Khan, and Khan-Khannan:
+Ambitious Projects of Sultan Churrum to subvert his eldest
+Brother: Sea-fight with a Portuguese Carrack; and various other
+Occurrences</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 5. Continuation of Occurrences at Court, till leaving
+Agimere, in November, 1616</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 6. Sir Thomas Roe follows the Progress of the Court,
+and describes the King's Leskar, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 7. A New-year's Gift--Suspicion entertained of the
+English--Dissatisfaction of the Persian Ambassador--English Ships
+of War in the Indian Seas</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 8 Asaph Khan and Noormahal protect the English from
+Hope of Gain.--Arrival of Mr Steel.--Danger to the Public from
+private Trade--Stirs about a Fort</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VII. Relation of a Voyage to India in 1616, with
+Observations respecting the Dominions of the Great Mogul, by Mr
+Edward Terry</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. Occurrences during the Voyage from England to
+Surat</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. Description of the Mogul Empire</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. Of the People of Hindoostan, and their Manners and
+Customs</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 4. Of the Sects, Opinions, Rites Priests, &amp;c. of
+the Hindoos; with other Observations</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VIII. Journey of Thomas Coryat by Land, from Jerusalem
+to the Court of the Great Mogul</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. Letter from Agimere to Mr L. Whitaker, in 1615</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. Do. from Agra to his Mother, in 1616</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. Some Observations concerning India, by Coryat</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IX. Account of the Wrongs done to the English at Banda
+by the Dutch, in 1617 and 1618</p>
+
+<p>SECTION X. Fifth Voyage of the Joint-stock by the English East
+India Company, in 1617, under the Command of Captain Martin
+Pring</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. Occurrences on the Voyage out, and at Surat,
+Bantam, and Jacatra</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. Dutch Injustice, and Sea-fight between them and Sir
+Thomas Dale</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. Departure for Coromandel, with Occurrences there,
+and Death of Sir Thomas Dale.--Capture of English Ships by the
+Dutch; and Occurrences at Tecoo</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 4. News of Peace between the English and Dutch</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 5. Voyage of Captain Pring from Bantam to Patania and
+Japan</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 6. Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence to
+England</p>
+
+<p>SECT. XI. Voyage of the Ann-royal, from Surat to Mokha, in
+1618</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XII. Journal of a Voyage to Surat and Jasques in
+1620</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. Voyage from England to Surat</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. Voyage from Surat towards Jasques</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. Account of a Sea-fight with the Portuguese</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 4. Second Sea-fight with the Portuguese</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 5. Sequel of the Voyage</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIII. Relation of the War of Ormus, and the Capture of
+that Place by the English and Persians, in 1622</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIV. Account of the Massacre of Amboina, in 1623</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XV. Observations during a Residence in the Island of
+Chusan, in 1701, by Dr James Cunningham; with some early Notices
+respecting China</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 1. Voyage to Chusan, and short Notices of that
+Island</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 2. Ancient and modern State of the Country, and coming
+of the English to reside there</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 3. Manner of cultivating Tea in Chusan</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 4. Of the famous Medicinal Root called H-tchu-u</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 5. Removal of Dr Cunningham to Pulo-Condore, with an
+Account of the Rise, Progress, and Ruin of that Factory</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 6. Some Account of the Factory at Pulo-Laut, with the
+Overthrow of that Factory, and of the English Trade in Borneo</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+[Illustration: CHART OF NORTH EASTERN AFRICA] 
+
+<p>Published 1st July 1813</p>
+
+<h2>A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.</h2>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2><a name="part2" id="part2">PART II.--Continued</a></h2>
+
+<h2><a name="book2-3" id="book2-3">BOOK III.--Continued.</a></h2>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2><a name="chapter3-10" id="chapter3-10">CHAPTER
+X.--<i>Continued</i>.</a></h2>
+
+<p>EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH TO INDIA, AFTER THE ESTABLISHMENT
+OF THE EAST INDIA COMPANY.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XV.--<i>Continued</i>.</p>
+
+<p><i>Eighth Voyage of the English East India Company, in 1611,
+by Captain John Saris</i>.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION 5. <i>Farther Observations respecting the Moluccas, and the
+Completion of the Voyage to Japan</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The 10th of April, 1613, the Spanish commandant sent me a
+message, requesting me to stop till the next morning, when he
+would visit me along with the sergeant-major of Ternate, who had
+arrived with a letter from Don Jeronimo de Sylva, allowing them
+to trade with me for different things of which they were in want,
+and to satisfy me in what I had requested; wherefore I resolved
+to stop a while longer, to see if we could do any good. Expecting
+Don Fernando next day, according to promise, and hearing nine
+guns from their fort, we supposed he was coming: But it proved to
+be for the arrival of the prince of Tidore from the wars, who was
+returned with the heads of 100 Ternatans. His force in the
+expedition in which he had been engaged, consisted of sixty men
+armed with matchlocks, two brass <i>bases</i> and three or four
+<i>fowlers</i>. He had over-thrown <i>Key Chilly Sadang</i>, the
+son of the king of Ternate, whom the Dutch had brought over from
+Ternate to prevent the natives of Machian from supplying us with
+cloves. While on his return to Ternate after our departure, he
+was drawn into an ambush by the son of the king of Tidore, who
+lay in wait for the purpose, and slew him, together with 160 men
+who were along with him, not one of the whole being spared. The
+prince of Ternate brought home the head of Key Chilly Sadang to
+his wife, who was sister to the slain prince. Key Chilly Sadang
+in a great measure owed this discomfiture to a barrel of powder
+he had bought from us at Machian, as it exploded at the
+commencement of the rencounter, and threw his whole party into
+confusion. Along with the prince of Ternate, one of his younger
+brothers and the king of Gilolo were both slain. Towards evening,
+the sergeant-major of Ternate, who was also secretary of the
+government, came aboard, and made many compliments, requesting me
+to come to Ternate, where they would do for me every thing in
+their power. I consented to do this the more readily, as Ternate
+was in my way.</p>
+
+<p>I received a message on the 12th from the prince of Tidore,
+apologising for not having yet visited me, and saying that he had
+a quantity of cloves which I might have, for which I thanked him,
+and requested they might be sent soon. They promised to send the
+cloves before next morning; wherefore, to guard against
+treachery, I kept double watch, with match in cock, and every
+thing in readiness: For this prince of Tidore was a most resolute
+and valiant soldier, and had performed many desperate exploits
+against the Dutch, having shortly before surprised one of their
+ships of war when at anchor not far from where we then lay.
+Before day, a galley, which the Spaniards told us they expected,
+came over from <i>Batta China</i>, and were very near us in the
+dark before we were aware. On hailing, they answered us that they
+were Spaniards and our friends, and then made towards the shore
+in all haste. She was but small, having only fourteen oars of a
+side. We this day found our latitude to be 0&deg; 50' N.</p>
+
+<p>We weighed on the 13th with the wind at N. and a current
+setting to the S. In passing the fort we saluted with five guns,
+which they returned. Several Spaniards came off with
+complimentary messages, and among these a messenger from the
+prince, saying we should have had plenty of cloves if we had
+waited twenty-four hours longer. But we rather suspected that
+some treachery was intended, by means of their gallies, frigates,
+and curracurras, which we thus avoided by our sudden departure.
+On rounding the western point of Tidore, we saw four Dutch ships
+at anchor before their fort of Marieca; one of which, on our
+appearance, fired a gun, which we supposed was to call their
+people aboard to follow us. We steered directly for the Spanish
+fort on Ternate, and shortened sail on coming near, and fired a
+gun without shot, which was immediately answered. They sent us
+off a soldier of good fashion, but to as little purpose as those
+of Tidore had done. Having little wind, our ship sagged in, but
+we found no anchorage. Having a gale of wind at south in the
+evening, we stood out to sea, but lost as much ground by the
+current as we had gained by the wind. The 14th, with the wind at
+S.S.W. we steered N.N.W. being at noon directly under the
+equinoctial. We had sight of a galley this day, on which we put
+about to speak with her; but finding she went away from us, we
+shaped our course for Japan.</p>
+
+<p>Before leaving the Moluccas, it may be proper to acquaint the
+reader with some circumstances respecting the trade and state of
+these islands. Through the whole of the Moluccas, a <i>bahar</i>
+of cloves consists of 200 <i>cattees</i>, the <i>cattee</i> being
+three pounds five ounces <i>haberdepoiz</i>, so that the bahar is
+662 pounds eight ounces English averdupois weight. For this bahar
+of cloves, the Dutch give fifty dollars, pursuant to what they
+term their perpetual contract; but, for the more readily
+obtaining some loading, I agreed to pay them sixty dollars. This
+increase of price made the natives very desirous of furnishing
+me, so that I certainly had procured a full lading in a month,
+had not the Dutch overawed the natives, imprisoning them, and
+threatening to put them to death, keeping strict guard on all the
+coasts. Most of these islands produce abundance of cloves; and
+those that are inhabited of any note, yield the following
+quantities, one year with another. Ternate 1000 bahars, Machian
+1090, Tidore 900, Bachian 300, Moteer 600, Mean 50, Batta China
+35; in all 3975 bahars, or 2,633,437 1/2 English pounds, being
+1175 <i>tons</i>, twelve <i>cwts.</i> three <i>qrs.</i> and nine
+and a half <i>libs.</i> Every third year is far more fruitful
+than the two former, and is therefore termed the great
+monsoon.</p>
+
+<p>It is lamentable to see the destruction which has been brought
+upon these islands by civil wars, which, as I learnt while there,
+began and continued in the following manner: At the discovery of
+these islands by the Portuguese, they found fierce war subsisting
+between the kings of Ternate and Tidore, to which two all the
+other islands were either subjected, or were confederated, with
+one or other of them. The Portuguese, the better to establish
+themselves, took no part with either, but politically kept
+friends with both, and fortified themselves in the two principal
+islands of Ternate and Tidore, engrossing the whole trade of
+cloves into their own hands. In this way they domineered till the
+year 1605, when the Dutch dispossessed them by force, and took
+possession for themselves. Yet so weakly did they provide for
+defending the acquisition, that the Spaniards drove them out next
+year from both islands, by a force sent from the Philippine
+islands, took the king of Ternate prisoner, and sent him to the
+Philippines, and kept both Ternate and Tidore for some time in
+their hands. Since then the Dutch have recovered some footing in
+these, islands, and, at the time of my being there, were in
+possession of the following forts.</p>
+
+<p>On the island of Ternate they have a fort named:
+<i>Malayou</i>, having three bulwarks or bastions, <i>Tolouco</i>
+having two bastions and a round tower, and <i>Tacome</i> with
+four bastions. On Tidore they have a fort called <i>Marieka</i>,
+with four bastions. On Machian, <i>Tufasoa</i>, the chief town of
+the island, having four large bastions with sixteen pieces of
+cannon, and inhabited by about 1000 natives: At <i>Nofakia</i>,
+another town on that island, they have two forts or redoubts, and
+a third on the top of a high hill with five or six guns, which
+commands the road on the other side. Likewise at <i>Tabalola</i>,
+another town in Machian, they have two forts with eight cannons,
+this place being very strongly situated by nature. The natives of
+all these places are under their command. Those of <i>Nofakia</i>
+are not esteemed good soldiers, and are said always to side with
+the strongest; but those of Tabalola, who formerly resided at
+<i>Cayoa</i>, are accounted the best soldiers in the Moluccas,
+being deadly enemies to the Portuguese and Spaniards, and as
+weary now of the Dutch dominion. In these fortified stations in
+Machian, when I was there, the Dutch had 120 European soldiers;
+of whom eighty were at <i>Tafasoa</i>, thirty at <i>Nofakia</i>,
+and ten at <i>Tabalola</i>. The isle of Machian is the richest in
+cloves of all the Molucca islands; and, according to report,
+yields 1800 bahars in the great monsoon. The Dutch have one large
+fort in the island of Bachian, and four redoubts in the isle of
+Moteer. The civil wars have so wasted the population of these
+islands, that vast quantities of cloves perish yearly for want of
+hands to gather them; neither is there any likelihood of peace
+till one party or the other be utterly extirpated.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving them to their wars, I now return to our traffic, and
+shall shew how we traded with the natives, which was mostly by
+exchanging or bartering the cotton cloths of Cambaya and
+Coromandel for cloves. The sorts in request and the prices we
+obtained being as follows: <i>Candakeens</i> of Baroach six
+<i>cattees</i> of cloves; candakeens of <i>Papang</i>, which are
+flat, three cattees; <i>Selas</i>, or small <i>bastas</i>, seven
+and eight cattees; <i>Patta chere Malayo</i> sixteen cattees;
+five <i>cassas</i> twelve cattees; coarse of that kind eight
+cattees; red <i>Batellias</i>, or <i>Tancoulas</i>, forty-four
+and forty-eight cattees; <i>Sarassas chere Malayo</i> forty-eight
+and fifty cattees; <i>Sarampouri</i> thirty cattees; <i>Chelles,
+Tapsiels</i>, and <i>Matafons</i>, twenty and twenty-four
+cattees; white <i>Cassas</i>, or <i>Tancoulos</i>, forty and
+forty-four cattees; the finest <i>Donjerijus</i> twelve, and
+coarser eight and ten cattees; <i>Pouti Castella</i> ten cattees;
+the finest <i>Ballachios</i> thirty cattees; <i>Pata chere
+Malayo</i> of two fathoms eight and ten cattees; great
+<i>Potas</i>, or long four fathoms, sixteen cattees; white
+<i>Parcallas</i> twelve cattees; <i>Salalos Ytam</i> twelve and
+fourteen cattees; <i>Turias</i> and <i>Tape Turias</i> one and
+two cattees; <i>Patola</i> of two fathoms, fifty and sixty
+cattees; those of four fathoms and of one fathom at proportional
+prices; for twenty-eight pounds of rice, a dollar; <i>Sago</i>,
+which is a <i>root</i> of which the natives make their bread, is
+sold in bunches, and was worth a quarter of a dollar the bunch;
+velvets, sattins, taffetics, and other silk goods of China were
+much in request. This may suffice for the trade of the
+Moluccas.</p>
+
+<p>Proceeding on our voyage, it was calm all day on the 16th of
+April, but we, had a good breeze at night from the west, when we
+steered N.N.W. In the morning of the 17th, we steered north, with
+the wind at E. by S. but it afterwards became very variable,
+shifting to all points of the compass, and towards night we had
+sight of land to the northwards. On the 18th we had calms, with
+much rain, and contrary winds at intervals, for which reason I
+resolved to go for the island of <i>Saiom</i>, which was to the
+westward, and to remain there and refresh the crew, till the
+change of the monsoon might permit me to proceed on my intended
+voyage. But almost immediately the wind came round to the west,
+and we stood N. and N. by E. On the 19th, with little wind at W.
+we continued our course N. by E. the weather being extremely hot,
+with much rain. It was quite calm in the morning of the 20th, but
+we had a constant current setting us to the eastwards, which
+indeed had been the case ever since we left Ternate. In the
+afternoon, the wind came round to the northward, a brisk gale,
+and we stood west to stem the current, bearing for a large island
+called <i>Doy</i>, where we proposed to rest and refresh.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 21st, we were fairly before that island,
+near its northern extremity, which was a low point stretching
+southwards. We stood in E. by S. with the wind at N. by E. and at
+noon sent our skiff in search of a convenient place for
+anchoring; but the current set so strong to the eastwards, that
+we were unable to stem it, and could merely see at a distance a
+very large bay, having a great shoal off its northern point half
+a league out to sea, while we had sixty fathoms water off the
+shore upon a bottom of sand. As night approached, we stood off
+till morning; and next day, about sun-set, we came to anchor in
+the large bay, having on standing in fifty-six, thirty-five,
+twenty-six, and twenty-four fathoms water.</p>
+
+<p>I sent some people ashore in the skiff on the 23d, to look out
+for a convenient watering-place, and for a proper situation in
+which to set up a tent to defend our men from the rain when on
+shore. They accordingly found a fit place right over against the
+ship, and saw many tracks of deer and wild swine, but no
+appearance of any inhabitants. The country was full of trees,
+and, in particular, there were abundance of <i>cokers</i>,[1]
+<i>penang, serie</i>, and <i>palmitos</i>, among which were
+plenty of poultry, pheasants, and wood-cocks. I went ashore along
+with our merchants, and had a tent set up. Our carpenter made
+several very ingenious pitfalls for catching the wild-hogs. We
+took some fish among the rocks with much labour, and got one
+pheasant and two wood-Pigeons, which last were as large in the
+body as ordinary hens. Some of our company staid all night ashore
+to look for the wild-hogs coming into the traps, and some very
+large ones were seen on the 24th, but none were caught. This
+morning, about half past seven, the moon, being at the full, was
+eclipsed in a more extraordinary manner than any of us had ever
+seen, being three hours and a half obscured before she recovered
+her entire light, <i>which was very fearful</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 1: Cocoa-nut trees.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 25th, our people searching about the woods, brought great
+store of <i>cokers</i> to the ship, together with some fowls, and
+the heads of the palmito trees, which we boiled with our beef,
+and found them to eat like cabbages. The 28th, the company were
+busily employed in taking in wood and water. The skiff was sent
+out to sound the shoal, and found ten and twelve fathoms at the
+northern point of the bar, near the shoal. All this time we had
+prodigious rain both day and night. The 29th and 30th were
+employed in bringing wood aboard, which we found as good as our
+English billets. The skiff was sent on the 1st of May to sound
+the western point of the bay, where the water was found very
+deep. On landing at that part of the coast our people found the
+ruins of several huts, among which were some brass pans, which
+shewed the place had been lately inhabited, but, as we supposed,
+the inhabitants had been hunted from their houses by the
+wars.</p>
+
+<p>We set sail on the 12th May, 1613, from this island of
+<i>Doy</i>, being the north-eastmost island of
+<i>Batta-China</i>, or Gilolo, in the Moluccas, in latitude
+2&deg; 35' N.[2] The variation here was 5&deg; 20' easterly. By
+noon of this day we were fourteen leagues N. by E. from the place
+where we had been at anchor for twenty days.[3] The 1st June,
+passed the tropic of Cancer. The 2d, being in lat 25&deg; 44' N.
+we laid our account with seeing the islands of <i>Dos Reys
+Magos.</i>[4] Accordingly, about four p.m. we had sight of a very
+low island, and soon afterwards of the high land over the low,
+there being many little islands, to the number of ten or eleven,
+connected by broken grounds and ledges, so that we could not
+discern any passage to the westward. At night we stood off and
+took in our top-sails, and lay close by in our courses till
+morning. The islands stretch from S.W. to N.E. The 3d, we stood
+in for the land, which appeared to us a most pleasant and fertile
+soil, as much so as any we had seen from leaving England, well
+peopled, and having great store of cattle. We proposed to have
+come to anchor about its north-east point, and on sounding, had
+sixty fathoms. We saw two boats coming off to us, and used every
+means to get speech of them, wishing for a pilot, and desiring to
+know the name of the island, but the wind was so strong that we
+could not get in, wherefore we stood away N.W. and had sight of
+another island bearing N.N.W. for which we steered, and thence
+descried another, N.E. half E. about seven or eight leagues off.
+Coming under the western island, we observed certain rocks about
+two miles offshore, one of which was above water, and the other,
+to the north, under water, a great way without the other, and the
+sea breaking on it.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 2: The latitude in the text, which we have
+reason to believe accurate, as Captain Saris was so long at this
+place, indicates the northern end of the island of <i>Morty</i>,
+east and a little northerly of the northern peninsula or leg of
+Gilolo.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 3: We have omitted in the text the naked
+journal of daily winds, courses, and distances, as tending to no
+useful information whatever.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 4: The indicated latitude, considering the
+direction of the voyage between Morty and Japan, nearly coincides
+with the small islands of Kumi and Matchi, west from the south
+end of the great Liqueo.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 7th, we supposed ourselves about twenty-eight or thirty
+leagues from <i>Tonan</i>.[5] In the morning of the 8th, we had
+sight of a high round island, bearing E. six leagues off, with
+various other islands, in six or seven directions westwards, five
+or six leagues off.[6] In the morning of the 8th we had sight of
+land bearing N.N.E. and of six great islands in a row N.E. from
+the island we descried the preceding evening; and at the northern
+end of all were many small rocks and hummocks. In a bay to the
+eastwards of these, we saw a high land bearing E. and E. by S.
+and E.S.E. which is the island called <i>Xima</i> in the charts,
+but named <i>Maihma</i> by the natives, while the former island
+is called <i>Segue</i>, or <i>Amaxay</i>.[7] The 10th, four great
+fishing-boats came aboard, about five tons burden each, having
+one large sail, like that of a skiff. They had each four oars of
+a side, resting on pins fastened to the gunwales, the heads of
+the pins being let into the middle of the oars, so that they hung
+in just equipoise, saving much labour to the rowers. These people
+make much more speed in rowing than our men, and perform their
+work standing, by which they take up less room. They told us we
+were just before the entrance to <i>Nangasaki</i>, which bore
+N.N.E.; the straits of <i>Arima</i> being N.E. by N. and that the
+high hill we saw yesterday was upon the island called
+<i>Uszideke</i>,[8] making the straits of <i>Arima</i>, at the
+north end of which is good anchorage, and at the south end is the
+entrance to <i>Cahinoch</i>.[9] We agreed with two of the masters
+of these fishing-boats for thirty dollars each, and rice for
+their food, to pilot us to <i>Firando</i>, on which agreement
+their people came aboard our ship, and voluntarily performed its
+duty as readily as any of our own mariners. We steered N. by W.
+the pilots reckoning that we were thirty leagues from Firando.
+One of the boats which came to us at this time belonged to the
+Portuguese who dwelt at Nangasaki, being Christian converts, and
+thought our ship had been the Portuguese ship from Makao; but, on
+finding we were not, made all haste back again to advise them,
+refusing every entreaty to remain with us.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 5: The island of Tanao-sima is probably
+here meant, being the most southerly of the Japanese islands. It
+may be proper to remark, that the termination <i>sima</i>, in the
+names of islands belonging to Japan, obviously means
+<i>island</i>, like the prefix <i>pula</i> in the names of
+islands in the Malay Archipelago.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 6: There is a considerable cluster of small
+islands south from Tanaosima, between the latitudes of 29&deg;
+30' and 30&deg; N.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 7: Xima, or sima, only means island.
+Perhaps Mashama may be that named Kaba-sima in modern maps, and
+Amaxay may possibly be Amacusa, these islands being in the way
+towards Nangasaki.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 8: This seems the same island called before
+Amaxay, or Amacusa.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 9: Cochinotzu is the name of a town on the
+south-west peninsula of the island of Kiusiu; but Cochinoch in
+the text seems the sound leading to Nangasaki, and the straits of
+Arima appear to be the passage between the north side of Amacusa
+and Kiusiu.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.6. <i>Arrival at Firando, and some Account of the Habits,
+Manners, and Customs of the Japanese</i>.</p>
+
+<p>We came to anchor about half a league short of Firando, about
+three p.m. of the 11th June, 1613, the tide being then so much
+spent that we could not get nearer. I was soon afterwards visited
+by <i>Foyne Sama</i>, the old king of Firando, accompanied by his
+nephew, <i>Tone Sama</i>, who governed the island under the old
+king.[10] They were attended by forty boats or gallies, some
+having ten, and others fifteen oars of a side. On coming near our
+ship, the king ordered all the boats to fall astern, except the
+two which carried him and his nephew, who only came on deck, both
+dressed in silk gowns, under which were linen shirts and
+breeches. Each of them wore two <i>cattans</i>, or Japanese
+swords, one of which was half a yard long in the blade, and the
+other only a quarter of a yard. They wore neither turbans nor
+hats, the fore part of their heads being shaven to the crowns,
+and the rest of their hair very long, and gathered into a knot
+behind. The king seemed about seventy-two years of age, and his
+nephew, or grandchild, twenty-two, who governed under him, and
+each was attended by an officer, who commanded over their slaves
+as they directed.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 10: As the Portuguese, who first visited
+Japan, chose to designate the sovereign of that country by the
+title of emperor, they denominated all its provinces kingdoms,
+and their governors kings.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Their manner of salutation was thus: On coming into the
+presence of him they mean to salute, they put off their shoes, so
+that they are barefooted, for they wear no stockings. Then
+putting their right hand within the left, they hold them down to
+their knees, bending their bodies, then wag or swing their joined
+hands a little to and fro, making some small steps to one side
+from the person they salute, and say <i>augh! augh!</i> I
+immediately led them into my cabin, where I had prepared a
+banquet for them, and entertained them with a good concert of
+music, to their great delight. I then delivered the letters from
+our king to the king of Firando, which he received very joyfully,
+saying he would not open it till <i>Ange</i> came, who would
+interpret it. <i>Ange</i>, in their language, signifies a pilot,
+and by this name was meant one <i>William Adams</i>, an
+Englishman. He had come this way in a Dutch ship from the South
+Seas, about twelve years ago; and, in consequence of a mutiny
+among the people, the ship was seized by the emperor, and Adams
+had remained in the country ever since. After staying about an
+hour and a half, the king took his leave, bidding us welcome to
+the country, and promising me kind entertainment.</p>
+
+<p>He was no sooner ashore than all his nobility came to see the
+ship, attended by a vast number of soldiers, every person of any
+note bringing a present; some of venison, some of wild-fowl, and
+some of wild-boar, the largest and fattest we had ever seen,
+while others brought us fish, fruits, and various things. They
+greatly admired the ship, and seemed never to be satisfied with
+looking at her; and as we were much pestered by the number of
+these visitors, I sent to the king, requesting he would order
+them to remove, to prevent any inconveniences that might arise.
+The king immediately sent a principal officer of his guard, with
+orders to remain aboard, to see that no injury was done to us,
+and ordered a proclamation to that effect to be made in the town.
+The same night, Hendrik Brewer, who was chief of the Dutch
+factory at Firando, came to visit me, or rather to see what had
+passed between the king and us. I wrote this day to Mr Adams, who
+was then at <i>Jedo</i>,[11] nearly 300 leagues from Firando, to
+inform him of our arrival. King <i>Foyne</i> sent my letter next
+day by his admiral, to <i>Osackay</i> (<i>Osaka</i>,) the nearest
+port of importance on the principal island, whence it would go by
+post to Jedo, and he sent notice to the emperor by the same
+conveyance, of our arrival and purposes.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 11: Called <i>Edoo</i>, in
+Purchas.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 12th, we had fish brought to us in
+abundance, and as cheap as we could desire. We this day weighed
+to make sail for the road; and, on this occasion, the king sent
+at the least threescore large boats, or gallies, well manned, to
+tow us into the harbour. On seeing this multitude of boats, I was
+in some doubts of their intentions, and sent my skiff to warn
+them not to come near the ship. But the king was in the headmost
+boat, and observing my suspicions, waved his handkerchief for all
+the boats to wait, and came aboard himself, telling me that he
+had ordered all these boats to assist in bringing me round a
+point which was somewhat dangerous, on account of the strength of
+the tide, and could not be stemmed by even a good breeze of wind,
+and if the ship fell into the eddy, we should be driven upon the
+rocks. Having got this explanation, we sent our hawsers to the
+Japanese boats, on which they fell stiffly to work, and towed us
+into the harbour. In the mean time, the king breakfasted with me,
+and when I proposed rewarding his people for towing me in, after
+we were at anchor, he would not allow them to accept of any
+thing.</p>
+
+<p>We now anchored in five fathoms, on soft ooze, so near the
+shore that we could have talked with the people in their houses.
+We saluted the town with nine guns, but had no return, as there
+are no cannon at this place, neither any fortifications, except
+barricades for small arms. Several nobles came off to bid me
+welcome, two of whom were men of high rank, named <i>Nobusane</i>
+and <i>Simmadone</i>. I entertained them well, and, at their
+departing, they used extraordinary state, one remaining on board
+till the other was landed, their children and chief followers
+using the like ceremony. There came continually such numbers of
+people on board, both men and women, that we were not able to go
+about the decks. The ship likewise was quite surrounded by boats
+full of people, greatly admiring her head and stern. I permitted
+several women of the better sort to come into my cabin, where the
+picture of Venus and Cupid was hung, rather wantonly executed.
+Some of these ladies, thinking it to be Our Lady and her blessed
+Son, fell down to worship with appearance of much devotion,
+whispering our men, so that their companions might not hear, that
+they were Christians, having been converted by the Portuguese
+jesuits.</p>
+
+<p>The king came aboard again, bringing four principal women
+along with him, who were attired in silken gowns, overlapped in
+front, and girt round them. Their legs were bare, except that
+they had half buskins bound about their insteps with silk ribbon.
+Their hair was very black and long, tied up in a knot on the
+crown, in a very comely manner, no part of their heads being
+shaven, like the men. They had comely faces, hands, and feet,
+with clear white complexions, but wanting colour, which they
+supplied by art. Their stature was low, but they were very fat,
+and their behaviour was very courteous, and not ignorant of the
+respect due according to their fashions. The king requested that
+no person might remain in the cabin except myself and my
+linguist, who was a native of Japan, brought along with me from
+Bantam. He was well skilled in the Malay language, in which he
+explained to me what was said by the king, in Japanese. The women
+were at first somewhat bashful, but the king desired them to be
+frolicsome. They sung several songs, and played on certain
+instruments, one of which resembled our lute, being bellied like
+it, but longer in the neck, and fretted like ours, but had only
+four gut strings. They fingered with their left hands, as is done
+with us, and very nimbly; but they struck the strings with a
+piece of ivory held in the right hand, as we are in use to play
+with a quill on the citern. They seemed to delight much in their
+music, beating time with their hands, and both playing and
+singing by book, prickt on lines and spaces much like our own. I
+feasted them, and gave them several English commodities, and
+after two hours stay, they returned on shore. At this interview I
+requested the king to let us have a house in the town, which he
+readily granted, taking two of my merchants ashore with him, to
+whom he pointed out three or four houses, desiring them to make
+their choice, paying the owners as we could agree.</p>
+
+<p>On the 13th I went ashore, attended by the merchants and
+principal officers, and delivered our presents to the king, to
+the value of about &pound;140, which he received with great
+satisfaction, feasting me and my whole company with several kinds
+of <i>powdered</i> wild-fowl and fruits. He called for a standing
+cup, which was one of the presents, and ordering it to be filled
+with their country wine, which is distilled from rice, and as
+strong as brandy, he told me he would drink it all off to the
+health of the king of England, which he did, though it held about
+a pint and a half, in which he was followed by myself and all his
+nobles. As only myself and the Cape merchant sat in the same room
+with the king, all the rest of my company being in another room,
+he commanded his secretary to go and see that they all pledged
+the health. The king and his nobles sat at meat cross-legged, on
+mats, after the fashion of the Turks, the mats being richly edged
+with cloths of gold, velvet, sattin, or damask. The 14th and 15th
+were spent in giving presents; and on the 16th I agreed with
+<i>Audassee</i>, captain of the Chinese quarter, for his house,
+paying ninety-five dollars for the monsoon of six months; he to
+put it into repair, and to furnish all the rooms conveniently
+with mats, according to the fashion of the country, and we to
+keep it in repair, with leave to alter as we thought fit.</p>
+
+<p>This day our ship was so pestered with numbers of people
+coming on board, that I had to send to the king for a guardian to
+clear them out, many things being stolen, though I more suspected
+my own people than the natives. There came this day a Dutchman in
+one of the country boats, who had been at the island of
+<i>Mashma</i>, where he sold good store of pepper, broad-cloth,
+and elephants teeth, though he would not acknowledge to us that
+he had sold any thing, or brought any thing back with him in the
+boat; but the Japanese boatmen told us he had sold a great
+quantity of goods at a mart in that place, and had brought his
+returns in bars of silver, which he kept very secret.</p>
+
+<p>The 21st the old king came aboard again, bringing with him
+several women to make a frolic. These women were actors of
+comedies, who go about from island to island, and from town, to
+town, to act plays, which are mostly about love and war, and have
+several shifts of apparel for the better grace of their
+interludes. These women were the slaves of a man who fixes a
+price that every man must pay who has to do with them. He must
+not take a higher price than that affixed, on pain of death, if
+complained against. At the first, he is allowed to fix upon each
+woman what price he pleases, which price he can never afterwards
+raise, but may lower it as he likes; neither doth the party
+bargain with the women for their favours, but with the master.
+Even the highest of the Japanese nobility, when travelling, hold
+it no disgrace to send for these panders to their inn, and
+bargain with them for their girls, either to fill out their drink
+for them at table, as is the custom with all men of rank, or for
+other uses. When any of these panders die, although in their life
+they were received into the best company, they are now held
+unworthy to rest among the worst. A straw rope is put round their
+neck, and they are dragged through the streets into the fields,
+and cast on a dung-hill to be devoured by dogs and fowls.</p>
+
+<p>The 23d, there arrived two Chinese junks at Nangasaki, laden
+with sugar. By them it was understood that the emperor of China
+had lately put, to death about 5000 persons for trading out of
+the country contrary to his edict. Yet the hope of profit had
+induced these men to hazard their lives and properties, having
+bribed the <i>Pungavas</i>, or officers of the sea-ports, who had
+succeeded those recently put to death for the same offence.</p>
+
+<p>The 29th, a <i>soma</i>, or junk, belonging to the Dutch,
+arrived at Nangasaki from Siam, laden with Brazil wood and skins
+of all kinds. On their arrival, they were said to be Englishmen,
+as, before our coming, the Dutch used generally to pass by the
+name of English, our nation being long known by report in Japan,
+but much scandalised by the Portuguese jesuits, who represent us
+as pirates and rovers on the sea. In consequence of this report,
+the Japanese have a song, which they call <i>English
+Crofonio</i>, shewing how the English take the Spanish and
+Portuguese ships, which, while singing, they act likewise with
+catans, and so scare their children, as the French used to do
+theirs with the name of Lord Talbot.</p>
+
+<p>The 1st July two of our company happened to quarrel, and had
+nearly gone out to the field to fight, which had greatly
+endangered us all, as it is the law here, that whoever draws a
+weapon in anger, although no harm be done, is presently cut in
+pieces; and if they do even but small hurt, not only they are so
+executed themselves, but all their relations are put to death.
+The 2d, I went ashore to keep house at Firando, my household
+consisting of twenty-six persons. At our first coming, we found
+that the Dutch sold broad-cloths of &pound;15 or 16 a-cloth, for
+forty dollars, or &pound;8 sterling the <i>mat</i>, which is a
+measure of two yards and a quarter. Being desirous to keep up the
+price of our cloth, and hearing that the Dutch had a great
+quantity, I had a conference with Brower, the chief of their
+factory, proposing that we should mutually fix prices upon such
+cloths as we both had, and neither of us, in any respect, sell
+below the prices agreed upon; for performance of which, I offered
+to enter into mutual bonds. In the morning, he seemed to approve
+of this proposal, but ere night he sent me word that he disliked
+it, alleging that he had no authority from his masters to make
+any such agreement. Next morning he shipped away a great store of
+cloth to different islands, rating them at low prices, as at
+twenty, eighteen, and sixteen dollars the <i>mat</i>, that he
+might the more speedily sell off his own, and glut the market
+before ours came forwards.</p>
+
+<p>Pepper, ungarbled, which cost 1 3/4 dollars at Bantam the
+sack, was worth at our coming ten <i>tayes</i> the <i>pecul</i>,
+which is 100 <i>cattea</i> of Japan, or 130 pounds English. A
+<i>taye</i> is worth five shillings sterling. A rial of eight, or
+Spanish dollar, is worth there in ordinary payment only seven
+<i>mas</i>, or three shillings and sixpence sterling, one mas
+being equal to a single rial. The <i>pecul</i> of tin was worth
+thirty <i>tayes</i>; the <i>pecul</i> of elephants teeth eighty
+<i>tayes</i>: Cast iron six tayes the pecul: Gunpowder
+twenty-three tayes the pecul: Socotrine aloes the cattee, six
+<i>tayes</i>: Fowling-pieces twenty tayes each: Calicos and such
+little commodities, of Guzerat or Coromandel, were at various
+prices, according to their qualities.</p>
+
+<p>On the 7th of July the king of the Gotto islands, which are
+not far from Firando to the S.W. came upon a visit to king
+<i>Foyne</i>, saying he had heard of an excellent English ship
+being arrived in his dominions, which he greatly desired to go
+aboard of. King Foyne requested of me that this might be allowed,
+the king of Gotto being an especial friend of his; wherefore he
+was banqueted on board, and several cannon were fired at his
+departure, which he was much pleased with, and told me he would
+be glad to see some of our nation at his islands, where they
+should meet a hearty welcome. Three Japanese, two men and a
+woman, were put to death for the following cause: The woman, in
+the absence of her husband, had made separate assignations with
+both the men. He who was appointed latest, not knowing of the
+other, and weary of waiting, came too soon, and enraged at
+finding her engaged with another man, drew his <i>cattan</i> and
+wounded both very severely, almost cutting the man's back in two.
+Yet the wounded man, getting hold of his <i>cattan</i>, wounded
+the aggressor. This fray alarming the street, word was sent to
+king Foyne and to know his pleasure, who accordingly gave orders
+to cut off all their heads. After their execution, all who
+thought proper, as many did, came to try the temper of their
+weapons upon the dead bodies, which they soon hewed in small
+pieces, which were left to be devoured by the ravens.</p>
+
+<p>The 10th three others were executed in the same way with the
+former, being beheaded and afterwards cut in pieces, for stealing
+a woman long since from Firando and selling her at Nangasaki.
+When any are to be executed, they are led out of town in the
+following manner: First there go two men, one having a mattock
+and the other a shovel, to dig the grave, if that be allowed to
+the criminal. Then a third person carrying a small table or
+board, on which is written the crime of the party, which is
+afterwards affixed to a post on the grave in which he is buried.
+Next comes the party to be executed, having his hands bound
+behind him by a silken cord, and having a small paper banner,
+much like one of our wind-vanes, on which the offence is written.
+The criminal is followed by the executioner, having his
+<i>cattan</i> or Japanese sword by his side, and holding in his
+hand the cord with which the hands of the criminal are bound. On
+each hand of the executioner walks a soldier armed with a pike,
+the head of which rests on the criminal's shoulder, to intimidate
+him from attempting to escape. In this manner I saw one man led
+out to execution, who went forwards with a most wonderful
+resolution, and apparently without fear of death, such as I had
+never seen the like in Europe. He was condemned for stealing a
+sack of rice from a neighbour, whose house was burning.</p>
+
+<p>The 11th there arrived three Chinese junks at Nangasaki, laden
+with silks. The 19th the old king begged a piece of
+<i>poldavy</i> from me; and though a king, and famed as the
+bravest soldier in Japan for his conduct in the wars of Corea, he
+had it made into coats, which he wore next his skin, some part of
+it being made into handkerchiefs. The 20th, a <i>soma</i> or junk
+arrived at Nangasaki from Cochinchina, laden with silk and
+benzoin, which last was exceedingly clear and good. The 29th Mr
+Adams arrived at Firando, having been seventeen days in coming
+from Sorongo, while we had waited no less than forty-eight days
+for his coming.[12] After receiving him in a friendly manner, I
+conferred with him in the presence of our merchants, as to our
+hopes of trade in this country. He said the trade was variable,
+but doubted not we might do as well as the Dutch, and gave great
+commendations of the country, to which he seemed to be much
+attached.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 12: The first messenger, for not making
+haste with the letters to Adams, was banished by the angry
+king.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the morning of the 30th, an officer of the young king was
+cut to pieces in the street, as it was thought for being too
+intimate with the young king's mother; and one of the officer's
+slaves was slain along with him, for endeavouring to defend his
+master. This day there came two Spaniards to Firando, who were
+acquainted with Mr Adams, to request a passage in our ship for
+Bantam. They had belonged to the crew of a Spanish ship, sent
+from New Spain about a year before to make discoveries to the
+north of Japan, and coming to Jedo to wait the monsoon which
+serves for going to the northward, which begins in the end of
+May, the crew mutinied against their captain, and every one went
+away whither he listed, leaving the ship entirely unmanned. On
+receiving this account of the Spaniards, I thought it best not to
+let them enter my ship.</p>
+
+<p>On the 3d of August, king <i>Foyne</i> sent to know what was
+the size of the present from our king to the emperor, as also the
+number of people I meant to take along with me to the court, that
+he might provide accordingly for my going up in good order, in
+regard to barks, horses, and palanquins. This day likewise I
+caused the presents to be assorted, for the emperor and those of
+chief consideration about him, of which presents respectively the
+values were as follow:--</p>
+
+<pre>
+   For <i>Ogoshosama</i>, the emperor, ---------------------&pound;87  7  6
+       <i>Shongosama</i>, the emperor's son, ----------------43 15  0
+       <i>Codskedona</i>, the emperor's secretary, ----------15 17  6
+       <i>Saddadona</i>, secretary to the emperor's son,-----14  3  4
+       <i>Iccocora Juga</i>, judge of <i>Meaco</i>, -----------------4 10  6
+       <i>Fongodona</i>, admiral of <i>Orungo</i>,-------------------3 10  0
+       <i>Goto Shozavero</i>, the mint-master, --------------11  0  0
+                                                    ----------
+                                            Total,  &pound;180  3 10
+</pre>
+
+<p>S.7. <i>Journey of Captain Saris to the Court of the Emperor,
+with his Observations there and by the Way</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The 7th August, 1613, being furnished by king <i>Foyne</i>
+with a proper galley, and having taken leave of him, I went
+aboard ship to put all things in order for my departure.[13] This
+galley rowed twenty-five-oars of a side, and was manned by sixty
+Japanese; and I fitted her out handsomely in our fashion, with
+waste cloths, ensigns, and all other necessaries. Leaving
+instructions with the master of the Clove and the cape merchant,
+for the proper regulation of the ship and the house on shore
+during my absence, and taking with me ten Englishmen and nine
+other attendants, as the before-mentioned sixty were only to take
+charge of the galley, I departed from Firando on my voyage and
+journey for the court of the Japanese emperor. We rowed through
+among various islands, all or most of which were well inhabited,
+and had several handsome towns upon them, one of which, called
+<i>Facata</i>, has a very strong castle built of freestone, but
+without any cannon or garrison. The ditch of this castle is five
+fathoms deep and ten broad, all round about the walls, and is
+passed by means of a drawbridge, and the whole is kept in good
+repair. The tide and wind were here so strong against us that we
+could not proceed, for which reason I landed and dined at this
+town, which was very well built, and seemed to be as large as
+London is within the walls. All its streets are so even, that one
+may see from one end to the other. This place is exceedingly
+populous, and the people very civil and courteous; only that at
+our first landing, and indeed at all places to which we came in
+the whole country, the children and low idle people used to
+gather about and follow us a long way, calling <i>cor&eacute;,
+cor&eacute;, cocor&eacute;, War&eacute;</i> that is to say,
+<i>You Coreans with false hearts</i>; all the while whooping and
+hallooing, and making such a noise that we could not hear
+ourselves speak; and sometimes throwing stones at us, though
+seldom in any of the towns, yet the clamour and shouting was
+every where the same, as nobody reproved them for it. The best
+advice I can give to those who may come after me, is to pass on
+without attending to these idle rabblements, by which their ears
+only will be disturbed by the noise. All along this coast, and
+indeed the whole way to Osaka, we found various women who lived
+continually with their families in boats upon the water, as is
+done in Holland. These women catch fish by diving even in the
+depth of eight fathoms, that are missed by the nets and lines;
+and by the habit of frequent diving their eyes become excessively
+red and bloodshot, by which mark these divers may be readily
+distinguished from all other women.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 13: The old king sent 200 tayes, worth five
+shillings each, to Captain Saris, for his expences in the
+journey.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In two days we rowed from Firando to Facata. When eight or ten
+leagues short of the straits of <i>Xemina-seque</i>,[14] we came
+to a great town, where there lay in a dock a junk of 800 or 1000
+tons burden, <i>all sheathed with iron</i>,[15] and having a
+guard appointed to keep her from being set on fire or otherwise
+destroyed. She was built in a very homely fashion, much like the
+descriptions we have of Noah's ark; and the natives told us she
+served to transport troops to any of the islands in case of
+rebellion or war.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 14: The editor of Astley's Collection has
+altered the orthography of this name to <i>Shemina seki</i>. In
+modern maps, we find a town named <i>Sunono sequi</i>, on one
+side of these straits, which divide the island of Kiusiu from the
+south-west end of the great island of Niphon.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 15: It is not a little singular, that
+metallic sheathing should have been observed by English mariners
+in Japan so long ago as 1613, and yet never attempted in the
+British or any other European navy till more than 150 years
+afterwards, and then brought forwards as a new
+invention.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We met with nothing extraordinary after passing through the
+straits of Xemina-seque till we came to Osaka, where we arrived
+on the 27th of August. Our galley could not get nearer the town
+than six miles; wherefore we were met by a smaller vessel, in
+which came the <i>goodman or host</i> of the house where we were
+to lodge in Osaka, and who brought with him a banquet of wine and
+<i>salt fruits</i> to entertain me. A rope being made fast to the
+mast-head of our boat, she was drawn forwards by men, as our west
+country barges are at London. We found Osaka a very large town,
+as large as London within the walls, having many very high and
+handsome timber bridges which serve to cross the river
+<i>Jodo</i>, which is as wide as the Thames at London. Some of
+the houses here were handsome, but not many. It is one of the
+chiefest sea-ports in all Japan, and has a castle of great size
+and strength, with very deep ditches all round, crossed by
+drawbridges, and its gates plated with iron. This castle is all
+of freestone, strengthened by bulwarks and battlements, having
+loop-holes for small arms and arrows, and various passages for
+throwing down stones upon the assailants. The walls are at least
+six or seven yards thick, all built of freestone throughout,
+having no packing with trumpery within, as I was told, but all
+solid. The stones are large and of excellent quality, and are so
+exactly cut to fit the places where they are laid, that no mortar
+is used, only a little earth being occasionally thrown in to fill
+up any void spaces.</p>
+
+<p>In the castle of Osaka, when I was there, dwelt the son of
+<i>Tiquasama</i>, who was the true heir of Japan; but being an
+infant at the death of his father, he was left under the
+guardianship of four chiefs or great men, of whom Ogoshosama, the
+present emperor, was the principal. The other three guardians
+were each desirous of acquiring the sovereignty, and being
+opposed by Ogoshosama, levied armies against him; but Ogoshosama
+defeated them in battle, in which two of them were slain, and the
+other saved himself by flight. After this great victory,
+Ogoshosama attempted what he is said not to have thought of
+before. Seizing the true heir of the throne, he married the young
+prince to his own daughter, and confined them in the castle of
+Osaka, under the charge of such persons only as had been brought
+up from their childhood under the roof of the usurper, so that by
+their means he has regular intelligence of every thing they
+do.</p>
+
+<p>Right opposite to Osaka, on the other side of the river Jodo,
+there is another town called <i>Sakay</i>, not so large as Osaka,
+but of considerable extent, and having great trade to all the
+neighbouring country. Having left samples and lists of prices of
+all our commodities with our host at Osaka, we departed from that
+place on the night of the 29th of August in a bark, and arrived
+at <i>Fusima</i> next night, where we found a garrison of 3000
+men, maintained there by the emperor, to keep Miaco and Osaka
+under subjection. This garrison is shifted every third year, and
+the relief took place while we were there, so that we saw the old
+bands march away and the new enter, which they did in a most
+soldier-like manner. They marched five abreast, and to every ten
+files or fifty men there was a captain, who kept his men in
+excellent order. Their shot marched first, being <i>calivers</i>,
+for they have no muskets and will not use any, then followed
+pikes, next swords or <i>cattans</i> and targets, these were
+followed by bows and arrows, and then a band armed with weapons
+called <i>waggadashes</i>, resembling Welsh hooks: These were
+succeeded by calivers, and so on as before; but without any
+ensigns or colours; neither had they any drums or other warlike
+instruments of music. The first file of the band armed with
+cattans had silver scabbards, and the last file which marched
+next the captain had their scabbards of gold. The companies or
+bands were of various numbers, some 500, some 300, and some only
+of 150 men. In the middle of every band there were three horses
+very richly caparisoned, their saddles being covered by costly
+furs, or velvet, or stammel broad-cloths. Every horse was
+attended by three slaves, who led them in silken halters, and
+their eyes were hoodwinked by means of leathern covers.</p>
+
+<p>After each troop or band, the captain followed on horseback,
+his bed and all his necessaries being laid upon his own horse
+equally poised on both sides, and over all was spread a covering
+of red felt of China, on the top of which sat the captain
+crosslegged, like a huckster between two paniers. Such as were
+old or weak in the back had a staff artificially fixed on the
+pannel, on which he could lean back and rest himself as if
+sitting in a choir. We met the captain-general of this new
+garrison two days after meeting his first band, having in the
+mean time met several of these bands in the course of our
+journey, some a league, and others two leagues from each other.
+The general travelled in great state, much beyond the other
+bands, yet the second band had their arms much more richly
+decorated than the first, and the third than the second, and so
+every successive band more sumptuous than another. The
+captain-general hunted and hawked all the way, having his own
+hounds and hawks along with him, the hawks being hooded and lured
+as ours in England. The horses that accompanied him for his own
+riding were six in number, and were all richly caparisoned. These
+horses were not tall, but of the size of our middling nags, short
+and well knit, small-headed, and very mettlesome, and in my
+opinion far excelling the Spanish jennet in spirit and action.
+His palanquin was carried before him, being lined with crimson
+velvet, and having six bearers, two and two to carry at a
+time.</p>
+
+<p>Such excellent order was taken for the passing and providing
+of these soldiers, that no person either inhabiting or travelling
+in the road by which they passed and lodged, was in any way
+injured by them, but all of them were as cheerfully entertained
+as any other guests, because they paid for what they had as
+regularly as any other travellers. Every town and village on the
+way being well provided with cooks-shops and victualling houses,
+where they could get every thing they had a mind for, and diet
+themselves at any sum they pleased, between the value of an
+English penny and two shillings. The most generally used article
+of food in Japan is rice of different qualities, as with our
+wheats and other kinds of grain, the whitest being reckoned the
+best, and is used instead of bread, to which they add fresh or
+salted fish, some pickled herbs, beans, radishes, and other
+roots, salted or pickled; wild-fowl, such as duck, mallard, teal,
+geese, pheasants, partridges, quails, and various others,
+powdered or put up in pickle. They have great abundance of
+poultry, as likewise of red and fallow deer, with wild boars,
+hares, goats, and kine. They have plenty of cheese, but have no
+butter, and use no milk, because they consider it to be of the
+nature of blood.</p>
+
+<p>They have great abundance of swine. Their wheat is all of the
+red kind, and is as good as ours in England, and they plough both
+with oxen and horses, as we do. During our residence in Japan, we
+bought the best hens and pheasants at three-pence each, large fat
+pigs for twelve-pence, a fat hog for five shillings, a good ox,
+like our Welsh runts, at sixteen shillings, a goat for three
+shillings, and rice for a halfpenny the pound. The ordinary drink
+of the common people is water, which they drink warm with their
+meat, holding it to be a sovereign remedy against worms in the
+<i>maw</i>. They have no other drink but what is distilled from
+rice, as strong as our brandy, like Canary wine in colour, and
+not dear: Yet, after drawing off the best and strongest, they
+still wring out a smaller drink, which serves the poorer people
+who cannot reach the stronger.</p>
+
+<p>The 30th of August we were furnished with nineteen horses at
+the charge of the emperor, to carry up my attendants and the
+presents going in our king's name to <i>Surunga</i>. I had a
+palanquin appointed for my use, and a led horse, well
+caparisoned, to ride when I pleased, six men being appointed to
+carry my palanquin on plain ground, but where the road grew
+hilly, ten were allowed. The officer appointed by king
+<i>Foyne</i> to accompany me, took up these men and horses by
+warrants, from time to time, and from place to place, just as
+post-horses are taken up in England, and also procured us
+lodgings at night; and, according to the custom of the country, I
+had a slave to run before me, carrying a pike. We thus travelled
+every day fifteen or sixteen leagues, which we estimated at three
+miles the league, and arrived on the 6th of September at
+<i>Surunga</i>,[16] where the emperor resided. The road for the
+most part is wonderfully even, and where it meets with mountains,
+a passage is cut through. This is the main road of the whole
+country, and, is mostly covered with sand and gravel. It is
+regularly measured off into leagues, and at every league there is
+a small hillock of earth on each side of the road, upon each of
+which is set a fair pine-tree, trimmed round like an arbour.
+These are placed at the end of every league, that the hackney-men
+and horse-hirers may not exact more than their due, which is
+about three-pence for each league.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 16: Suruga, Surunga, or Sununnaga, is a
+town in the province of that name, at the head of the gulf of
+Totomina, about 50 miles S.W. from Jedo.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The road is much frequented, and very full of people. Every
+where, at short distances, we came to farms and country-houses,
+with numerous villages, and frequent large towns. We had often
+likewise to ferry over rivers, and we saw many <i>Futtakeasse</i>
+or <i>Fotoquis</i>, being the temples of the Japanese, which are
+situated in groves, and in the pleasantest places of the country,
+having the priests that attend upon the idols dwelling around the
+temples, as our friars in old time used to do here in England. On
+approaching any of the towns, we saw sundry crosses, having the
+dead bodies of persons who had been crucified affixed to them,
+such being the ordinary mode of punishment for most malefactors.
+On coming near Surunga, where the emperor keeps his court, we saw
+a scaffold, on which lay the heads of several malefactors that
+had been recently executed, with the dead bodies of some
+stretched on crosses, while those of others had been all hewn in
+pieces by the natives, trying the tempers of their
+<i>cattans</i>, as formerly mentioned when at Firando. This was a
+most unpleasant sight for us, who had necessarily to pass them on
+our way to Surunga.</p>
+
+<p>The city of Surunga is fully as large as London, with all its
+suburbs.[17] We found all the handicraft tradesmen dwelling in
+the outward parts and skirts of the town, while those of the
+better sort resided in the heart of the city, not choosing to be
+annoyed by the continual knocking, hammering, and other noise
+made by the artisans in their several callings. As soon as we
+were settled in the lodgings appointed for us in the city of
+Surunga, I sent Mr Adams to the imperial residence, to inform the
+secretary of our arrival, and to request as speedy dispatch as
+possible. He sent me back for answer, that I was welcome, and
+that after resting myself for a day for two, I should be admitted
+to an audience of the emperor. The 7th of September we were
+occupied in arranging the presents, and providing little tables
+of sweet-smelling wood on which to carry them, according to the
+custom of the country.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 17: It is hardly necessary to remark, that
+this applies to London in the year 1613, then vastly smaller than
+now, when Westminster was a separate city, at some miles distance
+from London; the Strand, Piccadilly, and Oxford Street, country
+roads; Whitehall a country palace; and the whole <i>west end</i>
+of the town, fields, farms, or country villas.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 8th of September I was carried in my palanquin to the
+castle of Surunga, in which the emperor resides, and was attended
+by my merchants and others, the presents being carried before me.
+In entering the castle, we had to pass three draw-bridges, at
+each of which there was a guard of soldiers. The approach to the
+presence was by means of a fair and wide flight of stone stairs,
+where I was met and received by two grave and comely personages;
+one of whom was <i>Codske dona</i>, the emperor's secretary, and
+the other named <i>Fongo dona</i>, the admiral. By these officers
+I was led into a handsome room, the floor of which was covered by
+mats, on which we sat down cross-legged. Shortly after, they led
+me into the presence-chamber, in which stood the chair of state,
+to which they wished me to do reverence. This chair was about
+five feet high, covered with cloth of gold, and very richly
+adorned on its back and sides, but had no canopy. We then
+returned to the former room, and in about a quarter of an hour
+word was brought that the emperor was in the presence-chamber.
+They then led me to the door of the room where the emperor was,
+making signs for me to go in, but dared not even to look up
+themselves. The presents sent from our king to the emperor, and
+those which I offered as from myself according to the custom of
+the country, had all been placed in a very orderly manner upon
+mats in the presence-chamber, before the emperor came there.</p>
+
+<p>Going into the chamber, of presence, I made my compliments to
+the emperor according to our English fashion, and delivered our
+king's letter to the emperor, who took it in his hand and raised
+it towards his forehead, and commanded his interpreter, who sat
+at a good distance behind, to desire Mr Adams to tell me that I
+was welcome from a long and wearisome journey, that I might
+therefore rest me for a day or two, and then his answer should be
+ready for our king. He then asked me if I did not intend to visit
+his son at <i>Jedo</i>.[18] Answering, that I proposed to do so,
+the emperor said, that orders should be given to provide me with
+men and horses for the journey, and that the letters for our king
+should be ready against my return. Then, taking leave
+respectfully of the emperor, and coming to the door of the
+presence-chamber, I found the secretary and admiral waiting to
+conduct me down the stairs where they formerly met me, when I
+went into my palanquin and returned with my attendants to our
+lodgings.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 18: Always called <i>Edoo</i> in Purchas,
+but we have thought it better to use the form of the name now
+universally adopted in geography; but which name, from the
+orthography used by Captain Saris, is probably pronounced in
+Japan, <i>Idu</i>, or <i>Eedoo</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 9th I sent the present intended for the secretary to be
+delivered to him, for which he heartily thanked me, but would in
+no wise receive it, saying, the emperor had so commanded, and
+that it was as much as his life was worth to accept of any gift.
+He took, however, five pounds of Socotorine aloes, to use for his
+health's sake. I this day delivered to him the articles of
+privilege for trade, being <i>fourteen</i> in number, which we
+wished to have granted. These he desired to have abbreviated into
+as few words as possible, as in all things the Japanese are fond
+of brevity. Next day, being the 10th September, the articles so
+abridged were sent to the secretary by Mr Adams; and on being
+shown by the secretary to the emperor, they were all approved
+except one, by which, as the Chinese had refused to trade with
+the English, we required permission, in case of taking any
+Chinese vessels by force, that we might freely bring them into
+the ports of Japan, and there make sale of the goods. At the
+first, the emperor said we might take them, since they refused to
+trade with us; but, after conference with the Chinese resident,
+he altered his mind, and would not allow of that article. All the
+rest were granted and confirmed under his great seal, which is
+not impressed in wax as with us in England, but is stamped in
+print with red ink. These articles of privilege were as
+follow:--</p>
+
+<p><i>Privileges granted by OGOSHOSAMA, Emperor of Japan, to the
+Governor and Company of the London East India
+Company</i>.[19]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 19: This copy Captain Saris brought home
+and gave me--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>1. We give free licence to the subjects of the king of Great
+Britain, viz. To Sir Thomas Smith, governor, and the Company of
+the East Indian Merchants Adventurers, for ever, safely to come
+into any of the ports of our empire of Japan, with their ships
+and merchandize, without any hinderance to them or their goods;
+and to abide, buy, sell, and barter, according to their own
+manner, with all nations; to remain here as long as they think
+good, and to depart at their pleasure.</p>
+
+<p>2. We grant to them freedom from custom for all such goods as
+they have brought now, or may hereafter bring into our empire, or
+may export from thence to any foreign part. And we authorise all
+ships that may hereafter arrive from England, to proceed
+immediately to sell their commodities, without any farther coming
+or sending to our court.</p>
+
+<p>3. If any of their ships shall happen to be in danger of
+shipwreck, we command our subjects not only to assist them, but
+that such parts of the ship or goods as may be saved, shall be
+returned to the captain, or the cape merchant, or their assigns.
+That they may build one house, or more, for themselves, in any
+part of our empire that they think fittest for their purpose;
+and, at their departure, may sell the same at their pleasure.</p>
+
+<p>4. If any English merchant, or others, shall die in our
+dominions, the goods of the deceased shall remain at the disposal
+of the cape merchant; and all offences committed by them shall be
+punished by the said cape merchant at his discretion, our laws to
+take no hold of their persons or goods.</p>
+
+<p>5. We command all our subjects trading with them for any of
+their commodities, to pay them for the same without delay, or to
+return their wares.</p>
+
+<p>6. For such commodities as they have now brought, or may bring
+hereafter, that are fitting for our proper use and service, we
+command that no arrest be made thereof, but that a fair price be
+agreed with the cape merchant, according as they may sell to
+others, and that prompt payment be made on the delivery of the
+goods.</p>
+
+<p>7. If, in the discovery of other countries for trade, and the
+return of their ships, they shall need men or victuals, we
+command that our subjects shall furnish them, for their money,
+according as their needs may require.</p>
+
+<p>8. Without other passport, they shall and may set out upon the
+discovery of <i>Yeadso</i>, or <i>Jesso</i>, or any other part in
+or about our empire.</p>
+
+<p>From our castle in Surunga, this first day of the ninth month,
+in the eighteenth year of our <i>dary</i>, or reign. Sealed with
+our broad seal, &amp;c. (<i>Underwritten</i>)</p>
+
+<p>MINNA MOTTONO.</p>
+
+<p><i>Yei. Ye. Yeas</i>.[20]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 20: Kempper writes this other name of
+<i>Ongosio Sama</i>, as he calls him, <i>Ijejas</i>; which,
+according to the English orthography, is <i>Iyeyas</i>.--Astl. I.
+489. b.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 11th of September, the present intended for the
+mint-master was delivered to him, which he received very
+thankfully, and sent me in return two Japanese gowns of taffeta,
+quilted with silk cotton. The 12th Mr Adams was sent to the
+mint-master, who is the emperor's merchant, having charge of the
+mint and all the ready money, being in great estimation with the
+emperor, as he had made a vow, whenever the emperor dies, to cut
+out his own bowels and die with him. The purpose of Mr Adams
+waiting upon him at this time, was to carry a list of the prices
+of our English commodities. About noon of this same day, being
+furnished with horses and men by the emperor, as formerly
+specified, we set out for Jedo. The country between Surunga and
+Jedo we found well peopled, with many <i>Fotoquis</i>, or idol
+temples. Among others which we passed, was one having an image of
+great reputation, called <i>Dabis</i>, made of copper, hollow
+within, but of substantial thickness. We estimated its height to
+be twenty-one or twenty-two feet, being in the form of a man
+kneeling on the ground, and sitting on his heels; the whole of
+wonderful size, and well proportioned, and being dressed in a
+gown cast along with the figure. Some of our men went into the
+inside of this idol, and hooped and hallooed, which made an
+exceeding great noise. It is highly reverenced by all native
+travellers who pass that way. We found many characters and marks
+made upon it by its visitors, which some of my followers
+imitated, making their marks in like manner. This temple and idol
+stand in the main road of pilgrimage to <i>Tencheday</i>, which
+is much frequented for devotion, as both night and day people of
+all ranks and conditions are continually going or returning from
+that place.</p>
+
+<p>Mr Adams told me that he had been at the <i>Fotoqui</i>, or
+temple dedicated to Tencheday, to which image they make this
+devout pilgrimage. According to his report, one of the fairest
+virgins of the country is brought monthly into that
+<i>Fotoqui</i>, and there sits alone in a room neatly fitted up,
+in a sober manner; and, at certain times, this <i>Tencheday</i>,
+who is thought to be the devil, appears unto her, and having
+carnally known her, leaves with her at his departure certain
+scales, like unto the scales of fishes. Whatever questions she is
+desired by the <i>bonzes</i>, or priests of the <i>Fotoqui</i>,
+to ask, <i>Tencheday</i> resolves. Every month a fresh virgin is
+provided for the temple, but Mr Adams did not know what became of
+the former.[21]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 21: The editor of Astley's Collection, vol.
+I. p. 487, note b. very gravely informs his readers what they
+certainly are aware of, that the gallant must have been one of
+the <i>bonzes</i>, or priests.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We arrived at <i>Jedo</i> on the 14th September. This city is
+much larger than <i>Surunga</i>, and much better and more
+sumptuously built, and made a very glorious appearance to us on
+our approach; all the ridge-tiles and corner-tiles of the roofs
+being richly gilded and varnished, as also the door-posts of the
+houses. They have no glass in their windows, but have large
+windows of board, opening in leaves, and well adorned with
+paintings, as in Holland. In the chief street of the town there
+is a great <i>cawsay</i> all through from end to end, underneath
+which flows a river, or large stream of water; and at every fifty
+paces there is a well-head, or pit, substantially built of
+free-stone, having buckets with which the inhabitants draw water,
+both for their ordinary uses and in case of fire. This street is
+as broad as any of our best streets in England.</p>
+
+<p>On the 15th I gave notice of my arrival to <i>Sadda-dona</i>,
+the secretary of the young king, or son of the emperor,
+requesting him to inform the king. I had access to the king on
+the 17th, and delivered to him the presents sent by our king, as
+also some from myself, as is the custom of the country. The king
+holds his court in the castle of Jedo, which is much stronger and
+more sumptuous than that of Surunga; and the king was besides
+better guarded and attended than his father the emperor.
+<i>Saddadona</i>, his secretary, is father to <i>Codskedona</i>
+the emperor's secretary, his years and experience fitting him to
+have the government and direction of the king or prince
+successor, who appeared to us to be about forty-two years of
+age.</p>
+
+<p>My entertainment and access to the king here at Jedo was much
+like that formerly mentioned with the emperor his father at
+Surunga. He accepted very kindly the letters and presents from
+our king, bidding me welcome, and desiring me to rest and refresh
+myself, and that his letters and presents in return should be
+made ready with all speed. On the 19th I delivered the presents
+to <i>Saddadona</i>. This day, thirty-two men being committed
+prisoners to a certain house, for not paying their debts, and
+being in the stocks within the same, it took fire in the night by
+some casualty, and they were all burnt to death. Towards evening,
+the king of Jedo sent me two suits of varnished armour, as a
+present to our king; and sent likewise for myself a <i>tatch</i>
+and a <i>waggadash</i>, the former being a long sword which is
+only worn in Japan by soldiers of the highest rank, and the
+latter being a singular weapon resembling a Welsh hook. I was
+informed that the distance from Jedo to the norther-most part of
+Japan, was estimated at twenty-two days journey on horseback.</p>
+
+<p>I left Jedo on the 21st September by boat, and came to
+<i>Oringgaw</i>,[22] a town upon the sea-side, where is an
+excellent harbour, in which ships may ride with as much safety as
+in the river Thames, and the passage from which by sea to Jedo is
+very safe and good; so that it would be much better for our ships
+to sail to this port than to Firando, as Oringgaw is on the main
+island of Japan or <i>Niphon</i>, and is only fourteen or fifteen
+leagues from Jedo, the capital and greatest city of the empire.
+Its only inconvenience is, that it is not so well supplied with
+flesh and other victuals as Firando, but is in all other respects
+much preferable. From thence we proceeded on the 29th to Surunga,
+where we remained in waiting for the letters and presents from
+the emperor. On the 8th of October I received the emperor's
+letter, of which a translation is subjoined, and I then also
+received the privileges of trade, formerly quoted, the original
+of which I left with Mr Cocks.[23]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 22: No such place as Oringgaw is to be
+found in modern maps of Japan. Jedo is situated at the head of a
+deep gulf of the same name, in the south-east corner of Japan.
+About the distance indicated in the text, there is a town and bay
+named <i>Odavara</i>, on the western side of the gulf, and in the
+direct way back to Surunga, which may possibly be the
+<i>Oringgaw</i> of the text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 23: The characters have by some been
+thought to be those of China, but I compared them with Chinese
+books, and they seemed to me quite different, yet not
+<i>letters</i> to compound words by spelling, as ours, but
+<i>words</i> expressed in their several characters, such as are
+used by the <i>Chinais</i> and as the brevity manifesteth. I take
+them to be characters peculiar to Japan.--<i>Purch.</i> 
+
+<p>In a marginal reference in the plate given by Purchas, the
+lines are said to read downwards, beginning at the right hand. It
+may possibly be so: But they appear <i>letters</i>, or literal
+characters, to <i>compound words by spelling</i>, and to be read
+like those used in Europe, from left to right horizontally. In a
+future portion of our work, the subject of the Japanese language
+and writing will be farther elucidated; when, we believe, it will
+appear that they have two modes of writing, one by <i>verbal</i>
+or <i>ideal</i> characters like the Chinese, and the other by
+<i>literal</i> signs like all the rest of the world.--E.]</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<p><i>Letter from the Emperor of Japan to the King of Great
+Britain</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Your majesty's kind letter, sent me by your servant Captain
+Saris, who is the first of your subjects that I have known to
+arrive in any part of my dominions, I heartily embrace, being not
+a little glad to understand of your great wisdom and power, as
+having three plentiful and mighty kingdoms under your powerful
+command. I acknowledge your majesty's great bounty, in sending me
+so undeserved a present of many rare things, such as my land
+affordeth not, neither have I ever before seen: Which I receive,
+not as from a stranger, but as from your majesty, whom I esteem
+as myself, desiring the continuance of friendship with your
+highness: And that it may consist with your good pleasure to send
+your subjects to any part or port of my dominions, where they
+shall be most heartily welcome, applauding much their worthiness
+in the admirable knowledge of navigation, as having with much
+facility discovered a country so remote, not being amazed by the
+distance of so mighty a gulf, nor the greatness of such infinite
+clouds and storms, from prosecuting the honourable enterprises of
+discovery and merchandising, in which they shall find me to
+encourage them as they desire. By your said subject, I return to
+your majesty a small token of my love, desiring you to accept the
+same as from one who much rejoices in your friendship. And,
+whereas your majesty's subjects have desired certain privileges
+for trade and the settlement of a factory in my dominions, I have
+not only granted what they desired, but have confirmed the same
+to them under my broad seal, for the better establishment
+thereof. Given from my castle of <i>Surunga</i>, this fourth day
+of the ninth month, in the eighteenth year of our reign,
+according to our computation; resting your majesty's friend, the
+highest commander in the kingdom of Japan.</p>
+
+<p>Subscribed</p>
+
+<p><i>Minna Muttono</i>[24]. <i>Yei. Ye. Yeas</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 24: In the copy of the privileges, Purchas
+gives this name <i>Mottono</i> while the editor of Astley's
+Collection has altered it to <i>Monttono</i>. In the privileges
+formerly inserted, the date is made in the <i>nineteenth</i>
+month, perhaps an error of the press in the Pilgrims, which we
+have therefore corrected to <i>ninth</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At my return to Surunga, I found a Spanish ambassador from the
+Philippine islands, who had only been once introduced to the
+emperor, and delivered his presents, being certain Chinese
+damasks, and five jars of European sweet wine, and could not
+obtain any farther access to the emperor. The purpose of his
+embassy was, to require that such Portuguese and Spaniards as
+were then in Japan, not authorised by the king of Spain, might be
+delivered up to him, that he might carry them to the Philippines.
+This the emperor refused, saying his country was free, and none
+should be forced out of it: But, if the ambassador could persuade
+any to go with him, they should not be detained. The cause of the
+ambassador making this request was on account of the great want
+of men to defend the Molucca islands against the Dutch, who were
+then making great preparations for the entire conquest of these
+islands. After the ambassador had waited for an answer till the
+time limited by his commission was expired, and receiving none,
+he went away much dissatisfied: And when at the sea side, an
+answer was returned, as mentioned above, together with a slender
+present of five Japanese gowns, and two <i>cattans</i> or
+swords.</p>
+
+<p>About a month before I came to Surunga, being displeased with
+the Christians, the emperor issued a proclamation commanding that
+they should all remove immediately, and carry their churches to
+Nangasaki, a maritime town about eight leagues from Firando, and
+that no Christian church should be permitted, neither any mass be
+sung, within ten leagues of his court, on pain of death. Some
+time after, twenty-seven natives, men of good fashion, being
+assembled in an hospital or Christian Leper-house, where they had
+mass performed, and this coming to the knowledge of the emperor,
+they were all commanded to be shut up in a house for a night, and
+to be led to execution next day. That same evening, another man
+was committed to the same house for debt, who at his coming was a
+heathen and quite ignorant of Christ or his holy religion; but,
+next morning, when the officer called at the door for the
+Christians to come forth for execution, and those who renounced
+it to remain behind, this man had been so instructed during the
+night by the others, that he came resolutely forth along with the
+rest, and was crucified with them.</p>
+
+<p>We departed from Surunga on the 9th of October, and during our
+journey towards <i>Miaco</i> we had for the most part much rain,
+by which the rivers were greatly swelled, and we were forced to
+stop by the way, so that it was the 16th of October before we got
+there. <i>Miaco</i> is the largest city in Japan, depending
+mostly upon trade, and having the chief <i>Fotoqui</i> or temple
+of the whole empire, which is all built of freestone, and is as
+long as the western end of St Paul's in London from the choir;
+being also as high, arched in the roof and borne upon pillars as
+that is. Many <i>bonzes</i> are here in attendance for their
+maintenance, as priests are among the papists. They have here an
+altar, on which the votaries offer rice and small money, called
+<i>cundrijus</i>, twenty of which are equal to an English
+shilling, which offerings are applied to the use of the bonzes.
+Near this altar is an idol, called <i>Mannada</i>, much
+resembling that of <i>Dabis</i> formerly mentioned, and like it
+made of copper, but much higher, as it reaches up to the arched
+roof. This <i>Fotoqui</i> was begun to be built by
+<i>Taicosama</i>, and has since been finished by his son, having
+been ended only while we were there. According to report, there
+were buried within its enclosure the ears and noses of 3000
+Coreans, who were massacred at one time; and upon their grave a
+mount is raised, having a pyramid on its summit, the mount being
+grown over with grass, and very neatly kept. The horse that
+Taicosama last rode upon is kept near this <i>Fotoqui</i>, having
+never been ridden since, and his hoofs have grown extraordinarily
+long by age.</p>
+
+<p>This <i>Fotoqui</i> stands on the top of a high hill, and on
+either side, as you ascend the hill, there are fifty pillars of
+freestone, at ten paces each from the other, having a lantern on
+the top of each, which are all lighted up with oil every night.
+There are many other Fotoquis in this city. In Miaco the
+Portuguese jesuits have a very stately college, in which there
+are several native Japanese jesuits, who preach, and have the New
+Testament printed in the Japanese language. Many of the native
+children are bred up in this college, where they are instructed
+in the Christian religion, according to the doctrines of the
+Romish church; and there are not less than five or six thousand
+natives professing Christianity in this city. The tradesmen and
+artificers of all kinds in this city are all distributed by
+themselves, every trade and occupation having its own particular
+streets, and not mingled together as with us. We remained some
+time in Miaco, waiting for the emperor's present, which was at
+length delivered, being ten <i>beobs</i>, or large pictures, for
+being hung up in a chamber.</p>
+
+<p>The 20th of October we departed from Miaco, and came that
+night to <i>Fushimi</i>.[25] We arrived about noon of the next
+day at Osaka, where the common people behaved very rudely to us,
+some calling after us <i>Tosin! Tosin!</i> that is, Chinese,
+while others called us <i>Cor&eacute;! Cor&eacute;!</i> or
+Coreans, and flung stones at us; even the greatest people of the
+city animating and setting on the rabble to abuse us. We here
+found the galley waiting for us which had brought us from
+Firando, having waited for us all the time of our absence at the
+expence of king <i>Foyne</i>. We embarked in this galley on the
+24th of October, and arrived at Firando on the 6th November,
+where we were kindly welcomed by old <i>Foyne</i>. During the
+time of my absence, our people had sold very little goods, as
+according to the customs of Japan no stranger can offer goods for
+sale without the express permission of the emperor. Besides, as
+our chiefest commodity intended for this country was broad cloth,
+which had latterly been sold there at the rate of forty Spanish
+dollars the <i>matte</i>, which is two yards and a quarter as
+formerly mentioned, and as the natives saw that we were not much
+in the habit of wearing it ourselves, they were more backward in
+buying it than they used to be. They said to us, "You commend
+your cloth to us, while you yourselves wear little of it; your
+better sort of people wearing silken garments, while the meanest
+are clothed in fustians, &amp;c." Wherefore, that good counsel,
+though late, may come to some good purpose, I wish that our
+nation would be more inclined to use this our native manufacture
+of our own country, by which we may better encourage and allure
+others to its use and expenditure.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 25: Fusimo, a town about ten miles from
+Miaco, on a river that runs into the head of the bay of
+Osaka.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.8. <i>Occurrences at Firando, during the Absence of Captain
+Saris</i>.[26]</p>
+
+<p>The 7th August, 1613, all things being in readiness, our
+general Captain Saris departed from Firando in company with Mr
+Adams, for the court of the emperor of Japan, taking along with
+him Mr Tempest Peacock, Mr Richard Wickham, Edward Saris, Walter
+Carwarden, Diego Fernandos, John Williams a tailor, John Head a
+cook, Edward Bartan the surgeon's mate, John Japan
+<i>Jurebasso</i>,[27] Richard Dale coxswain, and Anthony Ferry a
+sailor; having a cavalier or gentleman belonging to king Foyne as
+their protector, with two of his servants, and two native
+servants belonging to Mr Adams. They embarked in a barge or
+galley belonging to the king, which rowed twenty oars of a side,
+and we fired thirteen pieces of ordnance at their departure. The
+old king sent 100 <i>tayes</i> of Japanese money to our general
+before his departure, for his expenditure on the way, which I
+placed to account, by our general's order, as money lent.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 26: This subdivision is taken from
+observations written by Richard Cockes, Cape merchant, or chief
+factor at Firando. These observations are a separate article in
+the Pilgrims of Purchas, vol. I. pp. 395--405, and in Astley's
+Collection, vol. I. pp. 509--517; but are inserted in this place
+as calculated to render this first account of the English trade
+in Japan a complete and unbroken narrative.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 27: John Japan seems a fabricated name;
+perhaps a Japanese Christian named John, and the addition of
+<i>Jurebasso</i> may signify that he acted as
+interpreter.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Next day, I went to wait upon the two kings, as from our
+general, to thank them for having so well provided for his
+journey, which they took in good part. I suspect the old king had
+notice that some of our men had behaved ill last night; as he
+desired me to remind the master to look well to the people on
+board, and that I should look carefully to the behaviour of those
+on shore, that all things might go on as well in the absence of
+the general as when he was present, otherwise the shame would be
+ours, but the dishonour his. On the 9th, a Japanese boy named
+Juan, who spoke good Spanish, came and offered to serve me for
+nine or ten years, and even to go with me to England if I
+pleased, asking no wages but what I was pleased to give. I took
+him into my service, and that the rather, because I found Miguel,
+the <i>jurebasso</i> left with me by Mr Adams, was somewhat
+stubborn, and loved to run about at his pleasure, leaving me
+often without any person who could speak a word of the Japanese
+language. This Juan is a Christian, most of his kindred dwelling
+at Nangasaki, only one living here at Firando, who came along
+with him and passed his word for his honesty and fidelity. Juan
+had served a Spaniard at Manilla for three years, where he had
+acquired the Spanish language. I engaged him, and bought for him
+two Japanese garments, which cost me fourteen <i>mas</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The 13th I shewed our commodities to some merchants of
+<i>Maioco</i>, [Miaco] but they bought nothing, and seemed
+chiefly to desire to have gunpowder. This day <i>Semidono</i>
+went to visit our ship, accompanied by several stranger
+gentlemen, and came afterwards to see our English house, where I
+gave them the best entertainment in my power. The 19th at night
+began the great feast of the pagans, when they banquet and make
+merry all night by candle-light at the graves of their deceased
+kindred, whom they invite to partake.[28] It lasts three nights
+and the intermediate days; when, by command of the king, every
+house must new gravel the street before its door, and hang out
+candles all night. I was not slack in obeying this order, and I
+was informed that a poor man was put to death and his house shut
+up, for neglecting to comply with the order. On this occasion,
+the China captain furnished me with two very decent paper
+lanthorns. Being informed that the kings intended to ride about
+the streets, and to make me a visit, I provided a banquet for
+them, and waited till after midnight, but they came not. The
+20th, 21st, and 22d, I sent presents to both the kings, being
+informed that such was the custom of the country, sending them
+wine and confections; as likewise to <i>Nobesane</i> the young
+king's brother; to <i>Semidono</i>, the old king's governor, and
+to <i>Unagense</i>, which were all very thankfully accepted. Some
+<i>cavalliers</i>, or Japanese gentlemen, came to visit me during
+the festival, to whom I gave the best entertainment I could
+procure.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 28: This pagan feast is a kind of Candlemas
+or Allsouls.--<i>Purchas</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 23d we made an end of landing our gunpowder, being in all
+ninety-nine barrels, of which I advised our general by letter,
+requesting him to reserve a sufficiency for the ship, in case he
+sold it to the emperor. We landed several other things, which the
+master thought had best be sent ashore, as our men began to filch
+and steal, that they might go to taverns and brothels. This day
+Mr Melsham the purser and I dined with Semidono, who used us
+kindly. The master and Mr Eaton were likewise invited, but did
+not go. The great festival ended this day, when three troops of
+dancers went about the town, with flags or banners, their music
+being drums and <i>pans</i>,[29] to the sound of which they
+danced at the doors of all the great men, as also at their
+pagodas and at the sepulchres.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 29: Probably <i>gongs</i>, which very much
+resemble a brass frying-pan.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 24th at night, all the streets were hung with candles, as
+the young king and his brother, with <i>Semidono, Nabesone</i>,
+and many others, went in masquerade to dance at the house of the
+old king. The young king and his brother were on horseback,
+having canopies carried over them, all the rest being a-foot, and
+they were accompanied by drums and <i>kettles</i>, as the
+before-mentioned dancers, <i>Nabesone</i> playing on a fife. I
+was informed they meant to visit our house on their return,
+wherefore I provided a banquet and sat up for them till after
+midnight; but they returned in disorder, I think owing to some
+discontent, and none of them entered our house. Captain
+<i>Brower</i> likewise passed our door, but would not look at us,
+and we made as little account of him. The 27th we landed three
+pieces of ordnance, having three landed formerly, all whole
+<i>culverins</i> of iron. The old king came down to the shore
+while our men were about this job, and seeing only twenty men,
+offered seventy or a 100 Japanese to help them; but our people
+landed them all very quickly in his sight, at which he expressed
+much astonishment, saying that an hundred of his men could not
+have done it so soon. He was so much pleased with the activity of
+our men on this occasion, that he sent for a barrel of wine and
+some fish, which he gave among them as a reward for their
+labouring so lustily.</p>
+
+<p>The 28th, I received two letters from our general, dated the
+19th and 20th of the month, as also two others from Mr Peacock
+and Mr Wickham, which were brought me by the governor of
+<i>Shimonoseke</i>.[30] This governor did not land at Firando,
+but delivered these letters on board our ship to the master,
+proceeding directly for Nangasaki, and promising to return hither
+shortly. I also carried a letter for the old king <i>Foyne</i>,
+which was brought by the same governor, being accompanied on the
+occasion by Mr Melsham and <i>Hernando</i>. Foyne at this visit
+made a present of a <i>cattan</i> or Japanese sword to Mr
+Melsham, and another with a Spanish dagger to Hernando, giving
+likewise both to them and me several bunches of garlic. He also
+gave us leave to dry our gunpowder on the top of the fortress,
+offering some of his own people to help ours, if we had need of
+them. This day I brought on shore to our house twenty-two bars of
+lead, together with 125 culverin shot, round and langridge. When
+we were about to sit down to supper, the old king came to visit
+us, and being very merry he sat down to supper with us, and took
+such fare as we had in good part.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 30: Simonosequi is a town on the north side
+of the straits between the island of Kiusiua and the
+north-western end of Niphon.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 1st September, the old king and all his nobles made a
+masquerade, and went next night to visit the young king his
+grandson, accompanied by music, as formerly mentioned, all the
+streets being hung with lanterns. As I was told he meant to visit
+our house on his return, I made ready for him and waited till
+after midnight; but he passed by with all his company without
+coming in. I reckoned he had more than 3000 persons in his train,
+for which, as I think, he passed by, not wishing to trouble us
+with so great a multitude. On the 2d <i>Semidono</i> and others
+who were appointed by the king, measured all the houses in the
+street, ours among the rest; which I understood was for the
+purpose of a general taxation, to be levied by appointment of the
+emperor, for the construction of fortresses. I entertained them
+to their satisfaction. The 4th we had news that the queen of
+Spain was dead, and that the king was a suitor for the princess
+Elizabeth of England. The 6th, a nobleman came to visit our
+English house, and brought me a present of two great bottles of
+wine and a basket of pears. I entertained him as well as I could,
+and he went away contented.</p>
+
+<p>We had much rain in the morning of the 7th September,
+accompanied by wind, which increased in force all day, varying
+between the east and south. In the night between the 7th and 8th,
+the wind rose to a <i>tuffoon</i> or storm of such extreme
+violence as I had never witnessed, neither had the like been
+experienced in this country during the memory of man. It
+overturned above an hundred houses in Firando, and unroofed many
+others, among which was the house of old king Foyne. An extensive
+wall surrounding the house of the young king was blown down, and
+the boughs and branches of trees were broken off and tossed about
+with wonderful violence. The sea raged with such fury, that it
+undermined a great wharf or quay at the Dutch factory, broke down
+the stone wall, carried away the landing stairs, sunk and broke
+to pieces two barks belonging to the Dutch, and forty or fifty
+other barks, then in the roads, were broken and sunk. At our
+house, the newly built wall of our kitchen was broken down by the
+sea, which likewise flowed into and threw down our oven. The
+tiles likewise were blown off from the roofs of our house and
+kitchen, both of which were partly unroofed. Our house rocked as
+if shaken by an earthquake, and we spent the night in extreme
+fear, either of being buried under the ruins of our factory, or
+of perishing along with it by fire; for all night long, the
+barbarous unruly common people ran up and down the streets with
+lighted firebrands, while the wind carried large pieces of
+burning wood quite over the tops of the houses, as it whirled up
+the burning timbers of the several houses previously thrown down,
+hurling fire through the air in great flakes, very fearful to
+behold, and threatening an entire conflagration of the town; and
+I verily believe, if it had not been for the extreme quantity of
+rain, contrary to the usual nature of tuffoons, that the whole
+town had been consumed. This terrible wind and prodigious rain
+were accompanied the whole night by incessant flashes of
+lightning and tremendous peals of thunder. Our ship rode out the
+gale in the roads, having out five cables and anchors, of which
+one old cable gave way, but, thanks be to God, no other injury
+was sustained, except that our long boat and skiff both broke
+adrift, but were both afterwards recovered. We afterwards learnt
+that this tuffoon did more damage at Nangasaki than here at
+Firando; for it destroyed above twenty Chinese junks, together
+with the Spanish ship which brought the ambassador from
+Manilla.</p>
+
+<p>On the 12th, two merchants from Miaco came to our English
+house, to whom I shewed all our commodities. They laid aside two
+pieces of broad cloth, one black and the other <i>stammel</i>,
+the best they could find, for which they offered seven
+<i>tayes</i> the yard. They also offered for out <i>Priaman</i>
+gold eleven tayes of silver for one of gold. But they went away
+without concluding any bargain. This day, one of our men named
+Francis Williams, being drunk ashore, struck one of the servants
+of king Foyne with a cudgel, although the man had given him no
+offence, and had not even spoken to him. The Japanese came to our
+house making great complaints, and was very angry, not without
+cause, and told me he would complain to his king of the bad usage
+he had received. He had three or four others along with him, who
+had seen him abused, and who said the aggressor was just gone off
+to the ship. I gave them fair words, desiring them to go on board
+and find out the man who had committed the offence, and they
+should be sure of having him punished, and for that purpose I
+sent Miguel, our <i>jurebasso</i>, on board along with them. He
+did so, and pointed out Williams as the culprit, who stoutly
+denied the accusation with many oaths, but the affair was too
+notorious, and the master ordered him to be seized to the capstan
+in presence of the complainants, upon which even they entreated
+for his pardon, knowing that he was drunk. But the fellow was so
+unruly, that he took up an iron crow to strike the Japanese in
+the master's presence, and even abused the master in the grossest
+terms.[31]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 31: Of many misdemeanours, I permit some to
+pass the press, that the cause of so many deaths in the Indies
+might be seen, rather to be imputed to their own misconduct, than
+the intemperature of the climate, and for a caveat to others, who
+may send or be sent into <i>ethnicke</i> regions: Yet do I
+conceal the most and worst.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Learning, on the 13th, that old king Foyne was sick, I sent
+our jurebasso Miguel to visit him, carrying as a present a great
+bottle of our general's sweet wine, and two boxes of conserves,
+comfits, and sugar-bread. Miguel was likewise directed to offer
+my best service, and to say that I was sorry for his sickness,
+and would have waited on him myself, but that I supposed company
+was not agreeable to a sick man. Foyne accepted my present in
+very good part, returning many thanks, and desiring me to ask for
+any thing we were in need of, either for the use of the ship or
+our factory, which he would take care we should be provided
+with.</p>
+
+<p>The master came to the factory on the 14th early in the
+morning, telling me that most of the ship's company had lain
+ashore all night without leave, although the ship was aground,
+and there had been a heavy wind all night. He wished therefore,
+that I would allow our jurebasso, Miguel, to accompany him in
+seeking them out. He went accordingly accompanied by Miguel and
+Mr Melsham our purser, and found several of the men drinking and
+domineering, among whom he bestowed a few blows, ordering them
+aboard. Two of the men, named Lambert and Colphax, though ordered
+aboard, remained ashore all day, notwithstanding the great need
+of hands in the ship, where it had been necessary to hire several
+Japanese to assist. Lambert and Colphax being drunk, went out
+into the fields and fought, on which occasion Lambert was hurt in
+the arm, and remained drunk ashore all night; as did Boles and
+Christopher Evans, who had done so for two or three nights
+before, and had a violent quarrel about a girl.</p>
+
+<p>On the 17th, being informed that <i>Bastian</i>, the keeper of
+the brothel frequented by our men, had threatened to kill me and
+such as came along with me, if I came any more to his house to
+seek for our men, I went and complained to the young king, the
+old one being sick. At my request, he issued a proclamation, that
+no Japanese should admit our people into their houses after
+day-light, under severe penalties; and that it should be lawful
+for me, or any other in my company, to enter any of the native
+houses in search of our men, not only without molestation or
+hinderance, but that the native inhabitants should aid and assist
+me; and if the doors were not opened at my desire, I was
+authorised to break them open. A soldier was sent to inform
+<i>Bastian</i> to be careful not to molest or disturb me, as he
+might expect to be the first that should pay for it. This gave
+much offence to our people, insomuch that some of them swore they
+would have drink in the fields if they were not suffered to have
+it in the town, for drink they would.</p>
+
+<p>The 26th, <i>Novasco-dono</i> came to visit me at the factory,
+bringing me a present of two bottles of wine, seven loaves of
+fresh bread, and a dish of flying-fish. While he was with me, the
+old king came past our door, where he stopt, saying he had met
+two men in the street whom he thought strangers, and not
+belonging to us; he therefore desired that Swinton and our
+jurebasso might go with one of his attendants to see who they
+were. They turned out to be John Lambert and Jacob Charke, who
+were drinking water at a door in the street through which the
+king had gone. I was glad the king looked so narrowly after them,
+as it caused our men to be more careful of their proceedings.</p>
+
+<p>Mr William Pauling, our master's mate, who had been long ill
+of a consumption, died at the English house upon the 27th of
+September, of which circumstance I apprised the king, requesting
+permission to bury him among the Christians, which was granted.
+We accordingly put the body in a winding-sheet, and coffined it
+up, waiting to carry it to the grave next morning. Our master,
+and several others of the ship's company, came ashore in the
+morning to attend the funeral, when we were given to understand
+that the body must be transported by water as far as the Dutch
+house, because the <i>bonzes</i>, or priests, would not suffer us
+to pass with the corpse through the street before their pagoda,
+or idol temple. Accordingly the master sent for the skiff, in
+which the coffin was transported by water to the place appointed,
+while we went there by land, and carried it thence to the
+burial-place; the purser walking before, and all the rest
+following after the coffin, which was covered by a Holland sheet,
+above which was a silk quilt. We were attended by a vast number
+of the natives, both young and old, curious to see our manner of
+burial. After the corpse was interred, we all returned to the
+factory, where we had a collation, and then our people returned
+to the ship. I had almost forgotten to remark, that we had much
+ado to get any native to dig the grave in which a Christian was
+to be buried, neither would they permit the body to be conveyed
+by water in any of their boats.</p>
+
+<p>At this time the king commanded that all the streets in
+Firando should be cleaned, and that gutters should be made on
+each side to convey the water from them, all the streets to be
+new gravelled, and the water-channels to be covered with flat
+stones. This work was all done in one day, every one performing
+so much of it as was in front of his own house, and it was
+admirable to see the diligence every person used on this
+occasion. Our house was not the last in having this task
+performed, as our landlord, the Chinese captain, set a sufficient
+number of men to do the work.</p>
+
+<p>The 30th, some other merchants of Miaco came to look at our
+commodities, who offered twelve tayes the fathom for our best
+<i>stammel</i>, or red cloth; but they went away without making
+any bargain. At this time we had very heavy winds, both by day
+and night, so that we were in fear of another tuffoon, on which
+account all the fishers hauled their boats ashore, and every one
+endeavoured to secure the roofings of their houses. A week before
+this, a <i>bose</i>, bonze or conjurer, had predicted to the king
+that this tempest was to come. About this time our surgeon, being
+in his cups, came into a house where a <i>bose</i> was conjuring
+for a woman who wanted to know if her husband or friends would
+return from sea. So when the <i>bose</i> was done, the surgeon
+gave him three-pence to conjure again, and to tell him when our
+general would return to Firando. In the end, the <i>bose</i> told
+him that the general would return within eighteen days,
+pretending that he heard a voice answer from behind a wall, both
+when he conjured for the woman, and now when he conjured for the
+surgeon.</p>
+
+<p>On the 2d of October, the master sent me word that some of the
+men had run away with the skiff. These were John Bowles, John
+Saris, John Tottie, Christopher Evans, Clement Locke, Jasper
+Malconty, and James the Dutchman. While in the way to the king to
+get boats to send after them, our Dutch <i>jurebasso</i> came
+running after me, and told me our people were on the other side
+making merry at a tippling-house. On this information I returned
+to the English house to get a boat for the master to go and look
+them out, but they proved to be three others, William Marinell,
+Simeon Colphax, and John Dench, who had hired a boat and gone to
+another island, not being allowed to walk by night in Firando. By
+this mistake our deserters had the more time to get away. This
+night, about eleven, the old king's house, on the other side of
+the water, took fire, and was burnt to the ground in about an
+hour. I never saw a more vehement fire for the time it lasted,
+and it is thought his loss is very great. The old king is said to
+have set it on fire himself, by going about in the night with
+lighted canes, some sparks from which had fallen among the mats
+and set them on fire.</p>
+
+<p>I went next day to visit the old king, giving him to
+understand, by means of his governor, that I was extremely sorry
+for the misfortune that had befallen him, and would have come in
+person to give all the assistance in my power, but was doubtful
+if my presence would have been acceptable, being a stranger; and
+begged leave to assure him, that he should find me ready at all
+times, even with the hazard of my life, to do him every service
+in my power. He gave me many thanks for my good will, saying,
+that the loss he had sustained was as nothing in his estimation.
+On my return to our house, I was met by the young king going to
+visit his grandfather. Before noon, we had word that our runaways
+were upon a desert island about two leagues from Firando, of
+which I gave notice to both kings, requesting their aid and
+council how we might best bring them back. They answered, that
+they would fetch them back dead or alive, yet would be loth to
+kill them, lest we might want hands to navigate the ship back to
+England. I returned many thanks for the care they had of us, yet
+sent them word we still had a sufficiency of honest men to carry
+our ship to England, even although we should lose these knaves.
+In fine, the king fitted out two boats full of soldiers to go
+after them, with positive orders to bring them back dead or
+alive, which I made known to our master, who wished much to go
+along with them, and did so accordingly.</p>
+
+<p>9. <i>Continuation of Occurrences at Firando, during the
+Absence of the General</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On the 4th of October, a report was current in Firando that
+the <i>Devil</i> had revealed to the <i>bose</i>, [bonzes] or
+conjurers, that the town was to be burned to ashes that night, on
+which criers went about the streets the whole night, making so
+much noise that I could hardly get any rest, giving warning to
+all the inhabitants to extinguish their fires. But the devil
+turned out a liar, for no such thing happened. The 5th, old king
+<i>Foyne-same</i> came to our house, and was entertained to the
+best of our ability, when he told me our runaway seamen could not
+escape being taken, as he had sent two other armed boats after
+them, besides the two formerly mentioned. While I was talking
+with him, there came a gentleman from the emperor's court with a
+letter, and told me that our general would be back to Firando in
+eight or ten days, as he had received his dispatches from the
+emperor before this gentleman left the court. At this time king
+Foyne told me that <i>Bon-diu</i>, the king or governor of
+Nangasaki, who is brother to the empress, was to be at Firando
+next day, and that it would be proper for our ship to fire off
+three or four pieces of cannon as he passed. He told me likewise,
+that the king or governor of a town called <i>Seam</i>, was then
+in Firando.</p>
+
+<p>The master of our ship, Mr James Foster, returned from
+Nangasaki on the 7th, bringing our skiff with him, but all the
+deserters had got sanctuary in that town, so that he had not been
+able to see or speak with any of them. I was informed that
+Miguel, our jurebasso, whom I had sent along with the master as
+linguist, had dealt fraudulently both with the master and me, for
+several Japanese told me that he had spoken to our people and
+advised them to absent themselves. Knowing this, and being
+doubtful of ever recovering our people unless <i>Bondiu</i> were
+extraordinarily dealt with, I resolved to give that personage a
+present to secure him in our interest. In the afternoon, as he
+was passing on foot along the street in which was our house,
+along with the young king who gave him the post of honour,
+attended by about five hundred followers, I went out into the
+street and saluted them. Bon-diu stopped at our door and thanked
+me for the salute given him in passing our ship. I requested he
+would excuse me if I had hitherto neglected any part of my duty
+towards him, which was owing to my small acquaintance with the
+country and its customs, but that I meant to wait upon him either
+at his lodgings or aboard his junk, before he left Firando. He
+answered, that I should be heartily welcome, and remained so long
+in conversation, that it was quite dark before he got to his
+lodgings. At this time I carried the present to him, which he
+accepted in good part, offering to do our nation all the good in
+his power at court, whither he was now bound, or to serve us all
+he could any where else. Of his own accord, he began now to speak
+about the deserters, asking me if they should all be pardoned for
+his sake, if he brought them back to us? I answered, that the
+power of pardon belonged to our general, not to me, and that I
+had no doubt they might easily get free, except one or two of the
+chiefs in this and other disorders, who richly deserved
+punishment. He then said that he wished them all pardoned,
+without any exception: to which I answered, that I was sure our
+general would most willingly do any thing desired by his
+highness, or the two kings of Firando. In conclusion, he said, if
+I would give it under my hand on the faith of a Christian, that
+all should be pardoned for this time, and that I would procure
+the general to confirm this at his return, he would then send to
+Nangasaki for the deserters, and deliver them into my custody,
+otherwise he would not meddle in the matter, lest he might
+occasion any of their deaths. I answered, I was contented with
+any thing his highness was pleased to command, and so gave him
+the desired writing under my hand, conditioning that they were
+all to be sent back. I then returned to our house after which the
+Dutch waited upon him with their present, but we were before hand
+with them.</p>
+
+<p>On the 8th <i>Semidono</i> passed our house, and told me that
+king <i>Bon-diu</i> had a brother along with him, to whom it
+would be proper that we should give a present, but not so large
+as that given to Bon-diu. On this, advising with the other
+gentlemen, I laid out a present for him, and on going to deliver
+it, I found the Dutch before me with theirs, Captain Brower going
+with it himself. He accepted it very kindly, promising his
+interest and assistance to our nation, both at court and any
+where else. He came soon afterwards to our house, accompanied by
+many gentlemen, when they looked over all our commodities, yet
+went away without making any purchases. On this occasion he gave
+me a small <i>cattan</i>, and I gave him two glass bottles, two
+gally-pots, and about half a <i>cattee</i> of picked cloves,
+which he said he wanted for medicinal purposes. I likewise gave
+him and his followers a collation, with which they all seemed
+contented.</p>
+
+<p>Soon afterwards, <i>Bon-diu</i> sent a gentleman to me,
+desiring to have my written promise for pardon to our deserters,
+to which I consented, after consulting with the other gentlemen.
+If I had not done this, we certainly had never got them back, and
+the Spaniards would have sent them to Manilla or the Moluccas.
+Immediately after this, I got notice that <i>Bon-diu</i> and his
+brother meant to visit our ship, wherefore I sent some banqueting
+stuff aboard, and went myself to meet them, when they were
+entertained as we best could. Bon-diu gave two <i>cattans</i>,
+and we saluted them with seven guns at their departure. The
+brother returned soon after, and requested to have one of the
+little monkeys for his brother's children; so I bought one for
+five dollars from our master-gunner, and sent it to
+<i>Bon-diu</i>. He being ready to go on shore, desired to have me
+along with him in his boat, which I complied with, and he was
+saluted with three guns at his departure, which, as I learnt
+afterwards, was much esteemed by both brothers. When ashore, he
+insisted to accompany me to our factory, much against my
+inclination, as I was again forced to give him a collation in Mr
+Adamses chamber, after which he and his companions went away
+seemingly satisfied. Late at night, old king Foyne sent a man to
+me to enquire the particulars of the presents I had given to both
+brothers, all of which he set down in writing, but I could never
+know the reason of this. I forgot to mention that Bon-diu, just
+before going aboard our ship, went to bathe in a new warm-bath at
+the Dutch factory. The 9th Bon-diu sent one of his men to give me
+thanks for the kind entertainment he had on board, and sent me by
+the messenger two barrels of Miaco wine. Soon after, his brother
+sent me a similar message and present. They were both very
+earnest to have a perspective-glass, wherefore I sent them an old
+one belonging to Mr Eaton; but it was soon after returned with
+thanks, as not suiting them.</p>
+
+<p>On the 10th, two sons of another governor of Nangasaki who
+dwells in the town, came to see our house, both of them being
+Christians. After shewing them our commodities, I gave them a
+collation, accompanied with music, Mr Hownsell and the carpenter
+happening both by chance to be at the factory. While we were at
+table, old king Foyne came in upon us quite unexpectedly, and sat
+down to partake. I then desired our jurebasso to request the
+speedy sending back of our runaways, which they all promised,
+provided they should be pardoned, as I had formerly promised, and
+which promise I now renewed. Old Foyne desired that I would send
+him next day a piece of English beef; and another of pork, sodden
+with onions. I accordingly sent our jurebasso next day with the
+beef and pork, together with a bottle of wine, and six loaves of
+white bread, all of which he very kindly accepted. He had at
+table with him his grandson the young king, <i>Nabison</i>, his
+brother, and <i>Semidono</i>, his kinsman.</p>
+
+<p>On the 12th I went to visit both kings, and found the old one
+asleep, but spoke with his governor, after which I went to the
+young king, who received me.[32] He gave me thanks for the kind
+entertainment I had given the strangers, which he said his
+grandfather and he took in as good part as if done to themselves.
+Towards night, Foyne sent to say that he understood the
+strangers, who were now departed, had taken away various
+commodities from me, paying only as they thought good themselves,
+and not the prices I required. I answered, that they had
+certainly done so, but I knew not whether it were the custom of
+the country, being given to understand that they were in use to
+do so at Nangasaki both with the Chinese and Portuguese, and that
+in reality what they had taken from me was not worth the speaking
+of. I was answered, that although this was done at Nangasaki with
+the Chinese, who were forbidden to trade at Japan, they had not
+authority to do so with those strangers who had the privilege of
+trade, more especially here at Firando, where these people had no
+authority. I sent back my humble thanks to the king for the care
+he used to see justice done both to strangers and natives,
+saying, I would wait upon his highness myself to inform him of
+the whole truth. Captain Brower sent me word that they had taken
+various commodities from him, paying him just as they pleased; he
+also sent an empty bottle, desiring to have it filled with
+Spanish wine, as he had invited certain strangers, and had none
+of his own.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 32: It was now a great festival among the
+pagans, which began on this day, said to be like the Lent of the
+papists.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I heard three or four guns or chambers discharged on the 13th,
+which I supposed had been done at the Dutch house, in honour of
+the king; but I afterwards learnt that they were shot by a
+Chinese junk which was passing for Nangasaki. Shortly after, the
+old king sent for me to come to dinner at the Dutch house, and to
+bring Mr Eaton with me, and a bottle of wine.[33] Mr Eaton had
+taken medicine, and could not go out, but I went. We had an
+excellent dinner, the dishes being dressed partly in the Japanese
+fashion, and partly according to the Dutch way, but no great
+drinking. The old king sat at one table, accompanied by his
+eldest son and two brothers of the young king, as the young king
+had sent to say he was not well. At the other table there sat,
+first, <i>Nabesone</i>, the old king's brother, then myself, next
+me <i>Semidono</i>, then the old king's governor, and below him
+<i>Zanzebar's</i> father-in-law, and various other Japanese
+gentlemen on the other side of the table. Captain Brower did not
+sit down, but carved at table, all his own people attending and
+serving on their knees. Captain Brower even gave drink to every
+one of his guests with his own hands, and upon his knees, which
+seemed very strange to me. When they had dined, Foyne and all his
+nobles went away, and Captain Brower accompanied me to our house.
+I asked him why he served these people on his knees, when he told
+me it was the custom of the country, even the king serving his
+guests on his knees when he made a feast, to do them the more
+honour. Before night the old king came to the English house, and
+visited all its apartments. I gave him a collation, and after
+staying an hour, and taking one thing and another, he went his
+way.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 33: These things are mentioned to shew how
+poor Cockes was imposed upon among them; as, taking advantage of
+his weak side, they seem all to have wished to get from him all
+they could, without any design of serving him in return.--Astl.
+I. 518. b.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 16th, learning that two Christians were arrived from
+Nangasaki, I went to visit them, and to enquire about our
+runaways. One was George Peterson, a Dutchman, born in Flushing;
+the other was Daman Maryn, a native of Venice. They told me that
+our runaways had been conveyed away in a small bark for
+<i>Macoro</i>,[34] and that they two had deserted in hope of
+procuring a passage in our ship to return to their own countries;
+they said they were well known to Mr Adams, and were desirous to
+have gone immediately on board, being both seafaring men. The
+Dutchman had served three or four and twenty years with the
+Spaniards, and came master's mate in one of their ships from
+<i>Agua-pulca</i> [Acapulco.] for Manilla in the Philippine
+islands. They had plenty of money, and would have sent it to our
+ship or to our factory; but I told them that I durst not presume
+to entertain them in the absence of our general, yet would do
+them all the service in my power at his return. I accordingly
+sent Miguel to inform the king that these two strangers were come
+to seek a passage in our ship, not being Spaniards nor subjects
+of Spain. The king sent me back for answer, that they were
+welcome, if they were such as they reported themselves; but, if
+Spaniards or Portuguese, he could not allow them to remain in
+Firando, as the Spanish ambassador had procured an order from the
+emperor that all Spaniards should retire to Manilla.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 34: Called in the sequel Macow, or Macao,
+the Portuguese settlement on the coast of China, at the mouth of
+the <i>Bocca-tigris</i>, or river of Canton.--E]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The two strangers came to me early on the 17th, requesting me
+to accompany them to wait upon the king, to give them the better
+countenance, which I agreed to. On the way, they told me that our
+fugitives had given out at Nangasaki that more of our people
+would follow them, as none of any account would stay to navigate
+the ship home, because their officers used them more like dogs
+than men. They alleged also, that twenty resolute Spaniards might
+easily get possession of our ship in one or two small boats. The
+old king received us very kindly, and asked the strangers many
+questions about the wars in the Molucca islands between the
+Spaniards and Dutch. They said the Spaniards were resolved to
+prosecute this war with much vigour, having prepared a strong
+force for that purpose. They also told the king that all our
+fugitives had, as they believed, been secretly conveyed away from
+Nangasaki seven days before, in a <i>soma</i> that went from
+thence for <i>Macow</i>.[35] The king would not believe them,
+saying it was impossible such a man as Bon-diu, having given his
+word to restore them, should be found false to his promise. In
+the end, he agreed to allow these men to remain, and to go along
+with our ship, if our general pleased to take them. So the poor
+men returned much contented to their lodgings, assuring me they
+would prove faithful to us, and that we need not wish any worse
+punishment to our fugitives than the bad treatment they would
+receive from the Spaniards.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 35: Macow, or Macao, a town of the
+Portuguese near the continent of China. Miguel, the jurebasso,
+servant to Mr Adams, was suspected of double-dealing in this
+affair of the fugitives: the circumstances I
+omit.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 18th we had a total eclipse of the moon, which began about
+eleven p.m. The 19th, about the same hour, a fire began in
+Firando, near the young king's house, by which forty houses were
+burnt down; and, had not the wind fallen calm, most of the town
+had been destroyed. Had not our Englishmen bestirred themselves
+lustily, many more houses had gone to wreck, for the fire took
+hold three or four times on the opposite side of the street to
+our house, which they as often extinguished, for which they were
+very much commended by the king and other principal people. Old
+Foyne came to our door on horseback, and advised us to put all
+our things into the <i>godown</i>, and daub up the door with wet
+clay, which would place them in safety. Captain Brower likewise,
+and some of his people, came very kindly to our house, offering
+to assist us either by land or water, if needful. It could not be
+known how this fire began, but there were reports among the
+Japanese that there would soon be a still greater fire, which had
+been predicted by the devil and his conjurers. I pray God it may
+not be done purposely by some villainous people, on purpose to
+rob and steal what they can lay hold of during the trouble and
+confusion.</p>
+
+<p>The 20th I went to visit Captain Brower at the Dutch house, to
+return thanks for his friendly assistance the night before.
+Towards night, Hernando the Spaniard and Edward Markes returned
+from Nangasaki, where they could not procure sight of any of our
+fugitives, though they were still at that place. A Portuguese or
+Spaniard at Nangasaki, in high authority about sea affairs, told
+Markes we should never have our men back; but that if all the
+rest of our people would come, leaving the ship empty, they would
+be well received, and would be still more welcome if they brought
+the ship with them. The Japanese, who had been sent by king Foyne
+along with our people to look for our runaways, would not allow
+Markes to stir out of doors for a night and half a day after
+their arrival at Nangasaki, he going abroad himself, and Hernando
+lodging at a different place, whence I suspect there was some
+fraudulent understanding between the Japanese and Hernando, and
+have now lost hope of ever getting our men back. I blamed the
+jesuits, and the old king agreed with me, and told me he would
+take care that no more of our people should be carried to
+Nangasaki, except they stole the ship's boats, as the others had
+done, of which I gave notice to Mr James Foster, our master.
+Foyne at this time issued an edict, strictly forbidding any of
+the Japanese from carrying away any of our people, without
+previously making it known to him and me.</p>
+
+<p>The 23d I was informed of a great pagan festival to be
+celebrated this day, both kings and all the nobles being to meet
+at a summer-house erected before the great pagoda, to see a
+horse-race. I think there must have been above 3000 people
+assembled together on this occasion. All the nobles went on
+horseback, each being accompanied by a retinue of slaves, some
+armed with pikes, some with fire-arms, and others with bows and
+arrows. The pikemen drew up on one side of the street, and the
+shot and archers on the other, the middle being left open for the
+race. Right before the summer-house, where the king and nobles
+were seated, was a large round target of straw, hung against the
+wall, at which the archers running at full career on horseback
+discharged their arrows. The street was so crowded, that neither
+the present we sent, nor we ourselves, could get admission, so we
+passed along the street and returned by another way to our house.
+Late at night, the brother of Zanzibar's wife came to our house,
+bringing me a present of a haunch of venison and a basket of
+oranges, being accompanied by Zanzibar himself. About ten at
+night, the Chinese captain, our landlord, came to inform us that
+the king had ordered a tub of water to be kept ready on the top
+of every house, as the devil had given out that the town was to
+be burnt down that night: Yet the devil proved a liar: We got
+however a large tub on the top of our house, which held twenty
+buckets of water; and all night long people ran about the streets
+calling out for every one to look well to their fires, so that it
+was strange and fearful to hear them.</p>
+
+<p>This report of burning the town was still current on the 24th,
+and every one was making preparations to prevent it. I made ready
+fifteen buckets, which cost six <i>condrines</i> each, which I
+filled with water and hung up in our yard, setting a large tub
+beside them full of water, besides that on the house top. I gave
+orders likewise to get two ladders ready for carrying water to
+the roof, and provided nine wine casks filled with tempered clay,
+ready for daubing up the doors of the <i>gadonge</i>, [godown or
+fire-proof warehouse,] if need should require in consequence of a
+conflagration, from which dire necessity may God defend us. All
+night long, three or four men ran continually backwards and
+forwards in the streets, calling out for every one to have a care
+of fire, and making so horrible a noise, that it was both strange
+and fearful to hear them.</p>
+
+<p>On the 25th, the Chinese captain, our landlord, was taken
+sick, and sent for a piece of pork, which I sent him, and
+immediately afterwards I went to visit him, carrying a small
+bottle of Spanish wine. While I was there, Semidono and our
+guardian's father-in-law came likewise to visit him. The king
+sent me word, by Miguel, our jurebasso, that he had a bad opinion
+of Hernando Ximenes our Spaniard, and that he meant to have run
+away when lately at Nangasaki. But I knew this to be false, as he
+had then free liberty to go where he pleased, and did not run
+away. I had another complaint made against him, that he was a
+notorious gambler, and had enticed several to play, from whom he
+won their money, which I believe rather than the other
+accusation. I find by experience, that the Japanese are not
+friendly to the Spaniards and Portuguese, and love them at
+Nangasaki the worse, because they love them so well.[36] In the
+night between the 24th and 25th, some evil-disposed persons
+endeavoured to have set the town of Firando on fire in three
+several places, but it was soon extinguished, and no harm done;
+but the incendiaries were not discovered, though doubtless owing
+to the conjurers and other base people, who expected an
+opportunity of making spoil when the town was on fire.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 36: This is quite obscure, and may perhaps
+allude to the efforts of the Jesuits at Nangasaki, to convert the
+Japanese to a new idol worship, under the name of
+Christianity.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 26th of October, Mr Melsham being very sick,
+<i>Zanzibar</i> came to visit him, and urged him to use the
+physic of the country, bringing with him a <i>bonze</i>, or
+doctor, to administer the cure. Mr Melsham was very desirous to
+use it, but wished our surgeon to see it in the first place. So
+the bonze gave him two pills yesterday, two in the night, and two
+this morning, together with certain seeds; but, for what I can
+see, these things did him no good. God restore his health! At
+this time, all our waste-cloths, pennants, brass sheaves, and
+other matters, were sent aboard, and our ship was put into order
+to receive our general, whose return was soon expected. Last
+night another house was set on fire by some villains, but was
+soon extinguished with very little harm; yet our nightly criers
+of fire continue to make such horrible noises, that it is
+impossible for any one to get rest. The Chinese captain still
+continued sick, and sent to beg some spiced cakes and two
+wax-candles, which I sent him, as I had done before. Mr Melsham
+now grew weary of his Japanese doctor and his prescriptions, and
+returned to our surgeon Mr Warner, to the great displeasure of
+Zanzibar and the bonze.</p>
+
+<p>S.10. <i>Conclusion of Observations by Mr Cockes</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Our Chinese landlord came to our house on the 30th October, to
+inform me of a general collection of provisions of all kinds,
+then making at every house in Firando, to be sent to the two
+kings, in honour of a great feast they were to give next day,
+together with a comedy or play. By his advice, and after
+consulting with the other gentlemen of the factory, I directed
+two bottles of Spanish wine, two roasted hens, a roasted pig, a
+small quantity of rusk, and three boxes of confections and
+preserves to be sent, as a contribution towards their feast.
+Before night the young king sent one of his men to me, requesting
+me to furnish him with some English apparel, for the better
+setting out their comedy, and particularly to let him have a pair
+of red cloth breeches. I answered, that I had nonesuch, and knew
+not any of our people who had; but any clothes I had that could
+gratify his highness were much at his service. At night the old
+king sent to invite me to be a spectator of their comedy on the
+morrow, and to bring Mr Foster, our master, along with me.</p>
+
+<p>Next day, being the 31st, I sent our present, formerly
+mentioned, to the kings by our jurebasso before dinner, desiring
+their highnesses to excuse the master and myself, and that we
+would wait upon them some other time, when they had not so much
+company. This however did not satisfy them, and they insisted on
+our company, and that of Mr Eaton; so we went and had a place
+appointed for us, where we sat at our ease and saw every thing.
+The old king himself brought us a collation in sight of all the
+people; Semidono afterwards did the like in the name of both
+kings, and a third was brought us in the sequel by several of
+their principal nobles or attendants. But that which we most
+noted was their play or comedy, in which the two kings, with
+their greatest nobles and princes, were the actors. The subject
+was a representation of the valiant deeds of their ancestors,
+from the commencement of their kingdom or commonwealth to the
+present time, which was mixed with much mirth to please the
+common people. The audience was very numerous, as every house in
+the town of Firando, and every village, place, or hamlet in their
+dominions brought a present, and all their subjects were
+spectators. The kings themselves took especial care that every
+one, both high and low, should eat and drink before they
+departed. Their acting, music, singing, and poetry, were very
+harsh to our ears, yet the natives kept time to it, both with
+hands and feet. Their musical instruments were small drums or
+tabors, wide at both ends and small in the middle, resembling an
+hour-glass, on one end of which they beat with one hand, while
+with the other they strained the cords which surround it, making
+it to sound soft or loud at their pleasure, and tuning their
+voices to its sound, while others played on a fife or flute; but
+all was harsh and unpleasant to our ears. I never saw a play of
+which I took such notice, as it was wonderfully well represented,
+yet quite different from ours in Christendom, which are only
+dumb-shews, while this was as truth itself, and acted by the
+kings themselves, to preserve a continual remembrance of their
+affairs.</p>
+
+<p>On this occasion, the king did not invite the Dutch, which
+made our being present seem the greater compliment. When I
+returned to our house, I found three or four of the Dutchmen
+there, one of whom was in a Japanese habit, and came from a place
+called <i>Cushma</i>,[37] which is within sight of Corea. I
+understood they had sold pepper there and other goods, and
+suspect they have some secret trade thence with Corea, or are
+likely soon to have, and I trust if they do well that we shall
+not miss, as Mr Adams was the man who put them upon this trade,
+and I have no doubt he will be as diligent for the good of his
+own countrymen as he has been for strangers. Hernando Ximenes was
+with Captain Brower when the two men came from Cushma, and asked
+them whence they came, at which Brower was very angry, telling
+him he should have no account of that matter.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 37: Key-sima, an island considerably to the
+N.E. of Firando, and nearly midway between Niphon and Corea, from
+which it may be about forty miles distant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Towards night, I was informed that two Spaniards were arrived
+from Nangasaki, and were lodged with <i>Zanzibar</i>. They sent
+for our jurebasso to come to them, but I did not allow him, on
+which they and Zanzibar came to our house. One of them was
+<i>Andres Bulgaryn</i>, a Genoese, who had passed Firando only a
+few days before, and the other <i>Benito de Palais</i>,
+pilot-major of the Spanish ship lately cast away on the coast of
+Japan, the same person who came here formerly from Nangasaki to
+visit Captain Adams. They said they had come to visit their
+friends, me in the first place; and used many words of
+compliment, after which they entered into conversation respecting
+our fugitives. They pretended that it was not the fathers, as
+they called the jesuits, who kept our people from being seen and
+spoken with, but the natives of Nangasaki, who they said were
+very bad people. In fine, I shrewdly suspected these fellows of
+having come a-purpose to inveigle more of our people to desert,
+as the others did, wherefore I advised our master to have a
+watchful eye both to the ship and boats, and to take special
+notice who kept company with our men, as it was best to doubt the
+worst, for the best will save itself.</p>
+
+<p>On the night of the 1st November, two houses were set a-fire
+on the other side of the water, which were soon extinguished, but
+the villains could not be found out. This day I sent word to Mr
+Foster on board, to look well to the ship and the boats, and to
+the behaviour of our people, as I strongly suspected the two
+Spaniards of being spies, come to entice away our men. I sent him
+word likewise, that I understood the Spaniards meant to invite
+him that day to dinner, but wished him to beware they did not
+give him a <i>higo</i>.[38] He answered, that he had the same
+opinion of them I had, and should therefore be mainly on his
+guard. He came soon after on shore, and the Spaniards came to our
+house, where by much entreaty they prevailed on Mr Foster and Mr
+William Eaton to go with them to dinner at Zanzibar's house,
+along with Hernando and the other two Spaniards. But these two
+Spaniards came to me, and desired me to tell Mr Foster and those
+who went with him, to take heed they did not eat or drink of any
+thing they did not see tasted by others, as they were not to be
+trusted, which I communicated to Mr Foster and Mr Eaton. Ximenes
+told me that Mr Adams had goods in his hands belonging to the
+pilot-major, who had come in the hope of finding Mr Adams here,
+and meant to wait his return. He said they had likewise brought
+letters from the bishop and other fathers to the other two
+Spaniards, advising them to return to Nangasaki, but which I
+think they will not do. I this day sent our jurebasso to both
+kings and the other nobles, to give them thanks for the kind
+entertainment we had received the day before.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 38: From the sequel, this unexplained term
+seems to imply treachery.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 2d, some villains set fire to a house in the fish street,
+which was soon put out, and the incendiaries escaped. It is
+generally thought these fires were raised by some base renegados
+who lurk about the town, and who came from Miaco: Yet, though
+much suspected, no proof has hitherto been brought against them.
+There has, however, been orders given to construct gates and
+barriers in different parts of all the streets, with watches at
+each, and no person to be allowed to go about in the night,
+unless he be found to have very urgent business. Another villain
+got this night into the house of a poor widow, meaning to have
+robbed her; but on her making an outcry, he fled into the wood
+opposite our house, where the Pagoda stands.[39] The wood was
+soon after beset all around by above 500 men, but the robber
+could not be found. At night, when we were going to bed, there
+was a sudden alarm given that there were thieves on the top of
+our house, endeavouring to set it on fire. Our ladders being
+ready, I and others went up immediately, but found nobody, yet
+all the houses of our neighbours were peopled on the top like
+ours on similar alarms. This was judged to be a false alarm,
+risen on purpose to see whether any one would be found in
+readiness. At this very time there was a house set on fire, a
+good way from our house, but the fire was soon quenched. The
+night before, three houses were set a-fire in different parts of
+the town, but the fires were all extinguished at the beginning,
+so that no hurt was done. At this time, an order was issued to
+give notice of all the inhabitants dwelling in every house,
+whether strangers or others; and that all who were liable to
+suspicion should be banished from the dominions of the two kings
+of Firando. Bars or gates were erected to shut up the passages at
+the ends of all the streets, and watches were appointed in
+different places, with orders not to go about crying and making a
+noise, as had been done hitherto without either form or fashion.
+Yet, notwithstanding these precautions, a villain set fire about
+ten o'clock this night to a house near the Pagoda, opposite our
+house. He was noticed by the watch, who pursued him in all haste,
+but he escaped into the wood above the Pagoda. The wood was
+immediately beset by more than 500 armed men, and old king Foyne
+came in person with many of his nobles to assist in the pursuit;
+yet the incendiary escaped, and I verily believe he ran about
+among the rest, crying <i>stop thief</i> as, well as the
+best.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 39: This word signifies either the idol, or
+the idol temple, or both.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the night of the 4th, fire was set to several houses, both
+in the town and country round. An order was now given, to have
+secret watches in various parts of the town every night, and that
+no person should go out during the night except upon important
+occasions, and then to have a light carried before them, that it
+might be seen who they were. If this rule be duly enforced, our
+house-burners will be put to their wits end. I proposed these
+measures to the king and others above a week before, and now they
+are put in execution.</p>
+
+<p>On the 5th I received a letter from Domingo Francisco, the
+Spanish ambassador, dated five days before from
+<i>Ximenaseque</i>, [Simonoseki,] and another from George the
+Portuguese. The ambassador went over land from that place to
+Nangasaki, and sent the letter by his servant, to whom I shewed
+the commodities he enquired after, referring him for others till
+the return of our general, but gave him an answer, of which I
+kept a copy. The man chose two pieces of fine <i>Semian
+chowters</i> and eight pieces of white <i>bastas</i>, paying
+seven <i>tayes</i> each for the <i>chowters,</i> and two
+<i>tayes</i> each for the <i>bastas</i>. A Spanish friar or
+Jesuit came in the boat along with the ambassador's servant, and
+asked to see our ship, which the master allowed him at my
+request, and used him kindly; for the old saw has it, That it is
+sometimes good to hold a candle to the devil. This day Mr Eaton,
+Hernando, and I dined with Unagense, and were kindly
+entertained.</p>
+
+<p>About ten o'clock of the 6th November, 1613, our general and
+all his attendants arrived at Firando from the emperor's court,
+accompanied by Mr Adams. Immediately after his arrival, he sent
+me, with John Japan, our jurebasso, to visit both the kings, and
+to thank them for their kindness, for having so well accommodated
+him with a barge or galley, and for the care they had taken of
+the ship and every thing else during his absence. They took this
+message in good part, saying they would be glad to see our
+general at their houses. At this time certain merchants of Miaco
+came from Nangasaki to our house to look at our commodities, and
+among the rest took liking to ten pieces of <i>cassedy nill</i>,
+for which they agreed to give three <i>tayes</i> each. As had
+been done by other merchants, I sent the goods to their lodging,
+expecting to receive the money as usual; but they only sent me a
+paper, consigning me to receive payment from <i>Semidono</i>, who
+was newly gone from Firando on a voyage, and was met by our
+general. I sent back word to the merchants that I must either
+have payment or the goods returned, to which they answered, I
+should have neither one nor the other; and as the person with
+whom they lodged refused to pass his word for payment, I was
+forced to apply to both the kings for justice; but I first sent
+word aboard our ship, if the boat of Miaco weighed anchor to go
+away, that they should send the skiff to make her stay, which
+they did, and made her come to anchor again. In the mean time I
+went to the kings. The younger king said that <i>Semidono</i> was
+able enough to pay me; but when I asked him if Semidono refused
+to pay, whether he would, he answered no. While we were talking
+about the matter, the old king came in, and told me he would take
+order that I should be satisfied; so in the end the person with
+whom the merchants lodged passed his word for payment of the
+thirty <i>tayes</i>; yet the orders of old <i>Foyne Same</i> had
+come too late, if our skiff had not stopt the Miaco merchants.
+This day Captain Brower and all the merchants of the Dutch
+factory came to visit our general, and <i>Nobisone</i> sent him a
+young porker as a present, with a message saying he would come to
+visit him in a day or two.</p>
+
+<p>S.11. <i>Occurrences at Firando after the Return of Captain
+Saris</i>.[40]</p>
+
+<p>The 7th of November, 1613, I sent in the first place some
+presents to the two kings of Firando, and afterwards went to
+visit them. On the 8th, Andrew Palmer, the ship's steward, and
+William Marnell, gunner's mate, having been ashore all night and
+quarrelled in their cups, went out this morning into the fields
+and fought. Both are so grievously wounded, that it is thought
+Palmer will hardly escape with his life, and that Marnell will be
+lame of his hands for life. The 9th I went aboard ship early, and
+called the master and all the officers into my cabin, making
+known to them how much I was grieved at the misconduct of some of
+them, particularly of Palmer and Marnell, who had gone ashore
+without leave, and had so sore wounded each other, that one was
+in danger of his life, and the other of being lamed for ever; and
+besides, that the survivor ran a risk of being hanged if the
+other died, which would necessarily occasion me much vexation. I
+also said, I was informed that Francis Williams and Simon Colphax
+were in the boat going ashore to have fought, and that John Dench
+and John Winston had appointed to do the like. John Dench
+confessed it was true, and that he had seen Palmer and Marnell
+fighting, and had parted them, otherwise one or both had died on
+the field. I told them these matters were exceedingly distressing
+to me, and I trusted would now be remedied, otherwise the ship
+would be unmanned, to the overthrow of our voyage, and the vast
+injury of the honourable company which had entrusted us. After
+much contestation, they all engaged to amend what was amiss, and
+not to offend any more, which I pray God may be the case. I told
+them also, that old king Foyne had complained to me, threatening,
+if any more of them went ashore to fight and shed blood, contrary
+to the laws of Japan, he would order them to be cut in pieces, as
+he was determined strangers should have no more licence to
+infringe the laws than his own subjects.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 40: We here resume the narrative of Captain
+Saris. Purch. Pilgr. I. 378. The observations of Mr Cockes,
+contained in the three preceding sub-sections, break off abruptly
+in the Pilgrims, as above.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At my return ashore, old <i>Foyne Same</i> came to visit me at
+the English house, and told me that the piece of <i>Poldavy</i>,
+and the sash I gave him, were consumed when his house was burnt
+down. This was in effect begging to have two others, which I
+promised to give him. I likewise got him to send some of his
+people aboard, along with John Japan, our jurebasso, to intimate
+to our men that if any of them went ashore to fight, he had given
+strict orders to have them cut in pieces. This I did in hopes of
+restraining them in future from any more drunken combats. Towards
+night, Juan Comas, a Spaniard, came from Nangasaki, bringing two
+letters from Domingo Francisco, one for me, and the other for Mr
+Cockes, together with three baskets of sugar as a present to me,
+and a pot of conserves, with many no less sugared words of
+compliment in his letters, saying how sorry he was that our seven
+fugitives had gone away during his absence, excusing himself and
+the Jesuits, who he pretended had no hand in the matter, and
+pretending they had never spoken against us, calling us heretics.
+He said our men had gone from Nangasaki, three of them in a
+Chinese or Japanese <i>soma</i> for Manilla, and four in a
+Portuguese vessel. Yet I esteem all these as vain words to excuse
+themselves, and throw the blame on others; for the Spaniards and
+Portuguese mutually hate each other and the Japanese, as these
+last do them.</p>
+
+<p>The 11th I visited <i>Nobesane</i>, who used me kindly, and
+would have had me dine with him next day, but I excused myself on
+account of the press of business in which I was engaged, and the
+short time I had to stay. I met old king Foyne at his house, who
+requested to have two pieces of English salt beef, and two of
+pork, sodden by our cook, with turnips, radishes, and onions,
+which I sent him. The 12th, the governors of the two kings came
+to visit me at our factory, whence they went aboard the Clove,
+accompanied by Mr Cockes, to signify to our crew that they should
+beware of coming ashore to fight and shed blood; as, by the law
+of Japan, those who went out to fight and drew weapons for that
+purpose, were adjudged to death, and all who saw them were
+obliged to kill both offenders, on pain of ruining themselves and
+all their kindred if they neglected putting the combatants to
+death.</p>
+
+<p>The 14th I sent Mr Cockes and our jurebasso to wait upon the
+kings, to entreat they would provide me twelve Japanese seamen
+who were fit for labour, to assist me in navigating the ship to
+England, to whom I was willing to give such wages as their
+highnesses might deem reasonable. The kings were then occupied in
+other affairs, so that my messengers spoke with their
+secretaries, who said they needed not to trouble the kings on
+that business, as they would provide me twelve fit persons; but
+that there were several vagrant people about the town who would
+be willing enough to go, yet were very unfit for my purpose, as
+they would only consume victuals, and of whom the Dutch made use
+without making any request on the matter, and it was not known
+what had become of these men or of the ship; but, as the matter
+was now referred to them, they would look out for such as were
+fit for our purpose.</p>
+
+<p>The 18th, Foyne sent me word he would visit me, and meant to
+bring the dancing girls of the country along with him, which he
+did soon after, accompanied by three courtezans, and two or three
+men, who all danced and made music after their fashion, though
+harsh to our ears. The 19th, the Chinese captain, and George
+Duras, a Portuguese, came to visit me, requesting me to send to
+<i>Semidono</i> to procure pardon for two poor fellows who were
+like to lose their lives for bidding a poor knave flee who had
+stolen a bit of lead not worth three halfpence; and though the
+malefactor was taken and executed, these men were in danger of
+the same punishment, had I not sent Mr Cockes to <i>Semidono</i>
+with my ring, to desire their pardon for my sake, which he
+engaged to procure, and did in effect.</p>
+
+<p>The 20th, <i>Samedon</i>, king of <i>Crats</i>,[41] sent me
+word he meant to go on board our ship, so I went there to meet
+him, and he came along with both the kings of Firando, when we
+saluted them with five pieces of ordnance; and we afterwards
+fired three with bullets at a mark, at the request of Samedon,
+who gave me two Japanese pikes, having <i>cattans</i> or
+<i>sables</i> on their ends. At their departure we again saluted
+them with seven guns, one being shotted and fired at the mark.
+The 22d I sent a present to the king of <i>Crats</i>, which was
+delivered to him at the house of <i>Tomesanes</i> the young king,
+where he was at breakfast. Samedon accepted it very kindly,
+sending me word by Mr Cockes that he was doubly obliged to me for
+his kind entertainment aboard, and for now sending him so
+handsome a present of such things as his country did not produce,
+all without any desert on his part, and the only recompence in
+his power was, if ever any of the English nation came into his
+dominions, he would give them a hearty welcome, and do them all
+the service in his power.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 41: This personage must have been governor
+of one of the provinces, islands, or towns of Japan; but no place
+in that eastern empire bears a name in modern geography which in
+the smallest degree resembles Crats.--E]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 25th, the purser and Mr Hownsell came ashore, and told me
+that Andrew Palmer, the steward, had died the night before,
+Thomas Warner, our surgeon, affirming that he owed his death to
+his own obstinacy, his wound being curable if he would have been
+ruled. I desired that he might be buried on an island as secretly
+as possible, as we were about to get some Japanese into our ship,
+who might be unwilling to embark if they heard of any one having
+died. On the 28th a Japanese was put to death, who some said was
+a thief, and others an incendiary. He was led by the executioner
+to the place of punishment, a person going before him carrying a
+board, on which the crime for which he was to be punished was
+written, and the same was exhibited on a paper flag carried over
+his head. Two pikemen followed the culprit, having the points of
+their pikes close to his back, ready to slay him instantly if he
+offered to resist.</p>
+
+<p>The ship being ready to depart, several of the natives
+complained that the ship's company owed them money, and desired
+to be paid. To prevent greater inconvenience, I listened to these
+people, and wrote to the master to make enquiry aboard as to who
+were in debt, that I might satisfy their creditors, making
+deductions accordingly from their wages.</p>
+
+<p>On the 26th I assembled my mercantile council to consult about
+leaving a factory here in Firando, upon these considerations. 1.
+The encouragement we had privately received at the Moluccas. 2.
+That the Dutch had already a factory here. 3. The large
+privileges now obtained from the emperor of Japan. 4. The certain
+advice of English factories established at Siam and Patane. 5.
+The commodities remaining on hand appointed for these parts, and
+the expected profit which farther experience might produce. It
+was therefore resolved to leave a factory here, consisting of
+eight Englishmen, three Japanese <i>jurebassos</i> or
+interpreters, and two servants. They were directed, against the
+coming of the next ships, to explore and discover the coasts of
+Corea, <i>Tushmay</i>, other parts of Japan, and of the adjoining
+countries, and to see what good might be done in any of them.</p>
+
+<p>The 5th of December, 1613, Mr Richard Cockes, captain and
+<i>Cape</i> merchant of the English factory now settled at
+Firando in Japan, took his leave of me aboard the Clove, together
+with his company, being eight English and five others, as before
+mentioned. After their departure, we mustered the company
+remaining aboard, finding forty-six English, five <i>swarts</i>
+or blacks, fifteen Japanese, and three passengers, in all
+sixty-nine persons. We had lost since our arrival in Japan ten
+Englishmen; two by sickness, one slain in a duel, and seven who
+deserted to the Portuguese and Spaniards, while I was absent at
+the court of the emperor. The English whom we left in the factory
+were Mr Richard Cockes, William Adams, now entertained in the
+service of the company at a hundred pounds a year, Tempest
+Peacock, Richard Wickham, William Eaton, Walter Carwarden, Edward
+Saris, and William Nelson.</p>
+
+<p>S.12. <i>Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence Home to
+England</i>.</p>
+
+<p>That same day, being the 5th December, we set sail with a
+stiff northerly gale, steering S. by W. 1/2 a point westerly. By
+exact observation on shore, we found the island of Firando to be
+in lat. 33&deg; 30' N. and the variation 2&deg; 50' easterly.[42]
+We resolved to keep our course for Bantam along the coast of
+China, for which purpose we brought our starboard tacks aboard,
+and stood S.W. edging over for China, the wind at N.N.E. a stiff
+gale and fair weather. The 7th it blew very hard at N.W. and we
+steered S.S.W. encountering a great current which shoots out
+between the <i>island</i> of Corea[43] and the main land of
+China, occasioning a very heavy sea. The 8th, being in lat.
+29&deg; 40' N. we steered W.S.W, on purpose to make Cape
+<i>Sumbor</i> on the coast of China. The sea was very rough, and
+the wind so strong that it blew our main course out of the bolt
+ropes. The 9th, in lat. 28&deg; 23', we sounded and had
+forty-nine to forty-five fathoms on an oozy bottom. The weather
+was clear, yet we could not see land. The 11th we had ground in
+forty-nine, forty-three, thirty-eight, thirty-seven, and thirty
+fathoms, the water being very green, and as yet no land to be
+seen.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 42: The town of Firando is in lat. 33&deg;
+6' N. and even the most northern part of the island of that name
+only reaches to 33&deg; 17'. The town is in long. 128&deg; 42' E.
+from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 43: Corea was long thought to be an island
+after the period of this voyage. Astl. I. 492. c.--It is now
+known to be an extensive peninsula, to the east of China, having
+the Yellow sea interposed.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 12th, in thirty-five fathoms, and reckoning ourselves near
+the coast of China, we had sight of at least 300 sail of junks,
+of twenty and thirty tons each and upwards, two of which passed
+us close to windwards, and though we used all fair means to
+prevail upon them to come aboard we could not succeed, and seeing
+they were only fishing vessels we let them pass. Continuing our
+course we soon espied land, being two islands called the
+<i>Fishers islands</i>.[44] At noon our latitude was 25&deg; 59'
+N. and we had ground at twenty to twenty-six fathoms. About seven
+p.m. while steering along the land, we came close by a rock,
+which by good providence we had sight of by moonlight, as it lay
+right in our course. When not above twice our ship's length from
+this rock, we had thirty fathoms water, on which we hauled off
+for one watch, to give the land a wide birth, and resumed our
+course S.W. after midnight. The wind was very strong at N.E. and
+continually followed as the land trended. The 13th, in lat.
+24&deg; 35' N. and variation 1&deg; 30' easterly, having the wind
+strong at N.E. with fair weather, we steered S.W. keeping about
+five leagues off the islands along the coast of China. The 15th
+we came among many fisher boats, but had so much wind that we
+could not speak any of them, but they made signs to us, as we
+thought to keep to the westwards. At noon our lat. was 21&deg;
+40' N. and having the wind at N.N.E. a stiff gale, we steered
+W.N.W. northerly, to make the land, and about two hours
+afterwards had sight of it, although by our dead reckoning we
+ought still to have been fifty-six leagues from it. It is to be
+noted, that the islands along the coast of China are considerably
+more to the southward than as laid down in the charts. About
+three p.m. we were within about two leagues of an island called
+<i>Sancha</i>[45].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 44: By the latitude indicated in the text,
+Captain Saris appears to have fallen in with the coast of
+Fo-kien, and to have passed through between that province and the
+island of Formosa, without discovering the existence of that
+island.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 45: Probably the island of Tchang-to-huen,
+to the S.W. of the bay of Canton, the situation of which agrees
+with the latitude in the text, and the sound of the two first
+syllables of which name has some affinity with that given by
+Saris, evidently from Spanish or Portuguese charts. At this part,
+of his voyage, Saris entirely misses to notice the large island
+of Hai-nan.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 18th, in lat. 15&deg; 43' N. we had sight of an island
+called Pulo-cotan, being high land, and is about twenty leagues,
+according to report, from the shoal called <i>Plaxel</i>. In the
+morning of the 19th the coast of Cambodia was on our starboard
+side, about two leagues off, along which we steered S.E. by E.
+easterly, our latitude at noon being 13&deg; 31' N. estimating
+the ship to be then athwart <i>Varella</i>. We have hitherto
+found the wind always <i>trade</i> along shore, having gone
+<i>large</i> all the way from Firando, the wind always following
+us as the land trended. The 20th at noon we were in latitude
+10&deg; 53', and three glasses, or an hour and half after, we had
+sight of a small island, which we concluded to be that at the end
+of the shoal called <i>Pulo-citi</i>. We found the book of <i>Jan
+Huyghens van Linschoten</i> very true, for by it we have directed
+our course ever since we left Firando. The 22d we had sight of
+<i>Pulo Condor</i> about five leagues off, our latitude at noon
+being 8&deg; 20' N.</p>
+
+<p>About four a.m. on the 25th we made the island of <i>Pulo
+Timon</i>, and two hours afterwards saw <i>Pulo Tinga</i>. The
+28th at three p.m. we had oosy ground at twenty fathoms, having
+divers long islands on our starboard and sundry small islands on
+our larboard, forming the straits of China-bata, which we found
+to be truly laid down in a chart made by a Hollander called
+<i>Jan Janson Mole</i>, which he gave to Mr Hippon, who gave it
+to the company. <i>Pulo Bata</i>, one of these islands, is low
+land, and is full of trees or bushes at the S.W. end.</p>
+
+<p>A little before noon on the 29th, we perceived the colour of
+the water a-head of the ship to change very much, by which
+observation we escaped an imminent danger. This shoal seemed of a
+triangular shape, the S.W. end being the sharpest, and is not far
+from the entrance into the straits of <i>China-bata</i>. At noon
+our latitude was 4&deg; 6' N. At eight p.m. we came to anchor in
+seven fathoms, the weather threatening to be foul in the night,
+the place very full of shoals, and our experience little or
+nothing. Before our anchor took hold, we had six 1/4, five 1/2,
+six, and then seven fathoms, soft sandy ground.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 30th we spoke the Darling, then bound
+for Coromandel, her company consisting of twenty-one English and
+nine blacks. By her we first learnt of the death of Sir Henry
+Middleton, the loss of the Trades-increase, and other incidents
+that had occurred during our voyage to Japan. In the night of the
+30th God mercifully delivered us from imminent danger, as we
+passed under full sail close by a sunken ledge of rocks, the top
+of which was only just above water within a stone's throw of our
+ship; and had not the noise of the breakers awakened us, we had
+not cleared our ship. We instantly let go our anchor, being in a
+rapid current or tide-way, in seventeen fathoms upon oozy ground.
+When morning broke on the 31st we had sight of the high land of
+Sumatra, having an island a-stern, the ledge of rocks we had
+passed on our starboard, and three small islands forming a
+triangle on our larboard bow. We were about eight leagues off the
+high land of Java, but could not then get into the straits of
+Sunda, as the wind was quite fallen.</p>
+
+<p>The 1st January, 1614, being quite calm, was mostly spent at
+anchor. The 2d, having a little wind, we set sail, and about
+eight o'clock fell in with the Expedition, homewards bound for
+England, laden with pepper, by which ship we wrote to our friends
+in England. The 3d we came to anchor in the road of Bantam, end
+to our great grief found no lading ready for us, for which
+neglect I justly blamed those I had left to provide the same,
+while they excused themselves by alleging they did not expect us
+so soon back. I questioned <i>Kewee</i>, the principal Chinese
+merchant, who came to visit me on board, as to the price of
+pepper. He answered, that it was already known ashore I was
+homewards bound, and must necessarily load pepper; and, as my
+merchants had not provided any before hand, I might be assured it
+would rise. He said the price was then at twelve dollars for ten
+sacks, but he could not undertake to deliver any quantity at that
+price. I offered him twelve dollars and a half the ten sacks, but
+he held up so high, that we had no hope of dealing for the
+present. Of the ten persons left by us in the factory when we
+departed for Japan, we found only five alive at our return, while
+we only lost one man between Firando and Bantam.</p>
+
+<p>I went ashore on the 4th to visit the governor of Bantam, to
+whom I presented two handsome <i>cattans</i>, or Japanese swords,
+and other articles of value; and this day I bargained with
+<i>Kewee</i> for 4000 sacks of pepper at thirteen dollars the ten
+sacks, bating in the weight 3 per cent and directed the merchants
+to expedite the milling thereof as much as possible. I employed
+the 5th in reducing the several English factories at Bantam under
+one government, settling them all in one house; also in
+regulating the expences of diet, that all might be frugally
+managed, to prevent extravagance in rack-houses abroad, or in
+hanger-on blacks at home, which had lately been the case. I
+directed also that there should be fewer warehouses kept in the
+town, and that these might be better regulated, and the goods
+stowed in a more orderly manner. Hitherto the multiplication of
+factories, having one for each voyage, had occasioned great
+expence, and had raised the price of pepper, as each outbid the
+other, for the particular account of their own several voyages,
+with great loss to the public.</p>
+
+<p>The 6th was employed in re-weighing the pepper received the
+day before, most of the sacks being found hard weight, and many
+to want a part of what was allowed by the king's beam; wherefore
+I sent for the weigher, whom I used kindly, entreating him to
+take a little more care to amend this fault, which he promised to
+do, and for his better encouragement I made him a present to the
+value of five dollars. The 16th being Sunday, I staid aboard, and
+about 2 p.m. we observed the whole town to be on fire. I
+immediately sent our skiff ashore to assist the merchants in
+guarding our goods. The wind was so violent, that in a very short
+space of time the whole town was burnt down, except the English
+and Dutch factories, which it pleased God of his mercy to
+preserve.</p>
+
+<p>Being ashore on the 20th, I procured two Chinese merchants,
+named <i>Lackmoy</i> and <i>Lanching</i>, to translate the letter
+which the king of Firando in Japan had given me to deliver to our
+king, James I. It was written in the Chinese character and
+language, which they translated into the Malay, and which in
+English was as follows:</p>
+
+<p><i>To the King of Great Britain, &amp;c.</i> "Most mighty
+king, I cannot sufficiently express how acceptable your majesty's
+most loving letter, and bountiful present of many valuable
+things, sent me by your servant Captain John Saris, has been to
+me; neither the great happiness I feel in the friendship of your
+majesty, for which I render you many thanks, desiring the
+continuance of your majesty's love and correspondence. I am
+heartily glad at the safe arrival of your subjects at my small
+island, after so long a voyage. They shall not lack my help and
+furtherance to the utmost, for effecting their so worthy and
+laudable purposes, of discovery and commerce, referring for the
+entertainment they have received to the report of your servant,
+by whom I send to your majesty an unworthy token of my gratitude;
+wishing your majesty long life. Given from my residence of
+Firando, the sixth day of the tenth month. Your majesty's loving
+friend, commander of this island of Firando in Japan,</p>
+
+<p>FOYNE SAM-MASAM."</p>
+
+<p>My interpreters could not well pronounce his name, Lanching
+saying it was <i>Foyne Foshin Sam</i>, while Lackmoy said it was
+written as above. This comes to pass by reason of the Chinese
+characters, which, in proper names, borrow the characters of
+other words, of the same or nearest sound, and thereby occasion
+frequent mistakes.</p>
+
+<p>The 22d, such houses as had escaped in the former fire of the
+16th, were now burnt down; yet the English and Dutch houses
+escaped, for which we were thankful to God. On the 26th, a Dutch
+ship of 1000 tons arrived from Holland, called the Flushing. At
+the island of Mayo, the company mutinied against the captain,
+whom they would have murdered in his cabin, had it not pleased
+God that a Scotsman revealed the plot when the mutineers were
+already armed to carry it into effect, so that they were taken
+between decks with their weapons in their hands. In this ship
+there were several English and Scots soldiers. She did not remain
+at Bantam, but sailed towards evening for Jacatra.</p>
+
+<p>The 27th, our lading being fully procured, and several of our
+company fallen sick, I went ashore to hasten our merchants to get
+us ready for sailing. The 1st February, the Darling was forced
+back to Bantam; and order was taken by mutual consultation for
+the proper care of her goods, and for her immediate departure for
+<i>Succadanea</i> in the island of Borneo, and thence to Patane
+and Siam.</p>
+
+<p>The 13th of February we got out from the straits of Sunda, in
+which the tide of flood sets twelve hours to the eastwards, and
+the ebb twelve hours to the westwards. On the 16th of May we
+anchored in the bay of Saldanha, where we found the Concord of
+London, being the first ship set out by the united company. We
+now found the natives of this place very treacherous, making us
+to understand by signs; that two of their people had been
+forcibly carried off. They had sore wounded one of the people
+belonging to the Concord; and while we were up in the land, they
+assaulted the people who were left in charge of our skiff,
+carried away our grapnel, and had spoiled the boat-keepers if
+they had not pushed off into deep water. The 19th a Dutch ship
+arrived bound for Bantam, the master being Cornelius van
+Harte.</p>
+
+<p>We remained here twenty-three days, where we thoroughly
+refreshed the ship's company, and took away with us alive
+fourteen oxen and seventy sheep, besides good store of fish and
+beef, which we <i>powdered</i> there, finding it to take salt
+well, contrary to former reports. For ten days after leaving
+Saldanha, we had the wind N.W. and W.N.W. but after that we had a
+fine wind at S.W. so that we could hold our course N.W. On the
+27th September, thanks be to God, we arrived at Plymouth; where,
+for the space of five or six weeks, we endured more tempestuous
+weather, and were in greater danger of our lives, than during the
+whole voyage besides.</p>
+
+<p>S.13. <i>Intelligence concerning Yedzo, or Jesso, received
+from a Japanese at Jedo, who had been twice there</i>.[46]</p>
+
+<p>Yedzo, or Jesso, is an island to the N.W. of Japan, from which
+it is ten leagues distant. The natives are of white complexions,
+and well-conditioned, but have their bodies covered all over with
+hair like monkies. Their weapons are bows and poisoned arrows.
+The inhabitants of the south extremity of this country understand
+the use of weights and measures; but those who inhabit the inland
+country, at the distance of thirty days journey, are ignorant of
+these things. They have much silver and gold-dust, in which they
+make payment to the Japanese for rice and other commodities; rice
+and cotton-cloth being of ready sale among them, as likewise iron
+and lead, which are carried there from Japan. Food and cloathing
+are the most vendible commodities among the natives of that
+country, and sell to such advantage, that rice often yields a
+profit of four for one.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 46: This article is appended to the Voyage
+of Saris, in the Pilgrims, vol. I. p. 384.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The town where the Japanese have their chief residence and
+mart in Yetizo is called <i>Matchma</i>,[47] in which there are
+500 households or families of Japanese. They have likewise a fort
+here, called <i>Matchma-donna</i>. This town is the principal
+mart of Yedzo, to which the natives resort to buy and sell,
+especially in September, when they make provision against winter.
+In March they bring down salmon and dried fish of sundry kinds,
+with other wares, for which the Japanese barter in preference
+even to silver. The Japanese have no other settled residence or
+place of trade except this at Matchma [48]. Farther northward in
+Yedzo there are people of a low stature like dwarfs.[49] The
+other natives of Yedzo are of good stature like the Japanese, and
+have no other cloathing but what is brought them from Japan.
+There is a violent current in the straits between Yedzo and
+Japan, which comes from the sea of Corea, and sets E.N.E. The
+winds there are for the most part like those usual in Japan; the
+northerly winds beginning in September, and ending in March, when
+the southerly winds begin to blow.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 47: In modern maps, the southern peninsula
+of Yesso, or Yedso, is named <i>Matsaki</i>, apparently the same
+name with that in the text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 48: In our more modern maps, there are four
+other towns or residences on the western coast of the peninsula
+of Matsaki, named Jemasina, Sirekosawa, Famomoli, and
+Aria.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 49: The island of Kubito-sima, off the
+western coast of Yedzo, is called likewise in our maps, the Isle
+of Pigmies.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.14. <i>Note of Commodities vendible in Japan</i>.[50]</p>
+
+<p>Broad-cloths of all sorts, as black, yellow, and red, which
+cost in Holland eight or nine gilders the Flemish ell, two ells
+and three quarters, are worth in Japan, three, four, to five
+hundred.[51] Cloth of a high wool is not in request, but such as
+is low shorn is most vendible. Fine <i>bayes</i> of the
+before-mentioned colours are saleable, if well cottoned, but not
+such as those of Portugal. Sayes, <i>rashes</i>, single and
+double bouratts, silk grograms, Turkey grograms; camblets,
+<i>Divo Gekepert, Weersetynen, Caniaut, Gewart twijne</i>;[52]
+velvets, musk, sold weight for weight of silver; India cloths of
+all sorts are in request; satins, taffetas, damasks, Holland
+linen from fifteen to twenty stivers the Flemish ell, but not
+higher priced; diaper, damasks, and so much the better if wrought
+with figures or branches; thread of all colours; carpets, for
+tables; gilded leather, painted with figures and flowers, but the
+smallest are in best demand; painted pictures, the Japanese
+delighting in lascivious representations, and stories of wars by
+sea or land, the larger the better worth, sell for one, two, or
+three hundred. Quick-silver, the hundred cattees sell from three
+to four hundred.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 50: This forms a part of the Appendix to
+the Voyage of Saris, Purch. Pilg. I. 394; where it is joined to
+the end of observations by the same author on the trade of
+Bantam, formerly inserted in this Collection under their proper
+date.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 51: This account is very vaguely expressed;
+but in the title in the Pilgrims, the sales are stated to be in
+<i>masses</i> and <i>canderines</i>, each canderine being the
+tenth part of a masse. The information contained in this short
+subdivision is hardly intelligible, yet is left, as it may
+possibly be of some use towards reviving the trade of Japan, now
+that the Dutch are entirely deprived of their eastern
+possessions.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 52: These articles, in italics, are
+unknown.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The hundred cattees of vermilion are worth from three to six
+hundred. Paint for women's faces, the hundred cattees are worth
+twenty-eight. Cooper in plates, 125 Flemish pounds are worth from
+90 to 100. Lead in small bars, the 100 cattees from 60 to 88.
+Lead in sheets is in greater request, the thinner the better, and
+100 pounds Flemish sell for 80. Fine tin, in logs or bars, 120
+pounds Flemish bring 350. Iron, twenty five Dutch ounces worth
+four. Steel, the 100 cattees, worth from one to two hundred.
+Tapestry. Civet, the cattee worth from 150 to 200. China root,
+the 100 cattees or pekul worth 40. China sewing gold, the paper
+worth three masse three. Powdered Chinese sugar, the 100 cattees
+or pekul worth forty to fifty. Sugar-candy, the pekul or 100
+cattees, from fifty to sixty. Velvets, of all colours, eight ells
+the piece, from 120 to 130. Wrought velvets, from 180 to 200.
+Taffetas of all colours, and good silk, worth, the piece, from
+twenty-four to thirty or forty. Satin, seven or eight ells long,
+the piece worth from 80 to 100. Figured satin, from 120 to 150.
+<i>Gazen</i>, of seven pikes or ells, from forty to fifty. Raw
+silk, the cattee of twelve pounds Flemish, from thirty to forty.
+Untwisted silk, the weight of twenty-eight pounds Flemish, from
+thirty to forty. Twisted silk, from twenty-eight to forty.</p>
+
+<p>Drinking-glasses of all sorts, bottles, canns, cups,
+trenchers, plates, beer-glasses, salt-sellers, wine-glasses,
+beakers, gilt looking-glasses of large size, <i>Muscovy
+glass</i>, salt, writing-papers, table-books, paper-books,
+<i>lead to neal</i> pots. Spanish soap is in much request, and
+sells for one masse the small cake. Amber beads, worth 140 to
+160. Silk stockings, of all colours. Spanish leather, neats
+leather, and other kinds of leather used for gloves, worth six,
+eight, or nine. Blue <i>candiques</i> of China, from fifteen to
+twenty. Black <i>candiques</i>, from ten to fifteen. Wax for
+candles, 100 pounds Flemish worth from 200 to 250. Honey, the
+pekul, worth sixty. <i>Samell</i> of Cochin-China, the pekul,
+worth 180. Nutmegs, the pekul, twenty-five. Camphor of Borneo, or
+<i>barous, the pound hollans</i>, from 250 to 400. Sanders of
+<i>Solier</i>, the pekul, worth 100. Good and heavy Callomback
+wood, the pound, worth one, two, three, to five. Sapan, or red
+wood, the pekul, from twenty to twenty-six. Good and large
+elephants teeth, from 400, to 500, 600, 700, and even 800.
+Rhinoceros horns, the Javan cattee, worth thirty. Gilded
+harts-horns, the piece, worth 300, 400, 500. Roch allum in
+request, in so much that what cost only three gilders has sold
+for 100 gilders; but not in demand by every one.</p>
+
+<p>The Chinese in Japan will commonly truck for silver, giving
+gold of twenty-three carats, at the rate of from fifteen to
+twenty times its weight in silver, according as silver is plenty
+or scarce.</p>
+
+<p>The following commodities are to be bought in Japan, and at
+the rates here quoted. Very good hemp, 100 cattees, being 120
+pounds of Holland, are worth from sixty-five to seventy.
+<i>Eye-colours</i> for dying blue, almost as good as indigo, made
+up in round cakes, and packed 100 cakes in a fardel, worth fifty
+to sixty. Dye-stuff for white, turning to red colour, made up in
+fardels of fifty <i>gautins malios</i>, worth five to eight. Very
+good white rice, cased, worth, the <i>fares</i>, eight
+three-fifths. Rice of a worse sort, the bale, worth seven
+three-tenths. At Jedo, Osaka, and Miaco, there is the best dying
+of all sorts of colours, as red, black, and green; and for
+gliding gold and silver, is better than the Chinese varnish.
+Brimstone is in great abundance, and the pekul may be bought for
+seven. Saltpetre is dearer in one place than another, being worth
+one and a half. Cotton-wool, the pekul, may be bought for
+ten.</p>
+
+<p>S.15. <i>Supplementary Notices of Occurrences in Japan, after
+the Departure of Captain Saris</i>.[53]</p>
+
+<p>"This subdivision consists entirely of letters from Japan, and
+conveys some curious information respecting the transactions of
+the English in Japan, whence they have been long excluded. They
+are now perhaps of some interest, beyond the mere gratification
+of curiosity, as, by the entire expulsion of the Dutch from
+India, there seems a possibility of the British merchants in
+India being able to restore trade to that distant country. In the
+<i>Third</i> PART of our Collection, various other relations of
+Japan will be inserted."--E.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 53: These are appended in the Pilgrims,
+vol. I. pp. 406--413, to the observations of Mr. Richard Cocks,
+already given in conjunction with the voyage of Captain
+Saris.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>No. I. <i>Letter from Mr Richard Cocks, dated Firando, 10th
+December, 1614</i>.[54]</p>
+
+<p>To this day, I have been unable to complete my old books of
+accounts, owing to the dispatching of our people, some to one
+place and some to another, and owing to the rebuilding of our
+house, and afterwards buying a junk, and repairing her. She is
+now ready to set sail for Siam, having been at anchor these ten
+days, waiting for a fair wind to proceed on her voyage, at
+<i>Couchi</i>, a league from Firando, where your ship rode at
+your departure from hence. She is called the Sea-Adventure, of
+about 200 tons burden, in which Mr Adams goes as master, with Mr
+Wickham and Mr Edward Sayers as merchants, in consequence of the
+death of Mr Peacock, slain in Cochin-China, and the probability
+that Mr Carwarden has been cast away in his return from thence,
+as we have no news of him or of the junk in which he sailed, as I
+have at large informed the worshipful company.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 54: This letter appears to have been
+written to Captain Saris.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Since your departure from Japan, the emperor has banished all
+jesuits, priests, nuns, and friars, from the country, shipping
+them off for <i>Anacau</i> [Macao] in China, or Manilla in the
+Philippine islands, and has caused all their churches and
+monasteries to be pulled down or burnt. <i>Foyne Same</i>, the
+old king of Firando, is dead, and <i>Ushiandono</i>, his
+governor, with two other servants, cut open their bellies to bear
+him company, their bodies being burned, and their ashes entombed
+along with his. Wars are likely to ensue between <i>Ogusho
+Same</i>, the old emperor, and <i>Fidaia Same</i>, the young
+prince, son of <i>Tico Same</i>, who has strongly fortified
+himself in the castle of <i>Osaka</i>, having collected an army
+of 80,000 or 100,000 men, consisting of malcontents, runaways,
+and banished people, who have repaired from all parts to his
+standard, and he is said to have collected sufficient provisions
+for three years. The old emperor has marched against him in
+person, with an army of 300,000 men, and is at the castle of
+<i>Fusima</i>. The advanced parties of the two armies have
+already had several skirmishes, and many have been slain on both
+sides. The entire city of Osaka has been burned to the ground,
+excepting only the castle, so that Mr Eaton had to retire with
+his goods to <i>Sakey</i>,[55] yet not without danger, as a part
+of that town has likewise been burnt. So great a tempest or
+tuffoon has lately occurred at <i>Edoo</i> [Jedo,] as had never
+been before experienced at that place. The sea overflowed the
+whole city, obliging the people to take refuge on the hills: and
+the prodigious inundation has defaced or thrown down all the
+houses of the nobles, which you know were very beautiful and
+magnificent.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 55: It has been formerly explained that
+<i>Sakey</i> was a town on the river Jodo, directly opposite to
+Osakey or Osaka, the river only being
+interposed.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Let this suffice for Japanese news; and I now proceed to
+inform you of our success in selling our goods. The emperor took
+all our ordnance, with most of our lead, and ten barrels of
+gunpowder, with two or three pieces of broad-cloth. Most of our
+other broad-cloths are sold, namely, black, hair-colour, and
+cinnamon-colour, at fifteen, fourteen, thirteen, and twelve tayes
+the <i>tattamy</i>; but they will not even look at Venice-reds
+and flame-colours, neither are <i>stammels</i> in such request as
+formerly, but they enquire much for whites and yellows. As the
+Dutch sold most of their broad-cloths at low prices, we were
+forced to do so likewise. In regard to our Cambaya goods, they
+will not look at our <i>red Zelas</i>, blue <i>byrams</i>, or
+<i>dutties</i>, being the principal part of what is now left us;
+and only some white bastas sell at fourteen or fifteen masses
+each. <i>Cassedys nill, alleias</i>, broad <i>pintados</i>, with
+spotted, striped, and checquered stuffs, are most in request, and
+sell at good profit. We have also sold nearly half of our Bantam
+pepper for sixty-five <i>masse</i> the <i>pekull</i>, and all the
+rest had been gone before now, had it not been for the war. I am
+in great hope of procuring trade into China, through the means of
+Andrea, the China captain, and his two brothers, who have
+undertaken the matter, and have no doubt of being able to bring
+it to bear, for three ships to come yearly to a place near
+<i>Lanquin</i>,[56] to which we may go from hence in three or
+four days with a fair wind. Of this I have written at large to
+the worshipful company, and also to the lord-treasurer.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 56: As Nangasaki is uniformly named
+<i>Langasaque</i> in this first English voyage to Japan, I am apt
+to suspect the <i>Lanquin</i> of the text may have been
+Nan-kin.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Some little sickness with which I have been afflicted is now
+gone, for which I thank God. Mr Easton, Mr Nealson, Mr Wickham,
+and Mr Sayer, have all been very sick, but are all now well
+recovered, except Mr Eaton, who still labours under flux and
+tertian ague. May God restore his health, for I cannot too much
+praise his diligence and pains in the affairs of the worshipful
+company. Jacob Speck, who was thought to have been cast away in a
+voyage from hence to the Moluccas, is now returned to Firando in
+the command of a great ship called the Zelandia, together with a
+small pinnace called the Jacatra. The cause of his being so long
+missing was, that in going from hence by the eastward of the
+Philippines, the way we came, he was unable to fetch the
+Moluccas, owing to currents and contrary winds, and was driven to
+the west of the island of Celebes, and so passed round it through
+the straits of Desalon, and back to the Moluccas. The Chinese
+complain much against the Hollanders for robbing and pilfering
+their junks, of which they are said to have taken and rifled
+seven. The emperor of Japan has taken some displeasure against
+the Hollanders, having refused a present they lately sent him,
+and would not even speak to those who brought it. He did the same
+in regard to a present sent by the Portuguese, which came in a
+great ship from Macao to Nangasaki. You thought, when here, that
+if any other ship came from England we might continue to sell our
+goods without sending another present to the emperor; but I now
+find that every ship which comes to Japan must send a present to
+the emperor, as an established custom. I find likewise that we
+cannot send away any junk from hence without procuring the yearly
+licence from the emperor, as otherwise no Japanese mariner dare
+to leave the country, under pain of death. Our own ships from
+England may, however, come in and go out again when they please,
+and no one to gainsay them.</p>
+
+<p>We have not as yet been able by any means to procure trade
+from <i>Tushma</i> into Corea; neither indeed have the
+inhabitants of Tushma any farther privilege than to frequent one
+small town or fortress, and must not on pain of death go beyond
+the walls of that place. Yet the king of Tushma is not subject to
+the emperor of Japan.[57] We have only been able to sell some
+pepper at Tushma, and no great quantity of that. The weight there
+is much heavier than in Japan, but the price is proportionally
+higher.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 57: No place or island of any name
+resembling <i>Tushma</i> is to be found in our best maps. The
+name in the text probably refers to <i>Tausima</i>, called an
+some maps <i>Jasus</i>, an island about forty miles long, about
+midway between Kiusiu and Corea.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I have been given to understand that there are no great cities
+in the interior of Corea, between which inland country and the
+sea there are immense bogs or morasses, so that no one can travel
+on horseback, and hardly even a-foot; and as a remedy against
+this, they have great waggons or carts upon broad flat wheels,
+which are moved by means of sails like ships. Thus, by observing
+the monsoons or periodical winds, they transport their goods
+backwards and forwards, by means of these sailing waggons. In
+that country they make damasks, sattins, taffaties, and other
+silk stuffs, as well as in China.</p>
+
+<p>It is said that <i>Fico Same</i>, otherwise called
+<i>Quabicondono</i>, the former emperor of Japan, pretended to
+have conveyed a great army in these sailing waggons, to make a
+sudden assault upon the emperor of China in his great city of
+Pekin, where he ordinarily resides; but was prevented by a
+nobleman of Corea, who poisoned himself to poison the emperor and
+many of the nobles of Japan. On which occasion, as is said, the
+Japanese lost, about twenty-two years ago, all that they had
+conquered in Corea.</p>
+
+<p>James Turner, the youth who used to play the fiddle, left a
+girl here with child; and though I gave her two tayes in silver
+to bring up the child; she killed it as soon as it was born,
+which is a common thing in this country. The whistle and chain
+belonging to Mr Foster, the master of the Clove, are found, and
+are under the charge of Mr Adams, who will be accountable for
+them. I meant to have sent you a Japanese almanack by a former
+letter to the same effect as this, dated the 25th <i>ultimo</i>,
+and sent by the Sea Adventure by way of Siam, but forgot to do
+so; and which I now send along with this letter. I pray you that
+this letter may suffice for your brother, Mr George Saris, and
+the rest of my loving friends: And, with hearty commendations in
+general, I leave you all to the holy protection of the Almighty;
+resting always your ever loving friend at command, RICHARD
+COCKS.</p>
+
+<p><i>No. 2. Letter from Mr Richard Cocks, dated Firando, 10th
+December, 1614, to the Worshipful Thomas Wilson, Esq. at his
+House in the Britain-burse[58] in the Strand.</i></p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 58: Perhaps that now called Exeter
+Change.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>My last to you was of the 1st December, 1613, from this island
+of Firando in Japan, and sent by Captain John Saris in the ship
+Clove. In that letter, I advised you how unkindly the Hollanders
+dealt with us at the Moluccas; since which time there has not
+occurred any matter of moment to communicate, except what I have
+detailed in another letter to my good Lord Treasurer. It is given
+out here by the Hollanders, that our East India Company and that
+of Holland are likely to join into one; and if this prove true,
+it is thought it will be an easy matter to drive the Spaniards
+and Portuguese out of these eastern parts of the world, or else
+to cut them off from all trade. You would hardly believe how much
+the Hollanders have already daunted the Portuguese and Spaniards
+in these parts, especially in the Moluccas, where they daily
+encroach on the Spaniards, who are unable to withstand them, and
+are even in fear that they may shortly deprive them of the
+Philippine islands. The Portuguese also are in great fear of
+being driven by them out of the trade they now carry on from
+Ormus to Goa, and with Malacca and Macao in China.</p>
+
+<p>There is one thing of which I cannot yet conceive the issue,
+and that is the robbing and plundering the Chinese junks, which
+is daily done by the Hollanders in these parts, the goods whereof
+must amount to great value, and suffice to fit out and maintain a
+great fleet, which is worthy of consideration. Should the emperor
+of Japan fall out with the Hollanders, and debar them from the
+trade of his dominions, which is not unlikely, the Hollanders
+will then make prize of the Japanese junks as well as of those of
+China; for their strength at sea in these parts is sufficient to
+do what they please, if only they had a place to retire to for
+revictualling and refitting their ships; for they are of late
+grown so stout, that they mock at those who were formerly their
+masters and teachers. It is very certain that they have got
+possession of several fortresses at the Moluccas and other parts;
+yet, to my certain knowledge, the natives in these parts are more
+inclined towards the Spaniards, although at the first they were
+glad of the arrival of the Hollanders, having been disgusted by
+the intolerable pride of the Spaniards. But now they have time to
+reflect, that the Spaniards brought them abundance of money, and
+were liberal though proud; while the poor Hollanders, who serve
+there both by sea and land, have such bare pay, that it can
+hardly supply clothes and food; and their commanders allege, that
+all the benefits derived from conquest or reprisals, belong to
+the states and the <i>Winthebbers</i>, as they call them. It is
+hard to judge how all these things may end.</p>
+
+<p>Were it not for the misbehaviour of the Hollanders, I am of
+opinion that we should procure trade with China, as we only
+demand leave for three ships to come and go there, and merely to
+establish factors there to transact our business, without
+bringing any Jesuits or <i>padres</i>, whom the Chinese cannot
+abide to hear of, because they came formerly in such great
+numbers to inhabit the land, and were always begging and craving,
+to the great displeasure of the pagans. I am however in good hope
+of success, as our English nation has acquired a good fame and
+character since our arrival, which I am given to understand has
+come to the ears of the emperor of China, who has heard how we
+have been received by the emperor of Japan, having large
+privileges allowed us, and also that we have at all times held
+the Castilians in defiance both by sea and land. I have been
+informed of these things by the Chinese who come hither, and that
+the emperor and other great men of China delight to hear accounts
+of our nation. I had almost forgotten to mention, that some China
+merchants lately asked me, if we were allowed to trade with
+China, whether the king of England would prevent the Hollanders
+from robbing and spoiling their junks? Which question was rather
+doubtful to me, yet I answered that his majesty would take
+measures to prevent the Hollanders from injuring them.</p>
+
+<p>We have lately had news that a tuffon or tempest has done vast
+injury at Jedo, a city of Japan as large as London, where the
+Japanese nobility have very beautiful houses, now mostly
+destroyed or greatly injured. The whole city was inundated, and
+the inhabitants forced to take shelter in the hills; a thing
+never before heard of. The palace of the king, which is a stately
+building in a new fortress, has had all its gilded tiles carried
+away by a whirlwind, so that none of them could be found. The
+pagans attribute this calamity to some charms or conjurations of
+the Jesuits, who were lately banished: but the Japanese converts
+to popery ascribe it to the vengeance of God, as a punishment for
+having banished these holy men.</p>
+
+<p>We have lately had a great disaster in Cochin-China, to which
+place we sent a quantity of goods and money, to the value of
+&pound;730, as it cost in England, under the care of Mr Tempest
+Peacock and Mr Walter Carwarden, who went as merchants in a
+Japanese junk, carrying our king's letters and a handsome present
+for the king of Cochin-China. They arrived at the port called
+<i>Quinham</i>,[59] delivered his majesty's letters and present,
+and were entertained with kind words and fair promises. The
+Hollanders, seeing that we adventured to that country, would
+needs do the same, and were at first kindly entertained; but in
+the end, Mr Peacock and the chief Dutch merchant going ashore one
+day in the same boat, to receive payment from the king for
+broad-cloth and other commodities they had sold him, they were
+treacherously assailed on the water, their boat overset, and both
+were killed in the water with harpoons, as if they had been
+fishes, together with their interpreters and other attendants,
+who were Japanese. Mr Carwarden being aboard our junk escaped
+sharing in this massacre, and came away, but neither he nor the
+junk have ever been since heard of, so that we fear he has been
+cast away.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 59: <i>Turon</i> is the port of
+Cochin-China in the present time, and <i>Quinham</i> is unknown
+in modern geography; perhaps the old name of some island or
+village at the port or bay of Turon.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>It is commonly reported here, both among the Chinese and
+Japanese, that this was done by order of the king of Cochin-China
+in revenge against the Hollanders, who had burnt one of his
+towns, and had slaughtered his people most unmercifully. The
+origin of this quarrel was occasioned by a large quantity of
+false dollars, sent to <i>Quinham</i> by the Hollanders some
+years ago, and put off in payment for silks and other Chinese
+goods, to the great injury of the merchants of that country. When
+the falsehood of the money was discovered, they laid hands upon
+the Dutch factors, and are said to have put some of them to
+death. Upon this the Dutch ships came upon the coast, and landed
+a body of men, who burnt a town, putting man, woman, and child to
+the sword. This, as reported, was the occasion of our present
+mischance, and of the slaughter of Mr Peacock, because he was in
+company with the Hollanders. Along with this letter, I send you a
+Japanese almanack, by which you will see the manner of their
+printing, with their figures and characters. And so I leave you
+to the holy protection of the Almighty, resting always,
+&amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>RICHARD COCKS.</p>
+
+<p>No. 3. <i>Letter from Edmond Sayer, dated Firando, 5th
+December, 1615. But having no Address</i>.</p>
+
+<p>I received a letter from you by the hands of Captain Copendall
+of the Horiander, who arrived here on the 29th of August this
+year, by which I learnt your safe arrival at the Cape of Good
+Hope, homewards bound, and of the loss of some of your company;
+and I make no doubt that, long ere now, you are safe arrived in
+England, by the blessing of God. I sent you a letter, dated in
+November, 1614, by the Dutch ship called the Old Zealand, in
+which I informed you of the death of Mr Peacock and Walter
+Carwarden, both betrayed in Cochin-China, to our great grief,
+besides the loss of goods to the company.</p>
+
+<p>The last year, Mr Wickham, Mr Adams, and I, when bound for
+Siam in a junk we had bought, and meeting with great storms, our
+vessel sprung a leak, and we were fain to bear up for the
+<i>Leukes</i>[60] islands, where we had to remain so long, before
+we could stop our leaks, that we lost the monsoon, and had to
+return here. We have fitted her out again this year, and are now
+ready to sail again for Siam. My greatest hope in these parts is,
+that we shall be able to establish trade with China, of which we
+seem to have a fair prospect through the efforts of the China
+captain and his brothers; and I make no doubt that we shall have
+a factory there ere long.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 60: The Liqueo islands are here obviously
+meant, a group to the south of the south-western extremity of
+Japan, in 28&deg; N. and long. 129&deg; 30' W. from Greenwich;
+such being the latitude and longitude of the centre of the great
+Liqueo, the principal island of the group.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This last summer we have had great troubles, in consequence of
+war between the emperor and <i>Fidaia Same</i>, and we do not
+certainly know whether the latter be slain or fled; but the
+emperor gained the victory, with a vast loss of men on both
+sides.[61] Having no other news to write, I commit you to the
+protection of the Almighty, and am, &amp;c. EDMOND SAYER.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 61: In the text of the Pilgrims, this loss
+is estimated at 400,000, and in a marginal note at 40,000, both
+in words at length; for which reason the number is omitted in the
+text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>No. 4. <i>Letter, with no address, from Edmond Sayer, dated
+Firando, 4th December, 1616.</i></p>
+
+<p>Worshipful Sir,--My duty always remembered. Having a
+favourable opportunity, I could not omit to trouble you with a
+few lines. I am but newly arrived here in Firando from a
+difficult and tedious voyage to Siam, to which country we went in
+a junk belonging to the right honourable company, in which Mr
+Adams was master, and myself factor. Having bought there more
+goods than our own junk could carry, we freighted another junk
+for Japan, in which Mr Benjamin Fry, the chief in the factory at
+Siam, thought it proper for me to embark, for the safety of the
+goods. The year being far spent, we were from the 1st June to the
+17th September in our voyage between Siam and <i>Shachmar</i>,
+during which we experienced many storms and much foul weather,
+and lost twenty of our men by sickness and want of fresh water.
+The great cause of our tedious and unfortunate voyage was in our
+not having a good pilot. The one we had was a Chinese, who knew
+nothing of navigation; for, when out of sight of land, he knew
+not where he was, nor what course to steer. Besides he fell sick,
+and was unable to creep out of his cabin, so that I was obliged
+to do my best to navigate our junk; which, with what small skill
+I possessed, and by the aid of God, I brought safe to
+<i>Shachmar</i>, where we arrived on the 17th of September,
+having then only five men able to stand on their legs. In
+consequence, I arrived so late at Firando that I could not go
+this year to Siam. But Mr William Eaton has gone there in the
+company's junk, having two English pilots, named. Robert and John
+Surges.--I am, &amp;c. EDMOND SAYER.</p>
+
+<p><i>No. 5. Letter from Richard Cocks to Captain John Saris,
+dated Firando, 15th February, 1617.[62]</i></p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 62: Perhaps the date of this letter,
+according to modern computation, ought to have been 1618, as in
+those days the year did not begin till Lady-day, the 25th
+March.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>My last letter to you was dated 5th January, 1616, and sent by
+way of Bantam in the ship Thomas, which went from hence that year
+along with another small ship called the Advice. In that letter I
+wrote you at large of all things that had then occurred, and
+mentioned having received two of your letters from London; one
+dated 4th November, 1614, and the other 15th August, 1615. The
+Advice has since returned to Japan, and arrived at Firando on the
+2d of August last, and by her I had a letter from the honourable
+company, dated 30th January, 1616.</p>
+
+<p>You will perhaps have heard that Captain Barkeley, while on
+his death-bed, narrowly escaped losing 6000 dollars, paid out for
+custom on pepper; for, if he had died before it was found out,
+perhaps some other man might have taken credit for paying that
+sum. It is a common saying, that it is easy for those who live at
+Bantam to grow rich, as no man dies <i>without an heir</i>. We
+have been again this year before the emperor of Japan, but could
+not procure our privileges to be enlarged, having still only
+leave to carry on trade at Firando and Nangasaki, and our ships
+to come only to Firando.</p>
+
+<p>Mr Edmond Sayer went last year to Cochin-China with a cargo
+amounting to about 1800 tayes, in goods and money; and when ready
+to cone away, was defrauded of 650 tayes, by a Chinese and
+others, of whom he had bought silk for the worshipful company. He
+had weighed out the money, waiting to receive the silk, and the
+money lay in the room where he sat; but some of the thievish
+people made a hole through the cane-wall of the room, and stole
+away the money unperceived. I am sorry for this mischance; but Mr
+Sayer is in hopes to recover it this year, as he left a person to
+follow out the suit, and goes back himself in a Chinese junk,
+with 2000 tayes in silver to purchase silk. He is to be
+accompanied by one Robert Hawley, as his assistant and successor,
+in case be should die, and Mr William Adams goes pilot, in place
+of the Chinese. God send them a prosperous voyage, and that they
+may recover the lost money. Our own junk, the Sea Adventure, made
+another voyage last year to Siam, Mr William Eaton being
+merchant; and has gone back again this year. God send them a
+prosperous voyage.</p>
+
+<p>Last year, the Hollanders sent a fleet of ships from the
+Moluccas to Manilla, to fight the Spanish fleet: But the
+Spaniards kept safe in port for five or six months, so that the
+Hollanders concluded they durst not come out at all, and
+therefore separated to look out for Chinese junks, of which some
+say they took and plundered twenty-five, while others say
+thirty-five. It is certain that they took great riches, and all
+under the assumed name of Englishmen. At length the Spanish fleet
+put to sea, and set upon five or six of the Dutch ships, the
+admiral of which was burnt and sank, together with two other
+ships, the rest escaping. The Spaniards then separated their
+fleet, to seek out the remaining Dutch ships. The Spanish
+vice-admiral fell in with two Dutch ships one morning and fought
+them both all day; but was at length constrained to run his ship
+ashore and set her on fire, that she might not be taken by the
+Hollanders. These two Dutch ships, and one that was in the former
+fight, came afterwards to Firando, together with two other large
+Dutch ships from Bantam, as big as the Clove, intending to have
+intercepted the Macao ship, which they narrowly missed. Thus five
+great Holland ships came this year to Firando, the smallest of
+them being as large as the Clove. One of these, called the Red
+Lion, which was she that rode beside us at the Moluccas, was cast
+away in a storm at Firando, together with a Chinese junk they
+brought in as a prize. All the goods were recovered, but were all
+wet. The emperor allows them to make good prize of all they
+take.</p>
+
+<p>The Black Lion, one of their ships, of 900 tons burden, was
+sent away for Bantam, fully laden with raw silk and other rich
+Chinese commodities. Another, called the Flushing, of 700 or 800
+tons, is gone for the Moluccas, fully laden with provisions and
+money. The Sun, a ship of 600 or 700 tons, with a galliass of
+above 400 tons, are left to scour the coast of China, to make
+what booty they can, and to return next monsoon. The galliass has
+sailed already, but the Sun waits for the Macao ship departing
+from Nangasaki, that she may endeavour to take her. The Macao
+ship had actually sailed, but seeing the galliass, she returned
+to Nangasaki, and will, as I think, hardly venture to sail this
+year. As I said before, the Dutch have always robbed the Chinese
+under the name of Englishmen, which has greatly injured our
+endeavours to procure trade in that country; so that we have been
+obliged to send people to give notice to the Chinese governors,
+that they were Hollanders who have taken and plundered their
+junks, and not Englishmen. In fine, I have advised the worshipful
+company at large of every thing of moment, which I doubt not will
+be communicated to you. I send you here inclosed a copy of my
+last year's letter; and so, committing you to God, I rest your
+loving friend at command,</p>
+
+<p>RICHARD COCKS.</p>
+
+<p>No. 6. <i>Extract of a Letter from Richard Cocks, without Date
+or Address</i>.</p>
+
+<p>There came two friars in that ship as ambassadors from the
+viceroy of New Spain, with a present for the emperor; but he
+would neither receive the present, nor speak with them that
+brought it, even sending Mr Adams to order them to quit his
+dominions, as he had formerly banished all men of their cloth,
+and continued still in the same mind. It is said that <i>Fidaia
+Same</i> had promised to receive the jesuits again into Japan, if
+he had got the victory and been settled in the empire. Had this
+taken effect, we and the Hollanders had doubtless been turned out
+of Japan, so that it is better as it is.</p>
+
+<p>Last year, when we fitted out our junk, we employed a
+Spaniard, called Damian Marina, the same person who thought to
+have gone with you in company with George Peterson. This Damian
+was a good helmsman, and was therefore employed by us, and
+another Spaniard, named Juan de Lievana, went with them as
+passenger. The junk however lost her voyage, and they returned to
+Nangasaki, where the carrak of Macao soon afterwards arrived.
+Understanding that these two Spaniards had gone in our vessel,
+the Portuguese arrested them and put them in irons in their ship,
+condemning them to death as traitors to their king and country,
+for serving their English enemies. I took their defence in hand,
+and procured an order from the emperor to set them at liberty, to
+the great displeasure of the Spaniards and Portuguese; and these
+two men are going passengers to Bantam in the Hosiander.</p>
+
+<p>We have had great troubles in Japan, in consequence of the
+wars, by transporting our goods from place to place, to save
+them. Mr Adams is gone again in the junk for Siam, accompanied
+only by Mr Edmond Sayer. Mr Nealson is very sick; but Mr Wickham
+and Mr Eaton are both well. I long to hear from you, and I pray
+you to deliver the inclosed to my brother. Yours, most assured at
+command,</p>
+
+<p>RICHARD COCKS.</p>
+
+<p>No. 7. <i>Letter from Richard Cocks, without Address, dated
+Firando, 10th March, 1620</i>.[63]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 63: In the Pilgrims, the date of this
+letter is made 1610, evidently by error of the press; and, as
+observed of No. 5, the real date, according to modern
+computation, ought to be 1621. The introductory paragraph is a
+note by Purchas, distinguished by inverted commas, retained as a
+curious specimen of his mode of writing.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"Hollanders abuses of the English in those parts, are here
+published for knowledge of these eastern affairs and occurrents,
+as it is meet in a history. But neither were these national, but
+personal crimes, and done in time and place of pretended
+hostility; and now, I hope, satisfaction is or shall be made.
+Neighbourhood of region, religion, and customs, are easily
+violated by drink, covetousness, and pride, the three furies that
+raised these combustions. This history hath related the worth of
+many worthy Hollanders: If it yields a close-stool for
+Westarwood, as excrements rather than true Dutch, or a grain-tub
+or swill-tub for some brave brewers and bores, that embrued with
+nobler blood than themselves, prefer their brutish passions to
+God's glory, religion, and public peace let it be no imputation
+to the nation, which I love and honour, but to such baser spirits
+as have [like scorbutical humours in these long voyages, and
+their longer peace and want of wonted employments,] been bred as
+diseases to their, and infections to our bodies. My intent is to
+present others with their acts, and myself with prayers, that all
+may be amended."--<i>Purchas</i>.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>It is now almost three years since I wrote your worship any
+letter. The purpose of this is to inform you of the unlooked for
+and unruly proceedings of the Hollanders against our English
+nation, in all these parts of the world, not sparing us even in
+this empire of Japan, contrary to the large privileges granted to
+us by the emperor, that the Japanese should not meddle with or
+molest us. But these Hollanders, having this year seven ships
+great and small in this port of Firando, have, with sound of
+trumpet, proclaimed open war against our English nation, both by
+sea and land, threatening to take our ships and goods, and to
+kill our persons, as their mortal enemies. This was done by one
+Adam Westarwood, their admiral or lord-commander, as they call
+him, and was openly proclaimed aboard all their ships. They have
+even come to brave us before our own doors, picking quarrels with
+us, and forcibly entering our house, thinking to have cut all our
+throats, yet only wounded two persons; and, had it not been for
+the assistance of the Japanese our neighbours, who took our
+parts, they had assuredly slain us all, as there were an hundred
+Hollanders to one Englishman. Not contented with this, they took
+our boat when going about our business, in which was one
+Englishman, whom they carried prisoner to their house,
+threatening to put him to death; and indeed he was in imminent
+danger, among a crowd of drunken fellows, who threatened to stab
+him with their knives. This young man was Richard King, son to
+Captain King of Plymouth. Besides this, as two of our barks were
+passing their ships, within the town and harbour of Firando, they
+pointed a cannon at them, which missed fire, yet shot at them
+with muskets, which missed the Englishmen and killed a Japanese.
+For all this there is no justice executed against them by the
+king of Firando, though he has received the commands of the
+emperor to that effect.</p>
+
+<p>Yon will also please to understand, that two of these ships
+which they have brought to Firando are English ships, taken by
+them from Englishmen in the Indies. They also took two other
+ships from us, which were riding at anchor in the road of
+Patania, where we have a factory, and had not the least suspicion
+of any such event. In this unwarrantable affair, they killed
+Captain John Jordaine,[64] our chief president for the right
+worshipful company in the Indies. Several others were then slain,
+and the Hollanders carried the ships and goods away; but six of
+the mariners, which were in these captured English ships, escaped
+from them here at Firando, and came to our house. The Hollanders
+sent to me, demanding to have these men given up to them. But I
+answered, that I must first see their commission, that I might
+know by what authority they presumed to take our ships and goods,
+and to slay our men, the faithful subjects of his majesty. Upon
+this, they went to the <i>Tono</i>, or king of Firando, desiring
+to have their <i>English slaves</i>,[65] as they were pleased to
+call our men, delivered up to them. But they were told, that they
+must first demand of the emperor, and whatever he ordained should
+be obeyed; but that, in the meantime, he did not consider the
+English to be their slaves. This was the grand occasion on which
+they grounded their quarrel against us, and meant to have killed
+us all. But I trust in God and his majesty, by the solicitations
+of our right honourable and right worshipful employers, that his
+majesty will not suffer his true and loyal subjects to lose their
+lives, ships, and goods by this thievish and unthankful rabble,
+who are assembled in these parts of the world, and who make a
+daily practice to rob and steal from all, whether friends or
+foes: And I trust that you will become a solicitor in this so
+just cause, against so inveterate an enemy.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 64: This Captain Jordaine is said to have
+been treacherously slain in the time of a
+treaty--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 65: And who was the happy instrument of
+their own delivery, from what they accounted slavery, but the
+English nation?--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This Adam Westarwood, their lord-commander, set my life to
+sale; offering fifty dollars to any one that would kill me, and
+thirty dollars for every other Englishman that they could slay:
+But hitherto God hath preserved me and the rest in this place;
+for though they have wounded two or three of our men, none have
+died. This villainous proceeding[66] of their lord-commander was
+secretly told me by some of their own people, who advised me and
+the rest of us to take heed to our safety. They also informed me
+of the noble parentage of this their lord-commander Westarwood,
+telling me that his father is a close-stool maker at Amsterdam,
+or thereabouts; and that the best of their captains are the sons
+of shoemakers, carpenters, or brewers. God bless their honourable
+and worshipful generation! I would say, God bless me from them.
+To make an end of this matter, I went up this year to the
+emperor's court at Meaco, to complain of the abuses offered to us
+in his dominions, contrary to the privileges his majesty had
+granted us. I had very good words, and fair promises made me that
+we should have justice, and that the <i>tono</i> or king of
+Firando should be ordered to see it performed: But as yet nothing
+has been done, though I have many times made earnest suit on the
+subject.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 66: Unchristian, uncivil, inhumane, immane,
+devilish impiety.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>While I was at the court, and in the emperor's palace at
+Meaco, there were several Spaniards and Portuguese there to pay
+their obeisance to the emperor, as is their custom every year on
+the arrival of their ships. There was also a Hollander at the
+court, who had lived almost twenty years in Japan, and speaks the
+Japanese language very fluently. In my hearing, and that of
+others, this fellow began highly to extol their king of Holland,
+pretending that he was the greatest king in Christendom, and held
+all the others under his command. He little thought that we
+understood what he said; but I was not slack in telling him, that
+he need not be so loud, for they had no king in Holland, being
+only governed by a count, or rather that they governed him. Nay,
+if they had any king at all in whom they could boast, it
+certainly was the king of England, who had hitherto been their
+protector, and without whose aid they had never been able to brag
+of their States. This retort made the Spaniards and Portuguese
+laugh heartily at the poor Hollander, and made him shut his
+mouth.</p>
+
+<p>And now for the news of this country. The emperor is great
+enemy to the name of Christians, especially to the Japanese who
+have embraced the faith; so that all such as are found are put to
+death. While at Meaco, I saw fifty-five martyred at one time,
+because they would not forsake the faith, and among them were
+some children of five or six years old, who were burnt in the
+arms of their mothers, calling on Jesus to receive their souls.
+Also, in the town of Nangasaki, sixteen others were martyred for
+the same cause, of whom five were burnt, and the rest beheaded
+and cut in pieces, and their remains put into sacks and cast into
+the sea in thirty fathoms deep: Yet the priests got them up
+again, and kept their remains secretly as relics. There are many
+others in prison, both here and in other places, who look hourly
+to be ordered for execution, as very few of them revert to
+paganism. Last year, about Christmas, the emperor deposed one of
+the greatest princes in all Japan, called <i>Frushma-tay</i>,
+lord of sixty or seventy <i>mangocas</i>, and banished him to a
+corner in the north of Japan, where he has a very small portion
+in comparison with what was taken from him, and he had the choice
+of this or of cutting open his own belly. It was thought that
+this would have occasioned great troubles in Japan, for all the
+subjects of <i>Frushma-tay</i> were up in arms, and meant to hold
+out to the utmost extremity, having fortified the city of
+<i>Frushma</i>, and laid in provisions for a long time. But the
+<i>tay</i> and his son, being then at the emperor's court, were
+commanded to write to their vassals, ordering them to lay down
+their arms and submit to the emperor, or otherwise to cut open
+their own bellies. Life being sweet, they all submitted, and
+those were pardoned who had taken up arms for their <i>tay</i>.
+The emperor has given their dominions, which were two kingdoms,
+to two of his own kinsmen; and this year the emperor has ordered
+the castle belonging to Frushma to be pulled down, being a very
+beautiful and gallant fortress, in which I saw him this year, and
+far larger than the city of Rochester. All the stones are ordered
+to be conveyed to Osaka, where the ruined castle, formerly built
+by <i>Fico-Same</i>, and pulled down by <i>Ogosha-Same</i>, is
+ordered to be rebuilt three times larger than before; for which
+purpose all the <i>tonos</i> or kings have each their several
+tasks appointed them; to be executed at their several charges,
+not without much grumbling: For they had got leave, after so many
+years attendance at court, to return to their own residences, and
+were now sent for again all of a sadden to court, which angreth
+them not a little: "But go they must, will they nill they, on
+pain of belly-cutting."</p>
+
+<p>At this time there runs a secret rumour, that <i>Fidaia
+Same</i> is alive, and in the house of the <i>Dairo</i>[67] at
+Meaco; but I think it has been reported several times before this
+that he was living in other places, but proved untrue. There are
+some rich merchants here that belong to Meaco, who are much
+alarmed by this report, lest, if true, the emperor may burn
+Meaco; and who are therefore in haste to get home. Were Fidaia
+actually alive it might tend to overthrow the emperor's power,
+for, though a great politician, he is not a martial man: But be
+this as it may, things can hardly be worse for us. I advised you
+in my last of the destruction of all the Christian churches in
+Japan; yet there were some remnants left at Nangasaki till this
+year, and in particular the monastery of Misericiordia was
+untouched, as were all the church-yards and burying-places; but
+now, by order of the emperor, all is destroyed, all the graves
+and sepulchres of the Christians opened, and the bones of the
+dead taken out by their parents and kindred, to be buried
+elsewhere in the fields. Streets have been built on the scites of
+these churches, monasteries, and burying-grounds, except in some
+places, where pagodas have been erected by command of the
+emperor, who has sent heathen priests to occupy them, thinking
+utterly to root out Christianity from Japan. There were certain
+places near Nangasaki where several jesuit fathers and other
+Christians were martyred, in the reign of <i>Ogosha Same</i>, and
+where their parents and friends had planted evergreen-trees, and
+erected altars near each tree, where many hundreds went daily to
+say their prayers; but now, by command of the emperor, all these
+trees are cut down, the altars destroyed, and the ground all
+levelled, it being his firm resolution utterly to root out the
+remembrance of all matters connected with Christianity.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 67: The Dairo was formerly the sovereign of
+Japan, uniting the supreme civil and spiritual power, committing
+the military affairs to a kind of generalissimo, who usurped
+supreme authority, and reduced the Dairo to be a kind of
+sovereign pontiff or chief-priest.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the months of November and December, 1618, there were two
+comets seen all over Japan. The first, rising in the east, was
+like a great fiery beam, rent to the southwards, and vanished
+away in about the space of a month. The other rose also in the
+east, like a great blazing star, and went northwards, vanishing
+quite away within a month near the constellation of Ursa-Major or
+Charles-waine. The wizards of Japan have prognosticated great
+events to arise from these comets, but hitherto nothing material
+has occurred, excepting the deposition of <i>Frushma-tay</i>,
+already related.</p>
+
+<p>I am almost ashamed to write you the news which the Spaniards
+and Portuguese report, though some of them have shewn me letters
+affirming it to be true, of a bloody cross having been seen in
+the air in England; and that an English preacher, speaking
+irreverently of it from the pulpit, was struck dumb: On which
+miracle, as they term it the king of England sent to the pope, to
+have some cardinals and learned men brought to England, as
+intending that all the people of England should become Roman
+catholics. I pray you pardon me for writing of such nonsense,
+which I do that you may laugh; yet I assure you there are many
+Spaniards and Portuguese here who firmly believe it. I know not
+what more to write you at this time: But I hope to come to
+England in the next shipping that comes here; and I trust in God
+that I may find your worship in good health.</p>
+
+<p>RICHARD COCKS.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVI.</p>
+
+<p><i>Ninth Voyage of the East India Company, in 1612, by Captain
+Edmund Marlow</i>.[68]</p>
+
+<p>We sailed from the Downs on the 10th February, 1612, in the
+good ship James, and crossed the equator on the 11th April.[69]
+The 27th of that month, at noon, we were in latitude, by
+observation, 19&deg; 40' S. and in longitude, from the Lizard,
+11&deg; 24' W. We this day saw an island fourteen leagues from us
+in the S.E. which I formerly saw when I sailed with Sir Edward
+Michelburne. It is round like Corvo, and rises rugged, having a
+small peaked hill at its east end. Its lat. is 23&deg; 30' S. and
+long. 10&deg; 30' W. from the Lizard; and there is another island
+or two in sight, seven or eight leagues E.N.E. from this.[70]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 68: Purch. Pilg. I. 440.--The relation of
+this voyage in the Pilgrims is said to have been written by Mr
+John <i>Davy</i>, the master of the ship: Probably the same John
+<i>Davis</i>, or <i>Davies</i>, formerly mentioned as having
+frequently sailed as master to India in these early voyages, and
+from whose pen Purchas published a <i>Rutter</i>, or brief book
+of instructions for sailing to India. On the present occasion,
+this voyage has been considerably abbreviated, especially in the
+nautical remarks, which are now in a great degree obsolete and
+useless, and have been already sufficiently enlarged upon in the
+former voyages to India.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 69: From some indistinct notices, in the
+commencement of this voyage, the Dragon and Hosiander appear to
+have belonged to the <i>tenth</i> voyage of the East India
+Company, and the Solomon to the <i>eleventh</i> voyage; and that
+these three ships sailed from England at the same time with the
+James, which belonged to the <i>ninth</i>
+voyage.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 70: This seemeth the island of Martin
+Vaz.--<i>Purch.</i> The island of Trinidad, or Martin Vaz, is
+only in lat. 20&deg; 15' S. and long. 29&deg; 32' W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We saw the island of St Lawrence on the 29th June, and
+anchored in five fathoms water in the bay of St Augustine on the
+28th at night. Next day we weighed, and brought the ship to
+anchor in the river, one anchor being in thirty-five and the
+other in ten fathoms. A ship may ride here in shallower water at
+either side, the deep channel being narrow. In this anchorage no
+sea can distress a ship, being protected by the land and shoals,
+so that it may well be called a harbour, from its safety. We
+remained here twenty days, and sailed for Bantam on the 18th of
+July.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 24th September we saw the islands of
+Nintam, in lat. 1&deg; 30' S.[71] The sound between the two great
+islands is eighteen leagues from Priaman, and eleven leagues from
+the shoals before <i>Ticoo</i>, which must be carefully avoided
+during the night, by laying two or three or four leagues off till
+day-light. When you see three hummocks that resemble three
+islands, take care always to have a person stationed on the outer
+end of the boltsprit to give warning of any spots in your way, as
+there are coral beds, which may be easily seen and avoided. The
+course from this sound for Ticoo or Priaman is E.N.E. to these
+shoals. In passing this sound, keep your lead always going, and
+come no nearer the large southern island than the depth of
+sixteen fathoms, as there are shoals towards the east side, and a
+breach or ledge also off the northern island, on the larboard
+going in for Priaman. When nearing the shoals of Ticoo, set the
+three hummocks on the main, which look like islands, as all the
+land near them is very low; and when you have these hummocks N.E.
+by E. then are you near the shoals, and when the hummocks are
+N.N.E. you are past the shoals. But great care is necessary
+everywhere, as it is all bad ground hereabout, till past the high
+land of <i>Manancabo</i>, which is in lat 4&deg; 30' S. or
+thereby.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 71: Pulo Mintao is probably here meant,
+which is to the south of the line, but touches it at its northern
+extremity. The sound in the text, is probably that between Pulo
+Botoa and Pulo Mintao.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We came to anchor in the road of Priaman on the 26th
+September, where we found the Thomas, and remained fourteen days
+to refresh our sick men, when the Hector and our ship sailed for
+Bantam, where we arrived in company with the Janus and Hector on
+the 23d October. The 4th November we weighed from the road of
+Bantam, intending to proceed by the straits of Sunda for
+Coromandel; but the winds and currents were so strong against us,
+that we were forced back into the straits of Sunda to refit our
+ship, which was much weather-beaten. The 11th December, we
+anchored again at Pulo Panian, and went to work to trim our ship
+and take in ballast. Being ballasted, watered, and refitted, we
+sailed again on the 10th January, 1613, for the straits of
+Malacca. But, being too late in the monsoon, and both wind and
+current against us, we got no farther than seventy leagues from
+Bantam by the first of March, with much toil to the men.
+Wherefore we concluded to take in wood and water, and to return
+for Bantam by the outside of Sumatra.</p>
+
+<p>Having again sailed for Coromandel, we were at noon of the 5th
+June, 1613, in lat. 12&deg; N. and long. 23&deg; W. from the salt
+hills, having been carried by the currents 4&deg; 30', or ninety
+leagues out of our reckoning. Whoever sails from Bantam, either
+up or down, will find such uncertain reckoning that he may well
+miss his destined port, unless he looks well to the variation of
+the needle, which will help materially in ten or fifteen leagues,
+and indeed there is no other way of dealing with these currents.
+We now got sight of the land, which is so very low that the
+pagodas or pagan churches are first descried. With the aid of the
+lead, you may sail boldly on this coast of Coromandel in fifteen
+fathoms by night, and ten by day; but a steady man must always be
+kept at the lead on such occasions, as the sea shoals suddenly;
+for after thirteen fathoms, it will suddenly fall off to shoal
+water, being like a well or steep bank, and the ground ooze. The
+course along the coast is N. by E. to Pullicate, and so to
+Masulipatam.</p>
+
+<p>The 6th June we anchored at noon in the road of Pullicate, in
+eight fathoms on sand. There is a middle ground, having only five
+fathoms, and within that another, having six, seven, and eight.
+The marks for the road where we anchored, are the round hill by
+the other hill, W. by N. and the Dutch fort S.W. by W. The
+latitude is 13&deg; 30' N. and the variation 18&deg; 10'.
+Departing from Pullicate roads on the night of the 7th, we were
+on the 8th in lat. 14&deg; 40' at noon, having sailed
+twenty-three leagues since last night, our depth of water being
+twenty-three to twenty-fire fathoms, and our course N. by E. but
+the lead is our sure guide on this coast, under God. The 9th at
+noon we were in lat. 15&deg; 30', having the land in sight, but
+not the high land of <i>Petapoli</i> [Putapilly]. During the last
+twenty-four hours, we sailed seventeen leagues north, in fifteen
+and sixteen fathoms. The high land now in sight is known by a
+pagoda or pagan temple, and is five leagues from the high land of
+Putapilly, in the road of which place we anchored on the 10th in
+five fathoms on sand, this new high land bearing from us N.N.W.
+the platform of palm trees upon the island E.N.E. by E. and the
+bar N.W. by N. The whole sea coast is low land. The latitude here
+is 15&deg; 52'. Having established a factory, in which we left Mr
+George Chansey and our purser as merchants, with other seven men
+to assist in taking care of our goods, we sailed from Putapilly
+on the forenoon of the 19th.</p>
+
+<p>We anchored in the road of Masulipatam on the 21st, where we
+found a ship belonging to Holland. We remained here for six
+months, until the 6th January, 1614, and then set sail for
+Putapilly, where we arrived on the 19th of that month, and
+remained there, taking in the merchants and their goods till the
+7th February, when we sailed for Bantam. We arrived there on the
+20th April, and on the 10th June set sail for Patane. By noon of
+that day, being in lat. 5&deg; 44' S. we had sight of the islands
+nine leagues from Bantam, our course, after getting clear of the
+road, being N.N.E. in five, six, seven, eight, twelve, fourteen,
+and so to twenty-four fathoms. At six in the morning of the 11th,
+we were close beside the two islands that are north from Bantam
+near Sumatra, in lat. 5&deg; S. and in twenty fathoms; this being
+the surest course both going to and from Bantam, but it is
+necessary to keep a good look-out for the sand-banks which are
+even with the water. The 12th, being involved in a strong adverse
+current, we were forced to anchor in a quarter less four fathoms,
+in sight of a reef, twelve leagues short of Lucapara, and
+forty-eight from Bantam.</p>
+
+<p>The 14th, we came in with the island of Banda and the main of
+Sumatra, and went through between them in five 1/2 fathoms. In
+this passage it is proper to keep nearer the Sumatra shore,
+though the water is deeper on the Banda side of the strait; as
+that side is rocky, while the side towards Sumatra is oozy. The
+16th we came to Palimbangan point; and the 17th at noon, being in
+lat, 1&deg; 10' S. we anchored in nine fathoms, on account of it
+falling calm with a strong current, the isle of Pulo Tino being
+to seawards. The 30th, we anchored in the road of Patane in three
+1/2 fathoms. On the 1st August we sailed to Sangora to trim our
+ship, being a good place for that purpose under shelter of two
+islands hard by the main, and fourteen or fifteen leagues from
+Patane. We anchored in Sangora road, under the eastermost of the
+two islands, on the 4th; and having put our ship into good trim,
+we came away on the 9th September, and returned to Patane next
+day. We remained there a month taking in the goods of the Globe,
+to carry them to Bantam, for which place we sailed on the 9th
+October, and arrived at Bantam on the 9th November. We continued
+there till the 27th January, 1615, to load our ship, and to get
+all things in readiness for our voyage home to England.</p>
+
+<p>The 29th we set sail from Bantam, homewards bound; and when
+some hundred leagues from thence, our captain, Mr Edmund Marlow,
+died. He was an excellent man, and well skilled in the
+mathematics and the art of navigation. The first place at which
+we anchored was Saldanha bay, where we arrived on the 29th April,
+1615, and next day our consort the Globe came in. Having well
+refreshed and refitted our ships, we set sail from thence on the
+17th May, and arrived at St Helena on the 3d June. Sailing from
+thence along with our consort, on the 7th of that month, we
+arrived in England on the 3d of August, giving praise to God for
+our safety.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Tenth Voyage of the English East India Company, in 1612,
+written by Mr Thomas Best, chief Commander</i>.[72]</p>
+
+<p>From the full tide of this voyage, in the Pilgrims, we learn
+that there were two ships employed in this <i>tenth</i> voyage,
+named the Dragon and the Hosiander, in which were about 380
+persons; and these were accompanied by two other ships, the James
+and the Solomon, which belonged to other voyages, each voyage
+being then a separate adventure, and conducted by a separate
+subscription stock, as formerly explained in the introduction to
+the present chapter. We learn from other parts of the Pilgrims,
+that the James belonged to the <i>ninth</i> voyage, related
+immediately before this, and the Solomon to the <i>eleventh</i>,
+to be afterwards narrated.--E.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 72: Purch. Pilgr. I.456.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.1. <i>Observations during the Voyage from England to
+Surat</i>.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed from Gravesend on the 1st of February, 1612. At noon
+on the 22d March we made the latitude 15&deg; 20' N. and at two
+p.m. were abreast of Mayo, one of the Cape Verd islands, being
+S.W. by S. about twelve leagues from Bonavista. To the N. and
+N.N.W. of Mayo the ground is all foul, and due N. of the high
+hummocks a great ledge of rocks runs out from the land for five
+or six miles, a mile without which ledge there are twenty fathoms
+water. On the west side of the island, you may borrow in twelve
+or fifteen fathoms, till you come into the road, where we
+anchored in twenty-four fathoms.</p>
+
+<p>On the morning of the 28th March, we came close by an island
+in lat. 23&deg; 30', and long. from the meridian of Mayo, 1&deg;
+50' E. We did not land upon this island, but came within two or
+three miles of it, and in my opinion there is hardly any
+anchorage to be found. It may probably produce some refreshment,
+as it certainly has wood, which we saw, and it may have water, as
+we observed a fair plain spot and very green on its southern
+part; but we could find no ground within two or three miles of
+its coast. E.N.E. some seven or eight leagues from this, there is
+another island; and E. by S. or E.S.E. from the first island,
+about four or five leagues, there are two or three white
+rocks.[73]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 73: In the text it is not said if the
+latitude be N. or S. yet S. is probably meant. No island is
+however to be found in the indicated situation. In the
+<i>eleventh</i> voyage, an island is said to have been discovered
+in lat. 19&deg; 34'S. certainly known to have been Trinidad,
+Santa Maria d'Agosto, or Martin Vaz, of which
+hereafter.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We remained twenty-one days in Saldanha road, and bought for
+the three[74] ships thirty-nine beeves and 115 sheep, which we
+paid for with a little brass cut out of two or three old kettles.
+We got the sheep for small pieces of thin brass, worth about a
+penny or three halfpence each; and the beeves in the same manner
+for about the value of twelve-pence a-piece. This is an excellent
+place of refreshment, as besides abounding in beef and mutton,
+there is plenty of good fish, all kinds of fowls, and great store
+of fat deer, though we could not kill any of these. It has
+likewise excellent streams of fresh water, and a most healthful
+climate. We landed eighty or ninety sick, who were lodged in
+tents, and they all recovered their health in eighteen days, save
+one who died. From the 7th to the 28th June, when we set sail
+from Saldanha bay, we had continual fine weather, the sun being
+very warm, and the air pleasant and wholesome.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 74: One of the ships appears to have been
+separated from the fleet, but it does not appear
+which.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We sailed from Saldanha road on the 28th June, and were 100
+leagues to the east of <i>Cabo das Aguilhas</i> before we found
+any current, but it was then strong. The 31st July at noon, we
+found the latitude 17&deg; 8' S. our longitude being 20&deg; 47'
+E. and at four p.m. we saw the island of <i>Juan de Nova</i>,
+distant four leagues E.S.E.[75] Its size, and I think we saw it
+all, is about three or four miles long, all very low and rising
+from the sea like rocks. Off the west end we saw breakers, yet
+could not get ground with a line of 150 fathoms, sounding from
+our boat. The latitude of this island, observed with great
+accuracy, is 17&deg;,[76] and it seems well laid down in our
+charts, both in regard to latitude and longitude. It is a most
+sure sign of being near this island, when many sea fowl are seen,
+and we accordingly saw there ranch fowl, some white, having their
+wings tipped only with black, and others all black.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 75: St Juan de Nova is in lat. 17&deg; 50'
+S. and long. 45&deg; 30'E. from Greenwich--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 76: In lat. 17&deg; S. and long. 60&deg; E.
+is an island or bank called Nazareth, Corados, or Garajos, a long
+way however from St Juan de Nova.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 3d August, in lat 13&deg; 35' by observation, and
+longitude 22&deg; 30' from the Cape, we saw <i>Mal-Ilha</i>, one
+of the Comoros, about twelve leagues off, having on the east part
+of it a very fair sugar-loaf hill.[77] At the same time with this
+island, we had sight of that named Comoro, bearing N.N.W. by W.
+being high land. At six a.m. of the 4th we were close in with
+<i>Mal-Ilha</i>, and standing in for some place in which to
+anchor, while some eight or nine miles from the shore, we saw the
+ground under the ship in not less than eight or ten fathoms. The
+Hosiander, two miles nearer the land, had four or five fathoms,
+and her boat was in three fathoms. We then sent both our boats to
+sound, which kept shoaling on a bank in eight, ten, and twelve
+fathoms, and off it only half a cable's length had no ground with
+100 fathoms. At the north end of Mal-Ilha there is a fair big
+high island, about five or six miles in circuit.[78] A bank or
+ledge of rocks extends all along the west side of Mal-Ilha,
+continuing to the small high island; and from this little island
+to Mal-Ilha may be some eight or nine miles, all full of rocks,
+two of them of good height. Being at the north end of this ledge,
+and the little island bearing S.E. you may steer in with the
+land, keeping the island fair aboard; and within the rocks or
+broken ground and Mal-Ilha there is a bay with good anchorage. To
+the eastwards, on coming in from the ledge of rocks, there is a
+great shoal, the outermost end of which is N.E. or N.E. by E.
+from the small island five or six miles, and no ground between
+that we could find with forty or fifty fathoms line. In fine, all
+the north side of Mal-Ilha is very dangerous, but the
+above-mentioned channel is quite safe. I would have come to
+anchor here, as there is a town about a mile east from the
+before-mentioned bay, the people being very good, and having
+abundance of refreshments, as beeves, goats, hens, lemons,
+cocoa-nuts in great plenty, and excellent water, but could not
+get in, owing to the wind being directly south.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 77: Mohilla, the Mal-ilha of the text, is
+in lat. 16&deg; 44&deg; S. and long. 44&deg; E. from Greenwich.
+Its difference of long. from the Cape of Good Hope is 23&deg; 45'
+E. Thus, in every instance hitherto, the observations of lat. and
+long. by Captain Best, at least as printed by Purchas, are
+grossly erroneous.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 78: This description seems rather to refer
+to the island of Mayotto, about thirty leagues E. of S. from
+Mohilla; the small island to the north, or N. by W. being called
+Saddle Isle.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Two of my men had belonged to a Dutch fleet, that year when
+they assaulted Mosambique, on which occasion they put in here,
+and recovered the healths of 400 or 500 men in five weeks. Yet it
+is well named Mal-Ilha, or the bad island, for it is the most
+dangerous of any place I ever saw. It is next to Comoro, from
+which it is distant some twelve or fourteen leagues S.S.E.</p>
+
+<p>At dawn on the 1st September we got sight of land to the
+eastwards, four or five leagues distant, my reckoning being then
+eighty or ninety leagues short, owing, I suppose, to some current
+setting east from the coast of Melinda; neither from the latitude
+of Socotoro to Damaun could we see the sun, to know our
+variation. The 3d at seven a.m. we spoke two country boats, which
+informed us that the town, church, and castle in sight was
+Damaun. From these boats I got two men, who engaged to carry the
+Dragon to the bar of Surat, promising not to bring us into less
+than seven fathoms. On the 5th a Surat boat came on board with
+<i>Jaddow</i> the broker, who had served Captain William Hawkins
+three years, and Sir Henry Middleton all the time he was here.
+There were likewise in this boat the brother of the customer of
+Surat, and three or four others. All these remained with us till
+the 7th, when we came to anchor at the bar of Surat, in eight 1/4
+fathoms at high water, and six 1/2 at neap tides. At spring
+tides, however, I have found the tide to rise in the offing three
+fathoms, and even three 1/2. The latitude of our anchorage was
+21&deg; 10' N. and the variation 16&deg; 20' or 16&deg; 27'.[79]
+On the 11th, <i>Thomas Kerridge</i> came aboard, with a
+certificate or licence under the seals of the justice and
+governor of Surat, for our quiet and peaceable trade and
+intercourse, and with kind entreaties to come ashore, where we
+should be heartily welcomed by the people. They also brought off
+a letter or narrative, written by Sir, Henry Middleton, which had
+been left in charge of the <i>Moccadam</i> of Swally. On the same
+day, I again sent Mr Kerridge ashore, accompanied by Hugh
+Gettins.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 79: Sorat bar is in lat. 21&deg; 2' N. and
+long. 72&deg; 50' E. from Greenwich--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.2. <i>Transactions with the Subjects of the Mogul, Fights
+with the Portuguese, Settlement of a Factory, and Departure for
+Acheen</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On the 13th September, 1612, sixteen sail of Portuguese
+frigates, or barks, put into the river of Surat. The 22d, we
+determined in council to send a dispatch to the king at Agra,
+signifying our arrival, and to require his explicit answer,
+whether he would permit us to trade and settle a factory; and if
+refused, that we would quit his country. The 30th, I got notice
+that Mr Canning, our purser, and William Chambers, had been
+arrested ashore; wherefore I caused a ship of Guzerat to anchor
+close beside me, determining to detain her till I should see how
+matters went ashore. We also stopped a bark laden with rice from
+Bassare, belonging to the Portuguese, out of which we took twelve
+or fourteen quintals of rice, for which we paid at the rate of
+thirteen-pence the quintal. When I had taken possession of the
+Guzerat ship, I wrote to the chiefs of Surat, requiring them to
+send me all my men, together with the value of the goods I had
+landed; on which I should deliver up their ship and people,
+allowing them till the 5th of October to give me an answer; at
+which time, if I had not a satisfactory answer, I declared my
+determination to dispose of the ship and her goods at my
+pleasure. There were some 400 or 450 men aboard that ship, ten of
+the chiefest among whom I brought into my ship, to serve as
+hostages.</p>
+
+<p>On the 6th October, <i>Medi Joffer</i> came aboard my ship,
+accompanied by four chiefs and many others, bringing me a great
+present, and came to establish trade with us, and to solicit the
+release of the Guzerat ship. On the 10th I left the bar of Surat,
+and came to Swally roads, where I anchored in eight fathoms at
+high water. This road-stead is ten or twelve miles north from the
+bar of Surat. The 17th, the governor of <i>Aamadavar</i>
+[Ahmedabad] came to the water side. I landed on the 19th, having
+four principal persons sent aboard my ship, as pledges for my
+safety. On the 21st I concluded upon articles of agreement with
+the governor and merchants, of which the tenor follows:</p>
+
+<p>"Articles agreed upon, and sealed, by the governor of
+Ahmedabad, the governor of Surat, and four principal merchants;
+and to be confirmed by the firmaun and seal of the Great Mogul,
+within forty days from the date and sealing hereof, or else to be
+void; for the settlement of trade and factories in the cities of
+Surat, Cambaya, Ahmedabad, Goga, or in any other part or parts of
+the dominions of the Great Mogul in this country. Witnessed by
+their hands and seals, the 21st of October, 1612."</p>
+
+<p>1. All that concerns Sir Henry Middleton is to be remitted,
+acquitted, and cleared to us; so that they shall never make
+seizure, stoppage, or stay of our goods, wares, or commodities,
+as satisfaction for the same.</p>
+
+<p>2. They shall procure at their own proper cost, from the King
+or Great Mogul, his grant and confirmation of all the articles of
+this agreement, under the great seal of his government, and shall
+deliver the same to us, for our security and certainty of
+perpetual amity, commerce, and dealing, within forty days from
+the date and sealing hereof.</p>
+
+<p>3. It shall be lawful for the king of England to keep his
+ambassador continually at the court of the Great Mogul, during
+all the time of this peace and trade, there to accommodate and
+conclude upon all such great and weighty matters as may in any
+respect tend to disturb or break the said peace.</p>
+
+<p>4. At all times, on the arrival of any of our ships in the
+road of Swally, proclamation shall be made in the city of Surat,
+during three successive days, that all the people of the country
+shall be free to come down to the shore, and there to have free
+trade, dealing, and commerce with us.</p>
+
+<p>5. That all English commodities shall pay custom, according to
+the value or price they bear, at the time of entry at the
+custom-house, after the rate of three 1/2 per cent. ad
+valorem.</p>
+
+<p>6. All petty and pedlar ware to be free from duty, that does
+not exceed the value of ten dollars.</p>
+
+<p>7. The English are to have ten <i>manu</i> carried from the
+water side to Surat for a <i>manuda</i>,[80] and at the same rate
+back; and are to be furnished with carts on application to the
+<i>moccadam</i> of Swally for sending to Surat, and at that place
+by a broker with carts downwards to the sea side at Swally.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 80: This unexplained rate of carriage was
+probably ten <i>manuda</i> for one
+<i>mahinoodic</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>8. If any of our people die in the country, neither the king,
+the governor, nor any inferior officer should pretend any title
+or claim to any thing that had belonged to the deceased, neither
+should demand any fees, taxes, or customs, upon the same.</p>
+
+<p>9. In case all the men left in these parts should die before
+the return of any of our ships, then some officer appointed for
+the purpose shall make a true inventory and schedule of all
+monies, goods, jewels, provisions, apparel, or other things,
+belonging to our nation, and shall safely preserve and keep the
+same, to be delivered over to the general, captain, or merchants
+of the first English ships that arrive afterwards, from whom a
+regular receipt and discharge shall be given for the same.</p>
+
+<p>10. That they shall guarantee all our men and goods on land,
+redeeming all of both or either that may happen to be taken on
+the land by the Portuguese; delivering both to us again free of
+all charges, or in lieu thereof the full value of our said goods
+and men, and that without delay.</p>
+
+<p>11. Insomuch as there are rebels and disobedient subjects in
+all kingdoms, so there may be some pirates and sea-rovers of our
+nation, who may happen to come into these parts to rob or steal.
+In that case, the trade and factory belonging to the English
+shall not be held responsible or liable to make restitution for
+goods so taken; but we shall aid the subjects of the Great Mogul,
+to the best of our power who may happen to be thus aggrieved, by
+application to our king for justice against the aggressors, and
+for procuring restitution.</p>
+
+<p>12. That all victuals and provisions, required during the stay
+of our ships in the roads of Surat and Swally, shall be free of
+custom, provided they do not exceed the value of 1000
+dollars.</p>
+
+<p>13. That in all questions of wrongs and injuries offered to us
+and to our nation, we shall receive speedy justice from the
+judges and others in authority, according to the nature of our
+complaints and the wrongs done to us, and shall not be put off by
+delays, or vexed by exorbitant charges or loss of time.</p>
+
+<p>On the 24th October, I landed the present intended for the
+Great Mogul, which I brought to the tent of the governor of
+Ahmedabad, who took a memorandum of all the particulars, as also
+a copy of our king's letter to their sovereign. After which, as
+before agreed upon with the governor, I sent them back aboard
+ship: For I had told him, unless his king would confirm the
+articles agreed upon, and likewise write our king a letter, that
+I would neither deliver the present nor our king's letter; for,
+if these things were refused, then was their king an enemy not a
+friend, and I had neither present nor letter for the enemy of our
+king. At this time, however, I delivered our present to the
+governor, and another to his son.</p>
+
+<p>The 14th November, a great fleet of frigates or barks,
+consisting of some 240 sail, came in sight. I thought they had
+come to attack us, but they were a <i>caffila</i> of merchantmen
+bound for Cambaya; as there comes every year a similar fleet from
+Goa, Chaul, and other places to the southwards, for Cambaya,
+whence they bring the greatest part of the loading which is
+carried by the caracks and galleons to Portugal.</p>
+
+<p>The 27th I received notice from Mr Canning and Edward
+Christian, who were both ashore, that four galleons were fitted
+out from Goa, and were coming to attack us, having been in full
+readiness, and at anchor on the bar of Goa on the 14th November.
+The Portuguese fleet came in sight of us on the 28th; and on the
+29th drew near us with the tide of flood. At two in the afternoon
+I got under weigh, and by four was about two cables length from
+their vice-admiral, fearing to go nearer lest I might have got my
+ship aground. I then opened a fire upon him, both with great guns
+and small arms, and in an hour had peppered him well with some
+fifty-six great shot. From him we received one small ball, either
+from a minnion or saker, into our mizen-mast, and with another he
+sunk our long-boat, which we recovered, but lost many things out
+of it.</p>
+
+<p>The 30th at day-light, I set sail and steered among the midst
+of the Portuguese fleet, bestirring ourselves manfully, and drove
+three of their four ships aground on the bar of Surat; after
+which I anchored about nine a.m. This morning the Hosiander did
+good service, coming through also among the enemy's ships, and
+anchored beside me. At the tide of flood, the three ships that
+were aground floated. We then weighed and made sail towards them,
+they remaining at anchor. On getting up to them, we spent upon
+three of them 150 great shot, and the morning after some fifty
+more. At night, we gave the admiral a salute from our four stern
+guns as a farewell; in return for which he fired one of his bow
+guns, a whole or demi-culverine, the shot from which came even
+with the top of our forecastle, went through our <i>Davie</i>,
+killed William Burrel, and carried off the arm of another of our
+men. The Hosiander[81] spent the whole of this day in firing
+against one of the ships that was aground, and received many
+shots from the enemy, one of which killed Richard Barker the
+boatswain.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 81: Nathaniel Salmon of Leigh was master of
+the Hosiander.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Night coming on, we anchored some six miles from the
+Portuguese ships; and at nine p.m. they sent a frigate down
+towards us, which came driving right <i>athwart halse</i> of the
+Hosiander, and being discovered by their good watch, was speedily
+saluted by shot. The first shot made them hoist sail, the second
+went through their sails, and, they immediately made off.[82]
+Their intention certainly was to have set our ships on fire, if
+they had found us off our guard.[83]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 82: This frigate was sunk by the shot, as I
+was assured by Mr Salmon the actor, and eighty of her men were
+taken up drowned.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 83: On this occasion the Portuguese had
+four great galleons and some twenty-six frigates, or armed barks.
+In these fights they lost all their <i>quondam</i> credit, and
+160 men, or as others say 500; and the English settled trade at
+Surat in spite of all their efforts.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We remained at anchor all the first December, the Portuguese
+not coming to us nor we to them; though they might easily have
+come to us without danger from the sands, but not so we to them.
+This day I called a council, and it was concluded to go down to
+the south, that we might have a broader channel, hoping that the
+galleons would follow us. We accordingly went down some six or
+seven leagues on the 2d, but they did not follow us; wherefore on
+the 3d we stood up again, and anchored fairly in sight of them.
+We weighed again on the morning of the 4th, and stood away before
+them, they following: But in the afternoon they gave us over, and
+hauled in with the land, and at night we directed our course for
+Diu. At night of the 5th, we anchored in fourteen fathoms near
+the shore, four or five leagues eastwards of Diu.</p>
+
+<p>The 9th we came to <i>Madafaldebar</i>[84] which is ten or
+eleven leagues E. by N. from Diu, the coast between being very
+fair, and having no unseen dangers. The depth near Diu is fifteen
+or sixteen fathoms, halfway to <i>Madafaldebar</i> twelve
+fathoms, then ten and nine, but not less; and in nine fathoms we
+anchored in a fine sandy bay, on the west side of which is a
+river coming from a considerable distance inland. This place is
+some five or six miles west from the isles of <i>Mortie</i>[85]
+The 15th we set sail to explore the bay of <i>Mohar</i>,[86]
+having been reported by some of the people who had belonged to
+the Ascension to be a good place for wintering in, or waiting the
+return of the monsoon for sailing to the southwards. We
+accordingly anchored that night in the bay, which is nine or ten
+leagues E.N.E. from Madafaldebar, finding the coast and
+navigation perfectly good, with ten fathoms all the way, and no
+danger but what is seen. I sent my boat ashore, and got twenty
+excellent sheep for three shillings each, the best we had seen in
+the whole voyage. We found the ruins of a great town at this
+place, but very few inhabitants.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 84: From the indications in the text, this
+must be <i>Jaffrabat</i> on the coast of Guzerat, about
+thirty-one miles E. by N. from Diu. The name used in the text
+must be taken from the native language, while that of modern
+geography is the Persian, Mogul, or Arabic name of the
+place.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 85: Called <i>Searbett</i> in Arrowsmith's
+excellent map of Hindostan, eight miles E.N.E. from
+Jaffrabat.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 86: Called on the margin of the Pilgrims,
+<i>Moha, Mona</i>, or <i>Mea</i>; and which from the context
+appears to be a bay immediately west from
+<i>Wagnagur</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>There happened to be an army encamped in the neighbourhood of
+this place, and on the 17th, the general sent four men to me,
+requesting a conference. I landed on the 21st, and had much
+conversation with the general, who greatly desired to have two
+pieces of ordnance from us, making many fair promises of favour
+to our nation, and even presented me with a horse and furniture
+and two Agra girdles or sashes; but I refused him, having none to
+spare, and needing all we had for our defence. I presented him in
+return with two vests of stammel cloth, two firelocks, two
+bottles of brandy, and a knife.</p>
+
+<p>The 22d, we saw the four galleons coming towards us, and at
+nine p.m. they anchored within shot of where we lay. At sun-rise
+next morning we weighed and bore down upon them, and continued to
+fight them till between ten and eleven a.m. when they all four
+weighed and stood away before the wind. We followed them two or
+three hours, but they sailed much better large than we, so that
+we again came to anchor, and they likewise anchored about two
+leagues from us. In this days fight, I expended 133 great shot,
+and about 700 small. At sunrise of the 24th we again weighed and
+bore down upon the galleons, and began to fight them at eight
+a.m. continuing till noon, having this day expended 250 great
+shot, and 1000 small. By this time both sides were weary, and we
+all stood to sea, steering S. by E. The galleons followed us till
+two or three p.m. when they put about and come to anchor. I now
+took account of our warlike ammunition, and found more than half
+our shot expended, the store of the Hosiander being in a similar
+situation. We had now discharged against the enemy 625 great
+shot, and 3000 small.</p>
+
+<p>Being about four or five leagues from the land, we met with a
+sand, on which there was only two or two 1/2 fathoms, laying
+S.S.E. or thereabout from <i>Mosa</i>. I went over it in nine
+fathoms, at which time the two high hills over <i>Gogo</i> were
+nearly N. from us. Upon this sand the Ascension was cast away.
+Between the main and this sand, the channel is nine and ten
+fathoms, and the shoaling is rather fast. We continued steering
+S. with the tide of ebb, and anchored in eight fathoms, finding
+the tide to set E.N.E. and W.S.W. by the compass. At midnight of
+the 24th we weighed, standing S.S.E. and at two p.m. of the 25th
+we anchored in seventeen fathoms at high water, full in sight of
+Damaun, which bore E.S.E. In the afternoon of the 26th we
+anchored off the bar of Surat. The 27th we went to Swally road,
+when Thomas Kerridge and Edward Christian came aboard.</p>
+
+<p>On the 6th of January, 1613, the <i>Firmaun</i> from the Great
+Mogul, in confirmation of peace and settlement of a factory for
+trade, came to Swally as a private letter; wherefore I refused to
+receive it, lest it might be a counterfeit, requiring that the
+chief men of Surat should come down and deliver it to me, with
+the proper ceremonials. Accordingly, on the 11th, the sabandar,
+his father-in-law Medigoffar, and several others, came to Swally,
+and delivered the Firmaun to me in form, making great professions
+of respect for our nation in the name of their king. The 14th we
+landed all our cloth, with 310 elephants teeth, and all our
+quicksilver. This day likewise the Portuguese galleons came
+within three or four miles of us. The 16th, I landed Anthony
+Starkey, with orders to travel over land for England, carrying
+letters to give notice of our good success.[87]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 87: Mr Starkey and his Indian companion or
+guide were poisoned on the way by two
+friars.--Purch.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 17th, having received all my goods from Surat, I set sail
+at night, leaving these coasts. The 18th we passed the four
+galleons, which all weighed and followed us for two or three
+hours; but we finally separated without exchanging shots. The
+19th, when abreast of Basseen, we stopt three Malabar barks,
+which had nothing in them, and from one of which we took a boat.
+The 20th at night we were abreast of Chaul, both town and castle
+being full in sight. In the afternoon of the 21st we were abreast
+of Dabul, where we boarded three junks belonging to Calicut,
+laden with cocoanuts. The 22d in the morning, the Hosiander sent
+her boat aboard two junks, and at noon we were at the rocks,
+which are ten or eleven leagues N. of Goa, and six or eight miles
+from the main. Two or three of these rocks are higher than the
+hull of a large ship. At six p.m. we were abreast of Goa, which
+is easily known by the island at the month of the river, on which
+island there is a castle. All the way from Damann to Goa, the
+coast trends nearly N. and S. with a slight inclination to N.W.
+and S.E. the whole being very fair and without danger, having
+fair shoaling and sixteen or seventeen fathoms some three or four
+leagues off shore, with good-anchorage every where.</p>
+
+<p>The 24th we saw a fleet of sixty or eighty frigates or barks
+bound to the southwards, being in lat. 13&deg; 00' 30". The high
+land by the sea now left us, and the shore became very low, yet
+with fair shoaling of sixteen and seventeen fathoms some three or
+four leagues off. In the afternoon we went into a bay, where all
+the before-mentioned frigates were at anchor, together with three
+or four gallies. We brought out a ship with us, whence all the
+Portuguese fled in their boats, and as two frigates lay close
+aboard of her, they had carried away every thing valuable. Next
+day we examined our prize, and found nothing in her except rice
+and coarse sugar, with which we amply supplied both ships; and
+having taken out her masts, and what firing she could afford, we
+scuttled and sunk her, taking out likewise all her people, being
+twenty or twenty-five Moors. The 26th we met a boat belonging to
+the Maldives laden with cocoa-nuts and bound for Cananor, into
+which I put all the people of the prize, except eight, whom I
+kept to assist in labour, one of them being a pilot for this
+coast.</p>
+
+<p>The 27th we were a little past Calicut, abreast of Paniany,
+our lat. at noon being 10&deg; 30' N. In the morning of the 28th,
+we saw Cochin, which is known by the towers and castle, being in
+lat 9&deg; 40' N. or thereby. All the way from Goa to Cochin we
+never had above twenty fathoms, though, sometimes four or five
+leagues from the land; and when only three, four, or six miles
+off, the depths were from ten to twelve fathoms. From lat 11&deg;
+30' N. to Cochin, the land was all very low by the water side;
+but up the country it was very high all along. Four or five
+leagues to the north of Cochin, there is a high land within the
+country, somewhat like a table mountain, yet rounded on the top,
+having long high mountains to the north of this hill. All this
+day, the 28th, we sailed within six or eight miles of the land,
+in nine, ten, and twelve fathoms.</p>
+
+<p>We anchored on the 30th in fifteen fathoms, about twenty-six
+leagues to the north of Cape Comorin right over against a little
+village, whence presently came off six or eight canoes with water
+and all kinds of provisions; the name of this place is
+<i>Beringar</i>, which our mariners usually call Bring-John,
+being in the kingdom of Travancor. The 1st February, the king
+sent me a message, offering to load my ship with pepper and
+cinnamon, if I would remain and trade with him. The 5th we were
+abreast of Cape Comorin, where we had a fresh gale of wind at E.
+by N. which split our fore-top-sail and main bonnet, yet a canoe
+with eight men came off to us three or four leagues from the
+land. We were here troubled with calms and great heat, and many
+of our men fell sick, of which number I was one. On the 8th we
+were forced back to the roads of <i>Beringar</i>. This place has
+good refreshments for ships, and the people are very harmless,
+and not friends to the Portuguese. From this place to Cape
+Comorin, all the inhabitants of the sea coast are Christians, and
+have a Portuguese priest or friar residing among them. It is to
+be remarked, that the whole coast, even from Damaun to Cape
+Comorin, is free from danger, and there is fair shoaling all the
+way from Cochin to that cape, having sixteen, eighteen, and
+twenty fathoms close to the land, and no ground five or six
+leagues off, after you come within twenty-five or thirty leagues
+of the Cape. The variation at Damaun was 16&deg; 30'; halfway to
+the Cape about 15&deg;, and 14&deg; at the cape, the latitude of
+which is 7&deg; 30' N. [<i>exactly</i> 7&deg; 57'].</p>
+
+<p>In the afternoon we were fair off the Cape, and found much
+wind at E.S.E. giving small hope of being able to go eastwards
+till the end of the monsoon, which our Indians reported would be
+about the end of April. So I bore up, and came to anchor, four or
+five leagues within the Cape, in twenty fathoms close by two
+rocks. About two miles right off these two rocks is a sunken
+rock, which is very dangerous, especially if sailing in twenty
+fathoms, but by keeping in twenty-four fathoms all danger is
+avoided. We remained here nine days, when we again made sail. In
+the morning of the 28th we had sight of Ceylon, some eight or
+nine leagues E.S.E. being in lat. 7&deg; N. At 4 p.m. we were
+close in with that island, in thirteen, fifteen, and sixteen
+fathoms. The 1st of March, at 6 p.m. we were abreast of Columbo,
+the lat. of which is about 6&deg; 30' N. [7&deg; 2']; having
+twenty-four and twenty-five fathoms three leagues off. The 12th
+we stood in with the land, and anchored in twenty-four fathoms,
+the wind being S.E. and S. I sent my boat ashore four leagues to
+the north of <i>Punta de Galle</i>, and after some time a woman
+came to talk with one of our Indians who was in the boat. She
+said we could have no provisions: but by our desire she went to
+tell the men. Afterwards two men came to us, who flatly refused
+to let us have any thing, alleging that our nation had captured
+one of their boats; but it was the Hollanders not the English.
+The 14th, in the morning, the southern point of Ceylon, called
+<i>Tanadare</i> [Dondra], bore E.S.E. of us, some five leagues
+off. This point is in lat. 5&deg; 30' [5&deg; 54' N.], and is
+about ten or twelve leagues E.S.E. from Punta de Galle. The 17th
+we were near one of the sands mentioned by Linschoten, being two
+leagues from the land. We had twenty-five fathoms water, and on
+the land, right opposite this sand, is a high rock like a great
+tower. The land here trends E.N.E.[88]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 88: Owing probably to careless abbreviation
+by Purchas, this solitary notice is all that is given of the
+voyage between Dondra-head in Ceylon and Acheen, in the
+north-west end of Sumatra, to which the observation in the text
+seems to refer.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.3. <i>Occurrences at Acheen, in Sumatra</i>.</p>
+
+<p>At noon of the 12th April, 1613, we came to anchor in the road
+of Acheen, in twelve fathoms, but ships may ride in ten or even
+eight fathoms; the best place in which to ride being to the
+eastward of the castle, and off the river mouth. I landed the
+merchants on the 13th; but the king did not come to town till the
+15th, when he sent me his <i>chop</i> or licence to land, which
+was brought by an eunuch, accompanied by the <i>Xabander</i> and
+six or eight more, to whom I gave 120 <i>mam</i>. I landed along
+with them, and two hours afterwards the king sent me a present of
+some provisions, I having sent him on my landing a present of
+<i>two pieces</i>;[89] the custom being to make the king some
+small present on landing, in return for which he sends several
+dishes of meat.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 89: These <i>pieces</i>, so often mentioned
+in the early voyages, were probably fowling-pieces, or European
+fire-arms.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 17th, the king sent an elephant, with a golden bason,
+for our king's letter, which I accompanied to court, attended by
+forty of our men, who were all admitted into the king's presence.
+After many compliments, the king returned me our king's letter,
+that I might read it to him; and accordingly the substance of it
+was explained in the native language, with the contents of which
+he was well pleased. After some time, the king told me that he
+would shew me some of his diversions, and accordingly caused his
+elephants to fight before us. When six of them had fought for
+some time, he caused four buffaloes to be brought, which made a
+very excellent and fierce fight; such being their fierceness that
+sixty or eighty men could hardly part them, fastening ropes to
+their hind-legs to draw them asunder. After these, some ten or
+twelve rams were produced, which fought very bravely. When it was
+so dark that we could hardly see, these sports were discontinued,
+and the king presented me with a banquet of at least 500 dishes,
+and such abundance of hot drinks as might have sufficed to make
+an army drunk. Between nine and ten at night, he gave me leave to
+depart, sending two elephants to carry me home; but as they had
+no coverings I did not ride either of them.</p>
+
+<p>On the 18th, I went again to court by appointment of the king,
+when we began to treat concerning the articles formerly granted
+by his grandfather to Mr James Lancaster; but when we came to
+that in which all goods were to be brought in and carried out
+free from customs, we broke off without concluding any thing. The
+19th the ambassador of Siam came to visit me, and told me, that
+about thirty months before, three Englishmen had waited upon his
+king, who gave them kind entertainment, being rejoiced at
+receiving letters from the king of England. He also said that his
+king would be much pleased if our ships came to his ports,
+telling me what great quantities of Portugal cloth, for so he
+called our English cloth, would sell in his country. According to
+his opinion, the colours most saleable in his country are,
+<i>stammel</i> and other reds, yellows, and other light, gay, and
+pleasing colours, such as those already in most request at Surat.
+He also told me, that his king had made a conquest of the whole
+kingdom of Pegu, as that he is now the most powerful sovereign in
+the east, except the emperor of China, having twenty-six
+tributary kings under his government and authority, and is able
+to equip for war 6000 elephants. Their coin is all of silver,
+gold being less esteemed, and of less proportional value than
+with us. That country produces great abundance of pepper and raw
+silk; and he said the Hollanders have factories at Patane, an
+excellent port, where they are called English. Siam likewise,
+according to him, is a good port, and nearer the court than
+Patane: Those who go to the city in which the king resides land
+always at the port of Siam, whence the royal residence is twenty
+days journey by land. I requested from the ambassador to give me
+a letter to his sovereign, and letters also to the governors of
+the maritime towns in Siam, in favour of the English nation, when
+we should come upon these coasts, which he promised me. And,
+lastly, in token of friendship we exchanged coins; I giving him
+some of our English coin, and receiving from him the coins of
+Siam. I had often, after this first interview, friendly
+intercourse with this ambassador.</p>
+
+<p>I went to court on the 20th, butt had no opportunity to speak
+with the king; whereupon I sent to the king's deputy, or chief
+minister, and complained of having been dishonoured, and of
+having been abused by the <i>shahbander</i>. He promised me
+speedy redress, and that he should inform the king without delay,
+which indeed he did that same day. On the day following, the king
+sent two officers of his court to me, to intimate that I might
+repair freely to his court at all times, passing the gate without
+hindrance or waiting for his <i>criss</i>. He also removed the
+shahbander of whom I had complained, and appointed a gentleman,
+who had formerly been his vice-ambassador to Holland, to attend
+upon me at all times to court, or any where else, at my pleasure.
+The 24th I went to court, and had access to the king, who
+satisfied me in all things, and promised to ratify and renew all
+the articles formerly agreed upon between his predecessor and Mr
+James Lancaster. After many compliments, he gave me leave; and
+presently after my return, he sent me an elephant to attend upon
+me, and to carry me at all times to any place I pleased. This is
+a sign of the highest honour and esteem, as no person may have an
+elephant, or ride upon one, but those whom the king is pleased to
+honour with that privilege.</p>
+
+<p>The 2d of May, the king invited me to his fountain to swim,
+and I was there accordingly along with him, the place being some
+five or six miles from the city; and he even sent me two
+elephants, one to ride upon, and the other to carry my provision.
+Having washed and bathed in the water, the king made me partake
+of a very splendid banquet, in which there was too much arrak,
+the whole being eaten and drank us we sat in the water; and at
+this entertainment all his nobles and officers were present. Our
+banquet continued from one till towards five in the evening, when
+the king allowed me to depart. Half an hour afterwards, all the
+strangers were permitted to go away, and presently afterwards he
+came away himself.</p>
+
+<p>On the 14th, some Portuguese came to Acheen on an embassy from
+the governor of Malacca to the king; and as the wind was scant,
+they landed three leagues to the east of Acheen road. I
+immediately sent the Hosiander, of which I appointed Edward
+Christian captain, to go in search of the bark from Malacca,
+which was brought to me on the 17th: But the king sent me two
+messengers, desiring me to release her and her people and cargo;
+which I refused, till I had examined the bark and her contents;
+saying, however, that in honour and respect for his majesty, I
+should then do whatever he was pleased to desire. Afterwards, I
+was informed by Mr Christian, that there were only four or five
+bales of goods in the bark, and that nothing she contained had
+been meddled with. Being satisfied of this I went ashore, and
+found my merchants were at the court. They returned presently,
+saying, that the king was greatly displeased at the capture of
+the Portuguese bark in his port, protesting by his god that he
+would make us all prisoners, if she were not released. Having
+notice that I was ashore, the king presently sent for me; and, as
+I was on my way to the court, I met with a gentleman from the
+king, who desired me in his name to release the bark; but I told
+him I must first see and speak to the king. I was then brought
+into the king's presence, and, after much discourse with him, I
+gave him the bark and all her contents; with which he was so much
+pleased, that he gave me the title of <i>Arancaia Puto</i>,
+signifying the <i>honourable white man</i>, requiring all his
+nobles to call me by that name. In farther proof of his
+satisfaction with my conduct on this occasion, he sold me all his
+benzoin at my own price, being twenty <i>tailes</i> the bahar,
+though then selling commonly at thirty-four and thirty-five
+tailes. He at the same time expressed his esteem and affection
+for me in the strongest terms, desiring me to ask from him
+whatever I thought proper. I only requested his letters of
+recommendation and favour for Priaman, which he most readily
+promised; and, at my taking leave, he both made me eat some
+mangoes, of which he was then eating, and gave me some home with
+me.</p>
+
+<p>On the 27th, <i>Malim Cairy</i> came to Acheen, by whom I
+received letters from our merchants at Surat, as also a copy of
+the <i>firmaun</i>, sent them from Agra, bearing date the 25th
+January, in the seventh year of the then reigning Great Mogul, by
+which everything was confirmed that had been agreed upon between
+the governor of Ahmedabad and me. The 17th of June, a Dutch
+merchant came to Acheen from Masulipatam, who had been eight
+months on his way, from whom we learnt the death of Mr Anthony
+Hippon at Patane, and of Mr Brown, master of the Globe, who died
+at Masulipatam, where our people had met with evil usage. The
+24th I received of the king his present for the king of England,
+consisting of a <i>criss</i> or dagger, a <i>hasega</i>, four
+pieces of fine Calicut lawn, and eight camphire dishes.[90]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 90: In the translation of the letter
+accompanying these presents, to be noticed hereafter, they are
+thus described:--"A criss wrought with gold, the hilt being of
+beaten gold, with a ring of stones; an Assagaya of Swasse, half
+gold half copper; eight porcelain dishes small and great, <i>of
+camfire one piece of souring stuff</i>; three pieces of callico
+lawns."--The passage in Italics is inexplicable, either in the
+words of the letter, or in the description in the
+text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 3d of July, the fleet of armed vessels belonging to Acheen
+arrived, being only twenty days from the coast of Johor, at which
+place they had captured the factory of the Hollanders, making
+prize of all their goods, and had brought away some twenty or
+twenty-four Dutchmen as prisoners. The 7th, I received the king's
+letter for Priaman, together with a <i>chop</i> or licence for my
+departure; and on the 12th, taking my leave of Acheen, I
+embarked. In the morning of the 13th I set sail. It is to be
+noted, that, from the 12th April to the middle of June, we had
+much rain here at Acheen, seldom two fair days following, and
+accompanied, by much wind in sudden gusts. From the 15th June to
+the 12th July, we had violent gales of wind, always at S.W. or
+W.S.W. or W.</p>
+
+<p>S.4. <i>Trade at Tecoo and Passaman, with the Voyage to
+Bantam, and thence Home to England</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving Acheen, as said before, on the 13th July, 1613, we
+came in sight of <i>Priaman</i> on the 3d of August, it being
+then nine or ten leagues off, N.E. by E. and clearly known by two
+great high hills, making a great <i>swamp</i> or saddle between
+them. We saw also the high land of <i>Tecoo</i>, which is not
+more than half the height of that of Priaman, and rises somewhat
+flat. At the same time likewise we saw the high land of
+<i>Passaman</i>, some seven or eight leagues north of Tecoo,
+mid-way between Tecoo and Priaman, which mountain is very high,
+and resembles Aetna in Sicily.[91] In the afternoon of the 7th we
+came to Tecoo, and anchored to the eastward of the three islands
+in seven fathoms, the southmost isle bearing W.S.W. the middle
+isle W.N.W. and the northern isle N. 1/2 E. our anchorage being a
+mile from them.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 91: Perhaps this observed similarity with
+Aetna is meant to indicate that this hill also is a
+volcano.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I sent ashore my merchants on the 19th, and landed myself in
+the afternoon. Next day, by advice of our council, the Hosiander
+was sent to Priaman, with the letter of the king of Acheen. She
+sailed from Tecoo on the 12th, and came back on the 18th, when
+she was dispatched to Bantam. The 25th there came a junk from
+Bantam, the owners of which were Chinese. They confirmed to me
+the reported death of Sir Henry Middleton, with the loss of most
+of the men belonging to the Trades-increase, in consequence of
+her main-mast breaking, while heaving her down for careening her
+bottom. She was now returned from Pulo-Pannian to Bantam, and
+they said that three hundred Chinese had died while employed at
+work upon her.</p>
+
+<p>The 28th a boat I had sent to Passaman returned, having been
+well entertained at that place, and brought with them the
+<i>Scrivano</i> to deal with me, with whom accordingly I
+concluded a bargain. The 29th, the governor of Tecoo sent for me
+to come ashore, when I went to wait upon him. He was in council,
+with all the chiefs of the district, and, after a long
+discussion, we agreed on the following price of pepper. In the
+first place, we were to pay eighteen dollars the bahar; then
+there was 8d. the bahar for lastage or weighing, 30d. for
+<i>canikens</i>, and 35 d. for <i>seilars</i>: Besides all which
+they bargained for presents to sixteen chiefs or great men. On
+the 30th, Henry Long came from Passaman, and informed me that Mr
+Oliver had fallen sick, and that several others of our men had
+died there; upon which I sent my pinnace to bring back Mr Oliver
+and all others who survived, and to discontinue our factory at
+that place.</p>
+
+<p>The 21st October, the Hosiander returned from Bantam, bringing
+me letters from the English merchants at that place; saying that
+they had 17,000 bags of pepper ready, all of which I might have,
+or any part of it I thought proper, if I chose to come for it, at
+thirteen dollars the <i>timbane</i>. On this, and several other
+considerations, I held a mercantile council, in which it was
+agreed that the Hosiander should be left at <i>Tecoo</i> for the
+sale of our Surat goods, all of which were accordingly put on
+board her for that purpose, and I departed in the Dragon for
+Bantam from the road of Tecoo on the 30th October. I remained in
+this road of Tecoo eleven weeks, in which time I bought 115 or
+120 tons of pepper, and buried twenty-five of our men. All of
+these either died, or contracted their mortal illnesses at
+Passaman, not at Tecoo; and surely, if we had not attempted to
+trade at Passaman, all, or at least most of these, might have now
+been living. Wherefore, I earnestly advise all of our nation to
+avoid sending any of their ships or men to Passaman, for the air
+there is so contagious, and the water so unwholesome, that it is
+impossible for our people to live at that place.</p>
+
+<p>I set sail from Tecoo on the 30th October, and arrived in the
+road of Bantam on the 11th November, where I anchored in a
+quarter less four fathoms, [3-3/4 fathoms.] Next day I convened
+our English merchants on board my ship, and agreed on the price
+of pepper at thirteen dollars the <i>bahar</i>, which is 600
+pounds of our weight. Having concluded my business at this place,
+I set sail for Saldanha bay; where I bought for a small quantity
+of copper, worth perhaps between three and four pounds, 494
+sheep, 4 beeves, and 9 calves. We sailed again from that place on
+the 4th March, 1614; and on the day of our departure, the natives
+brought us more live-stock than we knew how to dispose of; but we
+brought away alive, eighty sheep, two beeves, and one calf.</p>
+
+<p>The 24th of March we saw St Helena, eight or nine leagues to
+the W.N.W. its latitude, by my estimation, being 16&deg; S. and
+its long, from the Cape of Good Hope, 22&deg; W. At three p.m. we
+anchored in the road of that island, right over-against the
+Chappel. While at St Helena, finding the road from the Chappel
+[church valley], to where the lemon-trees grow, a most wicked
+way, insomuch that it was a complete day's work to go and come, I
+sent my boats to the westward, in hopes of finding a nearer and
+easier way to bring down hogs and goats. In this search, my
+people found a fair valley; some three or four miles to the S.W.
+which leads directly to the lemon-trees, and is the largest and
+finest valley in the island, after that at the Chappel, and is
+either the next, or the next save one, from the valley of the
+Chappel. At this valley, which is some three or four miles from
+that of the Chappel, and is from it the fourth valley or swamp
+one way, and from the point to the westward the second, so that
+it cannot be missed, it is much better and easier for getting
+provisions or water, and the water is better and clearer. The
+road or anchorage is all of one even ground and depth, so that it
+is much better riding here than at any other part of the island;
+and from this place, a person may go up to the lemon-trees and
+back again in three hours. We here got some thirty hogs and pigs,
+and twelve or fourteen hundred lemons; but if we had laid
+ourselves out for the purpose, I dare say we might have got 200
+hogs, besides many goats.</p>
+
+<p>Continuing our voyage home, we got sight of the Lizard point
+on the 4th June, 1614, our estimated longitude from the Cape of
+Good Hope being then 27&deg; 20', besides two degrees carried by
+the currents; so that the difference of longitude, between the
+Cape and the Lizard, is 29&deg; 20', or very nearly. Though we
+had then only left the Cape of Good Hope three months before, and
+were only two months and nine days from St Helena, more than half
+our company was now laid up by the scurvy, of which two had died.
+Yet we had plenty of victuals, as beef, bread, wine, rice, oil,
+vinegar, and sugar, as much as every one chose. All our men have
+taken their sickness since we fell in with Flores and Corvo;
+since which we have had very cold weather, especially in two
+great storms, one from the N. and N.N.E. and the other at N.W. so
+that it seemeth the sudden coming out of long heat into the cold
+is a great cause of scurvy. All the way from the Cape of Good
+Hope to the Azores, I had not one man sick.</p>
+
+<p>The 15th of June, 1614, we came into the river Thames, by the
+blessing of God, it being that day six months on which we
+departed from Bantam in Java.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVIII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Observations made during the foregoing Voyage, by Mr
+Copland, Chaplain, Mr Robert Boner, Master, and Mr Nicholas
+Whittington, Merchant</i>.[92]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 92: Purch. Pilgr. I. 466. On this occasion,
+only such notices as illustrate the preceding voyage are
+extracted.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.1. <i>Notes extracted from the Journal of Mr Copland,
+Chaplain of the Voyage</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The bay of Saldhana, and all about the Cape of Good Hope, is
+healthful, and so fruitful that it might well be accounted a
+terrestrial paradise. It agrees well with our English
+constitutions; for, though we had ninety or an hundred sick when
+we got there, they were all as well in twenty days as when we
+left England, except one. It was then June, and we had snow on
+the hills, though the weather below was warmish. The country is
+mixed, consisting of mountains, plains, meadows, streams, and
+woods which seem as if artificially planted on purpose, they are
+so orderly; and it has abundance of free-stone for building. It
+has also plenty of fish and wild-fowl, as geese, ducks, and
+partridges, with antelopes, deer, and other animals. The people
+were very loving, though at first afraid of us, because the
+Dutch, who resort hither to make train-oil, had used them
+unkindly, having stolen and killed their cattle; but afterwards,
+and especially on our return, they were more frank and kind. They
+are of middle size, well limbed, nimble and active; and are fond
+of dancing, which they do in just measure, but entirely naked.
+Their dress consists of a cloak of sheep or seals-skin to their
+middle, the hair side inwards, with a cap of the same, and a
+small skin like that of a rat hanging before their privities.
+Some had a sole, or kind of sandal, tied to their feet. Their
+necks were adorned with greasy tripes, which they would sometimes
+pull off and eat raw; and when we threw away the guts of beasts
+and sheep we bought from them, they would eat them half raw and
+all bloody, in a most beastly and disgusting manner. They had
+bracelets about their arms of copper or ivory, and were decorated
+with many ostrich feathers and shells. The women were habited
+like the men, and were at first very shy; but when here on our
+return voyage, they became quite familiar, even lifting their
+rat-skins: But they are very loathsome objects, their breasts
+hanging down to their waists. The hair both of the men and women
+is short and frizzled. With these people copper serves as gold,
+and iron for silver. Their dwellings are small tents, removable,
+at pleasure; and their language is full of a strange
+<i>clicking</i> sound, made by doubling their tongues in their
+throats. There is a high hill, called the <i>Table Mountain</i>,
+which covers all the adjoining territory for an hundred miles.
+The natives, who are quite black, behaved to us very peaceably,
+but seemed to have no religion, yet their skins were slashed or
+cut, like the priests of Baal; and one seemed to act as chief, as
+he settled the prices for the whole. Some of our people went a
+considerable way into the country, and discovered many bays and
+rivers.</p>
+
+<p>When at Surat, the Guzerats took some of our sea-coal to send
+to their sovereign, the Great Mogul, as a curiosity. At this
+place there came against us a Portuguese squadron of four
+galleons, attended by twenty-five or twenty-six armed barks or
+frigates, commanded by an admiral named Nuno de Accunna, and
+having all red colours displayed, in token of defiance. When
+advised by the sabander to keep between us and the shore, he
+proudly answered, That he scorned to spend a week's provisions on
+his men in hindering us from trade, as he was able to force us to
+yield to his superior force in an hour. After three fights, they
+sent one of their frigates against us, manned with six or seven
+score of their best men, intending to set us on fire, but they
+were all sunk.</p>
+
+<p><i>Medhaphrabad</i>,[93] formerly a fine walled city, has been
+entirely ruined in the wars of the Moguls. It has still a strong
+castle, held by a refractory chief of the Rajapoots, and was
+besieged by the nabob, having fifty or sixty thousand men in his
+camp. The nabob dwelt in a magnificent tent, covered above with
+cloth of gold, and spread below with Turkey carpets, having
+declared he would not desist from the siege till he had won the
+castle. He sent a horse, and two vests wrought with silk and
+gold, to our general Captain Best, with four vests for four
+others. On the 23d and 24th of December, we fought again with the
+Portuguese, in view of the whole army of the Moguls, and forced
+them to cut their cables and flee from us, being better sailing
+vessels than ours.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 93: Called Madafaldebar in the preceding
+section, and there supposed to be the place now named Jaffrabat,
+on the coast of Guzerat.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I rode from Swally to Surat in a coach drawn by oxen, which
+are ordinarily used in this country for draught, though they have
+plenty of excellent and handsome horses. On the way I was quite
+delighted to see at the same time the goodliest spring and
+harvest combined I had ever seen any where, often in two
+adjoining fields, one as green as a fine meadow, and the other
+waving yellow like gold, and ready to cut down; their grain being
+wheat and rice, of which they make excellent bread. All along the
+road there were many goodly villages, full of trees which yield a
+liquor called <i>toddy</i>, or palm-wine, which is sweet and
+pleasant, like new wine, being strengthening and fattening. They
+have grapes also, yet only make wine from the dried raisins. In
+Surat there are many fair houses built of stone and brick, having
+flat roofs, and goodly gardens, abounding in pomegranates,
+pomecitrons, lemons, melons, and figs, which are to be had at all
+times of the year, the gardens being continually refreshed with
+curious springs and fountains of fresh water. The people are
+tali, neat, and well-clothed in long robes of white callico or
+silk, and are very grave and judicious in their behaviour. The
+sabander assured us that we had slain 350 of the Portuguese; but
+we heard afterwards, that above 500 were killed or maimed. Our
+general sent letters for England by land, but the messenger and
+his Indian attendant were poisoned by two friars. A second letter
+was entrusted to a mariner, which reached its destination.</p>
+
+<p>We anchored in the road of Acheen on the 12th April, 1613,
+where we were kindly received by the king. On the 2d of May, all
+the strangers then at Acheen were invited to a banquet at a place
+six miles from the town, and on this occasion two elephants were
+sent for our general. To this place all the dishes were brought
+by water by boys, who swam with one hand, while each carried a
+dish in--the other; and the drink was brought in the same manner.
+When the guests had satisfied themselves with tasting any of the
+dishes, which indeed they must of all, the remainder was thrown
+into the river. In this feast there were at least 500 dishes
+served, all well dressed. It continued from one o'clock till
+five; but our general, who was wearied with sitting so long in
+the water beside the king, was dismissed an hour before the other
+guests. The captain or chief merchant of the Dutch factory,
+either by taking too much strong drink, or from sitting too long
+in the cold water, caught an illness of which he died soon
+after.</p>
+
+<p>The 2d June we were entertained by a fight of four elephants
+with a wild tyger, which was tied to a stake; yet did he fasten
+on the legs and trunks of the elephants, making them to roar and
+bleed extremely. This day, as we were told, one eye of a nobleman
+was plucked out by command of the king, for having looked at one
+of the king's women, while bathing in the river. Another
+gentleman, wearing a sash, had his head cut round, because it was
+too large. Some he is said to throw into boiling oil, some to be
+sawn in pieces, others to have their legs cut off, or spitted
+alive, or empaled on stakes. The 25th of June, the king of Acheen
+sent our general a letter for the king of England, most
+beautifully written and painted, of which the following is a
+translation of the preamble.[94]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 94: Being merely complimentary, it has not
+been deemed necessary to give any more of this letter than the
+hyperbolical titles assumed by the petty Mallay
+rajah.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>PEDUCKA SIRIE, Sultan, King of kings renowned in war, sole
+king of Sumatra, more famous than his ancestors, feared in his
+dominions, and honoured in all the neighbouring countries. In
+whom is the true image of a king, reigning by the true rules of
+government, formed as it were of the most pure metal, and adorned
+by the must splendid colours. Whose seat is most high and
+complete; whence floweth, as a river of fine crystal, the pure
+and undefiled stream of bounty and justice. Whose presence is
+like the most pure gold: King of Priaman, and of the mountain of
+gold: Lord of nine sorts of precious stones: King of two
+Umbrellas of beaten gold; who sitteth upon golden carpets; the
+furniture of whose horses, and his own armour, are of pure gold;
+the teeth of his elephants being likewise of gold, and every
+thing belonging to them. His lances half gold half silver; his
+small shot of the same; a saddle also for an elephant of the
+same; a tent of silver; and all his seals half gold half silver.
+His bathing-vessels of pure gold; his sepulchre also entire gold,
+those of his predecessors being only half gold half silver. All
+the services of his table of pure gold; &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>This great king sendeth this letter of salutation to James,
+king of Great Britain, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>This king of Acheen is a gallant-looking warrior, of middle
+size, and full of spirit. His country is populous, and he is
+powerful both by sea and land. He has many elephants, of which we
+saw 150 or 180 at one time. His gallies are well armed with brass
+ordnance, such as demi-cannons, culverins, sackers, minions,
+&amp;c. His buildings are stately and spacious, though not
+strong; and his court or palace at Acheen is very pleasant,
+having a goodly branch of the main river surrounding and
+pervading it, which he cut and brought in from the distance of
+six miles in twenty days, while we were there. At taking leave,
+he desired our general to offer his compliments to the king of
+England, and to entreat that two white women might be sent him:
+"For," said he, "if I have a son by one of them, I will make him
+king of Priaman, Passaman, and the whole pepper coast; so that
+you shall not need to come any more to me, but may apply to your
+own English king for that commodity."</p>
+
+<p>S.2. <i>Notes concerning the Voyage, extracted from the
+Journal of Mr Robert Boner, who was Master of the Dragon</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The regular trade-wind is seldom met with till two or three
+degrees south of the equator. Tornados are sure to be encountered
+in two or three degrees north of the line, and sometimes even
+four degrees. It is necessary to use the utmost diligence in
+getting well to the south, as in that consists the difference
+between a good and bad voyage, and the health of the men depend
+greatly on that circumstance. In passing the line, it is proper
+so to direct the course from the island of Mayo as to cross
+between the longitudes of <i>seven</i> and <i>nine</i> degrees
+<i>west</i> of the Lizard, if possible. At all events be careful
+not to come within <i>six</i> degrees, for fear of the calms on
+the coast of Guinea, and not beyond <i>ten</i> degrees west from
+the Lizard if possible, to avoid the W.N.W. stream which sets
+along the coast of Brazil to the West Indies; and in crossing the
+line, in 7&deg;, 8&deg;, or 9&deg; west of the Lizard, you shall
+not fear the flats of Brazil: For the general wind in these
+longitudes is at E.S.E. or S.E. so that you may commonly make a
+S.S.W. course, so as to keep the ship full that she may go
+speedily through; for there is much loss of time in hauling the
+ship too close by the wind, and it is far better therefore to
+give her a fathom of the sheet.</p>
+
+<p>In making for the bay of Saldanha [<i>Table bay,</i>] keep
+between the latitudes of 33&deg; 50' and 34&deg; 20' of S. lat.
+so as to be sure of coming not much wide of the bay. If, on
+seeing the land, it appear high, you are then to the S.W. of the
+bay: if low sand-hills, you are then to the northward of the bay.
+In falling in with, the high land to the southward, which is
+between the Cape of Good Hope and the bay, the land trends N.N.W.
+and S.S.E. seven leagues from the Cape, and then trends away N.E.
+and S.W. towards the point of the Sugar-loaf, some four leagues.
+From this point of the <i>Sugar-loaf</i> lieth <i>Penguin</i>
+island; but keep fair by the point, as two miles from Penguin
+island there are two shoals. From the point to the island there
+are some seven or eight miles N. and S. and so, borrowing on that
+point, in eight or nine fathoms, steer a course S.E. and E.S.E.
+till you bring the <i>Table</i> S.S.W. and the <i>Sugar-loaf</i>
+S.W. by W. when you may anchor in 6 or 6 1/2 fathoms as you
+please; and then will the point of land by the <i>Sugar-loaf</i>
+bear W.N.W. some two leagues off, and <i>Penguin</i> island
+N.N.W. some three leagues distant. The latitude of the point
+going into the bay of Saldanha [<i>Table bay,</i>] is 34&deg; 5'
+S.[95] On coming in there is nothing to fear, though the air be
+thick, as the land is bold within a cable's length of the
+shore.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 95: Only 33&deg; 54'--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In my opinion, the current near Cape <i>Aguillas</i> sets to
+the southward not above fifty or sixty leagues from the land:
+Wherefore, in going to the eastwards, it is right to have sixty
+leagues from land, so that you may miss that current. For 90 or
+100 leagues beyond Cape <i>Aguillas</i>, the land trends E. by N.
+and not E.N.E. as in the charts.</p>
+
+<p>In my opinion the gulf of Cambaya is the worst place in all
+India for worms; wherefore ships going to Surat ought to use
+every precaution against injury from them. At Acheen our general
+was denominated <i>Arancaya Pattee</i> by the king, who showed
+him extraordinary favour, sending for him to be present at all
+sports and pastimes; and all our men were very kindly used by the
+people at this place, more so than any strangers who had ever
+been there before.</p>
+
+<p>S.3. <i>Extracts from a Treatise, written by Mr Nicholas
+Whittington, who was left as Factor in the Mogul Country by
+Captain Best, containing some of his Travels and
+Adventures</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The sheep at the Cape of Good Hope are covered with hair
+instead of wool. The beeves are large, but mostly lean. The
+natives of that southern extremity of Africa are negroes, having
+woolly heads, flat noses, and straight well-made bodies. The men
+have only one testicle, the other being cut out when very
+young.[96] Their apparel consists of a skin hung from their
+shoulders, reaching to their waist, and two small rat-skins, one
+before and the other behind, and all the rest of their body
+naked, except a kind of skin or leather-cap on their heads, and
+soles tied to their feet, considerably longer and broader than
+the foot. Their arms are very scanty, consisting of bows and
+arrows of very little force, and lances or darts very
+artificially made, in the use of which they are very expert, and
+even with them kill many fish. They are in use to wear the guts
+of sheep and oxen hanging from their necks, smelling most
+abominably, which they eat when hungry, and would scramble for
+our garbage like so many dogs, devouring it quite raw and
+foul.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 96: Captain Saris told me that some have
+two; but these are of the baser sort and slaves, as he was told
+by one of these marked by this note of
+gentility.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At Surat, although Sir Henry Middleton had taken their ships
+in the Red Sea, they promised to deal fairly with us, considering
+that otherwise they might burn their ships and give over all
+trade by sea, as <i>Mill Jaffed</i>, one of the chief merchants
+of Surat, acknowledged to us. While at Surat, every one of us
+that remained any time ashore was afflicted with the flux, of
+which Mr Aldworth was ill for forty days. The custom here is,
+that all strangers make presents on visiting any persons of
+condition, and they give other presents in return.</p>
+
+<p>Finding it impossible to have any trade at Surat, as the
+Portuguese craft infested the mouth of the river, our general
+removed with the ships to Swally roads, whence we might go and
+come by land without danger, between that place and Surat. Mr
+Canning had been made prisoner by the Portuguese, but the viceroy
+ordered him to be set ashore at Surat, saying, "Let him go and
+help his countrymen to fight, for we shall take their ships and
+all of them together." He was accordingly liberated, and came to
+us at Swally. The purser had likewise been nearly taken; but he
+escaped and got on board. The 3d October, <i>Seikh Shuffe</i>,
+governor of <i>Amadavar</i>, [Ahmedabad], the chief city of
+Guzerat, came to Surat and thence to Swally, where he entered
+into articles of agreement for trade and friendship.</p>
+
+<p>The 29th of October, four Portuguese galleons and a whole
+fleet of frigates, or armed grabs, hove in sight. Our general
+went immediately to meet them in the Dragon, and fired not one
+shot till he came between their admiral and vice-admiral, when he
+gave each of them a broadside and a volley of small arms, which
+made them come no nearer for that day. The other two galleons
+were not as yet come up, and our consort the Hosiander could not
+get clear of her anchors, so that she did not fire a shot that
+day. In the evening both sides came to anchor in the sight of
+each other. Next morning the fight was renewed, and this day the
+Hosiander bravely redeemed her yesterday's inactivity. The Dragon
+drove three of them aground, and the Hosiander so <i>danced the
+hay</i> about them, that they durst never show a man above
+hatches. They got afloat in the afternoon with the tide of flood,
+and renewed the fight till evening, and then anchored till next
+day. Next day, as the Dragon drew much water, and the bay was
+shallow, we removed to the other side of the bay at
+<i>Mendafrobay</i>, [Jaffrabat], where <i>Sardar Khan</i>, a
+great nobleman of the Moguls, was then besieging a castle of the
+<i>Rajaputs</i>, who, before the Mogul conquest, were the nobles
+of that country, and were now subsisting by robbery. He presented
+our general with a horse and furniture, which he afterwards gave
+to the governor of Gogo, a poor town to the west of Surat.</p>
+
+<p>After ten days stay, the Portuguese having refreshed, came
+hither to attack us. Sardar Khan advised our general to flee; but
+in four hours we drove them out of sight, in presence of
+thousands of the country people. After the razing of this castle,
+Sardar Khan reported this gallant action to the Great Mogul, who
+much admired it, as he thought none were like the Portuguese at
+sea. We returned to Swally on the 27th December, having only lost
+three men in action, and one had his arm shot off: while the
+Portuguese acknowledged to have lost 160, though report said
+their loss exceeded 300 men.</p>
+
+<p>The 13th January, 1613, I was appointed factor for the
+worshipful company, and bound under a penalty of four hundred
+pounds. Our ships departed on the 18th, the galleons not offering
+to disturb them: and at this time Anthony Starkey was ordered for
+England. Mr Canning was seventy days in going from Surat to Agra,
+during which journey he encountered many troubles, having been
+attacked by the way, and shot in the belly with an arrow, while
+another Englishman in his company was shot through the arm, and
+many of his peons were killed and wounded. Two of his English
+attendants quitted him, and returned to Surat, leaving only two
+musicians to attend upon him. He arrived at Agra on the 9th
+April, when he presented our king's letter to the Great Mogul,
+together with a present of little value; and being asked if this
+present came from our king, he answered that it only came from
+the merchants. The Mogul honoured him with a cup of wine from his
+own hand, and then referred him, on the business of his embassy,
+to Morak Khan. One of his musicians died, and was buried in the
+church-yard belonging to the Portuguese, who took up the body,
+and buried it in the highway; but on this being complained of to
+the king, they were commanded to bury him again, on penalty of
+being all banished the country, and of having all the bodies of
+their own dead thrown out from the church-yard. After this, Mr
+Canning wrote that he was in fear of being poisoned by the
+jesuits, and requested to have some one sent up to his
+assistance, which was accordingly agreed to by us at Surat. But
+Mr Canning; died on the 29th of May, and Mr Kerridge went up on
+the 22d of June.</p>
+
+<p>At this time I was to have been sent by the way of Mokha to
+England; but the master of the ship said it was impossible,
+except I were circumcised, to go so near Mecca. The 13th October,
+1613, the ship returned, and our messenger made prisoner at the
+bar of Surat by the Portuguese armed frigates, [grabs] worth an
+hundred thousand pounds, and seven hundred persons going to
+Goa.[97] This is likely to be of great injury here, for no
+Portuguese is now permitted to pass either in or out without a
+surety; and the Surat merchants are so impoverished, that our
+goods are left on our hands, so that we had to send them to
+Ahmedabad. John Alkin, who deserted from Sir Henry Middleton to
+the Portuguese, came to us at this time, and told us that several
+of their towns were besieged by the Decaners, and other
+neighbouring Moors, so that they had to send away many hundred
+Banians and others, that dwelt among them, owing to want of
+provisions; and indeed three barks came now with these people to
+Surat, and others of them went to Cambaya. Their weak behaviour
+in the sea-fight with us was the cause of all this.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 97: Probably owing to careless abridgement
+by Purchas, this passage is quite unintelligible. The meaning
+seems to be, That the ship in which was the English messenger,
+having a cargo worth 100,000<i>l</i>. sterling, and 700 persons
+aboard, bound on the pilgrimage to Mecca, was taken and carried
+into Goa.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>About this time also, Robert Claxon of the Dragon, who had
+deserted to the Portuguese for fear of punishment, came to us
+accompanied by a German who had been a slave among the Turks. One
+Robert Johnson, who was with the Portuguese, and meant to have
+come to us, was persuaded by another Englishman, while passing
+through the Decan, to turn mussulman, and remain in that country,
+where he got an allowance of seven shillings and sixpence a-day
+from the king, and his diet from the king's table. But he died
+eight days after being circumcised. Robert Trully, the musician,
+fell out with Mr Kerridge at Agra, and went to the king of Decan,
+carrying a German with him as interpreter. They both offered to
+turn Mahometans, and Trully, getting a new name at his
+circumcision, received a great allowance from the king, in whose
+service he continues; but the German, who had been, formerly
+circumcised in Persia, and now thought to have deceived the king,
+was not entertained; whereupon he returned to Agra, where he
+serves a Frenchman, and now goes to mass. Robert Claxon, above
+mentioned, had also turned Mahometan in the Decan, with a good
+allowance at court; but, not being contented, he came to Surat,
+where he was pitied by us for his seeming penitence; but being
+entrusted with upwards of forty pounds, under pretence of making
+purchases, he gave us the slip and returned to the Decan. Thus
+there are at present four English renegadoes in the Decan,
+besides many Portuguese. The 27th October, 1613, we received
+letters sent by Mr Gurney of Masulipatam, written by Captain
+Marlow of the ship Janus, informing us of his arrival and trade
+at that place.</p>
+
+<p>From Surat I went to <i>Periano</i>? three <i>coss</i>; thence
+to Cossumba, a small village, ten <i>coss</i>; and thence to
+Broach, ten <i>coss</i>. This is a very pretty city on a high
+hill, encompassed by a strong wall, and having a river running by
+as large as the Thames, in which were several ships of two
+hundred tons and upwards. Here are the best calicoes in the
+kingdom of Guzerat, and great store of cotton. From thence I went
+to <i>Saninga</i> [Sarang], ten coss; to <i>Carrou</i>? ten c.
+and then fourteen c. to <i>Boldia</i> [Brodrah], a smaller city
+than Broach, but well built, having a strong wall, and garrisoned
+by 3000 horse under <i>Mussuff Khan</i>. I went thence ten c. to
+a river named, the <i>Wussach</i>, [the Mahy?] where Mussuff was
+about to engage with the rajaputs who lay on the opposite side of
+the river, the chief of whom was of the race of the former kings
+of Surat. Thence other fourteen coss to <i>Niriand</i>,[Nariad] a
+large town where they make indigo; and thence, ten c. more to
+<i>Amadabar</i>, or Ahmedabad, the chief city of Guzerat, nearly
+as large as London, surrounded by a strong wall, and seated in a
+plain by the side of the river Mehindry. There are here many
+merchants, Mahometans, Pagans, and Christians; with great
+abundance of merchandize, which chiefly are indigo, cloth of
+gold, silver tissue, velvets, but nothing comparable to ours,
+taffeties, <i>gumbucks</i>, coloured <i>baffaties</i>, drugs,
+&amp;c. <i>Abdalla Khan</i> is governor of this place, who has
+the rank and pay of a commander of 5000 horse. From, thence, on
+my way to Cambay, I went seven c. to <i>Barengeo</i>, [Baregia]
+where every Tuesday a <i>cafilla</i> or caravan of merchants and
+travellers meet to go to Cambay, keeping together in a large
+company to protect themselves from robbers. From thence sixteen
+c. we came to Soquatera, a fine town with a strong garrison;
+whence we departed about midnight, and got to Cambay about eight
+next morning, the distance being ten <i>coss</i>.</p>
+
+<p>In November, we rode to <i>Sarkess</i>, three coss from
+Ahmedabad, where are the sepulchres of the Guzerat kings, the
+church and handsome tombs being kept in fine order, and many
+persons resort to see them from all parts of the kingdom. At the
+distance of a coss, there is a pleasant house with a large
+garden, a mile round, on the banks of the river, which
+<i>Chon-Chin-Naw</i>,[98] the greatest of the Mogul nobles, built
+in memory of the great victory he gained at this place over the
+last king of Guzerat, in which he took the king prisoner, and
+subjugated the kingdom. No person inhabits this house, and its
+orchard is kept by a few poor men. We lodged here one night, and
+sent for six fishermen, who in half an hour caught more fish for
+us than all our company could eat.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 98: This name seems strangely corrupted,
+more resembling the name of a Chinese leader than of a Mogul Khan
+or Amir. Perhaps it ought to have been
+Khan-Khanna.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 28th November, we received intelligence at Ahmedabad, that
+three English ships had arrived at <i>Larry Bunder</i>, the port
+town of <i>Guta-Negar-Tutla</i>, [Tatta] the chief city of
+<i>Sindy</i>. I was sent thither, and came on the 13th December
+to <i>Cassumparo</i>, where I overtook a cafilla or caravan
+travelling to <i>Rahdunpoor</i>, six days journey on my way. We
+went thence to <i>Callitalouny</i>, a fair castle; thence seven
+c. to <i>Callwalla</i>, a pretty village, given by the emperor
+Akbar to a company of women and their posterity for ever, to
+bring up their children in dancing and music. They exhibited
+their talents to our caravan, and every man made them some
+present, and then they openly asked if any of us wanted
+bedfellows. On the 16th we went eight <i>coss</i> to
+<i>Cartya</i>, where is a well-garrisoned fortress. We remained
+here till the 18th, waiting for another caravan for fear of
+thieves, and then went to <i>Deccanaura</i>,[99] on which day our
+camel was stolen and one of our men was slain. The 19th we
+travelled ten c. to <i>Bollodo</i>, a fort held by <i>Newlock
+Abram Cabrate</i> for the Mogul, and who that day brought in 169
+heads of the Coolies, a plundering tribe. The 20th in thirteen c.
+we came to a fort named <i>Sariandgo</i>, and the 21st in ten c.
+we arrived at <i>Rhadunpoor</i>, a large town with a fort. We
+remained here till the 23d, to provide water and other
+necessaries for our journey through the desert.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 99: It singularly happens, in the excellent
+map of Hindoostan by Arrowsmith, that none of the stages between
+Ahmedabad and Rahdunpoor are laid down, unless possibly
+<i>Decabarah</i> of the map may be <i>Decanauru</i> of the text;
+while Mr Arrowsmith actually inserts on his map the route of
+Whittington across the sandy desert of Cutch, between Rahdunpoor
+and the eastern branch of the Indus, or <i>Nulla Sunkra</i>, and
+thence through the Delta to Tatta.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 23d, leaving Rhadunpoor, we travelled seven coss, and lay
+all night in the fields, having that day met a caravan coming
+from Tatta that had been plundered of every thing. On the 24th I
+sent off one of my peons with a letter to Larry Bunder, who
+promised to be there in ten days, but I think he was slain by the
+way; we went twelve c. that day. The 25th we travelled fourteen
+c. and lodged by a well, the water of which was so salt that our
+cattle would not drink it. The 26th ten c. to such another well,
+where our camels took water, not having had any for three days.
+The 27th after fourteen c. we lodged on the ground; and the 28th,
+in ten c. we came to a village called <i>Negar Parkar</i>. In
+this desert we saw great numbers, of wild asses, red deer, foxes,
+and other wild animals. We stopt all the 29th, and met another
+caravan, that had been robbed within two days journey of Tatta.
+<i>Parkar</i> pays tribute yearly to the Mogul; but all the
+people from thence to <i>Inno</i>, half a day's journey from
+Tatta, acknowledge no king, but rob and spare at their pleasure.
+When any of the Moguls come among them, they set their own houses
+on fire, and flee into the mountains; and as their houses are
+only built of straw and mortar, they are soon rebuilt. They exact
+customs at their pleasure, and even guard passengers through the
+desert, not willing they should be robbed by any but themselves.
+The 30th we left Parkar, and after travelling six coss, we lay at
+a tank or pond of fresh water. The 31st we travelled eight c. and
+lay in the fields beside a brackish well. The 1st January, 1614,
+we went ten c. to <i>Burdiano</i>, and though many were sick of
+this water, we had to provide ourselves with a supply for four
+days. The 2d we travelled all night eighteen c. The 3d, from
+afternoon till midnight, we went ten c. The 4th twelve c. This
+day I fell sick and vomited, owing to the bad water. The 5th,
+after seven c. we came to three wells, two of them salt and one
+sweetish. The 6th, having travelled ten c. we came to
+<i>Nuraquimire</i>, a pretty town, where our company from
+Rhadunpoor left us. We who remained were two merchants and myself
+with five of their servants, four of mine, ten camels, and five
+camel-drivers.</p>
+
+<p>This town of <i>Nuraquimire</i> is within three days journey
+of Tatta, and to us, after coming out of the desert, seemed quite
+a paradise. We agreed with a kinsman of the Rajah, or governor,
+for twenty <i>laries</i>, or shillings, to conduct us on the
+remainder of our journey. We accordingly departed on the 8th, and
+travelled ten c. to <i>Gaundajaw</i>, where we had been robbed
+but for our guard. The 9th we were twice set upon, and obliged to
+give each time five <i>laries</i> to get free. We came to
+<i>Sarruna</i>, a great town of the <i>rajputs</i> with a castle,
+fourteen <i>coss</i> from Tatta. We visited the governor,
+<i>Ragee Bouma</i>, eldest son to sultan <i>Bulbul</i>, who was
+lately captured by the Moguls and had his eyes pulled out, yet
+had escaped about two months ago, and was now living in the
+mountains inviting all his kindred to revenge. The <i>Ragee</i>
+treated me kindly as a stranger, asking me many questions about
+my country. He even made me sup with him, and gave me much wine,
+in which he so heartily partook, that he stared again. A banian
+at this place told me that Sir Robert Sherly had been much abused
+by the Portuguese and the governor of <i>Larry Bunder</i>, having
+his house set on fire, and his men much hurt in the night; and
+that on his arrival at Tatta, thirteen days journey from thence,
+he had been unkindly used by the governor of that city. He
+likewise told me of the great trade carried on at Tatta, and that
+ships of 300 tons might be brought up to Larry Bunder; and
+advised me to prevail upon <i>Ragee Bouma</i> to escort us to
+Tatta.</p>
+
+<p>According to this bad advice, we hired the <i>Ragee</i> for
+forty <i>laries</i> to escort us with fifty horsemen to the gates
+of Tatta. We departed from <i>Sarruna</i> on the 11th January,
+and having travelled five coss we lay all night by the side of a
+river. Departing at two next morning, the Ragee led us in a
+direction quite different from our right road, and came about
+daybreak into a thicket, where he made us all be disarmed and
+bound, and immediately strangled the two merchants and their five
+men by means of their camel ropes. After stripping them of all
+their clothes, he caused their bodies to be flung into a hole dug
+on purpose. He then took my horse and eighty rupees from me, and
+sent me and my men up the mountains to his brothers, at the
+distance of twenty coss, where we arrived on the 14th, and where
+I remained twenty days a close prisoner. On the 7th February, an
+order came to send me to <i>Parkar</i>, the governor of which
+place was of their kindred, and that I should be sent from thence
+to Rhadunpoor; but I was plundered on the way of my clothes and
+every thing else about me, my horse only being left me, which was
+not worth taking away.</p>
+
+<p>Arriving at Parkar on the 28th February, and finding the
+inhabitants charitable, we were reduced to the necessity of
+begging victuals; and actually procured four mahmoodies by that
+means, equal to as many shillings. But having the good fortune to
+meet a banian of Ahmedabad, whom I had formerly known, he
+relieved me and my men. We were five days in travelling from
+Parkar to Rhadunpoor, where I arrived on the 19th March, and went
+thence to Ahmedabad on the 2d April, after an absence of 111
+days. Thence to Brodia and Barengeo, thence sixteen c. to
+Soquatera, and ten c. to Cambay. We here crossed the large river,
+which is seven coss in breadth,[100] and where many hundreds are
+swallowed up yearly. On the other side of the river we came to
+<i>Saurau</i>,[101] where is a town and castle of the
+<i>razbootches</i> or rajputs. The 16th of April I travelled
+twenty-five coss to Broach. The 17th I passed the river
+[Narbuddah], and went ten c. to <i>Cossumba</i>; and on the 18th
+thirteen c. to Surat.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 100: The great river in the text is
+assuredly the upper part of the gulf of Cambay, where the tide
+sets in with prodigious rapidity, entering almost at once with a
+vast wave or bore, as described on a former occasion in the
+Portuguese voyages.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 101: Probably Sarrode, on the south side of
+the entry of the river Mahy.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>According to general report, there is no city of greater trade
+in all the Indies than Tatta in Sinde; its chief port being Larry
+Bunder, three days journey nearer the mouth of the river. There
+is a good road without the river's mouth, said to be free from
+worms; which, about Surat especially, and in other parts of
+India, are in such abundance, that after three or four months
+riding, were it not for the sheathing, ships would be rendered
+incapable of going to sea. The ports and roads of Sinde are said
+to be free. From Tatta they go in two months by water to Lahore,
+and return down the river in one. The commodities there are
+<i>baffatys</i>, stuffs, <i>lawns</i> [muslins], coarse indigo,
+not so good as that of Biana. Goods, may be carried from Agra on
+camels in twenty days to <i>Bucker</i> on the river Indus, and
+thence in fifteen or sixteen days aboard the ships at the mouth
+of the Indus. One may travel as soon from Agra to Sinde as to
+Surat, but there is more thieving on the Sinde road, in spite of
+every effort of the Mogul government to prevent it.</p>
+
+<p>The inhabitants of Sinde consist mostly of Rajputs, Banians,
+and Baloches, the governors of the cities and large towns being
+Moguls. The country people are rude; going naked from the waist
+upwards, and wear turbans quite different from the fashion of the
+Moguls. Their arms are swords, bucklers, and lances; their
+bucklers being large and shaped like bee-hives, in which they are
+in use to give their camels drink, and their horses provender.
+Their horses are good, strong, and swift, and though unshod, they
+ride them furiously, backing them at a year old. The Rajputs eat
+no beef or buffalo flesh, even worshipping them; and the Moguls
+say that the Rajputs know how to die as well as any in the world.
+The Banians kill nothing, and are said to be divided into more
+than thirty different casts, that differ somewhat among them in
+matters of religion, and may not eat with each other. All burn
+their dead; and when the husband dies, the widow shaves her head,
+and wears her jewels no more, continuing this state of mourning
+as long as she lives.</p>
+
+<p>When a Rajput dies, his wife accompanies his body to the
+funeral pile in her best array, attended by all her friends and
+kindred, and by music. When the funeral pile is set on fire, she
+walks round it two or three times, bewailing the death of her
+husband, and then rejoicing that she is now to live with him
+again: After which, embracing her friends, she sits down on the
+top of the pile among dry wood, taking her husband's head on her
+lap, and orders fire to be put to the pile; which done, her
+friends throw oil upon her and sweet perfumes, while she endures
+the fire with wonderful fortitude, loose not bound. I have seen
+many instances of this. The first I ever saw was at Surat, the
+widow being a virgin of ten years old, and her affianced husband
+being a soldier slain in the wars at a distance, whence his
+clothes and turban were sent to her, and she insisted on burning
+herself along with these. The governor refused to give her
+permission, which she took grievously to heart, and insisted on
+being burnt; but they durst not, till her kindred procured leave
+by giving the governor a present, to her great joy. The kindred
+of the husband never force this, but the widow esteems it a
+disgrace to her family not to comply with this custom, which they
+may refrain from if they choose: But then they must shave their
+heads, and break all their ornaments, and are never afterwards
+allowed to eat, drink, sleep, or keep company with any one all
+the rest of their lives. If, after agreeing to burn, a woman
+should leap out of the fire, her own parents would bind her and
+throw her in again by force; but this weakness is seldom
+seen.</p>
+
+<p>The Banian marriages are made at the age of three years or
+even under; and two pregnant women sometimes enter into mutual
+promises, if one of their children should prove male and the
+other female, to unite them in marriage. But these marriages are
+always in the same cast and religion, and in the same trade and
+occupation; as the son of a barber with the daughter of a barber,
+and so on. When the affianced couple reach three years of age,
+the parents make a great feast, and set the young couple on
+horseback dressed in their best clothes, a man sitting behind
+each to hold them on. They are then led about the city in
+procession, according to their state and condition, accompanied
+by bramins or priests and many others, who conduct them to the
+pagoda or temple; and after going through certain ceremonies
+there, they are led home, and feasts are given for several days,
+as they are able. When ten years of age, the marriage is
+consummated. The reason they assign for these early marriages is,
+that they may not be left wifeless, in case their parents should
+die. Their bramins are esteemed exceedingly holy, and have the
+charge of their pagodas or idol temples, having alms and tithes
+for their maintenance; yet they marry, and follow occupations,
+being good workmen and ready to learn any pattern. They eat but
+once a day, washing their whole bodies before and after meat, and
+use ablutions after the natural evacuations.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>Baloches</i> are Mahometans, who deal much in camels,
+and are mostly robbers by land or on the rivers, murdering all
+they rob; yet are there very honest men among them in Guzerat and
+about Agra. While I was in Sinde, they took a boat with seven
+Italians and a Portuguese friar, all the rest being slain in
+fight. This was ripped up by them in search of gold.[102]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 102: This is obscurely expressed, leaving
+it uncertain <i>what</i> was ripped up in search of gold: The
+boat, the bodies of the slain, or the
+prisoners.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>John Mildnall, or Mildenhall, an Englishman, had been employed
+with three other young Englishmen, whom he poisoned in Persia, to
+make himself master of the goods. He was himself also poisoned,
+yet, by means of preservatives, he lived many months afterwards,
+though exceedingly swelled, and so came to Agra with the value of
+20,000 dollars. On this occasion I went from Surat for Agra, on
+the 14th May, 1614. I arrived first at <i>Bramport</i>,
+[Bushanpoor] where Sultan <i>Parvis</i> lives, situated in a
+plain on the river <i>Taptee</i> or of Surat, which is there of
+great breadth, and at this place there is a large castle. Thence
+I went to Agra in twenty-six days, having travelled the whole way
+from Surat to Agra, which is 700 coss or 1010 English miles, in
+thirty-seven days of winter, during which time it rained almost
+continually. From Surat to Burhanpoor is a pleasant champain
+country, well watered with rivers, brooks, and springs. Between
+Burhanpoor and Agra the country is very mountainous, not passable
+with a coach, and scarcely to be travelled on camels. The nearest
+way is by <i>Mando</i>, passing many towns and cities on every
+day's journey, with many high hills and strong castles, the whole
+country being well inhabited, very peaceable, and clear of
+thieves.</p>
+
+<p>Agra is a very large town, its wall being two coss in circuit,
+the fairest and highest I ever saw, and well replenished with
+ordnance; the rest of the city being ruinous, except the houses
+of the nobles, which are pleasantly situated on the river. The
+ancient royal seat was <i>Fatipoor</i>, twelve coss from Agra,
+but is now fallen into decay. Between these two is the sepulchre
+of the king's father, to which nothing I ever saw is comparable:
+yet the church or mosque of <i>Fatipoor</i> comes near it, both
+being built according to the rules of architecture. In Agra the
+Jesuits have a house and a handsome church, built by the Great
+Mogul, who allows their chief seven rupees a-day, and all the
+rest three, with licence to convert as many as they can: But
+alas! these converts were only for the sake of money; for when,
+by order of the Portuguese, the new converts were deprived of
+their pay, they brought back their beads again, saying they had
+been long without pay, and would be Christians no longer. In
+consequence of the Portuguese refusing to deliver back the goods
+taken at Surat, the king ordered the church doors to be locked up
+and they have so continued ever since; so the <i>padres</i> make
+a church of one of their chambers, where they celebrate mass
+twice a day, and preach every Sunday, first in Persian to the
+Armenians and Moors, and afterwards in Portuguese for themselves,
+the Italians, and Greeks.</p>
+
+<p>By them I was informed of the particulars of Mildenhall's
+goods, who had given them all to a French protestant, though
+himself a papist, that he might marry a bastard daughter he had
+left in Persia, and bring up another. The Frenchman refusing to
+make restitution, was thrown into prison and after four months
+all was delivered up.</p>
+
+<p>Between Agumere and Agra, at every ten <i>coss</i>, being an
+ordinary day's journey, there is a <i>Serai</i> or lodging house
+for men and horses, with hostesses to dress your victuals if you
+please, paying a matter of three-pence for dressing provisions
+both for man and horse. And between these two places, which are
+120 coss distant, there is a pillar erected at every <i>coss</i>,
+and a fair house every ten coss, built by Akbar, on occasion of
+making a pilgrimage on foot from Agra to Agimere, saying his
+prayers at the end of every coss. These houses serve for
+accommodating the king and his women, no one else being allowed
+to use them. The king resides at Agimere on occasion of wars with
+<i>Rabna</i>, a rajput chief, who has now done homage, so that
+there is peace between them. I made an excursion to the Ganges,
+which is two days journey from Agra. The Banians carry the water
+of the Ganges to the distance of many hundred miles, affirming
+that it never corrupts, though kept for any length of time. A
+large river, called the <i>Geminie</i> [Jumna], passes by
+Agra.</p>
+
+<p>On the 24th of May, 1616, while on our voyage home to England,
+we went into Suldunha bay, where were several English ships
+outwards bound, namely, the Charles, Unicorn, Janus, Globe, and
+Swan, the general being Mr Benjamin Joseph. We arrived safe at
+Dover on the 15th September, 1616.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>John Mildenhall, mentioned in the foregoing article, left
+England on the 12th February, 1600, and went by Constantinople,
+Scanderoon, Aleppo, Bir, Caracmit, Bitelis, Cashbin, Ispahan,
+Yezd, Kerman, and Sigistan, to Candhar; and thence to Lahore,
+where he arrived in 1603. He appears to have carried letters from
+Queen Elizabeth to the Great Mogul, by whom he was well received,
+and procured from him letters of privilege for trade in the Mogul
+dominions. He thence returned into Persia, whence he wrote to one
+Mr Richard Staper from Cashbin, on the 3d October, 1606, giving
+some account of his travels, and of his negociations at the court
+of the Mogul. This letter, and a short recital of the first two
+years of his peregrinations, are published in the Pilgrims, vol.
+I. pp. 114--116, but have not been deemed of sufficient
+importance for insertion in this collection.--E.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIX.</p>
+
+<p><i>Eleventh Voyage of the East India Company, in 1612, in the
+Salomon</i>.[103]</p>
+
+<p>We sailed from Gravesend on the 1st February, 1611, according
+to the computation of the church of England, or 1612 as reckoned
+by others. We were four ships in company, which were counted as
+three separate voyages, because directed to several parts of
+India: The James, which was reckoned the <i>ninth</i> voyage, the
+Dragon and Hosiander the <i>tenth</i>, and our ship, the Salomon,
+as the <i>eleventh</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 103: Purch. Pilgr. I. 486. This unimportant
+voyage is only preserved, for the sake of continuing the regular
+series of voyages which contributed to the establishment of the
+East India Company. We learn from Purchas that it was written by
+Ralph Wilson, one of the mates in the Salomon, who never mentions
+the name of his captain. This voyage, as given by Purchas,
+contains very little information, and is therefore here abridged,
+though not extending to two folio pages in the
+Pilgrims.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I would advise such as go from Saldanha bay with the wind at
+E. or S.E. to get to a considerable distance from the land before
+standing southwards, as otherwise the high lands at the Cape will
+take the wind from them; and if becalmed, one may be much
+troubled, as there is commonly in these parts a heavy sea coming
+from the west. Likewise, the current sets in for the shore, if
+the wind has been at N.N.W. or W. or S.S.W. And also the shore is
+so bold that no anchorage can be had.</p>
+
+<p>The 18th October, we espied the land, being near
+<i>Celeber</i> in the island of Sumatra, in about 3&deg; of south
+latitude. The 2d November, coming between Java and a ragged
+island to the westwards of the point of <i>Palimbangan</i>, we
+met a great tide running out so fast that we could hardly stem it
+with the aid of a stiff gale. When afterwards the gale slacked,
+we came to anchor, and I found the tide to run three 1/2 leagues
+in one watch. I noticed that this tide set outwards during the
+day, and inwards through the night. This day at noon the point of
+Palimbangan bore N.E. by E. three leagues off, and from thence to
+the road of Bantam is five leagues, S.S.E. 1/3 E. The latitude of
+Bantam is 6&deg; 10' S. and the long. 145&deg; 2' E. This however
+is rather too much easterly, as I think the true longitude of
+Bantam is 144&deg; E. from Flores.[104]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 104: The long. of Bantam is 106&deg; E.
+from Greenwich. That in the text appears to have been estimated
+from the island of Flores, which is 31&deg; 20' W. from
+Greenwich, so that the longitude of Bantam ought to have been
+stated as 137&deg; 20' E. from Flores, making an error of excess
+in the text of seven or eight degrees.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 7th March, at five p.m. while in lat. 20&deg; 34' S. we
+descried land nine leagues off, N.E. 1/2 N. The S.E. part of this
+island is somewhat high, but falleth down with a low point. The
+W. part is not very high, but flat and smooth towards the end,
+and falls right down. The south and west parts of this island is
+all surrounded with shoals and broken ground, and we did not see
+the other sides; yet it seemed as if it had good refreshments.
+The longitude of this island is 104&deg; from Flores, but by my
+computation 107&deg;.[105] In these long voyages, we do not rely
+altogether on our reckoning, but use our best diligence for
+discovering the true longitudes, which are of infinite importance
+to direct our course aright.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 105: No island is to be found in the
+latitude and longitude indicated in the text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION XX.</p>
+
+<p><i>The Twelfth Voyage of the East India Company, in 1613, by
+Captain Christopher Newport</i>.[106]</p>
+
+<p>The full title of this voyage, as given in the Pilgrims, is as
+follows:--"A Journal of all principal Matters passed in the
+Twelfth Voyage to the East India, observed by me <i>Walter
+Payton</i>, in the good ship the <i>Expedition</i>.--Whereof Mr
+<i>Christopher Newport</i> was captain, being set out <i>Anno</i>
+1612. Written by the said <i>Walter Payton</i>." The date of the
+year of this voyage, according to our present mode of
+computation, was 1613, as formerly explained at large, the year
+being then computed to commence on the 25th March, instead of the
+1st January.--E.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 106: Purch. Pilgr. I. 488.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.1. <i>Observations at St Augustine, Mohelia, and divers
+Parts of Arabia</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The 7th January, 1613, we sailed from Gravesend for India, in
+the good ship Expedition of London, about the burden of 260 tons,
+and carrying fifty-six persons; besides the Persian ambassador
+and his suite, of whom there were fifteen persons, whom we were
+ordered to transport to the kingdom of Persia, at the cost of the
+worshipful company. The names of the ambassador and his people
+were these. Sir Robert Sherley the ambassador, and his lady,
+named Teresha, a Circassian; Sir Thomas Powell, and his lady,
+called Tomasin, a Persian; a Persian woman, named Leylye; Mr
+Morgan Powell; Captain John Ward; Mr Francis Bubb, secretary; Mr
+John Barbar, apothecary; John Herriot, a musician; John Georgson,
+goldsmith, a Dutchman; Gabriel, an old Armenian; and three
+Persians, named Nazerbeg, Scanderbeg, and Molhter.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 26th April; we fell in with a part of
+the land of Ethiopia, [Southern Africa,] close adjoining to which
+is a small island, called <i>Conie island</i>, [Dassen island]
+all low land, and bordered by many dangerous rocks to seawards.
+It is in the lat. of 33&deg; 30' S. The wind falling short, we
+were constrained to anchor between that island and the main,
+where we had very good ground in nineteen or twenty fathoms. We
+sent our boat to the island, where we found Penguins, geese, and
+other fowls, and seals in great abundance; of all which we took
+as many as we pleased for our refreshment. By a carved board, we
+observed that the Hollanders had been there, who make great store
+of train-oil from the seals. They had left behind them the
+implements of their work, together with a great copper cauldron
+standing on a furnace, the cauldron being full of oil; all which
+we left as we found them.</p>
+
+<p>Having spent two days here at anchor, and the wind coming
+favourable, we weighed and proceeded for the Cape of Good Hope,
+and arrived, by God's grace, at Saldanha on the 30th of April,
+where we found six ships at anchor. Two of these, the Hector and
+James, were English, and the other four Hollanders, all homeward
+bound. We here watered, and refreshed ourselves well with
+reasonable abundance of the country sheep and beeves, which were
+bought from the natives, and plenty of fresh fish, which we
+caught with our seyne. The 10th May the Pepper-corn arrived here,
+likewise homewards bound; and as she was but ill provided with
+necessaries, we supplied her from our scanty store as well as we
+could spare.</p>
+
+<p>Being all ready to depart with the first fair wind, which,
+happened on the 15th May, we then sailed altogether from the bay,
+taking leave according to the custom of the sea, and we directed
+our course for St Augustine. In our way we had sight of <i>Capo
+do Arecife</i>,[107] part of the main land of Africa, in lat.
+33&deg; 25' S. on the 24th May, the compass there varying 6&deg;
+9'. The 15th June we got sight of the island of St Lawrence or
+Madagascar, and on the 17th came to anchor close beside port St
+Augustine, meaning to search the soundings and entrance into the
+bay before we went in, as there was no one in the ship well
+acquainted with it. Having done this, we went in next day, and
+came to anchor in ten fathoms, yet our ship rode in forty
+fathoms. We had here wood and water, and great abundance of fresh
+fish, which we caught in such quantities with the seyne as might
+have served for six ships companies, instead of our own. But we
+could get no cattle from the natives, who seemed to be afraid of
+us; for, though they came once to us, and promised to bring us
+cattle next day, they seemed to have said so as a cover for
+driving away their cattle, in which they were employed in the
+interim, and they came no more near us. Some days after, we
+marched into the woods with forty musketeers, to endeavour to
+discover some of the natives, that we might buy cattle; but we
+only found empty houses, made of canes, whence we could see the
+people had only gone away very recently, as their fires were
+still burning, and the scales of fish they had been broiling were
+lying about. We also saw the foot-marks of many cattle, which had
+been there not long before, and had to return empty handed.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 107: The latitude in the text indicates
+Burtrenhook, near the mouth of the Groot river, this being
+probably the Dutch name, while that in the text is the
+Portuguese.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The entry into the port of St Augustine resembles that of
+Dartmouth haven; and on going in, you must bring the wood, called
+Westminster-hall, to which it has some resemblance, to bear N.E.
+by E. and then steer due E. borrowing a little towards the south
+side of the bay, where your soundings will be thirteen, nine,
+eight, and seven fathoms, all good ground, till you be shut
+within the shoal. After this you have deep water till you come
+into the road, and then have seven, eight, and ten fathoms. But
+if you go too far behind the hill on the larboard hand, which
+resembles an old barn, you shall then have thirty and forty
+fathoms. St Augustine is in lat 23&deg; 30' S. the var. being
+15&deg; 40'.[108]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 108: Long. 44&deg; 20' E. from
+Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We sailed from St Augustine on the 23d June, directing our
+course for the island of Mohelia, and on the 3d July we had sight
+of an island called Juan, nine or ten leagues E. by S. from
+Mohelia. We came also this day to anchor at Mohelia, between it
+and some broken land off its southern side. We had here great
+abundance of refreshments, and very cheap; for we bought five
+bullocks in exchange for one Levant sword, and had goats, hens,
+pine-apples, cocoa-nuts, plantains, oranges, lemons, and limes,
+for trifles worth little. Such bullocks as we had for money cost
+a dollar each, or ten pieces of 4-1/2d.; at which rate we
+purchased forty-one beeves. The natives of this island are
+chiefly Moors [negroes], but there are Arabians, Turks, and
+others also among them; and they are much engaged in wars with
+the people of <i>Juan</i>, [Hinznan or Johanna,] and Comoro
+islands in their neighbourhood. They told us that the king of the
+island died the day we arrived, being succeeded by his son,
+<i>Phanehomale</i>, who was only of tender years, and was to
+reign under the protection of the queen his mother. His
+brother-in-law, as chief man, accompanied by several other people
+of condition, came down to bid us welcome, and used us very
+kindly. Both he and many others of the islanders spoke tolerably
+good Portuguese, so that I had much conversation with them, and
+was informed of every thing I wished to know.</p>
+
+<p>In this island they build barks, in which they trade along the
+coast of Melinda and Arabia, disposing of slaves and fruit, by
+which means they supply themselves with dollars, and with such
+articles as they need. I suspect also that they have some
+dealings with the Portuguese, but they would not let us know
+this, lest we might suspect them of treachery. They told me that
+we were welcome, and that the whole island was at our command to
+do us service; but, if we had been Portuguese, they would have
+put us all to the sword. In my opinion, however, it would be
+dangerous to repose too much confidence in them. The king's
+brother-in-law shewed me a letter of recommendation of the place,
+written in Dutch, and left there by a Hollander; and he requested
+of us to leave a letter to the same purport, certifying their
+honest and friendly dealings, that they might be able to show to
+others of our nation. To this we consented, and I gave them a
+writing, sealed by our captain, expressing the good entertainment
+we had received, and the prices of provisions; yet recommending
+to our countrymen, not to trust them any farther than might seem
+consistent with their own safety. They speak a kind of Moorish
+language, somewhat difficult to learn; so that I could only pick
+up the few words following, which may serve to ask for provisions
+and fruits, by such as do not understand Portuguese, or in
+speaking to any of the natives who have not that language.</p>
+
+<p><i>Gumbey</i>, a bullock. <i>Buze</i>, a goat. <i>Coquo</i>, a
+hen. <i>Sinzano</i>, a needle. <i>Seiavoye</i>, cocoa-nuts.
+<i>Demon</i>, lemons. <i>Mage</i>, water. <i>Surra</i>, a kind of
+drink. <i>Soutan</i>, the king. <i>Quename</i>, a pine-apple.
+<i>Cartassa</i>, paper. <i>Tudah</i>, oranges. <i>Arembo</i>,
+bracelets. <i>Figo</i>, plantains.</p>
+
+<p>This island of Mohelia is in lat 12&deg; 10' S.[109] and has
+good anchorage in its road in forty fathoms. Having watered and
+refreshed ourselves sufficiently, we sailed from thence on the
+10th of July, directing our course for the island of Socotora.
+The 19th we passed to the north of the equator; and on the 25th
+we had sight of land, which we supposed to have been Cape
+Guardafui, at the entrance into the Red Sea; and so, taking a
+departure for Socotora, we were unable to find it. We were
+therefore obliged to consider how we might shelter ourselves
+against the fury of the winter in these parts, and also to
+procure refreshments; wherefore we determined to sail for the
+islands of <i>Curia Muria</i>, which are in about the latitude of
+18&deg; N.[110] over against the desert of <i>Arabia Felix</i>.
+In our way; the weather was continually so foggy, that we were
+unable at any time to see half an English mile before us, such
+being usual in these seas in the months of July, August, and
+September. In all this time both the sun and stars were so
+continually obscured, that we were never able to get an
+observation, by which to regulate or correct our dead reckoning;
+but, God being our guide, we at length groped out the land by
+means of the lead. We could now clearly perceive the colour of
+the water to be changed to white, with many yellow grassy weeds
+floating on the surface; and heaving the lead continually as we
+advanced, we at length struck ground in forty-three fathoms.
+Proceeding nearer the land, our sounding lessened to twenty-two
+fathoms, when we anchored on good ground; and though we
+distinctly heard the rut of the shore at no great distance, we
+could not perceive the land till next day, when the weather was
+somewhat clearer. We then sent our skiff in shore, to see if any
+place could be discovered of more security for our ship to ride
+in; but, on account of the great sea that came rolling into the
+bay, the surge was so violent that they could not come near the
+shore, and had to return as they went; only that they had been
+able to descry some fair stone-houses by the sea-side, which
+proved to be <i>Doffar</i>, in Arabia Felix.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 109: Lat. 13&deg; 35' S. Long. 45&deg; 30'
+E. from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 110: These islands are at the mouth of a
+bay of the same name on the oceanic coast of that portion of
+Arabia named Mahra, in long, 55&deg; 30' E. from
+Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When God sent us a little clear weather, we could perceive a
+high cape on the western side of the bay, which we discovered
+from our skiff the second time it was sent, and could plainly see
+that it formed a very good road for all kinds of winds, except
+between the E. and S. by E. points. We were thankful to God for
+this discovery, and warped our ship to that road, with much toil
+to our men, as it was six or seven leagues from the place where
+we had anchored. On the 3d of August, having brought our ship to
+anchor in that road, we went ashore in the boat to a little
+village by the sea-side, called <i>Resoit</i>, inhabited mostly
+by Arabian fishermen, who entertained us kindly, and gave us all
+the information we desired respecting the country. The governor
+also of <i>Doffar</i> came down to us, whose name was <i>Mir
+Mahommed Madoffar</i>, who bade us kindly welcome, and presented
+us with three bullocks, and some sheep, goats, hens, sugar-canes,
+plantains, cocoa-nuts, and the like. In return we made him a
+present of a fine damasked fowling-piece, double lockt, which he
+greatly admired. He appeared to desire our friendship as much as
+we did his; and he gave us licence to land at all times when we
+were inclined. He also gave orders to have a market established
+for us at the village of Resoit, that we might be supplied with
+every kind of provision that the country affords. Their cattle
+were both dear and lean, and fresh water so scarce, bad, and
+difficult to be had, that we were forced to hire the natives to
+bring it down to us in skins from a distance, paying them at the
+rate of twenty-four shillings for the fill of five pipes.</p>
+
+<p>Before leaving this place, Mir Mahommed desired us to leave a
+writing of commendation in his favour, specifying the kind and
+good entertainment we had received. This was accordingly granted,
+and I wrote it upon parchment, beginning it in large letters, the
+purport being similar to that granted at Mohelia, and this also
+was signed by the captain. The governor also sent us three notes
+signed by himself, for the purpose of being given by us to other
+ships, if they should happen to come upon this part of the coast,
+as we had been constrained to do, by which he might know our
+ships from those of other nations, and give them good
+entertainment accordingly. Cape <i>Resoit</i> is in lat. 16&deg;
+38' N. and has good anchorage in 5-1/2 or 6 fathoms.</p>
+
+<p>The 28th August, we set sail from thence, directing our course
+for the coast of Persia, coasting along the oceanic shore of
+Arabia; it being our chiefest object to set the lord ambassador
+on shore, as, by reason of the news we had received at the Cape
+of Good Hope, our expectations of trade at Surat, Dabul, and all
+other parts thereabouts, were frustrated. The 2d September, we
+sailed close beside an island on the coast of Arabia, called
+<i>Macyra</i>, in lat. 20&deg; 30' N. And on the 4th of that
+month we passed the eastermost point of Arabia, called Cape
+<i>Rassalgat</i>, in lat. 22&deg; 34' N.[111]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 111: This Cape is in lat. 23&deg; N. and
+long. 58&deg; 45'E. from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p><i>Note</i>.--In explanation of the disappointment of trade at
+Surat, &amp;c. there is the following marginal note in the
+Pilgrims, vol. I. p. 490.--"These news at the Cape were, Captain
+Hawkins coming away in disgust, as denied leave to trade; the
+English being often wronged by the Mogul, in frequent breach of
+promise, as already shewn; for which they forced a trade in the
+Red Sea on the Mogul subjects. Which afterwards procured the
+privileges granted to Captain Best, as already related, lest the
+Moguls should have the sea shut up to them, and all their trade
+stopt. They were the more induced to grant these privileges to
+the English, on seeing them able to withstand the Portuguese,
+whose marine force had held the Guzerat people under maritime
+subjection, and made them afraid to trade with the
+English."--<i>Purch.</i></p>
+
+<p>S.2. Proceedings on the Coast of Persia, and Treachery of the
+Baloches.</p>
+
+<p>Having crossed the gulf from Cape Rasalgat, on the 10th
+September we got sight of the coast of Persia, in the lat. of
+25&deg; 10' N. When some seven leagues from the land, we sent our
+skiff ashore to make enquiry concerning the country, and to seek
+out some convenient place in which to land his lordship, having
+Sir Thomas Powell, with two of the ambassador's Persian
+attendants, and <i>Albertus</i>, our own linguist, that we might
+be able to converse with the natives. They came to a little
+village called <i>Tesseque</i>,[112] where they spoke with some
+camel-drivers and other country-people; from whom they learnt
+that the country was called <i>Getche Macquerona</i> [Mekran],
+and the inhabitants <i>Baloches</i>, all living under the
+government of a king, named <i>Melik Mirza</i>, whose chief
+residence was some five or six days journey from thence, at a
+port named <i>Guadal</i>. They were farther informed, that all
+the country of <i>Mekran</i> paid tribute yearly to the king of
+Persia. When informed of our purpose to land the ambassador, they
+told us that, by means of <i>Melik Mirza</i>, his lordship might
+have a safe conveyance in nine days to <i>Kermshir</i>, in the
+province of <i>Kerman</i>; and from thence might travel in eleven
+days more to <i>Ispahan</i> in Persia.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 112: Tize is laid down upon this part of
+the Persian coast, in lat 25&deg; 25' N. and long. 60&deg; 80' E.
+from Greenwich: Perhaps the Tesseque of the
+text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We then sailed along the coast, and on the 11th of the month
+we sent our boat ashore with Sir Thomas Powell, accompanied as
+before, to make farther enquiries, and to endeavour to hire a
+pilot to direct our course for Guadal, as we were unacquainted
+with the coast. They came to a place called <i>Pesseque</i>,
+about a day's journey from Tesseque, where they had similar
+accounts with the former, all commending the port of Guadal as
+the best place at which the ambassador could land. Wherefore,
+being unable to procure a pilot, we resolved, with God's
+blessing, to sail to that place with all the speed we could. On
+the 13th, while on our way, we espied coming towards us from the
+eastwards, two great boats, called <i>teradas</i>, which were
+sailing along shore for Ormus. Whereupon, that we might procure a
+pilot from them, we manned our skiff sufficiently to bring them
+by force to our ship, if entreaties were unavailing, yet without
+meaning to offer them the smallest injury, or even to send them
+away dissatisfied.</p>
+
+<p>When our skiff came up with them, instead of answering the
+hails of our men, they waved our skiff to leeward with a drawn
+sword; on which, thinking to fear them, and make them lower their
+sail, our men fired a random shot towards them, which they
+answered by firing another directly at our skiff, followed by
+half a hundred arrows, to which our men answered by plying all
+their muskets. But our skiff was unable to hold way with them, as
+they were under sail, and had therefore to return to the ship,
+with one man very dangerously wounded by an arrow in the breast,
+who afterwards recovered. As we in the ship saw the skiff
+returning without them, we hoisted out our long-boat, and sent
+her after the two <i>teradas</i>, we following with the ship as
+near the shore as we could with safety; for it was now of much
+importance that we should speak with them, on purpose to avoid
+their spreading scandalous reports of us in the country, which
+might have frustrated our chief hopes of landing the ambassador
+at <i>Guadal</i>, being the place we most depended upon, and
+being destitute of any other place for the purpose, should this
+fail, considering the unwelcome intelligence we had got
+concerning Guzerat at the Cape.</p>
+
+<p>Our long boat, having fetched up with the <i>teradas</i>,
+drove them into a bay whence they could not escape; on which the
+native mariners sailed so far into the bay, that one of the
+teradas was cast away on the beach, and the other had nearly
+shared the same fate, but was saved by our men just without the
+surf. Most of the <i>balloches</i> leapt overboard, and several
+of them narrowly escaped drowning; while nine of them were
+brought by our men to our ship along with the <i>terada</i>, part
+of whom they had taken out of the water. There were originally
+twenty-six balloches in the two teradas, but all the rest escaped
+ashore by swimming through the surf. When these men came aboard
+our ship, they were found to belong to Guadal; and when told that
+we were sorry for the loss of their other bark, as we meant them
+no harm, but only wished to speak with them, that we might learn
+the navigation to their port, they were glad to learn we had no
+evil intentions, thinking we had been as merciless as themselves,
+and acknowledged their loss proceeded from their own folly.</p>
+
+<p>We then informed them that we were bound for Guadal, on
+purpose to land a Persian ambassador there, and that we earnestly
+entreated the master of the terada, whose name was
+<i>Noradin</i>, to pilot us to that place, for which we would
+satisfy him to his contentment. Knowing that he could not chuse,
+he consented to go with us, on condition we would permit the
+terada and his men to proceed to Muscat, whither they were
+originally bound; but we did not think this quite safe, lest they
+might communicate news of our arrival among the Portuguese, and
+thought it better to take the bark along with us to Guadal, to
+manifest our own good intentions. Noradin accordingly consented,
+between fear and good will, and was much made of by us to
+reassure his confidence. On the passage to Guadal, we had much
+conference with him and his men, both respecting the state of the
+country, the character of their king, and the means of the
+ambassador travelling from thence into Persia. Their answers and
+reports all confirmed what we had been already told on the coast,
+and gave us hopes of success. The terada was about fifteen tons
+burden, and her loading mostly consisted in the provisions of the
+country, as rice, wheat, dates, and the like. They had a
+Portuguese pass, which they shewed us, thinking at first we had
+been of that nation. I translated this, to show in what
+subjection the Portuguese keep all the natives of these
+countries, as without such a pass they are not suffered to
+navigate these seas, under penalty of losing their lives, ships,
+and goods.</p>
+
+<p><i>Antonio Pereira de la Cerda, Captain of the Castle of
+Muscat, &amp;c.</i></p>
+
+<p>"Know all to whom these presents are shewn, that I have hereby
+given secure licence to this <i>terada</i>, of the burden of
+fifty <i>candies</i>, whereof is master Noradin, a Mahomedan
+<i>baloche</i>, dwelling in Guadal, of the age of fifty years,
+who carries for his defence four swords, three bucklers, five
+bows, with their arrows, three calivers, two lances, and twelve
+oars. And that in manner following: She may pass and sail from
+this castle of Muscat, to Soar, Dobar, Mustmacoraon, Sinde,
+Cache, Naguna, Diu, Chaul, and Cor. In going she carries goods of
+<i>Conga</i>, as raisins, dates, and such like; but not without
+dispatch from the custom-house of this castle, written on the
+back hereof. In this voyage she shall not carry any prohibited
+goods, viz. steel, iron, lead, tobacco, ginger, cinnamon of
+Ceylon, or other goods prohibited by his majesty's regulations.
+And conforming thereto, the said <i>terada</i> shall make her
+voyage without let or hindrance of any generals, captains, or any
+of the fleets or ships whatever of his majesty she may happen to
+meet with. This licence shall be in force for one whole year, in
+going and returning; and if expired, shall continue in force till
+the completion of her voyage.</p>
+
+<p><i>Given at the Castle of Muscat, this</i> 16th November,
+1611. <i>Written by Antonio de Peitas, notary of the said
+factory, &amp;c.</i></p>
+
+<p><i>Sealed and signed by</i> ANTONIO PEREIRA."</p>
+
+<p>The certificate on the back was thus: "<i>Registered in the
+book of Certificates, folio xxxii, et sequ.</i> Signed, ANT.
+PEITAS."</p>
+
+<p>The 17th September, we sailed past some high rugged cliffs,
+close to which, as Noradin told us, was a good watering place, at
+a village named <i>Ivane</i>, fifteen leagues west from Guadal.
+That same evening we arrived at Guadal, and anchored for the
+night off the mouth of the port, whence about thirty boats came
+out next morning to fish, some of which came to speak with the
+<i>balloches</i> we had aboard. What conversation passed among
+them we did not understand, being in the <i>balloche</i>
+language. Betimes on the 18th, we cleared our pilot and his boat,
+and he departed well contented. Soon after, the ambassador sent
+Nazerbeg, one of his Persian attendants, on shore in our skiff,
+with a message to the governor concerning his landing and passing
+through that country into Persia. While on the way, our skiff was
+met by the governor's boat, coming off to our ship, and Nazerbeg
+was taken into that boat, which carried him to the shore, whence
+he was accompanied by many of the natives to the governor's tent.
+He here delivered his message in Persian, which these people
+understand as well as their own language, and was kindly
+entertained. The answer from the governor was to this effect:
+That, although this country of Mekran did not belong to the king
+of Persia, it yet owed love and duty thereto, having been long
+tributary to the king and his predecessors, and still was. He
+farther said, that the king of Mekran was the king of Persia's
+slave, with many other hollow compliments, and that the
+ambassador should be made as welcome as in Persian all this only
+tending to allure his lordship ashore by treachery to his ruin,
+as appeared by the event.</p>
+
+<p>With this answer Nazerbeg returned, being accompanied on board
+by about a dozen of the most ancient men of the balloches, to
+confirm the same. On coming aboard, these men saluted the
+ambassador most submissively, in the name of the governor of
+Guadal, and on their own behalf some even offering to kiss his
+feet; and told his lordship that he was most fortunate in coming
+to their city at this time, as only the day before the viceroy
+had come down with a troop of men, to visit a saint, and
+therefore his lordship would be conducted with infinite safety
+through the country, and protected from the danger of rebels and
+thieves, who infested the country between Mekran and Persia, and
+might either go through Kerman or Segistan to Ispahan. They
+added, that the viceroy would supply his lordship with camels and
+horses, and every other requisite for the journey, and would
+gladly give him every other accommodation in his power. They
+said, moreover, that they were much rejoiced at having such an
+opportunity of shewing their unfeigned love and duty towards the
+king of Persia, and that the ambassador should be dispatched on
+his journey from Guadal in two days, if he were so inclined. They
+told us, that our ship should be supplied with water, and every
+other necessary of which we were in want; and they gave us three
+bags of bruised dates, of about 300 pounds weight, with two
+boats, saying the fishing-boats were ordered to give us two fish
+a-piece daily, on account of their government, which they did
+accordingly.</p>
+
+<p>By these shews of good-will, all men concurring in the same
+fair story, both now and formerly, we were thoroughly satisfied,
+and had no distrust that they meant not as well as they said. The
+lord ambassador, especially, was much rejoiced at the prospect of
+being thus enabled to reach Persia in twenty days, as they said;
+and we not less so, in bringing our long-desired hopes to a
+bearing. But God, from whom no secrets of the heart can be
+hidden, knew their treacherous intentions towards us; and had not
+his mercy exceeded his justice, we had been utterly destroyed,
+and it had never been known what became of us, our ship, or our
+goods.</p>
+
+<p>Being quite satisfied with these fair promises, the ambassador
+got every thing in readiness, and in the morning of the 19th
+September, sent his money and all his baggage on shore with the
+<i>balloches</i> boats, which came aboard for the purpose. They
+also brought a message from the viceroy and governor, saying they
+had provided tents for his lordship and all his followers, close
+to their own, where they would be happy to receive him as soon as
+he pleased to land. Into this tent accordingly all the
+ambassador's goods were carried, and some of his followers were
+appointed by his orders to remain there in charge of them, till
+he should himself land, intending to have gone ashore the same
+day, about four in the afternoon, of which he sent word to the
+viceroy. In the mean time our boat went ashore with empty casks
+to bring off fresh water, and in her went the Persian followers
+of the ambassador, and three or four more of his people, to see
+the careful landing of his goods, and to accompany them to the
+tents.</p>
+
+<p>While the ambassador's baggage was landing, some of the
+natives asked, if these were all the things the ambassador had to
+send ashore? To which it was answered, that these were all,
+except jewels and such like things, which were to come along with
+himself. Some other natives standing by, observed among
+themselves, That it was no matter, as these were enough for the
+soldiers. This was overheard and understood by Nazerbeg, who
+concealed it for the time, though it raised some suspicion in his
+mind, as he said afterwards: Yet so strongly was he prepossessed
+by the agreement of all that had passed before, that he could not
+bring himself to believe their intentions were bad. He listened,
+however, more attentively to all that was said afterwards among
+them, but could hear nothing that savoured of double-dealing.</p>
+
+<p>A little while afterwards, Nazerbeg met with one <i>Haji
+Comul</i>,[113] whom God made an instrument to disclose the
+devilish project of the balloches to circumvent and destroy us,
+and who now revealed the particulars of their bloody designs.
+Nazerbeg was amazed, and even chid <i>Comul</i> for not having
+told this before the goods were landed. As the time appointed for
+the landing of the ambassador was at hand, Nazerbeg was fearful
+he might have come ashore before he could get to our ship to
+forewarn him. Wherefore, hastening to the shore, where, as God
+would have it, our skiff was still filling water, he told our men
+there was treachery plotting against us on shore, and entreated
+them to row him to the ship with all possible speed. He was
+therefore brought off immediately, yet hardly a moment too soon,
+as the ambassador and all his suite, together with our captain
+and all the principal officers among us, willing to grace the
+ambassador as far as we could for the honour of our country, were
+already in the waste, and ready to go on shore. When Nazerbeg had
+communicated his news, we were as ready to change our purpose as
+we had been before to go ashore. The purport of what he had
+learnt from <i>Haji Comul</i> was as follows:--</p>
+
+<p>The viceroy and governor had agreed together to entice as many
+of us as they possibly could ashore, on purpose to cut all our
+throats; which done, they meant to have set upon the ship, and
+having taken her, to seize every thing she contained. They had
+made minute enquiry into our numbers, and had got a particular
+enumeration of the state and condition of every person in the
+ship, all of whom they intended to put to death without mercy,
+except the surgeon, the musicians, the women, and the boys. Their
+reverence for the king of Persia, of which they had so boasted,
+was all a mere pretence to deceive; for they were all rebels, and
+it was death to talk of the king of Persia in Guadal. Though we
+now understood their intended plot, for which God be praised, and
+were sufficiently put upon our guard to prevent its execution by
+arming ourselves, knowing that we were able to defend ourselves
+from injury on board, although they had great numbers of boats,
+and above 1500 men armed with muskets, besides others; yet were
+we at a loss how we might recover his lordship's goods, and his
+three men who were ashore along with them. But God, who had thus
+miraculously delivered us from their cruel treachery, opened
+likewise our understandings, so that we recovered all according
+to our wish, in the following manner:--</p>
+
+<p>As the viceroy and his fellows expected the immediate landing
+of the ambassador and followers, together with the captain and
+others of us, we sent Nazerbeg again ashore, with instructions
+what to do. He was to inform the viceroy that the ambassador was
+not very well, and had therefore deferred his landing till next
+morning, which was Monday the 20th September. He was also
+directed to request the viceroy and governor, to send two or
+three of their boats for him very early, to bring the women and
+others of his company ashore, as the ship's boats were too small;
+and to say, that the ambassador expected to be attended by some
+men of condition from the viceroy, to come in the boats, out of
+respect to the king of Persia, whose person he represented. This
+message, being well delivered, took the desired effect, and the
+viceroy readily promised to comply with every thing required.
+Having finished this part of his introductions, Nazerbeg was to
+repair to the tent where the baggage was lodged, and to fetch
+from one of the trunks, two bags of money containing &pound;200
+sterling, and some other things of value, if he could so contrive
+without being noticed, as it was wished to conceal the knowledge
+we had of the villainous intentions of these barbarians. Nazerbeg
+was also desired to use dispatch, and to desire the three
+servants of the ambassador to remain all night at the tents, with
+promise of being relieved next morning. All was done as directed,
+and not only was the money brought away, but a trunk also
+containing Lady Shirley's apparel. When the balloches enquired
+the reason of taking that trunk back to the ship, they were told
+it contained the lady's night-clothes, and that it was to be
+brought ashore again next day.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 113: In Purchas this person is named
+<i>Hoge</i> Comul; but we suspect it ought to be <i>Haji</i>,
+intimating that he had made the pilgrimage of Mecca and
+Medina.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The ambassador having thus recovered his money, wished much to
+get back one other large trunk, containing things of value, and
+the three men which were ashore with his baggage, even if all the
+rest were lost. For this purpose, we filled, over night, a large
+chest and a night-stool, with billets of wood, rubbish, stones,
+and other useless matters, to make them heavy, binding them up
+carefully with mats and ropes to give them an air of importance.
+Nazerbeg was instructed to take these on shore, to be left in
+place of the large trunk which he was to bring away, under
+pretence that it belonged to one of the merchants, and had been
+landed by mistake. The three men at the tent were to accompany
+him back to the ship, with their musical instruments, and the
+<i>balloches</i> were to be told they were wanted by the lord
+ambassador to accompany him with their music on his landing.</p>
+
+<p>Every thing being thus properly arranged, we saw next morning
+early, the three boats coming off for the purpose of bringing his
+lordship on shore, according to promise. We then manned our
+skiff, and sent her ashore to put our plan into execution, by
+which we hoped to entrap the <i>balloches</i> in the snare they
+had laid for us. In the mean time, we received the people from
+the three boats into our ship, consisting of seven or eight
+persons of some condition, among whom was our friend <i>Haji
+Comul</i>; all the rest being slaves and fishermen. We kept them
+in discourse on various matters, to pass away time till our skiff
+could get back. During this conversation, one of them said that
+the viceroy earnestly desired we might bring our
+<i>slurbow</i>[114] ashore with us, as he wished much to see it,
+which we readily promised, to satisfy them. We soon after had the
+pleasure to see our skiff returning, having been completely
+successful, as it not only brought away the trunk and the three
+men, but also one of the chief men among the <i>balloches</i>,
+whom Nazerbeg enticed along with him. As soon as he came on
+board, he and the rest desired to see our gun-rooms, in which
+they had been told we had all our fire-works, of which they were
+in great dread, particularly of our <i>slurbow</i> and
+fire-arrows; and this answered exactly to our wishes, as we meant
+to have enticed them below, that we might disarm them of their
+long knives or daggers. When all these principal persons were
+down below in the gun-room, all our people being armed and in
+readiness, and dispersed in different parts of the ship, some on
+deck, some between decks, and others in the gunroom, to arrest
+and disarm the traitors; and when the concerted signal was given,
+this was instantly accomplished, to their great astonishment, yet
+without resistance.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 114: From circumstances mentioned in the
+sequel, this seems to have been a species of cross-bow for
+discharging fire-arrows.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We then laid open to them our knowledge of their murderous
+intentions, saying their lives were now in our hands, as they had
+themselves fallen into the pit they had dug for us; and, if we
+served them right, we should now cut them in pieces, as they
+meant to have done by us. Yet they stoutly denied the whole
+alleged plot. We detained six of the chiefest men among them, and
+two of their boats, sending all the rest a-shore, being all naked
+rascals, except one, by whom we sent a message to the viceroy and
+governor, That, unless he sent us back all the goods and baggage
+we had ashore, without abstracting even the smallest portion, we
+would carry off those we had now in our custody. When this
+message was delivered to the viceroy and governor, they sent back
+word by the same messenger, that, if we would release the
+<i>balloches</i>, all our goods should be sent to us, and at the
+same time making many hollow declarations that no evil had ever
+been intended against us. On receiving this message, and in sight
+of the messenger, all our prisoners were immediately put in
+irons; and two letters were wrote to the viceroy in Persian, one
+by us and the other by the prisoners, intimating in the most
+determined terms, that the prisoners would be all put to death,
+if the goods were not safely returned without delay, giving only
+two hours respite at the most, the sand-glass being set before
+them as the messenger left the ship, that he might be induced to
+make haste. By these sharp means, we constrained them to restore
+every thing in the most ample manner; and this being done, we
+released the men and boats, according to promise, and sent them
+away. One man named <i>Malim Simsadim</i>, whom we had learnt,
+from <i>Haji Comul</i>, was an experienced pilot for <i>Sinde</i>
+and <i>Cambay</i>, we detained for that purpose, promising to
+reward him according to his merits.</p>
+
+<p>Thus, by God's assistance, to whom be endless praise for our
+deliverance, we happily extricated ourselves from this dangerous
+and intricate affair, which was entirely concluded by six p.m. of
+the 20th September. We set sail that same night with our new
+pilot and <i>Haji Comul</i>, which last remained along with us,
+as his life would have been in danger among that accursed crew,
+for revealing their diabolical plot. We now bent out course for
+Sinde, as willing to avoid all subsequent dangers which these
+blood-thirsty balloches might attempt to plot against us. In our
+way, we had much conversation with Comul, whom we much esteemed
+and respected for the excellent service he had done towards us.
+<i>Comul</i> was a native of Dabul in India, his father being a
+Persian of the sect of Ali, in which <i>Comul</i> was a
+churchman, or priest, having likewise some skill in medicine and
+surgery, in which capacity he had resided in the tent of the
+governor of Guadal, and owing to which circumstance he had
+overheard their infernal plot. He had obtained leave to come
+aboard our ship, under pretence of procuring certain ointments or
+balsams, which he alleged had been promised him by our surgeons.
+He said that, on hearing their murderous intentions, his heart
+yearned within him, to think we should be led like sheep to the
+slaughter by such bloody butchers, and that God willed him to
+reveal their plot to us. He farther told us, that to his
+knowledge, they had already betrayed three ships in the same
+manner; that they were all rebels against the King of Persia,
+refusing to pay the tribute which they and their ancestors had
+been accustomed to; and that the king of Persia had levied an
+army, which waited not for from Guadal, with the purpose to
+invade the country next winter.</p>
+
+<p>This country of <i>Macquerona</i>, or Mekran, is on the main
+land of Asia, bordering upon the kingdom of Persia. The port of
+<i>Guadal</i> is nearly in the lat. of 25&deg; N, the variation
+being 17&deg; 15' [lat. 24&deg; 40' N. long. 61&deg; 50' E.]. It
+has good anchorage in four or five fathoms. At night of the 21st
+September, the day after leaving Guadal, our <i>balloche</i>
+pilot brought our ship in danger of running on a shoal, where we
+had to come suddenly to anchor till next morning. The 24th at
+night, while laying to, because not far from Cape Camelo, a
+Portuguese frigate, or bark, passed close beside us, which at
+first we suspected to have been an armed galley, for which cause
+we prepared for defence in case of need.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Arrival at Diul-ginde,[115] and landing of the
+Ambassador: Seeking Trade there, are crossed by the slanderous
+Portuguese: Go to Sumatra and Bantam; and thence Home to
+England</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 115: This singular name ought perhaps to
+have been Diul-Sinde, or Diul on the Indus, or Sinde river, to
+distinguish it from Diu in Guzerat.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 26th September, 1613, we came to anchor right before the
+mouth of the river <i>Sinde</i>, or Indus, by the directions of a
+pilot we had from one of the boats we found fishing at that
+place. We rode in very good ground, in a foot less five fathoms,
+the mouth of the river being E. by N. being in the latitude of
+24&deg; 38' N.[116] That same day, the ambassador sent two of his
+people, to confer with the governor about his coming ashore, and
+procuring a passage through that country into Persia. The
+governor, whose name was <i>Arah Manewardus</i>, who was of
+<i>Diul</i>,[117] was most willing to receive the ambassador, and
+to shew him every kindness, both in regard to his entertainment
+there, and his passage through his province or jurisdiction. To
+this intent, he sent a principal person aboard, attended by five
+or six more, to welcome his lordship with many compliments,
+assuring him of kind entertainment. Presently after there came
+boats from <i>Diul</i> for his accommodation, in which he and all
+his people and goods went ashore on the 29th September, all in as
+good health as when they embarked in our ship from England. At
+his departure we saluted him with eleven guns, and our captain
+entrusted him with a fine fowling-piece, having two locks, to
+present to the governor of Tatta, a great city, a day's journey
+from Diul,[118] both cities being in the dominions of the Great
+Mogul. We also now set ashore our treacherous <i>balloche</i>
+pilot, <i>Sim-sadin</i>, though he better merited to have been
+thrown into the sea, as he endeavoured twice to have cast us
+away; once by his own means, as formerly alluded to, and
+afterwards by giving devilish council to the pilot we hod from
+the fisher boat at this place.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 116: The river Indus has many mouths, of
+which no less than <i>seventeen</i> are laid down in Arrowsmith's
+excellent map of Hindoostan, extending between the latitudes of
+24&deg; 45' and 23&deg; 15' both N. and between the longitudes of
+67&deg; 12' and 69&deg; 12' both east. That mouth where the
+Expedition now came to anchor, was probably that called the
+<i>Pitty</i> river, being the most north-western of the Delta, in
+lat 24&deg; 45' N. and long. 67&deg; 12' E. from Greenwich; being
+the nearest on her way from Guadal, and that which most directly
+communicates with Tatta, the capital of the Delta of the
+Indus.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 117: Such is the vague mode of expression
+in the Pilgrims; but it appears afterwards that he was governor
+of Diul, at which place Sir Robert Shirley and his suite were
+landed. It singularly happens, that Diul is omitted in all the
+maps we have been able to consult; but from the context, it
+appears to have been near the mouth of the Pitty river, mentioned
+in the preceding note. It is afterwards said to have been fifteen
+miles up the river, in which case it may possibly be a place
+otherwise called <i>Larry Bunder</i>, about twenty miles up the
+Pitty, which is the port of Tatta.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 118: Tatta is not less than seventy-five
+English miles from the mouth of the Pitty, and consequently sixty
+from Diul.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When the lord ambassador left us, we requested he would send
+us word how he found the country disposed, and whether we might
+have trade there; and for this purpose, we gave his lordship a
+note in writing of what we chiefly desired, which was to the
+following purport: "That our coming to this port was purposely to
+land his lordship; yet, as we had brought with us certain
+commodities and money, we were willing to make sales of such and
+so much of those as might suit, if we could obtain licence and
+protection for quiet trade; and, with the governor's permission,
+would settle a factory at this place, to which, though now but
+slenderly provided, we would afterwards bring such kinds and
+quantities of goods us might be most suitable for sale. The
+commodities we now had, were elephants and morse teeth, fine
+fowling-pieces, lead and tin in bars, and some Spanish dollars.
+If we could not be permitted to trade, we requested leave to
+provide ourselves, with refreshments, and so to depart."</p>
+
+<p>The 30th September, the ambassador had an audience of the
+governor concerning all his business, to whom he shewed the
+<i>firmaun</i> of the king of Persia, as also the pass of the
+king of Spain, thinking thereby to satisfy the jealousy of the
+Portuguese residents at that place, who reported, on pretended
+intelligence from Ornus, that Don Roberto Shirley was come from
+England with three ships to the Indies, on purpose to steal. They
+peremptorily refused to give credence to the Spanish pass, saying
+it was neither signed nor sealed by their king, in which they
+could not possibly be mistaken, knowing it so well, and therefore
+that it was assuredly forged. On this, the ambassador angrily
+said, that it was idle to shew them any king's hand-writing and
+seal, as they had no king, being merely a waste nation, forcibly
+reduced under subjection to the king of Spain, and mere slaves
+both to him and his natural subjects. Yet the Portuguese boldly
+stood to their former allegations, insisting that the ambassador
+had other two ships in the Indies. Then <i>Arah Manewardus</i>
+sharply reproved them for their unseemly contradictions of the
+Persian ambassador, and ordered them out of the room.</p>
+
+<p>The ambassador then made a speech to the governor concerning
+our admittance to trade at his port, on which the governor
+expressed his readiness to do so, all inconveniences understood,
+and desired the ambassador to send for one or two of our
+merchants, that he might confer with them on the subject. Upon
+this the ambassador wrote to us on the 2d October, saying what he
+had done in our affairs, and sending us assurance for our safe
+going and returning. Being thereby in good hope of establishing
+trade at this place, if not a factory, and to make sale of the
+small quantity of goods we now had, Mr Joseph Salbank and I, by
+advice of the captain and others, made ourselves ready and went
+ashore that same morning in one of the country boats. Our ship
+lay about four or five miles from the mouth of the river, from
+whence we had fifteen miles to travel to <i>Diul</i>, where the
+ambassador was, so that it was late in the evening before we
+landed there.</p>
+
+<p>In our way we met a Portuguese frigate or bark, bound for
+Ormus, on purpose to prevent any of their ships coming till we
+were gone. This bark went close past our ship, taking a careful
+review of her, and so departed. As soon as we were landed, three
+or four Portuguese came up to us, asking if we had brought any
+goods ashore, and such like questions; but we made them no reply,
+pretending not to understand their language, that we might the
+better understand them for our own advantage, if occasion served.
+There then came another Portuguese, who spoke Dutch very
+fluently, telling me many things respecting the country and
+people, tending to their ill conduct and character, thinking to
+dissuade us from endeavouring to have any trade there. Soon
+after, the officers of the customs came, and conducted us to the
+castle, but we could not have an audience of the governor that
+night, as it was already late. The officers, who were mostly
+banians, and spoke good Portuguese, searched every part about us
+for money, not even leaving our shoes unsearched; and perceiving
+that we were surprised at this, they prayed us to be content
+therewith, as it was the custom of the country. To this I
+replied, that though the Portuguese might give them cause for so
+bad a fashion, yet English merchants did not hide their money in
+their shoes like smugglers. Then the governor's servants came to
+us, and lighted us from the castle to the house in which the
+ambassador lodged, where we were made heartily welcome, and were
+lodged all the time we staid in Diul, and at no expence to us.
+Seeing us landed, and hearing we came to treat with the governor
+for settling trade at that place, the Portuguese spread many
+slanderous and malignant lies against our king, country, and
+nation, reporting that we were thieves, and not merchants, and
+that we derived our chief subsistence by robbing other nations on
+the sea.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 3d October, the governor sent word to
+the ambassador that he would see and converse with us in the
+afternoon. In the mean time, we had notice that the Portuguese
+were using every effort with him and others to prevent our being
+entertained, both by offering him gratifications if he would
+refuse us, and by threatening to leave the place if we were
+received, pretending that they would not remain where thieves
+were admitted. Yet the governor sent for us, commanding four
+great horses, richly caparisoned, to be sent to the ambassador's
+house, for his lordship, Sir Thomas Powell, Mr Salbank, and me,
+and sent also a number of his servants to conduct us to the
+castle; all the ambassador's servants went likewise along with
+him, each carrying a halbert. In this manner we rode through some
+part of the city, the people in all the streets flocking out to
+see us, having heard talk of Englishmen, but never having seen
+any before, as we were the first who had ever been in that part
+of the country.</p>
+
+<p>On coming to the castle, we were received in a very orderly
+manner, and led through several spacious rooms, where many
+soldiers were standing in ranks on each side, all cloathed from
+head to foot in white dresses. We were then conducted to a high
+turret, in which the governor and some others sat, who rose up at
+our entrance and saluted us, bidding us kindly welcome. We then
+all sat down round the room, on carpets spread on the floor,
+according to their fashion. The governor again bid us welcome,
+saying he was glad to see Englishmen in that country; but said,
+in regard to the trade we desired to have there, that the
+Portuguese would by no means consent to our having trade, and
+threatened to desert the place if we were received. Yet, if he
+could be assured of deriving greater benefit from our trade than
+he now had from that of the Portuguese, he should not care how
+soon they left him, as he thought well of our nation. In the mean
+time, however, as he farmed the customs of that port from the
+king, to whom he was bound to pay certain sums yearly for the
+same, whether they were actually received or not, he was under
+the necessity of being circumspect in conducting the business,
+lest he might incur the displeasure of the king, to his utter
+ruin. He then told us that the customs from the Portuguese trade,
+together with what arose from their letting out their ships to
+hire to the Guzerats and Banians, amounted to a <i>lack</i> of
+rupees yearly, which is &pound;10,000 sterling.[119]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 119: A rupee is two shillings, or somewhat
+more, and a <i>lack</i> is 100,000.--Purch.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>He then desired to know the kinds and quantities of the
+commodities we had brought, and what amount we had in money? To
+all which we gave him distinct answers, as nearly as we could
+remember; adding, that though we now brought but small store, we
+would engage to furnish his port at our next coming, which would
+be in about twenty-two months, with such commodities as were now
+brought by the Portuguese, and with such quantities of each kind
+as might be requisite to satisfy the demands of that port. He
+appeared to approve of this, and concluded by saying, as our
+present stock of commodities were so small, the Portuguese would
+only laugh at him and us if we were now admitted to trade,
+wherefore he wished us to defer all trade till our next coming;
+but that he was ready to give us a writing under his hand and
+seal to assure us of good entertainment at our next coming,
+provided we came fully prepared as we said, and on condition we
+should leave him a written engagement not to molest any of the
+ships or goods of the king of the Moguls, or his subjects. We
+agreed to all this, and requested he would allow us to sell those
+goods we now had; but which he would by no means consent to, for
+fear of offending the Portuguese, as stated before.</p>
+
+<p>We then desired that we might have leave to provide our ship
+with water, and other necessary refreshments, for our money,
+after which we should depart as soon as possible. To this he
+said, that as soon as we sent him the writing he desired, he
+would send us the one he had promised, and would give orders to
+his officers to see our wants supplied; but desired that the
+Portuguese might know nothing of all this. Seeing no remedy, we
+then desired to know what kinds of commodities he wished us to
+bring, and also what were the commodities his country could
+afford in return. We were accordingly informed, that the
+commodities in request in Sinde were broad-cloths of various
+prices, and light gay colours, as stammels, reds, greens,
+sky-blues, indigo-blues, azures, &amp;c. also elephants teeth,
+iron, steel, lead, tin, spices, and money. The commodities to be
+had there were, indigo of Lahore, indigo of <i>Cherques</i>,
+calicoes of all sorts, pintadoes, or painted chintzes of all
+sorts, all kinds of Guzerat and Cambay commodities, with many
+kinds of drugs. We then took our leave, and returned to the
+ambassador's house, whence I sent him a letter, according to his
+desire, signed by Mr Salbanke and me, on which he sent us
+another, in the Persian language, which is written backwards,
+much like the Hebrew, and which was interpreted to us by the
+ambassador, in English, as follows:</p>
+
+<p>"WHEREAS there has arrived at this port of Diul, an English
+ship called the Expedition, of which is captain, Christopher
+Newport, and merchants, Joseph Salbank and Walter Peyton, and has
+landed here Don Robert Shirley, ambassador of the king of Persia,
+who has desired us to grant them trade at this port under my
+government, which I willingly would have granted, but not having
+brought merchandize in sufficient quantity to begin trade, and
+the Portuguese, from whom I reap benefit, refusing their consent,
+threatening to go away if I receive the English nation, by which
+I should be left destitute of all trade, whence arises those sums
+I have yearly to pay to the king, and in default whereof I should
+incur his majesty's displeasure, to my utter ruin. Yet, from the
+love I bear to the king of Persia, by whose ambassador I am
+solicited, and from affection for the English, together with the
+faithful performance of the writing left with me under their
+hands and seals by the two merchants before named, I hereby
+promise the English nation, under my hand and seal, if they will
+come like themselves, so fitted that I may derive more advantage
+from them than from the Portuguese, that I will infallibly grant
+them trade here, with such reasonable privileges as we may agree
+upon."</p>
+
+<p><i>Given at Diul, this 3d of October</i>, 1613.</p>
+
+<p>ARAH MANEWARUS.</p>
+
+<p>Having received this writing on the 4th October, together with
+orders from the governor to his officers for our being furnished
+with water and refreshments, we made haste to return to our
+ships. A little before we went away, the ambassador fell into
+discourse with us about procuring a <i>firmaun</i> from the Great
+Mogul, for which purpose he wished Mr Salbank to accompany him to
+Agra, the principal residence of that sovereign, affirming that
+he would procure that grant of trade for us in a short time, for
+which he alleged there was now a favourable opportunity, both
+because he had other business to transact at the court of the
+Mogul, and in consequence of the willingness of <i>Manewardus</i>
+to admit us to trade at his port. He alleged likewise that we
+might never have so favourable an opportunity, and assured us
+that he would therein shew himself a true-hearted Englishman,
+whatever the company of merchants might think of him; and that Mr
+Salbank should be an evidence of his earnest endeavours to serve
+the merchants in procuring this <i>firmaun</i>, not only for
+Diul, but for other parts of the Mogul dominions, and should also
+carry the grant with him over-land to England. All this seemed
+reasonable, and as Mr Salbank had been before in these parts, he
+was very willing to go, provided it met with the approbation of
+the captain and me, and the other gentlemen in the ship; for
+which purpose the ambassador wrote a letter to our captain, to
+urge his consent, which we carried with us.</p>
+
+<p>We left Diul that same day about four in the afternoon, and on
+going to the river side to take boat, many of the natives flocked
+about to look at us. We were likewise joined by about a dozen
+Portuguese, who began to talk with us in Dutch, as before, asking
+many frivolous questions. I now answered them in their own
+language, on purpose that the Banians, who were present, might
+understand what I said; telling them that they were a shameless
+and lying people to spread so many slanderous and false reports
+of our nation, while they knew their own to be much inferior to
+ours in many respects, and that their scandalous conduct
+proceeded merely from malignant policy to prevent us from
+participating with them in the trade of India. To this I added,
+that if they did not restrain themselves within due peaceful
+bounds, amending their behaviour both in words and actions, they
+should be all driven out of India, and a more honest and loyal
+nation substituted in their place. Then one of the principal men
+among them stepped forwards, and made answer, that they had
+already too many enemies, and had no need of more; but that they
+had substantial reasons for speaking of us as they had done, as
+not long since one of their ships had been taken near Surat, and,
+as they supposed, by an English ship. To which I answered, that
+this was more like to have been done by the Hollanders. They then
+became more civil, and finally wished that we might trade in all
+parts of India with them, and they with us, like friends and
+neighbours, and that our kings might enter into some agreement to
+that effect. They then kindly took leave of us, and we
+departed.</p>
+
+<p>We got back to our ship on the 6th, when it was agreed that Mr
+Salbank should accompany the ambassador to Agra, as proposed. For
+which purpose he got himself in readiness, meaning to have gone
+ashore next day. In the mean time, the captain, the purser, and
+his man, went on shore to buy fresh victuals and necessaries to
+take with us to sea; but, on coming to the city, they were
+presently ordered away by the governor, and an express order
+issued by proclamation, that none of the natives should hereafter
+bring any of the English ashore, on pain of death. We were much
+astonished at this sudden alteration of affairs, for which we
+could not divine any cause: but, on the 9th, finding we could get
+nothing done here, nor any farther intercourse, we set sail,
+directing our course for Sumatra. All the time we were here in
+Sinde, we had not the smallest intimation of trade having been
+settled at Surat, for if we had, we might have taken a different
+course.</p>
+
+<p>We came to anchor in the road of Priaman on the 20th November,
+going in between the two northermost little islands, and anchored
+close by the northermost of these, in five fathoms. We
+immediately began to bargain for pepper, the price of which we
+beat down from twenty-two dollars, as first asked, to seventeen
+dollars the bahar, at which price we got two bahars, which were
+brought to us on board: but the governor would not allow us,
+although we made him a present of a musket, to hire a house, or
+to buy pepper ashore, unless we would consent to bestow presents
+on some twenty of the officers and merchants of the place. On the
+22d, we received a letter from Captain Christen, of the
+Hosiander, then at Tecoo, earnestly advising us to come there
+immediately, as we could not fail to get as much pepper as we
+wished at that place, and in a short time; and, as we were not
+acquainted with the place, Captain Chrisen sent Richard Hall, one
+of his master's mates, to pilot us through among the dangerous
+shoals that lay about the roads of Tecoo. Accordingly we went to
+that place, and anchored in four fathoms, Richard Hall returning
+on board the Hosiander, where he died that same night, being ill
+of the flux.</p>
+
+<p>Before our arrival, the natives had offered their pepper to
+Captain Christen at twelve and thirteen dollars the bahar, taking
+payment in Surat commodities; but they now demanded twenty-two
+dollars in ready money, refusing to barter with them any longer
+for goods. They also demanded at this place as many presents as
+had been required at Priaman; beside which, they insisted upon
+having seventy-two dollars for anchorage duty. Being now in a
+worse situation than before, and having no time to waste in
+delays, we determined to come to short terms with them; wherefore
+we told them roundly, that we would on no account submit to their
+unreasonable demands, even though we might not get a single
+<i>cattee</i> of pepper. For this purpose I drew out a letter
+from our captain, which he signed and sealed, addressed to the
+head governor, stating that he had not used our nation so well as
+we had reason to expect, both in unreasonable demands of
+presents, which were not usually given upon compulsion, but
+rather from good-will, or in reward of good behaviour, and
+likewise by their improper delay in implementing their promises,
+so very unlike mercantile dealings; since our ships have at
+various times remained at their port for three, four, and even
+five months, depending on their promises of having full lading,
+which might as well have been accomplished in one month, in so
+far as respected the small quantity of pepper they had to dispose
+of. This letter was translated by the interpreter in the
+Hosiander, an Indian, named Johen, who perfectly understood their
+language.</p>
+
+<p>The governor, in consequence of this remonstrance, gave orders
+that we might purchase pepper from any one who was inclined to
+sell; but sent us a message, wishing that one of us might come on
+shore, that the pepper might be there weighed. But still doubting
+that they meant to teaze us with delay, we sent back word that we
+could not remain so long as it would require for weighing the
+pepper ashore, and therefore if they would bring it to us on
+board, we would pay them eighteen dollars a bahar for their
+pepper, together with two dollars as custom to the governor,
+making exactly twenty dollars. As they still put off time, we set
+sail, as if meaning to have gone away, on which the governor sent
+another messenger, who spoke Portuguese tolerably, entreating us
+to come again to anchor, and we should have as much pepper as we
+could take in. We did so accordingly, and they brought pepper off
+to us in proas as fast as we could conveniently weigh it, and
+continued to do so till we had got about 200 bahars. They then
+began to grow slack in their proceedings, on which, fearing to
+lose the monsoon by spending too much time at this place, we
+weighed and proceeded for Bantam.</p>
+
+<p>We left Tecoo on the 8th December, three of our men remaining
+in the Hosiander, which needed their assistance, and proceeded
+towards Bantam, mostly keeping in sight of Sumatra. At our
+entrance into the straits of Sunda, on the 16th of that month, we
+met the Dragon on her homeward voyage, by which ship we sent
+letters to England. Next day, the 17th, we anchored in Bantam
+roads, and went immediately ashore to provide our lodging, and by
+the 29th our whole cargo was completed.</p>
+
+<p>We set sail from Bantam on the 2d January, 1614, for England,
+not having hitherto lost a single man by sickness during our
+whole voyage, for which we were thankful to God. This same day,
+as we were going out by way of Pulo Panian, we met General Saris
+in the Clove, then returning from Japan; and we came to anchor,
+that we might have his letters for England, together with four
+chests. We likewise spared him two of our hands, of which he was
+in great need; one being a youth, named Mortimer Prittie, and the
+other a carpenter's mate, named Thomas Valens, as he had not a
+single carpenter alive in his ship.</p>
+
+<p>Having settled all these matters with the Clove, we resumed
+our voyage for England on the 4th January, and came to anchor in
+Saldanha bay on the 21st March, where we got a sufficient supply
+of beeves and sheep from the natives, with abundance of fish,
+caught in our own seine. We left that place on the 9th April,
+with prosperous winds, which continued favourable till we were
+three degrees north of the equator, which we crossed the 11th
+May. When in lat. 00&deg; 22' N. many of our men began to fall
+sick, some of them of the scurvy, and with swelled legs. On the
+10th July, 1614, by the blessing of God, we came to anchor in the
+Downs.</p>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter3-11" id="chapter3-11">CHAPTER XI.</a></h2>
+
+<p>CONTINUATION OF THE EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH EAST INDIA
+COMPANY TO INDIA.</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>In the immediately preceding chapter, we have given a series
+of the first twelve voyages fitted out by the English East India
+Company, in the prosecution of their exclusive trade to India, as
+preserved by Samuel Purchas; and we now mean, chiefly from the
+same source, to continue the series for a few years longer. At
+the close of the last voyage of the foregoing chapter, Purchas
+informs us, that "The order of reckoning must be now altered,
+because the voyages of the company were for the future set forth
+by means of a <i>joint stock</i>, instead of by particular ships,
+each upon a separate subscription, having separate stocks and
+factories; the whole proceedings being, in the sequel, at the
+general risk of, and accountable to the entire society or company
+of adventurers." He farther adds, "That the whole of these
+joint-stock voyages had not come into his hands; but that such as
+he had been able to procure, and were meet for publication, he
+had inserted in his Collection."</p>
+
+<p>The learned historiographer of the East India Company[120]
+gives rather a different account of the former series of separate
+or unconnected voyages, than that which we have taken from
+Purchas, terming the last voyage in our former chapter only the
+<i>ninth</i>, while Purchas denominates it the
+<i>twelfth</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 120: Ann. of the Hon. E.I. Co, I.
+162.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This difference, which is not at all material, may have arisen
+from Purchas having considered some of the ships belonging to
+<i>single</i> adventurers or subscriptions, which made separate
+voyages or parts of voyages, as <i>separate</i> adventures. We
+come now to a new era in the mode of conducting the English
+exclusive trade to India, of the motives for which the Annals
+give the following account.[121]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 121: Id. I. 165.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"The inconveniences which had been experienced from separate
+classes of adventurers, partners in the East India Company,
+fitting out equipments on their own particular portions of stock,
+induced the directors, or committees, to resolve, in 1612, that,
+in future, the trade should be carried on by a joint stock only;
+and, on the basis of this resolution, the sum of &pound;429,000
+was subscribed: and, though portions of this joint stock were
+applied to the equipment of four voyages, the general
+instructions to the commanders were given in the name, and by the
+authority, of the governor, deputy-governor, and committees of
+the company of merchants in London trading to the East Indies,
+who explained that the whole was a joint concern, and that the
+commanders were to be responsible to the company for their
+conduct, both in the sale and purchase of commodities in the East
+Indies, and for their general conduct, in extending the commerce,
+within the limits of the company. The transition, therefore, from
+trading on <i>separate adventures</i>, which has been described
+as an imitation of the Dutch, to trading on a <i>joint stock</i>,
+arose out of the good sense of the English nation, which, from
+experience, had discovered the evil consequences of internal
+opposition, and had determined to proceed on a system better
+calculated to promote the general interest of the East India
+Company.</p>
+
+<p>"Notwithstanding this resolution, the proportions of this
+aggregate sum were applied to what has been termed the <i>tenth,
+eleventh, twelfth</i>, and <i>thirteenth</i> voyages, in the
+following manner: In 1613, the <i>tenth</i> voyage was
+undertaken, the stock of which was estimated at &pound;18,810 in
+money, and &pound;12,446 in goods, the fleet consisting of
+<i>eight</i> vessels. In 1614, the stock for the <i>eleventh</i>
+voyage was &pound;13,942 in money, and &pound;23,000 in goods,
+the fleet being <i>eight ships</i>. In 1615, the stock for the
+<i>twelfth</i> voyage was &pound;26,660 in money, and
+&pound;26,065 in goods, with <i>six ships</i>. In 1616, the stock
+for the <i>thirteenth</i> voyage was &pound;52,087 in money, and
+&pound;16,506 in goods, the fleet containing <i>seven ships</i>.
+The purchase, repair, and equipment of vessels during these four
+voyages amounted to &pound;272,544, which, with the specified
+stock and cargoes, accounts for the disbursement of the
+&pound;429,000, the sum subscribed on the joint stock in
+1613.[122]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 122: The enumerated particulars amount to
+&pound;462,060, and exceed the subscribed joint stock by
+&pound;33,060.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"The profits on this joint stock are stated to have amounted,
+on the first two voyages, to &pound;120 per cent. on the original
+subscription; but they were subsequently much diminished, by the
+difficulties which the English trade to the East Indies began to
+experience, from the opposition of the Dutch in the Spice
+Islands; so that, at the conclusion of this first joint stock, in
+1617, the average profits of the four voyages did not exceed
+&pound;87:10s. per. cent on the original subscription,
+notwithstanding the cargo of one of the vessels (the New-year's
+Gift) cost only 40,000 rials of eight, and the sale produce, in
+England, amounted to &pound;80,000 sterling."</p>
+
+<p>It is not the purpose of this Collection to enlarge on the
+history of the East India Company, any farther than by giving
+relations of its early voyages, so far as these have come down to
+us in the Pilgrims of Purchas, their only published record; and
+we now therefore proceed with such of these voyages as are
+contained in that curious collection, and seem to be worth
+including in this work.--E.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage of Captain Nicholas Downton to India, in
+1614.</i>[122]</p>
+
+<p>The ships employed on this voyage, the <i>second</i> set forth
+by the <i>joint</i> stock of the East India Company, were the
+New-year's Gift admiral, of 650 tons, on board of which Captain
+Downton sailed as general or chief commander; the Hector of 500
+tons, vice-admiral; the Merchant's Hope, of 300 tons; and the
+Salomon of 200 tons. We have thus only four ships enumerated by
+Purchas, as employed in the <i>second</i> voyage of the new joint
+stock, instead at <i>eight</i> mentioned in the <i>Annals</i>, as
+before stated in the introduction to the present chapter. In this
+voyage, Mr William Edwards was lieutenant, or next in command
+under Captain Downton, being likewise Cape merchant, and
+commander of the Hector. Mr Nicholas Easworth was Cape merchant,
+and commander of the Merchant's Hope. Mr Thomas Elkington, Cape
+merchant, and commander of the Salomon. Mr Peter Rogers minister;
+Martin Pring. Arthur Spaight, Matthew Molineux, and Hugh Bennet,
+masters of the four ships, assisted by sundry mates,--Purch.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 122: Purch. Pilg. I. 500.--Extracted from
+the journal of Captain Downton]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.1. <i>Incidents at Saldanha, Socotora, and Swally; with an
+Account of Disagreements between the Moguls and Portuguese, and
+between the Nabob and the English.</i></p>
+
+<p>We sailed from England on the 1st March, 1614, and arrived in
+the road of Saldanha, or Table Bay, on Wednesday the 15th June,
+being saluted on our arrival by a great storm. While every person
+was busy in mooring the ship, John Barter, who had lost his
+reason in consequence of a long fever, was suddenly missing, and
+was supposed to have made away with himself. The 16th we erected
+our tents, and placed a guard for their defence. We landed half
+our casks on the 17th, to be overhauled and seasoned; and this
+day <i>Choree</i>, the Saldanian or Hottentot, presented me a
+young steer. The 18th we landed more of our beer casks, to be
+washed, repaired, and seasoned. This day, <i>Choree</i> departed
+into the interior, carrying with him his copper armour, javelins,
+and all things belonging to him, promising to be back the third
+day after, but he never returned.</p>
+
+<p>The 29th I sent George Downton ashore, to take observations of
+the latitude and variation, in consideration of the great
+difference in the variations, as observed in this and my former
+voyage in the Pepper-corn. We made the latitude exactly 34&deg;
+S. and the variation 1&deg; 45' W. by an azimuth, whereas most of
+the former variations at this place were easterly. We this night
+took down our tents, and brought every thing on board, making our
+ships ready to depart next day, which we did accordingly.</p>
+
+<p>We came to anchor in the bay of St Augustine in Madagascar on
+the 6th August, when the inhabitants abandoned the place, so that
+we could have no intercourse with them, but we afterwards got
+some refreshments from them. We here cut down some straight
+timber for various uses. We set sail on the 12th August, and
+anchored in Delisa bay in Socotora on the 9th September. Next day
+we went ashore to wait upon the king, who was ready with his
+attendants to receive me, and gave me an account of the existing
+war in India, where the Mogul and the kings of the Deccan had
+united to drive the Portuguese from the country, owing to their
+having captured a ship coming from Juddah in the Red Sea, in
+which were three millions of treasure. He also informed me of two
+great fights which Captain Best had with the Portuguese, and of
+other news in these parts. I here procured such refreshments as
+the place could furnish, and bought 2722 pounds of aloes from the
+king.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving Delisa on the 14th September, we got sight of the
+Deccan coast near Dabul on the 2d October, where we found great
+hindrance to our navigation, till we learnt by experience to
+anchor during the ebb tide, and continue our course with the tide
+of flood. Continuing this procedure, we anchored in the evening
+of the 14th, two and a half miles short of the bar of Surat; when
+presently a fleet of fourteen frigates or barks came to anchor
+near us, which we discovered by their lights, as it was quite
+dark. But as they could easily see us, by the lights at our
+ports, that we were in readiness for them, they durst not come
+any nearer, so that we rode quietly all night. Early of the 15th,
+we weighed with the land-wind, and coming somewhat near the
+frigates, they also weighed and stood to the southwards. We held
+on our course past the bar, towards South Swally, where we soon
+after arrived, though much opposed by contrary winds.</p>
+
+<p>Soon after we were anchored, I sent Molineux in his pinnace,
+and Mr Spooner with Samuel Squire in my <i>gellywatte</i>,[123]
+to take the soundings within the sands. In a channel where we
+found only five feet at low water in our former voyage, Mr
+Molineux had now three fathoms; and Mr Spooner had now seven or
+eight feet, where our boats could not pass at all formerly.
+Seeing some people on the shore in the afternoon, whom I supposed
+might be some of our merchants from Surat, I sent my pinnace to
+them; but they were some of the people belonging to <i>Coge
+Nozan</i>, sent to discover what nation we were of. From them I
+got farther information respecting the wars with the Portuguese,
+being told that the Moguls were besieging Damaun and Diu, Mocrib
+or Mucrob Khan being the general of the Mogul forces against
+Damaun; and I also learnt to my sorrow, that Mucrob Khan was
+governor and viceroy, as it may be called, not only over Surat,
+but all the country round, as, from former experience, I
+considered him to be a great enemy of our nation, and a friend to
+the Portuguese. From these people likewise, I heard of the health
+of Mr Aldworth and the rest of our factory, and wrote to hasten
+his presence, sending my letters by the servants of Coge
+Nozan.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 123: From this singular term, what is now
+called the <i>jollyboat</i> has probably derived its
+name.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I sent my purser on shore in the pinnace, early of the 16th,
+to purchase such necessaries as I thought might easily have been
+got; but he returned about ten o'clock a.m. without buying any
+thing for our purpose, bringing with him Mr Aldword, the chief
+merchant of our factory at Surat, along with whom was one Richard
+Steel, who had come over-land to Surat from Aleppo.[124] Mr
+Aldworth endeavoured to persuade me that Mucrob Khan was our
+friend, and that we had now an excellent opportunity to obtain
+good trade and satisfactory privileges while the Moguls were
+engaged in war with the Portuguese; and as both the Nabob and all
+the natives were rejoiced at hearing of our arrival, they would
+assuredly give us a most favourable reception. Pleased with these
+hopeful circumstances, I yet still wished some other person here
+in command instead of Mucrob Khan, of whom I remained doubtful,
+and that we should have no free trade from him, but in his
+accustomed manner, which I believed to have been, of his own
+accord to cross us, and not as so constrained by direction of his
+king; and the event turned out accordingly, though we were wise
+behind the band, as will appear in the sequel. Even the name he
+bore ought to have opened our eyes as to his influence with the
+Great Mogul: as <i>Mocrub</i> signifies as much as <i>his own
+bowels, Khan</i> meaning <i>great lord</i>. Yet I was deluded to
+believe that his favour with the king was tottering, and that he
+might easily be brought into disgrace, by complaint of any thing
+done contrary to the will or humour of the king; so that we were
+too bold, and injured our business when we found him opposing us,
+as we thought unreasonably. On enquiring into the state of our
+business, and the health of our factory, Mr Aldworth informed me
+that Paul Canning and several others had died; that Thomas
+Kerridge had long since been agent in his room at the court of
+the Mogul, and that the factory at Surat now only contained
+himself and William Bidulph.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 124: Mr Richard Stell, or Steel, had gone
+to Aleppo, to recover a debt from a merchant of that city, who
+had fled to India; and, following him through Persia, Mr Steel
+had arrived at Surat. On his report, the factors at Surat made an
+experiment to open a trade with Persia, which will form the
+subject of a future section of this chapter.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 17th, I called a council to advise upon
+the best manner of conducting our affairs here, and to consider
+who might be the best person to send to Agraas resident. Then
+entering upon the six interrogatories, inserted in the second
+article of our commission, I required Mr Aldworth to give direct
+answers to every question.--1. In what favour was Paul Canning
+with the emperor and his council, and how did he conduct himself
+at court in the business entrusted to him? He answered, That on
+his first arrival at court, he was well respected by the emperor,
+till the Jesuits made known that he was a merchant, and not sent
+immediately from our king; after which he was neglected, as he
+himself complained: and, as for his carriage and behaviour there,
+so far as he knew, it was sufficiently good;--3. Then demanding,
+whether it were needful to maintain a resident at court? Mr
+Aldworth answered, That it was certainly necessary, as the
+emperor required that one of our nation should reside there; and
+therefore, that the person ought to be a man of good respect, for
+preventing and counteracting any injuries that might be offered
+by the Jesuits, our determined adversaries; as he might also be
+extremely useful in promoting and directing the purchase and sale
+of various commodities.--6. Being questioned as to the expences
+of a resident at court? he said, according to the estimate of
+Paul Canning, it might be about &pound;300 per annum; but, some
+time afterwards, his estimate was found to extend to five, six,
+and seven hundred pounds a year.--Being afterwards questioned,
+Whether he thought it fit that Mr Edwards should proceed to court
+under the designation of a merchant, according to the strict
+letter of the company's commission? his opinion was, by the
+experience of the late Mr Canning, that such a resident would not
+be at all respected by the king.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 24th, Coge Nozan came down to the water
+side, and rested in my tent till I landed. I repaired to him,
+accompanied by all our merchants, and attended by a strong guard,
+armed with halberts, muskets, and pikes, having a coach to carry
+me from the landing place to the tent. On alighting from my
+coach, Coge Nozan came immediately to meet me. Before entering on
+business, he was told that a present for the Nabob was to be
+delivered to him, which was brought in. This consisted of a case
+containing six knives, two pair of knives, six sword-blades, six
+Spanish pikes, one case of combs, one mirror, one picture of Mars
+and Venus, one ditto of the Judgment of Paris, two Muscovy hides,
+and one gilded case of bottles filled with strong rich cordials.
+I then made the following present to himself: Six knives in
+single sheaths, four sword-blades, two pikes, one comb-case, a
+mirror, a picture of Moses, and a case of bottles, in
+consideration of the promise made by the nabob to our people,
+that whatever Coge Nozan agreed to, he the nabob would
+perform.</p>
+
+<p>I then moved for the enlargement of our privileges, and
+lessening of our customs, especially at Baroach, and that we
+might have a daily bazar or market at the water side, where we
+might purchase beef for our people, according to the
+<i>firmaun</i> already granted by the Mogul, and because other
+flesh did not answer for them. He answered, that the nabob would
+shew us every favour in his power, if we would assist him against
+the Portuguese; that the customs of Baroach were out of his power
+to regulate, as the king had already farmed these to another
+person at a stipulated rent; and that we should have a regular
+market, but that bullocks and cows could not be allowed, as the
+king had granted a firmaun to the Banians, in consideration of a
+very large sum of money, that these might not be slaughtered. In
+fine, I found he had no power to grant us any thing; yet, willing
+to leave me somewhat contented, he proposed that I should send
+some of our merchants along with him to the nabob, where our
+business might be farther discussed.</p>
+
+<p>I accordingly sent along with him, Mr Aldworth, Mr Ensworth,
+Mr Dodsworth, Mr Mitford, and some others. Two or three days
+afterwards, they had access to the nabob, to whom they explained
+our desires, as before expressed. He then desired to know whether
+we would go with our ships to fight for him against Damaun, in
+which case, he said, we might count upon his favour? To this it
+was answered, that we could not on any account do this, as our
+king and the king of Spain were in peace. He then asked if we
+would remove our ships to the bar of Surat, and fight there
+against the Portuguese ships, if they came to injure the subjects
+of the Mogul? This likewise was represented to be contrary to the
+peace between our kings. On which he said, since we would do
+nothing for his service, he would do nothing for us. Several of
+the merchants of Surat endeavoured to persuade our merchants,
+that I ought to give way to the reasonable request of the nabob,
+and might still do what I thought proper; as, notwithstanding of
+our ships riding at the bar, the Portuguese frigates could go in
+and out on each side of me, owing to their light draught of
+water. To this I answered, that the proposal was utterly unfit
+for me to listen to; as whatever I promised I must perform,
+though at the expence of my own life and of all under my command,
+and that I could not possibly lend myself to fight against the
+Portuguese on any account whatever, unless they first attacked
+me, as it was absolutely contrary to my commission from my own
+sovereign. I added, that, if the Portuguese provoked me by any
+aggression, I would not be withheld from fighting them for all
+the wealth of the nabob: But he made small account of this
+distinction, and, seeing that we refused to fulfil his wishes, he
+opposed us in all our proceedings as far as he could, so that we
+nearly lost all our former hopes of trading at this place. In
+this dilemma, I made enquiry respecting <i>Gengomar</i> and
+<i>Castellata</i>, and also of <i>Gogo</i>:[125] but could get
+poor encouragement to change for better dealing, so that we
+remained long perplexed how to act, and returned to our business
+at the ships.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 125: Gogo is on the west shore of the gulf
+of Cambay. In an after passage of this voyage, what is here
+called Gengomar <i>and</i> Castellata, is called Gengomar
+<i>or</i> Castelletto, which may possibly refer to Jumbosier, on
+a river of the same name, about sixty miles north from Surat.
+Castelletta must have been a name imposed by the
+Portuguese.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 27th, in the morning, when Nicholas Ufflet went ashore, he
+found all the people belonging to Swally had gone away from the
+water-side in the night, as also all those who used to stay
+beside the tents, in consequence of an order from the nabob; and
+was farther informed that our merchants were detained at Surat,
+having been stopped by force when attempting to cross the bridge,
+and had even been beaten by the guard set there by the nabob. The
+gunner's boy and his companion, formerly supposed to have run
+away, and who were in company at the time with our merchants,
+being on their return to the ships, were also well beaten, and
+detained with the rest. The 31st we began to take in fresh water,
+to be ready for departing, as our stay here seemed so very
+uncertain. This day, Thomas Smith, the master's boy, had most of
+the outer part of one of his thighs bitten off by a great fish,
+while swimming about the ship. The ravenous fish drew him under
+water, yet he came up again and swam to the ship, and got up to
+the bend, where he fainted. Being brought into the gun-room, the
+surgeon endeavoured to do what he could for his recovery; but he
+had lost so much blood that he never recovered out of the swoon,
+and shortly died.</p>
+
+<p>In the evening of the 2d November, Mr Aldworth and Mr
+Elkington came down from Surat, where they left Mr Ensworth very
+sick. They reported to me their proceedings with the nabob, as
+formerly stated; but said they were now reconciled, and that he
+had made fair promises of future respect, with a free trade
+through all the country under his government. I do not attribute
+his severe proceedings hitherto to any hatred or ill-will to our
+nation, but to his fears lest we might unite with the Portuguese
+against him, owing to my refusing to assist him against Damaun.
+These his doubts and fears were increased by a knavish device of
+the subtle and lying Jesuits; who, taking advantage of my refusal
+to fight against the Portuguese without cause, at Damaun or
+elsewhere, pretended with the nabob that they had a letter from
+the viceroy, saying, That he and his friends the English meant to
+join their forces and come against Surat. This devilish device
+gave much hindrance to our business, by occasioning continual
+doubt in the nabob's mind of our friendly intentions; and
+unfortunately likewise, Mr Aldworth had strengthened these doubts
+and fears, though ignorant of the lying inventions of the
+jesuits; for, thinking to mollify their rigour, he rashly advised
+them to beware, lest their ill usage might force us to join with
+the Portuguese against them. We likewise believed that the order
+of the nabob, forbidding the people to trade with us on board,
+proceeded entirely from his desire to thwart us: But we
+afterwards learnt, by letter from Thomas Kerridge, that Mucrob
+Khan, and all other governors of sea-ports, had express orders
+from the Mogul, not to allow any trade with us till they had
+first chosen and purchased, for the king's use, all kinds of
+strange and unusual things we might have to dispose of.</p>
+
+<p>On the 3d I called a council to deliberate concerning our
+business, and especially how far we might proceed in aid of the
+natives against the Portuguese, for which purpose we carefully
+examined our commission and instructions. We also arranged the
+appointments of the merchants for their several places of
+employment, both such as were to remain in the factory at Surat,
+and those who were to proceed on the voyage. This day likewise,
+sixty bales of indigo, and eleven packs of cotton-yarn, came
+aboard from Surat, being goods that belonged to the
+<i>twelfth</i> voyage. It was my desire to have been ashore among
+our merchants, that I might assist in arranging our business at
+Surat; and this the rather because of the turbulent, head-strong,
+and haughty spirit of----,[126] who was ever striving to sway
+every thing his own way, thwarting others who aimed at the common
+good, and whose better discretion led them to more humility. But
+such was the uncertain state of our business, partly owing to the
+nabob and his people, and partly to the Portuguese, who I heard
+were arming against us; and besides, because I understood that
+the nabob proposed to demand restitution for the goods taken by
+Sir Henry Middleton in the Red Sea, at under rates, as they say,
+though I know they had goods for goods even to the value of a
+halfpenny. On all these accounts, therefore, I thought it best to
+keep nearest my principal charge, referring all things on shore
+to the merchants of my council, in most of whom I had great
+confidence.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 126: This name is left blank in the
+Pilgrims, probably because Purchas, a contemporary, did not wish
+to give offence.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 22d November, I finished my letters for Persia; being one
+for the company, to be forwarded over land, one for Sir Robert
+Shirley, and one of instructions for Richard Steel. The 23d,
+<i>Lacandus</i>, the Banian, came down to us, with news of
+discontent and hard speeches that had passed between the nabob
+and our merchants, but who were now again reconciled. This was
+occasioned by Mr Edwards refusing to let him see the presents,
+which he was at last obliged to consent to. All these merchants
+wrote me at this time separately, that the viceroy was certainly
+arming against us. At this time Mr Ensworth and Timothy Wood died
+within an hour of each other. John Orwicke, Robert Young, and
+Esay But, were now dispatched to provide such cloths and
+cotton-yarns as we had formerly agreed on. The 25th Mr Edwards
+wrote me of the coming of three great men, bringing seven
+firmauns from the Great Mogul; in whose presence the nabob
+bestowed upon him 850 <i>mahmudies</i>, ten fine <i>basties</i>,
+thirty <i>top-seels</i>, and thirty <i>allizaes</i>; at the same
+time he gave ten <i>top-seels</i> to Mr Elkington and Mr
+Dodsworth, a cloak to Mr Aldworth and another to Mr Elkington, Mr
+Dodsworth having had one before. He likewise promised free trade
+to all places under his command, and abundant refreshments for
+our people in the ships.</p>
+
+<p>The 27th, John Crowther came from Surat, to inform me he had
+been appointed by the chief merchants at Surat to accompany Mr
+Steel into Persia, and had therefore come to take leave of me,
+and to fetch away his things from the ship. This day also Mr
+Edwards wrote to me, by Edmund Espinol, to send him fifty
+elephants teeth, indifferently chosen as to size, as a banian
+merchant was in treaty for them all, if they could agree on
+terms. The 6th December, the nabob seemed ashamed that he had not
+shewn me the smallest respect since my arrival, and, being
+desirous to excuse himself, he this day entreated Mr Edwards to
+go on board along with the great banian who had bought our ivory,
+and Lacandas, the banian merchant of the junk belonging to the
+king of <i>Cushan</i>.[127] He chose this last, on account of his
+former familiarity with our people, and commissioned him to buy
+sword-blades, knives, and mirrors. By them he sent me a present,
+consisting of two <i>corge</i> of coarse <i>bastas</i>, ten fine
+<i>bastas</i>, ten <i>top-seels</i>, ten <i>cuttonies</i>, and
+three quilts, together with a message, certifying that the nabob
+proposed to come down to visit me in a day or two at the most. At
+their going ashore, I gave them a salute of five guns.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 127: Kessem, on the coast of Arabia Felix,
+is probably here meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They told me, that the nabob had certain intelligence from
+Goa, that the viceroy was fitting out all the force he could
+muster to come against us; and expressed a wish, on the part of
+the nabob, that I would convoy one or two of his ships for two or
+three days sail from the coast, which were bound for the Red Sea.
+To this I answered, that I could not do this; as, if once off the
+coast, the wind was entirely adverse for our return: But, if he
+would further our dispatch, so that we might be ready in any
+convenient time, I would do any thing reasonable that he could
+desire. The 9th, the nabob's son came to the shore, but would not
+venture on board, wherefore I went ashore to him. He had a horse
+ready for me on landing to fetch me, and desired me to sit down
+beside him, which I did. He then commanded some horsemen, who
+accompanied him, to amuse me, by shewing their warlike evolutions
+on the sands, chasing each other after the fashion of the Deccan,
+whence they were; and at his desire I caused eleven guns to be
+fired, to do him honour. Though he refused to drink any wine at
+this interview, he sent for it after his departure, as also for a
+fowling-piece he had seen in the hands of one of our people, both
+which I sent him, together with a bowl from which to drink the
+wine.</p>
+
+<p>S.2. <i>Account of the Forces of the Portuguese, their hostile
+Attempts, and Fight with the English, in which they are
+disgracefully repulsed</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On the 16th of December, 1613, Mr Elkington wrote me, That the
+nabob had told him the Portuguese frigates had burnt Gogo, with
+many <i>gouges</i> or villages in its vicinity, together with ten
+large ships, of which the <i>Rehemee</i> was one, and an hundred
+and twenty small vessels. He said likewise, that the nabob was
+much displeased with me for not having fired upon the Portuguese
+vessels, as they passed our anchorage, which circumstance had
+renewed his suspicions of our friendly intelligence with the
+Portuguese; and, although Mr Elkington had said every thing he
+could to explain the reason of our conduct, as stated formerly,
+he could not satisfy the nabob of its propriety. The 23d two
+boats came off to us for lead; and on the same day we saw
+twenty-two Portuguese frigates, which came to anchor in the night
+between, us and the mouth of the river, where they continued most
+part of next day.</p>
+
+<p>The 24th, in the morning, we saw four boats coming down the
+river towards us; but, on seeing the Portuguese frigates, they
+immediately turned back, and were chased up the river by two of
+the frigates. Finding they could not get up with the boats, the
+Portuguese landed and set fire to two or three poor cottages, and
+carried off two or three cattle, and then returned to their
+squadron at the mouth of the river. In the afternoon, they all
+went up the river in company. In the morning early of the 25th,
+we saw five or six frigates under sail. An hour or two after, we
+saw a boat standing towards us, which was presently chased by two
+frigates, on which the men in the small boat ran her a-ground and
+forsook her; but as the frigates could not float near where the
+boat was, and the tide was ebbing fast, they departed without
+farther harm. The 26th in the morning, I sent the Hope a good way
+to the northward from the rest of our fleet, to see whether the
+Portuguese would assail her.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the morning of the 27th, the Portuguese frigates came
+and made a bravado before our ship, and then before the Salomon,
+which was next us; and from thence went directly against the
+Hope, which rode a great way from us, in which manoeuvre they had
+all their men close stowed below, and not one to be seen. The
+master of the Hope hailed them twice, but they would give no
+answer; on which they let fly at them from the bow-chases of the
+Hope, which only could be brought to bear, and by which they were
+forced with some loss to stand away. The master of the Hope was
+satisfied, if he had not shot at them, that they would have
+attempted to board, or to have set his ship on fire, as they had
+the advantage of both wind and tide, and were so directly a-head
+of his ship that he could hardly get any of his guns to bear upon
+them, while the rest of our ships could not have come up to his
+rescue. In the afternoon, I sent the Salomon to keep company with
+the Hope; and, going to the northwards of her, she made several
+shots at the frigates, but we did not perceive that any harm was
+done. I therefore ordered a gun to be fired, as a warning to
+desist, on which the Salomon stood in again and came to
+anchor.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 28th, I went in the pinnace aboard the
+Hope and Salomon, to enquire the reason of their firing. And the
+Portuguese, seeing our boats pass to and fro, removed in the
+afternoon, and anchored a little way without us, obviously for
+the purpose of cutting off our intercourse. In the meantime, the
+boat which had been chased ashore on the 25th, came aboard the
+Gift, bringing some letters from Mr Elkington, which our master
+sent to me, as I was then in the Hope. Having answered Mr
+Elkington's letter, I sent back the <i>gelliwat</i> to the Gift,
+with directions to go thence to Surat in the night. But, as the
+<i>gelliwat</i> [galivat] returned, she was chased by the
+frigates; which perceiving, I waved her to return, but she held
+on her way, not observing my signal. The frigates held her so
+close in chase, that they got within shot of her, and even fired
+one gun; and had not the Gift slipped one cable and veered
+another, and plied her ordnance at the Portuguese, they had
+surely taken or sunk the <i>gelliwat</i>. This forced the
+Portuguese to give over the chase, not without damage. Late at
+night, on the tide of ebb, I made the Hope and Salomon set sail
+and come near the other two ships, and then returned on board the
+Gift.</p>
+
+<p>Perceiving on the 29th, that my continuing off the bar of
+Surat was quite unavailing, as the Portuguese frigates could pass
+and repass to and from the river, by going across the sands,
+where there was not water to float my ships; and that no boats
+could come to us to fetch away our goods, for fear of the
+frigates, neither could we have any intercourse with our friends
+ashore, to know what passed; I therefore set sail for Swally
+roads, where I arrived next day, having very little wind.</p>
+
+<p>On the 14th January, 1614, we heard of many frigates being
+arrived, which rode at the bar of Surat all next day till night;
+and, leaving that place after dark, they came and rode within
+shot of us till next morning, when they weighed and stood back to
+the southwards. While they remained at anchor, supposing they
+might be the Mallabars, which the nabob had formerly promised to
+send me, I put forth a flag of truce, and sent Mr Spooner, one of
+our master's mates, towards them, directing him to keep a
+watchful eye to our signals, which we should make if we saw any
+reason of suspicion. Seeing our gallivat draw near, and no sign
+of friendship in answer to ours, I hoisted my flag and fired a
+shot to recall our boat, which immediately came back. At this
+time, our sentinel at the mast-head descried another fleet of
+frigates, which afterwards assembled at the bar of Surat, and
+went all into the river. By this I was satisfied they were all
+Portuguese, and was glad our men and boat had escaped their
+hands. Thinking these frigates were forerunners of a greater
+force, I ordered the decks to be cleared, all our guns thrown
+loose, and every thing to be in readiness for action, both for
+the great guns and small arms, and to fit up barricades for close
+quarters. In the night of the 17th, all the frigates came out of
+the river, and in the morning were all at the point of the
+bar.</p>
+
+<p>The 18th, Maugie, the banian captain formerly mentioned,
+accompanied by another great man, who was son to <i>Clych
+Khan</i>, came to the water side to speak with me, to whom I went
+ashore. Not long after, word was brought from on board, that they
+had descried a fleet of ships far off, which looked very big, but
+which we could not see from the shore, owing to its being very
+low. Taking leave of my visitors, I returned aboard, and made
+every thing be put in readiness, which was done immediately.
+Towards night, we made them out to be six galleons, with three
+smaller ships, besides the sixty frigates which were here before.
+Two gallies belonging to this armament were not yet come up. The
+tide being spent, they came to anchor till next day. The 19th,
+they plied up to the entrance of our new channel, where they came
+to anchor, and where they were joined by the two gallies. One of
+their great ships, being too forward, came too near the sands and
+grounded, but was soon got off again.</p>
+
+<p>On this occasion, Mucrob Khan, the nabob of Surat, sent the
+sabandar and several others of the principal men of Surat, with a
+great present of provisions to the Portuguese, and to endeavour
+to enter into terms of peace; but though great policy was used on
+both sides, they broke off without coming to any terms. This was
+done by the nabob to my great mortification, for he and all the
+country despaired of my being able to resist such
+disproportionate force, and he was therefore willing before hand
+to conciliate the viceroy by presents; considering, if I were
+once overthrown, his own turn would come next, either to endure a
+severe assault, or to make such a peace as the enemy chose to
+dictate. Peace was certainly most desirable for the viceroy, that
+he might restore trade with the Moguls. Yet, seeing the
+tractableness of the nabob, and his apparent earnestness for
+peace, the viceroy made light of it for the present, expecting to
+bring it to bear with great advantage after he had overthrown us,
+which he made no doubt easily to accomplish. When this was
+performed, he expected to receive great presents, and great
+submission from the Moguls to the dictates of the conqueror. But
+it pleased God, who beheld the injustice of his attempt, to turn
+the event contrary to the expectations both of the viceroy and
+the nabob. After failing in all his attempts against me, and
+finding he could not even gain a <i>boats thole</i> from me in
+all the time he spent here, with loss and disgrace, the viceroy
+was fain to revive the former despised proffer of peace with the
+nabob: While the nabob on the other hand, confirmed by the
+experience of a month, and seeing that the viceroy, after all his
+boastful threatenings, and with so vast an armament, was unable
+to prevail against our four merchant ships, or even to remove our
+small force one foot from their place, gave for answer, that he
+would not make peace with the viceroy. Thus was the viceroy
+frustrated in both his hopes, of an easy victory over us, and an
+advantageous peace with the Moguls. After this digression, I now
+return to our proceedings.</p>
+
+<p>When we formerly heard of the force which the viceroy was
+fitting out against us; we had no conception it would be so
+formidable as it now appeared, and therefore deemed it expedient
+to consult how, by God's help, we might best resist. The odds and
+advantages on their side, made me calculate every thing that made
+against me. Being far out-numbered by his forces, which I
+esteemed the principal ships and means belonging to the
+Portuguese in India, and having all the people of greatest rank
+and valour, I considered it might be too hazardous for us to put
+out into deep water, as by their numbers they would be able to
+intercept and overcharge me, and to force me irrecoverably
+aground, on one side or other. Such were my apparent
+disadvantages in going out to sea; while I knew, on the other
+hand, that their numerous smaller vessels might much annoy us
+with fire-works, or put us otherwise into great hazard, in the
+place where we now rode at anchor, where I was hopeful their
+great ships could not or durst not come, owing to the shoal
+water. Though my numbers were considerably lessened by sickness
+and deaths, all my people, from the highest to the lowest, seemed
+quite courageous, yet ignorant both of our danger and how it was
+to be prevented; but their brave spirit gave me great hope. Yet
+my anxiety was not small, how I might best act in maintaining the
+honour of my country, and not neglect the valuable property
+entrusted to my care by my friends and employers; as not only was
+the present charge to be put in hazard, but all hopes also of
+future benefits, if I were now overthrown; as the enemy, if he
+now got the mastery, would be able to make peace with the Moguls
+on his own terms, to the expulsion of our nation for ever.</p>
+
+<p>Besides these considerations, I leave to such parents as are
+tender for the safety of their dutiful and obedient children, to
+imagine how great was my anxiety for the safety of the people
+under my command. So great was my cares all this time, that I had
+little time for conversation, or even almost to shew myself
+sensible of the approaching dangers. Whenever I could get free
+from others, I very earnestly craved the aid and direction of the
+almighty and ever merciful God, who had often delivered me before
+from manifold dangers, praying that he would so direct me that I
+might omit nothing having a tendency to the safety of my charge,
+and our defence against the enemy. I had strong confidence that
+the Almighty would grant my request, and yet was often led to
+doubt, through my manifold and grievous offences. I resolved at
+length what to do, by God's assistance, providing the masters of
+the ships would agree to second me. Being satisfied, if we
+should-receive a defeat while at anchor, our disgrace would be
+great, and our enemies could in that case be little injured by
+us; while by setting sail, the viceroy, in his greediness and
+pride, might do himself some wrong upon the sands, by which he
+might cripple his own force, and thereby open a way for our
+getting out through the rest. Yet this plan seemed only fit for
+ultimate necessity, considering that much of our goods were now
+on their way, and others were expected from day to day; and, if
+once out, unless it pleased God to make us the conquerors, so as
+to drive the viceroy clean away, I should on no account be able
+to return to my anchorage, where only I could get in my lading.
+Considering also that the viceroy would hold his honour in such
+high estimation, that he would rather die than give way; and
+besides, that my people would be tired and half spent with
+labour, before going to fight, by heaving at the capstan to get
+up our anchors, setting the sails, and so forth, which in this
+hot country makes them both weary and faint, to the great
+diminution of their courage; while the viceroy and his soldiers
+being troubled with no labour, which among them is done by slaves
+and inferior mariners, would come fresh into the battle.
+Likewise, even supposing the viceroy to lose many men in the
+fight, he could be again supplied from the nearest towns
+belonging to the Portuguese, by means of his frigates; whereas we
+could not have a single man replaced, whatever number we might
+have slain or disabled.</p>
+
+<p>Having none of our merchants aboard, as they were all employed
+in the country, or with Mr Elkington in our factory at Surat, I
+sent for all the masters, on the night of this Thursday the 19th
+January, desiring them and some of the mates to come to supper
+with me on board the Gift. I then made them a speech on our
+present situation, desiring every one to give his opinion freely,
+how we might best proceed in our present straits. I declared to
+them my confidence in God, notwithstanding all the force of these
+bragging Portuguese, that their injurious attempts would not
+prevail against us, who had been careful not to wrong them in the
+Indies. I represented also to them, the jealousy entertained of
+us by the nabob and other chief men of the country, because we
+had refrained from firing at the saucy bragging frigates.</p>
+
+<p>I found all the masters willing and tractable to my heart's
+desire. We had some few discourses about our provident mooring,
+as also about removing a little lower down. I then proposed my
+plan to them, desiring to have their free opinion. I represented
+that our ships were now in as good condition for battle as we
+could make them, yet our danger by night, if we continued where
+we were, was not small, however provident we might be. Wherefore,
+I thought it fit in the morning at low water, to send one ship to
+ride as far down as we could have water for all our ships at the
+lowest ebb, at which time none of the enemies ships could come to
+annoy her. This, as I thought, might induce the viceroy to make
+some attempt at high water, when our other three ships might bear
+down against the stream, the springs being now at the highest,
+when we should see what efforts the viceroy might make, and might
+attend to the same and act accordingly, in the hope that the
+viceroy might commit some error to the weakening of his own force
+and our advantage. And if such should happen, it would then be
+proper for us to put out to sea, in the darkness of the following
+night, when the viceroy would not be in condition to make sail to
+hinder us. Or, if we saw reason, we might make sail daily on the
+flood, working to and again, which would somewhat dismay the
+Portuguese, and encourage our own men. My proposal was
+unanimously agreed to, as the best way of proceeding; and finding
+Mr Molineux quite willing to fall down with the Hope at low water
+next morning, this was directed accordingly.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 20th, at low water, the Hope went down
+to induce the enemy to make some attempt against her when the
+tide rose, and then we in the other ships stood after her. The
+viceroy, and all the worthy knights about him, thinking I was
+about to flee, hastened as soon as the flood would permit to stop
+the passage, and prevent our getting out. We all came to anchor
+short of the Hope, yet not so as to leave her destitute of our
+help, but rather doubting of sufficient depth for our ships at
+low water so far down. On coming to anchor, I went down into my
+cabin, meaning to have given our friends ashore notice of my
+purposes, that they might know it proceeded from no rashness, but
+in good discretion to wait upon advantages to the prejudice of
+our enemies. But presently I had notice, that three of the
+Portuguese ships and most of their frigates were coming stem on
+before the wind upon the Hope, followed by all the galleons.</p>
+
+<p>We endeavoured to weigh our anchor, but having no time for
+that, we cut our cables, and made sail for the rescue of the
+Hope. Before we could get sufficiently near, the enemies ships
+were close aboard of her, and had entered their men, boarding her
+with great appearance of resolution. But they had no quiet abode
+there, nor could they rest in their own ships, neither could they
+cast them loose from the Hope, so greatly were they annoyed by
+our great guns and small arms. At length, their principal
+officers being slain, the rest in great numbers leapt into the
+sea, whence many of them were taken up by their frigates. But,
+before quitting their ships, they set them on fire, thinking to
+have burnt the Hope along with them. But, praised be the Lord of
+Hosts, they were burnt without harm to the Hope; for, so soon as
+the fire had well kindled, the flaming ships were cast loose and
+drifted on the sands, where they continued burning till quenched
+by the flowing tide. So long as day-light lasted, we continued
+exchanging shots from all our ships with the galleons, they being
+on the outside of a spit of sand, and we on the inside. They did
+us little injury in our hulls, but much to our ropes and sails
+overhead. In this conflict, besides those who were wounded, we
+had five men slain. By a great mischance, the main-top-sail,
+top-mast, and shrouds got afire, communicated from the main-top,
+in consequence of the fire-works lodged there taking fire, the
+man being slain who had the charge there. All these were burnt
+quite away, together with a great part of the main-mast; and this
+misfortune prevented us from going out into deep water to try our
+fortune with the viceroy in close fight. We were likewise put to
+our shifts, not knowing by what means we might get the mast
+replaced.</p>
+
+<p>The 21st I got the anchor weighed, which we had been obliged
+to cut from the day before. On the 22d, I was informed that many
+great men, accompanied by a Portuguese friar, and escorted by
+five or six hundred horse, had come down to Swally, meaning to
+send the friar next day, with three or four principal Moors, to
+negociate a peace with the viceroy. But the nabob sent me word,
+that he sought for no such thing, and was resolved to conclude no
+peace, unless we were included. He also granted me what timber we
+might need, of which we availed ourselves, and promised to supply
+us with provisions. The Portuguese remaining quiet on the 25th,
+the <i>muccadam</i> of Swally came to me, saying that the
+before-mentioned friar had sent to entice him to poison the well
+whence we had our water, which he would not consent to, and had
+therefore put some live tortoises into it, that these might shew
+by their deaths, if poison should be put therein by the
+Portuguese. At night, part of the 120 bales of indigo we had
+purchased came to the water side, and was presently got aboard.
+This day <i>Isaac Beg</i> sent me a present of fruit from his own
+garden; and this day likewise the rest of the timber for
+repairing the Hope's mast was brought down to us.</p>
+
+<p>The 27th, I sent all our boats to sound the <i>Swash</i> at
+low water, being chiefly on purpose to keep the Portuguese in
+ignorance of my real intentions. They sent one galley and five
+frigates, thinking to have cut off our boats; but in this they
+failed, as in every thing else they attempted against us. The
+28th, the nabob sent great store of provisions to the viceroy, as
+goats, bread, plantains, and the like, together with a banquet of
+sweetmeats. Coge Nozan sent me a present of five bullocks.
+Several of our men died about this time of fluxes and other
+diseases. The 31st, we received aboard from Cambay, fifty bales
+of indigo. In the afternoon, one <i>Coge Arson Ali</i> came
+aboard, and presented me with several goats, a large supply of
+bread, roast-meat, plantains, sugar, and other such things. Along
+with him came an old acquaintance of mine, a Persian, who said
+there were news from Damaun, that the Portuguese had sent there
+350 men to be buried; and we computed, that there could not be
+less than 100 more, killed and burnt in their ships, besides
+those who were drowned. They also told me, that not only were the
+Portuguese opposed here in India, but also by the Persians at
+Ormus, and that the Malays were in arms against them at Malacca.
+They likewise assured me, that the negociations between Mucrob
+Khan and the viceroy were entirely at an end, and that no peace
+would take place between them.</p>
+
+<p>I had long wished to see this man, who, till now, could never
+get leave of the nabob, without which no one dared use that
+freedom. This jealousy of the nabob proceeded, as he said, from a
+great charge enjoined by the king to procure for his use all
+curious things of value, and he is fearful lest any of these
+should pass through other hands, to his disgrace, which forces
+him to employ strange and severe means to prevent this happening.
+Day being nearly spent, I sent them ashore, making them a
+present, and giving money to all their people, having first shewn
+them how far some of our great guns could throw a ball. They then
+took their leave and departed.</p>
+
+<p>S.3<i>Supplies received by the Portuguese, who vainly
+endeavour to use Fire-boats. They seek Peace, which is refused,
+and depart. Interview between the Nabob and Captain Downton, and
+Departure of the English</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On the 3d February, 1615, there arrived at the waterside
+twenty-four bales of indigo, seven packs of white, seven of
+black, and four of blue <i>bastas,</i> six packs of cotton yarn,
+three of <i>candikens,</i> and one pack of <i>crecany,</i> all of
+which were brought immediately on board. This day also the
+supplies for the viceroy came in sight, being two ships of
+burden, two junks, and eight or ten of the country boats. The
+nabob sent me a message by <i>Lacandas,</i> that these were not
+for the purpose of fighting, but were full of combustibles, meant
+to be set on fire, and allowed to drift with the tide upon our
+ships in the night. I was glad of this information, and took
+immediate measures to prevent the consequences of such an
+attempt, as well as to defend ourselves from the smaller vessels.
+The spring-tides were now near the highest, and were consequently
+fittest for their attacks, so that I expected them every tide;
+and to let them see I was ready for their reception, and how
+little I cared for them, I directed the setting and clearing our
+watch, mornings and evenings, to be announced by a volley of shot
+from every ship, pointing the best piece in my ship at the prow
+of the viceroy's ship, to try his temper, and to daunt the
+courage of his people. It pleased God this morning, when I had
+least leisure for mourning, to call my only son, George Downton,
+to his mercy, who was buried next morning ashore, and the volleys
+intended to insult the viceroy, served also to honour his
+obsequies.</p>
+
+<p>This morning also, while expecting an assault from the
+Portuguese, I was visited by one <i>Mousa Attale,</i> a Malabar
+captain, together with his troop, from whom I got a description
+of the principal ports and harbours of his country, expressing my
+anxious desire to become acquainted with them, and to have league
+and intercourse between them and the English, with mutual trade
+and friendship. He seemed willing to encourage this proposal, and
+requested letters to that effect from me, which their ships might
+shew to my countrymen when they happened to meet, which I gave
+him, as also a letter for his king, requesting kind usage for my
+countrymen if any of their ships should come into his harbours.
+After some conference, he departed, and I presented him with a
+sword-blade, and three or four knives.[128] This day the master
+of the Hope represented that he had several men killed in the
+former engagement, and many hurt, bruised, and disabled from
+service, on which I sent him three men from my ship, four from
+the Hector, and four from the Salomon.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 128: These knives, so often mentioned as
+presents in India, were probably daggers.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 5th I had letters from Mr Aldworth, informing of his
+arrival at Baroach with his companions, and saying that he had
+been set upon by 200 Rajput thieves, nine <i>coss</i> from
+Baroach, the day before, the thieves being armed with pikes,
+matchlocks, and bows and arrows; but, after some skirmishing,
+they fled, three of them being slain, and more wounded. In this
+affair Humphrey Elkington was shot through the thigh with an
+arrow, one of the horsemen sent by Surder Khan to guard our
+people was killed, and Mr Aldworth's horse sore wounded. The
+nabob sent me word that the viceroy proposed to assault me this
+day, and therefore sent Coge Nozan to guard the land. Nozan came
+accordingly to the water side, and sent his son, <i>Mamud
+Iehad,</i> to visit me on board, accompanied by a chief named
+<i>Kemagee,</i> the son of <i>Leckdarsee, rajput</i> chieftain of
+<i>Guigamar</i> or <i>Castelletto,</i>[129] who had for a long
+time maintained war with the Moguls and Portuguese. These chiefs
+entreated permission to see and partake in the fight, and as no
+assault was made that day, they remained all night on board. The
+<i>rajput</i> chief went ashore next morning, but the other
+remained on board two or three days, and seeing the enemy would
+do nothing, he went likewise ashore.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 129: On a former occasion supposed to have
+been Jumbosier.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the forenoon of the 8th, we received more indigo aboard,
+and in the afternoon all the Portuguese frigates, with the two
+junks, and two gallies, came driving up with the flood, as if for
+some attempt against us, either by fire, which I most doubted, or
+otherwise. We therefore got under weigh and advanced to meet
+them, upon which they all made off as fast as they could, and we
+came again to anchor. This was merely a device, to make us
+believe their fire-boats were to come against us from the south,
+and that we might have no suspicion of their coming from the
+northwards; wherefore they again assembled all their junks,
+frigates, and galleys next night, a little without the sands, to
+call our attention from the northern quarter. But I was aware of
+that being the place of greatest danger; and though I commanded a
+careful outlook to be kept both ways, I especially enjoined to be
+watchful in the north quarter, as it fell out accordingly. A
+little within the night, between us and a great light to the
+westwards, upon the island of Gogo, we could discern them
+creeping up to the north upon the flood; and then, about ten
+o'clock at night, when very dark, and before the moon rose, upon
+the last quarter of the ebb tide, there came down towards us two
+fire-boats, towed by two frigates, which we happily descried
+before they came nigh, and plied them heartily both with great
+guns and small arms. By this we soon beat off the frigates, which
+set the fire-boats adrift, and made sail from us.</p>
+
+<p>One of the fire-boats drifted clear of the Gift, Hector, and
+Salomon, but got athwart the cable of the Hope, and presently
+blew up; but, blessed be God, the Hope received no harm, having
+cut her cable and got clear. The other fire-boat came up likewise
+on the quarter of the Hope, all in flames, but did no harm, as
+she drifted past with the ebb. She came up again with the tide of
+flood, and was like to have got foul of us; but our boats towed
+her ashore continually burning. The former one floated likewise
+back with the flood, but sank near us in the morning. This day I
+had a letter from Thomas Kerridge, specifying that Nicholas
+Whittington had gone distracted, and expressing some doubts of
+Richard Steel.</p>
+
+<p>The 10th, at night, about the same time as before, two other
+fire-boats came against us, towed by four or five frigates,
+bearing directly on the Hector. Immediately on perceiving them,
+the Gift and Hector let drive at them with great guns and small
+arms, so that the frigates threw them adrift, firing them sooner
+than they otherwise would. The burning boats floated toward the
+Hector, but having a stiff breeze, drifted past to leewards.
+Within half an hour after, we perceived many boats drifting
+towards the Hector, against which we again let drive, forcing the
+frigates to abandon them in such a hurry that they only set two
+of them on fire, there being four of them chained together.
+Fortunately we had a stiff gale, and by edging up to windward,
+they all floated clear to leeward. While passing, our gunner made
+a shot at one of the boats that was unfired, which struck her and
+set her on fire. The vehemence of the flames reached the fourth
+boat, and set her likewise on fire; so they all drifted ashore in
+flames, hard by our landing-place. My pinnace took three of the
+actors in a small canoe, in which they thought to have escaped.
+Two of these men were brought aboard my ship, the third being
+left in the Hector. Besides these, our <i>gelliwat</i> picked up
+another, which she brought with her. Thus did God disappoint all
+the malicious practices of our enemy.</p>
+
+<p>Seeing himself foiled in all his injurious attempts, the
+viceroy set sail on the 11th, and fell down to the bar of Surat,
+where he anchored. Being suspicious that he meant to attempt
+taking Surat, I resolved, in that case, to have gone with my
+ships to set upon his fleet, which must have constrained him to
+desist from his enterprise against Surat, as I was desirous to
+assist in defending a place where we had so great a stock, and so
+many of our merchants. But the viceroy durst not trust me so far
+as to unman his ships, lest I should come against him. In the
+night he sent all his frigates into the river, and sent some
+person to propose peace, but received a flat denial. The 12th,
+the nabob sent <i>Lacandas</i> to inform me that five or six
+frigates had gone to the northwards, having four or five
+fire-boats, which they meant to let drive upon us in the night,
+and therefore wished me to keep a good look-out. I acknowledged
+his kindness, and was glad of his care, though needing no such
+admonition, as I was equally suspicious of their practices when
+out of sight as when they rode near us. The nabob had this
+intelligence from the Jesuits, with whom he kept on fair terms,
+for his better security, if he should have been put to the worst.
+As the frigates, or other vessels in the offing, could not well
+discern the place where our ships rode during the darkness of the
+night, by reason of the shadow of the shore, they had lights made
+for them ashore for guiding them where to find us during their
+hellish incendiary plans. Having observed this light, night after
+night, always in the same place, and seeing it as before on the
+night of the 13th, I sent William Gurdin ashore with twenty men,
+armed with muskets and pikes, directing them to endeavour to
+surround this fire-blazer, supposing him to be some traitor
+inhabiting the neighbourhood. But, on coming near, the fire was
+presently put out, and was again seen at another place, quite
+contrary to the direction of their pursuit; and so going up and
+down for a long time, they gave it over, esteeming it some
+delusion of the devil. This night the viceroy set sail from the
+bar of Surat, leaving about twenty of his frigates in the river
+to keep in check the Malabar frigates which were there for the
+defence of the town.</p>
+
+<p>The 14th, the nabob sent a great man, who, in token of
+friendship, was called his brother, to visit me. This person gave
+as his opinion that the viceroy was gone with all his fleet to
+Goa, leaving some frigates to keep possession of the river, and
+others to return to Diu and Ormus. But my own opinion is, that
+the viceroy has only gone somewhere to refresh his people, and to
+reinforce his ships, against our putting to sea, when no sands
+will be in the way of his greatest ships coming against me. He
+also told me that the king had sent down forces for the purpose
+of conquering Damaun and all the sea coast. He said likewise,
+that they were more willing to give entertainment and trade to
+our nation than the Portuguese, which I thought very reasonable,
+as the Portuguese had always been injurious, and had done many
+vile things against them. Yet, unless we continue able to resist
+the Portuguese, they will soon unsay that speech for their own
+ease. When he had viewed our ship, with our ordnance and
+defensive preparations, we sent him and his train on shore in oar
+boats, in all courtesy.</p>
+
+<p>We now set seriously to work in clearing and loading the Hope
+for England, having hitherto taken in our goods confusedly and by
+hasty snatches, some into one ship, and some into others, not
+deeming it proper to hazard all in one bottom while exposed to so
+much danger from the Portuguese. I had resolved to send home the
+Hope, not that I esteemed her burden the fittest for the goods we
+had provided, but because of the many impediments and
+disabilities of that ship, as daily complained of by the master
+and carpenter; in particular, that her stern-post within the
+rudder was unsheathed, a strange and dangerous neglect and
+unaccountable oversight, on which account it was fitting she
+should soonest return; besides, we were in danger of losing our
+quicksilver which was in her, and lay on her keel and bilges.</p>
+
+<p>The 18th, the nabob sent to me Cage Arson Ali, the sabandar,
+and other merchants of Surat, requesting me to remain for fifteen
+days, which I would in no sort consent to. They then importuned
+me to stop for ten days, which likewise I refused, shewing them
+how prejudicial so long delay might be to my voyage. The cause of
+their request was, lest the viceroy might come with all his
+forces against Surat after my departure. Seeing them discontented
+at my denial, and loth to give displeasure to the nabob, which
+might be prejudicial to our affairs afterwards, and considering
+that it would require six days of the ten before we could get the
+Hope ready, I at last consented to their request, to their great
+satisfaction. At night on the 22d I had a letter from Surat,
+informing me that the nabob meant to visit me next day, and
+accordingly two elephants and six camels came down in the morning
+of the 23d, bringing his tents and other matters for his
+reception. The 24th, Mr Aldworth came down with the rest of the
+merchants to finish all business with me previous to our
+departure.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 25th, the nabob came down with a great
+train, with six other elephants, and was two hours at the water
+side before I knew of his arrival. When told, I was sorry for the
+neglect, and sent Mr Aldworth, Mr Elkington, and Mr Dodsworth
+ashore to compliment him, and to keep him in discourse till I
+could go on shore, which I did soon after. I proposed to have
+gone to him as a son to his father, in my doublet and hose,
+without arms or any great train, according to custom, to shew the
+trust and confidence I reposed in him; but my friends persuaded
+me to the contrary, insisting that I should go well appointed,
+and attended by a sufficient guard, to which I consented, though
+I afterwards repented that I had not followed my own way. I went
+accordingly ashore with about 140 men, part pikes, and part
+firelocks, who gave me a volley of small arms as I entered the
+nabob's tent. The nabob received me with much kindness, seeming
+much pleased at my coming ashore to him. We sat for some time
+under a very fair tent, open on all sides, and surrounded by many
+people, both his attendants and mine.</p>
+
+<p>At length he brought me into a more private room, near
+adjoining, having only along with him Ali Khan, a great Persian
+captain, with Henie the Banian as his interpreter; while I was
+accompanied by Messrs. Aldworth, Elkington, and Dodsworth. We
+there conferred about the state of his country, and about our
+affairs. At last I invited him to go on board to view our ship,
+to which he readily consented. He then presented me with his own
+sword, with many complimentary speeches, saying it was the custom
+of his country to honour with arms such captains as had deserved
+well. This sword, as he said, was made in his own house, the hilt
+being of massy gold. In return, I presented to him my own arms,
+being sword and dagger, together with my girdle and hangers, by
+me much esteemed, and making a much finer shew than his, though
+of less value. We came forth together from the private tent, and
+I walked down to the shore to wait for his coming, whither he
+sent me a present of ten <i>cuttonee</i> quilts and twenty
+<i>topseels</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Soon after the nabob came to the shore, and we took boat
+together, going on board my ship. Having shewn our ordnance, and
+the manner of pointing the guns, and explained all our other
+preparations for defence, I presented him with a very handsome
+gilt cup and cover, some fair knives, a rundlet of Muscadine
+wine, and some other toys. Desiring to see some of our ordnance
+shot off, and how far they could carry their balls on the water,
+I caused three guns to be fired. He would then have taken leave,
+but I accompanied him ashore, and ordered him to be saluted at
+his departure with eleven guns. When we parted at the water side,
+the nabob gave me four baskets of grapes. He likewise gave among
+the gunners and trumpeters 200 mahmoodies, and 500 among the
+ship's company, together with 100 <i>books</i> of white
+<i>bastas</i>, worth two mahmoodies each. Thus, after some
+compliments, we took leave of each other and parted. While rowing
+up along shore for my better getting on board, as the tide ran
+very swiftly, <i>Lacandas</i> came running towards the boat,
+bearing a message from the nabob to ask if he should erect a tomb
+over the grave of my son. I returned my hearty thanks for the
+kind offer, desiring Lacandas to say that I had already begun to
+do so. The nabob then went away to Surat, and not long after his
+tent was taken down and went after him, with all the rest of his
+carriages.</p>
+
+<p>The 26th, the nabob's son and son-in-law, a very ingenious
+young man, came to visit me, upon whom I bestowed some knives and
+other things, such as I had left, which could not be much, as I
+had every now and then some great man or other to visit me, to
+all of whom I had to give something. The 27th, the three sons of
+Ali Khan came to visit me, the eldest of whom, named Guger Khan,
+presented me with two antilopes, a male and a female, of which I
+was very glad, having endeavoured before ineffectually to send
+some home to Sir Thomas Smith. After viewing all our ship, with
+our ordnance and warlike preparations for defence, I gave him
+four Spanish pikes, and some other things of my own, and saluted
+him with eleven guns at his departure.</p>
+
+<p>In the afternoon of the 3d March, upon the tide of ebb, and
+having a light gale from the north, sufficient to give
+steerage-way to our ships, we hastened to get up our anchors,
+meaning to set sail in the prosecution of our voyage, though our
+friends, the Malabars, who had desired to go with us, made no
+attempt to come out. At this time we saw another fleet of
+Portuguese frigates standing in from the westwards, and being
+willing to do my best to hinder them from going into the river of
+Surat, were it only to shew our good-will to the country people,
+we shot at the nearest of them, though without hope of doing them
+any hurt, as there was room for them to pass on either side of
+us, beyond reach of our shot. I was willing also to shew our
+friends on land, as also to those who I made no doubt would go
+down the coast to give notice to the galleons of our coming, that
+we shot at their frigates going into Surat, that they might also
+expect that we cared little for their greater strength.</p>
+
+<p>In our passage this night we had various flaws of inconstant
+winds, which obliged us to come to anchor for some time. As the
+wind became afterwards steady, though faint, we again made sail,
+continuing our course S. by E. along shore. At day-light nest
+morning we began to descry, between us and the shore, the
+Portuguese galleons and two gallies; all of which made sail on
+perceiving us, following with a light breeze, while we stood
+somewhat out of our course with all our sails, partly to gain
+time to prepare ourselves perfectly for battle, and partly to
+give rest to my people, who had taken much fatigue the night
+before, as also to draw the enemy farther from the coast, and
+from having the convenience of fresh supplies. Ere long, the tide
+of flood obliged us to anchor, not having sufficient wind to stem
+the current. The enemy, resting his hopes on the wind, kept
+longer under sail, to his great disadvantage. But as I did not
+consider this at the time as an error in them, I was is great
+doubt lest they might intend going against Surat with all their
+force, now that we were at sea, and there work their wills upon
+our friends and goods, which I could only prevent by following
+them. Yet the season was now so far advanced that I doubted, even
+with our best haste, we should hardly get off the coast before
+the foul weather set in; and this gave me hope that the viceroy
+would not expose himself to the danger of the approaching winter.
+While considering these things, the tide of flood was spent, and
+it was time for us to use the ebb, when, to my great
+satisfaction, I saw the viceroy and his whole fleet standing
+towards us, with a fresh breeze. We likewise made sail, and stood
+our course before him all that ebb, and so spent that night to
+the best advantage, partly at anchor, and partly under sail,
+according as wind and tide served.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 5th, the enemy had gained very little
+way upon us. We spent this day, as before, in riding or sailing,
+as the tide answered. This night the viceroy gained much ground
+upon us, and by this time we had got a good way from the coast,
+and had advanced well to the southwards, so that I was now
+satisfied the Portuguese forces could not this year give any
+annoyance to Surat. I considered that my purposes in these parts,
+both by the authority of my king, and to fulfil the designs of my
+employers, were, in merchant ships, fitted indeed for defence, to
+seek honest commerce, without striving to injure any; wherefore I
+held it fit for me to proceed soberly and discreetly, neither
+basely to flee from the enemy, nor to tempt danger by proudly
+seeking it, if it might be honourably avoided. The viceroy was
+quite differently situated. He had been sent by his master with
+the principal ships of all India, and all the gallants and
+braggarts of these parts, not only to disturb and intercept the
+peaceable trade of the English with the subjects of the Mogul,
+but to take and burn them in the harbours of that great king. The
+viceroy was furnished with abundance of all things the country
+could afford, and only wanted an upright cause. He found what he
+was in search of,--four poor merchant ships, having few men, many
+being dead, and more sick; and these bragadocios, measuring our
+hearts by their own, thought we could never stand against what
+they esteemed so superior a force; and, seeing their intent, I
+baited my hook, which the fish presently ran after.</p>
+
+<p>The Hope, being heavily laden, was in tow of the Hector, and
+being sternmost, three of the Portuguese ships, and thirty or
+forty of their frigates, as I had expected, boarded her with the
+flower of all their chivalry. But, by the hand of God, and to
+their great amazement, they received such a blow that few of them
+escaped, and these by extraordinary chance, and three of their
+ships were burnt.[130] Thus it pleased God to baffle this their
+first assault. Ever after, though they beleaguered us round about
+for many days together, with all sorts of ships, our people still
+in action, and sadly worn out with continual labour, even
+shifting goods from ship to ship in that time, yet did they never
+gain from us even the value of a <i>louse</i> in all that time,
+except our bullets, which we most willingly gave them roundly,
+their fire-boats always failing, and nothing prospering in all
+their efforts. For many days together I sent the viceroy a
+defiance once every twenty-four hours, which must needs lie heavy
+on the stomach of so courageous a gentleman. Craving pardon for
+this digression, I now proceed with my narrative.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 130: I strongly suspect this to be a mere
+recapitulation of what happened in Swally roads, as already
+related, as this second attack on the Hope by the Portuguese is
+entirely omitted by Elkington and Dodsworth.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 6th, in the morning, I sent for my master, letting him
+know that I proposed, when the viceroy should come up near us, to
+cast about and charge him suddenly, that we might strike
+unexpected terror in his people, who now bragged us, seeing us
+flee before them. To this end I went on board all the ships,
+giving them directions how to act, and gave orders to the Hector,
+by means of her pinnace and mine, to take in an hundred bales of
+goods from the Hope, to lighten her, and even staid to see it
+done. By this time it was mid-day, when my ship struck sail for
+my better getting on board; at which, the viceroy thinking it
+staid for him in contempt, as we imagined, be and his consorts
+bore up with the shore, and gave up all hope of mending their
+fortunes by following us any farther; which course I very well
+liked, as there is nothing under his foot to make amends for the
+loss of the worst man's finger in all our ships. Besides, I
+wished for no occasion of fighting unless for the honour of my
+king and country as I would rather save the life of one of my
+poorest sailors than kill a thousand enemies.</p>
+
+<p>Having now finished with the viceroy, I set myself to write
+letters for the dispatch of the Hope, yet still thinking to have
+stood in for the bar of Goa to endeavour to have left some
+compliments there for the viceroy at his return. This was my
+earnest desire, but we were so long delayed in dispatching the
+Hope, that by the time we had finished, we were far beyond
+Goa.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>"The rest of this journal is wanting, as he is also wanting
+who should have finished it. But, alas! this is the imperfection
+of man's best perfections; death lying in ambush to entrap those
+whom by open force he could not devour. He dying in this voyage,
+and following his son, hath left this glorious act, <i>memoriae
+sacrum</i>, the memorable epitaph of his worth, savouring of a
+true heroic disposition, piety and valour being in him seasoned
+by gravity and modesty."--<i>Purch.</i></p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Relations by Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, in Supplement
+to the former Voyage</i>.[131]</p>
+
+<p>"Since writing the voyage of Captain Downton, I have obtained
+the journal of Captain Elkington, in which the reader may proceed
+with this worthy captain to Bantam, and thence to his grave; this
+history succeeding the former, as its author did in
+command."--<i>Purch.</i></p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 131: Purch. Pilgr. I. 514.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In employing the journals of Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, to
+continue the account of the voyage set forth under the command of
+Captain Downton, only so much of both are here inserted as
+answers that purpose, to avoid prolix repetition of
+circumstances, already sufficiently related. The journal of
+Elkington breaks off abruptly, like that of Downton, and probably
+from the same cause; as we learn from Purchas, in the preceding
+notice, that Elkington died at Bantam. The journal of Dodsworth
+entirely relates to the voyage of the Hope to England, after
+parting company with the other two ships, except that it mentions
+several incidents of the transactions previous to the departure
+of that ship, most of which are here omitted, as already
+sufficiently explained.--E.</p>
+
+<p>S.1. <i>Continuation of the Voyage from Surat to Bantam, by
+Captain Thomas Elkington</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On the 4th March, 1615, we descried the Portuguese fleet,
+which immediately gave us chace, which it continued all that day
+and the next. On the 6th, the general came aboard us, wishing us
+to make ready, as he proposed to turn suddenly round and give an
+onset upon the enemy: But, about noon that day, the Portuguese
+bore up and stood for the coast, and in three hours after we lost
+sight of them. At night of the 10th, the Hope departed from us.
+The 15th we saw three water-spouts at no great distance; one of
+them, which was very large, continued for the space of half an
+hour. The 19th we doubled Cape Comorin.</p>
+
+<p>The 10th May, the wind and current both against as, the
+general went to a green island, to the north or the salt hill,
+where we came to anchor in twenty fathoms on good sand. We here
+sought fresh water, but found none. There were plenty of bogs and
+pigs on this island, where likewise we gathered abundance of
+cocoa-nuts. All about this island is good anchorage, within a
+stone's throw of the shore, in twelve fathoms. The pinnace
+brought water from another island, about four leagues off but it
+was brackish.[132] The 2d June we came to anchor in Bantam
+road.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 132: So vaguely is this journal expressed,
+or rather so miserably abbreviated by Purchas, that there are no
+indications by which to guess even where this island lay, except
+that it was on the way between Cape Comorin and
+Bantam.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 3d July we weighed mace, and received silk towards
+furnishing the Salomon for Masulipatam, to which place we agreed
+to send the following merchants: George Chancie, Ralph Preston,
+Humphry Elkington, Timothy Mallory, George Savage, and Robert
+Savage. The 8th we loaded porcelain into the Salomon. This day we
+had news by a junk from the Moluccas, that the Thomasine was
+there; and that there were twelve sail of Hollanders at Ternate,
+who endeavoured to prevent all others from trading. The 11th our
+old house very narrowly escaped burning, in conscience of a fire
+very near. The 20th, Mr Jordan had letters from. Mr Ball at
+Macasser, complaining of violent ill usage from the Hollanders,
+who had driven him from thence, and stating that they proposed
+coming with all their force to take possession of Bantam, and to
+place the king of <i>Motron</i> in the government. The 21st Mr
+Bennet set sail in the Salomon. The 25th, the Advice and
+Attendance arrived from England, after a voyage of eight months.
+They met the Globe and James at the Cape, to which ships they
+spared eighteen men. These ships departed for England on the 17th
+July, and the Advice and her consort on the 18th, meeting a ship
+near the Cape, which we suppose might be either the Samaritan or
+the Hope, bound for England.</p>
+
+<p>The 5th of August I went aboard to visit the general, Captain
+Nicholas Downton, who was then very ill, and we got word of his
+death next day.[133] Mr Evans the preacher, and Mr Hambdon,
+followed him, on the 8th, as we supposed by taking laudanum, as
+they were both well a little before. On the 11th the Advice was
+sent to Japan, having a complement of twenty-two Englishmen,
+together with five blacks, and Fernando the Spaniard. The Concord
+returned on the 14th from Succadanea in Borneo and Macasser. That
+night we had a prodigious tempest of rain, with thunder and
+lightning, and the mosque of Bantam was split in two by a
+thunderbolt, on which occasion the chief priest was nearly slain,
+which the king and people took for a bad omen, and therefore
+determined to make peace with Jacatra. The 16th the boat
+belonging to the Thomasine came to Bantam, with twenty-two
+English and five blacks, bringing intelligence of that ship
+having been lost on certain flats the night before, twenty-two
+leagues from Macasser, owing to the carelessness of Wilson the
+master, while all the people were asleep, he only being at the
+helm. They saved all the money, which they brought along with
+them; and as Mr Bailey told us that his wrecked crew had
+compelled him to pay them their wages, we caused them to restore
+the money.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 133: By order in the box, Mr Elkington
+succeeded in the command.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 19th, the Hollanders clapped three blacks into the
+bilboes, whom Mr Bailey had brought with him from Celoar,
+pretending they were caught, climbing over the rails of their
+house, and also, as they were brought from a place under their
+protection, they refused to give us them back. We are in various
+ways most vilely abused by these Hollanders, neither do I see any
+means to right ourselves, unless we go to war with them; for we
+believe this matter to have been done on purpose, and these
+blacks enticed by them to it, as if taken by force. I was much
+offended with Mr Bailey for his conduct in taking away these
+blacks, as the means of making us hated as man-stealers, in,
+places where we used to be well received, which the Hollanders
+will take care to blaze abroad to our disgrace.</p>
+
+<p>In the night of the 13th September, the watch discovered a
+fire in the thatch over the house in which Mr Jordan lodged,
+which was soon extinguished; but we could plainly perceive it had
+been done apurpose, as we found the cane by which it had been
+kindled sticking in the thatch, for which we suspected a Spaniard
+named Francisco, who had appostatized and turned Javan. The 2d
+October, Sophonee Cossock, a merchant, came in a small pinnace
+from Puloway, accompanied by an <i>Orancay</i>, to confer on
+trade with that place. The 22d, I went ashore, accompanied by Mr
+Pring and Mr Bailey, to confer with the Dutch general, concerning
+certain idle complaints made by them against our mariners. I
+found him and the president of their factory very impatient,
+calling us insolent English, threatening that our pride would
+have a fall, with many other disgraceful and opprobrious
+words.[134] Such was the entertainment we received from that
+boorish general, named Garrat Reynes, in his own house. He had
+formerly shewn the like or worse to Mr Ball, on going aboard his
+ship at Banda: And four of our men, who took passage with him
+from thence to <i>Cambello</i>, were brought all the way in the
+bilboes, for no cause.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 134: Quis tulerit Gracchos de seditione
+querentes? It was Dutch policy to cry <i>rogue</i>
+first.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I went ashore on the 3d November, when Captain Jordan called
+together the merchants, and sent for the <i>orancay</i> of Banda,
+whose letter he got translated; the purport of which was, that,
+in regard to the ancient friendship between them and the English,
+especially with Captain Keeling, and provoked by the cruelty and
+injustice of the Hollanders, their earnest desire was to trade
+only with the English for the spices of Puloway, Puleron, and
+Nera, on condition that the English would supply them with
+provisions, ordnance, and ammunition, and help them to recover
+the castle of Nera, desiring that some person might be sent to
+Banda, to confer with the orancays. To this we answered, That we
+could not give them assistance to recover the castle of Nera,
+without orders from England, and that at present we had no
+ordnance to spare; but would willingly supply them with
+provisions, and every thing else in our power, till we had
+farther orders from England, and would trade with them for
+spices, for which purpose we proposed to send a ship, and a
+person to confer with the <i>orancays</i>, and particularly to
+know how we might have security, and whether they would grant us
+permission to build a fort for that purpose.</p>
+
+<p>The 23d five Hollanders anchored in the outer road, four of
+which came last from the Mauritius, having been nineteen months
+on the voyage from Holland. At that island they found that
+General Butt had been cast away with three ships, two being
+totally lost, the men and goods of the third being saved. A
+fourth, which was in company, went home under jury-masts, along
+with a pinnace that came there by chance. One of these ships that
+was at the Mauritius came away before the rest, and they found
+her driving up and down off the mouth of the straits, having lost
+160 men, and having only eight remaining. The 25th, by letters
+from Priaman, we had notice of the death of Mr Ozewicke and
+Samuel Negus.</p>
+
+<p>S.2. <i>Brief Observations by Mr Edward Dodsworth, who
+returned to England in the Hope</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The 16th October, 1614, while in the bay of Surat, Mr Aldworth
+and Mr Steel came on board, and next day Mr Aldworth was
+examined, according to the company's commission and
+instructions,[135] concerning the behaviour of Paul Canning to
+the king, and the king's conduct towards him. To which he
+answered, That his behaviour was right, and the king's
+entertainment of him satisfactory, till the Jesuits insinuated he
+was only a merchant, and not sent immediately by the king of
+England. After this he was neglected, and died since.[136] Also,
+that he thought it fit that some one of our nation of good
+respect should remain at court, to procure redress of any wrongs
+that might be offered; to which function Mr Edwards was chosen to
+go to Agra, as the person most answerable to the company's
+instructions, on which occasion some question was made, whether
+it would be proper he should proceed in the character of a
+merchant, according to the strict letter of the instructions,
+which Mr Aldworth conceived would procure him disrespect with the
+king; and, after some contest, some way was given to Mr Edwards
+in this affair, lest they should disagree in their proceedings,
+especially as it had been reported by some already, that he was a
+messenger from the king of Britain.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 135: This commission had six questions, of
+which I only insert what is fit for the public
+eye.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 136: It has been said on a former occasion,
+that he died of poison, given, as was thought, by the
+jesuits.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>After much opposition to our desire of trade, there came a
+<i>firmaun</i> from the king on the 24th November, which,
+according to custom, the nabob met in state two miles from the
+city, attended by 600 horse. Next day we were kindly entertained,
+and the nabob gave Mr Edwards 850 mahmoudies, thirty pieces of
+<i>topseels</i>, ten of fine calicoes, and other things. The
+money being to bear the charges of carrying up the present to the
+king, who was not willing we should incur any expence on that
+account, and the stuffs as a gratification to those who carried
+them up. To the merchants also he gave fifteen pieces of
+<i>topseels</i>, five to each, with his <i>chop</i> or licence
+for our departure, and promises of kind usage, all this being
+done in presence of those who brought the <i>firmaun</i>. The
+30th, Mr Edwards and we set out for <i>Amadavar</i>
+[Ahmedabad.]</p>
+
+<p>The 2d of December we reached Broach, whence the governor sent
+a guard of horse with us to <i>Demylode</i>, and there we had a
+new escort of horse and foot to <i>Charmondo</i>;[137] whence we
+departed on the 7th with twenty-five soldiers, all notorious
+thieves, as we afterwards found. With these we went ten coss,
+when we pitched our tents in a plain, barricading ourselves as
+usual with our carts. While at supper, we had nearly been
+assaulted by fifty horse, who passed close by us, but they found
+us well provided for our defence, and it appeared that the charge
+we carried was well known in all the country through which we
+travelled. The 8th we came to <i>Brodera</i>, [Brodrah] and made
+a present to the governor, who received it very kindly, and
+particularly requested to see our mastiff dog. Brodrah stands in
+a plain, which seemed fertile, and is well watered, a thing
+rather uncommon in those parts. We departed thence with an escort
+of 100 horse and foot, voluntarily offered from respect for the
+king's present, yet were they a considerable charge to us. We
+came next to Arras,[138] a town mostly inhabited by banians, and
+where their superstition of not killing any thing occasioned us
+to have very bad fare. On the 13th we came to Ahmedabad, whence
+we gave a commission to Richard Steel and John Crowther to
+proceed on their journey to Persia; and hence Mr Edwards departed
+from us for Agra.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 137: On this part of the indicated route,
+between Broach and Brodrab, no stations are to be found in our
+best maps resembling these two names, unless Simlode may have
+been corrupted into Demylode by typographical
+error.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 138: No such name is now to be found in the
+road between Brodrah and Ahmedabad, neither is it of much
+importance in any view, as the route is so vaguely indicated in
+the text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>All this time, the merchants at Ahmedabad, being in hopes of
+peace with the Portuguese, held up the price of their indigos, on
+which we resolved to proceed for <i>Sarques</i> [Sarkess,] to
+make trial with the country people who are the makers of that
+commodity. We did so on the 7th, and found plenty of employment,
+packing in four days no less than 400 bales: after which Mr
+Edwards returned to Ahmedabad, where he found the merchants
+greatly more tractable. <i>Sarkess</i> is a town of no great
+size, three coss from Ahmedabad, its territory being considered
+the best soil in all these parts for the production of indigo.
+All of the dealers in this commodity are apt to put tricks upon
+us, by mingling or otherwise. At Sarkess there are two of the
+most ancient monuments that are to be found in all that country;
+one being the tomb of a saint or prophet who was buried there, to
+which many pilgrims resort from great distances; and the other is
+the sepulchres of their ancient kings. To the north of the town,
+is the place where <i>Khan-Khana</i> first put the Guzerates to
+flight, who were the original inhabitants of the country, all the
+rest of the kingdom being shortly after reduced under the
+subjection of Akbar, father to the present Great Mogul. This
+field of victory is strongly walled round with brick, about a
+mile and half in circuit, all planted within with fruit-trees,
+and delightfully watered; having a costly house called by a name
+signifying <i>Victory</i>; in which Khan-Khana resided for some
+time, but he now resides at Burhanpoor.</p>
+
+<p>The 24th of December we had leave from the governor of
+Ahmedabad to depart; but hearing that several persons had been
+robbed and murdered that night close by the city, order was given
+for us to wait till a sufficient guard could be provided for us.
+The 26th we departed, having with us forty carts, loaded with
+indigo and other goods, and came on the 27th to
+<i>Mundeves</i>,[139] where the gates were shut upon us by order
+of <i>Sarder Khan</i>. This put us in much doubt, and we procured
+a person to speak with the governor, who told him of letters he
+had received from Mucrob Khan, nabob of Surat, informing of the
+gallant action of our general at Swally and the safety of Surat
+from the Portuguese, through the bravery of the English. It was
+therefore agreed that we should not depart without a sufficient
+guard, which was to be ready for us next day. We did not however
+depart till the 29th; and, at Brodrah, the men belonging to
+Sarder Khan procured more soldiers to assist them, as there were
+several companies of rajputs lying in the way to intercept us,
+and many robberies and murders were committed daily in that part
+of the country.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 139: This name also is so corrupted as not
+to have any resemblance in the modern geography of
+Hindoostan.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 2d of February, while passing through a narrow lane
+inclosed on both sides with hedges, we were assaulted by above
+300 rajputs, where we could not hurt them, as they did our
+caffila or caravan by their arrows and shot. We therefore made
+all the haste we could to gain the plain, while they in the mean
+time cut off two of our carriages. Having got to the open ground
+we made a stand; but the rajputs betook themselves again to their
+hedges, to look after their prey, lest one thief should rob
+another. Many of our party were hurt on this occasion, among
+which was Humphrey Elkington. Next day we got to Baroach, and on
+the 5th to Surat, where we returned thanks to Macrob Khan for the
+care he had taken of our safety.</p>
+
+<p>Hearing of an assault to be made next day on our ships by the
+Portuguese, we got his leave to go down to Swally and went
+aboard, but the Portuguese deceived our expectation. On occasion
+of the last attempt of the Portuguese to set our ships on fire,
+by means of four fire-boats chained together, four of them were
+taken in smaller boats, which captives confessed that this was
+the last attempt of the viceroy for this year, as he was now
+under the necessity of returning to Goa, for want of water and
+provisions. One of these captives, taken in Swally roads, and
+carried aboard the New-year's Gilt, emitted the following
+declaration:--</p>
+
+<p><i>Examination of Domingo Francisco, on the 20th of
+February</i>, 1615.</p>
+
+<p>"He saith, that he was born in Lisbon, being the son of a
+mariner, and served under Nunna d'Acunha in the seafight against
+Captain Best, in one of the four galleons. He afterwards went to
+Macao on the coast of China, and returned thence to Goa; where,
+after remaining ten months, he was ordered on board a galleon
+called the St Antonio, in this expedition for the road of Swally,
+where he was made prisoner on the 8th of this month. The purpose
+of the viceroy, <i>Don Jeronimo de Savedo</i>, in this
+expedition, as the examinant says, was to destroy the English at
+Surat. The viceroy's ship was called the All-saints, of 800 tons,
+with 300 men, and twenty-eight cannon. Michael de Souza was
+captain on the St Bennet of 700 tons, 150 men, and twenty guns.
+John Cayatho of the St Lawrence, of 600 tons, 160 men, and 18
+guns. Francisco Henriques of the St Christopher, of 600 tons, 155
+men, and 18 guns. Francisco de Mirande of the St Jeronymo, of 500
+tons, 180 men, and 16 guns. Gaspar de Meall of the St Antonio, of
+400 tons, 140 men, and 14 guns. These were the galleons: The
+ships were, the St Peter of 200 tons Captain Francisco Cavaco,
+150 men and eight guns; the St Paul of 200 tons, Captain Don Juan
+de Mascarenha, 150 men and eight guns; a pinnace of 120 tons,
+Captain Andrea de Quellio, eighty men and four guns. Lewis de
+Bruto was captain of one galley, and Diego de Suro of the other,
+each having fifty men. There were sixty barks or frigates, each
+having twenty soldiers, and rowing eighteen oars of a side. The
+reinforcement which joined afterwards, consisted of two ships of
+200 tons each, two India junks, and eight small boats, which were
+employed to endeavour to set us on fire. In the viceroy's ship,
+the ordnance were all of brass, those in the other galleons being
+half brass and half iron:" Against all which the Almighty
+protected us, blessed be his name for ever.</p>
+
+<p>On the 11th March, 1615, we parted from the general, he and
+the other two ships being bound for Acheen and Bantam, and we in
+the Hope for England. On the 12th we passed by the north end of
+the Maldives, where we found many shoals and islands most falsely
+laid down in the charts, as if purposely to render the navigation
+of these seas more dangerous. We arrived on the 17th of June in
+Saldanha bay, where we found a fleet of four English ships bound
+for Surat, under the command of Captain Keeling; which fleet,
+after consultation held with us, and receiving intelligence of
+the state of affairs there, departed on its voyage. On the 20th I
+met with <i>Crosse</i> and his company, left there for
+discovery,[140] and entreated some of them to acquaint
+<i>Coree</i> with my arrival. These were set upon by the savages
+and wounded, wherefore I delivered four muskets to Crosse at his
+earnest request; after which he procured Coree to come down with
+his whole family, and we afterwards got some cattle. He told me
+that there was discord among the savages, through which the
+mountaineers had come down and robbed them. We departed on the
+26th June, leaving our longboat with Crosse, together with
+powder, shot, and provisions.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 140: Of Crosse and his company of condemned
+persons, set on shore at the Cape of Good Hope, see afterwards in
+Peyton's voyage.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the latitude of 29&deg; N. we fell in with a Dutch ship
+from the Mauritius, having gone there to cut timber, which seemed
+a bastard ebony. Contrary to their expectation, they found there
+the lamentable wreck of four ships come from Bantam and the
+Moluccas, which had gone to pieces on the rocks. The goods and
+men of two of these were totally lost, most of the goods of the
+third were saved, with part of which this ship was laden. The
+fourth was driven out to sea in a storm, and returned under
+jury-masts. The master of this ship promised to keep us company,
+but finding us a hindrance, he left us after ten days, without so
+much as a farewell or offering to carry a letter, which I imputed
+to their inbred boorish disposition. Ill weather followed, and we
+were much weakened; yet, I thank God, we lost none till my
+arrival in Ireland off the river of Limerick on the 27th October,
+1615; where also we had to endure a storm, till we hired a
+Scottish bark, detained by contrary winds, to pilot us into
+harbour. There also, a remainder of Captain M. his ungodly crew,
+who had lately obtained their pardon, put me in great fear; till
+Sir Henry Foliat secured us by a supply of men, and I sent off
+letters for London.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Journey of Richard Steel and John Crowther, from Ajmeer in
+India, to Ispahan in Persia, in the Years</i> 1615 <i>and</i>
+1616.[141]</p>
+
+<p>Having been detained at Agimere[142] from February, Mr Edwards
+received a letter on the 17th March, 1615, from the Great Mogul,
+of which he delivered a copy, together with his other letters, to
+Richard Steel, promising to procure the king's firmaun for our
+safety and furtherance, and to send it after us to Agra, where he
+directed us to wait for its reception. We went that night two
+coss to <i>Mandill</i>.[143]We had four servants, two horses, and
+a camel. The 18th we went twelve coss to <i>Bander Sandree</i>,
+[Bunder-Sanory,] a small <i>aldea</i>.[144] The 19th, ten coss to
+<i>Mosobade</i>, [Morabad.] The 20th to <i>Pipelo</i>, [Peped,]
+thirteen coss. The 21st to a town called <i>Chadfoole</i>,
+[Gohd?] seven coss. The 22d to <i>Lalscotte</i>, thirteen coss.
+The 23d to <i>Mogolserai</i>, twelve coss. The 24th to
+<i>Hindone</i>, fourteen coss. the 25th to <i>Bramobad</i>,
+twelve coss. The 26th to <i>Futtipoor</i>, twelve coss. This has
+been a fair city, which was built by Akbar, and contains a goodly
+palace belonging to the king. It is walled round in a handsome
+manner, and has many spacious gardens and sumptuous pleasure
+houses; but is now falling to ruin, and ranch ground within the
+walls is now sown with corn, the king having carried off much of
+the best stone to his new city of Agra. The 27th we went twelve
+coss to Agra. In the English house there, we found one Richard
+Barber, an apothecary, who came over with Sir Robert Shirley, and
+had been sent here by Mr Kerridge to take care of Nicholas
+Whithington.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 141: Purch. Pilgr. I. 519.--In the title of
+this article in the Pilgrims, Agimere, or Azmere, as it is there
+called, is said to have been the residence of the Great Mogul at
+the commencement of this journey, and Spahan, or Ispahan, the
+royal seat of the kings of Persia.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 142: This place, named Azmeer in the
+Pilgrims, is known in modern geography under the name of Ajmeer,
+or Agimere.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 143: A coss, or course, as it is uniformly
+denominated in the Pilgrims, is stated on the margin by Purchas,
+to be equal to a mile and a half, and in some places two English
+miles. As more precisely determined in modern geography, the
+Hindoostanee coss is equal to 1 4/7th English miles, and the
+Rajput coss to 2 1/6th miles nearly. It would overload this
+article to attempt critically following all the stations in the
+present journal, in which the names of places are often so
+corrupt as to be unintelligible. Such corrections of the text as
+can be ventured upon are included within
+brackets.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 144: This is a Spanish or Portuguese term,
+signifying country village.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Within two days journey of Agra, we passed by the country and
+city of Biana, where the finest indigo is made, the best being
+then worth thirty-six rupees the maund at Agra, but much cheaper
+in the country. Finding the promised firmaun came not, and the
+hot season of the year fast approaching, we departed on the 3d
+April in the prosecution of our journey, leaving directions with
+Richard Barber to send it after us. We came that night to a serai
+called Boutta, six coss. The 4th to the town of <i>Matra</i>,
+fourteen coss, where we lay in a fair <i>serai</i>,[145] and
+there we received the firmaun. The 5th we went twelve coss to a
+serai called <i>Chatta</i>, [Chautra.] The 6th to a serai built
+by Azam Khan, nine coss. The 7th to a serai built by Sheic
+Ferreede, called <i>Puhlwall</i>, eleven coss. The 8th to a serai
+built by the same person, ten coss. The 9th to <i>Dillee</i>,
+[Delhi,] nine coss. This being a great and ancient city, formerly
+the seat of the kings, where many of them are interred. At this
+time, many of the great men have their gardens and pleasure
+houses here, and are here buried, so that it is beautified with
+many fine buildings. The inhabitants, who are mostly Banians or
+Hindoos, are poor and beggarly, through the long absence of the
+court.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 145: These are fair buildings for the
+accommodation of travellers, many of which were erected by great
+men.<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 10th we went ten coss from Delhi to <i>Bunira</i>. The
+11th to <i>Cullvower</i>, twelve coss. The 12th to
+<i>Pampette</i>, [Paniput,] twelve coss. This is a small handsome
+city, where they manufacture various sorts of girdles and sashes,
+and great quantities of cotton-cloth, and have abundance of
+handicrafts. The 13th to <i>Carnanl</i>, twelve coss. The 14th to
+<i>Tanisera</i>, [Tahnessir,] fourteen coss. The 15th to
+<i>Shavade</i>, [Shahabad,] ten coss. The 16th to
+<i>Mogol-Sera</i>, or <i>Gaugur</i>, fifteen coss. The 17th to
+<i>Sinan</i>,[146] fourteen coss, which is an ancient city, where
+they manufacture great store of cottons. The 18th to
+<i>Duratia</i>, fifteen coss. The 19th to <i>Pullower</i>,
+[Bullolepoor,] eleven coss. We this day passed in a boat over a
+great river called Sietmege[147] which is very broad, but full of
+shoals, and runs westward to join the Sinde, or Indus. The 20th
+we came to a small town called <i>Nicodar</i>, eleven coss. The
+21st to <i>Sultanpoor</i>, an old town having a river which comes
+from the north, over which is a bridge of six arches. At this
+place great store of cotton goods are made. Four coss beyond this
+place we passed another small river. The 22d to
+<i>Chiurmul</i>,[148] eleven coss. We were this day boated across
+a river as broad as the Thames at Gravesend, called <i>Vian</i>,
+which runs westwards to join the Sinde. On its banks Allom Khan,
+ambassador from the Great Mogul to the king of Persia, had
+pitched his camp, which looked like a little city. The 23d we
+went to <i>Khan Khanum Serai</i>, seventeen coss, and the 24th we
+reached Lahore, seven coss.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 146: This is probably Sirhind, which is
+directly in the route, but so disguised in the text as to defy
+emendation.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 147: This is clearly the Sutuluge, or
+Setlege, called likewise the Beyah-Kussoor, and Chato dehr, being
+the easternmost of the Punjab or five rivers, which form the
+Indus. It was called Hesudrus by the ancients.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 148: From the river mentioned in the text
+as passed, on this day's journey, this may have been what is now
+called Gundwall, a little beyond the river Beyab, which is here
+100 yards broad.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>All the country between Agra and Lahore is exceedingly well
+cultivated, being the best of India, and abounds in all things.
+It yields great store of powdered sugar, [raw sugar] the best
+being worth two 1/2 to two 3/4 rupees the great <i>maund</i> of
+forty pounds. The whole road is planted on both sides with trees,
+most of which bear a species of mulberry. In the night, this road
+is dangerously infested with thieves, but is quite secure in the
+day. Every five or six coss, there are serais, built by the king
+or some great man, which add greatly to the beauty of the road,
+are very convenient for the accommodation of travellers, and
+serve to perpetuate the memory of their founders. In these the
+traveller may have a chamber for his own use, a place in which to
+tie up his horse, and can be furnished with provender; but in
+many of them very little accommodation can be had, by reason of
+the banians, as when once any person has taken up his lodging, no
+other may dispossess him. At day-break the gates of these serais
+are opened, and then all the travellers prepare to depart; but no
+person is allowed to go away sooner, for fear of robbers. This
+made the journey very oppressive to us, as within two hours after
+the sun rose we were hardly able to endure the heat.</p>
+
+<p>Lahore is a great and goodly city, being one of the fairest
+and ancientest in India. It stands on the river Indus or
+Sinde;[149] and from this place came the most valuable of the
+Portuguese trade when they were at peace with the Moguls, as it
+formed the centre of all their traffic in Hindoostan. They here
+embarked their goods, which were carried down the river to Tatta,
+and were thence transported by sea to Ormus and Persia; and such
+native merchants as chose to go that way between India and
+Persia, paid them freight. They had also a great trade up this
+river, in pepper and other spices, with which they furnished that
+part of India. At this time, the merchants of India assemble at
+Lahore, where they invest a great part of their money in
+commodities, and, joining in caravans, they pass over the
+mountains of Candahar into Persia; by which way it is computed
+there now pass yearly twelve or fourteen thousand camel loads,
+whereas formerly there did not go in this way above three
+thousand, all the rest going by way of Ormus. These merchants are
+put to great expences between Lahore and Ispaban, besides being
+exposed to great cold in winter and fervent heat in summer, and
+to bad and dangerous roads, usually spending six or seven months
+in the journey, and they estimate the charges of each camel's
+load at 120 or 130 rupees. In this way Persia is furnished with
+spiceries, which are brought all the way from Masulipatam by
+land. We remained in Lahore from the 24th of April to the 13th of
+May, refreshing both ourselves and our horses, and providing
+servants and necessaries for the journey. We also procured here
+recommendatory letters from an ambassador to the king of
+Persia.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 149: Lahore is upon the Ravey, the second
+of the five rivers forming the Indus, counting from the east, and
+was the Hydroates of the ancients. The Indus proper, or Nilab, is
+considerably farther west.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We left Lahore on the 13th May, proposing to overtake a
+caravan which set out two months before, and went that day eleven
+c. to a small town named <i>Chacksunder</i>. The 14th to
+<i>Non-serai</i>, fifteen c. The 15th to <i>Mutteray</i>, eight
+c. The 16th to <i>Quemal khan</i>, nineteen c. The 17th to
+<i>Herpae</i>, sixteen c. The 18th to <i>Alicasaca</i>, twelve c.
+The 19th <i>Trumba</i>, twelve c. and this day we overtook a
+small caravan that left Lahore eight days before us. The 20th to
+<i>Sedousehall</i>, fourteen c. The 21st to
+<i>Callixechebaut</i>, fifteen c. The 22d to <i>Multan</i>,[150]
+twelve c. This is a great and ancient city, having the river
+Indus at the distance of three coss. All caravans must remain
+here ten or twelve days, before leave can be procured from the
+governor to proceed, on purpose that the city may benefit by
+their stay. It yields white plain cotton cloth and diaper. We
+remained five days, and were then glad to get leave to depart, by
+means of a present.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 150: In the whole of this itinerary, from
+Lahore to Multan or Mooltan, down the Ravey river, not a single
+name in the text, except the two extremities, bears the smallest
+resemblance to any of those in modern
+geography.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We passed the river on the 28th, and went twenty c. to a small
+village named <i>Pettoallee</i>. The 29th we passed another great
+river by a boat, and came that same night to a small river called
+<i>Lacca</i>, where we found the caravan we wished to
+overtake.[151] We presented the caravan <i>basha</i> with a
+mirror and knife, when he directed us to pitch our tent near his
+own, that we might be more immediately under his protection. This
+caravan had been here ten days, and remained till the 2d of June,
+waiting for an escort of cavalry to convoy them to
+<i>Chatcza</i>,[152] a small fort in the mountains, having
+received information that a former caravan had been injured by
+the mountaineers. The 2d June we resumed our journey, and
+travelled twelve c. entering into the mountains, where we were
+much distressed for want of fresh water, what water we met with
+being brackish. The 3d and 4th we travelled all night, climbing
+high mountains, and following water-courses with various turnings
+and windings, insomuch that in travelling twelve coss our direct
+course did not exceed six c. The 5th we again followed the bed of
+a water-course or river, full of large pebbles, travelling eight
+c. The 6th we rested. The 7th we went four c. still along the
+water-course, the 8th eight c. the 9th twelve c. and the 10th
+three c. when we came to <i>Chatcza</i>, [Chatzan] a small fort
+with mud walls, inclosed with a ditch, where the Mogul keeps a
+garrison of eighty or 100 horse, to scour the road from thieves,
+yet these are as great thieves as any, where they find an
+opportunity. The captain of this castle exacted two
+<i>abacees</i> for each camel in the caravan, though nothing was
+legally due, as he and his troops have their pay from the king.
+In the whole of our way, from the river Lacca to Chatzan, we
+found no sustenance for man or beast, except in some places a
+little grass, so that we had to make provision at Lacca, hiring a
+bullock to carry barley for our horses. The <i>Agwans</i> or
+<i>Afgans</i>, as the people of the mountains are called, came
+down to us every day at our resting place, rather to look out
+what they might steal, than to buy as they pretended.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 151: The great river passed on the 29th
+must have been the Sinde, Indus, or Nilab, and from the
+circumstance of falling in next day with the <i>Lacca</i> or
+Lucca, Pettoallee in the text may possibly be what is named
+<i>Joghiwallah</i>, on the east side of the Indus, almost
+opposite the mouth of the Lacca.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 152: Chatzan, a town or fortress in Sewee,
+or the country of the Balloges; to the west of a ridge of rocky
+mountains, described as consisting of hard black stone, which
+skirt the western side of the vale of the Indus, and on the north
+join the mountains of Wulli in Candahar. Chatzan is in lat.
+31&deg; 3' N. and long 69&deg; 42' W. from
+Greenwich--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having made provision for three days at Chatzan, we went
+thence on the 12th June, and travelled fourteen c. The 13th ten
+c. The 14th ten c. This day the mountaineers brought down to us
+sheep, goats, meal, butter, and barley, in abundance, sufficient
+both for us and our cattle, all of which they sold at reasonable
+prices; and from this time forwards, they did the same every day,
+sometimes also bringing felts and striped carpets for sale. The
+15th we went six c. the 16th four c. the 17th ten c. the 18th
+nine c. the 19th nine c. when we came to a small town of the
+Afgans called <i>Duckee</i>, [Dooky], where the Mogul keeps a
+garrison in a small square mud fort, the walls of which are of a
+good height. This fort is a mile from the town. We stopt here
+three days, as the caravan could not agree with the captain of
+the fort, who demanded a duty on every camel, and at last an
+<i>abacee</i> and a half was paid for each camel. The 23d we went
+six c. the 24th we passed a place called <i>Secotah</i>, or the
+three castles, because of three villages standing near each other
+on the side of a hill, forming a triangle. We this day went eight
+c. The 25th we rested, on account of bad weather. The 26th we
+went ten c. The 27th fourteen c. This day we passed through the
+<i>durues</i> or gates of the mountains, being narrow straits,
+with very high rocks on both sides, whence with stones a few men
+might stop the passage of a multitude, and where many caravans
+have been accordingly cut off. We this night, where we lodged,
+suffered much insolence from the Afgans; and next day, as we
+passed a small village called <i>Coasta</i>, they exacted from us
+two 1/2 <i>abacees</i> for each camel. The 28th we went five c.
+the 29th, passing a village called <i>Abdun</i>, eight c. the
+30th six c. The 1st. July in seven c. we came to a place called
+<i>Pesinga</i> [Pusheng or Kooshinge], where there is a small
+fort like that at <i>Dooky</i> in which is a garrison for
+securing the way. At this place the captain exacted half an
+<i>abacee</i> for each camel. The 3d we left the caravan and went
+forwards six c. The 4th we passed over a mighty mountain, and
+descended into the plains beyond, having travelled that day
+fourteen c. The 5th we went twenty c. and were much distressed to
+get grain for our cattle. The 6th, in like distress both for them
+and ourselves, we went twelve c. and on the 7th, after eight c.
+we got to the city of Candahar.</p>
+
+<p>These mountains of Candahar are inhabited by a fierce people,
+called <i>Agwans</i> or <i>Potans</i>, [Afgans or Patans] who are
+very strong of body, somewhat fairer than the natives of
+Hindoostan, and are much addicted to robbery, insomuch, that they
+often cut off whole caravans. At present they have become more
+civil, partly from fear of the Mogul, and partly from
+experiencing the advantages of trade, by selling their grain,
+sheep, and goats, of which they have great store, and by
+purchasing coarse cotton goods and other necessaries. Still,
+however, if they find any one straggling or lagging behind, they
+are very apt to make them slaves, selling them into the
+mountains, and houghing them to prevent their running away, after
+which they are set to grind grain in handmills, or to other
+servile employments. The chief city, called likewise Candahar, is
+very ancient, and was in old times inhabited by Banians. At this
+place the governor of the whole country resides, who has a
+garrison of twelve or fifteen thousand horse, maintained there by
+the Great Mogul, in regard of the neighbourhood of the Persians
+towards the north. To the west, the city is environed by steep
+and craggy rocks, and to the south and east by a strong wall. In
+consequence of the frequent passage of caravans, it has been
+considerably increased of late, so that the suburbs are larger
+than the city. Within the last two years, in consequence of the
+Persian trade by way of Ormus being stopped, through war with the
+Portuguese, all the caravans between Persia and India must
+necessarily pass through this place; and here they hire camels to
+go into India, and at their return for Persia have to do the
+same. They cannot return without leave of the governor, who
+causes them to stop a month here, or at the least fifteen or
+twenty days; owing to which, it is inhabited by many lewd people,
+as all such places of resort commonly are.</p>
+
+<p>Victuals for man and beast are to be had in great abundance at
+Candahar, yet are very dear owing to the great concourse of
+trade, occasioned by the meeting at this place of many merchants
+of India, Persia, and Turkey, who often conclude their exchanges
+of commodities here. At this place the caravans going for India
+usually unite together, for greater strength and security in
+passing through the mountains of Candahar; and those that come
+here from India generally break into smaller companies, because
+in many parts of the route through Persia, a greater number would
+not find provisions, as all Persia, from hence to Ispahan, is
+extremely barren, so that sometimes not a green thing is to be
+seen in two or three days travel; and even water is scarce, and
+that which is to be got is often brackish, or stinking and
+abominable. We remained at this city for fourteen days, partly to
+procure company for our farther journey, and partly for
+refreshment after the fatigues and heats of our late journey,
+especially on account of John Crowther, who was so weak that he
+at one time doubted being able to proceed any farther.</p>
+
+<p>We joined ourselves to three Armenians and a dozen Persian
+merchants, along with whom we left the city of Candahar on the
+23d July, and went ten c. to a village called
+<i>Seriabe</i>.[153] The 24th we came in twelve c. to
+<i>Deabage</i>, a small <i>dea</i> or village. The 25th in eight
+c. to <i>Cashecunna,</i> a small castle in which the Mogul has a
+garrison, being the utmost boundary of his dominions westwards,
+and confining with Persia. The 26th we travelled seventeen c. and
+lodged in the open fields by the side of a river. The 27th, after
+four c. we came to a castle called <i>Greece</i>, the first
+belonging to the king of Persia. Here we delivered to the
+governor the letter we had got from the Persian ambassador at
+Lahore, and presented him a mirror and three knives. He would
+take nothing for our camels, while the others had to pay five
+<i>abacees</i> for each camel. He promised to give us a safe
+conduct under an escort of horse to the next governor, but we saw
+none; neither were we sorry for the omission, for he was little
+better than a rebel, and all his people were thieves.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 153: We here lose the almost infallible
+guide of Arrowsmith's excellent map of Hindoostan, and are
+reduced to much inferior helps in following the route through
+Persia.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 28th we departed at night, going two <i>parasangs</i>, and
+lodged at a <i>dea</i> or village called <i>Malgee</i>. A
+<i>farcing</i> or parasang is equal to two Indian cosses and a
+half.[154] The 29th we went ten p. and lodged in the open fields,
+where we could get nothing but water. The 30th we went five p. to
+a small castle named <i>Gazikhan</i>. The 31st other five p. to
+an old ruined fort, where we could get nothing but water, and
+that was stinking. The 1st August we proceeded other five p. to
+an old fort called <i>Dilaram</i>, where we paid an <i>abacee</i>
+and a half for each camel. We staid here one day to rest our
+cattle, which was termed making <i>mochoane</i>; and on the 3d we
+went seven p. to an old castle called <i>Bacon</i>. The 4th four
+p. and lodged in the open fields, where we found nothing but
+water. The 5th four p. and the 6th five p. to
+<i>Farra</i>.[155]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 154: In a side-note, Purchas says a
+parasang consists of sixty furlongs. This is a most egregious
+error, as the parasang or farsang is exactly equal to 2.78
+English miles, or twenty-two two-5ths furlongs.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 155: Farra, the capital of a district of
+the same name in the north of Segistan, is in lat 33&deg; 40' N.
+long. 62&deg; 40' E.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p><i>Farra</i> is a small town, surrounded by a high wall of
+bricks dried in the sun, as are all the castles and most of the
+buildings in this country, and is of a square form, about a mile
+in circuit. It has a handsome bazar or market-place, vaulted over
+head to keep out the rain, and in which all kinds of necessaries
+and commodities are sold. It is situated in a fertile soil,
+having plenty of water, without which nothing can be raised in
+this country; and it is wonderful to see with what labour and
+ingenious industry they bring water to every spot of good ground,
+which is but seldom to be found here, often carrying it three or
+four miles in trenches under ground. At this town, all merchants
+going into Persia must remain for seven, eight, or ten days; and
+here the king's treasurer sees all their packs weighed,
+estimating the value of their commodities at so much the maund,
+as he thinks fit, and exacts a duty of three per cent. ad valorem
+on that estimate. On their way into Persia, merchants are used
+with much favour, lest they should make complaints to the king,
+who will have merchants kindly treated; but on their return into
+India, they are treated with extreme rigour, being searched to
+the very skin for money, as it is death to transport any gold or
+silver coin from Persia, except that of the reigning king. They
+likewise look narrowly for horses and slaves, neither of which
+are allowed to be taken out of the country.</p>
+
+<p>We remained here two days waiting for certain Armenians, with
+whom we travelled the rest of the journey, leaving our former
+companions. The 9th of August we went only one parasang to a
+river. The 10th we travelled seven p. and lodged in the open
+fields. The 11th, four p. to a small village, where we had plenty
+of provisions. The 12th, four p. where we had to dig for water.
+The 13th, eight p. and the 14th five p. to a village named
+<i>Draw,</i> [Durra,] where we remained a day, as it is the
+custom of those who travel with camels to rest once in four or
+five days. The 16th, we advanced three p. The 17th, four p. The
+18th, five p. to <i>Zaide-basha,</i> [Sarbishe,] where abundance
+of carpets are to be had. The 19th we came to a village named
+<i>Mude,</i> [Moti,] where also are carpets. The 20th, five p. to
+<i>Birchen,</i> [Berdjan,] where are manufactured great
+quantities of fine felts, and carpets of camels hair, which are
+sold at the rates of from two to five abacees the <i>maund.</i>
+At this place we rested a day. The 22d, we went to
+<i>Dea-zaide,</i> [Descaden,] where all the inhabitants pretend
+to be very religious, and sell their carpets, of which they have
+great abundance, at a cheap rate. The 23d, three p. The 24th,
+five p. to <i>Choore,</i> [Cors or Corra,] an old ruined town.
+The 25th, three p. The 26th, seven p. when we had brackish
+stinking water. The 27th we came to <i>Dehuge,</i> [Teuke,] where
+is a considerable stream of hot water, which becomes cool and
+pleasant after standing some time in any vessel. The 28th we went
+seven p. to <i>Dea-curma.</i></p>
+
+<p>The 29th we went five p. to <i>Tobaz,</i>[156] where we had to
+pay half an abacee for each camel. At this plce all caravans take
+four or five days rest, the better to enable them to pass the
+adjoining salt desert, which extends four long days journey, and
+in which many miscarry. We found here a small caravan of an
+hundred camels, which set off the next day after our arrival.
+Here, and in the former village, there is great store of dates;
+and 3000 maunds of the finest silk in Persia are made here
+yearly, and is carried to <i>Yades</i>, [Yezd,] a fair city,
+where likewise they make much raw silk, and where it is
+manufactured into taffaties, satins, and damasks. The king does
+not allow the exportation of raw silk, especially into Turkey;
+but the Portuguese used to carry it to Portugal. <i>Yades</i>,
+[Yezd,] is about twelve days journey from Ispahan, and is twelve
+p. out of the way from the Indian route to the capital.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 156: Tabaskili, or Tobas Kileke, in
+Cohestan, is probably the place here meant, in which case the
+route appears to have passed from Farra by the south of the
+inland sea or lake of Darrah, but which is not noticed by our
+travellers. Our conjectural amendments of the names of places on
+the route are placed within brackets.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 30th of August we advanced nine p. into the desert, and
+lay on the ground, having to send our beasts three miles out of
+the way for water, which was very salt. The 31st, after
+travelling ten p. we came to water which was not at all brackish.
+The 1st September we went five p. and had to send two miles for
+water. The 2d we went nine p. to a small castle, where we
+procured a small quantity of provisions. The 3d, five p. and lay
+in the fields, having to send far for water. The 4th, ten p. to
+<i>Seagan</i>. The 5th, four p. The 6th, ten p. to a castle
+called <i>Irabad</i>, [Hirabad,] where we paid half an
+<i>abacee</i> for each camel. The 7th, six p. The 8th, eight p.
+to <i>Ardecan</i>, where we rested till the 10th, when we went
+four p. to <i>Sellef</i>. The 11th, three p. to a small castle
+named <i>Agea Gaurume</i>. The 12th, nine p. to a spring in the
+fields. The 13th, three p. to <i>Beavas</i>. The 14th, four p. to
+<i>Goolabad</i>, whence Richard Steel rode on to Ispahan, without
+waiting for the caravan. The 15th we came to <i>Morea
+Shahabad</i>, five p. The 16th, to <i>Coopa</i>, five p. The
+17th, to <i>Dea Sabs</i>, five p. The 18th, four p. and lay in
+the fields. And on the 19th, after three p. we came to
+<i>Ispahan</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Richard Steel reached this city on the 15th, at noon, and
+found Sir Robert Shirley already provided with his dispatches
+from the king of Persia as ambassador to the king of Spain. Sir
+Robert, attended by his lady, a bare-footed friar as his
+chaplain, together with fifty-five Portuguese prisoners, and his
+own followers, were preparing in all haste to go to Ormus, and to
+embark thence for Lisbon. The purpose is, that seeing the
+Portuguese not able to stand, the Spaniards may be brought
+in.[157] Six friars remain as hostages for his safe return to
+Ispahan, as otherwise the king has vowed to cut them all in
+pieces, which he is likely enough to do, having put his own son
+to death, and committed a thousand other severities.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 157: The meaning of this passage is quite
+obscure in the Pilgrims, and the editor does not presume upon
+clearing the obscurity.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On his arrival at Ispahan, Richard Steel delivered his letters
+to Sir Robert,[158] who durst hardly read them, except now and
+then, as by stealth, fearing lest the Portuguese should know of
+them. He afterwards said it was now too late to engage in the
+business of our nation, and seemed much dissatisfied with the
+company, and with the merchants and mariners who brought him out.
+But at length he said he was a true-hearted Englishman, and
+promised to effect our desires. On the 19th, the friars being
+absent, he carried both of us to the master of the ceremonies, or
+<i>Maimondare,</i> and took us along with him to the Grand
+Vizier, <i>Sarek Hogea</i>, who immediately called his scribes or
+secretaries, and made draughts of what we desired: namely, three
+<i>firmauns</i>, one of which John Crowther has to carry to
+Surat, one for Richard Steel to carry to England, and the third
+to be sent to the governor of <i>Jasques</i>, all sealed with the
+great seal of the king. The same day that these firmauns were
+procured, being the last of September, Sir Robert Shirley set out
+for Shiras in great pomp, and very honourably attended.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 158: Of the landing of Sir Robert Shirley,
+see Peyton's first voyage before; and of the rest of his journey
+see the second voyage of Peyton, in the
+sequel.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p><i>Copy of the Firmaun granted by the King of Persia.</i></p>
+
+<p>"Firmaun or command given unto all our subjects, from the
+highest to the lowest, and directed to the <i>Souf-basha</i>, or
+constable of our country, kindly to receive and entertain the
+<i>English Franks</i>[159] or nation, when any of their ships may
+arrive at Jasques, or any other of the ports in our kingdom, to
+conduct them and their merchandize to what place or places they
+may desire, and to see them safely defended upon our coasts from
+any other Franks whomsoever. This I will and command you to do,
+as you shall answer in the contrary. Given at our royal city,
+this 12th of <i>Ramassan</i>, in the year of our <i>Tareag</i>,
+1024. [October, 1615.]"</p>
+
+<p>The chief commodities of Persia are raw silks, of which it
+yields, according to the king's books, 7700 <i>batmans</i>
+yearly. Rhubarb grows in Chorassan, where also worm-seed
+grows.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 159: Frank is a name given in the East to
+all western Christians, ever since the expedition to the Holy
+Land, because the French were the chief nation on that occasion,
+and because the French council at Clermont was the cause of that
+event.--Purch.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Carpets of all sorts, some of silk and gold, silk and silver,
+half silk, half cotton, &amp;c. The silver monies of Persia are
+the <i>abacee, mahamoody, shakee</i>, and <i>biftee</i>, the rest
+being of copper, like the <i>tangas</i> and <i>pisos</i> of
+India. The <i>abacee</i> weighs two <i>meticals</i>, the
+<i>mahmoody</i> is half an abacee, and the <i>shahee</i> is half
+a <i>mahamoody</i>. In the dollar or rial of eight there are
+thirteen shahees.[160] In a shahee there are two <i>biftees</i>
+and a half, or ten cashbegs, one <i>biftee</i> being four
+<i>cashbegs</i>, or two <i>tangs</i>. The weights differ in
+different places; two <i>mahans</i> of Tauris being only one of
+Ispahan, and so of the <i>batman</i>. The measure of length, for
+silks and other stuffs, is the same with the pike of Aleppo,
+which we judge to be twenty-seven English inches.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 160: Assuming the Spanish dollar at 4s. 6d.
+sterling, the shahee ought therefore to be worth about 4d. 1-6,
+the mahamoody,8d. 1-3, and the abecee, 1s. 4d.
+2-3.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>John Crowther returned into India, and Richard Steel went to
+England by way of Turkey, by the following route. Leaving Ispahan
+on the 2d December, 1615, he went five p. to a serail. The 3d,
+eight p. to another serail. The 4th, six p. to a village. The
+5th, seven p. to <i>Dreag</i>. The 6th, seven p. to a serail. The
+7th, eight p. to <i>Golpigan</i>, [Chulpaigan.] The 8th, seven p.
+to <i>Curouan</i>. The 9th, seven p. to <i>Showgot</i>. The 10th,
+six p. to <i>Saro</i>, [Sari.] The 11th, eight p. to
+<i>Dissabad</i>. The 12th, twelve p. to a fair town called
+<i>Tossarkhan</i>, where he rested some days, because the country
+was covered deep with snow. The 15th, six p. to <i>Kindaner</i>.
+The 16th, eight p. to <i>Sano</i>. The 17th to <i>Shar nuovo</i>,
+where I was stopped by the <i>daiga</i>; but on shewing him
+letters from the vizier, he bade me depart in the name of God and
+of Ali. The 18th we passed a bridge where all travellers have to
+give an account of themselves, and to pay a tax of two
+<i>shakees</i> for each camel. The 19th we came to
+<i>Kassam-Khan</i>, the last place under the Persian government,
+and made a present to the governor, that he might give me a guard
+to protect me from the Turkomans, which he not only did, but gave
+me a licence to procure provisions free at his villages without
+payment, which yet I did not avail myself of.</p>
+
+<p>The 21st of December I began to pass over a range of high
+mountains which separate the two empires of Persia and Turkey,
+which are very dangerous; and, on the 22d, at the end of eight p.
+I arrived at a village. The 23d, after travelling seven p. I lay
+under a rock. The 24th I came to <i>Mando</i>, eight p. a town
+belonging to the Turks. The 25th, eight p. to <i>Emomester</i>.
+The 26th, eight p. to <i>Boroh</i>, passed over a river in a
+boat, and came that night to Bagdat. I was here strictly examined
+and searched for letters, which I hid under my saddle; but
+observing one trying there also, I gave him a sign, on which he
+desisted, and followed me to my lodging for his expected reward.
+I fared better than an old Spaniard, only a fortnight before, who
+was imprisoned in chains in the castle, and his letters read by a
+Maltese renegado. I found here a Portuguese, who had arrived from
+Ormus only two days before me. The pacha made us wait here twenty
+days for a sabandar of his.</p>
+
+<p>The 16th of January, 1616, we passed the river Tigris, and lay
+on the skirt of the desert. The 17th we travelled five
+<i>agatzas</i>, being leagues or parasangs. The 18th we came to
+the Euphrates at <i>Tulquy</i>, where merchandize disembarked for
+Bagdat, after paying a duty of five per cent. passes to the
+Tigris, and thence to the Persian gulf. After a tedious journey,
+partly by the river Euphrates, and partly through the desert, and
+then by sea, we arrived at Marseilles, in France, on the 15th
+April, and on the 10th May at Dover.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage of Captain Walter Peyton to India, in
+1615.</i>[161]</p>
+
+<p>This voyage seems to have been under the command of Captain
+Newport, who sailed as general in the Lion; but is called, in the
+Pilgrims, The <i>Second</i> Voyage of Captain Peyton to the East
+Indies, because the former voyage of Newport was written by
+Peyton, who, though he occasionally mentions the general, never
+once names him. In this voyage Peyton sailed in the Expedition;
+the fleet consisting of three other ships, the Dragon, Lion, and
+Pepper-corn. The journal appears to have been abbreviated by
+Purchas, as he tells us it was <i>gathered out of his larger
+journal</i>. This voyage is chiefly remarkable as introductory to
+the embassy of Sir Thomas Roe to India, contained in the
+subsequent section, as Sir Thomas and his suite embarked in this
+fleet. Instead of giving the remarks of Sir Thomas Roe in his own
+journal, so far as they apply to the voyage between England and
+Surat, these have been added in the text of the present voyage,
+distinguishing those observations by T.R. the initials of his
+name, and placing them all in separate paragraphs.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 161: Purch. Pilgr. I. 528.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We learn by a subsequent article in the Pilgrims, I. 603, That
+Captain William Keeling was general, or chief commander of this
+fleet, and sailed in the Dragon, Robert Bonner master. The other
+two ships were the Pepper-corn, Captain Christopher Harris, and
+the Expedition, Captain William Peyton.--E.</p>
+
+<p>S.1. <i>Occurrences during the Voyage from England to
+Surat</i>.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed from Gravesend on the 24th January, 1615, and on the
+2d February Sir Thomas Roe, ambassador from his majesty to the
+Great Mogul, repaired on board the Lion, with fifteen attendants.
+At the same time, Mr Humphry Boughton embarked in the
+Pepper-corn, being recommended by the king to the company for a
+passage to India. We carried out in the fleet eleven Japanese,
+who were brought to England in the Clove, divided proportionally
+among the ships; likewise fourteen Guzerates, brought home in the
+Dragon, together with nineteen condemned persons from Newgate, to
+be left for the discovery of unknown places, the company having
+obtained their pardons from the king for this purpose. On the
+20th, some of the Dragon's men, among whom were the <i>Newgate
+birds</i>, attempted to run away with the pinnace, but were
+prevented: Yet next night one of these condemned men, and two of
+the crew of the Pepper-corn, carried away her pinnace. Two of my
+men conspired to carry away my boat that same night, but were
+discovered.</p>
+
+<p>The 23d February we set sail from the Downs, and on the 6th
+March we lost sight of the Lizard. The 26th we saw land, supposed
+to be the western part of Fuerteventura, but it proved to be part
+of Barbary. One of the points of land at the mouth of the river
+<i>Marhequena</i>, we found to be laid down wrong, a whole degree
+more northerly than it ought to be; as likewise cape Bajadore is
+misplaced a whole degree, which we found by experience, escaping
+great danger caused by that error in our charts. The 26th of
+April we got into the trade wind; and on the 10th May, being by
+estimation 620 leagues west of the Cape of Good Hope, we saw many
+<i>pintadoes, mangareludas</i>, and other fowls.</p>
+
+<p>The 5th June we came to anchor in Saldanha bay, having only
+buried three or four men since leaving England, out of our whole
+fleet, and had now about thirty sick, for whom we erected five
+tents ashore. <i>Corey</i>[162] came down and welcomed us after
+his manner, by whose means the savages were not so fearful or
+thievish as at other times. They brought us cattle in great
+abundance, which we bought for shreds of copper. Corey shewed his
+house and his wife and children to some of our people, his
+dwelling being at a town or <i>craal</i> of about an hundred
+houses, five English miles from the landing place. Most of these
+savages can say <i>Sir Thomas Smith's English ships</i>, which
+they often repeat with much pride. Their wives and children came
+often down to see us, whom we gratified with bugles, or such
+trifles; and two or three of them expressed a desire to go with
+us to England, seeing that Corey had sped so well, and returned
+so rich, with his copper suit, which he preserves at his house
+with much care. Corey also proposed to return with us,
+accompanied by one of his sons, when our ships are
+homeward-bound. On the east side of the <i>Table</i> mountain
+there is another village of ten small houses, built round like
+bee-hives, and covered with mats woven of bent grass.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 162: Corey, or Coree, was a savage, or
+Hottentot chief; who had been in
+England.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"The land at the Cape of Good Hope, near Saldanha bay, [Table
+bay] is fertile, but divided by high and inaccessible rocky
+mountains, covered with snow, the river Dulce falling into the
+bay on the east side. The natives are the most barbarous people
+in the world, eating carrion, wearing the guts of sheep about
+their necks, and rubbing their heads, the hair on which is curled
+like the negroes, with the dung of beasts and other dirt. They
+have no clothing, except skins wrapped about their shoulders,
+wearing the fleshy side next them in summer, and the hairy side
+in winter. Their houses are only made of mats, rounded at the top
+like an oven, and open on one side, which they turn as the wind
+changes, having no door to keep out the weather. They have left
+off their former custom of stealing, but are quite ignorant of
+God, and seem to have no religion. The air and water here are
+both excellent, and the country is very healthy. The country
+abounds in cattle, sheep, antilopes, baboons, pheasants,
+partridges, larks, wild-geese, ducks, and many other kinds of
+fowls. On the Penguin isle [Dassen or Robber's island,] there is
+a bird called penguin, which walks upright, having no feathers on
+its wings, which hang down like sleeves faced with white. These
+birds cannot fly, but walk about in flocks, being a kind of
+mixture, or intermediate link, between beast, bird, and fish, yet
+mostly bird. The commodities here are cattle and <i>ningin</i>
+roots; and I believe there is a rock yielding
+quicksilver.[163]The Table mountain is 11,853 feet high.[164] The
+bay is full of whales and seals, and is in lat. 33&deg; 45'
+S."--T.R.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 163: Ningin, or Ginseng, is mentioned
+afterwards. The quicksilver rock has not been
+found.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 164: This height is probably an
+exaggeration, or was measured up its slope or talus, not
+ascertained perpendicularly.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 16th of June, after a consultation, we set ashore ten
+of our condemned persons to remain at the Cape. These were John
+Crosse, Henry Cocket, Clerke, Brand, Booth, Hunyard, Brigs, Pets,
+Metcalf, and Skilligall. These men agreed that Crosse should be
+their chief, and we gave them weapons for their defence against
+men and wild beasts, together with provisions and clothes. The
+natives at this place are especially desirous of brass, and care
+not much for copper, chiefly wishing to have pieces of a foot
+square. They care little for iron hoops. We caught seven or eight
+hundred fishes in the river, at one haul of our seyne. The
+country people brought us for sale a root called
+<i>Ningin</i>,[165] of which we bought a handful for a small
+piece of copper an inch and half long. Our men got some of this,
+but not so good, this not being the season when it is ripe; for,
+when in full perfection, it is as tender and sweet as
+anise-seeds.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 165: A medicinal root, much prized at
+Japan, somewhat like a <i>skerrit</i>.--<i>Purch.</i> Probably
+that named Ginseng, in high repute in China and Japan for its
+fancied restorative and provocative powers, like the mandrake of
+holy writ, but deservedly despised in the Materia Medica of
+Europe. Its whole virtues lay in some supposed resemblance to the
+human figure, founded on the childish doctrine of signatures;
+whence, at one time, every thing yellow was considered specific
+against jaundice, with many other and similar absurd
+notions.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We sailed from Saldanha on the 20th June, and on the the 21st
+we had sight of land in 34&deg; 28' S. being the land to the west
+of cape <i>de Arecife</i>, laid down 28' more northwardly than it
+ought in the charts of <i>Daniel</i>. On the 6th July we ought to
+have seen the coast of Madagascar, by most of our computations,
+and according to Daniel's charts, upon Mercator's projection,
+which proved false by seventy leagues in distance of longitude
+between the coast of Ethiopia at cape Bona Speranza and the isle
+of St Lawrence, as is evident from the charts projected <i>in
+plano</i> by <i>Tottens</i>. The 22d all the four ships anchored
+at <i>Mohelia</i>, where we had water from wells dug a little
+above high-water mark, eight or nine feet deep, close by the
+roots of trees. <i>Doman</i> is the chief town of this island,
+where the sultan resides, to whom we gave a double-locked piece
+and a sword. For very little money we were plentifully supplied
+with provisions, as poultry, goats, bullocks, lemons, oranges,
+limes, tamarinds, cocoa-nuts, pines, sugar-canes, and other
+fruits. Among the inhabitants of this island there are Arabs,
+Turks, and Moors, many of whom speak tolerable Portuguese. From
+them I had a curious account of the current at this place, which
+they said ran alternately fifteen days westerly, fifteen days
+easterly, and fifteen days not at all; and which I partly
+observed to be true: For, at our first coming, the current set
+westerly, and on the 28th it set easterly, and so continued
+during our stay, which was six days, but we went away before
+trial could be perfectly made of this report.</p>
+
+<p>I learned here that the king of <i>Juanni</i> [Joanna or
+Hinzuan] was sovereign of this island, but entrusted its
+government to the sultan, who resides here. The 29th, a vessel
+arrived at <i>Doman</i> from <i>Gangamora</i>, in the island of
+Madagascar, and I was desired by the general to examine what were
+its commodities, which I found to consist of rice, and a kind of
+cloth manufactured of the barks of trees, which makes very cool
+garments. I enquired from the pilot, who spoke good Portuguese,
+respecting Captain Rowles and the other Englishmen who were
+betrayed on that island. He knew nothing of all this, but said
+that two or three years before, an English boy was at Gangamora
+along with the Portuguese, whom he now thought dead, but knew not
+how he came there. This town of <i>Doman</i> contains about an
+hundred houses, strongly built of stone and lime, and its
+inhabitants are orderly and civil. They carry on trade with the
+coasts of Melinda, Magadoxa, Mombaza, Arabia, and Madagascar,
+carrying slaves taken in their wars, which they sell for nine or
+ten dollars each, and which are sold afterwards in Portugal for
+100 dollars a-head. At Mombaza and Magadoxa, they have
+considerable trade in elephants teeth and drugs; and it was
+therefore agreed to advise the honourable company of this, that
+they might consider of sending a pinnace yearly to make trial of
+this trade. In Mohelia, we bought two or three bullocks for a bar
+of iron of between twenty and twenty-five pounds weight. We
+bought in all 200 head of cattle, and forty goats, besides
+poultry, fruits, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>"<i>Malalia</i> [Mohelia] is one of the Commora islands, the
+other three being <i>Angazesia</i>, [Comoro] <i>Juanny</i>,
+[Joanna or Hinzuan] and Mayotta, stretching almost east and west
+from each other. <i>Angazesia</i> [Comoro] bears N. by W. from
+Mohelia, and is the highest land I ever saw. It is inhabited by
+Moors trading with the main and the other three eastern islands,
+bartering their cattle and fruits for calicoes and other cloths
+for garments. It is governed by ten petty kings, and has
+abundance of cattle, goats, oranges, and lemons. The people are
+reckoned false and treacherous. <i>Hinzuan</i> lies east from
+Mohelia and Mayotta. All these three islands are well stored with
+refreshments, but chiefly Mohelia, and next to it Hinzuan. Here
+lived an old woman who was sultaness of all these islands, and
+under her there were three deputies in Mohelia, who were all her
+sons. The sultan in whose quarter we anchored is so absolute,
+that none of his people dared to sell a single cocoa-nut without
+his leave. Four boats were sent to his town to desire this
+liberty, which was granted. Captain Newport went ashore with
+forty men, and found the governor sitting on a mat, under the
+side of a junk which was then building, and attended by fifty
+men. He was dressed in a mantle of blue and red calico, wrapped
+about him to his knees, his legs and feet bare, and his head
+covered by a close cap of checquer work. Being presented with a
+gun and sword, he returned four cows, and proclaimed liberty for
+the people to trade with us. He gave the English cocoa-nuts to
+eat, while he chewed betel and areka-nut, tempered with lime of
+burnt oister shells. It has a hot biting taste, voids rheum,
+cools the head, and is all their physic. It makes those giddy who
+are not accustomed to its use, producing red spittles, and in
+time colours the teeth black, which they esteem handsome, and
+they use this continually. From the governor they were conducted
+to the carpenter's house, who was a chief man in the town. His
+house was built of stone and lime, low and little, plaistered
+with white lime, roofed with rafters, which were covered with
+leaves of the cocoa-nut tree, the outsides wattled with
+canes.</p>
+
+<p>"Their houses are kept clean and neat, with good household
+stuff, having gardens inclosed with canes, in which they grow
+tobacco and plantains. For dinner, a board was set upon tressels,
+on which was spread a fine new mat, and stone benches stood
+around, on which the guests sat. First, water was brought to each
+in a cocoa-shell, and poured into a wooden platter, and the rinds
+of cocoa-nuts were used instead of towels. There was then set
+before the company boiled rice, roasted plantains, quarters of
+hens, and pieces of goat's flesh broiled. After grace said, they
+fell to their meat, using bread made of cocoa-nut kernels, beaten
+up with honey, and fried. The drink was palamito wine, and the
+milk of the cocoa-nuts. Those who went to see the sultan, named
+<i>Amir Adell</i>, found all things much in the same manner, only
+that his behaviour was more light, and he made haste to get drunk
+with some wine carried to him by the English. The people of these
+islands are strict Mahomedans, and very jealous of letting their
+women or mosques be seen. For, on some of the English coming near
+a village, they shut them up, and threatened to kill them if they
+came nearer. Many of them speak and write Arabic, and some few of
+them Portuguese, as they trade with Mosambique in junks of forty
+tons burden, built, caulked, and rigged all out of the cocoa-nut
+tree. Here we bought oxen and cows, fat but small, Arabian sheep,
+hens, oranges, lemons, and limes in abundance, paying for them in
+calicoes, hollands, sword-blades, dollars, glasses, and other
+trifles."--T.R.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed from Mohelia on the 2d August, and on the 17th got
+sight of cape Guardafui, where the natives seemed afraid of us.
+The 20th we anchored in the road of <i>Galencia</i> in Socotora,
+where the fierceness of the wind raised the sea into a continual
+surf all round about us, and by the spray, blown about us like
+continual rain, our masts, yards, and tackle were made white all
+over by the salt, like so much hoar-frost; The 23d we anchored at
+<i>Tamara</i>, the town where the king resides, and on the 24th
+at <i>Delisha</i>. They here demanded thirty dollars for the
+quintal of aloes, which made us buy the less. The <i>Faiking</i>
+told us that Captain Downton had bought 100 quintals, and it was
+still so liquid, either from newness, or because of the heat,
+that it was ready to run out of the skins. The quintal of this
+place, as tried by our beam, weighed 103 1/2 pounds English.
+Aloes is made from the leaves of a plant resembling our
+sempervivum, or house-leek, the roots and stalk being cut away,
+the rest strongly pressed, and the juice boiled up to a certain
+height, after which it is put into earthen pots, closely stopped
+for eight months, and is then put into skins for sale. The north
+part of Socotora is in 12&deg; 30', and the body in 120&deg;
+25'.[166] It is fourteen leagues from this island to <i>Abdul
+Curia</i>, and as much more from thence to cape Guardafui. Such
+as mean to sail for Socotora, should touch at that cape, and sail
+from thence next morning a little before day-break, to lose no
+part of the day-light, the nights here being dark and obscure,
+with fogs and boisterous winds, during the months of August and
+September. On getting into <i>Abdul Curia</i>, they may anchor on
+the west side in seven or eight fathoms, under the low land; or,
+if they cannot get to anchor, should keep close hauled in the
+night to the southward, lest the wind and northerly current put
+them too much to leeward before day. Notwithstanding the monsoon,
+the winds do not blow steadily, being sometimes S. by W. and
+S.S.W. but seldom to the east of south.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 166: These two numbers unquestionably
+relate to the longitude and latitude respectively, though
+strangely expressed. The true lat. is 13&deg; 20'N. and long.
+53&deg; E. from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"Socotora is an island not far from the mouth of the Red Sea,
+being the <i>Dioscuria</i> or <i>Disoscordia</i> of the ancients,
+in lat. 13&deg; 20' N. It was governed when we were there by a
+sultan, named Amir Ben-said, son of the king of Fartaque, in
+Arabia Felix, which lies between the latitudes of 15&deg; and
+18&deg; N. on the coast of Arabia. This king was in peace with
+the Turks, on condition of assisting them with 5000 men when
+required, and then these troops to be paid and maintained by the
+Turks, to whom he paid no other acknowledgement. Near to the sea
+about Dofar, there is another petty Arab sovereign, whom he of
+Fartaque dare not meddle with, because he is under the protection
+of the Grand Signior.</p>
+
+<p>"The sultan of Socotora came down to meet us at the shore,
+accompanied by 300 men, and had a tent set up for his
+accommodation. He was on horseback, as were two of his principal
+attendants, and a third on a camel, the people running before and
+behind him shouting. He had two companies of guards, one composed
+of his own subjects, and the other consisting of twelve hired
+Guzerates, some armed with Turkish bows, some with pistols, and
+some with muskets, but all having good swords. He had also a few
+kettle-drums, and one trumpet. He received the general in a
+courteous manner, and was so absolute, that no person could sell
+any thing except himself. His people sat about him very
+respectfully; his clothes were of Surat cloths, made in the
+Arabian fashion, with a cassock of red and white wrought velvet,
+and a robe of which the ground was cloth of gold. He wore a
+handsome turban, but his legs and feet were bare.</p>
+
+<p>"Every night these people all stand or kneel towards the
+setting sun, the <i>zerife</i> throwing water on their heads,
+being all Mahomedans. The king's town, named Tamara, is built of
+stone and lime, all whited over, the houses built with
+battlements and pinnacles, and all flat-roofed. At a distance it
+looks well, but within is very poor. Mr Boughton had leave to see
+the king's house, and found it such as might serve an ordinary
+gentleman in England. The lower rooms were used as warehouses and
+wardrobe, a few changes of robes hanging about the walls, and
+along with them were some twenty-five books of their law,
+religion, history, and saints lives. No person could be permitted
+to go up stairs to see his three wives, or the other women; but
+the ordinary sort might be seen in the town, their ears all full
+of silver rings. In the mosque the priest was seen at service. Mr
+Boughton had for his dinner three hens, with rice, his drink
+being water, and a black liquor called <i>cahu</i>, [coffee]
+drank as hot as could be endured.</p>
+
+<p>"On a hill, a mile from Tamara, there is a square castle, but
+we could not get leave to see it. The inhabitants are of four
+sorts. The first are Arabs, who have come in by means of
+conquest, who dare not speak in presence of the sultan without
+leave, and kissing his hand. The second sort are slaves, who kiss
+his foot when they come into his presence, do all his work, and
+make his aloes. The third sort are the old inhabitants of the
+country, called Bedouins, though I think these are not the oldest
+of all, whom I suppose to have been those commonly called
+Jacobite Christians: For, on Mr Boughton going into a church of
+theirs, which the Arabs had forced them to abandon, he found some
+images and a crucifix, which he took away. The Mahomedans would
+not say much about these people, lest other Christians might
+relieve or support them. These Bedouins, having had wars with the
+Arabs, live apart from them in the mountains. The fourth kind of
+people, or original natives, are very savage, poor lean, naked,
+and wear their hair long. They eat nothing but roots, ride about
+on buffaloes, conversing only among themselves, being afraid of
+all others, having no houses, and live more like wild beasts than
+men, and these we conjecture to have been the original natives of
+the place.</p>
+
+<p>"The island is very mountainous and barren, having some
+beeves, goats, and sheep, a few dates and oranges, a little rice,
+and nothing else for the food of man. All its commodities consist
+of aloes, the inspisated juice of a plant having a leaf like our
+house-leek. The only manufacture is a very poor kind of cloth,
+used only by slaves. The king had some dragon's blood, and some
+Lahore indigo, as also a few civet cats and civet. The dead are
+all buried in tombs, and the monuments of their saints are held
+in much veneration. The chief of these was one <i>Sidy
+Hachun</i>,[167] buried at Tamara, who was slain about an hundred
+years before we were there, and who, as they pretend, still
+appears to them, and warns them of approaching dangers. They hold
+him in wonderful veneration, and impute high winds to his
+influence."--T.R.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 167: Sidy, or Seid, signifies a descendant
+or relative of Mahomet, and Hachem, a prophet.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 31st of August we sailed from Socotora. The 10th September
+we had quails, herons, and other land-birds blown from the land,
+and unable to return. The 14th we had sight of Diu, and the 16th
+of Damaun, both inhabited by the Portuguese, and strongly
+fortified. On the 18th we passed the bar of Surat, and came to
+anchor in the road of Swally. Next day we sent a messenger on
+shore, and our boat returned the same night, bringing off Mr
+William Bidulph, who told us of all the affairs of the country,
+and that <i>Zulphecar Khan</i>[168] was now governor of Surat. At
+this place we bought sheep for half a dollar each, and got twenty
+hens for a dollar. On the 22d Mr Barker and other merchants were
+sent to Surat to provide furniture for a house to accommodate the
+lord ambassador, Sir Thomas Roe. They were searched most
+narrowly, even their pockets, and the most secret parts of their
+dress, according to the base manner of this country, in which a
+man has to pay custom for a single dollar in his purse, or a good
+knife in his pocket; and if one has any thing rare, it is sure to
+be taken away by the governor, under pretence of purchase.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 168: In the Pilgrims this person is named
+Zuipher-Car-Chan, but we believe the orthography in the text is
+more correct.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The lord ambassador landed on the 25th, accompanied by our
+general, all the captains and merchants, and eighty men under
+arms, part pikes, and part muskets. Forty-eight guns were fired
+off from the ships, which were all dressed out with colours and
+streamers, flags and pendants. On landing, he was received in a
+splendid tent by the chief men of Surat, who welcomed him to
+India. There was much to do about their barbarous search, which
+they would have executed on all his attendants, which he
+strenuously resisted, and at length he and three or four of his
+principal followers were exempted, while the rest were only
+slightly handled for fashion-sake. A great deal passed on this
+occasion between the governor and the ambassador, about these
+rude and barbarous exactions, Sir Thomas justly contending for
+the honour and immunity of an ambassador from an independent
+king; while they insisted to make no difference between him and
+others of similar rank in those parts, and of our own likewise,
+who had formerly assumed the name of ambassadors. Their barbarous
+usage not only perplexed him there, and detained him long till an
+order came from court, but gave him much plague all the time he
+remained in the country, as will appear afterwards from his own
+journal. They could not easily be persuaded to allow of any
+difference between him and Mr Edwards, who had been considered by
+them in the same light with Sir Thomas.</p>
+
+<p>Mr Barwick's man, who had been inveigled to run away by a
+deserter from Captain Best who had turned Mahomedan, was brought
+back from Surat on the 1st of October. Others afterwards ran away
+to Damaun, and wrote to their comrades to induce them to do the
+same. The 2d, two Hollanders came on board, who had travelled by
+land from Petapulli, on the Coromandel coast. On the 10th, the
+governor's brother came on board, making many fair speeches, and
+had a present given him. The governor impudently urged us to give
+him presents, though he had already received three, but found
+fault with them, and even named what he would have given him,
+being beggar and chooser both at once. We had this day news of Mr
+Aldworth's death; and on the 5th November we received
+intelligence of the lord ambassador having fallen sick at
+Burhanpoor, and that Mr Boughton was dead.</p>
+
+<p>The most current coin at Surat is rials of eight, or Spanish
+dollars, of which the old with the plain cross passes for five
+mahmoodies each. The new dollars, having flower-de-luces at the
+ends of the cross, if not light, are worth four 3/4 mahmoodies.
+The <i>mahmoody</i> is a coarse silver coin, containing thirty
+<i>pice</i>, and twelve <i>drams</i> make a <i>pice</i>. The
+English shilling, if full weight, will yield thirty 1/2 pice.
+Larines are worth much the same with mahmoodies.[169] There are
+sundry kinds of rupees, some of which are worth half a dollar,
+and others less, by which one may be easily deceived. The trade
+at Surat is conducted by brokers, who are very subtle, and
+deceive both buyer and seller, if not carefully looked after. In
+weights, each city of India differs from another. The commodities
+are infinite, indigos being the chief, those of Lahore the best,
+and those from Sarkess inferior. Great quantities of cloths made
+of cotton, as white and coloured calicoes, containing fourteen
+yards the book or piece, from 100 to 200 mahmoodies each.
+Pintadoes, chintzes, chadors, sashes, girdles, cannakens,
+trekannies, serrabafs, aleias, patollas, sellas, quilts, carpets,
+green ginger, suckets or confections, lignum aloes, opium, sal
+amoniac, and abundance of other drugs. Vendible commodities are
+knives, mirrors, pictures, and such like toys; English cloth,
+China wares, silk, and porcelain, and all kinds of spices. The
+Guzerates load their great ships, of nine, twelve, or fifteen
+hundred tons, at Gogo, and steal out unknown to the
+Portuguese.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 169: From this explanation, the
+<i>mahmoody</i> and larine may be assumed as worth one shilling;
+the <i>pice</i> as equal to a farthing and a half, and the dram
+at about 1-10th of a farthing.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The chief places for trade on the river Sinde, or Indus, are
+Tatta, <i>Diul-sinde</i>, Mooltan, and Lahore. The Expedition, on
+her former voyage, had landed the Persian ambassador, Sir Robert
+Shirley, at <i>Diul-sinde</i>; and of him I have thought it right
+to give the following particulars, as an appendix to my former
+voyage, having learnt them from some of his followers at Agra.
+Being weary of <i>Diul-sinde</i>, through the evil conduct of the
+governor, and the attempts of the Portuguese to molest him, who
+even used their endeavours to cut him off, for which purpose
+twelve of them had gone there from Ormus, he asked leave to
+proceed to Tatta; but, being refused permission, he went without
+leave, and having by the way to pass a river where none durst
+ferry him over, because prohibited by the governor on pain of
+death, he constructed a raft of timber and boards, on which he
+and Nazerbeg embarked. They were no sooner shoved off than twenty
+or thirty horse came from the governor in great haste to detain
+them. And as Nazerbeg was unable to guide the raft against the
+tide, some men swam to the raft and brought them back, on which
+occasion they narrowly escaped being drowned. Some of his
+followers being indignant at this rude dealing, one Mr John Ward
+shot off his pistol in their faces, and was instantly slain by
+another shot, and all the rest were carried back prisoners to
+<i>Diul-sinde</i>, being pillaged by the soldiers on their way.
+After some time in prison, they were permitted to proceed to
+Tatta, where they were kindly entertained by the governor of that
+place, who was a Persian. Before leaving Diul-sinde, Sir Thomas
+Powell and Mr Francis Bub died. Sir Robert Shirley remained at
+Tatta till a fit opportunity offered of proceeding to Agra, where
+he went at last, finding the way long and tedious, and much
+infested by thieves. He went there however in safety, going in
+company with a great man who had a strong escort, and for whom he
+had to wait two months.</p>
+
+<p>In this time Lady Powell was delivered of a son, but both she
+and her child died soon after, together with Mr Michael Powell,
+brother to Sir Thomas, losing their lives in this tedious waiting
+in boats for the great man. On his arrival at Agra, Sir Robert
+was favourably entertained by the Great Mogul, who sent for the
+Banian governor of Diul-sinde to answer at court to the
+complaint, and promised Sir Robert to have his own revenge if he
+would stay; but he hasted away to Persia, after receiving many
+presents from the Mogul, who gave him an escort, and all
+necessaries for his journey, in which he had not a single English
+attendant, as John Heriot died at Agra, and Mr Richard Barber,
+his apothecary, returned to Surat. Of all his company, three only
+remained with him, his lady and her female attendant, two
+Persians, the old Arminian, and the Circassian. His Dutch
+jeweller came to Surat along with Mr Edwards.</p>
+
+<p>S.2. <i>Occurrences at Calicut and Sumatra, Miscarriage of the
+English Ships, Abuses of the Dutch, and Factories in
+India</i>.</p>
+
+<p>We took a Portuguese prize on the 29th of February, 1616. The
+3d March, while at anchor in the road of Calicut, the deputy of
+the Zamorin came aboard, attended by many boats, signifying the
+joy of his master at our arrival, and his earnest desire to
+confer with our nation, and entreated therefore that we would
+tarry a few days, that he might send to the Zamorin, who was then
+at Cranganore besieging a castle belonging to the Portuguese. We
+had here abundance of provisions brought to us on board, and at
+reasonable rates. That same evening, there came a messenger from
+the Zamorin, entreating us to anchor for two or three days off
+Cranganore, which we accordingly did on the 5th, anchoring two
+leagues off shore. About noon the Zamorin sent to request the
+general would come ashore, to visit him, but this was not deemed
+right without a pledge, and Mr George Barkley went ashore to wait
+upon him; but the Zamorin refused to reveal his intentions to any
+one except our general, and seemed much displeased at his not
+coming ashore.</p>
+
+<p>The general accordingly landed on the 8th, and had an audience
+of the Zamorin, who wished the English to establish a factory in
+his dominions, for which purpose he offered a good house
+rent-free, freedom from custom or other exactions, for all goods
+brought there or carried thence, and made many protestations of
+affection for our nation. This was for the present declined,
+because most of our goods had been left at Surat, and because we
+were now bound for Bantam. To this the Zamorin answered, that it
+was no matter whether any goods were left for the present, as he
+only desired we might leave two or three Englishmen there, who
+should want for nothing, as he only wanted to be assured of our
+return next year with a supply of men and goods. He assured us we
+might be sure of loading one ship yearly with pepper, and might
+make sale of our commodities to a considerable extent. Upon this
+it was agreed to leave a factory at this place, with such goods
+as we could spare, which went accordingly on shore on the 9th;
+George Woolman being appointed chief of this new factory at
+Cranganore, Peter Needham and Roger Hares under-factors, together
+with Richard Stamford, and a boy named Edward Peake, who was
+appointed to learn the language. The name of the king is
+<i>Pendre Quone[170] Zamorin</i>, to whom was given, as a
+present, a minion or small cannon, and a barrel of powder; on
+which he promised, if he won the fort of Cranganore, to give it
+up to the English.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 170: Named <i>Underecon Cheete</i> in a
+subsequent article.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 10th we received the Zamorin's letter of agreement for our
+privileges, with many fair protestations of love. We sailed the
+same day, passing before Cochin, which we could see distinctly.
+Next day we had a view of the town and castle of Coulan, where
+was a ship riding at anchor under the guns of the castle, which
+we boarded and brought forth without any hurt from the guns, all
+the crew having fled ashore. This was a Portuguese ship of four
+or five hundred tons, lately arrived from Bengal and Pegu, laden
+with rice, grain, Bengal cloths, butter, sugar, gum lack, hard
+wax, drugs, and other things. The 12th we espied another ship, to
+which we gave chase, and came up with about midnight, when she
+surrendered at the first shot.[171] I sent for her chief men on
+board my ship, the others being three or four miles a-stern, and
+set some of my people on board the prize, with strict charges to
+hurt no person. There were in this ship eighteen or twenty
+Portuguese, and about eighty others, men, women, and children.
+Her chief loading was rice, butter, sugar, lack, drugs, and
+Bengal cloths. We offered these people our first prize, with
+victuals to carry them ashore, which they refused, as fearing to
+be ill-used by the Malabars, having lately escaped with
+difficulty from a fleet of theirs of fourteen sail. Next day we
+landed them where they desired, and allowed them to go away
+unsearched for money or jewels. We had now three English
+ships[172] and three prizes.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 171: These prizes were taken from the
+Portuguese in part satisfaction for their unjust vexations and
+hostilities at Surat and other
+places.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 172: No notice is taken of the fourth ship,
+the Lion, probably left at Surat; indeed, the whole of this
+relation is exceedingly vague and unsatisfactory, the name even
+of the general never being once mentioned.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 14th we arrived at <i>Brinion</i>, in lat. 8&deg; 30',
+where we took out of the first prize what we thought useful, and
+then set her adrift. At <i>Brinion</i> there is a small town in a
+round bay, which may be known by a long white beach to the north,
+and to the south is all high land, having a red cliff two leagues
+to the south, close to the sea. From thence to cape Comorin is
+sixteen leagues, the course being S.E. by S. along a bold free
+coast. The inhabitants of Brinion[173] are no way subject to the
+Portuguese. The 1st of April the island of Ceylon bore E. by S.
+seven leagues off. On the 10th the Peak of Adam bore north. I
+this day took my leave of the general, the Dragon and Pepper-corn
+being bound for Acheen, while I, in the Expedition, went for
+Priaman, Tecoo, and Bantam.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 173: In 8&deg; 22' N. at the distance
+indicated from cape Comorin, is a place called Billingham, which
+may possibly be the Brinion of the text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>It is good to remain in Brinion till the end of March, when
+the easterly monsoon ends, and not to pass cape Comorin sooner,
+on account of calms, and because the southerly current sets
+towards the Maldives. All who come from the west for Priaman and
+Tecoo, ought to continue so as to have sufficient day-light for
+passing between <i>Nimptan</i>[174] and the other adjacent
+islands, the best channel being to the north of that island. On
+the 30th of April I met the Advice going for Tecoo; but, at my
+request, she returned for Bantam, whence she was sent to Japan. I
+arrived at Bantam on the 1st of May, where I found the Hosiander
+newly arrived from Japan, and the Attendance from <i>Jambo</i>,
+most of their men being sick or dead. I here learnt the death of
+Captain Downton, and of the arrival of Captain Samuel Castleton
+with the Clove and Defence, which, with the Thomas and Concord,
+were gone to the Moluccas, the Thomas being appointed to proceed
+from thence to Japan.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 174: Pulo Mintaon, off the S.W. coast of
+Sumatra, nearly under the line, is probably here
+meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 19th of May I sailed from Bantam, and the 10th June I put
+into Tecoo. The 3d July I hove my ship down on the careen to
+sheath her. It is of great use to double sheath such ships as go
+to Surat, as though the outer sheathing may be eaten like a
+honey-comb by the worms, the inner is not at all injured. It were
+also of great use to have the rudder sheathed with thin
+copper,[175] to prevent the worms from eating off its edges,
+which is very detrimental in steering, and cannot be easily
+remedied, being so deep in the water. The natives of Sumatra
+inhabiting Priaman are barbarous, deceitful, and continually
+craving presents or bribes; and sometimes I have been in imminent
+hazard of being murdered, a hundred of them drawing their crisses
+upon us at once, because we refused to let them have our goods on
+trust, or at prices of their own making. The 20th, Thomas Bonnar,
+master of the Expedition, died, and was succeeded by John Row,
+who was the third master in this voyage.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 175: We had formerly occasion to notice a
+ship sheathed with iron at Japan, and this is the first
+indication or proposal for using copper in that way. Iron
+sheathing has never been adopted into British practice, while
+copper sheathing is now universal. Captain Peyton does not appear
+to have been aware that copper sheathing is incompatible with
+iron fastenings, which indeed was only learnt long after, by
+woeful experience, and the loss of many ships and men. In
+consequence of a strong predisposing chemical afinity, exerted by
+the contiguity of the copper and iron in the sea water, the
+muriatic acid corrodes the iron bolts and other fastenings, all
+of which are now made of copper in ships that are to be copper
+sheathed.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 26th, the Dragon and Pepper-corn arrived from Acheen,
+where they had purchased pepper, carried there from Tecoo in
+large junks and praws, which navigate between these places, but
+never out of sight of land. The king of Acheen commands the
+people of Tecoo to bring their pepper to his port, and allows
+none to purchase it there, but those who barter their Surat goods
+at such rates as he pleases to impose. Often likewise, he sends
+to Priaman and Tecoo the Surat commodities procured by him in
+that manner, obliging the merchants there to buy at rates by him
+imposed, and no person is allowed to buy or sell till his goods
+are sold. This makes our trade with them the better.[176]
+<i>Jambo</i> is on the east side of Sumatra, and yields a similar
+large-grained pepper with what is procured at Priaman, but is not
+under the dominion of the king of Acheen, as are Baruse,
+Passaman, Tecoo, Priaman, Cottatinga, and other places on the
+western side of that island. <i>Baruse</i> is to the north of
+Passaman, and yields considerable quantities of benzoin;
+<i>Cottatinga</i> yields gold, and the other places pepper. Our
+general brought the king of Acheen's letter to these places,
+where the chief men received it with great submission, each of
+them kissing it and laying it on his head, promising to obey its
+injunctions, yet all failed in performance. It were proper, in
+these letters from the king, to procure all the particulars of
+the trade to be inserted. I set sail from Tecoo for Bantam on the
+4th September.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 176: It is so expressed in the Pilgrims;
+yet it would seem that such arbitrary proceeding in the
+sovereign, assuming the character of merchant, would be
+destructive of all trade.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The best gold, and the largest quantity, is to be had at the
+high hill of Passaman, where likewise is the best, cheapest, and
+most abundant produce of pepper. But the air is there so
+pestiferous, that there is no going thither for our nation
+without great mortality among the men. Fortunately this is not
+necessary in procuring pepper, as the Surat commodities at Tecoo
+are sufficiently attractive. I have even observed many of the
+natives to labour under infectious diseases, the limbs of some
+being ready to drop off with rottenness, while others had huge
+wens or swellings under their throats, as large as a two-penny
+loaf; which they impute to the bad water.[177] Though a barbarous
+people, they are yet acquainted with the means of curing their
+diseases. The people of Tecoo are base, thievish, subtle, seeking
+gain by every kind of fraud, or even by force when they dare;
+using false weights, false reckonings, and even attempting to
+poison our meats and drinks while dressing, and crissing our men
+when opportunity serves: But it is to be hoped they may be
+inforced to keep better order, by the influence and authority of
+the king of Acheen. At Acheen our Portuguese prizes were disposed
+of, and shared according to the custom of the sea, a sixth part
+being divided among the captors, and the rest carried to the
+account of our employers. There were only five left in the
+factory. Many of our men were sick, owing to their immoderate
+indulgence in drinking arrack.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 177: The <i>goitre</i> was long ignorantly
+imputed in Europe to drinking snow water; but is now well known
+only to affect the inhabitants of peculiar districts, as
+Derbyshire in England, and the Valais in Switzerland, and this
+district in Sumatra, where certain mineral impregnations render
+the water unwholesome.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When at Bantam, in October 1616, there were four English
+ships, and five Hollanders at Jacatra, which raised the price of
+pepper; and that the more, because the Dutch boasted of having
+brought this year in ready money 1,600,000 dollars, which is
+probably a great exaggeration to brave our nation. Their last
+fleet of six ships took two or three ships of the Portuguese, of
+which they made great boasts. They endeavour to depress our
+nation by every manner of abuse throughout the Indies, acting
+towards us in a most unfriendly and unchristian manner. Even in
+Bantam, where they acknowledge our equal right, they threaten to
+pull our people out of our factory by the ears, sometimes picking
+quarrels with them in the streets, and even imprisoning them; and
+when they themselves have caused an uproar, complaining to the
+king of Bantam of our unquietness, and bribing him to take their
+parts. He receives their money, and tells us of their dealings,
+taking advantage of this disagreement to fleece both sides. Even
+at Pulo-way, an island freely surrendered to the king of England,
+they abused our people, leading them through the streets with
+halters round their necks, carrying an hour-glass before them,
+and proclaiming that they were to be hanged when the sand was run
+out. And though they did not actually proceed to that extremity,
+they kept them three or four days in irons, and afterwards sent
+them aboard the Concord and Thomasine, under a forced composition
+never to return. Likewise, at the return of the Hosiander from
+Japan, which brought thirty tons of wood for them, free of
+freight and charges, they reported she would have returned empty,
+but for their timber; which also they might have said of my ship,
+which brought for them, from Surat to Bantam, thirty-one
+<i>churles</i> of indigo and a chest of pistoles,
+freight-free.</p>
+
+<p>Captain Castleton went to the Moluccas with four ships, the
+Clove, Defence, Thomas, and Concord, that he might be better able
+to defend himself against the Hollanders; yet, being threatened
+by eleven of their ships, they returned without doing much
+business, having only a few cloves in the Clove. The captain died
+there of the flux; and the bad success of that expedition,
+together with other faults, was laid to his charge. The
+Trades-increase was twice set on fire by the Javans, and the fire
+quenched by our people; but on a third attempt, she was fired in
+so many places at once, that it was impossible to save her. The
+Darling was laid up at Patane, in June 1615, by order of Mr
+Larkine and the factory, as incapable of repair. Herrold, her
+master, was reported of having a design to carry her off to the
+Portuguese; and, being prevented, he went himself. The Thomasine
+was cast away, in September 1615, upon a shoal in the night,
+seventeen leagues W. from Macasser, while returning from the
+Moluccas. On this occasion her goods were lost, which were not of
+much value, but they saved the money, being 2000 dollars, and all
+their provisions, remaining fourteen days on a desolate island,
+where they fitted up their boat, which brought themselves and
+their money to Bantam. All their goods and other things were left
+behind, and seized by the king of Macasser, who refused to make
+restitution. At Jacatra the Hector sunk in three fathoms water
+while careening, her keel being exceedingly worm-eaten. The
+Concord is there also laid up, so rotten and leaky that they had
+to take out her provisions, and let her sink close to the shore.
+The Hosiander, on the 15th October 1616, was appointed to sail
+for the Coromandel coast.</p>
+
+<p>The factories which are at present established for our company
+in the East Indies, so far as I could hear, are these: Bantam,
+Jacatra, Ahmedabad, Agra, Agimere, Burhanpoor, Calicut,
+Masulipatam, Patepulli, Patane, Siam, Banjermassen, Succodania,
+Macasser, Acheen, Jambo, Tecoo, Banda, and Firando in Japan. At
+Bantam, Mr George Barclay was chief, with John Jordan, George
+Ball, Ralph Copendale, and several other factors and assistants.
+The principal purpose of the factory at Acheen, is to solicit for
+our better proceedings at Priaman and Tecoo. The place is
+unwholesome, more especially for such as indulge in the use of
+hot fiery drinks, as <i>arack</i> and <i>aracape</i>, which bring
+many to untimely graves; and throw discredit on the voyage. It is
+not to be imagined at home, how unruly are the common men abroad,
+never being satisfied unless when their brains are reeling with
+liquor. Even the king of Acheen is said to have a strange habit
+of getting drunk when the English resort to him, as if thereby to
+do them honour, and it seems dishonourable to them not to conform
+with him, in sitting in the water, drinking hard, and many other
+strange customs. He is very tyrannical and cruel to his subjects,
+daily cutting off the hands, arms, and legs of many, on very
+small and frivolous causes; or causing them to be thrown to the
+elephants, he himself commanding a sagacious elephant to toss the
+culprits so high and so often, as either to bruise or kill them,
+according to his caprice at the time. No one that arrives at his
+port may land without his <i>chop</i> or licence. On one
+occasion, a Dutch general came on shore without his licence, by
+desire of the principal factor, who presumed on his favour with
+the king. When the general came to the palace-gate, where another
+chop is necessary, the king found this irregularity to have
+proceeded from the presumption of the resident, whom he sent for
+and laid before the elephant, who tossed him three times, but so
+gently as not to bruise him much, giving him thus a warning how
+he should neglect the king's commands another time. The Dutch
+general stood by the while, fearing to come in for his share of
+this strange discipline; but the king forgave him, as ignorant of
+the law. The poor factor, being called into the king's presence,
+humbly acknowledged his punishment to have been merited, yet fled
+with the rest of the factory at the departure of the ships; on
+which the king placed us in their house.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed from Bantam, homeward bound, on the 1st November
+1616. The 5th January 1617, I was unable to weigh our anchor,
+owing to the violence of the wind, to follow the Dragon to
+Penguin island. Ships that go round the Cape of Good Hope from
+India, at this season of the year, ought not to anchor short of
+Saldanha road, [Table Bay,] but ought to bear to leeward for
+Penguin island, and anchor there with two anchors at once, till
+the wind serve. In December, January, and February, the S.S.E.
+wind blows there with great violence from new to full moon. Yet I
+hold it dangerous to neglect this place, trusting to refreshments
+at St Helena, a certainty for an uncertainty; as the obscurity of
+the sun and moon, owing to thick mists at this season, may
+disappoint the most experienced navigators, and occasion the loss
+of ship, cargo, and men. While at the Cape, Corey came down with
+three sheep, and promised more, but went away in great haste to
+his wife and family, who dwelt now farther from the bay than
+formerly. It appears that the Hollanders had frightened the
+natives, by landing and going up the country with above an
+hundred men at once. Owing to this, our chief refreshment here
+was fresh fish.</p>
+
+<p>The 9th April 1617, we passed through great quantities of
+sea-weeds, called <i>seragasso</i>, which float in long ridges or
+rows along with the wind, and at considerable distances from each
+other. This plant has a leaf like samphire, but not so thick, and
+carries a very small yellow berry. It reaches from 22&deg; 20' to
+32&deg; both of N. latitude. We anchored in the Downs on the 29th
+of May 1617.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Brief Notice of the Ports, Cities, and Towns, inhabited
+by, and traded with, by the Portuguese between the Cape of Good
+Hope and Japan, in</i> 1616.</p>
+
+<p>The river of <i>Quame</i>, or <i>Cuamo</i>, on the eastern
+coast of Africa, where they are said to trade yearly for gold,
+elephants teeth, ambergris, and slaves. <i>Mozambique</i>, an
+island on the same coast, where they trade for gold, ambergris,
+and slaves, in barter for iron, lead, tin, and Cambay
+commodities, <i>Magadoxo</i>, which has abundance of elephants
+teeth, some ambergris, and various kinds of drugs. From these
+ports they trade yearly to Cambay, the Red Sea, and other places,
+observing the monsoons, which blow W. in April, May, June, July,
+August, and part of September, and the E. monsoon prevails an the
+other months. A few days between the cessation of one monsoon and
+the commencement of the other, the winds are variable, attended
+by calms, but become regular in a few days. To the east of
+Sumatra, however, the two monsoons continue only five months each
+way, the two intermediate months having variable winds.</p>
+
+<p><i>Ormus</i> in the gulf of Persia, whence the Portuguese
+trade to Persia, Diul-sinde, Arabia, &amp;c. They fetch much
+pearl from Bassora;[178] and they load a ship or two with Persian
+commodities for Diul-sinde, where they arrive between the end of
+August and middle of September, taking likewise with them great
+store of dollars. Ormus is their best place in the Indies except
+Goa. At <i>Muskat</i> they have a fort and some small trade,
+keeping the natives in such awe by land and sea, that they dare
+not trade without their licence, and this practice they follow in
+all parts of India where they are strong. <i>Diul-sinde</i> on
+the Indus in the dominions of the Great Mogul. <i>Diu</i>, where
+they have a strong castle. Damaun, where they have a castle, and
+are said to have an hundred villages under their authority.
+<i>Basseen</i>, or <i>Serra de Bazein</i>, a little south from
+<i>Damaun</i>, and bordering on the Deccan; between which and
+<i>Chaul</i> they have three ports, <i>Gazein, Banda</i>, and
+<i>Maia</i>. <i>Chaul</i> is a great city with a castle. At
+<i>Dabul</i> they have a factory, but no fort.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 178: This is a mistake for the isle of
+Bahrein.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p><i>Goa</i> is their metropolitan city in India, which stands
+in a small island, being the seat of their viceroy, and the
+anchoring place of their caracks. <i>Onore</i> has a small fort.
+<i>Barcellore</i>, a town and castle, yields pepper, ginger, and
+many kinds of drugs. <i>Mangalore</i>, a town and castle.
+<i>Cananore</i>, a city and castle, yielding similar commodities
+with Barcellore. From <i>Calicut</i> they have been expelled by
+the Zamorin, who endeavours to do the same at <i>Crangator</i>,
+[Cranganore,] where they have a fort. <i>Cochin</i> is a strong
+city and castle, pleasantly situated on the sea in a wholesome
+air, with a fine river for the reception of ships. <i>Coulan</i>,
+a town with a small castle; near which is a village named St
+Lawrence, chiefly inhabited by friars and jesuits.
+<i>Quiloan</i>, a small city with a castle. <i>Tuckatra</i>, a
+town and castle, the inhabitants being mostly Christians.</p>
+
+<p><i>Manaar</i> is on the island of Ceylon, between Cape Comorin
+and Point-de-Gale, where they have a town inhabited by
+Portuguese. In this island also they have <i>Columbo</i>, and
+many other small places, having conquered most of the island,
+which yields cinnamon and various drugs. <i>Negopatnam</i> is a
+city of great trade, on the coast of Coromandel, where they have
+only a factory. St Thomas, or <i>Meliapoor</i>, is a walled town
+inhabited by the Portuguese. In Bengal, up the river Ganges, they
+have a town, besides some factories and many small habitations.
+They have a factory in Pegu, another in Aracan, and one in the
+river of Martaban. Also at <i>Junkceylon</i> they have a great
+factory, whence they fetch considerable quantities of tin to the
+Malabar coast.</p>
+
+<p><i>Malacca</i> is a strong city and castle belonging to the
+Portuguese, and the centre of a great trade in those parts of
+India. From this place the king of Acheen has long sought to root
+them out, and has burnt and plundered some of their ships this
+year, 1619. At <i>Macao</i>, an island on the coast of China,
+they have a city with a castle, where they are said to carry on
+much trade with the Chinese. They have a factory in Japan, but
+neither town nor fort; and trade thence with the coast of China.
+The Dutch are said to make much spoil of the vessels employed on
+this trade, Portuguese, Chinese, and others, accounting all fish
+that fall into their net.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION V.</p>
+
+<p><i>Notes, concerning the Proceedings of the Factory at
+Cranganore, from the Journal of Roger Hawes.[179]</i></p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 179: Parch. Pilgr. I. 608.--Hawes sailed in
+the fleet under Keeling, in 1615, which carried out Sir Thomas
+Roe, already related in Sect. IV. of this chapter; and the
+present short article almost exclusively relates to the new
+factory at Cranganore on the Malabar coast, in which Hawes was
+left as one of the factors. This is a very imperfect and
+inconclusive article, yet gives some idea of the manners and
+customs of the Malabars.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 4th of March 1615, we chased a Portuguese frigate,
+which ran into a creek and escaped. While on our way towards Cape
+Comorin, a Tony came aboard of us, with messengers from the
+Zamorin to our general, Captain William Keeling. Next day, the
+governor sent a present, and entreated the general to proceed to
+Cranganore, which we did next day, taking with us the messengers
+sent from the Zamorin, who requested the general to come on shore
+to speak with him. But, while he was doing so, some frigates came
+and anchored near the shore, by which he was constrained to go on
+board the Expedition, Captain Walter Peyton. On this occasion
+some shots were exchanged, but little harm was done. The general
+went ashore on the 8th, accompanied by Mr Barclay, the cape
+merchant, and several others. They were well used, and agreed to
+settle a factory in the dominions of the Zamorin, the following
+being the articles agreed upon:--</p>
+
+<p><i>"UNDERECON CHEETE, Great Zamorin, &amp;c. to JAMES, King of
+Britain, &amp;c.</i> Whereas your servant and subject, William
+Keeling, arrived in my kingdom at the port of Cranganore, in
+March 1615, with three ships, and at my earnest solicitation came
+ashore to see me; there was concluded by me for my part, and by
+him for the English nation, as followeth.</p>
+
+<p>"As I have ever been at enmity with the Portuguese, and
+propose always so to continue, I do hereby faithfully promise to
+be and to continue in friendship with the English, both for
+myself and my successors: And, if I succeed in taking the fort of
+Cranganore, I engage to give it to the English, to possess as
+their own, together with the island belonging to it, which is in
+length along the sea-coast nine miles, and three in breadth; and
+I propose to build therein a house for my own people, to the
+number of one hundred persons.</p>
+
+<p>"I shall hereafter endeavour, with the aid of the English, to
+conquer the town and fort of Cochin, which formerly belonged, to
+my crown and kingdom, and shall then deliver it to the English as
+their own. Provided that the charges of its capture be equally
+borne by both parties, one half by me, and the other half by the
+English nation; and in that case, the benefit of the plunder
+thereof, of whatsoever kind, shall belong half to me, and half to
+the English. And thereafter, I shall claim no right, title, or
+interest in the said town, precincts, or appurtenances
+whatsoever."</p>
+
+<p>"I also covenant for myself, my heirs and successors, that the
+whole trade of the English, in whatsoever commodities, brought in
+or carried out, shall be entirely free from all custom,
+imposition, tax, toll, or any other duty, of any quality or
+description."</p>
+
+<p>"To these covenants, which the shortness of time did not
+permit to extend in more ample form, I, the Zamorin, have sworn
+to perform, by the great God whom I serve, and not only for
+myself but for my successors; and in witness thereof have laid my
+hand upon this writing.[180] And the said William Keeling
+promises to acquaint the king his master with the premises, and
+to endeavour to procure his majesty's consent thereto."</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 180: This probably alludes to a custom
+mentioned in one of our earlier volumes, of imprinting the form
+of the hand, smeared with ink, on the paper, instead of signature
+or seal.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This being agreed upon, a stock was made out for a factory,
+such as the shortness of time would permit, and three factors
+were appointed. These were, George Woolman, chief, Peter Needham,
+second, who was one of the general's servants, and I, Roger
+Hawes, third; together with a youth, named Edward Peake, as our
+attendant, who was to learn the language. John Stamford, a
+gunner, was likewise left to assist the Zamorin in his wars. On
+the 10th the ships departed, leaving us and our goods in a
+<i>shrambe</i> at the water side, together with a present for the
+Zamorin. We continued there till the 13th, at which time the last
+of our goods were carried to the Zamorin's castle; whose
+integrity we much suspected, after having thus got possession of
+our goods. On the 20th, he insisted to see Mr Woolman's trunk,
+supposing we had plenty of money. Needham had told him we had 500
+rials; but finding little more than fifty, he demanded the loan
+of that sum, which we could not refuse. He offered us a pawn not
+worth half; which we refused to accept, hoping he would now allow
+us to proceed to Calicut, but he put us off with delays. He
+likewise urged us to give his brother a present.</p>
+
+<p>On the 28th, the Zamorin came into the apartment where we
+were, and gave Mr Woolman two gold rings, and one to each of the
+rest; and next day he invited us to come to his tumbling sports.
+That same night, Stamford went out with his sword in his hand,
+telling the boy that he would return presently. The next news we
+had of him was, that he was in the hands of the Cochin nayres. He
+had lost His way while drunk, and meeting with some of them, they
+asked where he wished to go; he said to the Zamorin, to whom they
+undertook to conduct him, and he knew not that he was a prisoner,
+till he got to Cochin. This incident put us in great fear, but
+the Zamorin gave us good words, saying he was better pleased to
+find him a knave now, than after he had put trust in him.</p>
+
+<p>We had leave in April to depart with our goods to Calicut,
+where we arrived on the 22d of that month, and were well
+received; but had to remain in the custom-house, till we could
+get a more convenient house, which was made ready for us on the
+6th of May, with promise of a better after the rains. We were
+very desirous, according to our orders from the general, to have
+sent a messenger with his and our letters to Surat, to acquaint
+our countrymen that we were here; but the governor would not
+consent till we had sold all our goods. On the 18th of June, one
+was sent. On the 26th, part of our goods were sold to the
+merchants of Calicut, by the governor's procurement, with fair
+promises of part payment shortly. But it is not the custom of the
+best or the worst in this country to keep their words, being
+certain only in dissembling. Mr Woolman was desirous of going to
+Nassapore to make sales, but the governor put him off with divers
+shifts from time to time. The 3d July, our messenger for Surat
+returned, reporting that he had been set upon when well forwards
+on his way, and had his money and letters taken from him, after
+being well beaten. Among his letters was one from Captain Keeling
+to the next general, the loss of which gave us much concern; yet
+we strongly suspected that our messenger had been robbed by his
+own consent, and had lost nothing but his honesty. A broker of
+Nassapore told Mr Needham, that our dispatches had been sold to
+the Portuguese, and when the governor heard of this, he hung down
+his head, as guilty. We here sold some goods to merchants of
+Nassapore.</p>
+
+<p>Mr Woolman died on the 17th of August. We could not procure
+payment of our promised money, and were told by our broker, that
+some one of our debtors would procure a respite from the
+governor, by means of a bribe, on which the rest would refuse
+till they all paid. On the 24th, the Zamorin's sister sent us
+word, that she would both cause our debtors to pay us, and to
+lend us any money we needed; but we found her as false as the
+rest The queen mother also made us fair promises, and several
+others made offers to get letters conveyed for us to Surat; but
+all their words were equally false. Thus wronged, Mr Needham
+farther wronged himself by his indiscretion, threatening, in
+presence of a nayre who attended us, and who revealed his
+threats, that he would go to the king of Cochin, making shew of
+violent revenge to put the governor in fear. He behaved
+outrageously likewise to a <i>scrivano</i>,[181] who is the same
+as a justice with us, taking him by the throat, and making as if
+he would have cut him down with his sword, for detaining some of
+our money which he had received. Our broker also told Mr Needham,
+that it was not becoming to go up and down the streets with a
+sword and buckler; and indeed his whole conduct and behaviour
+more resembled those we call <i>roaring-boys</i>,[182] than what
+became the character of a merchant. For my admonitions, he
+requited me with ill language, disgracing himself and injuring
+the affairs of the company.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 181: This term is obviously Portuguese, and
+cannot be the proper appellation for a judge on the Malabar
+coast.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 182: This character is now only to be met
+with in some of our old plays such as Captain Bobadil in Every
+Man in his Humour.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>A Dutch ship, which had been trading in the Red Sea, arrived
+here on the 23d of September, with the intention of settling a
+factory, and they were referred by the governor to the Zamorin,
+promising to carry a letter for us, but went without it; so that
+our delays continued. Mr Needham went himself to the Zamorin on
+the 4th November, and returned on the 25th, having got a present
+of a gold chain, a jewel, and a gold armlet, with orders also
+from the king to further our purposes; but the performance was as
+slow as before. The 20th December, a Malabar captain brought in a
+prize he had taken from the Portuguese, and would have traded
+with us; but we could not get in any of our money, due long
+before. We also heard that day of four English ships being at
+Surat. The governor and people continued their wonted
+perfidiousness; the former being more careful in taking, and the
+latter in giving bribes, than in paying our debts. We used a
+strange contrivance of policy to get in some of these; for, when
+we went to their houses, demanding payment, and could get none,
+we threatened not to leave their house till they paid us. We had
+heard it reported, that, according to their customs, they could
+neither eat nor wash while we were in their houses; and by this
+device we sometimes got fifty <i>fanos</i> from one, and an
+hundred from another. They would on no account permit us to sleep
+in their houses, except one person, with whom we remained three
+days and nights, with three or four nayres. They were paid for
+watching him, but we got nothing. The nayre, who had been
+appointed by the king to gather in our debts, came to demand a
+gratuity from us, though he had not recovered any of our money.
+He would go to the debtor's houses, taking three or four
+<i>fanos</i>, and then depart without any of our money.</p>
+
+<p>On the 9th of January, 1616, Mr Needham went to demand payment
+of a debt, and being refused permission to pass by a nayre who
+struck him, as he says, he gave the nayre a dangerous wound in
+the head with his sword, of which it is thought he cannot
+recover, and others of the natives were hurt in the fray. Word
+was presently brought to us to shut up our doors, lest the nayres
+should assemble to do us some mischief, as feuds or
+kindred-quarrels and murders are common among them, having no
+other law or means of vengeance. Our nayre with his kindred, to
+the number of thirty or more, with pikes, swords, and bucklers,
+guarded Mr Needham home, on which occasion we had to give a
+gratuity. Our house had to be guarded for three or four days and
+nights, none of us daring to go out into the streets for money or
+other business for a week, though before we used to go about in
+safety. After that, our broker advised us never to go out, unless
+attended by a nayre, as they had sworn to put one of us to death,
+in revenge for him who was slain.</p>
+
+<p>The 20th, the Portuguese armado of thirty-four sail, passed by
+from the south, of which fourteen were ships, and the rest
+frigates or grabs. They put into the harbour, in which three
+Malabar frigates lay at anchor, and a hot fight ensued, in which
+the Portuguese were forced to retreat with disgrace, having only
+cut the hawser of one of the frigates, which drove on shore and
+was stove in pieces. This belonged to the governor, who was well
+served, for he remained like a coward in the country, keeping
+four or five great guns that were in the town locked up, except
+one, and for it they had only powder and shot for two discharges.
+Before the fight ended, some 4000 nayres were come in from the
+country, and several were slain on both sides. Nine or ten
+Portuguese were driven ashore, and two or three of the chiefs of
+these were immediately hung up by the heels, and being taken down
+after two days, were thrown to be devoured by wild beasts.</p>
+
+<p>On the 28th of January, we were told by a Pattemar, that the
+governor was only our friend outwardly, wishing rather to have
+the Portuguese in our room, as we did no good in the country,
+bringing only goods to sell, whereas the Portuguese did good by
+making purchases. The 8th of February we had letters from Surat;
+and on the 4th of March, the Zamorin wrote to us, that if our
+ships came, he wished them to come to Paniany, and that we need
+not be anxious for our money, as he would pay us, even if he were
+forced to sell his rings.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VI.</p>
+
+<p><i>Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Ambassador from King James I, to
+Shah Jehanguiro, Mogul Emperor of Hindoostan</i>.[183]</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>There are two editions of this journal in our older
+Collections of Voyages and Travels, but both exceeding defective
+and imperfect. The <i>first</i> of these is in the Pilgrims of
+Purchas, which is said to have been "<i>Collected out</i> of the
+Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Knight, Lord Ambassador from his
+Majesty of Great Britain, to the Great Mogul." It is evidently to
+be considered as an <i>abridgement</i> made by Purchas, which,
+indeed, he fully acknowledges in a postscript, in the following
+terms:--"Some readers may perhaps wish they had the whole
+journal, and not thus contracted into <i>extracts</i> of those
+things out of it which I conceived more fit for the public. And
+for the whole, myself would have wished it; but neither with the
+honourable Company, nor elsewhere, could I learn of it, the
+worthy knight himself being now employed in like honourable
+embassage from his majesty to the <i>Great Turk</i>." Besides
+that it is a mere abridgement, often most confusedly, and almost
+unintelligibly tacked together, this article in The Pilgrims
+breaks off abruptly in a most interesting part of the narrative,
+which we have now no means to supply. The full title of this
+article in The Pilgrims is as follows:--"Observations collected
+out of the Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Knight, Lord Ambassador
+from his Majesty the King of Great Britain, to the Great Mogul.
+Consisting of Occurrences worthy of Memory, in the way, and at
+the Court of the Mogul; together with an Account of his Customs,
+Cities, Countries, Subjects, and other Circumstances relating to
+India."</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 183: Purch. Pilgr. I. 535. Churchill's
+Collect. I. 617.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The <i>other</i> edition of this journal is in the collection
+published by the Churchills, of which we quote from the third
+edition of 1744, reprinted by Lintot and Osburn, booksellers in
+London. Of this edition the editor of that collection gives the
+following account:--"Sir Thomas Roe has before appeared in print,
+in part at least, in the collection of Purchas, since translated
+into French, and published in the first volume of the collection
+by Thevenot. He now comes again abroad with considerable
+additions, not foisted in, but taken from his own original
+manuscript, of which it would appear that Purchas only had an
+imperfect copy. These additions, it is true, are not great in
+bulk, but they are valuable for the subject; and several matters,
+which in the other collection are brought in abruptly, are here
+continued in a more methodical manner."</p>
+
+<p>After an attentive comparison of these two former editions, it
+obviously appears that the edition by Purchas, in 1625, is in
+general more circumstantial and more satisfactory than that of
+Churchill, in 1744, notwithstanding its superior pretensions, as
+above stated. Yet, on several occasions, the edition in Churchill
+gives a more intelligible account of particulars, and has enabled
+us, on these occasions, to restore what Purchas, by careless
+abbreviation, had left an obscure and almost unintelligible
+jumble of words. The present edition, therefore, is formed upon a
+careful collation of these two former, supplying from each what
+was defective in the other. On the present occasion, the nautical
+and other observations made by Sir Thomas Roe during the voyage
+from England to Surat, are omitted, having been already inserted
+into the account of that voyage by Captain Peyton.</p>
+
+<p>It were much to be desired that this first account of the
+political intercourse between Britain and Hindoostan could have
+been given at full length, more especially as that extensive,
+rich, populous, and fertile country is now almost entirely
+reduced under the dominion of the British crown; and as Sir
+Thomas Roe, even in the garbled state in which we are forced to
+present his observations, clearly shews the inherent vices of the
+Mogul government, through which it so rapidly fell into anarchy,
+and was torn in pieces by its own cumbrous and ill-managed
+strength. Perhaps the archives of the East India Company are
+still able to supply this deficiency in the history of its
+original establishment; and it were surely worthy of the more
+than princely grandeur of that great commercial company, to
+patronise the publication of a collection of the voyages,
+travels, negotiations, and events which have conduced to raise it
+to a degree of splendour unexampled in the history of the world.
+The importance of this first embassy from Great Britain to the
+Great Mogul, and the vast consequences, both commercial and
+political, which have since arisen from that early intercourse,
+have induced us to give the following additional information
+respecting the mission of Sir Thomas Roe, from the Annals of the
+East India Company, vol. I. p. 174, <i>et sequ.</i>, which will
+in some measure supply the defects in this journal, as published
+by Purchas and Churchill.--E.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>"The information which the Court [of Committees or Directors
+of the East India Company] had received, in the preceding season,
+[1613-14] induced them to apply to the king to grant his royal
+authority that an ambassador should proceed in his name to the
+Great Mogul. King James, in compliance with the wishes of the
+Company, on the 14th January, 1614-15, granted his commission to
+the celebrated Sir Thomas Roe, "to be ambassador to the Great
+Mogul, or king of India," the company agreeing to defray the
+expence, in consideration, that, under their exclusive
+privileges, they were to acquire such benefits as might result
+from this mission.</p>
+
+<p>"Sir Thomas Roe sailed from England in March 1615, on board
+the Lion, Captain Newport, and arrived at Surat, whence he
+proceeded to the Mogul's court at Agimere, which he reached in
+December, 1615; and on the 10th January, 1616, was presented to
+the Mogul as ambassador from the king of England, when he
+delivered the king's letter and presents. Of these, an English
+coach was the chief article, and with it the Mogul was pleased to
+express his satisfaction, and to give the ambassador a gracious
+reception. From the company's agents having already been too
+profuse in their presents to the ministers and favourites, Sir
+Thomas found that the articles which he carried out as presents
+were not so highly estimated as he expected; he therefore
+informed the court that nothing less than valuable jewels would
+be deemed worthy of acceptance; and at the same time he advised
+that 'four or five cases of red wine' should be sent as presents
+to the king and prince, as, in his own words, 'never were men
+more enamoured of that drinke as these two, and which they would
+more highly esteem than all the jewels in Chepeside.'</p>
+
+<p>"In describing his own situation, he stated that the natives
+could not comprehend what was meant in Europe by the rank or
+quality of an ambassador, and that in future it would be
+preferable to employ an agent only, who could bear these affronts
+without dishonour, which an ambassador, from, his rank, could not
+encounter. He complains also, that, from want of an interpreter,
+he had experienced much difficulty in explaining to the Mogul,
+and to his ministers, the object of his mission; in particular,
+the grievances which the English had suffered from the governor
+of Ahmedabad, because the native brokers, whom he was obliged to
+employ, were afraid to interpret literally, lest they should
+either incur the king's displeasure, or be disgraced by his
+ministers. In his application for redress from the governor of
+Ahmedabad, he discovered that this officer was supported by
+sultan Churrum, the Mogul's eldest-son,[184] and Asaph Khan, the
+favourite. By perseverance and firmness, however, the ambassador
+at length obtained the relief he solicited.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 184: Sultan Chesuro appears to have been
+the eldest son of Jehanguire, but held in confinement for having
+endeavoured to supplant his father in the succession, and Churrum
+seems only to have been the third son.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"On the 24th January, 1616, Sir Thomas had a second audience
+of the Mogul, at which he complained of the injuries the English
+had sustained from the arbitrary conduct of the governor of
+Surat, and so effectual were his remonstrances, that this officer
+was dismissed. The ambassador then proposed to renew the articles
+of the <i>phirmaund</i>, or treaty between the Mogul and the
+English nation, and solicited to have the treaty ratified by the
+signatures[185] of the Mogul and Sultan Churrum, which being
+procured, the treaty was concluded.[186]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 185: This expression is rather ambiguous,
+as the ratifications of such papers in India were by the seals of
+the princes, and not what we understand by the term used in the
+text--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 186: It has not been thought necessary to
+insert the substance of this treaty as contained in the Annals,
+as it is given in the Journal.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+"The dispatches of Sir Thomas, of this year, concluded with
+recommending to the company, as a commercial speculation, to send
+out annually a large assortment of all kinds of toys, which would
+find a ready sale at the great festival of <i>Noroose</i>, [the
+new year] in the month of March. 
+
+<p>"In 1616 we discover a jealousy in the factory at Surat, of
+Sir Thomas Roe, notwithstanding his efforts and success in
+obtaining phirmaunds from the Mogul favourable to the factories
+at Surat and Ahmedabad, and in general for the encouragement of
+English trade in the Mogul dominions; for the factors represented
+to the court that a merchant or agent would be better qualified
+for a commercial negociator than a king's ambassador; and, in
+support of this opinion, referred to the practice of the king of
+Spain, who on no occasion would send an ambassador, but always a
+commercial agent; and stated that Sir Thomas Roe, besides,
+considered himself to be vested with the exercise of a
+controlling power over the commercial speculations of the Surat
+factory, and held himself to be better qualified to judge of the
+English interests by combining the political relations which he
+wished to introduce between the Mogul and the king of England,
+than by forwarding any projects for trade which the factory might
+devise as applicable to the Mogul dominions.</p>
+
+<p>"In this year he reported that he had returned thanks to
+Sultan Churrum for the protection which he had afforded to the
+English in relieving them from the extortions of Zulfeccar Khan,
+the late governor of Surat, and had remonstrated against the
+partiality which had been shown to the Portuguese; representing
+to the Mogul that the king of Portugal had assumed the title of
+king of India, and that the Portuguese trade could never be so
+beneficial as that of England, as the English annually exported
+from India calicoes and indigo to the amount of 50,000 rials. To
+strengthen this remonstrance, Sir Thomas offered to pay to the
+sultan 12,000 rupees yearly, on condition that the English should
+be exempted from the payment of customs at the port of Surat; and
+then gave it as his opinion, that the plan of the agency at
+Surat, of keeping permanent factories at Surat, and other parts
+of the Mogul dominions, ought to be abandoned, as it would be
+preferable to make the purchases of goods inland, by the natives,
+[particularly the indigo from Agra, and the Bengal goods] who
+could obtain them at reasonable rates. But if the court were of
+opinion that English factors ought to be stationed at Agra, he
+recommended sending the goods in carts rather than on camels. He
+concludes this part of his report by advising that agents should
+reside at Cambay and Baroach, because the best cloths in India
+could be procured at these towns.</p>
+
+<p>"Though Sir Thomas Roe appears to have procured a phirmaund
+through the means of Noor-Mahal, the favourite sultana or
+empress, for the general good treatment of the English at Surat,
+and had desired that an assortment of English goods, perfumes,
+&amp;c. should be forwarded to him as presents to her and to her
+brother, Asaph Khan, he yet describes, in 1618, the governor of
+Surat as reluctant to shew that favour to the English which the
+phirmaund had enjoined. It therefore became a question with him,
+as the governor of Surat would not allow the English to
+strengthen or fortify their factory for the protection of their
+goods and servants, whether it might not be expedient to remove
+to some other station, where the means of self-defence might be
+more practicable. At one time he thought of Goga, and
+subsequently of Scindy; but, after a review of the whole, decided
+that it would be more expedient to remain at Surat, though, from
+the character of the natives, and the instability of the Mogul
+government, all grants of privileges must be considered as
+temporary, and any agreement or capitulation which might be
+procured, ought not to be depended on as permanent. He concludes,
+that, though a general phirmaund for trade in the Mogul dominions
+had been obtained, and of course a foundation laid for the
+English intercourse with the rich provinces of Bengal, yet the
+attempt to enter on that trade would be unwise, from being in the
+exclusive possession of the Portuguese.</p>
+
+<p>"Sir Thomas Roe returned from the embassy to Surat in the
+spring of 1618-19, when it appears that the opposition in opinion
+between him and the factors at that place had subsided, as the
+efforts of both were united to establish a distinct system for
+the trade of the English at Surat. It has been already stated
+that Sir Thomas Roe had procured a phirmaund to the English from
+the Mogul, for the establishment of a general trade in his
+extensive dominions, but that the relaxed situation of the
+government, which always, under the administration of the Moguls,
+preceded an expected succession to the throne, had rendered the
+governor of Surat, at this juncture, less obsequious to the
+orders of his sovereign than the absolute nature of the
+constitution would otherwise have prescribed. Under these
+circumstances, and to improve upon the general treaty already
+mentioned, Sir Thomas Roe made proposals to Sultan Churrum to
+enter into an alliance for resisting the pretensions of the
+Portuguese. After long discussions with that prince, this treaty
+was concluded, and the following are its leading articles.</p>
+
+<p>"That the governor of Surat should lend ships to the English,
+to be employed in the defence of that port. The English, however,
+to be only allowed to land ten armed men at one time; but the
+resident merchants to be allowed to wear arms. That the English
+should be allowed to build a house in the city, but distant from
+the castle.[187] That the governor of Surat should receive the
+ambassador and his suite with marks of honour. That the English
+should enjoy the free exercise of their religion, and be governed
+by their own laws. That in any dispute between the English and
+the natives; reference was to be made to the governor and his
+officers, who should decide speedily and justly; but disputes
+among themselves were to be decided by their own factory. That
+liberty of trade was to be allowed the English, in its fullest
+extent, on payment of the usual duties on landing the goods, from
+which pearls, jewels, &amp;c. were to be exempted. That freedom
+of speech was to be allowed to the English linguists and brokers,
+in all matters regarding the trade of their employers. And,
+lastly, That all presents intended for the court were to be
+opened and examined at the customhouse of Surat, and then sealed
+and given back to the English, and to pass duty-free; but, in
+case these presents were not made, then these articles were to
+become liable to pay duty.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 187: Though not so expressed in the Annals,
+this appears to have been a <i>fortified</i> house; as, on an
+occasion, when Surat was taken and plundered by an armed force
+belonging to Sevagee, the first sovereign of the Mahrattas, the
+English were able to defend their factory from
+injury.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"During his residence in India, Sir Thomas Roe had likewise
+used his best endeavours to promote the trade of the English with
+the ports of Persia, in which considerable opposition was
+experienced from the Portuguese, who tried every expedient to
+engross the Persian trade to themselves, and to exclude the
+English from any participation. In this opposition Sir Robert
+Shirley had been implicated, who had gone to Europe in 1615, on a
+mission from the king of Persia, to form a contract with the king
+of Spain, then sovereign of Portugal, not only to sell to his
+subjects the whole of the Persian silk, but to grant them licence
+to fortify the sea-ports of Persia for the protection of their
+shipping and factories. Mr Connock, the English agent in Persia,
+under these circumstances, recommended the necessity of applying
+to king James, and submitting to his consideration the danger of
+allowing the Portuguese to enjoy the exclusive possession of that
+trade, which would render them the most powerful European nation
+in the East Indies. In the mean time, he represented to the king
+of Persia the necessity of seizing the island of Ormus from the
+Portuguese, under the protection of which the Persian dominions
+could be supplied by the English with all kinds of Indian
+commodities.</p>
+
+<p>"In this critical situation of the company's agents at
+Ispahan, an ambassador arrived from the king of Spain, in June
+1617, authorised to adjust and settle the contract which Sir
+Robert Shirley had projected. The English agent, in consequence,
+urged the factory at Surat to dispatch the whole of the company's
+ships to Jasques for the defence of that port, as the Portuguese
+fleet had rendezvoused at Muscat, and had determined to blockade
+the passage into the Persian gulf against the English trade.
+These events induced Sir Thomas Roe to grant a commission, and to
+give instructions to the company's agent at Ispahan, authorising
+him to treat with the king of Persia, in the name of the king of
+England.</p>
+
+<p>"In 1618, Captain Shillings, of the company's ship Ann, went
+to Mokha, and obtained a phirmaund from the governor, by which
+the English were allowed free trade, and protection to their
+persons and property, on condition of paying three per cent. on
+merchandize, and three per cent. on the prices of all goods
+exported by them from Mokha. On receiving information of this
+event, Sir Thomas Roe addressed a letter to the governor of
+Mokha, requesting that these privileges might be confirmed by the
+Grand Signior, and promising, on the part of the English, that
+all kinds of European goods should be regularly brought to Mokha,
+and that the English should defend that port against all enemies,
+and particularly against the Portuguese.</p>
+
+<p>"This appears to have been the last transaction of Sir Thomas
+Roe in the East Indies. In his voyage home he touched at Saldanha
+bay [Table bay] in May, 1619, where he met, and held a conference
+with the Dutch admiral Hoffman, who commanded the outward-bound
+fleet from Holland of that season. From this officer he learned
+that the respective governments in Europe, alarmed at the
+commercial jealousies and animosities between their subjects in
+the East Indies, had appointed commissioners to take that subject
+into consideration. It was therefore, with a becoming sense of
+duty, agreed between them that each should address a letter to
+the chiefs of their respective factories in India, recommending
+to them to abstain from any opposition or violence against each
+other, till each had received specific instructions from their
+superiors, or should be informed of the result of the conferences
+between the commissioners of the two nations in Europe."</p>
+
+<p>S.1. <i>Journey from Surat to the Court of the Mogul, and
+Entertainment there, with some Account of the Customs of the
+Country</i>.</p>
+
+<p>I landed at Surat on the 26th September, 1615, and was
+received in an open tent by the chief officers of the town, well
+attended. On this occasion I was accompanied by the general, and
+principal merchants, Captain Harris being sent to make me a court
+of guard with an hundred shot, and the ships, all dressed out to
+the best advantage, saluted me with their ordnance as I passed.
+There was much controversy about searching my servants, but at
+length they passed free to the city, where we had a house
+provided for us. We continued there to the 30th October,
+suffering much vexation from the governor, who forcibly caused
+search many of our chests and trunks, taking away what he thought
+fit.</p>
+
+<p>The 30th October I departed from Surat, and that day travelled
+only four coss to <i>Sumaria</i>.[188] The 1st November I went
+eleven miles to a village. The 2d, to <i>Biarat</i>, twenty-one
+miles, where there is a castle, this town being on the borders of
+the kingdom of Guzerat, subject to the Mogul, and belonging to
+<i>Abraham Khan</i>. The 3d I entered the kingdom of <i>Pardaff
+shah</i>,[189] a pagan lord of the hills, who is subject to
+nobody; and at the end of fifteen miles we lodged in the fields,
+beside a city of note, called <i>Mugher</i>. The 4th we travelled
+nine miles by a rocky way, and lay in the fields, beside a
+village called Narampore. The 5th, fifteen miles, and lay in the
+fields. The 6th, twenty miles, to a city called <i>Nundabar</i>,
+in the kingdom of <i>Brampore</i>, [Burhanpoor] which is subject
+to the Mogul. At this place we first procured bread, after
+leaving Surat, as the Banians, who inhabit all the country
+through which we had travelled, make only cakes instead of bread.
+The country peculiarly abounds in cattle, as the Banians never
+kill any, neither do they sell any for being slaughtered. One day
+I met at least 10,000 bullocks loaded with grain, in one drove,
+and most other days I saw smaller parcels.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 188: In this journal the names of places
+are exceedingly corrupted, and often unintelligible. Such as
+admitted of being corrected, from the excellent map of
+Hindoostan, by Arrowsmith, have their proper names placed within
+brackets.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 189: In the miserable map of Hindoostan,
+accompanying this journal in the Pilgrims, this prince is called
+Partap-sha.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 7th we went eighteen miles to <i>Ningull</i>. The 8th,
+fifteen to <i>Sinchelly</i>, [Sindkera.] The 9th, other fifteen
+to <i>Tolmere</i>, [Talnere.] And the 10th, eighteen to
+<i>Chapre</i>, [Choprah] where we pitched our tents without the
+town, and the king's officers guarded us all night with thirty
+horse and twenty shot, for fear of out being attacked by robbers
+from the mountains, as I refused to remove into the town. The
+11th we travelled eighteen miles, eighteen on the 12th, and
+fifteen on the 13th, which brought us to <i>Brampore</i>,
+[Burhanpoor] which I guessed to be 223 miles east from
+Surat.[190] The country is miserable and barren, the towns and
+villages only built of mud. At <i>Bartharpore</i>,[191] a village
+two miles short of Burhanpoor, I saw some of the Mogul ordnance,
+most of which is too short, and too open in the bore. On coming
+to Burhanpoor, the <i>cutwall</i> met me, well attended, having
+sixteen stand of colours carried before him, and conducted me to
+a <i>serai</i> appointed for my lodging. He took leave of me at
+the gate, which had a handsome stone front; but, when in, I had
+four chambers allotted for me, no bigger than ovens, with vaulted
+roofs and bare brick walls, so that I chose to lodge in my tent.
+I sent word to the cutwall, threatening to leave the town, as I
+scorned such mean usage, but he desired me to be content till
+morning, as this was the best lodging in the city, which I
+afterwards found to be the case, as it consists entirely of mud
+cottages, excepting the houses inhabited by <i>Sultan Parvis</i>,
+the Mogul's second son, that of <i>Khan Khanan</i>, and a few
+others. Sultan Parvis here represents the king his father, living
+in great state and magnificence, but Khan Khanan, who is the
+greatest subject of the empire, is at the head of a large army,
+in which are 40,000 horse, and governs every thing, the prince
+only having the name and pomp allowed him.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 190: The particulars of the journey in the
+text amount to 214 miles.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 191: Perhaps Babaderpore, but it is twelve
+or fifteen miles short of Burhanpoor.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 18th, both to satisfy the prince who desired it, and
+whom I was not willing to displease, and to see the fashions of
+the court, and because it was proposed to establish a factory
+here, where sword-blades were in great request for the army, and
+sold well, I went to visit the prince, to whom, I carried a
+present. I was conducted by the cutwall, and in the outer court
+of the palace I found about an hundred horsemen under arms, who
+formed a line on each side, being all gentlemen waiting to salute
+the prince on his coming forth. In the inner court the prince sat
+in a high gallery encircling the court, having a canopy over
+head, and a carpet spread before him, appearing in much, yet
+barbarous state. Going towards him through a lane of people, an
+officer came and told me that I must touch the ground with my
+head, and with my hat off. I answered, that I came to do the
+prince honour by visiting him, and was not to be subjected to the
+custom of slaves. So I walked on till I came to a place railed
+in, just under where he sat, where there was an ascent of three
+steps; and having there made him a reverence, to which he
+answered by bending his body, I went within the rails, where
+stood all the great men then in the town, holding their hands
+before them like slaves. This place, as mentioned before, was
+covered over head by a rich canopy, and all the floor was spread
+with carpets. It resembled a large stage, and the prince sat on
+high, like a mock king in a theatre.</p>
+
+<p>On entering, as I had no place assigned me, I went right
+forwards, and stood before him at the bottom of the three steps,
+on which stood his secretary, readily to convey to him any thing
+that is said or given. I told him that I was ambassador from the
+king of England to his father; and, while passing his residence,
+I could not but in honour visit his highness. He answered that I
+was welcome, and asked me many questions about the king my
+master, to which I gave fit answers. While standing in that
+manner at the foot of the steps, I asked leave to come up and
+stand beside him; but he said, even if the king of Persia, or
+Grand Turk, were there, such a thing could not be allowed. To
+this I replied, that I must be excused for believing he would, in
+such a case, come down and meet them at his gate; and that I
+required no higher privilege than was allowed to the ambassadors
+of these sovereigns, with whom I considered myself entirely
+equal. He declared I should have that privilege in all things. I
+then demanded to have a chair, to which it was answered, that no
+person was ever allowed to sit in that place, but I was desired
+to lean against a pillar covered over with silver, which
+supported the canopy. I then requested his favour for an English
+factory to be established at Burhanpoor, which readily granted,
+and gave immediate orders to the <i>Buksh</i> to draw up a
+<i>firmaun</i>, license, for their coming and residence. I also
+requested an order for carriages for conveying the presents for
+the king his father, which he gave in charge to the cutwall to
+see provided. I then made him a present, which he took in good
+part. After some other conference, he said, though I might not
+come up to where he then sat, he would go to another place, where
+I might come to him with less ceremony. But one part of the
+present I made him happened to be a case of cordials, of which he
+tasted so freely by the way, that, after waiting some time, I
+heard he had made himself drunk, and one of his officers came to
+me with an excuse, desiring me to go home then, and come some
+other time to see him. But that very night I was taken ill of a
+fever.</p>
+
+<p>The 27th of November, though, still sick, I was carried, from
+Burhanpoor three coss to <i>Raypora</i>; the 28th, fifteen c. to
+<i>Burgome</i>, [Burgaw]; the 30th, seven c. December the 1st,
+ten c. to <i>Bicangome</i>; the 2d, seven c. the 3d, five c. the
+4th, eleven c. to <i>Ekbarpoor</i>, which stands on a good river,
+[the Nerbudda] which runs into the sea near <i>Buroach</i>. The
+5th, I passed the river <i>Nerbuddah</i>. The 6th, I travelled
+eight c. and lay in a wood, not far from the king's famous castle
+of <i>Mandoa</i>, [Mundu] which stands on a steep hill, of great
+extent, the walls being fourteen c. in circuit, this castle being
+of wonderous extent and great beauty. The 7th, I proceeded ten c.
+the 8th, eight c. the 9th, ten c. the 10th, twelve c. the 11th,
+sixteen c. the 12th, fourteen c. the 13th, six c. the 14th we
+halted to take rest. The 15th, six c. the 16th, six c. the 17th,
+twelve c. the 18th, five c. when we arrived at <i>Cytor</i>,
+where I was met by Mr Edwards accompanied by Thomas Coryat, who
+had travelled to India on foot.</p>
+
+<p><i>Cytor</i>, [Chitore] is an ancient town in ruins, situated
+on a hill, but shews the remains of wonderful magnificence. There
+are still standing above an hundred temples, all of carved stone,
+with many fair towers and domes, supported by many enriched
+pillars, and innumerable houses, but not a single inhabitant. The
+hill, or rock rather, is precipitous on all sides, having but one
+ascent cut out of the rock in a regular slope; in which ascent
+there are four several gates before reaching the gate of the
+city, which last is extremely magnificent. The top of the hill,
+about eight coss in circuit, is inclosed all round with walls,
+and at the S.W. end, is a goodly old castle. I lodged close by a
+poor village at the foot of the hill.</p>
+
+<p>This city stands in the country of the <i>Rama</i>,[192] a
+prince newly subdued by the Mogul, or rather brought to submit to
+pay tribute and acknowledge subjection; and <i>Cytor</i> was
+reduced by <i>Akbar Shah</i>, the father of <i>Shah
+Jehan-Guire</i>, the present king of the Moguls. This Hindoo raja
+is lineally descended from <i>Porus</i>, the valiant Indian
+sovereign who was conquered by Alexander the Great; so that I
+suppose this city to have been one of the ancient seats of Porus,
+though Delly, much farther north, is reported to have been the
+chiefest, a famous place, though now only in ruins. Near that
+stands a pillar erected by Alexander the Conqueror, with a Greek
+inscription. The present Mogul and his ancestors, descendants of
+Tamerlane, have reduced all the ancient cities to ruin,
+dispeopling them and forbidding their restoration; I know not
+wherefore, unless that they would have no monuments of greatness
+remain, beyond their own commencement, as if they and the world
+were co-equals in antiquity.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 192: This is probably an error of the press
+in the Pilgrims for the <i>Ranna</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 19th I proceeded twelve c. on my journey; the 20th ten c.
+the 21st ten c. the 22d nine c. the 23d ten c. and arrived at
+<i>Ajimere</i>. The first six days journeys from Burhanpoor
+towards Ajimere were west, or northwest, to get round the hills;
+but after that northwards, so that these two places bear nearly
+N. by W. and S. by E. from each other: the whole distance being
+209 cosses,[193] which I judge to be 418 English miles; the
+cosses here being longer than near the sea.[194] On my arrival at
+Ajimere I was so ill as to keep my bed; but on the 10th January,
+1616, at four in the afternoon, I went to the <i>Durbar</i>,
+which is the place where the Mogul sits in public daily to
+entertain strangers, to receive petitions and presents, to issue
+commands, and to see and be seen. Before proceeding to give an
+account of my reception, it may be proper to digress a little,
+that I may give some account of the customs of the court.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 193: The particulars in the text only
+amount to 200 cosses; but the extent of one day's journey is
+omitted, which may explain the difference.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 194: The coss at Surat is repeatedly
+explained, in Purchas and Churchill, to be 1-1/2 English mile,
+while that of Hindoostan Proper is rated at two
+miles.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>No men, except eunuchs, are permitted to come within the
+private lodgings or retiring rooms of the royal palace, within
+which his women keep guard with warlike weapons, and there
+likewise they execute justice upon each other for offences. Every
+morning, the Mogul comes to a window, called the
+<i>jarneo</i>,[195] which looks into the plain or open space
+before the palace-gate, where he shews himself to the common
+people. At noon he returns to the same place, where he sits some
+hours, amusing himself with seeing fights of elephants and other
+wild beasts, the men of rank then at court attending below within
+a railed space. He then retires to sleep within the female
+apartments. In the afternoon he comes to the before-mentioned
+Durbar. At eight in the evening, after supper, he comes down to a
+fair court, called the <i>guzalcan</i>, in the midst of which is
+a throne of freestone, on which he sits, yet sometimes below in a
+chair of state, at which time only men of high quality are
+admitted into the presence, and even of these only a few have
+that privilege, unless by special leave. He here discourses very
+affably on all subjects with those around him. No business is
+transacted with him, concerning affairs of state and government,
+or respecting war and peace, but at one or other of these two
+last-mentioned places, where, after being publicly propounded and
+resolved upon, it is registered by attendant secretaries, and any
+one, who has the curiosity, may see the register for two
+shillings; insomuch that the common people know as much of the
+affairs of state as the ministers and counsellors of the king,
+and every day the king's acts and resolutions are circulated as
+news, and are freely canvassed and censured by every rascal. This
+course of proceeding is unchangeable, except when prevented by
+the sickness of the king, or in consequence of his getting drunk,
+which must always be known. Thus, though all his subjects are
+slaves, he lives in a state of reciprocal bondage, being so tied
+to the observance of these hours and customs, that if he were
+unseen one day, and no sufficient excuse given, the people would
+mutiny; and no excuse will sanction his absence for two days,
+unless the gates are opened, and he be seen by some for the
+satisfaction of the rest. Every Tuesday, he sits in judgement at
+the <i>jarneo</i>,[196] where he attends to the complaints of his
+meanest subjects, listening patiently to both parties; and where
+likewise he sometimes sees, with too much delight in blood,
+execution performed on offenders by his elephants. <i>Illi
+meruere, sed quid tu ut adesses</i>?</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 195: in subsequent passages, this is called
+the Jarruco.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Before going to the durbar, I had required to be allowed the
+customs of my own country, which were freely granted. At the
+durbar, I was led directly before the king, at the entrance of an
+outer rail, where two noble slaves came to conduct me nearer. On
+entering the outer rail, I made a profound reverence, at my entry
+within an interior rail I made a second reverence, and a third
+when I came directly under where the king sat. The place in which
+the durbar is held is a great court, to which all sorts of people
+resort. The king sits in a small raised gallery; ambassadors,
+great men belonging to the court, and strangers of quality, are
+within the innermost rail directly under him, that space being
+raised from the ground, covered overhead with canopies of silk
+and velvet, and laid underfoot with good carpets. The meaner men,
+representing what we would call gentry, are within the outer
+rail; the common people being on the outside of all, in a base
+court, so that all may see the king. The whole of this
+disposition hath much resemblance to theatrical representation.
+The king sitting as in a gallery, the great men raised as actors
+on a stage, and the vulgar below in a pit gazing at the show. The
+king, on my presentation, interrupted the dull formality of my
+interpreter, bidding me welcome to the brother of the king my
+master. I then delivered a translation of the king's letter, and
+then my commission, on both of which he looked curiously; and
+afterwards on my presents, which were well received. He asked
+some questions; and, with a seeming regard for my health, offered
+to send me his own physicians, advising me to keep the house till
+I recovered strength, and that I should freely send to him in the
+meantime for any thing I needed, with assurance that I should
+have whatever I desired. He dismissed me with more signs of grace
+and favour, if I were not flattered by the Christians, than ever
+were shewn to any ambassador from the Turks or Persians or any
+other nation.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 196: This place, formerly described as a
+window looking to the esplanade in front of the palace, called
+<i>jarneo</i> in Purchas, is called <i>jarruco</i> in
+Churchill.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 14th I sent to offer a visit to Sultan
+<i>Churrum</i>,[197] the third son of the Great Mogul, but first
+in favour. Hearing that he was an enemy to all Christians, I
+therefore feared some affront; yet he sent me word that I should
+be received with all due respect, and should have as much content
+as I had already from his father. This prince is lord of Surat,
+our chief residence in the empire, and his favour, therefore, was
+important for our affairs. I went accordingly to visit him on the
+22d at nine in the morning, at which time he sits in public, in
+the same manner as his father, to dispatch his business, and to
+be seen of his followers. His character was represented to me as
+naturally proud, so that I was in some fear for my reception;
+but, on hearing of my arrival, instead of coming out to his
+public durbar, he sent one of his principal officers to conduct
+me into a good inner room, never before done to any one. The
+officer here entertained me with discourse concerning my mission
+for half an hour, till the prince was ready; who now came forth
+and used me better than his promise. I delivered him a present,
+but not in the name of his majesty, as it was too mean for that
+purpose; but excused the omission, by saying, That my sovereign
+could not know of his being lord of Surat, which had been so
+lately conferred upon him; but I had no doubt the king of England
+would afterwards send him one more suited to his high rank, the
+one now presented being only sent by the English merchants, who
+humbly commended themselves to his favour and protection. He
+received all in very good part. After stating some grievances and
+injuries suffered by the English at Surat, from his governors,
+and of which I had forborne to complain to the king from respect
+to him, he promised me speedy and effectual justice, and to
+confirm our security in any way I might propose. He professed to
+be entirely ignorant of any past transactions there, as stated by
+me, except as informed by Asaph Khan; and especially denied
+having given any order for our dismissal, which the governor had
+falsely alleged, and for which he should dearly pay. He then
+dismissed me, full of hopes to have our decayed state and
+reputation rectified, making me a promise of an effectual firmaun
+for our trade and secure residence at Surat.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 197: In the Pilgrims, this prince is
+uniformly named Corone; but the name in the text has been adopted
+from the authority of Dow's History of Hindoostan. He succeeded
+to his father in 1627, when he assumed the name of Shah Jehan;
+and was, in 1659, dethroned and imprisoned, by his third son, the
+celebrated Aurungzebe, who assumed the name of
+Alumguire.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 24th, I went again to the royal durbar to visit the king;
+who, on seeing me far off, beckoned with his hand, that I should
+not wait the ceremony of asking leave, but come up to him
+directly, and assigned me a place near himself, above all other
+men, which I afterwards thought fit to maintain. On this occasion
+I gave a small present; as it is the custom for all who have any
+business to give something, and those who cannot get near enough
+to speak, send in or hold up their gift, which he always accepts,
+be it only a rupee, and demands to know their business. He held
+the same course with me; for having looked curiously at my
+present, and asked many questions respecting it, he demanded to
+know what I wanted of him. I answered that I wanted justice. For,
+on the assurance of his firmaun, which had been sent to England,
+the king my master had not only given leave to his subjects to
+make a long and dangerous voyage to his dominions with their
+goods, but had deputed me, as his ambassador and representative,
+to congratulate and compliment his majesty on the amity so
+happily commenced between two so mighty nations, and to confirm
+the same. Yet I found that the English, who were settled at
+Ahmedabad, were injured and oppressed by the governor in their
+persons and goods, being fined, subjected to arbitrary exactions,
+and kept as prisoners; while at every town new customs were
+demanded for their goods on their passage to the port, contrary
+to all justice, and in direct contravention of the formerly
+conceded articles of trade, as contained in his majesty's
+firmaun. To this he answered, that he was sorry to hear of such
+things, which should be immediately rectified; and he gave orders
+for two firmauns to be immediately extended according to my
+desire. By one of these, the governor of Ahmedabad was commanded
+to restore the money he had exacted from Mr Kerridge, and to use
+the English in future with all favour. By the other, all customs
+required on any pretence by the way were abolished, and all such
+as had been taken was ordered to be restored. Finally, he desired
+me, if these gave not speedy and effectual remedy, that I should
+renew my complaint against the disobeyer, who should be sent for
+to answer for his conduct; and so dismissed me.</p>
+
+<p>The 1st of March, I rode out to see a pleasure-house belonging
+to the king, two miles from Agimere, which had been given him by
+Asaph Khan. It was situated between two vast rocks, by which it
+was so sheltered that scarcely could the sun be any where seen.
+The foundations and some rooms were hewn out of the solid rock,
+the rest being built of freestone. Close adjoining was a handsome
+small garden, with fine fountains, with two great <i>tanks</i> or
+ponds of water, one being thirty steps higher than the other. The
+way to this retreat is so narrow that only two persons could go
+abreast, and is almost inaccessible, being very steep and stony.
+It is a place of much melancholy, yet of great security and
+delight, abounding in peacocks, turtle-doves, wild fowl, and
+monkies, which inhabit the rocks impending on every side
+around.</p>
+
+<p>The 2d of March began the feast of <i>Norsose</i> in the
+evening. This is the festival of the new year, the ceremonies of
+which begin on the first new moon after, which this year fell
+together. It is kept in imitation of the Persian feast of that
+cause, signifying in that language <i>nine days</i>, as anciently
+it continued only for that number; but these are now doubled. On
+this occasion, a throne is erected about four feet high in the
+<i>durbar court</i>; from the back of which, to the place where
+the king comes out from the inner apartments, a space of
+fifty-six paces long by forty-three broad is railed in, and
+covered over by <i>semianes</i>, or canopies, of cloth of gold,
+velvet, and rich silk, all joined over head, and held up by canes
+covered with similar stuffs. At the upper or west end, were set
+out the pictures of the king of England, the queen, the Princess
+Elizabeth, the Countesses of Somerset and Salisbury, and of a
+citizen's wife of London. Below, there was a picture of Sir
+Thomas Smith, governor of the East India Company. The whole floor
+was laid with rich Persian carpets of large size, and into this
+place come all the great men to wait upon the king, except a few,
+who were within a smaller railed space, right before the throne,
+appointed to receive his commands. Within this square there were
+set out many small houses, one of which was of silver, and other
+curiosities of value. On the left side, Sultan Churrum had a
+pavilion, the supporters of which were covered with silver, as
+were also some others of those near the king's throne. This was
+of wood and of a square form, inlaid with mother of pearl,
+resting on four pillars covered with cloth of gold; and overhead
+was a fringed drapery like a vallence of network, all of real
+pearls, whence hung down pomegranates, apples, and pears, and
+other fruits, all of gold, but hollow. Within that pavilion, the
+king sat on cushions, very rich in pearls and other jewels. All
+round the court before the throne, the principal men had tents or
+pavilions, mostly lined with velvet, damask, and taffety, and
+some few with cloth of gold, in which they were stationed, making
+shew of their wealth. Anciently, the kings used to go to every
+tent, taking away whatever pleased him best: But now the custom
+is changed, as the king remains on his throne, and receives there
+such new-year's-gifts as are brought to him. He makes his
+appearance every day, and retires at the usual hours of the
+durbar; and in the interval all sorts of great gifts are made to
+him, which are very great and almost incredible, though not equal
+to report. At the close of this feast, in recompence for these
+gifts, the king advances some of his courtiers, making additions
+to their charges of horse, according to his pleasure.</p>
+
+<p>On the 12th[198] I went to visit the king, and was brought
+immediately before him to deliver my present, which gave him much
+satisfaction. He then appointed me to come within the rail, that
+I might stand beside him; but not being allowed to step up on the
+raised platform on which the throne was placed, I could see
+little, as the railing was high, and covered with carpets. But I
+had permission to view the inner room at leisure, which, I must
+confess, was very rich; but consisted of so many articles, all
+unsuitable to each other, that it seemed patched work, rather
+than magnificent, as if it aimed to shew all; as if a lady, among
+her plate on a magnificent cupboard, should exhibit her
+embroidered slippers. This evening, the son of the Raima, the new
+tributary formerly mentioned, was brought before the king, with
+much ceremony, being sent by his father with a present. After
+kneeling three times, and knocking his forehead on the ground, he
+was brought within the inner rail, when the king embraced his
+head. His gift was an Indian tray or voider full of silver, upon
+which was a carved silver dish full of gold. He was then
+conducted to pay his respects to the prince. This evening, some
+elephants were shewn, and some music girls sang and
+danced.--<i>Sic transit gloria mundi</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 198: It may be proper to observe, that
+Churchill's edition gives the commencement of this festival on
+the 11th, and says Sir Thomas went to the durbar next
+day.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 13th at night, I went again to wait upon the king at the
+<i>Guzalcan</i>, at which is the best opportunity for transacting
+business, and took with me my Italian interpreter, determined to
+walk no longer in darkness, but to prove the king, as I had
+hitherto been delayed and refused on all hands. I was sent for
+in, along with my old broker, but my Italian was kept out,
+because Asaph Khan mistrusted I might say more than he was
+willing should come to the king's ears. On coming to the king, he
+appointed me a place to stand just before him, and sent to ask me
+many questions respecting the king of England, and about the
+present I had made him the day before. To some of these I made
+answers; but I at length said, that my interpreter was kept out,
+and as I could not speak Portuguese, I wanted the means of
+satisfying his majesty. On this, though much against the wish or
+Asaph Khan, my Italian interpreter was called in. I then made him
+tell the king that I requested leave to speak to him, to which he
+answered, willingly. On this, the son-in-law of Asaph Khan pulled
+away my interpreter by force, and that faction so hemmed in the
+king, by gathering round him, that I could scarcely see his
+majesty, nor could my Italian approach. Upon this, I ordered the
+Italian to speak aloud, that I craved audience of the king; who
+immediately called me before him, and the others made way. Asaph
+Khan stood on one side of my interpreter, and I on the other: I
+to inform him what to say, and the other to awe him by winks and
+signs.</p>
+
+<p>I desired him to say, that I had now been two months at court,
+one of which I had spent in sickness and the other in
+compliments, and had effected nothing of all on which I had been
+sent by the king my master; which was to conclude a firm and
+lasting treaty of peace and amity between the two sovereigns, and
+to establish a fair and secure trade and residence for my
+countrymen in his majesty's dominions. He answered that this was
+already granted. I replied, it was so; but that it still depended
+upon so slender a thread, and such weak conditions, as to be very
+uncertain in its continuance. That an affair of so high
+importance required an agreement dear and explicit in all points,
+and a more formal and authentic confirmation than it now had, by
+ordinary firmauns, which were merely temporary commands, and
+respected accordingly. He asked me what presents we would bring
+him? To which I answered, the league was yet new and weak; that
+many curiosities were to be found in our country, of rare value,
+which the king of England would send; and that our merchants
+would search for such things in all parts of the world, if they
+were made sure of a quiet trade and secure protection on
+honourable conditions, having been hitherto subjected to manifold
+wrongs. He asked me what kind of curiosities I meant, and whether
+these were jewels or precious stones? To this I answered, that we
+did not deem such things fit to be sent back from Europe to
+India, of which he was the principal sovereign, as they were
+common here in India, and of much higher price with us in Europe:
+But that we would endeavour to find such things for his majesty
+as were rare and uncommon in his dominions; such as excellent
+specimens of painting, carving, enamelling, figures in brass,
+copper, and stone, rich embroideries, stuffs of gold and silver,
+and the like.</p>
+
+<p>The king said that these things were all very well, but that
+he wished to have an English horse. I answered, that this was
+utterly impossible by sea, and that the Turks would not allow of
+any being sent by land. In reply, he said he thought it not
+impossible by sea; and, when I represented the dangers from
+storms, he said if six were sent in one ship, one of them surely
+might live, and though it came lean, it might be here made fat. I
+then told him, I feared it could not be done by so long a voyage;
+yet, for his majesty's satisfaction, I should give due notice of
+his desire.</p>
+
+<p>He then asked to know what were my demands? I answered, That
+his majesty would be pleased to sanction by his royal signature,
+certain reasonable conditions which I should propound, in
+confirmation of a league of peace and amity, and for the security
+of our nation in their residence and trade in his dominions; as
+they had hitherto been often wronged, and could not continue on
+their present terms, of which I forbore to make any specific
+complaint, because I hoped to procure amendment from his majesty.
+At these words, Asaph Khan offered to pull away my interpreter,
+but I held him fast, while Asaph Khan continued to make signs to
+him not to interpret my words. On this the king became suddenly
+very angry, pressing to know who had wronged us, and seemed in
+such fury, that I was unwilling to follow it out, and spoke in
+broken Spanish to my interpreter, desiring him to say, That I
+would not trouble his majesty with what was past, but would seek
+justice of the prince his son, whose favour I doubted not to
+obtain. Not attending to what my interpreter said, but hearing
+the name of his son, the king mistakingly conceived I accused
+him; and hastily saying <i>mio filio! mio filio</i>! he called
+for the prince, who came in great fear, humbling himself. Asaph
+Khan trembled, and all those present were amazed.</p>
+
+<p>He chid the prince roundly, and he excused himself. But as I
+perceived the king's error, I made both the king and prince
+understand the mistake, by means of a Persian prince who offered
+himself as interpreter, as my Italian understood Turkish better
+than Persian. By this means I appeased the king, saying that I in
+no respect accused the prince, but wished to inform his majesty
+that I should appeal to the prince's justice, in regard to the
+past wrongs our nation had suffered in those places which were
+under his government. The king then commanded the prince, that he
+should give as effective justice. In his justification, the
+prince said that he had already offered me a firmaun, which I had
+refused. The king asked me the reason of this. To which I
+answered, that I humbly thanked the prince, but he knew that it
+contained a condition I could not accept; and besides, that I
+wished to propound our own demands, in which I would insert all
+the desires of the king my master at once, that I might not daily
+trouble his majesty and the prince with complaints. And, when the
+conditions on both sides were mutually agreed upon, I would
+reciprocally bind my sovereign, to mutual offices of friendship,
+and to such reasonable conditions for the benefit of his
+majesty's subjects as he might propose: All of which being drawn
+up in tripartite, I hoped his majesty would graciously sign one,
+his son the prince another, and I would confirm the third in the
+name of my sovereign, in virtue of my commission.</p>
+
+<p>The king pressed to know what was the condition in the
+prince's firmaun which I had refused, which I stated. So we fell
+into earnest dispute before the king, with some heat. Mukrob Khan
+interposed, saying he was advocate for the Portuguese, and spoke
+slightingly of us, alleging that the king ought to grant no
+articles to us that were unfavourable for them. I answered, that
+I did not propose any against them, but only in our own just
+defence, and that I had not conceived he was so great a friend to
+the Portuguese. On this the jesuit and all the Portuguese faction
+struck in, so that I explained myself fully concerning them; and
+as I offered a conditional peace, so I valued the friendship of
+the Portuguese at a very low rate, and their enmity at a still
+lower. After some time, having explained my demands, the king
+said my proposals were just and my resolution noble, and bade me
+clearly propound the conditions I desired. Asaph Khan, who had
+stood silent during all this debate, and who now wished to end
+it, as we were warm, now interposed, saying, If we talked all
+night, it could only come to this at last, that I should draw my
+demands in writing and present them; which, if found reasonable,
+would be granted by the king. The king said he certainly would do
+so; and at my request the prince engaged to do so likewise. The
+king then rose to go away, but on my request he turned round, and
+I desired my interpreter to say, That I came the day before to
+see his majesty and his greatness, and the ceremonies of the
+feast, on which occasion I was placed behind him, in an
+honourable place certainly, but where I could not see around; and
+therefore humbly requested his majesty would be pleased to let me
+stand on the platform beside his throne. In answer to this, he
+commanded Asaph Khan to let me choose my own place in future.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 14th, I sent a messenger to Asaph Khan,
+lest he or the prince might have misunderstood me, by reason of
+the king's mistake, and had supposed I had complained against
+either of them, which I did not, neither did I so intend; yet I
+was willing to let them see that I did not entirely depend upon
+Asaph Khan, by whom I had hitherto done my business with the
+king; but, if he should continue his manner of only delivering to
+the king what he himself pleased, and not what I said, I would
+find another way. My message was intended to clear up any such
+doubts, if they remained, and to entreat he would move the prince
+to favour my demands respecting our residence and trade at Surat.
+His answer was, that neither the prince nor he had any reason to
+suspect I intended to complain against them, the error being
+sufficiently obvious; and that, for his part, he had ever been
+disposed to favour the English, and would so continue.</p>
+
+<p>The 15th I went again in the evening to see the ceremonies of
+the <i>Norose</i>; and according to the Mogul's order, I chose my
+place of standing on his right hand, and on the raised platform,
+the prince and the son of the Ranna standing on the other side. I
+here had a full view of every thing that was to be seen; viz. the
+presents, and the exhibition of the elephants, horses, and
+dancing girls.</p>
+
+<p>The 23d, the Mogul condemned one of his own nation on
+suspicion of felony; but as he was one of the handsomest men in
+India, and the proof was not very clear against him, instead of
+condemning him to death, he sent him in irons to me as a slave,
+to be disposed of as I pleased. This was looked upon as a great
+favour, and I accordingly returned thanks; yet added, that we had
+no slaves in England, not thinking it lawful to make the image of
+God like unto a beast, but that I should employ him as a servant,
+and should restore him to liberty if he behaved well. The king
+was well pleased with this message.</p>
+
+<p>I went to the <i>Guzalcan</i> on the 26th, and it delivered in
+the articles which I had drawn up, which were referred to Asaph
+Khan for his consideration and report. Some time after, Asaph
+Khan sent a message, desiring me to remove from the place I
+occupied near the king, because I stood alone, which was not the
+custom. I refused at the first; but, as he still insisted I
+should rank myself among the nobles, I removed to the other side,
+where the prince and young Ranna were. This still more displeased
+Asaph Khan, who persuaded the prince to complain of me to the
+king, which he did. On hearing their complaint and my answer,
+that I had changed my place by order of Asaph Khan, the Mogul
+said I had done well, and they were wrong to pretend to displace
+me. So I kept my place in quiet. The following is the substance
+of the articles delivered to the Great Mogul, which were delayed
+and opposed: But the conclusion respecting them will be seen
+hereafter.</p>
+
+<p><i>Proposed Articles of Treaty, between the Great Mogul and
+the King of Great Britain</i>.</p>
+
+<p>1. There shall be perpetual peace and amity between the king
+of Great Britain and his majesty the emperor of India.--2. The
+subjects of England shall have free trade in all the ports of
+India.--3. The governors of all sea ports shall make public
+proclamation of this agreement three several times, upon the
+arrival of any English ships.--4. The English merchants and their
+servants, shall not be liable to search, or to any ill usage.--5.
+No presents sent to the Mogul shall be opened.--6. The goods
+belonging to the English shall not be stopped more than
+twenty-four-hours at the custom-houses; where they shall only be
+sealed, and sent to the house or factory of the merchants, to be
+there opened and rated within six days afterwards.--7. No
+governor shall take any goods by force, nor unless upon payment
+at the owner's price; neither shall any be taken away under
+pretence of being for the king's service.--8. The English
+merchants shall not be hindered from selling their goods to whom
+they please, nor from sending them to other factories; neither
+shall they pay any more in this case than has been already paid
+at the port of entry.--9. Whatever goods the English may purchase
+in any part of the dominions of the Mogul, shall be allowed to be
+transmitted to the ports, without any hindrance or molestation,
+and shall pay no other duty than may be agreed upon at the port
+of shipping.--10. No goods already entered at a port shall be
+again opened, the English shewing a certificate of their numbers,
+qualities, and conditions, from the governor or other proper
+officers of the place where they were purchased.--11. No
+confiscation shall be made of the goods or money belonging to any
+of the English who may die in India.--12. No duties shall be
+demanded for provisions, purchased during the stay of English
+ships at any of the ports.--13. The servants of the English
+merchants, whether English or natives, shall not be punished or
+beaten for doing their duty.--14. The Mogul shall cause any
+governor or officer to be punished for the breach of any of these
+articles.--15. The English ships shall permit all others to pass
+and repass freely, to and from the ports in the dominions of the
+Mogul, except those of their enemies with whom they are at war:
+And the English, while ashore, shall conduct themselves quietly
+and peaceably, as merchants.--16. The English shall yearly
+furnish the Mogul with all such European rarities, and other
+things, as he may desire, and at reasonable rates.--17. The
+English shall pay duty on their commodities, reasonably rated, at
+three and a half per cent. and two per cent. on rials of eight or
+money, and shall not be liable to any other duty or exaction
+whatsoever.--18. The English shall be ready to assist the Great
+Mogul against all his enemies. And, lastly, The Portuguese shall
+be admitted to come into this peace within six months; or, if
+they refuse, the English shall be at liberty to exercise all
+hostilities against them.</p>
+
+<p>On the 31st of March, the Great Mogul dined at the house of
+Asaph Khan, all the way from the palace, which was an English
+mile, being laid under foot with silks and velvet sewed together,
+but rolled up as the king passed. It was reported that this
+feast, and the present made on the occasion, cost six lacks of
+rupees, which amount to &pound;60,000 sterling.[199]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 199: According to Thevenot, a <i>lack</i>
+contains 100,000 rupees, and a rupee is a French crown and five
+sols. At which rate, the <i>six lacks</i> must amount at least to
+&pound;150,000 sterling.--<i>Churchill</i>. 
+
+<p>The editor of Churchill's Collection must here have been
+mistaken the French crowns alluded to by Thevenot. The rupees in
+India are various, and consequently differ in their value; but
+two shillings may be assumed as a fair average, in which case the
+computation in the text is quite correct.--E.]</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<p>I received intelligence on the 26th April, that the prince had
+made one of his servants ask the king at the durbar wherefore he
+gave so great countenance to the English as to banish the
+Portuguese from Surat, who brought much more profit to the king
+in rubies, pearls, and other jewels, while the English came there
+only in search of profit, by the sale of cloths, swords, knives,
+and other articles of small value? The king acknowledged that
+this was true, yet could not be mended. By this the affections of
+the prince were made sufficiently manifest, and I had fair
+warning to be on my guard, that I might study to preserve
+ourselves in the good graces of the king, in which only we could
+be safe. I resolved, however, to take no notice of this, except
+by endeavouring to give the prince a better opinion of our
+nation.</p>
+
+<p>On the 22d of May I went to the king at the durbar, to solicit
+his authority to get back a youth named Jones, who had run away
+from me to an Italian, who protected him to the disgrace of our
+nation, by using the king's name. The king gave me an order for
+his delivery; but the prince, who waited every opportunity to
+injure us, for the sake of his favourite, <i>Zulphecar Khan</i>,
+moved the king in private to send for the youth first, to the
+Guzalcan, which was done. I had newly broken off from conferring
+with the prince, on account of his partiality to Zulphecar Khan,
+and had sent him word that I would no longer refrain from stating
+our grievances to the king in person, which was the cause of his
+enmity towards me. When Jones was brought before the king, being
+instigated by the protection and countenance of the prince, he
+railed against me to my face, with the most virulent malice,
+beseeching the king to save his life; on which the king resolved
+not to deliver him up to me, but to send him as a prisoner to
+Surat. But the prince, to brave me, begged to have him for a
+servant, as the fellow had renounced his country, on which the
+king did so, in spite of every thing I could allege. On this the
+prince gave him 150 rupees, with the pay of two horsemen, and
+commanded me not to meddle with him.</p>
+
+<p>On the night of the 23d, Jones came and threw himself at my
+feet, asking pardon for his lies and mad behaviour. I told him I
+would not now keep him prisoner, as he was the prince's servant;
+but I would not give him any answer till he had made public
+reparation for his misbehaviour, as far as he could. Accordingly,
+on the next day, he contrived to get to the <i>Guzalcan</i>, and
+there asked pardon of the king for the lies he had spoken against
+me, denying every word he had then spoken, alleging he had done
+so to protect himself against me, whom he had offended, and
+prayed the king to send for me, that he might ask my pardon in
+public. The king was well pleased, but the prince fell into a
+rage. I went to the Guzalcan on the 25th, when the king protested
+he never believed what Jones had said against me, and that he
+considered him a villain, yet could not but protect him, as he
+had cast himself on his mercy. Jones was sent for, and asked my
+pardon on his knees, declaring on oath to the king that he had in
+every thing belied me, and that he now made this declaration in a
+voluntary manner, as he durst not return to his country. The king
+chid him a little, saying to me that neither he nor any good man
+could believe such a slanderer. The prince grew angry, and
+endeavoured to make Jones stand to what he had said formerly
+against me; and as Jones refused, the prince basely desired him
+to restore the 150 rupees he had received for bearing witness
+against me. Jones promised to return the money, for which purpose
+an under-treasurer was sent along with him to the house in which
+he lodged, as I would not suffer him to come to mine.</p>
+
+<p>I was forced to seem content, having no way to seek redress,
+as I had no presents to give, and the king never listens to any
+request unless well backed, and will even demand it in plain
+terms, of which the prince takes advantage, urging that the
+Portuguese bring rich jewels, rubies, and pearls, and treating
+our English commodities with great scorn. On the 29th of May the
+Portuguese were admitted to the king with a present, and to sell
+a ballass ruby, which was said to weigh thirteen <i>toles</i>,
+two and a half of these being equal to an ounce.[200] For this
+they asked five lacks of rupees, but the king only offered one
+lack. Asaph Khan also was an advocate for the Portuguese, who
+made him a present of jewels. They had many rich rubies,
+ballasses, emeralds, pearls, and other jewels, for sale, with
+which they so much gratified the king and his great men, that we
+were for a time eclipsed. The prince and the jesuit fell out
+about presenting them, which the prince desired, but it had been
+promised before to Asaph Khan. I had formerly judged concerning
+the credit of the Portuguese at court by report, but I now
+experienced the difference between them and us; for they were
+sought after by all, while they only bought our commodities as it
+were by way of giving us charity. Besides, the Portuguese had an
+advantage over us in consequence of their establishments in the
+neighbourhood, by which they could hinder trade into the Red Sea,
+being always more at hand to do harm than we, who are only
+entertained out of a little fear, while our trade and commodities
+are little cared for.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 200: This must be an enormous exaggeration,
+or error, as in this case the ruby would have weighed 5 1-5th
+ounces.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.2. <i>Occurrences in June, July, and August 1616, from which
+the Character and Dispositions of the Mogul and his Subjects may
+be observed</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The 12th of June a resolution was taken that Sultan Churrum
+should go to the wars in the Deccan, and a day was fixed for his
+setting out on his journey, for which all the Bramins were
+consulted. On this occasion it is reported that Sultan
+<i>Parvis</i>, who is to be recalled, wrote to his father the
+Mogul, that if his elder brother were sent to assume the command,
+he would readily obey; but, if dishonoured by sending this his
+younger brother, he, in the first place, would fall upon him, and
+would afterwards finish the Deccan war. All the captains, such as
+Khan-Khanan, Mahomed Khan, Khan Jeban, and others, refuse to
+serve under the command of Sultan Churrum, who is reputed a
+tyrant, of whom all men are in greater awe than of the king, more
+especially now that he is to have the command of the army. Yet
+the king cannot be persuaded to change his resolution, so that
+the departure of the prince, with his favourite Zulphecar Khan is
+determined to take place at the distance of twenty-two days;
+wherefore I must make haste to finish my business, as after his
+departure with his minion, Zulphecar Khan, I shall have no chance
+to recover a single penny, nor to get any justice against
+him.</p>
+
+<p>The 18th, the king commanded one of his brother's sons, who
+had been made a Christian out of policy, to bring him into hatred
+of the people, to touch a lion on the head which was brought in
+before the king. But he refused it, being afraid, on which the
+king desired his youngest son to touch the lion, which he did,
+without receiving any harm. On this the king commanded his nephew
+to be taken to prison, whence he is never likely again to be
+released.</p>
+
+<p>On the 24th a son was born to Sultan Churrum, and being now
+preparing to set out for the Deccan wars, all men's eyes are upon
+him, either for flattery, gain, or envy, none for love. He has
+received twenty lacks of rupees, equal to &pound;200,000
+sterling, towards his expences, and begins to act with more than
+his usual liberality. Notwithstanding this shew of his father's
+affection, a khan at court endeavoured to persuade the king that
+this expedition would be productive of danger, as prince Parvis,
+whose honour would be thereby wounded, would certainly not submit
+without revenge. To this the king answered, "Let them fight, and
+he who proves the better captain, shall pursue the war."</p>
+
+<p>The 25th I had an audience of the king, being sent for by
+Asaph Khan, and was received by his majesty with much courtesy.
+This Asaph Khan was much in the prince's favour, wherefore I was
+unwilling to disoblige him, though he had given me several
+provocations. At this time Mukrob Khan, another of the great men,
+made me offers of service, being of a contrary faction to Asaph
+Khan, but I thought it best to endeavour to make friends of them
+both. Among other subjects of discourse, Mukrob told me that the
+English brought too much cloth and broad-sword blades for sale to
+India, and hardly any thing else, wherefore he advised they
+should forbear for two or three years, and rather bring the
+curiosities of China and Japan, which would be more acceptable,
+and to bring from England the best cloth of gold, and the richest
+silks wrought with gold and silver, and above all things, large
+quantities of Arras hangings.</p>
+
+<p>The 30th I visited Abdalla Hassan, having need of his
+friendship; and, what is rare in this country, he refused to
+accept of any present. Abdalla is captain over all the soldiers
+maintained at court, and treasurer of all the armies. He
+entertained me with great civility, and few compliments, and made
+me sit beside him to see the soldiers shoot at marks with their
+bows and firelocks. Most of them hit the mark with a single
+bullet, being about the size of a hand, affixed to a butt. We had
+some discourse together about the manner of using weapons in
+Europe, after which I took my leave and departed.</p>
+
+<p>Most of July passed in soliciting the prince to sign the
+articles I had presented to the king, as mentioned before. On the
+13th I sent him three bottles of Alicant, and a letter concerning
+the difference between us and the Portuguese about trade,
+offering to take all the customs to farm, both inwards and
+outwards, for the use of the company. The prince, according to
+his usual barbarous custom of transacting all business in public,
+caused my letter to be twice read over to him by his secretary,
+often interrupting him with discourse, and sent word that he
+would read it again at night and consider its contents, and that
+I should have his answer through <i>Mirza Sorocalla</i>.</p>
+
+<p>That night I went to the durbar to visit the king, who, as
+soon as I came in, sent Asaph Khan to say that he heard I had an
+excellent painter in my house, and that he wished to see some of
+his work. I replied, there was only a young man, a merchant, who
+drew some figures for his amusement, in a very ordinary manner,
+with a pen, but which were far from having any claim as
+paintings. The king said I need not fear his taking any man from
+me by force, as he would neither do me any injury himself, nor
+suffer any to be done me by others, and desired he might see the
+young man and his work. I answered, I had no fears of injury from
+his majesty, and, for his satisfaction, should bring the young
+man to the Guzalcan with such drawings as he might have, which
+were probably figures of elephants, deer, or the like. On this
+the king bowed his head, saying, if I desired to have an
+elephant, or any other thing in his country, I had only to let
+him know freely what I wished, and he would give it me, for he
+was my friend. I made a low reverence, humbly thanking his
+majesty, and said that elephants were of no use to me, neither
+was it the custom of any person of our nation, especially of my
+rank, to ask any thing: Yet, if his majesty were pleased to give
+me even the value of a rupee, I should thankfully accept it as a
+mark of his favour. He answered, that he knew not what I might
+wish for, but there were many things in his country rare in mine,
+and desired I might not be dainty, but speak to him freely, and
+he would give me such things as were most acceptable. He then
+desired me to be merry, for he was the friend of our nation and
+of me, and should take care we had no injury done to us. He then
+desired me to attend that night at the Guzalcan, and to bring
+with me the young man who painted pictures. Then Asaph Khan
+wished me to send for him to come to his house, where also he
+invited me to go till the time when the king came out again,
+assuring me I should be welcome, which I agreed to. I had never
+before been so graciously treated by the king as now, which all
+the great men took notice of, and accordingly altered their
+deportment towards me. It so happened that the jesuit acted as my
+interpreter on this occasion, by the king's appointment.</p>
+
+<p>I went from the durbar to the house of Asaph Khan, according
+to invitation, and continued there till the king came out again,
+when I was conducted back, accompanied by Mr Hughes, the supposed
+painter, with whom the king had some discourse. After this, I
+shewed the king a curious picture I had of a friend of mine,
+which pleased him much, and he shewed it to all his company. The
+king sent for his chief painter, who pretended he could make as
+good, which I denied, on which a wager of a horse was made
+between Asaph Khan and me in the king's presence, and to please
+him, but Asaph afterwards retracted. After this, the Mogul fell
+to drinking some Alicant wine which I had presented him, giving
+some of it to those about him, and then sent for a full bottle,
+and drinking a cup, sent it to me, saying it soured so fast it
+would be spoiled before he could drink it, and I had none. This
+done, he turned him to sleep, when all the candles were put out,
+and I had to grope my way out in the dark.</p>
+
+<p>This day, a gentlewoman attendant upon <i>Noor-mahal</i> was
+taken in the king's house in some improper act with an eunuch,
+when another animal of the same kind, who loved her, slew her
+paramour. The poor woman was set up to the arm-pits in the
+ground, with the earth hard rammed around her, being condemned to
+remain there three days and two nights in that situation, without
+sustenance, her head and arms exposed to the violence of the sun.
+If she survived, she was then to be pardoned. The eunuch was
+condemned to the elephants. This damsel was found to be worth, in
+pearls, jewels, and money, sixteen lack of rupees.[201]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 201: In Purchas this sum is rated in words
+at sixteen hundred thousand, while in Churchill it is only in
+figures 160,000.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 22d, I had letters from Burbanpoor in answer to those I
+had written to Mohabet Khan, who granted my desire of a firmaun
+in favour of our nation, granting them a house near the
+governor's, strictly commanding that no person should molest them
+by sea or land, neither to exact from them any customs, or to
+give them trouble on any pretence, with entire liberty to buy,
+sell, and transport any commodities at their pleasure, without
+let or hindrance. I received this in a letter from himself, full
+of civility and kindness, far exceeding any I had hitherto met
+with in India, protesting the highest respect, and his earnest
+wish to give me every content in whatever I might desire. I
+caused this firmaun to be immediately sent to Surat, so that
+Broach is now provided as a good retreat from the prince's
+injuries, and the customs given up, by which &pound;1500 a-year
+will be saved, besides all manner of searches and extortions. No
+person doubts the performance of this firmaun, as Mohabet Khan
+careth not for the prince, and feareth no man, neither needeth he
+any person's favour, being much beloved of the king, and reckoned
+the second man in the empire. He has all his life been liberal of
+his purse, and honourable in his word, so that he has the good
+report of all men. In regard to the customs on trade, as the king
+takes none, and the governors convert them to their own profit,
+he professes to scorn abusing the liberties of the king's
+ports.</p>
+
+<p>On the 6th of August I was sent for to the durbar, where I had
+much talk with the king, who asked me many questions to satisfy
+his curiosity, and desired me to come to the Guzalcan at night,
+when I should see my picture so exactly copied, that I should not
+know the copy from the original. He asked me what reward I would
+give the painter who had made the copy so like, to which I
+answered, I would give fifty rupees, a painter's reward. To which
+the king replied, that his painter was a gentleman, and my
+proffered reward was too small. I said, that I gave the picture
+willingly, esteeming it rare, and had no inclination to make
+comparisons or wagers; and that, if his majesty's servant had
+performed well, and would not accept my gift, his majesty was
+most fit to reward him. So, after many merry jests, and brags of
+the arts in his dominions, his majesty asked me how often I drank
+in the day, and how much, and what we drank in England.
+Mentioning beer, he asked what beer was, how it was made, and
+whether I could make it here in India. To all of which serious
+state questions I answered to his satisfaction.</p>
+
+<p>He sent for me again at night, being impatient to triumph in
+the skilful execution of his painter, and shewed me six pictures,
+all pasted on one board, one being my own, and the other five
+done by his artist, and all so like, that by candle-light I was
+at some loss to determine which was which, being greatly beyond
+my expectation. At length, by closer inspection, I pointed out my
+own, and explained the differences between it and the copies,
+which were not apparent to an inexperienced eye. The king was
+much pleased that I had not seen the difference at first sight,
+for which he was full of mirth, and exulted over me. I gave him
+way, and satisfied him much by praising his painter, saying, that
+I saw his majesty needed no pictures from our country. He then
+asked me what reward I would give his painter? To which I
+answered, I would double my former offer, and if he came to my
+house, would give him an hundred rupees to buy a nag. The king
+took this kindly, but said his painter would not accept money,
+but some other gifts which I had before promised. I said this was
+referable to my own discretion. To which he answered, that this
+was true, yet he wished I would name it. To this I said, I would
+give him a good sword, a pistol, and a picture. "Then," said the
+king, "you confess he is a good workman, send for him to your
+house, and shew him such rarities as you have, and let him choose
+one, in return for which you shall have any one of these pictures
+you please, that you may shew in England we are not so unskilful
+as you supposed." He then pressed me to make a choice, which I
+did, and which the king wrapped in paper, and placed in a little
+book of mine, expressing much exultation at the supposed victory
+of his painter. I then shewed him a picture I had of his majesty,
+far inferior to the work I now saw, saying I had judged from it,
+supposing it among the best. When told where I got it, he asked
+why I bought any such thing? "Have not I the best, and have not I
+told you that I would give you any thing you desired?" I thanked
+his majesty, but said I held it impertinent for me to trouble him
+in trifles, especially as a beggar. To this he replied, that it
+was no shame to ask from him, and desired me to speak freely at
+all times, and pressed me to ask for something. To this I
+answered, that I would not make choice of any gift, as whatever
+he was pleased to give, I would joyfully accept as a mark of
+honour. He then said, if you desire my picture, I will either
+give you one for yourself or for your king. To this I answered,
+that if his majesty thought proper to send one to my king, I
+would gladly carry it, and knew that my sovereign would esteem it
+much, and take it as a mark of friendship; but, as his majesty
+had emboldened me by his gracious condescension, I would humbly
+ask one for myself, which I would keep and leave to my posterity,
+as a memorial of his majesty's favour. He answered, as my king
+did not desire one, but I did, I should have one, and so gave
+immediate order for its making. He then turned himself to sleep,
+and we had to go out as before, in the dark.</p>
+
+<p>The 9th of August a band of an hundred robbers were brought in
+chains before the Great Mogul, together with their accusation.
+Without any ceremony of trial, he ordered them to be carried away
+for execution, their chief being ordered to be torn in pieces by
+dogs, and all the rest to be put to death in the ordinary manner.
+The prisoners were divided into portions, sent for execution to
+several quarters of the city, and executed in the streets. Close
+by my house, the chief was torn in pieces by twelve dogs, and
+thirteen of his fellows, having their hands and feet tied
+together, had their necks cut by a sword, yet not quite through,
+and their naked and bloody bodies were left to corrupt in the
+street, to the annoyance of the whole neighbourhood.</p>
+
+<p>On the 10th, 11th, and 12th, I was occupied at court in giving
+notice to the king and prince that a Dutch ship lay before Surat,
+and refused to give notice of its object till the arrival of a
+fleet to which it belonged, which was expected with the first
+fair wind. I took advantage of this circumstance to make them
+apprehensive of the designs of the Hollanders, and the dangers
+that might arise from them, all of which was well taken. And,
+being consulted on the subject, I advised not to come to a
+rupture with them, and yet to exclude them from trade.</p>
+
+<p>The last of these days I went to visit <i>Gemaldin
+Ussen</i>,[202] the viceroy of <i>Patan</i>,[203] and lord of
+four cities in Bengal, a man of seventy years of age, who had
+often been employed as an ambassador by the Mogul, had more
+understanding and courtesy than all his countrymen, was
+universally esteemed for his hospitality and regard to strangers,
+and was considered as entirely free from secret ambition. He had
+often invited me to his house, to which I went this day, and was
+received with extraordinary kindness and friendship. He even
+offered me a lack of rupees, and such other demonstrations of
+courtesy, as bespoke their own refusal. He offered me likewise
+his credit and favour with the king, and his best advice in every
+emergence; indeed, omitting nothing that could evince his desire
+to serve me. All this seemed cordially to proceed from the heart,
+especially from a person of his years and experience; and, in the
+course of our conversation, he spoke so plainly of many of the
+chief men about the court, which, from my own experience, I knew
+for truth, that I was satisfied he was a true-hearted and
+well-disposed old man. He gave me much information respecting the
+customs of this empire, their want of laws, their servitude, the
+increase of the empire, and many other things, having served in
+grace and favour under three successive kings. He shewed me a
+book containing the annals of all memorable actions in his time,
+which he daily committed to record, and offered me a copy if I
+would procure it to be translated. This also treated concerning
+the king's revenue, and the manner in which it was raised,
+besides confiscations, gifts, and deductions upon the great men.
+He shewed me that the government of every province paid yearly a
+certain rent to the king. Thus, for his government of Patna, he
+gave yearly to the king eleven lacks of rupees;[204] all other
+profits of the government being his own, he having entire power
+and authority to take what he thought fit. His government was
+estimated at 5000 horse, the pay of each being 200 rupees yearly,
+of which he only kept 1500 on foot, being allowed the surplus as
+dead pay. Besides which, he had a daily pension of 1000 rupees,
+and enjoyed some smaller governments. Yet he assured me that
+several of the great lords had double the emoluments he enjoyed,
+and that there were above twenty equal to himself.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 202: This name does not appear rightly
+reported, yet we have no means of correcting its orthography,
+neither is it of much importance. Perhaps it may have been
+Jemal-ul-dien Ussan Khan.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 203: This is probably a mistake for Patna
+in Bengal, and he may have been Nabob, or Nawab, perhaps Soubah
+of Bengal.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 204: Eleven lack, or 1,100,000 rupees, on
+the computation formerly assigned, are equal to &pound;110,000.
+In the Pilgrims, at this place, the rupee is said to equal 2s.
+2d, which would add &pound;9166:12:4 to that
+sum.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the course of our conversation, this lord praised the good
+prophet Jesus, and his laws, and was full of much pleasant and
+profitable discourse. Some days after this visit, when I thought
+his kindness had been at an end, he borrowed the king's
+banqueting-house and pleasure-garden, called <i>Havar Gemall</i>,
+a mile from town, on purpose to treat me, and earnestly inviting
+me, I promised to come. He went there himself at midnight,
+carrying his tents and all requisite furniture and provisions,
+and fitted up a place very handsomely, by the side of the tank,
+for the entertainment. I went there in the morning, and on my
+arrival he came to meet me with extraordinary civility, carrying
+me into the pavilion he had prepared, where he had some company,
+among whom were two of his sons, of whom he had thirty in all. He
+had likewise an hundred servants attending. To amuse me, he
+carried me to see the king's little closets and retiring rooms,
+which were painted in the antique manner, having pictures of some
+of the French kings, and other Christian princes, on several of
+the pannels. He said he was only a poor servant of the king, yet
+wished I might have some content, and had therefore invited me to
+a slight banquet, that we might eat bread and salt together, to
+seal a friendship which he entreated me to accept. There were
+many great men, he alleged, who were better able to shew me
+kindness, but were proud and false-hearted, and he wished me
+therefore to trust none of them. For, if I had any business to
+transact concerning the Portuguese or any other, they who acted
+as my interpreters would never deliver the truth, but only what
+pleased themselves, or would give satisfaction in the relation.
+That, therefore, I should never be rightly understood, nor be
+able to effect my business without being abused and cheated, nor
+ever clearly know the situation in which I stood, until I had an
+Englishman who could speak Persian, who was able rightly to
+deliver what I wished to have said, without using any other
+person. And, if I could find any such, the king would readily
+grant me leave to employ him, having conceived a good opinion of
+me; insomuch, that the preceding night, at the Guzalcan, when the
+jewels of <i>Sheik Ferid</i>, governor of Lahore, who was lately
+deceased, were presented to him, he remembered me of his own
+accord, and seeing a picture of himself which pleased him, he
+delivered it to Asaph Khan, commanding him to send it to me, that
+I might wear it for his sake, with many words of favour
+concerning me, which would make all the great men respect me.</p>
+
+<p>While thus conversing, dinner was served. So sitting down on a
+carpet, a cloth was spread, divers kinds of banqueting dishes
+were set before us. The like was done a little on one side for
+the gentlemen of his company, with whom he went to eat, as they
+hold it a kind of uncleanness to mingle with us. Upon this, I
+told him that he had promised we should eat bread and salt
+together, and without his company I felt little appetite,
+whereupon he arose from the rest, and sat down beside me, and we
+fell heartily to our repast. It consisted of various kinds of
+dishes, together with raisins, almonds, pistachio nuts, and
+various fruits. After dinner, he played at chess, and I walked
+about, and after some time spent in discourse, I offered to take
+my leave. But he said he had invited me to eat with him, and
+hitherto we had only had a collation, wherefore he entreated I
+might not depart till we had supped together, to which I readily
+consented.</p>
+
+<p>About an hour after, the ambassador of one of the kings of the
+Deccan came to visit him, whom he presented to me, using him with
+civility, but much inferior to the respect he had shewn me. He
+afterwards asked me, if the king my master would scorn the offer
+of service from so poor a man as he was, and if he would
+vouchsafe to accept a present from a stranger, as he proposed to
+send a gentleman to England with me to kiss the hands of my
+sovereign, and to see our country. I answered him as became me,
+with all civility; so he sent for one presently, whom he
+questioned if he would venture upon such a journey, and as this
+person seemed willing, he presented him to me, saying he would
+provide some of the curiosities of the country for the king my
+master, and send them by this gentleman along with me. By the
+manner all this seemed to be in earnest.</p>
+
+<p>While we thus spent our time in friendly converse, supper was
+brought in; and, as in the morning, two cloths were spread, one
+before me and my chaplain, with one merchant, on which were set
+various dishes of roast, fried, and boiled meats, with rice and
+sallads. On this occasion my honourable entertainer desired me to
+excuse his company, as it was their custom to eat among
+themselves, and his countrymen might take it ill if he did not
+eat with them; so he and his guests, and I with my companions,
+solaced ourselves with good cheer. The meats were not amiss, but
+the attendance and order were excellent, as the servants were
+very diligent and respectful. After the manner of this country of
+giving presents to invited guests, he made me a present of five
+cases of sugar-candy flavoured with musk, and a loaf of the
+finest sugar, as white as snow, weighing fifty pounds, and
+requested my acceptance of an hundred such against my departure.
+He then addressed me in these terms:--"You refuse these from me,
+thinking I am poor, but being made in my government, it costs me
+nothing, as it comes to me <i>gratis</i>." To this I answered,
+that he had already much too far obliged me, yet would I not
+refuse his kindness when ready to go away. On which he replied,
+that he might not be then provided, and therefore desired I would
+accept now, that he might not lose both his offer and his labour.
+Thus, calling himself my father, and me his son, we took leave of
+each other, with many compliments.</p>
+
+<p>I went to visit the king on the 16th, who, as soon as I came
+in, called to his women, and reached out his own picture set in
+gold, and hanging to a chain of gold wire, with a pendant of foul
+pearl, which he delivered to Asaph Khan, whom I warned not to
+demand any reverence from me on the occasion which I would not
+willingly perform; as it is the custom here, when he bestows any
+gift, that the receiver kneels down and touches the ground with
+his head; and which ceremony had been exacted from the ambassador
+of Persia. Then Asaph Khan came to me with the picture, which I
+offered to take in my hand, but he made a sign to me, to take off
+my hat and put it about my neck, leading me right before the
+king. Not understanding his purpose, and doubting he might
+require my conformance with the custom of the country, called
+<i>sizeda</i>, I resolved rather to forego the present than
+comply. He made a sign to me to return thanks to the king, which
+I did after the fashion of our country; on which some of the
+officers called for me to make <i>sizeda</i>, but the king
+immediately said, No, no, in Persian. So, with many gracious
+words, I returned to my place. You may judge of the king's
+liberality by this mighty gift, which was not in all worth thirty
+pounds, yet was five times the value of such as he usually gives
+of that kind, and which are yet held as a special favour, as all
+the great men wear the king's picture, which yet none may do but
+those to whom it is given. This ordinarily consists of only a
+small gold medal, not bigger than a sixpence, impressed with the
+king's image, having a short gold chain of six inches to fasten
+it on their turbans; and to which, at their own charges, some add
+precious stones or pearl pendents.</p>
+
+<p><i>Gemaldin Ussen</i>, who had invited me to the <i>Havaer
+Gemal</i>, as before mentioned, being newly appointed governor of
+<i>Sinde</i>, came to dine at my house on the 19th, accompanied
+by two of his sons and two other gentlemen, and attended by about
+an hundred servants. He partook of some part of the banquet,
+which had been prepared at my house by a Mahomedan cook, but
+declined eating of any of the dishes which were cooked after our
+English fashion, though he seemed to have a good inclination,
+being influenced by a superstitious notion; yet he desired that
+four or five dishes, of his own choice, might be sent to his own
+house, being all baked meats, dressed in a way he had not before
+seen, saying he would afterwards eat of them in private, which
+was accordingly done. At this entertainment, he offered us a free
+trade and secure residence at the chief town, of Sinde, his new
+government, and having filled himself with my banquet, he took
+his leave, after receiving a small present from me, according to
+the fashion of the country. This day, Mr Hall, my chaplain, died
+suddenly, to my great grief. He was a man of mild and gentle
+manners, and a most sincere Christian, of unspotted life and
+conversation.</p>
+
+<p>On the 20th and the night before, there fell a vast storm of
+rain, called in this country the <i>elephant</i>, owing to which
+such prodigious streams of water flowed into the great tank, the
+head of which is of stone and apparently of great strength, that
+it gave way in one place, causing a sudden alarm that the whole
+fabric would give way and drown all that part of the town in
+which I dwelt. Insomuch that the prince and all his women forsook
+their house, and my nearest neighbour carried off his goods and
+his wife to the skirts of the hills on his elephants and camels.
+All persons had their horses ready at their doors, that they
+might save their lives by flight in case of necessity. We were in
+the utmost consternation, and sat up till midnight, having no
+alternative, as we thought, but to flee ourselves and abandon all
+our goods, for it was reported that the water would rise three
+feet higher than the top of our house, and carry all away, being
+only a slight mud building. The foot of the tank was level with
+our dwelling, and the water was of great extent and very deep, so
+that the surface of the water stood considerably higher than the
+top of my house, which stood in a hollow, in the very course of
+the water, and where every ordinary heavy rain occasioned such a
+current at my door as to be for some hours impassable by man or
+horse. But the king caused a sluice to be cut during the night,
+to conduct the water by another course, so that we were freed
+from the extreme danger; yet the excessive rain had washed down a
+considerable part of the walls of my house, and so weakened it by
+breaches in different parts, that I now feared its falling down,
+as much as I had dreaded its being swept away by the flood. It
+was every where so bemired with dirt and water, that I could
+hardly find a place in which to sit or lie dry, and was forced to
+be at material charges in having it repaired. Thus were we every
+way afflicted, by fires, smoke, floods, storms, heats, dust, and
+flies, and had no season of temperate air and quietness.</p>
+
+<p>On the 27th, I received advice from Surat, that the Dutch had
+obtained permission to land their goods, and to secure them in a
+warehouse at that place, carrying on trade till the pleasure of
+the prince were known, and under condition that they should
+depart at the first warning.</p>
+
+<p>The king went to <i>Havar Gemal</i> on the 29th, whence he
+employed himself in hunting. At that place, a resolution was
+taken, to remove the court to Mundu, a castle near Burhanpoor,
+where there is no town. At this time, Sultan Parvis came from the
+Deccan wars in disgrace, and arrived with his train near Agimere;
+and the king commanded him to retire to Bengal, refusing to admit
+him into his presence. Having thus dispatched him, without the
+inconvenience dreaded from a meeting between the brothers, he now
+proposed to settle Sultan Churrum in the Deccan wars, although
+all the chief men of the court were averse from this measure; on
+which account, the king feared to send him down, as was formerly
+proposed, and had therefore delayed this measure until Prince
+Parvis was withdrawn, and now meant to establish Churrum by means
+of his own presence at Mundu, in the neighbourhood of the Deccan.
+If this resolution is executed, it will put us to much trouble
+and expence, as we must build a new house both for ourselves and
+goods, because that castle stands on a hill, and has no buildings
+near it.</p>
+
+<p>The king returned from hunting on the night of the 30th, and
+about eleven o'clock sent me a very large and fat wild boar,
+desiring to have the tusks back, and accompanied by a message,
+saying it was killed by his own hand, and therefore desiring me
+to be merry, and to eat it with good cheer. On this occasion, I
+desired Jaddow, who brought this message from the king, to tell
+Asaph Khan, that I proposed to visit him next day, when I hoped
+to receive from him a firmaun of the privileges granted by the
+king. Asaph Khan sent me back word, that they would not be then
+ready, but it should be sealed some days after, and that he did
+not wish to see me till he had given me satisfaction.</p>
+
+<p>S.3. <i>Of the Celebration of the King's Birth Day, with other
+Occurrences in September 1616</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The 2d of September was the birth-day of the Great Mogul,
+which was solemnized with extraordinary festivities. He was then
+weighed against a variety of articles, as jewels, gold, silver,
+stuffs of gold and silver, silk, batter, rice, fruits, and many
+other things, of each a little, all of which is given to the
+Bramins. On this occasion, the king ordered Asaph Khan to send
+for me; who did so, and appointed me to come to the place where
+the king held his durbar. But the messenger mistook, so that I
+went not in time, and missed the sight. Being there before the
+king came out, he sent for me as soon as he noticed me, and
+enquired why I had not come to see the ceremony of weighing, for
+which he had given order. I explained the reason, as it actually
+was, on which he chid Asaph Khan publicly for the omission. He
+was at this time so richly ornamented with jewels, that I must
+confess I never saw at any one time such unspeakable wealth. He
+now amused himself in seeing his greatest elephants brought in
+before him. Some of these were lord-elephants, having their
+chains, bells, and furniture all of gold and silver, being
+attended by many gilt flags and streamers, and each having eight
+or ten inferior elephants to wait upon him, clothed in gold,
+silk, and silver. In this way there passed about twelve troops,
+all very splendidly furnished. The first lord-elephant had all
+the plates on his head and breast set with rubies and emeralds,
+being a beast of most wonderful stature and beauty. They all
+bowed down before the king, making their reverences very orderly,
+and formed as fine a shew of beasts as I had ever seen. The
+keepers of each chief elephant made a present to the king. After
+this was over, the king made me some gracious speeches, and went
+into the interior apartments.</p>
+
+<p>About ten o'clock at night, after I was in bed, the king sent
+me a message, saying he had heard I had a picture which I had not
+shewn him, and desired I would come then to him, bringing the
+picture with me; and if I would not part with it, that he might
+see it, and have copies taken for his wives. I rose and carried
+the picture with me, and when I came to the presence, I found him
+sitting cross-legged on a little throne, his robes all covered
+over with diamonds, pearls, and rubies. Before him stood a golden
+table, on which were above fifty pieces of gold plate, all set
+with precious stones, some of them being large and of great
+value. His nobles were all around him in their best attire, whom
+he commanded to drink cheerfully of several kinds of wine, which
+stood there in large flaggons.</p>
+
+<p>On my approach he asked for the picture, on which I shewed him
+two. He seemed astonished at one of these, and asked whose it
+was; to which I replied, that it was the portrait of a friend who
+was dead. He asked if I would give it him. I replied, that I
+valued it more than any thing I had, as being the portrait of one
+I had loved dearly; but if his majesty would pardon my attachment
+to that picture, and accept the other, which was French and of
+excellent work, I would most willingly give it. He thanked me,
+saying it was that only picture which he desired, and which he
+loved as much as I did; and, if I would give it him, he would
+value it more than the richest jewel in his house. I answered
+that I was not so much in love with any thing, but that I would
+part with it to satisfy his majesty, being extremely glad to have
+any opportunity to serve him, and was ready even to present him
+with my heart, if I could thereby demonstrate my affection. He
+bowed to me, saying he had never before seen so much art and
+beauty, and conjured me to tell him truly if ever such a woman
+had lived. I answered, that there certainly did once live a lady
+whom this portrait resembled in every thing but perfection. He
+then said, that he accepted my readiness to give him what I so
+valued as a great kindness; but would only shew it to his ladies,
+and cause his own painter make five copies, and if I knew my own
+I should have it back. I answered, that I had freely given it,
+and would be glad of his majesty accepting it: But he said he
+would not keep it, and loved me better for putting so much value
+on the image of my departed friend. He knew, he added, that it
+would be doing me an injury to take it from me, and would only
+have five copies taken, which his wives should wear, and would
+then return me the original with his own hand. In this art of
+limning or painting in water colours, his artists are wonderfully
+expert. But he liked not the other picture, which was painted in
+oil.</p>
+
+<p>He then told me that this was his birth-day, and all men made
+merry, and asked me therefore if I would drink with them. I said
+I would willingly do whatever he was pleased to command, as I
+sincerely wished him many prosperous days, and that the ceremony
+of this day might be repeated for an hundred years. He asked me
+what wine I would have, whether that of the grape or made wine,
+and whether strong or weak. I said whatever he was pleased to
+order, hoping he would neither command me to have it too strong
+or in too large quantity. So he called for a gold cupful of
+mingled wine, half of the grape and half artificial, which he
+sent me by one of his nobles, with this message, that I should
+drink it off twice, thrice, four times, or five times, for his
+sake, and accept the cup and appurtenances as a present. On
+drinking a portion of it, I found it stronger than any I had ever
+tasted, insomuch that it made me sneeze, at which he laughed, and
+called for raisins, almonds, and sliced lemons, which he sent me
+on a gold plate, and desired me to eat and drink what I liked,
+and no more. I then made a reverence for my present, after my own
+manner, though Asaph Khan wanted me to kneel and knock my head
+upon the ground, but the king accepted it in my own way. The cup
+was of gold, set all over with small rubies and turquoises; the
+cover being likewise gold, and set with great rubies, emeralds,
+and turquoises; and there was likewise a suitable dish or salver
+on which to set the cup. I know not the value, because many of
+the stones are small, and the greater, which also are numerous,
+are not all clean; but there are above two thousand stones in
+all, and the gold weighs about twenty ounces. On giving me this
+splendid present, he sent me word that he esteemed me more than
+ever he had done a Frank, and asked if I were merry in eating the
+wild boar he had sent me, how I had it dressed, what I drank with
+it, and many such compliments; which public shew of his grace and
+favour did me much service in the eyes of all his nobles, who
+strove to shew me respect.</p>
+
+<p>After this, he threw among those that stood below, two
+chargers of rupees, and among us who were round the throne two
+chargers of hollow almonds made of gold and silver mingled; but I
+would not scramble as did his great men, for I saw his son did
+not take any up. He then distributed sashes and girdles of gold
+tissue to all the musicians and servants, and many others. So
+drinking heartily himself, and commanding others to drink, he and
+his nobles became as jovial as could be, and of a thousand
+humours. But the prince, Asaph Khan, two old men, the former king
+of Candahar, and I, refrained from drinking. When the king was
+not able any longer to hold up his head, he lay down to sleep,
+and we all departed. While going out, I moved Asaph Khan for the
+dispatch of our privileges, assuring him his majesty could give
+me no present so acceptable. I said farther, that I had no doubt
+it lay in his power to dispatch me; but if he did not think
+proper to do so, or if any other hinderance was in my way, I
+should on the morrow again apply to the king. He desired me not
+to do so, for the king loved me and had given orders for
+dispatching my business, which had been hindered by the
+preparations for this feast; but he would now send it to me with
+all speed, and do me all manner of service.</p>
+
+<p>Seven months had now been vainly spent in soliciting the
+signing and sealing of the articles of amity and commerce,
+formerly detailed, and I had nothing but promises and delays,
+from day to day, and from week to week. Therefore on the 3d
+September, the English fleet being hourly expected to arrive at
+Surat, I delivered to him a memorial, containing the articles I
+desired to have an order for, that they might be observed in the
+unloading of the ships. These were, 1. That the presents coming
+for the king and prince, should not be opened at the port, but
+sent up to court under the seals of the customhouse officers. 2.
+That curiosities sent for presents to other persons, and for the
+merchants to sell, should also be sent to the court sealed, for
+the prince to make the first choice. 3. That the gross
+merchandize should be landed, reasonably rated, and not detained
+at the customhouse, but that the merchants, on paying the
+customs, should have full liberty to sell or dispose of it as
+they pleased; and that the ships should be fully supplied with
+provisions, without paying any custom for the same.</p>
+
+<p>On the 4th, Asaph Khan sent me back my articles, after so long
+attendance and so many false promises, some of them altered, and
+others struck out, together with a letter, saying there was no
+need of any articles, as an order from the prince to trade at
+Surat was quite sufficient, he being lord there, and that no
+grant of trade at Bengal or Sinde could ever be allowed.
+Notwithstanding all this vexation, I durst not change my mode of
+proceeding, or wholly quit the prince and Asaph Khan. I therefore
+drew up other articles, leaving out what seemed displeasing in
+the former, and desired Asaph Khan to put them into form and
+procure them to be sealed, or else to allow me to apply to the
+king, that if he denied me I might leave the country. The
+substance of these new articles was as follows:--1. That all the
+subjects of the Great Mogul should receive the English in a
+friendly manner, suffering them to land their goods peaceably,
+and to procure provisions for their money without paying customs
+for them.--2. To have liberty, after paying customs for their
+goods, to sell them to any one they pleased, and none to force
+them to sell at an under rate.--3. To have liberty to pass with
+their goods to any part of the empire, without any farther
+exactions than those payable at the port.--4. To have the
+presents for the Mogul and prince sealed without being opened,
+and sent to the ambassador.--5. To have the goods of those that
+might die freed from confiscation, and delivered to the surviving
+English factors.--And finally, That no injury should be offered
+to any of the English.</p>
+
+<p>On the 8th, Asaph Khan sent me word in plain terms, that
+absolutely he would procure nothing for me sealed, that in any
+respect concerned the government belonging to the prince, and
+that I must rest satisfied with a firmaun or order, signed by the
+prince, which was quite sufficient, and I needed not to apply any
+more to him. This clearly revealed the purpose he had so long
+intended, that we should be entirely dependent on the prince; and
+I now had just cause to look out for new friends, Asaph Khan
+having forsaken me. He that first took him for our solicitor
+engaged us in all this misery, for he was the known protector of
+our enemies, and a slave to their numerous bribes. I therefore
+determined to try the prince, and to seem entirely dependent upon
+him. So I went to the prince on the 10th, and desired he would
+grant his firmaun for the four articles formerly sent to his
+secretary, which he threw down to his secretary, so that I hoped
+to be at rest. I received it on the 11th, but on reading it over,
+I found two of the four clauses much altered, and one entirely
+left out; so I returned it, declaring roundly I could not accept
+it, neither would I suffer any goods to be sent ashore. Never was
+any man so distressed with such pride, covetousness, and
+falsehood.</p>
+
+<p>At night, I rode to visit the prince's secretary, <i>Mirza
+Socrolla</i>, with whom I expostulated the business, declaring my
+resolution to depart. But I now found the firmaun quite different
+than I had been informed, and containing all the clauses I had
+required, though in some phrases rather ambiguous in my judgment,
+which the secretary interpreted favourably, declaring it was the
+prince's intent to satisfy me entirely, and that every thing was
+quite sufficient for our purpose. After urging the obscurity of
+some points, and as he had declared the meaning of the prince to
+me, I requested he would explain them in the same sense to the
+governor of Surat, which he agreed to; and especially gave order
+that the customer should pay for fifty pieces of cloth, which he
+had bought many months before, and wished now to return upon the
+factors, to their extreme loss. At the close of our conference,
+he expressed the prince's desire that we would rely entirely on
+him, and not cross him in matters belonging to his government, by
+applying to the king, declaring that we should so find him a
+better friend than we expected. Being thus satisfied, I was in
+some hope of success, especially as this man is no taker of
+bribes, and is reputed honest, and pledged his credit that we
+should sustain no loss or injury, every thing being referred to
+him by the prince. So I accepted the firmaun, which, on having it
+translated, I found very effectual and satisfactory.</p>
+
+<p>The 16th, I went to visit the prince, intending to seem
+entirely dependent upon him, till I heard what entertainment our
+ships were likely to meet with. But I found him in much
+perplexity, fearing the coming of Sultan Parvis to court, he
+being only at the distance of eight coss, anxiously desiring
+leave to kiss his father's hands. The king had even granted his
+desire, but by the influence of Nourmahal, the favourite queen,
+he had revoked the permission, and Sultan Parvis was ordered away
+directly to Bengal.[205] The resolution of the king to remove the
+court from Agimere still continued, but no one knew certainly
+where he intended to go.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 205: At this place there is an expression
+in the Pilgrims, coupled with this sentence, which is quite
+inexplicable. "Yea, although the king had fallen down, and taken
+his mother by the feet, to obtain her leave to see her son." We
+are not sufficiently conversant in the secret history of the
+Zenana of Shah Jehan-guire to explain this; yet strongly suspect
+that this sentence ought to have run thus: Although the prince's
+mother fell at the king's feet to obtain leave to see her
+son.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.4. <i>Broils about Abdala Khan and Khan-Khannan: Ambitious
+projects of Sultan Churrum to subvert his eldest Brother: Sea
+Fight with a Portuguese Carrack; and various other
+Occurrences</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Several days now passed in soliciting the king and great men,
+and paying my court to them, without any remarkable occurrence;
+till on the 9th October, I had letters from Surat, giving me an
+account that four English ships had arrived there. On the 10th,
+Abdala Khan, the great governor of Ahmedabad, being sent for to
+court in disgrace, to answer for many insolent and contemptuous
+neglects of the king's commands, thought to stand upon his
+defence and to refuse compliance. But Sultan Churrum, whose
+ambitious views sought to turn every thing to his advantage,
+being desirous to oblige so great a man, who was reckoned one of
+the chiefest captains in the empire, prevailed upon him to
+submit, on his word to protect him. Abdala came therefore, in
+pretended humility, habited as a pilgrim, attended by forty
+servants on foot, until he arrived within a day's journey of the
+court, having 2000 horse attending him at some distance behind.
+He was this day brought to the <i>Jarruco</i>, the place where
+the king sits in public to see sports and hear complaints, and
+advanced towards the king, between two noblemen, having chains on
+his legs, and holding his turban over his eyes, that he might see
+no one till he had the happiness to behold the king. After making
+his humble reverence, and answering a few questions, the king
+forgave him, caused his irons to be taken off, and clothed him in
+a new vest of cloth of gold, with a turban and sash, as is the
+custom.</p>
+
+<p>The prince, Churrum, now intended to establish his honour and
+power on the Deccan wars, which his elder brother Sultan Parvis
+had been recalled from in disgrace, and which the great
+commander, Khan-Khannan, had not conducted prosperously, being
+strongly suspected of a secret understanding with the princes of
+the Deccan, from whom he was believed to receive pensions.
+Churrum, therefore, induced his father to recall Khan-Khannan,
+who refused to obey; and wrote to the king, not to send Churrum
+to the war, but one of his youngest sons, then only about
+fifteen. This gave Churrum much uneasiness, as he was exceedingly
+intent upon having the conduct of this war, for which reason he
+promised to give the subordinate command of the army to Abdala
+Khan, under himself, if he could contrive to get Khan-Khannan
+displaced. Fearing troubles from the ambition and factious
+practices of his son Churrum, the discontent of the two elder
+sons, Cuserou and Parvis, and the power of Khan-Khannan, the king
+was anxious to accommodate matters in the Deccan by accepting a
+peace, and continuing Khan-Khannan in his government; to which
+end he wrote him a letter of favour, and proposed to send him a
+vestment, as a sign of reconciliation, according to custom.
+Before dispatching these, he acquainted a kinswoman of
+Khan-Khannan, who lived in the seraglio, with his purpose.
+Whether she was false to her relation, through the secret
+influence of Sultan Churrum, or was grieved to see the head of
+her family so unworthily dealt with, who merited so highly, does
+not certainly appear: But she plainly told the king, that she did
+not believe Khan-Khannan would wear any thing the king sent, as
+he knew his majesty hated him, and had once or twice already sent
+him poison, which he had put into his bosom instead of his mouth,
+and proved by trials. For this reason, she was confident
+Khan-Khannan would not dare to put on any thing sent from his
+majesty. The king offered to wear the dress himself in her
+presence for an hour, which she might certify in a letter to her
+relative. To this she answered, that Khan-Khannan would trust
+neither of them with his life; but, if allowed to continue
+quietly in his command, would do his majesty good service. Upon
+this, the king altered his plans, and resolved to invest Sultan
+Churrum in the supreme command of the Deccan wars, and to follow
+after him with another army, to ensure his reception.</p>
+
+<p>Khan-Khannan, having due notice of the storm preparing against
+him, practised with the Deccan sovereigns, who were at his
+devotion, to offer favourable terms of peace for a season, as he
+saw no other way of averting the cloud that hung over both him
+and them, unless by temporizing till the king and the prince were
+established farther off. For this purpose, there came two
+ambassadors at this time to court, from the princes of the
+Deccan, bringing horses richly caparisoned as presents. The king
+refused to listen to them, or to accept their gifts, and turned
+them over to his son, saying that peace or war rested entirely
+with him. The prince was so puffed up by this favour, though
+informed that the proposed conditions of peace were highly
+honourable, that he declared proudly he would listen to no terms,
+till he was in the field at the head of the army, being resolved
+that Khan-Khannan should not deprive him of the honour of
+finishing that war.</p>
+
+<p>The ambitious views of this young prince are quite obvious,
+and form the common talk of the country, yet the king suffers him
+to proceed, although he by no means intends him as his successor.
+Sultan Cuserou, the eldest son, is highly beloved and honoured of
+all men, and almost adored, for his excellent parts and noble
+dispositions, with which the king is well acquainted, and even
+loves him dearly. But he conceives that the liberty of this son
+would diminish his own glory, and does not see that the ambition
+of Churrum greatly more tarnishes his own fame than would the
+virtuous character and noble actions of the other. Thus the king
+fosters division and emulation among his sons, putting so much
+power into the hands of the younger, which he believes he can
+undo at his pleasure, that the wisest here foresee much fatal
+division in this mighty empire when the present king shall pay
+the debt of nature, expecting that it will then be rent in pieces
+by civil wars.</p>
+
+<p>The history of this country, for the variety of its incidents,
+and the many crooked practices of the present king during the
+reign of his father, Akbar Shah, and these latter troubles, were
+well worthy of being committed to writing. But, as the country is
+so remote, many would despise such information, and as the people
+are esteemed barbarous, few persons would give it credit. I
+content myself, therefore, with privately contemplating the
+singular history of this nation, although I could narrate so many
+singular and amusing state intrigues, subtle evasions, policies,
+answers, and adages, as could not be easily equalled in the
+history of one age or country. One incident, however, that
+occurred lately, I cannot omit relating, as it evinces the wisdom
+and patience of the emperor, the incorruptible fidelity of a
+servant, the detestable falsehood of a brother, and the impudent
+boldness of a faction, ready to dare every infamous action, when
+permitted by the supreme ruler to exercise an authority beyond
+the limits of their condition, and contrary to the dictates of
+reason and true policy.</p>
+
+<p>The favourite Prince Sultan Churrum, together with the
+favourite Queen <i>Nourmahal</i>, aunt to his wife, Asaph Khan
+father-in-law to Churrum, and brother of <i>Nourmahal</i>, and
+<i>Etiman Dowlet</i>, father of <i>Asaph Khan</i> and
+<i>Nourmahal</i>, being the faction that now governed the
+emperor, and who believed their bad influence in danger of being
+overthrown if the prince <i>Cuserou</i> were allowed to live,
+determined to use every effort for his destruction, and to
+endeavour to get him into their power, that they might end his
+days by poison, for they knew that he was universally beloved
+among the nobles, and that his remaining in life and restoration
+to liberty must some day overthrow and punish their ambitious
+projects. To attain their infamous purposes, Nourmahal was
+instructed to practise upon the king's weakness, by false tears
+and bewitching blandishments, to insinuate that Sultan Cuserou
+was not in sufficiently safe custody, and that he still meditated
+aspiring projects, contrary to the authority and safety of the
+emperor, who listened to all her insinuations, yet refused to
+understand her, as she did not plainly speak out her meaning.</p>
+
+<p>As this plan failed, the prince, with Etiman Dowlet and Asaph
+Khan, took the opportunity of the emperor being drunk, to
+persuade him, as if for the greater safety and honour of Sultan
+Cuserou, that it were fitter he should be in the company of his
+brother Churrum, who would be more regardful of his safety and
+happiness than could be expected from an idolatrous rajput, to
+whose custody he had been committed by the emperor. They
+therefore humbly implored his majesty that Prince Cuserou might
+be confided to the care of his dear brother Churrum. This was
+granted by the intoxicated monarch, who immediately fell
+asleep.</p>
+
+<p>They now deemed their project successful, as having the royal
+authority; and, considering their own greatness, they believed no
+one would dare to dispute the warrant, or to refuse delivering
+the prince into their hands. Accordingly, Asaph Khan went that
+same night with a guard to the house of <i>Anna-Rah</i>, a rajput
+Rajah, or prince, to demand from, him, in the king's name and
+authority, the person of Sultan Cuserou, who had been confided to
+his custody by the king. Anna-Rah declared that he was the most
+humble slave of Prince Churrum, whose name Asaph Khan used upon
+this occasion; but having received charge of Prince Cuserou
+directly from the hands of the emperor, he would deliver him up
+to no other person. He therefore entreated that Prince Churrum
+would have patience till next morning, when he would discharge
+his duty to the king, whose pleasure, once known, he would
+implicitly obey. This answer overturned the whole contrivance. In
+the morning Anna-Rah went to the king, to whom he communicated
+the demand made upon him in the name of Prince Churrum, saying.
+That his majesty had given his son Cuserou to his charge,
+together with the command of 4000 horse, with all of whom he was
+ready to die at the imperial gate, rather than resign the prince
+into the hands of his enemies: But, if his majesty required, he
+was ready at all times to obey his commands. To this the king
+replied, "You have done honestly and faithfully, and have
+answered discretely. Continue your purpose, and take no notice of
+any orders. I will not seem to know any thing of this, neither do
+you speak of it any farther. Preserve your fidelity, and let us
+see how far they will prosecute this affair."</p>
+
+<p>Next day, finding the king silent on the subject, the prince
+and his faction took no notice of any thing, hoping the king
+might forget what had passed in his cups over night. I have
+communicated this incident, that you may beware of scattering
+your goods in this country, or of engaging your servants and
+stock too deeply; for the time will come when the whole of this
+empire will be in commotion, and it is not a few years war that
+will put a period to the inveterate enmity accumulated on all
+hands against a day of vengeance. Should Sultan Cuserou prevail
+in procuring his rightful inheritance, this empire will become a
+sanctuary for Christians, whom he loves and honours, being a
+patron of learning, and an encourager of true valour and just
+government, abhorring all covetousness, and despising the base
+custom of accepting bribes and presents, in use among his
+ancestors and the nobility of this empire. Should Sultan Churrum
+ascend the throne, it will be a great loss to us, as he is a
+rigid adherent to the superstition of Mahomet, a hater of all
+Christians, proud, subtle, false, and barbarously
+tyrannical.[206]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 206: From this paragraph it appears that
+the journal of Sir Thomas Roe was addressed to the Governor and
+Committees, or Directors of the East India
+Company.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The king returned from hunting on the night of the 13th
+October, and sent me a wild pig. An ambassador is daily expected
+here from Shah Abbas, king of Persia. This day I received advice
+of the arrival of four of our ships in safety at Swally roads,
+and at the same time received letters from England. The fleet,
+originally consisting of six ships, left England on the 9th
+March, 1616, losing company of the Rose about the North Cape, in
+foul weather. The other five arrived safely in Saldanha bay on
+the 12th June, where the Lion was waiting for a wind, homewards
+bound, her officers and people all in good health. After staying
+some time at the Cape without news of the missing ship, they
+dispatched the Swan for Bantam, and sailed on the 29th June with
+the other four ships for Surat. On this passage, on the 6th
+August, when in lat. 12&deg; 50' S. near the Comora islands, they
+got sight of a carrack of 1500 tons burden, and 600 men, being
+the admiral of a fleet for Goa. The Globe fetched her to
+windward, and after the usual salutations of the sea, the carrack
+commanded her to leeward, and seconded this order with five shots
+through her hull, to which the Globe replied with eighteen, and
+then luffed off. The admiral of the English got now up with all
+his ships, and demanded satisfaction for the injury, which was
+replied to with scorn. On this an engagement ensued, in which the
+commander, Benjamin Joseph, was soon slain, but his successor
+continued the battle. Towards evening the carrack ran herself
+ashore on the rocks of <i>Angazesia</i>. Our fleet came to anchor
+in the offing to wait the event, and sent a boat to offer fair
+terms of battle. But about midnight the carrack was set on fire,
+and continued to burn all next morning. The English sent their
+boats to give assistance, but could not approach, and they had
+reason to believe that not one man was saved.[207] The new
+viceroy of Goa was in this ship, by whose obstinacy the death of
+all the rest was occasioned. Our fleet came to anchor off Swally
+on the 24th September, 1616.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 207: It was afterwards known that some few
+escaped with life and poverty. A more particular account of this
+fight will be found in the subsequent journal of Alexander
+Child.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 14th October I waited on the emperor, to whom I imparted
+his majesty's salutations, which were courteously received, but
+he immediately began to enquire what presents had been sent to
+him. I mentioned our late fight and victory, at which he seemed
+to rejoice, and applauded the valour of our nation; but he
+immediately shifted the discourse, asking what our king had sent
+him. I answered, that he had sent many tokens of his love and
+affection; but knowing that his majesty was lord of the best
+portion of Asia, and the richest monarch of the East, my
+sovereign was satisfied the sending of rich gifts to his majesty
+were to cast pearls into the sea, their common mother and
+storehouse; but that my master, together with the warmest
+assurance of his love, had sent him many curiosities, which I
+hoped would give him entire satisfaction. He urged me to mention
+particulars, some of which I named. He asked me for French
+<i>muffe</i> or velvet, to which I answered, that all my letters
+were not arrived. He then enquired if there were any dogs. To
+which I answered, that some had been slain in the battle at sea,
+but that two were preserved for him, at which he seemed much
+rejoiced. He then said, if I could procure him one of our great
+horses, such as I had described, being a <i>roan</i> or Dutch
+horse, he would value it more than an additional kingdom. I
+answered, that I should use my best endeavours to satisfy his
+majesty, but much feared it could not be effected, owing to the
+length of the voyage. He said he would willingly give a lack of
+rupees for such a horse. I then desired he would be pleased to
+give an order for the transmission of the presents without being
+searched, and for the good usage of our people. He answered, that
+the port belonged to his son, but sent for him, and publicly gave
+orders for what I required; that the presents should not be
+searched, nor pay any custom, but should be sent up safe to me
+with all expedition, that I might distribute them at my
+discretion. He likewise commanded the prince to give orders for
+the good usage of our people, and that I should be satisfied in
+all my demands. This order did not extend to the grant of a fort,
+as Asaph Khan had absolutely refused to deliver in that clause.
+This charge was very round and hearty on the part of the king,
+and a great grace to me. The prince called Asaph Khan forwards in
+my presence, and promised, before his father and the whole court,
+to give me all reasonable satisfaction. All this was on the
+strength of the new presents.</p>
+
+<p>That same day I sent for the Portuguese jesuit who resided at
+court, and gave him an account of the engagement between our
+ships and the carrack, offering to make peace between our nation
+and the Portuguese upon equal terms. He promised to acquaint the
+viceroy of Goa with my offer, and so departed. The 15th I
+received accounts from Masulipatan that Captain Keeling had taken
+a Portuguese ship and two barks; one on the coast of Cochin,
+laden with tin, and the other freighted from Bengal, both of
+which were carried to Bantam. I was also informed that Sir Robert
+Shirley had been dismissed with disgrace from Goa, and was on his
+way overland to Masulipatan, to procure a passage; but am apt to
+believe this intelligence is untrue.</p>
+
+<p>The 16th, being with the prince's secretary about the dispatch
+of our affairs, he proposed to me, by his master's orders, to
+procure him two gunners from our fleet to serve him in the Deccan
+war, offering good pay and good usage. This I undertook to
+perform, knowing that indifferent artists might serve there.
+While at the prince's palace, Abdala Khan came to visit him, so
+magnificently attended, that I have not before seen the like. He
+was preceded by about twenty drums, and other martial music, on
+horseback, who made abundant noise. After them followed fifty
+persons bearing white flags, and two hundred well-mounted
+soldiers, all richly clothed in cloth of gold, velvet, and rich
+silks, who all entered the gate with him in regular array. Next
+his person were forty targeteers, in the richest liveries. After
+making his humble reverence, he presented a black Arabian horse,
+splendidly caparisoned, all his furniture being studded with
+flowers of enamelled gold, and set with small precious stones.
+According to custom, the prince returned a turban, a vest, and a
+girdle.</p>
+
+<p>Still persisting in his purpose of personally finishing the
+war in the Deccan, he would give no answer to the ambassadors
+from that country, but detained them till he should come to the
+frontiers. Being now about to depart, he and his party thought
+themselves not secure if Sultan Cuserou remained under the
+safeguard of Anna-Rah, lest, during the absence of Churrum, the
+king might be reconciled to Cuserou, by whose liberty all the
+hopes and power of their faction would be overthrown, in which
+case their ambition and the injuries they had done could hardly
+escape punishment. In this view they continued to urge the king
+to deliver Sultan Cuserou into the custody of Asaph Khan, as
+deputy on that occasion to Churrum, under pretence that this
+measure would intimidate Khan-Khannan and the Deccan princes,
+when they shall learn that Sultan Churrum is so favoured that the
+king has delivered his eldest son into his keeping, giving him as
+it were present possession of the kingdom, and the certain
+prospect of succession. Accordingly, on the 17th of October,
+Sultan Cuserou was delivered up as they desired, the soldiers of
+Anna-rah were discharged, and those of Asaph Khan placed over
+him, assisted by 200 horse belonging to the prince. The sister of
+Sultan Cuserou, and several other women in the seraglio, have put
+themselves in mourning, refuse to take their food, and openly
+exclaim against the dotage and cruelty of the king; declaring, if
+Cuserou should die, that an hundred of his kindred would devote
+themselves to the flames, in memory of the king's cruely to the
+worthiest of his sons.</p>
+
+<p>The king endeavoured to sooth them by fair words, protesting
+that he had no evil intentions towards his son, whom he promised
+speedily to deliver from captivity, and even sent his favourite
+Nourmahal to endeavour to appease the enraged and disconsolate
+ladies; but they refused to admit her visit, loading her with
+curses and threatnings. The common people universally condemn the
+king's conduct, saying, that he has not only delivered his son's
+life, but his own into the keeping of an ambitious prince and
+treacherous faction, and that Cuserou cannot perish without
+extreme scandal to his father, unless he amply revenge his death,
+for which cause the party will dispatch the king first, and his
+eldest son afterwards, that through their deaths the ambitious
+and unnatural Churrum may mount the throne. Every hour new
+rumours are spread of the deliverance of Cuserou, which are
+speedily contradicted; for he still remains in the tyger's den,
+refuses food, and requires that his father may take away his
+life, and not leave him to be a sport and prey to his inveterate
+enemies. The whole court is filled with rumours and secret
+whispers; the nobles are sad, and the people full of turmoil and
+noise, without any head, having no one to direct their rage to
+any specific object. The issue seems involved in dangers,
+especially for us, as, in regard to themselves, it matters not
+who wins. Although the elder prince have more right, and is of a
+more honourable character, he is still a Mahomedan, and can
+hardly be a better prince than his father, whose dispositions are
+good, yet so facile that he allows all to govern at their will,
+which is even worse than if he were a tyrant, for we had better
+suffer injuries from one prince than from a host of ministers and
+subordinate agents.</p>
+
+<p>The 19th of October <i>Mahomet Reza Beg</i>, the Persian
+ambassador, made his entry into the city with a great cavalcade,
+partly sent out by the king to meet him. There were at least an
+hundred elephants, with many musicians; but no man of quality
+went out on this occasion beyond the ordinary official receivers
+of strangers. His own train consisted of about fifty horse in
+splendid dresses of cloth of gold, their bows, quivers, and
+targets being richly adorned. Together with these he had about
+forty musqueteers, and about 200 ordinary <i>peons</i> and
+attendants on his passage. He was conducted to a room within the
+outer court of the palace, to rest himself till the evening, at
+which time I sent my secretary to the durbar, to give me an
+account of the ceremonial. On coming into the presence, and
+reaching the first rail, he made three <i>tessalims</i> and one
+<i>sizeda,</i> which is prostrating himself and knocking his head
+three times against the ground. On entering within the rail he
+did the same, and then presented the letter of his master,
+<i>Shabas</i>, [Shah Abbas.] This the king took with a slight
+inclination of the body, saying only, <i>How doth my brother</i>?
+without using any title of majesty. After some few words, the
+ambassador was placed in the seventh rank, close to the rail
+beside the door, and below many of the king's servants, which, in
+my opinion, was a very mean place for the ambassador of Persia;
+but he richly merited this degradation for doing that mean
+reverence to the dishonour of his master which all his
+predecessors had refused, and by which he gave much offence to
+many of his nation. It is reported that he had orders from Shah
+Abbas to give content in all things, and hence it is conjectured
+that he is sent to obtain some aid in money against the Turks, in
+which kind the court of Persia often finds liberal succour from
+the Mogul government. Others pretend that his object is to
+mediate a peace for the princes of the Deccan, whose protection
+Shah Abbas is said to have much at heart, being jealous of the
+extension of this empire.</p>
+
+<p>According to custom, the king gave him a handsome turban, a
+vest of cloth of gold, and a girdle, for which he again made
+three <i>tessalims</i> and a <i>sizeda</i>, or ground courtesy.
+The present he brought consisted of three times nine Persian and
+Arabian horses, this being among them a ceremonious number; nine
+very large and handsome mules; seven camels laden with velvet;
+two suits of European <i>Arras</i>, or tapestry, which I suppose
+was Venetian; two chests of Persian hangings; one rich cabinet;
+four muskets; five clocks; a camel's load of cloth of gold; eight
+silk carpets; two balasss rubies; twenty-one camel loads of wine
+made of grapes; fourteen camel loads of distilled sweet waters;
+seven of rose-water; seven daggers and five swords adorned with
+precious stones; seven Venetian mirrors, all so fair and rich
+that I was ashamed of the relation.</p>
+
+<p>These presents were not now delivered, but only a list of them
+in writing. His own equipage was rich, having nine led horses,
+their trappings all studded with gold and silver. His turban was
+encircled by a chain of pearls, rubies, and turquoises, having
+three pipes of gold, in which were three plumes of feathers.
+Having thus caused accurate observation to be made of his
+reception, and compared it with my own, I find it in nothing more
+gracious than my own, and in many things inferior, except only in
+being met without the town, which, owing to my sickness, was not
+demanded; neither did the king receive the letter of Shah Abbas
+with so much respect as that of the king, my master, whom he
+called the king of England, his brother, naming the Persian
+barely his brother, without addition. This observation was made
+by the jesuit, who understood the language.</p>
+
+<p>S.5. <i>Continuation of Occurrences at Court, till leaving
+Agimere, in November</i>, 1616.</p>
+
+<p>The 20th of October I received the prince's letter to send to
+Sarat, with orders for the governor of that city to sit along
+with the judge of the custom-house, to take care that no wrong
+was done to the English. The clause about sending up the presents
+sealed and unsearched to me, was so obscure and unintelligible,
+that it was susceptible of various constructions, which I
+believed was done designedly, that they might come into the hands
+of the prince, so as to become his own. I sent it back therefore
+to his secretary to be altered; and getting it returned still
+more intricate than at first, I went to the prince on the 21st,
+and desired to have that clause of his letter explained, at which
+he stuck a little, and I perceived he was as hollow as I had
+imagined. He plainly asked, How then he should have his presents,
+or see such curiosities as came up? and proposed to accompany me
+to where they were. I answered, that I could not do this till I
+had delivered my master's message and presents to the king, after
+which I should wait upon his highness with his presents, and that
+every rarity that came to me should be sent after him. He pressed
+me to pass my word for the performance of this, which I did, and
+then I had the letter for Surat made out to my content.</p>
+
+<p>At this interview the prince observed a white feather in my
+hat, and asked if I would give it to him. I answered, that I
+could not presume to offer any thing I had worn; but if he were
+pleased to command it, that or any thing else in my power was at
+his service. He then asked if I had any more; to which I
+answered, that I had three or four others of different colours.
+He desired to have them all, as he was to shew his horses and
+servants to the king within two days, and wanted some, being rare
+in these parts. I therefore promised to bring all I had next day,
+when his highness might take what pleased him.</p>
+
+<p>This day Abdalla Khan waited on the prince with a gallant
+equipage, himself and servants being anticly apparelled, yet
+soldier-like, according to their fashion. On this occasion he
+made a present to the prince of a handsome white horse, full of
+spirit and high mettled, the saddle and furniture all ornamented
+with enamelled gold. The prince returned him a plain sword with a
+leathern belt. Many other swords were brought before him, the
+hilts and scabbards being of silver, set with small stones,
+together with targets covered with gold velvets, some painted and
+embossed with gold and silver, all of which he distributed among
+his servants. Against this muster many saddles and other
+horse-furniture were provided, richly ornamented with gold and
+precious stones, intended for spare horses. His boots were
+embroidered, and every thing was of the highest magnificence, so
+that the expence is wonderful, and the wealth seen daily is
+inestimable. There is a report going, that, on the past night,
+six of the servants of Sultan Churrum went to murder Sultan
+Cuserou, but were refused the key by the porter who has charge of
+him. It is farther said that the queen mother is gone to the king
+to lay before him an account of this matter. But the truth of
+these things is hard to be found, and it is dangerous to ask
+questions.</p>
+
+<p>In the evening I went to the durbar to wait upon the king,
+where I met the Persian ambassador with the first muster of his
+presents. He seemed a jester or juggler, rather than a person of
+any gravity, continually skipping up and down, and acting all his
+words like a mimic player, so that the <i>Atachikanne</i> was
+converted as it were into a stage. He delivered all his presents
+with his own hand, which the king received with smiles and a
+chearful countenance, and many gracious words. His tongue was a
+great advantage to the Persian in delivering his own business,
+which he did with so much flattery and obsequiousness, that he
+pleased as much that way as by his gifts, constantly calling his
+majesty king and commander of the world, forgetting that his own
+master had a share of it; and on every little occasion of
+favourable acceptance, he made his <i>tessalims</i>. When all was
+delivered for that day, he prostrated himself on the ground,
+making <i>sizeda</i>, and knocking his head on the floor as if he
+would have entered it.</p>
+
+<p>The gifts this day were a handsome quiver for a bow and arrow,
+richly embroidered; all sorts of European fruits, artificially
+made, and laid on dishes; many folding purses, and other knacks,
+of leather, curiously wrought in coloured silks; shoes stitched
+and embroidered: great mirrors in richly inlaid frames; one
+square piece of velvet, highly embroidered with gold in panes,
+between which were Italian pictures wrought in the stuff, which
+he said were the king and queen of Venice, being, as I suppose,
+the hanging called Venetian tapestry, of which six were given,
+but only one shown. There were besides, many other curiosities of
+small value; after which came the three times nine horses and
+mules, the latter being very handsome, but the horses had lost
+their beauty and condition, as, except one or two, they were very
+unfit for being sent or accepted between princes. This done, the
+Persian returned, with many antic tricks, to his place, which was
+far inferior to mine, as I stood alone, and above all the
+subjects, though Asaph Khan at first wanted to put me from it,
+but I maintained it as my right, having been appointed me by the
+king. This was only the first act of the play presented by the
+Persian ambassador, which will not be finished in ten days.</p>
+
+<p>The 22d I went to the prince's secretary for the promised
+Surat letter; but his highness had changed his mind, and, loth to
+let the presents pass without ransacking them, refused to seal
+the letter. The secretary pretended they could not be allowed to
+pass without search, lest the merchants, under that pretence,
+might defraud the customs. I was offended, and going away; but
+the secretary prevailed on me to go with him to the prince, to
+whom I delivered some feathers, being two <i>plurides</i> and two
+birds of paradise, which he graciously accepted; and having made
+known my determination not to have the presents opened, or to be
+sent up by any others than my own servants, he at last yielded,
+and commanded his secretary to make out the dispatch in my own
+way.</p>
+
+<p>At night I went to the durbar to observe the Persian
+ambassador, whom I found standing in his place, but often removed
+and set lower, as the great men came in. The king once spoke to
+him, on which he played off his monkey tricks, but gave no
+present; only the king gave command that he should be feasted by
+the nobles. Most of the time was spent in seeing saddles and
+furniture, against the removal of the court, some of which the
+king presented to his followers, as the court was daily expected
+to move; the king's tents having been pitched four days. I sent
+that night to the secretary for my firmaun, but was put off with
+excuses.</p>
+
+<p>The 24th the king removed to Havar Gemal, and called for the
+Persian ambassador, who at night eat and drank before the king
+along with the nobles, as I had done on the birth-day. On this
+occasion the king gave him 20,000 rupees for his expences, for
+which he made innumerable <i>tessalims</i> and <i>sizedas</i>,
+which greatly pleased the king, being base yet profitable
+idolatry. As the prince was in attendance on the king, I could
+not get my business dispatched.</p>
+
+<p>The king returned to the city in the evening of the 25th,
+having been far gone in wine the night before. Some person,
+either by chance or from malice, spoke of the last merry night,
+when many of the nobles had drank wine, which none may do without
+leave. Having forgot his own order, the king demanded to know who
+gave? It was answered that it had been given by the <i>buxy</i>,
+as no one dared to say it was the king, seeing he doubted it. The
+custom is that the king drinks alone, though sometimes he will
+give command that the nobles shall drink also, which to refuse is
+likewise an offence, so every one who takes the cup of wine from
+the officer has his name written down, and makes <i>tessalim</i>,
+though perhaps the king's eyes are misty. The king called for the
+<i>buxy</i>, and asked if he gave the order, which he falsely
+denied; though he actually gave it as ordered, calling by name
+such as were to drink with the ambassador. The king then called
+for the list, and fined the delinquents, some 1000, some 2000,
+and others 3000 rupees. Some that were near his person, he caused
+to be whipped in his presence, receiving 130 stripes with a most
+terrible instrument of torture, having at the ends of four cords
+irons like spur-rowels, so that every stroke made four wounds.
+When they lay for dead, he commanded the standers-by to spurn
+them with their feet, and the door-keepers to break their staves
+upon them. Thus cruelly mangled and bruised, they were carried
+away, one of them dying on the spot. Some would have excused
+themselves, by blaming the ambassador; but the king said he had
+only ordered a cup or two to be given to him. Though drunkenness
+be a common and frequent vice in the king, it is yet strictly
+forbidden; and no one can enter the <i>guzelkhan</i> where the
+king sits, till the porters have smelt his breath, and if he have
+only tasted wine he is refused admittance; and if this reason of
+his absence be known, he shall scarcely escape the whip. When the
+king has taken offence at any one, even a father dares not speak
+for his son. Thus the king made all the company pay for the
+Persian ambassador's reward.</p>
+
+<p>The 26th, I went to <i>Sorocolla</i>, the prince's secretary,
+to get the promised firmaun; when he sent me a copy as fraudulent
+and ambiguous as the former, which I refused to accept. I drew up
+the clause I so much disliked myself, which I sent back, and was
+promised to have it sealed next day.</p>
+
+<p>The day of the king's removal being at hand, I sent on the
+28th to Asaph Khan, to have a warrant for carriages, as our
+merchants had sought all over the town for carriages to convey
+their goods to Agra, and could not procure any. As I was enrolled
+by the king, I received an order for twenty camels, four carts,
+and two coaches, to be paid for at the king's price; of which I
+appointed for the use of the factors as many as they needed.</p>
+
+<p>At this time the following incident took place, being either a
+wonderful instance of baseness in this great monarch, or a trial
+of my disposition. The king had condemned several thieves to
+death, among whom were some boys, and there was no way to save
+their lives, except by selling them as slaves. On this occasion,
+the king commanded Asaph Khan to offer two of them to me for
+money, which he directed to be done by the <i>cutwall</i>, or
+marshal. He came accordingly and made the offer to my
+interpreter, who answered without my knowledge, that the
+Christians kept no slaves, and, as I had already set free those
+the king had given me, it was in vain to propose the matter to
+me. I afterwards suspected this were done to try me whether I
+would give a little money to save the lives of two children, or,
+if it even were in earnest, I thought there was no great loss in
+doing a good deed. So, to try the scope of this affair, I
+directed my interpreter to inform Asaph Khan, that being made
+acquainted with the offer, and the answer my interpreter had
+given, I had reprehended him for presuming in any case to answer
+for me; and that, if any money were to be given to save the lives
+of the children, either to those whom they had robbed, or to
+redeem them from the law, I was ready to give it, both out of
+respect for the king's command, and for charity; but I would not
+buy them as slaves, only meaning to pay their ransom, and set
+them free; and, if he would let me know the king's pleasure, that
+I might give them their lives and liberties without offence, I
+was very willing to do it.</p>
+
+<p>Asaph Khan agreed to accept the money, making many
+commendations of my extraordinary goodness, and said I might
+dispose of the boys as I thought fit, desiring me to send the
+money to the <i>cutwall</i>, yet made no offer of informing the
+king, which was one chief purpose of my liberality. I had no
+inclination to be cheated, yet resolved to pay the money in such
+a way that the king should learn I had more mercy than he, and
+that a Christian valued the life of a Mahomedan beyond money. I
+sent therefore a factor and my interpreter to the <i>cutwall</i>,
+to acquaint him with my communication to Asaph Khan, and that, if
+he informed the king of my offer to redeem the prisoners for
+charity, and his majesty consented to give them their pardon and
+liberty, I was ready to send the money; but that I would not buy
+them as slaves, even for an hour. Thus I put them to the test as
+to their base offer. This sum did not exceed ten pounds, a poor
+affair for which to impose upon a stranger, or to be gained by so
+great a king. The <i>cutwall</i> answered that he would enquire
+the king's pleasure, and let me know the result. Some would have
+me believe, that this was, a signal favour of the king, chusing
+out any great man to do this good and honourable work of
+redeeming prisoners, as the money is given in satisfaction to the
+person robbed, and that those who are thus appointed to ransom
+them, make <i>sizeda</i> to the king, as for a mighty benefit.
+But I see no honour in a king thus to impose upon a stranger, to
+whom he gives neither maintenance nor liberality. I went to the
+durbar, to see if the king would himself speak to me, that I
+might declare my own offer. The <i>cutwall</i> made many motions,
+and brought in his executioner, who received some commands, but I
+understood them not.</p>
+
+<p>I this day sent my secretary with a message to the Persian
+ambassador, to say I would visit him, if he gave his word to
+return my visit. He sent me for answer, with much respect, that
+it was not the custom of the country for ambassadors to visit
+each, other without leave of the king, which he would ask; and
+which given, he would thankfully accept my visit, and repay it
+with all manner of pleasure.</p>
+
+<p>On the 1st November, Sultan Churrum took his leave and went to
+his tents. On this occasion the king sat in his durbar at noon,
+when the prince passed his establishment in review before his
+father, consisting of about 600 elephants richly caparisoned, and
+about 10,000 horse, all splendidly arrayed, many of his followers
+being clad in cloth of gold, and their turbans adorned with
+herons plumes. The prince himself was in a dress of cloth of
+silver, all over embroidered, and splendidly decorated with
+pearls and diamonds, shining like the firmament in a clear night.
+The king embraced and kissed him with much affection, presenting
+him with a rich sword, the hilt and scabbard all of gold set with
+precious stones, valued at 100,000 rupees, a dagger valued at
+40,000, together with an elephant, and a horse, the furniture of
+both magnificently adorned with gold and jewels. At his
+departure, he gave him a coach, made in imitation of that sent by
+the king my master to the emperor, and commanded the English
+coachman to drive the prince to the tents. Churrum went
+accordingly into the coach, sitting in the middle thereof, all
+the sides being open; and was attended by all his chief nobles
+a-foot, all the way to the camp, which was about four miles.
+Being followed by a vast concourse of people, he scattered all
+the way among them handfuls of quarter rupees. At one time he
+reached his hand to the coachman, and put about 100 rupees into
+his hat.</p>
+
+<p>On the 2d, the king removed, with his women and all the court,
+to the tents, about three miles from town. I went that morning to
+attend upon him at the <i>Jarruco</i> window of the palace, and
+went up to the scaffold under the window, being desirous to see
+this exhibition. Two eunuchs stood upon tressels, having long
+poles headed with feathers, with which they fanned him. On this
+occasion, he dispensed many favours, and received many presents.
+What he gave was let down by a silk cord, rolled on a turning
+instrument; and what he received was drawn up in the same manner,
+by a venerable, fat, and deformed old matron, all hung round with
+<i>gymbals</i> like an image. Two of his principal wives were at
+a window on one side, whose curiosity led them to break holes in
+a lattice of roods that hung before the window, to gaze on me. At
+first I only saw their fingers; and afterwards, applying their
+faces to the holes, I could at times see an eye, and at length
+could discern their entire countenances. They were indifferently
+fair, having their black hair smoothed up from their foreheads;
+and they were so adorned with pearls and diamonds, that I might
+have seen them without the help of any other light. On my looking
+at them, they retired very merry, and, as I supposed, laughing at
+me.</p>
+
+<p>After some time, the king departed from the window, and we all
+went to the durbar, to wait his coming out of the inner
+apartments. He came not long after, and remained in the durbar
+for about half an hour, till his ladies had mounted their
+elephants, which were in all about fifty, all richly caparisoned,
+especially three, which had turrets or <i>howders</i> of gold,
+with grates of gold wire for the ladies to see through, and rich
+canopies over head of cloth of silver. The king then descended
+the stairs, amid such acclamations of <i>health to the king</i>,
+as would have drowned the noise of cannon. At the foot of the
+stairs, where I contrived to be near him, a person brought to him
+a large carp, and another presented a dish of some white stuff
+like starch, into which the king dipped his finger, with which he
+touched the fish, and then rubbed it on his forehead. This
+ceremony was said to presage good fortune. Then came another
+officer, who buckled on his sword and buckler, all set with large
+diamonds and rubies. Another hung on his quiver with thirty
+arrows, and his bow-case, being that which had been presented by
+the Persian ambassador. On his head, the king wore a rich turban,
+with a plume of heron's crests, not many but long: On one side
+hung a rich unset ruby as large as a walnut; on the other side a
+diamond of equal size; and in the middle an emerald much larger,
+shaped like a heart. His sash was wreathed about with a chain of
+great pearls, rubies, and diamonds, drilled. A triple chain of
+excellent pearls, the largest I had ever seen, hung round his
+neck. He had armlets above his elbows, richly set with diamonds;
+and three rows of diamonds round each wrist. His hands were bare,
+having a rich ring on almost every finger; and a pair of English
+gloves were stuck into his girdle. His coat, without sleeves, was
+of cloth of gold, over a fine robe as thin as lawn. On his feet
+he wore buskins embroidered with pearls, the toes being sharp and
+turned up.</p>
+
+<p>Thus richly accoutred, he went into the coach, which waited
+for him under the care of his new English servant, who was
+dressed as gaudily as any player, and more so, and had trained
+four horses for the draught, which were trapped and harnessed all
+in velvet and gold. This was the first coach he had ever been in,
+made in imitation of that sent from England, and so like it that
+I only knew the difference by the cover, which was of gold velvet
+of Persia. Having seated himself at one end, two eunuchs attended
+at each side, carrying small golden maces set all over with
+rubies, to which horse-tails were fastened, for driving away
+flies. Before him went drums, bad trumpets, and loud music; with
+many canopies, parasols, and other strange ensigns of majesty,
+all of cloth of gold, and adorned with rubies. Nine spare horses
+were led before him, some having their furniture garnished with
+rubies, some with pearls, and others with diamonds, while some
+had only plain gold studs. Next behind the coach came three
+palanquins, the carriages and feet of one being plated with gold,
+set with pearls, and a fringe of great pearls in strings a foot
+long, the border being set all round with rubies and emeralds.
+Beside this, a man on foot carried a stool of gold, set with
+precious stones. The other two palanquins were covered and lined
+with cloth of gold.</p>
+
+<p>Next followed the English coach, newly covered and richly
+trimmed, which he had given to his favourite queen, Nourmahal,
+who sat in the inside. After this came a coach, made after the
+fashion of the country, which I thought seemed out of
+countenance, in which were his younger sons. This was followed by
+about twenty spare royal elephants, all for the king's own use,
+all so splendidly adorned with precious stones and rich
+furniture, that they outshone the sun. Each elephant had several
+flags and streamers of cloth of silver, gilded sattin, or rich
+silk. His noblemen accompanied him on foot, which I did likewise
+to the gate, and then left him. His women, who accompanied him on
+elephants, as before mentioned, seemed like so many parroquitos
+in cages, and followed about half a mile in the rear of his
+coach. On coming to the door of the house in which his eldest son
+was kept prisoner, he caused the coach to stop, and sent for
+prince Cuserou; who immediately came and made reverence, having a
+sword and buckler in his hands, and his beard grown to his
+middle, in sign of disfavour. The king now commanded his son to
+mount one of the spare elephants in the royal train, so that he
+rode next his father, to the great joy and applause of the
+multitude, who were now filled with new hopes; and on this
+occasion, the king gave him 1000 rupees to throw among the
+people; his gaoler, Asaph Khan, and all the ministers, being
+still attendant on foot.</p>
+
+<p>To avoid the press and other inconveniences, I took horse and
+crossed out of the <i>leskar</i>, getting before the king, and
+then waited for him till he came near his tents, to which he
+passed all the way from the town between a guard of turreted
+elephants, having each on the four corners of their howdars a
+banner of yellow taffety, and a <i>sling</i>[208] mounted in
+front, carrying a bullet as big as a tennis-ball. There were
+about three hundred elephants armed in this manner, each having a
+gunner; besides about six hundred other elephants of honour, that
+preceded or followed the king, all covered with velvet or cloth
+of gold, and all carrying two or three gilded banners. Many men
+afoot ran before the king, carrying skins of water with which to
+sprinkle the road to prevent dust from annoying him; and no one
+was allowed to approach the coach on horseback by two
+furlongs.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 208: The sling in the text appears to have
+been a <i>slung</i> musquetoon, or small cannon, mounted in that
+manner to avoid recoil.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having gone before a-horseback, as before mentioned, I
+hastened to the tents, to await the king's arrival. The royal
+encampment was walled round, half a mile in circuit, in form of a
+fortress, with high screens or curtains of coarse stuff; somewhat
+like Arras hangings, red on the outside, the inside being divided
+into panes or compartments, with a variety of figures. This
+inclosure had a handsome gateway, and the circuit was formed into
+various coins and bulwarks, as it were; the posts which supported
+the curtains being all surmounted with brass tops. The throng was
+very great, and I wished to have gone into the enclosure, but no
+one was allowed, even the greatest of the land having to sit down
+at the gate. At length I was admitted, but the Persian ambassador
+and all the nobles were refused. At this gate, and for the first
+time, I was saluted by the Persian ambassador as I passed, by a
+silent <i>salam</i>.</p>
+
+<p>In the midst of this enclosure, there stood a throne of
+mother-of-pearl, borne aloft on two pillars, under cover of a
+high tent or pavilion, the pole of which was headed by a golden
+knob, the roof being of cloth of gold, and the ground covered by
+carpets. When the king came near, several noblemen were admitted,
+together with the Persian ambassador; all of us making a kind of
+lane, the ambassador being on one side, and I on the other. As
+the king came in, he cast his eye on me, whereupon I made him a
+reverence, to which he answered by bowing and laying his hand on
+his breast. Turning to the other side, he nodded to the Persian.
+I followed close at his heels till he ascended the throne, every
+one calling out, <i>joy, health, and good fortune</i>. The king
+then called for water, with which he washed his hands, and then
+retired into an interior tent, to join his women, who had entered
+by another gate to their own quarters; there being about thirty
+divisions with tents within the royal inclosure. His son I saw
+not. All the noblemen now retired to their quarters, which were
+all very handsome, some having their tents green, others white,
+and others again of mixed colours, all handsome in form and
+arrangement, and all as orderly inclosed as their houses in the
+city, so that the whole composed the most curious and magnificent
+sight I had ever beheld. The whole vale seemed like a magnificent
+city, no mean tents or baggage being allowed to mix among these
+splendid pavilions. I was utterly unprovided with carriages or
+tent, and ashamed of my situation, for indeed five years of my
+allowances would not have enabled me to take the field any thing
+like the others; every one having a double set of pavilions, one
+of which goes before to the next station, where it is set up a
+day before the king removes. On this account, I was obliged to
+return to my poor house in the town.</p>
+
+<p>On the 5th November I rode about five miles, to the tents of
+the prince, Sultan Churrum. I made him my compliments of leave
+taking, wishing him all prosperity and success; but he ordered me
+to return and take my leave two days afterwards, as I had moved
+him on some business, respecting debts due to the English, which
+he promised to examine and dispatch. He sat in state, in the same
+greatness and magnificence I have mentioned of his father; his
+throne being plated all over with silver, inlaid with gold
+flowers, having a square canopy over head, borne up by four
+pillars covered with silver; his arms, such as his sword,
+buckler, bows, arrows, and lance, being on a table before his
+throne. I observed him curiously, now that he was in absolute
+authority, and took especial notice of his actions and behaviour.
+He had just received two letters, which he read standing, before
+he ascended his throne. I never saw any one having so settled a
+countenance, or maintain a so constant gravity of deportment,
+never once smiling, or shewing by his looks any respect or
+distinction of persons, but evincing an extreme pride and
+thorough contempt for all around him. Yet I could perceive that
+he was every now and then assailed by some inward trouble, and a
+kind of distraction and brokenness in his thoughts, as he often
+answered suitors in a disjointed manner, as if surprised, or not
+hearing what they had said. If I can judge, he has left his heart
+among his father's women, with whom he is allowed to converse.
+The day before, Noormahal went to visit him in the English coach;
+and, on taking leave of him, she presented him with a robe, all
+embroidered with diamonds, rubies, and pearls; and, if I do not
+mistake, she carried away with her all his attentions from other
+business.</p>
+
+<p>The 6th I had a letter from Mr Brown at Ahmedabad, giving an
+account of a fray begun by the Portuguese. Five of them assailed
+an English boy at Cambay, whose arms they took from him. On
+notice of this, John Brown and James Bickeford went to rescue the
+boy, and were set upon by seven Portuguese, one of whom fired a
+pistol and wounded Brown in the hand. They defended themselves
+bravely and honourably like Englishmen, killed one, wounded some
+others, and chaced the rest up and down the town like cowards, to
+the great shame of such villains, and the reputation of our
+nation. To revenge this, the Portuguese came ashore in
+considerable numbers from their frigates, no more English being
+in the town except the three already mentioned. The governor,
+being informed of this affair, sent the cutwall with a guard to
+our house, and ordered the water port to be shut, expelling the
+Portuguese from the town, and commanding them, on pain of
+chastisement, not to meddle with the English, whom he dismissed
+in safety from Cambay, and they are now returned to
+Ahmedabad.</p>
+
+<p>The 9th, the prince being to remove, sent one of his guards
+for me in haste. I was not prepared for going, but the messenger
+pressed me, urging that his master waited for me, and he had
+orders not to return without me. He added, that the whole court
+talked of the prince's favour for me, and it was reported he had
+asked leave from the king for me to accompany him to the war, and
+had promised to use me so well that I should be forced to
+acknowledge his favour to our nation. I accordingly took horse
+after dinner; but on my arrival, I found the prince already under
+march. I met a Dutchman, the prince's jeweller, who confirmed
+every thing the soldier had said, and added so much more in the
+same strain, that I disbelieved the whole. I sent word to the
+prince of my arrival, when he returned for answer, That I should
+go on before to the tents, and wait his arrival, when he would
+speak with me. It was night when he came. He sat a short while,
+only giving me a look, and arose to retire among his women. As he
+passed, he sent a servant to desire me to wait a little, till he
+came out to hold his guzalcan, when he should take leave of
+me.</p>
+
+<p>He came out in half an hour, but I could not get any one to
+remind him of me, and he was fallen to play, and either forgot
+me, or proposed to play me a state trick. I then told the
+waiters, that I had been sent for by the prince, and only waited
+his orders, for which I had too long waited, as it was late, and
+I must return to my house; and therefore, if the prince had any
+business for me, I desired it might be sent after me, as I
+scorned to be so used. Before I could mount, messengers came
+running after me, and called me back to wait upon the prince.
+Going in, I found him earnestly engaged at cards, but he excused
+himself of forgetfulness, blaming the officers formally for not
+reminding him, and shewed more than ordinary attention, calling
+me to see his cards, and asking me many questions. I expected he
+would have spoken of my going along with him; but, finding no
+such discourse, I told him I had come only in obedience to his
+commands, and to take my leave, and craved his pardon for being
+in haste, as I had to return to Agimere, having no convenience
+for staying all night in camp. He answered, that he had sent to
+speak with me before his departure, and that I should be
+presently dispatched. He then sent in an eunuch into the interior
+apartments, and several of his officers came to me smiling, who
+said that the prince meant to give me a magnificent present, and
+if I feared to ride late, I should have a guard of ten horsemen
+to see me safe home, making as much of the matter as if I had
+been to get his best chain of pearls. By and by came a cloak of
+cloth of gold, which the prince had once or twice worn, which he
+caused to be put on me, and for which I made my reverence very
+unwillingly; yet I urged some business, and having an answer,
+took my leave. It is here reputed the highest favour, to give one
+a garment that has been worn by a prince, or that has merely been
+laid on their shoulders. The cloak now given me might have
+answered well for an actor who had to represent the character of
+his ancestor, Tamerlane, on the stage, but was to me of no
+importance. On my way out, I was followed by his porters and
+waiters, begging in a most shameless manner, so that I half paid
+the value of the cloak before I could get out from among
+them.</p>
+
+<p>On the 10th November, almost every body had removed from the
+town of Agimere, so that I was left nearly alone, and could
+neither get carts nor camels for my removal, notwithstanding my
+warrant. The Persian ambassador was in a similar predicament, but
+complained, and was soon redressed. I therefore sent to court,
+and on the 11th I received two warrants, for being supplied with
+carts and camels at the king's price: but it was not easy to
+procure either, as the great men had soldiers in every direction,
+to take up all for their use; and indeed it was wonderful, how
+two leskars or camps, belonging to the king and prince, could
+both remove at once.</p>
+
+<p>The 16th, an order was given by the king to set fire to the
+whole leskar at Agimere, that the people might be compelled to
+follow, which was duly executed. I was left almost destitute; and
+the Persian ambassador, who had fought, chid, brawled, and
+complained, without any remedy, was in the same state with me. We
+sent messages of condolence to each other; and, by his example, I
+resolved to buy, as many were disposed to sell, who would not
+hire at the king's price, and I calculated that by purchasing I
+should almost save hire, though carts were dear, as the hire of
+three months would have exhausted the price of purchase.
+Necessity enforced me to remove, as the town was burnt and
+utterly desolate, and I was in great danger from thieves, as the
+soldiers came from camp and robbed during the night. So desolate
+was the town, that I could not even procure bread. Yet I sent
+again to court, to make one trial more, before I purchased.</p>
+
+<p>The 17th I received accounts from Goa, which were said to be
+true, that Don Emanuel de Meneses, with about 300 of those who
+were saved ashore out of the Admiral, had arrived at Goa in a
+very poor condition, having been robbed and plundered by the
+inhabitants of Angazesia, who had also slain many. On the 24th
+October, not one of the Lisbon fleet had reached Goa, to their
+great wonder and disappointment. The Mosambique galleon was
+fought with by the Hollanders that lately went from Surat, and
+had cruised off Goa to meet the expected ships. This galleon was
+very rich in gold and other commodities, but she escaped.</p>
+
+<p>I received an order for camels and carriages, but was
+continually delayed and disappointed; and being afraid to remain,
+I bought two carts, and was continually promised camels, yet none
+appeared. Mr Bidulph remained in the prince's leskar to receive
+money. The leskar of the king was still only twelve cosses from
+Agimere. The 18th, the Portuguese Jesuit took leave of me, being
+under the necessity of purchasing a carriage, although he had an
+order for one out of the king's store; but every one was
+distressed, owing to the scarcity. Having nothing material to
+say, respecting my own affairs, during my solitude at Agimere, I
+shall here digress, to mention the state of Sultan Cuserou, of
+whose new delivery into the hands of his enemies, the hearts and
+mouths of all men were now full.</p>
+
+<p>Though the king had so far condescended to satisfy his proud
+son Churrum at his departure, as again to place Cuserou in
+confinement, yet it seems that he did not mean to wink at any
+injurious behaviour to his eldest son: And, partly to render his
+situation the more secure, in the custody of Asaph Khan, and
+partly to satisfy the murmurs of the people, who feared some
+treachery against him, he took occasion to declare his mind
+respecting him in the public durbar. Asaph Khan had been to visit
+his new prisoner, and in his behaviour towards him, did not treat
+him with the respect due to a prince, but rudely pressed into his
+presence against his will, and in a disrespectful manner. Some
+are of opinion he did this purposely to pick a quarrel, knowing
+the bravery of the prince, who would not suffer an indignity,
+meaning to tempt him to draw his sword, or to use some violence,
+which the guard might suddenly revenge; or that he might have
+opportunity to represent to the king, that the prince had
+attempted to kill his keeper, on purpose to escape. But the
+prince acted with patient prudence, and only procured a friend to
+acquaint the king with the rude behaviour of Asaph Khan.
+Accordingly, one day at the durbar, the king called Asaph Khan
+before him, and asked when he had seen his charge? To which he
+answered, he had seen him two days before. The king then asked,
+What he had then done to him? He said he had only visited him.
+But the king pressed to know what reverence and fashion he had
+carried towards the prince. Asaph Khan then saw that the king
+knew what had passed. He therefore said, That he had gone to wait
+upon the prince, in all reverence and affection, to offer his
+service, but that the prince refused him admittance into the
+apartment; wherefore, as he was entrusted with his safety, he
+thought it both necessary for him to see the prince, and
+discourteous in him to deny, and had therefore pressed in. On
+this, the king quickly asked, "And when you were in, what did you
+say and do?" Asaph Khan stood confounded, and confessed that he
+did not make any reverence. Whereupon, the king told him roundly,
+"That he would make his proud heart know the prince as his eldest
+and beloved heir, and his prince and lord; and, if he ever heard
+again of the smallest disrespect or want of duty in his behaviour
+towards the prince, he would command his son to trample him under
+his feet." He added, that he loved his son Prince Churrum, yet
+did not entrust his eldest son Cuserou among them for his ruin
+and destruction.</p>
+
+<p>The 20th I received a new warrant for carriages, which
+procured me eight camels, but such poor ones as were quite unable
+to suffice for our baggage, and I was therefore under the
+necessity of purchasing the rest. The 22d I removed to my tents.
+The 23d and 24th I waited for the merchants; and on the latter of
+these days I had a letter from Ispahan, saying that my letters
+had been dispatched for Aleppo, and that we were expected in
+Persia, but on condition that we seconded the wishes of Shah
+Abbas, by diverting the sale of his silks from Turkey. My letters
+added, that the general of the Turks lay with a mighty army at
+<i>Argerone</i>, [Arzerom,] six days march short of Tauris, as if
+uncertain whether to attack that city, or to enter Gurgestan and
+Gilan, the provinces in which silk is produced, so as to win that
+by conquest which was refused in the way of trade. To guard
+against both attempts, Shah Abbas was encamped at <i>Salmas</i>,
+whence he could march either way as might be required. But, it
+was farther said, if the armies did not come to battle in two
+months, the approach of winter, and the wants attendant on such
+numerous bodies of men, would constrain both to quit the field.
+It is thought the Persians will not adventure a battle, though
+180,000 strong, as, being light, and unencumbered with cannon or
+baggage, they are fitted for rapid marches, and can harass the
+Turkish army with perpetual skirmishes and assaults on all sides,
+hovering round about, and wasting them, without hazard to
+themselves.</p>
+
+<p>S.6. <i>Sir Thomas Roe follows the Progress of the Court, and
+describes the King's Leskar, and some Places through which he
+passed; with instances of the King's Superstition and
+Drunkenness, and some curious Incidents respecting a
+Present</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The 25th of November I removed four cosses from Agimere, but
+waited during the remainder of that month, for the arrival of a
+caravan, going from Agra to Surat, by which I might transmit my
+papers in safety. The caravan departed from Agimere at midnight
+of the 30th November: and on the 1st December I went six cosses
+to Ramsor, where the king had left the naked bodies of an hundred
+men, put to death for robbery. The 2d I travelled seven c. I
+rested the 3d, because of rain. The 4th I went five c. and this
+day I overtook a camel, laden with 300 heads, sent from Candahar
+to the king, the people to whom these heads had belonged having
+been in rebellion. Travelling five c. on the 5th, and four c. on
+the 6th, I that day overtook the king at a walled town called
+<i>Todah</i>, in the best and most populous country I had seen in
+India since I landed. The district was quite level, having a
+fertile soil, abounding in corn, cotton, and cattle, and the
+villages were so numerous and near together, as hardly to exceed
+a coss from each other in any direction. This town was the best
+built of any I had seen in India, many of the houses being two
+stories high, and most of them good enough for decent
+shop-keepers, all covered with tiles. It had been the residence
+of a Rajput rajah, before the conquests of Akbar Shah, and stood
+at the foot of a great and strong rock, about which were many
+excellent works of hewn stone, well cut, with many tanks, arched
+over with well-turned vaults, and large and deep descents to
+them. Near it was a beautiful grove, two miles long and a quarter
+of a mile broad, all planted with mangoes, tamarinds, and other
+fruit-trees, divided by shady walks, and interspersed with little
+temples, and idol altars, with many fountains, wells, and
+summer-houses of carved stone curiously arched, so that I must
+confess a poor banished Englishman might have been content to
+dwell here. But this observation may serve universally for the
+whole of this country, that ruin and devastation operates every
+where; for, since the property of all has become vested in the
+king, no person takes care of any thing, so that in every place
+the spoil and devastations of war appear, and no where is any
+thing repaired.</p>
+
+<p>On the 7th the king only removed from one side of Todah to the
+other. The 8th I was at the guzalcan, but found the king so
+nearly drunk, that he became entirely so in half an hour, so that
+I could not have any business with him. The 9th I took a view of
+the royal <i>leskar</i>, or camp, which is one of the greatest
+wonders I had ever seen, and chiefly as I saw it finished and set
+up in less than four hours, all except the tents of some of the
+great men, who have double suits. It could not well be less in
+circuit than twenty English miles, the extent in some directions
+being three cosses, including the out-skirts. In the middle,
+where the streets are orderly and the tents joined, there are all
+sorts of shops, so regularly disposed, that all persons know
+where to go for any thing they want. Every man of quality, and
+every trade, is regularly appointed how far they are to be from
+the king's tents, in what direction, and what ground they shall
+occupy, which continues ever the same without alteration. All
+this may equal almost any town in Europe for size. But no person
+must approach on any side within a musket shot of the
+<i>atoskanha</i>, or royal quarter, which is so strictly observed
+that no one is ever admitted but by name. The evening durbar is
+omitted, the time being spent by the king in hunting or hawking
+rather, on tanks, by means of boats, in which he takes great
+delight, his barges being moved along with the leskar on carts.
+On these occasions he sits by the sides of the tanks, to view the
+sport, these tanks being often a mile or two over. The king is
+seen every morning at the <i>Jaruco</i>, formerly mentioned; but
+business or speaking to him at this time is prohibited; all
+business being conducted at night in the <i>guzalcan</i>, and
+there the opportunity is often missed, his majesty being so
+frequently overcome by drowsiness, proceeding from
+drunkenness.</p>
+
+<p>There was now a whisper about the court of a new affinity
+between Sultan Cuserou and Asaph Khan, and great hope was
+entertained of the prince recovering his liberty. I will find an
+opportunity to discourse of this hereafter, because the
+particulars are worthy of being preserved, as the wisdom and
+goodness of the king were manifest above the malice of others:
+And, in this affair, Noormahal made good the observation, that
+women have always great influence in court factions, and she
+shewed that they are not incapable of managing business. This
+history will discover a noble prince, an excellent wife, a
+faithful counsellor, a crafty step-mother, an ambitious son, a
+cunning favourite; all reconciled by a patient king, whose heart
+was not understood by any of them all. But this will require a
+separate place,[209] as not fit to be mingled with matters of
+ordinary business. At this time the English complained of being
+ill used at Surat; but their drunkenness, and riotous behaviour
+proceeding from that cause, were so notorious, that it was rather
+wonderful they were not all put to death.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 209: This story does not however appear,
+the journal of Sir Thomas Roe being left imperfect, both in the
+Pilgrims and in the Collection of Churchill.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 16th of December I visited the king, who was just returned
+from his sports, having all his game laid out before him, both
+fish and fowl. He desired me to take my choice, and then
+distributed all the rest among his nobles. I found him sitting on
+his throne, having a beggar at his feet, a poor silly old man,
+all in rags and ashes, attended on by a young one. The country
+abounds in these professed poor and holy men, who are held in
+great reverence, and who, in voluntary sufferings and mortified
+chastisements of their bodies, exceed all the boasted
+performances of heretics and idolaters in all ages and countries.
+With this miserable wretch, who was cloathed in rags, crowned
+with feathers, and covered, with filth, his majesty conversed for
+about an hour, with such kindness, as shewed a humility not
+common among kings. All this time the beggar sat before the king,
+which is not even permitted to his son. The beggar gave the king
+as a present, a cake made by himself of coarse grain, burnt on
+the coals, and all foul with ashes; which yet the king accepted,
+broke off a piece and eat it, which a dainty person would hardly
+have done. He then wrapt up the rest in a clout, and put it into
+the poor man's bosom, and sending for 100 rupees, he poured them
+into the beggar's lap, gathering up with his own hands any that
+fell past, and giving them to him. When his collation or banquet
+was brought in, whatsoever he took to eat, he gave half of to the
+beggar. Rising, after many humiliations and charities, and the
+old wretch not being nimble, he took him up in his arms, though a
+dainty person would have scrupled to touch him, and embraced him
+three times, laying his hand on his heart and calling him father,
+and so left him, all of us greatly admiring such virtue in a
+heathen prince. This I mention with emulation and sorrow;
+wishing, as we have the true vine, that we should not produce
+bastard grapes, or that this zeal in an unbeliever were guided by
+the true light of the gospel.</p>
+
+<p>The 23d, being about three cosses short of a city called
+<i>Rantepoor</i>, [Rantampoor,] where it was supposed the king
+would rest, and consult what way to take in his farther progress,
+he suddenly turned off towards <i>Mundu</i>, but without
+declaring his purpose. I am of opinion, he took this way for fear
+of the plague at Agra, rather than from any purpose of being near
+the army; for we only marched every other day no more than four
+cosses, and with such a train of baggage as was almost impossible
+to be kept in any degree of order.</p>
+
+<p>The 26th we passed through woods and over mountains, torn with
+bushes and tired by the incommodiousness of an almost impassable
+way, in which many camels perished, and many persons, wearied of
+these difficulties, went away to Agra, and all complained. In
+this laborious day's march, I lost my tents and carts, but by
+midnight I again fell in with them. The king now rested two days,
+as the leskar could not again recover its order in less time;
+many of the king's women, and thousands of camels, carts, and
+coaches, being left in the woody mountains, where they could
+neither procure food nor water. The king himself got through upon
+a small elephant, which beast can climb up rocks, and get through
+such difficult passes, that no horse or other animal I have seen
+can follow. The 29th we encamped beside the river <i>Chambet</i>,
+[Chumbull.]</p>
+
+<p>The first of January, 1617, I complained to Asaph Khan of the
+injuries offered to the English at Surat, though I was at the
+same time much perplexed by various relations, giving me a bad
+account of the disorderly and outrageous behaviour of my
+countrymen. Asaph Khan advised me not to carry my complaint to
+the king, which would incense the prince; but desired me to ask
+leave of his majesty to go to visit Sultan Churrum, with a letter
+from him recommending the dispatch of my business, and good usage
+to our nation; so that, carrying a present to the prince, I
+should please both, and succeed in my business. This was the same
+plan I had already formed, and therefore pleased me the better;
+more especially as the king now certainly designed to go forwards
+to Mundu, which is only eight days journey from Burhanpoor, where
+the prince was; and I thought I might as well ride over to him,
+as remain idle in the fields. At noon this day I visited the
+Persian ambassador, being the first time we had leisure for this
+ceremony, and was received by him with much respectful civility.
+After compliments on both sides were over, I proposed to him the
+settlement of trade in his master's dominions, which he engaged
+to promote as much as lay in his power. He gave me a banquet of
+bad fruit, but being a good fellow, it went off well, and he
+outdid in courtesy every thing I had met with in India. He railed
+loudly against the court, and the king's officers and council,
+using most unusual liberty. He offered to be my interpreter,
+desiring that I might pitch my tents beside his, and he would
+impart whatever I thought proper to the king. When about to part,
+after long discourse, he pressed me to accept a horse with
+handsome furniture, which was brought to the door, but I refused.
+He then sent for nine pieces of Persian silks, and nine bottles
+of wine, that I might not depart without some testimony of his
+love, but these also I refused to accept, with many protestations
+of affectionate regard. I observed him looking earnestly at my
+sword, which I offered to give him; but, following my example, he
+refused.</p>
+
+<p>At night I visited the king, who spent his time sadly with an
+old man, after reading long letters, and few spoke with him. At
+his rising, he presented to this person, who was a cripple from
+age, 5000 rupees, and took his leave of him with many embraces. I
+here again met the Persian ambassador, who, after some
+compliments, repenting that he had refused my sword, and having a
+liking to it, now asked it from me, saying, that such liberty
+among friends was reckoned good manners in his country. We
+continued to remove four or five c. every other day, and came on
+the 7th to the goodly river <i>Shind</i>. The 18th, the king
+passed through between two mountains, the road having been cut
+through the woods, but with so much trouble and difficulty, and
+so much encumbrance to the baggage, that it was left behind,
+without provisions for man and beast. This day likewise I lost my
+tents and baggage, but found them again at midnight, having been
+obliged till then to take up my lodging under a tree. This part
+of the country is much infested by thieves, and is hardly under
+obedience to government, except so far as it is kept under by
+force. It belongs to a rajah, who has no desire to see the king.
+The exactor complained, and some few of the people that fled
+being taken, were chained by the neck and brought before the
+king, all the rest having fled into the mountains. At night the
+king caused the town near which he was encamped to be set on
+fire, appointing a new governor, with orders to re-build and
+new-people the town, and to reduce the district under more
+regular government and better civilization. He left a party of
+horse with the new governor, to enable him to perform this
+service.</p>
+
+<p>On the 20th, the people who had fled to the mountains, being
+enraged at the burning of their town, set upon a number of
+stragglers who had been left behind, killing many of them, and
+plundering the rest. The 22d, having no accounts of the presents
+I expected from Surat, I went at night to visit the king, to
+observe how he might receive me. I found him seated in an unusual
+manner, so that I knew not what place to occupy, and not willing
+to mix among the great men, as was offered me, and doubting
+whether I might go into the apartment where the king was, which
+was cut down in the bank of a river, I went to the brink and
+stood alone. There were none near the king, except <i>Etiman
+Dowlet</i> his father-in-law, Asaph Khan, and three or four
+others. The king observed me, and having allowed me to stay a
+while, he called me in with a gracious smile, and pointed with
+his hand for me to stand beside him, a favour so unusual, that it
+pleased and honoured me, and of which I soon experienced the good
+effects, in the behaviour of the great men of the court. He led
+me to talk with him, and when I called for an interpreter, he
+refused it, pressing me to use such Persian words as I had
+learnt. Our discourse, in consequence, had not much sense or
+coherence, yet he was pleased with it, and shewed his approbation
+in a very courteous manner.</p>
+
+<p>On the 24th of January, news came to court, that the Deccaners
+were not to be frightened out of their dominions, as had been
+pretended by Asaph Khan and Noormahal, on purpose to persuade the
+king into this expedition. For they had sent off all their
+baggage and other impediments into the interior of their country,
+and lay upon the frontiers with 50,000 horse, resolved to fight
+in defence of their dominions; while Sultan Churrum had hitherto
+advanced no farther than Mundu, afraid both of the enemy and Khan
+Khana. The king's councellors now changed their advice, declaring
+that they expected the Deccaners would have been so alarmed by
+his majesty's passage over the last hills, as to have submitted
+at the terror of his approach; and as they now found the
+contrary, they advised the king to convert his journey into a
+hunting excursion, and to turn his course towards Agra, as the
+Deccaners were not worthy of exposing his sacred person. He
+answered, that this consideration came now too late, as his
+honour was engaged by having advanced so far, and he was resolved
+to prosecute their former advice and his own purpose, whatever
+might be the hazard. He now daily dispatched fresh troops to
+reinforce the army of his son Churrum, partly from his own
+followers, and the rest commanded from different governments.
+These reinforcements were said to be 30,000 horse, but the actual
+musters were not so numerous. Water was sometimes very scarce in
+camp, and provisions grew daily scarcer and dearer, the part of
+the country in which we now were not being well reduced to good
+government. Not feeling these distresses, the king took no care
+to have them alleviated; and as his khans, or great men, had
+their provisions brought after them, they neglected to inform the
+king. The whole burden fell upon strangers, the soldiers, and the
+poor followers of the camp, who were worst able to endure the
+hardships. Every alternate day, as formerly, the king removed his
+camp, three, four, or five cosses; yet on the 29th of January, we
+were still sixty cosses short of Mundu.</p>
+
+<p>On the 3d of February, having left the road of the leskar for
+my own ease, and for the benefit of the shade, and while resting
+me under a tree, Sultan Cuserou came upon me suddenly, seeking
+the same conveniences. This is the king's eldest son, formerly
+mentioned as in confinement by the practices of his brother
+Churrum and his faction, and taken out of their hands by the king
+at his leaving Agimere. He was now riding on an elephant, with no
+great guard or attendance. His people called out to me to give
+place to the prince, which I did, yet I staid to look at him, and
+he called on me to approach; and, after asking some familiar and
+civil questions, I departed. His person is comely, his
+countenance chearful, and his beard hung down as low as his
+middle. This I noticed, by his questions, that he seemed quite
+ignorant of all that passed at court, insomuch that he had never
+heard of any English, or of me their ambassador. The 4th and 5th
+we continued our march without halting, and on the 6th at night,
+we came to a little tower, newly repaired, where the king pitched
+his tent in a pleasant place, on the banks of the river
+<i>Sepra</i>, one coss short of the city of <i>Ugen</i>,
+[Oojain,] the chief city of Malwa. This place, called
+<i>Callenda</i>, was anciently a seat of the Gentoo kings of
+Mundu, one of whom was there drowned while drunk. He had once
+before fallen into the river, and was taken out by the hair of
+his head, by a person who dived for him. When he came to himself,
+it was told him how he had been saved from drowning, in hopes of
+having the slave rewarded. He called his deliverer before him,
+and asking how he dared to be so bold as to touch his sovereign's
+head, caused his hands to be cut off. Not long afterwards, while
+sitting drunk beside his wife, and no other person near, he had
+the same misfortune to tumble into the water, at which time she
+might easily have saved him, but did not. Being afterwards asked
+why she had not, she said she knew not but she likewise might
+have had her hands cut off for her reward.</p>
+
+<p>The 10th we removed one coss beyond Oojain; and on the 11th,
+the king rode to that city, to speak with a dervise, or holy man,
+who dwelt upon a hill, and was reported to be 300 years old, but
+I did not think this miracle worth my examination. At noon this
+day, I received news by a foot-post, that the prince,
+notwithstanding all the firmauns and commands of his father, had
+intercepted the presents and goods on their way up, to satisfy
+his own base and greedy inclinations; and no entreaty, gifts, or
+persuasions, that Mr Terry could offer, who had the charge of
+them, could prevail on him to part with them, and he compelled
+them by force to follow him towards Burhanpoor. Yet he forbore to
+break open the packages, but pressed the English to consent,
+which they refused by my orders, and he thought to win them to
+his purpose by vexatious usage. For it is the custom in this
+country, for the great men to see all merchant goods before even
+the king, that they may chuse first; but I resolved, if possible,
+to break that bad custom, in our behalf.</p>
+
+<p>That he might satisfy his own cupidity, the prince sent up a
+courier to the king, before I could get intelligence, giving
+notice of having detained the goods, but without mentioning that
+they were presents, and requested his authority to have them
+opened, that he might purchase what he fancied. This faithless
+proceeding of the prince, contrary to his promise and his own
+written orders, satisfied me that I was justifiable in the eyes
+of all, if I carried my complaint directly to the king, having
+used every possible means to procure favour from the prince, and
+having already suffered beyond the patience of a free-born man;
+so that I must now be blameless by using rougher means, having
+already fruitlessly proved all smoother expedients. I therefore
+resolved to appeal for justice, by complaint to the king in
+person, yet as calmly and warily as possible. I feared to go to
+Asaph Khan on this occasion, lest he might oppose my purpose, yet
+thought my neglect of him might be displeasing; wherefore, if I
+sent to acquaint him that I proposed to visit the king at the
+guzalcan, I dreaded he might suspect my purpose, if he had learnt
+the injury I meant to complain of. For all which reasons, I
+considered how best to avoid being counteracted.</p>
+
+<p>The visit of the king to the dervise, just mentioned, gave me
+a good opportunity, and my new linguist, who was a Greek I had
+sent for from Agimere, being ready, I rode out to meet the king,
+who was returning from the holy man on his elephant. On his
+majesty's approach, I alighted, and made a sign that I wished to
+speak to the king, who immediately turned his monster towards me,
+and prevented me, by saying, "My son has taken your goods and my
+presents; be not therefore sad, for he shall not touch nor open a
+lock or a seal; for at night I shall send him an order to set
+them free." He made other gracious speeches, intimating that he
+knew I had come brim-full of complaints, and that he had spoken
+first to ease me. At this time, seeing that the king was on the
+road, I could do no more; but at night, without farther seeking
+to Asaph Khan, I went to the guzalcan, determined to proceed with
+my complaints, to get back my goods, and to seek redress for the
+charges, troubles, and abuses at Surat, and all our other
+grievances.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as I came in, the king called my interpreter before
+him, and, by means of his own, intimated that he had already
+dispatched his orders so effectually, that not even to the value
+of a hair should be abstracted from our goods. In reply, I stated
+that the injuries, charges, and abuses we suffered from the
+prince's officers, were so numerous and intolerable as could not
+be endured, and that I craved effectual redress. To this it was
+answered, that I must apply to his son for all past matters; but
+I could obtain nothing except fair words, through the
+intermediation of Asaph Khan, so that I was forced to seem
+satisfied, and to seek opportunities as might be for redress,
+when this false friend and pretended advocate was out of the way.
+The good king fell at length to dispute about the laws of Moses,
+Jesus, and Mahomet; and, being in drink, turned lovingly to me,
+saying, "As I am a king, you shall be all welcome, Christians and
+Jews as well as Mahometans, for I meddle not with their faiths;
+they all come in love, and I will protect them from wrong while
+they are under my dominion, and no one shall be allowed to molest
+or oppress them." This he frequently repeated, but being
+extremely drunk, he fell a-weeping, and into various passions,
+and so kept us till midnight.</p>
+
+<p>Any one may easily conceive how much I was now disconcerted by
+the unjustifiable conduct of the factors, who had detained the
+presents for four months at Surat, and now sent them to fall into
+the hands of the prince, who was then within two days march of
+Burhanpoor, by which my trouble was infinitely increased. But
+having now began, and suspecting that the prince was already
+sufficiently exasperated upon matters of small importance, I
+thought I might as well lose his favour upon great as small
+matters, so I resolved to try what I could do with the king; and,
+while I waited the result, I sent back the messenger to Mr Terry,
+who was with the presents, desiring him to remain firm, waiting
+for the king's ultimate orders, which I should send him soon.</p>
+
+<p>During this interval, the king had caused the chests to be
+privately brought to him, and had opened them, which came to my
+knowledge, on which I determined to express my dissatisfaction at
+this usage, and having obtained an audience, I made my complaint.
+He received me with much mean flattery, more unworthy even of his
+high rank than the action he had done, which I suppose he did to
+appease me, as seeing by my countenance that I was highly
+dissatisfied. He began by telling me that he had found some
+things that pleased him much, particularly two embroidered
+cushions, or sweet-bags, a folding glass cabinet, and the mastiff
+dogs, and desired me not to be discontented, for whatever I was
+not disposed to give him, he would return. I answered, that most
+of these things were intended for his majesty, but that it was a
+great indignity to the king my master thus to seize upon what was
+meant to be presented, and not permitted to come through my
+hands, to whom they were sent in the first place. I added, that
+besides what were destined for his majesty, some of these things
+were intended for Noormahal, some for the prince, and the rest to
+remain in my hands, to serve as occasion might require, to
+bespeak his majesty's favour to protect us from injuries daily
+offered to us by strangers, and some for my friends, or my own
+use, while the rest belonged to the English merchants, with which
+I had no concern. He desired me not to be grieved that he had
+thus got his own choice, as he had not patience to forbear from
+seeing them, in which he did me no wrong, as he believed I wished
+him to be served first, and that he would make satisfaction to
+the king my master, to whom he would justify me. As for the
+prince and Noormahal, they were all one with himself. As to
+bringing any presents hereafter to procure his favour, I might be
+easy on that score, as it was merely a needless ceremony, for I
+should be always welcome to come to him empty-handed, and he
+would hear me, as it was not my fault, and he would see me
+righted at all times. That he would return me some things to
+enable me to go to his son, and he would pay the merchants for
+such things as belonged to them. He concluded by desiring me not
+to be angry with the freedom he had taken, as he meant well. As I
+made no reply, he pressed to know if I were pleased, to which I
+answered, that his majesty's satisfaction must always please
+me.</p>
+
+<p>He then began to enumerate all the things he had taken,
+beginning with the mastiffs, embroidered sweet bags, the case of
+combs and razors, and so forth; saying, with a smile, "You would
+not have me to restore these things, and I am delighted with
+them?" To which I answered in the negative. He then mentioned two
+glass-cases, as mean and ordinary, asking me for whom they were
+intended. I answered, that one was intended for his majesty, and
+the other for Noormahal. "Why then," said he, "you will not ask
+me for that I have, but will be satisfied with one?" To this I
+was under the necessity of yielding. He next asked for whom
+certain hats were intended, which his women liked? I answered,
+that three were for his majesty, and one for myself. He then
+said, I surely would not take back those meant for him, and that
+he would return mine if I needed it; and would not bestow it upon
+him. To this likewise I had to agree. He then asked, whose were
+the pictures? I answered, that they were sent me to use as
+occasion offered, and to dispose of as my business might require.
+So he called for these, and caused them to be opened, examining
+me about the women, and other little questions, asking my
+judgment and opinions concerning them. The third was a picture of
+Venus leading a satyr by the nose. Commanding my interpreter not
+to tell me what he said on this subject, he shewed it about among
+his nobles, asking them to expound its moral or interpretation,
+pointing out the satyr's horns and black skin, and many other
+particulars. Every one answered according to his fancy; but,
+liking none of their expositions, he reserved his own opinion to
+himself, and commanding that all these notions should be
+concealed from me, he ordered the interpreter to ask me what it
+meant. I answered, that it was an invention of the painter, to
+shew his art, and that it represented some poetical fable, which
+was all I could say, having never seen it before. He then called
+upon Mr Terry to give his opinion, who could not; on which the
+king asked him, why he brought up with him an invention in which
+he was ignorant? On this I interposed, saying Mr Terry was a
+preacher, and did not meddle with such matters, neither had he
+any charge of them, having only come along with them.</p>
+
+<p>I have related this anecdote of the picture for the
+instruction of the gentlemen of the East India Company, and for
+him who may succeed me, to be very careful that what they send
+into this country may not be susceptible of an evil
+interpretation; for the king and people are pregnant with, and
+full of, scrupulosity and jealousy. For, though the king
+concealed his opinion, yet I had ground, from what he did say, to
+believe he thought the picture was meant in derision of the
+Asiatics, whom he conceived to be represented by the satyr, as
+being of their complexion; and that Venus leading him by the nose
+denoted the great influence exercised by the women of that
+country over the men. He was satisfied that I had never seen the
+picture, and therefore pressed me no farther about its
+explanation; yet he shewed no discontent, but rolled up the
+pictures, saying he would accept even the satyr as a present from
+me. As for the saddle, and some other trifles, he said he would
+have them sent to his son, for whom they were fit, as a present
+from me, to whom he would write so effectually, pursuant to his
+promise, that I should stand in no need of a solicitor near him
+in any of my affairs. He added many compliments, excuses,
+professions, and protestations, such as might proceed either from
+a very noble or very base mind.</p>
+
+<p>He then enquired what was meant by the figures of the beasts,
+and whether they had been sent for me to give him? I had
+understood that they were very mean and ill-shaped images, from
+which the varnish had come off, and were ill-formed lumps of
+wood. I was really ashamed of them, and told him this was no
+fault of mine, those who had seized them being guilty of the
+affront, in conveying them to his majesty, for whom they were not
+intended, having only been sent to shew the forms of certain
+animals in our country. He quickly replied, "Did you think in
+England that a horse or a bull were strange to me?" I answered,
+that I thought not upon such mean matters, the sender being an
+ordinary man, who had sent these things out of good-will to me,
+and that I could not know what might have been his thoughts. The
+king then said he would keep them all; but that he desired I
+would procure for him a horse of the largest size, a male and
+female mastiff, some tall Irish greyhounds, and such other
+hunting-dogs as we had in England, adding, on the word of a king,
+if I would procure him these, he would fully recompense me, and
+grant every thing I desired. I answered, that I would engage to
+have them sent by the next ships, but could not answer for their
+lives in so long a voyage, but should direct their skins and
+bones to be preserved if they died, to convince his majesty I had
+obeyed his commands. Upon this he bowed to me repeatedly, laid
+his hand on his heart, and shewed me so much kindness, favour,
+and familiarity, that all present declared they had never seen
+him use the like to any man before.</p>
+
+<p>This was all my recompence, except that he often desired me to
+be merry, as he would royally requite the wrongs he had done me,
+and send me home to my country with grace and rewards befitting a
+gentleman. Thus, seeing nothing returned of all that was seized
+but words, I requested his majesty would order the velvets and
+silks to be delivered back, as these were merchant goods sent up
+among mine by the command of his majesty, by which they had
+escaped the rapacity of the prince's officers. He then desired Mr
+Bidulph to be called for, that he might agree with and pay him
+for their value. I then delivered in a memorial, which I had
+ready written, containing my demands for privileges and justice,
+as otherwise I should return home a mere useless person, and
+under disgrace with my sovereign. I pressed likewise to have
+justice in regard to a debt due by Zulphecar Khan, lately
+deceased. He replied, that he would take such order with his son,
+in regard to our affairs at Surat, that I should have no cause to
+complain, and would give such orders for other places as should
+in every respect shew his regard for me; and, that I might return
+to my master with honour, he would send by me a rich and worthy
+present, together with his letters certifying my good behaviour,
+and giving me much praise. He likewise commanded me to name what
+I thought would be most acceptable. To this I answered, that I
+could not crave, as that was not our custom, neither was it
+consistent with the honour of my sovereign; but I had no doubt
+that whatever he was pleased to send would be acceptable from so
+potent a monarch, who was already so much loved by my master. He
+then said, that I thought he only asked in jest to please me, as
+he saw I was still discontented; but he assured me he was my
+friend, and would prove so in the end, and swore by his head that
+he spoke sincerely in regard to the presents, and that therefore
+I must not refuse to name some for his satisfaction.</p>
+
+<p>This earnestness forced me to say, that, if his majesty
+pleased, I thought some large Persian carpets might be fittest,
+as my master did not look for gifts of cost and value. To this he
+answered, that he would provide them of all sorts and sizes, and
+should add to them what else he thought fit, that my master might
+know how great was his respect. Having venison of various kinds
+before him, he gave me half a stag, which he said he had himself
+killed, and that I should see the rest bestowed on his ladies.
+This was presently cut up into four pound pieces, and was sent
+into the interior apartments by his young son and two women in
+their bare hands, just as if he had been doling out such small
+fragments to the poor by way of charity. I had now as abundant
+grace and fair words as might have flattered me into conceit, but
+our injuries were not to be compensated by words, though I was
+glad of these as a colour for dissembling my discontent. In
+conclusion, he repeated his expressions of desire to satisfy me,
+saying, he hoped I went away contented. To which I answered, that
+his majesty's favour was sufficient to make me any amends. He
+then said that he had only one farther question to ask: "How
+comes it, now that I have seen your presents for two years, that
+your master, before you came, sent by a mean man, a merchant,
+five times as many and more curious toys, and having sent you his
+ambassador, with a commission and his letters mentioning
+presents, that you should have brought so little, so mean, and so
+much inferior to the other? I acknowledge you as an ambassador,
+and have found you a gentleman in your behaviour, but am amazed
+you are so slightly provided."</p>
+
+<p>I was about to reply, when he cut me short, saying, "I know
+that all this is not your king's fault nor yours, but I shall
+shew you that I esteem you more than those who employed you. At
+your return, I shall send you home with honour and reward,
+according to your quality and merit, not regarding what you have
+brought me, and shall send a present to your lord and master,
+befitting a king to send. Only this will I require from you, and
+do not expect it from the merchants, that you will take with you
+patterns of the following articles: a quiver and bow-case, a coat
+of mail, a cushion to rest my head upon in our fashion, and a
+pair of boots, which you shall cause to be embroidered for me in
+England in the richest manner, as I know they can do these things
+in your country better than any I have seen. These things I shall
+expect from you, and if you send them, I promise you, on the word
+of a king, that you shall be no loser." This I most chearfully
+undertook, and he commanded Asaph Khan to send me the patterns.
+He then asked if I had any grape wine, which I said I had. He
+desired to have some of it to taste next night, and if he liked
+it, he would be obliged to me to let him have it, otherwise I
+might make merry with it myself. Thus the whole of this night
+being spent in discourse only with me, he rose up, and I
+departed.</p>
+
+<p>On the 3d of March we arrived at Mundu, into which the king
+was expected to make his entry; but the day for that was not yet
+fixed, as he waited till the astrologers had determined upon an
+auspicious hour for the ceremony, so that we had all to remain
+without, waiting for the good hour. The 6th I entered Mundu, and
+my servants, whom I had sent before to seek out for quarters, had
+taken possession of a fair court, well walled round, in which was
+a goodly temple and a tomb. Some of the king's servants had
+already taken up their quarters there, but I got possession and
+kept it, being the best within the whole circuit of Mundu, though
+two miles from the king's house; yet it was so nearly sufficient,
+that a very small charge was sufficient to make it defensible
+against the rains, and save me 1000 rupees. The air was
+wholesome, and the prospect pleasant, as it was on the very edge
+of the hill.</p>
+
+<p>I went at night of the 11th to meet the king, but was told,
+that, on the news of a lion[210] having killed some horses, the
+king had gone out to hunt for that animal. I thus had leisure to
+look out for water; for such was the unaccountable want of
+foresight, that we were brought, with a multitude of people and
+beasts, to a hill on which was no water, so that the men and
+cattle were ready to perish. What little was to be found in
+certain wells and tanks had been taken possession of by the great
+men, and kept by force, so that I could not procure any. The poor
+forsook the city; many more were commanded away by proclamation,
+and all horses or other cattle were ordered to be removed. Thus,
+those who were in hopes of rest, were enforced to seek out new
+dwelling places, and had to go away some two, three, and even
+four cosses, to the extreme trouble and inconvenience of all, and
+occasioning provisions to rise greatly in price. For my own part,
+I was greatly troubled how to determine. My house was very good,
+and, though far from markets, it was still less inconvenient to
+submit to that trouble than to remain in the fields without house
+or shelter, where I must have gone to encamp, but then I was in
+want of water. Riding about with this view, I came to a great
+tank or pool, which was guarded for a khan, to whom the king had
+granted its use. I sent to acquaint him of my needs, and asked
+leave to draw water at his tank, when he was pleased to allow me
+to have four loads daily. This satisfied me in some sort; and, by
+selling off some of the goods that had been sent me from Surat,
+and putting away some of my cattle, I had hope of being able to
+live; for which purpose I sent two of my carriages, with their
+servants and cattle, to remain out of town, and thus relieved
+myself from this public calamity. There was not a misery or
+inconvenience that I was not subjected to, in thus following the
+court of the Mogul, owing to the want of good management in the
+government, and the intemperature of the climate.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 210: It is almost certain that the lions of
+these early voyages and travels, at least in India, were
+tigers.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.7. <i>A New-Year's Gift.--Suspicions entertained of the
+English.--Trade of Dabul.--Dissatisfaction of the Persian
+Ambassador.--English Ships of War in the Indian Seas</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On the 12th March, 1617, I carried, as a new-year's gift to
+the king, a pair of very handsome knives belonging to myself, and
+six glasses belonging to the Company, making an apology for the
+smallness of the present, which was well received, and the king
+used me very graciously, saying, that whatever came from my hands
+he looked on as a sufficient present, and as a proof of my love,
+and that it was now his part to give me. He gave orders to an
+officer to send for Mr Bidulph, to pay him his demands to his
+satisfaction, and all others who were indebted to us were ordered
+by name to pay what they owed to the Company. The king said
+likewise, that he would write to the prince in our favour. But I
+found him unwilling to part with any of our things, of which the
+best sweet bag then lay before him. I replied, that I was very
+unwilling to go empty-handed. The king then commanded that I
+should come up and stand beside him on the steps of the throne,
+where stood on one side the Persian ambassador, and the old king
+of Candahar on the other, with whom I ranked. As soon as I had
+taken my place, the king asked me for a knife, which I sent him
+next day. The king then called the Persian to stand before him,
+to whom he gave a jewel and a young elephant, for which he
+kneeled and saluted the ground with his head.</p>
+
+<p>On this occasion the same throne and furniture were used as
+last year, the upper end of the hall being adorned with the
+pictures of the king my master, the queen, the princess
+Elizabeth, Sir Thomas Smith, and some others, with two pieces of
+beautiful Persian tapestry hung below them. The throne was of
+gold, bespangled all over with rubies, emeralds, and turquoises.
+On one side, on a little stage or scaffold, was a company of
+women-singers. I this day sent a dispatch to Surat, giving my
+advice respecting the trade of Persia, and of what had passed on
+that subject with the ambassador, and sent some remembrance to
+the governor, Ibrahim Khan. I had a letter from him in return,
+stating that the English nation had been wronged without his
+knowledge; but as his authority was now augmented by Prince
+Churrum, we might rest confident in his protection, as while he
+lived and held authority at that place, we should never more be
+liable to abuses, but should be allowed to reside and trade in
+perfect freedom and security.</p>
+
+<p>The 13th I sent as a present to Asaph Khan a richly
+embroidered pair of gloves, and a fair wrought night-cap of my
+own. He received the cap, but returned the gloves, as useless in
+this country, and requested to have some Alicant wine, which I
+sent him next night. Aganor, whose diligence now gave me great
+hope of success in my desires, sent his Banian secretary to
+inform me that he had orders for the dispatch, of the merchant
+goods, and that his man should attend Mr Bidulph to finish that
+business; that the patterns should be sent me, and that the Mogul
+meant to give me a robe, and money to bear my charges in going to
+wait upon the prince. I returned for answer, that I had no need
+of a garment or of money, but begged his majesty would graciously
+consider the injuries of which I had complained, and of which I
+had already given an account in writing, and that he would please
+to give me a letter to the prince, with some of our own presents
+which were intended for him, or else state my excuse in writing,
+that his majesty had intercepted and appropriated the whole. This
+was all I wished, as instead of gifts from the king, I only
+required justice.</p>
+
+<p>The 21st I discovered that the Mogul suspected that I meant to
+steal out of the country. These doubts had been insinuated by the
+prince, either as a cover for his own guilt, or out of fear, or
+perhaps as a cunning pretence to cover his own designs. He had
+informed the king that the English meant next year to surprise
+Surat, and retain possession of that place. Indeed, their own
+folly gave some colour to the idea; as lately, upon one of the
+usual brawls at that place, our people had landed 200
+musqueteers, with whom they marched towards Surat; and, during
+their march, some of the jovial tars gave out to all they met
+that they meant to take the place. This was a most absurd
+bravado, for a handful of men to march twelve miles against a
+walled town that was able to oppose them with 1000 horse, and as
+many foot armed with match-locks, and having besides to pass a
+river which could be defended by a handful of men against an
+army. It gave, however, just occasion both of scorn and offence;
+and the prince, perhaps to serve some ends of his own, took
+occasion from it to strengthen the fortifications of the town and
+castle, and to send down ordnance for their defence; perhaps a
+good precaution to have an open door to flee to in case his
+brother should live, and have the means of checking his ambitious
+views. But this information concurring with my discontents here,
+and some free language on that occasion, and my pressing demands
+to be allowed to go to Burhanpoor, together with flying reports
+that we had taken Goa, and were preparing a great fleet in
+England, raised suspicions in the mind of the king, though he
+concealed them as well as he could from me. By my explanations,
+however, I satisfied the king thoroughly, though I was by no
+means so, having been fed only with words, and knew well that our
+residence was only permitted out of fear. The complaints I was
+enforced to make at this court against the misconduct of its
+officers towards us, greatly offended all the great men, as being
+in some sort their own case; for they all live by farming the
+several governments, in which they all practise every kind of
+tyranny against the natives under their jurisdiction, oppressing
+them with continual exactions, and are exceedingly averse from
+any way being opened by which the king may be informed of their
+infamous proceedings. They grind the people under their
+government, to extract money from them, often hanging men up by
+the heels to make them confess that they are rich, or to ransom
+themselves from faults merely imputed with a view to fleece them.
+Thus my complaints against exaction and injustice made me hated
+of all about the court, as an informer.</p>
+
+<p>The 25th I received a letter from Captain Pepwell, then in
+Dabul roads, stating,--That, according to advice, he had stopped
+the junk bound for Mokha; but having well weighed the caution I
+had given him respecting the correspondence between that prince
+and Masulipatam, where the Solomon then was, he had freed her
+without spoil. By this courtesy he had procured such good
+entertainment as is seldom had in the Indies, being allowed free
+trade, with a promise of taking 300 pieces of broad-cloth yearly,
+and had sold a good quantity of lead for ready money, besides
+some ordnance. This part of his procedure I do not like much, as
+tending to arm the Indians, and the Portuguese, their friends,
+against the Moguls. If these courtesies proceeded not from the
+junk being still under his command, they give good prospect of an
+yearly sale at that port. However, the freeing of this junk gives
+me good assurance that Captain Pepwell will do nothing
+prejudicial to the Company, and will deliver himself honestly
+from the jealousies entertained of him at Dabul. He signifies his
+intention of proceeding to Calicut, and if that factory be not
+likely to succeed, he proposes transferring it to Dabul.</p>
+
+<p>The 27th, by a foot-post from Masulipatam, I received advice
+that the Solomon had put to sea, and that the Hosiander was
+arrived from Bantam, with the bad news of the loss of the Hector
+and Concord, while careening in the roads of Jacatra, in the
+island of Java; but with the good news that the Dragon, Clove,
+and Defence were laden homewards from Bantam. I took the
+opportunity of this post to convey a letter to the governor of
+Dabul respecting the overture made by him of trade to that port;
+and, though I had no great opinion of the place, I would neither
+have it entirely neglected, nor would I encourage the next fleet
+to proceed there, unless on better assurance than a forced
+friendship, and offers made when their junk was in our power. I
+signified the causes of our having stopped their goods formerly
+for refusing trade to Sir Henry Middleton; but finding him now
+better disposed, and willing to establish a league of trade and
+amity, and to take a good quantity of our cloth, I required to
+know if he were hearty in these motions; and willing to act as a
+man of honour; as a pledge of which, I requested him to procure
+for us a firmaun from his sovereign, with such privileges as were
+fit for merchants, with a royal engagement under his seal to
+fulfil all the friendly offers made to us by this officer;
+desiring this firmaun might be transmitted to me with all
+expedition, to my present residence at the Mogul court. By this,
+I said, I should be satisfied that they meant to treat us with
+good faith, and on its reception, I would undertake, on the
+behalf of the king of England, that a firm and lasting peace
+should be established with his master, whose subjects should have
+free passage on the seas without molestation from our ships; and
+should send yearly a ship to trade at his port, or, if desired,
+should establish a resident factory there. I have no doubt,
+either through fear or favour, that some good sales may be made
+there yearly, but I doubt of being able to procure any valuable
+investments.</p>
+
+<p>In this I proceed cautiously, as all men ought on such
+occasions, not with too eager apparent desire, nor swallowing
+hungrily any offered conditions, without due assurances. Strict
+care in the first settling is of the utmost importance, as you
+can never mend your first establishment, and may often impair it.
+Every man succeeds best at first, when new and a stranger; for,
+by the natural levity of these barbarians, they are fond of
+changes, and grow weary of things in their usual train. I have
+committed this dispatch to the care of Mr Bangham, whom I have
+directed to make diligent enquiry into the commodities,
+advantages, and inconveniences attendant on our projected trade,
+and to make himself acquainted with the humours and affections of
+the Deccaners towards us.</p>
+
+<p>On the 30th of April the Persian ambassador sent to excuse
+himself for going away without paying his respects to me,
+alleging illness, but his messenger said he was not so sick as he
+pretended; but, finding no success in his negociations with the
+king, he had taken his leave, and made a present of thirty-five
+horses at his departure. In return, the king gave him 3000
+rupees, which he took in great scorn. Upon which, to justify
+himself, the king caused two lists to be drawn up, in one of
+which all the presents made by the ambassador were enumerated,
+with their values, meanly rated, much lower than their real
+worth; and, in the other, all the gifts the king had presented to
+him since his arrival,--as slaves, melons, pine-apples,
+plantains, hawks, plumes of feathers, the elephant, and not even
+forgetting the drink he had received, all charged at extremely
+high prices, much above their value. These two lists were laid
+before the ambassador, with their amounts summed up, offering him
+the rest of the money to make up the balance. Owing to this bad
+usage, the Persian feigned himself sick of a fever, as an excuse
+for not waiting upon Asaph Khan and Etemon Dowlet, for which
+reason he could not come through the town to visit me, without
+discovering the counterfeit, but desired his messenger to
+acquaint me with the truth, which Aganor as freely delivered, and
+with no small bitterness against the king, and to which I seemed
+unwilling to listen. The ambassador also desired him to assure me
+that he was ready to serve my nation in his country, to the
+utmost of his power. I presented him with some Alicant wine, and
+a few knives, to be taken to his master, and so we parted. The
+12th May I received news of a great blow given by the Turkish
+army to the Persians, the former having taken and utterly
+destroyed Tauris; and that Shah Abbas was unable to keep the
+field.</p>
+
+<p>On the night of the 25th, a lion and a wolf[211] broke into my
+quarters, and gave us great alarm, carrying off some sheep and
+goats that were in my court-yard, and leaping with them over a
+high wall. I sent to ask leave to kill them, as in that country
+no person may meddle with lions except the king. Receiving
+permission, and the animals returning next night, I ran out into
+the court upon the alarm, and the beast missing his prey, seized
+upon a little dog before me, and escaped; but my servants killed
+the wolf, which I sent to the king.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 211: More likely to have been a tyger and
+hyena.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 14th of June, a cabinet belonging to the jesuits was sent
+up from Cambay, containing medicines and other necessaries, and a
+letter, which were betrayed by the bringer, and delivered to the
+king. He opened the cabinet, and sent for the <i>padre</i> to
+read the letter, and to see every thing contained in the boxes;
+but, finding nothing to his liking, he returned all. I mention
+this circumstance as a caution to all who deal in this country,
+to be careful of what they write or send, as it is the humour of
+this prince to seize and see every thing, lest any curiosity or
+toy should escape his greed.</p>
+
+<p>The 18th, I had letters from Ahmedabad, advising that indigo
+had greatly fallen in price, in consequence of the non-arrival of
+the flotilla from Goa. The unicorn's horn had been returned, as
+without virtue, concerning which I sent new advice.[212] Many
+complaints were made concerning Surat and others, which I do not
+insert. I received two letters from Burhanpoor, stating the
+doubtfulness of recovering the debt due to Mr Ralph Fitch.
+Spragge had returned from the leskar or camp of the Deccan army,
+where Melick Amber, with much show of honour, had given instant
+orders for searching the whole camp; but the Persian had fled to
+Visiapour, so that the business was referred by letter to a
+Dutchman who resided there. The general of the Deccan army
+desired Spragge to be the means of sending English cloth and
+swords to his camp, which is within six days march of Burhanpoor;
+and, in my opinion, this might be a good employment for some idle
+men, and an excellent opportunity to get vent for our dead
+commodities.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 212: This of the unicorn's horn, or rather
+the horn of a rhinoceros, may allude to some supposed inherent
+virtue of detecting poison, anciently attributed to cups made of
+that material.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 30th of July I received news from Surat of two Dutch ships
+being cast away on the coast near Damaun. They were from the
+southwards, laden with spices and China silks, and bound for the
+Red Sea; but losing the season, with much bad weather, they had
+tried to take shelter in Socatora, or some other port on the
+coast of Arabia, but failing after beating about many weeks, they
+bore away for Surat, hoping to be able to ride out the adverse
+monsoon in safety, as they had done in other years. But the years
+differ, and being forced to come to anchor, they had to cut away
+their masts by the violence of the gale; the smaller vessel of
+sixty tons was beaten to pieces, and the cables of the other
+breaking, she was driven ashore in oosy ground, within musket
+shot of the land. The ship kept upright; but having lost their
+long-boat, and the skiff being unable to live, four men got
+ashore on a raft. The spring-tides heaved her up so near the
+shore, that much of her goods and all her people were saved.</p>
+
+<p><i>Maree Rustam</i>, who had been king of Candahar, came to
+visit me on the 21st of August, and brought a present of wine and
+fruit, staying about half an hour, and concluded his visit by
+begging a bottle of wine. This day Sultan Cusero had his first
+prospect of long-hoped liberty, being allowed to leave his
+prison, and to take the air and his pleasure in a banqueting
+house near mine. Sultan Churrum had contracted a marriage at
+Burhanpoor, without waiting for the king's consent, for which he
+had fallen under displeasure; and some secret practices of his
+against the life of his brother had been discovered, on which he
+was ordered to court in order to clear himself. By the advice of
+their father, Etimon Dowlet, Noormahal and Asaph Khan now made
+proposals of friendship and alliance with Cusero. This news has
+diffused universal joy among the people, who now begin to hope
+that their good prince may recover his full liberty. The 22d the
+king feasted Asaph Khan. The 25th Asaph Khan feasted Noormahal.
+It is reported the Prince Cusero is to make a firm alliance, as
+above stated, and is to take a wife of his father's choice. This
+will produce his entire liberty, and the ruin of our proud
+oppressor, Churrum.</p>
+
+<p>The 1st of September was the solemnity of the king's
+birth-day, when he is publicly weighed, to which I went. I was
+conducted into a beautiful garden, in the middle of which was a
+great square pond or tank, set all round with trees and flowers,
+and in the middle was a pavilion or pleasure-house, under which
+hung the scales in which the king was to be weighed. The scales
+were of beaten gold, set with many small stones, as rubies and
+turquoises. They hung by chains of gold, large and massy, yet
+strengthened by silken ropes for more security. The beam and
+tressels from which it hung were covered with thin plates of
+gold. In this place all the nobles of the court attended, sitting
+round on rich carpets; and waiting the king's arrival. He
+appeared at length, cloathed, or laden rather, with diamonds,
+rubies, pearls, and other precious vanities, making a great and
+glorious shew. His sword, target, and throne were corresponding
+in riches and splendour. His head, neck, breast, and arms, above
+the elbows, and at the wrist, were all decorated with chains of
+precious stones, and every one of his fingers had two or three
+rich rings. His legs were as it were fettered with chains of
+diamonds, rubies as large as walnuts, and some larger, and such
+pearls as amazed me. He got into one of the scales, crouching or
+sitting on his legs like a woman; and there were put into the
+other scale, to counterpoise his weight, many bags said to
+contain silver, which were changed six times, and I understood
+his weight was 9000 rupees, which are almost equal to a thousand
+pounds sterling. After this, he was weighed against gold, jewels,
+and precious stones, as I was told, for I saw none, as these were
+all in bags, and might only have been pebbles. Then against cloth
+of gold, silk stuffs, cotton goods, spices, and all sort of
+commodities; but I had to believe all as reported, as these were
+all in packages. Lastly, against meal, butter, and corn, all of
+which is said to be distributed to the Banians, with all the rest
+of the stuff, but I saw all carefully carried away, and nothing
+distributed. The silver only is reserved for the poor, and serves
+for the ensuing year, as it is the king's custom at night
+frequently to call for some of these before him, to whom, with
+great familiarity and humility, he distributes some of this money
+with his own hands.</p>
+
+<p>While the king was sitting in the scale, he looked upon me and
+smiled, but spoke not, as my interpreter could not be admitted.
+After he was weighed, he ascended the throne, and had basins of
+nuts, almonds, and spices of all sorts, artificially made of thin
+silver, which he threw about, and for which his great men
+scrambled prostrate on their bellies. I thought it not decent for
+me to do so, which seeing, he reached one basin almost full, and
+poured the contents into my cloak. The nobles were so bold as to
+put in their hands to help themselves, and so thick, that they
+had soon left me none, if I had not pocketed up a remainder. Till
+I had myself been present, I was told that he scattered gold on
+this occasion, but found it to be only silver, and so thin, that
+all I had at first, being thousands of small pieces, had not
+weighed sixty rupees, of which I saved to the amount of twenty
+rupees, yet a good dishful, which I keep to shew the ostentation
+of this display of liberality; for, by my proportion, I think all
+he cast away could not exceed the value of an hundred pounds. At
+night he drinks with his nobles from rich plate, to which I was
+invited; but, being told that I must not refuse to drink, and
+their liquors being excessively hot and strong, I durst not stay
+to endanger my health, being already somewhat indisposed with a
+slight dysentery.</p>
+
+<p>On the 9th September the king rode out to take the air on the
+banks of the river <i>Darbadath</i>, [Nerbuddah] a distance of
+five cosses. As he was to pass my house, I mounted my horse to
+meet him; and, as it is the custom for all men whose gates he
+passes, to make him some present, which is taken as a good sign,
+and is called <i>mombareck</i>, or good news; and as I had
+nothing to give, neither could go with nothing, nor stay without
+offence, I ventured to take with me a fair book, well bound,
+filleted, and gilt, being the last edition of Mercator's Maps of
+the World, which I presented, saying, That I had nothing worthy
+the acceptance of so great a king, but begged to offer him the
+world, in which he had so great and rich a share. He accepted it
+in good part, laying his hand repeatedly on his breast, saying,
+that every thing which came from me was welcome. He asked about
+the arrival of our ships, which I said we daily expected. He then
+said, he had some fat wild-hogs lately sent him from Goa, and if
+I would eat any he would send me some at his return, I made him
+due reverence, answering, that any thing from his majesty was to
+me a feast.</p>
+
+<p>He rode on upon his elephant, and when I offered to accompany
+him to the gate, the way being stony, he desired me to return,
+bidding God keep me. He asked which was my house, and being told,
+praised it, as indeed it was one of the best in the place, though
+only an old temple and a large tomb, enclosed by a wall.
+Repeating his farewell, he said the way was bad, and desired me
+to go home, with much shew of courtesy and kindness, on which I
+took my leave.</p>
+
+<p>On the 16th I went to repay the visit of Maree Rustam, prince
+of Candahar, who sent word at my arrival that he dared not
+receive any visit unless he asked leave of the king, or
+acquainted Etimon Dowlet or Asaph Khan, which he would do at the
+next durbar. I made answer, that he needed not, as I never meant
+any more to trouble myself about so uncivil a person. That I knew
+well this was a mere shift out of ill manners, as the king would
+be no more angry for his receiving me at his house than for
+coming to mine, and that I cared not for seeing him, and had only
+come in pure civility to return his visit. His man desired me to
+wait till he had reported what I said to his master, but I would
+not. At night I waited upon the king at court, who spoke to me
+about the book of maps; but I forbore to speak to him about our
+debts. But on the 25th, though very weak, I went again to court
+to make trial of the king about our debts. <i>Muckshud</i>, one
+of our debtors, having pled in excuse for not paying that he had
+missed receiving his <i>prigany</i>, and knew not how to pay
+unless he sold his house. I delivered the merchants petition to
+the king, which he caused to be read aloud by Asaph Khan; all the
+names of the debtors, with the sums they owed, and their
+respective sureties, being distinctly enumerated. The king then
+sent for Arad Khan, the chief officer of his household, and the
+cutwall, and gave them some orders which I did not understand.
+Then reading over the names, and finding some of them dead, and
+some strangers, he made enquiry as to their abilities and
+qualities, and what goods they had received. Concerning
+Rulph,[213] Asaph Khan undertook to speak to the prince on the
+subject, and to get that affair concluded when he came.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 213: In the edition by Churchill, this
+person is named Sulph, but no elucidation is
+given.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>My interpreter was now called in, and the king, turning to me,
+said that our merchants had trusted people according to their own
+fancies, and to whom they pleased, not coming to him with an
+inventory of their goods, and therefore, if their debtors were
+insufficient, it was their own faults, and they had no reason to
+expect payment of their money from him. This I supposed to allude
+to his servant <i>Hergonen</i>, lately dead, whose goods had been
+seized to the king's use. He added, however, as this was the
+first time, he would now assist me, and cause our money to be
+paid: but, if the English should hereafter deliver their goods to
+his servants without money, they must stand to the hazard
+themselves. But if when they brought their commodities to court,
+they would bring the inventory of the whole to him, he would
+first serve himself, and then distribute the rest among such as
+were willing to buy them; and then, if any failed in payments, he
+would pay the money himself.</p>
+
+<p>This indeed is the custom of the Persian merchants, who bring
+all to the king, as I have often seen. He first takes his own
+choice, and delivers the rest among his nobles, his scribes
+writing down the names of all to whom they are delivered, and the
+sums, another officer settling the prices. After which a copy is
+given to the merchant, who goes to their houses for his money;
+and if they do not pay, there is a particular officer who has
+orders to enforce payment. It was then told to my interpreter
+that Arad Khan was to call the debtors before him, and cause them
+to pay. This did not satisfy our merchants, but it seemed to me a
+just and gracious answer, and better than private persons usually
+get from great princes.</p>
+
+<p>Hearing that I had been sick and was in want of wine, the king
+ordered me to have five bottles, and when these were done that I
+should send for five more, and so from time to time as I needed.
+He sent me also the fattest wild-hog I ever saw, which had been
+sent from Goa by Mucrob Khan. This was sent to me at midnight by
+a <i>huddy</i>, with this message, that it had eaten nothing but
+sugar and butter since it came to the king. I accepted this as a
+sign of great favour, which, in this court, I know to be a great
+one. He then sent for the book of maps, saying, that he had
+shewed it to his <i>mulahs</i>, and not one of them could read a
+word of it, wherefore I might have it again. To this I answered,
+that his majesty in this would use his pleasure; and so it was
+returned.</p>
+
+<p>The 26th, a rajah of the Rajpoots being in rebellion in the
+hills, not above twenty cosses from the leskar, the king sent out
+two Omrahs with a party of horse to fetch him in a prisoner. But
+he stood on his defence, slew one of the omrahs and twelve
+<i>maansipdares</i>, [munsubdars] and about 500 men, sending an
+insulting message to the king to send his son against him, as he
+was no prey to be subdued by ordinary forces.</p>
+
+<p>The 2d September, Sultan Churrum made his entry into Mundu,
+accompanied by all the great men, in wonderous triumph. Contrary
+to all our expectations, the king received him as if he had been
+an only son. All the great men and the queen-mother[214] went to
+meet him at the distance of five cosses from the town. I had sent
+to Asaph Khan to excuse me not meeting him, for I was not able to
+stir from sickness, and besides, had no presents to give. I also
+sent some of my servants with my just excuse to the prince, to
+which he, in his pride, only answered by a nod.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 214: Both in the Pilgrims and in
+Churchill's Collection this personage is termed the king's
+mother; but it is more probable she was the mother of Sultan
+Churrum.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 5th of September I received advice of our ships being
+arrived at Surat, the admiral amissing, but all the rest well,
+and that they had taken two English rovers or pirates, which were
+found in chase of the queen-mother's ship returning from the Red
+Sea, which they fortunately rescued and brought safe in. Had this
+ship been taken, we had all been in trouble. With these letters,
+I received the Company's letter, the invoice of the goods, and
+instructions for Persia, with various other notes of advice. They
+advised me also, that, owing to the admiral's absence, they knew
+not what course to take with the pirates they had taken. I
+immediately sent orders to Surat concerning all business, as will
+appear in my letters.</p>
+
+<p>The 6th, I rode to visit the prince at his usual hour of
+giving audience, intending to bid him welcome, and to acquaint
+him with our business, meaning to shew him all proper respect;
+and, that I might not come empty-handed, I bought a fine gold
+chain, made in China, which I proposed to have presented to him.
+On sending in to acquaint him that I was in waiting, he returned
+a message, desiring me to come next morning at sun-rise, when he
+sat to be worshipped, or to wait till he rode to court, which I
+must have done at his door. I took this in high dudgeon, having
+never been denied access by the king his father; but such is this
+prince's pride, that he might even teach Lucifer. This made me
+answer roundly, that I was not the prince's slave, but the free
+ambassador of a great king; and that I would never more visit or
+attend upon him who had denied me justice; but I should see him
+at night with the king, to whom only I should now address myself,
+and so I departed. I went at night to the king, who received me
+graciously. I made my reverence to the prince, who stood beside
+his father, but he would not even once stir his head. Then I
+acquainted the king, that, according to his order, I had brought
+an abstract to him of our merchandize, and waited his commands.
+After his usual manner, he asked many questions as to what were
+brought, and seemed mightily satisfied with what was in the
+inventory, especially with the tapestry, promising me all the
+favour and privileges I could desire. He enquired for dogs, but I
+could say nothing on that subject. He then asked for jewels, but
+I told him these were dearer in England than in India, at which
+he rested satisfied. I durst not name the pearls for many
+reasons, but chiefly as I knew our people in that case would be
+way-laid by the prince, and it would have cost me infinite
+trouble to get them back. I thought they might easily be brought
+on shore, and so to court, by stealth, and I thought they would
+be the more valued the less they were expected: but my main
+reason of concealment was, that I expected to make friends by
+their means; therefore; when Asaph Khan pressed me on that head,
+I desired him to make the answer already mentioned of their
+dearness, saying that I would speak to him farther when alone. He
+readily understood me, and made my excuse accordingly.</p>
+
+<p>Seeing the king to be well pleased, I thought it a good time
+to move him again about our debts; and having my petition ready,
+I opened it and held it up, as offering it to the king. He
+happened not to notice this, and it being discovered by some
+others what was its contents, who knew the king would be enraged
+that his order was neglected, one of them stept up to me, and
+gently drew down my hand, requesting me not to present that
+petition. I answered, that Arad Khan had absolutely refused me
+justice, and I had no other resource. Arad heard this, being by,
+and went in much fear to Asaph Khan, desiring him to hinder me
+from making my complaint. I answered, that our ships were
+arrived, and we could neither brook nor endure such delays and
+loss of time. Thereupon they consulted together, and calling the
+cutwall, gave directions for him to put the king's orders, into
+execution. The cutwall, accordingly, beset the tents of our
+debtors that very night, and catched some of them; so that we
+shall now have justice. I had many thanks from all the omrahs for
+the protection given to the queen's ship, and the civility shown
+by our people to the passengers. This they said they had properly
+represented to the king, who took it kindly, and they all
+declared they were obliged in honour to love our nation, and
+would do us every service in their power; yet they all wondered
+we could not govern our own people, and that any should presume
+to take ships out of the kingdom, and to rob upon the seas
+without leave of our king.</p>
+
+<p>When the king arose, Asaph Khan carried me with hint to his
+retiring-place, where we first translated the inventory of our
+goods into Persian, to shew the king an hour after. In this
+inventory I inserted the money with some addition, that the king
+might see we brought profit into his dominions by our trade. I
+next inserted the cloths of different kinds, with the fine wares;
+and, lastly, the gross commodities, concluding by praying his
+majesty to give orders for what he wished to purchase, and then
+to give us liberty of selling the rest. When this was finished,
+Asaph Khan asked why I wished to speak with him in private,
+desiring me to speak my mind with freedom, bowing, and protesting
+such friendship as I never could have expected. I told him, that
+my reason for asking this private conference was to have his
+advice. It was certainly true that I had some things which were
+not enumerated, but had been so badly used last year that I durst
+not trust any one; but, to shew my confidence in him, I was
+willing to open myself to him, on his oath of secrecy, which he
+readily gave. I then told him that I had a rich pearl, and some
+other strings of fair pearls, and knew not whether it were fit to
+tell the king, lest the prince might be displeased. I informed
+him likewise, how I had gone in the morning to visit the prince,
+and of his discourtesy, and my consequent determination; yet I
+knew his favour was necessary for us, and I had hopes to recover
+it by means of this pearl, which I had purposely concealed for
+him. This was my purpose, and the reason of my concealment; and
+as he was father-in-law to the prince, and the king's favourite,
+I was desirous to please both, and therefore begged his
+advice.</p>
+
+<p>After embracing me, he said I had done discreetly, and should
+acquaint neither; for, if I did, I should never get out of
+trouble. If the king were to know of it, he would indeed use me
+courteously, but would make a great stir to get it into his
+hands, and then, according to custom, I might sue in vain to
+recover my own. The prince, I knew, was ravenously greedy and
+tyrannical, and wearied all with his scandalous exactions. He
+desired me to steal all ashore, trusting none, and explained to
+me many means of conveyance, bidding me observe the usage of the
+Portuguese on the like occasions; adding, that he wished to
+purchase the pearl, and if I would grant his desire, would
+deposite its value in my hands, whatever I chose to ask, and, in
+recompence for this confidence I had reposed in him, he would
+hereafter be my solicitor in all things, and assured me I could
+do nothing without him. I answered, that I was most willing to
+let him have the pearl, and hoped he would never betray my
+confidence. Having received his oath, and a ceremony of mutual
+covenant, by crossing thumbs according to the custom of the
+country, we embraced. I promised to be guided entirely by him,
+and he engaged to do every thing I required for the safe
+conveyance of the other things, engaging to give me firmauns so
+that no person should touch any thing, but all should come safely
+to me, to dispose of at my pleasure.</p>
+
+<p>He engaged likewise to reconcile me to the prince, and would
+take me with him the next time he went to visit him, and would
+make the prince use me with all manner of grace and favour;
+adding, that I should have a particular judge assigned me to take
+care of our business, and to give us every satisfaction we could
+desire. He also advised me to make a present to his sister, Queen
+Noormahal, and she would prevail upon the king to give me money.
+To this I replied, that I wished only for the good usage of my
+countrymen. He then carried me to the king, to whom I presented
+the inventory translated into Persian, and was graciously
+received. He asked me if the arras were a present, to which I
+answered in the affirmative, as the prince was by, lest it might
+be seized. In conclusion, the king said he would take a
+considerable quantity of our cloths and other commodities,
+desiring me to cause them to be brought up speedily, and directed
+Asaph Khan to make out an order for their free passage in the
+prince's name. I was well pleased with the success of this day;
+for though I knew that there was no faith to be placed in these
+barbarians, yet I was sure Asaph Khan would deal truly in this,
+as he was to help himself, and durst not betray me, lest he
+should miss the pearl, neither could I suspect him afterwards, as
+he could not betray my secret without discovering his own
+falsehood to the prince.</p>
+
+<p>S.8. <i>Asaph Khan protects the English for hope of Gain, as
+also Noormahal.--Arrival of Mr Steel.--Danger to the Public from
+private Trade.--Stirs about a fort</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On the 12th October, according to his promise, Asaph Khan
+carried me along with him to visit the prince, and introduced me
+into his private apartment, when I presented ham with a small
+Chinese gold chain in a china cup. He used me indifferently, but
+Asaph Khan persuaded him to alter his course towards us,
+representing that he gained yearly by us a lack of rupees, and
+that as our trade increased every year, it would in time bring
+him greater profit; but that if we were harshly used, we would be
+enforced to quit both Surat and the country, from which great
+inconveniences might arise. We were in some measure his subjects,
+and if, from desire of procuring rarities, he used us ill, we
+would necessarily strive to the utmost to conceal all we brought
+from his knowledge; but if he gave us that liberty and
+encouragement which was fitting, we would then use our endeavours
+to bring every thing to him. He represented, that my only study
+was to give content to his highness, and to procure his favour
+and protection, and therefore that he ought to receive me
+honourably when I came to visit him, and according to my quality,
+which would give satisfaction to my nation, and encourage me to
+serve him. Finally, be moved his highness to give me a firmaun
+for our present use, which he easily obtained, with a promise of
+all manner of satisfaction. The prince accordingly gave immediate
+orders to his secretary to draw it up in every point to our
+content, and to write a letter to the governor recommending it to
+his attention; adding, that I should at all times have any other
+letters I desired.</p>
+
+<p>It is thus easy to be seen what base and unworthy men I have
+to deal with. For the sordid hope only of buying some toys, Asaph
+Khan has become so reconciled to me as to betray his son-in-law,
+and is obsequious even to flattery. The ground of all his
+friendship is his desire to purchase the gold taken in the prize,
+and some other knacks; for which purpose he desires to send down
+one of his servants, which I could not deny without losing him,
+after having so long laboured to gain his favour; neither was
+this any disadvantage to us, as his payment is secure, and will
+save us much trouble and charge in selling elsewhere, especially
+the wine and other luggage that is apt to spoil in carriage. For
+this purpose he obtained an order from the prince under false
+pretences, and wrote himself in our favour to the governor of
+Surat, doing us all manner of kindness. There is a necessity for
+his friendship, as his word is a law in this empire, and
+therefore I did not choose to seem to notice his unworthiness. I
+hope by this procedure to win him to our advantage, or at least
+to make our present good use of him. On this occasion I moved him
+to procure us a firmaun for trade with Bengal, which he has
+promised, though he would never before hearken to that request.
+He likewise now prosecutes our debtors as if they were his own;
+and in passing the residence of the cutwall on his elephant, he
+called upon him to command dispatch, which was a most unusual
+favour. Upon this <i>Groo</i> was immediately imprisoned, and
+<i>Muckshud</i> had only two days allowed him to pay us. Thus I
+doubt not that in ten days we shall recover to the amount of
+44,000 rupees, though our debtors are the most shifting false
+knaves in all India.</p>
+
+<p>On the 21st, a servant came to me from Asaph Khan, bearing a
+message from Noormahal, intimating that she had moved the prince
+for another firmaun, which she had obtained, and by which all our
+goods were taken under her protection; and that she was ready to
+send down her servant with authority to take order for our good
+establishment, and to see that we were no way wronged. He said
+farther, that Asaph Khan had done this, for fear of the prince's
+violence, and to guard against his custom of delays; and that now
+when the queen his sister had desired to be our protectress, he
+was sure the prince would not meddle; and farther assured me,
+upon his honour, that I should receive every thing consigned to
+me, for which the queen had written the most positive orders, and
+had directed her servant to assist our factors, that we might
+never more have any cause of complaint at Surat. He desired,
+therefore, that I might write a few lines to the captains and
+factors, directing them to use the queen's servant kindly, and
+allow him to buy for her some toys, such as I could spare. This I
+durst not deny, though I clearly saw the greediness which was
+covered under this request; and I gave him a note, as desired,
+making a condition that I should see a copy of the firmaun, which
+was already sealed, and could not be seen without leave.</p>
+
+<p>By all this you may see how easy it were to sell commodities
+here, by a little good management. Last year we were not looked
+at; but now, that I have translated the inventory of fine wares
+for the king, yet concealing the pearls, every one is ready to
+run down to Surat, to make purchases. Noormahal and Asaph Khan
+now study how to do me good offices; and many of the great men
+are soliciting me for letters, that they may send down their
+servants, so that if you had trebled the present consignment, it
+might all have been bought up aboard ship, and have saved you the
+customs, expence of carriage, and much spoil. I have therefore
+directed the factory to sell to the servants of Noormahal and
+Asaph Khan, whatsoever can be spared, so as to leave me a decent
+proportion for my uses at court. By this, much trouble and
+charges will be saved, the prince prevented from plunder and
+exactions, and our friends confirmed; and yet I hope to have
+enough remaining to please the king and his son. At the delivery
+of their presents, Asaph Khan has undertaken to procure the
+phirmaunds for our trade at Bengal or any other port, and even to
+procure us a general privilege for free trade and residence in
+every part of the king's dominions.</p>
+
+<p>On the 24th of October the king departed to a considerable
+distance from Mundu,[215] and went from place to place among the
+mountains, leaving us quite at a loss what way we should take, as
+no one knew his purpose. On the 25th I had a warrant for ten
+camels at the king's rates of hire; and on the 29th I removed to
+follow the king, being forced to quit Mundu, which was now
+entirely deserted. The 31st I arrived at the king's tents, but
+found he had gone with few company on a hunting party for ten
+days, no person being allowed to follow without leave. The leskar
+or camp was scattered about in many parts, suffering great
+inconveniences from bad water, scarcity and consequent dearness
+of provisions, sickness, and all sorts of calamities incident to
+so great a multitude; yet nothing can prevent the king from
+following his pleasures. I here learnt that it was quite
+uncertain whether the king proposed going to Agra or Guzerat;
+and, though the latter was reported, the former was held to be
+more probable, as his counsellors wished to be at rest. Yet,
+because the king was expected to linger here about a month, I was
+advised and thought it best to send for the goods and presents,
+and endeavour to conclude my business, rather as defer it upon
+uncertainties. By this means, I hoped to obtain some rest, which
+I much needed, as I was very weak, and not likely to recover by
+daily travel, and the use of cold raw muddy water.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 215: In the edition of Churchill, the king
+is said to have removed twenty-four cosses from Mundu, while in
+the Pilgrims it is called only four cosses.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Richard Steel and Jackson arrived on the 2d November, 1617,
+with the pearls and other small matters, which they had brought
+privately on shore according to my order, which I received and
+gave them acquittance for. I had a conference with Mr Steel about
+his projects of water-works, intended to advance the sale of
+lead, which I did not approve of, because I knew the character of
+this people, and that this affair must be begun at our expence,
+while after trial we should not enjoy the profit, but the natives
+be taught.[216] Besides, it did not promise any advantages for
+the sale of our commodity, as the lead would be trebled in price
+by land-carriage, and could not be delivered at Agra so cheap as
+other lead could be purchased there. Yet I was willing that he
+should make a trial, by carrying his workmen to Ahmedabad, and
+meeting me there; where, by the aid of Mukrob Khan, who only
+among these people is a friend to new inventions, I would make
+offer to the king of their inventions, and try what conditions
+might be procured; but, in my opinion, it is all money and labour
+thrown away. The company must shut their ears against these
+projectors, who have their own emoluments much more in view than
+the profits of their masters. Many things look fair in discourse,
+and in theory satisfy curious imaginations, which in practice are
+found difficult and fanciful. It is no easy matter to alter the
+established customs of this kingdom; where some drink only of
+rain water, some only that of a holy river, and others only of
+such as is brought at their own cost.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 216: This project is no where explained,
+but might possibly be intended for conveying water, by means of
+machinery and leaden pipes, for the supply of some palace or city
+in India.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>As for his second project, of inducing the caravans and
+merchants of Lahore and Agra, who are in use to travel by
+Candahar into Persia, to come by the river Indus and to go by sea
+in our ships to Jasques or the Persian gulf it is a mere dream.
+Some men may approve of it in conversation, but it will never be
+adopted in practice. The river Indus is but indifferently
+navigable downwards, and its mouth is already occupied by the
+Portuguese; while its navigation upwards, against the stream, is
+very difficult. Finally, we must warrant their goods, which
+cannot be done by a fleet; neither did even the Portuguese
+transport any of these goods, excepting only those of Scindy and
+Tatta, which traded by means of their own junks, having
+<i>cartas</i> or passes from the Portuguese, for which the
+natives paid a small matter, to secure them from being captured
+by the Portuguese cruizers; and the emoluments of these passes
+came into the pockets of the chiefs of Diu, Damaun, and Ormus.
+Even if all other difficulties were removed, yet will the caravan
+of Lahore be never induced to take this passage, as it mostly
+consists of returning Persians and Armenians, who know the
+journey from Jasques to be almost as bad as that through
+Candahar; and the small trade from the environs of Scindy is not
+worth mentioning. Yet, for his better satisfaction, I am content
+that he may learn his errors by his own experience, so that it be
+not done at the charges of the company: But I suppose he will let
+it fall to the ground, not knowing at which end to begin.</p>
+
+<p>As to the third project, for uniting the trade of the Red Sea
+with this of Surat, I recommended to him to use his endeavours;
+for it is already begun. The peril of this trade in the Guzerat
+ships is very obvious, owing to pirates in these seas; wherefore
+I have no doubt that many merchants may be induced to load their
+goods in our ships on freight; by which means we should make
+ourselves many useful friends among these people, supply our own
+wants, save the export of bullion, and for this year employ one
+of the ships belonging to the old account, that should return in
+September, receiving the remains of this joint stock, which will
+be sufficient to re-load a great ship, and would otherwise be
+transported at great loss. This I explained and urged, shewing
+which way it might be accomplished, and recommended by him to the
+commander, the Cape merchants and your factors, as will appear by
+my letters. This measure, if followed, must evidently be to your
+profit, even if nothing were procured towards it by freight from
+the Guzerat merchants; as, having so many empty vessels for so
+small a stock, and two pirate ships fallen into your hands, they
+had better even go empty as not go. There are many good chances
+in the Red Sea and in the way, and though they did nothing else
+than bring back the goods you have at Mokha and other ports in
+that sea, this would repay the charges of the voyage and be ready
+in time.</p>
+
+<p>I find Mr Steel high in his conceits, insomuch that he seems
+to have forgotten the respect due to me. He and Mr Kerridge are
+at variance, which I use every endeavour to assuage. As for his
+wife, I have told Steel that she cannot remain in this country
+without much inconvenience to us, and injury to his masters, as
+she could not be allowed her expences of travelling and living at
+the charges of the Company; that he must live frugally and like a
+merchant, as others do, and must therefore send home his wife. If
+he did so, he was welcome to remain in the Company's service; but
+otherwise, I should have to take measures with them both, much
+against my inclination. Having thus persuaded him, I likewise
+endeavoured to deal in the same manner about Captain Towerson's
+wife. You know not the danger, the trouble, and the
+inconvenience, of granting these liberties. For this purpose, I
+persuaded Abraham, his father-in-law, to hold fast; stating the
+gripings of this court, and the small hope of any relief by this
+alliance, from which he expected great matters, and endeavoured
+to persuade him to return quietly. To further this, I wrote to
+your chief factor, that such things as he had brought and were
+vendible, should be bought for your use by bill of exchange, and
+at such profit to him as might answer both parties; but I utterly
+prohibited the taking of his trash, to remain a dead stock on
+your hands, on any conditions. Such inconveniences do you bring
+upon your hands by these unreasonable liberties.</p>
+
+<p>By the strict commands in your letter respecting private
+trade, as well respecting your own servants as others, I find you
+do not mean him to have that liberty he expects; for he is
+furnished to the value of above &pound;1000, first cost here, and
+Steel to at least &pound;200. This, as he proposes sending home
+his wife, and his merit is so good towards you, I shall send
+home; as I presume you will admit of this to get rid of such
+cattle. I will not buy these goods however, but order them to be
+marked and consigned to you, by which you will have the measure
+in your own hands. By these liberties, you discourage all your
+old servants. Some may do all things for fair words, and some
+will do nothing for good actions. I could instance some, gone
+home two years since, who only employed themselves in managing
+their own stock, and did no other business, who now live at home
+in pleasure; and others that raised their fortunes on your
+monies, trading therewith from port to port, and are now returned
+rich and unquestioned. Last year a mariner had twenty-six
+<i>churles</i> of indigo, others many fardles; another had to the
+value of 7000 mahmudies in bastas, chosen at Baroach and
+purchased with your monies, and he would not probably chuse the
+worst for himself; a fourth did the same to the value of above
+&pound;150. I do not mention these things out of spite or ill
+will, but to induce you to equality of proceeding with your
+servants, that an impartial restraint be imposed upon all, and
+that by such instances your profits may not be all swallowed
+up.</p>
+
+<p>For effecting these purposes, the sending the woman home, and
+the prosecution of trade to the Red Sea, I have sent back Richard
+Steel to Surat with the necessary orders. As it is now declared
+that the king intends going to Guzerat, I have altered my purpose
+about the goods and presents; and have appointed Richard Steel,
+after having dispatched other matters, to meet me there with the
+goods and presents, and his engineers. I have also sent my advice
+and directions to Captain Pring, to make out an inventory of all
+the monies and goods in the two pirate ships, and to land the
+whole, making it over to your stock; to give a passage home to
+some of the chiefs, and to take the rest into your service,
+referring to you at home to deal with the owners. My own fixed
+opinion is, that their capture is legal and justifiable, and all
+their goods forfeited. If you are pleased to restore any thing,
+be it at your pleasure; but the more rigour you show to these,
+the better example you will give to such scandalous piracies;
+for, if this course be pursued, you may bid adieu to all trade at
+Surat and in the Red Sea, and let the Turkey Company stand clear
+of the revenge of the Grand Signior.</p>
+
+<p>I went to Asaph Khan on the 6th November, and shewed him the
+pearls according to promise. As I had been previously informed,
+he told me the sorts were not fit for that country; yet he was so
+pleased that I had kept my word with him, that I believe I may
+say to you in the words of Pharaoh, "The land is before you,
+dwell where you will, you and your servants." We talked not about
+the price, but he vowed the utmost secrecy, and that for my sake
+he would give more for them than their value, not returning any,
+and would pay ready money. Of this he professed to be in no want,
+and even offered to lend me whatever I needed. I have promised to
+visit his sister, whom he has made our protectress; and indeed,
+every contentment that good words can give, I have received,
+besides good deeds. When the presents arrive, I shall take care
+not to be too liberal to your loss; a little shall serve in that
+way. Indeed Asaph Khan himself has given me this advice, saying
+that such things are as well taken in this country sold as given,
+which I find by the experience of others to be true.</p>
+
+<p>Finishing these conferences in his bed-chamber, Asaph Khan
+rose to go to dinner, having invited me and my people; but he and
+his friends dined without, appointing us our mess apart, for they
+scruple to eat with us. I had good cheer, and was well attended,
+the residue being given to my servants. After dinner, I moved
+about the debt due by Groo, and told him of the delays. He
+desired me to say no more, as he had undertaken that business;
+that Groo, at his orders, was finishing accounts with a jeweller,
+and he had given orders, as the money was paid, that it should
+remain in the hands of the cutwall for us. This I found
+afterwards to be true, and the cutwall has promised to finish in
+three days, desiring me to send no more to Asaph Khan on that
+business.</p>
+
+<p>I must not omit to mention here, an anecdote of baseness or
+favour, call it which you please. When the prisons are full of
+condemned men, the king commands some to be executed, and sends
+others to his omrahs, to be redeemed at a price. This he esteems
+a courtesy, as giving the means of exercising charity: But he
+takes the money, and so sells the virtue. About a month before
+our remove, he sent to me to buy three Abyssinians, whom they
+suppose to be all Christians, at the price of forty rupees each.
+I answered, that I could not purchase men as slaves, as was done
+by others, by which they had profit for their money; but that I
+was willing to give twenty rupees each for them in charity, to
+save their lives and restore them to liberty. The king was well
+pleased with my answer, and ordered them to be sent me. They
+expected the money, which I was in no haste to give, and even
+hoped it had been forgotten. But the king's words are all written
+down[217], and are as irrevocable decrees. Seeing that I sent not
+for the malefactors, his officers delivered them into the hands
+of my <i>procurator</i>, in my absence this day, taking his note
+for the sixty rupees, which I paid at my return, and set free the
+prisoners.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 217: Dixit, et edictum est; fatur, et est
+factum.--<i>Purch</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having notice of a new phirmaund sent down to Surat to disarm
+all the English, and some other restrictions upon their liberty,
+owing to a complaint sent up to the prince, that we intended to
+build a fort at Swally, and that our ships were laden with bricks
+and lime for that purpose, I visited Asaph Khan on the 10th
+November, to enquire into this matter. This jealousy arose from
+our people having landed a few bricks on shore, for building a
+furnace to refound the ship's bell; yet the alarm was so hot at
+court, that I was called to make answer, when I represented how
+absurd was this imaginary fear, how dishonourable for the king,
+and how unfit the place was for any such purpose to us, having
+neither water nor harbourage. The jealousy was however so very
+strongly imprinted in their minds, because I had formerly asked a
+river at Gogo for that purpose, that I could hardly satisfy the
+prince but that we intended some such sinister end. You may judge
+from this how difficult it were to get a port for yourselves, if
+you were so disposed. Notwithstanding all remonstrances, this
+furnace must be demolished, and a <i>huddey</i> of horse sent
+down to see it done. The disarming of our men was what chiefly
+disobliged our people, though the weapons were only lodged in the
+custom-house, and those only belonging to the ship's company. I
+told Asaph Khan, that we could not endure this slavery, nor would
+I stay longer in the country, as the prince gave us one day a
+phirmaund for our good usage, with a grant of privileges, and
+countermand all the next by contradictory orders, in which
+proceedings there was neither honour nor good faith, and I could
+not answer for my continuing to reside among them. Asaph Khan
+said, he would speak to the king at night on the subject, in the
+presence of the prince, and afterwards give me an answer.</p>
+
+<p>I went again to wait upon Asaph Khan on the 18th, when he made
+many protestations of the Mogul's affection to my sovereign and
+nation, and to me, and assured me he had risked the prince's
+disfavour for our sakes, and had full assurance of a complete
+redress of all our grievances: and that he proposed getting the
+<i>prigany</i> of Surat transferred to himself, which the prince
+would have to resign, as he had been made governor of Ahmedabad,
+Cambay, and that territory. To satisfy me that he did not
+dissemble, he desired me to come at night to court, bringing the
+king my master's letter and the translation, as the time was
+favourable for its delivery; desiring me at the same time to
+persist in my complaint, and to offer taking leave, when I should
+see what he would say for us. Accordingly, I went at night to
+wait upon the king, whom I found surrounded by a very full court.
+The king was sitting on the ground, and when I delivered the
+letter, it was laid before him, of which he took no great notice,
+being busy at the time. Asaph Khan whispered to his father,
+Etimon Dowlet, desiring him to read the letter and assist us,
+which he could better do than himself. Etimon Dowlet took up both
+letters, giving that in English into the king's hands, and read
+the translation to the king, who answered many of the complaints.
+On coming to that point, of procuring our quiet trade, by his
+authority with the Portuguese, he demanded if we wanted him to
+make peace with them? I answered, that his majesty knew long
+since I had offered to be governed entirely by him, and referred
+that matter to his wisdom, and waited therefore to know his
+pleasure. On this he said, that he would undertake to reconcile
+us, and to cause agreement to be made in his seas, which he would
+signify in his answer to my master's letter, in which he would
+farther satisfy his majesty in all his other friendly
+desires.</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding of this, I asked leave to go before to
+Ahmedabad, to meet the king's presents, and to prepare for my
+return home. Upon this, a question arose between the king and the
+prince, who complained that he derived no profit from us, and was
+very willing to be rid of us. Asaph Khan then took up the
+discourse, and plainly told the king, that we brought both profit
+and security to the port of Surat and to the kingdom, but were
+very rudely treated by the prince's servants, and that we could
+not continue our trade and residence, unless matters were
+amended; for which reason it would be more honourable for his
+majesty to licence and protect us, than to treat us
+discourteously. The prince angrily replied, That he had never
+wronged us, and had lately given us a phirmaund at the desire of
+Asaph Khan. It is true, replied Asaph Khan, that you granted him
+a phirmaund to his satisfaction; but in ten days you sent down
+another, virtually to contradict and annul the former; and as he
+stood as surety between both, and had undertaken our redress on
+the prince's word, the shame and dishonour of this double
+procedure fell upon him. He said he spoke for no ends, but for
+the king's honour and justice, as he owed me nothing, nor I him,
+and for the truth of his words he appealed to me, who complained
+that our goods were taken away from us by force, and that
+Rulph,[218] who began this two years ago, would never pay us, and
+his officers continued the same procedure every season. If the
+prince were weary of the English, he might turn us away; but then
+he must expect that we would seek for redress at our own hands
+upon the seas. He demanded whether the king or the prince gave me
+the means of living, or, as they did not, at whose expence I was
+maintained? saying, that I was an ambassador and a stranger, who
+lived in this country and followed the progress of the king at
+great charges; and if our goods continued to be taken from us by
+force, so that we could neither get back our goods, nor yet their
+value in money, it would be impossible for us to subsist.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 218: On a former occasion, where this
+person is mentioned, it has been said that his name, in the
+edition of this journal given by Churchill, is written Sulph.
+From the circumstances in the context at this place, it is
+possible that Sulpheckar Khan, or Zulfeccar Khan, governor of
+Surat under Sultan Churrum, may be here meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This was delivered with some heat, and the king, catching at
+the word force, repeated it to his son, whom he sharply
+reprehended. The prince promised to see me paid for all that had
+been taken. He said likewise that he had taken nothing, having
+only caused the presents to be sealed; and, as his officers had
+received no customs on these, he desired to have them opened in
+his presence. This I absolutely refused to consent to, telling
+the king that I only did my duty to my master, in insisting to
+deliver the presents free from duty, and that, when I had so
+done, I should give the prince full satisfaction in all other
+things. At this time, Etimon Dowlet, who had been made our friend
+by his son Asaph Khan, whispered to the king, and read a clause
+or two from my master's letter, on which the king made the prince
+stand aside. Asaph Khan joined in this private conference, which
+they told me was for our good; and in conclusion, the prince was
+commanded to suffer all the goods to come quietly to me, and to
+give me such privileges for our trade as were fit, and as should
+be proposed by Asaph Khan.</p>
+
+<p>The prince would not yield the presents, unless Asaph Khan
+became his surety that he should have a share, which he did, and
+we were then all agreed on that point. The king paid me many
+compliments in words, and even gave me two pieces of <i>pawne</i>
+out of the dish then before him, desiring me to partake of what
+he was eating. I then took my leave for Ahmedabad; and that same
+night I began my journey, leaving my tents, as I expected to
+reach that city the next day: But I had to ride two nights, with
+the intermediate day and half of the next, with excessively
+little accommodation or refreshment; and arrived at Ahmedabad on
+the 15th at noon.</p>
+
+<p>The 8th January, 1618, there was some question about presents
+by the prince, whom I told that his were ready whenever he was
+ready to receive them. He asked me, why I had broken the seals?
+On which I said, that it would have been dishonourable and
+discourteous in me to have delivered the king's presents in
+bonds, and having waited his highness' licence during twenty
+days, but seeing no hope of its arrival, I had been under the
+necessity of breaking open the seals. Some heat was likely to
+have arisen on this subject, but a gentleman from the king, who
+was sent to observe what passed between us, told us both that the
+king commanded our presence before him immediately, at a garden
+where he then was, on the river side, a coss from the town. The
+prince went there immediately in his palanquin, and I followed in
+a coach, well attended upon by the servants of the king and
+prince. On my arrival, the women were going in, on which occasion
+no man dare enter except the prince, who accordingly made bitter
+complaints against me for having broke open the seals, taking out
+from the packages whatever I pleased, without his knowledge.
+Asaph Khan was called, who was my surety, and the prince laid the
+blame of all this upon him, but he strenuously denied all
+knowledge or participation; yet I had not accused him, but took
+it all upon myself, knowing he would deny it, as is the custom,
+to excuse himself, and I knew myself better able to bear it.</p>
+
+<p>I was then sent for to the water-side, where the king had been
+sitting in private, and went in, having the presents along with
+me, but the king was gone into the female apartments. Asaph Khan
+blamed me for breaking his word, saying, that the prince had
+shamed him. I answered, through Jaddow, that he well knew I had
+his consent, of which this man was a witness. He denied this to
+us both, and when I again said, that, although I would not lay
+the blame on him, that it was still true, as this man could
+witness; Jaddow refused to interpret my answer, saying, that he
+durst not tell Asaph Khan to his face that he lied. This is a
+quite usual thing among them; for if any command comes from the
+king which he afterwards forgets or denies, he that brought the
+message will deny it stoutly. I bore up as high as I could, on
+which some of the great men said that it was a great affront, of
+which no other man durst have been guilty, while others smiled. I
+answered, it was by no means so great as the prince had often
+done to me. We thus spent the day, during which the king never
+appeared, having privately stole away, leaving us all in anxious
+expectation.</p>
+
+<p>At night, word came that the king was gone, when I offered to
+have gone home, but was so well attended, that I was in some
+measure constrained to force my way. While on the road, new
+messengers came to seek me, and I had to return to court, without
+having either eaten or drank. The king was not however come back,
+and I could not get free from my attendants, who yet used me very
+respectfully. After waiting an hour, a sudden order was given to
+put out all the lights. The king now came in an open waggon,
+drawn by bullocks, having his favourite Noormahal along with him,
+himself acting as waggoner, and no man near. When he and his
+women were housed, the prince came in on horseback, and
+immediately called for me into the place where the king was. It
+was now midnight, and I found the king and prince only attended
+upon by two or three eunuchs. Putting on an angry countenance,
+the king, as he had been instructed by his son, told me I had
+broken my word, and he would trust me no more. I answered
+roundly, that I held it fit to give freely, not upon compulsion,
+and had committed no offence, according to my judgment; and if
+their customs were so very different from ours, I had erred only
+from ignorance, and ought therefore to be pardoned. After many
+disputes, the prince offered his friendship, with many fair
+promises, and we were all reconciled.</p>
+
+<p>I then opened the chests, gave the king his presents, and the
+prince his, and sent in those intended for Noormahal. We were
+about two hours engaged in viewing them. The king was well
+pleased with the tapestry, but said it was too coarse, and
+desired to have a suit of the same quality with the sweet bags.
+Three articles were detained besides the presents; and for these
+the prince said he would pay, as his father had taken them. He
+likewise desired me to come to see him in the morning, promising
+to be my protector and procurator, which I willingly accepted in
+all things except the goods.</p>
+
+<p>I waited upon the prince on the 10th, when I was well
+received, and had orders for a phirmaund about the murdered
+man[219]. He likewise made a public declaration of his
+reconcilement, desiring all his officers to take notice of it,
+and act accordingly. He likewise ordered his chief <i>Raia</i> to
+be in future my procurator, and to draw out whatever phirmaunds I
+required. I presented to him Captain Towerson, and some others of
+the English, whom he received graciously; and, in confirmation of
+our renewed friendship, he presented me with a robe of cloth of
+silver, promising to be the protector of our nation in all things
+we could desire. I then told him about Mr Steel and his workmen,
+when he desired me to bring a small present at night to the king,
+to whom he should present them, which I did. He kept his word,
+and spoke in our favour to the king, who seemed disposed to
+entertain them. On this occasion I presented Captain Towerson to
+the king, who called him up, and after a few questions, rose. At
+the <i>Gitshel Choes</i>[220] I presented Mr Steel and his
+workmen. The king called for Mr Paynter, and gave him ten pounds,
+promising to take him and all the rest into his service. On this
+occasion the king sat all night in a hat which I had given
+him.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 219: This circumstance is perhaps explained
+in the sequel, as relating to the death of a person at
+Burhanpoor.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 220: This is probably meant for the same
+public audience called, in other parts of the journal, the Gazul
+Khan.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 13th, the Dutch came to court, bringing a great present of
+China ware, saunders-wood, parrots, and cloves, but were not
+allowed to approach the third degree, or raised platform. After
+some time, the prince asked me, who they were? I answered, that
+they were Hollanders who resided at Surat. He then enquired if
+they were our friends? I answered, that they were of a nation
+which was dependent upon the king of England, but not welcome in
+all parts, and that I did not know their business. He then said,
+since they were our friends, that I ought to call them up. So I
+was obliged to call upon them, that they might deliver their
+presents, on which occasion they were placed beside our
+merchants, yet without any farther speech or conference. Finally,
+every thing I asked was complied with, or at least promised, and
+I now wait for performance and money. I am satisfied, that,
+without this contestation, I had never succeeded in our just
+demands; for I told the prince's messenger, in the presence of
+all the English, that if he chose to use force against me or my
+goods, he certainly might, but it should cost blood, for I would
+set my <i>chop</i> upon his master's ship, and send her to
+England.</p>
+
+<p>On the 18th I received notice from Surat of the imprisonment
+of Spragge and Howard at Burhanpoor, where their house and goods
+were seized, and their lives in question, on the following
+account:--The cutwall had been drinking at their house, and one
+of his men had died that night, on which they were accused of
+having poisoned him, and the cutwall, in excuse for having been
+at their house, pretended that he had gone to fetch away a man's
+wife who was detained by Thomas Spragge. What may be the truth of
+this affair I know not; but information has been sent to the king
+against them. I went therefore to the prince, who had promised to
+undertake all our causes, but could not get speech of him, though
+I had likewise to complain of force having been used against a
+caravan of ours on the way, notwithstanding a phirmaund from the
+rajah of the country, on both of which subjects I shall present a
+petition at night to the king. My trouble with this barbarous and
+unjust people is beyond all endurance. When at the prince's, I
+found the promised phirmaund drawn up indeed, but half of the
+agreed conditions were omitted, upon which I refused to accept
+it, and desired leave to depart, that I might treat with them in
+the sea.[221]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 221: This obscure expression seems to imply
+a threat of taking vengeance, or making reprisals at sea, for the
+oppressions of the Mogul government against the English
+trade.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 21st, a command was issued to set free the English at
+Burhanpoor, and to restore their goods; on which occasion the
+king observed, that, if they had killed the Mahometan who came to
+drink at their house, he had only met with his just reward.
+Another order was issued, commanding Partap-shah to repay us all
+exactions whatsoever, and that he should hereafter take no duties
+upon our goods in their way to the sea-port, threatening, in case
+of failure, to deliver his son into my hands. On the 22d, I went
+in person to receive these phirmaunds, and carried the merchants
+along with me, together with some pearls the prince was eager to
+see, and which were pretended to belong to Mr Towerson. The
+prince had received some vague accounts of our having pearls to
+the value of twenty or thirty thousand pounds, which he hoped to
+have extracted from us. When his secretary saw our small pearls,
+he observed that his master had <i>maunds</i> of such, and if we
+had no better, we might take these away. You may judge how basely
+covetous these people are of jewels. I told him that we had
+procured these from a gentlewoman to satisfy the prince, and as
+they could not be made better, it was uncivil to be angry with
+merchants who had done their best to shew their good will.</p>
+
+<p>I then spoke to him about the phirmaunds, when he bluntly told
+me I should have none; for as we had deceived the prince's hopes,
+he would disappoint us. I had asked leave to depart, and I might
+come to take leave whenever I pleased. To this I answered, that
+nothing could please me more, but that I should requite their
+injustice in another place, for I should now apply to the king,
+and depend no more on them, as I saw their conduct was made up of
+covetousness and unworthiness. So I arose to depart, but he
+recalled me, desiring that I might come next day to the king and
+prince together, when I should have complete satisfaction.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>"And now, reader, we are at a stand: some more idle, or more
+busy spirits, willing either to take their rest, or to exchange
+their labour; and some perhaps wishing they had the whole
+journal, and not thus contracted into extracts of those things
+out of it which I conceived more fit for the public. And, for the
+whole, myself could have wished it, but neither with the
+honourable Company, nor elsewhere, could I learn of it; the
+worthy knight himself being now employed in like honourable
+embassage from his majesty to the Great Turk. Yet, to supply the
+defect of the journal, I have given thee the chorography of the
+country, together with certain letters of his, written from India
+to honourable lords, and his friends in England; out of all which
+may be hewed and framed a delightful commentary of the Mogul and
+his subjects. Take them therefore, reader, and use them as a
+prospective glass, by which thou mayst take easy and near view of
+these remote regions, people, rites, and
+religions."--<i>Purchas</i>.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>In the Pilgrims, in supplement to the journal of Sir Thomas
+Roe, Purchas has inserted a formal complimentary letter from king
+James to the Great Mogul, or emperor of Hindoostan, together with
+another from the Mogul to king James, containing nothing besides
+hyperbolical expressions of regard; both of which are here
+omitted, as entirely devoid of interest, amusement, or
+information. Purchas has also added several letters said to have
+been found among the papers of Sir Thomas Roe, with some others
+which he says were transcribed from <i>Sir Thomas Roe's own
+book</i>. As these letters merely repeat circumstances and
+opinions already more fully and more methodically expressed in
+the preceding journal, they could only have served unnecessarily
+to swell our pages, without any adequate advantage, and are
+therefore omitted.</p>
+
+<p>Purchas also informs us that Sir Thomas Roe, before he left
+the court of the Great Mogul on his return for England, requested
+to be favoured with a recommendatory letter from the Mogul to
+king James. This request was granted with the utmost readiness,
+and a letter written accordingly; but the Mogul, or his
+ministers, shewed much scrupulousness about the placement of the
+seal to this letter, lest, if placed under the writing, it might
+disparage the dignity of the Mogul, or, if placed over the
+letter, king James might feel disobliged. On this account, the
+letter was delivered to Sir Thomas unsealed, and the seal was
+sent separately, that it might be afterwards affixed, according
+to the pleasure of the king of England.</p>
+
+<p>This seal was of silver, and Purchas has given an engraving,
+or <i>fac simile</i> of it, consisting of an inner and larger
+circle, bearing the style or title of the reigning king, or
+<i>Padishah</i> Jehanguire; surrounded circularly by eight
+smaller circles, containing the series of his direct ancestors,
+from Timor, or Tamerlane, downwards. These are all of course in
+the Persian language and characters; but Purchas gives likewise a
+copy or translation of the same in English letters. It seemed
+quite superfluous to insert here the Persian <i>fac simile</i>,
+being merely writing without ornament, armorial bearing, or
+cognizance. The following is the series, expressed in English
+characters; the last being the central circle, which contains the
+name and title of the reigning emperor:--</p>
+
+<p>1. Ebn Amir Temur Saheb Quran. 2. Ebn Miran Shah. 3. Ebn Mirza
+Soltan Mohamed. 4. Ebn Soltan Abu Said. 5. Ebn Mirza Amar Shah.
+6. Ebn Bahar Padishah. 7. Ebn Humaiun Padishah. 8. Ebn Akbar
+Padishah. 9. Abu Amozaphar Nurdin Jebanguire Padishah.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VII.</p>
+
+<p>RELATION OF A VOYAGE TO INDIA IN 1616, WITH OBSERVATIONS
+RESPECTING THE DOMINIONS OF THE GREAT MOGUL, BY MR. EDWARD
+TERRY.[222]</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>According to Purchas, Mr Edward Terry was master of arts, and
+a student of Christ Church in Oxford, and went out to India as
+chaplain to Sir Thomas Roe. In the first subdivision of this
+narrative, we have combined the observations of Captain Alexander
+Childe, who was commander of the ship James, during the same
+voyage, under Captain Benjamin Joseph, of the ship Charles, who
+was slain in a sea-fight with a Portuguese carack, off one of the
+Komoro islands. The notes extracted by Purchas from the journal
+of Captain Childe,[223] are so short and unsatisfactory, that we
+have been induced to suppress them, except so far as they serve
+to elucidate the narrative of Terry, in the first subdivision of
+this section.--E.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 222: Purch. Pilgr. II 1464.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 223: Id. I. 606.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.1. <i>Occurrences during the Voyage from England to
+Surat</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Apologies often call truth into question, and having nothing
+but truth to offer in excuse for this narrative, I omit all
+unnecessary preface, desiring only that the reader may believe
+what I have faithfully related. Our fleet, consisting of six
+goodly ships, the Charles, Unicorn, James, Globe, Swan, and Rose,
+under the supreme command of Captain Benjamin Joseph, who sailed
+as general in the Charles, our admiral ship, fell down from
+Gravesend to Tilbury-hope on the 3d of February, 1616.</p>
+
+<p>After long and anxious expectation, it pleased God to send us
+a fair wind at N.E. on the 9th March, when we departed from that
+road, and set sail for the East Indies. The wind continued
+favourable till the 16th, at night, when we were in the bay of
+Biscay, at which time we were assailed by a most fearful storm,
+during which we lost sight both of the Globe and the Rose. The
+Globe rejoined us on the 26th following, but the Rose was no more
+heard of till six months afterwards, when she arrived at Bantam.
+The storm continued with violence from the 16th to the 21st. The
+28th we got sight of the grand Canary, and of the Peak of
+Teneriffe, which is so extremely high that it may be seen in a
+clear day more than forty leagues out at sea, as the mariners
+report. The 31st, being Easter-day, we passed under the tropic of
+Cancer, and on the 7th of April had the sun in our zenith. The
+16th, we met with these winds called <i>tornadoes</i>, which are
+so variable and uncertain, as sometimes to blow from all the
+thirty-two points of the compass within the space of a single
+hour. These winds are accompanied by much thunder and lightning,
+and excessive rains, of so noisome a nature, as immediately to
+cause people's clothes to stink on their backs; and wherever this
+rain-water stagnates, even for a short space of time, it brings
+forth many offensive animalcules. The tornadoes began with us
+when in about 12&deg; of N. latitude, and continued till we were
+two degrees to the south of the equinoctial line, which we passed
+on the 28th of April. The 19th of May, being Whitsunday, we
+passed the tropic of Capricorn, so that we were complete seven
+weeks under the torrid zone.</p>
+
+<p>Almost every day, while between the tropics, we saw various
+kinds of fish, in greater abundance than elsewhere. As the whale,
+or mighty <i>Leviathan</i>, whom God hath created to take his
+pastime in the seas; Dolphins also, and Albicores, with Bonitoes,
+flying-fishes, and many others. Some whales were of an exceeding
+greatness, which, in calm weather, would often rise and shew
+themselves above the water, appearing like vast rocks; and, while
+rising, they would spout up a great quantity of water into the
+air, with much noise, which fell down again around them like
+heavy rain. The dolphin is called, from the swiftness of its
+motion, the arrow of the sea. This fish differs from many others,
+in having teeth on the top of its tongue. It is pleasing to the
+eye, the smell, and the taste, having a changeable colour, finned
+like a roach, covered with very small scales, giving out a
+delightful scent above all other fishes, and is in taste as good
+as any. These dolphins are very apt to follow our ships, not, so
+far as I think, from any love they bear for men, as some authors
+write, but to feed upon what may be thrown overboard. Whence it
+comes to pass that they often become food to us; for, when they
+swim close by the ships, they are struck by a broad instrument
+full of barbed points, called a harping-iron, to which a rope is
+fastened, by which to pull the instrument and the fish on board.
+This beautiful dolphin may be taken as an emblem of a race of
+men, who, under sweet countenances, carry sharp tongues. The
+bonitoes and albicores are much like our mackerels in colour,
+shape, and taste, but grow to a very large size. The
+flying-fishes live the most unhappy lives of all others, as they
+are persecuted in the water by the dolphins, bonitoes, and
+albicores, and when they endeavour to escape from their enemies
+in the water, by rising up in flight, they are assailed by
+ravenous fowls in the air, somewhat like our kites, which hover
+over the water in waiting for their appearance in the other
+element. These flying-fishes are like men who profess two trades
+and thrive in neither.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the morning of the 12th June, we espied our
+long-wished-for harbour, the bay of Saldanha, [Table-bay] about
+twelve leagues short from the Cape of Good Hope, into which we
+came happily to anchor that same forenoon. We here found one of
+the Company's ships, the Lion, commanded by Captain Newport, come
+from Surat, and homeward-bound for England. We made ourselves
+merry with each other on this happy meeting; and having a fair
+gale, the Lion sailed on the night of the 14th. We found here
+water in abundance, but little refreshments for our sick men,
+except fresh fish, as the natives brought us nothing. We remained
+in this harbour till the 28th, on which day we departed, the Swan
+steering her course for Bantam. The 29th we doubled the Cape of
+Good Hope, in the lat. of 35&deg; S. Off this cape there
+continually sets a most violent current to the westwards, whence
+it happens, when it is met by a strong contrary wind, their
+impetuous opposition occasions so rough a sea that some ships
+have been swallowed up, and many more endangered among these
+mountainous waves. Few ships pass this way without encountering a
+storm.</p>
+
+<p>The 22d of July we got sight of the great island of
+Madagascar, commonly called of St Lawrence, being between that
+island and the main, but touched not there. Proceeding on our
+course, on the 1st of August we fell in with a part of the main
+land of Africa, called Boobam,[224] in lat. 16&deg; 35' S. the
+variation being 13&deg; 12'. The 5th we drew near the little
+islands of Mohelia, Gazidia, and St Juan de Castro, [Moelia,
+Hinzuan or Johanna, Mayotta or St Christopher, and Augasi,]
+generally known by the name of the Komoro islands, in about the
+lat. of 12&deg; S.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 224: The head-land of Mosambique is
+probably here meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Early in the morning of the 6th of August, our men in the tops
+looking out for land, espied a sail about three or four leagues
+off directly in our course. About noon, the Globe, which was our
+smallest ship, and sailed better than the rest of the fleet, came
+up with her on the broadside to windward, and hailed her
+according to the custom of the sea, asking whence she came? She
+answered, indirectly, that she came from the sea, and her people
+insulted ours most outrageously, calling them thieves, rogues,
+heretics, and devils; and, in conclusion of their rude
+compliments, spoke in the loud language of the cannon's roar,
+discharging seven pieces of large artillery at our Globe, six of
+the balls piercing her hull, and maiming some of her men, but
+killing none. Our Globe replied in the same voice, and afterwards
+fell astern and stood in for our general and the rest of our
+fleet, now four sail in all, shewing us the discourtesy of the
+Portuguese.</p>
+
+<p>About three in the afternoon, the Charles, our admiral, came
+up with the Portuguese ship, which was the admiral of the caracks
+that sailed this year from Lisbon, but had parted from all the
+rest of their fleet. When within pistol-shot, Captain Benjamin
+Joseph, our commander, proceeded deliberately to work, offering
+treaty before he attempted revenge. So we saluted her with our
+trumpets, to which she replied with her wind-instruments. Captain
+Joseph then called out, that their commander might come on board,
+to make satisfaction for the wrong they had done to our consort.
+They made answer, that they had no boat; on which our general
+said he would send them one, and immediately caused his barge to
+be manned and sent to the carack, which brought back one of their
+officers and two mean men, with this answer from their commander,
+that he had resolved never to leave his ship, to which he might
+be forced, but would not be commanded to leave her.</p>
+
+<p>On receiving this message, Captain Joseph used them civilly
+who had brought it, and commanded them to be shewn our ship, and
+how she was prepared to vindicate our honour. This made the poor
+Portuguese much afraid, and they desired Captain Joseph to write
+a few words to their commander, which, added to their
+persuasions, might perchance induce him to come to terms. Willing
+to preserve his honour, and to prevent the effusion of blood,
+Captain Joseph caused a few words to be written to the Portuguese
+commander, to the following effect:--"Whereas the commander of
+the carack has offered violence to our ship the Globe, while
+sailing peaceably beside him, he is desired to come aboard
+immediately, and give satisfaction for that wrong, or else at his
+peril," &amp;c. He then sent back the Portuguese, accompanied by
+one of our master's mates, carrying the writing, together with
+this verbal message, "That if he refused to come, he would force
+him, or sink by his side." The words of dying men are said to be
+prophetic, so these his words came to pass, for he was slain not
+long after by a great shot from the carack.</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding this message, the Portuguese commander
+remained firmly to his resolute answer. Wherefore, on the return
+of our men, Captain Joseph himself fired the three first shots,
+which surely did them much mischief; as we conjectured, by the
+loud outcry we heard among them after these shots were fired. The
+shot now flew thick from both sides; and our captain, chearing
+his men to behave gallantly, ascended the half-deck, where he had
+not been above ten minutes when a great shot from the quarter of
+the carack deprived him of life in the twinkling of an eye. It
+hit him fair in the breast, beating his heart and other parts out
+of his body, which lay round him among his blood. After he was
+slain, our master continued the fight for about half an hour,
+when, considering that another person was to succeed in the
+supreme command, and the night approaching, he thought proper to
+desist, and having fallen astern, he hung out a flag as a signal
+of council, to call the captain of the vice-admiral on board,
+Captain Henry Pepwell, who was to succeed, together with the
+other masters, that they might consult about the prosecution of
+this enterprize. As the night was now come, it was resolved not
+to proceed any farther for the present. So the carack proceeded
+on her course, putting up a light on her poop, as if in defiance
+of us to follow, and about midnight came to anchor under the
+island of Moelia; and when we perceived this island, we too let
+fall our anchors.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the morning of the 7th, before day began to dawn, we
+prepared for a new assault, first recommending ourselves to God
+in prayer. When morning came, we found the carack so close to the
+shore, and the nearest of our other ships at least a league from
+us, that we held our hands for that day, waiting till the carack
+might weigh and stand out to sea, as fitter there to deal with
+her. In the afternoon, we chested our slain commander, and
+committed him to the deep, over against the isle of Moelia,
+omitting any ceremony of firing funeral-guns usual on such
+occasions, that the enemy might not know our loss.</p>
+
+<p>A little before night the carack put to sea, when we also
+weighed and made sail after her. The day now left us, and our
+proud enemy, unwilling, as it seems, to have the appearance of
+escaping by flight, put forth a light on his poop as before, as
+if for us to follow him, which we did to some purpose. The night
+being well spent, we again commended ourselves and our cause to
+God in prayer. Soon afterwards, the day began to dawn, and
+appeared as if covered by a red mantle, which proved a bloody one
+to many who now beheld the light for the last time. It was now
+resolved that our four ships were to take their turns in
+succession, to endeavour to force this proud Portuguese either to
+bend or break. Our ship, the Charles, played her part first;[225]
+and ere she had been half an hour engaged with her adversary, a
+shot from the carack hitting one of our iron guns on the
+half-deck, flew all in pieces, dangerously wounding our new
+general, and three other mariners who stood beside him. Captain
+Pepwell's left eye was beaten out, and he received two other
+wounds in his head, and a third in his leg, a ragged piece of the
+broken shot sticking fast in the bone, which seemed, by his
+complaining, to afflict him more than the rest. Thus was our new
+commander welcomed to his authority, and we all considered his
+wounds as mortal; but he lived till about fourteen months
+afterwards, when he died peaceably in his bed, on his way back to
+England.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 225: This account of the battle is chiefly
+taken from Terry, who is more particular in his narrative; but
+Childe says that Captain Pepwell, the new general, gave him leave
+to begin this day's action, as his ship sailed better, and that,
+after three or four broadsides, he gave place to the general.
+According to modern naval tactics, all four at once would have
+assailed the enemy, taking vantage stations on her quarters and
+bows.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>By the same shot, Mr Richard Hounsell, the master of our ship,
+had a great piece of the flesh of his arm carried off, which
+rendered him unserviceable for a time. The captain and master
+being thus disabled, deputed their authority to the chief
+master's mate, who behaved with great prudence and resolution.
+Thus we continued one after the other to fight all day, the
+vice-admiral and the Globe and James taking their turns in
+succession. Between three and four in the afternoon, the mainmast
+of the carack fell overboard, and presently afterwards the
+foremast and mizen followed, and she had received so many and
+large wounds in her thick sides, that her case was quite
+desperate, and she must soon either yield or perish. Her
+commander, Don Emanuel de Meneses, a brave and resolute person,
+stood in for the shore in this distressed condition, being not
+far from the island of Gazidia.[226] We pursued as far as we
+durst venture, without hazard of shipwreck, but gave over at five
+o'clock, when about a league from the shore, which is extremely
+steep, and no ground to be had within less than a cable's length
+of the rocks, the shore being moreover to leeward.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 226: According to Childe, it was the most
+northern of the islands, named Komoro, or Augasi, not far north
+from Moelia, where the fight began,--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We now sent off our barge with a flag of truce to speak the
+carack, and as he waved us with a similar flag, Mr Connock, our
+chief merchant, who was employed on this occasion, boldly went
+aboard the carack, and delivered a message to Don Emanuel,
+stating, that he brought an offer of life and peace if he would
+accept it; and as he deserved well for his undaunted valour, so
+he should be honourably and respectfully treated if he would put
+himself into our hands, and sent to Goa in safety. He, however,
+as an oak gathering strength from his wounds,[227] and contemning
+the misery he could not prevent, resolutely answered Mr Connock
+to the following purpose: "That no misfortune should make him
+alter his former resolution; for he was determined again to stand
+out to sea, if possible, and to encounter us again; and then, if
+forced by fire and sword, he might by bad chance be taken, but he
+would never yield; and, if taken alive, he hoped to find the
+respect due to a gentleman, till when we had our answer."</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 227: Duris, ut ilex tonsa bipennibus-ducit
+opes animumque ferro.--<i>Terry.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Our messenger was thus dismissed, and shortly afterwards this
+sore distressed ship, being entirely unmanageable for want of
+masts and sails, was forced by the winds and waves upon the
+adjacent island of Gazidia or Komoro, where she stuck fast
+between two rocks. Those who remained alive in the carack got
+ashore by means of their boats; and when all were landed,
+willing, as it would seem, to consume what they could not keep,
+they set their carack on fire, that she might not become our
+prize.[228] After leaving their ill-fated carack, the poor
+Portuguese were most inhumanly used by the barbarous islanders,
+who spoiled them of every thing they had brought on shore for
+their succour, and slew some of them for opposing their cupidity.
+Doubtless they had been all massacred, had they not been relieved
+by two small Arab vessels who were there engaged in trade, and
+which, I suppose in hope of a great reward, took them in, and
+conveyed them in safety to their own city of Goa.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 228: Childe says, he could not say whether
+she was fired accidentally or on purpose.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 9th, Mr Alexander Childe, who commanded
+one of the English ships, sent his mate, Anthony Fugars, ashore
+in his long-boat, to see if any of the Portuguese were saved, to
+fetch such away, and to learn how she was set on fire. But the
+carack was still burning, and not a man belonging to her was to
+be seen. There were many negro islanders on the coast, over
+against the carack, who held up a flag of truce to invite the
+English on shore, but it was impossible to land in that place, or
+any where within three leagues to the east or west, as the rocks
+were all extremely high and rugged.</p>
+
+<p>In this long conflict, only five men were lost out of our four
+ships, three belonging to the admiral, and two out of the James.
+Besides whom, there were about twenty wounded in our fleet, all
+of whom afterwards recovered. But, of 700 who sailed in the
+carack, there came not above 250 to Goa, as we were afterwards
+credibly informed. In this fearful engagement, our ship, the
+Charles, discharged 375 great shot against the adversary, as
+reported by our gunners, besides 100 musqueteers who plied their
+small arms all the time. Neither were the enemy idle, for our
+ship received at least 100 great shot from them, many of which
+dangerously took place in her hull. Our foremast was shot through
+the middle, our mainmast wounded, the main stay, and many of the
+main shrouds, cut asunder.</p>
+
+<p>After we had seen the carack set on fire, which was about
+midnight of the 8th, we stood off and on till morning, to see if
+we might find any thing in her ashes. Finding this ineffectual,
+we sought about for some place where we might find succour and
+refreshment for our sick and wounded on shore. The land was very
+high, and the sea every where too deep for anchoring, so that it
+was the 10th before we could find a good harbour, which was in
+the S.W. part of the island, where we anchored. The James came to
+anchor in twenty-two fathoms, with one of her anchors, while the
+other was only in fourteen. This harbour was over against a town
+called Mattoma.</p>
+
+<p>This island seemed very pleasant, full of goodly trees,
+covered all over with green pasture, and abounding in beeves,
+goats, poultry, sugar-canes, rice, plantains, lemons, oranges,
+and cocoa-nuts, with many other wholesome things; of all which we
+procured sufficient to relieve our whole company for a small
+quantity of white paper, a few glass beads, and penny knives. For
+instance, we bought as many oranges as would fill a hat for half
+a quarter of a sheet of white paper, and all other kinds of
+provision in the same proportion. The islanders brought much of
+their fruits to us in their little canoes, which are long and
+narrow boats, like troughs, hollowed out of single trees; but
+their cattle we bought on shore. I observed the people to be
+straight, well-limbed, and able-bodied men, of a very dark tawny
+colour. Most of the men, and all the women, were entirely naked,
+except merely enough to hide their parts of shame. Some few of
+the men wore long garments, after the fashion of the Arabs, whose
+language they spoke, and were likewise of the Mahometan religion,
+and so rigid, that they would not suffer us to come near their
+places of worship. They have good convenient dwellings, and fair
+sepulchres for their dead.</p>
+
+<p>They scorned to live under strict obedience to a king, whose
+residence was some miles up the country, as they required to have
+his leave, which was sent for, before they would sell us any
+provisions. When informed of our arrival, their king sent a
+message of welcome to our commander, together with a present of
+beeves, goats, and choice fruits; in return for which, he was
+well recompensed and contented, by a present of paper, and other
+English toys. We saw some Spanish money among them, of which they
+made so small account, that some of our men got rials of eight,
+in exchange for a little paper, or a few beads. What use they
+made of the paper, we could not guess. The cocoa-nut tree, of
+which this island has abundance, may have the pre-eminence of all
+trees, in my opinion, by its universal usefulness. Without the
+help of any other, one may build and furnish out a ship for sea,
+with every thing requisite. Of the body of this tree may be made
+timbers, planks, and masts; its gum may serve for paying the
+bottom; the rind of the same tree will make sails and cordage;
+and the large nut, being full of kernel and pleasant liquor, will
+serve those who navigate the ship both for meat and drink, as
+also for merchandize.</p>
+
+<p>Being well stored with these nuts, and other good provisions,
+after six days abode here, the breaches in our ships received in
+fight being all repaired, and our men well refreshed, we put
+again to sea on the 16th of August, with a prosperous wind. On
+the 24th, we passed under the line, without any heat to offend
+us, bending our course for Socotora, near the mouth of the Red
+Sea, an island whence comes our Socotorine aloes. But an adverse
+wind from the coast of Arabia prevented us from being able to
+fetch that island, which we passed on the 1st September.</p>
+
+<p>In the year before, our English fleet touched at this island,
+on which occasion the petty king came to the water-side, and
+hearing some of our wind-instruments, asked if they ever played
+David's Psalms, which he had heard of, being a Mahometan. He was
+answered by one who stood by, that they did. On which he
+observed, that it was an evil invention of him who first mingled
+music with religion; as God, before that, was worshipped in
+heart, but by this only in sound. I mean not by this story to
+condemn the use of music in churches; leaving it to him who bids
+us praise the Lord with stringed instruments and organs, to plead
+that cause.</p>
+
+<p>Missing our port of Socotora, we proceeded on our voyage; and,
+on the 4th of September, we celebrated a solemn funeral in memory
+of our slain commander; when, after sermon, the great guns and
+small arms gave a loud peal to his honourable remembrance. At
+night on the 6th September, to our great admiration and fear, the
+water of the sea seemed as white as milk. Others of our nation
+since, passing in the same course, have observed the same
+phenomenon, of which I am yet to learn the cause, as it was far
+from any shore, and we could find no ground.</p>
+
+<p>On the 21st of September we discovered the main land of India;
+and on the 22d had sight of Diu and Damaun, cities inhabited by
+the Portuguese. The 25th we came safely to anchor in Swally
+roads, within the bay of Cambay, which is the harbour for our
+fleet while in this part of India, when we were visited by the
+merchants of the Surat factory, the principal of whom was Mr
+Thomas Kerridge.</p>
+
+<p>S.2. <i>Description of the Mogul Empire</i></p>
+
+<p>Although this account of Hindoostan, or the Mogul empire in
+India, be very incorrect, and in some places hardly intelligible,
+it is here retained, as a curious record of the knowledge
+possessed on that subject by the English about 200 years ago. We
+have two editions of this account in Purchas, one appended to his
+narrative of Sir Thomas Roe, and the other in this relation by
+Terry, which he acknowledges to be the most correct, and which
+therefore is alone retained. On the present occasion, instead of
+encumbering the bottoms of our pages with the display of numerous
+explanatory notes on this topographical list of places and
+provinces, a running commentary has been introduced into the
+text, so far as seemed necessary, yet distinguished sufficiently
+from the original notices by Terry. The observations, by way of
+commentary, are marked, as this paragraph.--E.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>The large empire of the Great Mogul is bounded on the east by
+the kingdom of Maug;[229] on the west by Persia; on the north by
+the mountains of Caucasus [Hindoo-Kho] and Tartary; and on the
+south by the ocean, the Deccan, and the bay of Bengal. The Deccan
+is divided among three Mahometan kings and some Indian rajahs.
+This extensive monarchy of the Mogul is called, in the Persian
+language, by the Mahometan inhabitants, Indostan or Hindoostan,
+meaning the land of the Hindoos, and is divided into
+<i>thirty-seven</i> distinct and large provinces, which were
+anciently separate kingdoms. Their several names, with their
+principal cities, their rivers, situations, and borders, together
+with their length and breadth, I shall now enumerate, beginning
+at the north-west.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 229: Meckely, now a province of the Birman
+empire; perhaps called Maug in the text, from a barbarous tribe
+called the Muggs, or Maugs, who inhabit, or did inhabit, the
+mountains east of Bengal, and who are said to have laid waste and
+depopulated the Sunderbunds, or Delta of the
+Ganges.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+1. <i>Candahar,</i> the chief city of which is of the same name,
+lies N.W. from the heart or centre of the Mogul territory,
+bordering upon Persia, of which kingdom it was formerly a
+province. 
+
+<p>2. <i>Cabul,</i> with its chief city of the same name, lies in
+the extremest north-west corner of this empire, bordering to the
+north on Tartary for a great way. The river Nilab takes its rise
+in this country, and runs to the southwards, till it discharges
+its waters into the Indus.--This is a material error. The Nilab
+is the main stream of the Indus, and rises far to the north in
+Little Thibet, a great way N.E. of Cabul. The river of Cabul is
+the Kameh, which runs S.E. and joins the Nilab, Sinde, or Indus,
+a few miles above Attock. Another river, in the south of Cabul,
+called the Cow, or Coumul, follows a similar direction, and falls
+into the western side of the Indus, about forty miles below the
+Kameh.--E.</p>
+
+<p>3. <i>Multan,</i> Moultan or Mooltan, having its chief city of
+the same name, is south [south-east] from Cabul and Candahar, and
+on the west joins with Persia.--This is an error, as Hajykan, to
+be noticed next in order, is interposed.--E.</p>
+
+<p>4. <i>Hajacan,</i> or Hajykan, the kingdom of the Baloches,
+who are a stout warlike people, has no renowned city. The famous
+river Indus, called <i>Skind</i> [Sind or Sindeh] by the
+inhabitants, borders it on the east, and Lar, or Laristan, meets
+it on the west, a province belonging to Shah Abbas, the present
+king of Persia.--In modern geography, the country of the
+Ballogees, or Baloches, is placed considerably more to the
+north-west, bordering on the south-east of Candahar; and the
+Sewees are placed more immediately west of this province. The
+seats, however, of barbarous hordes, in a waste and almost desert
+country, are seldom stationary for any continuance; and the
+Ballogees and Sewees are probably congeneric tribes, much
+intermixed, and having no fixed boundaries. We have formerly seen
+the Baloches, or a tribe of that nation, inhabiting the oceanic
+coast of Persia about Guadel, and one of their tribes may have
+been in possession of Hajykan, which perhaps derived its name
+from their chief or khan having made the Haji, or pilgrimage of
+Mecca. The assertion that Hajykan joins with Lar, or Laristan, is
+grossly erroneous, as the eastern provinces of Persia which
+confine with Hindoostan, are Segistan in the north, bordering
+with Candahar, and Mekran in the south, bordering with the
+provinces of Hindoostan which are to the west of the Indus. Lar
+or Laristan is a Persian province within the gulf of Persia, at
+least 850 English miles from the most westerly part of
+Hindoostan.--E.</p>
+
+<p>5. <i>Buckor</i>, or Backar, its chief city being
+Buckor-Suckor. The river Indus pervades this province, which it
+greatly enriches.--In modern maps, the city of Backar is placed
+in a small island in the middle of the Indus, at the junction of
+the Dummoddy from the N.E. Suckar, whence probably our word sugar
+is derived, is given as a distinct place, on the western side of
+the Indus. Indeed, in the map of India given in the Pilgrims,
+Backar and Suckar are made distinct places, but their situations
+are reversed.--E.</p>
+
+<p>6. <i>Tatta</i>, with its chief city of the same name. This
+province is exceedingly fertile and pleasant, being divided into
+many islands by the Indus, the chief arm of which meets the sea
+at Synde, a place very famous for curious handicrafts.--The most
+western branch of the Indus, called the Pitty river, from a place
+of that name on its western shore near the mouth, is probably
+that here meant. That branch leads to Larry-bunder, the sea-port
+of Tatta; and the Synde of Terry is probably the Diul-sinde of
+other authors, a place situated somewhat in this neighbourhood,
+but which is not to be found in modern maps.--E.</p>
+
+<p>7. <i>Soret</i>, the chief city of which is called Janagur, is
+a small, but rich province, which lies west from Guzerat, having
+the ocean to the south.--Soret is not now recognized as a
+distinct province or district, but seems the modern Werrear, the
+western district of Guzerat, Rhadunpoor appearing to be its chief
+town. Janagur, in this district, is on the west side of the river
+Butlass, or Banass, which runs into the head of the gulf of
+Cutch.--E.</p>
+
+<p>8. <i>Jesselmere</i>, of which the chief city has the same
+name, joins with Soret Backar and Tatta, being to the south of
+Soret and Tatta, and having Backar on the west.</p>
+
+<p>9. <i>Attock</i>, the chief city being of the same name, lies
+on the east side of the Indus, which parts it from Hajykan.--This
+account is erroneous, as Attock-Benares is much farther up the
+river Indus than Hajykan, having the eastern extremity of Cabul
+on the opposite side of the Indus.--E.</p>
+
+<p>10. <i>Punjab</i>, which signifies the <i>five waters</i>,
+because it is seated among five rivers, all tributaries to the
+Indus, which, somewhat to the south of Lahore, form only one
+river. This is a great kingdom, and extremely rich and fertile.
+Lahore, the chief city, is well built, very large, populous, and
+rich, being the chief mart of trade in all India.</p>
+
+<p>11. <i>Chishmeere</i>, Kyshmir, Cachmir, or Cashmere, its
+chief city being Siranakar. The river Phat passes through this
+country, and, after creeping about many islands, falls into the
+Indus.--The rivers of Cashmere, here called the Phat, are the
+Chota-sing, or Jellum, in the N. and the Jellium, or Colhumah, in
+the S. which unite in the W. to form the Jhylum or Babut, the
+Phat or Bhat of Terry and Purchas, and the Hydaspes of the
+ancients, one of the <i>five rivers</i> of the Indus. The present
+capital of Cashmere is likewise named Cashmere; but has in its
+close neighbourhood a town or fortress called Sheergur, the
+Siranakar of Terry.--E.</p>
+
+<p>12. <i>Banchish</i>, with its chief city named Bishur. It lies
+east southerly from Cashmere, from which it is divided by the
+river Indus.--No such province or city is to be found in the
+modern geography of Hindoostan, neither any names in the
+indicated direction that have any resemblance to these. In the
+map of the Mogul empire in the Pilgrims, appended to the journal
+of Sir Thomas Roe, Banchish and Bishar are placed on a river
+named the Kaul, being the <i>fourth</i> of the Punjab or five
+rivers, counting from the west, and therefore probably the Ravey,
+or Hydraotes of the ancients. Near the head of that river, and to
+the east of Cashmere, is a town, called Kishtewar, which may
+possibly have been the Bishur of Terry: But there is a
+little-known district near the head of the Jumna, S.S.E. from
+Cashmere, named Besseer, that has considerable resemblance in
+sound to Bishur, and is in the indicated direction.--E.</p>
+
+<p>13. <i>Jeugapor</i>, with its chief city likewise so named,
+lies on the Kaul, one of the five rivers that water the
+Punjab.--The only place upon the Ravey, which answers to the
+Kaul, which has the smallest resemblance with Jengapor, or
+Jenupur, as it is likewise called by Purchas, is Shawpoor, N.E.
+from Agra. Yet Jaypoor, otherwise called Jyenagur, in Ajmeer, is
+more probably the district and city here meant, though not in the
+Punjab.--E.</p>
+
+<p>14. <i>Jenba</i>, its chief city so called, lies east of the
+Punjab.--This may possibly be Jambae, north of Lahore.--E.</p>
+
+<p>15. <i>Delli</i>, or Delhi, its chief city being of the same
+name, lies between Jenba and Agra, the river Jemni, which runs
+through Agra and falls into the Ganges, begins in this province.
+Delhi is a great and ancient city, the seat of the Mogul's
+ancestors, and where most of them are interred.--The Jumnah, or
+Jemni of Terry, rises far to the north of Delhi, in the
+high-peaked mountain of Cantal to the east of Cashmere.--E.</p>
+
+<p>16. <i>Bando</i>, its chief city so called, borders with Agra
+on the west.--No such name is to be found in modern maps.--E.</p>
+
+<p>17. <i>Malwa</i> is a very fertile province, of which
+Rantipore is the chief city.--In the other edition of this list
+in the Pilgrims, Ugen, Nar, and Sering, or Oojain, Indore, and
+Serong, are said to have been the capitals of Malwa. The
+Rantipore of Terry may have been that now called
+Ramypoor.--E.</p>
+
+<p>18. <i>Chitor</i>, an ancient and great kingdom, its chief
+city being of the same name.--Chitore is in the south of Ajmeer.
+In the edition of this list given by Purchas at the end of the
+journal of Sir Thomas Roe, he gives the following account of
+Chitore: "Chitore stands upon a mighty hill, and is walled round
+in a circuit of ten English miles. There still remain at this
+place above an hundred temples, the palace of the ancient kings,
+and many brave pillars of carved stone. There is but one ascent
+to the place, cut out of the solid rock, and passing through four
+magnificent gateways. Within the walls are the ruins of 100,000
+houses of stone, but it is now uninhabited. This was doubtless
+one of the residences of Porus, and was won from the Ranna, his
+descendant, by Akbar shah, the father of the reigning Mogul. The
+Ranna fled into the fastnesses of his mountains, and took up his
+residence at Odeypoor; but was at length induced, in 1614, to
+acknowledge the Mogul as his superior lord, by Sultan Churrum,
+third son of the present emperor Shah Jehanguire. This kingdom
+lies N.W. from Candeish, N.E. from Guzerat, and in the way
+between Agra and Surat; the Ranna keeping among the hills to the
+west of Ahmedabad.--"<i>Purch.</i></p>
+
+<p>19. <i>Guzerat</i> is a goodly and mighty kingdom, and
+exceedingly rich, which incloses the bay of Cambay. The river
+Taptee waters the city of Surat, which trades to the Red Sea, to
+Acheen, and to divers other places.</p>
+
+<p>20. <i>Khamdesh</i>, the chief city of which is Brampore,
+[Boorhanpoor, or Burhampore,] which is large and populous.
+Adjoining to this province is a petty prince called Partap-shah,
+tributary to the Mogul; and this is the most southerly part of
+the Mogul dominions.</p>
+
+<p>21. <i>Berar</i>, the chief city of which is called Shahpoor.
+The southernmost part of this province likewise bounds the Mogul
+empire.--The Shahpoor of Terry may possibly be Saipoor in the
+north of Berar. In modern days, the chief cities of the great
+province or kingdom of Berar, now belonging to a Mahratta chief;
+are Nagpoor, Ruthunpoor, and Sonepoor.--E.</p>
+
+<p>22. <i>Narwar</i>, its chief city being Gohud, is watered by a
+fair river that falls into the Ganges.--This province of Narwar,
+now called Gohud, from its chief city, is to be carefully
+distinguished from Marwar to the westwards.--E.</p>
+
+<p>22. <i>Gualior</i>, with its chief city of the same name, in
+which the Mogul has a great treasury in bullion. In this city
+likewise there is an exceedingly strong castle, in which state
+prisoners are kept.--Gualior is, properly speaking, in the same
+province or district with Gohud.--E.</p>
+
+<p>24. <i>Agra</i> is a principal and great province, its chief
+city being of the same name. From Agra to Lahore, the two chief
+cities of this empire, the distance is about 400 English miles,
+the country in all that distance being without a hill, and the
+road being planted the whole way with trees on both sides,
+forming a beautiful avenue.</p>
+
+<p>25. <i>Sanbal</i>, with its chief city of the same name. The
+river Jumna parts this province from that called Narwar.--This
+province and city are not to be traced in modern maps.--E.</p>
+
+<p>26. <i>Bakar</i>, the chief city of which is Bikaneer, lies on
+the west side of the Ganges.--Nothing resembling either name can
+now be found in the indicated situation in modern maps. Bicaneer
+is a district and town in the desert, far west of the
+Ganges.--E.</p>
+
+<p>27. <i>Nagracutt</i>, or Nakarkut, with its chief city of the
+same name, in which there is a temple most richly adorned, the
+ceiling and pavement being of plates of pure gold. In this place
+they have an idol called Matta, visited yearly by many thousands
+of the Indians, who, from devotion, cut out part of their
+tongues, which they sacrifice at his altar. In this province
+likewise, there is another famous place of pilgrimage, Jallamaka,
+where there are daily to be seen incessant eruptions of fire, out
+of cold springs and hard rocks, before which the idolaters fall
+down and worship.--In the edition of this list, appended by
+Purchas to the journal of Sir Thomas Roe, this district and city
+are said to be in the northeasternmost confines of the Mogul
+dominions, N.E. from the head of the bay of Bengal. This
+description is however entirely at variance with the accompanying
+map in the Pilgrims, in which Nagracutt and its capital are
+placed east from the Punjab; the capital being on the easternmost
+of the five rivers of the Setlege, and towards its head. In the
+edition of this list given by Churchill, as an appendix likewise
+to Sir Thomas Roe, Nagracutt is said to lie to the north, between
+the Punjab and Jamboe. In our best modern maps, no district or
+place, having the smallest resemblance in name, is to be found in
+any of these indicated situations. Terry gives no reference as to
+situation; so that we may conjecture that Nagracutt may refer to
+Nucker-gaut, the passage of the Ganges through the Sewalick
+mountains, between Serinagur and Hindoostan.--E.</p>
+
+<p>28. <i>Siba</i>, the chief city of which is Hardwair, or
+Hurdwar, where the famous river Ganges seems to begin, and issues
+out of a rock, which the superstitious Gentiles imagine resembles
+a cow's head, which animal they hold in the highest veneration;
+and to this place they resort daily in great numbers to wash
+themselves.</p>
+
+<p>29. <i>Kakares</i>, the principal cities being Dankalec and
+Purhola. This country is very mountainous, and is divided from
+Tartary by the mountains of Caucasus, being the farthest north of
+any part of the Mogul dominions.--In the map of Purchas, this
+province or kingdom is called Kares, and is placed directly to
+the north of where the Ganges breaks through the Sewalick
+mountains, above Hurdwar, at the <i>Cow's-mouth</i>. In that
+direction are the little-known districts of Serinagur,
+Badry-cazram, and others; but no names either of towns or
+districts that in the least resemble those given by
+Terry.--E.</p>
+
+<p>30. <i>Gor</i>, its chief city of the same name. This province
+is full of mountains, and in it begins the river Persilis, which
+discharges its waters into the Ganges.--In the other copy of this
+list in Purchas, so often already referred to, Gor is said to lie
+in the northern part of the Mogul dominions. From this, and the
+mountainous nature of the country, as stated by Terry, it may
+possibly be Gorcah, one of the little-known <i>twenty-four
+rajahs</i>, to the west of Napaul; and the Persilis of Terry may
+be the Sursutty or the Marshandy, both head streams of the
+Gunduck.--E.</p>
+
+<p>31. <i>Pitan</i>, and its chief city so named. The river Kanda
+waters this province, and falls into the Ganges on its
+confines.--This is probably one of the <i>twenty-four</i> rajahs,
+called Peytahn, in the mountainous country to the north of Oude,
+which is watered by several of the head streams of the Gunduck
+and Booree or Rapty rivers.--E.</p>
+
+<p>32. <i>Kanduana</i>, the chief city of which is called
+Karhakatenka. The river Sersili parts it from Pitan; and this
+province, with Pitan and Gor, are the north-east boundaries of
+this great monarchy.--The indicated connection with Gor and
+Pitan, or Gorcah and Peytahn, would lead to suppose that Napaul
+is here meant. Karhakatenka may possibly be some name of
+Catmandoo, or may have some reference to Kyraut, a district in
+the east of Napaul, bordering on Bootan. The river Sersili of
+this district is evidently the Persilis mentioned in Gor, and may
+refer to the Sursutty.--E.</p>
+
+<p>33. <i>Patna</i>, the chief city of which has the same name.
+The river Ganges bounds this province on the west, and the
+Sersilis on the east. It is a very fertile province.--In the
+former edition of this list by Purchas, this province is said to
+be watered by four rivers, the Ganges, Jumna, Sersili, and Kanda,
+all of which rivers here unite. Patna is seated on the south side
+of the Ganges, which is joined a little way higher up by the
+Jumna. Opposite to Patna the Gunduck falls into the Ganges,
+probably the Kanda of Purchas, of which the Sursutty, formerly
+supposed to be the same with the Sersili, or Persilis, is one of
+the feeders. Patna is well known as a principal city of
+Bahar.--E.</p>
+
+<p>34. <i>Jesual</i>, the chief city of which is called Rajapore,
+lies east of Patna.--This may possibly refer to the district and
+city of Hajipoor in Bahar, to the N.E. of Patna.--E.</p>
+
+<p>35. <i>Mevat</i>, the chief city of which province is Narnol,
+is a very mountainous country.--In the map of the Pilgrims, Mevat
+and Narnol are placed to the east of Jesual, but the geography of
+this part of Hindoostan in that map is utterly unintelligible,
+and no conjecture can be hazarded respecting either Mevat or
+Narnol.--E.</p>
+
+<p>36. <i>Udessa</i>, the chief city of which is called Jokanat,
+is the most easterly territory in the kingdom of the Mogul.--In
+the other edition of this list given by Purchas, Udessa, or
+Udeza, is said to border on the kingdom of Maug, a savage people
+dwelling between this province and the kingdom of Pegu. Its
+eastern situation would lead to the province of Chittagong or
+Islambabad. The Maugs, or Mugs, are probably the barbarous
+mountaineers of Meckley to the north of Aracan; but no names in
+modern maps have any reference to Udessa, Udeza, or Jokanat,
+unless Jokanat be some strange corruption of Chittagong.--E.</p>
+
+<p>37. <i>Bengal</i>, a mighty and fertile kingdom, bounded by
+the gulf or bay of the same name, into which the river Ganges
+discharges itself by four great branches, into which it
+divides.--In the other edition of this list, by Purchas, so often
+referred to, Ragamahall and Dakaka, or Rajemal and Dacca, are
+mentioned as the chief cities of Bengal. It would require far too
+long a commentary, to explain some farther ignorant indications
+of the havens and provinces of Bengal, contained in that former
+list, and in the map of the Pilgrims; both being so faulty in
+positions, and so corrupted in the names, as to be useless and
+unintelligible. By the labours of Rennel, as since extended and
+improved by Arrowsmith, the geography of Bengal is now as
+completely elucidated as that of Britain.--E.</p>
+
+<p>Here I must take notice of a material error in our
+geographers, who, in their globes and maps, make Hindoostan and
+China neighbours, though many large countries are interposed
+between them. Their great distance may appear, from the long
+travels of the Indian merchants, who are usually more than two
+years in their journey and return, between Agra and the wall of
+China. The length of these before-named provinces, from N.W. to
+S.E. is at least 1000 cosses, every Indian coss being two English
+miles. From N. to S. the extent is about 1400 miles. The greatest
+breadth, from N.E. to S.W. is about 1500 miles. The northernmost
+part is in 43&deg; of north latitude.[230]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 230: The northern mountains of Cashmere,
+are only in lat. 35&deg; 30' N. so that the 43&deg; of the text
+is probably a mistake for 34&deg;.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>To give an exact account of all these provinces, were more
+than I am able to undertake; yet, from what I have observed of a
+few, I may venture to conjecture concerning the rest, and I am
+convinced that the Great Mogul, considering the extent of his
+territories, his wealth, and the rich commodities of his
+dominions, is the greatest known monarch of the east, if not in
+the whole world. This widely extended sovereignty is so rich and
+fertile, and so abounding in all things for the use of man, that
+it is able to subsist and flourish of itself, without the help of
+any neighbour. To speak first of food, which nature requires
+most. This land abounds in singularly good wheat, rice, barley,
+and various other grains, from which to make bread, the staff of
+life. Their wheat grows like ours, but the grain is somewhat
+larger and whiter, of which the inhabitants make most pure and
+well-relished bread. The common people make their bread in cakes,
+which they bake or fire on portable iron hearths or plates, which
+they carry with them on their journeys, using them in their
+tents. This seems to be an ancient custom, as appears from the
+instance of Sarah in our bible, when she entertained the
+angels.</p>
+
+<p>To their bread, they have great abundance of other excellent
+provisions, as butter and cheese in great plenty, made from the
+milk of their numerous cows, sheep, and goats. They have likewise
+a large animal, called a buffalo, having a thick smooth skin
+without hair, the females of which give excellent milk. Their
+flesh resembles beef, but is not so sweet or wholesome. They have
+plenty of venison of several kinds, as red and fallow deer, elks,
+and antelopes. These are not any where kept in parks, the whole
+empire being as it were a forest, so that they are seen every
+where in travelling through the country; and they are free game
+for all men, except within a certain distance of where the king
+happens to reside. They have also plenty of hares, with a variety
+of land and water fowl, and abundance of fish, which it were too
+tedious to enumerate. Of fowls, they have geese, ducks, pigeons,
+partridges, quails, pheasants, and many other good sorts, all to
+be had at low rates. I have seen a good sheep bought for about
+the value of our shilling: four couple of hens for the same
+price; a hare for a penny; three partridges for the same money;
+and so in proportion for other things.</p>
+
+<p>The cattle of this country differ from ours, in having a great
+bunch of grisly flesh on the meeting of their shoulders. Their
+sheep have great bob-tails of considerable weight, and their
+flesh is as good as our English mutton, but their wool is very
+coarse. They have also abundance of salt, and sugar is so
+plentiful, that it sells, when well refined, for two-pence a
+pound, or less. Their fruits are numerous, excellent, abundant,
+and cheap; as musk-melons, water-melons, pomegranates,
+pomecitrons, lemons, oranges, dates, figs, grapes, plantains,
+which are long round yellow fruits, which taste like our Norwich
+pears; mangoes, in shape and colour like our apricots, but more
+luscious, and ananas or pine-apples, to crown all, which taste
+like a pleasing compound of strawberries, claret-wine,
+rose-water, and sugar. In the northern parts of the empire, they
+have plenty of apples and pears. They have every where abundance
+of excellent roots, as carrots, potatoes, and others; also garlic
+and onions, and choice herbs for sallads. In the southern parts,
+ginger grows almost every where.</p>
+
+<p>I must here mention a pleasant clear liquor called
+<i>taddy</i>, which issues from a spungy tree, growing straight
+and tall without boughs to the top, and there spreads out in
+branches resembling our English colewarts. They make their
+incisions, under which they hang small earthenware pots; and the
+liquor which flows out in the night is as pleasant to the taste
+as any white wine, if drank in the morning early, but it alters
+in the day by the sun's heat, becoming heady, ill-tasted and
+unwholesome. It is a most penetrating medicinal drink, if taken
+early and in moderation, as some have experienced to their great
+happiness, by relieving them from the tortures of the stone, that
+tyrant of maladies and opprobrium of the doctors.</p>
+
+<p>At Surat, and thence to Agra and beyond, it only rains during
+one season of the year, which begins when the sun comes to the
+northern tropic, and continues till he returns again to the line.
+These violent rains are ushered in, and take their leave, by most
+fearful tempests of thunder and lightning, more terrible than I
+can express, but which seldom do any harm. The reason of this may
+be the subtile nature of the air, breeding fewer
+<i>thunder-stones</i>, than where the air is grosser and more
+cloudy. In these three months, it rains every day more or less,
+and sometimes for a whole quarter of the moon without
+intermission. Which abundance of rain, together with the heat of
+the sun, so enriches the soil, which they never force by manure,
+that it becomes fruitful for all the rest of the year, as that of
+Egypt is by the inundations of the Nile. After this season of
+rain is over, the sky becomes so clear, that scarcely is a single
+cloud to be seen for the other nine months. The goodness of the
+soil is evident from this circumstance, that though the ground,
+after the nine months of dry weather, looks altogether like
+barren sands, it puts on an universal coat of green within seven
+days after the rains begin to fall. Farther to confirm this,
+among the many hundreds of acres I have seen in corn in India, I
+never saw any that did not grow up as thick as it could well
+stand. Their ground is tilled by ploughs drawn by oxen; the
+seed-time being in May or the beginning of June, and the harvest
+in November and December, the most temperate months in all the
+year. The ground is not inclosed, except near towns and villages,
+which stand very thick. They do not mow their grass for hay as we
+do; but cut it either green or withered, when wanted. They sow
+abundance of tobacco, but know not the way to cure it and make it
+strong, as is done in America.</p>
+
+<p>The country is beautified by many woods, in which are a great
+variety of goodly trees; but I never saw any there of the kinds
+we have in England. In general their trees are full of sap, which
+I ascribe to the fatness of the soil. Some have leaves as broad
+as bucklers; others are much divided into small portions, like
+the leaves of ferns. Such are those of the tamarind tree, which
+bears an acid fruit in a pod somewhat like our beans, and is most
+wholesome to cool and purify the blood. One of their trees is
+worthy of being particularly noticed: Out of its branches there
+grow certain sprigs or fibres, which hang downwards, and extend
+till they touch the ground, in which they strike roots, and
+become afterwards new trunks and firm supporters to the boughs
+and arms; whence these trees come in time to grow to a great
+height, and extend to an incredible breadth.[231] All trees in
+the southern parts of India are perpetually clothed in verdure
+Their flowers rather delight the eye than please the sense of
+smelling, having beautiful colours, but few of them, except roses
+and one or two other kinds, are any way fragrant.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 231: The Banian tree, a species of Indian
+fig.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>India is watered by many goodly rivers, the two chief of which
+are the Indus and the Ganges. There is this remarkable in the
+water of the Ganges, that a pint of it weighs less by an ounce
+than that of any other river in the empire; and therefore,
+wherever the Mogul happens to reside, it is brought to him for
+his drinking. Besides rivers, there are abundance of well-fed
+springs, on which they bestow great cost in many places,
+constructing many stone-buildings in the form of ponds, which
+they call <i>tanks</i>, some of which exceed a mile or two in
+circuit, made round or square or polygonal, girt all round with
+handsome stone-walls, within which are steps of well-dressed
+stone encompassing the water, for people to go down on every aide
+to procure supplies. These tanks are filled during the rainy
+season, and contain water for the supply of those who dwell far
+from springs or rivers, till the wet season again returns. Water,
+the most ancient beverage in the world, is the common drink of
+India, being more sweet and pleasant than ours, and agrees better
+with the constitution in this hot country than any other liquor.
+Some small quantity of wine is made among them, which they call
+arrack, but is not common, being distilled from sugar, and the
+spicy rind of a tree, which they call <i>jagra</i>. This is very
+wholesome, if used in moderation. Many of the people, who are
+strict in their religion, use no wine at all. They use a liquor
+which is more wholesome than pleasant, called <i>cohha</i>; being
+a black seed boiled in water, which does not much alter the taste
+of the water, but is an excellent helper of digestion, serving to
+quicken the spirits, and to purify the blood.[232] There is also
+another help for digestion and to comfort the stomach, used by
+those who refrain from wine. This is an herb called betel, or
+<i>paune</i>, its leaf resembling that of our ivy. They chew this
+leaf along with a hard nut, called <i>areka</i>, somewhat like a
+nutmeg, mixing a little pure white lime among the leaves; and
+when they have extracted the juice, they throw away the remains.
+This has many rare qualities: It preserves the teeth, comforts
+the brain, strengthens the stomach, and prevents a bad
+breath.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 232: The author here describes coffee, now
+so universally known in Europe.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Their houses are generally very mean, except in the cities,
+where I have seen many fair buildings. Many of the houses in
+these are high, with flat roofs, where, in the cool of the
+mornings and evenings, they enjoy the fresh air. Their houses
+have no chimneys, as they use no fires, except for dressing their
+victuals. In their upper rooms, they have many windows and doors,
+for admitting light and air, but use no glass. The materials of
+their best houses are bricks and stone, well squared and built,
+as I have observed in Ahmedabad, which may serve as an instance
+for all. This is an extensive and rich city, compassed about with
+a strong stone-wall, and entered by twelve handsome gates. Both
+in their towns and villages, they have usually many fair trees
+among the houses, being a great defence against the violence of
+the sun. These trees are commonly so numerous and thick, that a
+city or town, when seen at a distance from some commanding
+eminence, seems a wood or thicket.</p>
+
+<p>The staple commodities of this empire are indigo and cotton.
+To produce cotton, they sow seeds, which grow up into bushes like
+our rose-trees. These produce first a yellow blossom, which falls
+off, and leaves a pod about the size of a man's thumb, in which
+the substance at first is moist and yellow. As this ripens, it
+swells larger, till at length it bursts the covering, the cotton
+being then as white as snow. It is then gathered. These shrubs
+continue to bear for three or four years, when they have to be
+rooted out, and new ones substituted. Of this vegetable wool, or
+cotton, they fabricate various kinds of pure white cloth, some of
+which I have seen as fine as our best lawns, if not finer. Some
+of the coarser sorts they dye in various colours, or stain with a
+variety of curious figures.</p>
+
+<p>The ships that go usually from Surat to Mokha, are of
+exceeding great burden, some of them, as I believe, exceeding
+1400 or 1600 tons; but they are ill built, and though they have
+good ordnance, they are unable for any defence. In these ships
+there are yearly a vast number of passengers: As, for instance,
+in that year in which we left India, there came 1700 persons,
+most of whom went not for profit, but out of devotion, to visit
+the sepulchre of Mahomet at Medina near Mecca, about 150 leagues
+from Mokha. Those who have been upon this pilgrimage are ever
+after called <i>hoggeis</i>, [<i>hajim</i>] or holy men. This
+ship, from Surat for the Red Sea, begins her voyage about the
+20th of March and returns to Surat about the end of September
+following. The voyage is short, and might easily be made in two
+months; but during the long season of the rains, and a little
+before and after, the winds are mostly so violent that there is
+no putting to sea without extreme hazard. The cargo of this ship,
+on its return, is usually worth &pound;200,000 sterling, mostly
+in gold and silver. Besides this, and the quantities of money
+which come yearly out of Europe, which I do not pretend to
+calculate, many streams of silver flow continually thither, and
+there abide. It is lawful for all to bring in silver, and to
+carry away commodities, but it is a capital crime to carry away
+any great sums.</p>
+
+<p>All the coin or bullion that comes to this country is
+presently melted down and refined, and coined with the stamp of
+the Mogul, being his name and title in Persian characters. This
+coin is purer silver than any other that I know, being of virgin
+silver without alloy, so that in the Spanish dollar, the purest
+money in Europe, there is some loss. Their money is called
+<i>rupees</i>, which are of divers values, the meanest being
+worth two shillings, and the best about two shillings and
+nine-pence. This is their general money of account. There is in
+Guzerat a coin of inferior value, called <i>mamoodies</i>, worth
+about twelve-pence each. Both these and the rupees are likewise
+coined in halves and quarters; so that three-pence is the
+smallest piece of current silver in the country. That which
+passes current for small change is brass money, which they call
+<i>pices</i>, of which three, or thereabout, are worth an English
+penny. These are made so massy, that the brass in them, when put
+to other uses, is well worth the quantity of silver at which they
+are rated. Their silver money is made both square and round; but
+so thick, that it never breaks or wears out.</p>
+
+<p>For farther commodities; India yields great store of silk,
+which they weave very ingeniously, sometimes mixed with gold or
+silver. They make velvets, sattins, and taffetas, but not so rich
+as those of Italy. This country also produces many drugs and
+gums, and particularly the gum-lac, from which hard sealing-wax
+is made. The earth also yields abundant minerals, as lead, iron,
+copper, and brass, and, as they say, silver; yet, though this be
+true, they need not work their silver mines, being already so
+abundantly supplied with that metal from other nations. They have
+spices from other countries, and especially from Sumatra, Java,
+and the Molucca islands. They have curious pleasure gardens,
+planted with fruit-trees and delightful flowers, to which nature
+lends daily such ample supply, that they seem never to fade. In
+these places they have pleasant fountains, in which to bathe, and
+other delights by various conveyances of water, whose silent
+murmurs sooth their senses to sleep, in the hot season of the
+day.</p>
+
+<p>Lest this remote country might seem an earthly paradise,
+without any inconveniences, I must notice that it contains many
+lions, tigers, wolves, and jackals, which are a kind of wild
+dogs, besides many other noxious and hurtful animals. In their
+rivers they have many crocodiles, and on the land many overgrown
+snakes and serpents, with other venomous and pernicious
+creatures. In the houses we often meet with scorpions, whose
+stinging is most painful and even deadly, unless the part be
+immediately anointed with an oil made of scorpions.[233] The
+abundance of flies in those parts is likewise an extreme
+annoyance; as, in the heat of the day, their numbers are so
+prodigious, that we cannot have peace or rest for them in any
+part. They cover our meat the moment it is set on the table,
+wherefore we are obliged to have men standing ready to drive them
+away with napkins, while we are eating. In the night, likewise,
+we are much disquieted with musquetos, like our gnats, but
+somewhat less; and, in the cities, there are such numbers of
+large hungry rats, that they often bite people as they sleep in
+their beds.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 233: This is a mere fancy, as any bland oil
+is equally efficacious.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In this country the winds, which are called monsoons, blow
+constantly, or altering only a few points, for six months from
+the south, and other six months from the north. The months of
+April and May, and the beginning of June, till the rains come,
+are extremely hot; and the wind, which then sometimes blows
+gently over the parched ground, becomes so heated, as much
+oppresses all who are exposed to it: Yet God so mercifully
+provides for our relief, that most commonly he sends so strong a
+gale as greatly tempers the sultry air. Sometimes the wind blows
+very high during the hot and dry season, raising up vast
+quantities of dust and sand, like dark clouds pregnant with rain,
+and which often prodigiously annoy the people among whom they
+fall. But there is no country without its inconveniences; for the
+wise Disposer of all events hath attempered bitter things with
+sweet, to teach mankind that there is no true or perfect
+contentment to be found, but only in the kingdom of God.</p>
+
+<p>This country has many excellent horses, which the inhabitants
+know well how to manage. Besides those bred in the country, they
+have many of the Tartarian, Persian, and Arabian breeds, which
+last is considered as the best in the world. They are about as
+large as ours, and are valued among them at as dear a rate as we
+usually esteem ours, perhaps higher. They are kept very daintily,
+every good horse being allowed one man to dress and feed him.
+Their provender is a species of grain called <i>donna</i>,
+somewhat like our pease, which are boiled, and then given cold to
+the horses, mixed with coarse sugar; and twice or thrice a week
+they have butter given them to scour their bodies. There are
+likewise in this country a great number of camels, dromedaries,
+mules, asses, and some rhinoceroses. These are huge beasts,
+bigger than the fattest oxen to be seen in England, and their
+skins lie upon their bodies in plaits or wrinkles.</p>
+
+<p>They have many elephants, the Great Mogul having not fewer
+than 1400 for his own use, and all the nobles of the country have
+more or less, some having to the number of an hundred. Though the
+largest of all terrestrial animals, the elephants are wonderfully
+tractable, except that they are mad at times; but at all other
+times, a little boy is able to rule the largest of them. I have
+seen some thirteen feet high; but I have been often told that
+some are fifteen feet in height at the least. Their colour is
+universally black, their skins very thick and smooth, and without
+hair. They take much delight to bathe themselves in water, and
+they swim better than any beast I know. They lie down and rise
+again at pleasure, as other beasts do. Their pace is not swift,
+being only about three miles an hour; but they are the surest
+footed beasts in the world, as they never endanger their riders
+by stumbling. They are the most docile of all creatures, and of
+those we account merely possessed of instinct, they come nearest
+to reason. Lipsius, <i>Cent</i>. 1, <i>Epist</i>. 50, in his
+observations, taken from others, writes more concerning them than
+I can confirm, or than any can credit, as I conceive; yet I can
+vouch for many things which seem to be acts of reason rather than
+of mere brute sense, which we call instinct. For instance, an
+elephant will do almost any thing which his keeper commands. If
+he would have him terrify a man, he will make towards him as if
+he meant to tread him in pieces, yet does him no hurt. If he
+would have him to abuse a man, he will take up dirt, or kennel
+water, in his trunk, and dash it in his face. Their trunks are
+long grisly snouts, hanging down betwixt their tusks, by some
+called their hand, which they use very dexterously on all
+occasions.</p>
+
+<p>An English merchant, of good credit, told me the following
+story of an elephant, as having happened to his own knowledge at
+Ajimeer, the place where the Mogul then resided:--This elephant
+used often to pass through the bazar, or market-place, where a
+woman who there sold herbs used to give him a handful as he
+passed her stall. This elephant afterwards went mad,[234] and,
+having broken his fetters, took his way furiously through the
+market-place, whence all the people fled as quickly as possible
+to get out of his way. Among these was his old friend the
+herb-woman, who, in her haste and terror, forgot to take away her
+little child. On coming to the place where this woman was in use
+to sit, the elephant stopped, and seeing the child among the
+herbs, he took it up gently in his trunk, and laid it carefully
+on a stall under the projecting roof of a house hard by, without
+doing it the smallest injury, and then continued his furious
+course. A travelling Jesuit, named Acosta, relates a similar
+story of an elephant at Goa, as from his own experience.--The
+king keeps certain elephants for the execution of malefactors.
+When one of these is brought forth to dispatch a criminal, if his
+keeper desires that the offender be destroyed speedily, this vast
+creature will instantly crush him to atoms under his foot; but if
+desired to torture him, will break his limbs successively, as men
+are broken on the wheel.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 234: This temporary madness of the male
+elephants is usual in the rutting season.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Mogul takes great delight in these stately animals, and
+often, when he sits in state, calls for some of the finest and
+largest to be brought, which are taught to bend before him, as in
+reverence, when they come into his presence. They often fight
+before him, beginning their combats like rams, by running
+furiously against each other, and butting with their foreheads.
+They afterwards use their tusks and teeth, fighting with the
+utmost fury, yet are they most careful to preserve their keepers,
+so that few of them receive any hurt in these rencounters. They
+are governed by a hooked instrument of steel, made like the iron
+end of a boat-hook, with which their keepers, who sit on their
+necks, put them back, or goad them on, at pleasure.</p>
+
+<p>The king has many of his elephants trained up for war; each of
+which carries an iron gun about six feet long, which is fastened
+to a strong square frame of wood on his back, made fast by strong
+girths or ropes round his body. This gun carries a bullet about
+the size of a small tennis-ball, and is let into the timber with
+a loop of iron. The four corners of the wooden frame have each a
+silken banner on a short pole, and a gunner sits within, to shoot
+as occasion serves, managing the gun like a harquebuss, or large
+wall-piece. When the king travels, he is attended by many
+elephants armed in this manner, as part of his guard. He keeps
+many of them likewise, merely for state, which go before him, and
+are adorned with bosses of brass, and some have their bosses made
+of silver, or even of gold; having likewise many bells jingling
+about them, in the sound of which the animal delights. They have
+handsome housings, of cloth, or velvet, or of cloth of silver, or
+cloth of gold; and, for the greater state, have large royal
+banners of silk carried before them, on which the king's ensign
+is depicted, being a lion in the sun. These state-elephants are
+each allowed three or four men at least to wait upon them. Other
+elephants are appointed for carrying his women, who sit in pretty
+convenient receptacles fastened on their backs, made of slight
+turned pillars, richly covered, each holding four persons, who
+sit within. These are represented by our painters as resembling
+castles. Others again are employed to carry his baggage. He has
+one very fine elephant that has submitted, like the rest, to wear
+feathers, but could never be brought to endure a man, or any
+other burden, on his back.</p>
+
+<p>Although the country be very fertile, and all kinds of
+provisions cheap, yet these animals, because of their vast bulk,
+are very chargeable in keeping; such as are well fed costing four
+or five shillings each, daily. They are kept out of doors, being
+fastened with a strong chain by one of their hind legs to a tree,
+or a strong post. Thus standing out in the sun, the flies are
+often extremely troublesome to them; on which occasions they
+tread the dry ground into dust with their feet, and throw it over
+their bodies with their trunks, to drive away the flies. The
+males are usually mad once a year after the females, at which
+time they are extremely mischievous, and will strike any one who
+comes in their way, except their own keeper; and such is their
+vast strength, that they will kill a horse or a camel with one
+blow of their trunks. This fury lasts only a few days; when they
+return to their usual docility. At these times they are kept
+apart from all company, and fettered with strong chains to
+prevent mischief. If by chance they get loose in their state of
+phrenzy, they run at everything they see in motion; and, in this
+case, the only possible means of stopping them is by lighting a
+kind of artificial fire-works called wild-fire, the sparkling and
+cracking of which make them stand still and tremble.</p>
+
+<p>The king allows four females to each of his great elephants,
+which are called their wives. The testes of the males are said to
+lie about his forehead, and the teats of the female are between
+her fore-legs. She goes twelve months with young. The elephant is
+thirty years old before he attains his full growth, and they live
+to seventy or eighty years of age. Although very numerous,
+elephants are yet so highly prized in India, that some of the
+best are valued at a thousand pounds or more.</p>
+
+<p>S.3. <i>Of the People of Hindoostan, and their Manners and
+Customs</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The whole inhabitants of Hindoostan were anciently Gentiles,
+or notorious idolaters, generally denominated Hindoos, hot ever
+since the time of Tamerlane they have been mixed with
+Mahometans.[235] There are, besides, many Persians, Tartars,
+Abyssinians, and Arminians, and some few of almost every nation
+in Asia, if not in Europe, that reside here. Among these are some
+Jews, but not esteemed, for their very name is proverbial, as a
+term of reproach. In stature, the natives of Hindoostan are equal
+to ourselves, being in general very straight and well-made, for I
+never saw any deformed person in that country. They are of a dark
+tawny or olive colour, having their hair as black as a raven, but
+not curled. They love not to see either a man or a woman very
+fair, as they say that is the colour of lepers, which are common
+among them. Most of the Mahometans, except their molahs or
+priests, or such as are old and retired, keep their chins shaved,
+but allow the hair on their upper-lips to grow long. They usually
+shave all the hair from their heads, leaving only one lock on
+their crowns for Mahomet to pull them by up to heaven. Both among
+the Gentiles and Mahometans they have excellent barbers. The
+people often bathe and wash their bodies, and anoint themselves
+with perfumed oils.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 235: The Mahomedans made extensive
+conquests in India long before the era of
+Timor.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The dresses of the men and women differ very little from each
+other, and are mostly made of white cotton cloth. In fashion,
+they sit close to the shape to the middle, and from thence hang
+loose to below the knee. Under this they wear long close breeches
+down to their ancles, crumpled about the small of their legs like
+boots. Their feet are put bare into their shoes, which are made
+like slippers, that they may be readily put off on entering their
+houses, the floors of which are covered with excellent carpets of
+the country manufacture, as good as any made in Turkey or Persia.
+Instead of these carpets, some have other floor-cloths, according
+to the quality of the owner. On these they sit when conversing or
+eating, like tailors on the shop-board. The men's heads are
+covered by turbans, being sashes, or long webs of thin cloth,
+white or coloured, wreathed many times about. They do not uncover
+their heads in making reverence, instead of which they bow their
+bodies, placing the right hand on the top of the head, after
+which they touch the earth with that hand, as if indicating that
+the party saluted may tread upon them if he please. Those who are
+equals take each other by the chin or beard, as Joab did Amasa;
+but salute in love, not in treachery.</p>
+
+<p>The Mahometan women, except such as are poor or dishonest,
+never appear abroad. Though not fair, they are all well favoured,
+have their heads covered with veils, and their hair hanging down
+behind, twisted with silk. Those of quality are decorated with
+many jewels hung around their necks, and about their wrists and
+arms; and they have several holes round their ears in which they
+hang pendents, besides that every woman has a hole in her
+nostrils, in which to wear a ring, which seems to have been an
+ancient ornament, being mentioned in the Old Testament. Their
+women are happy above all others I have ever heard of; in the
+ease with which they bear their children, being one day able to
+ride with their infants unborn, and to ride again the next with
+their child in their arms.</p>
+
+<p>The language of the common people of this country, called
+Hindoostanee, is smooth, and easily pronounced, and is written
+from left to right, as we do. The learned tongues are the Persian
+and Arabic, which are written backwards, from right to left, like
+the Hebrew. There is but little learning among them, which may be
+owing to the scarcity of books, which are all in manuscript, and
+therefore few and dear; but they are a people of good capacity,
+and were they to cultivate literature among them, would assuredly
+produce many excellent works. They have heard of Aristotle, whom
+they name <i>Aplis</i>, and have some of his writings translated
+into Arabic. The noble physician, Avicenna, was a native of
+Samarcandia, the country of Tamerlane, and in this science they
+possess good skill. The most prevalent diseases of this country
+are dysenteries, hot fevers, and calentures, in all which they
+prescribe abstinence as a principal remedy. The filthy disease
+produced by incontinence is likewise common among them. They
+delight much in music, having many instruments, both stringed and
+wind; but, to my ears, their music seemed all discordant. They
+write many pretty poems, and compose histories and annals of
+their own country. They profess great skill in astrology, and the
+king places great confidence in men of that profession, so that
+he will not undertake a journey, nor do any thing whatever of
+importance, unless after his wizard has indicated a prosperous
+hour for the undertaking.</p>
+
+<p>The idolaters begin their year on the 1st of March, and the
+Mahometans at the instant when the sun enters Aries, as
+calculated by their astrologers. From which time the king keeps a
+festival, called the <i>norose</i>, or nine days, for which time
+it continues, like that made by Ahasuerus in the third year of
+his reign. On this occasion, all his nobles assemble, bringing
+great gifts, which he repays with princely rewards. Being myself
+present on this occasion, I beheld most incredible riches, to my
+amazement, in gold, pearls, precious stones, and many brilliant
+vanities. I saw this festival celebrated at Mandoa, where the
+Mogul has a most spacious house or palace, larger than any I ever
+beheld, in which the many beautiful vaults and arches evince the
+exquisite skill of his artists in architecture. At Agra he has a
+palace, in which are two large towers, at least ten feet square,
+covered with plates of pure gold.</p>
+
+<p>The walls of his houses have no hangings, on account of the
+heat, but are either painted or beautified with a white lime,
+purer even than that we term Spanish. The floors are either paved
+with stone or are made of lime and sand, like our Paris plaster,
+and are spread with rich carpets. None lodge within the King's
+house but his women and eunuchs, and some little boys, whom he
+always keeps about him for a wicked use. He always eats in
+private among his women, being served with a great variety of
+exquisitely dressed meats, which being proved by his taster, are
+put into golden vessels, as they say, covered and sealed up, and
+brought in by the eunuchs. He has meats made ready at all hours,
+and calls for them at pleasure. These people do not feed freely,
+as we do, on full dishes of beef or mutton, but use much rice,
+boiled up along with pieces of flesh, or dressed in a variety of
+ways. They have not many roasted or baked meats, but stew most of
+their meat. Among their many dishes, I shall only notice one,
+called by them <i>deupario</i>. This is made of venison cut into
+slices, to which are put onions and sweet herbs, with some roots,
+and a little spice and butter, forming the most savoury dish I
+ever tasted; and I almost think it is the same dish that Jacob
+made ready for his father Isaac when he got his blessing.</p>
+
+<p>In this kingdom there are no inns or houses of entertainment
+for travellers and strangers. But, in the cities and large towns,
+there are handsome buildings for their reception, called
+<i>serais</i>, which are not inhabited, in which any passengers
+may have rooms freely, but must bring with them their bedding,
+cooks, and all other necessaries for dressing their victuals.
+These things are usually carried by travellers on camels, or in
+carts drawn by oxen; taking likewise tents along with them, to
+use when they do not find serais. The inferior people ride on
+oxen, horses, mules, camels, or dromedaries, the women riding in
+the same manner as the men; or else they use a kind of slight
+coaches on two wheels, covered at top, and close behind, but open
+before and at the sides, unless when they contain women, in which
+case they are close all round. These coaches will conveniently
+hold two persons, besides the driver, and are drawn by a pair of
+oxen, matched in colour, many of them being white, and not large.
+The oxen are guided by cords which go through the middle
+cartilage of the nose, and so between the horns into the hand of
+the driver. The oxen are dressed and harnessed like horses, and
+being naturally nimble, use makes them so expert, that they will
+go twenty miles a-day or more, at a good pace. The better sort
+ride on elephants, or are carried singly on men's shoulders, in a
+slight thing called a <i>palanquin</i>, like a couch, but covered
+by a canopy. This would appear to have been an ancient effeminacy
+used in Rome, as Juvenal describes a fat lawyer who filled one of
+them:</p>
+
+<p><i>Causidici nova, cam venial lectica Mathonis; plena
+ipso--</i></p>
+
+<p>They delight much in hawking, and in hunting hares, deer, and
+other wild animals. Their dogs of chase somewhat resemble our
+greyhounds, but are much less, and do not open when in pursuit of
+their game. They use leopards also in hunting, which attain the
+game they pursue by leaping. They have a very cunning device for
+catching wild-fowl, in the following manner:--A fellow goes into
+the water, having the skin of any kind of fowl he wishes to
+catch, so artificially stuffed, that it seems alive. Keeping his
+whole body under water except his face, which is covered by this
+counterfeit, he goes among the wild-fowl which swim in the water,
+and pulls them under by the legs. They shoot much for their
+amusement with bows, which are curiously made of buffaloe's horn,
+glewed together, their arrows being made of small canes,
+excellently headed and feathered, and are so expert in archery,
+that they will kill birds flying. Others take great delight in
+managing their horses. Though they have not a quarter of a mile
+to go, they will either ride on horseback or be carried, as men
+of any quality hold it dishonourable to go on foot any where.</p>
+
+<p>In their houses, they play much at that most ingenious game
+which we call chess, or else at draughts. They have likewise
+cards, but quite different from ours. Sometimes they are amused
+by cunning jugglers, or mountebanks, who allow themselves to be
+bitten by snakes which they carry about in baskets, immediately
+curing themselves by means of certain powders which they smell
+to. They are likewise often amused by the tricks of apes and
+monkeys. In the southern parts of Hindoostan, there are great
+numbers of large white apes, some of which are as tall as our
+largest greyhounds. Some of those birds which make their nests on
+trees are much afraid of the apes, and nature has instructed them
+in a subtle device to secure themselves, by building their nests
+on the most extreme twigs, and hanging them there like
+purse-nets, so that the apes cannot possibly come to them.</p>
+
+<p>Every city or great town in India has markets twice a-day, in
+the cool of the morning just after sun-rise, and again in the
+evening a little before it sets; and in these they sell almost
+every thing by weight. In the heat of the day, every one keeps
+within doors, where those of any rank lie on couches, or sit
+cross-legged on carpets, having servants about them, who beat the
+air with fans of stiffened leather, or the like, to cool them.
+While thus taking their ease, they often call their barbers, who
+tenderly grip and beat upon their arms and other parts of their
+bodies, instead of exercise, to stir the blood. This is a most
+gratifying thing, and is much used in this hot climate.</p>
+
+<p>The Mahometans and Hindoos are much to be commended for their
+truthfulness as servants; for a stranger may safely travel alone
+among them with a great charge of money or goods, all through the
+country, having them for his guard, and will never be neglected
+or injured by them. They follow their masters on foot, carrying
+swords and bucklers, or bows and arrows, for their defence; and
+so plentiful are provisions in this country, that one may hire
+them on very easy terms, as they do not desire more than five
+shillings each moon, paid the day after the change, to provide
+themselves in all necessaries; and for this small pittance give
+diligent and faithful service. Such is their filial piety, that
+they will often give the half of these pitiful wages to their
+parents, to relieve their necessities, preferring almost to
+famish themselves rather than see them want.</p>
+
+<p>Both among the Mahometans and Hindoos there are many men of
+most undaunted courage. The <i>Baloches</i> are of great note on
+this account among the Mahometans, being the inhabitants of
+<i>Hjykan</i>, adjoining to the kingdom of Persia; as also the
+Patans, taking their denomination from a province in the kingdom
+of Bengal.[236] These tribes dare look their enemies in the face,
+and maintain the reputation of valour at the hazard of their
+lives. Among the many sects of the Hindoos, there is but one race
+of warriors, called <i>Rashbootes</i>, or Rajaputs, many of whom
+subsist by plunder, laying in wait in great troops to surprise
+poor passengers, and butchering all who have the misfortune to
+fall into their hands. These excepted, all the rest of the
+natives are in general pusillanimous, and had rather quarrel than
+fight, being so poor in spirit, in comparison with Europeans,
+that the Mogul often says, proverbially, That one Portuguese will
+beat three of them, and one Englishman three Portuguese.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 236: This is a strange mistake, confounding
+the city of Patna, in Bengal, in the east of Hindoostan, with the
+Patans, a race of mountaineers between Cabul and Candahar, far to
+the west of India, called likewise Afgans, and their country
+Afghanistan.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In regard to arms for war, they have good ordnance, which, so
+far as I could learn, were very anciently used in this
+country.[237] I have already described the iron pieces carried on
+elephants. They have smaller guns for the use of their
+foot-soldiers, who are somewhat long in taking aim, but come as
+near the mark as any I ever saw. All their pieces are fired with
+match, and they make excellent gun-powder. They use also lances,
+swords, and targets, and bows and arrows. Their swords are made
+crooked like faulchions, and very sharp; but, for want of skill
+in tempering, will break rather than bend; wherefore our
+sword-blades, which will bend and become straight again, are
+often sold at high prices. I have seen horsemen in this country,
+thus accoutered, carrying as it were a whole armory at once; a
+good sword by their sides, under which a sheaf of arrows; on
+their back a gun fastened with belts, a buckler on their
+shoulders; a bow in a case hanging on their left side, and a good
+lance in their hand, two yards and a half long, with an excellent
+steel head. Yet, for all these weapons, dare he not resist a man
+of true courage, armed only with the worst of all these. The
+armies in these eastern wars often consist of incredible
+multitudes, and they talk of some which have exceeded that we
+read of in the Bible, which Zerah, king of Ethiopia, brought
+against Asia. Their martial music consists of kettle-drums and
+long wind-instruments. In their battles, both sides usually begin
+with most furious onsets; but, in a short time, for want of good
+discipline, they fall into disorder, and one side is routed with
+much slaughter.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 237: Vertoman says the Portuguese who
+deserted at the first discovery of India, and entered into the
+service of the native princes, taught them this
+art.--<i>Purch</i>. 
+
+<p>I have somewhere read, many years ago, but cannot recollect
+the authority, "That, when Alexander besieged a certain city in
+India, the Brachmans, by the power of magic, raised a cloud of
+smoke around the walls, whence broke frequent flashes of
+lightning, with thunder, and the thunderbolts slew many of his
+soldiers." This would infer the very ancient use of fire-arms of
+some kind in India.--E.]</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Mahometans have fair places of worship, which they call
+<i>mesquits</i>, well built of stone. That side which looks to
+the westwards is a close-built wall, while that towards the east
+is erected on pillars, the length being from north to south. At
+the corners of their great mosques, in the cities, there are high
+turrets or pinnacles, called <i>minarets</i>, to the tops of
+which their molahs or priests resort at certain times of day,
+proclaiming their prophet in Arabic, in these words,--<i>Alla
+illa Alla, Mahomet resul Alla</i>; that is, There is no God but
+God, and Mahomet is the ambassador of God. This is used instead
+of bells, which they cannot endure in their temples, to put
+religious persons in mind of their duty. On one occasion, while
+Mr Coryat was residing in Agra, he got up into a turret over
+against the priest, and on hearing these words, he contradicted
+him, calling out, in a loud voice,--<i>La Alla illa Alla, Hazaret
+Esa Ebn-Alla</i>; there is no God but God, and Christ, the Son of
+God, is his prophet. He farther added, that Mahomet was an
+impostor, in any other country of Asia, in which Mahomet is
+zealously followed, this bold attempt had surely forfeited his
+life, with all the tortures which cruelty could invent, or
+tyranny inflict; but in this country every one is permitted to
+follow his own religion, and may even dispute against theirs with
+impunity.</p>
+
+<p>In regard to their burials, every Mahometan of quality
+provides a fair sepulchre for himself and his family, in his
+life-time, surrounding a considerable space of ground with a high
+wall, and generally in the neighbourhood of some tank, or else
+near springs of water, that they may make pleasant fountains.
+Within the enclosure, he erects a round or square tomb, either on
+pillars or of closed walls, with a door for entrance. The rest of
+the enclosure is planted with trees and flowers, as if they would
+make the elysian fields of the poets, in which their souls may
+repose in delight. They have many such goodly monuments built in
+memory of those they esteem as saints, of whom they have an ample
+calendar, in these there are lamps continually burning, and
+thither many resort in blind devotion, to contemplate the
+happiness enjoyed by these <i>peires</i>, as they call the holy
+men. Among many sumptuous piles dedicated to this use, the most
+splendid of them all is to be seen at <i>Secuadra</i>, a village
+three miles from Agra. This was begun by Akbar Shah, the father
+of the present king, and finished by his son, the reigning Mogul.
+Akbar lies here interred, and Jehanguire Shah means to be here
+buried when he dies.</p>
+
+<p>The molahs, or priests of the Mahometans, employ much of their
+time as scribes, doing business for other men, having liberty to
+marry as well as the laity, from whom they are no way
+distinguished by their dress. Some live retiredly, spending their
+time in meditation, or in delivering precepts of morality to the
+people. They are in roach esteem, as are another set called
+<i>Seids</i>, who derive their pedigree from Mahomet. The priests
+neither read nor preach in the mosques; yet there is a set form
+of prayers in Arabic, not understood by most of the people, but
+which they repeat as fluently as the molahs. They likewise repeat
+the name of God, and that of Mahomet, a certain number of times
+every day, telling over their beads, like the misled papists, who
+seem to regard the number of prayers more than their sincerity.
+Before going into their mosques they wash their feet, and, in
+entering, put off their shoes. On beginning their devotions, they
+stop their ears, and fix their eyes, that no extraneous
+circumstances may divert their thoughts, and then utter their
+prayers in a soft and still voice, using many words significantly
+expressive of the omnipotence, goodness, eternity, and other
+attributes of God. Likewise many words full of humility,
+confessing their unworthiness with many submissive gestures.
+While praying, they frequently prostrate themselves on their
+faces, acknowledging that they are burdens upon the earth,
+poisonous to the air, and the like, and therefore dare not look
+up to heaven, but comfort themselves in the mercy of God, through
+the intercession of their false prophet. Many among them, to the
+shame of us Christians, pray five tunes a-day, whatever may
+happen to be their interruptions of pleasure or profit. Their set
+times are at the hours of six, nine, twelve, three, and six,
+respectively.</p>
+
+<p>The manner in which they divide the day is quite different
+from us; as they divide the day and the night each into four
+equal parts, which they denominate <i>pores</i>, and these again
+are each subdivided into eight smaller parts, called
+<i>grees</i>. [Hence each <i>pore</i> contains three of our
+hours, and each <i>gree</i> is equal to 22-1/2 of our minutes.]
+These are measured, according to an ancient custom, by means of
+water, dropping from one small vessel into another, beside which
+there always stand servants appointed for the purpose, who strike
+with a hammer upon a concave plate of metal, like the inner
+portion of a plate, hung by a wire, thus denoting the
+<i>pores</i> and <i>grees</i> successively as they pass.[238]
+Like the mother and her seven sons, mentioned in the Maccabees,
+such is the temperance of many, both among the Mahometans and
+Gentiles, that they will rather die than eat or drink of any
+thing forbidden by their law. Such meats and drinks as their law
+allows, they use only in moderation, to satisfy nature, not to
+please their appetites, hating gluttony, and esteeming
+drunkenness a sin, as it really is, or a second madness; and
+indeed their language has only one word, mest, for a drunkard and
+a madman.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 238: This device for measuring time is the
+same with the <i>clepsydra</i>, or water-clocks, of the
+ancients.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They keep yearly a solemn feast, or Lent, which they call
+<i>Ram jan</i>, [Ramadan] about the month of August, which
+continues a whole moon; during which time, those who are strict
+in their religious observances, avoid the embraces of their
+women, and abstain from meat or drink so long as the sun is above
+the horizon, but eat after it sets, at their pleasure. Towards
+the close of this Lent, or ramadan, they consecrate one day of
+mourning, in memory of their departed friends; on which
+occasions, I have seen many of the meaner people making bitter
+lamentations. Besides this ordinary and stated time of sadness,
+many foolish women are in use, oft times in the year, so long as
+they survive, to water the graves of their husbands or children
+with the tears of affectionate regret. On the night succeeding
+the day of general mourning, they light up innumerable lamps, and
+other lights, which they set on the sides and tops of their
+houses, and all other most conspicuous places, taking no food
+till these are burnt out. When the ramadan is entirely ended, the
+most devout Mahometans assemble at some noted mosque, where some
+portion of the <i>Alcoran</i> is publicly read; this being their
+holy book, like our Bible, which they never touch without some
+mark of reverence. They keep a festival in November, which they
+call <i>Buccaree</i>, signifying the <i>ram-feast</i>; on which
+occasion they kill and roast a ram, in memory, as they say, of
+the ram which redeemed Ishmael, when about to be sacrificed by
+his father Abraham. They have many other feasts or holidays
+consecrated to Mahomet, and their <i>pieres</i>, or pretended
+saints.</p>
+
+<p>They have the books of Moses, whom they name <i>Moosa curym
+Alla</i>, the righteous of God. Abraham they call <i>Ibrahim
+calim Alla</i>, the faithful of God. Thus Ishmael is called the
+true sacrifice of God; David is named <i>Dahoode</i>, the prophet
+of God; Solomon is <i>Seliman</i>, the wisdom of God, and so
+forth; all neatly expressed, as the former instances, in short
+Arabic epithets. In honour of these our scripture worthies, they
+frequently sing songs or ditties of praise; and, besides, all of
+them, except those of the ruder sort, when at any time they
+happen to mention our Saviour, always call him <i>Hazaret
+Eesa</i>, the Lord Jesus; and ever speak of him with respect and
+reverence, saying, that he was a good and just man, who lived
+without sin, and did greater miracles than were ever performed
+before or since. They even call him <i>Rhahew Alla</i>, which
+signifies the breath of God, but cannot conceive how he could be
+the Son of God, and therefore deny that. Yet the Mahometans look
+upon us as unclean, and will neither eat with us, nor of any
+thing that is cooked in our vessels.</p>
+
+<p>There are many men among the Mahometans called
+<i>Dervises</i>, who relinquish the world, and spend their days
+in solitude, expecting a recompence in a better life. The strict
+and severe penances these men voluntarily endure, far exceed all
+those so much boasted of by the Romanist monks. Some of these
+live alone on the tops of hills, remote from all society,
+spending their lives in contemplation, and will rather die of
+famine than move from their cells, being relieved from devotion
+by those who dwell nearest them. Some again impose long fasts
+upon themselves, till nature be almost exhausted. Many of those
+whom they call religious men, wear no garments beyond a mere
+clout to cover their shame, and beg for all their provisions,
+like the mendicant friars of Europe. These men usually dwell
+about the outskirts of the cities and towns, like the man
+mentioned by our blessed Saviour at the city of the
+<i>Gadarens</i>, who had devils, and wore no clothes, neither
+abode in any house, but dwelt among the tombs. They make little
+fires during the day, sleeping at night among the warm ashes,
+with which they besmear their bodies. These men never suffer a
+razor to come upon their heads, and some of them let their nails
+grow like to bird's claws, as it is written of Nebuchadnezzar,
+when driven out from among the society of men. There is also a
+sort of men among them called <i>mendee</i>, who often cut and
+slash their flesh with knives, like the priests of Baal. I have
+seen others, who, from supposed devotion, put such massy fetters
+of iron on their legs, that they are hardly able to move, yet
+walk in that manner many miles upon pilgrimages, barefooted, upon
+the parching ground, to visit the sepulchres of their deluding
+saints; thus, <i>tantum religio potuit suadere malorum</i>,
+taking more pains to go to hell than any Christian that I know
+does to attain heaven. These do not marry. Such Mahometans as
+choose to marry, are allowed four wives by the law of Mahomet,
+but they keep as many concubines as they can maintain. The
+priests content themselves with one wife.</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding their polygamy, such is the violent jealousy
+of these lustful Mahometans, that they will scarcely allow even
+the fathers and brothers of their beloved wives or concubines to
+converse with them, except in their own presence. Owing to this
+restraint, it has become odious for such women as have the
+reputation of virtue, to be seen at any time by strangers. If any
+of them dishonour their husbands beds, or, being unmarried, are
+found incontinent, even their own brothers will put them to death
+rather than they should escape punishment; and for such unnatural
+actions they shall be commended, rather than called in question.
+Yet is there full toleration for harlots, who are as little
+ashamed of receiving visits as the men are of frequenting their
+houses. The women of any fashion are waited upon by eunuchs
+instead of women-servants; and these eunuchs are deprived in
+their youth of every thing that can provoke jealousy. Their
+marriages are solemnised in great pomp. After the molah has
+joined their hands, with certain ceremonies and words of
+benediction, they begin their revels at the first watch of the
+night. Whether the man be poor or rich, he mounts on horseback,
+attended by his friends, having many <i>oressets</i>, or great
+lights, carried before him, and accompanied by drums, and
+wind-instruments of music, and various pageantry. The woman
+follows with her friends, in covered coaches. And having thus
+paraded through the principal places of the city or town, they
+return home and partake of a banquet, the men and women being in
+separate apartments. They are mostly married at the age of twelve
+or thirteen, the matches being made by their mothers.</p>
+
+<p>S.4. <i>Of the Sects, Opinions, Rites, Priests, and other
+Circumstances of the Hindoo Religion; with other
+Observations</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The Hindoos[239] are distributed into eighty and four several
+sects, all of which differ materially in opinions. This has often
+filled me with wonder; but I know that they are all deluded by
+Satan, who is the father of division. Their illiterate priests
+are called <i>Bramins</i>, being the same with the
+<i>Brachmanni</i> of the ancients; and, for aught I could learn,
+are so sottishly ignorant and unsteady, that they know not what
+they believe. They have little round-built temples, which they
+call <i>pagodas</i>, in which are images in most monstrous
+shapes, which they worship. Some of them dream, of Elysian
+fields, to which their souls pass over a Styx or Acheron, and
+there assume new bodies. Others hold that ere long, this world
+shall have an end, after which they shall live here again, upon a
+new earth. They talk of four books which were sent them about
+6000 years ago by their prophet <i>Ram</i>, two of which were
+sealed up and might not be opened, the other two being read by
+the Bramins only. They say that there are seven orbs, above which
+is the seat of God; and they hold that God knoweth not of petty
+things, or, if he doth, regardeth them not. They circumscribe God
+in place or dimensions, alleging that he may be seen, but far off
+as in a mist, and not near or clearly. They believe in the
+existence of devils or evil spirits; but that they are so bound
+in chains, as to be incapable of doing hurt. They call man Adam,
+from the first man of that name; whose wife, as they say, when
+tempted with the forbidden fruit, swallowed it down; but, as her
+husband was about to do the same, it was stopped in his throat by
+the hand of God: Whence men have a protuberance in that part,
+which we call the <i>pomum adami</i>, which women have not.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 239: By Terry, the Hindoos are uniformly
+denominated the <i>Gentiles</i>, a word of vague and general
+meaning, merely signifying idolaters, or unbelievers, literally
+the nations, as contradistinguished from the Jews. By some
+authors, the natives of Hindoostan are called Gentoos, a word of
+uncertain origin. The term of Hindoo seems the more appropriate
+name; at least it has now become universal.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>As anciently among the Jews, the priesthood is hereditary with
+this people; every son of a Bramin being a priest, and marries
+with the daughter of a Bramin. So also among all the Hindoos, the
+men take their wives among the daughters of those who are of the
+same tribe, sect, and occupation, with their own fathers. Thus
+the son of a merchant marries a merchant's daughter, and every
+man's son that lives by his labour, marries the daughter of one
+of the same profession with himself, so that they never advance
+themselves to higher situations. The Hindoos take but one wife,
+of whom they are not so fearful as are the Mahometans of their
+numerous women, for they are suffered to go abroad. They are
+always married very young, at six or seven years of age, their
+parents making the contracts, and they come together when twelve
+years old. Their nuptials are celebrated with as much pomp and
+jollity as those of the Mahometans. The habits of the Hindoos
+differ little from those of the Mahometans, already described;
+but many of their women wear rings on their toes, and therefore
+go barefooted. They have likewise broad rings of brass, or of
+more valuable metal, according to their rank and wealth, which
+they wear about the small of their legs, being made to put off
+and on. These seem to resemble the tinkling ornaments about the
+feet, mentioned by the prophet Isaiah, or the ornaments of the
+legs, anciently in use among the Jewish women. They have also
+such on their arms. The laps of their ears are pierced when
+young, and the hole is daily stretched and widened, by things put
+in on purpose, so that it at length becomes large enough to hold
+a ring as broad as a little saucer, made hollow in its edges to
+contain the flesh. Both men and women wash their bodies every day
+before they eat, and they sit entirely naked at their food,
+excepting only the covering of modesty. This outward washing, as
+they think, tends to cleanse them from sin, not unlike the
+Pharisees in scripture, who would not eat with unwashed hands.
+Hence, they ascribe a certain divine influence to rivers, but
+above all to the Ganges, daily flocking thither in great
+companies, and throwing in pieces of gold and silver, according
+to their devotion or abilities, after which they wash themselves
+in the sacred stream. Both men and women paint their foreheads,
+or other parts of their faces, with red or yellow spots.</p>
+
+<p>In regard to their grosser opinions, they do not believe in
+the resurrection of the flesh, and therefore burn the bodies of
+their dead, near some river if they can, into which they strew
+the ashes. Their widows never marry again; but, after the loss of
+their husbands, cut their hair close off, and spend all their
+remaining life in neglect; whence it happens, that many young
+women are ambitious to die with honour, as they esteem it,
+throwing themselves for lore of their departed husbands into the
+flames, as they think, of martyrdom. Following their dead husband
+to the pile, and there embracing his corpse, they are there
+consumed in the same fire. This they do voluntarily, and without
+compulsion, their parents, relations, and friends joyfully
+accompanying them; and, when the pile of this hellish sacrifice
+begins to burn, all the assembled multitude shout and make a
+noise, that the screams of the tortured living victims may not be
+heard. This abominable custom is not very much unlike the custom
+of the Ammonites, who made their children pass through the fire
+to Moloch, during which they caused certain tabrets or drums to
+sound, whence the place was called <i>Tophet</i>, signifying a
+tabret. There is one sect among the Hindoos, called
+<i>Parsees</i>, who neither burn nor inter their dead. They
+surround certain pieces of ground with high walls, remote from
+houses or public roads, and there deposit their dead, wrapped in
+sheets, which thus have no other tombs but the maws of ravenous
+fowls.[240]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 240: These Parsees, called <i>Parcees</i>
+in the Pilgrims, and Guebres by other writers, are a remnant of
+the ancient Persians, who are fire-worshippers, or followers of
+Zerdust, the Zoroaster of the Greeks.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Hindoos are, generally speaking, an industrious race;
+being either cultivators of the ground, or otherwise diligently
+employed in various occupations. Among them there are many
+curious artificers, who are the best imitators in the world, as
+they will make any thing new very exactly after a pattern. The
+Mahometans, on the contrary, are generally idle, being <i>all for
+to morrow</i>, a common saying among them, and live by the
+labours of the Hindoos. Some of these poor deluded idolaters will
+eat of nothing which has had life, feeding on grain, herbs, milk,
+butter, cheese, and sweet-meats, of which last they have various
+kinds, the best and most wholesome of which is green ginger
+remarkably well preserved. Some tribes eat fish, and of no other
+living thing. The Rajaput tribe eat swine's flesh, which is held
+in abomination by the Mahometans. Some will eat of one kind of
+flesh, and some of another; but all the Hindoos universally
+abstain from beef owing to the reverence they entertain for cows;
+and therefore give large sums yearly to the Mogul, besides his
+other exactions, as a ransom for the lives of these sacred
+animals. Whence, though they have other and good provisions in
+abundance, we meet with very little meat in that country.</p>
+
+<p>The most tender-hearted among the idolaters are called
+<i>Banians,</i> who hold the <i>metempsychosis</i> of Pythagoras
+as a prime article of their faith, believing that the souls of
+the best men and women, when freed from the prison of their human
+bodies, transmigrate into the bodies of cows, which they consider
+as the best of all creatures. They hold that the souls of the
+wicked go into the bodies of viler beasts; as the souls of
+gluttons into swine, those of the voluptuous and incontinent into
+apes and monkies; the souls of the cruel, furious, and
+revengeful, into lions, tigers, and wolves; the souls of the
+envious into serpents; and so forth, according to their qualities
+and dispositions; transmigrating successively from one to another
+of the same kind, <i>ad infinitum;</i> and, by consequence,
+believing in the eternal duration of the world. Thus, according
+to them, there does not exist even a silly fly but is actuated by
+a soul formerly human, considering these to have formerly
+belonged to light women; and so incorrigible are their sottish
+opinions, that they cannot be persuaded out of them by any
+reasoning. Owing to these opinions, they will not put to death
+the most offensive animals, not even the most venemous snakes,
+saying, that it is their nature to do harm, and that man is
+gifted with reason to shun these noxious creatures, but not at
+liberty to destroy them.</p>
+
+<p>Many men devote their fortunes to works of charity, as in
+building <i>serais,</i> or lodging-houses for travellers, digging
+wells, or constructing tanks near highways, that the travellers
+may have water; and where such cannot be had, they will hire poor
+men to sit by the way-sides, and offer water to the passengers.
+The day of rest among the Hindoos is Thursday, as Friday is among
+the Mahometans, Saturday with the Jews, and Sunday with the
+Christians.[241] They have many solemn festivals, and they make
+pilgrimages, among which the most famous are <i>Nagracut</i> and
+<i>Syba,</i> formerly mentioned; where, if Mr Coryat may be
+believed, who says he carefully observed the same, people cut off
+part of their tongues out of devotion. It were easy to enlarge on
+this subject, but I will not any farther describe their stupid
+idolatry. The sum of the whole is, that both the Hindoos and
+Mahometans ground all their opinions on tradition, not on reason,
+and are content to perish with their fore-fathers, out of
+preposterous zeal and fond perverseness, never rightly
+considering the grounds of their belief.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 241: Monday is the day of rest with the
+people of Pegu. In Java, each individual keeps that day holy on
+which he has begun some great work.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Both the Mahometans and Hindoos are under subjection to the
+Great Mogul, the term <i>Mogul</i> signifying a circumcised man,
+so that Great Mogul means the Chief of the Circumcision. The
+present king is the ninth in lineal descent from that famous
+eastern conqueror, whom we name Tamerlane, and who in their
+histories is named Timor. Towards the close of his life, he had
+the misfortune to fall from his horse, which made him halt during
+the remainder of his days, whence he was called Timur-lang, or
+Timur the lame. The emperor styles himself The King of Justice,
+the Light of the Law of Mahomet, and the Conqueror of the World.
+He himself judges and determines on all matters of importance
+which occur near his residence, judging according to allegations
+and proofs, by his own sense of right. The trials are conducted
+quickly, and the sentences speedily executed, culprits being
+hanged, beheaded, impaled, torn by dogs, destroyed by elephants,
+bitten by serpents, or other devices, according to the nature of
+the crimes; the executions being generally in the public
+market-place. The governors of provinces and cities administer
+justice in a similar manner. I could never hear of any written
+law, the will of the king and his substitutes being the law. His
+vicegerents are not allowed to continue long in one place, lest
+they acquire popularity, and are therefore usually removed
+yearly. They receive the letters of the king with every possible
+indication of respect. They look to receive presents from all who
+have occasion to apply to them; and, if not often gratified with
+these, will ask for them, and will even send back such as they do
+not approve, demanding better to be substituted. The cadi has
+power to imprison debtors and sureties, who are bound by written
+deeds; and men in power, for payment of debts due to them, will
+often sell the persons, wives, and children of their debtors,
+which is warranted by the customs of the land.</p>
+
+<p>The king appears in public three times every day. His first
+appearance is at sun-rise, from a bow-window looking; towards the
+east, where great multitudes assemble to salute him, or give him
+the <i>salam,</i> calling out <i>padishah salamet,</i> which
+signifies Live, O King! At noon he again sits in public seeing
+his elephants fight, or some other pastimes. A little before
+sun-set, he shews himself a third time, at a window looking to
+the west, whence he retires amid the sound of drums and
+wind-instruments of music, the acclamations of the people adding
+to the noise. At any of these three appearances, all who have any
+suit to him hold up their petitions to be seen, and are heard in
+their own causes. Between seven and nine in the evening, he again
+sits in private, attended by his nobles.</p>
+
+<p>No subject of this empire holds any lands by inheritance,
+neither have they any titles but such as depend on the will of
+the king. Owing to this, many of the grandees live up fully to
+the extent of their means. Merchants also, and others, are very
+careful to conceal their wealth, lest they be made spunges. Some
+small means of living are allowed by the king to the sons of his
+great men, which they can never make better, unless they succeed
+to the favour enjoyed by their fathers. His pensions are reckoned
+by the numbers of horsemen allotted to each; and of these he pays
+a million in the whole extent of his empire, to the amount of
+twenty-five pounds being yearly allowed for each horseman, which
+are drawn from lands, specified in the particular grants or
+commissions. There are about twenty of his courtiers who have
+each the pay of 5000 horse; others of 4000, 3000, 2000, and so
+downwards. He who has the pay of 5000, is bound to have 2000
+always on foot ready for service, and so in like proportion for
+all others. This absolute dependence renders them dissolute
+parasites. When the Mogul gives advancement to any one, he adds a
+new name or title, as Pharaoh did to Joseph. These names or
+titles are very significant; as <i>Mahobet Khan</i>, the beloved
+lord; <i>Khan Jahaun,</i> the lord of my heart; <i>Khan
+Allum,</i> the lord of the world, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>The principal officers of state are, the treasurer, the master
+of the eunuchs, who is steward and comptroller of the household,
+the secretary, the master of the elephants, the tent-master, and
+the keeper of the wardrobe. The subordinate titles of honour are
+Khan, Mirza, Omrah or Captain, Haddee, which last is a soldier or
+horseman. Gorgeous apparel is in a great measure prohibited,
+owing to the great heat of the sun; even the Great Mogul himself
+being usually clothed in a garment of pure white calico or fine
+muslin. Blue, being the colour of mourning, may not be worn in
+his presence, neither the name of death pronounced in his
+hearing. This circumstance is usually expressed by some
+circumlocution, as that such a person has sacrificed himself at
+the feet of his majesty.</p>
+
+<p>Owing to the great heat of this country, there is but little
+demand for English cloth, which is almost only employed for the
+housings of elephants and horses, and the linings of coaches.
+This sovereign assuredly exceeds all others in the splendour of
+his thrones, and the variety and richness of his jewels. In his
+palace at Agra, he has a throne upon a raised platform, to which
+he ascends by several steps, on the top of which are four figures
+of lions of massy silver, gilded and set with precious stones,
+and supporting a dome or canopy of pure gold. I may mention, that
+when I was at his court, he had a tame lion which went up and
+down at liberty, as harmless as a dog. The jewels with which he
+daily adorns his head, neck, and arms, and the hilts of his sword
+and dagger, are rich and valuable beyond all computation. On his
+birthday, which happens on the 1st of September, he being now
+sixty years of age, he is weighed, and an account thereof
+carefully noted down by his physicians, who thereby guess at his
+bodily condition.[242]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 242: See of these and other things,
+formerly stated, in the Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, and therefore
+here omitted. <i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The following are parts of two letters from the Great Mogul to
+his majesty King James I. translated out of Persian, and sent
+through Sir Thomas Roe, one written a year before the other. What
+followed in both letters, was merely complimentary assurances of
+his love for the English. These letters were rolled up and
+covered with cloth of gold, the covering being sealed up at both
+ends, which is the fashion in that country. Copies were sent to
+the lord ambassador, from which these specimens were translated
+out of the Persian language.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>"When your majesty shall open this letter, let your royal
+heart be fresh as a sweet garden. Let all people make lowly
+reverence at your gate, and may your throne be exalted among the
+kings of the prophet Jesus. May your majesty be the greatest of
+all monarchs; and may others draw counsel and wisdom from you, as
+from a fountain, that the law of the divine Jesus may revive and
+flourish under your protection. Your letters of love and
+friendship, and the tokens of your affection towards me, I have
+received by the hands of your ambassador, Sir Thomas Roe, who
+well deserves to be your trusted servant, and who delivered them
+to me in a happy hour. Upon them mine eyes were so fixed, that I
+could not easily remove them to any other object, and have
+accepted them with much joy," &amp;c.--The other began as
+follows:</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>"How gracious is your majesty, whose greatness God preserve
+and prosper. As upon a rose in a garden of pleasure, so are mine
+eyes fixed upon your majesty. May God maintain your greatness, so
+that your monarchy may prosper and increase, that you may obtain
+all your desires, worthy the greatness of your renown. As your
+heart is noble and upright, so may God give you a prosperous
+reign, because you powerfully defend the majesty of Jesus, which
+may God render yet more flourishing, having been confirmed by
+miracles," &amp;c.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>We travelled two years with the Great Mogul, who was in
+progress through his dominions, moving only during the temperate
+months, between October and April. On this occasion, I am
+confident that the <i>leskar</i>, or camp, contained not less
+than 300,000 persons, including men, women, and children, besides
+elephants, horses, and other beasts, that were fed upon grain;
+yet we never experienced any scarcity of provisions, not even in
+our nineteen days journey through a wilderness, between Mandoa
+and <i>Amadavar</i>, [Ahmedabad.] On this occasion, a road was
+cut for us through the forest. The tents of the leskar were of
+various colours, being regularly arranged, and represented a
+large and splendid city. The king's tents were red, and raised on
+poles to a great height, being placed in the middle of the camp,
+and covering a great extent of ground; the whole of the royal
+quarter being encircled by <i>canats</i>, or walls, made of red
+calico, held up by canes at every breadth, and standing upright
+about nine feet high, which was guarded all round by soldiers
+every night.</p>
+
+<p>The king removed ten or twelve miles every day, more or less
+according to the convenience of procuring water. His wives and
+women of all sorts, which are not less than a thousand, all
+lodged and provided for in his tents, were carried along with the
+leskar, some in palanquins, others upon elephants, or in cradles
+or panniers slung upon dromedaries, all closely covered up that
+they might not be seen, and attended upon by eunuchs. In the
+choice of his wives, the Great Mogul respects fancy more than
+honour, not seeking affinity with neighbouring princes, but to
+please his eye at home. <i>Noormahal</i>, the best beloved among
+his wives, whose name signifies the <i>Light of the Court</i>,
+was of mean origin, but has since advanced her friends to high
+rank and employments, and in a manner commands the commander of
+the empire, by engrossing his whole affections. The king and his
+great men continue to maintain their women, but little affect
+them after thirty years old.</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding the multitude of his women, the Great Mogul
+has only six children, five sons and a daughter. All his sons are
+styled sultans, or princes. The eldest is Sultan <i>Cursero</i>,
+the second, Sultan <i>Parrveis</i>, the third, Sultan
+<i>Caroon</i>, the fourth, Sultan <i>Shahar</i>, and the
+youngest, Sultan <i>Tauct</i>.[243] The name of this last
+signifies a <i>Throne</i>; and he was so named by the king,
+because he was informed of his birth at the time when he got
+quiet possession of the throne. The eldest-born son of one of his
+legitimate wives has right to inherit the throne, and has a title
+signifying the <i>Great Brother</i>. Although the others are not
+put to death as with the Turks, yet it is observed that they
+seldom long survive their fathers, being commonly employed on
+some dangerous expedition.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 243: These names seem to have been written
+by Terry from the ear. By others, they are respectively named
+Cusero, Parvis, Churrum, Shahar, and Taucht.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Akbar Shah, the father of the reigning Mogul, had threatened
+to disinherit him, for some abuse to <i>Anar-Kalee</i>, his most
+beloved wife, whose name signifies pomegranate kernel; but on his
+death-bed he restored him to the succession. Akbar was wont, upon
+taking any displeasure at one of his grandees, to give them pills
+to purge their souls from their bodies, and is said to have come
+by his death in the following manner. Intending to give one of
+these pills to a nobleman who had incurred his displeasure, and
+meaning to take at the same time a cordial pill himself, while he
+was cajoling the destined victim with flattering speeches, he, by
+mistake, took the poisoned pill himself, and gave the cordial to
+the nobleman. This carried him off in a few days, by a mortal
+flux of blood.[244]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 244: Neque enim lex justior ulla est, quam
+necis artifices arte perire sua.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The character of Jehanguire, the reigning Mogul, seems
+strangely compounded of opposite extremes. He is at times
+excessively cruel, and at other times extremely mild. He is
+himself much given to excess in wine, yet severely punishes that
+fault in others. His subjects know not what it is to disobey his
+commands, forgetting the natural bonds of private life, even
+those between father and son, in the fulfilment of their public
+duty. He daily relieves numbers of the poor; and often, as a mark
+of his filial piety, is in use to carry the palanquin of his
+mother on his own shoulders. He speaks with much reverence of our
+Saviour, but is offended by his cross and poverty, deeming them
+incompatible with his divine Majesty, though told that his
+humility was on purpose to subdue the pride of the world.</p>
+
+<p>All religions are tolerated, and even their priests are held
+in good esteem. I used often to receive from the Mogul the
+appellation of <i>Father</i>, with many other gracious words, and
+had a place assigned me among his nobles. The jesuits are not
+only admitted into his presence, but encouraged by many gifts,
+and are permitted to convert the subjects, who do not on that
+event lose their favour at court. On one occasion, the Mogul put
+the sincerity of a convert to a severe trial. Having used many
+threatenings to induce him to abandon his new faith, and finding
+him undaunted, he tried by flatteries and high promises to draw
+him back; but these also being unavailing, he bade him continue a
+Christian, and dismissed him with a reward; saying, if he had
+been able to terrify or cajole him from his religion, he would
+have made him a terrible example for all waverers.</p>
+
+<p>When I was in this country, the chief jesuit residing at the
+court of the Mogul, was Francisco Corsi, a Florentine by birth,
+who acted likewise as agent for the Portuguese. I wish I could
+confirm the reports they have made of conversions; but the real
+truth is, that they have merely spilt the water of baptism on the
+faces of a few, working on the necessities of some poor men, who
+from want of means to live, with which the jesuits supplied them,
+have been persuaded to wear crucifixes, but who, for want of
+instruction, are only Christians in name. Of these few
+mendicants, or so called by Christians, I noticed that five of
+them would beg in the name of Maria, for one who asked in the
+name of Jesus. I also desired to have put my hands to the holy
+work, but found extreme difficulty in the way, owing both to the
+Mahometan laxity in regard to the use of women, and the debauched
+lives of some unchristian Christians.--May he who hath the key of
+David open their eyes, and in his good time send labourers into
+this vineyard. <i>Amen</i>.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VIII.</p>
+
+<p>JOURNEY OF THOMAS CORYAT BY LAND, FROM JERUSALEM TO THE COURT
+OF THE GREAT MOGUL.[245]</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>Without proposing to follow this singularly bold English
+traveller and whimsical writer, in all his <i>crudities</i>, as
+he has quaintly termed his own writings, it has seemed proper to
+give some abbreviated extracts of his observations, which may
+serve in some measure to illustrate those of Sir Tomas Roe and
+the Reverend Edward Terry.--E.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 245: Purch. Pilgr. I. 607. In regard to
+this short article, see introduction to the immediately preceding
+Section.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.1. <i>Letter from Ajimeer, the Court of the Great Mogul, to
+Mr L. Whitaker, dated in the Year 1615</i>.</p>
+
+<p>My last letter to you was from <i>Zobah</i>, as it is called
+by the prophet Samuel, B. II. ch. viii. v. 3. now named Aleppo,
+the principal emporium of all Syria, or rather of the eastern
+world; which was, I think, about fifteen months ago. I returned
+from Jerusalem to Aleppo, where I remained three months
+afterwards, and then departed in a caravan bound for Persia.
+Passing the river Euphrates, the chiefest of the rivers which
+irrigated the terrestrial paradise, when about four days journey
+from Aleppo, I entered into Mesopotamia, or Chaldea. Hence, in
+two days journey, I reached <i>Ur</i> of the Chaldees, where
+Abraham was born, a very delicate and pleasant city.[246] I
+remained here four days; and in other four days journey reached
+the Tigris, which I also passed, at a place where it was so
+shallow that it only reached to the calf of my leg, so that I
+waded over a-foot. I then entered into the greater Armenia; and
+thence into lower Media, and resided six days in its metropolis,
+formerly called <i>Ecbatana</i>, the summer residence of Cyrus
+the Great, now called Tauris. More woeful ruins of a city I never
+beheld, excepting those of Troy and of Cyzicum in Natolia.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 246: Probably Orfa in Diarbekir is here
+meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From that place I went to <i>Cashbin</i>, called by Strabo,
+<i>Arsacia</i>, in higher Media, once the residence of the Tartar
+prince; four days journey from the Caspian Sea. From Cashbin, I
+went in twenty-three days to <i>Ispahan</i> in Parthia, the
+residence of the king of Persia; but while I was there, he was in
+<i>Gurgistan</i>, [Georgia,] ransacking the poor Christians of
+that country with fire and sword. I remained two months at
+Ispahan, whence I travelled with a caravan to the eastern India,
+passing four months and several days in travelling from that
+city, through part of Persia proper, and a large extent of the
+noble and renowned India, to the goodly city of <i>Lahore</i>.
+This is one of the largest cities in the world, being, at the
+least, sixteen miles in circuit, and larger even than
+Constantinople. Twelve days before coming to Lahore, I passed
+over the famous river Indus, which is as broad again as our
+Thames at London, having its original from the mountain of
+Caucassus, so ennobled by ancient poets and historians, both
+Greek and Latin.</p>
+
+<p>When about midway between Ispahan and Lahore, just about the
+frontiers between Persia and India, I met Sir Robert Shirley and
+his lady, travelling from the court of the Mogul to that of
+Persia. They were gallantly furnished for their journey, and
+shewed me, to my great satisfaction, both my books, very neatly
+kept, and promised to shew them, especially my itinerary, to the
+king of Persia, and to interpret some of the principal contents
+to him in Turkish, that I may have the more gracious access to
+him at my return. Besides other rarities which they carried with
+them, they had two elephants and eight antelopes, being the first
+of either I had ever seen. But afterwards, when I came to the
+Mogul's, court, I saw many. They intended to present these
+animals to the king of Persia. Both Sir Robert and his lady used
+me with much respect; especially his lady, who presented me with
+forty shillings in Persian money; and they seemed joyful at
+meeting me, promising to bring me into good grace with the king
+of Persia, as I mean, with God's help, to return through Persia
+to Aleppo.</p>
+
+<p>From Lahore, I travelled in twenty days to another goodly city
+named Agra, through such a beautiful and level country as I had
+never seen before. In this way, from the town's end of Lahore to
+the skirts of Agra, we had a row of trees on both sides of the
+road, the most incomparable avenue I ever beheld. Some ten days
+journey from Lahore towards Agra, but about ten miles off the
+road on the left hand, there is a mountain, the inhabitants of
+which have a singular custom, all the brothers of one family
+having but one wife among them, so that one women sometimes has
+six or seven husbands. The same is related by Strabo concerning
+the inhabitants of Arabia Felix. Agra is a very great city, but
+in every respect much inferior to Lahore. Here the Mogul used
+always to keep his court, till within these two years.</p>
+
+<p>From Agra I went in ten days to the Mogul's court, at a town
+called Asmere, [Ajimeer,] where I found an English. Cape merchant
+with nine more of our countrymen, residing there in the way of
+trade for our East India Company. In. my journey from Jerusalem
+to the court of the Great Mogul, I spent fifteen months and some
+days, travelling all the way a-foot, having been so great a
+<i>propatetic</i>, or walker forwards on foot, as I doubt if you
+ever heard of the like; for the whole way, from Jerusalem to
+Ajimeer, contains 2700 English miles. My whole perambulation of
+the greater Asia is likely to extend almost to 6000 miles, by the
+time I have returned back through Persia, by Babylon and Nineveh
+to Cairo in Egypt, and thence down the Nile to Alexandria, when I
+propose, with God's blessing, to embark for Christendom.</p>
+
+<p>The reigning Great Mogul is named Selim.[247] He is
+fifty-three years of age, his birth-day having been celebrated
+with wonderful magnificence since my arrival. He was that day
+weighed in a pair of golden scales, which by great chance I saw
+that same day, the opposite scale being filled with as much gold
+as counterpoised his weight, and this is afterwards distributed
+among the poor. This custom is observed every year. His
+complexion is of an olive colour, something between white and
+black; being of a seemly stature, but somewhat corpulent. His
+dominions are very extensive, being about 4000 English miles in
+circumference, nearly answerable to the compass of the Turkish
+territories; or, if the Mogul kingdom be any way inferior in size
+to that empire, it is more than equally endowed with a fertile
+soil beyond that of any other country, and in having its
+territory connected together in one goodly continent, within
+which no other prince possesses one single foot of land. The
+yearly revenue of the Mogul extends to forty millions of crowns,
+of six shillings each, while that of the Turk does not exceed
+fifteen millions, as I was credibly informed in Constantinople,
+nor that of the Sophy five millions, as I learnt at Ispahan. It
+is said that the present Great Mogul is not circumcised, in which
+he differs from all other Mahometan sovereigns.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 247: He was Sultan Selim before his
+accession to the throne, but was afterward known by the new name
+of Jehunguire.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Great Mogul speaks with much revrence of our Saviour,
+naming him <i>Hazaret Eesa</i>, that is to say, the Great Prophet
+Jesus.[248] He likewise uses all Christians, and especially the
+English, with more benevolence than does any other Mahometan
+prince. He keeps many wild beasts, such as lions, elephants,
+leopards, bears, antelopes, and unicorns, [rhinoceroses,] of
+which I saw two at his court, the strangest beasts in the world.
+They were brought out of Bengal, a kingdom in his dominions of
+most wonderful fertility, above four months journey from this
+place, the mid-land parts of which are watered by various
+channels and branches of the famous river Ganges. I have not yet
+seen that country, but mean to visit it, God willing, before my
+departure, the nearest part of it being only about twelve days
+journey from hence.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 248: The Persian word <i>Hasaret</i>, here
+erroneously rendered Great Prophet, seems to signify literally
+<i>face</i> or <i>presence</i>, and is metaphorically used as a
+term of highest dignity, of which an instance occurs in the
+present section, used by Coryat himself in addressing the Great
+Mogul--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Twice every week elephants are made to fight before the Mogul,
+forming the bravest spectacle that can be imagined, many of them
+being thirteen feet and a half in height, and they jostle
+together as though they were two little mountains; and were they
+not separated in the midst of their fighting, by means of certain
+fire-works, they would exceedingly hurt and gore each other, by
+their murderous tusks. The Mogul is said to keep 30,000
+elephants, at a most enormous expence; and in feeding them,
+together with his lions and other beasts, he expends an
+incredible sum of money, being at the least 10,000 pounds
+sterling daily. I have myself rode upon an elephant since I came
+to this court, meaning in my next book to have my effigies
+represented in that form. This king keeps a thousand women for
+his own use, the chiefest of whom, called Normal, (Noormahal) is
+his queen.</p>
+
+<p>In my ten months journey between Aleppo and this court, I
+spent just three pounds sterling, yet fared reasonably every day;
+victuals being so cheap in some of the countries through which I
+travelled, that I often lived competently for one penny a-day. Of
+that three pounds, I was actually cozened out of ten shillings,
+by certain evil Christians of the Armenian nation; so that in
+reality I only expended fifty shillings in all that time. I have
+been in a city of this country called <i>Detee</i>,[249] where
+Alexander the Great joined battle with Porus king of India, and
+defeated him; and where, in memory of his victory, he caused
+erect a brazen pillar, which remains there to this day. At this
+time I have many irons in the fire, as I am learning the Persian,
+Turkish, and Arabic languages, having already acquired the
+Italian. I have been already three months at the court of the
+Great Mogul, and propose, God willing, to remain here five months
+longer, till I have got these three languages; after which I
+propose to visit the river Ganges, and then to return to the
+court of Persia.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 249: This is obviously a misprint for
+Delee, meaning Delhi; but it is more probable that Alexander
+never was beyond the Punjab.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the course of my journey, I was robbed of my money, but not
+of all, having some concealed in certain secret corners. This was
+done at the city of Diarbekir in Mesopotatamia, by a Turkish
+horse soldier, whom they call a <i>spahee</i>. Since my arrival
+here, there was sent to this king the richest present I ever
+heard of. It consisted of various things, the whole amounting to
+the value of ten of their lacks, a lack being &pound;10,000
+sterling. Part of this present consisted of thirty-one elephants,
+two of which were more gorgeously adorned than any thing I ever
+saw, or shall see in the course of my life. They had each four
+massy chains all of beaten gold, around their bodies, with two
+chains of the same about their legs, furniture for their buttocks
+of the same rich material, and two golden lions on their
+heads.</p>
+
+<p>S.2. <i>Letter from Agra, the Capital of the Great Mogul, to
+his Mother, dated 31st October, 1616</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Most dear and well-beloved Mother,</p>
+
+<p>This city is the metropolis of the whole dominions of the
+Great Mogul, and is at the distance of ten days journey from
+Ajimeer, whence I departed on the 12th September this year, after
+having abode there twelve months and sixty days. This my long
+stay in one place, was for two principal causes; one being to
+learn the languages of these countries through which I am to pass
+between this country and Christendom, namely, Persian, Turkish,
+and Arabic, which I have competently attained to by labour and
+industry, being as available to me as money, and the chiefest, or
+rather the only means to get me money if I should happen to be in
+want; and, secondly, that, by the help of the Persian, I might
+get myself access to the Mogul, and be able to express my mind
+unto him about what I proposed to lay before him. During all this
+time, I abode in the house of the English merchants, my dear
+countrymen, not expending any money at all for lodging, diet,
+washing, or any other thing.</p>
+
+<p>I attained to a reasonable skill in the Persian tongue, by
+earnest study in a few months, so that I made an oration to the
+king in that language, before many of his nobles; and afterwards
+discoursed with him very readily. The copy of this speech I have
+sent you, as a novelty, though the language may seem strange and
+uncouth to an Englishman; and I have sent you herewith a
+translation, which you may shew along with the Persian original
+to some of my learned friends of the clergy, and also of the
+laity, who may take some pleasure in reading so rare and unusual
+a tongue. The Persian is this that follows:</p>
+
+<p><i>Hazaret Aallum-pennah, Salamet: fooker Darceish, ce
+jehaun-gesht hastam; ke mia emadam az wellageti door, yanne as
+muik Ingliz-stan, ke kessanion pesheen mushacar cardand,</i>
+<i>ke wellageti mazcoor der akeri magrub bood, ke mader hamma
+jezzaereti dunia ast, &amp;c.</i>[250]--The English of it is
+this:</p>
+
+<p>"Lord protector of the world, all hail! I am a poor traveller
+and world-seer, who am come here from a far country called
+England, which ancient historians thought to have been situated
+in the farthest bounds of the west, and which is the queen of all
+the islands in the world. The causes of my coming hither are
+four. First, that I might behold the blessed countenance of your
+majesty, whose great fame has resounded over all Europe, and
+through all the Mahometan countries. When I heard of the fame of
+your majesty, I made all possible haste hither, and cheerfully
+endured the labour of travelling, that I might see your glorious
+court. Secondly, I was desirous of seeing your majesty's
+elephants, which kind of beasts I have not seen in any other
+country. Thirdly, that I might see your famous river the Ganges,
+the captain of all the rivers in the world. Fourthly, to entreat
+your majesty, that you would vouchsafe to grant me your most
+gracious phirmaund, that I may travel into the country of
+Tartaria to the city of Samarcand, to visit the blessed sepulchre
+of the <i>Lord of the Corners</i>,[251] whose fame, by reason of
+his wars and victories, is published over the whole world, so
+that perhaps he is not altogether so famous in his own country of
+Tartary as in England. I have a strong desire to see the
+sepulchre of the Lord of the Corners for this cause, that, when
+in Constantinople, I saw a notable old building in a pleasant
+garden near the said city, where the Christian emperor, Emanuel,
+made a sumptuous banquet to the Lord of the Corners, after he had
+taken Sultan Bajazet in a great battle near the city of Brusa,
+when the Lord of the Corners bound Sultan Bajazet in golden
+fetters, and put him into an iron cage. These causes have induced
+me to travel thus far from my native country, having come a-foot
+through Turkey and Persia into this country, my pilgrimage having
+extended so three thousand miles, with much labour and toil, such
+as no mortal man hath ever yet performed, to see the blessed
+countenance of your majesty, since the first day of your being
+inaugurated in your imperial throne."</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 250: The whole discourse, of which the
+following paragraph in the text is the translation, is contained
+in the Pilgrims: But doubting its accuracy, as that book is most
+incorrectly printed throughout, the editor requested the favour
+of the late learned professor of oriental languages in the
+University of Edinburgh, Dr Alexander Murray, to revise and
+correct this first sentence, which he most readily did, adding
+the following literal translation: "Presence, [or face.] of the
+world--protector, salutation to thee: A poor dervish and
+world-wanderer I am; that I have come from a kingdom far, to-wit,
+from the kingdom of Ingliz-stan, which historians ancient,
+relation have made, that kingdom said, in the end of the west
+was, which the mother of every island of the world is,"
+&amp;c.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 251: This is the title given to Tamerlane
+in this country, in the Persian language, meaning that he was
+lord over the four corners of the earth, that is, the highest and
+supreme monarch of the world.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When I had ended my speech, I conversed with him for a short
+space in Persian, when, among other things, he told me that he
+could do me no service in regard to my proposed journey to
+Samarcand, as there was no intimacy between him and the princes
+of the Tartars, so that his commendatory letters would avail me
+little. He also added, that the Tartars bore so deadly a hate
+against all Christians, that they would certainly kill any who
+might venture into their country, wherefore he earnestly
+dissuaded me from this proposed journey, as I valued my life and
+welfare. At last, he concluded his discourse by throwing down to
+me, from a window in which he stood, that looked into the street,
+an hundred pieces of silver, worth two shillings each or ten
+pounds in all, which were thrown into a sheet hanging by the four
+corners.</p>
+
+<p>I had conducted this affair so secretly, by the help of the
+Persian which I had learnt, that neither our English ambassador,
+nor any other of my countrymen, excepting one special and private
+friend, knew any thing at all about the matter till I had
+thoroughly accomplished my design. For I well knew, if the
+ambassador had got the smallest notice of my purpose, that he
+would have counteracted me, as indeed he signified to me after I
+had effected my purpose, alledging that this might redound to the
+discredit of our nation, for one of our country to present
+himself in that poor and beggarly manner before the king, to
+crave money from him by flattery. But I answered our ambassador
+so resolutely, that he was glad to let me alone. Indeed, I never
+had more need of money in all my life than at this time, having
+only to the value of twenty shillings remaining, owing to my
+having been stripped of almost all my money by a miscreant Turk,
+in a city called <i>Imaret</i>, in Mesopotamia.</p>
+
+<p>After my interview with the Mogul, I went to visit a certain
+noble and generous Christian of the Armenian nation, two days
+journey from court, to observe certain remarkable matters at that
+place; and, by means of my knowledge of the Persian language, he
+made me very welcome, entertaining me with much civility and
+kindness; and, at my departure, gave me very bountifully twenty
+pieces of the same coin as the king had done, worth forty
+shillings of our money. About ten days after this, I departed
+from Ajimeer, the court of the Great Mogul, to resume my
+pilgrimage, after my long rest of fourteen months, proposing to
+go back into Persia. On this occasion, our ambassador gave me a
+gold piece of this king's coin, worth twenty-four shillings,
+which I shall save till my arrival in England, if it be possible.
+I have thus received in benevolences, since I came into this
+country, twenty marks sterling,[252] bating two shillings and
+eight-pence, besides &pound;1:13:4 sterling, in Persian money,
+from Lady Shirley, upon the confines of Persia. At this present,
+being in Agra, whence I write this letter, I have about twelve
+pounds, which, according to my manner of living on the way, at
+two-pence a-day, will very competently maintain me during three
+years travel, considering the cheapness of all eatables in Asia.
+Drink costs me nothing, as I hardly ever drink any thing beyond
+pure water during my pilgrimage.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 252: Twenty marks are &pound;15:6:8
+sterling.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I mean to remain in Agra for six weeks longer, waiting an
+excellent opportunity of going to the famous river Ganges, about
+five days journey from hence, to see a memorable meeting of the
+idolatrous people of this country, called Banians, of whom to the
+number of 400,000 go thither, on purpose to bathe and shave
+themselves in the river, and to sacrifice a world of gold to that
+same river, partly in stamped coin, and partly in great massy
+lumps and wedges, thrown into the river as a sacrifice, besides
+many other strange ceremonies, worthy of being observed. So
+notable a spectacle is no where to be seen, neither in this the
+<i>greater</i> Asia, nor in the <i>lesser</i>, now called
+Natolia. This shew is made once in every year, on which occasion
+people flock thither from almost a thousand miles off,
+worshipping the river as a god and saviour; a most abominable and
+impious superstition of these brutish heathens, aliens from
+Christ. As soon as I have seen this ceremony, I propose, by God's
+help, to repair to Lahore, twenty days journey from hence, and so
+into Persia, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>Your dutiful, loving, and obedient son, Now a desolate pilgrim
+in the world, THOMAS CORYAT.</p>
+
+<p>S.3. <i>Some Observations concerning India, by Thomas
+Coryat</i>.[253]</p>
+
+<p>Whereas in this country the beggars beg from a Christian in
+the name of <i>Bibbee Maria</i>, and not of <i>Hazaret Eesa</i>,
+we may gather that the Jesuits have preached our <i>Lady Mary</i>
+more than the <i>Lord Jesus</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 253: Purchas informs us, that these were
+taken from certain notes written by Coryat, given him by Sir
+Thomas Roe; "whence, omitting such things as have been given
+before from the observations of Sir Thomas Roe himself, I have
+inserted a few."--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>A great rajah of the Hindoos, who was a notorious atheist, and
+a contemner of all diety, and who boasted that he knew of no God
+except the king, and neither believed nor feared any other,
+happened one day to sit dallying among his women, when one of
+them plucked a hair from his breast, which hair being
+fast-rooted, plucked off along with it a small bit of skin, so
+that a small spot of blood appeared. This small scar festered and
+gangrened incurably, so that in a few days his life was despaired
+of, and being surrounded by all his friends, and several of the
+courtiers, he broke out into these excellent words:--"Which of
+you would have thought that I, a warrior, should not have died by
+the stroke of a sword, a spear, or an arrow? But now am I
+enforced to confess the power of the great God I have so long
+despised, who needs no other lance to slay so blasphemous a
+wretch and contemner of his holy majesty, such as I have been,
+than a small hair."</p>
+
+<p>Akbar Shah, the former king, had learnt all manner of
+sorceries; and being once in a strange humour to shew a spectacle
+to his nobles, he brought forth his favourite Sultana before
+them, and cut off her head with a sword in their presence. Seeing
+them struck with horror and amazement at this action, by virtue
+of his exorcisms and sorceries, he caused her head to fix on
+again, and no sign remained of any wound.</p>
+
+<p>The same prince, who was very fortunate during his reign,
+shewed the utmost attention and respect to his mother, of which
+he one day gave the following striking instance:--Being on a
+journey between Lahore and Agra, on which occasion his mother
+accompanied him, being carried in a palanquin, and having to pass
+a river, he took one of the poles of the palanquin on his own
+shoulder, commanding his greatest nobles to do the same, and in
+this manner carried her across the river. He never denied her any
+request that ever she made, except one, and this was, that our
+Bible might be hung about the neck of an ass, and so beaten about
+the town of Agra. The reason of this strange request was, that
+the Portuguese had taken a ship of theirs, in which they found a
+copy of the <i>Koran</i>, or bible of the Mahometans, which they
+tied about the neck of a dog, and beat the dog about the streets
+of Ormus. But he denied her this request, saying, That if it were
+evil in the Portuguese to have so done with the Koran, it did not
+become a king to requite evil with evil, as the contempt of any
+religion was contempt of God, and he would not be revenged upon
+an innocent book. The moral of this is, that God would not permit
+the sacred book of his law and truth to be contemned among the
+infidels.</p>
+
+<p>One day in every year, for the amusement of the king's women,
+all the tradesmen's wives are admitted into the <i>Mahal</i>,
+having each somewhat to sell, after the manner of a fair, and at
+which the king acts as broker for his wives, no other man being
+present, and by means of his gains on this occasion, provides his
+own supper. By this means he attains to a sight of all the pretty
+women of the city; and at a fair of this kind he got his beloved
+<i>Noor Mahal</i>.</p>
+
+<p>After <i>Shaof Freed</i> had won the battle of Lahore by a
+stratagem, all the captains of the rebel army, to the number of
+two thousand, who had been taken by the king, were hung up upon
+flesh-hooks, or set upon stakes, forming an avenue for the king's
+entrance into Lahore. On this occasion, his son <i>Curseroo</i>,
+[Cusero] who had been made prisoner, rode beside him,
+bare-footed, on an elephant, and the king asked him how he liked
+that spectacle? To this the prince answered, That he was sorry to
+see so much cruelty and injustice in his father, in thus
+executing those who had only done their duty, as they had lived
+on his bread and salt: but that his father had done justly if he
+had pardoned these brave men, and punished him, who was their
+master, and the author of this rebellion.</p>
+
+<p>Sultan Cusero has only one wife, owing to the following
+circumstance: During his confinement, the king proposed to make a
+hunting progress of four months, and consulted how he might keep
+his son in safe custody during his absence. He at length
+determined to build a tower in which to immure him, having
+neither door nor window, and only a few small holes to let in
+air, and these so high as to be beyond reach. Into this tower
+were to be put along with the prince all sorts of provisions and
+necessaries, with a few servants to attend him. While this was
+building, the wife of Cusero fell at the king's feet, and would
+not leave him till she obtained his consent to be shut up along
+with her husband. The king endeavoured to persuade her to enjoy
+her liberty, but she utterly refused any other comfort than to be
+the companion of her husband's miseries. Among these, this was
+the greatest, that if any of those who were to be shut up along
+with him, to the number of fifty in all, should happen to die
+during the king's absence, there were no means either to remove
+or bury the body, as no person was to be allowed to come near the
+tower.</p>
+
+<p>It is a frequent custom of the present Mogul, when he happens
+to be awake in the night time, he calls for certain poor old men,
+making them sit beside him, and passes his time in familiar
+discourse with them, giving them clothes and bountiful alms when
+he dismisses them. At one time, when residing at Ajimeer, he went
+a-foot on pilgrimage to the tomb of a saint or prophet called
+Haji Mundin, and there kindled a fire with his own hands, under
+an immense <i>Heidelbergian equipolent</i> brass pot, in which
+victuals were cooked for five thousand poor persons. When the
+victuals were ready, he took out the first platter with his own
+hands, and served the mess to a poor person. Noor Mahal took out
+and served the second, and the rest was served by the other
+ladies of his court.--<i>Crack me this nut, all ye papal
+charity-vaunters</i>.</p>
+
+<p>One day an Armenian procured a nobleman to present him to the
+king, as one who desired to become an Mahometan; on which the
+king asked him, if he had been converted from hope of preferment;
+to which the Armenian answered, that be had no such motive. Some
+months afterwards, the new convert craved some courtesy from the
+king, which he denied, saying, "I have already done you the
+greatest of all favours, in allowing you to save your soul; but
+you must provide for your own body the best way you can." The
+king likes not those who change their religion, being himself of
+none but according to his own fancy, and freely allows therefore
+of all religions in his dominions. Of which I may give the
+following notable example:</p>
+
+<p>He had an Armenian in his service, named Scander, whom he one
+day asked if he thought any of the <i>padres</i> had ever
+converted a single Mahometan to be a true Christian, for
+conscience sake, and not for money. Scander answered, with great
+confidence, that he had one as his servant, who was a sincere
+Christian, and would not be of any other for any worldly
+consideration. The king immediately caused this man to be sent
+for, and bidding Scander depart, he examined the convert as to
+his reasons for having become a Christian. In reply, he quoted
+certain feeble jesuitical reasons, declaring his determination to
+be of no other religion, though the king made him many fair
+speeches and large offers to return to Mahometism, offering him
+pensions, and the command of horse. He said he had now only four
+rupees a month, which was a poor recompense for becoming a
+Christian, but if he would recant, he would give him high
+dignities and large means. The fellow answered, that he had not
+become a Christian for such small wages, as he was able to earn
+as much in the service of a Mahometan; but was a Christian in his
+heart, and was determined so to continue. Finding this method
+ineffectual, the king turned his tune, and tried him with threats
+of severe punishment, unless he returned to the faith of Mahomet.
+But the proselyte manfully declared he would suffer any thing,
+being ready to endure whatever the king was pleased to order.
+Upon this declaration, when all the by-standers expected present
+and severe castigation, the king suddenly changed his manner
+towards him, highly commending his constancy and resolution,
+bidding him return to his master, and to serve him faithfully,
+and ordered him an allowance of one rupee a-day for his
+integrity.</p>
+
+<p>About two months afterwards, the king returned from hunting
+wild-hogs, an animal which is held in abhorrence by all
+Mahometans, and which kind of venison, therefore, the king was in
+use to distribute among the Christians and Rajaputs. On this
+occasion, the king sent for the converted catechumen above
+mentioned, and commanded him to take up a hog for his master,
+which no Mahometan will touch. He did so, but on going out of the
+court gate, he was so hooted at by the Mahometans, that he threw
+down his burden in a ditch, and went home; concealing what had
+passed from his master. Some four days afterwards, the Armenian
+being on duty in presence of the king, he asked him if the hog he
+had sent him was good meat. The Armenian replied, that he had not
+seen or heard of any. The king therefore immediately ordered the
+convert to be sent for, who confessed that he had not carried
+home the hog, as being mocked by the Mahometans for touching so
+great an abomination, he had for shame thrown it away. On this
+the king observed, "By your Christian law there is no difference
+of meats. Are you ashamed of your law, or do you outwardly
+forsake it to flatter the Mahometans? I now see that you are
+neither a good Christian nor a good Mahometan, but a knave
+dissembling with both. When I believed you sincere, I gave you a
+pension, which I now take from you for your dissimulation, and I
+farther condemn you to receive an hundred stripes." These were
+presently paid him, instead of his money; and the king desired
+all to take warning by this example, that, having given liberty
+of conscience to all religions, he would have all to adhere to
+what they professed.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IX.</p>
+
+<p>ACCOUNT OF THE WRONGS DONE TO THE ENGLISH AT BANDA BY THE
+DUTCH, IN 1617 AND 1618.[254]</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>This section contains a letter from Mr Thomas Spurway,
+merchant or factor, addressed from Bantam, "To the Honourable and
+Right Worshipful the East India Company of England, touching the
+wrongs done at Banda to the English by the Hollanders; the former
+unkind disgusts and brabling quarrels now breaking unexpectedly
+out into a furious and injurious war." Such is the account given
+of this section by Purchas, who farther informs his readers,
+"That the beginning of this letter was torn, and therefore
+imperfect in his edition; but, what is here defective, was to be
+afterwards supplied from the journals of Nathaniel Courthop, and
+other continuations of these insolences of the Dutch at Banda, by
+Mr Hayes, and others." These journals of Courthop and Hayes are
+so intolerably and confusedly written, and so interlarded with
+numerous letters <i>about</i> the subject of these differences
+with the Dutch, that we have been reluctantly under the necessity
+of omitting them, being so monstrously inarticulate as to render
+it impossible to make them at all palatable to our readers,
+without using freedoms that were altogether inadmissible in a
+work like the present.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 254: Purch. Pilgr. I. 608.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From this letter, and other information of a similar nature,
+it appears that the attempts to form establishments for trade at
+Banda and the Molucca islands were found to be difficult or
+impracticable, owing to the opposition of the Dutch, who were
+much stronger in that part of India, and had not only conceived
+the plan of monopolizing the spice trade, but even avowed their
+determination to exclude the English and all other European
+nations from participating in any share of it. We do not pretend,
+in our Collection, to write the history of the English East India
+Company, but merely to give a series of the voyages which
+contributed to the establishment of that princely association of
+merchant adventurers. Yet it seems proper, occasionally at least,
+in the introductions to leading voyages, like the present, to
+give some short historical notices of the subject, for the
+materials of which we are chiefly, if not solely, indebted to the
+Annals of the Company, a work of meritorious and laborious
+research, already several times referred to.</p>
+
+<p>Under the difficulties which had long attended the exertions
+of the English to acquire a share in this peculiarly called
+<i>spice trade</i>, the agent and commercial council of the
+English company at Bantam, gave authority to the commanders of
+the Swan and Defence to endeavour to obtain from the native
+chiefs of the islands of Puloroon and Puloway, a surrender of
+these islands to the king of England, with the stipulation of
+paying annually as a quit-rent, a fruit-bearing branch of the
+nutmeg tree; yet stipulating that these islanders were to
+continue entirely under the guidance of their own laws and
+customs, providing only that they should engage to sell their
+spices exclusively to the agents of the English company, who
+were, in return, to supply them with provisions and Hindoostan
+manufactures at a fair price, in exchange for their peculiar
+productions, nutmegs and mace. They were likewise authorised, if
+they procured the consent of the natives, to establish fortified
+stations, or factories, at Puloroon, Puloway. Pulo-Lantore, and
+Rosinging, or Rosengin.[255] The views of the Bantam factory on
+this occasion seem to have been generally judicious, as to the
+measure they now authorised, but exceedingly ill judged in
+attempting to execute so very important a purpose with a force
+entirely inadequate to that with which it had to contend.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 255: An. of E.I. Co. I. 187.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Dutch had expelled the Portuguese, at that time the
+subjects of their tyrannical oppressors, the Spaniards, from a
+great portion of the spice islands, in which warlike measure, and
+its consequences, they had always to support a considerable
+force, both naval and military, in these seas, and in various
+forts upon these islands; and besides, that they felt their
+preponderance from these circumstances, and used it very
+naturally for their own exclusive benefit, they alleged, and with
+no small appearance of equity, that the English had no right to
+enjoy the advantages of a trade, which they, the Dutch, had
+conquered from the Portuguese and Spaniards. This opposition of
+interests proceeded in the sequel to great extremities, in which
+the greatly superior power of the Hollanders in these seas,
+enabled them effectually to oppress the English, in what are
+peculiarly called the spice islands, and even to expel them from
+all participation in that trade, as will appear in some of the
+subsequent sections of this chapter.</p>
+
+<p>It would be not only premature in this place, but incompatible
+with the nature of our work, which is intended as a Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, to attempt giving a connected history of
+these dissensions between the Dutch and English in Eastern India,
+which will be found detailed in the Annals of the English
+Company. It is hardly possible, however, to refrain from one
+observation on the subject,--that the Dutch company, and the
+government of Holland, appear to have mainly proceeded, in their
+hostile opposition to the English East India trade, on their
+knowledge of the pusillanimous character of King James, which he
+vainly thought to veil under the pretensions of loving peace, but
+which the Dutch, as will be seen in the present section, clearly
+understood, and openly expressed, as <i>the childhood of St
+George</i>, the tutelary martial saint of England. <i>Beati
+pacifici</i>, his favourite adage, is an excellent Christian and
+moral sentiment, but is incompatible with the unavoidable
+exigencies of government, at least as they were then
+situated.--E.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p><i>May it please your Worships</i>,</p>
+
+<p>We arrived at Macassar on the 19th of November, 1616, from
+Bantam, with the Swan and Defence, under the command of Captain
+Nicholas Courthop, who sailed in the Swan, of which ship Mr Davis
+was master, the other being commanded by Mr Hinchley. We remained
+there for the purpose of taking in an hundred <i>quoines</i>[256]
+of rice. On the 4th December, we saw a large Dutch ship in the
+offing, which came to anchor about five leagues off, and on the
+5th they sent their skiff ashore, which made directly for the
+English house, having eight men on board. As soon as we perceived
+this boat coming ashore, we ran to the sea side; but, before we
+got there, two of her men were landed, whom we acquainted with
+the danger they were in, as the king of Macassar, and all the
+other kings thereabouts, were become their mortal enemies,
+because of the many injuries done them by the Hollanders, who had
+forcibly carried away a principal sabander, and other persons
+belonging to Macassar, for which they were determined upon
+revenge; and, therefore, that they might all expect to be put to
+death, unless the king could be prevailed upon to spare them. The
+Dutchmen were so much alarmed at this intelligence, that they
+wished to have gone back to their boat, but the Macassers had
+already gathered about us, and laid hands upon them.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 256: The amount or quantity of these
+<i>quoines</i> are no where stated, or even hinted at; but, from
+circumstances in the sequel, they appear to have been
+considerable.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I, and other English, immediately went in all haste to the
+king, acquainting him with what had happened, lest, if the Dutch
+had intended any treachery, he might have suspected us as being
+accessary. The king gave us thanks, and desired us to take the
+two Dutchmen who had landed to our house, that we might learn
+from them their intentions in coming here. This we did, and they
+informed us that they belonged to a fleet lately fitted out from
+Holland, and had lost company of their consorts. One of these
+called himself John Staunch, and reported himself to be an
+under-factor. The other was an English sailor. Perceiving
+themselves to be in great danger, they earnestly entreated us to
+stand their friends and procure their liberty. We promised to do
+every thing we could for them. Soon after this, the kings of
+Macassar and Talow, together with about 2000 attendants, came to
+the sands near the sea side, where they held a council upon these
+men. The king of Talow was clear for putting them to death, but
+we used our interest so successfully for them, that they were
+commanded to be gone instantly in their boat; The king of
+Macassar observing, that these were too few for satisfying his
+revenge, and that he should wait for one more ample. So they
+departed and went to their ship.</p>
+
+<p>Next day another boat was observed coming towards the shore
+from the same ship; and, on the king being informed of this, he
+gave immediate orders for twenty proas and corracorras to be
+manned and launched. This was done immediately, and the whole
+made towards the Dutch boat, which was rowing for the land
+directly towards our house. On observing the native craft
+endeavouring to intercept them, the Dutch turned their boat, and
+rowed back to regain their ship; but the Macassars soon got up,
+boarded them on both sides, and slew every man of the Hollanders,
+being sixteen in number. There were at this time near 5000 people
+at the sea side, and we were commanded to keep the house.</p>
+
+<p>The name of this Dutch ship was the Endraught, and imagining
+that we were bound for Banda or the Moluccas, she remained at sea
+waiting for us. We set sail from Macassar road on the 8th
+December, 1616, and when the Dutchmen, saw us under sail, they
+also weighed and kept company with us. We would gladly have gone
+from them, but could not, owing to the bad sailing of the
+Defence. They sent their boat to us, requesting we would spare
+them two quoines of rice, four tons of water, and some poultry,
+all of which we gave them, only taking payment for the rice,
+being forty dollars, giving the water and poultry freely. We
+asked why they had attempted to land the second time; when they
+told us their first boat had not then returned to the ship, so
+that they believed the Dutch factory had still remained at
+Macassar. But I believe it proceeded from obstinacy, believing
+their first boat had been denied access at our instigation, and
+meaning to make a second trial, when they hoped to have flattered
+the king to allow them to return, and reinstate their factory.
+For both their boats passed within musket-shot of our ships on
+their way to the land, yet did not go aboard to enquire what were
+the situation of affairs on shore, which if they had done, we
+should have forewarned them of their danger. They kept company
+with us till we came near Amboina, for which place they stood in,
+while we continued our course. We have since learnt that they
+gave out we had been the cause of their men being slain at
+Macassar, which is most false: For I solemnly protest that we
+used our best endeavours to save them, and if it had not been for
+us, the eight men in their first boat had also been slain.</p>
+
+<p>The Swan and Defence arrived in the road of Puloroon on the
+13th December. Next day the people of that island came on board,
+and conferred with us about surrendering the island to us. We
+represented that our nation had come often to their island, at
+great cost, and at their particular request, to settle a factory,
+and trade with them in a friendly manner, bringing them rice and
+other provisions, with cloth and sundry commodities, in exchange
+for their spices; that we had no desire to usurp over them, or to
+reduce them under bondage, as had been done formerly by the
+Hollanders and other nations; and that, if they would surrender
+their island of Puloroon to our sovereign the king of England, by
+a formal writing, and by the delivery of some earth, with a tree
+and fruits of the island, as true tokens of their fidelity, and
+thereafter a nut-tree yearly as an acknowledgment, we should
+settle a factory, and would furnish them with rice, cloth, and
+other commodities, both now and yearly afterwards. We also
+assured them, if we were once settled on the island, that
+sufficient supplies would come to them yearly, much better than
+now; and that we would use our utmost efforts, both by means of
+our men and ships, to defend them and ourselves from all enemies.
+We also demanded, whether they had come under any contract with
+the Hollanders, or had made them any surrender of their island.
+To this they unanimously replied, that they had made no such
+engagement, and never would, but held the Hollanders as their
+mortal enemies. This was earnestly declared to us, both by the
+men of Puloroon and by divers chiefs from Puloway, who had fled
+from that island on its forcible reduction by the Hollanders. And
+they all declared that the island of Puloway had been lawfully
+surrendered to Richard Hunt, for the king of England, before the
+Hollanders came into the road, the English colours having been
+hoisted in the castle, which the Hollanders shot down, using many
+disgraceful words of his majesty. They farther declared, that
+they defended their island for his majesty's use, as long as they
+possibly could; and, being constrained by force, they had fled to
+Puloroon, Lantor, and Serran.</p>
+
+<p>After this conference had continued the whole day, the
+writings of surrender were drawn up, and confirmed by all the
+chief men of Puloroon and Puloway, and so delivered by their own
+hands to us, Nathaniel Cowthorp, Thomas Spurway, and Sophonie
+Cozocke, for his majesty's use. They also that same instant
+delivered to us a nutmeg-tree, with its fruit growing thereon,
+having the earth about its root, together with oilier fruits, and
+a live goat, in symbolical surrender of the sovereignty of the
+island, desiring us to hoist the English colours, and to fire a
+salute of ordnance. Accordingly, the colours were set up, and we
+fired thirty pieces of ordnance, as a mark of taking possession;
+and at night all the chiefs went ashore, parting from us on the
+most friendly terms.</p>
+
+<p>On Christmas-day we descried two large Dutch ships edging
+towards Puloroon. On seeing our ships in the road, they bore away
+to leeward for Nero, and next day another of their ships hove in
+sight, which went to the same place. The 28th, a Dutch pinnace
+stood right over for Puloroon, and came bravadoing within
+gun-shot of our fort, having the Dutch colours flying at her
+poop; but presently tacked about, lowered her colours, and
+hoisted a bloody ensign instead, as if in defiance, and then
+stood over for Nero. By this bravado, we daily looked for their
+coming against us, according to their old injurious custom. We
+landed four pieces of ordnance on the 30th, besides two others
+formerly landed on the 25th, and set to work to construct
+fortifications for our defence. By the assistance of the
+Bandanese, we erected two forts, which were named the Swan and
+Defence, after our two ships, each mounted with three guns; the
+fort called the Swan being within caliver shot of the ships, and
+entirely commanding the road on the eastern side, where is the
+principal anchorage for the westerly monsoon.</p>
+
+<p>The 3d of January, 1617, the three Dutch ships came from Nero
+into the road of Puloroon, being the Horne, of 800 tons, the
+Star, of 500 tons, and the Yaugar, of 160 tons. The Home anchored
+close by our ship the Swan, the Star close beside the Defence,
+and the Yaugar a-head of all, to cut off our intercourse with the
+shore. Our commission directed us, on receiving the surrender of
+Puloroon, and forming a settlement there, to give due notice
+thereof in writing to the Hollanders, warning them not to come
+there to molest us under the pretence of ignorance, as they had
+been formerly accustomed to do. We had accordingly a letter
+written to that effect, but knew not how to have it sent, not
+daring to dispatch it either by Englishmen or natives, for tear
+of being detained. On coming into the road, however, we sent
+George Muschamp aboard their admiral, the Star, to deliver the
+before-mentioned letter to Mynheer Dedall, the Dutch commander;
+and with a message desiring them to depart from the road of
+Puloroon before six glasses were run, as the islanders would not
+allow them to remain in the roads, or to come near their island,
+and would even have already fired upon them, if we had not
+prevailed upon them to forbear.</p>
+
+<p>Soon afterwards, the Dutch commander, Dedall, came on board
+the Swan, attended by their chaplain, to enquire the reason of
+our message; when we told him that we suspected they came to
+injure us, as they had formerly done at Paloway, Cambella, and
+other places; and, as they had formerly turned the glass to Mr
+Ball, when in their power, threatening to hang him if he did not
+immediately cause the English to quit the land, we had now in
+like manner appointed a time for them to quit the roads. We also
+shewed him the instrument by which Puloroon was surrendered to
+us, and our consequent right to keep possession for the king of
+England, which we were determined upon doing to the utmost of our
+power, wishing them to be well advised in their proceedings, as
+they might expect to be shortly called to answer for their
+abusive words and injurious conduct to the English. We also
+demanded the restoration of Puloway, which had likewise been
+lawfully surrendered to the king of England. After this, we
+enquired if they had received any previous surrender at Puloroon,
+but they could not say they had any; and, when we shewed the
+formal surrender made to our king, which their chaplain perused,
+he acknowledged that it was a true surrender.</p>
+
+<p>All this while the glass was running in the great cabin before
+their eyes, putting them in mind to be gone. We also told them
+plainly, that we believed their only purpose in coming here was
+to betray us, and to drive us from the island by treachery or
+force, of which scandalous conduct our nation had already had
+divers experience from theirs; wherefore we neither could nor
+would trust them any more, and we must insist upon their
+departure; as, when the glass was six times run out, they must
+expect to be shot at from the shore; and, if they fired in return
+against the islanders, or shewed any discourtesy or wrong to
+them, we should consider it as hostility to us, and would defend
+them, being now the subjects of our king. They desired to remain
+till next day, which we would not agree to, doubting that more of
+their ships might come to join them. They then desired to stay
+till midnight; which we agreed to, on condition that we saw them
+preparing to weigh their anchors, in which case we said that
+notice should be sent ashore to the Bandanese, not to fire upon
+them.</p>
+
+<p>I also demanded to know from Dedall, what was their purpose in
+thus coming into the road of Puloroon, unless to molest us. He
+pretended that it was their usual custom in passing that island.
+But I told them that was not true, as the islanders had declared
+there never was any christian ship in their roads till we came.
+So he remained silent. They came to anchor in the roads this day
+about three in the afternoon, and departed about eleven at night.
+We have been since certainly informed, that their purpose was to
+have taken possession of our ships by treachery, or to have
+driven us out of the roads, and only gave up their intentions on
+seeing that we were fortified on shore. Had they then assailed
+us, we had little doubt of being able to have defended ourselves
+against them, as we had both forts in readiness, the cannon
+charged, and the gunners prepared to give fire, on the first
+signal from our ships.</p>
+
+<p>A Dutch ship and pinnace came from Nero on the 10th January;
+the pinnace edging near the small island or high sand, called
+<i>Nylacka</i>. This island is uninhabited, but full of trees and
+bushes, being daily resorted to by the men of Puloroon for
+fishing; and as belonging to Puloroon, belonged now to the
+English. On coming near the island, the people in the pinnace
+were observed continually sounding, wherefore we made four shots
+towards her from Fort Defence; but, not intending to strike her,
+shot wide. At every shot, the pinnace answered with a base, or
+some such piece, firing into the small island among the trees and
+bushes, where were some Englishmen and Bandanese of Puloroon, who
+were in no small danger from the shot. Seeing they braved us in
+this manner, the gunner was desired to do his best, and his next
+shot fell close over the stern of the pinnace or frigate, which
+made her presently go away. Their purpose of coming thus to sound
+about the small island, seemed to be to look out for a
+landing-place; meaning to come there with their forces, and there
+to fortify themselves, on purpose to compel us to quit the large
+island.</p>
+
+<p>On the 13th, Mr Davey complained that he was in want of water,
+and proposed to go over for that purpose to Wayre upon Lantore;
+but on the people of Puloroon being informed of this, they would
+by no means consent to his going out of the roads, and indeed
+neither would we, fearing the Hollanders might do us some injury
+in his absence. The people of Puloroon, said they would rather
+bring him water from Lantore, in their proas. I went on board Mr
+Davey to acquaint him with this; but he and his people would not
+consent, saying the Bandanese would bring them rain water, or
+such other as was unwholesome, and that they would only be six
+days absent, or eight at most.</p>
+
+<p>At this time, the principal people of Wayre, a free town on
+the island of Lantore, and of the separate island of Rosinging,
+came over to us, to enter into a parley respecting the surrender
+of both to the sovereignty of his majesty; and the formal deed of
+surrender being agreed upon and drawn up, they desired that some
+Englishmen might go over to receive the same in a public manner
+from all their hands, and to witness the ceremonial. As Mr Davey
+still persisted to go over with his ship, it was resolved upon,
+that Messrs Sophonie Cozocke, George Muschamp, Robert Fuller, and
+Thomas Hodges, should go over in the Swan to Wayre and Rosinging,
+to see that business accomplished, while the Swan was procuring
+water; after which, it was appointed that Mr Cozocke was to
+return in the Swan, while the other three were to remain upon the
+island of Rosinging for possession, till farther orders. All
+business being there concluded to our satisfaction, several
+persons in Wayre and Rosinging desired to load nutmegs and mace
+in the Swan, and to have a passage for Puloroon, there to sell us
+their spices for rice and cloths. All this was agreed to, and
+twelve of these persons came on board, with a great quantity of
+nutmegs and mace.</p>
+
+<p>The Swan then set sail for Geulegola, which is only a little
+way from Wayre, and there watered, after which she again set
+sail. When about eight leagues from the land, a Holland ship or
+two gave them chace. The people of the Swan now asked Mr Davey
+what he proposed to do. He answered, "They see my colours and I
+see theirs: I know them to be Dutch, and they know us to be
+English: I know of no injury I have done them, and I will
+continue my course for Puloroon." In short time, the Star, for
+such was the Dutch ship, got up within shot of the Swan, and
+without hailing, or giving the smallest intimation of her
+intention, let fly both with great guns and small arms in the
+most violent manner. The Swan received two or three great shot
+through and through before she replied, and even had some of her
+men slain. After this, as Mr Davey writes, the fight continued an
+hour and a half, during which five men were killed in the Swan,
+viz. Mr Sophonie Cozocke, merchant, who was driven to pieces by a
+cannon-ball, Robert Morton, quartermaster and drummer,
+Christopher Droope, Edward Murtkin, and a Bantianese passenger
+from Wayre. Three others were maimed, having lost arms or legs,
+with very little hopes of recovery; and eight others were
+wounded, most of them mortally. During the engagement, a Dutchman
+stood upon the poop of the Star with a drawn sword, calling out
+in the Dutch language, English villains and rogues, we will kill
+you all.</p>
+
+<p>The people of the Swan were much discouraged, on seeing so
+many of their companions dead and wounded, insomuch that none of
+them would stand by the sails to trim the ship to the best
+advantage so that the Hollander lay upon her quarter pouring in
+great and small shot, and at last look her by boarding, both with
+soldiers and others. They immediately broke open and pillaged the
+cabins, plundered the men basely of their clothes and every thing
+else worth taking, and throwing overboard whatever did not please
+their fancies. Even the Spaniards never used more stern cruelty
+in their professed wars, than did now the Dutch to us, with whom
+they were in peace and amity. The Star had on board 160 men,
+mostly soldiers taken from the castles of Nero and Puloway, while
+the Swan had not above thirty able to stand to quarters, the rest
+being sick or lame, and all much worn out in toilsome labour at
+Puloroon, in landing the ordnance and constructing the two forts.
+Ten also of their complement had been left in Puloroon to defend
+the two forts, two of whom, Herman Hammond and John Day, were
+gunners. The Swan being thus taken and sore battered in the
+action, was carried away under the guns of the castle at Nero.
+The Dutch gloried much in their victory, boasting of their
+exploit to the Bandanese, saying, That the king of England was
+not to be compared with their great king of Holland: <i>That
+Saint George was now turned a child</i>, and they cared not for
+the king of England; for one Holland ship was able to take ten
+English ships. They landed all our men at Nero, and kept them all
+strict prisoners, many of them in irons.</p>
+
+<p>The Swan left us at Puloroon on the 16th of January, and we
+expected her back in eight or ten days at farthest, but never
+heard of her till the 25th of February, when Robert Fuller came
+over to us from Rosinging and Wayre; to acquaint us that be had
+heard of an English ship being under the guns of Nero castle. We
+immediately sent away Robert Hayes, the purser of the Defence,
+accompanied by some of the chief men of Puloroon, with directions
+to land on that side of Lantore which was in friendship with us,
+and to go as near as possible to the Dutch ships with a flag of
+truce, to enquire into the matter. After staying almost two
+hours, there came at last a boat to fetch him off, but made him
+wade to the middle before they would take him in. Being taken on
+board one of the Dutch ships, the president and assistants of
+Nero met him, when he demanded to know why they had made prize of
+the Swan, what was become of her men, and wherefore they detained
+our ship and goods. They answered, that <i>time should bring all
+to light</i>. Still urging for an answer, they used many
+opprobrious words against the English, threatening to come over
+to Puloroon with their forces, and to drive us from there and
+other places. To this Hayes replied, that they had already done
+much more than they could answer for, and was obliged to come
+away without seeing any one belonging to the Swan. He could
+however see our poor ship all rent and torn, in view of the
+natives, as an ill-got and dishonourable trophy of Dutch
+treachery and ingratitude. In a short time after, they sent over
+a messenger to us with a letter, which we answered, as we did
+others afterwards, their messengers frequently coming over with
+flags of truce, all of which letters, together with the
+surrenders, I brought over with me to Bantam, and delivered to
+Captain Ball.</p>
+
+<p>The Dutch continually threatened us, by their letters and
+messengers, that, as they had now taken tee Swan, they would soon
+come and take possession of the Defence, and drive us from the
+island of Puloroon. We always answered, that we expected them,
+and would defend ourselves to the last. They made many bravados,
+daily shooting off forty, fifty, or sixty pieces of ordnance at
+Nero and Puloway, thinking to frighten us. Also the people of
+Lantore brought us word that they were fitting out their ships,
+and shipping planks and earth, which we imagined was for land
+service. They had then seven ships, four gallies and frigates,
+and a great number of men, with all which force they threatened
+to come against us. We were told likewise, that they had
+endeavoured to prevail on their black slaves, by promise of
+freedom and great rewards, to come over secretly to Puloroon and
+set fire to the Defence. The Hollanders also, threatened that we
+should carry no spices from Puloroon or any other of the Banda
+islands. Thereupon, considering our engagements with the people
+of Puloroon, Wayre, and Rosinging, to all of whom we had trusted
+our goods, and that we had ready at Puloroon a good quantity of
+nutmegs and mace, and the threats of the Hollanders, we resolved
+to maintain the honour of our king and country, and to defend the
+interest of our employers, the honourable Company, to the utmost
+of our power. For this purpose, we determined to land all the
+guns, provisions, and stores, from the Defence, and to fortify
+the small island of Nylacka adjoining to Puloroon; which the
+Hollanders proposed to have fortified formerly; which, if they
+had done, would have commanded the road, and done us much injury,
+as the people of Puloroon would have been prevented from fishing,
+and English ships could not have come into the roads.</p>
+
+<p>Having therefore landed all the ordnance of the Defence,
+except four pieces of cannon, and being busied in erecting a
+fortification with the assistance of the Bandanese, Mr Hinshley
+also, the master of the Defence, being ashore, and every one hard
+at work landing the things, except a few left on board to keep
+the ship, a conspiracy was entered into by some of the men on the
+20th March, 1617; and that same night they cut the cables and so
+drove out to sea. Perceiving this from the small island, we
+immediately sent a boat after them, advising them to return with
+the ship: But the mutineers would neither listen to them, nor
+suffer the boat to come near the ship, pointing their pieces at
+them, and even fired one musket-shot to keep off the boat; which
+was therefore compelled to return to the small island. There went
+away in the Defence nine of our men, including John Christmas,
+the boatswain's mate, and we could distinctly see them next day
+going into Nero roads under sail, and come to anchor under the
+guns of the castle. As we afterwards learnt, some of the runaways
+went immediately on shore to inform the Dutch of their exploit,
+contending among themselves which of them had piloted the ship.
+They even brought a can of wine ashore with them, and drank to
+the Hollanders on landing.</p>
+
+<p>The Dutch took immediate possession of the Defence, and
+brought all our rascally deserters into their castle, where they
+examined them as to our proceedings at Puloroon and Nylacka, in
+regard to our fortifications and means of defence. By this
+scandalous affair, we were in great danger of being all put to
+death by the Bandanese of Puloroon, as they suspected the
+desertion of our ships to have been a concerted matter between us
+and the Hollanders, on purpose to betray them. By this likewise,
+as our weakness was made known to the Hollanders, they might be
+encouraged to attack us. Indeed they made many violent
+threatenings of so doing, and we daily looked for their
+appearance; which, if they had so done, must have cost many
+lives, as we were greatly enraged against them for the capture of
+the Swan, and the severe usage of her people.</p>
+
+<p>On the 23d of March, we sent a letter to the Hollanders at
+Nero, by Robert Fuller, who landed upon Lantore; but, owing to
+some difference between the people of that island and the Dutch,
+he could not be allowed to pass, so that he had to return. The
+25th there came a messenger to us from Lawrence Ryall, the
+principal commander of the Hollanders, newly come to Nero from
+the Moluccas, desiring Mr Courthop and I would come in a proa to
+hold a conference with two of his principal merchants, half-way
+between Puloroon and Puloway; but we refused this request, being
+afraid of treachery. By this messenger we had a letter from Mr
+Davies, then a prisoner at Nero, intimating his disapprobation of
+our proceedings in keeping possession of Puloroon, alleging that
+our commission did not warrant us in so doing, and recommending a
+parley between us and the Dutch general, to prevent the loss of
+any more lives. It appeared that he was instigated to give us
+this advice by the Hollanders, who had made him believe that they
+had authority in writing from our king, to make prize of any
+English ships they found to the east of Celebes, as we afterwards
+learnt to our great surprise, since, if they actually had such
+authority we must have obeyed.</p>
+
+<p>We wrote to Lawrence Ryall, by his messenger, that, if he
+would send over Henrick de Watterfoord and Peter de Yonge, two of
+his principal merchants, to remain as pledges in Nylacka, Mr
+Courthop and another should be sent to confer with him. We got
+back for answer, that the merchants we demanded as pledges could
+not be sent, as the one was gone to sea, and the other could not
+be spared, being their chief book-keeper; but offering us two
+other principal merchants, whom we agreed to accept. Accordingly,
+on the 6th April, the Dutch galley brought over these two, whom
+we lodged in a tent near the landing-place under a guard of
+twelve Englishmen to protect them from the Bandanese, as we did
+not think it right to bring them into our fort, that they might
+not have an opportunity of viewing our fortifications.</p>
+
+<p>Mr Courthop went immediately over to Nero in their galley, and
+had a long conference with the Dutch, in which they used many
+threats, and complained of many injuries they pretended to have
+suffered from the English, but of which I shall only briefly
+treat, as the letter from Mr Courthop, which I brought over from
+Banda and delivered to Captain Ball, will certify your worships
+at large on this matter. They complained, that Sir Henry
+Middleton had used the Dutch colours, when in the Red Sea,
+pretending to be Holland ships, to their injury and discredit. To
+this Mr Courthop replied, that it was false, as he had sailed
+with Sir Henry, and never knew him to wear Dutch colours; which,
+moreover, Sir Henry was too much a gentleman to have done. They
+pretended to have our king's letter, authorizing them to capture
+any English ship seen to the eastwards of the Celebes. Mr
+Courthop urged them to produce this letter, on seeing which he
+declared his readiness to obey the authority of his sovereign,
+and to evacuate Puloroon; but they had none such to produce. They
+alleged many other things, equally false, and used many arguments
+to induce us to quit Puleroon. All this time, neither Mr Davies
+nor any other of the English in their hands were permitted to
+come near Mr Courthop.</p>
+
+<p>Finding he could not prevail, Lawrence Ryall, the Dutch
+general, grew much discontented, throwing his hat on the ground
+and pulling his beard for sheer anger. At length Mr Courthop told
+him, that he could conclude nothing of his own authority, being
+joined with a council, but should relate every thing that had
+passed at Puloroon, which should be taken into consideration and
+an answer sent. I had advised him to say this, to get the easier
+away. Mr Courthop also urged them to restore our ship the
+Defence, with her men and goods; but they would not, unless we
+agreed to surrender Puloroon: offering, if we would deliver up
+Nylacka and our fort, in which we had twelve pieces of ordnance,
+that they would then restore both the Swan and Defence, with all
+our men and goods. Ryall then desired Mr Courthop to sign a note
+which he had drawn, acknowledging the proffers he had made, but
+this Mr Courthop refused.</p>
+
+<p>They had so wrought upon Mr Davies, that they expected he
+might be able to prevail upon Mr Courthop to come into their
+terms, and now therefore brought him to Mr Courthop, with whom he
+had much discourse, and particularly urged the truth of the
+letter they pretended to have from the king of England, as before
+mentioned. When Mr Courthop told him what he had offered, in case
+that letter were produced, Mr Davies distinctly saw he had been
+imposed upon, and broke out into a rage against them, for having
+told so many falsehoods;[257] adding, that they had promised him
+and his men good treatment, but that his men complained of being
+in great want of food and clothing, and of general hard usage.
+They had sat in judgment upon him and his men, condemning them to
+remain as prisoners till they had orders from Holland as to their
+ultimate destination. He even said, that he was willing to
+continue in durance, provided we could keep them out of Puloroon.
+The conference being ended, Mr Courthop came back to Nylacka in
+the galley, and the pledges were restored.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 257: Purchas, in a side note at this place,
+quaintly converts the name of the Dutch general into Lawrence
+<i>Ly-all</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The eastern monsoon being now come, we fitted out a proa to
+send with dispatches to Bantam, giving an account of what had
+passed; and it was agreed that Mr Hinchley and I were to go,
+accompanied by four Englishmen and fourteen natives of Puloroon,
+of whom five were chiefs, or <i>orancays</i>, one of them being
+son to the sabander, who is the principal man of the island. We
+set sail from Puloroon on the 17th April, 1617, and when in sight
+of Bottone on our way for Macassar, we descried a large ship and
+a pinnace, which gave us chase under a press of sail, so that we
+had no means of escape, except by standing in for Bottone. After
+being chased half a day, we got near the town of Bottone by
+night, thinking the ships could not have got so far up the river;
+but seeing the ship and pinnace almost within musket-shot of us
+next morning, we presently landed most of what we had in the
+proa, taking refuge in the woods. Having so done, we went
+immediately to the king, to whom we gave a present of such things
+as we had, to the value of about thirty dollars, desiring his
+protection, which he promised in the kindest manner, and
+faithfully performed. He sent his servants along with us, to put
+all our things into a house, giving us also two houses for our
+lodging, desiring us to remain within, that we might not be
+discovered by our enemies.</p>
+
+<p>Almost immediately afterwards, the Hollanders went to the
+king, giving him a present three times the value of ours, and
+enquired who we were that had landed. To which the king answered
+that he knew not who we were. On being asked by the king how long
+they meant to stay, the Dutch said they proposed remaining six
+days; of which the king sent us notice, advising us to keep close
+for that time, that we might proceed in greater security after
+they were gone. But at the end of these six days the Dutch said
+they would stay six days longer, pretending they had to repair
+one of their masts. Seeing their intention, and because our proa
+lay in view of the Dutch, we bought another proa, into which the
+king made all our things be carried by his slaves, causing them
+to navigate that proa past the Hollanders, and to carry her to
+the back of the island, whither he sent us over land under the
+protection of fifty men. We went immediately aboard, but remained
+under the island till near night, when we stood our course for
+Macassar, and saw no more of the Hollanders.</p>
+
+<p>We arrived at Macassar on the 7th May, where we found the
+Attendance intending for Banda, but was unable to beat up, owing
+to the change of the monsoon. Having shipped in the Attendance
+180 <i>suckles</i> of mace, purchased at Macassar, we sent the
+proa to Banjarmassen and Succadanea in Borneo, with advice that a
+supply of goods could not be sent there as expected, owing to the
+non-arrival of the Solomon, which had been long expected at
+Bantam. The 3d June we arrived at Bantam. As Captain George
+Barkley was dead, to whom Mr Ball succeeded as chief of the
+factory, I have delivered all the papers to him, and doubt not
+that your worships may receive them by the first conveyance.
+Those are, two surrenders, the letters from the Hollanders with
+our answers, and every thing relative to our proceedings in
+Banda.</p>
+
+<p>When I left Puloroon, it was agreed that another proa was to
+be dispatched for Bantam in twenty days after our departure, lest
+we might have been pursued and taken by the Hollanders.
+Accordingly a proa[258] was sent, in which was laden 170 suckles
+of mace, containing 3366 cattees, each cattee being six English
+pounds and nearly two ounces, costing at the rate of one dollar
+the cattee;[259] which, had it gone safe, might have sold in
+England for &pound;5000. In this proa there were eight Englishmen
+and thirty Bandanese, under the charge of Walter Stacie, who had
+been mate under Mr Hinchley in the Defence. His knowledge and
+care, however, did not answer expectation, for he ran the proa on
+the rocky shoals near the island of Bottone, where she bilged and
+lost all the mace, the men getting ashore. Stacie is much blamed
+by the rest, some of whom told him they saw land on the lee-bow,
+but he was peevish and headstrong, calling them all fools, and
+would not listen to them.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 258: In a marginal note, this is called a
+junk.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 259: From the statement in the text, the
+suckle appears to have been about 122 English pounds, and the
+quantity of mace accordingly, shipped on this occasion, about 185
+cwt. or 9 1/4 tons.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>May it please your worships to understand, that the Hollanders
+replied, when told that their vile abuses to us would lie heavy
+on them when known in Europe, "That they can make as good friends
+in the court of England as your worships; that this which they
+have done will oblige your worships and them to join, so that a
+gold chain will recompence all, and they have dollars enough in
+Holland to pay for a ship or two, providing they can hinder us
+from trading at Banda."</p>
+
+<p>In regard to the trade of the Banda islands, Puloroon is
+reported to be the worst island. It is about eight English miles
+in circuit, and the small adjoining island of Nylacka is about a
+mile round. There is a tolerable quantity of nutmegs and mace
+grown on Puloroon, and considerably more might be got there if
+the island were well cultivated. Rosengin is a fine island,
+producing the largest nutmegs and best mace of all the Banda
+islands; and, if we hold possession of Puloroon, abundance of
+nutmegs and mace could be had from Rosengin, Lantore, and other
+places; as the natives would come over to us with their spices,
+provided we supply them with rice, cloth, salt, pepper, molasses,
+and other necessaries, and some Macassar gold, which passes as
+current in Banda as Spanish rials of eight, and at the same rate,
+though only worth at Bantam two shillings and fourpence or two
+and sixpence, for the piece called mass. Our cargo was small,
+having only 100 <i>quoines</i> of rice, and our cloth was much
+decayed, having lain two or three years at Macassar. If we had
+had three times as much, we could have sold it all at Puloroon
+for mace and nutmegs, being entreated for cloth and rice by
+people from Lantore, Rosengin and other places, but had it not,
+so that some returned home again with part of their spices. They
+came over to Puloroon in the night with proas and corracorras.
+The mace and nuts were very good, but must be injured by lying so
+long, owing to the molestations of the Hollanders, while we had
+no lime for preserving the nuts. The trade will turn out very
+profitable, if we may quietly possess the island of Puloroon; but
+we must buy rice at a lower rate than in Macassar, and I
+understand it can be had in Japan for about half the price.</p>
+
+<p>In regard to our right to the Banda islands, especially
+Puloway, Captain Castleton might have made that secure, as I have
+often been told; and at all events, we have a much better right
+than the Hollanders, who by force of arms have dispossessed us.
+Except Puloroon be supplied this year, and the possession
+maintained, the English name will be utterly disgraced, with
+little chance of our ever being received there again. If we are
+able to hold it until your worships have determined what to do in
+the matter, we shall soon be able to procure there as much mace
+and nutmegs as the Hollanders; and it may also serve as an
+entrance into the Moluccas for cloves. The Hollanders pretend an
+exclusive right to the Bandas and Moluccas, in consequence of
+having the son of the king of Ternate in their hands as a
+prisoner. But the Bandanese deny that the king of Ternate has any
+right of dominion in their islands, every one of their islands
+being free, and governed by sabanders and orancays of their own
+appointment.</p>
+
+<p>It is indispensible, that supplies of rice and other victuals,
+and cloth, should be sent for the English and Bandanese, and to
+bring away the nutmegs and mace we have there in godowns or
+warehouses. The Hollanders give out that they will take all your
+ships that go to those parts, so as to famish both the English
+and Bandanese; wherefore it requires earnest and speedy
+attention, that we may quietly enjoy our trade to these islands,
+which have been surrendered to us, and desire our trade. These
+are Puloway, Puloroon, Rosengin, and Wayre, which last is a town
+in Lantore. Puloway is reported to be a paradise, and the
+Hollanders allege that it is as much worth to them as Scotland is
+to his majesty. Even should your worships not be able to get
+Puloway restored, yet, if you enjoy the other three, we shall be
+able to procure enough of nutmegs and mace for the supply of
+England, and also for the trade of Surat and other places in
+India. Now is the time or never, considering the vile abuses and
+murders committed upon us by the Hollanders. At this time, the
+Charles and the Hope are bound home from Bantam, and I pray God
+to send them safe to London. I have sent your worships a brief
+abstract of our cargo for Banda, and of the sales made there. If
+I seem tedious, I humbly crave pardon; and, with my humble duty,
+beseeching the Almighty to prosper and give good success to all
+your designs, I humbly take leave,</p>
+
+<p>being your worships most humble servant in all duty,</p>
+
+<p><i>Thomas Spurway</i>.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION X.</p>
+
+<p>FIFTH VOYAGE THE JOINT STOCK BY THE ENGLISH EAST INDIA
+COMPANY, IN 1617, UNDER THE COMMAND OF CAPTAIN MARTIN
+PRING.[260]</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>The fleet appointed for this voyage consisted of five ships;
+the James Royal of 1000 tons, Rowland Coytmore master; the Ann
+Royal of 900 tons, Andrew Shilling master; the Gift of 800 tons,
+Nathaniel Salmon master; the Bull of 400 tons, Robert Adams
+master; and the Bee of 150 tons, John Hatch master; the whole
+under the supreme command of Martin Pring, general, who sailed in
+the James Royal.--<i>Purch.</i></p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 260: Purch. Pilgr. I. 63.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.1. <i>Occurrences on the Voyage out, and at Surat, Bantam,
+and Jacatra</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On Tuesday the 4th February, 1617, our fleet dropt down from
+Gravesend. Thursday the 6th, Mr deputy Maurice Abbot, with
+several of the commissioners, came aboard and mustered all our
+men, paying their harbour wages. These gentlemen left us next
+day, when all our men were entered upon whole pay. After much
+foul weather, we departed from the Downs on the 5th March. The
+22d of June we Lad sight of Saldanha point, and anchored that
+same afternoon in the bay, whence we departed on the 13th July.
+The moon was totally eclipsed at night of the 6th August; it
+began at eight o'clock and continued till past eleven, being
+totally eclipsed for an hour and half. On the 25th August at
+night, between seven and eight o'clock, being in latitude 4&deg;
+20' S. the water of the sea seemed almost as white as milk, and
+so continued till morning, when it began to alter. Next night we
+found the water similar, but not altogether so white. Before day
+on the 30th, the water was again white, and likewise the next
+night; but on all these occasions we could find no ground.</p>
+
+<p>On the night of the 8th September at twelve o'clock, our ship
+sprung a leak, which, when discovered, had raised the water in
+our hold six feet and a half. In four hours, with both pumps, the
+ship was freed, but we afterwards found that the water increased
+at the rate of a foot in the half hour. In the morning of the
+9th, I summoned the chief commanders of the fleet on board,
+desiring them to send their carpenters to assist in searching for
+the leak, and some of each of their companies to aid our men in
+pumping. Some were set to rummage the hold in search of the leak,
+and others to stick our sprit-sail full of oakum, with which we
+made several trials under the ship's bilge, but could not find
+the leak. We at length found, by divers trials within board, that
+the leak was before the main-mast; and we, next morning, fitted
+the sprit-sail again, letting it down at the stern, and brought
+it forwards by degrees, and at length, by God's blessing, our
+leak was partly stopped, as the water only rose about six inches
+in a glass, which had before risen twelve inches. Bat within
+three glasses, the oakum being washed out, the leak increased as
+before. This night we got an additional pump from the Bull, to
+free the water from the fore part of our ship, where it stood
+eighteen inches deeper than in our well. The 11th, we again
+fitted our sprit-sail with oakum and let it down again, when it
+pleased God so to favour us, that in an hour after our ship was
+tighter than ever.</p>
+
+<p>On the morning of the 12th we espied a sail, which the Gift
+came up with in the afternoon, being a Portuguese ship belonging
+to Don Pedro de Almeyda, from Mozambique bound for Diu, laden
+principally with about fifty quintals of elephants teeth. In the
+morning of the 20th the Bee rejoined us from Swally roads,
+informing us that the rest of our fleet was safe in that
+anchorage. They had brought in with them a junk and two other
+ships, which they had chased on the 16th. The junk was a great
+ship of Surat, belonging to the mother of the Great Mogul, burden
+about 1200 or 1400 tons, having in her above 1000 persons, and
+twenty-nine tons of silver, though some said a great deal more.
+The other two were English interlopers, called the Francis and
+the Lion: the former of 160 tons, belonging to-----, and
+commanded by Captain Neuce; and the latter of 120 tons, fitted
+out by Philip Bernardy, an Italian merchant in London, commanded
+by Thomas Jones, who had formerly been boatswain of the
+Hector.</p>
+
+<p>This evening we anchored in the road of Swally, where we found
+the rest of our fleet, with the foresaid junk and the two English
+privateers. On oar arrival, we heard of two Dutch ships having
+been cast away at <i>Gowdever</i>;[261] the Rotterdam of 1000
+tons, and a small pinnace. The 9th October, I sent up twenty-one
+chests of coral to Surat, which were landed two days before from
+the Ann; and at night I sent up eight tons and four hundredweight
+of elephants teeth, taken out of our Portuguese prize. This
+afternoon twenty sail of frigates from Goa arrived at the bar of
+Surat, commanded by the Captain-major Don Pedro de Asadedo,
+[<i>Asovedo</i>?] From one of these, five of the country people
+came ashore among our men, two of whom were taken by our guard,
+and confessed they came from Goa a month before, having orders
+from the viceroy to range the coast, to discover the English,
+when they were to return; but if the English were not on the
+coast, they were to proceed for Cambay, to capture the caffila,
+or convoy of country vessels.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 261: This name is inexplicably
+corrupt.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 14th October, seventeen of the frigates
+departed for Cambay, passing fairly by us. This day likewise I
+sent fourteen tons of elephants teeth to Surat, under a guard of
+thirty-six men, who likewise conveyed our treasure to Ahmedabad;
+and, on the 17th, I sent other twelve tons four hundredweight of
+elephants teeth. This day the Portuguese frigates returned again,
+and passed in our sight to the southwards. Next day we sent off
+all the rest for our ivory; and on the 22d we landed sixteen
+chests of coral, and two of sea-horse teeth, out of the Bull.</p>
+
+<p>The 14th November, a month's pay was distributed to all the
+ships companies, except the chief commanders and merchants,
+amounting to 3302 Spanish dollars. After this, the Bee was sent
+off for Jasques; and we landed from the other ships cloth, tin,
+cases of wine and strong waters, and all the rest of the presents
+that were in the cabin.</p>
+
+<p>The 17th January, 1618, the Bee returned from Persia. This day
+seven Malabar junks were seen in the offing, two of which were
+brought in by the Francis, and two by the Bee. We departed from
+Swally roads on the 12th March, and anchored that same evening
+near the bar of Surat. The 17th, in the morning, the wind coming
+about northerly, the Ann departed for the Red Sea, and on the
+18th I dispatched the Bull. At noon of this day, standing to the
+southward, we were in lat. 11&deg; 25' N. the wind, as for four
+or five days before, being, at night, a slight breath from the
+land, and, by day, in the afternoon, a fresh breeze from the sea.
+In the forenoon of this day, we saw eight sail to the southward
+of us, and three between us and the land, besides two sallies and
+ten frigates. In the afternoon of the 28th, the Francis and the
+Bee being near the shore abreast of Calicut, the Zamorin sent off
+a boat desiring to speak with me, but I was too far shot to the
+southwards before the message reached me.</p>
+
+<p>The 2d April we got in the morning into the bay of
+<i>Brinjan</i>, where we anchored in fourteen fathoms, within
+half a league of the town, a high peaked hill, like a sugar-loaf;
+bearing N.E. by E. by the compass, which is the best mark to know
+this place by, when the weather is clear. This is a good place
+for refreshments, having hens, cocoa-nuts, and goats in
+abundance, and plenty offish, together with excellent water
+springing from the rock; but we had to pay seventy dollars, a
+cloth vest, a fowling-piece, a mirror, and a sword, for leave to
+provide ourselves with water, and all too little to satisfy the
+governor, who, after receiving our money and giving us leave,
+came down with seven or eight hundred men, demanding more money,
+and if we had not kept a strong guard at the spring, would have
+put us from it after our money was paid. The 5th, the wind being
+fair off shore, we weighed anchor and departed, and in the
+evening were abreast of a headland eight leagues S.E. by E. from
+Brinjan, from which to Cape Comorin it is seven leagues E.
+two-thirds S. At six in the evening of the 7th, we had Cape
+Comorin N.N.E. one-third N. five leagues off, and had soundings
+in thirty fathoms. And on the 19th June we were in Bantam roads,
+when Captain Ball and Mr Pickham came on board.</p>
+
+<p>On the 24th I visited the pangran, to accommodate matters for
+Captain Ball, who had arrested a Chinese junk for certain debts
+they owed our factory, making offer to restore the junk, if the
+pangran would give us justice, which he gave me his word to do. I
+went to him again on 6th July, accompanied by Mr Ball, Mr Rich,
+Mr Pickham, and several other merchants, when he was so
+inveterate against Mr Ball, that he refused to see him. On which
+I sent him word, that Mr Ball had brought the bills of our debt
+due by the Chinese, and was the only person among us who could
+explain the transactions between our factory and the Chinese, of
+which I was entirely ignorant. The messenger returned, saying
+that Mr Ball could not be received, on which we all left the
+court.</p>
+
+<p>The 1st September, having the wind off the land, we weighed in
+the morning, and stood for point Ayre, keeping in seven fathoms
+till within three miles of the point, where one cast we had a
+quarter less seven, and the next cast only three fathoms. Some
+supposed we here touched, but it was not perceived by me. Off
+this point there is a shoal almost even with the surface of the
+water, but having seven fathoms within two cables length of its
+edge. This afternoon, while standing towards three Dutch ships
+that rode right in the fair-way, and when within a mile of them,
+our ship grounded; but, God be praised, we got her off again
+without any hurt, and so into the bay, where we again fell in
+with a shoal, of which we came within two cables length, which
+lies one and a half league from the Flemish islands. We got
+safely into the road of Jacatra, [now Batavia road] in the
+afternoon of the 2d September, having been providentially
+delivered from three several dangers the day before, of which may
+we be ever thankful.</p>
+
+<p>The 19th, the Angel, a Dutch ship of 500 tons, came in from
+Amboina, laden with nutmegs and cloves, and departed again on the
+25th. Early in the morning of the 26th, I went to visit the king,
+and found him in a good humour, and conferring with him upon some
+former business, we came to a conclusion before I left him, to
+the following purpose: That he was to give us a convenient piece
+of ground for building upon, for which we were to pay 1500
+dollars, and were to be free from all customs on exports and
+imports on payment of 800 dollars yearly.</p>
+
+<p>S.2. <i>Dutch Injustice, and Sea-fight between them and Sir
+Thomas Dale</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The 27th of September, Mr Bishop arrived from Jappara in the
+roads in a proa, in which was a <i>Cogee</i>, bringing a letter
+from the Matron to Captain Ball, wherefore I sent him away to
+Bantam that night. He left two English behind him at Jappara, one
+of whom had fled from the Dutch. He likewise brought letters from
+several of our people who were prisoners in the Moluccas, and one
+of these was directed to me, from Mr Richard Tatten, in which he
+complained much of the gross usage of the Dutch, who would hardly
+allow them a sufficiency of rice to subsist upon, and who
+constantly clapped them in irons, on every idle rumour of the
+coming of our ships.</p>
+
+<p>On the evening of the 30th October, Cornelius Marthen, who
+commanded the French ship taken by the Dutch, came into the
+roads, and came aboard my ship that same night. After some
+discourse, he told me we had six ships coming from England for
+these seas, commanded by Sir Thomas Dale, for some special
+business at the Moluccas, whither he was bound with the
+Stathouder, the Neptune, and this French prize, to wait the
+coming of good friends. The 27th, in the evening, we had four
+feet and a half water in our hold, which we freed in two hours
+with both our pumps, and kept under afterwards with one pump,
+till next morning about ten o'clock, when we let down a sail
+wadded with oakum, which fortunately stopped our leak. The 31st,
+I found an excellent place for putting our ship on the careen, on
+a small island within Taniam point, in the bay of Bantam, on
+which we made all preparations to remove to that place.</p>
+
+<p>The Rose arrived from Tecoo on the 15th of November, bringing
+news that the Hollanders had established a Factory there soon
+after ours was dissolved. The 19th, the Moon, Clove, Samson, and
+Peppercorn arrived from England, and anchored between Vium point
+and Pulo Paniang. Perceiving the Clove to be admiral, I went
+first on board her, taking such fresh victuals as we could spare.
+I here found Sir Thomas Dale admiral, and Mr Jordain president,
+and learnt that they had lost company of the Globe to the
+westward of the Cape, and, what was far worse, they had left the
+Sun, the flag ship, in great danger of being cast away on the
+isle of Engano, the whole fleet having much difficulty to double
+that island. They had afterwards waited two days for the Sun, but
+she had been bilged on the rocks, as we afterwards learnt, to our
+great regret. In the morning of the 22d, these ships sailed into
+Bantam roads, and on passing the island where our ship lay, we
+saluted them with fifteen guns we had planted on the shore, and
+struck my flag in compliment to Sir Thomas Dale, who was admiral
+of that fleet.</p>
+
+<p>Two boats arrived on the 28th from Engano, with sixty-eight
+men belonging to the Sun, bringing the lamentable news of the
+loss of that ship, with many of her company, on, that island. The
+29th, the Globe arrived in the morning, and this day our leak
+broke out afresh, but was quickly stopped by removing the
+bonnet.[262] The 30th, our ship being entirely cleared from stem
+to stem, the carpenters went below to search for the leak; and as
+they passed forwards, removing the lining as they went, they
+found an auger hole left open in the middle of the keel, in the
+foremost room save one, which hole was four inches and three
+quarters about, and, had it sprung upon us while at sea and
+alone, would have tired out our whole company in twenty-four
+hours. In this the great mercy of God was manifest, that it never
+broke out upon us but when we had a fleet along with us for our
+aid.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 262: Perhaps this means by shifting the
+wadded sail.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>A fast being proclaimed to be held on board the fleet, and the
+exercise to be in the James on Sunday the 3d December, Mr Wren,
+the chaplain of the Sun, preached in the morning, and our own
+minister, Mr Copland, in the afternoon. This day the Bee sailed
+for Engano, in hopes to recover some money and goods belonging to
+the Swan, from the inhabitants of that island. The 4th, a Dutch
+ship, called the Black Lion, arrived from Patania, and rode to
+the westward of Pulo Paniang. As Mr Denton was well acquainted
+among the Dutch, he was sent aboard in the barge to enquire
+whence she came. On coming aboard, he met an old acquaintance,
+Hendrick Janson, who had been a long time chief factor for the
+Dutch in Patania. He, and another inferior factor, came aboard
+the Moon along with Mr Denton, where they were well entertained
+till Sir Thomas Dale came on board, and were soon after set
+ashore at Bantam. That same night we held a council, when it was
+determined to proceed before day with four ships, the Moon,
+Clove, Globe, and Samson, against the Black Lion, the better to
+prevent her escape. At break of day on the 6th, we were close
+around her, and after a short parley, they yielded their ship, on
+condition of being allowed to land with all their private
+property; and we brought her that same day near the island, among
+the rest of our fleet.</p>
+
+<p>The Bee returned on the 14th, having been forced back by
+contrary wind, and unable to get through the straits. On the
+16th, twenty Portuguese came on board the James Royal, who had
+fled from the Dutch at Jacatra, and whom we received kindly. This
+evening we were ready to sail, having eleven ships, great and
+small, and being in hopes to drive the Dutch from Jacatra. Our
+fleet consisted of the following ships:--The Moon, in which Sir
+Thomas Dale sailed as admiral; the Gift, in which I sailed as
+vice-admiral; the Unicorn, Clove, Globe, Samson, Pepper-corn,
+Thomas, Bee, Rose, and Black Lion. We left behind us the James
+Royal, the Advice, and our prize, because the James was not
+ready, and the other two had most of her provisions and stores on
+board.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed in the morning of the 19th, and anchored that
+evening between Pulo Paniang and Pulo Tunda. In the evening of
+the 20th, we anchored with our whole fleet about a league to the
+northward of Hector island. This night we sent a barge to the
+Flemish islands, where they found no persons on the southern
+island: but there lay there a Dutch galley, which they set on
+fire, and so returned on board. That same evening we saw seven
+Dutch vessels in the bay of Jacatra. Early in the morning of the
+21st, they all stood out towards us till near the islands, when
+they anchored all together, and we stood towards them in the
+afternoon, coming to anchor about a mile to windward of their
+fleet. In the evening, we held a consultation on board the Moon,
+when it was resolved to assault the Butch fleet in the following
+manner:--The Globe and Samson were appointed to assail the Sun,
+and the Thomas was to pass in between them, filled with
+combustible matter as a fire-ship, to set the Sun on fire. The
+Moon and Clove were to attempt the Golden Lion; the Gift and Bee
+were to assail the Angel; the Unicorn and Rose were to attack the
+Devil of Delft; and the Pepper-corn was ordered to surprise the
+burger-boat come from Jambee, which rode about three leagues from
+the rest, and whose boat, with thirteen men, had been intercepted
+by our barge, while making for the Dutch fleet, about seven this
+evening. This arrangement being written down, we departed, every
+man to his own particular charge.</p>
+
+<p>After we were gone, the admiral, Sir Thomas Dale, sent his
+boat to the Thomas for three <i>sackers</i>, which kept them at
+work till next morning at eight o'clock, so that the Hollanders
+were all away before these guns were got on board the Moon. We
+were then all in a Burly-burly to weigh and get out to sea, that
+we might have sea-room, and the advantage of the turn of the
+tide, which we at length attained, getting without the isles of
+Point Aire. In the mean time, the Dutch fleet passing between
+these isles and the main of Java, anchored that night on the
+coast of Java, and our fleet in the offing, without the islands.
+On the 23d, in the morning, the Dutch fleet stood off to the
+westwards, close under <i>Anti-Lackie</i>, in which course the
+Devil of Delft borrowed so near, that she got aground, and
+remained fast for a quarter of an hour. On seeing this, we made
+towards them, but she was got off before we could get any thing
+near, when she and all the rest of their fleet stood to the
+northwards. As our fleet had the weather-gage, we <i>paid room
+upon them</i>[263] till we came within shot, and then the Moon,
+commanded by our admiral, Sir Thomas Dale, began the fight with
+the headmost ship of the enemy, called the San. The battle
+continued for the space of three hours, during which time we
+spent upon them some 1200 cannon-shot, when we left them for the
+night, they standing so for to the northwards, that they got the
+<i>burger-boat</i> again into their company, and then anchored
+about half a league from us to the westwards, where they remained
+all night.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 263: This antiquated expression evidently
+means bearing down upon them to leewards.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Both fleets weighed anchor on the 24th, ours plying to the
+westwards to gain the wind, and the Hollanders ran in shore
+towards Point Aire. In the mean time, we descried three sail
+coming before the wind from the westwards, which at length we
+perceived to be the Little James, the Hound, and the Francis. By
+and bye we joined altogether, and chased the Dutch fleet through
+the bay of Jacatra, to its eastern point, where we all came to
+anchor for the night. During the night, the Dutch from Jacatra
+sent a junk filled with combustible matter, and on fire, which
+came so near our fleet that we were fain to weigh our anchors and
+get out of her way. The 25th, being Christmas-day, we again saw
+the Dutch fleet standing to the eastwards, and we sent our barge
+to follow them all night, to see what course they took, because
+we had left the James Royal in the bay of Bantam, with the Advice
+and our prize, which they might have surprised, if they got to
+Bantam before us, as there was no ship of force but the James,
+and she was unprepared, being busied in taking in her goods and
+stores, after being emptied to find her leak.</p>
+
+<p>The 27th of December, after midnight, the Black Lion, our
+Dutch prize, was set on fire by the carelessness of three wicked
+fellows, and burnt to the water's edge. The president went ashore
+on the morning of the 30th, to wait upon the king of Jacatra,
+accompanied by Mr Henry Jackson, when an unfortunate shot carried
+away his leg, of which wound he died.[264]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 264: It appears in the sequel that it was
+Jackson who lost his leg and life though the text leaves it
+dubious whether he or the president.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 1st of January, 1619, the James Royal, the Advice, and the
+prize, joined us from Bantam. The 2d, Sir Thomas Dale went ashore
+to Jacatra to visit the king, and to learn what were his
+intentions respecting the Dutch fort. The king gave to both him
+and the president much satisfaction, in words at least, promising
+to grant the English any reasonable conditions, if they would
+assist him to surprise the Dutch castle. This morning, before
+day, the Francis departed for Puloroon, with provisions for the
+relief of Mr Nathaniel Courthop and his companions. The 6th we
+held a council of war aboard the Moon, when it was determined
+that we should land from our greater ships six pieces of large
+cannon, three culverines, and three demi-culverines, with a
+proportional store of powder and shot, to assist the king of
+Jacatra against the Dutch; that Sir Thomas Dale was to remain in
+that road with eight sail, to cover this business, while five
+ships, under my command, were to ply up for the straits of Sunda,
+to lie in wait for the Dutch ships.</p>
+
+<p>The 25th, we got into the road of Becee, and anchored in
+fifteen fathoms, about two miles from the shore; the S. point of
+Becee bearing S.W. 1/4 W. and the N. point <i>Sabaicas</i>, which
+shut in the western isle of Pirio Tigs, bearing N. by W. three
+leagues off. We watered our ships on the 27th and 28th, and cut
+wood. I and Mr Coytmore, with several other masters, went twice
+ashore to view the harbour, which we found to be an excellent
+place of refuge for a small fleet against a superior enemy. The
+31st, by order of the president, we repaired with our fleet into
+Bantam roads.</p>
+
+<p>The 1st February, Captain John Jourdan the president came on
+board, who acquainted me with all that had taken place between
+them and the Dutch, in regard to the castle of Jacatra, during my
+absence, the Dutch having agreed to deliver up that fort to the
+English, on condition of being allowed to depart with bag and
+baggage, and a ship, <i>for two thousand rials of eight</i>, to
+carry them to the coast of Coromandel.[265] Sir Thomas Dale
+arrived in Bantam roads on the 4th, with the Moon, Clove, James,
+Pepper-corn, Hound, and Advice. As the pangran of Bantam had
+practised underhandedly with the Dutch to have the castle of
+Jacatra delivered into his hands, by which we had been unjustly
+deprived of that acquisition, we agreed, in a general
+consultation, that the president, and all the rest of the
+principal persons of our factory at Bantam, should repair on
+board, and get all our goods and provisions put aboard the ships.
+Accordingly, we were occupied from the 10th to 16th, both
+inclusive, in getting all the money and goods belonging to the
+honourable Company on board. During this time, the pangran sent
+several obscure persons to the president, as of their own accord,
+to enquire the reason of his departure, pretending that the
+pangran had given no just cause for leaving the country. Upon
+this the president drew up a memorial, enumerating the several
+grievances and wrongs which the English had suffered from him,
+meaning to have it translated into the Javan language, and then
+to be transmitted to the pangran.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 265: This agreement was crossed by the
+Pangran of Bantam, who gave us leave to beat the bush, and
+thought to have caught the birds himself, but was deceived in the
+end.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 17th, advice was received from Mr Ufflet, at Jacatra, that
+the Dutch were daily occupied in repairing and strengthening
+their fortifications; and that, when the messengers of the
+pangran demanded the surrender of their fort, with part of their
+money, goods, and ordnance, they gave for answer, That all these
+things were the property of their masters, which therefore they
+could not give away. We this day received news of two Dutch ships
+in the road of Jacatra, and that same night Sir Thomas Dale set
+sail with eight ships in quest of them, while I remained with
+four to attend upon the president. The 26th, having certain
+intelligence that four Holland ships were at anchor in the mouth
+of the Straits of Sunda, I went out that same evening to look for
+them, with the James, Gift, Unicorn, and the Little James. Next
+morning we anchored near Pulo Paniang, to take in water, and to
+put our ships into order, by taking aboard some planks that were
+alongside.</p>
+
+<p>We weighed again in the morning of the 1st March, making sail
+towards the mouth of the Straits, where we observed the two Dutch
+ships at anchor near the island of Tamporan, about three leagues
+to the westwards of Viun, or Palambangan point. We immediately
+made all sail towards them, while they, as in a careless manner,
+plied to and fro, having their topsails half mast down. At
+length, as we drew nigh, the Dutch admiral and all the rest of
+his ships bore up with my ship, which was most to windward, and
+gave us two shots, one of which went through the ship's side
+under the half-deck, and the other through the steerage. They had
+no sooner begun than they were as quickly answered from my ship,
+and in such measure, that, in the space of two hours, they became
+as quiet as lambs; their admiral, who gave the onset with so much
+arrogance, being the first to run away, followed by all the rest.
+We chased them till night, and then finding them too swift of
+foot, we gave over the chase, standing over towards Pulo Tunda.
+We came to anchor again on the 2d of March in the road of Bantam,
+on which day we had intelligence that one of the two ships lately
+come to Jacatra had got aground near the castle, and had been set
+on fire by themselves on seeing Sir Thomas Dale. The other ship,
+which had taken in a valuable loading from the castle, was also
+cast away on some rocks, ten leagues east of Jacatra.</p>
+
+<p>On the 4th, we had a letter from John Powell, residing at
+Jacatra, stating that Sir Thomas Dale had sailed on the 1st, with
+the Moon, Hound, Rose, and Bee, in search of the stranded Dutch
+ship. The 14th we heard from Sir Thomas that he had got almost
+within shot of the four Dutch ships we met with, but had been
+taken by a dead calm for twelve hours, succeeded in the night by
+a tempest, which scattered them so far asunder by next morning,
+that they lost all hopes of the chase, and had therefore returned
+to Point Ayre, whence he proposed bringing the Moon immediately
+to Bantam, leaving the rest of his ships to take in provisions at
+Jacatra. In a consultation as to the best course to be taken with
+the fleet, it was resolved to go to the coast of Coromandel,
+which we were informed was a good country for recovering the
+health of our men, and abounding in rice, wheat, butter, and
+other, provisions, which could not be procured here for any
+money.</p>
+
+<p>S.3. <i>Departure for Coromandel, with Occurrences there, and
+the Death of Sir Thomas Dale,--Capture of English Ships by the
+Dutch; and Occurrences at Tecoo</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On Monday the 19th of April, 1619, all our ships being
+together in Bantam roads, with three Chinese junks riding among
+us, it was resolved in council to execute the commission given us
+by the Honourable Company, by appropriating to them the goods in
+these junks, in payment of former debts due by the Chinese. Next
+day <i>Kewee</i> came aboard to the president, accompanied by the
+three <i>nockhadas</i>, or captains of the junks, to know his
+intentions. He gave him the following answer:--If the young king
+of Bantam would displace the pangran, who had treated us with so
+much injustice, he would then return on shore and
+<i>bichar</i>[266] with him, and restore the junks. The 28th,
+being ready to sail, intending to go for Morrogh to take in water
+and unload the junks, we descried a sail coming from the
+westwards round Palinbangan point, which turned out to be a
+Portuguese frigate, captured at Jasques, manned by twenty
+Englishmen, and sent by Captain Bonnar with advice to the
+president at Bantam. We learnt from these men that Sir Thomas
+Roe, the lord ambassador to the Mogul, was gone for England in
+the Ann Royal, having left the country with great honour and
+reputation to himself, and much advantage of the Honourable
+Company. Bodman, who was the cause of setting the Black Lion on
+fire, was hanged on the 22d of May, and that same night we set
+sail.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 266: This unexplained term probably means
+to make peace.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 30th May, Sir Thomas Roe stood in with his fleet under the
+island, while we held on our course for Masulipatam, having the
+Unicorn, Gift, and Bee in our company. The 30th June we anchored
+in nine fathoms, about two leagues from the coast of Coromandel,
+where we rode four days, being hardly able to visit each other in
+all that time, owing to W.S.W. winds, and a continual current
+setting to E.N.E. The surf also broke so lofty on the beach, that
+we durst not attempt landing with any of our boats. We were at
+length able to communicate together, when Mr Roberts, the master
+of the Unicorn, gave us notice of a bay on this coast in the
+latitude of 17&deg; N. about five leagues to the eastwards of
+Nassapore, [Narsipore] where there was good riding during the
+westerly monsoon. This was exactly what I wanted, having no hope
+to recover Masulipatam against wind and current. We accordingly
+set sail on the 4th, in the morning, and stood to the eastwards,
+the coast trending W.S.W. and E.N.E. And having run about nine
+leagues by estimation, with the wind and current, we found the
+land to turn away N. and N. by W.[267] giving me hopes of a good
+road. At this point of land there cometh put a great river,[268]
+by the stream of which there has been raised a reef or shoal,
+extending half a mile into the sea from the point, and
+occasioning a smoother road. Bringing that sand to bear S.S.W.
+there is good and safe anchorage in six and a half fathoms, two
+miles from the land. Two leagues north from this point, which,
+for distinction, I name Cape Comfort, there issues forth another
+branch of the same river, by which the headland is made an
+island, and off the mouth of this river there is likewise a long
+spit of sand, which is dry at low water.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 267: Obviously rounding Cape Godawery, in
+lat. 16&deg; 83' N.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 268: One of the two main branches forming
+the Delta of the Godawery.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 4th of July I sent the boat belonging to the Unicorn into
+the second branch of the river, which we called Mullet Sound, to
+see if they could discover any town where a guide might be
+procured, to conduct Robert Pickering and William Clarke to
+Masulipatam, by whom we proposed sending a letter to Mr
+Methwould. Our boat returned on the morning of the 6th, reporting
+that a guide had been procured at a little village three leagues
+up the river. They likewise brought aboard twenty hens, which
+they had bought for two shillings. The 8th, the barge returned
+from Captain Ball with seventy-one sheep and goats, and
+thirty-nine hens, having left Captain Ball and others at a town
+called <i>Narsapela</i>, six leagues up in the country. The 12th,
+Mr Methwould came from Masulipatam in one of the country boats,
+and brought with him twenty hogs, two large jars of arrack, six
+goats, and two baskets of bread. He also brought us news of a
+Dutch ship richly laden, then in the port of Masulipatam, and
+ready to depart for Holland.</p>
+
+<p>In the evening of the 26th, I went in the barge to seek out
+some bar or creek by which we might reach Coringa, the principal
+town in these parts near the sea side. That same night, I got
+over the bar of Coringa, which place I came to about two miles up
+the river, and was well received by the principal persons of the
+place, who were very ready to trade with us, and sent notice that
+same night of my arrival to the governor of Vingeron. Next
+morning, having rowed about three miles up the main river, and
+two miles up a little creek, we had sight of Vingeron, about
+twelve miles off.[269] I now landed, and walked towards Vingeron;
+but, before I reached it, the governor sent his horse for me,
+with all the music the place afforded; and among these
+instruments there were two great brass horns instead of trumpets.
+The governor received me very kindly, but more kindly my present,
+which consisted of two pieces of China velvet, and six pieces of
+China taffeta. Our compliments ended. I took leave of him, when
+he caused me to be conveyed in his own palanquin to a house near
+at hand, which he had appointed for my lodging.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 269: The town of Rajahmundry exactly
+answers to these circumstances, in reference to Coringa, and is
+in fact the head town of the province in which Coringa is
+situated.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I returned on board the James on the 1st of August, when I
+learnt, to my sorrow, that the shallop belonging to the Unicorn
+had been cast away three days before, near Ponara, on which
+occasion Mr Harris was drowned, together with two of the
+coxwain's crew, and a black; Captain Spaulding, Mr Yard, and
+others, escaping with much difficulty. In the morning of the 2d,
+the governor of Vingeron came aboard to see our ship, expecting
+some great present; on which occasion I gave him a piece of China
+damask, and four pieces of taffeta, which gave him more delight
+than the sight of a thousand ships, and he departed when he found
+he got nothing more by begging. The 23d I caused all the men to
+come on board, intending to proceed for Masulipatam, and this
+evening we got on board 150 goats, to serve us for fresh
+provisions at sea. The 24th there arrived a ballegat from
+Narsepore, bringing twenty-six candees of garavances, a candee of
+butter, and an hundred gallons of arrack.[270] I also, had
+letters from Masulipatam, announcing the melancholy news that Sir
+Thomas Dale had died at that place on the 9th of August.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 270: Though not so expressed, these seem to
+have been intended for the use of the English
+ships.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 6th September, having rode most part of
+the preceding night in nineteen fathoms, about three leagues
+S.S.E. from the bar of Narispore, and having the wind at N.W. we
+again set sail toward Masulipatam,[271] and anchored at night
+four leagues to the eastward of that place. Off the river of
+Narsipore we found the current to set by day to the S.S.E. and
+N.N.E. in the night, at the rate of half a league an hour. In the
+morning of the 7th we could see the English ships in the road of
+Masulipatam, in which road we came to anchor in the evening,
+finding here the Moon, Clove, Globe, and Advice, which last being
+found unserviceable, was here cast off, and her stores and
+provisions put on board the Moon and Clove. Next day, Mr
+Spaulding, Mr Ball, and Mr Methwould came aboard the James,
+giving me a report of all matters that had passed in my absence,
+as also a state of the Company's business. I accompanied them
+ashore in the afternoon, that we might the better consult
+together how to proceed in the important concerns committed to
+our charge. The first thing proposed was the union of both
+fleets, which was thought adviseable, and I was made choice of as
+admiral and chief commander of the whole ships and men thus
+united, according to the direction of the Honourable Company.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 271: The true name of this place is
+Mutchelipatnam; in Purchas it is called Messulapitan and
+Masulpatam.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 18th of October, a ship belonging to Masulipatam arrived
+from Mokha, by which we had news of the Lion being at Mokha,
+having a small frigate or bark in her company. The same day the
+Bee arrived from Narsipore-pete, with provisions for the fleet.
+The 19th, the Dragon's Claw came from Narsipore-pete[272] almost
+laden with rice and paddy.[273] On Thursday the 9th December, Mr
+Ball, Mr Methwould, and the other merchants who were to remain in
+the country, went ashore in the afternoon. In the morning of
+Friday the 10th, we left the road of Masulipatam, and anchored in
+the afternoon off the headland, to wait for the Pepper-corn,
+which came to us in the evening. By my estimation, the difference
+of longitude between the island of Engano and Masulipatam is
+19&deg; 30' of a great circle; and, although this does not give
+the true longitude in these parts near the equator, as custom has
+so called it, I do, that I may not savour of innovation.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 272: This may designate the road of
+Narsipore; but petah usually signifies in India the suburb or
+town connected with a fortress.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 273: Paddy is rice in its natural state as
+it comes from the plant on which it grows; rice is paddy deprived
+by art of its coarse husk.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Next morning, very early, we descried the land of Sumatra, the
+hill of Passaman bearing E.N.E 1/2 N. twelve leagues
+distant,[274] and the high land of Priaman E. 1/2 S. fourteen
+leagues off. We here met with two shoals, within a mile of each
+other, E. and W. The Gift came over the eastermost, and had not
+less than four and a half fathoms. I sent the Claw over the
+other, on which were four fathoms where she first crossed, but
+only two fathoms in returning, a little more to the northward.
+About nine this morning the wind came to the S.E. and so
+continued till three in the afternoon, by which time we had got
+to the southward of all the shoals; and so, with little wind, we
+spent the night between these shoals and the island of Battoo,
+[Batoa.] In this situation, a sagging current bore us to the
+northwards near the shoals, which, if it had set S.E. as formerly
+experienced, it ought to have carried us near to Tecoo.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 274: Purchas must here have omitted a part
+of the text, particularly the series of dates between Masulipatam
+and Passaman in Sumatra. As the text now stands, it would seem as
+if they had gone from Masulipatam to the coast of Sumatra, a run
+of about 1600 miles, in one night, an utter impossibility. But
+from the context, instead of the 11th December, 1619, the day
+after leaving Masulipatam, it would appear they reached the coast
+of Sumatra on the 23d January, 1620, giving forty-four days for
+the run across the bay of Bengal.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 24th, in the evening, we had sight of the isles of Tecoo,
+and came to anchor about eight o'clock, in forty-four fathoms,
+these isles bearing E. by N. seven leagues off. The 25th, with
+the first of the tide, we again weighed and steered for Tecoo;
+and, as we drew near, we espied three sail standing to the
+northwards, which came to anchor near the coast that night, while
+we anchored with our whole fleet about a league without them.
+Next morning they weighed anchor and joined us, when we found
+them to be the Palsgrave, Elizabeth, and Hope. From them we had
+the doleful news of the Dragon, Bear, Expedition, and Rose,
+having been taken by six Dutch ships, while at anchor, within the
+isles of Tecoo; as also that the Star had been taken by the Dutch
+in the straits of Sunda. They also said that the Hollanders had
+sent four great ships, doubly manned, in quest of the Samson and
+Hound, and that they were exceedingly doubtful as to the safety
+of these ships. Thus the English ships now taken by the
+Hollanders were almost equal in number to our three fleets now
+joined in one under my command.</p>
+
+<p>On Monday the 31st January, 1620, we held a consultation
+aboard the James Royal as to our future proceedings, when it was
+unanimously agreed to go to Acheen, in hopes to meet our ships
+from Surat, that we might keep our force together, according to
+the instructions of the Honourable Company. Our chief reasons for
+this proceeding were the want of rice and other provisions, which
+could not at this time be had at Bantam; secondly, the strong
+naval force of the Hollanders, as we did not think it prudent to
+risk the entire property now belonging to the Company in India
+upon such desperate terms, as the Dutch had four ships for every
+one of ours; and, lastly, which was an imperious necessity, that
+we might careen three of our ships, the James, the Gift, and the
+Unicorn, which could not be much longer deferred without imminent
+hazard. For all these reasons, we resolved to proceed for Japan,
+where, as we were given to understand, all things necessary for
+careening our ships, and abundance of provisions for our relief,
+were to be had.</p>
+
+<p>The 11th, Mr Mills arrived in the Bee from Priaman, with 300
+sacks of very good rice, and eleven hogsheads of oil, giving us
+great encouragement to send there again. The 12th, the Claw was
+sent off for Pedang and Cuttatinga, to procure rice and other
+provisions; and, on the 15th, the Bee was sent back to Priaman
+for more rice and oil. The 19th the Claw returned with
+thirty-four bags of rice, 16,000 cocoa-nuts, and ten goats; and
+the same night the Bee came back with 980 sacks of rice, procured
+with much difficulty by Mr Mills, merchant of the Elizabeth.</p>
+
+<p>The 3d March we departed from the road of Tecoo, intending
+first to touch at <i>Mintaon</i>, on purpose to dispatch the Bee
+for England, and thence to go for Acheen, in hopes of meeting the
+Charles and the Ruby from Surat. The 30th March we all anchored
+in the bay of Samanca, about a mile from shore, where we took in
+wood, water, and other necessaries. Next day we sent to recall
+the Bee from Balembeen. The 1st April we sent the shallop
+belonging to the Unicorn for Anniar, to enquire concerning the
+Dutch force, and how the pangran stood affected towards us.[275]
+At eleven this night, twenty-two of our men ran away with our
+barge. Next morning the shallop returned from Anniar, and brought
+news that there were fifteen sail of Dutch ships at Bantam and
+Jacatra, upon which we resolved to proceed to Bantam, to treat
+with the pangram, hoping that the Dutch <i>might not venture to
+attack us</i>. The Bee arrived in the afternoon from Ballambeen,
+[Palimbangan.] The 6th we set sail for Bantam, and on the 7th,
+between Crackastaw and Becee, we met a proa with some of our
+people coming from Anniar.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 275: The intended voyage to Acheen seems to
+hate been laid aside; perhaps the monsoon had become adverse, and
+forced them to the S.E. towards Bantam.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.4. <i>News of Peace between the English and Dutch</i>.</p>
+
+<p>At four in the morning of Saturday the 8th April, 1620, we met
+the Bull, newly come from England, bringing the joyful news of
+peace having been concluded between us and the Dutch. She was
+accompanied by a small ship, called the Flying Hart, with letters
+of advice for us, or any other of the English ships, giving
+notice of the agreement and union that had taken place between
+the two Honourable East India Companies of England and Holland.
+We came to anchor with all our fleet in the afternoon, near the
+point of Palimbangan. In the morning of the 11th, we descried the
+Dutch fleet coming from Jacatra to meet us, and to congratulate
+with us on the joyful intelligence of peace. General Coen was
+there in person, and as soon as he came to anchor, the Holland
+fleet and ours began to salute each other with peals of ordnance,
+to communicate the intelligence to the natives, and to express
+our own joy of the happy news of peace.</p>
+
+<p>The 12th, we came altogether into Bantam roads, the Dutch
+fleet consisting of fifteen sail, besides two others of their
+nation which we found already in the roads, and ours of twelve
+sail. This day, Mr Janson, commander of the Dutch fleet,
+accompanied by their fiscal, and divers others, came to visit me,
+and invited Mr Brockendon, Mr Spalding, and myself on board the
+Dutch admiral's ship, where we conferred with General Coen
+concerning our future conjunct arrangements. After we had
+compared the articles and letters, the Dutch general agreed that
+we should jointly proceed in conformity with the instructions we
+had received from our Honourable Company; but he declined
+publishing the articles till the arrival of some ship from
+Holland, with the articles and instructions from their Company.
+On the 14th, in the morning, by mutual concert between us and the
+Hollanders, we sent Mr Beaumont and Philip Baduge on, shore, with
+one Dutch merchant, to communicate the news of our peace and
+agreement to the pangran, and to inform him, as we were now
+united, we only desired to have a reasonable composition with
+him, through which we might remain quietly in his country,
+enjoying a free trade on just and equitable conditions, as in
+other parts of India. But the pangran was so much dissatisfied
+with the news, that he would give no answer to their message,
+often times asking them why we had become friends with the
+Hollanders, so that they had to return without any answer. We
+sent the same message to him next day, but our messengers were
+not allowed to land.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>"The differences and maritime warfare which took place between
+the Dutch and English East India Companies, of which some notice
+has been taken; and the peace and union which are announced, as
+having been communicated to their respective commanders at this
+time, would lead to historical discussions and deductions, which
+do not properly belong to the object of a Collection of Voyages
+and Travels; but which, if altogether passed over, would leave
+much of the foregoing circumstances, and some that have to be
+noticed in the sequel, abrupt, isolated, and almost
+unintelligible. It has therefore been deemed proper to give a
+brief account of these differences, and of the singular so called
+<i>union</i>, which took place in consequence, extracted from the
+Annals of the East India Company, vol. I. p. 201, <i>et
+seq.</i>[276]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 276: This addition to S.4. of the present
+voyage, is made by the Editor; but almost entirely derived from
+the historiographer of the East India Company.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"When the differences and aggressions which had occurred in
+the spice islands were reported in Europe, the English and Dutch
+Companies presented memorials and remonstrances to their
+respective governments, each complaining against the servants of
+the other, as guilty of unwarrantable aggressions. In Holland,
+calculating on the pacific character of King James, it was
+expected that the opposition to the projects of the English for
+participating in the trade of the spice islands, although of at
+least a tendency towards warlike aggression, would not lead to
+national hostilities, but might be discussed by means of
+remonstrances and negociation.</p>
+
+<p>"After long conferences between English and Dutch
+commissioners, for settling the disputes between the two
+Companies, a treaty was concluded at London on the 17th July,
+1619; by which, after specifying an amnesty for all past
+excesses, and a mutual restitution of ships and property, the
+trade of the two nations in the East was declared to be
+free;--That the pepper trade at Java should be equally
+divided;--That the English should have a free trade at Pullicat,
+on paying half the expences of the garrison;--That the English
+were to enjoy one third of the export and import trade, at the
+Molucca and Banda islands, commonly called the spice islands;
+commissioners to be appointed for regulating the trade, and the
+charges of the garrisons, under their inspection, to be defrayed
+in that proportion by the two Companies;--That each Company
+should furnish ten ships of war for the common defence; which
+ships were not to be employed to bring cargoes to Europe, but
+only in the carrying trade, between one port and another in the
+East Indies.--The whole proceedings arising out of this treaty,
+were to be under the regulation of a <i>Council of Defence</i>,
+composed of four members appointed by each Company, who were to
+reside in India; and this treaty was to subsist in force for
+twenty years.</p>
+
+<p>"It would lead far beyond any due bounds that could be
+afforded in this work, to follow out this compact, singularly
+weak on the part of King James, and assuredly either contrived by
+his boasted <i>king craft</i>, or devised by some wily Dutch
+politician, who was acquainted with his majesty's wonderful
+sagacity. This union and the council of defence, turned out a
+most fruitful source of advantage to the Dutch, who had
+completely duped the king and government of England, and totally
+expelled the English Company from any share whatever in the trade
+of the spice islands; after contriving to make them pay more than
+two thirds of the expence of fortifications and garrisons,
+instead of one third, all of which were effectually converted to
+their injury and exclusion. In the sequel of these voyages,
+several instances will be found, completely illustrative of these
+positions; and from the year 1625, or thereabout, the Dutch
+enjoyed the entire profits of the spice trade, including the
+whole island of Java, till within these very few years; when, as
+subjects of Buonaparte, they have been driven from every foreign
+possession, and entirely excluded from all participation in the
+trade of the East."--E.</p>
+
+<p>S.5. <i>Voyage of Captain Pring from Bantam, to Patania and
+Japan, and return to Jacatra</i>.[277]</p>
+
+<p>The 26th of April, 1620, we sailed from Bantam roads, with the
+James Royal and Unicorn in company, intending, by the grace of
+God, to go for Japan, there to careen and trim our ships. Mr
+Brockendon departed at the same time for Jacatra with six ships;
+proposing, about a month after our departure, to send five good
+English ships after us to Japan, that we might have the fittest
+season of the year to go from thence to the Manillas. The 27th,
+we took leave of this fleet, and steered towards the north,
+borrowing within half a league of the eastern point of
+Pulo-Tunda; and came to anchor in the evening about a league off
+the N.E. point of that island, in twenty-three fathoms upon ooze,
+waiting till the western stream of the tide began to return to
+the eastwards which was about ten at night, when we proceeded on
+our course.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 277: Purchas gives two relations of this
+voyage, one brief, "lest the longer one might interrupt the more
+delicate muses of some readers with sea-sickness, the other for
+those that are more studious of nautical knowledge." On the
+present occasion, we have preferred the more extended narrative,
+and have therefore united both accounts as given by Purchas,
+being the remainder of S.4. joined to the whole of S.5. giving
+one instance of minute nautical remarks of our earlier
+navigators.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 28th at night, we anchored in 18 f. on ooze, Pulo Antekero
+bearing N.E. three leagues off. Pulo Antekero bears N.N.E. 1/2 E.
+from Pulo Tunda, about eight leagues distant. The depth of water
+between the two islands, runs-from 16 f. to 26, and so to 22, 20,
+18, 16, 14, and 12 f. all ooze. Pulo Antekero is westernmost of
+the islands which extend in a row from the bay of Jacatra, [or
+Batavia,] to the westward. Continuing our course, we anchored, in
+the evening of the 29th, in 15 f, Pulo Kero bearing N. by E. 1/2
+E. 2-1/2 leagues off. Pulo Kero bears N.N.E. nearly from
+Antekero, six leagues off. After passing halfway between these
+islands we had 20, 18, 16, 14, 12 f. on ooze. At noon on the 30th
+we had Pulo Kero six leagues off, S. 1/2 E. our depth continuing
+13,12,11 f. all ooze.</p>
+
+<p>At noon on the 1st May, Pulo Kero bore S. 1/2 W nine leagues,
+and the depth 12 f. being just able to see that island from our
+top-mast head. By observation of the sun, we were then in lat.
+4&deg; 45' S. From noon till five p.m. our course was N.N.E. four
+leagues. We then anchored in 11 f. on ooze, having Pulo Kero by
+estimation thirteen league S by W. This night at nine, being
+still at anchor in the same place, I made the ship, by
+observation of the Crozies, in lat. 4&deg; 40' S. allowing
+29&deg; for the complement of declination. We set sail at four
+a.m. of the 2d, and by noon had run about six leagues N.N.E. the
+depths continuing as before, 13, 12, 11 f. By noon of the 3d our
+course was S. by E. five leagues, the soundings as before, all
+the ground from Bantam roads hitherto being ooze. From Bantam for
+the first two days, we had land and sea breezes; afterwards, till
+the afternoon of the 2d, the wind was constant between E. and
+S.E. when the wind came northerly, and so continued till the 3d
+at noon. From Pulo Paniang to Pulo Antekero, the current set to
+the westwards, somewhat strong; but from thence we found the
+currents more gentle, and changing into every direction in the
+course of the twenty-four hours.</p>
+
+<p>Our course from noon of the 3d till noon of the 4th was N.N.E.
+eleven leagues, the depths from 12 to 10-1/2 f. From noon this
+day till seven at night, we made 5-1/2 leagues N. and then
+anchored in 9-1/2 f. We weighed in the morning of the 5th. having
+but little wind and that variable, till half an hour after six,
+when it sprung up fresh at S.W. From four to nine a.m. we made
+three leagues N.E. 1/2 E. and from nine till noon only half a
+league N.W. by N. This day at noon we were in lat. 3&deg; 30' S.
+when we descried a small island N.N.E. 1/2 E. four leagues off,
+which appeared at first like a great tree rising out of the see.
+From noon till six p.m. our course was five leagues N.W. We here
+saw two or three hummocks like islands, N. by W. seven leagues
+off. From thence till three a.m. of the 6th, we sailed W. six
+leagues. At six in the evening of the 5th we had 9 f. which
+increased as we stood westwards in the night, to 10, 11, and l2
+f. and afterwards decreased to 8 f. where we came to anchor. The
+stream by night set S.E. and by day N.W. We weighed again at six
+a.m. of the 6th, and steered W.N.W. 1-1/2 league, when we had
+sight of many hummocks rising like so many islands, but which at
+length we perceived to be all one land. Coming now into 6-1/2 f.
+we altered our course to the N.E. making our course N.N.E. till
+noon, about 2-1/2 leagues; at which time, by an observation of
+the sun, we were in lat. 3&deg; 20' S. We were now in 8 f. and
+found the current to set N.W. by W. About noon of this day, a
+junk belonging to Johor came up with us, which had been at
+Cheribon in Java, and was returning to Johor. The afternoon, we
+steered in with the eastern part of the hummocky land of Banka,
+making our course N.N.E. 1/2 N. in which we came again to 8 f.
+afterwards increasing regularly to 24 f. and then decreasing
+again to a quarter less 7 f. when we came to anchor against the
+E. point of that land, which bore from us N.N.E. 1/3 N. four
+leagues off.</p>
+
+<p>We weighed in the morning of the 7th, and stood in nearer the
+point, in hopes of being able to pass through between that island
+and one which lay three leagues to the E. But in our way, we
+found the soundings, after increasing from 7 to 17 f. to decrease
+again to 6 and to one-half less 4 f. and about two miles off the
+point in the fair way we had only six feet water in the fair way,
+or mid-channel. To the eastwards, there appeared many islands,
+and by the report of the people in the junk, the sea is full of
+islands between the S.E. end of Banka and the island of Borneo.
+The S.E. end of Banka now bore N.N.E. 1/2 N. about two leagues
+off; and the land from this point to the entrance of the straits
+of Banka, lay W. by S. the straits being thirteen leagues from
+us. Where we lay at anchor, the before-mentioned point bearing N.
+by E. 1/2 E. 2-1/2 leagues off, we had an observation of the sun,
+giving the latitude of the ship 3&deg; 8' S. Having little hope
+of finding a passage between Banka and Borneo among these
+islands, by reason of the fearful shoalings we had already met
+with, we resolved on the 8th to go through the straits between
+the island of Banka and Sumatra, called the Straits of Banka;
+wherefore we set sail, retracing as nearly as we could the course
+by which we came into the present shoal water; in which course we
+found still more dangerous shoalings than in our in-coming. After
+we had got about eight leagues off, S.S.W. from the
+before-mentioned point of Banka, we steered S.W. by W. the
+current setting N.W. which made our course nearest W. by S. In
+this course we proceeded five leagues, and anchored in 8 f. on
+ooze, about nine at night.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 9th, we descried Lucepara, N.N.W. seven
+leagues off, and steered towards it, till we had it N. two
+leagues. In this course we passed over a spit, where we had only
+4-1/2 f. and 4-3/4. But on nearing Lucepara, we had 5-1/4 f. all
+ooze. We then steered N.W. by N. till Lucepara was N.E. of us,
+having 5 f. and the same ground. We then, went W.N.W. having
+always ooze, till we were within two leagues of the Sumatra shore
+in 6 f. The isle of Lucepara bore then E.S.E. 3-1/2 leagues off;
+and a hill on Banka with a deep swamp, N. by W. being about a
+sail's breadth open of the point of Sumatra, which bore N. by W.
+1/2 W. from us, about three leagues off. We steered thence away
+with the said point N. by W. Having 6-1/2 and 7 f. soft ground,
+till we came within a league of the point, where edging too near
+we had but 5-1/2, and only 4-1/2 in the boat hard by us: But, if
+we had kept a little farther from the point, we might have gone
+in 7, 8, 9, and 10 f. all through the strait, borrowing carefully
+with the lead upon the Sumatra shore; whereas by keeping nearer
+to Banka than Sumatra, the soundings are very variable, sometimes
+deep, and sometimes shallow, and mostly foul ground. On the
+Sumatra shore, even if coming into shoal water, the ground is
+mostly soft ooze, and the soundings far more regular and
+certain.</p>
+
+<p>In the evening of the 12th May, having brought the N.W. point
+of Banka to bear N.E. we opened two smooth hills with a little
+hummock between them; one of these hills being the northermost
+land of Banka, and bearing N.E. nine leagues, from the N.W. point
+of that island. This night we steered N.N.E. to get through the
+channel between Lingan and the N. end of Banka, having 23, 22,
+20, 18, and 16 f. all ooze, till we came near the entrance, and
+afterwards 15, 14, 13 f. in going through the passage. Lingan
+rises at first in three islands, the northermost being larger
+than both the other two, being near two leagues long and full of
+hummocks. Among these three islands there are certain fragments
+of isles intermixed, like so many hay-cocks, which is a good mark
+whereby to know these islands. From the smooth hill which is the
+north end of Banka, to the south-westermost isle of Lingan, it is
+N. by W. ten leagues. From the middle of the largest isle of
+Lingan, which is the north-eastermost, there is another smooth
+island nine leagues off, E.N.E. 1/2 N. From that there is another
+flat island, and off the north point of the round smooth island,
+there is a little fragment like a rock. In the fair way between
+this island and Lingan, there are 14 and 13 f. the course being
+midway between, and to the N. to pass along by the E. side of
+Bintang. This day at noon, being the 12th May, our latitude was
+1&deg; S.[278] the greatest isle of the Lingan group being S.W.
+from us five leagues, whence we estimated its latitude to be
+1&deg; 10' nearly.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 278: This is an evident error, as the
+northern side of the largest island of the Lingan group is
+exactly on the equator, and Bintam, or Bintang, is in lat. 1&deg;
+N.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At noon of the 14th, having made way twenty-four leagues to
+the northward, by aid of the wind and a current setting to the
+north, we had sight of the high land of Bintang, rising with two
+hills and a deep swamp or hollow between, and, as we judged,
+twelve leagues from us. At this time, likewise, we had sight of
+three or four hummocks, S.W. by W. eight leagues off, which
+seemed separate islands. We had here 20 f. our soundings from
+Lingan being 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, and 20 f. From noon of the 14th
+till noon of the 15th, we made twenty-seven leagues N. 1/3 W. our
+soundings in these twenty-four hours being 21, 22, 23, and 24 f.
+From noon till three p.m. of the 15th we made 3 1/2 leagues, and
+then had sight of Pulo Laor, N.W. 1/2 N. about twelve leagues
+off, having then 27 f. the ground resembling fuller's earth. At
+night, Pulo Laor being N.W. by W. eight leagues off, we had 39 f.
+on ooze. From noon of the 15th till eight a.m. of the 16th, we
+made our course N.N.W. 1/2 W. fifteen leagues. At night of the
+16th, Pulo Laor bore S.W. by S. five leagues; the body of the
+island of Hermano de Layo W.S.W. 1/2 W. seven leagues; and the S.
+end of Pulo Timon W. 1/2 N. ten leagues, its N.E. end being
+W.N.W. 1/2 W. ten leagues. We anchored this evening within four
+leagues of the N. point of Pulo Timon, in 24 f. <i>streamy</i>
+ground, that point bearing W. by S. 1/2 S. In the evening I sent
+my boat round the point, where they observed a town, with a junk
+riding close by the shore, and several proas fishing. One of
+these came to enquire what nation our people were of, and told
+them there was good fresh water at the town, with plenty of
+buffaloes, goats, and poultry.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 17th, we sent the Unicorn's longboat
+along with ours to the town, whence they came back in the evening
+with four butts of water each, not willing to fill more, as it
+was brackish. They found at the watering-place a junk belonging
+to Johor, fitted out for war, having twenty men armed with
+fire-arms, besides lances and javelins. They reported that they
+had taken a Chinese junk, which they had sold on the coast of
+Johor; the nokhada sending me word, that he would assist me
+against the Portuguese at the hazard of his life. In the bay next
+to the southwards of Pulo Timon, we found excellent fresh water,
+but could not conveniently take it in by means of our long-boat,
+which drew five feet water when loaded. Having thus spent the day
+to little purpose, we set sail at the beginning of the night,
+directing our course for Patane, and steering N. all night with
+little wind.</p>
+
+<p>At noon of the 18th, we were in the latitude of 3&deg; 40' N.
+At four p.m. we had sight of Pulo Tingoran, N.N.W. fifteen
+leagues off. At night we passed by Tingoran, about six leagues to
+the eastwards, having 28, 30, and 32 f. on soft ground. At six
+a.m. of the 19th, Tigoran bore W.S.W. seven leagues from us, when
+we had thirty-six f. soft ground. At noon of this day we were in
+lat. 5&deg; 30' N. Tingoran bearing S. 1/3 E. fourteen leagues
+off, by which we estimated the latitude of that island to be
+4&deg; 50 N. We had likewise, at noon, the south isle of Pulo
+Rowdon, [Ridang,] N.W. by W. seven leagues off. The same night at
+eight, I observed the croziers, making the latitude of the ship
+5&deg; 48' N. At this time, the largest of the Ridang isles,
+which is the eastermost, bore from us due W. four leagues
+distant. From eight this night, till noon of the 20th, our course
+was nearly N.W. by W. nine leagues, our sounding being from 28 to
+17 f. The northermost of the Pulo Ridang isles was then S. 1/3 E.
+four leagues off, being a round hummock, much like Pomo in the
+gulf of Venice, but somewhat higher and more complete. These
+isles consist of good high land, having fair depth all along
+their eastern side to seawards, and I am told have a free and
+safe channel between them and the main land. There are thirteen
+or fourteen islands in this group, great and small.</p>
+
+<p>From noon of the 20th till eight in the morning of the 21st,
+our course was W.N.W. nine leagues. We saw two hills by the
+water-side, bearing W. and five leagues off, resembling two great
+tortoises. From Pulo Tingoran all the way to Patani, the land up
+the country is very high, while that just within the coast is
+low, with a sandy beach. This is the case for at least twenty
+leagues south of Patani, but how much farther I know not. In the
+afternoon of the 20th, while standing towards the two hills just
+mentioned as resembling tortoises, we came from 17 into 14 and 13
+f. with hard ground; and as we drew nearer these hills, the depth
+again increased to 19 f. on ooze, and then shoaled again to 18
+and 17 f. on ooze.</p>
+
+<p>The 21st of May, being Sunday, from eight a.m. to seven p.m.
+our course was N.W. 3/4 W. thirteen leagues, keeping mostly
+within four leagues of the low sandy shore, the depth all the way
+being 15, 14, and 13 f. We then anchored in 13-3/4 f. streamy
+ground, the northermost point in sight, falling down from a
+reasonably high land at the far end of the low land, bore from us
+W.N.W. 1/2 N. near 3-1/2 leagues off. S.E. by S. from this point,
+six leagues off, there is a rock, as high above water as the hull
+of a small ship, which we passed about 1-1/2 league on its E.
+side, finding no alteration in the soundings. This point I named
+the Gurnet's Head. From this point, the land trends W.N.W. and W.
+by N. all the way to the entrance into Patani roads, being all
+low land from the Gurnet's Head to the point of the road, this
+point being the lowest of all. The distance from the Gurnet's
+Head to that low point is six leagues, all the way of fair depth
+till coming near the low point of the road, to which a good birth
+must be given, as there lies a shoal from it half-way over to the
+western shore, wherefore it must not be approached too near, till
+you find in the first place the shoaling of the western shore,
+which is the softest ground. From the low point, in going across
+the bay to the western shore there are only from 5 f. to 4 1/2
+when in the road; and then the low point bears from the
+anchorage, E.N.E. 1/3 E. the highest mountains in the western
+side of the bay bearing S.S.W. 1/3 W.</p>
+
+<p>We anchored in the road of Patani on Thursday the 25th of May,
+when we found the Sampson and a Dutch pinnace there at anchor. I
+went ashore the day before to the English factory, where I found
+Mr Adam Denton and Mr Richard Welding, lately come from Jambee in
+Sumatra in a proa, with several of the Sampson's people, who were
+all rejoiced to see our ships coming into the port. On getting to
+the English house, I told Mr Denton that my chief purpose for
+coming here was for arrack and fresh victuals, of which we were
+in great need, upon which he gave immediate orders to procure
+every thing we needed, so that in six days we were supplied with
+sixteen butts of arrack and arrack-apee; three butts of which
+last we had from the Dutch, for which courtesy we were chiefly
+obliged by their anxiety to have us away. We had also beeves,
+goats, and poultry, in abundance. We also bought here
+<i>dammar</i> and oil, for the purpose of repairing our ships, as
+I understood these things were dear at Japan. I here found a
+small frigate or country bark, which had been bought by the
+English; and as she was of no great use there, it was agreed that
+she, with most of the English sailors, should attend upon us to
+Japan.</p>
+
+<p>We departed from Patani on the 31st May; and at seven a.m. of
+the 1st June, we saw a small rock, just above water, being very
+dangerous for ships bound from Patani for the point of Camboja.
+When this rock bore N.N.E. 1/2 E. at the distance of a league,
+the high land over Gurnet Head was S.S.W. 1/4 W. eighteen leagues
+off; and by computation, the low point of Patani road was then
+eighteen leagues off, W.S.W. 1/2 S. After getting out of Patani
+road into 7 f. the depth increased regularly to 9, 10, 12, 14,
+16, 18, 20, 22, and 24 f. till we got sight of the rock; and two
+leagues from it we had 25 f. on ooze, as was the ground all the
+way over from Patani. This day at noon, we found the latitude of
+the ship to be 7&deg; 20' N. the rock bearing W. about four
+leagues off.</p>
+
+<p>From that time till the 3d, at noon, our course was E. 1/2 N.
+forty-five leagues, when we had sight of Pulo Hube, bearing
+E.N.E. 1/2 N. eight leagues off, having 14 f. on ooze, as we
+constantly had for the last forty-eight hours, the sounding being
+from 27 to 36 f. and thence decreasing again to 14 f. Pulo Hube
+rises at first as one round hill, and on coming nearer some high
+land is seen rising in hummocks, but not above two-thirds so high
+as the round hill, being all one land with it. Then another and
+smaller island is seen to rise, nearly of the same height with
+the hummocks, and close to the larger island. At the east end of
+this lesser round island, there are two little isles very near,
+and a mile east of them there is a long rock like the hull of a
+galley. This night we anchored in 13 1/2 f. on ooze, about three
+leagues from the largest and highest isle. In the morning of the
+4th we weighed, and stood E. by S. with little wind. At six p.m.
+we had the body of Pulo Hube W. by N. four leagues off. From
+thence we steered E. by S. and E. till six next morning, but were
+so opposed by the current, that we made our course to the
+northward of east. From six a.m. of the 5th till six p.m. we ran
+fifteen leagues in the before-mentioned course, when we saw a
+very small round isle about four leagues to the southward, having
+a long flat rock S. from it about a mile, a good height above
+water. From Pulo Hube till three leagues from this island, our
+soundings were 13, 14, 15 f. and then 15, 14, 13 f. again, all
+ooze. When within two leagues of this small island, we had 13 f.
+on sand.</p>
+
+<p>Here we descried Pulo Condor, its N. end bearing E. by N. from
+this small island about seven leagues off. This day at noon, we
+made our latitude 8&deg; 42' N. the highest land on Pulo Condor
+bearing from us E. six leagues off. From Patani till we were in
+sight of Pulo Condor, the wind was mostly S.S.W. This day at
+noon, we steered away N.E. then N.E. by N. and in the night
+N.N.E. so that we made our course on the whole, till next day at
+noon, N.E. by N. about twenty-four leagues, the depths being 13
+and 14 f. on ooze. At noon of the 6th, we had sight of two
+hummocks on the coast of Camboja, bearing N. by E. nine leagues
+off, with low land to the westwards. From Pulo Condor till we had
+sight of this coast, the current set E. by N. At this time we had
+12 f. on streamy ground. The 7th at noon, we were in lat. 10&deg;
+42' N. having run from the former noon twenty-five leagues N.E.
+1/2 N. and found that the current had carried us ten leagues to
+the N. of our computation. Our depths were in these twenty-four
+hours, from 12, to 16, 20, and 24 f. and then back to 20, 18, 16,
+14, on sandy ground.</p>
+
+<p>From the before-mentioned two hummocks, as we coasted along,
+about eight leagues from the land, sometimes more, and sometimes
+less, we saw high land all the way in the inland country, and a
+smooth land in most places by the sea side, about the height of
+the Lizard, with many plots upon it resembling white sand, as
+well as the sea side. The first of these white spots was on a
+point ten leagues W. of Cape Cessier, which we at first thought
+had been a town with fair white houses and white walls. This day,
+at noon, being the 7th, when in the lat. of 10&deg; 48' N. that
+Cape bore from us about six leagues W.N.W. 1/2 W. At noon of the
+8th, we were in lat. 11&deg; 30' N. having gone twenty leagues
+N.E. 1/2 N. from noon of the 7th. From the 8th, till noon of the
+9th, we steered along shore N.N.E. sixteen leagues, N. by E. six
+leagues, N. six leagues, and N. by W. nine leagues, making our
+course in all N. by E. 1/3 E. thirty-six leagues. We now had Cape
+Varella[279] W.S.W. eight leagues off, and were in the lat. of
+13&deg; 13' N. This cape is called Jentam by the Chinese,
+signifying a chimney in their language, because it has a sharp
+hummock on the top of the hill, much like a chimney on the top of
+a house. From noon of the 9th, till noon of the 10th, our course
+was N. two-thirds W. twenty-six leagues; our latitude on the 10th
+being 14&deg; 30' N. when we were about ten leagues from the
+land.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 279: Cape Verelly is in lat. 12&deg; 40' N.
+on the coast of Cochin China--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 11th, at noon, we were in lat. 16&deg; 10' N. having run,
+from the foregoing noon, thirty-three one-third leagues due N.
+Next noon, the 12th, we had made other twenty-six leagues, N.N.E.
+1/2 N. and were in latitude 17&deg; 40' N. the current having set
+us six leagues to the N. of our computation. This evening, at
+six, we descried the island of Aynam, [Hainan] its high land
+bearing N.W. by N. twelve leagues, and we had run from noon seven
+leagues N.E. From hence, till noon of the 13th, our course was
+N.E. by E. twenty-two leagues, and we were then in lat. 18&deg;
+30' N. We this morning chased a Portuguese frigate, but she was
+so light that we could not get near her. The 14th, at noon, we
+were in 19&deg; 35' N. our course having been these twenty-four
+hours N.E. twenty-six leagues, the current having carried us four
+leagues to the N. of our reckoning; and yet this day at noon, in
+seventy-three f. on ooze, our boats found no current at all. We
+here saw many ripplings, like the overfalls of some rapid tide,
+yet found none. At six this evening, we again anchored our boat
+in sixty-eight f. on oozy sand, and found a slight current to the
+southwards. By the 15th, at noon, we had ran seventeen leagues
+N.E. by N. and our latitude was 28&deg; 30' N. the current having
+carried us seven leagues to the north of our reckoning. We had
+here forty-five f. sandy ooze. The 16th, at noon, in 21&deg; 20'
+N. we had sight of three islands, the eastermost N.N.W. the
+westermost N.W. and the nearest land nine leagues off. We had
+here twenty-two f. on oosy sand, the wind being E.S.E. and very
+fresh; but, from Cape Verelly till now, the wind had always blown
+from S.S.E. to S.W. Next morning, at eight, we had twenty-eight
+f. on ooze, having run, from noon of the 16th, eleven leagues
+S.W. Finding the wind to increase, we thought it better to come
+here to anchor than to run back again.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 18th June, the weather being somewhat
+fair, we endeavoured to weigh our anchor; but when it was right
+apeak, the cable gave way, though a new one, never before wetted,
+by which we lost our anchor. Just at this time the Unicorn fired
+a gun, on which I sent immediately to know what was amiss, and
+was informed she had sprung a great leak, by which all her men
+were tired out with bailing. I then sent thirty men to her aid,
+to ease her crew, till it might please God they should find the
+leak. This day we had the wind at S.E. and stood E. making our
+course N.E. till six p.m. when we again saw the former high
+island ten leagues from us, bearing N.N.E. one-third E. This
+evening our men returned from the Unicorn with the joyful news
+that the great leak was firmly stopped. From six p.m. till
+midnight, we made fourteen leagues N.E. when we had twenty f. in
+ooze. From that time, till five next morning, we stood to the
+southwards, making a S.W. course three and a half leagues.</p>
+
+<p>From five in the morning of the 19th, we cast about towards
+the land, with the wind at S.E. making a course N.E. and at six
+o'clock were within eight leagues of the before-mentioned high
+island, bearing from as N. by E. At eight this morning, Mr
+Roberts, the master of the Unicorn, came on board the James, to
+inform me that another great leak had broke out in that ship, and
+that it was necessary to seek out for some smooth place to ride
+in at anchor, to enable them to search out the leak, and fit
+their foremast better into the step. Upon this intelligence, I
+resolved to bear up under the lee of the great island, which bore
+now from us N. by E. in hope to find there a smooth anchorage for
+the purposes of the Unicorn. There were many more islands in
+sight, both to the eastwards and westwards of us, but that being
+the nearest, and the likeliest for our purpose, and only three
+leagues from us, we steered for it. The night approaching, and
+the wind becoming dull, we plied off and on till morning of the
+20th, when the wind had come round so much to the northwards,
+that we could not fetch our intended place of anchorage. I went
+aboard the Unicorn this day to enquire into their intentions and
+situation, when I found them all willing to stand on our original
+course, as the wind was fair, and they were hopeful of being able
+to overcome their leak. I therefore sent all my Lascars on board
+the Unicorn, in aid of her crew, after which we stood on our
+course all that day till midnight, with a fair wind and
+favourable weather.</p>
+
+<p>Towards midnight of the 20th June, the wind increased so much,
+that we had to lay our ship a-try all night under her
+main-course. In the morning of the 21st, we saw the Unicorn a
+league and a half astern of us, having a foresail and spritsail
+out, which I afterwards perceived was for the purpose of floating
+her about towards the shore. I immediately caused our
+fore-courses to be made ready to float our ship about after the
+Unicorn, though we had little hope of being able to assist her in
+any thing, as the sea was become very rough. While our men were
+throwing loose the forecourse, there came so violent a gust, that
+they were obliged to furl it again, otherwise it had been blown
+away. After the gust was over, we set our foresail, and, to make
+her wear better round, we brailed up our main-course, part of it
+being blown out of the bolt rope before the men could furl it.
+After that was up, we put our helm hard a-weather, thinking the
+ship would come round, but all in vain, for our ship would not
+wear beyond two or three points, and then came to again. The sea
+was now so much grown that we durst not let fall our spritsail,
+and the wind so violent that we could not loosen our
+fore-topsail; and by this time the Unicorn had gone out of
+sight.[280] Finding we could not wear ship, we steered away as
+near as we could lie S. by E. till noon, having by that time made
+a course S. by E. thirteen leagues from the southermost island we
+had seen over night, which I called the Morocco Saddle, or Saddle
+island, because of a high hill having a deep swamp or hollow
+between two peaked tops. This Saddle island is in lat. 21&deg;
+45' N.[281] There are four or five small islands close to its
+western side, and three on its eastern side. Besides which, there
+are many other islands in different directions, some N.W. others
+W.N.W. and W. by N. the southermost of all the islands in sight
+bearing from Saddle island to the W. about fifteen leagues
+off.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 280: It will be seen in the sequel that she
+was lost on the coast of China, probably run on shore to save the
+men's lives from the effects of the increasing
+leak.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 281: The indicated latitude leads to one of
+the numerous islands on the coast of China, at the month of the
+bay of Canton, about the longitude of 113&deg; E. from
+Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This afternoon our ship became very leaky, having suddenly
+four and a half feet water in the hold, which kept both pumps
+going a long while before we could free her. Towards evening, it
+pleased God that we discovered three or four great leaks between
+wind and water; and after our carpenters had stopped them, we had
+great comfort, as we could then let the pumps stop half an hour,
+and afterwards free the ship in a quarter of an hour. From this
+day, the 21st, at noon, till noon of the 22d, we made five
+leagues S.S.W. with a pair of courses, and nine leagues S.W. by
+W. a-hull, having twenty-seven and a half f. in ooze. In the
+afternoon of the 22d, the violence of the wind and waves began to
+abate, and our ship became tighter, which plainly shewed that
+most of our leaks were between wind and water, wherefore, on the
+first fair weather, I caused our carpenters to search the ship's
+sides, where they found and stopped many bad places, some a yard
+long, where the oakum was all rotten in the seams.</p>
+
+<p>The 24th, we had sight of a great island to the N. about seven
+leagues off; having a high hill on its southern end, being the
+island formerly mentioned as about fifteen leagues W. from Saddle
+island. From thence, till the evening of the 26th, our course was
+S. by W. twenty-four leagues, the depths increasing from nineteen
+to thirty-six f. on ooze. We had here a small round island S.W.
+by N. two leagues off, nearly in latitude 20&deg; 20' N.[282]
+This island has four small islands on its S.W. side, but all of
+them considerably lower, for we saw this from the distance of at
+least ten leagues, rising in the shape of a Chinese hat. From
+hence, till noon of the 27th, our course was E. by N. two-thirds
+N. twelve leagues. This morning at two o'clock the wind veered
+round to S.S.E. and at noon was due S. From noon of the 27th, to
+noon of the 28th, we stood E.N.E. eighteen leagues, and had then
+almost forty-one f. on ooze. Till noon of the 29th, we made other
+eighteen leagues E.N.E. when we were in 21&deg; 10' N. To the
+30th, at noon, other eighteen leagues E.N.E. To noon of 1st July,
+our course was E.N.E. 1/2 N. twenty-two leagues, our latitude
+being then 22&deg; 10' N. Here, from the topmast-head we saw land
+N.N.W. 1/2 N. From noon this day, till seven p.m. we sailed N.E.
+by N. six leagues. At six this evening we saw three Chinese
+fishing-boats.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 282: There must be a material error here,
+as the latitude in the text would carry us back to the peninsula
+to the north of Hainan, more than two degrees of longitude
+backwards. Indeed, the text seems corrupted in many respects,
+even the bearings being extremely suspicious.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This evening the wind came up at E.S.E. with which we stood to
+the southwards; and having sprung our main topmast only a little
+before, we could only bear a course and bonnet, and therefore
+made our way no better than S.W. From noon of the 2d, till eight
+p.m. our way was S. four leagues. Till noon of the 3d, we sailed
+N.N.W. 1/4 W. seven leagues. We here saw land twelve leagues off,
+from N. to N.E. rising in certain hummocks, which land I
+estimated to be nearly in 22&deg; 45' N. On the 8th, I had an
+observation of the Scorpion's Heart, by which I made our latitude
+22&deg; 35' N. Next day, at noon, on observation of the sun gave
+the latitude 23&deg; 6' N. At this time we had sight of the high
+land of Logosse, eleven leagues off, N.W. by N.[283] This morning
+we saw eight or more fishing boats, and came within hail of one,
+but could not persuade the people to come on board.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 283: The latitude of the text points to the
+coast of China in about the longitude of 117&deg;E. but no such
+name as Logosse occurs in these parts.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 10th we had sight of some small islands, one of which,
+rising in form of a sugar-loaf, bore from us W.N.N. about eight
+leagues off.[284] We this day hoisted out a small boat, built by
+our carpenters upon the forecastle, by which we made trial of the
+current, and found it to set E.N.E. At eight this evening, we
+anchored in 28 f. having made no way at all this afternoon but
+with the current, which went at the rate of about a mile an hour
+N.E. The 11th we weighed, and drove away with the current to the
+N.E. having no wind. This day at noon we had sight of the high
+land of Formosa above the clouds, the highest part bearing S.E.
+by E. about eighteen leagues off, the nearest island on the coast
+of China bearing seven leagues from us N.W. We here saw great
+numbers of fishing boats all round about us, which sent little
+boats to us with fish, for which we gave them double the value to
+encourage them to come back. At six this evening, the wind sprung
+up at N.N.E. by which, and some help of the current setting N.E.
+by E. we made our way nine leagues E. to the 12th at noon. Our
+latitude was then 25&deg; 20' N. The high land of Formosa being
+S.E. and the nearest port eight leagues off; the northern point
+ten leagues E. by N. and the depth 46 fathoms on ooze. The 13th
+the northern point of Formosa bore E.S.E. ten leagues off, being
+then in lat. 25&deg; 40' N.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 284: These appear to have been the Poughoy,
+or Pescadores islands, off the western coast of Tai-ouan, or
+Formosa.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 22d of July at noon, we were in lat. 32&deg; 40' N. the
+great sound of Langasaque, [Nangasaki,] being E. nine leagues
+off, and the S.E. of the Gotto isles W. by N. ten leagues off.
+The 23d, we arrived in a port of the island of Firando named
+Cochee, [Coetch,] which is about 4 1/2 English miles to the
+southwards of Firando haven.[285] On the 25th, Captain Cox sent a
+great number of funnies, or <i>toe</i> boats, to our assistance,
+by the help of which we got safe in the afternoon into the
+harbour of Firando, where we found the Swan and Expedition, sent
+hither, as I suppose, by the Dutch, for the disgrace of our
+nation in this remote part of the world. This day, before we got
+in, the Elizabeth brought in with her into Coetch, a frigate,
+containing silks and hides, and some sugar, her mariners being
+Japanese with some Portuguese, a part of whom were friars.
+Captain Adams, the admiral of the united fleet, arrived in the
+same place about three hours after me in the Moon, as likewise
+William Johnson in the Trow.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 285: Coetch, about 17 miles W. by N. from
+Firando, the former on the western, and the latter on the eastern
+side of the island.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 26th, a general council was held of all the English and
+Dutch, in the English house at Firando, when it was resolved to
+call in the ships that lay nearest the coast of <i>Sashma</i>,
+because we were certainly informed that the Portuguese frigates
+were just arrived from Macao at Nangasaki. The 30th, the king of
+<i>Crats</i> came aboard the James, appearing much delighted to
+see such a ship, demanding of the jurabassa if this were one of
+the English frigates; whence we concluded the Dutch had reported
+we had only small ships like frigates. The 1st of August we held
+another council at the English factory, to make choice of two
+men, an Englishman and a Hollander, to carry a present to the
+emperor. As I could not be spared so long from the James, nor
+Captain Adams from his fleet, we made choice of Mr Charles
+Cleavengar, commander of the Palsgrave, and Mr Joseph Cockram,
+Cape merchant of the fleet, to go on the part of the English, and
+Jasques le Febre of the Harlaem, and Mathias de Brooke, were
+chosen on the part of the Dutch.</p>
+
+<p>On the 6th the Palsgrave arrived in Coetch roads. The Bull
+arrived there on the 7th, having cut away all her masts by the
+board, as they said to save the ship and goods. This day Captain
+Adams and I paid a visit to the king of Firando, carrying a small
+present, which was well received, and we were courteously
+entertained. On the 9th the king invited the English and Dutch to
+dine with him, shewing respect to our nation by placing us on his
+right hand, while the Dutch sat on his left, and the first dish
+of every course was offered to us.</p>
+
+<p>The 4th September we had a great tuffoon from the north, which
+forced the Moon on shore, and overset the Expedition, which
+instantly went down. The Trow had likewise been overset, had not
+her master veered out the cable, and allowed her to go on shore,
+stern foremost. The 5th I sent all my men aboard the Moon to help
+her off when we all strove a long time to no purpose; but she was
+again got off on the 13th, having fortunately received no damage
+by lying so long ashore. Having every thing taken out of the
+James Royal, except some bars of lead to help in trimming her
+over, she was hove down on the 19th almost halfway to the keel.
+The 21st we brought her down so low as to see part of her keel,
+and then began to sheath her with all expedition, and in four
+days the carpenters sheathed the whole of one side, from the keel
+up to her lower bends. The 27th I sent a cooper, two
+quarter-masters, and a butcher, to Nangasaki, to kill and salt
+such meat as was provided for us.</p>
+
+<p>On the 12th October, we got the James hove down on the other
+side to the keel, and on this side we found four very dangerous
+places, where the main plank was eaten quite through by the
+worms. Into each of these we graved a piece of plank, and in one
+of them we drove a trunnel where none had been before. We also
+nailed a piece of lead on the end of the bolt, which had been
+formerly driven through the keel to stop our great leak. Our ship
+was then righted, both sides being finished up to the lower
+bends. The Moon was likewise finished on the 21st on both sides.
+The 24th we had news that Nangasaki was greatly injured by a fire
+which began in the Portuguese street, and consumed four or five
+of the richest streets in the city.</p>
+
+<p>The 7th of December we departed from Firando, and anchored the
+same evening in the bay of Coetch. The 16th, Captain Cleavengar
+and Captain Le Febre returned to Firando from the court of the
+emperor, bringing the joyful news of having succeeded in their
+business. I took my leave of them on the 17th; and the wind being
+fair, with favourable weather, I set sail from the road of
+Coetch.</p>
+
+<p>S.6. <i>Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence Home to
+England</i>.[286]</p>
+
+<p>The 18th December at noon, the islands of Mexuma bore from us
+N.W. four leagues off, our course from Pomo being S.S.W.
+twenty-five leagues. At noon on the 19th, our latitude was
+31&deg; 32'N. the isles of Mexuma bearing N.E. by N. nine leagues
+off. The 12th January, 1621, we stood in for the coast of
+Sumatra, and anchored at midnight in the river of Palembangan in
+twelve fathoms. We weighed again in the morning of the 13th,
+steering along the Sumatra shore through the straits of Banka;
+and past midnight of the 14th we got to anchor near Pulo Paniang.
+The 16th, seeing four ships in Bantam roads, we weighed and stood
+a little way within Pulo Paniang, when the Pepper-corn's boat
+came to us with the master, Mr Morton, who told me there were two
+Dutch ships in the road and one French ship, the pangran having
+consented to grant trade, and that it had been agreed to share
+the pepper in thirds among them. I also learnt from him, that
+most part of our loading was already prepared for us at Jacatra.
+I set sail, therefore, in the morning of the 17th, and arrived
+that evening near Antilaky; and in the evening of the 18th we
+arrived in the bay of Jacatra, [now Batavia bay,] where we found
+the Charles, the Gift, and the Clove, as also two Dutch ships,
+the Leyden and the Sun. The Globe and the Bee were at Hector
+island.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 286: In the former subdivision of this
+voyage a sufficient sample has been given of dry nautical detail
+of courses, bearings, winds, and soundings, and it does not seem
+necessary to insert the minute uninteresting detail of the return
+voyage to Bantam, which was along the coast of China, Cochinchina
+and Camboja, nearly retracing the former
+course.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I here found the master of the Unicorn with several of his
+ship's company, having come over in a junk, after losing his ship
+on the coast of China.[287] The James here discharged her lading,
+and was ready to reload for England, there being here at this
+time, in the Charles, Clove, and Gift, about 600 tons of pepper
+and other goods, and the Bear daily expected from Jambee with 200
+more, so that we had good hope of soon making up our loading with
+pepper, benzoin, cloves, and silk. Having taken in our whole
+loading of pepper, except fifty-five pekuls, and a few sapetas of
+silk and some cloves, I departed in the morning of the 26th
+February from the road of Jacatra, and set sail for England.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 287: Purchas, II. 1700, informs us, that
+the Unicorn being wrecked on the coast of China, the company
+saved themselves and part of their goods on shore. At first the
+rude Chinese would have assaulted and rifled them; but they stood
+on their defence, till a magistrate came and rescued them from
+the hands of the vulgar, after which they had kind usage and just
+dealing. They were allowed to purchase two vessels, with all
+necessary provisions, for their departure, and in these, part of
+the company went to Japan, and the other to
+Malacca.--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the afternoon of the 20th May, we arrived in the road of
+Saldanha, [Table-bay,] at the Cape of Good Hope. We here found
+the Ann Royal and the Fortune, two ships belonging to the
+honourable Company, and three Dutch ships, the Gowda, Black Bear,
+and the Herring, all bound for Bantam and Jacatra. We trimmed our
+ship on the 21st, and on the 22d we sent some water-casks on
+shore, and set up a tent for our sick men and coopers, landing
+twenty-five men as a guard for their protection. This night I
+sent out sixty men, along with sixty Dutchmen, in quest of
+cattle, but they returned without procuring any.</p>
+
+<p>We left Saldanha bay in the morning of the 6th June, with the
+wind at S.S.E. The 21st, at six in the morning, we got sight of
+St Helena, and about ten in the forenoon of the 22d, we anchored
+in Chappel Bay, half a mile from the shore, in twenty-six
+fathoms. The 25th, we changed to the valley leading to the
+lemon-trees, being the best in all the island for refreshments.
+Having remained seven days at this island, where we filled our
+water-casks, and got at least fifty goats and hogs, and above
+4000 lemons, we weighed anchor on the 29th, at nine a.m. The 16th
+of August we saw the high land of Pico, E.N.E. about 15 leagues
+off. The 15th September we got sight of the land's end of
+England; and on Tuesday the 18th of that month we arrived in the
+Downs, having been absent on this voyage, four years, seven
+months, and fourteen days.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XI.</p>
+
+<p>VOYAGE OF THE ANN ROYAL, FROM SURAT TO MOKHA, IN
+1618.[288]</p>
+
+<p>The Ann Royal belonged to the fleet commanded by Martin Pring,
+of which an ample relation has been given in the foregoing
+section. The present section gives an account of a subordinate
+voyage, arising out of the former, and intended for settling a
+trade in the Red Sea. The Ann Royal was commanded by Captain
+Andrew Shilling, and this narrative is said by Purchas, to have
+been extracted from the journal of Edward Heynes, who appears to
+have been second merchant in the Ann.--E.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 288: Purch. Pilgr. I. 622.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>Sir Thomas Roe, lord ambassador from his majesty to the Great
+Mogul, having given certain articles of instruction to Captain
+Andrew Shilling, commander of the Ann Royal, and Joseph Salbank,
+Edward Heynes, and Richard Barber, merchants in that ship, for
+establishing and conducting trade at Dabul or other places in the
+Red Sea, as they might see convenient, it was thought meet by
+Captain Martin Pring the general, Thomas Kerridge, and Thomas
+Rastell, on the 12th March, in a consultation on board the James
+Royal, that we should sail direct for the Red Sea, as the season
+was already too far gone for going to Dabul.</p>
+
+<p>Sailing therefore from the road of Swally, we got sight of
+Aden on the 10th of April. The 13th, about seven in the morning,
+we passed the Bab, or straits of Bab-al-Mandub, so named from an
+island at the entrance, or mouth, of the Red Sea, and forming one
+side of the straits. About five in the evening we came in sight
+of Mokha; and as night was coming on, we cast anchor. Shortly
+after, a canoe came on board, sent by the governor to enquire who
+we were, and what were our intentions; and having given them an
+answer, they departed, having first begged a few biscuits. Next
+morning we weighed, and came again to anchor a league and half
+from the shore, when we saluted the town with nine guns. The
+water-bailey, or shahbander, brought off, as a present from the
+governor, a young bullock, two goats, with mangoes, limes,
+cucumbers, and water-melons. He welcomed us in the name of the
+governor, and desired us to send some persons on shore to inform
+the governor of the purpose of our arrival. About three in the
+afternoon, there came aboard a Jew born in Lisbon, together with
+an old renegado Venetian, who was in great favour with the
+governor, and in his name assured us of meeting with good usage
+to our content.</p>
+
+<p>The 15th, Ali Asgee, the chief scrivano, sent a present of
+goats and fruits, with a message of welcome, by two old men of
+good condition, who were sent by the governor to remain aboard in
+pledge for such of us as were to go on shore, with many
+protestations of good usage. Accordingly, Mr Salbank and I went
+ashore, accompanied by two linguists and an attendant, carrying
+as a present for the governor, six yards of stammel broad cloth,
+six yards of green, a fowling-piece and a looking-glass. Above a
+thousand people were on the shore expecting our arrival, and
+several officers were in waiting to conduct us to the governor.
+His house was large and handsome, built of brick and stone,
+having a fair gate of entrance with a porter's lodge, and several
+servants in waiting. From the gate, we went into a great court,
+whence a winding stair of thirty steps led to a square terrace,
+from which we were conducted into a large room, at one end of
+which was a great bow-window looking towards the sea. The
+governor sat in this window, and there were others on the sides
+of the room, which looked to the wharf or landing-place. The
+floor of this room was all covered with fine mats, and towards
+where the governor sat, with fine Turkey carpets and Persian
+felts. Where he sat, there lay a party-coloured sattin quilt,
+with several rich cushions of damask and others of velvet. He was
+dressed in a violet-coloured vest of sattin, under which were
+garments of fine India muslin or calico, having on his head a
+sattin cap, wreathed round by a white sash. He was attended by
+the chief scrivano, the principal officers of the customs, some
+Turks of importance, many Indian merchants, and about an hundred
+servants. He seemed about fifty years of age, and his name was
+Mahomet Aga.</p>
+
+<p>On our approach, and doing reverence, he bowed to us, and
+desired us to sit down, demanding who we were, and what was our
+business. We answered that we were Englishmen and merchants from
+London, who, by command of the ambassador of the king of England
+to the Great Mogul, with whom we had a league of peace and amity,
+had come to this place to treat for liberty of trade. That we
+were in friendship with the Grand Signior, and had free trade at
+Constantinople, Aleppo, and other places in the Turkish
+dominions, and hoped to enjoy the same here; for which purpose we
+were come to desire his and the pacha's phirmauns, giving us such
+privileges as we already had in other parts of the dominions of
+the Grand Signior, both for the present time and in future, as we
+meant to visit his port yearly with plenty of English and Indian
+commodities. We said likewise that we were commanded to say by
+the lord ambassador, that hearing there were sundry pirates,
+English, Dutch, French, Portuguese, Malabars and others, who
+infested the trade of this port, and principally that carried on
+by the Guzerats, who were our friends, we had his orders to free
+the seas of all such incumbrances, protecting all honest merchant
+ships and junks from injury. These, we said, were the true causes
+of our coming here.</p>
+
+<p>The governor then rose up and bid us welcome, applauding our
+declared purposes, but asked why we were so fearful as not to
+come on shore without pledges. We answered, that about six years
+before, some of our countrymen being here, were enticed on shore
+by fair promises of good usage, who were betrayed and imprisoned
+by the then governor, and several of them murdered. For these
+reasons, we were under the necessity of being careful of our
+safety. We said moreover, that he would shortly be certified we
+were exactly what we professed, by means of two junks of Guzerat,
+one of which had not come this year, but for the pass and promise
+of the ambassador that they were to be protected in the voyage
+home by our ship, against the enterprizes of any pirates who
+might be in these seas, as one had been last year by some of our
+ships, which came opportunely to their rescue, and conducted her
+safely to their port, and had sent the chief commanders to
+England, to be tried and punished for their wrongs against the
+friends of our sovereign.</p>
+
+<p>The governor acknowledged the friendly conduct of our nation
+in that affair, promising that we should live as safely on shore,
+and conduct our business with as much freedom and security, as in
+our own country, for which we should have his phirmauns, which he
+would procure to be confirmed by the pacha to our entire
+contentment. He said likewise that the former governor was a bad
+man, long since deposed, and now living at Constantinople in
+disgrace; and swore by his beard, and by Mahomet, that not a hair
+of our heads should be diminished, nor any wrong offered to us,
+as he should make proclamation of our liberties, that no one
+might pretend ignorance and do us harm or discourtesy. He desired
+us, therefore, to look out for a house for ourselves and our
+goods, commanding two of his chiauses to attend upon us, and
+recommended us to lodge with the Jew merchant till we could fit
+ourselves better, desiring him to assist us in all things.</p>
+
+<p>After giving many thanks for his kindness, and delivering the
+present as from our captain, we went, by the advice of the Jew,
+to visit the scrivano, who is likewise chief customer or
+shahbander; and as he was not at home, his servant received and
+entertained us with much civility. They conducted us into an
+handsome room, not much inferior in building and furniture to
+that of the governor, where we had left their master, who soon
+came home and welcomed us with much politeness, assuring us that
+all the governor had promised should be faithfully performed, as
+he himself should see all executed, and had also power to see us
+righted. We were informed that this man's power was as great in
+Mokha as that of the governor, who was directed by him in all
+matters of importance. This officer seemed a hearty old man.
+After making us drink coffee and sherbet, we took our leaves, and
+remained all night with the Jew.</p>
+
+<p>Next morning we spent an hour in viewing the town, and
+observing the countenances of the people towards us, whom we
+found gentle and courteous, especially the Banians and Guzerats,
+many of whom reside here as merchants, shopkeepers, and
+mechanics, having neatly-built shops and warehouses. Their market
+or bazar seemed well furnished with all manner of necessaries,
+among which were plenty of fruits, which are brought daily from
+the country. Most of the town is built of brick and stone, neatly
+plastered over with Paris plaster, some of the houses being two
+stories high, and all flat-roofed, with terraces on the top, on
+which in summer they construct lodges of canes and mats, in which
+they sleep and spend the first quarter of the day, having at that
+time a fresh breeze from the sea. All the rest of the day at that
+season is so hot that they can hardly endure even a shirt. Mokha
+lies quite level along the sea-shore, being about two miles from
+north to south, and contains many good-looking houses, with three
+principal mosques. The streets are kept clean, every person
+having to sweep and water before his door every morning and
+evening, so that they resemble sandy alleys for bowling, more
+than streets. No filth is allowed to be thrown into the streets,
+but must all be carried to an appointed place, where it is
+scoured out by the sea. In fine, I have never seen a sweeter,
+cleaner, or better ordered town any where.</p>
+
+<p>The wharf is situated between the governor's house and that of
+the scrivano, and is about twelve score square.[289] Near this,
+and adjoining the governor's house, there is a platform or fort,
+built of hewn stones, having battlements towards the sea, being
+about forty paces square, in which there are thirteen or fourteen
+pieces of ordnance of little value. Over against the
+landing-place two fair brass cannons are planted, above five feet
+long. At the other end, is the Alfandica, where there is a brass
+gun six feet long, carrying a large ball. Besides these defences,
+there is a stone house at the north end of the town, built like a
+sconce or redoubt, with a few pieces of ordnance; but they trust
+little in their ordnance, relying mostly on their soldiers, of
+whom they have always 200 in the town, and about 300 more in the
+country, within a day or two days march, who are all constantly
+in readiness for service.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 289: This is obscure, as it is not said
+whether it be 240 feet, yards, or paces.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The son of Cojah Nassan, the principal India merchant of the
+town, whom we waited upon at his house, promised us all kindness,
+and regaled us with tobacco and coffee, as is usual among these
+people. We went afterwards to wait upon the governor before we
+returned on board. He rose up at our entry to meet us, causing us
+to sit down by him, and repeated all the fair promises of free
+trade he had given the day before, declaring that he would deny
+us nothing that was reasonable. He then told us there was another
+governor shortly to succeed him, who was as his brother, and
+honester even than himself, who would faithfully perform every
+thing he had promised. At our request, the governor ordered the
+water-bailiff to furnish us at all times with boats, either for
+our conveyance, or to carry water to the ship. From the governor,
+we again went to visit the scrivano, who received us with much
+civility, promising to come aboard to visit our ship, and
+compliment our captain. After treating us with coffee, we took
+leave, and returned to the ship, when the pledges were dismissed,
+acknowledging the good treatment they had received, and were
+saluted on going ashore with five guns.</p>
+
+<p>On the 17th, the scrivano, with our two pledges, our Jew
+friend, and twenty other persons, came aboard, bringing a
+bullock, with bread, quinces, and other fruits, a great round
+cake or pasty, like puff-paste, in which were several fowls and
+chickens, well seasoned and baked, and most excellent eating. We
+also, with a large quince pye, and many crabs, together with sack
+and cordials, added our best welcome. The scrivano was so well
+pleased with his reception, that he insisted upon becoming the
+sworn brother of our captain, which was accordingly celebrated
+with a cup of sack; and, after much mirth, and having taken a
+view of our ship, he departed highly gratified.</p>
+
+<p>We were well supplied with water by several poor people of
+Mokha, who brought it off to the ship at a reasonable rate. Also,
+with the concurrence of the governor and scrivano, we made every
+junk that arrived anchor under our guns, and to ride in that
+situation till they discharged their cargo; which indeed the
+governor wished us to do, because some junks passed by that port
+to trade at others, to the injury of Mokha At six in the evening
+of the 21st of April, we had a violent storm of wind off the
+land, accompanied by much thunder and lightning, but no rain,
+which continued for half an hour, all the rest of the night being
+extremely hot. Although we rode above a league from the shore,
+this tempest brought great quantities of dust, and even sand on
+board. The 25th, we had a message from the scrivano, saying that
+the governor and he had received letters from the pacha at Sinan,
+commanding them to entertain us with all manner of kindness, and
+to give us free trade, with liberty to reside among them in all
+quietness and security.</p>
+
+<p>On the 27th the new governor arrived, when the ordnance of the
+town, and of our ship and the several junks in the road, all
+fired to welcome his arrival. He sent the former pledges on board
+to return thanks for our salute, accompanied by a present of
+plantains, limes, mangoes, melons, and bread, with one bullock,
+promising, in the name of the pacha, as free trade as our nation
+had in Constantinople. The pledges remained all night aboard, and
+went ashore with us next day, when we found the new and the old
+governors sitting together at the end of a large room, much in
+the same way as we had found the old one at our first arrival.
+The new governor was named Regib Aga, and was accompanied by
+several principal Turks, and by all the principal merchants from
+Surat, Diu, Dabul, Scindy, Calicut, and Cananore. On our
+approach, he and the other Turks only moved their bodies, but all
+the merchants rose up to salute us. He made us sit down beside
+him, and told us that the pacha had commanded him to give us
+satisfaction in all things; and that he knew besides, we were of
+a nation in friendship with the Grand Signior, and had free trade
+in Constantinople, Aleppo, and other parts of the Turkish empire,
+being a nation of a friendly and honest disposition, and we
+should therefore always find him disposed to give us free trade,
+and every other courtesy In reply, we told him we proposed, at
+our next coming to Mokha, if our reasonable requests of a free
+trade were granted, to settle a permanent factory at this place,
+and to come yearly to the port, with plenty of English and India
+goods, and should defend the trade against pirates. We even
+distantly hinted, that it was needless to deny us a free trade,
+being in a condition to force it if refused, and to hinder all
+others from coming hither, the fear of which had already caused
+some junks to pass by Mokha to Jidda, the port of Mecca, a town
+of great trade, 150 leagues farther up the Red Sea, and to other
+places.</p>
+
+<p>The new governor replied, that we should be made as welcome as
+in any place of our own country; and swore by God, and Mahomet,
+and by his own beard, that we should live as free from all injury
+as in our own land. We asked what security he would give us
+besides his word, when he said we should have his phirmaun under
+his <i>chop</i>, or seal, and would procure us the same from the
+pacha. With this we seemed satisfied, and gave him many thanks;
+and indeed they all seemed perfectly willing to give us every
+satisfaction, yet, in my opinion, not from good-will or justice,
+but from fear, as they knew we were able to intercept their whole
+trade. After some conversation about our ambassador, who now
+resided at Constantinople, and about the Portuguese and
+Spaniards, whom Rajib said were proud and faithless nations, we
+spoke of Sir Henry Middleton, asking the cause of their
+treacherous conduct to him and his people. He answered, that the
+then Vizier was a bloody, cruel, and ill-minded man, and made
+worse by the instigation of the Turks and Arabs of Mokha, who
+were enraged by the uncivil behaviour of our people, who made
+water at the gates of their mosques, forced their way into the
+houses after the citizens wives, and being daily drunk in the
+streets, would fight and quarrel with the people,[290] things
+hateful in their eyes. These were only in part the cause, for the
+covetousness of the governor, hoping to have got their ship and
+goods, was the main cause of that scandalous conduct, for which
+he was soon afterwards sent to Constantinople to answer for his
+crimes.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 290: Let English Christians read, blush,
+and amend--<i>Purch.</i>]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We dined that day with the scrivano, and hired a house of
+Hassan Aga, one of our pledges, at seventy dollars the monsoon,
+or yearly rent, it being all the same. The scrivano insisted to
+swear himself our friend on his Koran, yet denied the present
+governor to be the person who captured Sir Henry Middleton, which
+we afterwards found to be Turkish faith, or absolute falsehood.
+We now agreed to pay at the rate of three in the hundred, <i>ad
+valorem</i>, both inwards and outwards, though the scrivano swore
+that all others paid five; all money, with silver and gold in
+bullion, to pass free of duty. We remained this night with the
+scrivano to supper, and gave him a present.</p>
+
+<p>On the 29th of April we expected to have had our phirmaun
+publicly read before all the merchants, and proclaimed to the
+people; but most part of the day was spent in ceremony by the
+governor and other chiefs at the mosque, on account of the death
+of Sultan Achmet, the Grand signior, and the accession of his
+brother to the throne. They came riding past our house while we
+were sitting at a window which opened to the street, whence we
+made our obeisance to them, and they bowed in return. They were
+all in grand gala, having their horses richly caparisoned. At
+four in the afternoon we were sent for, but our linguist had got
+to a Jew house and was drunk with arrack, so we sent an apology,
+under pretence that Mr Salbank was indisposed, and promised
+attendance next day. On the 31st, the governor sent for us, and
+made our welcome known to all the merchants, causing his scrivano
+draw up a phirmaun as full as we could have wished, which he
+signed with his chop or seal in the afternoon at the house of the
+principal scrivano, entirely according to what was before agreed
+upon, by which we were to pay three per cent. for all we landed,
+excepting money, and the same for all we took on board, except
+victuals. We got afterwards a similar phirmaun from Mahomet, the
+pacha of Sinan: and Rejib Aga gave us a particular safe conduct
+for Mr Salbank and the rest.[291]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 291: Copies, or translations rather, from
+the Arabic, are given in the Pilgrims of all these three
+phirmauns, which it was not thought necessary to
+insert.--E]</blockquote>
+
+<p>It was now agreed among ourselves that Mr Salbank and I were
+to remain ashore to conduct the business of sales and purchases,
+while Mr Barber staid on board to prepare and send such goods as
+we required. The 5th of May we went to the scrivano to get leave
+to make arrack for the use of our sick men; because, since our
+linguist and several of our people had got drunk in the house of
+a Jew, we had complained, and procured an order prohibiting the
+Jews from selling them any, and the governor had even strictly
+enjoined the Jews and Turks not to sell any more arrack or wine
+in the town. At our request through the scrivano, the governor
+granted leave for a Jew, nominated for the purpose to brew arrack
+at our house, but forbid any to be made elsewhere.</p>
+
+<p>In the afternoon of the 8th, learning that the governor and
+principal men were sitting in form at the Alfandica, to receive
+the Surat captain who was then coming on shore, we went also to
+see the ceremonial of his reception. We found the governor at the
+upper end of a long room, sitting on a stone bench spread with
+carpets, having on the same bench with him various merchants and
+Turks of quality, to the number of about twenty. Opposite to him
+sat about as many in chairs, forming a lane down the room to a
+square platform raised three steps from the floor, railed in and
+matted, in which the scrivano and other officers of the customs
+sat on carpets. The governor bid us welcome, saying he had given
+orders to the chief broker to examine our goods and promote their
+sale. He then desired us to sit down, two merchants offering us
+their places, and called for coffee and tobacco to regale us.</p>
+
+<p>About half an hour after, the nokhada, or captain of the Surat
+ship, came ashore. His boat was curiously painted, having a tilt
+of red silk, with many streamers, and sails of fine white calico.
+He was rowed by twenty of his servants, all dressed in fine white
+calico, and he was accompanied by a wretched band of music,
+consisting of drums, waits, and bad trumpets, the noise from
+which was augmented by the discharge of guns from his own great
+junk and those belonging to the town. Attended by a few slaves,
+decked out in silks and coarse sattins, he entered the lone room
+where we were, when the governor rose and saluted him, and placed
+him next himself on the stone bench. Many compliments of welcome
+passed between the nokhada and the other merchants; but in the
+height of his pride he overlooked us, and we him accordingly. Yet
+we thought he might have shewn us more respect, considering that
+Captain Shilling had sent his long-boat and men to free his junk
+of 400 or 500 tons, when aground, and had entertained him with
+much civility aboard our ship.</p>
+
+<p>After some time spent in compliments, coffee was again brought
+in for all the company; after which six vests were produced, two
+of which were given to the Surat captain, and one each to his
+four principal merchants. When these were put on, and mutual
+<i>salams</i> or reverences given, they again sat down, like so
+many painted images, dressed up in coats of coarse gold and
+silver velvet. We here observed one usual custom of this town, at
+the arrival of any junk, and the landing of her nokhada or
+captain, that free liberty is given to all the mariners and
+passengers to bring ashore as much goods as each man can carry on
+his back, without payment of any duty; accordingly, at this time,
+about 300 persons belonging to this junk passed with their
+luggage to the captain's residence, unmolested.</p>
+
+<p>On the 9th, our landlord and the scrivano told us that three
+junks from Diu, and four Malabar vessels, were at Aden, whence
+they were afraid to proceed without our pass or licence.
+Accordingly we sent them a free pass, signed by our captain and
+three merchants. In this, after reciting that we had found good
+usage from the governor and merchants at Mokha, we engaged to
+give them all freedom to pass quietly, assuring them of kind
+usage, provided they were not enemies to our sovereign or his
+subjects. A more general pass was afterwards granted by us for
+the quiet and free departure of all junks and other vessels, with
+their cargoes, mariners, and passengers.</p>
+
+<p>On the 10th, the captain of the Dabul junk invited us to a
+banquet at his house, where we found the governor with about
+fifty principal persons, besides attendants, all of whom rose up
+to bid us welcome. Coffee, sherbet, and tobacco, were served
+round, with various fruits, as plums, apricots, and mangoes, and
+thinking these had been the feast, we were about to depart; but
+the governor and the Dabul captain desired us to remain, that we
+might <i>eat bread and salt with them</i>, which we did. The
+feast at last made its appearance, though late, being about sixty
+dishes of meats, baked, roasted, broiled, stewed, and boiled, but
+all mingled with rice and various kinds of sallads, in the
+fashion of India.</p>
+
+<p>Our cargo consisted mostly of bad wares, which had lain in
+India till they were nearly spoiled, and so hung long upon our
+hands; wherefore we importuned the governor to dispeed our sales,
+which he charged the broker to do with all expedition. We also
+had leave granted to come and go between the ship and the shore
+at our pleasure, without demanding leave, contrary to the usual
+custom of the port, the water bailiff being ordered to give us no
+molestation. On the 20th, it was noticed that the monsoon had
+changed. The 24th, the scrivano observed to us that our sailors,
+on coming ashore, were in the custom of selling <i>baftas</i> and
+sword-blades in the bazar. He said the governor had promised
+liberty for the goods of these poor fellows to pass free of
+custom, and therefore they might freely bring them ashore for
+sale, but must sell them at our house, and not in the public
+bazar, which was a disgrace to us and our nation.</p>
+
+<p>On the 31st, our ship was in great danger of being burnt. Some
+one happened to be smoking on the spritsail yardarm, when the
+burning tobacco fell out unobserved into a fold of the sail,
+where it burnt through two or three breadths, and was long smelt
+before it could be found. After this, smoking was strictly
+prohibited, except in the cook-room or the captain's cabin. At
+this time, for the recovery of our sick men, the exploration of
+the coast, and procuring ballast instead of lead taken out of the
+ship for sale, it was concluded to send the ship over to Assab;
+on the African coast, on which occasion Mr Baffen, the master's
+mate, was sent before to sound and discover the passage.</p>
+
+<p>On the 10th of June we had a conference with the governor,
+and, among other discourse, he told us that he was governor of
+Aden when the Ascension was there, when he imprisoned the captain
+and Mr Joseph Salbank for two days, suspecting them to be
+freebooters, and not merchants, as he alleged. He said also that
+he was governor here at Mokha when Sir Henry Middleton was
+apprehended, but laid the whole blame of that transaction on the
+then pacha, whose servant he was, and who had given orders for
+that and much more, which he called God to witness was much
+contrary to his inclination, and declared that these things were
+past, and we had now nothing to fear. By this avowal, we had a
+clear evidence how far he and the scrivano were to be trusted.
+The governor sent for us again on the 13th, saying that he had
+acquainted the pacha with our purpose of sending to him for his
+phirmaun, and that he had promised a hearty welcome and full
+contentment, whether we went personally or sent a messenger; but
+the governor advised that one of us should go up to Sinan, for
+which purpose he would provide us with horses, camels, and
+attendants, and should write in our behalf to the pacha.</p>
+
+<p>The 19th a junk arrived from Jiddah, with many passengers from
+Mecca, bringing camblets, bad coral, amber beads, and much
+silver, to invest in spices and India cotton goods. She brought
+news of a ship, laden last year from Mokha for Grand Cairo, which
+had lost her monsoon, and was forced to wait till next year, at a
+place only a little way beyond Jiddah. By this ship, the governor
+had letters informing him that the Grand Signior had sent various
+state ornaments to the pacha of Sinan, whom he had confirmed in
+his government for seven years longer, and appointing himself to
+continue governor of Mokha for the like time, of which he seemed
+not a little proud.</p>
+
+<p>As I was constantly indisposed, it was thought fit that Mr
+Salbank should go up to Sinan to wait upon the pacha with a
+present, and to carry up some goods also with him for sale at
+that place. On this occasion, the scrivano offered him his own
+mule to ride upon, which he thankfully accepted. He was furnished
+with two camels, a cook, a horsekeeper, and three servants
+belonging to the governor, all of whose wages he agreed to pay at
+certain fixed rates, and was also accompanied by a linguist named
+Alberto. Taking leave of the governor, who gave him letters for
+the pacha, he departed from Mokha about six in the evening of the
+23d June, the nights being the accustomed time of travelling.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 23d, we had a letter from our captain;
+then at Assab, informing of his safe arrival there, and the good
+health of the people, and that he had procured ballast and
+provisions to his satisfaction. On the 26th, the governor sent me
+a horse by one of his servants, inviting me to accompany him to
+his banqueting house, about half a mile out of town, there to
+spend the day in mirth along with other merchants. About half an
+hour after, the chief scrivano came to accompany me, with whom I
+went, joining the governor by the way, and rode with him to the
+place. It was a fair house, in the middle of a grove of date
+trees, beside a large tank or pond, having several rooms
+handsomely fitted; up for sitting. After a little while, the
+governor and several others went into the tank to bathe, where
+they sported themselves for half an hour. Coffee was then handed
+round to the company, after which grapes, peaches, and both musk
+and water; melons, were brought in, together with blanched
+almonds and great quantities of raisins, as there were between
+fifty and sixty guests, besides, attendants; and always between
+whiles coffee, sherbet, and tobacco were handed round. Thus, and
+with indifferent music, we spent the forenoon. After prayers, the
+governor, went again into the tank, where he spent an hour
+sporting with his company. In the sequel, the time was spent in
+cards and chess, and in looking at various; jiggling tricks, till
+four in the evening. At this time above an hundred dishes were
+served up, all of good meat, but; cold, and ill dressed, each
+dish being sufficient to have satisfied four hungry men. He
+treated me with much kindness, and was earnest to have me go with
+him into the tank, but I excused myself; on account of my late
+indisposition. He then said, if at any time I was inclined to
+bathe, I might come to this place when I pleased, and he would
+give orders to the keeper to admit me and use me well.</p>
+
+<p>The 12th July, the Surat captain made a fine display of many
+artificial fire-works before the governor, it being then new
+moon. The governor sent for me to see them, and placed me in a
+chair beside himself, telling me he had letters that day from
+Sinan, informing him that the Pacha had granted a phirmaun for us
+before the arrival of Mr Salbank, but hearing of his coming, had
+delayed sending it, and had since granted another, according to
+his instructions, and had delivered it to Mr Salbank with his own
+hand.</p>
+
+<p>On the 13th there passed by the roads a junk of four or five
+hundred tons from Jiddah, bound for <i>Kitchine</i>, a day's sail
+within the entrance of the Red Sea, which I suppose is not far
+from Cape Guardafui, on the coast of Africa.[292] She is said to
+contain great sums in gold and silver, with much valuable
+merchandize. This ship comes yearly to Mokha at the beginning of
+the western monsoon, bringing myrrh, and boxes for <i>coho</i>
+seeds, [coffee] and goes from hence to Jiddah or <i>Aliambo</i>,
+[Al Yambo] where she sells her coffee and the India goods
+procured at Kitchine; which last are brought thither by
+Portuguese barks from Diu and other places. Her outward lading
+consists of indigo, all manner of India cotton goods, gum-lac;
+and myrrh.[293] She is freighted by the Portuguese, and the
+governor of Mokha wished much we had met with her, which we had
+probably done, had not our ship been absent, which returned into
+the road of Mokha on the 21st. I went aboard, and was told that
+the king of Assab and his brother had been aboard, and were
+kindly entertained, in return for which he promised to supply
+them with abundance of beeves and goats; but that same evening,
+in consequence of a signal of fire, he and all his people fled
+into the mountains, pretending they were threatened by an attack
+from their enemies, and never even gave thanks for their
+entertainment.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 292: The only place resembling this name is
+Kissem, on the oceanic coast of Yemen, or Arabia Felix, nearly
+due N. from Cape Guardafui.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 293: This must refer to her homeward
+lading, called outward in the text in respect to
+India.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Before day of the 27th July, Mr Salbank returned from Sinan in
+perfect health, and much satisfied with his phirmauns. He gave me
+an account of his whole journey, having been respectfully treated
+every where; always before entering any town, being met both by
+horse and foot to conduct him to the different governors, by whom
+he was kindly received. All his provisions were provided by their
+officers, but at his own expence; and the servant of the governor
+of Mokha caused him every where to be well used. He was met a
+mile from Sinan by forty or fifty Turks, well mounted, sent by
+the Pacha to escort him to a well-furnished house prepared for
+his reception. He was there kindly received and entertained by
+the xeriffe and the pacha's chief treasurer, who were both
+deputed to give him welcome in the name of the pacha. Two days
+afterwards, he had audience of the pacha, from whom he received
+courteous entertainment, receiving two phirmauns of the same
+tenor, one of which was much more ornamentally written than the
+other, and intended for being shown to the Grand Signior, if
+necessary.</p>
+
+<p>According to his report, the city of Sinan and its
+neighbourhood will give vent yearly for a good quantity of
+English cloth, as the weather there is cold for three quarters of
+the year; and even while he was there, though the height of
+summer, a person might well endure a furred gown. Besides, there
+is a court at that place to which belongs <i>forty</i> or
+<i>fifty</i> thousand gallant Turks,[294] most of whom wore
+garments of high-priced Venetian cloth. Not far from thence there
+is a leskar, or camp, of 30,000 soldiers,[295] continually in the
+field against an Arab king in the adjoining mountains, not yet
+conquered; all of which soldiers are said to wear coats of
+quilted India chintzes, which are dear, and of little service to
+defend them from the cold of that region, which is there
+excessive. To this I may add the city or Teyes, near which there
+is a <i>leskar</i> of thirty or forty thousand soldiers,
+commanded by a German renegado under the pacha of Sinan. That
+place, though only about five days journey from Mokha, is very
+cold, and much cloth is worn by the people about that place.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 294: This is probably a vast exaggeration,
+though in words at length in the Pilgrims; and we ought more
+likely to read <i>four</i> or <i>five</i> thousand
+Turks.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 295: A similar reduction to 3000 is
+probably needful for this army.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 2d of August the governor sent a rich vest to our
+captain by the chief shabander, attended by drums and trumpets,
+his boat being decked out with flags and streamers. This was
+delivered with great ceremony, and reverently received. The Dabul
+nokhada, Melic Marvet, and Roswan, the nokhada of the Chaul ship,
+sent us letters of recommendation to their kings, on the 11th
+August, according to our desire, certifying the friendly usage
+they had experienced from us at Mokha, and our kind offer to
+protect them on the homeward voyage, from pirates, and entreating
+therefore for us freedom of trade and friendly usage in their
+dominions. The 14th, as we had formerly done to others, we gave
+our passes to two Malabar captains, Amet ben Mahomet of Cananore,
+under Sultan Ala Rajah, and Aba Beker of Calicut, under the
+Zamorin.</p>
+
+<p>This day there came a galley into the road from Cairo, having
+many Turks and Jews as passengers, bringing great store of
+dollars, chekins, coral, damask, sattin, camblet, opium, velvets,
+and taffetas. She had come down the whole length of the Red Sea
+in thirty days. I had a conference with the Jews, one of whom I
+had formerly known in Barbary. They reported that the brother of
+the former Grand Signior, on being made emperor, had imprisoned
+his two nephews, and put to death several of the grandees, and
+had otherwise given great offence to the great men at
+Constantinople, whereupon he was deposed and imprisoned, and his
+eldest nephew made emperor in his stead. They said likewise that
+an army of 200,000 men was sent against the Persians, for the
+conquest of Gurgistan, adding various other particulars, some of
+which turned out true, and others false, like merchants news in
+general. Some Turks and Jews desired to have passage for
+themselves and goods in our ship to Surat; and it is likely, when
+they know us better, much profit may be made in this way, as
+their junks are usually pestered with rude people.</p>
+
+<p>Having sold and bartered our goods as well as we could have
+expected, considering our cargo, and dispatched all our business,
+we visited the governor, and desired to have his testimonials to
+the lord ambassador, which he gave us. We took leave of him on
+the 19th of August, and of the scrivano and other chief men of
+the town, from whom we received protestations of continued
+kindness on all future occasions. We went aboard that same day,
+proposing to sail the next day for India, taking the Surat junk
+under our convoy, according to our instructions.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XII.</p>
+
+<p>JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE TO SURAT AND JASQUES, IN 1620.[296]</p>
+
+<p>"According to the title of this journal in the Pilgrims, the
+fleet which sailed on this voyage consisted of the London, of 800
+tons, William Baffin master, on board of which was Captain Andrew
+Shilling, chief in command, or general; the Hart, of 500 tons,
+Richard Blithe master; the Roebuck, of 300 tons, Richard Swan
+master; and the Eagle, of 280 tons, Christopher Brown master. The
+account of the voyage in Purchas is said to consist of extracts
+from the journal written by Richard Swan, the master or captain
+of the Roebuck."--E.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 296: Purch. Pilgr. 1. 723.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.1. <i>Voyage from England to Surat.</i></p>
+
+<p>We sailed from Tilbury-hope on the 26th of February, 1620, and
+anchored in Saldanha road [Table Bay, at the Cape of Good Hope]
+on 24th of June, where we found the Lion homewards-bound, and
+nine Dutch ships bound for Bantam, commanded by a gentleman named
+Nicolas van Baccum, who Was said to have studied seven years at
+Oxford. Next morning the Lion and the Dutch fleet departed, each
+their several way; and in the evening arrived the Schidam
+belonging to Deft, outward-bound, which being suspected by both
+admirals, the master was sent for, and producing Us commission,
+gave satisfaction. On the 3d of July we made a solemn
+proclamation of the right and title of his majesty King James to
+Saldania, and on the 7th King James's mount was erected.[297]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 297: It thus appears that the first
+fortified station at the Cape of Good Hope was erected by the
+English, to whom that colony now belongs. It would surely be a
+better appellation for this important colony, which may be called
+the key of India, to restore its old name-of <i>Saldania</i>,
+than to continue its present awkward denomination, The Colony of
+the Cape of Good Hope.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We sailed from the Cape of Good Hope on the 25th of July, and
+26th of October we put into Dabul roads, where we remained till
+the 2d of November to refresh our men, and to provide the two
+ships bound for Persia. The 6th November, the Hart and Eagle took
+leave of us and the 9th we anchored in Swally roads, where we
+found the Wappen van Zeland, of 1000 tons, which at our arrival
+took in her colours, and saluted the London with three guns, and
+the Roebuck with two. I was sent on shore, and brought off Mr
+Thomas Kerridge, the president of the factory at Surat, with Mr
+James, and Mr Hopkinson. Next day, in a consultation, it was
+determined to dispatch us speedily after the Hart and Eagle, as
+we had intelligence that four Portuguese galleons were waiting at
+Ormus, or in Jasques roads, to intercept them.</p>
+
+<p>S.2. <i>Voyage from Surat towards Jasques</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The 19th November, having dispatched our business at Swally
+with all expedition, we set sail towards Jasques. The 21st we
+chased a ship, which surrendered without resistance, being the
+Nostra Sennora de Merces, of 200 tons, bound from Muscat for
+Chaul, having on board forty-two Arabian horses, her principal
+loading, and for which trade she was built. The residue of her
+cargo consisted of dates and raisins. The name of her captain was
+Francisco de Mirando.</p>
+
+<p>The 5th December, when in latitude 24&deg; 55' N. we met the
+Hart and Eagle coming from Jasques for Surat, because not of
+sufficient strength to encounter the Portuguese force which was
+waiting for them with the intention of ruining our Persian trade.
+Thus happily rejoined to our former consorts, we shaped our
+course for Jasques to accomplish our purpose. The 8th, at the
+earnest desire of the Portuguese and Moors taken in the prize, we
+set them on shore, except some Moor seamen whom we detained in
+our service, and the Portuguese pilot, who entreated to stay, as
+he feared some hard usage from his own people. On the 12th,
+certain volunteers who had engaged to set fire to our prize, and
+run her aboard the Portuguese admiral, were put on board of her,
+and she was fitted as a fire-ship. The 15th we had sight of the
+east point of Jasques roads, having upon it a tomb or old square
+flat-roofed house, which bore W.N.W. by compass, twelve miles
+off. From Diu head to this point, I make the longitude, by the
+ordinary plain chart, 9&deg; 55' 36" W. but by Mercator's
+projection, 10&deg; 51'. From where we were, we could see the
+Portuguese men of war sent from Lisbon to oppose our trade with
+Persia, consisting of two Portuguese galleons, one of which was
+larger than the London, and two Dutch ships, one as large as the
+Hart, while the other was less than the Eagle. Their general was
+Don Ruy Frere de Andrado; the vice-admiral, Joam Boralio; and the
+two Dutch ships were commanded by Antonio Musquet and Baltazar de
+Chaves.[298]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 298: According to a special account of this
+and the succeeding sea-fight, appended to the present relation in
+Purchas, the Portuguese fleet on the present occasion, besides
+the four galleons, consisted of two gallions and ten frigates or
+armed barks, none of which are here mentioned except the four
+galleons.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.3. <i>Account of the first Fight with the
+Portuguese</i>.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 16th December, our admiral and all the
+masters of our squadron went on board the prize, carrying two
+barrels of powder, some tar, and other combustible materials, to
+fit her up as a fire-ship, intending to lay her on board the
+Portuguese admiral athwart his hawse, that both might burn
+together. After she was fitted, we bore up for the Portuguese
+squadron, but it fell calm, and the current set us so near them,
+that they reached us with their shot. We kept under sail all
+night, and in the morning of the 17th, being to leeward of them
+in consequence of the land breeze, they weighed and made toward
+us, when we waited their approach, although they preserved the
+advantage of the weather-gage. The fight began about nine in the
+morning, and continued without intermission for nine hours. In
+the afternoon, a fine gentle sea-breeze sprung up from the
+westwards, which gave us the weather-gage; and the Portuguese
+admiral anchored, either of necessity to repair some defect about
+his rudder, or of policy to gain some expected advantage. His
+vice-admiral and the large Dutch ship anchored to the eastwards,
+and the lesser Dutch ship to leeward of them all, stopping his
+leaks. We were now in great hopes of putting our fire-ship to a
+good purpose; but being too soon fired and forsaken by those who
+had her in charge, she drove clear of them all, to their joy and
+our disgrace. Seeing them remain at anchor, and keeping to
+windward of them, we turned to and again close a-head of them as
+they rode at anchor, raking them as we passed, through and
+through, fore and aft, especially the admiral, receiving only in
+return their prow and bow-chases. By these, as I passed to the
+north, two unfortunate shots cut asunder the weather leech ropes
+of the Roebuck's foresail and fore-topsail, in the middle depth
+of both sails; owing to which we could not bring her into stays,
+and were forced, for repairing these sails, to bear down to
+leeward, between the enemy and the shore; in which course, the
+three great ships plied their whole broadsides against us, but
+with less hurt than I could have imagined, God be praised. Having
+compassed the three large ships, I luffed up to rejoin our
+squadron, which still held the advantage of the wind, and plied
+their great guns on the Portuguese like so many muskets. When I
+had got to windward of the smaller Dutch ship, which stood off as
+I did till he had our fire-ship directly between him and me, he
+turned tail, and steered right before the wind along shore to the
+eastwards, with all the sail he could carry. The other three now
+set sail to his rescue, and were now so tame, that as the Hart
+passed along their broadsides, she received only a few shots
+great and small from any of them, and from some none at all. The
+night now coming on, and our people being all wearied by the long
+continuance of the fight, we all desisted from any farther chase,
+and came to anchor in our usual road.</p>
+
+<p>In this fight, the London and Hart had very little harm in
+their hulls and tackling, and less, or rather none, in their men.
+The main-mast of the Eagle was hurt in five places, four of which
+were quite through, and one of her men lost his right arm. In the
+Roebuck, I had one man slain by a cannon ball striking his head.
+A piece of his skull and some splinters of the ball wounded one
+of my mates in the forehead, and destroyed his left eye; and two
+others of my men lost the use of their right hands. God be
+praised for our good fortune; for I never heard of so small loss
+in so long a fight as we now sustained. I cannot truly state the
+loss of the enemy: but, by the report of our merchants, their
+vice-admiral and another captain were slain, and thirty or forty
+men in the admiral's ship alone, the rest as yet unknown. As to
+their Moors, they do not count them among the num her of their
+men.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 18th, the day after the action, we could
+see the Portuguese at anchor ten miles to the east of us, having
+the wind fair to have come down, but they did not. We then held a
+consultation, whether it were better for us to take the first of
+the sea breeze, which usually begins about noon, to stand towards
+them and try it out for the mastery, before they could receive
+supplies from Ormus, Muskat, or Goa, or else to make sail for
+Jasques roads, on purpose to land our goods and money, in case of
+the worst, these being the prize they sought to obtain and we to
+defend. Accordingly, the London got that night into Jasques road,
+but the rest could not get in before the 20th, by reason of
+contrary winds. On the 21st and 22d most of our goods were
+landed.</p>
+
+<p>S.4. <i>Second Sea Fight with the Portuguese</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On the 22d, seeing the Portuguese galleons open the road of
+Jasques, and supposing they might intend to come in with the sea
+breeze, we set sail and stood off for them. At first, they made a
+shew of giving us battle, but soon afterwards made off upon a
+tack; and till the 28th, they were either to windward, or so
+favourably placed at anchor, that we could not attempt to attack
+them without manifest disadvantage. During this time, they were
+joined by two or three frigates, or barks, from Ormus, bringing
+them a supply of men and ammunition. We made one attempt on
+Christmas day, but were forced back by a sudden flaw of wind; on
+which occasion, some blacks aboard of us, said the Portuguese had
+brought a witch from Ormus, to supply them with favourable
+winds.</p>
+
+<p>On Innocents day, 28th December, perceiving the drift of our
+Portuguese <i>Fabius cunclator</i>, to protract and avoid
+fighting, that by delays and the advantage of his frigates, he
+might hinder us from prosecuting your business in Persia, we
+determined to attempt closing with him. About one o'clock there
+sprung up a favourable east wind for our purpose, on which we
+immediately weighed and put every thing in order for battle. The
+London and Hart came to anchor within a cable's length and half
+of their broadsides, and so endured the main brunt of this second
+fight; for, no sooner were they at anchor, but it fell calm and
+so continued all day, insomuch that the Roebuck and Eagle, which
+had steered nearer to the shore, with the intention of coming to
+anchor, one on the bow of their admiral, and the other on the bow
+of their vice-admiral, got astern, and could not with all our
+diligence be of any service for a full half hour after the action
+began. At length we got within point-blank shot of them, and then
+were forced either to anchor or drive farther off with the
+current, as there was not a breath of wind.</p>
+
+<p>We now brought our broadsides to bear, and our whole squadron
+plied their ordnance upon them so fast, that had the knowledge of
+our men equalled their resolution, not one of them had escaped
+from us. Not willing to endure such hot entertainment, they cut
+their cables about three o'clock, and drove from us with the tide
+to the westwards, till out of our reach. Then came their
+frigates, which the day before had made a bravado along shore
+with drums, trumpets, flags, and streamers, and, now employed in
+a fitter task, towed them away all mangled and torn. Their
+admiral, in the very hottest of the fight, was under the necesity
+of giving his ship a heel to stop his leaks, his main-top-mast
+and the head of his main-mast having fallen overboard. The great
+Dutch ship had both his top-masts and part of his boltsprit shot
+away, and the smaller lost all his shrouds and top-masts. Their
+vice-admiral escaped best this day, having commonly one or other
+of their own ships between him and us.</p>
+
+<p>We kept them company all night, in hope of being able next
+morning to give them their passports; but having taken a survey
+of our shot, which we found scanty, and considering the
+importance of the voyage we still had to perform, we thought it
+best to give over the chase and return to Jasques; leaving them
+glad of our absence, their two great ships towing the two
+smaller. We have had no account of their loss in this action. All
+your worships ships remain serviceable, God be praised, and only
+five men slain outright in these two long and severe engagements.
+Our worthy admiral and kind commander, Captain Andrew Shilling,
+received a great and grievous wound by a cannon ball through his
+left shoulder, which he bore with such wonderful courage and
+patience, that we were in great hopes of his much-wished-for
+recovery: But he had likewise two of his uppermost ribs broken on
+the left side, and died on the 6th January, 1621, shewing himself
+a resolute commander in the action, and an assured Christian in
+his death. We intended to have carried his body to Surat, to have
+there performed his funeral rites according to his great merit,
+and oar surgeons undertook to preserve his body by means of
+embalming and cere-cloth, but it became so noisome that we were
+forced to bury him at Jasques, which was done on the 7th, with
+all the solemnity and respect in our power.</p>
+
+<p>In this engagement, the London expended 1382 great shot of
+several sorts, the Hart 1024, the Roebuck 815, and the Eagle 800,
+in all 4021. In consequence of the death of our worthy admiral,
+the white box, No. I. was opened; and according to your worships
+appointment, Captain Richard Blithe succeeded to the supreme
+command of the London, I was removed into the Hart, Christopher
+Brown into the Roebuck, and Thomas Taylor was made master of the
+Eagle.[299]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 299: This account does not agree with an
+accompanying official letter, dated 13th January, 1621, giving a
+similar account of the two engagements, often in the very
+identical words used by Swan, in which the name of Thomas Taylor
+is omitted, instead of whom William Baffin is the last in the
+list of signatures; and the Christian name of Swan is made Robert
+instead of Richard.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.5. <i>Sequel of the Voyage</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The 14th January, 1621, having had forty-eight hours continual
+and excessive rain, which, or much wind, is usual at Jasques for
+three or four days at the full and change of the moon, and having
+finished our business at Jasques, we set sail on our return to
+Surat, where we arrived on the 1st February. Nothing material
+occurred on the passage, except that, on the 27th January,
+between Diu and the <i>sand-heads</i>, we surprised a small ship
+of war, called Nostra Senaora de Remedio, of 100 tons, commanded
+by Francisco de Sylva, manned by thirty-five Portuguese and
+twenty-five Moors, sent out by the governor of Diu to protect
+their small merchant ships against the Malabar rovers. We
+dismissed the men and kept the ship for our use, calling her the
+Andrew, after our late excellent general. She had in her neither
+meat, money, nor commodities, and scarcely as many poor suits of
+clothes as there were backs.</p>
+
+<p>The 27th of February we began to take in our loading. The 5th
+of March, the, Eagle was sent down to keep guard over the junk
+belonging to the prince, and to hinder her from any farther
+loading, till they granted free passage for our carts with goods
+and provisions, which had been restrained for six or seven days
+by the vexatious procedure of the governor of Olpar, a town near
+Surat. By this means, no cotton wool was allowed to come down
+till our ships were fully laden. On the 16th of March, having
+notice that the Camla, from Agra, had been robbed by the Deccan
+army, we resolved to seek restitution upon the ships of the
+Deccan prince and his confederates in this transaction, as we
+intended wintering in the Red Sea. The 19th, the governor of
+Surat having given us satisfaction in regard to the carts, and a
+supply of powder and shot for our money, and promise under his
+hand for redress of other injuries, we dismissed the junk
+belonging to the prince from duress.</p>
+
+<p>From the 25th of March to the 6th of April, 1621, the winds
+have been S. and S.S.W. or W. and blowing so hard from noon till
+midnight, raising so great a surf on the shore, that no business
+could be done except on the last quarter of the ebb and first of
+the flood tide. We sailed on the 7th April. The 9th, the Eagle
+and a Dutch pinnace, called the Fortune, parted company, being
+consigned to Acheen and Bantam. The London, Hart, Roebuck, and
+Andrew, were intended for the Red Sea, if not too late.</p>
+
+<p>The 1st May, the Andrew and our boats surprised a Portuguese
+ship of 200 tons called the St Antonio, which we named the
+May-flower. Her principal lading consisted of rice taken in at
+Barcelor, whence she had gone to Goa, and sailed from thence for
+Ormus and Muskat on the 8th of April. We learnt from this prize,
+that Ruy Frere de Andrada was busy in repairing his ships at
+Ormus, and that Don Emanuel de Azeredo had departed from Gor
+fifty days before for Ormus, to reinforce Andrada with two
+galleons, one of these being the same in which the viceroy was
+personally, when he engaged our fleet under Captain Downton.
+During a calm on the 7th, we captured a small frigate-built ship
+called the Jacinth, which we named the Primrose, which had come
+from Mozambique and was bound for Goa. Thence to the 13th, we had
+variable winds, with calms and much rain. Finding the May-flower
+delayed us much, and that our pilots were either ignorant or
+malicious, we resolved to trust to our own endeavours for finding
+an anchoring place, for our safe riding till the strength of the
+adverse monsoon was over, for which purpose we determined upon
+going to Macera.[300]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 300: From the latitude of this place,
+mentioned afterwards in the text, this seems to refer to Mazica,
+an island about sixty miles long and fifteen or twenty in
+breadth, a few miles from the oceanic coast of Arabia, in lat.
+20&deg; 48' N. and long. 57&deg; 3O' E. from
+Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We descried land on the 2d June, and anchored in seventeen
+fathoms three miles offshore, in lat. 20&deg; 20' N. variation
+17&deg; W. We found plenty of water in four or five pits, three
+quarters of a mile from the shore. I had forty tons from one
+well, which we rolled in hogsheads to the beach. The people were
+tractable, but we got little else besides water. A tuft of date
+trees by the watering place bore N.W. by W. from our anchorage,
+and the other end of the island N.E. 1/2 E. five leagues off. The
+12th we sailed for the N.E. end of the island, and in the
+afternoon came to anchor in a fair bay, having seven fathoms on
+clean ground, a black oozy sand, the N.E. point bearing S. 1/2 a
+league off, the landing place W.S.W. two miles off, and the north
+part of the bay N. by W. four miles off. The latitude of this bay
+is 20&deg; 30' N. and the variation 17&deg; W.[301] In this bay
+you may ride safely in any depth between five and twelve fathoms.
+It is an excellently healthy place, cold and hungry, affording no
+refreshments except water, enough of which is to be had by
+digging pits; but it is ill to boat except at the usual landing
+place. This place afforded us no better supplies than the former,
+except that we got a few goats and lambs in exchange for
+canikens. Though good anchorage, this bay was much troubled by a
+tumbling rolling sea, yet we resolved to remain here with the
+Hart and Roebuck till the fury of the monsoon were past.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 301: The north end of Mazica is in lat.
+21&deg; 12", and its south end in 20&deg; 15', both
+N.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having separated some time before from the London, our
+admiral, we sent on the 19th of June, one Abdelavie, an
+inhabitant of this island, as far as Zoar with letters in quest
+of the London. He returned on the 6th July with letters in
+answer, informing us that the London was at Zoar, seven leagues
+within Cape Rasalgat, having watered with difficulty at Teve,
+where their surgeon, Mr Simons, and the chaplain's servant, were
+surprised on shore by the Portuguese and Arabs. The Hart and
+Roebuck sailed from Macera, [Mazica,] on the 6th of August, and
+anchored in the evening of the 8th beside the admiral in the port
+of Zoar. This road differs from that in which we were in, being
+cairn, but the air was so hot as to take away our appetites.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed from Zoar on the 15th of August and returned to
+Swally roads. The 21st September, our whole fleet sailed from
+Swally, and on the 27th we took leave of the fleet bound for
+Jasques, consisting of the London, Jonas, Whale, Dolphin, Lion,
+Rose, Shilling, Richard, and Robert. The 1st January, 1622, we
+were between Johanna and Mayotta, two of the Comoro islands. The
+29th we anchored in Saldanha roads, [Table Bay,] having come
+thither from Surat in nine weeks and three days, blessed be God
+for our safe and speedy passage. We here watered, bathed in the
+river, caught fish, and buried our letters; purchasing three
+cows, one calf, and four sheep, all unsavoury meat.</p>
+
+<p>We sailed again on the 3d February, and anchored on the 19th
+at St Helena, where we found the Wappen and the Hollandia, two
+Dutch ships, the latter of which caught fire on the 22d, owing to
+her cloves, which had been taken in too green at Amboina. There
+was likewise a third small Dutch ship. They arrived eleven days
+before us, and it will take them at least ten days more to
+discharge and reload their damaged cloves. We sailed from St
+Helena on the 28th February, and anchored in the Downs on the 7th
+June, 1622.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIII.</p>
+
+<p>RELATION OF THE WAR OF ORMUS, AND THE TAKING OF THAT PLACE BY
+THE ENGLISH AND PERSIANS, IN 1622.[302]</p>
+
+<p>"In the Pilgrims of Purchas, vol. II. pp. 1785-1805, there is
+a long confused account of this business, contained in four
+several sections; to which many letters and certificates on the
+subject are subjoined. The <i>first</i> is a brief historical
+memoir of the foundation of Ormus, from a chronicle in the
+Arabic, said to have been composed by <i>Pacha Turunxa</i>,
+perhaps Pacha Turun Shah, one of the kings of that petty
+sovereignty. The <i>second</i> is a relation of the Ormus war, by
+Mr W. Pinder, who appears to have served under Andrew Shilling,
+during the preceding voyage, and sailed as master of the Andrew
+on this occasion. The <i>third</i> is an account of the earlier
+part of this war of Ormus, written by T. Wilson, a surgeon
+serving in the expedition. The fourth is a more particular
+relation of the whole events of this expedition, extracted by
+Purchas from the journal of Mr Edward Monoxe, agent for the East
+Indian merchants trading in Persia. This last has been chosen, as
+best adapted to give a distinct view of the expedition, but some
+freedoms have been assumed with it, by assisting the narrative
+from the other documents in Purchas, already specified."--E.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 302: Purch. Pilgr. II. 179s.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>At a consultation held in Swally roads on the 14th November,
+1621, a commission was given by Mr Thomas Rastell, president, and
+the rest of the council, of our factory at Surat, to Captains
+Richard Blithe and John Weddell, who were bound for Jasques, with
+five good ships and four pinnaces. The ships were the London,
+Jonas, Whale, Dolphin, and Lion, and the pinnaces the Shilling,
+Rose, Robert, and Richard. They were directed to sail with the
+earliest opportunity for Jasques, keeping together for their
+mutual defence against the enemy; and, as the Portuguese had
+disturbed the trade, and made sundry assaults on our ships,
+killing, maiming, and imprisoning our men, they were authorized
+to chase and capture any vessels belonging to the ports or
+subjects under the viceroy of Goa; as likewise, if they met any
+ships belonging to Dabul, Chaul, or other ports of the Deccan, or
+to the subjects of the Zamorin of Calicut, to arrest them, in
+replacement of goods robbed and spoiled by these powers, without
+embezzling any part of their cargoes, that restitution might be
+made, after due satisfaction rendered on their parts. A sixth
+part of the goods taken from the Portuguese were to be
+distributed as prize, the ship and the rest of the goods to
+remain to the company; and all the prisoners to be retained, that
+they might be exchanged for our countrymen, held by them in
+miserable bondage. They were directed to hasten their business
+and dispatch at Jasques, if possible within thirty days. And as
+our enemy under Ruy Frere de Andrada, was reinforced to six
+galleons, with other small vessels, waiting on the coast of
+Persia in all likelihood to attack our fleet, they were
+authorized, both defensively and offensively also, to use all
+opportunities or advantages against the Portuguese fleet, even in
+their own ports, if approved by a general council of war.</p>
+
+<p>We arrived in Costack roads on the 23d December, about
+twenty-seven leagues from Jasques, Ormus being in sight about ten
+leagues W.N.W. by a meridional compass. Our factors here informed
+us, that after our sea-fight in the former year, the Portuguese
+governor of Ormus had erected a fort on Kismis, an island within
+sight of Ormus, to which the Persians had laid siege for seven or
+eight months ineffectually, and had lost eight or nine thousand
+men in the siege; wherefore the Khan or prince of Shiras had, by
+his ministers, demanded the aid of our ships against the common
+enemy, the Portuguese, otherwise threatening to detain all the
+goods and money belonging to the company in Persia. In a
+consultation held on the 26th December on board the Jonas, in
+which were present, Captain Richard Blithe, John Weddell, Edward
+Monoxe, William Baffin, and many others, articles of agreement
+for giving our aid to the Persians against the Portuguese were
+drawn up, and being translated into the Persian language, were
+forwarded by the governor of the province of Mogustan to the Khan
+of Shiras, then on his way towards Mina, near the mouth of the
+Persian gulf.</p>
+
+<p>In this consultation, it was considered, as it was required of
+us by the Persians, that we should give them aid with our ships
+and people in this war, not only for the purpose of vanquishing
+the Portuguese navy, but for conquering the island and castle of
+Ormus; and as we were confident they would endeavour to force us
+into this service, by embargoing our goods, the governors having
+already refused to give us camels for their carriage from Mina to
+the ports: Wherefore, the foresaid proposition being maturely
+considered, together with the commission from the factors at
+Surat, warranting us to right ourselves for the great losses and
+hindrances suffered from the Portuguese, by interrupting our
+trade both in India and Persia, and their attack last year
+against the fleet under Captain Shilling; we therefore agreed to
+proffer the following articles to the Khan, for the public
+benefit and the securing a peaceable and profitable trade.</p>
+
+<p><i>First</i>.--In case of conquering the island and castle of
+Ormus by the Persians with our aid, one half of the spoil and
+purchase of both to belong to the English, and the other half to
+the Persians. <i>Secondly</i>--The castle of Ormus shall be
+delivered up to the English, with all the ordnance, arms, and
+ammunition thereunto belonging; and the Persians to build another
+fortress there for themselves, at their own charges.
+<i>Thirdly</i>.--The customs of Ormus shall be equally divided
+between the English and the Persians, and the English shall be
+for ever free from customs. <i>Fourthly</i>.--All Christians made
+prisoners in this war shall be given up to the disposal of the
+English, and all Mahomedan prisoners to the Persians.
+<i>Fifthly</i>.--The Persians shall be at half the charges of the
+ships employed in this enterprize, in victuals, wages,
+wear-and-tear, and shall furnish all necessary powder and shot at
+their sole expence.</p>
+
+<p>These were the chief articles, besides which several others
+were agreed upon, to be proposed to the Khan. After his arrival
+at Mina, Mr Bell and Mr Monaxe were sent to wait upon him, on the
+8th January, 1622, and were entertained at a sumptuous banquet. A
+great feast and triumph was also made, in consequence of
+intelligence that the Shah had conquered a great country in
+Arabia, with its capital Aweiza.[303] Next day, the Khan sent his
+vizier and two other principal officers to give an answer to our
+proposed articles. The <i>first</i> was granted. For the
+<i>second</i>, it was substituted that the castle of Ormuz was to
+be occupied by both nations till the King's pleasure was known.
+The <i>third</i> was granted, provided also, that the goods from
+India belonging to the king and the Khan were to pass free of
+duty. In regard to the <i>fourth</i>, reservation was made as to
+the two principal Portuguese captains, Ruy Frere, captain of
+Kismis Castle, and Simon de Mela, governor of Ormus, till the
+king's pleasure were known. Other articles were agreed upon; such
+as that no change was to be made in regard to religion, and the
+expence of military stores was to be divided. The Khan and Mr
+Bell signed these articles; and presently our goods were laden
+upon the Khan's own camels at free cost, which could not be
+procured before for any money.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 303: This assuredly alludes to Ahwas in
+Khosistan, to the N.W. of the lower Euphrates, opposite to
+Bussrah, which, though not in Arabia, is in its immediate
+neighbourhood, and principally inhabited by people of Arabian
+origin.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 10th of January we returned to Costack, and going on
+board, acquainted our commanders with the success of our mission.
+When the news of this agreement became known among the several
+ships companies, they consulted among themselves, and with one
+voice refused to take any share in the business. This broke out
+first in the London, in which ship fifty or sixty of her crew
+took part in refusing to have any thing to do with this warlike
+measure; but, after taking much pains to reconcile them to the
+propriety and necessity of joining with the Persians, Captain
+Blithe at last prevailed with them, and they promised to go with
+him wherever he chose to lead them. In a day or two, the flame of
+discontent and opposition spread among the other ships, alleging
+that it was no mercantile business, and that it might lead to a
+breach of the peace between our nation and Spain; but formal
+protests being taken against the crews, what with the fear of
+forfeiting their wages, and a promised gratification of a month's
+pay, they all at last yielded.</p>
+
+<p>We set sail for Ormus on the 19th of January, and anchored on
+the night of the 22d before the town, about two leagues from the
+castle, expecting that the enemy's armada would come out to fight
+us, consisting of five galleons, and some fifteen or twenty
+frigates, or armed barks; but they hauled in so near the castle,
+that we could not get nigh them. For which reason, and because
+our avowed enemy, Ruy Frere de Andrada, was in his newly-erected
+castle of Kismis, we sailed to that place, where we arrived the
+next day, and were just in time to save the lives of the
+Portuguese, who were no longer able to hold out against the
+Persians, and were willing rather to yield to us than them. After
+many meetings and treaties, they yielded up both themselves and
+their castle into our hands on the 1st February, it being
+concluded that the whole garrison was to depart with their
+private property to any place except Ormus, their commander only
+remaining in our hands as a pledge for the fulfilment of the
+capitulation. In this service two of our people were slain, one
+of whom was Mr Baffin.[304]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 304: Mr Baffin was a mathematician and
+mariner, to whom our northern and north-western voyages are much
+indebted.--<i>Purch</i>. 
+
+<p>Hence almost certainly the person to whom Baffin's bay, in the
+north-east of America, owes its name.--E.]</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<p>There were about a thousand persons of all sorts in this
+castle, of whom the Portuguese and some Mahometans were sent
+away: But the Khan required certain Mahometans to be given up,
+who he pretended had revolted from him. They were accordingly
+delivered up, and, though he had formerly promised them mercy, he
+put them all to death. This castle had seventeen pieces of
+ordnance, one of which was a brass pedro, two iron demiculverins,
+four brass sackers, two iron minions, and six iron
+falcons.[305]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 305: On a former occasion, we have given an
+account of the various kinds of ordnance used about the 17th
+century. The <i>pedro</i> was probably a gun of large calibre for
+throwing <i>stone</i> bullets. In modern times, cannon are
+designated by the weights of their respective balls, in
+combination with their being long or short, land or sea, field or
+garrison, single or double fortified, iron or
+brass.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Leaving some Englishmen to assist in keeping possession of
+this fortress along with the Persians, according to agreement, we
+set sail on the 4th February for Gambroon, on the mainland of
+Persia, within three leagues of Ormus, and directly opposite. Ruy
+Frere de Andrada, the late commander of Kismis, was sent off for
+Surat, in the Lion, accompanied by the Rose and Richard. The
+London, Jonas, Whale, and Dolphin, with the two prizes of 250
+tons each, remained to transport the Persians in safety to Ormus.
+We were royally feasted at Gambroon by the Khan, who was much
+dissatisfied that Andrada and some of the Moors had not been
+delivered up to him, yet dissembled his discontent, in regard of
+his farther need for our ships in the enterprise against Ormus.
+After the feast, all the English gentlemen present were presented
+with vests, each according to his rank.</p>
+
+<p>On the 9th of February we set sail for Ormus, having about two
+hundred Persian boats of all sizes, besides two frigates or
+barks, and our ships, having in them about 2500 or 3000 Persian
+soldiers, of various sorts. We anchored that night about two
+leagues from the castle; and next forenoon all the Persians were
+landed on the island of Ormus, a little way from the town, to
+which they marched in a confused manner, penetrating as far as
+the Meidan, or market-place, without resistance. The market-place
+was barricadoed and defended for some time by the Portuguese with
+shot and pikes; but the Persians soon made way, with small loss,
+and drove the Portuguese before them into the castle, like so
+many sheep. One Persian only, who first entered, was slain by a
+pike, and he who slew him soon lost his head, his heels being too
+heavy to carry it away.</p>
+
+<p>On first entering the city, the Persian general, named Einam
+Culi Beg, placed captains with detachments of soldiers in various
+quarters, proclaiming that each officer was to be answerable for
+the safety of the quarter assigned to him, and threatening death
+to all who were found pillaging. Some infringing these orders
+were severely punished, some being hanged, others having their
+ears or noses cut off, and others bastinadoed even for trifles.
+Yet, in two or three days after, the shops and houses were forced
+open, and every man so wearied with carrying away plunder all day
+long, and sleeping so securely at night without any proper
+military precautions, that the Portuguese might easily have slain
+many, if they had ventured upon making a sally.</p>
+
+<p>On the night of our landing, I took possession of a very
+commodious house for a factory, which, for convenience and
+goodness of its rooms, exceeded, as I think, any factory
+belonging to the Honourable Company. But it proved too hot for me
+on the 13th, in the night, as one of the master's mates of the
+Whale, with others of his companions, after I was in bed, by
+carelessness of candles, while searching for plunder, set a room
+on fire in which were some goods given me in charge by the
+general. Fortunately the wind favoured us, so that the house was
+not consumed. Considering the strength of this city, and that
+every house was as it were a little castle, I was astonished the
+Portuguese should have abandoned it so soon. But it seems they
+were afraid of being intercepted by the Persians in their retreat
+to the castle, and dreaded that the Mahometan inhabitants might
+have betrayed them.</p>
+
+<p>The Persians began presently to throw up trenches, and daily
+approached nearer the castle, and, with our help, erected
+batteries for ordnance, and sconces or redoubts for securing
+their men, and protecting the trenches. With the cannon from our
+ships, we sore galled the Portuguese ships, forcing them to haul
+in as close as possible to the castle. On the 24th of February,
+four of our boats set fire to the San Pedro, formerly admiral of
+Andrada's fleet, which put all the rest in great danger, but the
+tide carried her out to sea, and her relics were towed on shore
+at Gambroon by the Arab and other country boats, some iron
+ordnance and shot being got out of her burnt carkass. The Khan
+was much rejoiced at this exploit.</p>
+
+<p>The Persians having succeeded in constructing a mine under one
+of the bastions, which was charged with upwards of forty barrels
+of powder, it was exploded on the 17th of March, by which a
+practicable breach was made in the salient angle of the bastion.
+The Persians made immediately a fierce assault, and Shah Culi Beg
+got possession of the bastion with 200 of his bravest men, and
+maintained himself there for at least three hours; but the
+Portuguese made a brave defence, and with powder-pots, scalding
+lead, and other devices of fire, did much hurt to the assailants,
+burning, scalding, and slaying many of them, so that the Persians
+were at last driven out with considerable loss, most of them
+being wounded, scalded, or scorched. On the same day, the city
+was set on fire in several places, by the command of the Persian
+general, as was reported, because his Arab soldiers lurked among
+the houses, and could not be got forth to do any service in the
+siege.</p>
+
+<p>To the number of four or five thousand men, we were now cooped
+up in a barren island without shelter, producing nothing in
+itself except salt; and I know not by what mistaken policy the
+general had been induced to send away all the rice and other
+victuals, by which means we were reduced to depend upon the
+continent for a daily supply of provisions, and even water; so
+that, if a fleet of Portuguese frigates had come, as was
+expected, we must have been famished, as the country boats durst
+not have ventured to us from the main. The rain water in the open
+cisterns was daily wasted, and became brackish, no care being
+taken to fill the jars and private cisterns in almost every
+house, while it remained good. The Persians are quite ignorant in
+the art of war, for they entered the breach without fear,
+precaution, or means of establishing themselves; and they lost
+with shame what they might have defended with honour. I observed
+other defects in their management, even of the very sinews of
+war; and I am astonished that Shah Abbas, the wonder of our age,
+should have sent his army on this expedition so weakly provided
+with money, arms, ammunition, ships, and all other necessaries. I
+am even satisfied that all the money belonging to the khan was
+consumed in one month's pay to our ships, and I fear we shall
+have to wait for the rest till the plunder is converted into
+money. In regard to arms and ammunition, they have only small
+pieces, with bows and arrows, and swords, some of their chiefs
+having coats of mail. They were so scarce of powder, that after
+blowing their mine, they had hardly enough to supply the small
+arms for entering the breach, though furnished with twenty or
+twenty-five barrels from our ships. They had not a single
+scaling-ladder to assist their entry. Were we to forsake them,
+they would soon be completely at a stand, yet they have already
+broken conditions with us in several things, and I much fear,
+when all is done, we shall be paid with reversions, and what else
+they themselves please.</p>
+
+<p>Our ordnance so galled the Portuguese ships from the shore,
+that a galleon was sunk on the 19th of March, and two more on the
+20th and 23d. The last come ship from Goa, which was their
+admiral, and one of the others, were, I think, sacrificed by the
+policy of the governor, that the garrison might have no means of
+escape, and might therefore defend themselves manfully to the
+last, in hopes of relief from Goa, though some thought they went
+down in consequence of injuries from sunken rocks, in hauling
+them so near the castle to get them out of the range of our
+battery.</p>
+
+<p>On the 27th, news was brought me that some of the Portuguese
+were come from the castle to treat of peace, upon which I
+repaired to the general's tent, where I could well perceive, by
+the countenances of our two English commanders, that I was by no
+means welcome: But, to requite them in their own coin, both they
+and I soon saw that none of us were acceptable to the Persians,
+for they long delayed bringing in the Portuguese messenger, in
+hopes we would have gone away, but at length, seeing we remained,
+he was brought in. The drift of his speech was to the following
+effect:--"His captain had sent him to kiss the hands of the
+general, and to ask the reason of making war upon the Portuguese,
+who were friends to the Persians, and thought it strange,
+considering their ancient league and friendship, that so great a
+war should be made only for one or two wells of water. Besides,
+that the governor and people of Ormus were not to blame for what
+had been done at Kismis by Ruy Frere de Andrada; yet were they
+willing, so far as might consist with the honour of their
+sovereign, to purchase peace, which they needed not to do either
+from fear or weakness, having above a thousand able-bodied men in
+the castle, with provisions and water for many months; besides
+which, they were in daily expectation of succours from Goa. He
+concluded by saying, that the Persians would find it a hard
+matter to win the castle, as they were resolved to defend
+themselves to the last man."</p>
+
+<p>The latter part of this speech, consisting of bravado, was by
+no means pleasing to the Persian general, who desired the
+messenger to declare the purpose of his coming. On which he said,
+the governor wished to know what the Persian general would have?
+To this the general answered, that he would have the castle; and
+with that answer the messenger was dismissed, without even the
+offer of a cup of wine, if I had not caused one to be given him.
+I suspect he brought a more substantial message, which was
+omitted on account of our presence, having been so instructed by
+Shah Culi Beg, in whose house he was at least for an hour before
+he was brought before the general. I fear therefore some sinister
+designs of the Persians, which a few days will discover.</p>
+
+<p>Our captains, by means of their interpreters, now moved their
+own affairs with the general, to which he gave no great heed, but
+desired that business might be deferred for some time; yet had he
+that very day earnestly entreated them to send him a quantity of
+powder from the ships, meaning that night to attempt blowing up
+the castle, for which the mines were all ready, and he wanted
+nothing but powder. They had accordingly sent him thirty-four
+barrels, for which forwardness I fear the Company at home will
+give them little thanks.</p>
+
+<p>The 28th March, understanding that two chief men of the
+Portuguese garrison were in Shah Culi Beg's house, where they had
+been four or five hours in conference with the Persian general,
+without sending to us, which increased our suspicions that the
+Persians meant to deal fraudulently with us; the two English
+commanders and I went together to the tent of the Persian
+general, and expressed our dislike of this underhand manner of
+proceeding. We stated, that we were partakers with them in this
+war, in which we had hazarded ourselves, our ships, and our
+goods, besides the hindrance we sustained by losing the monsoon,
+and that we ought to be equal participators in all treaties and
+proceedings, as well as in the war, and desired therefore to know
+what they had concluded, or meant to conclude, with the
+Portuguese. To this he answered, that nothing had been done,
+neither should any thing be concluded without acquainting us.
+This was a mere empty compliment, which all his actions belied.
+We must, however, be content to suffer all with patience: Yet,
+were it not for our merchants and woods in Persia, we could
+easily have remedied this affair, and have brought the Portuguese
+to such terms as we pleased. As matters stand, however, we are so
+tied down, we must be patient, and I fear things will turn out
+very ill, though they pretend all things shall be done to our
+contentment.</p>
+
+<p>About noon this day, seeing many Arabs in the Meidan armed
+with pikes and guns, whom I did not usually see so armed, I at
+length observed them ranged upon both sides of the market-place,
+and presently afterwards two Portuguese gentlemen passed,
+attended by six or eight pages and servants, one of whom carried
+an umbrella over their heads. They were accompanied by Shah Culi
+Beg, and other chief Persians, who conducted them to the house of
+Agariza of Dabul. Though uninvited, I went there also, and
+intruded into their company, where I found the Persian general
+and other chiefs, his assistants and counsellors. The general
+gave me a kind welcome, and made me sit down next himself, which
+I did not refuse, that the Portuguese might see we were in grace
+and favour. Having made my obeisance to the Persians, I then
+saluted the Portuguese officers, who returned the compliment,
+after which I had some general conversation with them, not
+pertaining to the great purpose in hand, of which I did not
+presume to speak, till the general gave me occasion, which was
+not until after a collation of <i>pilaw</i>, and other dishes,
+after the fashion of Persia.</p>
+
+<p>The collation being ended, the general asked them what was now
+their desire. They answered, that the captain of the castle had
+given them written instructions, but had desired them to make
+their proposals to the Khan himself, who now resided at Gombroon,
+if they might be permitted to wait upon him. To this the general
+answered, that he durst not allow them, unless the Khan were
+first made acquainted with their desire. I could plainly perceive
+that this proceeded only from affected delays on both sides, to
+give time for attaining their several purposes. The Portuguese
+then proceeded to complain, as formerly, against Ruy Frere, as if
+he durst have presumed to seize and fortify Kismis without orders
+from the king his master. They alleged also that the affair was
+in itself of no moment, being only a barren island with a well or
+two. To this the Persian general replied, it was of no matter
+what might be its value, but they had gone to war against the
+king of Persia and his subjects, for which their castle of Ormus
+must make satisfaction; wherefore, if they would surrender the
+castle without any more bloodshed, they should have good quarter
+and kind usage. The Portuguese said they had no commission to
+treat of any such matter, and so the conference ended, and they
+were dismissed.</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding of the Portuguese being refused leave to go to
+the Khan, they had licence that same night, and were sent over to
+treat with him at Gambroon. I could never know the certainty of
+the proposed treaty, but shall here insert what I heard reported
+on the subject. They proposed, in the first place, to the Khan,
+to raise the siege, and permit them to enjoy their city and
+castle of Ormus as formerly, in consideration of which, they
+offered to pay 200,000 tomans in hand, and the yearly rent they
+had formerly paid to the king of Ormus, from the revenue of the
+custom-house, which, as I have heard, was 140,000 rials of eight
+or Spanish dollars yearly. But some said, besides the 200,000
+tomans in hand, they offered as much yearly. [306] It was
+reported that the Khan demanded 500,000 tomans in hand, equal to
+&pound;172,418:10:7 sterling,[307] and an yearly rent of 200,000
+tomans.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 306: A toman, by the data in the text
+immediately following, is about seven shillings; hence 200,000
+tomans are equal to &pound;70,000 sterling.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 307: At the former computation, this sum is
+equal to &pound;175,000; and the conversion in the text gives 6s.
+11-3/4d, and a small fraction more for each toman, being very
+near 7s. which is more convenient.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 2d April, with the aid of the English, the Persians blew
+up two other mines, by which a fair and practicable breach was
+opened, through which the besiegers might have entered without
+much difficulty, yet was there no assault made. Having noticed
+this carefully, Captain Weddell went to the Persian general to
+learn his purposes; when, to excuse the backwardness of his
+people, he pretended that the breach was too difficult to be
+assaulted with any hope of success. Yet we knew the contrary, as
+an English youth, who was servant to the master of the Jonas,
+bolder than any of the Persians, had gone up the breach to the
+very top of the castle wall, and told us it was as easily
+ascendible as a pair of stairs, and broad enough for many men to
+go abreast. In representing this to the general, and asking what
+were his future plans of proceeding, he told us he would be ready
+with another mine in three days. This I believed to be true, for
+his mining is to procure gold, not to make breaches, unless
+breach of promise to us, which he can easily do; for of late they
+have not performed any of their engagements, yet will not this
+teach us to look to ourselves.</p>
+
+<p>The greatest hurt done by the Portuguese to the Persians in
+the assault on the castle, was by means of powder-pots, by which
+many of the assailants were scorched and severely burned. To
+guard against this, the Khan has now sent over many coats and
+jackets of leather, as not so liable to catch fire as their
+calico coats, quilted or stuffed with cotton wool. Yet, according
+to the English proverb, <i>The burnt child dreads the fire;</i>
+notwithstanding their leathern coats, none of them are hardy
+enough to attempt this new breach, though much easier to enter
+than the former, any farther than to pillage certain bales of
+<i>bastas</i> and other stuffs which have fallen down from a
+barricade or breast-work, thrown up by the Portuguese for
+defending the top of the breach from the fire of the
+Persians.</p>
+
+<p>On the 5th of April the Persian general had news that 100,000
+maunds of powder were arrived from Bahrein. On the 12th, a
+Portuguese came to the Persian general, having escaped from the
+castle, and gave accounts of the great wants and weaknesses of
+the garrison, insomuch, that six or eight died daily of the flux,
+chiefly owing to their having nothing to drink, but corrupted
+brackish water, of which even they have so little as to be put on
+short allowance, so that several have died of thirst. Their only
+food consists of rice and salt fish, both of which would require
+a good allowance of drink. Notwithstanding all this, the Persian
+general wastes his time in constructing new mines, of which he
+has no less than three in hand at this time, as if he proposed to
+blow up the wall all round about, before making any fresh
+assault. On the night of the 12th, one of our frigates or barks,
+which belonged to the London, being on guard alone, to prevent
+the escape of the Portuguese frigates, was clapped on board by
+two of these at once, but beat them both off. I know not what
+might be the loss of the Portuguese on this occasion, but two of
+our men were slain, and seven wounded; yet, had not our black
+rowers forsaken them, our people might easily have taken the
+assailants.</p>
+
+<p>The 14th, the Persians sprung another mine, by which a very
+assailable breach was made, yet no assault was attempted. On this
+occasion, the mine had to be sprung before it was quite ready,
+because the Portuguese had already come so near it with a counter
+mine, that the Persians were afraid of their mine being rendered
+useless before they could place their powder. Another deserter
+came from the castle on the 15th, who confirmed the report given
+by the former, and told us that the two frigates which had
+assailed ours had come from Muskat, with the son of the deceased
+Don Francisco de Sousa, late governor of the castle of Ormus, who
+had come on purpose to carry away his mother and other women from
+the castle.</p>
+
+<p>At this time, the Moors who had surrendered to us from the
+castle of Kismis, were delivered up to the Persian general, at
+his earnest request, and partly with their own consent, on
+promise of being pardoned for having served under the Portuguese
+against their own king and country, and of being provided for and
+employed in the siege of Ormus. He seemed to ratify this promise,
+both to them and us, by entertaining some of their chiefs in our
+presence, with much apparent courtesy, even giving fine new vests
+to five or six of the principal officers. Yet next morning he
+caused eighty of their heads to be cut off, and sent the five or
+six newly-vested chiefs to the Khan at Gambroon, to receive their
+final doom, which was soon settled, as they were sentenced to the
+same fate with their fellows. Mir Senadine, their chief captain,
+was executed by the hands of Shere Alli, governor of Mogustan,
+who had married his daughter, and yet put his father-in-law to
+death with as much willingness as if he had been his mortal
+enemy.</p>
+
+<p>The 17th of April, the Persians sprung another mine, closely
+adjoining their first. This did not produce the effect expected,
+as it burst out at the side, carrying part of the wall along with
+it, yet did little or no harm upwards, which was the point aimed
+at, on purpose to widen the former breach. Yet it encouraged the
+Persian general to try another assault, with at least 2000
+soldiers. They ran up the breach with great resolution, into part
+of a bulwark or bastion, which they might easily have gained, had
+not their haste run their resolution out of breath; insomuch,
+that eight or ten Portuguese, assisted by a few blacks, armed
+only with rapiers, made them give ground and retire to the outer
+skirt of the bulwark, where there was not room for forty men to
+face the enemy. They here endeavoured, however, to entrench
+themselves; but, before they could establish a lodgement, the
+Portuguese plied two or three pieces of ordnance upon them from a
+flanking battery, which sent some scores of the Persians with
+news to their prophet <i>Mortus Alli</i> that more of his
+disciples would shortly be with them. This accordingly was the
+case, chiefly owing to their own ignorance and cowardice; for,
+had they not made a stand in that place, but rushed pell-mell
+along with the Portuguese into the castle, they might have
+carried it with less than half the loss they sustained that day
+to little purpose. Had I not been an eye-witness, I could hardly
+have believed the stupid ignorance of the Persian general on this
+occasion. He had two breaches, almost equally good, yet applied
+all his men to the assault of one only, instead of attempting
+both at one time. Besides, he had at least eighty or an hundred
+scaling-ladders, yet not one of them was brought near the castle
+walls. His soldiers hung clustering on the breach, like a swarm
+of bees, or a flock of sheep at a gap, none having the heart to
+enter, while the Portuguese gleaned away five or six at a shot,
+sometimes more, driving forwards their black soldiers to throw
+powder-pots among the Persians.</p>
+
+<p>The assault was renewed on the 18th, but with more harm to the
+Persians than the Portuguese. During the intervening night, two
+blacks made signs to the Persians on the top of the breach, that
+they wished to come over to them, and were drawn up with ropes.
+By these it was learned that the captain of the castle had been
+wounded in the head by a stone; that there were not above an
+hundred men in the garrison able to handle their arms: and that
+their water grew daily more scanty and worse in quality, by which
+the mortality continually increased. They reported also that
+great difference in opinion prevailed among the Portuguese, some
+wishing to endeavour to escape by sea, while others held it more
+honourable to sell their lives at a dear rate, by defending the
+castle to the last extremity, and proposed, when they could no
+longer hold out, to put all their women and treasure into a house
+and blow them up, that the Persians might neither enjoy their
+wealth nor abuse their wives; and, when this was done, to rush
+upon the Persians, and so end their days.</p>
+
+<p>In the evening of the 19th, the Persians made another effort
+to press forwards, and got possession of the entire bulwark,
+forcing the Portuguese to retire farther within the castle. In
+this conflict many of the Portuguese were wounded, and sore
+scalded with fire-pots, in the management of which the Persians
+had now become expert, though many of them had paid dearly for
+their instruction. In this conflict four Portuguese were slain,
+and their heads brought to the Persian general. In this art of
+cutting off heads, the Persians are particularly cunning,
+insomuch, that I do not think there is an executioner in all
+Germany that can excel them. No sooner does a Persian lay hold of
+an enemy, than off goes his head at one blow of his
+scymitar.[308] He then makes a hole in the ear or cheek with his
+dagger, by which he will sometimes bring three or four heads at
+once to his general. When it is proposed to send these heads
+taken in war to be seen by the king or the khan, they very
+adroitly flea off the skin of the head and face, which they stuff
+up with straw like a foot-ball, and so send them by whole
+sackfulls.[309]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 308: This, however, is to the praise of the
+Persians, as good swordsmen, on which account the Turks fear
+coming to hand blows with them.--<i>Purch</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 309: In Turkey they manage this barbarous
+trophy of success more conveniently, as the Grand Signior is
+satisfied with a display of the ears of his enemies preserved in
+salt.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This night, one of the frigates that came from Muskat for
+Douna de Sousa, made her escape, no doubt very richly freighted.
+Her consort, which likewise attempted to get away, was chased in
+again. That which escaped, being hailed by the Arab boats that
+lay in wait to intercept the passage, got off by using the
+watch-word usual between the English and Arabs, <i>Ingres
+ingresses,</i> which had not been once changed since the
+commencement of this enterprize, in which oversight both the
+Persians and English were highly blameable, as, by the continual
+use of this watch-word, it had come to the knowledge of the
+Portuguese, who thus used it to their great benefit.</p>
+
+<p>During the night of the 20th April, the other frigate made an
+effort to escape, but was intercepted and taken by the frigate
+and pinnace belonging to the London. This frigate was employed to
+carry away the Portuguese <i>almirante,</i> named Luis de Brito,
+a kinsman to the viceroy of Goa, but the captain of the castle
+would not permit him to go away; and the men belonging to this
+frigate, being seven persons, fearing the capture of the castle
+and desirous to secure their own lives, stole away without
+leave.</p>
+
+<p>The 21st, the Persians made a display of making themselves
+masters of the castle by storm; but, while we expected to see
+them put this bold measure in execution, I discovered that they
+and the Portuguese were engaged in a parley. While I was
+preparing to wait on the Persian general, to enquire the cause of
+this sudden change of measures, I met a messenger from our
+English commanders, informing me that a boat had come off to our
+ships from the castle, bearing a flag of truce, and desiring my
+presence on board to see what was the purpose of this
+communication. On my getting on board the London, I found two
+Portuguese there, with the following letters from the captain of
+the castle, and the almirante:</p>
+
+<p>"There hath been such ancient friendship between the
+Portuguese and English nations, that, considering the present war
+at this place, we ought to come to a mutual good understanding.
+From what I see of the mines made by the Persians, by which one
+of my bulwarks is already won, I am of opinion these could not
+have been constructed without your aid. Wherefore, I request you
+would be the means of procuring peace for me with the Persians,
+if the same may be done with your and their good pleasure, yet so
+that I may not lose my credit, nor you fail to gain honour. Thus,
+not else, our Lord keep you," &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p><i>Simon de Mela Pereira</i>.</p>
+
+<p>"This castle is so hard pressed, that the Persians demand us
+to surrender by capitulation, but which we will not consent to:
+For, when reduced to that necessity, we will call upon your
+worships for that purpose, as it were not reasonable for us to
+capitulate with the infidels when you are present. We hold it
+more humane to deliver our innocent women, and other unnecessary
+people, to the rigour of our own weapons, than to the clemency of
+the Persians; and that you might know this our purpose, I have
+written these lines to accompany the letter from our captain.
+What else you may wish to know, you may learn from the bearer of
+these letters, to whom you may give the same credit as to myself.
+And so God keep your worships," &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p><i>Luis de Brito Dar</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Dated 1st May, 1622.[310]</p>
+
+<p>Taking these letters into consideration, and commiserating
+their situation as Christians, it was resolved to give them a
+favourable answer, which was done accordingly in a letter to the
+Captain Simon de Mela, offering to become an intermedium for
+procuring them such conditions from the Persians as might save
+the lives of the Christians who still remained in the castle,
+which we had in our power to warrant, and were willing to shew
+them such farther courtesy as might tend to their relief, as far
+as we could see. We desired him therefore to put his demands in
+writing, and send them to us as soon as possible. A similar
+answer was written to the almirante, and with these the two
+messengers were sent back to the castle in one of our own boats.
+They soon returned with other letters from the captain and
+almirante, saying, "That they left themselves entirely in our
+hands, the necessity of their situation not allowing time for
+farther writing, lest the Persians might in the mean while break
+in and put them all to the sword."</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 310: The 1st of May, <i>new style</i>, was
+the 21st April, <i>old style</i>; the difference being then ten
+days.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Upon this we addressed ourselves to the Persian general,
+requesting him to grant a truce of two days to the distressed
+Portuguese, in which time we might treat with them for such
+conditions as might be at the same time beneficial for the
+Persians and ourselves. At length, a Persian officer and I were
+deputed to go into the castle to treat with the Portuguese, and
+they also desired our vice-admiral, Mr Woodcock, might accompany
+us. We all three went to the castle gate, but could not be
+allowed to enter; yet were met by Luis de Brito, the Portuguese
+almirante, and five or six other <i>cavalieros</i>, but did not
+see the captain, as the inferior officers and soldiers had
+mutinied against him, and detained him as a prisoner. Our whole
+conference, therefore, was with the almirante, who chiefly
+addressed himself to Captain Woodcock, our almirante, or
+vice-admiral.</p>
+
+<p>Mir Adul Hassan, and Pulot Beg, had been sent for to the ship,
+where some persons had embezzled a portion of treasure, as we now
+wished them to be present at the conference on the part of the
+Khan. They came accordingly to the English house, when one of
+them made a long speech, saying how kindly the Khan esteemed the
+services and assistance given by the English in this war, which
+he should never forget, nor allow to pass unrewarded. They next
+declared that the Khan intended to proceed, after the surrender
+of Ormus, to besiege both Muskat and Sware, and therefore that
+the Portuguese ought on no account to be allowed to go to either
+of these places. Lastly, they insinuated basely and
+dishonourably, that we should betray the Portuguese captain, and
+five or six more of his principal officers, into their hands, as
+this would tend greatly to the honour and satisfaction of the
+Khan, by enabling him to present them to Shah Abas. On hearing
+this vile and dishonourable proposal, I left the room, that my
+ears might not be contaminated by such abominable conditions;
+saying, at my departure, to these Persians, that I would not be
+guilty of consenting to so infamous a business for a whole
+houseful of gold.</p>
+
+<p>The Portuguese being reduced to such extremity as to be under
+the necessity of surrendering on any terms that might save their
+lives from the cruelty of the Persians, sent on the morning of
+the 23d, offering to put themselves into our hands, on condition
+that we furnished them with the means of being conveyed either to
+Muskat or India. We agreed to this proposal, on which Captain
+Blithe and I went as hostages into the castle, to see them safely
+set out; the Persian general promising that not one of his
+soldiers or men should enter the castle till all the Portuguese
+were gone out, and that only three of his people and three of
+ours should sit at the gate, to see that they did not carry away
+any thing of value. This the Persians watched so narrowly, that
+they most basely searched and abused the women. But the king of
+Ormus with his rich vizier, together with their women, treasure,
+and servants, were all conveyed over the breach in the wall, and
+not a single Englishman called or allowed to see what they
+carried out with them. Not only they, but all other Mahometans
+and Banyans, with their treasure and best things, were conveyed
+out of the castle in the same manner; whole bales of goods, with
+boxes and caskets full of treasure, to an unknown amount, were
+carried at the same time over the breaches. No sooner were the
+gates opened for letting out the Portuguese, but at least forty
+Persians got in and spread themselves about the castle, besides
+whom, some of the ruder sort among the English got in likewise,
+whose coming in I fear was the cause of the Persians doing the
+same, judging themselves as worthy of this liberty as our
+people.</p>
+
+<p>Before mid-day of the 24th, both the Persians and English
+began to pillage in a most shameful manner, so that I was both
+grieved and ashamed, yet could see no means of remedy. The
+Persians drove out the poor sick, wounded, and scorched
+Christians, who were not able to help themselves, so that my
+heart yearned with compassion to see their woeful plight. In the
+evening, the Khan of Shiras came over, as if in triumph, to view
+the castle and its great ordnance, of which there were near three
+hundred pieces,[311] part of which belonged to the galleons, and
+the rest to the castle. This evening, the commanders and I,
+wishing to retain possession of the church in which we had placed
+a quantity of plate and treasure, for its better security against
+being embezzled, our design was utterly denied by Pulot Beg, who
+told our commanders, in plain terms, that they might lie out of
+doors. Being justly incensed at this, we all three left the
+castle, the two captains going on board their ships, while I went
+to the city; but, as the tide was up, and I could not get a boat,
+I had to remain at the castle wall till near midnight. At this
+time there came about sixty Persians, by their own report, sent
+by the Khan to prevent the Arabs from conveying away any of the
+ordnance which lay by the shore, but I suspect their real object
+was to cut the throats of the poor Christians who lay at the
+shore, for want of boats to carry them on board; but fortunately
+they were protected by an English guard. Our chief business the
+whole of this day was to see the poor Portuguese sent safely out
+of the castle, most of them so weakened by divers maladies, but
+chiefly by famine, and many of them so noisome by their putrified
+wounds, and scorchings with gunpowder, that their pitiful cries
+and complaints might have moved pity in a heart of stone; yet
+such was the cruel disposition of the Persians, that they drove
+them out of the castle like so many dogs, stripping many of them
+even of their shirts.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 311: In a shorter relation of this siege,
+by Mr W. Pinder, the ordnance in the castle of Ormus are thus
+enumerated:--Fifty-three pieces mounted, of the following
+descriptions,--four brass cannons, six brass demi-cannons,
+sixteen brass cannons-pedro, nine brass culverins, two brass
+demi-culverins, three iron demi-culverins, ten brass basses, one
+iron minion, one iron culverin, one iron cannon-pedro. Besides
+ninety-two brass pieces not mounted, and seven brass bastels
+which they had landed from the ships that were sunk. In all, 152
+pieces.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the evening of the 27th, we allowed the Portuguese to
+depart for Goa, to the number of 2500 persons, including men,
+women, and children, to whom we gave our two prizes, the Robert
+and Shilling, for their transport, with victuals and water
+necessary for the voyage, and a pass to free them from any
+molestation, in case they met with any of our ships at sea.
+Besides these, there were upwards of an hundred persons, so
+maimed or sick as to be incapable of being sent off at this time,
+for want of room in these two ships.</p>
+
+<p>The king of Ormus was very poor, and lived chiefly on a
+pension or allowance of 140,000 rees, allowed him by the king of
+Spain, with some small reserved petty customs. In rummaging among
+his papers, we found the copy of a letter from him to the king of
+Spain, complaining loudly of the injustice of the Portuguese, and
+charging them with the entire overthrow of the kingdom of
+Ormus.[312]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 312: Besides this letter, too long and
+uninteresting for insertion, there are several other letters and
+documents in the Pilgrims at this place, so much in the same
+predicament as to be here omitted.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When we expected to have received 1200 tomans[313] from Pulot
+Beg, who was chief commissioner under the Khan of Shiras, as our
+pay for the time occupied in this enterprize, he contrived to
+make us a larger sum in their debt, under pretence of embezzling
+the plunder in the castle; while we, on the other hand, made
+counter demands of a much larger sum due to us from the Persians,
+in the same manner. At length, three months pay were allowed, and
+our other demands were shifted off, as he pretended to have no
+power to liquidate them without an order from the Khan. After
+business was ended, our misery began, occasioned by the
+insufferable heat of Ormus, and the disorders of our own people
+in drinking arrack, and other excesses no less injurious; through
+which such diseases arose among our people, that three-fourths of
+them were dangerously sick, and many died so suddenly, that the
+plague was feared to have got among them, although no symptoms of
+that dreadful malady as yet appeared. This extremity lasted for
+fourteen days, during which time, six or seven of our men died
+every day; but after this, it pleased God to stay the mortality,
+and the rest recovered. Ten pieces of ordnance belonging to the
+Portuguese, were taken into our ships, to replace that number of
+our own which had been broken or otherwise spoiled during the
+siege. Our fleet was detained till the 1st September, owing to
+the shifting of the monsoon, and waiting its return. Leaving
+Ormus on that day, we arrived in Swally roads on the 24th of that
+month, where the London, Jonas, and Lion, loaded for England, and
+sailed homewards bound on the 30th December. Before setting sail,
+news was brought of sinking three Portuguese carracks off the
+port of Masulipatam, by the English and Dutch in conjunction.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 313: This must be a gross error, as by the
+value of the toman formerly given, the sum in the text very
+little exceeds &pound;400. Purchas mentions, in a side-note, that
+he had heard the English received &pound;20,000 for this service
+from the Persians.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>In the Annals of the East India Company,[314] the English are
+said on this occasion to have received a proportion of the
+plunder acquired at Ormus, and a grant of the moiety of the
+customs at Gambroon, which place, in the sequel, became the
+principal station of their trade with Persia and other places in
+the Persian gulf. The treaty made in 1615 by Mr Connock was also
+renewed, and an additional phirmaund granted by the Sophi,
+allowing them to purchase whatever quantity of Persian silks they
+might think proper, in any part of his dominions, with the
+privilege of bringing their goods from Gambroon to Ispahan free
+of duties.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 314: Vol. I. p. 236. The historiographer
+makes, however, a small mistake, naming Ruy Frere de Andrada as
+chief commander of the Portuguese at Ormus, who only commanded in
+a subordinate fortress at Kismis.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In consequence of the war of Ormus, a claim was set up in 1624
+by the crown and the Duke of Buckingham, as lord high admiral of
+England, by which the Company was demanded to pay a proportion of
+the prize-money, which their ships were supposed to have obtained
+in the seas bordering on the countries within the limits of their
+exclusive charter. In order to substantiate these claims,
+Captains Weddell, Blithe, Clevenger, Beversham, and other
+officers of the Company's ships were examined, and particularly
+those who had been employed against Ormus. According to their
+statements, it appeared that the amount of this prize-money was
+calculated at &pound;100,000 and 240,000 rials of eight, but
+without taking into view the charges and losses incurred by the
+Company on this occasion, and by their ships being called off
+from commercial engagements, to act as ships of war for the
+protection of their trade against the Portuguese, and in the
+assistance of the government of Persia, by which they had been
+compelled, either to engage in this war, or to relinquish a trade
+in which they had expended large sums, together with the loss of
+all their goods then in Persia. At last the Company was obliged
+to compound, by payment of &pound;10,000 to the Duke of
+Buckingham in discharge of his claim, and received an order from
+the secretary of state, Sir Edward Conway, to pay a similar sum
+also to the crown.--E.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIV.</p>
+
+<p>ACCOUNT OF THE MASSACRE OF AMBOINA, IN 1623.[315]</p>
+
+<p>In the preceding sections of this chapter, the early
+commercial voyages of the English East India Company have been
+detailed; and it is now proposed to conclude this part of our
+arrangement, by a brief narrative of the unjustifiable conduct of
+the Dutch at Amboina, in cruelly torturing and executing several
+Englishmen and others on false pretences of a conspiracy, but the
+real purpose of which was to appropriate to themselves the entire
+trade of the spice islands, Amboina, Banda, and the Moluccas.
+They effectually succeeded in this nefarious attempt, and
+preserved that rich, but ill-got source of wealth, for almost two
+hundred years; till recently expelled from thence, and from every
+other commercial or colonial possession in Asia, Africa, and
+America. A just retribution for submitting to, or seconding
+rather, the revolutionary phrenzy of French democracy; for which
+they now deservedly suffer, under the iron sceptre of the modern
+Atilla.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 315: Purch. Pilgr. II. 1853. Harris, I.
+877.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In giving a short narrative of this infamous transaction,
+besides the original account of Purchas, abridged from a more
+extended relation published at the time by the East India
+Company, advantage has been taken of the account given by Harris
+of the same event, which is fuller and better connected than that
+of Purchas, who most negligently garbled this story, under
+pretence of abbreviation. Harris appears evidently to have used
+the authorised narrative published by the Company, in drawing up
+his account of the event. There are other documents, relative to
+this tragical event, both in the Pilgrims of Purchas and the
+Collection by Harris, particularly the Dutch justificatory
+memorial, in which they endeavour to vindicate their conduct, and
+to shew that the English merited the lingering tortures and
+capital punishments to which they were condemned; to which is
+added a reply or refutation, published by order of the English
+Company. But the abridged narrative contained in this section
+seems quite sufficient on so disgusting a subject, especially so
+long after the events which it records.--E.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>After the fruitless issue of two several treaties, for
+arranging the differences that had taken place in eastern India,
+between the English and Hollanders respecting the trade of the
+spice islands, the first at London in 1613, and the second at the
+Hague in 1616, a third negociation was entered into at London in
+1619, by which a solemn compact was concluded upon for settling
+these disputes, and full and fair arrangement made for the future
+proceedings of the servants of both Companies in the Indies, as
+well in regard to their trade and commerce, as to other matters.
+Among other points, it was agreed, in consideration of the great
+losses the Dutch pretended to have sustained, both in men and
+expence, in conquering the trade of the isles, namely, the
+Moluccas, Banda, and Amboina, from the Spaniards and Portuguese,
+and in the erection of forts for securing the same, that the
+Hollanders were to enjoy two-third parts of that trade, and the
+English one-third; the expences of the forts and garrisons to be
+maintained by taxes and impositions, to be levied ratably on the
+merchandize. In consequence of this agreement, the English East
+India Company established certain factories, for managing their
+share of this trade, some at the Moluccas, some at Banda, and
+others at Amboina.</p>
+
+<p>The island of Amboina, near Ceram, is about forty leagues in
+circuit, and gives its name also to some other small adjacent
+isles. This island produces cloves, for the purpose of procuring
+which valuable spice, the English had five several factories, the
+head and rendezvous of all being at the town of Amboina, in which
+at the first, Mr George Muschamp was chief factor, who was
+succeeded by Mr Gabriel Towerson; having authority over the
+subordinate factories of Hitto and Larica on the same island, and
+at Loho and Cambello on a point of the neighbouring island of
+Ceram. On the island of Amboina and the point of Ceram, the
+Hollanders have four forts, the chief of all being at the town of
+Amboina, which is very strong, having four bastions or bulwarks,
+on each of which there are six great cannons, most of them brass.
+One side of this castle is washed by the sea, and the other is
+protected on the land side by a very deep ditch, four or five
+fathoms broad, always filled by the sea. The garrison of this
+castle consists of about 200 Dutch soldiers, and one company of
+free burghers; besides which there are three or four hundred
+<i>mardykers</i>, by which name the free natives are known, who
+reside in the town, and are always ready to serve in the castle
+at an hour's warning. There are likewise, for the most part,
+several good Dutch ships in the roads, both for the protection of
+this place by sea, and for the purposes of trade, as this is the
+central rendezvous of trade for the Banda islands, as well as for
+Amboina. At this place, the English factory was established in
+the town, under the protection of the castle, in a house of their
+own, where they lived as they thought in security, both in
+consideration of the ancient league of amity between the two
+nations, and in virtue of the firm compact of union, made by the
+late treaty of 1619, already mentioned.</p>
+
+<p>The English factory continued here for about two years,
+trading conjunctly with the Hollanders under the treaty. During
+this period there occurred several differences and debates
+between the servants of the two companies. The English complained
+that the Hollanders not only lavished much unnecessary charges,
+in buildings and other needless expences upon the forts and
+otherwise, but also paid the garrisons in victuals and Coromandel
+cloths, which they issued to the soldiers at three or four times
+the value which they cost, yet would not allow the English
+proportion of the charges to be advanced in like manner, but
+insisted always on their paying in ready money: Thus drawing from
+the English, who only were bound to contribute one-third part,
+more than two-thirds of the just and true charges. Upon this head
+there arose frequent disputes, and the complaints of the English
+were conveyed to Jacatra, now called Batavia, in Java, to the
+<i>council of defence</i> of both nations, there residing. The
+members of that council not being able to agree upon these points
+of difference, the complaints were transmitted to Europe, to be
+settled between the two companies; or, in default of their
+agreement, by the king and the states general, pursuant to one of
+the articles of the before-mentioned treaty, providing against
+such contingencies. In the meantime, these, and other differences
+and discontents between the English and Dutch, daily continued
+and increased, till at length this knot, which all the tedious
+controversies at Amboina and Jacatra were unable to untie, was
+cut asunder by the sword, in the following manner.</p>
+
+<p>About the 11th February, 1622, <i>old style</i>, or 21st of
+that month, 1623, <i>new style</i>, a Japanese soldier belonging
+to the Dutch garrison of Amboina castle, walking one night upon
+the wall, fell into conversation with a centinel, in the course
+of which he asked several questions respecting the strength of
+the fortifications and the number of its garrison. It is to be
+observed, that most of the Japanese in Amboina were actually
+soldiers in the Dutch service, yet not in these trusty bands
+which always lodged within the castle, but only occasionally
+called in from the town to assist in its defence. This Japanese,
+in consequence of his conference with the centinel, was soon
+after apprehended on suspicion of treason, and put to the torture
+by the Dutch, to extort confession. While suffering under the
+torture, he was induced to confess, that he and some others of
+his countrymen had plotted to take possession of the castle.
+Several other Japanese were consequently apprehended, and
+examined by torture; as also a Portuguese, who was guardian or
+superintendent of the slaves belonging to the Dutch. While these
+examinations were going on, which continued during three or four
+days, some of the English, then resident at Amboina, were several
+times in the castle on business, saw the prisoners, and heard of
+the tortures they had undergone, and of the crime laid to their
+charge; yet during all this time, never once suspected that this
+affair had any connection with themselves, being unconscious of
+any evil intentions, and having held no conversation with the
+prisoners.</p>
+
+<p>At this time, one Abel Price, surgeon to the English factory
+at Amboina, was a prisoner in the castle, for having offered or
+attempted, in a fit of drunkenness, to set a Dutchman's house on
+fire. The Dutch shewed this man some of the Japanese whom they
+had tortured, telling him they had confessed that the English
+were in confederacy with them, in the plot for seizing the
+castle, and threatened him with similar or worse tortures, if he
+did not confess the same; and accordingly, on the 15th February,
+O.S. they gave him the torture, and soon made him confess
+whatever they were pleased to direct. That same morning, about
+nine o'clock, they sent for Captain Gabriel Towerson, and the
+other Englishmen belonging to the factory at Amboina, to come to
+speak with the governor of the castle; on which they all went,
+except one, who was left to take care of the house. On their
+arrival, the governor told Captain Towerson, that he and others
+of his nation were accused of a conspiracy to surprise the
+castle, and must therefore remain prisoners, until tried for the
+same. The Dutch, immediately after this, took into custody the
+person who had been left in charge of the English factory,
+sequestrated all the merchandize belonging to the English
+Company, under an inventory, and seized all the chests, boxes,
+books, writings, and other things in the English house.</p>
+
+<p>Captain Towerson was committed prisoner to his own chamber in
+the English house, under a guard of Dutch soldiers. Emanuel
+Thomson was imprisoned in the castle. All the rest, namely, John
+Beaumont, Edward Collins, William Webber, Ephraim Ramsay, Timothy
+Johnson, John Fardo, and Robert Brown, were distributed among the
+Dutch ships then in the harbour, and secured in irons. The same
+day, the governor sent to the two other factories in the same
+island, Hitto and Larica, to apprehend the rest of the English
+residents, who were all brought prisoners to Amboina on the 16th;
+Samuel Colson, John Clark, and George Sharrock, from the former,
+and Edward Collins,[2] William Webber,[2] and John Sadler, from
+the latter. On the same day, John Pocol, John Wetheral, Thomas
+Ladbrook, were apprehended at Cambello, and John Beaumont,[2]
+William Griggs, and Ephraim Ramsay,[316] at Loho; and were all
+brought in irons to Amboina on the 20th of February.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 316: These four persons are already named,
+as apprehended at Amboina.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 15th of February, the governor and fiscal began to
+examine the prisoners. John Beaumont and Timothy Johnson were
+first brought to the castle, John Beaumont being left in a hall
+under a guard, while Johnson was conducted into another room.
+Beaumont soon after heard him cry out very pitifully, then become
+quiet for a while, and afterwards cried out aloud. Abel Price,
+the surgeon, who was first questioned and put to the torture, was
+brought in to confront and accuse him; but as Johnson refused to
+confess any thing laid to his charge, Price was soon taken away,
+and Johnson again put to the question, when Beaumont heard him
+repeatedly roar under the torture. At the end of an hour, Johnson
+was brought out into the hall, weeping and lamenting, all cut and
+cruelly burnt in many parts of his body, and so laid aside in a
+corner of the hall, having a soldier to watch him, with strict
+injunctions not to allow him to speak to any one.</p>
+
+<p>Emanuel Thomson was next brought in for examination, not in
+the same room where Johnson had been, but in one farther from the
+hall; yet Beaumont, who still remained in the hall, heard him
+often roar out most lamentably. After half an hour spent in
+torturing him, he was led to another place, but not through the
+hall where Beaumont was. Beaumont was then called in for
+examination, and asked many questions concerning the alleged
+conspiracy, all knowledge of which he denied with the most solemn
+oaths. He was then made fast on purpose to be tortured, having a
+cloth fastened about his neck, while two men stood ready with
+jars of water to pour on his head: But the governor ordered him
+to be set loose again, saying he would spare him for a day or
+two, being an old man.</p>
+
+<p>Next day, being the 16th, William Webber, Edward Collins,
+Ephraim Ramsay, and Robert Brown, were brought on shore for
+examination; and at the same time Samuel Colson, William Griggs,
+John Clark, George Sharrock, and John Sadler, from Hitto and
+Larica, were brought into the hall. Robert Brown, a tailor, was
+first called in, and being subjected to torture by water,
+confessed all in order, as interrogated by the fiscal. Edward
+Collins was next called in, and told that those who were formerly
+examined had accused him as accessory to the conspiracy for
+taking the castle. Denying all knowledge of or participation in
+any such plot, with great oaths, his hands and feet were made
+fast to the rack, and a cloth bound about his throat, ready to
+administer the water torture, upon which he entreated to be let
+down, saying that he would confess all. On being loosed, he again
+protested his entire innocence and ignorance of every thing laid
+to his charge; yet, as he knew they would make him confess any
+thing they pleased by means of torture, however false, he said
+they would do him a great favour by informing him what they
+wished he should say, which he would speak as they desired, to
+avoid the torture. The fiscal said he mocked them, ordered him to
+be fastened up again, and to receive the water torture. After
+suffering this for some time, he desired to be let down again to
+make his confession, devising as well as he could what he should
+say. Accordingly, he said that he, with Thomson, Johnson, Brown,
+and Fardo, had plotted about ten weeks before, to surprise the
+castle with the aid of the Japanese.</p>
+
+<p>While making this contrived confession, he was interrupted by
+the fiscal, who asked whether Captain Towerson were privy to this
+conspiracy. He protested that Towerson knew nothing of the
+matter. "You lie," said the fiscal, "did not he call you all
+before him, telling you that the daily abuses of the Dutch had
+instigated him to devise a plot, and that he wanted nothing but
+your consent and secrecy?" Then a Dutch merchant who was present,
+named Jan Igost, asked him, if they had not all been sworn to
+secrecy on the Bible? Collins declared with great oaths, that he
+knew nothing of any such matter. He was again ordered to be
+seized up again to the torture, on which he said that all was
+true they had said. Then the fiscal asked, if the English in the
+other factories were consenting to this plot? To which he
+answered, no. The fiscal then next asked, if the English
+president at Jacatra, or Mr Weldon the agent at Banda, were
+engaged in this plot, or privy to its contrivance? He again
+answered, no. The fiscal next enquired by what means the Japanese
+were to have executed their purpose? And, when Collins stood
+amazed, and devising some probable fictions to satisfy them, the
+fiscal helped him out, saying, "Were not two Japanese to have
+gone to each bulwark, and two to the door of the governor's
+chamber, to have killed him on coming out to enquire into the
+disturbance you were to have raised without?" Upon this, a person
+who stood by, desired the fiscal not to put words into the mouth
+of the witness, but to allow him to speak for himself. After this
+reproof, without waiting any answer to his former question, the
+fiscal asked what reward was to have been given the Japanese for
+their services? Collins answered 1000 dollars each. He was then
+asked, when this plot was to have been carried into execution?
+But, although he made no answer to this question, not knowing on
+the sudden what to say, he was dismissed, glad to get away from
+the torture, yet certainly believing they would put him to death
+for his confession.</p>
+
+<p>Samuel Colson was next brought in; and, for fear of the
+tortures that Collins had endured, whom he saw brought out in a
+pitiable condition, with his eyes almost starting out of their
+sockets, he chose rather to confess all they asked, and so was
+quickly dismissed, yet came out weeping and lamenting, and
+protesting his innocence. John Clark was then taken in, and
+tortured with fire and water for two hours, in the same manner as
+had been done with Johnson and Thomson.[317]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 317: The minute description of these
+tortures, in Purchas, and copied in Harris, are disgusting;
+insomuch, that Purchas exclaims at one place, <i>I have no heart
+to proceed</i>. They are here therefore
+omitted,--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Finding that all their cruelties could not force him to any
+consistent confession of himself, they helped him along to
+particular circumstances of their own contrivance, by leading
+questions. Thus wearied out and overpowered, by terror of the
+tortures being renewed, he answered, <i>yes</i>, to whatever they
+asked, by which means they trumped up a body of evidence to this
+effect:--"That Captain Towerson, on new-year's-day last, had
+sworn all the English at Amboina to be secret and aiding in a
+plot he had devised for surprising the castle, by the aid of the
+Japanese, putting the governor and all the Dutch to death."</p>
+
+<p>On the 17th, William Griggs and John Fardo, with some
+Japanese, were brought to examination. The Japanese were first
+cruelly tortured to accuse Griggs, which at last they did; and
+Griggs, to avoid torture, confessed whatever the fiscal was
+pleased to demand. The same was next done with Fardo and other
+Japanese. Fardo endured the torture for some time, but at length
+confessed all they pleased to ask. That same day, John Beaumont
+was brought a second time to the fiscal's chamber, when one
+Captain Newport, the son of a Dutchman, but born and educated in
+England, acted as interpreter. Griggs was also brought in to
+accuse Beaumont of being present at the consultation for
+surprising the castle. Beaumont denied all, with great
+earnestness, and many oaths; but, on enduring the torture, was
+constrained to confess every thing laid to his charge.</p>
+
+<p>George Sharrock was then brought in and examined. He fell on
+his knees, protesting his innocence, telling them he was at Hitto
+on new-year's-day, when the pretended consultation was held, and
+had not been at Amboina since the preceding November, as was well
+known to several Dutchmen who resided at Hitto along with him.
+Being ordered to the rack, he told them he had often heard John
+Clark say that the Dutch had done insufferable wrongs to the
+English, and was resolved to be revenged on them; for which
+purpose he had proposed to Captain Towerson to allow him to go to
+Macassar, to consult with the Spaniards about sending some
+gallies to plunder the small factories of Amboina and Ceram in
+the absence of the ships. Being asked what Captain Towerson had
+said to all this? he answered, that Towerson was very much
+offended with Clark for the proposal, and could never abide him
+since. The fiscal then called him a rogue and liar, saying, that
+he wandered idly from the matter, and must go to the torture. He
+craved favour again, and began another tale, saying, that John
+Clark had told him at Hitto of a plot to surprise the castle of
+Amboina, with the participation of Towerson. He was then asked,
+when this consultation was held? which he said was in November
+preceding. The fiscal said that could not be, for it was on
+new-year's-day. The prisoner urged, as before, that he had not
+been in Amboina since last November, till now that he was brought
+thither in custody. "Why, then," said the fiscal, "have you
+belied yourself?" To this he resolutely answered, that all he had
+confessed respecting a conspiracy was false, and merely feigned
+to avoid torment.</p>
+
+<p>Sharrock was then remanded to prison, but was brought up again
+next day, when a formal confession, in writing, of his
+last-mentioned conference with Clark, respecting the plot for
+surprising the castle of Amboina, was read over to him, after
+which, the fiscal asked, if it were all true. To this he
+answered, that every word of it was false, and that he had
+confessed it solely to avoid torture. The fiscal and the rest
+then said, in rage, that he was a false liar, for it was all
+true, and had been spoken from his own mouth, and therefore he
+must sign it, which he did accordingly. Having done this, he
+broke out into a great passion, charging them as guilty of the
+innocent blood of himself and the rest, which they should have to
+answer for at the judgment-seat of God. He even grappled with the
+fiscal, and would have hindered him from carrying in the
+confession to the governor, but was instantly laid hold of, and
+carried away to prison.</p>
+
+<p>William Webber was next examined; being told by the fiscal
+that Clarke accused him of having sworn to Towerson's plot on
+new-year's-day, with all the other circumstances already
+mentioned; Webber strenuously denied all this, declaring, that he
+was then at Larika, and could not possibly be present in Amboina
+on that day. But, being put to the torture, he was forced to
+confess having been present at the consultation, with all the
+other circumstances in regular order, as asked. He also told of
+having a letter from Clark, in which was a postscript excusing
+his brief writing at this time, as there was then a great
+business in hand. But a Dutch merchant, named Kinder, who was
+present, told the governor that Webber and he were together
+making merry at Larika, on new-year's-day, the time of this
+pretended consultation. The governor then went away, but the
+fiscal held on with him respecting the letter and postscript,
+promising to save his life if he would produce these.</p>
+
+<p>Captain Towerson was next brought in for examination, and was
+shewn what the others had confessed concerning him. He deeply
+professed his innocence, on which Colson was brought in to
+confront him, being assured he should be again tortured unless he
+made good his former confession against Towerson. On this he
+repeated what he had said before, and was then sent away. Griggs
+and Fardo were next brought in, and desired to justify to his
+face what they had before confessed. Captain Towerson seriously
+admonished them, as they should answer at the day of judgment, to
+speak nothing but the truth. They then fell upon their knees,
+beseeching him to forgive them for God's sake, and declared
+openly that all they had formerly said was utterly false, and
+spoken only to avoid the torture. The fiscal then commanded them
+to be led to the torture, which they were unable to endure, and
+again affirmed their former extorted confessions to be true. When
+Colson was required to subscribe this confession, he asked the
+fiscal, upon whose head he thought the sin would rest, whether on
+his who was constrained to confess falsely, or upon the
+constrainer? After a pause on this home-question, the fiscal went
+out to speak with the governor, and returned again shortly,
+commanding him to subscribe. Colson did so, yet with this
+remark,--"You force me to accuse myself and others of that which
+is as false as God is true; for I call God to witness that I and
+they are as innocent as the child unborn."</p>
+
+<p>Having thus examined all the servants of the English company
+in the several factories of the island of Amboina, they began on
+the 21st of February to examine John Wetheral, factor at
+Cambello, in Ceram. He acknowledged being at Amboina on
+new-year's-day, but declared he knew of no other consultation but
+about certain cloth belonging to the company, which lay spoiling
+in the factory, which they considered how best to get sold. The
+governor said he was not questioned about cloth, but treason; and
+protesting his innocence, he was dismissed for that day. Next day
+he was again brought in, and Captain Towerson was produced to
+confront and accuse him, as he had formerly emitted something in
+his confessions against him. But Towerson only desired him to
+speak the truth, and nothing but the truth, as God should put
+into his heart. Mr Towerson was then removed, and Mr Wetheral
+tortured by water, with threats of fire being applied if he did
+not confess. At length, they read over to him the confessions of
+the others, asking him leading questions from point to point, to
+all of which he answered affirmatively, to free himself from
+torture.</p>
+
+<p>John Powel, assistant to Mr Wetheral, was next called; but he
+proved that he had not been at Amboina since November; and being
+likewise spoken for by Jan Joost, his old acquaintance, was
+dismissed without torture. Thomas Ladbrook, servant to Wetheral
+and Powel at Cambello, was then brought in; but he, too, was
+speedily dismissed. Ephraim Ramsay, proving that he was not in
+Amboina on new-year's-day, and being likewise spoken for by
+Joost, was also dismissed, after hanging up some time ready for
+being tortured. Lastly, John Sadler, servant to William Griggs at
+Larika, was brought in for examination; and as he was not in
+Amboina on new-year's-day, he too was dismissed.</p>
+
+<p>On the 25th of February, all the prisoners, English,
+Portuguese, and Japanese, were brought into the great hall of the
+castle, and there solemnly condemned to die, except John Powel,
+Ephraim Ramsay, John Sadler, and Thomas Ladbrook. Next day, they
+were again brought into the hall, except Captain Towerson and
+Emanuel Thomson, to be prepared for death by the Dutch ministers.
+That same night, Colson and Collins were taken into the room
+where Emanuel Thomson lay, when they were told the governor was
+pleased to grant mercy to one of the three, and desired they
+might draw lots, when the free lot fell to Edward Collins, who
+was then carried to the chamber of the acquitted persons
+before-named. John Beaumont was soon after brought to the same
+place, and told that he owed his life to Peter Johnson, the Dutch
+merchant of Loho, and the secretary, who had begged his life. The
+condemned, who still remained in the hall, were afterwards joined
+by the Dutch ministers, and received the sacrament, protesting
+their innocence. Samuel Colson, on this occasion, said, in a loud
+voice, "O Lord, as I am innocent of this treason, do thou pardon
+all my other sins; and, if in the smallest degree guilty thereof
+may I never be a partaker in the joys of thy heavenly kingdom."
+To these words all the rest exclaimed, <i>Amen! for me, Amen! for
+me, good Lord!</i></p>
+
+<p>After this, each, knowing whom he had accused, went one to
+another, craving forgiveness for their false accusations, as
+wrung from them by the pains or dread of torture. They all freely
+forgave their comrades; for none had been so falsely accused, but
+that he also had accused others with equal falseness. In
+particular, George Sharrock, who survived to relate the scene
+exhibited at this time, knelt down to John Clark, whom he had
+accused, as before related, earnestly begging forgiveness. Clark
+freely forgave him, saying, "How shall I look to be forgiven of
+God, if I do not forgive you? as I have myself falsely accused
+Captain Towerson and others!" After this, they spent the rest of
+this doleful night in prayer and psalm-singing, comforting each
+other the best they could. The Dutch who guarded them offered
+them wine, of which they desired them to drink heartily, to drive
+away sorrow, as is the custom of their country in like
+situations, but this the English refused.</p>
+
+<p>Next morning, the 27th February, William Webber was again
+called before the fiscal, and offered his life if he would
+produce the letter and postscript he confessed to have received
+from John Clark, which he could not do, as it never had existed:
+Yet, at last, they pardoned him, and sent him to the rest of
+those who were freed, and Sharrock with him, whom they also
+pardoned. That morning, Emanuel Thomson, learning that John
+Beaumont was pardoned, contrived to have him allowed to visit
+him, which was allowed with much difficulty. Beaumont found him
+in a most miserable condition, the wounds or sores occasioned by
+the torture bound up, but the blood and matter issuing through
+the bandages. Taking Mr Beaumont by the hand, he conjured him,
+when he came to England, to offer his duty to the Honourable
+Company, and others of his friends whom he named, and to assure
+them he died innocent, as was well known to Beaumont.</p>
+
+<p>It is needless to dwell upon the minute circumstances of the
+catastrophe of this bloody tragedy: Suffice it to say, that ten
+Englishmen, one Portuguese, and eleven Japanese, were publicly
+executed; of whom the following is a list:</p>
+
+<p><i>English.</i></p>
+
+<p>Capt. Gabriel Towerson, agent for the English at Amboina.
+Samuel Colson, factor at Hitto. Emanuel Thomson, assistant at
+Amboina. Timothy Johnson, assistant at the same place. John
+Wetheral, assistant at Cambello. John Clark, assistant at
+Hitto.</p>
+
+<p>William Griggs, factor at Larika. John Fardo, steward of the
+factory at Amboina. Abel Price, surgeon to that factory. Robert
+Brown, tailor.</p>
+
+<p>The only Portuguese was Augustine Perez, born in Bengal, who
+was superintendant of the slaves in the employment of the English
+at Amboina.</p>
+
+<p><i>Japanese</i>. Hititso, Tsiosa, and Sinsa, natives of
+Firando. Sidney Migial, Pedro Congie, Thomas Corea, from
+Nangasaki. Quinandaya, a native of Coaets. Tsabinda, a native of
+Tsoncketgo. Zanchae, a native of Fisien.</p>
+
+<p>Besides these, there were two other Japanese tortured, who
+both confessed a participation in the pretended plot, but were
+not executed, or even condemned, for reasons which the surviving
+English did not learn. The executions were all by cutting off the
+heads of the condemned with a scymitar; and the Dutch prepared a
+black velvet pall for Captain Towerson's body to fall upon, which
+they afterwards had the effrontery to charge in account against
+the English East India Company.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XV.</p>
+
+<p>OBSERVATIONS DURING A RESIDENCE IN TISLAND OF CHUSAN, IN 1701,
+BY DOCTOR JAMES CUNNINGHAM; WITH SOME EARLY NOTICES RESPECTING
+CHINA.[318]</p>
+
+<p>Among the early voyages of the English to the East Indies,
+none have been preserved that were made to China, nor have we
+been able to discover any satisfactory account of the
+commencement of the trade of our East India Company with that
+distant country, now said to be by far the most profitable branch
+of the exclusive commerce. In the <i>Annals of the
+Company</i>,[319] several references are made to the China trade,
+but more in the nature of notices or memoranda for the purpose of
+after investigation, than as conveying any actual information on
+the subject. In this singular paucity of materials, we are
+reduced to the following short "Observations and Remarks, by
+Doctor James Cunningham, made during his Residence as Physician
+to the English Factory at the Island of Chusan, on the Coast of
+China." Doctor Cunningham is stated by Harris to have been a
+fellow of the Royal Society, distinguished by his natural talents
+and acquired accomplishments, well versed in ancient and modern
+learning, and to have diligently used these advantages in making
+judicious remarks on the places where he resided in the service
+of the Company. Yet all that has been recorded by Harris of these
+remarks, give only a very imperfect account of Chusan and of
+China. This short article consists of extracts from two letters
+written by Cunningham from Chusan, and a brief supplement by
+Harris respecting two unfortunate factories at Pulo Condore and
+Pulo Laut.--E.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 318: Harris. I. 852.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 319: Annals of the E.I. Co. vol. II. and
+III. <i>passim</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.1. <i>Voyage to Chusan, and short Notices of that
+Island</i>.[320]</p>
+
+<p>In my last letter, from the island of Borneo, I gave you an
+account of our arrival at that island on the 17th July. We only
+remained there two days, as the season of the year was already
+far advanced, and made the best of our way from thence through
+the Straits of Banda,[321] with favourable winds and weather. We
+got upon the coast of China on the 13th August, when we had
+variable winds, which carried us abreast of <i>Emoy</i>[322] by
+the 19th following. The wind then set in fresh at N.E. so that we
+were in great fear of losing our passage, and were now obliged to
+beat up all the way against both wind and current; yet the
+weather remained so favourable that we were never obliged to hand
+our top-sails, otherwise we must have lost more way in a single
+day than we could have recovered in eight. On the 31st August we
+came to anchor under the <i>Crocodile islands</i>,[323] both for
+shelter from the bad weather, usual on this coast at new and
+full-moon, which has been fatal to many ships, and also to
+procure fresh water, now scarce with us, as we had not recruited
+our store since leaving the Cape of Good Hope. These are three
+small islands in lat. 26&deg; N. about six leagues from the river
+of <i>Hokien</i>, [Fo-kien] on two of which we found very good
+water, with a convenient landing-place on the S.W. side of the
+innermost island. By the assistance of some Chinese fishers, we
+procured also some fresh provisions from the main land, not
+thinking it safe to venture there ourselves, lest we may have
+been brought into trouble by the governor of that part of the
+country. While here, on the 5th September, we had a sudden short
+shift of the monsoon from the S.W. blowing with great fury; which
+was also experienced by other vessels then coming on the coast of
+China. We again put to sea on the 18th September, turning to
+windward night and day on the outside of all the islands, which
+are very numerous all along this coast, but with which we were
+unacquainted after passing beyond <i>Emoy</i>. Besides, the
+hydrography of this coast is hitherto so very imperfect, that we
+could not trust in any degree to our draughts, owing to which our
+navigation was both difficult and dangerous.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 320: From a letter to a member of the Royal
+Society, dated in September, 1701.--Harris.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 321: This must have been the straits of
+Macasser, as Banda is far out of the way between Borneo and
+China.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 322: Emoy or Amoy, was on the coast of
+China, opposite to the island of Formosa, and appears, from the
+Annals, to have been the first port frequented by the ships of
+the India Company for the Chinese trade.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 323: The islands of Pe-la-yang are, in the
+indicated latitude, off the estuary of the principal river of the
+province of Fo-kien.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 1st October, we got into the latitude of 30&deg; N.
+where we came to anchor near the land, and found our way by boat
+to <i>Chusan</i>,[324] about twelve leagues within the islands,
+whence we got a pilot, who brought our ship safely to that place
+on the 11th of the month. The Chinese government have granted us
+a settlement on that island, with the liberty of trade; but do
+not allow us to go up to Ning-po,[325] which is six or eight
+hours sail to the westwards, all the way among islands, of which
+this of Chusan is the largest, being eight or nine leagues from
+E. to W. and four or five from N. to S.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 324: Tcheou-chan, an island about twenty
+English miles in length from E. to W. in lat. 30&deg; 23' N.
+long. 121&deg; 43' E. off the estuary of Ning-po river, in the
+province of Che-kiang, is obviously the Chusan of the
+text--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 325: The city of Ning-po stands at the head
+of a bay, stretching from the S. side of the estuary of the river
+of the same name, in lat. 30&deg; 10' N. long. 121&deg; E. It
+appears, from the Annals, that the English had been excluded from
+trading at Canton, by the influence of the Portuguese in
+Macao.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>About three leagues from the point of land named <i>Liampo</i>
+by the Portuguese, and <i>Khi-tu</i> by the Chinese, there is a
+very safe and convenient harbour at the west end of this island,
+where the ships ride within call of the factory, which stands
+close to the shore in a low flat valley, having near two hundred
+houses built around for the benefit of trade. The town of Chusan,
+of which the houses are very mean, is about three quarters of a
+mile farther from the shore, and is surrounded by a fine stone
+wall, flanked at irregular distances by twenty-two square
+bastions or towers; and has four great gates, on which a few old
+iron guns are planted, seldom or never used. The <i>chumpeen</i>,
+or governor of the island, resides here, and the town contains
+about three or four thousand beggarly inhabitants, mostly
+soldiers and fishers; for, as the trade of this island has only
+been granted of late, it has not hitherto attracted any
+considerable merchants.</p>
+
+<p>This island abounds in all sorts of provisions, as cows,
+buffaloes, deer, hogs, both wild and tame, geese, ducks, poultry,
+rice, wheat, calavanccs, cole-worts, turnips, carrots, potatoes,
+beets, spinach, and so forth. It has, however, no merchandise,
+except what comes from Ning-po, Stan-chew,[326] Nankin, and other
+inland towns and cities. Some of these I hope to see, when I have
+acquired a little of the Chinese language. Tea grows here in
+great plenty on the tops of the hills, but is not so much
+esteemed as that which grows on more mountainous islands.
+Although tolerably populous, this island is far from being what
+it was in the time of Father Martini, who describes it under the
+name of <i>Cheu-xan</i>. The superstitious pilgrimages mentioned
+by him, must refer to the island of Pou-to,[327] which is nine
+leagues from this place, and to another island three miles to the
+eastwards, to which the emperor proposes coming to worship at a
+pagoda greatly renowned for its sanctity, in the ensuing month of
+May, being his birth-day, and the fortieth year of his age. One
+of his bonzes is already come there, to get all things in
+order.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 326: Probably Hang-tcheon, a city about
+forty miles W. from Ning-po.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 327: Pou-teou, is directly E. from the
+eastern end of Tcheou-chan.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.2. <i>Ancient and modern State of the Country, and of the
+coming of the English to reside there.[328]</i></p>
+
+<p>In my former letter, I informed you that the emperor designed
+to have come to worship at Pou-to in May last, being the fortieth
+year of his age, but I ought to have said of his reign. After
+every thing was prepared for his reception, he was dissuaded from
+his purpose by some of his mandarins, who made him believe that
+the thunder at that place was very dangerous. This Pou-to is a
+small island, only about five leagues round, and at the east end
+of Chusan. It has been famous for the space of eleven hundred
+years, for the superstitious pilgrimages made to it, and is only
+inhabited by bonzes to the number of three thousand, all of the
+sect of <i>Heshang,</i> or unmarried bonzes, who live a
+Pythagorean life. They have built four hundred pagodas, two of
+which are considerable for their size and splendour, and were
+lately covered with green and yellow tiles, brought from the
+emperor's palace at Nankin. They are adorned within by stately
+idols, finely carved and gilded, the chief of these being an idol
+named <i>Quonem.</i> To-these two pagodas there are two chief
+priests, who govern all the rest. They have many walks and
+avenues cut in different directions through the island, some of
+which are paved with flag-stones, and overshaded by trees planted
+on both sides. The dwellings of the bonzes are the best I have
+seen in these parts, all of which are maintained by charitable
+donations. All the Chinese junks which sail from Ning-po and
+Chusan touch at Pou-to, both outwards and homewards-bound, making
+offerings for the safety of their voyages. There is another
+island named <i>Kim-Tong,</i>[329] five leagues from hence, on
+the way towards Ning-po, where a great many mandarins are said to
+live in retirement, after having given up their employments. On
+that island there are said to be silver mines, but prohibited
+from being opened. The rest of the circumjacent islands are
+either desert, or very meanly inhabited, but all of them abound
+in deer.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 328: The sequel of these observations is
+said by Harris to have been taken from another letter to the same
+correspondent with the former, and dated in November, 1701; but,
+from circumstances in the text, it would appear to have been
+written in 1702.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 329: Probably that named Silver-island in
+modern maps.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>It is not long since this island of Chusan began to be
+inhabited. Yet in the days of Father Martini, about fifty years
+ago, it was very populous for three or four years; at which time,
+in the fury of the Tartar conquest, it was laid entirely
+desolate, not even sparing the mulberry trees, which were then
+numerous, as they made a great deal of raw silk here. It
+continued in this desolate condition till about eighteen years
+ago, when the walls of the present town were built by the
+governor of <i>Ting-hai</i>, as a strong-hold for a garrison, in
+order to expel some pirates who had taken shelter on the island.
+As the island began to grow populous, a <i>chumpeen</i> was sent
+to govern it for three years, to whom the late chumpeen
+succeeded, who continued till last April, and procured licence to
+open this port to strangers. On the last chumpeen being promoted
+to the government of <i>Tien-ching-wei</i>[330] near Pekin, he
+was succeeded by the present governor, who is son to the old
+chumpeen of Emoy. They have no arts or manufactures in this
+island, except lacquered ware; the particulars of which I cannot
+as yet send you. They have begun to plant mulberry-trees, in
+order to breed up silk-worms for the production of raw silk; and
+they gather and cure some tea, but chiefly for their own use.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 330: Probably that called Tien-sing in
+modern maps, on the river Pay, between Pekin and the
+sea.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>S.3. <i>Of the Manner of cultivating Tea in Chusan</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The three sorts of tea usually carried to England are all from
+the same plant, their difference being occasioned by the soils in
+which they grow, and the season of the year at which they are
+gathered. The <i>bohea</i>, or <i>vo-u-i</i>, so called from
+certain mountains in the province of <i>Token</i>,[331] where it
+is chiefly made, is the very bud, gathered in the beginning of
+March, and dried in the shade. The tea named <i>bing</i> is the
+second growth, gathered in April, and <i>siriglo</i> is the last
+growth, gathered in May and June; both of these being gently
+dried over the fire in <i>taches</i> or pans. The tea shrub is an
+evergreen, being in flower from October to January, and the seed
+ripens in the September or October following, so that both flower
+and seed may be gathered at the same time; but for one fully
+ripened seed, an hundred are abortive. There are the two sorts of
+seeds mentioned by Father Le Compte, in his description of tea;
+and what be describes as a third sort, under the name of
+<i>slymie</i> pease, consists merely of the young flower-buds,
+not yet open. The seed vessels of the tea tree are
+three-capsular, each capsule containing one nut or seed; and
+though often two or one of these only come to perfection, yet the
+vestiges of the rest may easily be discerned. It grows naturally
+in a dry gravelly soil on the sides of hills, without any
+cultivation, in several places of this island.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 331: Fo-kien is almost certainly here
+meant--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Le Compte is mistaken in saying that the Chinese are ignorant
+of the art of grafting; for I nave seen many of his paradoxical
+tallow-trees ingrafted here, besides trees of other sorts. When
+they ingraft, they do not slit the stock as we do, but slice off
+the outside of the stock, to which they apply the graft, which is
+cut sloping on one side, to correspond with the slice on the
+stock, bringing the bark of the slice up on the outside of the
+graft, after which the whole is covered up with mud and straw,
+exactly as we do. The commentator on Magalhen seems doubtful as
+to the length of the Chinese <i>che</i> or cubit. At this island
+they have two sorts, one measuring thirteen inches and
+seven-tenths English, which, is commonly used by merchants; the
+other is only eleven inches, being used by carpenters, and also
+in geographical measures. Though Father Martini is censured by
+Magalhen for spelling a great many Chinese words with <i>ng</i>,
+which the Portuguese and others express with <i>in</i>, yet his
+way is more agreeable to our English pronunciation and
+orthography; only the g may be left out in Pekin, Nankin, and
+some others.</p>
+
+<p>Having made enquiry about what is mentioned by Father Martini
+of sowing their <i>fields</i> at <i>Van-cheu</i> with
+oyster-shells, to make new ones grow, I was told, that after they
+have taken out the oysters, they sprinkle the empty shells with
+urine, and throw them into the water, by which means there grow
+new oysters on the old shells.[332] Martini says he could never
+find a Latin name for the <i>Tula Mogorin</i> of the Portuguese;
+but I am sure it is the same with the <i>Syringa arabica, flore
+pleno albo</i>, of Parkinson. Martini also says that the
+<i>kieu-yeu</i>, or tallow-tree, bears a white flower, like that
+of the cherry-tree: But all that I have seen here bear spikes of
+small yellow flowers, like the <i>julus</i> of the <i>Salix</i>.
+The bean-broth, or mandarin-broth, so frequently mentioned in the
+Dutch embassy, and by other authors, is only an emulsion made of
+the seeds of <i>sesamum</i> with hot water.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 332: This strange story may possibly be
+thus explained. At certain seasons, numerous minute oysters may
+be seen sticking to the shells of the old ones; and the Chinese
+may have thrown the emptied shells into the sea, in the highly
+probable expectation of these minute oysters continuing to live
+and grow. The circumstances in the text are absurd additions,
+either from ignorance or imposition.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The chief employments of the people here are fishing and
+agriculture. In fishing, they use several sorts of nets and lines
+as we do; but, as there are great banks of mud in some places,
+the fishermen have contrived a small frame, three or four feet
+long, not much larger than a hen-trough, and a little elevated at
+each end, to enable them to go more easily on these mud banks.
+Resting with one knee on the middle of one of these frames, and
+leaning his arms on a cross stick raised breast high, he uses the
+other foot on the mud to push the frame and himself forwards.</p>
+
+<p>In their agricultural operations, all their fields on which
+any thing is to be cultivated, whether high or low, are formed
+into such plots or beds as may admit of retaining water over them
+when the cultivator thinks proper. The lands are tilled by
+ploughs drawn by one cow or buffalo; and when it is intended to
+sow rice, the soil is remarkably well prepared and cleared from
+all weeds, after which it is moistened into the state of a pulp,
+and smoothed by a frame drawn across, when the rice is sown very
+thick, and covered over with water, only to the height of two or
+three inches. When the seedling plants are six or eight inches
+long, they are all pulled up, and transplanted in straight lines
+into other fields, which are overflowed with water; and, when
+weeds grow up, they destroy them by covering them up in the
+interstices between the rows of rice, turning the mud over them
+with their hands. When they are to sow wheat, barley, pulse, or
+other grain, they grub up the surface of the ground
+superficially, earth, grass, and rook, and mixing this with some
+straw, burn all together. This earth, being sifted fine, they mix
+with the seed, which they sow in holes made in straight lines, so
+that it grows in tufts or rows like the rice. The field is
+divided into regular beds, well harrowed both before and after
+the seed is sown, which makes them resemble gardens. The rice
+grounds are meliorated merely by letting water into them; but for
+the other grains, where the soil requires it, they use dung,
+night-soil, ashes, and the like. For watering their fields, they
+use the machine mentioned by Martini in the preface to his Atlas,
+being entirely constructed of wood, and the same in principle
+with the chain-pump.</p>
+
+<p>In order to procure salt, as all the shores are of mud instead
+of sand, they pare off in summer the superficial part of this
+mud, which has been overflowed by the sea-water, and lay it up in
+heaps, to be used in the following manner: Having first dried it
+in the sun, and rubbed it into a fine powder, they dig a pit, the
+bottom of which is covered with straw, and from the bottom a
+hollow cane leads through the side of the pit to a jar standing
+below the level of the bottom. They then fill the pit almost full
+of the dried salt mud, and pour on sea-water till it stands two
+or three inches above the top of the mud. This sea-water drains
+through the mud, carrying the salt along with it from the mud as
+well as its own, and runs out into the jar much-saturated with
+salt; which is afterwards procured by boiling.</p>
+
+<p>S.4. <i>Of the famous Medicinal Root, called
+Hu-tchu-u</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Having last year seen, in a newspaper, some account of a
+singular root, brought from China by Father Fontaney, I shall
+inform you that I have seen this root since my arrival at Chuaan.
+It is called <i>Hu-tchu-n</i>[333] by the Chinese, and they
+ascribe to it most wonderful virtues, such as prolonging life,
+and changing grey hair to black, by using its infusion by way of
+tea. It is held in such high estimation as to be sold at a great
+price, as I have been told, from ten tael up to a thousand, or
+even two thousand tael-for a single root; for the larger it is,
+so much the greater is its fancied value and efficacy: But the
+price is too high to allow me to try the experiment. You will
+find it mentioned in the <i>Medecina Sinica</i> of Cleyer, No.
+84; under the name of <i>He-xeu-ti</i>, according to the
+Portuguese orthography. It is also figured in the 27th table of
+the plants which Mr <i>Pettier</i> had from me. The following is
+the story of its discovery, which I will not warrant for
+gospel.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 333: This is probably the ginseng, so famed
+for its fancied virtues.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Once upon a time, a certain person went to gather simples
+among the mountains, and fell by some accident into a vale of
+which the sides were so steep that he was unable to get out
+again. In this situation, he had to look about for some means to
+support life, and discovered this root, of which he made trial,
+and found that it served him both as food and cloathing; for it
+preserved his body in such a temperature, that the injuries of
+the weather had no evil influence upon him during a residence of
+several hundred years. At length, by means of an earthquake, the
+mountains were rent, and he found a passage from the vale to his
+house, whence he had been so long absent. But so many alterations
+had taken place during his long absence, that nobody would
+believe his story; till, on consulting the annals of his family,
+they found that one of them had been lost at the time he
+mentioned, which confirmed the truth of his relation.--This is a
+fable, not even credited among the Chinese, invented merely to
+blazon forth the virtues of this wonderful root.</p>
+
+<p>S.5. <i>Removal of Dr Cunningham to Pulo Condore, with an
+Account of the Rise, Progress, and Ruin of that
+Factory</i>.[334]</p>
+
+<p>The English factory at Chusan was broken up in the year 1702,
+so that Dr Cunningham had very little time allowed him for making
+his proposed observations respecting China. From this place he
+removed to another new settlement at <i>Pulo Condore,</i> in a
+small cluster of four or five islands, about fifteen leagues
+south of the west channel of the river of Camboja, usually called
+the Japanese river.[335] I am unable to say what were the
+advantages proposed from this factory; but, from the memoirs I
+have seen on the subject, this place seems to have been very ill
+chosen, and much worse managed. The person who had at this time
+the management and direction of the affairs belonging to the East
+India Company in this distant part of the world, was one Mr
+Katchpole, who, according to the usual custom of the Europeans in
+eastern India at this period, took into the service a certain
+number of Macassers or native soldiers, by whose assistance he
+soon constructed a small fort for the protection of the factory.
+So far as I can learn, the most indispensable necessaries of
+life, water, wood, and fish, were all that these islands ever
+afforded.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 334: This and the subsequent subdivision of
+the section are related historically by Harris.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 335: Pulo Condore is in lat. 8&deg; 45' N.
+long. 106&deg; 5' E. and the object of a factory at this place
+was evidently to endeavour to secure a portion of the trade of
+China, from which the English at this time were excluded by the
+arts of the Portuguese at Macao, as we learn from the Annals; as
+also to combine some trade with Siam, Camboja, Tsiompa,
+Cochin-China, and Tonquin.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Macassers are a brave, industrious, and faithful people,
+to such as deal fairly with them; and on this account are highly
+esteemed in the Eastern Indies, more especially by the Dutch.
+They are, however, daring, cruel, and revengeful, if once
+provoked. Mr Katchpole had contracted with these men to serve for
+three years, at the end of which period, if they pleased, they
+were to receive their wages and to depart: But he, though they
+strictly performed their part of the agreement, broke faith with
+them, keeping them beyond their time against their will. In
+addition to this great breach in morality, he added as notorious
+an error in politics; for, after provoking these men so
+egregiously by refusing to fulfil his engagement, he still
+confided to them the guard of his own person and the custody of
+the factory. This gave them ample opportunity of revenging the
+ill usage they had met with, and with that ferocity which is so
+natural to untutored barbarians. They rose in mutiny one night,
+and murdered Mr Katchpole, and all who were at the time along
+with him in the factory. A few, who happened to lodge on the
+outside of the fort, hearing the cries of their friends within
+during the massacre, fled from their beds to the sea-shore;
+where, by a singular interposition of Providence, they found a
+bark completely ready for sea, in which they embarked half naked,
+and put immediately to sea, just in time to escape the rage of
+the Macassers, who came in search of them to the shore, precisely
+when they had weighed anchor and pushed off to sea.</p>
+
+<p>Dr Cunningham was one of the number who escaped on this
+occasion. Their navigation was attended with excessive
+difficulty, being exposed at the same time to incredible fatigue,
+and to the utmost extremity of hunger and thirst: But at length,
+after a tedious and difficult course of an hundred leagues, in
+the most wretched condition, they reached a small creek in the
+dominions of the king of Johor, where they were received with
+kindness.</p>
+
+<p>S.6. <i>Some Account of the Factory at Pulo Laut, with the
+Overthrow of that Factory, and of the English Trade to
+Borneo</i>.</p>
+
+<p>A year or two after this ruin of the factory at Pulo Condore,
+the Company thought fit to order the establishment of a new
+factory on the coast of the great island of Borneo. On the south
+of that vast island, there is a small isle called Pulo Laut,
+having an excellent harbour. The country here is but thinly
+peopled, and yields nothing except rice; but, as it lies near the
+mouth of the great rivers which come from the pepper countries in
+the interior; it is extremely well situated for trade. Between
+this island and the great island of Borneo, there is a channel
+about two miles wide in most places, narrower in some and broader
+in others, and having from seven to five fathoms water the whole
+way through. On the coast of this channel there are several
+rising grounds fit for building on, and which were therefore
+extremely proper for the situation of a factory, which, it may be
+presumed, induced those who had the direction of the Company's
+affairs, to make choice of this place.</p>
+
+<p>One Captain Barry, who is said to have been a very ingenious
+gentleman, had the charge of establishing this new factory, in
+which he is reported to have acted with much skill and prudence.
+But he died before the works were completed; and the direction of
+the factory devolved upon Doctor Cunningham, who came to this
+place after the ruin of the factory at Pulo Condore. He is said
+to have given himself so entirely up to his studies, that he left
+the care of the Company's concerns too much to the people who
+were under him, who were unequal to the trust, and proved the
+ruin of the factory. Before the fort was half finished, these
+people began to insult the natives of the country; and, among
+other wanton acts of folly, they very imprudently chose to search
+one of the boats belonging to the king, which was carrying a
+female of rank down the river. This so provoked the Bornean
+sovereign that he determined upon the utter destruction of the
+English; for which purpose he collected his forces together,
+amounting to about three thousand resolute men, which he embarked
+in above an hundred proas, and sent them down to attack the
+factory and unfinished fort.</p>
+
+<p>There happened at this time to be two ships belonging to the
+Company in the river, besides two merchant vessels of
+inconsiderable force; and as Cunningham and his people had
+received advice of the preparations making against them, they
+left their factory, taking refuge aboard the ships, thinking
+themselves in greater security there than ashore. When all things
+were in readiness for the intended assault, the native armament
+came down the river in the night; and, while some landed and
+destroyed the factory and fortifications, others attacked the
+ships, which were fortunately prepared for their reception, the
+English having made fast nettings along both sides of their
+ships, about two fathoms high above the gunnels, to prevent the
+enemy from boarding, and were in readiness to use their
+blunderbusses and pikes, to prevent them from forcing their way
+to the decks.</p>
+
+<p>On seeing the approach of the proas towards the ships, the
+English plied their great guns, loaded with double, round, and
+partridge shot, and made great carnage among the Borneans, yet
+this did not deter them from pushing forwards and using their
+utmost endeavours to board. But, having got up to the gunnels,
+they were unable to get over the netting, and so were slaughtered
+with great ease by the English from the decks. Some of the
+assailants got in at the <i>head doors</i> of one of the ships
+and killed a few of the English on the forecastle, but were soon
+overpowered and slain. Thus, after a long and sanguinary contest,
+the two large ships beat off the enemy with small loss; but the
+two little vessels were both burnt with most of their men, among
+whom was one Mynheer Hoogh Camber, a Dutch gentleman who had been
+ambassador of the king of Persia, and had fled from Batavia in
+one of these small vessels. Some say that the English killed
+above fifteen hundred of the assailants in two hours, for the
+heat of the assault continued during that space, besides many
+others wounded and maimed. But the English were under the
+necessity of abandoning the settlement at Pulo Laut.</p>
+
+<p>The Bornean king or rajah thought his revenge had gone far
+enough in driving the English from their factory: And, finding
+his revenue considerably diminished by the loss of trade with the
+English, he sent notice to such of them as traded to Johor, and
+other places in the neighbourhood of Borneo, that he would still
+admit them to trade in his dominions on the old footing, but
+would never allow them or any other nation to erect forts in his
+territories. Several English vessels have been there since to
+load pepper, and were civilly treated. The Dutch also sent a ship
+there from Batavia in the year 1712; but the natives refused to
+have any dealings with them.</p>
+
+<h2>END OF THE NINTH VOLUME.</h2>
+
+<pre>
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, Volume IX., by Robert Kerr
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOL. IX. ***
+
+***** This file should be named 13055-8.txt or 13055-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/0/5/13055/
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+</pre>
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/old/13055.txt b/old/13055.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ec7305c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13055.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,22473 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of Voyages
+and Travels, Volume IX., by Robert Kerr
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: A General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, Volume IX.
+
+Author: Robert Kerr
+
+Release Date: July 30, 2004 [EBook #13055]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOL. IX. ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS,
+
+ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:
+
+FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF NAVIGATION,
+DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE, BY SEA AND LAND, FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE
+PRESENT TIME.
+
+BY
+
+ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. & F.A.S. EDIN.
+
+ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.
+
+VOL. IX.
+
+MDCCCXXIV. CONTENTS
+
+OF
+
+VOL. IX.
+
+PART II. BOOK III. CONTINUED.
+
+CHAP. X. (_Continued_.)
+
+Early Voyages of the English to India, after the Establishment of the
+East India Company
+
+SECT. XV. (_Continued_)--Eighth Voyage of the English East-India
+Company, in 1611, by Captain John Saris
+
+Sec.5. Further Observations respecting the Moluccas, and the Completion of
+the Voyage to Japan
+
+Sec.6. Arrival at Brando, and some Account of the Habits, Manners, and
+Customs of the Japanese
+
+Sec.7. Journey of Captain Saris to the Court of the Emperor, with his
+Observations there and by the Way
+
+Sec.8. Occurrences at Firando during the Absence of Captain Saris
+
+Sec.9. Continuation of these Occurrences
+
+Sec.10. Conclusion of these
+
+Sec.11. Occurrences at Firando, after the return of Captain Saris
+
+Sec.12. Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence to England
+
+Sec.I3. Intelligence concerning Yedso or Jesso, received from a Japanese at
+Jedo, who had been twice there
+
+Sec.14. Note of Commodities vendible in Japan
+
+Sec.15. Supplementary Notices of Occurrences in Japan, after the departure
+of Captain Saris
+
+SECT. XVI. Ninth Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1612, by Captain
+Edward Marlow
+
+SECT. XVII. Tenth Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1612, written by
+Mr Thomas Best, Chief Commander
+
+Sec.1. Observations during the Voyage from England to Surat
+
+Sec.2. Transactions with the Subjects of the Mogul, Fights with the
+Portuguese, Settlement of a Factory and Departure for Acheen
+
+Sec.3. Occurrences at Acheen in Sumatra
+
+Sec.4. Trade at Tecoo and Passaman, with the Voyage to Bantam, and thence
+to England
+
+SECT. XVIII. Observations made during the foregoing Voyage, by Mr
+Copland, Chaplain, Mr Robert Boner, Master, and Mr Nicholas Whittington,
+Merchant
+
+Sec.1. Notes extracted from the Journal of Mr Copland, Chaplain of the
+Voyage
+
+Sec.2. Notes extracted from the Journal of Mr Robert Boner, who was Master
+of the Dragon
+
+Sec.3. Extract from a Treatise by Mr Nicholas Whittington, who was left as
+Factor in the Mogul Country by Captain Best, containing some of his
+Travels and Adventures
+
+SECT. XIX. Eleventh Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1612, in the
+Salomon
+
+SECT. XX. Twelfth Voyage of the East-India Company, in 1613, by Captain
+Christopher Newport
+
+Sec.1. Observations at St Augustine, Mohelia, and divers Parts of Arabia
+
+Sec.2. Proceedings on the Coast of Persia, and Treachery of the Baloches
+
+Sec.3. Arrival at Diul-ginde, and landing of the Ambassador: Seeking Trade
+there, are crossed by the slanderous Portuguese: Go to Sumatra and
+Bantam; and thence to England
+
+CHAP XI. Continuation of the Early Voyages of the English East India
+Company to India
+
+Introduction
+
+SECT. I. Voyage of Captain Nicholas Downton to India, in 1614
+
+Sec.1. Incidents at Saldanha, Socotora, and Swally; with an Account of the
+Disagreements between the Moguls and Portuguese, and between the Nabob
+and the English
+
+Sec.2. Account of the Forces of the Portuguese, their hostile Attempts and
+Fight with the English, in which they are disgracefully repulsed
+
+Sec.3. Supplies received by the Portuguese, who vainly endeavour to use
+Fire-boats. They seek Peace, which is refused, and depart. Interview
+between the Nabob and Captain Downton, and Departure of the English
+
+SECT. II. Relations by Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, in Supplement to
+preceding Voyage
+
+Sec.1. Continuation of the Voyage from Surat to Bantam, by Captain Thomas
+Elkington
+
+Sec.2. Brief Observations by Mr Edward Dodsworth, who returned to England
+in the Hope
+
+SECT. III. Journey of Richard Steel and John Crowther, from Agimere, in
+India, to Ispahan, in Persia, in the Years 1615, and 1616
+
+SECT. IV. Voyage of Captain Walter Peyton to India, in 1615
+
+Sec.1. Occurrences during the Voyage from England to Surat
+
+Sec.2. Occurrences at Calicut and Sumatra. Miscarriage of the English
+Ships, Abuses of the Dutch, and Factories in India
+
+Sec.3. Brief Notice of the Ports, Cities, and Towns, inhabited by, and
+traded with, by the Portuguese, between the Cape of Good Hope and Japan,
+in the Year 1616
+
+SECT. V. Notes, concerning the Proceedings of the Factory at Cranganore,
+from the Journal of Roger Hawes
+
+SECT. VI. Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Ambassador from James I. to Shah
+Jehanguire, Mogul Emperor of Hindoostan
+
+Introduction
+
+Sec.1. Journey from Surat to the Court of the Mogul, and Entertainment
+there, with some Account of the Customs of the Country
+
+Sec.2. Occurrences in June, July, and August, 1616, from which the
+Character and Dispositions of the Mogul and his Subjects may be observed
+
+Sec.3. Of the Celebration of the King's Birth-day, with other Occurrences,
+in September, 1616
+
+Sec.4. Broils about Abdala Khan, and Khan-Khannan: Ambitious Projects of
+Sultan Churrum to subvert his eldest Brother: Sea-fight with a
+Portuguese Carrack; and various other Occurrences
+
+Sec.5. Continuation of Occurrences at Court, till leaving Agimere, in
+November, 1616
+
+Sec.6. Sir Thomas Roe follows the Progress of the Court, and describes the
+King's Leskar, &c.
+
+Sec.7. A New-year's Gift--Suspicion entertained of the
+English--Dissatisfaction of the Persian Ambassador--English Ships of War
+in the Indian Seas
+
+Sec.8 Asaph Khan and Noormahal protect the English from Hope of
+Gain.--Arrival of Mr Steel.--Danger to the Public from private
+Trade--Stirs about a Fort
+
+SECT. VII. Relation of a Voyage to India in 1616, with Observations
+respecting the Dominions of the Great Mogul, by Mr Edward Terry
+
+Sec.1. Occurrences during the Voyage from England to Surat
+
+Sec.2. Description of the Mogul Empire
+
+Sec.3. Of the People of Hindoostan, and their Manners and Customs
+
+Sec.4. Of the Sects, Opinions, Rites Priests, &c. of the Hindoos; with
+other Observations
+
+SECT. VIII. Journey of Thomas Coryat by Land, from Jerusalem to the
+Court of the Great Mogul
+
+Sec.1. Letter from Agimere to Mr L. Whitaker, in 1615
+
+Sec.2. Do. from Agra to his Mother, in 1616
+
+Sec.3. Some Observations concerning India, by Coryat
+
+SECT. IX. Account of the Wrongs done to the English at Banda by the
+Dutch, in 1617 and 1618
+
+SECT. X. Fifth Voyage of the Joint-stock by the English East India
+Company, in 1617, under the Command of Captain Martin Pring
+
+Sec.1. Occurrences on the Voyage out, and at Surat, Bantam, and Jacatra
+
+Sec.2. Dutch Injustice, and Sea-fight between them and Sir Thomas Dale
+
+Sec.3. Departure for Coromandel, with Occurrences there, and Death of Sir
+Thomas Dale.--Capture of English Ships by the Dutch; and Occurrences at
+Tecoo
+
+Sec.4. News of Peace between the English and Dutch
+
+Sec.5. Voyage of Captain Pring from Bantam to Patania and Japan
+
+Sec.6. Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence to England
+
+SECT. XI. Voyage of the Ann-royal, from Surat to Mokha, in 1618
+
+SECT. XII. Journal of a Voyage to Surat and Jasques in 1620
+
+Sec.1. Voyage from England to Surat
+
+Sec.2. Voyage from Surat towards Jasques
+
+Sec.3. Account of a Sea-fight with the Portuguese
+
+Sec.4. Second Sea-fight with the Portuguese
+
+Sec.5. Sequel of the Voyage
+
+SECT. XIII. Relation of the War of Ormus, and the Capture of that Place
+by the English and Persians, in 1622
+
+SECT. XIV. Account of the Massacre of Amboina, in 1623
+
+SECT. XV. Observations during a Residence in the Island of Chusan, in
+1701, by Dr James Cunningham; with some early Notices respecting China
+
+Sec.1. Voyage to Chusan, and short Notices of that Island
+
+Sec.2. Ancient and modern State of the Country, and coming of the English
+to reside there
+
+Sec.3. Manner of cultivating Tea in Chusan
+
+Sec.4. Of the famous Medicinal Root called H-tchu-u
+
+Sec.5. Removal of Dr Cunningham to Pulo-Condore, with an Account of the
+Rise, Progress, and Ruin of that Factory
+
+Sec.6. Some Account of the Factory at Pulo-Laut, with the Overthrow of that
+Factory, and of the English Trade in Borneo
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+[Illustration: CHART OF
+NORTH EASTERN
+AFRICA]
+
+Published 1st July 1813
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PART II. BOOK III.
+
+(CONTINUED.)
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.--_Continued_.
+
+EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH TO INDIA, AFTER THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE
+EAST INDIA COMPANY.
+
+
+SECTION XV.--_Continued_.
+
+_Eighth Voyage of the English East India Company, in 1611, by Captain
+John Saris_.
+
+Sec.5. _Farther Observations respecting the Moluccas, and the Completion of
+the Voyage to Japan_.
+
+The 10th of April, 1613, the Spanish commandant sent me a message,
+requesting me to stop till the next morning, when he would visit me
+along with the sergeant-major of Ternate, who had arrived with a letter
+from Don Jeronimo de Sylva, allowing them to trade with me for different
+things of which they were in want, and to satisfy me in what I had
+requested; wherefore I resolved to stop a while longer, to see if we
+could do any good. Expecting Don Fernando next day, according to
+promise, and hearing nine guns from their fort, we supposed he was
+coming: But it proved to be for the arrival of the prince of Tidore from
+the wars, who was returned with the heads of 100 Ternatans. His force in
+the expedition in which he had been engaged, consisted of sixty men
+armed with matchlocks, two brass _bases_ and three or four _fowlers_. He
+had over-thrown _Key Chilly Sadang_, the son of the king of Ternate,
+whom the Dutch had brought over from Ternate to prevent the natives of
+Machian from supplying us with cloves. While on his return to Ternate
+after our departure, he was drawn into an ambush by the son of the king
+of Tidore, who lay in wait for the purpose, and slew him, together with
+160 men who were along with him, not one of the whole being spared. The
+prince of Ternate brought home the head of Key Chilly Sadang to his
+wife, who was sister to the slain prince. Key Chilly Sadang in a great
+measure owed this discomfiture to a barrel of powder he had bought from
+us at Machian, as it exploded at the commencement of the rencounter, and
+threw his whole party into confusion. Along with the prince of Ternate,
+one of his younger brothers and the king of Gilolo were both slain.
+Towards evening, the sergeant-major of Ternate, who was also secretary
+of the government, came aboard, and made many compliments, requesting me
+to come to Ternate, where they would do for me every thing in their
+power. I consented to do this the more readily, as Ternate was in my
+way.
+
+I received a message on the 12th from the prince of Tidore, apologising
+for not having yet visited me, and saying that he had a quantity of
+cloves which I might have, for which I thanked him, and requested they
+might be sent soon. They promised to send the cloves before next
+morning; wherefore, to guard against treachery, I kept double watch,
+with match in cock, and every thing in readiness: For this prince of
+Tidore was a most resolute and valiant soldier, and had performed many
+desperate exploits against the Dutch, having shortly before surprised
+one of their ships of war when at anchor not far from where we then lay.
+Before day, a galley, which the Spaniards told us they expected, came
+over from _Batta China_, and were very near us in the dark before we
+were aware. On hailing, they answered us that they were Spaniards and
+our friends, and then made towards the shore in all haste. She was but
+small, having only fourteen oars of a side. We this day found our
+latitude to be 0 deg. 50' N.
+
+We weighed on the 13th with the wind at N. and a current setting to the
+S. In passing the fort we saluted with five guns, which they returned.
+Several Spaniards came off with complimentary messages, and among these
+a messenger from the prince, saying we should have had plenty of cloves
+if we had waited twenty-four hours longer. But we rather suspected that
+some treachery was intended, by means of their gallies, frigates, and
+curracurras, which we thus avoided by our sudden departure. On rounding
+the western point of Tidore, we saw four Dutch ships at anchor before
+their fort of Marieca; one of which, on our appearance, fired a gun,
+which we supposed was to call their people aboard to follow us. We
+steered directly for the Spanish fort on Ternate, and shortened sail on
+coming near, and fired a gun without shot, which was immediately
+answered. They sent us off a soldier of good fashion, but to as little
+purpose as those of Tidore had done. Having little wind, our ship sagged
+in, but we found no anchorage. Having a gale of wind at south in the
+evening, we stood out to sea, but lost as much ground by the current as
+we had gained by the wind. The 14th, with the wind at S.S.W. we steered
+N.N.W. being at noon directly under the equinoctial. We had sight of a
+galley this day, on which we put about to speak with her; but finding
+she went away from us, we shaped our course for Japan.
+
+Before leaving the Moluccas, it may be proper to acquaint the reader
+with some circumstances respecting the trade and state of these islands.
+Through the whole of the Moluccas, a _bahar_ of cloves consists of 200
+_cattees_, the _cattee_ being three pounds five ounces _haberdepoiz_, so
+that the bahar is 662 pounds eight ounces English averdupois weight. For
+this bahar of cloves, the Dutch give fifty dollars, pursuant to what
+they term their perpetual contract; but, for the more readily obtaining
+some loading, I agreed to pay them sixty dollars. This increase of price
+made the natives very desirous of furnishing me, so that I certainly had
+procured a full lading in a month, had not the Dutch overawed the
+natives, imprisoning them, and threatening to put them to death, keeping
+strict guard on all the coasts. Most of these islands produce abundance
+of cloves; and those that are inhabited of any note, yield the following
+quantities, one year with another. Ternate 1000 bahars, Machian 1090,
+Tidore 900, Bachian 300, Moteer 600, Mean 50, Batta China 35; in all
+3975 bahars, or 2,633,437 1/2 English pounds, being 1175 _tons_, twelve
+_cwts._ three _qrs._ and nine and a half _libs._ Every third year is far
+more fruitful than the two former, and is therefore termed the great
+monsoon.
+
+It is lamentable to see the destruction which has been brought upon
+these islands by civil wars, which, as I learnt while there, began and
+continued in the following manner: At the discovery of these islands by
+the Portuguese, they found fierce war subsisting between the kings of
+Ternate and Tidore, to which two all the other islands were either
+subjected, or were confederated, with one or other of them. The
+Portuguese, the better to establish themselves, took no part with
+either, but politically kept friends with both, and fortified themselves
+in the two principal islands of Ternate and Tidore, engrossing the whole
+trade of cloves into their own hands. In this way they domineered till
+the year 1605, when the Dutch dispossessed them by force, and took
+possession for themselves. Yet so weakly did they provide for defending
+the acquisition, that the Spaniards drove them out next year from both
+islands, by a force sent from the Philippine islands, took the king of
+Ternate prisoner, and sent him to the Philippines, and kept both Ternate
+and Tidore for some time in their hands. Since then the Dutch have
+recovered some footing in these, islands, and, at the time of my being
+there, were in possession of the following forts.
+
+On the island of Ternate they have a fort named: _Malayou_, having three
+bulwarks or bastions, _Tolouco_ having two bastions and a round tower,
+and _Tacome_ with four bastions. On Tidore they have a fort called
+_Marieka_, with four bastions. On Machian, _Tufasoa_, the chief town of
+the island, having four large bastions with sixteen pieces of cannon,
+and inhabited by about 1000 natives: At _Nofakia_, another town on that
+island, they have two forts or redoubts, and a third on the top of a
+high hill with five or six guns, which commands the road on the other
+side. Likewise at _Tabalola_, another town in Machian, they have two
+forts with eight cannons, this place being very strongly situated by
+nature. The natives of all these places are under their command. Those
+of _Nofakia_ are not esteemed good soldiers, and are said always to side
+with the strongest; but those of Tabalola, who formerly resided at
+_Cayoa_, are accounted the best soldiers in the Moluccas, being deadly
+enemies to the Portuguese and Spaniards, and as weary now of the Dutch
+dominion. In these fortified stations in Machian, when I was there, the
+Dutch had 120 European soldiers; of whom eighty were at _Tafasoa_,
+thirty at _Nofakia_, and ten at _Tabalola_. The isle of Machian is the
+richest in cloves of all the Molucca islands; and, according to report,
+yields 1800 bahars in the great monsoon. The Dutch have one large fort
+in the island of Bachian, and four redoubts in the isle of Moteer. The
+civil wars have so wasted the population of these islands, that vast
+quantities of cloves perish yearly for want of hands to gather them;
+neither is there any likelihood of peace till one party or the other be
+utterly extirpated.
+
+Leaving them to their wars, I now return to our traffic, and shall shew
+how we traded with the natives, which was mostly by exchanging or
+bartering the cotton cloths of Cambaya and Coromandel for cloves. The
+sorts in request and the prices we obtained being as follows:
+_Candakeens_ of Baroach six _cattees_ of cloves; candakeens of _Papang_,
+which are flat, three cattees; _Selas_, or small _bastas_, seven and
+eight cattees; _Patta chere Malayo_ sixteen cattees; five _cassas_
+twelve cattees; coarse of that kind eight cattees; red _Batellias_, or
+_Tancoulas_, forty-four and forty-eight cattees; _Sarassas chere Malayo_
+forty-eight and fifty cattees; _Sarampouri_ thirty cattees; _Chelles,
+Tapsiels_, and _Matafons_, twenty and twenty-four cattees; white
+_Cassas_, or _Tancoulos_, forty and forty-four cattees; the finest
+_Donjerijus_ twelve, and coarser eight and ten cattees; _Pouti Castella_
+ten cattees; the finest _Ballachios_ thirty cattees; _Pata chere Malayo_
+of two fathoms eight and ten cattees; great _Potas_, or long four
+fathoms, sixteen cattees; white _Parcallas_ twelve cattees; _Salalos
+Ytam_ twelve and fourteen cattees; _Turias_ and _Tape Turias_ one and
+two cattees; _Patola_ of two fathoms, fifty and sixty cattees; those of
+four fathoms and of one fathom at proportional prices; for twenty-eight
+pounds of rice, a dollar; _Sago_, which is a _root_ of which the natives
+make their bread, is sold in bunches, and was worth a quarter of a
+dollar the bunch; velvets, sattins, taffetics, and other silk goods of
+China were much in request. This may suffice for the trade of the
+Moluccas.
+
+Proceeding on our voyage, it was calm all day on the 16th of April, but
+we, had a good breeze at night from the west, when we steered N.N.W. In
+the morning of the 17th, we steered north, with the wind at E. by S. but
+it afterwards became very variable, shifting to all points of the
+compass, and towards night we had sight of land to the northwards. On
+the 18th we had calms, with much rain, and contrary winds at intervals,
+for which reason I resolved to go for the island of _Saiom_, which was
+to the westward, and to remain there and refresh the crew, till the
+change of the monsoon might permit me to proceed on my intended voyage.
+But almost immediately the wind came round to the west, and we stood N.
+and N. by E. On the 19th, with little wind at W. we continued our course
+N. by E. the weather being extremely hot, with much rain. It was quite
+calm in the morning of the 20th, but we had a constant current setting
+us to the eastwards, which indeed had been the case ever since we left
+Ternate. In the afternoon, the wind came round to the northward, a brisk
+gale, and we stood west to stem the current, bearing for a large island
+called _Doy_, where we proposed to rest and refresh.
+
+In the morning of the 21st, we were fairly before that island, near its
+northern extremity, which was a low point stretching southwards. We
+stood in E. by S. with the wind at N. by E. and at noon sent our skiff
+in search of a convenient place for anchoring; but the current set so
+strong to the eastwards, that we were unable to stem it, and could
+merely see at a distance a very large bay, having a great shoal off its
+northern point half a league out to sea, while we had sixty fathoms
+water off the shore upon a bottom of sand. As night approached, we stood
+off till morning; and next day, about sun-set, we came to anchor in the
+large bay, having on standing in fifty-six, thirty-five, twenty-six, and
+twenty-four fathoms water.
+
+I sent some people ashore in the skiff on the 23d, to look out for a
+convenient watering-place, and for a proper situation in which to set up
+a tent to defend our men from the rain when on shore. They accordingly
+found a fit place right over against the ship, and saw many tracks of
+deer and wild swine, but no appearance of any inhabitants. The country
+was full of trees, and, in particular, there were abundance of
+_cokers_,[1] _penang, serie_, and _palmitos_, among which were plenty of
+poultry, pheasants, and wood-cocks. I went ashore along with our
+merchants, and had a tent set up. Our carpenter made several very
+ingenious pitfalls for catching the wild-hogs. We took some fish among
+the rocks with much labour, and got one pheasant and two wood-Pigeons,
+which last were as large in the body as ordinary hens. Some of our
+company staid all night ashore to look for the wild-hogs coming into the
+traps, and some very large ones were seen on the 24th, but none were
+caught. This morning, about half past seven, the moon, being at the
+full, was eclipsed in a more extraordinary manner than any of us had
+ever seen, being three hours and a half obscured before she recovered
+her entire light, _which was very fearful_.
+
+[Footnote 1: Cocoa-nut trees.--E.]
+
+The 25th, our people searching about the woods, brought great store of
+_cokers_ to the ship, together with some fowls, and the heads of the
+palmito trees, which we boiled with our beef, and found them to eat like
+cabbages. The 28th, the company were busily employed in taking in wood
+and water. The skiff was sent out to sound the shoal, and found ten and
+twelve fathoms at the northern point of the bar, near the shoal. All
+this time we had prodigious rain both day and night. The 29th and 30th
+were employed in bringing wood aboard, which we found as good as our
+English billets. The skiff was sent on the 1st of May to sound the
+western point of the bay, where the water was found very deep. On
+landing at that part of the coast our people found the ruins of several
+huts, among which were some brass pans, which shewed the place had been
+lately inhabited, but, as we supposed, the inhabitants had been hunted
+from their houses by the wars.
+
+We set sail on the 12th May, 1613, from this island of _Doy_, being the
+north-eastmost island of _Batta-China_, or Gilolo, in the Moluccas, in
+latitude 2 deg. 35' N.[2] The variation here was 5 deg. 20' easterly. By noon of
+this day we were fourteen leagues N. by E. from the place where we had
+been at anchor for twenty days.[3] The 1st June, passed the tropic of
+Cancer. The 2d, being in lat 25 deg. 44' N. we laid our account with seeing
+the islands of _Dos Reys Magos._[4] Accordingly, about four p.m. we had
+sight of a very low island, and soon afterwards of the high land over
+the low, there being many little islands, to the number of ten or
+eleven, connected by broken grounds and ledges, so that we could not
+discern any passage to the westward. At night we stood off and took in
+our top-sails, and lay close by in our courses till morning. The islands
+stretch from S.W. to N.E. The 3d, we stood in for the land, which
+appeared to us a most pleasant and fertile soil, as much so as any we
+had seen from leaving England, well peopled, and having great store of
+cattle. We proposed to have come to anchor about its north-east point,
+and on sounding, had sixty fathoms. We saw two boats coming off to us,
+and used every means to get speech of them, wishing for a pilot, and
+desiring to know the name of the island, but the wind was so strong that
+we could not get in, wherefore we stood away N.W. and had sight of
+another island bearing N.N.W. for which we steered, and thence descried
+another, N.E. half E. about seven or eight leagues off. Coming under the
+western island, we observed certain rocks about two miles offshore, one
+of which was above water, and the other, to the north, under water, a
+great way without the other, and the sea breaking on it.
+
+[Footnote 2: The latitude in the text, which we have reason to believe
+accurate, as Captain Saris was so long at this place, indicates the
+northern end of the island of _Morty_, east and a little northerly of
+the northern peninsula or leg of Gilolo.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 3: We have omitted in the text the naked journal of daily
+winds, courses, and distances, as tending to no useful information
+whatever.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 4: The indicated latitude, considering the direction of the
+voyage between Morty and Japan, nearly coincides with the small islands
+of Kumi and Matchi, west from the south end of the great Liqueo.--E.]
+
+On the 7th, we supposed ourselves about twenty-eight or thirty leagues
+from _Tonan_.[5] In the morning of the 8th, we had sight of a high round
+island, bearing E. six leagues off, with various other islands, in six
+or seven directions westwards, five or six leagues off.[6] In the
+morning of the 8th we had sight of land bearing N.N.E. and of six great
+islands in a row N.E. from the island we descried the preceding evening;
+and at the northern end of all were many small rocks and hummocks. In a
+bay to the eastwards of these, we saw a high land bearing E. and E. by
+S. and E.S.E. which is the island called _Xima_ in the charts, but named
+_Maihma_ by the natives, while the former island is called _Segue_, or
+_Amaxay_.[7] The 10th, four great fishing-boats came aboard, about five
+tons burden each, having one large sail, like that of a skiff. They had
+each four oars of a side, resting on pins fastened to the gunwales, the
+heads of the pins being let into the middle of the oars, so that they
+hung in just equipoise, saving much labour to the rowers. These people
+make much more speed in rowing than our men, and perform their work
+standing, by which they take up less room. They told us we were just
+before the entrance to _Nangasaki_, which bore N.N.E.; the straits of
+_Arima_ being N.E. by N. and that the high hill we saw yesterday was
+upon the island called _Uszideke_,[8] making the straits of _Arima_, at
+the north end of which is good anchorage, and at the south end is the
+entrance to _Cahinoch_.[9] We agreed with two of the masters of these
+fishing-boats for thirty dollars each, and rice for their food, to pilot
+us to _Firando_, on which agreement their people came aboard our ship,
+and voluntarily performed its duty as readily as any of our own
+mariners. We steered N. by W. the pilots reckoning that we were thirty
+leagues from Firando. One of the boats which came to us at this time
+belonged to the Portuguese who dwelt at Nangasaki, being Christian
+converts, and thought our ship had been the Portuguese ship from Makao;
+but, on finding we were not, made all haste back again to advise them,
+refusing every entreaty to remain with us.
+
+[Footnote 5: The island of Tanao-sima is probably here meant, being the
+most southerly of the Japanese islands. It may be proper to remark, that
+the termination _sima_, in the names of islands belonging to Japan,
+obviously means _island_, like the prefix _pula_ in the names of islands
+in the Malay Archipelago.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 6: There is a considerable cluster of small islands south from
+Tanaosima, between the latitudes of 29 deg. 30' and 30 deg. N.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 7: Xima, or sima, only means island. Perhaps Mashama may be
+that named Kaba-sima in modern maps, and Amaxay may possibly be Amacusa,
+these islands being in the way towards Nangasaki.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 8: This seems the same island called before Amaxay, or
+Amacusa.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 9: Cochinotzu is the name of a town on the south-west
+peninsula of the island of Kiusiu; but Cochinoch in the text seems the
+sound leading to Nangasaki, and the straits of Arima appear to be the
+passage between the north side of Amacusa and Kiusiu.--E.]
+
+Sec.6. _Arrival at Firando, and some Account of the Habits, Manners, and
+Customs of the Japanese_.
+
+We came to anchor about half a league short of Firando, about three
+p.m. of the 11th June, 1613, the tide being then so much spent that we
+could not get nearer. I was soon afterwards visited by _Foyne Sama_, the
+old king of Firando, accompanied by his nephew, _Tone Sama_, who
+governed the island under the old king.[10] They were attended by forty
+boats or gallies, some having ten, and others fifteen oars of a side. On
+coming near our ship, the king ordered all the boats to fall astern,
+except the two which carried him and his nephew, who only came on deck,
+both dressed in silk gowns, under which were linen shirts and breeches.
+Each of them wore two _cattans_, or Japanese swords, one of which was
+half a yard long in the blade, and the other only a quarter of a yard.
+They wore neither turbans nor hats, the fore part of their heads being
+shaven to the crowns, and the rest of their hair very long, and gathered
+into a knot behind. The king seemed about seventy-two years of age, and
+his nephew, or grandchild, twenty-two, who governed under him, and each
+was attended by an officer, who commanded over their slaves as they
+directed.
+
+[Footnote 10: As the Portuguese, who first visited Japan, chose to
+designate the sovereign of that country by the title of emperor, they
+denominated all its provinces kingdoms, and their governors kings.--E.]
+
+Their manner of salutation was thus: On coming into the presence of him
+they mean to salute, they put off their shoes, so that they are
+barefooted, for they wear no stockings. Then putting their right hand
+within the left, they hold them down to their knees, bending their
+bodies, then wag or swing their joined hands a little to and fro, making
+some small steps to one side from the person they salute, and say _augh!
+augh!_ I immediately led them into my cabin, where I had prepared a
+banquet for them, and entertained them with a good concert of music, to
+their great delight. I then delivered the letters from our king to the
+king of Firando, which he received very joyfully, saying he would not
+open it till _Ange_ came, who would interpret it. _Ange_, in their
+language, signifies a pilot, and by this name was meant one _William
+Adams_, an Englishman. He had come this way in a Dutch ship from the
+South Seas, about twelve years ago; and, in consequence of a mutiny
+among the people, the ship was seized by the emperor, and Adams had
+remained in the country ever since. After staying about an hour and a
+half, the king took his leave, bidding us welcome to the country, and
+promising me kind entertainment.
+
+He was no sooner ashore than all his nobility came to see the ship,
+attended by a vast number of soldiers, every person of any note bringing
+a present; some of venison, some of wild-fowl, and some of wild-boar,
+the largest and fattest we had ever seen, while others brought us fish,
+fruits, and various things. They greatly admired the ship, and seemed
+never to be satisfied with looking at her; and as we were much pestered
+by the number of these visitors, I sent to the king, requesting he would
+order them to remove, to prevent any inconveniences that might arise.
+The king immediately sent a principal officer of his guard, with orders
+to remain aboard, to see that no injury was done to us, and ordered a
+proclamation to that effect to be made in the town. The same night,
+Hendrik Brewer, who was chief of the Dutch factory at Firando, came to
+visit me, or rather to see what had passed between the king and us. I
+wrote this day to Mr Adams, who was then at _Jedo_,[11] nearly 300
+leagues from Firando, to inform him of our arrival. King _Foyne_ sent my
+letter next day by his admiral, to _Osackay_ (_Osaka_,) the nearest port
+of importance on the principal island, whence it would go by post to
+Jedo, and he sent notice to the emperor by the same conveyance, of our
+arrival and purposes.
+
+[Footnote 11: Called _Edoo_, in Purchas.]
+
+In the morning of the 12th, we had fish brought to us in abundance, and
+as cheap as we could desire. We this day weighed to make sail for the
+road; and, on this occasion, the king sent at the least threescore large
+boats, or gallies, well manned, to tow us into the harbour. On seeing
+this multitude of boats, I was in some doubts of their intentions, and
+sent my skiff to warn them not to come near the ship. But the king was
+in the headmost boat, and observing my suspicions, waved his
+handkerchief for all the boats to wait, and came aboard himself, telling
+me that he had ordered all these boats to assist in bringing me round a
+point which was somewhat dangerous, on account of the strength of the
+tide, and could not be stemmed by even a good breeze of wind, and if the
+ship fell into the eddy, we should be driven upon the rocks. Having got
+this explanation, we sent our hawsers to the Japanese boats, on which
+they fell stiffly to work, and towed us into the harbour. In the mean
+time, the king breakfasted with me, and when I proposed rewarding his
+people for towing me in, after we were at anchor, he would not allow
+them to accept of any thing.
+
+We now anchored in five fathoms, on soft ooze, so near the shore that we
+could have talked with the people in their houses. We saluted the town
+with nine guns, but had no return, as there are no cannon at this place,
+neither any fortifications, except barricades for small arms. Several
+nobles came off to bid me welcome, two of whom were men of high rank,
+named _Nobusane_ and _Simmadone_. I entertained them well, and, at
+their departing, they used extraordinary state, one remaining on board till
+the other was landed, their children and chief followers using the like
+ceremony. There came continually such numbers of people on board, both
+men and women, that we were not able to go about the decks. The ship
+likewise was quite surrounded by boats full of people, greatly admiring
+her head and stern. I permitted several women of the better sort to come
+into my cabin, where the picture of Venus and Cupid was hung, rather
+wantonly executed. Some of these ladies, thinking it to be Our Lady and
+her blessed Son, fell down to worship with appearance of much devotion,
+whispering our men, so that their companions might not hear, that they
+were Christians, having been converted by the Portuguese jesuits.
+
+The king came aboard again, bringing four principal women along with
+him, who were attired in silken gowns, overlapped in front, and girt
+round them. Their legs were bare, except that they had half buskins
+bound about their insteps with silk ribbon. Their hair was very black
+and long, tied up in a knot on the crown, in a very comely manner, no
+part of their heads being shaven, like the men. They had comely faces,
+hands, and feet, with clear white complexions, but wanting colour, which
+they supplied by art. Their stature was low, but they were very fat, and
+their behaviour was very courteous, and not ignorant of the respect due
+according to their fashions. The king requested that no person might
+remain in the cabin except myself and my linguist, who was a native of
+Japan, brought along with me from Bantam. He was well skilled in the
+Malay language, in which he explained to me what was said by the king,
+in Japanese. The women were at first somewhat bashful, but the king
+desired them to be frolicsome. They sung several songs, and played on
+certain instruments, one of which resembled our lute, being bellied like
+it, but longer in the neck, and fretted like ours, but had only four gut
+strings. They fingered with their left hands, as is done with us, and
+very nimbly; but they struck the strings with a piece of ivory held in
+the right hand, as we are in use to play with a quill on the citern.
+They seemed to delight much in their music, beating time with their
+hands, and both playing and singing by book, prickt on lines and spaces
+much like our own. I feasted them, and gave them several English
+commodities, and after two hours stay, they returned on shore. At this
+interview I requested the king to let us have a house in the town, which
+he readily granted, taking two of my merchants ashore with him, to whom
+he pointed out three or four houses, desiring them to make their choice,
+paying the owners as we could agree.
+
+On the 13th I went ashore, attended by the merchants and principal
+officers, and delivered our presents to the king, to the value of about
+L140, which he received with great satisfaction, feasting me and my
+whole company with several kinds of _powdered_ wild-fowl and fruits.
+He called for a standing cup, which was one of the presents, and ordering
+it to be filled with their country wine, which is distilled from rice,
+and as strong as brandy, he told me he would drink it all off to the
+health of the king of England, which he did, though it held about a pint
+and a half, in which he was followed by myself and all his nobles. As
+only myself and the Cape merchant sat in the same room with the king,
+all the rest of my company being in another room, he commanded his
+secretary to go and see that they all pledged the health. The king and
+his nobles sat at meat cross-legged, on mats, after the fashion of the
+Turks, the mats being richly edged with cloths of gold, velvet, sattin,
+or damask. The 14th and 15th were spent in giving presents; and on the
+16th I agreed with _Audassee_, captain of the Chinese quarter, for
+his house, paying ninety-five dollars for the monsoon of six months; he to
+put it into repair, and to furnish all the rooms conveniently with mats,
+according to the fashion of the country, and we to keep it in repair,
+with leave to alter as we thought fit.
+
+This day our ship was so pestered with numbers of people coming on
+board, that I had to send to the king for a guardian to clear them out,
+many things being stolen, though I more suspected my own people than the
+natives. There came this day a Dutchman in one of the country boats, who
+had been at the island of _Mashma_, where he sold good store of pepper,
+broad-cloth, and elephants teeth, though he would not acknowledge to us
+that he had sold any thing, or brought any thing back with him in the
+boat; but the Japanese boatmen told us he had sold a great quantity of
+goods at a mart in that place, and had brought his returns in bars of
+silver, which he kept very secret.
+
+The 21st the old king came aboard again, bringing with him several women
+to make a frolic. These women were actors of comedies, who go about from
+island to island, and from town, to town, to act plays, which are mostly
+about love and war, and have several shifts of apparel for the better
+grace of their interludes. These women were the slaves of a man who
+fixes a price that every man must pay who has to do with them. He must
+not take a higher price than that affixed, on pain of death, if
+complained against. At the first, he is allowed to fix upon each woman
+what price he pleases, which price he can never afterwards raise, but
+may lower it as he likes; neither doth the party bargain with the women
+for their favours, but with the master. Even the highest of the Japanese
+nobility, when travelling, hold it no disgrace to send for these panders
+to their inn, and bargain with them for their girls, either to fill out
+their drink for them at table, as is the custom with all men of rank, or
+for other uses. When any of these panders die, although in their life
+they were received into the best company, they are now held unworthy to
+rest among the worst. A straw rope is put round their neck, and they are
+dragged through the streets into the fields, and cast on a dung-hill to
+be devoured by dogs and fowls.
+
+The 23d, there arrived two Chinese junks at Nangasaki, laden with sugar.
+By them it was understood that the emperor of China had lately put, to
+death about 5000 persons for trading out of the country contrary to his
+edict. Yet the hope of profit had induced these men to hazard their
+lives and properties, having bribed the _Pungavas_, or officers of
+the sea-ports, who had succeeded those recently put to death for the same
+offence.
+
+The 29th, a _soma_, or junk, belonging to the Dutch, arrived at
+Nangasaki from Siam, laden with Brazil wood and skins of all kinds. On
+their arrival, they were said to be Englishmen, as, before our coming,
+the Dutch used generally to pass by the name of English, our nation
+being long known by report in Japan, but much scandalised by the
+Portuguese jesuits, who represent us as pirates and rovers on the sea.
+In consequence of this report, the Japanese have a song, which they call
+_English Crofonio_, shewing how the English take the Spanish and
+Portuguese ships, which, while singing, they act likewise with catans,
+and so scare their children, as the French used to do theirs with the
+name of Lord Talbot.
+
+The 1st July two of our company happened to quarrel, and had nearly gone
+out to the field to fight, which had greatly endangered us all, as it is
+the law here, that whoever draws a weapon in anger, although no harm be
+done, is presently cut in pieces; and if they do even but small hurt,
+not only they are so executed themselves, but all their relations are
+put to death. The 2d, I went ashore to keep house at Firando, my
+household consisting of twenty-six persons. At our first coming, we
+found that the Dutch sold broad-cloths of L15 or 16 a-cloth, for forty
+dollars, or L8 sterling the _mat_, which is a measure of two yards
+and a quarter. Being desirous to keep up the price of our cloth, and hearing
+that the Dutch had a great quantity, I had a conference with Brower, the
+chief of their factory, proposing that we should mutually fix prices
+upon such cloths as we both had, and neither of us, in any respect, sell
+below the prices agreed upon; for performance of which, I offered to
+enter into mutual bonds. In the morning, he seemed to approve of this
+proposal, but ere night he sent me word that he disliked it, alleging
+that he had no authority from his masters to make any such agreement.
+Next morning he shipped away a great store of cloth to different
+islands, rating them at low prices, as at twenty, eighteen, and sixteen
+dollars the _mat_, that he might the more speedily sell off his own, and
+glut the market before ours came forwards.
+
+Pepper, ungarbled, which cost 1 3/4 dollars at Bantam the sack, was
+worth at our coming ten _tayes_ the _pecul_, which is 100
+_cattea_ of Japan, or 130 pounds English. A _taye_ is worth
+five shillings sterling. A rial of eight, or Spanish dollar, is worth
+there in ordinary payment only seven _mas_, or three shillings and
+sixpence sterling, one mas being equal to a single rial. The _pecul_
+of tin was worth thirty _tayes_; the _pecul_ of elephants teeth
+eighty _tayes_: Cast iron six tayes the pecul: Gunpowder twenty-three
+tayes the pecul: Socotrine aloes the cattee, six _tayes_: Fowling-pieces
+twenty tayes each: Calicos and such little commodities, of Guzerat or
+Coromandel, were at various prices, according to their qualities.
+
+On the 7th of July the king of the Gotto islands, which are not far from
+Firando to the S.W. came upon a visit to king _Foyne_, saying he had
+heard of an excellent English ship being arrived in his dominions, which
+he greatly desired to go aboard of. King Foyne requested of me that this
+might be allowed, the king of Gotto being an especial friend of his;
+wherefore he was banqueted on board, and several cannon were fired at
+his departure, which he was much pleased with, and told me he would be
+glad to see some of our nation at his islands, where they should meet a
+hearty welcome. Three Japanese, two men and a woman, were put to death
+for the following cause: The woman, in the absence of her husband, had
+made separate assignations with both the men. He who was appointed
+latest, not knowing of the other, and weary of waiting, came too soon,
+and enraged at finding her engaged with another man, drew his _cattan_
+and wounded both very severely, almost cutting the man's back in two.
+Yet the wounded man, getting hold of his _cattan_, wounded the
+aggressor. This fray alarming the street, word was sent to king Foyne
+and to know his pleasure, who accordingly gave orders to cut off all
+their heads. After their execution, all who thought proper, as many did,
+came to try the temper of their weapons upon the dead bodies, which they
+soon hewed in small pieces, which were left to be devoured by the
+ravens.
+
+The 10th three others were executed in the same way with the former,
+being beheaded and afterwards cut in pieces, for stealing a woman long
+since from Firando and selling her at Nangasaki. When any are to be
+executed, they are led out of town in the following manner: First there
+go two men, one having a mattock and the other a shovel, to dig the
+grave, if that be allowed to the criminal. Then a third person carrying
+a small table or board, on which is written the crime of the party,
+which is afterwards affixed to a post on the grave in which he is
+buried. Next comes the party to be executed, having his hands bound
+behind him by a silken cord, and having a small paper banner, much like
+one of our wind-vanes, on which the offence is written. The criminal is
+followed by the executioner, having his _cattan_ or Japanese sword by
+his side, and holding in his hand the cord with which the hands of the
+criminal are bound. On each hand of the executioner walks a soldier
+armed with a pike, the head of which rests on the criminal's shoulder,
+to intimidate him from attempting to escape. In this manner I saw one
+man led out to execution, who went forwards with a most wonderful
+resolution, and apparently without fear of death, such as I had never
+seen the like in Europe. He was condemned for stealing a sack of rice
+from a neighbour, whose house was burning.
+
+The 11th there arrived three Chinese junks at Nangasaki, laden with
+silks. The 19th the old king begged a piece of _poldavy_ from me; and
+though a king, and famed as the bravest soldier in Japan for his conduct
+in the wars of Corea, he had it made into coats, which he wore next his
+skin, some part of it being made into handkerchiefs. The 20th, a _soma_
+or junk arrived at Nangasaki from Cochinchina, laden with silk and
+benzoin, which last was exceedingly clear and good. The 29th Mr Adams
+arrived at Firando, having been seventeen days in coming from Sorongo,
+while we had waited no less than forty-eight days for his coming.[12]
+After receiving him in a friendly manner, I conferred with him in the
+presence of our merchants, as to our hopes of trade in this country. He
+said the trade was variable, but doubted not we might do as well as the
+Dutch, and gave great commendations of the country, to which he seemed
+to be much attached.
+
+[Footnote 12: The first messenger, for not making haste with the letters
+to Adams, was banished by the angry king.--_Purch._]
+
+On the morning of the 30th, an officer of the young king was cut to
+pieces in the street, as it was thought for being too intimate with the
+young king's mother; and one of the officer's slaves was slain along
+with him, for endeavouring to defend his master. This day there came two
+Spaniards to Firando, who were acquainted with Mr Adams, to request a
+passage in our ship for Bantam. They had belonged to the crew of a
+Spanish ship, sent from New Spain about a year before to make
+discoveries to the north of Japan, and coming to Jedo to wait the
+monsoon which serves for going to the northward, which begins in the end
+of May, the crew mutinied against their captain, and every one went
+away whither he listed, leaving the ship entirely unmanned. On receiving
+this account of the Spaniards, I thought it best not to let them enter
+my ship.
+
+On the 3d of August, king _Foyne_ sent to know what was the size of the
+present from our king to the emperor, as also the number of people I
+meant to take along with me to the court, that he might provide
+accordingly for my going up in good order, in regard to barks, horses,
+and palanquins. This day likewise I caused the presents to be assorted,
+for the emperor and those of chief consideration about him, of which
+presents respectively the values were as follow:--
+
+   For _Ogoshosama_, the emperor, ---------------------L87  7  6
+       _Shongosama_, the emperor's son, ----------------43 15  0
+       _Codskedona_, the emperor's secretary, ----------15 17  6
+        _Saddadona_, secretary to the emperor's son,----14  3  4
+        _Iccocora Juga_, judge of _Meaco_, ---------4 10  6
+        _Fongodona_, admiral of _Orungo_,-----------3 10  0
+        _Goto Shozavero_, the mint-master, -------------11  0  0
+                                                             ________
+                                                   Total,  L180  3 10
+
+
+Sec.7. _Journey of Captain Saris to the Court of the Emperor, with his
+Observations there and by the Way_.
+
+The 7th August, 1613, being furnished by king _Foyne_ with a proper
+galley, and having taken leave of him, I went aboard ship to put all
+things in order for my departure.[13] This galley rowed twenty-five-oars
+of a side, and was manned by sixty Japanese; and I fitted her out
+handsomely in our fashion, with waste cloths, ensigns, and all other
+necessaries. Leaving instructions with the master of the Clove and the
+cape merchant, for the proper regulation of the ship and the house on
+shore during my absence, and taking with me ten Englishmen and nine
+other attendants, as the before-mentioned sixty were only to take charge
+of the galley, I departed from Firando on my voyage and journey for the
+court of the Japanese emperor. We rowed through among various islands,
+all or most of which were well inhabited, and had several handsome towns
+upon them, one of which, called _Facata_, has a very strong castle built
+of freestone, but without any cannon or garrison. The ditch of this
+castle is five fathoms deep and ten broad, all round about the walls,
+and is passed by means of a drawbridge, and the whole is kept in good
+repair. The tide and wind were here so strong against us that we could
+not proceed, for which reason I landed and dined at this town, which was
+very well built, and seemed to be as large as London is within the
+walls. All its streets are so even, that one may see from one end to the
+other. This place is exceedingly populous, and the people very civil and
+courteous; only that at our first landing, and indeed at all places to
+which we came in the whole country, the children and low idle people
+used to gather about and follow us a long way, calling _core, core,
+cocore, Ware_ that is to say, _You Coreans with false hearts_; all the
+while whooping and hallooing, and making such a noise that we could not
+hear ourselves speak; and sometimes throwing stones at us, though seldom
+in any of the towns, yet the clamour and shouting was every where the
+same, as nobody reproved them for it. The best advice I can give to
+those who may come after me, is to pass on without attending to these
+idle rabblements, by which their ears only will be disturbed by the
+noise. All along this coast, and indeed the whole way to Osaka, we found
+various women who lived continually with their families in boats upon
+the water, as is done in Holland. These women catch fish by diving even
+in the depth of eight fathoms, that are missed by the nets and lines;
+and by the habit of frequent diving their eyes become excessively red
+and bloodshot, by which mark these divers may be readily distinguished
+from all other women.
+
+[Footnote 13: The old king sent 200 tayes, worth five shillings each, to
+Captain Saris, for his expences in the journey.--_Purch._]
+
+In two days we rowed from Firando to Facata. When eight or ten leagues
+short of the straits of _Xemina-seque_,[14] we came to a great town,
+where there lay in a dock a junk of 800 or 1000 tons burden, _all
+sheathed with iron_,[15] and having a guard appointed to keep her from
+being set on fire or otherwise destroyed. She was built in a very homely
+fashion, much like the descriptions we have of Noah's ark; and the
+natives told us she served to transport troops to any of the islands in
+case of rebellion or war.
+
+[Footnote 14: The editor of Astley's Collection has altered the
+orthography of this name to _Shemina seki_. In modern maps, we find a
+town named _Sunono sequi_, on one side of these straits, which divide
+the island of Kiusiu from the south-west end of the great island of
+Niphon.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 15: It is not a little singular, that metallic sheathing
+should have been observed by English mariners in Japan so long ago as
+1613, and yet never attempted in the British or any other European navy
+till more than 150 years afterwards, and then brought forwards as a new
+invention.--E.]
+
+We met with nothing extraordinary after passing through the straits of
+Xemina-seque till we came to Osaka, where we arrived on the 27th of
+August. Our galley could not get nearer the town than six miles;
+wherefore we were met by a smaller vessel, in which came the _goodman or
+host_ of the house where we were to lodge in Osaka, and who brought with
+him a banquet of wine and _salt fruits_ to entertain me. A rope being
+made fast to the mast-head of our boat, she was drawn forwards by men,
+as our west country barges are at London. We found Osaka a very large
+town, as large as London within the walls, having many very high and
+handsome timber bridges which serve to cross the river _Jodo_, which is
+as wide as the Thames at London. Some of the houses here were handsome,
+but not many. It is one of the chiefest sea-ports in all Japan, and has
+a castle of great size and strength, with very deep ditches all round,
+crossed by drawbridges, and its gates plated with iron. This castle is
+all of freestone, strengthened by bulwarks and battlements, having
+loop-holes for small arms and arrows, and various passages for throwing
+down stones upon the assailants. The walls are at least six or seven
+yards thick, all built of freestone throughout, having no packing with
+trumpery within, as I was told, but all solid. The stones are large and
+of excellent quality, and are so exactly cut to fit the places where
+they are laid, that no mortar is used, only a little earth being
+occasionally thrown in to fill up any void spaces.
+
+In the castle of Osaka, when I was there, dwelt the son of _Tiquasama_,
+who was the true heir of Japan; but being an infant at the death of his
+father, he was left under the guardianship of four chiefs or great men,
+of whom Ogoshosama, the present emperor, was the principal. The other
+three guardians were each desirous of acquiring the sovereignty, and
+being opposed by Ogoshosama, levied armies against him; but Ogoshosama
+defeated them in battle, in which two of them were slain, and the other
+saved himself by flight. After this great victory, Ogoshosama attempted
+what he is said not to have thought of before. Seizing the true heir of
+the throne, he married the young prince to his own daughter, and
+confined them in the castle of Osaka, under the charge of such persons
+only as had been brought up from their childhood under the roof of the
+usurper, so that by their means he has regular intelligence of every
+thing they do.
+
+Right opposite to Osaka, on the other side of the river Jodo, there is
+another town called _Sakay_, not so large as Osaka, but of considerable
+extent, and having great trade to all the neighbouring country. Having
+left samples and lists of prices of all our commodities with our host at
+Osaka, we departed from that place on the night of the 29th of August in
+a bark, and arrived at _Fusima_ next night, where we found a garrison of
+3000 men, maintained there by the emperor, to keep Miaco and Osaka under
+subjection. This garrison is shifted every third year, and the relief
+took place while we were there, so that we saw the old bands march away
+and the new enter, which they did in a most soldier-like manner. They
+marched five abreast, and to every ten files or fifty men there was a
+captain, who kept his men in excellent order. Their shot marched first,
+being _calivers_, for they have no muskets and will not use any, then
+followed pikes, next swords or _cattans_ and targets, these were
+followed by bows and arrows, and then a band armed with weapons called
+_waggadashes_, resembling Welsh hooks: These were succeeded by calivers,
+and so on as before; but without any ensigns or colours; neither had
+they any drums or other warlike instruments of music. The first file of
+the band armed with cattans had silver scabbards, and the last file
+which marched next the captain had their scabbards of gold. The
+companies or bands were of various numbers, some 500, some 300, and some
+only of 150 men. In the middle of every band there were three horses
+very richly caparisoned, their saddles being covered by costly furs, or
+velvet, or stammel broad-cloths. Every horse was attended by three
+slaves, who led them in silken halters, and their eyes were hoodwinked
+by means of leathern covers.
+
+After each troop or band, the captain followed on horseback, his bed and
+all his necessaries being laid upon his own horse equally poised on both
+sides, and over all was spread a covering of red felt of China, on the
+top of which sat the captain crosslegged, like a huckster between two
+paniers. Such as were old or weak in the back had a staff artificially
+fixed on the pannel, on which he could lean back and rest himself as if
+sitting in a choir. We met the captain-general of this new garrison two
+days after meeting his first band, having in the mean time met several
+of these bands in the course of our journey, some a league, and others
+two leagues from each other. The general travelled in great state, much
+beyond the other bands, yet the second band had their arms much more
+richly decorated than the first, and the third than the second, and so
+every successive band more sumptuous than another. The captain-general
+hunted and hawked all the way, having his own hounds and hawks along
+with him, the hawks being hooded and lured as ours in England. The
+horses that accompanied him for his own riding were six in number, and
+were all richly caparisoned. These horses were not tall, but of the size
+of our middling nags, short and well knit, small-headed, and very
+mettlesome, and in my opinion far excelling the Spanish jennet in spirit
+and action. His palanquin was carried before him, being lined with
+crimson velvet, and having six bearers, two and two to carry at a time.
+
+Such excellent order was taken for the passing and providing of these
+soldiers, that no person either inhabiting or travelling in the road by
+which they passed and lodged, was in any way injured by them, but all of
+them were as cheerfully entertained as any other guests, because they
+paid for what they had as regularly as any other travellers. Every town
+and village on the way being well provided with cooks-shops and
+victualling houses, where they could get every thing they had a mind
+for, and diet themselves at any sum they pleased, between the value of
+an English penny and two shillings. The most generally used article of
+food in Japan is rice of different qualities, as with our wheats and
+other kinds of grain, the whitest being reckoned the best, and is used
+instead of bread, to which they add fresh or salted fish, some pickled
+herbs, beans, radishes, and other roots, salted or pickled; wild-fowl,
+such as duck, mallard, teal, geese, pheasants, partridges, quails, and
+various others, powdered or put up in pickle. They have great abundance
+of poultry, as likewise of red and fallow deer, with wild boars, hares,
+goats, and kine. They have plenty of cheese, but have no butter, and use
+no milk, because they consider it to be of the nature of blood.
+
+They have great abundance of swine. Their wheat is all of the red kind,
+and is as good as ours in England, and they plough both with oxen and
+horses, as we do. During our residence in Japan, we bought the best hens
+and pheasants at three-pence each, large fat pigs for twelve-pence, a
+fat hog for five shillings, a good ox, like our Welsh runts, at sixteen
+shillings, a goat for three shillings, and rice for a halfpenny the
+pound. The ordinary drink of the common people is water, which they
+drink warm with their meat, holding it to be a sovereign remedy against
+worms in the _maw_. They have no other drink but what is distilled from
+rice, as strong as our brandy, like Canary wine in colour, and not dear:
+Yet, after drawing off the best and strongest, they still wring out a
+smaller drink, which serves the poorer people who cannot reach the
+stronger.
+
+The 30th of August we were furnished with nineteen horses at the charge
+of the emperor, to carry up my attendants and the presents going in our
+king's name to _Surunga_. I had a palanquin appointed for my use, and a
+led horse, well caparisoned, to ride when I pleased, six men being
+appointed to carry my palanquin on plain ground, but where the road grew
+hilly, ten were allowed. The officer appointed by king _Foyne_ to
+accompany me, took up these men and horses by warrants, from time to
+time, and from place to place, just as post-horses are taken up in
+England, and also procured us lodgings at night; and, according to the
+custom of the country, I had a slave to run before me, carrying a pike.
+We thus travelled every day fifteen or sixteen leagues, which we
+estimated at three miles the league, and arrived on the 6th of September
+at _Surunga_,[16] where the emperor resided. The road for the most part
+is wonderfully even, and where it meets with mountains, a passage is cut
+through. This is the main road of the whole country, and, is mostly
+covered with sand and gravel. It is regularly measured off into leagues,
+and at every league there is a small hillock of earth on each side of
+the road, upon each of which is set a fair pine-tree, trimmed round like
+an arbour. These are placed at the end of every league, that the
+hackney-men and horse-hirers may not exact more than their due, which is
+about three-pence for each league.
+
+[Footnote 16: Suruga, Surunga, or Sununnaga, is a town in the province
+of that name, at the head of the gulf of Totomina, about 50 miles S.W.
+from Jedo.--E.]
+
+The road is much frequented, and very full of people. Every where, at
+short distances, we came to farms and country-houses, with numerous
+villages, and frequent large towns. We had often likewise to ferry over
+rivers, and we saw many _Futtakeasse_ or _Fotoquis_, being the
+temples of the Japanese, which are situated in groves, and in the
+pleasantest places of the country, having the priests that attend
+upon the idols dwelling around the temples, as our friars in old time
+used to do here in England. On approaching any of the towns, we saw
+sundry crosses, having the dead bodies of persons who had been crucified
+affixed to them, such being the ordinary mode of punishment for most
+malefactors. On coming near Surunga, where the emperor keeps his court,
+we saw a scaffold, on which lay the heads of several malefactors that had
+been recently executed, with the dead bodies of some stretched on crosses,
+while those of others had been all hewn in pieces by the natives, trying
+the tempers of their _cattans_, as formerly mentioned when at Firando.
+This was a most unpleasant sight for us, who had necessarily to pass
+them on our way to Surunga.
+
+The city of Surunga is fully as large as London, with all its
+suburbs.[17] We found all the handicraft tradesmen dwelling in the
+outward parts and skirts of the town, while those of the better sort
+resided in the heart of the city, not choosing to be annoyed by the
+continual knocking, hammering, and other noise made by the artisans in
+their several callings. As soon as we were settled in the lodgings
+appointed for us in the city of Surunga, I sent Mr Adams to the imperial
+residence, to inform the secretary of our arrival, and to request as
+speedy dispatch as possible. He sent me back for answer, that I was
+welcome, and that after resting myself for a day for two, I should be
+admitted to an audience of the emperor. The 7th of September we were
+occupied in arranging the presents, and providing little tables of
+sweet-smelling wood on which to carry them, according to the custom of
+the country.
+
+[Footnote 17: It is hardly necessary to remark, that this applies to
+London in the year 1613, then vastly smaller than now, when Westminster
+was a separate city, at some miles distance from London; the Strand,
+Piccadilly, and Oxford Street, country roads; Whitehall a country
+palace; and the whole _west end_ of the town, fields, farms, or country
+villas.--E.]
+
+On the 8th of September I was carried in my palanquin to the castle of
+Surunga, in which the emperor resides, and was attended by my merchants
+and others, the presents being carried before me. In entering the
+castle, we had to pass three draw-bridges, at each of which there was a
+guard of soldiers. The approach to the presence was by means of a fair
+and wide flight of stone stairs, where I was met and received by two
+grave and comely personages; one of whom was _Codske dona_, the
+emperor's secretary, and the other named _Fongo dona_, the admiral. By
+these officers I was led into a handsome room, the floor of which was
+covered by mats, on which we sat down cross-legged. Shortly after, they
+led me into the presence-chamber, in which stood the chair of state, to
+which they wished me to do reverence. This chair was about five feet
+high, covered with cloth of gold, and very richly adorned on its back
+and sides, but had no canopy. We then returned to the former room, and
+in about a quarter of an hour word was brought that the emperor was in
+the presence-chamber. They then led me to the door of the room where the
+emperor was, making signs for me to go in, but dared not even to look up
+themselves. The presents sent from our king to the emperor, and those
+which I offered as from myself according to the custom of the country,
+had all been placed in a very orderly manner upon mats in the
+presence-chamber, before the emperor came there.
+
+Going into the chamber, of presence, I made my compliments to the
+emperor according to our English fashion, and delivered our king's
+letter to the emperor, who took it in his hand and raised it towards his
+forehead, and commanded his interpreter, who sat at a good distance
+behind, to desire Mr Adams to tell me that I was welcome from a long and
+wearisome journey, that I might therefore rest me for a day or two, and
+then his answer should be ready for our king. He then asked me if I did
+not intend to visit his son at _Jedo_.[18] Answering, that I proposed
+to do so, the emperor said, that orders should be given to provide me with
+men and horses for the journey, and that the letters for our king should
+be ready against my return. Then, taking leave respectfully of the
+emperor, and coming to the door of the presence-chamber, I found the
+secretary and admiral waiting to conduct me down the stairs where they
+formerly met me, when I went into my palanquin and returned with my
+attendants to our lodgings.
+
+[Footnote 18: Always called _Edoo_ in Purchas, but we have thought it
+better to use the form of the name now universally adopted in
+geography; but which name, from the orthography used by Captain Saris,
+is probably pronounced in Japan, _Idu_, or _Eedoo_.--E.]
+
+On the 9th I sent the present intended for the secretary to be delivered
+to him, for which he heartily thanked me, but would in no wise receive
+it, saying, the emperor had so commanded, and that it was as much as his
+life was worth to accept of any gift. He took, however, five pounds of
+Socotorine aloes, to use for his health's sake. I this day delivered to
+him the articles of privilege for trade, being _fourteen_ in number,
+which we wished to have granted. These he desired to have abbreviated
+into as few words as possible, as in all things the Japanese are fond of
+brevity. Next day, being the 10th September, the articles so abridged
+were sent to the secretary by Mr Adams; and on being shown by the
+secretary to the emperor, they were all approved except one, by which,
+as the Chinese had refused to trade with the English, we required
+permission, in case of taking any Chinese vessels by force, that we
+might freely bring them into the ports of Japan, and there make sale of
+the goods. At the first, the emperor said we might take them, since they
+refused to trade with us; but, after conference with the Chinese
+resident, he altered his mind, and would not allow of that article. All
+the rest were granted and confirmed under his great seal, which is not
+impressed in wax as with us in England, but is stamped in print with red
+ink. These articles of privilege were as follow:--
+
+_Privileges granted by OGOSHOSAMA, Emperor of Japan, to the Governor and
+Company of the London East India Company_.[19]
+
+[Footnote 19: This copy Captain Saris brought home and gave
+me--_Purch._]
+
+1. We give free licence to the subjects of the king of Great Britain,
+viz. To Sir Thomas Smith, governor, and the Company of the East Indian
+Merchants Adventurers, for ever, safely to come into any of the ports of
+our empire of Japan, with their ships and merchandize, without any
+hinderance to them or their goods; and to abide, buy, sell, and barter,
+according to their own manner, with all nations; to remain here as long
+as they think good, and to depart at their pleasure.
+
+2. We grant to them freedom from custom for all such goods as they have
+brought now, or may hereafter bring into our empire, or may export from
+thence to any foreign part. And we authorise all ships that may
+hereafter arrive from England, to proceed immediately to sell their
+commodities, without any farther coming or sending to our court.
+
+3. If any of their ships shall happen to be in danger of shipwreck, we
+command our subjects not only to assist them, but that such parts of the
+ship or goods as may be saved, shall be returned to the captain, or the
+cape merchant, or their assigns. That they may build one house, or more,
+for themselves, in any part of our empire that they think fittest for
+their purpose; and, at their departure, may sell the same at their
+pleasure.
+
+4. If any English merchant, or others, shall die in our dominions, the
+goods of the deceased shall remain at the disposal of the cape merchant;
+and all offences committed by them shall be punished by the said cape
+merchant at his discretion, our laws to take no hold of their persons or
+goods.
+
+5. We command all our subjects trading with them for any of their
+commodities, to pay them for the same without delay, or to return their
+wares.
+
+6. For such commodities as they have now brought, or may bring
+hereafter, that are fitting for our proper use and service, we command
+that no arrest be made thereof, but that a fair price be agreed with the
+cape merchant, according as they may sell to others, and that prompt
+payment be made on the delivery of the goods.
+
+7. If, in the discovery of other countries for trade, and the return of
+their ships, they shall need men or victuals, we command that our
+subjects shall furnish them, for their money, according as their needs
+may require.
+
+8. Without other passport, they shall and may set out upon the discovery
+of _Yeadso_, or _Jesso_, or any other part in or about our empire.
+
+   From our castle in Surunga, this first day of the ninth
+   month, in the eighteenth year of our _dary_, or reign.
+   Sealed with our broad seal, &c.
+   (_Underwritten_)
+
+
+MINNA MOTTONO.
+
+_Yei. Ye. Yeas_.[20]
+
+[Footnote 20: Kempper writes this other name of _Ongosio Sama_, as he
+calls him, _Ijejas_; which, according to the English orthography, is
+_Iyeyas_.--Astl. I. 489. b.]
+
+On the 11th of September, the present intended for the mint-master was
+delivered to him, which he received very thankfully, and sent me in
+return two Japanese gowns of taffeta, quilted with silk cotton. The 12th
+Mr Adams was sent to the mint-master, who is the emperor's merchant,
+having charge of the mint and all the ready money, being in great
+estimation with the emperor, as he had made a vow, whenever the emperor
+dies, to cut out his own bowels and die with him. The purpose of Mr
+Adams waiting upon him at this time, was to carry a list of the prices
+of our English commodities. About noon of this same day, being furnished
+with horses and men by the emperor, as formerly specified, we set out
+for Jedo. The country between Surunga and Jedo we found well peopled,
+with many _Fotoquis_, or idol temples. Among others which we passed, was
+one having an image of great reputation, called _Dabis_, made of copper,
+hollow within, but of substantial thickness. We estimated its height to
+be twenty-one or twenty-two feet, being in the form of a man kneeling on
+the ground, and sitting on his heels; the whole of wonderful size, and
+well proportioned, and being dressed in a gown cast along with the
+figure. Some of our men went into the inside of this idol, and hooped
+and hallooed, which made an exceeding great noise. It is highly
+reverenced by all native travellers who pass that way. We found many
+characters and marks made upon it by its visitors, which some of my
+followers imitated, making their marks in like manner. This temple and
+idol stand in the main road of pilgrimage to _Tencheday_, which is much
+frequented for devotion, as both night and day people of all ranks and
+conditions are continually going or returning from that place.
+
+Mr Adams told me that he had been at the _Fotoqui_, or temple dedicated
+to Tencheday, to which image they make this devout pilgrimage. According
+to his report, one of the fairest virgins of the country is brought
+monthly into that _Fotoqui_, and there sits alone in a room neatly
+fitted up, in a sober manner; and, at certain times, this _Tencheday_,
+who is thought to be the devil, appears unto her, and having carnally
+known her, leaves with her at his departure certain scales, like unto
+the scales of fishes. Whatever questions she is desired by the _bonzes_,
+or priests of the _Fotoqui_, to ask, _Tencheday_ resolves. Every
+month a fresh virgin is provided for the temple, but Mr Adams did not know
+what became of the former.[21]
+
+[Footnote 21: The editor of Astley's Collection, vol. I. p. 487, note b.
+very gravely informs his readers what they certainly are aware of, that
+the gallant must have been one of the _bonzes_, or priests.--E.]
+
+We arrived at _Jedo_ on the 14th September. This city is much larger
+than _Surunga_, and much better and more sumptuously built, and made a
+very glorious appearance to us on our approach; all the ridge-tiles and
+corner-tiles of the roofs being richly gilded and varnished, as also the
+door-posts of the houses. They have no glass in their windows, but have
+large windows of board, opening in leaves, and well adorned with
+paintings, as in Holland. In the chief street of the town there is a
+great _cawsay_ all through from end to end, underneath which flows a
+river, or large stream of water; and at every fifty paces there is a
+well-head, or pit, substantially built of free-stone, having buckets
+with which the inhabitants draw water, both for their ordinary uses and
+in case of fire. This street is as broad as any of our best streets in
+England.
+
+On the 15th I gave notice of my arrival to _Sadda-dona_, the secretary
+of the young king, or son of the emperor, requesting him to inform the
+king. I had access to the king on the 17th, and delivered to him the
+presents sent by our king, as also some from myself, as is the custom of
+the country. The king holds his court in the castle of Jedo, which is
+much stronger and more sumptuous than that of Surunga; and the king was
+besides better guarded and attended than his father the emperor.
+_Saddadona_, his secretary, is father to _Codskedona_ the emperor's
+secretary, his years and experience fitting him to have the government
+and direction of the king or prince successor, who appeared to us to be
+about forty-two years of age.
+
+My entertainment and access to the king here at Jedo was much like that
+formerly mentioned with the emperor his father at Surunga. He accepted
+very kindly the letters and presents from our king, bidding me welcome,
+and desiring me to rest and refresh myself, and that his letters and
+presents in return should be made ready with all speed. On the 19th I
+delivered the presents to _Saddadona_. This day, thirty-two men being
+committed prisoners to a certain house, for not paying their debts, and
+being in the stocks within the same, it took fire in the night by some
+casualty, and they were all burnt to death. Towards evening, the king
+of Jedo sent me two suits of varnished armour, as a present to our king;
+and sent likewise for myself a _tatch_ and a _waggadash_, the
+former being a long sword which is only worn in Japan by soldiers of the
+highest rank, and the latter being a singular weapon resembling a Welsh
+hook. I was informed that the distance from Jedo to the norther-most
+part of Japan, was estimated at twenty-two days journey on horseback.
+
+I left Jedo on the 21st September by boat, and came to _Oringgaw_,[22]
+a town upon the sea-side, where is an excellent harbour, in which ships
+may ride with as much safety as in the river Thames, and the passage
+from which by sea to Jedo is very safe and good; so that it would be
+much better for our ships to sail to this port than to Firando, as
+Oringgaw is on the main island of Japan or _Niphon_, and is only
+fourteen or fifteen leagues from Jedo, the capital and greatest city of
+the empire. Its only inconvenience is, that it is not so well supplied
+with flesh and other victuals as Firando, but is in all other respects
+much preferable. From thence we proceeded on the 29th to Surunga, where
+we remained in waiting for the letters and presents from the emperor. On
+the 8th of October I received the emperor's letter, of which a
+translation is subjoined, and I then also received the privileges of
+trade, formerly quoted, the original of which I left with Mr Cocks.[23]
+
+[Footnote 22: No such place as Oringgaw is to be found in modern maps of
+Japan. Jedo is situated at the head of a deep gulf of the same name, in
+the south-east corner of Japan. About the distance indicated in the
+text, there is a town and bay named _Odavara_, on the western side of
+the gulf, and in the direct way back to Surunga, which may possibly be
+the _Oringgaw_ of the text.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 23: The characters have by some been thought to be those of
+China, but I compared them with Chinese books, and they seemed to me
+quite different, yet not _letters_ to compound words by spelling, as
+ours, but _words_ expressed in their several characters, such as are
+used by the _Chinais_ and as the brevity manifesteth. I take them to be
+characters peculiar to Japan.--_Purch._
+
+In a marginal reference in the plate given by Purchas, the lines are
+said to read downwards, beginning at the right hand. It may possibly be
+so: But they appear _letters_, or literal characters, to _compound words
+by spelling_, and to be read like those used in Europe, from left to
+right horizontally. In a future portion of our work, the subject of the
+Japanese language and writing will be farther elucidated; when, we
+believe, it will appear that they have two modes of writing, one by
+_verbal_ or _ideal_ characters like the Chinese, and the other by
+_literal_ signs like all the rest of the world.--E.]
+
+_Letter from the Emperor of Japan to the King of Great Britain_.
+
+Your majesty's kind letter, sent me by your servant Captain Saris, who
+is the first of your subjects that I have known to arrive in any part of
+my dominions, I heartily embrace, being not a little glad to understand
+of your great wisdom and power, as having three plentiful and mighty
+kingdoms under your powerful command. I acknowledge your majesty's great
+bounty, in sending me so undeserved a present of many rare things, such
+as my land affordeth not, neither have I ever before seen: Which I
+receive, not as from a stranger, but as from your majesty, whom I esteem
+as myself, desiring the continuance of friendship with your highness:
+And that it may consist with your good pleasure to send your subjects to
+any part or port of my dominions, where they shall be most heartily
+welcome, applauding much their worthiness in the admirable knowledge of
+navigation, as having with much facility discovered a country so remote,
+not being amazed by the distance of so mighty a gulf, nor the greatness
+of such infinite clouds and storms, from prosecuting the honourable
+enterprises of discovery and merchandising, in which they shall find me
+to encourage them as they desire. By your said subject, I return to your
+majesty a small token of my love, desiring you to accept the same as
+from one who much rejoices in your friendship. And, whereas your
+majesty's subjects have desired certain privileges for trade and the
+settlement of a factory in my dominions, I have not only granted what
+they desired, but have confirmed the same to them under my broad seal,
+for the better establishment thereof. Given from my castle of _Surunga_,
+this fourth day of the ninth month, in the eighteenth year of our reign,
+according to our computation; resting your majesty's friend, the highest
+commander in the kingdom of Japan.
+
+Subscribed
+
+Minna Muttono_[24]. _Yei. Ye. Yeas_.
+
+[Footnote 24: In the copy of the privileges, Purchas gives this name
+_Mottono_ while the editor of Astley's Collection has altered it to
+_Monttono_. In the privileges formerly inserted, the date is made in the
+_nineteenth_ month, perhaps an error of the press in the Pilgrims, which
+we have therefore corrected to _ninth_.--E.]
+
+At my return to Surunga, I found a Spanish ambassador from the
+Philippine islands, who had only been once introduced to the emperor,
+and delivered his presents, being certain Chinese damasks, and five jars
+of European sweet wine, and could not obtain any farther access to the
+emperor. The purpose of his embassy was, to require that such Portuguese
+and Spaniards as were then in Japan, not authorised by the king of
+Spain, might be delivered up to him, that he might carry them to the
+Philippines. This the emperor refused, saying his country was free, and
+none should be forced out of it: But, if the ambassador could persuade
+any to go with him, they should not be detained. The cause of the
+ambassador making this request was on account of the great want of men
+to defend the Molucca islands against the Dutch, who were then making
+great preparations for the entire conquest of these islands. After the
+ambassador had waited for an answer till the time limited by his
+commission was expired, and receiving none, he went away much
+dissatisfied: And when at the sea side, an answer was returned, as
+mentioned above, together with a slender present of five Japanese gowns,
+and two _cattans_ or swords.
+
+About a month before I came to Surunga, being displeased with the
+Christians, the emperor issued a proclamation commanding that they
+should all remove immediately, and carry their churches to Nangasaki, a
+maritime town about eight leagues from Firando, and that no Christian
+church should be permitted, neither any mass be sung, within ten leagues
+of his court, on pain of death. Some time after, twenty-seven natives,
+men of good fashion, being assembled in an hospital or Christian
+Leper-house, where they had mass performed, and this coming to the
+knowledge of the emperor, they were all commanded to be shut up in a
+house for a night, and to be led to execution next day. That same
+evening, another man was committed to the same house for debt, who at
+his coming was a heathen and quite ignorant of Christ or his holy
+religion; but, next morning, when the officer called at the door for the
+Christians to come forth for execution, and those who renounced it to
+remain behind, this man had been so instructed during the night by the
+others, that he came resolutely forth along with the rest, and was
+crucified with them.
+
+We departed from Surunga on the 9th of October, and during our journey
+towards _Miaco_ we had for the most part much rain, by which the rivers
+were greatly swelled, and we were forced to stop by the way, so that it
+was the 16th of October before we got there. _Miaco_ is the largest city
+in Japan, depending mostly upon trade, and having the chief _Fotoqui_
+or temple of the whole empire, which is all built of freestone, and is
+as long as the western end of St Paul's in London from the choir; being
+also as high, arched in the roof and borne upon pillars as that is. Many
+_bonzes_ are here in attendance for their maintenance, as priests are
+among the papists. They have here an altar, on which the votaries offer
+rice and small money, called _cundrijus_, twenty of which are equal to
+an English shilling, which offerings are applied to the use of the
+bonzes. Near this altar is an idol, called _Mannada_, much resembling
+that of _Dabis_ formerly mentioned, and like it made of copper, but much
+higher, as it reaches up to the arched roof. This _Fotoqui_ was begun to
+be built by _Taicosama_, and has since been finished by his son, having
+been ended only while we were there. According to report, there were
+buried within its enclosure the ears and noses of 3000 Coreans, who were
+massacred at one time; and upon their grave a mount is raised, having a
+pyramid on its summit, the mount being grown over with grass, and very
+neatly kept. The horse that Taicosama last rode upon is kept near this
+_Fotoqui_, having never been ridden since, and his hoofs have grown
+extraordinarily long by age.
+
+This _Fotoqui_ stands on the top of a high hill, and on either side, as
+you ascend the hill, there are fifty pillars of freestone, at ten paces
+each from the other, having a lantern on the top of each, which are all
+lighted up with oil every night. There are many other Fotoquis in this
+city. In Miaco the Portuguese jesuits have a very stately college, in
+which there are several native Japanese jesuits, who preach, and have
+the New Testament printed in the Japanese language. Many of the native
+children are bred up in this college, where they are instructed in the
+Christian religion, according to the doctrines of the Romish church; and
+there are not less than five or six thousand natives professing
+Christianity in this city. The tradesmen and artificers of all kinds in
+this city are all distributed by themselves, every trade and occupation
+having its own particular streets, and not mingled together as with us.
+We remained some time in Miaco, waiting for the emperor's present, which
+was at length delivered, being ten _beobs_, or large pictures, for being
+hung up in a chamber.
+
+The 20th of October we departed from Miaco, and came that night to
+_Fushimi_.[25] We arrived about noon of the next day at Osaka, where the
+common people behaved very rudely to us, some calling after us _Tosin!
+Tosin!_ that is, Chinese, while others called us _Core! Core!_ or
+Coreans, and flung stones at us; even the greatest people of the city
+animating and setting on the rabble to abuse us. We here found the
+galley waiting for us which had brought us from Firando, having waited
+for us all the time of our absence at the expence of king _Foyne_. We
+embarked in this galley on the 24th of October, and arrived at Firando
+on the 6th November, where we were kindly welcomed by old _Foyne_.
+During the time of my absence, our people had sold very little goods, as
+according to the customs of Japan no stranger can offer goods for sale
+without the express permission of the emperor. Besides, as our chiefest
+commodity intended for this country was broad cloth, which had latterly
+been sold there at the rate of forty Spanish dollars the _matte_, which
+is two yards and a quarter as formerly mentioned, and as the natives saw
+that we were not much in the habit of wearing it ourselves, they were
+more backward in buying it than they used to be. They said to us, "You
+commend your cloth to us, while you yourselves wear little of it; your
+better sort of people wearing silken garments, while the meanest are
+clothed in fustians, &c." Wherefore, that good counsel, though late, may
+come to some good purpose, I wish that our nation would be more inclined
+to use this our native manufacture of our own country, by which we may
+better encourage and allure others to its use and expenditure.
+
+[Footnote 25: Fusimo, a town about ten miles from Miaco, on a river that
+runs into the head of the bay of Osaka.--E.]
+
+
+Sec.8. _Occurrences at Firando, during the Absence of Captain Saris_.[26]
+
+The 7th August, 1613, all things being in readiness, our general Captain
+Saris departed from Firando in company with Mr Adams, for the court of
+the emperor of Japan, taking along with him Mr Tempest Peacock, Mr
+Richard Wickham, Edward Saris, Walter Carwarden, Diego Fernandos, John
+Williams a tailor, John Head a cook, Edward Bartan the surgeon's mate,
+John Japan _Jurebasso_,[27] Richard Dale coxswain, and Anthony Ferry a
+sailor; having a cavalier or gentleman belonging to king Foyne as their
+protector, with two of his servants, and two native servants belonging
+to Mr Adams. They embarked in a barge or galley belonging to the king,
+which rowed twenty oars of a side, and we fired thirteen pieces of
+ordnance at their departure. The old king sent 100 _tayes_ of Japanese
+money to our general before his departure, for his expenditure on the
+way, which I placed to account, by our general's order, as money lent.
+
+[Footnote 26: This subdivision is taken from observations written by
+Richard Cockes, Cape merchant, or chief factor at Firando. These
+observations are a separate article in the Pilgrims of Purchas, vol.
+I. pp. 395--405, and in Astley's Collection, vol. I. pp. 509--517; but
+are inserted in this place as calculated to render this first account of
+the English trade in Japan a complete and unbroken narrative.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 27: John Japan seems a fabricated name; perhaps a Japanese
+Christian named John, and the addition of _Jurebasso_ may signify that
+he acted as interpreter.--E.]
+
+Next day, I went to wait upon the two kings, as from our general, to
+thank them for having so well provided for his journey, which they took
+in good part. I suspect the old king had notice that some of our men had
+behaved ill last night; as he desired me to remind the master to look
+well to the people on board, and that I should look carefully to the
+behaviour of those on shore, that all things might go on as well in the
+absence of the general as when he was present, otherwise the shame would
+be ours, but the dishonour his. On the 9th, a Japanese boy named Juan,
+who spoke good Spanish, came and offered to serve me for nine or ten
+years, and even to go with me to England if I pleased, asking no wages
+but what I was pleased to give. I took him into my service, and that the
+rather, because I found Miguel, the _jurebasso_ left with me by Mr
+Adams, was somewhat stubborn, and loved to run about at his pleasure,
+leaving me often without any person who could speak a word of the
+Japanese language. This Juan is a Christian, most of his kindred
+dwelling at Nangasaki, only one living here at Firando, who came along
+with him and passed his word for his honesty and fidelity. Juan had
+served a Spaniard at Manilla for three years, where he had acquired the
+Spanish language. I engaged him, and bought for him two Japanese
+garments, which cost me fourteen _mas_.
+
+The 13th I shewed our commodities to some merchants of _Maioco_, [Miaco]
+but they bought nothing, and seemed chiefly to desire to have gunpowder.
+This day _Semidono_ went to visit our ship, accompanied by several
+stranger gentlemen, and came afterwards to see our English house, where
+I gave them the best entertainment in my power. The 19th at night began
+the great feast of the pagans, when they banquet and make merry all
+night by candle-light at the graves of their deceased kindred, whom
+they invite to partake.[28] It lasts three nights and the intermediate
+days; when, by command of the king, every house must new gravel the
+street before its door, and hang out candles all night. I was not slack
+in obeying this order, and I was informed that a poor man was put to
+death and his house shut up, for neglecting to comply with the order. On
+this occasion, the China captain furnished me with two very decent paper
+lanthorns. Being informed that the kings intended to ride about the
+streets, and to make me a visit, I provided a banquet for them, and
+waited till after midnight, but they came not. The 20th, 21st, and 22d,
+I sent presents to both the kings, being informed that such was the
+custom of the country, sending them wine and confections; as likewise to
+_Nobesane_ the young king's brother; to _Semidono_, the old king's
+governor, and to _Unagense_, which were all very thankfully accepted.
+Some _cavalliers_, or Japanese gentlemen, came to visit me during the
+festival, to whom I gave the best entertainment I could procure.
+
+[Footnote 28: This pagan feast is a kind of Candlemas or
+Allsouls.--_Purchas_.]
+
+The 23d we made an end of landing our gunpowder, being in all
+ninety-nine barrels, of which I advised our general by letter,
+requesting him to reserve a sufficiency for the ship, in case he sold it
+to the emperor. We landed several other things, which the master thought
+had best be sent ashore, as our men began to filch and steal, that they
+might go to taverns and brothels. This day Mr Melsham the purser and I
+dined with Semidono, who used us kindly. The master and Mr Eaton were
+likewise invited, but did not go. The great festival ended this day,
+when three troops of dancers went about the town, with flags or banners,
+their music being drums and _pans_,[29] to the sound of which they
+danced at the doors of all the great men, as also at their pagodas and
+at the sepulchres.
+
+[Footnote 29: Probably _gongs_, which very much resemble a brass
+frying-pan.--E.]
+
+The 24th at night, all the streets were hung with candles, as the young
+king and his brother, with _Semidono, Nabesone_, and many others, went
+in masquerade to dance at the house of the old king. The young king and
+his brother were on horseback, having canopies carried over them, all
+the rest being a-foot, and they were accompanied by drums and _kettles_,
+as the before-mentioned dancers, _Nabesone_ playing on a fife. I was
+informed they meant to visit our house on their return, wherefore I
+provided a banquet and sat up for them till after midnight; but they
+returned in disorder, I think owing to some discontent, and none of them
+entered our house. Captain _Brower_ likewise passed our door, but would
+not look at us, and we made as little account of him. The 27th we landed
+three pieces of ordnance, having three landed formerly, all whole
+_culverins_ of iron. The old king came down to the shore while our men
+were about this job, and seeing only twenty men, offered seventy or a
+100 Japanese to help them; but our people landed them all very quickly
+in his sight, at which he expressed much astonishment, saying that an
+hundred of his men could not have done it so soon. He was so much
+pleased with the activity of our men on this occasion, that he sent for
+a barrel of wine and some fish, which he gave among them as a reward for
+their labouring so lustily.
+
+The 28th, I received two letters from our general, dated the 19th and
+20th of the month, as also two others from Mr Peacock and Mr Wickham,
+which were brought me by the governor of _Shimonoseke_.[30] This
+governor did not land at Firando, but delivered these letters on board
+our ship to the master, proceeding directly for Nangasaki, and promising
+to return hither shortly. I also carried a letter for the old king
+_Foyne_, which was brought by the same governor, being accompanied on
+the occasion by Mr Melsham and _Hernando_. Foyne at this visit made a
+present of a _cattan_ or Japanese sword to Mr Melsham, and another with
+a Spanish dagger to Hernando, giving likewise both to them and me
+several bunches of garlic. He also gave us leave to dry our gunpowder on
+the top of the fortress, offering some of his own people to help ours,
+if we had need of them. This day I brought on shore to our house
+twenty-two bars of lead, together with 125 culverin shot, round and
+langridge. When we were about to sit down to supper, the old king came
+to visit us, and being very merry he sat down to supper with us, and
+took such fare as we had in good part.
+
+[Footnote 30: Simonosequi is a town on the north side of the straits
+between the island of Kiusiua and the north-western end of Niphon.--E.]
+
+The 1st September, the old king and all his nobles made a masquerade,
+and went next night to visit the young king his grandson, accompanied by
+music, as formerly mentioned, all the streets being hung with lanterns.
+As I was told he meant to visit our house on his return, I made ready
+for him and waited till after midnight; but he passed by with all his
+company without coming in. I reckoned he had more than 3000 persons in
+his train, for which, as I think, he passed by, not wishing to trouble
+us with so great a multitude. On the 2d _Semidono_ and others who were
+appointed by the king, measured all the houses in the street, ours among
+the rest; which I understood was for the purpose of a general taxation,
+to be levied by appointment of the emperor, for the construction of
+fortresses. I entertained them to their satisfaction. The 4th we had
+news that the queen of Spain was dead, and that the king was a suitor
+for the princess Elizabeth of England. The 6th, a nobleman came to visit
+our English house, and brought me a present of two great bottles of wine
+and a basket of pears. I entertained him as well as I could, and he went
+away contented.
+
+We had much rain in the morning of the 7th September, accompanied by
+wind, which increased in force all day, varying between the east and
+south. In the night between the 7th and 8th, the wind rose to a
+_tuffoon_ or storm of such extreme violence as I had never witnessed,
+neither had the like been experienced in this country during the memory
+of man. It overturned above an hundred houses in Firando, and unroofed
+many others, among which was the house of old king Foyne. An extensive
+wall surrounding the house of the young king was blown down, and the
+boughs and branches of trees were broken off and tossed about with
+wonderful violence. The sea raged with such fury, that it undermined a
+great wharf or quay at the Dutch factory, broke down the stone wall,
+carried away the landing stairs, sunk and broke to pieces two barks
+belonging to the Dutch, and forty or fifty other barks, then in the
+roads, were broken and sunk. At our house, the newly built wall of our
+kitchen was broken down by the sea, which likewise flowed into and threw
+down our oven. The tiles likewise were blown off from the roofs of our
+house and kitchen, both of which were partly unroofed. Our house rocked
+as if shaken by an earthquake, and we spent the night in extreme fear,
+either of being buried under the ruins of our factory, or of perishing
+along with it by fire; for all night long, the barbarous unruly common
+people ran up and down the streets with lighted firebrands, while the
+wind carried large pieces of burning wood quite over the tops of the
+houses, as it whirled up the burning timbers of the several houses
+previously thrown down, hurling fire through the air in great flakes,
+very fearful to behold, and threatening an entire conflagration of the
+town; and I verily believe, if it had not been for the extreme quantity
+of rain, contrary to the usual nature of tuffoons, that the whole town
+had been consumed. This terrible wind and prodigious rain were
+accompanied the whole night by incessant flashes of lightning and
+tremendous peals of thunder. Our ship rode out the gale in the roads,
+having out five cables and anchors, of which one old cable gave way,
+but, thanks be to God, no other injury was sustained, except that our
+long boat and skiff both broke adrift, but were both afterwards
+recovered. We afterwards learnt that this tuffoon did more damage at
+Nangasaki than here at Firando; for it destroyed above twenty Chinese
+junks, together with the Spanish ship which brought the ambassador from
+Manilla.
+
+On the 12th, two merchants from Miaco came to our English house, to whom
+I shewed all our commodities. They laid aside two pieces of broad cloth,
+one black and the other _stammel_, the best they could find, for which
+they offered seven _tayes_ the yard. They also offered for out _Priaman_
+gold eleven tayes of silver for one of gold. But they went away without
+concluding any bargain. This day, one of our men named Francis Williams,
+being drunk ashore, struck one of the servants of king Foyne with a
+cudgel, although the man had given him no offence, and had not even
+spoken to him. The Japanese came to our house making great complaints,
+and was very angry, not without cause, and told me he would complain to
+his king of the bad usage he had received. He had three or four others
+along with him, who had seen him abused, and who said the aggressor was
+just gone off to the ship. I gave them fair words, desiring them to go
+on board and find out the man who had committed the offence, and they
+should be sure of having him punished, and for that purpose I sent
+Miguel, our _jurebasso_, on board along with them. He did so, and
+pointed out Williams as the culprit, who stoutly denied the accusation
+with many oaths, but the affair was too notorious, and the master
+ordered him to be seized to the capstan in presence of the complainants,
+upon which even they entreated for his pardon, knowing that he was
+drunk. But the fellow was so unruly, that he took up an iron crow to
+strike the Japanese in the master's presence, and even abused the master
+in the grossest terms.[31]
+
+[Footnote 31: Of many misdemeanours, I permit some to pass the press,
+that the cause of so many deaths in the Indies might be seen, rather to
+be imputed to their own misconduct, than the intemperature of the
+climate, and for a caveat to others, who may send or be sent into
+_ethnicke_ regions: Yet do I conceal the most and worst.--_Purch._]
+
+Learning, on the 13th, that old king Foyne was sick, I sent our
+jurebasso Miguel to visit him, carrying as a present a great bottle of
+our general's sweet wine, and two boxes of conserves, comfits, and
+sugar-bread. Miguel was likewise directed to offer my best service, and
+to say that I was sorry for his sickness, and would have waited on him
+myself, but that I supposed company was not agreeable to a sick man.
+Foyne accepted my present in very good part, returning many thanks, and
+desiring me to ask for any thing we were in need of, either for the use
+of the ship or our factory, which he would take care we should be
+provided with.
+
+The master came to the factory on the 14th early in the morning, telling
+me that most of the ship's company had lain ashore all night without
+leave, although the ship was aground, and there had been a heavy wind
+all night. He wished therefore, that I would allow our jurebasso,
+Miguel, to accompany him in seeking them out. He went accordingly
+accompanied by Miguel and Mr Melsham our purser, and found several of
+the men drinking and domineering, among whom he bestowed a few blows,
+ordering them aboard. Two of the men, named Lambert and Colphax, though
+ordered aboard, remained ashore all day, notwithstanding the great need
+of hands in the ship, where it had been necessary to hire several
+Japanese to assist. Lambert and Colphax being drunk, went out into the
+fields and fought, on which occasion Lambert was hurt in the arm, and
+remained drunk ashore all night; as did Boles and Christopher Evans, who
+had done so for two or three nights before, and had a violent quarrel
+about a girl.
+
+On the 17th, being informed that _Bastian_, the keeper of the brothel
+frequented by our men, had threatened to kill me and such as came along
+with me, if I came any more to his house to seek for our men, I went and
+complained to the young king, the old one being sick. At my request, he
+issued a proclamation, that no Japanese should admit our people into
+their houses after day-light, under severe penalties; and that it should
+be lawful for me, or any other in my company, to enter any of the native
+houses in search of our men, not only without molestation or hinderance,
+but that the native inhabitants should aid and assist me; and if the
+doors were not opened at my desire, I was authorised to break them open.
+A soldier was sent to inform _Bastian_ to be careful not to molest or
+disturb me, as he might expect to be the first that should pay for it.
+This gave much offence to our people, insomuch that some of them swore
+they would have drink in the fields if they were not suffered to have it
+in the town, for drink they would.
+
+The 26th, _Novasco-dono_ came to visit me at the factory, bringing me a
+present of two bottles of wine, seven loaves of fresh bread, and a dish
+of flying-fish. While he was with me, the old king came past our door,
+where he stopt, saying he had met two men in the street whom he thought
+strangers, and not belonging to us; he therefore desired that Swinton
+and our jurebasso might go with one of his attendants to see who they
+were. They turned out to be John Lambert and Jacob Charke, who were
+drinking water at a door in the street through which the king had gone.
+I was glad the king looked so narrowly after them, as it caused our men
+to be more careful of their proceedings.
+
+Mr William Pauling, our master's mate, who had been long ill of a
+consumption, died at the English house upon the 27th of September, of
+which circumstance I apprised the king, requesting permission to bury
+him among the Christians, which was granted. We accordingly put the body
+in a winding-sheet, and coffined it up, waiting to carry it to the grave
+next morning. Our master, and several others of the ship's company, came
+ashore in the morning to attend the funeral, when we were given to
+understand that the body must be transported by water as far as the
+Dutch house, because the _bonzes_, or priests, would not suffer us to
+pass with the corpse through the street before their pagoda, or idol
+temple. Accordingly the master sent for the skiff, in which the coffin
+was transported by water to the place appointed, while we went there by
+land, and carried it thence to the burial-place; the purser walking
+before, and all the rest following after the coffin, which was covered
+by a Holland sheet, above which was a silk quilt. We were attended by a
+vast number of the natives, both young and old, curious to see our
+manner of burial. After the corpse was interred, we all returned to the
+factory, where we had a collation, and then our people returned to the
+ship. I had almost forgotten to remark, that we had much ado to get any
+native to dig the grave in which a Christian was to be buried, neither
+would they permit the body to be conveyed by water in any of their
+boats.
+
+At this time the king commanded that all the streets in Firando should
+be cleaned, and that gutters should be made on each side to convey the
+water from them, all the streets to be new gravelled, and the
+water-channels to be covered with flat stones. This work was all done in
+one day, every one performing so much of it as was in front of his own
+house, and it was admirable to see the diligence every person used on
+this occasion. Our house was not the last in having this task performed,
+as our landlord, the Chinese captain, set a sufficient number of men to
+do the work.
+
+The 30th, some other merchants of Miaco came to look at our commodities,
+who offered twelve tayes the fathom for our best _stammel_, or red
+cloth; but they went away without making any bargain. At this time we
+had very heavy winds, both by day and night, so that we were in fear of
+another tuffoon, on which account all the fishers hauled their boats
+ashore, and every one endeavoured to secure the roofings of their
+houses. A week before this, a _bose_, bonze or conjurer, had predicted
+to the king that this tempest was to come. About this time our surgeon,
+being in his cups, came into a house where a _bose_ was conjuring for a
+woman who wanted to know if her husband or friends would return from
+sea. So when the _bose_ was done, the surgeon gave him three-pence to
+conjure again, and to tell him when our general would return to Firando.
+In the end, the _bose_ told him that the general would return within
+eighteen days, pretending that he heard a voice answer from behind a
+wall, both when he conjured for the woman, and now when he conjured for
+the surgeon.
+
+On the 2d of October, the master sent me word that some of the men had
+run away with the skiff. These were John Bowles, John Saris, John
+Tottie, Christopher Evans, Clement Locke, Jasper Malconty, and James the
+Dutchman. While in the way to the king to get boats to send after them,
+our Dutch _jurebasso_ came running after me, and told me our people were
+on the other side making merry at a tippling-house. On this information
+I returned to the English house to get a boat for the master to go and
+look them out, but they proved to be three others, William Marinell,
+Simeon Colphax, and John Dench, who had hired a boat and gone to another
+island, not being allowed to walk by night in Firando. By this mistake
+our deserters had the more time to get away. This night, about eleven,
+the old king's house, on the other side of the water, took fire, and
+was burnt to the ground in about an hour. I never saw a more vehement
+fire for the time it lasted, and it is thought his loss is very great.
+The old king is said to have set it on fire himself, by going about in
+the night with lighted canes, some sparks from which had fallen among
+the mats and set them on fire.
+
+I went next day to visit the old king, giving him to understand, by
+means of his governor, that I was extremely sorry for the misfortune
+that had befallen him, and would have come in person to give all the
+assistance in my power, but was doubtful if my presence would have been
+acceptable, being a stranger; and begged leave to assure him, that he
+should find me ready at all times, even with the hazard of my life, to
+do him every service in my power. He gave me many thanks for my good
+will, saying, that the loss he had sustained was as nothing in his
+estimation. On my return to our house, I was met by the young king going
+to visit his grandfather. Before noon, we had word that our runaways
+were upon a desert island about two leagues from Firando, of which I
+gave notice to both kings, requesting their aid and council how we might
+best bring them back. They answered, that they would fetch them back
+dead or alive, yet would be loth to kill them, lest we might want hands
+to navigate the ship back to England. I returned many thanks for the
+care they had of us, yet sent them word we still had a sufficiency of
+honest men to carry our ship to England, even although we should lose
+these knaves. In fine, the king fitted out two boats full of soldiers to
+go after them, with positive orders to bring them back dead or alive,
+which I made known to our master, who wished much to go along with them,
+and did so accordingly.
+
+
+9. _Continuation of Occurrences at Firando, during the Absence of the
+General_.
+
+On the 4th of October, a report was current in Firando that the _Devil_
+had revealed to the _bose_, [bonzes] or conjurers, that the town was to
+be burned to ashes that night, on which criers went about the streets
+the whole night, making so much noise that I could hardly get any rest,
+giving warning to all the inhabitants to extinguish their fires. But the
+devil turned out a liar, for no such thing happened. The 5th, old king
+_Foyne-same_ came to our house, and was entertained to the best of our
+ability, when he told me our runaway seamen could not escape being
+taken, as he had sent two other armed boats after them, besides the two
+formerly mentioned. While I was talking with him, there came a gentleman
+from the emperor's court with a letter, and told me that our general
+would be back to Firando in eight or ten days, as he had received his
+dispatches from the emperor before this gentleman left the court. At
+this time king Foyne told me that _Bon-diu_, the king or governor of
+Nangasaki, who is brother to the empress, was to be at Firando next day,
+and that it would be proper for our ship to fire off three or four
+pieces of cannon as he passed. He told me likewise, that the king or
+governor of a town called _Seam_, was then in Firando.
+
+The master of our ship, Mr James Foster, returned from Nangasaki on the
+7th, bringing our skiff with him, but all the deserters had got
+sanctuary in that town, so that he had not been able to see or speak
+with any of them. I was informed that Miguel, our jurebasso, whom I had
+sent along with the master as linguist, had dealt fraudulently both with
+the master and me, for several Japanese told me that he had spoken to
+our people and advised them to absent themselves. Knowing this, and
+being doubtful of ever recovering our people unless _Bondiu_ were
+extraordinarily dealt with, I resolved to give that personage a present
+to secure him in our interest. In the afternoon, as he was passing on
+foot along the street in which was our house, along with the young king
+who gave him the post of honour, attended by about five hundred
+followers, I went out into the street and saluted them. Bon-diu stopped
+at our door and thanked me for the salute given him in passing our ship.
+I requested he would excuse me if I had hitherto neglected any part of
+my duty towards him, which was owing to my small acquaintance with the
+country and its customs, but that I meant to wait upon him either at his
+lodgings or aboard his junk, before he left Firando. He answered, that I
+should be heartily welcome, and remained so long in conversation, that
+it was quite dark before he got to his lodgings. At this time I carried
+the present to him, which he accepted in good part, offering to do our
+nation all the good in his power at court, whither he was now bound, or
+to serve us all he could any where else. Of his own accord, he began now
+to speak about the deserters, asking me if they should all be pardoned
+for his sake, if he brought them back to us? I answered, that the power
+of pardon belonged to our general, not to me, and that I had no doubt
+they might easily get free, except one or two of the chiefs in this and
+other disorders, who richly deserved punishment. He then said that he
+wished them all pardoned, without any exception: to which I answered,
+that I was sure our general would most willingly do any thing desired by
+his highness, or the two kings of Firando. In conclusion, he said, if I
+would give it under my hand on the faith of a Christian, that all should
+be pardoned for this time, and that I would procure the general to
+confirm this at his return, he would then send to Nangasaki for the
+deserters, and deliver them into my custody, otherwise he would not
+meddle in the matter, lest he might occasion any of their deaths. I
+answered, I was contented with any thing his highness was pleased to
+command, and so gave him the desired writing under my hand, conditioning
+that they were all to be sent back. I then returned to our house after
+which the Dutch waited upon him with their present, but we were before
+hand with them.
+
+On the 8th _Semidono_ passed our house, and told me that king _Bon-diu_
+had a brother along with him, to whom it would be proper that we should
+give a present, but not so large as that given to Bon-diu. On this,
+advising with the other gentlemen, I laid out a present for him, and on
+going to deliver it, I found the Dutch before me with theirs, Captain
+Brower going with it himself. He accepted it very kindly, promising his
+interest and assistance to our nation, both at court and any where else.
+He came soon afterwards to our house, accompanied by many gentlemen,
+when they looked over all our commodities, yet went away without making
+any purchases. On this occasion he gave me a small _cattan_, and I gave
+him two glass bottles, two gally-pots, and about half a _cattee_ of
+picked cloves, which he said he wanted for medicinal purposes. I
+likewise gave him and his followers a collation, with which they all
+seemed contented.
+
+Soon afterwards, _Bon-diu_ sent a gentleman to me, desiring to have my
+written promise for pardon to our deserters, to which I consented, after
+consulting with the other gentlemen. If I had not done this, we
+certainly had never got them back, and the Spaniards would have sent
+them to Manilla or the Moluccas. Immediately after this, I got notice
+that _Bon-diu_ and his brother meant to visit our ship, wherefore I sent
+some banqueting stuff aboard, and went myself to meet them, when they
+were entertained as we best could. Bon-diu gave two _cattans_, and we
+saluted them with seven guns at their departure. The brother returned
+soon after, and requested to have one of the little monkeys for his
+brother's children; so I bought one for five dollars from our
+master-gunner, and sent it to _Bon-diu_. He being ready to go on shore,
+desired to have me along with him in his boat, which I complied with,
+and he was saluted with three guns at his departure, which, as I learnt
+afterwards, was much esteemed by both brothers. When ashore, he insisted
+to accompany me to our factory, much against my inclination, as I was
+again forced to give him a collation in Mr Adamses chamber, after which
+he and his companions went away seemingly satisfied. Late at night, old
+king Foyne sent a man to me to enquire the particulars of the presents I
+had given to both brothers, all of which he set down in writing, but I
+could never know the reason of this. I forgot to mention that Bon-diu,
+just before going aboard our ship, went to bathe in a new warm-bath at
+the Dutch factory. The 9th Bon-diu sent one of his men to give me thanks
+for the kind entertainment he had on board, and sent me by the messenger
+two barrels of Miaco wine. Soon after, his brother sent me a similar
+message and present. They were both very earnest to have a
+perspective-glass, wherefore I sent them an old one belonging to Mr
+Eaton; but it was soon after returned with thanks, as not suiting them.
+
+On the 10th, two sons of another governor of Nangasaki who dwells in the
+town, came to see our house, both of them being Christians. After
+shewing them our commodities, I gave them a collation, accompanied with
+music, Mr Hownsell and the carpenter happening both by chance to be at
+the factory. While we were at table, old king Foyne came in upon us
+quite unexpectedly, and sat down to partake. I then desired our
+jurebasso to request the speedy sending back of our runaways, which they
+all promised, provided they should be pardoned, as I had formerly
+promised, and which promise I now renewed. Old Foyne desired that I
+would send him next day a piece of English beef; and another of pork,
+sodden with onions. I accordingly sent our jurebasso next day with the
+beef and pork, together with a bottle of wine, and six loaves of white
+bread, all of which he very kindly accepted. He had at table with him
+his grandson the young king, _Nabison_, his brother, and _Semidono_, his
+kinsman.
+
+On the 12th I went to visit both kings, and found the old one asleep,
+but spoke with his governor, after which I went to the young king, who
+received me.[32] He gave me thanks for the kind entertainment I had
+given the strangers, which he said his grandfather and he took in as
+good part as if done to themselves. Towards night, Foyne sent to say
+that he understood the strangers, who were now departed, had taken away
+various commodities from me, paying only as they thought good
+themselves, and not the prices I required. I answered, that they had
+certainly done so, but I knew not whether it were the custom of the
+country, being given to understand that they were in use to do so at
+Nangasaki both with the Chinese and Portuguese, and that in reality what
+they had taken from me was not worth the speaking of. I was answered,
+that although this was done at Nangasaki with the Chinese, who were
+forbidden to trade at Japan, they had not authority to do so with those
+strangers who had the privilege of trade, more especially here at
+Firando, where these people had no authority. I sent back my humble
+thanks to the king for the care he used to see justice done both to
+strangers and natives, saying, I would wait upon his highness myself to
+inform him of the whole truth. Captain Brower sent me word that they had
+taken various commodities from him, paying him just as they pleased; he
+also sent an empty bottle, desiring to have it filled with Spanish wine,
+as he had invited certain strangers, and had none of his own.
+
+[Footnote 32: It was now a great festival among the pagans, which began
+on this day, said to be like the Lent of the papists.--_Purch._]
+
+I heard three or four guns or chambers discharged on the 13th, which I
+supposed had been done at the Dutch house, in honour of the king; but I
+afterwards learnt that they were shot by a Chinese junk which was
+passing for Nangasaki. Shortly after, the old king sent for me to come
+to dinner at the Dutch house, and to bring Mr Eaton with me, and a
+bottle of wine.[33] Mr Eaton had taken medicine, and could not go out,
+but I went. We had an excellent dinner, the dishes being dressed partly
+in the Japanese fashion, and partly according to the Dutch way, but no
+great drinking. The old king sat at one table, accompanied by his eldest
+son and two brothers of the young king, as the young king had sent to
+say he was not well. At the other table there sat, first, _Nabesone_,
+the old king's brother, then myself, next me _Semidono_, then the old
+king's governor, and below him _Zanzebar's_ father-in-law, and various
+other Japanese gentlemen on the other side of the table. Captain Brower
+did not sit down, but carved at table, all his own people attending and
+serving on their knees. Captain Brower even gave drink to every one of
+his guests with his own hands, and upon his knees, which seemed very
+strange to me. When they had dined, Foyne and all his nobles went away,
+and Captain Brower accompanied me to our house. I asked him why he
+served these people on his knees, when he told me it was the custom of
+the country, even the king serving his guests on his knees when he made
+a feast, to do them the more honour. Before night the old king came to
+the English house, and visited all its apartments. I gave him a
+collation, and after staying an hour, and taking one thing and another,
+he went his way.
+
+[Footnote 33: These things are mentioned to shew how poor Cockes was
+imposed upon among them; as, taking advantage of his weak side, they
+seem all to have wished to get from him all they could, without any
+design of serving him in return.--Astl. I. 518. b.]
+
+On the 16th, learning that two Christians were arrived from Nangasaki, I
+went to visit them, and to enquire about our runaways. One was George
+Peterson, a Dutchman, born in Flushing; the other was Daman Maryn, a
+native of Venice. They told me that our runaways had been conveyed away
+in a small bark for _Macoro_,[34] and that they two had deserted in hope
+of procuring a passage in our ship to return to their own countries;
+they said they were well known to Mr Adams, and were desirous to have
+gone immediately on board, being both seafaring men. The Dutchman had
+served three or four and twenty years with the Spaniards, and came
+master's mate in one of their ships from _Agua-pulca_ [Acapulco.] for
+Manilla in the Philippine islands. They had plenty of money, and would
+have sent it to our ship or to our factory; but I told them that I durst
+not presume to entertain them in the absence of our general, yet would
+do them all the service in my power at his return. I accordingly sent
+Miguel to inform the king that these two strangers were come to seek a
+passage in our ship, not being Spaniards nor subjects of Spain. The king
+sent me back for answer, that they were welcome, if they were such as
+they reported themselves; but, if Spaniards or Portuguese, he could not
+allow them to remain in Firando, as the Spanish ambassador had procured
+an order from the emperor that all Spaniards should retire to Manilla.
+
+[Footnote 34: Called in the sequel Macow, or Macao, the Portuguese
+settlement on the coast of China, at the mouth of the _Bocca-tigris_, or
+river of Canton.--E]
+
+The two strangers came to me early on the 17th, requesting me to
+accompany them to wait upon the king, to give them the better
+countenance, which I agreed to. On the way, they told me that our
+fugitives had given out at Nangasaki that more of our people would
+follow them, as none of any account would stay to navigate the ship
+home, because their officers used them more like dogs than men. They
+alleged also, that twenty resolute Spaniards might easily get possession
+of our ship in one or two small boats. The old king received us very
+kindly, and asked the strangers many questions about the wars in the
+Molucca islands between the Spaniards and Dutch. They said the Spaniards
+were resolved to prosecute this war with much vigour, having prepared a
+strong force for that purpose. They also told the king that all our
+fugitives had, as they believed, been secretly conveyed away from
+Nangasaki seven days before, in a _soma_ that went from thence for
+_Macow_.[35] The king would not believe them, saying it was impossible
+such a man as Bon-diu, having given his word to restore them, should be
+found false to his promise. In the end, he agreed to allow these men to
+remain, and to go along with our ship, if our general pleased to take
+them. So the poor men returned much contented to their lodgings,
+assuring me they would prove faithful to us, and that we need not wish
+any worse punishment to our fugitives than the bad treatment they would
+receive from the Spaniards.
+
+[Footnote 35: Macow, or Macao, a town of the Portuguese near the
+continent of China. Miguel, the jurebasso, servant to Mr Adams, was
+suspected of double-dealing in this affair of the fugitives: the
+circumstances I omit.--_Purch._]
+
+The 18th we had a total eclipse of the moon, which began about eleven
+p.m. The 19th, about the same hour, a fire began in Firando, near the
+young king's house, by which forty houses were burnt down; and, had not
+the wind fallen calm, most of the town had been destroyed. Had not our
+Englishmen bestirred themselves lustily, many more houses had gone to
+wreck, for the fire took hold three or four times on the opposite side
+of the street to our house, which they as often extinguished, for which
+they were very much commended by the king and other principal people.
+Old Foyne came to our door on horseback, and advised us to put all our
+things into the _godown_, and daub up the door with wet clay, which
+would place them in safety. Captain Brower likewise, and some of his
+people, came very kindly to our house, offering to assist us either by
+land or water, if needful. It could not be known how this fire began,
+but there were reports among the Japanese that there would soon be a
+still greater fire, which had been predicted by the devil and his
+conjurers. I pray God it may not be done purposely by some villainous
+people, on purpose to rob and steal what they can lay hold of during the
+trouble and confusion.
+
+The 20th I went to visit Captain Brower at the Dutch house, to return
+thanks for his friendly assistance the night before. Towards night,
+Hernando the Spaniard and Edward Markes returned from Nangasaki, where
+they could not procure sight of any of our fugitives, though they were
+still at that place. A Portuguese or Spaniard at Nangasaki, in high
+authority about sea affairs, told Markes we should never have our men
+back; but that if all the rest of our people would come, leaving the
+ship empty, they would be well received, and would be still more welcome
+if they brought the ship with them. The Japanese, who had been sent by
+king Foyne along with our people to look for our runaways, would not
+allow Markes to stir out of doors for a night and half a day after their
+arrival at Nangasaki, he going abroad himself, and Hernando lodging at a
+different place, whence I suspect there was some fraudulent
+understanding between the Japanese and Hernando, and have now lost hope
+of ever getting our men back. I blamed the jesuits, and the old king
+agreed with me, and told me he would take care that no more of our
+people should be carried to Nangasaki, except they stole the ship's
+boats, as the others had done, of which I gave notice to Mr James
+Foster, our master. Foyne at this time issued an edict, strictly
+forbidding any of the Japanese from carrying away any of our people,
+without previously making it known to him and me.
+
+The 23d I was informed of a great pagan festival to be celebrated this
+day, both kings and all the nobles being to meet at a summer-house
+erected before the great pagoda, to see a horse-race. I think there must
+have been above 3000 people assembled together on this occasion. All the
+nobles went on horseback, each being accompanied by a retinue of slaves,
+some armed with pikes, some with fire-arms, and others with bows and
+arrows. The pikemen drew up on one side of the street, and the shot and
+archers on the other, the middle being left open for the race. Right
+before the summer-house, where the king and nobles were seated, was a
+large round target of straw, hung against the wall, at which the
+archers running at full career on horseback discharged their arrows.
+The street was so crowded, that neither the present we sent, nor we
+ourselves, could get admission, so we passed along the street and
+returned by another way to our house. Late at night, the brother of
+Zanzibar's wife came to our house, bringing me a present of a haunch of
+venison and a basket of oranges, being accompanied by Zanzibar himself.
+About ten at night, the Chinese captain, our landlord, came to inform us
+that the king had ordered a tub of water to be kept ready on the top of
+every house, as the devil had given out that the town was to be burnt
+down that night: Yet the devil proved a liar: We got however a large tub
+on the top of our house, which held twenty buckets of water; and all
+night long people ran about the streets calling out for every one to
+look well to their fires, so that it was strange and fearful to hear
+them.
+
+This report of burning the town was still current on the 24th, and every
+one was making preparations to prevent it. I made ready fifteen buckets,
+which cost six _condrines_ each, which I filled with water and hung up
+in our yard, setting a large tub beside them full of water, besides that
+on the house top. I gave orders likewise to get two ladders ready for
+carrying water to the roof, and provided nine wine casks filled with
+tempered clay, ready for daubing up the doors of the _gadonge_, [godown
+or fire-proof warehouse,] if need should require in consequence of a
+conflagration, from which dire necessity may God defend us. All night
+long, three or four men ran continually backwards and forwards in the
+streets, calling out for every one to have a care of fire, and making so
+horrible a noise, that it was both strange and fearful to hear them.
+
+On the 25th, the Chinese captain, our landlord, was taken sick, and sent
+for a piece of pork, which I sent him, and immediately afterwards I went
+to visit him, carrying a small bottle of Spanish wine. While I was
+there, Semidono and our guardian's father-in-law came likewise to visit
+him. The king sent me word, by Miguel, our jurebasso, that he had a bad
+opinion of Hernando Ximenes our Spaniard, and that he meant to have run
+away when lately at Nangasaki. But I knew this to be false, as he had
+then free liberty to go where he pleased, and did not run away. I had
+another complaint made against him, that he was a notorious gambler, and
+had enticed several to play, from whom he won their money, which I
+believe rather than the other accusation. I find by experience, that the
+Japanese are not friendly to the Spaniards and Portuguese, and love them
+at Nangasaki the worse, because they love them so well.[36] In the night
+between the 24th and 25th, some evil-disposed persons endeavoured to
+have set the town of Firando on fire in three several places, but it was
+soon extinguished, and no harm done; but the incendiaries were not
+discovered, though doubtless owing to the conjurers and other base
+people, who expected an opportunity of making spoil when the town was on
+fire.
+
+[Footnote 36: This is quite obscure, and may perhaps allude to the
+efforts of the Jesuits at Nangasaki, to convert the Japanese to a new
+idol worship, under the name of Christianity.--E.]
+
+The 26th of October, Mr Melsham being very sick, _Zanzibar_ came to
+visit him, and urged him to use the physic of the country, bringing with
+him a _bonze_, or doctor, to administer the cure. Mr Melsham was very
+desirous to use it, but wished our surgeon to see it in the first place.
+So the bonze gave him two pills yesterday, two in the night, and two
+this morning, together with certain seeds; but, for what I can see,
+these things did him no good. God restore his health! At this time, all
+our waste-cloths, pennants, brass sheaves, and other matters, were sent
+aboard, and our ship was put into order to receive our general, whose
+return was soon expected. Last night another house was set on fire by
+some villains, but was soon extinguished with very little harm; yet our
+nightly criers of fire continue to make such horrible noises, that it is
+impossible for any one to get rest. The Chinese captain still continued
+sick, and sent to beg some spiced cakes and two wax-candles, which I
+sent him, as I had done before. Mr Melsham now grew weary of his
+Japanese doctor and his prescriptions, and returned to our surgeon Mr
+Warner, to the great displeasure of Zanzibar and the bonze.
+
+Sec.10. _Conclusion of Observations by Mr Cockes_.
+
+Our Chinese landlord came to our house on the 30th October, to inform me
+of a general collection of provisions of all kinds, then making at every
+house in Firando, to be sent to the two kings, in honour of a great
+feast they were to give next day, together with a comedy or play. By his
+advice, and after consulting with the other gentlemen of the factory, I
+directed two bottles of Spanish wine, two roasted hens, a roasted pig, a
+small quantity of rusk, and three boxes of confections and preserves to
+be sent, as a contribution towards their feast. Before night the young
+king sent one of his men to me, requesting me to furnish him with some
+English apparel, for the better setting out their comedy, and
+particularly to let him have a pair of red cloth breeches. I answered,
+that I had nonesuch, and knew not any of our people who had; but any
+clothes I had that could gratify his highness were much at his service.
+At night the old king sent to invite me to be a spectator of their
+comedy on the morrow, and to bring Mr Foster, our master, along with me.
+
+Next day, being the 31st, I sent our present, formerly mentioned, to the
+kings by our jurebasso before dinner, desiring their highnesses to
+excuse the master and myself, and that we would wait upon them some
+other time, when they had not so much company. This however did not
+satisfy them, and they insisted on our company, and that of Mr Eaton; so
+we went and had a place appointed for us, where we sat at our ease and
+saw every thing. The old king himself brought us a collation in sight of
+all the people; Semidono afterwards did the like in the name of both
+kings, and a third was brought us in the sequel by several of their
+principal nobles or attendants. But that which we most noted was their
+play or comedy, in which the two kings, with their greatest nobles and
+princes, were the actors. The subject was a representation of the
+valiant deeds of their ancestors, from the commencement of their kingdom
+or commonwealth to the present time, which was mixed with much mirth to
+please the common people. The audience was very numerous, as every house
+in the town of Firando, and every village, place, or hamlet in their
+dominions brought a present, and all their subjects were spectators. The
+kings themselves took especial care that every one, both high and low,
+should eat and drink before they departed. Their acting, music, singing,
+and poetry, were very harsh to our ears, yet the natives kept time to
+it, both with hands and feet. Their musical instruments were small drums
+or tabors, wide at both ends and small in the middle, resembling an
+hour-glass, on one end of which they beat with one hand, while with the
+other they strained the cords which surround it, making it to sound soft
+or loud at their pleasure, and tuning their voices to its sound, while
+others played on a fife or flute; but all was harsh and unpleasant to
+our ears. I never saw a play of which I took such notice, as it was
+wonderfully well represented, yet quite different from ours in
+Christendom, which are only dumb-shews, while this was as truth itself,
+and acted by the kings themselves, to preserve a continual remembrance
+of their affairs.
+
+On this occasion, the king did not invite the Dutch, which made our
+being present seem the greater compliment. When I returned to our house,
+I found three or four of the Dutchmen there, one of whom was in a
+Japanese habit, and came from a place called _Cushma_,[37] which is
+within sight of Corea. I understood they had sold pepper there and other
+goods, and suspect they have some secret trade thence with Corea, or are
+likely soon to have, and I trust if they do well that we shall not miss,
+as Mr Adams was the man who put them upon this trade, and I have no
+doubt he will be as diligent for the good of his own countrymen as he
+has been for strangers. Hernando Ximenes was with Captain Brower when
+the two men came from Cushma, and asked them whence they came, at which
+Brower was very angry, telling him he should have no account of that
+matter.
+
+[Footnote 37: Key-sima, an island considerably to the N.E. of Firando,
+and nearly midway between Niphon and Corea, from which it may be about
+forty miles distant.--E.]
+
+Towards night, I was informed that two Spaniards were arrived from
+Nangasaki, and were lodged with _Zanzibar_. They sent for our jurebasso
+to come to them, but I did not allow him, on which they and Zanzibar
+came to our house. One of them was _Andres Bulgaryn_, a Genoese, who had
+passed Firando only a few days before, and the other _Benito de Palais_,
+pilot-major of the Spanish ship lately cast away on the coast of Japan,
+the same person who came here formerly from Nangasaki to visit Captain
+Adams. They said they had come to visit their friends, me in the first
+place; and used many words of compliment, after which they entered into
+conversation respecting our fugitives. They pretended that it was not
+the fathers, as they called the jesuits, who kept our people from being
+seen and spoken with, but the natives of Nangasaki, who they said were
+very bad people. In fine, I shrewdly suspected these fellows of having
+come a-purpose to inveigle more of our people to desert, as the others
+did, wherefore I advised our master to have a watchful eye both to the
+ship and boats, and to take special notice who kept company with our
+men, as it was best to doubt the worst, for the best will save itself.
+
+On the night of the 1st November, two houses were set a-fire on the
+other side of the water, which were soon extinguished, but the villains
+could not be found out. This day I sent word to Mr Foster on board, to
+look well to the ship and the boats, and to the behaviour of our people,
+as I strongly suspected the two Spaniards of being spies, come to entice
+away our men. I sent him word likewise, that I understood the Spaniards
+meant to invite him that day to dinner, but wished him to beware they
+did not give him a _higo_.[38] He answered, that he had the same opinion
+of them I had, and should therefore be mainly on his guard. He came soon
+after on shore, and the Spaniards came to our house, where by much
+entreaty they prevailed on Mr Foster and Mr William Eaton to go with
+them to dinner at Zanzibar's house, along with Hernando and the other
+two Spaniards. But these two Spaniards came to me, and desired me to
+tell Mr Foster and those who went with him, to take heed they did not
+eat or drink of any thing they did not see tasted by others, as they
+were not to be trusted, which I communicated to Mr Foster and Mr Eaton.
+Ximenes told me that Mr Adams had goods in his hands belonging to the
+pilot-major, who had come in the hope of finding Mr Adams here, and
+meant to wait his return. He said they had likewise brought letters from
+the bishop and other fathers to the other two Spaniards, advising them
+to return to Nangasaki, but which I think they will not do. I this day
+sent our jurebasso to both kings and the other nobles, to give them
+thanks for the kind entertainment we had received the day before.
+
+[Footnote 38: From the sequel, this unexplained term seems to imply
+treachery.--E.]
+
+The 2d, some villains set fire to a house in the fish street, which was
+soon put out, and the incendiaries escaped. It is generally thought
+these fires were raised by some base renegados who lurk about the town,
+and who came from Miaco: Yet, though much suspected, no proof has
+hitherto been brought against them. There has, however, been orders
+given to construct gates and barriers in different parts of all the
+streets, with watches at each, and no person to be allowed to go about
+in the night, unless he be found to have very urgent business. Another
+villain got this night into the house of a poor widow, meaning to have
+robbed her; but on her making an outcry, he fled into the wood opposite
+our house, where the Pagoda stands.[39] The wood was soon after beset
+all around by above 500 men, but the robber could not be found. At
+night, when we were going to bed, there was a sudden alarm given that
+there were thieves on the top of our house, endeavouring to set it on
+fire. Our ladders being ready, I and others went up immediately, but
+found nobody, yet all the houses of our neighbours were peopled on the
+top like ours on similar alarms. This was judged to be a false alarm,
+risen on purpose to see whether any one would be found in readiness. At
+this very time there was a house set on fire, a good way from our house,
+but the fire was soon quenched. The night before, three houses were set
+a-fire in different parts of the town, but the fires were all
+extinguished at the beginning, so that no hurt was done. At this time,
+an order was issued to give notice of all the inhabitants dwelling in
+every house, whether strangers or others; and that all who were liable
+to suspicion should be banished from the dominions of the two kings of
+Firando. Bars or gates were erected to shut up the passages at the ends
+of all the streets, and watches were appointed in different places, with
+orders not to go about crying and making a noise, as had been done
+hitherto without either form or fashion. Yet, notwithstanding these
+precautions, a villain set fire about ten o'clock this night to a house
+near the Pagoda, opposite our house. He was noticed by the watch, who
+pursued him in all haste, but he escaped into the wood above the Pagoda.
+The wood was immediately beset by more than 500 armed men, and old king
+Foyne came in person with many of his nobles to assist in the pursuit;
+yet the incendiary escaped, and I verily believe he ran about among the
+rest, crying _stop thief_ as, well as the best.
+
+[Footnote 39: This word signifies either the idol, or the idol temple,
+or both.--_Purch._]
+
+On the night of the 4th, fire was set to several houses, both in the
+town and country round. An order was now given, to have secret watches
+in various parts of the town every night, and that no person should go
+out during the night except upon important occasions, and then to have a
+light carried before them, that it might be seen who they were. If this
+rule be duly enforced, our house-burners will be put to their wits end.
+I proposed these measures to the king and others above a week before,
+and now they are put in execution.
+
+On the 5th I received a letter from Domingo Francisco, the Spanish
+ambassador, dated five days before from _Ximenaseque_, [Simonoseki,] and
+another from George the Portuguese. The ambassador went over land from
+that place to Nangasaki, and sent the letter by his servant, to whom I
+shewed the commodities he enquired after, referring him for others till
+the return of our general, but gave him an answer, of which I kept a
+copy. The man chose two pieces of fine _Semian chowters_ and eight
+pieces of white _bastas_, paying seven _tayes_ each for the _chowters,_
+and two _tayes_ each for the _bastas_. A Spanish friar or Jesuit came in
+the boat along with the ambassador's servant, and asked to see our ship,
+which the master allowed him at my request, and used him kindly; for the
+old saw has it, That it is sometimes good to hold a candle to the devil.
+This day Mr Eaton, Hernando, and I dined with Unagense, and were kindly
+entertained.
+
+About ten o'clock of the 6th November, 1613, our general and all his
+attendants arrived at Firando from the emperor's court, accompanied by
+Mr Adams. Immediately after his arrival, he sent me, with John Japan,
+our jurebasso, to visit both the kings, and to thank them for their
+kindness, for having so well accommodated him with a barge or galley,
+and for the care they had taken of the ship and every thing else during
+his absence. They took this message in good part, saying they would be
+glad to see our general at their houses. At this time certain merchants
+of Miaco came from Nangasaki to our house to look at our commodities,
+and among the rest took liking to ten pieces of _cassedy nill_, for
+which they agreed to give three _tayes_ each. As had been done by other
+merchants, I sent the goods to their lodging, expecting to receive the
+money as usual; but they only sent me a paper, consigning me to receive
+payment from _Semidono_, who was newly gone from Firando on a voyage,
+and was met by our general. I sent back word to the merchants that I
+must either have payment or the goods returned, to which they answered,
+I should have neither one nor the other; and as the person with whom
+they lodged refused to pass his word for payment, I was forced to apply
+to both the kings for justice; but I first sent word aboard our ship, if
+the boat of Miaco weighed anchor to go away, that they should send the
+skiff to make her stay, which they did, and made her come to anchor
+again. In the mean time I went to the kings. The younger king said that
+_Semidono_ was able enough to pay me; but when I asked him if Semidono
+refused to pay, whether he would, he answered no. While we were talking
+about the matter, the old king came in, and told me he would take order
+that I should be satisfied; so in the end the person with whom the
+merchants lodged passed his word for payment of the thirty _tayes_; yet
+the orders of old _Foyne Same_ had come too late, if our skiff had not
+stopt the Miaco merchants. This day Captain Brower and all the
+merchants of the Dutch factory came to visit our general, and
+_Nobisone_ sent him a young porker as a present, with a message saying
+he would come to visit him in a day or two.
+
+Sec.11. _Occurrences at Firando after the Return of Captain Saris_.[40]
+
+The 7th of November, 1613, I sent in the first place some presents to
+the two kings of Firando, and afterwards went to visit them. On the 8th,
+Andrew Palmer, the ship's steward, and William Marnell, gunner's mate,
+having been ashore all night and quarrelled in their cups, went out this
+morning into the fields and fought. Both are so grievously wounded, that
+it is thought Palmer will hardly escape with his life, and that Marnell
+will be lame of his hands for life. The 9th I went aboard ship early,
+and called the master and all the officers into my cabin, making known
+to them how much I was grieved at the misconduct of some of them,
+particularly of Palmer and Marnell, who had gone ashore without leave,
+and had so sore wounded each other, that one was in danger of his life,
+and the other of being lamed for ever; and besides, that the survivor
+ran a risk of being hanged if the other died, which would necessarily
+occasion me much vexation. I also said, I was informed that Francis
+Williams and Simon Colphax were in the boat going ashore to have fought,
+and that John Dench and John Winston had appointed to do the like. John
+Dench confessed it was true, and that he had seen Palmer and Marnell
+fighting, and had parted them, otherwise one or both had died on the
+field. I told them these matters were exceedingly distressing to me, and
+I trusted would now be remedied, otherwise the ship would be unmanned,
+to the overthrow of our voyage, and the vast injury of the honourable
+company which had entrusted us. After much contestation, they all
+engaged to amend what was amiss, and not to offend any more, which I
+pray God may be the case. I told them also, that old king Foyne had
+complained to me, threatening, if any more of them went ashore to fight
+and shed blood, contrary to the laws of Japan, he would order them to be
+cut in pieces, as he was determined strangers should have no more
+licence to infringe the laws than his own subjects.
+
+[Footnote 40: We here resume the narrative of Captain Saris. Purch.
+Pilgr. I. 378. The observations of Mr Cockes, contained in the three
+preceding sub-sections, break off abruptly in the Pilgrims, as
+above.--E.]
+
+
+At my return ashore, old _Foyne Same_ came to visit me at the English
+house, and told me that the piece of _Poldavy_, and the sash I gave him,
+were consumed when his house was burnt down. This was in effect begging
+to have two others, which I promised to give him. I likewise got him to
+send some of his people aboard, along with John Japan, our jurebasso, to
+intimate to our men that if any of them went ashore to fight, he had
+given strict orders to have them cut in pieces. This I did in hopes of
+restraining them in future from any more drunken combats. Towards night,
+Juan Comas, a Spaniard, came from Nangasaki, bringing two letters from
+Domingo Francisco, one for me, and the other for Mr Cockes, together
+with three baskets of sugar as a present to me, and a pot of conserves,
+with many no less sugared words of compliment in his letters, saying how
+sorry he was that our seven fugitives had gone away during his absence,
+excusing himself and the Jesuits, who he pretended had no hand in the
+matter, and pretending they had never spoken against us, calling us
+heretics. He said our men had gone from Nangasaki, three of them in a
+Chinese or Japanese _soma_ for Manilla, and four in a Portuguese vessel.
+Yet I esteem all these as vain words to excuse themselves, and throw the
+blame on others; for the Spaniards and Portuguese mutually hate each
+other and the Japanese, as these last do them.
+
+The 11th I visited _Nobesane_, who used me kindly, and would have had me
+dine with him next day, but I excused myself on account of the press of
+business in which I was engaged, and the short time I had to stay. I met
+old king Foyne at his house, who requested to have two pieces of English
+salt beef, and two of pork, sodden by our cook, with turnips, radishes,
+and onions, which I sent him. The 12th, the governors of the two kings
+came to visit me at our factory, whence they went aboard the Clove,
+accompanied by Mr Cockes, to signify to our crew that they should beware
+of coming ashore to fight and shed blood; as, by the law of Japan, those
+who went out to fight and drew weapons for that purpose, were adjudged
+to death, and all who saw them were obliged to kill both offenders, on
+pain of ruining themselves and all their kindred if they neglected
+putting the combatants to death.
+
+The 14th I sent Mr Cockes and our jurebasso to wait upon the kings, to
+entreat they would provide me twelve Japanese seamen who were fit for
+labour, to assist me in navigating the ship to England, to whom I was
+willing to give such wages as their highnesses might deem reasonable.
+The kings were then occupied in other affairs, so that my messengers
+spoke with their secretaries, who said they needed not to trouble the
+kings on that business, as they would provide me twelve fit persons; but
+that there were several vagrant people about the town who would be
+willing enough to go, yet were very unfit for my purpose, as they would
+only consume victuals, and of whom the Dutch made use without making any
+request on the matter, and it was not known what had become of these men
+or of the ship; but, as the matter was now referred to them, they would
+look out for such as were fit for our purpose.
+
+The 18th, Foyne sent me word he would visit me, and meant to bring the
+dancing girls of the country along with him, which he did soon after,
+accompanied by three courtezans, and two or three men, who all danced
+and made music after their fashion, though harsh to our ears. The 19th,
+the Chinese captain, and George Duras, a Portuguese, came to visit me,
+requesting me to send to _Semidono_ to procure pardon for two poor
+fellows who were like to lose their lives for bidding a poor knave flee
+who had stolen a bit of lead not worth three halfpence; and though the
+malefactor was taken and executed, these men were in danger of the same
+punishment, had I not sent Mr Cockes to _Semidono_ with my ring, to
+desire their pardon for my sake, which he engaged to procure, and did in
+effect.
+
+The 20th, _Samedon_, king of _Crats_,[41] sent me word he meant to go on
+board our ship, so I went there to meet him, and he came along with both
+the kings of Firando, when we saluted them with five pieces of ordnance;
+and we afterwards fired three with bullets at a mark, at the request of
+Samedon, who gave me two Japanese pikes, having _cattans_ or _sables_ on
+their ends. At their departure we again saluted them with seven guns,
+one being shotted and fired at the mark. The 22d I sent a present to the
+king of _Crats_, which was delivered to him at the house of _Tomesanes_
+the young king, where he was at breakfast. Samedon accepted it very
+kindly, sending me word by Mr Cockes that he was doubly obliged to me
+for his kind entertainment aboard, and for now sending him so handsome a
+present of such things as his country did not produce, all without any
+desert on his part, and the only recompence in his power was, if ever
+any of the English nation came into his dominions, he would give them a
+hearty welcome, and do them all the service in his power.
+
+[Footnote 41: This personage must have been governor of one of the
+provinces, islands, or towns of Japan; but no place in that eastern
+empire bears a name in modern geography which in the smallest degree
+resembles Crats.--E]
+
+
+The 25th, the purser and Mr Hownsell came ashore, and told me that
+Andrew Palmer, the steward, had died the night before, Thomas Warner,
+our surgeon, affirming that he owed his death to his own obstinacy, his
+wound being curable if he would have been ruled. I desired that he might
+be buried on an island as secretly as possible, as we were about to get
+some Japanese into our ship, who might be unwilling to embark if they
+heard of any one having died. On the 28th a Japanese was put to death,
+who some said was a thief, and others an incendiary. He was led by the
+executioner to the place of punishment, a person going before him
+carrying a board, on which the crime for which he was to be punished was
+written, and the same was exhibited on a paper flag carried over his
+head. Two pikemen followed the culprit, having the points of their pikes
+close to his back, ready to slay him instantly if he offered to resist.
+
+The ship being ready to depart, several of the natives complained that
+the ship's company owed them money, and desired to be paid. To prevent
+greater inconvenience, I listened to these people, and wrote to the
+master to make enquiry aboard as to who were in debt, that I might
+satisfy their creditors, making deductions accordingly from their wages.
+
+On the 26th I assembled my mercantile council to consult about leaving a
+factory here in Firando, upon these considerations. 1. The encouragement
+we had privately received at the Moluccas. 2. That the Dutch had already
+a factory here. 3. The large privileges now obtained from the emperor of
+Japan. 4. The certain advice of English factories established at Siam
+and Patane. 5. The commodities remaining on hand appointed for these
+parts, and the expected profit which farther experience might produce.
+It was therefore resolved to leave a factory here, consisting of eight
+Englishmen, three Japanese _jurebassos_ or interpreters, and two
+servants. They were directed, against the coming of the next ships, to
+explore and discover the coasts of Corea, _Tushmay_, other parts of
+Japan, and of the adjoining countries, and to see what good might be
+done in any of them.
+
+The 5th of December, 1613, Mr Richard Cockes, captain and _Cape_
+merchant of the English factory now settled at Firando in Japan, took
+his leave of me aboard the Clove, together with his company, being eight
+English and five others, as before mentioned. After their departure, we
+mustered the company remaining aboard, finding forty-six English, five
+_swarts_ or blacks, fifteen Japanese, and three passengers, in all
+sixty-nine persons. We had lost since our arrival in Japan ten
+Englishmen; two by sickness, one slain in a duel, and seven who deserted
+to the Portuguese and Spaniards, while I was absent at the court of the
+emperor. The English whom we left in the factory were Mr Richard Cockes,
+William Adams, now entertained in the service of the company at a
+hundred pounds a year, Tempest Peacock, Richard Wickham, William Eaton,
+Walter Carwarden, Edward Saris, and William Nelson.
+
+Sec.12. _Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence Home to England_.
+
+That same day, being the 5th December, we set sail with a stiff
+northerly gale, steering S. by W. 1/2 a point westerly. By exact
+observation on shore, we found the island of Firando to be in lat. 33 deg.
+30' N. and the variation 2 deg. 50' easterly.[42] We resolved to keep our
+course for Bantam along the coast of China, for which purpose we brought
+our starboard tacks aboard, and stood S.W. edging over for China, the
+wind at N.N.E. a stiff gale and fair weather. The 7th it blew very hard
+at N.W. and we steered S.S.W. encountering a great current which shoots
+out between the _island_ of Corea[43] and the main land of China,
+occasioning a very heavy sea. The 8th, being in lat. 29 deg. 40' N. we
+steered W.S.W, on purpose to make Cape _Sumbor_ on the coast of China.
+The sea was very rough, and the wind so strong that it blew our main
+course out of the bolt ropes. The 9th, in lat. 28 deg. 23', we sounded and
+had forty-nine to forty-five fathoms on an oozy bottom. The weather was
+clear, yet we could not see land. The 11th we had ground in forty-nine,
+forty-three, thirty-eight, thirty-seven, and thirty fathoms, the water
+being very green, and as yet no land to be seen.
+
+[Footnote 42: The town of Firando is in lat. 33 deg. 6' N. and even the most
+northern part of the island of that name only reaches to 33 deg. 17'. The
+town is in long. 128 deg. 42' E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 43: Corea was long thought to be an island after the period of
+this voyage. Astl. I. 492. c.--It is now known to be an extensive
+peninsula, to the east of China, having the Yellow sea interposed.--E.]
+
+The 12th, in thirty-five fathoms, and reckoning ourselves near the coast
+of China, we had sight of at least 300 sail of junks, of twenty and
+thirty tons each and upwards, two of which passed us close to windwards,
+and though we used all fair means to prevail upon them to come aboard we
+could not succeed, and seeing they were only fishing vessels we let them
+pass. Continuing our course we soon espied land, being two islands
+called the _Fishers islands_.[44] At noon our latitude was 25 deg. 59' N.
+and we had ground at twenty to twenty-six fathoms. About seven p.m.
+while steering along the land, we came close by a rock, which by good
+providence we had sight of by moonlight, as it lay right in our course.
+When not above twice our ship's length from this rock, we had thirty
+fathoms water, on which we hauled off for one watch, to give the land a
+wide birth, and resumed our course S.W. after midnight. The wind was
+very strong at N.E. and continually followed as the land trended. The
+13th, in lat. 24 deg. 35' N. and variation 1 deg. 30' easterly, having the wind
+strong at N.E. with fair weather, we steered S.W. keeping about five
+leagues off the islands along the coast of China. The 15th we came among
+many fisher boats, but had so much wind that we could not speak any of
+them, but they made signs to us, as we thought to keep to the westwards.
+At noon our lat. was 21 deg. 40' N. and having the wind at N.N.E. a stiff
+gale, we steered W.N.W. northerly, to make the land, and about two hours
+afterwards had sight of it, although by our dead reckoning we ought
+still to have been fifty-six leagues from it. It is to be noted, that
+the islands along the coast of China are considerably more to the
+southward than as laid down in the charts. About three p.m. we were
+within about two leagues of an island called _Sancha_[45].
+
+[Footnote 44: By the latitude indicated in the text, Captain Saris
+appears to have fallen in with the coast of Fo-kien, and to have passed
+through between that province and the island of Formosa, without
+discovering the existence of that island.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 45: Probably the island of Tchang-to-huen, to the S.W. of the
+bay of Canton, the situation of which agrees with the latitude in the
+text, and the sound of the two first syllables of which name has some
+affinity with that given by Saris, evidently from Spanish or Portuguese
+charts. At this part, of his voyage, Saris entirely misses to notice the
+large island of Hai-nan.--E.]
+
+The 18th, in lat. 15 deg. 43' N. we had sight of an island called
+Pulo-cotan, being high land, and is about twenty leagues, according to
+report, from the shoal called _Plaxel_. In the morning of the 19th the
+coast of Cambodia was on our starboard side, about two leagues off,
+along which we steered S.E. by E. easterly, our latitude at noon being
+13 deg. 31' N. estimating the ship to be then athwart _Varella_. We have
+hitherto found the wind always _trade_ along shore, having gone _large_
+all the way from Firando, the wind always following us as the land
+trended. The 20th at noon we were in latitude 10 deg. 53', and three
+glasses, or an hour and half after, we had sight of a small island,
+which we concluded to be that at the end of the shoal called
+_Pulo-citi_. We found the book of _Jan Huyghens van Linschoten_ very
+true, for by it we have directed our course ever since we left Firando.
+The 22d we had sight of _Pulo Condor_ about five leagues off, our
+latitude at noon being 8 deg. 20' N.
+
+About four a.m. on the 25th we made the island of _Pulo Timon_, and two
+hours afterwards saw _Pulo Tinga_. The 28th at three p.m. we had oosy
+ground at twenty fathoms, having divers long islands on our starboard
+and sundry small islands on our larboard, forming the straits of
+China-bata, which we found to be truly laid down in a chart made by a
+Hollander called _Jan Janson Mole_, which he gave to Mr Hippon, who gave
+it to the company. _Pulo Bata_, one of these islands, is low land, and
+is full of trees or bushes at the S.W. end.
+
+A little before noon on the 29th, we perceived the colour of the water
+a-head of the ship to change very much, by which observation we escaped
+an imminent danger. This shoal seemed of a triangular shape, the S.W.
+end being the sharpest, and is not far from the entrance into the
+straits of _China-bata_. At noon our latitude was 4 deg. 6' N. At eight p.m.
+we came to anchor in seven fathoms, the weather threatening to be foul
+in the night, the place very full of shoals, and our experience little
+or nothing. Before our anchor took hold, we had six 1/4, five 1/2, six,
+and then seven fathoms, soft sandy ground.
+
+In the morning of the 30th we spoke the Darling, then bound for
+Coromandel, her company consisting of twenty-one English and nine
+blacks. By her we first learnt of the death of Sir Henry Middleton, the
+loss of the Trades-increase, and other incidents that had occurred
+during our voyage to Japan. In the night of the 30th God mercifully
+delivered us from imminent danger, as we passed under full sail close by
+a sunken ledge of rocks, the top of which was only just above water
+within a stone's throw of our ship; and had not the noise of the
+breakers awakened us, we had not cleared our ship. We instantly let go
+our anchor, being in a rapid current or tide-way, in seventeen fathoms
+upon oozy ground. When morning broke on the 31st we had sight of the
+high land of Sumatra, having an island a-stern, the ledge of rocks we
+had passed on our starboard, and three small islands forming a triangle
+on our larboard bow. We were about eight leagues off the high land of
+Java, but could not then get into the straits of Sunda, as the wind was
+quite fallen.
+
+The 1st January, 1614, being quite calm, was mostly spent at anchor. The
+2d, having a little wind, we set sail, and about eight o'clock fell in
+with the Expedition, homewards bound for England, laden with pepper, by
+which ship we wrote to our friends in England. The 3d we came to anchor
+in the road of Bantam, end to our great grief found no lading ready for
+us, for which neglect I justly blamed those I had left to provide the
+same, while they excused themselves by alleging they did not expect us
+so soon back. I questioned _Kewee_, the principal Chinese merchant, who
+came to visit me on board, as to the price of pepper. He answered, that
+it was already known ashore I was homewards bound, and must necessarily
+load pepper; and, as my merchants had not provided any before hand, I
+might be assured it would rise. He said the price was then at twelve
+dollars for ten sacks, but he could not undertake to deliver any
+quantity at that price. I offered him twelve dollars and a half the ten
+sacks, but he held up so high, that we had no hope of dealing for the
+present. Of the ten persons left by us in the factory when we departed
+for Japan, we found only five alive at our return, while we only lost
+one man between Firando and Bantam.
+
+I went ashore on the 4th to visit the governor of Bantam, to whom I
+presented two handsome _cattans_, or Japanese swords, and other articles
+of value; and this day I bargained with _Kewee_ for 4000 sacks of pepper
+at thirteen dollars the ten sacks, bating in the weight 3 per cent and
+directed the merchants to expedite the milling thereof as much as
+possible. I employed the 5th in reducing the several English factories
+at Bantam under one government, settling them all in one house; also in
+regulating the expences of diet, that all might be frugally managed, to
+prevent extravagance in rack-houses abroad, or in hanger-on blacks at
+home, which had lately been the case. I directed also that there should
+be fewer warehouses kept in the town, and that these might be better
+regulated, and the goods stowed in a more orderly manner. Hitherto the
+multiplication of factories, having one for each voyage, had occasioned
+great expence, and had raised the price of pepper, as each outbid the
+other, for the particular account of their own several voyages, with
+great loss to the public.
+
+The 6th was employed in re-weighing the pepper received the day before,
+most of the sacks being found hard weight, and many to want a part of
+what was allowed by the king's beam; wherefore I sent for the weigher,
+whom I used kindly, entreating him to take a little more care to amend
+this fault, which he promised to do, and for his better encouragement I
+made him a present to the value of five dollars. The 16th being Sunday,
+I staid aboard, and about 2 p.m. we observed the whole town to be on
+fire. I immediately sent our skiff ashore to assist the merchants in
+guarding our goods. The wind was so violent, that in a very short space
+of time the whole town was burnt down, except the English and Dutch
+factories, which it pleased God of his mercy to preserve.
+
+Being ashore on the 20th, I procured two Chinese merchants, named
+_Lackmoy_ and _Lanching_, to translate the letter which the king of
+Firando in Japan had given me to deliver to our king, James I. It was
+written in the Chinese character and language, which they translated
+into the Malay, and which in English was as follows:
+
+_To the King of Great Britain, &c._ "Most mighty king, I cannot
+sufficiently express how acceptable your majesty's most loving letter,
+and bountiful present of many valuable things, sent me by your servant
+Captain John Saris, has been to me; neither the great happiness I feel
+in the friendship of your majesty, for which I render you many thanks,
+desiring the continuance of your majesty's love and correspondence. I am
+heartily glad at the safe arrival of your subjects at my small island,
+after so long a voyage. They shall not lack my help and furtherance to
+the utmost, for effecting their so worthy and laudable purposes, of
+discovery and commerce, referring for the entertainment they have
+received to the report of your servant, by whom I send to your majesty
+an unworthy token of my gratitude; wishing your majesty long life. Given
+from my residence of Firando, the sixth day of the tenth month. _Your
+majesty's loving friend, commander of this island of Firando in Japan,
+
+FOYNE SAM-MASAM."_
+
+My interpreters could not well pronounce his name, Lanching saying it
+was _Foyne Foshin Sam_, while Lackmoy said it was written as above. This
+comes to pass by reason of the Chinese characters, which, in proper
+names, borrow the characters of other words, of the same or nearest
+sound, and thereby occasion frequent mistakes.
+
+The 22d, such houses as had escaped in the former fire of the 16th, were
+now burnt down; yet the English and Dutch houses escaped, for which we
+were thankful to God. On the 26th, a Dutch ship of 1000 tons arrived
+from Holland, called the Flushing. At the island of Mayo, the company
+mutinied against the captain, whom they would have murdered in his
+cabin, had it not pleased God that a Scotsman revealed the plot when the
+mutineers were already armed to carry it into effect, so that they were
+taken between decks with their weapons in their hands. In this ship
+there were several English and Scots soldiers. She did not remain at
+Bantam, but sailed towards evening for Jacatra.
+
+The 27th, our lading being fully procured, and several of our company
+fallen sick, I went ashore to hasten our merchants to get us ready for
+sailing. The 1st February, the Darling was forced back to Bantam; and
+order was taken by mutual consultation for the proper care of her goods,
+and for her immediate departure for _Succadanea_ in the island of
+Borneo, and thence to Patane and Siam.
+
+The 13th of February we got out from the straits of Sunda, in which the
+tide of flood sets twelve hours to the eastwards, and the ebb twelve
+hours to the westwards. On the 16th of May we anchored in the bay of
+Saldanha, where we found the Concord of London, being the first ship set
+out by the united company. We now found the natives of this place very
+treacherous, making us to understand by signs; that two of their people
+had been forcibly carried off. They had sore wounded one of the people
+belonging to the Concord; and while we were up in the land, they
+assaulted the people who were left in charge of our skiff, carried away
+our grapnel, and had spoiled the boat-keepers if they had not pushed off
+into deep water. The 19th a Dutch ship arrived bound for Bantam, the
+master being Cornelius van Harte.
+
+We remained here twenty-three days, where we thoroughly refreshed the
+ship's company, and took away with us alive fourteen oxen and seventy
+sheep, besides good store of fish and beef, which we _powdered_ there,
+finding it to take salt well, contrary to former reports. For ten days
+after leaving Saldanha, we had the wind N.W. and W.N.W. but after that
+we had a fine wind at S.W. so that we could hold our course N.W. On the
+27th September, thanks be to God, we arrived at Plymouth; where, for the
+space of five or six weeks, we endured more tempestuous weather, and
+were in greater danger of our lives, than during the whole voyage
+besides.
+
+Sec.13. _Intelligence concerning Yedzo, or Jesso, received from a Japanese
+at Jedo, who had been twice there_.[46]
+
+Yedzo, or Jesso, is an island to the N.W. of Japan, from which it is ten
+leagues distant. The natives are of white complexions, and
+well-conditioned, but have their bodies covered all over with hair like
+monkies. Their weapons are bows and poisoned arrows. The inhabitants of
+the south extremity of this country understand the use of weights and
+measures; but those who inhabit the inland country, at the distance of
+thirty days journey, are ignorant of these things. They have much silver
+and gold-dust, in which they make payment to the Japanese for rice and
+other commodities; rice and cotton-cloth being of ready sale among them,
+as likewise iron and lead, which are carried there from Japan. Food and
+cloathing are the most vendible commodities among the natives of that
+country, and sell to such advantage, that rice often yields a profit of
+four for one.
+
+[Footnote 46: This article is appended to the Voyage of Saris, in the
+Pilgrims, vol. I. p. 384.--E.]
+
+The town where the Japanese have their chief residence and mart in
+Yetizo is called _Matchma_,[47] in which there are 500 households or
+families of Japanese. They have likewise a fort here, called
+_Matchma-donna_. This town is the principal mart of Yedzo, to which the
+natives resort to buy and sell, especially in September, when they make
+provision against winter. In March they bring down salmon and dried fish
+of sundry kinds, with other wares, for which the Japanese barter in
+preference even to silver. The Japanese have no other settled residence
+or place of trade except this at Matchma [48]. Farther northward in
+Yedzo there are people of a low stature like dwarfs.[49] The other
+natives of Yedzo are of good stature like the Japanese, and have no
+other cloathing but what is brought them from Japan. There is a violent
+current in the straits between Yedzo and Japan, which comes from the sea
+of Corea, and sets E.N.E. The winds there are for the most part like
+those usual in Japan; the northerly winds beginning in September, and
+ending in March, when the southerly winds begin to blow.
+
+[Footnote 47: In modern maps, the southern peninsula of Yesso, or Yedso,
+is named _Matsaki_, apparently the same name with that in the text.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 48: In our more modern maps, there are four other towns or
+residences on the western coast of the peninsula of Matsaki, named
+Jemasina, Sirekosawa, Famomoli, and Aria.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 49: The island of Kubito-sima, off the western coast of Yedzo,
+is called likewise in our maps, the Isle of Pigmies.--E.]
+
+Sec.14. _Note of Commodities vendible in Japan_.[50]
+
+Broad-cloths of all sorts, as black, yellow, and red, which cost in
+Holland eight or nine gilders the Flemish ell, two ells and three
+quarters, are worth in Japan, three, four, to five hundred.[51] Cloth of
+a high wool is not in request, but such as is low shorn is most
+vendible. Fine _bayes_ of the before-mentioned colours are saleable, if
+well cottoned, but not such as those of Portugal. Sayes, _rashes_,
+single and double bouratts, silk grograms, Turkey grograms; camblets,
+_Divo Gekepert, Weersetynen, Caniaut, Gewart twijne_;[52] velvets, musk,
+sold weight for weight of silver; India cloths of all sorts are in
+request; satins, taffetas, damasks, Holland linen from fifteen to twenty
+stivers the Flemish ell, but not higher priced; diaper, damasks, and so
+much the better if wrought with figures or branches; thread of all
+colours; carpets, for tables; gilded leather, painted with figures and
+flowers, but the smallest are in best demand; painted pictures, the
+Japanese delighting in lascivious representations, and stories of wars
+by sea or land, the larger the better worth, sell for one, two, or three
+hundred. Quick-silver, the hundred cattees sell from three to four
+hundred.
+
+[Footnote 50: This forms a part of the Appendix to the Voyage of Saris,
+Purch. Pilg. I. 394; where it is joined to the end of observations by
+the same author on the trade of Bantam, formerly inserted in this
+Collection under their proper date.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 51: This account is very vaguely expressed; but in the title
+in the Pilgrims, the sales are stated to be in _masses_ and
+_canderines_, each canderine being the tenth part of a masse. The
+information contained in this short subdivision is hardly intelligible,
+yet is left, as it may possibly be of some use towards reviving the
+trade of Japan, now that the Dutch are entirely deprived of their
+eastern possessions.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 52: These articles, in italics, are unknown.]
+
+The hundred cattees of vermilion are worth from three to six hundred.
+Paint for women's faces, the hundred cattees are worth twenty-eight.
+Cooper in plates, 125 Flemish pounds are worth from 90 to 100. Lead in
+small bars, the 100 cattees from 60 to 88. Lead in sheets is in greater
+request, the thinner the better, and 100 pounds Flemish sell for 80.
+Fine tin, in logs or bars, 120 pounds Flemish bring 350. Iron, twenty
+five Dutch ounces worth four. Steel, the 100 cattees, worth from one to
+two hundred. Tapestry. Civet, the cattee worth from 150 to 200. China
+root, the 100 cattees or pekul worth 40. China sewing gold, the paper
+worth three masse three. Powdered Chinese sugar, the 100 cattees or
+pekul worth forty to fifty. Sugar-candy, the pekul or 100 cattees, from
+fifty to sixty. Velvets, of all colours, eight ells the piece, from 120
+to 130. Wrought velvets, from 180 to 200. Taffetas of all colours, and
+good silk, worth, the piece, from twenty-four to thirty or forty. Satin,
+seven or eight ells long, the piece worth from 80 to 100. Figured satin,
+from 120 to 150. _Gazen_, of seven pikes or ells, from forty to fifty.
+Raw silk, the cattee of twelve pounds Flemish, from thirty to forty.
+Untwisted silk, the weight of twenty-eight pounds Flemish, from thirty
+to forty. Twisted silk, from twenty-eight to forty.
+
+Drinking-glasses of all sorts, bottles, canns, cups, trenchers, plates,
+beer-glasses, salt-sellers, wine-glasses, beakers, gilt looking-glasses
+of large size, _Muscovy glass_, salt, writing-papers, table-books,
+paper-books, _lead to neal_ pots. Spanish soap is in much request, and
+sells for one masse the small cake. Amber beads, worth 140 to 160. Silk
+stockings, of all colours. Spanish leather, neats leather, and other
+kinds of leather used for gloves, worth six, eight, or nine. Blue
+_candiques_ of China, from fifteen to twenty. Black _candiques_, from
+ten to fifteen. Wax for candles, 100 pounds Flemish worth from 200 to
+250. Honey, the pekul, worth sixty. _Samell_ of Cochin-China, the pekul,
+worth 180. Nutmegs, the pekul, twenty-five. Camphor of Borneo, or
+_barous, the pound hollans_, from 250 to 400. Sanders of _Solier_, the
+pekul, worth 100. Good and heavy Callomback wood, the pound, worth one,
+two, three, to five. Sapan, or red wood, the pekul, from twenty to
+twenty-six. Good and large elephants teeth, from 400, to 500, 600, 700,
+and even 800. Rhinoceros horns, the Javan cattee, worth thirty. Gilded
+harts-horns, the piece, worth 300, 400, 500. Roch allum in request, in
+so much that what cost only three gilders has sold for 100 gilders; but
+not in demand by every one.
+
+The Chinese in Japan will commonly truck for silver, giving gold of
+twenty-three carats, at the rate of from fifteen to twenty times its
+weight in silver, according as silver is plenty or scarce.
+
+The following commodities are to be bought in Japan, and at the rates
+here quoted. Very good hemp, 100 cattees, being 120 pounds of Holland,
+are worth from sixty-five to seventy. _Eye-colours_ for dying blue,
+almost as good as indigo, made up in round cakes, and packed 100 cakes
+in a fardel, worth fifty to sixty. Dye-stuff for white, turning to red
+colour, made up in fardels of fifty _gautins malios_, worth five to
+eight. Very good white rice, cased, worth, the _fares_, eight
+three-fifths. Rice of a worse sort, the bale, worth seven three-tenths.
+At Jedo, Osaka, and Miaco, there is the best dying of all sorts of
+colours, as red, black, and green; and for gliding gold and silver, is
+better than the Chinese varnish. Brimstone is in great abundance, and
+the pekul may be bought for seven. Saltpetre is dearer in one place than
+another, being worth one and a half. Cotton-wool, the pekul, may be
+bought for ten.
+
+Sec.15. _Supplementary Notices of Occurrences in Japan, after the Departure
+of Captain Saris_.[53]
+
+"This subdivision consists entirely of letters from Japan, and conveys
+some curious information respecting the transactions of the English in
+Japan, whence they have been long excluded. They are now perhaps of some
+interest, beyond the mere gratification of curiosity, as, by the entire
+expulsion of the Dutch from India, there seems a possibility of the
+British merchants in India being able to restore trade to that distant
+country. In the _Third_ PART of our Collection, various other relations
+of Japan will be inserted."--E.
+
+[Footnote 53: These are appended in the Pilgrims, vol. I. pp. 406--413,
+to the observations of Mr. Richard Cocks, already given in conjunction
+with the voyage of Captain Saris.--E.]
+
+No. I. _Letter from Mr Richard Cocks, dated Firando, 10th December,
+1614_.[54]
+
+To this day, I have been unable to complete my old books of accounts,
+owing to the dispatching of our people, some to one place and some to
+another, and owing to the rebuilding of our house, and afterwards buying
+a junk, and repairing her. She is now ready to set sail for Siam, having
+been at anchor these ten days, waiting for a fair wind to proceed on her
+voyage, at _Couchi_, a league from Firando, where your ship rode at your
+departure from hence. She is called the Sea-Adventure, of about 200 tons
+burden, in which Mr Adams goes as master, with Mr Wickham and Mr Edward
+Sayers as merchants, in consequence of the death of Mr Peacock, slain in
+Cochin-China, and the probability that Mr Carwarden has been cast away
+in his return from thence, as we have no news of him or of the junk in
+which he sailed, as I have at large informed the worshipful company.
+
+[Footnote 54: This letter appears to have been written to Captain
+Saris.--E.]
+
+Since your departure from Japan, the emperor has banished all jesuits,
+priests, nuns, and friars, from the country, shipping them off for
+_Anacau_ [Macao] in China, or Manilla in the Philippine islands, and has
+caused all their churches and monasteries to be pulled down or burnt.
+_Foyne Same_, the old king of Firando, is dead, and _Ushiandono_, his
+governor, with two other servants, cut open their bellies to bear him
+company, their bodies being burned, and their ashes entombed along with
+his. Wars are likely to ensue between _Ogusho Same_, the old emperor,
+and _Fidaia Same_, the young prince, son of _Tico Same_, who has
+strongly fortified himself in the castle of _Osaka_, having collected an
+army of 80,000 or 100,000 men, consisting of malcontents, runaways, and
+banished people, who have repaired from all parts to his standard, and
+he is said to have collected sufficient provisions for three years. The
+old emperor has marched against him in person, with an army of 300,000
+men, and is at the castle of _Fusima_. The advanced parties of the two
+armies have already had several skirmishes, and many have been slain on
+both sides. The entire city of Osaka has been burned to the ground,
+excepting only the castle, so that Mr Eaton had to retire with his goods
+to _Sakey_,[55] yet not without danger, as a part of that town has
+likewise been burnt. So great a tempest or tuffoon has lately occurred
+at _Edoo_ [Jedo,] as had never been before experienced at that place.
+The sea overflowed the whole city, obliging the people to take refuge on
+the hills: and the prodigious inundation has defaced or thrown down all
+the houses of the nobles, which you know were very beautiful and
+magnificent.
+
+[Footnote 55: It has been formerly explained that _Sakey_ was a town on
+the river Jodo, directly opposite to Osakey or Osaka, the river only
+being interposed.--E.]
+
+Let this suffice for Japanese news; and I now proceed to inform you of
+our success in selling our goods. The emperor took all our ordnance,
+with most of our lead, and ten barrels of gunpowder, with two or three
+pieces of broad-cloth. Most of our other broad-cloths are sold, namely,
+black, hair-colour, and cinnamon-colour, at fifteen, fourteen, thirteen,
+and twelve tayes the _tattamy_; but they will not even look at
+Venice-reds and flame-colours, neither are _stammels_ in such request as
+formerly, but they enquire much for whites and yellows. As the Dutch
+sold most of their broad-cloths at low prices, we were forced to do so
+likewise. In regard to our Cambaya goods, they will not look at our _red
+Zelas_, blue _byrams_, or _dutties_, being the principal part of what is
+now left us; and only some white bastas sell at fourteen or fifteen
+masses each. _Cassedys nill, alleias_, broad _pintados_, with spotted,
+striped, and checquered stuffs, are most in request, and sell at good
+profit. We have also sold nearly half of our Bantam pepper for
+sixty-five _masse_ the _pekull_, and all the rest had been gone before
+now, had it not been for the war. I am in great hope of procuring trade
+into China, through the means of Andrea, the China captain, and his two
+brothers, who have undertaken the matter, and have no doubt of being
+able to bring it to bear, for three ships to come yearly to a place near
+_Lanquin_,[56] to which we may go from hence in three or four days with
+a fair wind. Of this I have written at large to the worshipful company,
+and also to the lord-treasurer.
+
+[Footnote 56: As Nangasaki is uniformly named _Langasaque_ in this first
+English voyage to Japan, I am apt to suspect the _Lanquin_ of the text
+may have been Nan-kin.--E.]
+
+Some little sickness with which I have been afflicted is now gone, for
+which I thank God. Mr Easton, Mr Nealson, Mr Wickham, and Mr Sayer, have
+all been very sick, but are all now well recovered, except Mr Eaton, who
+still labours under flux and tertian ague. May God restore his health,
+for I cannot too much praise his diligence and pains in the affairs of
+the worshipful company. Jacob Speck, who was thought to have been cast
+away in a voyage from hence to the Moluccas, is now returned to Firando
+in the command of a great ship called the Zelandia, together with a
+small pinnace called the Jacatra. The cause of his being so long missing
+was, that in going from hence by the eastward of the Philippines, the
+way we came, he was unable to fetch the Moluccas, owing to currents and
+contrary winds, and was driven to the west of the island of Celebes, and
+so passed round it through the straits of Desalon, and back to the
+Moluccas. The Chinese complain much against the Hollanders for robbing
+and pilfering their junks, of which they are said to have taken and
+rifled seven. The emperor of Japan has taken some displeasure against
+the Hollanders, having refused a present they lately sent him, and would
+not even speak to those who brought it. He did the same in regard to a
+present sent by the Portuguese, which came in a great ship from Macao to
+Nangasaki. You thought, when here, that if any other ship came from
+England we might continue to sell our goods without sending another
+present to the emperor; but I now find that every ship which comes to
+Japan must send a present to the emperor, as an established custom. I
+find likewise that we cannot send away any junk from hence without
+procuring the yearly licence from the emperor, as otherwise no Japanese
+mariner dare to leave the country, under pain of death. Our own ships
+from England may, however, come in and go out again when they please,
+and no one to gainsay them.
+
+We have not as yet been able by any means to procure trade from _Tushma_
+into Corea; neither indeed have the inhabitants of Tushma any farther
+privilege than to frequent one small town or fortress, and must not on
+pain of death go beyond the walls of that place. Yet the king of Tushma
+is not subject to the emperor of Japan.[57] We have only been able to
+sell some pepper at Tushma, and no great quantity of that. The weight
+there is much heavier than in Japan, but the price is proportionally
+higher.
+
+[Footnote 57: No place or island of any name resembling _Tushma_ is to
+be found in our best maps. The name in the text probably refers to
+_Tausima_, called an some maps _Jasus_, an island about forty miles
+long, about midway between Kiusiu and Corea.--E.]
+
+I have been given to understand that there are no great cities in the
+interior of Corea, between which inland country and the sea there are
+immense bogs or morasses, so that no one can travel on horseback, and
+hardly even a-foot; and as a remedy against this, they have great
+waggons or carts upon broad flat wheels, which are moved by means of
+sails like ships. Thus, by observing the monsoons or periodical winds,
+they transport their goods backwards and forwards, by means of these
+sailing waggons. In that country they make damasks, sattins, taffaties,
+and other silk stuffs, as well as in China.
+
+It is said that _Fico Same_, otherwise called _Quabicondono_, the former
+emperor of Japan, pretended to have conveyed a great army in these
+sailing waggons, to make a sudden assault upon the emperor of China in
+his great city of Pekin, where he ordinarily resides; but was prevented
+by a nobleman of Corea, who poisoned himself to poison the emperor and
+many of the nobles of Japan. On which occasion, as is said, the Japanese
+lost, about twenty-two years ago, all that they had conquered in Corea.
+
+James Turner, the youth who used to play the fiddle, left a girl here
+with child; and though I gave her two tayes in silver to bring up the
+child; she killed it as soon as it was born, which is a common thing in
+this country. The whistle and chain belonging to Mr Foster, the master
+of the Clove, are found, and are under the charge of Mr Adams, who will
+be accountable for them. I meant to have sent you a Japanese almanack by
+a former letter to the same effect as this, dated the 25th _ultimo_, and
+sent by the Sea Adventure by way of Siam, but forgot to do so; and which
+I now send along with this letter. I pray you that this letter may
+suffice for your brother, Mr George Saris, and the rest of my loving
+friends: And, with hearty commendations in general, I leave you all to
+the holy protection of the Almighty; resting always your ever loving
+friend at command, RICHARD COCKS.
+
+
+_No. 2. Letter from Mr Richard Cocks, dated Firando, 10th December,
+1614, to the Worshipful Thomas Wilson, Esq. at his House in the
+Britain-burse[58] in the Strand._
+
+[Footnote 58: Perhaps that now called Exeter Change.--E.]
+
+My last to you was of the 1st December, 1613, from this island of
+Firando in Japan, and sent by Captain John Saris in the ship Clove. In
+that letter, I advised you how unkindly the Hollanders dealt with us at
+the Moluccas; since which time there has not occurred any matter of
+moment to communicate, except what I have detailed in another letter to
+my good Lord Treasurer. It is given out here by the Hollanders, that our
+East India Company and that of Holland are likely to join into one; and
+if this prove true, it is thought it will be an easy matter to drive the
+Spaniards and Portuguese out of these eastern parts of the world, or
+else to cut them off from all trade. You would hardly believe how much
+the Hollanders have already daunted the Portuguese and Spaniards in
+these parts, especially in the Moluccas, where they daily encroach on
+the Spaniards, who are unable to withstand them, and are even in fear
+that they may shortly deprive them of the Philippine islands. The
+Portuguese also are in great fear of being driven by them out of the
+trade they now carry on from Ormus to Goa, and with Malacca and Macao in
+China.
+
+There is one thing of which I cannot yet conceive the issue, and that is
+the robbing and plundering the Chinese junks, which is daily done by the
+Hollanders in these parts, the goods whereof must amount to great value,
+and suffice to fit out and maintain a great fleet, which is worthy of
+consideration. Should the emperor of Japan fall out with the Hollanders,
+and debar them from the trade of his dominions, which is not unlikely,
+the Hollanders will then make prize of the Japanese junks as well as of
+those of China; for their strength at sea in these parts is sufficient
+to do what they please, if only they had a place to retire to for
+revictualling and refitting their ships; for they are of late grown so
+stout, that they mock at those who were formerly their masters and
+teachers. It is very certain that they have got possession of several
+fortresses at the Moluccas and other parts; yet, to my certain
+knowledge, the natives in these parts are more inclined towards the
+Spaniards, although at the first they were glad of the arrival of the
+Hollanders, having been disgusted by the intolerable pride of the
+Spaniards. But now they have time to reflect, that the Spaniards brought
+them abundance of money, and were liberal though proud; while the poor
+Hollanders, who serve there both by sea and land, have such bare pay,
+that it can hardly supply clothes and food; and their commanders
+allege, that all the benefits derived from conquest or reprisals, belong
+to the states and the _Winthebbers_, as they call them. It is hard to
+judge how all these things may end.
+
+Were it not for the misbehaviour of the Hollanders, I am of opinion that
+we should procure trade with China, as we only demand leave for three
+ships to come and go there, and merely to establish factors there to
+transact our business, without bringing any Jesuits or _padres_, whom
+the Chinese cannot abide to hear of, because they came formerly in such
+great numbers to inhabit the land, and were always begging and craving,
+to the great displeasure of the pagans. I am however in good hope of
+success, as our English nation has acquired a good fame and character
+since our arrival, which I am given to understand has come to the ears
+of the emperor of China, who has heard how we have been received by the
+emperor of Japan, having large privileges allowed us, and also that we
+have at all times held the Castilians in defiance both by sea and land.
+I have been informed of these things by the Chinese who come hither, and
+that the emperor and other great men of China delight to hear accounts
+of our nation. I had almost forgotten to mention, that some China
+merchants lately asked me, if we were allowed to trade with China,
+whether the king of England would prevent the Hollanders from robbing
+and spoiling their junks? Which question was rather doubtful to me, yet
+I answered that his majesty would take measures to prevent the
+Hollanders from injuring them.
+
+We have lately had news that a tuffon or tempest has done vast injury at
+Jedo, a city of Japan as large as London, where the Japanese nobility
+have very beautiful houses, now mostly destroyed or greatly injured. The
+whole city was inundated, and the inhabitants forced to take shelter in
+the hills; a thing never before heard of. The palace of the king, which
+is a stately building in a new fortress, has had all its gilded tiles
+carried away by a whirlwind, so that none of them could be found. The
+pagans attribute this calamity to some charms or conjurations of the
+Jesuits, who were lately banished: but the Japanese converts to popery
+ascribe it to the vengeance of God, as a punishment for having banished
+these holy men.
+
+We have lately had a great disaster in Cochin-China, to which place we
+sent a quantity of goods and money, to the value of L730, as it cost in
+England, under the care of Mr Tempest Peacock and Mr Walter Carwarden,
+who went as merchants in a Japanese junk, carrying our king's letters
+and a handsome present for the king of Cochin-China. They arrived at the
+port called _Quinham_,[59] delivered his majesty's letters and present,
+and were entertained with kind words and fair promises. The Hollanders,
+seeing that we adventured to that country, would needs do the same, and
+were at first kindly entertained; but in the end, Mr Peacock and the
+chief Dutch merchant going ashore one day in the same boat, to receive
+payment from the king for broad-cloth and other commodities they had
+sold him, they were treacherously assailed on the water, their boat
+overset, and both were killed in the water with harpoons, as if they had
+been fishes, together with their interpreters and other attendants, who
+were Japanese. Mr Carwarden being aboard our junk escaped sharing in
+this massacre, and came away, but neither he nor the junk have ever been
+since heard of, so that we fear he has been cast away.
+
+[Footnote 59: _Turon_ is the port of Cochin-China in the present time,
+and _Quinham_ is unknown in modern geography; perhaps the old name of
+some island or village at the port or bay of Turon.--E.]
+
+It is commonly reported here, both among the Chinese and Japanese, that
+this was done by order of the king of Cochin-China in revenge against
+the Hollanders, who had burnt one of his towns, and had slaughtered his
+people most unmercifully. The origin of this quarrel was occasioned by a
+large quantity of false dollars, sent to _Quinham_ by the Hollanders
+some years ago, and put off in payment for silks and other Chinese
+goods, to the great injury of the merchants of that country. When the
+falsehood of the money was discovered, they laid hands upon the Dutch
+factors, and are said to have put some of them to death. Upon this the
+Dutch ships came upon the coast, and landed a body of men, who burnt a
+town, putting man, woman, and child to the sword. This, as reported, was
+the occasion of our present mischance, and of the slaughter of Mr
+Peacock, because he was in company with the Hollanders. Along with this
+letter, I send you a Japanese almanack, by which you will see the manner
+of their printing, with their figures and characters. And so I leave you
+to the holy protection of the Almighty, resting always, &c.
+
+RICHARD COCKS.
+
+
+
+No. 3. _Letter from Edmond Sayer, dated Firando, 5th December, 1615. But
+having no Address_.
+
+I received a letter from you by the hands of Captain Copendall of the
+Horiander, who arrived here on the 29th of August this year, by which I
+learnt your safe arrival at the Cape of Good Hope, homewards bound, and
+of the loss of some of your company; and I make no doubt that, long ere
+now, you are safe arrived in England, by the blessing of God. I sent you
+a letter, dated in November, 1614, by the Dutch ship called the Old
+Zealand, in which I informed you of the death of Mr Peacock and Walter
+Carwarden, both betrayed in Cochin-China, to our great grief, besides
+the loss of goods to the company.
+
+The last year, Mr Wickham, Mr Adams, and I, when bound for Siam in a
+junk we had bought, and meeting with great storms, our vessel sprung a
+leak, and we were fain to bear up for the _Leukes_[60] islands, where we
+had to remain so long, before we could stop our leaks, that we lost the
+monsoon, and had to return here. We have fitted her out again this year,
+and are now ready to sail again for Siam. My greatest hope in these
+parts is, that we shall be able to establish trade with China, of which
+we seem to have a fair prospect through the efforts of the China captain
+and his brothers; and I make no doubt that we shall have a factory there
+ere long.
+
+[Footnote 60: The Liqueo islands are here obviously meant, a group to
+the south of the south-western extremity of Japan, in 28 deg. N. and long.
+129 deg. 30' W. from Greenwich; such being the latitude and longitude of the
+centre of the great Liqueo, the principal island of the group.--E.]
+
+This last summer we have had great troubles, in consequence of war
+between the emperor and _Fidaia Same_, and we do not certainly know
+whether the latter be slain or fled; but the emperor gained the victory,
+with a vast loss of men on both sides.[61] Having no other news to
+write, I commit you to the protection of the Almighty, and am, &c.
+EDMOND SAYER.
+
+[Footnote 61: In the text of the Pilgrims, this loss is estimated at
+400,000, and in a marginal note at 40,000, both in words at length; for
+which reason the number is omitted in the text.--E.]
+
+No. 4. _Letter, with no address, from Edmond Sayer, dated Firando, 4th
+December, 1616._
+
+Worshipful Sir,--My duty always remembered. Having a favourable
+opportunity, I could not omit to trouble you with a few lines. I am but
+newly arrived here in Firando from a difficult and tedious voyage to
+Siam, to which country we went in a junk belonging to the right
+honourable company, in which Mr Adams was master, and myself factor.
+Having bought there more goods than our own junk could carry, we
+freighted another junk for Japan, in which Mr Benjamin Fry, the chief in
+the factory at Siam, thought it proper for me to embark, for the safety
+of the goods. The year being far spent, we were from the 1st June to the
+17th September in our voyage between Siam and _Shachmar_, during which
+we experienced many storms and much foul weather, and lost twenty of our
+men by sickness and want of fresh water. The great cause of our tedious
+and unfortunate voyage was in our not having a good pilot. The one we
+had was a Chinese, who knew nothing of navigation; for, when out of
+sight of land, he knew not where he was, nor what course to steer.
+Besides he fell sick, and was unable to creep out of his cabin, so that
+I was obliged to do my best to navigate our junk; which, with what small
+skill I possessed, and by the aid of God, I brought safe to _Shachmar_,
+where we arrived on the 17th of September, having then only five men
+able to stand on their legs. In consequence, I arrived so late at
+Firando that I could not go this year to Siam. But Mr William Eaton has
+gone there in the company's junk, having two English pilots, named.
+Robert and John Surges.--I am, &c. EDMOND SAYER.
+
+
+_No. 5. Letter from Richard Cocks to Captain John Saris, dated Firando,
+15th February, 1617.[62]_
+
+[Footnote 62: Perhaps the date of this letter, according to modern
+computation, ought to have been 1618, as in those days the year did not
+begin till Lady-day, the 25th March.--E.]
+
+My last letter to you was dated 5th January, 1616, and sent by way of
+Bantam in the ship Thomas, which went from hence that year along with
+another small ship called the Advice. In that letter I wrote you at
+large of all things that had then occurred, and mentioned having
+received two of your letters from London; one dated 4th November, 1614,
+and the other 15th August, 1615. The Advice has since returned to
+Japan, and arrived at Firando on the 2d of August last, and by her I had
+a letter from the honourable company, dated 30th January, 1616.
+
+You will perhaps have heard that Captain Barkeley, while on his
+death-bed, narrowly escaped losing 6000 dollars, paid out for custom on
+pepper; for, if he had died before it was found out, perhaps some other
+man might have taken credit for paying that sum. It is a common saying,
+that it is easy for those who live at Bantam to grow rich, as _no man
+dies _without an heir_. We have been again this year before the emperor
+of Japan, but could not procure our privileges to be enlarged, having
+still only leave to carry on trade at Firando and Nangasaki, and our
+ships to come only to Firando.
+
+Mr Edmond Sayer went last year to Cochin-China with a cargo amounting to
+about 1800 tayes, in goods and money; and when ready to cone away, was
+defrauded of 650 tayes, by a Chinese and others, of whom he had bought
+silk for the worshipful company. He had weighed out the money, waiting
+to receive the silk, and the money lay in the room where he sat; but
+some of the thievish people made a hole through the cane-wall of the
+room, and stole away the money unperceived. I am sorry for this
+mischance; but Mr Sayer is in hopes to recover it this year, as he left
+a person to follow out the suit, and goes back himself in a Chinese
+junk, with 2000 tayes in silver to purchase silk. He is to be
+accompanied by one Robert Hawley, as his assistant and successor, in
+case be should die, and Mr William Adams goes pilot, in place of the
+Chinese. God send them a prosperous voyage, and that they may recover
+the lost money. Our own junk, the Sea Adventure, made another voyage
+last year to Siam, Mr William Eaton being merchant; and has gone back
+again this year. God send them a prosperous voyage.
+
+Last year, the Hollanders sent a fleet of ships from the Moluccas to
+Manilla, to fight the Spanish fleet: But the Spaniards kept safe in port
+for five or six months, so that the Hollanders concluded they durst not
+come out at all, and therefore separated to look out for Chinese junks,
+of which some say they took and plundered twenty-five, while others say
+thirty-five. It is certain that they took great riches, and all under
+the assumed name of Englishmen. At length the Spanish fleet put to sea,
+and set upon five or six of the Dutch ships, the admiral of which was
+burnt and sank, together with two other ships, the rest escaping. The
+Spaniards then separated their fleet, to seek out the remaining Dutch
+ships. The Spanish vice-admiral fell in with two Dutch ships one morning
+and fought them both all day; but was at length constrained to run his
+ship ashore and set her on fire, that she might not be taken by the
+Hollanders. These two Dutch ships, and one that was in the former fight,
+came afterwards to Firando, together with two other large Dutch ships
+from Bantam, as big as the Clove, intending to have intercepted the
+Macao ship, which they narrowly missed. Thus five great Holland ships
+came this year to Firando, the smallest of them being as large as the
+Clove. One of these, called the Red Lion, which was she that rode beside
+us at the Moluccas, was cast away in a storm at Firando, together with a
+Chinese junk they brought in as a prize. All the goods were recovered,
+but were all wet. The emperor allows them to make good prize of all they
+take.
+
+The Black Lion, one of their ships, of 900 tons burden, was sent away
+for Bantam, fully laden with raw silk and other rich Chinese
+commodities. Another, called the Flushing, of 700 or 800 tons, is gone
+for the Moluccas, fully laden with provisions and money. The Sun, a ship
+of 600 or 700 tons, with a galliass of above 400 tons, are left to scour
+the coast of China, to make what booty they can, and to return next
+monsoon. The galliass has sailed already, but the Sun waits for the
+Macao ship departing from Nangasaki, that she may endeavour to take her.
+The Macao ship had actually sailed, but seeing the galliass, she
+returned to Nangasaki, and will, as I think, hardly venture to sail this
+year. As I said before, the Dutch have always robbed the Chinese under
+the name of Englishmen, which has greatly injured our endeavours to
+procure trade in that country; so that we have been obliged to send
+people to give notice to the Chinese governors, that they were
+Hollanders who have taken and plundered their junks, and not Englishmen.
+In fine, I have advised the worshipful company at large of every thing
+of moment, which I doubt not will be communicated to you. I send you
+here inclosed a copy of my last year's letter; and so, committing you to
+God, I rest your loving friend at command,
+
+RICHARD COCKS.
+
+
+No. 6. _Extract of a Letter from Richard Cocks, without Date or
+Address_.
+
+There came two friars in that ship as ambassadors from the viceroy of
+New Spain, with a present for the emperor; but he would neither receive
+the present, nor speak with them that brought it, even sending Mr Adams
+to order them to quit his dominions, as he had formerly banished all men
+of their cloth, and continued still in the same mind. It is said that
+_Fidaia Same_ had promised to receive the jesuits again into Japan, if
+he had got the victory and been settled in the empire. Had this taken
+effect, we and the Hollanders had doubtless been turned out of Japan, so
+that it is better as it is.
+
+Last year, when we fitted out our junk, we employed a Spaniard, called
+Damian Marina, the same person who thought to have gone with you in
+company with George Peterson. This Damian was a good helmsman, and was
+therefore employed by us, and another Spaniard, named Juan de Lievana,
+went with them as passenger. The junk however lost her voyage, and they
+returned to Nangasaki, where the carrak of Macao soon afterwards
+arrived. Understanding that these two Spaniards had gone in our vessel,
+the Portuguese arrested them and put them in irons in their ship,
+condemning them to death as traitors to their king and country, for
+serving their English enemies. I took their defence in hand, and
+procured an order from the emperor to set them at liberty, to the great
+displeasure of the Spaniards and Portuguese; and these two men are going
+passengers to Bantam in the Hosiander.
+
+We have had great troubles in Japan, in consequence of the wars, by
+transporting our goods from place to place, to save them. Mr Adams is
+gone again in the junk for Siam, accompanied only by Mr Edmond Sayer. Mr
+Nealson is very sick; but Mr Wickham and Mr Eaton are both well. I long
+to hear from you, and I pray you to deliver the inclosed to my brother.
+Yours, most assured at command,
+
+RICHARD COCKS.
+
+
+No. 7. _Letter from Richard Cocks, without Address, dated Firando, 10th
+March, 1620_.[63]
+
+[Footnote 63: In the Pilgrims, the date of this letter is made 1610,
+evidently by error of the press; and, as observed of No. 5, the real
+date, according to modern computation, ought to be 1621. The
+introductory paragraph is a note by Purchas, distinguished by inverted
+commas, retained as a curious specimen of his mode of writing.--E.]
+
+"Hollanders abuses of the English in those parts, are here published
+for knowledge of these eastern affairs and occurrents, as it is meet in
+a history. But neither were these national, but personal crimes, and
+done in time and place of pretended hostility; and now, I hope,
+satisfaction is or shall be made. Neighbourhood of region, religion, and
+customs, are easily violated by drink, covetousness, and pride, the
+three furies that raised these combustions. This history hath related
+the worth of many worthy Hollanders: If it yields a close-stool for
+Westarwood, as excrements rather than true Dutch, or a grain-tub or
+swill-tub for some brave brewers and bores, that embrued with nobler
+blood than themselves, prefer their brutish passions to God's glory,
+religion, and public peace let it be no imputation to the nation, which
+I love and honour, but to such baser spirits as have [like scorbutical
+humours in these long voyages, and their longer peace and want of wonted
+employments,] been bred as diseases to their, and infections to our
+bodies. My intent is to present others with their acts, and myself with
+prayers, that all may be amended."--_Purchas_.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+It is now almost three years since I wrote your worship any letter. The
+purpose of this is to inform you of the unlooked for and unruly
+proceedings of the Hollanders against our English nation, in all these
+parts of the world, not sparing us even in this empire of Japan,
+contrary to the large privileges granted to us by the emperor, that the
+Japanese should not meddle with or molest us. But these Hollanders,
+having this year seven ships great and small in this port of Firando,
+have, with sound of trumpet, proclaimed open war against our English
+nation, both by sea and land, threatening to take our ships and goods,
+and to kill our persons, as their mortal enemies. This was done by one
+Adam Westarwood, their admiral or lord-commander, as they call him, and
+was openly proclaimed aboard all their ships. They have even come to
+brave us before our own doors, picking quarrels with us, and forcibly
+entering our house, thinking to have cut all our throats, yet only
+wounded two persons; and, had it not been for the assistance of the
+Japanese our neighbours, who took our parts, they had assuredly slain us
+all, as there were an hundred Hollanders to one Englishman. Not
+contented with this, they took our boat when going about our business,
+in which was one Englishman, whom they carried prisoner to their house,
+threatening to put him to death; and indeed he was in imminent danger,
+among a crowd of drunken fellows, who threatened to stab him with their
+knives. This young man was Richard King, son to Captain King of
+Plymouth. Besides this, as two of our barks were passing their ships,
+within the town and harbour of Firando, they pointed a cannon at them,
+which missed fire, yet shot at them with muskets, which missed the
+Englishmen and killed a Japanese. For all this there is no justice
+executed against them by the king of Firando, though he has received the
+commands of the emperor to that effect.
+
+Yon will also please to understand, that two of these ships which they
+have brought to Firando are English ships, taken by them from Englishmen
+in the Indies. They also took two other ships from us, which were riding
+at anchor in the road of Patania, where we have a factory, and had not
+the least suspicion of any such event. In this unwarrantable affair,
+they killed Captain John Jordaine,[64] our chief president for the right
+worshipful company in the Indies. Several others were then slain, and
+the Hollanders carried the ships and goods away; but six of the
+mariners, which were in these captured English ships, escaped from them
+here at Firando, and came to our house. The Hollanders sent to me,
+demanding to have these men given up to them. But I answered, that I
+must first see their commission, that I might know by what authority
+they presumed to take our ships and goods, and to slay our men, the
+faithful subjects of his majesty. Upon this, they went to the _Tono_, or
+king of Firando, desiring to have their _English slaves_,[65] as they
+were pleased to call our men, delivered up to them. But they were told,
+that they must first demand of the emperor, and whatever he ordained
+should be obeyed; but that, in the meantime, he did not consider the
+English to be their slaves. This was the grand occasion on which they
+grounded their quarrel against us, and meant to have killed us all. But
+I trust in God and his majesty, by the solicitations of our right
+honourable and right worshipful employers, that his majesty will not
+suffer his true and loyal subjects to lose their lives, ships, and goods
+by this thievish and unthankful rabble, who are assembled in these parts
+of the world, and who make a daily practice to rob and steal from all,
+whether friends or foes: And I trust that you will become a solicitor in
+this so just cause, against so inveterate an enemy.
+
+[Footnote 64: This Captain Jordaine is said to have been treacherously
+slain in the time of a treaty--_Purch._]
+
+[Footnote 65: And who was the happy instrument of their own delivery,
+from what they accounted slavery, but the English nation?--_Purch._]
+
+This Adam Westarwood, their lord-commander, set my life to sale;
+offering fifty dollars to any one that would kill me, and thirty dollars
+for every other Englishman that they could slay: But hitherto God hath
+preserved me and the rest in this place; for though they have wounded
+two or three of our men, none have died. This villainous proceeding[66]
+of their lord-commander was secretly told me by some of their own
+people, who advised me and the rest of us to take heed to our safety.
+They also informed me of the noble parentage of this their
+lord-commander Westarwood, telling me that his father is a close-stool
+maker at Amsterdam, or thereabouts; and that the best of their captains
+are the sons of shoemakers, carpenters, or brewers. God bless their
+honourable and worshipful generation! I would say, God bless me from
+them. To make an end of this matter, I went up this year to the
+emperor's court at Meaco, to complain of the abuses offered to us in his
+dominions, contrary to the privileges his majesty had granted us. I had
+very good words, and fair promises made me that we should have justice,
+and that the _tono_ or king of Firando should be ordered to see it
+performed: But as yet nothing has been done, though I have many times
+made earnest suit on the subject.
+
+[Footnote 66: Unchristian, uncivil, inhumane, immane, devilish
+impiety.--_Purch._]
+
+While I was at the court, and in the emperor's palace at Meaco, there
+were several Spaniards and Portuguese there to pay their obeisance to
+the emperor, as is their custom every year on the arrival of their
+ships. There was also a Hollander at the court, who had lived almost
+twenty years in Japan, and speaks the Japanese language very fluently.
+In my hearing, and that of others, this fellow began highly to extol
+their king of Holland, pretending that he was the greatest king in
+Christendom, and held all the others under his command. He little
+thought that we understood what he said; but I was not slack in telling
+him, that he need not be so loud, for they had no king in Holland, being
+only governed by a count, or rather that they governed him. Nay, if they
+had any king at all in whom they could boast, it certainly was the king
+of England, who had hitherto been their protector, and without whose aid
+they had never been able to brag of their States. This retort made the
+Spaniards and Portuguese laugh heartily at the poor Hollander, and made
+him shut his mouth.
+
+And now for the news of this country. The emperor is great enemy to the
+name of Christians, especially to the Japanese who have embraced the
+faith; so that all such as are found are put to death. While at Meaco, I
+saw fifty-five martyred at one time, because they would not forsake the
+faith, and among them were some children of five or six years old, who
+were burnt in the arms of their mothers, calling on Jesus to receive
+their souls. Also, in the town of Nangasaki, sixteen others were
+martyred for the same cause, of whom five were burnt, and the rest
+beheaded and cut in pieces, and their remains put into sacks and cast
+into the sea in thirty fathoms deep: Yet the priests got them up again,
+and kept their remains secretly as relics. There are many others in
+prison, both here and in other places, who look hourly to be ordered for
+execution, as very few of them revert to paganism. Last year, about
+Christmas, the emperor deposed one of the greatest princes in all Japan,
+called _Frushma-tay_, lord of sixty or seventy _mangocas_, and banished
+him to a corner in the north of Japan, where he has a very small portion
+in comparison with what was taken from him, and he had the choice of
+this or of cutting open his own belly. It was thought that this would
+have occasioned great troubles in Japan, for all the subjects of
+_Frushma-tay_ were up in arms, and meant to hold out to the utmost
+extremity, having fortified the city of _Frushma_, and laid in
+provisions for a long time. But the _tay_ and his son, being then at the
+emperor's court, were commanded to write to their vassals, ordering them
+to lay down their arms and submit to the emperor, or otherwise to cut
+open their own bellies. Life being sweet, they all submitted, and those
+were pardoned who had taken up arms for their _tay_. The emperor has
+given their dominions, which were two kingdoms, to two of his own
+kinsmen; and this year the emperor has ordered the castle belonging to
+Frushma to be pulled down, being a very beautiful and gallant fortress,
+in which I saw him this year, and far larger than the city of Rochester.
+All the stones are ordered to be conveyed to Osaka, where the ruined
+castle, formerly built by _Fico-Same_, and pulled down by _Ogosha-Same_,
+is ordered to be rebuilt three times larger than before; for which
+purpose all the _tonos_ or kings have each their several tasks appointed
+them; to be executed at their several charges, not without much
+grumbling: For they had got leave, after so many years attendance at
+court, to return to their own residences, and were now sent for again
+all of a sadden to court, which angreth them not a little: "But go they
+must, will they nill they, on pain of belly-cutting."
+
+At this time there runs a secret rumour, that _Fidaia Same_ is alive,
+and in the house of the _Dairo_[67] at Meaco; but I think it has been
+reported several times before this that he was living in other places,
+but proved untrue. There are some rich merchants here that belong to
+Meaco, who are much alarmed by this report, lest, if true, the emperor
+may burn Meaco; and who are therefore in haste to get home. Were Fidaia
+actually alive it might tend to overthrow the emperor's power, for,
+though a great politician, he is not a martial man: But be this as it
+may, things can hardly be worse for us. I advised you in my last of the
+destruction of all the Christian churches in Japan; yet there were some
+remnants left at Nangasaki till this year, and in particular the
+monastery of Misericiordia was untouched, as were all the church-yards
+and burying-places; but now, by order of the emperor, all is destroyed,
+all the graves and sepulchres of the Christians opened, and the bones of
+the dead taken out by their parents and kindred, to be buried elsewhere
+in the fields. Streets have been built on the scites of these churches,
+monasteries, and burying-grounds, except in some places, where pagodas
+have been erected by command of the emperor, who has sent heathen
+priests to occupy them, thinking utterly to root out Christianity from
+Japan. There were certain places near Nangasaki where several jesuit
+fathers and other Christians were martyred, in the reign of _Ogosha
+Same_, and where their parents and friends had planted evergreen-trees,
+and erected altars near each tree, where many hundreds went daily to say
+their prayers; but now, by command of the emperor, all these trees are
+cut down, the altars destroyed, and the ground all levelled, it being
+his firm resolution utterly to root out the remembrance of all matters
+connected with Christianity.
+
+[Footnote 67: The Dairo was formerly the sovereign of Japan, uniting the
+supreme civil and spiritual power, committing the military affairs to a
+kind of generalissimo, who usurped supreme authority, and reduced the
+Dairo to be a kind of sovereign pontiff or chief-priest.--E.]
+
+In the months of November and December, 1618, there were two comets seen
+all over Japan. The first, rising in the east, was like a great fiery
+beam, rent to the southwards, and vanished away in about the space of a
+month. The other rose also in the east, like a great blazing star, and
+went northwards, vanishing quite away within a month near the
+constellation of Ursa-Major or Charles-waine. The wizards of Japan have
+prognosticated great events to arise from these comets, but hitherto
+nothing material has occurred, excepting the deposition of
+_Frushma-tay_, already related.
+
+I am almost ashamed to write you the news which the Spaniards and
+Portuguese report, though some of them have shewn me letters affirming
+it to be true, of a bloody cross having been seen in the air in England;
+and that an English preacher, speaking irreverently of it from the
+pulpit, was struck dumb: On which miracle, as they term it the king of
+England sent to the pope, to have some cardinals and learned men brought
+to England, as intending that all the people of England should become
+Roman catholics. I pray you pardon me for writing of such nonsense,
+which I do that you may laugh; yet I assure you there are many Spaniards
+and Portuguese here who firmly believe it. I know not what more to write
+you at this time: But I hope to come to England in the next shipping
+that comes here; and I trust in God that I may find your worship in good
+health.
+
+RICHARD COCKS.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION XVI.
+
+_Ninth Voyage of the East India Company, in 1612, by Captain Edmund
+Marlow_.[68]
+
+We sailed from the Downs on the 10th February, 1612, in the good ship
+James, and crossed the equator on the 11th April.[69] The 27th of that
+month, at noon, we were in latitude, by observation, 19 deg. 40' S. and in
+longitude, from the Lizard, 11 deg. 24' W. We this day saw an island
+fourteen leagues from us in the S.E. which I formerly saw when I sailed
+with Sir Edward Michelburne. It is round like Corvo, and rises rugged,
+having a small peaked hill at its east end. Its lat. is 23 deg. 30' S. and
+long. 10 deg. 30' W. from the Lizard; and there is another island or two in
+sight, seven or eight leagues E.N.E. from this.[70]
+
+[Footnote 68: Purch. Pilg. I. 440.--The relation of this voyage in the
+Pilgrims is said to have been written by Mr John _Davy_, the master of
+the ship: Probably the same John _Davis_, or _Davies_, formerly
+mentioned as having frequently sailed as master to India in these early
+voyages, and from whose pen Purchas published a _Rutter_, or brief book
+of instructions for sailing to India. On the present occasion, this
+voyage has been considerably abbreviated, especially in the nautical
+remarks, which are now in a great degree obsolete and useless, and have
+been already sufficiently enlarged upon in the former voyages to
+India.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 69: From some indistinct notices, in the commencement of this
+voyage, the Dragon and Hosiander appear to have belonged to the _tenth_
+voyage of the East India Company, and the Solomon to the _eleventh_
+voyage; and that these three ships sailed from England at the same time
+with the James, which belonged to the _ninth_ voyage.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 70: This seemeth the island of Martin Vaz.--_Purch._ The
+island of Trinidad, or Martin Vaz, is only in lat. 20 deg. 15' S. and long.
+29 deg. 32' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+We saw the island of St Lawrence on the 29th June, and anchored in five
+fathoms water in the bay of St Augustine on the 28th at night. Next day
+we weighed, and brought the ship to anchor in the river, one anchor
+being in thirty-five and the other in ten fathoms. A ship may ride here
+in shallower water at either side, the deep channel being narrow. In
+this anchorage no sea can distress a ship, being protected by the land
+and shoals, so that it may well be called a harbour, from its safety. We
+remained here twenty days, and sailed for Bantam on the 18th of July.
+
+In the morning of the 24th September we saw the islands of Nintam, in
+lat. 1 deg. 30' S.[71] The sound between the two great islands is eighteen
+leagues from Priaman, and eleven leagues from the shoals before _Ticoo_,
+which must be carefully avoided during the night, by laying two or three
+or four leagues off till day-light. When you see three hummocks that
+resemble three islands, take care always to have a person stationed on
+the outer end of the boltsprit to give warning of any spots in your way,
+as there are coral beds, which may be easily seen and avoided. The
+course from this sound for Ticoo or Priaman is E.N.E. to these shoals.
+In passing this sound, keep your lead always going, and come no nearer
+the large southern island than the depth of sixteen fathoms, as there
+are shoals towards the east side, and a breach or ledge also off the
+northern island, on the larboard going in for Priaman. When nearing the
+shoals of Ticoo, set the three hummocks on the main, which look like
+islands, as all the land near them is very low; and when you have these
+hummocks N.E. by E. then are you near the shoals, and when the hummocks
+are N.N.E. you are past the shoals. But great care is necessary
+everywhere, as it is all bad ground hereabout, till past the high land
+of _Manancabo_, which is in lat 4 deg. 30' S. or thereby.
+
+[Footnote 71: Pulo Mintao is probably here meant, which is to the south
+of the line, but touches it at its northern extremity. The sound in the
+text, is probably that between Pulo Botoa and Pulo Mintao.--E.]
+
+We came to anchor in the road of Priaman on the 26th September, where
+we found the Thomas, and remained fourteen days to refresh our sick men,
+when the Hector and our ship sailed for Bantam, where we arrived in
+company with the Janus and Hector on the 23d October. The 4th November
+we weighed from the road of Bantam, intending to proceed by the straits
+of Sunda for Coromandel; but the winds and currents were so strong
+against us, that we were forced back into the straits of Sunda to refit
+our ship, which was much weather-beaten. The 11th December, we anchored
+again at Pulo Panian, and went to work to trim our ship and take in
+ballast. Being ballasted, watered, and refitted, we sailed again on the
+10th January, 1613, for the straits of Malacca. But, being too late in
+the monsoon, and both wind and current against us, we got no farther
+than seventy leagues from Bantam by the first of March, with much toil
+to the men. Wherefore we concluded to take in wood and water, and to
+return for Bantam by the outside of Sumatra.
+
+Having again sailed for Coromandel, we were at noon of the 5th June,
+1613, in lat. 12 deg. N. and long. 23 deg. W. from the salt hills, having been
+carried by the currents 4 deg. 30', or ninety leagues out of our reckoning.
+Whoever sails from Bantam, either up or down, will find such uncertain
+reckoning that he may well miss his destined port, unless he looks well
+to the variation of the needle, which will help materially in ten or
+fifteen leagues, and indeed there is no other way of dealing with these
+currents. We now got sight of the land, which is so very low that the
+pagodas or pagan churches are first descried. With the aid of the lead,
+you may sail boldly on this coast of Coromandel in fifteen fathoms by
+night, and ten by day; but a steady man must always be kept at the lead
+on such occasions, as the sea shoals suddenly; for after thirteen
+fathoms, it will suddenly fall off to shoal water, being like a well or
+steep bank, and the ground ooze. The course along the coast is N. by E.
+to Pullicate, and so to Masulipatam.
+
+The 6th June we anchored at noon in the road of Pullicate, in eight
+fathoms on sand. There is a middle ground, having only five fathoms, and
+within that another, having six, seven, and eight. The marks for the
+road where we anchored, are the round hill by the other hill, W. by N.
+and the Dutch fort S.W. by W. The latitude is 13 deg. 30' N. and the
+variation 18 deg. 10'. Departing from Pullicate roads on the night of the
+7th, we were on the 8th in lat. 14 deg. 40' at noon, having sailed
+twenty-three leagues since last night, our depth of water being
+twenty-three to twenty-fire fathoms, and our course N. by E. but the
+lead is our sure guide on this coast, under God. The 9th at noon we were
+in lat. 15 deg. 30', having the land in sight, but not the high land of
+_Petapoli_ [Putapilly]. During the last twenty-four hours, we sailed
+seventeen leagues north, in fifteen and sixteen fathoms. The high land
+now in sight is known by a pagoda or pagan temple, and is five leagues
+from the high land of Putapilly, in the road of which place we anchored
+on the 10th in five fathoms on sand, this new high land bearing from us
+N.N.W. the platform of palm trees upon the island E.N.E. by E. and the
+bar N.W. by N. The whole sea coast is low land. The latitude here is 15 deg.
+52'. Having established a factory, in which we left Mr George Chansey
+and our purser as merchants, with other seven men to assist in taking
+care of our goods, we sailed from Putapilly on the forenoon of the 19th.
+
+We anchored in the road of Masulipatam on the 21st, where we found a
+ship belonging to Holland. We remained here for six months, until the
+6th January, 1614, and then set sail for Putapilly, where we arrived on
+the 19th of that month, and remained there, taking in the merchants and
+their goods till the 7th February, when we sailed for Bantam. We arrived
+there on the 20th April, and on the 10th June set sail for Patane. By
+noon of that day, being in lat. 5 deg. 44' S. we had sight of the islands
+nine leagues from Bantam, our course, after getting clear of the road,
+being N.N.E. in five, six, seven, eight, twelve, fourteen, and so to
+twenty-four fathoms. At six in the morning of the 11th, we were close
+beside the two islands that are north from Bantam near Sumatra, in lat.
+5 deg. S. and in twenty fathoms; this being the surest course both going to
+and from Bantam, but it is necessary to keep a good look-out for the
+sand-banks which are even with the water. The 12th, being involved in a
+strong adverse current, we were forced to anchor in a quarter less four
+fathoms, in sight of a reef, twelve leagues short of Lucapara, and
+forty-eight from Bantam.
+
+The 14th, we came in with the island of Banda and the main of Sumatra,
+and went through between them in five 1/2 fathoms. In this passage it is
+proper to keep nearer the Sumatra shore, though the water is deeper on
+the Banda side of the strait; as that side is rocky, while the side
+towards Sumatra is oozy. The 16th we came to Palimbangan point; and the
+17th at noon, being in lat, 1 deg. 10' S. we anchored in nine fathoms, on
+account of it falling calm with a strong current, the isle of Pulo Tino
+being to seawards. The 30th, we anchored in the road of Patane in three
+1/2 fathoms. On the 1st August we sailed to Sangora to trim our ship,
+being a good place for that purpose under shelter of two islands hard by
+the main, and fourteen or fifteen leagues from Patane. We anchored in
+Sangora road, under the eastermost of the two islands, on the 4th; and
+having put our ship into good trim, we came away on the 9th September,
+and returned to Patane next day. We remained there a month taking in
+the goods of the Globe, to carry them to Bantam, for which place we
+sailed on the 9th October, and arrived at Bantam on the 9th November. We
+continued there till the 27th January, 1615, to load our ship, and to
+get all things in readiness for our voyage home to England.
+
+The 29th we set sail from Bantam, homewards bound; and when some hundred
+leagues from thence, our captain, Mr Edmund Marlow, died. He was an
+excellent man, and well skilled in the mathematics and the art of
+navigation. The first place at which we anchored was Saldanha bay, where
+we arrived on the 29th April, 1615, and next day our consort the Globe
+came in. Having well refreshed and refitted our ships, we set sail from
+thence on the 17th May, and arrived at St Helena on the 3d June. Sailing
+from thence along with our consort, on the 7th of that month, we arrived
+in England on the 3d of August, giving praise to God for our safety.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION XVII.
+
+
+_Tenth Voyage of the English East India Company, in 1612, written by Mr
+Thomas Best, chief Commander_.[72]
+
+From the full tide of this voyage, in the Pilgrims, we learn that there
+were two ships employed in this _tenth_ voyage, named the Dragon and the
+Hosiander, in which were about 380 persons; and these were accompanied
+by two other ships, the James and the Solomon, which belonged to other
+voyages, each voyage being then a separate adventure, and conducted by a
+separate subscription stock, as formerly explained in the introduction
+to the present chapter. We learn from other parts of the Pilgrims, that
+the James belonged to the _ninth_ voyage, related immediately before
+this, and the Solomon to the _eleventh_, to be afterwards narrated.--E.
+
+[Footnote 72: Purch. Pilgr. I.456.]
+
+Sec.1. _Observations during the Voyage from England to Surat_.
+
+We sailed from Gravesend on the 1st of February, 1612. At noon on the
+22d March we made the latitude 15 deg. 20' N. and at two p.m. were abreast
+of Mayo, one of the Cape Verd islands, being S.W. by S. about twelve
+leagues from Bonavista. To the N. and N.N.W. of Mayo the ground is all
+foul, and due N. of the high hummocks a great ledge of rocks runs out
+from the land for five or six miles, a mile without which ledge there
+are twenty fathoms water. On the west side of the island, you may borrow
+in twelve or fifteen fathoms, till you come into the road, where we
+anchored in twenty-four fathoms.
+
+On the morning of the 28th March, we came close by an island in lat. 23 deg.
+30', and long. from the meridian of Mayo, 1 deg. 50' E. We did not land upon
+this island, but came within two or three miles of it, and in my opinion
+there is hardly any anchorage to be found. It may probably produce some
+refreshment, as it certainly has wood, which we saw, and it may have
+water, as we observed a fair plain spot and very green on its southern
+part; but we could find no ground within two or three miles of its
+coast. E.N.E. some seven or eight leagues from this, there is another
+island; and E. by S. or E.S.E. from the first island, about four or five
+leagues, there are two or three white rocks.[73]
+
+[Footnote 73: In the text it is not said if the latitude be N. or S. yet
+S. is probably meant. No island is however to be found in the indicated
+situation. In the _eleventh_ voyage, an island is said to have been
+discovered in lat. 19 deg. 34'S. certainly known to have been Trinidad,
+Santa Maria d'Agosto, or Martin Vaz, of which hereafter.--E.]
+
+We remained twenty-one days in Saldanha road, and bought for the
+three[74] ships thirty-nine beeves and 115 sheep, which we paid for with
+a little brass cut out of two or three old kettles. We got the sheep for
+small pieces of thin brass, worth about a penny or three halfpence each;
+and the beeves in the same manner for about the value of twelve-pence
+a-piece. This is an excellent place of refreshment, as besides abounding
+in beef and mutton, there is plenty of good fish, all kinds of fowls,
+and great store of fat deer, though we could not kill any of these. It
+has likewise excellent streams of fresh water, and a most healthful
+climate. We landed eighty or ninety sick, who were lodged in tents, and
+they all recovered their health in eighteen days, save one who died.
+From the 7th to the 28th June, when we set sail from Saldanha bay, we
+had continual fine weather, the sun being very warm, and the air
+pleasant and wholesome.
+
+[Footnote 74: One of the ships appears to have been separated from the
+fleet, but it does not appear which.--E.]
+
+We sailed from Saldanha road on the 28th June, and were 100 leagues to
+the east of _Cabo das Aguilhas_ before we found any current, but it was
+then strong. The 31st July at noon, we found the latitude 17 deg. 8' S. our
+longitude being 20 deg. 47' E. and at four p.m. we saw the island of _Juan
+de Nova_, distant four leagues E.S.E.[75] Its size, and I think we saw
+it all, is about three or four miles long, all very low and rising from
+the sea like rocks. Off the west end we saw breakers, yet could not get
+ground with a line of 150 fathoms, sounding from our boat. The latitude
+of this island, observed with great accuracy, is 17 deg.,[76] and it seems
+well laid down in our charts, both in regard to latitude and longitude.
+It is a most sure sign of being near this island, when many sea fowl are
+seen, and we accordingly saw there ranch fowl, some white, having their
+wings tipped only with black, and others all black.
+
+[Footnote 75: St Juan de Nova is in lat. 17 deg. 50' S. and long. 45 deg. 30'E.
+from Greenwich--E.]
+
+[Footnote 76: In lat. 17 deg. S. and long. 60 deg. E. is an island or bank
+called Nazareth, Corados, or Garajos, a long way however from St Juan de
+Nova.--E.]
+
+The 3d August, in lat 13 deg. 35' by observation, and longitude 22 deg. 30' from
+the Cape, we saw _Mal-Ilha_, one of the Comoros, about twelve leagues
+off, having on the east part of it a very fair sugar-loaf hill.[77] At
+the same time with this island, we had sight of that named Comoro,
+bearing N.N.W. by W. being high land. At six a.m. of the 4th we were
+close in with _Mal-Ilha_, and standing in for some place in which to
+anchor, while some eight or nine miles from the shore, we saw the ground
+under the ship in not less than eight or ten fathoms. The Hosiander, two
+miles nearer the land, had four or five fathoms, and her boat was in
+three fathoms. We then sent both our boats to sound, which kept shoaling
+on a bank in eight, ten, and twelve fathoms, and off it only half a
+cable's length had no ground with 100 fathoms. At the north end of
+Mal-Ilha there is a fair big high island, about five or six miles in
+circuit.[78] A bank or ledge of rocks extends all along the west side of
+Mal-Ilha, continuing to the small high island; and from this little
+island to Mal-Ilha may be some eight or nine miles, all full of rocks,
+two of them of good height. Being at the north end of this ledge, and
+the little island bearing S.E. you may steer in with the land, keeping
+the island fair aboard; and within the rocks or broken ground and
+Mal-Ilha there is a bay with good anchorage. To the eastwards, on coming
+in from the ledge of rocks, there is a great shoal, the outermost end of
+which is N.E. or N.E. by E. from the small island five or six miles, and
+no ground between that we could find with forty or fifty fathoms line.
+In fine, all the north side of Mal-Ilha is very dangerous, but the
+above-mentioned channel is quite safe. I would have come to anchor here,
+as there is a town about a mile east from the before-mentioned bay, the
+people being very good, and having abundance of refreshments, as beeves,
+goats, hens, lemons, cocoa-nuts in great plenty, and excellent water,
+but could not get in, owing to the wind being directly south.
+
+[Footnote 77: Mohilla, the Mal-ilha of the text, is in lat. 16 deg. 44 deg. S.
+and long. 44 deg. E. from Greenwich. Its difference of long. from the Cape
+of Good Hope is 23 deg. 45' E. Thus, in every instance hitherto, the
+observations of lat. and long. by Captain Best, at least as printed by
+Purchas, are grossly erroneous.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 78: This description seems rather to refer to the island of
+Mayotto, about thirty leagues E. of S. from Mohilla; the small island to
+the north, or N. by W. being called Saddle Isle.--E.]
+
+Two of my men had belonged to a Dutch fleet, that year when they
+assaulted Mosambique, on which occasion they put in here, and recovered
+the healths of 400 or 500 men in five weeks. Yet it is well named
+Mal-Ilha, or the bad island, for it is the most dangerous of any place I
+ever saw. It is next to Comoro, from which it is distant some twelve or
+fourteen leagues S.S.E.
+
+At dawn on the 1st September we got sight of land to the eastwards, four
+or five leagues distant, my reckoning being then eighty or ninety
+leagues short, owing, I suppose, to some current setting east from the
+coast of Melinda; neither from the latitude of Socotoro to Damaun could
+we see the sun, to know our variation. The 3d at seven a.m. we spoke two
+country boats, which informed us that the town, church, and castle in
+sight was Damaun. From these boats I got two men, who engaged to carry
+the Dragon to the bar of Surat, promising not to bring us into less than
+seven fathoms. On the 5th a Surat boat came on board with _Jaddow_ the
+broker, who had served Captain William Hawkins three years, and Sir
+Henry Middleton all the time he was here. There were likewise in this
+boat the brother of the customer of Surat, and three or four others. All
+these remained with us till the 7th, when we came to anchor at the bar
+of Surat, in eight 1/4 fathoms at high water, and six 1/2 at neap tides.
+At spring tides, however, I have found the tide to rise in the offing
+three fathoms, and even three 1/2. The latitude of our anchorage was 21 deg.
+10' N. and the variation 16 deg. 20' or 16 deg. 27'.[79] On the 11th, _Thomas
+Kerridge_ came aboard, with a certificate or licence under the seals of
+the justice and governor of Surat, for our quiet and peaceable trade and
+intercourse, and with kind entreaties to come ashore, where we should be
+heartily welcomed by the people. They also brought off a letter or
+narrative, written by Sir, Henry Middleton, which had been left in
+charge of the _Moccadam_ of Swally. On the same day, I again sent Mr
+Kerridge ashore, accompanied by Hugh Gettins.
+
+[Footnote 79: Sorat bar is in lat. 21 deg. 2' N. and long. 72 deg. 50' E. from
+Greenwich--E.]
+
+Sec.2. _Transactions with the Subjects of the Mogul, Fights with the
+Portuguese, Settlement of a Factory, and Departure for Acheen_.
+
+On the 13th September, 1612, sixteen sail of Portuguese frigates, or
+barks, put into the river of Surat. The 22d, we determined in council to
+send a dispatch to the king at Agra, signifying our arrival, and to
+require his explicit answer, whether he would permit us to trade and
+settle a factory; and if refused, that we would quit his country. The
+30th, I got notice that Mr Canning, our purser, and William Chambers,
+had been arrested ashore; wherefore I caused a ship of Guzerat to anchor
+close beside me, determining to detain her till I should see how matters
+went ashore. We also stopped a bark laden with rice from Bassare,
+belonging to the Portuguese, out of which we took twelve or fourteen
+quintals of rice, for which we paid at the rate of thirteen-pence the
+quintal. When I had taken possession of the Guzerat ship, I wrote to the
+chiefs of Surat, requiring them to send me all my men, together with the
+value of the goods I had landed; on which I should deliver up their ship
+and people, allowing them till the 5th of October to give me an answer;
+at which time, if I had not a satisfactory answer, I declared my
+determination to dispose of the ship and her goods at my pleasure. There
+were some 400 or 450 men aboard that ship, ten of the chiefest among
+whom I brought into my ship, to serve as hostages.
+
+On the 6th October, _Medi Joffer_ came aboard my ship, accompanied by
+four chiefs and many others, bringing me a great present, and came to
+establish trade with us, and to solicit the release of the Guzerat ship.
+On the 10th I left the bar of Surat, and came to Swally roads, where I
+anchored in eight fathoms at high water. This road-stead is ten or
+twelve miles north from the bar of Surat. The 17th, the governor of
+_Aamadavar_ [Ahmedabad] came to the water side. I landed on the 19th,
+having four principal persons sent aboard my ship, as pledges for my
+safety. On the 21st I concluded upon articles of agreement with the
+governor and merchants, of which the tenor follows:
+
+"Articles agreed upon, and sealed, by the governor of Ahmedabad, the
+governor of Surat, and four principal merchants; and to be confirmed by
+the firmaun and seal of the Great Mogul, within forty days from the date
+and sealing hereof, or else to be void; for the settlement of trade and
+factories in the cities of Surat, Cambaya, Ahmedabad, Goga, or in any
+other part or parts of the dominions of the Great Mogul in this country.
+Witnessed by their hands and seals, the 21st of October, 1612."
+
+1. All that concerns Sir Henry Middleton is to be remitted, acquitted,
+and cleared to us; so that they shall never make seizure, stoppage, or
+stay of our goods, wares, or commodities, as satisfaction for the same.
+
+2. They shall procure at their own proper cost, from the King or Great
+Mogul, his grant and confirmation of all the articles of this agreement,
+under the great seal of his government, and shall deliver the same to
+us, for our security and certainty of perpetual amity, commerce, and
+dealing, within forty days from the date and sealing hereof.
+
+3. It shall be lawful for the king of England to keep his ambassador
+continually at the court of the Great Mogul, during all the time of this
+peace and trade, there to accommodate and conclude upon all such great
+and weighty matters as may in any respect tend to disturb or break the
+said peace.
+
+4. At all times, on the arrival of any of our ships in the road of
+Swally, proclamation shall be made in the city of Surat, during three
+successive days, that all the people of the country shall be free to
+come down to the shore, and there to have free trade, dealing, and
+commerce with us.
+
+5. That all English commodities shall pay custom, according to the
+value or price they bear, at the time of entry at the custom-house,
+after the rate of three 1/2 per cent. ad valorem.
+
+6. All petty and pedlar ware to be free from duty, that does not exceed
+the value of ten dollars.
+
+7. The English are to have ten _manu_ carried from the water side to
+Surat for a _manuda_,[80] and at the same rate back; and are to be
+furnished with carts on application to the _moccadam_ of Swally for
+sending to Surat, and at that place by a broker with carts downwards to
+the sea side at Swally.
+
+[Footnote 80: This unexplained rate of carriage was probably ten
+_manuda_ for one _mahinoodic_.--E.]
+
+8. If any of our people die in the country, neither the king, the
+governor, nor any inferior officer should pretend any title or claim to
+any thing that had belonged to the deceased, neither should demand any
+fees, taxes, or customs, upon the same.
+
+9. In case all the men left in these parts should die before the return
+of any of our ships, then some officer appointed for the purpose shall
+make a true inventory and schedule of all monies, goods, jewels,
+provisions, apparel, or other things, belonging to our nation, and shall
+safely preserve and keep the same, to be delivered over to the general,
+captain, or merchants of the first English ships that arrive afterwards,
+from whom a regular receipt and discharge shall be given for the same.
+
+10. That they shall guarantee all our men and goods on land, redeeming
+all of both or either that may happen to be taken on the land by the
+Portuguese; delivering both to us again free of all charges, or in lieu
+thereof the full value of our said goods and men, and that without
+delay.
+
+11. Insomuch as there are rebels and disobedient subjects in all
+kingdoms, so there may be some pirates and sea-rovers of our nation, who
+may happen to come into these parts to rob or steal. In that case, the
+trade and factory belonging to the English shall not be held responsible
+or liable to make restitution for goods so taken; but we shall aid the
+subjects of the Great Mogul, to the best of our power who may happen to
+be thus aggrieved, by application to our king for justice against the
+aggressors, and for procuring restitution.
+
+12. That all victuals and provisions, required during the stay of our
+ships in the roads of Surat and Swally, shall be free of custom,
+provided they do not exceed the value of 1000 dollars.
+
+13. That in all questions of wrongs and injuries offered to us and to
+our nation, we shall receive speedy justice from the judges and others
+in authority, according to the nature of our complaints and the wrongs
+done to us, and shall not be put off by delays, or vexed by exorbitant
+charges or loss of time.
+
+On the 24th October, I landed the present intended for the Great Mogul,
+which I brought to the tent of the governor of Ahmedabad, who took a
+memorandum of all the particulars, as also a copy of our king's letter
+to their sovereign. After which, as before agreed upon with the
+governor, I sent them back aboard ship: For I had told him, unless his
+king would confirm the articles agreed upon, and likewise write our king
+a letter, that I would neither deliver the present nor our king's
+letter; for, if these things were refused, then was their king an enemy
+not a friend, and I had neither present nor letter for the enemy of our
+king. At this time, however, I delivered our present to the governor,
+and another to his son.
+
+The 14th November, a great fleet of frigates or barks, consisting of
+some 240 sail, came in sight. I thought they had come to attack us, but
+they were a _caffila_ of merchantmen bound for Cambaya; as there comes
+every year a similar fleet from Goa, Chaul, and other places to the
+southwards, for Cambaya, whence they bring the greatest part of the
+loading which is carried by the caracks and galleons to Portugal.
+
+The 27th I received notice from Mr Canning and Edward Christian, who
+were both ashore, that four galleons were fitted out from Goa, and were
+coming to attack us, having been in full readiness, and at anchor on the
+bar of Goa on the 14th November. The Portuguese fleet came in sight of
+us on the 28th; and on the 29th drew near us with the tide of flood. At
+two in the afternoon I got under weigh, and by four was about two
+cables length from their vice-admiral, fearing to go nearer lest I might
+have got my ship aground. I then opened a fire upon him, both with great
+guns and small arms, and in an hour had peppered him well with some
+fifty-six great shot. From him we received one small ball, either from a
+minnion or saker, into our mizen-mast, and with another he sunk our
+long-boat, which we recovered, but lost many things out of it.
+
+The 30th at day-light, I set sail and steered among the midst of the
+Portuguese fleet, bestirring ourselves manfully, and drove three of
+their four ships aground on the bar of Surat; after which I anchored
+about nine a.m. This morning the Hosiander did good service, coming
+through also among the enemy's ships, and anchored beside me. At the
+tide of flood, the three ships that were aground floated. We then
+weighed and made sail towards them, they remaining at anchor. On getting
+up to them, we spent upon three of them 150 great shot, and the morning
+after some fifty more. At night, we gave the admiral a salute from our
+four stern guns as a farewell; in return for which he fired one of his
+bow guns, a whole or demi-culverine, the shot from which came even with
+the top of our forecastle, went through our _Davie_, killed William
+Burrel, and carried off the arm of another of our men. The Hosiander[81]
+spent the whole of this day in firing against one of the ships that was
+aground, and received many shots from the enemy, one of which killed
+Richard Barker the boatswain.
+
+[Footnote 81: Nathaniel Salmon of Leigh was master of the
+Hosiander.--_Purch._]
+
+Night coming on, we anchored some six miles from the Portuguese ships;
+and at nine p.m. they sent a frigate down towards us, which came driving
+right _athwart halse_ of the Hosiander, and being discovered by their
+good watch, was speedily saluted by shot. The first shot made them hoist
+sail, the second went through their sails, and, they immediately made
+off.[82] Their intention certainly was to have set our ships on fire, if
+they had found us off our guard.[83]
+
+[Footnote 82: This frigate was sunk by the shot, as I was assured by Mr
+Salmon the actor, and eighty of her men were taken up drowned.--_Purch._]
+
+[Footnote 83: On this occasion the Portuguese had four great galleons
+and some twenty-six frigates, or armed barks. In these fights they lost
+all their _quondam_ credit, and 160 men, or as others say 500; and the
+English settled trade at Surat in spite of all their efforts.--_Purch._]
+
+We remained at anchor all the first December, the Portuguese not coming
+to us nor we to them; though they might easily have come to us without
+danger from the sands, but not so we to them. This day I called a
+council, and it was concluded to go down to the south, that we might
+have a broader channel, hoping that the galleons would follow us. We
+accordingly went down some six or seven leagues on the 2d, but they did
+not follow us; wherefore on the 3d we stood up again, and anchored
+fairly in sight of them. We weighed again on the morning of the 4th, and
+stood away before them, they following: But in the afternoon they gave
+us over, and hauled in with the land, and at night we directed our
+course for Diu. At night of the 5th, we anchored in fourteen fathoms
+near the shore, four or five leagues eastwards of Diu.
+
+The 9th we came to _Madafaldebar_[84] which is ten or eleven leagues E.
+by N. from Diu, the coast between being very fair, and having no unseen
+dangers. The depth near Diu is fifteen or sixteen fathoms, halfway to
+_Madafaldebar_ twelve fathoms, then ten and nine, but not less; and in
+nine fathoms we anchored in a fine sandy bay, on the west side of which
+is a river coming from a considerable distance inland. This place is
+some five or six miles west from the isles of _Mortie_[85] The 15th we
+set sail to explore the bay of _Mohar_,[86] having been reported by some
+of the people who had belonged to the Ascension to be a good place for
+wintering in, or waiting the return of the monsoon for sailing to the
+southwards. We accordingly anchored that night in the bay, which is nine
+or ten leagues E.N.E. from Madafaldebar, finding the coast and
+navigation perfectly good, with ten fathoms all the way, and no danger
+but what is seen. I sent my boat ashore, and got twenty excellent sheep
+for three shillings each, the best we had seen in the whole voyage. We
+found the ruins of a great town at this place, but very few inhabitants.
+
+[Footnote 84: From the indications in the text, this must be _Jaffrabat_
+on the coast of Guzerat, about thirty-one miles E. by N. from Diu. The
+name used in the text must be taken from the native language, while that
+of modern geography is the Persian, Mogul, or Arabic name of the
+place.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 85: Called _Searbett_ in Arrowsmith's excellent map of
+Hindostan, eight miles E.N.E. from Jaffrabat.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 86: Called on the margin of the Pilgrims, _Moha, Mona_, or
+_Mea_; and which from the context appears to be a bay immediately west
+from _Wagnagur_.--E.]
+
+There happened to be an army encamped in the neighbourhood of this
+place, and on the 17th, the general sent four men to me, requesting a
+conference. I landed on the 21st, and had much conversation with the
+general, who greatly desired to have two pieces of ordnance from us,
+making many fair promises of favour to our nation, and even presented me
+with a horse and furniture and two Agra girdles or sashes; but I refused
+him, having none to spare, and needing all we had for our defence. I
+presented him in return with two vests of stammel cloth, two firelocks,
+two bottles of brandy, and a knife.
+
+The 22d, we saw the four galleons coming towards us, and at nine p.m.
+they anchored within shot of where we lay. At sun-rise next morning we
+weighed and bore down upon them, and continued to fight them till
+between ten and eleven a.m. when they all four weighed and stood away
+before the wind. We followed them two or three hours, but they sailed
+much better large than we, so that we again came to anchor, and they
+likewise anchored about two leagues from us. In this days fight, I
+expended 133 great shot, and about 700 small. At sunrise of the 24th we
+again weighed and bore down upon the galleons, and began to fight them
+at eight a.m. continuing till noon, having this day expended 250 great
+shot, and 1000 small. By this time both sides were weary, and we all
+stood to sea, steering S. by E. The galleons followed us till two or
+three p.m. when they put about and come to anchor. I now took account of
+our warlike ammunition, and found more than half our shot expended, the
+store of the Hosiander being in a similar situation. We had now
+discharged against the enemy 625 great shot, and 3000 small.
+
+Being about four or five leagues from the land, we met with a sand, on
+which there was only two or two 1/2 fathoms, laying S.S.E. or thereabout
+from _Mosa_. I went over it in nine fathoms, at which time the two high
+hills over _Gogo_ were nearly N. from us. Upon this sand the Ascension
+was cast away. Between the main and this sand, the channel is nine and
+ten fathoms, and the shoaling is rather fast. We continued steering S.
+with the tide of ebb, and anchored in eight fathoms, finding the tide to
+set E.N.E. and W.S.W. by the compass. At midnight of the 24th we
+weighed, standing S.S.E. and at two p.m. of the 25th we anchored in
+seventeen fathoms at high water, full in sight of Damaun, which bore
+E.S.E. In the afternoon of the 26th we anchored off the bar of Surat.
+The 27th we went to Swally road, when Thomas Kerridge and Edward
+Christian came aboard.
+
+On the 6th of January, 1613, the _Firmaun_ from the Great Mogul, in
+confirmation of peace and settlement of a factory for trade, came to
+Swally as a private letter; wherefore I refused to receive it, lest it
+might be a counterfeit, requiring that the chief men of Surat should
+come down and deliver it to me, with the proper ceremonials.
+Accordingly, on the 11th, the sabandar, his father-in-law Medigoffar,
+and several others, came to Swally, and delivered the Firmaun to me in
+form, making great professions of respect for our nation in the name of
+their king. The 14th we landed all our cloth, with 310 elephants teeth,
+and all our quicksilver. This day likewise the Portuguese galleons came
+within three or four miles of us. The 16th, I landed Anthony Starkey,
+with orders to travel over land for England, carrying letters to give
+notice of our good success.[87]
+
+[Footnote 87: Mr Starkey and his Indian companion or guide were poisoned
+on the way by two friars.--Purch.]
+
+The 17th, having received all my goods from Surat, I set sail at night,
+leaving these coasts. The 18th we passed the four galleons, which all
+weighed and followed us for two or three hours; but we finally separated
+without exchanging shots. The 19th, when abreast of Basseen, we stopt
+three Malabar barks, which had nothing in them, and from one of which we
+took a boat. The 20th at night we were abreast of Chaul, both town and
+castle being full in sight. In the afternoon of the 21st we were abreast
+of Dabul, where we boarded three junks belonging to Calicut, laden with
+cocoanuts. The 22d in the morning, the Hosiander sent her boat aboard
+two junks, and at noon we were at the rocks, which are ten or eleven
+leagues N. of Goa, and six or eight miles from the main. Two or three of
+these rocks are higher than the hull of a large ship. At six p.m. we
+were abreast of Goa, which is easily known by the island at the month of
+the river, on which island there is a castle. All the way from Damann to
+Goa, the coast trends nearly N. and S. with a slight inclination to N.W.
+and S.E. the whole being very fair and without danger, having fair
+shoaling and sixteen or seventeen fathoms some three or four leagues off
+shore, with good-anchorage every where.
+
+The 24th we saw a fleet of sixty or eighty frigates or barks bound to
+the southwards, being in lat. 13 deg. 00' 30". The high land by the sea now
+left us, and the shore became very low, yet with fair shoaling of
+sixteen and seventeen fathoms some three or four leagues off. In the
+afternoon we went into a bay, where all the before-mentioned frigates
+were at anchor, together with three or four gallies. We brought out a
+ship with us, whence all the Portuguese fled in their boats, and as two
+frigates lay close aboard of her, they had carried away every thing
+valuable. Next day we examined our prize, and found nothing in her
+except rice and coarse sugar, with which we amply supplied both ships;
+and having taken out her masts, and what firing she could afford, we
+scuttled and sunk her, taking out likewise all her people, being twenty
+or twenty-five Moors. The 26th we met a boat belonging to the Maldives
+laden with cocoa-nuts and bound for Cananor, into which I put all the
+people of the prize, except eight, whom I kept to assist in labour, one
+of them being a pilot for this coast.
+
+The 27th we were a little past Calicut, abreast of Paniany, our lat. at
+noon being 10 deg. 30' N. In the morning of the 28th, we saw Cochin, which
+is known by the towers and castle, being in lat 9 deg. 40' N. or thereby.
+All the way from Goa to Cochin we never had above twenty fathoms,
+though, sometimes four or five leagues from the land; and when only
+three, four, or six miles off, the depths were from ten to twelve
+fathoms. From lat 11 deg. 30' N. to Cochin, the land was all very low by the
+water side; but up the country it was very high all along. Four or five
+leagues to the north of Cochin, there is a high land within the country,
+somewhat like a table mountain, yet rounded on the top, having long high
+mountains to the north of this hill. All this day, the 28th, we sailed
+within six or eight miles of the land, in nine, ten, and twelve fathoms.
+
+We anchored on the 30th in fifteen fathoms, about twenty-six leagues to
+the north of Cape Comorin right over against a little village, whence
+presently came off six or eight canoes with water and all kinds of
+provisions; the name of this place is _Beringar_, which our mariners
+usually call Bring-John, being in the kingdom of Travancor. The 1st
+February, the king sent me a message, offering to load my ship with
+pepper and cinnamon, if I would remain and trade with him. The 5th we
+were abreast of Cape Comorin, where we had a fresh gale of wind at E. by
+N. which split our fore-top-sail and main bonnet, yet a canoe with eight
+men came off to us three or four leagues from the land. We were here
+troubled with calms and great heat, and many of our men fell sick, of
+which number I was one. On the 8th we were forced back to the roads of
+_Beringar_. This place has good refreshments for ships, and the people
+are very harmless, and not friends to the Portuguese. From this place to
+Cape Comorin, all the inhabitants of the sea coast are Christians, and
+have a Portuguese priest or friar residing among them. It is to be
+remarked, that the whole coast, even from Damaun to Cape Comorin, is
+free from danger, and there is fair shoaling all the way from Cochin to
+that cape, having sixteen, eighteen, and twenty fathoms close to the
+land, and no ground five or six leagues off, after you come within
+twenty-five or thirty leagues of the Cape. The variation at Damaun was
+16 deg. 30'; halfway to the Cape about 15 deg., and 14 deg. at the cape, the
+latitude of which is 7 deg. 30' N. [_exactly_ 7 deg. 57'].
+
+In the afternoon we were fair off the Cape, and found much wind at
+E.S.E. giving small hope of being able to go eastwards till the end of
+the monsoon, which our Indians reported would be about the end of April.
+So I bore up, and came to anchor, four or five leagues within the Cape,
+in twenty fathoms close by two rocks. About two miles right off these
+two rocks is a sunken rock, which is very dangerous, especially if
+sailing in twenty fathoms, but by keeping in twenty-four fathoms all
+danger is avoided. We remained here nine days, when we again made sail.
+In the morning of the 28th we had sight of Ceylon, some eight or nine
+leagues E.S.E. being in lat. 7 deg. N. At 4 p.m. we were close in with that
+island, in thirteen, fifteen, and sixteen fathoms. The 1st of March, at
+6 p.m. we were abreast of Columbo, the lat. of which is about 6 deg. 30' N.
+[7 deg. 2']; having twenty-four and twenty-five fathoms three leagues off.
+The 12th we stood in with the land, and anchored in twenty-four fathoms,
+the wind being S.E. and S. I sent my boat ashore four leagues to the
+north of _Punta de Galle_, and after some time a woman came to talk with
+one of our Indians who was in the boat. She said we could have no
+provisions: but by our desire she went to tell the men. Afterwards two
+men came to us, who flatly refused to let us have any thing, alleging
+that our nation had captured one of their boats; but it was the
+Hollanders not the English. The 14th, in the morning, the southern point
+of Ceylon, called _Tanadare_ [Dondra], bore E.S.E. of us, some five
+leagues off. This point is in lat. 5 deg. 30' [5 deg. 54' N.], and is about ten
+or twelve leagues E.S.E. from Punta de Galle. The 17th we were near one
+of the sands mentioned by Linschoten, being two leagues from the land.
+We had twenty-five fathoms water, and on the land, right opposite this
+sand, is a high rock like a great tower. The land here trends E.N.E.[88]
+
+[Footnote 88: Owing probably to careless abbreviation by Purchas, this
+solitary notice is all that is given of the voyage between Dondra-head
+in Ceylon and Acheen, in the north-west end of Sumatra, to which the
+observation in the text seems to refer.--E.]
+
+Sec.3. _Occurrences at Acheen, in Sumatra_.
+
+At noon of the 12th April, 1613, we came to anchor in the road of
+Acheen, in twelve fathoms, but ships may ride in ten or even eight
+fathoms; the best place in which to ride being to the eastward of the
+castle, and off the river mouth. I landed the merchants on the 13th; but
+the king did not come to town till the 15th, when he sent me his _chop_
+or licence to land, which was brought by an eunuch, accompanied by the
+_Xabander_ and six or eight more, to whom I gave 120 _mam_. I landed
+along with them, and two hours afterwards the king sent me a present of
+some provisions, I having sent him on my landing a present of _two
+pieces_;[89] the custom being to make the king some small present on
+landing, in return for which he sends several dishes of meat.
+
+[Footnote 89: These _pieces_, so often mentioned in the early voyages,
+were probably fowling-pieces, or European fire-arms.--E.]
+
+On the 17th, the king sent an elephant, with a golden bason, for our
+king's letter, which I accompanied to court, attended by forty of our
+men, who were all admitted into the king's presence. After many
+compliments, the king returned me our king's letter, that I might read
+it to him; and accordingly the substance of it was explained in the
+native language, with the contents of which he was well pleased. After
+some time, the king told me that he would shew me some of his
+diversions, and accordingly caused his elephants to fight before us.
+When six of them had fought for some time, he caused four buffaloes to
+be brought, which made a very excellent and fierce fight; such being
+their fierceness that sixty or eighty men could hardly part them,
+fastening ropes to their hind-legs to draw them asunder. After these,
+some ten or twelve rams were produced, which fought very bravely. When
+it was so dark that we could hardly see, these sports were discontinued,
+and the king presented me with a banquet of at least 500 dishes, and
+such abundance of hot drinks as might have sufficed to make an army
+drunk. Between nine and ten at night, he gave me leave to depart,
+sending two elephants to carry me home; but as they had no coverings I
+did not ride either of them.
+
+On the 18th, I went again to court by appointment of the king, when we
+began to treat concerning the articles formerly granted by his
+grandfather to Mr James Lancaster; but when we came to that in which all
+goods were to be brought in and carried out free from customs, we broke
+off without concluding any thing. The 19th the ambassador of Siam came
+to visit me, and told me, that about thirty months before, three
+Englishmen had waited upon his king, who gave them kind entertainment,
+being rejoiced at receiving letters from the king of England. He also
+said that his king would be much pleased if our ships came to his ports,
+telling me what great quantities of Portugal cloth, for so he called our
+English cloth, would sell in his country. According to his opinion, the
+colours most saleable in his country are, _stammel_ and other reds,
+yellows, and other light, gay, and pleasing colours, such as those
+already in most request at Surat. He also told me, that his king had
+made a conquest of the whole kingdom of Pegu, as that he is now the most
+powerful sovereign in the east, except the emperor of China, having
+twenty-six tributary kings under his government and authority, and is
+able to equip for war 6000 elephants. Their coin is all of silver, gold
+being less esteemed, and of less proportional value than with us. That
+country produces great abundance of pepper and raw silk; and he said the
+Hollanders have factories at Patane, an excellent port, where they are
+called English. Siam likewise, according to him, is a good port, and
+nearer the court than Patane: Those who go to the city in which the king
+resides land always at the port of Siam, whence the royal residence is
+twenty days journey by land. I requested from the ambassador to give me
+a letter to his sovereign, and letters also to the governors of the
+maritime towns in Siam, in favour of the English nation, when we should
+come upon these coasts, which he promised me. And, lastly, in token of
+friendship we exchanged coins; I giving him some of our English coin,
+and receiving from him the coins of Siam. I had often, after this first
+interview, friendly intercourse with this ambassador.
+
+I went to court on the 20th, butt had no opportunity to speak with the
+king; whereupon I sent to the king's deputy, or chief minister, and
+complained of having been dishonoured, and of having been abused by the
+_shahbander_. He promised me speedy redress, and that he should inform
+the king without delay, which indeed he did that same day. On the day
+following, the king sent two officers of his court to me, to intimate
+that I might repair freely to his court at all times, passing the gate
+without hindrance or waiting for his _criss_. He also removed the
+shahbander of whom I had complained, and appointed a gentleman, who had
+formerly been his vice-ambassador to Holland, to attend upon me at all
+times to court, or any where else, at my pleasure. The 24th I went to
+court, and had access to the king, who satisfied me in all things, and
+promised to ratify and renew all the articles formerly agreed upon
+between his predecessor and Mr James Lancaster. After many compliments,
+he gave me leave; and presently after my return, he sent me an elephant
+to attend upon me, and to carry me at all times to any place I pleased.
+This is a sign of the highest honour and esteem, as no person may have
+an elephant, or ride upon one, but those whom the king is pleased to
+honour with that privilege.
+
+The 2d of May, the king invited me to his fountain to swim, and I was
+there accordingly along with him, the place being some five or six miles
+from the city; and he even sent me two elephants, one to ride upon, and
+the other to carry my provision. Having washed and bathed in the water,
+the king made me partake of a very splendid banquet, in which there was
+too much arrak, the whole being eaten and drank us we sat in the water;
+and at this entertainment all his nobles and officers were present. Our
+banquet continued from one till towards five in the evening, when the
+king allowed me to depart. Half an hour afterwards, all the strangers
+were permitted to go away, and presently afterwards he came away
+himself.
+
+On the 14th, some Portuguese came to Acheen on an embassy from the
+governor of Malacca to the king; and as the wind was scant, they landed
+three leagues to the east of Acheen road. I immediately sent the
+Hosiander, of which I appointed Edward Christian captain, to go in
+search of the bark from Malacca, which was brought to me on the 17th:
+But the king sent me two messengers, desiring me to release her and her
+people and cargo; which I refused, till I had examined the bark and her
+contents; saying, however, that in honour and respect for his majesty, I
+should then do whatever he was pleased to desire. Afterwards, I was
+informed by Mr Christian, that there were only four or five bales of
+goods in the bark, and that nothing she contained had been meddled with.
+Being satisfied of this I went ashore, and found my merchants were at
+the court. They returned presently, saying, that the king was greatly
+displeased at the capture of the Portuguese bark in his port, protesting
+by his god that he would make us all prisoners, if she were not
+released. Having notice that I was ashore, the king presently sent for
+me; and, as I was on my way to the court, I met with a gentleman from
+the king, who desired me in his name to release the bark; but I told him
+I must first see and speak to the king. I was then brought into the
+king's presence, and, after much discourse with him, I gave him the
+bark and all her contents; with which he was so much pleased, that he
+gave me the title of _Arancaia Puto_, signifying the _honourable white
+man_, requiring all his nobles to call me by that name. In farther proof
+of his satisfaction with my conduct on this occasion, he sold me all his
+benzoin at my own price, being twenty _tailes_ the bahar, though then
+selling commonly at thirty-four and thirty-five tailes. He at the same
+time expressed his esteem and affection for me in the strongest terms,
+desiring me to ask from him whatever I thought proper. I only requested
+his letters of recommendation and favour for Priaman, which he most
+readily promised; and, at my taking leave, he both made me eat some
+mangoes, of which he was then eating, and gave me some home with me.
+
+On the 27th, _Malim Cairy_ came to Acheen, by whom I received letters
+from our merchants at Surat, as also a copy of the _firmaun_, sent them
+from Agra, bearing date the 25th January, in the seventh year of the
+then reigning Great Mogul, by which everything was confirmed that had
+been agreed upon between the governor of Ahmedabad and me. The 17th of
+June, a Dutch merchant came to Acheen from Masulipatam, who had been
+eight months on his way, from whom we learnt the death of Mr Anthony
+Hippon at Patane, and of Mr Brown, master of the Globe, who died at
+Masulipatam, where our people had met with evil usage. The 24th I
+received of the king his present for the king of England, consisting of
+a _criss_ or dagger, a _hasega_, four pieces of fine Calicut lawn, and
+eight camphire dishes.[90]
+
+[Footnote 90: In the translation of the letter accompanying these
+presents, to be noticed hereafter, they are thus described:--"A criss
+wrought with gold, the hilt being of beaten gold, with a ring of stones;
+an Assagaya of Swasse, half gold half copper; eight porcelain dishes
+small and great, _of camfire one piece of souring stuff_; three pieces
+of callico lawns."--The passage in Italics is inexplicable, either in
+the words of the letter, or in the description in the text.--E.]
+
+The 3d of July, the fleet of armed vessels belonging to Acheen arrived,
+being only twenty days from the coast of Johor, at which place they had
+captured the factory of the Hollanders, making prize of all their goods,
+and had brought away some twenty or twenty-four Dutchmen as prisoners.
+The 7th, I received the king's letter for Priaman, together with a
+_chop_ or licence for my departure; and on the 12th, taking my leave of
+Acheen, I embarked. In the morning of the 13th I set sail. It is to be
+noted, that, from the 12th April to the middle of June, we had much rain
+here at Acheen, seldom two fair days following, and accompanied, by much
+wind in sudden gusts. From the 15th June to the 12th July, we had
+violent gales of wind, always at S.W. or W.S.W. or W.
+
+Sec.4. _Trade at Tecoo and Passaman, with the Voyage to Bantam, and thence
+Home to England_.
+
+Leaving Acheen, as said before, on the 13th July, 1613, we came in sight
+of _Priaman_ on the 3d of August, it being then nine or ten leagues off,
+N.E. by E. and clearly known by two great high hills, making a great
+_swamp_ or saddle between them. We saw also the high land of _Tecoo_,
+which is not more than half the height of that of Priaman, and rises
+somewhat flat. At the same time likewise we saw the high land of
+_Passaman_, some seven or eight leagues north of Tecoo, mid-way between
+Tecoo and Priaman, which mountain is very high, and resembles Aetna in
+Sicily.[91] In the afternoon of the 7th we came to Tecoo, and anchored
+to the eastward of the three islands in seven fathoms, the southmost
+isle bearing W.S.W. the middle isle W.N.W. and the northern isle N. 1/2
+E. our anchorage being a mile from them.
+
+[Footnote 91: Perhaps this observed similarity with Aetna is meant to
+indicate that this hill also is a volcano.--E.]
+
+I sent ashore my merchants on the 19th, and landed myself in the
+afternoon. Next day, by advice of our council, the Hosiander was sent to
+Priaman, with the letter of the king of Acheen. She sailed from Tecoo on
+the 12th, and came back on the 18th, when she was dispatched to Bantam.
+The 25th there came a junk from Bantam, the owners of which were
+Chinese. They confirmed to me the reported death of Sir Henry Middleton,
+with the loss of most of the men belonging to the Trades-increase, in
+consequence of her main-mast breaking, while heaving her down for
+careening her bottom. She was now returned from Pulo-Pannian to Bantam,
+and they said that three hundred Chinese had died while employed at work
+upon her.
+
+The 28th a boat I had sent to Passaman returned, having been well
+entertained at that place, and brought with them the _Scrivano_ to deal
+with me, with whom accordingly I concluded a bargain. The 29th, the
+governor of Tecoo sent for me to come ashore, when I went to wait upon
+him. He was in council, with all the chiefs of the district, and, after
+a long discussion, we agreed on the following price of pepper. In the
+first place, we were to pay eighteen dollars the bahar; then there was
+8d. the bahar for lastage or weighing, 30d. for _canikens_, and 35 d.
+for _seilars_: Besides all which they bargained for presents to sixteen
+chiefs or great men. On the 30th, Henry Long came from Passaman, and
+informed me that Mr Oliver had fallen sick, and that several others of
+our men had died there; upon which I sent my pinnace to bring back Mr
+Oliver and all others who survived, and to discontinue our factory at
+that place.
+
+The 21st October, the Hosiander returned from Bantam, bringing me
+letters from the English merchants at that place; saying that they had
+17,000 bags of pepper ready, all of which I might have, or any part of
+it I thought proper, if I chose to come for it, at thirteen dollars the
+_timbane_. On this, and several other considerations, I held a
+mercantile council, in which it was agreed that the Hosiander should be
+left at _Tecoo_ for the sale of our Surat goods, all of which were
+accordingly put on board her for that purpose, and I departed in the
+Dragon for Bantam from the road of Tecoo on the 30th October. I remained
+in this road of Tecoo eleven weeks, in which time I bought 115 or 120
+tons of pepper, and buried twenty-five of our men. All of these either
+died, or contracted their mortal illnesses at Passaman, not at Tecoo;
+and surely, if we had not attempted to trade at Passaman, all, or at
+least most of these, might have now been living. Wherefore, I earnestly
+advise all of our nation to avoid sending any of their ships or men to
+Passaman, for the air there is so contagious, and the water so
+unwholesome, that it is impossible for our people to live at that place.
+
+I set sail from Tecoo on the 30th October, and arrived in the road of
+Bantam on the 11th November, where I anchored in a quarter less four
+fathoms, [3-3/4 fathoms.] Next day I convened our English merchants on
+board my ship, and agreed on the price of pepper at thirteen dollars the
+_bahar_, which is 600 pounds of our weight. Having concluded my business
+at this place, I set sail for Saldanha bay; where I bought for a small
+quantity of copper, worth perhaps between three and four pounds, 494
+sheep, 4 beeves, and 9 calves. We sailed again from that place on the
+4th March, 1614; and on the day of our departure, the natives brought us
+more live-stock than we knew how to dispose of; but we brought away
+alive, eighty sheep, two beeves, and one calf.
+
+The 24th of March we saw St Helena, eight or nine leagues to the W.N.W.
+its latitude, by my estimation, being 16 deg. S. and its long, from the Cape
+of Good Hope, 22 deg. W. At three p.m. we anchored in the road of that
+island, right over-against the Chappel. While at St Helena, finding the
+road from the Chappel [church valley], to where the lemon-trees grow, a
+most wicked way, insomuch that it was a complete day's work to go and
+come, I sent my boats to the westward, in hopes of finding a nearer and
+easier way to bring down hogs and goats. In this search, my people found
+a fair valley; some three or four miles to the S.W. which leads directly
+to the lemon-trees, and is the largest and finest valley in the island,
+after that at the Chappel, and is either the next, or the next save one,
+from the valley of the Chappel. At this valley, which is some three or
+four miles from that of the Chappel, and is from it the fourth valley or
+swamp one way, and from the point to the westward the second, so that it
+cannot be missed, it is much better and easier for getting provisions or
+water, and the water is better and clearer. The road or anchorage is all
+of one even ground and depth, so that it is much better riding here than
+at any other part of the island; and from this place, a person may go up
+to the lemon-trees and back again in three hours. We here got some
+thirty hogs and pigs, and twelve or fourteen hundred lemons; but if we
+had laid ourselves out for the purpose, I dare say we might have got 200
+hogs, besides many goats.
+
+Continuing our voyage home, we got sight of the Lizard point on the 4th
+June, 1614, our estimated longitude from the Cape of Good Hope being
+then 27 deg. 20', besides two degrees carried by the currents; so that the
+difference of longitude, between the Cape and the Lizard, is 29 deg. 20', or
+very nearly. Though we had then only left the Cape of Good Hope three
+months before, and were only two months and nine days from St Helena,
+more than half our company was now laid up by the scurvy, of which two
+had died. Yet we had plenty of victuals, as beef, bread, wine, rice,
+oil, vinegar, and sugar, as much as every one chose. All our men have
+taken their sickness since we fell in with Flores and Corvo; since which
+we have had very cold weather, especially in two great storms, one from
+the N. and N.N.E. and the other at N.W. so that it seemeth the sudden
+coming out of long heat into the cold is a great cause of scurvy. All
+the way from the Cape of Good Hope to the Azores, I had not one man
+sick.
+
+The 15th of June, 1614, we came into the river Thames, by the blessing
+of God, it being that day six months on which we departed from Bantam in
+Java.
+
+
+SECTION XVIII.
+
+_Observations made during the foregoing Voyage, by Mr Copland, Chaplain,
+Mr Robert Boner, Master, and Mr Nicholas Whittington, Merchant_.[92]
+
+[Footnote 92: Purch. Pilgr. I. 466. On this occasion, only such notices
+as illustrate the preceding voyage are extracted.--E.]
+
+Sec.1. _Notes extracted from the Journal of Mr Copland, Chaplain of the
+Voyage_.
+
+The bay of Saldhana, and all about the Cape of Good Hope, is healthful,
+and so fruitful that it might well be accounted a terrestrial paradise.
+It agrees well with our English constitutions; for, though we had ninety
+or an hundred sick when we got there, they were all as well in twenty
+days as when we left England, except one. It was then June, and we had
+snow on the hills, though the weather below was warmish. The country is
+mixed, consisting of mountains, plains, meadows, streams, and woods
+which seem as if artificially planted on purpose, they are so orderly;
+and it has abundance of free-stone for building. It has also plenty of
+fish and wild-fowl, as geese, ducks, and partridges, with antelopes,
+deer, and other animals. The people were very loving, though at first
+afraid of us, because the Dutch, who resort hither to make train-oil,
+had used them unkindly, having stolen and killed their cattle; but
+afterwards, and especially on our return, they were more frank and kind.
+They are of middle size, well limbed, nimble and active; and are fond of
+dancing, which they do in just measure, but entirely naked. Their dress
+consists of a cloak of sheep or seals-skin to their middle, the hair
+side inwards, with a cap of the same, and a small skin like that of a
+rat hanging before their privities. Some had a sole, or kind of sandal,
+tied to their feet. Their necks were adorned with greasy tripes, which
+they would sometimes pull off and eat raw; and when we threw away the
+guts of beasts and sheep we bought from them, they would eat them half
+raw and all bloody, in a most beastly and disgusting manner. They had
+bracelets about their arms of copper or ivory, and were decorated with
+many ostrich feathers and shells. The women were habited like the men,
+and were at first very shy; but when here on our return voyage, they
+became quite familiar, even lifting their rat-skins: But they are very
+loathsome objects, their breasts hanging down to their waists. The hair
+both of the men and women is short and frizzled. With these people
+copper serves as gold, and iron for silver. Their dwellings are small
+tents, removable, at pleasure; and their language is full of a strange
+_clicking_ sound, made by doubling their tongues in their throats. There
+is a high hill, called the _Table Mountain_, which covers all the
+adjoining territory for an hundred miles. The natives, who are quite
+black, behaved to us very peaceably, but seemed to have no religion, yet
+their skins were slashed or cut, like the priests of Baal; and one
+seemed to act as chief, as he settled the prices for the whole. Some of
+our people went a considerable way into the country, and discovered many
+bays and rivers.
+
+When at Surat, the Guzerats took some of our sea-coal to send to their
+sovereign, the Great Mogul, as a curiosity. At this place there came
+against us a Portuguese squadron of four galleons, attended by
+twenty-five or twenty-six armed barks or frigates, commanded by an
+admiral named Nuno de Accunna, and having all red colours displayed, in
+token of defiance. When advised by the sabander to keep between us and
+the shore, he proudly answered, That he scorned to spend a week's
+provisions on his men in hindering us from trade, as he was able to
+force us to yield to his superior force in an hour. After three fights,
+they sent one of their frigates against us, manned with six or seven
+score of their best men, intending to set us on fire, but they were all
+sunk.
+
+_Medhaphrabad_,[93] formerly a fine walled city, has been entirely
+ruined in the wars of the Moguls. It has still a strong castle, held by
+a refractory chief of the Rajapoots, and was besieged by the nabob,
+having fifty or sixty thousand men in his camp. The nabob dwelt in a
+magnificent tent, covered above with cloth of gold, and spread below
+with Turkey carpets, having declared he would not desist from the siege
+till he had won the castle. He sent a horse, and two vests wrought with
+silk and gold, to our general Captain Best, with four vests for four
+others. On the 23d and 24th of December, we fought again with the
+Portuguese, in view of the whole army of the Moguls, and forced them to
+cut their cables and flee from us, being better sailing vessels than
+ours.
+
+[Footnote 93: Called Madafaldebar in the preceding section, and there
+supposed to be the place now named Jaffrabat, on the coast of
+Guzerat.--E.]
+
+I rode from Swally to Surat in a coach drawn by oxen, which are
+ordinarily used in this country for draught, though they have plenty of
+excellent and handsome horses. On the way I was quite delighted to see
+at the same time the goodliest spring and harvest combined I had ever
+seen any where, often in two adjoining fields, one as green as a fine
+meadow, and the other waving yellow like gold, and ready to cut down;
+their grain being wheat and rice, of which they make excellent bread.
+All along the road there were many goodly villages, full of trees which
+yield a liquor called _toddy_, or palm-wine, which is sweet and
+pleasant, like new wine, being strengthening and fattening. They have
+grapes also, yet only make wine from the dried raisins. In Surat there
+are many fair houses built of stone and brick, having flat roofs, and
+goodly gardens, abounding in pomegranates, pomecitrons, lemons, melons,
+and figs, which are to be had at all times of the year, the gardens
+being continually refreshed with curious springs and fountains of fresh
+water. The people are tali, neat, and well-clothed in long robes of
+white callico or silk, and are very grave and judicious in their
+behaviour. The sabander assured us that we had slain 350 of the
+Portuguese; but we heard afterwards, that above 500 were killed or
+maimed. Our general sent letters for England by land, but the messenger
+and his Indian attendant were poisoned by two friars. A second letter
+was entrusted to a mariner, which reached its destination.
+
+We anchored in the road of Acheen on the 12th April, 1613, where we were
+kindly received by the king. On the 2d of May, all the strangers then at
+Acheen were invited to a banquet at a place six miles from the town, and
+on this occasion two elephants were sent for our general. To this place
+all the dishes were brought by water by boys, who swam with one hand,
+while each carried a dish in--the other; and the drink was brought in
+the same manner. When the guests had satisfied themselves with tasting
+any of the dishes, which indeed they must of all, the remainder was
+thrown into the river. In this feast there were at least 500 dishes
+served, all well dressed. It continued from one o'clock till five; but
+our general, who was wearied with sitting so long in the water beside
+the king, was dismissed an hour before the other guests. The captain or
+chief merchant of the Dutch factory, either by taking too much strong
+drink, or from sitting too long in the cold water, caught an illness of
+which he died soon after.
+
+The 2d June we were entertained by a fight of four elephants with a wild
+tyger, which was tied to a stake; yet did he fasten on the legs and
+trunks of the elephants, making them to roar and bleed extremely. This
+day, as we were told, one eye of a nobleman was plucked out by command
+of the king, for having looked at one of the king's women, while bathing
+in the river. Another gentleman, wearing a sash, had his head cut round,
+because it was too large. Some he is said to throw into boiling oil,
+some to be sawn in pieces, others to have their legs cut off, or spitted
+alive, or empaled on stakes. The 25th of June, the king of Acheen sent
+our general a letter for the king of England, most beautifully written
+and painted, of which the following is a translation of the
+preamble.[94]
+
+[Footnote 94: Being merely complimentary, it has not been deemed
+necessary to give any more of this letter than the hyperbolical titles
+assumed by the petty Mallay rajah.--E.]
+
+_PEDUCKA SIRIE, Sultan, King of kings renowned in war, sole king of
+Sumatra, more famous than his ancestors, feared in his dominions, and
+honoured in all the neighbouring countries. In whom is the true image of
+a king, reigning by the true rules of government, formed as it were of
+the most pure metal, and adorned by the must splendid colours. Whose
+seat is most high and complete; whence floweth, as a river of fine
+crystal, the pure and undefiled stream of bounty and justice. Whose
+presence is like the most pure gold: King of Priaman, and of the
+mountain of gold: Lord of nine sorts of precious stones: King of two
+Umbrellas of beaten gold; who sitteth upon golden carpets; the furniture
+of whose horses, and his _own armour, are of pure gold; the teeth of his
+elephants being likewise of gold, and every thing belonging to them. His
+lances half gold half silver; his small shot of the same; a saddle also
+for an elephant of the same; a tent of silver; and all his seals half
+gold half silver. His bathing-vessels of pure gold; his sepulchre also
+entire gold, those of his predecessors being only half gold half silver.
+All the services of his table of pure gold; &c.
+
+This great king sendeth this letter of salutation to James, king of
+Great Britain, &c._
+
+This king of Acheen is a gallant-looking warrior, of middle size, and
+full of spirit. His country is populous, and he is powerful both by sea
+and land. He has many elephants, of which we saw 150 or 180 at one time.
+His gallies are well armed with brass ordnance, such as demi-cannons,
+culverins, sackers, minions, &c. His buildings are stately and spacious,
+though not strong; and his court or palace at Acheen is very pleasant,
+having a goodly branch of the main river surrounding and pervading it,
+which he cut and brought in from the distance of six miles in twenty
+days, while we were there. At taking leave, he desired our general to
+offer his compliments to the king of England, and to entreat that two
+white women might be sent him: "For," said he, "if I have a son by one
+of them, I will make him king of Priaman, Passaman, and the whole pepper
+coast; so that you shall not need to come any more to me, but may apply
+to your own English king for that commodity."
+
+Sec.2. _Notes concerning the Voyage, extracted from the Journal of Mr
+Robert Boner, who was Master of the Dragon_.
+
+The regular trade-wind is seldom met with till two or three degrees
+south of the equator. Tornados are sure to be encountered in two or
+three degrees north of the line, and sometimes even four degrees. It is
+necessary to use the utmost diligence in getting well to the south, as
+in that consists the difference between a good and bad voyage, and the
+health of the men depend greatly on that circumstance. In passing the
+line, it is proper so to direct the course from the island of Mayo as to
+cross between the longitudes of _seven_ and _nine_ degrees _west_ of the
+Lizard, if possible. At all events be careful not to come within _six_
+degrees, for fear of the calms on the coast of Guinea, and not beyond
+_ten_ degrees west from the Lizard if possible, to avoid the W.N.W.
+stream which sets along the coast of Brazil to the West Indies; and in
+crossing the line, in 7 deg., 8 deg., or 9 deg. west of the Lizard, you shall not
+fear the flats of Brazil: For the general wind in these longitudes is at
+E.S.E. or S.E. so that you may commonly make a S.S.W. course, so as to
+keep the ship full that she may go speedily through; for there is much
+loss of time in hauling the ship too close by the wind, and it is far
+better therefore to give her a fathom of the sheet.
+
+In making for the bay of Saldanha [_Table bay,_] keep between the
+latitudes of 33 deg. 50' and 34 deg. 20' of S. lat. so as to be sure of coming
+not much wide of the bay. If, on seeing the land, it appear high, you
+are then to the S.W. of the bay: if low sand-hills, you are then to the
+northward of the bay. In falling in with, the high land to the
+southward, which is between the Cape of Good Hope and the bay, the land
+trends N.N.W. and S.S.E. seven leagues from the Cape, and then trends
+away N.E. and S.W. towards the point of the Sugar-loaf, some four
+leagues. From this point of the _Sugar-loaf_ lieth _Penguin_ island; but
+keep fair by the point, as two miles from Penguin island there are two
+shoals. From the point to the island there are some seven or eight miles
+N. and S. and so, borrowing on that point, in eight or nine fathoms,
+steer a course S.E. and E.S.E. till you bring the _Table_ S.S.W. and the
+_Sugar-loaf_ S.W. by W. when you may anchor in 6 or 6 1/2 fathoms as you
+please; and then will the point of land by the _Sugar-loaf_ bear W.N.W.
+some two leagues off, and _Penguin_ island N.N.W. some three leagues
+distant. The latitude of the point going into the bay of Saldanha
+[_Table bay,_] is 34 deg. 5' S.[95] On coming in there is nothing to fear,
+though the air be thick, as the land is bold within a cable's length of
+the shore.
+
+[Footnote 95: Only 33 deg. 54'--E.]
+
+In my opinion, the current near Cape _Aguillas_ sets to the southward
+not above fifty or sixty leagues from the land: Wherefore, in going to
+the eastwards, it is right to have sixty leagues from land, so that you
+may miss that current. For 90 or 100 leagues beyond Cape _Aguillas_, the
+land trends E. by N. and not E.N.E. as in the charts.
+
+In my opinion the gulf of Cambaya is the worst place in all India for
+worms; wherefore ships going to Surat ought to use every precaution
+against injury from them. At Acheen our general was denominated
+_Arancaya Pattee_ by the king, who showed him extraordinary favour,
+sending for him to be present at all sports and pastimes; and all our
+men were very kindly used by the people at this place, more so than any
+strangers who had ever been there before.
+
+
+Sec.3. _Extracts from a Treatise, written by Mr Nicholas Whittington, who
+was left as Factor in the Mogul Country by Captain Best, containing some
+of his Travels and Adventures_.
+
+The sheep at the Cape of Good Hope are covered with hair instead of
+wool. The beeves are large, but mostly lean. The natives of that
+southern extremity of Africa are negroes, having woolly heads, flat
+noses, and straight well-made bodies. The men have only one testicle,
+the other being cut out when very young.[96] Their apparel consists of a
+skin hung from their shoulders, reaching to their waist, and two small
+rat-skins, one before and the other behind, and all the rest of their
+body naked, except a kind of skin or leather-cap on their heads, and
+soles tied to their feet, considerably longer and broader than the foot.
+Their arms are very scanty, consisting of bows and arrows of very little
+force, and lances or darts very artificially made, in the use of which
+they are very expert, and even with them kill many fish. They are in use
+to wear the guts of sheep and oxen hanging from their necks, smelling
+most abominably, which they eat when hungry, and would scramble for our
+garbage like so many dogs, devouring it quite raw and foul.
+
+[Footnote 96: Captain Saris told me that some have two; but these are of
+the baser sort and slaves, as he was told by one of these marked by this
+note of gentility.--_Purch._]
+
+At Surat, although Sir Henry Middleton had taken their ships in the Red
+Sea, they promised to deal fairly with us, considering that otherwise
+they might burn their ships and give over all trade by sea, as _Mill
+Jaffed_, one of the chief merchants of Surat, acknowledged to us. While
+at Surat, every one of us that remained any time ashore was afflicted
+with the flux, of which Mr Aldworth was ill for forty days. The custom
+here is, that all strangers make presents on visiting any persons of
+condition, and they give other presents in return.
+
+Finding it impossible to have any trade at Surat, as the Portuguese
+craft infested the mouth of the river, our general removed with the
+ships to Swally roads, whence we might go and come by land without
+danger, between that place and Surat. Mr Canning had been made prisoner
+by the Portuguese, but the viceroy ordered him to be set ashore at
+Surat, saying, "Let him go and help his countrymen to fight, for we
+shall take their ships and all of them together." He was accordingly
+liberated, and came to us at Swally. The purser had likewise been nearly
+taken; but he escaped and got on board. The 3d October, _Seikh Shuffe_,
+governor of _Amadavar_, [Ahmedabad], the chief city of Guzerat, came to
+Surat and thence to Swally, where he entered into articles of agreement
+for trade and friendship.
+
+The 29th of October, four Portuguese galleons and a whole fleet of
+frigates, or armed grabs, hove in sight. Our general went immediately to
+meet them in the Dragon, and fired not one shot till he came between
+their admiral and vice-admiral, when he gave each of them a broadside
+and a volley of small arms, which made them come no nearer for that day.
+The other two galleons were not as yet come up, and our consort the
+Hosiander could not get clear of her anchors, so that she did not fire a
+shot that day. In the evening both sides came to anchor in the sight of
+each other. Next morning the fight was renewed, and this day the
+Hosiander bravely redeemed her yesterday's inactivity. The Dragon drove
+three of them aground, and the Hosiander so _danced the hay_ about them,
+that they durst never show a man above hatches. They got afloat in the
+afternoon with the tide of flood, and renewed the fight till evening,
+and then anchored till next day. Next day, as the Dragon drew much
+water, and the bay was shallow, we removed to the other side of the bay
+at _Mendafrobay_, [Jaffrabat], where _Sardar Khan_, a great nobleman of
+the Moguls, was then besieging a castle of the _Rajaputs_, who, before
+the Mogul conquest, were the nobles of that country, and were now
+subsisting by robbery. He presented our general with a horse and
+furniture, which he afterwards gave to the governor of Gogo, a poor town
+to the west of Surat.
+
+After ten days stay, the Portuguese having refreshed, came hither to
+attack us. Sardar Khan advised our general to flee; but in four hours we
+drove them out of sight, in presence of thousands of the country people.
+After the razing of this castle, Sardar Khan reported this gallant
+action to the Great Mogul, who much admired it, as he thought none were
+like the Portuguese at sea. We returned to Swally on the 27th December,
+having only lost three men in action, and one had his arm shot off:
+while the Portuguese acknowledged to have lost 160, though report said
+their loss exceeded 300 men.
+
+The 13th January, 1613, I was appointed factor for the worshipful
+company, and bound under a penalty of four hundred pounds. Our ships
+departed on the 18th, the galleons not offering to disturb them: and at
+this time Anthony Starkey was ordered for England. Mr Canning was
+seventy days in going from Surat to Agra, during which journey he
+encountered many troubles, having been attacked by the way, and shot in
+the belly with an arrow, while another Englishman in his company was
+shot through the arm, and many of his peons were killed and wounded. Two
+of his English attendants quitted him, and returned to Surat, leaving
+only two musicians to attend upon him. He arrived at Agra on the 9th
+April, when he presented our king's letter to the Great Mogul, together
+with a present of little value; and being asked if this present came
+from our king, he answered that it only came from the merchants. The
+Mogul honoured him with a cup of wine from his own hand, and then
+referred him, on the business of his embassy, to Morak Khan. One of his
+musicians died, and was buried in the church-yard belonging to the
+Portuguese, who took up the body, and buried it in the highway; but on
+this being complained of to the king, they were commanded to bury him
+again, on penalty of being all banished the country, and of having all
+the bodies of their own dead thrown out from the church-yard. After
+this, Mr Canning wrote that he was in fear of being poisoned by the
+jesuits, and requested to have some one sent up to his assistance, which
+was accordingly agreed to by us at Surat. But Mr Canning; died on the
+29th of May, and Mr Kerridge went up on the 22d of June.
+
+At this time I was to have been sent by the way of Mokha to England; but
+the master of the ship said it was impossible, except I were
+circumcised, to go so near Mecca. The 13th October, 1613, the ship
+returned, and our messenger made prisoner at the bar of Surat by the
+Portuguese armed frigates, [grabs] worth an hundred thousand pounds, and
+seven hundred persons going to Goa.[97] This is likely to be of great
+injury here, for no Portuguese is now permitted to pass either in or out
+without a surety; and the Surat merchants are so impoverished, that our
+goods are left on our hands, so that we had to send them to Ahmedabad.
+John Alkin, who deserted from Sir Henry Middleton to the Portuguese,
+came to us at this time, and told us that several of their towns were
+besieged by the Decaners, and other neighbouring Moors, so that they
+had to send away many hundred Banians and others, that dwelt among them,
+owing to want of provisions; and indeed three barks came now with these
+people to Surat, and others of them went to Cambaya. Their weak
+behaviour in the sea-fight with us was the cause of all this.
+
+[Footnote 97: Probably owing to careless abridgement by Purchas, this
+passage is quite unintelligible. The meaning seems to be, That the ship
+in which was the English messenger, having a cargo worth 100,000_l_.
+sterling, and 700 persons aboard, bound on the pilgrimage to Mecca, was
+taken and carried into Goa.--E.]
+
+About this time also, Robert Claxon of the Dragon, who had deserted to
+the Portuguese for fear of punishment, came to us accompanied by a
+German who had been a slave among the Turks. One Robert Johnson, who was
+with the Portuguese, and meant to have come to us, was persuaded by
+another Englishman, while passing through the Decan, to turn mussulman,
+and remain in that country, where he got an allowance of seven shillings
+and sixpence a-day from the king, and his diet from the king's table.
+But he died eight days after being circumcised. Robert Trully, the
+musician, fell out with Mr Kerridge at Agra, and went to the king of
+Decan, carrying a German with him as interpreter. They both offered to
+turn Mahometans, and Trully, getting a new name at his circumcision,
+received a great allowance from the king, in whose service he continues;
+but the German, who had been, formerly circumcised in Persia, and now
+thought to have deceived the king, was not entertained; whereupon he
+returned to Agra, where he serves a Frenchman, and now goes to mass.
+Robert Claxon, above mentioned, had also turned Mahometan in the Decan,
+with a good allowance at court; but, not being contented, he came to
+Surat, where he was pitied by us for his seeming penitence; but being
+entrusted with upwards of forty pounds, under pretence of making
+purchases, he gave us the slip and returned to the Decan. Thus there are
+at present four English renegadoes in the Decan, besides many
+Portuguese. The 27th October, 1613, we received letters sent by Mr
+Gurney of Masulipatam, written by Captain Marlow of the ship Janus,
+informing us of his arrival and trade at that place.
+
+From Surat I went to _Periano_? three _coss_; thence to Cossumba, a
+small village, ten _coss_; and thence to Broach, ten _coss_. This is a
+very pretty city on a high hill, encompassed by a strong wall, and
+having a river running by as large as the Thames, in which were several
+ships of two hundred tons and upwards. Here are the best calicoes in the
+kingdom of Guzerat, and great store of cotton. From thence I went to
+_Saninga_ [Sarang], ten coss; to _Carrou_? ten c. and then fourteen c.
+to _Boldia_ [Brodrah], a smaller city than Broach, but well built,
+having a strong wall, and garrisoned by 3000 horse under _Mussuff Khan_.
+I went thence ten c. to a river named, the _Wussach_, [the Mahy?] where
+Mussuff was about to engage with the rajaputs who lay on the opposite
+side of the river, the chief of whom was of the race of the former kings
+of Surat. Thence other fourteen coss to _Niriand_,[Nariad] a large town
+where they make indigo; and thence, ten c. more to _Amadabar_, or
+Ahmedabad, the chief city of Guzerat, nearly as large as London,
+surrounded by a strong wall, and seated in a plain by the side of the
+river Mehindry. There are here many merchants, Mahometans, Pagans, and
+Christians; with great abundance of merchandize, which chiefly are
+indigo, cloth of gold, silver tissue, velvets, but nothing comparable to
+ours, taffeties, _gumbucks_, coloured _baffaties_, drugs, &c. _Abdalla
+Khan_ is governor of this place, who has the rank and pay of a commander
+of 5000 horse. From, thence, on my way to Cambay, I went seven c. to
+_Barengeo_, [Baregia] where every Tuesday a _cafilla_ or caravan of
+merchants and travellers meet to go to Cambay, keeping together in a
+large company to protect themselves from robbers. From thence sixteen c.
+we came to Soquatera, a fine town with a strong garrison; whence we
+departed about midnight, and got to Cambay about eight next morning, the
+distance being ten _coss_.
+
+In November, we rode to _Sarkess_, three coss from Ahmedabad, where are
+the sepulchres of the Guzerat kings, the church and handsome tombs being
+kept in fine order, and many persons resort to see them from all parts
+of the kingdom. At the distance of a coss, there is a pleasant house
+with a large garden, a mile round, on the banks of the river, which
+_Chon-Chin-Naw_,[98] the greatest of the Mogul nobles, built in memory
+of the great victory he gained at this place over the last king of
+Guzerat, in which he took the king prisoner, and subjugated the kingdom.
+No person inhabits this house, and its orchard is kept by a few poor
+men. We lodged here one night, and sent for six fishermen, who in half
+an hour caught more fish for us than all our company could eat.
+
+[Footnote 98: This name seems strangely corrupted, more resembling the
+name of a Chinese leader than of a Mogul Khan or Amir. Perhaps it ought
+to have been Khan-Khanna.--E.]
+
+The 28th November, we received intelligence at Ahmedabad, that three
+English ships had arrived at _Larry Bunder_, the port town of
+_Guta-Negar-Tutla_, [Tatta] the chief city of _Sindy_. I was sent
+thither, and came on the 13th December to _Cassumparo_, where I overtook
+a cafilla or caravan travelling to _Rahdunpoor_, six days journey on my
+way. We went thence to _Callitalouny_, a fair castle; thence seven c. to
+_Callwalla_, a pretty village, given by the emperor Akbar to a company
+of women and their posterity for ever, to bring up their children in
+dancing and music. They exhibited their talents to our caravan, and
+every man made them some present, and then they openly asked if any of
+us wanted bedfellows. On the 16th we went eight _coss_ to _Cartya_,
+where is a well-garrisoned fortress. We remained here till the 18th,
+waiting for another caravan for fear of thieves, and then went to
+_Deccanaura_,[99] on which day our camel was stolen and one of our men
+was slain. The 19th we travelled ten c. to _Bollodo_, a fort held by
+_Newlock Abram Cabrate_ for the Mogul, and who that day brought in 169
+heads of the Coolies, a plundering tribe. The 20th in thirteen c. we
+came to a fort named _Sariandgo_, and the 21st in ten c. we arrived at
+_Rhadunpoor_, a large town with a fort. We remained here till the 23d,
+to provide water and other necessaries for our journey through the
+desert.
+
+[Footnote 99: It singularly happens, in the excellent map of Hindoostan
+by Arrowsmith, that none of the stages between Ahmedabad and Rahdunpoor
+are laid down, unless possibly _Decabarah_ of the map may be _Decanauru_
+of the text; while Mr Arrowsmith actually inserts on his map the route
+of Whittington across the sandy desert of Cutch, between Rahdunpoor and
+the eastern branch of the Indus, or _Nulla Sunkra_, and thence through
+the Delta to Tatta.--E.]
+
+The 23d, leaving Rhadunpoor, we travelled seven coss, and lay all night
+in the fields, having that day met a caravan coming from Tatta that had
+been plundered of every thing. On the 24th I sent off one of my peons
+with a letter to Larry Bunder, who promised to be there in ten days, but
+I think he was slain by the way; we went twelve c. that day. The 25th we
+travelled fourteen c. and lodged by a well, the water of which was so
+salt that our cattle would not drink it. The 26th ten c. to such
+another well, where our camels took water, not having had any for three
+days. The 27th after fourteen c. we lodged on the ground; and the 28th,
+in ten c. we came to a village called _Negar Parkar_. In this desert we
+saw great numbers, of wild asses, red deer, foxes, and other wild
+animals. We stopt all the 29th, and met another caravan, that had been
+robbed within two days journey of Tatta. _Parkar_ pays tribute yearly to
+the Mogul; but all the people from thence to _Inno_, half a day's
+journey from Tatta, acknowledge no king, but rob and spare at their
+pleasure. When any of the Moguls come among them, they set their own
+houses on fire, and flee into the mountains; and as their houses are
+only built of straw and mortar, they are soon rebuilt. They exact
+customs at their pleasure, and even guard passengers through the desert,
+not willing they should be robbed by any but themselves. The 30th we
+left Parkar, and after travelling six coss, we lay at a tank or pond of
+fresh water. The 31st we travelled eight c. and lay in the fields beside
+a brackish well. The 1st January, 1614, we went ten c. to _Burdiano_,
+and though many were sick of this water, we had to provide ourselves
+with a supply for four days. The 2d we travelled all night eighteen c.
+The 3d, from afternoon till midnight, we went ten c. The 4th twelve c.
+This day I fell sick and vomited, owing to the bad water. The 5th, after
+seven c. we came to three wells, two of them salt and one sweetish. The
+6th, having travelled ten c. we came to _Nuraquimire_, a pretty town,
+where our company from Rhadunpoor left us. We who remained were two
+merchants and myself with five of their servants, four of mine, ten
+camels, and five camel-drivers.
+
+This town of _Nuraquimire_ is within three days journey of Tatta, and to
+us, after coming out of the desert, seemed quite a paradise. We agreed
+with a kinsman of the Rajah, or governor, for twenty _laries_, or
+shillings, to conduct us on the remainder of our journey. We accordingly
+departed on the 8th, and travelled ten c. to _Gaundajaw_, where we had
+been robbed but for our guard. The 9th we were twice set upon, and
+obliged to give each time five _laries_ to get free. We came to
+_Sarruna_, a great town of the _rajputs_ with a castle, fourteen _coss_
+from Tatta. We visited the governor, _Ragee Bouma_, eldest son to sultan
+_Bulbul_, who was lately captured by the Moguls and had his eyes pulled
+out, yet had escaped about two months ago, and was now living in the
+mountains inviting all his kindred to revenge. The _Ragee_ treated me
+kindly as a stranger, asking me many questions about my country. He
+even made me sup with him, and gave me much wine, in which he so
+heartily partook, that he stared again. A banian at this place told me
+that Sir Robert Sherly had been much abused by the Portuguese and the
+governor of _Larry Bunder_, having his house set on fire, and his men
+much hurt in the night; and that on his arrival at Tatta, thirteen days
+journey from thence, he had been unkindly used by the governor of that
+city. He likewise told me of the great trade carried on at Tatta, and
+that ships of 300 tons might be brought up to Larry Bunder; and advised
+me to prevail upon _Ragee Bouma_ to escort us to Tatta.
+
+According to this bad advice, we hired the _Ragee_ for forty _laries_ to
+escort us with fifty horsemen to the gates of Tatta. We departed from
+_Sarruna_ on the 11th January, and having travelled five coss we lay all
+night by the side of a river. Departing at two next morning, the Ragee
+led us in a direction quite different from our right road, and came
+about daybreak into a thicket, where he made us all be disarmed and
+bound, and immediately strangled the two merchants and their five men by
+means of their camel ropes. After stripping them of all their clothes,
+he caused their bodies to be flung into a hole dug on purpose. He then
+took my horse and eighty rupees from me, and sent me and my men up the
+mountains to his brothers, at the distance of twenty coss, where we
+arrived on the 14th, and where I remained twenty days a close prisoner.
+On the 7th February, an order came to send me to _Parkar_, the governor
+of which place was of their kindred, and that I should be sent from
+thence to Rhadunpoor; but I was plundered on the way of my clothes and
+every thing else about me, my horse only being left me, which was not
+worth taking away.
+
+Arriving at Parkar on the 28th February, and finding the inhabitants
+charitable, we were reduced to the necessity of begging victuals; and
+actually procured four mahmoodies by that means, equal to as many
+shillings. But having the good fortune to meet a banian of Ahmedabad,
+whom I had formerly known, he relieved me and my men. We were five days
+in travelling from Parkar to Rhadunpoor, where I arrived on the 19th
+March, and went thence to Ahmedabad on the 2d April, after an absence of
+111 days. Thence to Brodia and Barengeo, thence sixteen c. to Soquatera,
+and ten c. to Cambay. We here crossed the large river, which is seven
+coss in breadth,[100] and where many hundreds are swallowed up yearly.
+On the other side of the river we came to _Saurau_,[101] where is a town
+and castle of the _razbootches_ or rajputs. The 16th of April I
+travelled twenty-five coss to Broach. The 17th I passed the river
+[Narbuddah], and went ten c. to _Cossumba_; and on the 18th thirteen c.
+to Surat.
+
+[Footnote 100: The great river in the text is assuredly the upper part
+of the gulf of Cambay, where the tide sets in with prodigious rapidity,
+entering almost at once with a vast wave or bore, as described on a
+former occasion in the Portuguese voyages.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 101: Probably Sarrode, on the south side of the entry of the
+river Mahy.--E.]
+
+According to general report, there is no city of greater trade in all
+the Indies than Tatta in Sinde; its chief port being Larry Bunder, three
+days journey nearer the mouth of the river. There is a good road without
+the river's mouth, said to be free from worms; which, about Surat
+especially, and in other parts of India, are in such abundance, that
+after three or four months riding, were it not for the sheathing, ships
+would be rendered incapable of going to sea. The ports and roads of
+Sinde are said to be free. From Tatta they go in two months by water to
+Lahore, and return down the river in one. The commodities there are
+_baffatys_, stuffs, _lawns_ [muslins], coarse indigo, not so good as
+that of Biana. Goods, may be carried from Agra on camels in twenty days
+to _Bucker_ on the river Indus, and thence in fifteen or sixteen days
+aboard the ships at the mouth of the Indus. One may travel as soon from
+Agra to Sinde as to Surat, but there is more thieving on the Sinde road,
+in spite of every effort of the Mogul government to prevent it.
+
+The inhabitants of Sinde consist mostly of Rajputs, Banians, and
+Baloches, the governors of the cities and large towns being Moguls. The
+country people are rude; going naked from the waist upwards, and wear
+turbans quite different from the fashion of the Moguls. Their arms are
+swords, bucklers, and lances; their bucklers being large and shaped like
+bee-hives, in which they are in use to give their camels drink, and
+their horses provender. Their horses are good, strong, and swift, and
+though unshod, they ride them furiously, backing them at a year old. The
+Rajputs eat no beef or buffalo flesh, even worshipping them; and the
+Moguls say that the Rajputs know how to die as well as any in the world.
+The Banians kill nothing, and are said to be divided into more than
+thirty different casts, that differ somewhat among them in matters of
+religion, and may not eat with each other. All burn their dead; and when
+the husband dies, the widow shaves her head, and wears her jewels no
+more, continuing this state of mourning as long as she lives.
+
+When a Rajput dies, his wife accompanies his body to the funeral pile in
+her best array, attended by all her friends and kindred, and by music.
+When the funeral pile is set on fire, she walks round it two or three
+times, bewailing the death of her husband, and then rejoicing that she
+is now to live with him again: After which, embracing her friends, she
+sits down on the top of the pile among dry wood, taking her husband's
+head on her lap, and orders fire to be put to the pile; which done, her
+friends throw oil upon her and sweet perfumes, while she endures the
+fire with wonderful fortitude, loose not bound. I have seen many
+instances of this. The first I ever saw was at Surat, the widow being a
+virgin of ten years old, and her affianced husband being a soldier slain
+in the wars at a distance, whence his clothes and turban were sent to
+her, and she insisted on burning herself along with these. The governor
+refused to give her permission, which she took grievously to heart, and
+insisted on being burnt; but they durst not, till her kindred procured
+leave by giving the governor a present, to her great joy. The kindred of
+the husband never force this, but the widow esteems it a disgrace to her
+family not to comply with this custom, which they may refrain from if
+they choose: But then they must shave their heads, and break all their
+ornaments, and are never afterwards allowed to eat, drink, sleep, or
+keep company with any one all the rest of their lives. If, after
+agreeing to burn, a woman should leap out of the fire, her own parents
+would bind her and throw her in again by force; but this weakness is
+seldom seen.
+
+The Banian marriages are made at the age of three years or even under;
+and two pregnant women sometimes enter into mutual promises, if one of
+their children should prove male and the other female, to unite them in
+marriage. But these marriages are always in the same cast and religion,
+and in the same trade and occupation; as the son of a barber with the
+daughter of a barber, and so on. When the affianced couple reach three
+years of age, the parents make a great feast, and set the young couple
+on horseback dressed in their best clothes, a man sitting behind each to
+hold them on. They are then led about the city in procession, according
+to their state and condition, accompanied by bramins or priests and many
+others, who conduct them to the pagoda or temple; and after going
+through certain ceremonies there, they are led home, and feasts are
+given for several days, as they are able. When ten years of age, the
+marriage is consummated. The reason they assign for these early
+marriages is, that they may not be left wifeless, in case their parents
+should die. Their bramins are esteemed exceedingly holy, and have the
+charge of their pagodas or idol temples, having alms and tithes for
+their maintenance; yet they marry, and follow occupations, being good
+workmen and ready to learn any pattern. They eat but once a day, washing
+their whole bodies before and after meat, and use ablutions after the
+natural evacuations.
+
+The _Baloches_ are Mahometans, who deal much in camels, and are mostly
+robbers by land or on the rivers, murdering all they rob; yet are there
+very honest men among them in Guzerat and about Agra. While I was in
+Sinde, they took a boat with seven Italians and a Portuguese friar, all
+the rest being slain in fight. This was ripped up by them in search of
+gold.[102]
+
+[Footnote 102: This is obscurely expressed, leaving it uncertain _what_
+was ripped up in search of gold: The boat, the bodies of the slain, or
+the prisoners.--E.]
+
+John Mildnall, or Mildenhall, an Englishman, had been employed with
+three other young Englishmen, whom he poisoned in Persia, to make
+himself master of the goods. He was himself also poisoned, yet, by means
+of preservatives, he lived many months afterwards, though exceedingly
+swelled, and so came to Agra with the value of 20,000 dollars. On this
+occasion I went from Surat for Agra, on the 14th May, 1614. I arrived
+first at _Bramport_, [Bushanpoor] where Sultan _Parvis_ lives, situated
+in a plain on the river _Taptee_ or of Surat, which is there of great
+breadth, and at this place there is a large castle. Thence I went to
+Agra in twenty-six days, having travelled the whole way from Surat to
+Agra, which is 700 coss or 1010 English miles, in thirty-seven days of
+winter, during which time it rained almost continually. From Surat to
+Burhanpoor is a pleasant champain country, well watered with rivers,
+brooks, and springs. Between Burhanpoor and Agra the country is very
+mountainous, not passable with a coach, and scarcely to be travelled on
+camels. The nearest way is by _Mando_, passing many towns and cities on
+every day's journey, with many high hills and strong castles, the whole
+country being well inhabited, very peaceable, and clear of thieves.
+
+Agra is a very large town, its wall being two coss in circuit, the
+fairest and highest I ever saw, and well replenished with ordnance; the
+rest of the city being ruinous, except the houses of the nobles, which
+are pleasantly situated on the river. The ancient royal seat was
+_Fatipoor_, twelve coss from Agra, but is now fallen into decay. Between
+these two is the sepulchre of the king's father, to which nothing I ever
+saw is comparable: yet the church or mosque of _Fatipoor_ comes near it,
+both being built according to the rules of architecture. In Agra the
+Jesuits have a house and a handsome church, built by the Great Mogul,
+who allows their chief seven rupees a-day, and all the rest three, with
+licence to convert as many as they can: But alas! these converts were
+only for the sake of money; for when, by order of the Portuguese, the
+new converts were deprived of their pay, they brought back their beads
+again, saying they had been long without pay, and would be Christians no
+longer. In consequence of the Portuguese refusing to deliver back the
+goods taken at Surat, the king ordered the church doors to be locked up
+and they have so continued ever since; so the _padres_ make a church of
+one of their chambers, where they celebrate mass twice a day, and preach
+every Sunday, first in Persian to the Armenians and Moors, and
+afterwards in Portuguese for themselves, the Italians, and Greeks.
+
+By them I was informed of the particulars of Mildenhall's goods, who had
+given them all to a French protestant, though himself a papist, that he
+might marry a bastard daughter he had left in Persia, and bring up
+another. The Frenchman refusing to make restitution, was thrown into
+prison and after four months all was delivered up.
+
+Between Agumere and Agra, at every ten _coss_, being an ordinary day's
+journey, there is a _Serai_ or lodging house for men and horses, with
+hostesses to dress your victuals if you please, paying a matter of
+three-pence for dressing provisions both for man and horse. And between
+these two places, which are 120 coss distant, there is a pillar erected
+at every _coss_, and a fair house every ten coss, built by Akbar, on
+occasion of making a pilgrimage on foot from Agra to Agimere, saying his
+prayers at the end of every coss. These houses serve for accommodating
+the king and his women, no one else being allowed to use them. The king
+resides at Agimere on occasion of wars with _Rabna_, a rajput chief, who
+has now done homage, so that there is peace between them. I made an
+excursion to the Ganges, which is two days journey from Agra. The
+Banians carry the water of the Ganges to the distance of many hundred
+miles, affirming that it never corrupts, though kept for any length of
+time. A large river, called the _Geminie_ [Jumna], passes by Agra.
+
+On the 24th of May, 1616, while on our voyage home to England, we went
+into Suldunha bay, where were several English ships outwards bound,
+namely, the Charles, Unicorn, Janus, Globe, and Swan, the general being
+Mr Benjamin Joseph. We arrived safe at Dover on the 15th September,
+1616.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+John Mildenhall, mentioned in the foregoing article, left England on the
+12th February, 1600, and went by Constantinople, Scanderoon, Aleppo,
+Bir, Caracmit, Bitelis, Cashbin, Ispahan, Yezd, Kerman, and Sigistan, to
+Candhar; and thence to Lahore, where he arrived in 1603. He appears to
+have carried letters from Queen Elizabeth to the Great Mogul, by whom he
+was well received, and procured from him letters of privilege for trade
+in the Mogul dominions. He thence returned into Persia, whence he wrote
+to one Mr Richard Staper from Cashbin, on the 3d October, 1606, giving
+some account of his travels, and of his negociations at the court of the
+Mogul. This letter, and a short recital of the first two years of his
+peregrinations, are published in the Pilgrims, vol. I. pp. 114--116, but
+have not been deemed of sufficient importance for insertion in this
+collection.--E.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION XIX.
+
+_Eleventh Voyage of the East India Company, in 1612, in the
+Salomon_.[103]
+
+
+We sailed from Gravesend on the 1st February, 1611, according to the
+computation of the church of England, or 1612 as reckoned by others. We
+were four ships in company, which were counted as three separate
+voyages, because directed to several parts of India: The James, which
+was reckoned the _ninth_ voyage, the Dragon and Hosiander the _tenth_,
+and our ship, the Salomon, as the _eleventh_.
+
+[Footnote 103: Purch. Pilgr. I. 486. This unimportant voyage is only
+preserved, for the sake of continuing the regular series of voyages
+which contributed to the establishment of the East India Company. We
+learn from Purchas that it was written by Ralph Wilson, one of the mates
+in the Salomon, who never mentions the name of his captain. This voyage,
+as given by Purchas, contains very little information, and is therefore
+here abridged, though not extending to two folio pages in the
+Pilgrims.--E.]
+
+I would advise such as go from Saldanha bay with the wind at E. or S.E.
+to get to a considerable distance from the land before standing
+southwards, as otherwise the high lands at the Cape will take the wind
+from them; and if becalmed, one may be much troubled, as there is
+commonly in these parts a heavy sea coming from the west. Likewise, the
+current sets in for the shore, if the wind has been at N.N.W. or W. or
+S.S.W. And also the shore is so bold that no anchorage can be had.
+
+The 18th October, we espied the land, being near _Celeber_ in the island
+of Sumatra, in about 3 deg. of south latitude. The 2d November, coming
+between Java and a ragged island to the westwards of the point of
+_Palimbangan_, we met a great tide running out so fast that we could
+hardly stem it with the aid of a stiff gale. When afterwards the gale
+slacked, we came to anchor, and I found the tide to run three 1/2
+leagues in one watch. I noticed that this tide set outwards during the
+day, and inwards through the night. This day at noon the point of
+Palimbangan bore N.E. by E. three leagues off, and from thence to the
+road of Bantam is five leagues, S.S.E. 1/3 E. The latitude of Bantam is
+6 deg. 10' S. and the long. 145 deg. 2' E. This however is rather too much
+easterly, as I think the true longitude of Bantam is 144 deg. E. from
+Flores.[104]
+
+[Footnote 104: The long. of Bantam is 106 deg. E. from Greenwich. That in
+the text appears to have been estimated from the island of Flores, which
+is 31 deg. 20' W. from Greenwich, so that the longitude of Bantam ought to
+have been stated as 137 deg. 20' E. from Flores, making an error of excess
+in the text of seven or eight degrees.--E.]
+
+The 7th March, at five p.m. while in lat. 20 deg. 34' S. we descried land
+nine leagues off, N.E. 1/2 N. The S.E. part of this island is somewhat
+high, but falleth down with a low point. The W. part is not very high,
+but flat and smooth towards the end, and falls right down. The south and
+west parts of this island is all surrounded with shoals and broken
+ground, and we did not see the other sides; yet it seemed as if it had
+good refreshments. The longitude of this island is 104 deg. from Flores, but
+by my computation 107 deg..[105] In these long voyages, we do not rely
+altogether on our reckoning, but use our best diligence for discovering
+the true longitudes, which are of infinite importance to direct our
+course aright.
+
+[Footnote 105: No island is to be found in the latitude and longitude
+indicated in the text.--E.]
+
+
+
+SECTION XX.
+
+_The Twelfth Voyage of the East India Company, in 1613, by Captain
+Christopher Newport_.[106]
+
+
+The full title of this voyage, as given in the Pilgrims, is as
+follows:--"A Journal of all principal Matters passed in the Twelfth
+Voyage to the East India, observed by me _Walter Payton_, in the good
+ship the _Expedition_.--Whereof Mr _Christopher Newport_ was captain,
+being set out _Anno_ 1612. Written by the said _Walter Payton_." The
+date of the year of this voyage, according to our present mode of
+computation, was 1613, as formerly explained at large, the year being
+then computed to commence on the 25th March, instead of the 1st
+January.--E.
+
+[Footnote 106: Purch. Pilgr. I. 488.]
+
+Sec.1. _Observations at St Augustine, Mohelia, and divers Parts of Arabia_.
+
+The 7th January, 1613, we sailed from Gravesend for India, in the good
+ship Expedition of London, about the burden of 260 tons, and carrying
+fifty-six persons; besides the Persian ambassador and his suite, of whom
+there were fifteen persons, whom we were ordered to transport to the
+kingdom of Persia, at the cost of the worshipful company. The names of
+the ambassador and his people were these. Sir Robert Sherley the
+ambassador, and his lady, named Teresha, a Circassian; Sir Thomas
+Powell, and his lady, called Tomasin, a Persian; a Persian woman, named
+Leylye; Mr Morgan Powell; Captain John Ward; Mr Francis Bubb, secretary;
+Mr John Barbar, apothecary; John Herriot, a musician; John Georgson,
+goldsmith, a Dutchman; Gabriel, an old Armenian; and three Persians,
+named Nazerbeg, Scanderbeg, and Molhter.
+
+In the morning of the 26th April; we fell in with a part of the land of
+Ethiopia, [Southern Africa,] close adjoining to which is a small island,
+called _Conie island_, [Dassen island] all low land, and bordered by
+many dangerous rocks to seawards. It is in the lat. of 33 deg. 30' S. The
+wind falling short, we were constrained to anchor between that island
+and the main, where we had very good ground in nineteen or twenty
+fathoms. We sent our boat to the island, where we found Penguins, geese,
+and other fowls, and seals in great abundance; of all which we took as
+many as we pleased for our refreshment. By a carved board, we observed
+that the Hollanders had been there, who make great store of train-oil
+from the seals. They had left behind them the implements of their work,
+together with a great copper cauldron standing on a furnace, the
+cauldron being full of oil; all which we left as we found them.
+
+Having spent two days here at anchor, and the wind coming favourable, we
+weighed and proceeded for the Cape of Good Hope, and arrived, by God's
+grace, at Saldanha on the 30th of April, where we found six ships at
+anchor. Two of these, the Hector and James, were English, and the other
+four Hollanders, all homeward bound. We here watered, and refreshed
+ourselves well with reasonable abundance of the country sheep and
+beeves, which were bought from the natives, and plenty of fresh fish,
+which we caught with our seyne. The 10th May the Pepper-corn arrived
+here, likewise homewards bound; and as she was but ill provided with
+necessaries, we supplied her from our scanty store as well as we could
+spare.
+
+Being all ready to depart with the first fair wind, which, happened on
+the 15th May, we then sailed altogether from the bay, taking leave
+according to the custom of the sea, and we directed our course for St
+Augustine. In our way we had sight of _Capo do Arecife_,[107] part of
+the main land of Africa, in lat. 33 deg. 25' S. on the 24th May, the compass
+there varying 6 deg. 9'. The 15th June we got sight of the island of St
+Lawrence or Madagascar, and on the 17th came to anchor close beside port
+St Augustine, meaning to search the soundings and entrance into the bay
+before we went in, as there was no one in the ship well acquainted with
+it. Having done this, we went in next day, and came to anchor in ten
+fathoms, yet our ship rode in forty fathoms. We had here wood and
+water, and great abundance of fresh fish, which we caught in such
+quantities with the seyne as might have served for six ships companies,
+instead of our own. But we could get no cattle from the natives, who
+seemed to be afraid of us; for, though they came once to us, and
+promised to bring us cattle next day, they seemed to have said so as a
+cover for driving away their cattle, in which they were employed in the
+interim, and they came no more near us. Some days after, we marched into
+the woods with forty musketeers, to endeavour to discover some of the
+natives, that we might buy cattle; but we only found empty houses, made
+of canes, whence we could see the people had only gone away very
+recently, as their fires were still burning, and the scales of fish they
+had been broiling were lying about. We also saw the foot-marks of many
+cattle, which had been there not long before, and had to return empty
+handed.
+
+[Footnote 107: The latitude in the text indicates Burtrenhook, near the
+mouth of the Groot river, this being probably the Dutch name, while that
+in the text is the Portuguese.--E.]
+
+The entry into the port of St Augustine resembles that of Dartmouth
+haven; and on going in, you must bring the wood, called
+Westminster-hall, to which it has some resemblance, to bear N.E. by E.
+and then steer due E. borrowing a little towards the south side of the
+bay, where your soundings will be thirteen, nine, eight, and seven
+fathoms, all good ground, till you be shut within the shoal. After this
+you have deep water till you come into the road, and then have seven,
+eight, and ten fathoms. But if you go too far behind the hill on the
+larboard hand, which resembles an old barn, you shall then have thirty
+and forty fathoms. St Augustine is in lat 23 deg. 30' S. the var. being 15 deg.
+40'.[108]
+
+[Footnote 108: Long. 44 deg. 20' E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+We sailed from St Augustine on the 23d June, directing our course for
+the island of Mohelia, and on the 3d July we had sight of an island
+called Juan, nine or ten leagues E. by S. from Mohelia. We came also
+this day to anchor at Mohelia, between it and some broken land off its
+southern side. We had here great abundance of refreshments, and very
+cheap; for we bought five bullocks in exchange for one Levant sword, and
+had goats, hens, pine-apples, cocoa-nuts, plantains, oranges, lemons,
+and limes, for trifles worth little. Such bullocks as we had for money
+cost a dollar each, or ten pieces of 4-1/2d.; at which rate we
+purchased forty-one beeves. The natives of this island are chiefly Moors
+[negroes], but there are Arabians, Turks, and others also among them;
+and they are much engaged in wars with the people of _Juan_, [Hinznan or
+Johanna,] and Comoro islands in their neighbourhood. They told us that
+the king of the island died the day we arrived, being succeeded by his
+son, _Phanehomale_, who was only of tender years, and was to reign under
+the protection of the queen his mother. His brother-in-law, as chief
+man, accompanied by several other people of condition, came down to bid
+us welcome, and used us very kindly. Both he and many others of the
+islanders spoke tolerably good Portuguese, so that I had much
+conversation with them, and was informed of every thing I wished to
+know.
+
+In this island they build barks, in which they trade along the coast of
+Melinda and Arabia, disposing of slaves and fruit, by which means they
+supply themselves with dollars, and with such articles as they need. I
+suspect also that they have some dealings with the Portuguese, but they
+would not let us know this, lest we might suspect them of treachery.
+They told me that we were welcome, and that the whole island was at our
+command to do us service; but, if we had been Portuguese, they would
+have put us all to the sword. In my opinion, however, it would be
+dangerous to repose too much confidence in them. The king's
+brother-in-law shewed me a letter of recommendation of the place,
+written in Dutch, and left there by a Hollander; and he requested of us
+to leave a letter to the same purport, certifying their honest and
+friendly dealings, that they might be able to show to others of our
+nation. To this we consented, and I gave them a writing, sealed by our
+captain, expressing the good entertainment we had received, and the
+prices of provisions; yet recommending to our countrymen, not to trust
+them any farther than might seem consistent with their own safety. They
+speak a kind of Moorish language, somewhat difficult to learn; so that I
+could only pick up the few words following, which may serve to ask for
+provisions and fruits, by such as do not understand Portuguese, or in
+speaking to any of the natives who have not that language.
+
+   _Gumbey_,   a bullock.
+   _Buze_,     a goat.
+   _Coquo_,    a hen.
+   _Sinzano_,  a needle.
+   _Seiavoye_, cocoa-nuts.
+   _Demon_,    lemons.
+   _Mage_,     water.
+   _Surra_,    a kind of drink.
+   _Soutan_,   the king.
+   _Quename_,  a pine-apple.
+   _Cartassa_, paper.
+   _Tudah_,    oranges.
+   _Arembo_,   bracelets.
+   _Figo_,     plantains.
+
+This island of Mohelia is in lat 12 deg. 10' S.[109] and has good anchorage
+in its road in forty fathoms. Having watered and refreshed ourselves
+sufficiently, we sailed from thence on the 10th of July, directing our
+course for the island of Socotora. The 19th we passed to the north of
+the equator; and on the 25th we had sight of land, which we supposed to
+have been Cape Guardafui, at the entrance into the Red Sea; and so,
+taking a departure for Socotora, we were unable to find it. We were
+therefore obliged to consider how we might shelter ourselves against the
+fury of the winter in these parts, and also to procure refreshments;
+wherefore we determined to sail for the islands of _Curia Muria_, which
+are in about the latitude of 18 deg. N.[110] over against the desert of
+_Arabia Felix_. In our way; the weather was continually so foggy, that
+we were unable at any time to see half an English mile before us, such
+being usual in these seas in the months of July, August, and September.
+In all this time both the sun and stars were so continually obscured,
+that we were never able to get an observation, by which to regulate or
+correct our dead reckoning; but, God being our guide, we at length
+groped out the land by means of the lead. We could now clearly perceive
+the colour of the water to be changed to white, with many yellow grassy
+weeds floating on the surface; and heaving the lead continually as we
+advanced, we at length struck ground in forty-three fathoms. Proceeding
+nearer the land, our sounding lessened to twenty-two fathoms, when we
+anchored on good ground; and though we distinctly heard the rut of the
+shore at no great distance, we could not perceive the land till next
+day, when the weather was somewhat clearer. We then sent our skiff in
+shore, to see if any place could be discovered of more security for our
+ship to ride in; but, on account of the great sea that came rolling into
+the bay, the surge was so violent that they could not come near the
+shore, and had to return as they went; only that they had been able to
+descry some fair stone-houses by the sea-side, which proved to be
+_Doffar_, in Arabia Felix.
+
+[Footnote 109: Lat. 13 deg. 35' S. Long. 45 deg. 30' E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 110: These islands are at the mouth of a bay of the same name
+on the oceanic coast of that portion of Arabia named Mahra, in long, 55 deg.
+30' E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+When God sent us a little clear weather, we could perceive a high cape
+on the western side of the bay, which we discovered from our skiff the
+second time it was sent, and could plainly see that it formed a very
+good road for all kinds of winds, except between the E. and S. by E.
+points. We were thankful to God for this discovery, and warped our ship
+to that road, with much toil to our men, as it was six or seven leagues
+from the place where we had anchored. On the 3d of August, having
+brought our ship to anchor in that road, we went ashore in the boat to a
+little village by the sea-side, called _Resoit_, inhabited mostly by
+Arabian fishermen, who entertained us kindly, and gave us all the
+information we desired respecting the country. The governor also of
+_Doffar_ came down to us, whose name was _Mir Mahommed Madoffar_, who
+bade us kindly welcome, and presented us with three bullocks, and some
+sheep, goats, hens, sugar-canes, plantains, cocoa-nuts, and the like. In
+return we made him a present of a fine damasked fowling-piece, double
+lockt, which he greatly admired. He appeared to desire our friendship as
+much as we did his; and he gave us licence to land at all times when we
+were inclined. He also gave orders to have a market established for us
+at the village of Resoit, that we might be supplied with every kind of
+provision that the country affords. Their cattle were both dear and
+lean, and fresh water so scarce, bad, and difficult to be had, that we
+were forced to hire the natives to bring it down to us in skins from a
+distance, paying them at the rate of twenty-four shillings for the fill
+of five pipes.
+
+Before leaving this place, Mir Mahommed desired us to leave a writing of
+commendation in his favour, specifying the kind and good entertainment
+we had received. This was accordingly granted, and I wrote it upon
+parchment, beginning it in large letters, the purport being similar to
+that granted at Mohelia, and this also was signed by the captain. The
+governor also sent us three notes signed by himself, for the purpose of
+being given by us to other ships, if they should happen to come upon
+this part of the coast, as we had been constrained to do, by which he
+might know our ships from those of other nations, and give them good
+entertainment accordingly. Cape _Resoit_ is in lat. 16 deg. 38' N. and has
+good anchorage in 5-1/2 or 6 fathoms.
+
+The 28th August, we set sail from thence, directing our course for the
+coast of Persia, coasting along the oceanic shore of Arabia; it being
+our chiefest object to set the lord ambassador on shore, as, by reason
+of the news we had received at the Cape of Good Hope, our expectations
+of trade at Surat, Dabul, and all other parts thereabouts, were
+frustrated. The 2d September, we sailed close beside an island on the
+coast of Arabia, called _Macyra_, in lat. 20 deg. 30' N. And on the 4th of
+that month we passed the eastermost point of Arabia, called Cape
+_Rassalgat_, in lat. 22 deg. 34' N.[111]
+
+[Footnote 111: This Cape is in lat. 23 deg. N. and long. 58 deg. 45'E. from
+Greenwich.--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Note_.--In explanation of the disappointment of trade at Surat, &c.
+there is the following marginal note in the Pilgrims, vol. I. p.
+490.--"These news at the Cape were, Captain Hawkins coming away in
+disgust, as denied leave to trade; the English being often wronged by
+the Mogul, in frequent breach of promise, as already shewn; for which
+they forced a trade in the Red Sea on the Mogul subjects. Which
+afterwards procured the privileges granted to Captain Best, as already
+related, lest the Moguls should have the sea shut up to them, and all
+their trade stopt. They were the more induced to grant these privileges
+to the English, on seeing them able to withstand the Portuguese, whose
+marine force had held the Guzerat people under maritime subjection, and
+made them afraid to trade with the English."--_Purch._
+
+Sec.2. Proceedings on the Coast of Persia, and Treachery of the Baloches_.
+
+Having crossed the gulf from Cape Rasalgat, on the 10th September we got
+sight of the coast of Persia, in the lat. of 25 deg. 10' N. When some seven
+leagues from the land, we sent our skiff ashore to make enquiry
+concerning the country, and to seek out some convenient place in which
+to land his lordship, having Sir Thomas Powell, with two of the
+ambassador's Persian attendants, and _Albertus_, our own linguist, that
+we might be able to converse with the natives. They came to a little
+village called _Tesseque_,[112] where they spoke with some camel-drivers
+and other country-people; from whom they learnt that the country was
+called _Getche Macquerona_ [Mekran], and the inhabitants _Baloches_, all
+living under the government of a king, named _Melik Mirza_, whose chief
+residence was some five or six days journey from thence, at a port named
+_Guadal_. They were farther informed, that all the country of _Mekran_
+paid tribute yearly to the king of Persia. When informed of our purpose
+to land the ambassador, they told us that, by means of _Melik Mirza_,
+his lordship might have a safe conveyance in nine days to _Kermshir_, in
+the province of _Kerman_; and from thence might travel in eleven days
+more to _Ispahan_ in Persia.
+
+[Footnote 112: Tize is laid down upon this part of the Persian coast, in
+lat 25 deg. 25' N. and long. 60 deg. 80' E. from Greenwich: Perhaps the Tesseque
+of the text.--E.]
+
+We then sailed along the coast, and on the 11th of the month we sent our
+boat ashore with Sir Thomas Powell, accompanied as before, to make
+farther enquiries, and to endeavour to hire a pilot to direct our course
+for Guadal, as we were unacquainted with the coast. They came to a place
+called _Pesseque_, about a day's journey from Tesseque, where they had
+similar accounts with the former, all commending the port of Guadal as
+the best place at which the ambassador could land. Wherefore, being
+unable to procure a pilot, we resolved, with God's blessing, to sail to
+that place with all the speed we could. On the 13th, while on our way,
+we espied coming towards us from the eastwards, two great boats, called
+_teradas_, which were sailing along shore for Ormus. Whereupon, that we
+might procure a pilot from them, we manned our skiff sufficiently to
+bring them by force to our ship, if entreaties were unavailing, yet
+without meaning to offer them the smallest injury, or even to send them
+away dissatisfied.
+
+When our skiff came up with them, instead of answering the hails of our
+men, they waved our skiff to leeward with a drawn sword; on which,
+thinking to fear them, and make them lower their sail, our men fired a
+random shot towards them, which they answered by firing another directly
+at our skiff, followed by half a hundred arrows, to which our men
+answered by plying all their muskets. But our skiff was unable to hold
+way with them, as they were under sail, and had therefore to return to
+the ship, with one man very dangerously wounded by an arrow in the
+breast, who afterwards recovered. As we in the ship saw the skiff
+returning without them, we hoisted out our long-boat, and sent her after
+the two _teradas_, we following with the ship as near the shore as we
+could with safety; for it was now of much importance that we should
+speak with them, on purpose to avoid their spreading scandalous reports
+of us in the country, which might have frustrated our chief hopes of
+landing the ambassador at _Guadal_, being the place we most depended
+upon, and being destitute of any other place for the purpose, should
+this fail, considering the unwelcome intelligence we had got concerning
+Guzerat at the Cape.
+
+Our long boat, having fetched up with the _teradas_, drove them into a
+bay whence they could not escape; on which the native mariners sailed so
+far into the bay, that one of the teradas was cast away on the beach,
+and the other had nearly shared the same fate, but was saved by our men
+just without the surf. Most of the _balloches_ leapt overboard, and
+several of them narrowly escaped drowning; while nine of them were
+brought by our men to our ship along with the _terada_, part of whom
+they had taken out of the water. There were originally twenty-six
+balloches in the two teradas, but all the rest escaped ashore by
+swimming through the surf. When these men came aboard our ship, they
+were found to belong to Guadal; and when told that we were sorry for the
+loss of their other bark, as we meant them no harm, but only wished to
+speak with them, that we might learn the navigation to their port, they
+were glad to learn we had no evil intentions, thinking we had been as
+merciless as themselves, and acknowledged their loss proceeded from
+their own folly.
+
+We then informed them that we were bound for Guadal, on purpose to land
+a Persian ambassador there, and that we earnestly entreated the master
+of the terada, whose name was _Noradin_, to pilot us to that place, for
+which we would satisfy him to his contentment. Knowing that he could not
+chuse, he consented to go with us, on condition we would permit the
+terada and his men to proceed to Muscat, whither they were originally
+bound; but we did not think this quite safe, lest they might communicate
+news of our arrival among the Portuguese, and thought it better to take
+the bark along with us to Guadal, to manifest our own good intentions.
+Noradin accordingly consented, between fear and good will, and was much
+made of by us to reassure his confidence. On the passage to Guadal, we
+had much conference with him and his men, both respecting the state of
+the country, the character of their king, and the means of the
+ambassador travelling from thence into Persia. Their answers and reports
+all confirmed what we had been already told on the coast, and gave us
+hopes of success. The terada was about fifteen tons burden, and her
+loading mostly consisted in the provisions of the country, as rice,
+wheat, dates, and the like. They had a Portuguese pass, which they
+shewed us, thinking at first we had been of that nation. I translated
+this, to show in what subjection the Portuguese keep all the natives of
+these countries, as without such a pass they are not suffered to
+navigate these seas, under penalty of losing their lives, ships, and
+goods.
+
+_Antonio Pereira de la Cerda, Captain of the Castle of Muscat, &c._
+
+"Know all to whom these presents are shewn, that I have hereby given
+secure licence to this _terada_, of the burden of fifty _candies_,
+whereof is master Noradin, a Mahomedan _baloche_, dwelling in Guadal, of
+the age of fifty years, who carries for his defence four swords, three
+bucklers, five bows, with their arrows, three calivers, two lances, and
+twelve oars. And that in manner following: She may pass and sail from
+this castle of Muscat, to Soar, Dobar, Mustmacoraon, Sinde, Cache,
+Naguna, Diu, Chaul, and Cor. In going she carries goods of _Conga_, as
+raisins, dates, and such like; but not without dispatch from the
+custom-house of this castle, written on the back hereof. In this voyage
+she shall not carry any prohibited goods, viz. steel, iron, lead,
+tobacco, ginger, cinnamon of Ceylon, or other goods prohibited by his
+majesty's regulations. And conforming thereto, the said _terada_ shall
+make her voyage without let or hindrance of any generals, captains, or
+any of the fleets or ships whatever of his majesty she may happen to
+meet with. This licence shall be in force for one whole year, in going
+and returning; and if expired, shall continue in force till the
+completion of her voyage.
+
+   _Given at the Castle of Muscat, this_ 16_th November_, 1611.
+   _Written by Antonio de Peitas, notary of the said factory,
+   &c._
+
+   _Sealed and signed by_
+   ANTONIO PEREIRA."
+
+   The certificate on the back was thus:
+   "_Registered in the book of Certificates, folio xxxii, et sequ._
+   Signed,  ANT. PEITAS."
+
+The 17th September, we sailed past some high rugged cliffs, close to
+which, as Noradin told us, was a good watering place, at a village named
+_Ivane_, fifteen leagues west from Guadal. That same evening we arrived
+at Guadal, and anchored for the night off the mouth of the port, whence
+about thirty boats came out next morning to fish, some of which came to
+speak with the _balloches_ we had aboard. What conversation passed among
+them we did not understand, being in the _balloche_ language. Betimes on
+the 18th, we cleared our pilot and his boat, and he departed well
+contented. Soon after, the ambassador sent Nazerbeg, one of his Persian
+attendants, on shore in our skiff, with a message to the governor
+concerning his landing and passing through that country into Persia.
+While on the way, our skiff was met by the governor's boat, coming off
+to our ship, and Nazerbeg was taken into that boat, which carried him to
+the shore, whence he was accompanied by many of the natives to the
+governor's tent. He here delivered his message in Persian, which these
+people understand as well as their own language, and was kindly
+entertained. The answer from the governor was to this effect: That,
+although this country of Mekran did not belong to the king of Persia, it
+yet owed love and duty thereto, having been long tributary to the king
+and his predecessors, and still was. He farther said, that the king of
+Mekran was the king of Persia's slave, with many other hollow
+compliments, and that the ambassador should be made as welcome as in
+Persian all this only tending to allure his lordship ashore by treachery
+to his ruin, as appeared by the event.
+
+With this answer Nazerbeg returned, being accompanied on board by about
+a dozen of the most ancient men of the balloches, to confirm the same.
+On coming aboard, these men saluted the ambassador most submissively, in
+the name of the governor of Guadal, and on their own behalf some even
+offering to kiss his feet; and told his lordship that he was most
+fortunate in coming to their city at this time, as only the day before
+the viceroy had come down with a troop of men, to visit a saint, and
+therefore his lordship would be conducted with infinite safety through
+the country, and protected from the danger of rebels and thieves, who
+infested the country between Mekran and Persia, and might either go
+through Kerman or Segistan to Ispahan. They added, that the viceroy
+would supply his lordship with camels and horses, and every other
+requisite for the journey, and would gladly give him every other
+accommodation in his power. They said, moreover, that they were much
+rejoiced at having such an opportunity of shewing their unfeigned love
+and duty towards the king of Persia, and that the ambassador should be
+dispatched on his journey from Guadal in two days, if he were so
+inclined. They told us, that our ship should be supplied with water, and
+every other necessary of which we were in want; and they gave us three
+bags of bruised dates, of about 300 pounds weight, with two boats,
+saying the fishing-boats were ordered to give us two fish a-piece daily,
+on account of their government, which they did accordingly.
+
+By these shews of good-will, all men concurring in the same fair story,
+both now and formerly, we were thoroughly satisfied, and had no distrust
+that they meant not as well as they said. The lord ambassador,
+especially, was much rejoiced at the prospect of being thus enabled to
+reach Persia in twenty days, as they said; and we not less so, in
+bringing our long-desired hopes to a bearing. But God, from whom no
+secrets of the heart can be hidden, knew their treacherous intentions
+towards us; and had not his mercy exceeded his justice, we had been
+utterly destroyed, and it had never been known what became of us, our
+ship, or our goods.
+
+Being quite satisfied with these fair promises, the ambassador got every
+thing in readiness, and in the morning of the 19th September, sent his
+money and all his baggage on shore with the _balloches_ boats, which
+came aboard for the purpose. They also brought a message from the
+viceroy and governor, saying they had provided tents for his lordship
+and all his followers, close to their own, where they would be happy to
+receive him as soon as he pleased to land. Into this tent accordingly
+all the ambassador's goods were carried, and some of his followers were
+appointed by his orders to remain there in charge of them, till he
+should himself land, intending to have gone ashore the same day, about
+four in the afternoon, of which he sent word to the viceroy. In the mean
+time our boat went ashore with empty casks to bring off fresh water, and
+in her went the Persian followers of the ambassador, and three or four
+more of his people, to see the careful landing of his goods, and to
+accompany them to the tents.
+
+While the ambassador's baggage was landing, some of the natives asked,
+if these were all the things the ambassador had to send ashore? To which
+it was answered, that these were all, except jewels and such like
+things, which were to come along with himself. Some other natives
+standing by, observed among themselves, That it was no matter, as these
+were enough for the soldiers. This was overheard and understood by
+Nazerbeg, who concealed it for the time, though it raised some suspicion
+in his mind, as he said afterwards: Yet so strongly was he prepossessed
+by the agreement of all that had passed before, that he could not bring
+himself to believe their intentions were bad. He listened, however, more
+attentively to all that was said afterwards among them, but could hear
+nothing that savoured of double-dealing.
+
+A little while afterwards, Nazerbeg met with one _Haji Comul_,[113] whom
+God made an instrument to disclose the devilish project of the balloches
+to circumvent and destroy us, and who now revealed the particulars of
+their bloody designs. Nazerbeg was amazed, and even chid _Comul_ for not
+having told this before the goods were landed. As the time appointed for
+the landing of the ambassador was at hand, Nazerbeg was fearful he might
+have come ashore before he could get to our ship to forewarn him.
+Wherefore, hastening to the shore, where, as God would have it, our
+skiff was still filling water, he told our men there was treachery
+plotting against us on shore, and entreated them to row him to the ship
+with all possible speed. He was therefore brought off immediately, yet
+hardly a moment too soon, as the ambassador and all his suite, together
+with our captain and all the principal officers among us, willing to
+grace the ambassador as far as we could for the honour of our country,
+were already in the waste, and ready to go on shore. When Nazerbeg had
+communicated his news, we were as ready to change our purpose as we had
+been before to go ashore. The purport of what he had learnt from _Haji
+Comul_ was as follows:--
+
+The viceroy and governor had agreed together to entice as many of us as
+they possibly could ashore, on purpose to cut all our throats; which
+done, they meant to have set upon the ship, and having taken her, to
+seize every thing she contained. They had made minute enquiry into our
+numbers, and had got a particular enumeration of the state and condition
+of every person in the ship, all of whom they intended to put to death
+without mercy, except the surgeon, the musicians, the women, and the
+boys. Their reverence for the king of Persia, of which they had so
+boasted, was all a mere pretence to deceive; for they were all rebels,
+and it was death to talk of the king of Persia in Guadal. Though we now
+understood their intended plot, for which God be praised, and were
+sufficiently put upon our guard to prevent its execution by arming
+ourselves, knowing that we were able to defend ourselves from injury on
+board, although they had great numbers of boats, and above 1500 men
+armed with muskets, besides others; yet were we at a loss how we might
+recover his lordship's goods, and his three men who were ashore along
+with them. But God, who had thus miraculously delivered us from their
+cruel treachery, opened likewise our understandings, so that we
+recovered all according to our wish, in the following manner:--
+
+As the viceroy and his fellows expected the immediate landing of the
+ambassador and followers, together with the captain and others of us, we
+sent Nazerbeg again ashore, with instructions what to do. He was to
+inform the viceroy that the ambassador was not very well, and had
+therefore deferred his landing till next morning, which was Monday the
+20th September. He was also directed to request the viceroy and
+governor, to send two or three of their boats for him very early, to
+bring the women and others of his company ashore, as the ship's boats
+were too small; and to say, that the ambassador expected to be attended
+by some men of condition from the viceroy, to come in the boats, out of
+respect to the king of Persia, whose person he represented. This
+message, being well delivered, took the desired effect, and the viceroy
+readily promised to comply with every thing required. Having finished
+this part of his introductions, Nazerbeg was to repair to the tent where
+the baggage was lodged, and to fetch from one of the trunks, two bags of
+money containing L200 sterling, and some other things of value, if he
+could so contrive without being noticed, as it was wished to conceal the
+knowledge we had of the villainous intentions of these barbarians.
+Nazerbeg was also desired to use dispatch, and to desire the three
+servants of the ambassador to remain all night at the tents, with
+promise of being relieved next morning. All was done as directed, and
+not only was the money brought away, but a trunk also containing Lady
+Shirley's apparel. When the balloches enquired the reason of taking that
+trunk back to the ship, they were told it contained the lady's
+night-clothes, and that it was to be brought ashore again next day.
+
+[Footnote 113: In Purchas this person is named _Hoge_ Comul; but we
+suspect it ought to be _Haji_, intimating that he had made the
+pilgrimage of Mecca and Medina.--E.]
+
+The ambassador having thus recovered his money, wished much to get back
+one other large trunk, containing things of value, and the three men
+which were ashore with his baggage, even if all the rest were lost. For
+this purpose, we filled, over night, a large chest and a night-stool,
+with billets of wood, rubbish, stones, and other useless matters, to
+make them heavy, binding them up carefully with mats and ropes to give
+them an air of importance. Nazerbeg was instructed to take these on
+shore, to be left in place of the large trunk which he was to bring
+away, under pretence that it belonged to one of the merchants, and had
+been landed by mistake. The three men at the tent were to accompany him
+back to the ship, with their musical instruments, and the _balloches_
+were to be told they were wanted by the lord ambassador to accompany him
+with their music on his landing.
+
+Every thing being thus properly arranged, we saw next morning early, the
+three boats coming off for the purpose of bringing his lordship on
+shore, according to promise. We then manned our skiff, and sent her
+ashore to put our plan into execution, by which we hoped to entrap the
+_balloches_ in the snare they had laid for us. In the mean time, we
+received the people from the three boats into our ship, consisting of
+seven or eight persons of some condition, among whom was our friend
+_Haji Comul_; all the rest being slaves and fishermen. We kept them in
+discourse on various matters, to pass away time till our skiff could get
+back. During this conversation, one of them said that the viceroy
+earnestly desired we might bring our _slurbow_[114] ashore with us, as
+he wished much to see it, which we readily promised, to satisfy them. We
+soon after had the pleasure to see our skiff returning, having been
+completely successful, as it not only brought away the trunk and the
+three men, but also one of the chief men among the _balloches_, whom
+Nazerbeg enticed along with him. As soon as he came on board, he and the
+rest desired to see our gun-rooms, in which they had been told we had
+all our fire-works, of which they were in great dread, particularly of
+our _slurbow_ and fire-arrows; and this answered exactly to our wishes,
+as we meant to have enticed them below, that we might disarm them of
+their long knives or daggers. When all these principal persons were down
+below in the gun-room, all our people being armed and in readiness, and
+dispersed in different parts of the ship, some on deck, some between
+decks, and others in the gunroom, to arrest and disarm the traitors;
+and when the concerted signal was given, this was instantly
+accomplished, to their great astonishment, yet without resistance.
+
+[Footnote 114: From circumstances mentioned in the sequel, this seems to
+have been a species of cross-bow for discharging fire-arrows.--E.]
+
+We then laid open to them our knowledge of their murderous intentions,
+saying their lives were now in our hands, as they had themselves fallen
+into the pit they had dug for us; and, if we served them right, we
+should now cut them in pieces, as they meant to have done by us. Yet
+they stoutly denied the whole alleged plot. We detained six of the
+chiefest men among them, and two of their boats, sending all the rest
+a-shore, being all naked rascals, except one, by whom we sent a message
+to the viceroy and governor, That, unless he sent us back all the goods
+and baggage we had ashore, without abstracting even the smallest
+portion, we would carry off those we had now in our custody. When this
+message was delivered to the viceroy and governor, they sent back word
+by the same messenger, that, if we would release the _balloches_, all
+our goods should be sent to us, and at the same time making many hollow
+declarations that no evil had ever been intended against us. On
+receiving this message, and in sight of the messenger, all our prisoners
+were immediately put in irons; and two letters were wrote to the viceroy
+in Persian, one by us and the other by the prisoners, intimating in the
+most determined terms, that the prisoners would be all put to death, if
+the goods were not safely returned without delay, giving only two hours
+respite at the most, the sand-glass being set before them as the
+messenger left the ship, that he might be induced to make haste. By
+these sharp means, we constrained them to restore every thing in the
+most ample manner; and this being done, we released the men and boats,
+according to promise, and sent them away. One man named _Malim
+Simsadim_, whom we had learnt, from _Haji Comul_, was an experienced
+pilot for _Sinde_ and _Cambay_, we detained for that purpose, promising
+to reward him according to his merits.
+
+Thus, by God's assistance, to whom be endless praise for our
+deliverance, we happily extricated ourselves from this dangerous and
+intricate affair, which was entirely concluded by six p.m. of the 20th
+September. We set sail that same night with our new pilot and _Haji
+Comul_, which last remained along with us, as his life would have been
+in danger among that accursed crew, for revealing their diabolical plot.
+We now bent out course for Sinde, as willing to avoid all subsequent
+dangers which these blood-thirsty balloches might attempt to plot
+against us. In our way, we had much conversation with Comul, whom we
+much esteemed and respected for the excellent service he had done
+towards us. _Comul_ was a native of Dabul in India, his father being a
+Persian of the sect of Ali, in which _Comul_ was a churchman, or priest,
+having likewise some skill in medicine and surgery, in which capacity he
+had resided in the tent of the governor of Guadal, and owing to which
+circumstance he had overheard their infernal plot. He had obtained leave
+to come aboard our ship, under pretence of procuring certain ointments
+or balsams, which he alleged had been promised him by our surgeons. He
+said that, on hearing their murderous intentions, his heart yearned
+within him, to think we should be led like sheep to the slaughter by
+such bloody butchers, and that God willed him to reveal their plot to
+us. He farther told us, that to his knowledge, they had already betrayed
+three ships in the same manner; that they were all rebels against the
+King of Persia, refusing to pay the tribute which they and their
+ancestors had been accustomed to; and that the king of Persia had levied
+an army, which waited not for from Guadal, with the purpose to invade
+the country next winter.
+
+This country of _Macquerona_, or Mekran, is on the main land of Asia,
+bordering upon the kingdom of Persia. The port of _Guadal_ is nearly in
+the lat. of 25 deg. N, the variation being 17 deg. 15' [lat. 24 deg. 40' N. long.
+61 deg. 50' E.]. It has good anchorage in four or five fathoms. At night of
+the 21st September, the day after leaving Guadal, our _balloche_ pilot
+brought our ship in danger of running on a shoal, where we had to come
+suddenly to anchor till next morning. The 24th at night, while laying
+to, because not far from Cape Camelo, a Portuguese frigate, or bark,
+passed close beside us, which at first we suspected to have been an
+armed galley, for which cause we prepared for defence in case of need.
+
+3. _Arrival at Diul-ginde,[115] and landing of the Ambassador: Seeking
+Trade there, are crossed by the slanderous Portuguese: Go to Sumatra and
+Bantam; and thence Home to England_.
+
+[Footnote 115: This singular name ought perhaps to have been Diul-Sinde,
+or Diul on the Indus, or Sinde river, to distinguish it from Diu in
+Guzerat.--E.]
+
+The 26th September, 1613, we came to anchor right before the mouth of
+the river _Sinde_, or Indus, by the directions of a pilot we had from
+one of the boats we found fishing at that place. We rode in very good
+ground, in a foot less five fathoms, the mouth of the river being E. by
+N. being in the latitude of 24 deg. 38' N.[116] That same day, the
+ambassador sent two of his people, to confer with the governor about his
+coming ashore, and procuring a passage through that country into Persia.
+The governor, whose name was _Arah Manewardus_, who was of _Diul_,[117]
+was most willing to receive the ambassador, and to shew him every
+kindness, both in regard to his entertainment there, and his passage
+through his province or jurisdiction. To this intent, he sent a
+principal person aboard, attended by five or six more, to welcome his
+lordship with many compliments, assuring him of kind entertainment.
+Presently after there came boats from _Diul_ for his accommodation, in
+which he and all his people and goods went ashore on the 29th September,
+all in as good health as when they embarked in our ship from England. At
+his departure we saluted him with eleven guns, and our captain entrusted
+him with a fine fowling-piece, having two locks, to present to the
+governor of Tatta, a great city, a day's journey from Diul,[118] both
+cities being in the dominions of the Great Mogul. We also now set ashore
+our treacherous _balloche_ pilot, _Sim-sadin_, though he better merited
+to have been thrown into the sea, as he endeavoured twice to have cast
+us away; once by his own means, as formerly alluded to, and afterwards
+by giving devilish council to the pilot we hod from the fisher boat at
+this place.
+
+[Footnote 116: The river Indus has many mouths, of which no less than
+_seventeen_ are laid down in Arrowsmith's excellent map of Hindoostan,
+extending between the latitudes of 24 deg. 45' and 23 deg. 15' both N. and
+between the longitudes of 67 deg. 12' and 69 deg. 12' both east. That mouth
+where the Expedition now came to anchor, was probably that called the
+_Pitty_ river, being the most north-western of the Delta, in lat 24 deg. 45'
+N. and long. 67 deg. 12' E. from Greenwich; being the nearest on her way
+from Guadal, and that which most directly communicates with Tatta, the
+capital of the Delta of the Indus.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 117: Such is the vague mode of expression in the Pilgrims; but
+it appears afterwards that he was governor of Diul, at which place Sir
+Robert Shirley and his suite were landed. It singularly happens, that
+Diul is omitted in all the maps we have been able to consult; but from
+the context, it appears to have been near the mouth of the Pitty river,
+mentioned in the preceding note. It is afterwards said to have been
+fifteen miles up the river, in which case it may possibly be a place
+otherwise called _Larry Bunder_, about twenty miles up the Pitty, which
+is the port of Tatta.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 118: Tatta is not less than seventy-five English miles from
+the mouth of the Pitty, and consequently sixty from Diul.--E.]
+
+When the lord ambassador left us, we requested he would send us word how
+he found the country disposed, and whether we might have trade there;
+and for this purpose, we gave his lordship a note in writing of what we
+chiefly desired, which was to the following purport: "That our coming to
+this port was purposely to land his lordship; yet, as we had brought
+with us certain commodities and money, we were willing to make sales of
+such and so much of those as might suit, if we could obtain licence and
+protection for quiet trade; and, with the governor's permission, would
+settle a factory at this place, to which, though now but slenderly
+provided, we would afterwards bring such kinds and quantities of goods
+us might be most suitable for sale. The commodities we now had, were
+elephants and morse teeth, fine fowling-pieces, lead and tin in bars,
+and some Spanish dollars. If we could not be permitted to trade, we
+requested leave to provide ourselves, with refreshments, and so to
+depart."
+
+The 30th September, the ambassador had an audience of the governor
+concerning all his business, to whom he shewed the _firmaun_ of the king
+of Persia, as also the pass of the king of Spain, thinking thereby to
+satisfy the jealousy of the Portuguese residents at that place, who
+reported, on pretended intelligence from Ornus, that Don Roberto Shirley
+was come from England with three ships to the Indies, on purpose to
+steal. They peremptorily refused to give credence to the Spanish pass,
+saying it was neither signed nor sealed by their king, in which they
+could not possibly be mistaken, knowing it so well, and therefore that
+it was assuredly forged. On this, the ambassador angrily said, that it
+was idle to shew them any king's hand-writing and seal, as they had no
+king, being merely a waste nation, forcibly reduced under subjection to
+the king of Spain, and mere slaves both to him and his natural subjects.
+Yet the Portuguese boldly stood to their former allegations, insisting
+that the ambassador had other two ships in the Indies. Then _Arah
+Manewardus_ sharply reproved them for their unseemly contradictions of
+the Persian ambassador, and ordered them out of the room.
+
+The ambassador then made a speech to the governor concerning our
+admittance to trade at his port, on which the governor expressed his
+readiness to do so, all inconveniences understood, and desired the
+ambassador to send for one or two of our merchants, that he might confer
+with them on the subject. Upon this the ambassador wrote to us on the 2d
+October, saying what he had done in our affairs, and sending us
+assurance for our safe going and returning. Being thereby in good hope
+of establishing trade at this place, if not a factory, and to make sale
+of the small quantity of goods we now had, Mr Joseph Salbank and I, by
+advice of the captain and others, made ourselves ready and went ashore
+that same morning in one of the country boats. Our ship lay about four
+or five miles from the mouth of the river, from whence we had fifteen
+miles to travel to _Diul_, where the ambassador was, so that it was late
+in the evening before we landed there.
+
+In our way we met a Portuguese frigate or bark, bound for Ormus, on
+purpose to prevent any of their ships coming till we were gone. This
+bark went close past our ship, taking a careful review of her, and so
+departed. As soon as we were landed, three or four Portuguese came up to
+us, asking if we had brought any goods ashore, and such like questions;
+but we made them no reply, pretending not to understand their language,
+that we might the better understand them for our own advantage, if
+occasion served. There then came another Portuguese, who spoke Dutch
+very fluently, telling me many things respecting the country and people,
+tending to their ill conduct and character, thinking to dissuade us from
+endeavouring to have any trade there. Soon after, the officers of the
+customs came, and conducted us to the castle, but we could not have an
+audience of the governor that night, as it was already late. The
+officers, who were mostly banians, and spoke good Portuguese, searched
+every part about us for money, not even leaving our shoes unsearched;
+and perceiving that we were surprised at this, they prayed us to be
+content therewith, as it was the custom of the country. To this I
+replied, that though the Portuguese might give them cause for so bad a
+fashion, yet English merchants did not hide their money in their shoes
+like smugglers. Then the governor's servants came to us, and lighted us
+from the castle to the house in which the ambassador lodged, where we
+were made heartily welcome, and were lodged all the time we staid in
+Diul, and at no expence to us. Seeing us landed, and hearing we came to
+treat with the governor for settling trade at that place, the Portuguese
+spread many slanderous and malignant lies against our king, country, and
+nation, reporting that we were thieves, and not merchants, and that we
+derived our chief subsistence by robbing other nations on the sea.
+
+In the morning of the 3d October, the governor sent word to the
+ambassador that he would see and converse with us in the afternoon. In
+the mean time, we had notice that the Portuguese were using every effort
+with him and others to prevent our being entertained, both by offering
+him gratifications if he would refuse us, and by threatening to leave
+the place if we were received, pretending that they would not remain
+where thieves were admitted. Yet the governor sent for us, commanding
+four great horses, richly caparisoned, to be sent to the ambassador's
+house, for his lordship, Sir Thomas Powell, Mr Salbank, and me, and sent
+also a number of his servants to conduct us to the castle; all the
+ambassador's servants went likewise along with him, each carrying a
+halbert. In this manner we rode through some part of the city, the
+people in all the streets flocking out to see us, having heard talk of
+Englishmen, but never having seen any before, as we were the first who
+had ever been in that part of the country.
+
+On coming to the castle, we were received in a very orderly manner, and
+led through several spacious rooms, where many soldiers were standing in
+ranks on each side, all cloathed from head to foot in white dresses. We
+were then conducted to a high turret, in which the governor and some
+others sat, who rose up at our entrance and saluted us, bidding us
+kindly welcome. We then all sat down round the room, on carpets spread
+on the floor, according to their fashion. The governor again bid us
+welcome, saying he was glad to see Englishmen in that country; but said,
+in regard to the trade we desired to have there, that the Portuguese
+would by no means consent to our having trade, and threatened to desert
+the place if we were received. Yet, if he could be assured of deriving
+greater benefit from our trade than he now had from that of the
+Portuguese, he should not care how soon they left him, as he thought
+well of our nation. In the mean time, however, as he farmed the customs
+of that port from the king, to whom he was bound to pay certain sums
+yearly for the same, whether they were actually received or not, he was
+under the necessity of being circumspect in conducting the business,
+lest he might incur the displeasure of the king, to his utter ruin. He
+then told us that the customs from the Portuguese trade, together with
+what arose from their letting out their ships to hire to the Guzerats
+and Banians, amounted to a _lack_ of rupees yearly, which is L10,000
+sterling.[119]
+
+[Footnote 119: A rupee is two shillings, or somewhat more, and a _lack_
+is 100,000.-_Purch._]
+
+He then desired to know the kinds and quantities of the commodities we
+had brought, and what amount we had in money? To all which we gave him
+distinct answers, as nearly as we could remember; adding, that though we
+now brought but small store, we would engage to furnish his port at our
+next coming, which would be in about twenty-two months, with such
+commodities as were now brought by the Portuguese, and with such
+quantities of each kind as might be requisite to satisfy the demands of
+that port. He appeared to approve of this, and concluded by saying, as
+our present stock of commodities were so small, the Portuguese would
+only laugh at him and us if we were now admitted to trade, wherefore he
+wished us to defer all trade till our next coming; but that he was ready
+to give us a writing under his hand and seal to assure us of good
+entertainment at our next coming, provided we came fully prepared as we
+said, and on condition we should leave him a written engagement not to
+molest any of the ships or goods of the king of the Moguls, or his
+subjects. We agreed to all this, and requested he would allow us to sell
+those goods we now had; but which he would by no means consent to, for
+fear of offending the Portuguese, as stated before.
+
+We then desired that we might have leave to provide our ship with water,
+and other necessary refreshments, for our money, after which we should
+depart as soon as possible. To this he said, that as soon as we sent him
+the writing he desired, he would send us the one he had promised, and
+would give orders to his officers to see our wants supplied; but desired
+that the Portuguese might know nothing of all this. Seeing no remedy, we
+then desired to know what kinds of commodities he wished us to bring,
+and also what were the commodities his country could afford in return.
+We were accordingly informed, that the commodities in request in Sinde
+were broad-cloths of various prices, and light gay colours, as stammels,
+reds, greens, sky-blues, indigo-blues, azures, &c. also elephants teeth,
+iron, steel, lead, tin, spices, and money. The commodities to be had
+there were, indigo of Lahore, indigo of _Cherques_, calicoes of all
+sorts, pintadoes, or painted chintzes of all sorts, all kinds of
+Guzerat and Cambay commodities, with many kinds of drugs. We then took
+our leave, and returned to the ambassador's house, whence I sent him a
+letter, according to his desire, signed by Mr Salbanke and me, on which
+he sent us another, in the Persian language, which is written backwards,
+much like the Hebrew, and which was interpreted to us by the ambassador,
+in English, as follows:
+
+"WHEREAS there has arrived at this port of Diul, an English ship called
+the Expedition, of which is captain, Christopher Newport, and merchants,
+Joseph Salbank and Walter Peyton, and has landed here Don Robert
+Shirley, ambassador of the king of Persia, who has desired us to grant
+them trade at this port under my government, which I willingly would
+have granted, but not having brought merchandize in sufficient quantity
+to begin trade, and the Portuguese, from whom I reap benefit, refusing
+their consent, threatening to go away if I receive the English nation,
+by which I should be left destitute of all trade, whence arises those
+sums I have yearly to pay to the king, and in default whereof I should
+incur his majesty's displeasure, to my utter ruin. Yet, from the love I
+bear to the king of Persia, by whose ambassador I am solicited, and from
+affection for the English, together with the faithful performance of the
+writing left with me under their hands and seals by the two merchants
+before named, I hereby promise the English nation, under my hand and
+seal, if they will come like themselves, so fitted that I may derive
+more advantage from them than from the Portuguese, that I will
+infallibly grant them trade here, with such reasonable privileges as we
+may agree upon."
+
+_Given at Diul, this 3d of October_, 1613.
+
+ARAH MANEWARUS.
+
+Having received this writing on the 4th October, together with orders
+from the governor to his officers for our being furnished with water and
+refreshments, we made haste to return to our ships. A little before we
+went away, the ambassador fell into discourse with us about procuring a
+_firmaun_ from the Great Mogul, for which purpose he wished Mr Salbank
+to accompany him to Agra, the principal residence of that sovereign,
+affirming that he would procure that grant of trade for us in a short
+time, for which he alleged there was now a favourable opportunity, both
+because he had other business to transact at the court of the Mogul, and
+in consequence of the willingness of _Manewardus_ to admit us to trade
+at his port. He alleged likewise that we might never have so favourable
+an opportunity, and assured us that he would therein shew himself a
+true-hearted Englishman, whatever the company of merchants might think
+of him; and that Mr Salbank should be an evidence of his earnest
+endeavours to serve the merchants in procuring this _firmaun_, not only
+for Diul, but for other parts of the Mogul dominions, and should also
+carry the grant with him over-land to England. All this seemed
+reasonable, and as Mr Salbank had been before in these parts, he was
+very willing to go, provided it met with the approbation of the captain
+and me, and the other gentlemen in the ship; for which purpose the
+ambassador wrote a letter to our captain, to urge his consent, which we
+carried with us.
+
+We left Diul that same day about four in the afternoon, and on going to
+the river side to take boat, many of the natives flocked about to look
+at us. We were likewise joined by about a dozen Portuguese, who began to
+talk with us in Dutch, as before, asking many frivolous questions. I now
+answered them in their own language, on purpose that the Banians, who
+were present, might understand what I said; telling them that they were
+a shameless and lying people to spread so many slanderous and false
+reports of our nation, while they knew their own to be much inferior to
+ours in many respects, and that their scandalous conduct proceeded
+merely from malignant policy to prevent us from participating with them
+in the trade of India. To this I added, that if they did not restrain
+themselves within due peaceful bounds, amending their behaviour both in
+words and actions, they should be all driven out of India, and a more
+honest and loyal nation substituted in their place. Then one of the
+principal men among them stepped forwards, and made answer, that they
+had already too many enemies, and had no need of more; but that they had
+substantial reasons for speaking of us as they had done, as not long
+since one of their ships had been taken near Surat, and, as they
+supposed, by an English ship. To which I answered, that this was more
+like to have been done by the Hollanders. They then became more civil,
+and finally wished that we might trade in all parts of India with them,
+and they with us, like friends and neighbours, and that our kings might
+enter into some agreement to that effect. They then kindly took leave of
+us, and we departed.
+
+We got back to our ship on the 6th, when it was agreed that Mr Salbank
+should accompany the ambassador to Agra, as proposed. For which purpose
+he got himself in readiness, meaning to have gone ashore next day. In
+the mean time, the captain, the purser, and his man, went on shore to
+buy fresh victuals and necessaries to take with us to sea; but, on
+coming to the city, they were presently ordered away by the governor,
+and an express order issued by proclamation, that none of the natives
+should hereafter bring any of the English ashore, on pain of death. We
+were much astonished at this sudden alteration of affairs, for which we
+could not divine any cause: but, on the 9th, finding we could get
+nothing done here, nor any farther intercourse, we set sail, directing
+our course for Sumatra. All the time we were here in Sinde, we had not
+the smallest intimation of trade having been settled at Surat, for if we
+had, we might have taken a different course.
+
+We came to anchor in the road of Priaman on the 20th November, going in
+between the two northermost little islands, and anchored close by the
+northermost of these, in five fathoms. We immediately began to bargain
+for pepper, the price of which we beat down from twenty-two dollars, as
+first asked, to seventeen dollars the bahar, at which price we got two
+bahars, which were brought to us on board: but the governor would not
+allow us, although we made him a present of a musket, to hire a house,
+or to buy pepper ashore, unless we would consent to bestow presents on
+some twenty of the officers and merchants of the place. On the 22d, we
+received a letter from Captain Christen, of the Hosiander, then at
+Tecoo, earnestly advising us to come there immediately, as we could not
+fail to get as much pepper as we wished at that place, and in a short
+time; and, as we were not acquainted with the place, Captain Chrisen
+sent Richard Hall, one of his master's mates, to pilot us through among
+the dangerous shoals that lay about the roads of Tecoo. Accordingly we
+went to that place, and anchored in four fathoms, Richard Hall returning
+on board the Hosiander, where he died that same night, being ill of the
+flux.
+
+Before our arrival, the natives had offered their pepper to Captain
+Christen at twelve and thirteen dollars the bahar, taking payment in
+Surat commodities; but they now demanded twenty-two dollars in ready
+money, refusing to barter with them any longer for goods. They also
+demanded at this place as many presents as had been required at Priaman;
+beside which, they insisted upon having seventy-two dollars for
+anchorage duty. Being now in a worse situation than before, and having
+no time to waste in delays, we determined to come to short terms with
+them; wherefore we told them roundly, that we would on no account submit
+to their unreasonable demands, even though we might not get a single
+_cattee_ of pepper. For this purpose I drew out a letter from our
+captain, which he signed and sealed, addressed to the head governor,
+stating that he had not used our nation so well as we had reason to
+expect, both in unreasonable demands of presents, which were not usually
+given upon compulsion, but rather from good-will, or in reward of good
+behaviour, and likewise by their improper delay in implementing their
+promises, so very unlike mercantile dealings; since our ships have at
+various times remained at their port for three, four, and even five
+months, depending on their promises of having full lading, which might
+as well have been accomplished in one month, in so far as respected the
+small quantity of pepper they had to dispose of. This letter was
+translated by the interpreter in the Hosiander, an Indian, named Johen,
+who perfectly understood their language.
+
+The governor, in consequence of this remonstrance, gave orders that we
+might purchase pepper from any one who was inclined to sell; but sent us
+a message, wishing that one of us might come on shore, that the pepper
+might be there weighed. But still doubting that they meant to teaze us
+with delay, we sent back word that we could not remain so long as it
+would require for weighing the pepper ashore, and therefore if they
+would bring it to us on board, we would pay them eighteen dollars a
+bahar for their pepper, together with two dollars as custom to the
+governor, making exactly twenty dollars. As they still put off time, we
+set sail, as if meaning to have gone away, on which the governor sent
+another messenger, who spoke Portuguese tolerably, entreating us to come
+again to anchor, and we should have as much pepper as we could take in.
+We did so accordingly, and they brought pepper off to us in proas as
+fast as we could conveniently weigh it, and continued to do so till we
+had got about 200 bahars. They then began to grow slack in their
+proceedings, on which, fearing to lose the monsoon by spending too much
+time at this place, we weighed and proceeded for Bantam.
+
+We left Tecoo on the 8th December, three of our men remaining in the
+Hosiander, which needed their assistance, and proceeded towards Bantam,
+mostly keeping in sight of Sumatra. At our entrance into the straits of
+Sunda, on the 16th of that month, we met the Dragon on her homeward
+voyage, by which ship we sent letters to England. Next day, the 17th, we
+anchored in Bantam roads, and went immediately ashore to provide our
+lodging, and by the 29th our whole cargo was completed.
+
+We set sail from Bantam on the 2d January, 1614, for England, not having
+hitherto lost a single man by sickness during our whole voyage, for
+which we were thankful to God. This same day, as we were going out by
+way of Pulo Panian, we met General Saris in the Clove, then returning
+from Japan; and we came to anchor, that we might have his letters for
+England, together with four chests. We likewise spared him two of our
+hands, of which he was in great need; one being a youth, named Mortimer
+Prittie, and the other a carpenter's mate, named Thomas Valens, as he
+had not a single carpenter alive in his ship.
+
+Having settled all these matters with the Clove, we resumed our voyage
+for England on the 4th January, and came to anchor in Saldanha bay on
+the 21st March, where we got a sufficient supply of beeves and sheep
+from the natives, with abundance of fish, caught in our own seine. We
+left that place on the 9th April, with prosperous winds, which continued
+favourable till we were three degrees north of the equator, which we
+crossed the 11th May. When in lat. 00 deg. 22' N. many of our men began to
+fall sick, some of them of the scurvy, and with swelled legs. On the
+10th July, 1614, by the blessing of God, we came to anchor in the Downs.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+CONTINUATION OF THE EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH EAST INDIA COMPANY TO
+INDIA.
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+In the immediately preceding chapter, we have given a series of the
+first twelve voyages fitted out by the English East India Company, in
+the prosecution of their exclusive trade to India, as preserved by
+Samuel Purchas; and we now mean, chiefly from the same source, to
+continue the series for a few years longer. At the close of the last
+voyage of the foregoing chapter, Purchas informs us, that "The order of
+reckoning must be now altered, because the voyages of the company were
+for the future set forth by means of a _joint stock_, instead of by
+particular ships, each upon a separate subscription, having separate
+stocks and factories; the whole proceedings being, in the sequel, at the
+general risk of, and accountable to the entire society or company of
+adventurers." He farther adds, "That the whole of these joint-stock
+voyages had not come into his hands; but that such as he had been able
+to procure, and were meet for publication, he had inserted in his
+Collection."
+
+The learned historiographer of the East India Company[120] gives rather
+a different account of the former series of separate or unconnected
+voyages, than that which we have taken from Purchas, terming the last
+voyage in our former chapter only the _ninth_, while Purchas denominates
+it the _twelfth_.
+
+[Footnote 120: Ann. of the Hon. E.I. Co, I. 162.]
+
+This difference, which is not at all material, may have arisen from
+Purchas having considered some of the ships belonging to _single_
+adventurers or subscriptions, which made separate voyages or parts of
+voyages, as _separate_ adventures. We come now to a new era in the mode
+of conducting the English exclusive trade to India, of the motives for
+which the Annals give the following account.[121]
+
+[Footnote 121: Id. I. 165.]
+
+"The inconveniences which had been experienced from separate classes of
+adventurers, partners in the East India Company, fitting out equipments
+on their own particular portions of stock, induced the directors, or
+committees, to resolve, in 1612, that, in future, the trade should be
+carried on by a joint stock only; and, on the basis of this resolution,
+the sum of L429,000 was subscribed: and, though portions of this joint
+stock were applied to the equipment of four voyages, the general
+instructions to the commanders were given in the name, and by the
+authority, of the governor, deputy-governor, and committees of the
+company of merchants in London trading to the East Indies, who explained
+that the whole was a joint concern, and that the commanders were to be
+responsible to the company for their conduct, both in the sale and
+purchase of commodities in the East Indies, and for their general
+conduct, in extending the commerce, within the limits of the company.
+The transition, therefore, from trading on _separate adventures_, which
+has been described as an imitation of the Dutch, to trading on a _joint
+stock_, arose out of the good sense of the English nation, which, from
+experience, had discovered the evil consequences of internal opposition,
+and had determined to proceed on a system better calculated to promote
+the general interest of the East India Company.
+
+"Notwithstanding this resolution, the proportions of this aggregate sum
+were applied to what has been termed the _tenth, eleventh, twelfth_, and
+_thirteenth_ voyages, in the following manner: In 1613, the _tenth_
+voyage was undertaken, the stock of which was estimated at L18,810 in
+money, and L12,446 in goods, the fleet consisting of _eight_ vessels. In
+1614, the stock for the _eleventh_ voyage was L13,942 in money, and
+L23,000 in goods, the fleet being _eight ships_. In 1615, the stock for
+the _twelfth_ voyage was L26,660 in money, and L26,065 in goods, with
+_six ships_. In 1616, the stock for the _thirteenth_ voyage was L52,087
+in money, and L16,506 in goods, the fleet containing _seven ships_. The
+purchase, repair, and equipment of vessels during these four voyages
+amounted to L272,544, which, with the specified stock and cargoes,
+accounts for the disbursement of the L429,000, the sum subscribed on the
+joint stock in 1613.[122]
+
+[Footnote 122: The enumerated particulars amount to L462,060, and exceed
+the subscribed joint stock by L33,060.--E.]
+
+"The profits on this joint stock are stated to have amounted, on the
+first two voyages, to L120 per cent. on the original subscription; but
+they were subsequently much diminished, by the difficulties which the
+English trade to the East Indies began to experience, from the
+opposition of the Dutch in the Spice Islands; so that, at the conclusion
+of this first joint stock, in 1617, the average profits of the four
+voyages did not exceed L87:10s. per. cent on the original subscription,
+notwithstanding the cargo of one of the vessels (the New-year's Gift)
+cost only 40,000 rials of eight, and the sale produce, in England,
+amounted to L80,000 sterling."
+
+It is not the purpose of this Collection to enlarge on the history of
+the East India Company, any farther than by giving relations of its
+early voyages, so far as these have come down to us in the Pilgrims of
+Purchas, their only published record; and we now therefore proceed with
+such of these voyages as are contained in that curious collection, and
+seem to be worth including in this work.--E.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Voyage of Captain Nicholas Downton to India, in 1614._[122]
+
+The ships employed on this voyage, the _second_ set forth by the _joint_
+stock of the East India Company, were the New-year's Gift admiral, of
+650 tons, on board of which Captain Downton sailed as general or chief
+commander; the Hector of 500 tons, vice-admiral; the Merchant's Hope,
+of 300 tons; and the Salomon of 200 tons. We have thus only_ four_ ships
+enumerated by Purchas, as employed in the _second_ voyage of the new
+joint stock, instead at _eight_ mentioned in the _Annals_, as before
+stated in the introduction to the present chapter. In this voyage, Mr
+William Edwards was lieutenant, or next in command under Captain
+Downton, being likewise Cape merchant, and commander of the Hector. Mr
+Nicholas Easworth was Cape merchant, and commander of the Merchant's
+Hope. Mr Thomas Elkington, Cape merchant, and commander of the Salomon.
+Mr Peter Rogers minister; Martin Pring. Arthur Spaight, Matthew
+Molineux, and Hugh Bennet, masters of the four ships, assisted by sundry
+mates,--Purch.
+
+[Footnote 122: Purch. Pilg. I. 500.--Extracted from the journal of
+Captain Downton]
+
+
+Sec.1. _Incidents at Saldanha, Socotora, and Swally; with an Account of
+Disagreements between the Moguls and Portuguese, and between the Nabob
+and the English._
+
+We sailed from England on the 1st March, 1614, and arrived in the road
+of Saldanha, or Table Bay, on Wednesday the 15th June, being saluted on
+our arrival by a great storm. While every person was busy in mooring the
+ship, John Barter, who had lost his reason in consequence of a long
+fever, was suddenly missing, and was supposed to have made away with
+himself. The 16th we erected our tents, and placed a guard for their
+defence. We landed half our casks on the 17th, to be overhauled and
+seasoned; and this day _Choree_, the Saldanian or Hottentot, presented
+me a young steer. The 18th we landed more of our beer casks, to be
+washed, repaired, and seasoned. This day, _Choree_ departed into the
+interior, carrying with him his copper armour, javelins, and all things
+belonging to him, promising to be back the third day after, but he never
+returned.
+
+The 29th I sent George Downton ashore, to take observations of the
+latitude and variation, in consideration of the great difference in the
+variations, as observed in this and my former voyage in the Pepper-corn.
+We made the latitude exactly 34 deg. S. and the variation 1 deg. 45' W. by an
+azimuth, whereas most of the former variations at this place were
+easterly. We this night took down our tents, and brought every thing on
+board, making our ships ready to depart next day, which we did
+accordingly.
+
+We came to anchor in the bay of St Augustine in Madagascar on the 6th
+August, when the inhabitants abandoned the place, so that we could have
+no intercourse with them, but we afterwards got some refreshments from
+them. We here cut down some straight timber for various uses. We set
+sail on the 12th August, and anchored in Delisa bay in Socotora on the
+9th September. Next day we went ashore to wait upon the king, who was
+ready with his attendants to receive me, and gave me an account of the
+existing war in India, where the Mogul and the kings of the Deccan had
+united to drive the Portuguese from the country, owing to their having
+captured a ship coming from Juddah in the Red Sea, in which were three
+millions of treasure. He also informed me of two great fights which
+Captain Best had with the Portuguese, and of other news in these parts.
+I here procured such refreshments as the place could furnish, and bought
+2722 pounds of aloes from the king.
+
+Leaving Delisa on the 14th September, we got sight of the Deccan coast
+near Dabul on the 2d October, where we found great hindrance to our
+navigation, till we learnt by experience to anchor during the ebb tide,
+and continue our course with the tide of flood. Continuing this
+procedure, we anchored in the evening of the 14th, two and a half miles
+short of the bar of Surat; when presently a fleet of fourteen frigates
+or barks came to anchor near us, which we discovered by their lights, as
+it was quite dark. But as they could easily see us, by the lights at our
+ports, that we were in readiness for them, they durst not come any
+nearer, so that we rode quietly all night. Early of the 15th, we weighed
+with the land-wind, and coming somewhat near the frigates, they also
+weighed and stood to the southwards. We held on our course past the bar,
+towards South Swally, where we soon after arrived, though much opposed
+by contrary winds.
+
+Soon after we were anchored, I sent Molineux in his pinnace, and Mr
+Spooner with Samuel Squire in my _gellywatte_,[123] to take the
+soundings within the sands. In a channel where we found only five feet
+at low water in our former voyage, Mr Molineux had now three fathoms;
+and Mr Spooner had now seven or eight feet, where our boats could not
+pass at all formerly. Seeing some people on the shore in the afternoon,
+whom I supposed might be some of our merchants from Surat, I sent my
+pinnace to them; but they were some of the people belonging to _Coge
+Nozan_, sent to discover what nation we were of. From them I got farther
+information respecting the wars with the Portuguese, being told that the
+Moguls were besieging Damaun and Diu, Mocrib or Mucrob Khan being the
+general of the Mogul forces against Damaun; and I also learnt to my
+sorrow, that Mucrob Khan was governor and viceroy, as it may be called,
+not only over Surat, but all the country round, as, from former
+experience, I considered him to be a great enemy of our nation, and a
+friend to the Portuguese. From these people likewise, I heard of the
+health of Mr Aldworth and the rest of our factory, and wrote to hasten
+his presence, sending my letters by the servants of Coge Nozan.
+
+[Footnote 123: From this singular term, what is now called the
+_jollyboat_ has probably derived its name.--E.]
+
+I sent my purser on shore in the pinnace, early of the 16th, to purchase
+such necessaries as I thought might easily have been got; but he
+returned about ten o'clock a.m. without buying any thing for our
+purpose, bringing with him Mr Aldword, the chief merchant of our factory
+at Surat, along with whom was one Richard Steel, who had come over-land
+to Surat from Aleppo.[124] Mr Aldworth endeavoured to persuade me that
+Mucrob Khan was our friend, and that we had now an excellent opportunity
+to obtain good trade and satisfactory privileges while the Moguls were
+engaged in war with the Portuguese; and as both the Nabob and all the
+natives were rejoiced at hearing of our arrival, they would assuredly
+give us a most favourable reception. Pleased with these hopeful
+circumstances, I yet still wished some other person here in command
+instead of Mucrob Khan, of whom I remained doubtful, and that we should
+have no free trade from him, but in his accustomed manner, which I
+believed to have been, of his own accord to cross us, and not as so
+constrained by direction of his king; and the event turned out
+accordingly, though we were wise behind the band, as will appear in the
+sequel. Even the name he bore ought to have opened our eyes as to his
+influence with the Great Mogul: as _Mocrub_ signifies as much as _his
+own bowels, Khan_ meaning _great lord_. Yet I was deluded to believe
+that his favour with the king was tottering, and that he might easily be
+brought into disgrace, by complaint of any thing done contrary to the
+will or humour of the king; so that we were too bold, and injured our
+business when we found him opposing us, as we thought unreasonably. On
+enquiring into the state of our business, and the health of our factory,
+Mr Aldworth informed me that Paul Canning and several others had died;
+that Thomas Kerridge had long since been agent in his room at the court
+of the Mogul, and that the factory at Surat now only contained himself
+and William Bidulph.
+
+[Footnote 124: Mr Richard Stell, or Steel, had gone to Aleppo, to
+recover a debt from a merchant of that city, who had fled to India; and,
+following him through Persia, Mr Steel had arrived at Surat. On his
+report, the factors at Surat made an experiment to open a trade with
+Persia, which will form the subject of a future section of this
+chapter.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 17th, I called a council to advise upon the best
+manner of conducting our affairs here, and to consider who might be the
+best person to send to Agraas resident. Then entering upon the six
+interrogatories, inserted in the second article of our commission, I
+required Mr Aldworth to give direct answers to every question.--1. In
+what favour was Paul Canning with the emperor and his council, and how
+did he conduct himself at court in the business entrusted to him? He
+answered, That on his first arrival at court, he was well respected by
+the emperor, till the Jesuits made known that he was a merchant, and not
+sent immediately from our king; after which he was neglected, as he
+himself complained: and, as for his carriage and behaviour there, so far
+as he knew, it was sufficiently good;--3. Then demanding, whether it
+were needful to maintain a resident at court? Mr Aldworth answered, That
+it was certainly necessary, as the emperor required that one of our
+nation should reside there; and therefore, that the person ought to be a
+man of good respect, for preventing and counteracting any injuries that
+might be offered by the Jesuits, our determined adversaries; as he might
+also be extremely useful in promoting and directing the purchase and
+sale of various commodities.--6. Being questioned as to the expences of
+a resident at court? he said, according to the estimate of Paul Canning,
+it might be about L300 per annum; but, some time afterwards, his
+estimate was found to extend to five, six, and seven hundred pounds a
+year.--Being afterwards questioned, Whether he thought it fit that Mr
+Edwards should proceed to court under the designation of a merchant,
+according to the strict letter of the company's commission? his opinion
+was, by the experience of the late Mr Canning, that such a resident
+would not be at all respected by the king.
+
+In the morning of the 24th, Coge Nozan came down to the water side, and
+rested in my tent till I landed. I repaired to him, accompanied by all
+our merchants, and attended by a strong guard, armed with halberts,
+muskets, and pikes, having a coach to carry me from the landing place to
+the tent. On alighting from my coach, Coge Nozan came immediately to
+meet me. Before entering on business, he was told that a present for the
+Nabob was to be delivered to him, which was brought in. This consisted
+of a case containing six knives, two pair of knives, six sword-blades,
+six Spanish pikes, one case of combs, one mirror, one picture of Mars
+and Venus, one ditto of the Judgment of Paris, two Muscovy hides, and
+one gilded case of bottles filled with strong rich cordials. I then made
+the following present to himself: Six knives in single sheaths, four
+sword-blades, two pikes, one comb-case, a mirror, a picture of Moses,
+and a case of bottles, in consideration of the promise made by the nabob
+to our people, that whatever Coge Nozan agreed to, he the nabob would
+perform.
+
+I then moved for the enlargement of our privileges, and lessening of our
+customs, especially at Baroach, and that we might have a daily bazar or
+market at the water side, where we might purchase beef for our people,
+according to the _firmaun_ already granted by the Mogul, and because
+other flesh did not answer for them. He answered, that the nabob would
+shew us every favour in his power, if we would assist him against the
+Portuguese; that the customs of Baroach were out of his power to
+regulate, as the king had already farmed these to another person at a
+stipulated rent; and that we should have a regular market, but that
+bullocks and cows could not be allowed, as the king had granted a
+firmaun to the Banians, in consideration of a very large sum of money,
+that these might not be slaughtered. In fine, I found he had no power to
+grant us any thing; yet, willing to leave me somewhat contented, he
+proposed that I should send some of our merchants along with him to the
+nabob, where our business might be farther discussed.
+
+I accordingly sent along with him, Mr Aldworth, Mr Ensworth, Mr
+Dodsworth, Mr Mitford, and some others. Two or three days afterwards,
+they had access to the nabob, to whom they explained our desires, as
+before expressed. He then desired to know whether we would go with our
+ships to fight for him against Damaun, in which case, he said, we might
+count upon his favour? To this it was answered, that we could not on any
+account do this, as our king and the king of Spain were in peace. He
+then asked if we would remove our ships to the bar of Surat, and fight
+there against the Portuguese ships, if they came to injure the subjects
+of the Mogul? This likewise was represented to be contrary to the peace
+between our kings. On which he said, since we would do nothing for his
+service, he would do nothing for us. Several of the merchants of Surat
+endeavoured to persuade our merchants, that I ought to give way to the
+reasonable request of the nabob, and might still do what I thought
+proper; as, notwithstanding of our ships riding at the bar, the
+Portuguese frigates could go in and out on each side of me, owing to
+their light draught of water. To this I answered, that the proposal was
+utterly unfit for me to listen to; as whatever I promised I must
+perform, though at the expence of my own life and of all under my
+command, and that I could not possibly lend myself to fight against the
+Portuguese on any account whatever, unless they first attacked me, as it
+was absolutely contrary to my commission from my own sovereign. I added,
+that, if the Portuguese provoked me by any aggression, I would not be
+withheld from fighting them for all the wealth of the nabob: But he made
+small account of this distinction, and, seeing that we refused to fulfil
+his wishes, he opposed us in all our proceedings as far as he could, so
+that we nearly lost all our former hopes of trading at this place. In
+this dilemma, I made enquiry respecting _Gengomar_ and _Castellata_, and
+also of _Gogo_:[125] but could get poor encouragement to change for
+better dealing, so that we remained long perplexed how to act, and
+returned to our business at the ships.
+
+[Footnote 125: Gogo is on the west shore of the gulf of Cambay. In an
+after passage of this voyage, what is here called Gengomar _and_
+Castellata, is called Gengomar _or_ Castelletto, which may possibly
+refer to Jumbosier, on a river of the same name, about sixty miles north
+from Surat. Castelletta must have been a name imposed by the
+Portuguese.--E.]
+
+The 27th, in the morning, when Nicholas Ufflet went ashore, he found all
+the people belonging to Swally had gone away from the water-side in the
+night, as also all those who used to stay beside the tents, in
+consequence of an order from the nabob; and was farther informed that
+our merchants were detained at Surat, having been stopped by force when
+attempting to cross the bridge, and had even been beaten by the guard
+set there by the nabob. The gunner's boy and his companion, formerly
+supposed to have run away, and who were in company at the time with our
+merchants, being on their return to the ships, were also well beaten,
+and detained with the rest. The 31st we began to take in fresh water, to
+be ready for departing, as our stay here seemed so very uncertain. This
+day, Thomas Smith, the master's boy, had most of the outer part of one
+of his thighs bitten off by a great fish, while swimming about the ship.
+The ravenous fish drew him under water, yet he came up again and swam
+to the ship, and got up to the bend, where he fainted. Being brought
+into the gun-room, the surgeon endeavoured to do what he could for his
+recovery; but he had lost so much blood that he never recovered out of
+the swoon, and shortly died.
+
+In the evening of the 2d November, Mr Aldworth and Mr Elkington came
+down from Surat, where they left Mr Ensworth very sick. They reported to
+me their proceedings with the nabob, as formerly stated; but said they
+were now reconciled, and that he had made fair promises of future
+respect, with a free trade through all the country under his government.
+I do not attribute his severe proceedings hitherto to any hatred or
+ill-will to our nation, but to his fears lest we might unite with the
+Portuguese against him, owing to my refusing to assist him against
+Damaun. These his doubts and fears were increased by a knavish device of
+the subtle and lying Jesuits; who, taking advantage of my refusal to
+fight against the Portuguese without cause, at Damaun or elsewhere,
+pretended with the nabob that they had a letter from the viceroy,
+saying, That he and his friends the English meant to join their forces
+and come against Surat. This devilish device gave much hindrance to our
+business, by occasioning continual doubt in the nabob's mind of our
+friendly intentions; and unfortunately likewise, Mr Aldworth had
+strengthened these doubts and fears, though ignorant of the lying
+inventions of the jesuits; for, thinking to mollify their rigour, he
+rashly advised them to beware, lest their ill usage might force us to
+join with the Portuguese against them. We likewise believed that the
+order of the nabob, forbidding the people to trade with us on board,
+proceeded entirely from his desire to thwart us: But we afterwards
+learnt, by letter from Thomas Kerridge, that Mucrob Khan, and all other
+governors of sea-ports, had express orders from the Mogul, not to allow
+any trade with us till they had first chosen and purchased, for the
+king's use, all kinds of strange and unusual things we might have to
+dispose of.
+
+On the 3d I called a council to deliberate concerning our business, and
+especially how far we might proceed in aid of the natives against the
+Portuguese, for which purpose we carefully examined our commission and
+instructions. We also arranged the appointments of the merchants for
+their several places of employment, both such as were to remain in the
+factory at Surat, and those who were to proceed on the voyage. This day
+likewise, sixty bales of indigo, and eleven packs of cotton-yarn, came
+aboard from Surat, being goods that belonged to the _twelfth_ voyage.
+It was my desire to have been ashore among our merchants, that I might
+assist in arranging our business at Surat; and this the rather because
+of the turbulent, head-strong, and haughty spirit of----,[126] who was
+ever striving to sway every thing his own way, thwarting others who
+aimed at the common good, and whose better discretion led them to more
+humility. But such was the uncertain state of our business, partly owing
+to the nabob and his people, and partly to the Portuguese, who I heard
+were arming against us; and besides, because I understood that the nabob
+proposed to demand restitution for the goods taken by Sir Henry
+Middleton in the Red Sea, at under rates, as they say, though I know
+they had goods for goods even to the value of a halfpenny. On all these
+accounts, therefore, I thought it best to keep nearest my principal
+charge, referring all things on shore to the merchants of my council, in
+most of whom I had great confidence.
+
+[Footnote 126: This name is left blank in the Pilgrims, probably because
+Purchas, a contemporary, did not wish to give offence.--E.]
+
+The 22d November, I finished my letters for Persia; being one for the
+company, to be forwarded over land, one for Sir Robert Shirley, and one
+of instructions for Richard Steel. The 23d, _Lacandus_, the Banian, came
+down to us, with news of discontent and hard speeches that had passed
+between the nabob and our merchants, but who were now again reconciled.
+This was occasioned by Mr Edwards refusing to let him see the presents,
+which he was at last obliged to consent to. All these merchants wrote me
+at this time separately, that the viceroy was certainly arming against
+us. At this time Mr Ensworth and Timothy Wood died within an hour of
+each other. John Orwicke, Robert Young, and Esay But, were now
+dispatched to provide such cloths and cotton-yarns as we had formerly
+agreed on. The 25th Mr Edwards wrote me of the coming of three great
+men, bringing seven firmauns from the Great Mogul; in whose presence the
+nabob bestowed upon him 850 _mahmudies_, ten fine _basties_, thirty
+_top-seels_, and thirty _allizaes_; at the same time he gave ten
+_top-seels_ to Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, a cloak to Mr Aldworth and
+another to Mr Elkington, Mr Dodsworth having had one before. He likewise
+promised free trade to all places under his command, and abundant
+refreshments for our people in the ships.
+
+The 27th, John Crowther came from Surat, to inform me he had been
+appointed by the chief merchants at Surat to accompany Mr Steel into
+Persia, and had therefore come to take leave of me, and to fetch away
+his things from the ship. This day also Mr Edwards wrote to me, by
+Edmund Espinol, to send him fifty elephants teeth, indifferently chosen
+as to size, as a banian merchant was in treaty for them all, if they
+could agree on terms. The 6th December, the nabob seemed ashamed that he
+had not shewn me the smallest respect since my arrival, and, being
+desirous to excuse himself, he this day entreated Mr Edwards to go on
+board along with the great banian who had bought our ivory, and
+Lacandas, the banian merchant of the junk belonging to the king of
+_Cushan_.[127] He chose this last, on account of his former familiarity
+with our people, and commissioned him to buy sword-blades, knives, and
+mirrors. By them he sent me a present, consisting of two _corge_ of
+coarse _bastas_, ten fine _bastas_, ten _top-seels_, ten _cuttonies_,
+and three quilts, together with a message, certifying that the nabob
+proposed to come down to visit me in a day or two at the most. At their
+going ashore, I gave them a salute of five guns.
+
+[Footnote 127: Kessem, on the coast of Arabia Felix, is probably here
+meant.--E.]
+
+They told me, that the nabob had certain intelligence from Goa, that the
+viceroy was fitting out all the force he could muster to come against
+us; and expressed a wish, on the part of the nabob, that I would convoy
+one or two of his ships for two or three days sail from the coast, which
+were bound for the Red Sea. To this I answered, that I could not do
+this; as, if once off the coast, the wind was entirely adverse for our
+return: But, if he would further our dispatch, so that we might be ready
+in any convenient time, I would do any thing reasonable that he could
+desire. The 9th, the nabob's son came to the shore, but would not
+venture on board, wherefore I went ashore to him. He had a horse ready
+for me on landing to fetch me, and desired me to sit down beside him,
+which I did. He then commanded some horsemen, who accompanied him, to
+amuse me, by shewing their warlike evolutions on the sands, chasing each
+other after the fashion of the Deccan, whence they were; and at his
+desire I caused eleven guns to be fired, to do him honour. Though he
+refused to drink any wine at this interview, he sent for it after his
+departure, as also for a fowling-piece he had seen in the hands of one
+of our people, both which I sent him, together with a bowl from which to
+drink the wine.
+
+Sec.2. _Account of the Forces of the Portuguese, their hostile Attempts,
+and Fight with the English, in which they are disgracefully repulsed_.
+
+On the 16th of December, 1613, Mr Elkington wrote me, That the nabob had
+told him the Portuguese frigates had burnt Gogo, with many _gouges_ or
+villages in its vicinity, together with ten large ships, of which the
+_Rehemee_ was one, and an hundred and twenty small vessels. He said
+likewise, that the nabob was much displeased with me for not having
+fired upon the Portuguese vessels, as they passed our anchorage, which
+circumstance had renewed his suspicions of our friendly intelligence
+with the Portuguese; and, although Mr Elkington had said every thing he
+could to explain the reason of our conduct, as stated formerly, he could
+not satisfy the nabob of its propriety. The 23d two boats came off to us
+for lead; and on the same day we saw twenty-two Portuguese frigates,
+which came to anchor in the night between, us and the mouth of the
+river, where they continued most part of next day.
+
+The 24th, in the morning, we saw four boats coming down the river
+towards us; but, on seeing the Portuguese frigates, they immediately
+turned back, and were chased up the river by two of the frigates.
+Finding they could not get up with the boats, the Portuguese landed and
+set fire to two or three poor cottages, and carried off two or three
+cattle, and then returned to their squadron at the mouth of the river.
+In the afternoon, they all went up the river in company. In the morning
+early of the 25th, we saw five or six frigates under sail. An hour or
+two after, we saw a boat standing towards us, which was presently chased
+by two frigates, on which the men in the small boat ran her a-ground and
+forsook her; but as the frigates could not float near where the boat
+was, and the tide was ebbing fast, they departed without farther harm.
+The 26th in the morning, I sent the Hope a good way to the northward
+from the rest of our fleet, to see whether the Portuguese would assail
+her.
+
+Early in the morning of the 27th, the Portuguese frigates came and made
+a bravado before our ship, and then before the Salomon, which was next
+us; and from thence went directly against the Hope, which rode a great
+way from us, in which manoeuvre they had all their men close stowed
+below, and not one to be seen. The master of the Hope hailed them twice,
+but they would give no answer; on which they let fly at them from the
+bow-chases of the Hope, which only could be brought to bear, and by
+which they were forced with some loss to stand away. The master of the
+Hope was satisfied, if he had not shot at them, that they would have
+attempted to board, or to have set his ship on fire, as they had the
+advantage of both wind and tide, and were so directly a-head of his ship
+that he could hardly get any of his guns to bear upon them, while the
+rest of our ships could not have come up to his rescue. In the
+afternoon, I sent the Salomon to keep company with the Hope; and, going
+to the northwards of her, she made several shots at the frigates, but we
+did not perceive that any harm was done. I therefore ordered a gun to be
+fired, as a warning to desist, on which the Salomon stood in again and
+came to anchor.
+
+In the morning of the 28th, I went in the pinnace aboard the Hope and
+Salomon, to enquire the reason of their firing. And the Portuguese,
+seeing our boats pass to and fro, removed in the afternoon, and anchored
+a little way without us, obviously for the purpose of cutting off our
+intercourse. In the meantime, the boat which had been chased ashore on
+the 25th, came aboard the Gift, bringing some letters from Mr Elkington,
+which our master sent to me, as I was then in the Hope. Having answered
+Mr Elkington's letter, I sent back the _gelliwat_ to the Gift, with
+directions to go thence to Surat in the night. But, as the _gelliwat_
+[galivat] returned, she was chased by the frigates; which perceiving, I
+waved her to return, but she held on her way, not observing my signal.
+The frigates held her so close in chase, that they got within shot of
+her, and even fired one gun; and had not the Gift slipped one cable and
+veered another, and plied her ordnance at the Portuguese, they had
+surely taken or sunk the _gelliwat_. This forced the Portuguese to give
+over the chase, not without damage. Late at night, on the tide of ebb, I
+made the Hope and Salomon set sail and come near the other two ships,
+and then returned on board the Gift.
+
+Perceiving on the 29th, that my continuing off the bar of Surat was
+quite unavailing, as the Portuguese frigates could pass and repass to
+and from the river, by going across the sands, where there was not
+water to float my ships; and that no boats could come to us to fetch
+away our goods, for fear of the frigates, neither could we have any
+intercourse with our friends ashore, to know what passed; I therefore
+set sail for Swally roads, where I arrived next day, having very little
+wind.
+
+On the 14th January, 1614, we heard of many frigates being arrived,
+which rode at the bar of Surat all next day till night; and, leaving
+that place after dark, they came and rode within shot of us till next
+morning, when they weighed and stood back to the southwards. While they
+remained at anchor, supposing they might be the Mallabars, which the
+nabob had formerly promised to send me, I put forth a flag of truce, and
+sent Mr Spooner, one of our master's mates, towards them, directing him
+to keep a watchful eye to our signals, which we should make if we saw
+any reason of suspicion. Seeing our gallivat draw near, and no sign of
+friendship in answer to ours, I hoisted my flag and fired a shot to
+recall our boat, which immediately came back. At this time, our sentinel
+at the mast-head descried another fleet of frigates, which afterwards
+assembled at the bar of Surat, and went all into the river. By this I
+was satisfied they were all Portuguese, and was glad our men and boat
+had escaped their hands. Thinking these frigates were forerunners of a
+greater force, I ordered the decks to be cleared, all our guns thrown
+loose, and every thing to be in readiness for action, both for the great
+guns and small arms, and to fit up barricades for close quarters. In the
+night of the 17th, all the frigates came out of the river, and in the
+morning were all at the point of the bar.
+
+The 18th, Maugie, the banian captain formerly mentioned, accompanied by
+another great man, who was son to _Clych Khan_, came to the water side
+to speak with me, to whom I went ashore. Not long after, word was
+brought from on board, that they had descried a fleet of ships far off,
+which looked very big, but which we could not see from the shore, owing
+to its being very low. Taking leave of my visitors, I returned aboard,
+and made every thing be put in readiness, which was done immediately.
+Towards night, we made them out to be six galleons, with three smaller
+ships, besides the sixty frigates which were here before. Two gallies
+belonging to this armament were not yet come up. The tide being spent,
+they came to anchor till next day. The 19th, they plied up to the
+entrance of our new channel, where they came to anchor, and where they
+were joined by the two gallies. One of their great ships, being too
+forward, came too near the sands and grounded, but was soon got off
+again.
+
+On this occasion, Mucrob Khan, the nabob of Surat, sent the sabandar and
+several others of the principal men of Surat, with a great present of
+provisions to the Portuguese, and to endeavour to enter into terms of
+peace; but though great policy was used on both sides, they broke off
+without coming to any terms. This was done by the nabob to my great
+mortification, for he and all the country despaired of my being able to
+resist such disproportionate force, and he was therefore willing before
+hand to conciliate the viceroy by presents; considering, if I were once
+overthrown, his own turn would come next, either to endure a severe
+assault, or to make such a peace as the enemy chose to dictate. Peace
+was certainly most desirable for the viceroy, that he might restore
+trade with the Moguls. Yet, seeing the tractableness of the nabob, and
+his apparent earnestness for peace, the viceroy made light of it for the
+present, expecting to bring it to bear with great advantage after he had
+overthrown us, which he made no doubt easily to accomplish. When this
+was performed, he expected to receive great presents, and great
+submission from the Moguls to the dictates of the conqueror. But it
+pleased God, who beheld the injustice of his attempt, to turn the event
+contrary to the expectations both of the viceroy and the nabob. After
+failing in all his attempts against me, and finding he could not even
+gain a _boats thole_ from me in all the time he spent here, with loss
+and disgrace, the viceroy was fain to revive the former despised proffer
+of peace with the nabob: While the nabob on the other hand, confirmed by
+the experience of a month, and seeing that the viceroy, after all his
+boastful threatenings, and with so vast an armament, was unable to
+prevail against our four merchant ships, or even to remove our small
+force one foot from their place, gave for answer, that he would not make
+peace with the viceroy. Thus was the viceroy frustrated in both his
+hopes, of an easy victory over us, and an advantageous peace with the
+Moguls. After this digression, I now return to our proceedings.
+
+When we formerly heard of the force which the viceroy was fitting out
+against us; we had no conception it would be so formidable as it now
+appeared, and therefore deemed it expedient to consult how, by God's
+help, we might best resist. The odds and advantages on their side, made
+me calculate every thing that made against me. Being far out-numbered
+by his forces, which I esteemed the principal ships and means belonging
+to the Portuguese in India, and having all the people of greatest rank
+and valour, I considered it might be too hazardous for us to put out
+into deep water, as by their numbers they would be able to intercept and
+overcharge me, and to force me irrecoverably aground, on one side or
+other. Such were my apparent disadvantages in going out to sea; while I
+knew, on the other hand, that their numerous smaller vessels might much
+annoy us with fire-works, or put us otherwise into great hazard, in the
+place where we now rode at anchor, where I was hopeful their great ships
+could not or durst not come, owing to the shoal water. Though my numbers
+were considerably lessened by sickness and deaths, all my people, from
+the highest to the lowest, seemed quite courageous, yet ignorant both of
+our danger and how it was to be prevented; but their brave spirit gave
+me great hope. Yet my anxiety was not small, how I might best act in
+maintaining the honour of my country, and not neglect the valuable
+property entrusted to my care by my friends and employers; as not only
+was the present charge to be put in hazard, but all hopes also of future
+benefits, if I were now overthrown; as the enemy, if he now got the
+mastery, would be able to make peace with the Moguls on his own terms,
+to the expulsion of our nation for ever.
+
+Besides these considerations, I leave to such parents as are tender for
+the safety of their dutiful and obedient children, to imagine how great
+was my anxiety for the safety of the people under my command. So great
+was my cares all this time, that I had little time for conversation, or
+even almost to shew myself sensible of the approaching dangers. Whenever
+I could get free from others, I very earnestly craved the aid and
+direction of the almighty and ever merciful God, who had often delivered
+me before from manifold dangers, praying that he would so direct me that
+I might omit nothing having a tendency to the safety of my charge, and
+our defence against the enemy. I had strong confidence that the Almighty
+would grant my request, and yet was often led to doubt, through my
+manifold and grievous offences. I resolved at length what to do, by
+God's assistance, providing the masters of the ships would agree to
+second me. Being satisfied, if we should-receive a defeat while at
+anchor, our disgrace would be great, and our enemies could in that case
+be little injured by us; while by setting sail, the viceroy, in his
+greediness and pride, might do himself some wrong upon the sands, by
+which he might cripple his own force, and thereby open a way for our
+getting out through the rest. Yet this plan seemed only fit for ultimate
+necessity, considering that much of our goods were now on their way, and
+others were expected from day to day; and, if once out, unless it
+pleased God to make us the conquerors, so as to drive the viceroy clean
+away, I should on no account be able to return to my anchorage, where
+only I could get in my lading. Considering also that the viceroy would
+hold his honour in such high estimation, that he would rather die than
+give way; and besides, that my people would be tired and half spent with
+labour, before going to fight, by heaving at the capstan to get up our
+anchors, setting the sails, and so forth, which in this hot country
+makes them both weary and faint, to the great diminution of their
+courage; while the viceroy and his soldiers being troubled with no
+labour, which among them is done by slaves and inferior mariners, would
+come fresh into the battle. Likewise, even supposing the viceroy to lose
+many men in the fight, he could be again supplied from the nearest towns
+belonging to the Portuguese, by means of his frigates; whereas we could
+not have a single man replaced, whatever number we might have slain or
+disabled.
+
+Having none of our merchants aboard, as they were all employed in the
+country, or with Mr Elkington in our factory at Surat, I sent for all
+the masters, on the night of this Thursday the 19th January, desiring
+them and some of the mates to come to supper with me on board the Gift.
+I then made them a speech on our present situation, desiring every one
+to give his opinion freely, how we might best proceed in our present
+straits. I declared to them my confidence in God, notwithstanding all
+the force of these bragging Portuguese, that their injurious attempts
+would not prevail against us, who had been careful not to wrong them in
+the Indies. I represented also to them, the jealousy entertained of us
+by the nabob and other chief men of the country, because we had
+refrained from firing at the saucy bragging frigates.
+
+I found all the masters willing and tractable to my heart's desire. We
+had some few discourses about our provident mooring, as also about
+removing a little lower down. I then proposed my plan to them, desiring
+to have their free opinion. I represented that our ships were now in as
+good condition for battle as we could make them, yet our danger by
+night, if we continued where we were, was not small, however provident
+we might be. Wherefore, I thought it fit in the morning at low water, to
+send one ship to ride as far down as we could have water for all our
+ships at the lowest ebb, at which time none of the enemies ships could
+come to annoy her. This, as I thought, might induce the viceroy to make
+some attempt at high water, when our other three ships might bear down
+against the stream, the springs being now at the highest, when we should
+see what efforts the viceroy might make, and might attend to the same
+and act accordingly, in the hope that the viceroy might commit some
+error to the weakening of his own force and our advantage. And if such
+should happen, it would then be proper for us to put out to sea, in the
+darkness of the following night, when the viceroy would not be in
+condition to make sail to hinder us. Or, if we saw reason, we might make
+sail daily on the flood, working to and again, which would somewhat
+dismay the Portuguese, and encourage our own men. My proposal was
+unanimously agreed to, as the best way of proceeding; and finding Mr
+Molineux quite willing to fall down with the Hope at low water next
+morning, this was directed accordingly.
+
+In the morning of the 20th, at low water, the Hope went down to induce
+the enemy to make some attempt against her when the tide rose, and then
+we in the other ships stood after her. The viceroy, and all the worthy
+knights about him, thinking I was about to flee, hastened as soon as the
+flood would permit to stop the passage, and prevent our getting out. We
+all came to anchor short of the Hope, yet not so as to leave her
+destitute of our help, but rather doubting of sufficient depth for our
+ships at low water so far down. On coming to anchor, I went down into my
+cabin, meaning to have given our friends ashore notice of my purposes,
+that they might know it proceeded from no rashness, but in good
+discretion to wait upon advantages to the prejudice of our enemies. But
+presently I had notice, that three of the Portuguese ships and most of
+their frigates were coming stem on before the wind upon the Hope,
+followed by all the galleons.
+
+We endeavoured to weigh our anchor, but having no time for that, we cut
+our cables, and made sail for the rescue of the Hope. Before we could
+get sufficiently near, the enemies ships were close aboard of her, and
+had entered their men, boarding her with great appearance of resolution.
+But they had no quiet abode there, nor could they rest in their own
+ships, neither could they cast them loose from the Hope, so greatly were
+they annoyed by our great guns and small arms. At length, their
+principal officers being slain, the rest in great numbers leapt into the
+sea, whence many of them were taken up by their frigates. But, before
+quitting their ships, they set them on fire, thinking to have burnt the
+Hope along with them. But, praised be the Lord of Hosts, they were burnt
+without harm to the Hope; for, so soon as the fire had well kindled, the
+flaming ships were cast loose and drifted on the sands, where they
+continued burning till quenched by the flowing tide. So long as
+day-light lasted, we continued exchanging shots from all our ships with
+the galleons, they being on the outside of a spit of sand, and we on the
+inside. They did us little injury in our hulls, but much to our ropes
+and sails overhead. In this conflict, besides those who were wounded, we
+had five men slain. By a great mischance, the main-top-sail, top-mast,
+and shrouds got afire, communicated from the main-top, in consequence of
+the fire-works lodged there taking fire, the man being slain who had the
+charge there. All these were burnt quite away, together with a great
+part of the main-mast; and this misfortune prevented us from going out
+into deep water to try our fortune with the viceroy in close fight. We
+were likewise put to our shifts, not knowing by what means we might get
+the mast replaced.
+
+The 21st I got the anchor weighed, which we had been obliged to cut from
+the day before. On the 22d, I was informed that many great men,
+accompanied by a Portuguese friar, and escorted by five or six hundred
+horse, had come down to Swally, meaning to send the friar next day, with
+three or four principal Moors, to negociate a peace with the viceroy.
+But the nabob sent me word, that he sought for no such thing, and was
+resolved to conclude no peace, unless we were included. He also granted
+me what timber we might need, of which we availed ourselves, and
+promised to supply us with provisions. The Portuguese remaining quiet on
+the 25th, the _muccadam_ of Swally came to me, saying that the
+before-mentioned friar had sent to entice him to poison the well whence
+we had our water, which he would not consent to, and had therefore put
+some live tortoises into it, that these might shew by their deaths, if
+poison should be put therein by the Portuguese. At night, part of the
+120 bales of indigo we had purchased came to the water side, and was
+presently got aboard. This day _Isaac Beg_ sent me a present of fruit
+from his own garden; and this day likewise the rest of the timber for
+repairing the Hope's mast was brought down to us.
+
+The 27th, I sent all our boats to sound the _Swash_ at low water, being
+chiefly on purpose to keep the Portuguese in ignorance of my real
+intentions. They sent one galley and five frigates, thinking to have cut
+off our boats; but in this they failed, as in every thing else they
+attempted against us. The 28th, the nabob sent great store of provisions
+to the viceroy, as goats, bread, plantains, and the like, together with
+a banquet of sweetmeats. Coge Nozan sent me a present of five bullocks.
+Several of our men died about this time of fluxes and other diseases.
+The 31st, we received aboard from Cambay, fifty bales of indigo. In the
+afternoon, one _Coge Arson Ali_ came aboard, and presented me with
+several goats, a large supply of bread, roast-meat, plantains, sugar,
+and other such things. Along with him came an old acquaintance of mine,
+a Persian, who said there were news from Damaun, that the Portuguese had
+sent there 350 men to be buried; and we computed, that there could not
+be less than 100 more, killed and burnt in their ships, besides those
+who were drowned. They also told me, that not only were the Portuguese
+opposed here in India, but also by the Persians at Ormus, and that the
+Malays were in arms against them at Malacca. They likewise assured me,
+that the negociations between Mucrob Khan and the viceroy were entirely
+at an end, and that no peace would take place between them.
+
+I had long wished to see this man, who, till now, could never get leave
+of the nabob, without which no one dared use that freedom. This jealousy
+of the nabob proceeded, as he said, from a great charge enjoined by the
+king to procure for his use all curious things of value, and he is
+fearful lest any of these should pass through other hands, to his
+disgrace, which forces him to employ strange and severe means to prevent
+this happening. Day being nearly spent, I sent them ashore, making them
+a present, and giving money to all their people, having first shewn them
+how far some of our great guns could throw a ball. They then took their
+leave and departed.
+
+Sec.3_Supplies received by the Portuguese, who vainly endeavour to use
+Fire-boats. They seek Peace, which is refused, and depart. Interview
+between the Nabob and Captain Downton, and Departure of the English_.
+
+On the 3d February, 1615, there arrived at the waterside twenty-four
+bales of indigo, seven packs of white, seven of black, and four of blue
+_bastas,_ six packs of cotton yarn, three of _candikens,_ and one pack
+of _crecany,_ all of which were brought immediately on board. This day
+also the supplies for the viceroy came in sight, being two ships of
+burden, two junks, and eight or ten of the country boats. The nabob sent
+me a message by _Lacandas,_ that these were not for the purpose of
+fighting, but were full of combustibles, meant to be set on fire, and
+allowed to drift with the tide upon our ships in the night. I was glad
+of this information, and took immediate measures to prevent the
+consequences of such an attempt, as well as to defend ourselves from the
+smaller vessels. The spring-tides were now near the highest, and were
+consequently fittest for their attacks, so that I expected them every
+tide; and to let them see I was ready for their reception, and how
+little I cared for them, I directed the setting and clearing our watch,
+mornings and evenings, to be announced by a volley of shot from every
+ship, pointing the best piece in my ship at the prow of the viceroy's
+ship, to try his temper, and to daunt the courage of his people. It
+pleased God this morning, when I had least leisure for mourning, to call
+my only son, George Downton, to his mercy, who was buried next morning
+ashore, and the volleys intended to insult the viceroy, served also to
+honour his obsequies.
+
+This morning also, while expecting an assault from the Portuguese, I was
+visited by one _Mousa Attale,_ a Malabar captain, together with his
+troop, from whom I got a description of the principal ports and harbours
+of his country, expressing my anxious desire to become acquainted with
+them, and to have league and intercourse between them and the English,
+with mutual trade and friendship. He seemed willing to encourage this
+proposal, and requested letters to that effect from me, which their
+ships might shew to my countrymen when they happened to meet, which I
+gave him, as also a letter for his king, requesting kind usage for my
+countrymen if any of their ships should come into his harbours. After
+some conference, he departed, and I presented him with a sword-blade,
+and three or four knives.[128] This day the master of the Hope
+represented that he had several men killed in the former engagement, and
+many hurt, bruised, and disabled from service, on which I sent him three
+men from my ship, four from the Hector, and four from the Salomon.
+
+[Footnote 128: These knives, so often mentioned as presents in India,
+were probably daggers.--E.]
+
+The 5th I had letters from Mr Aldworth, informing of his arrival at
+Baroach with his companions, and saying that he had been set upon by 200
+Rajput thieves, nine _coss_ from Baroach, the day before, the thieves
+being armed with pikes, matchlocks, and bows and arrows; but, after some
+skirmishing, they fled, three of them being slain, and more wounded. In
+this affair Humphrey Elkington was shot through the thigh with an arrow,
+one of the horsemen sent by Surder Khan to guard our people was killed,
+and Mr Aldworth's horse sore wounded. The nabob sent me word that the
+viceroy proposed to assault me this day, and therefore sent Coge Nozan
+to guard the land. Nozan came accordingly to the water side, and sent
+his son, _Mamud Iehad,_ to visit me on board, accompanied by a chief
+named _Kemagee,_ the son of _Leckdarsee, rajput_ chieftain of _Guigamar_
+or _Castelletto,_[129] who had for a long time maintained war with the
+Moguls and Portuguese. These chiefs entreated permission to see and
+partake in the fight, and as no assault was made that day, they remained
+all night on board. The _rajput_ chief went ashore next morning, but the
+other remained on board two or three days, and seeing the enemy would do
+nothing, he went likewise ashore.
+
+[Footnote 129: On a former occasion supposed to have been
+Jumbosier.--E.]
+
+On the forenoon of the 8th, we received more indigo aboard, and in the
+afternoon all the Portuguese frigates, with the two junks, and two
+gallies, came driving up with the flood, as if for some attempt against
+us, either by fire, which I most doubted, or otherwise. We therefore got
+under weigh and advanced to meet them, upon which they all made off as
+fast as they could, and we came again to anchor. This was merely a
+device, to make us believe their fire-boats were to come against us
+from the south, and that we might have no suspicion of their coming from
+the northwards; wherefore they again assembled all their junks,
+frigates, and galleys next night, a little without the sands, to call
+our attention from the northern quarter. But I was aware of that being
+the place of greatest danger; and though I commanded a careful outlook
+to be kept both ways, I especially enjoined to be watchful in the north
+quarter, as it fell out accordingly. A little within the night, between
+us and a great light to the westwards, upon the island of Gogo, we could
+discern them creeping up to the north upon the flood; and then, about
+ten o'clock at night, when very dark, and before the moon rose, upon the
+last quarter of the ebb tide, there came down towards us two fire-boats,
+towed by two frigates, which we happily descried before they came nigh,
+and plied them heartily both with great guns and small arms. By this we
+soon beat off the frigates, which set the fire-boats adrift, and made
+sail from us.
+
+One of the fire-boats drifted clear of the Gift, Hector, and Salomon,
+but got athwart the cable of the Hope, and presently blew up; but,
+blessed be God, the Hope received no harm, having cut her cable and got
+clear. The other fire-boat came up likewise on the quarter of the Hope,
+all in flames, but did no harm, as she drifted past with the ebb. She
+came up again with the tide of flood, and was like to have got foul of
+us; but our boats towed her ashore continually burning. The former one
+floated likewise back with the flood, but sank near us in the morning.
+This day I had a letter from Thomas Kerridge, specifying that Nicholas
+Whittington had gone distracted, and expressing some doubts of Richard
+Steel.
+
+The 10th, at night, about the same time as before, two other fire-boats
+came against us, towed by four or five frigates, bearing directly on the
+Hector. Immediately on perceiving them, the Gift and Hector let drive at
+them with great guns and small arms, so that the frigates threw them
+adrift, firing them sooner than they otherwise would. The burning boats
+floated toward the Hector, but having a stiff breeze, drifted past to
+leewards. Within half an hour after, we perceived many boats drifting
+towards the Hector, against which we again let drive, forcing the
+frigates to abandon them in such a hurry that they only set two of them
+on fire, there being four of them chained together. Fortunately we had
+a stiff gale, and by edging up to windward, they all floated clear to
+leeward. While passing, our gunner made a shot at one of the boats that
+was unfired, which struck her and set her on fire. The vehemence of the
+flames reached the fourth boat, and set her likewise on fire; so they
+all drifted ashore in flames, hard by our landing-place. My pinnace took
+three of the actors in a small canoe, in which they thought to have
+escaped. Two of these men were brought aboard my ship, the third being
+left in the Hector. Besides these, our _gelliwat_ picked up another,
+which she brought with her. Thus did God disappoint all the malicious
+practices of our enemy.
+
+Seeing himself foiled in all his injurious attempts, the viceroy set
+sail on the 11th, and fell down to the bar of Surat, where he anchored.
+Being suspicious that he meant to attempt taking Surat, I resolved, in
+that case, to have gone with my ships to set upon his fleet, which must
+have constrained him to desist from his enterprise against Surat, as I
+was desirous to assist in defending a place where we had so great a
+stock, and so many of our merchants. But the viceroy durst not trust me
+so far as to unman his ships, lest I should come against him. In the
+night he sent all his frigates into the river, and sent some person to
+propose peace, but received a flat denial. The 12th, the nabob sent
+_Lacandas_ to inform me that five or six frigates had gone to the
+northwards, having four or five fire-boats, which they meant to let
+drive upon us in the night, and therefore wished me to keep a good
+look-out. I acknowledged his kindness, and was glad of his care, though
+needing no such admonition, as I was equally suspicious of their
+practices when out of sight as when they rode near us. The nabob had
+this intelligence from the Jesuits, with whom he kept on fair terms, for
+his better security, if he should have been put to the worst. As the
+frigates, or other vessels in the offing, could not well discern the
+place where our ships rode during the darkness of the night, by reason
+of the shadow of the shore, they had lights made for them ashore for
+guiding them where to find us during their hellish incendiary plans.
+Having observed this light, night after night, always in the same place,
+and seeing it as before on the night of the 13th, I sent William Gurdin
+ashore with twenty men, armed with muskets and pikes, directing them to
+endeavour to surround this fire-blazer, supposing him to be some traitor
+inhabiting the neighbourhood. But, on coming near, the fire was
+presently put out, and was again seen at another place, quite contrary
+to the direction of their pursuit; and so going up and down for a long
+time, they gave it over, esteeming it some delusion of the devil. This
+night the viceroy set sail from the bar of Surat, leaving about twenty
+of his frigates in the river to keep in check the Malabar frigates which
+were there for the defence of the town.
+
+The 14th, the nabob sent a great man, who, in token of friendship, was
+called his brother, to visit me. This person gave as his opinion that
+the viceroy was gone with all his fleet to Goa, leaving some frigates to
+keep possession of the river, and others to return to Diu and Ormus. But
+my own opinion is, that the viceroy has only gone somewhere to refresh
+his people, and to reinforce his ships, against our putting to sea, when
+no sands will be in the way of his greatest ships coming against me. He
+also told me that the king had sent down forces for the purpose of
+conquering Damaun and all the sea coast. He said likewise, that they
+were more willing to give entertainment and trade to our nation than the
+Portuguese, which I thought very reasonable, as the Portuguese had
+always been injurious, and had done many vile things against them. Yet,
+unless we continue able to resist the Portuguese, they will soon unsay
+that speech for their own ease. When he had viewed our ship, with our
+ordnance and defensive preparations, we sent him and his train on shore
+in oar boats, in all courtesy.
+
+We now set seriously to work in clearing and loading the Hope for
+England, having hitherto taken in our goods confusedly and by hasty
+snatches, some into one ship, and some into others, not deeming it
+proper to hazard all in one bottom while exposed to so much danger from
+the Portuguese. I had resolved to send home the Hope, not that I
+esteemed her burden the fittest for the goods we had provided, but
+because of the many impediments and disabilities of that ship, as daily
+complained of by the master and carpenter; in particular, that her
+stern-post within the rudder was unsheathed, a strange and dangerous
+neglect and unaccountable oversight, on which account it was fitting she
+should soonest return; besides, we were in danger of losing our
+quicksilver which was in her, and lay on her keel and bilges.
+
+The 18th, the nabob sent to me Cage Arson Ali, the sabandar, and other
+merchants of Surat, requesting me to remain for fifteen days, which I
+would in no sort consent to. They then importuned me to stop for ten
+days, which likewise I refused, shewing them how prejudicial so long
+delay might be to my voyage. The cause of their request was, lest the
+viceroy might come with all his forces against Surat after my departure.
+Seeing them discontented at my denial, and loth to give displeasure to
+the nabob, which might be prejudicial to our affairs afterwards, and
+considering that it would require six days of the ten before we could
+get the Hope ready, I at last consented to their request, to their great
+satisfaction. At night on the 22d I had a letter from Surat, informing
+me that the nabob meant to visit me next day, and accordingly two
+elephants and six camels came down in the morning of the 23d, bringing
+his tents and other matters for his reception. The 24th, Mr Aldworth
+came down with the rest of the merchants to finish all business with me
+previous to our departure.
+
+In the morning of the 25th, the nabob came down with a great train, with
+six other elephants, and was two hours at the water side before I knew
+of his arrival. When told, I was sorry for the neglect, and sent Mr
+Aldworth, Mr Elkington, and Mr Dodsworth ashore to compliment him, and
+to keep him in discourse till I could go on shore, which I did soon
+after. I proposed to have gone to him as a son to his father, in my
+doublet and hose, without arms or any great train, according to custom,
+to shew the trust and confidence I reposed in him; but my friends
+persuaded me to the contrary, insisting that I should go well appointed,
+and attended by a sufficient guard, to which I consented, though I
+afterwards repented that I had not followed my own way. I went
+accordingly ashore with about 140 men, part pikes, and part firelocks,
+who gave me a volley of small arms as I entered the nabob's tent. The
+nabob received me with much kindness, seeming much pleased at my coming
+ashore to him. We sat for some time under a very fair tent, open on all
+sides, and surrounded by many people, both his attendants and mine.
+
+At length he brought me into a more private room, near adjoining, having
+only along with him Ali Khan, a great Persian captain, with Henie the
+Banian as his interpreter; while I was accompanied by Messrs. Aldworth,
+Elkington, and Dodsworth. We there conferred about the state of his
+country, and about our affairs. At last I invited him to go on board to
+view our ship, to which he readily consented. He then presented me with
+his own sword, with many complimentary speeches, saying it was the
+custom of his country to honour with arms such captains as had deserved
+well. This sword, as he said, was made in his own house, the hilt being
+of massy gold. In return, I presented to him my own arms, being sword
+and dagger, together with my girdle and hangers, by me much esteemed,
+and making a much finer shew than his, though of less value. We came
+forth together from the private tent, and I walked down to the shore to
+wait for his coming, whither he sent me a present of ten _cuttonee_
+quilts and twenty _topseels_.
+
+Soon after the nabob came to the shore, and we took boat together, going
+on board my ship. Having shewn our ordnance, and the manner of pointing
+the guns, and explained all our other preparations for defence, I
+presented him with a very handsome gilt cup and cover, some fair knives,
+a rundlet of Muscadine wine, and some other toys. Desiring to see some
+of our ordnance shot off, and how far they could carry their balls on
+the water, I caused three guns to be fired. He would then have taken
+leave, but I accompanied him ashore, and ordered him to be saluted at
+his departure with eleven guns. When we parted at the water side, the
+nabob gave me four baskets of grapes. He likewise gave among the gunners
+and trumpeters 200 mahmoodies, and 500 among the ship's company,
+together with 100 _books_ of white _bastas_, worth two mahmoodies each.
+Thus, after some compliments, we took leave of each other and parted.
+While rowing up along shore for my better getting on board, as the tide
+ran very swiftly, _Lacandas_ came running towards the boat, bearing a
+message from the nabob to ask if he should erect a tomb over the grave
+of my son. I returned my hearty thanks for the kind offer, desiring
+Lacandas to say that I had already begun to do so. The nabob then went
+away to Surat, and not long after his tent was taken down and went after
+him, with all the rest of his carriages.
+
+The 26th, the nabob's son and son-in-law, a very ingenious young man,
+came to visit me, upon whom I bestowed some knives and other things,
+such as I had left, which could not be much, as I had every now and then
+some great man or other to visit me, to all of whom I had to give
+something. The 27th, the three sons of Ali Khan came to visit me, the
+eldest of whom, named Guger Khan, presented me with two antilopes, a
+male and a female, of which I was very glad, having endeavoured before
+ineffectually to send some home to Sir Thomas Smith. After viewing all
+our ship, with our ordnance and warlike preparations for defence, I gave
+him four Spanish pikes, and some other things of my own, and saluted him
+with eleven guns at his departure.
+
+In the afternoon of the 3d March, upon the tide of ebb, and having a
+light gale from the north, sufficient to give steerage-way to our ships,
+we hastened to get up our anchors, meaning to set sail in the
+prosecution of our voyage, though our friends, the Malabars, who had
+desired to go with us, made no attempt to come out. At this time we saw
+another fleet of Portuguese frigates standing in from the westwards, and
+being willing to do my best to hinder them from going into the river of
+Surat, were it only to shew our good-will to the country people, we shot
+at the nearest of them, though without hope of doing them any hurt, as
+there was room for them to pass on either side of us, beyond reach of
+our shot. I was willing also to shew our friends on land, as also to
+those who I made no doubt would go down the coast to give notice to the
+galleons of our coming, that we shot at their frigates going into Surat,
+that they might also expect that we cared little for their greater
+strength.
+
+In our passage this night we had various flaws of inconstant winds,
+which obliged us to come to anchor for some time. As the wind became
+afterwards steady, though faint, we again made sail, continuing our
+course S. by E. along shore. At day-light nest morning we began to
+descry, between us and the shore, the Portuguese galleons and two
+gallies; all of which made sail on perceiving us, following with a light
+breeze, while we stood somewhat out of our course with all our sails,
+partly to gain time to prepare ourselves perfectly for battle, and
+partly to give rest to my people, who had taken much fatigue the night
+before, as also to draw the enemy farther from the coast, and from
+having the convenience of fresh supplies. Ere long, the tide of flood
+obliged us to anchor, not having sufficient wind to stem the current.
+The enemy, resting his hopes on the wind, kept longer under sail, to his
+great disadvantage. But as I did not consider this at the time as an
+error in them, I was is great doubt lest they might intend going against
+Surat with all their force, now that we were at sea, and there work
+their wills upon our friends and goods, which I could only prevent by
+following them. Yet the season was now so far advanced that I doubted,
+even with our best haste, we should hardly get off the coast before the
+foul weather set in; and this gave me hope that the viceroy would not
+expose himself to the danger of the approaching winter. While
+considering these things, the tide of flood was spent, and it was time
+for us to use the ebb, when, to my great satisfaction, I saw the viceroy
+and his whole fleet standing towards us, with a fresh breeze. We
+likewise made sail, and stood our course before him all that ebb, and so
+spent that night to the best advantage, partly at anchor, and partly
+under sail, according as wind and tide served.
+
+In the morning of the 5th, the enemy had gained very little way upon us.
+We spent this day, as before, in riding or sailing, as the tide
+answered. This night the viceroy gained much ground upon us, and by this
+time we had got a good way from the coast, and had advanced well to the
+southwards, so that I was now satisfied the Portuguese forces could not
+this year give any annoyance to Surat. I considered that my purposes in
+these parts, both by the authority of my king, and to fulfil the designs
+of my employers, were, in merchant ships, fitted indeed for defence, to
+seek honest commerce, without striving to injure any; wherefore I held
+it fit for me to proceed soberly and discreetly, neither basely to flee
+from the enemy, nor to tempt danger by proudly seeking it, if it might
+be honourably avoided. The viceroy was quite differently situated. He
+had been sent by his master with the principal ships of all India, and
+all the gallants and braggarts of these parts, not only to disturb and
+intercept the peaceable trade of the English with the subjects of the
+Mogul, but to take and burn them in the harbours of that great king. The
+viceroy was furnished with abundance of all things the country could
+afford, and only wanted an upright cause. He found what he was in search
+of,--four poor merchant ships, having few men, many being dead, and more
+sick; and these bragadocios, measuring our hearts by their own, thought
+we could never stand against what they esteemed so superior a force;
+and, seeing their intent, I baited my hook, which the fish presently ran
+after.
+
+The Hope, being heavily laden, was in tow of the Hector, and being
+sternmost, three of the Portuguese ships, and thirty or forty of their
+frigates, as I had expected, boarded her with the flower of all their
+chivalry. But, by the hand of God, and to their great amazement, they
+received such a blow that few of them escaped, and these by
+extraordinary chance, and three of their ships were burnt.[130] Thus it
+pleased God to baffle this their first assault. Ever after, though they
+beleaguered us round about for many days together, with all sorts of
+ships, our people still in action, and sadly worn out with continual
+labour, even shifting goods from ship to ship in that time, yet did they
+never gain from us even the value of a _louse_ in all that time, except
+our bullets, which we most willingly gave them roundly, their fire-boats
+always failing, and nothing prospering in all their efforts. For many
+days together I sent the viceroy a defiance once every twenty-four
+hours, which must needs lie heavy on the stomach of so courageous a
+gentleman. Craving pardon for this digression, I now proceed with my
+narrative.
+
+[Footnote 130: I strongly suspect this to be a mere recapitulation of
+what happened in Swally roads, as already related, as this second attack
+on the Hope by the Portuguese is entirely omitted by Elkington and
+Dodsworth.--E.]
+
+The 6th, in the morning, I sent for my master, letting him know that I
+proposed, when the viceroy should come up near us, to cast about and
+charge him suddenly, that we might strike unexpected terror in his
+people, who now bragged us, seeing us flee before them. To this end I
+went on board all the ships, giving them directions how to act, and gave
+orders to the Hector, by means of her pinnace and mine, to take in an
+hundred bales of goods from the Hope, to lighten her, and even staid to
+see it done. By this time it was mid-day, when my ship struck sail for
+my better getting on board; at which, the viceroy thinking it staid for
+him in contempt, as we imagined, be and his consorts bore up with the
+shore, and gave up all hope of mending their fortunes by following us
+any farther; which course I very well liked, as there is nothing under
+his foot to make amends for the loss of the worst man's finger in all
+our ships. Besides, I wished for no occasion of fighting unless for the
+honour of my king and country as I would rather save the life of one of
+my poorest sailors than kill a thousand enemies.
+
+Having now finished with the viceroy, I set myself to write letters for
+the dispatch of the Hope, yet still thinking to have stood in for the
+bar of Goa to endeavour to have left some compliments there for the
+viceroy at his return. This was my earnest desire, but we were so long
+delayed in dispatching the Hope, that by the time we had finished, we
+were far beyond Goa.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"The rest of this journal is wanting, as he is also wanting who should
+have finished it. But, alas! this is the imperfection of man's best
+perfections; death lying in ambush to entrap those whom by open force he
+could not devour. He dying in this voyage, and following his son, hath
+left this glorious act, _memoriae sacrum_, the memorable epitaph of his
+worth, savouring of a true heroic disposition, piety and valour being in
+him seasoned by gravity and modesty."--_Purch._
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Relations by Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, in Supplement to the former
+Voyage_.[131]
+
+"Since writing the voyage of Captain Downton, I have obtained the
+journal of Captain Elkington, in which the reader may proceed with this
+worthy captain to Bantam, and thence to his grave; this history
+succeeding the former, as its author did in command."--_Purch._
+
+[Footnote 131: Purch. Pilgr. I. 514.]
+
+In employing the journals of Mr Elkington and Mr Dodsworth, to continue
+the account of the voyage set forth under the command of Captain
+Downton, only so much of both are here inserted as answers that purpose,
+to avoid prolix repetition of circumstances, already sufficiently
+related. The journal of Elkington breaks off abruptly, like that of
+Downton, and probably from the same cause; as we learn from Purchas, in
+the preceding notice, that Elkington died at Bantam. The journal of
+Dodsworth entirely relates to the voyage of the Hope to England, after
+parting company with the other two ships, except that it mentions
+several incidents of the transactions previous to the departure of that
+ship, most of which are here omitted, as already sufficiently
+explained.--E.
+
+Sec.1. _Continuation of the Voyage from Surat to Bantam, by Captain Thomas
+Elkington_.
+
+On the 4th March, 1615, we descried the Portuguese fleet, which
+immediately gave us chace, which it continued all that day and the next.
+On the 6th, the general came aboard us, wishing us to make ready, as he
+proposed to turn suddenly round and give an onset upon the enemy: But,
+about noon that day, the Portuguese bore up and stood for the coast, and
+in three hours after we lost sight of them. At night of the 10th, the
+Hope departed from us. The 15th we saw three water-spouts at no great
+distance; one of them, which was very large, continued for the space of
+half an hour. The 19th we doubled Cape Comorin.
+
+The 10th May, the wind and current both against as, the general went to
+a green island, to the north or the salt hill, where we came to anchor
+in twenty fathoms on good sand. We here sought fresh water, but found
+none. There were plenty of bogs and pigs on this island, where likewise
+we gathered abundance of cocoa-nuts. All about this island is good
+anchorage, within a stone's throw of the shore, in twelve fathoms. The
+pinnace brought water from another island, about four leagues off but it
+was brackish.[132] The 2d June we came to anchor in Bantam road.
+
+[Footnote 132: So vaguely is this journal expressed, or rather so
+miserably abbreviated by Purchas, that there are no indications by which
+to guess even where this island lay, except that it was on the way
+between Cape Comorin and Bantam.--E.]
+
+The 3d July we weighed mace, and received silk towards furnishing the
+Salomon for Masulipatam, to which place we agreed to send the following
+merchants: George Chancie, Ralph Preston, Humphry Elkington, Timothy
+Mallory, George Savage, and Robert Savage. The 8th we loaded porcelain
+into the Salomon. This day we had news by a junk from the Moluccas, that
+the Thomasine was there; and that there were twelve sail of Hollanders
+at Ternate, who endeavoured to prevent all others from trading. The 11th
+our old house very narrowly escaped burning, in conscience of a fire
+very near. The 20th, Mr Jordan had letters from. Mr Ball at Macasser,
+complaining of violent ill usage from the Hollanders, who had driven him
+from thence, and stating that they proposed coming with all their force
+to take possession of Bantam, and to place the king of _Motron_ in the
+government. The 21st Mr Bennet set sail in the Salomon. The 25th, the
+Advice and Attendance arrived from England, after a voyage of eight
+months. They met the Globe and James at the Cape, to which ships they
+spared eighteen men. These ships departed for England on the 17th July,
+and the Advice and her consort on the 18th, meeting a ship near the
+Cape, which we suppose might be either the Samaritan or the Hope, bound
+for England.
+
+The 5th of August I went aboard to visit the general, Captain Nicholas
+Downton, who was then very ill, and we got word of his death next
+day.[133] Mr Evans the preacher, and Mr Hambdon, followed him, on the
+8th, as we supposed by taking laudanum, as they were both well a little
+before. On the 11th the Advice was sent to Japan, having a complement of
+twenty-two Englishmen, together with five blacks, and Fernando the
+Spaniard. The Concord returned on the 14th from Succadanea in Borneo and
+Macasser. That night we had a prodigious tempest of rain, with thunder
+and lightning, and the mosque of Bantam was split in two by a
+thunderbolt, on which occasion the chief priest was nearly slain, which
+the king and people took for a bad omen, and therefore determined to
+make peace with Jacatra. The 16th the boat belonging to the Thomasine
+came to Bantam, with twenty-two English and five blacks, bringing
+intelligence of that ship having been lost on certain flats the night
+before, twenty-two leagues from Macasser, owing to the carelessness of
+Wilson the master, while all the people were asleep, he only being at
+the helm. They saved all the money, which they brought along with them;
+and as Mr Bailey told us that his wrecked crew had compelled him to pay
+them their wages, we caused them to restore the money.
+
+[Footnote 133: By order in the box, Mr Elkington succeeded in the
+command.--_Purch._]
+
+On the 19th, the Hollanders clapped three blacks into the bilboes, whom
+Mr Bailey had brought with him from Celoar, pretending they were caught,
+climbing over the rails of their house, and also, as they were brought
+from a place under their protection, they refused to give us them back.
+We are in various ways most vilely abused by these Hollanders, neither
+do I see any means to right ourselves, unless we go to war with them;
+for we believe this matter to have been done on purpose, and these
+blacks enticed by them to it, as if taken by force. I was much offended
+with Mr Bailey for his conduct in taking away these blacks, as the
+means of making us hated as man-stealers, in, places where we used to be
+well received, which the Hollanders will take care to blaze abroad to
+our disgrace.
+
+In the night of the 13th September, the watch discovered a fire in the
+thatch over the house in which Mr Jordan lodged, which was soon
+extinguished; but we could plainly perceive it had been done apurpose,
+as we found the cane by which it had been kindled sticking in the
+thatch, for which we suspected a Spaniard named Francisco, who had
+appostatized and turned Javan. The 2d October, Sophonee Cossock, a
+merchant, came in a small pinnace from Puloway, accompanied by an
+_Orancay_, to confer on trade with that place. The 22d, I went ashore,
+accompanied by Mr Pring and Mr Bailey, to confer with the Dutch general,
+concerning certain idle complaints made by them against our mariners. I
+found him and the president of their factory very impatient, calling us
+insolent English, threatening that our pride would have a fall, with
+many other disgraceful and opprobrious words.[134] Such was the
+entertainment we received from that boorish general, named Garrat
+Reynes, in his own house. He had formerly shewn the like or worse to Mr
+Ball, on going aboard his ship at Banda: And four of our men, who took
+passage with him from thence to _Cambello_, were brought all the way in
+the bilboes, for no cause.
+
+[Footnote 134: Quis tulerit Gracchos de seditione querentes? It was
+Dutch policy to cry _rogue_ first.--_Purch._]
+
+I went ashore on the 3d November, when Captain Jordan called together
+the merchants, and sent for the _orancay_ of Banda, whose letter he got
+translated; the purport of which was, that, in regard to the ancient
+friendship between them and the English, especially with Captain
+Keeling, and provoked by the cruelty and injustice of the Hollanders,
+their earnest desire was to trade only with the English for the spices
+of Puloway, Puleron, and Nera, on condition that the English would
+supply them with provisions, ordnance, and ammunition, and help them to
+recover the castle of Nera, desiring that some person might be sent to
+Banda, to confer with the orancays. To this we answered, That we could
+not give them assistance to recover the castle of Nera, without orders
+from England, and that at present we had no ordnance to spare; but would
+willingly supply them with provisions, and every thing else in our
+power, till we had farther orders from England, and would trade with
+them for spices, for which purpose we proposed to send a ship, and a
+person to confer with the _orancays_, and particularly to know how we
+might have security, and whether they would grant us permission to build
+a fort for that purpose.
+
+The 23d five Hollanders anchored in the outer road, four of which came
+last from the Mauritius, having been nineteen months on the voyage from
+Holland. At that island they found that General Butt had been cast away
+with three ships, two being totally lost, the men and goods of the third
+being saved. A fourth, which was in company, went home under jury-masts,
+along with a pinnace that came there by chance. One of these ships that
+was at the Mauritius came away before the rest, and they found her
+driving up and down off the mouth of the straits, having lost 160 men,
+and having only eight remaining. The 25th, by letters from Priaman, we
+had notice of the death of Mr Ozewicke and Samuel Negus.
+
+Sec.2. _Brief Observations by Mr Edward Dodsworth, who returned to England
+in the Hope_.
+
+The 16th October, 1614, while in the bay of Surat, Mr Aldworth and Mr
+Steel came on board, and next day Mr Aldworth was examined, according to
+the company's commission and instructions,[135] concerning the behaviour
+of Paul Canning to the king, and the king's conduct towards him. To
+which he answered, That his behaviour was right, and the king's
+entertainment of him satisfactory, till the Jesuits insinuated he was
+only a merchant, and not sent immediately by the king of England. After
+this he was neglected, and died since.[136] Also, that he thought it fit
+that some one of our nation of good respect should remain at court, to
+procure redress of any wrongs that might be offered; to which function
+Mr Edwards was chosen to go to Agra, as the person most answerable to
+the company's instructions, on which occasion some question was made,
+whether it would be proper he should proceed in the character of a
+merchant, according to the strict letter of the instructions, which Mr
+Aldworth conceived would procure him disrespect with the king; and,
+after some contest, some way was given to Mr Edwards in this affair,
+lest they should disagree in their proceedings, especially as it had
+been reported by some already, that he was a messenger from the king of
+Britain.
+
+[Footnote 135: This commission had six questions, of which I only
+insert what is fit for the public eye.--_Purch._]
+
+[Footnote 136: It has been said on a former occasion, that he died of
+poison, given, as was thought, by the jesuits.--_Purch._]
+
+After much opposition to our desire of trade, there came a _firmaun_
+from the king on the 24th November, which, according to custom, the
+nabob met in state two miles from the city, attended by 600 horse. Next
+day we were kindly entertained, and the nabob gave Mr Edwards 850
+mahmoudies, thirty pieces of _topseels_, ten of fine calicoes, and other
+things. The money being to bear the charges of carrying up the present
+to the king, who was not willing we should incur any expence on that
+account, and the stuffs as a gratification to those who carried them up.
+To the merchants also he gave fifteen pieces of _topseels_, five to
+each, with his _chop_ or licence for our departure, and promises of kind
+usage, all this being done in presence of those who brought the
+_firmaun_. The 30th, Mr Edwards and we set out for _Amadavar_
+[Ahmedabad.]
+
+The 2d of December we reached Broach, whence the governor sent a guard
+of horse with us to _Demylode_, and there we had a new escort of horse
+and foot to _Charmondo_;[137] whence we departed on the 7th with
+twenty-five soldiers, all notorious thieves, as we afterwards found.
+With these we went ten coss, when we pitched our tents in a plain,
+barricading ourselves as usual with our carts. While at supper, we had
+nearly been assaulted by fifty horse, who passed close by us, but they
+found us well provided for our defence, and it appeared that the charge
+we carried was well known in all the country through which we travelled.
+The 8th we came to _Brodera_, [Brodrah] and made a present to the
+governor, who received it very kindly, and particularly requested to see
+our mastiff dog. Brodrah stands in a plain, which seemed fertile, and is
+well watered, a thing rather uncommon in those parts. We departed thence
+with an escort of 100 horse and foot, voluntarily offered from respect
+for the king's present, yet were they a considerable charge to us. We
+came next to Arras,[138] a town mostly inhabited by banians, and where
+their superstition of not killing any thing occasioned us to have very
+bad fare. On the 13th we came to Ahmedabad, whence we gave a commission
+to Richard Steel and John Crowther to proceed on their journey to
+Persia; and hence Mr Edwards departed from us for Agra.
+
+[Footnote 137: On this part of the indicated route, between Broach and
+Brodrab, no stations are to be found in our best maps resembling these
+two names, unless Simlode may have been corrupted into Demylode by
+typographical error.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 138: No such name is now to be found in the road between
+Brodrah and Ahmedabad, neither is it of much importance in any view, as
+the route is so vaguely indicated in the text.--E.]
+
+All this time, the merchants at Ahmedabad, being in hopes of peace with
+the Portuguese, held up the price of their indigos, on which we resolved
+to proceed for _Sarques_ [Sarkess,] to make trial with the country
+people who are the makers of that commodity. We did so on the 7th, and
+found plenty of employment, packing in four days no less than 400 bales:
+after which Mr Edwards returned to Ahmedabad, where he found the
+merchants greatly more tractable. _Sarkess_ is a town of no great size,
+three coss from Ahmedabad, its territory being considered the best soil
+in all these parts for the production of indigo. All of the dealers in
+this commodity are apt to put tricks upon us, by mingling or otherwise.
+At Sarkess there are two of the most ancient monuments that are to be
+found in all that country; one being the tomb of a saint or prophet who
+was buried there, to which many pilgrims resort from great distances;
+and the other is the sepulchres of their ancient kings. To the north of
+the town, is the place where _Khan-Khana_ first put the Guzerates to
+flight, who were the original inhabitants of the country, all the rest
+of the kingdom being shortly after reduced under the subjection of
+Akbar, father to the present Great Mogul. This field of victory is
+strongly walled round with brick, about a mile and half in circuit, all
+planted within with fruit-trees, and delightfully watered; having a
+costly house called by a name signifying _Victory_; in which Khan-Khana
+resided for some time, but he now resides at Burhanpoor.
+
+The 24th of December we had leave from the governor of Ahmedabad to
+depart; but hearing that several persons had been robbed and murdered
+that night close by the city, order was given for us to wait till a
+sufficient guard could be provided for us. The 26th we departed, having
+with us forty carts, loaded with indigo and other goods, and came on the
+27th to _Mundeves_,[139] where the gates were shut upon us by order of
+_Sarder Khan_. This put us in much doubt, and we procured a person to
+speak with the governor, who told him of letters he had received from
+Mucrob Khan, nabob of Surat, informing of the gallant action of our
+general at Swally and the safety of Surat from the Portuguese, through
+the bravery of the English. It was therefore agreed that we should not
+depart without a sufficient guard, which was to be ready for us next
+day. We did not however depart till the 29th; and, at Brodrah, the men
+belonging to Sarder Khan procured more soldiers to assist them, as there
+were several companies of rajputs lying in the way to intercept us, and
+many robberies and murders were committed daily in that part of the
+country.
+
+[Footnote 139: This name also is so corrupted as not to have any
+resemblance in the modern geography of Hindoostan.--E.]
+
+On the 2d of February, while passing through a narrow lane inclosed on
+both sides with hedges, we were assaulted by above 300 rajputs, where we
+could not hurt them, as they did our caffila or caravan by their arrows
+and shot. We therefore made all the haste we could to gain the plain,
+while they in the mean time cut off two of our carriages. Having got to
+the open ground we made a stand; but the rajputs betook themselves again
+to their hedges, to look after their prey, lest one thief should rob
+another. Many of our party were hurt on this occasion, among which was
+Humphrey Elkington. Next day we got to Baroach, and on the 5th to Surat,
+where we returned thanks to Macrob Khan for the care he had taken of our
+safety.
+
+Hearing of an assault to be made next day on our ships by the
+Portuguese, we got his leave to go down to Swally and went aboard, but
+the Portuguese deceived our expectation. On occasion of the last attempt
+of the Portuguese to set our ships on fire, by means of four fire-boats
+chained together, four of them were taken in smaller boats, which
+captives confessed that this was the last attempt of the viceroy for
+this year, as he was now under the necessity of returning to Goa, for
+want of water and provisions. One of these captives, taken in Swally
+roads, and carried aboard the New-year's Gilt, emitted the following
+declaration:--
+
+
+_Examination of Domingo Francisco, on the 20th of February_, 1615.
+
+"He saith, that he was born in Lisbon, being the son of a mariner, and
+served under Nunna d'Acunha in the seafight against Captain Best, in
+one of the four galleons. He afterwards went to Macao on the coast of
+China, and returned thence to Goa; where, after remaining ten months, he
+was ordered on board a galleon called the St Antonio, in this expedition
+for the road of Swally, where he was made prisoner on the 8th of this
+month. The purpose of the viceroy, _Don Jeronimo de Savedo_, in this
+expedition, as the examinant says, was to destroy the English at Surat.
+The viceroy's ship was called the All-saints, of 800 tons, with 300 men,
+and twenty-eight cannon. Michael de Souza was captain on the St Bennet
+of 700 tons, 150 men, and twenty guns. John Cayatho of the St Lawrence,
+of 600 tons, 160 men, and 18 guns. Francisco Henriques of the St
+Christopher, of 600 tons, 155 men, and 18 guns. Francisco de Mirande of
+the St Jeronymo, of 500 tons, 180 men, and 16 guns. Gaspar de Meall of
+the St Antonio, of 400 tons, 140 men, and 14 guns. These were the
+galleons: The ships were, the St Peter of 200 tons Captain Francisco
+Cavaco, 150 men and eight guns; the St Paul of 200 tons, Captain Don
+Juan de Mascarenha, 150 men and eight guns; a pinnace of 120 tons,
+Captain Andrea de Quellio, eighty men and four guns. Lewis de Bruto was
+captain of one galley, and Diego de Suro of the other, each having fifty
+men. There were sixty barks or frigates, each having twenty soldiers,
+and rowing eighteen oars of a side. The reinforcement which joined
+afterwards, consisted of two ships of 200 tons each, two India junks,
+and eight small boats, which were employed to endeavour to set us on
+fire. In the viceroy's ship, the ordnance were all of brass, those in
+the other galleons being half brass and half iron:" Against all which
+the Almighty protected us, blessed be his name for ever.
+
+On the 11th March, 1615, we parted from the general, he and the other
+two ships being bound for Acheen and Bantam, and we in the Hope for
+England. On the 12th we passed by the north end of the Maldives, where
+we found many shoals and islands most falsely laid down in the charts,
+as if purposely to render the navigation of these seas more dangerous.
+We arrived on the 17th of June in Saldanha bay, where we found a fleet
+of four English ships bound for Surat, under the command of Captain
+Keeling; which fleet, after consultation held with us, and receiving
+intelligence of the state of affairs there, departed on its voyage. On
+the 20th I met with _Crosse_ and his company, left there for
+discovery,[140] and entreated some of them to acquaint _Coree_ with my
+arrival. These were set upon by the savages and wounded, wherefore I
+delivered four muskets to Crosse at his earnest request; after which he
+procured Coree to come down with his whole family, and we afterwards got
+some cattle. He told me that there was discord among the savages,
+through which the mountaineers had come down and robbed them. We
+departed on the 26th June, leaving our longboat with Crosse, together
+with powder, shot, and provisions.
+
+[Footnote 140: Of Crosse and his company of condemned persons, set on
+shore at the Cape of Good Hope, see afterwards in Peyton's
+voyage.--_Purch._]
+
+In the latitude of 29 deg. N. we fell in with a Dutch ship from the
+Mauritius, having gone there to cut timber, which seemed a bastard
+ebony. Contrary to their expectation, they found there the lamentable
+wreck of four ships come from Bantam and the Moluccas, which had gone to
+pieces on the rocks. The goods and men of two of these were totally
+lost, most of the goods of the third were saved, with part of which this
+ship was laden. The fourth was driven out to sea in a storm, and
+returned under jury-masts. The master of this ship promised to keep us
+company, but finding us a hindrance, he left us after ten days, without
+so much as a farewell or offering to carry a letter, which I imputed to
+their inbred boorish disposition. Ill weather followed, and we were much
+weakened; yet, I thank God, we lost none till my arrival in Ireland off
+the river of Limerick on the 27th October, 1615; where also we had to
+endure a storm, till we hired a Scottish bark, detained by contrary
+winds, to pilot us into harbour. There also, a remainder of Captain M.
+his ungodly crew, who had lately obtained their pardon, put me in great
+fear; till Sir Henry Foliat secured us by a supply of men, and I sent
+off letters for London.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Journey of Richard Steel and John Crowther, from Ajmeer in India, to
+Ispahan in Persia, in the Years_ 1615 _and_ 1616.[141]
+
+Having been detained at Agimere[142] from February, Mr Edwards received
+a letter on the 17th March, 1615, from the Great Mogul, of which he
+delivered a copy, together with his other letters, to Richard Steel,
+promising to procure the king's firmaun for our safety and furtherance,
+and to send it after us to Agra, where he directed us to wait for its
+reception. We went that night two coss to _Mandill_.[143]We had four
+servants, two horses, and a camel. The 18th we went twelve coss to
+_Bander Sandree_, [Bunder-Sanory,] a small _aldea_.[144] The 19th, ten
+coss to _Mosobade_, [Morabad.] The 20th to _Pipelo_, [Peped,] thirteen
+coss. The 21st to a town called _Chadfoole_, [Gohd?] seven coss. The 22d
+to _Lalscotte_, thirteen coss. The 23d to _Mogolserai_, twelve coss. The
+24th to _Hindone_, fourteen coss. the 25th to _Bramobad_, twelve coss.
+The 26th to _Futtipoor_, twelve coss. This has been a fair city, which
+was built by Akbar, and contains a goodly palace belonging to the king.
+It is walled round in a handsome manner, and has many spacious gardens
+and sumptuous pleasure houses; but is now falling to ruin, and ranch
+ground within the walls is now sown with corn, the king having carried
+off much of the best stone to his new city of Agra. The 27th we went
+twelve coss to Agra. In the English house there, we found one Richard
+Barber, an apothecary, who came over with Sir Robert Shirley, and had
+been sent here by Mr Kerridge to take care of Nicholas Whithington.
+
+[Footnote 141: Purch. Pilgr. I. 519.--In the title of this article in
+the Pilgrims, Agimere, or Azmere, as it is there called, is said to have
+been the residence of the Great Mogul at the commencement of this
+journey, and Spahan, or Ispahan, the royal seat of the kings of
+Persia.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 142: This place, named Azmeer in the Pilgrims, is known in
+modern geography under the name of Ajmeer, or Agimere.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 143: A coss, or course, as it is uniformly denominated in the
+Pilgrims, is stated on the margin by Purchas, to be equal to a mile and
+a half, and in some places two English miles. As more precisely
+determined in modern geography, the Hindoostanee coss is equal to 1
+4/7th English miles, and the Rajput coss to 2 1/6th miles nearly. It
+would overload this article to attempt critically following all the
+stations in the present journal, in which the names of places are often
+so corrupt as to be unintelligible. Such corrections of the text as can
+be ventured upon are included within brackets.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 144: This is a Spanish or Portuguese term, signifying country
+village.--E.]
+
+Within two days journey of Agra, we passed by the country and city of
+Biana, where the finest indigo is made, the best being then worth
+thirty-six rupees the maund at Agra, but much cheaper in the country.
+Finding the promised firmaun came not, and the hot season of the year
+fast approaching, we departed on the 3d April in the prosecution of our
+journey, leaving directions with Richard Barber to send it after us. We
+came that night to a serai called Boutta, six coss. The 4th to the town
+of _Matra_, fourteen coss, where we lay in a fair _serai_,[145] and
+there we received the firmaun. The 5th we went twelve coss to a serai
+called _Chatta_, [Chautra.] The 6th to a serai built by Azam Khan, nine
+coss. The 7th to a serai built by Sheic Ferreede, called _Puhlwall_,
+eleven coss. The 8th to a serai built by the same person, ten coss. The
+9th to _Dillee_, [Delhi,] nine coss. This being a great and ancient
+city, formerly the seat of the kings, where many of them are interred.
+At this time, many of the great men have their gardens and pleasure
+houses here, and are here buried, so that it is beautified with many
+fine buildings. The inhabitants, who are mostly Banians or Hindoos, are
+poor and beggarly, through the long absence of the court.
+
+[Footnote 145: These are fair buildings for the accommodation of
+travellers, many of which were erected by great men._Purch._]
+
+The 10th we went ten coss from Delhi to _Bunira_. The 11th to
+_Cullvower_, twelve coss. The 12th to _Pampette_, [Paniput,] twelve
+coss. This is a small handsome city, where they manufacture various
+sorts of girdles and sashes, and great quantities of cotton-cloth, and
+have abundance of handicrafts. The 13th to _Carnanl_, twelve coss. The
+14th to _Tanisera_, [Tahnessir,] fourteen coss. The 15th to _Shavade_,
+[Shahabad,] ten coss. The 16th to _Mogol-Sera_, or _Gaugur_, fifteen
+coss. The 17th to _Sinan_,[146] fourteen coss, which is an ancient city,
+where they manufacture great store of cottons. The 18th to _Duratia_,
+fifteen coss. The 19th to _Pullower_, [Bullolepoor,] eleven coss. We
+this day passed in a boat over a great river called Sietmege[147] which
+is very broad, but full of shoals, and runs westward to join the Sinde,
+or Indus. The 20th we came to a small town called _Nicodar_, eleven
+coss. The 21st to _Sultanpoor_, an old town having a river which comes
+from the north, over which is a bridge of six arches. At this place
+great store of cotton goods are made. Four coss beyond this place we
+passed another small river. The 22d to _Chiurmul_,[148] eleven coss. We
+were this day boated across a river as broad as the Thames at Gravesend,
+called _Vian_, which runs westwards to join the Sinde. On its banks
+Allom Khan, ambassador from the Great Mogul to the king of Persia, had
+pitched his camp, which looked like a little city. The 23d we went to
+_Khan Khanum Serai_, seventeen coss, and the 24th we reached Lahore,
+seven coss.
+
+[Footnote 146: This is probably Sirhind, which is directly in the route,
+but so disguised in the text as to defy emendation.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 147: This is clearly the Sutuluge, or Setlege, called likewise
+the Beyah-Kussoor, and Chato dehr, being the easternmost of the Punjab
+or five rivers, which form the Indus. It was called Hesudrus by the
+ancients.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 148: From the river mentioned in the text as passed, on this
+day's journey, this may have been what is now called Gundwall, a little
+beyond the river Beyab, which is here 100 yards broad.--E.]
+
+All the country between Agra and Lahore is exceedingly well cultivated,
+being the best of India, and abounds in all things. It yields great
+store of powdered sugar, [raw sugar] the best being worth two 1/2 to two
+3/4 rupees the great _maund_ of forty pounds. The whole road is planted
+on both sides with trees, most of which bear a species of mulberry. In
+the night, this road is dangerously infested with thieves, but is quite
+secure in the day. Every five or six coss, there are serais, built by
+the king or some great man, which add greatly to the beauty of the road,
+are very convenient for the accommodation of travellers, and serve to
+perpetuate the memory of their founders. In these the traveller may have
+a chamber for his own use, a place in which to tie up his horse, and can
+be furnished with provender; but in many of them very little
+accommodation can be had, by reason of the banians, as when once any
+person has taken up his lodging, no other may dispossess him. At
+day-break the gates of these serais are opened, and then all the
+travellers prepare to depart; but no person is allowed to go away
+sooner, for fear of robbers. This made the journey very oppressive to
+us, as within two hours after the sun rose we were hardly able to endure
+the heat.
+
+Lahore is a great and goodly city, being one of the fairest and
+ancientest in India. It stands on the river Indus or Sinde;[149] and
+from this place came the most valuable of the Portuguese trade when they
+were at peace with the Moguls, as it formed the centre of all their
+traffic in Hindoostan. They here embarked their goods, which were
+carried down the river to Tatta, and were thence transported by sea to
+Ormus and Persia; and such native merchants as chose to go that way
+between India and Persia, paid them freight. They had also a great trade
+up this river, in pepper and other spices, with which they furnished
+that part of India. At this time, the merchants of India assemble at
+Lahore, where they invest a great part of their money in commodities,
+and, joining in caravans, they pass over the mountains of Candahar into
+Persia; by which way it is computed there now pass yearly twelve or
+fourteen thousand camel loads, whereas formerly there did not go in this
+way above three thousand, all the rest going by way of Ormus. These
+merchants are put to great expences between Lahore and Ispaban, besides
+being exposed to great cold in winter and fervent heat in summer, and to
+bad and dangerous roads, usually spending six or seven months in the
+journey, and they estimate the charges of each camel's load at 120 or
+130 rupees. In this way Persia is furnished with spiceries, which are
+brought all the way from Masulipatam by land. We remained in Lahore from
+the 24th of April to the 13th of May, refreshing both ourselves and our
+horses, and providing servants and necessaries for the journey. We also
+procured here recommendatory letters from an ambassador to the king of
+Persia.
+
+[Footnote 149: Lahore is upon the Ravey, the second of the five rivers
+forming the Indus, counting from the east, and was the Hydroates of the
+ancients. The Indus proper, or Nilab, is considerably farther west.--E.]
+
+We left Lahore on the 13th May, proposing to overtake a caravan which
+set out two months before, and went that day eleven c. to a small town
+named _Chacksunder_. The 14th to _Non-serai_, fifteen c. The 15th to
+_Mutteray_, eight c. The 16th to _Quemal khan_, nineteen c. The 17th to
+_Herpae_, sixteen c. The 18th to _Alicasaca_, twelve c. The 19th
+_Trumba_, twelve c. and this day we overtook a small caravan that left
+Lahore eight days before us. The 20th to _Sedousehall_, fourteen c. The
+21st to _Callixechebaut_, fifteen c. The 22d to _Multan_,[150] twelve c.
+This is a great and ancient city, having the river Indus at the distance
+of three coss. All caravans must remain here ten or twelve days, before
+leave can be procured from the governor to proceed, on purpose that the
+city may benefit by their stay. It yields white plain cotton cloth and
+diaper. We remained five days, and were then glad to get leave to
+depart, by means of a present.
+
+[Footnote 150: In the whole of this itinerary, from Lahore to Multan or
+Mooltan, down the Ravey river, not a single name in the text, except the
+two extremities, bears the smallest resemblance to any of those in
+modern geography.--E.]
+
+We passed the river on the 28th, and went twenty c. to a small village
+named _Pettoallee_. The 29th we passed another great river by a boat,
+and came that same night to a small river called _Lacca_, where we
+found the caravan we wished to overtake.[151] We presented the caravan
+_basha_ with a mirror and knife, when he directed us to pitch our tent
+near his own, that we might be more immediately under his protection.
+This caravan had been here ten days, and remained till the 2d of June,
+waiting for an escort of cavalry to convoy them to _Chatcza_,[152] a
+small fort in the mountains, having received information that a former
+caravan had been injured by the mountaineers. The 2d June we resumed our
+journey, and travelled twelve c. entering into the mountains, where we
+were much distressed for want of fresh water, what water we met with
+being brackish. The 3d and 4th we travelled all night, climbing high
+mountains, and following water-courses with various turnings and
+windings, insomuch that in travelling twelve coss our direct course did
+not exceed six c. The 5th we again followed the bed of a water-course or
+river, full of large pebbles, travelling eight c. The 6th we rested. The
+7th we went four c. still along the water-course, the 8th eight c. the
+9th twelve c. and the 10th three c. when we came to _Chatcza_, [Chatzan]
+a small fort with mud walls, inclosed with a ditch, where the Mogul
+keeps a garrison of eighty or 100 horse, to scour the road from thieves,
+yet these are as great thieves as any, where they find an opportunity.
+The captain of this castle exacted two _abacees_ for each camel in the
+caravan, though nothing was legally due, as he and his troops have their
+pay from the king. In the whole of our way, from the river Lacca to
+Chatzan, we found no sustenance for man or beast, except in some places
+a little grass, so that we had to make provision at Lacca, hiring a
+bullock to carry barley for our horses. The _Agwans_ or _Afgans_, as the
+people of the mountains are called, came down to us every day at our
+resting place, rather to look out what they might steal, than to buy as
+they pretended.
+
+[Footnote 151: The great river passed on the 29th must have been the
+Sinde, Indus, or Nilab, and from the circumstance of falling in next day
+with the _Lacca_ or Lucca, Pettoallee in the text may possibly be what
+is named _Joghiwallah_, on the east side of the Indus, almost opposite
+the mouth of the Lacca.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 152: Chatzan, a town or fortress in Sewee, or the country of
+the Balloges; to the west of a ridge of rocky mountains, described as
+consisting of hard black stone, which skirt the western side of the vale
+of the Indus, and on the north join the mountains of Wulli in Candahar.
+Chatzan is in lat. 31 deg. 3' N. and long 69 deg. 42' W. from Greenwich--E.]
+
+Having made provision for three days at Chatzan, we went thence on the
+12th June, and travelled fourteen c. The 13th ten c. The 14th ten c.
+This day the mountaineers brought down to us sheep, goats, meal, butter,
+and barley, in abundance, sufficient both for us and our cattle, all of
+which they sold at reasonable prices; and from this time forwards, they
+did the same every day, sometimes also bringing felts and striped
+carpets for sale. The 15th we went six c. the 16th four c. the 17th ten
+c. the 18th nine c. the 19th nine c. when we came to a small town of the
+Afgans called _Duckee_, [Dooky], where the Mogul keeps a garrison in a
+small square mud fort, the walls of which are of a good height. This
+fort is a mile from the town. We stopt here three days, as the caravan
+could not agree with the captain of the fort, who demanded a duty on
+every camel, and at last an _abacee_ and a half was paid for each camel.
+The 23d we went six c. the 24th we passed a place called _Secotah_, or
+the three castles, because of three villages standing near each other on
+the side of a hill, forming a triangle. We this day went eight c. The
+25th we rested, on account of bad weather. The 26th we went ten c. The
+27th fourteen c. This day we passed through the _durues_ or gates of the
+mountains, being narrow straits, with very high rocks on both sides,
+whence with stones a few men might stop the passage of a multitude, and
+where many caravans have been accordingly cut off. We this night, where
+we lodged, suffered much insolence from the Afgans; and next day, as we
+passed a small village called _Coasta_, they exacted from us two 1/2
+_abacees_ for each camel. The 28th we went five c. the 29th, passing a
+village called _Abdun_, eight c. the 30th six c. The 1st. July in seven
+c. we came to a place called _Pesinga_ [Pusheng or Kooshinge], where
+there is a small fort like that at _Dooky_ in which is a garrison for
+securing the way. At this place the captain exacted half an _abacee_ for
+each camel. The 3d we left the caravan and went forwards six c. The 4th
+we passed over a mighty mountain, and descended into the plains beyond,
+having travelled that day fourteen c. The 5th we went twenty c. and were
+much distressed to get grain for our cattle. The 6th, in like distress
+both for them and ourselves, we went twelve c. and on the 7th, after
+eight c. we got to the city of Candahar.
+
+These mountains of Candahar are inhabited by a fierce people, called
+_Agwans_ or _Potans_, [Afgans or Patans] who are very strong of body,
+somewhat fairer than the natives of Hindoostan, and are much addicted to
+robbery, insomuch, that they often cut off whole caravans. At present
+they have become more civil, partly from fear of the Mogul, and partly
+from experiencing the advantages of trade, by selling their grain,
+sheep, and goats, of which they have great store, and by purchasing
+coarse cotton goods and other necessaries. Still, however, if they find
+any one straggling or lagging behind, they are very apt to make them
+slaves, selling them into the mountains, and houghing them to prevent
+their running away, after which they are set to grind grain in
+handmills, or to other servile employments. The chief city, called
+likewise Candahar, is very ancient, and was in old times inhabited by
+Banians. At this place the governor of the whole country resides, who
+has a garrison of twelve or fifteen thousand horse, maintained there by
+the Great Mogul, in regard of the neighbourhood of the Persians towards
+the north. To the west, the city is environed by steep and craggy rocks,
+and to the south and east by a strong wall. In consequence of the
+frequent passage of caravans, it has been considerably increased of
+late, so that the suburbs are larger than the city. Within the last two
+years, in consequence of the Persian trade by way of Ormus being
+stopped, through war with the Portuguese, all the caravans between
+Persia and India must necessarily pass through this place; and here they
+hire camels to go into India, and at their return for Persia have to do
+the same. They cannot return without leave of the governor, who causes
+them to stop a month here, or at the least fifteen or twenty days; owing
+to which, it is inhabited by many lewd people, as all such places of
+resort commonly are.
+
+Victuals for man and beast are to be had in great abundance at Candahar,
+yet are very dear owing to the great concourse of trade, occasioned by
+the meeting at this place of many merchants of India, Persia, and
+Turkey, who often conclude their exchanges of commodities here. At this
+place the caravans going for India usually unite together, for greater
+strength and security in passing through the mountains of Candahar; and
+those that come here from India generally break into smaller companies,
+because in many parts of the route through Persia, a greater number
+would not find provisions, as all Persia, from hence to Ispahan, is
+extremely barren, so that sometimes not a green thing is to be seen in
+two or three days travel; and even water is scarce, and that which is to
+be got is often brackish, or stinking and abominable. We remained at
+this city for fourteen days, partly to procure company for our farther
+journey, and partly for refreshment after the fatigues and heats of our
+late journey, especially on account of John Crowther, who was so weak
+that he at one time doubted being able to proceed any farther.
+
+We joined ourselves to three Armenians and a dozen Persian merchants,
+along with whom we left the city of Candahar on the 23d July, and went
+ten c. to a village called _Seriabe_.[153] The 24th we came in twelve c.
+to _Deabage_, a small _dea_ or village. The 25th in eight c. to
+_Cashecunna,_ a small castle in which the Mogul has a garrison, being
+the utmost boundary of his dominions westwards, and confining with
+Persia. The 26th we travelled seventeen c. and lodged in the open fields
+by the side of a river. The 27th, after four c. we came to a castle
+called _Greece_, the first belonging to the king of Persia. Here we
+delivered to the governor the letter we had got from the Persian
+ambassador at Lahore, and presented him a mirror and three knives. He
+would take nothing for our camels, while the others had to pay five
+_abacees_ for each camel. He promised to give us a safe conduct under an
+escort of horse to the next governor, but we saw none; neither were we
+sorry for the omission, for he was little better than a rebel, and all
+his people were thieves.
+
+[Footnote 153: We here lose the almost infallible guide of Arrowsmith's
+excellent map of Hindoostan, and are reduced to much inferior helps in
+following the route through Persia.--E.]
+
+The 28th we departed at night, going two _parasangs_, and lodged at a
+_dea_ or village called _Malgee_. A _farcing_ or parasang is equal to
+two Indian cosses and a half.[154] The 29th we went ten p. and lodged in
+the open fields, where we could get nothing but water. The 30th we went
+five p. to a small castle named _Gazikhan_. The 31st other five p. to an
+old ruined fort, where we could get nothing but water, and that was
+stinking. The 1st August we proceeded other five p. to an old fort
+called _Dilaram_, where we paid an _abacee_ and a half for each camel.
+We staid here one day to rest our cattle, which was termed making
+_mochoane_; and on the 3d we went seven p. to an old castle called
+_Bacon_. The 4th four p. and lodged in the open fields, where we found
+nothing but water. The 5th four p. and the 6th five p. to _Farra_.[155]
+
+[Footnote 154: In a side-note, Purchas says a parasang consists of sixty
+furlongs. This is a most egregious error, as the parasang or farsang is
+exactly equal to 2.78 English miles, or twenty-two two-5ths
+furlongs.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 155: Farra, the capital of a district of the same name in the
+north of Segistan, is in lat 33 deg. 40' N. long. 62 deg. 40' E.--E.]
+
+_Farra_ is a small town, surrounded by a high wall of bricks dried in
+the sun, as are all the castles and most of the buildings in this
+country, and is of a square form, about a mile in circuit. It has a
+handsome bazar or market-place, vaulted over head to keep out the rain,
+and in which all kinds of necessaries and commodities are sold. It is
+situated in a fertile soil, having plenty of water, without which
+nothing can be raised in this country; and it is wonderful to see with
+what labour and ingenious industry they bring water to every spot of
+good ground, which is but seldom to be found here, often carrying it
+three or four miles in trenches under ground. At this town, all
+merchants going into Persia must remain for seven, eight, or ten days;
+and here the king's treasurer sees all their packs weighed, estimating
+the value of their commodities at so much the maund, as he thinks fit,
+and exacts a duty of three per cent. ad valorem on that estimate. On
+their way into Persia, merchants are used with much favour, lest they
+should make complaints to the king, who will have merchants kindly
+treated; but on their return into India, they are treated with extreme
+rigour, being searched to the very skin for money, as it is death to
+transport any gold or silver coin from Persia, except that of the
+reigning king. They likewise look narrowly for horses and slaves,
+neither of which are allowed to be taken out of the country.
+
+We remained here two days waiting for certain Armenians, with whom we
+travelled the rest of the journey, leaving our former companions. The
+9th of August we went only one parasang to a river. The 10th we
+travelled seven p. and lodged in the open fields. The 11th, four p. to a
+small village, where we had plenty of provisions. The 12th, four p.
+where we had to dig for water. The 13th, eight p. and the 14th five p.
+to a village named _Draw,_ [Durra,] where we remained a day, as it is
+the custom of those who travel with camels to rest once in four or five
+days. The 16th, we advanced three p. The 17th, four p. The 18th, five p.
+to _Zaide-basha,_ [Sarbishe,] where abundance of carpets are to be had.
+The 19th we came to a village named _Mude,_ [Moti,] where also are
+carpets. The 20th, five p. to _Birchen,_ [Berdjan,] where are
+manufactured great quantities of fine felts, and carpets of camels hair,
+which are sold at the rates of from two to five abacees the _maund._ At
+this place we rested a day. The 22d, we went to _Dea-zaide,_ [Descaden,]
+where all the inhabitants pretend to be very religious, and sell their
+carpets, of which they have great abundance, at a cheap rate. The 23d,
+three p. The 24th, five p. to _Choore,_ [Cors or Corra,] an old ruined
+town. The 25th, three p. The 26th, seven p. when we had brackish
+stinking water. The 27th we came to _Dehuge,_ [Teuke,] where is a
+considerable stream of hot water, which becomes cool and pleasant after
+standing some time in any vessel. The 28th we went seven p. to
+_Dea-curma._
+
+The 29th we went five p. to _Tobaz,_[156] where we had to pay half an
+abacee for each camel. At this plce all caravans take four or five days
+rest, the better to enable them to pass the adjoining salt desert, which
+extends four long days journey, and in which many miscarry. We found
+here a small caravan of an hundred camels, which set off the next day
+after our arrival. Here, and in the former village, there is great store
+of dates; and 3000 maunds of the finest silk in Persia are made here
+yearly, and is carried to _Yades_, [Yezd,] a fair city, where likewise
+they make much raw silk, and where it is manufactured into taffaties,
+satins, and damasks. The king does not allow the exportation of raw
+silk, especially into Turkey; but the Portuguese used to carry it to
+Portugal. _Yades_, [Yezd,] is about twelve days journey from Ispahan,
+and is twelve p. out of the way from the Indian route to the capital.
+
+[Footnote 156: Tabaskili, or Tobas Kileke, in Cohestan, is probably the
+place here meant, in which case the route appears to have passed from
+Farra by the south of the inland sea or lake of Darrah, but which is not
+noticed by our travellers. Our conjectural amendments of the names of
+places on the route are placed within brackets.--E.]
+
+The 30th of August we advanced nine p. into the desert, and lay on the
+ground, having to send our beasts three miles out of the way for water,
+which was very salt. The 31st, after travelling ten p. we came to water
+which was not at all brackish. The 1st September we went five p. and had
+to send two miles for water. The 2d we went nine p. to a small castle,
+where we procured a small quantity of provisions. The 3d, five p. and
+lay in the fields, having to send far for water. The 4th, ten p. to
+_Seagan_. The 5th, four p. The 6th, ten p. to a castle called _Irabad_,
+[Hirabad,] where we paid half an _abacee_ for each camel. The 7th, six
+p. The 8th, eight p. to _Ardecan_, where we rested till the 10th, when
+we went four p. to _Sellef_. The 11th, three p. to a small castle named
+_Agea Gaurume_. The 12th, nine p. to a spring in the fields. The 13th,
+three p. to _Beavas_. The 14th, four p. to _Goolabad_, whence Richard
+Steel rode on to Ispahan, without waiting for the caravan. The 15th we
+came to _Morea Shahabad_, five p. The 16th, to _Coopa_, five p. The
+17th, to _Dea Sabs_, five p. The 18th, four p. and lay in the fields.
+And on the 19th, after three p. we came to _Ispahan_.
+
+Richard Steel reached this city on the 15th, at noon, and found Sir
+Robert Shirley already provided with his dispatches from the king of
+Persia as ambassador to the king of Spain. Sir Robert, attended by his
+lady, a bare-footed friar as his chaplain, together with fifty-five
+Portuguese prisoners, and his own followers, were preparing in all haste
+to go to Ormus, and to embark thence for Lisbon. The purpose is, that
+seeing the Portuguese not able to stand, the Spaniards may be brought
+in.[157] Six friars remain as hostages for his safe return to Ispahan,
+as otherwise the king has vowed to cut them all in pieces, which he is
+likely enough to do, having put his own son to death, and committed a
+thousand other severities.
+
+[Footnote 157: The meaning of this passage is quite obscure in the
+Pilgrims, and the editor does not presume upon clearing the
+obscurity.--E.]
+
+On his arrival at Ispahan, Richard Steel delivered his letters to Sir
+Robert,[158] who durst hardly read them, except now and then, as by
+stealth, fearing lest the Portuguese should know of them. He afterwards
+said it was now too late to engage in the business of our nation, and
+seemed much dissatisfied with the company, and with the merchants and
+mariners who brought him out. But at length he said he was a
+true-hearted Englishman, and promised to effect our desires. On the
+19th, the friars being absent, he carried both of us to the master of
+the ceremonies, or _Maimondare,_ and took us along with him to the Grand
+Vizier, _Sarek Hogea_, who immediately called his scribes or
+secretaries, and made draughts of what we desired: namely, three
+_firmauns_, one of which John Crowther has to carry to Surat, one for
+Richard Steel to carry to England, and the third to be sent to the
+governor of _Jasques_, all sealed with the great seal of the king. The
+same day that these firmauns were procured, being the last of September,
+Sir Robert Shirley set out for Shiras in great pomp, and very honourably
+attended.
+
+[Footnote 158: Of the landing of Sir Robert Shirley, see Peyton's first
+voyage before; and of the rest of his journey see the second voyage of
+Peyton, in the sequel.--_Purch._]
+
+_Copy of the Firmaun granted by the King of Persia._
+
+"Firmaun or command given unto all our subjects, from the highest to the
+lowest, and directed to the _Souf-basha_, or constable of our country,
+kindly to receive and entertain the _English Franks_[159] or nation,
+when any of their ships may arrive at Jasques, or any other of the
+ports in our kingdom, to conduct them and their merchandize to what
+place or places they may desire, and to see them safely defended upon
+our coasts from any other Franks whomsoever. This I will and command you
+to do, as you shall answer in the contrary. Given at our royal city,
+this 12th of _Ramassan_, in the year of our _Tareag_, 1024. [October,
+1615.]"
+
+The chief commodities of Persia are raw silks, of which it yields,
+according to the king's books, 7700 _batmans_ yearly. Rhubarb grows in
+Chorassan, where also worm-seed grows.
+
+[Footnote 159: Frank is a name given in the East to all western
+Christians, ever since the expedition to the Holy Land, because the
+French were the chief nation on that occasion, and because the French
+council at Clermont was the cause of that event.--Purch.]
+
+Carpets of all sorts, some of silk and gold, silk and silver, half silk,
+half cotton, &c. The silver monies of Persia are the _abacee, mahamoody,
+shakee_, and _biftee_, the rest being of copper, like the _tangas_ and
+_pisos_ of India. The _abacee_ weighs two _meticals_, the _mahmoody_ is
+half an abacee, and the _shahee_ is half a _mahamoody_. In the dollar or
+rial of eight there are thirteen shahees.[160] In a shahee there are two
+_biftees_ and a half, or ten cashbegs, one _biftee_ being four
+_cashbegs_, or two _tangs_. The weights differ in different places; two
+_mahans_ of Tauris being only one of Ispahan, and so of the _batman_.
+The measure of length, for silks and other stuffs, is the same with the
+pike of Aleppo, which we judge to be twenty-seven English inches.
+
+[Footnote 160: Assuming the Spanish dollar at 4s. 6d. sterling, the
+shahee ought therefore to be worth about 4d. 1-6, the mahamoody,8d. 1-3,
+and the abecee, 1s. 4d. 2-3.--E.]
+
+John Crowther returned into India, and Richard Steel went to England by
+way of Turkey, by the following route. Leaving Ispahan on the 2d
+December, 1615, he went five p. to a serail. The 3d, eight p. to another
+serail. The 4th, six p. to a village. The 5th, seven p. to _Dreag_. The
+6th, seven p. to a serail. The 7th, eight p. to _Golpigan_,
+[Chulpaigan.] The 8th, seven p. to _Curouan_. The 9th, seven p. to
+_Showgot_. The 10th, six p. to _Saro_, [Sari.] The 11th, eight p. to
+_Dissabad_. The 12th, twelve p. to a fair town called _Tossarkhan_,
+where he rested some days, because the country was covered deep with
+snow. The 15th, six p. to _Kindaner_. The 16th, eight p. to _Sano_. The
+17th to _Shar nuovo_, where I was stopped by the _daiga_; but on shewing
+him letters from the vizier, he bade me depart in the name of God and of
+Ali. The 18th we passed a bridge where all travellers have to give an
+account of themselves, and to pay a tax of two _shakees_ for each camel.
+The 19th we came to _Kassam-Khan_, the last place under the Persian
+government, and made a present to the governor, that he might give me a
+guard to protect me from the Turkomans, which he not only did, but gave
+me a licence to procure provisions free at his villages without payment,
+which yet I did not avail myself of.
+
+The 21st of December I began to pass over a range of high mountains
+which separate the two empires of Persia and Turkey, which are very
+dangerous; and, on the 22d, at the end of eight p. I arrived at a
+village. The 23d, after travelling seven p. I lay under a rock. The 24th
+I came to _Mando_, eight p. a town belonging to the Turks. The 25th,
+eight p. to _Emomester_. The 26th, eight p. to _Boroh_, passed over a
+river in a boat, and came that night to Bagdat. I was here strictly
+examined and searched for letters, which I hid under my saddle; but
+observing one trying there also, I gave him a sign, on which he
+desisted, and followed me to my lodging for his expected reward. I fared
+better than an old Spaniard, only a fortnight before, who was imprisoned
+in chains in the castle, and his letters read by a Maltese renegado. I
+found here a Portuguese, who had arrived from Ormus only two days before
+me. The pacha made us wait here twenty days for a sabandar of his.
+
+The 16th of January, 1616, we passed the river Tigris, and lay on the
+skirt of the desert. The 17th we travelled five _agatzas_, being leagues
+or parasangs. The 18th we came to the Euphrates at _Tulquy_, where
+merchandize disembarked for Bagdat, after paying a duty of five per
+cent. passes to the Tigris, and thence to the Persian gulf. After a
+tedious journey, partly by the river Euphrates, and partly through the
+desert, and then by sea, we arrived at Marseilles, in France, on the
+15th April, and on the 10th May at Dover.
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Voyage of Captain Walter Peyton to India, in 1615._[161]
+
+This voyage seems to have been under the command of Captain Newport, who
+sailed as general in the Lion; but is called, in the Pilgrims, The
+_Second_ Voyage of Captain Peyton to the East Indies, because the former
+voyage of Newport was written by Peyton, who, though he occasionally
+mentions the general, never once names him. In this voyage Peyton sailed
+in the Expedition; the fleet consisting of three other ships, the
+Dragon, Lion, and Pepper-corn. The journal appears to have been
+abbreviated by Purchas, as he tells us it was _gathered out of his
+larger journal_. This voyage is chiefly remarkable as introductory to
+the embassy of Sir Thomas Roe to India, contained in the subsequent
+section, as Sir Thomas and his suite embarked in this fleet. Instead of
+giving the remarks of Sir Thomas Roe in his own journal, so far as they
+apply to the voyage between England and Surat, these have been added in
+the text of the present voyage, distinguishing those observations by
+T.R. the initials of his name, and placing them all in separate
+paragraphs.
+
+[Footnote 161: Purch. Pilgr. I. 528.]
+
+We learn by a subsequent article in the Pilgrims, I. 603, That Captain
+William Keeling was general, or chief commander of this fleet, and
+sailed in the Dragon, Robert Bonner master. The other two ships were the
+Pepper-corn, Captain Christopher Harris, and the Expedition, Captain
+William Peyton.--E.
+
+Sec.1. _Occurrences during the Voyage from England to Surat_.
+
+We sailed from Gravesend on the 24th January, 1615, and on the 2d
+February Sir Thomas Roe, ambassador from his majesty to the Great Mogul,
+repaired on board the Lion, with fifteen attendants. At the same time,
+Mr Humphry Boughton embarked in the Pepper-corn, being recommended by
+the king to the company for a passage to India. We carried out in the
+fleet eleven Japanese, who were brought to England in the Clove, divided
+proportionally among the ships; likewise fourteen Guzerates, brought
+home in the Dragon, together with nineteen condemned persons from
+Newgate, to be left for the discovery of unknown places, the company
+having obtained their pardons from the king for this purpose. On the
+20th, some of the Dragon's men, among whom were the _Newgate birds_,
+attempted to run away with the pinnace, but were prevented: Yet next
+night one of these condemned men, and two of the crew of the
+Pepper-corn, carried away her pinnace. Two of my men conspired to carry
+away my boat that same night, but were discovered.
+
+The 23d February we set sail from the Downs, and on the 6th March we
+lost sight of the Lizard. The 26th we saw land, supposed to be the
+western part of Fuerteventura, but it proved to be part of Barbary. One
+of the points of land at the mouth of the river _Marhequena_, we found
+to be laid down wrong, a whole degree more northerly than it ought to
+be; as likewise cape Bajadore is misplaced a whole degree, which we
+found by experience, escaping great danger caused by that error in our
+charts. The 26th of April we got into the trade wind; and on the 10th
+May, being by estimation 620 leagues west of the Cape of Good Hope, we
+saw many _pintadoes, mangareludas_, and other fowls.
+
+The 5th June we came to anchor in Saldanha bay, having only buried three
+or four men since leaving England, out of our whole fleet, and had now
+about thirty sick, for whom we erected five tents ashore. _Corey_[162]
+came down and welcomed us after his manner, by whose means the savages
+were not so fearful or thievish as at other times. They brought us
+cattle in great abundance, which we bought for shreds of copper. Corey
+shewed his house and his wife and children to some of our people, his
+dwelling being at a town or _craal_ of about an hundred houses, five
+English miles from the landing place. Most of these savages can say _Sir
+Thomas Smith's English ships_, which they often repeat with much pride.
+Their wives and children came often down to see us, whom we gratified
+with bugles, or such trifles; and two or three of them expressed a
+desire to go with us to England, seeing that Corey had sped so well, and
+returned so rich, with his copper suit, which he preserves at his house
+with much care. Corey also proposed to return with us, accompanied by
+one of his sons, when our ships are homeward-bound. On the east side of
+the _Table_ mountain there is another village of ten small houses, built
+round like bee-hives, and covered with mats woven of bent grass.
+
+[Footnote 162: Corey, or Coree, was a savage, or Hottentot chief; who
+had been in England.--_Purch._]
+
+"The land at the Cape of Good Hope, near Saldanha bay, [Table bay] is
+fertile, but divided by high and inaccessible rocky mountains, covered
+with snow, the river Dulce falling into the bay on the east side. The
+natives are the most barbarous people in the world, eating carrion,
+wearing the guts of sheep about their necks, and rubbing their heads,
+the hair on which is curled like the negroes, with the dung of beasts
+and other dirt. They have no clothing, except skins wrapped about their
+shoulders, wearing the fleshy side next them in summer, and the hairy
+side in winter. Their houses are only made of mats, rounded at the top
+like an oven, and open on one side, which they turn as the wind
+changes, having no door to keep out the weather. They have left off
+their former custom of stealing, but are quite ignorant of God, and seem
+to have no religion. The air and water here are both excellent, and the
+country is very healthy. The country abounds in cattle, sheep,
+antilopes, baboons, pheasants, partridges, larks, wild-geese, ducks, and
+many other kinds of fowls. On the Penguin isle [Dassen or Robber's
+island,] there is a bird called penguin, which walks upright, having no
+feathers on its wings, which hang down like sleeves faced with white.
+These birds cannot fly, but walk about in flocks, being a kind of
+mixture, or intermediate link, between beast, bird, and fish, yet mostly
+bird. The commodities here are cattle and _ningin_ roots; and I believe
+there is a rock yielding quicksilver.[163]The Table mountain is 11,853
+feet high.[164] The bay is full of whales and seals, and is in lat. 33 deg.
+45' S."--T.R.
+
+[Footnote 163: Ningin, or Ginseng, is mentioned afterwards. The
+quicksilver rock has not been found.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 164: This height is probably an exaggeration, or was measured
+up its slope or talus, not ascertained perpendicularly.--E.]
+
+On the 16th of June, after a consultation, we set ashore ten of our
+condemned persons to remain at the Cape. These were John Crosse, Henry
+Cocket, Clerke, Brand, Booth, Hunyard, Brigs, Pets, Metcalf, and
+Skilligall. These men agreed that Crosse should be their chief, and we
+gave them weapons for their defence against men and wild beasts,
+together with provisions and clothes. The natives at this place are
+especially desirous of brass, and care not much for copper, chiefly
+wishing to have pieces of a foot square. They care little for iron
+hoops. We caught seven or eight hundred fishes in the river, at one haul
+of our seyne. The country people brought us for sale a root called
+_Ningin_,[165] of which we bought a handful for a small piece of copper
+an inch and half long. Our men got some of this, but not so good, this
+not being the season when it is ripe; for, when in full perfection, it
+is as tender and sweet as anise-seeds.
+
+[Footnote 165: A medicinal root, much prized at Japan, somewhat like a
+_skerrit_.--_Purch._ Probably that named Ginseng, in high repute in
+China and Japan for its fancied restorative and provocative powers, like
+the mandrake of holy writ, but deservedly despised in the Materia Medica
+of Europe. Its whole virtues lay in some supposed resemblance to the
+human figure, founded on the childish doctrine of signatures; whence,
+at one time, every thing yellow was considered specific against
+jaundice, with many other and similar absurd notions.--E.]
+
+We sailed from Saldanha on the 20th June, and on the the 21st we had
+sight of land in 34 deg. 28' S. being the land to the west of cape _de
+Arecife_, laid down 28' more northwardly than it ought in the charts of
+_Daniel_. On the 6th July we ought to have seen the coast of Madagascar,
+by most of our computations, and according to Daniel's charts, upon
+Mercator's projection, which proved false by seventy leagues in distance
+of longitude between the coast of Ethiopia at cape Bona Speranza and the
+isle of St Lawrence, as is evident from the charts projected _in plano_
+by _Tottens_. The 22d all the four ships anchored at _Mohelia_, where we
+had water from wells dug a little above high-water mark, eight or nine
+feet deep, close by the roots of trees. _Doman_ is the chief town of
+this island, where the sultan resides, to whom we gave a double-locked
+piece and a sword. For very little money we were plentifully supplied
+with provisions, as poultry, goats, bullocks, lemons, oranges, limes,
+tamarinds, cocoa-nuts, pines, sugar-canes, and other fruits. Among the
+inhabitants of this island there are Arabs, Turks, and Moors, many of
+whom speak tolerable Portuguese. From them I had a curious account of
+the current at this place, which they said ran alternately fifteen days
+westerly, fifteen days easterly, and fifteen days not at all; and which
+I partly observed to be true: For, at our first coming, the current set
+westerly, and on the 28th it set easterly, and so continued during our
+stay, which was six days, but we went away before trial could be
+perfectly made of this report.
+
+I learned here that the king of _Juanni_ [Joanna or Hinzuan] was
+sovereign of this island, but entrusted its government to the sultan,
+who resides here. The 29th, a vessel arrived at _Doman_ from
+_Gangamora_, in the island of Madagascar, and I was desired by the
+general to examine what were its commodities, which I found to consist
+of rice, and a kind of cloth manufactured of the barks of trees, which
+makes very cool garments. I enquired from the pilot, who spoke good
+Portuguese, respecting Captain Rowles and the other Englishmen who were
+betrayed on that island. He knew nothing of all this, but said that two
+or three years before, an English boy was at Gangamora along with the
+Portuguese, whom he now thought dead, but knew not how he came there.
+This town of _Doman_ contains about an hundred houses, strongly built of
+stone and lime, and its inhabitants are orderly and civil. They carry
+on trade with the coasts of Melinda, Magadoxa, Mombaza, Arabia, and
+Madagascar, carrying slaves taken in their wars, which they sell for
+nine or ten dollars each, and which are sold afterwards in Portugal for
+100 dollars a-head. At Mombaza and Magadoxa, they have considerable
+trade in elephants teeth and drugs; and it was therefore agreed to
+advise the honourable company of this, that they might consider of
+sending a pinnace yearly to make trial of this trade. In Mohelia, we
+bought two or three bullocks for a bar of iron of between twenty and
+twenty-five pounds weight. We bought in all 200 head of cattle, and
+forty goats, besides poultry, fruits, &c.
+
+"_Malalia_ [Mohelia] is one of the Commora islands, the other three
+being _Angazesia_, [Comoro] _Juanny_, [Joanna or Hinzuan] and Mayotta,
+stretching almost east and west from each other. _Angazesia_ [Comoro]
+bears N. by W. from Mohelia, and is the highest land I ever saw. It is
+inhabited by Moors trading with the main and the other three eastern
+islands, bartering their cattle and fruits for calicoes and other cloths
+for garments. It is governed by ten petty kings, and has abundance of
+cattle, goats, oranges, and lemons. The people are reckoned false and
+treacherous. _Hinzuan_ lies east from Mohelia and Mayotta. All these
+three islands are well stored with refreshments, but chiefly Mohelia,
+and next to it Hinzuan. Here lived an old woman who was sultaness of all
+these islands, and under her there were three deputies in Mohelia, who
+were all her sons. The sultan in whose quarter we anchored is so
+absolute, that none of his people dared to sell a single cocoa-nut
+without his leave. Four boats were sent to his town to desire this
+liberty, which was granted. Captain Newport went ashore with forty men,
+and found the governor sitting on a mat, under the side of a junk which
+was then building, and attended by fifty men. He was dressed in a mantle
+of blue and red calico, wrapped about him to his knees, his legs and
+feet bare, and his head covered by a close cap of checquer work. Being
+presented with a gun and sword, he returned four cows, and proclaimed
+liberty for the people to trade with us. He gave the English cocoa-nuts
+to eat, while he chewed betel and areka-nut, tempered with lime of burnt
+oister shells. It has a hot biting taste, voids rheum, cools the head,
+and is all their physic. It makes those giddy who are not accustomed to
+its use, producing red spittles, and in time colours the teeth black,
+which they esteem handsome, and they use this continually. From the
+governor they were conducted to the carpenter's house, who was a chief
+man in the town. His house was built of stone and lime, low and little,
+plaistered with white lime, roofed with rafters, which were covered with
+leaves of the cocoa-nut tree, the outsides wattled with canes.
+
+"Their houses are kept clean and neat, with good household stuff, having
+gardens inclosed with canes, in which they grow tobacco and plantains.
+For dinner, a board was set upon tressels, on which was spread a fine
+new mat, and stone benches stood around, on which the guests sat. First,
+water was brought to each in a cocoa-shell, and poured into a wooden
+platter, and the rinds of cocoa-nuts were used instead of towels. There
+was then set before the company boiled rice, roasted plantains, quarters
+of hens, and pieces of goat's flesh broiled. After grace said, they fell
+to their meat, using bread made of cocoa-nut kernels, beaten up with
+honey, and fried. The drink was palamito wine, and the milk of the
+cocoa-nuts. Those who went to see the sultan, named _Amir Adell_, found
+all things much in the same manner, only that his behaviour was more
+light, and he made haste to get drunk with some wine carried to him by
+the English. The people of these islands are strict Mahomedans, and very
+jealous of letting their women or mosques be seen. For, on some of the
+English coming near a village, they shut them up, and threatened to kill
+them if they came nearer. Many of them speak and write Arabic, and some
+few of them Portuguese, as they trade with Mosambique in junks of forty
+tons burden, built, caulked, and rigged all out of the cocoa-nut tree.
+Here we bought oxen and cows, fat but small, Arabian sheep, hens,
+oranges, lemons, and limes in abundance, paying for them in calicoes,
+hollands, sword-blades, dollars, glasses, and other trifles."--T.R.
+
+We sailed from Mohelia on the 2d August, and on the 17th got sight of
+cape Guardafui, where the natives seemed afraid of us. The 20th we
+anchored in the road of _Galencia_ in Socotora, where the fierceness of
+the wind raised the sea into a continual surf all round about us, and by
+the spray, blown about us like continual rain, our masts, yards, and
+tackle were made white all over by the salt, like so much hoar-frost;
+The 23d we anchored at _Tamara_, the town where the king resides, and on
+the 24th at _Delisha_. They here demanded thirty dollars for the quintal
+of aloes, which made us buy the less. The _Faiking_ told us that Captain
+Downton had bought 100 quintals, and it was still so liquid, either
+from newness, or because of the heat, that it was ready to run out of
+the skins. The quintal of this place, as tried by our beam, weighed 103
+1/2 pounds English. Aloes is made from the leaves of a plant resembling
+our sempervivum, or house-leek, the roots and stalk being cut away, the
+rest strongly pressed, and the juice boiled up to a certain height,
+after which it is put into earthen pots, closely stopped for eight
+months, and is then put into skins for sale. The north part of Socotora
+is in 12 deg. 30', and the body in 120 deg. 25'.[166] It is fourteen leagues
+from this island to _Abdul Curia_, and as much more from thence to cape
+Guardafui. Such as mean to sail for Socotora, should touch at that cape,
+and sail from thence next morning a little before day-break, to lose no
+part of the day-light, the nights here being dark and obscure, with fogs
+and boisterous winds, during the months of August and September. On
+getting into _Abdul Curia_, they may anchor on the west side in seven or
+eight fathoms, under the low land; or, if they cannot get to anchor,
+should keep close hauled in the night to the southward, lest the wind
+and northerly current put them too much to leeward before day.
+Notwithstanding the monsoon, the winds do not blow steadily, being
+sometimes S. by W. and S.S.W. but seldom to the east of south.
+
+[Footnote 166: These two numbers unquestionably relate to the longitude
+and latitude respectively, though strangely expressed. The true lat. is
+13 deg. 20'N. and long. 53 deg. E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+"Socotora is an island not far from the mouth of the Red Sea, being the
+_Dioscuria_ or _Disoscordia_ of the ancients, in lat. 13 deg. 20' N. It was
+governed when we were there by a sultan, named Amir Ben-said, son of the
+king of Fartaque, in Arabia Felix, which lies between the latitudes of
+15 deg. and 18 deg. N. on the coast of Arabia. This king was in peace with the
+Turks, on condition of assisting them with 5000 men when required, and
+then these troops to be paid and maintained by the Turks, to whom he
+paid no other acknowledgement. Near to the sea about Dofar, there is
+another petty Arab sovereign, whom he of Fartaque dare not meddle with,
+because he is under the protection of the Grand Signior.
+
+"The sultan of Socotora came down to meet us at the shore, accompanied
+by 300 men, and had a tent set up for his accommodation. He was on
+horseback, as were two of his principal attendants, and a third on a
+camel, the people running before and behind him shouting. He had two
+companies of guards, one composed of his own subjects, and the other
+consisting of twelve hired Guzerates, some armed with Turkish bows, some
+with pistols, and some with muskets, but all having good swords. He had
+also a few kettle-drums, and one trumpet. He received the general in a
+courteous manner, and was so absolute, that no person could sell any
+thing except himself. His people sat about him very respectfully; his
+clothes were of Surat cloths, made in the Arabian fashion, with a
+cassock of red and white wrought velvet, and a robe of which the ground
+was cloth of gold. He wore a handsome turban, but his legs and feet were
+bare.
+
+"Every night these people all stand or kneel towards the setting sun,
+the _zerife_ throwing water on their heads, being all Mahomedans. The
+king's town, named Tamara, is built of stone and lime, all whited over,
+the houses built with battlements and pinnacles, and all flat-roofed. At
+a distance it looks well, but within is very poor. Mr Boughton had leave
+to see the king's house, and found it such as might serve an ordinary
+gentleman in England. The lower rooms were used as warehouses and
+wardrobe, a few changes of robes hanging about the walls, and along with
+them were some twenty-five books of their law, religion, history, and
+saints lives. No person could be permitted to go up stairs to see his
+three wives, or the other women; but the ordinary sort might be seen in
+the town, their ears all full of silver rings. In the mosque the priest
+was seen at service. Mr Boughton had for his dinner three hens, with
+rice, his drink being water, and a black liquor called _cahu_, [coffee]
+drank as hot as could be endured.
+
+"On a hill, a mile from Tamara, there is a square castle, but we could
+not get leave to see it. The inhabitants are of four sorts. The first
+are Arabs, who have come in by means of conquest, who dare not speak in
+presence of the sultan without leave, and kissing his hand. The second
+sort are slaves, who kiss his foot when they come into his presence, do
+all his work, and make his aloes. The third sort are the old inhabitants
+of the country, called Bedouins, though I think these are not the oldest
+of all, whom I suppose to have been those commonly called Jacobite
+Christians: For, on Mr Boughton going into a church of theirs, which the
+Arabs had forced them to abandon, he found some images and a crucifix,
+which he took away. The Mahomedans would not say much about these
+people, lest other Christians might relieve or support them. These
+Bedouins, having had wars with the Arabs, live apart from them in the
+mountains. The fourth kind of people, or original natives, are very
+savage, poor lean, naked, and wear their hair long. They eat nothing but
+roots, ride about on buffaloes, conversing only among themselves, being
+afraid of all others, having no houses, and live more like wild beasts
+than men, and these we conjecture to have been the original natives of
+the place.
+
+"The island is very mountainous and barren, having some beeves, goats,
+and sheep, a few dates and oranges, a little rice, and nothing else for
+the food of man. All its commodities consist of aloes, the inspisated
+juice of a plant having a leaf like our house-leek. The only manufacture
+is a very poor kind of cloth, used only by slaves. The king had some
+dragon's blood, and some Lahore indigo, as also a few civet cats and
+civet. The dead are all buried in tombs, and the monuments of their
+saints are held in much veneration. The chief of these was one _Sidy
+Hachun_,[167] buried at Tamara, who was slain about an hundred years
+before we were there, and who, as they pretend, still appears to them,
+and warns them of approaching dangers. They hold him in wonderful
+veneration, and impute high winds to his influence."--T.R.
+
+[Footnote 167: Sidy, or Seid, signifies a descendant or relative of
+Mahomet, and Hachem, a prophet.--E.]
+
+The 31st of August we sailed from Socotora. The 10th September we had
+quails, herons, and other land-birds blown from the land, and unable to
+return. The 14th we had sight of Diu, and the 16th of Damaun, both
+inhabited by the Portuguese, and strongly fortified. On the 18th we
+passed the bar of Surat, and came to anchor in the road of Swally. Next
+day we sent a messenger on shore, and our boat returned the same night,
+bringing off Mr William Bidulph, who told us of all the affairs of the
+country, and that _Zulphecar Khan_[168] was now governor of Surat. At
+this place we bought sheep for half a dollar each, and got twenty hens
+for a dollar. On the 22d Mr Barker and other merchants were sent to
+Surat to provide furniture for a house to accommodate the lord
+ambassador, Sir Thomas Roe. They were searched most narrowly, even their
+pockets, and the most secret parts of their dress, according to the base
+manner of this country, in which a man has to pay custom for a single
+dollar in his purse, or a good knife in his pocket; and if one has any
+thing rare, it is sure to be taken away by the governor, under pretence
+of purchase.
+
+[Footnote 168: In the Pilgrims this person is named Zuipher-Car-Chan,
+but we believe the orthography in the text is more correct.--E.]
+
+The lord ambassador landed on the 25th, accompanied by our general, all
+the captains and merchants, and eighty men under arms, part pikes, and
+part muskets. Forty-eight guns were fired off from the ships, which were
+all dressed out with colours and streamers, flags and pendants. On
+landing, he was received in a splendid tent by the chief men of Surat,
+who welcomed him to India. There was much to do about their barbarous
+search, which they would have executed on all his attendants, which he
+strenuously resisted, and at length he and three or four of his
+principal followers were exempted, while the rest were only slightly
+handled for fashion-sake. A great deal passed on this occasion between
+the governor and the ambassador, about these rude and barbarous
+exactions, Sir Thomas justly contending for the honour and immunity of
+an ambassador from an independent king; while they insisted to make no
+difference between him and others of similar rank in those parts, and of
+our own likewise, who had formerly assumed the name of ambassadors.
+Their barbarous usage not only perplexed him there, and detained him
+long till an order came from court, but gave him much plague all the
+time he remained in the country, as will appear afterwards from his own
+journal. They could not easily be persuaded to allow of any difference
+between him and Mr Edwards, who had been considered by them in the same
+light with Sir Thomas.
+
+Mr Barwick's man, who had been inveigled to run away by a deserter from
+Captain Best who had turned Mahomedan, was brought back from Surat on
+the 1st of October. Others afterwards ran away to Damaun, and wrote to
+their comrades to induce them to do the same. The 2d, two Hollanders
+came on board, who had travelled by land from Petapulli, on the
+Coromandel coast. On the 10th, the governor's brother came on board,
+making many fair speeches, and had a present given him. The governor
+impudently urged us to give him presents, though he had already received
+three, but found fault with them, and even named what he would have
+given him, being beggar and chooser both at once. We had this day news
+of Mr Aldworth's death; and on the 5th November we received intelligence
+of the lord ambassador having fallen sick at Burhanpoor, and that Mr
+Boughton was dead.
+
+The most current coin at Surat is rials of eight, or Spanish dollars, of
+which the old with the plain cross passes for five mahmoodies each. The
+new dollars, having flower-de-luces at the ends of the cross, if not
+light, are worth four 3/4 mahmoodies. The _mahmoody_ is a coarse silver
+coin, containing thirty _pice_, and twelve _drams_ make a _pice_. The
+English shilling, if full weight, will yield thirty 1/2 pice. Larines
+are worth much the same with mahmoodies.[169] There are sundry kinds of
+rupees, some of which are worth half a dollar, and others less, by which
+one may be easily deceived. The trade at Surat is conducted by brokers,
+who are very subtle, and deceive both buyer and seller, if not carefully
+looked after. In weights, each city of India differs from another. The
+commodities are infinite, indigos being the chief, those of Lahore the
+best, and those from Sarkess inferior. Great quantities of cloths made
+of cotton, as white and coloured calicoes, containing fourteen yards the
+book or piece, from 100 to 200 mahmoodies each. Pintadoes, chintzes,
+chadors, sashes, girdles, cannakens, trekannies, serrabafs, aleias,
+patollas, sellas, quilts, carpets, green ginger, suckets or confections,
+lignum aloes, opium, sal amoniac, and abundance of other drugs. Vendible
+commodities are knives, mirrors, pictures, and such like toys; English
+cloth, China wares, silk, and porcelain, and all kinds of spices. The
+Guzerates load their great ships, of nine, twelve, or fifteen hundred
+tons, at Gogo, and steal out unknown to the Portuguese.
+
+[Footnote 169: From this explanation, the _mahmoody_ and larine may be
+assumed as worth one shilling; the _pice_ as equal to a farthing and a
+half, and the dram at about 1-10th of a farthing.--E.]
+
+The chief places for trade on the river Sinde, or Indus, are Tatta,
+_Diul-sinde_, Mooltan, and Lahore. The Expedition, on her former voyage,
+had landed the Persian ambassador, Sir Robert Shirley, at _Diul-sinde_;
+and of him I have thought it right to give the following particulars, as
+an appendix to my former voyage, having learnt them from some of his
+followers at Agra. Being weary of _Diul-sinde_, through the evil conduct
+of the governor, and the attempts of the Portuguese to molest him, who
+even used their endeavours to cut him off, for which purpose twelve of
+them had gone there from Ormus, he asked leave to proceed to Tatta; but,
+being refused permission, he went without leave, and having by the way
+to pass a river where none durst ferry him over, because prohibited by
+the governor on pain of death, he constructed a raft of timber and
+boards, on which he and Nazerbeg embarked. They were no sooner shoved
+off than twenty or thirty horse came from the governor in great haste to
+detain them. And as Nazerbeg was unable to guide the raft against the
+tide, some men swam to the raft and brought them back, on which occasion
+they narrowly escaped being drowned. Some of his followers being
+indignant at this rude dealing, one Mr John Ward shot off his pistol in
+their faces, and was instantly slain by another shot, and all the rest
+were carried back prisoners to _Diul-sinde_, being pillaged by the
+soldiers on their way. After some time in prison, they were permitted to
+proceed to Tatta, where they were kindly entertained by the governor of
+that place, who was a Persian. Before leaving Diul-sinde, Sir Thomas
+Powell and Mr Francis Bub died. Sir Robert Shirley remained at Tatta
+till a fit opportunity offered of proceeding to Agra, where he went at
+last, finding the way long and tedious, and much infested by thieves. He
+went there however in safety, going in company with a great man who had
+a strong escort, and for whom he had to wait two months.
+
+In this time Lady Powell was delivered of a son, but both she and her
+child died soon after, together with Mr Michael Powell, brother to Sir
+Thomas, losing their lives in this tedious waiting in boats for the
+great man. On his arrival at Agra, Sir Robert was favourably entertained
+by the Great Mogul, who sent for the Banian governor of Diul-sinde to
+answer at court to the complaint, and promised Sir Robert to have his
+own revenge if he would stay; but he hasted away to Persia, after
+receiving many presents from the Mogul, who gave him an escort, and all
+necessaries for his journey, in which he had not a single English
+attendant, as John Heriot died at Agra, and Mr Richard Barber, his
+apothecary, returned to Surat. Of all his company, three only remained
+with him, his lady and her female attendant, two Persians, the old
+Arminian, and the Circassian. His Dutch jeweller came to Surat along
+with Mr Edwards.
+
+Sec.2. _Occurrences at Calicut and Sumatra, Miscarriage of the English
+Ships, Abuses of the Dutch, and Factories in India_.
+
+We took a Portuguese prize on the 29th of February, 1616. The 3d March,
+while at anchor in the road of Calicut, the deputy of the Zamorin came
+aboard, attended by many boats, signifying the joy of his master at our
+arrival, and his earnest desire to confer with our nation, and entreated
+therefore that we would tarry a few days, that he might send to the
+Zamorin, who was then at Cranganore besieging a castle belonging to the
+Portuguese. We had here abundance of provisions brought to us on board,
+and at reasonable rates. That same evening, there came a messenger from
+the Zamorin, entreating us to anchor for two or three days off
+Cranganore, which we accordingly did on the 5th, anchoring two leagues
+off shore. About noon the Zamorin sent to request the general would come
+ashore, to visit him, but this was not deemed right without a pledge,
+and Mr George Barkley went ashore to wait upon him; but the Zamorin
+refused to reveal his intentions to any one except our general, and
+seemed much displeased at his not coming ashore.
+
+The general accordingly landed on the 8th, and had an audience of the
+Zamorin, who wished the English to establish a factory in his dominions,
+for which purpose he offered a good house rent-free, freedom from custom
+or other exactions, for all goods brought there or carried thence, and
+made many protestations of affection for our nation. This was for the
+present declined, because most of our goods had been left at Surat, and
+because we were now bound for Bantam. To this the Zamorin answered, that
+it was no matter whether any goods were left for the present, as he only
+desired we might leave two or three Englishmen there, who should want
+for nothing, as he only wanted to be assured of our return next year
+with a supply of men and goods. He assured us we might be sure of
+loading one ship yearly with pepper, and might make sale of our
+commodities to a considerable extent. Upon this it was agreed to leave a
+factory at this place, with such goods as we could spare, which went
+accordingly on shore on the 9th; George Woolman being appointed chief of
+this new factory at Cranganore, Peter Needham and Roger Hares
+under-factors, together with Richard Stamford, and a boy named Edward
+Peake, who was appointed to learn the language. The name of the king is
+_Pendre Quone[170] Zamorin_, to whom was given, as a present, a minion
+or small cannon, and a barrel of powder; on which he promised, if he won
+the fort of Cranganore, to give it up to the English.
+
+[Footnote 170: Named _Underecon Cheete_ in a subsequent article.--E.]
+
+The 10th we received the Zamorin's letter of agreement for our
+privileges, with many fair protestations of love. We sailed the same
+day, passing before Cochin, which we could see distinctly. Next day we
+had a view of the town and castle of Coulan, where was a ship riding at
+anchor under the guns of the castle, which we boarded and brought forth
+without any hurt from the guns, all the crew having fled ashore. This
+was a Portuguese ship of four or five hundred tons, lately arrived from
+Bengal and Pegu, laden with rice, grain, Bengal cloths, butter, sugar,
+gum lack, hard wax, drugs, and other things. The 12th we espied another
+ship, to which we gave chase, and came up with about midnight, when she
+surrendered at the first shot.[171] I sent for her chief men on board my
+ship, the others being three or four miles a-stern, and set some of my
+people on board the prize, with strict charges to hurt no person. There
+were in this ship eighteen or twenty Portuguese, and about eighty
+others, men, women, and children. Her chief loading was rice, butter,
+sugar, lack, drugs, and Bengal cloths. We offered these people our first
+prize, with victuals to carry them ashore, which they refused, as
+fearing to be ill-used by the Malabars, having lately escaped with
+difficulty from a fleet of theirs of fourteen sail. Next day we landed
+them where they desired, and allowed them to go away unsearched for
+money or jewels. We had now three English ships[172] and three prizes.
+
+[Footnote 171: These prizes were taken from the Portuguese in part
+satisfaction for their unjust vexations and hostilities at Surat and
+other places.--_Purch._]
+
+[Footnote 172: No notice is taken of the fourth ship, the Lion, probably
+left at Surat; indeed, the whole of this relation is exceedingly vague
+and unsatisfactory, the name even of the general never being once
+mentioned.--E.]
+
+The 14th we arrived at _Brinion_, in lat. 8 deg. 30', where we took out of
+the first prize what we thought useful, and then set her adrift. At
+_Brinion_ there is a small town in a round bay, which may be known by a
+long white beach to the north, and to the south is all high land, having
+a red cliff two leagues to the south, close to the sea. From thence to
+cape Comorin is sixteen leagues, the course being S.E. by S. along a
+bold free coast. The inhabitants of Brinion[173] are no way subject to
+the Portuguese. The 1st of April the island of Ceylon bore E. by S.
+seven leagues off. On the 10th the Peak of Adam bore north. I this day
+took my leave of the general, the Dragon and Pepper-corn being bound for
+Acheen, while I, in the Expedition, went for Priaman, Tecoo, and Bantam.
+
+[Footnote 173: In 8 deg. 22' N. at the distance indicated from cape Comorin,
+is a place called Billingham, which may possibly be the Brinion of the
+text.--E.]
+
+It is good to remain in Brinion till the end of March, when the easterly
+monsoon ends, and not to pass cape Comorin sooner, on account of calms,
+and because the southerly current sets towards the Maldives. All who
+come from the west for Priaman and Tecoo, ought to continue so as to
+have sufficient day-light for passing between _Nimptan_[174] and the
+other adjacent islands, the best channel being to the north of that
+island. On the 30th of April I met the Advice going for Tecoo; but, at
+my request, she returned for Bantam, whence she was sent to Japan. I
+arrived at Bantam on the 1st of May, where I found the Hosiander newly
+arrived from Japan, and the Attendance from _Jambo_, most of their men
+being sick or dead. I here learnt the death of Captain Downton, and of
+the arrival of Captain Samuel Castleton with the Clove and Defence,
+which, with the Thomas and Concord, were gone to the Moluccas, the
+Thomas being appointed to proceed from thence to Japan.
+
+[Footnote 174: Pulo Mintaon, off the S.W. coast of Sumatra, nearly under
+the line, is probably here meant.--E.]
+
+The 19th of May I sailed from Bantam, and the 10th June I put into
+Tecoo. The 3d July I hove my ship down on the careen to sheath her. It
+is of great use to double sheath such ships as go to Surat, as though
+the outer sheathing may be eaten like a honey-comb by the worms, the
+inner is not at all injured. It were also of great use to have the
+rudder sheathed with thin copper,[175] to prevent the worms from eating
+off its edges, which is very detrimental in steering, and cannot be
+easily remedied, being so deep in the water. The natives of Sumatra
+inhabiting Priaman are barbarous, deceitful, and continually craving
+presents or bribes; and sometimes I have been in imminent hazard of
+being murdered, a hundred of them drawing their crisses upon us at once,
+because we refused to let them have our goods on trust, or at prices of
+their own making. The 20th, Thomas Bonnar, master of the Expedition,
+died, and was succeeded by John Row, who was the third master in this
+voyage.
+
+[Footnote 175: We had formerly occasion to notice a ship sheathed with
+iron at Japan, and this is the first indication or proposal for using
+copper in that way. Iron sheathing has never been adopted into British
+practice, while copper sheathing is now universal. Captain Peyton does
+not appear to have been aware that copper sheathing is incompatible
+with iron fastenings, which indeed was only learnt long after, by woeful
+experience, and the loss of many ships and men. In consequence of a
+strong predisposing chemical afinity, exerted by the contiguity of the
+copper and iron in the sea water, the muriatic acid corrodes the iron
+bolts and other fastenings, all of which are now made of copper in ships
+that are to be copper sheathed.--E.]
+
+The 26th, the Dragon and Pepper-corn arrived from Acheen, where they had
+purchased pepper, carried there from Tecoo in large junks and praws,
+which navigate between these places, but never out of sight of land. The
+king of Acheen commands the people of Tecoo to bring their pepper to his
+port, and allows none to purchase it there, but those who barter their
+Surat goods at such rates as he pleases to impose. Often likewise, he
+sends to Priaman and Tecoo the Surat commodities procured by him in that
+manner, obliging the merchants there to buy at rates by him imposed, and
+no person is allowed to buy or sell till his goods are sold. This makes
+our trade with them the better.[176] _Jambo_ is on the east side of
+Sumatra, and yields a similar large-grained pepper with what is procured
+at Priaman, but is not under the dominion of the king of Acheen, as are
+Baruse, Passaman, Tecoo, Priaman, Cottatinga, and other places on the
+western side of that island. _Baruse_ is to the north of Passaman, and
+yields considerable quantities of benzoin; _Cottatinga_ yields gold, and
+the other places pepper. Our general brought the king of Acheen's letter
+to these places, where the chief men received it with great submission,
+each of them kissing it and laying it on his head, promising to obey its
+injunctions, yet all failed in performance. It were proper, in these
+letters from the king, to procure all the particulars of the trade to be
+inserted. I set sail from Tecoo for Bantam on the 4th September.
+
+[Footnote 176: It is so expressed in the Pilgrims; yet it would seem
+that such arbitrary proceeding in the sovereign, assuming the character
+of merchant, would be destructive of all trade.--E.]
+
+The best gold, and the largest quantity, is to be had at the high hill
+of Passaman, where likewise is the best, cheapest, and most abundant
+produce of pepper. But the air is there so pestiferous, that there is no
+going thither for our nation without great mortality among the men.
+Fortunately this is not necessary in procuring pepper, as the Surat
+commodities at Tecoo are sufficiently attractive. I have even observed
+many of the natives to labour under infectious diseases, the limbs of
+some being ready to drop off with rottenness, while others had huge
+wens or swellings under their throats, as large as a two-penny loaf;
+which they impute to the bad water.[177] Though a barbarous people, they
+are yet acquainted with the means of curing their diseases. The people
+of Tecoo are base, thievish, subtle, seeking gain by every kind of
+fraud, or even by force when they dare; using false weights, false
+reckonings, and even attempting to poison our meats and drinks while
+dressing, and crissing our men when opportunity serves: But it is to be
+hoped they may be inforced to keep better order, by the influence and
+authority of the king of Acheen. At Acheen our Portuguese prizes were
+disposed of, and shared according to the custom of the sea, a sixth part
+being divided among the captors, and the rest carried to the account of
+our employers. There were only five left in the factory. Many of our men
+were sick, owing to their immoderate indulgence in drinking arrack.
+
+[Footnote 177: The _goitre_ was long ignorantly imputed in Europe to
+drinking snow water; but is now well known only to affect the
+inhabitants of peculiar districts, as Derbyshire in England, and the
+Valais in Switzerland, and this district in Sumatra, where certain
+mineral impregnations render the water unwholesome.--E.]
+
+When at Bantam, in October 1616, there were four English ships, and five
+Hollanders at Jacatra, which raised the price of pepper; and that the
+more, because the Dutch boasted of having brought this year in ready
+money 1,600,000 dollars, which is probably a great exaggeration to brave
+our nation. Their last fleet of six ships took two or three ships of the
+Portuguese, of which they made great boasts. They endeavour to depress
+our nation by every manner of abuse throughout the Indies, acting
+towards us in a most unfriendly and unchristian manner. Even in Bantam,
+where they acknowledge our equal right, they threaten to pull our people
+out of our factory by the ears, sometimes picking quarrels with them in
+the streets, and even imprisoning them; and when they themselves have
+caused an uproar, complaining to the king of Bantam of our unquietness,
+and bribing him to take their parts. He receives their money, and tells
+us of their dealings, taking advantage of this disagreement to fleece
+both sides. Even at Pulo-way, an island freely surrendered to the king
+of England, they abused our people, leading them through the streets
+with halters round their necks, carrying an hour-glass before them, and
+proclaiming that they were to be hanged when the sand was run out. And
+though they did not actually proceed to that extremity, they kept them
+three or four days in irons, and afterwards sent them aboard the Concord
+and Thomasine, under a forced composition never to return. Likewise, at
+the return of the Hosiander from Japan, which brought thirty tons of
+wood for them, free of freight and charges, they reported she would have
+returned empty, but for their timber; which also they might have said of
+my ship, which brought for them, from Surat to Bantam, thirty-one
+_churles_ of indigo and a chest of pistoles, freight-free.
+
+Captain Castleton went to the Moluccas with four ships, the Clove,
+Defence, Thomas, and Concord, that he might be better able to defend
+himself against the Hollanders; yet, being threatened by eleven of their
+ships, they returned without doing much business, having only a few
+cloves in the Clove. The captain died there of the flux; and the bad
+success of that expedition, together with other faults, was laid to his
+charge. The Trades-increase was twice set on fire by the Javans, and the
+fire quenched by our people; but on a third attempt, she was fired in so
+many places at once, that it was impossible to save her. The Darling was
+laid up at Patane, in June 1615, by order of Mr Larkine and the factory,
+as incapable of repair. Herrold, her master, was reported of having a
+design to carry her off to the Portuguese; and, being prevented, he went
+himself. The Thomasine was cast away, in September 1615, upon a shoal in
+the night, seventeen leagues W. from Macasser, while returning from the
+Moluccas. On this occasion her goods were lost, which were not of much
+value, but they saved the money, being 2000 dollars, and all their
+provisions, remaining fourteen days on a desolate island, where they
+fitted up their boat, which brought themselves and their money to
+Bantam. All their goods and other things were left behind, and seized by
+the king of Macasser, who refused to make restitution. At Jacatra the
+Hector sunk in three fathoms water while careening, her keel being
+exceedingly worm-eaten. The Concord is there also laid up, so rotten
+and leaky that they had to take out her provisions, and let her sink
+close to the shore. The Hosiander, on the 15th October 1616, was
+appointed to sail for the Coromandel coast.
+
+The factories which are at present established for our company in the
+East Indies, so far as I could hear, are these: Bantam, Jacatra,
+Ahmedabad, Agra, Agimere, Burhanpoor, Calicut, Masulipatam, Patepulli,
+Patane, Siam, Banjermassen, Succodania, Macasser, Acheen, Jambo, Tecoo,
+Banda, and Firando in Japan. At Bantam, Mr George Barclay was chief,
+with John Jordan, George Ball, Ralph Copendale, and several other
+factors and assistants. The principal purpose of the factory at Acheen,
+is to solicit for our better proceedings at Priaman and Tecoo. The place
+is unwholesome, more especially for such as indulge in the use of hot
+fiery drinks, as _arack_ and _aracape_, which bring many to untimely
+graves; and throw discredit on the voyage. It is not to be imagined at
+home, how unruly are the common men abroad, never being satisfied unless
+when their brains are reeling with liquor. Even the king of Acheen is
+said to have a strange habit of getting drunk when the English resort to
+him, as if thereby to do them honour, and it seems dishonourable to them
+not to conform with him, in sitting in the water, drinking hard, and
+many other strange customs. He is very tyrannical and cruel to his
+subjects, daily cutting off the hands, arms, and legs of many, on very
+small and frivolous causes; or causing them to be thrown to the
+elephants, he himself commanding a sagacious elephant to toss the
+culprits so high and so often, as either to bruise or kill them,
+according to his caprice at the time. No one that arrives at his port
+may land without his _chop_ or licence. On one occasion, a Dutch general
+came on shore without his licence, by desire of the principal factor,
+who presumed on his favour with the king. When the general came to the
+palace-gate, where another chop is necessary, the king found this
+irregularity to have proceeded from the presumption of the resident,
+whom he sent for and laid before the elephant, who tossed him three
+times, but so gently as not to bruise him much, giving him thus a
+warning how he should neglect the king's commands another time. The
+Dutch general stood by the while, fearing to come in for his share of
+this strange discipline; but the king forgave him, as ignorant of the
+law. The poor factor, being called into the king's presence, humbly
+acknowledged his punishment to have been merited, yet fled with the rest
+of the factory at the departure of the ships; on which the king placed
+us in their house.
+
+We sailed from Bantam, homeward bound, on the 1st November 1616. The 5th
+January 1617, I was unable to weigh our anchor, owing to the violence
+of the wind, to follow the Dragon to Penguin island. Ships that go round
+the Cape of Good Hope from India, at this season of the year, ought not
+to anchor short of Saldanha road, [Table Bay,] but ought to bear to
+leeward for Penguin island, and anchor there with two anchors at once,
+till the wind serve. In December, January, and February, the S.S.E. wind
+blows there with great violence from new to full moon. Yet I hold it
+dangerous to neglect this place, trusting to refreshments at St Helena,
+a certainty for an uncertainty; as the obscurity of the sun and moon,
+owing to thick mists at this season, may disappoint the most experienced
+navigators, and occasion the loss of ship, cargo, and men. While at the
+Cape, Corey came down with three sheep, and promised more, but went away
+in great haste to his wife and family, who dwelt now farther from the
+bay than formerly. It appears that the Hollanders had frightened the
+natives, by landing and going up the country with above an hundred men
+at once. Owing to this, our chief refreshment here was fresh fish.
+
+The 9th April 1617, we passed through great quantities of sea-weeds,
+called _seragasso_, which float in long ridges or rows along with the
+wind, and at considerable distances from each other. This plant has a
+leaf like samphire, but not so thick, and carries a very small yellow
+berry. It reaches from 22 deg. 20' to 32 deg. both of N. latitude. We anchored
+in the Downs on the 29th of May 1617.
+
+
+3. _Brief Notice of the Ports, Cities, and Towns, inhabited by, and
+traded with, by the Portuguese between the Cape of Good Hope and Japan,
+in_ 1616.
+
+The river of _Quame_, or _Cuamo_, on the eastern coast of Africa, where
+they are said to trade yearly for gold, elephants teeth, ambergris, and
+slaves. _Mozambique_, an island on the same coast, where they trade for
+gold, ambergris, and slaves, in barter for iron, lead, tin, and Cambay
+commodities, _Magadoxo_, which has abundance of elephants teeth, some
+ambergris, and various kinds of drugs. From these ports they trade
+yearly to Cambay, the Red Sea, and other places, observing the monsoons,
+which blow W. in April, May, June, July, August, and part of September,
+and the E. monsoon prevails an the other months. A few days between the
+cessation of one monsoon and the commencement of the other, the winds
+are variable, attended by calms, but become regular in a few days. To
+the east of Sumatra, however, the two monsoons continue only five months
+each way, the two intermediate months having variable winds.
+
+_Ormus_ in the gulf of Persia, whence the Portuguese trade to Persia,
+Diul-sinde, Arabia, &c. They fetch much pearl from Bassora;[178] and
+they load a ship or two with Persian commodities for Diul-sinde, where
+they arrive between the end of August and middle of September, taking
+likewise with them great store of dollars. Ormus is their best place in
+the Indies except Goa. At _Muskat_ they have a fort and some small
+trade, keeping the natives in such awe by land and sea, that they dare
+not trade without their licence, and this practice they follow in all
+parts of India where they are strong. _Diul-sinde_ on the Indus in the
+dominions of the Great Mogul. _Diu_, where they have a strong castle.
+Damaun, where they have a castle, and are said to have an hundred
+villages under their authority. _Basseen_, or _Serra de Bazein_, a
+little south from _Damaun_, and bordering on the Deccan; between which
+and _Chaul_ they have three ports, _Gazein, Banda_, and _Maia_. _Chaul_
+is a great city with a castle. At _Dabul_ they have a factory, but no
+fort.
+
+[Footnote 178: This is a mistake for the isle of Bahrein.--E.]
+
+_Goa_ is their metropolitan city in India, which stands in a small
+island, being the seat of their viceroy, and the anchoring place of
+their caracks. _Onore_ has a small fort. _Barcellore_, a town and
+castle, yields pepper, ginger, and many kinds of drugs. _Mangalore_, a
+town and castle. _Cananore_, a city and castle, yielding similar
+commodities with Barcellore. From _Calicut_ they have been expelled by
+the Zamorin, who endeavours to do the same at _Crangator_, [Cranganore,]
+where they have a fort. _Cochin_ is a strong city and castle, pleasantly
+situated on the sea in a wholesome air, with a fine river for the
+reception of ships. _Coulan_, a town with a small castle; near which is
+a village named St Lawrence, chiefly inhabited by friars and jesuits.
+_Quiloan_, a small city with a castle. _Tuckatra_, a town and castle,
+the inhabitants being mostly Christians.
+
+_Manaar_ is on the island of Ceylon, between Cape Comorin and
+Point-de-Gale, where they have a town inhabited by Portuguese. In this
+island also they have _Columbo_, and many other small places, having
+conquered most of the island, which yields cinnamon and various drugs.
+_Negopatnam_ is a city of great trade, on the coast of Coromandel, where
+they have only a factory. St Thomas, or _Meliapoor_, is a walled town
+inhabited by the Portuguese. In Bengal, up the river Ganges, they have a
+town, besides some factories and many small habitations. They have a
+factory in Pegu, another in Aracan, and one in the river of Martaban.
+Also at _Junkceylon_ they have a great factory, whence they fetch
+considerable quantities of tin to the Malabar coast.
+
+_Malacca_ is a strong city and castle belonging to the Portuguese, and
+the centre of a great trade in those parts of India. From this place the
+king of Acheen has long sought to root them out, and has burnt and
+plundered some of their ships this year, 1619. At _Macao_, an island on
+the coast of China, they have a city with a castle, where they are said
+to carry on much trade with the Chinese. They have a factory in Japan,
+but neither town nor fort; and trade thence with the coast of China. The
+Dutch are said to make much spoil of the vessels employed on this trade,
+Portuguese, Chinese, and others, accounting all fish that fall into
+their net.
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Notes, concerning the Proceedings of the Factory at Cranganore, from
+the Journal of Roger Hawes.[179]_
+
+[Footnote 179: Parch. Pilgr. I. 608.--Hawes sailed in the fleet under
+Keeling, in 1615, which carried out Sir Thomas Roe, already related in
+Sect. IV. of this chapter; and the present short article almost
+exclusively relates to the new factory at Cranganore on the Malabar
+coast, in which Hawes was left as one of the factors. This is a very
+imperfect and inconclusive article, yet gives some idea of the manners
+and customs of the Malabars.--E.]
+
+On the 4th of March 1615, we chased a Portuguese frigate, which ran into
+a creek and escaped. While on our way towards Cape Comorin, a Tony came
+aboard of us, with messengers from the Zamorin to our general, Captain
+William Keeling. Next day, the governor sent a present, and entreated
+the general to proceed to Cranganore, which we did next day, taking with
+us the messengers sent from the Zamorin, who requested the general to
+come on shore to speak with him. But, while he was doing so, some
+frigates came and anchored near the shore, by which he was constrained
+to go on board the Expedition, Captain Walter Peyton. On this occasion
+some shots were exchanged, but little harm was done. The general went
+ashore on the 8th, accompanied by Mr Barclay, the cape merchant, and
+several others. They were well used, and agreed to settle a factory in
+the dominions of the Zamorin, the following being the articles agreed
+upon:--
+
+_"UNDERECON CHEETE, Great Zamorin, &c. to JAMES, King of Britain, &c._
+Whereas your servant and subject, William Keeling, arrived in my kingdom
+at the port of Cranganore, in March 1615, with three ships, and at my
+earnest solicitation came ashore to see me; there was concluded by me
+for my part, and by him for the English nation, as followeth.
+
+"As I have ever been at enmity with the Portuguese, and propose always
+so to continue, I do hereby faithfully promise to be and to continue in
+friendship with the English, both for myself and my successors: And, if
+I succeed in taking the fort of Cranganore, I engage to give it to the
+English, to possess as their own, together with the island belonging to
+it, which is in length along the sea-coast nine miles, and three in
+breadth; and I propose to build therein a house for my own people, to
+the number of one hundred persons.
+
+"I shall hereafter endeavour, with the aid of the English, to conquer
+the town and fort of Cochin, which formerly belonged, to my crown and
+kingdom, and shall then deliver it to the English as their own. Provided
+that the charges of its capture be equally borne by both parties, one
+half by me, and the other half by the English nation; and in that case,
+the benefit of the plunder thereof, of whatsoever kind, shall belong
+half to me, and half to the English. And thereafter, I shall claim no
+right, title, or interest in the said town, precincts, or appurtenances
+whatsoever."
+
+"I also covenant for myself, my heirs and successors, that the whole
+trade of the English, in whatsoever commodities, brought in or carried
+out, shall be entirely free from all custom, imposition, tax, toll, or
+any other duty, of any quality or description."
+
+"To these covenants, which the shortness of time did not permit to
+extend in more ample form, I, the Zamorin, have sworn to perform, by the
+great God whom I serve, and not only for myself but for my successors;
+and in witness thereof have laid my hand upon this writing.[180] And the
+said William Keeling promises to acquaint the king his master with the
+premises, and to endeavour to procure his majesty's consent thereto."
+
+[Footnote 180: This probably alludes to a custom mentioned in one of our
+earlier volumes, of imprinting the form of the hand, smeared with ink,
+on the paper, instead of signature or seal.--E.]
+
+This being agreed upon, a stock was made out for a factory, such as the
+shortness of time would permit, and three factors were appointed. These
+were, George Woolman, chief, Peter Needham, second, who was one of the
+general's servants, and I, Roger Hawes, third; together with a youth,
+named Edward Peake, as our attendant, who was to learn the language.
+John Stamford, a gunner, was likewise left to assist the Zamorin in his
+wars. On the 10th the ships departed, leaving us and our goods in a
+_shrambe_ at the water side, together with a present for the Zamorin. We
+continued there till the 13th, at which time the last of our goods were
+carried to the Zamorin's castle; whose integrity we much suspected,
+after having thus got possession of our goods. On the 20th, he insisted
+to see Mr Woolman's trunk, supposing we had plenty of money. Needham had
+told him we had 500 rials; but finding little more than fifty, he
+demanded the loan of that sum, which we could not refuse. He offered us
+a pawn not worth half; which we refused to accept, hoping he would now
+allow us to proceed to Calicut, but he put us off with delays. He
+likewise urged us to give his brother a present.
+
+On the 28th, the Zamorin came into the apartment where we were, and gave
+Mr Woolman two gold rings, and one to each of the rest; and next day he
+invited us to come to his tumbling sports. That same night, Stamford
+went out with his sword in his hand, telling the boy that he would
+return presently. The next news we had of him was, that he was in the
+hands of the Cochin nayres. He had lost His way while drunk, and meeting
+with some of them, they asked where he wished to go; he said to the
+Zamorin, to whom they undertook to conduct him, and he knew not that he
+was a prisoner, till he got to Cochin. This incident put us in great
+fear, but the Zamorin gave us good words, saying he was better pleased
+to find him a knave now, than after he had put trust in him.
+
+We had leave in April to depart with our goods to Calicut, where we
+arrived on the 22d of that month, and were well received; but had to
+remain in the custom-house, till we could get a more convenient house,
+which was made ready for us on the 6th of May, with promise of a better
+after the rains. We were very desirous, according to our orders from
+the general, to have sent a messenger with his and our letters to
+Surat, to acquaint our countrymen that we were here; but the governor
+would not consent till we had sold all our goods. On the 18th of June,
+one was sent. On the 26th, part of our goods were sold to the merchants
+of Calicut, by the governor's procurement, with fair promises of part
+payment shortly. But it is not the custom of the best or the worst in
+this country to keep their words, being certain only in dissembling. Mr
+Woolman was desirous of going to Nassapore to make sales, but the
+governor put him off with divers shifts from time to time. The 3d July,
+our messenger for Surat returned, reporting that he had been set upon
+when well forwards on his way, and had his money and letters taken from
+him, after being well beaten. Among his letters was one from Captain
+Keeling to the next general, the loss of which gave us much concern; yet
+we strongly suspected that our messenger had been robbed by his own
+consent, and had lost nothing but his honesty. A broker of Nassapore
+told Mr Needham, that our dispatches had been sold to the Portuguese,
+and when the governor heard of this, he hung down his head, as guilty.
+We here sold some goods to merchants of Nassapore.
+
+Mr Woolman died on the 17th of August. We could not procure payment of
+our promised money, and were told by our broker, that some one of our
+debtors would procure a respite from the governor, by means of a bribe,
+on which the rest would refuse till they all paid. On the 24th, the
+Zamorin's sister sent us word, that she would both cause our debtors to
+pay us, and to lend us any money we needed; but we found her as false as
+the rest The queen mother also made us fair promises, and several others
+made offers to get letters conveyed for us to Surat; but all their words
+were equally false. Thus wronged, Mr Needham farther wronged himself by
+his indiscretion, threatening, in presence of a nayre who attended us,
+and who revealed his threats, that he would go to the king of Cochin,
+making shew of violent revenge to put the governor in fear. He behaved
+outrageously likewise to a _scrivano_,[181] who is the same as a justice
+with us, taking him by the throat, and making as if he would have cut
+him down with his sword, for detaining some of our money which he had
+received. Our broker also told Mr Needham, that it was not becoming to
+go up and down the streets with a sword and buckler; and indeed his
+whole conduct and behaviour more resembled those we call
+_roaring-boys_,[182] than what became the character of a merchant. For
+my admonitions, he requited me with ill language, disgracing himself and
+injuring the affairs of the company.
+
+[Footnote 181: This term is obviously Portuguese, and cannot be the
+proper appellation for a judge on the Malabar coast.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 182: This character is now only to be met with in some of our
+old plays such as Captain Bobadil in Every Man in his Humour.--E.]
+
+A Dutch ship, which had been trading in the Red Sea, arrived here on the
+23d of September, with the intention of settling a factory, and they
+were referred by the governor to the Zamorin, promising to carry a
+letter for us, but went without it; so that our delays continued. Mr
+Needham went himself to the Zamorin on the 4th November, and returned on
+the 25th, having got a present of a gold chain, a jewel, and a gold
+armlet, with orders also from the king to further our purposes; but the
+performance was as slow as before. The 20th December, a Malabar captain
+brought in a prize he had taken from the Portuguese, and would have
+traded with us; but we could not get in any of our money, due long
+before. We also heard that day of four English ships being at Surat. The
+governor and people continued their wonted perfidiousness; the former
+being more careful in taking, and the latter in giving bribes, than in
+paying our debts. We used a strange contrivance of policy to get in some
+of these; for, when we went to their houses, demanding payment, and
+could get none, we threatened not to leave their house till they paid
+us. We had heard it reported, that, according to their customs, they
+could neither eat nor wash while we were in their houses; and by this
+device we sometimes got fifty _fanos_ from one, and an hundred from
+another. They would on no account permit us to sleep in their houses,
+except one person, with whom we remained three days and nights, with
+three or four nayres. They were paid for watching him, but we got
+nothing. The nayre, who had been appointed by the king to gather in our
+debts, came to demand a gratuity from us, though he had not recovered
+any of our money. He would go to the debtor's houses, taking three or
+four _fanos_, and then depart without any of our money.
+
+On the 9th of January, 1616, Mr Needham went to demand payment of a
+debt, and being refused permission to pass by a nayre who struck him, as
+he says, he gave the nayre a dangerous wound in the head with his sword,
+of which it is thought he cannot recover, and others of the natives were
+hurt in the fray. Word was presently brought to us to shut up our doors,
+lest the nayres should assemble to do us some mischief, as feuds or
+kindred-quarrels and murders are common among them, having no other law
+or means of vengeance. Our nayre with his kindred, to the number of
+thirty or more, with pikes, swords, and bucklers, guarded Mr Needham
+home, on which occasion we had to give a gratuity. Our house had to be
+guarded for three or four days and nights, none of us daring to go out
+into the streets for money or other business for a week, though before
+we used to go about in safety. After that, our broker advised us never
+to go out, unless attended by a nayre, as they had sworn to put one of
+us to death, in revenge for him who was slain.
+
+The 20th, the Portuguese armado of thirty-four sail, passed by from the
+south, of which fourteen were ships, and the rest frigates or grabs.
+They put into the harbour, in which three Malabar frigates lay at
+anchor, and a hot fight ensued, in which the Portuguese were forced to
+retreat with disgrace, having only cut the hawser of one of the
+frigates, which drove on shore and was stove in pieces. This belonged to
+the governor, who was well served, for he remained like a coward in the
+country, keeping four or five great guns that were in the town locked
+up, except one, and for it they had only powder and shot for two
+discharges. Before the fight ended, some 4000 nayres were come in from
+the country, and several were slain on both sides. Nine or ten
+Portuguese were driven ashore, and two or three of the chiefs of these
+were immediately hung up by the heels, and being taken down after two
+days, were thrown to be devoured by wild beasts.
+
+On the 28th of January, we were told by a Pattemar, that the governor
+was only our friend outwardly, wishing rather to have the Portuguese in
+our room, as we did no good in the country, bringing only goods to sell,
+whereas the Portuguese did good by making purchases. The 8th of February
+we had letters from Surat; and on the 4th of March, the Zamorin wrote to
+us, that if our ships came, he wished them to come to Paniany, and that
+we need not be anxious for our money, as he would pay us, even if he
+were forced to sell his rings.
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Ambassador from King James I, to Shah
+Jehanguiro, Mogul Emperor of Hindoostan_.[183]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+There are two editions of this journal in our older Collections of
+Voyages and Travels, but both exceeding defective and imperfect. The
+_first_ of these is in the Pilgrims of Purchas, which is said to have
+been "_Collected out_ of the Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Knight, Lord
+Ambassador from his Majesty of Great Britain, to the Great Mogul." It is
+evidently to be considered as an _abridgement_ made by Purchas, which,
+indeed, he fully acknowledges in a postscript, in the following
+terms:--"Some readers may perhaps wish they had the whole journal, and
+not thus contracted into _extracts_ of those things out of it which I
+conceived more fit for the public. And for the whole, myself would have
+wished it; but neither with the honourable Company, nor elsewhere, could
+I learn of it, the worthy knight himself being now employed in like
+honourable embassage from his majesty to the _Great Turk_." Besides that
+it is a mere abridgement, often most confusedly, and almost
+unintelligibly tacked together, this article in The Pilgrims breaks off
+abruptly in a most interesting part of the narrative, which we have now
+no means to supply. The full title of this article in The Pilgrims is as
+follows:--"Observations collected out of the Journal of Sir Thomas Roe,
+Knight, Lord Ambassador from his Majesty the King of Great Britain, to
+the Great Mogul. Consisting of Occurrences worthy of Memory, in the way,
+and at the Court of the Mogul; together with an Account of his Customs,
+Cities, Countries, Subjects, and other Circumstances relating to India."
+
+[Footnote 183: Purch. Pilgr. I. 535. Churchill's Collect. I. 617.]
+
+The _other_ edition of this journal is in the collection published by
+the Churchills, of which we quote from the third edition of 1744,
+reprinted by Lintot and Osburn, booksellers in London. Of this edition
+the editor of that collection gives the following account:--"Sir Thomas
+Roe has before appeared in print, in part at least, in the collection of
+Purchas, since translated into French, and published in the first volume
+of the collection by Thevenot. He now comes again abroad with
+considerable additions, not foisted in, but taken from his own original
+manuscript, of which it would appear that Purchas only had an imperfect
+copy. These additions, it is true, are not great in bulk, but they are
+valuable for the subject; and several matters, which in the other
+collection are brought in abruptly, are here continued in a more
+methodical manner."
+
+After an attentive comparison of these two former editions, it obviously
+appears that the edition by Purchas, in 1625, is in general more
+circumstantial and more satisfactory than that of Churchill, in 1744,
+notwithstanding its superior pretensions, as above stated. Yet, on
+several occasions, the edition in Churchill gives a more intelligible
+account of particulars, and has enabled us, on these occasions, to
+restore what Purchas, by careless abbreviation, had left an obscure and
+almost unintelligible jumble of words. The present edition, therefore,
+is formed upon a careful collation of these two former, supplying from
+each what was defective in the other. On the present occasion, the
+nautical and other observations made by Sir Thomas Roe during the voyage
+from England to Surat, are omitted, having been already inserted into
+the account of that voyage by Captain Peyton.
+
+It were much to be desired that this first account of the political
+intercourse between Britain and Hindoostan could have been given at full
+length, more especially as that extensive, rich, populous, and fertile
+country is now almost entirely reduced under the dominion of the British
+crown; and as Sir Thomas Roe, even in the garbled state in which we are
+forced to present his observations, clearly shews the inherent vices of
+the Mogul government, through which it so rapidly fell into anarchy, and
+was torn in pieces by its own cumbrous and ill-managed strength. Perhaps
+the archives of the East India Company are still able to supply this
+deficiency in the history of its original establishment; and it were
+surely worthy of the more than princely grandeur of that great
+commercial company, to patronise the publication of a collection of the
+voyages, travels, negotiations, and events which have conduced to raise
+it to a degree of splendour unexampled in the history of the world. The
+importance of this first embassy from Great Britain to the Great Mogul,
+and the vast consequences, both commercial and political, which have
+since arisen from that early intercourse, have induced us to give the
+following additional information respecting the mission of Sir Thomas
+Roe, from the Annals of the East India Company, vol. I. p. 174, _et
+sequ._, which will in some measure supply the defects in this journal,
+as published by Purchas and Churchill.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"The information which the Court [of Committees or Directors of the
+East India Company] had received, in the preceding season, [1613-14]
+induced them to apply to the king to grant his royal authority that an
+ambassador should proceed in his name to the Great Mogul. King James, in
+compliance with the wishes of the Company, on the 14th January, 1614-15,
+granted his commission to the celebrated Sir Thomas Roe, "to be
+ambassador to the Great Mogul, or king of India," the company agreeing
+to defray the expence, in consideration, that, under their exclusive
+privileges, they were to acquire such benefits as might result from this
+mission.
+
+"Sir Thomas Roe sailed from England in March 1615, on board the Lion,
+Captain Newport, and arrived at Surat, whence he proceeded to the
+Mogul's court at Agimere, which he reached in December, 1615; and on the
+10th January, 1616, was presented to the Mogul as ambassador from the
+king of England, when he delivered the king's letter and presents. Of
+these, an English coach was the chief article, and with it the Mogul was
+pleased to express his satisfaction, and to give the ambassador a
+gracious reception. From the company's agents having already been too
+profuse in their presents to the ministers and favourites, Sir Thomas
+found that the articles which he carried out as presents were not so
+highly estimated as he expected; he therefore informed the court that
+nothing less than valuable jewels would be deemed worthy of acceptance;
+and at the same time he advised that 'four or five cases of red wine'
+should be sent as presents to the king and prince, as, in his own words,
+'never were men more enamoured of that drinke as these two, and which
+they would more highly esteem than all the jewels in Chepeside.'
+
+"In describing his own situation, he stated that the natives could not
+comprehend what was meant in Europe by the rank or quality of an
+ambassador, and that in future it would be preferable to employ an agent
+only, who could bear these affronts without dishonour, which an
+ambassador, from, his rank, could not encounter. He complains also,
+that, from want of an interpreter, he had experienced much difficulty in
+explaining to the Mogul, and to his ministers, the object of his
+mission; in particular, the grievances which the English had suffered
+from the governor of Ahmedabad, because the native brokers, whom he was
+obliged to employ, were afraid to interpret literally, lest they should
+either incur the king's displeasure, or be disgraced by his ministers.
+In his application for redress from the governor of Ahmedabad, he
+discovered that this officer was supported by sultan Churrum, the
+Mogul's eldest-son,[184] and Asaph Khan, the favourite. By perseverance
+and firmness, however, the ambassador at length obtained the relief he
+solicited.
+
+[Footnote 184: Sultan Chesuro appears to have been the eldest son of
+Jehanguire, but held in confinement for having endeavoured to supplant
+his father in the succession, and Churrum seems only to have been the
+third son.--E.]
+
+"On the 24th January, 1616, Sir Thomas had a second audience of the
+Mogul, at which he complained of the injuries the English had sustained
+from the arbitrary conduct of the governor of Surat, and so effectual
+were his remonstrances, that this officer was dismissed. The ambassador
+then proposed to renew the articles of the _phirmaund_, or treaty
+between the Mogul and the English nation, and solicited to have the
+treaty ratified by the signatures[185] of the Mogul and Sultan Churrum,
+which being procured, the treaty was concluded.[186]
+
+[Footnote 185: This expression is rather ambiguous, as the ratifications
+of such papers in India were by the seals of the princes, and not what
+we understand by the term used in the text--E.]
+
+[Footnote 186: It has not been thought necessary to insert the substance
+of this treaty as contained in the Annals, as it is given in the
+Journal.--E.] "The dispatches of Sir Thomas, of this year, concluded
+with recommending to the company, as a commercial speculation, to send
+out annually a large assortment of all kinds of toys, which would find a
+ready sale at the great festival of _Noroose_, [the new year] in the
+month of March.
+
+"In 1616 we discover a jealousy in the factory at Surat, of Sir Thomas
+Roe, notwithstanding his efforts and success in obtaining phirmaunds
+from the Mogul favourable to the factories at Surat and Ahmedabad, and
+in general for the encouragement of English trade in the Mogul
+dominions; for the factors represented to the court that a merchant or
+agent would be better qualified for a commercial negociator than a
+king's ambassador; and, in support of this opinion, referred to the
+practice of the king of Spain, who on no occasion would send an
+ambassador, but always a commercial agent; and stated that Sir Thomas
+Roe, besides, considered himself to be vested with the exercise of a
+controlling power over the commercial speculations of the Surat factory,
+and held himself to be better qualified to judge of the English
+interests by combining the political relations which he wished to
+introduce between the Mogul and the king of England, than by forwarding
+any projects for trade which the factory might devise as applicable to
+the Mogul dominions.
+
+"In this year he reported that he had returned thanks to Sultan Churrum
+for the protection which he had afforded to the English in relieving
+them from the extortions of Zulfeccar Khan, the late governor of Surat,
+and had remonstrated against the partiality which had been shown to the
+Portuguese; representing to the Mogul that the king of Portugal had
+assumed the title of king of India, and that the Portuguese trade could
+never be so beneficial as that of England, as the English annually
+exported from India calicoes and indigo to the amount of 50,000 rials.
+To strengthen this remonstrance, Sir Thomas offered to pay to the sultan
+12,000 rupees yearly, on condition that the English should be exempted
+from the payment of customs at the port of Surat; and then gave it as
+his opinion, that the plan of the agency at Surat, of keeping permanent
+factories at Surat, and other parts of the Mogul dominions, ought to be
+abandoned, as it would be preferable to make the purchases of goods
+inland, by the natives, [particularly the indigo from Agra, and the
+Bengal goods] who could obtain them at reasonable rates. But if the
+court were of opinion that English factors ought to be stationed at
+Agra, he recommended sending the goods in carts rather than on camels.
+He concludes this part of his report by advising that agents should
+reside at Cambay and Baroach, because the best cloths in India could be
+procured at these towns.
+
+"Though Sir Thomas Roe appears to have procured a phirmaund through the
+means of Noor-Mahal, the favourite sultana or empress, for the general
+good treatment of the English at Surat, and had desired that an
+assortment of English goods, perfumes, &c. should be forwarded to him as
+presents to her and to her brother, Asaph Khan, he yet describes, in
+1618, the governor of Surat as reluctant to shew that favour to the
+English which the phirmaund had enjoined. It therefore became a question
+with him, as the governor of Surat would not allow the English to
+strengthen or fortify their factory for the protection of their goods
+and servants, whether it might not be expedient to remove to some other
+station, where the means of self-defence might be more practicable. At
+one time he thought of Goga, and subsequently of Scindy; but, after a
+review of the whole, decided that it would be more expedient to remain
+at Surat, though, from the character of the natives, and the instability
+of the Mogul government, all grants of privileges must be considered as
+temporary, and any agreement or capitulation which might be procured,
+ought not to be depended on as permanent. He concludes, that, though a
+general phirmaund for trade in the Mogul dominions had been obtained,
+and of course a foundation laid for the English intercourse with the
+rich provinces of Bengal, yet the attempt to enter on that trade would
+be unwise, from being in the exclusive possession of the Portuguese.
+
+"Sir Thomas Roe returned from the embassy to Surat in the spring of
+1618-19, when it appears that the opposition in opinion between him and
+the factors at that place had subsided, as the efforts of both were
+united to establish a distinct system for the trade of the English at
+Surat. It has been already stated that Sir Thomas Roe had procured a
+phirmaund to the English from the Mogul, for the establishment of a
+general trade in his extensive dominions, but that the relaxed situation
+of the government, which always, under the administration of the Moguls,
+preceded an expected succession to the throne, had rendered the governor
+of Surat, at this juncture, less obsequious to the orders of his
+sovereign than the absolute nature of the constitution would otherwise
+have prescribed. Under these circumstances, and to improve upon the
+general treaty already mentioned, Sir Thomas Roe made proposals to
+Sultan Churrum to enter into an alliance for resisting the pretensions
+of the Portuguese. After long discussions with that prince, this treaty
+was concluded, and the following are its leading articles.
+
+"That the governor of Surat should lend ships to the English, to be
+employed in the defence of that port. The English, however, to be only
+allowed to land ten armed men at one time; but the resident merchants to
+be allowed to wear arms. That the English should be allowed to build a
+house in the city, but distant from the castle.[187] That the governor
+of Surat should receive the ambassador and his suite with marks of
+honour. That the English should enjoy the free exercise of their
+religion, and be governed by their own laws. That in any dispute between
+the English and the natives; reference was to be made to the governor
+and his officers, who should decide speedily and justly; but disputes
+among themselves were to be decided by their own factory. That liberty
+of trade was to be allowed the English, in its fullest extent, on
+payment of the usual duties on landing the goods, from which pearls,
+jewels, &c. were to be exempted. That freedom of speech was to be
+allowed to the English linguists and brokers, in all matters regarding
+the trade of their employers. And, lastly, That all presents intended
+for the court were to be opened and examined at the customhouse of
+Surat, and then sealed and given back to the English, and to pass
+duty-free; but, in case these presents were not made, then these
+articles were to become liable to pay duty.
+
+[Footnote 187: Though not so expressed in the Annals, this appears to
+have been a _fortified_ house; as, on an occasion, when Surat was taken
+and plundered by an armed force belonging to Sevagee, the first
+sovereign of the Mahrattas, the English were able to defend their
+factory from injury.--E.]
+
+"During his residence in India, Sir Thomas Roe had likewise used his
+best endeavours to promote the trade of the English with the ports of
+Persia, in which considerable opposition was experienced from the
+Portuguese, who tried every expedient to engross the Persian trade to
+themselves, and to exclude the English from any participation. In this
+opposition Sir Robert Shirley had been implicated, who had gone to
+Europe in 1615, on a mission from the king of Persia, to form a contract
+with the king of Spain, then sovereign of Portugal, not only to sell to
+his subjects the whole of the Persian silk, but to grant them licence to
+fortify the sea-ports of Persia for the protection of their shipping and
+factories. Mr Connock, the English agent in Persia, under these
+circumstances, recommended the necessity of applying to king James, and
+submitting to his consideration the danger of allowing the Portuguese to
+enjoy the exclusive possession of that trade, which would render them
+the most powerful European nation in the East Indies. In the mean time,
+he represented to the king of Persia the necessity of seizing the island
+of Ormus from the Portuguese, under the protection of which the Persian
+dominions could be supplied by the English with all kinds of Indian
+commodities.
+
+"In this critical situation of the company's agents at Ispahan, an
+ambassador arrived from the king of Spain, in June 1617, authorised to
+adjust and settle the contract which Sir Robert Shirley had projected.
+The English agent, in consequence, urged the factory at Surat to
+dispatch the whole of the company's ships to Jasques for the defence of
+that port, as the Portuguese fleet had rendezvoused at Muscat, and had
+determined to blockade the passage into the Persian gulf against the
+English trade. These events induced Sir Thomas Roe to grant a
+commission, and to give instructions to the company's agent at Ispahan,
+authorising him to treat with the king of Persia, in the name of the
+king of England.
+
+"In 1618, Captain Shillings, of the company's ship Ann, went to Mokha,
+and obtained a phirmaund from the governor, by which the English were
+allowed free trade, and protection to their persons and property, on
+condition of paying three per cent. on merchandize, and three per cent.
+on the prices of all goods exported by them from Mokha. On receiving
+information of this event, Sir Thomas Roe addressed a letter to the
+governor of Mokha, requesting that these privileges might be confirmed
+by the Grand Signior, and promising, on the part of the English, that
+all kinds of European goods should be regularly brought to Mokha, and
+that the English should defend that port against all enemies, and
+particularly against the Portuguese.
+
+"This appears to have been the last transaction of Sir Thomas Roe in the
+East Indies. In his voyage home he touched at Saldanha bay [Table bay]
+in May, 1619, where he met, and held a conference with the Dutch admiral
+Hoffman, who commanded the outward-bound fleet from Holland of that
+season. From this officer he learned that the respective governments in
+Europe, alarmed at the commercial jealousies and animosities between
+their subjects in the East Indies, had appointed commissioners to take
+that subject into consideration. It was therefore, with a becoming sense
+of duty, agreed between them that each should address a letter to the
+chiefs of their respective factories in India, recommending to them to
+abstain from any opposition or violence against each other, till each
+had received specific instructions from their superiors, or should be
+informed of the result of the conferences between the commissioners of
+the two nations in Europe."
+
+Sec.1. _Journey from Surat to the Court of the Mogul, and Entertainment
+there, with some Account of the Customs of the Country_.
+
+I landed at Surat on the 26th September, 1615, and was received in an
+open tent by the chief officers of the town, well attended. On this
+occasion I was accompanied by the general, and principal merchants,
+Captain Harris being sent to make me a court of guard with an hundred
+shot, and the ships, all dressed out to the best advantage, saluted me
+with their ordnance as I passed. There was much controversy about
+searching my servants, but at length they passed free to the city, where
+we had a house provided for us. We continued there to the 30th October,
+suffering much vexation from the governor, who forcibly caused search
+many of our chests and trunks, taking away what he thought fit.
+
+The 30th October I departed from Surat, and that day travelled only four
+coss to _Sumaria_.[188] The 1st November I went eleven miles to a
+village. The 2d, to _Biarat_, twenty-one miles, where there is a castle,
+this town being on the borders of the kingdom of Guzerat, subject to the
+Mogul, and belonging to _Abraham Khan_. The 3d I entered the kingdom of
+_Pardaff shah_,[189] a pagan lord of the hills, who is subject to
+nobody; and at the end of fifteen miles we lodged in the fields, beside
+a city of note, called _Mugher_. The 4th we travelled nine miles by a
+rocky way, and lay in the fields, beside a village called Narampore. The
+5th, fifteen miles, and lay in the fields. The 6th, twenty miles, to a
+city called _Nundabar_, in the kingdom of _Brampore_, [Burhanpoor] which
+is subject to the Mogul. At this place we first procured bread, after
+leaving Surat, as the Banians, who inhabit all the country through which
+we had travelled, make only cakes instead of bread. The country
+peculiarly abounds in cattle, as the Banians never kill any, neither do
+they sell any for being slaughtered. One day I met at least 10,000
+bullocks loaded with grain, in one drove, and most other days I saw
+smaller parcels.
+
+[Footnote 188: In this journal the names of places are exceedingly
+corrupted, and often unintelligible. Such as admitted of being
+corrected, from the excellent map of Hindoostan, by Arrowsmith, have
+their proper names placed within brackets.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 189: In the miserable map of Hindoostan, accompanying this
+journal in the Pilgrims, this prince is called Partap-sha.--E.]
+
+The 7th we went eighteen miles to _Ningull_. The 8th, fifteen to
+_Sinchelly_, [Sindkera.] The 9th, other fifteen to _Tolmere_, [Talnere.]
+And the 10th, eighteen to _Chapre_, [Choprah] where we pitched our tents
+without the town, and the king's officers guarded us all night with
+thirty horse and twenty shot, for fear of out being attacked by robbers
+from the mountains, as I refused to remove into the town. The 11th we
+travelled eighteen miles, eighteen on the 12th, and fifteen on the 13th,
+which brought us to _Brampore_, [Burhanpoor] which I guessed to be 223
+miles east from Surat.[190] The country is miserable and barren, the
+towns and villages only built of mud. At _Bartharpore_,[191] a village
+two miles short of Burhanpoor, I saw some of the Mogul ordnance, most of
+which is too short, and too open in the bore. On coming to Burhanpoor,
+the _cutwall_ met me, well attended, having sixteen stand of colours
+carried before him, and conducted me to a _serai_ appointed for my
+lodging. He took leave of me at the gate, which had a handsome stone
+front; but, when in, I had four chambers allotted for me, no bigger than
+ovens, with vaulted roofs and bare brick walls, so that I chose to lodge
+in my tent. I sent word to the cutwall, threatening to leave the town,
+as I scorned such mean usage, but he desired me to be content till
+morning, as this was the best lodging in the city, which I afterwards
+found to be the case, as it consists entirely of mud cottages, excepting
+the houses inhabited by _Sultan Parvis_, the Mogul's second son, that of
+_Khan Khanan_, and a few others. Sultan Parvis here represents the king
+his father, living in great state and magnificence, but Khan Khanan, who
+is the greatest subject of the empire, is at the head of a large army,
+in which are 40,000 horse, and governs every thing, the prince only
+having the name and pomp allowed him.
+
+[Footnote 190: The particulars of the journey in the text amount to 214
+miles.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 191: Perhaps Babaderpore, but it is twelve or fifteen miles
+short of Burhanpoor.--E.]
+
+On the 18th, both to satisfy the prince who desired it, and whom I was
+not willing to displease, and to see the fashions of the court, and
+because it was proposed to establish a factory here, where sword-blades
+were in great request for the army, and sold well, I went to visit the
+prince, to whom, I carried a present. I was conducted by the cutwall,
+and in the outer court of the palace I found about an hundred horsemen
+under arms, who formed a line on each side, being all gentlemen waiting
+to salute the prince on his coming forth. In the inner court the prince
+sat in a high gallery encircling the court, having a canopy over head,
+and a carpet spread before him, appearing in much, yet barbarous state.
+Going towards him through a lane of people, an officer came and told me
+that I must touch the ground with my head, and with my hat off. I
+answered, that I came to do the prince honour by visiting him, and was
+not to be subjected to the custom of slaves. So I walked on till I came
+to a place railed in, just under where he sat, where there was an ascent
+of three steps; and having there made him a reverence, to which he
+answered by bending his body, I went within the rails, where stood all
+the great men then in the town, holding their hands before them like
+slaves. This place, as mentioned before, was covered over head by a rich
+canopy, and all the floor was spread with carpets. It resembled a large
+stage, and the prince sat on high, like a mock king in a theatre.
+
+On entering, as I had no place assigned me, I went right forwards, and
+stood before him at the bottom of the three steps, on which stood his
+secretary, readily to convey to him any thing that is said or given. I
+told him that I was ambassador from the king of England to his father;
+and, while passing his residence, I could not but in honour visit his
+highness. He answered that I was welcome, and asked me many questions
+about the king my master, to which I gave fit answers. While standing in
+that manner at the foot of the steps, I asked leave to come up and stand
+beside him; but he said, even if the king of Persia, or Grand Turk, were
+there, such a thing could not be allowed. To this I replied, that I must
+be excused for believing he would, in such a case, come down and meet
+them at his gate; and that I required no higher privilege than was
+allowed to the ambassadors of these sovereigns, with whom I considered
+myself entirely equal. He declared I should have that privilege in all
+things. I then demanded to have a chair, to which it was answered, that
+no person was ever allowed to sit in that place, but I was desired to
+lean against a pillar covered over with silver, which supported the
+canopy. I then requested his favour for an English factory to be
+established at Burhanpoor, which readily granted, and gave immediate
+orders to the _Buksh_ to draw up a _firmaun_, license, for their coming
+and residence. I also requested an order for carriages for conveying the
+presents for the king his father, which he gave in charge to the cutwall
+to see provided. I then made him a present, which he took in good part.
+After some other conference, he said, though I might not come up to
+where he then sat, he would go to another place, where I might come to
+him with less ceremony. But one part of the present I made him happened
+to be a case of cordials, of which he tasted so freely by the way, that,
+after waiting some time, I heard he had made himself drunk, and one of
+his officers came to me with an excuse, desiring me to go home then, and
+come some other time to see him. But that very night I was taken ill of
+a fever.
+
+The 27th of November, though, still sick, I was carried, from Burhanpoor
+three coss to _Raypora_; the 28th, fifteen c. to _Burgome_, [Burgaw];
+the 30th, seven c. December the 1st, ten c. to _Bicangome_; the 2d,
+seven c. the 3d, five c. the 4th, eleven c. to _Ekbarpoor_, which stands
+on a good river, [the Nerbudda] which runs into the sea near _Buroach_.
+The 5th, I passed the river _Nerbuddah_. The 6th, I travelled eight c.
+and lay in a wood, not far from the king's famous castle of _Mandoa_,
+[Mundu] which stands on a steep hill, of great extent, the walls being
+fourteen c. in circuit, this castle being of wonderous extent and great
+beauty. The 7th, I proceeded ten c. the 8th, eight c. the 9th, ten c.
+the 10th, twelve c. the 11th, sixteen c. the 12th, fourteen c. the 13th,
+six c. the 14th we halted to take rest. The 15th, six c. the 16th, six
+c. the 17th, twelve c. the 18th, five c. when we arrived at _Cytor_,
+where I was met by Mr Edwards accompanied by Thomas Coryat, who had
+travelled to India on foot.
+
+_Cytor_, [Chitore] is an ancient town in ruins, situated on a hill, but
+shews the remains of wonderful magnificence. There are still standing
+above an hundred temples, all of carved stone, with many fair towers and
+domes, supported by many enriched pillars, and innumerable houses, but
+not a single inhabitant. The hill, or rock rather, is precipitous on all
+sides, having but one ascent cut out of the rock in a regular slope; in
+which ascent there are four several gates before reaching the gate of
+the city, which last is extremely magnificent. The top of the hill,
+about eight coss in circuit, is inclosed all round with walls, and at
+the S.W. end, is a goodly old castle. I lodged close by a poor village
+at the foot of the hill.
+
+This city stands in the country of the _Rama_,[192] a prince newly
+subdued by the Mogul, or rather brought to submit to pay tribute and
+acknowledge subjection; and _Cytor_ was reduced by _Akbar Shah_, the
+father of _Shah Jehan-Guire_, the present king of the Moguls. This
+Hindoo raja is lineally descended from _Porus_, the valiant Indian
+sovereign who was conquered by Alexander the Great; so that I suppose
+this city to have been one of the ancient seats of Porus, though Delly,
+much farther north, is reported to have been the chiefest, a famous
+place, though now only in ruins. Near that stands a pillar erected by
+Alexander the Conqueror, with a Greek inscription. The present Mogul and
+his ancestors, descendants of Tamerlane, have reduced all the ancient
+cities to ruin, dispeopling them and forbidding their restoration; I
+know not wherefore, unless that they would have no monuments of
+greatness remain, beyond their own commencement, as if they and the
+world were co-equals in antiquity.
+
+[Footnote 192: This is probably an error of the press in the Pilgrims
+for the _Ranna_.--E.]
+
+The 19th I proceeded twelve c. on my journey; the 20th ten c. the 21st
+ten c. the 22d nine c. the 23d ten c. and arrived at _Ajimere_. The
+first six days journeys from Burhanpoor towards Ajimere were west, or
+northwest, to get round the hills; but after that northwards, so that
+these two places bear nearly N. by W. and S. by E. from each other: the
+whole distance being 209 cosses,[193] which I judge to be 418 English
+miles; the cosses here being longer than near the sea.[194] On my
+arrival at Ajimere I was so ill as to keep my bed; but on the 10th
+January, 1616, at four in the afternoon, I went to the _Durbar_, which
+is the place where the Mogul sits in public daily to entertain
+strangers, to receive petitions and presents, to issue commands, and to
+see and be seen. Before proceeding to give an account of my reception,
+it may be proper to digress a little, that I may give some account of
+the customs of the court.
+
+[Footnote 193: The particulars in the text only amount to 200 cosses;
+but the extent of one day's journey is omitted, which may explain the
+difference.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 194: The coss at Surat is repeatedly explained, in Purchas and
+Churchill, to be 1-1/2 English mile, while that of Hindoostan Proper is
+rated at two miles.--E.]
+
+No men, except eunuchs, are permitted to come within the private
+lodgings or retiring rooms of the royal palace, within which his women
+keep guard with warlike weapons, and there likewise they execute justice
+upon each other for offences. Every morning, the Mogul comes to a
+window, called the _jarneo_,[195] which looks into the plain or open
+space before the palace-gate, where he shews himself to the common
+people. At noon he returns to the same place, where he sits some hours,
+amusing himself with seeing fights of elephants and other wild beasts,
+the men of rank then at court attending below within a railed space. He
+then retires to sleep within the female apartments. In the afternoon he
+comes to the before-mentioned Durbar. At eight in the evening, after
+supper, he comes down to a fair court, called the _guzalcan_, in the
+midst of which is a throne of freestone, on which he sits, yet
+sometimes below in a chair of state, at which time only men of high
+quality are admitted into the presence, and even of these only a few
+have that privilege, unless by special leave. He here discourses very
+affably on all subjects with those around him. No business is transacted
+with him, concerning affairs of state and government, or respecting war
+and peace, but at one or other of these two last-mentioned places,
+where, after being publicly propounded and resolved upon, it is
+registered by attendant secretaries, and any one, who has the curiosity,
+may see the register for two shillings; insomuch that the common people
+know as much of the affairs of state as the ministers and counsellors of
+the king, and every day the king's acts and resolutions are circulated
+as news, and are freely canvassed and censured by every rascal. This
+course of proceeding is unchangeable, except when prevented by the
+sickness of the king, or in consequence of his getting drunk, which must
+always be known. Thus, though all his subjects are slaves, he lives in a
+state of reciprocal bondage, being so tied to the observance of these
+hours and customs, that if he were unseen one day, and no sufficient
+excuse given, the people would mutiny; and no excuse will sanction his
+absence for two days, unless the gates are opened, and he be seen by
+some for the satisfaction of the rest. Every Tuesday, he sits in
+judgement at the _jarneo_,[196] where he attends to the complaints of
+his meanest subjects, listening patiently to both parties; and where
+likewise he sometimes sees, with too much delight in blood, execution
+performed on offenders by his elephants. _Illi meruere, sed quid tu ut
+adesses_?
+
+[Footnote 195: in subsequent passages, this is called the Jarruco.--E.]
+
+Before going to the durbar, I had required to be allowed the customs of
+my own country, which were freely granted. At the durbar, I was led
+directly before the king, at the entrance of an outer rail, where two
+noble slaves came to conduct me nearer. On entering the outer rail, I
+made a profound reverence, at my entry within an interior rail I made a
+second reverence, and a third when I came directly under where the king
+sat. The place in which the durbar is held is a great court, to which
+all sorts of people resort. The king sits in a small raised gallery;
+ambassadors, great men belonging to the court, and strangers of quality,
+are within the innermost rail directly under him, that space being
+raised from the ground, covered overhead with canopies of silk and
+velvet, and laid underfoot with good carpets. The meaner men,
+representing what we would call gentry, are within the outer rail; the
+common people being on the outside of all, in a base court, so that all
+may see the king. The whole of this disposition hath much resemblance to
+theatrical representation. The king sitting as in a gallery, the great
+men raised as actors on a stage, and the vulgar below in a pit gazing at
+the show. The king, on my presentation, interrupted the dull formality
+of my interpreter, bidding me welcome to the brother of the king my
+master. I then delivered a translation of the king's letter, and then my
+commission, on both of which he looked curiously; and afterwards on my
+presents, which were well received. He asked some questions; and, with a
+seeming regard for my health, offered to send me his own physicians,
+advising me to keep the house till I recovered strength, and that I
+should freely send to him in the meantime for any thing I needed, with
+assurance that I should have whatever I desired. He dismissed me with
+more signs of grace and favour, if I were not flattered by the
+Christians, than ever were shewn to any ambassador from the Turks or
+Persians or any other nation.
+
+[Footnote 196: This place, formerly described as a window looking to the
+esplanade in front of the palace, called _jarneo_ in Purchas, is called
+_jarruco_ in Churchill.--E.]
+
+On the 14th I sent to offer a visit to Sultan _Churrum_,[197] the third
+son of the Great Mogul, but first in favour. Hearing that he was an
+enemy to all Christians, I therefore feared some affront; yet he sent me
+word that I should be received with all due respect, and should have as
+much content as I had already from his father. This prince is lord of
+Surat, our chief residence in the empire, and his favour, therefore, was
+important for our affairs. I went accordingly to visit him on the 22d at
+nine in the morning, at which time he sits in public, in the same manner
+as his father, to dispatch his business, and to be seen of his
+followers. His character was represented to me as naturally proud, so
+that I was in some fear for my reception; but, on hearing of my arrival,
+instead of coming out to his public durbar, he sent one of his principal
+officers to conduct me into a good inner room, never before done to any
+one. The officer here entertained me with discourse concerning my
+mission for half an hour, till the prince was ready; who now came forth
+and used me better than his promise. I delivered him a present, but not
+in the name of his majesty, as it was too mean for that purpose; but
+excused the omission, by saying, That my sovereign could not know of his
+being lord of Surat, which had been so lately conferred upon him; but I
+had no doubt the king of England would afterwards send him one more
+suited to his high rank, the one now presented being only sent by the
+English merchants, who humbly commended themselves to his favour and
+protection. He received all in very good part. After stating some
+grievances and injuries suffered by the English at Surat, from his
+governors, and of which I had forborne to complain to the king from
+respect to him, he promised me speedy and effectual justice, and to
+confirm our security in any way I might propose. He professed to be
+entirely ignorant of any past transactions there, as stated by me,
+except as informed by Asaph Khan; and especially denied having given any
+order for our dismissal, which the governor had falsely alleged, and for
+which he should dearly pay. He then dismissed me, full of hopes to have
+our decayed state and reputation rectified, making me a promise of an
+effectual firmaun for our trade and secure residence at Surat.
+
+[Footnote 197: In the Pilgrims, this prince is uniformly named Corone;
+but the name in the text has been adopted from the authority of Dow's
+History of Hindoostan. He succeeded to his father in 1627, when he
+assumed the name of Shah Jehan; and was, in 1659, dethroned and
+imprisoned, by his third son, the celebrated Aurungzebe, who assumed the
+name of Alumguire.--E.]
+
+The 24th, I went again to the royal durbar to visit the king; who, on
+seeing me far off, beckoned with his hand, that I should not wait the
+ceremony of asking leave, but come up to him directly, and assigned me a
+place near himself, above all other men, which I afterwards thought fit
+to maintain. On this occasion I gave a small present; as it is the
+custom for all who have any business to give something, and those who
+cannot get near enough to speak, send in or hold up their gift, which he
+always accepts, be it only a rupee, and demands to know their business.
+He held the same course with me; for having looked curiously at my
+present, and asked many questions respecting it, he demanded to know
+what I wanted of him. I answered that I wanted justice. For, on the
+assurance of his firmaun, which had been sent to England, the king my
+master had not only given leave to his subjects to make a long and
+dangerous voyage to his dominions with their goods, but had deputed me,
+as his ambassador and representative, to congratulate and compliment his
+majesty on the amity so happily commenced between two so mighty nations,
+and to confirm the same. Yet I found that the English, who were settled
+at Ahmedabad, were injured and oppressed by the governor in their
+persons and goods, being fined, subjected to arbitrary exactions, and
+kept as prisoners; while at every town new customs were demanded for
+their goods on their passage to the port, contrary to all justice, and
+in direct contravention of the formerly conceded articles of trade, as
+contained in his majesty's firmaun. To this he answered, that he was
+sorry to hear of such things, which should be immediately rectified; and
+he gave orders for two firmauns to be immediately extended according to
+my desire. By one of these, the governor of Ahmedabad was commanded to
+restore the money he had exacted from Mr Kerridge, and to use the
+English in future with all favour. By the other, all customs required on
+any pretence by the way were abolished, and all such as had been taken
+was ordered to be restored. Finally, he desired me, if these gave not
+speedy and effectual remedy, that I should renew my complaint against
+the disobeyer, who should be sent for to answer for his conduct; and so
+dismissed me.
+
+The 1st of March, I rode out to see a pleasure-house belonging to the
+king, two miles from Agimere, which had been given him by Asaph Khan. It
+was situated between two vast rocks, by which it was so sheltered that
+scarcely could the sun be any where seen. The foundations and some rooms
+were hewn out of the solid rock, the rest being built of freestone.
+Close adjoining was a handsome small garden, with fine fountains, with
+two great _tanks_ or ponds of water, one being thirty steps higher than
+the other. The way to this retreat is so narrow that only two persons
+could go abreast, and is almost inaccessible, being very steep and
+stony. It is a place of much melancholy, yet of great security and
+delight, abounding in peacocks, turtle-doves, wild fowl, and monkies,
+which inhabit the rocks impending on every side around.
+
+The 2d of March began the feast of _Norsose_ in the evening. This is the
+festival of the new year, the ceremonies of which begin on the first new
+moon after, which this year fell together. It is kept in imitation of
+the Persian feast of that cause, signifying in that language _nine
+days_, as anciently it continued only for that number; but these are now
+doubled. On this occasion, a throne is erected about four feet high in
+the _durbar court_; from the back of which, to the place where the king
+comes out from the inner apartments, a space of fifty-six paces long by
+forty-three broad is railed in, and covered over by _semianes_, or
+canopies, of cloth of gold, velvet, and rich silk, all joined over
+head, and held up by canes covered with similar stuffs. At the upper or
+west end, were set out the pictures of the king of England, the queen,
+the Princess Elizabeth, the Countesses of Somerset and Salisbury, and of
+a citizen's wife of London. Below, there was a picture of Sir Thomas
+Smith, governor of the East India Company. The whole floor was laid with
+rich Persian carpets of large size, and into this place come all the
+great men to wait upon the king, except a few, who were within a smaller
+railed space, right before the throne, appointed to receive his
+commands. Within this square there were set out many small houses, one
+of which was of silver, and other curiosities of value. On the left
+side, Sultan Churrum had a pavilion, the supporters of which were
+covered with silver, as were also some others of those near the king's
+throne. This was of wood and of a square form, inlaid with mother of
+pearl, resting on four pillars covered with cloth of gold; and overhead
+was a fringed drapery like a vallence of network, all of real pearls,
+whence hung down pomegranates, apples, and pears, and other fruits, all
+of gold, but hollow. Within that pavilion, the king sat on cushions,
+very rich in pearls and other jewels. All round the court before the
+throne, the principal men had tents or pavilions, mostly lined with
+velvet, damask, and taffety, and some few with cloth of gold, in which
+they were stationed, making shew of their wealth. Anciently, the kings
+used to go to every tent, taking away whatever pleased him best: But now
+the custom is changed, as the king remains on his throne, and receives
+there such new-year's-gifts as are brought to him. He makes his
+appearance every day, and retires at the usual hours of the durbar; and
+in the interval all sorts of great gifts are made to him, which are very
+great and almost incredible, though not equal to report. At the close of
+this feast, in recompence for these gifts, the king advances some of his
+courtiers, making additions to their charges of horse, according to his
+pleasure.
+
+On the 12th[198] I went to visit the king, and was brought immediately
+before him to deliver my present, which gave him much satisfaction. He
+then appointed me to come within the rail, that I might stand beside
+him; but not being allowed to step up on the raised platform on which
+the throne was placed, I could see little, as the railing was high, and
+covered with carpets. But I had permission to view the inner room at
+leisure, which, I must confess, was very rich; but consisted of so many
+articles, all unsuitable to each other, that it seemed patched work,
+rather than magnificent, as if it aimed to shew all; as if a lady, among
+her plate on a magnificent cupboard, should exhibit her embroidered
+slippers. This evening, the son of the Raima, the new tributary formerly
+mentioned, was brought before the king, with much ceremony, being sent
+by his father with a present. After kneeling three times, and knocking
+his forehead on the ground, he was brought within the inner rail, when
+the king embraced his head. His gift was an Indian tray or voider full
+of silver, upon which was a carved silver dish full of gold. He was then
+conducted to pay his respects to the prince. This evening, some
+elephants were shewn, and some music girls sang and danced.--_Sic
+transit gloria mundi_.
+
+[Footnote 198: It may be proper to observe, that Churchill's edition
+gives the commencement of this festival on the 11th, and says Sir Thomas
+went to the durbar next day.--E.]
+
+The 13th at night, I went again to wait upon the king at the _Guzalcan_,
+at which is the best opportunity for transacting business, and took with
+me my Italian interpreter, determined to walk no longer in darkness, but
+to prove the king, as I had hitherto been delayed and refused on all
+hands. I was sent for in, along with my old broker, but my Italian was
+kept out, because Asaph Khan mistrusted I might say more than he was
+willing should come to the king's ears. On coming to the king, he
+appointed me a place to stand just before him, and sent to ask me many
+questions respecting the king of England, and about the present I had
+made him the day before. To some of these I made answers; but I at
+length said, that my interpreter was kept out, and as I could not speak
+Portuguese, I wanted the means of satisfying his majesty. On this,
+though much against the wish or Asaph Khan, my Italian interpreter was
+called in. I then made him tell the king that I requested leave to speak
+to him, to which he answered, willingly. On this, the son-in-law of
+Asaph Khan pulled away my interpreter by force, and that faction so
+hemmed in the king, by gathering round him, that I could scarcely see
+his majesty, nor could my Italian approach. Upon this, I ordered the
+Italian to speak aloud, that I craved audience of the king; who
+immediately called me before him, and the others made way. Asaph Khan
+stood on one side of my interpreter, and I on the other: I to inform him
+what to say, and the other to awe him by winks and signs.
+
+I desired him to say, that I had now been two months at court, one of
+which I had spent in sickness and the other in compliments, and had
+effected nothing of all on which I had been sent by the king my master;
+which was to conclude a firm and lasting treaty of peace and amity
+between the two sovereigns, and to establish a fair and secure trade and
+residence for my countrymen in his majesty's dominions. He answered that
+this was already granted. I replied, it was so; but that it still
+depended upon so slender a thread, and such weak conditions, as to be
+very uncertain in its continuance. That an affair of so high importance
+required an agreement dear and explicit in all points, and a more formal
+and authentic confirmation than it now had, by ordinary firmauns, which
+were merely temporary commands, and respected accordingly. He asked me
+what presents we would bring him? To which I answered, the league was
+yet new and weak; that many curiosities were to be found in our country,
+of rare value, which the king of England would send; and that our
+merchants would search for such things in all parts of the world, if
+they were made sure of a quiet trade and secure protection on honourable
+conditions, having been hitherto subjected to manifold wrongs. He asked
+me what kind of curiosities I meant, and whether these were jewels or
+precious stones? To this I answered, that we did not deem such things
+fit to be sent back from Europe to India, of which he was the principal
+sovereign, as they were common here in India, and of much higher price
+with us in Europe: But that we would endeavour to find such things for
+his majesty as were rare and uncommon in his dominions; such as
+excellent specimens of painting, carving, enamelling, figures in brass,
+copper, and stone, rich embroideries, stuffs of gold and silver, and the
+like.
+
+The king said that these things were all very well, but that he wished
+to have an English horse. I answered, that this was utterly impossible
+by sea, and that the Turks would not allow of any being sent by land. In
+reply, he said he thought it not impossible by sea; and, when I
+represented the dangers from storms, he said if six were sent in one
+ship, one of them surely might live, and though it came lean, it might
+be here made fat. I then told him, I feared it could not be done by so
+long a voyage; yet, for his majesty's satisfaction, I should give due
+notice of his desire.
+
+He then asked to know what were my demands? I answered, That his majesty
+would be pleased to sanction by his royal signature, certain reasonable
+conditions which I should propound, in confirmation of a league of
+peace and amity, and for the security of our nation in their residence
+and trade in his dominions; as they had hitherto been often wronged, and
+could not continue on their present terms, of which I forbore to make
+any specific complaint, because I hoped to procure amendment from his
+majesty. At these words, Asaph Khan offered to pull away my interpreter,
+but I held him fast, while Asaph Khan continued to make signs to him not
+to interpret my words. On this the king became suddenly very angry,
+pressing to know who had wronged us, and seemed in such fury, that I was
+unwilling to follow it out, and spoke in broken Spanish to my
+interpreter, desiring him to say, That I would not trouble his majesty
+with what was past, but would seek justice of the prince his son, whose
+favour I doubted not to obtain. Not attending to what my interpreter
+said, but hearing the name of his son, the king mistakingly conceived I
+accused him; and hastily saying _mio filio! mio filio_! he called for
+the prince, who came in great fear, humbling himself. Asaph Khan
+trembled, and all those present were amazed.
+
+He chid the prince roundly, and he excused himself. But as I perceived
+the king's error, I made both the king and prince understand the
+mistake, by means of a Persian prince who offered himself as
+interpreter, as my Italian understood Turkish better than Persian. By
+this means I appeased the king, saying that I in no respect accused the
+prince, but wished to inform his majesty that I should appeal to the
+prince's justice, in regard to the past wrongs our nation had suffered
+in those places which were under his government. The king then commanded
+the prince, that he should give as effective justice. In his
+justification, the prince said that he had already offered me a firmaun,
+which I had refused. The king asked me the reason of this. To which I
+answered, that I humbly thanked the prince, but he knew that it
+contained a condition I could not accept; and besides, that I wished to
+propound our own demands, in which I would insert all the desires of the
+king my master at once, that I might not daily trouble his majesty and
+the prince with complaints. And, when the conditions on both sides were
+mutually agreed upon, I would reciprocally bind my sovereign, to mutual
+offices of friendship, and to such reasonable conditions for the benefit
+of his majesty's subjects as he might propose: All of which being drawn
+up in tripartite, I hoped his majesty would graciously sign one, his son
+the prince another, and I would confirm the third in the name of my
+sovereign, in virtue of my commission.
+
+The king pressed to know what was the condition in the prince's firmaun
+which I had refused, which I stated. So we fell into earnest dispute
+before the king, with some heat. Mukrob Khan interposed, saying he was
+advocate for the Portuguese, and spoke slightingly of us, alleging that
+the king ought to grant no articles to us that were unfavourable for
+them. I answered, that I did not propose any against them, but only in
+our own just defence, and that I had not conceived he was so great a
+friend to the Portuguese. On this the jesuit and all the Portuguese
+faction struck in, so that I explained myself fully concerning them; and
+as I offered a conditional peace, so I valued the friendship of the
+Portuguese at a very low rate, and their enmity at a still lower. After
+some time, having explained my demands, the king said my proposals were
+just and my resolution noble, and bade me clearly propound the
+conditions I desired. Asaph Khan, who had stood silent during all this
+debate, and who now wished to end it, as we were warm, now interposed,
+saying, If we talked all night, it could only come to this at last, that
+I should draw my demands in writing and present them; which, if found
+reasonable, would be granted by the king. The king said he certainly
+would do so; and at my request the prince engaged to do so likewise. The
+king then rose to go away, but on my request he turned round, and I
+desired my interpreter to say, That I came the day before to see his
+majesty and his greatness, and the ceremonies of the feast, on which
+occasion I was placed behind him, in an honourable place certainly, but
+where I could not see around; and therefore humbly requested his majesty
+would be pleased to let me stand on the platform beside his throne. In
+answer to this, he commanded Asaph Khan to let me choose my own place in
+future.
+
+In the morning of the 14th, I sent a messenger to Asaph Khan, lest he or
+the prince might have misunderstood me, by reason of the king's mistake,
+and had supposed I had complained against either of them, which I did
+not, neither did I so intend; yet I was willing to let them see that I
+did not entirely depend upon Asaph Khan, by whom I had hitherto done my
+business with the king; but, if he should continue his manner of only
+delivering to the king what he himself pleased, and not what I said, I
+would find another way. My message was intended to clear up any such
+doubts, if they remained, and to entreat he would move the prince to
+favour my demands respecting our residence and trade at Surat. His
+answer was, that neither the prince nor he had any reason to suspect I
+intended to complain against them, the error being sufficiently obvious;
+and that, for his part, he had ever been disposed to favour the English,
+and would so continue.
+
+The 15th I went again in the evening to see the ceremonies of the
+_Norose_; and according to the Mogul's order, I chose my place of
+standing on his right hand, and on the raised platform, the prince and
+the son of the Ranna standing on the other side. I here had a full view
+of every thing that was to be seen; viz. the presents, and the
+exhibition of the elephants, horses, and dancing girls.
+
+The 23d, the Mogul condemned one of his own nation on suspicion of
+felony; but as he was one of the handsomest men in India, and the proof
+was not very clear against him, instead of condemning him to death, he
+sent him in irons to me as a slave, to be disposed of as I pleased. This
+was looked upon as a great favour, and I accordingly returned thanks;
+yet added, that we had no slaves in England, not thinking it lawful to
+make the image of God like unto a beast, but that I should employ him as
+a servant, and should restore him to liberty if he behaved well. The
+king was well pleased with this message.
+
+I went to the _Guzalcan_ on the 26th, and it delivered in the articles
+which I had drawn up, which were referred to Asaph Khan for his
+consideration and report. Some time after, Asaph Khan sent a message,
+desiring me to remove from the place I occupied near the king, because I
+stood alone, which was not the custom. I refused at the first; but, as
+he still insisted I should rank myself among the nobles, I removed to
+the other side, where the prince and young Ranna were. This still more
+displeased Asaph Khan, who persuaded the prince to complain of me to the
+king, which he did. On hearing their complaint and my answer, that I had
+changed my place by order of Asaph Khan, the Mogul said I had done well,
+and they were wrong to pretend to displace me. So I kept my place in
+quiet. The following is the substance of the articles delivered to the
+Great Mogul, which were delayed and opposed: But the conclusion
+respecting them will be seen hereafter.
+
+_Proposed Articles of Treaty, between the Great Mogul and the King of
+Great Britain_.
+
+1. There shall be perpetual peace and amity between the king of Great
+Britain and his majesty the emperor of India.--2. The subjects of
+England shall have free trade in all the ports of India.--3. The
+governors of all sea ports shall make public proclamation of this
+agreement three several times, upon the arrival of any English
+ships.--4. The English merchants and their servants, shall not be liable
+to search, or to any ill usage.--5. No presents sent to the Mogul shall
+be opened.--6. The goods belonging to the English shall not be stopped
+more than twenty-four-hours at the custom-houses; where they shall only
+be sealed, and sent to the house or factory of the merchants, to be
+there opened and rated within six days afterwards.--7. No governor shall
+take any goods by force, nor unless upon payment at the owner's price;
+neither shall any be taken away under pretence of being for the king's
+service.--8. The English merchants shall not be hindered from selling
+their goods to whom they please, nor from sending them to other
+factories; neither shall they pay any more in this case than has been
+already paid at the port of entry.--9. Whatever goods the English may
+purchase in any part of the dominions of the Mogul, shall be allowed to
+be transmitted to the ports, without any hindrance or molestation, and
+shall pay no other duty than may be agreed upon at the port of
+shipping.--10. No goods already entered at a port shall be again opened,
+the English shewing a certificate of their numbers, qualities, and
+conditions, from the governor or other proper officers of the place
+where they were purchased.--11. No confiscation shall be made of the
+goods or money belonging to any of the English who may die in
+India.--12. No duties shall be demanded for provisions, purchased during
+the stay of English ships at any of the ports.--13. The servants of the
+English merchants, whether English or natives, shall not be punished or
+beaten for doing their duty.--14. The Mogul shall cause any governor or
+officer to be punished for the breach of any of these articles.--15. The
+English ships shall permit all others to pass and repass freely, to and
+from the ports in the dominions of the Mogul, except those of their
+enemies with whom they are at war: And the English, while ashore, shall
+conduct themselves quietly and peaceably, as merchants.--16. The English
+shall yearly furnish the Mogul with all such European rarities, and
+other things, as he may desire, and at reasonable rates.--17. The
+English shall pay duty on their commodities, reasonably rated, at three
+and a half per cent. and two per cent. on rials of eight or money, and
+shall not be liable to any other duty or exaction whatsoever.--18. The
+English shall be ready to assist the Great Mogul against all his
+enemies. And, lastly, The Portuguese shall be admitted to come into this
+peace within six months; or, if they refuse, the English shall be at
+liberty to exercise all hostilities against them.
+
+On the 31st of March, the Great Mogul dined at the house of Asaph Khan,
+all the way from the palace, which was an English mile, being laid under
+foot with silks and velvet sewed together, but rolled up as the king
+passed. It was reported that this feast, and the present made on the
+occasion, cost six lacks of rupees, which amount to L60,000
+sterling.[199]
+
+[Footnote 199: According to Thevenot, a _lack_ contains 100,000 rupees,
+and a rupee is a French crown and five sols. At which rate, the _six
+lacks_ must amount at least to L150,000 sterling.--_Churchill_.
+
+The editor of Churchill's Collection must here have been mistaken the
+French crowns alluded to by Thevenot. The rupees in India are various,
+and consequently differ in their value; but two shillings may be assumed
+as a fair average, in which case the computation in the text is quite
+correct.--E.]
+
+I received intelligence on the 26th April, that the prince had made one
+of his servants ask the king at the durbar wherefore he gave so great
+countenance to the English as to banish the Portuguese from Surat, who
+brought much more profit to the king in rubies, pearls, and other jewels,
+while the English came there only in search of profit, by the sale of
+cloths, swords, knives, and other articles of small value? The king
+acknowledged that this was true, yet could not be mended. By this the
+affections of the prince were made sufficiently manifest, and I had fair
+warning to be on my guard, that I might study to preserve ourselves in
+the good graces of the king, in which only we could be safe. I resolved,
+however, to take no notice of this, except by endeavouring to give the
+prince a better opinion of our nation.
+
+On the 22d of May I went to the king at the durbar, to solicit his
+authority to get back a youth named Jones, who had run away from me to
+an Italian, who protected him to the disgrace of our nation, by using
+the king's name. The king gave me an order for his delivery; but the
+prince, who waited every opportunity to injure us, for the sake of his
+favourite, _Zulphecar Khan_, moved the king in private to send for the
+youth first, to the Guzalcan, which was done. I had newly broken off
+from conferring with the prince, on account of his partiality to
+Zulphecar Khan, and had sent him word that I would no longer refrain
+from stating our grievances to the king in person, which was the cause
+of his enmity towards me. When Jones was brought before the king, being
+instigated by the protection and countenance of the prince, he railed
+against me to my face, with the most virulent malice, beseeching the
+king to save his life; on which the king resolved not to deliver him up
+to me, but to send him as a prisoner to Surat. But the prince, to brave
+me, begged to have him for a servant, as the fellow had renounced his
+country, on which the king did so, in spite of every thing I could
+allege. On this the prince gave him 150 rupees, with the pay of two
+horsemen, and commanded me not to meddle with him.
+
+On the night of the 23d, Jones came and threw himself at my feet, asking
+pardon for his lies and mad behaviour. I told him I would not now keep
+him prisoner, as he was the prince's servant; but I would not give him
+any answer till he had made public reparation for his misbehaviour, as
+far as he could. Accordingly, on the next day, he contrived to get to
+the _Guzalcan_, and there asked pardon of the king for the lies he had
+spoken against me, denying every word he had then spoken, alleging he
+had done so to protect himself against me, whom he had offended, and
+prayed the king to send for me, that he might ask my pardon in public.
+The king was well pleased, but the prince fell into a rage. I went to
+the Guzalcan on the 25th, when the king protested he never believed what
+Jones had said against me, and that he considered him a villain, yet
+could not but protect him, as he had cast himself on his mercy. Jones
+was sent for, and asked my pardon on his knees, declaring on oath to the
+king that he had in every thing belied me, and that he now made this
+declaration in a voluntary manner, as he durst not return to his
+country. The king chid him a little, saying to me that neither he nor
+any good man could believe such a slanderer. The prince grew angry, and
+endeavoured to make Jones stand to what he had said formerly against me;
+and as Jones refused, the prince basely desired him to restore the 150
+rupees he had received for bearing witness against me. Jones promised to
+return the money, for which purpose an under-treasurer was sent along
+with him to the house in which he lodged, as I would not suffer him to
+come to mine.
+
+I was forced to seem content, having no way to seek redress, as I had no
+presents to give, and the king never listens to any request unless well
+backed, and will even demand it in plain terms, of which the prince
+takes advantage, urging that the Portuguese bring rich jewels, rubies,
+and pearls, and treating our English commodities with great scorn. On
+the 29th of May the Portuguese were admitted to the king with a present,
+and to sell a ballass ruby, which was said to weigh thirteen _toles_,
+two and a half of these being equal to an ounce.[200] For this they
+asked five lacks of rupees, but the king only offered one lack. Asaph
+Khan also was an advocate for the Portuguese, who made him a present of
+jewels. They had many rich rubies, ballasses, emeralds, pearls, and
+other jewels, for sale, with which they so much gratified the king and
+his great men, that we were for a time eclipsed. The prince and the
+jesuit fell out about presenting them, which the prince desired, but it
+had been promised before to Asaph Khan. I had formerly judged concerning
+the credit of the Portuguese at court by report, but I now experienced
+the difference between them and us; for they were sought after by all,
+while they only bought our commodities as it were by way of giving us
+charity. Besides, the Portuguese had an advantage over us in consequence
+of their establishments in the neighbourhood, by which they could hinder
+trade into the Red Sea, being always more at hand to do harm than we,
+who are only entertained out of a little fear, while our trade and
+commodities are little cared for.
+
+[Footnote 200: This must be an enormous exaggeration, or error, as in
+this case the ruby would have weighed 5 1-5th ounces.--E.]
+
+Sec.2. _Occurrences in June, July, and August 1616, from which the
+Character and Dispositions of the Mogul and his Subjects may be
+observed_.
+
+The 12th of June a resolution was taken that Sultan Churrum should go to
+the wars in the Deccan, and a day was fixed for his setting out on his
+journey, for which all the Bramins were consulted. On this occasion it
+is reported that Sultan _Parvis_, who is to be recalled, wrote to his
+father the Mogul, that if his elder brother were sent to assume the
+command, he would readily obey; but, if dishonoured by sending this his
+younger brother, he, in the first place, would fall upon him, and would
+afterwards finish the Deccan war. All the captains, such as Khan-Khanan,
+Mahomed Khan, Khan Jeban, and others, refuse to serve under the command
+of Sultan Churrum, who is reputed a tyrant, of whom all men are in
+greater awe than of the king, more especially now that he is to have the
+command of the army. Yet the king cannot be persuaded to change his
+resolution, so that the departure of the prince, with his favourite
+Zulphecar Khan is determined to take place at the distance of twenty-two
+days; wherefore I must make haste to finish my business, as after his
+departure with his minion, Zulphecar Khan, I shall have no chance to
+recover a single penny, nor to get any justice against him.
+
+The 18th, the king commanded one of his brother's sons, who had been
+made a Christian out of policy, to bring him into hatred of the people,
+to touch a lion on the head which was brought in before the king. But he
+refused it, being afraid, on which the king desired his youngest son to
+touch the lion, which he did, without receiving any harm. On this the
+king commanded his nephew to be taken to prison, whence he is never
+likely again to be released.
+
+On the 24th a son was born to Sultan Churrum, and being now preparing to
+set out for the Deccan wars, all men's eyes are upon him, either for
+flattery, gain, or envy, none for love. He has received twenty lacks of
+rupees, equal to L200,000 sterling, towards his expences, and begins to
+act with more than his usual liberality. Notwithstanding this shew of
+his father's affection, a khan at court endeavoured to persuade the king
+that this expedition would be productive of danger, as prince Parvis,
+whose honour would be thereby wounded, would certainly not submit
+without revenge. To this the king answered, "Let them fight, and he who
+proves the better captain, shall pursue the war."
+
+The 25th I had an audience of the king, being sent for by Asaph Khan,
+and was received by his majesty with much courtesy. This Asaph Khan was
+much in the prince's favour, wherefore I was unwilling to disoblige him,
+though he had given me several provocations. At this time Mukrob Khan,
+another of the great men, made me offers of service, being of a contrary
+faction to Asaph Khan, but I thought it best to endeavour to make
+friends of them both. Among other subjects of discourse, Mukrob told me
+that the English brought too much cloth and broad-sword blades for sale
+to India, and hardly any thing else, wherefore he advised they should
+forbear for two or three years, and rather bring the curiosities of
+China and Japan, which would be more acceptable, and to bring from
+England the best cloth of gold, and the richest silks wrought with gold
+and silver, and above all things, large quantities of Arras hangings.
+
+The 30th I visited Abdalla Hassan, having need of his friendship; and,
+what is rare in this country, he refused to accept of any present.
+Abdalla is captain over all the soldiers maintained at court, and
+treasurer of all the armies. He entertained me with great civility, and
+few compliments, and made me sit beside him to see the soldiers shoot at
+marks with their bows and firelocks. Most of them hit the mark with a
+single bullet, being about the size of a hand, affixed to a butt. We had
+some discourse together about the manner of using weapons in Europe,
+after which I took my leave and departed.
+
+Most of July passed in soliciting the prince to sign the articles I had
+presented to the king, as mentioned before. On the 13th I sent him three
+bottles of Alicant, and a letter concerning the difference between us
+and the Portuguese about trade, offering to take all the customs to
+farm, both inwards and outwards, for the use of the company. The prince,
+according to his usual barbarous custom of transacting all business in
+public, caused my letter to be twice read over to him by his secretary,
+often interrupting him with discourse, and sent word that he would read
+it again at night and consider its contents, and that I should have his
+answer through _Mirza Sorocalla_.
+
+That night I went to the durbar to visit the king, who, as soon as I
+came in, sent Asaph Khan to say that he heard I had an excellent painter
+in my house, and that he wished to see some of his work. I replied,
+there was only a young man, a merchant, who drew some figures for his
+amusement, in a very ordinary manner, with a pen, but which were far
+from having any claim as paintings. The king said I need not fear his
+taking any man from me by force, as he would neither do me any injury
+himself, nor suffer any to be done me by others, and desired he might
+see the young man and his work. I answered, I had no fears of injury
+from his majesty, and, for his satisfaction, should bring the young man
+to the Guzalcan with such drawings as he might have, which were probably
+figures of elephants, deer, or the like. On this the king bowed his
+head, saying, if I desired to have an elephant, or any other thing in
+his country, I had only to let him know freely what I wished, and he
+would give it me, for he was my friend. I made a low reverence, humbly
+thanking his majesty, and said that elephants were of no use to me,
+neither was it the custom of any person of our nation, especially of my
+rank, to ask any thing: Yet, if his majesty were pleased to give me even
+the value of a rupee, I should thankfully accept it as a mark of his
+favour. He answered, that he knew not what I might wish for, but there
+were many things in his country rare in mine, and desired I might not be
+dainty, but speak to him freely, and he would give me such things as
+were most acceptable. He then desired me to be merry, for he was the
+friend of our nation and of me, and should take care we had no injury
+done to us. He then desired me to attend that night at the Guzalcan, and
+to bring with me the young man who painted pictures. Then Asaph Khan
+wished me to send for him to come to his house, where also he invited me
+to go till the time when the king came out again, assuring me I should
+be welcome, which I agreed to. I had never before been so graciously
+treated by the king as now, which all the great men took notice of, and
+accordingly altered their deportment towards me. It so happened that the
+jesuit acted as my interpreter on this occasion, by the king's
+appointment.
+
+I went from the durbar to the house of Asaph Khan, according to
+invitation, and continued there till the king came out again, when I was
+conducted back, accompanied by Mr Hughes, the supposed painter, with
+whom the king had some discourse. After this, I shewed the king a
+curious picture I had of a friend of mine, which pleased him much, and
+he shewed it to all his company. The king sent for his chief painter,
+who pretended he could make as good, which I denied, on which a wager of
+a horse was made between Asaph Khan and me in the king's presence, and
+to please him, but Asaph afterwards retracted. After this, the Mogul
+fell to drinking some Alicant wine which I had presented him, giving
+some of it to those about him, and then sent for a full bottle, and
+drinking a cup, sent it to me, saying it soured so fast it would be
+spoiled before he could drink it, and I had none. This done, he turned
+him to sleep, when all the candles were put out, and I had to grope my
+way out in the dark.
+
+This day, a gentlewoman attendant upon _Noor-mahal_ was taken in the
+king's house in some improper act with an eunuch, when another animal of
+the same kind, who loved her, slew her paramour. The poor woman was set
+up to the arm-pits in the ground, with the earth hard rammed around her,
+being condemned to remain there three days and two nights in that
+situation, without sustenance, her head and arms exposed to the violence
+of the sun. If she survived, she was then to be pardoned. The eunuch was
+condemned to the elephants. This damsel was found to be worth, in
+pearls, jewels, and money, sixteen lack of rupees.[201]
+
+[Footnote 201: In Purchas this sum is rated in words at sixteen hundred
+thousand, while in Churchill it is only in figures 160,000.--E.]
+
+On the 22d, I had letters from Burbanpoor in answer to those I had
+written to Mohabet Khan, who granted my desire of a firmaun in favour of
+our nation, granting them a house near the governor's, strictly
+commanding that no person should molest them by sea or land, neither to
+exact from them any customs, or to give them trouble on any pretence,
+with entire liberty to buy, sell, and transport any commodities at their
+pleasure, without let or hindrance. I received this in a letter from
+himself, full of civility and kindness, far exceeding any I had hitherto
+met with in India, protesting the highest respect, and his earnest wish
+to give me every content in whatever I might desire. I caused this
+firmaun to be immediately sent to Surat, so that Broach is now provided
+as a good retreat from the prince's injuries, and the customs given up,
+by which L1500 a-year will be saved, besides all manner of searches and
+extortions. No person doubts the performance of this firmaun, as Mohabet
+Khan careth not for the prince, and feareth no man, neither needeth he
+any person's favour, being much beloved of the king, and reckoned the
+second man in the empire. He has all his life been liberal of his purse,
+and honourable in his word, so that he has the good report of all men.
+In regard to the customs on trade, as the king takes none, and the
+governors convert them to their own profit, he professes to scorn
+abusing the liberties of the king's ports.
+
+On the 6th of August I was sent for to the durbar, where I had much talk
+with the king, who asked me many questions to satisfy his curiosity, and
+desired me to come to the Guzalcan at night, when I should see my
+picture so exactly copied, that I should not know the copy from the
+original. He asked me what reward I would give the painter who had made
+the copy so like, to which I answered, I would give fifty rupees, a
+painter's reward. To which the king replied, that his painter was a
+gentleman, and my proffered reward was too small. I said, that I gave
+the picture willingly, esteeming it rare, and had no inclination to make
+comparisons or wagers; and that, if his majesty's servant had performed
+well, and would not accept my gift, his majesty was most fit to reward
+him. So, after many merry jests, and brags of the arts in his dominions,
+his majesty asked me how often I drank in the day, and how much, and
+what we drank in England. Mentioning beer, he asked what beer was, how
+it was made, and whether I could make it here in India. To all of which
+serious state questions I answered to his satisfaction.
+
+He sent for me again at night, being impatient to triumph in the skilful
+execution of his painter, and shewed me six pictures, all pasted on one
+board, one being my own, and the other five done by his artist, and all
+so like, that by candle-light I was at some loss to determine which was
+which, being greatly beyond my expectation. At length, by closer
+inspection, I pointed out my own, and explained the differences between
+it and the copies, which were not apparent to an inexperienced eye. The
+king was much pleased that I had not seen the difference at first sight,
+for which he was full of mirth, and exulted over me. I gave him way, and
+satisfied him much by praising his painter, saying, that I saw his
+majesty needed no pictures from our country. He then asked me what
+reward I would give his painter? To which I answered, I would double my
+former offer, and if he came to my house, would give him an hundred
+rupees to buy a nag. The king took this kindly, but said his painter
+would not accept money, but some other gifts which I had before
+promised. I said this was referable to my own discretion. To which he
+answered, that this was true, yet he wished I would name it. To this I
+said, I would give him a good sword, a pistol, and a picture. "Then,"
+said the king, "you confess he is a good workman, send for him to your
+house, and shew him such rarities as you have, and let him choose one,
+in return for which you shall have any one of these pictures you please,
+that you may shew in England we are not so unskilful as you supposed."
+He then pressed me to make a choice, which I did, and which the king
+wrapped in paper, and placed in a little book of mine, expressing much
+exultation at the supposed victory of his painter. I then shewed him a
+picture I had of his majesty, far inferior to the work I now saw, saying
+I had judged from it, supposing it among the best. When told where I got
+it, he asked why I bought any such thing? "Have not I the best, and have
+not I told you that I would give you any thing you desired?" I thanked
+his majesty, but said I held it impertinent for me to trouble him in
+trifles, especially as a beggar. To this he replied, that it was no
+shame to ask from him, and desired me to speak freely at all times, and
+pressed me to ask for something. To this I answered, that I would not
+make choice of any gift, as whatever he was pleased to give, I would
+joyfully accept as a mark of honour. He then said, if you desire my
+picture, I will either give you one for yourself or for your king. To
+this I answered, that if his majesty thought proper to send one to my
+king, I would gladly carry it, and knew that my sovereign would esteem
+it much, and take it as a mark of friendship; but, as his majesty had
+emboldened me by his gracious condescension, I would humbly ask one for
+myself, which I would keep and leave to my posterity, as a memorial of
+his majesty's favour. He answered, as my king did not desire one, but I
+did, I should have one, and so gave immediate order for its making. He
+then turned himself to sleep, and we had to go out as before, in the
+dark.
+
+The 9th of August a band of an hundred robbers were brought in chains
+before the Great Mogul, together with their accusation. Without any
+ceremony of trial, he ordered them to be carried away for execution,
+their chief being ordered to be torn in pieces by dogs, and all the rest
+to be put to death in the ordinary manner. The prisoners were divided
+into portions, sent for execution to several quarters of the city, and
+executed in the streets. Close by my house, the chief was torn in pieces
+by twelve dogs, and thirteen of his fellows, having their hands and
+feet tied together, had their necks cut by a sword, yet not quite
+through, and their naked and bloody bodies were left to corrupt in the
+street, to the annoyance of the whole neighbourhood.
+
+On the 10th, 11th, and 12th, I was occupied at court in giving notice to
+the king and prince that a Dutch ship lay before Surat, and refused to
+give notice of its object till the arrival of a fleet to which it
+belonged, which was expected with the first fair wind. I took advantage
+of this circumstance to make them apprehensive of the designs of the
+Hollanders, and the dangers that might arise from them, all of which was
+well taken. And, being consulted on the subject, I advised not to come
+to a rupture with them, and yet to exclude them from trade.
+
+The last of these days I went to visit _Gemaldin Ussen_,[202] the
+viceroy of _Patan_,[203] and lord of four cities in Bengal, a man of
+seventy years of age, who had often been employed as an ambassador by
+the Mogul, had more understanding and courtesy than all his countrymen,
+was universally esteemed for his hospitality and regard to strangers,
+and was considered as entirely free from secret ambition. He had often
+invited me to his house, to which I went this day, and was received with
+extraordinary kindness and friendship. He even offered me a lack of
+rupees, and such other demonstrations of courtesy, as bespoke their own
+refusal. He offered me likewise his credit and favour with the king, and
+his best advice in every emergence; indeed, omitting nothing that could
+evince his desire to serve me. All this seemed cordially to proceed from
+the heart, especially from a person of his years and experience; and, in
+the course of our conversation, he spoke so plainly of many of the chief
+men about the court, which, from my own experience, I knew for truth,
+that I was satisfied he was a true-hearted and well-disposed old man. He
+gave me much information respecting the customs of this empire, their
+want of laws, their servitude, the increase of the empire, and many
+other things, having served in grace and favour under three successive
+kings. He shewed me a book containing the annals of all memorable
+actions in his time, which he daily committed to record, and offered me
+a copy if I would procure it to be translated. This also treated
+concerning the king's revenue, and the manner in which it was raised,
+besides confiscations, gifts, and deductions upon the great men. He
+shewed me that the government of every province paid yearly a certain
+rent to the king. Thus, for his government of Patna, he gave yearly to
+the king eleven lacks of rupees;[204] all other profits of the
+government being his own, he having entire power and authority to take
+what he thought fit. His government was estimated at 5000 horse, the pay
+of each being 200 rupees yearly, of which he only kept 1500 on foot,
+being allowed the surplus as dead pay. Besides which, he had a daily
+pension of 1000 rupees, and enjoyed some smaller governments. Yet he
+assured me that several of the great lords had double the emoluments he
+enjoyed, and that there were above twenty equal to himself.
+
+[Footnote 202: This name does not appear rightly reported, yet we have
+no means of correcting its orthography, neither is it of much
+importance. Perhaps it may have been Jemal-ul-dien Ussan Khan.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 203: This is probably a mistake for Patna in Bengal, and he
+may have been Nabob, or Nawab, perhaps Soubah of Bengal.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 204: Eleven lack, or 1,100,000 rupees, on the computation
+formerly assigned, are equal to L110,000. In the Pilgrims, at this
+place, the rupee is said to equal 2s. 2d, which would add L9166:12:4 to
+that sum.--E.]
+
+In the course of our conversation, this lord praised the good prophet
+Jesus, and his laws, and was full of much pleasant and profitable
+discourse. Some days after this visit, when I thought his kindness had
+been at an end, he borrowed the king's banqueting-house and
+pleasure-garden, called _Havar Gemall_, a mile from town, on purpose to
+treat me, and earnestly inviting me, I promised to come. He went there
+himself at midnight, carrying his tents and all requisite furniture and
+provisions, and fitted up a place very handsomely, by the side of the
+tank, for the entertainment. I went there in the morning, and on my
+arrival he came to meet me with extraordinary civility, carrying me into
+the pavilion he had prepared, where he had some company, among whom were
+two of his sons, of whom he had thirty in all. He had likewise an
+hundred servants attending. To amuse me, he carried me to see the king's
+little closets and retiring rooms, which were painted in the antique
+manner, having pictures of some of the French kings, and other Christian
+princes, on several of the pannels. He said he was only a poor servant
+of the king, yet wished I might have some content, and had therefore
+invited me to a slight banquet, that we might eat bread and salt
+together, to seal a friendship which he entreated me to accept. There
+were many great men, he alleged, who were better able to shew me
+kindness, but were proud and false-hearted, and he wished me therefore
+to trust none of them. For, if I had any business to transact concerning
+the Portuguese or any other, they who acted as my interpreters would
+never deliver the truth, but only what pleased themselves, or would give
+satisfaction in the relation. That, therefore, I should never be rightly
+understood, nor be able to effect my business without being abused and
+cheated, nor ever clearly know the situation in which I stood, until I
+had an Englishman who could speak Persian, who was able rightly to
+deliver what I wished to have said, without using any other person. And,
+if I could find any such, the king would readily grant me leave to
+employ him, having conceived a good opinion of me; insomuch, that the
+preceding night, at the Guzalcan, when the jewels of _Sheik Ferid_,
+governor of Lahore, who was lately deceased, were presented to him, he
+remembered me of his own accord, and seeing a picture of himself which
+pleased him, he delivered it to Asaph Khan, commanding him to send it to
+me, that I might wear it for his sake, with many words of favour
+concerning me, which would make all the great men respect me.
+
+While thus conversing, dinner was served. So sitting down on a carpet, a
+cloth was spread, divers kinds of banqueting dishes were set before us.
+The like was done a little on one side for the gentlemen of his company,
+with whom he went to eat, as they hold it a kind of uncleanness to
+mingle with us. Upon this, I told him that he had promised we should eat
+bread and salt together, and without his company I felt little appetite,
+whereupon he arose from the rest, and sat down beside me, and we fell
+heartily to our repast. It consisted of various kinds of dishes,
+together with raisins, almonds, pistachio nuts, and various fruits.
+After dinner, he played at chess, and I walked about, and after some
+time spent in discourse, I offered to take my leave. But he said he had
+invited me to eat with him, and hitherto we had only had a collation,
+wherefore he entreated I might not depart till we had supped together,
+to which I readily consented.
+
+About an hour after, the ambassador of one of the kings of the Deccan
+came to visit him, whom he presented to me, using him with civility, but
+much inferior to the respect he had shewn me. He afterwards asked me,
+if the king my master would scorn the offer of service from so poor a
+man as he was, and if he would vouchsafe to accept a present from a
+stranger, as he proposed to send a gentleman to England with me to kiss
+the hands of my sovereign, and to see our country. I answered him as
+became me, with all civility; so he sent for one presently, whom he
+questioned if he would venture upon such a journey, and as this person
+seemed willing, he presented him to me, saying he would provide some of
+the curiosities of the country for the king my master, and send them by
+this gentleman along with me. By the manner all this seemed to be in
+earnest.
+
+While we thus spent our time in friendly converse, supper was brought
+in; and, as in the morning, two cloths were spread, one before me and my
+chaplain, with one merchant, on which were set various dishes of roast,
+fried, and boiled meats, with rice and sallads. On this occasion my
+honourable entertainer desired me to excuse his company, as it was their
+custom to eat among themselves, and his countrymen might take it ill if
+he did not eat with them; so he and his guests, and I with my
+companions, solaced ourselves with good cheer. The meats were not amiss,
+but the attendance and order were excellent, as the servants were very
+diligent and respectful. After the manner of this country of giving
+presents to invited guests, he made me a present of five cases of
+sugar-candy flavoured with musk, and a loaf of the finest sugar, as
+white as snow, weighing fifty pounds, and requested my acceptance of an
+hundred such against my departure. He then addressed me in these
+terms:--"You refuse these from me, thinking I am poor, but being made in
+my government, it costs me nothing, as it comes to me _gratis_." To this
+I answered, that he had already much too far obliged me, yet would I not
+refuse his kindness when ready to go away. On which he replied, that he
+might not be then provided, and therefore desired I would accept now,
+that he might not lose both his offer and his labour. Thus, calling
+himself my father, and me his son, we took leave of each other, with
+many compliments.
+
+I went to visit the king on the 16th, who, as soon as I came in, called
+to his women, and reached out his own picture set in gold, and hanging
+to a chain of gold wire, with a pendant of foul pearl, which he
+delivered to Asaph Khan, whom I warned not to demand any reverence from
+me on the occasion which I would not willingly perform; as it is the
+custom here, when he bestows any gift, that the receiver kneels down and
+touches the ground with his head; and which ceremony had been exacted
+from the ambassador of Persia. Then Asaph Khan came to me with the
+picture, which I offered to take in my hand, but he made a sign to me,
+to take off my hat and put it about my neck, leading me right before the
+king. Not understanding his purpose, and doubting he might require my
+conformance with the custom of the country, called _sizeda_, I resolved
+rather to forego the present than comply. He made a sign to me to return
+thanks to the king, which I did after the fashion of our country; on
+which some of the officers called for me to make _sizeda_, but the king
+immediately said, No, no, in Persian. So, with many gracious words, I
+returned to my place. You may judge of the king's liberality by this
+mighty gift, which was not in all worth thirty pounds, yet was five
+times the value of such as he usually gives of that kind, and which are
+yet held as a special favour, as all the great men wear the king's
+picture, which yet none may do but those to whom it is given. This
+ordinarily consists of only a small gold medal, not bigger than a
+sixpence, impressed with the king's image, having a short gold chain of
+six inches to fasten it on their turbans; and to which, at their own
+charges, some add precious stones or pearl pendents.
+
+_Gemaldin Ussen_, who had invited me to the _Havaer Gemal_, as before
+mentioned, being newly appointed governor of _Sinde_, came to dine at my
+house on the 19th, accompanied by two of his sons and two other
+gentlemen, and attended by about an hundred servants. He partook of some
+part of the banquet, which had been prepared at my house by a Mahomedan
+cook, but declined eating of any of the dishes which were cooked after
+our English fashion, though he seemed to have a good inclination, being
+influenced by a superstitious notion; yet he desired that four or five
+dishes, of his own choice, might be sent to his own house, being all
+baked meats, dressed in a way he had not before seen, saying he would
+afterwards eat of them in private, which was accordingly done. At this
+entertainment, he offered us a free trade and secure residence at the
+chief town, of Sinde, his new government, and having filled himself with
+my banquet, he took his leave, after receiving a small present from me,
+according to the fashion of the country. This day, Mr Hall, my chaplain,
+died suddenly, to my great grief. He was a man of mild and gentle
+manners, and a most sincere Christian, of unspotted life and
+conversation.
+
+On the 20th and the night before, there fell a vast storm of rain,
+called in this country the _elephant_, owing to which such prodigious
+streams of water flowed into the great tank, the head of which is of
+stone and apparently of great strength, that it gave way in one place,
+causing a sudden alarm that the whole fabric would give way and drown
+all that part of the town in which I dwelt. Insomuch that the prince and
+all his women forsook their house, and my nearest neighbour carried off
+his goods and his wife to the skirts of the hills on his elephants and
+camels. All persons had their horses ready at their doors, that they
+might save their lives by flight in case of necessity. We were in the
+utmost consternation, and sat up till midnight, having no alternative,
+as we thought, but to flee ourselves and abandon all our goods, for it
+was reported that the water would rise three feet higher than the top of
+our house, and carry all away, being only a slight mud building. The
+foot of the tank was level with our dwelling, and the water was of great
+extent and very deep, so that the surface of the water stood
+considerably higher than the top of my house, which stood in a hollow,
+in the very course of the water, and where every ordinary heavy rain
+occasioned such a current at my door as to be for some hours impassable
+by man or horse. But the king caused a sluice to be cut during the
+night, to conduct the water by another course, so that we were freed
+from the extreme danger; yet the excessive rain had washed down a
+considerable part of the walls of my house, and so weakened it by
+breaches in different parts, that I now feared its falling down, as much
+as I had dreaded its being swept away by the flood. It was every where
+so bemired with dirt and water, that I could hardly find a place in
+which to sit or lie dry, and was forced to be at material charges in
+having it repaired. Thus were we every way afflicted, by fires, smoke,
+floods, storms, heats, dust, and flies, and had no season of temperate
+air and quietness.
+
+On the 27th, I received advice from Surat, that the Dutch had obtained
+permission to land their goods, and to secure them in a warehouse at
+that place, carrying on trade till the pleasure of the prince were
+known, and under condition that they should depart at the first warning.
+
+The king went to _Havar Gemal_ on the 29th, whence he employed himself
+in hunting. At that place, a resolution was taken, to remove the court
+to Mundu, a castle near Burhanpoor, where there is no town. At this
+time, Sultan Parvis came from the Deccan wars in disgrace, and arrived
+with his train near Agimere; and the king commanded him to retire to
+Bengal, refusing to admit him into his presence. Having thus dispatched
+him, without the inconvenience dreaded from a meeting between the
+brothers, he now proposed to settle Sultan Churrum in the Deccan wars,
+although all the chief men of the court were averse from this measure;
+on which account, the king feared to send him down, as was formerly
+proposed, and had therefore delayed this measure until Prince Parvis was
+withdrawn, and now meant to establish Churrum by means of his own
+presence at Mundu, in the neighbourhood of the Deccan. If this
+resolution is executed, it will put us to much trouble and expence, as
+we must build a new house both for ourselves and goods, because that
+castle stands on a hill, and has no buildings near it.
+
+The king returned from hunting on the night of the 30th, and about
+eleven o'clock sent me a very large and fat wild boar, desiring to have
+the tusks back, and accompanied by a message, saying it was killed by
+his own hand, and therefore desiring me to be merry, and to eat it with
+good cheer. On this occasion, I desired Jaddow, who brought this message
+from the king, to tell Asaph Khan, that I proposed to visit him next
+day, when I hoped to receive from him a firmaun of the privileges
+granted by the king. Asaph Khan sent me back word, that they would not
+be then ready, but it should be sealed some days after, and that he did
+not wish to see me till he had given me satisfaction.
+
+Sec.3. _Of the Celebration of the King's Birth Day, with other Occurrences
+in September 1616_.
+
+The 2d of September was the birth-day of the Great Mogul, which was
+solemnized with extraordinary festivities. He was then weighed against a
+variety of articles, as jewels, gold, silver, stuffs of gold and silver,
+silk, batter, rice, fruits, and many other things, of each a little, all
+of which is given to the Bramins. On this occasion, the king ordered
+Asaph Khan to send for me; who did so, and appointed me to come to the
+place where the king held his durbar. But the messenger mistook, so that
+I went not in time, and missed the sight. Being there before the king
+came out, he sent for me as soon as he noticed me, and enquired why I
+had not come to see the ceremony of weighing, for which he had given
+order. I explained the reason, as it actually was, on which he chid
+Asaph Khan publicly for the omission. He was at this time so richly
+ornamented with jewels, that I must confess I never saw at any one time
+such unspeakable wealth. He now amused himself in seeing his greatest
+elephants brought in before him. Some of these were lord-elephants,
+having their chains, bells, and furniture all of gold and silver, being
+attended by many gilt flags and streamers, and each having eight or ten
+inferior elephants to wait upon him, clothed in gold, silk, and silver.
+In this way there passed about twelve troops, all very splendidly
+furnished. The first lord-elephant had all the plates on his head and
+breast set with rubies and emeralds, being a beast of most wonderful
+stature and beauty. They all bowed down before the king, making their
+reverences very orderly, and formed as fine a shew of beasts as I had
+ever seen. The keepers of each chief elephant made a present to the
+king. After this was over, the king made me some gracious speeches, and
+went into the interior apartments.
+
+About ten o'clock at night, after I was in bed, the king sent me a
+message, saying he had heard I had a picture which I had not shewn him,
+and desired I would come then to him, bringing the picture with me; and
+if I would not part with it, that he might see it, and have copies taken
+for his wives. I rose and carried the picture with me, and when I came
+to the presence, I found him sitting cross-legged on a little throne,
+his robes all covered over with diamonds, pearls, and rubies. Before him
+stood a golden table, on which were above fifty pieces of gold plate,
+all set with precious stones, some of them being large and of great
+value. His nobles were all around him in their best attire, whom he
+commanded to drink cheerfully of several kinds of wine, which stood
+there in large flaggons.
+
+On my approach he asked for the picture, on which I shewed him two. He
+seemed astonished at one of these, and asked whose it was; to which I
+replied, that it was the portrait of a friend who was dead. He asked if
+I would give it him. I replied, that I valued it more than any thing I
+had, as being the portrait of one I had loved dearly; but if his majesty
+would pardon my attachment to that picture, and accept the other, which
+was French and of excellent work, I would most willingly give it. He
+thanked me, saying it was that only picture which he desired, and which
+he loved as much as I did; and, if I would give it him, he would value
+it more than the richest jewel in his house. I answered that I was not
+so much in love with any thing, but that I would part with it to satisfy
+his majesty, being extremely glad to have any opportunity to serve him,
+and was ready even to present him with my heart, if I could thereby
+demonstrate my affection. He bowed to me, saying he had never before
+seen so much art and beauty, and conjured me to tell him truly if ever
+such a woman had lived. I answered, that there certainly did once live a
+lady whom this portrait resembled in every thing but perfection. He then
+said, that he accepted my readiness to give him what I so valued as a
+great kindness; but would only shew it to his ladies, and cause his own
+painter make five copies, and if I knew my own I should have it back. I
+answered, that I had freely given it, and would be glad of his majesty
+accepting it: But he said he would not keep it, and loved me better for
+putting so much value on the image of my departed friend. He knew, he
+added, that it would be doing me an injury to take it from me, and would
+only have five copies taken, which his wives should wear, and would then
+return me the original with his own hand. In this art of limning or
+painting in water colours, his artists are wonderfully expert. But he
+liked not the other picture, which was painted in oil.
+
+He then told me that this was his birth-day, and all men made merry, and
+asked me therefore if I would drink with them. I said I would willingly
+do whatever he was pleased to command, as I sincerely wished him many
+prosperous days, and that the ceremony of this day might be repeated for
+an hundred years. He asked me what wine I would have, whether that of
+the grape or made wine, and whether strong or weak. I said whatever he
+was pleased to order, hoping he would neither command me to have it too
+strong or in too large quantity. So he called for a gold cupful of
+mingled wine, half of the grape and half artificial, which he sent me by
+one of his nobles, with this message, that I should drink it off twice,
+thrice, four times, or five times, for his sake, and accept the cup and
+appurtenances as a present. On drinking a portion of it, I found it
+stronger than any I had ever tasted, insomuch that it made me sneeze, at
+which he laughed, and called for raisins, almonds, and sliced lemons,
+which he sent me on a gold plate, and desired me to eat and drink what I
+liked, and no more. I then made a reverence for my present, after my own
+manner, though Asaph Khan wanted me to kneel and knock my head upon the
+ground, but the king accepted it in my own way. The cup was of gold, set
+all over with small rubies and turquoises; the cover being likewise
+gold, and set with great rubies, emeralds, and turquoises; and there was
+likewise a suitable dish or salver on which to set the cup. I know not
+the value, because many of the stones are small, and the greater, which
+also are numerous, are not all clean; but there are above two thousand
+stones in all, and the gold weighs about twenty ounces. On giving me
+this splendid present, he sent me word that he esteemed me more than
+ever he had done a Frank, and asked if I were merry in eating the wild
+boar he had sent me, how I had it dressed, what I drank with it, and
+many such compliments; which public shew of his grace and favour did me
+much service in the eyes of all his nobles, who strove to shew me
+respect.
+
+After this, he threw among those that stood below, two chargers of
+rupees, and among us who were round the throne two chargers of hollow
+almonds made of gold and silver mingled; but I would not scramble as did
+his great men, for I saw his son did not take any up. He then
+distributed sashes and girdles of gold tissue to all the musicians and
+servants, and many others. So drinking heartily himself, and commanding
+others to drink, he and his nobles became as jovial as could be, and of
+a thousand humours. But the prince, Asaph Khan, two old men, the former
+king of Candahar, and I, refrained from drinking. When the king was not
+able any longer to hold up his head, he lay down to sleep, and we all
+departed. While going out, I moved Asaph Khan for the dispatch of our
+privileges, assuring him his majesty could give me no present so
+acceptable. I said farther, that I had no doubt it lay in his power to
+dispatch me; but if he did not think proper to do so, or if any other
+hinderance was in my way, I should on the morrow again apply to the
+king. He desired me not to do so, for the king loved me and had given
+orders for dispatching my business, which had been hindered by the
+preparations for this feast; but he would now send it to me with all
+speed, and do me all manner of service.
+
+Seven months had now been vainly spent in soliciting the signing and
+sealing of the articles of amity and commerce, formerly detailed, and I
+had nothing but promises and delays, from day to day, and from week to
+week. Therefore on the 3d September, the English fleet being hourly
+expected to arrive at Surat, I delivered to him a memorial, containing
+the articles I desired to have an order for, that they might be observed
+in the unloading of the ships. These were, 1. That the presents coming
+for the king and prince, should not be opened at the port, but sent up
+to court under the seals of the customhouse officers. 2. That
+curiosities sent for presents to other persons, and for the merchants to
+sell, should also be sent to the court sealed, for the prince to make
+the first choice. 3. That the gross merchandize should be landed,
+reasonably rated, and not detained at the customhouse, but that the
+merchants, on paying the customs, should have full liberty to sell or
+dispose of it as they pleased; and that the ships should be fully
+supplied with provisions, without paying any custom for the same.
+
+On the 4th, Asaph Khan sent me back my articles, after so long
+attendance and so many false promises, some of them altered, and others
+struck out, together with a letter, saying there was no need of any
+articles, as an order from the prince to trade at Surat was quite
+sufficient, he being lord there, and that no grant of trade at Bengal or
+Sinde could ever be allowed. Notwithstanding all this vexation, I durst
+not change my mode of proceeding, or wholly quit the prince and Asaph
+Khan. I therefore drew up other articles, leaving out what seemed
+displeasing in the former, and desired Asaph Khan to put them into form
+and procure them to be sealed, or else to allow me to apply to the king,
+that if he denied me I might leave the country. The substance of these
+new articles was as follows:--1. That all the subjects of the Great
+Mogul should receive the English in a friendly manner, suffering them to
+land their goods peaceably, and to procure provisions for their money
+without paying customs for them.--2. To have liberty, after paying
+customs for their goods, to sell them to any one they pleased, and none
+to force them to sell at an under rate.--3. To have liberty to pass with
+their goods to any part of the empire, without any farther exactions
+than those payable at the port.--4. To have the presents for the Mogul
+and prince sealed without being opened, and sent to the ambassador.--5.
+To have the goods of those that might die freed from confiscation, and
+delivered to the surviving English factors.--And finally, That no injury
+should be offered to any of the English.
+
+On the 8th, Asaph Khan sent me word in plain terms, that absolutely he
+would procure nothing for me sealed, that in any respect concerned the
+government belonging to the prince, and that I must rest satisfied with
+a firmaun or order, signed by the prince, which was quite sufficient,
+and I needed not to apply any more to him. This clearly revealed the
+purpose he had so long intended, that we should be entirely dependent on
+the prince; and I now had just cause to look out for new friends, Asaph
+Khan having forsaken me. He that first took him for our solicitor
+engaged us in all this misery, for he was the known protector of our
+enemies, and a slave to their numerous bribes. I therefore determined to
+try the prince, and to seem entirely dependent upon him. So I went to
+the prince on the 10th, and desired he would grant his firmaun for the
+four articles formerly sent to his secretary, which he threw down to his
+secretary, so that I hoped to be at rest. I received it on the 11th, but
+on reading it over, I found two of the four clauses much altered, and
+one entirely left out; so I returned it, declaring roundly I could not
+accept it, neither would I suffer any goods to be sent ashore. Never was
+any man so distressed with such pride, covetousness, and falsehood.
+
+At night, I rode to visit the prince's secretary, _Mirza Socrolla_, with
+whom I expostulated the business, declaring my resolution to depart. But
+I now found the firmaun quite different than I had been informed, and
+containing all the clauses I had required, though in some phrases rather
+ambiguous in my judgment, which the secretary interpreted favourably,
+declaring it was the prince's intent to satisfy me entirely, and that
+every thing was quite sufficient for our purpose. After urging the
+obscurity of some points, and as he had declared the meaning of the
+prince to me, I requested he would explain them in the same sense to the
+governor of Surat, which he agreed to; and especially gave order that
+the customer should pay for fifty pieces of cloth, which he had bought
+many months before, and wished now to return upon the factors, to their
+extreme loss. At the close of our conference, he expressed the prince's
+desire that we would rely entirely on him, and not cross him in matters
+belonging to his government, by applying to the king, declaring that we
+should so find him a better friend than we expected. Being thus
+satisfied, I was in some hope of success, especially as this man is no
+taker of bribes, and is reputed honest, and pledged his credit that we
+should sustain no loss or injury, every thing being referred to him by
+the prince. So I accepted the firmaun, which, on having it translated, I
+found very effectual and satisfactory.
+
+The 16th, I went to visit the prince, intending to seem entirely
+dependent upon him, till I heard what entertainment our ships were
+likely to meet with. But I found him in much perplexity, fearing the
+coming of Sultan Parvis to court, he being only at the distance of eight
+coss, anxiously desiring leave to kiss his father's hands. The king had
+even granted his desire, but by the influence of Nourmahal, the
+favourite queen, he had revoked the permission, and Sultan Parvis was
+ordered away directly to Bengal.[205] The resolution of the king to
+remove the court from Agimere still continued, but no one knew certainly
+where he intended to go.
+
+[Footnote 205: At this place there is an expression in the Pilgrims,
+coupled with this sentence, which is quite inexplicable. "Yea, although
+the king had fallen down, and taken his mother by the feet, to obtain
+her leave to see her son." We are not sufficiently conversant in the
+secret history of the Zenana of Shah Jehan-guire to explain this; yet
+strongly suspect that this sentence ought to have run thus: Although the
+prince's mother fell at the king's feet to obtain leave to see her
+son.--E.]
+
+Sec.4. _Broils about Abdala Khan and Khan-Khannan: Ambitious projects of
+Sultan Churrum to subvert his eldest Brother: Sea Fight with a
+Portuguese Carrack; and various other Occurrences_.
+
+Several days now passed in soliciting the king and great men, and paying
+my court to them, without any remarkable occurrence; till on the 9th
+October, I had letters from Surat, giving me an account that four
+English ships had arrived there. On the 10th, Abdala Khan, the great
+governor of Ahmedabad, being sent for to court in disgrace, to answer
+for many insolent and contemptuous neglects of the king's commands,
+thought to stand upon his defence and to refuse compliance. But Sultan
+Churrum, whose ambitious views sought to turn every thing to his
+advantage, being desirous to oblige so great a man, who was reckoned one
+of the chiefest captains in the empire, prevailed upon him to submit, on
+his word to protect him. Abdala came therefore, in pretended humility,
+habited as a pilgrim, attended by forty servants on foot, until he
+arrived within a day's journey of the court, having 2000 horse attending
+him at some distance behind. He was this day brought to the _Jarruco_,
+the place where the king sits in public to see sports and hear
+complaints, and advanced towards the king, between two noblemen, having
+chains on his legs, and holding his turban over his eyes, that he might
+see no one till he had the happiness to behold the king. After making
+his humble reverence, and answering a few questions, the king forgave
+him, caused his irons to be taken off, and clothed him in a new vest of
+cloth of gold, with a turban and sash, as is the custom.
+
+The prince, Churrum, now intended to establish his honour and power on
+the Deccan wars, which his elder brother Sultan Parvis had been recalled
+from in disgrace, and which the great commander, Khan-Khannan, had not
+conducted prosperously, being strongly suspected of a secret
+understanding with the princes of the Deccan, from whom he was believed
+to receive pensions. Churrum, therefore, induced his father to recall
+Khan-Khannan, who refused to obey; and wrote to the king, not to send
+Churrum to the war, but one of his youngest sons, then only about
+fifteen. This gave Churrum much uneasiness, as he was exceedingly intent
+upon having the conduct of this war, for which reason he promised to
+give the subordinate command of the army to Abdala Khan, under himself,
+if he could contrive to get Khan-Khannan displaced. Fearing troubles
+from the ambition and factious practices of his son Churrum, the
+discontent of the two elder sons, Cuserou and Parvis, and the power of
+Khan-Khannan, the king was anxious to accommodate matters in the Deccan
+by accepting a peace, and continuing Khan-Khannan in his government; to
+which end he wrote him a letter of favour, and proposed to send him a
+vestment, as a sign of reconciliation, according to custom. Before
+dispatching these, he acquainted a kinswoman of Khan-Khannan, who lived
+in the seraglio, with his purpose. Whether she was false to her
+relation, through the secret influence of Sultan Churrum, or was grieved
+to see the head of her family so unworthily dealt with, who merited so
+highly, does not certainly appear: But she plainly told the king, that
+she did not believe Khan-Khannan would wear any thing the king sent, as
+he knew his majesty hated him, and had once or twice already sent him
+poison, which he had put into his bosom instead of his mouth, and proved
+by trials. For this reason, she was confident Khan-Khannan would not
+dare to put on any thing sent from his majesty. The king offered to
+wear the dress himself in her presence for an hour, which she might
+certify in a letter to her relative. To this she answered, that
+Khan-Khannan would trust neither of them with his life; but, if allowed
+to continue quietly in his command, would do his majesty good service.
+Upon this, the king altered his plans, and resolved to invest Sultan
+Churrum in the supreme command of the Deccan wars, and to follow after
+him with another army, to ensure his reception.
+
+Khan-Khannan, having due notice of the storm preparing against him,
+practised with the Deccan sovereigns, who were at his devotion, to offer
+favourable terms of peace for a season, as he saw no other way of
+averting the cloud that hung over both him and them, unless by
+temporizing till the king and the prince were established farther off.
+For this purpose, there came two ambassadors at this time to court, from
+the princes of the Deccan, bringing horses richly caparisoned as
+presents. The king refused to listen to them, or to accept their gifts,
+and turned them over to his son, saying that peace or war rested
+entirely with him. The prince was so puffed up by this favour, though
+informed that the proposed conditions of peace were highly honourable,
+that he declared proudly he would listen to no terms, till he was in the
+field at the head of the army, being resolved that Khan-Khannan should
+not deprive him of the honour of finishing that war.
+
+The ambitious views of this young prince are quite obvious, and form the
+common talk of the country, yet the king suffers him to proceed,
+although he by no means intends him as his successor. Sultan Cuserou,
+the eldest son, is highly beloved and honoured of all men, and almost
+adored, for his excellent parts and noble dispositions, with which the
+king is well acquainted, and even loves him dearly. But he conceives
+that the liberty of this son would diminish his own glory, and does not
+see that the ambition of Churrum greatly more tarnishes his own fame
+than would the virtuous character and noble actions of the other. Thus
+the king fosters division and emulation among his sons, putting so much
+power into the hands of the younger, which he believes he can undo at
+his pleasure, that the wisest here foresee much fatal division in this
+mighty empire when the present king shall pay the debt of nature,
+expecting that it will then be rent in pieces by civil wars.
+
+The history of this country, for the variety of its incidents, and the
+many crooked practices of the present king during the reign of his
+father, Akbar Shah, and these latter troubles, were well worthy of being
+committed to writing. But, as the country is so remote, many would
+despise such information, and as the people are esteemed barbarous, few
+persons would give it credit. I content myself, therefore, with
+privately contemplating the singular history of this nation, although I
+could narrate so many singular and amusing state intrigues, subtle
+evasions, policies, answers, and adages, as could not be easily equalled
+in the history of one age or country. One incident, however, that
+occurred lately, I cannot omit relating, as it evinces the wisdom and
+patience of the emperor, the incorruptible fidelity of a servant, the
+detestable falsehood of a brother, and the impudent boldness of a
+faction, ready to dare every infamous action, when permitted by the
+supreme ruler to exercise an authority beyond the limits of their
+condition, and contrary to the dictates of reason and true policy.
+
+The favourite Prince Sultan Churrum, together with the favourite Queen
+_Nourmahal_, aunt to his wife, Asaph Khan father-in-law to Churrum, and
+brother of _Nourmahal_, and _Etiman Dowlet_, father of _Asaph Khan_ and
+_Nourmahal_, being the faction that now governed the emperor, and who
+believed their bad influence in danger of being overthrown if the prince
+_Cuserou_ were allowed to live, determined to use every effort for his
+destruction, and to endeavour to get him into their power, that they
+might end his days by poison, for they knew that he was universally
+beloved among the nobles, and that his remaining in life and restoration
+to liberty must some day overthrow and punish their ambitious projects.
+To attain their infamous purposes, Nourmahal was instructed to practise
+upon the king's weakness, by false tears and bewitching blandishments,
+to insinuate that Sultan Cuserou was not in sufficiently safe custody,
+and that he still meditated aspiring projects, contrary to the authority
+and safety of the emperor, who listened to all her insinuations, yet
+refused to understand her, as she did not plainly speak out her meaning.
+
+As this plan failed, the prince, with Etiman Dowlet and Asaph Khan, took
+the opportunity of the emperor being drunk, to persuade him, as if for
+the greater safety and honour of Sultan Cuserou, that it were fitter he
+should be in the company of his brother Churrum, who would be more
+regardful of his safety and happiness than could be expected from an
+idolatrous rajput, to whose custody he had been committed by the
+emperor. They therefore humbly implored his majesty that Prince Cuserou
+might be confided to the care of his dear brother Churrum. This was
+granted by the intoxicated monarch, who immediately fell asleep.
+
+They now deemed their project successful, as having the royal authority;
+and, considering their own greatness, they believed no one would dare to
+dispute the warrant, or to refuse delivering the prince into their
+hands. Accordingly, Asaph Khan went that same night with a guard to the
+house of _Anna-Rah_, a rajput Rajah, or prince, to demand from, him, in
+the king's name and authority, the person of Sultan Cuserou, who had
+been confided to his custody by the king. Anna-Rah declared that he was
+the most humble slave of Prince Churrum, whose name Asaph Khan used upon
+this occasion; but having received charge of Prince Cuserou directly
+from the hands of the emperor, he would deliver him up to no other
+person. He therefore entreated that Prince Churrum would have patience
+till next morning, when he would discharge his duty to the king, whose
+pleasure, once known, he would implicitly obey. This answer overturned
+the whole contrivance. In the morning Anna-Rah went to the king, to whom
+he communicated the demand made upon him in the name of Prince Churrum,
+saying. That his majesty had given his son Cuserou to his charge,
+together with the command of 4000 horse, with all of whom he was ready
+to die at the imperial gate, rather than resign the prince into the
+hands of his enemies: But, if his majesty required, he was ready at all
+times to obey his commands. To this the king replied, "You have done
+honestly and faithfully, and have answered discretely. Continue your
+purpose, and take no notice of any orders. I will not seem to know any
+thing of this, neither do you speak of it any farther. Preserve your
+fidelity, and let us see how far they will prosecute this affair."
+
+Next day, finding the king silent on the subject, the prince and his
+faction took no notice of any thing, hoping the king might forget what
+had passed in his cups over night. I have communicated this incident,
+that you may beware of scattering your goods in this country, or of
+engaging your servants and stock too deeply; for the time will come when
+the whole of this empire will be in commotion, and it is not a few years
+war that will put a period to the inveterate enmity accumulated on all
+hands against a day of vengeance. Should Sultan Cuserou prevail in
+procuring his rightful inheritance, this empire will become a sanctuary
+for Christians, whom he loves and honours, being a patron of learning,
+and an encourager of true valour and just government, abhorring all
+covetousness, and despising the base custom of accepting bribes and
+presents, in use among his ancestors and the nobility of this empire.
+Should Sultan Churrum ascend the throne, it will be a great loss to us,
+as he is a rigid adherent to the superstition of Mahomet, a hater of all
+Christians, proud, subtle, false, and barbarously tyrannical.[206]
+
+[Footnote 206: From this paragraph it appears that the journal of Sir
+Thomas Roe was addressed to the Governor and Committees, or Directors of
+the East India Company.--E.]
+
+The king returned from hunting on the night of the 13th October, and
+sent me a wild pig. An ambassador is daily expected here from Shah
+Abbas, king of Persia. This day I received advice of the arrival of four
+of our ships in safety at Swally roads, and at the same time received
+letters from England. The fleet, originally consisting of six ships,
+left England on the 9th March, 1616, losing company of the Rose about
+the North Cape, in foul weather. The other five arrived safely in
+Saldanha bay on the 12th June, where the Lion was waiting for a wind,
+homewards bound, her officers and people all in good health. After
+staying some time at the Cape without news of the missing ship, they
+dispatched the Swan for Bantam, and sailed on the 29th June with the
+other four ships for Surat. On this passage, on the 6th August, when in
+lat. 12 deg. 50' S. near the Comora islands, they got sight of a carrack of
+1500 tons burden, and 600 men, being the admiral of a fleet for Goa. The
+Globe fetched her to windward, and after the usual salutations of the
+sea, the carrack commanded her to leeward, and seconded this order with
+five shots through her hull, to which the Globe replied with eighteen,
+and then luffed off. The admiral of the English got now up with all his
+ships, and demanded satisfaction for the injury, which was replied to
+with scorn. On this an engagement ensued, in which the commander,
+Benjamin Joseph, was soon slain, but his successor continued the battle.
+Towards evening the carrack ran herself ashore on the rocks of
+_Angazesia_. Our fleet came to anchor in the offing to wait the event,
+and sent a boat to offer fair terms of battle. But about midnight the
+carrack was set on fire, and continued to burn all next morning. The
+English sent their boats to give assistance, but could not approach, and
+they had reason to believe that not one man was saved.[207] The new
+viceroy of Goa was in this ship, by whose obstinacy the death of all the
+rest was occasioned. Our fleet came to anchor off Swally on the 24th
+September, 1616.
+
+[Footnote 207: It was afterwards known that some few escaped with life
+and poverty. A more particular account of this fight will be found in
+the subsequent journal of Alexander Child.--_Purch._]
+
+The 14th October I waited on the emperor, to whom I imparted his
+majesty's salutations, which were courteously received, but he
+immediately began to enquire what presents had been sent to him. I
+mentioned our late fight and victory, at which he seemed to rejoice, and
+applauded the valour of our nation; but he immediately shifted the
+discourse, asking what our king had sent him. I answered, that he had
+sent many tokens of his love and affection; but knowing that his majesty
+was lord of the best portion of Asia, and the richest monarch of the
+East, my sovereign was satisfied the sending of rich gifts to his
+majesty were to cast pearls into the sea, their common mother and
+storehouse; but that my master, together with the warmest assurance of
+his love, had sent him many curiosities, which I hoped would give him
+entire satisfaction. He urged me to mention particulars, some of which I
+named. He asked me for French _muffe_ or velvet, to which I answered,
+that all my letters were not arrived. He then enquired if there were any
+dogs. To which I answered, that some had been slain in the battle at
+sea, but that two were preserved for him, at which he seemed much
+rejoiced. He then said, if I could procure him one of our great horses,
+such as I had described, being a _roan_ or Dutch horse, he would value
+it more than an additional kingdom. I answered, that I should use my
+best endeavours to satisfy his majesty, but much feared it could not be
+effected, owing to the length of the voyage. He said he would willingly
+give a lack of rupees for such a horse. I then desired he would be
+pleased to give an order for the transmission of the presents without
+being searched, and for the good usage of our people. He answered, that
+the port belonged to his son, but sent for him, and publicly gave orders
+for what I required; that the presents should not be searched, nor pay
+any custom, but should be sent up safe to me with all expedition, that I
+might distribute them at my discretion. He likewise commanded the prince
+to give orders for the good usage of our people, and that I should be
+satisfied in all my demands. This order did not extend to the grant of a
+fort, as Asaph Khan had absolutely refused to deliver in that clause.
+This charge was very round and hearty on the part of the king, and a
+great grace to me. The prince called Asaph Khan forwards in my presence,
+and promised, before his father and the whole court, to give me all
+reasonable satisfaction. All this was on the strength of the new
+presents.
+
+That same day I sent for the Portuguese jesuit who resided at court, and
+gave him an account of the engagement between our ships and the carrack,
+offering to make peace between our nation and the Portuguese upon equal
+terms. He promised to acquaint the viceroy of Goa with my offer, and so
+departed. The 15th I received accounts from Masulipatan that Captain
+Keeling had taken a Portuguese ship and two barks; one on the coast of
+Cochin, laden with tin, and the other freighted from Bengal, both of
+which were carried to Bantam. I was also informed that Sir Robert
+Shirley had been dismissed with disgrace from Goa, and was on his way
+overland to Masulipatan, to procure a passage; but am apt to believe
+this intelligence is untrue.
+
+The 16th, being with the prince's secretary about the dispatch of our
+affairs, he proposed to me, by his master's orders, to procure him two
+gunners from our fleet to serve him in the Deccan war, offering good pay
+and good usage. This I undertook to perform, knowing that indifferent
+artists might serve there. While at the prince's palace, Abdala Khan
+came to visit him, so magnificently attended, that I have not before
+seen the like. He was preceded by about twenty drums, and other martial
+music, on horseback, who made abundant noise. After them followed fifty
+persons bearing white flags, and two hundred well-mounted soldiers, all
+richly clothed in cloth of gold, velvet, and rich silks, who all entered
+the gate with him in regular array. Next his person were forty
+targeteers, in the richest liveries. After making his humble reverence,
+he presented a black Arabian horse, splendidly caparisoned, all his
+furniture being studded with flowers of enamelled gold, and set with
+small precious stones. According to custom, the prince returned a
+turban, a vest, and a girdle.
+
+Still persisting in his purpose of personally finishing the war in the
+Deccan, he would give no answer to the ambassadors from that country,
+but detained them till he should come to the frontiers. Being now about
+to depart, he and his party thought themselves not secure if Sultan
+Cuserou remained under the safeguard of Anna-Rah, lest, during the
+absence of Churrum, the king might be reconciled to Cuserou, by whose
+liberty all the hopes and power of their faction would be overthrown, in
+which case their ambition and the injuries they had done could hardly
+escape punishment. In this view they continued to urge the king to
+deliver Sultan Cuserou into the custody of Asaph Khan, as deputy on that
+occasion to Churrum, under pretence that this measure would intimidate
+Khan-Khannan and the Deccan princes, when they shall learn that Sultan
+Churrum is so favoured that the king has delivered his eldest son into
+his keeping, giving him as it were present possession of the kingdom,
+and the certain prospect of succession. Accordingly, on the 17th of
+October, Sultan Cuserou was delivered up as they desired, the soldiers
+of Anna-rah were discharged, and those of Asaph Khan placed over him,
+assisted by 200 horse belonging to the prince. The sister of Sultan
+Cuserou, and several other women in the seraglio, have put themselves in
+mourning, refuse to take their food, and openly exclaim against the
+dotage and cruelty of the king; declaring, if Cuserou should die, that
+an hundred of his kindred would devote themselves to the flames, in
+memory of the king's cruely to the worthiest of his sons.
+
+The king endeavoured to sooth them by fair words, protesting that he had
+no evil intentions towards his son, whom he promised speedily to deliver
+from captivity, and even sent his favourite Nourmahal to endeavour to
+appease the enraged and disconsolate ladies; but they refused to admit
+her visit, loading her with curses and threatnings. The common people
+universally condemn the king's conduct, saying, that he has not only
+delivered his son's life, but his own into the keeping of an ambitious
+prince and treacherous faction, and that Cuserou cannot perish without
+extreme scandal to his father, unless he amply revenge his death, for
+which cause the party will dispatch the king first, and his eldest son
+afterwards, that through their deaths the ambitious and unnatural
+Churrum may mount the throne. Every hour new rumours are spread of the
+deliverance of Cuserou, which are speedily contradicted; for he still
+remains in the tyger's den, refuses food, and requires that his father
+may take away his life, and not leave him to be a sport and prey to his
+inveterate enemies. The whole court is filled with rumours and secret
+whispers; the nobles are sad, and the people full of turmoil and noise,
+without any head, having no one to direct their rage to any specific
+object. The issue seems involved in dangers, especially for us, as, in
+regard to themselves, it matters not who wins. Although the elder prince
+have more right, and is of a more honourable character, he is still a
+Mahomedan, and can hardly be a better prince than his father, whose
+dispositions are good, yet so facile that he allows all to govern at
+their will, which is even worse than if he were a tyrant, for we had
+better suffer injuries from one prince than from a host of ministers and
+subordinate agents.
+
+The 19th of October _Mahomet Reza Beg_, the Persian ambassador, made his
+entry into the city with a great cavalcade, partly sent out by the king
+to meet him. There were at least an hundred elephants, with many
+musicians; but no man of quality went out on this occasion beyond the
+ordinary official receivers of strangers. His own train consisted of
+about fifty horse in splendid dresses of cloth of gold, their bows,
+quivers, and targets being richly adorned. Together with these he had
+about forty musqueteers, and about 200 ordinary _peons_ and attendants
+on his passage. He was conducted to a room within the outer court of the
+palace, to rest himself till the evening, at which time I sent my
+secretary to the durbar, to give me an account of the ceremonial. On
+coming into the presence, and reaching the first rail, he made three
+_tessalims_ and one _sizeda,_ which is prostrating himself and knocking
+his head three times against the ground. On entering within the rail he
+did the same, and then presented the letter of his master, _Shabas_,
+[Shah Abbas.] This the king took with a slight inclination of the body,
+saying only, _How doth my brother_? without using any title of majesty.
+After some few words, the ambassador was placed in the seventh rank,
+close to the rail beside the door, and below many of the king's
+servants, which, in my opinion, was a very mean place for the ambassador
+of Persia; but he richly merited this degradation for doing that mean
+reverence to the dishonour of his master which all his predecessors had
+refused, and by which he gave much offence to many of his nation. It is
+reported that he had orders from Shah Abbas to give content in all
+things, and hence it is conjectured that he is sent to obtain some aid
+in money against the Turks, in which kind the court of Persia often
+finds liberal succour from the Mogul government. Others pretend that his
+object is to mediate a peace for the princes of the Deccan, whose
+protection Shah Abbas is said to have much at heart, being jealous of
+the extension of this empire.
+
+According to custom, the king gave him a handsome turban, a vest of
+cloth of gold, and a girdle, for which he again made three _tessalims_
+and a _sizeda_, or ground courtesy. The present he brought consisted of
+three times nine Persian and Arabian horses, this being among them a
+ceremonious number; nine very large and handsome mules; seven camels
+laden with velvet; two suits of European _Arras_, or tapestry, which I
+suppose was Venetian; two chests of Persian hangings; one rich cabinet;
+four muskets; five clocks; a camel's load of cloth of gold; eight silk
+carpets; two balasss rubies; twenty-one camel loads of wine made of
+grapes; fourteen camel loads of distilled sweet waters; seven of
+rose-water; seven daggers and five swords adorned with precious stones;
+seven Venetian mirrors, all so fair and rich that I was ashamed of the
+relation.
+
+These presents were not now delivered, but only a list of them in
+writing. His own equipage was rich, having nine led horses, their
+trappings all studded with gold and silver. His turban was encircled by
+a chain of pearls, rubies, and turquoises, having three pipes of gold,
+in which were three plumes of feathers. Having thus caused accurate
+observation to be made of his reception, and compared it with my own, I
+find it in nothing more gracious than my own, and in many things
+inferior, except only in being met without the town, which, owing to my
+sickness, was not demanded; neither did the king receive the letter of
+Shah Abbas with so much respect as that of the king, my master, whom he
+called the king of England, his brother, naming the Persian barely his
+brother, without addition. This observation was made by the jesuit, who
+understood the language.
+
+Sec.5. _Continuation of Occurrences at Court, till leaving Agimere, in
+November_, 1616.
+
+The 20th of October I received the prince's letter to send to Sarat,
+with orders for the governor of that city to sit along with the judge
+of the custom-house, to take care that no wrong was done to the English.
+The clause about sending up the presents sealed and unsearched to me,
+was so obscure and unintelligible, that it was susceptible of various
+constructions, which I believed was done designedly, that they might
+come into the hands of the prince, so as to become his own. I sent it
+back therefore to his secretary to be altered; and getting it returned
+still more intricate than at first, I went to the prince on the 21st,
+and desired to have that clause of his letter explained, at which he
+stuck a little, and I perceived he was as hollow as I had imagined. He
+plainly asked, How then he should have his presents, or see such
+curiosities as came up? and proposed to accompany me to where they were.
+I answered, that I could not do this till I had delivered my master's
+message and presents to the king, after which I should wait upon his
+highness with his presents, and that every rarity that came to me should
+be sent after him. He pressed me to pass my word for the performance of
+this, which I did, and then I had the letter for Surat made out to my
+content.
+
+At this interview the prince observed a white feather in my hat, and
+asked if I would give it to him. I answered, that I could not presume to
+offer any thing I had worn; but if he were pleased to command it, that
+or any thing else in my power was at his service. He then asked if I had
+any more; to which I answered, that I had three or four others of
+different colours. He desired to have them all, as he was to shew his
+horses and servants to the king within two days, and wanted some, being
+rare in these parts. I therefore promised to bring all I had next day,
+when his highness might take what pleased him.
+
+This day Abdalla Khan waited on the prince with a gallant equipage,
+himself and servants being anticly apparelled, yet soldier-like,
+according to their fashion. On this occasion he made a present to the
+prince of a handsome white horse, full of spirit and high mettled, the
+saddle and furniture all ornamented with enamelled gold. The prince
+returned him a plain sword with a leathern belt. Many other swords were
+brought before him, the hilts and scabbards being of silver, set with
+small stones, together with targets covered with gold velvets, some
+painted and embossed with gold and silver, all of which he distributed
+among his servants. Against this muster many saddles and other
+horse-furniture were provided, richly ornamented with gold and precious
+stones, intended for spare horses. His boots were embroidered, and every
+thing was of the highest magnificence, so that the expence is
+wonderful, and the wealth seen daily is inestimable. There is a report
+going, that, on the past night, six of the servants of Sultan Churrum
+went to murder Sultan Cuserou, but were refused the key by the porter
+who has charge of him. It is farther said that the queen mother is gone
+to the king to lay before him an account of this matter. But the truth
+of these things is hard to be found, and it is dangerous to ask
+questions.
+
+In the evening I went to the durbar to wait upon the king, where I met
+the Persian ambassador with the first muster of his presents. He seemed
+a jester or juggler, rather than a person of any gravity, continually
+skipping up and down, and acting all his words like a mimic player, so
+that the _Atachikanne_ was converted as it were into a stage. He
+delivered all his presents with his own hand, which the king received
+with smiles and a chearful countenance, and many gracious words. His
+tongue was a great advantage to the Persian in delivering his own
+business, which he did with so much flattery and obsequiousness, that he
+pleased as much that way as by his gifts, constantly calling his majesty
+king and commander of the world, forgetting that his own master had a
+share of it; and on every little occasion of favourable acceptance, he
+made his _tessalims_. When all was delivered for that day, he prostrated
+himself on the ground, making _sizeda_, and knocking his head on the
+floor as if he would have entered it.
+
+The gifts this day were a handsome quiver for a bow and arrow, richly
+embroidered; all sorts of European fruits, artificially made, and laid
+on dishes; many folding purses, and other knacks, of leather, curiously
+wrought in coloured silks; shoes stitched and embroidered: great mirrors
+in richly inlaid frames; one square piece of velvet, highly embroidered
+with gold in panes, between which were Italian pictures wrought in the
+stuff, which he said were the king and queen of Venice, being, as I
+suppose, the hanging called Venetian tapestry, of which six were given,
+but only one shown. There were besides, many other curiosities of small
+value; after which came the three times nine horses and mules, the
+latter being very handsome, but the horses had lost their beauty and
+condition, as, except one or two, they were very unfit for being sent or
+accepted between princes. This done, the Persian returned, with many
+antic tricks, to his place, which was far inferior to mine, as I stood
+alone, and above all the subjects, though Asaph Khan at first wanted to
+put me from it, but I maintained it as my right, having been appointed
+me by the king. This was only the first act of the play presented by
+the Persian ambassador, which will not be finished in ten days.
+
+The 22d I went to the prince's secretary for the promised Surat letter;
+but his highness had changed his mind, and, loth to let the presents
+pass without ransacking them, refused to seal the letter. The secretary
+pretended they could not be allowed to pass without search, lest the
+merchants, under that pretence, might defraud the customs. I was
+offended, and going away; but the secretary prevailed on me to go with
+him to the prince, to whom I delivered some feathers, being two
+_plurides_ and two birds of paradise, which he graciously accepted; and
+having made known my determination not to have the presents opened, or
+to be sent up by any others than my own servants, he at last yielded,
+and commanded his secretary to make out the dispatch in my own way.
+
+At night I went to the durbar to observe the Persian ambassador, whom I
+found standing in his place, but often removed and set lower, as the
+great men came in. The king once spoke to him, on which he played off
+his monkey tricks, but gave no present; only the king gave command that
+he should be feasted by the nobles. Most of the time was spent in seeing
+saddles and furniture, against the removal of the court, some of which
+the king presented to his followers, as the court was daily expected to
+move; the king's tents having been pitched four days. I sent that night
+to the secretary for my firmaun, but was put off with excuses.
+
+The 24th the king removed to Havar Gemal, and called for the Persian
+ambassador, who at night eat and drank before the king along with the
+nobles, as I had done on the birth-day. On this occasion the king gave
+him 20,000 rupees for his expences, for which he made innumerable
+_tessalims_ and _sizedas_, which greatly pleased the king, being base
+yet profitable idolatry. As the prince was in attendance on the king, I
+could not get my business dispatched.
+
+The king returned to the city in the evening of the 25th, having been
+far gone in wine the night before. Some person, either by chance or from
+malice, spoke of the last merry night, when many of the nobles had drank
+wine, which none may do without leave. Having forgot his own order, the
+king demanded to know who gave? It was answered that it had been given
+by the _buxy_, as no one dared to say it was the king, seeing he doubted
+it. The custom is that the king drinks alone, though sometimes he will
+give command that the nobles shall drink also, which to refuse is
+likewise an offence, so every one who takes the cup of wine from the
+officer has his name written down, and makes _tessalim_, though perhaps
+the king's eyes are misty. The king called for the _buxy_, and asked if
+he gave the order, which he falsely denied; though he actually gave it
+as ordered, calling by name such as were to drink with the ambassador.
+The king then called for the list, and fined the delinquents, some 1000,
+some 2000, and others 3000 rupees. Some that were near his person, he
+caused to be whipped in his presence, receiving 130 stripes with a most
+terrible instrument of torture, having at the ends of four cords irons
+like spur-rowels, so that every stroke made four wounds. When they lay
+for dead, he commanded the standers-by to spurn them with their feet,
+and the door-keepers to break their staves upon them. Thus cruelly
+mangled and bruised, they were carried away, one of them dying on the
+spot. Some would have excused themselves, by blaming the ambassador; but
+the king said he had only ordered a cup or two to be given to him.
+Though drunkenness be a common and frequent vice in the king, it is yet
+strictly forbidden; and no one can enter the _guzelkhan_ where the king
+sits, till the porters have smelt his breath, and if he have only tasted
+wine he is refused admittance; and if this reason of his absence be
+known, he shall scarcely escape the whip. When the king has taken
+offence at any one, even a father dares not speak for his son. Thus the
+king made all the company pay for the Persian ambassador's reward.
+
+The 26th, I went to _Sorocolla_, the prince's secretary, to get the
+promised firmaun; when he sent me a copy as fraudulent and ambiguous as
+the former, which I refused to accept. I drew up the clause I so much
+disliked myself, which I sent back, and was promised to have it sealed
+next day.
+
+The day of the king's removal being at hand, I sent on the 28th to Asaph
+Khan, to have a warrant for carriages, as our merchants had sought all
+over the town for carriages to convey their goods to Agra, and could not
+procure any. As I was enrolled by the king, I received an order for
+twenty camels, four carts, and two coaches, to be paid for at the
+king's price; of which I appointed for the use of the factors as many as
+they needed.
+
+At this time the following incident took place, being either a wonderful
+instance of baseness in this great monarch, or a trial of my
+disposition. The king had condemned several thieves to death, among whom
+were some boys, and there was no way to save their lives, except by
+selling them as slaves. On this occasion, the king commanded Asaph Khan
+to offer two of them to me for money, which he directed to be done by
+the _cutwall_, or marshal. He came accordingly and made the offer to my
+interpreter, who answered without my knowledge, that the Christians kept
+no slaves, and, as I had already set free those the king had given me,
+it was in vain to propose the matter to me. I afterwards suspected this
+were done to try me whether I would give a little money to save the
+lives of two children, or, if it even were in earnest, I thought there
+was no great loss in doing a good deed. So, to try the scope of this
+affair, I directed my interpreter to inform Asaph Khan, that being made
+acquainted with the offer, and the answer my interpreter had given, I
+had reprehended him for presuming in any case to answer for me; and
+that, if any money were to be given to save the lives of the children,
+either to those whom they had robbed, or to redeem them from the law, I
+was ready to give it, both out of respect for the king's command, and
+for charity; but I would not buy them as slaves, only meaning to pay
+their ransom, and set them free; and, if he would let me know the king's
+pleasure, that I might give them their lives and liberties without
+offence, I was very willing to do it.
+
+Asaph Khan agreed to accept the money, making many commendations of my
+extraordinary goodness, and said I might dispose of the boys as I
+thought fit, desiring me to send the money to the _cutwall_, yet made no
+offer of informing the king, which was one chief purpose of my
+liberality. I had no inclination to be cheated, yet resolved to pay the
+money in such a way that the king should learn I had more mercy than he,
+and that a Christian valued the life of a Mahomedan beyond money. I sent
+therefore a factor and my interpreter to the _cutwall_, to acquaint him
+with my communication to Asaph Khan, and that, if he informed the king
+of my offer to redeem the prisoners for charity, and his majesty
+consented to give them their pardon and liberty, I was ready to send
+the money; but that I would not buy them as slaves, even for an hour.
+Thus I put them to the test as to their base offer. This sum did not
+exceed ten pounds, a poor affair for which to impose upon a stranger, or
+to be gained by so great a king. The _cutwall_ answered that he would
+enquire the king's pleasure, and let me know the result. Some would have
+me believe, that this was, a signal favour of the king, chusing out any
+great man to do this good and honourable work of redeeming prisoners, as
+the money is given in satisfaction to the person robbed, and that those
+who are thus appointed to ransom them, make _sizeda_ to the king, as for
+a mighty benefit. But I see no honour in a king thus to impose upon a
+stranger, to whom he gives neither maintenance nor liberality. I went to
+the durbar, to see if the king would himself speak to me, that I might
+declare my own offer. The _cutwall_ made many motions, and brought in
+his executioner, who received some commands, but I understood them not.
+
+I this day sent my secretary with a message to the Persian ambassador,
+to say I would visit him, if he gave his word to return my visit. He
+sent me for answer, with much respect, that it was not the custom of the
+country for ambassadors to visit each, other without leave of the king,
+which he would ask; and which given, he would thankfully accept my
+visit, and repay it with all manner of pleasure.
+
+On the 1st November, Sultan Churrum took his leave and went to his
+tents. On this occasion the king sat in his durbar at noon, when the
+prince passed his establishment in review before his father, consisting
+of about 600 elephants richly caparisoned, and about 10,000 horse, all
+splendidly arrayed, many of his followers being clad in cloth of gold,
+and their turbans adorned with herons plumes. The prince himself was in
+a dress of cloth of silver, all over embroidered, and splendidly
+decorated with pearls and diamonds, shining like the firmament in a
+clear night. The king embraced and kissed him with much affection,
+presenting him with a rich sword, the hilt and scabbard all of gold set
+with precious stones, valued at 100,000 rupees, a dagger valued at
+40,000, together with an elephant, and a horse, the furniture of both
+magnificently adorned with gold and jewels. At his departure, he gave
+him a coach, made in imitation of that sent by the king my master to the
+emperor, and commanded the English coachman to drive the prince to the
+tents. Churrum went accordingly into the coach, sitting in the middle
+thereof, all the sides being open; and was attended by all his chief
+nobles a-foot, all the way to the camp, which was about four miles.
+Being followed by a vast concourse of people, he scattered all the way
+among them handfuls of quarter rupees. At one time he reached his hand
+to the coachman, and put about 100 rupees into his hat.
+
+On the 2d, the king removed, with his women and all the court, to the
+tents, about three miles from town. I went that morning to attend upon
+him at the _Jarruco_ window of the palace, and went up to the scaffold
+under the window, being desirous to see this exhibition. Two eunuchs
+stood upon tressels, having long poles headed with feathers, with which
+they fanned him. On this occasion, he dispensed many favours, and
+received many presents. What he gave was let down by a silk cord, rolled
+on a turning instrument; and what he received was drawn up in the same
+manner, by a venerable, fat, and deformed old matron, all hung round
+with _gymbals_ like an image. Two of his principal wives were at a
+window on one side, whose curiosity led them to break holes in a lattice
+of roods that hung before the window, to gaze on me. At first I only saw
+their fingers; and afterwards, applying their faces to the holes, I
+could at times see an eye, and at length could discern their entire
+countenances. They were indifferently fair, having their black hair
+smoothed up from their foreheads; and they were so adorned with pearls
+and diamonds, that I might have seen them without the help of any other
+light. On my looking at them, they retired very merry, and, as I
+supposed, laughing at me.
+
+After some time, the king departed from the window, and we all went to
+the durbar, to wait his coming out of the inner apartments. He came not
+long after, and remained in the durbar for about half an hour, till his
+ladies had mounted their elephants, which were in all about fifty, all
+richly caparisoned, especially three, which had turrets or _howders_ of
+gold, with grates of gold wire for the ladies to see through, and rich
+canopies over head of cloth of silver. The king then descended the
+stairs, amid such acclamations of _health to the king_, as would have
+drowned the noise of cannon. At the foot of the stairs, where I
+contrived to be near him, a person brought to him a large carp, and
+another presented a dish of some white stuff like starch, into which the
+king dipped his finger, with which he touched the fish, and then rubbed
+it on his forehead. This ceremony was said to presage good fortune. Then
+came another officer, who buckled on his sword and buckler, all set with
+large diamonds and rubies. Another hung on his quiver with thirty
+arrows, and his bow-case, being that which had been presented by the
+Persian ambassador. On his head, the king wore a rich turban, with a
+plume of heron's crests, not many but long: On one side hung a rich
+unset ruby as large as a walnut; on the other side a diamond of equal
+size; and in the middle an emerald much larger, shaped like a heart. His
+sash was wreathed about with a chain of great pearls, rubies, and
+diamonds, drilled. A triple chain of excellent pearls, the largest I had
+ever seen, hung round his neck. He had armlets above his elbows, richly
+set with diamonds; and three rows of diamonds round each wrist. His
+hands were bare, having a rich ring on almost every finger; and a pair
+of English gloves were stuck into his girdle. His coat, without sleeves,
+was of cloth of gold, over a fine robe as thin as lawn. On his feet he
+wore buskins embroidered with pearls, the toes being sharp and turned
+up.
+
+Thus richly accoutred, he went into the coach, which waited for him
+under the care of his new English servant, who was dressed as gaudily as
+any player, and more so, and had trained four horses for the draught,
+which were trapped and harnessed all in velvet and gold. This was the
+first coach he had ever been in, made in imitation of that sent from
+England, and so like it that I only knew the difference by the cover,
+which was of gold velvet of Persia. Having seated himself at one end,
+two eunuchs attended at each side, carrying small golden maces set all
+over with rubies, to which horse-tails were fastened, for driving away
+flies. Before him went drums, bad trumpets, and loud music; with many
+canopies, parasols, and other strange ensigns of majesty, all of cloth
+of gold, and adorned with rubies. Nine spare horses were led before him,
+some having their furniture garnished with rubies, some with pearls, and
+others with diamonds, while some had only plain gold studs. Next behind
+the coach came three palanquins, the carriages and feet of one being
+plated with gold, set with pearls, and a fringe of great pearls in
+strings a foot long, the border being set all round with rubies and
+emeralds. Beside this, a man on foot carried a stool of gold, set with
+precious stones. The other two palanquins were covered and lined with
+cloth of gold.
+
+Next followed the English coach, newly covered and richly trimmed, which
+he had given to his favourite queen, Nourmahal, who sat in the inside.
+After this came a coach, made after the fashion of the country, which I
+thought seemed out of countenance, in which were his younger sons. This
+was followed by about twenty spare royal elephants, all for the king's
+own use, all so splendidly adorned with precious stones and rich
+furniture, that they outshone the sun. Each elephant had several flags
+and streamers of cloth of silver, gilded sattin, or rich silk. His
+noblemen accompanied him on foot, which I did likewise to the gate, and
+then left him. His women, who accompanied him on elephants, as before
+mentioned, seemed like so many parroquitos in cages, and followed about
+half a mile in the rear of his coach. On coming to the door of the house
+in which his eldest son was kept prisoner, he caused the coach to stop,
+and sent for prince Cuserou; who immediately came and made reverence,
+having a sword and buckler in his hands, and his beard grown to his
+middle, in sign of disfavour. The king now commanded his son to mount
+one of the spare elephants in the royal train, so that he rode next his
+father, to the great joy and applause of the multitude, who were now
+filled with new hopes; and on this occasion, the king gave him 1000
+rupees to throw among the people; his gaoler, Asaph Khan, and all the
+ministers, being still attendant on foot.
+
+To avoid the press and other inconveniences, I took horse and crossed
+out of the _leskar_, getting before the king, and then waited for him
+till he came near his tents, to which he passed all the way from the
+town between a guard of turreted elephants, having each on the four
+corners of their howdars a banner of yellow taffety, and a _sling_[208]
+mounted in front, carrying a bullet as big as a tennis-ball. There were
+about three hundred elephants armed in this manner, each having a
+gunner; besides about six hundred other elephants of honour, that
+preceded or followed the king, all covered with velvet or cloth of gold,
+and all carrying two or three gilded banners. Many men afoot ran before
+the king, carrying skins of water with which to sprinkle the road to
+prevent dust from annoying him; and no one was allowed to approach the
+coach on horseback by two furlongs.
+
+[Footnote 208: The sling in the text appears to have been a _slung_
+musquetoon, or small cannon, mounted in that manner to avoid
+recoil.--E.]
+
+Having gone before a-horseback, as before mentioned, I hastened to the
+tents, to await the king's arrival. The royal encampment was walled
+round, half a mile in circuit, in form of a fortress, with high screens
+or curtains of coarse stuff; somewhat like Arras hangings, red on the
+outside, the inside being divided into panes or compartments, with a
+variety of figures. This inclosure had a handsome gateway, and the
+circuit was formed into various coins and bulwarks, as it were; the
+posts which supported the curtains being all surmounted with brass tops.
+The throng was very great, and I wished to have gone into the enclosure,
+but no one was allowed, even the greatest of the land having to sit down
+at the gate. At length I was admitted, but the Persian ambassador and
+all the nobles were refused. At this gate, and for the first time, I was
+saluted by the Persian ambassador as I passed, by a silent _salam_.
+
+In the midst of this enclosure, there stood a throne of mother-of-pearl,
+borne aloft on two pillars, under cover of a high tent or pavilion, the
+pole of which was headed by a golden knob, the roof being of cloth of
+gold, and the ground covered by carpets. When the king came near,
+several noblemen were admitted, together with the Persian ambassador;
+all of us making a kind of lane, the ambassador being on one side, and I
+on the other. As the king came in, he cast his eye on me, whereupon I
+made him a reverence, to which he answered by bowing and laying his hand
+on his breast. Turning to the other side, he nodded to the Persian. I
+followed close at his heels till he ascended the throne, every one
+calling out, _joy, health, and good fortune_. The king then called for
+water, with which he washed his hands, and then retired into an interior
+tent, to join his women, who had entered by another gate to their own
+quarters; there being about thirty divisions with tents within the royal
+inclosure. His son I saw not. All the noblemen now retired to their
+quarters, which were all very handsome, some having their tents green,
+others white, and others again of mixed colours, all handsome in form
+and arrangement, and all as orderly inclosed as their houses in the
+city, so that the whole composed the most curious and magnificent sight
+I had ever beheld. The whole vale seemed like a magnificent city, no
+mean tents or baggage being allowed to mix among these splendid
+pavilions. I was utterly unprovided with carriages or tent, and ashamed
+of my situation, for indeed five years of my allowances would not have
+enabled me to take the field any thing like the others; every one having
+a double set of pavilions, one of which goes before to the next station,
+where it is set up a day before the king removes. On this account, I was
+obliged to return to my poor house in the town.
+
+On the 5th November I rode about five miles, to the tents of the prince,
+Sultan Churrum. I made him my compliments of leave taking, wishing him
+all prosperity and success; but he ordered me to return and take my
+leave two days afterwards, as I had moved him on some business,
+respecting debts due to the English, which he promised to examine and
+dispatch. He sat in state, in the same greatness and magnificence I have
+mentioned of his father; his throne being plated all over with silver,
+inlaid with gold flowers, having a square canopy over head, borne up by
+four pillars covered with silver; his arms, such as his sword, buckler,
+bows, arrows, and lance, being on a table before his throne. I observed
+him curiously, now that he was in absolute authority, and took especial
+notice of his actions and behaviour. He had just received two letters,
+which he read standing, before he ascended his throne. I never saw any
+one having so settled a countenance, or maintain a so constant gravity
+of deportment, never once smiling, or shewing by his looks any respect
+or distinction of persons, but evincing an extreme pride and thorough
+contempt for all around him. Yet I could perceive that he was every now
+and then assailed by some inward trouble, and a kind of distraction and
+brokenness in his thoughts, as he often answered suitors in a disjointed
+manner, as if surprised, or not hearing what they had said. If I can
+judge, he has left his heart among his father's women, with whom he is
+allowed to converse. The day before, Noormahal went to visit him in the
+English coach; and, on taking leave of him, she presented him with a
+robe, all embroidered with diamonds, rubies, and pearls; and, if I do
+not mistake, she carried away with her all his attentions from other
+business.
+
+The 6th I had a letter from Mr Brown at Ahmedabad, giving an account of
+a fray begun by the Portuguese. Five of them assailed an English boy at
+Cambay, whose arms they took from him. On notice of this, John Brown and
+James Bickeford went to rescue the boy, and were set upon by seven
+Portuguese, one of whom fired a pistol and wounded Brown in the hand.
+They defended themselves bravely and honourably like Englishmen, killed
+one, wounded some others, and chaced the rest up and down the town like
+cowards, to the great shame of such villains, and the reputation of our
+nation. To revenge this, the Portuguese came ashore in considerable
+numbers from their frigates, no more English being in the town except
+the three already mentioned. The governor, being informed of this
+affair, sent the cutwall with a guard to our house, and ordered the
+water port to be shut, expelling the Portuguese from the town, and
+commanding them, on pain of chastisement, not to meddle with the
+English, whom he dismissed in safety from Cambay, and they are now
+returned to Ahmedabad.
+
+The 9th, the prince being to remove, sent one of his guards for me in
+haste. I was not prepared for going, but the messenger pressed me,
+urging that his master waited for me, and he had orders not to return
+without me. He added, that the whole court talked of the prince's favour
+for me, and it was reported he had asked leave from the king for me to
+accompany him to the war, and had promised to use me so well that I
+should be forced to acknowledge his favour to our nation. I accordingly
+took horse after dinner; but on my arrival, I found the prince already
+under march. I met a Dutchman, the prince's jeweller, who confirmed
+every thing the soldier had said, and added so much more in the same
+strain, that I disbelieved the whole. I sent word to the prince of my
+arrival, when he returned for answer, That I should go on before to the
+tents, and wait his arrival, when he would speak with me. It was night
+when he came. He sat a short while, only giving me a look, and arose to
+retire among his women. As he passed, he sent a servant to desire me to
+wait a little, till he came out to hold his guzalcan, when he should
+take leave of me.
+
+He came out in half an hour, but I could not get any one to remind him
+of me, and he was fallen to play, and either forgot me, or proposed to
+play me a state trick. I then told the waiters, that I had been sent for
+by the prince, and only waited his orders, for which I had too long
+waited, as it was late, and I must return to my house; and therefore, if
+the prince had any business for me, I desired it might be sent after me,
+as I scorned to be so used. Before I could mount, messengers came
+running after me, and called me back to wait upon the prince. Going in,
+I found him earnestly engaged at cards, but he excused himself of
+forgetfulness, blaming the officers formally for not reminding him, and
+shewed more than ordinary attention, calling me to see his cards, and
+asking me many questions. I expected he would have spoken of my going
+along with him; but, finding no such discourse, I told him I had come
+only in obedience to his commands, and to take my leave, and craved his
+pardon for being in haste, as I had to return to Agimere, having no
+convenience for staying all night in camp. He answered, that he had sent
+to speak with me before his departure, and that I should be presently
+dispatched. He then sent in an eunuch into the interior apartments, and
+several of his officers came to me smiling, who said that the prince
+meant to give me a magnificent present, and if I feared to ride late, I
+should have a guard of ten horsemen to see me safe home, making as much
+of the matter as if I had been to get his best chain of pearls. By and
+by came a cloak of cloth of gold, which the prince had once or twice
+worn, which he caused to be put on me, and for which I made my reverence
+very unwillingly; yet I urged some business, and having an answer, took
+my leave. It is here reputed the highest favour, to give one a garment
+that has been worn by a prince, or that has merely been laid on their
+shoulders. The cloak now given me might have answered well for an actor
+who had to represent the character of his ancestor, Tamerlane, on the
+stage, but was to me of no importance. On my way out, I was followed by
+his porters and waiters, begging in a most shameless manner, so that I
+half paid the value of the cloak before I could get out from among them.
+
+On the 10th November, almost every body had removed from the town of
+Agimere, so that I was left nearly alone, and could neither get carts
+nor camels for my removal, notwithstanding my warrant. The Persian
+ambassador was in a similar predicament, but complained, and was soon
+redressed. I therefore sent to court, and on the 11th I received two
+warrants, for being supplied with carts and camels at the king's price:
+but it was not easy to procure either, as the great men had soldiers in
+every direction, to take up all for their use; and indeed it was
+wonderful, how two leskars or camps, belonging to the king and prince,
+could both remove at once.
+
+The 16th, an order was given by the king to set fire to the whole leskar
+at Agimere, that the people might be compelled to follow, which was duly
+executed. I was left almost destitute; and the Persian ambassador, who
+had fought, chid, brawled, and complained, without any remedy, was in
+the same state with me. We sent messages of condolence to each other;
+and, by his example, I resolved to buy, as many were disposed to sell,
+who would not hire at the king's price, and I calculated that by
+purchasing I should almost save hire, though carts were dear, as the
+hire of three months would have exhausted the price of purchase.
+Necessity enforced me to remove, as the town was burnt and utterly
+desolate, and I was in great danger from thieves, as the soldiers came
+from camp and robbed during the night. So desolate was the town, that I
+could not even procure bread. Yet I sent again to court, to make one
+trial more, before I purchased.
+
+The 17th I received accounts from Goa, which were said to be true, that
+Don Emanuel de Meneses, with about 300 of those who were saved ashore
+out of the Admiral, had arrived at Goa in a very poor condition, having
+been robbed and plundered by the inhabitants of Angazesia, who had also
+slain many. On the 24th October, not one of the Lisbon fleet had reached
+Goa, to their great wonder and disappointment. The Mosambique galleon
+was fought with by the Hollanders that lately went from Surat, and had
+cruised off Goa to meet the expected ships. This galleon was very rich
+in gold and other commodities, but she escaped.
+
+I received an order for camels and carriages, but was continually
+delayed and disappointed; and being afraid to remain, I bought two
+carts, and was continually promised camels, yet none appeared. Mr
+Bidulph remained in the prince's leskar to receive money. The leskar of
+the king was still only twelve cosses from Agimere. The 18th, the
+Portuguese Jesuit took leave of me, being under the necessity of
+purchasing a carriage, although he had an order for one out of the
+king's store; but every one was distressed, owing to the scarcity.
+Having nothing material to say, respecting my own affairs, during my
+solitude at Agimere, I shall here digress, to mention the state of
+Sultan Cuserou, of whose new delivery into the hands of his enemies, the
+hearts and mouths of all men were now full.
+
+Though the king had so far condescended to satisfy his proud son Churrum
+at his departure, as again to place Cuserou in confinement, yet it seems
+that he did not mean to wink at any injurious behaviour to his eldest
+son: And, partly to render his situation the more secure, in the custody
+of Asaph Khan, and partly to satisfy the murmurs of the people, who
+feared some treachery against him, he took occasion to declare his mind
+respecting him in the public durbar. Asaph Khan had been to visit his
+new prisoner, and in his behaviour towards him, did not treat him with
+the respect due to a prince, but rudely pressed into his presence
+against his will, and in a disrespectful manner. Some are of opinion he
+did this purposely to pick a quarrel, knowing the bravery of the prince,
+who would not suffer an indignity, meaning to tempt him to draw his
+sword, or to use some violence, which the guard might suddenly revenge;
+or that he might have opportunity to represent to the king, that the
+prince had attempted to kill his keeper, on purpose to escape. But the
+prince acted with patient prudence, and only procured a friend to
+acquaint the king with the rude behaviour of Asaph Khan. Accordingly,
+one day at the durbar, the king called Asaph Khan before him, and asked
+when he had seen his charge? To which he answered, he had seen him two
+days before. The king then asked, What he had then done to him? He said
+he had only visited him. But the king pressed to know what reverence and
+fashion he had carried towards the prince. Asaph Khan then saw that the
+king knew what had passed. He therefore said, That he had gone to wait
+upon the prince, in all reverence and affection, to offer his service,
+but that the prince refused him admittance into the apartment;
+wherefore, as he was entrusted with his safety, he thought it both
+necessary for him to see the prince, and discourteous in him to deny,
+and had therefore pressed in. On this, the king quickly asked, "And when
+you were in, what did you say and do?" Asaph Khan stood confounded, and
+confessed that he did not make any reverence. Whereupon, the king told
+him roundly, "That he would make his proud heart know the prince as his
+eldest and beloved heir, and his prince and lord; and, if he ever heard
+again of the smallest disrespect or want of duty in his behaviour
+towards the prince, he would command his son to trample him under his
+feet." He added, that he loved his son Prince Churrum, yet did not
+entrust his eldest son Cuserou among them for his ruin and destruction.
+
+The 20th I received a new warrant for carriages, which procured me eight
+camels, but such poor ones as were quite unable to suffice for our
+baggage, and I was therefore under the necessity of purchasing the rest.
+The 22d I removed to my tents. The 23d and 24th I waited for the
+merchants; and on the latter of these days I had a letter from Ispahan,
+saying that my letters had been dispatched for Aleppo, and that we were
+expected in Persia, but on condition that we seconded the wishes of Shah
+Abbas, by diverting the sale of his silks from Turkey. My letters added,
+that the general of the Turks lay with a mighty army at _Argerone_,
+[Arzerom,] six days march short of Tauris, as if uncertain whether to
+attack that city, or to enter Gurgestan and Gilan, the provinces in
+which silk is produced, so as to win that by conquest which was refused
+in the way of trade. To guard against both attempts, Shah Abbas was
+encamped at _Salmas_, whence he could march either way as might be
+required. But, it was farther said, if the armies did not come to battle
+in two months, the approach of winter, and the wants attendant on such
+numerous bodies of men, would constrain both to quit the field. It is
+thought the Persians will not adventure a battle, though 180,000 strong,
+as, being light, and unencumbered with cannon or baggage, they are
+fitted for rapid marches, and can harass the Turkish army with perpetual
+skirmishes and assaults on all sides, hovering round about, and wasting
+them, without hazard to themselves.
+
+Sec.6. _Sir Thomas Roe follows the Progress of the Court, and describes the
+King's Leskar, and some Places through which he passed; with instances
+of the King's Superstition and Drunkenness, and some curious Incidents
+respecting a Present_.
+
+The 25th of November I removed four cosses from Agimere, but waited
+during the remainder of that month, for the arrival of a caravan, going
+from Agra to Surat, by which I might transmit my papers in safety. The
+caravan departed from Agimere at midnight of the 30th November: and on
+the 1st December I went six cosses to Ramsor, where the king had left
+the naked bodies of an hundred men, put to death for robbery. The 2d I
+travelled seven c. I rested the 3d, because of rain. The 4th I went five
+c. and this day I overtook a camel, laden with 300 heads, sent from
+Candahar to the king, the people to whom these heads had belonged having
+been in rebellion. Travelling five c. on the 5th, and four c. on the
+6th, I that day overtook the king at a walled town called _Todah_, in
+the best and most populous country I had seen in India since I landed.
+The district was quite level, having a fertile soil, abounding in corn,
+cotton, and cattle, and the villages were so numerous and near together,
+as hardly to exceed a coss from each other in any direction. This town
+was the best built of any I had seen in India, many of the houses being
+two stories high, and most of them good enough for decent shop-keepers,
+all covered with tiles. It had been the residence of a Rajput rajah,
+before the conquests of Akbar Shah, and stood at the foot of a great and
+strong rock, about which were many excellent works of hewn stone, well
+cut, with many tanks, arched over with well-turned vaults, and large and
+deep descents to them. Near it was a beautiful grove, two miles long and
+a quarter of a mile broad, all planted with mangoes, tamarinds, and
+other fruit-trees, divided by shady walks, and interspersed with little
+temples, and idol altars, with many fountains, wells, and summer-houses
+of carved stone curiously arched, so that I must confess a poor banished
+Englishman might have been content to dwell here. But this observation
+may serve universally for the whole of this country, that ruin and
+devastation operates every where; for, since the property of all has
+become vested in the king, no person takes care of any thing, so that in
+every place the spoil and devastations of war appear, and no where is
+any thing repaired.
+
+On the 7th the king only removed from one side of Todah to the other.
+The 8th I was at the guzalcan, but found the king so nearly drunk, that
+he became entirely so in half an hour, so that I could not have any
+business with him. The 9th I took a view of the royal _leskar_, or camp,
+which is one of the greatest wonders I had ever seen, and chiefly as I
+saw it finished and set up in less than four hours, all except the tents
+of some of the great men, who have double suits. It could not well be
+less in circuit than twenty English miles, the extent in some directions
+being three cosses, including the out-skirts. In the middle, where the
+streets are orderly and the tents joined, there are all sorts of shops,
+so regularly disposed, that all persons know where to go for any thing
+they want. Every man of quality, and every trade, is regularly appointed
+how far they are to be from the king's tents, in what direction, and
+what ground they shall occupy, which continues ever the same without
+alteration. All this may equal almost any town in Europe for size. But
+no person must approach on any side within a musket shot of the
+_atoskanha_, or royal quarter, which is so strictly observed that no one
+is ever admitted but by name. The evening durbar is omitted, the time
+being spent by the king in hunting or hawking rather, on tanks, by means
+of boats, in which he takes great delight, his barges being moved along
+with the leskar on carts. On these occasions he sits by the sides of the
+tanks, to view the sport, these tanks being often a mile or two over.
+The king is seen every morning at the _Jaruco_, formerly mentioned; but
+business or speaking to him at this time is prohibited; all business
+being conducted at night in the _guzalcan_, and there the opportunity is
+often missed, his majesty being so frequently overcome by drowsiness,
+proceeding from drunkenness.
+
+There was now a whisper about the court of a new affinity between Sultan
+Cuserou and Asaph Khan, and great hope was entertained of the prince
+recovering his liberty. I will find an opportunity to discourse of this
+hereafter, because the particulars are worthy of being preserved, as the
+wisdom and goodness of the king were manifest above the malice of
+others: And, in this affair, Noormahal made good the observation, that
+women have always great influence in court factions, and she shewed that
+they are not incapable of managing business. This history will discover
+a noble prince, an excellent wife, a faithful counsellor, a crafty
+step-mother, an ambitious son, a cunning favourite; all reconciled by a
+patient king, whose heart was not understood by any of them all. But
+this will require a separate place,[209] as not fit to be mingled with
+matters of ordinary business. At this time the English complained of
+being ill used at Surat; but their drunkenness, and riotous behaviour
+proceeding from that cause, were so notorious, that it was rather
+wonderful they were not all put to death.
+
+[Footnote 209: This story does not however appear, the journal of Sir
+Thomas Roe being left imperfect, both in the Pilgrims and in the
+Collection of Churchill.--E.]
+
+The 16th of December I visited the king, who was just returned from his
+sports, having all his game laid out before him, both fish and fowl. He
+desired me to take my choice, and then distributed all the rest among
+his nobles. I found him sitting on his throne, having a beggar at his
+feet, a poor silly old man, all in rags and ashes, attended on by a
+young one. The country abounds in these professed poor and holy men, who
+are held in great reverence, and who, in voluntary sufferings and
+mortified chastisements of their bodies, exceed all the boasted
+performances of heretics and idolaters in all ages and countries. With
+this miserable wretch, who was cloathed in rags, crowned with feathers,
+and covered, with filth, his majesty conversed for about an hour, with
+such kindness, as shewed a humility not common among kings. All this
+time the beggar sat before the king, which is not even permitted to his
+son. The beggar gave the king as a present, a cake made by himself of
+coarse grain, burnt on the coals, and all foul with ashes; which yet the
+king accepted, broke off a piece and eat it, which a dainty person would
+hardly have done. He then wrapt up the rest in a clout, and put it into
+the poor man's bosom, and sending for 100 rupees, he poured them into
+the beggar's lap, gathering up with his own hands any that fell past,
+and giving them to him. When his collation or banquet was brought in,
+whatsoever he took to eat, he gave half of to the beggar. Rising, after
+many humiliations and charities, and the old wretch not being nimble, he
+took him up in his arms, though a dainty person would have scrupled to
+touch him, and embraced him three times, laying his hand on his heart
+and calling him father, and so left him, all of us greatly admiring such
+virtue in a heathen prince. This I mention with emulation and sorrow;
+wishing, as we have the true vine, that we should not produce bastard
+grapes, or that this zeal in an unbeliever were guided by the true light
+of the gospel.
+
+The 23d, being about three cosses short of a city called _Rantepoor_,
+[Rantampoor,] where it was supposed the king would rest, and consult
+what way to take in his farther progress, he suddenly turned off towards
+_Mundu_, but without declaring his purpose. I am of opinion, he took
+this way for fear of the plague at Agra, rather than from any purpose of
+being near the army; for we only marched every other day no more than
+four cosses, and with such a train of baggage as was almost impossible
+to be kept in any degree of order.
+
+The 26th we passed through woods and over mountains, torn with bushes
+and tired by the incommodiousness of an almost impassable way, in which
+many camels perished, and many persons, wearied of these difficulties,
+went away to Agra, and all complained. In this laborious day's march, I
+lost my tents and carts, but by midnight I again fell in with them. The
+king now rested two days, as the leskar could not again recover its
+order in less time; many of the king's women, and thousands of camels,
+carts, and coaches, being left in the woody mountains, where they could
+neither procure food nor water. The king himself got through upon a
+small elephant, which beast can climb up rocks, and get through such
+difficult passes, that no horse or other animal I have seen can follow.
+The 29th we encamped beside the river _Chambet_, [Chumbull.]
+
+The first of January, 1617, I complained to Asaph Khan of the injuries
+offered to the English at Surat, though I was at the same time much
+perplexed by various relations, giving me a bad account of the
+disorderly and outrageous behaviour of my countrymen. Asaph Khan advised
+me not to carry my complaint to the king, which would incense the
+prince; but desired me to ask leave of his majesty to go to visit Sultan
+Churrum, with a letter from him recommending the dispatch of my
+business, and good usage to our nation; so that, carrying a present to
+the prince, I should please both, and succeed in my business. This was
+the same plan I had already formed, and therefore pleased me the better;
+more especially as the king now certainly designed to go forwards to
+Mundu, which is only eight days journey from Burhanpoor, where the
+prince was; and I thought I might as well ride over to him, as remain
+idle in the fields. At noon this day I visited the Persian ambassador,
+being the first time we had leisure for this ceremony, and was received
+by him with much respectful civility. After compliments on both sides
+were over, I proposed to him the settlement of trade in his master's
+dominions, which he engaged to promote as much as lay in his power. He
+gave me a banquet of bad fruit, but being a good fellow, it went off
+well, and he outdid in courtesy every thing I had met with in India. He
+railed loudly against the court, and the king's officers and council,
+using most unusual liberty. He offered to be my interpreter, desiring
+that I might pitch my tents beside his, and he would impart whatever I
+thought proper to the king. When about to part, after long discourse, he
+pressed me to accept a horse with handsome furniture, which was brought
+to the door, but I refused. He then sent for nine pieces of Persian
+silks, and nine bottles of wine, that I might not depart without some
+testimony of his love, but these also I refused to accept, with many
+protestations of affectionate regard. I observed him looking earnestly
+at my sword, which I offered to give him; but, following my example, he
+refused.
+
+At night I visited the king, who spent his time sadly with an old man,
+after reading long letters, and few spoke with him. At his rising, he
+presented to this person, who was a cripple from age, 5000 rupees, and
+took his leave of him with many embraces. I here again met the Persian
+ambassador, who, after some compliments, repenting that he had refused
+my sword, and having a liking to it, now asked it from me, saying, that
+such liberty among friends was reckoned good manners in his country. We
+continued to remove four or five c. every other day, and came on the 7th
+to the goodly river _Shind_. The 18th, the king passed through between
+two mountains, the road having been cut through the woods, but with so
+much trouble and difficulty, and so much encumbrance to the baggage,
+that it was left behind, without provisions for man and beast. This day
+likewise I lost my tents and baggage, but found them again at midnight,
+having been obliged till then to take up my lodging under a tree. This
+part of the country is much infested by thieves, and is hardly under
+obedience to government, except so far as it is kept under by force. It
+belongs to a rajah, who has no desire to see the king. The exactor
+complained, and some few of the people that fled being taken, were
+chained by the neck and brought before the king, all the rest having
+fled into the mountains. At night the king caused the town near which he
+was encamped to be set on fire, appointing a new governor, with orders
+to re-build and new-people the town, and to reduce the district under
+more regular government and better civilization. He left a party of
+horse with the new governor, to enable him to perform this service.
+
+On the 20th, the people who had fled to the mountains, being enraged at
+the burning of their town, set upon a number of stragglers who had been
+left behind, killing many of them, and plundering the rest. The 22d,
+having no accounts of the presents I expected from Surat, I went at
+night to visit the king, to observe how he might receive me. I found him
+seated in an unusual manner, so that I knew not what place to occupy,
+and not willing to mix among the great men, as was offered me, and
+doubting whether I might go into the apartment where the king was, which
+was cut down in the bank of a river, I went to the brink and stood
+alone. There were none near the king, except _Etiman Dowlet_ his
+father-in-law, Asaph Khan, and three or four others. The king observed
+me, and having allowed me to stay a while, he called me in with a
+gracious smile, and pointed with his hand for me to stand beside him, a
+favour so unusual, that it pleased and honoured me, and of which I soon
+experienced the good effects, in the behaviour of the great men of the
+court. He led me to talk with him, and when I called for an interpreter,
+he refused it, pressing me to use such Persian words as I had learnt.
+Our discourse, in consequence, had not much sense or coherence, yet he
+was pleased with it, and shewed his approbation in a very courteous
+manner.
+
+On the 24th of January, news came to court, that the Deccaners were not
+to be frightened out of their dominions, as had been pretended by Asaph
+Khan and Noormahal, on purpose to persuade the king into this
+expedition. For they had sent off all their baggage and other
+impediments into the interior of their country, and lay upon the
+frontiers with 50,000 horse, resolved to fight in defence of their
+dominions; while Sultan Churrum had hitherto advanced no farther than
+Mundu, afraid both of the enemy and Khan Khana. The king's councellors
+now changed their advice, declaring that they expected the Deccaners
+would have been so alarmed by his majesty's passage over the last hills,
+as to have submitted at the terror of his approach; and as they now
+found the contrary, they advised the king to convert his journey into a
+hunting excursion, and to turn his course towards Agra, as the Deccaners
+were not worthy of exposing his sacred person. He answered, that this
+consideration came now too late, as his honour was engaged by having
+advanced so far, and he was resolved to prosecute their former advice
+and his own purpose, whatever might be the hazard. He now daily
+dispatched fresh troops to reinforce the army of his son Churrum, partly
+from his own followers, and the rest commanded from different
+governments. These reinforcements were said to be 30,000 horse, but the
+actual musters were not so numerous. Water was sometimes very scarce in
+camp, and provisions grew daily scarcer and dearer, the part of the
+country in which we now were not being well reduced to good government.
+Not feeling these distresses, the king took no care to have them
+alleviated; and as his khans, or great men, had their provisions brought
+after them, they neglected to inform the king. The whole burden fell
+upon strangers, the soldiers, and the poor followers of the camp, who
+were worst able to endure the hardships. Every alternate day, as
+formerly, the king removed his camp, three, four, or five cosses; yet on
+the 29th of January, we were still sixty cosses short of Mundu.
+
+On the 3d of February, having left the road of the leskar for my own
+ease, and for the benefit of the shade, and while resting me under a
+tree, Sultan Cuserou came upon me suddenly, seeking the same
+conveniences. This is the king's eldest son, formerly mentioned as in
+confinement by the practices of his brother Churrum and his faction, and
+taken out of their hands by the king at his leaving Agimere. He was now
+riding on an elephant, with no great guard or attendance. His people
+called out to me to give place to the prince, which I did, yet I staid
+to look at him, and he called on me to approach; and, after asking some
+familiar and civil questions, I departed. His person is comely, his
+countenance chearful, and his beard hung down as low as his middle. This
+I noticed, by his questions, that he seemed quite ignorant of all that
+passed at court, insomuch that he had never heard of any English, or of
+me their ambassador. The 4th and 5th we continued our march without
+halting, and on the 6th at night, we came to a little tower, newly
+repaired, where the king pitched his tent in a pleasant place, on the
+banks of the river _Sepra_, one coss short of the city of _Ugen_,
+[Oojain,] the chief city of Malwa. This place, called _Callenda_, was
+anciently a seat of the Gentoo kings of Mundu, one of whom was there
+drowned while drunk. He had once before fallen into the river, and was
+taken out by the hair of his head, by a person who dived for him. When
+he came to himself, it was told him how he had been saved from drowning,
+in hopes of having the slave rewarded. He called his deliverer before
+him, and asking how he dared to be so bold as to touch his sovereign's
+head, caused his hands to be cut off. Not long afterwards, while sitting
+drunk beside his wife, and no other person near, he had the same
+misfortune to tumble into the water, at which time she might easily have
+saved him, but did not. Being afterwards asked why she had not, she said
+she knew not but she likewise might have had her hands cut off for her
+reward.
+
+The 10th we removed one coss beyond Oojain; and on the 11th, the king
+rode to that city, to speak with a dervise, or holy man, who dwelt upon
+a hill, and was reported to be 300 years old, but I did not think this
+miracle worth my examination. At noon this day, I received news by a
+foot-post, that the prince, notwithstanding all the firmauns and
+commands of his father, had intercepted the presents and goods on their
+way up, to satisfy his own base and greedy inclinations; and no
+entreaty, gifts, or persuasions, that Mr Terry could offer, who had the
+charge of them, could prevail on him to part with them, and he compelled
+them by force to follow him towards Burhanpoor. Yet he forbore to break
+open the packages, but pressed the English to consent, which they
+refused by my orders, and he thought to win them to his purpose by
+vexatious usage. For it is the custom in this country, for the great men
+to see all merchant goods before even the king, that they may chuse
+first; but I resolved, if possible, to break that bad custom, in our
+behalf.
+
+That he might satisfy his own cupidity, the prince sent up a courier to
+the king, before I could get intelligence, giving notice of having
+detained the goods, but without mentioning that they were presents, and
+requested his authority to have them opened, that he might purchase what
+he fancied. This faithless proceeding of the prince, contrary to his
+promise and his own written orders, satisfied me that I was justifiable
+in the eyes of all, if I carried my complaint directly to the king,
+having used every possible means to procure favour from the prince, and
+having already suffered beyond the patience of a free-born man; so that
+I must now be blameless by using rougher means, having already
+fruitlessly proved all smoother expedients. I therefore resolved to
+appeal for justice, by complaint to the king in person, yet as calmly
+and warily as possible. I feared to go to Asaph Khan on this occasion,
+lest he might oppose my purpose, yet thought my neglect of him might be
+displeasing; wherefore, if I sent to acquaint him that I proposed to
+visit the king at the guzalcan, I dreaded he might suspect my purpose,
+if he had learnt the injury I meant to complain of. For all which
+reasons, I considered how best to avoid being counteracted.
+
+The visit of the king to the dervise, just mentioned, gave me a good
+opportunity, and my new linguist, who was a Greek I had sent for from
+Agimere, being ready, I rode out to meet the king, who was returning
+from the holy man on his elephant. On his majesty's approach, I
+alighted, and made a sign that I wished to speak to the king, who
+immediately turned his monster towards me, and prevented me, by saying,
+"My son has taken your goods and my presents; be not therefore sad, for
+he shall not touch nor open a lock or a seal; for at night I shall send
+him an order to set them free." He made other gracious speeches,
+intimating that he knew I had come brim-full of complaints, and that he
+had spoken first to ease me. At this time, seeing that the king was on
+the road, I could do no more; but at night, without farther seeking to
+Asaph Khan, I went to the guzalcan, determined to proceed with my
+complaints, to get back my goods, and to seek redress for the charges,
+troubles, and abuses at Surat, and all our other grievances.
+
+As soon as I came in, the king called my interpreter before him, and, by
+means of his own, intimated that he had already dispatched his orders so
+effectually, that not even to the value of a hair should be abstracted
+from our goods. In reply, I stated that the injuries, charges, and
+abuses we suffered from the prince's officers, were so numerous and
+intolerable as could not be endured, and that I craved effectual
+redress. To this it was answered, that I must apply to his son for all
+past matters; but I could obtain nothing except fair words, through the
+intermediation of Asaph Khan, so that I was forced to seem satisfied,
+and to seek opportunities as might be for redress, when this false
+friend and pretended advocate was out of the way. The good king fell at
+length to dispute about the laws of Moses, Jesus, and Mahomet; and,
+being in drink, turned lovingly to me, saying, "As I am a king, you
+shall be all welcome, Christians and Jews as well as Mahometans, for I
+meddle not with their faiths; they all come in love, and I will protect
+them from wrong while they are under my dominion, and no one shall be
+allowed to molest or oppress them." This he frequently repeated, but
+being extremely drunk, he fell a-weeping, and into various passions, and
+so kept us till midnight.
+
+Any one may easily conceive how much I was now disconcerted by the
+unjustifiable conduct of the factors, who had detained the presents for
+four months at Surat, and now sent them to fall into the hands of the
+prince, who was then within two days march of Burhanpoor, by which my
+trouble was infinitely increased. But having now began, and suspecting
+that the prince was already sufficiently exasperated upon matters of
+small importance, I thought I might as well lose his favour upon great
+as small matters, so I resolved to try what I could do with the king;
+and, while I waited the result, I sent back the messenger to Mr Terry,
+who was with the presents, desiring him to remain firm, waiting for the
+king's ultimate orders, which I should send him soon.
+
+During this interval, the king had caused the chests to be privately
+brought to him, and had opened them, which came to my knowledge, on
+which I determined to express my dissatisfaction at this usage, and
+having obtained an audience, I made my complaint. He received me with
+much mean flattery, more unworthy even of his high rank than the action
+he had done, which I suppose he did to appease me, as seeing by my
+countenance that I was highly dissatisfied. He began by telling me that
+he had found some things that pleased him much, particularly two
+embroidered cushions, or sweet-bags, a folding glass cabinet, and the
+mastiff dogs, and desired me not to be discontented, for whatever I was
+not disposed to give him, he would return. I answered, that most of
+these things were intended for his majesty, but that it was a great
+indignity to the king my master thus to seize upon what was meant to be
+presented, and not permitted to come through my hands, to whom they were
+sent in the first place. I added, that besides what were destined for
+his majesty, some of these things were intended for Noormahal, some for
+the prince, and the rest to remain in my hands, to serve as occasion
+might require, to bespeak his majesty's favour to protect us from
+injuries daily offered to us by strangers, and some for my friends, or
+my own use, while the rest belonged to the English merchants, with which
+I had no concern. He desired me not to be grieved that he had thus got
+his own choice, as he had not patience to forbear from seeing them, in
+which he did me no wrong, as he believed I wished him to be served
+first, and that he would make satisfaction to the king my master, to
+whom he would justify me. As for the prince and Noormahal, they were all
+one with himself. As to bringing any presents hereafter to procure his
+favour, I might be easy on that score, as it was merely a needless
+ceremony, for I should be always welcome to come to him empty-handed,
+and he would hear me, as it was not my fault, and he would see me
+righted at all times. That he would return me some things to enable me
+to go to his son, and he would pay the merchants for such things as
+belonged to them. He concluded by desiring me not to be angry with the
+freedom he had taken, as he meant well. As I made no reply, he pressed
+to know if I were pleased, to which I answered, that his majesty's
+satisfaction must always please me.
+
+He then began to enumerate all the things he had taken, beginning with
+the mastiffs, embroidered sweet bags, the case of combs and razors, and
+so forth; saying, with a smile, "You would not have me to restore these
+things, and I am delighted with them?" To which I answered in the
+negative. He then mentioned two glass-cases, as mean and ordinary,
+asking me for whom they were intended. I answered, that one was intended
+for his majesty, and the other for Noormahal. "Why then," said he, "you
+will not ask me for that I have, but will be satisfied with one?" To
+this I was under the necessity of yielding. He next asked for whom
+certain hats were intended, which his women liked? I answered, that
+three were for his majesty, and one for myself. He then said, I surely
+would not take back those meant for him, and that he would return mine
+if I needed it; and would not bestow it upon him. To this likewise I had
+to agree. He then asked, whose were the pictures? I answered, that they
+were sent me to use as occasion offered, and to dispose of as my
+business might require. So he called for these, and caused them to be
+opened, examining me about the women, and other little questions, asking
+my judgment and opinions concerning them. The third was a picture of
+Venus leading a satyr by the nose. Commanding my interpreter not to tell
+me what he said on this subject, he shewed it about among his nobles,
+asking them to expound its moral or interpretation, pointing out the
+satyr's horns and black skin, and many other particulars. Every one
+answered according to his fancy; but, liking none of their expositions,
+he reserved his own opinion to himself, and commanding that all these
+notions should be concealed from me, he ordered the interpreter to ask
+me what it meant. I answered, that it was an invention of the painter,
+to shew his art, and that it represented some poetical fable, which was
+all I could say, having never seen it before. He then called upon Mr
+Terry to give his opinion, who could not; on which the king asked him,
+why he brought up with him an invention in which he was ignorant? On
+this I interposed, saying Mr Terry was a preacher, and did not meddle
+with such matters, neither had he any charge of them, having only come
+along with them.
+
+I have related this anecdote of the picture for the instruction of the
+gentlemen of the East India Company, and for him who may succeed me, to
+be very careful that what they send into this country may not be
+susceptible of an evil interpretation; for the king and people are
+pregnant with, and full of, scrupulosity and jealousy. For, though the
+king concealed his opinion, yet I had ground, from what he did say, to
+believe he thought the picture was meant in derision of the Asiatics,
+whom he conceived to be represented by the satyr, as being of their
+complexion; and that Venus leading him by the nose denoted the great
+influence exercised by the women of that country over the men. He was
+satisfied that I had never seen the picture, and therefore pressed me no
+farther about its explanation; yet he shewed no discontent, but rolled
+up the pictures, saying he would accept even the satyr as a present from
+me. As for the saddle, and some other trifles, he said he would have
+them sent to his son, for whom they were fit, as a present from me, to
+whom he would write so effectually, pursuant to his promise, that I
+should stand in no need of a solicitor near him in any of my affairs. He
+added many compliments, excuses, professions, and protestations, such as
+might proceed either from a very noble or very base mind.
+
+He then enquired what was meant by the figures of the beasts, and
+whether they had been sent for me to give him? I had understood that
+they were very mean and ill-shaped images, from which the varnish had
+come off, and were ill-formed lumps of wood. I was really ashamed of
+them, and told him this was no fault of mine, those who had seized them
+being guilty of the affront, in conveying them to his majesty, for whom
+they were not intended, having only been sent to shew the forms of
+certain animals in our country. He quickly replied, "Did you think in
+England that a horse or a bull were strange to me?" I answered, that I
+thought not upon such mean matters, the sender being an ordinary man,
+who had sent these things out of good-will to me, and that I could not
+know what might have been his thoughts. The king then said he would keep
+them all; but that he desired I would procure for him a horse of the
+largest size, a male and female mastiff, some tall Irish greyhounds, and
+such other hunting-dogs as we had in England, adding, on the word of a
+king, if I would procure him these, he would fully recompense me, and
+grant every thing I desired. I answered, that I would engage to have
+them sent by the next ships, but could not answer for their lives in so
+long a voyage, but should direct their skins and bones to be preserved
+if they died, to convince his majesty I had obeyed his commands. Upon
+this he bowed to me repeatedly, laid his hand on his heart, and shewed
+me so much kindness, favour, and familiarity, that all present declared
+they had never seen him use the like to any man before.
+
+This was all my recompence, except that he often desired me to be merry,
+as he would royally requite the wrongs he had done me, and send me home
+to my country with grace and rewards befitting a gentleman. Thus, seeing
+nothing returned of all that was seized but words, I requested his
+majesty would order the velvets and silks to be delivered back, as these
+were merchant goods sent up among mine by the command of his majesty, by
+which they had escaped the rapacity of the prince's officers. He then
+desired Mr Bidulph to be called for, that he might agree with and pay
+him for their value. I then delivered in a memorial, which I had ready
+written, containing my demands for privileges and justice, as otherwise
+I should return home a mere useless person, and under disgrace with my
+sovereign. I pressed likewise to have justice in regard to a debt due by
+Zulphecar Khan, lately deceased. He replied, that he would take such
+order with his son, in regard to our affairs at Surat, that I should
+have no cause to complain, and would give such orders for other places
+as should in every respect shew his regard for me; and, that I might
+return to my master with honour, he would send by me a rich and worthy
+present, together with his letters certifying my good behaviour, and
+giving me much praise. He likewise commanded me to name what I thought
+would be most acceptable. To this I answered, that I could not crave, as
+that was not our custom, neither was it consistent with the honour of my
+sovereign; but I had no doubt that whatever he was pleased to send would
+be acceptable from so potent a monarch, who was already so much loved by
+my master. He then said, that I thought he only asked in jest to please
+me, as he saw I was still discontented; but he assured me he was my
+friend, and would prove so in the end, and swore by his head that he
+spoke sincerely in regard to the presents, and that therefore I must not
+refuse to name some for his satisfaction.
+
+This earnestness forced me to say, that, if his majesty pleased, I
+thought some large Persian carpets might be fittest, as my master did
+not look for gifts of cost and value. To this he answered, that he would
+provide them of all sorts and sizes, and should add to them what else he
+thought fit, that my master might know how great was his respect. Having
+venison of various kinds before him, he gave me half a stag, which he
+said he had himself killed, and that I should see the rest bestowed on
+his ladies. This was presently cut up into four pound pieces, and was
+sent into the interior apartments by his young son and two women in
+their bare hands, just as if he had been doling out such small fragments
+to the poor by way of charity. I had now as abundant grace and fair
+words as might have flattered me into conceit, but our injuries were not
+to be compensated by words, though I was glad of these as a colour for
+dissembling my discontent. In conclusion, he repeated his expressions of
+desire to satisfy me, saying, he hoped I went away contented. To which I
+answered, that his majesty's favour was sufficient to make me any
+amends. He then said that he had only one farther question to ask: "How
+comes it, now that I have seen your presents for two years, that your
+master, before you came, sent by a mean man, a merchant, five times as
+many and more curious toys, and having sent you his ambassador, with a
+commission and his letters mentioning presents, that you should have
+brought so little, so mean, and so much inferior to the other? I
+acknowledge you as an ambassador, and have found you a gentleman in your
+behaviour, but am amazed you are so slightly provided."
+
+I was about to reply, when he cut me short, saying, "I know that all
+this is not your king's fault nor yours, but I shall shew you that I
+esteem you more than those who employed you. At your return, I shall
+send you home with honour and reward, according to your quality and
+merit, not regarding what you have brought me, and shall send a present
+to your lord and master, befitting a king to send. Only this will I
+require from you, and do not expect it from the merchants, that you will
+take with you patterns of the following articles: a quiver and bow-case,
+a coat of mail, a cushion to rest my head upon in our fashion, and a
+pair of boots, which you shall cause to be embroidered for me in England
+in the richest manner, as I know they can do these things in your
+country better than any I have seen. These things I shall expect from
+you, and if you send them, I promise you, on the word of a king, that
+you shall be no loser." This I most chearfully undertook, and he
+commanded Asaph Khan to send me the patterns. He then asked if I had
+any grape wine, which I said I had. He desired to have some of it to
+taste next night, and if he liked it, he would be obliged to me to let
+him have it, otherwise I might make merry with it myself. Thus the whole
+of this night being spent in discourse only with me, he rose up, and I
+departed.
+
+On the 3d of March we arrived at Mundu, into which the king was expected
+to make his entry; but the day for that was not yet fixed, as he waited
+till the astrologers had determined upon an auspicious hour for the
+ceremony, so that we had all to remain without, waiting for the good
+hour. The 6th I entered Mundu, and my servants, whom I had sent before
+to seek out for quarters, had taken possession of a fair court, well
+walled round, in which was a goodly temple and a tomb. Some of the
+king's servants had already taken up their quarters there, but I got
+possession and kept it, being the best within the whole circuit of
+Mundu, though two miles from the king's house; yet it was so nearly
+sufficient, that a very small charge was sufficient to make it
+defensible against the rains, and save me 1000 rupees. The air was
+wholesome, and the prospect pleasant, as it was on the very edge of the
+hill.
+
+I went at night of the 11th to meet the king, but was told, that, on the
+news of a lion[210] having killed some horses, the king had gone out to
+hunt for that animal. I thus had leisure to look out for water; for such
+was the unaccountable want of foresight, that we were brought, with a
+multitude of people and beasts, to a hill on which was no water, so that
+the men and cattle were ready to perish. What little was to be found in
+certain wells and tanks had been taken possession of by the great men,
+and kept by force, so that I could not procure any. The poor forsook the
+city; many more were commanded away by proclamation, and all horses or
+other cattle were ordered to be removed. Thus, those who were in hopes
+of rest, were enforced to seek out new dwelling places, and had to go
+away some two, three, and even four cosses, to the extreme trouble and
+inconvenience of all, and occasioning provisions to rise greatly in
+price. For my own part, I was greatly troubled how to determine. My
+house was very good, and, though far from markets, it was still less
+inconvenient to submit to that trouble than to remain in the fields
+without house or shelter, where I must have gone to encamp, but then I
+was in want of water. Riding about with this view, I came to a great
+tank or pool, which was guarded for a khan, to whom the king had granted
+its use. I sent to acquaint him of my needs, and asked leave to draw
+water at his tank, when he was pleased to allow me to have four loads
+daily. This satisfied me in some sort; and, by selling off some of the
+goods that had been sent me from Surat, and putting away some of my
+cattle, I had hope of being able to live; for which purpose I sent two
+of my carriages, with their servants and cattle, to remain out of town,
+and thus relieved myself from this public calamity. There was not a
+misery or inconvenience that I was not subjected to, in thus following
+the court of the Mogul, owing to the want of good management in the
+government, and the intemperature of the climate.
+
+[Footnote 210: It is almost certain that the lions of these early
+voyages and travels, at least in India, were tigers.--E.]
+
+Sec.7. _A New-Year's Gift.--Suspicions entertained of the English.--Trade
+of Dabul.--Dissatisfaction of the Persian Ambassador.--English Ships of
+War in the Indian Seas_.
+
+On the 12th March, 1617, I carried, as a new-year's gift to the king, a
+pair of very handsome knives belonging to myself, and six glasses
+belonging to the Company, making an apology for the smallness of the
+present, which was well received, and the king used me very graciously,
+saying, that whatever came from my hands he looked on as a sufficient
+present, and as a proof of my love, and that it was now his part to give
+me. He gave orders to an officer to send for Mr Bidulph, to pay him his
+demands to his satisfaction, and all others who were indebted to us were
+ordered by name to pay what they owed to the Company. The king said
+likewise, that he would write to the prince in our favour. But I found
+him unwilling to part with any of our things, of which the best sweet
+bag then lay before him. I replied, that I was very unwilling to go
+empty-handed. The king then commanded that I should come up and stand
+beside him on the steps of the throne, where stood on one side the
+Persian ambassador, and the old king of Candahar on the other, with whom
+I ranked. As soon as I had taken my place, the king asked me for a
+knife, which I sent him next day. The king then called the Persian to
+stand before him, to whom he gave a jewel and a young elephant, for
+which he kneeled and saluted the ground with his head.
+
+On this occasion the same throne and furniture were used as last year,
+the upper end of the hall being adorned with the pictures of the king my
+master, the queen, the princess Elizabeth, Sir Thomas Smith, and some
+others, with two pieces of beautiful Persian tapestry hung below them.
+The throne was of gold, bespangled all over with rubies, emeralds, and
+turquoises. On one side, on a little stage or scaffold, was a company of
+women-singers. I this day sent a dispatch to Surat, giving my advice
+respecting the trade of Persia, and of what had passed on that subject
+with the ambassador, and sent some remembrance to the governor, Ibrahim
+Khan. I had a letter from him in return, stating that the English nation
+had been wronged without his knowledge; but as his authority was now
+augmented by Prince Churrum, we might rest confident in his protection,
+as while he lived and held authority at that place, we should never more
+be liable to abuses, but should be allowed to reside and trade in
+perfect freedom and security.
+
+The 13th I sent as a present to Asaph Khan a richly embroidered pair of
+gloves, and a fair wrought night-cap of my own. He received the cap, but
+returned the gloves, as useless in this country, and requested to have
+some Alicant wine, which I sent him next night. Aganor, whose diligence
+now gave me great hope of success in my desires, sent his Banian
+secretary to inform me that he had orders for the dispatch, of the
+merchant goods, and that his man should attend Mr Bidulph to finish that
+business; that the patterns should be sent me, and that the Mogul meant
+to give me a robe, and money to bear my charges in going to wait upon
+the prince. I returned for answer, that I had no need of a garment or of
+money, but begged his majesty would graciously consider the injuries of
+which I had complained, and of which I had already given an account in
+writing, and that he would please to give me a letter to the prince,
+with some of our own presents which were intended for him, or else state
+my excuse in writing, that his majesty had intercepted and appropriated
+the whole. This was all I wished, as instead of gifts from the king, I
+only required justice.
+
+The 21st I discovered that the Mogul suspected that I meant to steal out
+of the country. These doubts had been insinuated by the prince, either
+as a cover for his own guilt, or out of fear, or perhaps as a cunning
+pretence to cover his own designs. He had informed the king that the
+English meant next year to surprise Surat, and retain possession of that
+place. Indeed, their own folly gave some colour to the idea; as lately,
+upon one of the usual brawls at that place, our people had landed 200
+musqueteers, with whom they marched towards Surat; and, during their
+march, some of the jovial tars gave out to all they met that they meant
+to take the place. This was a most absurd bravado, for a handful of men
+to march twelve miles against a walled town that was able to oppose them
+with 1000 horse, and as many foot armed with match-locks, and having
+besides to pass a river which could be defended by a handful of men
+against an army. It gave, however, just occasion both of scorn and
+offence; and the prince, perhaps to serve some ends of his own, took
+occasion from it to strengthen the fortifications of the town and
+castle, and to send down ordnance for their defence; perhaps a good
+precaution to have an open door to flee to in case his brother should
+live, and have the means of checking his ambitious views. But this
+information concurring with my discontents here, and some free language
+on that occasion, and my pressing demands to be allowed to go to
+Burhanpoor, together with flying reports that we had taken Goa, and were
+preparing a great fleet in England, raised suspicions in the mind of the
+king, though he concealed them as well as he could from me. By my
+explanations, however, I satisfied the king thoroughly, though I was by
+no means so, having been fed only with words, and knew well that our
+residence was only permitted out of fear. The complaints I was enforced
+to make at this court against the misconduct of its officers towards us,
+greatly offended all the great men, as being in some sort their own
+case; for they all live by farming the several governments, in which
+they all practise every kind of tyranny against the natives under their
+jurisdiction, oppressing them with continual exactions, and are
+exceedingly averse from any way being opened by which the king may be
+informed of their infamous proceedings. They grind the people under
+their government, to extract money from them, often hanging men up by
+the heels to make them confess that they are rich, or to ransom
+themselves from faults merely imputed with a view to fleece them. Thus
+my complaints against exaction and injustice made me hated of all about
+the court, as an informer.
+
+The 25th I received a letter from Captain Pepwell, then in Dabul roads,
+stating,--That, according to advice, he had stopped the junk bound for
+Mokha; but having well weighed the caution I had given him respecting
+the correspondence between that prince and Masulipatam, where the
+Solomon then was, he had freed her without spoil. By this courtesy he
+had procured such good entertainment as is seldom had in the Indies,
+being allowed free trade, with a promise of taking 300 pieces of
+broad-cloth yearly, and had sold a good quantity of lead for ready
+money, besides some ordnance. This part of his procedure I do not like
+much, as tending to arm the Indians, and the Portuguese, their friends,
+against the Moguls. If these courtesies proceeded not from the junk
+being still under his command, they give good prospect of an yearly sale
+at that port. However, the freeing of this junk gives me good assurance
+that Captain Pepwell will do nothing prejudicial to the Company, and
+will deliver himself honestly from the jealousies entertained of him at
+Dabul. He signifies his intention of proceeding to Calicut, and if that
+factory be not likely to succeed, he proposes transferring it to Dabul.
+
+The 27th, by a foot-post from Masulipatam, I received advice that the
+Solomon had put to sea, and that the Hosiander was arrived from Bantam,
+with the bad news of the loss of the Hector and Concord, while careening
+in the roads of Jacatra, in the island of Java; but with the good news
+that the Dragon, Clove, and Defence were laden homewards from Bantam. I
+took the opportunity of this post to convey a letter to the governor of
+Dabul respecting the overture made by him of trade to that port; and,
+though I had no great opinion of the place, I would neither have it
+entirely neglected, nor would I encourage the next fleet to proceed
+there, unless on better assurance than a forced friendship, and offers
+made when their junk was in our power. I signified the causes of our
+having stopped their goods formerly for refusing trade to Sir Henry
+Middleton; but finding him now better disposed, and willing to establish
+a league of trade and amity, and to take a good quantity of our cloth, I
+required to know if he were hearty in these motions; and willing to act
+as a man of honour; as a pledge of which, I requested him to procure for
+us a firmaun from his sovereign, with such privileges as were fit for
+merchants, with a royal engagement under his seal to fulfil all the
+friendly offers made to us by this officer; desiring this firmaun might
+be transmitted to me with all expedition, to my present residence at
+the Mogul court. By this, I said, I should be satisfied that they meant
+to treat us with good faith, and on its reception, I would undertake, on
+the behalf of the king of England, that a firm and lasting peace should
+be established with his master, whose subjects should have free passage
+on the seas without molestation from our ships; and should send yearly a
+ship to trade at his port, or, if desired, should establish a resident
+factory there. I have no doubt, either through fear or favour, that some
+good sales may be made there yearly, but I doubt of being able to
+procure any valuable investments.
+
+In this I proceed cautiously, as all men ought on such occasions, not
+with too eager apparent desire, nor swallowing hungrily any offered
+conditions, without due assurances. Strict care in the first settling is
+of the utmost importance, as you can never mend your first
+establishment, and may often impair it. Every man succeeds best at
+first, when new and a stranger; for, by the natural levity of these
+barbarians, they are fond of changes, and grow weary of things in their
+usual train. I have committed this dispatch to the care of Mr Bangham,
+whom I have directed to make diligent enquiry into the commodities,
+advantages, and inconveniences attendant on our projected trade, and to
+make himself acquainted with the humours and affections of the Deccaners
+towards us.
+
+On the 30th of April the Persian ambassador sent to excuse himself for
+going away without paying his respects to me, alleging illness, but his
+messenger said he was not so sick as he pretended; but, finding no
+success in his negociations with the king, he had taken his leave, and
+made a present of thirty-five horses at his departure. In return, the
+king gave him 3000 rupees, which he took in great scorn. Upon which, to
+justify himself, the king caused two lists to be drawn up, in one of
+which all the presents made by the ambassador were enumerated, with
+their values, meanly rated, much lower than their real worth; and, in
+the other, all the gifts the king had presented to him since his
+arrival,--as slaves, melons, pine-apples, plantains, hawks, plumes of
+feathers, the elephant, and not even forgetting the drink he had
+received, all charged at extremely high prices, much above their value.
+These two lists were laid before the ambassador, with their amounts
+summed up, offering him the rest of the money to make up the balance.
+Owing to this bad usage, the Persian feigned himself sick of a fever, as
+an excuse for not waiting upon Asaph Khan and Etemon Dowlet, for which
+reason he could not come through the town to visit me, without
+discovering the counterfeit, but desired his messenger to acquaint me
+with the truth, which Aganor as freely delivered, and with no small
+bitterness against the king, and to which I seemed unwilling to listen.
+The ambassador also desired him to assure me that he was ready to serve
+my nation in his country, to the utmost of his power. I presented him
+with some Alicant wine, and a few knives, to be taken to his master, and
+so we parted. The 12th May I received news of a great blow given by the
+Turkish army to the Persians, the former having taken and utterly
+destroyed Tauris; and that Shah Abbas was unable to keep the field.
+
+On the night of the 25th, a lion and a wolf[211] broke into my quarters,
+and gave us great alarm, carrying off some sheep and goats that were in
+my court-yard, and leaping with them over a high wall. I sent to ask
+leave to kill them, as in that country no person may meddle with lions
+except the king. Receiving permission, and the animals returning next
+night, I ran out into the court upon the alarm, and the beast missing
+his prey, seized upon a little dog before me, and escaped; but my
+servants killed the wolf, which I sent to the king.
+
+[Footnote 211: More likely to have been a tyger and hyena.--E.]
+
+The 14th of June, a cabinet belonging to the jesuits was sent up from
+Cambay, containing medicines and other necessaries, and a letter, which
+were betrayed by the bringer, and delivered to the king. He opened the
+cabinet, and sent for the _padre_ to read the letter, and to see every
+thing contained in the boxes; but, finding nothing to his liking, he
+returned all. I mention this circumstance as a caution to all who deal
+in this country, to be careful of what they write or send, as it is the
+humour of this prince to seize and see every thing, lest any curiosity
+or toy should escape his greed.
+
+The 18th, I had letters from Ahmedabad, advising that indigo had greatly
+fallen in price, in consequence of the non-arrival of the flotilla from
+Goa. The unicorn's horn had been returned, as without virtue, concerning
+which I sent new advice.[212] Many complaints were made concerning Surat
+and others, which I do not insert. I received two letters from
+Burhanpoor, stating the doubtfulness of recovering the debt due to Mr
+Ralph Fitch. Spragge had returned from the leskar or camp of the Deccan
+army, where Melick Amber, with much show of honour, had given instant
+orders for searching the whole camp; but the Persian had fled to
+Visiapour, so that the business was referred by letter to a Dutchman who
+resided there. The general of the Deccan army desired Spragge to be the
+means of sending English cloth and swords to his camp, which is within
+six days march of Burhanpoor; and, in my opinion, this might be a good
+employment for some idle men, and an excellent opportunity to get vent
+for our dead commodities.
+
+[Footnote 212: This of the unicorn's horn, or rather the horn of a
+rhinoceros, may allude to some supposed inherent virtue of detecting
+poison, anciently attributed to cups made of that material.--E.]
+
+The 30th of July I received news from Surat of two Dutch ships being
+cast away on the coast near Damaun. They were from the southwards, laden
+with spices and China silks, and bound for the Red Sea; but losing the
+season, with much bad weather, they had tried to take shelter in
+Socatora, or some other port on the coast of Arabia, but failing after
+beating about many weeks, they bore away for Surat, hoping to be able to
+ride out the adverse monsoon in safety, as they had done in other years.
+But the years differ, and being forced to come to anchor, they had to
+cut away their masts by the violence of the gale; the smaller vessel of
+sixty tons was beaten to pieces, and the cables of the other breaking,
+she was driven ashore in oosy ground, within musket shot of the land.
+The ship kept upright; but having lost their long-boat, and the skiff
+being unable to live, four men got ashore on a raft. The spring-tides
+heaved her up so near the shore, that much of her goods and all her
+people were saved.
+
+_Maree Rustam_, who had been king of Candahar, came to visit me on the
+21st of August, and brought a present of wine and fruit, staying about
+half an hour, and concluded his visit by begging a bottle of wine. This
+day Sultan Cusero had his first prospect of long-hoped liberty, being
+allowed to leave his prison, and to take the air and his pleasure in a
+banqueting house near mine. Sultan Churrum had contracted a marriage at
+Burhanpoor, without waiting for the king's consent, for which he had
+fallen under displeasure; and some secret practices of his against the
+life of his brother had been discovered, on which he was ordered to
+court in order to clear himself. By the advice of their father, Etimon
+Dowlet, Noormahal and Asaph Khan now made proposals of friendship and
+alliance with Cusero. This news has diffused universal joy among the
+people, who now begin to hope that their good prince may recover his
+full liberty. The 22d the king feasted Asaph Khan. The 25th Asaph Khan
+feasted Noormahal. It is reported the Prince Cusero is to make a firm
+alliance, as above stated, and is to take a wife of his father's choice.
+This will produce his entire liberty, and the ruin of our proud
+oppressor, Churrum.
+
+The 1st of September was the solemnity of the king's birth-day, when he
+is publicly weighed, to which I went. I was conducted into a beautiful
+garden, in the middle of which was a great square pond or tank, set all
+round with trees and flowers, and in the middle was a pavilion or
+pleasure-house, under which hung the scales in which the king was to be
+weighed. The scales were of beaten gold, set with many small stones, as
+rubies and turquoises. They hung by chains of gold, large and massy, yet
+strengthened by silken ropes for more security. The beam and tressels
+from which it hung were covered with thin plates of gold. In this place
+all the nobles of the court attended, sitting round on rich carpets; and
+waiting the king's arrival. He appeared at length, cloathed, or laden
+rather, with diamonds, rubies, pearls, and other precious vanities,
+making a great and glorious shew. His sword, target, and throne were
+corresponding in riches and splendour. His head, neck, breast, and arms,
+above the elbows, and at the wrist, were all decorated with chains of
+precious stones, and every one of his fingers had two or three rich
+rings. His legs were as it were fettered with chains of diamonds, rubies
+as large as walnuts, and some larger, and such pearls as amazed me. He
+got into one of the scales, crouching or sitting on his legs like a
+woman; and there were put into the other scale, to counterpoise his
+weight, many bags said to contain silver, which were changed six times,
+and I understood his weight was 9000 rupees, which are almost equal to a
+thousand pounds sterling. After this, he was weighed against gold,
+jewels, and precious stones, as I was told, for I saw none, as these
+were all in bags, and might only have been pebbles. Then against cloth
+of gold, silk stuffs, cotton goods, spices, and all sort of commodities;
+but I had to believe all as reported, as these were all in packages.
+Lastly, against meal, butter, and corn, all of which is said to be
+distributed to the Banians, with all the rest of the stuff, but I saw
+all carefully carried away, and nothing distributed. The silver only is
+reserved for the poor, and serves for the ensuing year, as it is the
+king's custom at night frequently to call for some of these before him,
+to whom, with great familiarity and humility, he distributes some of
+this money with his own hands.
+
+While the king was sitting in the scale, he looked upon me and smiled,
+but spoke not, as my interpreter could not be admitted. After he was
+weighed, he ascended the throne, and had basins of nuts, almonds, and
+spices of all sorts, artificially made of thin silver, which he threw
+about, and for which his great men scrambled prostrate on their bellies.
+I thought it not decent for me to do so, which seeing, he reached one
+basin almost full, and poured the contents into my cloak. The nobles
+were so bold as to put in their hands to help themselves, and so thick,
+that they had soon left me none, if I had not pocketed up a remainder.
+Till I had myself been present, I was told that he scattered gold on
+this occasion, but found it to be only silver, and so thin, that all I
+had at first, being thousands of small pieces, had not weighed sixty
+rupees, of which I saved to the amount of twenty rupees, yet a good
+dishful, which I keep to shew the ostentation of this display of
+liberality; for, by my proportion, I think all he cast away could not
+exceed the value of an hundred pounds. At night he drinks with his
+nobles from rich plate, to which I was invited; but, being told that I
+must not refuse to drink, and their liquors being excessively hot and
+strong, I durst not stay to endanger my health, being already somewhat
+indisposed with a slight dysentery.
+
+On the 9th September the king rode out to take the air on the banks of
+the river _Darbadath_, [Nerbuddah] a distance of five cosses. As he was
+to pass my house, I mounted my horse to meet him; and, as it is the
+custom for all men whose gates he passes, to make him some present,
+which is taken as a good sign, and is called _mombareck_, or good news;
+and as I had nothing to give, neither could go with nothing, nor stay
+without offence, I ventured to take with me a fair book, well bound,
+filleted, and gilt, being the last edition of Mercator's Maps of the
+World, which I presented, saying, That I had nothing worthy the
+acceptance of so great a king, but begged to offer him the world, in
+which he had so great and rich a share. He accepted it in good part,
+laying his hand repeatedly on his breast, saying, that every thing which
+came from me was welcome. He asked about the arrival of our ships, which
+I said we daily expected. He then said, he had some fat wild-hogs lately
+sent him from Goa, and if I would eat any he would send me some at his
+return, I made him due reverence, answering, that any thing from his
+majesty was to me a feast.
+
+He rode on upon his elephant, and when I offered to accompany him to the
+gate, the way being stony, he desired me to return, bidding God keep me.
+He asked which was my house, and being told, praised it, as indeed it
+was one of the best in the place, though only an old temple and a large
+tomb, enclosed by a wall. Repeating his farewell, he said the way was
+bad, and desired me to go home, with much shew of courtesy and kindness,
+on which I took my leave.
+
+On the 16th I went to repay the visit of Maree Rustam, prince of
+Candahar, who sent word at my arrival that he dared not receive any
+visit unless he asked leave of the king, or acquainted Etimon Dowlet or
+Asaph Khan, which he would do at the next durbar. I made answer, that he
+needed not, as I never meant any more to trouble myself about so uncivil
+a person. That I knew well this was a mere shift out of ill manners, as
+the king would be no more angry for his receiving me at his house than
+for coming to mine, and that I cared not for seeing him, and had only
+come in pure civility to return his visit. His man desired me to wait
+till he had reported what I said to his master, but I would not. At
+night I waited upon the king at court, who spoke to me about the book of
+maps; but I forbore to speak to him about our debts. But on the 25th,
+though very weak, I went again to court to make trial of the king about
+our debts. _Muckshud_, one of our debtors, having pled in excuse for not
+paying that he had missed receiving his _prigany_, and knew not how to
+pay unless he sold his house. I delivered the merchants petition to the
+king, which he caused to be read aloud by Asaph Khan; all the names of
+the debtors, with the sums they owed, and their respective sureties,
+being distinctly enumerated. The king then sent for Arad Khan, the chief
+officer of his household, and the cutwall, and gave them some orders
+which I did not understand. Then reading over the names, and finding
+some of them dead, and some strangers, he made enquiry as to their
+abilities and qualities, and what goods they had received. Concerning
+Rulph,[213] Asaph Khan undertook to speak to the prince on the subject,
+and to get that affair concluded when he came.
+
+[Footnote 213: In the edition by Churchill, this person is named Sulph,
+but no elucidation is given.--E.]
+
+My interpreter was now called in, and the king, turning to me, said that
+our merchants had trusted people according to their own fancies, and to
+whom they pleased, not coming to him with an inventory of their goods,
+and therefore, if their debtors were insufficient, it was their own
+faults, and they had no reason to expect payment of their money from
+him. This I supposed to allude to his servant _Hergonen_, lately dead,
+whose goods had been seized to the king's use. He added, however, as
+this was the first time, he would now assist me, and cause our money to
+be paid: but, if the English should hereafter deliver their goods to his
+servants without money, they must stand to the hazard themselves. But if
+when they brought their commodities to court, they would bring the
+inventory of the whole to him, he would first serve himself, and then
+distribute the rest among such as were willing to buy them; and then, if
+any failed in payments, he would pay the money himself.
+
+This indeed is the custom of the Persian merchants, who bring all to the
+king, as I have often seen. He first takes his own choice, and delivers
+the rest among his nobles, his scribes writing down the names of all to
+whom they are delivered, and the sums, another officer settling the
+prices. After which a copy is given to the merchant, who goes to their
+houses for his money; and if they do not pay, there is a particular
+officer who has orders to enforce payment. It was then told to my
+interpreter that Arad Khan was to call the debtors before him, and cause
+them to pay. This did not satisfy our merchants, but it seemed to me a
+just and gracious answer, and better than private persons usually get
+from great princes.
+
+Hearing that I had been sick and was in want of wine, the king ordered
+me to have five bottles, and when these were done that I should send for
+five more, and so from time to time as I needed. He sent me also the
+fattest wild-hog I ever saw, which had been sent from Goa by Mucrob
+Khan. This was sent to me at midnight by a _huddy_, with this message,
+that it had eaten nothing but sugar and butter since it came to the
+king. I accepted this as a sign of great favour, which, in this court, I
+know to be a great one. He then sent for the book of maps, saying, that
+he had shewed it to his _mulahs_, and not one of them could read a word
+of it, wherefore I might have it again. To this I answered, that his
+majesty in this would use his pleasure; and so it was returned.
+
+The 26th, a rajah of the Rajpoots being in rebellion in the hills, not
+above twenty cosses from the leskar, the king sent out two Omrahs with a
+party of horse to fetch him in a prisoner. But he stood on his defence,
+slew one of the omrahs and twelve _maansipdares_, [munsubdars] and about
+500 men, sending an insulting message to the king to send his son
+against him, as he was no prey to be subdued by ordinary forces.
+
+The 2d September, Sultan Churrum made his entry into Mundu, accompanied
+by all the great men, in wonderous triumph. Contrary to all our
+expectations, the king received him as if he had been an only son. All
+the great men and the queen-mother[214] went to meet him at the distance
+of five cosses from the town. I had sent to Asaph Khan to excuse me not
+meeting him, for I was not able to stir from sickness, and besides, had
+no presents to give. I also sent some of my servants with my just excuse
+to the prince, to which he, in his pride, only answered by a nod.
+
+[Footnote 214: Both in the Pilgrims and in Churchill's Collection this
+personage is termed the king's mother; but it is more probable she was
+the mother of Sultan Churrum.--E.]
+
+The 5th of September I received advice of our ships being arrived at
+Surat, the admiral amissing, but all the rest well, and that they had
+taken two English rovers or pirates, which were found in chase of the
+queen-mother's ship returning from the Red Sea, which they fortunately
+rescued and brought safe in. Had this ship been taken, we had all been
+in trouble. With these letters, I received the Company's letter, the
+invoice of the goods, and instructions for Persia, with various other
+notes of advice. They advised me also, that, owing to the admiral's
+absence, they knew not what course to take with the pirates they had
+taken. I immediately sent orders to Surat concerning all business, as
+will appear in my letters.
+
+The 6th, I rode to visit the prince at his usual hour of giving
+audience, intending to bid him welcome, and to acquaint him with our
+business, meaning to shew him all proper respect; and, that I might not
+come empty-handed, I bought a fine gold chain, made in China, which I
+proposed to have presented to him. On sending in to acquaint him that I
+was in waiting, he returned a message, desiring me to come next morning
+at sun-rise, when he sat to be worshipped, or to wait till he rode to
+court, which I must have done at his door. I took this in high dudgeon,
+having never been denied access by the king his father; but such is this
+prince's pride, that he might even teach Lucifer. This made me answer
+roundly, that I was not the prince's slave, but the free ambassador of a
+great king; and that I would never more visit or attend upon him who had
+denied me justice; but I should see him at night with the king, to whom
+only I should now address myself, and so I departed. I went at night to
+the king, who received me graciously. I made my reverence to the prince,
+who stood beside his father, but he would not even once stir his head.
+Then I acquainted the king, that, according to his order, I had brought
+an abstract to him of our merchandize, and waited his commands. After
+his usual manner, he asked many questions as to what were brought, and
+seemed mightily satisfied with what was in the inventory, especially
+with the tapestry, promising me all the favour and privileges I could
+desire. He enquired for dogs, but I could say nothing on that subject.
+He then asked for jewels, but I told him these were dearer in England
+than in India, at which he rested satisfied. I durst not name the pearls
+for many reasons, but chiefly as I knew our people in that case would be
+way-laid by the prince, and it would have cost me infinite trouble to
+get them back. I thought they might easily be brought on shore, and so
+to court, by stealth, and I thought they would be the more valued the
+less they were expected: but my main reason of concealment was, that I
+expected to make friends by their means; therefore; when Asaph Khan
+pressed me on that head, I desired him to make the answer already
+mentioned of their dearness, saying that I would speak to him farther
+when alone. He readily understood me, and made my excuse accordingly.
+
+Seeing the king to be well pleased, I thought it a good time to move
+him again about our debts; and having my petition ready, I opened it and
+held it up, as offering it to the king. He happened not to notice this,
+and it being discovered by some others what was its contents, who knew
+the king would be enraged that his order was neglected, one of them
+stept up to me, and gently drew down my hand, requesting me not to
+present that petition. I answered, that Arad Khan had absolutely refused
+me justice, and I had no other resource. Arad heard this, being by, and
+went in much fear to Asaph Khan, desiring him to hinder me from making
+my complaint. I answered, that our ships were arrived, and we could
+neither brook nor endure such delays and loss of time. Thereupon they
+consulted together, and calling the cutwall, gave directions for him to
+put the king's orders, into execution. The cutwall, accordingly, beset
+the tents of our debtors that very night, and catched some of them; so
+that we shall now have justice. I had many thanks from all the omrahs
+for the protection given to the queen's ship, and the civility shown by
+our people to the passengers. This they said they had properly
+represented to the king, who took it kindly, and they all declared they
+were obliged in honour to love our nation, and would do us every service
+in their power; yet they all wondered we could not govern our own
+people, and that any should presume to take ships out of the kingdom,
+and to rob upon the seas without leave of our king.
+
+When the king arose, Asaph Khan carried me with hint to his
+retiring-place, where we first translated the inventory of our goods
+into Persian, to shew the king an hour after. In this inventory I
+inserted the money with some addition, that the king might see we
+brought profit into his dominions by our trade. I next inserted the
+cloths of different kinds, with the fine wares; and, lastly, the gross
+commodities, concluding by praying his majesty to give orders for what
+he wished to purchase, and then to give us liberty of selling the rest.
+When this was finished, Asaph Khan asked why I wished to speak with him
+in private, desiring me to speak my mind with freedom, bowing, and
+protesting such friendship as I never could have expected. I told him,
+that my reason for asking this private conference was to have his
+advice. It was certainly true that I had some things which were not
+enumerated, but had been so badly used last year that I durst not trust
+any one; but, to shew my confidence in him, I was willing to open
+myself to him, on his oath of secrecy, which he readily gave. I then
+told him that I had a rich pearl, and some other strings of fair pearls,
+and knew not whether it were fit to tell the king, lest the prince might
+be displeased. I informed him likewise, how I had gone in the morning to
+visit the prince, and of his discourtesy, and my consequent
+determination; yet I knew his favour was necessary for us, and I had
+hopes to recover it by means of this pearl, which I had purposely
+concealed for him. This was my purpose, and the reason of my
+concealment; and as he was father-in-law to the prince, and the king's
+favourite, I was desirous to please both, and therefore begged his
+advice.
+
+After embracing me, he said I had done discreetly, and should acquaint
+neither; for, if I did, I should never get out of trouble. If the king
+were to know of it, he would indeed use me courteously, but would make a
+great stir to get it into his hands, and then, according to custom, I
+might sue in vain to recover my own. The prince, I knew, was ravenously
+greedy and tyrannical, and wearied all with his scandalous exactions. He
+desired me to steal all ashore, trusting none, and explained to me many
+means of conveyance, bidding me observe the usage of the Portuguese on
+the like occasions; adding, that he wished to purchase the pearl, and if
+I would grant his desire, would deposite its value in my hands, whatever
+I chose to ask, and, in recompence for this confidence I had reposed in
+him, he would hereafter be my solicitor in all things, and assured me I
+could do nothing without him. I answered, that I was most willing to let
+him have the pearl, and hoped he would never betray my confidence.
+Having received his oath, and a ceremony of mutual covenant, by crossing
+thumbs according to the custom of the country, we embraced. I promised
+to be guided entirely by him, and he engaged to do every thing I
+required for the safe conveyance of the other things, engaging to give
+me firmauns so that no person should touch any thing, but all should
+come safely to me, to dispose of at my pleasure.
+
+He engaged likewise to reconcile me to the prince, and would take me
+with him the next time he went to visit him, and would make the prince
+use me with all manner of grace and favour; adding, that I should have a
+particular judge assigned me to take care of our business, and to give
+us every satisfaction we could desire. He also advised me to make a
+present to his sister, Queen Noormahal, and she would prevail upon the
+king to give me money. To this I replied, that I wished only for the
+good usage of my countrymen. He then carried me to the king, to whom I
+presented the inventory translated into Persian, and was graciously
+received. He asked me if the arras were a present, to which I answered
+in the affirmative, as the prince was by, lest it might be seized. In
+conclusion, the king said he would take a considerable quantity of our
+cloths and other commodities, desiring me to cause them to be brought up
+speedily, and directed Asaph Khan to make out an order for their free
+passage in the prince's name. I was well pleased with the success of
+this day; for though I knew that there was no faith to be placed in
+these barbarians, yet I was sure Asaph Khan would deal truly in this, as
+he was to help himself, and durst not betray me, lest he should miss the
+pearl, neither could I suspect him afterwards, as he could not betray my
+secret without discovering his own falsehood to the prince.
+
+Sec.8. _Asaph Khan protects the English for hope of Gain, as also
+Noormahal.--Arrival of Mr Steel.--Danger to the Public from private
+Trade.--Stirs about a fort_.
+
+On the 12th October, according to his promise, Asaph Khan carried me
+along with him to visit the prince, and introduced me into his private
+apartment, when I presented ham with a small Chinese gold chain in a
+china cup. He used me indifferently, but Asaph Khan persuaded him to
+alter his course towards us, representing that he gained yearly by us a
+lack of rupees, and that as our trade increased every year, it would in
+time bring him greater profit; but that if we were harshly used, we
+would be enforced to quit both Surat and the country, from which great
+inconveniences might arise. We were in some measure his subjects, and
+if, from desire of procuring rarities, he used us ill, we would
+necessarily strive to the utmost to conceal all we brought from his
+knowledge; but if he gave us that liberty and encouragement which was
+fitting, we would then use our endeavours to bring every thing to him.
+He represented, that my only study was to give content to his highness,
+and to procure his favour and protection, and therefore that he ought to
+receive me honourably when I came to visit him, and according to my
+quality, which would give satisfaction to my nation, and encourage me to
+serve him. Finally, be moved his highness to give me a firmaun for our
+present use, which he easily obtained, with a promise of all manner of
+satisfaction. The prince accordingly gave immediate orders to his
+secretary to draw it up in every point to our content, and to write a
+letter to the governor recommending it to his attention; adding, that I
+should at all times have any other letters I desired.
+
+It is thus easy to be seen what base and unworthy men I have to deal
+with. For the sordid hope only of buying some toys, Asaph Khan has
+become so reconciled to me as to betray his son-in-law, and is
+obsequious even to flattery. The ground of all his friendship is his
+desire to purchase the gold taken in the prize, and some other knacks;
+for which purpose he desires to send down one of his servants, which I
+could not deny without losing him, after having so long laboured to gain
+his favour; neither was this any disadvantage to us, as his payment is
+secure, and will save us much trouble and charge in selling elsewhere,
+especially the wine and other luggage that is apt to spoil in carriage.
+For this purpose he obtained an order from the prince under false
+pretences, and wrote himself in our favour to the governor of Surat,
+doing us all manner of kindness. There is a necessity for his
+friendship, as his word is a law in this empire, and therefore I did not
+choose to seem to notice his unworthiness. I hope by this procedure to
+win him to our advantage, or at least to make our present good use of
+him. On this occasion I moved him to procure us a firmaun for trade with
+Bengal, which he has promised, though he would never before hearken to
+that request. He likewise now prosecutes our debtors as if they were his
+own; and in passing the residence of the cutwall on his elephant, he
+called upon him to command dispatch, which was a most unusual favour.
+Upon this _Groo_ was immediately imprisoned, and _Muckshud_ had only two
+days allowed him to pay us. Thus I doubt not that in ten days we shall
+recover to the amount of 44,000 rupees, though our debtors are the most
+shifting false knaves in all India.
+
+On the 21st, a servant came to me from Asaph Khan, bearing a message
+from Noormahal, intimating that she had moved the prince for another
+firmaun, which she had obtained, and by which all our goods were taken
+under her protection; and that she was ready to send down her servant
+with authority to take order for our good establishment, and to see that
+we were no way wronged. He said farther, that Asaph Khan had done this,
+for fear of the prince's violence, and to guard against his custom of
+delays; and that now when the queen his sister had desired to be our
+protectress, he was sure the prince would not meddle; and farther
+assured me, upon his honour, that I should receive every thing consigned
+to me, for which the queen had written the most positive orders, and had
+directed her servant to assist our factors, that we might never more
+have any cause of complaint at Surat. He desired, therefore, that I
+might write a few lines to the captains and factors, directing them to
+use the queen's servant kindly, and allow him to buy for her some toys,
+such as I could spare. This I durst not deny, though I clearly saw the
+greediness which was covered under this request; and I gave him a note,
+as desired, making a condition that I should see a copy of the firmaun,
+which was already sealed, and could not be seen without leave.
+
+By all this you may see how easy it were to sell commodities here, by a
+little good management. Last year we were not looked at; but now, that I
+have translated the inventory of fine wares for the king, yet concealing
+the pearls, every one is ready to run down to Surat, to make purchases.
+Noormahal and Asaph Khan now study how to do me good offices; and many
+of the great men are soliciting me for letters, that they may send down
+their servants, so that if you had trebled the present consignment, it
+might all have been bought up aboard ship, and have saved you the
+customs, expence of carriage, and much spoil. I have therefore directed
+the factory to sell to the servants of Noormahal and Asaph Khan,
+whatsoever can be spared, so as to leave me a decent proportion for my
+uses at court. By this, much trouble and charges will be saved, the
+prince prevented from plunder and exactions, and our friends confirmed;
+and yet I hope to have enough remaining to please the king and his son.
+At the delivery of their presents, Asaph Khan has undertaken to procure
+the phirmaunds for our trade at Bengal or any other port, and even to
+procure us a general privilege for free trade and residence in every
+part of the king's dominions.
+
+On the 24th of October the king departed to a considerable distance from
+Mundu,[215] and went from place to place among the mountains, leaving us
+quite at a loss what way we should take, as no one knew his purpose. On
+the 25th I had a warrant for ten camels at the king's rates of hire; and
+on the 29th I removed to follow the king, being forced to quit Mundu,
+which was now entirely deserted. The 31st I arrived at the king's tents,
+but found he had gone with few company on a hunting party for ten days,
+no person being allowed to follow without leave. The leskar or camp was
+scattered about in many parts, suffering great inconveniences from bad
+water, scarcity and consequent dearness of provisions, sickness, and all
+sorts of calamities incident to so great a multitude; yet nothing can
+prevent the king from following his pleasures. I here learnt that it was
+quite uncertain whether the king proposed going to Agra or Guzerat; and,
+though the latter was reported, the former was held to be more probable,
+as his counsellors wished to be at rest. Yet, because the king was
+expected to linger here about a month, I was advised and thought it best
+to send for the goods and presents, and endeavour to conclude my
+business, rather as defer it upon uncertainties. By this means, I hoped
+to obtain some rest, which I much needed, as I was very weak, and not
+likely to recover by daily travel, and the use of cold raw muddy water.
+
+[Footnote 215: In the edition of Churchill, the king is said to have
+removed twenty-four cosses from Mundu, while in the Pilgrims it is
+called only four cosses.--E.]
+
+Richard Steel and Jackson arrived on the 2d November, 1617, with the
+pearls and other small matters, which they had brought privately on
+shore according to my order, which I received and gave them acquittance
+for. I had a conference with Mr Steel about his projects of water-works,
+intended to advance the sale of lead, which I did not approve of,
+because I knew the character of this people, and that this affair must
+be begun at our expence, while after trial we should not enjoy the
+profit, but the natives be taught.[216] Besides, it did not promise any
+advantages for the sale of our commodity, as the lead would be trebled
+in price by land-carriage, and could not be delivered at Agra so cheap
+as other lead could be purchased there. Yet I was willing that he should
+make a trial, by carrying his workmen to Ahmedabad, and meeting me
+there; where, by the aid of Mukrob Khan, who only among these people is
+a friend to new inventions, I would make offer to the king of their
+inventions, and try what conditions might be procured; but, in my
+opinion, it is all money and labour thrown away. The company must shut
+their ears against these projectors, who have their own emoluments much
+more in view than the profits of their masters. Many things look fair in
+discourse, and in theory satisfy curious imaginations, which in practice
+are found difficult and fanciful. It is no easy matter to alter the
+established customs of this kingdom; where some drink only of rain
+water, some only that of a holy river, and others only of such as is
+brought at their own cost.
+
+[Footnote 216: This project is no where explained, but might possibly be
+intended for conveying water, by means of machinery and leaden pipes,
+for the supply of some palace or city in India.--E.]
+
+As for his second project, of inducing the caravans and merchants of
+Lahore and Agra, who are in use to travel by Candahar into Persia, to
+come by the river Indus and to go by sea in our ships to Jasques or the
+Persian gulf it is a mere dream. Some men may approve of it in
+conversation, but it will never be adopted in practice. The river Indus
+is but indifferently navigable downwards, and its mouth is already
+occupied by the Portuguese; while its navigation upwards, against the
+stream, is very difficult. Finally, we must warrant their goods, which
+cannot be done by a fleet; neither did even the Portuguese transport any
+of these goods, excepting only those of Scindy and Tatta, which traded
+by means of their own junks, having _cartas_ or passes from the
+Portuguese, for which the natives paid a small matter, to secure them
+from being captured by the Portuguese cruizers; and the emoluments of
+these passes came into the pockets of the chiefs of Diu, Damaun, and
+Ormus. Even if all other difficulties were removed, yet will the caravan
+of Lahore be never induced to take this passage, as it mostly consists
+of returning Persians and Armenians, who know the journey from Jasques
+to be almost as bad as that through Candahar; and the small trade from
+the environs of Scindy is not worth mentioning. Yet, for his better
+satisfaction, I am content that he may learn his errors by his own
+experience, so that it be not done at the charges of the company: But I
+suppose he will let it fall to the ground, not knowing at which end to
+begin.
+
+As to the third project, for uniting the trade of the Red Sea with this
+of Surat, I recommended to him to use his endeavours; for it is already
+begun. The peril of this trade in the Guzerat ships is very obvious,
+owing to pirates in these seas; wherefore I have no doubt that many
+merchants may be induced to load their goods in our ships on freight; by
+which means we should make ourselves many useful friends among these
+people, supply our own wants, save the export of bullion, and for this
+year employ one of the ships belonging to the old account, that should
+return in September, receiving the remains of this joint stock, which
+will be sufficient to re-load a great ship, and would otherwise be
+transported at great loss. This I explained and urged, shewing which
+way it might be accomplished, and recommended by him to the commander,
+the Cape merchants and your factors, as will appear by my letters. This
+measure, if followed, must evidently be to your profit, even if nothing
+were procured towards it by freight from the Guzerat merchants; as,
+having so many empty vessels for so small a stock, and two pirate ships
+fallen into your hands, they had better even go empty as not go. There
+are many good chances in the Red Sea and in the way, and though they did
+nothing else than bring back the goods you have at Mokha and other ports
+in that sea, this would repay the charges of the voyage and be ready in
+time.
+
+I find Mr Steel high in his conceits, insomuch that he seems to have
+forgotten the respect due to me. He and Mr Kerridge are at variance,
+which I use every endeavour to assuage. As for his wife, I have told
+Steel that she cannot remain in this country without much inconvenience
+to us, and injury to his masters, as she could not be allowed her
+expences of travelling and living at the charges of the Company; that he
+must live frugally and like a merchant, as others do, and must therefore
+send home his wife. If he did so, he was welcome to remain in the
+Company's service; but otherwise, I should have to take measures with
+them both, much against my inclination. Having thus persuaded him, I
+likewise endeavoured to deal in the same manner about Captain Towerson's
+wife. You know not the danger, the trouble, and the inconvenience, of
+granting these liberties. For this purpose, I persuaded Abraham, his
+father-in-law, to hold fast; stating the gripings of this court, and the
+small hope of any relief by this alliance, from which he expected great
+matters, and endeavoured to persuade him to return quietly. To further
+this, I wrote to your chief factor, that such things as he had brought
+and were vendible, should be bought for your use by bill of exchange,
+and at such profit to him as might answer both parties; but I utterly
+prohibited the taking of his trash, to remain a dead stock on your
+hands, on any conditions. Such inconveniences do you bring upon your
+hands by these unreasonable liberties.
+
+By the strict commands in your letter respecting private trade, as well
+respecting your own servants as others, I find you do not mean him to
+have that liberty he expects; for he is furnished to the value of above
+L1000, first cost here, and Steel to at least L200. This, as he proposes
+sending home his wife, and his merit is so good towards you, I shall
+send home; as I presume you will admit of this to get rid of such
+cattle. I will not buy these goods however, but order them to be marked
+and consigned to you, by which you will have the measure in your own
+hands. By these liberties, you discourage all your old servants. Some
+may do all things for fair words, and some will do nothing for good
+actions. I could instance some, gone home two years since, who only
+employed themselves in managing their own stock, and did no other
+business, who now live at home in pleasure; and others that raised their
+fortunes on your monies, trading therewith from port to port, and are
+now returned rich and unquestioned. Last year a mariner had twenty-six
+_churles_ of indigo, others many fardles; another had to the value of
+7000 mahmudies in bastas, chosen at Baroach and purchased with your
+monies, and he would not probably chuse the worst for himself; a fourth
+did the same to the value of above L150. I do not mention these things
+out of spite or ill will, but to induce you to equality of proceeding
+with your servants, that an impartial restraint be imposed upon all, and
+that by such instances your profits may not be all swallowed up.
+
+For effecting these purposes, the sending the woman home, and the
+prosecution of trade to the Red Sea, I have sent back Richard Steel to
+Surat with the necessary orders. As it is now declared that the king
+intends going to Guzerat, I have altered my purpose about the goods and
+presents; and have appointed Richard Steel, after having dispatched
+other matters, to meet me there with the goods and presents, and his
+engineers. I have also sent my advice and directions to Captain Pring,
+to make out an inventory of all the monies and goods in the two pirate
+ships, and to land the whole, making it over to your stock; to give a
+passage home to some of the chiefs, and to take the rest into your
+service, referring to you at home to deal with the owners. My own fixed
+opinion is, that their capture is legal and justifiable, and all their
+goods forfeited. If you are pleased to restore any thing, be it at your
+pleasure; but the more rigour you show to these, the better example you
+will give to such scandalous piracies; for, if this course be pursued,
+you may bid adieu to all trade at Surat and in the Red Sea, and let the
+Turkey Company stand clear of the revenge of the Grand Signior.
+
+I went to Asaph Khan on the 6th November, and shewed him the pearls
+according to promise. As I had been previously informed, he told me the
+sorts were not fit for that country; yet he was so pleased that I had
+kept my word with him, that I believe I may say to you in the words of
+Pharaoh, "The land is before you, dwell where you will, you and your
+servants." We talked not about the price, but he vowed the utmost
+secrecy, and that for my sake he would give more for them than their
+value, not returning any, and would pay ready money. Of this he
+professed to be in no want, and even offered to lend me whatever I
+needed. I have promised to visit his sister, whom he has made our
+protectress; and indeed, every contentment that good words can give, I
+have received, besides good deeds. When the presents arrive, I shall
+take care not to be too liberal to your loss; a little shall serve in
+that way. Indeed Asaph Khan himself has given me this advice, saying
+that such things are as well taken in this country sold as given, which
+I find by the experience of others to be true.
+
+Finishing these conferences in his bed-chamber, Asaph Khan rose to go to
+dinner, having invited me and my people; but he and his friends dined
+without, appointing us our mess apart, for they scruple to eat with us.
+I had good cheer, and was well attended, the residue being given to my
+servants. After dinner, I moved about the debt due by Groo, and told him
+of the delays. He desired me to say no more, as he had undertaken that
+business; that Groo, at his orders, was finishing accounts with a
+jeweller, and he had given orders, as the money was paid, that it should
+remain in the hands of the cutwall for us. This I found afterwards to be
+true, and the cutwall has promised to finish in three days, desiring me
+to send no more to Asaph Khan on that business.
+
+I must not omit to mention here, an anecdote of baseness or favour, call
+it which you please. When the prisons are full of condemned men, the
+king commands some to be executed, and sends others to his omrahs, to be
+redeemed at a price. This he esteems a courtesy, as giving the means of
+exercising charity: But he takes the money, and so sells the virtue.
+About a month before our remove, he sent to me to buy three Abyssinians,
+whom they suppose to be all Christians, at the price of forty rupees
+each. I answered, that I could not purchase men as slaves, as was done
+by others, by which they had profit for their money; but that I was
+willing to give twenty rupees each for them in charity, to save their
+lives and restore them to liberty. The king was well pleased with my
+answer, and ordered them to be sent me. They expected the money, which I
+was in no haste to give, and even hoped it had been forgotten. But the
+king's words are all written down[217], and are as irrevocable decrees.
+Seeing that I sent not for the malefactors, his officers delivered them
+into the hands of my _procurator_, in my absence this day, taking his
+note for the sixty rupees, which I paid at my return, and set free the
+prisoners.
+
+[Footnote 217: Dixit, et edictum est; fatur, et est factum.--_Purch_.]
+
+Having notice of a new phirmaund sent down to Surat to disarm all the
+English, and some other restrictions upon their liberty, owing to a
+complaint sent up to the prince, that we intended to build a fort at
+Swally, and that our ships were laden with bricks and lime for that
+purpose, I visited Asaph Khan on the 10th November, to enquire into this
+matter. This jealousy arose from our people having landed a few bricks
+on shore, for building a furnace to refound the ship's bell; yet the
+alarm was so hot at court, that I was called to make answer, when I
+represented how absurd was this imaginary fear, how dishonourable for
+the king, and how unfit the place was for any such purpose to us, having
+neither water nor harbourage. The jealousy was however so very strongly
+imprinted in their minds, because I had formerly asked a river at Gogo
+for that purpose, that I could hardly satisfy the prince but that we
+intended some such sinister end. You may judge from this how difficult
+it were to get a port for yourselves, if you were so disposed.
+Notwithstanding all remonstrances, this furnace must be demolished, and
+a _huddey_ of horse sent down to see it done. The disarming of our men
+was what chiefly disobliged our people, though the weapons were only
+lodged in the custom-house, and those only belonging to the ship's
+company. I told Asaph Khan, that we could not endure this slavery, nor
+would I stay longer in the country, as the prince gave us one day a
+phirmaund for our good usage, with a grant of privileges, and
+countermand all the next by contradictory orders, in which proceedings
+there was neither honour nor good faith, and I could not answer for my
+continuing to reside among them. Asaph Khan said, he would speak to the
+king at night on the subject, in the presence of the prince, and
+afterwards give me an answer.
+
+I went again to wait upon Asaph Khan on the 18th, when he made many
+protestations of the Mogul's affection to my sovereign and nation, and
+to me, and assured me he had risked the prince's disfavour for our
+sakes, and had full assurance of a complete redress of all our
+grievances: and that he proposed getting the _prigany_ of Surat
+transferred to himself, which the prince would have to resign, as he had
+been made governor of Ahmedabad, Cambay, and that territory. To satisfy
+me that he did not dissemble, he desired me to come at night to court,
+bringing the king my master's letter and the translation, as the time
+was favourable for its delivery; desiring me at the same time to persist
+in my complaint, and to offer taking leave, when I should see what he
+would say for us. Accordingly, I went at night to wait upon the king,
+whom I found surrounded by a very full court. The king was sitting on
+the ground, and when I delivered the letter, it was laid before him, of
+which he took no great notice, being busy at the time. Asaph Khan
+whispered to his father, Etimon Dowlet, desiring him to read the letter
+and assist us, which he could better do than himself. Etimon Dowlet took
+up both letters, giving that in English into the king's hands, and read
+the translation to the king, who answered many of the complaints. On
+coming to that point, of procuring our quiet trade, by his authority
+with the Portuguese, he demanded if we wanted him to make peace with
+them? I answered, that his majesty knew long since I had offered to be
+governed entirely by him, and referred that matter to his wisdom, and
+waited therefore to know his pleasure. On this he said, that he would
+undertake to reconcile us, and to cause agreement to be made in his
+seas, which he would signify in his answer to my master's letter, in
+which he would farther satisfy his majesty in all his other friendly
+desires.
+
+Notwithstanding of this, I asked leave to go before to Ahmedabad, to
+meet the king's presents, and to prepare for my return home. Upon this,
+a question arose between the king and the prince, who complained that he
+derived no profit from us, and was very willing to be rid of us. Asaph
+Khan then took up the discourse, and plainly told the king, that we
+brought both profit and security to the port of Surat and to the
+kingdom, but were very rudely treated by the prince's servants, and that
+we could not continue our trade and residence, unless matters were
+amended; for which reason it would be more honourable for his majesty to
+licence and protect us, than to treat us discourteously. The prince
+angrily replied, That he had never wronged us, and had lately given us a
+phirmaund at the desire of Asaph Khan. It is true, replied Asaph Khan,
+that you granted him a phirmaund to his satisfaction; but in ten days
+you sent down another, virtually to contradict and annul the former; and
+as he stood as surety between both, and had undertaken our redress on
+the prince's word, the shame and dishonour of this double procedure fell
+upon him. He said he spoke for no ends, but for the king's honour and
+justice, as he owed me nothing, nor I him, and for the truth of his
+words he appealed to me, who complained that our goods were taken away
+from us by force, and that Rulph,[218] who began this two years ago,
+would never pay us, and his officers continued the same procedure every
+season. If the prince were weary of the English, he might turn us away;
+but then he must expect that we would seek for redress at our own hands
+upon the seas. He demanded whether the king or the prince gave me the
+means of living, or, as they did not, at whose expence I was maintained?
+saying, that I was an ambassador and a stranger, who lived in this
+country and followed the progress of the king at great charges; and if
+our goods continued to be taken from us by force, so that we could
+neither get back our goods, nor yet their value in money, it would be
+impossible for us to subsist.
+
+[Footnote 218: On a former occasion, where this person is mentioned, it
+has been said that his name, in the edition of this journal given by
+Churchill, is written Sulph. From the circumstances in the context at
+this place, it is possible that Sulpheckar Khan, or Zulfeccar Khan,
+governor of Surat under Sultan Churrum, may be here meant.--E.]
+
+This was delivered with some heat, and the king, catching at the word
+force, repeated it to his son, whom he sharply reprehended. The prince
+promised to see me paid for all that had been taken. He said likewise
+that he had taken nothing, having only caused the presents to be sealed;
+and, as his officers had received no customs on these, he desired to
+have them opened in his presence. This I absolutely refused to consent
+to, telling the king that I only did my duty to my master, in insisting
+to deliver the presents free from duty, and that, when I had so done, I
+should give the prince full satisfaction in all other things. At this
+time, Etimon Dowlet, who had been made our friend by his son Asaph Khan,
+whispered to the king, and read a clause or two from my master's letter,
+on which the king made the prince stand aside. Asaph Khan joined in this
+private conference, which they told me was for our good; and in
+conclusion, the prince was commanded to suffer all the goods to come
+quietly to me, and to give me such privileges for our trade as were fit,
+and as should be proposed by Asaph Khan.
+
+The prince would not yield the presents, unless Asaph Khan became his
+surety that he should have a share, which he did, and we were then all
+agreed on that point. The king paid me many compliments in words, and
+even gave me two pieces of _pawne_ out of the dish then before him,
+desiring me to partake of what he was eating. I then took my leave for
+Ahmedabad; and that same night I began my journey, leaving my tents, as
+I expected to reach that city the next day: But I had to ride two
+nights, with the intermediate day and half of the next, with excessively
+little accommodation or refreshment; and arrived at Ahmedabad on the
+15th at noon.
+
+The 8th January, 1618, there was some question about presents by the
+prince, whom I told that his were ready whenever he was ready to receive
+them. He asked me, why I had broken the seals? On which I said, that it
+would have been dishonourable and discourteous in me to have delivered
+the king's presents in bonds, and having waited his highness' licence
+during twenty days, but seeing no hope of its arrival, I had been under
+the necessity of breaking open the seals. Some heat was likely to have
+arisen on this subject, but a gentleman from the king, who was sent to
+observe what passed between us, told us both that the king commanded our
+presence before him immediately, at a garden where he then was, on the
+river side, a coss from the town. The prince went there immediately in
+his palanquin, and I followed in a coach, well attended upon by the
+servants of the king and prince. On my arrival, the women were going in,
+on which occasion no man dare enter except the prince, who accordingly
+made bitter complaints against me for having broke open the seals,
+taking out from the packages whatever I pleased, without his knowledge.
+Asaph Khan was called, who was my surety, and the prince laid the blame
+of all this upon him, but he strenuously denied all knowledge or
+participation; yet I had not accused him, but took it all upon myself,
+knowing he would deny it, as is the custom, to excuse himself, and I
+knew myself better able to bear it.
+
+I was then sent for to the water-side, where the king had been sitting
+in private, and went in, having the presents along with me, but the king
+was gone into the female apartments. Asaph Khan blamed me for breaking
+his word, saying, that the prince had shamed him. I answered, through
+Jaddow, that he well knew I had his consent, of which this man was a
+witness. He denied this to us both, and when I again said, that,
+although I would not lay the blame on him, that it was still true, as
+this man could witness; Jaddow refused to interpret my answer, saying,
+that he durst not tell Asaph Khan to his face that he lied. This is a
+quite usual thing among them; for if any command comes from the king
+which he afterwards forgets or denies, he that brought the message will
+deny it stoutly. I bore up as high as I could, on which some of the
+great men said that it was a great affront, of which no other man durst
+have been guilty, while others smiled. I answered, it was by no means so
+great as the prince had often done to me. We thus spent the day, during
+which the king never appeared, having privately stole away, leaving us
+all in anxious expectation.
+
+At night, word came that the king was gone, when I offered to have gone
+home, but was so well attended, that I was in some measure constrained
+to force my way. While on the road, new messengers came to seek me, and
+I had to return to court, without having either eaten or drank. The king
+was not however come back, and I could not get free from my attendants,
+who yet used me very respectfully. After waiting an hour, a sudden order
+was given to put out all the lights. The king now came in an open
+waggon, drawn by bullocks, having his favourite Noormahal along with
+him, himself acting as waggoner, and no man near. When he and his women
+were housed, the prince came in on horseback, and immediately called for
+me into the place where the king was. It was now midnight, and I found
+the king and prince only attended upon by two or three eunuchs. Putting
+on an angry countenance, the king, as he had been instructed by his son,
+told me I had broken my word, and he would trust me no more. I answered
+roundly, that I held it fit to give freely, not upon compulsion, and had
+committed no offence, according to my judgment; and if their customs
+were so very different from ours, I had erred only from ignorance, and
+ought therefore to be pardoned. After many disputes, the prince offered
+his friendship, with many fair promises, and we were all reconciled.
+
+I then opened the chests, gave the king his presents, and the prince
+his, and sent in those intended for Noormahal. We were about two hours
+engaged in viewing them. The king was well pleased with the tapestry,
+but said it was too coarse, and desired to have a suit of the same
+quality with the sweet bags. Three articles were detained besides the
+presents; and for these the prince said he would pay, as his father had
+taken them. He likewise desired me to come to see him in the morning,
+promising to be my protector and procurator, which I willingly accepted
+in all things except the goods.
+
+I waited upon the prince on the 10th, when I was well received, and had
+orders for a phirmaund about the murdered man[219]. He likewise made a
+public declaration of his reconcilement, desiring all his officers to
+take notice of it, and act accordingly. He likewise ordered his chief
+_Raia_ to be in future my procurator, and to draw out whatever
+phirmaunds I required. I presented to him Captain Towerson, and some
+others of the English, whom he received graciously; and, in confirmation
+of our renewed friendship, he presented me with a robe of cloth of
+silver, promising to be the protector of our nation in all things we
+could desire. I then told him about Mr Steel and his workmen, when he
+desired me to bring a small present at night to the king, to whom he
+should present them, which I did. He kept his word, and spoke in our
+favour to the king, who seemed disposed to entertain them. On this
+occasion I presented Captain Towerson to the king, who called him up,
+and after a few questions, rose. At the _Gitshel Choes_[220] I presented
+Mr Steel and his workmen. The king called for Mr Paynter, and gave him
+ten pounds, promising to take him and all the rest into his service. On
+this occasion the king sat all night in a hat which I had given him.
+
+[Footnote 219: This circumstance is perhaps explained in the sequel, as
+relating to the death of a person at Burhanpoor.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 220: This is probably meant for the same public audience
+called, in other parts of the journal, the Gazul Khan.--E.]
+
+The 13th, the Dutch came to court, bringing a great present of China
+ware, saunders-wood, parrots, and cloves, but were not allowed to
+approach the third degree, or raised platform. After some time, the
+prince asked me, who they were? I answered, that they were Hollanders
+who resided at Surat. He then enquired if they were our friends? I
+answered, that they were of a nation which was dependent upon the king
+of England, but not welcome in all parts, and that I did not know their
+business. He then said, since they were our friends, that I ought to
+call them up. So I was obliged to call upon them, that they might
+deliver their presents, on which occasion they were placed beside our
+merchants, yet without any farther speech or conference. Finally, every
+thing I asked was complied with, or at least promised, and I now wait
+for performance and money. I am satisfied, that, without this
+contestation, I had never succeeded in our just demands; for I told the
+prince's messenger, in the presence of all the English, that if he chose
+to use force against me or my goods, he certainly might, but it should
+cost blood, for I would set my _chop_ upon his master's ship, and send
+her to England.
+
+On the 18th I received notice from Surat of the imprisonment of Spragge
+and Howard at Burhanpoor, where their house and goods were seized, and
+their lives in question, on the following account:--The cutwall had been
+drinking at their house, and one of his men had died that night, on
+which they were accused of having poisoned him, and the cutwall, in
+excuse for having been at their house, pretended that he had gone to
+fetch away a man's wife who was detained by Thomas Spragge. What may be
+the truth of this affair I know not; but information has been sent to
+the king against them. I went therefore to the prince, who had promised
+to undertake all our causes, but could not get speech of him, though I
+had likewise to complain of force having been used against a caravan of
+ours on the way, notwithstanding a phirmaund from the rajah of the
+country, on both of which subjects I shall present a petition at night
+to the king. My trouble with this barbarous and unjust people is beyond
+all endurance. When at the prince's, I found the promised phirmaund
+drawn up indeed, but half of the agreed conditions were omitted, upon
+which I refused to accept it, and desired leave to depart, that I might
+treat with them in the sea.[221]
+
+[Footnote 221: This obscure expression seems to imply a threat of taking
+vengeance, or making reprisals at sea, for the oppressions of the Mogul
+government against the English trade.--E.]
+
+On the 21st, a command was issued to set free the English at Burhanpoor,
+and to restore their goods; on which occasion the king observed, that,
+if they had killed the Mahometan who came to drink at their house, he
+had only met with his just reward. Another order was issued, commanding
+Partap-shah to repay us all exactions whatsoever, and that he should
+hereafter take no duties upon our goods in their way to the sea-port,
+threatening, in case of failure, to deliver his son into my hands. On
+the 22d, I went in person to receive these phirmaunds, and carried the
+merchants along with me, together with some pearls the prince was eager
+to see, and which were pretended to belong to Mr Towerson. The prince
+had received some vague accounts of our having pearls to the value of
+twenty or thirty thousand pounds, which he hoped to have extracted from
+us. When his secretary saw our small pearls, he observed that his master
+had _maunds_ of such, and if we had no better, we might take these away.
+You may judge how basely covetous these people are of jewels. I told him
+that we had procured these from a gentlewoman to satisfy the prince, and
+as they could not be made better, it was uncivil to be angry with
+merchants who had done their best to shew their good will.
+
+I then spoke to him about the phirmaunds, when he bluntly told me I
+should have none; for as we had deceived the prince's hopes, he would
+disappoint us. I had asked leave to depart, and I might come to take
+leave whenever I pleased. To this I answered, that nothing could please
+me more, but that I should requite their injustice in another place, for
+I should now apply to the king, and depend no more on them, as I saw
+their conduct was made up of covetousness and unworthiness. So I arose
+to depart, but he recalled me, desiring that I might come next day to
+the king and prince together, when I should have complete satisfaction.
+
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"And now, reader, we are at a stand: some more idle, or more busy
+spirits, willing either to take their rest, or to exchange their labour;
+and some perhaps wishing they had the whole journal, and not thus
+contracted into extracts of those things out of it which I conceived
+more fit for the public. And, for the whole, myself could have wished
+it, but neither with the honourable Company, nor elsewhere, could I
+learn of it; the worthy knight himself being now employed in like
+honourable embassage from his majesty to the Great Turk. Yet, to supply
+the defect of the journal, I have given thee the chorography of the
+country, together with certain letters of his, written from India to
+honourable lords, and his friends in England; out of all which may be
+hewed and framed a delightful commentary of the Mogul and his subjects.
+Take them therefore, reader, and use them as a prospective glass, by
+which thou mayst take easy and near view of these remote regions,
+people, rites, and religions."--_Purchas_.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+In the Pilgrims, in supplement to the journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Purchas
+has inserted a formal complimentary letter from king James to the Great
+Mogul, or emperor of Hindoostan, together with another from the Mogul to
+king James, containing nothing besides hyperbolical expressions of
+regard; both of which are here omitted, as entirely devoid of interest,
+amusement, or information. Purchas has also added several letters said
+to have been found among the papers of Sir Thomas Roe, with some others
+which he says were transcribed from _Sir Thomas Roe's own book_. As
+these letters merely repeat circumstances and opinions already more
+fully and more methodically expressed in the preceding journal, they
+could only have served unnecessarily to swell our pages, without any
+adequate advantage, and are therefore omitted.
+
+Purchas also informs us that Sir Thomas Roe, before he left the court of
+the Great Mogul on his return for England, requested to be favoured with
+a recommendatory letter from the Mogul to king James. This request was
+granted with the utmost readiness, and a letter written accordingly; but
+the Mogul, or his ministers, shewed much scrupulousness about the
+placement of the seal to this letter, lest, if placed under the writing,
+it might disparage the dignity of the Mogul, or, if placed over the
+letter, king James might feel disobliged. On this account, the letter
+was delivered to Sir Thomas unsealed, and the seal was sent separately,
+that it might be afterwards affixed, according to the pleasure of the
+king of England.
+
+This seal was of silver, and Purchas has given an engraving, or _fac
+simile_ of it, consisting of an inner and larger circle, bearing the
+style or title of the reigning king, or _Padishah_ Jehanguire;
+surrounded circularly by eight smaller circles, containing the series of
+his direct ancestors, from Timor, or Tamerlane, downwards. These are all
+of course in the Persian language and characters; but Purchas gives
+likewise a copy or translation of the same in English letters. It seemed
+quite superfluous to insert here the Persian _fac simile_, being merely
+writing without ornament, armorial bearing, or cognizance. The following
+is the series, expressed in English characters; the last being the
+central circle, which contains the name and title of the reigning
+emperor:--
+
+   1. Ebn Amir Temur Saheb Quran.
+   2. Ebn Miran Shah.
+   3. Ebn Mirza Soltan Mohamed.
+   4. Ebn Soltan Abu Said.
+   5. Ebn Mirza Amar Shah.
+   6. Ebn Bahar Padishah.
+   7. Ebn Humaiun Padishah.
+   8. Ebn Akbar Padishah.
+   9. Abu Amozaphar Nurdin Jebanguire Padishah.
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+RELATION OF A VOYAGE TO INDIA IN 1616, WITH OBSERVATIONS RESPECTING THE
+DOMINIONS OF THE GREAT MOGUL, BY MR. EDWARD TERRY.[222]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+According to Purchas, Mr Edward Terry was master of arts, and a student
+of Christ Church in Oxford, and went out to India as chaplain to Sir
+Thomas Roe. In the first subdivision of this narrative, we have combined
+the observations of Captain Alexander Childe, who was commander of the
+ship James, during the same voyage, under Captain Benjamin Joseph, of
+the ship Charles, who was slain in a sea-fight with a Portuguese carack,
+off one of the Komoro islands. The notes extracted by Purchas from the
+journal of Captain Childe,[223] are so short and unsatisfactory, that we
+have been induced to suppress them, except so far as they serve to
+elucidate the narrative of Terry, in the first subdivision of this
+section.--E.
+
+[Footnote 222: Purch. Pilgr. II 1464.]
+
+[Footnote 223: Id. I. 606.]
+
+Sec.1. _Occurrences during the Voyage from England to Surat_.
+
+Apologies often call truth into question, and having nothing but truth
+to offer in excuse for this narrative, I omit all unnecessary preface,
+desiring only that the reader may believe what I have faithfully
+related. Our fleet, consisting of six goodly ships, the Charles,
+Unicorn, James, Globe, Swan, and Rose, under the supreme command of
+Captain Benjamin Joseph, who sailed as general in the Charles, our
+admiral ship, fell down from Gravesend to Tilbury-hope on the 3d of
+February, 1616.
+
+After long and anxious expectation, it pleased God to send us a fair
+wind at N.E. on the 9th March, when we departed from that road, and set
+sail for the East Indies. The wind continued favourable till the 16th,
+at night, when we were in the bay of Biscay, at which time we were
+assailed by a most fearful storm, during which we lost sight both of the
+Globe and the Rose. The Globe rejoined us on the 26th following, but the
+Rose was no more heard of till six months afterwards, when she arrived
+at Bantam. The storm continued with violence from the 16th to the 21st.
+The 28th we got sight of the grand Canary, and of the Peak of Teneriffe,
+which is so extremely high that it may be seen in a clear day more than
+forty leagues out at sea, as the mariners report. The 31st, being
+Easter-day, we passed under the tropic of Cancer, and on the 7th of
+April had the sun in our zenith. The 16th, we met with these winds
+called _tornadoes_, which are so variable and uncertain, as sometimes to
+blow from all the thirty-two points of the compass within the space of a
+single hour. These winds are accompanied by much thunder and lightning,
+and excessive rains, of so noisome a nature, as immediately to cause
+people's clothes to stink on their backs; and wherever this rain-water
+stagnates, even for a short space of time, it brings forth many
+offensive animalcules. The tornadoes began with us when in about 12 deg. of
+N. latitude, and continued till we were two degrees to the south of the
+equinoctial line, which we passed on the 28th of April. The 19th of May,
+being Whitsunday, we passed the tropic of Capricorn, so that we were
+complete seven weeks under the torrid zone.
+
+Almost every day, while between the tropics, we saw various kinds of
+fish, in greater abundance than elsewhere. As the whale, or mighty
+_Leviathan_, whom God hath created to take his pastime in the seas;
+Dolphins also, and Albicores, with Bonitoes, flying-fishes, and many
+others. Some whales were of an exceeding greatness, which, in calm
+weather, would often rise and shew themselves above the water, appearing
+like vast rocks; and, while rising, they would spout up a great quantity
+of water into the air, with much noise, which fell down again around
+them like heavy rain. The dolphin is called, from the swiftness of its
+motion, the arrow of the sea. This fish differs from many others, in
+having teeth on the top of its tongue. It is pleasing to the eye, the
+smell, and the taste, having a changeable colour, finned like a roach,
+covered with very small scales, giving out a delightful scent above all
+other fishes, and is in taste as good as any. These dolphins are very
+apt to follow our ships, not, so far as I think, from any love they bear
+for men, as some authors write, but to feed upon what may be thrown
+overboard. Whence it comes to pass that they often become food to us;
+for, when they swim close by the ships, they are struck by a broad
+instrument full of barbed points, called a harping-iron, to which a rope
+is fastened, by which to pull the instrument and the fish on board. This
+beautiful dolphin may be taken as an emblem of a race of men, who, under
+sweet countenances, carry sharp tongues. The bonitoes and albicores are
+much like our mackerels in colour, shape, and taste, but grow to a very
+large size. The flying-fishes live the most unhappy lives of all others,
+as they are persecuted in the water by the dolphins, bonitoes, and
+albicores, and when they endeavour to escape from their enemies in the
+water, by rising up in flight, they are assailed by ravenous fowls in
+the air, somewhat like our kites, which hover over the water in waiting
+for their appearance in the other element. These flying-fishes are like
+men who profess two trades and thrive in neither.
+
+Early in the morning of the 12th June, we espied our long-wished-for
+harbour, the bay of Saldanha, [Table-bay] about twelve leagues short
+from the Cape of Good Hope, into which we came happily to anchor that
+same forenoon. We here found one of the Company's ships, the Lion,
+commanded by Captain Newport, come from Surat, and homeward-bound for
+England. We made ourselves merry with each other on this happy meeting;
+and having a fair gale, the Lion sailed on the night of the 14th. We
+found here water in abundance, but little refreshments for our sick men,
+except fresh fish, as the natives brought us nothing. We remained in
+this harbour till the 28th, on which day we departed, the Swan steering
+her course for Bantam. The 29th we doubled the Cape of Good Hope, in the
+lat. of 35 deg. S. Off this cape there continually sets a most violent
+current to the westwards, whence it happens, when it is met by a strong
+contrary wind, their impetuous opposition occasions so rough a sea that
+some ships have been swallowed up, and many more endangered among these
+mountainous waves. Few ships pass this way without encountering a storm.
+
+The 22d of July we got sight of the great island of Madagascar, commonly
+called of St Lawrence, being between that island and the main, but
+touched not there. Proceeding on our course, on the 1st of August we
+fell in with a part of the main land of Africa, called Boobam,[224] in
+lat. 16 deg. 35' S. the variation being 13 deg. 12'. The 5th we drew near the
+little islands of Mohelia, Gazidia, and St Juan de Castro, [Moelia,
+Hinzuan or Johanna, Mayotta or St Christopher, and Augasi,] generally
+known by the name of the Komoro islands, in about the lat. of 12 deg. S.
+
+[Footnote 224: The head-land of Mosambique is probably here meant.--E.]
+
+Early in the morning of the 6th of August, our men in the tops looking
+out for land, espied a sail about three or four leagues off directly in
+our course. About noon, the Globe, which was our smallest ship, and
+sailed better than the rest of the fleet, came up with her on the
+broadside to windward, and hailed her according to the custom of the
+sea, asking whence she came? She answered, indirectly, that she came
+from the sea, and her people insulted ours most outrageously, calling
+them thieves, rogues, heretics, and devils; and, in conclusion of their
+rude compliments, spoke in the loud language of the cannon's roar,
+discharging seven pieces of large artillery at our Globe, six of the
+balls piercing her hull, and maiming some of her men, but killing none.
+Our Globe replied in the same voice, and afterwards fell astern and
+stood in for our general and the rest of our fleet, now four sail in
+all, shewing us the discourtesy of the Portuguese.
+
+About three in the afternoon, the Charles, our admiral, came up with the
+Portuguese ship, which was the admiral of the caracks that sailed this
+year from Lisbon, but had parted from all the rest of their fleet. When
+within pistol-shot, Captain Benjamin Joseph, our commander, proceeded
+deliberately to work, offering treaty before he attempted revenge. So we
+saluted her with our trumpets, to which she replied with her
+wind-instruments. Captain Joseph then called out, that their commander
+might come on board, to make satisfaction for the wrong they had done to
+our consort. They made answer, that they had no boat; on which our
+general said he would send them one, and immediately caused his barge to
+be manned and sent to the carack, which brought back one of their
+officers and two mean men, with this answer from their commander, that
+he had resolved never to leave his ship, to which he might be forced,
+but would not be commanded to leave her.
+
+On receiving this message, Captain Joseph used them civilly who had
+brought it, and commanded them to be shewn our ship, and how she was
+prepared to vindicate our honour. This made the poor Portuguese much
+afraid, and they desired Captain Joseph to write a few words to their
+commander, which, added to their persuasions, might perchance induce him
+to come to terms. Willing to preserve his honour, and to prevent the
+effusion of blood, Captain Joseph caused a few words to be written to
+the Portuguese commander, to the following effect:--"Whereas the
+commander of the carack has offered violence to our ship the Globe,
+while sailing peaceably beside him, he is desired to come aboard
+immediately, and give satisfaction for that wrong, or else at his
+peril," &c. He then sent back the Portuguese, accompanied by one of our
+master's mates, carrying the writing, together with this verbal message,
+"That if he refused to come, he would force him, or sink by his side."
+The words of dying men are said to be prophetic, so these his words came
+to pass, for he was slain not long after by a great shot from the
+carack.
+
+Notwithstanding this message, the Portuguese commander remained firmly
+to his resolute answer. Wherefore, on the return of our men, Captain
+Joseph himself fired the three first shots, which surely did them much
+mischief; as we conjectured, by the loud outcry we heard among them
+after these shots were fired. The shot now flew thick from both sides;
+and our captain, chearing his men to behave gallantly, ascended the
+half-deck, where he had not been above ten minutes when a great shot
+from the quarter of the carack deprived him of life in the twinkling of
+an eye. It hit him fair in the breast, beating his heart and other parts
+out of his body, which lay round him among his blood. After he was
+slain, our master continued the fight for about half an hour, when,
+considering that another person was to succeed in the supreme command,
+and the night approaching, he thought proper to desist, and having
+fallen astern, he hung out a flag as a signal of council, to call the
+captain of the vice-admiral on board, Captain Henry Pepwell, who was to
+succeed, together with the other masters, that they might consult about
+the prosecution of this enterprize. As the night was now come, it was
+resolved not to proceed any farther for the present. So the carack
+proceeded on her course, putting up a light on her poop, as if in
+defiance of us to follow, and about midnight came to anchor under the
+island of Moelia; and when we perceived this island, we too let fall our
+anchors.
+
+Early in the morning of the 7th, before day began to dawn, we prepared
+for a new assault, first recommending ourselves to God in prayer. When
+morning came, we found the carack so close to the shore, and the nearest
+of our other ships at least a league from us, that we held our hands for
+that day, waiting till the carack might weigh and stand out to sea, as
+fitter there to deal with her. In the afternoon, we chested our slain
+commander, and committed him to the deep, over against the isle of
+Moelia, omitting any ceremony of firing funeral-guns usual on such
+occasions, that the enemy might not know our loss.
+
+A little before night the carack put to sea, when we also weighed and
+made sail after her. The day now left us, and our proud enemy,
+unwilling, as it seems, to have the appearance of escaping by flight,
+put forth a light on his poop as before, as if for us to follow him,
+which we did to some purpose. The night being well spent, we again
+commended ourselves and our cause to God in prayer. Soon afterwards, the
+day began to dawn, and appeared as if covered by a red mantle, which
+proved a bloody one to many who now beheld the light for the last time.
+It was now resolved that our four ships were to take their turns in
+succession, to endeavour to force this proud Portuguese either to bend
+or break. Our ship, the Charles, played her part first;[225] and ere she
+had been half an hour engaged with her adversary, a shot from the carack
+hitting one of our iron guns on the half-deck, flew all in pieces,
+dangerously wounding our new general, and three other mariners who stood
+beside him. Captain Pepwell's left eye was beaten out, and he received
+two other wounds in his head, and a third in his leg, a ragged piece of
+the broken shot sticking fast in the bone, which seemed, by his
+complaining, to afflict him more than the rest. Thus was our new
+commander welcomed to his authority, and we all considered his wounds as
+mortal; but he lived till about fourteen months afterwards, when he died
+peaceably in his bed, on his way back to England.
+
+[Footnote 225: This account of the battle is chiefly taken from Terry,
+who is more particular in his narrative; but Childe says that Captain
+Pepwell, the new general, gave him leave to begin this day's action, as
+his ship sailed better, and that, after three or four broadsides, he
+gave place to the general. According to modern naval tactics, all four
+at once would have assailed the enemy, taking vantage stations on her
+quarters and bows.--E.]
+
+By the same shot, Mr Richard Hounsell, the master of our ship, had a
+great piece of the flesh of his arm carried off, which rendered him
+unserviceable for a time. The captain and master being thus disabled,
+deputed their authority to the chief master's mate, who behaved with
+great prudence and resolution. Thus we continued one after the other to
+fight all day, the vice-admiral and the Globe and James taking their
+turns in succession. Between three and four in the afternoon, the
+mainmast of the carack fell overboard, and presently afterwards the
+foremast and mizen followed, and she had received so many and large
+wounds in her thick sides, that her case was quite desperate, and she
+must soon either yield or perish. Her commander, Don Emanuel de Meneses,
+a brave and resolute person, stood in for the shore in this distressed
+condition, being not far from the island of Gazidia.[226] We pursued as
+far as we durst venture, without hazard of shipwreck, but gave over at
+five o'clock, when about a league from the shore, which is extremely
+steep, and no ground to be had within less than a cable's length of the
+rocks, the shore being moreover to leeward.
+
+[Footnote 226: According to Childe, it was the most northern of the
+islands, named Komoro, or Augasi, not far north from Moelia, where the
+fight began,--E.]
+
+We now sent off our barge with a flag of truce to speak the carack, and
+as he waved us with a similar flag, Mr Connock, our chief merchant, who
+was employed on this occasion, boldly went aboard the carack, and
+delivered a message to Don Emanuel, stating, that he brought an offer of
+life and peace if he would accept it; and as he deserved well for his
+undaunted valour, so he should be honourably and respectfully treated if
+he would put himself into our hands, and sent to Goa in safety. He,
+however, as an oak gathering strength from his wounds,[227] and
+contemning the misery he could not prevent, resolutely answered Mr
+Connock to the following purpose: "That no misfortune should make him
+alter his former resolution; for he was determined again to stand out to
+sea, if possible, and to encounter us again; and then, if forced by fire
+and sword, he might by bad chance be taken, but he would never yield;
+and, if taken alive, he hoped to find the respect due to a gentleman,
+till when we had our answer."
+
+[Footnote 227: Duris, ut ilex tonsa bipennibus-ducit opes animumque
+ferro.--_Terry._]
+
+Our messenger was thus dismissed, and shortly afterwards this sore
+distressed ship, being entirely unmanageable for want of masts and
+sails, was forced by the winds and waves upon the adjacent island of
+Gazidia or Komoro, where she stuck fast between two rocks. Those who
+remained alive in the carack got ashore by means of their boats; and
+when all were landed, willing, as it would seem, to consume what they
+could not keep, they set their carack on fire, that she might not become
+our prize.[228] After leaving their ill-fated carack, the poor
+Portuguese were most inhumanly used by the barbarous islanders, who
+spoiled them of every thing they had brought on shore for their succour,
+and slew some of them for opposing their cupidity. Doubtless they had
+been all massacred, had they not been relieved by two small Arab vessels
+who were there engaged in trade, and which, I suppose in hope of a great
+reward, took them in, and conveyed them in safety to their own city of
+Goa.
+
+[Footnote 228: Childe says, he could not say whether she was fired
+accidentally or on purpose.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 9th, Mr Alexander Childe, who commanded one of the
+English ships, sent his mate, Anthony Fugars, ashore in his long-boat,
+to see if any of the Portuguese were saved, to fetch such away, and to
+learn how she was set on fire. But the carack was still burning, and not
+a man belonging to her was to be seen. There were many negro islanders
+on the coast, over against the carack, who held up a flag of truce to
+invite the English on shore, but it was impossible to land in that
+place, or any where within three leagues to the east or west, as the
+rocks were all extremely high and rugged.
+
+In this long conflict, only five men were lost out of our four ships,
+three belonging to the admiral, and two out of the James. Besides whom,
+there were about twenty wounded in our fleet, all of whom afterwards
+recovered. But, of 700 who sailed in the carack, there came not above
+250 to Goa, as we were afterwards credibly informed. In this fearful
+engagement, our ship, the Charles, discharged 375 great shot against the
+adversary, as reported by our gunners, besides 100 musqueteers who plied
+their small arms all the time. Neither were the enemy idle, for our ship
+received at least 100 great shot from them, many of which dangerously
+took place in her hull. Our foremast was shot through the middle, our
+mainmast wounded, the main stay, and many of the main shrouds, cut
+asunder.
+
+After we had seen the carack set on fire, which was about midnight of
+the 8th, we stood off and on till morning, to see if we might find any
+thing in her ashes. Finding this ineffectual, we sought about for some
+place where we might find succour and refreshment for our sick and
+wounded on shore. The land was very high, and the sea every where too
+deep for anchoring, so that it was the 10th before we could find a good
+harbour, which was in the S.W. part of the island, where we anchored.
+The James came to anchor in twenty-two fathoms, with one of her anchors,
+while the other was only in fourteen. This harbour was over against a
+town called Mattoma.
+
+This island seemed very pleasant, full of goodly trees, covered all over
+with green pasture, and abounding in beeves, goats, poultry,
+sugar-canes, rice, plantains, lemons, oranges, and cocoa-nuts, with many
+other wholesome things; of all which we procured sufficient to relieve
+our whole company for a small quantity of white paper, a few glass
+beads, and penny knives. For instance, we bought as many oranges as
+would fill a hat for half a quarter of a sheet of white paper, and all
+other kinds of provision in the same proportion. The islanders brought
+much of their fruits to us in their little canoes, which are long and
+narrow boats, like troughs, hollowed out of single trees; but their
+cattle we bought on shore. I observed the people to be straight,
+well-limbed, and able-bodied men, of a very dark tawny colour. Most of
+the men, and all the women, were entirely naked, except merely enough to
+hide their parts of shame. Some few of the men wore long garments, after
+the fashion of the Arabs, whose language they spoke, and were likewise
+of the Mahometan religion, and so rigid, that they would not suffer us
+to come near their places of worship. They have good convenient
+dwellings, and fair sepulchres for their dead.
+
+They scorned to live under strict obedience to a king, whose residence
+was some miles up the country, as they required to have his leave, which
+was sent for, before they would sell us any provisions. When informed of
+our arrival, their king sent a message of welcome to our commander,
+together with a present of beeves, goats, and choice fruits; in return
+for which, he was well recompensed and contented, by a present of paper,
+and other English toys. We saw some Spanish money among them, of which
+they made so small account, that some of our men got rials of eight, in
+exchange for a little paper, or a few beads. What use they made of the
+paper, we could not guess. The cocoa-nut tree, of which this island has
+abundance, may have the pre-eminence of all trees, in my opinion, by its
+universal usefulness. Without the help of any other, one may build and
+furnish out a ship for sea, with every thing requisite. Of the body of
+this tree may be made timbers, planks, and masts; its gum may serve for
+paying the bottom; the rind of the same tree will make sails and
+cordage; and the large nut, being full of kernel and pleasant liquor,
+will serve those who navigate the ship both for meat and drink, as also
+for merchandize.
+
+Being well stored with these nuts, and other good provisions, after six
+days abode here, the breaches in our ships received in fight being all
+repaired, and our men well refreshed, we put again to sea on the 16th of
+August, with a prosperous wind. On the 24th, we passed under the line,
+without any heat to offend us, bending our course for Socotora, near the
+mouth of the Red Sea, an island whence comes our Socotorine aloes. But
+an adverse wind from the coast of Arabia prevented us from being able to
+fetch that island, which we passed on the 1st September.
+
+In the year before, our English fleet touched at this island, on which
+occasion the petty king came to the water-side, and hearing some of our
+wind-instruments, asked if they ever played David's Psalms, which he had
+heard of, being a Mahometan. He was answered by one who stood by, that
+they did. On which he observed, that it was an evil invention of him who
+first mingled music with religion; as God, before that, was worshipped
+in heart, but by this only in sound. I mean not by this story to condemn
+the use of music in churches; leaving it to him who bids us praise the
+Lord with stringed instruments and organs, to plead that cause.
+
+Missing our port of Socotora, we proceeded on our voyage; and, on the
+4th of September, we celebrated a solemn funeral in memory of our slain
+commander; when, after sermon, the great guns and small arms gave a loud
+peal to his honourable remembrance. At night on the 6th September, to
+our great admiration and fear, the water of the sea seemed as white as
+milk. Others of our nation since, passing in the same course, have
+observed the same phenomenon, of which I am yet to learn the cause, as
+it was far from any shore, and we could find no ground.
+
+On the 21st of September we discovered the main land of India; and on
+the 22d had sight of Diu and Damaun, cities inhabited by the Portuguese.
+The 25th we came safely to anchor in Swally roads, within the bay of
+Cambay, which is the harbour for our fleet while in this part of India,
+when we were visited by the merchants of the Surat factory, the
+principal of whom was Mr Thomas Kerridge.
+
+Sec.2. _Description of the Mogul Empire_
+
+Although this account of Hindoostan, or the Mogul empire in India, be
+very incorrect, and in some places hardly intelligible, it is here
+retained, as a curious record of the knowledge possessed on that subject
+by the English about 200 years ago. We have two editions of this account
+in Purchas, one appended to his narrative of Sir Thomas Roe, and the
+other in this relation by Terry, which he acknowledges to be the most
+correct, and which therefore is alone retained. On the present occasion,
+instead of encumbering the bottoms of our pages with the display of
+numerous explanatory notes on this topographical list of places and
+provinces, a running commentary has been introduced into the text, so
+far as seemed necessary, yet distinguished sufficiently from the
+original notices by Terry. The observations, by way of commentary, are
+marked, as this paragraph.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The large empire of the Great Mogul is bounded on the east by the
+kingdom of Maug;[229] on the west by Persia; on the north by the
+mountains of Caucasus [Hindoo-Kho] and Tartary; and on the south by the
+ocean, the Deccan, and the bay of Bengal. The Deccan is divided among
+three Mahometan kings and some Indian rajahs. This extensive monarchy of
+the Mogul is called, in the Persian language, by the Mahometan
+inhabitants, Indostan or Hindoostan, meaning the land of the Hindoos,
+and is divided into _thirty-seven_ distinct and large provinces, which
+were anciently separate kingdoms. Their several names, with their
+principal cities, their rivers, situations, and borders, together with
+their length and breadth, I shall now enumerate, beginning at the
+north-west.
+
+[Footnote 229: Meckely, now a province of the Birman empire; perhaps
+called Maug in the text, from a barbarous tribe called the Muggs, or
+Maugs, who inhabit, or did inhabit, the mountains east of Bengal, and
+who are said to have laid waste and depopulated the Sunderbunds, or
+Delta of the Ganges.--E.] 1. _Candahar,_ the chief city of which is of
+the same name, lies N.W. from the heart or centre of the Mogul
+territory, bordering upon Persia, of which kingdom it was formerly a
+province.
+
+2. _Cabul,_ with its chief city of the same name, lies in the extremest
+north-west corner of this empire, bordering to the north on Tartary for
+a great way. The river Nilab takes its rise in this country, and runs to
+the southwards, till it discharges its waters into the Indus.--This is a
+material error. The Nilab is the main stream of the Indus, and rises far
+to the north in Little Thibet, a great way N.E. of Cabul. The river of
+Cabul is the Kameh, which runs S.E. and joins the Nilab, Sinde, or
+Indus, a few miles above Attock. Another river, in the south of Cabul,
+called the Cow, or Coumul, follows a similar direction, and falls into
+the western side of the Indus, about forty miles below the Kameh.--E.
+
+3. _Multan,_ Moultan or Mooltan, having its chief city of the same name,
+is south [south-east] from Cabul and Candahar, and on the west joins
+with Persia.--This is an error, as Hajykan, to be noticed next in
+order, is interposed.--E.
+
+4. _Hajacan,_ or Hajykan, the kingdom of the Baloches, who are a stout
+warlike people, has no renowned city. The famous river Indus, called
+_Skind_ [Sind or Sindeh] by the inhabitants, borders it on the east, and
+Lar, or Laristan, meets it on the west, a province belonging to Shah
+Abbas, the present king of Persia.--In modern geography, the country of
+the Ballogees, or Baloches, is placed considerably more to the
+north-west, bordering on the south-east of Candahar; and the Sewees are
+placed more immediately west of this province. The seats, however, of
+barbarous hordes, in a waste and almost desert country, are seldom
+stationary for any continuance; and the Ballogees and Sewees are
+probably congeneric tribes, much intermixed, and having no fixed
+boundaries. We have formerly seen the Baloches, or a tribe of that
+nation, inhabiting the oceanic coast of Persia about Guadel, and one of
+their tribes may have been in possession of Hajykan, which perhaps
+derived its name from their chief or khan having made the Haji, or
+pilgrimage of Mecca. The assertion that Hajykan joins with Lar, or
+Laristan, is grossly erroneous, as the eastern provinces of Persia which
+confine with Hindoostan, are Segistan in the north, bordering with
+Candahar, and Mekran in the south, bordering with the provinces of
+Hindoostan which are to the west of the Indus. Lar or Laristan is a
+Persian province within the gulf of Persia, at least 850 English miles
+from the most westerly part of Hindoostan.--E.
+
+5. _Buckor_, or Backar, its chief city being Buckor-Suckor. The river
+Indus pervades this province, which it greatly enriches.--In modern
+maps, the city of Backar is placed in a small island in the middle of
+the Indus, at the junction of the Dummoddy from the N.E. Suckar, whence
+probably our word sugar is derived, is given as a distinct place, on the
+western side of the Indus. Indeed, in the map of India given in the
+Pilgrims, Backar and Suckar are made distinct places, but their
+situations are reversed.--E.
+
+6. _Tatta_, with its chief city of the same name. This province is
+exceedingly fertile and pleasant, being divided into many islands by the
+Indus, the chief arm of which meets the sea at Synde, a place very
+famous for curious handicrafts.--The most western branch of the Indus,
+called the Pitty river, from a place of that name on its western shore
+near the mouth, is probably that here meant. That branch leads to
+Larry-bunder, the sea-port of Tatta; and the Synde of Terry is probably
+the Diul-sinde of other authors, a place situated somewhat in this
+neighbourhood, but which is not to be found in modern maps.--E.
+
+7. _Soret_, the chief city of which is called Janagur, is a small, but
+rich province, which lies west from Guzerat, having the ocean to the
+south.--Soret is not now recognized as a distinct province or district,
+but seems the modern Werrear, the western district of Guzerat,
+Rhadunpoor appearing to be its chief town. Janagur, in this district, is
+on the west side of the river Butlass, or Banass, which runs into the
+head of the gulf of Cutch.--E.
+
+8. _Jesselmere_, of which the chief city has the same name, joins with
+Soret Backar and Tatta, being to the south of Soret and Tatta, and
+having Backar on the west.
+
+9. _Attock_, the chief city being of the same name, lies on the east
+side of the Indus, which parts it from Hajykan.--This account is
+erroneous, as Attock-Benares is much farther up the river Indus than
+Hajykan, having the eastern extremity of Cabul on the opposite side of
+the Indus.--E.
+
+10. _Punjab_, which signifies the _five waters_, because it is seated
+among five rivers, all tributaries to the Indus, which, somewhat to the
+south of Lahore, form only one river. This is a great kingdom, and
+extremely rich and fertile. Lahore, the chief city, is well built, very
+large, populous, and rich, being the chief mart of trade in all India.
+
+11. _Chishmeere_, Kyshmir, Cachmir, or Cashmere, its chief city being
+Siranakar. The river Phat passes through this country, and, after
+creeping about many islands, falls into the Indus.--The rivers of
+Cashmere, here called the Phat, are the Chota-sing, or Jellum, in the N.
+and the Jellium, or Colhumah, in the S. which unite in the W. to form
+the Jhylum or Babut, the Phat or Bhat of Terry and Purchas, and the
+Hydaspes of the ancients, one of the _five rivers_ of the Indus. The
+present capital of Cashmere is likewise named Cashmere; but has in its
+close neighbourhood a town or fortress called Sheergur, the Siranakar of
+Terry.--E.
+
+12. _Banchish_, with its chief city named Bishur. It lies east southerly
+from Cashmere, from which it is divided by the river Indus.--No such
+province or city is to be found in the modern geography of Hindoostan,
+neither any names in the indicated direction that have any resemblance
+to these. In the map of the Mogul empire in the Pilgrims, appended to
+the journal of Sir Thomas Roe, Banchish and Bishar are placed on a river
+named the Kaul, being the _fourth_ of the Punjab or five rivers,
+counting from the west, and therefore probably the Ravey, or Hydraotes
+of the ancients. Near the head of that river, and to the east of
+Cashmere, is a town, called Kishtewar, which may possibly have been the
+Bishur of Terry: But there is a little-known district near the head of
+the Jumna, S.S.E. from Cashmere, named Besseer, that has considerable
+resemblance in sound to Bishur, and is in the indicated direction.--E.
+
+13. _Jeugapor_, with its chief city likewise so named, lies on the Kaul,
+one of the five rivers that water the Punjab.--The only place upon the
+Ravey, which answers to the Kaul, which has the smallest resemblance
+with Jengapor, or Jenupur, as it is likewise called by Purchas, is
+Shawpoor, N.E. from Agra. Yet Jaypoor, otherwise called Jyenagur, in
+Ajmeer, is more probably the district and city here meant, though not in
+the Punjab.--E.
+
+14. _Jenba_, its chief city so called, lies east of the Punjab.--This
+may possibly be Jambae, north of Lahore.--E.
+
+15. _Delli_, or Delhi, its chief city being of the same name, lies
+between Jenba and Agra, the river Jemni, which runs through Agra and
+falls into the Ganges, begins in this province. Delhi is a great and
+ancient city, the seat of the Mogul's ancestors, and where most of them
+are interred.--The Jumnah, or Jemni of Terry, rises far to the north of
+Delhi, in the high-peaked mountain of Cantal to the east of
+Cashmere.--E.
+
+16. _Bando_, its chief city so called, borders with Agra on the
+west.--No such name is to be found in modern maps.--E.
+
+17. _Malwa_ is a very fertile province, of which Rantipore is the chief
+city.--In the other edition of this list in the Pilgrims, Ugen, Nar, and
+Sering, or Oojain, Indore, and Serong, are said to have been the
+capitals of Malwa. The Rantipore of Terry may have been that now called
+Ramypoor.--E.
+
+18. _Chitor_, an ancient and great kingdom, its chief city being of the
+same name.--Chitore is in the south of Ajmeer. In the edition of this
+list given by Purchas at the end of the journal of Sir Thomas Roe, he
+gives the following account of Chitore: "Chitore stands upon a mighty
+hill, and is walled round in a circuit of ten English miles. There still
+remain at this place above an hundred temples, the palace of the
+ancient kings, and many brave pillars of carved stone. There is but one
+ascent to the place, cut out of the solid rock, and passing through four
+magnificent gateways. Within the walls are the ruins of 100,000 houses
+of stone, but it is now uninhabited. This was doubtless one of the
+residences of Porus, and was won from the Ranna, his descendant, by
+Akbar shah, the father of the reigning Mogul. The Ranna fled into the
+fastnesses of his mountains, and took up his residence at Odeypoor; but
+was at length induced, in 1614, to acknowledge the Mogul as his superior
+lord, by Sultan Churrum, third son of the present emperor Shah
+Jehanguire. This kingdom lies N.W. from Candeish, N.E. from Guzerat, and
+in the way between Agra and Surat; the Ranna keeping among the hills to
+the west of Ahmedabad.--"_Purch._
+
+19. _Guzerat_ is a goodly and mighty kingdom, and exceedingly rich,
+which incloses the bay of Cambay. The river Taptee waters the city of
+Surat, which trades to the Red Sea, to Acheen, and to divers other
+places.
+
+20. _Khamdesh_, the chief city of which is Brampore, [Boorhanpoor, or
+Burhampore,] which is large and populous. Adjoining to this province is
+a petty prince called Partap-shah, tributary to the Mogul; and this is
+the most southerly part of the Mogul dominions.
+
+21. _Berar_, the chief city of which is called Shahpoor. The
+southernmost part of this province likewise bounds the Mogul
+empire.--The Shahpoor of Terry may possibly be Saipoor in the north of
+Berar. In modern days, the chief cities of the great province or kingdom
+of Berar, now belonging to a Mahratta chief; are Nagpoor, Ruthunpoor,
+and Sonepoor.--E.
+
+22. _Narwar_, its chief city being Gohud, is watered by a fair river
+that falls into the Ganges.--This province of Narwar, now called Gohud,
+from its chief city, is to be carefully distinguished from Marwar to the
+westwards.--E.
+
+22. _Gualior_, with its chief city of the same name, in which the Mogul
+has a great treasury in bullion. In this city likewise there is an
+exceedingly strong castle, in which state prisoners are kept.--Gualior
+is, properly speaking, in the same province or district with Gohud.--E.
+
+24. _Agra_ is a principal and great province, its chief city being of
+the same name. From Agra to Lahore, the two chief cities of this empire,
+the distance is about 400 English miles, the country in all that
+distance being without a hill, and the road being planted the whole way
+with trees on both sides, forming a beautiful avenue.
+
+25. _Sanbal_, with its chief city of the same name. The river Jumna
+parts this province from that called Narwar.--This province and city are
+not to be traced in modern maps.--E.
+
+26. _Bakar_, the chief city of which is Bikaneer, lies on the west side
+of the Ganges.--Nothing resembling either name can now be found in the
+indicated situation in modern maps. Bicaneer is a district and town in
+the desert, far west of the Ganges.--E.
+
+27. _Nagracutt_, or Nakarkut, with its chief city of the same name, in
+which there is a temple most richly adorned, the ceiling and pavement
+being of plates of pure gold. In this place they have an idol called
+Matta, visited yearly by many thousands of the Indians, who, from
+devotion, cut out part of their tongues, which they sacrifice at his
+altar. In this province likewise, there is another famous place of
+pilgrimage, Jallamaka, where there are daily to be seen incessant
+eruptions of fire, out of cold springs and hard rocks, before which the
+idolaters fall down and worship.--In the edition of this list, appended
+by Purchas to the journal of Sir Thomas Roe, this district and city are
+said to be in the northeasternmost confines of the Mogul dominions, N.E.
+from the head of the bay of Bengal. This description is however entirely
+at variance with the accompanying map in the Pilgrims, in which
+Nagracutt and its capital are placed east from the Punjab; the capital
+being on the easternmost of the five rivers of the Setlege, and towards
+its head. In the edition of this list given by Churchill, as an appendix
+likewise to Sir Thomas Roe, Nagracutt is said to lie to the north,
+between the Punjab and Jamboe. In our best modern maps, no district or
+place, having the smallest resemblance in name, is to be found in any of
+these indicated situations. Terry gives no reference as to situation; so
+that we may conjecture that Nagracutt may refer to Nucker-gaut, the
+passage of the Ganges through the Sewalick mountains, between Serinagur
+and Hindoostan.--E.
+
+28. _Siba_, the chief city of which is Hardwair, or Hurdwar, where the
+famous river Ganges seems to begin, and issues out of a rock, which the
+superstitious Gentiles imagine resembles a cow's head, which animal they
+hold in the highest veneration; and to this place they resort daily in
+great numbers to wash themselves.
+
+29. _Kakares_, the principal cities being Dankalec and Purhola. This
+country is very mountainous, and is divided from Tartary by the
+mountains of Caucasus, being the farthest north of any part of the Mogul
+dominions.--In the map of Purchas, this province or kingdom is called
+Kares, and is placed directly to the north of where the Ganges breaks
+through the Sewalick mountains, above Hurdwar, at the _Cow's-mouth_. In
+that direction are the little-known districts of Serinagur,
+Badry-cazram, and others; but no names either of towns or districts that
+in the least resemble those given by Terry.--E.
+
+30. _Gor_, its chief city of the same name. This province is full of
+mountains, and in it begins the river Persilis, which discharges its
+waters into the Ganges.--In the other copy of this list in Purchas, so
+often already referred to, Gor is said to lie in the northern part of
+the Mogul dominions. From this, and the mountainous nature of the
+country, as stated by Terry, it may possibly be Gorcah, one of the
+little-known _twenty-four rajahs_, to the west of Napaul; and the
+Persilis of Terry may be the Sursutty or the Marshandy, both head
+streams of the Gunduck.--E.
+
+31. _Pitan_, and its chief city so named. The river Kanda waters this
+province, and falls into the Ganges on its confines.--This is probably
+one of the _twenty-four_ rajahs, called Peytahn, in the mountainous
+country to the north of Oude, which is watered by several of the head
+streams of the Gunduck and Booree or Rapty rivers.--E.
+
+32. _Kanduana_, the chief city of which is called Karhakatenka. The
+river Sersili parts it from Pitan; and this province, with Pitan and
+Gor, are the north-east boundaries of this great monarchy.--The
+indicated connection with Gor and Pitan, or Gorcah and Peytahn, would
+lead to suppose that Napaul is here meant. Karhakatenka may possibly be
+some name of Catmandoo, or may have some reference to Kyraut, a district
+in the east of Napaul, bordering on Bootan. The river Sersili of this
+district is evidently the Persilis mentioned in Gor, and may refer to
+the Sursutty.--E.
+
+33. _Patna_, the chief city of which has the same name. The river
+Ganges bounds this province on the west, and the Sersilis on the east.
+It is a very fertile province.--In the former edition of this list by
+Purchas, this province is said to be watered by four rivers, the Ganges,
+Jumna, Sersili, and Kanda, all of which rivers here unite. Patna is
+seated on the south side of the Ganges, which is joined a little way
+higher up by the Jumna. Opposite to Patna the Gunduck falls into the
+Ganges, probably the Kanda of Purchas, of which the Sursutty, formerly
+supposed to be the same with the Sersili, or Persilis, is one of the
+feeders. Patna is well known as a principal city of Bahar.--E.
+
+34. _Jesual_, the chief city of which is called Rajapore, lies east of
+Patna.--This may possibly refer to the district and city of Hajipoor in
+Bahar, to the N.E. of Patna.--E.
+
+35. _Mevat_, the chief city of which province is Narnol, is a very
+mountainous country.--In the map of the Pilgrims, Mevat and Narnol are
+placed to the east of Jesual, but the geography of this part of
+Hindoostan in that map is utterly unintelligible, and no conjecture can
+be hazarded respecting either Mevat or Narnol.--E.
+
+36. _Udessa_, the chief city of which is called Jokanat, is the most
+easterly territory in the kingdom of the Mogul.--In the other edition of
+this list given by Purchas, Udessa, or Udeza, is said to border on the
+kingdom of Maug, a savage people dwelling between this province and the
+kingdom of Pegu. Its eastern situation would lead to the province of
+Chittagong or Islambabad. The Maugs, or Mugs, are probably the barbarous
+mountaineers of Meckley to the north of Aracan; but no names in modern
+maps have any reference to Udessa, Udeza, or Jokanat, unless Jokanat be
+some strange corruption of Chittagong.--E.
+
+37. _Bengal_, a mighty and fertile kingdom, bounded by the gulf or bay
+of the same name, into which the river Ganges discharges itself by four
+great branches, into which it divides.--In the other edition of this
+list, by Purchas, so often referred to, Ragamahall and Dakaka, or
+Rajemal and Dacca, are mentioned as the chief cities of Bengal. It would
+require far too long a commentary, to explain some farther ignorant
+indications of the havens and provinces of Bengal, contained in that
+former list, and in the map of the Pilgrims; both being so faulty in
+positions, and so corrupted in the names, as to be useless and
+unintelligible. By the labours of Rennel, as since extended and improved
+by Arrowsmith, the geography of Bengal is now as completely elucidated
+as that of Britain.--E.
+
+Here I must take notice of a material error in our geographers, who, in
+their globes and maps, make Hindoostan and China neighbours, though many
+large countries are interposed between them. Their great distance may
+appear, from the long travels of the Indian merchants, who are usually
+more than two years in their journey and return, between Agra and the
+wall of China. The length of these before-named provinces, from N.W. to
+S.E. is at least 1000 cosses, every Indian coss being two English miles.
+From N. to S. the extent is about 1400 miles. The greatest breadth, from
+N.E. to S.W. is about 1500 miles. The northernmost part is in 43 deg. of
+north latitude.[230]
+
+[Footnote 230: The northern mountains of Cashmere, are only in lat. 35 deg.
+30' N. so that the 43 deg. of the text is probably a mistake for 34 deg..--E.]
+
+To give an exact account of all these provinces, were more than I am
+able to undertake; yet, from what I have observed of a few, I may
+venture to conjecture concerning the rest, and I am convinced that the
+Great Mogul, considering the extent of his territories, his wealth, and
+the rich commodities of his dominions, is the greatest known monarch of
+the east, if not in the whole world. This widely extended sovereignty is
+so rich and fertile, and so abounding in all things for the use of man,
+that it is able to subsist and flourish of itself, without the help of
+any neighbour. To speak first of food, which nature requires most. This
+land abounds in singularly good wheat, rice, barley, and various other
+grains, from which to make bread, the staff of life. Their wheat grows
+like ours, but the grain is somewhat larger and whiter, of which the
+inhabitants make most pure and well-relished bread. The common people
+make their bread in cakes, which they bake or fire on portable iron
+hearths or plates, which they carry with them on their journeys, using
+them in their tents. This seems to be an ancient custom, as appears from
+the instance of Sarah in our bible, when she entertained the angels.
+
+To their bread, they have great abundance of other excellent provisions,
+as butter and cheese in great plenty, made from the milk of their
+numerous cows, sheep, and goats. They have likewise a large animal,
+called a buffalo, having a thick smooth skin without hair, the females
+of which give excellent milk. Their flesh resembles beef, but is not so
+sweet or wholesome. They have plenty of venison of several kinds, as red
+and fallow deer, elks, and antelopes. These are not any where kept in
+parks, the whole empire being as it were a forest, so that they are seen
+every where in travelling through the country; and they are free game
+for all men, except within a certain distance of where the king happens
+to reside. They have also plenty of hares, with a variety of land and
+water fowl, and abundance of fish, which it were too tedious to
+enumerate. Of fowls, they have geese, ducks, pigeons, partridges,
+quails, pheasants, and many other good sorts, all to be had at low
+rates. I have seen a good sheep bought for about the value of our
+shilling: four couple of hens for the same price; a hare for a penny;
+three partridges for the same money; and so in proportion for other
+things.
+
+The cattle of this country differ from ours, in having a great bunch of
+grisly flesh on the meeting of their shoulders. Their sheep have great
+bob-tails of considerable weight, and their flesh is as good as our
+English mutton, but their wool is very coarse. They have also abundance
+of salt, and sugar is so plentiful, that it sells, when well refined,
+for two-pence a pound, or less. Their fruits are numerous, excellent,
+abundant, and cheap; as musk-melons, water-melons, pomegranates,
+pomecitrons, lemons, oranges, dates, figs, grapes, plantains, which are
+long round yellow fruits, which taste like our Norwich pears; mangoes,
+in shape and colour like our apricots, but more luscious, and ananas or
+pine-apples, to crown all, which taste like a pleasing compound of
+strawberries, claret-wine, rose-water, and sugar. In the northern parts
+of the empire, they have plenty of apples and pears. They have every
+where abundance of excellent roots, as carrots, potatoes, and others;
+also garlic and onions, and choice herbs for sallads. In the southern
+parts, ginger grows almost every where.
+
+I must here mention a pleasant clear liquor called _taddy_, which issues
+from a spungy tree, growing straight and tall without boughs to the top,
+and there spreads out in branches resembling our English colewarts. They
+make their incisions, under which they hang small earthenware pots; and
+the liquor which flows out in the night is as pleasant to the taste as
+any white wine, if drank in the morning early, but it alters in the day
+by the sun's heat, becoming heady, ill-tasted and unwholesome. It is a
+most penetrating medicinal drink, if taken early and in moderation, as
+some have experienced to their great happiness, by relieving them from
+the tortures of the stone, that tyrant of maladies and opprobrium of
+the doctors.
+
+At Surat, and thence to Agra and beyond, it only rains during one season
+of the year, which begins when the sun comes to the northern tropic, and
+continues till he returns again to the line. These violent rains are
+ushered in, and take their leave, by most fearful tempests of thunder
+and lightning, more terrible than I can express, but which seldom do any
+harm. The reason of this may be the subtile nature of the air, breeding
+fewer _thunder-stones_, than where the air is grosser and more cloudy.
+In these three months, it rains every day more or less, and sometimes
+for a whole quarter of the moon without intermission. Which abundance of
+rain, together with the heat of the sun, so enriches the soil, which
+they never force by manure, that it becomes fruitful for all the rest of
+the year, as that of Egypt is by the inundations of the Nile. After this
+season of rain is over, the sky becomes so clear, that scarcely is a
+single cloud to be seen for the other nine months. The goodness of the
+soil is evident from this circumstance, that though the ground, after
+the nine months of dry weather, looks altogether like barren sands, it
+puts on an universal coat of green within seven days after the rains
+begin to fall. Farther to confirm this, among the many hundreds of acres
+I have seen in corn in India, I never saw any that did not grow up as
+thick as it could well stand. Their ground is tilled by ploughs drawn by
+oxen; the seed-time being in May or the beginning of June, and the
+harvest in November and December, the most temperate months in all the
+year. The ground is not inclosed, except near towns and villages, which
+stand very thick. They do not mow their grass for hay as we do; but cut
+it either green or withered, when wanted. They sow abundance of tobacco,
+but know not the way to cure it and make it strong, as is done in
+America.
+
+The country is beautified by many woods, in which are a great variety of
+goodly trees; but I never saw any there of the kinds we have in England.
+In general their trees are full of sap, which I ascribe to the fatness
+of the soil. Some have leaves as broad as bucklers; others are much
+divided into small portions, like the leaves of ferns. Such are those of
+the tamarind tree, which bears an acid fruit in a pod somewhat like our
+beans, and is most wholesome to cool and purify the blood. One of their
+trees is worthy of being particularly noticed: Out of its branches there
+grow certain sprigs or fibres, which hang downwards, and extend till
+they touch the ground, in which they strike roots, and become
+afterwards new trunks and firm supporters to the boughs and arms; whence
+these trees come in time to grow to a great height, and extend to an
+incredible breadth.[231] All trees in the southern parts of India are
+perpetually clothed in verdure Their flowers rather delight the eye than
+please the sense of smelling, having beautiful colours, but few of them,
+except roses and one or two other kinds, are any way fragrant.
+
+[Footnote 231: The Banian tree, a species of Indian fig.--E.]
+
+India is watered by many goodly rivers, the two chief of which are the
+Indus and the Ganges. There is this remarkable in the water of the
+Ganges, that a pint of it weighs less by an ounce than that of any other
+river in the empire; and therefore, wherever the Mogul happens to
+reside, it is brought to him for his drinking. Besides rivers, there are
+abundance of well-fed springs, on which they bestow great cost in many
+places, constructing many stone-buildings in the form of ponds, which
+they call _tanks_, some of which exceed a mile or two in circuit, made
+round or square or polygonal, girt all round with handsome stone-walls,
+within which are steps of well-dressed stone encompassing the water, for
+people to go down on every aide to procure supplies. These tanks are
+filled during the rainy season, and contain water for the supply of
+those who dwell far from springs or rivers, till the wet season again
+returns. Water, the most ancient beverage in the world, is the common
+drink of India, being more sweet and pleasant than ours, and agrees
+better with the constitution in this hot country than any other liquor.
+Some small quantity of wine is made among them, which they call arrack,
+but is not common, being distilled from sugar, and the spicy rind of a
+tree, which they call _jagra_. This is very wholesome, if used in
+moderation. Many of the people, who are strict in their religion, use no
+wine at all. They use a liquor which is more wholesome than pleasant,
+called _cohha_; being a black seed boiled in water, which does not much
+alter the taste of the water, but is an excellent helper of digestion,
+serving to quicken the spirits, and to purify the blood.[232] There is
+also another help for digestion and to comfort the stomach, used by
+those who refrain from wine. This is an herb called betel, or _paune_,
+its leaf resembling that of our ivy. They chew this leaf along with a
+hard nut, called _areka_, somewhat like a nutmeg, mixing a little pure
+white lime among the leaves; and when they have extracted the juice,
+they throw away the remains. This has many rare qualities: It preserves
+the teeth, comforts the brain, strengthens the stomach, and prevents a
+bad breath.
+
+[Footnote 232: The author here describes coffee, now so universally
+known in Europe.--E.]
+
+Their houses are generally very mean, except in the cities, where I have
+seen many fair buildings. Many of the houses in these are high, with
+flat roofs, where, in the cool of the mornings and evenings, they enjoy
+the fresh air. Their houses have no chimneys, as they use no fires,
+except for dressing their victuals. In their upper rooms, they have many
+windows and doors, for admitting light and air, but use no glass. The
+materials of their best houses are bricks and stone, well squared and
+built, as I have observed in Ahmedabad, which may serve as an instance
+for all. This is an extensive and rich city, compassed about with a
+strong stone-wall, and entered by twelve handsome gates. Both in their
+towns and villages, they have usually many fair trees among the houses,
+being a great defence against the violence of the sun. These trees are
+commonly so numerous and thick, that a city or town, when seen at a
+distance from some commanding eminence, seems a wood or thicket.
+
+The staple commodities of this empire are indigo and cotton. To produce
+cotton, they sow seeds, which grow up into bushes like our rose-trees.
+These produce first a yellow blossom, which falls off, and leaves a pod
+about the size of a man's thumb, in which the substance at first is
+moist and yellow. As this ripens, it swells larger, till at length it
+bursts the covering, the cotton being then as white as snow. It is then
+gathered. These shrubs continue to bear for three or four years, when
+they have to be rooted out, and new ones substituted. Of this vegetable
+wool, or cotton, they fabricate various kinds of pure white cloth, some
+of which I have seen as fine as our best lawns, if not finer. Some of
+the coarser sorts they dye in various colours, or stain with a variety
+of curious figures.
+
+The ships that go usually from Surat to Mokha, are of exceeding great
+burden, some of them, as I believe, exceeding 1400 or 1600 tons; but
+they are ill built, and though they have good ordnance, they are unable
+for any defence. In these ships there are yearly a vast number of
+passengers: As, for instance, in that year in which we left India, there
+came 1700 persons, most of whom went not for profit, but out of
+devotion, to visit the sepulchre of Mahomet at Medina near Mecca, about
+150 leagues from Mokha. Those who have been upon this pilgrimage are
+ever after called _hoggeis_, [_hajim_] or holy men. This ship, from
+Surat for the Red Sea, begins her voyage about the 20th of March and
+returns to Surat about the end of September following. The voyage is
+short, and might easily be made in two months; but during the long
+season of the rains, and a little before and after, the winds are mostly
+so violent that there is no putting to sea without extreme hazard. The
+cargo of this ship, on its return, is usually worth L200,000 sterling,
+mostly in gold and silver. Besides this, and the quantities of money
+which come yearly out of Europe, which I do not pretend to calculate,
+many streams of silver flow continually thither, and there abide. It is
+lawful for all to bring in silver, and to carry away commodities, but it
+is a capital crime to carry away any great sums.
+
+All the coin or bullion that comes to this country is presently melted
+down and refined, and coined with the stamp of the Mogul, being his name
+and title in Persian characters. This coin is purer silver than any
+other that I know, being of virgin silver without alloy, so that in the
+Spanish dollar, the purest money in Europe, there is some loss. Their
+money is called _rupees_, which are of divers values, the meanest being
+worth two shillings, and the best about two shillings and nine-pence.
+This is their general money of account. There is in Guzerat a coin of
+inferior value, called _mamoodies_, worth about twelve-pence each. Both
+these and the rupees are likewise coined in halves and quarters; so that
+three-pence is the smallest piece of current silver in the country. That
+which passes current for small change is brass money, which they call
+_pices_, of which three, or thereabout, are worth an English penny.
+These are made so massy, that the brass in them, when put to other uses,
+is well worth the quantity of silver at which they are rated. Their
+silver money is made both square and round; but so thick, that it never
+breaks or wears out.
+
+For farther commodities; India yields great store of silk, which they
+weave very ingeniously, sometimes mixed with gold or silver. They make
+velvets, sattins, and taffetas, but not so rich as those of Italy. This
+country also produces many drugs and gums, and particularly the gum-lac,
+from which hard sealing-wax is made. The earth also yields abundant
+minerals, as lead, iron, copper, and brass, and, as they say, silver;
+yet, though this be true, they need not work their silver mines, being
+already so abundantly supplied with that metal from other nations. They
+have spices from other countries, and especially from Sumatra, Java, and
+the Molucca islands. They have curious pleasure gardens, planted with
+fruit-trees and delightful flowers, to which nature lends daily such
+ample supply, that they seem never to fade. In these places they have
+pleasant fountains, in which to bathe, and other delights by various
+conveyances of water, whose silent murmurs sooth their senses to sleep,
+in the hot season of the day.
+
+Lest this remote country might seem an earthly paradise, without any
+inconveniences, I must notice that it contains many lions, tigers,
+wolves, and jackals, which are a kind of wild dogs, besides many other
+noxious and hurtful animals. In their rivers they have many crocodiles,
+and on the land many overgrown snakes and serpents, with other venomous
+and pernicious creatures. In the houses we often meet with scorpions,
+whose stinging is most painful and even deadly, unless the part be
+immediately anointed with an oil made of scorpions.[233] The abundance
+of flies in those parts is likewise an extreme annoyance; as, in the
+heat of the day, their numbers are so prodigious, that we cannot have
+peace or rest for them in any part. They cover our meat the moment it is
+set on the table, wherefore we are obliged to have men standing ready to
+drive them away with napkins, while we are eating. In the night,
+likewise, we are much disquieted with musquetos, like our gnats, but
+somewhat less; and, in the cities, there are such numbers of large
+hungry rats, that they often bite people as they sleep in their beds.
+
+[Footnote 233: This is a mere fancy, as any bland oil is equally
+efficacious.--E.]
+
+In this country the winds, which are called monsoons, blow constantly,
+or altering only a few points, for six months from the south, and other
+six months from the north. The months of April and May, and the
+beginning of June, till the rains come, are extremely hot; and the wind,
+which then sometimes blows gently over the parched ground, becomes so
+heated, as much oppresses all who are exposed to it: Yet God so
+mercifully provides for our relief, that most commonly he sends so
+strong a gale as greatly tempers the sultry air. Sometimes the wind
+blows very high during the hot and dry season, raising up vast
+quantities of dust and sand, like dark clouds pregnant with rain, and
+which often prodigiously annoy the people among whom they fall. But
+there is no country without its inconveniences; for the wise Disposer of
+all events hath attempered bitter things with sweet, to teach mankind
+that there is no true or perfect contentment to be found, but only in
+the kingdom of God.
+
+This country has many excellent horses, which the inhabitants know well
+how to manage. Besides those bred in the country, they have many of the
+Tartarian, Persian, and Arabian breeds, which last is considered as the
+best in the world. They are about as large as ours, and are valued among
+them at as dear a rate as we usually esteem ours, perhaps higher. They
+are kept very daintily, every good horse being allowed one man to dress
+and feed him. Their provender is a species of grain called _donna_,
+somewhat like our pease, which are boiled, and then given cold to the
+horses, mixed with coarse sugar; and twice or thrice a week they have
+butter given them to scour their bodies. There are likewise in this
+country a great number of camels, dromedaries, mules, asses, and some
+rhinoceroses. These are huge beasts, bigger than the fattest oxen to be
+seen in England, and their skins lie upon their bodies in plaits or
+wrinkles.
+
+They have many elephants, the Great Mogul having not fewer than 1400 for
+his own use, and all the nobles of the country have more or less, some
+having to the number of an hundred. Though the largest of all
+terrestrial animals, the elephants are wonderfully tractable, except
+that they are mad at times; but at all other times, a little boy is able
+to rule the largest of them. I have seen some thirteen feet high; but I
+have been often told that some are fifteen feet in height at the least.
+Their colour is universally black, their skins very thick and smooth,
+and without hair. They take much delight to bathe themselves in water,
+and they swim better than any beast I know. They lie down and rise again
+at pleasure, as other beasts do. Their pace is not swift, being only
+about three miles an hour; but they are the surest footed beasts in the
+world, as they never endanger their riders by stumbling. They are the
+most docile of all creatures, and of those we account merely possessed
+of instinct, they come nearest to reason. Lipsius, _Cent_. 1, _Epist_.
+50, in his observations, taken from others, writes more concerning them
+than I can confirm, or than any can credit, as I conceive; yet I can
+vouch for many things which seem to be acts of reason rather than of
+mere brute sense, which we call instinct. For instance, an elephant will
+do almost any thing which his keeper commands. If he would have him
+terrify a man, he will make towards him as if he meant to tread him in
+pieces, yet does him no hurt. If he would have him to abuse a man, he
+will take up dirt, or kennel water, in his trunk, and dash it in his
+face. Their trunks are long grisly snouts, hanging down betwixt their
+tusks, by some called their hand, which they use very dexterously on all
+occasions.
+
+An English merchant, of good credit, told me the following story of an
+elephant, as having happened to his own knowledge at Ajimeer, the place
+where the Mogul then resided:--This elephant used often to pass through
+the bazar, or market-place, where a woman who there sold herbs used to
+give him a handful as he passed her stall. This elephant afterwards went
+mad,[234] and, having broken his fetters, took his way furiously through
+the market-place, whence all the people fled as quickly as possible to
+get out of his way. Among these was his old friend the herb-woman, who,
+in her haste and terror, forgot to take away her little child. On coming
+to the place where this woman was in use to sit, the elephant stopped,
+and seeing the child among the herbs, he took it up gently in his trunk,
+and laid it carefully on a stall under the projecting roof of a house
+hard by, without doing it the smallest injury, and then continued his
+furious course. A travelling Jesuit, named Acosta, relates a similar
+story of an elephant at Goa, as from his own experience.--The king keeps
+certain elephants for the execution of malefactors. When one of these is
+brought forth to dispatch a criminal, if his keeper desires that the
+offender be destroyed speedily, this vast creature will instantly crush
+him to atoms under his foot; but if desired to torture him, will break
+his limbs successively, as men are broken on the wheel.
+
+[Footnote 234: This temporary madness of the male elephants is usual in
+the rutting season.--E.]
+
+The Mogul takes great delight in these stately animals, and often, when
+he sits in state, calls for some of the finest and largest to be
+brought, which are taught to bend before him, as in reverence, when they
+come into his presence. They often fight before him, beginning their
+combats like rams, by running furiously against each other, and butting
+with their foreheads. They afterwards use their tusks and teeth,
+fighting with the utmost fury, yet are they most careful to preserve
+their keepers, so that few of them receive any hurt in these
+rencounters. They are governed by a hooked instrument of steel, made
+like the iron end of a boat-hook, with which their keepers, who sit on
+their necks, put them back, or goad them on, at pleasure.
+
+The king has many of his elephants trained up for war; each of which
+carries an iron gun about six feet long, which is fastened to a strong
+square frame of wood on his back, made fast by strong girths or ropes
+round his body. This gun carries a bullet about the size of a small
+tennis-ball, and is let into the timber with a loop of iron. The four
+corners of the wooden frame have each a silken banner on a short pole,
+and a gunner sits within, to shoot as occasion serves, managing the gun
+like a harquebuss, or large wall-piece. When the king travels, he is
+attended by many elephants armed in this manner, as part of his guard.
+He keeps many of them likewise, merely for state, which go before him,
+and are adorned with bosses of brass, and some have their bosses made of
+silver, or even of gold; having likewise many bells jingling about them,
+in the sound of which the animal delights. They have handsome housings,
+of cloth, or velvet, or of cloth of silver, or cloth of gold; and, for
+the greater state, have large royal banners of silk carried before them,
+on which the king's ensign is depicted, being a lion in the sun. These
+state-elephants are each allowed three or four men at least to wait upon
+them. Other elephants are appointed for carrying his women, who sit in
+pretty convenient receptacles fastened on their backs, made of slight
+turned pillars, richly covered, each holding four persons, who sit
+within. These are represented by our painters as resembling castles.
+Others again are employed to carry his baggage. He has one very fine
+elephant that has submitted, like the rest, to wear feathers, but could
+never be brought to endure a man, or any other burden, on his back.
+
+Although the country be very fertile, and all kinds of provisions cheap,
+yet these animals, because of their vast bulk, are very chargeable in
+keeping; such as are well fed costing four or five shillings each,
+daily. They are kept out of doors, being fastened with a strong chain by
+one of their hind legs to a tree, or a strong post. Thus standing out in
+the sun, the flies are often extremely troublesome to them; on which
+occasions they tread the dry ground into dust with their feet, and throw
+it over their bodies with their trunks, to drive away the flies. The
+males are usually mad once a year after the females, at which time they
+are extremely mischievous, and will strike any one who comes in their
+way, except their own keeper; and such is their vast strength, that they
+will kill a horse or a camel with one blow of their trunks. This fury
+lasts only a few days; when they return to their usual docility. At
+these times they are kept apart from all company, and fettered with
+strong chains to prevent mischief. If by chance they get loose in their
+state of phrenzy, they run at everything they see in motion; and, in
+this case, the only possible means of stopping them is by lighting a
+kind of artificial fire-works called wild-fire, the sparkling and
+cracking of which make them stand still and tremble.
+
+The king allows four females to each of his great elephants, which are
+called their wives. The testes of the males are said to lie about his
+forehead, and the teats of the female are between her fore-legs. She
+goes twelve months with young. The elephant is thirty years old before
+he attains his full growth, and they live to seventy or eighty years of
+age. Although very numerous, elephants are yet so highly prized in
+India, that some of the best are valued at a thousand pounds or more.
+
+Sec.3. _Of the People of Hindoostan, and their Manners and Customs_.
+
+The whole inhabitants of Hindoostan were anciently Gentiles, or
+notorious idolaters, generally denominated Hindoos, hot ever since the
+time of Tamerlane they have been mixed with Mahometans.[235] There are,
+besides, many Persians, Tartars, Abyssinians, and Arminians, and some
+few of almost every nation in Asia, if not in Europe, that reside here.
+Among these are some Jews, but not esteemed, for their very name is
+proverbial, as a term of reproach. In stature, the natives of Hindoostan
+are equal to ourselves, being in general very straight and well-made,
+for I never saw any deformed person in that country. They are of a dark
+tawny or olive colour, having their hair as black as a raven, but not
+curled. They love not to see either a man or a woman very fair, as they
+say that is the colour of lepers, which are common among them. Most of
+the Mahometans, except their molahs or priests, or such as are old and
+retired, keep their chins shaved, but allow the hair on their upper-lips
+to grow long. They usually shave all the hair from their heads, leaving
+only one lock on their crowns for Mahomet to pull them by up to heaven.
+Both among the Gentiles and Mahometans they have excellent barbers. The
+people often bathe and wash their bodies, and anoint themselves with
+perfumed oils.
+
+[Footnote 235: The Mahomedans made extensive conquests in India long
+before the era of Timor.--E.]
+
+The dresses of the men and women differ very little from each other, and
+are mostly made of white cotton cloth. In fashion, they sit close to
+the shape to the middle, and from thence hang loose to below the knee.
+Under this they wear long close breeches down to their ancles, crumpled
+about the small of their legs like boots. Their feet are put bare into
+their shoes, which are made like slippers, that they may be readily put
+off on entering their houses, the floors of which are covered with
+excellent carpets of the country manufacture, as good as any made in
+Turkey or Persia. Instead of these carpets, some have other
+floor-cloths, according to the quality of the owner. On these they sit
+when conversing or eating, like tailors on the shop-board. The men's
+heads are covered by turbans, being sashes, or long webs of thin cloth,
+white or coloured, wreathed many times about. They do not uncover their
+heads in making reverence, instead of which they bow their bodies,
+placing the right hand on the top of the head, after which they touch
+the earth with that hand, as if indicating that the party saluted may
+tread upon them if he please. Those who are equals take each other by
+the chin or beard, as Joab did Amasa; but salute in love, not in
+treachery.
+
+The Mahometan women, except such as are poor or dishonest, never appear
+abroad. Though not fair, they are all well favoured, have their heads
+covered with veils, and their hair hanging down behind, twisted with
+silk. Those of quality are decorated with many jewels hung around their
+necks, and about their wrists and arms; and they have several holes
+round their ears in which they hang pendents, besides that every woman
+has a hole in her nostrils, in which to wear a ring, which seems to have
+been an ancient ornament, being mentioned in the Old Testament. Their
+women are happy above all others I have ever heard of; in the ease with
+which they bear their children, being one day able to ride with their
+infants unborn, and to ride again the next with their child in their
+arms.
+
+The language of the common people of this country, called Hindoostanee,
+is smooth, and easily pronounced, and is written from left to right, as
+we do. The learned tongues are the Persian and Arabic, which are written
+backwards, from right to left, like the Hebrew. There is but little
+learning among them, which may be owing to the scarcity of books, which
+are all in manuscript, and therefore few and dear; but they are a people
+of good capacity, and were they to cultivate literature among them,
+would assuredly produce many excellent works. They have heard of
+Aristotle, whom they name _Aplis_, and have some of his writings
+translated into Arabic. The noble physician, Avicenna, was a native of
+Samarcandia, the country of Tamerlane, and in this science they possess
+good skill. The most prevalent diseases of this country are dysenteries,
+hot fevers, and calentures, in all which they prescribe abstinence as a
+principal remedy. The filthy disease produced by incontinence is
+likewise common among them. They delight much in music, having many
+instruments, both stringed and wind; but, to my ears, their music seemed
+all discordant. They write many pretty poems, and compose histories and
+annals of their own country. They profess great skill in astrology, and
+the king places great confidence in men of that profession, so that he
+will not undertake a journey, nor do any thing whatever of importance,
+unless after his wizard has indicated a prosperous hour for the
+undertaking.
+
+The idolaters begin their year on the 1st of March, and the Mahometans
+at the instant when the sun enters Aries, as calculated by their
+astrologers. From which time the king keeps a festival, called the
+_norose_, or nine days, for which time it continues, like that made by
+Ahasuerus in the third year of his reign. On this occasion, all his
+nobles assemble, bringing great gifts, which he repays with princely
+rewards. Being myself present on this occasion, I beheld most incredible
+riches, to my amazement, in gold, pearls, precious stones, and many
+brilliant vanities. I saw this festival celebrated at Mandoa, where the
+Mogul has a most spacious house or palace, larger than any I ever
+beheld, in which the many beautiful vaults and arches evince the
+exquisite skill of his artists in architecture. At Agra he has a palace,
+in which are two large towers, at least ten feet square, covered with
+plates of pure gold.
+
+The walls of his houses have no hangings, on account of the heat, but
+are either painted or beautified with a white lime, purer even than that
+we term Spanish. The floors are either paved with stone or are made of
+lime and sand, like our Paris plaster, and are spread with rich carpets.
+None lodge within the King's house but his women and eunuchs, and some
+little boys, whom he always keeps about him for a wicked use. He always
+eats in private among his women, being served with a great variety of
+exquisitely dressed meats, which being proved by his taster, are put
+into golden vessels, as they say, covered and sealed up, and brought in
+by the eunuchs. He has meats made ready at all hours, and calls for
+them at pleasure. These people do not feed freely, as we do, on full
+dishes of beef or mutton, but use much rice, boiled up along with pieces
+of flesh, or dressed in a variety of ways. They have not many roasted or
+baked meats, but stew most of their meat. Among their many dishes, I
+shall only notice one, called by them _deupario_. This is made of
+venison cut into slices, to which are put onions and sweet herbs, with
+some roots, and a little spice and butter, forming the most savoury dish
+I ever tasted; and I almost think it is the same dish that Jacob made
+ready for his father Isaac when he got his blessing.
+
+In this kingdom there are no inns or houses of entertainment for
+travellers and strangers. But, in the cities and large towns, there are
+handsome buildings for their reception, called _serais_, which are not
+inhabited, in which any passengers may have rooms freely, but must bring
+with them their bedding, cooks, and all other necessaries for dressing
+their victuals. These things are usually carried by travellers on
+camels, or in carts drawn by oxen; taking likewise tents along with
+them, to use when they do not find serais. The inferior people ride on
+oxen, horses, mules, camels, or dromedaries, the women riding in the
+same manner as the men; or else they use a kind of slight coaches on two
+wheels, covered at top, and close behind, but open before and at the
+sides, unless when they contain women, in which case they are close all
+round. These coaches will conveniently hold two persons, besides the
+driver, and are drawn by a pair of oxen, matched in colour, many of them
+being white, and not large. The oxen are guided by cords which go
+through the middle cartilage of the nose, and so between the horns into
+the hand of the driver. The oxen are dressed and harnessed like horses,
+and being naturally nimble, use makes them so expert, that they will go
+twenty miles a-day or more, at a good pace. The better sort ride on
+elephants, or are carried singly on men's shoulders, in a slight thing
+called a _palanquin_, like a couch, but covered by a canopy. This would
+appear to have been an ancient effeminacy used in Rome, as Juvenal
+describes a fat lawyer who filled one of them:
+
+_Causidici nova, cam venial lectica Mathonis; plena ipso--_
+
+They delight much in hawking, and in hunting hares, deer, and other wild
+animals. Their dogs of chase somewhat resemble our greyhounds, but are
+much less, and do not open when in pursuit of their game. They use
+leopards also in hunting, which attain the game they pursue by leaping.
+They have a very cunning device for catching wild-fowl, in the following
+manner:--A fellow goes into the water, having the skin of any kind of
+fowl he wishes to catch, so artificially stuffed, that it seems alive.
+Keeping his whole body under water except his face, which is covered by
+this counterfeit, he goes among the wild-fowl which swim in the water,
+and pulls them under by the legs. They shoot much for their amusement
+with bows, which are curiously made of buffaloe's horn, glewed together,
+their arrows being made of small canes, excellently headed and
+feathered, and are so expert in archery, that they will kill birds
+flying. Others take great delight in managing their horses. Though they
+have not a quarter of a mile to go, they will either ride on horseback
+or be carried, as men of any quality hold it dishonourable to go on foot
+any where.
+
+In their houses, they play much at that most ingenious game which we
+call chess, or else at draughts. They have likewise cards, but quite
+different from ours. Sometimes they are amused by cunning jugglers, or
+mountebanks, who allow themselves to be bitten by snakes which they
+carry about in baskets, immediately curing themselves by means of
+certain powders which they smell to. They are likewise often amused by
+the tricks of apes and monkeys. In the southern parts of Hindoostan,
+there are great numbers of large white apes, some of which are as tall
+as our largest greyhounds. Some of those birds which make their nests on
+trees are much afraid of the apes, and nature has instructed them in a
+subtle device to secure themselves, by building their nests on the most
+extreme twigs, and hanging them there like purse-nets, so that the apes
+cannot possibly come to them.
+
+Every city or great town in India has markets twice a-day, in the cool
+of the morning just after sun-rise, and again in the evening a little
+before it sets; and in these they sell almost every thing by weight. In
+the heat of the day, every one keeps within doors, where those of any
+rank lie on couches, or sit cross-legged on carpets, having servants
+about them, who beat the air with fans of stiffened leather, or the
+like, to cool them. While thus taking their ease, they often call their
+barbers, who tenderly grip and beat upon their arms and other parts of
+their bodies, instead of exercise, to stir the blood. This is a most
+gratifying thing, and is much used in this hot climate.
+
+The Mahometans and Hindoos are much to be commended for their
+truthfulness as servants; for a stranger may safely travel alone among
+them with a great charge of money or goods, all through the country,
+having them for his guard, and will never be neglected or injured by
+them. They follow their masters on foot, carrying swords and bucklers,
+or bows and arrows, for their defence; and so plentiful are provisions
+in this country, that one may hire them on very easy terms, as they do
+not desire more than five shillings each moon, paid the day after the
+change, to provide themselves in all necessaries; and for this small
+pittance give diligent and faithful service. Such is their filial piety,
+that they will often give the half of these pitiful wages to their
+parents, to relieve their necessities, preferring almost to famish
+themselves rather than see them want.
+
+Both among the Mahometans and Hindoos there are many men of most
+undaunted courage. The _Baloches_ are of great note on this account
+among the Mahometans, being the inhabitants of _Hjykan_, adjoining to
+the kingdom of Persia; as also the Patans, taking their denomination
+from a province in the kingdom of Bengal.[236] These tribes dare look
+their enemies in the face, and maintain the reputation of valour at the
+hazard of their lives. Among the many sects of the Hindoos, there is but
+one race of warriors, called _Rashbootes_, or Rajaputs, many of whom
+subsist by plunder, laying in wait in great troops to surprise poor
+passengers, and butchering all who have the misfortune to fall into
+their hands. These excepted, all the rest of the natives are in general
+pusillanimous, and had rather quarrel than fight, being so poor in
+spirit, in comparison with Europeans, that the Mogul often says,
+proverbially, That one Portuguese will beat three of them, and one
+Englishman three Portuguese.
+
+[Footnote 236: This is a strange mistake, confounding the city of Patna,
+in Bengal, in the east of Hindoostan, with the Patans, a race of
+mountaineers between Cabul and Candahar, far to the west of India,
+called likewise Afgans, and their country Afghanistan.--E.]
+
+In regard to arms for war, they have good ordnance, which, so far as I
+could learn, were very anciently used in this country.[237] I have
+already described the iron pieces carried on elephants. They have
+smaller guns for the use of their foot-soldiers, who are somewhat long
+in taking aim, but come as near the mark as any I ever saw. All their
+pieces are fired with match, and they make excellent gun-powder. They
+use also lances, swords, and targets, and bows and arrows. Their swords
+are made crooked like faulchions, and very sharp; but, for want of skill
+in tempering, will break rather than bend; wherefore our sword-blades,
+which will bend and become straight again, are often sold at high
+prices. I have seen horsemen in this country, thus accoutered, carrying
+as it were a whole armory at once; a good sword by their sides, under
+which a sheaf of arrows; on their back a gun fastened with belts, a
+buckler on their shoulders; a bow in a case hanging on their left side,
+and a good lance in their hand, two yards and a half long, with an
+excellent steel head. Yet, for all these weapons, dare he not resist a
+man of true courage, armed only with the worst of all these. The armies
+in these eastern wars often consist of incredible multitudes, and they
+talk of some which have exceeded that we read of in the Bible, which
+Zerah, king of Ethiopia, brought against Asia. Their martial music
+consists of kettle-drums and long wind-instruments. In their battles,
+both sides usually begin with most furious onsets; but, in a short time,
+for want of good discipline, they fall into disorder, and one side is
+routed with much slaughter.
+
+[Footnote 237: Vertoman says the Portuguese who deserted at the first
+discovery of India, and entered into the service of the native princes,
+taught them this art.--_Purch_.
+
+I have somewhere read, many years ago, but cannot recollect the
+authority, "That, when Alexander besieged a certain city in India, the
+Brachmans, by the power of magic, raised a cloud of smoke around the
+walls, whence broke frequent flashes of lightning, with thunder, and the
+thunderbolts slew many of his soldiers." This would infer the very
+ancient use of fire-arms of some kind in India.--E.]
+
+The Mahometans have fair places of worship, which they call _mesquits_,
+well built of stone. That side which looks to the westwards is a
+close-built wall, while that towards the east is erected on pillars, the
+length being from north to south. At the corners of their great mosques,
+in the cities, there are high turrets or pinnacles, called _minarets_,
+to the tops of which their molahs or priests resort at certain times of
+day, proclaiming their prophet in Arabic, in these words,--_Alla illa
+Alla, Mahomet resul Alla_; that is, There is no God but God, and Mahomet
+is the ambassador of God. This is used instead of bells, which they
+cannot endure in their temples, to put religious persons in mind of
+their duty. On one occasion, while Mr Coryat was residing in Agra, he
+got up into a turret over against the priest, and on hearing these
+words, he contradicted him, calling out, in a loud voice,--_La Alla illa
+Alla, Hazaret Esa Ebn-Alla_; there is no God but God, and Christ, the
+Son of God, is his prophet. He farther added, that Mahomet was an
+impostor, in any other country of Asia, in which Mahomet is zealously
+followed, this bold attempt had surely forfeited his life, with all the
+tortures which cruelty could invent, or tyranny inflict; but in this
+country every one is permitted to follow his own religion, and may even
+dispute against theirs with impunity.
+
+In regard to their burials, every Mahometan of quality provides a fair
+sepulchre for himself and his family, in his life-time, surrounding a
+considerable space of ground with a high wall, and generally in the
+neighbourhood of some tank, or else near springs of water, that they may
+make pleasant fountains. Within the enclosure, he erects a round or
+square tomb, either on pillars or of closed walls, with a door for
+entrance. The rest of the enclosure is planted with trees and flowers,
+as if they would make the elysian fields of the poets, in which their
+souls may repose in delight. They have many such goodly monuments built
+in memory of those they esteem as saints, of whom they have an ample
+calendar, in these there are lamps continually burning, and thither many
+resort in blind devotion, to contemplate the happiness enjoyed by these
+_peires_, as they call the holy men. Among many sumptuous piles
+dedicated to this use, the most splendid of them all is to be seen at
+_Secuadra_, a village three miles from Agra. This was begun by Akbar
+Shah, the father of the present king, and finished by his son, the
+reigning Mogul. Akbar lies here interred, and Jehanguire Shah means to
+be here buried when he dies.
+
+The molahs, or priests of the Mahometans, employ much of their time as
+scribes, doing business for other men, having liberty to marry as well
+as the laity, from whom they are no way distinguished by their dress.
+Some live retiredly, spending their time in meditation, or in delivering
+precepts of morality to the people. They are in roach esteem, as are
+another set called _Seids_, who derive their pedigree from Mahomet. The
+priests neither read nor preach in the mosques; yet there is a set form
+of prayers in Arabic, not understood by most of the people, but which
+they repeat as fluently as the molahs. They likewise repeat the name of
+God, and that of Mahomet, a certain number of times every day, telling
+over their beads, like the misled papists, who seem to regard the number
+of prayers more than their sincerity. Before going into their mosques
+they wash their feet, and, in entering, put off their shoes. On
+beginning their devotions, they stop their ears, and fix their eyes,
+that no extraneous circumstances may divert their thoughts, and then
+utter their prayers in a soft and still voice, using many words
+significantly expressive of the omnipotence, goodness, eternity, and
+other attributes of God. Likewise many words full of humility,
+confessing their unworthiness with many submissive gestures. While
+praying, they frequently prostrate themselves on their faces,
+acknowledging that they are burdens upon the earth, poisonous to the
+air, and the like, and therefore dare not look up to heaven, but comfort
+themselves in the mercy of God, through the intercession of their false
+prophet. Many among them, to the shame of us Christians, pray five tunes
+a-day, whatever may happen to be their interruptions of pleasure or
+profit. Their set times are at the hours of six, nine, twelve, three,
+and six, respectively.
+
+The manner in which they divide the day is quite different from us; as
+they divide the day and the night each into four equal parts, which they
+denominate _pores_, and these again are each subdivided into eight
+smaller parts, called _grees_. [Hence each _pore_ contains three of our
+hours, and each _gree_ is equal to 22-1/2 of our minutes.] These are
+measured, according to an ancient custom, by means of water, dropping
+from one small vessel into another, beside which there always stand
+servants appointed for the purpose, who strike with a hammer upon a
+concave plate of metal, like the inner portion of a plate, hung by a
+wire, thus denoting the _pores_ and _grees_ successively as they
+pass.[238] Like the mother and her seven sons, mentioned in the
+Maccabees, such is the temperance of many, both among the Mahometans and
+Gentiles, that they will rather die than eat or drink of any thing
+forbidden by their law. Such meats and drinks as their law allows, they
+use only in moderation, to satisfy nature, not to please their
+appetites, hating gluttony, and esteeming drunkenness a sin, as it
+really is, or a second madness; and indeed their language has only one
+word, mest, for a drunkard and a madman.
+
+[Footnote 238: This device for measuring time is the same with the
+_clepsydra_, or water-clocks, of the ancients.--_Purch._]
+
+They keep yearly a solemn feast, or Lent, which they call _Ram jan_,
+[Ramadan] about the month of August, which continues a whole moon;
+during which time, those who are strict in their religious observances,
+avoid the embraces of their women, and abstain from meat or drink so
+long as the sun is above the horizon, but eat after it sets, at their
+pleasure. Towards the close of this Lent, or ramadan, they consecrate
+one day of mourning, in memory of their departed friends; on which
+occasions, I have seen many of the meaner people making bitter
+lamentations. Besides this ordinary and stated time of sadness, many
+foolish women are in use, oft times in the year, so long as they
+survive, to water the graves of their husbands or children with the
+tears of affectionate regret. On the night succeeding the day of general
+mourning, they light up innumerable lamps, and other lights, which they
+set on the sides and tops of their houses, and all other most
+conspicuous places, taking no food till these are burnt out. When the
+ramadan is entirely ended, the most devout Mahometans assemble at some
+noted mosque, where some portion of the _Alcoran_ is publicly read; this
+being their holy book, like our Bible, which they never touch without
+some mark of reverence. They keep a festival in November, which they
+call _Buccaree_, signifying the _ram-feast_; on which occasion they kill
+and roast a ram, in memory, as they say, of the ram which redeemed
+Ishmael, when about to be sacrificed by his father Abraham. They have
+many other feasts or holidays consecrated to Mahomet, and their
+_pieres_, or pretended saints.
+
+They have the books of Moses, whom they name _Moosa curym Alla_, the
+righteous of God. Abraham they call _Ibrahim calim Alla_, the faithful
+of God. Thus Ishmael is called the true sacrifice of God; David is named
+_Dahoode_, the prophet of God; Solomon is _Seliman_, the wisdom of God,
+and so forth; all neatly expressed, as the former instances, in short
+Arabic epithets. In honour of these our scripture worthies, they
+frequently sing songs or ditties of praise; and, besides, all of them,
+except those of the ruder sort, when at any time they happen to mention
+our Saviour, always call him _Hazaret Eesa_, the Lord Jesus; and ever
+speak of him with respect and reverence, saying, that he was a good and
+just man, who lived without sin, and did greater miracles than were ever
+performed before or since. They even call him _Rhahew Alla_, which
+signifies the breath of God, but cannot conceive how he could be the
+Son of God, and therefore deny that. Yet the Mahometans look upon us as
+unclean, and will neither eat with us, nor of any thing that is cooked
+in our vessels.
+
+There are many men among the Mahometans called _Dervises_, who
+relinquish the world, and spend their days in solitude, expecting a
+recompence in a better life. The strict and severe penances these men
+voluntarily endure, far exceed all those so much boasted of by the
+Romanist monks. Some of these live alone on the tops of hills, remote
+from all society, spending their lives in contemplation, and will rather
+die of famine than move from their cells, being relieved from devotion
+by those who dwell nearest them. Some again impose long fasts upon
+themselves, till nature be almost exhausted. Many of those whom they
+call religious men, wear no garments beyond a mere clout to cover their
+shame, and beg for all their provisions, like the mendicant friars of
+Europe. These men usually dwell about the outskirts of the cities and
+towns, like the man mentioned by our blessed Saviour at the city of the
+_Gadarens_, who had devils, and wore no clothes, neither abode in any
+house, but dwelt among the tombs. They make little fires during the day,
+sleeping at night among the warm ashes, with which they besmear their
+bodies. These men never suffer a razor to come upon their heads, and
+some of them let their nails grow like to bird's claws, as it is written
+of Nebuchadnezzar, when driven out from among the society of men. There
+is also a sort of men among them called _mendee_, who often cut and
+slash their flesh with knives, like the priests of Baal. I have seen
+others, who, from supposed devotion, put such massy fetters of iron on
+their legs, that they are hardly able to move, yet walk in that manner
+many miles upon pilgrimages, barefooted, upon the parching ground, to
+visit the sepulchres of their deluding saints; thus, _tantum religio
+potuit suadere malorum_, taking more pains to go to hell than any
+Christian that I know does to attain heaven. These do not marry. Such
+Mahometans as choose to marry, are allowed four wives by the law of
+Mahomet, but they keep as many concubines as they can maintain. The
+priests content themselves with one wife.
+
+Notwithstanding their polygamy, such is the violent jealousy of these
+lustful Mahometans, that they will scarcely allow even the fathers and
+brothers of their beloved wives or concubines to converse with them,
+except in their own presence. Owing to this restraint, it has become
+odious for such women as have the reputation of virtue, to be seen at
+any time by strangers. If any of them dishonour their husbands beds, or,
+being unmarried, are found incontinent, even their own brothers will put
+them to death rather than they should escape punishment; and for such
+unnatural actions they shall be commended, rather than called in
+question. Yet is there full toleration for harlots, who are as little
+ashamed of receiving visits as the men are of frequenting their houses.
+The women of any fashion are waited upon by eunuchs instead of
+women-servants; and these eunuchs are deprived in their youth of every
+thing that can provoke jealousy. Their marriages are solemnised in great
+pomp. After the molah has joined their hands, with certain ceremonies
+and words of benediction, they begin their revels at the first watch of
+the night. Whether the man be poor or rich, he mounts on horseback,
+attended by his friends, having many _oressets_, or great lights,
+carried before him, and accompanied by drums, and wind-instruments of
+music, and various pageantry. The woman follows with her friends, in
+covered coaches. And having thus paraded through the principal places of
+the city or town, they return home and partake of a banquet, the men and
+women being in separate apartments. They are mostly married at the age
+of twelve or thirteen, the matches being made by their mothers.
+
+Sec.4. _Of the Sects, Opinions, Rites, Priests, and other Circumstances of
+the Hindoo Religion; with other Observations_.
+
+The Hindoos[239] are distributed into eighty and four several sects, all
+of which differ materially in opinions. This has often filled me with
+wonder; but I know that they are all deluded by Satan, who is the father
+of division. Their illiterate priests are called _Bramins_, being the
+same with the _Brachmanni_ of the ancients; and, for aught I could
+learn, are so sottishly ignorant and unsteady, that they know not what
+they believe. They have little round-built temples, which they call
+_pagodas_, in which are images in most monstrous shapes, which they
+worship. Some of them dream, of Elysian fields, to which their souls
+pass over a Styx or Acheron, and there assume new bodies. Others hold
+that ere long, this world shall have an end, after which they shall live
+here again, upon a new earth. They talk of four books which were sent
+them about 6000 years ago by their prophet _Ram_, two of which were
+sealed up and might not be opened, the other two being read by the
+Bramins only. They say that there are seven orbs, above which is the
+seat of God; and they hold that God knoweth not of petty things, or, if
+he doth, regardeth them not. They circumscribe God in place or
+dimensions, alleging that he may be seen, but far off as in a mist, and
+not near or clearly. They believe in the existence of devils or evil
+spirits; but that they are so bound in chains, as to be incapable of
+doing hurt. They call man Adam, from the first man of that name; whose
+wife, as they say, when tempted with the forbidden fruit, swallowed it
+down; but, as her husband was about to do the same, it was stopped in
+his throat by the hand of God: Whence men have a protuberance in that
+part, which we call the _pomum adami_, which women have not.
+
+[Footnote 239: By Terry, the Hindoos are uniformly denominated the
+_Gentiles_, a word of vague and general meaning, merely signifying
+idolaters, or unbelievers, literally the nations, as contradistinguished
+from the Jews. By some authors, the natives of Hindoostan are called
+Gentoos, a word of uncertain origin. The term of Hindoo seems the more
+appropriate name; at least it has now become universal.--E.]
+
+As anciently among the Jews, the priesthood is hereditary with this
+people; every son of a Bramin being a priest, and marries with the
+daughter of a Bramin. So also among all the Hindoos, the men take their
+wives among the daughters of those who are of the same tribe, sect, and
+occupation, with their own fathers. Thus the son of a merchant marries a
+merchant's daughter, and every man's son that lives by his labour,
+marries the daughter of one of the same profession with himself, so that
+they never advance themselves to higher situations. The Hindoos take but
+one wife, of whom they are not so fearful as are the Mahometans of their
+numerous women, for they are suffered to go abroad. They are always
+married very young, at six or seven years of age, their parents making
+the contracts, and they come together when twelve years old. Their
+nuptials are celebrated with as much pomp and jollity as those of the
+Mahometans. The habits of the Hindoos differ little from those of the
+Mahometans, already described; but many of their women wear rings on
+their toes, and therefore go barefooted. They have likewise broad rings
+of brass, or of more valuable metal, according to their rank and wealth,
+which they wear about the small of their legs, being made to put off and
+on. These seem to resemble the tinkling ornaments about the feet,
+mentioned by the prophet Isaiah, or the ornaments of the legs, anciently
+in use among the Jewish women. They have also such on their arms. The
+laps of their ears are pierced when young, and the hole is daily
+stretched and widened, by things put in on purpose, so that it at length
+becomes large enough to hold a ring as broad as a little saucer, made
+hollow in its edges to contain the flesh. Both men and women wash their
+bodies every day before they eat, and they sit entirely naked at their
+food, excepting only the covering of modesty. This outward washing, as
+they think, tends to cleanse them from sin, not unlike the Pharisees in
+scripture, who would not eat with unwashed hands. Hence, they ascribe a
+certain divine influence to rivers, but above all to the Ganges, daily
+flocking thither in great companies, and throwing in pieces of gold and
+silver, according to their devotion or abilities, after which they wash
+themselves in the sacred stream. Both men and women paint their
+foreheads, or other parts of their faces, with red or yellow spots.
+
+In regard to their grosser opinions, they do not believe in the
+resurrection of the flesh, and therefore burn the bodies of their dead,
+near some river if they can, into which they strew the ashes. Their
+widows never marry again; but, after the loss of their husbands, cut
+their hair close off, and spend all their remaining life in neglect;
+whence it happens, that many young women are ambitious to die with
+honour, as they esteem it, throwing themselves for lore of their
+departed husbands into the flames, as they think, of martyrdom.
+Following their dead husband to the pile, and there embracing his
+corpse, they are there consumed in the same fire. This they do
+voluntarily, and without compulsion, their parents, relations, and
+friends joyfully accompanying them; and, when the pile of this hellish
+sacrifice begins to burn, all the assembled multitude shout and make a
+noise, that the screams of the tortured living victims may not be heard.
+This abominable custom is not very much unlike the custom of the
+Ammonites, who made their children pass through the fire to Moloch,
+during which they caused certain tabrets or drums to sound, whence the
+place was called _Tophet_, signifying a tabret. There is one sect among
+the Hindoos, called _Parsees_, who neither burn nor inter their dead.
+They surround certain pieces of ground with high walls, remote from
+houses or public roads, and there deposit their dead, wrapped in sheets,
+which thus have no other tombs but the maws of ravenous fowls.[240]
+
+[Footnote 240: These Parsees, called _Parcees_ in the Pilgrims, and
+Guebres by other writers, are a remnant of the ancient Persians, who are
+fire-worshippers, or followers of Zerdust, the Zoroaster of the
+Greeks.--E.]
+
+The Hindoos are, generally speaking, an industrious race; being either
+cultivators of the ground, or otherwise diligently employed in various
+occupations. Among them there are many curious artificers, who are the
+best imitators in the world, as they will make any thing new very
+exactly after a pattern. The Mahometans, on the contrary, are generally
+idle, being _all for to morrow_, a common saying among them, and live by
+the labours of the Hindoos. Some of these poor deluded idolaters will
+eat of nothing which has had life, feeding on grain, herbs, milk,
+butter, cheese, and sweet-meats, of which last they have various kinds,
+the best and most wholesome of which is green ginger remarkably well
+preserved. Some tribes eat fish, and of no other living thing. The
+Rajaput tribe eat swine's flesh, which is held in abomination by the
+Mahometans. Some will eat of one kind of flesh, and some of another; but
+all the Hindoos universally abstain from beef owing to the reverence
+they entertain for cows; and therefore give large sums yearly to the
+Mogul, besides his other exactions, as a ransom for the lives of these
+sacred animals. Whence, though they have other and good provisions in
+abundance, we meet with very little meat in that country.
+
+The most tender-hearted among the idolaters are called _Banians,_ who
+hold the _metempsychosis_ of Pythagoras as a prime article of their
+faith, believing that the souls of the best men and women, when freed
+from the prison of their human bodies, transmigrate into the bodies of
+cows, which they consider as the best of all creatures. They hold that
+the souls of the wicked go into the bodies of viler beasts; as the souls
+of gluttons into swine, those of the voluptuous and incontinent into
+apes and monkies; the souls of the cruel, furious, and revengeful, into
+lions, tigers, and wolves; the souls of the envious into serpents; and
+so forth, according to their qualities and dispositions; transmigrating
+successively from one to another of the same kind, _ad infinitum;_ and,
+by consequence, believing in the eternal duration of the world. Thus,
+according to them, there does not exist even a silly fly but is actuated
+by a soul formerly human, considering these to have formerly belonged to
+light women; and so incorrigible are their sottish opinions, that they
+cannot be persuaded out of them by any reasoning. Owing to these
+opinions, they will not put to death the most offensive animals, not
+even the most venemous snakes, saying, that it is their nature to do
+harm, and that man is gifted with reason to shun these noxious
+creatures, but not at liberty to destroy them.
+
+Many men devote their fortunes to works of charity, as in building
+_serais,_ or lodging-houses for travellers, digging wells, or
+constructing tanks near highways, that the travellers may have water;
+and where such cannot be had, they will hire poor men to sit by the
+way-sides, and offer water to the passengers. The day of rest among the
+Hindoos is Thursday, as Friday is among the Mahometans, Saturday with
+the Jews, and Sunday with the Christians.[241] They have many solemn
+festivals, and they make pilgrimages, among which the most famous are
+_Nagracut_ and _Syba,_ formerly mentioned; where, if Mr Coryat may be
+believed, who says he carefully observed the same, people cut off part
+of their tongues out of devotion. It were easy to enlarge on this
+subject, but I will not any farther describe their stupid idolatry. The
+sum of the whole is, that both the Hindoos and Mahometans ground all
+their opinions on tradition, not on reason, and are content to perish
+with their fore-fathers, out of preposterous zeal and fond perverseness,
+never rightly considering the grounds of their belief.
+
+[Footnote 241: Monday is the day of rest with the people of Pegu. In
+Java, each individual keeps that day holy on which he has begun some
+great work.--_Purch._]
+
+Both the Mahometans and Hindoos are under subjection to the Great Mogul,
+the term _Mogul_ signifying a circumcised man, so that Great Mogul means
+the Chief of the Circumcision. The present king is the ninth in lineal
+descent from that famous eastern conqueror, whom we name Tamerlane, and
+who in their histories is named Timor. Towards the close of his life, he
+had the misfortune to fall from his horse, which made him halt during
+the remainder of his days, whence he was called Timur-lang, or Timur the
+lame. The emperor styles himself The King of Justice, the Light of the
+Law of Mahomet, and the Conqueror of the World. He himself judges and
+determines on all matters of importance which occur near his residence,
+judging according to allegations and proofs, by his own sense of right.
+The trials are conducted quickly, and the sentences speedily executed,
+culprits being hanged, beheaded, impaled, torn by dogs, destroyed by
+elephants, bitten by serpents, or other devices, according to the nature
+of the crimes; the executions being generally in the public
+market-place. The governors of provinces and cities administer justice
+in a similar manner. I could never hear of any written law, the will of
+the king and his substitutes being the law. His vicegerents are not
+allowed to continue long in one place, lest they acquire popularity, and
+are therefore usually removed yearly. They receive the letters of the
+king with every possible indication of respect. They look to receive
+presents from all who have occasion to apply to them; and, if not often
+gratified with these, will ask for them, and will even send back such as
+they do not approve, demanding better to be substituted. The cadi has
+power to imprison debtors and sureties, who are bound by written deeds;
+and men in power, for payment of debts due to them, will often sell the
+persons, wives, and children of their debtors, which is warranted by the
+customs of the land.
+
+The king appears in public three times every day. His first appearance
+is at sun-rise, from a bow-window looking; towards the east, where great
+multitudes assemble to salute him, or give him the _salam,_ calling out
+_padishah salamet,_ which signifies Live, O King! At noon he again sits
+in public seeing his elephants fight, or some other pastimes. A little
+before sun-set, he shews himself a third time, at a window looking to
+the west, whence he retires amid the sound of drums and wind-instruments
+of music, the acclamations of the people adding to the noise. At any of
+these three appearances, all who have any suit to him hold up their
+petitions to be seen, and are heard in their own causes. Between seven
+and nine in the evening, he again sits in private, attended by his
+nobles.
+
+No subject of this empire holds any lands by inheritance, neither have
+they any titles but such as depend on the will of the king. Owing to
+this, many of the grandees live up fully to the extent of their means.
+Merchants also, and others, are very careful to conceal their wealth,
+lest they be made spunges. Some small means of living are allowed by the
+king to the sons of his great men, which they can never make better,
+unless they succeed to the favour enjoyed by their fathers. His pensions
+are reckoned by the numbers of horsemen allotted to each; and of these
+he pays a million in the whole extent of his empire, to the amount of
+twenty-five pounds being yearly allowed for each horseman, which are
+drawn from lands, specified in the particular grants or commissions.
+There are about twenty of his courtiers who have each the pay of 5000
+horse; others of 4000, 3000, 2000, and so downwards. He who has the pay
+of 5000, is bound to have 2000 always on foot ready for service, and so
+in like proportion for all others. This absolute dependence renders
+them dissolute parasites. When the Mogul gives advancement to any one,
+he adds a new name or title, as Pharaoh did to Joseph. These names or
+titles are very significant; as _Mahobet Khan_, the beloved lord; _Khan
+Jahaun,_ the lord of my heart; _Khan Allum,_ the lord of the world, &c.
+
+The principal officers of state are, the treasurer, the master of the
+eunuchs, who is steward and comptroller of the household, the secretary,
+the master of the elephants, the tent-master, and the keeper of the
+wardrobe. The subordinate titles of honour are Khan, Mirza, Omrah or
+Captain, Haddee, which last is a soldier or horseman. Gorgeous apparel
+is in a great measure prohibited, owing to the great heat of the sun;
+even the Great Mogul himself being usually clothed in a garment of pure
+white calico or fine muslin. Blue, being the colour of mourning, may not
+be worn in his presence, neither the name of death pronounced in his
+hearing. This circumstance is usually expressed by some circumlocution,
+as that such a person has sacrificed himself at the feet of his majesty.
+
+Owing to the great heat of this country, there is but little demand for
+English cloth, which is almost only employed for the housings of
+elephants and horses, and the linings of coaches. This sovereign
+assuredly exceeds all others in the splendour of his thrones, and the
+variety and richness of his jewels. In his palace at Agra, he has a
+throne upon a raised platform, to which he ascends by several steps, on
+the top of which are four figures of lions of massy silver, gilded and
+set with precious stones, and supporting a dome or canopy of pure gold.
+I may mention, that when I was at his court, he had a tame lion which
+went up and down at liberty, as harmless as a dog. The jewels with which
+he daily adorns his head, neck, and arms, and the hilts of his sword and
+dagger, are rich and valuable beyond all computation. On his birthday,
+which happens on the 1st of September, he being now sixty years of age,
+he is weighed, and an account thereof carefully noted down by his
+physicians, who thereby guess at his bodily condition.[242]
+
+[Footnote 242: See of these and other things, formerly stated, in the
+Journal of Sir Thomas Roe, and therefore here omitted. _Purch._]
+
+The following are parts of two letters from the Great Mogul to his
+majesty King James I. translated out of Persian, and sent through Sir
+Thomas Roe, one written a year before the other. What followed in both
+letters, was merely complimentary assurances of his love for the
+English. These letters were rolled up and covered with cloth of gold,
+the covering being sealed up at both ends, which is the fashion in that
+country. Copies were sent to the lord ambassador, from which these
+specimens were translated out of the Persian language.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"When your majesty shall open this letter, let your royal heart be fresh
+as a sweet garden. Let all people make lowly reverence at your gate, and
+may your throne be exalted among the kings of the prophet Jesus. May
+your majesty be the greatest of all monarchs; and may others draw
+counsel and wisdom from you, as from a fountain, that the law of the
+divine Jesus may revive and flourish under your protection. Your letters
+of love and friendship, and the tokens of your affection towards me, I
+have received by the hands of your ambassador, Sir Thomas Roe, who well
+deserves to be your trusted servant, and who delivered them to me in a
+happy hour. Upon them mine eyes were so fixed, that I could not easily
+remove them to any other object, and have accepted them with much joy,"
+&c.--The other began as follows:
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"How gracious is your majesty, whose greatness God preserve and prosper.
+As upon a rose in a garden of pleasure, so are mine eyes fixed upon your
+majesty. May God maintain your greatness, so that your monarchy may
+prosper and increase, that you may obtain all your desires, worthy the
+greatness of your renown. As your heart is noble and upright, so may God
+give you a prosperous reign, because you powerfully defend the majesty
+of Jesus, which may God render yet more flourishing, having been
+confirmed by miracles," &c.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+We travelled two years with the Great Mogul, who was in progress
+through his dominions, moving only during the temperate months, between
+October and April. On this occasion, I am confident that the _leskar_,
+or camp, contained not less than 300,000 persons, including men, women,
+and children, besides elephants, horses, and other beasts, that were fed
+upon grain; yet we never experienced any scarcity of provisions, not
+even in our nineteen days journey through a wilderness, between Mandoa
+and _Amadavar_, [Ahmedabad.] On this occasion, a road was cut for us
+through the forest. The tents of the leskar were of various colours,
+being regularly arranged, and represented a large and splendid city. The
+king's tents were red, and raised on poles to a great height, being
+placed in the middle of the camp, and covering a great extent of ground;
+the whole of the royal quarter being encircled by _canats_, or walls,
+made of red calico, held up by canes at every breadth, and standing
+upright about nine feet high, which was guarded all round by soldiers
+every night.
+
+The king removed ten or twelve miles every day, more or less according
+to the convenience of procuring water. His wives and women of all sorts,
+which are not less than a thousand, all lodged and provided for in his
+tents, were carried along with the leskar, some in palanquins, others
+upon elephants, or in cradles or panniers slung upon dromedaries, all
+closely covered up that they might not be seen, and attended upon by
+eunuchs. In the choice of his wives, the Great Mogul respects fancy more
+than honour, not seeking affinity with neighbouring princes, but to
+please his eye at home. _Noormahal_, the best beloved among his wives,
+whose name signifies the _Light of the Court_, was of mean origin, but
+has since advanced her friends to high rank and employments, and in a
+manner commands the commander of the empire, by engrossing his whole
+affections. The king and his great men continue to maintain their women,
+but little affect them after thirty years old.
+
+Notwithstanding the multitude of his women, the Great Mogul has only six
+children, five sons and a daughter. All his sons are styled sultans, or
+princes. The eldest is Sultan _Cursero_, the second, Sultan _Parrveis_,
+the third, Sultan _Caroon_, the fourth, Sultan _Shahar_, and the
+youngest, Sultan _Tauct_.[243] The name of this last signifies a
+_Throne_; and he was so named by the king, because he was informed of
+his birth at the time when he got quiet possession of the throne. The
+eldest-born son of one of his legitimate wives has right to inherit the
+throne, and has a title signifying the _Great Brother_. Although the
+others are not put to death as with the Turks, yet it is observed that
+they seldom long survive their fathers, being commonly employed on some
+dangerous expedition.
+
+[Footnote 243: These names seem to have been written by Terry from the
+ear. By others, they are respectively named Cusero, Parvis, Churrum,
+Shahar, and Taucht.--E.]
+
+Akbar Shah, the father of the reigning Mogul, had threatened to
+disinherit him, for some abuse to _Anar-Kalee_, his most beloved wife,
+whose name signifies pomegranate kernel; but on his death-bed he
+restored him to the succession. Akbar was wont, upon taking any
+displeasure at one of his grandees, to give them pills to purge their
+souls from their bodies, and is said to have come by his death in the
+following manner. Intending to give one of these pills to a nobleman who
+had incurred his displeasure, and meaning to take at the same time a
+cordial pill himself, while he was cajoling the destined victim with
+flattering speeches, he, by mistake, took the poisoned pill himself, and
+gave the cordial to the nobleman. This carried him off in a few days, by
+a mortal flux of blood.[244]
+
+[Footnote 244: Neque enim lex justior ulla est, quam necis artifices
+arte perire sua.--_Purch._]
+
+The character of Jehanguire, the reigning Mogul, seems strangely
+compounded of opposite extremes. He is at times excessively cruel, and
+at other times extremely mild. He is himself much given to excess in
+wine, yet severely punishes that fault in others. His subjects know not
+what it is to disobey his commands, forgetting the natural bonds of
+private life, even those between father and son, in the fulfilment of
+their public duty. He daily relieves numbers of the poor; and often, as
+a mark of his filial piety, is in use to carry the palanquin of his
+mother on his own shoulders. He speaks with much reverence of our
+Saviour, but is offended by his cross and poverty, deeming them
+incompatible with his divine Majesty, though told that his humility was
+on purpose to subdue the pride of the world.
+
+All religions are tolerated, and even their priests are held in good
+esteem. I used often to receive from the Mogul the appellation of
+_Father_, with many other gracious words, and had a place assigned me
+among his nobles. The jesuits are not only admitted into his presence,
+but encouraged by many gifts, and are permitted to convert the subjects,
+who do not on that event lose their favour at court. On one occasion,
+the Mogul put the sincerity of a convert to a severe trial. Having used
+many threatenings to induce him to abandon his new faith, and finding
+him undaunted, he tried by flatteries and high promises to draw him
+back; but these also being unavailing, he bade him continue a Christian,
+and dismissed him with a reward; saying, if he had been able to terrify
+or cajole him from his religion, he would have made him a terrible
+example for all waverers.
+
+When I was in this country, the chief jesuit residing at the court of
+the Mogul, was Francisco Corsi, a Florentine by birth, who acted
+likewise as agent for the Portuguese. I wish I could confirm the reports
+they have made of conversions; but the real truth is, that they have
+merely spilt the water of baptism on the faces of a few, working on the
+necessities of some poor men, who from want of means to live, with which
+the jesuits supplied them, have been persuaded to wear crucifixes, but
+who, for want of instruction, are only Christians in name. Of these few
+mendicants, or so called by Christians, I noticed that five of them
+would beg in the name of Maria, for one who asked in the name of Jesus.
+I also desired to have put my hands to the holy work, but found extreme
+difficulty in the way, owing both to the Mahometan laxity in regard to
+the use of women, and the debauched lives of some unchristian
+Christians.--May he who hath the key of David open their eyes, and in
+his good time send labourers into this vineyard. _Amen_.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+JOURNEY OF THOMAS CORYAT BY LAND, FROM JERUSALEM TO THE COURT OF THE
+GREAT MOGUL.[245]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+Without proposing to follow this singularly bold English traveller and
+whimsical writer, in all his _crudities_, as he has quaintly termed his
+own writings, it has seemed proper to give some abbreviated extracts of
+his observations, which may serve in some measure to illustrate those of
+Sir Tomas Roe and the Reverend Edward Terry.--E.
+
+[Footnote 245: Purch. Pilgr. I. 607. In regard to this short article,
+see introduction to the immediately preceding Section.--E.]
+
+Sec.1. _Letter from Ajimeer, the Court of the Great Mogul, to Mr L.
+Whitaker, dated in the Year 1615_.
+
+My last letter to you was from _Zobah_, as it is called by the prophet
+Samuel, B. II. ch. viii. v. 3. now named Aleppo, the principal emporium
+of all Syria, or rather of the eastern world; which was, I think, about
+fifteen months ago. I returned from Jerusalem to Aleppo, where I
+remained three months afterwards, and then departed in a caravan bound
+for Persia. Passing the river Euphrates, the chiefest of the rivers
+which irrigated the terrestrial paradise, when about four days journey
+from Aleppo, I entered into Mesopotamia, or Chaldea. Hence, in two days
+journey, I reached _Ur_ of the Chaldees, where Abraham was born, a very
+delicate and pleasant city.[246] I remained here four days; and in other
+four days journey reached the Tigris, which I also passed, at a place
+where it was so shallow that it only reached to the calf of my leg, so
+that I waded over a-foot. I then entered into the greater Armenia; and
+thence into lower Media, and resided six days in its metropolis,
+formerly called _Ecbatana_, the summer residence of Cyrus the Great, now
+called Tauris. More woeful ruins of a city I never beheld, excepting
+those of Troy and of Cyzicum in Natolia.
+
+[Footnote 246: Probably Orfa in Diarbekir is here meant.--E.]
+
+From that place I went to _Cashbin_, called by Strabo, _Arsacia_, in
+higher Media, once the residence of the Tartar prince; four days journey
+from the Caspian Sea. From Cashbin, I went in twenty-three days to
+_Ispahan_ in Parthia, the residence of the king of Persia; but while I
+was there, he was in _Gurgistan_, [Georgia,] ransacking the poor
+Christians of that country with fire and sword. I remained two months at
+Ispahan, whence I travelled with a caravan to the eastern India, passing
+four months and several days in travelling from that city, through part
+of Persia proper, and a large extent of the noble and renowned India, to
+the goodly city of _Lahore_. This is one of the largest cities in the
+world, being, at the least, sixteen miles in circuit, and larger even
+than Constantinople. Twelve days before coming to Lahore, I passed over
+the famous river Indus, which is as broad again as our Thames at London,
+having its original from the mountain of Caucassus, so ennobled by
+ancient poets and historians, both Greek and Latin.
+
+When about midway between Ispahan and Lahore, just about the frontiers
+between Persia and India, I met Sir Robert Shirley and his lady,
+travelling from the court of the Mogul to that of Persia. They were
+gallantly furnished for their journey, and shewed me, to my great
+satisfaction, both my books, very neatly kept, and promised to shew
+them, especially my itinerary, to the king of Persia, and to interpret
+some of the principal contents to him in Turkish, that I may have the
+more gracious access to him at my return. Besides other rarities which
+they carried with them, they had two elephants and eight antelopes,
+being the first of either I had ever seen. But afterwards, when I came
+to the Mogul's, court, I saw many. They intended to present these
+animals to the king of Persia. Both Sir Robert and his lady used me with
+much respect; especially his lady, who presented me with forty shillings
+in Persian money; and they seemed joyful at meeting me, promising to
+bring me into good grace with the king of Persia, as I mean, with God's
+help, to return through Persia to Aleppo.
+
+From Lahore, I travelled in twenty days to another goodly city named
+Agra, through such a beautiful and level country as I had never seen
+before. In this way, from the town's end of Lahore to the skirts of
+Agra, we had a row of trees on both sides of the road, the most
+incomparable avenue I ever beheld. Some ten days journey from Lahore
+towards Agra, but about ten miles off the road on the left hand, there
+is a mountain, the inhabitants of which have a singular custom, all the
+brothers of one family having but one wife among them, so that one women
+sometimes has six or seven husbands. The same is related by Strabo
+concerning the inhabitants of Arabia Felix. Agra is a very great city,
+but in every respect much inferior to Lahore. Here the Mogul used always
+to keep his court, till within these two years.
+
+From Agra I went in ten days to the Mogul's court, at a town called
+Asmere, [Ajimeer,] where I found an English. Cape merchant with nine
+more of our countrymen, residing there in the way of trade for our East
+India Company. In. my journey from Jerusalem to the court of the Great
+Mogul, I spent fifteen months and some days, travelling all the way
+a-foot, having been so great a _propatetic_, or walker forwards on foot,
+as I doubt if you ever heard of the like; for the whole way, from
+Jerusalem to Ajimeer, contains 2700 English miles. My whole
+perambulation of the greater Asia is likely to extend almost to 6000
+miles, by the time I have returned back through Persia, by Babylon and
+Nineveh to Cairo in Egypt, and thence down the Nile to Alexandria, when
+I propose, with God's blessing, to embark for Christendom.
+
+The reigning Great Mogul is named Selim.[247] He is fifty-three years of
+age, his birth-day having been celebrated with wonderful magnificence
+since my arrival. He was that day weighed in a pair of golden scales,
+which by great chance I saw that same day, the opposite scale being
+filled with as much gold as counterpoised his weight, and this is
+afterwards distributed among the poor. This custom is observed every
+year. His complexion is of an olive colour, something between white and
+black; being of a seemly stature, but somewhat corpulent. His dominions
+are very extensive, being about 4000 English miles in circumference,
+nearly answerable to the compass of the Turkish territories; or, if the
+Mogul kingdom be any way inferior in size to that empire, it is more
+than equally endowed with a fertile soil beyond that of any other
+country, and in having its territory connected together in one goodly
+continent, within which no other prince possesses one single foot of
+land. The yearly revenue of the Mogul extends to forty millions of
+crowns, of six shillings each, while that of the Turk does not exceed
+fifteen millions, as I was credibly informed in Constantinople, nor that
+of the Sophy five millions, as I learnt at Ispahan. It is said that the
+present Great Mogul is not circumcised, in which he differs from all
+other Mahometan sovereigns.
+
+[Footnote 247: He was Sultan Selim before his accession to the throne,
+but was afterward known by the new name of Jehunguire.--E.]
+
+The Great Mogul speaks with much revrence of our Saviour, naming him
+_Hazaret Eesa_, that is to say, the Great Prophet Jesus.[248] He
+likewise uses all Christians, and especially the English, with more
+benevolence than does any other Mahometan prince. He keeps many wild
+beasts, such as lions, elephants, leopards, bears, antelopes, and
+unicorns, [rhinoceroses,] of which I saw two at his court, the strangest
+beasts in the world. They were brought out of Bengal, a kingdom in his
+dominions of most wonderful fertility, above four months journey from
+this place, the mid-land parts of which are watered by various channels
+and branches of the famous river Ganges. I have not yet seen that
+country, but mean to visit it, God willing, before my departure, the
+nearest part of it being only about twelve days journey from hence.
+
+[Footnote 248: The Persian word _Hasaret_, here erroneously rendered
+Great Prophet, seems to signify literally _face_ or _presence_, and is
+metaphorically used as a term of highest dignity, of which an instance
+occurs in the present section, used by Coryat himself in addressing the
+Great Mogul--E.]
+
+Twice every week elephants are made to fight before the Mogul, forming
+the bravest spectacle that can be imagined, many of them being thirteen
+feet and a half in height, and they jostle together as though they were
+two little mountains; and were they not separated in the midst of their
+fighting, by means of certain fire-works, they would exceedingly hurt
+and gore each other, by their murderous tusks. The Mogul is said to keep
+30,000 elephants, at a most enormous expence; and in feeding them,
+together with his lions and other beasts, he expends an incredible sum
+of money, being at the least 10,000 pounds sterling daily. I have myself
+rode upon an elephant since I came to this court, meaning in my next
+book to have my effigies represented in that form. This king keeps a
+thousand women for his own use, the chiefest of whom, called Normal,
+(Noormahal) is his queen.
+
+In my ten months journey between Aleppo and this court, I spent just
+three pounds sterling, yet fared reasonably every day; victuals being so
+cheap in some of the countries through which I travelled, that I often
+lived competently for one penny a-day. Of that three pounds, I was
+actually cozened out of ten shillings, by certain evil Christians of the
+Armenian nation; so that in reality I only expended fifty shillings in
+all that time. I have been in a city of this country called
+_Detee_,[249] where Alexander the Great joined battle with Porus king of
+India, and defeated him; and where, in memory of his victory, he caused
+erect a brazen pillar, which remains there to this day. At this time I
+have many irons in the fire, as I am learning the Persian, Turkish, and
+Arabic languages, having already acquired the Italian. I have been
+already three months at the court of the Great Mogul, and propose, God
+willing, to remain here five months longer, till I have got these three
+languages; after which I propose to visit the river Ganges, and then to
+return to the court of Persia.
+
+[Footnote 249: This is obviously a misprint for Delee, meaning Delhi;
+but it is more probable that Alexander never was beyond the Punjab.--E.]
+
+In the course of my journey, I was robbed of my money, but not of all,
+having some concealed in certain secret corners. This was done at the
+city of Diarbekir in Mesopotatamia, by a Turkish horse soldier, whom
+they call a _spahee_. Since my arrival here, there was sent to this king
+the richest present I ever heard of. It consisted of various things, the
+whole amounting to the value of ten of their lacks, a lack being L10,000
+sterling. Part of this present consisted of thirty-one elephants, two of
+which were more gorgeously adorned than any thing I ever saw, or shall
+see in the course of my life. They had each four massy chains all of
+beaten gold, around their bodies, with two chains of the same about
+their legs, furniture for their buttocks of the same rich material, and
+two golden lions on their heads.
+
+Sec.2. _Letter from Agra, the Capital of the Great Mogul, to his Mother,
+dated 31st October, 1616_.
+
+Most dear and well-beloved Mother,
+
+This city is the metropolis of the whole dominions of the Great Mogul,
+and is at the distance of ten days journey from Ajimeer, whence I
+departed on the 12th September this year, after having abode there
+twelve months and sixty days. This my long stay in one place, was for
+two principal causes; one being to learn the languages of these
+countries through which I am to pass between this country and
+Christendom, namely, Persian, Turkish, and Arabic, which I have
+competently attained to by labour and industry, being as available to me
+as money, and the chiefest, or rather the only means to get me money if
+I should happen to be in want; and, secondly, that, by the help of the
+Persian, I might get myself access to the Mogul, and be able to express
+my mind unto him about what I proposed to lay before him. During all
+this time, I abode in the house of the English merchants, my dear
+countrymen, not expending any money at all for lodging, diet, washing,
+or any other thing.
+
+I attained to a reasonable skill in the Persian tongue, by earnest study
+in a few months, so that I made an oration to the king in that
+language, before many of his nobles; and afterwards discoursed with him
+very readily. The copy of this speech I have sent you, as a novelty,
+though the language may seem strange and uncouth to an Englishman; and I
+have sent you herewith a translation, which you may shew along with the
+Persian original to some of my learned friends of the clergy, and also
+of the laity, who may take some pleasure in reading so rare and unusual
+a tongue. The Persian is this that follows:
+
+_Hazaret Aallum-pennah, Salamet: fooker Darceish, ce jehaun-gesht
+hastam; ke mia emadam az wellageti door, yanne as muik Ingliz-stan, ke
+kessanion pesheen mushacar cardand,_ _ke wellageti mazcoor der akeri
+magrub bood, ke mader hamma jezzaereti dunia ast, &c._[250]--The English
+of it is this:
+
+"Lord protector of the world, all hail! I am a poor traveller and
+world-seer, who am come here from a far country called England, which
+ancient historians thought to have been situated in the farthest bounds
+of the west, and which is the queen of all the islands in the world. The
+causes of my coming hither are four. First, that I might behold the
+blessed countenance of your majesty, whose great fame has resounded over
+all Europe, and through all the Mahometan countries. When I heard of the
+fame of your majesty, I made all possible haste hither, and cheerfully
+endured the labour of travelling, that I might see your glorious court.
+Secondly, I was desirous of seeing your majesty's elephants, which kind
+of beasts I have not seen in any other country. Thirdly, that I might
+see your famous river the Ganges, the captain of all the rivers in the
+world. Fourthly, to entreat your majesty, that you would vouchsafe to
+grant me your most gracious phirmaund, that I may travel into the
+country of Tartaria to the city of Samarcand, to visit the blessed
+sepulchre of the _Lord of the Corners_,[251] whose fame, by reason of
+his wars and victories, is published over the whole world, so that
+perhaps he is not altogether so famous in his own country of Tartary as
+in England. I have a strong desire to see the sepulchre of the Lord of
+the Corners for this cause, that, when in Constantinople, I saw a
+notable old building in a pleasant garden near the said city, where the
+Christian emperor, Emanuel, made a sumptuous banquet to the Lord of the
+Corners, after he had taken Sultan Bajazet in a great battle near the
+city of Brusa, when the Lord of the Corners bound Sultan Bajazet in
+golden fetters, and put him into an iron cage. These causes have induced
+me to travel thus far from my native country, having come a-foot through
+Turkey and Persia into this country, my pilgrimage having extended so
+three thousand miles, with much labour and toil, such as no mortal man
+hath ever yet performed, to see the blessed countenance of your majesty,
+since the first day of your being inaugurated in your imperial throne."
+
+[Footnote 250: The whole discourse, of which the following paragraph in
+the text is the translation, is contained in the Pilgrims: But doubting
+its accuracy, as that book is most incorrectly printed throughout, the
+editor requested the favour of the late learned professor of oriental
+languages in the University of Edinburgh, Dr Alexander Murray, to revise
+and correct this first sentence, which he most readily did, adding the
+following literal translation: "Presence, [or face.] of the
+world--protector, salutation to thee: A poor dervish and world-wanderer
+I am; that I have come from a kingdom far, to-wit, from the kingdom of
+Ingliz-stan, which historians ancient, relation have made, that kingdom
+said, in the end of the west was, which the mother of every island of
+the world is," &c.]
+
+[Footnote 251: This is the title given to Tamerlane in this country, in
+the Persian language, meaning that he was lord over the four corners of
+the earth, that is, the highest and supreme monarch of the
+world.--_Purch._]
+
+When I had ended my speech, I conversed with him for a short space in
+Persian, when, among other things, he told me that he could do me no
+service in regard to my proposed journey to Samarcand, as there was no
+intimacy between him and the princes of the Tartars, so that his
+commendatory letters would avail me little. He also added, that the
+Tartars bore so deadly a hate against all Christians, that they would
+certainly kill any who might venture into their country, wherefore he
+earnestly dissuaded me from this proposed journey, as I valued my life
+and welfare. At last, he concluded his discourse by throwing down to me,
+from a window in which he stood, that looked into the street, an hundred
+pieces of silver, worth two shillings each or ten pounds in all, which
+were thrown into a sheet hanging by the four corners.
+
+I had conducted this affair so secretly, by the help of the Persian
+which I had learnt, that neither our English ambassador, nor any other
+of my countrymen, excepting one special and private friend, knew any
+thing at all about the matter till I had thoroughly accomplished my
+design. For I well knew, if the ambassador had got the smallest notice
+of my purpose, that he would have counteracted me, as indeed he
+signified to me after I had effected my purpose, alledging that this
+might redound to the discredit of our nation, for one of our country to
+present himself in that poor and beggarly manner before the king, to
+crave money from him by flattery. But I answered our ambassador so
+resolutely, that he was glad to let me alone. Indeed, I never had more
+need of money in all my life than at this time, having only to the value
+of twenty shillings remaining, owing to my having been stripped of
+almost all my money by a miscreant Turk, in a city called _Imaret_, in
+Mesopotamia.
+
+After my interview with the Mogul, I went to visit a certain noble and
+generous Christian of the Armenian nation, two days journey from court,
+to observe certain remarkable matters at that place; and, by means of my
+knowledge of the Persian language, he made me very welcome, entertaining
+me with much civility and kindness; and, at my departure, gave me very
+bountifully twenty pieces of the same coin as the king had done, worth
+forty shillings of our money. About ten days after this, I departed from
+Ajimeer, the court of the Great Mogul, to resume my pilgrimage, after my
+long rest of fourteen months, proposing to go back into Persia. On this
+occasion, our ambassador gave me a gold piece of this king's coin, worth
+twenty-four shillings, which I shall save till my arrival in England, if
+it be possible. I have thus received in benevolences, since I came into
+this country, twenty marks sterling,[252] bating two shillings and
+eight-pence, besides L1:13:4 sterling, in Persian money, from Lady
+Shirley, upon the confines of Persia. At this present, being in Agra,
+whence I write this letter, I have about twelve pounds, which, according
+to my manner of living on the way, at two-pence a-day, will very
+competently maintain me during three years travel, considering the
+cheapness of all eatables in Asia. Drink costs me nothing, as I hardly
+ever drink any thing beyond pure water during my pilgrimage.
+
+[Footnote 252: Twenty marks are L15:6:8 sterling.--E.]
+
+I mean to remain in Agra for six weeks longer, waiting an excellent
+opportunity of going to the famous river Ganges, about five days journey
+from hence, to see a memorable meeting of the idolatrous people of this
+country, called Banians, of whom to the number of 400,000 go thither, on
+purpose to bathe and shave themselves in the river, and to sacrifice a
+world of gold to that same river, partly in stamped coin, and partly in
+great massy lumps and wedges, thrown into the river as a sacrifice,
+besides many other strange ceremonies, worthy of being observed. So
+notable a spectacle is no where to be seen, neither in this the
+_greater_ Asia, nor in the _lesser_, now called Natolia. This shew is
+made once in every year, on which occasion people flock thither from
+almost a thousand miles off, worshipping the river as a god and
+saviour; a most abominable and impious superstition of these brutish
+heathens, aliens from Christ. As soon as I have seen this ceremony, I
+propose, by God's help, to repair to Lahore, twenty days journey from
+hence, and so into Persia, &c.
+
+   Your dutiful, loving, and obedient son,
+   Now a desolate pilgrim in the world,
+   THOMAS CORYAT.
+
+Sec.3. _Some Observations concerning India, by Thomas Coryat_.[253]
+
+Whereas in this country the beggars beg from a Christian in the name of
+_Bibbee Maria_, and not of _Hazaret Eesa_, we may gather that the
+Jesuits have preached our _Lady Mary_ more than the _Lord Jesus_.
+
+[Footnote 253: Purchas informs us, that these were taken from certain
+notes written by Coryat, given him by Sir Thomas Roe; "whence, omitting
+such things as have been given before from the observations of Sir
+Thomas Roe himself, I have inserted a few."--_Purch._]
+
+A great rajah of the Hindoos, who was a notorious atheist, and a
+contemner of all diety, and who boasted that he knew of no God except
+the king, and neither believed nor feared any other, happened one day to
+sit dallying among his women, when one of them plucked a hair from his
+breast, which hair being fast-rooted, plucked off along with it a small
+bit of skin, so that a small spot of blood appeared. This small scar
+festered and gangrened incurably, so that in a few days his life was
+despaired of, and being surrounded by all his friends, and several of
+the courtiers, he broke out into these excellent words:--"Which of you
+would have thought that I, a warrior, should not have died by the stroke
+of a sword, a spear, or an arrow? But now am I enforced to confess the
+power of the great God I have so long despised, who needs no other lance
+to slay so blasphemous a wretch and contemner of his holy majesty, such
+as I have been, than a small hair."
+
+Akbar Shah, the former king, had learnt all manner of sorceries; and
+being once in a strange humour to shew a spectacle to his nobles, he
+brought forth his favourite Sultana before them, and cut off her head
+with a sword in their presence. Seeing them struck with horror and
+amazement at this action, by virtue of his exorcisms and sorceries, he
+caused her head to fix on again, and no sign remained of any wound.
+
+The same prince, who was very fortunate during his reign, shewed the
+utmost attention and respect to his mother, of which he one day gave the
+following striking instance:--Being on a journey between Lahore and
+Agra, on which occasion his mother accompanied him, being carried in a
+palanquin, and having to pass a river, he took one of the poles of the
+palanquin on his own shoulder, commanding his greatest nobles to do the
+same, and in this manner carried her across the river. He never denied
+her any request that ever she made, except one, and this was, that our
+Bible might be hung about the neck of an ass, and so beaten about the
+town of Agra. The reason of this strange request was, that the
+Portuguese had taken a ship of theirs, in which they found a copy of the
+_Koran_, or bible of the Mahometans, which they tied about the neck of a
+dog, and beat the dog about the streets of Ormus. But he denied her this
+request, saying, That if it were evil in the Portuguese to have so done
+with the Koran, it did not become a king to requite evil with evil, as
+the contempt of any religion was contempt of God, and he would not be
+revenged upon an innocent book. The moral of this is, that God would not
+permit the sacred book of his law and truth to be contemned among the
+infidels.
+
+One day in every year, for the amusement of the king's women, all the
+tradesmen's wives are admitted into the _Mahal_, having each somewhat to
+sell, after the manner of a fair, and at which the king acts as broker
+for his wives, no other man being present, and by means of his gains on
+this occasion, provides his own supper. By this means he attains to a
+sight of all the pretty women of the city; and at a fair of this kind he
+got his beloved _Noor Mahal_.
+
+After _Shaof Freed_ had won the battle of Lahore by a stratagem, all the
+captains of the rebel army, to the number of two thousand, who had been
+taken by the king, were hung up upon flesh-hooks, or set upon stakes,
+forming an avenue for the king's entrance into Lahore. On this occasion,
+his son _Curseroo_, [Cusero] who had been made prisoner, rode beside
+him, bare-footed, on an elephant, and the king asked him how he liked
+that spectacle? To this the prince answered, That he was sorry to see so
+much cruelty and injustice in his father, in thus executing those who
+had only done their duty, as they had lived on his bread and salt: but
+that his father had done justly if he had pardoned these brave men, and
+punished him, who was their master, and the author of this rebellion.
+
+Sultan Cusero has only one wife, owing to the following circumstance:
+During his confinement, the king proposed to make a hunting progress of
+four months, and consulted how he might keep his son in safe custody
+during his absence. He at length determined to build a tower in which to
+immure him, having neither door nor window, and only a few small holes
+to let in air, and these so high as to be beyond reach. Into this tower
+were to be put along with the prince all sorts of provisions and
+necessaries, with a few servants to attend him. While this was building,
+the wife of Cusero fell at the king's feet, and would not leave him till
+she obtained his consent to be shut up along with her husband. The king
+endeavoured to persuade her to enjoy her liberty, but she utterly
+refused any other comfort than to be the companion of her husband's
+miseries. Among these, this was the greatest, that if any of those who
+were to be shut up along with him, to the number of fifty in all, should
+happen to die during the king's absence, there were no means either to
+remove or bury the body, as no person was to be allowed to come near the
+tower.
+
+It is a frequent custom of the present Mogul, when he happens to be
+awake in the night time, he calls for certain poor old men, making them
+sit beside him, and passes his time in familiar discourse with them,
+giving them clothes and bountiful alms when he dismisses them. At one
+time, when residing at Ajimeer, he went a-foot on pilgrimage to the tomb
+of a saint or prophet called Haji Mundin, and there kindled a fire with
+his own hands, under an immense _Heidelbergian equipolent_ brass pot, in
+which victuals were cooked for five thousand poor persons. When the
+victuals were ready, he took out the first platter with his own hands,
+and served the mess to a poor person. Noor Mahal took out and served the
+second, and the rest was served by the other ladies of his
+court.--_Crack me this nut, all ye papal charity-vaunters_.
+
+One day an Armenian procured a nobleman to present him to the king, as
+one who desired to become an Mahometan; on which the king asked him, if
+he had been converted from hope of preferment; to which the Armenian
+answered, that be had no such motive. Some months afterwards, the new
+convert craved some courtesy from the king, which he denied, saying, "I
+have already done you the greatest of all favours, in allowing you to
+save your soul; but you must provide for your own body the best way you
+can." The king likes not those who change their religion, being himself
+of none but according to his own fancy, and freely allows therefore of
+all religions in his dominions. Of which I may give the following
+notable example:
+
+He had an Armenian in his service, named Scander, whom he one day asked
+if he thought any of the _padres_ had ever converted a single Mahometan
+to be a true Christian, for conscience sake, and not for money. Scander
+answered, with great confidence, that he had one as his servant, who was
+a sincere Christian, and would not be of any other for any worldly
+consideration. The king immediately caused this man to be sent for, and
+bidding Scander depart, he examined the convert as to his reasons for
+having become a Christian. In reply, he quoted certain feeble jesuitical
+reasons, declaring his determination to be of no other religion, though
+the king made him many fair speeches and large offers to return to
+Mahometism, offering him pensions, and the command of horse. He said he
+had now only four rupees a month, which was a poor recompense for
+becoming a Christian, but if he would recant, he would give him high
+dignities and large means. The fellow answered, that he had not become a
+Christian for such small wages, as he was able to earn as much in the
+service of a Mahometan; but was a Christian in his heart, and was
+determined so to continue. Finding this method ineffectual, the king
+turned his tune, and tried him with threats of severe punishment, unless
+he returned to the faith of Mahomet. But the proselyte manfully declared
+he would suffer any thing, being ready to endure whatever the king was
+pleased to order. Upon this declaration, when all the by-standers
+expected present and severe castigation, the king suddenly changed his
+manner towards him, highly commending his constancy and resolution,
+bidding him return to his master, and to serve him faithfully, and
+ordered him an allowance of one rupee a-day for his integrity.
+
+About two months afterwards, the king returned from hunting wild-hogs,
+an animal which is held in abhorrence by all Mahometans, and which kind
+of venison, therefore, the king was in use to distribute among the
+Christians and Rajaputs. On this occasion, the king sent for the
+converted catechumen above mentioned, and commanded him to take up a hog
+for his master, which no Mahometan will touch. He did so, but on going
+out of the court gate, he was so hooted at by the Mahometans, that he
+threw down his burden in a ditch, and went home; concealing what had
+passed from his master. Some four days afterwards, the Armenian being on
+duty in presence of the king, he asked him if the hog he had sent him
+was good meat. The Armenian replied, that he had not seen or heard of
+any. The king therefore immediately ordered the convert to be sent for,
+who confessed that he had not carried home the hog, as being mocked by
+the Mahometans for touching so great an abomination, he had for shame
+thrown it away. On this the king observed, "By your Christian law there
+is no difference of meats. Are you ashamed of your law, or do you
+outwardly forsake it to flatter the Mahometans? I now see that you are
+neither a good Christian nor a good Mahometan, but a knave dissembling
+with both. When I believed you sincere, I gave you a pension, which I
+now take from you for your dissimulation, and I farther condemn you to
+receive an hundred stripes." These were presently paid him, instead of
+his money; and the king desired all to take warning by this example,
+that, having given liberty of conscience to all religions, he would have
+all to adhere to what they professed.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+ACCOUNT OF THE WRONGS DONE TO THE ENGLISH AT BANDA BY THE DUTCH, IN 1617
+AND 1618.[254]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+This section contains a letter from Mr Thomas Spurway, merchant or
+factor, addressed from Bantam, "To the Honourable and Right Worshipful
+the East India Company of England, touching the wrongs done at Banda to
+the English by the Hollanders; the former unkind disgusts and brabling
+quarrels now breaking unexpectedly out into a furious and injurious
+war." Such is the account given of this section by Purchas, who farther
+informs his readers, "That the beginning of this letter was torn, and
+therefore imperfect in his edition; but, what is here defective, was to
+be afterwards supplied from the journals of Nathaniel Courthop, and
+other continuations of these insolences of the Dutch at Banda, by Mr
+Hayes, and others." These journals of Courthop and Hayes are so
+intolerably and confusedly written, and so interlarded with numerous
+letters _about_ the subject of these differences with the Dutch, that we
+have been reluctantly under the necessity of omitting them, being so
+monstrously inarticulate as to render it impossible to make them at all
+palatable to our readers, without using freedoms that were altogether
+inadmissible in a work like the present.
+
+[Footnote 254: Purch. Pilgr. I. 608.]
+
+From this letter, and other information of a similar nature, it appears
+that the attempts to form establishments for trade at Banda and the
+Molucca islands were found to be difficult or impracticable, owing to
+the opposition of the Dutch, who were much stronger in that part of
+India, and had not only conceived the plan of monopolizing the spice
+trade, but even avowed their determination to exclude the English and
+all other European nations from participating in any share of it. We do
+not pretend, in our Collection, to write the history of the English East
+India Company, but merely to give a series of the voyages which
+contributed to the establishment of that princely association of
+merchant adventurers. Yet it seems proper, occasionally at least, in the
+introductions to leading voyages, like the present, to give some short
+historical notices of the subject, for the materials of which we are
+chiefly, if not solely, indebted to the Annals of the Company, a work of
+meritorious and laborious research, already several times referred to.
+
+Under the difficulties which had long attended the exertions of the
+English to acquire a share in this peculiarly called _spice trade_, the
+agent and commercial council of the English company at Bantam, gave
+authority to the commanders of the Swan and Defence to endeavour to
+obtain from the native chiefs of the islands of Puloroon and Puloway, a
+surrender of these islands to the king of England, with the stipulation
+of paying annually as a quit-rent, a fruit-bearing branch of the nutmeg
+tree; yet stipulating that these islanders were to continue entirely
+under the guidance of their own laws and customs, providing only that
+they should engage to sell their spices exclusively to the agents of the
+English company, who were, in return, to supply them with provisions and
+Hindoostan manufactures at a fair price, in exchange for their peculiar
+productions, nutmegs and mace. They were likewise authorised, if they
+procured the consent of the natives, to establish fortified stations, or
+factories, at Puloroon, Puloway. Pulo-Lantore, and Rosinging, or
+Rosengin.[255] The views of the Bantam factory on this occasion seem to
+have been generally judicious, as to the measure they now authorised,
+but exceedingly ill judged in attempting to execute so very important a
+purpose with a force entirely inadequate to that with which it had to
+contend.
+
+[Footnote 255: An. of E.I. Co. I. 187.]
+
+The Dutch had expelled the Portuguese, at that time the subjects of
+their tyrannical oppressors, the Spaniards, from a great portion of the
+spice islands, in which warlike measure, and its consequences, they had
+always to support a considerable force, both naval and military, in
+these seas, and in various forts upon these islands; and besides, that
+they felt their preponderance from these circumstances, and used it very
+naturally for their own exclusive benefit, they alleged, and with no
+small appearance of equity, that the English had no right to enjoy the
+advantages of a trade, which they, the Dutch, had conquered from the
+Portuguese and Spaniards. This opposition of interests proceeded in the
+sequel to great extremities, in which the greatly superior power of the
+Hollanders in these seas, enabled them effectually to oppress the
+English, in what are peculiarly called the spice islands, and even to
+expel them from all participation in that trade, as will appear in some
+of the subsequent sections of this chapter.
+
+It would be not only premature in this place, but incompatible with the
+nature of our work, which is intended as a Collection of Voyages and
+Travels, to attempt giving a connected history of these dissensions
+between the Dutch and English in Eastern India, which will be found
+detailed in the Annals of the English Company. It is hardly possible,
+however, to refrain from one observation on the subject,--that the Dutch
+company, and the government of Holland, appear to have mainly proceeded,
+in their hostile opposition to the English East India trade, on their
+knowledge of the pusillanimous character of King James, which he vainly
+thought to veil under the pretensions of loving peace, but which the
+Dutch, as will be seen in the present section, clearly understood, and
+openly expressed, as _the childhood of St George_, the tutelary martial
+saint of England. _Beati pacifici_, his favourite adage, is an excellent
+Christian and moral sentiment, but is incompatible with the unavoidable
+exigencies of government, at least as they were then situated.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_May it please your Worships_,
+
+We arrived at Macassar on the 19th of November, 1616, from Bantam, with
+the Swan and Defence, under the command of Captain Nicholas Courthop,
+who sailed in the Swan, of which ship Mr Davis was master, the other
+being commanded by Mr Hinchley. We remained there for the purpose of
+taking in an hundred _quoines_[256] of rice. On the 4th December, we saw
+a large Dutch ship in the offing, which came to anchor about five
+leagues off, and on the 5th they sent their skiff ashore, which made
+directly for the English house, having eight men on board. As soon as we
+perceived this boat coming ashore, we ran to the sea side; but, before
+we got there, two of her men were landed, whom we acquainted with the
+danger they were in, as the king of Macassar, and all the other kings
+thereabouts, were become their mortal enemies, because of the many
+injuries done them by the Hollanders, who had forcibly carried away a
+principal sabander, and other persons belonging to Macassar, for which
+they were determined upon revenge; and, therefore, that they might all
+expect to be put to death, unless the king could be prevailed upon to
+spare them. The Dutchmen were so much alarmed at this intelligence, that
+they wished to have gone back to their boat, but the Macassers had
+already gathered about us, and laid hands upon them.
+
+[Footnote 256: The amount or quantity of these _quoines_ are no where
+stated, or even hinted at; but, from circumstances in the sequel, they
+appear to have been considerable.--E.]
+
+I, and other English, immediately went in all haste to the king,
+acquainting him with what had happened, lest, if the Dutch had intended
+any treachery, he might have suspected us as being accessary. The king
+gave us thanks, and desired us to take the two Dutchmen who had landed
+to our house, that we might learn from them their intentions in coming
+here. This we did, and they informed us that they belonged to a fleet
+lately fitted out from Holland, and had lost company of their consorts.
+One of these called himself John Staunch, and reported himself to be an
+under-factor. The other was an English sailor. Perceiving themselves to
+be in great danger, they earnestly entreated us to stand their friends
+and procure their liberty. We promised to do every thing we could for
+them. Soon after this, the kings of Macassar and Talow, together with
+about 2000 attendants, came to the sands near the sea side, where they
+held a council upon these men. The king of Talow was clear for putting
+them to death, but we used our interest so successfully for them, that
+they were commanded to be gone instantly in their boat; The king of
+Macassar observing, that these were too few for satisfying his revenge,
+and that he should wait for one more ample. So they departed and went to
+their ship.
+
+Next day another boat was observed coming towards the shore from the
+same ship; and, on the king being informed of this, he gave immediate
+orders for twenty proas and corracorras to be manned and launched. This
+was done immediately, and the whole made towards the Dutch boat, which
+was rowing for the land directly towards our house. On observing the
+native craft endeavouring to intercept them, the Dutch turned their
+boat, and rowed back to regain their ship; but the Macassars soon got
+up, boarded them on both sides, and slew every man of the Hollanders,
+being sixteen in number. There were at this time near 5000 people at the
+sea side, and we were commanded to keep the house.
+
+The name of this Dutch ship was the Endraught, and imagining that we
+were bound for Banda or the Moluccas, she remained at sea waiting for
+us. We set sail from Macassar road on the 8th December, 1616, and when
+the Dutchmen, saw us under sail, they also weighed and kept company with
+us. We would gladly have gone from them, but could not, owing to the bad
+sailing of the Defence. They sent their boat to us, requesting we would
+spare them two quoines of rice, four tons of water, and some poultry,
+all of which we gave them, only taking payment for the rice, being forty
+dollars, giving the water and poultry freely. We asked why they had
+attempted to land the second time; when they told us their first boat
+had not then returned to the ship, so that they believed the Dutch
+factory had still remained at Macassar. But I believe it proceeded from
+obstinacy, believing their first boat had been denied access at our
+instigation, and meaning to make a second trial, when they hoped to have
+flattered the king to allow them to return, and reinstate their factory.
+For both their boats passed within musket-shot of our ships on their way
+to the land, yet did not go aboard to enquire what were the situation of
+affairs on shore, which if they had done, we should have forewarned them
+of their danger. They kept company with us till we came near Amboina,
+for which place they stood in, while we continued our course. We have
+since learnt that they gave out we had been the cause of their men being
+slain at Macassar, which is most false: For I solemnly protest that we
+used our best endeavours to save them, and if it had not been for us,
+the eight men in their first boat had also been slain.
+
+The Swan and Defence arrived in the road of Puloroon on the 13th
+December. Next day the people of that island came on board, and
+conferred with us about surrendering the island to us. We represented
+that our nation had come often to their island, at great cost, and at
+their particular request, to settle a factory, and trade with them in a
+friendly manner, bringing them rice and other provisions, with cloth and
+sundry commodities, in exchange for their spices; that we had no desire
+to usurp over them, or to reduce them under bondage, as had been done
+formerly by the Hollanders and other nations; and that, if they would
+surrender their island of Puloroon to our sovereign the king of England,
+by a formal writing, and by the delivery of some earth, with a tree and
+fruits of the island, as true tokens of their fidelity, and thereafter a
+nut-tree yearly as an acknowledgment, we should settle a factory, and
+would furnish them with rice, cloth, and other commodities, both now and
+yearly afterwards. We also assured them, if we were once settled on the
+island, that sufficient supplies would come to them yearly, much better
+than now; and that we would use our utmost efforts, both by means of our
+men and ships, to defend them and ourselves from all enemies. We also
+demanded, whether they had come under any contract with the Hollanders,
+or had made them any surrender of their island. To this they unanimously
+replied, that they had made no such engagement, and never would, but
+held the Hollanders as their mortal enemies. This was earnestly declared
+to us, both by the men of Puloroon and by divers chiefs from Puloway,
+who had fled from that island on its forcible reduction by the
+Hollanders. And they all declared that the island of Puloway had been
+lawfully surrendered to Richard Hunt, for the king of England, before
+the Hollanders came into the road, the English colours having been
+hoisted in the castle, which the Hollanders shot down, using many
+disgraceful words of his majesty. They farther declared, that they
+defended their island for his majesty's use, as long as they possibly
+could; and, being constrained by force, they had fled to Puloroon,
+Lantor, and Serran.
+
+After this conference had continued the whole day, the writings of
+surrender were drawn up, and confirmed by all the chief men of Puloroon
+and Puloway, and so delivered by their own hands to us, Nathaniel
+Cowthorp, Thomas Spurway, and Sophonie Cozocke, for his majesty's use.
+They also that same instant delivered to us a nutmeg-tree, with its
+fruit growing thereon, having the earth about its root, together with
+oilier fruits, and a live goat, in symbolical surrender of the
+sovereignty of the island, desiring us to hoist the English colours, and
+to fire a salute of ordnance. Accordingly, the colours were set up, and
+we fired thirty pieces of ordnance, as a mark of taking possession; and
+at night all the chiefs went ashore, parting from us on the most
+friendly terms.
+
+On Christmas-day we descried two large Dutch ships edging towards
+Puloroon. On seeing our ships in the road, they bore away to leeward for
+Nero, and next day another of their ships hove in sight, which went to
+the same place. The 28th, a Dutch pinnace stood right over for Puloroon,
+and came bravadoing within gun-shot of our fort, having the Dutch
+colours flying at her poop; but presently tacked about, lowered her
+colours, and hoisted a bloody ensign instead, as if in defiance, and
+then stood over for Nero. By this bravado, we daily looked for their
+coming against us, according to their old injurious custom. We landed
+four pieces of ordnance on the 30th, besides two others formerly landed
+on the 25th, and set to work to construct fortifications for our
+defence. By the assistance of the Bandanese, we erected two forts, which
+were named the Swan and Defence, after our two ships, each mounted with
+three guns; the fort called the Swan being within caliver shot of the
+ships, and entirely commanding the road on the eastern side, where is
+the principal anchorage for the westerly monsoon.
+
+The 3d of January, 1617, the three Dutch ships came from Nero into the
+road of Puloroon, being the Horne, of 800 tons, the Star, of 500 tons,
+and the Yaugar, of 160 tons. The Home anchored close by our ship the
+Swan, the Star close beside the Defence, and the Yaugar a-head of all,
+to cut off our intercourse with the shore. Our commission directed us,
+on receiving the surrender of Puloroon, and forming a settlement there,
+to give due notice thereof in writing to the Hollanders, warning them
+not to come there to molest us under the pretence of ignorance, as they
+had been formerly accustomed to do. We had accordingly a letter written
+to that effect, but knew not how to have it sent, not daring to dispatch
+it either by Englishmen or natives, for tear of being detained. On
+coming into the road, however, we sent George Muschamp aboard their
+admiral, the Star, to deliver the before-mentioned letter to Mynheer
+Dedall, the Dutch commander; and with a message desiring them to depart
+from the road of Puloroon before six glasses were run, as the islanders
+would not allow them to remain in the roads, or to come near their
+island, and would even have already fired upon them, if we had not
+prevailed upon them to forbear.
+
+Soon afterwards, the Dutch commander, Dedall, came on board the Swan,
+attended by their chaplain, to enquire the reason of our message; when
+we told him that we suspected they came to injure us, as they had
+formerly done at Paloway, Cambella, and other places; and, as they had
+formerly turned the glass to Mr Ball, when in their power, threatening
+to hang him if he did not immediately cause the English to quit the
+land, we had now in like manner appointed a time for them to quit the
+roads. We also shewed him the instrument by which Puloroon was
+surrendered to us, and our consequent right to keep possession for the
+king of England, which we were determined upon doing to the utmost of
+our power, wishing them to be well advised in their proceedings, as they
+might expect to be shortly called to answer for their abusive words and
+injurious conduct to the English. We also demanded the restoration of
+Puloway, which had likewise been lawfully surrendered to the king of
+England. After this, we enquired if they had received any previous
+surrender at Puloroon, but they could not say they had any; and, when we
+shewed the formal surrender made to our king, which their chaplain
+perused, he acknowledged that it was a true surrender.
+
+All this while the glass was running in the great cabin before their
+eyes, putting them in mind to be gone. We also told them plainly, that
+we believed their only purpose in coming here was to betray us, and to
+drive us from the island by treachery or force, of which scandalous
+conduct our nation had already had divers experience from theirs;
+wherefore we neither could nor would trust them any more, and we must
+insist upon their departure; as, when the glass was six times run out,
+they must expect to be shot at from the shore; and, if they fired in
+return against the islanders, or shewed any discourtesy or wrong to
+them, we should consider it as hostility to us, and would defend them,
+being now the subjects of our king. They desired to remain till next
+day, which we would not agree to, doubting that more of their ships
+might come to join them. They then desired to stay till midnight; which
+we agreed to, on condition that we saw them preparing to weigh their
+anchors, in which case we said that notice should be sent ashore to the
+Bandanese, not to fire upon them.
+
+I also demanded to know from Dedall, what was their purpose in thus
+coming into the road of Puloroon, unless to molest us. He pretended that
+it was their usual custom in passing that island. But I told them that
+was not true, as the islanders had declared there never was any
+christian ship in their roads till we came. So he remained silent. They
+came to anchor in the roads this day about three in the afternoon, and
+departed about eleven at night. We have been since certainly informed,
+that their purpose was to have taken possession of our ships by
+treachery, or to have driven us out of the roads, and only gave up their
+intentions on seeing that we were fortified on shore. Had they then
+assailed us, we had little doubt of being able to have defended
+ourselves against them, as we had both forts in readiness, the cannon
+charged, and the gunners prepared to give fire, on the first signal from
+our ships.
+
+A Dutch ship and pinnace came from Nero on the 10th January; the pinnace
+edging near the small island or high sand, called _Nylacka_. This island
+is uninhabited, but full of trees and bushes, being daily resorted to by
+the men of Puloroon for fishing; and as belonging to Puloroon, belonged
+now to the English. On coming near the island, the people in the pinnace
+were observed continually sounding, wherefore we made four shots towards
+her from Fort Defence; but, not intending to strike her, shot wide. At
+every shot, the pinnace answered with a base, or some such piece, firing
+into the small island among the trees and bushes, where were some
+Englishmen and Bandanese of Puloroon, who were in no small danger from
+the shot. Seeing they braved us in this manner, the gunner was desired
+to do his best, and his next shot fell close over the stern of the
+pinnace or frigate, which made her presently go away. Their purpose of
+coming thus to sound about the small island, seemed to be to look out
+for a landing-place; meaning to come there with their forces, and there
+to fortify themselves, on purpose to compel us to quit the large island.
+
+On the 13th, Mr Davey complained that he was in want of water, and
+proposed to go over for that purpose to Wayre upon Lantore; but on the
+people of Puloroon being informed of this, they would by no means
+consent to his going out of the roads, and indeed neither would we,
+fearing the Hollanders might do us some injury in his absence. The
+people of Puloroon, said they would rather bring him water from Lantore,
+in their proas. I went on board Mr Davey to acquaint him with this; but
+he and his people would not consent, saying the Bandanese would bring
+them rain water, or such other as was unwholesome, and that they would
+only be six days absent, or eight at most.
+
+At this time, the principal people of Wayre, a free town on the island
+of Lantore, and of the separate island of Rosinging, came over to us, to
+enter into a parley respecting the surrender of both to the sovereignty
+of his majesty; and the formal deed of surrender being agreed upon and
+drawn up, they desired that some Englishmen might go over to receive the
+same in a public manner from all their hands, and to witness the
+ceremonial. As Mr Davey still persisted to go over with his ship, it was
+resolved upon, that Messrs Sophonie Cozocke, George Muschamp, Robert
+Fuller, and Thomas Hodges, should go over in the Swan to Wayre and
+Rosinging, to see that business accomplished, while the Swan was
+procuring water; after which, it was appointed that Mr Cozocke was to
+return in the Swan, while the other three were to remain upon the island
+of Rosinging for possession, till farther orders. All business being
+there concluded to our satisfaction, several persons in Wayre and
+Rosinging desired to load nutmegs and mace in the Swan, and to have a
+passage for Puloroon, there to sell us their spices for rice and cloths.
+All this was agreed to, and twelve of these persons came on board, with
+a great quantity of nutmegs and mace.
+
+The Swan then set sail for Geulegola, which is only a little way from
+Wayre, and there watered, after which she again set sail. When about
+eight leagues from the land, a Holland ship or two gave them chace. The
+people of the Swan now asked Mr Davey what he proposed to do. He
+answered, "They see my colours and I see theirs: I know them to be
+Dutch, and they know us to be English: I know of no injury I have done
+them, and I will continue my course for Puloroon." In short time, the
+Star, for such was the Dutch ship, got up within shot of the Swan, and
+without hailing, or giving the smallest intimation of her intention,
+let fly both with great guns and small arms in the most violent manner.
+The Swan received two or three great shot through and through before she
+replied, and even had some of her men slain. After this, as Mr Davey
+writes, the fight continued an hour and a half, during which five men
+were killed in the Swan, viz. Mr Sophonie Cozocke, merchant, who was
+driven to pieces by a cannon-ball, Robert Morton, quartermaster and
+drummer, Christopher Droope, Edward Murtkin, and a Bantianese passenger
+from Wayre. Three others were maimed, having lost arms or legs, with
+very little hopes of recovery; and eight others were wounded, most of
+them mortally. During the engagement, a Dutchman stood upon the poop of
+the Star with a drawn sword, calling out in the Dutch language, English
+villains and rogues, we will kill you all.
+
+The people of the Swan were much discouraged, on seeing so many of their
+companions dead and wounded, insomuch that none of them would stand by
+the sails to trim the ship to the best advantage so that the Hollander
+lay upon her quarter pouring in great and small shot, and at last look
+her by boarding, both with soldiers and others. They immediately broke
+open and pillaged the cabins, plundered the men basely of their clothes
+and every thing else worth taking, and throwing overboard whatever did
+not please their fancies. Even the Spaniards never used more stern
+cruelty in their professed wars, than did now the Dutch to us, with whom
+they were in peace and amity. The Star had on board 160 men, mostly
+soldiers taken from the castles of Nero and Puloway, while the Swan had
+not above thirty able to stand to quarters, the rest being sick or lame,
+and all much worn out in toilsome labour at Puloroon, in landing the
+ordnance and constructing the two forts. Ten also of their complement
+had been left in Puloroon to defend the two forts, two of whom, Herman
+Hammond and John Day, were gunners. The Swan being thus taken and sore
+battered in the action, was carried away under the guns of the castle at
+Nero. The Dutch gloried much in their victory, boasting of their exploit
+to the Bandanese, saying, That the king of England was not to be
+compared with their great king of Holland: _That Saint George was now
+turned a child_, and they cared not for the king of England; for one
+Holland ship was able to take ten English ships. They landed all our men
+at Nero, and kept them all strict prisoners, many of them in irons.
+
+The Swan left us at Puloroon on the 16th of January, and we expected her
+back in eight or ten days at farthest, but never heard of her till the
+25th of February, when Robert Fuller came over to us from Rosinging and
+Wayre; to acquaint us that be had heard of an English ship being under
+the guns of Nero castle. We immediately sent away Robert Hayes, the
+purser of the Defence, accompanied by some of the chief men of Puloroon,
+with directions to land on that side of Lantore which was in friendship
+with us, and to go as near as possible to the Dutch ships with a flag of
+truce, to enquire into the matter. After staying almost two hours, there
+came at last a boat to fetch him off, but made him wade to the middle
+before they would take him in. Being taken on board one of the Dutch
+ships, the president and assistants of Nero met him, when he demanded to
+know why they had made prize of the Swan, what was become of her men,
+and wherefore they detained our ship and goods. They answered, that
+_time should bring all to light_. Still urging for an answer, they used
+many opprobrious words against the English, threatening to come over to
+Puloroon with their forces, and to drive us from there and other places.
+To this Hayes replied, that they had already done much more than they
+could answer for, and was obliged to come away without seeing any one
+belonging to the Swan. He could however see our poor ship all rent and
+torn, in view of the natives, as an ill-got and dishonourable trophy of
+Dutch treachery and ingratitude. In a short time after, they sent over a
+messenger to us with a letter, which we answered, as we did others
+afterwards, their messengers frequently coming over with flags of truce,
+all of which letters, together with the surrenders, I brought over with
+me to Bantam, and delivered to Captain Ball.
+
+The Dutch continually threatened us, by their letters and messengers,
+that, as they had now taken tee Swan, they would soon come and take
+possession of the Defence, and drive us from the island of Puloroon. We
+always answered, that we expected them, and would defend ourselves to
+the last. They made many bravados, daily shooting off forty, fifty, or
+sixty pieces of ordnance at Nero and Puloway, thinking to frighten us.
+Also the people of Lantore brought us word that they were fitting out
+their ships, and shipping planks and earth, which we imagined was for
+land service. They had then seven ships, four gallies and frigates, and
+a great number of men, with all which force they threatened to come
+against us. We were told likewise, that they had endeavoured to prevail
+on their black slaves, by promise of freedom and great rewards, to come
+over secretly to Puloroon and set fire to the Defence. The Hollanders
+also, threatened that we should carry no spices from Puloroon or any
+other of the Banda islands. Thereupon, considering our engagements with
+the people of Puloroon, Wayre, and Rosinging, to all of whom we had
+trusted our goods, and that we had ready at Puloroon a good quantity of
+nutmegs and mace, and the threats of the Hollanders, we resolved to
+maintain the honour of our king and country, and to defend the interest
+of our employers, the honourable Company, to the utmost of our power.
+For this purpose, we determined to land all the guns, provisions, and
+stores, from the Defence, and to fortify the small island of Nylacka
+adjoining to Puloroon; which the Hollanders proposed to have fortified
+formerly; which, if they had done, would have commanded the road, and
+done us much injury, as the people of Puloroon would have been prevented
+from fishing, and English ships could not have come into the roads.
+
+Having therefore landed all the ordnance of the Defence, except four
+pieces of cannon, and being busied in erecting a fortification with the
+assistance of the Bandanese, Mr Hinshley also, the master of the
+Defence, being ashore, and every one hard at work landing the things,
+except a few left on board to keep the ship, a conspiracy was entered
+into by some of the men on the 20th March, 1617; and that same night
+they cut the cables and so drove out to sea. Perceiving this from the
+small island, we immediately sent a boat after them, advising them to
+return with the ship: But the mutineers would neither listen to them,
+nor suffer the boat to come near the ship, pointing their pieces at
+them, and even fired one musket-shot to keep off the boat; which was
+therefore compelled to return to the small island. There went away in
+the Defence nine of our men, including John Christmas, the boatswain's
+mate, and we could distinctly see them next day going into Nero roads
+under sail, and come to anchor under the guns of the castle. As we
+afterwards learnt, some of the runaways went immediately on shore to
+inform the Dutch of their exploit, contending among themselves which of
+them had piloted the ship. They even brought a can of wine ashore with
+them, and drank to the Hollanders on landing.
+
+The Dutch took immediate possession of the Defence, and brought all our
+rascally deserters into their castle, where they examined them as to our
+proceedings at Puloroon and Nylacka, in regard to our fortifications
+and means of defence. By this scandalous affair, we were in great danger
+of being all put to death by the Bandanese of Puloroon, as they
+suspected the desertion of our ships to have been a concerted matter
+between us and the Hollanders, on purpose to betray them. By this
+likewise, as our weakness was made known to the Hollanders, they might
+be encouraged to attack us. Indeed they made many violent threatenings
+of so doing, and we daily looked for their appearance; which, if they
+had so done, must have cost many lives, as we were greatly enraged
+against them for the capture of the Swan, and the severe usage of her
+people.
+
+On the 23d of March, we sent a letter to the Hollanders at Nero, by
+Robert Fuller, who landed upon Lantore; but, owing to some difference
+between the people of that island and the Dutch, he could not be allowed
+to pass, so that he had to return. The 25th there came a messenger to us
+from Lawrence Ryall, the principal commander of the Hollanders, newly
+come to Nero from the Moluccas, desiring Mr Courthop and I would come in
+a proa to hold a conference with two of his principal merchants,
+half-way between Puloroon and Puloway; but we refused this request,
+being afraid of treachery. By this messenger we had a letter from Mr
+Davies, then a prisoner at Nero, intimating his disapprobation of our
+proceedings in keeping possession of Puloroon, alleging that our
+commission did not warrant us in so doing, and recommending a parley
+between us and the Dutch general, to prevent the loss of any more lives.
+It appeared that he was instigated to give us this advice by the
+Hollanders, who had made him believe that they had authority in writing
+from our king, to make prize of any English ships they found to the east
+of Celebes, as we afterwards learnt to our great surprise, since, if
+they actually had such authority we must have obeyed.
+
+We wrote to Lawrence Ryall, by his messenger, that, if he would send
+over Henrick de Watterfoord and Peter de Yonge, two of his principal
+merchants, to remain as pledges in Nylacka, Mr Courthop and another
+should be sent to confer with him. We got back for answer, that the
+merchants we demanded as pledges could not be sent, as the one was gone
+to sea, and the other could not be spared, being their chief
+book-keeper; but offering us two other principal merchants, whom we
+agreed to accept. Accordingly, on the 6th April, the Dutch galley
+brought over these two, whom we lodged in a tent near the landing-place
+under a guard of twelve Englishmen to protect them from the Bandanese,
+as we did not think it right to bring them into our fort, that they
+might not have an opportunity of viewing our fortifications.
+
+Mr Courthop went immediately over to Nero in their galley, and had a
+long conference with the Dutch, in which they used many threats, and
+complained of many injuries they pretended to have suffered from the
+English, but of which I shall only briefly treat, as the letter from Mr
+Courthop, which I brought over from Banda and delivered to Captain Ball,
+will certify your worships at large on this matter. They complained,
+that Sir Henry Middleton had used the Dutch colours, when in the Red
+Sea, pretending to be Holland ships, to their injury and discredit. To
+this Mr Courthop replied, that it was false, as he had sailed with Sir
+Henry, and never knew him to wear Dutch colours; which, moreover, Sir
+Henry was too much a gentleman to have done. They pretended to have our
+king's letter, authorizing them to capture any English ship seen to the
+eastwards of the Celebes. Mr Courthop urged them to produce this letter,
+on seeing which he declared his readiness to obey the authority of his
+sovereign, and to evacuate Puloroon; but they had none such to produce.
+They alleged many other things, equally false, and used many arguments
+to induce us to quit Puleroon. All this time, neither Mr Davies nor any
+other of the English in their hands were permitted to come near Mr
+Courthop.
+
+Finding he could not prevail, Lawrence Ryall, the Dutch general, grew
+much discontented, throwing his hat on the ground and pulling his beard
+for sheer anger. At length Mr Courthop told him, that he could conclude
+nothing of his own authority, being joined with a council, but should
+relate every thing that had passed at Puloroon, which should be taken
+into consideration and an answer sent. I had advised him to say this, to
+get the easier away. Mr Courthop also urged them to restore our ship the
+Defence, with her men and goods; but they would not, unless we agreed to
+surrender Puloroon: offering, if we would deliver up Nylacka and our
+fort, in which we had twelve pieces of ordnance, that they would then
+restore both the Swan and Defence, with all our men and goods. Ryall
+then desired Mr Courthop to sign a note which he had drawn,
+acknowledging the proffers he had made, but this Mr Courthop refused.
+
+They had so wrought upon Mr Davies, that they expected he might be able
+to prevail upon Mr Courthop to come into their terms, and now therefore
+brought him to Mr Courthop, with whom he had much discourse, and
+particularly urged the truth of the letter they pretended to have from
+the king of England, as before mentioned. When Mr Courthop told him what
+he had offered, in case that letter were produced, Mr Davies distinctly
+saw he had been imposed upon, and broke out into a rage against them,
+for having told so many falsehoods;[257] adding, that they had promised
+him and his men good treatment, but that his men complained of being in
+great want of food and clothing, and of general hard usage. They had sat
+in judgment upon him and his men, condemning them to remain as prisoners
+till they had orders from Holland as to their ultimate destination. He
+even said, that he was willing to continue in durance, provided we could
+keep them out of Puloroon. The conference being ended, Mr Courthop came
+back to Nylacka in the galley, and the pledges were restored.
+
+[Footnote 257: Purchas, in a side note at this place, quaintly converts
+the name of the Dutch general into Lawrence _Ly-all_.--E.]
+
+The eastern monsoon being now come, we fitted out a proa to send with
+dispatches to Bantam, giving an account of what had passed; and it was
+agreed that Mr Hinchley and I were to go, accompanied by four Englishmen
+and fourteen natives of Puloroon, of whom five were chiefs, or
+_orancays_, one of them being son to the sabander, who is the principal
+man of the island. We set sail from Puloroon on the 17th April, 1617,
+and when in sight of Bottone on our way for Macassar, we descried a
+large ship and a pinnace, which gave us chase under a press of sail, so
+that we had no means of escape, except by standing in for Bottone. After
+being chased half a day, we got near the town of Bottone by night,
+thinking the ships could not have got so far up the river; but seeing
+the ship and pinnace almost within musket-shot of us next morning, we
+presently landed most of what we had in the proa, taking refuge in the
+woods. Having so done, we went immediately to the king, to whom we gave
+a present of such things as we had, to the value of about thirty
+dollars, desiring his protection, which he promised in the kindest
+manner, and faithfully performed. He sent his servants along with us,
+to put all our things into a house, giving us also two houses for our
+lodging, desiring us to remain within, that we might not be discovered
+by our enemies.
+
+Almost immediately afterwards, the Hollanders went to the king, giving
+him a present three times the value of ours, and enquired who we were
+that had landed. To which the king answered that he knew not who we
+were. On being asked by the king how long they meant to stay, the Dutch
+said they proposed remaining six days; of which the king sent us notice,
+advising us to keep close for that time, that we might proceed in
+greater security after they were gone. But at the end of these six days
+the Dutch said they would stay six days longer, pretending they had to
+repair one of their masts. Seeing their intention, and because our proa
+lay in view of the Dutch, we bought another proa, into which the king
+made all our things be carried by his slaves, causing them to navigate
+that proa past the Hollanders, and to carry her to the back of the
+island, whither he sent us over land under the protection of fifty men.
+We went immediately aboard, but remained under the island till near
+night, when we stood our course for Macassar, and saw no more of the
+Hollanders.
+
+We arrived at Macassar on the 7th May, where we found the Attendance
+intending for Banda, but was unable to beat up, owing to the change of
+the monsoon. Having shipped in the Attendance 180 _suckles_ of mace,
+purchased at Macassar, we sent the proa to Banjarmassen and Succadanea
+in Borneo, with advice that a supply of goods could not be sent there as
+expected, owing to the non-arrival of the Solomon, which had been long
+expected at Bantam. The 3d June we arrived at Bantam. As Captain George
+Barkley was dead, to whom Mr Ball succeeded as chief of the factory, I
+have delivered all the papers to him, and doubt not that your worships
+may receive them by the first conveyance. Those are, two surrenders, the
+letters from the Hollanders with our answers, and every thing relative
+to our proceedings in Banda.
+
+When I left Puloroon, it was agreed that another proa was to be
+dispatched for Bantam in twenty days after our departure, lest we might
+have been pursued and taken by the Hollanders. Accordingly a proa[258]
+was sent, in which was laden 170 suckles of mace, containing 3366
+cattees, each cattee being six English pounds and nearly two ounces,
+costing at the rate of one dollar the cattee;[259] which, had it gone
+safe, might have sold in England for L5000. In this proa there were
+eight Englishmen and thirty Bandanese, under the charge of Walter
+Stacie, who had been mate under Mr Hinchley in the Defence. His
+knowledge and care, however, did not answer expectation, for he ran the
+proa on the rocky shoals near the island of Bottone, where she bilged
+and lost all the mace, the men getting ashore. Stacie is much blamed by
+the rest, some of whom told him they saw land on the lee-bow, but he was
+peevish and headstrong, calling them all fools, and would not listen to
+them.
+
+[Footnote 258: In a marginal note, this is called a junk.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 259: From the statement in the text, the suckle appears to
+have been about 122 English pounds, and the quantity of mace
+accordingly, shipped on this occasion, about 185 cwt. or 9 1/4
+tons.--E.]
+
+May it please your worships to understand, that the Hollanders replied,
+when told that their vile abuses to us would lie heavy on them when
+known in Europe, "That they can make as good friends in the court of
+England as your worships; that this which they have done will oblige
+your worships and them to join, so that a gold chain will recompence
+all, and they have dollars enough in Holland to pay for a ship or two,
+providing they can hinder us from trading at Banda."
+
+In regard to the trade of the Banda islands, Puloroon is reported to be
+the worst island. It is about eight English miles in circuit, and the
+small adjoining island of Nylacka is about a mile round. There is a
+tolerable quantity of nutmegs and mace grown on Puloroon, and
+considerably more might be got there if the island were well cultivated.
+Rosengin is a fine island, producing the largest nutmegs and best mace
+of all the Banda islands; and, if we hold possession of Puloroon,
+abundance of nutmegs and mace could be had from Rosengin, Lantore, and
+other places; as the natives would come over to us with their spices,
+provided we supply them with rice, cloth, salt, pepper, molasses, and
+other necessaries, and some Macassar gold, which passes as current in
+Banda as Spanish rials of eight, and at the same rate, though only worth
+at Bantam two shillings and fourpence or two and sixpence, for the piece
+called mass. Our cargo was small, having only 100 _quoines_ of rice, and
+our cloth was much decayed, having lain two or three years at Macassar.
+If we had had three times as much, we could have sold it all at
+Puloroon for mace and nutmegs, being entreated for cloth and rice by
+people from Lantore, Rosengin and other places, but had it not, so that
+some returned home again with part of their spices. They came over to
+Puloroon in the night with proas and corracorras. The mace and nuts were
+very good, but must be injured by lying so long, owing to the
+molestations of the Hollanders, while we had no lime for preserving the
+nuts. The trade will turn out very profitable, if we may quietly possess
+the island of Puloroon; but we must buy rice at a lower rate than in
+Macassar, and I understand it can be had in Japan for about half the
+price.
+
+In regard to our right to the Banda islands, especially Puloway, Captain
+Castleton might have made that secure, as I have often been told; and at
+all events, we have a much better right than the Hollanders, who by
+force of arms have dispossessed us. Except Puloroon be supplied this
+year, and the possession maintained, the English name will be utterly
+disgraced, with little chance of our ever being received there again. If
+we are able to hold it until your worships have determined what to do in
+the matter, we shall soon be able to procure there as much mace and
+nutmegs as the Hollanders; and it may also serve as an entrance into the
+Moluccas for cloves. The Hollanders pretend an exclusive right to the
+Bandas and Moluccas, in consequence of having the son of the king of
+Ternate in their hands as a prisoner. But the Bandanese deny that the
+king of Ternate has any right of dominion in their islands, every one of
+their islands being free, and governed by sabanders and orancays of
+their own appointment.
+
+It is indispensible, that supplies of rice and other victuals, and
+cloth, should be sent for the English and Bandanese, and to bring away
+the nutmegs and mace we have there in godowns or warehouses. The
+Hollanders give out that they will take all your ships that go to those
+parts, so as to famish both the English and Bandanese; wherefore it
+requires earnest and speedy attention, that we may quietly enjoy our
+trade to these islands, which have been surrendered to us, and desire
+our trade. These are Puloway, Puloroon, Rosengin, and Wayre, which last
+is a town in Lantore. Puloway is reported to be a paradise, and the
+Hollanders allege that it is as much worth to them as Scotland is to
+his majesty. Even should your worships not be able to get Puloway
+restored, yet, if you enjoy the other three, we shall be able to procure
+enough of nutmegs and mace for the supply of England, and also for the
+trade of Surat and other places in India. Now is the time or never,
+considering the vile abuses and murders committed upon us by the
+Hollanders. At this time, the Charles and the Hope are bound home from
+Bantam, and I pray God to send them safe to London. I have sent your
+worships a brief abstract of our cargo for Banda, and of the sales made
+there. If I seem tedious, I humbly crave pardon; and, with my humble
+duty, beseeching the Almighty to prosper and give good success to all
+your designs, I humbly take leave,
+
+being your worships most humble servant in all duty,
+
+_Thomas Spurway_.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+FIFTH VOYAGE THE JOINT STOCK BY THE ENGLISH EAST INDIA COMPANY, IN 1617,
+UNDER THE COMMAND OF CAPTAIN MARTIN PRING.[260]
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+The fleet appointed for this voyage consisted of five ships; the James
+Royal of 1000 tons, Rowland Coytmore master; the Ann Royal of 900 tons,
+Andrew Shilling master; the Gift of 800 tons, Nathaniel Salmon master;
+the Bull of 400 tons, Robert Adams master; and the Bee of 150 tons, John
+Hatch master; the whole under the supreme command of Martin Pring,
+general, who sailed in the James Royal.--_Purch._
+
+[Footnote 260: Purch. Pilgr. I. 63.]
+
+Sec.1. _Occurrences on the Voyage out, and at Surat, Bantam, and Jacatra_.
+
+On Tuesday the 4th February, 1617, our fleet dropt down from Gravesend.
+Thursday the 6th, Mr deputy Maurice Abbot, with several of the
+commissioners, came aboard and mustered all our men, paying their
+harbour wages. These gentlemen left us next day, when all our men were
+entered upon whole pay. After much foul weather, we departed from the
+Downs on the 5th March. The 22d of June we Lad sight of Saldanha point,
+and anchored that same afternoon in the bay, whence we departed on the
+13th July. The moon was totally eclipsed at night of the 6th August; it
+began at eight o'clock and continued till past eleven, being totally
+eclipsed for an hour and half. On the 25th August at night, between
+seven and eight o'clock, being in latitude 4 deg. 20' S. the water of the
+sea seemed almost as white as milk, and so continued till morning, when
+it began to alter. Next night we found the water similar, but not
+altogether so white. Before day on the 30th, the water was again white,
+and likewise the next night; but on all these occasions we could find no
+ground.
+
+On the night of the 8th September at twelve o'clock, our ship sprung a
+leak, which, when discovered, had raised the water in our hold six feet
+and a half. In four hours, with both pumps, the ship was freed, but we
+afterwards found that the water increased at the rate of a foot in the
+half hour. In the morning of the 9th, I summoned the chief commanders of
+the fleet on board, desiring them to send their carpenters to assist in
+searching for the leak, and some of each of their companies to aid our
+men in pumping. Some were set to rummage the hold in search of the leak,
+and others to stick our sprit-sail full of oakum, with which we made
+several trials under the ship's bilge, but could not find the leak. We
+at length found, by divers trials within board, that the leak was before
+the main-mast; and we, next morning, fitted the sprit-sail again,
+letting it down at the stern, and brought it forwards by degrees, and at
+length, by God's blessing, our leak was partly stopped, as the water
+only rose about six inches in a glass, which had before risen twelve
+inches. Bat within three glasses, the oakum being washed out, the leak
+increased as before. This night we got an additional pump from the Bull,
+to free the water from the fore part of our ship, where it stood
+eighteen inches deeper than in our well. The 11th, we again fitted our
+sprit-sail with oakum and let it down again, when it pleased God so to
+favour us, that in an hour after our ship was tighter than ever.
+
+On the morning of the 12th we espied a sail, which the Gift came up with
+in the afternoon, being a Portuguese ship belonging to Don Pedro de
+Almeyda, from Mozambique bound for Diu, laden principally with about
+fifty quintals of elephants teeth. In the morning of the 20th the Bee
+rejoined us from Swally roads, informing us that the rest of our fleet
+was safe in that anchorage. They had brought in with them a junk and two
+other ships, which they had chased on the 16th. The junk was a great
+ship of Surat, belonging to the mother of the Great Mogul, burden about
+1200 or 1400 tons, having in her above 1000 persons, and twenty-nine
+tons of silver, though some said a great deal more. The other two were
+English interlopers, called the Francis and the Lion: the former of 160
+tons, belonging to-----, and commanded by Captain Neuce; and the latter
+of 120 tons, fitted out by Philip Bernardy, an Italian merchant in
+London, commanded by Thomas Jones, who had formerly been boatswain of
+the Hector.
+
+This evening we anchored in the road of Swally, where we found the rest
+of our fleet, with the foresaid junk and the two English privateers. On
+oar arrival, we heard of two Dutch ships having been cast away at
+_Gowdever_;[261] the Rotterdam of 1000 tons, and a small pinnace. The
+9th October, I sent up twenty-one chests of coral to Surat, which were
+landed two days before from the Ann; and at night I sent up eight tons
+and four hundredweight of elephants teeth, taken out of our Portuguese
+prize. This afternoon twenty sail of frigates from Goa arrived at the
+bar of Surat, commanded by the Captain-major Don Pedro de Asadedo,
+[_Asovedo_?] From one of these, five of the country people came ashore
+among our men, two of whom were taken by our guard, and confessed they
+came from Goa a month before, having orders from the viceroy to range
+the coast, to discover the English, when they were to return; but if the
+English were not on the coast, they were to proceed for Cambay, to
+capture the caffila, or convoy of country vessels.
+
+[Footnote 261: This name is inexplicably corrupt.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 14th October, seventeen of the frigates departed
+for Cambay, passing fairly by us. This day likewise I sent fourteen tons
+of elephants teeth to Surat, under a guard of thirty-six men, who
+likewise conveyed our treasure to Ahmedabad; and, on the 17th, I sent
+other twelve tons four hundredweight of elephants teeth. This day the
+Portuguese frigates returned again, and passed in our sight to the
+southwards. Next day we sent off all the rest for our ivory; and on the
+22d we landed sixteen chests of coral, and two of sea-horse teeth, out
+of the Bull.
+
+The 14th November, a month's pay was distributed to all the ships
+companies, except the chief commanders and merchants, amounting to 3302
+Spanish dollars. After this, the Bee was sent off for Jasques; and we
+landed from the other ships cloth, tin, cases of wine and strong waters,
+and all the rest of the presents that were in the cabin.
+
+The 17th January, 1618, the Bee returned from Persia. This day seven
+Malabar junks were seen in the offing, two of which were brought in by
+the Francis, and two by the Bee. We departed from Swally roads on the
+12th March, and anchored that same evening near the bar of Surat. The
+17th, in the morning, the wind coming about northerly, the Ann departed
+for the Red Sea, and on the 18th I dispatched the Bull. At noon of this
+day, standing to the southward, we were in lat. 11 deg. 25' N. the wind, as
+for four or five days before, being, at night, a slight breath from the
+land, and, by day, in the afternoon, a fresh breeze from the sea. In the
+forenoon of this day, we saw eight sail to the southward of us, and
+three between us and the land, besides two sallies and ten frigates. In
+the afternoon of the 28th, the Francis and the Bee being near the shore
+abreast of Calicut, the Zamorin sent off a boat desiring to speak with
+me, but I was too far shot to the southwards before the message reached
+me.
+
+The 2d April we got in the morning into the bay of _Brinjan_, where we
+anchored in fourteen fathoms, within half a league of the town, a high
+peaked hill, like a sugar-loaf; bearing N.E. by E. by the compass, which
+is the best mark to know this place by, when the weather is clear. This
+is a good place for refreshments, having hens, cocoa-nuts, and goats in
+abundance, and plenty offish, together with excellent water springing
+from the rock; but we had to pay seventy dollars, a cloth vest, a
+fowling-piece, a mirror, and a sword, for leave to provide ourselves
+with water, and all too little to satisfy the governor, who, after
+receiving our money and giving us leave, came down with seven or eight
+hundred men, demanding more money, and if we had not kept a strong guard
+at the spring, would have put us from it after our money was paid. The
+5th, the wind being fair off shore, we weighed anchor and departed, and
+in the evening were abreast of a headland eight leagues S.E. by E. from
+Brinjan, from which to Cape Comorin it is seven leagues E. two-thirds S.
+At six in the evening of the 7th, we had Cape Comorin N.N.E. one-third
+N. five leagues off, and had soundings in thirty fathoms. And on the
+19th June we were in Bantam roads, when Captain Ball and Mr Pickham came
+on board.
+
+On the 24th I visited the pangran, to accommodate matters for Captain
+Ball, who had arrested a Chinese junk for certain debts they owed our
+factory, making offer to restore the junk, if the pangran would give us
+justice, which he gave me his word to do. I went to him again on 6th
+July, accompanied by Mr Ball, Mr Rich, Mr Pickham, and several other
+merchants, when he was so inveterate against Mr Ball, that he refused to
+see him. On which I sent him word, that Mr Ball had brought the bills of
+our debt due by the Chinese, and was the only person among us who could
+explain the transactions between our factory and the Chinese, of which I
+was entirely ignorant. The messenger returned, saying that Mr Ball could
+not be received, on which we all left the court.
+
+The 1st September, having the wind off the land, we weighed in the
+morning, and stood for point Ayre, keeping in seven fathoms till within
+three miles of the point, where one cast we had a quarter less seven,
+and the next cast only three fathoms. Some supposed we here touched, but
+it was not perceived by me. Off this point there is a shoal almost even
+with the surface of the water, but having seven fathoms within two
+cables length of its edge. This afternoon, while standing towards three
+Dutch ships that rode right in the fair-way, and when within a mile of
+them, our ship grounded; but, God be praised, we got her off again
+without any hurt, and so into the bay, where we again fell in with a
+shoal, of which we came within two cables length, which lies one and a
+half league from the Flemish islands. We got safely into the road of
+Jacatra, [now Batavia road] in the afternoon of the 2d September, having
+been providentially delivered from three several dangers the day before,
+of which may we be ever thankful.
+
+The 19th, the Angel, a Dutch ship of 500 tons, came in from Amboina,
+laden with nutmegs and cloves, and departed again on the 25th. Early in
+the morning of the 26th, I went to visit the king, and found him in a
+good humour, and conferring with him upon some former business, we came
+to a conclusion before I left him, to the following purpose: That he was
+to give us a convenient piece of ground for building upon, for which we
+were to pay 1500 dollars, and were to be free from all customs on
+exports and imports on payment of 800 dollars yearly.
+
+Sec.2. _Dutch Injustice, and Sea-fight between them and Sir Thomas Dale_.
+
+The 27th of September, Mr Bishop arrived from Jappara in the roads in a
+proa, in which was a _Cogee_, bringing a letter from the Matron to
+Captain Ball, wherefore I sent him away to Bantam that night. He left
+two English behind him at Jappara, one of whom had fled from the Dutch.
+He likewise brought letters from several of our people who were
+prisoners in the Moluccas, and one of these was directed to me, from Mr
+Richard Tatten, in which he complained much of the gross usage of the
+Dutch, who would hardly allow them a sufficiency of rice to subsist
+upon, and who constantly clapped them in irons, on every idle rumour of
+the coming of our ships.
+
+On the evening of the 30th October, Cornelius Marthen, who commanded the
+French ship taken by the Dutch, came into the roads, and came aboard my
+ship that same night. After some discourse, he told me we had six ships
+coming from England for these seas, commanded by Sir Thomas Dale, for
+some special business at the Moluccas, whither he was bound with the
+Stathouder, the Neptune, and this French prize, to wait the coming of
+good friends. The 27th, in the evening, we had four feet and a half
+water in our hold, which we freed in two hours with both our pumps, and
+kept under afterwards with one pump, till next morning about ten
+o'clock, when we let down a sail wadded with oakum, which fortunately
+stopped our leak. The 31st, I found an excellent place for putting our
+ship on the careen, on a small island within Taniam point, in the bay of
+Bantam, on which we made all preparations to remove to that place.
+
+The Rose arrived from Tecoo on the 15th of November, bringing news that
+the Hollanders had established a Factory there soon after ours was
+dissolved. The 19th, the Moon, Clove, Samson, and Peppercorn arrived
+from England, and anchored between Vium point and Pulo Paniang.
+Perceiving the Clove to be admiral, I went first on board her, taking
+such fresh victuals as we could spare. I here found Sir Thomas Dale
+admiral, and Mr Jordain president, and learnt that they had lost company
+of the Globe to the westward of the Cape, and, what was far worse, they
+had left the Sun, the flag ship, in great danger of being cast away on
+the isle of Engano, the whole fleet having much difficulty to double
+that island. They had afterwards waited two days for the Sun, but she
+had been bilged on the rocks, as we afterwards learnt, to our great
+regret. In the morning of the 22d, these ships sailed into Bantam roads,
+and on passing the island where our ship lay, we saluted them with
+fifteen guns we had planted on the shore, and struck my flag in
+compliment to Sir Thomas Dale, who was admiral of that fleet.
+
+Two boats arrived on the 28th from Engano, with sixty-eight men
+belonging to the Sun, bringing the lamentable news of the loss of that
+ship, with many of her company, on, that island. The 29th, the Globe
+arrived in the morning, and this day our leak broke out afresh, but was
+quickly stopped by removing the bonnet.[262] The 30th, our ship being
+entirely cleared from stem to stem, the carpenters went below to search
+for the leak; and as they passed forwards, removing the lining as they
+went, they found an auger hole left open in the middle of the keel, in
+the foremost room save one, which hole was four inches and three
+quarters about, and, had it sprung upon us while at sea and alone, would
+have tired out our whole company in twenty-four hours. In this the great
+mercy of God was manifest, that it never broke out upon us but when we
+had a fleet along with us for our aid.
+
+[Footnote 262: Perhaps this means by shifting the wadded sail.--E.]
+
+A fast being proclaimed to be held on board the fleet, and the exercise
+to be in the James on Sunday the 3d December, Mr Wren, the chaplain of
+the Sun, preached in the morning, and our own minister, Mr Copland, in
+the afternoon. This day the Bee sailed for Engano, in hopes to recover
+some money and goods belonging to the Swan, from the inhabitants of that
+island. The 4th, a Dutch ship, called the Black Lion, arrived from
+Patania, and rode to the westward of Pulo Paniang. As Mr Denton was well
+acquainted among the Dutch, he was sent aboard in the barge to enquire
+whence she came. On coming aboard, he met an old acquaintance, Hendrick
+Janson, who had been a long time chief factor for the Dutch in Patania.
+He, and another inferior factor, came aboard the Moon along with Mr
+Denton, where they were well entertained till Sir Thomas Dale came on
+board, and were soon after set ashore at Bantam. That same night we held
+a council, when it was determined to proceed before day with four ships,
+the Moon, Clove, Globe, and Samson, against the Black Lion, the better
+to prevent her escape. At break of day on the 6th, we were close around
+her, and after a short parley, they yielded their ship, on condition of
+being allowed to land with all their private property; and we brought
+her that same day near the island, among the rest of our fleet.
+
+The Bee returned on the 14th, having been forced back by contrary wind,
+and unable to get through the straits. On the 16th, twenty Portuguese
+came on board the James Royal, who had fled from the Dutch at Jacatra,
+and whom we received kindly. This evening we were ready to sail, having
+eleven ships, great and small, and being in hopes to drive the Dutch
+from Jacatra. Our fleet consisted of the following ships:--The Moon, in
+which Sir Thomas Dale sailed as admiral; the Gift, in which I sailed as
+vice-admiral; the Unicorn, Clove, Globe, Samson, Pepper-corn, Thomas,
+Bee, Rose, and Black Lion. We left behind us the James Royal, the
+Advice, and our prize, because the James was not ready, and the other
+two had most of her provisions and stores on board.
+
+We sailed in the morning of the 19th, and anchored that evening between
+Pulo Paniang and Pulo Tunda. In the evening of the 20th, we anchored
+with our whole fleet about a league to the northward of Hector island.
+This night we sent a barge to the Flemish islands, where they found no
+persons on the southern island: but there lay there a Dutch galley,
+which they set on fire, and so returned on board. That same evening we
+saw seven Dutch vessels in the bay of Jacatra. Early in the morning of
+the 21st, they all stood out towards us till near the islands, when they
+anchored all together, and we stood towards them in the afternoon,
+coming to anchor about a mile to windward of their fleet. In the
+evening, we held a consultation on board the Moon, when it was resolved
+to assault the Butch fleet in the following manner:--The Globe and
+Samson were appointed to assail the Sun, and the Thomas was to pass in
+between them, filled with combustible matter as a fire-ship, to set the
+Sun on fire. The Moon and Clove were to attempt the Golden Lion; the
+Gift and Bee were to assail the Angel; the Unicorn and Rose were to
+attack the Devil of Delft; and the Pepper-corn was ordered to surprise
+the burger-boat come from Jambee, which rode about three leagues from
+the rest, and whose boat, with thirteen men, had been intercepted by our
+barge, while making for the Dutch fleet, about seven this evening. This
+arrangement being written down, we departed, every man to his own
+particular charge.
+
+After we were gone, the admiral, Sir Thomas Dale, sent his boat to the
+Thomas for three _sackers_, which kept them at work till next morning at
+eight o'clock, so that the Hollanders were all away before these guns
+were got on board the Moon. We were then all in a Burly-burly to weigh
+and get out to sea, that we might have sea-room, and the advantage of
+the turn of the tide, which we at length attained, getting without the
+isles of Point Aire. In the mean time, the Dutch fleet passing between
+these isles and the main of Java, anchored that night on the coast of
+Java, and our fleet in the offing, without the islands. On the 23d, in
+the morning, the Dutch fleet stood off to the westwards, close under
+_Anti-Lackie_, in which course the Devil of Delft borrowed so near, that
+she got aground, and remained fast for a quarter of an hour. On seeing
+this, we made towards them, but she was got off before we could get any
+thing near, when she and all the rest of their fleet stood to the
+northwards. As our fleet had the weather-gage, we _paid room upon
+them_[263] till we came within shot, and then the Moon, commanded by our
+admiral, Sir Thomas Dale, began the fight with the headmost ship of the
+enemy, called the San. The battle continued for the space of three
+hours, during which time we spent upon them some 1200 cannon-shot, when
+we left them for the night, they standing so for to the northwards, that
+they got the _burger-boat_ again into their company, and then anchored
+about half a league from us to the westwards, where they remained all
+night.
+
+[Footnote 263: This antiquated expression evidently means bearing down
+upon them to leewards.--E.]
+
+Both fleets weighed anchor on the 24th, ours plying to the westwards to
+gain the wind, and the Hollanders ran in shore towards Point Aire. In
+the mean time, we descried three sail coming before the wind from the
+westwards, which at length we perceived to be the Little James, the
+Hound, and the Francis. By and bye we joined altogether, and chased the
+Dutch fleet through the bay of Jacatra, to its eastern point, where we
+all came to anchor for the night. During the night, the Dutch from
+Jacatra sent a junk filled with combustible matter, and on fire, which
+came so near our fleet that we were fain to weigh our anchors and get
+out of her way. The 25th, being Christmas-day, we again saw the Dutch
+fleet standing to the eastwards, and we sent our barge to follow them
+all night, to see what course they took, because we had left the James
+Royal in the bay of Bantam, with the Advice and our prize, which they
+might have surprised, if they got to Bantam before us, as there was no
+ship of force but the James, and she was unprepared, being busied in
+taking in her goods and stores, after being emptied to find her leak.
+
+The 27th of December, after midnight, the Black Lion, our Dutch prize,
+was set on fire by the carelessness of three wicked fellows, and burnt
+to the water's edge. The president went ashore on the morning of the
+30th, to wait upon the king of Jacatra, accompanied by Mr Henry Jackson,
+when an unfortunate shot carried away his leg, of which wound he
+died.[264]
+
+[Footnote 264: It appears in the sequel that it was Jackson who lost his
+leg and life though the text leaves it dubious whether he or the
+president.--E.]
+
+The 1st of January, 1619, the James Royal, the Advice, and the prize,
+joined us from Bantam. The 2d, Sir Thomas Dale went ashore to Jacatra to
+visit the king, and to learn what were his intentions respecting the
+Dutch fort. The king gave to both him and the president much
+satisfaction, in words at least, promising to grant the English any
+reasonable conditions, if they would assist him to surprise the Dutch
+castle. This morning, before day, the Francis departed for Puloroon,
+with provisions for the relief of Mr Nathaniel Courthop and his
+companions. The 6th we held a council of war aboard the Moon, when it
+was determined that we should land from our greater ships six pieces of
+large cannon, three culverines, and three demi-culverines, with a
+proportional store of powder and shot, to assist the king of Jacatra
+against the Dutch; that Sir Thomas Dale was to remain in that road with
+eight sail, to cover this business, while five ships, under my command,
+were to ply up for the straits of Sunda, to lie in wait for the Dutch
+ships.
+
+The 25th, we got into the road of Becee, and anchored in fifteen
+fathoms, about two miles from the shore; the S. point of Becee bearing
+S.W. 1/4 W. and the N. point _Sabaicas_, which shut in the western isle
+of Pirio Tigs, bearing N. by W. three leagues off. We watered our ships
+on the 27th and 28th, and cut wood. I and Mr Coytmore, with several
+other masters, went twice ashore to view the harbour, which we found to
+be an excellent place of refuge for a small fleet against a superior
+enemy. The 31st, by order of the president, we repaired with our fleet
+into Bantam roads.
+
+The 1st February, Captain John Jourdan the president came on board, who
+acquainted me with all that had taken place between them and the Dutch,
+in regard to the castle of Jacatra, during my absence, the Dutch having
+agreed to deliver up that fort to the English, on condition of being
+allowed to depart with bag and baggage, and a ship, _for two thousand
+rials of eight_, to carry them to the coast of Coromandel.[265] Sir
+Thomas Dale arrived in Bantam roads on the 4th, with the Moon, Clove,
+James, Pepper-corn, Hound, and Advice. As the pangran of Bantam had
+practised underhandedly with the Dutch to have the castle of Jacatra
+delivered into his hands, by which we had been unjustly deprived of that
+acquisition, we agreed, in a general consultation, that the president,
+and all the rest of the principal persons of our factory at Bantam,
+should repair on board, and get all our goods and provisions put aboard
+the ships. Accordingly, we were occupied from the 10th to 16th, both
+inclusive, in getting all the money and goods belonging to the
+honourable Company on board. During this time, the pangran sent several
+obscure persons to the president, as of their own accord, to enquire the
+reason of his departure, pretending that the pangran had given no just
+cause for leaving the country. Upon this the president drew up a
+memorial, enumerating the several grievances and wrongs which the
+English had suffered from him, meaning to have it translated into the
+Javan language, and then to be transmitted to the pangran.
+
+[Footnote 265: This agreement was crossed by the Pangran of Bantam, who
+gave us leave to beat the bush, and thought to have caught the birds
+himself, but was deceived in the end.--_Purch._]
+
+The 17th, advice was received from Mr Ufflet, at Jacatra, that the Dutch
+were daily occupied in repairing and strengthening their fortifications;
+and that, when the messengers of the pangran demanded the surrender of
+their fort, with part of their money, goods, and ordnance, they gave for
+answer, That all these things were the property of their masters, which
+therefore they could not give away. We this day received news of two
+Dutch ships in the road of Jacatra, and that same night Sir Thomas Dale
+set sail with eight ships in quest of them, while I remained with four
+to attend upon the president. The 26th, having certain intelligence that
+four Holland ships were at anchor in the mouth of the Straits of Sunda,
+I went out that same evening to look for them, with the James, Gift,
+Unicorn, and the Little James. Next morning we anchored near Pulo
+Paniang, to take in water, and to put our ships into order, by taking
+aboard some planks that were alongside.
+
+We weighed again in the morning of the 1st March, making sail towards
+the mouth of the Straits, where we observed the two Dutch ships at
+anchor near the island of Tamporan, about three leagues to the westwards
+of Viun, or Palambangan point. We immediately made all sail towards
+them, while they, as in a careless manner, plied to and fro, having
+their topsails half mast down. At length, as we drew nigh, the Dutch
+admiral and all the rest of his ships bore up with my ship, which was
+most to windward, and gave us two shots, one of which went through the
+ship's side under the half-deck, and the other through the steerage.
+They had no sooner begun than they were as quickly answered from my
+ship, and in such measure, that, in the space of two hours, they became
+as quiet as lambs; their admiral, who gave the onset with so much
+arrogance, being the first to run away, followed by all the rest. We
+chased them till night, and then finding them too swift of foot, we gave
+over the chase, standing over towards Pulo Tunda. We came to anchor
+again on the 2d of March in the road of Bantam, on which day we had
+intelligence that one of the two ships lately come to Jacatra had got
+aground near the castle, and had been set on fire by themselves on
+seeing Sir Thomas Dale. The other ship, which had taken in a valuable
+loading from the castle, was also cast away on some rocks, ten leagues
+east of Jacatra.
+
+On the 4th, we had a letter from John Powell, residing at Jacatra,
+stating that Sir Thomas Dale had sailed on the 1st, with the Moon,
+Hound, Rose, and Bee, in search of the stranded Dutch ship. The 14th we
+heard from Sir Thomas that he had got almost within shot of the four
+Dutch ships we met with, but had been taken by a dead calm for twelve
+hours, succeeded in the night by a tempest, which scattered them so far
+asunder by next morning, that they lost all hopes of the chase, and had
+therefore returned to Point Ayre, whence he proposed bringing the Moon
+immediately to Bantam, leaving the rest of his ships to take in
+provisions at Jacatra. In a consultation as to the best course to be
+taken with the fleet, it was resolved to go to the coast of Coromandel,
+which we were informed was a good country for recovering the health of
+our men, and abounding in rice, wheat, butter, and other, provisions,
+which could not be procured here for any money.
+
+
+Sec.3. _Departure for Coromandel, with Occurrences there, and the Death of
+Sir Thomas Dale,--Capture of English Ships by the Dutch; and Occurrences
+at Tecoo_.
+
+On Monday the 19th of April, 1619, all our ships being together in
+Bantam roads, with three Chinese junks riding among us, it was resolved
+in council to execute the commission given us by the Honourable Company,
+by appropriating to them the goods in these junks, in payment of former
+debts due by the Chinese. Next day _Kewee_ came aboard to the president,
+accompanied by the three _nockhadas_, or captains of the junks, to know
+his intentions. He gave him the following answer:--If the young king of
+Bantam would displace the pangran, who had treated us with so much
+injustice, he would then return on shore and _bichar_[266] with him, and
+restore the junks. The 28th, being ready to sail, intending to go for
+Morrogh to take in water and unload the junks, we descried a sail coming
+from the westwards round Palinbangan point, which turned out to be a
+Portuguese frigate, captured at Jasques, manned by twenty Englishmen,
+and sent by Captain Bonnar with advice to the president at Bantam. We
+learnt from these men that Sir Thomas Roe, the lord ambassador to the
+Mogul, was gone for England in the Ann Royal, having left the country
+with great honour and reputation to himself, and much advantage of the
+Honourable Company. Bodman, who was the cause of setting the Black Lion
+on fire, was hanged on the 22d of May, and that same night we set sail.
+
+[Footnote 266: This unexplained term probably means to make peace.--E.]
+
+The 30th May, Sir Thomas Roe stood in with his fleet under the island,
+while we held on our course for Masulipatam, having the Unicorn, Gift,
+and Bee in our company. The 30th June we anchored in nine fathoms, about
+two leagues from the coast of Coromandel, where we rode four days,
+being hardly able to visit each other in all that time, owing to W.S.W.
+winds, and a continual current setting to E.N.E. The surf also broke so
+lofty on the beach, that we durst not attempt landing with any of our
+boats. We were at length able to communicate together, when Mr Roberts,
+the master of the Unicorn, gave us notice of a bay on this coast in the
+latitude of 17 deg. N. about five leagues to the eastwards of Nassapore,
+[Narsipore] where there was good riding during the westerly monsoon.
+This was exactly what I wanted, having no hope to recover Masulipatam
+against wind and current. We accordingly set sail on the 4th, in the
+morning, and stood to the eastwards, the coast trending W.S.W. and
+E.N.E. And having run about nine leagues by estimation, with the wind
+and current, we found the land to turn away N. and N. by W.[267] giving
+me hopes of a good road. At this point of land there cometh put a great
+river,[268] by the stream of which there has been raised a reef or
+shoal, extending half a mile into the sea from the point, and
+occasioning a smoother road. Bringing that sand to bear S.S.W. there is
+good and safe anchorage in six and a half fathoms, two miles from the
+land. Two leagues north from this point, which, for distinction, I name
+Cape Comfort, there issues forth another branch of the same river, by
+which the headland is made an island, and off the mouth of this river
+there is likewise a long spit of sand, which is dry at low water.
+
+[Footnote 267: Obviously rounding Cape Godawery, in lat. 16 deg. 83' N.]
+
+[Footnote 268: One of the two main branches forming the Delta of the
+Godawery.--E.]
+
+The 4th of July I sent the boat belonging to the Unicorn into the second
+branch of the river, which we called Mullet Sound, to see if they could
+discover any town where a guide might be procured, to conduct Robert
+Pickering and William Clarke to Masulipatam, by whom we proposed sending
+a letter to Mr Methwould. Our boat returned on the morning of the 6th,
+reporting that a guide had been procured at a little village three
+leagues up the river. They likewise brought aboard twenty hens, which
+they had bought for two shillings. The 8th, the barge returned from
+Captain Ball with seventy-one sheep and goats, and thirty-nine hens,
+having left Captain Ball and others at a town called _Narsapela_, six
+leagues up in the country. The 12th, Mr Methwould came from Masulipatam
+in one of the country boats, and brought with him twenty hogs, two large
+jars of arrack, six goats, and two baskets of bread. He also brought us
+news of a Dutch ship richly laden, then in the port of Masulipatam, and
+ready to depart for Holland.
+
+In the evening of the 26th, I went in the barge to seek out some bar or
+creek by which we might reach Coringa, the principal town in these parts
+near the sea side. That same night, I got over the bar of Coringa, which
+place I came to about two miles up the river, and was well received by
+the principal persons of the place, who were very ready to trade with
+us, and sent notice that same night of my arrival to the governor of
+Vingeron. Next morning, having rowed about three miles up the main
+river, and two miles up a little creek, we had sight of Vingeron, about
+twelve miles off.[269] I now landed, and walked towards Vingeron; but,
+before I reached it, the governor sent his horse for me, with all the
+music the place afforded; and among these instruments there were two
+great brass horns instead of trumpets. The governor received me very
+kindly, but more kindly my present, which consisted of two pieces of
+China velvet, and six pieces of China taffeta. Our compliments ended. I
+took leave of him, when he caused me to be conveyed in his own palanquin
+to a house near at hand, which he had appointed for my lodging.
+
+[Footnote 269: The town of Rajahmundry exactly answers to these
+circumstances, in reference to Coringa, and is in fact the head town of
+the province in which Coringa is situated.--E.]
+
+I returned on board the James on the 1st of August, when I learnt, to my
+sorrow, that the shallop belonging to the Unicorn had been cast away
+three days before, near Ponara, on which occasion Mr Harris was drowned,
+together with two of the coxwain's crew, and a black; Captain Spaulding,
+Mr Yard, and others, escaping with much difficulty. In the morning of
+the 2d, the governor of Vingeron came aboard to see our ship, expecting
+some great present; on which occasion I gave him a piece of China
+damask, and four pieces of taffeta, which gave him more delight than the
+sight of a thousand ships, and he departed when he found he got nothing
+more by begging. The 23d I caused all the men to come on board,
+intending to proceed for Masulipatam, and this evening we got on board
+150 goats, to serve us for fresh provisions at sea. The 24th there
+arrived a ballegat from Narsepore, bringing twenty-six candees of
+garavances, a candee of butter, and an hundred gallons of arrack.[270] I
+also, had letters from Masulipatam, announcing the melancholy news that
+Sir Thomas Dale had died at that place on the 9th of August.
+
+[Footnote 270: Though not so expressed, these seem to have been intended
+for the use of the English ships.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 6th September, having rode most part of the
+preceding night in nineteen fathoms, about three leagues S.S.E. from the
+bar of Narispore, and having the wind at N.W. we again set sail toward
+Masulipatam,[271] and anchored at night four leagues to the eastward of
+that place. Off the river of Narsipore we found the current to set by
+day to the S.S.E. and N.N.E. in the night, at the rate of half a league
+an hour. In the morning of the 7th we could see the English ships in the
+road of Masulipatam, in which road we came to anchor in the evening,
+finding here the Moon, Clove, Globe, and Advice, which last being found
+unserviceable, was here cast off, and her stores and provisions put on
+board the Moon and Clove. Next day, Mr Spaulding, Mr Ball, and Mr
+Methwould came aboard the James, giving me a report of all matters that
+had passed in my absence, as also a state of the Company's business. I
+accompanied them ashore in the afternoon, that we might the better
+consult together how to proceed in the important concerns committed to
+our charge. The first thing proposed was the union of both fleets, which
+was thought adviseable, and I was made choice of as admiral and chief
+commander of the whole ships and men thus united, according to the
+direction of the Honourable Company.
+
+[Footnote 271: The true name of this place is Mutchelipatnam; in Purchas
+it is called Messulapitan and Masulpatam.--E.]
+
+The 18th of October, a ship belonging to Masulipatam arrived from Mokha,
+by which we had news of the Lion being at Mokha, having a small frigate
+or bark in her company. The same day the Bee arrived from
+Narsipore-pete, with provisions for the fleet. The 19th, the Dragon's
+Claw came from Narsipore-pete[272] almost laden with rice and
+paddy.[273] On Thursday the 9th December, Mr Ball, Mr Methwould, and the
+other merchants who were to remain in the country, went ashore in the
+afternoon. In the morning of Friday the 10th, we left the road of
+Masulipatam, and anchored in the afternoon off the headland, to wait for
+the Pepper-corn, which came to us in the evening. By my estimation, the
+difference of longitude between the island of Engano and Masulipatam is
+19 deg. 30' of a great circle; and, although this does not give the true
+longitude in these parts near the equator, as custom has so called it, I
+do, that I may not savour of innovation.
+
+[Footnote 272: This may designate the road of Narsipore; but petah
+usually signifies in India the suburb or town connected with a
+fortress.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 273: Paddy is rice in its natural state as it comes from the
+plant on which it grows; rice is paddy deprived by art of its coarse
+husk.--E.]
+
+Next morning, very early, we descried the land of Sumatra, the hill of
+Passaman bearing E.N.E 1/2 N. twelve leagues distant,[274] and the high
+land of Priaman E. 1/2 S. fourteen leagues off. We here met with two
+shoals, within a mile of each other, E. and W. The Gift came over the
+eastermost, and had not less than four and a half fathoms. I sent the
+Claw over the other, on which were four fathoms where she first crossed,
+but only two fathoms in returning, a little more to the northward. About
+nine this morning the wind came to the S.E. and so continued till three
+in the afternoon, by which time we had got to the southward of all the
+shoals; and so, with little wind, we spent the night between these
+shoals and the island of Battoo, [Batoa.] In this situation, a sagging
+current bore us to the northwards near the shoals, which, if it had set
+S.E. as formerly experienced, it ought to have carried us near to Tecoo.
+
+[Footnote 274: Purchas must here have omitted a part of the text,
+particularly the series of dates between Masulipatam and Passaman in
+Sumatra. As the text now stands, it would seem as if they had gone from
+Masulipatam to the coast of Sumatra, a run of about 1600 miles, in one
+night, an utter impossibility. But from the context, instead of the 11th
+December, 1619, the day after leaving Masulipatam, it would appear they
+reached the coast of Sumatra on the 23d January, 1620, giving forty-four
+days for the run across the bay of Bengal.--E.]
+
+The 24th, in the evening, we had sight of the isles of Tecoo, and came
+to anchor about eight o'clock, in forty-four fathoms, these isles
+bearing E. by N. seven leagues off. The 25th, with the first of the
+tide, we again weighed and steered for Tecoo; and, as we drew near, we
+espied three sail standing to the northwards, which came to anchor near
+the coast that night, while we anchored with our whole fleet about a
+league without them. Next morning they weighed anchor and joined us,
+when we found them to be the Palsgrave, Elizabeth, and Hope. From them
+we had the doleful news of the Dragon, Bear, Expedition, and Rose,
+having been taken by six Dutch ships, while at anchor, within the isles
+of Tecoo; as also that the Star had been taken by the Dutch in the
+straits of Sunda. They also said that the Hollanders had sent four great
+ships, doubly manned, in quest of the Samson and Hound, and that they
+were exceedingly doubtful as to the safety of these ships. Thus the
+English ships now taken by the Hollanders were almost equal in number to
+our three fleets now joined in one under my command.
+
+On Monday the 31st January, 1620, we held a consultation aboard the
+James Royal as to our future proceedings, when it was unanimously agreed
+to go to Acheen, in hopes to meet our ships from Surat, that we might
+keep our force together, according to the instructions of the Honourable
+Company. Our chief reasons for this proceeding were the want of rice and
+other provisions, which could not at this time be had at Bantam;
+secondly, the strong naval force of the Hollanders, as we did not think
+it prudent to risk the entire property now belonging to the Company in
+India upon such desperate terms, as the Dutch had four ships for every
+one of ours; and, lastly, which was an imperious necessity, that we
+might careen three of our ships, the James, the Gift, and the Unicorn,
+which could not be much longer deferred without imminent hazard. For all
+these reasons, we resolved to proceed for Japan, where, as we were given
+to understand, all things necessary for careening our ships, and
+abundance of provisions for our relief, were to be had.
+
+The 11th, Mr Mills arrived in the Bee from Priaman, with 300 sacks of
+very good rice, and eleven hogsheads of oil, giving us great
+encouragement to send there again. The 12th, the Claw was sent off for
+Pedang and Cuttatinga, to procure rice and other provisions; and, on the
+15th, the Bee was sent back to Priaman for more rice and oil. The 19th
+the Claw returned with thirty-four bags of rice, 16,000 cocoa-nuts, and
+ten goats; and the same night the Bee came back with 980 sacks of rice,
+procured with much difficulty by Mr Mills, merchant of the Elizabeth.
+
+The 3d March we departed from the road of Tecoo, intending first to
+touch at _Mintaon_, on purpose to dispatch the Bee for England, and
+thence to go for Acheen, in hopes of meeting the Charles and the Ruby
+from Surat. The 30th March we all anchored in the bay of Samanca, about
+a mile from shore, where we took in wood, water, and other necessaries.
+Next day we sent to recall the Bee from Balembeen. The 1st April we sent
+the shallop belonging to the Unicorn for Anniar, to enquire concerning
+the Dutch force, and how the pangran stood affected towards us.[275] At
+eleven this night, twenty-two of our men ran away with our barge. Next
+morning the shallop returned from Anniar, and brought news that there
+were fifteen sail of Dutch ships at Bantam and Jacatra, upon which we
+resolved to proceed to Bantam, to treat with the pangram, hoping that
+the Dutch _might not venture to attack us_. The Bee arrived in the
+afternoon from Ballambeen, [Palimbangan.] The 6th we set sail for
+Bantam, and on the 7th, between Crackastaw and Becee, we met a proa with
+some of our people coming from Anniar.
+
+[Footnote 275: The intended voyage to Acheen seems to hate been laid
+aside; perhaps the monsoon had become adverse, and forced them to the
+S.E. towards Bantam.--E.]
+
+
+Sec.4. _News of Peace between the English and Dutch_.
+
+At four in the morning of Saturday the 8th April, 1620, we met the Bull,
+newly come from England, bringing the joyful news of peace having been
+concluded between us and the Dutch. She was accompanied by a small ship,
+called the Flying Hart, with letters of advice for us, or any other of
+the English ships, giving notice of the agreement and union that had
+taken place between the two Honourable East India Companies of England
+and Holland. We came to anchor with all our fleet in the afternoon, near
+the point of Palimbangan. In the morning of the 11th, we descried the
+Dutch fleet coming from Jacatra to meet us, and to congratulate with us
+on the joyful intelligence of peace. General Coen was there in person,
+and as soon as he came to anchor, the Holland fleet and ours began to
+salute each other with peals of ordnance, to communicate the
+intelligence to the natives, and to express our own joy of the happy
+news of peace.
+
+The 12th, we came altogether into Bantam roads, the Dutch fleet
+consisting of fifteen sail, besides two others of their nation which we
+found already in the roads, and ours of twelve sail. This day, Mr
+Janson, commander of the Dutch fleet, accompanied by their fiscal, and
+divers others, came to visit me, and invited Mr Brockendon, Mr Spalding,
+and myself on board the Dutch admiral's ship, where we conferred with
+General Coen concerning our future conjunct arrangements. After we had
+compared the articles and letters, the Dutch general agreed that we
+should jointly proceed in conformity with the instructions we had
+received from our Honourable Company; but he declined publishing the
+articles till the arrival of some ship from Holland, with the articles
+and instructions from their Company. On the 14th, in the morning, by
+mutual concert between us and the Hollanders, we sent Mr Beaumont and
+Philip Baduge on, shore, with one Dutch merchant, to communicate the
+news of our peace and agreement to the pangran, and to inform him, as we
+were now united, we only desired to have a reasonable composition with
+him, through which we might remain quietly in his country, enjoying a
+free trade on just and equitable conditions, as in other parts of India.
+But the pangran was so much dissatisfied with the news, that he would
+give no answer to their message, often times asking them why we had
+become friends with the Hollanders, so that they had to return without
+any answer. We sent the same message to him next day, but our messengers
+were not allowed to land.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+"The differences and maritime warfare which took place between the Dutch
+and English East India Companies, of which some notice has been taken;
+and the peace and union which are announced, as having been communicated
+to their respective commanders at this time, would lead to historical
+discussions and deductions, which do not properly belong to the object
+of a Collection of Voyages and Travels; but which, if altogether passed
+over, would leave much of the foregoing circumstances, and some that
+have to be noticed in the sequel, abrupt, isolated, and almost
+unintelligible. It has therefore been deemed proper to give a brief
+account of these differences, and of the singular so called _union_,
+which took place in consequence, extracted from the Annals of the East
+India Company, vol. I. p. 201, _et seq._[276]
+
+[Footnote 276: This addition to Sec.4. of the present voyage, is made by
+the Editor; but almost entirely derived from the historiographer of the
+East India Company.--E.]
+
+"When the differences and aggressions which had occurred in the spice
+islands were reported in Europe, the English and Dutch Companies
+presented memorials and remonstrances to their respective governments,
+each complaining against the servants of the other, as guilty of
+unwarrantable aggressions. In Holland, calculating on the pacific
+character of King James, it was expected that the opposition to the
+projects of the English for participating in the trade of the spice
+islands, although of at least a tendency towards warlike aggression,
+would not lead to national hostilities, but might be discussed by means
+of remonstrances and negociation.
+
+"After long conferences between English and Dutch commissioners, for
+settling the disputes between the two Companies, a treaty was concluded
+at London on the 17th July, 1619; by which, after specifying an amnesty
+for all past excesses, and a mutual restitution of ships and property,
+the trade of the two nations in the East was declared to be free;--That
+the pepper trade at Java should be equally divided;--That the English
+should have a free trade at Pullicat, on paying half the expences of the
+garrison;--That the English were to enjoy one third of the export and
+import trade, at the Molucca and Banda islands, commonly called the
+spice islands; commissioners to be appointed for regulating the trade,
+and the charges of the garrisons, under their inspection, to be defrayed
+in that proportion by the two Companies;--That each Company should
+furnish ten ships of war for the common defence; which ships were not to
+be employed to bring cargoes to Europe, but only in the carrying trade,
+between one port and another in the East Indies.--The whole proceedings
+arising out of this treaty, were to be under the regulation of a
+_Council of Defence_, composed of four members appointed by each
+Company, who were to reside in India; and this treaty was to subsist in
+force for twenty years.
+
+"It would lead far beyond any due bounds that could be afforded in this
+work, to follow out this compact, singularly weak on the part of King
+James, and assuredly either contrived by his boasted _king craft_, or
+devised by some wily Dutch politician, who was acquainted with his
+majesty's wonderful sagacity. This union and the council of defence,
+turned out a most fruitful source of advantage to the Dutch, who had
+completely duped the king and government of England, and totally
+expelled the English Company from any share whatever in the trade of the
+spice islands; after contriving to make them pay more than two thirds of
+the expence of fortifications and garrisons, instead of one third, all
+of which were effectually converted to their injury and exclusion. In
+the sequel of these voyages, several instances will be found, completely
+illustrative of these positions; and from the year 1625, or thereabout,
+the Dutch enjoyed the entire profits of the spice trade, including the
+whole island of Java, till within these very few years; when, as
+subjects of Buonaparte, they have been driven from every foreign
+possession, and entirely excluded from all participation in the trade of
+the East."--E.
+
+Sec.5. _Voyage of Captain Pring from Bantam, to Patania and Japan, and
+return to Jacatra_.[277]
+
+The 26th of April, 1620, we sailed from Bantam roads, with the James
+Royal and Unicorn in company, intending, by the grace of God, to go for
+Japan, there to careen and trim our ships. Mr Brockendon departed at the
+same time for Jacatra with six ships; proposing, about a month after our
+departure, to send five good English ships after us to Japan, that we
+might have the fittest season of the year to go from thence to the
+Manillas. The 27th, we took leave of this fleet, and steered towards the
+north, borrowing within half a league of the eastern point of
+Pulo-Tunda; and came to anchor in the evening about a league off the
+N.E. point of that island, in twenty-three fathoms upon ooze, waiting
+till the western stream of the tide began to return to the eastwards
+which was about ten at night, when we proceeded on our course.
+
+[Footnote 277: Purchas gives two relations of this voyage, one brief,
+"lest the longer one might interrupt the more delicate muses of some
+readers with sea-sickness, the other for those that are more studious of
+nautical knowledge." On the present occasion, we have preferred the more
+extended narrative, and have therefore united both accounts as given by
+Purchas, being the remainder of Sec.4. joined to the whole of Sec.5. giving
+one instance of minute nautical remarks of our earlier navigators.--E.]
+
+The 28th at night, we anchored in 18 f. on ooze, Pulo Antekero bearing
+N.E. three leagues off. Pulo Antekero bears N.N.E. 1/2 E. from Pulo
+Tunda, about eight leagues distant. The depth of water between the two
+islands, runs-from 16 f. to 26, and so to 22, 20, 18, 16, 14, and 12 f.
+all ooze. Pulo Antekero is westernmost of the islands which extend in a
+row from the bay of Jacatra, [or Batavia,] to the westward. Continuing
+our course, we anchored, in the evening of the 29th, in 15 f, Pulo Kero
+bearing N. by E. 1/2 E. 2-1/2 leagues off. Pulo Kero bears N.N.E. nearly
+from Antekero, six leagues off. After passing halfway between these
+islands we had 20, 18, 16, 14, 12 f. on ooze. At noon on the 30th we
+had Pulo Kero six leagues off, S. 1/2 E. our depth continuing 13,12,11
+f. all ooze.
+
+At noon on the 1st May, Pulo Kero bore S. 1/2 W nine leagues, and the
+depth 12 f. being just able to see that island from our top-mast head.
+By observation of the sun, we were then in lat. 4 deg. 45' S. From noon till
+five p.m. our course was N.N.E. four leagues. We then anchored in 11 f.
+on ooze, having Pulo Kero by estimation thirteen league S by W. This
+night at nine, being still at anchor in the same place, I made the ship,
+by observation of the Crozies, in lat. 4 deg. 40' S. allowing 29 deg. for the
+complement of declination. We set sail at four a.m. of the 2d, and by
+noon had run about six leagues N.N.E. the depths continuing as before,
+13, 12, 11 f. By noon of the 3d our course was S. by E. five leagues,
+the soundings as before, all the ground from Bantam roads hitherto being
+ooze. From Bantam for the first two days, we had land and sea breezes;
+afterwards, till the afternoon of the 2d, the wind was constant between
+E. and S.E. when the wind came northerly, and so continued till the 3d
+at noon. From Pulo Paniang to Pulo Antekero, the current set to the
+westwards, somewhat strong; but from thence we found the currents more
+gentle, and changing into every direction in the course of the
+twenty-four hours.
+
+Our course from noon of the 3d till noon of the 4th was N.N.E. eleven
+leagues, the depths from 12 to 10-1/2 f. From noon this day till seven
+at night, we made 5-1/2 leagues N. and then anchored in 9-1/2 f. We
+weighed in the morning of the 5th. having but little wind and that
+variable, till half an hour after six, when it sprung up fresh at S.W.
+From four to nine a.m. we made three leagues N.E. 1/2 E. and from nine
+till noon only half a league N.W. by N. This day at noon we were in lat.
+3 deg. 30' S. when we descried a small island N.N.E. 1/2 E. four leagues
+off, which appeared at first like a great tree rising out of the see.
+From noon till six p.m. our course was five leagues N.W. We here saw two
+or three hummocks like islands, N. by W. seven leagues off. From thence
+till three a.m. of the 6th, we sailed W. six leagues. At six in the
+evening of the 5th we had 9 f. which increased as we stood westwards in
+the night, to 10, 11, and l2 f. and afterwards decreased to 8 f. where
+we came to anchor. The stream by night set S.E. and by day N.W. We
+weighed again at six a.m. of the 6th, and steered W.N.W. 1-1/2 league,
+when we had sight of many hummocks rising like so many islands, but
+which at length we perceived to be all one land. Coming now into 6-1/2
+f. we altered our course to the N.E. making our course N.N.E. till noon,
+about 2-1/2 leagues; at which time, by an observation of the sun, we
+were in lat. 3 deg. 20' S. We were now in 8 f. and found the current to set
+N.W. by W. About noon of this day, a junk belonging to Johor came up
+with us, which had been at Cheribon in Java, and was returning to Johor.
+The afternoon, we steered in with the eastern part of the hummocky land
+of Banka, making our course N.N.E. 1/2 N. in which we came again to 8 f.
+afterwards increasing regularly to 24 f. and then decreasing again to a
+quarter less 7 f. when we came to anchor against the E. point of that
+land, which bore from us N.N.E. 1/3 N. four leagues off.
+
+We weighed in the morning of the 7th, and stood in nearer the point, in
+hopes of being able to pass through between that island and one which
+lay three leagues to the E. But in our way, we found the soundings,
+after increasing from 7 to 17 f. to decrease again to 6 and to one-half
+less 4 f. and about two miles off the point in the fair way we had only
+six feet water in the fair way, or mid-channel. To the eastwards, there
+appeared many islands, and by the report of the people in the junk, the
+sea is full of islands between the S.E. end of Banka and the island of
+Borneo. The S.E. end of Banka now bore N.N.E. 1/2 N. about two leagues
+off; and the land from this point to the entrance of the straits of
+Banka, lay W. by S. the straits being thirteen leagues from us. Where we
+lay at anchor, the before-mentioned point bearing N. by E. 1/2 E. 2-1/2
+leagues off, we had an observation of the sun, giving the latitude of
+the ship 3 deg. 8' S. Having little hope of finding a passage between Banka
+and Borneo among these islands, by reason of the fearful shoalings we
+had already met with, we resolved on the 8th to go through the straits
+between the island of Banka and Sumatra, called the Straits of Banka;
+wherefore we set sail, retracing as nearly as we could the course by
+which we came into the present shoal water; in which course we found
+still more dangerous shoalings than in our in-coming. After we had got
+about eight leagues off, S.S.W. from the before-mentioned point of
+Banka, we steered S.W. by W. the current setting N.W. which made our
+course nearest W. by S. In this course we proceeded five leagues, and
+anchored in 8 f. on ooze, about nine at night.
+
+In the morning of the 9th, we descried Lucepara, N.N.W. seven leagues
+off, and steered towards it, till we had it N. two leagues. In this
+course we passed over a spit, where we had only 4-1/2 f. and 4-3/4. But
+on nearing Lucepara, we had 5-1/4 f. all ooze. We then steered N.W. by
+N. till Lucepara was N.E. of us, having 5 f. and the same ground. We
+then, went W.N.W. having always ooze, till we were within two leagues of
+the Sumatra shore in 6 f. The isle of Lucepara bore then E.S.E. 3-1/2
+leagues off; and a hill on Banka with a deep swamp, N. by W. being about
+a sail's breadth open of the point of Sumatra, which bore N. by W. 1/2
+W. from us, about three leagues off. We steered thence away with the
+said point N. by W. Having 6-1/2 and 7 f. soft ground, till we came
+within a league of the point, where edging too near we had but 5-1/2,
+and only 4-1/2 in the boat hard by us: But, if we had kept a little
+farther from the point, we might have gone in 7, 8, 9, and 10 f. all
+through the strait, borrowing carefully with the lead upon the Sumatra
+shore; whereas by keeping nearer to Banka than Sumatra, the soundings
+are very variable, sometimes deep, and sometimes shallow, and mostly
+foul ground. On the Sumatra shore, even if coming into shoal water, the
+ground is mostly soft ooze, and the soundings far more regular and
+certain.
+
+In the evening of the 12th May, having brought the N.W. point of Banka
+to bear N.E. we opened two smooth hills with a little hummock between
+them; one of these hills being the northermost land of Banka, and
+bearing N.E. nine leagues, from the N.W. point of that island. This
+night we steered N.N.E. to get through the channel between Lingan and
+the N. end of Banka, having 23, 22, 20, 18, and 16 f. all ooze, till we
+came near the entrance, and afterwards 15, 14, 13 f. in going through
+the passage. Lingan rises at first in three islands, the northermost
+being larger than both the other two, being near two leagues long and
+full of hummocks. Among these three islands there are certain fragments
+of isles intermixed, like so many hay-cocks, which is a good mark
+whereby to know these islands. From the smooth hill which is the north
+end of Banka, to the south-westermost isle of Lingan, it is N. by W. ten
+leagues. From the middle of the largest isle of Lingan, which is the
+north-eastermost, there is another smooth island nine leagues off,
+E.N.E. 1/2 N. From that there is another flat island, and off the north
+point of the round smooth island, there is a little fragment like a
+rock. In the fair way between this island and Lingan, there are 14 and
+13 f. the course being midway between, and to the N. to pass along by
+the E. side of Bintang. This day at noon, being the 12th May, our
+latitude was 1 deg. S.[278] the greatest isle of the Lingan group being S.W.
+from us five leagues, whence we estimated its latitude to be 1 deg. 10'
+nearly.
+
+[Footnote 278: This is an evident error, as the northern side of the
+largest island of the Lingan group is exactly on the equator, and
+Bintam, or Bintang, is in lat. 1 deg. N.--E.]
+
+At noon of the 14th, having made way twenty-four leagues to the
+northward, by aid of the wind and a current setting to the north, we had
+sight of the high land of Bintang, rising with two hills and a deep
+swamp or hollow between, and, as we judged, twelve leagues from us. At
+this time, likewise, we had sight of three or four hummocks, S.W. by W.
+eight leagues off, which seemed separate islands. We had here 20 f. our
+soundings from Lingan being 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, and 20 f. From noon of
+the 14th till noon of the 15th, we made twenty-seven leagues N. 1/3 W.
+our soundings in these twenty-four hours being 21, 22, 23, and 24 f.
+From noon till three p.m. of the 15th we made 3 1/2 leagues, and then
+had sight of Pulo Laor, N.W. 1/2 N. about twelve leagues off, having
+then 27 f. the ground resembling fuller's earth. At night, Pulo Laor
+being N.W. by W. eight leagues off, we had 39 f. on ooze. From noon of
+the 15th till eight a.m. of the 16th, we made our course N.N.W. 1/2 W.
+fifteen leagues. At night of the 16th, Pulo Laor bore S.W. by S. five
+leagues; the body of the island of Hermano de Layo W.S.W. 1/2 W. seven
+leagues; and the S. end of Pulo Timon W. 1/2 N. ten leagues, its N.E.
+end being W.N.W. 1/2 W. ten leagues. We anchored this evening within
+four leagues of the N. point of Pulo Timon, in 24 f. _streamy_ ground,
+that point bearing W. by S. 1/2 S. In the evening I sent my boat round
+the point, where they observed a town, with a junk riding close by the
+shore, and several proas fishing. One of these came to enquire what
+nation our people were of, and told them there was good fresh water at
+the town, with plenty of buffaloes, goats, and poultry.
+
+In the morning of the 17th, we sent the Unicorn's longboat along with
+ours to the town, whence they came back in the evening with four butts
+of water each, not willing to fill more, as it was brackish. They found
+at the watering-place a junk belonging to Johor, fitted out for war,
+having twenty men armed with fire-arms, besides lances and javelins.
+They reported that they had taken a Chinese junk, which they had sold on
+the coast of Johor; the nokhada sending me word, that he would assist me
+against the Portuguese at the hazard of his life. In the bay next to the
+southwards of Pulo Timon, we found excellent fresh water, but could not
+conveniently take it in by means of our long-boat, which drew five feet
+water when loaded. Having thus spent the day to little purpose, we set
+sail at the beginning of the night, directing our course for Patane,
+and steering N. all night with little wind.
+
+At noon of the 18th, we were in the latitude of 3 deg. 40' N. At four p.m.
+we had sight of Pulo Tingoran, N.N.W. fifteen leagues off. At night we
+passed by Tingoran, about six leagues to the eastwards, having 28, 30,
+and 32 f. on soft ground. At six a.m. of the 19th, Tigoran bore W.S.W.
+seven leagues from us, when we had thirty-six f. soft ground. At noon of
+this day we were in lat. 5 deg. 30' N. Tingoran bearing S. 1/3 E. fourteen
+leagues off, by which we estimated the latitude of that island to be 4 deg.
+50 N. We had likewise, at noon, the south isle of Pulo Rowdon, [Ridang,]
+N.W. by W. seven leagues off. The same night at eight, I observed the
+croziers, making the latitude of the ship 5 deg. 48' N. At this time, the
+largest of the Ridang isles, which is the eastermost, bore from us due
+W. four leagues distant. From eight this night, till noon of the 20th,
+our course was nearly N.W. by W. nine leagues, our sounding being from
+28 to 17 f. The northermost of the Pulo Ridang isles was then S. 1/3 E.
+four leagues off, being a round hummock, much like Pomo in the gulf of
+Venice, but somewhat higher and more complete. These isles consist of
+good high land, having fair depth all along their eastern side to
+seawards, and I am told have a free and safe channel between them and
+the main land. There are thirteen or fourteen islands in this group,
+great and small.
+
+From noon of the 20th till eight in the morning of the 21st, our course
+was W.N.W. nine leagues. We saw two hills by the water-side, bearing W.
+and five leagues off, resembling two great tortoises. From Pulo Tingoran
+all the way to Patani, the land up the country is very high, while that
+just within the coast is low, with a sandy beach. This is the case for
+at least twenty leagues south of Patani, but how much farther I know
+not. In the afternoon of the 20th, while standing towards the two hills
+just mentioned as resembling tortoises, we came from 17 into 14 and 13
+f. with hard ground; and as we drew nearer these hills, the depth again
+increased to 19 f. on ooze, and then shoaled again to 18 and 17 f. on
+ooze.
+
+The 21st of May, being Sunday, from eight a.m. to seven p.m. our course
+was N.W. 3/4 W. thirteen leagues, keeping mostly within four leagues of
+the low sandy shore, the depth all the way being 15, 14, and 13 f. We
+then anchored in 13-3/4 f. streamy ground, the northermost point in
+sight, falling down from a reasonably high land at the far end of the
+low land, bore from us W.N.W. 1/2 N. near 3-1/2 leagues off. S.E. by S.
+from this point, six leagues off, there is a rock, as high above water
+as the hull of a small ship, which we passed about 1-1/2 league on its
+E. side, finding no alteration in the soundings. This point I named the
+Gurnet's Head. From this point, the land trends W.N.W. and W. by N. all
+the way to the entrance into Patani roads, being all low land from the
+Gurnet's Head to the point of the road, this point being the lowest of
+all. The distance from the Gurnet's Head to that low point is six
+leagues, all the way of fair depth till coming near the low point of the
+road, to which a good birth must be given, as there lies a shoal from it
+half-way over to the western shore, wherefore it must not be approached
+too near, till you find in the first place the shoaling of the western
+shore, which is the softest ground. From the low point, in going across
+the bay to the western shore there are only from 5 f. to 4 1/2 when in
+the road; and then the low point bears from the anchorage, E.N.E. 1/3 E.
+the highest mountains in the western side of the bay bearing S.S.W. 1/3
+W.
+
+We anchored in the road of Patani on Thursday the 25th of May, when we
+found the Sampson and a Dutch pinnace there at anchor. I went ashore the
+day before to the English factory, where I found Mr Adam Denton and Mr
+Richard Welding, lately come from Jambee in Sumatra in a proa, with
+several of the Sampson's people, who were all rejoiced to see our ships
+coming into the port. On getting to the English house, I told Mr Denton
+that my chief purpose for coming here was for arrack and fresh victuals,
+of which we were in great need, upon which he gave immediate orders to
+procure every thing we needed, so that in six days we were supplied with
+sixteen butts of arrack and arrack-apee; three butts of which last we
+had from the Dutch, for which courtesy we were chiefly obliged by their
+anxiety to have us away. We had also beeves, goats, and poultry, in
+abundance. We also bought here _dammar_ and oil, for the purpose of
+repairing our ships, as I understood these things were dear at Japan. I
+here found a small frigate or country bark, which had been bought by the
+English; and as she was of no great use there, it was agreed that she,
+with most of the English sailors, should attend upon us to Japan.
+
+We departed from Patani on the 31st May; and at seven a.m. of the 1st
+June, we saw a small rock, just above water, being very dangerous for
+ships bound from Patani for the point of Camboja. When this rock bore
+N.N.E. 1/2 E. at the distance of a league, the high land over Gurnet
+Head was S.S.W. 1/4 W. eighteen leagues off; and by computation, the low
+point of Patani road was then eighteen leagues off, W.S.W. 1/2 S. After
+getting out of Patani road into 7 f. the depth increased regularly to 9,
+10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, and 24 f. till we got sight of the rock; and
+two leagues from it we had 25 f. on ooze, as was the ground all the way
+over from Patani. This day at noon, we found the latitude of the ship to
+be 7 deg. 20' N. the rock bearing W. about four leagues off.
+
+From that time till the 3d, at noon, our course was E. 1/2 N. forty-five
+leagues, when we had sight of Pulo Hube, bearing E.N.E. 1/2 N. eight
+leagues off, having 14 f. on ooze, as we constantly had for the last
+forty-eight hours, the sounding being from 27 to 36 f. and thence
+decreasing again to 14 f. Pulo Hube rises at first as one round hill,
+and on coming nearer some high land is seen rising in hummocks, but not
+above two-thirds so high as the round hill, being all one land with it.
+Then another and smaller island is seen to rise, nearly of the same
+height with the hummocks, and close to the larger island. At the east
+end of this lesser round island, there are two little isles very near,
+and a mile east of them there is a long rock like the hull of a galley.
+This night we anchored in 13 1/2 f. on ooze, about three leagues from
+the largest and highest isle. In the morning of the 4th we weighed, and
+stood E. by S. with little wind. At six p.m. we had the body of Pulo
+Hube W. by N. four leagues off. From thence we steered E. by S. and E.
+till six next morning, but were so opposed by the current, that we made
+our course to the northward of east. From six a.m. of the 5th till six
+p.m. we ran fifteen leagues in the before-mentioned course, when we saw
+a very small round isle about four leagues to the southward, having a
+long flat rock S. from it about a mile, a good height above water. From
+Pulo Hube till three leagues from this island, our soundings were 13,
+14, 15 f. and then 15, 14, 13 f. again, all ooze. When within two
+leagues of this small island, we had 13 f. on sand.
+
+Here we descried Pulo Condor, its N. end bearing E. by N. from this
+small island about seven leagues off. This day at noon, we made our
+latitude 8 deg. 42' N. the highest land on Pulo Condor bearing from us E.
+six leagues off. From Patani till we were in sight of Pulo Condor, the
+wind was mostly S.S.W. This day at noon, we steered away N.E. then N.E.
+by N. and in the night N.N.E. so that we made our course on the whole,
+till next day at noon, N.E. by N. about twenty-four leagues, the depths
+being 13 and 14 f. on ooze. At noon of the 6th, we had sight of two
+hummocks on the coast of Camboja, bearing N. by E. nine leagues off,
+with low land to the westwards. From Pulo Condor till we had sight of
+this coast, the current set E. by N. At this time we had 12 f. on
+streamy ground. The 7th at noon, we were in lat. 10 deg. 42' N. having run
+from the former noon twenty-five leagues N.E. 1/2 N. and found that the
+current had carried us ten leagues to the N. of our computation. Our
+depths were in these twenty-four hours, from 12, to 16, 20, and 24 f.
+and then back to 20, 18, 16, 14, on sandy ground.
+
+From the before-mentioned two hummocks, as we coasted along, about eight
+leagues from the land, sometimes more, and sometimes less, we saw high
+land all the way in the inland country, and a smooth land in most places
+by the sea side, about the height of the Lizard, with many plots upon it
+resembling white sand, as well as the sea side. The first of these white
+spots was on a point ten leagues W. of Cape Cessier, which we at first
+thought had been a town with fair white houses and white walls. This
+day, at noon, being the 7th, when in the lat. of 10 deg. 48' N. that Cape
+bore from us about six leagues W.N.W. 1/2 W. At noon of the 8th, we were
+in lat. 11 deg. 30' N. having gone twenty leagues N.E. 1/2 N. from noon of
+the 7th. From the 8th, till noon of the 9th, we steered along shore
+N.N.E. sixteen leagues, N. by E. six leagues, N. six leagues, and N. by
+W. nine leagues, making our course in all N. by E. 1/3 E. thirty-six
+leagues. We now had Cape Varella[279] W.S.W. eight leagues off, and were
+in the lat. of 13 deg. 13' N. This cape is called Jentam by the Chinese,
+signifying a chimney in their language, because it has a sharp hummock
+on the top of the hill, much like a chimney on the top of a house. From
+noon of the 9th, till noon of the 10th, our course was N. two-thirds W.
+twenty-six leagues; our latitude on the 10th being 14 deg. 30' N. when we
+were about ten leagues from the land.
+
+[Footnote 279: Cape Verelly is in lat. 12 deg. 40' N. on the coast of Cochin
+China--E.]
+
+The 11th, at noon, we were in lat. 16 deg. 10' N. having run, from the
+foregoing noon, thirty-three one-third leagues due N. Next noon, the
+12th, we had made other twenty-six leagues, N.N.E. 1/2 N. and were in
+latitude 17 deg. 40' N. the current having set us six leagues to the N. of
+our computation. This evening, at six, we descried the island of Aynam,
+[Hainan] its high land bearing N.W. by N. twelve leagues, and we had run
+from noon seven leagues N.E. From hence, till noon of the 13th, our
+course was N.E. by E. twenty-two leagues, and we were then in lat. 18 deg.
+30' N. We this morning chased a Portuguese frigate, but she was so light
+that we could not get near her. The 14th, at noon, we were in 19 deg. 35' N.
+our course having been these twenty-four hours N.E. twenty-six leagues,
+the current having carried us four leagues to the N. of our reckoning;
+and yet this day at noon, in seventy-three f. on ooze, our boats found
+no current at all. We here saw many ripplings, like the overfalls of
+some rapid tide, yet found none. At six this evening, we again anchored
+our boat in sixty-eight f. on oozy sand, and found a slight current to
+the southwards. By the 15th, at noon, we had ran seventeen leagues N.E.
+by N. and our latitude was 28 deg. 30' N. the current having carried us
+seven leagues to the north of our reckoning. We had here forty-five f.
+sandy ooze. The 16th, at noon, in 21 deg. 20' N. we had sight of three
+islands, the eastermost N.N.W. the westermost N.W. and the nearest land
+nine leagues off. We had here twenty-two f. on oosy sand, the wind being
+E.S.E. and very fresh; but, from Cape Verelly till now, the wind had
+always blown from S.S.E. to S.W. Next morning, at eight, we had
+twenty-eight f. on ooze, having run, from noon of the 16th, eleven
+leagues S.W. Finding the wind to increase, we thought it better to come
+here to anchor than to run back again.
+
+In the morning of the 18th June, the weather being somewhat fair, we
+endeavoured to weigh our anchor; but when it was right apeak, the cable
+gave way, though a new one, never before wetted, by which we lost our
+anchor. Just at this time the Unicorn fired a gun, on which I sent
+immediately to know what was amiss, and was informed she had sprung a
+great leak, by which all her men were tired out with bailing. I then
+sent thirty men to her aid, to ease her crew, till it might please God
+they should find the leak. This day we had the wind at S.E. and stood E.
+making our course N.E. till six p.m. when we again saw the former high
+island ten leagues from us, bearing N.N.E. one-third E. This evening our
+men returned from the Unicorn with the joyful news that the great leak
+was firmly stopped. From six p.m. till midnight, we made fourteen
+leagues N.E. when we had twenty f. in ooze. From that time, till five
+next morning, we stood to the southwards, making a S.W. course three and
+a half leagues.
+
+From five in the morning of the 19th, we cast about towards the land,
+with the wind at S.E. making a course N.E. and at six o'clock were
+within eight leagues of the before-mentioned high island, bearing from
+as N. by E. At eight this morning, Mr Roberts, the master of the
+Unicorn, came on board the James, to inform me that another great leak
+had broke out in that ship, and that it was necessary to seek out for
+some smooth place to ride in at anchor, to enable them to search out the
+leak, and fit their foremast better into the step. Upon this
+intelligence, I resolved to bear up under the lee of the great island,
+which bore now from us N. by E. in hope to find there a smooth anchorage
+for the purposes of the Unicorn. There were many more islands in sight,
+both to the eastwards and westwards of us, but that being the nearest,
+and the likeliest for our purpose, and only three leagues from us, we
+steered for it. The night approaching, and the wind becoming dull, we
+plied off and on till morning of the 20th, when the wind had come round
+so much to the northwards, that we could not fetch our intended place of
+anchorage. I went aboard the Unicorn this day to enquire into their
+intentions and situation, when I found them all willing to stand on our
+original course, as the wind was fair, and they were hopeful of being
+able to overcome their leak. I therefore sent all my Lascars on board
+the Unicorn, in aid of her crew, after which we stood on our course all
+that day till midnight, with a fair wind and favourable weather.
+
+Towards midnight of the 20th June, the wind increased so much, that we
+had to lay our ship a-try all night under her main-course. In the
+morning of the 21st, we saw the Unicorn a league and a half astern of
+us, having a foresail and spritsail out, which I afterwards perceived
+was for the purpose of floating her about towards the shore. I
+immediately caused our fore-courses to be made ready to float our ship
+about after the Unicorn, though we had little hope of being able to
+assist her in any thing, as the sea was become very rough. While our men
+were throwing loose the forecourse, there came so violent a gust, that
+they were obliged to furl it again, otherwise it had been blown away.
+After the gust was over, we set our foresail, and, to make her wear
+better round, we brailed up our main-course, part of it being blown out
+of the bolt rope before the men could furl it. After that was up, we put
+our helm hard a-weather, thinking the ship would come round, but all in
+vain, for our ship would not wear beyond two or three points, and then
+came to again. The sea was now so much grown that we durst not let fall
+our spritsail, and the wind so violent that we could not loosen our
+fore-topsail; and by this time the Unicorn had gone out of sight.[280]
+Finding we could not wear ship, we steered away as near as we could lie
+S. by E. till noon, having by that time made a course S. by E. thirteen
+leagues from the southermost island we had seen over night, which I
+called the Morocco Saddle, or Saddle island, because of a high hill
+having a deep swamp or hollow between two peaked tops. This Saddle
+island is in lat. 21 deg. 45' N.[281] There are four or five small islands
+close to its western side, and three on its eastern side. Besides which,
+there are many other islands in different directions, some N.W. others
+W.N.W. and W. by N. the southermost of all the islands in sight bearing
+from Saddle island to the W. about fifteen leagues off.
+
+[Footnote 280: It will be seen in the sequel that she was lost on the
+coast of China, probably run on shore to save the men's lives from the
+effects of the increasing leak.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 281: The indicated latitude leads to one of the numerous
+islands on the coast of China, at the month of the bay of Canton, about
+the longitude of 113 deg. E. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+This afternoon our ship became very leaky, having suddenly four and a
+half feet water in the hold, which kept both pumps going a long while
+before we could free her. Towards evening, it pleased God that we
+discovered three or four great leaks between wind and water; and after
+our carpenters had stopped them, we had great comfort, as we could then
+let the pumps stop half an hour, and afterwards free the ship in a
+quarter of an hour. From this day, the 21st, at noon, till noon of the
+22d, we made five leagues S.S.W. with a pair of courses, and nine
+leagues S.W. by W. a-hull, having twenty-seven and a half f. in ooze. In
+the afternoon of the 22d, the violence of the wind and waves began to
+abate, and our ship became tighter, which plainly shewed that most of
+our leaks were between wind and water, wherefore, on the first fair
+weather, I caused our carpenters to search the ship's sides, where they
+found and stopped many bad places, some a yard long, where the oakum was
+all rotten in the seams.
+
+The 24th, we had sight of a great island to the N. about seven leagues
+off; having a high hill on its southern end, being the island formerly
+mentioned as about fifteen leagues W. from Saddle island. From thence,
+till the evening of the 26th, our course was S. by W. twenty-four
+leagues, the depths increasing from nineteen to thirty-six f. on ooze.
+We had here a small round island S.W. by N. two leagues off, nearly in
+latitude 20 deg. 20' N.[282] This island has four small islands on its S.W.
+side, but all of them considerably lower, for we saw this from the
+distance of at least ten leagues, rising in the shape of a Chinese hat.
+From hence, till noon of the 27th, our course was E. by N. two-thirds N.
+twelve leagues. This morning at two o'clock the wind veered round to
+S.S.E. and at noon was due S. From noon of the 27th, to noon of the
+28th, we stood E.N.E. eighteen leagues, and had then almost forty-one f.
+on ooze. Till noon of the 29th, we made other eighteen leagues E.N.E.
+when we were in 21 deg. 10' N. To the 30th, at noon, other eighteen leagues
+E.N.E. To noon of 1st July, our course was E.N.E. 1/2 N. twenty-two
+leagues, our latitude being then 22 deg. 10' N. Here, from the topmast-head
+we saw land N.N.W. 1/2 N. From noon this day, till seven p.m. we sailed
+N.E. by N. six leagues. At six this evening we saw three Chinese
+fishing-boats.
+
+[Footnote 282: There must be a material error here, as the latitude in
+the text would carry us back to the peninsula to the north of Hainan,
+more than two degrees of longitude backwards. Indeed, the text seems
+corrupted in many respects, even the bearings being extremely
+suspicious.--E.]
+
+This evening the wind came up at E.S.E. with which we stood to the
+southwards; and having sprung our main topmast only a little before, we
+could only bear a course and bonnet, and therefore made our way no
+better than S.W. From noon of the 2d, till eight p.m. our way was S.
+four leagues. Till noon of the 3d, we sailed N.N.W. 1/4 W. seven
+leagues. We here saw land twelve leagues off, from N. to N.E. rising in
+certain hummocks, which land I estimated to be nearly in 22 deg. 45' N. On
+the 8th, I had an observation of the Scorpion's Heart, by which I made
+our latitude 22 deg. 35' N. Next day, at noon, on observation of the sun
+gave the latitude 23 deg. 6' N. At this time we had sight of the high land
+of Logosse, eleven leagues off, N.W. by N.[283] This morning we saw
+eight or more fishing boats, and came within hail of one, but could not
+persuade the people to come on board.
+
+[Footnote 283: The latitude of the text points to the coast of China in
+about the longitude of 117 deg.E. but no such name as Logosse occurs in
+these parts.--E.]
+
+On the 10th we had sight of some small islands, one of which, rising in
+form of a sugar-loaf, bore from us W.N.N. about eight leagues off.[284]
+We this day hoisted out a small boat, built by our carpenters upon the
+forecastle, by which we made trial of the current, and found it to set
+E.N.E. At eight this evening, we anchored in 28 f. having made no way at
+all this afternoon but with the current, which went at the rate of about
+a mile an hour N.E. The 11th we weighed, and drove away with the current
+to the N.E. having no wind. This day at noon we had sight of the high
+land of Formosa above the clouds, the highest part bearing S.E. by E.
+about eighteen leagues off, the nearest island on the coast of China
+bearing seven leagues from us N.W. We here saw great numbers of fishing
+boats all round about us, which sent little boats to us with fish, for
+which we gave them double the value to encourage them to come back. At
+six this evening, the wind sprung up at N.N.E. by which, and some help
+of the current setting N.E. by E. we made our way nine leagues E. to the
+12th at noon. Our latitude was then 25 deg. 20' N. The high land of Formosa
+being S.E. and the nearest port eight leagues off; the northern point
+ten leagues E. by N. and the depth 46 fathoms on ooze. The 13th the
+northern point of Formosa bore E.S.E. ten leagues off, being then in
+lat. 25 deg. 40' N.
+
+[Footnote 284: These appear to have been the Poughoy, or Pescadores
+islands, off the western coast of Tai-ouan, or Formosa.--E.]
+
+The 22d of July at noon, we were in lat. 32 deg. 40' N. the great sound of
+Langasaque, [Nangasaki,] being E. nine leagues off, and the S.E. of the
+Gotto isles W. by N. ten leagues off. The 23d, we arrived in a port of
+the island of Firando named Cochee, [Coetch,] which is about 4 1/2
+English miles to the southwards of Firando haven.[285] On the 25th,
+Captain Cox sent a great number of funnies, or _toe_ boats, to our
+assistance, by the help of which we got safe in the afternoon into the
+harbour of Firando, where we found the Swan and Expedition, sent hither,
+as I suppose, by the Dutch, for the disgrace of our nation in this
+remote part of the world. This day, before we got in, the Elizabeth
+brought in with her into Coetch, a frigate, containing silks and hides,
+and some sugar, her mariners being Japanese with some Portuguese, a part
+of whom were friars. Captain Adams, the admiral of the united fleet,
+arrived in the same place about three hours after me in the Moon, as
+likewise William Johnson in the Trow.
+
+[Footnote 285: Coetch, about 17 miles W. by N. from Firando, the former
+on the western, and the latter on the eastern side of the island.--E.]
+
+The 26th, a general council was held of all the English and Dutch, in
+the English house at Firando, when it was resolved to call in the ships
+that lay nearest the coast of _Sashma_, because we were certainly
+informed that the Portuguese frigates were just arrived from Macao at
+Nangasaki. The 30th, the king of _Crats_ came aboard the James,
+appearing much delighted to see such a ship, demanding of the jurabassa
+if this were one of the English frigates; whence we concluded the Dutch
+had reported we had only small ships like frigates. The 1st of August we
+held another council at the English factory, to make choice of two men,
+an Englishman and a Hollander, to carry a present to the emperor. As I
+could not be spared so long from the James, nor Captain Adams from his
+fleet, we made choice of Mr Charles Cleavengar, commander of the
+Palsgrave, and Mr Joseph Cockram, Cape merchant of the fleet, to go on
+the part of the English, and Jasques le Febre of the Harlaem, and
+Mathias de Brooke, were chosen on the part of the Dutch.
+
+On the 6th the Palsgrave arrived in Coetch roads. The Bull arrived there
+on the 7th, having cut away all her masts by the board, as they said to
+save the ship and goods. This day Captain Adams and I paid a visit to
+the king of Firando, carrying a small present, which was well received,
+and we were courteously entertained. On the 9th the king invited the
+English and Dutch to dine with him, shewing respect to our nation by
+placing us on his right hand, while the Dutch sat on his left, and the
+first dish of every course was offered to us.
+
+The 4th September we had a great tuffoon from the north, which forced
+the Moon on shore, and overset the Expedition, which instantly went
+down. The Trow had likewise been overset, had not her master veered out
+the cable, and allowed her to go on shore, stern foremost. The 5th I
+sent all my men aboard the Moon to help her off when we all strove a
+long time to no purpose; but she was again got off on the 13th, having
+fortunately received no damage by lying so long ashore. Having every
+thing taken out of the James Royal, except some bars of lead to help in
+trimming her over, she was hove down on the 19th almost halfway to the
+keel. The 21st we brought her down so low as to see part of her keel,
+and then began to sheath her with all expedition, and in four days the
+carpenters sheathed the whole of one side, from the keel up to her lower
+bends. The 27th I sent a cooper, two quarter-masters, and a butcher, to
+Nangasaki, to kill and salt such meat as was provided for us.
+
+On the 12th October, we got the James hove down on the other side to the
+keel, and on this side we found four very dangerous places, where the
+main plank was eaten quite through by the worms. Into each of these we
+graved a piece of plank, and in one of them we drove a trunnel where
+none had been before. We also nailed a piece of lead on the end of the
+bolt, which had been formerly driven through the keel to stop our great
+leak. Our ship was then righted, both sides being finished up to the
+lower bends. The Moon was likewise finished on the 21st on both sides.
+The 24th we had news that Nangasaki was greatly injured by a fire which
+began in the Portuguese street, and consumed four or five of the richest
+streets in the city.
+
+The 7th of December we departed from Firando, and anchored the same
+evening in the bay of Coetch. The 16th, Captain Cleavengar and Captain
+Le Febre returned to Firando from the court of the emperor, bringing the
+joyful news of having succeeded in their business. I took my leave of
+them on the 17th; and the wind being fair, with favourable weather, I
+set sail from the road of Coetch.
+
+Sec.6. _Voyage from Japan to Bantam, and thence Home to England_.[286]
+
+The 18th December at noon, the islands of Mexuma bore from us N.W. four
+leagues off, our course from Pomo being S.S.W. twenty-five leagues. At
+noon on the 19th, our latitude was 31 deg. 32'N. the isles of Mexuma bearing
+N.E. by N. nine leagues off. The 12th January, 1621, we stood in for the
+coast of Sumatra, and anchored at midnight in the river of Palembangan
+in twelve fathoms. We weighed again in the morning of the 13th,
+steering along the Sumatra shore through the straits of Banka; and past
+midnight of the 14th we got to anchor near Pulo Paniang. The 16th,
+seeing four ships in Bantam roads, we weighed and stood a little way
+within Pulo Paniang, when the Pepper-corn's boat came to us with the
+master, Mr Morton, who told me there were two Dutch ships in the road
+and one French ship, the pangran having consented to grant trade, and
+that it had been agreed to share the pepper in thirds among them. I also
+learnt from him, that most part of our loading was already prepared for
+us at Jacatra. I set sail, therefore, in the morning of the 17th, and
+arrived that evening near Antilaky; and in the evening of the 18th we
+arrived in the bay of Jacatra, [now Batavia bay,] where we found the
+Charles, the Gift, and the Clove, as also two Dutch ships, the Leyden
+and the Sun. The Globe and the Bee were at Hector island.
+
+[Footnote 286: In the former subdivision of this voyage a sufficient
+sample has been given of dry nautical detail of courses, bearings,
+winds, and soundings, and it does not seem necessary to insert the
+minute uninteresting detail of the return voyage to Bantam, which was
+along the coast of China, Cochinchina and Camboja, nearly retracing the
+former course.--E.]
+
+I here found the master of the Unicorn with several of his ship's
+company, having come over in a junk, after losing his ship on the coast
+of China.[287] The James here discharged her lading, and was ready to
+reload for England, there being here at this time, in the Charles,
+Clove, and Gift, about 600 tons of pepper and other goods, and the Bear
+daily expected from Jambee with 200 more, so that we had good hope of
+soon making up our loading with pepper, benzoin, cloves, and silk.
+Having taken in our whole loading of pepper, except fifty-five pekuls,
+and a few sapetas of silk and some cloves, I departed in the morning of
+the 26th February from the road of Jacatra, and set sail for England.
+
+[Footnote 287: Purchas, II. 1700, informs us, that the Unicorn being
+wrecked on the coast of China, the company saved themselves and part of
+their goods on shore. At first the rude Chinese would have assaulted and
+rifled them; but they stood on their defence, till a magistrate came and
+rescued them from the hands of the vulgar, after which they had kind
+usage and just dealing. They were allowed to purchase two vessels, with
+all necessary provisions, for their departure, and in these, part of the
+company went to Japan, and the other to Malacca.--_Purch._]
+
+In the afternoon of the 20th May, we arrived in the road of Saldanha,
+[Table-bay,] at the Cape of Good Hope. We here found the Ann Royal and
+the Fortune, two ships belonging to the honourable Company, and three
+Dutch ships, the Gowda, Black Bear, and the Herring, all bound for
+Bantam and Jacatra. We trimmed our ship on the 21st, and on the 22d we
+sent some water-casks on shore, and set up a tent for our sick men and
+coopers, landing twenty-five men as a guard for their protection. This
+night I sent out sixty men, along with sixty Dutchmen, in quest of
+cattle, but they returned without procuring any.
+
+We left Saldanha bay in the morning of the 6th June, with the wind at
+S.S.E. The 21st, at six in the morning, we got sight of St Helena, and
+about ten in the forenoon of the 22d, we anchored in Chappel Bay, half a
+mile from the shore, in twenty-six fathoms. The 25th, we changed to the
+valley leading to the lemon-trees, being the best in all the island for
+refreshments. Having remained seven days at this island, where we filled
+our water-casks, and got at least fifty goats and hogs, and above 4000
+lemons, we weighed anchor on the 29th, at nine a.m. The 16th of August
+we saw the high land of Pico, E.N.E. about 15 leagues off. The 15th
+September we got sight of the land's end of England; and on Tuesday the
+18th of that month we arrived in the Downs, having been absent on this
+voyage, four years, seven months, and fourteen days.
+
+
+SECTION XI.
+
+VOYAGE OF THE ANN ROYAL, FROM SURAT TO MOKHA, IN 1618.[288]
+
+
+The Ann Royal belonged to the fleet commanded by Martin Pring, of which
+an ample relation has been given in the foregoing section. The present
+section gives an account of a subordinate voyage, arising out of the
+former, and intended for settling a trade in the Red Sea. The Ann Royal
+was commanded by Captain Andrew Shilling, and this narrative is said by
+Purchas, to have been extracted from the journal of Edward Heynes, who
+appears to have been second merchant in the Ann.--E.
+
+[Footnote 288: Purch. Pilgr. I. 622.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Sir Thomas Roe, lord ambassador from his majesty to the Great Mogul,
+having given certain articles of instruction to Captain Andrew Shilling,
+commander of the Ann Royal, and Joseph Salbank, Edward Heynes, and
+Richard Barber, merchants in that ship, for establishing and conducting
+trade at Dabul or other places in the Red Sea, as they might see
+convenient, it was thought meet by Captain Martin Pring the general,
+Thomas Kerridge, and Thomas Rastell, on the 12th March, in a
+consultation on board the James Royal, that we should sail direct for
+the Red Sea, as the season was already too far gone for going to Dabul.
+
+Sailing therefore from the road of Swally, we got sight of Aden on the
+10th of April. The 13th, about seven in the morning, we passed the Bab,
+or straits of Bab-al-Mandub, so named from an island at the entrance, or
+mouth, of the Red Sea, and forming one side of the straits. About five
+in the evening we came in sight of Mokha; and as night was coming on, we
+cast anchor. Shortly after, a canoe came on board, sent by the governor
+to enquire who we were, and what were our intentions; and having given
+them an answer, they departed, having first begged a few biscuits. Next
+morning we weighed, and came again to anchor a league and half from the
+shore, when we saluted the town with nine guns. The water-bailey, or
+shahbander, brought off, as a present from the governor, a young
+bullock, two goats, with mangoes, limes, cucumbers, and water-melons. He
+welcomed us in the name of the governor, and desired us to send some
+persons on shore to inform the governor of the purpose of our arrival.
+About three in the afternoon, there came aboard a Jew born in Lisbon,
+together with an old renegado Venetian, who was in great favour with the
+governor, and in his name assured us of meeting with good usage to our
+content.
+
+The 15th, Ali Asgee, the chief scrivano, sent a present of goats and
+fruits, with a message of welcome, by two old men of good condition, who
+were sent by the governor to remain aboard in pledge for such of us as
+were to go on shore, with many protestations of good usage. Accordingly,
+Mr Salbank and I went ashore, accompanied by two linguists and an
+attendant, carrying as a present for the governor, six yards of stammel
+broad cloth, six yards of green, a fowling-piece and a looking-glass.
+Above a thousand people were on the shore expecting our arrival, and
+several officers were in waiting to conduct us to the governor. His
+house was large and handsome, built of brick and stone, having a fair
+gate of entrance with a porter's lodge, and several servants in waiting.
+From the gate, we went into a great court, whence a winding stair of
+thirty steps led to a square terrace, from which we were conducted into
+a large room, at one end of which was a great bow-window looking towards
+the sea. The governor sat in this window, and there were others on the
+sides of the room, which looked to the wharf or landing-place. The floor
+of this room was all covered with fine mats, and towards where the
+governor sat, with fine Turkey carpets and Persian felts. Where he sat,
+there lay a party-coloured sattin quilt, with several rich cushions of
+damask and others of velvet. He was dressed in a violet-coloured vest of
+sattin, under which were garments of fine India muslin or calico, having
+on his head a sattin cap, wreathed round by a white sash. He was
+attended by the chief scrivano, the principal officers of the customs,
+some Turks of importance, many Indian merchants, and about an hundred
+servants. He seemed about fifty years of age, and his name was Mahomet
+Aga.
+
+On our approach, and doing reverence, he bowed to us, and desired us to
+sit down, demanding who we were, and what was our business. We answered
+that we were Englishmen and merchants from London, who, by command of
+the ambassador of the king of England to the Great Mogul, with whom we
+had a league of peace and amity, had come to this place to treat for
+liberty of trade. That we were in friendship with the Grand Signior, and
+had free trade at Constantinople, Aleppo, and other places in the
+Turkish dominions, and hoped to enjoy the same here; for which purpose
+we were come to desire his and the pacha's phirmauns, giving us such
+privileges as we already had in other parts of the dominions of the
+Grand Signior, both for the present time and in future, as we meant to
+visit his port yearly with plenty of English and Indian commodities. We
+said likewise that we were commanded to say by the lord ambassador, that
+hearing there were sundry pirates, English, Dutch, French, Portuguese,
+Malabars and others, who infested the trade of this port, and
+principally that carried on by the Guzerats, who were our friends, we
+had his orders to free the seas of all such incumbrances, protecting all
+honest merchant ships and junks from injury. These, we said, were the
+true causes of our coming here.
+
+The governor then rose up and bid us welcome, applauding our declared
+purposes, but asked why we were so fearful as not to come on shore
+without pledges. We answered, that about six years before, some of our
+countrymen being here, were enticed on shore by fair promises of good
+usage, who were betrayed and imprisoned by the then governor, and
+several of them murdered. For these reasons, we were under the necessity
+of being careful of our safety. We said moreover, that he would shortly
+be certified we were exactly what we professed, by means of two junks of
+Guzerat, one of which had not come this year, but for the pass and
+promise of the ambassador that they were to be protected in the voyage
+home by our ship, against the enterprizes of any pirates who might be in
+these seas, as one had been last year by some of our ships, which came
+opportunely to their rescue, and conducted her safely to their port, and
+had sent the chief commanders to England, to be tried and punished for
+their wrongs against the friends of our sovereign.
+
+The governor acknowledged the friendly conduct of our nation in that
+affair, promising that we should live as safely on shore, and conduct
+our business with as much freedom and security, as in our own country,
+for which we should have his phirmauns, which he would procure to be
+confirmed by the pacha to our entire contentment. He said likewise that
+the former governor was a bad man, long since deposed, and now living at
+Constantinople in disgrace; and swore by his beard, and by Mahomet, that
+not a hair of our heads should be diminished, nor any wrong offered to
+us, as he should make proclamation of our liberties, that no one might
+pretend ignorance and do us harm or discourtesy. He desired us,
+therefore, to look out for a house for ourselves and our goods,
+commanding two of his chiauses to attend upon us, and recommended us to
+lodge with the Jew merchant till we could fit ourselves better, desiring
+him to assist us in all things.
+
+After giving many thanks for his kindness, and delivering the present as
+from our captain, we went, by the advice of the Jew, to visit the
+scrivano, who is likewise chief customer or shahbander; and as he was
+not at home, his servant received and entertained us with much civility.
+They conducted us into an handsome room, not much inferior in building
+and furniture to that of the governor, where we had left their master,
+who soon came home and welcomed us with much politeness, assuring us
+that all the governor had promised should be faithfully performed, as he
+himself should see all executed, and had also power to see us righted.
+We were informed that this man's power was as great in Mokha as that of
+the governor, who was directed by him in all matters of importance. This
+officer seemed a hearty old man. After making us drink coffee and
+sherbet, we took our leaves, and remained all night with the Jew.
+
+Next morning we spent an hour in viewing the town, and observing the
+countenances of the people towards us, whom we found gentle and
+courteous, especially the Banians and Guzerats, many of whom reside here
+as merchants, shopkeepers, and mechanics, having neatly-built shops and
+warehouses. Their market or bazar seemed well furnished with all manner
+of necessaries, among which were plenty of fruits, which are brought
+daily from the country. Most of the town is built of brick and stone,
+neatly plastered over with Paris plaster, some of the houses being two
+stories high, and all flat-roofed, with terraces on the top, on which in
+summer they construct lodges of canes and mats, in which they sleep and
+spend the first quarter of the day, having at that time a fresh breeze
+from the sea. All the rest of the day at that season is so hot that they
+can hardly endure even a shirt. Mokha lies quite level along the
+sea-shore, being about two miles from north to south, and contains many
+good-looking houses, with three principal mosques. The streets are kept
+clean, every person having to sweep and water before his door every
+morning and evening, so that they resemble sandy alleys for bowling,
+more than streets. No filth is allowed to be thrown into the streets,
+but must all be carried to an appointed place, where it is scoured out
+by the sea. In fine, I have never seen a sweeter, cleaner, or better
+ordered town any where.
+
+The wharf is situated between the governor's house and that of the
+scrivano, and is about twelve score square.[289] Near this, and
+adjoining the governor's house, there is a platform or fort, built of
+hewn stones, having battlements towards the sea, being about forty paces
+square, in which there are thirteen or fourteen pieces of ordnance of
+little value. Over against the landing-place two fair brass cannons are
+planted, above five feet long. At the other end, is the Alfandica, where
+there is a brass gun six feet long, carrying a large ball. Besides these
+defences, there is a stone house at the north end of the town, built
+like a sconce or redoubt, with a few pieces of ordnance; but they trust
+little in their ordnance, relying mostly on their soldiers, of whom they
+have always 200 in the town, and about 300 more in the country, within a
+day or two days march, who are all constantly in readiness for service.
+
+
+[Footnote 289: This is obscure, as it is not said whether it be 240
+feet, yards, or paces.--E.]
+
+The son of Cojah Nassan, the principal India merchant of the town, whom
+we waited upon at his house, promised us all kindness, and regaled us
+with tobacco and coffee, as is usual among these people. We went
+afterwards to wait upon the governor before we returned on board. He
+rose up at our entry to meet us, causing us to sit down by him, and
+repeated all the fair promises of free trade he had given the day
+before, declaring that he would deny us nothing that was reasonable. He
+then told us there was another governor shortly to succeed him, who was
+as his brother, and honester even than himself, who would faithfully
+perform every thing he had promised. At our request, the governor
+ordered the water-bailiff to furnish us at all times with boats, either
+for our conveyance, or to carry water to the ship. From the governor, we
+again went to visit the scrivano, who received us with much civility,
+promising to come aboard to visit our ship, and compliment our captain.
+After treating us with coffee, we took leave, and returned to the ship,
+when the pledges were dismissed, acknowledging the good treatment they
+had received, and were saluted on going ashore with five guns.
+
+On the 17th, the scrivano, with our two pledges, our Jew friend, and
+twenty other persons, came aboard, bringing a bullock, with bread,
+quinces, and other fruits, a great round cake or pasty, like puff-paste,
+in which were several fowls and chickens, well seasoned and baked, and
+most excellent eating. We also, with a large quince pye, and many crabs,
+together with sack and cordials, added our best welcome. The scrivano
+was so well pleased with his reception, that he insisted upon becoming
+the sworn brother of our captain, which was accordingly celebrated with
+a cup of sack; and, after much mirth, and having taken a view of our
+ship, he departed highly gratified.
+
+We were well supplied with water by several poor people of Mokha, who
+brought it off to the ship at a reasonable rate. Also, with the
+concurrence of the governor and scrivano, we made every junk that
+arrived anchor under our guns, and to ride in that situation till they
+discharged their cargo; which indeed the governor wished us to do,
+because some junks passed by that port to trade at others, to the injury
+of Mokha At six in the evening of the 21st of April, we had a violent
+storm of wind off the land, accompanied by much thunder and lightning,
+but no rain, which continued for half an hour, all the rest of the night
+being extremely hot. Although we rode above a league from the shore,
+this tempest brought great quantities of dust, and even sand on board.
+The 25th, we had a message from the scrivano, saying that the governor
+and he had received letters from the pacha at Sinan, commanding them to
+entertain us with all manner of kindness, and to give us free trade,
+with liberty to reside among them in all quietness and security.
+
+On the 27th the new governor arrived, when the ordnance of the town, and
+of our ship and the several junks in the road, all fired to welcome his
+arrival. He sent the former pledges on board to return thanks for our
+salute, accompanied by a present of plantains, limes, mangoes, melons,
+and bread, with one bullock, promising, in the name of the pacha, as
+free trade as our nation had in Constantinople. The pledges remained all
+night aboard, and went ashore with us next day, when we found the new
+and the old governors sitting together at the end of a large room, much
+in the same way as we had found the old one at our first arrival. The
+new governor was named Regib Aga, and was accompanied by several
+principal Turks, and by all the principal merchants from Surat, Diu,
+Dabul, Scindy, Calicut, and Cananore. On our approach, he and the other
+Turks only moved their bodies, but all the merchants rose up to salute
+us. He made us sit down beside him, and told us that the pacha had
+commanded him to give us satisfaction in all things; and that he knew
+besides, we were of a nation in friendship with the Grand Signior, and
+had free trade in Constantinople, Aleppo, and other parts of the Turkish
+empire, being a nation of a friendly and honest disposition, and we
+should therefore always find him disposed to give us free trade, and
+every other courtesy In reply, we told him we proposed, at our next
+coming to Mokha, if our reasonable requests of a free trade were
+granted, to settle a permanent factory at this place, and to come yearly
+to the port, with plenty of English and India goods, and should defend
+the trade against pirates. We even distantly hinted, that it was
+needless to deny us a free trade, being in a condition to force it if
+refused, and to hinder all others from coming hither, the fear of which
+had already caused some junks to pass by Mokha to Jidda, the port of
+Mecca, a town of great trade, 150 leagues farther up the Red Sea, and to
+other places.
+
+The new governor replied, that we should be made as welcome as in any
+place of our own country; and swore by God, and Mahomet, and by his own
+beard, that we should live as free from all injury as in our own land.
+We asked what security he would give us besides his word, when he said
+we should have his phirmaun under his _chop_, or seal, and would procure
+us the same from the pacha. With this we seemed satisfied, and gave him
+many thanks; and indeed they all seemed perfectly willing to give us
+every satisfaction, yet, in my opinion, not from good-will or justice,
+but from fear, as they knew we were able to intercept their whole trade.
+After some conversation about our ambassador, who now resided at
+Constantinople, and about the Portuguese and Spaniards, whom Rajib said
+were proud and faithless nations, we spoke of Sir Henry Middleton,
+asking the cause of their treacherous conduct to him and his people. He
+answered, that the then Vizier was a bloody, cruel, and ill-minded man,
+and made worse by the instigation of the Turks and Arabs of Mokha, who
+were enraged by the uncivil behaviour of our people, who made water at
+the gates of their mosques, forced their way into the houses after the
+citizens wives, and being daily drunk in the streets, would fight and
+quarrel with the people,[290] things hateful in their eyes. These were
+only in part the cause, for the covetousness of the governor, hoping to
+have got their ship and goods, was the main cause of that scandalous
+conduct, for which he was soon afterwards sent to Constantinople to
+answer for his crimes.
+
+[Footnote 290: Let English Christians read, blush, and amend--_Purch._]
+
+We dined that day with the scrivano, and hired a house of Hassan Aga,
+one of our pledges, at seventy dollars the monsoon, or yearly rent, it
+being all the same. The scrivano insisted to swear himself our friend on
+his Koran, yet denied the present governor to be the person who captured
+Sir Henry Middleton, which we afterwards found to be Turkish faith, or
+absolute falsehood. We now agreed to pay at the rate of three in the
+hundred, _ad valorem_, both inwards and outwards, though the scrivano
+swore that all others paid five; all money, with silver and gold in
+bullion, to pass free of duty. We remained this night with the scrivano
+to supper, and gave him a present.
+
+On the 29th of April we expected to have had our phirmaun publicly read
+before all the merchants, and proclaimed to the people; but most part of
+the day was spent in ceremony by the governor and other chiefs at the
+mosque, on account of the death of Sultan Achmet, the Grand signior,
+and the accession of his brother to the throne. They came riding past
+our house while we were sitting at a window which opened to the street,
+whence we made our obeisance to them, and they bowed in return. They
+were all in grand gala, having their horses richly caparisoned. At four
+in the afternoon we were sent for, but our linguist had got to a Jew
+house and was drunk with arrack, so we sent an apology, under pretence
+that Mr Salbank was indisposed, and promised attendance next day. On the
+31st, the governor sent for us, and made our welcome known to all the
+merchants, causing his scrivano draw up a phirmaun as full as we could
+have wished, which he signed with his chop or seal in the afternoon at
+the house of the principal scrivano, entirely according to what was
+before agreed upon, by which we were to pay three per cent. for all we
+landed, excepting money, and the same for all we took on board, except
+victuals. We got afterwards a similar phirmaun from Mahomet, the pacha
+of Sinan: and Rejib Aga gave us a particular safe conduct for Mr Salbank
+and the rest.[291]
+
+[Footnote 291: Copies, or translations rather, from the Arabic, are
+given in the Pilgrims of all these three phirmauns, which it was not
+thought necessary to insert.--E]
+
+It was now agreed among ourselves that Mr Salbank and I were to remain
+ashore to conduct the business of sales and purchases, while Mr Barber
+staid on board to prepare and send such goods as we required. The 5th of
+May we went to the scrivano to get leave to make arrack for the use of
+our sick men; because, since our linguist and several of our people had
+got drunk in the house of a Jew, we had complained, and procured an
+order prohibiting the Jews from selling them any, and the governor had
+even strictly enjoined the Jews and Turks not to sell any more arrack or
+wine in the town. At our request through the scrivano, the governor
+granted leave for a Jew, nominated for the purpose to brew arrack at our
+house, but forbid any to be made elsewhere.
+
+In the afternoon of the 8th, learning that the governor and principal
+men were sitting in form at the Alfandica, to receive the Surat captain
+who was then coming on shore, we went also to see the ceremonial of his
+reception. We found the governor at the upper end of a long room,
+sitting on a stone bench spread with carpets, having on the same bench
+with him various merchants and Turks of quality, to the number of about
+twenty. Opposite to him sat about as many in chairs, forming a lane down
+the room to a square platform raised three steps from the floor, railed
+in and matted, in which the scrivano and other officers of the customs
+sat on carpets. The governor bid us welcome, saying he had given orders
+to the chief broker to examine our goods and promote their sale. He then
+desired us to sit down, two merchants offering us their places, and
+called for coffee and tobacco to regale us.
+
+About half an hour after, the nokhada, or captain of the Surat ship,
+came ashore. His boat was curiously painted, having a tilt of red silk,
+with many streamers, and sails of fine white calico. He was rowed by
+twenty of his servants, all dressed in fine white calico, and he was
+accompanied by a wretched band of music, consisting of drums, waits, and
+bad trumpets, the noise from which was augmented by the discharge of
+guns from his own great junk and those belonging to the town. Attended
+by a few slaves, decked out in silks and coarse sattins, he entered the
+lone room where we were, when the governor rose and saluted him, and
+placed him next himself on the stone bench. Many compliments of welcome
+passed between the nokhada and the other merchants; but in the height of
+his pride he overlooked us, and we him accordingly. Yet we thought he
+might have shewn us more respect, considering that Captain Shilling had
+sent his long-boat and men to free his junk of 400 or 500 tons, when
+aground, and had entertained him with much civility aboard our ship.
+
+After some time spent in compliments, coffee was again brought in for
+all the company; after which six vests were produced, two of which were
+given to the Surat captain, and one each to his four principal
+merchants. When these were put on, and mutual _salams_ or reverences
+given, they again sat down, like so many painted images, dressed up in
+coats of coarse gold and silver velvet. We here observed one usual
+custom of this town, at the arrival of any junk, and the landing of her
+nokhada or captain, that free liberty is given to all the mariners and
+passengers to bring ashore as much goods as each man can carry on his
+back, without payment of any duty; accordingly, at this time, about 300
+persons belonging to this junk passed with their luggage to the
+captain's residence, unmolested.
+
+On the 9th, our landlord and the scrivano told us that three junks from
+Diu, and four Malabar vessels, were at Aden, whence they were afraid to
+proceed without our pass or licence. Accordingly we sent them a free
+pass, signed by our captain and three merchants. In this, after reciting
+that we had found good usage from the governor and merchants at Mokha,
+we engaged to give them all freedom to pass quietly, assuring them of
+kind usage, provided they were not enemies to our sovereign or his
+subjects. A more general pass was afterwards granted by us for the quiet
+and free departure of all junks and other vessels, with their cargoes,
+mariners, and passengers.
+
+On the 10th, the captain of the Dabul junk invited us to a banquet at
+his house, where we found the governor with about fifty principal
+persons, besides attendants, all of whom rose up to bid us welcome.
+Coffee, sherbet, and tobacco, were served round, with various fruits, as
+plums, apricots, and mangoes, and thinking these had been the feast, we
+were about to depart; but the governor and the Dabul captain desired us
+to remain, that we might _eat bread and salt with them_, which we did.
+The feast at last made its appearance, though late, being about sixty
+dishes of meats, baked, roasted, broiled, stewed, and boiled, but all
+mingled with rice and various kinds of sallads, in the fashion of India.
+
+Our cargo consisted mostly of bad wares, which had lain in India till
+they were nearly spoiled, and so hung long upon our hands; wherefore we
+importuned the governor to dispeed our sales, which he charged the
+broker to do with all expedition. We also had leave granted to come and
+go between the ship and the shore at our pleasure, without demanding
+leave, contrary to the usual custom of the port, the water bailiff being
+ordered to give us no molestation. On the 20th, it was noticed that the
+monsoon had changed. The 24th, the scrivano observed to us that our
+sailors, on coming ashore, were in the custom of selling _baftas_ and
+sword-blades in the bazar. He said the governor had promised liberty for
+the goods of these poor fellows to pass free of custom, and therefore
+they might freely bring them ashore for sale, but must sell them at our
+house, and not in the public bazar, which was a disgrace to us and our
+nation.
+
+On the 31st, our ship was in great danger of being burnt. Some one
+happened to be smoking on the spritsail yardarm, when the burning
+tobacco fell out unobserved into a fold of the sail, where it burnt
+through two or three breadths, and was long smelt before it could be
+found. After this, smoking was strictly prohibited, except in the
+cook-room or the captain's cabin. At this time, for the recovery of our
+sick men, the exploration of the coast, and procuring ballast instead
+of lead taken out of the ship for sale, it was concluded to send the
+ship over to Assab; on the African coast, on which occasion Mr Baffen,
+the master's mate, was sent before to sound and discover the passage.
+
+On the 10th of June we had a conference with the governor, and, among
+other discourse, he told us that he was governor of Aden when the
+Ascension was there, when he imprisoned the captain and Mr Joseph
+Salbank for two days, suspecting them to be freebooters, and not
+merchants, as he alleged. He said also that he was governor here at
+Mokha when Sir Henry Middleton was apprehended, but laid the whole blame
+of that transaction on the then pacha, whose servant he was, and who had
+given orders for that and much more, which he called God to witness was
+much contrary to his inclination, and declared that these things were
+past, and we had now nothing to fear. By this avowal, we had a clear
+evidence how far he and the scrivano were to be trusted. The governor
+sent for us again on the 13th, saying that he had acquainted the pacha
+with our purpose of sending to him for his phirmaun, and that he had
+promised a hearty welcome and full contentment, whether we went
+personally or sent a messenger; but the governor advised that one of us
+should go up to Sinan, for which purpose he would provide us with
+horses, camels, and attendants, and should write in our behalf to the
+pacha.
+
+The 19th a junk arrived from Jiddah, with many passengers from Mecca,
+bringing camblets, bad coral, amber beads, and much silver, to invest in
+spices and India cotton goods. She brought news of a ship, laden last
+year from Mokha for Grand Cairo, which had lost her monsoon, and was
+forced to wait till next year, at a place only a little way beyond
+Jiddah. By this ship, the governor had letters informing him that the
+Grand Signior had sent various state ornaments to the pacha of Sinan,
+whom he had confirmed in his government for seven years longer, and
+appointing himself to continue governor of Mokha for the like time, of
+which he seemed not a little proud.
+
+As I was constantly indisposed, it was thought fit that Mr Salbank
+should go up to Sinan to wait upon the pacha with a present, and to
+carry up some goods also with him for sale at that place. On this
+occasion, the scrivano offered him his own mule to ride upon, which he
+thankfully accepted. He was furnished with two camels, a cook, a
+horsekeeper, and three servants belonging to the governor, all of whose
+wages he agreed to pay at certain fixed rates, and was also accompanied
+by a linguist named Alberto. Taking leave of the governor, who gave him
+letters for the pacha, he departed from Mokha about six in the evening
+of the 23d June, the nights being the accustomed time of travelling.
+
+In the morning of the 23d, we had a letter from our captain; then at
+Assab, informing of his safe arrival there, and the good health of the
+people, and that he had procured ballast and provisions to his
+satisfaction. On the 26th, the governor sent me a horse by one of his
+servants, inviting me to accompany him to his banqueting house, about
+half a mile out of town, there to spend the day in mirth along with
+other merchants. About half an hour after, the chief scrivano came to
+accompany me, with whom I went, joining the governor by the way, and
+rode with him to the place. It was a fair house, in the middle of a
+grove of date trees, beside a large tank or pond, having several rooms
+handsomely fitted; up for sitting. After a little while, the governor
+and several others went into the tank to bathe, where they sported
+themselves for half an hour. Coffee was then handed round to the
+company, after which grapes, peaches, and both musk and water; melons,
+were brought in, together with blanched almonds and great quantities of
+raisins, as there were between fifty and sixty guests, besides,
+attendants; and always between whiles coffee, sherbet, and tobacco were
+handed round. Thus, and with indifferent music, we spent the forenoon.
+After prayers, the governor, went again into the tank, where he spent an
+hour sporting with his company. In the sequel, the time was spent in
+cards and chess, and in looking at various; jiggling tricks, till four
+in the evening. At this time above an hundred dishes were served up, all
+of good meat, but; cold, and ill dressed, each dish being sufficient to
+have satisfied four hungry men. He treated me with much kindness, and
+was earnest to have me go with him into the tank, but I excused myself;
+on account of my late indisposition. He then said, if at any time I was
+inclined to bathe, I might come to this place when I pleased, and he
+would give orders to the keeper to admit me and use me well.
+
+The 12th July, the Surat captain made a fine display of many artificial
+fire-works before the governor, it being then new moon. The governor
+sent for me to see them, and placed me in a chair beside himself,
+telling me he had letters that day from Sinan, informing him that the
+Pacha had granted a phirmaun for us before the arrival of Mr Salbank,
+but hearing of his coming, had delayed sending it, and had since granted
+another, according to his instructions, and had delivered it to Mr
+Salbank with his own hand.
+
+On the 13th there passed by the roads a junk of four or five hundred
+tons from Jiddah, bound for _Kitchine_, a day's sail within the entrance
+of the Red Sea, which I suppose is not far from Cape Guardafui, on the
+coast of Africa.[292] She is said to contain great sums in gold and
+silver, with much valuable merchandize. This ship comes yearly to Mokha
+at the beginning of the western monsoon, bringing myrrh, and boxes for
+_coho_ seeds, [coffee] and goes from hence to Jiddah or _Aliambo_, [Al
+Yambo] where she sells her coffee and the India goods procured at
+Kitchine; which last are brought thither by Portuguese barks from Diu
+and other places. Her outward lading consists of indigo, all manner of
+India cotton goods, gum-lac; and myrrh.[293] She is freighted by the
+Portuguese, and the governor of Mokha wished much we had met with her,
+which we had probably done, had not our ship been absent, which returned
+into the road of Mokha on the 21st. I went aboard, and was told that the
+king of Assab and his brother had been aboard, and were kindly
+entertained, in return for which he promised to supply them with
+abundance of beeves and goats; but that same evening, in consequence of
+a signal of fire, he and all his people fled into the mountains,
+pretending they were threatened by an attack from their enemies, and
+never even gave thanks for their entertainment.
+
+[Footnote 292: The only place resembling this name is Kissem, on the
+oceanic coast of Yemen, or Arabia Felix, nearly due N. from Cape
+Guardafui.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 293: This must refer to her homeward lading, called outward in
+the text in respect to India.--E.]
+
+Before day of the 27th July, Mr Salbank returned from Sinan in perfect
+health, and much satisfied with his phirmauns. He gave me an account of
+his whole journey, having been respectfully treated every where; always
+before entering any town, being met both by horse and foot to conduct
+him to the different governors, by whom he was kindly received. All his
+provisions were provided by their officers, but at his own expence; and
+the servant of the governor of Mokha caused him every where to be well
+used. He was met a mile from Sinan by forty or fifty Turks, well
+mounted, sent by the Pacha to escort him to a well-furnished house
+prepared for his reception. He was there kindly received and entertained
+by the xeriffe and the pacha's chief treasurer, who were both deputed to
+give him welcome in the name of the pacha. Two days afterwards, he had
+audience of the pacha, from whom he received courteous entertainment,
+receiving two phirmauns of the same tenor, one of which was much more
+ornamentally written than the other, and intended for being shown to the
+Grand Signior, if necessary.
+
+According to his report, the city of Sinan and its neighbourhood will
+give vent yearly for a good quantity of English cloth, as the weather
+there is cold for three quarters of the year; and even while he was
+there, though the height of summer, a person might well endure a furred
+gown. Besides, there is a court at that place to which belongs _forty_
+or _fifty_ thousand gallant Turks,[294] most of whom wore garments of
+high-priced Venetian cloth. Not far from thence there is a leskar, or
+camp, of 30,000 soldiers,[295] continually in the field against an Arab
+king in the adjoining mountains, not yet conquered; all of which
+soldiers are said to wear coats of quilted India chintzes, which are
+dear, and of little service to defend them from the cold of that region,
+which is there excessive. To this I may add the city or Teyes, near
+which there is a _leskar_ of thirty or forty thousand soldiers,
+commanded by a German renegado under the pacha of Sinan. That place,
+though only about five days journey from Mokha, is very cold, and much
+cloth is worn by the people about that place.
+
+[Footnote 294: This is probably a vast exaggeration, though in words at
+length in the Pilgrims; and we ought more likely to read _four_ or
+_five_ thousand Turks.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 295: A similar reduction to 3000 is probably needful for this
+army.--E.]
+
+On the 2d of August the governor sent a rich vest to our captain by the
+chief shabander, attended by drums and trumpets, his boat being decked
+out with flags and streamers. This was delivered with great ceremony,
+and reverently received. The Dabul nokhada, Melic Marvet, and Roswan,
+the nokhada of the Chaul ship, sent us letters of recommendation to
+their kings, on the 11th August, according to our desire, certifying the
+friendly usage they had experienced from us at Mokha, and our kind
+offer to protect them on the homeward voyage, from pirates, and
+entreating therefore for us freedom of trade and friendly usage in their
+dominions. The 14th, as we had formerly done to others, we gave our
+passes to two Malabar captains, Amet ben Mahomet of Cananore, under
+Sultan Ala Rajah, and Aba Beker of Calicut, under the Zamorin.
+
+This day there came a galley into the road from Cairo, having many Turks
+and Jews as passengers, bringing great store of dollars, chekins, coral,
+damask, sattin, camblet, opium, velvets, and taffetas. She had come down
+the whole length of the Red Sea in thirty days. I had a conference with
+the Jews, one of whom I had formerly known in Barbary. They reported
+that the brother of the former Grand Signior, on being made emperor, had
+imprisoned his two nephews, and put to death several of the grandees,
+and had otherwise given great offence to the great men at
+Constantinople, whereupon he was deposed and imprisoned, and his eldest
+nephew made emperor in his stead. They said likewise that an army of
+200,000 men was sent against the Persians, for the conquest of
+Gurgistan, adding various other particulars, some of which turned out
+true, and others false, like merchants news in general. Some Turks and
+Jews desired to have passage for themselves and goods in our ship to
+Surat; and it is likely, when they know us better, much profit may be
+made in this way, as their junks are usually pestered with rude people.
+
+Having sold and bartered our goods as well as we could have expected,
+considering our cargo, and dispatched all our business, we visited the
+governor, and desired to have his testimonials to the lord ambassador,
+which he gave us. We took leave of him on the 19th of August, and of the
+scrivano and other chief men of the town, from whom we received
+protestations of continued kindness on all future occasions. We went
+aboard that same day, proposing to sail the next day for India, taking
+the Surat junk under our convoy, according to our instructions.
+
+
+
+SECTION XII.
+
+JOURNAL OF A VOYAGE TO SURAT AND JASQUES, IN 1620.[296]
+
+
+"According to the title of this journal in the Pilgrims, the fleet which
+sailed on this voyage consisted of the London, of 800 tons, William
+Baffin master, on board of which was Captain Andrew Shilling, chief in
+command, or general; the Hart, of 500 tons, Richard Blithe master; the
+Roebuck, of 300 tons, Richard Swan master; and the Eagle, of 280 tons,
+Christopher Brown master. The account of the voyage in Purchas is said
+to consist of extracts from the journal written by Richard Swan, the
+master or captain of the Roebuck."--E.
+
+[Footnote 296: Purch. Pilgr. 1. 723.]
+
+Sec.1. _Voyage from England to Surat._
+
+We sailed from Tilbury-hope on the 26th of February, 1620, and anchored
+in Saldanha road [Table Bay, at the Cape of Good Hope] on 24th of June,
+where we found the Lion homewards-bound, and nine Dutch ships bound for
+Bantam, commanded by a gentleman named Nicolas van Baccum, who Was said
+to have studied seven years at Oxford. Next morning the Lion and the
+Dutch fleet departed, each their several way; and in the evening arrived
+the Schidam belonging to Deft, outward-bound, which being suspected by
+both admirals, the master was sent for, and producing Us commission,
+gave satisfaction. On the 3d of July we made a solemn proclamation of
+the right and title of his majesty King James to Saldania, and on the
+7th King James's mount was erected.[297]
+
+[Footnote 297: It thus appears that the first fortified station at the
+Cape of Good Hope was erected by the English, to whom that colony now
+belongs. It would surely be a better appellation for this important
+colony, which may be called the key of India, to restore its old name-of
+_Saldania_, than to continue its present awkward denomination, The
+Colony of the Cape of Good Hope.--E.]
+
+We sailed from the Cape of Good Hope on the 25th of July, and 26th of
+October we put into Dabul roads, where we remained till the 2d of
+November to refresh our men, and to provide the two ships bound for
+Persia. The 6th November, the Hart and Eagle took leave of us and the
+9th we anchored in Swally roads, where we found the Wappen van Zeland,
+of 1000 tons, which at our arrival took in her colours, and saluted the
+London with three guns, and the Roebuck with two. I was sent on shore,
+and brought off Mr Thomas Kerridge, the president of the factory at
+Surat, with Mr James, and Mr Hopkinson. Next day, in a consultation, it
+was determined to dispatch us speedily after the Hart and Eagle, as we
+had intelligence that four Portuguese galleons were waiting at Ormus, or
+in Jasques roads, to intercept them.
+
+Sec.2. _Voyage from Surat towards Jasques_.
+
+The 19th November, having dispatched our business at Swally with all
+expedition, we set sail towards Jasques. The 21st we chased a ship,
+which surrendered without resistance, being the Nostra Sennora de
+Merces, of 200 tons, bound from Muscat for Chaul, having on board
+forty-two Arabian horses, her principal loading, and for which trade she
+was built. The residue of her cargo consisted of dates and raisins. The
+name of her captain was Francisco de Mirando.
+
+The 5th December, when in latitude 24 deg. 55' N. we met the Hart and Eagle
+coming from Jasques for Surat, because not of sufficient strength to
+encounter the Portuguese force which was waiting for them with the
+intention of ruining our Persian trade. Thus happily rejoined to our
+former consorts, we shaped our course for Jasques to accomplish our
+purpose. The 8th, at the earnest desire of the Portuguese and Moors
+taken in the prize, we set them on shore, except some Moor seamen whom
+we detained in our service, and the Portuguese pilot, who entreated to
+stay, as he feared some hard usage from his own people. On the 12th,
+certain volunteers who had engaged to set fire to our prize, and run her
+aboard the Portuguese admiral, were put on board of her, and she was
+fitted as a fire-ship. The 15th we had sight of the east point of
+Jasques roads, having upon it a tomb or old square flat-roofed house,
+which bore W.N.W. by compass, twelve miles off. From Diu head to this
+point, I make the longitude, by the ordinary plain chart, 9 deg. 55' 36" W.
+but by Mercator's projection, 10 deg. 51'. From where we were, we could see
+the Portuguese men of war sent from Lisbon to oppose our trade with
+Persia, consisting of two Portuguese galleons, one of which was larger
+than the London, and two Dutch ships, one as large as the Hart, while
+the other was less than the Eagle. Their general was Don Ruy Frere de
+Andrado; the vice-admiral, Joam Boralio; and the two Dutch ships were
+commanded by Antonio Musquet and Baltazar de Chaves.[298]
+
+[Footnote 298: According to a special account of this and the
+succeeding sea-fight, appended to the present relation in Purchas, the
+Portuguese fleet on the present occasion, besides the four galleons,
+consisted of two gallions and ten frigates or armed barks, none of which
+are here mentioned except the four galleons.--E.]
+
+Sec.3. _Account of the first Fight with the Portuguese_.
+
+In the morning of the 16th December, our admiral and all the masters of
+our squadron went on board the prize, carrying two barrels of powder,
+some tar, and other combustible materials, to fit her up as a fire-ship,
+intending to lay her on board the Portuguese admiral athwart his hawse,
+that both might burn together. After she was fitted, we bore up for the
+Portuguese squadron, but it fell calm, and the current set us so near
+them, that they reached us with their shot. We kept under sail all
+night, and in the morning of the 17th, being to leeward of them in
+consequence of the land breeze, they weighed and made toward us, when we
+waited their approach, although they preserved the advantage of the
+weather-gage. The fight began about nine in the morning, and continued
+without intermission for nine hours. In the afternoon, a fine gentle
+sea-breeze sprung up from the westwards, which gave us the weather-gage;
+and the Portuguese admiral anchored, either of necessity to repair some
+defect about his rudder, or of policy to gain some expected advantage.
+His vice-admiral and the large Dutch ship anchored to the eastwards, and
+the lesser Dutch ship to leeward of them all, stopping his leaks. We
+were now in great hopes of putting our fire-ship to a good purpose; but
+being too soon fired and forsaken by those who had her in charge, she
+drove clear of them all, to their joy and our disgrace. Seeing them
+remain at anchor, and keeping to windward of them, we turned to and
+again close a-head of them as they rode at anchor, raking them as we
+passed, through and through, fore and aft, especially the admiral,
+receiving only in return their prow and bow-chases. By these, as I
+passed to the north, two unfortunate shots cut asunder the weather leech
+ropes of the Roebuck's foresail and fore-topsail, in the middle depth of
+both sails; owing to which we could not bring her into stays, and were
+forced, for repairing these sails, to bear down to leeward, between the
+enemy and the shore; in which course, the three great ships plied their
+whole broadsides against us, but with less hurt than I could have
+imagined, God be praised. Having compassed the three large ships, I
+luffed up to rejoin our squadron, which still held the advantage of the
+wind, and plied their great guns on the Portuguese like so many muskets.
+When I had got to windward of the smaller Dutch ship, which stood off as
+I did till he had our fire-ship directly between him and me, he turned
+tail, and steered right before the wind along shore to the eastwards,
+with all the sail he could carry. The other three now set sail to his
+rescue, and were now so tame, that as the Hart passed along their
+broadsides, she received only a few shots great and small from any of
+them, and from some none at all. The night now coming on, and our people
+being all wearied by the long continuance of the fight, we all desisted
+from any farther chase, and came to anchor in our usual road.
+
+In this fight, the London and Hart had very little harm in their hulls
+and tackling, and less, or rather none, in their men. The main-mast of
+the Eagle was hurt in five places, four of which were quite through, and
+one of her men lost his right arm. In the Roebuck, I had one man slain
+by a cannon ball striking his head. A piece of his skull and some
+splinters of the ball wounded one of my mates in the forehead, and
+destroyed his left eye; and two others of my men lost the use of their
+right hands. God be praised for our good fortune; for I never heard of
+so small loss in so long a fight as we now sustained. I cannot truly
+state the loss of the enemy: but, by the report of our merchants, their
+vice-admiral and another captain were slain, and thirty or forty men in
+the admiral's ship alone, the rest as yet unknown. As to their Moors,
+they do not count them among the num her of their men.
+
+In the morning of the 18th, the day after the action, we could see the
+Portuguese at anchor ten miles to the east of us, having the wind fair
+to have come down, but they did not. We then held a consultation,
+whether it were better for us to take the first of the sea breeze, which
+usually begins about noon, to stand towards them and try it out for the
+mastery, before they could receive supplies from Ormus, Muskat, or Goa,
+or else to make sail for Jasques roads, on purpose to land our goods and
+money, in case of the worst, these being the prize they sought to obtain
+and we to defend. Accordingly, the London got that night into Jasques
+road, but the rest could not get in before the 20th, by reason of
+contrary winds. On the 21st and 22d most of our goods were landed.
+
+
+Sec.4. _Second Sea Fight with the Portuguese_.
+
+On the 22d, seeing the Portuguese galleons open the road of Jasques, and
+supposing they might intend to come in with the sea breeze, we set sail
+and stood off for them. At first, they made a shew of giving us battle,
+but soon afterwards made off upon a tack; and till the 28th, they were
+either to windward, or so favourably placed at anchor, that we could not
+attempt to attack them without manifest disadvantage. During this time,
+they were joined by two or three frigates, or barks, from Ormus,
+bringing them a supply of men and ammunition. We made one attempt on
+Christmas day, but were forced back by a sudden flaw of wind; on which
+occasion, some blacks aboard of us, said the Portuguese had brought a
+witch from Ormus, to supply them with favourable winds.
+
+On Innocents day, 28th December, perceiving the drift of our Portuguese
+_Fabius cunclator_, to protract and avoid fighting, that by delays and
+the advantage of his frigates, he might hinder us from prosecuting your
+business in Persia, we determined to attempt closing with him. About one
+o'clock there sprung up a favourable east wind for our purpose, on which
+we immediately weighed and put every thing in order for battle. The
+London and Hart came to anchor within a cable's length and half of their
+broadsides, and so endured the main brunt of this second fight; for, no
+sooner were they at anchor, but it fell calm and so continued all day,
+insomuch that the Roebuck and Eagle, which had steered nearer to the
+shore, with the intention of coming to anchor, one on the bow of their
+admiral, and the other on the bow of their vice-admiral, got astern, and
+could not with all our diligence be of any service for a full half hour
+after the action began. At length we got within point-blank shot of
+them, and then were forced either to anchor or drive farther off with
+the current, as there was not a breath of wind.
+
+We now brought our broadsides to bear, and our whole squadron plied
+their ordnance upon them so fast, that had the knowledge of our men
+equalled their resolution, not one of them had escaped from us. Not
+willing to endure such hot entertainment, they cut their cables about
+three o'clock, and drove from us with the tide to the westwards, till
+out of our reach. Then came their frigates, which the day before had
+made a bravado along shore with drums, trumpets, flags, and streamers,
+and, now employed in a fitter task, towed them away all mangled and
+torn. Their admiral, in the very hottest of the fight, was under the
+necesity of giving his ship a heel to stop his leaks, his main-top-mast
+and the head of his main-mast having fallen overboard. The great Dutch
+ship had both his top-masts and part of his boltsprit shot away, and the
+smaller lost all his shrouds and top-masts. Their vice-admiral escaped
+best this day, having commonly one or other of their own ships between
+him and us.
+
+We kept them company all night, in hope of being able next morning to
+give them their passports; but having taken a survey of our shot, which
+we found scanty, and considering the importance of the voyage we still
+had to perform, we thought it best to give over the chase and return to
+Jasques; leaving them glad of our absence, their two great ships towing
+the two smaller. We have had no account of their loss in this action.
+All your worships ships remain serviceable, God be praised, and only
+five men slain outright in these two long and severe engagements. Our
+worthy admiral and kind commander, Captain Andrew Shilling, received a
+great and grievous wound by a cannon ball through his left shoulder,
+which he bore with such wonderful courage and patience, that we were in
+great hopes of his much-wished-for recovery: But he had likewise two of
+his uppermost ribs broken on the left side, and died on the 6th January,
+1621, shewing himself a resolute commander in the action, and an assured
+Christian in his death. We intended to have carried his body to Surat,
+to have there performed his funeral rites according to his great merit,
+and oar surgeons undertook to preserve his body by means of embalming
+and cere-cloth, but it became so noisome that we were forced to bury him
+at Jasques, which was done on the 7th, with all the solemnity and
+respect in our power.
+
+In this engagement, the London expended 1382 great shot of several
+sorts, the Hart 1024, the Roebuck 815, and the Eagle 800, in all 4021.
+In consequence of the death of our worthy admiral, the white box, No. I.
+was opened; and according to your worships appointment, Captain Richard
+Blithe succeeded to the supreme command of the London, I was removed
+into the Hart, Christopher Brown into the Roebuck, and Thomas Taylor was
+made master of the Eagle.[299]
+
+[Footnote 299: This account does not agree with an accompanying official
+letter, dated 13th January, 1621, giving a similar account of the two
+engagements, often in the very identical words used by Swan, in which
+the name of Thomas Taylor is omitted, instead of whom William Baffin is
+the last in the list of signatures; and the Christian name of Swan is
+made Robert instead of Richard.--E.]
+
+
+Sec.5. _Sequel of the Voyage_.
+
+The 14th January, 1621, having had forty-eight hours continual and
+excessive rain, which, or much wind, is usual at Jasques for three or
+four days at the full and change of the moon, and having finished our
+business at Jasques, we set sail on our return to Surat, where we
+arrived on the 1st February. Nothing material occurred on the passage,
+except that, on the 27th January, between Diu and the _sand-heads_, we
+surprised a small ship of war, called Nostra Senaora de Remedio, of 100
+tons, commanded by Francisco de Sylva, manned by thirty-five Portuguese
+and twenty-five Moors, sent out by the governor of Diu to protect their
+small merchant ships against the Malabar rovers. We dismissed the men
+and kept the ship for our use, calling her the Andrew, after our late
+excellent general. She had in her neither meat, money, nor commodities,
+and scarcely as many poor suits of clothes as there were backs.
+
+The 27th of February we began to take in our loading. The 5th of March,
+the, Eagle was sent down to keep guard over the junk belonging to the
+prince, and to hinder her from any farther loading, till they granted
+free passage for our carts with goods and provisions, which had been
+restrained for six or seven days by the vexatious procedure of the
+governor of Olpar, a town near Surat. By this means, no cotton wool was
+allowed to come down till our ships were fully laden. On the 16th of
+March, having notice that the Camla, from Agra, had been robbed by the
+Deccan army, we resolved to seek restitution upon the ships of the
+Deccan prince and his confederates in this transaction, as we intended
+wintering in the Red Sea. The 19th, the governor of Surat having given
+us satisfaction in regard to the carts, and a supply of powder and shot
+for our money, and promise under his hand for redress of other injuries,
+we dismissed the junk belonging to the prince from duress.
+
+From the 25th of March to the 6th of April, 1621, the winds have been
+S. and S.S.W. or W. and blowing so hard from noon till midnight, raising
+so great a surf on the shore, that no business could be done except on
+the last quarter of the ebb and first of the flood tide. We sailed on
+the 7th April. The 9th, the Eagle and a Dutch pinnace, called the
+Fortune, parted company, being consigned to Acheen and Bantam. The
+London, Hart, Roebuck, and Andrew, were intended for the Red Sea, if not
+too late.
+
+The 1st May, the Andrew and our boats surprised a Portuguese ship of 200
+tons called the St Antonio, which we named the May-flower. Her principal
+lading consisted of rice taken in at Barcelor, whence she had gone to
+Goa, and sailed from thence for Ormus and Muskat on the 8th of April. We
+learnt from this prize, that Ruy Frere de Andrada was busy in repairing
+his ships at Ormus, and that Don Emanuel de Azeredo had departed from
+Gor fifty days before for Ormus, to reinforce Andrada with two galleons,
+one of these being the same in which the viceroy was personally, when he
+engaged our fleet under Captain Downton. During a calm on the 7th, we
+captured a small frigate-built ship called the Jacinth, which we named
+the Primrose, which had come from Mozambique and was bound for Goa.
+Thence to the 13th, we had variable winds, with calms and much rain.
+Finding the May-flower delayed us much, and that our pilots were either
+ignorant or malicious, we resolved to trust to our own endeavours for
+finding an anchoring place, for our safe riding till the strength of the
+adverse monsoon was over, for which purpose we determined upon going to
+Macera.[300]
+
+[Footnote 300: From the latitude of this place, mentioned afterwards in
+the text, this seems to refer to Mazica, an island about sixty miles
+long and fifteen or twenty in breadth, a few miles from the oceanic
+coast of Arabia, in lat. 20 deg. 48' N. and long. 57 deg. 3O' E. from
+Greenwich.--E.]
+
+We descried land on the 2d June, and anchored in seventeen fathoms three
+miles offshore, in lat. 20 deg. 20' N. variation 17 deg. W. We found plenty of
+water in four or five pits, three quarters of a mile from the shore. I
+had forty tons from one well, which we rolled in hogsheads to the beach.
+The people were tractable, but we got little else besides water. A tuft
+of date trees by the watering place bore N.W. by W. from our anchorage,
+and the other end of the island N.E. 1/2 E. five leagues off. The 12th
+we sailed for the N.E. end of the island, and in the afternoon came to
+anchor in a fair bay, having seven fathoms on clean ground, a black oozy
+sand, the N.E. point bearing S. 1/2 a league off, the landing place
+W.S.W. two miles off, and the north part of the bay N. by W. four miles
+off. The latitude of this bay is 20 deg. 30' N. and the variation 17 deg.
+W.[301] In this bay you may ride safely in any depth between five and
+twelve fathoms. It is an excellently healthy place, cold and hungry,
+affording no refreshments except water, enough of which is to be had by
+digging pits; but it is ill to boat except at the usual landing place.
+This place afforded us no better supplies than the former, except that
+we got a few goats and lambs in exchange for canikens. Though good
+anchorage, this bay was much troubled by a tumbling rolling sea, yet we
+resolved to remain here with the Hart and Roebuck till the fury of the
+monsoon were past.
+
+[Footnote 301: The north end of Mazica is in lat. 21 deg. 12", and its south
+end in 20 deg. 15', both N.--E.]
+
+Having separated some time before from the London, our admiral, we sent
+on the 19th of June, one Abdelavie, an inhabitant of this island, as far
+as Zoar with letters in quest of the London. He returned on the 6th July
+with letters in answer, informing us that the London was at Zoar, seven
+leagues within Cape Rasalgat, having watered with difficulty at Teve,
+where their surgeon, Mr Simons, and the chaplain's servant, were
+surprised on shore by the Portuguese and Arabs. The Hart and Roebuck
+sailed from Macera, [Mazica,] on the 6th of August, and anchored in the
+evening of the 8th beside the admiral in the port of Zoar. This road
+differs from that in which we were in, being cairn, but the air was so
+hot as to take away our appetites.
+
+We sailed from Zoar on the 15th of August and returned to Swally roads.
+The 21st September, our whole fleet sailed from Swally, and on the 27th
+we took leave of the fleet bound for Jasques, consisting of the London,
+Jonas, Whale, Dolphin, Lion, Rose, Shilling, Richard, and Robert. The
+1st January, 1622, we were between Johanna and Mayotta, two of the
+Comoro islands. The 29th we anchored in Saldanha roads, [Table Bay,]
+having come thither from Surat in nine weeks and three days, blessed be
+God for our safe and speedy passage. We here watered, bathed in the
+river, caught fish, and buried our letters; purchasing three cows, one
+calf, and four sheep, all unsavoury meat.
+
+We sailed again on the 3d February, and anchored on the 19th at St
+Helena, where we found the Wappen and the Hollandia, two Dutch ships,
+the latter of which caught fire on the 22d, owing to her cloves, which
+had been taken in too green at Amboina. There was likewise a third small
+Dutch ship. They arrived eleven days before us, and it will take them at
+least ten days more to discharge and reload their damaged cloves. We
+sailed from St Helena on the 28th February, and anchored in the Downs on
+the 7th June, 1622.
+
+
+
+SECTION XIII.
+
+RELATION OF THE WAR OF ORMUS, AND THE TAKING OF THAT PLACE BY THE
+ENGLISH AND PERSIANS, IN 1622.[302]
+
+
+"In the Pilgrims of Purchas, vol. II. pp. 1785-1805, there is a long
+confused account of this business, contained in four several sections;
+to which many letters and certificates on the subject are subjoined.
+The _first_ is a brief historical memoir of the foundation of Ormus, from
+a chronicle in the Arabic, said to have been composed by _Pacha
+Turunxa_, perhaps Pacha Turun Shah, one of the kings of that petty
+sovereignty. The _second_ is a relation of the Ormus war, by Mr W.
+Pinder, who appears to have served under Andrew Shilling, during the
+preceding voyage, and sailed as master of the Andrew on this occasion.
+The _third_ is an account of the earlier part of this war of Ormus,
+written by T. Wilson, a surgeon serving in the expedition. The fourth is
+a more particular relation of the whole events of this expedition,
+extracted by Purchas from the journal of Mr Edward Monoxe, agent for the
+East Indian merchants trading in Persia. This last has been chosen, as
+best adapted to give a distinct view of the expedition, but some
+freedoms have been assumed with it, by assisting the narrative from the
+other documents in Purchas, already specified."--E.
+
+[Footnote 302: Purch. Pilgr. II. 179s.]
+
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+At a consultation held in Swally roads on the 14th November, 1621, a
+commission was given by Mr Thomas Rastell, president, and the rest of
+the council, of our factory at Surat, to Captains Richard Blithe and
+John Weddell, who were bound for Jasques, with five good ships and four
+pinnaces. The ships were the London, Jonas, Whale, Dolphin, and Lion,
+and the pinnaces the Shilling, Rose, Robert, and Richard. They were
+directed to sail with the earliest opportunity for Jasques, keeping
+together for their mutual defence against the enemy; and, as the
+Portuguese had disturbed the trade, and made sundry assaults on our
+ships, killing, maiming, and imprisoning our men, they were authorized
+to chase and capture any vessels belonging to the ports or subjects
+under the viceroy of Goa; as likewise, if they met any ships belonging
+to Dabul, Chaul, or other ports of the Deccan, or to the subjects of the
+Zamorin of Calicut, to arrest them, in replacement of goods robbed and
+spoiled by these powers, without embezzling any part of their cargoes,
+that restitution might be made, after due satisfaction rendered on their
+parts. A sixth part of the goods taken from the Portuguese were to be
+distributed as prize, the ship and the rest of the goods to remain to
+the company; and all the prisoners to be retained, that they might be
+exchanged for our countrymen, held by them in miserable bondage. They
+were directed to hasten their business and dispatch at Jasques, if
+possible within thirty days. And as our enemy under Ruy Frere de
+Andrada, was reinforced to six galleons, with other small vessels,
+waiting on the coast of Persia in all likelihood to attack our fleet,
+they were authorized, both defensively and offensively also, to use all
+opportunities or advantages against the Portuguese fleet, even in their
+own ports, if approved by a general council of war.
+
+We arrived in Costack roads on the 23d December, about twenty-seven
+leagues from Jasques, Ormus being in sight about ten leagues W.N.W. by a
+meridional compass. Our factors here informed us, that after our
+sea-fight in the former year, the Portuguese governor of Ormus had
+erected a fort on Kismis, an island within sight of Ormus, to which the
+Persians had laid siege for seven or eight months ineffectually, and had
+lost eight or nine thousand men in the siege; wherefore the Khan or
+prince of Shiras had, by his ministers, demanded the aid of our ships
+against the common enemy, the Portuguese, otherwise threatening to
+detain all the goods and money belonging to the company in Persia. In a
+consultation held on the 26th December on board the Jonas, in which were
+present, Captain Richard Blithe, John Weddell, Edward Monoxe, William
+Baffin, and many others, articles of agreement for giving our aid to the
+Persians against the Portuguese were drawn up, and being translated into
+the Persian language, were forwarded by the governor of the province of
+Mogustan to the Khan of Shiras, then on his way towards Mina, near the
+mouth of the Persian gulf.
+
+In this consultation, it was considered, as it was required of us by the
+Persians, that we should give them aid with our ships and people in this
+war, not only for the purpose of vanquishing the Portuguese navy, but
+for conquering the island and castle of Ormus; and as we were confident
+they would endeavour to force us into this service, by embargoing our
+goods, the governors having already refused to give us camels for their
+carriage from Mina to the ports: Wherefore, the foresaid proposition
+being maturely considered, together with the commission from the factors
+at Surat, warranting us to right ourselves for the great losses and
+hindrances suffered from the Portuguese, by interrupting our trade both
+in India and Persia, and their attack last year against the fleet under
+Captain Shilling; we therefore agreed to proffer the following articles
+to the Khan, for the public benefit and the securing a peaceable and
+profitable trade.
+
+_First_.--In case of conquering the island and castle of Ormus by the
+Persians with our aid, one half of the spoil and purchase of both to
+belong to the English, and the other half to the Persians.
+_Secondly_--The castle of Ormus shall be delivered up to the English,
+with all the ordnance, arms, and ammunition thereunto belonging; and the
+Persians to build another fortress there for themselves, at their own
+charges. _Thirdly_.--The customs of Ormus shall be equally divided
+between the English and the Persians, and the English shall be for ever
+free from customs. _Fourthly_.--All Christians made prisoners in this
+war shall be given up to the disposal of the English, and all Mahomedan
+prisoners to the Persians. _Fifthly_.--The Persians shall be at half the
+charges of the ships employed in this enterprize, in victuals, wages,
+wear-and-tear, and shall furnish all necessary powder and shot at their
+sole expence.
+
+These were the chief articles, besides which several others were agreed
+upon, to be proposed to the Khan. After his arrival at Mina, Mr Bell and
+Mr Monaxe were sent to wait upon him, on the 8th January, 1622, and were
+entertained at a sumptuous banquet. A great feast and triumph was also
+made, in consequence of intelligence that the Shah had conquered a
+great country in Arabia, with its capital Aweiza.[303] Next day, the
+Khan sent his vizier and two other principal officers to give an answer
+to our proposed articles. The _first_ was granted. For the _second_, it
+was substituted that the castle of Ormuz was to be occupied by both
+nations till the King's pleasure was known. The _third_ was granted,
+provided also, that the goods from India belonging to the king and the
+Khan were to pass free of duty. In regard to the _fourth_, reservation
+was made as to the two principal Portuguese captains, Ruy Frere, captain
+of Kismis Castle, and Simon de Mela, governor of Ormus, till the king's
+pleasure were known. Other articles were agreed upon; such as that no
+change was to be made in regard to religion, and the expence of military
+stores was to be divided. The Khan and Mr Bell signed these articles;
+and presently our goods were laden upon the Khan's own camels at free
+cost, which could not be procured before for any money.
+
+[Footnote 303: This assuredly alludes to Ahwas in Khosistan, to the N.W.
+of the lower Euphrates, opposite to Bussrah, which, though not in
+Arabia, is in its immediate neighbourhood, and principally inhabited by
+people of Arabian origin.--E.]
+
+The 10th of January we returned to Costack, and going on board,
+acquainted our commanders with the success of our mission. When the news
+of this agreement became known among the several ships companies, they
+consulted among themselves, and with one voice refused to take any share
+in the business. This broke out first in the London, in which ship fifty
+or sixty of her crew took part in refusing to have any thing to do with
+this warlike measure; but, after taking much pains to reconcile them to
+the propriety and necessity of joining with the Persians, Captain Blithe
+at last prevailed with them, and they promised to go with him wherever
+he chose to lead them. In a day or two, the flame of discontent and
+opposition spread among the other ships, alleging that it was no
+mercantile business, and that it might lead to a breach of the peace
+between our nation and Spain; but formal protests being taken against
+the crews, what with the fear of forfeiting their wages, and a promised
+gratification of a month's pay, they all at last yielded.
+
+We set sail for Ormus on the 19th of January, and anchored on the night
+of the 22d before the town, about two leagues from the castle, expecting
+that the enemy's armada would come out to fight us, consisting of five
+galleons, and some fifteen or twenty frigates, or armed barks; but they
+hauled in so near the castle, that we could not get nigh them. For which
+reason, and because our avowed enemy, Ruy Frere de Andrada, was in his
+newly-erected castle of Kismis, we sailed to that place, where we
+arrived the next day, and were just in time to save the lives of the
+Portuguese, who were no longer able to hold out against the Persians,
+and were willing rather to yield to us than them. After many meetings
+and treaties, they yielded up both themselves and their castle into our
+hands on the 1st February, it being concluded that the whole garrison
+was to depart with their private property to any place except Ormus,
+their commander only remaining in our hands as a pledge for the
+fulfilment of the capitulation. In this service two of our people were
+slain, one of whom was Mr Baffin.[304]
+
+[Footnote 304: Mr Baffin was a mathematician and mariner, to whom our
+northern and north-western voyages are much indebted.--_Purch_.
+
+Hence almost certainly the person to whom Baffin's bay, in the
+north-east of America, owes its name.--E.]
+
+There were about a thousand persons of all sorts in this castle, of whom
+the Portuguese and some Mahometans were sent away: But the Khan required
+certain Mahometans to be given up, who he pretended had revolted from
+him. They were accordingly delivered up, and, though he had formerly
+promised them mercy, he put them all to death. This castle had seventeen
+pieces of ordnance, one of which was a brass pedro, two iron
+demiculverins, four brass sackers, two iron minions, and six iron
+falcons.[305]
+
+[Footnote 305: On a former occasion, we have given an account of the
+various kinds of ordnance used about the 17th century. The _pedro_ was
+probably a gun of large calibre for throwing _stone_ bullets. In modern
+times, cannon are designated by the weights of their respective balls,
+in combination with their being long or short, land or sea, field or
+garrison, single or double fortified, iron or brass.--E.]
+
+Leaving some Englishmen to assist in keeping possession of this fortress
+along with the Persians, according to agreement, we set sail on the 4th
+February for Gambroon, on the mainland of Persia, within three leagues
+of Ormus, and directly opposite. Ruy Frere de Andrada, the late
+commander of Kismis, was sent off for Surat, in the Lion, accompanied by
+the Rose and Richard. The London, Jonas, Whale, and Dolphin, with the
+two prizes of 250 tons each, remained to transport the Persians in
+safety to Ormus. We were royally feasted at Gambroon by the Khan, who
+was much dissatisfied that Andrada and some of the Moors had not been
+delivered up to him, yet dissembled his discontent, in regard of his
+farther need for our ships in the enterprise against Ormus. After the
+feast, all the English gentlemen present were presented with vests, each
+according to his rank.
+
+On the 9th of February we set sail for Ormus, having about two hundred
+Persian boats of all sizes, besides two frigates or barks, and our
+ships, having in them about 2500 or 3000 Persian soldiers, of various
+sorts. We anchored that night about two leagues from the castle; and
+next forenoon all the Persians were landed on the island of Ormus, a
+little way from the town, to which they marched in a confused manner,
+penetrating as far as the Meidan, or market-place, without resistance.
+The market-place was barricadoed and defended for some time by the
+Portuguese with shot and pikes; but the Persians soon made way, with
+small loss, and drove the Portuguese before them into the castle, like
+so many sheep. One Persian only, who first entered, was slain by a pike,
+and he who slew him soon lost his head, his heels being too heavy to
+carry it away.
+
+On first entering the city, the Persian general, named Einam Culi Beg,
+placed captains with detachments of soldiers in various quarters,
+proclaiming that each officer was to be answerable for the safety of the
+quarter assigned to him, and threatening death to all who were found
+pillaging. Some infringing these orders were severely punished, some
+being hanged, others having their ears or noses cut off, and others
+bastinadoed even for trifles. Yet, in two or three days after, the shops
+and houses were forced open, and every man so wearied with carrying away
+plunder all day long, and sleeping so securely at night without any
+proper military precautions, that the Portuguese might easily have slain
+many, if they had ventured upon making a sally.
+
+On the night of our landing, I took possession of a very commodious
+house for a factory, which, for convenience and goodness of its rooms,
+exceeded, as I think, any factory belonging to the Honourable Company.
+But it proved too hot for me on the 13th, in the night, as one of the
+master's mates of the Whale, with others of his companions, after I was
+in bed, by carelessness of candles, while searching for plunder, set a
+room on fire in which were some goods given me in charge by the general.
+Fortunately the wind favoured us, so that the house was not consumed.
+Considering the strength of this city, and that every house was as it
+were a little castle, I was astonished the Portuguese should have
+abandoned it so soon. But it seems they were afraid of being intercepted
+by the Persians in their retreat to the castle, and dreaded that the
+Mahometan inhabitants might have betrayed them.
+
+The Persians began presently to throw up trenches, and daily approached
+nearer the castle, and, with our help, erected batteries for ordnance,
+and sconces or redoubts for securing their men, and protecting the
+trenches. With the cannon from our ships, we sore galled the Portuguese
+ships, forcing them to haul in as close as possible to the castle. On
+the 24th of February, four of our boats set fire to the San Pedro,
+formerly admiral of Andrada's fleet, which put all the rest in great
+danger, but the tide carried her out to sea, and her relics were towed
+on shore at Gambroon by the Arab and other country boats, some iron
+ordnance and shot being got out of her burnt carkass. The Khan was much
+rejoiced at this exploit.
+
+The Persians having succeeded in constructing a mine under one of the
+bastions, which was charged with upwards of forty barrels of powder, it
+was exploded on the 17th of March, by which a practicable breach was
+made in the salient angle of the bastion. The Persians made immediately
+a fierce assault, and Shah Culi Beg got possession of the bastion with
+200 of his bravest men, and maintained himself there for at least three
+hours; but the Portuguese made a brave defence, and with powder-pots,
+scalding lead, and other devices of fire, did much hurt to the
+assailants, burning, scalding, and slaying many of them, so that the
+Persians were at last driven out with considerable loss, most of them
+being wounded, scalded, or scorched. On the same day, the city was set
+on fire in several places, by the command of the Persian general, as was
+reported, because his Arab soldiers lurked among the houses, and could
+not be got forth to do any service in the siege.
+
+To the number of four or five thousand men, we were now cooped up in a
+barren island without shelter, producing nothing in itself except salt;
+and I know not by what mistaken policy the general had been induced to
+send away all the rice and other victuals, by which means we were
+reduced to depend upon the continent for a daily supply of provisions,
+and even water; so that, if a fleet of Portuguese frigates had come, as
+was expected, we must have been famished, as the country boats durst not
+have ventured to us from the main. The rain water in the open cisterns
+was daily wasted, and became brackish, no care being taken to fill the
+jars and private cisterns in almost every house, while it remained good.
+The Persians are quite ignorant in the art of war, for they entered the
+breach without fear, precaution, or means of establishing themselves;
+and they lost with shame what they might have defended with honour. I
+observed other defects in their management, even of the very sinews of
+war; and I am astonished that Shah Abbas, the wonder of our age, should
+have sent his army on this expedition so weakly provided with money,
+arms, ammunition, ships, and all other necessaries. I am even satisfied
+that all the money belonging to the khan was consumed in one month's pay
+to our ships, and I fear we shall have to wait for the rest till the
+plunder is converted into money. In regard to arms and ammunition, they
+have only small pieces, with bows and arrows, and swords, some of their
+chiefs having coats of mail. They were so scarce of powder, that after
+blowing their mine, they had hardly enough to supply the small arms for
+entering the breach, though furnished with twenty or twenty-five barrels
+from our ships. They had not a single scaling-ladder to assist their
+entry. Were we to forsake them, they would soon be completely at a
+stand, yet they have already broken conditions with us in several
+things, and I much fear, when all is done, we shall be paid with
+reversions, and what else they themselves please.
+
+Our ordnance so galled the Portuguese ships from the shore, that a
+galleon was sunk on the 19th of March, and two more on the 20th and 23d.
+The last come ship from Goa, which was their admiral, and one of the
+others, were, I think, sacrificed by the policy of the governor, that
+the garrison might have no means of escape, and might therefore defend
+themselves manfully to the last, in hopes of relief from Goa, though
+some thought they went down in consequence of injuries from sunken
+rocks, in hauling them so near the castle to get them out of the range
+of our battery.
+
+On the 27th, news was brought me that some of the Portuguese were come
+from the castle to treat of peace, upon which I repaired to the
+general's tent, where I could well perceive, by the countenances of our
+two English commanders, that I was by no means welcome: But, to requite
+them in their own coin, both they and I soon saw that none of us were
+acceptable to the Persians, for they long delayed bringing in the
+Portuguese messenger, in hopes we would have gone away, but at length,
+seeing we remained, he was brought in. The drift of his speech was to
+the following effect:--"His captain had sent him to kiss the hands of
+the general, and to ask the reason of making war upon the Portuguese,
+who were friends to the Persians, and thought it strange, considering
+their ancient league and friendship, that so great a war should be made
+only for one or two wells of water. Besides, that the governor and
+people of Ormus were not to blame for what had been done at Kismis by
+Ruy Frere de Andrada; yet were they willing, so far as might consist
+with the honour of their sovereign, to purchase peace, which they needed
+not to do either from fear or weakness, having above a thousand
+able-bodied men in the castle, with provisions and water for many
+months; besides which, they were in daily expectation of succours from
+Goa. He concluded by saying, that the Persians would find it a hard
+matter to win the castle, as they were resolved to defend themselves to
+the last man."
+
+The latter part of this speech, consisting of bravado, was by no means
+pleasing to the Persian general, who desired the messenger to declare
+the purpose of his coming. On which he said, the governor wished to know
+what the Persian general would have? To this the general answered, that
+he would have the castle; and with that answer the messenger was
+dismissed, without even the offer of a cup of wine, if I had not caused
+one to be given him. I suspect he brought a more substantial message,
+which was omitted on account of our presence, having been so instructed
+by Shah Culi Beg, in whose house he was at least for an hour before he
+was brought before the general. I fear therefore some sinister designs
+of the Persians, which a few days will discover.
+
+Our captains, by means of their interpreters, now moved their own
+affairs with the general, to which he gave no great heed, but desired
+that business might be deferred for some time; yet had he that very day
+earnestly entreated them to send him a quantity of powder from the
+ships, meaning that night to attempt blowing up the castle, for which
+the mines were all ready, and he wanted nothing but powder. They had
+accordingly sent him thirty-four barrels, for which forwardness I fear
+the Company at home will give them little thanks.
+
+The 28th March, understanding that two chief men of the Portuguese
+garrison were in Shah Culi Beg's house, where they had been four or five
+hours in conference with the Persian general, without sending to us,
+which increased our suspicions that the Persians meant to deal
+fraudulently with us; the two English commanders and I went together to
+the tent of the Persian general, and expressed our dislike of this
+underhand manner of proceeding. We stated, that we were partakers with
+them in this war, in which we had hazarded ourselves, our ships, and our
+goods, besides the hindrance we sustained by losing the monsoon, and
+that we ought to be equal participators in all treaties and proceedings,
+as well as in the war, and desired therefore to know what they had
+concluded, or meant to conclude, with the Portuguese. To this he
+answered, that nothing had been done, neither should any thing be
+concluded without acquainting us. This was a mere empty compliment,
+which all his actions belied. We must, however, be content to suffer all
+with patience: Yet, were it not for our merchants and woods in Persia,
+we could easily have remedied this affair, and have brought the
+Portuguese to such terms as we pleased. As matters stand, however, we
+are so tied down, we must be patient, and I fear things will turn out
+very ill, though they pretend all things shall be done to our
+contentment.
+
+About noon this day, seeing many Arabs in the Meidan armed with pikes
+and guns, whom I did not usually see so armed, I at length observed them
+ranged upon both sides of the market-place, and presently afterwards two
+Portuguese gentlemen passed, attended by six or eight pages and
+servants, one of whom carried an umbrella over their heads. They were
+accompanied by Shah Culi Beg, and other chief Persians, who conducted
+them to the house of Agariza of Dabul. Though uninvited, I went there
+also, and intruded into their company, where I found the Persian general
+and other chiefs, his assistants and counsellors. The general gave me a
+kind welcome, and made me sit down next himself, which I did not refuse,
+that the Portuguese might see we were in grace and favour. Having made
+my obeisance to the Persians, I then saluted the Portuguese officers,
+who returned the compliment, after which I had some general conversation
+with them, not pertaining to the great purpose in hand, of which I did
+not presume to speak, till the general gave me occasion, which was not
+until after a collation of _pilaw_, and other dishes, after the fashion
+of Persia.
+
+The collation being ended, the general asked them what was now their
+desire. They answered, that the captain of the castle had given them
+written instructions, but had desired them to make their proposals to
+the Khan himself, who now resided at Gombroon, if they might be
+permitted to wait upon him. To this the general answered, that he durst
+not allow them, unless the Khan were first made acquainted with their
+desire. I could plainly perceive that this proceeded only from affected
+delays on both sides, to give time for attaining their several purposes.
+The Portuguese then proceeded to complain, as formerly, against Ruy
+Frere, as if he durst have presumed to seize and fortify Kismis without
+orders from the king his master. They alleged also that the affair was
+in itself of no moment, being only a barren island with a well or two.
+To this the Persian general replied, it was of no matter what might be
+its value, but they had gone to war against the king of Persia and his
+subjects, for which their castle of Ormus must make satisfaction;
+wherefore, if they would surrender the castle without any more
+bloodshed, they should have good quarter and kind usage. The Portuguese
+said they had no commission to treat of any such matter, and so the
+conference ended, and they were dismissed.
+
+Notwithstanding of the Portuguese being refused leave to go to the Khan,
+they had licence that same night, and were sent over to treat with him
+at Gambroon. I could never know the certainty of the proposed treaty,
+but shall here insert what I heard reported on the subject. They
+proposed, in the first place, to the Khan, to raise the siege, and
+permit them to enjoy their city and castle of Ormus as formerly, in
+consideration of which, they offered to pay 200,000 tomans in hand, and
+the yearly rent they had formerly paid to the king of Ormus, from the
+revenue of the custom-house, which, as I have heard, was 140,000 rials
+of eight or Spanish dollars yearly. But some said, besides the 200,000
+tomans in hand, they offered as much yearly. [306] It was reported that
+the Khan demanded 500,000 tomans in hand, equal to L172,418:10:7
+sterling,[307] and an yearly rent of 200,000 tomans.
+
+[Footnote 306: A toman, by the data in the text immediately following,
+is about seven shillings; hence 200,000 tomans are equal to L70,000
+sterling.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 307: At the former computation, this sum is equal to L175,000;
+and the conversion in the text gives 6s. 11-3/4d, and a small fraction
+more for each toman, being very near 7s. which is more convenient.--E.]
+
+The 2d April, with the aid of the English, the Persians blew up two
+other mines, by which a fair and practicable breach was opened, through
+which the besiegers might have entered without much difficulty, yet was
+there no assault made. Having noticed this carefully, Captain Weddell
+went to the Persian general to learn his purposes; when, to excuse the
+backwardness of his people, he pretended that the breach was too
+difficult to be assaulted with any hope of success. Yet we knew the
+contrary, as an English youth, who was servant to the master of the
+Jonas, bolder than any of the Persians, had gone up the breach to the
+very top of the castle wall, and told us it was as easily ascendible as
+a pair of stairs, and broad enough for many men to go abreast. In
+representing this to the general, and asking what were his future plans
+of proceeding, he told us he would be ready with another mine in three
+days. This I believed to be true, for his mining is to procure gold, not
+to make breaches, unless breach of promise to us, which he can easily
+do; for of late they have not performed any of their engagements, yet
+will not this teach us to look to ourselves.
+
+The greatest hurt done by the Portuguese to the Persians in the assault
+on the castle, was by means of powder-pots, by which many of the
+assailants were scorched and severely burned. To guard against this, the
+Khan has now sent over many coats and jackets of leather, as not so
+liable to catch fire as their calico coats, quilted or stuffed with
+cotton wool. Yet, according to the English proverb, _The burnt child
+dreads the fire;_ notwithstanding their leathern coats, none of them are
+hardy enough to attempt this new breach, though much easier to enter
+than the former, any farther than to pillage certain bales of _bastas_
+and other stuffs which have fallen down from a barricade or breast-work,
+thrown up by the Portuguese for defending the top of the breach from the
+fire of the Persians.
+
+On the 5th of April the Persian general had news that 100,000 maunds of
+powder were arrived from Bahrein. On the 12th, a Portuguese came to the
+Persian general, having escaped from the castle, and gave accounts of
+the great wants and weaknesses of the garrison, insomuch, that six or
+eight died daily of the flux, chiefly owing to their having nothing to
+drink, but corrupted brackish water, of which even they have so little
+as to be put on short allowance, so that several have died of thirst.
+Their only food consists of rice and salt fish, both of which would
+require a good allowance of drink. Notwithstanding all this, the Persian
+general wastes his time in constructing new mines, of which he has no
+less than three in hand at this time, as if he proposed to blow up the
+wall all round about, before making any fresh assault. On the night of
+the 12th, one of our frigates or barks, which belonged to the London,
+being on guard alone, to prevent the escape of the Portuguese frigates,
+was clapped on board by two of these at once, but beat them both off. I
+know not what might be the loss of the Portuguese on this occasion, but
+two of our men were slain, and seven wounded; yet, had not our black
+rowers forsaken them, our people might easily have taken the assailants.
+
+The 14th, the Persians sprung another mine, by which a very assailable
+breach was made, yet no assault was attempted. On this occasion, the
+mine had to be sprung before it was quite ready, because the Portuguese
+had already come so near it with a counter mine, that the Persians were
+afraid of their mine being rendered useless before they could place
+their powder. Another deserter came from the castle on the 15th, who
+confirmed the report given by the former, and told us that the two
+frigates which had assailed ours had come from Muskat, with the son of
+the deceased Don Francisco de Sousa, late governor of the castle of
+Ormus, who had come on purpose to carry away his mother and other women
+from the castle.
+
+At this time, the Moors who had surrendered to us from the castle of
+Kismis, were delivered up to the Persian general, at his earnest
+request, and partly with their own consent, on promise of being pardoned
+for having served under the Portuguese against their own king and
+country, and of being provided for and employed in the siege of Ormus.
+He seemed to ratify this promise, both to them and us, by entertaining
+some of their chiefs in our presence, with much apparent courtesy, even
+giving fine new vests to five or six of the principal officers. Yet next
+morning he caused eighty of their heads to be cut off, and sent the five
+or six newly-vested chiefs to the Khan at Gambroon, to receive their
+final doom, which was soon settled, as they were sentenced to the same
+fate with their fellows. Mir Senadine, their chief captain, was executed
+by the hands of Shere Alli, governor of Mogustan, who had married his
+daughter, and yet put his father-in-law to death with as much
+willingness as if he had been his mortal enemy.
+
+The 17th of April, the Persians sprung another mine, closely adjoining
+their first. This did not produce the effect expected, as it burst out
+at the side, carrying part of the wall along with it, yet did little or
+no harm upwards, which was the point aimed at, on purpose to widen the
+former breach. Yet it encouraged the Persian general to try another
+assault, with at least 2000 soldiers. They ran up the breach with great
+resolution, into part of a bulwark or bastion, which they might easily
+have gained, had not their haste run their resolution out of breath;
+insomuch, that eight or ten Portuguese, assisted by a few blacks, armed
+only with rapiers, made them give ground and retire to the outer skirt
+of the bulwark, where there was not room for forty men to face the
+enemy. They here endeavoured, however, to entrench themselves; but,
+before they could establish a lodgement, the Portuguese plied two or
+three pieces of ordnance upon them from a flanking battery, which sent
+some scores of the Persians with news to their prophet _Mortus Alli_
+that more of his disciples would shortly be with them. This accordingly
+was the case, chiefly owing to their own ignorance and cowardice; for,
+had they not made a stand in that place, but rushed pell-mell along with
+the Portuguese into the castle, they might have carried it with less
+than half the loss they sustained that day to little purpose. Had I not
+been an eye-witness, I could hardly have believed the stupid ignorance
+of the Persian general on this occasion. He had two breaches, almost
+equally good, yet applied all his men to the assault of one only,
+instead of attempting both at one time. Besides, he had at least eighty
+or an hundred scaling-ladders, yet not one of them was brought near the
+castle walls. His soldiers hung clustering on the breach, like a swarm
+of bees, or a flock of sheep at a gap, none having the heart to enter,
+while the Portuguese gleaned away five or six at a shot, sometimes more,
+driving forwards their black soldiers to throw powder-pots among the
+Persians.
+
+The assault was renewed on the 18th, but with more harm to the Persians
+than the Portuguese. During the intervening night, two blacks made signs
+to the Persians on the top of the breach, that they wished to come over
+to them, and were drawn up with ropes. By these it was learned that the
+captain of the castle had been wounded in the head by a stone; that
+there were not above an hundred men in the garrison able to handle their
+arms: and that their water grew daily more scanty and worse in quality,
+by which the mortality continually increased. They reported also that
+great difference in opinion prevailed among the Portuguese, some wishing
+to endeavour to escape by sea, while others held it more honourable to
+sell their lives at a dear rate, by defending the castle to the last
+extremity, and proposed, when they could no longer hold out, to put all
+their women and treasure into a house and blow them up, that the
+Persians might neither enjoy their wealth nor abuse their wives; and,
+when this was done, to rush upon the Persians, and so end their days.
+
+In the evening of the 19th, the Persians made another effort to press
+forwards, and got possession of the entire bulwark, forcing the
+Portuguese to retire farther within the castle. In this conflict many of
+the Portuguese were wounded, and sore scalded with fire-pots, in the
+management of which the Persians had now become expert, though many of
+them had paid dearly for their instruction. In this conflict four
+Portuguese were slain, and their heads brought to the Persian general.
+In this art of cutting off heads, the Persians are particularly cunning,
+insomuch, that I do not think there is an executioner in all Germany
+that can excel them. No sooner does a Persian lay hold of an enemy, than
+off goes his head at one blow of his scymitar.[308] He then makes a hole
+in the ear or cheek with his dagger, by which he will sometimes bring
+three or four heads at once to his general. When it is proposed to send
+these heads taken in war to be seen by the king or the khan, they very
+adroitly flea off the skin of the head and face, which they stuff up
+with straw like a foot-ball, and so send them by whole sackfulls.[309]
+
+[Footnote 308: This, however, is to the praise of the Persians, as good
+swordsmen, on which account the Turks fear coming to hand blows with
+them.--_Purch_.]
+
+[Footnote 309: In Turkey they manage this barbarous trophy of success
+more conveniently, as the Grand Signior is satisfied with a display of
+the ears of his enemies preserved in salt.--E.]
+
+This night, one of the frigates that came from Muskat for Douna de
+Sousa, made her escape, no doubt very richly freighted. Her consort,
+which likewise attempted to get away, was chased in again. That which
+escaped, being hailed by the Arab boats that lay in wait to intercept
+the passage, got off by using the watch-word usual between the English
+and Arabs, _Ingres ingresses,_ which had not been once changed since the
+commencement of this enterprize, in which oversight both the Persians
+and English were highly blameable, as, by the continual use of this
+watch-word, it had come to the knowledge of the Portuguese, who thus
+used it to their great benefit.
+
+During the night of the 20th April, the other frigate made an effort to
+escape, but was intercepted and taken by the frigate and pinnace
+belonging to the London. This frigate was employed to carry away the
+Portuguese _almirante,_ named Luis de Brito, a kinsman to the viceroy of
+Goa, but the captain of the castle would not permit him to go away; and
+the men belonging to this frigate, being seven persons, fearing the
+capture of the castle and desirous to secure their own lives, stole away
+without leave.
+
+The 21st, the Persians made a display of making themselves masters of
+the castle by storm; but, while we expected to see them put this bold
+measure in execution, I discovered that they and the Portuguese were
+engaged in a parley. While I was preparing to wait on the Persian
+general, to enquire the cause of this sudden change of measures, I met a
+messenger from our English commanders, informing me that a boat had come
+off to our ships from the castle, bearing a flag of truce, and desiring
+my presence on board to see what was the purpose of this communication.
+On my getting on board the London, I found two Portuguese there, with
+the following letters from the captain of the castle, and the almirante:
+
+   "There hath been such ancient friendship between the
+   Portuguese and English nations, that, considering the present
+   war at this place, we ought to come to a mutual good
+   understanding. From what I see of the mines made by the
+   Persians, by which one of my bulwarks is already won, I am
+   of opinion these could not have been constructed without
+   your aid. Wherefore, I request you would be the means of
+   procuring peace for me with the Persians, if the same may
+   be done with your and their good pleasure, yet so that I may
+   not lose my credit, nor you fail to gain honour. Thus, not
+   else, our Lord keep you," &c.
+
+   _Simon de Mela Pereira_.
+
+   "This castle is so hard pressed, that the Persians demand
+   us to surrender by capitulation, but which we will not consent
+   to: For, when reduced to that necessity, we will call
+   upon your worships for that purpose, as it were not reasonable
+   for us to capitulate with the infidels when you are present.
+   We hold it more humane to deliver our innocent women,
+   and other unnecessary people, to the rigour of our own
+   weapons, than to the clemency of the Persians; and that you
+   might know this our purpose, I have written these lines to
+   accompany the letter from our captain. What else you may
+   wish to know, you may learn from the bearer of these letters,
+   to whom you may give the same credit as to myself. And so
+   God keep your worships," &c.
+
+   _Luis de Brito Dar_.
+
+   Dated 1st May, 1622.[310]
+
+Taking these letters into consideration, and commiserating their
+situation as Christians, it was resolved to give them a favourable
+answer, which was done accordingly in a letter to the Captain Simon de
+Mela, offering to become an intermedium for procuring them such
+conditions from the Persians as might save the lives of the Christians
+who still remained in the castle, which we had in our power to warrant,
+and were willing to shew them such farther courtesy as might tend to
+their relief, as far as we could see. We desired him therefore to put
+his demands in writing, and send them to us as soon as possible. A
+similar answer was written to the almirante, and with these the two
+messengers were sent back to the castle in one of our own boats. They
+soon returned with other letters from the captain and almirante, saying,
+"That they left themselves entirely in our hands, the necessity of their
+situation not allowing time for farther writing, lest the Persians might
+in the mean while break in and put them all to the sword."
+
+[Footnote 310: The 1st of May, _new style_, was the 21st April, _old
+style_; the difference being then ten days.--E.]
+
+Upon this we addressed ourselves to the Persian general, requesting him
+to grant a truce of two days to the distressed Portuguese, in which time
+we might treat with them for such conditions as might be at the same
+time beneficial for the Persians and ourselves. At length, a Persian
+officer and I were deputed to go into the castle to treat with the
+Portuguese, and they also desired our vice-admiral, Mr Woodcock, might
+accompany us. We all three went to the castle gate, but could not be
+allowed to enter; yet were met by Luis de Brito, the Portuguese
+almirante, and five or six other _cavalieros_, but did not see the
+captain, as the inferior officers and soldiers had mutinied against him,
+and detained him as a prisoner. Our whole conference, therefore, was
+with the almirante, who chiefly addressed himself to Captain Woodcock,
+our almirante, or vice-admiral.
+
+Mir Adul Hassan, and Pulot Beg, had been sent for to the ship, where
+some persons had embezzled a portion of treasure, as we now wished them
+to be present at the conference on the part of the Khan. They came
+accordingly to the English house, when one of them made a long speech,
+saying how kindly the Khan esteemed the services and assistance given by
+the English in this war, which he should never forget, nor allow to pass
+unrewarded. They next declared that the Khan intended to proceed, after
+the surrender of Ormus, to besiege both Muskat and Sware, and therefore
+that the Portuguese ought on no account to be allowed to go to either of
+these places. Lastly, they insinuated basely and dishonourably, that we
+should betray the Portuguese captain, and five or six more of his
+principal officers, into their hands, as this would tend greatly to the
+honour and satisfaction of the Khan, by enabling him to present them to
+Shah Abas. On hearing this vile and dishonourable proposal, I left the
+room, that my ears might not be contaminated by such abominable
+conditions; saying, at my departure, to these Persians, that I would not
+be guilty of consenting to so infamous a business for a whole houseful
+of gold.
+
+The Portuguese being reduced to such extremity as to be under the
+necessity of surrendering on any terms that might save their lives from
+the cruelty of the Persians, sent on the morning of the 23d, offering to
+put themselves into our hands, on condition that we furnished them with
+the means of being conveyed either to Muskat or India. We agreed to this
+proposal, on which Captain Blithe and I went as hostages into the
+castle, to see them safely set out; the Persian general promising that
+not one of his soldiers or men should enter the castle till all the
+Portuguese were gone out, and that only three of his people and three of
+ours should sit at the gate, to see that they did not carry away any
+thing of value. This the Persians watched so narrowly, that they most
+basely searched and abused the women. But the king of Ormus with his
+rich vizier, together with their women, treasure, and servants, were all
+conveyed over the breach in the wall, and not a single Englishman called
+or allowed to see what they carried out with them. Not only they, but
+all other Mahometans and Banyans, with their treasure and best things,
+were conveyed out of the castle in the same manner; whole bales of
+goods, with boxes and caskets full of treasure, to an unknown amount,
+were carried at the same time over the breaches. No sooner were the
+gates opened for letting out the Portuguese, but at least forty Persians
+got in and spread themselves about the castle, besides whom, some of the
+ruder sort among the English got in likewise, whose coming in I fear was
+the cause of the Persians doing the same, judging themselves as worthy
+of this liberty as our people.
+
+Before mid-day of the 24th, both the Persians and English began to
+pillage in a most shameful manner, so that I was both grieved and
+ashamed, yet could see no means of remedy. The Persians drove out the
+poor sick, wounded, and scorched Christians, who were not able to help
+themselves, so that my heart yearned with compassion to see their woeful
+plight. In the evening, the Khan of Shiras came over, as if in triumph,
+to view the castle and its great ordnance, of which there were near
+three hundred pieces,[311] part of which belonged to the galleons, and
+the rest to the castle. This evening, the commanders and I, wishing to
+retain possession of the church in which we had placed a quantity of
+plate and treasure, for its better security against being embezzled, our
+design was utterly denied by Pulot Beg, who told our commanders, in
+plain terms, that they might lie out of doors. Being justly incensed at
+this, we all three left the castle, the two captains going on board
+their ships, while I went to the city; but, as the tide was up, and I
+could not get a boat, I had to remain at the castle wall till near
+midnight. At this time there came about sixty Persians, by their own
+report, sent by the Khan to prevent the Arabs from conveying away any of
+the ordnance which lay by the shore, but I suspect their real object was
+to cut the throats of the poor Christians who lay at the shore, for want
+of boats to carry them on board; but fortunately they were protected by
+an English guard. Our chief business the whole of this day was to see
+the poor Portuguese sent safely out of the castle, most of them so
+weakened by divers maladies, but chiefly by famine, and many of them so
+noisome by their putrified wounds, and scorchings with gunpowder, that
+their pitiful cries and complaints might have moved pity in a heart of
+stone; yet such was the cruel disposition of the Persians, that they
+drove them out of the castle like so many dogs, stripping many of them
+even of their shirts.
+
+[Footnote 311: In a shorter relation of this siege, by Mr W. Pinder, the
+ordnance in the castle of Ormus are thus enumerated:--Fifty-three pieces
+mounted, of the following descriptions,--four brass cannons, six brass
+demi-cannons, sixteen brass cannons-pedro, nine brass culverins, two
+brass demi-culverins, three iron demi-culverins, ten brass basses, one
+iron minion, one iron culverin, one iron cannon-pedro. Besides
+ninety-two brass pieces not mounted, and seven brass bastels which they
+had landed from the ships that were sunk. In all, 152 pieces.--E.]
+
+On the evening of the 27th, we allowed the Portuguese to depart for Goa,
+to the number of 2500 persons, including men, women, and children, to
+whom we gave our two prizes, the Robert and Shilling, for their
+transport, with victuals and water necessary for the voyage, and a pass
+to free them from any molestation, in case they met with any of our
+ships at sea. Besides these, there were upwards of an hundred persons,
+so maimed or sick as to be incapable of being sent off at this time, for
+want of room in these two ships.
+
+The king of Ormus was very poor, and lived chiefly on a pension or
+allowance of 140,000 rees, allowed him by the king of Spain, with some
+small reserved petty customs. In rummaging among his papers, we found
+the copy of a letter from him to the king of Spain, complaining loudly
+of the injustice of the Portuguese, and charging them with the entire
+overthrow of the kingdom of Ormus.[312]
+
+[Footnote 312: Besides this letter, too long and uninteresting for
+insertion, there are several other letters and documents in the Pilgrims
+at this place, so much in the same predicament as to be here
+omitted.--E.]
+
+When we expected to have received 1200 tomans[313] from Pulot Beg, who
+was chief commissioner under the Khan of Shiras, as our pay for the time
+occupied in this enterprize, he contrived to make us a larger sum in
+their debt, under pretence of embezzling the plunder in the castle;
+while we, on the other hand, made counter demands of a much larger sum
+due to us from the Persians, in the same manner. At length, three months
+pay were allowed, and our other demands were shifted off, as he
+pretended to have no power to liquidate them without an order from the
+Khan. After business was ended, our misery began, occasioned by the
+insufferable heat of Ormus, and the disorders of our own people in
+drinking arrack, and other excesses no less injurious; through which
+such diseases arose among our people, that three-fourths of them were
+dangerously sick, and many died so suddenly, that the plague was feared
+to have got among them, although no symptoms of that dreadful malady as
+yet appeared. This extremity lasted for fourteen days, during which
+time, six or seven of our men died every day; but after this, it pleased
+God to stay the mortality, and the rest recovered. Ten pieces of
+ordnance belonging to the Portuguese, were taken into our ships, to
+replace that number of our own which had been broken or otherwise
+spoiled during the siege. Our fleet was detained till the 1st September,
+owing to the shifting of the monsoon, and waiting its return. Leaving
+Ormus on that day, we arrived in Swally roads on the 24th of that month,
+where the London, Jonas, and Lion, loaded for England, and sailed
+homewards bound on the 30th December. Before setting sail, news was
+brought of sinking three Portuguese carracks off the port of
+Masulipatam, by the English and Dutch in conjunction.
+
+[Footnote 313: This must be a gross error, as by the value of the toman
+formerly given, the sum in the text very little exceeds L400. Purchas
+mentions, in a side-note, that he had heard the English received L20,000
+for this service from the Persians.--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+In the Annals of the East India Company,[314] the English are said on
+this occasion to have received a proportion of the plunder acquired at
+Ormus, and a grant of the moiety of the customs at Gambroon, which
+place, in the sequel, became the principal station of their trade with
+Persia and other places in the Persian gulf. The treaty made in 1615 by
+Mr Connock was also renewed, and an additional phirmaund granted by the
+Sophi, allowing them to purchase whatever quantity of Persian silks they
+might think proper, in any part of his dominions, with the privilege of
+bringing their goods from Gambroon to Ispahan free of duties.
+
+[Footnote 314: Vol. I. p. 236. The historiographer makes, however, a
+small mistake, naming Ruy Frere de Andrada as chief commander of the
+Portuguese at Ormus, who only commanded in a subordinate fortress at
+Kismis.--E.]
+
+In consequence of the war of Ormus, a claim was set up in 1624 by the
+crown and the Duke of Buckingham, as lord high admiral of England, by
+which the Company was demanded to pay a proportion of the prize-money,
+which their ships were supposed to have obtained in the seas bordering
+on the countries within the limits of their exclusive charter. In order
+to substantiate these claims, Captains Weddell, Blithe, Clevenger,
+Beversham, and other officers of the Company's ships were examined, and
+particularly those who had been employed against Ormus. According to
+their statements, it appeared that the amount of this prize-money was
+calculated at L100,000 and 240,000 rials of eight, but without taking
+into view the charges and losses incurred by the Company on this
+occasion, and by their ships being called off from commercial
+engagements, to act as ships of war for the protection of their trade
+against the Portuguese, and in the assistance of the government of
+Persia, by which they had been compelled, either to engage in this war,
+or to relinquish a trade in which they had expended large sums, together
+with the loss of all their goods then in Persia. At last the Company was
+obliged to compound, by payment of L10,000 to the Duke of Buckingham in
+discharge of his claim, and received an order from the secretary of
+state, Sir Edward Conway, to pay a similar sum also to the crown.--E.
+
+
+
+
+SECTION XIV.
+
+
+ACCOUNT OF THE MASSACRE OF AMBOINA, IN 1623.[315]
+
+In the preceding sections of this chapter, the early commercial voyages
+of the English East India Company have been detailed; and it is now
+proposed to conclude this part of our arrangement, by a brief narrative
+of the unjustifiable conduct of the Dutch at Amboina, in cruelly
+torturing and executing several Englishmen and others on false pretences
+of a conspiracy, but the real purpose of which was to appropriate to
+themselves the entire trade of the spice islands, Amboina, Banda, and
+the Moluccas. They effectually succeeded in this nefarious attempt, and
+preserved that rich, but ill-got source of wealth, for almost two
+hundred years; till recently expelled from thence, and from every other
+commercial or colonial possession in Asia, Africa, and America. A just
+retribution for submitting to, or seconding rather, the revolutionary
+phrenzy of French democracy; for which they now deservedly suffer, under
+the iron sceptre of the modern Atilla.
+
+[Footnote 315: Purch. Pilgr. II. 1853. Harris, I. 877.]
+
+In giving a short narrative of this infamous transaction, besides the
+original account of Purchas, abridged from a more extended relation
+published at the time by the East India Company, advantage has been
+taken of the account given by Harris of the same event, which is fuller
+and better connected than that of Purchas, who most negligently garbled
+this story, under pretence of abbreviation. Harris appears evidently to
+have used the authorised narrative published by the Company, in drawing
+up his account of the event. There are other documents, relative to this
+tragical event, both in the Pilgrims of Purchas and the Collection by
+Harris, particularly the Dutch justificatory memorial, in which they
+endeavour to vindicate their conduct, and to shew that the English
+merited the lingering tortures and capital punishments to which they
+were condemned; to which is added a reply or refutation, published by
+order of the English Company. But the abridged narrative contained in
+this section seems quite sufficient on so disgusting a subject,
+especially so long after the events which it records.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+After the fruitless issue of two several treaties, for arranging the
+differences that had taken place in eastern India, between the English
+and Hollanders respecting the trade of the spice islands, the first at
+London in 1613, and the second at the Hague in 1616, a third negociation
+was entered into at London in 1619, by which a solemn compact was
+concluded upon for settling these disputes, and full and fair
+arrangement made for the future proceedings of the servants of both
+Companies in the Indies, as well in regard to their trade and commerce,
+as to other matters. Among other points, it was agreed, in consideration
+of the great losses the Dutch pretended to have sustained, both in men
+and expence, in conquering the trade of the isles, namely, the Moluccas,
+Banda, and Amboina, from the Spaniards and Portuguese, and in the
+erection of forts for securing the same, that the Hollanders were to
+enjoy two-third parts of that trade, and the English one-third; the
+expences of the forts and garrisons to be maintained by taxes and
+impositions, to be levied ratably on the merchandize. In consequence of
+this agreement, the English East India Company established certain
+factories, for managing their share of this trade, some at the Moluccas,
+some at Banda, and others at Amboina.
+
+The island of Amboina, near Ceram, is about forty leagues in circuit,
+and gives its name also to some other small adjacent isles. This island
+produces cloves, for the purpose of procuring which valuable spice, the
+English had five several factories, the head and rendezvous of all being
+at the town of Amboina, in which at the first, Mr George Muschamp was
+chief factor, who was succeeded by Mr Gabriel Towerson; having authority
+over the subordinate factories of Hitto and Larica on the same island,
+and at Loho and Cambello on a point of the neighbouring island of Ceram.
+On the island of Amboina and the point of Ceram, the Hollanders have
+four forts, the chief of all being at the town of Amboina, which is very
+strong, having four bastions or bulwarks, on each of which there are six
+great cannons, most of them brass. One side of this castle is washed by
+the sea, and the other is protected on the land side by a very deep
+ditch, four or five fathoms broad, always filled by the sea. The
+garrison of this castle consists of about 200 Dutch soldiers, and one
+company of free burghers; besides which there are three or four hundred
+_mardykers_, by which name the free natives are known, who reside in the
+town, and are always ready to serve in the castle at an hour's warning.
+There are likewise, for the most part, several good Dutch ships in the
+roads, both for the protection of this place by sea, and for the
+purposes of trade, as this is the central rendezvous of trade for the
+Banda islands, as well as for Amboina. At this place, the English
+factory was established in the town, under the protection of the castle,
+in a house of their own, where they lived as they thought in security,
+both in consideration of the ancient league of amity between the two
+nations, and in virtue of the firm compact of union, made by the late
+treaty of 1619, already mentioned.
+
+The English factory continued here for about two years, trading
+conjunctly with the Hollanders under the treaty. During this period
+there occurred several differences and debates between the servants of
+the two companies. The English complained that the Hollanders not only
+lavished much unnecessary charges, in buildings and other needless
+expences upon the forts and otherwise, but also paid the garrisons in
+victuals and Coromandel cloths, which they issued to the soldiers at
+three or four times the value which they cost, yet would not allow the
+English proportion of the charges to be advanced in like manner, but
+insisted always on their paying in ready money: Thus drawing from the
+English, who only were bound to contribute one-third part, more than
+two-thirds of the just and true charges. Upon this head there arose
+frequent disputes, and the complaints of the English were conveyed to
+Jacatra, now called Batavia, in Java, to the _council of defence_ of
+both nations, there residing. The members of that council not being able
+to agree upon these points of difference, the complaints were
+transmitted to Europe, to be settled between the two companies; or, in
+default of their agreement, by the king and the states general, pursuant
+to one of the articles of the before-mentioned treaty, providing against
+such contingencies. In the meantime, these, and other differences and
+discontents between the English and Dutch, daily continued and
+increased, till at length this knot, which all the tedious controversies
+at Amboina and Jacatra were unable to untie, was cut asunder by the
+sword, in the following manner.
+
+About the 11th February, 1622, _old style_, or 21st of that month, 1623,
+_new style_, a Japanese soldier belonging to the Dutch garrison of
+Amboina castle, walking one night upon the wall, fell into conversation
+with a centinel, in the course of which he asked several questions
+respecting the strength of the fortifications and the number of its
+garrison. It is to be observed, that most of the Japanese in Amboina
+were actually soldiers in the Dutch service, yet not in these trusty
+bands which always lodged within the castle, but only occasionally
+called in from the town to assist in its defence. This Japanese, in
+consequence of his conference with the centinel, was soon after
+apprehended on suspicion of treason, and put to the torture by the
+Dutch, to extort confession. While suffering under the torture, he was
+induced to confess, that he and some others of his countrymen had
+plotted to take possession of the castle. Several other Japanese were
+consequently apprehended, and examined by torture; as also a Portuguese,
+who was guardian or superintendent of the slaves belonging to the Dutch.
+While these examinations were going on, which continued during three or
+four days, some of the English, then resident at Amboina, were several
+times in the castle on business, saw the prisoners, and heard of the
+tortures they had undergone, and of the crime laid to their charge; yet
+during all this time, never once suspected that this affair had any
+connection with themselves, being unconscious of any evil intentions,
+and having held no conversation with the prisoners.
+
+At this time, one Abel Price, surgeon to the English factory at Amboina,
+was a prisoner in the castle, for having offered or attempted, in a fit
+of drunkenness, to set a Dutchman's house on fire. The Dutch shewed this
+man some of the Japanese whom they had tortured, telling him they had
+confessed that the English were in confederacy with them, in the plot
+for seizing the castle, and threatened him with similar or worse
+tortures, if he did not confess the same; and accordingly, on the 15th
+February, O.S. they gave him the torture, and soon made him confess
+whatever they were pleased to direct. That same morning, about nine
+o'clock, they sent for Captain Gabriel Towerson, and the other
+Englishmen belonging to the factory at Amboina, to come to speak with
+the governor of the castle; on which they all went, except one, who was
+left to take care of the house. On their arrival, the governor told
+Captain Towerson, that he and others of his nation were accused of a
+conspiracy to surprise the castle, and must therefore remain prisoners,
+until tried for the same. The Dutch, immediately after this, took into
+custody the person who had been left in charge of the English factory,
+sequestrated all the merchandize belonging to the English Company, under
+an inventory, and seized all the chests, boxes, books, writings, and
+other things in the English house.
+
+Captain Towerson was committed prisoner to his own chamber in the
+English house, under a guard of Dutch soldiers. Emanuel Thomson was
+imprisoned in the castle. All the rest, namely, John Beaumont, Edward
+Collins, William Webber, Ephraim Ramsay, Timothy Johnson, John Fardo,
+and Robert Brown, were distributed among the Dutch ships then in the
+harbour, and secured in irons. The same day, the governor sent to the
+two other factories in the same island, Hitto and Larica, to apprehend
+the rest of the English residents, who were all brought prisoners to
+Amboina on the 16th; Samuel Colson, John Clark, and George Sharrock,
+from the former, and Edward Collins,[2] William Webber,[2] and John
+Sadler, from the latter. On the same day, John Pocol, John Wetheral,
+Thomas Ladbrook, were apprehended at Cambello, and John Beaumont,[2]
+William Griggs, and Ephraim Ramsay,[316] at Loho; and were all brought
+in irons to Amboina on the 20th of February.
+
+[Footnote 316: These four persons are already named, as apprehended at
+Amboina.--E.]
+
+On the 15th of February, the governor and fiscal began to examine the
+prisoners. John Beaumont and Timothy Johnson were first brought to the
+castle, John Beaumont being left in a hall under a guard, while Johnson
+was conducted into another room. Beaumont soon after heard him cry out
+very pitifully, then become quiet for a while, and afterwards cried out
+aloud. Abel Price, the surgeon, who was first questioned and put to the
+torture, was brought in to confront and accuse him; but as Johnson
+refused to confess any thing laid to his charge, Price was soon taken
+away, and Johnson again put to the question, when Beaumont heard him
+repeatedly roar under the torture. At the end of an hour, Johnson was
+brought out into the hall, weeping and lamenting, all cut and cruelly
+burnt in many parts of his body, and so laid aside in a corner of the
+hall, having a soldier to watch him, with strict injunctions not to
+allow him to speak to any one.
+
+Emanuel Thomson was next brought in for examination, not in the same
+room where Johnson had been, but in one farther from the hall; yet
+Beaumont, who still remained in the hall, heard him often roar out most
+lamentably. After half an hour spent in torturing him, he was led to
+another place, but not through the hall where Beaumont was. Beaumont was
+then called in for examination, and asked many questions concerning the
+alleged conspiracy, all knowledge of which he denied with the most
+solemn oaths. He was then made fast on purpose to be tortured, having a
+cloth fastened about his neck, while two men stood ready with jars of
+water to pour on his head: But the governor ordered him to be set loose
+again, saying he would spare him for a day or two, being an old man.
+
+Next day, being the 16th, William Webber, Edward Collins, Ephraim
+Ramsay, and Robert Brown, were brought on shore for examination; and at
+the same time Samuel Colson, William Griggs, John Clark, George
+Sharrock, and John Sadler, from Hitto and Larica, were brought into the
+hall. Robert Brown, a tailor, was first called in, and being subjected
+to torture by water, confessed all in order, as interrogated by the
+fiscal. Edward Collins was next called in, and told that those who were
+formerly examined had accused him as accessory to the conspiracy for
+taking the castle. Denying all knowledge of or participation in any such
+plot, with great oaths, his hands and feet were made fast to the rack,
+and a cloth bound about his throat, ready to administer the water
+torture, upon which he entreated to be let down, saying that he would
+confess all. On being loosed, he again protested his entire innocence
+and ignorance of every thing laid to his charge; yet, as he knew they
+would make him confess any thing they pleased by means of torture,
+however false, he said they would do him a great favour by informing him
+what they wished he should say, which he would speak as they desired, to
+avoid the torture. The fiscal said he mocked them, ordered him to be
+fastened up again, and to receive the water torture. After suffering
+this for some time, he desired to be let down again to make his
+confession, devising as well as he could what he should say.
+Accordingly, he said that he, with Thomson, Johnson, Brown, and Fardo,
+had plotted about ten weeks before, to surprise the castle with the aid
+of the Japanese.
+
+While making this contrived confession, he was interrupted by the
+fiscal, who asked whether Captain Towerson were privy to this
+conspiracy. He protested that Towerson knew nothing of the matter. "You
+lie," said the fiscal, "did not he call you all before him, telling you
+that the daily abuses of the Dutch had instigated him to devise a plot,
+and that he wanted nothing but your consent and secrecy?" Then a Dutch
+merchant who was present, named Jan Igost, asked him, if they had not
+all been sworn to secrecy on the Bible? Collins declared with great
+oaths, that he knew nothing of any such matter. He was again ordered to
+be seized up again to the torture, on which he said that all was true
+they had said. Then the fiscal asked, if the English in the other
+factories were consenting to this plot? To which he answered, no. The
+fiscal then next asked, if the English president at Jacatra, or Mr
+Weldon the agent at Banda, were engaged in this plot, or privy to its
+contrivance? He again answered, no. The fiscal next enquired by what
+means the Japanese were to have executed their purpose? And, when
+Collins stood amazed, and devising some probable fictions to satisfy
+them, the fiscal helped him out, saying, "Were not two Japanese to have
+gone to each bulwark, and two to the door of the governor's chamber, to
+have killed him on coming out to enquire into the disturbance you were
+to have raised without?" Upon this, a person who stood by, desired the
+fiscal not to put words into the mouth of the witness, but to allow him
+to speak for himself. After this reproof, without waiting any answer to
+his former question, the fiscal asked what reward was to have been given
+the Japanese for their services? Collins answered 1000 dollars each. He
+was then asked, when this plot was to have been carried into execution?
+But, although he made no answer to this question, not knowing on the
+sudden what to say, he was dismissed, glad to get away from the torture,
+yet certainly believing they would put him to death for his confession.
+
+Samuel Colson was next brought in; and, for fear of the tortures that
+Collins had endured, whom he saw brought out in a pitiable condition,
+with his eyes almost starting out of their sockets, he chose rather to
+confess all they asked, and so was quickly dismissed, yet came out
+weeping and lamenting, and protesting his innocence. John Clark was then
+taken in, and tortured with fire and water for two hours, in the same
+manner as had been done with Johnson and Thomson.[317]
+
+[Footnote 317: The minute description of these tortures, in Purchas, and
+copied in Harris, are disgusting; insomuch, that Purchas exclaims at one
+place, _I have no heart to proceed_. They are here therefore
+omitted,--E.]
+
+Finding that all their cruelties could not force him to any consistent
+confession of himself, they helped him along to particular circumstances
+of their own contrivance, by leading questions. Thus wearied out and
+overpowered, by terror of the tortures being renewed, he answered,
+_yes_, to whatever they asked, by which means they trumped up a body of
+evidence to this effect:--"That Captain Towerson, on new-year's-day
+last, had sworn all the English at Amboina to be secret and aiding in a
+plot he had devised for surprising the castle, by the aid of the
+Japanese, putting the governor and all the Dutch to death."
+
+On the 17th, William Griggs and John Fardo, with some Japanese, were
+brought to examination. The Japanese were first cruelly tortured to
+accuse Griggs, which at last they did; and Griggs, to avoid torture,
+confessed whatever the fiscal was pleased to demand. The same was next
+done with Fardo and other Japanese. Fardo endured the torture for some
+time, but at length confessed all they pleased to ask. That same day,
+John Beaumont was brought a second time to the fiscal's chamber, when
+one Captain Newport, the son of a Dutchman, but born and educated in
+England, acted as interpreter. Griggs was also brought in to accuse
+Beaumont of being present at the consultation for surprising the castle.
+Beaumont denied all, with great earnestness, and many oaths; but, on
+enduring the torture, was constrained to confess every thing laid to his
+charge.
+
+George Sharrock was then brought in and examined. He fell on his knees,
+protesting his innocence, telling them he was at Hitto on
+new-year's-day, when the pretended consultation was held, and had not
+been at Amboina since the preceding November, as was well known to
+several Dutchmen who resided at Hitto along with him. Being ordered to
+the rack, he told them he had often heard John Clark say that the Dutch
+had done insufferable wrongs to the English, and was resolved to be
+revenged on them; for which purpose he had proposed to Captain Towerson
+to allow him to go to Macassar, to consult with the Spaniards about
+sending some gallies to plunder the small factories of Amboina and Ceram
+in the absence of the ships. Being asked what Captain Towerson had said
+to all this? he answered, that Towerson was very much offended with
+Clark for the proposal, and could never abide him since. The fiscal then
+called him a rogue and liar, saying, that he wandered idly from the
+matter, and must go to the torture. He craved favour again, and began
+another tale, saying, that John Clark had told him at Hitto of a plot to
+surprise the castle of Amboina, with the participation of Towerson. He
+was then asked, when this consultation was held? which he said was in
+November preceding. The fiscal said that could not be, for it was on
+new-year's-day. The prisoner urged, as before, that he had not been in
+Amboina since last November, till now that he was brought thither in
+custody. "Why, then," said the fiscal, "have you belied yourself?" To
+this he resolutely answered, that all he had confessed respecting a
+conspiracy was false, and merely feigned to avoid torment.
+
+Sharrock was then remanded to prison, but was brought up again next day,
+when a formal confession, in writing, of his last-mentioned conference
+with Clark, respecting the plot for surprising the castle of Amboina,
+was read over to him, after which, the fiscal asked, if it were all
+true. To this he answered, that every word of it was false, and that he
+had confessed it solely to avoid torture. The fiscal and the rest then
+said, in rage, that he was a false liar, for it was all true, and had
+been spoken from his own mouth, and therefore he must sign it, which he
+did accordingly. Having done this, he broke out into a great passion,
+charging them as guilty of the innocent blood of himself and the rest,
+which they should have to answer for at the judgment-seat of God. He
+even grappled with the fiscal, and would have hindered him from carrying
+in the confession to the governor, but was instantly laid hold of, and
+carried away to prison.
+
+William Webber was next examined; being told by the fiscal that Clarke
+accused him of having sworn to Towerson's plot on new-year's-day, with
+all the other circumstances already mentioned; Webber strenuously denied
+all this, declaring, that he was then at Larika, and could not possibly
+be present in Amboina on that day. But, being put to the torture, he was
+forced to confess having been present at the consultation, with all the
+other circumstances in regular order, as asked. He also told of having a
+letter from Clark, in which was a postscript excusing his brief writing
+at this time, as there was then a great business in hand. But a Dutch
+merchant, named Kinder, who was present, told the governor that Webber
+and he were together making merry at Larika, on new-year's-day, the time
+of this pretended consultation. The governor then went away, but the
+fiscal held on with him respecting the letter and postscript, promising
+to save his life if he would produce these.
+
+Captain Towerson was next brought in for examination, and was shewn what
+the others had confessed concerning him. He deeply professed his
+innocence, on which Colson was brought in to confront him, being assured
+he should be again tortured unless he made good his former confession
+against Towerson. On this he repeated what he had said before, and was
+then sent away. Griggs and Fardo were next brought in, and desired to
+justify to his face what they had before confessed. Captain Towerson
+seriously admonished them, as they should answer at the day of judgment,
+to speak nothing but the truth. They then fell upon their knees,
+beseeching him to forgive them for God's sake, and declared openly that
+all they had formerly said was utterly false, and spoken only to avoid
+the torture. The fiscal then commanded them to be led to the torture,
+which they were unable to endure, and again affirmed their former
+extorted confessions to be true. When Colson was required to subscribe
+this confession, he asked the fiscal, upon whose head he thought the sin
+would rest, whether on his who was constrained to confess falsely, or
+upon the constrainer? After a pause on this home-question, the fiscal
+went out to speak with the governor, and returned again shortly,
+commanding him to subscribe. Colson did so, yet with this remark,--"You
+force me to accuse myself and others of that which is as false as God is
+true; for I call God to witness that I and they are as innocent as the
+child unborn."
+
+Having thus examined all the servants of the English company in the
+several factories of the island of Amboina, they began on the 21st of
+February to examine John Wetheral, factor at Cambello, in Ceram. He
+acknowledged being at Amboina on new-year's-day, but declared he knew of
+no other consultation but about certain cloth belonging to the company,
+which lay spoiling in the factory, which they considered how best to get
+sold. The governor said he was not questioned about cloth, but treason;
+and protesting his innocence, he was dismissed for that day. Next day he
+was again brought in, and Captain Towerson was produced to confront and
+accuse him, as he had formerly emitted something in his confessions
+against him. But Towerson only desired him to speak the truth, and
+nothing but the truth, as God should put into his heart. Mr Towerson was
+then removed, and Mr Wetheral tortured by water, with threats of fire
+being applied if he did not confess. At length, they read over to him
+the confessions of the others, asking him leading questions from point
+to point, to all of which he answered affirmatively, to free himself
+from torture.
+
+John Powel, assistant to Mr Wetheral, was next called; but he proved
+that he had not been at Amboina since November; and being likewise
+spoken for by Jan Joost, his old acquaintance, was dismissed without
+torture. Thomas Ladbrook, servant to Wetheral and Powel at Cambello, was
+then brought in; but he, too, was speedily dismissed. Ephraim Ramsay,
+proving that he was not in Amboina on new-year's-day, and being likewise
+spoken for by Joost, was also dismissed, after hanging up some time
+ready for being tortured. Lastly, John Sadler, servant to William Griggs
+at Larika, was brought in for examination; and as he was not in Amboina
+on new-year's-day, he too was dismissed.
+
+On the 25th of February, all the prisoners, English, Portuguese, and
+Japanese, were brought into the great hall of the castle, and there
+solemnly condemned to die, except John Powel, Ephraim Ramsay, John
+Sadler, and Thomas Ladbrook. Next day, they were again brought into the
+hall, except Captain Towerson and Emanuel Thomson, to be prepared for
+death by the Dutch ministers. That same night, Colson and Collins were
+taken into the room where Emanuel Thomson lay, when they were told the
+governor was pleased to grant mercy to one of the three, and desired
+they might draw lots, when the free lot fell to Edward Collins, who was
+then carried to the chamber of the acquitted persons before-named. John
+Beaumont was soon after brought to the same place, and told that he owed
+his life to Peter Johnson, the Dutch merchant of Loho, and the
+secretary, who had begged his life. The condemned, who still remained in
+the hall, were afterwards joined by the Dutch ministers, and received
+the sacrament, protesting their innocence. Samuel Colson, on this
+occasion, said, in a loud voice, "O Lord, as I am innocent of this
+treason, do thou pardon all my other sins; and, if in the smallest
+degree guilty thereof may I never be a partaker in the joys of thy
+heavenly kingdom." To these words all the rest exclaimed, _Amen! for me,
+Amen! for me, good Lord!_
+
+After this, each, knowing whom he had accused, went one to another,
+craving forgiveness for their false accusations, as wrung from them by
+the pains or dread of torture. They all freely forgave their comrades;
+for none had been so falsely accused, but that he also had accused
+others with equal falseness. In particular, George Sharrock, who
+survived to relate the scene exhibited at this time, knelt down to John
+Clark, whom he had accused, as before related, earnestly begging
+forgiveness. Clark freely forgave him, saying, "How shall I look to be
+forgiven of God, if I do not forgive you? as I have myself falsely
+accused Captain Towerson and others!" After this, they spent the rest of
+this doleful night in prayer and psalm-singing, comforting each other
+the best they could. The Dutch who guarded them offered them wine, of
+which they desired them to drink heartily, to drive away sorrow, as is
+the custom of their country in like situations, but this the English
+refused.
+
+Next morning, the 27th February, William Webber was again called before
+the fiscal, and offered his life if he would produce the letter and
+postscript he confessed to have received from John Clark, which he could
+not do, as it never had existed: Yet, at last, they pardoned him, and
+sent him to the rest of those who were freed, and Sharrock with him,
+whom they also pardoned. That morning, Emanuel Thomson, learning that
+John Beaumont was pardoned, contrived to have him allowed to visit him,
+which was allowed with much difficulty. Beaumont found him in a most
+miserable condition, the wounds or sores occasioned by the torture bound
+up, but the blood and matter issuing through the bandages. Taking Mr
+Beaumont by the hand, he conjured him, when he came to England, to offer
+his duty to the Honourable Company, and others of his friends whom he
+named, and to assure them he died innocent, as was well known to
+Beaumont.
+
+It is needless to dwell upon the minute circumstances of the catastrophe
+of this bloody tragedy: Suffice it to say, that ten Englishmen, one
+Portuguese, and eleven Japanese, were publicly executed; of whom the
+following is a list:
+
+   _English._
+
+   Capt. Gabriel Towerson, agent for the English at Amboina.
+   Samuel Colson, factor at Hitto.
+   Emanuel Thomson, assistant at Amboina.
+   Timothy Johnson, assistant at the same place.
+   John Wetheral, assistant at Cambello.
+   John Clark, assistant at Hitto.
+
+   William Griggs, factor at Larika.
+   John Fardo, steward of the factory at Amboina.
+   Abel Price, surgeon to that factory.
+   Robert Brown, tailor.
+
+The only Portuguese was Augustine Perez, born in Bengal, who was
+superintendant of the slaves in the employment of the English at
+Amboina.
+
+   _Japanese_.
+   Hititso, Tsiosa, and Sinsa, natives of Firando.
+   Sidney Migial, Pedro Congie, Thomas Corea, from Nangasaki.
+   Quinandaya, a native of Coaets.
+   Tsabinda, a native of Tsoncketgo.
+   Zanchae, a native of Fisien.
+
+Besides these, there were two other Japanese tortured, who both
+confessed a participation in the pretended plot, but were not executed,
+or even condemned, for reasons which the surviving English did not
+learn. The executions were all by cutting off the heads of the condemned
+with a scymitar; and the Dutch prepared a black velvet pall for Captain
+Towerson's body to fall upon, which they afterwards had the effrontery
+to charge in account against the English East India Company.
+
+
+SECTION XV.
+
+OBSERVATIONS DURING A RESIDENCE IN TISLAND OF CHUSAN, IN 1701, BY DOCTOR
+JAMES CUNNINGHAM; WITH SOME EARLY NOTICES RESPECTING CHINA.[318]
+
+Among the early voyages of the English to the East Indies, none have
+been preserved that were made to China, nor have we been able to
+discover any satisfactory account of the commencement of the trade of
+our East India Company with that distant country, now said to be by far
+the most profitable branch of the exclusive commerce. In the _Annals of
+the Company_,[319] several references are made to the China trade, but
+more in the nature of notices or memoranda for the purpose of after
+investigation, than as conveying any actual information on the subject.
+In this singular paucity of materials, we are reduced to the following
+short "Observations and Remarks, by Doctor James Cunningham, made during
+his Residence as Physician to the English Factory at the Island of
+Chusan, on the Coast of China." Doctor Cunningham is stated by Harris to
+have been a fellow of the Royal Society, distinguished by his natural
+talents and acquired accomplishments, well versed in ancient and modern
+learning, and to have diligently used these advantages in making
+judicious remarks on the places where he resided in the service of the
+Company. Yet all that has been recorded by Harris of these remarks, give
+only a very imperfect account of Chusan and of China. This short article
+consists of extracts from two letters written by Cunningham from Chusan,
+and a brief supplement by Harris respecting two unfortunate factories at
+Pulo Condore and Pulo Laut.--E.
+
+[Footnote 318: Harris. I. 852.]
+
+[Footnote 319: Annals of the E.I. Co. vol. II. and III. _passim_.]
+
+Sec.1. _Voyage to Chusan, and short Notices of that Island_.[320]
+
+In my last letter, from the island of Borneo, I gave you an account of
+our arrival at that island on the 17th July. We only remained there two
+days, as the season of the year was already far advanced, and made the
+best of our way from thence through the Straits of Banda,[321] with
+favourable winds and weather. We got upon the coast of China on the 13th
+August, when we had variable winds, which carried us abreast of
+_Emoy_[322] by the 19th following. The wind then set in fresh at N.E. so
+that we were in great fear of losing our passage, and were now obliged
+to beat up all the way against both wind and current; yet the weather
+remained so favourable that we were never obliged to hand our top-sails,
+otherwise we must have lost more way in a single day than we could have
+recovered in eight. On the 31st August we came to anchor under the
+_Crocodile islands_,[323] both for shelter from the bad weather, usual
+on this coast at new and full-moon, which has been fatal to many ships,
+and also to procure fresh water, now scarce with us, as we had not
+recruited our store since leaving the Cape of Good Hope. These are three
+small islands in lat. 26 deg. N. about six leagues from the river of
+_Hokien_, [Fo-kien] on two of which we found very good water, with a
+convenient landing-place on the S.W. side of the innermost island. By
+the assistance of some Chinese fishers, we procured also some fresh
+provisions from the main land, not thinking it safe to venture there
+ourselves, lest we may have been brought into trouble by the governor of
+that part of the country. While here, on the 5th September, we had a
+sudden short shift of the monsoon from the S.W. blowing with great fury;
+which was also experienced by other vessels then coming on the coast of
+China. We again put to sea on the 18th September, turning to windward
+night and day on the outside of all the islands, which are very numerous
+all along this coast, but with which we were unacquainted after passing
+beyond _Emoy_. Besides, the hydrography of this coast is hitherto so
+very imperfect, that we could not trust in any degree to our draughts,
+owing to which our navigation was both difficult and dangerous.
+
+[Footnote 320: From a letter to a member of the Royal Society, dated in
+September, 1701.--Harris.]
+
+[Footnote 321: This must have been the straits of Macasser, as Banda is
+far out of the way between Borneo and China.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 322: Emoy or Amoy, was on the coast of China, opposite to the
+island of Formosa, and appears, from the Annals, to have been the first
+port frequented by the ships of the India Company for the Chinese
+trade.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 323: The islands of Pe-la-yang are, in the indicated latitude,
+off the estuary of the principal river of the province of Fo-kien.--E.]
+
+On the 1st October, we got into the latitude of 30 deg. N. where we came to
+anchor near the land, and found our way by boat to _Chusan_,[324] about
+twelve leagues within the islands, whence we got a pilot, who brought
+our ship safely to that place on the 11th of the month. The Chinese
+government have granted us a settlement on that island, with the liberty
+of trade; but do not allow us to go up to Ning-po,[325] which is six or
+eight hours sail to the westwards, all the way among islands, of which
+this of Chusan is the largest, being eight or nine leagues from E. to W.
+and four or five from N. to S.
+
+[Footnote 324: Tcheou-chan, an island about twenty English miles in
+length from E. to W. in lat. 30 deg. 23' N. long. 121 deg. 43' E. off the
+estuary of Ning-po river, in the province of Che-kiang, is obviously the
+Chusan of the text--E.]
+
+[Footnote 325: The city of Ning-po stands at the head of a bay,
+stretching from the S. side of the estuary of the river of the same
+name, in lat. 30 deg. 10' N. long. 121 deg. E. It appears, from the Annals,
+that the English had been excluded from trading at Canton, by the
+influence of the Portuguese in Macao.--E.]
+
+About three leagues from the point of land named _Liampo_ by the
+Portuguese, and _Khi-tu_ by the Chinese, there is a very safe and
+convenient harbour at the west end of this island, where the ships ride
+within call of the factory, which stands close to the shore in a low
+flat valley, having near two hundred houses built around for the benefit
+of trade. The town of Chusan, of which the houses are very mean, is
+about three quarters of a mile farther from the shore, and is surrounded
+by a fine stone wall, flanked at irregular distances by twenty-two
+square bastions or towers; and has four great gates, on which a few old
+iron guns are planted, seldom or never used. The _chumpeen_, or governor
+of the island, resides here, and the town contains about three or four
+thousand beggarly inhabitants, mostly soldiers and fishers; for, as the
+trade of this island has only been granted of late, it has not hitherto
+attracted any considerable merchants.
+
+This island abounds in all sorts of provisions, as cows, buffaloes,
+deer, hogs, both wild and tame, geese, ducks, poultry, rice, wheat,
+calavanccs, cole-worts, turnips, carrots, potatoes, beets, spinach, and
+so forth. It has, however, no merchandise, except what comes from
+Ning-po, Stan-chew,[326] Nankin, and other inland towns and cities. Some
+of these I hope to see, when I have acquired a little of the Chinese
+language. Tea grows here in great plenty on the tops of the hills, but
+is not so much esteemed as that which grows on more mountainous islands.
+Although tolerably populous, this island is far from being what it was
+in the time of Father Martini, who describes it under the name of
+_Cheu-xan_. The superstitious pilgrimages mentioned by him, must refer
+to the island of Pou-to,[327] which is nine leagues from this place, and
+to another island three miles to the eastwards, to which the emperor
+proposes coming to worship at a pagoda greatly renowned for its
+sanctity, in the ensuing month of May, being his birth-day, and the
+fortieth year of his age. One of his bonzes is already come there, to
+get all things in order.
+
+[Footnote 326: Probably Hang-tcheon, a city about forty miles W. from
+Ning-po.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 327: Pou-teou, is directly E. from the eastern end of
+Tcheou-chan.--E.]
+
+Sec.2. _Ancient and modern State of the Country, and of the coming of the
+English to reside there.[328]_
+
+In my former letter, I informed you that the emperor designed to have
+come to worship at Pou-to in May last, being the fortieth year of his
+age, but I ought to have said of his reign. After every thing was
+prepared for his reception, he was dissuaded from his purpose by some of
+his mandarins, who made him believe that the thunder at that place was
+very dangerous. This Pou-to is a small island, only about five leagues
+round, and at the east end of Chusan. It has been famous for the space
+of eleven hundred years, for the superstitious pilgrimages made to it,
+and is only inhabited by bonzes to the number of three thousand, all of
+the sect of _Heshang,_ or unmarried bonzes, who live a Pythagorean life.
+They have built four hundred pagodas, two of which are considerable for
+their size and splendour, and were lately covered with green and yellow
+tiles, brought from the emperor's palace at Nankin. They are adorned
+within by stately idols, finely carved and gilded, the chief of these
+being an idol named _Quonem._ To-these two pagodas there are two chief
+priests, who govern all the rest. They have many walks and avenues cut
+in different directions through the island, some of which are paved with
+flag-stones, and overshaded by trees planted on both sides. The
+dwellings of the bonzes are the best I have seen in these parts, all of
+which are maintained by charitable donations. All the Chinese junks
+which sail from Ning-po and Chusan touch at Pou-to, both outwards and
+homewards-bound, making offerings for the safety of their voyages. There
+is another island named _Kim-Tong,_[329] five leagues from hence, on the
+way towards Ning-po, where a great many mandarins are said to live in
+retirement, after having given up their employments. On that island
+there are said to be silver mines, but prohibited from being opened. The
+rest of the circumjacent islands are either desert, or very meanly
+inhabited, but all of them abound in deer.
+
+[Footnote 328: The sequel of these observations is said by Harris to
+have been taken from another letter to the same correspondent with the
+former, and dated in November, 1701; but, from circumstances in the
+text, it would appear to have been written in 1702.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 329: Probably that named Silver-island in modern maps.--E.]
+
+It is not long since this island of Chusan began to be inhabited. Yet in
+the days of Father Martini, about fifty years ago, it was very populous
+for three or four years; at which time, in the fury of the Tartar
+conquest, it was laid entirely desolate, not even sparing the mulberry
+trees, which were then numerous, as they made a great deal of raw silk
+here. It continued in this desolate condition till about eighteen years
+ago, when the walls of the present town were built by the governor of
+_Ting-hai_, as a strong-hold for a garrison, in order to expel some
+pirates who had taken shelter on the island. As the island began to grow
+populous, a _chumpeen_ was sent to govern it for three years, to whom
+the late chumpeen succeeded, who continued till last April, and procured
+licence to open this port to strangers. On the last chumpeen being
+promoted to the government of _Tien-ching-wei_[330] near Pekin, he was
+succeeded by the present governor, who is son to the old chumpeen of
+Emoy. They have no arts or manufactures in this island, except lacquered
+ware; the particulars of which I cannot as yet send you. They have begun
+to plant mulberry-trees, in order to breed up silk-worms for the
+production of raw silk; and they gather and cure some tea, but chiefly
+for their own use.
+
+[Footnote 330: Probably that called Tien-sing in modern maps, on the
+river Pay, between Pekin and the sea.--E.]
+
+Sec.3. _Of the Manner of cultivating Tea in Chusan_.
+
+The three sorts of tea usually carried to England are all from the same
+plant, their difference being occasioned by the soils in which they
+grow, and the season of the year at which they are gathered. The
+_bohea_, or _vo-u-i_, so called from certain mountains in the province
+of _Token_,[331] where it is chiefly made, is the very bud, gathered in
+the beginning of March, and dried in the shade. The tea named _bing_ is
+the second growth, gathered in April, and _siriglo_ is the last growth,
+gathered in May and June; both of these being gently dried over the fire
+in _taches_ or pans. The tea shrub is an evergreen, being in flower from
+October to January, and the seed ripens in the September or October
+following, so that both flower and seed may be gathered at the same
+time; but for one fully ripened seed, an hundred are abortive. There are
+the two sorts of seeds mentioned by Father Le Compte, in his description
+of tea; and what be describes as a third sort, under the name of
+_slymie_ pease, consists merely of the young flower-buds, not yet open.
+The seed vessels of the tea tree are three-capsular, each capsule
+containing one nut or seed; and though often two or one of these only
+come to perfection, yet the vestiges of the rest may easily be
+discerned. It grows naturally in a dry gravelly soil on the sides of
+hills, without any cultivation, in several places of this island.
+
+[Footnote 331: Fo-kien is almost certainly here meant--E.]
+
+Le Compte is mistaken in saying that the Chinese are ignorant of the art
+of grafting; for I nave seen many of his paradoxical tallow-trees
+ingrafted here, besides trees of other sorts. When they ingraft, they do
+not slit the stock as we do, but slice off the outside of the stock, to
+which they apply the graft, which is cut sloping on one side, to
+correspond with the slice on the stock, bringing the bark of the slice
+up on the outside of the graft, after which the whole is covered up with
+mud and straw, exactly as we do. The commentator on Magalhen seems
+doubtful as to the length of the Chinese _che_ or cubit. At this island
+they have two sorts, one measuring thirteen inches and seven-tenths
+English, which, is commonly used by merchants; the other is only eleven
+inches, being used by carpenters, and also in geographical measures.
+Though Father Martini is censured by Magalhen for spelling a great many
+Chinese words with _ng_, which the Portuguese and others express with
+_in_, yet his way is more agreeable to our English pronunciation and
+orthography; only the g may be left out in Pekin, Nankin, and some
+others.
+
+Having made enquiry about what is mentioned by Father Martini of sowing
+their _fields_ at _Van-cheu_ with oyster-shells, to make new ones grow,
+I was told, that after they have taken out the oysters, they sprinkle
+the empty shells with urine, and throw them into the water, by which
+means there grow new oysters on the old shells.[332] Martini says he
+could never find a Latin name for the _Tula Mogorin_ of the Portuguese;
+but I am sure it is the same with the _Syringa arabica, flore pleno
+albo_, of Parkinson. Martini also says that the _kieu-yeu_, or
+tallow-tree, bears a white flower, like that of the cherry-tree: But all
+that I have seen here bear spikes of small yellow flowers, like the
+_julus_ of the _Salix_. The bean-broth, or mandarin-broth, so frequently
+mentioned in the Dutch embassy, and by other authors, is only an
+emulsion made of the seeds of _sesamum_ with hot water.
+
+[Footnote 332: This strange story may possibly be thus explained. At
+certain seasons, numerous minute oysters may be seen sticking to the
+shells of the old ones; and the Chinese may have thrown the emptied
+shells into the sea, in the highly probable expectation of these minute
+oysters continuing to live and grow. The circumstances in the text are
+absurd additions, either from ignorance or imposition.--E.]
+
+The chief employments of the people here are fishing and agriculture. In
+fishing, they use several sorts of nets and lines as we do; but, as
+there are great banks of mud in some places, the fishermen have
+contrived a small frame, three or four feet long, not much larger than a
+hen-trough, and a little elevated at each end, to enable them to go more
+easily on these mud banks. Resting with one knee on the middle of one of
+these frames, and leaning his arms on a cross stick raised breast high,
+he uses the other foot on the mud to push the frame and himself
+forwards.
+
+In their agricultural operations, all their fields on which any thing is
+to be cultivated, whether high or low, are formed into such plots or
+beds as may admit of retaining water over them when the cultivator
+thinks proper. The lands are tilled by ploughs drawn by one cow or
+buffalo; and when it is intended to sow rice, the soil is remarkably
+well prepared and cleared from all weeds, after which it is moistened
+into the state of a pulp, and smoothed by a frame drawn across, when the
+rice is sown very thick, and covered over with water, only to the height
+of two or three inches. When the seedling plants are six or eight inches
+long, they are all pulled up, and transplanted in straight lines into
+other fields, which are overflowed with water; and, when weeds grow up,
+they destroy them by covering them up in the interstices between the
+rows of rice, turning the mud over them with their hands. When they are
+to sow wheat, barley, pulse, or other grain, they grub up the surface of
+the ground superficially, earth, grass, and rook, and mixing this with
+some straw, burn all together. This earth, being sifted fine, they mix
+with the seed, which they sow in holes made in straight lines, so that
+it grows in tufts or rows like the rice. The field is divided into
+regular beds, well harrowed both before and after the seed is sown,
+which makes them resemble gardens. The rice grounds are meliorated
+merely by letting water into them; but for the other grains, where the
+soil requires it, they use dung, night-soil, ashes, and the like. For
+watering their fields, they use the machine mentioned by Martini in the
+preface to his Atlas, being entirely constructed of wood, and the same
+in principle with the chain-pump.
+
+In order to procure salt, as all the shores are of mud instead of sand,
+they pare off in summer the superficial part of this mud, which has been
+overflowed by the sea-water, and lay it up in heaps, to be used in the
+following manner: Having first dried it in the sun, and rubbed it into a
+fine powder, they dig a pit, the bottom of which is covered with straw,
+and from the bottom a hollow cane leads through the side of the pit to a
+jar standing below the level of the bottom. They then fill the pit
+almost full of the dried salt mud, and pour on sea-water till it stands
+two or three inches above the top of the mud. This sea-water drains
+through the mud, carrying the salt along with it from the mud as well as
+its own, and runs out into the jar much-saturated with salt; which is
+afterwards procured by boiling.
+
+Sec.4. _Of the famous Medicinal Root, called Hu-tchu-u_.
+
+Having last year seen, in a newspaper, some account of a singular root,
+brought from China by Father Fontaney, I shall inform you that I have
+seen this root since my arrival at Chuaan. It is called _Hu-tchu-n_[333]
+by the Chinese, and they ascribe to it most wonderful virtues, such as
+prolonging life, and changing grey hair to black, by using its infusion
+by way of tea. It is held in such high estimation as to be sold at a
+great price, as I have been told, from ten tael up to a thousand, or
+even two thousand tael-for a single root; for the larger it is, so much
+the greater is its fancied value and efficacy: But the price is too high
+to allow me to try the experiment. You will find it mentioned in the
+_Medecina Sinica_ of Cleyer, No. 84; under the name of _He-xeu-ti_,
+according to the Portuguese orthography. It is also figured in the 27th
+table of the plants which Mr _Pettier_ had from me. The following is the
+story of its discovery, which I will not warrant for gospel.
+
+[Footnote 333: This is probably the ginseng, so famed for its fancied
+virtues.--E.]
+
+Once upon a time, a certain person went to gather simples among the
+mountains, and fell by some accident into a vale of which the sides were
+so steep that he was unable to get out again. In this situation, he had
+to look about for some means to support life, and discovered this root,
+of which he made trial, and found that it served him both as food and
+cloathing; for it preserved his body in such a temperature, that the
+injuries of the weather had no evil influence upon him during a
+residence of several hundred years. At length, by means of an
+earthquake, the mountains were rent, and he found a passage from the
+vale to his house, whence he had been so long absent. But so many
+alterations had taken place during his long absence, that nobody would
+believe his story; till, on consulting the annals of his family, they
+found that one of them had been lost at the time he mentioned, which
+confirmed the truth of his relation.--This is a fable, not even credited
+among the Chinese, invented merely to blazon forth the virtues of this
+wonderful root.
+
+Sec.5. _Removal of Dr Cunningham to Pulo Condore, with an Account of the
+Rise, Progress, and Ruin of that Factory_.[334]
+
+The English factory at Chusan was broken up in the year 1702, so that Dr
+Cunningham had very little time allowed him for making his proposed
+observations respecting China. From this place he removed to another new
+settlement at _Pulo Condore,_ in a small cluster of four or five
+islands, about fifteen leagues south of the west channel of the river of
+Camboja, usually called the Japanese river.[335] I am unable to say what
+were the advantages proposed from this factory; but, from the memoirs I
+have seen on the subject, this place seems to have been very ill chosen,
+and much worse managed. The person who had at this time the management
+and direction of the affairs belonging to the East India Company in this
+distant part of the world, was one Mr Katchpole, who, according to the
+usual custom of the Europeans in eastern India at this period, took into
+the service a certain number of Macassers or native soldiers, by whose
+assistance he soon constructed a small fort for the protection of the
+factory. So far as I can learn, the most indispensable necessaries of
+life, water, wood, and fish, were all that these islands ever afforded.
+
+[Footnote 334: This and the subsequent subdivision of the section are
+related historically by Harris.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 335: Pulo Condore is in lat. 8 deg. 45' N. long. 106 deg. 5' E. and
+the object of a factory at this place was evidently to endeavour to
+secure a portion of the trade of China, from which the English at this
+time were excluded by the arts of the Portuguese at Macao, as we learn
+from the Annals; as also to combine some trade with Siam, Camboja,
+Tsiompa, Cochin-China, and Tonquin.--E.]
+
+The Macassers are a brave, industrious, and faithful people, to such as
+deal fairly with them; and on this account are highly esteemed in the
+Eastern Indies, more especially by the Dutch. They are, however,
+daring, cruel, and revengeful, if once provoked. Mr Katchpole had
+contracted with these men to serve for three years, at the end of which
+period, if they pleased, they were to receive their wages and to depart:
+But he, though they strictly performed their part of the agreement,
+broke faith with them, keeping them beyond their time against their
+will. In addition to this great breach in morality, he added as
+notorious an error in politics; for, after provoking these men so
+egregiously by refusing to fulfil his engagement, he still confided to
+them the guard of his own person and the custody of the factory. This
+gave them ample opportunity of revenging the ill usage they had met
+with, and with that ferocity which is so natural to untutored
+barbarians. They rose in mutiny one night, and murdered Mr Katchpole,
+and all who were at the time along with him in the factory. A few, who
+happened to lodge on the outside of the fort, hearing the cries of their
+friends within during the massacre, fled from their beds to the
+sea-shore; where, by a singular interposition of Providence, they found
+a bark completely ready for sea, in which they embarked half naked, and
+put immediately to sea, just in time to escape the rage of the
+Macassers, who came in search of them to the shore, precisely when they
+had weighed anchor and pushed off to sea.
+
+Dr Cunningham was one of the number who escaped on this occasion. Their
+navigation was attended with excessive difficulty, being exposed at the
+same time to incredible fatigue, and to the utmost extremity of hunger
+and thirst: But at length, after a tedious and difficult course of an
+hundred leagues, in the most wretched condition, they reached a small
+creek in the dominions of the king of Johor, where they were received
+with kindness.
+
+Sec.6. _Some Account of the Factory at Pulo Laut, with the Overthrow of
+that Factory, and of the English Trade to Borneo_.
+
+A year or two after this ruin of the factory at Pulo Condore, the
+Company thought fit to order the establishment of a new factory on the
+coast of the great island of Borneo. On the south of that vast island,
+there is a small isle called Pulo Laut, having an excellent harbour. The
+country here is but thinly peopled, and yields nothing except rice; but,
+as it lies near the mouth of the great rivers which come from the pepper
+countries in the interior; it is extremely well situated for trade.
+Between this island and the great island of Borneo, there is a channel
+about two miles wide in most places, narrower in some and broader in
+others, and having from seven to five fathoms water the whole way
+through. On the coast of this channel there are several rising grounds
+fit for building on, and which were therefore extremely proper for the
+situation of a factory, which, it may be presumed, induced those who had
+the direction of the Company's affairs, to make choice of this place.
+
+One Captain Barry, who is said to have been a very ingenious gentleman,
+had the charge of establishing this new factory, in which he is reported
+to have acted with much skill and prudence. But he died before the works
+were completed; and the direction of the factory devolved upon Doctor
+Cunningham, who came to this place after the ruin of the factory at Pulo
+Condore. He is said to have given himself so entirely up to his studies,
+that he left the care of the Company's concerns too much to the people
+who were under him, who were unequal to the trust, and proved the ruin
+of the factory. Before the fort was half finished, these people began to
+insult the natives of the country; and, among other wanton acts of
+folly, they very imprudently chose to search one of the boats belonging
+to the king, which was carrying a female of rank down the river. This so
+provoked the Bornean sovereign that he determined upon the utter
+destruction of the English; for which purpose he collected his forces
+together, amounting to about three thousand resolute men, which he
+embarked in above an hundred proas, and sent them down to attack the
+factory and unfinished fort.
+
+There happened at this time to be two ships belonging to the Company in
+the river, besides two merchant vessels of inconsiderable force; and as
+Cunningham and his people had received advice of the preparations making
+against them, they left their factory, taking refuge aboard the ships,
+thinking themselves in greater security there than ashore. When all
+things were in readiness for the intended assault, the native armament
+came down the river in the night; and, while some landed and destroyed
+the factory and fortifications, others attacked the ships, which were
+fortunately prepared for their reception, the English having made fast
+nettings along both sides of their ships, about two fathoms high above
+the gunnels, to prevent the enemy from boarding, and were in readiness
+to use their blunderbusses and pikes, to prevent them from forcing their
+way to the decks.
+
+On seeing the approach of the proas towards the ships, the English plied
+their great guns, loaded with double, round, and partridge shot, and
+made great carnage among the Borneans, yet this did not deter them from
+pushing forwards and using their utmost endeavours to board. But, having
+got up to the gunnels, they were unable to get over the netting, and so
+were slaughtered with great ease by the English from the decks. Some of
+the assailants got in at the _head doors_ of one of the ships and killed
+a few of the English on the forecastle, but were soon overpowered and
+slain. Thus, after a long and sanguinary contest, the two large ships
+beat off the enemy with small loss; but the two little vessels were both
+burnt with most of their men, among whom was one Mynheer Hoogh Camber, a
+Dutch gentleman who had been ambassador of the king of Persia, and had
+fled from Batavia in one of these small vessels. Some say that the
+English killed above fifteen hundred of the assailants in two hours, for
+the heat of the assault continued during that space, besides many others
+wounded and maimed. But the English were under the necessity of
+abandoning the settlement at Pulo Laut.
+
+The Bornean king or rajah thought his revenge had gone far enough in
+driving the English from their factory: And, finding his revenue
+considerably diminished by the loss of trade with the English, he sent
+notice to such of them as traded to Johor, and other places in the
+neighbourhood of Borneo, that he would still admit them to trade in his
+dominions on the old footing, but would never allow them or any other
+nation to erect forts in his territories. Several English vessels have
+been there since to load pepper, and were civilly treated. The Dutch
+also sent a ship there from Batavia in the year 1712; but the natives
+refused to have any dealings with them.
+
+
+END OF THE NINTH VOLUME.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, Volume IX., by Robert Kerr
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOL. IX. ***
+
+***** This file should be named 13055.txt or 13055.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/0/5/13055/
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/old/13055.zip b/old/13055.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..937ee9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13055.zip